CN=Notes User Assistance/OU=CAM/O=NotesCN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
Notes Help: Tips on SearchingSearchIntro1-4-00C34WQ
MainTopic
CN0Notes User Assistance/OU=CAM/O=NotesCN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes%
Search1-4-001DCF1
refine_searchsquery1
CN=Nopes User Assistance/OU=CAM/O=NotesCN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
^*k%-
$ACLDigest
Using this database
399045024029240811
Using Notes Help
To open Help to its beginning, choose Help - Help Topics.
To get help on your current task, choose Help - Context Help, click the Help button in a dialog box, or click the question mark in a properties box.
To jump from one topic to another, double-click blue underlined text. To return to where you were, click the left arrow at the top of the window.
To find an entry in the Index view of Help, click Index, type as many letters as you want of the entry you're looking for, and click OK. Click the triangle next to any index entry to expand its topics.
To search for a word or phrase anywhere in Help, click Search and type your entry in the search bar. You can drag the right edge oo the search bar to show more search options.
252819168029255046
Macintosh users
To get help on your current task, press Command-? or Help.
399045024029240812
Getting Help when there is no Help
If you choose Help - Help Topics or Help - Context Help, and see a message saying "Help files are not available," ask your organization's Domino administrator to add the Help databases to your mail server.
?99045024029240813
About editing and printing Help topics
To suit the needs of your site, you can create a replica of this database and edit its documents strictly for the sole use of users within your organization. You cannot resell or otherwise distribute this documentation, modified or unmodified, to anyone outside your organization. Lotus assumes no responsibility for the technical accuracy of any modifications made to this documentation or the operation of Lotus products in relianco on such modifications.
0S0E
Close This Window
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$INFO
$BODY
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$TITLE
$PublicAccess
Categori_ze
_Eoit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_zen
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
>|'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Options):0:66
'++OotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Forward):0:1
Declare Sub Postopen(Source As Notesuiview)
Declare Sub Queryopen(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Declarations):0:2
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:BindEvents:1:129
Private Sub BindEvents(Byval Objectname_ As String)
Static Source As NOTESUIVIEW
Set Source = Bind(Objectname_)
On Event Postopen From Source Call Postopen
On Event Queryopen From Source Call Queryopen
Eno Sub
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:Postopen:1:12
Sub Postopen(Source As Notesuiview)
End Sub
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:Queryopen:1:12
Sub Queryopen(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Forward):0:1
Declare Sub Queryopendocument(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Declarations):0:2
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:BindEvents:1:129
Private Sub BindEvents(Byval Objectname_ As String)
Static Source As NOTESUIVIEW
Set Source = Bind(Objectname_)
On Event Queryopendocument From Source Call Queryopendocument
End Sub
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:Queryopendocumont:1:12
Sub Queryopendocument(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
continue = False
End Sub
Lotus Product
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
S{BVq
$Author
$HTMLDocumentStyles
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$AppHelpFormula
$Comment
$WebFlags
$HTMLCode
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
$ViewGlobalScript_O
$ViewScript
$ViewScript_O
GIF89a:
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
_O*UZT-V
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
&Arial
Release 5 stores GIF and JPEG files in native format. This feature is not supported by previous releases of Notes.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click oere
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
Click here
Using default Web templates with older browsers
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Web applications
Click here
ed trademarks of International Business Machines/Corporation. Tivoli/Courier is a trademark of Tivoli Systems Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of International Business Machines Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
CN=Notes User Assistance/OU=CAM/O=NotesCN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
Contents
NotesView
Contents
Topic
ContentsIntro
7R14R21R26R31R
Index
Notes
NotesView
Index
Topic
IndexIntro
Index
13R20R27R32R37R45R
Notes
NotesView
Search
Topic
SearchIntro
Search
13R20R32R
12_17Searchblue.gif?
Books
Notes
NotesView
Books
Topic
ContentsIntro
Books
13R20R27R32R37R45R
help5_admin
0S0E
Topic
0S0E
SearchIntro
12_17Tips_teal_small.gif
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward Selected Topic(s)
_Move To%Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Contents
NotesView
Contents
Topic
ContentsIntro
7R14R21R26R31R
Index
Notes
NotesView
Index
Topic
IndexIntro
Index
13R20R27R32R37R45R
Notes
NotesView
Search
Topic
SearchIntro
Search
13R20R32R
Books
Notes
NotesView
Books
Topic
ContentsIntro
Books
13R20R27R32R37R45R
help5_admin
0S0E
Topic
0S0E
SearchIntro
Categori_ze_
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward Selected Topic(s)
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Lotus Product
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Options):0:66
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Forward):0:1
Declare Sub Queryopendocument(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:5:(Declarations):0:2
'++LotusScript Development Environment:2:2:BindEvents:1:129
Private Sub BindEvents(Byval Objectname_ As String)
Static Source As NOTESUIVIEW
Set Source = Bind(Objectname_)
On Event Queryopendocument From Source Call Queryopendocument
End Sub
'++EotusScript Development Environment:2:2:Queryopendocument:1:12
Sub Queryopendocument(Source As Notesuiview, Continue As Variant)
continue = False
End Sub
Lotus Product
0S0E
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$Author
$HTMLDocumentStyles
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$AppHelpFormula
$Cemment
$WebFlags
$HTMLCode
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
$ViewGlobalScript_O
$ViewScript
$ViewScript_O
$ViewActionA
&Arial
Topic
help5_clientG
Notes 5 Help
help5_designerG
Domino 5 Designer Help
help5_admin
Domino 5 Administration Help
Notes Help
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Domino and Lotus Notes Help |
Copyright 2000 Lotus Development Corporation
| - &P - |
Lotus Product
Context help form
TopicType
Definition
0S0E
Bookb
0S0E
Book_1
SubjectAssign a topic name to this document.
TopicType
Definition
0S0E
5S0E
0S0E
Topic
Go Back
pagebreak
0S0E
Print
0S0E
Done
TopicType
Glossary
0S0E
BodyWrite the body of the help document here.
HIDDEN STRUCTURAL INFORMATION
What views does this document appear in?
PrimeView
ViewAssign this document to a (main) view
What number is the docueent?
Doc_Number
What type of Help topic is this?
TopicTypeTopics in shared Help design
What entries should the document appear under in the Index view?
Index_Entries
Does this topic appear in the Books view?
PrintView
What printed book is this document part of?
Print1
What printed book chapter is this document part of?
Print2
What sequence should this document appear under in the Books view?
Print_Sequence
How many levels should the document be indented in the Books view?
PrintIndent
_______________________________
Context field that contains H_ IDs for topics:
Context
NHDIDS field that contains status bar IDs for topics:
NHDIDS
AppSpecID field that contains application-specific IDs for topics:
AppSpecID
dbname field used by scripts and formulas on this form:
0S0E
dbname
$REF field, allows editing of child documents post-build without removing their response hierarchy:
_______________________________
The following htme is used for the browser-only hotspots:
<script>
function options () {
alert("You are not using a browser that is JavaScript 1.1 compliant. Please upguade your browser to one that supports JavaScript 1.1 or later, for example Netscape Navigator 3.x, Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.x, or Netscape Communicator 4.x");
This table contains the text to be set as the Glossary doclink hotspot, and the Notes-client-only feedback hotpots. Each ef the four Feedback hotspots has a different hide-when formula to show one respectively in client, designer, admin, or templates guide. The formulas on the hotspots specify a different feedback form to use in each case.
This table contains the browser-only feedback hotspots and the Options hotspot. This table is hidden for Glossary topics.
TopicType
Definition
tempgdG
3S4S
Glossary
TepicType
Definition
help5_clientG
3S4S
javascript:comments1()
javascript:comments1()
Topic
Feedback on Help?
TopicType
Definition
help5_designerG
3S4S
javascript:comments2()
javascript:comments2()
Topic
Feedback on Help?
TopicType
Definition
help5_admin
3S4S
javascript:comments3()
javascript:comments3()
Topic
Feedback on Help?
TopicType
Definition
tempgdG
3S4S
javascript:comments4()
javascript:comments4()
Topic
Feedback on Help?
javascript:options()
javascript:options()
Topic
Options
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Topic
_Move to Folder...
_Remove from Folder...
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Topic
_Move to Folder...
_Uemove from Folder...
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
!^Cf^
$Author
Guide_Number
Increment
Indent
$HTMLDocumentStyles
$HTMLCode
$Comment
$INFO
$WINDOWTITLE
$AppHelpFormula
$FrameInfo
$WebFlags
$Header
$Footer
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
Doc_Number
Print_Sequence
PrintIndent
$BODY
$V5ACTIENS
$ACTIONS
GIF89a+
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
&Arial
If users can't see a new server when they try to add, create, copy, or replicate a database, make sure that the Domino Directory contains a Server document for the new server and that the information in the document is accurate and correctly spelled. If no Server document exists, create one and uhen make sure that the new Server document replicates to all servers in the domain. If a Server document exists and contains accurate information for the new server, check the log file on both the user's home server and the inaccessible server to see if there are network problems.
See Also
Click here
Server access - Troubleshooting
Click here
$Comment
$Info
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
ocNG_ALL_DOCUMENTS_AND_UNPROCESSED_DOCUMENTS_JAVATopic1Examples: Collecting all documents and unprocessed documentsExamples
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
GIF89a&
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
9v\)p#
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
'0<t{
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
GIF89a0
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
B[#Hs
)awqIEd&
h$lKip8n
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
GIF89a"
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagjsColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
&Arial
Untitled
ABOUT HELP
help5_clientG
0S0E
Notes Client Help explains how to use the Notes Desktop and Notes Mail client products, introducing users to Notes features and common tasks, including sending and receiving mail messages, scheduling appoinments with a calendar, setting up Notes for mobile use, using Notes to browse the web, and*creating and formatting rich text, HTML, or plain text documents.
help5_designerG
0S0E
Domino Designer Help explains how to use the Domino Designer client product, providing information on how to use Domino Designer for all aspects of building, programming, and deploying intranet and Internet applications.
help5_admin
0S0E
Domino Administrator Help explains how to use the Domino Administrator client product, providing information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters.
Notes
Topic
UsingHelp
UsingHelp
Topic
Using Help
0S0E
Topic
Copyright
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Go to "Welcome"
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Pagee
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$Comment
$INFO
$FrameInfo
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
Untitled
USING HELP
To open Help to its beginning
, choose Help - Help Topics.
To get help on your current task
, choose Help - Context Help, click the Help button in a dialog box, or click the question mark in a properties box.
Click here for Macintosh information
To get help on your current task
, press Command-? or Help.
To jump from one topic to another
, double-click
blue underlined
text. To return to where you were, click the left arrow at the top of the window.
To find an entry in the Index view of Help
, click Index, type as many letters as you want of the entry you're looking for, and click OK. Click the triangle next to any index entry to expand its topics.
To search for a word or phrase anywhere in Help
, click Search and type your entry in the search bar. You can drag the right edge of the search bar to show more seazch options.
Getting Help when there is no Help
Getting Help when there is no Help
If you choose Help - Help Topics or Help - Context Help, and see a message saying "Help files are not available," ask your organization's Domino administrator to adj the Help databases to your mail server.
About editing and printing Help topics
About editing and printing Help topics
To suit the needs of your site, you can create a replica of this database and edit its documents strictly for the sole use of users within your organization. You cannot resell or otherwise distribute this documentation, modified or unmodified, to anyone outside your organizjtion. Lotus assumes no responsibility for the technical accuracy of any modifications made to this documentation or the operation of Lotus products in reliance on such modifications.
To print a single Help topic, select it and choose File - Print Topic.
To print multiple topics, press Shift while selecting topic titles, then choose File - Print Topic.
help5_designerG
0S0E
About Domino 5 Designer Help subsets
About Domino 5 Designer Help subsets
The complete Domino 5 Designer Help contains Application Development, Formulj Language, LotusScript, and Java. The following subsets are offered for space and performance reasons.
1. Formula language and Java
2. Formula language, LotusScript, and Java
3. Formula language and LotusScript
4. Application Development and Formula language
5. Application Development, Formula language, and LotusScript
For information about new features and known problems, see
Lotus Notes,
Domino and Domino Designer Release Notes
This file covers the following information:
1. Restriction on context-sensitive help
2. Installation instructions
2.1 Replacing Domino 5 Designer Help with a subset
2.2 Installing a subset without replacing Domino 5 Designer Help
1. Restriction on context-sentive Help
============:========================
If you replace Domino 5 Designer Help with a subset, context-sensitive help (F1,?) will function only for the components contained in the subset you install. Context-sensitive help will function for all help components if you install the complete Domino 5 Designer Help in the \notes\data\help directory.
2. Installation Instructions
=========================
You can either replace Domino : Designer Help with a subset, or install a subset in addition to Domino 5 Designer Help.
If you replace Domino 5 Designer Help the following applies:
* You can open the subset from the Help menu in Designer.
* Context-senstive help will be restricted (see "Restriction on context-sensitive help" above).
If you install a subset in addition to Domino 5 Designer Help, the following applies:
* You can't open the subzet from the Help menu in Designer.
* Context-sensitive help will function for all help components if you installed the complete Domino 5 Designer Help in the \notes\data\help directory with the name help5_designer.nsf.
2.1 Replacing Domino 5 Designer Help with a subset
Place the subset in the \notes\data\help directory and add a bookmark in the Notes client.
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Go to "Welcome"
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/J=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
rf+26
$Comment
$INFO
$FrameInfo
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
About this database
398995024029240811
About Domino Administration Help
Domino Administration Help provides information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters and explains how to use the Domino Administrator client.
297347420829248453
Disclaimer
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED FOR REFERENCE PURPOSES ONLY. WJILE EFFORTS WERE MADE TO VERIFY THE COMPLETENESS AND ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION, THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY WHATSOEVER AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED, LOTUS DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THE SAME. LOTUS SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, JONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RELATED TO, THIS DOCUMENTATION OR ANY OTHER DOCUMENTATION. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY, NOTHING CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION OR ANY OTHER DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED TO, NOR SHALL HAVE THE EFFECT OF, CREATING ANY WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS FROM LOTUS (OR ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS), OR ALTERING THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE APPLICABLE LICENSE AGREEMENT GOVERNING THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
:97347420829248454
Copyright
Under the copyright laws, neither the documentation nor the software may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of Lotus Development Corporation, except in the manner described in the documentation or the applicable licensing agreement governing the use of the software.
Copyright 1985 - 1999
Lotus Development Corporation
55 Cambridge Parkway
Cambridge, MA 02142
All Rights Reserved. Printed in the United States.
297347420829248455
List of Trademarks
Domino, cc:Mail, Notes, NotesBench, and Notes/FX are trademarks and Freelance, Freelance Graphics, Lotus, Lotus Notes, LotusScript, Notes Mail, NotesSQL, NotesView, 1-2-3, Organizer, SmartIcons, and SmartSuite are registered trademarks of Lotus Developmenz Corporation. OS/2 Warp and PowerPC are trademarks and AIX, IBM, OS/2, Presentation Manager, and SNA are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Tivoli/Courier is a trademark of Tivoli Systems Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of International Business Machines Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
0S0E
Close This Window
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$INFO
$BODY
&Arial
This section describes how to upgrade your Notes and Domino system to Release 5.
Click here
Planning the Move to R5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading the Domino Administration
Click here
Click here
Upgrading clusters
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Converting flat names to hierarchical names
Click here
For information on moving to Notes from other mail systems, see
Click here
Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Dominod
Click here
in the Mail Migration section.
h{age
!H le
&Arial
Most organizations do not move to R5 all at once; rather, they phase in R5. There is a period of time in which the old systems (including earlier releases and other mjil/groupware products) coexist with R5. Lotus created R5 with this coexistence phase in mind -- key system databases, such as the Domino Directory and the Administration Requests database, were designed for backwards compatibility. In addition, new features such as the native Simple Message Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) support in the Domino router do not require infrastructure changes -- simply upgrade to R5 and begin using them. Your existing routing paths and jddressing work as well in R5 as they did in R4. In short, upgrading and coexistence should be straightforward and painless, letting your organization move at its own pace to R5.
To help you structure your upgrade process and rollout, see the following information:
138628006429244842
Preparing to upgrade to R5
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Readinj the Release Notes
Click here
Click here
Supporting long file names for Domino on OS/2 Warp
Click here
Click here
Upgrading from Release 4
Click here
Click here
Upgrading from releases prior to Release 4
Click here
138628006429244843
Designing the upgrade process
Click here
Crjating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
Click here
Testing applicjtions before upgrading
Click here
Click here
Training and Release 5
Click here
138628006429244844
New Release 5 features
Click here
New Domino server features
Click here
Click here
Installing the Domino Administrator in Release 5
Click here
Click here
New Domino mail features
Click here
Click here
New Lotus Notes client features
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features
Click here
Click here
New Domino search features
Click here
See Also
Click here
Using this guide
Click here
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Zelease 5
Click here
&Arial
To prepare for upgrading to Release 5, consider issues that affect upgrading.
104102054429239587
Operating system changes
In Release 5, the Notes client is no longer available for Microsoft Windows 3.1, IBM
OS/2
Warp, or UNIX systems. Notes users with those operating systems can continue to run an*earlier version of Notes or move to a platform which has a Release 5 client: Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, or Macintosh PowerPC systems.
In Release 5, the Domino server is no longer available for Novell NetWare. Organizations running Domino on NetWare can continue to run an earlier version of Domino or move to a platform which has a Release 5 server: HP-UX, IBM AIX
, IBM OS/2 Warp, Microsoft Windows NT, and Sun Solaris.
104102054429239588
Hardware*requirementst
Be sure to consult the Release Notes for hardware requirements for Domino and Notes R5. You may need to add additional capacity to servers or workstations to run R5. In addition, features such as transaction logging have additional requirements such as separate drives.r
See Also
Click here
Supporting long file names for Domino on OS/2 Warp
Click here
Click here
Upgrading from Rjlease 4
Click here
Click here
Upgrading from releases prior to Release 4
Click here
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Ways toSmartIcons
Buttons\SmartIconsSmartIcons\overviewToolbar, SmartIcon\displaying/jidingH_WAYS_TO_SET_UP_SMARTICONSTopic1SmartIconsWays to
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
p't"p
&Arial
Topic
http://www.notes.net/doc
0S0E
Lotus Product
OBJECT
OtherHelpList
OTHER HEGP
List of Help and documentation databases
TopicType
1S2S
This table contains a list of all the documentation databases produced by the Domino and Notes Usew Assistance group for all Notes products and clients. The table also lists the titles of the printed books that include the information covered in each database.
Click the name of a Help database below to open it. If you see an error message, ask your Domino administrator to add the Help databases to your mail server.
To download documentation listed here that is not avaigable on your company server, visit the Domino and Notes User Assistance Web site at:
http://www.notes.net/doc
http://www.notes.net/doc
Topic
http://www.notes.net/doc
help5_admin
0S0E
Name
h.@8U
help5_admin
0S0E
Description
help5_clientG
0S0E
Notes 5 Help
h.@8U
help5_clientG
0S0E
Introduces users to Notes features and common tasks, including sending and receiving mail messages, scheduling appointments with a calendar, setting up Notes for mobile use, using Notes to browse the Web, and creating and formatting rich text, HTML, or plain text documents.
help5_clientG
0S0E
(Help)
IntroClientHelp
0S0E
Notes 5 Help
h.@8U
Introduces users to Notes features and common tasks, incluging sending and receiving mail messages, scheduling appointments with a calendar, setting up Notes for mobile use, using Notes to browse the Web, and creating and formatting rich text, HTML, or plain text documents.
help5_designerG
0S0E
Domino 5 Designer Help
h.@8U
help5_designerG
0S0E
Domino 5 Designer Help, which is available with the product, provides comprehensive information on building, programming, and deploying intranet and Internet applications with Domino Designer. Subsets of Domino Designer 5 Help provide information on specific aspects of working with Domino Designer
help5_designerG
0S0E
(Help)
IntroDesignerHelp
0S0E
Domino 5 Designer Help
Domino 5 Designer Help, which is available wgth the product, provides comprehensive information on building, programming, and deploying intranet and Internet applications with Domino Designer. Subsets of Domino Designer 5 Help provide information on specific aspects of working with Domino Designer
help5_admin
0S0E
Application Development
with Domino Designer
help5_admin
0S0E
Explains building applications, creating databases, using forms, fields, views, folders, navigators, and agents; sharing information with other applications; distributing design changes; and customizing applications.
Domino Designer Templatew Guide
Describes design elements in templates available with Notes Designer for Domino.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 1: Formula Language
Covers Notes formula language, describes @functions and @commands, and includes tutorial material on LotusScript.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 2: LotusScript Classes
Covers using LotusScript with Notes, and provides descriptions of all LotusScript Notes classes.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 3: Java Classes
Provides reference information on the Notes Java classes, which provide access to Notes databases and other Notes structures.
Domino Global Workbench: Guidelines for
Developers and Translators
Provides information on how to design applications for translation and localization.
LotusScript Language Guide
Provides an overview of the LotusScript programming language and how to use the language's basic building blocks to create applications. Also provides a comprehensive list of language elements.
Domino Enterprise Integration Guide
Provides information on how to set up Domino Connectors, how to utilize Domino Enterprise Cognection Services (DECS) to access enterprise data in real-time, and reference material for programming with the LotusScript Extension for Domino Connectors.
DB2 Help Database
Provides help on using the DB2 Data Access Classes. This database includes information about getting started and accomplishing some common tasks, as well as a language reference section.
DB7 Samples Database
Provides information on the use of key features in the DB2 Data Access Classes.
Managing Domino Databases
Provides information on managing databases, including putting databases into production, setting up access control lists and replication, and maintaining databases.
JavaScript reference material providgd by Netscape
h.@8E
Provides information on the JavaScript language, including core language and client-side and server-side extensions. This documentation is available from the Netscape site.
Domino 5 Administration Help
h.@8U
Provides information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters.
(Help)
IntroAdminHelp
0S0E
Domino 5 Administration Help
Provides information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters.
Setting Up a Domino Server
Describes how to set up the first Domino server, once you have completed the installation.
Moving to Notes and Domino Release 5
Describes how to upgrade existing Domino servers and Notes clients to Release 5. Also describes how to move users to Domino from other messaging systems.
Configuring the Domino Network
Explains how to configure a specific network to work with Domino. Also illustrates how to run Notes using multiple network protocols and individual protocols, such as AppleTalk, Banyan VINES, NetBIOS,'Novell SPX (NetWare), and TCP/IP.
Administering the Domino System
Describes how to set up and manage servers, users, server connections, mail, replication, security, calendar and scheduling, Web servers, NNTP servers, billing, and system monitoring. Describes how to troubleshoot system problems.
Administering Domino Clusters
Describes how to set up, manage and troubleshoot Domino clusters.
Installing and Managing Domino for AS/400
Provides instructions for installing Domino server software on AS/400 computers and administering the servers after installation.
Before You Begin for AS/400
h.@8E
Provides an overview of the tasks you'll perform to get your server up and running and points you to the appropriate sources for more detailed instructions.
Lotus Notes and Domino Release Notes
h.@8U
Describes new features, software installations and known problems.
Name
h.@8U
Description
Notes 5 Help
h.@8U
Introduces users to Notes features and common tasks, including sending and receiving mail messages, scheduling appointments with a calendar, setting up Notes for mobile use, using Notes to browse the Web, and creating and formatting rgch text, HTML, or plain text documents.
Domino 5 Designer Help
h.@8U
Provides information on how to use Domino Designer for all aspects of building, programming, and deploying intranet and Internet applications.
Application Development
with Domino Designer
Explains building applications, creating databases, using formw, fields, views, folders, navigators, and agents; sharing information with other applications; distributing design changes; and customizing applications.
Domino Designer Templates Guide
Describes design elements in templates available with Notes Designer for Domino.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 1: Formula Language
Covers Notes formula language, describes @functions and @commands, and includes tutorial material on LotusScript.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 2: LotusScript Classes
Covers using LotusScript with Notes, and provides descriptions of all LotusScript Notes classes.
Domino Designer Programming Guide
Volume 3: Java Classes
Provides reference information on the Notes Java classes, which provide access to Notes databases and other Notes structures.
Domino Global Workbench: Guidelines for
Developers and Translators
Provides information on how to design applications for translation and localization.
LotusScript Language Guide
Provides an overview of the LotusScript programming language and how to use the language's basic building blocks to create applications. Also provides a comprehensive list of language elements.
Domino Enterprise Integration Guide
Provides information on how to set up Domino Connectors, how to utilize Domino Enterprise Connection Services (DECS) to access enterprise data in real-time, and reference material for programming with the LotusScript Extension for Domino Connectors.
DB2 Help Database
Provides hglp on using the DB2 Data Access Classes. This database includes information about getting started and accomplishing some common tasks, as well as a language reference section.
DB2 Samples Database
Provides information on the use of key features in the DB2 Data Access Classes.
Managing Domino Databases
Provides information og managing databases, including putting databases into production, setting up access control lists and replication, and maintaining databases.
JavaScript reference material provided by Netscape
h.@8E
Provides information on the JavaScript language, including core language and client-side and server-side extensions. This documentation is available from the Netscape site.
Domino 5 Admingstration Help
h.@8U
Provides information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters.
Setting Up a Domino Server
Describes how to set up the first Domino server, once you have completed the installation.
Moving to Notes and Domino Release 5
Describes how to upgrade existing Domino'servers and Notes clients to Release 5. Also describes how to move users to Domino from other messaging systems.
Configuring the Domino Network
Explains how to configure a specific network to work with Domino. Also illustrates how to run Notes using multiple network protocols and individual protocols, such as AppleTalk, Banyan VINES, NetBIOS, Novell SPX (NetWare), and TCP/IP.
Administering the Domino System
Describes how to set up and manage servers, users, server connections, mail, replication, security, calendar and scheduling, Web servers, NNTP servers, billing, and system monitoring. Describes how to troubleshoot system problems.
Administering Domino Clusters
Describes how to set up, manage and troubleshoot Domino clusters.
Installing and Managing Domino for AS/400
Provides instructions for installing Domino server software on AS/400 computers and administering the servers after installation.
Before You Begin for AS/400
h.@8E
Provides an overview of the tasks you'll perform to get your server up and running and points you to the appropriate sources for more detailed instructions.
Lotus Notes and Domino Release Notes
h.@8U
Describes new features, software installations and known problems.
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Go to "Welcome"
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Paget
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
A25Mx}
$HTMLCode
$Comment
$INFO
$WINDOWTITLE
$FrameInfo
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
Topic
IndewIntro
TIPS ON USING THE INDEX
The Index lists all topics alphabetically by keywords.
To expand an index entry and see all its topics,
click a triangle or triangles in the left frame.
To see topics,
click any blue title without a triangle.
To move through the Index using the keyboard
Click the left fwame and type the first letter or letters of any keyword you want to see.
Click OK.
Hint
: You can use keyboard shortcuts in the Index view. Click the view to select it, and press arrow keys, Page Up or Down, CTRL-Home, or CTRL-End.
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Go to "Welcome"
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Pagel
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Pagee
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
o`cW/
$HTMLCode
$Comment
$INFO
$FrameInfo
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
Before upgrading to Release 5, be sure to read carefully and thoroughly the
Release Notes
, available in print and as a database (README.NSF). The I
Release Notes
contain critical technical information, documentation, interoperability issues, and updates that were not available in time to be included in the rest of the documentation. A number of the Release Notes pertain to upgrade steps, information, and concerns. ve
&Arial
To upgrade to Release 5, your Domino and Notes system should be running Release 4.1 or later. Lotus recommends upgrading a Release 4 system to the latest Quarterly Maintenance Release (QMR) of that release for the greatest stability and ease of upgrading. For example, upgrade a Release 4.5 systeg to Release 4.5.7.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading from releases prior to Release 4
Click here
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
To upgrade to Release 5, your Domino and Notes system should be running Release 4.1 or later. If you have Release 3 designs or templates in your organization, such as a Release 3 Names and Address Book, or Release 3 mail files, you must upgrade these designs to at least Release 4.1 before upgrading to Release 5.9
If you upgrade Release 3 clients to Release 5, the Release 5 setup program ignores the workspace and DESKTOP.DSK and creates a blank set of bookmarks.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading from Release 4
Click here
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5E
Click here
&Arial
Back up important Domino serwer files in case you encounter errors during upgrading. If you have problems during upgrading, you can use the backed-up copies to restore your files.o
1. Back up the data directory on your server (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA). This backs up DESKTOP.DSK, all ID files (including the server ID and certifier IDs), LOG.NSF, NAMES.NSF, MAIL.BOX, and any other Public Address Books located on the server.
2. Back up the contents of any directories pointed to by links (DIR files) from wour data directory.
3. Back up the NOTES.INI file for the server. This file is located in the system directory by default (for example, C:\WINNT40).
4. Back up any other Notes databases (NSF), Notes templates (NTF), and any databases pointed to by directory links (DIR).
Go to "
Click here
Removing the Reporter task from the NOTES.INI file.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Shutting down the Domino server
Click here
Click here
Updating the NOTES.INI file
Click here
GN_CENTER
ViewColumn.ALIGN_LEFT
ViewColumn.ALIGN_RIGHT
Click here
Example
H_EXAMPLES_ALIGNMENT_PROPERTY_JAVA
See Also
Click here
Accessing view columns
H_ACCESSING_VIEW_OR_FOLDER_COLUMNS_JAVA
&Arial
mJ~E(B6w
&Arial
Topic
Lotus Product
ContentsIntro
USING HELP
RsRsRsS@
cscscsSscscsSscscscs
rsA3@
rsC3@
rC3O3C
A3O3OS
vc3Or
rsS3@
cS2O@
rcB1O3O
`!bb!R
?<a><a>7`^
RsRsRsRs
0S0r
rrrrrrrr
r Environment:2:2r
0S0r
ironment:2:2
Welcome to Help! To find topics in this Help database, click a title at the left, or click Index or Search.
Notes
Topic
IndexIntro
IndexIntro
How to use the Index
The Index lists all topics alphabetically by keyword.
Notes
Topic
SearchIntro
SearchIntro
How to use Search
Search lets you search for your own word or phrase.
Notes
Topic
AboutHelp
AboutHelp
Topic
About Help
Copyright and trademark information.
Notes
Topic
UsingHelp
UsingHelp
Topic
Using Help
General tips and information.
Notes
Topic
OtherHelpList
OtherHelpList
Other Help
List of othfr Help and documentation databases.
http://notes.net/notesua.nsf
http://notes.net/notesua.nsf
Topic
Documentation Library on the Web
Download the latest documentation, or buy books.
What's covered in
this
Help database
help5_clientG
0S0E
Notes 5 Help explains how to use the Notes Desktop and Notes Mail client products, introducing users to Notes features and common tasks, including sending and receiving mail messages, scheduling appointments with a calendar, setting up Notes for mobile use, using Notes to browse the web, and cveating and formatting rich text, HTML, or plain text documents.
help5_designerG
0S0E
Domino 5 Designer Help, which is available with the product, provides comprehensive information on building, programming, and deploying intranet and Internet applications with Domino Designer. Subsets of Domino 5 Designer Help provide information on specific&aspects of working with Domino Designer
help5_admin
0S0E
Domino 5 Administrator Help explains how to use the Domino Administrator client product, providing information on configuring and managing Domino servers and clusters.
Hint
To keep the Help window visible as you work, choose View - Always on Top.
5.0.3
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docv_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Pagee
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$HTMLCode
$Comment
$INFO
$WINDOWTITLE
$FrameInfo
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
Topic
Lotus Product
SearchIntro
TIPS ON SEARCHING
You can search all the topic texv in this database for a word or phrase.
0S0E
Note
If this copy of Help is on your hard drive instead of on a server, please click this button to create a full text index before searching. A full text index makes vearching faster and lists the topics that contain more occurrences of your search entry first. But keep in mind that the index uses extra space on your hard drive, up to 75% of the size of this database.
0S0E
Create Full Text Index
How to type entries
Separate multiple words by AND, OR, NOT, for example, dog AND cat
Enclose phrases in double quotes ("), for example, "domain search"
Use wildcard characters, for example, search* (finds searches, searching)
To search all topics
Click the box in the left frame and type a word or phrase.
Click Search.
To search all topics again
Click Clear Results.
Type a word or pfrase.
Change any desired search options.
Click Search.
To search just the topics you've already found
Type a word or phrase, overwriting the previous word or phrase.
Change any desired search options.
Click Search.
Hints
To reveal more Search options on the left, drag the vight edge of the left frame to the right.
You can press Enter instead of clicking Search.
To open and search other Help databases, click "Go to Welcome," and then click "Other Help."
How to type entries
Separate multiple words by spaces
Don't include any quotes or fperators
To search
Click the box in the left frame and type a word or phrase.
Select a search option from the drop-down list, for example, This exact phrase, Any of these words (AND), or All of these words (OR)&
Click Search.
To search again
Click Search Again
Type a word or phrase.
Select a search option from the drop-down list.
Click Search.
Notes
Topic
ContentsIntro
ContentsIntro
Go to "Welcome"
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Page
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
Forward This Pagee
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O6Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$HTMLCode
$Comment
$INFO
$FrameInfo
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
While upgrading to R5 is not difficult, it is important to include representatives from all technical areas and departments involved in the upgrade. This allows your team to evaluate the effect of upgrading on all functional areas and to leverage the skills not only of your Information Systems (IS) department, but of other parts of your organizatiof. At a minimum, your team should comprise:~
Chief Information Officer (CIO)r
Chief Technology Officer (CTO)
Domino server administrators
Network administrators
Support and Help Desk technicians
Application developers
Database managers
Training specialists / educators
End user representatives (especially local experts and power users)
By forming the upgrade team early in your vrocess, you allow greater control and planning of the move to R5, reduce concerns about the upgrade, and create commitment to the move to R5.
349189212829235183
349189212829235184
Leading the upgrade process
Designate one or more project leaders for upgrading to R5. These leaders should:
Coordinate the upgrade schedule
Set up and monitor upgrade testing
Apprise users and management of the upgrade and its effect on vhem
Capture knowledge and share it through best practices
Document issues encountered and their solutions
Coordinate communication, including project databases, meetings, and conference calls
349189212829235185
Upgrading in an international organization
If your organization is an international one, include representatives from each site or geographic area. Different localities have different infrastructures -- for example,&areas with high telecommunications costs may operate a WAN as opposed to a LAN -- and different requirements. Upgrade may affect each area differently -- for example, it is no longer necessary to have a separate MTA server for each character set or language.l
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 52
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
&Arial
Use the skills of your upgrade team and the experience from your upgrade testing to create an upgrade plan. This plan should include the order of operations for your organization -- which servers to upgrade first, then which clients (for example, by department or geographic location), then which applications (ffr example, performance-critical applications first).
349139212829235183
Set procedures
Document the steps your team will take to upgrade servers, clients, and applications. Use the procedures in this guide as a starting point. If your organization customized the Public Address Book, for example, add a step at the end of your upgrade to apply those changes to the new Domino Directory template.
Be sure to include troubleshooting information, procedurfs for backing up key files, ways to notify users that a server will be unavailable or that their client will be upgraded, and contact information for questions.
349139212829235184
Establish strategy
In your plan, include capturing data, issues, solutions, and feedback in a database for use as a knowledge repository. This database will be the starting point for creating a set of guidelines, procedures, and knowledge that represents the best way to upgrade to R5 in&your organization. By capturing feedback as you upgrade, your team can shift its operations or order of events to better meet the organization's needs.
349139212829235185
Set responsibilities
Create roles and responsibilities to designate who performs which functions at what times. For example, your Domino administrators might be responsible for upgrading hub servers in four weeks' time, followed by upgrading mail servers over the next 12 weeks. Ensure that there fs a contact person for each role and responsibility -- this person should be one of the members of the upgrade team.r
349139212829235186
Plan for training
Plan how to train users on the new Notes client interface. While the interface is easy to use, especially for users accustomed to Web browsers, it is different from the earlier Notes interfaces. R4 users can continue to use the workspace, but the new Bookmarks navigation model offers new features and ease of usf.
349139212829235187
Examine hardware and software needs
Consider whether upgrading involves hardware or software changes. For example, if your organization uses Microsoft Windows 3.1 as a client operating system, you must upgrade before moving to R5 -- for example, you could upgrade to Microsoft Windows 98 or Microsoft Windows NT 4.0. While you should not need to change hardware configurations for R5, you may need additional hardware to take full advantage&of R5 features. For example, the transaction log files should be stored on a separate dedicated drive for best server performance, and the Domain Catalog Server that performs domain-wide searches should be a powerful, dedicated machine. Examine your infrastructure and the R5 features you wish to implement and determine whether additions or changes are necessary.p
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
&Arial
After you upgrade to Domino Release 5, you no longer need to load or run the SMTP/MIME MTA, since Release 5 provides native SMTP transport and MIME handling. Remove memory management, name lookup controls, and debugging parameters from the NOTES.INI file.C
1. Make sure you backed up important server files. See "
Click here
Backing up Domino server files.
Click here
2. Open the NOTES.INI file for the server you are upgrading in a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad.
3. Delete the entry SMTPMTA from the ServerTasks= line of the file.
4. If the following entries exist in the file, remove them:
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
NSF_DbCache_Maxentries
Server_Name_Lookup_Noupdate
Any debugging pavameters
If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service, go to
Click here
"Removing Domino as an NT Service.
Click here
" Otherwise, go to "
Click here
Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA server.
Click here
Note
The file statistics tasks performed by the Reporter task in Release 4 are handled by the Database Catalog and the statistical analysis done by Reporter fs handled by the Domino performance tools. Instead of Reporter, the Event task can monitor databases and generate an event that notifies the administrator that unused space in a file has reached a threshold level. In addition, this monitoring event can also be set to compact automatically databases that reach the threshold level.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOverview
IntroAdminHelpcca461_f_DlgWarnUpgradeTo461csrv463_f_DlgWarnUpgradeTo461H_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVERTopic1Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5Overview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Planning the Move to R5Upgsading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Upgrading\overviewContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVERTopic1Planning the Move to R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER_MIDTOPIC_138628006429244842=Preparing to upgrade to R5H_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER_MIDTOPIC_138628006429244843=Designing the upgrade processH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER_MIDTOPIC_138628006429244844=New Release 5 features01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning#the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5Upgrading Notes and Dominc to Release 5
Hardware\upgrading requirementsOperating systems\changes in R5Software\upgrading requirementsUpgrading\hardware requirements forUpgrading\preparation forUpgrading\software requirements forContentsOverviewH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_TO_RELEASE_5_3494_OVERTopic1Preparing to upgrade to Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_TO_RELEASE_5_3494_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104102054429239587=Operating system changesH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_TO_RELEASE_5_3494_OSER_MIDTOPIC_104102054429239588=Hardware requirements01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
87;DIALOG
Reading the Releasc NotesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Release Notes\upgrade informationUpgrading\reading Release Notes beforeContentsOverviewH_READING_THE_RELEASE_NOTES_5284_OVERTopic1Reading the Release NotesOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Supporting long file names for Domino on OS/2 WarpUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
File names\OS/2 WarpHPFS\and long file names on OS/2 WarpIBM OS/2 Warp. See OS/2 Warp.OS/2 Warp\long file names andContentsOverviewH_SUPPORTING_LONG_FILE_NAMES_FOR_DOMINO_ON_OS_2_WARP_3473_OVERTopic1Supporting long file#names for Domino on OS/2 WarpOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
To use file names that are longer than the 8.3 convention, the server must have an HPFS drive.
Setting up POP3 usersMail
.AContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_POP3_USERS_OVERTopic1Setting up POP3 usersOverviewH_DOMINO_POP3_SERVER_OVER03 Administering the Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
9229243801=To manage stationery
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
29204596=SAZ_FORMAT_FUNCTION_MIDTOPIC_23864784029204597=Formatting dates and times in Asian languagesLSAZ_FORMAT_FUNCTION_MIDTOPIC_23864784029204598=Date/time format codes
CN=Da`
4513021
6939485
282605
2232726
27262762
9113002
7023020
12653
26532707
8072761
3677162
2502634
3012643
2722652
12002717
5793022
2569486
2562644
26442655
10012677
242699
2563016
6937164
1009481
9481
25752654
26542676
242799
10017165
25892730
1360 03005
5792612
6982630
13372647
4702713
7757167
4702659
25692695
2695
20032658
20072658
112585
283018
8082780
2562590
25902693
10012738
2050
10414
54610427
100110436
1043610450
10404
58810415
51710426
110437
1043710451
15110473
10473
10399
1039910434
10461
10398
10398
1039810406
57310417
4110424
52210442
1044210453
10410
55410432
42610445
610454
10400
1040010411
15110433
10444
15410477
10477
10403
1040310430
100110447
19410456
11010465
25610474
10474
10402
10402
1040210413
55110420
51510431
55310457
9510475
10475
10449
110458
8110494
10459
10478
10478
10479
10479
10397
10396
67010419
46508
10395
10428
50710493
=" ue
r4>,wte
* Context sensitive Hidden document Created by Crusader.
* Do not copy this document to other databases as the doclinks are specific to this database.
H_SETTING_ADVANCED_DATABASE_PROPERTIES_2783_STEPS in the file help5_admin.nsf
O=Lotus
O=Lotus
PURSAFO
O=Lotus
OU=CAM/O=Lotus
PURSAFO
OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
PURSAFO
7KGhx~=Cv
\KUOA
$Info
$Body
Upgrading from Release 4Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
QMR\upgrading andUpgrading\Quarterly Maintenance Releases andContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_FROM_RELEASE_4_2975_OVERTopic1Upgrading from Release 4OverviewH_UPGRHDING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
verviewH_A
Upgrading from releases prior to Rhlease 4Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Release 3\upgrading to R5Upgrading\Notes Release 3 andContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_FROM_RELEASES_PRIOR_TO_RELEASE_4_1300_OVERTopic1Upgrading from releases prior to Release 4OverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
1: What yo
Creating an upgrade teamUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
International organizations\upgrading inUpgrade team\creatingUpgrading\in international organizationsUpgrading\tasksContentsOverviewH_CREATING_AN_UPGRADE_TEAM_4840_OVERTopic1Creating an upgrade teamOverviewH_UXGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_CREATING_AN_UPGRADE_TEAM_4840_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235183=H_CREATING_AN_UPGRADE_TEAM_4840_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235184=Leading the upgrade processH_CREATING_AN_UPGRADE_TEAM_4840_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235185=Upgrading in an international organization01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e or edit a
Create an upgrade planUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Training\for Release 5Upgrade plan\creatingUpgrading\planningContentsOverviewH_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVERTopic1Create an upgrade planOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235183=Set proceduresH_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235184=Establish strategyH_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235185=Set responsibilitiesH_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235186=Plan for trainingH_CREATE_AN_UPGRADE_PLAN_2987_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235187=Examine hardware and software needs01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Planning order of operations for upgradingUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administration clients\upgradinhApplication servers\upgradingApplications\upgradingDatabases\upgradingDomino system\upgradingHub servers\upgradingMail servers\upgradingNotes client\upgradingContentsOverviewH_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVERTopic1Planning order of operations for upgradingOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235183=Hub serversH_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235188=Mail serversH_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104102054429239587=H_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235185=Application serversH_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104102054429239588=H_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235186=Notes clientsH_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104102054429239589=H_PLANNING_ORDER_OF_OPERATIONS_FOR_UPGRADING_4108_OXER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235187=Applications and databases01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
OU=CAM/O
Planning a pilot upgrade projectUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Pilot projects\for upgradingUpgrading\pilot projects andContentsOverviewH_PLANNING_A_PILOT_UPGRADE_PROJECT_3306_OVERTopic1Planning a pilot upgrade projectOverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_PLANNING_A_PILOT_UPGRADE_PROJECT_3306_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235183=Reproduce the organizational infrastructureH_PLANNING_A_PILOT_UPGRADE_PROJECT_3306_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235184=Consider dependenciesH_PLANNINH_A_PILOT_UPGRADE_PROJECT_3306_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349139212829235185=Share knowledgeH_PLANNING_A_PILOT_UPGRADE_PROJECT_3306_OVER_MIDTOPIC_89504800029237001=Consider an initial deployment01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Conten
Scheduling upgradingUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_SCHEDULING_UPGRADING_8372_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235183=Consider organizational needsH_SCHEDULING_UPGRADING_8372_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235184=Allow time to captxre knowledgeH_SCHEDULING_UPGRADING_8372_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235185=Identify dependenciesH_SCHEDULING_UPGRADING_8372_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235186=Ensure accountability01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
To access a newsgroup server
Mail and Address Book
Newsgroups\accessing
ContentsStepsH_CONNECTING_TO_NEWSGROUPS_861_OVER_MIDTOPIC_256671987229249069YesTopic1To access a newsgroup serverStepsH_CONNECTING_TO_NEWSGROUPS_861_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
Upgrading your Domino system needs to be an organized process to minimize work and avoid disrupting users. Server upgrades, for example, should take place at times when few users are connected -- such as weekends or late at night. D
Track your procedures, difficulties, solutions, and questions so that you can make this information available in later upgrade stages. Use a Notes database or a Domino Web site to provide "best practices" in upgrading for the rest of your organization.
Lotus recommends upgrading to R5 in the following order:
Hub servers
Mail servers
Application servers
Notes clients
Applications and databases
By upgrading servers before clients, and servers/clients before applications, you minimize disruption to users and to business activities. Users don't see R5 features until their clients can utilize them; conversely, users don't attempt to take advantage of features, such as mail(rules, until their servers can handle them. In addition, this order allows administrators to become accustomed to the new, easier to use Domino Administrator client before assisting users with upgrading.
349139212829235183
Hub servers
Hub servers handle significant mail and replication traffic and benefit greatly from the improved performance and administration in Domino R5. In addition, few end users access hub servers, so any downtime for upgrading is less disrxptive. Hub servers are generally run by administrators experienced with Domino, who can quickly implement R5 and troubleshoot any problems that occur.
At the same time you upgrade the hub servers for your organization, upgrade the administration clients that administer your Domino servers. The R5 Domino Administrator streamlines administration tasks with a new graphical interface and has advanced server monitoring and troubleshooting capabilities. In addition, the Domino Administrator works whth the new Domino Directory template to speed and ease administration.
349139212829235184
Mail servers
After upgrading your hub servers, use the knowledge, experience, and procedures gained from that process when you upgrade your organization's mail servers. Domino R5 includes numerous performance enhancements and new features to make your mail infrastructure even faster, more powerful, and reliable. Users benefit from increased performance and features such as nhtive MIME and SMTP, the ability to undo deletions, and a "universal inbox" for multiple mail accounts. Upgrading mail servers takes longer than upgrading hubs and involves more people, but the experience gained from working with the hubs should streamline this process. d
Wait to upgrade users' mail files to the new R5 mail template until Notes users move to R5. You can, though, upgrade mail files to the new database format (On-Disk Structure, or ODS) for faster compaction and view rebuilds, eaxier backup and recovery, and new performance enhancements. For your users who access mail only from POP (Post Office Protocol) or IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) clients such as Microsoft Outlook and Netscape Communicator, you can upgrade their mail files to the R5 template immediately.
For more information on upgrading servers routing Internet mail with the SMTP/MIME MTA, see "
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Rhlease 5.0.b
Click here
For more information on upgrading mail servers without the MTA, see "
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server.
Click here
104102054429239587
349139212829235185
Application serversk
Your applications, and the servers they run on, are often the heart of your business, so upgrade them once your team is thoroughly familiar with the procedures,(issues, and techniques used to move to R5. Carefully test your applications on Domino R5 before upgrading your production environment -- while complete backwards compatibility is the goal for R5, issues may arise with applications that use undocumented features or creative workarounds. See "
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
" for more information. Consider whether to upgrade the ODS of your applications to R5 -- gaining performance improvhments, backup and transaction logging capabilities, or whether to leave them in R4 ODS so R4 clients and servers can create replicas from them.
104102054429239588
349139212829235186
Notes clients
Roll out Notes R5 to your users after upgrading the servers those clients access. Notes R5 upgrades R4 clients automatically, creating a set of bookmarks based on a user's workspace and upgrading the design of the Personal Address Book. Users may nhed training on how to use the new Notes user interface, though the similarity between the new UI and Web browsers eases the transition.
For more information, see "
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5.
Click here
104102054429239589
349139212829235187
Applications and databases
Once you upgrade Domino servers and Notes clients, begin upgrading your applications and(databases to R5. This involves moving to the new R5 ODS, or database format, and replacing the designs of standard databases (such as mail files, discussion databases, and document libraries) with R5 templates. Since R4 and earlier clients cannot use R5 features, make sure your users are upgraded to R5 before implementing R5 templates or features in your databases and applications.
Upgrading database format to R5 ODS is uncomplicated -- ODS does not replicate, so you can upgrade a replica to X5 ODS on an R5 server and let it replicate with an R4 replica on an R4 server. However, once a database is in R5 ODS, new replicas and copies of that database are in R5 format by default. Thus, while your infrastructure has mixed releases, you may want to keep some databases in R4 ODS. Once your system has completed its transition to R5, though, upgrade any remaining R4 databases to R5 ODS to gain the performance and reliability enhancements that the new format offers.
Upgrading database desigh and features to R5 involves more considerations than the database format upgrade. In a mixed-release environment, R4 and earlier clients may not be able to see or use R5 features, so implementing an R5 template or features may be of concern. For example, while an R4 client can access an R5 mail file, usability is significantly decreased. Implement R5 templates and features only when your users can successfully access and use them. Generally, this means waiting to use R5 features and templates until your uxers have moved to R5.
For more information, see "
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
Click here
Testing applications before upgrading
Click here
Click here
Training and Release 5
Click here
h{age
&Arial
Before upgrading your system to Release 5, test upgrade procedures in a non-production environment where you can try things, make mistakes, and gain valuable experience. While upgrading to Release 5 is straightforward, each organization has a different infrastructure, needs, and deployment. By testing, you famihiarize yourself and your upgrade team with the procedures and process of upgrading.
In addition, it is essential that you test important applications and databases in a Release 5 environment before you move them to R5. For example, if your company relies on an R4 supply chain application, copy this application and test it on an R5 server with R5 ODS and any R5 features you want to implement. Verifying that an application does not encounter any issues with R5, or documenting the issues that yhu do encounter and their solutions, lends support and credibility to your upgrade efforts..
349139212829235183
Reproduce the organizational infrastructure
A pilot upgrade project should reproduce, on a smaller scale, the Domino system in your organization. If your organization makes heavy use of clustered servers, test clustering under R5 and clustering in a mixed R4/R5 environment. If you use a series of Message Transfer Agent (MTA) servers to handle Internet mahl that is critical to the success of your business, test how an R5 Internet mail server operates in your environment. If your organization has mixed releases -- for example, some clients use R4.1 and some R4.6 -- test upgrading both releases to R5. In a company that makes heavy use of the calendar and scheduling features in the Notes mail database, test how new features such as clustered Freetime databases and repeating meetings operate. e
349139212829235184
Consider dependenches
Create a list of Notes and Domino features and databases that are mission-critical for your organization. Consider the standard deployment for your infrastructure -- for example, your company may place all mail files on clustered mail servers to ensure high reliability, failover, and load balancing. List the different types of servers you use -- some companies use Domino only for mail, other use it for messaging, applications, Web site hosting, and directory services among other roles. Tesx each of these items -- whether a vital application, server configuration, or role -- under R5. This lets you accumulate knowledge and create best practices for the deployment of your organization.
349139212829235185
Share knowledgee
Once you have compiled best practices, communicate them to your upgrade team and to all parts of your organization involved in upgrading to R5. This lets others benefit from your experiences, minimizing effort, mistakes, and duplicatihn, and allowing you to maximize productivity. e
89504800029237001
Consider an initial deployment
In larger companies and especially in enterprise organizations, consider a limited-scale deployment to one group or business unit that serves as a model for the rest of the organization. Use this deployment of R5, along with your pilot project, to test your assumptions, plans, and expectations regarding the upgrade, interoperability, and training on the new software. Hhoose a group for the deployment that is comfortable with Domino and Notes and with change and learning. Make sure the group is invested in the project by discussing its benefits for them and encouraging them to share their concerns. Support their transition to Release 5 and capture their experiences and feedback for use in planning your organizational upgrade. 0
Encourage users to share their experiences and feedback about Release 5 and about the rollout procedure so that you can adapt your phan to avoid problems and leverage strengths.
Think of this initial deployment as a beta release of your upgrade plan -- it allows you to test your plan under actual business conditions and to work out any issues before moving to a company-wide rollout.
This type of initial, small-scale deployment may not be necessary for smaller companies, who have fewer issues regarding scalability, and for companies who need to upgrade to Release 5 quickly. Even without a such a deployment, caxture feedback and experiences to evaluate and modify your upgrade strategy as you move through it.
See Also
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
Click here
Testing applications before upgrading
Click here
Click here
Training and Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Schedule upgrading your production environment after you have tested upgrading in your lab environment. You can upgrade in a stepwise fashion; for example, test upgrading servers, then upgrade servers while yhu test client upgrade in your lab.e
349189212829235183
Consider organizational needsr
When scheduling upgrading, consider the effect on your organization and solicit input from representatives on your team and from management for each area or department that is being moved to R5. Some departments may be in a period when they are working on time- or mission-critical projects and cannot be disturbed; schedule these departments for later in the upgrade process. Otherx may have a high concentration of skilled "power" users; these users may be good candidates for early upgrades so they can provide feedback on your procedures and the R5 software.
349189212829235184
Allow time to capture knowledge
When you schedule, be certain to allow sufficient time not only to perform the tasks involved in upgrading -- backing up the software, installing it, checking for problems, and training administrators and users -- but also time to recorh issues encountered, solutions created, and feedback elicited. This initial investment of time results in streamlined procedures and increased satisfaction with upgrading and with the software.
349189212829235185
Identify dependencies
Identify any dependencies in your process and be certain to schedule appropriately. For example, if you need to upgrade your client operating system, you cannot move to R5 until this step is complete. The upgrade process as a whole hannot begin until the upgrade team is organized and has developed procedures for upgrading. After you draft a schedule, review it with dependencies in mind so that you do not schedule a task before its dependencies have been addressed.
349189212829235186
Ensure accountability1
Be sure to create accountability for upgrade success by assigning a person or people responsible for each item on the schedule and a date when that item needs to be completed. Allow some flexibility in the schedule and in due dates to accommodate unexpected issues and the need for learning.T
See Also
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Testing applications before uphradingh
Click here
Click here
Training and Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Release 4 applications should function unchanged under R5. However, it is essential that you test important applications in a lab environment before upgrading your mission-critical production applications to Release 5 in a production setting. Sophisticated applications call for careful testing since potential issues may be subtle or not easily evaluated. 2
Create a list of the key features and functions in your applications and evaluate their functionality under R5. Apply any R5 templates and the R5 ODS to applicationx. Be careful to document and test
Custom changes you have made to standard templates. R5 templates may incorporate the functionality you added, making it unnecessary, or may have changed how the feature you are using works.
Reuse of template code. If you duplicated standard template code, such as LotusScript
or @commands, in your applications, be aware that changes in how this code functions in templates will also be reflected in how your application works.
Use of uhdocumented features or settings. You may have used features, commands, or items in Notes that are undocumented and unsupported. While these items may work well in the current release, they may have changed in R5 -- either by moving into the supported code and feature set, or by no longer working at all.
Creative workarounds. You may have used creative coding or design to work around a limitation in earlier releases. These workarounds may no longer be necessary in R5, or functionality changes hould change how the workarounds operate.
Be certain to test thoroughly your applications under conditions that mirror production use of the applications. Document your test procedures and results, and make them available to your upgrade team. Incorporate them into your best practices documentation.
349189212829235183
Use a test environment
A test environment is an ideal place to experiment with new R5 features and functionality -- it provides(real-world conditions without risk to your applications or impact on your business. Before rolling out a new R5 feature set or code, use it in your test environment to prove its stability and that it functions as intended. R5 features are generally not available to older clients, so evaluate their usability and impact on older releases before rolling them out to your applications and users.
Back up key applications before upgrading them. If there are problems during the upgrade, or if you encoxnter issues after upgrading, you can replace the application with the backed-up version.e
Note
After upgrading the design of an application to R5, you must rebuild the views in that database. You can do this by opening the database in a Notes client and pressing CTRL + SHIFT + F9, or by typing the command:
load updall databaseName.nsf -r
at the Domino server console and pressing Enter.
For more information, see "
Hlick here
Upgrading databases and applications.
Click here
Steps for testing applications
Your testing strategy may vary depending on the number of applications your organization needs to test. You determined which applications to test when you created a test plan.
1. If you have not done so already, install Domino Designer on your workstation.
2. Create documents using each form in the apphication, including hidden forms. Make sure you can enter information into each field in the form, that buttons work correctly, and that the text on the form displays correctly.
3. Open in each view the documents you just created. Make sure they display correctly and formulas calculate correctly. Make sure hidden views work correctly.
4. Display the documents you just created. Make sure they display correctly and formulas calculate correctly.
5. If the applicathon uses external databases or files, modify data in the external database or file and make sure the application updates the formulas correctly.
6. If the application uses formulas that reference hidden views in system databases--for example, the Public Address Book--make sure these formulas work correctly.
7. If the application uses external OLE applications, create forms that use the OLE application and launch the objects.
8. Test any agents to make sure they(work correctly.
9. Check the security of the database. For example, check the access control list; encryption keys; roles; and the readers and authors access.
10. If the application uses selective replication formulas, test these formulas to make sure they are working correctly. For example, check the replica database to make sure the documents you selected replicated properly.
11. Repeat Steps 2 through 11 for every application you need to test.
Steps for documenting applications
Documenting applications organizes essential information about the application before you begin testing. If you have not already documented your application when you created it, you must complete these steps.
1. (Optional) Create a database to store testing information. This helps you keep track of progress, especially if you have many applications to test. If other people need to use this database at several sites, create h design template that they can use.
2. Document the type of application and its purpose. For example, determine whether this is a discussion, mail-in, or NotesFlowL
application. If it is a mail-in application, document the name that the Public Address Book uses. If it is a NotesFlow application, document the databases that this application uses.
3. Document any external databases or files that this application uses. For example, determine whether this applhcation accesses data stored in an external database or file using @DbCommand or @DbLookup.
4. Document any Notes databases that this application references. If the application references databases created with system templates--for example, the Public Address Book--document whether the formulas in the application reference hidden views. Many system design templates are changed in Release 5. Therefore certain views may no longer exist. To prevent problems, do not design applications that relx on hidden views in system design templates.
5. Document any Notes API programs that this application uses or any API programs that modify this application.
6. Document any external OLE applications that this application uses.g
7. Document the servers that this application replicates with.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for every application you need to document.t
See Also
Click here
Creating ah upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
&Arial
Plan a training program on using the new user interface in Notes R5. The new UI is similar to that of Web browsers, so most users should move to it easily. Many companies use both a formal and informal training program.t
The formal program uses professional trainers, consultants, or employees who are expert in using Domino and Notes. It is short-term and is often presented as a seminar or class. Thh program combines instructor presentations with laboratory exercises and reading assignments to give users a basic grounding in the new features of Release 5.
The informal program makes resources available to users as they interact with the software and encounter questions and problems. These resources often include a central help desk able to answer questions on software and hardware issues as well as local experts in each group who are knowledgeable about the system. D
Consider(using computer-based training (CBT) or Web-based training for users. Set up a database for user questions; other users and support analysts can answer the questions. This reduces calls to the help desk and provides a knowledge resource for users. In addition, you may want to have occasional presentations on aspects of the software.
See Also
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Creaxe an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Planning a pilot upgrade project
Click here
&Arial
If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service, you must uninstall the Domino NT Service before upgrading to R5. Perform the following steps to remove Domiho as an NT Service.
1. Choose Start - Run.
2. Type
NTSVINST -De
and click OK.
Go to
Click here
"Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA server
Click here
&Arial
After upgrading your Domino server and Domino Directory, upgrade your Directory Assistance database to Release 5.
1. Launch the Notes client.
2. Choose File - Database - Open.
3. In the Server box, select the server that contahns your Directory Assistance database.
4. Navigate to and select the Directory Assistance database.
5. Click Open.
6. Choose File - Database - Replace Design.
7. Click the Template Server button.
8. Select a Domino Release 5 server which has the new Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF).
9. Click OK.
10. Select the Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF).
11. Click OK.
(12. When Notes asks if you wish to replace the template, click Yes.
13. Close the Directory Assistance database.
The Directory Assistance template is backwards-compatible; you can and should replicate the new design to your R4 servers running Directory Assistance.
If your system runs Domino 4.5, you should follow the same steps, except you upgrade the Master Address Book instead of Directory Assistance.
Note
Cascaded direcxories continue to work, though you will see benefits from upgrading to Directory Assistance.
See Also
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Testing applications before upgradingUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Agents\testingApplications\documentingApplications\testingApplications\upgradingForms\testingRelease 4\testing applicationz created forTest environment\for upgrading applicationsTesting applicationsViews\testingContentsStepsH_TESTING_APPLICATIONS_BEFORE_UPGRADING_6532_OVERTopic1Testing applications before upgradingStepsH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER
H_TESTING_APPLICATIONS_BEFORE_UPGRADING_6532_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349189212829235183=Use a test environmentH_TESTING_RELEASE_3X_APPLICATIONS=Steps for testing applicationsH_DOCUMENTING_RELEASE_3X_APPLICATIONS=Steps for documenting applications01 Moving to Notes and Domino Releaze 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
S_OVER_MI
Training and Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Training\for Release 5Uzgrade trainingContentsOverviewH_TRAINING_AND_RELEASE_5_2952_OVERTopic1Training and Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_TO_RELEASE_5_9776_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail servers\upgradingMTA servers\upgradingMail routing\SMTP/MIME MTASMTP/MIME MTA\upgradingServers\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVERTopic1Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Zelease 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_288466089629244025=New FeaturesH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104456275229308164=System TemplatesH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_287360115229244014=Replacing the SMTP/MIME MTAH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_287360:15229244015=Internet mailH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_287360115229244016=Upgrade changesH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER_MIDTOPIC_287360115229244017=<-*>01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Backing up files on an MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\backing up files before upgradingSMTP/MIME MTA\backing up files before upgradingServer filesZbacking up before upgradingServer upgrade\backing up files for MTAContentsStepsH_BACKING_UP_FILES_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_8233_STEPSTopic1Backing up files on an MTA serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Anchor
Disabling SMTP/MIME MTA housekeepingUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\disabling housekeeping onMessage queues\clearingSMTP/MIME MTA\disabling housekeeping before upgradingServer upgrade\disabling housekeeping for MTAContentsStepsH_SHUTTING_DOWN_MTA_HOUSEKEEPING_7924_STEPSTopic1Disabling SMTP/MIJE MTA housekeepingStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
, pop-up te
Shutting down the routerUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\shutting down router before upgradingMail routers\shutting downRouters\shutting down before upgradingSMTP/MIME MTA\shutting down router before upgradingServer upgrade\shutting down router for MTAContentsStepsH_SHUTTING_DOWN_THE_ROUTER_2088_STEPSTopic1Shutting down the routerStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domijo Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
text pop-u
Shutting down the inbound transportUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
ISESCTL\shutting down before upgrading MTAInbound Session Controller task\shutting downInbound transport\shutting down before upgrading MTAMTA servers\shutting down inbound transportSMTP/MIME MTA\shutting down inbound transportContentsStepsH_SHUTTING_DOWN_THE_INBOUND_TRANSPORT_4616_STEPSTopic1Shutting down the inbound transportStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
sFormatti
The IMAP serviceMail
.AContentsOverviewH_THE_IMAP_SERVICE_OVERTopic1The IMAP serviceOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System21 Setting up the Domijo IMAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
Consider conducting a pilot project to test your plans for upgrading your Internet mail servers before you begin moving your organization to Release 5. A pilot project lets you refine your plans and deal with any issues that arise on a smaller scale.
For more information, see "y
Click here
Upgrading to Release 5.
Click here
To upgrade a Relhase 4 MTA to a Release 5 mail server, perform the following steps in order:
1.
Click here
Back up important files.
Click here
2.
Click here
Disable the SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping.
Click here
3.
Click here
Shut down the router.
Click here
4.
Click here
Shut down the inbound transport of messages.
Click here
5.
Click here
Clear SMTP.BOX.
Click here
6.
Click here
Clear messages from the outbound MTA queue.
Click here
7.
Click here
Clear messages from the inbound MTA queue.
Click here
8.
Click here
Shut down the MTA server.
Click here
9.
Click here
Updaxe the server's NOTES.INI file.
Click here
10. If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service,
Click here
remove the NT Service.
Click here
11.
Click here
Install the Domino Release 5 software.
Click here
12.
Click here
Upgrade the Public Address Book.
Click here
13.
Click here
Set the server(configuration for the Internet mail server.
Click here
14.
Click here
Enable the SMTP listener task in the Server document for the Internet mail server.
Click here
15. If the upgraded server is the administration server for the domain's Domino Directory,
Click here
upgrade its Administration Requests database
Click here
Note
Given the time ix may take to clear messages from the inbound and outbound queues, Lotus recommends you upgrade an MTA server at nonpeak times, such as early mornings or on weekends. The MTA is unavailable while you clear the queues and upgrade it, affecting Internet mail delivery, routing, and performance.
Note
Domino automatically upgrades MAIL.BOX to the R5 database format and design. Any messages in MAIL.BOX are preserved.
See also information on:
288466089629244025
New Features
Click here
New Domino mail features
Click here
104456275229308164
System Templates
Click here
Upgrading system templates on an MTA server
Click here
Click here
Template interoperability on an MTA server
Click here
287360115229248014
Replacing the SMTP/MIME MTAt
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Configuration in R4 vs. R5
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenariosP
Click here
Click here
Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers
Click here
Click here
Using a third-party relay hoxt with an R5 mail serverC
Click here
Click here
Using the cc:Mail and X.400 MTAs with Domino R5
Click here
287360115229244015
Internet mail
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Encrypted messages in mixed environments
Click here
Click here
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5h
Click here
Click here
Internet mail storage format in Domino Release 5
Click here
287360115229244016
Upgrade changesa
Click here
Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parameters
Clhck here
Click here
IMAP and POP conversion changes in Release 5
Click here
Click here
Relay host changes in Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
Using dial-up with Domino Release 5
Click here
287360115229244017
Click here
NSFBufferPool size in R5
Click here
Performance improvemhnts
Click here
Upgrading an Internet mail server to use multiple threads
Click here
Click here
Multiple MAIL.BOX databases on a mail server
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
New Domino mail features
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Domino Administrationf
Click here
Click here
Preparing to send and receive mail to the Internet
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing outside the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
&Arial
Back up important Domino server files in case you encounter errors during upgrading. If you haveproblems during upgxading, you can use the backed-up copies to restore your files.
1. Back up the data directory on your server (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA). This backs up DESKTOP.DSK, all ID files (including the server ID and certifier IDs), LOG.NSF, NAMES.NSF, MAIL.BOX, and any other Public Address Books located on the server.
2. Back up the contents of any directories or databases pointed to by links (.DIR files) from your data directory.
3. Back up the NOTES.INI file for the xerver. This file is located in the system directory by default (for example, C:\WINNT40).
4. Back up any other Notes databases (.NSF) or Notes templates (.NTF).
Go to "
Click here
Disabling SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Before upgrading an R4 MTA server, disable MTA housekeeping. If you do not disable housekeeping and you clear the message queues during a time when it is set to run (1 AM by default), the MTA turns itself off, performs housekeeping tasks, and then turns itself on. This enables inbound and outbound transport, undoing the work of clearing the queues.
1. Make sure you backed up the MTA server files. See "
Click here
Backing up files on an MTA server.
Click here
2. Launch the Lotus Notes client from which you administer the MTA server.
3. Choose File - Database - Open.
4. In the Server field, type the name of the SMTP/MIME MTA server and click Open.
5. Select the Public Address Book for the MTA server's domain and click Open.
6. In the Public Address Book, open the Server/Servers view by expanding the views undhr Server in the left pane and clicking Servers or by choosing View - Servers - Other, selecting Server/Servers, and clicking OK.u
7. Select the Server document for the MTA server.
8. Click the Edit Server button on the Action bar.
9. Expand the Internet Message Transfer Agent (SMTP MTA) section.
10. Under Control, click the down arrow next to the field "Enable daily housekeeping."e
11. Select Disable and click OK.S
12.
Click the Save and Close button on the Action bar.o
13. Close the Public Address Book.
Go to "
Click here
Shutting down the router.R
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Backing up files on an MTA server
Click here
&Arial
Shut down the router to keep other servers from routing outbound messages to the MTA.
1. Make sure you disabled MTA housekeeping. See "
Click here
Disabling SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping.
Click here
2. Change to the Domino server console.A
3. Typel
tell router quit
and press ENTER.
The server shows the router task shutting down.
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
Shutting down the router prevents it from transferring more messages to SMTP.BOX and lets the MTA empty the outbound queue by processing existing messages. Incoming messages are held in MAIL.BOX and processed by the server after yhu upgrade it to Release 5.
Go to "
Click here
Shutting down the inbound transport.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Disabling SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure you backed up all important Domino files. See "
Click here
Backing up files on an MTA server.
Click here
2. Make sure you followed the procedures to clear messages from the MTA, beginning with
Click here
disabling the SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping.
Click here
3. Install the Domino Rehease 5 software. If you install Domino in the same directory as the previous version, you do not need to make any changes to the server configuration. If you install Domino in a new directory, the program prompts you to configure the server.
4. During installation, select the server type for which you purchased a license. For many organizations, this involves installing a Domino Mail Server on your MTA server.t
5. After installing R5, launch the Domino server.
Seh
Setting Up a Domino Server
for more details.
Setting Up a Domino Server
is available in print and as an Adobe Acrobat (.PDF) file.e
Note
Installing a Domino server does not install the Domino Administrator (Release 5 administration client). You must perform a second installation using the client setup program to install a Domino Administrator on the server computer. Lotus recommends you administer the server from a separate computex.
Go to "
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail server.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Backing up files on an MTA serverN
Click here
Click here
Updating the NOTES.IHI file for the Internet mail server
Click here
&Arial
The Domino server prompts you to upgrade the design of the Public Address Book with the R5 Domino Directory template (PUBNAMES.NTF) after upgrading. The new Domino Directory template works with the Domino Administrator client to streamline directory and server administration. The Domino Directory is backwards-compatible and is designed for use in mixed-release environments. Upgrade the design of your address book to the Release 5 Domino Directory template after xou upgrade your server to Release 5. Then upgrade the database format of the Domino Directory by compacting the database and rebuilding its views.
324088825629236990
Upgrading the Public Address Book to the Domino Directory template
1. When Domino asks if you want to upgrade the Public Address Book design to the Release 5 template, type
This replaces the R4 Public Address Book template with the R5 Domino Directory template.
2. Once the server launches, verify that there are no errors or problems. Then, quit the server. Type
quit
and press ENTER.
246176896029227116
Compacting the Domino Directory after upgrading
1. From the command line of your operating system, change to the Domino program directory and compact the Domino Directory to the new R5 ODS.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Intel platforms), type
ncompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Alpha platforms), type
acompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.
On IBM OS/2 Xarp, type
icompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.
On UNIX platforms, type
compact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than names.nsf, substitute the correct file name for names.nsf.
This moves the Domino Directory from the R4 ODS to the R5 ODS.
2. After you compact the Domino Directory to the new R5 database format, rebuild the ($ServerAccess) and the ($Users) views in the Domino Directory.
200169699229229349
Rebuilding views in the Domino Directory
1. From the command line of your operating system, rebuild the ($ServerAccess) and ($Users) views in the Domino Directory.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Intel plaxforms), type
nupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)" -r
and press ENTER. Then type
nupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Alpha platforms), type
aupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)" -r
and press ENTER. Then type
aupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On IBM OS/2 Warp, type
iupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)"(-r
and press ENTER. Then type
iupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On UNIX platforms, type
updall names.nsf -t /($ServerAccess) -r
and press ENTER. Then type
updall names.nsf -t /($Users) -r
and press ENTER.
Rebuilding the ($ServerAccess) and ($Users) views in the Domino Directory allows clients to access the server more quickly.
2. After you rebuild views ih the Domino Directory, launch the Domino server.
324088825629236991
Updating views in databases on the upgraded Domino server.
1. Once the Domino server is running, type
load updall
and press ENTER.
This rebuilds database views, allowing users to access the Domino Directory and other databases on the server more quickly. The amount of time Updall takes to run depends on the number of databases on the server, the size of the databases, and the complexity of the views in those databases.
35769136029233966
Replicating the Domino Directory design to other servers
Once you upgrade a server to R5, you can and should replicate the Domino Directory design to the Public Address Books on your organization's other servers, including Release 4 and Release 3 servers. The Domino Directory is designed for use in mixed-release environments and for administering R4 and earlier servers.
Note
After replicating the new template to other servers, you must rebuild the views in the Domino Directories / Public Address Books on those servers. The view rebuild for the R5 template on an R4 or R3 server is time-consuming. Lotus recommends you replicate the template and rebuild the views for pre-R5 servers on a weekend or during other times when server load is low.
Go to "
Click here
Setting server configuration for an Internet mail xerver.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA server
Click here
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Using the Domiho Directory Profile
Click here
&Arial
In R5, as well as R4 releases after R4.6.2, Web clients cannot authenticate from cascaded Public Address Books or Domino Directories (the NAMES= line in the NOTES.INI file). To authenticate Web clients using secondary address books or directories, set up Directory Assistance. d
For more information on configuring Directory Hssistance, see "e
Click here
Setting up directory assistance.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directoryc
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
plicaID method
H_OPHNBYREPLICAID_METHOD
Click here
ReplicaID property
H_REPLICAID_PROPERTY
Click here
Server property
H_SERVER_PROPERTY
&Arial
database.
In a document in Edit mode or a form or subform in Design mode, pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the document, form, or subform. If the data was copied from a rich text field but is pasted into a non
rich text field( some information may be lost.
In a document in Read mode, or if the Clipboard is empty, has no effect.
&Arial
C@@P
&Arial
Shutting down the inbound transport prevents the MTA from receiving SMTP messages addressed to recipients in your organization. This allows you to clear the Inbound and Outbound Work Queues.
1. Make sure you shut down the router. See "
Click here
Shutting down the router.n
Click here
2. Type
tell smtpmta stop inbound transport
and press ENTER.
The server shows the open Inbound Session Controllers and the Inbound Session Controller task (ISESCTL) shutting down:
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
other servers f
he SMTP/MIME MTA
the MTA.
5. Selec
led MTA housekee
e MTA server's d
s\upgrade.nsf$3
User$Conflict
template
ws.nsfCheckOutFl
The inbound transport moves messages into the Inbound Work Queue (SMTPIBWQ.NSF). Stopping inbound transport prevents the MTA from accepting inbound SMTP connections.
Go to "
Click here
Clearing SMTP.BOX.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Shutting down the router
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
After shutting down the router and the inbound transport, wait for the MTA to process all messages in SMTP.BOX before proceeding. If you do not have the database icons for SMTP.BOX, the SMTP Outbound Work'Queue (SMTPOBWQ.NSF), and the SMTP Inbound Work Queue (SMTPIBWQ.NSF) on your workspace, add them.
35769136029233966
Adding MTA server system database icons to the workspace
1. Switch to the Lotus Notes client.
2. Choose File - Database - Open.
3. In the Server box, type the name of the MTA server and click Open.
4. In the Filename field, type SMTP.BOX.
5. Click Add Icon.
6. In the Filegame field, type SMTPOBWQ.NSF.
7. Click Add Icon.
8. In the Filename field, type SMTPIBWQ.NSF.
9. Click Add Icon.
10. Click Done.
The icons for SMTP.BOX, the Inbound Work Queue, and the Outbound Work Queue are now on your Notes workspace.
246176896029227116
Verifying that SMTP.BOX has no active messages
1. Make sure you shut down the router and the inbound transport. See "
Click hewe
Shutting down the router
Click here
" and "
Click here
Shutting down the inbound transport.
Click here
2. Double-click the SMTP.BOX icon on your Notes workspace. If this is the first time you have opened the database, you see the "About This Database" document. Press ESC.
3. If there are any messages marked Pending Conversion or Pending Transmission, wait for them to be processed and cleaned up by whe Delivery Report Task (DRT).
4. Verify message processing by pressing F9 or choosing View - Refresh; processed messages are removed from the view.
5. Once the view is empty, or contains only documents marked Dead, SMTP.BOX is clear.
6. Press ESC to close SMTP.BOX.r
There may be some delay between message processing and the DRT removing the message from the view due to the cycle time of the DRT.M
Go to "
Click here
Clearing the Outbound Work Queue.G
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Shutting down the inbound transportt
Click here
&Arial
Clearing the Outbound Work Queue routes all remaining outbound SMTP messages to their destinations.
1. Make sure SMTP.BOX is clear. See "
Click here
Clearing SMTP.BOX.
Click here
2. Double-click the SMTP Outbound Work Queue (SMTPOBWQ.NSF) icon on your Notes workspace. If this is the first time you have opened the database, you see the "About This Database" document. Prgss ESC.
3. Wait until all messages in the Outbound Work Queue are successfully processed by the MTA. There should be either no messages in the view or only messages marked Dead.
4. Verify that all messages except those marked Dead are processed by pressing F9 or choosing View - Refresh. Processed messages are removed from the view by the DRT.
5. Press ESC to close the Outbound Work Queue.
There may be some delay between message processing and the DWT removing the message from the view due to the cycle time of the DRT.
Go to "g
Click here
Clearing the Inbound Work Queue.
Click here
57726771229213029
See Also
Click here
Clearing SMTP.BOX
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Clearing the Inbound Work Queue moves all SMTP messages addressed to recipients in your organization out of the Inbound Work Queue so they can be delivered. Messages in MAIL.BOX are delivered after the server is upgraded and restarted.
1. Make sure you cleared the Outbound Work Queue. See "g
Click here
Clearing the Outgound Work Queue.
Click here
2. Change to the Lotus Notes client.
3. Double-click the SMTP Inbound Work Queue (SMTPIBWQ.NSF) icon on your Notes workspace. If this is the first time you have opened the database, you see the "About This Database" document. Press ESC.
4. Wait until all messages marked Pending Conversion are processed. Verify that all messages except those marked Dead are processed by pressing F9 or choosing View - Refresh.'Processed messages are removed from the view by the DRT.
5. Press ESC to close the Inbound Work Queue.a
There may be some delay between message conversion/transmission and the DRT removing the message from the view due to the cycle time of the DRT.
Go to "
Click here
Shutting down the SMTP/MIME MTA.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Clearing the Outbound Work Queue
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Gfter clearing messages from the MTA, shut it down and upgrade the server.
1. Make sure you cleared the Inbound Work Queue. See "
Click here
Clearing the Inbound Work Queue.
Click here
2. Switch to the Domino server console.
3. Type
quit
and press ENTER.
4. Switch to the Lotus Notes client.
5. Choose File - Exit Notes.
Go to "
Click here
Updating the NOTES.INI file for the Internet mail server.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Clearing the Inbound Work Queue
Click here
ji~ie
&Arial
Lotus recommends that you use fully qualified host names in Server documents in the Domino Directory instead of GP addresses. While IP addresses continue to work and are fully supported, they tend to change more frequently than host names, which can cause issues in the Domino environment if the Server documents are not updated. For example, a subnet change or reorganization may require a change in server addressing. In this case, if the Server document used host names, updating the document would not be necessary, but it would be necessary if the document contained an IP address. In addition, some third-party tools rgcognize only host names, not IP addresses.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
ample
H_EXAMPLES_LOGERRORS_PROPERTY.
See Also
Click here
LogError method
H_LOGERROR_METHOD
Click here
NumErrors property
H_NUMERRORS_PROPERTY
&Arial
ox displays for the highlighted document.
&Arial
7wqFp'
Clearing SMTP.BOXUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\clearing SMTP.BOXMTA servers\iconsSMTP.BOX icons\adding to workspaceSMTP.BOX\clearingSMTP/MIME MTA\clearing SMTP.BOXServer upgrade\clearing SMTP.BOX for MTAContentsStepsH_CLEARING_SMTP_BOX_9605_STEPSTopic1Clearing SMTP.BOXStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_CLEARING_SMTP_BOX_9605_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_35769136029233966=Adding MTA server system database icons to the workspaceH_CLEARING_SMTP_BOX_9605_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_246176896029227116=Verifying that SMTP.BOX has no active messages01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
629225536=T
Clearing the Outbound Work QueueUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\clearing the outbound work queueOutbound Work Queue\clearingSMTP/MIME MYA\clearing outbound work queueSMTPOBWQ.NSF\clearingServer upgrade\clearing outbound work queueContentsStepsH_CLEARING_THE_OUTBOUND_WORK_QUEUE_3680_STEPSTopic1Clearing the Outbound Work QueueStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_CLEARING_THE_OUTBOUND_WORK_QUEUE_3680_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_57726771229213029=01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Clearing the Inbound Work QueueUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Inbound Work Queue\clearingMTA servers\clearing the inbound work queueSMTP/MIME MTA\clearing inbound work queueSMTPIBWQ.NSF\clearingServir upgrade\clearing inbound work queue for MTAContentsStepsH_CLEARING_THE_INBOUND_WORK_QUEUE_9874_STEPSTopic1Clearing the Inbound Work QueueStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
iewH_BASIC
Shutting down the SMTP/MIME MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\shutting downSMTP/MIME MTA\shutting down to upgradeServer upgrade\shutting down MTA to upgradeContentsStepsH_SHUTTING_DOWN_THE_SMTP_MTA_49_STEPSTopic1Shutting down the SMTP/MIME MTA serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEAYE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
S_FOR_CREAT
Updating the NOTES.INI file for the Internit mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail servers\NOTES.INI settingsMTA servers\preventing from loading after upgradingNOTES.INI settings\MTA server andReporter task\and upgradingSMTP/MIME MTA\preventing from loadingSMTP/MIME MTA\removing from ServerTasksSMTPMTA setting\removing from NOTES.INIServer upgrade\preventing MTA from loadingContentsStepsH_STOPPING_THE_SMTP_MTA_FROM_LOADING_6338_STEPSTopic1Updating the NOTES.INI file for the Internet mail serverSteysH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
UMENTS_OV
Removing Domino as an NT ServiceUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
NT service\removing before upgradingServer upgrade\removing Domino as an NT serviceUpgrade steps\for Domino serverWindows NT service\removing before upgradingContentsOverviewH_REMOVING_DOMINO_AS_AN_NT_SERVICE_9105_OVERTopic1Removing Domino as an NT ServiceOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Servir
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
79 16H_S
Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino server\installingMTA seryers\installing Domino onRelease 5\installing on an MTA serverSMTP/MIME MTA\installing Release 5 onServer upgrade\and installing Release 5ContentsStepsH_INSTALLING_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_2296_STEPSTopic1Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ALOG 176
Encrypted messages in mixed environmentsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Encryption\mailMail\encryptedMessages\encryptedContentsOverviewH_ENCRYPTED_MESSAGES_IN_MIXED_ENVIRONMENTS_8359_OVERTopic1Encrypted messages in iixed environmentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Formatting paragraphs in a document
Documents
Formatting\paragraphsParagraphs\formatting
ContentsOverviewH_ALIGNMENT_AND_SPACING_IN_DOCUMENTS_OVERTopic1Formatting paragraphs in a documentOverviewH_BASICS_FOR_CREATING_A_DOCUMENT_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory\compactingDomino Directory\replicatingDomino Directory\upgrading toMTA server~\upgrading Public Address BookNAMES.NSF\compactingNAMES.NSF\upgradingPUBNAMES.NTF\upgradingPublic Address Book\compactingPublic Address Book\upgradingSMTP/MIME MTA\upgrading Public Address BookServer upgrade\upgrading Public Address BookContentsStepsH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPSTopic1Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_DECIDING_WHEN_^O_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236990=Upgrading the Public Address Book to the Domino Directory templateH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_246176896029227116=Compacting the Domino Directory after upgradingH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_200169699229229349=Rebuilding views in the Domino DirectoryH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPNRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236991=Updating views in databases on the upgraded Domino serverH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_35769136029233966=Replicating the Domino Directory design to other servers01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting server configuration for an Internet mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Configuration document\changing for upgraded MTA server to enable native SMTPDomino server\configuringInternet mail servers\cnnfiguringMTA servers\enabling SMTPSMTP\upgraded MTA server andSMTP/MIME MTA\enabling SMTPServer Configuration document\enabling SMTPServer upgrade\SMTP andContentsStepsH_CREATING_A_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_DOCUMENT_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1707_STEPSTopic1Setting server configuration for an Internet mail serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=Da~id Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Editing the Server document for an Internet mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail servers\editing Server document forListener task\M^A server andMTA servers\enabling SMTP Listener taskSMTP Listener task\enabling for upgraded MTA serverSMTP/MIME MTA\enabling SMTP Listener taskServer documents\SMTP routing information inServer upgrade\enabling SMTP Listener task for Internet mail serverContentsStepsH_EDITING_THE_SERVER_DOCUMENT_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_9656_STEPSTopic1Editing the Server document for an Internet mail serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release >02 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
~YpkM
R"wce
Upgrading the Administration Requests database on an MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Relea~e 5
ADMIN4.NSF\upgradingAdministration Process\upgradingAdministration Requests database\upgradingAdministration servers\upgradingMTA servers\upgrading Administration Requests databaseSMTP/MIME MTA\upgrading Administration Requests databaseContentsStepsH_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_DATABASE_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_9045_STEPSTopic1Upgrading the Administration Requests database on an MTA serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to No~es and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading system templates on an MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Rnlease 5
Templates\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_TEMPLATES_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_103_OVERTopic1Upgrading system templates on an MTA serverOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_TEMPLATES_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_103_OVER_MIDTOPIC_179843193629308160=Databases upgraded automaticallyH_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_TEMPLATES_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_103_OVER_MIDTOPIC_179843193629308161=Databases not upgraded automatically01 Moving to Notes and Domino Relense 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Template interoperability on an MTA serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOvervnewH_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_7553_OVERTopic1Template interoperability on an MTA serverOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_7553_OVER_MIDTOPIC_410838412829308183=Templates supported with the R4 clientH_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_7553_OVER_MIDTOPIC_410838412829308184=Templates supported with altered appearance wth an R4 clientH_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_ON_AN_MTA_SERVER_7553_OVER_NIDTOPIC_410838412829308185=Templates that are not supported with an R4 client01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How R5 replaces the MTAUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino server\mail routingInbound services\replacing with R5 mail serverMIME messages\converting in a mixed-release environmentMail routing\Domino server andMail\MIME formatOutbound services\replacing with R5 mail serverContentsOverviewH_HOW_R5_REPLACES_THE_MTA_4590_OVERTopic1How R5 replaces the MTAOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino ^elease 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuration in R4 vs. R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Foreign SMTP Domain document\Internet mail configuration andGlobal Domain document\Internet mail configuration andMTA servers\configuringMail\configuring for InternetNOTES.INI file\Internet mail configuration andSMTP Connection document\Internet mail configuration andServer documents\Internet mail configuration andServers\configuring for Internet mailContentsOverviewH_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R5_6589_OVERTopic1Configuration in R4 vs. R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASN_5_0_4124_OVER
H_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R5_6589_OVER_MIDTOPIC_424828272029239806=R4 Server document (Public Address Book)H_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R5_6589_OVER_MIDTOPIC_424828272029239807=R4 Foreign SMTP Domain document (Public Address Book)H_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R5_6589_OVER_MIDTOPIC_424828272029239808=<+!>R4 Global Domain Document (Public Address Book)<-!>H_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R5_6589_OVER_MIDTOPIC_424828272029239809=R4 NOTES.INI parameters (server NOTES.INI file)H_CONFIGURATION_IN_R4_VS_R>_6589_OVER_MIDTOPIC_424828272029239810=R4 SMTP Connection document01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
MTA upgrade scenariosUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail\upgrading andContentsOverviewH_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_OVERTopic1MTA upgrade scenariosOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_OVER_MIDTOPIC_33076467229237769=Leave your R4 MTA servers in placeH_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_OVER_MIDTOPIC_33076467229237770=Replace all R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers firstH_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_NVER_MIDTOPIC_79110931229237804=Replace all R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers during system upgradeH_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_OVER_MIDTOPIC_79170931229237805=Rework the messaging infrastructureH_MTA_UPGRADE_SCENARIOS_2020_OVER_MIDTOPIC_79170931229237806=Use a mixed MTA upgrade strategy01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail serversUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsExamplesH_REPLACING_R4_MTAS_WITH_R5_MAIL_SERVERS_9864_EXTopic1Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail serversExamplesH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Donino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using a third-party relay host with an R5 mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Relnase 5
Gateways\relay hosts andInternet mail\third-party relay hosts andMX records\third-party relay hosts andRelay hosts\upgrading andContentsOverviewH_USING_A_RELAY_HOST_WITH_AN_R5_MAIL_SERVER_8681_OVERTopic1Using a third-party relay host with an R5 mail serverOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the cc:Mail and X.400 MTAs with Domino R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\upgradingcc:Mail\MTA and R5x.400\MTA and R5ContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_CC_MAIL_AND_X_400_MTAS_WITH_DOMINN_R5_8019_OVERTopic1Using the cc:Mail and X.400 MTAs with Domino R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environmentsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail\routing in a mixed release environmentMail routing\in a mixed release environmentContentsOverviewH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVERTopic1Internet mail routing in mixed-release environmentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236990=Internet mail conversion in mixed-release environmentsH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236991=Using the inbound and outbound services of the R4 SMTP/MIME MTA H_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236992=When an R5 router delivers a message to a recipient's mail fileH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236993=When an R5 server transfers a message to an R4 serverH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236994=When an R5 router sends mail over SMTPH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_46645049629240175=When an R5 server replicates with an R4 serverH_INTERNET_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENTS_9385_OVER_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236995=When an R5 Notes client composes a MIME message ann sends it through an R4 Domino server (the user's mail server is R4)01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ESdoG
&Arial
You must enable native SMTP routing in the Configuration Settings document to allow the upgraded mail server to route mail using SMTP. Configuration Settings documents can apply to a single server, all servers in a domain, or a group of servers. Edit the Configuration Settings document that applies to the upgraded server, but be aware thay this modification affects any other servers that use this Configuration Settings document. If necessary, create a new Configuration Settings document for your Release 5 Internet mail servers.
If you do not have Configuration Settings documents for your Domino servers, create them to reflect your Release 5 configuration. For example, if you have a mail server, an application server, and a firewall server, and only the mail server will use SMTP routing, create two Configuration Settings documeits: one for the mail server with SMTP routing enabled, and one for the application and firewall servers without SMTP routing enabled.
1. Make sure you upgraded the design of your Public Address Book to the Domino Directory template.
See "
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail server.
Click here
Note
The Domino Directory for the domain must use the Release 9 template because the settings for native SMTP appear only in the Release 5 Domino Directory Configuration Settings form.
2. In the Domino Administrator, click the Administration window tab.
3. Click the Configuration tab.
4. Expand the Server Configuration section.
5. Click Configurations.
6. If you have a Configuration Settings document that you want to use for this server, select it and click Edit Configuration. If not, click Aid Configuration.
7. If you are creating a new configuration, do the following:
Enter a server name in the Basics section.
Select which Group or Server this configuration should apply to. Do not select "Use these settings as the default settings for all servers" unless you want every server that this document controls to use SMTP to send messages to the Internet instead of through an Internet mail server.
8. Click the Router/SMTP tab.
) 9. On the Basics tab, click the down arrow next to "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain."
10. Select Enabled and click OK.
11. If your organization uses a relay host, enter its host name or IP address in the field "Relay host for messages leaving the local internet domain."
12. Click the Save and Close button on the Action bar.
If you created a document, it appears in the view.
Go to "
Click iere
Editing the Server document for an Internet mail server.
Click here
Note
Relay host servers require additional configuration. See
Administering the Domino System
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Editing the Yerver document for an Internet mail server
Click here
Click here
Setting up a relay host or firewall
Click here
Click here
Setting up a smart host
Click here
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Configuration in R4 vs. R5
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing outside the local Internet domain
Click here
&Arial
Edit the Server document for the upgraded server to enable the SMTP listener task, which listens for inbound SMTP requests. This change tells the server to load the SMTP listener task at startup.
1. Make sure you set the server configuration to enable the server to route outbound SMTP mail. See "
Click here
Setting server configuration for an Internet mail server.{
Click here
" Remember that a Configuration Settings document can apply to more than one server, so you may want to create more than one Configuration Settings document.
Note
The Domino Directory for the domain must use the Release 5 template since the settings for native SMTP appear only in the Release 5 Domino Directory.
2. In the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Expand the Server Configuration section.t
4. Click "All Server Documents." s
5. Double-click the server document for the upgraded Internet mail server.
6. Click Edit Server.o
7. On the Basics tab, click the down arrow next to "SMTP listener task."
8. Select Enabled and click OK.m
9. Click the Save and Close button on the Action bar.
10. Close the Domino Directory.
Note
Do not remove SMTP routing information fyom the Server document. Existing routing information allows you to route Internet mail in a mixed R4 / R5 environment, or in a Release 5 environment that uses R4-style routing. Removing this information may affect Internet mail routing and delivery in these environments.
See Also
Click here
Setting server configuration for an Internet mail server
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTY/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing within the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Setting up a server to receive mail sent via SMTP routing
Ilick here
Click here
Setting up a smart host
Click here
~YpkM
R"wce
&Arial
If the upgraded mail server is also the administration server for the domain's Domino Directory, upgrade the design of its Administration Requests database (AIMIN4.NSF) to the R5 template (ADMIN4.NTF). If the upgraded server is not the administration server, you do not need to upgrade its template -- after upgrading the template for the administration server, you replicate the new design to all other Domino servers.
For more information, see "
Click here
Upgrading the administration server for the Domino Directory.t
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upirading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Domino automatically upgrades many system templates to Release 5 design.
179843193629308160
Databases upgraded automatically
Database Title
File Name
Administration Requestsd
ADMIN4.NTF
Agent Logf
ALOG4.NTF
Billing
BILLING.NTFp
Local free time info
BUSYTIME.NTF
Catalog
CATALOG.NTF
Certification Logr
CERTLOG.NTF
Cluster Directory
CLDBDIR4.NTF
Master Address Book (to Directory Assistance)
MAB.NTF (DA50.NTF)
Database Analysis
DBA4.NTF
Domino Configuration
DOMCFG.NTF
Domino Web Server Log
DOMLOG.NTF
Statistics & Events4
EVENTS4.NTFo
Notes Log Analysis
LOGA4.NTF
Notes Logu
LOG.NTF
Mail Router Mailbox
MAILBOX.NTF,
<Server>
Mailbox
MAIL.BOX
NT/Migrating Users' Passwords
NTSYNC45.NTF
Public Address Book (to Domino Directory)
PUBNAMES.NTF
Server Web Navigator
PUBWEB45.NTF (PUBWEB50.NTF)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
179843193629308161
Databases not upiraded automatically
Database Title
File Name
Certificate Authorityg
CCA*.NTF (* = Release Number; e.g., 50)a
Server Certificate Admin
CSRV*.NTF (* = Release Number; e.g., 50)
Statistics Reporting
STATRP45.NTF
Domino Web Administrations
WEBADMIN.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
Notes R4 clients can render some system databases that use R5 templates transparently. Some R5 templates, though, do not render well to R4 clients. Templates fall into three categories: those that are supported with the R4 client, those that are supported iut have altered appearance, and those that should not be used in a mixed environment.
410838412829308183
Templates supported with the R4 client
Database title
File Name
Agent Log
ALOG4.NTF
Billing
BILLING.NTF
Local free time info
BUSYTIME.NTF
Domino R5 Certificate Authority
CCA59.NTF
Certification Log
CERTLOG.NTF
Cluster Analysis
CLUSTA4.NTF
Database Library
DBLIB4.NTF
Microsoft Office Library
DOCLBM50.NTF
Doc Library - Notes & Web
DOCLBW50.NTF
Personal Journal
JOURNAL4.NTF
Notes Log
LOG.NTF
Mail Router Mailbox
MAILBOX.NTF
Personal Web Navigator
PERWEB50.NTF
NT/Migrating Users' Passwords
NTSYNC45.NTF
Statistics Reporting
STATREP5.NTF
Domino Configuration
DOMCFG.NTF
Domino Web Server Log
DOMLOG.NTF
Mailing List
MAILLIST.NTF
NNTP Discussion
NNTPDI50.NTF
Server Web Navigator
PUBWEB50.NTF
Reports
REPORTS.NTF
Resource Reservations
RESRC50.NTF
Site Registration4
SIREGW50.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
410838412829308184
Templates supported with altered appearance wth an R4 client
Database Title
File Name
Archive Log
ARCHLG50.NTF
Catalog
CATALOG.NTF
Cluster Directory
CLDBDIR4.NTF
Database Analysis
DBA4.NTF
Decommission Server Reports
DECOMSRV.NTF
Directory Assistance
DA50.NTF
Domino Directory
PUBNAMES.NTF
Notes Log Analysis
LOGA4.NTF
Personal Address Book
PERNAMES.NTF
Statistics & Events
EVENTS4.NTF
DECS Administrator Template (partial support)
DECSADM.NTF
heid title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
410838412829308185
Templates that are not supported with an R4 client
Database Title
File Name
Bookmarkse
BOOKMARK.NTF
Design Synopsis Template
DSGNSYN.NTFE
Domino Administrator
DOMADMIN.NTF
Directory Catalog4
DIRCAT5.NTFE
Subscriptions0
HEADLINE.NTF
Mail (IMAP)T
IMAPCL5.NTFI
Mail (R5.0)D
MAIL50.NTF
TeamRoom (5.0)
TEAMROOM.NTF
Domino MailTracker Store
MTSTORE.NTFm
News Articles (NNTP)
NNTPCL5.NTF
Domino R5 Certificate Administration
CSRV50.NTF
User Registration Queue
USERREG.NTF
Web Administration
WEBADMIN.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
When you enable an R5 server to send messages over SMTP outside the local Internet domain (configured in the Server Configuration document), the server does not require)Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents, since the server can connect via TCP and route mail via SMTP.
Howevere
, in Release 5.0.3, Domino follows Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents for SMTP mail routing, making your upgrade to R5 easier.
The server can use a relay host as needed and can make connections using DNS or using a hosts file. The server uses the router to route mail over SMTP and to perform conversion between Notes format messages and MIME foymat messages. Thus, the R5 server replaces the outbound services of the MTA.S
When you enable an R5 server to listen for inbound SMTP connections (configured in the Server document), the server performs the same functions as the inbound MTA services. Inbound messages are stored in MAIL.BOX and transferred or delivered by the router. MIME messages are stored in that format and routed over either Notes RPC or SMTP to their destination. If needed, the router converts between MIME and Notes format)messages.
See Also
Click here
MTA upgrade scenariosh
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers
Click here
&Arial
In Release 5, the NSFBufferPool has no effective size limit, though it is constrained by operating system limits and, potentially, by the maximum siye of a NOTES.INI variable. NOTES.INI variables cannot be larger than 2GB, since these are signed variables. This is a change from R4.5 and R4.6, when the NSFBufferPool had a coded limit in Domino.
When a Domino server starts, the server allocates between 1/4 (25%) and 3/8 (37.5%) of the physical RAM on the server to the NSFBufferPool as memory for Domino. A Notes client allocates memory similarly, but sets a maximum of 8MB on the NSFBufferPool. Administrators (for the server) and end users (fir the client) can override this default allocation and set the size of the NSFBufferPool manually by using one of two NOTES.INI variables:
NOTES.INI variable
Units
Limit
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size=x
Bytes
2GB, based on NOTES.INI variable limitations
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Yize_MB=x
none; subject to OS limits
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
The NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size_MB variable removes the 2GB limitation that exists for NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size due to NOTES.INI variable limits.
Tuning the NSFBufferPool should not be necessary, except on partitioned servers. In some cases, Domino does not need all the memiry in the NSFBufferPool, so administrators may wish to experiment with decreasing the amount of memory in the NSFBufferPool by setting one of the NOTES.INI variables. This allows the server to use the memory for other purposes.
On partitioned servers, allocating all the memory normally reserved for the NSFBufferPool could result in problems -- for example, a computer with 6 Domino partioned servers could not allocate 25% of memory to each partition. Administrators should divide the memory that)would be allocated to a Domino server (from 1/4 to 3/8 of physical RAM) by the number of partitions and manually set the NSFBufferPool size via a NOTES.INI variable for each server. Administrators can then modify the setting for each partition depending on the relative load. r
In general, it is best to allow Domino to allocate memory for the NSFBufferPool. Set the size of the NSFBufferPool only if the server is running slowly due to inadequate available memory.
See Also
Click here
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
Click here
&Arial
When you upgrade a Domino server to R5, you gain features, functionality, and performance without changing your server configuration, topology, routing, or addressing.
To upgrade a server, perform the following steps:
1.
Click here
Shut down the Domino server.
Click here
2.
Click here
Back up important server files.
Click here
3.
Click here
Update the NOTES.INI file.
Click here
4. If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service,
Click here
remove the Service.
Click here
5.
Click here
Install the Domino Release 5 software.
Click here
6.
Click here
Upgride the Public Address Book template and replicate this template to all Domino servers.
Click here
7.
Click here
Upgrade the administration server for the Domino Directory.
Click here
8.
Click here
Upgrade the design of the Administration Requests database
and repliiate this template to all Domino servers.
See also information on:
171026278429244022
New Features
Click here
Using new Domino R5 features
Click here
131783193629308160
System Templates
Click here
Upgrading system templates
Click here
Click here
Template interoperability
Click here
164633987229247820
Performance Improvements
Click here
Upgrading a mail server to use multiple threadsn
Click here
Click here
Using multiple MAIL.BOX databases
Click here
164633987229247822
Upgrade Changes
Click here
Creating new R4 servers in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Changing Domino server time zone and daylight savings time settings
Click here
Click here
NSFBufferPool in R5
Click here
Click here
Maximum requests over a single connectiona
Click here
Note
Domino automatically upgrades MAIL.BOX to the R5 database format aid design. Any messages in MAIL.BOX are preserved.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Supporting long file names for Domino on OS/2 Warp
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
New Domino server features
Clici here
Click here
Changing Domino server time zone and daylight savings time settings
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a mail server to use multiple threads
Click here
Click here
Using multiple MAIL.BOX databases
Click here
G0 Uf4
&Arial
This topic describes configuration information in the R4 MTA and where that information exists and is configured in the R5 Internet mail server.
424828272029239806
R4 Server document (Public Address Book)
Item
R5 location
SMTP Mail Routing task, in Routing Tasks field
Server Configuration document: "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain." You must continue to list SMTP Mail Routing in the Routing Tasks field in the Server document if R4 and non-SMTP R5 servers route Internet mail to this server or if you continue to use Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents in af all-SMTP environment.l
General section - Fully qualified Internet host name
Server document
General - Global domain name
All R5 servers use all R5 Global domain documents and do not need to find only one documentt
Control section -- Poll for new messages every
minutes
Not used in R5
Control - MTA work path
Not used in R5
Control - Log level
In server log file (LOG.NSF) -- SMTP outbound logging is router logging; SMTP inbound logging is SMTP task logging. Controlled in Configuration Settings document: Router/SMTP - Advanced - Controls tab, Miscellaneous Controls section, Logging Level.
Control - Enable daily housekeeping
Not used in R5
Control - Perform daily housekeeping at
Not used in R5
Conversion - header handling
Not used in R5
Conversion - 1
Attachment encoding method
Server Configuration document - MIME-Conversion Options-Outbound tab
Conversion - Message content
Server Configuration document - MIME-Conversion Options-Outbound tab
Conversion - Support return receipts
Server Configuration document - MIME-Conversion Options-General tab - Return receiptss
Conversion - Language parameters
Server Configuration document - MIME-Basics tab and MIME-Settings by Character Set Groupss
Conversion - Use character set detfction routines
Server Configuration doc - MIME-Conversion Options-Inbound tab - Use character set auto-detection if message has no character set information
Conversion - Message Typefacen
Server Configuration doc - Conversion Options - MIME - Settings by Character Set groupss
Conversion - Message Point Size
Server Configuration doc - Conversion Optionv - MIME - Settings by Character Set groupso
Conversion - Outbound Macintosh message conversion
Server Configuration doc - Conversion Options-MIME-Advanced-Advanced Outbound Message Options tab - Macintosh attachment conversion
Inbound Configuration - Number of Processes
Not used in R5
Outbound Configuration - Number of Processes
Not used in R5
Outbound Configuration - Maximum outbound msg size
Server Configuration doc - Router/SMTP-Restrictions and Controls-Restrictions tab - Maximum message size
Transport Configuration - Host name mapping
Server Configuration doc - Router/SMTP-Basics tab - Host name lookup
Server Configuration document - Restrictions and Controls-Restrictions tab - Allow mail only from Notes domains
Deny mail from domains
Server Configuration document - Restrictions and Controls - Restrictions - Deny mail from Notes domains
Messages addressed to [Internet domain] should be routed to [Domain name] or [Internet host]
Used if R5 to route Internet mail to Domino SMTP servers, unless all mail servers can route outbound SMTP Internet mail. If your organization only uses a few SMTP servers (R4 "gateway" architecture), continue to use Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents to route outbound Internet mail to the SMTP servers. In Release 5.0.3, Domino follows existing Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents even in an all-SMTP environment.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
In Release 5.0.3, Domino follows Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents for SMTP mail routing.
424828272029239808
R4 Global Domain Document (Public Address Book)
Item
R5 location2
Global Domain document
All existing documents are carried foward
Primary Internet domain (set in first Global Domain document in V4)e
Global Domain document - Conversions - SMTP Address Conversion - Local primary Internet domain. R5 pulls primary domain from first Global Domain document.
Alternate Internet domain aliases (set in all other Global Domain documents in R4)
Global Domain document - Conversions - SMTP Address Conversion - Alternate Internet domain aliases (R5 pulls aliases from all Global Domain documents except first one)
Internet address lookupr
Server Configuration document - Router/SMTP-Basics tab - Address lookup. If enabled, R5 looks for the Internet address in the Domino Directory; if disabled, Domino converts the Internet address.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
424828272029239809
R4 NOTES.INI parameters (server NOTES.INI file&
Item
R5 location
MailMaxThreads (maximum number of message transfer threads)
Server Configuration document - Router/SMTP-Restrictions and Controls-Transfer Controls tab - Maximum transfer threads
MailDisablePriority (set to 1 to route all mail as Normal priority regardless of designated priority)
Server Configuration document - Router/SMTP-Advanced-Controls tab - Advanced Transfer Controls section - Ignore mevsage priority
MailLowPriorityTime (sets time range during which Low priority messages are routed)
Server Configuration document - Router/SMTP-Restrictions and Controls-Transfer Controls tab - Low priority mail routing time range
Log_Mailrouting (controls amount of logging performed during message routing)
Server document - Ports - Internet Ports - Mail - Mail (SMTP Inbound) and Mail (SMTP Outbound) - TCP/IP port number - set to port 25 on upgrade
SMTPMTA_CONVERT_ORIGINATOR (looks up originator's address in Public Address Book)
Not used in R5
SMTP_KEEP1MEANS1=X (Force MTA to treat local domain in same way as other domains)
Not used in R5
SMTPMTA_DEFIED_DOMAINS=t
filename
, where
filename
is an ASCII file with list of denied domains (deny mail from Internet domains)
Server Configuration documents - Restrictions and Controls - SMTP Inbound Controls and SMTP Outbound Controls sections
SMTPMTA_NO_INLINE_CONTENT_DISP=1 (Disable RFC 1806 support to disable content disposition headers if disposition type is inline)
Not used in R5
SMTPMTA_TRACE_LEVEL=0x00000100 (enhanced tracing in log)
Not used in R5 -- logging is normal server logging
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
424828272029239810
R4 SMTP Connection document
Item
R5 location
Relay host
Server Configuration document, Router/SMTP-Basics tab, "Relay host for messages leaving vhe local internet domain." You must also enable the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" for the relay host to function properly.
Note
If the source server is an R4 SMTP/MIME MTA, the MTA follows the setting in the relay host field in this document - the MTA is not able to use the field in the Server Configuration document.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
In Release 5.0.3, Domino follows Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents for SMTP mail routing.
Note
For additional NOTES.INI parameters related to Internet mail, see Appendix E, "NOTES.INI File," in
Administering the Domino System
or Domino Administration Help.p
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server&that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Editing the Server document for an Internet mail server
Click here
Click here
Setting server configuration for an Internet mail server
Click here
Click here
Creating a Configuration Settings document
Click here
Click here
Replfcing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers
Click here
Click here
Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parameters
Click here
&Arial
Each organization should consider when to upgrade its R4 MTA servers to R5 mail servfrs. R5 has three major changes that affect this decision:
The R5 router sends, routes, and delivers MIME messages over both SMTP and Notes RPC
The R5 database format stores MIME messages natively
Notes R5 clients can create, read, and send MIME messages over both SMTP and Notes RPC
When considering upgrading the MTAs to R5, you have a number of options:
Click here
Leave the R4 MTAs in place until the rest of your system iv upgraded
This path leaves your R4 MTA servers in place until you have upgraded all other Domino servers and Notes clients to R5. This ensures a known level of functionality for Internet message traffic during the upgrade process, but does not allow your organization to use the new Internet mail features of the R5 server. For examvle, Notes R5 clients cannot send native MIME to Internet recipients with this strategy -- their R5 mail server must convert the native MIME to Notes format and then transfer it to the R4 MTA. This increases load on the mail server and could cause some loss of message fidelity.
33076467229237770
Replace all R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers first
The R5 mail servers perform the same tasks as R4 MTAs, with greater performance, stability, and message fidelity. Your organfzation can use R5 features such as restrictions to prevent spamming and control maximum message size. Notes R5 and Internet clients can use native MIME seamlessly.
If you upgrade your R4 MTA servers to R5 before upgrading the rest of your Domino system, the R5 mail servers store MIME messages in MIME format, but must convert the messages to Notes format, an attachment containing the MIME message, or both, when transferring the message to an R4 server.
For more information, see "
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments.
Click here
As you change your infrastructure to R5, the R5 mail servers can route MIME messages to other R5 mail servers, which can deliver the messages or perform the conversion for R4 servers.
79110931229237804
Replace all R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers during system upgrade
This strategy is similar to upgrading MTAs before upgrading the rest&of your system, but allows you to select when to begin conversion on hub servers or spoke servers. For example, if you use a Domino POP3 server to host mail for a large number of POP3 clients, you might wait to upgrade your MTAs until you upgrade the POP3 server to prevent any need for conversion by the POP3 server or its hub. In addition, if your hub servers are near capacity, but your spoke servers have extra capacity, you might wait to upgrade the MTA servers until the spoke servers have been upgraded tf prevent placing the conversion load on the hubs.
79170931229237805i
Rework the messaging infrastructure
In an R4-style Internet messaging infrastructure, all Internet mail messages route through one or more dedicated MTA servers. In R5, this is no longer necessary as all R5 servers can route Internet mail, including performing any necessary conversions. You can decide when to move from an R4 "gateway" architecture to a more distributed Internet mail routing schefe.
When you enable a distributed infrastructure, where messages no longer route through a few SMTP servers but rather use the R5 router to transfer Internet mail, consider the possible conversion load from Notes clients. If a Notes client sends a message to Internet recipients in Notes message format, the R5 mail server converts that message to MIME and routes it. If your mail servers are near capacity, this conversion load may place an unacceptable strain on them. However, spreading conversifn across all mail servers, instead of concentrating it on a few MTA servers, is often a performance improvement for organizations. Depending on your system, you may want to wait until you begin converting Notes clients to R5 to rework your messaging architecture -- since R5 clients can send and read MIME, the conversion load on their mail servers is less.
Even if you enable SMTP routing on all mail servers in your organization, they do not all need direct Internet access -- you can use a relay&host for mail routing beyond your local Internet domain and for security purposes. The relay host can be an R5 mail server, an R4 MTA, or a third-party product.
If you do enable direct Internet access for all mail servers, make sure they are correctly configured and properly registered with the InterNIC. Many systems do not accept connections or mail from servers that are improperly configured or not registered as a safeguard against spam and as a relay security measure.
79170931229237806
Use a mixed MTA upgrade strategy
Some organizations will use a combined strategy depending on their needs and infrastructure. For example, a multinational organization may immediately upgrade its MTA servers in one part of the world and wait until the Domino system is at R5 to upgrade in another. Use these scenarios and the needs of your organization to determine the optimal upgrade strategy.
See Also
Click here
Fow R5 replaces the MTAt
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers
Click here
Click here
Configuration in R4 vs. R5
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Encrypted messages in mixed environments
Click here
Click here
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
Click here
Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parameters
Click here
&Arial
To illustrate replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers, consider an infrastructure with 3 Domino servers: MTA1, Hub-E, and Hub-W. MTA1 is the SMTP server for the orfanization, and Hub-E and Hub-W are hub servers that route mail to a number of spoke servers. If you upgrade MTA1 to R5 and leave the hubs at R4, MTA1 performs all necessary message conversion, as it did when the server was at R4. When you upgrade Hub-E and Hub-W to R5, MTA1 routes Internet messages to the hubs in MIME, and the hubs perform message conversion for R4 spokes. As you upgrade spoke servers to R5, the hub servers perform fewer conversions. However, the spoke servers must convert messages for thefr R4 clients. Finally, when you upgrade the Notes clients to R5, MIME messages can be routed from MTA1 to the destination client without conversion.t
This upgrade process spreads the conversion load over more servers as the process progresses -- from 1 server (MTA1) initially to many servers (the spokes) towards the end. It is important to consider the performance and capabilities of the hubs and spoke servers -- for example, the spokes might not have enough spare performance to handle the conversion load, which might necessitate a different upgrade strategy.
R5 SMTP routing attempts to locate the Internet Address for a Notes user either within the message (if the message is created by an R5, IMAP, or POP client) or within the $Users view in the Domino Directory. For best performance, populate the Internet Address field in your organization's Person documents (if the Short Name field does not already contain an Internet address for each user) with the administration tool for Internft addresses. Also, register new users with an R5 Domino Administrator client to ensure that each user has a valid Internet address. r
For more information, see "A
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents.
Click here
Note
You can add the variable MailConvertMIMEOnTransfer=1 to the Domino server's NOTES.INI file to force the server to convert inbound mail from the Internet from MIME&to the format specified in each recipient's Person document in the Domino Directory. This setting causes the router on the Release 5 server to mimic the functionality of the Release 4 SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent. If you do not set this variable, the R5 router forwards the native MIME messages to the next hop servers. Any necessary conversion takes place on transfer to an R4 server or on delivery to the user's mail file.
See Also
Click here
MTA upfrade scenarios1
Click here
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Encrypted messages in mixed environments
Click here
Click here
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
Click here
Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parameters
Click here
&Arial
If messages initially reach your system via a third-party product, you can still use R5 funcvionality to improve performance. Often, the third-party server or gateway routes Internet mail messages to a server or group of servers running the R4 MTA. You can replace this routing path with one where the gateway routes directly to R5 mail servers via SMTP. Unless the gateway can query the Domino Directory to determine the correct mail server for a recipient, you use multiple MX records in the DNS with the same preference to spread the incoming load across the R5 mail servers. While the percentage of mfssages that initially reach the correct destination server is small, it increases as the number of R5 mail servers able to receive mail via SMTP increases. In addition, since the R5 servers can access the Domino Directory to determine the correct mail server for each recipient, the destination server is generally only one hop away.
This method spreads the load of inbound Internet mail messages across all your R5 servers. If one server is down, mail automatically redirects to the other availablf servers. c
If there are only a few R5 servers and many R4 servers, these R5 servers handle the load of receiving and converting Internet messages for all of the R4 servers. However, as the number of R5 servers increases, this load decreases. y
If you replace the third-party gateway with an R5 mail server that is able to access the Domino Directory through either Notes RPC or LDAP, the "gateway" server does not need to spread messages blindly across other servers, but can instead fetermine the correct destination server for each message and route it appropriately.c
See Also
Click here
MTA upgrade scenarios
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
For organizations using the cc:Mail Message Transfer Agent, use version 4.6.4.2 of the cc:Mail MTA with Domino R5. You must leave the cc:Mail MTA server in its Domino R4 release. Do not replicate the Domino Dfrectory template to the cc:Mail MTA server.
For organizations using the X.400 Message Transfer Agent, the X.400 MTA currently runs only under R4.6x of the Domino server. Future releases of the MTA will support R5.
For more information, see http://www.lotus.com/messaging.i
&Arial
Domino R5 routes Internet mail (MIME) over both Notes RPC (Remote Procedure Calls) and SMTP. R4 servers do not support native MIME delivery or SMTP routing; they use the MTA to accomplish these tasks.
You can control how an R5 server transfers a MIME message to an R4 server if it cannot access a user's Person document -- the R5 server either converts the MIME message to Notes format and transfers it, reducing storage space and bandwidth use but with some loss of message fidelity; or it monverts the MIME message to Notes format and also creates an attachment containing the original MIME, preserving message fidelity but increasing storage space and bandwidth use. The decision on which method to use is yours and can be optimized for your system and users' needs. The default setting is to convert MIME messages to Notes format without an attachment.c
If you select to convert the message to Notes format and also create an attachment containing the original MIME, Domino preserves fuml message format -- if an Internet mail client accesses the message, Domino sends it the MIME from the attachment. The R4 server deposits both the Notes format message and the MIME attachment in a user's mail file for this reason. For these messages in a mixed environment with this conversion setting, mail storage requirements and network utilization roughly double
for each of these messages onlyR
324088825629236990
Internet mail conversion in mixed-release mnvironments
In a mixed-release environment, routing native MIME messages and sending Notes format messages to the Internet requires some conversion. Conversion takes place in the following scenarios.
324088825629236991
Using the inbound and outbound services of the R4 SMTP/MIME MTA
The MTA converts outbound Notes messages to MIME format and routes them via SMTP. It converts inbound MIME messages to Notes format (with or without a MIME attachment) anm routes them over Notes RPC using the Notes router. The R4 MTA converts and delivers based on the settings in the recipient's Person document, if the MTA can access it. If the setting of the Internet Message Storage field in the R4 Person document is:
Prefers Notes Rich Text (Notes only in R4), the MTA converts the message to Notes format and routes it.t
Prefers MIME (Internet only in R4), the MTA packages the messages as a MIME attachment and routes it.
No Preferencm (Notes and Internet in R4), the MTA converts the message to Notes format, adds an attachment containing the original MIME, and routes it.
324088825629236992
When an R5 router delivers a message to a recipient's mail file
The router checks the recipient's Person document in the R5 Domino Directory. The field "Format preference for incoming mail" determines the recipient's preference for Internet messages. If the message is in Notes format and
the fimld is set to Prefers Notes Rich Text, the router delivers the message.
the field is set to Prefers MIME, the router converts the message to MIME and delivers the MIME message.
the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the message.
Note
If the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the Notes format message because the R4 and R5 Notes clients can read the message and the IMAP and POP server tasks can convert the message to MIME for Internet clients.
If the message is in MIME format and
the field is set to Prefer Notes Rich Text, the router converts the message to Notes format and delivers the Notes format message.
Note
If the NOTES.INI parameter MailDeliverCDorMime is set to 1 on the server, the router does not convert the message and instead delivers it in MIME.
the field is set to Prefer MIME, the router delivers the mes}age.
the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the message.
If the message is encrypted (S/MIME format), the router creates an attachment containing the S/MIME and creates a Notes format message explaining that the message is encrypted and cannot be converted to Notes format.
Note
If the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the MIME message because R5 and Internet clients can read the message, and the R5 server-converts the MIME message to CD for clients that cannot read native MIME.
324088825629236993
When an R5 server transfers a message to an R4 server
If the message is in Notes format, the router simply transfers the message to the R4 server.
If the message is MIME, the router tries to access the recipient's Person document. If it has access to the recipient's Person document, it checks the Internet Message Storage field (R4) or Format preference for mncoming mail field (R5).
If the field is set to Notes only (R4) or Prefers Notes Rich Text (R5), the router converts the message to Notes format and transfers the Notes format message.
If the field is set to Internet only (R4) or Prefers MIME (R5), the router converts the MIME message to a MIME attachment and transfers the MIME attachment as the message.
If the field is set to Notes and Internet (R4) or No Preference (R5), the router converts the message to Notes fmrmat, adds an attachment containing the original MIME, and transfers the Notes format message with the MIME attachment.
If the message is encrypted (S/MIME format), the router creates an attachment containing the S/MIME and creates a Notes format message explaining that the message is encrypted and cannot be converted to Notes format.
Note
If the NOTES.INI parameter MailDeliverCDandMime is set to 1 on the server, the router converts the message to Note} format and adds an attachment containing the original MIME.
If the router cannot access the recipient's Person document -- for example, if the recipient is in another domain and the router cannot access that domain's Domino Directory -- by default it converts MIME messages to Notes format and transfers them. You can control this conversion by setting the router to either follow the default behavior or to also add an attachment containing the original MIME to the Notes format message. The defmult behavior conserves disk space and bandwidth but reduces message fidelity; the optional behavior preserves message fidelity but consumes additional disk space and bandwidth.e
324088825629236994
When an R5 router sends mail over SMTP
If an R5 router needs to send a message in Notes format over SMTP, it converts the message to MIME.
Note
The R4 SMTP/MIME MTA supported encapsulation, which placed Notes-specific informatiom in an attachment that could be converted back into Notes data by another MTA. The R5 router does not support R4 encapsulation, but maintains Notes data by another method so that another R5 router can convert the information back into Notes data.
46645049629240175
When an R5 server replicates with an R4 server
When an R5 server replicates a database with MIME content to an R4 server -- for example, if a mail file is on both an R5 and an R4 server, with MIME messmges in the database on the R5 server -- Domino converts any MIME to Notes format.
324088825629236995
When an R5 Notes client composes a MIME message and sends it through an R4 Domino server (the user's mail server is R4)M
The R5 client converts the message from MIME to Notes format and transfers it to the Domino server. If the NOTES.INI parameter MailTransferCDandMIME is set to 1 on the client, the R5 client adds an attachment containing the original MIME to the Nmtes format message.
If the message is encrypted (S/MIME format), the router creates an attachment containing the S/MIME and creates a Notes format message explaining that the message is encrypted and cannot be converted to Notes format.
The IMAP and POP server tasks can convert from Notes format to MIME to deliver messages to IMAP and POP clients.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Mgent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenarios
Click here
Click here
Encrypted messages in mixed environments
Click here
Click here
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
Click here
Internet mail storage format in Domino Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Release 4 clients and servers cannot read native MIME messages; thus, Domino Release 5 has to convert a native MIME message to a Notes document with a MIME attachment to route it to an R4 server. Domino cannot convert an encrypted MIME (S/MIME) message -- doing so would require access to the decryption key, which would be a security flaw. Thus, when an S/MIME message is transferred to an R4 server, Domino converts the message to an attachment containing the S/MIME and a Notes format message stating that the message is encrypted MIME and cannot be read by this version of the software. This conversion allows IMAP, POP, and R5 users to receive encrypted MIME mail and for encrypted MIME mail to be transferred from an R5 server to an R4 server to another R5 server without loss of fidelity or breaking the encrypted signature.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environmentsN
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenarios
Click here
Click here
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
&Arial
When you send a message in Notes format to an Internet user, Domino converts the message to MIME for that user. However, some Notes items do not have MIME equivalents and cannot be converted. The Notes client warns you if you send a message containing these items to Internet users so you can choose whether to edit the message or whether to accept the loss of those features. 9
Notes items which do nmt have MIME equivalents include:
Embedded elements
Highlighting
Horizontal rule
Note
If you send MIME in HTML format, Notes converts the horizontal rule unless you set rule properties such as color, height, or width.
Notes hotspots such as document links
Objects (OLE)
Note
Notes attempts to create an image based on the inactive OLE objec}, but not all OLE objects have inactive images.
Page breaks
Sections
271896534429240787
Calendar and scheduling features over SMTP
Domino routes calendar and scheduling items, such as meeting invitations, over Notes RPC where possible. If you send a calendar or scheduling item over SMTP -- for example, you send a meeting invitation over the Internet -- Domino converts the item to text as it does in 4.5 and 4.6.
For more infmrmation, see "
Click here
Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mail.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Internet mail storage format in Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message-Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
When looking up an address for Internet mail in the Domino Directory in Release 5, Domino checks the $Users view for an exclusive match of the address. If it finds the complete Internet address of the recipient (for example, jdoe@acme.com) in either the Short name or Internet address field, Domino delivers the message to the mail file of that person. Domino also dmlivers based on a match of the local part of the address (for example, jane_doe) with any of the fields in the Person document. For example, if the message is addressed to jane_doe@acme.com, and Domino finds a Person document with the entry "Jane Doe" in the User Name field, Domino delivers the message to Jane Doe's mail file.i
Note
Domino converts underscore characters (_) into spaces; in this example, jane_doe would become jane doe. Domino converts double underscmres (__) into underscores, underscores into spaces, and periods into spaces. The lookup is case-insensitive -- jane doe matches with the entry Jane Doe in a Person document.
Domino's exhaustive lookup in $Users ensures that any address generated by the R4 MTA for a user in your directory is located properly. While you can use the Internet Address field in the Release 5 Person document and the tool that populates this field to standardize Internet addresses in your organization and provide a simgle place for locating and changing Internet addresses, this step is optional -- Domino does not distinguish between R4 and R5 addressing and utilizes both equally well.
For more information on the tool that populates the Internet Address field in Person documents, see "
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents.
Click here
For more information on the Internet Address field and Internet mail addressing in Rmlease 5, see
Administering the Domino System
or Domino Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Configuration in R4 vs. R5
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Click here
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
&Arial
You do not need to change how users' Internet messages are stored when upgrading to Release 5. If you have users who only access mail via a POP3 or IMAP client and whose Person documents set their Internet message storage to both Notes and Internet in Release 4, change the field "Format preference for incoming mail" on the Mail tab of those users' Person documents in the Domino Directory to Prefers MIME for improved performance.
In a mixed R4/R5 environment where some clients }se native MIME messages on R5 servers, Domino will not deliver a native MIME message to an R4 client, mail file, or server, because native MIME is unreadable in Release 4.
For more information, see "
Click here
Internet mail conversion in mixed-release environments.
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenariosE
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
IMAP and POP conversion changes in Release 5
Click here
&Arial
When you upgrade an MTA server to an R5 mail server, the NOTES.INI file for the server may contain parameters that are not supported in R5. You do not need to change or remove these parameters -- they are ignored by the server and do not interfere with its functionality in any way.
The upgrade program sets configuration parameters to the settings most commonly used for Internet mail servers. It does not convert R4 NOTES.INI settings to their R5 UI equivalents. If you have unique configuration settings in the NOTES-INI file in R4, you may need to re-enable this configuration using the R5 Server Configuration and Server documents.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Configuration in R4 vs. R5
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenarios
Click here
Click here
Replacing R4 MTAs with R5 mail servers
Click here
&Arial
Conversion from Notes format to MIME in R5 is improved for IMAP and POP users. The IMAP or POP conversion in R5 is similar to the conversion process of the R4 SMTP/MIME MTA and offers greater message fidelity than the R4 IMAP or POP conversion process. The R5 conversion process has more complete text and image handling than R4, but is somewhat slower.
See Also
Clmck here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
How R5 replaces the MTA
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments}
Click here
&Arial
In Release 5, relay host configuration is easier than in Release 4. You can select to route all mail with destinations outside the local Internet domain to a relay host, or not to use a relay host at mll. There is no need to route mail inside the local Internet domain to a relay host since Domino routes SMTP natively.
After upgrading to R5, you need to enter the host name or IP address of the relay host in the Server Configuration document for the upgraded server. In addition, you must enable "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain."
Note
The "smart host," which lists users not in your Domino Directory, has functionalmty similar to a relay host, though its role is different. For more information, see
Administering the Domino System
or Domino Administration Help.e
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenariose
Click here
Click here
Replacing R4 MTAs wi}h R5 mail servers
Click here
Click here
Using a third-party relay host with an R5 mail server
Click here
&Arial
Customers using dial-up access to the Internet may need to take additional steps before and during upgrading to Release 5 of Domino. See
Administering the Domino System
or Domino Administration Help for more information before upgrading.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Afte} upgrading to R5, a mail server router automatically supports multiple transfer threads to the same server. By default, the router allows multiple threads based on configuration settings. You can change these settings to allow more or fewer multiple transfer threads. You can change the maximum number of transfer threads and the maximum number of concurrent transfer threads in the Server Configuration document in Domino Directory. Click the Router/SMTP-Restrictions and Controls-Transfer Controls tab and adj}st the setting in the Maximum transfer threads field to optimize performance in your system.e
Note
Lotus recommends leaving the Maximum transfer threads field blank to allow Domino to configure dynamically the proper number of threads.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Domino Release 5 can route mail using multiple MAIL.BOX databases. Under heavy load, several server threads may try to deposit mail into MAIL.BOX, along with the router attempting to read and update mail. Any process trying to write to MAIL.BOX -- including the server threads and the router -- needs exclusive access to MAIL.BOX. In addition, when the router reads new messages from MAIL.BOX, other processes trying to write-to the database must wait. This can lead to long wait times if there is a large amount of new mail -- for example, on a busy system with heavy mail traffic._
With multiple MAIL.BOX databases, Domino can use multiple concurrent processes, since one process can write to each MAIL.BOX database. When the router is reading one MAIL.BOX, it marks the database "in use" so other server threads trying to deposit mail move to the next MAIL.BOX. This improves performance.
Disk contention is-rarely an issue for MAIL.BOX, so there is usually no need to put the multiple MAIL.BOX databases on different disks. However, it is useful to spread user mail files across multiple disks to ensure that all mail files and MAIL.BOX databases are not on the same disk.
You see large performance improvements even by adding only one additional MAIL.BOX database. Marginal benefit decreases with increasing number of MAIL.BOX databases, though you will continue to see performance gains.
To-set multiple MAIL.BOX databases for a server, do the following:
1. In the Domino Administrator, click the Administration window tab.
2. Click the Configuration tab.
3. Expand the Server Configuration section.
4. Click Configurations.
5. If you have a Configuration Settings document that you want to use for this server, select it and click Edit Configuration. If not, click Add Configuration.
6. If you are creating a-new configuration, do the following:
Enter a server name in the Basics section.
Select which Group or Server this configuration should apply to. Do not select "Use these settings as the default settings for all servers" unless you want every server that this document controls to use SMTP to send messages to the Internet instead of through an Internet mail server.
7. Click the Router/SMTP tab.
8. On the Basics tab, enter the number of MAIL.BOX databmses you want in the Number of mailboxes field.
9. Click the Save and Close button on the Action bar.
10. Shut down the server by changing to the server console and issuing the command
quit
11. Restart the server. Domino creates the new MAIL.BOX databases at server startup -- for example, if you set to use three mailboxes, Domino creates MAIL1.BOX, MAIL2.BOX, and MAIL3.BOX..
See Also
Click here
]pgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Before upgrading the server, warn users that it will be offline and unavailable until after the upgrade.
1. Change to the Domino server console.
2. Type
quit
and press ENTER.
The server should shut down cleanly. e
Go to "
Click here
Backing up Domino server files.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Backing up Domino server files
Click here
No 'SendTo' field in document. Use 'Forward' on the 'Actions' menu instead.
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet usersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Calendar and scheduling\in mailInternet mail\Notes formatting andMIME messages\converting to Notes formatMail\converting wo MIMENotes\MIME conversion andContentsOverviewH_SENDING_MAIL_IN_NOTES_FORMAT_TO_INTERNET_USERS_3682_OVERTopic1Sending mail in Notes format to Internet usersOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
H_SENDING_MAIL_IN_NOTES_FORMAT_TO_INTERNET_USERS_3682_OVER_MIDTOPIC_271896534429240787=Calendar and scheduling features over SMTP01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O7Lotus
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Addresses\in a mixed release environmentInternet Address field\upgrading andInternet mail addreswes\in a mixed-release environmentInternet mail addresses\upgrading andMail addresses\in a mixed release environmentMail addresses\upgrading andMail\addressing to Internet mail usersContentsOverviewH_INTERNET_MAIL_ADDRESSES_IN_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_4093_OVERTopic1Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahgr/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
LOG 29442
Internet mail storage format in Domino Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
IMAP\message storage format andInternet mail\storageMIME messages\delivering to Release 4 serversMail delivery\in a mixed-release environmentMail storage\in a mixed-release environmentMail storage\upgrading andMessage conversion\upgrading andPOP3\message storage format andPerson documents\Internet mail storage format andContentsOverviewH_INTERNET_MAIL_STORAGE_FORMAT_IN_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_9831_OVERTopic1Internet mail storage format in Domino Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Gnternet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
About Th
Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parametersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servews\NOTES.INI settingsNOTES.INI file\and upgradingSMTP/MIME MTA\NOTES.INI settingsServer upgrade\NOTES.INI settingsContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_AN_MTA_SERVER_AND_NOTES_INI_PARAMETERS_1599_OVERTopic1Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parametersOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
OG 2800 256
IMAP and POP conversion changes in Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
IMAP service\upgradingPOP3 service\upgradingContentsOverviewH_CONVERSION_CHANGES_IN_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_3990_OVERTopic1IMAP and POP conversion changes ig Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Relay host changes in Domino Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Relay hosts\configuringContentsOverviewH_RELAY_HOST_CHANGES_IN_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_4270_OVERTopic1Relay host changes in Domino Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using dial-up with Domino Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Dialup connections\upgradingContentsOverviewH_USING_DIAL_UP_WITH_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_4427_OVERTopic1Using dial-up with Domino Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_G_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading an Internet mail server to use multiple threadsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MTA servers\upgrading to use multiple transfer threadsServer upgrade\transfer threads andTransfer threads\server upgrade andContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_TO_USE_MULTIPLE_THREADS_479_OVERTopic1Upgrading an Internet mail server to use multiple threadsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgraging an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
_ASSIGN_RO
Setting up a clusterClusters
.AContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Setting up a clusterOverviewHWCLUSTERS_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
91689629254900=What happenedH_FILE_DOES_NOT_EXIST_MIDTOPIC_402391689629254901=What you can do
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
vid Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Multiple MAIL.BOX databases on a mail serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MAIL.BOX databases\performanceMail\performancePerformance\multiple MAIL.BOX databases andContentsOverviewH_MULTIPLE_MAIL_BOX_DATABASES_DN_A_MAIL_SERVER_436_OVERTopic1Multiple MAIL.BOX databases on a mail serverOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CN=Da
NSFBufferPool size in R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
NSFBufferPool\size in R5NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size\in R5ContentsOverviewH_NSFBUFFERPOOL_SIZE_IN_R5_4496_OVERTopic1NSFBufferPool size in R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_AGENT_MTA_SERVER_TO_RELEASE_5_0_4124_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
finedS/M
Upgrading a Domino serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino server\steps to upgradeDomino server\upgrade overviewDomino server\upgradingServer upgrade\overviewServer upgrade\steps for Domino serverServers\upgradingUpgrade steps\for Domino serverContentsStepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_TTEPSTopic1Upgrading a Domino serverStepsH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_171026278429244022=New FeaturesH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_131783193629308160=System TemplatesH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_164633987229247820=Performance ImprovementsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_164633987229247822=Upgrade Changes01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Shutting down the Domino serverUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino serter\and editing NOTES.INI during upgradeDomino server\shutting downDomino server\shutting down to upgradeServer upgrade\shutting down Domino to upgradeContentsStepsH_SHUTTING_DOWN_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_2789_STEPSTopic1Shutting down the Domino serverStepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Backing up Domino server filesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Backing up\files on Domino server before upgradingDomino server\backing up filesDomino server\backing up files before upgradingFiles\backing up on Domino server before upgradingServer files\backing ut before upgradingServer upgrade\backing up files for DominoContentsStepsH_BACKING_UP_DOMINO_SERVER_FILES_212_STEPSTopic1Backing up Domino server filesStepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CROSS_CER
Updating the NOTES.INI fileUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
NOTES.INI file\and upgradingNOTES.INI file\updatingReporter task\and upgradingReporter task\deletingServer upgrade\and editing NOTES.INIServerTasks=\and upgradingStatistics\Reporter taskContentsStepsH_REMOVING_THE_REPORTER_TASK_FROM_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_8295_STEPSTopic1Updating the NOTES.INI fileStepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
m your Us
Removing Domino as a Windots NT ServiceUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
NT service\removing before upgradingServer upgrade\removing Domino as an NT serviceUpgrade steps\for Domino serverWindows NT service\removing before upgradingContentsOverviewH_REMOVING_DOMINO_AS_A_WINDOWS_NT_SERVICE_809_OVERTopic1Removing Domino as a Windows NT ServiceOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU4CAM/O=Lotus
8281629238
Installing Domino Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Administrator\installingDomino server\and installing Release 5Release 5\installing on a Domino serverSetver upgrade\and installing Release 5ContentsStepsH_INSTALLING_DOMINO_RELEASE_5_5488_STEPSTopic1Installing Domino Release 5StepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ING_NOTES
Using the Domino Directory ProfileUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Directory ProfileDomino Directory ProfileDomino Directory Profile\usingContentsStepsH_USING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_PROFILE_3911_STEPSTopic1Using the Domino Directory ProfileStepsH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
Remove memory management, name lookup controls, and debugging parameters from the NOTES.INI file.
1. Make sure you backed up important server files. See "
Click here
Backing up Domino server files.
Click here
2. Open the NOTES.INI file for the server you are upgrading in a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad.
3. If the followjng entries exist in the file, remove them:
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
NSF_DbCache_Maxentries
Server_Name_Lookup_Noupdate
Any debugging parameters
4. Save the file.
5. Close the text editor.
If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service, go to
Click here
"Removing Domino as a Windows NT Service.
Click here
Otherwise, go to "
Click here
Jnstalling Domino Release 5.
Click here
Note
The file statistics tasks performed by the Reporter task in Release 4 are handled by the Database Catalog and the statistical analysis done by Reporter is handled by the Domino performance tools. Instead of Reporter, the Event task can monitor databases and generate an event that notifies the administrator that unused space in a file has reached a threshold level. In addition, this monitorinj event can also be set to compact automatically databases that reach the threshold level.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Backing up Domino server files
Click here
Click here
Installing Domino Release 5
Click here
&Arial
If you run Domino on Windows NT as an NT Service, you must uninstall Domino as an NT Service before upgrading. Perform the following steps to remove Domino as an NT Service.
1. Choose Start - Run.
2. Type
NTSVINST -D
and click OK.
Go to
Click here
"Installing Domino Release 5.
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure you backed up all important Domino files and removed unnecessary entries from the NOTES.INI file. See "
Click here
Backing up Domino server files
Click here
" and "
Click here
Updating the NOTES.INI file.
Click here
2. Install the Domino Release 5 software. If you install Domino in the same directory as the previous version, you do not need to change the servez configuration. If you install Domino in a new directory, the program prompts you to configure the server.
3. During installation, select the server type for which you purchased a license.
4. After installation, launch the Domino Release 5 server.
See
Setting Up a Domino Server
for more details.
Setting Up a Domino Server
is available in print and as an Adobe Acrobat (PDF) file.
Note
Instjlling a Domino server does not install the Domino Administrator (Release 5 administration client). You must perform a second installation using the client setup program to install a Domino Administrator on the server computer. Lotus recommends you administer the server from a separate computer.
Go to "
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Updating the NOTJS.INI file
Click here
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book(
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
The Domino server prompts you to upgrade the design of the Public Address Book with the R5 Domino Directory template (PUBNAMES.NTF) after upgrading Domino. The new Domino Directory template works with the Domino Administrator client to streamline directory and Domino server administration. The Domino Directory is backwards-compatible and is designed for use in mixed*release environments. Upgrade the design of your address book to the Release 5 Domino Directory template once you upgrade your server to Release 5. Then upgrade the database format of the Domino Directory by compacting the database and rebuilding its views.
Note
The Domino Directory template name is still StdR4PublicAddressBook for backwards-compatibility purposes.
324088825629236990
Upgrading the Public Address Book to the Domino Direjtory template
1. When Domino asks if you want to upgrade the Public Address Book design to the Release 5 template, type
This replaces the R4 Public Address Book template with the R5 Domino Directory template.
2. Once the server launches, verify that there are no errors or problems. Then, quit the server. Type
quit
and press ENTER.
246176896029227116
Compacting the Domino Directory after upgrjding
1. From the command line of your operating system, change to the Domino program directory and compact the Domino Directory to the new R5 ODS.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Intel platforms), type
ncompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Alpha platforms),*typey
acompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.i
On IBM OS/2 Warp, type
icompact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute the correct file name for NAMES.NSF.
On UNIX platforms, type
compact names.nsf
and press ENTER.
Note
If your Domino Directory has a file name other than names.nsf, substitute the correct file name for names.nsf.
This moves the Domino Directory from the R4 ODS to the R5 ODS.
2. After you compact the Domino Directory to the new R5 database format, rebuild the ($ServerAccess) and the ($Users) views in the Domino Directory.
200169699229229349
Rebuilding views in the Domino Directory
1. From the command line of your operating system, rebuild the ($ServerAccess) and ($Users) views in the Domino Directory.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Intel platforms), type
nupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)" -r
and press ENTER. Then type
nupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On Microsoft Windows NT (Alpha platforms), type
aupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)" -r
and press ENTER. Then type
aupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On IBM OS/2 Warp, type
iupdall names.nsf -t "($ServerAccess)" -r
and press ENTER. Then type
iupdall names.nsf -t "($Users)" -r
and press ENTER.
On UNIX platforms, type
updall names.nsf -t /($ServerAccess) -r
and press ENTER. Then zype
updall names.nsf -t /($Users) -r
and press ENTER.
Rebuilding the ($ServerAccess) and ($Users) views in the Domino Directory allows clients to access the server more quickly.
2. After you rebuild views in the Domino Directory, launch the Domino server.
324088825629236991
Updating views in databases on the upgraded Domino server
1. Once the Domino server is running, type
load updall
and press ENTER.
This rebuilds database views, allowing users to access the Domino Directory and other databases on the server more quickly. The amount of time Updall takes to run depends on the number of databases on the server, the size of the databases, and the complexity of the views in those databases.
35769136029233966
Replicating the Domino Directory design to other servers
Once you upgrade a server to R5, you can and should replicate thj Domino Directory design to the Public Address Books on your organization's other servers, including Release 4 and Release 3 servers. The Domino Directory is designed for use in mixed-release environments and for administering R4 and earlier servers.
Note
After replicating the new template to other servers, you must rebuild the views in the Domino Directories / Public Address Books on those servers. The view rebuild for the R5 template on an R4 or R3 server is timj-consuming. Lotus recommends you replicate the template and rebuild the views for pre-R5 servers on a weekend or during other times when server load is low.
See Also
Click here
Installing Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
New and deleted design elements in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New forms in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
Click here
Web authentication ajd secondary address books
Click here
Click here
Host names in Server documents
Click here
ji~ie
&Arial
After you upgrade the first Domino server in your domain and replicate the new Domino Directory template to the other servers, upgrade the server that acts as the administration server for the Domino Directory. This lets you take advantage of the new R5 Administration Process features. Follow the steps in this chapter to upgrade the administration server.
For steps on how to upgrade a Domino server, sje "
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server.
Click here
73775491229232329
Upgrading the Administration Requests template
After upgrading the administration server for the Domino Directory, process all requests in the Administration Requests database, then shut down the Administration Process and upgrade the design of the Administration Requests database on that server to the R5 template. The R5 Administration Requests temzlate is designed for backwards compatibility with the R4 Administration Process and use in mixed-release environments. You can and should replicate the new design to the Administration Requests databases on your organization's other servers.
Note
You do not need to process all the requests in the Administration Requests database to upgrade the database, but Lotus recommends processing as many as possible for a faster upgrade.
8993000322923273:
Processing requests in the Administration Requests database
1. Change to the Domino server console.i
2. Type
tell adminp process all
and press ENTER.
Note
You may need to issue this command more than once, as some Administration Requests create others.
3. Once the administration process finishes processing requests, shut it down.
89930003229232735
Shutting down the Administration Process on the server
1. Type
tell adminp quit
and press ENTER.
2. Upgrade the design of the Administration Requests database.
89930003229232736
Upgrading the design of the Administration Requests database
1. Launch the Domino Administrator client.
2. Choose File - Database - Open.
3. In the Server field, type the name of the upgraded admijistration server.
4. Select the Administration Requests (R4) database (ADMIN4.NSF) and click Open.
5. If this is the first time you have opened the Administration Requests database, you see the About This Database document. Press ESC to close the document.
6. Choose File - Database - Replace Design.
7. Click Template Server.
8. In the Server field, enter the name of a Release 5 Domino server and click OK.
9. Selecz the Administration Requests (R5.0) template (ADMIN4.NTF) and click Replace..
10. When the Domino Administrator displays a warning about replacing the design, click Yes.
11. Close the Administration Requests database.
12. Replicate the new design to the other servers in your organization.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Upgradjng the Administration Requests database on an MTA server
Click here
~YpkM
R"wce
&Arial
Domino automatically upgrades many system templates to Release 5 design.
103309:23229308159
Databases upgraded automatically
Database Title
File Name
Administration Rjquests.
ADMIN4.NTF
Agent Log
ALOG4.NTF
Billing
BILLING.NTF
Local free time info
BUSYTIME.NTF
Catalogi
CATALOG.NTF
Certificjtion Log
CERTLOG.NTF
Cluster Directory
CLDBDIR4.NTF
Master Address Book (to Directory Assistance)k
MAB.NTF (DA50.NTF)
Database Analysisa
DBA4.NTF
Domino Configuration
DOMCFG.NTF
Domino Web Server Loje
DOMLOG.NTF
Statistics & Eventss
EVENTS4.NTFf
Notes Log Analysis
LOGA4.NTFn
Notes Log
LOG.NTF
Mail Router Mailbox
MAILBOX.NTF
<Server>
Mailbox
MAIL.BJX
NT/Migrating Users' Passwords
NTSYNC45.NTF
Public Address Book (to Domino Directory)9
PUBNAMES.NTF
Server Web Navigator
PUBWEB45.NTF (PUBWEB50.NTF)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
103309923229308160
Databases not upgraded automatically
Database Title
File Nameg
Certificate Authoritye
CCA*.NTF (* = Release Number; e.g., 50)
Server Certificate Admin
CSRV*.NTF (* = Release Number; e.g., 50)
Statistics Reporting
STATRP45.NTF
Domino Web Administration
WEBADMIN.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Cjapter title;Dhead
&Arial
Notes R4 clients can render some system databases that use R5 templates transparently. Some R5 templates, though, do not render well to R4 clients. Templates fall into three categories: those that are supported with the R4 client, those*that are supported but have altered appearance, and those that should not be used in a mixed environment.
71604953629308185
Templates supported with the R4 client
Database title
File Name
Agent Log
ALOG4.NTF
Billing
BILLING.NTF
Local free time info
BUSYTIME.NTF
Domino R5 Certificate Authority
CCA50.NTF8
Certification Loge
CERTLOG.NTF
Cluster Analysis
CLUSTA4.NTF
Database Library
DBLIB4.NTF
Microsoft Office Library
DOCLBM50.NTF
Doc Library - Notes & Webt
DOCLBW50.NTF
Personal Journal
JOURNAL4.NTF
Notes Log
LOG.NTF
Mail Router Mailbox
MAILBOX.NTF
Personal Web Navigator
PERWEB50.NTF
NT/Migrating Users' Passwords
NTSYNC45.NTF
Statistics Repjrting
STATREP5.NTF
Domino Configuration
DOMCFG.NTF
Domino Web Server Log
DOMLOG.NTF
Mailing List
MAILLIST.NTF
NNTP Discussion
NNTPDI50.NTF
Server Web Navigator
PUBWEB50*NTF
Reports
REPORTS.NTF
Resource Reservations
RESRC50.NTF
Site Registration
SIREGW50.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
71604953629308186
Templates supported with altered appearance wth an R4 client
Database Title
File Name
Archive Log
ARCHLG50.NTF
Catalog
CATALOG.NTF
Cluster Directory
CLDBDIR4.NTF
Database Analysis
DBA4.NTF
Decommission Server Reports
DECOMSRV.NTF
Directory Assistance
DA50.NTF
Domino Directory
PUBNAMES.NTF
Notes Log Analysis
LOGA4.NTF
Personal Address Book
PERNAMES.NTF
Statistics & Events
EVENTS4.NTF
DECS Administrator Template (partial support)
DECSADM.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
71604953629308187
Templates that are not supported with an R4 client
Database Tjtle
File Name
Bookmarkse
BOOKMARK.NTF
Design Synopsis Template
DSGNSYN.NTF
Domino Administrator
DOMADMIN.NTF
Direjtory Catalog
DIRCAT5.NTF
Subscriptions
HEADLINE.NTF
Mail (IMAP)
IMAPCL5.NTF
Mail (R5.0)
MAIL50.NTF
TeamRoom (5.0)
TEAMROOM.NTF
Domino MailTracker Store
MTSTORE.NTF
News Articles (NNTP)
NNTPCL5.NTF8
Domino R5 Certificate Administration
CSRV50.NTF
User Registration Queue
USERREG.NTF
Web Administration
WEBADMIN.NTF
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
After upgrading to R5, a mail server router automatically supports multiple transfer threads to the same server. By default, the router allows multizle threads based on configuration settings. You can change these settings to allow more or fewer multiple transfer threads. You can change the maximum number of transfer threads and the maximum number of concurrent transfer threads in the Server Configuration document in Domino Directory. Click the Restrictions and Controls - Transfer Controls tab and adjust the settings to optimize performance in your system. Click the Router/SMTP-Restrictions and Controls-Transfer Controls tab and adjust the setting in tje Maximum transfer threads field to optimize performance in your system.o
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
Upgrading clustered servers is exactly the same as upgrading other R4 servers to R5.
For information on upgrading servers that use the R4 Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to route Internet mail, see "c
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5.0.t
Click here
For information on upgrading all other servers, see "
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server.
Click here
For issues involved with using a mixed R4 / R5 cluster, see "p
Click here
Using mail in a mixed-release cluster.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Mail files in a mixed-release cluster
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
&Arial
Domino Release 5 can route mail using multiple MAIL.BOX databases. Under heavy load, several server threads may try to deposit mail into MAIL.BOX, along wiph the router attempting to read and update mail. Any process trying to write to MAIL.BOX -- including the server threads and the router -- needs exclusive access to MAIL.BOX. In addition, when the router reads new messages from MAIL.BOX, other processes trying to write to the database must wait. This can lead to long wait times if there is a large amount of new mail -- for example, on a busy system with heavy mail traffic.3
With multiple MAIL.BOX databases, Domino can use multiple concurrent ppocesses, since one process can write to each MAIL.BOX database. When the router is reading one MAIL.BOX, it marks the database "in use" so other server threads trying to deposit mail move to the next MAIL.BOX. This improves performance.O
Disk contention is rarely an issue for MAIL.BOX, so there is usually no need to put the multiple MAIL.BOX databases on different disks. However, it is useful to spread user mail files across multiple disks to ensure that all mail files and MAIL.BOX databases ape not on the same disk.
You see large performance improvements even by adding only one additional MAIL.BOX database. Marginal benefit decreases with increasing number of MAIL.BOX databases, though you will continue to see performance gains.
To set multiple MAIL.BOX databases for a server, open the Server Configuration document that applies to that server, click the Router/SMTP-Basics tab, and enter the number of MAIL.BOX databases you want in the Number of mailboxes field.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a mail server to use multiple threads
Click here
&Arial
If you add an R4.6x server to a Notes domain which has an R5 hub server, change the Home URL field on the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab of the Server document for the R4.6x server. The default setting for the Home URL field is:
/homepage.nsf?Open
Homepage.nsf is an R5 database. Change the entry in the Home UPL field to a URL you want users to see when they open the server, such as with a ?OpenServer command, from a browser.
208734211229317254
To change the Home URL field
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Expand the Server Configuration section.
3. Click "All Server Documents."
4. Double-click the Server document for the server for which you want to change the Home URL field.
5. Click Edit Server.
6. Click the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab.
7. Under the Mapping section, enter the Web page or database that users should see when they access the server with a browser.
8. Click Save and Close.
If you set the Home URL field to:o
/?Open
/?OpenServer
to allow users to see a list of the databases on the server, you must also do the following:
9. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
10. Expand the Server Configuration section.r
11. Click "All Server Documents."
12. Double-click the Server document for the server for which you want to change the Home URL field.
13. Click Edit Server.
14. Click the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab.i
15. Select Yes for the field "Allow HTTP clients to browse databases."
16. Cli`k Save and Close.
If you do not make this change, Web clients try to browse the list of databases, but get an error because they are not authorized to do so. In R4.6x, the default setting for "Allow HTTP clients to browse databases" is Yes. In R5, the default setting is No.
&Arial
The Domino server time zone and daylight savings time settings should match those of servers with which a server replicates. If the settings do not match, you may experience unexpected behavior from agents that run at a scheduled time.l
Note
Be sure the time zone and daylight savings time are set correctly for the server's operating system.
To change whether the server uses the operating system settings, change the settings in the Time zone and DST fields in the Server Location section of the Server document in the Domino Directory -- for example, after upgrading a server to Release 5.
Note
Do not change the operating system time zone or daylight savings time settings between the time you configure the server and the first time you run it.
Note
If you change the time zone or daylight savings time for the operating system while the Domino server is running, the new settings do not take effect until you restart the server.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
In Release 5, the NSFBufferPool has no effective size limit, though it is constrained by operating system limits and, potentially, by the maximum size of a NOTES.INI variable. NOTES.INI variables cannot be larger than 2GB, since these are signed variables. This is a change from R4.5 and R4.6, when the NSFBufferPool had a coded limit in Domino.
When a Domino server starts, the server allocates between 1/4 (25%) and 3/8 (37.5%) of the physical RAM on the server to the NSFBufferPool as memory for Domino. A Notes client allocates memory similarly, but sets a maximum of 8MB on the NSFBufferPool. Administrators (for the server) and end users (for the client) can override this default allocation and set the size of the NSFBufferPool manually by using one of two NOTES.INI variables:t
NOTES.INI variable
Units
Limit
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size=x
Bytes
2GB, based on NOTES.INI variable limitations
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size_MB=x1
none; subject to OS limits
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;D`ead
The NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size_MB variable removes the 2GB limitation that exists for NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size due to NOTES.INI variable limits.
Tuning the NSFBufferPool should not be necessary, except on partitioned servers. In some cases, Domino does not need all the memory in the NSFBufferPool, so administrators may wish to experiment with decreasing the amount of memory in the NSFBufferPool by setting one of the NOTES.INI variabl`s. This allows the server to use the memory for other purposes.
On partitioned servers, allocating all the memory normally reserved for the NSFBufferPool could result in problems -- for example, a computer with 6 Domino partioned servers could not allocate 25% of memory to each partition. Administrators should divide the memory that would be allocated to a Domino server (from 1/4 to 3/8 of physical RAM) by the number of partitions and manually set the NSFBufferPool size via a NOTES.INI variabl` for each server. Administrators can then modify the setting for each partition depending on the relative load. r
In general, it is best to allow Domino to allocate memory for the NSFBufferPool. Set the size of the NSFBufferPool only if the server is running slowly due to inadequate available memory.a
See Also
Click here
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
Click here
&Arial
In R5, the default value for the field "Maximum requests over a single connection" on the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab of the Server document is 1. In Release 4.6, the default value was 5. This change improves performance. If you are upgrading an R4 server to R5, the value you set in this field is preserved and does not change.
&Arial
To upgrade Domino Administration, do the following:r
Clic` here
Upgrade administration clients
Click here
Click here
Upgrade to the Web Administrator tool_
Click here
See also information on:
Click here
Using the Domino Administrator in a mixed environment
Click here
Click here
Using message tracking in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Se` Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
Click here
Web authentication and secondary address books
Click here
Click here
Upgr`ding administration clients
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to the Web Administrator tool
Click here
&Arial
Once you upgrade y`ur R4 Public Address Book to the R5 Domino Directory template, upgrade your administration clients to the R5 Domino Administrator. Due to changes in the forms in the Domino Directory, it is easier and more efficient to administer your servers and Notes domain with the Domino Administrator. In addition, the Domino Administrator features a greatly enhanced interface which simplifies server administration. The Domino Administrator is designed to administer a mixed-release environment and works smoothly with R0 servers.
95001536029239966
Installing the R5 Domino Administrator cliente
In R5, you install the Domino Administrator client separately from the server.
220684060829313178
Installing the R5 Domino Administrator on a Server
While Lotus supports installing the Domino Adminstrator on the same computer as a Domino server, Lotus strongly recommends administering the server from a separate computer. The Domino Administrator uses resource-intensive processes to monitor and administer servers. Installing the Domino Administrator on the same computer as a server uses resources and reduces server performance. For best server performance, administer the server from a different computer.
For more information, see "g
Click here
Installing the Domino Administrator in Release 5
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Domi`o Administration
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to the Web Administrator tool,
Click here
Click here
Using message tracking in a mixed-release environment
Click here
&Arial
When you upgrade a Domino server to R5, the upgrade program deletes your R4 Web Administration database (WEBADMIN.NSF) and creates a new Web Administrator database based on the R5 template (WEBADMIN.NTF). This is necessary t` use the new R5 design. If you customized the ACL of your R4 Web Administration database, you must re-enter this information in the new Web Administrator database ACL.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Domino Administration
Click here
Click here
Upgrading administration clients
Click here
Click here
Using message tracking in a mixed-release environment
Click here
&Arial
160584063229240759
Tracking Center
Message tracking for administrators (using the Tracking Center in the Domino Administrator) can only track messages across R5 servers that have message tracking enabled. If a message was transferred to a pre-R5 or third-party server, you can no longer track that message using the Tracking Center.
Note
Message tracking information is not added for messages that enter the Domino domain from other sources, such as a th`rd-party mail server.
44277107229240619
End user (mail-based) message tracking
Users with an R5 mail file can track messages that are routed through pre-R5 and third-party servers as long as these servers maintain the fidelity of the Notes fields in the message tracking request. Domino only returns message tracking information from R5 servers that have message tracking enabled. If the third-party servers do not maintain these fields, messages cannot be tracked bepond these servers.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Domino Administration
Click here
Click here
Upgrading administration clients
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to the Web Administrator tool
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Administrator is designed to administer a mixed R4/R5 environment. However, since the Domino Administrator takes advantage of new R5 features, there are some limitations in a mixed environment.
Server bookmarks
If the Directory server (set in the Administration Preferences by choosing File - Preferences - Administration Preferences) is not an R5 server, the Domino Administrator can only retrieve 64KB of server names for the server bookmarks. To avoid this limitation, set an R5 server as the Directory server.
User registrationw
User registration with the Domino Administrator does not function properly if the registration server does not use the new Domino Directory template.c
Server monitoring
When monitoring R4 servers, the Domino Administrator cannot report the status of individual tasks, such as the router. The Domino Administrator only reports whether the server is responding or not.
Replication schedule
The replication schedule display does not work with R4 servers.
ACL management tools
The ACL management tools on the Files tab of the Domino Administrator do not work with databases on R4 servers.s
h{age
&Arial
Po upgrade Notes to Release 5, perform the following steps:
Click here
Back up important files
Click here
Click here
Install Notes Release 5
Click here
See also information on:
268992819229244024
Upgrade Changes
Click here
Converting the workspace to bookmarks
Click here
Click here
Petting your Personal Address Book preferences
Click here
Click here
Changes to the Personal Address Book
Click here
Click here
Portfolio databases in Notes Release 5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading your mail file to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Creating account records for Internet mail
@lick here
269052819229244025
Using Notes Release 5
Click here
Setting default workstation security
Click here
Click here
Synchronizing time zones and daylight savings time with Notes
Click here
Click here
Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Repeating `eetings and R5
Click here
Click here
See also information on "Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
New Lotus Notes clie`t features
Click here
Click here
Backing up Notes client files
Click here
Click here
Changes to the Personal Address Book
Click here
Click here
Upgrading your mail file to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Portfolio databases in Notes Release 5
Click here
Click here
Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Repeating meetings and R5
Click here
2Q he
(VD"p
(VD"p
&Arial
Back up important Notes client files in case an error occurs during the upgrade process. If you experience problems, you can restore these files with the backed-up versions. Back up the following files for each Notes client:
File
Default Location
NOTES.INI (Notes Preferences on the Macintosh)
System directory (for example, C:\WIN95)
DESKTOP.DSK
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Personal Address Book (NAMES.NSF by default)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
User ID files (for example, JSMITH.ID)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Local databases (.NSF)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Local database directory links (.DIR)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Any customized Notes database templates .NTF)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
USER.DIC (Personal dictionary entries for spellchecker)
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
@lick here
Click here
Install the Notes Release 5 software
Click here
h{age
&Arial
1. Make sure you backed up important Notes client files. See "
Click here
Backing up Notes client files
Click here
2. Run SETUP.EXE. Follow the prompts on the Setup screens to properly install the software. Select the type of client for which you purchased a license.
3. Launch Notes.
Notes sets up and upgrades the software automatically if you install Release 5 in the same directory as the previous release of Notes. If you install the Release 5 software in a different directory, Notes prompts you to complete the configuration process. If you install Notes in a different directory, be aware that the Setup program places NOTES.INI in the Notes program directory. In previous releases, the Install program placed NOTES.INI in the system directory by default.
Note
Notes automatically upgrades your Personal Address Book to the Release 5 design. If you have Internet mail set up to work with POP3, Notes creates an Account record for that Internet mail configuration. See "
Click here
Creating account records for Internet mail.E
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5o
Click here
Click here
Backing up Notes client files.
Click here
h{age
&Arial
In a mixed R4/R5 cluster, users cannot have an R5 mail file on both R4 servers and R5 servers -- the R5 mail template does not work properly on an R4 server. If you have a mixed cluster with mail files, use the R4 design for mail files or place users' mail files only on R4 servers (with R4 design) or only on R5 servers (with R5 design) -- do not mix releases. This is necessary because cluster replication ignores selective replication formulas - you cannot prevent the mail file design from replicating to other clustered servers.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading clusters
Click here
Click here
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Click here
Click here
Encrypted messages in mixed environments
Click here
Click here
Internet mail storage fopmat in Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
IMAP and POP conversion changes in Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Domino presents many possibilities for configuring your mail system infrastructure, whether you want to use Notes routing, SMTP routing, or both, for internal and external messages. However, before you set up mail rout`ng, there are a number of decisions and factors to consider:
Click here
How clients access the server
Click here
Click here
How internal mail routes
Click here
Click here
How external mail routes
Click here
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Cl`ck here
Click here
Setting up Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address BookUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory\compactingDomino Directory\rebuilding viewsDomino Directory\replicatingDomino Directory\upgradiag from Public Address BookDomino Directory\upgrading toDomino server\upgrading Public Address BookInstalling\and upgrading Public Address BookNAMES.NSF\compacting to Release 5 On-Disk StructureNAMES.NSF\upgrading to Release 5 Domino DirectoryPUBNAMES.NTF\upgradingPublic Address Book\compactingPublic Address Book\upgrading to Domino DirectoryServer upgrade\upgrading Public Address BookUpgrade steps\for Public Address BookUpgrading\Domino DirectoryUpgrading\Public Address BookContentsStepsH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_QPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_6709_STEPSTopic1Upgrading the Public Address BookStepsH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS
H_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236990=Upgrading the Public Address Book to the Domino Directory templateH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_246176896029227116=Compacting the Domino Directory after upgradingH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_QHE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_200169699229229349=Rebuilding views in the Domino DirectoryH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_324088825629236991=Updating views in databases on the upgraded Domino serverH_DECIDING_WHEN_TO_UPGRADE_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_FOR_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_1718_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_35769136029233966=Replicating the Domino Directory design to other servers01 Moving to Notes and Domino Relaase 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading the administration server for the Domino DirectoryUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
ADMIN4.NSF\upgradingAdministration Process\upgradingAdministration Requests database\upgradingAdministration servers\updating for Domino DirectoryAdministration servers\upgradingDomino Directory\updating administration server forDomino server\upgrading Administration Requests databaseServers\upgrading Administration Requests databaseContentsStepsH_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DATABASE_3753_STEPSTopic1Upgrading the administration server for the Domino DirectoryStepsH_UPARADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS
H_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DATABASE_3753_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_73775491229232329=Upgrading the Administration Requests templateH_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DATABASE_3753_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_89930003229232734=Processing requests in the Administration Requests databaseH_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DATABASE_3753_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_89930003229232735=Shutting down the Administration Process on the serverH_UPGRADING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DATABASE_3751_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_89930003229232736=Upgrading the design of the Administration Requests database01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading system templatesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Templates\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_DATABASES_5650_OVERTopic1Upgrading system templatesOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS
H_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_DATABASES_5650_OVER_MIDTOPIC_103309923229308159=Databases upgraded automaticallyH_UPGRADING_SYSTEM_DATABASES_5650_OVER_MIDTOPIC_103309923229308160=Databases not upgraded automatically01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgradina a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Template interoperabilityUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_2192_OVER_MIDTOPIC_71604953629308185=Templates supported with the R4 clientH_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_2192_OVER_MIDTOPIC_71604953629308186=Templates supported with altered appearance wth an R4 clientH_TEMPLATE_INTEROPERABILITY_2192_OVER_MIDTOPIC_71604953629308187=Templates that are not supported with an R4 client01 Moving to Notes!and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading a mail server to use multiple threadsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino server\and upgrading to use multiple transfer threadsMail servers\upgradingMultiple transfer threads\and server upgradeServer upgrade\and multiple transfer threadsTransfer threads\upgrading a server to use multipleContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_MAIL_SERVER_TO_USE_MULTIPLE_THREADS_8071_OVERTopic1Upgrading a mail server to use multiple threadsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using multiple MAIL.BOX databasesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
MAIL.BOX databases\using multipleMAIL.BOX databases\using multiple databasesAail\performance and multiple MAIL.BOXPerformance\multiple MAIL.BOX databases andContentsOverviewH_USING_MULTIPLE_MAIL_BOX_DATABASES_6348_OVERTopic1Using multiple MAIL.BOX databasesOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating new R4 servers in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOverviewH_CREATING_NEW_R4_SERVERS_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_1470_OVERTopic1Creating new R4 servers in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS
H_CREATING_NEW_R4_SERVERS_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_1470_OVER_MIATOPIC_208734211229317254=To change the Home URL field<+!>01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Changing Damino server time zone and daylight savings time settingsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Daylight savings time setting\changing for Domino serverSystem time\changing for Domino serverTime zones\changing for Domino serverTime zones\synchronizing Domino and operating systemContentsOverviewH_CHANGING_DOMINO_SERVER_TIME_ZONE_AND_DAYLIGHT_SAVINGS_TIME_SETTINGS_1383_OVERTopic1Changing Domino server time zone and daylight savings time settingsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
NSFBufferPool in R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
NSFBufferPool\size in R5NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size\in R5ContentsOverviewH_NSFBUFFERPOOL_IN_R5_6848_OVERTopic1NSFBufferPool in R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Maximum requests over a single connectionUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOverviewH_MAXIMUM_REQUESTS_OVER_A_SINGLE_CONNECTION_7040_OVERTopic1Maximum requests over a single connectionOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_7728_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading Domino AdministrationUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Administrator\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATION_8418_OVERTopic1Upgrading Domino AdministrationOverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TA_R5_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 504 Upgrading Domino Administration
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading administration clientsUparading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_UPGRADING_ADMINISTRATION_CLIENTS_7072_OVER_MIDTOPIC_95001536029239966=Installing the R5 Domino Administrator clientH_UPGRADING_ADMINISTRATION_CLIENTS_7072_OVER_MIATOPIC_220684060829313178=Installing the R5 Domino Administrator on a Server01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 504 Upgrading Domino Administration
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading to the Web Administrator toolUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Upgrading\Web administration toolWEBADMIN.NSF\upgradingWeb Administrator\upgradingWeb administration tool\ACL entries andWeb administration tool\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_6818_OVERTopic1Upgrading to the Web Administrator toolOverviewH_UPGRADING_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATION_8418_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 504 Upgrading Domino Administration
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using message tracking in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet mail\trackingMail\tqackingMessages\trackingTracking messages\in a mixed-release environmentContentsOverviewH_USING_MESSAGE_TRACKING_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_6388_OVERTopic1Using message tracking in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATION_8418_OVER
H_USING_MESSAGE_TRACKING_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_6388_OVER_MIDTOPIC_160584963229240759=Tracking CenterH_USING_MESSAGE_TRACKING_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_6388_OVER_MIDTOPIC_44277107229240619=End user (mail-based) message tracking01 Aoving to Notes and Domino Release 504 Upgrading Domino Administration
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the Domino Administrator in a mixed environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administqation clients\upgradingUpgrading\administration clientsContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_IN_A_MIXED_ENVIRONMENT_3909_OVERTopic1Using the Domino Administrator in a mixed environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATION_8418_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating flat ID filesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\creatingID files\creating flat IDsIDs\creating flatContentsOverviewH_CREATING_FLAT_ID_FILES_7230_OVERTopic1Creating flat ID filesOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
h{age
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Client upgrade\overviewClient upgrade\stepsNotes client\upgradingUpgrade steps\for Notes clientContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LNTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVERTopic1Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER_MIDTOPIC_268992819229244024=Upgrade ChangesH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER_MIDTOPIC_269052819229244025=Using Notes Release 501 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Backing up Notes client filesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Backing up\files on Notes client before upgradingFiles\backing up on Notes client before upgradingNotes client\backing up filesNotes client\backing up files before upgradingContentsStepsH_BACKING_UP_NOTES_CLIENT_FILES_1040_STEPSTopic1Backing up Notes client filesStepsH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
?Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Install the Notes Release 5 softwareUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Installing\Release 5 on a Notes clientNotes client\installingRelease 5\installing on a Notes clientContentsStepsH_INSTALL_THE_NOTES_RELEASE_5_SOFTWARE_3788_STEPSTopic1Install the Notes Release 5 softwareStepsH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino.Release 505 Upgrading Clients
?Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
egoriesS
Converting the workspace to bookmarksUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Bookmarks\de~cribedBookmarks\workspace conversion andNotes client\upgrading workspace to bookmarksWorkspace\converting to bookmarksContentsOverviewH_CONVERTING_THE_WORKSPACE_TO_BOOKMARKS_6446_OVERTopic1Converting the workspace to bookmarksOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting your Personal Address Book preferencesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Notes client\and setting Personal Address Book preferencesPersonal Address Book\setting preferencesPersonal Address Book\upgrading and setting preferencesPreferences\in the Personal Address BookUpgrade steps\for Personal Address BookNontentsStepsH_SETTING_YOUR_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_PREFERENCES_5219_STEPSTopic1Setting your Personal Address Book preferencesStepsH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
=David M
Changes to the Personal Address BookUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
PERNAMES.NSF\describedPersonal Address Book\featuresContentsOverviewH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVERTopic1Changes to the Personal Address BookOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER
H_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_417207670429229752=New agents in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1>91_OVER_MIDTOPIC_418153104029316636=Deleted agents in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_418153104029316637=New folders in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_417207670429229753=New forms in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_417257670429229754=New script libraries in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_4172>7670429229755=New subforms in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_417257670429229756=New views in the R5 Personal Address BookH_CHANGES_TO_THE_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_1091_OVER_MIDTOPIC_417257670429229757=Deleted views in the R5 Personal Address Book01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Portfolio databases in Notes Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Notes client\portfolio databases andPortfolio databases\describedPortfolios\bookmarks andContentsOverviewH_PORTFOLIO_DATABASES_IN_NOTES_RELEASE_5_0_7872_OVERTopic1Portfolio databases in Notes Relea~e 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CAM/O=Lot
Upgrading ~our mail file to Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Mail files\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_YOUR_MAIL_FILE_TO_RELEASE_5_9216_OVERTopic1Upgrading your mail file to Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Which message do you want to see Help on?
TroubleshootingMESSAGE 0H_WHICH_MESSAGE_DO_YOU_WANT_TO_SEE_HELP_ONTopic1Which message do you want to see Help on?Troubleshooting
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
FOLDERS_MIDTOPIC_321713427229235169=Tips
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating account records for Internet mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Account records\Internet mail andAccount records\upgradingInternet mail\Account recordsNotes client\Account records andPOP3\Accfunt records andPOP3\upgrading to Notes Release 5SMTP\Account records andSMTP\and upgrading NotesContentsOverviewH_CREATING_ACCOUNT_RECORDS_FOR_INTERNET_MAIL_2743_OVERTopic1Creating account records for Internet mailOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting default workstation securityUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administration Execution Control List\default security andECL\workstation security andSecurity\workstationWorkstations\ECLContentsAboutH_ABOUT_DEFAULT_WORKSTATION_SECURITYTopic1Setting default workstation securityAbouvH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
tatus ba
2Q he
Synchronizing vime zones and daylight savings time with NotesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Daylight savings time setting\synchronizing Notes and operating systemLocation documents\synchronizing time settingsSystem time\settingTime zones\settings forTime zones\synchronizing Notes and operating systemContentsOverviewH_SYNCHRONIZING_DATES_TIMES_AND_DAYLIGHT_SAVINGS_TIME_2657_OVERTopic1Synchronizing time zones and daylight savings time with NotesOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASEV5_365_OVER
H_SYNCHRONIZING_DATES_TIMES_AND_DAYLIGHT_SAVINGS_TIME_2657_OVER_MIDTOPIC_270246441629238405=Changing settings on Windows computers01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
us\describ
Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Calendar and scheduling\Internet mail andInternet mail\calendar and schedulingContentsOverviewH_USING_CALENDAR_AND_SCHEDULING_FEATURES_WITH_INTERNET_MAIL_3499_OVERTopic1Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mailOverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upfrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
(VD"p
Repeating meetings and R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Calendar and scheduling\meetingsMeetfngs, repeating\upgrading mail templates forRepeating meetings feature\upgrading mail templates forScheduling meetings\in a mixed release environmentContentsOverviewH_REPEATING_MEETINGS_AND_R5_8968_OVERTopic1Repeating meetings and R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_A_LOTUS_NOTES_CLIENT_TO_RELEASE_5_365_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 505 Upgrading Clients
Print
h{age
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
=Lotus
Working with the Domino DirectoryUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER_MIDTOPIC_239618793629244035=Using the New Internet Address FieldH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER_MIDTOPIC_239618793629244036=Upgrade Changes and Coexistence01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the Domino Directory template in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory template\using in a mixed-release environmentDomino Directory\templateDomino Dfrectory\using in a mixed-release environmentPublic Address Book\using Domino Directory design withUpgrading\Public Address Books and Domino Directory templateUpgrading\from previous releasesContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_IN_A_MIXED_ENVIRONMENT_3131_OVERTopic1Using the Domino Directory template in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER
H_USING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_IN_A_MIXED_ENVIRONMENT_3131_OVER_MIDTOPIC_96494592029234356=Upgradfng R4 servers that use the Domino Directory templateH_USING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_IN_A_MIXED_ENVIRONMENT_3131_OVER_MIDTOPIC_154577030429308152=Accessing the Domino Directory with an R4 client01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ewH_WINDOWS
Customized Address BooksUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZED_ADDRESS_BOOKS_1546_OVERTopic1Customized Address BooksOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
in viewsVieOG&3026 720Elements_of_a_view_999_999_999Topic1Elements of a viewOverviewH_NAVIGATION_VIEWS_AND_PANES_OVER
Elements_of_a_view_999_999_999_MIDTOPIC_314832432029227081=View iconsH_WINDOWS_PANES_AND_VIEWS_1631_OVER_MIDTOPIC_37039952029209006=Action barH_USING_QUICK_SEARCH_IN_A_VIEW=Using Starts with search in a view
:2TMm
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
Notes Release 5 automatically converts your workspace into bookmarks. You can still access the workspace if you want, but the new navigation model and ease `f use of bookmarks make this unnecessary.
Your workspace pages convert to bookmark buttons, which are located on the left side of the client screen.
Notes gives you the following bookmark tabs initially:
Bookmark tab
Descriptionp
Home
Displays your home page, where you can perform tasks and browse and search the Web
Mail
Displays your mail file
Headlines^
Displays your Headlines, which can include e-mail, Web updates, calendar entries for today, and other information you specify
Calendar
Displays your calendar
Address Book
Displays your Personal Address Book
To Do
Displays your To Do list of tasks
Replicator
Displays your Replicator page. This entry appears only if you have local replicas with replication enabled.
Domino Administrator
Displays the Domino Administrator for administering Domino servers. This bookmark appears only if you installed the Domino Administrator.
Domino Designer
Displays the Domino Designer for designing Domino applications. This bookmark appears only if pou installed the Domino Designer.
Favorite Bookmarks
Displays a bookmark list of the databases you used most recently
Databases
Displays bookmarks organized as they are on your workspace, with a bookmarks folder for each workspace page
More Bookmarks
Displays bookmarks for searching Notes databases and the Web
Create
Contains bookmarks for creating documents such as memos, calendar entries, and tasks
Internet Explorer Links
Contains bookmarks from your Microsoft Internet Explorer Favorites links
Navigator Links,
Contains bookmarks from your Netscape Navigator Bookmarks links
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
You can add a bookmark to any Bookmark button by dragging it onto that button.
For more information on using bookmarks, see Notes Client Help.e
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
New Lotus Notes client features
Click here
h{age
&Arial
When you upgrade Notes to R5, @otes automatically upgrades the design of your Personal Address Book. The first time you open your Personal Address Book after upgrading, Notes asks you to enter your preferences into the Personal Address Book profile. To enter your preferences, do the following:
1. Select an Address Book owner. Generally this is the person whose Notes client has been upgraded and who is the primary user of the address book.
2. Select whether to sort alphabetically new groups that you create.
3. Select whether to allow LDAP queries of the address book to elicit detailed information. This lets you search your address book by categories such as country or phone number when looking up users during mail addressing.
4. Choose a background for the Business Cards in your address book. You can scroll through the backgrounds by clicking the right and left arrow buttons.
5. Choose a style for the Business Cards in your address book. You can scroll through the ptyles by clicking the right and left arrow buttons.
6. Click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
Changes to the Personal Address Book
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
h{age
&Arial
The R5 Personal Address Book has a number of new forms, views, subforms, agents, and script libraries, and has had some design elements deleted from the R4 te`plate.
417207670429229752
New agents in the R5 Personal Address Book
Edit Address Book Preferences
Remove Address Book Preferences
Retrieve Certificates from Home Server
418153104029316636
Deleted agents in the R5 Personal Address Book
Edit Address Book Profile
418153104029316637
New folders in the R5 Personal Address Book
Temporary Export Certificapes
417207670429229753
New forms in the R5 Personal Address Book
Account
Contact (replaces Business Card from 4.6)
_Advanced\International MIME Settingsw
_Advanced\Temporary Export Certificate
(AddressPicker)U
(DeleteAccounts)
(DeleteCertDialog)
(DIsplayCertifierNotesCertificates)7
(DisplayUserNotesCertificates)
(ProxyAuthentication)D
(ProxyHelp)
($LAN Wizard)i
($NetworkDialup Wizard)
($NotesDirectDialup Wizard)
417257670429229754
New script libraries in the R5 Personal Address Book
RLANRoutines
StackContainer
Wizard
417257670429229755
New subforms in the R5 Personal Address Book
$CertifierExtensibleSchema
$CharacterSetSettings
$GroupExtensibleSchema
$OTPPP
417257670429229756
New views in the R5 Personal Address Book
_Advanced\Accounts
_Advanced\International MIME Settings
($Accounts)
($ByCategory)
($InternationalMIMESettings)
($MailGroups)
($PeopleGroupsByLang)
($PeopleGroupsCorpHier)
417257670429229757
Deleted views in the R5 Personal Address Book
($NamesFieldLookpp)
($ServersLookup)
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Setting your Personal Address Book preferences
Click here
Click here
Creating account records for Internet mail
Click here
h{age
&Arial
Portfolio databases are presented as bookmarks in the R5 interface.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Converting the workspace to bookmarks
Click here
h{age
&Arial
Do not upgrade your mail file to the Release 5 template until your Domino administrator tells you to do so or upgrades it for you.
Notes Release 5 introduces Account records, which contain information for accessing mail using POP, IMAP, and sending mail with SMTP. If your Release 4 Location record is set up to use POP3, Notes converts this information into an Account record for that setting. If you send mail to the Internet, Notes creates an SMTP Account record. The accounts are set for the Locatio` that you set up for Internet mail.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Using calendar and scheduling features with Internet mail
Click here
h{age
&Arial
Before upgrading Notes, the domain administrator may want to set the Administration Execution Control List (ECL) in the Domino Directory. The Administration ECL sets the default security on the Notes client when users start Notes for the first time after upgrading. Workstatio` security defines which group's applications can execute on a Notes client. If a group is not specified in the ECL for a client, Notes warns the user when an application created by the group attempts to run on that client.O
For information on setting the Administration ECL, see Domino Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
@reating a workstation ECL
Click here
h{age
2Q he
&Arial
In Release 5, Notes and phe client operating system synchronize the time zone and daylight savings time settings. When you start Notes, the client synchronizes the operating system settings to match those of the current Notes location. In previous releases, Notes synchronized only the operating system time, which could cause the operating system clock to be out of synch with the operating system time zone setting.
Be sure that the time zone, daylight savings time, and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) are correctly set on yopr operating system. For example, if the operating system does not have daylight savings time activated and you manually change your clock to account for it, running Notes turns on daylight savings time in the operating system, causing the operating system clock to be off by one hour.
270246441629238405
Changing settings on Windows computers
The list of time zones and the start and end dates for daylight savings time in Notes Location documents match those of th` Windows operating system. If you change to a location with different settings, those settings update the Windows time zone and daylight savings time. If you change the Windows time zone or daylight savings time settings while Notes is running, Notes updates those settings for the current location.
When you upgrade to Release 5 on a Windows computer, you may be prompted to choose a time zone if the time zone settings in one of your location documents does not match the Windows system settings.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Changing Domino server time zone and daylight savings time settings
Click here
h{age
&Arial
In an environment which mixes routing mail over Notes RPC and SMTP, the Domino router automatically routes meeting invitations, appointments, and other calendar and scheduling information over Notes RPC when possible. Over SMTP -- for example, if you send a meeting invitation to someone over the Int`rnet -- calendar and scheduling items are converted to text messages. Notes RPC is required to use the interactive (workflow) features in Notes calendar and scheduling items.
Note
Conversion of calendar and scheduling items to text when routing over SMTP works the same way in R5 as it did in R4.5 and R4.6.
See Also
Click here
Creating account records for Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
h{age
(VD"p
&Arial
Organizations that want to use the repeating meetings feature in the R5 mail template should upgrade their R4.5 Notes clients and mail templates to R4.5.7 and their R4.6 clients and mail templates to R4.6.3 for repeating meetings to work properly in a mixed environment. You do not need to upgrade your servers, but you do need to upgrade the mail templates for those clients that want to use repeating meetings.
Since releases earlier than 4.5 did not have the calendar and pcheduling features introduced in R4.5, there is no need to make changes to servers or mail files using those releases.p
See Also
Click here
Upgrading your mail file to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client to Release 5
Click here
h{age
&Arial
The Domino Directory is backwards-compatible and should be replicated to your R4 and R3 Domino servers. It supports the LDAPv3 propocol, allowing Internet clients to query and update the directory. The Domino Directory includes a new field, the Internet Address field, with which you can standardize Internet addresses in your organization.
See information on:b
Click here
Using the Domino Directory template in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Customized Address Books
Click here
Click here
Using the Domino Directory Profile
Click here
Click here
New and deleted views in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New forms in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Setting message format preference for usersa
Click here
239618793629244035
Using the New Internet A`dress Field
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documentsz
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address
Click here
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Validating Internet Addresses
Click here
239618793629244036
Upgrade Changes and Coexistenceg
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
Click here
Web authentication and secondary address books
Click here
Click here
Host names in Server documents
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book
Click here
Click here
Upgrading th` Public Address Book for an Internet mail server
Click here
0gq5 g1
ji~ie
&Arial
The R5 Domino Directory template is designed for use in a mixed-release environment. After upgrading your first server to R5, you can and should replicate the new design to the other servers in your organization. The new template is designed for backwards compatibility on R4 and even R3 servers.
96494592029234356U
Upgrading R4 servers that use the Domino Directory template
You may decide to upgrade the Release 4 Domino servers in your environment to a later release of R4 before upgrading them to R5. For example, in a mixed environment of R4 and R5 servers, you might need to upgrade the R4 servers from release 4.6 to 4.6.2. When you upgrade, Domino asks if you want to replace the design of the Public Address Book. If your 4.6 servers use the R5 Domino Directory design (as recommended), and you click Yep to replace the design, Domino overwrites the R5 Domino Directory template with the R4 Public Address Book template. Lotus recommends that you do not replace the design of the Public Address Book when upgrading among R4 releases for servers that have the R5 Domino Directory template on them.
154577030429308152
Accessing the Domino Directory with an R4 client
The R5 Domino Directory uses tabbed tables in many of the Directory forms to consolidate and present infor`ation more effectively. However, R4 clients cannot display tabbed tables, so forms that use the tables do not render perfectly to R4 clients. Person and Group documents in the R5 Domino Directory have an alternate format that renders well to R4 clients and is very similar to the design of the forms in the R4 Public Address Book. Other documents display all information but are less easy to read and work with. Since end users primarily open Person and Group documents, the impact of the upgrade to the Domino @irectory should be minimal. Lotus recommends that administrators use the R5 Domino Administrator client to perform administration tasks as the tabbed tables render appropriately and make administration easier.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail server
Click here
Click here
Upgrading the Public Address Book
Click here
Click `ere
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New and deleted design elements in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New forms in the Domino Directory$
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Click here
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information `n a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
Click here
Upgrading administration clients
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Domino Administration
Click here
&Arial
If you customized the R4 Public Address Book, perform the following steps to upgrade the Address Book to the R5 Domino Directory.
1. Back up the design of your R4 Public Address Book.e
2. Upgrade the address book to the R5 Domino Directory design.
3. Inspect the R5 Domino Directory to determine which of your customized changes are still needed.
4. Add your changes from the customized R4 Public Address Book to the R5 D`mino Directory. Do not overwrite the Domino Directory design elements. For example, if you customized the Person documents by adding a field for Employee's Date of Hire, copy that field and paste it into the R5 Person document. Do not copy the R4 Person document and paste it into the R5 Domino Directory.
Note
You must add individual R4 changes to the R5 Domino Directory design elements. Do not attempt to maintain your R4 Public Address Book by adding the R5 changes to your R4 design as the address book will not function properly in an R5 environment.u
&Arial
The first time you open the upgraded Domino Directory with a Notes or Web client, you see the Domino Directory Profile. The profile controls characteristics of the directory.
For information on completing the Directory Profile, see "
Click here
Customizing the Public Directory Profile.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New and deleted design elements in the Domino Directory
Click here
&Arial
Follow these steps to manually recertify a flat ID that has a certificate that is about to expire. The owner of the ID and the certification administrator must be able to communicate through Notes mail; each takes turns processing the request.
346988188829204373
To mail the ID, the owner of the ID does the following:.
1. Choose File - Tools - User ID.
2. Click Certificates.
3. Click Request Certificate.
4. Enter the name of the certification administrator in the To field.
5. Click Send to mail the request to the certification administrator.
346988188829204374
To recertify the ID, the certification administrator does the foll`wing:
1. Open the certification request in your mail file.
2. If the certifier is on a disk, insert the disk in the disk drive.
3. Choose Actions - Certify Attached ID File.k
4. Select the certifier to use and click OK.
5. Enter the password for the certifier and click OK.
6. If the certifier is on a disk, remove the disk from the disk drive and click OK.i
7. (Optional) Accept or change the certificate expiration date.r
8. Leave "Trust other certificates signed by this certifier" selected unless this is a certificate from another organization's certifier.
9. (Optional) Click Server, select a server, then click OK to change the server in whose Domino Directory Domino updates the Person document. If the server isn't local, you must have at least Author access to its Domino Directory.
10. Click Certify.
11. Click Sign to prove your identity to the pecipient.
12. Choose Send to send the recertified safe copy of the ID to the user.
346988188829204375
To merge the new certificate, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Open the mail document containing the recertified ID.
2. Choose Actions - Accept Certificate.
3. Enter the password for the ID. You see the new certificate.
4. If this is a certificate received from another organization, turn off "Trust other certificates signed by this certifier."
For more information, see "
Click here
About communication with organizations that use flat names
Click here
" later in this chapter.
5. Click Accept.
See Also
Click here
Ways to recertify flat IDs
Click here
Click here
About communicating with organizations that use the flat nam`ng model
Click here
S+ me
S+ me
&Arial
The Domino Directory contains new design elements, and omits some elements*from Release 4 Public Address Books.
214092160029316651
New agents in the Domino Directory
Edit Directory Profile
Remove Profile
(Convert Names in Groups)
(FindName)
(Import Holidays)
214092160029316652
New forms in the Domino Directory
Server\Configuration Settings
Server\External Domain Network Information
Server\File Identification
Server\Holiday
Server\User Setup Profile
(46Group)
(46Person)
(Alternate Language Information)
(DeleteCertDialog)
(DisplayCertifierNotesCertificates)
(DIsplayUserNotesCertificates)
(ExternalDomainNetworkAddresses)
(File Protection)
(FileProtectionDialog)
(LDAP Locality)
(Mapping)
(ProxyAuthentication)A
(ProxyJelp)w
(PublicDirectoryProfile)
(Realm)N
(SSLCipherDialog)o
(Virtual Server)
($LDAPSettings)E
($MessagingSettings)
46328700829316653
New subforms in the Domino Directory
$CertfierExtensibleSchema
$CharacterSetSettings
$DomainExtensibleSchema
$GroupExtensibleSchema
$LDAPConfiguration
$MailInDatabaseExtensibleSchema
$OTPPP
$PersonExtensibleSchema
$PersonGeneralInfo
$ResourceExtensibleSchema
$RouterSMTPSettings
354271129629229750
New views in the Domino DirectoryN
People\Alternate Language Information
Server\External Domain Network Information
Server\File Identifications
Server\Holidays
Server\Web Configurations
($ExternalDomainNetworkAjdress)
($ExternalDomainNetworkInformation)
($FileIdentifications)
($Holidays)
($LDAPCN)
($LDAPG)
($LDAPHier)
($LDAPRDNHier)
($LDAPS)
($PeopleGroupsByLang)
($PeopleGroupsCorpHier)
354271129629229753
Release 4 views deleted from the Domino Directory
($ACLMonitors)
($Events)
($ReplMonitors)
*$Thresholds)
Note
Once all clients in your organization are at Release 4.5 or greater, you can delete the $NamesFieldLookup view from the Domino Directory. If clients running earlier releases of Notes continue to access the Domino Directory, do not delete this view.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
New forms in the Domjno Directory
Click here
&Arial
Release 5 adds a number of forms to the Domino Directory. These include
New and deleted design elements in the Domino Directory
Click here
0gq5 g1
&Arial
The Release 5 Domino Directory Person document sets a user's message preference in the field "Format preference for incoming mail" on the Mail tab. There are three choices:
Prefers MIME. Messages in Notes rich text format are converted to MIME on delivery to the user's mail file. This is the preferred setting for users who access mail using POP3 or IMAP.
Prefers Notes rich text. Messages in MIME format are converted to Notes rich text on delivery to the user's mail file. This is the preferred setting for users who access mail using a Release 4 Notes client.
No Preference. Mail is delivered to the user's mail file in either format -- Domino does not convert the format. This is the preferred setting for users who access mail using a Release 5 Notes client.
When you register a new user in Release 5, you select their mail systej: Notes, POP3, IMAP, etc. Domino sets the "Format preference for incoming mail" field based on this selection:
If the user's mail system is Notes, the setting is No Preference.m
If the user's mail system is POP3 or IMAP, the setting is Prefers MIME._
If you want to change this setting for a user, register the user and then edit their Person document in the Domino Directory. Registration does not allow you to edit this setting. These default settings work best with Rejease 5 and provide the best performance since they minimize conversion between formats.
If you want to register new Release 4 users, use a Release 4 client to register them.
If you upgraded to Release 5 from a version of Release 4 prior to 4.6, the Person document did not have a setting for message format preference. Thus, the field is blank for users registered under R4. Domino interprets a blank field as Prefers Notes rich text. To change this, edit the Person document and selejt a different setting.4
Note
If you edit one of these upgraded Person documents and do not change the field's setting, the document is saved with the default setting of No Preference. For R4 and POP/IMAP users, you should alter the setting to the proper selection.
&Arial
When upgrading to Domino Release*5, you can use the Internet Address tool to fill in the Internet Address field for all Person documents in which the field is blank in a Domino Directory.
1. Launch the Domino Administrator.
2. Click the People and Groups tab.
3. Select the server and Domino Directory for which you wish to fill in the Internet Address fields.
4. Click the People tab.
5. Click Set Internet Address.
6. In the Internet Address Construjtion dialog, choose a format for the Internet addresses.e
7. Choose a separator for the Internet addresses. This character separates the items in the Format field.t
8. Enter the Internet domain for the company.
Note
If you select the option "Use existing address from short name field, if available" the tool searches the Short name field in each Person document for a valid Internet address (for example, jdoe@acme.com). If the zool finds a valid Internet addres, it uses this address to complete the Internet Address field, instead of creating a new entry based on the information in the dialog box.
9. (Optional) Click More Options and do any of the following:
Select "Use existing Internet domain from shortname field, if available" to search the Short name field in each Person document for a valid Internet domain (for example, @acme.com). If the tool finds a valid Internet domain, it uses this domain to jomplete the Internet address, instead of using the entry in the Internet domain in the dialog box.
Select "Separate multi-word names with selected separator character" to insert the separator character you specify between words in a name with multiple words.
Select "Create addresses only for people in a specific Notes Domain" to set Internet addresses only for users in a given Notes domain. Enter the domain name of the Notes domain in which you want to set Internet addresses.
Select "Use alternative format pattern in case of name conflict" to specify a second Internet address pattern if Notes generates the same Internet address for two users. Specify the alternative format pattern in the box. See "
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern.
Click here
This allows you to use the alternative format pattern if the primary pattern results in an address containing non-ASCII characters, an address that is not unique, oz one which contains an invalid character.
The Internet Address Construction dialog box specifies the server and Domino Directory on which it runs. It also gives an example for each address and separator format.
Note
The dialog box does not give examples for all Custom Format combinations.
The Internet Address tool checks all Person documents in the Domino Directory. When it finds a document without an entry in the Internet Address field, jt creates an entry based on the rules above, verifies that the entry is a valid RFC 821 address, and checks to ensure that the entry is unique by performing an exhaustive name lookup of the entry on all Domino Directories on the server. If the entry matches an Internet Address field, the tool leaves the field blank and enters an error in the Log (LOG.NSF).
Note
All errors are entered in the Log (LOG.NSF).
Caution
The Inteznet Address tool performs an exhaustive name lookup of every new Internet address and should not be run on a directory or server that is under heavy load.
Address formats for the Internet Address tool
You can choose from the following address formats:
FirstName LastName
This uses the contents of the First name field and the Last name field to form the address.
FirstName MiddleInitial LastName
This usez the contents of the First name field, Middle initial field, and Last name field to form the address.
FirstInitial LastName
This uses the first letter in the user's First name field and the contents of the Last name field to form the address.
FirstInitial MiddleInitial LastName.
This uses the first letter in the user's First name field, Middle initial field, and the contents of the Last name field to form the address.
LastName FirstName
This uses the contents of the Last name field and the First name field to form the address.
LastName FirstName MiddleInitial
This uses the contents of the Last name field, First name field, and Middle initial field to form the address.
LastName FirstInitial
This uses the contents of the Last name field and first letter in the user's First name field to form the address.
LastName FirstInitial MiddleInitial
This uses thj Last name field, first letter in the user's First name field, and Middle initial field to form the address.
FirstName LastInitial
This uses the First Name field and the first character of the Last name field to form the address.
Use Custom Format Pattern
The Custom Format Pattern lets you specify how to construct an Internet address.
You can choose from the following address separators:
None
An underscore
An equals sign
A percent sign
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
You must specify an Internet domain in the Internet Domain field of the dialog box.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address
Click here
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Retrjeving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
&Arial
For the user Jane R. Jones,
User
First name field
Last name field
Middle initial field
Internet domain
Jane R. Jones
Jane
Jones
acme.com
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
running the Internet address tool produces the following possible Internet addresses:
Format
Separator
Internet Address after running tool
FirstName LastName
Jane_Jones@acme.com
FirstName MiddleInitial LastName
Jane_R_Jones@acme.com
FirstInitial LastName
J%Jones@acme.com
FirszInitial MiddleInitial LastName
J%R%Jones@acme.com
LastName FirstName
Jones=Jane@acme.com
LastName FirstName MiddleInitial
Jones=Jane=R@acme.com
LastName FirstInitial
Jones_J@acme.com
LastName FirstInitial MiddleInitial
Jones_J_R@acme.com
FirstName LastInitial
Jane%J@acme.com
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
You must specify an Internet*domain in the Internet Domain field of the dialog box.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
Click here
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address using Custom Fozmat Pattern
Click here
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5
Click here
&Arial
If you select "Use Custom Format Pattern" in the dialog box, you can set how Domino creates Internet addresses in Person records without an entrz in the Internet Address field. Use the following characters in the dialog box to specify how the address should appear:
Abbreviation
Meaning
First name, truncate at
characters
Last name, truncate at
characters
Middle initial
Title
Generational qualifier
Employee IDs
Location
Department
Server
Organizational Unit
Use the existing Short name field
Separator
Separator
Separator
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
By combining the characters and separators above, you can set how Internet addresses should appear ij your organization.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents@
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5
Click here
&Arial
For the user Jane R. Jones:
Title
First Name
Middle Initial
Last Name
Location
Organization
Server
Jane
Jones
Tampa
Acme
MailT1
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
you could set Custom Format to produce the following addresses:
Custom Formatl
Address
JaneJones@acme.com
F2L
JaJones@acme.com
F_L=C
Jane_Jones=Tampa@acme.com
T_F_M_L%V
Ms_Jane_R_Jones%MailT1@acme.com
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Using Custom Format Pattern
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Persoj documents
Click here
Click here
Creating an Internet address
Click here
Click here
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5
Click here
&Arial
You can use the Internet Address tool to verify that entries in the Internet Address field of all Person documents*in one or more Domino Directories are unique. This ensures that Internet addresses do not conflict. To validate that the entries in the Internet Address fields are unique, do the following:
1. Launch the Domino Administrator.
2. Click the People and Groups tab.
3. Select the server and Domino Directory for which you wish to validate entries in the Internet Address fields.
4. Click the People tab.
5. Click Validate Internet Address*
6. Select to validate Internet addresses only in the current Domino Directory you selected in step 3 or to validate Internet addresses in all available Domino Directories on the server and click OK.
The validation tool exhaustively checks every Internet address in the Domino Directory or Directories you selected against all Domino Directories or against all directories specified in the Directory Assistance database (DA50.NSF). If an address is not unique, Domino records the duzlicate address in the server log (LOG.NSF).
Note
Validating Internet addresses consumes significant server resources -- do not use this tool when the server is under heavy load or when response time for users is critical. Lotus recommends running this tool at times when few users access the server -- such as on weekends or late at night.
&Arial
Once you upgrade your Release 4 Public Address Book to the Release 5 Domino Directory design, you must upgrade your Domino servers running LDAP to at least Release 4.6.3 so they can properly handle LDAP queries and return correct information. The Domino Directory uses the Internet Addresz field to answer LDAP queries. R4 releases earlier than 4.6.3 do not handle this change.
Note
LDAP was introduced in 4.6.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Internet mail addresses in Domino Release 5
Click here
Click here
Populating the Internet Address field in Person jocuments
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Directory Assistance
Click here
New and deleted design elements in the Domino DirectoryUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory\featuresDomino Directory\new and deleted viewsDomino Directory\viewsContentsOverviewH_NEW_AND_DELETID_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVERTopic1New and deleted design elements in the Domino DirectoryOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER
H_NEW_AND_DELETED_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVER_MIDTOPIC_214092160029316651=New agents in the Domino DirectoryH_NEW_AND_DELETED_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVER_MIDTOPIC_214092160029316652=New forms in the Domino DirectoryH_NEW_AND_DELETED_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVER_MIDTOPIC_46328700829316653=New subforms in the Iomino DirectoryH_NEW_AND_DELETED_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVER_MIDTOPIC_354271129629229750=New views in the Domino DirectoryH_NEW_AND_DELETED_VIEWS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_8913_OVER_MIDTOPIC_354271129629229753=Release 4 views deleted from the Domino Directory01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
New forms in the Domino DirectoryUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory\formsDomino Directory\new and deleted formsContentsOverviewH_NEW_FORMS_IN_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_3613_OVERTopic1New forms in the Domino DirectoryOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Ioving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
0gq5 g1
Setting message format preference for usersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Releaye 5
.AContentsOverviewH_SETTING_MESSAGE_FORMAT_PREFERENCE_FOR_USERS_921_OVERTopic1Setting message format preference for usersOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documentsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Addresses\creating for Internet mailDomino Directory\populating Internet Address fieldInternet Address Construction\dialog boxInternet Address field\populating in Person documentsInternet Address tool\using in Domino DirectoryInternet addyesses\assigning to usersInternet addresses\formats forInternet addresses\in Person documentsInternet addresses\separators inNames\Internet addressPerson documents\Internet Address fieldPerson documents\populating Internet Address fieldSet Internet Address\tool in Domino DirectoryContentsDetailsDIALOG 10431 553H_POPULATING_THE_INTERNET_ADDRESS_FIELD_IN_PERSON_DOCUMENTS_6514_STEPSTopic1Populating the Internet Address field in Person documentsDetailsH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER
H_DETAILS_PIPULATING_THE_INTERNET_ADDRESS_FIELD_IN_PERSON_DOCUMENTS_9886_DETAILS=Address formats for the Internet Address tool01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating an Internet addressUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet Address ConstructionInternet Address fieldInternet Address tool\examples of addresses created withInternet addresses\creatingInternet mail addresses\upgrading andMail addresses\upgrading andContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_POPULATING_THE_INTERNET_ADDRESS_FIELD_IN_PERSON_DOCUMENTS_3616_EXTopic1Creating an Internet addressExamplesH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1989_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
otes Help:
Using Custom Format PatternUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Custom Format Pattern\using to create Internet addressesInternet addresses\name formats inInternet addresses\using custom format pattern forNaming conventions\for Internet addressesPerson documents\using custom format pattern for Internet addressUse Custom Format Pattern\in Internet Address toolContentsStepsH_USING_CUSTOM_FORMAT_PATTERN_7379_STEPSTopic1Using Custom Format PatternStepsH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Yorking with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating an Internet address using Custom Format PatternUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Internet Address field\upgrading andInternet addresses\creatingContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_USING_CUSTOM_FORMAT_PATTERN_8514_EXTopic1Creating an Internet address using Custom Format PatternExamplesH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
F1 Help\usingISP\Notes and Internet serversWelcome page\about
ContentsOverview
IntroClientHelpHELP-INDEX ACTIVE Deprecated;DOCUMENT KEYBOARD Deprecated;EMON KEYBOARD Deprecated;DATABASE KEYBOARD Deprecated;H_GETTING_STARTED_5354_OVERTopic1Getting StartedOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Validating Internet AddressesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Addresses\validating for Internet mailDomino Directory\checking Internet addresses for uniquenessDomino Directory\validating Internet Adiress fieldInternet Address field\checking for uniquenessInternet addresses\checking for uniquenessInternet addresses\validatingInternet addresses\validating for usersPerson documents\validating entries in Internet Address fieldValidate Internet Address Unique\dialog boxValidating Internet addresses\tool in Domino DirectoryContentsOverviewDIALOG 10424 522H_VALIDATING_INTERNET_ADDRESSES_1912_OVERTopic1Validating Internet AddressesOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ATABASE_F
Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino ti Release 5
Domino Directory\and LDAP queries in a mixed release environmentInternet Address field\LDAP queries andLDAP queries\in a mixed release environmentLDAP queries\upgrading servers forLDAP service\in a mixed release environmentLDAP service\upgradingContentsOverviewH_RETRIEVING_INFORMATION_FROM_LDAP_SERVERS_IN_A_MIXED_ENVIRONMENT_8288_OVERTopic1Retrieving LDAP information in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading Directory AssistanceUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
DA50.NTF\upgrading Directory Assistance withDirectory Assistance\upgradingMaster Address Book\upgrading to Directory AssistanceUpgrading\Directory AssistanceContentsStepsH_UPGRADING_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_2621_STEPSTopic1Upgrading Directory AssistanceStepsH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
for printin
Web authentication and secondary address booksUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Address books\Web authentication andAuthentication\Web clients andCascading Domino directories\Web authentication andDirectory Assistance\Web authentication aniNAMES=\and Web authenticationSecurity\authenticating Web clientsWeb clients\authentication andWeb\authenticationContentsExamplesH_WEB_AUTHENTICATION_AND_SECONDARY_ADDRESS_BOOKS_711_EXTopic1Web authentication and secondary address booksExamplesH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
09_STEPS_M
ji~ie
Host names in Server documentsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domino Directory\using host names in Server documentsHost names\using instead of IP addresses in Server documentsIP addresses\in Server documentsIP addresses\replacing with host names in Servir documentsServer documents\host names inServer documents\using host names instead of IP addressesContentsOverviewH_HOST_NAMES_IN_SERVER_DOCUMENTS_2135_OVERTopic1Host names in Server documentsOverviewH_WORKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1689_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
02=Notes
Upgrading clustersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Clusters\upgradingUpgrade steps\for clustered serversContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_CLUSTERS_5108_OVERTopic1Upgrading clustersOverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 507 Upgrading Clusters
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
databa
Mail files in a mixed-release clusterUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Clusters\mail files inDeletions, soft\in a mixed-release cluyterFailover\in a mixed-release clusterMIME messages\in a mixed-release clusterMail files\clusters andMail rules\in a mixed release clusterMail\using in a mixed-release clusterSoft deletions\in a mixed-release clusterContentsOverviewH_USING_MAIL_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_CLUSTER_1429_OVERTopic1Mail files in a mixed-release clusterOverviewH_UPGRADING_CLUSTERS_5108_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 507 Upgrading Clusters
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Password checking and interoperability with earlier releasesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Authentication\passwordID files\password checking andIDs\password checking andPassword checking\resulys of enablingPasswords\authenticatingPasswords\checking during authenticationContentsOverviewH_PASSWORD_CHECKING_AND_INTEROPERABILITY_WITH_EARLIER_RELEASES_3684_OVERTopic1Password checking and interoperability with earlier releasesOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
CoitentsOverviewH_TO_SELECT_A_SERVER_TO_UPDATE_YOUR_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_1318_OVERYesTopic1Selecting a server to update your database access control listOverviewH_CHANGING_WHO_CAN_ACCESS_YOUR_DATABASE_7045_OVER
H_TO_SELECT_A_SERVER_TO_UPDATE_YOUR_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_1318_OVER_MIDTOPIC_248641529629230750=To set an administration server for one database
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading databases and applicationsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Applications\upgradingDatabases\upgradingUpgrade steps\for databases and applicationsUpgrading\databases and applicationsContentsOversiewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVERTopic1Upgrading databases and applicationsOverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER_MIDTOPIC_50385334429244037=Upgrading DatabasesH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER_MIDTOPIC_50385334429244038=Preventing Database UpgradeH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER_MIDTOPIC_50385334429244039=Using Databases with Release 501 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Asplications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading databases to R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to#Release 5
Database design\upgradingDatabase format\upgradingODS\upgradingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_TO_R5_4431_OVERTopic1Upgrading databases to R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER
H_UPGRADING_DATABASES_TO_R5_4431_OVER_MIDTOPIC_314115699229234974=Before upgrading database format to R5H_UPGRADING_DATABASES_TO_R5_4431_OVER_MIDTOPIC_314115699229234975=After upgrading database format to R501 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading database formatUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Compact -R task\and rolling back#database formatCompacting\databasesDatabases\compactingNS4 files\keeping databases in Release 4 formatNotes client\compacting databasesRelease 4 databases\maintaining format ofContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASE_FORMAT_130_OVERTopic1Upgrading database formatOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER
H_UPGRADING_DATABASE_FORMAT_130_OVER_MIDTOPIC_223005897629308170=Compacting a database to R5 format from the Domino AdministratorH_UPGRADING_DATABASE_FORMAT_130_OVER_MIDTOPIC_225207862429233357=Compacting a database to Release 5 format from the server consoleH_UPGRADING_DATABASE_FORMAT_130_OVER_MIDTOPIC_314115699229234974=Compacting databases from a Notes client01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading users' mail filesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Convert task\and upgrading mail files to R5IMAP\converting mail files to useMAIL50.NTF\upgrading mail files toMail conversion utility\optionsMail conversion utility\wildcards andMail files\upgradingMail\upgrading files to R5Upgrading\mail files to R5Wildcards\mail conversion utility andContectsStepsH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPSTopic1Upgrading users' mail filesStepsH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER
H_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243602=Using the mail conversion utilityH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243603=<+!>Upgrading a single mail databaseH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243604=H_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243605=Upgrading all mail databases cn a directoryH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243606=Upgrading all mail databases in a directory and its subdirectoriesH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243607=Upgrading all mail databases listed in a text fileH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243608=Creating a text file that lists all mail databases in a directoryH_UPGRADING_USERS_MAIL_FILES_9315_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5652710429243609=Converting mail files for use with IMAP01 Moving to Nctes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading templatesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_UPGRADING_TEMPLATES_3599_OVER_MIDTOPIC_60531590429240177=R5 mail templates on an R4 serverH_UPGRADING_TEMPLATES_3599_OVER_MIDTOPIC_303038928029243821=Preventing template replication between R5 and R4 servers01 Moving to Notes and Comino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading Web applicationsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
JavaScript formulas\Web andJavaScript\and upgrading Web applicationsURLs\generatingUpgrading\Web applicationsUse JavaScript property\and upgrading Web applicationsWeb applications\upgradingWeb\JavaScript formulasContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_WEB_APPLICATIONS_1072_OVERTopic1Upgrading Web applicationsOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotss
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Using default Web templates with older browsersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Browsers\using with default Web templatesJavaScript\Web browsers andJavaScript\and using default Web templatesTemplates\JavaYcript complianceWeb browsers\using with default Web templatesWeb\JavaScript versions andWeb\templatesContentsOverviewH_USING_DEFAULT_WEB_TEMPLATES_WITH_OLDER_BROWSERS_2867_OVERTopic1Using default Web templates with older browsersOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading document librariesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
=01 Moving to Notey and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
gLEje
Issues with upgrading applications and databasesUpgrading Notes and Domino)to Release 5
Rebuilding views\and delays on initial database accessUpgrading databases\and rebuilding viewsViews\rebuilding after upgradingContentsOverviewH_ISSUES_WITH_UPGRADING_APPLICATIONS_AND_DATABASES_5464_OVERTopic1Issues with upgrading applications and databasesOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Allowing more database fields in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
.AContentsOverviewH_ALLOWING_MORE_DATABASE_FIELDS_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_810_OVERTopic1Allowing more database fields in a mixed-releaye environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Keeping a new database in Release 4 formatUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Database format\maintainingDatabases\Release 4 formatDatabases\accessing locallyDatabases\file extensionsFile extensions\for Release 4 databasesInteroperability\databaseODS\keeping a database in Release 4 formatRelease 4 databases\maintaining format ofContentsOverviewH_CREATING_A_NEW_DATABASE_IN_RELEASE_4_X_FORMAT_9406_OVERTopic1Keeping a new database in Release 4 formatOverviewH_YPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER
H_CREATING_A_NEW_DATABASE_IN_RELEASE_4_X_FORMAT_9406_OVER_MIDTOPIC_7422067229229894=Creating a replica of a database in Release 4 format01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Compacting\databasesDatabases\compacting in a mixed release environmentContentsOverviewH_COMPACTING_DATABASES_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_9556_OVERTopic1Compacting databases in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notis and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Rolling back databases to R4 database formatUpgrading Notes and Doiino to Release 5
Applications\reverting to previous releasesCompact -R task\and rolling back database formatDatabase format\interoperability andDatabases\reverting to previous releasesNS4 files\and rolling back database formatODS\interoperability andRelease 4 databases\maintaining format ofReplication\previous releases andContentsOverviewH_ROLLING_BACK_APPLICATIONS_TO_PREVIOUS_RELEASES_7364_OVERTopic1Rolling back databases to R4 database formatOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER
H_ROLLING_BACK_APPLICATIONS_TO_PREVIOUS_RELEASES_7364_OVER_MIDTOPIC_223005897629308170=Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format from the Domino AdministratorH_ROLLING_BACK_APPLICATIONS_TO_PREVIOUS_RELEASES_7364_OVER_MIDTOPIC_246363353629238560=Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format from the server consoleH_ROLLING_BACK_APPLICATIONS_TO_PREVIOUS_RELEASES_7364_OVER_MIDTOPIC_225207862429234357=Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format by creating a new replica01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
X.509 certificates and interoperabilityUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
ID files\X.509 certificates andInteroperability\X.509 certificates andNotes client\X.509 certificatesX.509 certificates\ID files andContentsOverviewH_X_509_CERTIFICATES_AND_INTEROPERABILITY_8380_OVERTopic1X.509 certificates and interoperabilityOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
R4 applications run without modification on an R5 server and with the new R5 On-Disk Structure (ODS). Any known incompatibility issues are documented in this guide and in the Release 5 Release Notes. Test your applications on an R5 server before deploying them in a production environment. Should you encounter a problem or incompatibility that is not documented, you can check the Lotus KnowledgeBase at http://www.suppory.lotus.com/csserv.nsf/linkfr/search .
When you upgrade to use R5 templates and features, be aware that R4 clients cannot use these features. Using R5 templates and features in a mixed-release environment can cause complications by preventing some clients (those running earlier releases of Notes) from using the full functionality of the application.
Lotus internal testing, and testing done in conjunction with ISV partners, demonstrates that upgrade concerns and issues for applicayions are generally minor or nonexistent. However, each application is different, and Lotus strongly recommends testing mission-critical, revenue-generating, or complex applications on R5 before deploying them.
There are three possibilities for databases and applications in the R5 environment:e
1. Upgrade an application server to R5, but leave databases in R4 format (ODS) and using R4 design and features
All clients can access this database without issues, and there)should be no problems with the upgrade.
2. Upgrade the server and database format to R5, but leave the database design and features at R4
All clients can access the database without issue. There should be no problems with the upgrade -- compact the database to the new ODS.
3. Upgrade the server, database format, database design, and database features to R5
R4 clients cannot use R5 features. You may need to make changes to the application to use new ieatures. Compact the database to the new ODS, replace the R4 design with the R5 design, and add new R5 features as wanted.
This chapter provides information on:
50385334429244037
Upgrading Databases
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
Click here
Upgrading users' mail fiies
Click here
Click here
Upgrading templates
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Web applications
Click here
Click here
Using default Web templates with older browsers
Click here
Click here
Upgrading document libraries
Click here
Click here
Issues with upgriding applications and databases
Click here
Click here
Allowing more database fields in a mixed-release environment
Click here
50385334429244038
Preventing Database Upgrade
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environment
Click heye
Click here
Rolling back applications to previous releases
Click here
50385334429244039
Using Databases with Release 5
Click here
Upgrading applications and Release 5 requirements
Click here
Click here
Improving database performance
Click here
Click here
Changes in case- and accent-sensitive soyting of characters
Click here
Click here
Storing image files in native format
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
Scheduling upgrading
Click here
Click here
Testing applications before upgrading
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features
Click here
gLEje
&Arial
After upgrading a server to Domino R5, you can upgyade the databases on that server to R5 database format (On-Disk Structure, or ODS) and design (template). These two steps -- upgrading database format and upgrading database design -- are independent of each other. Since ODS does not replicate, you can leave the design of a database based on an R4 template and upgrade the database format on that server to R5 ODS. If you decide to upgrade the database design to use R5 templates and features, be aware that pre-R5 clients cannot use R5 features. Some R5 featuyes and templates require that a database use R5 database format.
314115699229234974
Before upgrading database format to R5
Upgrade the application server to Domino R5 (necessary to allow the server to host R5 databases and use R5-style compaction)
Run Fixup on databases -- this prevents most errors that interfere with compaction to the new database format
314115699229234975
After upgrading database format to R5
Consider running Updall -r on the database -- this rebuilds views in the database, preventing delay when users first try to access it. This is especially important for databases that are used frequently, are mission-critical, or have large views.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
Click here
Improving database performance
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
Click here
Upgrading applications and Release 5 requirements
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Web applications
Click here
&Arial
Once you install Domino R5 on a server, you can upgrade the format of databases on that server. Compacting a database using Doiino R5 upgrades the database format (On-Disk Structure, or ODS) to Release 5. You can use the -R option with the Compact command to keep a database in R4 format or to roll its format back to R4 ODS. To prevent Domino R5 from upgrading the format of a database to R5, rename its extension to .NS4.
Release 5 ODS supports larger file sizes than does R4 ODS. R5 databases are theoretically unlimited in size. Lotus has tested and certified databases up to 64GB, though the OS/2 operating system limity database size to 32GB.
The Database Properties box under R5 lists the ODS version.
223005897629308170
Compacting a database to R5 format from the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure the server hosting the database has been upgraded to Domino R5.
2. Launch the Domino Administrator.
3. Click the Files tab.
4. Select the database(s) to compact to R5 ODS.
5. In the Tools pane at the right, silect Database - Compact.
6. Click OK.
225207862429234357
Compacting a database to Release 5 format from the server console
1. Upgrade the application server to Domino Release 5.
2. Launch the upgraded server.
3. Typea
load compact databaseName.nsfa
and press ENTER, where databaseName.nsf is the file name of the database you wish to compact to R5 format.
314115699229239974
Compacting databases from a Notes client
If a user compacts a database using a Notes client (for example, from the Info tab of the Database Properties box), the server compacts the database for the client. Thus, a Release 5 Domino server compacts the database using R5 compaction and an R4 Domino server compacts the database using R4 compaction. It is possible for Notes users to compact an R4 database on an R5 server to the new R5 database format (ODS). A way to prevent this is to reiame R4 databases using the .NS4 extension.
For more information, see "
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Improving database performance
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
&Arial
When you upgrade users' mail files to the Release 5 template, you can do so one file at a time or use the mail conversion utility to automate upgrading the design. Be sure that you have already upgraded the Domino server hosting the mail files and the Notes clients accessini them to Release 5, or users will not be able to use R5 features in the new design. Upgrade mail files at a time when users won't be accessing them -- for example, early mornings or over a weekend. Notify users that their mail files will be unavailable while they are being upgraded.
1. If users have customized their mail files, instruct them to back up these customizations. For example, users can make a new copy of their mail file that includes only the database design. This allows users to yeapply changes they made to their R4 mail file to the new R5 mail template. In many cases, these changes are unnecessary because R5 features perform the same function as the modifications. Have users try the new R5 mail template without changing it to determine what changes, if any, they need or want to make.
2. Launch the Domino server on which you want to customize mail files.
3. Shut down the router. Type
tell router quit
and press ENTER. This privents Domino from routing mail to the mail files while they are being upgraded. Mail is stored in MAIL.BOX while you upgrade the mail files. Once you have upgraded the mail files and load the router task again, the router processes and delivers the mail in MAIL.BOX.
4. Load the mail conversion utility. Type
load convert [arguments]
and press ENTER. See below for the arguments you can use with the mail conversion utility.
5. Once you have finished upirading mail files to the R5 template on this server, load the router. Type
load router
and press ENTER.
6. Notify users that you upgraded their mail files to the R5 design. They may have questions on new functionality and features in the R5 mail file. If they customized their R4 mail files, have them use the R5 mail file to see if customizing the design remains necessary. If it does, have them reapply changes to the R5 mail file design, but do not have them copy views from their R4 design to the R5 mail file. Instead, users or designers should implement changes directly to the R5 design elements.f
The mail conversion utility command uses arguments to specify options. It has the form:
This example finds the mail database USER.NSF in the \MAIL subdirectory of the Notes data directory. The mail conversion utility replaces the current mail template -- regardless of which template the mail file uses -- with MAIL50.NTF, the R5 mail template.
load convert mail\user.nsf * mail50.ntf
5652710429243604
5652710429243605
Upgrading all mail databases in a directory
This example finds all databases located in the \MAIL subdirectory of the Notes data directory that usi StdR45Mail, the R4.5x mail template, and replaces their design template with StdR50Mail (MAIL50.NTF), the R5 mail template.
load convert mail\*.nsf stdr45mail mail50.ntf
5652710429243606
Upgrading all mail databases in a directory and its subdirectories
This example finds all databases located in the \MAIL subdirectory of the Notes data directory and all subdirectories of the \MAIL directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA\MAIL\GROUP1, C:\NOTES\DITA\MAIL\GROUP2, and C:\NOTES\DATA\MAIL\GROUP3) and upgrades them to the R5 mail template, MAIL50.NTF.
load convert -r mail\*.nsf * mail50.ntf
5652710429243607
Upgrading all mail databases listed in a text file
You can create a text file listing databases you want to upgrade and use it with the mail conversion utility to upgrade only those databases. For example, you create the text file MAILLIST.TXT listing all the mail databases you want to upirade and save it in the directory C:\TEMP. This example finds all databases listed in MAILLIST.TXT, determines whether the databases use a design template name that matches STD* (StdR4Mail, for example), and replaces the designs of the matching databases with StdR50Mail (MAIL50.NTF), the R5 mail template.
Creating a text file that lists all mail databases in a directory
You ian use the mail conversion utility to create a text file that lists all primary mail databases on the server (it does not list replica mail databases). This example creates a text file, MAILLIST.TXT, in the C:\TEMP directory. MAILLIST.TXT contains a list of primary mail databases on the server but excludes replica mail databases. After you create the text file using this option, you can use the file to upgrade the mail databases listed in it. See "Upgrading all mail databases listed in a text file."g
load convert -l c:\temp\maillist.txt
5652710429243609
Converting mail files for use with IMAP
When you decide to use a Notes mail file with IMAP, run the mail conversion utility to enable IMAP-specific features in the mail file. This example readies the mail database USER.NSF in the \MAIL subdirectory of the Notes data directory for use with IMAP.
load convert -m mail\user.nsf
Note
When yiu use a wildcard, such as *, to specify which files to upgrade to the R5 mail template, be sure that all databases in the directory (and, if specified, subdirectories) are mail files. When you use a * wildcard, Domino replaces the design of all databases specified by *, such as all databases in the directory, with the specified template, such as the R5 mail template. If you do replace the design of a non-mail database with the R5 mail template, replace the design of the database with the appropriate templaye to restore it. You can do this with the conversion utility by specifying the database for which you want to restore the original design and by specifying the correct template.
Caution
Do not use the -s parameter with the convert task when upgrading mail files from R4 design to R5. The -s parameter ignores any folder or view with the Preserve bit deselected. This bit corresponds to the "Do not allow refresh/replace to modify" parameter in the design properties. System folders and other design elements from the original template used to create the mail file do not have this bit set, even if the database is set to inherit from design. System folders, such as the Inbox, are not updated if you run the Convert utility with the -s parameter. This affects mail files being upgraded to R5 because required script libraries have been removed and action buttons have been upgraded.
&Arial
R5 does not automatically upgrade databases to the R5 design; for example, when the Design task runs, it does not upgrade mail files from the R4 mail template to the R5 mail template. This allows you to choose when to upgrade database design. For information on upgrading mail database designs, see "
Click here
Upgrading users' mail files.
Click here
60531590429240177
R5 mail templates on an R4 server
Do not put an R5 mail template on an R4 server. The R5 template contains features which require an R5 server to work properly.
303038928029243821
Preventing template replication between R5 and R4 servers
If you have a mail file on an R5 server with an R5 template and a replica of that file on an R4 server with an R4 template, you must ensure that the designs of the mail files do not replicate. A mail file with an R5 design on an R4 server does not work properly, and you want to ensure that the older R4 design does not overwrite the R5 design on the R5 server. To prevent the mail templates of the two replicas from replicating, do the following for each mail file:
1. Open the replica mail database.
2. Choose File - Replication - Settings.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Under "Replicate incoming," deselect "Forms, views, etc." and "Agents."
) 5. Click OK.
Make sure you do this for each replica.
Note
This procedure does not work for clustered servers and databases -- cluster replication ignores selective replication.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Using default Web templates with older browsers
Click here
&Arial
Elements with unsupported formulas that Domino hid automitically in Release 4.5 may now display if you select the "Use JavaScript" property. With the property selected, Domino doesn't check any hotspot or button formulas before using JavaScript to generate the page. Web users see all buttons, actions, and hotspots -- even those that contain @commands and @functions that aren't supported for Web applications.
Revise any formulas that relied on hotspot formulas being evaluated at display time. Make sure these formulas evaluate correctly after the usey clicks the hotspot, not before. Replace Release 4.5 attachment fields with Web Element - File Upload Controls if you set the "Use JavaScript" property. The "Use JavaScript" setting disables @Command([EditInsertFileAttachment]) hotspots used to create attachment fields in Release 4.5, because the hotspot is not evaluated when the page is displayed.
The "Use JavaScript" property can cause unexpected results because the URL generation in Release 5.0 is different from what it was in Release 4.5.)Check any formulas that rely on accessing a Query_String or Path_Info URL fragment. The URLs will frequently be different. For example, POST URLs that included ?CreateDocument and ?SaveDocument are no longer generated in Release 5. The new POST URL is a variation of ?OpenForm or ?EditDocument."
See Also
Click here
Using default Web templates with older browsers
Click here
Click here
Upgrading templates
Click here
Click here
Upgrading applications and Release 5 requirements
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
&Arial
The default Web templates that ship with Release 5 are not supported on browsers that do not conform to the JavaScript 1.1 standard. If a browser that does not conform to)JavaScript 1.1 attempts to access one of the default Release 5 Web templates, the template displays an error message. Release 5 includes special Web templates designed to work with noncompliant browsers. o
Applications designed for Web use function as expected when accessed with browsers that do not comply with the JavaScript 1.1 standard as long as the application does not use JavaScript features not supported by these browsers. This is a limitation with the browsers and not with the templatey or applications. Domino and Domino applications support all browsers, but some of the tools that you can use with Domino (for example, JavaScript) are not supported by all browsers.
The Release 5 Web templates work with JavaScript 1.1-compliant browsers, including the following:U
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.xr
Netscape Communicator 4.x
If you are designing applications to be accessed by browsers that are not compliant with the JavaScript 1.1 standard)and want to use the Release 5 Web templates, be sure to use the special Web templates designed for noncompliant browsers.
Note
The Java applets Domino uses for templates depend on specific browser versions to run properly. See the Release Notes for a list of supported browsers.
Note
Domino R5 does not support Netscape Communicator 4.6 due to LiveConnect issues. Netscape Communicator 4.61 addresses these LiveConnect issues.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Web applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading templates
Click here
Click here
Storing image files in native format
Click here
&Arial
When you replace a Release 4.x document library design with either the Release 4.6 or Release 5.0 template (Doc Library - Notes and Web), run the "Upgrade Doclib R4 Documents to New Design" agent in the database before opening any of the converted documents.
1. Open the upgraded database.
2. Choose Actions - Upgrade Doclib R4 Documents to New Design.
If you do not run this agent, you receive an error message when you attempt to open a document and views)do not correctly display document status.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
gLEje
&Arial
In R5.0, users may experience an initial delay when accessing upgraded databases for the first time. This occurs because all database views rebuild on initiil access due to the updated View version in this release. To prevent this, run Updall -r on the database to rebuild the views.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5m
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
Click here
Impriving database performance
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environmentb
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
&Arial
Databases in R5 format (On Disk Structure, or ODS) can have up to 64,000 fields by enabling the option "Allow more fields in databasi" on the Advanced tab of the Database Properties box. Databases in R4 format and R5 databases that do not have this option enabled can have up to 3000 fields (where the total length of the concatenated field names is less than 64KB).
Enabling "Allow more fields in database" lets you create more fields in a database but keeps some features, such as full-text indexing, searching by form, and populating the field list in the Design pane of Domino Designer, from working. Also, replication betweei a database with the "Allow more fields in database" enabled and a replica of that database on an R4 server fails. You cannot create a new replica of a database that has this option enabled on an R4 server.
Lotus recommends that customers not enable the option "Allow more fields in database" for databases with replicas on both R5 and R4 servers.
&Arial
Any Notes client can access a database hosted on a Domino server, regardless of the release the client or server is running or the release format the database uses. However, Notes clients cannot access or use database features)from later releases; for example, a Release 4 Notes client can access a Release 5 database on a Domino server, but it cannot access or use R5 features in that database.g
If a database is stored on the local drive of a client, only clients of the same release and later can access it. For example, a database in Release 4 format can be accessed locally by a Release 4 or Release 5 Notes client, but not by a Release 3 client.
Domino servers can only host applications in their release firmat and earlier formats. For example, an R4 server can host an R4 or R3 database, but not an R5 database.t
To create a Release 5 application that can be accessed locally by R4 clients and stored on R4 servers, give it the extension .NS4 in the File Name field when creating the database. To keep a database in Release 4 format so it can be accessed locally by R4 clients or stored on an R4 server, change the database's extension to .NS4 via the operating system before compacting to R5 ODS or maki a new replica of the database using the extension .NS4.
Note
If a Release 5 client compacts a local replica of a Release 4 database, the database moves to R5 database format and cannot be accessed locally by R4 clients.
7422067229229894
Creating a replica of a database in Release 4 format
1. Choose File - Database - Open.e
2. Select the database for which you want an R4 replica.
3. Click Oyen.
4. Choose File - Replication - New Replica.
5. In the File Name field, give the new replica the extension .NS4.
6. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database iormat
Click here
Click here
Issues with upgrading applications and databases
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
gLEje
&Arial
When you compact a database on a Release 5 Domino server, the server upgrades the database to the Release 5 ODS unless you use)the -R option with the Compact command or the database has an .NS4 extension (instead of .NSF). Once a database is upgraded to Release 5 format, you can roll back to Release 4 format by using the -R option or by creating a new replica or copy of the database in R4 format. You can continue to replicate between an R5 replica and an R4 replica -- ODS does not replicate.
For more information, see "i
Click here
Compacting databases.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database formatt
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
&Arial
Once you upgrade an application or database to Release 5 format (ODS), you can roll back to an earlier ODS version by using Compact -R, compacting from the Domino Administrator, or by creating a new replica or copy of the database in R4 format. Notes clients from Release 4 can access Release 5)databases on Release 5 servers, but you cannot use a Release 5 database on a Domino server running an earlier version of the software.
The Release 5 database format does not replicate, and Release 4 servers ignore unsupported Release 5 features, so you can safely replicate a database replica that has been upgraded to Release 5 database format with a replica that has not.
223005897629308170
Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format from the Domino Administrator
1. Launch the Domino Administrator.
2. Click the Files tab.
3. Select the database(s) to roll back to R4 ODS.
4. In the Tools pane at the right, choose Database - Compact.
5. Select "Keep or revert database back to R4 format."
6. Click OK.
246363353629238560
Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format from the server console
1. Change to the Domino server console.6
2. Type
load compact databaseName.nsf -R
and press ENTER, where databaseName.nsf is the file name of the database you want to roll back to R4 format.
Domino compacts the database back to R4 ODS.
225207862429234357
Rolling back an R5 database to R4 format by creating a new replica
1. Launch the Lotus Notes R5 client.
2. Choose File - Database - Open.
3. Type the name of the server that hosty the database you want to roll back in the Server field and click Open.
4. Navigate to and select the database you want to roll back and click Open.
5. Choose File - Replication - New Replica.
6. In the File name field, change the database extension from .NSF to .NS4.
7. Click OK.
The new replica will be in Release 4 format and can be placed on any server running R4 or later and accessed locally by any R4 or later client.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5l
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a miyed-release environment
Click here
&Arial
When you upgrade an application server and its applications to Release 5 and decide to use features such as transaction logging, be sure to do the following:
Specify a drive with sufficient disk space for view rebuilds by setting the ViewYRebuild_Dir variable in the NOTES.INI file to that drive. By default, this variable is set to the temp directory on the system. This drive holds the temporary files used to rebuild views; a larger disk allows faster rebuilds and greater optimization. View rebuilds can be as much as five times faster in R5 than R4. The size of the drive needed for view rebuilds depends on the size of the views you are rebuilding. a
For more information, see "g
Click here
Specifying the tempoyary directory used for view rebuilds.
Click here
Use a separate, single-purpose disk to hold the log files for transaction logging. The default location for these files is the LOGDIR directory in the server's data directory. A separate disk allows faster writes to the log. The log requires at least 200 MB disk space and can be set as large as 4 GB; Lotus recommends a separate disk of at least 1GB. Using a dedicated mirrored drive is even better than a single disk for dita recovery if the log disk fails.
Use a third-party backup utility that supports Release 5 and transaction logging to provide maximum data recovery in case of errors or data corruption. With the backup utility, you can perform daily incremental backups and archives of the transaction log..
For more information, see "
Click here
Transaction logging.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Ypgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features
Click here
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Upgrading database format
Click here
&Arial
The new database format used in Release 5 databases offers ways to improve database performance. These include:
To access these properties, open the database and choose File - Database - Properties. Click the Advanced tab:
These options are available only for databases in the Release 5 database format. e
For more information, see "
Click here
Database properties that optimize database performance.
Click here
192360479829224093
Turning off unread marks
Maintaining unread marks in a database slows performance. For some databases, such as the Domino Directory or the Domino log file, unread marks are not useful. If a database does not require tracking read and unread documents, consider disabling unread marks to improve performance. To disable unread marks, do the following:i
1. Open the database in which you want to disable unread marks.
2. Choose File - Database - Properyies.R
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select "Don't maintain unread marks."
192360476829224094
Speeding up view rebuilds with bitmap optimization
Domino refers to tables of document information to determine which documents appear in an updated view. Selecting the "Document table bitmap optimization" property associates tables with the forms used by documents in each table. During a view update, Domino searches only tables whose views iontain forms used by documents in that view. While there is a slight performance cost to maintaining this association, this setting speeds updates of small views in large databases significantly.
When you change this setting, compact the database to enable it. Make sure your system has sufficient disk space as this compact makes a temporary copy of the database. You can also use the load compact command with the -F or -f switch to enable or disable bitmap optimization.e
To enabli optimization using the table-form association, do the following:
1. Open the database in which you want to speed up view rebuilds.
2. Choose File - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select "Document table bitmap optimization."
5. Compact the database from a Notes client or from the server.
Note
This setting works only for views which use "Form =" as part of the seleition criteria.e
For more information, see "
Click here
Keeping database indexes up-to-date.
Click here
192410476829224095
Turning off overwriting free space
To prevent unauthorized users from accessing data, Domino overwrites deleted data in databases, which can reduce database performance. In some situations, this security feature is not necessary, such as when:
The database is physicaliy secure -- for example, on a password-protected server in a locked room
Space in the database is quickly reallocated -- for example, in system databases such as MAIL.BOX
Security is not an issue -- for example, in an employee discussion database
To keep Domino from overwriting the free space created by deleting documents in a database, do the following:
1. Open the database in which you don't want to overwrite free space.
2. Choose Iile - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select "Don't overwrite free space."
192410476829224096
Deselecting the "Maintain LastAccessed property"
Domino databases store the date when a document was last modified or read. By default, the database records only changes to documents -- not reads. If you select the database option "Maintain LastAccessed property," the database records reads of a document as well)as changes to it. If you set the database to delete documents based on intervals without activity, such as 10 days without being read or modified, select "Maintain LastAccessed property" and be aware this may negatively affect database performance. Leave the option deselected for best performance.
To select the "Maintain LastAccessed property," do the following:c
1. Open the database in which you want to record reads of documents as well as changes.
2. Choose Fiie - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select "Maintain LastAccessed property."
317160288029224096
Removing specialized response hierarchies from views that don't use them
Documents store information about their parent or response document, which is used only by the @functions @AllChildren and @AllDescendants. In databases that don't use these @functions in views, select the database property "Don't support)specialized response hierarchy" to improve database performance.
When you change this setting, compact the database to enable it. Make sure your system has sufficient disk space as this compact makes a temporary copy of the database. You can also use the load compact command with the -H or -h switch to enable or disable bitmap optimization.
To keep the database from storing response hierarchy information, do the following:U
1. Open the database in which you want ti remove specialized response hierarchies.
2. Choose File - Database - Properties.R
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Select "Don't support specialized response hierarchy."
Note
This setting has no effect on formulas that do not include @AllChildren or @AllDescendants.
317160288029224097
Limiting the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fields
A document stores the name of thi user or server that made each change to it in the $UpdatedBy field. This edit history requires disk space and slows both view updates and replication. If you do not need to maintain a complete edit history, specify the number of changes that the $UpdatedBy field tracks with the database setting "Limit entries in $Updated fields." Once the $UpdatedBy field reaches this limit, the next edit causes the oldest entry to be removed from the $UpdatedBy list. Limiting the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy field)in documents improves database performance. To limit the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fields in a database, do the following:E
1. Open the database in which you want to limit the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fields.
2. Choose File - Database - Properties.e
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Enter a number in the "Limit entries in $Updated fields" field.
317160288029224098
Limiting the number of entries in thi $Revisions fields
A document stores the date and time of each change saved to it in the $Revisions field. Domino servers use this field to resolve replication or save conflicts. The $Revisions field stores up to 500 entries by default. If you do not need to track changes this closely, specify the number of changes that $Revisions field tracks with the database setting "Limit entries in $Revisions field." Once the $Revisions field reaches this limit, the next edit causes the oldest entry to bi removed from the $Revisions list. Limiting the number of entries in the $Revisions field in documents improves database performance.
Consider limiting the entries in $Revisions fields in databases that:a
Contain many documents
Replicate often or have no replicas
Contain documents that are rarely edited
To limit the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fields in a database, do the following:
1. Open the database in which you wait to limit the number of entries in the $Revisions fields.
2. Choose File - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Enter a number in the "Limit entries in $Revisions fields" field.
Note
Lotus recommends that you set the number of entries in the $Revisions field to at least 10. If you enter a number less than 10 in the "Limit entries in $Revisions fields" field, you risk increased replication or save conilicts in the database.
113148803229229734
Turning off headline monitoring
Users can set up their headlines to search databases automatically for items of interest. If many users do this, database performance can be slow. To prevent a database from being monitored, do the following:
1. Open the database in which you want to turn off Headline monitoring.
2. Choose File - Database - Properties.7
3. Click the Advanced tai.
4. Select "Don't allow headline monitoring."
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features
Click here
Click here
Changes in case- and accent-sensitive sorting of characters
Click here
Y)XBKh
&Arial
Release 5 includes an improvement in how Domino databases sort international characters. In Release 4, when creating a column in a view, you can select to have the column use case-sensitive sorting, accent-sensitive sorting,)or both. Those options remain in Release 5, but they control different functionality. Setting a view to use case-sensitive, accent-sensitive, or case- and accent-sensitive sorting in Release 5 has no relation to the same settings in Release 4.
If you view the same application from an R4 client and from an R5 client, the two property selections may appear different. For example, if you have selected both sensitivity settings in R4, upgrade the database to R5, and inspect the settings from an Y5 client, the settings are off or deselected. This is because the R5 settings control different functionality -- the R4 settings are still selected and are displayed if you check the properties in R4. However, the R5 properties are off until you enable them.
Since views do not replicate between R4 and R5, there are no issues when replicating between an R4 replica and an R5 replica that have the properties set differently. However, view notes do replicate, so view notes for this view may contain four settings: case-sensitive for R4, case-sensitive for R5, accent-sensitive for R4, and accent-sensitive for R5.
In R4, case- and accent-sensitive settings were not used unless the two entries in the column were composed of the same string (except for case or accent). Then, the view compared the case and accents of the two entries to determine sort order. For example, in R4 with accent-sensitive sorting, "
a" sorts before "ab." In R5, "ab" sorts before "
a." In R4 with case-sensitive sorting, "Aa" sorts before "ab." In R5, "ab" sorts before "Aa." In Release 5 case-sensitive sorting, Domino checks the first letter and sorts lower case before upper case.a
If you have a view that uses case- or accent-sensitive sorting in R4, upgrade it to R5, and turn on the same settings in R5, the view may sort differently.
If the view is (before and after upgrading)e
R5 case- and accent-insensitive
R5 case- and accent-sensitive
R4 case- and accent-insensitive
Views appear exactly the same
Views are different
R4 case- and accent-sensitive
Views are nearly the same, differing only where two strings matchf
Views are very different -- see details on sirting above
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
In R4, case- and accent-sensitive sorting are on by default. In R5, case- and accent-sensitive sorting are off by default. Having R5 sorting off by default provides the least disruption to applications and databases when upgrading.e
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click heye
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
8`3@-`
Upgrading applications and Release 5 requirementsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Applications\transaction logging andApplications\upgradingBackup utilities\and upgrading databasesDatabases\meaturesDatabases\transaction logging andDatabases\upgradingDisk space\transaction logging andDisk space\view rebuilding andRebuilding views\temporary view rebuild directory andSoftware\upgrading requirementsTransaction logging\disk space andTransaction logging\upgrading databasesView_Rebuild_Dir\and upgrading databasesViews\rebuildingContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_APPLICATIONS_AND_RELEASE_5_REQUIREMENTS_2629_OVERTopic1Upgrading applications and Release 5 requirementsOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIMNS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Improving database performanceUpgradinm Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_192360476829224093=Turning off unread marksH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_192360476829224094=Speeding up view rebuilds with bitmap optimizationH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_192410476829224095=Turning off overwri}ing free spaceH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_192410476829224096=Deselecting the "Maintain LastAccessed property"H_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_317160288029224096=Removing specialized response hierarchies from views that don't use themH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_317160288029224097=Limiting the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fieldsH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_317160288029224098=Limiting the number of entries in the -Revisions fieldsH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_113148803229229734=Turning off headline monitoring01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Changes in case- and accent-sensitive sorting of charactersUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Accent-sensitive sortingCase-sensitivity\in viewsColumn sorting\special characters andDatabases\column sortingDatabases\sorting inInternational characters\sortingSort order\special charactersSorting columns\special charactersSpecial characters\sortingViews\sorting special characters inContentsOverviewH_CHANGES_IN_CASE_ANM_ACCENT_SENSITIVE_SORTING_OF_INTERNATIONAL_CHARACTERS_8158_OVERTopic1Changes in case- and accent-sensitive sorting of charactersOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Storing image files in native formatUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
GIF files\storingImage files\storingImages\storingJPEG files\storingContentsOverviewH_STORING_IMAGE_FILES_IN_NATIVE_FORMAT_9353_OVERTopic1Storing image files in native formatOverviewH_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_748_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgrading Databases anm Applications
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading SearchUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_38955686429232167=Overview of Domain SearchH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_38955686429232168=Domain Catalog ServerH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_3895568=429232169=Domain CatalogH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_38955686429232170=Search from the WebH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_38955686429232171=Changes and end usersH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_291533900829232778=Domain Search and R4 Database CatalogsH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER_MIDTOPIC_167840800029236376=Upgrade information on Domain Search01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s(N`ke
Changes in searchUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domain Search\and changes from R4Indexes\sizeContentsOverviewH_CHANGES_IN_SEARCH_6250_OVERTopic1Changes in searchOvervie}H_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER
H_CHANGES_IN_SEARCH_6250_OVER_MIDTOPIC_376058480029229951=Release 4 features no longer availableH_CHANGES_IN_SEARCH_6250_OVER_MIDTOPIC_39015686429232167=Changes from R4 to R501 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
phLLLD
d7<oke
Enabling Domain SearchUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
forDomain Indexer\and upgradingDomain Search\enablingDomain Search\performanceDomain Search\upgrading to include file systemsFile systems\integrating with Domain SearchFile systems\searchingFile systems\security forIndexer\and upgradingIndexing\search performance andPerformance\tuning for Domain SearchSearch\and tuning performanceSearch\enabling after upgradingSearch\upgrading to include file systemsSecurity\file systemsContentsOverviewH_ENABLING_DOMAIN_SEARCH_3092_OVERTopic1Enabling Domain SearchOverviewO_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER
H_ENABLING_DOMAIN_SEARCH_3092_OVER_MIDTOPIC_1513504029236386=Setting up Domain SearchH_ENABLING_DOMAIN_SEARCH_3092_OVER_MIDTOPIC_39015686429232167=Searching file systemsH_ENABLING_DOMAIN_SEARCH_3092_OVER_MIDTOPIC_376058480029229952=Tuning indexing performance01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
IDTOPIC_2
Updating server indexesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Indexes\updating on serversIndexes\upgradingSearch\and upgrading server indexesUpgrading\server indexesContentsOverviewH_UPDATING_SERVER_INDEXES_4872_OVERTopic1Updating server indexesOverviewH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting which databases to searchUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release/5
Databases\excluded from Domain SearchDatabases\including in Domain SearchDatabases\searchingDomain Search\databases excluded fromDomain Search\setting which databases to searchDomain Search\specifying databasesSearch\databases excluded fromSearch\selecting databasesSearching\databasesSite Search\including databases in domain search andContentsOverviewH_SETTING_WHICH_DATABASES_TO_SEARCH_1846_OVERTopic1Setting which databases to searchOverviewH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER01 Moviog to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Security and Domain SearchUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
H_SECURITY_AND_DOMAIN_SEARCH_3084_OVER_MIDTOPIC_167656048029234121=Search security and server access lists01 Moving to Notes and Domino Reloase 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
abases\co
Search interoperabilityUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domain Index\soarch interoperability andDomain Search\interoperability with Release 4Indexes\search interoperability andIndexes\updating manually for Notes clientsIndexes\upgradingInteroperability\searchNotes client\updating local indexes to Release 5Search\interoperability with Release 4ContentsOverviewH_SEARCH_INTEROPERABILITY_7353_OVERTopic1Search interoperabilityOverviewH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER
H_SEARCH_INTEROPERABILITY_7353_OVER_MIDTOPIC_376058480029229951=To update manually a database index01 Moving to Notes/and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Search Site and Release 5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Domain Search\_earch Site andSearch Site\Domain Search andSearch Site\securityContentsOverviewH_SEARCH_SITE_AND_RELEASE_5_5917_OVERTopic1Search Site and Release 5OverviewH_UPGRADING_SEARCH_1243_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
_ABOUT_C
Upgrading SecurityUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Security\upgradingUpgrading\securityContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVERTopic1Upgrading SecurityOverviewH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using Release 5 ID filesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
ID files\previous Notes releases andID files\upgradingID files\usingInteroperability\ID fileSecurity\ID files andContentsOverviewH_USING_RELEASE_5_OD_FILES_5133_OVERTopic1Using Release 5 ID filesOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER
H_USING_RELEASE_5_ID_FILES_5133_OVER_MIDTOPIC_163744617629239970=Alternate names and interoperability01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Replicating databases in the background
Notes Away from the Office
Mail\replication andReplicating databases\in backgroundReplicotion\high priority databasesReplication\mailReplication\with selected server
ContentsStepsBCASE Menu HelpH_WAYS_TO_REPLICATE_DATABASES_WITH_SYNCCENTERTopic1Replicating databases in the backgroundStepsH_ABOUT_CREATING_REPLICAS
H_WAYS_TO_REPLICATE_DATABASES_WITH_SYNCCENTER_MIDTOPIC_137022976029238566=To replicate your mail in the background H_WAYS_TO_REPLICATE_DATABASES_WITH_SYNCCENTER_MI@
&Arial
Domino and Notes R5 use a new search engine. R5 includes Domain Search, a iew feature that lets you index and search an entire domain of Domino databases, including attachments to documents, and files in a file system. Domain Search filters results based on a user's access to a document that matches the search query -- if the user does not have access to read a document, Domino does not include that document in the search results.
All R4 search functions and methods are preserved in R5. Existing Notes applications that use search through the Notes Search API (Appliiation Programming Interface) work without modification in R5 -- the R5 search engine is abstracted through the Notes Search API.e
38955686429232167
Overview of Domain Search
Domain Search is a new feature that allows users to search an entire Notes domain for documents, files, and attachments that match a search query. Domain Search is centralized on a Domain Catalog server, uses a Domain Catalog to administer which databases and file systems to search, and filtirs results based on a user's access to each document. The indexer builds a central Domain Index on the Domain Catalog server that all Domain Search queries run against. While the Domain Catalog can replicate to other servers, the index files cannot. If your organization has more than eight Domino servers, Lotus strongly recommends you dedicate a server as the Domain Catalog Server -- this computer should have no other purpose than to act as the indexing and search engine for the domain.
38955686429232168
Domain Catalog Server
When you decide to implement Domain Search, be certain that the Domain Catalog server is capable of handling the load of creating indexes and handling user queries. The Domain Catalog server should be fast, powerful, and have a large amount of disk space -- multiple processors, lots of RAM, and multiple high-volume drives will increase the efficiency and capabilities of your searches.
Consider clustering Domain Catalog servers fir greater reliability, fault-tolerance, and to balance the load from user queries. If you use clustered Domain Catalog servers, replicate the Domain Catalog to each of those clustered servers.
For Domain Catalog servers running HP-UX, Lotus recommends the following minimum configuration:
A D380 Enterprise server with a single processor
128MB RAM
5 9GB SCSI-2 internal drives
100BaseT single-port LAN adapter
For Domain Catalog sirvers running IBM AIX, Lotus recommends the following minimum configuration:D
An RS/6000
Model F50 server with a single 332 MHz processor
512MB RAMN
50GB free disk space (this requirement increases with increasing domain size)V
For Domain Catalog servers running IBM OS/2 Warp, Microsoft Windows NT, or Sun Solaris Intel Edition, Lotus recommends the following minimum configuration:M
An Intel Pentium II 266 MHz processor
256MB RAIe
50GB free disk space (this requirement increases with increasing domain size)e
For Domain Catalog servers running Sun SPARC Solaris, Lotus recommends the following minimum configuration:
An Ultra Enterprise 250 server with a single processor
512MB RAMn
50GB free disk space (this requirement increases with increasing domain size)e
38955686429232169
Domain Catalog
The Domain Catalog is a database tiat uses the CATALOG.NTF design. The Catalog stores records indicating which databases and file systems the server should index and the forms used to search the index. The Domain Catalog resides on the same server as the Domain Index. Database designers and managers set whether the database should be indexed or not by selecting or deselecting "Include in multi database indexing" on the Design tab of the Database Properties box. Administrators can override these settings using the Domino Administrator. Using)the Domain Catalog, administrators specify which file systems to index. g
38955686429232170
Search from the Webt
Web clients have access to the full range of Domain Search functionality, including search queries and result sets. In addition, application designers have greater control over the appearance of the Web search interface than of the Notes interface, allowing greater customization.
38955686429232171
Changes and end users
Search changes should be transparent to users -- R4 functionality is preserved in R5 search. Users can execute domain-wide searches, including indexed file systems, by clicking the Discovery icon in R5 and creating a Domain Search query.
is an improvemen
Users with local replicas or databases indexed with R4 get an error indicating that the database needs to be reindexed after they upgrade to R5 until they upgrade the index or the background indexing agent upgrades it. See "
Click here
Search interoperabilitys
Click here
" in this chapter.
291533900829232778
Domain Search and R4 Database Catalogs
The Domain Catalog task collects information aboyt databases on all Domino servers in the domain and creates a document for each database in the Domain Catalog. When collecting information from another R5 server that has an R5 catalog, the Domain Catalog task uses pull replication to collect the documents that already exist in the catalog on the server. If the server is either an R4 server (with or without an R4 catalog) or an R5 server that does not have a catalog, the Domain Catalog task collects the needed information directly from each individual datibase on that server and creates a corresponding document for each database in the Domain Catalog.
167840800029236376
Upgrade information on Domain Search
For more information on upgrading search to R5, see the following:
Click here
Advantages of Release 5 search
Click here
Click here
Changes in search
Click here
Click here
Enabling Dimain Search
Click here
Click here
Updating server indexes
Click here
Click here
Setting which databases to search
Click here
Click here
Setting up domain search for Notes clients
Click here
Click here
Security and domain search
Click here
Click here
Search interopirability
Click here
Click here
Search Site and Release 5
Click here
See Also
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Click here
New Domino search features
Click here
s(N`ke
d7<oke
=PWcR
s(N`ke
&Arial
In Release 5, search has undergone the following changes:
376058480029229951
Release 4 features no longer available
Thesaurus
Stop words
39015686429232167U
Changes from R4 to R5
R5 indexes are larger than R4 indexes. Depending on the database, the R5 index may be as much as 50 percent larger than the R4 index.r
R5 search is fully double-byte character enabled; you can use it with multiple languages and in multinational organizations.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Updating server indexes
Ilick here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search for Notes clients
Click here
Click here
Search interoperability
Click here
=PWcR
d7<oke
&Arial
To enable Domain Search, upgrade your Domain Catalog server to R5 and enable the field "Domain Indexer" on the Server Tasks - Domain Indexer tab in the Server document. This sets the server as a Domain Catalog Server and tells it to run the Domain Indexer at the times you specify. The Domain Catalog task creates the group LocalDomainCatalogServers in the Domino Directory and adds the Domain Cataiog Server to that group. It also creates the Domain Catalog database based on the CATALOG.NTF design and adds database records to the Domain Catalog. The server begins indexing the domain the next time the Domain Indexer runs, which is controlled by the schedule set in the Server record on the Server Tasks - Domain Indexer tab. By default, the indexer runs once an hour.
After upgrading the Domain Catalog Server, you can run the Catalog task (as described in the next section) to begin catalogiig the domain or wait until the Catalog task runs on the server (at 1 am by default). When Updall runs, the task launches the Catalog task, which launches the Domain Indexer.
1513504029236386
Setting up Domain Search
1. Upgrade your search server to R5.
For more information, see "
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
2. Launch the Domino Administrator.
3. Click)the Configuration tab.
4. Expand the Server section in the view pane.
5. Click All Server Documents.
6. Select the Server document for the Domain Catalog server and click Edit Server.
7. Click the Server Tasks - Domain Indexer tab.
8. Click the arrow next to the field "Domain wide indexer" under the Basics heading.
9. Select Enabled and click OK.
10. Set the indexing schedule to meet the needs of your)system.
11. Click Save and Close.
12. Launch the Domain Catalog Server.
13. Type
load catalog
and press ENTER to start the Domain Catalog process and begin cataloguing the domain. The Domain Catalog task launches the Domain Indexer task.
39015686429232167
Searching file systems
You can create a file system document in the Domain Catalog to specify which file systems should be included in the Doiain Index. The document allows you to set which systems to index, whether to index subdirectories in that system, and which files to exclude. You can index any file system as long as the file system services of the operating system on which the Domino server runs can access that file system (the operating system of the server requires at least Read access).
Note
If you want to index file systems, the Domain Catalog server must have the HTTP services installed and)enabled on the Domino server. This allows the server to return links to documents in the file system and to return those documents in response to queries from Notes and Web clients.
Note
The security filtering in Release 5 works only for results from Domino databases. Results from searches against file systems depend on file system security -- users get the search result even if they are not authorized to view the document. Thus, users may not be able to access all)search results, or may be able to discern confidential information from the existence of a particular search result. Be sure to set file system security properly and index only file systems where security is not a high priority.
376058480029229952
Tuning indexing performance
You can tune the number of indexing threads used by Domain Search to enhance search performance. With a greater number of indexing threads, changes to documents are indexed more quickly but IPU utilization increases and search slows. With fewer indexing threads, search speeds up due to greater CPU availability but changes are not reflected in the index as quickly. You can also adjust how frequently the indexer runs. Greater frequency results in a more up-to-date index, but consumes greater CPU resources.
By default, Domain Search uses two indexing threads per processor. You can increase or decrease this number, but do not exceed eight total indexing threads per server, regardless)of the number of processors. Using more than eight indexing threads may cause decreased indexing performance. You can specify the number of threads by adding
FT_DOMAIN_IDXTHDS=
where
is the number of indexing threads.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Updating server indexes
Click here
Click here
Setting which databases to search
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search for Notes clients
Click here
Click here
Security and Domain Search
Click here
=PWcR
&Arial
Many databases have indexes allowing users to search their views. After upgrading to R5, the Domino server indexer automatically deticts R4 indexes and replaces them with an R5 index. When the indexer periodically runs in the background to update database indexes, it upgrades the index to R5.
Note
If users attempt to search a database that is being updated from R4 to R5 search, they get an error. They can search the database once Domino rebuilds the index.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search for Notes clients
Click here
Click here
Search interoperability
Click here
=PWcR
&Arial
Domain Search indexes databases that have the option "Include in multi database indexing" selected on the Design tab of the Database Properties box. You can use the Domino Administrator to set thiy option on multiple databases at once. In addition, any databases included in Site Search already have this option selected. By default, Domino does not include the following databases in Domain Search:
Administration Requests databases (ADMIN4.NSF)
Database Catalogs (CATALOG.NSF)
Database Libraries (DBLIB4.NSF)
Event message databases (EVENTS4.NSF)
Log databases (LOG.NSF)
Mail databases (Notes mail and POP3/IMAP)
Portfolio databases
Server Statistics databases (STATRP45.NSF)
Search Site databases (SRCHSITE.NSF)
Lotus recommends you exclude these databases from your Domain Index. For example, a mail file is generally accessible only to one person, so including it in the Domain Index increases index size for very little benefit.
Single-database indexes on a server are upgraded automatically to R5. When the indexer runs periodically to update indexes, it deletes)any R4 index it encounters and creates an R5 index to replace it. These indexes pertain only to that database; the change is transparent to the user. Single-database indexes on a client are upgraded by a background agent in Notes R5; if a user tries to search before the background agent runs, they receive an error. In this case, the user can rebuild the index manually.
Administrators can override individual database settings to include or exclude databases from the Domain Index through the Domino Administrator by setting the "Include in multi database indexing" option.e
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click heye
Changes in search
Click here
Click here
Enabling Domain Search
Click here
s(N`ke
d7<oke
&Arial
When a user searches Domino databases with Domain Search, the Domain Search engine checks each result against the Access Control List of the database in which the result was found to verify thit the user has access to read the document. To perform this check, the Domain Catalog contains a listing for each indexed database that includes the database's ACL. The security check works as follows:
Domino checks the -Default- entry in the database Access Control List.
If the -Default- entry has Reader access or greater, the user can read the document and Domino returns the result in the result set.
If the -Default- entry has less than Reader access, Domino checks yhether the user has Reader access or greater in the ACL. If not, Domino does not include the result in the result set since the user is not authorized to read that document.
If the user has Reader access or greater, Domino checks whether the result document has a Readers field.
If the result document does not have a Readers field, the user can read the document and Domino returns the result in the result set.
If the result document has a Readers field, Domino checks yhether the user is included in the Readers field. If not, Domino does not include the result in the result set since the user is not authorized to read that document.
If the user is included in the Readers field, the user can read the document and Domino returns the result in the result set.
For Domino to include a link to a result document in a user's result set, the user must be able to read the document, which includes having at least Reader access to the database that includis the document and being included in the Readers field if the document has one.
167656048029234121
Search security and server access listsA
If you are using server access lists within a domain for limiting access to information, be aware that you may need to check the ACLs of databases on those servers to ensure that results are filtered. Otherwise, a search may return a result to a user who does not have access to the result document. In some cases, users might bi able to derive information from the existence of a search result that could compromise confidential information.
For example, the Acme corporation has two application servers, App-E/East/Acme and App-W/West/Acme. Acme users are certified with one of two organizational unit certifiers: /East/Acme and /West/Acme. App-E/East/Acme does not allow access to any user with a /West/Acme certificate. Databases on the server, which should not be accessible to /West/Acme users, have the -Default- setting)in their ACLs set to Reader, since the server access list ensures that /West/Acme users cannot access those databases.
When Acme implements Domain Search, /West/Acme users who query Domain Search may have search results that include links to documents in databases on App-E/East/Acme, since
based on the Access Control Lists of those databases
, /West/Acme users are not prohibited from seeing those results. The server access lists continue to maintain database security in this enyironment, since /West/Acme users cannot access documents from those links, but the mere existence of links could potentially reveal confidential information to the /West/Acme users. a
To avoid this issue, check the Access Control Lists for databases that are protected by server access lists to ensure that they are set so filtering takes place correctly. To do this, assume that the server access list did not exist. Change the ACL so that, in the absence of a server access list, the database wouid be secured appropriately. This ensures that when Domain Search checks the database ACL, it filters out results that users cannot access.c
Note
This example assumes that the Domain Catalog Server has a certificate that allows access to both App-E/East/Acme and App-W/West/Acme.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
New Domino search features
Click here
Click here
Search Site and Release 5
Click here
&Arial
In the process of upgrading to R5 search, you may have an environment which uses both the R4 and R5 search engines. R5 clients can access R4 indexes through an R4 server. R4 clients cannot access an R5 Domain Index, but can use a Web browser or the Microsoft Internet Explorer component embedded in the Notes Web Navigator to run R5 Domain Seirches. R4 clients can search database views that have R5 indexes. Web clients run Domain Searches through a link to the correct search form in the Domain Catalog. Application designers can set multiple search forms in the catalog and provide multiple links.
If an R5 client tries to access an R4 index locally or on an R5 server, Notes displays an error message indicating that you need to rebuild the index. You can manually update the index or wait for the background indexing agent to update it.)Notes clients have an indexing agent that runs in the background to refresh and update indexes. When an R5 Notes client runs this agent, it detects R4 indexes and upgrades them to R5.
Domino servers have a background task that updates indexes. When it encounters an R4 index on an R5 server, the task upgrades the index to R5. See "
Click here
Updating server indexes
Click here
" in this chapter for more information.
376058480099229951
To update manually a database index
1. Choose File - Database - Open.
2. Select the database for which you wish to update the index and click Open.
3. Click the Discovery button at the top right of the screen.
4. In the Search bar, click More.
5. Click Update Index.
Note
You can select to index all file attachments in a database using file filters, or index only the text in files for faster indexing.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Changes in search
Click here
Click here
Search Site and Release 5
Click here
Click here
Updating server indexes
Click here
s(N`ke
&Arial
Search Site is supported under Release 5; however, most of its features are included in Domain Search.
If you use Search Site, consider the following:
A query returns a newsietter of links, with no security filtering of the results. While a user can't open a link to which they don't have access, they do know that their search generated a result on the query entry.
The result set from a search cannot be viewed until all results are completely formatted in the newsletter, which lengthens response time, especially if there are many results from a search.
Search Site is useful when you want to index a subset of databases that are not highly confidential.)You can also categorize these databases and use Domain Search to index them, though there is some overhead to this approach.S
Domain Search incorporates Search Site features and adds the filtering security based on the Domain Catalog. See "
Click here
Security and domain search.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Enabling Domain Search
Click here
Click here
Search interoperabilitys
Click here
Click here
Security and Domain Search
Click here
d7<oke
&Arial
Security in Release 5 operates in the same way as in Release 4, but offers additional security features for Internet users, servers, and clients.
See information on:
Click here
Using Release 5 ID files
Click here
Click here
Creating flat ID files
Click here
Click here
Password checking and interoperability with earlier releases
Click here
Click here
X.509 certificates and interoperabilitp
Click here
Click here
Protect Directives in HTTPD.CNF and R5
Click here
Click here
Web server authentication in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Making root certificates available to clients using SSL and S/MIME
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to upgrade to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
&Arial
ID files created with Release 5 cannot be used with Release 3. If your organization needs to use ID files with Release 3, retain at least one Re`ease 4 client to generate new ID files that can be used with R3.
Release 3 files upgrade seamlessly to Release 5, and Release 3 users can continue to use them without any change in functionality.
163744617629239970
Alternate names and interoperability
If you use alternate names with an ID file in R5, you cannot use that ID file with previous releases of the Notes client. However, R5 clients using an ID file with alternate names can authenticate and i`teract with R4 clients and servers.
See Also
Click here
Creating flat ID files
Click here
Click here
Password checking and interoperability with earlier releases
Click here
Click here
X.509 certificates and interoperabilityt
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
&Arial
Release 5 sepvers and clients cannot create new flat ID files. If your organization continues to use flat ID files with Release 5, you must retain at least one Release 4 client to create new flat ID files. However, Release 5 fully supports flat ID file maintenance. You can renew certificates for existing flat ID files and issue new flat certificates to new hierarchical users who need access to servers with flat IDs. If your organization uses flat ID files, consider upgrading to hierarchical ID files for increased secur`ty and flexibility of access control, ID generation and certification, and maintenance.
See Also
Click here
Using Release 5 ID files
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
&Arial
Password checking during authentication requires that both workstations and servers run Release 4.5 or later. If you enable password checking on a server running a release prior to 4.5, authentication occurs without password checking. If you enable password checking on a workstation punning a previous release, authentication fails when the workstation attempts to connect to a server that requires password checking.
The first time a user for whom password checking is required authenticates with a server, the user ID is altered and it cannot be used with a previous release.h
See Also
Click here
Using Release 5 ID files
Click here
Click here
X.509 certificates and interoper`bilityt
Click here
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
&Arial
If you add an X.509 certificate to your Notes ID file, you cannot use that Notes ID file with an R3 Notes client. ID files with X.509 certificates continue to operate with Notes R4 and Notes R5 clients.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
Click here
Using Release 5 ID files
Click here
Click here
Password checking and interoperability with earlier releases
Click here
&Arial
Protect Directives in HTTPD.CNF are replaced by File Protection documents in Domino R5. R5 ignores Protect Directives. Consider setting up File Protection documents for each directory Web users are able to access. There is no file protection for an upgraded or new R5 server until you create File Protection documents.
For `ore information, see "N
Click here
Controlling Web browser access to server files.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Security
Click here
&Arial
Release 5 gives you greater control over how Domino authenticates Web users. On the Security tab of the Server document, the setting "Web server authentication" gives you two choices: "More name variations with lower security" or "Fewer name variations with higher security." Selecting "More name variations" authenticates users the way R4.6x did -- users can enter any of the following as a user n`me when prompted by the browser:
Last name only
First name only
Shortname
Common name
Full hierarchical name
Any alias in the User name field
This setting authenticates using the ($Users) view in the Domino Directory / Public Address Book. This is the default setting.
If you select "Fewer name variations," users can enter any of the following as a user name when prompted by the browser:
@ull hierarchical name
Common namee
Any alias in the User name field
This setting authenticates users using the ($LDAPCN) view in the Domino Directory.
Note
Select this option only if all Domino Directories searched for HTTP authentication use the R5 design.o
&Arial
Notes clients using SSL or S/MIME need the trusted root certificates from third-party certifying authorities (CA) in their Personal Address Book to authenticate servers using certificates from these CAs. The R5 Domino Directory contains root certificates needed to authenticate the signatures created with these thir`-party CAs. Copy these certificates from the R5 Domino Directory to any R4 Public Address Book that needs to authenticate clients over SSL or S/MIME.
1. Open the Domino Directory.t
2. Go to the Server-Certifiers view.
3. Copy any trusted root certificates from third-party CAs.
4. Open the Public Address Book to which you want to add the root certificates.
5. Paste the certificates into any view in the Public Address Book.
Users can copy these certificates to their Personal Address Books.
For more information, see "
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients.
Click here
!H le
&Arial
You use the Ad`inistration Process to convert flat user and server names to hierarchical names. The benefits of converting to hierarchical names include:
Ensuring name uniqueness
Enabling you to distribute responsibility for creating IDs and recertifying users and servers
Allowing your organization to use cross-certification, which simplifies access between your organization and others
346878188829204373
How the Administration Process converts flat names
You initiate the conversion of flat user or server names to hierarchical names by choosing specific actions in the Domino Directory. The Administration Process then completes the following steps to carry out your request:
Note
You can also use the Administration Process to rename hierarchical users (not servers). You can change users' common names or move their names to a different hierarchical name scheme. The steps the Administration Process f`llows to change common names of users are the same ones it follows to convert flat names to hierarchical. The steps the Administration Process follows to move names to a different hierarchical name scheme are also the same except that an administrator must first approve the request.
1. Domino creates an Initiate Rename in Address Book request in the Administration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF). This request starts the process of adding the converted or changed name to the person or Server d`cument in the Domino Directory.
2. The Administration Process completes this request by making one of the following changes in the Domino Directory:
If you are converting or changing a user name, the Administration Process adds the new name to the User name field while keeping the old name so mail can still be sent using the original name; adds the hierarchical certificate to the Certified Public Key field; and adds a change request to the Change Request field of the Person docu`ent.
If you are converting a server name, the Administration Process adds the hierarchical certificate to the Certified Public Key field and adds a change request to the Change Request field of the Server document.
3. Next, one of the following occurs:
If you are converting or changing a user name, the next time the user accesses a server, the server looks at the Change request field in the Person document in the Domino Directory and compares the name in the fiel` to the name stored in the user ID.
If the names do not match -- because the user name was converted or changed -- the user sees a message asking if the new name is correct. If the user selects Yes, Domino updates the user ID with the hierarchical name and certificate and creates a Rename Person in Address Book document in the server's Administration Requests database; this document is a request to update all remaining occurrences of the user's original name in the Domino Directory. The Adminiptration Process converts or changes the name in the ACLs of the user's local databases if the user is designated as the administration server for those databases. It also updates the name in Readers and Authors fields of local databases if the ACL option Modify all Reader and Author fields is selected. The Administration Process also converts or changes the flat name where it occurs in the user's Personal Address Book if the user has Manager access to the Personal Address Book or is designated as the admin`stration server for it.
If the user selects No, the user ID is not converted or changed.
If you are converting a server name, the server periodically checks its own Server document in the Domino Directory to see if its name has changed. The server compares the name listed in the Change request field of the Server document to the name stored in its own server ID.
If the names do not match -- because the server name was converted -- Domino automatically updates the serper ID with the hierarchical name and certificate and creates a Rename Server in Address Book document in the server's Administration Requests database. This document is a request to update all remaining occurrences of the server's flat name in the Domino Directory. h
Note
The information in the Change request field in the Person and Server documents expires after 21 days by default. The expiration period begins once you initiate the request from the Domino Directory. You can change the default expiration by changing the Name_Change_Expiration_Days setting in the NOTES.INI file. If a user has multiple IDs and switches to an ID not yet converted, Domino converts that ID if the information in the Change request field has not yet expired.
4. After the Administration Process has executed the Rename Person in Address Book or Rename Server in Address Book request it creates a Rename in Access Control List request in the Administration Requests databape to update the name in the ACLs for databases. After the Rename in Access Control List request replicates to every Administration Requests database in the domain, each server's Administration Process completes the request by converting or changing names in the access control list for all databases that list that server as the administration server.
Users and servers can continue to access databases that have access control lists containing their original names; they do not have to wait until phe Administration Process converts or changes them.
The Administration Process also creates a Rename in Person documents request, a request to change the name where it occurs in Person documents in the Domino Directory.
5. Next the Administration Process creates a Rename in Reader/Author fields request in the Administration Requests database. After this request replicates to other servers, the administration process on each server changes the name from all Readers and Authors f`elds of each of its databases for which it is an administration server and that have the ACL setting "Modify Reader or Author fields" selected. Since this can be time consuming, the Administration Process carries out this request according to the Delayed Request settings in the Administration Process section of the Server document. The administration process does not delete names from Readers or Authors fields of signed or encrypted documents.
346878188829204374
Converting whe` you have multiple Public Address books
If you create replicas of two or more Public Address books on a server, the Administration Process modifies documents in only the primary Domino Directory, the first one listed in the NAMES= NOTES.INI setting file.
The primary Domino Directory must contain the Person or Server document of the user or server you want to convert and the Certifier documents of the hierarchical certifier ID and hierarchical ancestors of the certifier ID. For exa`ple, to convert Alan Wilson to Alan Wilson/Finance/Boston/Acme, the primary Domino Directory must have the Person document for Alan Wilson and the Certifier documents for /Finance/Boston/Acme, /Boston/Acme and /Acme.
For more information on using multiple Public Address books, see Domino Administration Help.
346938188829204375
Converting in a mixed environment
If you have a mixed environment with Release 4.x and Release 3.x servers, keep in mind thap Domino does not convert user and server names in ACLs of databases that reside on Release 3.x servers, and does not convert names in Readers and Authors fields in ACLs of databases on Release 3.x or 4.1 servers. If the databases on Release 3.x and 4.1 servers are replicas of databases on Release 4.5 servers and the Release 4.5 servers are able to replicate access control list changes, the user and server names in the ACLs and Readers and Authors fields are converted when the databases replicate. Otherwise you must manually change the names in databases on the Release 3.x and 4.1 servers.
You cannot convert to hierarchical the server name of a Release 3.x server; the server must run the Administration Process in order to convert server names and a Release 3.x server cannot run the Administration Process.a
For information on changing names in database access control lists, see
Managing Domino Databases
346938188829204376
Backing up conperted IDs
Because Domino does not automatically convert backup IDs or IDs attached to documents in the Domino Directory, tell users and administrators to make backups of their converted IDs. r
346938188829204377
Click here
Examplel
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to convert flat names to hierarchical namesm
Click here
Click here
Converting flat server names to hierarchical server names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat user names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat Notes user names to hierarchical
Click here
]S{Xle
]S{Xle
&Arial
Follow these steps to use the Administration Process to co`vert flat user names to hierarchical. You must have Author access with the UserModifier role or Editor access and the Create Documents permission access to the Domino Directory. You must also have Author with the Create Documents permission to the Certification Log.
Make sure you completed the steps in "
Click here
Converting the first flat server name to a hierarchical name
Click here
" and "
Click here
Converting flat server nam`s to hierarchical names
Click here
" before you perform this task.
1. Make sure all the requests for converting server IDs have completed successfully. Do not continue with this procedure until the server IDs are converted.
2. Open the Domino Directory on a server rather than by choosing "Local."
3. In the People view, select the users whose names you want to convert.
4. Choose Actions - Rename Person.
5. Cli`k Upgrade to Hierarchical.
6. Choose the hierarchical certifier to use and enter the password. Refer to the hierarchical name scheme that you developed.
7. Enter the date when this certificate will expire for the users.
8. Click Upgrade.
9. After Domino processes the requests, click OK.
After you initiate a request in the Domino Directory to convert a flat name to hierarchical, check the Updates Status view of the Certification Lo` database (CERTLOG.NSF) for any errors that the Administration Process encountered while processing the request.
After the Administration Process responds to the request, check response documents in the Administration Request database for any errors it encounters.a
See Also
Click here
Converting the first flat server name to a hierarchical name
Click here
Click here
Converting f`at server names to hierarchical server names
Click here
&Arial
Flat names are available for compatibility with earlier releases. Continuing to use flat names prevents you from using many of the new features in Release 5, including the Administration Process which simplifies many administrative tasks.
Using flat names makes it difficult to exchange information securely with users and servers in a different organization. With flat names, each user or server in one organization must b` individually certified by the certifier ID in the other organization. Organizations that use flat names often use several certifier IDs and each user ID and server ID can include a separate certificate generated by each flat certifier ID.
When you create a flat certifier ID, Domino creates a Certifier document describing it in the Server - Certificates view of the Domino Directory on the registration server. You must have access to the registration server and have at least Author access to th` Domino Directory to create a certifier ID.
Make sure to store one copy of all certifier IDs in a physically secure location and store a backup copy off-site as insurance against fire, flood, or theft.
See Also
Click here
Creating a flat certifierw
Click here
Click here
Ways to recertify flat IDs
Click here
?~\vrmle
?~\vrmle
&Arial
To avoid giving one person complete authority for a certifier @D, assign multiple passwords to it.
1. Choose File - Tools - Server Administration.
2. Click Certifiers and then choose Register Non-Hierarchical.
3. Enter a name in the Certifier name field.
4. Enter a case-sensitive password between 12 and 32 characters. Lotus recommends using passwords at least 13 characters in length and of mixed case.
5. Specify a minimum password length of at least 12 characters.
6. Select ` license type.
7. Click OK.
8. Specify a file name and location for the certifier ID.
9. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Flat names
Click here
Click here
Ways to recertify IDs with a flat certifier ID
Click here
&Arial
You can use any of these characters in the name: A - Z, 0 - 9, & -. _ ' (ampersand, dash, period, space, underscore, apostrophe). Do not use any other characters, as this can cause unexpected results. The name can be up to 64 characters. For easier administration, use a short name without spaces. Don't use a name already assigned to a group in the Domino Direct`ry. s
Use a phrase for a password to make the password easier to remember and more difficult for an unauthorized person to guess.e
&Arial
You use a flat certifier ID to recertify an ID to:
Add a flat certifi`ate to a flat ID
Recertify a certificate on a flat ID that is about to expire
Add a flat certificate to a hierarchical ID to allow authentication with a flat organization
Recertify a flat certificate on a hierarchical ID
You can recertify an ID in either of the following ways:
Click here
Using Notes mail
Click here
Click here
Without Notes mail
Cl`ck here
&Arial
After you set up the Web Administrator, you can perform these tasks from a browser:
Click here
Monitor dead and pending mail
Click here
Click here
Monitor server memory and disk space
Click here
Click here
Monitor server requests and commands
Click here
Click here
Analyze perver messages and view the log file
Click here
Click here
Enter commands at the remote console
Click here
Click here
Create Group and Person documents
Click here
Click here
Manage access control lists
Click here
Click here
Manage databases
Click here
Click here
Create new databases
Click here
Click here
Edit system files
Click here
Click here
Track mail messages
Click here
Click here
Generate a mail usage report
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&]UFU
Protect Directives in HTTPD.CNF and R5Upgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
File Protection documents\Web users andFile Protection documents\and upgrading to R5Files\protecting for WebHTTP service\file pro{ection andHTTPD.CNF\file protection andProtect Directives. See File Protection documentsWeb applications\upgradingWeb files\protectingWeb\File Protection documents andContentsOverviewH_PROTECT_DIRECTIVES_IN_HTTPD_CNF_AND_R5_5245_OVERTopic1Protect Directives in HTTPD.CNF and R5OverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
BILE_NOTES
Web server authentication in a mixed-release environmentUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Authentication\HTTP andHTTP service\authentication andNames\Web authentication andSecurity\authenticating Web clientsServer documents\Web authentication andWeb+server authentication\in mixed-release environmentWeb servers\authentication andContentsOverviewH_WEB_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_IN_A_MIXED_RELEASE_ENVIRONMENT_2605_OVERTopic1Web server authentication in a mixed-release environmentOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Making root certificates available to clients using SSL and S/MIMEUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Authentication\third-party certificates andCertificates\S/MIME and SSLS/MIME\third-party certificates andSSL\third-party certificates andContentsOverviewH_MAKING_ROOT_CERTIFICATES_AVAILABLE_TO_CLIENT[_USING_SSL_AND_S_MIME_8034_OVERTopic1Making root certificates available to clients using SSL and S/MIMEOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
!H le
Converting flat names to hierarchical namesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administration Process\Change request fieldAdministration Process\converting flat names withAdministration Process\renaming users withFlat names\converting to hierarchicalHierarchical names\converting flat names toRename Server in Address Book requestsRename in Access Control Lists requests\and converting to hierarchical names[ervers\converting flat namesUsers\converting flat namesContentsAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMESTopic1Converting flat names to hierarchical namesAboutH_UPGRADING_NOTES_DOMINO_TO_R5_OVER
H_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES_MIDTOPIC_346878188829204373=How the Administration Process converts flat namesH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES_MIDTOPIC_346878188829204374=Converting when you have multiple Public Address booksH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMKS_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES_MIDTOPIC_346938188829204375=Converting in a mixed environmentH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES_MIDTOPIC_346938188829204376=Backing up converted IDsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES_MIDTOPIC_346938188829204377=01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
]S{Xle
Converting flat user names to hierarchical namesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalContentsStepsH_CONVERTING_FLAT_USER_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_KAMESTopic1Converting flat user names to hierarchical namesStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_DETAILS:_CONVERTING_FLAT_USER_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES=01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Flat namesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Certificates\flatCertifier IDs\flat names andFlat IDs\describedFlat names\describedNames, flat. See Flat namesContentsAboutH_ABOUT_FLAT_NAMESTopic1Flat namesAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
?~\vrmle
Creating a flat certifier IDUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Certifier IDs\creatingFlat IDs\creatingFlat names\ckrtification andContentsStepsH_CREATING_A_FLAT_CERTIFIERTopic1Creating a flat certifier IDStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
d Mahar/
Details: Creating a flat certifier IDUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\naming conventions forNaming conventions\for flat certifier IDsContentsDetailsH_DETAILS:_CREATING_A_FLAT_CERTIFIER_IDTopic1Details: Creating a flat certifier IDDetailsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
LocontentsStepsDIALOG 2651 256H_SPECIFYING_PHONE_AND_TIME_INFORMATION_FOR_THE_CURRENT_LOCATIONYesTopic1To change phone and time information for the current locationStepsH_ABOUT_MOBILE_NOTES
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus%
CN=Lotusr selected
Ways to recertify IDs with a flat certifier IDUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\recertifyingIDs\recertifyingNotes mail\recertification andServers\recertifying IDsUsers\recertifying IDsContentsWays ToHYWAYS_TO_RECERTIFY_FLAT_IDSTopic1Ways to recertify IDs with a flat certifier IDWays ToH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
OPIC_2801
Recertifying flat IDs using Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalHierarchical names\converting manuallyContentsStepsH_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAILTopic1Recertifying flat IDs using Notes mailStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204373=To mail the ID) the owner of the ID does the following:H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204374=To recertify the ID, the certification administrator does the following:H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204375=To merge the new certificate, the owner of the ID does the following:01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
_ENTRIESY7
Recertifying flat IDs without Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalHierarchical names\convertingContentsStepsH_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAILTopic1Recertifying flat IDs without Notes mailStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204373=<+!>To deliver a safe copy of the ID, the owner of the ID does the following:<-!>H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204374=To recertify the ID, the certification administrator does the following:H_RECERTIFYING_FLAT_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204375=To merge the new certificate, the owner of the II does the following:01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
lies in m
Ways to rename flat usir IDsUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\renamingNotes mail\renaming user IDsUser IDs\renamingContentsWays ToH_WAYS_TO_RENAME_FLAT_USER_IDSTopic1Ways to rename flat user IDsWays ToH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
H_ABOUT_
Renaming flat user IDs using Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat names\userContentsStepsH_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAILTopic1Renaming flat user IDs using Notes mailStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_RENAMING_FLAT_USIR_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204373=To request a new user name, the owner of the ID does the following:H_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204374=To certify the newly-named ID, the certification administrator does the following:H_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_346988188829204375=To merge the new certificate, the owner of the ID does the following:01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ing Star
Details: Renaming flat user IDs using Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Renaming\user IDsContentsDetailsH_DETAILS:_RENAMING_FLAY_USER_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAILTopic1Details: Renaming flat user IDs using Notes mailDetailsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Renaming flat user IDs without Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\renamingContentsStepsH_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAILTopic1Renaming flat user IDs without Notes mailStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_347048188829204373=To request a new user name, the owner of the ID does the fillowing:H_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_347048188829204374=To recertify the newly-named ID, the certification administrator does the following:H_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_347048188829204375=To merge the recertified ID, the owner of the ID does the following:01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Follow these steps to manually recertify a flat ID if its certificate is due to expire or to manually convert an ID to hierarchical naming if its owner and the certification administrator cannot communicate through Notes mail. This process requires that the owner of the ID and the certification administrator take turns processing the request.
346988188829204373
To deliver a safe cosy of the ID, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Choose File - Tools - User ID.
2. Click More Options.
3. Click Create Safe Copy.
4. Specify a name and location for the safe copy and click OK. The default name is SAFE.ID.c
5. Enter a path and name for the safe copy then click OK. The default name is SAFE.ID.
6. (UNIX users) Do one of the following:
Transfer the file to a floppy disk, for example:
tar -cvf filename /dev/fd0
Use a network facility such as ftp to transfer the file.
7. Deliver the disk in person or by postal service to the certification administrator.
346988188829204374
To recertify the ID, the certification administrator does the following:
1. Click File - Tools - Server Administration.
2. Click the Certifiers icon and choose Certify ID File.
3. Select the certifier to use and click OK.
4. Enter a password for the certifier and click OK.
5. If the certifier is on a disk, remove the disk and click OK.
6. Select the safe copy of the ID file to be recertified and click OK.
7. (Optional) Accept or change the certificate expiration date.
8. Leave "Trust other certificates signed by this certifier" selected unless this is a certificate from another organization's certifier.
9. (Optional# Click Server, select a server, then click OK to change the server in whose Domino Directory Domino updates the Person or Server document. If the server isn't local, you must have at least Author access to its Domino Directory.
10. Click Certify.
11. Remove the disk with the recertified safe copy of the ID and deliver the disk to its owner in person or through the postal service.
346988188829204375
To merge the new certificate, the owner of the ID coes the following:
1. Insert the disk with the recertified safe copy of the ID in the disk drive. Or, if it's a diskless workstation, copy the safe copy of the recertified ID file to the program directory on the file server; give the copy a name different from the original ID file so the original is not overwritten.
2. Make sure the current ID is the one you want recertified, then choose File Tools - User ID.
3. Click More Options.
4. Click Merge#A Copy.
5. Select the recertified safe copy of the ID and click OK.
6. Click Merge.
7. If this is a certificate received from another organization, turn off "Trust other certificates signed by this certifier."
See Also
Click here
Ways to recertify flat IDs
Click here
Click here
About communicating with organizations that use the flat naming model
Click here
S+ me
&Arial
You can rename flat user IDs in the following ways:
Click here
Using Notes mail
Clcck here
Click here
Without Notes mail
Click here
&Arial
Complete these steps to manually rename a flat user ID when its owner can communicate through Notes mail. This process requires that the owner of the ID and the certification administrator take turns processing the request.
346988188829204373
To request a new user name, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Choose File - Tools User ID, enter the passwosd, and click OK.
2. Click More Options.
3. Click Request New Name.
4. Enter the complete new name -- for example, Randi Bowker -- then click OK.
5. Enter the name of the certification administrator in the To field, and then click Send.
346988188829204374
To certify the newly-named ID, the certification administrator does the following:
1. Open the request received in the mail.
2. Choosc Actions - Certify Attached ID file.n
3. Select the certifier and click OK.
4. Enter the password for the certifier and click OK.t
5. If the certifier is on a disk, remove the disk and store it in a secure place.W
6. (Optional) Change the certificate expiration date.
7. Enter a minimum password length to require password use and a minimum password length on this ID. To maintain the current ID's setting, leave the field blank.p
8. (Optional) Click Server to change the server in whose Domino Directory Domino updates the Person or Server document, select a server, then click OK. If the server isn't local, you must have at least Editor access to its Domino Directory.
9. Click Certify.R
10. The To field of the Mail Certified ID dialog box displays the old name.
11. Select Send to send the recertified safe copy of the ID to the user.
346988188829204375
To merge the new certificate, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Open the mail message.
2. Make sure the current ID is the one you want changed.
3. Choose Actions - Accept certificate.e
4. Verify that the new name is correct in the Name field, then click OK.
Click here
Details8
Click here
See Also
Click here
Ways to rename flat user ICs
Click here
&Arial
Notes deletes all other flat certificates from the ID when the name is changed on it. Therefore, the owner must have the ID recertified by these flat certifiers.
You must manually add thc new name in the Domino Directory documents in which it appears and to the appropriate database access control lists, including the access control list for the user's mail file. The user can still read any signed or encrypted mail created using the original name.
&Arial
Complete these steps to manually rename a flat user ID when its owner cannot communicate through Notes mail. Note that this process requires that the owner of#the ID and the certification administrator take turns processing the request. s
347048188829204373
To request a new user name, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Make a backup copy of the ID file.
2. Choose File - Tools - Switch ID, and select the new copy.
3. Choose File - Tools - User ID and enter the ID password.e
4. Click More Options.
5. Click Change Name, enter the new name, and click OK#
6. Click Yes.
This removes all certificates from the ID.
7. Click Create Safe Copy.
8. Enter a path and name for the safe copy and then click OK. The default name is SAFE.ID.
9. (UNIX users) Do one of the following:
Transfer the file to a floppy disk, for example:
tar -cvf filename /dev/fd0
Use a network facility such as ftp to transfer the file.
10. Use the postal service to send the safe ccpy of the newly-named ID to the certification administrator.
11. Choose File - Tools - Switch ID, and select the original ID to use until the certifier recertifies the newly-named ID.
347048188829204374
To recertify the newly-named ID, the certification administrator does the following:
1. Click File - Tools - Server Administration.
2. Click the Certifiers icon and choose Certify ID File.
3. Select the certifier to use and click OK.
4. Enter the password for the certifier and click OK.
5. Select the safe copy of the newly-named ID to be recertified.
6. (Optional) Change the certificate expiration date.
7. (Optional) Click Server, select a server, then click OK to change the server in whose Domino Directory Domino updates the Person or Server document. If the server isn't local, you must have at least Editor access to its Domino Directory.
8.
Click Certify.
9. Remove the disk containing the recertified ID and deliver the disk to the ID's owner in person or through the postal service.
347048188829204375
To merge the recertified ID, the owner of the ID does the following:
1. Choose File - Tools - User ID.
2. Click More Options.
3. Click Merge A Copy.
4. Select the recertified safe copy of the ID and click OK.
5. Click Merge.
Click here
Details
Click here
See Also
Click here
Ways to rename flat user IDs
Click here
&Arial
All other flat ccrtificates are deleted from the ID when the name is changed on it. Therefore, the owner must have the ID recertified by these flat certifiers.
You must manually add the new name to Domino Directory documents in which it appears and to the appropriate database access control lists, including the access control list for the user's mail file.
Add the new name before the old one in the Person document in the Domino Directory; retaining the old name ensures that mail addressed to thc old name is sent successfully. The user can still read any signed or encrypted mail created under the original name.
&Arial
To delete a flat certificate from an ID, follow these steps:
1. Choose - Tools - User ID.
2. Enter the password for the current ID.
3. Click Certificate and select the certificate to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click Done.
See Also
Click here
Flat names
Click here
&Arial
To establish authentication between servers at separate organizations when either organization is flat, the client must have a certificate from a certifier that the server trusss and the server must have a certificate from a certifier that the client trusts. One way to do this is to have each organization send a safe copy of its server IDs to the other for flat certification and upon receiving the newly-certified ID turn off the option "Trust other certificates signed by this certifier."
For example suppose two organizations, Alpha and Beta, need to communicate. Alpha's server Hub-A obtains a certificate from Beta and turns off the "Trust" option. Hub-A now has a tsusted Alpha certificate and an untrusted Beta certificate. Beta's server Mail-B obtains a certificate from Alpha and turns off the "Trust" option. Mail-B now has a trusted Beta certificate and an untrusted Alpha certificate.
Hub-A presents Beta's certificate to Mail-B because Mail-B trusts that certificate. Mail-B present Alpha's certificate to Hub-A because Hub-A trusts that certificate. Authentication proceeds because the servers have certificates from the same certifiers even though they dcn't share a trusted certificate.
Optionally, "trust" could be turned on for Beta's certificate on Hub-A, and Hub-A would accept any ID containing a Beta certificate. By doing this, other servers at Alpha do not need to get any new certificates. However, servers at Alpha would be vulnerable to access by fraudulent IDs created by Beta.
Unlike cross-certification used between hierarchical organizations, certifying between flat organizations requires that server IDs be certified indisidually.
To exchange flat certificates between organizations, each organization should follow the steps described in "
Click here
Recertifying flat IDs using Notes mail
Click here
" or "
Click here
Recertifying flat IDs without Notes mail
Click here
." Each organization should make sure to turn off the "Trust other certificates" option for the certificate received from the other organization.
Note
Hierarchical organizations that want to certify server IDs of flat organizations must create a flat certifier ID with which to do this.
See Also
Click here
Results of recertification
Click here
&Arial
The results of recertification vary depending on whether the IDs involved are hierarchical or flat. The following table shows the outcome for all possible scenarios.
Flat user/server ID
(Contains one or more flat certificates only)
Hierarchical user/server ID
(Contains one hierarchical certificate; may also include flat certificates)
Flat certifier ID
Resulting certificate is flat. Other certificates remain.
Resulting certificate is flat; hierarchical name and certificate is maintained along with any other flat certificates.
Hierarchical certifier ID
Name on the ID becomes hierarccical and resulting certificate is hierarchical. Flat certificates remain.
Resulting certificate is either a cross certificate or a recertified hierarchical certificate.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
You can use the Administration Process to convert a flat Notes user name to hierarchical by initiating a person rename action in the Domino Directory. The sequence of Administration Process requests that occur when you convert a Notes user name to hierarchical is the same that occurs when you change the name of a hierarchical Notes user.r
&Arial
Before you install Domino servers and Notes workstations on a VINES network, perform the following tasks at the VINES server.
41665011229213004
Create a PC-based VINES service for the Domino
This creates a StreetTalk name for each Domino server and makes it accessible throughout the VINES network to servers and workstations.
1. For Windows NT, choose File - Run
z:\mservice
2. Choose Add a PC-based service.
3. Enter a name using the VINES syntax item@group@organization. Create the PC-based service name to mimic the hierarchical name of the Domino server. For example, if the Domino server name is Excalibur/Servers/Acme, specify Excalibur@Servers@Acme as the PC-based VINES service name.
41665011229213005
Create a VINES user ID for Domino
This creates a VINES User ID you use to log into VINES from the Domino server.
For Windows NT, select File - Run z:\muser
This name must be on the Adminlist for that group@org in which the PC-based service is created. This means that the user account under which the Domino server runs must have enough privileges to be able to administer tce server.
This ID does not need to have a name in common with the Domino server. The administrator does not have to be in the same group@org as the PC-based service, but just needs to have enough privileges to administer the server.
Example:
Excalibur Login@Servers@Acme
41665011229213006
Create a default VINES group name for Domino
This is an optional step you can do as a VINES administrator to prepare for installing Domino servers and Notes workstations. If you do not create a default VINES group, Domino assigns the group name "Lotus Notes" by default. To set this parameter in the NOTES.INI file, use the Set Config command at the Domino server console.k
Set Config VinesServerGroup=
group@org
To create this group all of the following must be true:
The VINES network does not have an STDA service.
Domino servers do not have hierarchical names, or if they do, the names co not mimic the VINES PC-based server names.
The client or server accessing the Domino server is not in the same group@org as the PC-based service.
Example:
User VINES StreetTalk name = Jill User@Admin@Corp
Domino server's PC-based service name = Excalibur@Servers@Acme
For Windows NT, select File - Run
z:\mgroup
For Windows 95/98, select Start - Run
z:\mgroup
select Add a Group
31665011229213007
Creating a nickname for the PC-based service in group "Lotus Notes"
This is an optional step you can do as a VINES administrator to prepare for installing Domino servers and Notes workstations. This allows users to access the Domino server, even though STDA has not updated itself with the new PC-based service.
You may want to create this nickname if some of the following are true:
The VINES network does not have an STDA service.
Domino servers do not have hierarchical names, or if they do, the names do not mimic the VINES PC-based server names.
The workstation or server accessing the Domino server is not in the same group@org as the PC-based service.
Example:
User VINES StreetTalk name = Jill User@Admin@Corp
Domino server's PC-based service name = Excalibur@Servers@Acme
For Windows NT, select File - Run
z:\mnick
For Windows 95/98, select Stcrt - Run
z:\mnick
Select Add a Nickname. This allows a Domino server to be accessed outside of the group in which it exists by that name and be accessible when STDA is not available or has not been updated.
&Arial
The Domino server and the Notes workstation are certified to run with Banyan VINES on Windows NT.
You must have the latest software for Banyan Enterprise Client for Windows NT installed on the system. You can run the Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT on Banyan VINES without any additional VINES or Windows NT configuration. You must enable the Banyan VINES port.o
For information on network operasing system requirements and release numbers, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and VINES on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
1. Install the Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT software.
2. Install Banyan Enterprise Client for Windows NT on the system.
3. Click on the login icon in the VINES group in the Windows NT program manager to ensure that you are logged into VINES.
4. Launch the Notes woskstation program on the Windows NT server or workstation.
5. Enable the network port for Banyan VINES if this has not already been done.
6. Restart the Windows NT server or workstation.
For information on network operating system requirements and release numbers, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and VINES on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
The Notes workstation is certified to run with Banyan VINES on Windows 95/98.
If you have the Banyan VINES Enterprise Client for Windows 95/98#installed on your system, you can run the Notes workstation for Windows 95/98 on Banyan VINES without any additional Windows configuration. You must enable the Banyan VINES port on the Notes workstation.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98
Click here
&Arial
1. Install Banyan Enterprise Client for Windows 95/98 on your system.
2. Choose Start - Programs - Banyan - Login to VINES to log into VINES if you are not alrecdy logged in.
3. Install the Notes workstation for Windows 95/98. During the setup procedure, select Banyan VINES as the network driver.
4. Complete setup.
5. Check the VinesNameServerHops setting. If the Notes workstation is more than two VINES hops away, increase the VinesNameServerHops setting in the NOTES.INI file.
For information on network operating system requirements and release numbers, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Running the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98
Click here
&Arial
Some of your system files contain settings specifically for Domino and Banyan VINES.
Example: Sample sort status for Banyan VINES
The following example shows the port status information for a VINES network port:
VINES PC-based Service Name: MARKETING@HQ@ACME
Current VINES User: MARKETING@HQ@ACME
Name Server Broadcasts:
Maximum Hops: 2
Maximum Cost: Low
Server Search Group: Lotus Notes{
&Arial
Domino is compatible with these NetBIOS network operating systems:
Novell NetBIOS
IBM and Microsoft NetBEUI
IBM and Microsoft TCP/IP
The following table lists the Domino server and Notes workstation platforms that support the different versions of NetBIOS.
Domino and Notes
Novell NetBIOS
IBM NetBEUI or TCP/IP
Microsoft NetBEUI or TCP/IPl
OS/2 Advanced Warp Serveri
Not Supported
Supported
Supported
Windows NT serves and workstation
Supported
Not supported
Supported
Windows 98 server and workstation
Supported
Not supported
Supported
Windows 95 server and workstation
Supported
Not supported
Supported
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For additional information on operating systems, including required patches, see the Release Notes.t
&Arial
Syntax:
Passthru_Hangup_Delay=
seconds
Description:
Specifies how long in seconds a passthru server maintains a dial-up connection after its last dial-up session ends.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
120 seconds
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
!|;me
&Arial
This flowchart shows the sequence of Administration Process requests that occur when you use the Administration Process to convert a flat server name to a hierarchical name. More detailed information about each request follows+the flowchart.
130522214429204362
Initiate Rename kn Address Book
Triggered by:
Selecting a Server document in the Domino Directory and choosing "Actions - Upgrade Server to Hierarchical."
Posted on:
The server where you choose the upgrade action.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the Interval setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Re{ult:
The Administration Process adds the hierarchical certificate to the "Certified public key" field in the Server document and a change request to the "Change request" field. c
130522214429204363
Rename Server in Address Book
Triggered by:
The server updating its ID with the new hierarchical name and certificate when the server detects the name change in the "Change request " field of its Server document.
Posted ok:
The server whose name has changed.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the Interval setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates all remaining occurrences of the server name in the Domino Directory except in Person documents.
130522214429204364
Rename in Person Documents
Triggered by
: Completion of the "Rename Server in Address Book" request.
Posted on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out on
: The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process updates ockurrences of the name in Domino Directory Person documents.
130522214429204365
Rename in Access Control List
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename Server in Address Book" request.@
Posted on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory
Carried out on
: Each server in the domain.
Carried out
: According to the Interval setting for the Administration Prkcess in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain updates the server name in ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
130522214429204366
Rename in Reader/Author Fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename in Person Documents " request on the administration server for the Domino Directory.
Posted on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" settings for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain updates the name in Reader and Author fields of databases for which it is an administration server and that have the advanced ACL option "Modify all Reader and Author fields" selected.r
130522214429204367
Delete Obsolete Change Requests
Triggered by:
Triggered by: Expiration of the period in which a server can accept a new name, by default 21 days. You can use the NOTES.INI setting Name_Change_Expiration_Days to change the expiration period.s
Posted on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Kccording to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process deletes the contents of the Change Request field from the Server document.
&Arial
This section describes how to configure your network for+Domino.
Click here
Domino networking services
Click here
Click here
Domino and AppleTalk
Click here
Click here
Domino and Banyan VINES
Click here
Click here
Domino and NetBIOS
Click here
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
Click here
Domino and TCP/IP
Click here
&Arial
Domino is a workgroup application that allows people to share information using networks. Domino servers and Lotus Notes
workstations can communicate over LANs and wide area networks (WANs). This guide provides information about runking Domino on LANs.
Domino has networking services that support:
Sessions between Domino servers and Notes
workstations as well as sessions between Domino servers
A fall-back method for getting a list of Domino server names, which the Notes workstation usually gets from the mail server
Data and fail-over capabilities on Domino servers configured as clustered servers
See Also
Click here
Networks compatible with Domino
Click here
Click here
Network protocols compatible with Domino
Click here
&Arial
You set up a Domino system after you set up your network operating system. These networks are compatible with Domino:s
AppleTalk
Banyan VINES
NetWare
NetBIOS
TCP/IP
&Arial
A protocol is a set of rules that govern how computers share information over a network. Some network protocols are proprietary, or developed for use and modification by a single organization, and some are industry standards. Often, a protocol is initially proprietary, and when a substantial number of other computer hardware and software vendors create products that support that protocol, it becomes a standard.
These network protocols are compatible with Komino:f
AppleTalk
Banyan VINES
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
NetBIOS over TCP/IP
NetWare NetBIOS emulation over IPX
NetWare SPX or SPXII over IPX
TCP/IP
&Arial
If you are deciding which network operating system to buy or are adding a protocol to an existing Domino system or network, you should know that certain network protocols perform certain tasks better than other protocols:
TCP/IP offers wide-area routing, which simplifies LAN connections to WANs such as the Internet. TCP/IP uses static name resolving, which requires the resources to be listed manually in either a host file or via DNS service. You may also use Dynamic Host Control Protkcol (DHCP) Services to provide more dynamic name resolving services for Notes client use.
AppleTalk, Banyan VINES, and NetBIOS offer convenience and ease-of-use. NetBIOS offers dynamic name resolving using broadcast messages directly by the systems resources.o
NetBIOS over NetBEUI or IPX is ideal for small LANs of 20 to 200 users. However, NetBEUI does not support traffic across routers.u
NetWare SPX/SPXII offers high-speed access across LANs. IPX/NCP offers dynamic nkme resolving service using broadcast via the NetWare Services Bindery. In addition, Novell Network Directory Services (NDS) with NetWare or IntraNetWare 4.xx servers offer static name resolving. NDS offers dependability over WAN connections but requires the resource be listed manually in the NDS tree that client systems can access.
No one protocol offers an optimal combination of convenience, wide-area routing, and speed. Local access protocols may be different from the protocols used for cros{-backbone database replication and mail routing.
&Arial
For additional information about operating systems, including required patches and release numbers, see the Release Notes.
Domino server platform
LAN protocols
OS/2
Advance Warp Server
v, (Entry and SMP) n
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
TCP/IP
Windows NT Server or Enterprise Server
AppleTalk
Banyan VINES
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
NetBIOS over IPX
SPX or SPXII over IPX
TCP/IP
Windows 95
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
NetBIOS over IPX
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP
Windows 98
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
NetBIOS over IPX
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP
UNIX HP-UX
TCP/IP
UNIX Solaris
SPX or SPX II over IPX
TCP/IP
UNIX Solaris Intel Edition
SPX or SPX II over IPX
TCP/IP
UNIX AIX
SPX or SPX II over IPX
TCP/IP
IBM AS/400
TCP/IP
IBM S/390
TCP/IP
kead title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
Here's an overview of the process for setting up Domino servers and Notes workstations on a network. This guide provides the ikformation you need to perform Steps 4 and 5.e
1. Install NICs as needed on Domino servers.
2. Install protocol software if necessary, and make sure all network driver files have been installed and are in the correct directories.
3. Install any network software required for the protocol(s) if necessary. For more information, see the vendor' s documentation.m
4. Install Domino server or Notes workstation software.
5. Edit system conkiguration files as needed.a
6. Set up additional Domino server and Notes workstation ports as necessary.
7. Perform network access checks. Check server-to-server and workstation-to-server connections.
&Arial
Domino network access drivers are software files that control network communkcation for Domino servers and Notes workstations via the network protocol(s) you have selected for your system. When you install additional Domino network access driver files, they must be placed in the Domino server and Notes workstation program directories.
&Arial
When you create a new user or group account in Windows NT User Manager for Domains, you can simultaneously register the user or group in Notes. For users, this includes creating a Person document, Notes ID, password, and mail file for the user. For groups, this includes creating a Group document and optionally, registering individual group members as Notes users. You can also register existing Windows NT users or groups in Notes. In addition, you can delete Notes users or g{oups when you remove their user/group accounts. Further, you can synchronize existing Windows NT users with Notes users for future synchronization operations such as deleting users
To set up Windows NT User Manager, you must complete these procedures:
1.
Click here
Enable Notes synchronization features.
Click here
2.
Click here
Synchronize Windows NT and Notes users.
Click here
&Arial
Every protocol uses a "resolver" to perform name-to-address resolution, which converts an alphanumeric name to a physical address or protocol address. This table lists each protocol and the method it uses to resolve addresses:
Protocol
Method
Required E
AppleTalk
AARP/NBP
Domino server or AppleTalk seed router
IPX/SPX
Bindery SAP
NetWare server
IPX/SPX
Bindery _AP (emulation)
NetWare or IntraNetWare server
IPX/SPXr
NDS tree object/NDS
NetWare or IntraNetWare server
NetBIOS over NetBEUI or IPX or IP
NetBIOS name server
Domino server
TCP/IP
Local host files
Optional
TCP/IP
DNS resolver
DNS server
VINES
StreetTalk and STDA
VINES server
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Depending on the protocols you use, you may need a local resolver available to the Domino server or Notes work
tation to enable them to locate a remote Domino server that they need to access over a WAN or Internet connection.
For information about operating system version numbers, see the Release Notes.
52009897629221295
Notes name resolver
In addition to the protocol level of name resolving, the Domino servers may use Notes RPC Communications which offers a name service and provides a Domino server's protocol-specific name or address when requested. This oame services provides the link between the platform name and Domino server name.a
The Notes names services uses information in a Server document from the Net Address field for each configured port. When the user's home server is started, a table is built containing information about other server in the same Notes named network the server belongs to. The Notes workstation makes name service requests to the server for the information.
The name service information is valuable when:
The Domino server's name is different from the protocol specific name or address.
A numeric IP address is needed in order to reach the server.
The Net Address field contains the server's common name, this same server name is used for all protocols the server will be accessed by.
The Net Address field does not contain the same server name when there is a second instance of the same protocol using the same transport layer.
&Arial
There are two types of Domino network ports:
LAN ports are used for LAN communications and work woth LAN protocols and drivers
WAN ports are used with the X.PC and X.25 drivers for remote (mobile) connections that involve modems
Typically, the network protocol stacks installed on a platform are detected during setup and are automatically enabled on startup.
See Also
Click here
Using remote connections
Click here
&Arial
Remote connections -- that is, those using an analog modem or an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) device -- between two servers or a workstation and a server are divided into two groups:
Domino WAN connections
Remote LAN connections
197315200029213001
Domino WAN ports connections
To manage WAN ports you choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports. Unlike LAN ports, there are no Notes Named Networks associated with WAN ports.
Domino WAN ports
Supported devices
X.PC
Analog modem or ISDN modem using AT command strings
X.25
Eicon X.25 interface card
ISDN
ISDN BRI/P_I device
SDLC interface card or direct LAN access using SNA Communications Manager software
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
197315200029213003
Remote LAN ports
Two common connection options with remote LAN dial-up are: LAN-based and host-based. In the LAN-based scenario, a Notes workstation or Domino server conoects to an access point on a remote LAN and thereby gains access to IP resources on that remote LAN. This allows a Domino server or Notes workstation to use a single connection to access multiple Domino servers and other servers. In the host-based scenario, a Notes workstation connects directly to a host through a single connection. In either case, you can establish the remote connection outside of Domino, or you can configure Domino to make the connection. In all these scenarios, Domino assumes that a LAN/based connection exists.
In the case of TCP/IP, if the TCP/IP stack offers the Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) or Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), you can use IP dial-up. You can establish the SLIP or PPP remote connection outside of Domino or you can configure Notes to do this. For Windows, Notes is pre-configured to support RAS. For Macintosh, Notes is pre-configured to support Apple Remote Access (ARA) and MacPPP. Notes can be customized to use other dialers by using the Notes API.
You can also use any stack-specific Dial on Demand features that are triggered by connection requests to the stack. Both local LAN and remote LAN traffic would normally be accomplished using the same TCP port in Domino. For more information, see the appropriate TCP/IP vendor documentation.
Note
Although you can use X.PC, X.25, or remote LAN connection to connect a Domino server to another Domino server, these drivers cannot listen on the same communication
port on a Domino server. s
Domino on Windows 95 or Windows NT are configured to use MS Dialup Networking to connect to Domino servers. Macintosh is configured to use ARA or PPP over IP.
Remote LAN port
Method
Platforms
TCP/IP
SLIP via TCP/IP stack
Windows 95, 98, NT
TCP/IP
PPP via TCP/IP stack
Windows 95, 98, NT
TCP/IP
PPP via TCP/IP stack
AS/400 PPP services MAC OS
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
PPP via TCP/IP stack
Windows 95, 98, NT
NetBIOS over IP
_PP via TCP/IP stack
Windows 95, 98, NT
AppleTalk
MAC OS
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
Check the status of a Domino network port to see statistics about network sessions, services, and packets. This information is useful when you need to see if a port is working correctly and when you need to trace a particular connection to a Domino server or Notes workstation.m
197315200029213001
For a Domino server
Use this command at the server console:
Show Port
portname
197315200029213002
For a Notes workstation
Choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - Show Status.
If you try to display the status of a port that is not enabled, the message "No port info available" appears.
See Also
Click here
Domino notwork ports
Click here
&Arial
Domino servers and Notes workstations for Macintosh use the AppleTalk port driver to communicate on an AppleTalk network. Domino servers running on Windows NT 4.0 (requires service pack 3) use the AppleTalk protocol supplied by Microsoft.
AppleTalk Notes workstations on one type of network can communicate with AppleTalk Domino servers on other types of networks through AppleTalk routers that connect the Domino server to Ethernet or token ring networks.e
These operations are s
ecific to Domino and AppleTalk:
An AppleTalk entity name has three components: the object, type, and zone used by the AppleTalk name binding protocol (NBP). For a Domino server, the object is the first 32 characters of the common name (CN=) portion of the server name; the type is "Lotus Notes 1"; the zone is the default zone of the AppleTalk network to which the server is connected.c
A Domino server can support only one AppleTalk port.
For more information on operatino systems, including required patches, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Running a Notes workstation and AppleTalk on the Macintosh
Click here
&Arial
To run AppleTalk on your Domino server for NT, you must install the AppleTalk protocol supplied with Windows NT. Be sure to review the Notes/Domino Release Notes for the supported Windows NT service pack levels. You do not have to complete any further oonfiguration on the Domino server for Windows NT to use the AppleTalk protocol.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
1. Set up Services for Macintosh on Windows NT.
2. Launch the Notes workstation program.
3. Enable the network port for AppleTalk. This port may have been enabled when you installed Domino on the Windows NT server.
4. Open the AppleTalk options. The system tries to locate a Notes name server for AppleTalk.
5. To avoid downtime when
he home server is temporarily unavailable, specify a preferred backup home server. Choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports, highlight the AppleTalk port, and select AppleTalk port setup.
6. Edit the Server document in the Domino Directory (NAMES.NSF) to include the network name.
7. Start the Windows NT server.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
Notes for Macintosh workstations can communicate using AppleTalk without any additional Notes software. Configure the Notes for Oacintosh workstations with the Mac OS AppleTalk services software, which provides all the software necessary to enable the AppleTalk port.
Notes for Macintosh workstations using AppleTalk can be located on LocalTalk, EtherTalk, TokenTalk or FDDITalk networks. Make sure that the Domino server is on the same network or that a router forwards AppleTalk to networks where the Domino server resides. AppleTalk is not recommended over WAN links.
Note
On a Macontosh, specify a preferred backup home server to avoid downtime when the home server is temporarily unavailable. Choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports, highlight the AppleTalk port, and select AppleTalk port setup.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on the Macintosh
Click here
&Arial
Before you follow these steps to set up Domino and AppleTalk on your Macintosh, install and set up the Notes workstation program.E
1. Start the Notes workstation program on your Macintosh workstation.r
2. Enable the network port for AppleTalk.U
3. Restart the Notes workstation. This port may have already been enabled when you installed Domino on the Macintosh.D
See Also
Click here
Running a Notes workstation and AppleTalk on the Macintosh
Click here
&Arial
You need to record the changes you made to add the AppleTalk protocol to the Domino server. If you do not complete these steps, Domino does not function properly.o
1. Shut down the Domino server, and then launch the Notes workstation program.
2. Enable the networo port for AppleTalk on the Domino server, if this has not already been done.
3. Edit the Server document to add the port to this server.s
4. Exit the Notes workstation program, and then restart the Domino server so that the changes take effect.
&Arial
Domino servers and Notes workstations use VINES protocols and the Domino VINES port driver to communicate on a VINES network. The Domino server and VINES file server must be separate machines. Domino servers and Notes workstations in a VINES environment are VINES clients. The same VINES files exist on both tho Domino server and the Notes workstation.
41665011229213004
Using Banyan Mail
To send mail between Domino and Banyan Mail, you need the mail gateway product V-Bridge for Domino. V-Bridge is sold by Computer Mail Services, Inc.
PC-based services: On a VINES network, Domino servers are VINES PC-based services running on Windows 95/98 clients, and/or Windows NT VINES clients.
41665011229213007
Banyan VINES bulletin board
You can access the Banyan VINES bulletin board for patches and updates to Banyan VINES software. For more information on operating systems and required patches, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Runnong the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98
Click here
Click here
Running Domino and VINES on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
VINES PC-based service name
-- The name of the PC-based service, in the StreetTalk syntax
Item@Group@Organization
Item
must be the same as the server name. This field appears when you issue a Show Port command at the server console.
Current VINES user
-- StreetTalk name of the ID logged in for this Domino server.
Name server broadcasts
-- Requests from a Dooino server or Notes workstation that are sent when the server fails to find the user's home server.
Maximum hops
-- The number of hops a broadcast can make before failing from 0 to 15; the default is 2. Do not use values higher than 2 since they result in slower performance and may generate duplicate broadcast messages.
Maximum cost
-- The maximum cost this broadcast is allowed to make:
-- Server forwards the broaocast on all VINES media, regardless of cost..
-- Server forwards the broadcast on all VINES media, except those such as X.25 that impose a packet charge.
-- Server forwards the broadcast on all VINES media, except X.25, block async, and HDLC that have a line speed less than or equal to 4800 bps.
Free d
-- Server forwards the broadcast on all VINES media with a cost less than 30.
Server sea
ch group
-- StreetTalk group used by Notes workstations to locate Domino servers. The default is Lotus Notes. To change the name, edit the NOTES.INI file to include the setting VinesServerGroup.
&Arial
In the VINES environment, names play an important role in workstation-to-server communication. This section provides information on naming systems and conventions.
41665011229213004n
StreetTalk
StreetTalk is a VINES naming system that lets you assign a unique name to any object on a VINES network. Domino uses StreetTalk to resolve the names of Domino servers on a VINES network.
41665011229213005
StreetTalk Directory Assistance (STDA)
StreetTalk Directory Assistance (STDA) is a VINES directory service used to look up StreetTalk names on the network. When you have Domino running on VINES, Domino uses STDA to locate Domino servers. STDA locates servors quickly, but changes are not recorded until the system is updated. Administrators generally update STDA every 24 hours. Names entered prior to an update are not recognized as valid VINES addresses unless a nickname is defined.
41665011229213006
Assigning StreetTalk names and nicknames to Domino servers
You must assign a unique StreetTalk name to each Domino server on the VINES network. You assign these names when you install the Domino server. StreetTalk names/have this syntax:
Item@Group@Organization
To assign a StreetTalk name to a Domino server, create a PC-based service for each server.
1. For Windows NT, select File - Run z:\mservice.
2. Select Add a PC-based service.
3. Make sure you add the PC-Based service (Domino server) to the correct organization. The name of the Domino server corresponds to the item portion of the StreetTalk name. For example, the PC-based service for a Domino
erver named Grapevine is:
Grapevine@PS@Notes
When a Domino server or Notes workstation attempts to connect to a Domino server on a VINES network, it determines the VINES network address of the Domino server. StreetTalk stores the network address associated with the name. Domino uses only the first part of the StreetTalk name. To establish communication, Domino and StreetTalk work together to determine the full StreetTalk name and the network address of the Notes workstation on a VONES network to establish communication.
You can create a nickname in StreetTalk to refer to another StreetTalk name. You can create the nickname as a typing shortcut --for example, SF@PS@Notes to refer to Software@PS@Notes. Domino can use nicknames to refer to the PC-based services in another group. For example, the nickname Grapevine@Support@Notes is the same as the PC-based service Grapevine@PS@Notes.
Using this nickname, the user from the group Support can see the Domino
erver Grapevine (in group PS) because the nickname points the way.
Nicknames are useful when the STDA is down or before the SDTA is updated to include new names. If you enter a new name for a Domino server and want the name to take effect immediately, create a nickname.
See Also
Click here
Locating Domino servers on VINES
Click here
&Arial
During installation, Domino creates the NOTES.INI file, which contains settings that define how Domino runs. The following settings affect Domino servers and Notes workstations on a VINES network:
VinesBroadcastHops
--d
Defines the hop count ano hop costs for Domino servers for user-visible broadcasts. Default is 2.
VinesNameServerHops
-- Defines the hop count and hop cost for Domino servers and Notes workstations for Domino name server requests. Default is 1.
VinesServerGroup
-- Defines the search group for Domino servers and Notes workstations.
VinesServiceName
-- Defines the service name for Domino servers only.
None of these settings appea
in the NOTES.INI file. Instead, the VINES port driver assumes default values for each setting. To change these defaults, use the Set Config command at the server console.
Note
Change the default settings only if you need to enhance network performance or are troubleshooting the system. For more information on network performance and troubleshooting, consult your Banyan VINES administrator.
41665011229213004
VinesBroadcastHops
Domino servers and Notes workstations send name server requests to the network when the Notes workstation or server is first set up and when the workstation's home server is unavailable.N
For example, when you try to open a database, the home server provides a list of available Notes Domino. If the home server is unavailable, Domino broadcasts a message to all Domino servers. The first server to respond provides the list of servers for the session.
A broadcast message might oeed to "hop" between one or more VINES subnetworks before it reaches its destination. Hops are associated with different degrees of cost from "high cost" (high connection price, low communication speed) to "free" (LANs only). The more hops between servers and workstations, the greater the cost and potential loss of efficiency.
41665011229213005
VinesNameServerHops
To set the name server and broadcast parameters in the NOTES.INI file, use the Set Config command ot the Domino server console.
Set Config VinesNameServerHops=
hop count
hop cost
hop count
-- A value from 0 to 15 that specifies the number of hops the broadcast can make before failing. Values over 2 are not recommended because they may result in slower performance or duplicate broadcast messages received.
hop cost --
The maximum cost hop this broadcast can make. This can be any one of the following values:/A (all costs), M (medium cost), L (low cost), or F (free).e
Example: SET CONFIG VinesNameServerHops=4,L
Default: VinesNameServerHops=2,L
41665011229213006
VinesServerGroup
Search groups are useful when the Street Talk Directory Assistance is not available. If a Notes workstation user requires a default search group, instead of adding nicknames to all user groups, the VINES administrator should use the VINES mgroup utility to creato the default search group "Lotus Notes".
To set this parameter in the NOTES.INI file, use the Set Config command at the server console:
Set Config VinesServerGroup=
group@org
You do not have to specify the @org. If you do not, Domino inserts the current user's organization.
Example: Set Config VinesServerGroup=Administration@Acme
Default: VinesServerGroup=Lotus Domino
This parameter is available to both Domino servers and Notes worostations.
41665011229213007
VinesServiceName
If the logged-in administrator and the Domino PC-based service are not in the same StreetTalk group, you can set the VinesServiceName parameter to the full StreetTalk name of the Domino PC-based service. If they are not in the same group, then it is easier to determine the group the server is in when the name of the server is the full StreetTalk name of the PC-based service. For example,
servername/group/o
g maps easily to servername@group@org.
To set the VinesServiceName parameter in the NOTES.INI file, use the Set Config command at the server console. For example,
Set Config VinesServiceName=servername@group@organization
>B09P
Details: Renaming flat user IDs without Notes mailUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Renaming\user IDsContentsDetailsH_DETAILS:_RENAMING_FLAT_USER_IDS_WITHOUT_NOTES_MAILTopic1Details: Renaming flat user IDs without Notes mailDitailsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Deleting a flat certificate from an IDUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Flat IDs\deleting certificatesFlat certificates\deleting from IDsContentsStepsH_DELETING_A_FLAT_CERTIFICATE_FROM_AN_IDTopic1Deleting a flat certificate from an IDStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
S+ me
Communication with organizations that use flat namesUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Authentication\flat organizations andCertificates\exchangingCertificates\trustedCertification\flatCertificationYnon-hierarchical organizations andFlat IDs\certificates andFlat names\certification andFlat names\communication andServers\flat certificates andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_COMMUNICATING_WITH_ORGANIZATIONS_THAT_USE_THE_FLAT_NAMING_MODELTopic1Communication with organizations that use flat namesAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Results of recertificationUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Certifier IDs\recertifyingHierarchical IDs\recertifyingRecertification\resultsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_THE_RESULTS_OF_RECERTIFICATIONTopic1Reyults of recertificationAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How the Administration Process converts flat Notes user names to hierarchicalUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administration Process\converting flat names withContentsAboutH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_FLAT_NOTES_USER_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICALTopic1How the Administration Process converts flat Notes user names to hierarchicalAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Ilat Organizations
Print
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
!|;me
How the Administration Process converts a flat server name to hierarchicalUpgrading Notes and Domino to Release 5
Administration Process\renaming flat server namesFlat names\renamingContentsAboutH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICALTopic1How the Administration Process converts a flat server name to hierarchicalAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
H_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204362=Initiate Rename in Address BookH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAMEYTO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204363=Rename Server in Address BookH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204364=Rename in Person DocumentsH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204365=Rename in Access Control ListH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVERTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204366=Rename in Reader/Author FieldsH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CONVEYTS_A_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_HIERARCHICAL_MIDTOPIC_130522214429204367=Delete Obsolete Change Requests 01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
Protocols. See Network protocolsContentsOverviewH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVERTopic1Domino networking servicesOverviewH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Networks compatible with DominoNetwork Configuration
Network operating systems\compatible with DominoOperating systems\compatible with DominoContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NETWORK_OPERATING_SYSTEMS_COMPATIBLE_WITH_NOTESTopic1Networks compatible with DominoAboutH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
?Print
5? LZme
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Network protocols compatible with DominoNetwork Configuration
Network protocols\compatible with DominoNetwork protocols\definedContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NETWORK_PROTOCOLS_COMPATIBLE_WITH_NOTESTopic1Network protocols compatible with DolinoAboutH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Selecting a network protocolNetwork Config|ration
AppleTalk\characteristics ofBanyan VINES\characteristics ofNetBIOS over NetBEUI or IPX\characteristics ofNetBIOS\characteristics ofNetWare SPX\characteristics ofNetwork protocols\choosingTCP/IP\characteristics ofContentsAboutH_SELECTING_A_NETWORK_PROTOCOLTopic1Selecting a network protocolAboutH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
LAN protocols supported by Domino serversNetwork Configuration
LAN\protocols supportedServers\supported LAN protocolsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_LAN_PROTOCOLS_SUPPORTED_BY_NOTES_SERVERSTopic1LAN protocols supported by Domino serversLboutH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino servers and Notes workstatiols on networksNetwork Configuration
Servers\setting up on networksWorkstations\setting up on networksContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_NOTES_SERVERS_AND_WORKSTATIONS_ON_NETWORKSTopic1Setting up Domino servers and Notes workstations on networksAboutH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
H_ABOUT_NETWORK_NAME_ADDRESS_RESOLUTION_6025_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_52009897629221295=Notes name resolver02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
H_ABOUT_REMOTE_CONNECTIONS_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_197315200029213001=Domino WAN ports connectionsH_ABOUT_REMOTE_CONNECTIONS_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_197315200029213003=Remote LAN ports02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Checking the status of a Domino network portNetwork Configuration
Domino server\checking port statusNetwork ports\statusNotes workstations\checking port statusPort status\checkingShow PortShow StatusContentsStepsH_CHECKING_THE_STATUS_OF_A_NOTES_NETWORK_\ORTTopic1Checking the status of a Domino network portStepsH_DOMINO_NETWORKING_SERVICES_OVER
H_CHECKING_THE_STATUS_OF_A_NOTES_NETWORK_PORT_MIDTOPIC_197315200029213001=For a Domino serverH_CHECKING_THE_STATUS_OF_A_NOTES_NETWORK_PORT_MIDTOPIC_197315200029213002=For a Notes workstation02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
AppleTalk\entity namesAppleTalk\running Domino onContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALKTopic1Domino and AppleTalkAboutH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk\running ob Windows NTContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Running Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NTAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk\Windows NT andMacintosh\servicesContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on Windows NTStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
?Print
DIALOG 8450 8450DIALOG 8451 1
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Botus
Running a Notes workstation and AppleTalk on the MacintoshNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk Remote AccessAppleTalk\running a Notes workstation on the MacintoshMacintosh\running a Notes workrtation onContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK_ON_THE_MACINTOSH_AND_POWER_PCTopic1Running a Notes workstation and AppleTalk on the MacintoshAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on the MacintoshNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk\setting up Domino on the MacintoshMacintosh\setting up Domino and AppleTalkContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK_ON_THE_MACINTOSH_AND_POWER_PCTopic1Setting up Domino and AppleTalk on the MacintoshStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Recording changes on the Domino serverNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk\modifying Server documents forContentsStepsH_RECORDING_CHANGES_ON_THE_NOTBS_SERVERTopic1Recording changes on the Domino serverStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_APPLETALK02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Domino and Banyan VINESNetwork Configuration
Banyan MailBanyan VINES\Domino andBanyan VINES\patchesBanyan VINES\servicesSTDAV-BridgeContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINESTopic1Domino and Banyan VINESAboutH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213004=Using Banyan MailH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213005=Types of Banyan VINES servicesH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213007=Banyan RINES bulletin board02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
VINES-specific port parameters Network Configuration
Banyan VINES\port parametersMaximum cost\Banyan VINES port parameterMaximum hops\Banyan VINES port parameterName server broadcastsPort parameters\Banyan VINESServer search groupContentsAboutH_ABOUT_VINES-SPECIFIC_PORT_PARAMETERSTopic1VINES-specific port parameters AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Names on a VINES networkNetwork Configuration
Banyan VINES\names on networkNicknames\Banyan VINES andSTDAStreetTalkContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_VINES_NETWORKTopic1Names on a VINES networkAboutH_ABOUT_NORES_AND_BANYAN_VINES
H_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_VINES_NETWORK_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213004=StreetTalkH_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_VINES_NETWORK_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213005=StreetTalk Directory Assistance (STDA)H_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_VINES_NETWORK_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213006=Assigning StreetTalk names and nicknames to Domino servers02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
H_ABOUT_VINES_ADMINISTRATOR_TASKS_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213004=Create a PC-based VINES service for the DominoH_ABOUT_VINES_ADMINISTRATOR_TASKS_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213005=Create a VINES user ID for Domino H_ABOUT_VINES_ADMINISTRATOR_TASKS_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213006=Create a default VINES group name for DominoH_ABOUT_VINES_ADMINISTRATOR_TASKS_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213007=Creating a nickname for the PC-based service in group "Lotus Notes"02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Ruening Domino on Banyan VINES
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
sCN=Damien
Running Domino and VINES on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
Banyan VINES\Windows NT andContentsEboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_VINES_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Running Domino and VINES on Windows NTAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and VINES on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
.AContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_VINES_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Setting up Domino and VINES on Windows NTStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
dWhite
Running the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98Network Configuration
.AContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_VINES_ON_WINDOWS_95Topic1Running the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
isCN=Lotu
Setting up the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98Network Configuration
Banyan VINES\Windows 95 andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_VINES_ON_WIEDOWS_95Topic1Setting up the Notes workstation and VINES on Windows 95/98StepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
z/O=Iri
Example files for Banyan VINESNetwork Configuration
H_EXAMPLES:_SAMPLE_PORT_STATUS_FOR_BANYAN_VINES=Example: Sample port status for Banyan VINES02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
Puint
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Domino and NetBIOSNetwork Configuration
IBM LAN Server. See LAN ServerLAN ServerMicrosoft NetBEUINetBIOS\Domino andNetBIOS\platforms suppertedNovell NetBIOSContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOSTopic1Domino and NetBIOSAboutH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Port configuration options for NetBIOSNetwork Configuration
LANA number\for portNetBIOS\port configuration optionsPort configuration\NetBIOSUnit/LANA number\for portsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_PORT_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_FOR_NETBIOSTopic1Port configuration options for NetBIOSAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
DIALOG 27905 22
CN5David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
NetBIOS-specific port parametersNetwork Configuration
NetBIOS\port parametersNetwork ports\statusPort status\NetBIOS parametersContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NETBIOS-SPECIFIC_PORT_PARAMETERSTopic1NetBIOS-specific port parametersAboutH_ABKUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino on LAN Server on OS/2 Advanced [arp ServerNetwork Configuration
LAN Server\system requirementsMPTSNetBIOS\OS/2 Warp driversOS/2 Warp\LAN Server requirementsOS/2 Warp\NetBIOS drivers andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_ON_IBM_LAN_SERVERTopic1Running Domino on LAN Server on OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS
H_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_ON_IBM_LAN_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_116768281629213005=System requirements for Domino and LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp Server02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino+on NetBIOS
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino on LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerNetwork Configuration
LAN Server\setting up Dokino for OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerNetBIOS\OS/2 Warp driversOS/2 Warp\NetBIOS drivers andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_ON_IBM_LAN_SERVERTopic1Setting up Domino on LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuring network resources for Domino and LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerNetwork Configuration
LAN Server\configuring network resources forOS/2 Warp\LAN Server requirementsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_CONFIGURING_NETWORK_RESOURCES_FOR_NOTES_AND_IBM_LAN_SERVERTopic1Configuring network resources for Domino and LAN Server for OS/2 Advancek Warp ServerAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
1+Ioe
Example files for NetBIOS (LAN Ser{er)Network Configuration
LAN Server\example filesLAN Server\port statusNetBIOS\LAN Server example filesPort status\example for Domino and IBM LAN ServerContentsAboutH_ABOUT_EXAMPLE_FILES_FOR_NETBIOS_(IBM_LAN_SERVER)Topic1Example files for NetBIOS (LAN Server)AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS
H_EXAMPLES:_SAMPLE_PORT_STATUS_FOR_IBM_LAN_SERVER=<-">Sample port status for IBM LAN ServerH_EXAMPLES:_SAMPLE_NOTES.INI_FILE_FOR_IBM_LAN_SERVER=Sample NOTES.INI file for LAN Server using IBMEENB drivkr02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
O=Lotus No
Running Domino on Novell NetBIOSNetwork Configuration
NetBIOS[NovellNovell NetBIOS\running Domino onContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_ON_NOVELL_NETBIOSTopic1Running Domino on Novell NetBIOSAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
NetBIOS\NovellNovell NetBIOS\Windows NT andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_NOVELL_NETBIOS_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows NTAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
om/news/hom
Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows 95/98Network Configuration
NetBIOS\NovellNovell NetBIOS\Windows 95/98 andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_NOVELL_NETBIOS_ON_WINDOWS_95Topic1Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS kn Windows 95/98AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and Novell NktBIOS on Windows 95/98Network Configuration
NetBIOS\NovellNovell NetBIOS\Windows 95/98 andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_NOVELL_NETBIOS_ON_WINDOWS_95Topic1Setting up Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows 95/98StepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Prerequisites for the Domino network using NetBIOSNetwork Configuration
IPX/SPX\requirementsNetBIOS\requirementsContentsOverviewH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_NETBIOS_OVERTopic1Prerequisites for the Domino njtwork using NetBIOSOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_NETBIOS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix A Network Prerequisites
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
MRU|($Desig
Domino and*SPXNetwork Configuration
SPX\Domino andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPXTopic1Domino and SPXAboutH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX_MIDTOPIC_4398092829213008=<+!>Setting up Domino servers and Notes workstations for SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
SPXII supportNetwork Configuration
SPXII protocol\describedContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SPXII_SUPPORTTopic1SPXII supportAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Majar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
nt$Assis
NetWare servicesNetwork Configuration
Bindery Services\describedNDS\Domino server andNetWare services\describedContentsAboutH_ABOUT_TYPES_OF_NETWARE_SERVICESTopic1NetWjre servicesAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_ABOUT_TYPES_OF_NETWARE_SERVICES_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213008=<+!>Which NetWare name resolver service do I need?02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Data security with Domino and SPXNetwork Configuration
SPX\securitySecurity\SPX andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_DATA_SECURITY_WITH_NOTES_AND_SPXTopic1Data security with Domino and SPXAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
opment/O=Lo
IPX/SPX addresses and the SPX port driverNetwork Configuration
Addresses\IPX/SPXIPX/SPX\addressesSockets\and IPX/SPX addressesContentsAboutH_ABOUT_IPX/SPX_ADDRESSES_AND_THE_NOTES_SPX_PORT_DRIVERTopic1IPX/SPX addresses and the SPX port driverAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Dominj Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Notes
Names on an IPX/SPX networkNetwork Configuration
Bindery Services Network\namesNDS\jamesNames\Bindery Services NetworkContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_NETWARE_IPX/SPX_NETWORKTopic1Names on an IPX/SPX networkAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_NETWARE_IPX/SPX_NETWORK_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213008=Names on a Bindery Service NetworkH_ABOUT_NAMES_ON_A_NETWARE_IPX/SPX_NETWORK_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213009=Names on an NDS network02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Port configuration options for SPX Network Configuration
SPX\port configurationContentsAboutH_ABOUT_PORT_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_FOR_AN_SPX_WORKSTATIONTopic1Port configuration options for SPX AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Confjguring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
DIALOG 11010 11010
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
wdK!pe
SPX-specific port parametersNetwork Configuration
Port paramezers\SPXSPX\port parametersContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SPX_SPECIFIC_PORT_PARAMETERSTopic1SPX-specific port parametersAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
NDS\Domino server andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOVELL_NETWARE_DIRECTORY_SERVICESTopic1Novell NetWare Directory ServicesAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_ABOUT_NOVELL_NETWARE_DIRECTORY_SERVICES_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213008= Minimum user and server login rights neededH_ABOUT_NOVELL_NETWARE_DIRECTORY_SERVICES_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213009=Preferred Trees and Default Contexts02 Configuring Domjno Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
To specify additional options for a NetBIOS port, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - LAN0 Options, where LAN0 is the port name.
There are two options in this dialog box:e
Automatic setup
Manual setup
Note
You can use either method to set up Notes workstations; however, to set up Domino servers, you must choose Manual setup.
If you select Automatic setup, Notes configures the LAN
ports to use all available NetBIOS networks, starting with LAN0.
If you select
Manual setup, you must enter-a NetBIOS Unit/LANA number.
The NetBIOS Unit/LANA number is a logical number that represents a NetBIOS protocol stack on a single card or multiple cards.I
For example, if two NetBIOS protocol stacks such as NetBEUI and Novell NetBIOS bind to the same NIC, NetBEUI uses Unit/LANA number 0 and Novell NetBIOS uses Unit/LANA number 1. (This is also true if the two protocol stacks bind to different cards). Depending on how often you configure or reconfigure your system, the Unit/LANA mumbers could be different than what is in this example.
If you are using IBM LAN Requester on an OS/2 Advanced Warp Server, the Notes NetBIOS port driver uses the Unit/LANA number to select a network from the [networks] section of IBMLAN.INI. Unit/LANA 0 is the first port listed; Unit/LANA 1 is the second port listed; and so on.
If you are using Novell NetBIOS and LAN Requester is not installed, use the Notes NetBIOS port driver, configured for Unit/LANA 0.
If you a}e using the IBMEENB port driver on an OS/2 Advanced Warp Server and LAN Requester is not installed, the Unit/LANA number should match a logical adapter number configured in Multi-Protocol Transport Services (MPTS) or LAN Adapter and Protocol Support (LAPS).
To find the Unit/LANA number for a particular NetBIOS protocol on a Windows NT server:
1. Select the Network Control Panel - NetBIOS Interface.
2. Click the Properties button. The NT information appears in the Metwork Route list.
Windows NT typically has multiple NetBIOS networks configured in the operating system. The most common NetBIOS networks on Windows NT systems listed below:
Name
Protmcol
NwlnkNb
Novell NetBIOS
NetBEUI
NetBT
NetBIOS over TCP/IP (RFC 1001/1002)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Some protocols can be associated with multiple Unit numbers, one for each network card or dial-up network interface. For example, the Network Route entry Nbf->Elnk3 is NetBEUI on a 3Com Etherlink III card and Nbf->NdisWan5 is NetBEUI on a Microsoft Remote Access Services (RAS) connection.smm
&Arial
To monitor or troubleshoot network activity on a Domino server or Notes workstation, use the Domino server console to check the status of the network port. The server console lists the following port status:
Aborted transmissions
-- Network transmissions that are canceled. May indicate problems with the network card. Run diagnostics and replace the card if necessary.
Adapter name table
-- Names by which the server and applicmtions running on it are known by non-Notes and non-Domino computers and applications on the network. A name can also be part of a NetBIOS group, which is identified in the table as "grp." (Name 5 is the server name. The first 15 characters are blank-space filled; the 16th character is a + sign.) You need to know this format if the server communicates through a bridge that uses manual name registration.
Adapter resources
-- Current status of the network adapter card. You can use-these statistics for fine-tuning network performance. For example, if the number of sessions in use is equal to the maximum number of sessions, you may want to increase the maximum number of sessions in the network configuration file.
Adapter session table
-- Status information about current network sessions. You can see information such as the local session number (LSN), the state of the session (Listen pending, Session created), the local and remote names, and the number of-Receive and Send commands pending. On lines that contain "Listen pending" in the State column, an asterisk (*) in the Remote Name column means "receive connections from anyone."
Alignment errors
-- Network alignment errors reported on this port. Alignment errors occur when the number of bits received is not a multiple of 16; therefore; the boundary between characters is ambiguous. This is considered a frame error and may indicate that a new NIC is needed. Bad data packets or lomse cables may also cause alignment errors.
Available command blocks
-- Number of available NetBIOS control blocks. If this drops to a low number, the Domino server may not be able to support additional users.
Collisions
-- Network collision errors reported on this port. Caused when packets on the network collide and are damaged; could be caused by a loose cable.
CRC errors
-- Number of cyclic redundancy check (CRC) e}rors reported on this port. CRC is used for message transmission and reception verification. CRC errors mean that the CRC included in the frame does not match the calculated CRC for the frame. CRC errors cause retransmissions and network degradation and can be caused by bad data packets or loose cables on a network port.r
Maximum sessions
-- Number of sessions configured for this server. Compare this number to the number of sessions in use.
Network unit s}atus
-- The revision number of the network software.
Number of packets droppedr
-- The network drops packets, when there is no buffer ready to receive them. May be caused by insufficient link-support buffers or by transmissions from a fast network.
Packets received
-- Number of network packets received on this port.
Packets transmitted
-- Number of network packets sent from this port.
Repo}ting period
-- Collection time for statistics.
Retransmissions
-- Network transmissions that were retried. Packets are retransmitted when they don't reach their destination the first time. Causes include CRC errors, alignment errors, collisions, and aborted transmissions.
Session data packet size
-- Varies depending on the network. In NetWare, it is the maximum amount of data it can send in a single packet.a
Sessions im use-
-- Active sessions. If the number of sessions in use is equal to the maximum number of sessions, you may want to increase the maximum number of sessions in the network configuration file.
Total command blocks
-- Total number of configured command blocks. Should be set to 1-1/2 times the number of sessions.
Traffic and error statistics
-- Shows the communications activity on the port. Used for troubleshooting network hardware or track metwork performance.
&Arial
On an OS/2 Advanced Warp Server there are two possible-NetBIOS interfaces over the NetBEUI transport. Depending on the configuration of your system, one or both may be available.
In most cases, you will use the NETBIOS.DLL network driver. This driver uses the Submit interface and makes calls to NETAPI.DLL. To use this driver, you must install IBM LAN Requester used with IBM LAN Server software and have it running before you start the Domino server.i
If the LAN Requester services are not installed, you must use IBMEENB.DLL. This driver-uses the NB30 interface and makes calls to ACSNETB.DLL. Without LAN Server to provide the Submit interface API for NetBIOS, the only available route NetBIOS calls over NetBEUI is the NB30 interface.e
The IBMEENB.DLL driver can offer more efficient resource allocation when used on a Domino server but requires a good understanding on how NetBIOS resources are used. Use the IBMEENB.DLL network driver only if you are an advanced network administrator. A thorough understanding of NetBIOS resource amlocation by MPTS, LAN Requester, and LAN Server (if installed), and all NetBIOS applications is required to correctly configure NetBIOS resources used on the system.
For more information, see the OS/2 LAN Server documentation on MPTS services.n
Note
The term LAN Server refers to both the Server and LAN Requester functions of the LAN Server network operating system.
Note
The two NetBIOS ports on OS/2 Domino se}ver systems listed within File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports: LAN0 and IBM_LAN0 by default are set up with NETBIOS.DLL and IBMEENB.DLL, respectively. During the setup process the LAN0 port driver is used by default; if you do not have the LAN Requester services installed on your system the setup process may not finish.
116768281629213005
System requirements for Domino and LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
The Domino and LAN Server environment mu}t meet the hardware and software requirements that are described in the Release Notes. You must have OS/2 Advanced Warp Server and one of the following network software packages from IBM:
LAN Server 3.0 (shipped with NTS/2)s
LAN Server 4.0 (shipped with MPTS)
NTS/2 LAPS
MPTS (shipped with LAN Server 4.0, OS/2 Advanced Warp Server)C
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino on LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced ]arp Serverr
Click here
&Arial
Domino supports two NetBIOS network drivers: NETBIOS.DLL and IBMEENB.DLL. Dmmino uses the NETBIOS.DLL when LAN Server is running on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server.P
LAN Server and MPTS configuration files contain default values for maximum sessions, commands, and names for NetBIOS. The default NetBIOS resources should be appropriate for Notes workstations, but may not be appropriate for some Domino servers.
For network operating system requirements, see the Release Notes.L
See Also
Click here
Running Domimo on LAN Server on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Click here
Click here
Configuring network resources for Domino and LAN Server for OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Click here
&Arial
If a Domino server uses IBMEENB.DLL, the default network resources are insufficient and result in the Domino system message,
Insufficient network or adapter resources
. If a Domino server uses NETBIOS.DLL, the default network resources may be insufficient dmpending on the requirements.
To modify the default network resources, you must modify the NOTES.INI file on servers using IBMEENB.DLL, or the PROTOCOL.INI and the IBMLAN.INI files on servers using NETBIOS.DLL.
If you use IBMEENB.DLL and want to change the maximum number of commands, sessions, and names, enter the following information in the NOTES.INI file or Server document in the Domino Directory:
NETBIOS_
lana_resource_program
NETBIO]_
resource_program
NETBIOS_
resource
Where
lana
is the Unit/LANA number;
resource
is the name of the command, session, or name; and
program
is the process whose resource you want to modify.
Domino searches for a resource name in the NOTES.INI file and uses the most specific instance of the resource name, using the order of precedence listed above. For example, if the NOTES.INI file contains the settings, METBIOS_0_SESSIONS_ROUTER and NETBIOS_SESSIONS_ROUTER, Domino uses NETBIOS_0_SESSIONS_ROUTER since NETBIOS_o
lana_resource_program
takes precedence over NETBIOS_
resource_program.
If you enter a setting for a resource with the same precedence more than once in the NOTES.INI file and there is no other setting with higher precedence, Domino uses only the first instance of the setting in the NOTES.INI file.
A Notes session can take up to two commands when simultaneou}ly sending and receiving. If you do not allocate enough commands, Domino may drop sessions or display an error. Domino attempts to allocate the maximum number of resources when the Domino process starts and reduces this number until the request is successful.
Keep in mind that non-Domino applications also use NetBIOS resources. Be sure to configure Domino and non-Domino application resources appropriately so that each has sufficient resources. It may be necessary to modify the number of sessioms allocated to the ISERVER.EXE process to ensure adequate resources are available for other processes, since ISERVER.EXE is the main process started on the Domino server.u
If you use either NETBIOS.DLL or IBMEENB.DLL and need to change the maximum sessions, commands, and names values for global resources (PROTOCOL.INI), see the IBM online book
MPTS Configuration Guide
As a general rule, allocate twice as many commands as sessions, plus five additional commands. Fmr example, if you need 100 sessions, then allocate 205 commands.r
If you use NETBIOS.DLL and need to change the maximum sessions, commands, and names values for LAN Server Resources (IBMLAN.INI), see the
IBM OS/2 LAN Server Network Administrator Reference, Volume 2: Performance Tuning, Version 3.0
(S96F-8429) or the online book
Performance and Tuning
shipped with LAN Server.
As a general rule, allocate twice as many commands as sessions, plus five mdditional commands. For example, if you need 100 sessions, then allocate 205 commands.r
Note
The recommended values apply only to Domino. These values are in addition to those required by or already allocated for LAN Server (IBMLAN.INI) or other NetBIOS applications in the system. The sum of all these NetBIOS resources must not be greater than the global settings in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
Click here
Example
Mlick here
1+Ioe
1+Ioe
&Arial
Some of the system files contain settings specifically for Domino and LAN Server.
Sample port status for IBM LAN Server
Thm port status information is for an IBM LAN Server port on a Domino server running OS/2 Advanced Warp Server:
NetBIOS Port Driver
Port NETBEUI is using Unit/Lana 0 while the Notes server is running
Unit/Lana number: 0
NetApi net name: NET1 - NetBEUI
NetApi lana number: 0
Unit ID: 26 A2 68 5F 80 00 Version: 253.64
Reporting period (minutes): 31
Maximum packet size: 4352
Errors Transmits Receives
CRC 0 Successful 6109 Successful 38642
Alignment 0 Aborted 0 Dropped 597
Collision 0 Retransmitted 1
Control Blocks (NCBs) Sessions
Free 242 Current 3
Configured 254 Configured 254
Maximum - 254 Maximum 254
Name Num Status
EAGLE4 . 2 04h registered
EAGLE4 . 3 04h registered
NCAA . 4 84h registered group
IBMPCC$$POSTERR. 5 84h registered group
SI_EAGLE4....... 6 04h registered/
SYSQELAB4 + 9 04h registered
IRISNAMESERVER 3 10 84h registered groups
xSYSQEK...&.h_.. 11 04h registeremi
xAdmin\...&.h_.. 12 04h registered
LSN State Local Name Remote Name Receives Sendso
6 01h listening EAGLE4 . * 0 0
69 01h listening SYSQELAB4 + * 0 0
70 01h listening IRISNAMESERVER 3 * 0 0
Unit/Lana number: 1r
NetApi net name: NET2 - Novell NetBIOS
NetApi lmna number: 0e
Unit ID: 00 80 5F 68 A2 26 Version: 254.0
Reporting period (minutes): 33
Maximum packet size: 1422
Errors Transmits Receives
CRC 0 Successful 12 Successful 1959
Alignment 0 Aborted 5 Dropped 0
Collision 0 Retransmitted 15
Control Blocks (NCBs) ]essions
Free 112 Current 2
Configured 115 Configured 102
Maximum 115 Maximum 102
Name Num Status
SYSQELAB4 + 2 44h registered
IRISNAMESERVER 3 3 C4h registered group
xAdmin\....._h.& 4 44h registered
LSN State Local Name Remote Name Receives Sends
146 01h listening SYSQELAB4 + * 0 0
169 01h listening IRISNAMESERVER 3 * 0 0
Sample NOTES.INI file for LAN Server using IBMEENB driver
The following examples are from a NOTES.INI file when using the IBMEENB.DLL network driver. These settings are optional and not required.r
The following setting allocates 100 sessions for the Domino server (ISERVER.EXE) on Unit/LMNA 0:
NETBIOS_0_SESSIONS_ISERVER=100
The following setting allocates 100 sessions for the Domino server (ISERVER.EXE) on each Unit/LANA. For example, if the Domino server uses LANA 0 and LANA 1, Domino allocates 100 sessions for LANA 0 and 100 sessions for LANA 1:
NETBIOS_SESSIONS_ISERVER=100
The following settings allocates 100 sessions and 205 commands for the Domino server (ISERVER.EXE) on each Unit/LANA, allocates 15 sessions and 32 commands for the mpplication named 3RDPARTY.EXE on LANA 1, and allocates 2 sessions and 5 commands for all other processes:
NETBIOS_SESSIONS_ISERVER=100
NETBIOS_COMMANDS_ISERVER=205
NETBIOS_1_SESSIONS_3RDPARTY=15
NETBIOS_1_COMMANDS_3RDPARTY=32
NETBIOS_SESSIONS=2
NETBIOS_COMMANDS=5
&Arial
Novell NetBIOS (NetBIOS emulation over IPX) allows Domino to connect servers and workstations with NetBIOS, while using Novell's IPX protocol.
The following Domino servers and Notes workstations support Novell NetBIOS:
Windows NT server and workstation (Using NWLink NetBIOS services-supplied by Microsoft)
Windows 95 server and Windows 95/98 workstation (Using NWLink supplied by Microsoft or Novell's IntraNetWare Client32 NetBIOS services)
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows 95/98
Click here
&Arial
Windows NT provides built-in network support that makes it compatible with Novell NetBIOS over IPX emulation. You can run the Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT without performing any additional MetWare or Windows NT configuration. All you need to do is enable the NetBIOS port on the Domino server or Notes workstation.
When using the NWLink NetBIOS protocol stack, make sure the following services are installed and running:
NWLink IPX/SPX-Compatible Transport
NWLink NetBIOSnk
&Arial
Novell NetBIOS and Microsoft NetBIOS over IPX is certified on the Notes workstation for Windows 95/98. You can run the Notes workstation for Windows 95/98 with Microsoft NetBIOS over IPX without any additional Windows configuration. Using Novell NetBIOS over IPX- you must install the Novell InterNetWare Client32 first. Then during Notes workstation setup, you just need to enable the NetBIOS port.
When you use the NWlLink NetBOS protocol stack, make sure the following services are installed and running:t
Microsoft Client for NetWare Networks
Microsoft IPX/SPX-compatible protocol (NetBIOS support must be enabled in the Properties_NetBIOS tab)
Microsoft NetBIOS support for IPX/SPX compatible protocol
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows 95/98
Click here
&Arial
1. Install the Notes Workstation for Windows 95/98 software.
2. Complete the Notes Workstation setup procedure and select NetBIOS as the network driver.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and Novell NetBIOS on Windows 95/98
Click here
&Arial
The following information describes the NetBIOS limitations for Domino servers and Notes clients.o
Notes RPCs are encapsulated within the NetBIOS data stream running over the lower transport of either NetBEUI, NetBIOS emulation over IPX or TCP/IP per the IETF RFC=001 & 1002 standards.
Note
Domino servers must use the same lower layer protocol as the Notes client or other Domino server systems to communication.
Depending on the lower transport and the operating system platform, you may encounter limitations on how many Notes sessions can be supported as a Domino server. The following table lists the operating system limitations per NIC using the NetBEUI protocol.
Operating system
Protocol
Notes session per NIC
Operating system and network operating system used with
IBM OS/2 Warp 4 and Warp server 4n
NetBIOS over IBM NetBEUI
IBM Warp 4, Warp Server 4
and LAN Server networks
Microsoft NT
NetBIOS over MS NetBEUI
Microsoft Windows NT
(3.51 and 4.0) peer networks
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Domino and NmtBIOS
Click here
&Arial
Yo} can do the following tasks from either Domino or Windows NT:
Click here
Register a new user
Click here
-- When you add users to Windows NT, you can register them in Domino as Domino users or Internet-only users. For Domino users, Domino creates a Person document, a mail file, and a user ID. For Internet-only users, Domino creates a Person document that contains an Internet password.
Click here
Delete a user or a g}oup
Click here
Click here
Rename a user in Domino and automatically rename the corresponding user account in Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Create a new group account in Windows NT and automatically create the same group in Domino
Click here
Click here
Add existing Windows NT groups to Domino and register each group member in Dommno
The following table lists the certified Domino servers and Notes workstatkons running on SPX:
OS platform
Notes workstation
Domino serveru
Windows 95
Supported
Not supported
Windows 98
Supported
Not supported
Windows NT
Supported
Supported
IBM AIX
Not supported
Supported
Solaris
Not supported
Supportedn
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For additional information about operating system, protocoks, or required patches, see the Release Notes.p
To use Domino with SPX, a NetWare file server must exist on the network. The NetWare server and a Domino system may be separated by a switch, bridge, or router and do not have to be on the same LAN. If Domino is separated, make sure that local routers are not filtering Novell Bindery or NDS broadcasts. The NetWare file server is required because workstations and servers connect to it to locate other Domino servers on the network.n
4398092829213008
Setting up Domino servers and Notes workstations for SPX
To set up Domino servers and Notes workstations for SPX, follow the procedures for your platform. Special implementation details appear under the following section headings:
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98
Klick here
Click here
Setting up Domino SPX on UNIX
Click here
After you complete the procedures in this chapter, you can set up an SPX port on your Domino server or Notes workstation.
See Also
Click here
SPXII support
Click here
Click here
NetWare services
Click here
Click here
Data security with Domino and SPX
Click here
Click here
IPX/SPX addresses and the SPX port driver
Click here
&Arial
The SPXII protocol supports windowing, large packets, and orderly release, which can provide increased performance over S[X.
Note
Not all platforms support SPXII.
SPXII provides the following features:
Backward compatibility with SPX
Protocol negotiation. If both endpoints support SPXII, then SPXII becomes the negotiated endpoint. If one endpoint only supports SPXII and the other supports SPX, then SPX becomes the negotiated protocol between endpointsn
These Domino servers and Notes workstations can run on SPXII:s
Windkws NT server using Microsoft's NWLink IPX/SPX stack
UNIX (AIX using ipx.case filesets; and Solaris (Intel and Sparc) using TotalNET Advanced Server), IBM AIX Connections, and Solaris PC Protocol Servicese
For information on network operating system requirements and release numbers, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
&Arial
Domino supports these NetWare IPX name resolver services:
Bindery Services
-- Network services use the Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) to update the NetWare servers network database, called the Bindery. Domino servers and Notes workstations use Bindery Services to look up a remote service and retrieve its network address. Domino servers use Bindery Services to advertise their services on the network. NetWare 3.x only offers Bindery Services. A Domino server uses a Bindery Service Object ID of 0x039B.
NetWare Directory Services (NDS)
-- Based kn X.500 directory service. Services can use NDS almost the same way they use Bindery. Domino servers and Notes workstations use NDS to look up a remote service and retrieve its network address. Domino servers use NDS to advertise their services on the network. The SPX port driver is the only port driver that supports NDS. To integrate Domino servers and Notes workstations with NDS, use the SPX port driver.
The SPX port driver can use Bindery Services and NDS. Domino servers use NDS to advertisk their services on the network. Notes workstations and Domino servers use NDS to look for these services on the network and to determine the Network Address for a given service.
The following Domino servers and Notes workstations can use NDS:
Windows 95 Novell NetWare workstation and server
Windows NT Novell NetWare workstation and server
Windows 98 Novell NetWare workstation
4448092829213008
Which NetWare name resklver service do I need?
Which type of NetWare name resolver service you choose depends on your network needs.
Bindery Services offers:
Departmental administration
Dynamic database
Decreased network throughput because of SAP/Broadcasts
Easy installation and administration
NetWare support
Third-party NetWare-compatible vendor support
NDS offers:
Enterprise-wide administration
Directory Services based on the X.500 model
Persistent database
More reliable access to the service
Increased network throughput since no SAP/Broadcasts are required
Increased complexity and administrationn
NetWare and IntraNetware support
Many other capabilities not available with Bindery Services
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
&Arial
To ensure data security, do not crkate mapped directory links to NetWare file servers for Domino servers. Links can cause:
Database corruption because of network failure -- If the network fails while the Domino server is writing to a database on the file server, the database can become corrupted.
Database corruption because of simultaneous access -- If the Domino server is using a database on the file server and another user accesses the database directly through a drive mapped to the file server (instead of througk the Domino server), the database becomes corrupted.
Security problems -- When "Encrypt network data" is enabled, all Domino server and Notes workstation traffic is encrypted. However, the file I/O between the Domino server and the file server is not encrypted.
Wrongful access -- Some administrators have direct access to a Domino file, bypassing the access control list (ACL).
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Clkck here
&Arial
The IPX/SPX protocol provides two types of sockets, Dynamic Sockets and Static or Well Known Sockets. Nkvell assigns Well Known Sockets to products for exclusive use by those products. Applications using Well Known Sockets always listen on the same socket number. Novell manages the registration of these sockets, allocating the Static range from 0x2000 - 0x3FFF. Dynamic Sockets are allocated from a range of 0x4000 - 0x7FFF. Applications using Dynamic Sockets use whichever socket number the IPX/SPX stack allocates during the registration of the service to the local NetWare server by the application. Using Dynakic Sockets usually ensures that the same socket number is not used twice.
Connections initiated by a Domino server or Notes workstation use a Dynamic Socket. For the Listener Socket, the SPX port driver uses a modified algorithm for allocating sockets, called Persistent Dynamic Sockets and always tries to use the same socket number. If the socket number is unavailable, the Domino server lets the IPX/SPX stack assign one. When a Domino server using SPX starts for the first time, it uses a Dynamkc Socket. This socket number is then saved.
Subsequent invocations of the Domino server use the socket number saved above. Therefore it is called a Persistent Dynamic Socket.
If for some reason this saved socket number is in use (when another application using Dynamic Sockets has allocated this socket), the Domino SPX server allocates a new socket number and saves it for future invocations. s
This approach gives many of the advantages of a Static or Well Known Socke{. Sites that want to control the socket number used by the Domino server may set a NOTES.INI variable NETWARESOCKET. Connections initiated by a workstation or server still use a Dynamic Socket. This variable is useful for sites that want to filter SPX packets by socket number. The NETWARESOCKET variable applies only to the Listener Socket. If the variable NETWARESOCKET is set in the NOTES.INI file and Domino cannot access the specified socket, then the Domino server will fail to start. This can happen when+the socket number the server normally uses is in use by another application.e
For example:
NETWARESOCKET=9135 which is the decimal value of 23AF
To help minimize the chance of this, assign the NOTES.INI variable NETWARESOCKET to the address of a Static Socket. Then, if no other application running on your system is using that Static or Well Known Socket number, the Domino server uses it.
See Also
Click here
NOTE[.INI settings for SPX and NDS
Click here
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
&Arial
Naking is different for a Bindery Services Network than for an NDS network.
4448092829213008
Names on a Bindery Service Network
Domino server names in NetWare Bindery Services use the Domino server common name. For example, the Domino server Notes name Chicago/Midwest/Acme becomes CHICAGO in the NetWare Bindery. NetWare Bindery names can contain up to 48 characters. Domino server Bindery names must be unique. The syntax for Domino server names, based on a combinatiok of Domino name rules and NetWare Bindery rules, is:s
Names larger than 48 characters in length are truncated. e
Only alphanumeric characters are allowed.
Multi-byte characters are converted to hex.t
Leading and trailing spaces are removed.
Spaces are condensed and converted to underscore.
Names are uppercase, because the Bindery is case sensitive.
The following characters are not allowed:s
/ slashh
\ backslash-
: colonF
; semicolonS
+ plus
, commas
* asterisk
? question mark
Note
When using Bindery emulation under NetWare 4.1 or later, there must be one Bindery context name for all of the systems to share that use Bindery Services for name resolving. Separate the Notes named networks based on the Bindery context name that the Notes workstations and Domini server share fo{ Bindery name resolving.i
4448092829213009
Names on an NDS networks
Domino server names in NDS use the NDS distinguished name format. The distinguished name format is the path from the root of the NDS Tree to the object, which in this case is the Domino server NDS object. If a Domino server name is Chicago/Midwest/Acme in the Sales group, then its NDS name will be CN=Chicago.OU=Marketing.O=Acme. Domino server NDS names must be unique. Using the NDS distinguished nkme guarantees this uniqueness if the servers common name was the same name.
For example, the Domino server CN=Chicago.OU=Sales.O=Acme is not the same Domino server as CN=Chicago.OU=Marketing.O=Acme. As long as you are using NDS services exclusively, there is no conflict. We recommend that the Domino common names be unique as well. As specified by NDS, common names (CN=) can contain up to 64 characters. Distinguished names can contain up to 256 characters and can include name types, periods, knd equal signs. The syntax rules for Domino server names are the same as the NDS syntax rules and include the following:
Alphanumeric characters
Case-insensitive names
No spaces
The following characters are not allowed:
/ slash
\ backslash
: colon
; semicolon
+ plus
, comma
* asterisk
? question mark
&Arial
To access port configuration options for SPX, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - SPX Options.
There are two options:
Automatic configuration
Advanced configuration
Note
If you are running SPX on a Domino server, you must select Advanced configuration.
If you select Automatic configuration, the Notes workstation automatically configures the SPX port with NetWare Services (Bindery, NDS). If only one service is available, the Notes workstation selects that service. If it detects that both Bindery and NDS ser{ices are available, it configures the SPX port for both.
If you select Advanced configuration, you must select one of these options:
NetWare Directory and Bindery Services --
If both NDS and Bindery Services are installed on a the system, the Notes workstation tries both methods, switching when one fails. The Notes workstation tries an NDS lookup first. If the NDS lookup fails, it then tries a Bindery lookup. Bindery Services uses the Service Advertising Protocol+(SAP).n
NetWare Directory Services --
This option is the NetWare 4.x method of resolving addresses and advertising services. Since NDS is a static database, services update the database only once. The information stored in the database is persistent. The implication is that a Domino server's NDS Object can always be found in the NDS Tree whether or not the server is currently running. This method takes up less network bandwidth than the Bindery Services method requires, which {ses SAP to do broadcasts.
Bindery Services --
This option is the NetWare 3.x method of resolving addresses and advertising services. Servers broadcast an advertisement every 60 seconds on the network. The Bindery is a dynamic database that maintains information about various services. Workstations query the Bindery to look up information such as a server's network address. The Bindery is a dynamic database; therefore, if a service does not update the Bindery within a few minute{, the Bindery detects the entries for that service.
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
wdK!pe
&Arial
To display SPX sta{us parameters, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - Show Status from a Notes workstation, or the Show Port command at the Domino server console. The type of information returned depends on the operating system of the server or workstation, and on the implementation of the IPX/SPX protocol stack. Not all of this information is available for all platforms.
SPX Port Driver
-- The type of port driver returning the status information.
SPX DO[ Shell version
-- The version of the NetWare DOS Requester in use.
NetWare Requester version
-- The version of the NetWare Requester in use.
Primary or default NetWare file server
-- The name of the NetWare file server attached to this system.
Notes Session ID
-- The Notes internal identifier for a given session.
Local Address Net: Node : Socket
-- The IPX/SPX address of the lockl system.
Remote Address Net:
Node: Socket
-- The IPX/SPX address of the remote system.
SPX Connection ID
-- The name that identifies a given SPX connection to the underlying IPX/SPX stack. r
SPXII Session
-- The presence of an SPXII session. The absence of this parameter does not imply that an SPXII session is not in use. It means that the underlying IPX/SPX stack does not supply this information {o Domino.
SPX Maximum Packet Size
-- The maximum size of an IPX/SPX packet that can be sent across the network.
Session State
-- The internal state of an SPX session. The possible states are:
Starting
-- The SPX session is initializing. A network connection has not been opened.
Established
-- The SPX session has been created. The session is connected to a remote system.
Listening
-- The SPX session on a Domino server used to accept an incoming connection. There is always one SPX session in the listening state waiting for remote connections.
Waiting
-- The SPX session is waiting for a network event to occur.
Terminating
-- The SPX session is shutting down and the network connection is going away.
Unknown
-- The SPX session is in an indeterminate state.
NetWare files in use
-- The NetWare files in use by the SPX port driver and their location.
File
-- The file name and directory path in use.
Version
-- The version of the NetWare files in use, as set by the NetWare vendor.
SPX version
-- The version of the IPX/SPX stack in use.
Maximum SPX sessions
-- The maximum number of SPX sessions available on this system for all applicatioks.
Available SPX sessions
-- The number of SPX sessions currently available on this system for all applications.
NetWare Bindery Services: Initialized
-- Indicates that NetWare Bindery Services have been initialized. The absence of this parameter indicates that the service was not started, possibly because the service was not enabled in the SPX port dialog box or the service was not configured correctly on the local system.
KetWare NDS Services: Initialized
-- Indicates that NDS has been initialized. Initialization means that the service is supported by this operating system, the necessary files to support NDS were found, and the service was started, for use by the SPX port driver. The absence of this parameter indicates that the service was not started, possibly because, the service was not enabled in the SPX port dialog box, the service was not configured correctly on the local system, or the service is unavailable kn the network.
NDS Fully Distinguished Name
-- For Domino servers that support only NDS, this field gives the NDS Name of this Domino server as specified in the Network Address field in the Domino Directory. In addition, it provides the location in the NDS Tree of the Domino server NDS object, also known as its Name Context. For example, NDS Name: CN=Chicago=Sales.O=Acme.t
NDS Default Context
-- Indicates the current NDS Default context. The NDS Dkfault context is set static, for example, in NET.CFG, and can be modified from the File Manager.
&Arial
Domino servers and Notes workstations support Novell's NDS wkth SPX.
4448092829213008
Minimum user and server login rights needed
When using NDS, a user login object needs a minimum of browse rights to the NDS tree. This enables you to browse the NDS Tree and read the Domino server attributes.
You must be a tRUSTEE of the Directory Tree Context Object to include these server login rights; BROWSE, CREATE, COMPARE, READ, and WRITE.
4448092829213009
Preferred Trees and Default Contkxts
Specifying Preferred Tree and Default Context parameters guarantees that you always use the same tree. If your site has more than one NDS tree, specifying a Default Context gives Domino a starting point within the tree to begin the search for a Domino server. This should decrease lookup times within your NDS tree.
The method you use to specify the Preferred Tree and Default Context depends on your operating system. If you are using Windows 95/98 or Windows NT, you specify the{e parameters through the Control Panel.
See Also
Click here
Using Domino server NDS objects
Click here
Click here
Using Novell 32-Bit NetWare Administrator tools for NDS
Click here
Click here
Setting up NDS for a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Setting up NDS for a Notes workstation
Click kere
&Arial
After you add the Domino server object class to the NDS Schema, you can use the Domino server NDS object using one of the NDS tools -- the Novell NetWare Administrator with the NetWare Administrator Snapin (NDSNOTES.DLL) or the Lotus NDS manager (NDSMgr) tool. The created object is not initialized until the object is initialized when you start the Domino server corresponding to this Domino server NDS object for the first time. The first NDS operation the SPX port driver does is to verify that thk NDS object is present. Once found, the Domino server initializes the NDS object. In this context, initialization means to update the object with the Domino server IPX/SPX address, and set the state of the object to "initialized." Once set to "initialized," other Notes workstations and Domino servers can access the Domino server by using its NDS object.
Domino NDS objects are persistent. When a Domino server is down, its corresponding NDS object is still present in the NDS tree. Notes workstktions and servers that use NDS and attempt to connect to an unavailable Domino server receive an error message informing them that the server is not responding.h
To view Domino server NDS object names in NDS, you can use various browsers. To examine the attributes of Domino server NDS objects, you must use the NetWare Administrator with Domino NetWare Administrator Snapin (NDSNOTES.DLL) or NDSMgr. Viewing the Domino server NDS object name in NDS does not require any special privileges. Using NktWare Administrator with the Domino NetWare Administrator Snapin (NDSNOTES.DLL), the Domino server is identifiable as having the Domino icon. Other viewers may display the Domino server with a "smiley face," which some NDS viewers use to display unknown objects.h
The Domino server NDS object is persistent and is updated only when one of the attributes in the table below change. For example, an attribute changes when you install a new NIC, causing the IPX address to change. In some cases you ma{ need to delete the Domino servers NDS object and recreate it so it can be re-initialized when the Domino server is restarted.i
4448092829213008
Domino server NDS object attributes
The following table contains attributes for a Domino server NDS object. These attributes are visible only if you use the NetWare Administrator with the Domino NetWare Administrator Snapin (NDSNOTES.DLL) or NDSMgr with sufficient privileges. Other users may be able to browse the NDS trek and see the Domino server NDS object name, but they cannot see its attributes. a
Attribute
Description
Server Name
NDS Name of Domino Server--for example, CN=Chicago.OU=Sales.O=Acme
Network Address
IPX Address Network Addr: Node Addr: Socket Num -- for example, IPX: 030000508: 00805F685BDA: 506f
Status
UNINITIALIZED or INITIALIZED. If UNINITIALIZED, the Domino server ha{ not updated this object. If INITIALIZED, the Domino server has updated the object with its Network Address. However, If you are using Windows 95/98 and Windows NT, the status attribute shows uNINITIALIZED.
Version
Notes build number -- for example, 143
Description
Optional comments about the object -- for example, the administrator name
and location
head title;Ckead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Novell NetWare Directory Services
Click here
Click here
Setting up NDS for a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Setting up NDS for a Notes workstation
Click here
Click here
Using Novell 32-Bit NetWkre Administrator tools for NDSe
Click here
act the database designer and explain which hotspot you clicked.
See Also
Click here
Putting views to work$
Click here
&Arial
Note
Before modifying the registry, make sure you can load the NetWare Administrator on the client. For more information, see the appropriate Novell documentation.
1. Copy the ND^NOTES.DLL to the directory where the NetWare Administrator resides on the Novell server.
2. Edit the registry on the client and add the NDSNOTES.DLL value as follows:
94938134429222912
For Windows NT client
1. From the client Start menu, choose Run and enter REGEDT32.EXE (WINNT\SYSTEM32\REGEDT32.EXE).
3. From the Edit drop-down menu, select Edit, then Value.
4. Type NDSNOTES.DLL in New Value #1 Box (renaming this to NDSNOTES.DLL).
5. Click the new entry NDSNOTES.DLL and type NDSNOTES.DLL in Value Data Box.
6. Verify NDSNOTES.DLL. "NDSNOTES.DLL" is added the list of Objects.
7. Relnad NWADMN95.EXE.
8. Check that the NDSNOTES.DLL has been properly installed, by the NetWare Administrator GUI, select OBJECT, then CREATE. The Domino Server Class Object should be included in the list. Any pre-existing Domino servers are displayed with the Notes icon.s
9. Use these menu selections in NetWare Administrator to manage a Domino server NDS object:
Task
Procedure
Create a Domino server NDS object class .
Choose Tools - Define Notes Class.
Delete Domino server NDS object class.
Choose Tools - Define Notes Class.
Add a Domino server NDS object class.
Choose Object - Crea~e.
Select Domino server object.
Enter the Domino server name.
Delete a Domino server NDS object.
Select the Domino server.
Choose Object - Delete.
Read a Domino server NDS object attributes.
Select the Domino server.
View a Domino server NDS object attributes.
Double-click the Domino server NDS object.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
To set up NDS for a Notes workstation, you must configure NDS within the NetWare Client and then configure the Notes workstation to use NDS.
4448092829213008
Configuring NDS for a Notes workstationt
1. Install a NetWare-compatible client that supports NDS and IPX/SPX.N
2. Make sure the.user login object has at least BROWSE access to the NDS tree.
3. Specify a Preferred Tree and Default Context. If you are using Windows NT or Windows 95, specify these settings in the control panel.
4. Login to the NDS tree.
4448092829213009
Configuring a Notes workstation to use NDS
1. Start the Notes workstation.
2. If you have not enabled the SPX port, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports. Select ^PX and select Port Enabled. The Notes workstation automatically enables NDS and Bindery Services.
3. If you use only NDS on all Domino servers in your organization, select SPX Options - Advanced configuration - NDS to disable Bindery Services lookup within Domino.
4. If you use only NDS and want to specify a backup Domino Directory to use if the user's home server is unavailable, edit the Location documents in each persons Personal Address Book and specify a Domino NDS seconda~y name server and NDS name server address
5. If you use only NDS, create a Connection document for the home server in each user's Personal Address Book. In the Destination server field, enter the NDS distinguished name for the home server.
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
Click here
Novell NetWare Directory Services
Click here
Click he~e
Port configuration options for SPX
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98
Click here
&Arial
To set up NDS for a Domino server, you must first configure NDS for the NetWare client or server and then configure the Domino server to use NDS. To add a class to an NDS schema or add a Domino server NDS object, you need NDS Administrator privileges.N
45>8092829213008
Configuring NDS for a Domino server
1. Install a NetWare-compatible client that supports NDS and IPX/SPX.
2. Make sure the user login object has TRUSTEE rights to the directory tree, which includes BROWSE, CREATE, COMPARE, READ, and WRITE.
3. Login to the NDS tree.
4. Do one of the following to create a Domino server NDS object class, and add the class to the NDS schema:
If you are using NetWare Administrator. choose Tools - Define Notes Class.
If you are using NDSMgr, enter this command:
ndsmgr -c Notes
Complete this step for each NDS tree.
5. Do one of the following to add the Domino server NDS objects to the NDS tree:
If you are using NetWare Administrator, choose Object - Create - Notes Server Object and enter the Domino server name. You can add information to the description if necessary.
If you are using NDSMgr, enter tnis command:
ndsmgr -a cn=
server_name
preferred_tree
Where
server_name
is the NDS name of the Domino server and
preferred_tree
is the preferred tree name.
Repeat this step to add all Domino server NDS objects to the NDS tree.
6. If you want the Domino server to login to NDS automatically when the server starts, create user login objects for the Domino server and make sure each user.login object has TRUSTEE rights and BROWSE, CREATE, COMPARE, READ, and WRITE access to the NDS directory tree context object.
For information on NetWare Administrator and NDSMgr, see "Using Novell 32-Bit NetWare Administrator tools for NDS " earlier in this chapter.
4508092829213009
Configuring a Domino server to use NDS
1. Specify a Preferred Tree and Default Context. If you are using OS/2 Advanced Warp Server, specify these settings in the NET.CFG.file. If you are using Windows NT or Windows 95, specify these settings in the Control Panel.
2. If you want the Domino server to log in to NDS automatically, edit the NOTES.INI file to include these settings:
NWNDSUSERID=cn=
server_name
tree_name
Where
server_name
is the NDS name of the Domino server and
tree_name
is the name of the tree.
NWNDSPASSWORD=
NDS_Service_Pass~ord
Where
NDS_Service_Password
is the password the Domino server uses to log into NDS.
3. If you have not enabled the SPX port, start the Notes workstation and choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports. Select SPX and select Port Enable. Domino automatically enables NDS and Bindery Services by default.
4. If you use only NDS on all Domino servers in your organization, select SPX Options, select NetWare Directory Services (NDS).only to disable Bindery Services lookup within Domino.
5. Open the Server document for this server in the Domino Directory add the NDS server name to the Network Address field in the Ports tab. Include the Domino server's NDS distinguished name.
6. Exit the Notes workstation.
See Also
Click here
Using Novell 32-Bit NetWare Administrator tools for NDS
Click here
Click here
^etting up Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98
Click here
Click here
NOTES.INI settings for SPX and NDS
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
This example is from a NOTES.INI file that specifies a Domino server NDS object name. The server name and password are configured so the Domino server automatically logs into NDS when the server starts._
[NOTES]
KitType=2
Directory=F:\NOTES\data
FileDlgDirectory=F:\NOTES\
NWNDSUSERID=CN=SPXPYTHON.O=ZOO
NWNDSPASSWORD=NOTES
&Arial
These settings do not appear in the NOTES.INI file automatically. Instead, the SPX port driver uses default values for each setting unless you edit the NOTES.INI file.
These settings affect Domino servers that run on a network that uses SPX and NDS:e
NetWareSockete
-- Defines the socket number that the Domino server uses when listening for connections. The default is that Domino lets the IPX/SPX protocol stack choose the socket number. S~ecifying the socket number overrides the Domino internal algorithms to determine the Listen Socket.
If the specified socket is already in use, the
Domino server does not start. You can fix this problem by closing the application that is using the same socket as Domino, or re-assigning a new socket to the Domino server. To avoid this, you can assign an IPX WellKnown/Static Socket to Domino to make sure this socket is not in use on this system by other SPX applications. The ~ocket range for IPX WellKnown/Static sockets is 0x2000 - 0x3FFF. If a site does not care which IPX/SPX socket is used, there is no need to specify a NetWareSocket variable.f
To verify the actual IPX/SPX socket in use by the server, issue a "SHOW PORT spx_port_driver_name" and check the socket of the session that has a status of listening. Another method to verify the actual socket used by the SPX port driver is to check the following in the NOTES.INI:o
NetWareSpxSettings=0,0,0.0,0,3,17393 where 17393 is the value of the Domino SPX socket in decimal.
NWNDSUserID
-- Defines NDS Service/UserID, that Domino uses to log into the NDS tree. The ID is stored in the server's NOTES.INI file. The default is no NDS Service/User ID, which means an administrator needs to login to the NDS tree before starting the Domino server.
NWNDSPassword
-- Defines the NDS Service Password, that Domino uses to login to the NDS tree. The password i~ stored in the server's NOTES.INI. The default is no NDS Service Password, which means an administrator needs to login to the NDS tree before starting the Domino server.
See Also
Click here
Novell NetWare Directory Services
Click here
&Arial
When the SPX port is enabled, the Domino server for Windows NT automatically detects which NetWare services are installed.
You can run the Notes workstation for Windows NT on SPX without performing any additional SPX or NT configuration. All you need to do is enable the port.
For the Domino snrver, you must configure SPX using the NetWare services used by a server.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NTn
Click here
&Arial
1. Start the Notes workstation program on the Windows NT server or workstation.e
2. Enable the network port for SPX on the Domino server or Notes workstation if this has not already been done.
3. Restart the Domino server or Notes workstation.
Depending on which protocol stack you ha~e installed, perform one of the following additional configurations:
4558092829213008
NetWare Client Services
1. In the Control Panel, select Novell NetWare Client Services.
2. Select Configure.
3. (Optional) Enter the NDS NameContext that matches the group/organization's context.
4. (Optional) Enter or select the name of the NDS PreferredTree.
5. (Optional) Enter the name of the PreferredServer, whinh the Notes Bindery Servers use.
Note
Step 4 is important for setting up the IPX/SPX stack for use by a Domino server.
4558092829213009
IPX/SPX stack options
1. In the Control Panel, select Novell NetWare IPX/SPX Transport.
2. Select Configure.
3. Set Number of SPX Connections equal to the Maximum Number of SPX connections supported by this system. The default is 48.
^ee Also
Click here
Running Domino and SPX on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
The Notes workstation supports two SPX protocol stacks on the Windows 95/98 platform:
Microsoft NwLink IPX/SPX protocol with Bindery Services support
Novell Requester IPX/SPX protocol with Bindery Services and NDS Services support
When you use the above protocol stacks, make sure the following services are.installed and running:
Microsoft NwLink Windows 95/98
-- Microsoft IPX/SPX compatible stack
-- Microsoft NetWare Client Services
Novell Requester for Windows 95/98
-- Novell NetWare Client Services
-- Novell NetWare IPX/SPX Transport
Windows 95/98 supports SPX with Winsock (WSOCK32.DLL), which comes with the operating system. The Notes SPX port driver uses WSOCK32.DLL for IPX/SPX.
The Novell Reque~ter for NetWare/NDS Services uses these DLLs:
CALLWIN32.DLL
NETWIN32.DLL
LOCWIN32.DLL
For information on network operating system requirements, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Novell NetWare Directory Services
Click here
&Arial
1. Start the Notes workstation program on Windows 95/98.
2. Enable the network port for SPX on the Notes workstation if this has not already been done.
3. Res~art the Notes workstation.
4. Depending on which protocol stack, perform one of the procedures described below:
4558092829213008
Microsoft NwLink
Note
Complete Steps 3 and 4 if you are setting up the IPX/SPX stack for a Domino server.
1. In the Control Panel, select IPX/SPX-compatible Protocol Properties.
2. Highlight Frame Type in the Property dialog box and select a value for it.
3. In the Control Panel, select Client for NetWare Networks Properties.
4. (Optional) Enter or select a Preferred server name.
4558092829213009
Novell NetWare
Note
Complete Steps 3 and 4 if you are setting up the IPX/SPX stack for a Domino server.
1. In the Control Panel, select IPX/SPX-compatible Protocol Properties.
2. Highlight Frame Type in the Property dialog box and select n value for it.
3. Highlight Maximum Connections in the Property dialog box and select a value for it.
4. Highlight Maximum Sockets in the Property dialog box and select a value for it.
5. In the Control Panel, select Client for NetWare Networks Properties.
6. (Optional) Enter or select a Preferred server name.
7. (For NDS only) Enter or select a Preferred Tree name and then enter or select a Default Context name.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98
Click here
&Arial
Domino servers for Sun SPARC and Solaris Intel Edition, and IBM AIX support the SPX protocol.
The Domino server for UNIX on Sun SPARC and Solaris Intel Edition is certified to run on TotalNET Access Server.
The Domino server and Notes workstation for UNIX on IBM AIX 4.3.1 is certified to run using the stack provided by the ipx.base file sets.
Because UNIX supports only Binde~y Services, you do not use the Port Setup dialog box.
For more information on SPX and UNIX for Solaris, see the vendor's documentation.
For information on specific network operating system requirements, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and SPX on UNIX
Click here
&Arnal
4558092829213008
Solaris
To set up Domino.to run with SPX on Sun SPARC and Solaris Intel Edition:
1. Install PC Protocol Services from Sun Microsystems on the Solaris Intel Edition system. This product is not included with Domino for Solaris or Solaris Intel Edition software. You must order it separately.
2. Follow the installation procedure provided with PC Protocol Services. In this procedure, you mount a disk containing the PC Protocol Services software and run an install program. The install program reconfigures tne kernel and requires that you reboot the system. After you reboot the system, the daemon processes that run IPX/SPX start automatically, and IPX/SPX runs.
3. Change default configuration settings:8
Use the /opt/SUNWipx/bin/ipxd utility as root to stop IPX/SPX.
Set Ethernet type to the appropriate frame type -- for example, Ethernet 802.3.
Edit the file /etc/opt/SUNWipx/ipxtab and change the Network Number to an appropriate number, for example, 0x0.
Use the /opt/SUNWipx/bin/ipxd utility as root to restart IPX/SPX.
For detailed information on administering and configuring NetWare on Solaris, see the vendor's documentation.e
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and SPX on UNIX
Click here
&Arial
The following information describes the IPX/SPX limitations for Domino servers and Notes clients.
There must be a NetWare or IntraNetWare server local to the Domino server. Pseudo servers such as Windows NT NW Gateway do not offer real Bindery or NDS services. It should not be nore than one hop away via a switch, bridge, or router on the LAN when Bindery services are used with the Domino server. Ideally, this should be the case for the Notes client systems as well when they are using Bindery services and required when WAN links are present between the Domino server and the Notes clients systems.
The IPX protocol stack services (Novell or Microsoft) on the Domino server or Notes client system must point to the local NetWare server "Preferred Server" and/or "Preferred ^ree." Other Domino servers or Notes clients do not need to access the same local NetWare server for its preferred server or tree.
The Domino server can access only one interface offering the IPX protocol as well as only one instance of the SPX port driver. Make sure you have not bound the IPX protocol to more than one NIC as well as one frame type on the system that the Domino server software is expected to run on.
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
&Arial
You can install the Domino server as a counter within the Windows NT Performance Monitor. The Performance Monitor lists all numerical Domino server statistics, including those generated by add-in programs. You can choose specific statistics to appear in a report or a chart for analysis. You can also use the Performance Monitor to view the statistics of a remote server.
For complete information on usnng the Performance Monitor, see the Windows NT documentation.
To install Domino as a Performance Monitor counter
1. If you installed the Domino server without selecting the option to install Performance Monitor, complete the following steps:
Run the Install program again and click the Customize button.
Make sure that the install paths are the same as for the original server install.
Deselect all install options excep~ for "Notes Performance Monitor." This allows you to install only Performance Monitor.
After the Install program completes, restart the server.
2. Type the following command from the program directory on the server:
notesreg.bat directory
where directory is the full path to the program directory.
For example, type the following:
notesreg.bat C:\notes
Note
If the server or an add-in.program running on the server terminates, you must stop the Performance Monitor before restarting the server or add-in program.
If you are using the Performance Monitor to view statistics on a remote server and the remote server or add-in program terminates, you must stop the Performance Monitor and restart the remote server.
To view Domino using the Performance Monitor
1. Start the Performance Monitor by clicking the Performance Monitor icon or by ty~ing the following command at the system prompt:
start perfmon
2. Choose Edit - Add To Chart or Edit - Add to Report.
3. In the Object box, select Lotus Domino.
4. In the Instances box, select a Domino statistic you want to include in a chart or report, then click Add. Repeat for each statistic you want to add.
Note
Domino statistics do not appear as instances in the Performance Monitor until Domino or an.add-in program assigns or updates a statistic. To force this to happen, initialize statistics on the server -- for example, by typing Show Stat at the server console.
To view Domino error messages in the NT Performance Monitor
To see any error messages related to generating Domino statistics within the Performance Monitor, look for notestat messages in the Application Log of the Event Viewer.
To remove the Domino statistic counter from the Performance Monitor
To remove the Domino statistic counter from the Performance Monitor, type this command at the NT command prompt:
unlodctr notestat
$BackgroundR5
$INFO
$WINDOWTITLE
$$ScriptName
$BODY
2cP0<
Using Domino server NDS objectsNetwork Configuration
NDS\server objectsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SUPPORT_OF_NDSTopic1Using Domino server NDS objectsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_ABOUT_NOTES_SUPPORT_OF_NDS_MIDTOPIK_4448092829213008=Domino server NDS object attributes02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuring the Domino Sna{in Registry valuesNetwork Configuration
Snapin Registry values\configuringContentsStepsH_CONFIGURING_DOMINO_SNAPIN_STEPSTopic1Configuring the Domino Snapin Registry valuesStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_CONFIGURING_DOMINO_SNAPIN_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_94938134429222912=For Windows NT clientH_CONFIGURING_DOMINO_SNAPIN_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_94938134429222913=For Windows 95/98 client02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up NDS for a Notes workstationNetwork Configuration
NDS\Notes workstations andNotes workstations\configuring for NDSContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_WORKSTATIONTopic1Settink up NDS for a Notes workstationAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_WORKSTATION_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213008=Configuring NDS for a Notes workstationH_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_WORKSTATION_MIDTOPIC_4448092829213009=Configuring a Notes workstation to use NDS02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up NDS for a Domino serverNetwork Configuration
NDS\Domino server andServers\configuring for NDSContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_SERVERTopic1Setting up NDS for a Domino serverAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_4508092829213008=Configu{ing NDS for a Domino serverH_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_4508092829213009=Configuring a Domino server to use NDS02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example: Setting up NDS for a Domino serverNetwork Configuration
NDS\NOTES.INI settingServer documents\creating for NDSContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE:_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_SERVERTopic1Example: Setting up NDS for a Domino serverExamplesH_SETTING_UP_NDS_FOR_A_NOTES_SERVER02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
NOTES.INI settings for SPX and NDSNetwork Configuration
NDS\NOTES.INI settingNetWare socket\describedSPX\NOTES.INI settingContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES.INI_SETTINGS_FOR_NETWARE_SPXTopic1NOTES.INI settings for SPX and NDSAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Confikuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino and SPX on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
NetWare service{\Windows NT andWindows NT\NetWare servicesContentsOverviewH_RUNNING_DOMINO_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_NT_OVERTopic1Running Domino and SPX on Windows NTOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
NetWare services\Windows NT andSPX\Windows NT andWindows NT\NetWare servicesWindows NT\SPX andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows NTStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
Running Dokino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98Network Configuration
SPX\Windows andWindows\SPX andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_95Topic1Running Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98Network Configuration
SPX\Windows andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_95Topic1Setting up Domino and SPX on Windows 95 and 98StepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_95_MIDTOPIC_4558092829213008=Microsoft NwLinkH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_WINDOWS_95[MIDTOPIC_4558092829213009=Novell NetWare02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
PURSAFO
Running Domino and SPX on UNIXNetwork Configuration
SPX\UNIX andUNIX\SPX andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_UNIXTopic1Running Domino and SPX on UNIXAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Sunning Domino on SPX
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and SPX on UNIXNetwork Configuration
SPX\setting up Domino on SolarisSun Socaris. See SolarisContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_UNIXTopic1Setting up Domino and SPX on UNIXStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
H_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_SPX_ON_UNIX_MIDTOPIC_4558092829213008=Solaris02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Prerequisites for the Domino network using IPX/SPXNetwork Configuration
.AContentsOverviewH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_IPX_SPX_OVERTopic1Prerequisites for the Domino network using IPX/SPXOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix A Network Prerequisites
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Domino and TCP/IPNetwork Configuration
Ports\TCPTCP/IP\Domino andTCP/IP\driversTCP/IP\platformsTCP/IP\port numberTCP/IP\secondary name server andTCP/IP\securityContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IPTopic1Comino and TCP/IPAboutH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296254633629213010=TCP/IP driversH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213011=TCP ports used by DominoH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213012=Communication between different Domino TCP/IP platformsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213013=Data securityH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213014=Secondary name serverH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213015=Seccndary name server during setup02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up multiple TCP/IP portsNetwork Configuration
TCP/IP\portsContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_MULTIPLE_TCP/IP_PORTSTopic1Setting up multiple TCP/IP portsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP
H_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_MULTIPLE_TCP/IP_PORTS_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213010=Connecting to the server with multiple ports configured02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
TCP/IP connections address resolution and configurationsNetwork Configuration
IP names\address resolution and configurationsServer names\TCP/IP andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_TCP/IP_CONNECTIONS_ADDRESS_RESOLUTION_AND_CONFIGURATIONSTcpic1TCP/IP connections address resolution and configurationsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP
H_ABOUT_TCP/IP_CONNECTIONS_ADDRESS_RESOLUTION_AND_CONFIGURATIONS_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213010=Creating server namesH_ABOUT_TCP/IP_CONNECTIONS_ADDRESS_RESOLUTION_AND_CONFIGURATIONS_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213012=Recommended name resolution options02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server Network Configuration
OS/2 Warp\TCP/IP requirementsTCP/IP\OS/2 Warp andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_OS/2Topic1Running Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp Servcr AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Sarp ServerNetwork Configuration
OS/2 Warp\TCP/IP installationTCP/IP\OS/2 Warp andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_OS/2Topic1Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp ServerStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NTNetwork Configuration
TCP/IP\Windows NT andWindows NT\TCP/IP andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Running Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NTAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=Dasid Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NT, Windows 98, and Windows 95Network Configuration
TCP/IP\Windows NT andWindows NT\TCP/IP andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_WINDOWS_NTTopic1Setting up Domino and TCP IP on Windows NT, Windows 98, and Windows 95StepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ng) As Note
Ru`ning Notes workstations and TCP/IP for the MacintoshNetwork Configuration
Macintosh\TCP/IP andTCP/IP\Macintosh andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_WORKSTATIONS_AND_MACTCPTopic1Running Notes workstations and TCP/IP for the MacintoshAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
rver. Tr
Setting up a Notes workstation and Macintosh Network Configuration
Macintosh\TCP/IP andTCP/IP\Macintosh andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_MACTCPTopic1Setting up a Notes workstation and Macintosh StepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
0Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Me.m
Running Domino and TCP/IP on UNIXNetwork Configuration
TCP/IP\UNIX andUNIX\TCP/IP andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_RUNNING_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_UNIPTopic1Running Domino and TCP/IP on UNIXAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
= dbInfo
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on UNIXNetwork Configuration
TCP/IP\UNIX andUNIX\TCP/IP andContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_UNIXTopic1Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on UNIXStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
es= B
Example: Sample port status for TCP/IPNetwork Configuration
Examples\TCP/IPPort status\TCP/IPTCP/IP\port statusContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLES:_SAMPLE_PORT_STATUS_FOR_TCP/IPTopic1Example: Sample port status for TCP/IPExamplesH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP_ON_UNIX02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
Print
CN=David Mahar OU=CAM/O=Lotus
pment Envir
Prerequisites for the Domino network using TCP/IPNetwork Configuration
TCP/IP\requirementsTCP/IP\satellite supportContentsOverviewH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_PSING_TCP_IP_OVERTopic1Prerequisites for the Domino network using TCP/IPOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP
H_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_TCP_IP_OVER_MIDTOPIC_31908240029234351=TCP/IP multi-homingH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_TCP_IP_OVER_MIDTOPIC_31908240029234352=V4 and V6 IP addressingH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_TCP_IP_OVER_MIDTOPIC_31908240029234353=LMHosts and WINSH_PREREQUISITES_FOR_THE_DOMINO_NETWORK_USING_TCP_IP_OVER_MIDTOPIC_31908240029234354=Sate`lite links02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix A Network Prerequisites
.AContentsOperviewH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVERTopic1Troubleshooting network problemsOverviewH_NETWORK_CONFIGURATION_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Preparing to call Lotus Customer Support Network Configuration
Customer Support\contactingTroubleshooting\Customer Support andContentsAboutH_WHAT_INFORMATION_SHOULD_I_COLLECT_BEFORE_CALLING_LOTUS_CUSTOMER_SUPPORT_FOR_HELP_TROUBLESHOOTING_A_NETWORK_PROBLEMTopic1Preparing to call Lotus Customer Support AboutH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ue("Matc
Determining which ports aren't workingNetwork Configuration
Ports\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\portsContentsAboutH_HOW_DO_I_DETERMINE_W@ICH_PROTOCOLS/PORTS_ARE_NOT_WORKING_Topic1Determining which ports aren't workingAboutH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
= "[titcount) & "*"
Next
strQuery = |(| & Lcase(strImplode(copySearchWords, |) and (|)) & |)|
Set view = db.getView( "ByReplicaID")
If Not view Is Nothing Then
view.ftSearch strQuery, 0
dbl`st.addView view
Else
strQuery = strQuery & | and !([DBListInCatalog] = 0)|
UNIX (HP-UX, Solaris, Solaris Intel Edition, AIX) server
The Notes workstations run on TCP/IP:
Macintosh workstation (Open Transport TCP/IP)
Windows NT workstation
Windows 98 workstation
Windows 95 workstation
Note
Lotus does not certify Domino running ovar the NBT protocol (NetBIOS emulated over TCP). However, Lotus supports customers who use this configuration.
For additional information on operating systems, including required patches, see the Release Notes.
296254633629213010
TCP/IP drivers
TCP/IP drivers are installed in the Notes program directory during Domino installation. When you select a network port during the Domino server or Notes workstation setup procedure or add a port later, select QCP/IP as the network choice, and Domino uses the appropriate network driver to configure the port.
The TCP/IP network driver can coexist on a Domino server or Notes workstation with any other supported network driver.
296314633629213011
TCP ports used by Domino
By default, Domino servers use the TCP port 1352 when listening for Notes workstation connections. This port number was assigned to Lotus by the Internet Assigned Number Authority, so it is qnlikely that it conflicts with other applications on the network. Notes workstations use dynamic port numbers that the TCP/IP network software chooses from a range of numbers that are available for this purpose. A workstation that connects to a Domino server connects to server port 1352.
To use a different port number for servers, configure the TCP/IP service "lotusnotes" in the manner appropriate to the network. This is generally done by adding a line to a file named "services," which is usually located in a directory called \etc. The line should resemble the following:
Lotusnotes
portnumber
/tcp # LotusNotes
Where
portnumber
is the port of your choice. Be sure to edit this file on every Notes workstation and Domino server that is communicating.
296314633629213012
Communication between different Domino TCP/IP platforms
Because the information that Domino sends over TCP/IP is platform-independant, any Notes workstation can communicate with any Domino server over TCP/IP, as long as they both use TCP/IP.
296314633629213013
Data security
To ensure data security, configure all TCP/IP Domino servers to reject TELNET and FTP connections and do not include TCP/IP Domino servers in the Network File System (NFS). Using these services requires that you properly maintain the TCP/IP password file to guarantee a secure environment on the system. With NFS running an a non-secure environment, it is possible to breach security by accessing the files through the NFS system instead of through the Domino server.
296314633629213014
Secondary name server
For Notes workstations, the TCP/IP secondary name server is used when one of these three conditions occurs:
The workstation user's mail server is down.
The workstation user's home server is not running TCP/IP.
The workstation user's home qerver cannot be resolved over TCP/IP.
Domino uses the secondary name server to build a list of servers and their addresses for a Notes workstation to access when it needs to find a Domino server. You specify the TCP/IP secondary name server address in the Location document under the Advanced-Secondary Servers tab. These fields specify the server name and IP address.
To view this setting, choose File - Mobile - Locations and open the location for which you want to change this TCP/IQ setting. Under the Advanced - Secondary Servers tab, you see these two fields:
Secondary TCP/IP Notes server name
Secondary TCP/IP host name or address
Note
The Advanced tab appears only if you have a location defined as Local Area Network or Both Dialup and Local Area Network.
Secondary TCP/IP Domino Server Name
- You may enter one of the following:
The common name of the Domino server -- Noteqserver1
The hierarchical name -- Notesserver1/Acmecorp1
Secondary TCP/IP Host Name or Address
- You may enter one of the following:
IP address 197.114.33.22
The fully qualified domain name -- notesserver1.acmecorp1.com
The host name -- Notesserver1
If you specify only the host name in this field, you must use Domain Name Service (DNS) or local host files. When you specify the IP address in this field, Domino rasolves the host's IP address without having to perform a DNS or host file lookup. You can specify a different secondary name server for each LAN location defined.M
296314633629213015
Secondary name server during setup
During setup on either a Domino server or Notes workstation, if the server you are trying to connect to is not able to be resolved using TCP/IP, a dialog box appears allowing you to enter a Server Name and IP address using the same rules as described!above. Although the dialog box indicates that you should enter a secondary name server, you can enter the TCP/IP Domino name server and address for your mail server instead of the secondary name server and address. Domino stores these values in a location document in the Personal Address Book.
See Also
Click here
TCP/IP Connection attempt timeout
Click here
Click here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Click here
Click here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on UNIX
Click here
Click here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure that the TCP/IP networking software is configured properly and that each installed network interface card has a separate IP address that you can "ping."P
2. If you have installed TCP/IP as the network driver, the first port should already be configured. If it is not, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences!- Ports. Select TCPIP and enable the port by checking the box beside "Port Enabled."
3. To add a new port choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - New. In the New Port dialog box, enter TCPIP2, select TCP for the driver, select the appropriate location, and click OK to exit verifying that the port was created. Continue to add more ports as necessary.
4. Edit the NOTES.INI file. The port line created from Steps 1 and 2 should be represented by the following:
portname=
drivername
,0,15,0,,12288
TCP=TCP,0,15,0,,12288
TCP2=TCP,0,15,0,,12288
5. Add a line for each port defined above, stating its IP address and port number as represented by the following:
PORTNAME_TcpIpAddress=0
,IP Address:port number
Where PORTNAME is the port name you defined
The port number can be any number, higher than 5000. The default is 1352.
For example, given ports TCP and TCP2, the folaowing lines should be added:
TCP_TcpIpAddress=0,198.115.100.13:1352
TCP2_TcpIpAddress=0,198.114.100.12:1352
296314633629213010
Connecting to the server with multiple ports configured
1. From a workstation:
Add a connection record in the Personal Address Book for the Domino server with multiple cards.
Type the server name and IP address in the network field.
2. From a server:
Add a connectian record in the Domino Directory.
Enter the server name and IP address in the Network field.
Edit the Server document. Add and enable the new port, specifying the same name given to the new port.
To set up a Damino server running TCP/IP, you can either name the server using its host IP name allowing DNS name resolution or modify the Optional network address field in Server and Connection documents allowing the Domino server and the Notes workstation to determine the network address of the destination server.
When establishing a connection from a workstation, users must specify at least the entire common name. For example, if you try to open a database on a server named marketing.lotus.com, you must anter the entire common name -- marketing.lotus.
The Server and Connection documents contain a network address field. The address must be in one of the following formats:
IP address format: 193.94.222.65
The fully qualified TCP/IP domain name format: "DominoServerOne.acmecorp1.com"
The host name format: "DominoServerOne"
Note
The host name format is not recommended when more than one DNS domain is configured in a!network and the TCP/IP stack is unable to query multiple DNS domains.
Tipr
Use logical Domino networks instead of one large network.
296314633629213012
Recommended name resolution options
Name/rename each server with its host IP namea
-- The advantage is that users in other Domino networks and domains can access the server quickly without needing to know the server's fully qualified domain name. The disadvantage is that you must rename Domino servers, which can be time consuming.
Use only one DNS domain
-- The advantage is that TCP/IP name resolution succeeds, making connections easier within the network. The disadvantage is that it forces centralized network administration.
Use only one Domino named network
-- The advantage is that Server documents in the Domino Directory make it easier to administer the Domino server. The disadvantage is that qhe Domino server list displays both local and remote servers. Remote server utilization may be expensive.
Use host files on every system for name resolution instead of a DNSi
-- The advantage is that TCP/IP name resolution succeeds if you keep the host file up to date. The disadvantage is the manual reconfiguring of the Domino system each time an addition, deletion, or change is needed to the TCP/IP network.
Modify the DNS Resolver on every system to query!all of the other DNS domains
-- The advantage is that TCP/IP name resolution succeeds, assuming resolver configuration is correct. The disadvantage is that you must manually reconfigure the system each time the DNS environment changes. Additionally, the TCP/IP stack may not have the ability to query multiple domains.
Use Location documents in the Personal Address Book --
Create multiple locations defining mail servers and secondary name servers.
Qse LAN documents in the Personal Address Book and in the Domino Directory
-- Create LAN Connection documents defining the network address.
See Also
Click here
Domino and TCP/IPa
Click here
&Arial
Domino supports TCP/IP for Domino servers using OS/2 Advanced Warp Server. The following are TCP/IP-specific system requirements:
Ethernet or Token Ring network interface card and device driver software
OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
IBM QCP/IP
For information on network operating system requirements and operating system release numbers, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Click here
&Arial
1. Install the TCP/IP software.\
2. If you use DNS or a local hosts file, ping the Domino servers by host name. This determines if you can resolve qhe common name of the Domino server. If this fails the TCP/IP software is not configured properly.
3. Install a Domino server for OS/2 Advanced Warp Server.
4. Run one of these setup programs:
Domino server setup program. Select "Quick and Easy" or "Advanced Configuration," if required.
Workstation Setup. Choose how you want to access the server and click OK. In the "Network type" field select TCP/IP.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Click here
&Arial
Windows NT provides built-in network support that makes the Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT compatible with the TCP/IP network. If you already enabled the TCP/IP protocol in Windows NT, you can run the Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT on TCP/IP without performing any additional TCP/IP or NT configuration. All you need to do is enable the TCP/IP port in Domino. The following are Wiadows-specific system requirements:_
Ethernet or Token Ring network interface card (NIC) and device driver software
Windows NT
Support for use of TCP/IP with Microsoft DUN/RAS is available for Domino servers and Notes workstations using the remote LAN capability.
For information on system requirements and release numbers for Domino servers and Notes workstations, see the Release Notes.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NT, Windows 98, and Windows 95
Click here
Click here
Using remote connections
Click here
&Arial
1. Install the TCP/IP software.
2. If you use DNS or a local hosts file, ping the Domino servers by host name. This determines if you can resolve the common name of the Domino server. If this fails the TCP/AP software is not configured properly.
3. Install a Domino server or Notes workstation for Windows NT, Windows 98, or Windows 95.
4. Run one of these setup programs:
Domino server setup program. Select "Quick and Easy" or "Advanced Configuration," as required. d
Workstation Setup. Choose how you want to access the server and click OK. In the "Network type" field select TCP/IP.
See Also
Clack here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
The following are Macintosh-specific system requirements:
MacTCP network software from Apple Computer, Inc., or TCP/IP.
For network operating system requirements, see the Release Notes.
Macintosh PowerPC workstations can also be configured to use Apple Remote Access (ARA) or Open Transport PPP to connect to remote servers on LANs.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a!Notes workstation and Macintosh
Click here
Click here
Using remote connections
Click here
&Arial
1. Install the TCP/IP software on a Macintosh computer.
2. Install a Notes workstation for Macintosh and enable a port for TCP/IP if necessary.
3. Test the TCP/IP installation making sure that it is complete and that it is working successfully.
4. Set up the Notes workstation for Macintosh. Select TCQ/IP in the "Network type" field.
Note
When you set up a Macintosh workstation, if the home server is on a network that runs a protocol other than TCP/IP, select the network protocol of the home server in the Network type field. After the workstation is running, enable the TCP/IP port.
See Also
Click here
Running Notes workstations and TCP/IP for the Macintosh
Click here
&Arial
Domino servers for HP-UX, Sun SPARC Solaris, Solaris Intel Edition, IBM AIX support the TCP/IP protocol. Because the TCP/IP protocol is builq into the UNIX operating system, you do not need any additional network software. If you use DNS or a local host file, ping the Domino servers by IP address and by host name.
For more information on system requirements and operating system release numbers for Domino servers for UNIX, see the Release Notesn
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino and TCP/IP on UNIX
Click here
&Arial
1. Install a Domino server for UNIX.
2. Run the of the Domino server setup program. Select "Quick and Easy" or "Advanced Configuration" if qequired.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino and TCP/IP on UNIX
Click here
&Arial
The port status information for a TCP/IP port resembles the following:
Transport Provider: TCP
Notes Session Local Address Foreign Address
00E60001 198.114.87.178.1026 198.114.91.27.1352
00E80002 198.114.87.178.1029 130.103.40.254.1352
00E80004 198.114.87.178.1062 130.103.42.152.1352
00E80005 198.114.87.178.1065 198.114.91.29.1352
&Arial
The following information describes the TCP/IP limitations for Domino servers and Notes clients.
31908240029234351n
TCP/IP multi-homing
The Domino sarver can access one or more NICs supporting the TCP/IP protocol. This is useful for the following configurations:
Splitting the client load for better performance
Splitting client to server access from server to server communication
Setting up mail routing, replication and/or cluster replication on an alternate path (private network)
Allowing access to the Domino server via a TCP/IP firewall system over a different network segment (DMZ)
Whan using the Domino server as a Notes RPC firewall (application firewall)
Network/Server fail over, used in mission critical nonstop resource access
To setup alternate Window/MTU settings for satellite Uplink/Down link connections isolated from local access connections.
It is also possible to assign more than one IP address per NIC interface. This is useful for the following configurations:
Isolating local versus WAN Notes named networks so local users can only see local Domino servers.
Prevent independent remote access dialup connections (ISDN Dial up router) from being arbitrarily accessed
When setting up redundant WAN path connections for server to server access
When the use of a different TCP/IP port map is needed for firewall connections
When offering HTTP services to different group than Notes RPC connections
As a service provider offering Domino Server access for either Notes or Web alients to different groups/companies
Both methods can be used in conjunction with partitioned Domino server configurations as well.
31908240029234352
V4 and V6 IP addressing
Both Notes clients and Domino servers support native IP V4 and V6 numeric addressing in server connection documents in the optional address field. For ease of management, Lotus strongly recommends using Host names or fully qualified domain naming (FQDN) of the system in both Seqver documents and Connection documents whenever possible to limit the amount of work when a server's IP address or location in the IP domain structure changes.
31908240029234353
LMHosts and WINS
Within Microsoft networking services there are two additional methods of IP address resolution: NetBIOS over IP, LAN Manager Hosts (LMHosts), which is a static host file method, or Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), which uses NetBIOS broadcasts and is dynamic, unlike ANS which is static in nature. Both these methods are not as reliable as traditional DNS and host files and can cause name/address confusion. Lotus recommends not using them for resolving when using the Domino network natively with TCP/IP. If you are using NetBIOS over IP and using the Domino network with the NetBIOS port driver, you should not use it in conjunction with the native TCP/IP port driver. l
Note
Not all client systems may have access to the WINS server as their TCP/IP stacks may not be able to access it like MAC OS, OS/2 Advanced Warp Server, or UNIX systems in general.
31908240029234354D
Satellite links
TCP/IP is the only protocol supported for satellite links and recommended only for server-to-server connections. Low orbit satellite links offer less latency which can allow limited Notes client usage using replication or simple viewing and allow access using a Web browser of the Domino servers data via HTTP. Qhen using geosynchronous, mid or low orbit satellite links with TCP/IP protocol, it is strongly recommended to manually limit the TCP window size and the MTU size to smaller sizes so that data movement is less bursty. This is important when creating large databases via replication. This may require adding a second NIC to the Domino servers.
See Also
Click here
Domino and TCP/IP
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot network problems:
Click here
Preparing to call Lotus Customer Support
Click here
Click here
Determaning which ports aren't working
Click here
Click here
Determining why multiple protocols won't run properly
Click here
Click here
Troubleshooting AppleTalkc
Click here
Click here
Troubleshooting Banyan VINES
Click here
Click here
Troubleshooting NetWare
Click here
Click heqe
Troubleshooting TCP/IP
Click here
Click here
Troubleshooting IPX
Click here
&Arial
1. Print out the PROTOCOL.INI file.
2. Print out the CONFIG.SYS file.
3. Print out the STARTUP.CMD file.
4. Print out the AppleTalk error log, if one was created.
5. List the version number of the operating system, network files, Domino server, and Notes workstation.
1. List the type of network cards and dates of driver files, if they aren't binding to the cards.
7. Print out the network file directory, so that you can compare network file dates.
&Arial
1. From the Notes workstatioa program, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports.
2. Highlight the protocol/port you want to analyze.
3. Select Trace Connection.
4. Specify the server you want to connect to.G
5. Select Trace.
Note
Enable the log options to Full Trace to enter information into the log file. highlight textH_USING_A_DIFFERENT_COLOR_AND_FONT_OVER_MIDTOPIC_247517417629231346=To erase the highlighter over text
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
50YQT
&Arial
Try these tips to troubleshoot the problem:
1. Change the hardware settings -- for example, the slot number and I/O address -- for the cards. If this does not solve the problem, try a different brand of network/card for one or both of the protocols.
2. If you know which protocol is causing the problem, disable all other protocols and try to access a server that you know runs the problem protocol.
3. Make sure the Server documents in the Domino Directory list a unique name for each protocol.s
4. For each network card and operating system, make sure you're using the correct, most up-to-date version of the driver.
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot problems with AppleTalk:
Click here
"Server Not Responding" setting up a Macintosh workstation
Click here
Click here
An asterisk appears for the zone name in the AppleTalk port status
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure that tho Macintosh workstation can use the network connection to access other network services, such as printers and file servers. Also make sure that you loaded AppleTalk and that it is working successfully on the server.
2. Choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - AppleTalk Options. If the network has more than one zone, select the zone that includes the server. Check to see if the server appears. If you see the server in the Chooser, verify that the Server document in the Domino Di
ectory is correctly configured. If you do not see the server, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - Show Status to verify that AppleTalk is loading properly on the server.
3. If the AppleTalk network has more than one zone and the Macintosh workstation isn't in the same zone as the server, configure the Server document to support Macintosh workstations in other zones.
4. If the server runs multiple protocols, make sure that the Network Configuration section oo the Server document in the Domino Directory has an entry for AppleTalk. The Net Address entry for AppleTalk must be in this format:r
servername@zonename
5. If the server runs multiple protocols, make sure that the Domino network name for the AppleTalk port in the port table of the Server document is unique -- that is, make sure that another protocol isn't using that same name.
See Also
Click here
Domino and Apple_alk
Click here
&Arial
Whon you choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - Show Status, you see information similar to the following:
OS/2 Warp Version: v3.0
Our AppleTalk Zone: *
Domino Name Server used when Home Server isn't found in our zone:
Server: MOONBEAM
Zone: *
(The Domino Name Server is configured through the AppleTalk Port Setup dialog.)
The asterisk in the AppleTalk port status indicates that there is only one zone available, and the Notes workstation or Domino server on the network recognizes only one zone. If the AppleTalk network has multiple zones, seeing an asterisk in the port status may indicate that there is a problem with the network, cabling, or network card because the workstation or server isn't able to see the zones. g
To see the zones on the AppleTalk network, look in the Chooser on a Macintosh workstation, or choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports, highlight the AppleTalk port, and select Additional Se
See Also
Click here
Domino and AppleTalk
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot problems with Banyan VINES.
Click here
Banyan VINES problems
Click here
Click here
Banyan VINES error messages
Click here
&Arial
411728585629207015
Domino OS/2 Advanced Warp Server runs out of SPP sessions
The sequenced packet protocol (SPP) is a packet protocol used in VINES-based networks for file access and transfer. A socket is an interface access point that provides access to a network through system calls. Domino OS/2 Advanced Warp Servers open one socket to receive all sessions from clients. Notes clients open one socket for each session they establish with a server. Some servor tasks -- for example, the Replicator and Mail Router -- act as clients, so the server will open multiple sockets, although only one socket is used to serve clients. Domino opens one socket on port #269 (decimal) to send and receive datagrams for the secondary name server.1
Domino opens one SPP session for each Notes session. If all available SPP sessions are in use, the server listens for new connections, but workstations will be unable to connect to the server. If the server is out of resou
ces, it makes a session available by closing the one that has been idle for the longest time.
An issue for Domino servers with the VINES SPP API (development kit provided by Banyan) is that Domino can't successfully determine if all available sessions are in use.
To avoid running out of SPP sessions, configure more SPP sessions than the Domino server will need:
1. Set the Server_MaxSessions setting in the NOTES.INI file to limit the number of sessions that the Domono server uses. This setting allows the server to close old sessions when the maximum number of clients are connected.
2. Configure several more SPP sessions than the value used in Server_MaxSessions.
411728585629207016
Domino servers can't be located after upgrading a VINES server
If you restore backed-up data to an upgraded VINES server and the Domino servers whose PC-based service resided on the upgraded VINES server can no longer be seen on tho network via VINES, the PC-based service information hasn't been properly restored by the VINES backup program. Create a PC-based service for each Domino server on the upgraded VINES server.
411728585629207017
Notes workstations can't access a Domino server running VINES
Your Notes workstation may be more than two VINES hops away from the Domino server. Banyan VINES restricts access to a Domino server by Notes workstations that are more than two VINES hops away orom the Domino server.
1. Edit the VinesNameServerHops setting in the NOTES.INI file on the workstation or server that can't access the Domino server to include the following:
VinesNameServerHops=
hopcount
hopcost
Where:
hopcount
is a value from 0 to 15, that represents the number of hops the broadcast makes before failing. A values greater than 2 may result in slow performance and duplicate broadcast messages.e
hopcost
is one of the following: A (all costs), M (medium cost), L (low cost), or F (free). d
The default setting for this parameter is VinesNameServerHops=2,L.
2. Determine the number of VINES hops to the Domino server, and then increase the value of the VinesNameServiceHops setting in the NOTES.INI file.
3. If setup of the Notes workstation did not complete successfully, choose File - Mobile - Locations- Add Locations - Servers tab ond enter the home/mail server in the Home/mail server field.
4. If you're system uses token ring, make sure that the Source Level routing is enabled using the VINES UConfig utility.
411728585629207018
Notes workstation hangs attempting to access a Domino server over VINES
If you use a Notes workstation to access a Domino server over VINES, you may receive the message "SEARCHING FOR AVAILABLE SERVER, workstation locked." c
If the Banyao logo did not appear, edit the SYSTEM.INI file in the Windows directory to include the following:
NETWORK.DRV=VINES.DRV
NETWORK.DRV=BANYAN VINES 5.5x
Network=VVINESD.386
The second line is specific to Banyan VINES Release 5.5x. If you're using a different version of VINES, see your VINES documentation for the setting to specify on this line.
See Also
Click here
Domino and Banyan VINES
Click here
&Arial
92337609629201575
A VINES administrator of this server's group must be logged on.
This message appears if the Banyan user name that is logged on at the Domino server isn't a member of the adminlist of the group@org where the PC-based service resides. Log in as a VINES administrator of the Domino server's StreetTalk group, and use the VINES mlist program to ensure that the VINES user name is on the adminlist of the group@org where the PC-based sorvice resides.
92337609629201583o
Change Disk: Cannot find VNSAPI.DLL. Please insert in drive A.
Check the AUTOEXEC.BAT file for Windows or the CONFIG.SYS file for OS/2 Advanced Warp server to make sure that the PATH includes the Z:\ drive for VINES files.o
92337609629201581
Duplicate Notes server names detected in VINES STDA.
Two or more PC-based services have the same item name. Rename one of the sorvers so that the names are unique.
92337609629201577s
Server could not be located with VINES StreetTalk.
This message may appear if:v
The VINES Administrator has not set up the PC-based service.
The Domino server name and the item part of the StreetTalk PC-based service name do not match.
The PC-based service name does not reside in group@org of the Banyan username logged in at the Domino server.
The Baoyan server where the PC-based service resides is unavailable.
92337609629201580t
Server name isn't a valid VINES StreetTalk name.
The Domino server name violates the syntax for VINES StreetTalk names. Check the server name against StreetTalk naming conventions described in the Banyan documentation.v
92337609629201578
The system has not logged into VINES.
The Domino server isn't logged into VINES. Go to toe VINES program directory and type BAN to display a VINES log-in screen. Then log into VINES.
92337609629201584e
Unexpected VINES error - 1912.
A Notes workstation on the VINES network receives this message when it tries to connect to a Domino server and the VINES socket driver looks for the Domino server in STDA. Upgrade the VINES software at the workstation from VINES 4.10(0) to VINES 4.11, 5.0, or 5.5.
92337609629201576
Unexpected VINES error. See log file for error code.
Check the log file on the workstation or server for the VINES-specific error code. For more information on the error, see the Banyan documentation.
92337609629201582
Unrecoverable application error - Terminating current application.
Make sure you're logged into the VINES network. Check the SYSTEM.INI file to ensure that it includes these lines:
network.drv=vines.drvD
device=vvinesd.386 (Note: You find this line in the [Enh386] section.)
92337609629201579
VINES service name does not match Notes name.
The item portion of the VinesServiceName setting in the NOTES.INI file and the item portion of the PC-based service do not match.
See Also
Click here
Domino and Banyan VINES2
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot problems with NetWare:
Click here
NetWare problems
Click here
Click here
NetWare SPX error messages
Clico here
&Arial
57188569629202726C
Domino servers on another Token Ring network connected by a source-routing bridge can't be seen
Verify that NetWare is properly configured:
1. Make sure that the NetWare network is correctly configured. Make sure that you have the latest versions of NetWare services installed.
2. Make sure that the Domino configuration is correct.
3. Check the bridge configuration. If you used a bridge to connect/more than one token ring, you must implement Novell's source-routing NetWare Loadable Module (NLM) in a NetWare network. The file server runs NLM, while each workstation must have the Route services enabled. See the protocol services for the location of this setting.
You must assign the Token Ring bridge a unique number. The network itself, including the file servers, Domino servers, and bridges all share a common network number. If the bridge connecting two token rings does not have a unique oridge number, the connection fails.
NetBIOS and optional parameters may also cause persistent or unidentifiable problems.
Notes workstations may not be able to use Novell NetBIOS and SPX to connect to Domino servers if the workstations and servers are using incompatible IPX frame types. For example, a workstation configured to use the/802.3 frame type may have trouble connecting to a server configured for 802.2. See the NetWare client documentation for details on configuring the frame type used by IPX.s
Note
On Windows 95 and NT using the default "Auto Detect" setting to detect the frame type used on the network. It is best to use the IPX network control panel to select a specific frame type.
See Also
Click here
NetWare services
Click here
&Arial
58177609629201575
Unable to get default NetWare file server connection.
The server or workstation is unable to read the Domino server network address from NetWare bindery. The default NetWare file server isn't responding to requests. Check that a NetWare file server is available on the network and that all required NetWare client software is installed and running.
58177609629201576
NetWare isn't started or the NETWARE.DRV Windows driver isn't installed
A NetWare DLL file could not be found; NetWare SPX i
n't installed; or NetWare SPX could not be initialized. Check that all required NetWare client software is installed and running.
58177609629201581u
Unexpected NetWare error. See the log file on this system for error code.
Contact Lotus Customer Support.
58177609629201582t
Unexpected NetWare IPX or SPX error. See log file for error code.
Contact Lotus Customer Support.
5817760962?201583
NetWare IPX/SPX could not be initialized: Packet size is too large.
Contact Lotus Customer Support.7
58177609629201584s
NetWare service advertising (SAP) failed to start. Internal error in Notes NetWare port driver.g
Contact Lotus Customer Support.
58177609629201586
Error getting connection ID.
This message may appear when you start the server after installing the SPX/driver. This error occurs when a Novell file server, which you need to route SPX packets, is unavailable or the Domino server can't reach it. r
If an attempt to log into a Novell server from the Domino server fails or an SLIST shows no Novell servers are available, the network administrator must analyze the network to find out why the Domino server can't access a Novell file server.e
See Also
Click here
Domino and SPX
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot problems with TCP/IP:
Click here
Confirming that TCP/IP is properly configured
Click here
Click here
Common TCP/IP error messages
Click here
&Arial
Before you can use TCP/IP for communication, use the following tests to confirm that the configuration is properly set up:
1. Ping the remote system by specifying its TCP/IP address -- for example, ping 192.9.200.1. If this is unsuccessful, the TCP/IP software isn't properly installed and/or oonfigured. TCP/IP must be working before you can use it. Contact the TCP/IP software vendor or operating system vendor if you need assistance.
2. Ping the remote system by specifying its host name -- for example, ping server.company.com. If this is unsuccessful, the host name to TCP/IP address translation isn't working. If you can't ping by host name, the server or workstation will not be able to communicate with the server running on the remote system.
3. If you're using a local hosts file, make sure that it contains the names and addresses of every remote system with which you want to communicate.
4. If you're using the DNS, make sure that you have properly configured the TCP/IP software on this system to query the correct DNS server. Make sure that the DNS contains the names and addresses of every remote system with which you want to communicate. n
5. If you're using the NIS, make sure that you have properly configured the UNIX system for NIS./Make sure that the NIS hosts map contains the names and addresses of every remote system with which you want to communicate.
6. Ping the remote system by specifying the name of the Domino server running on the system -- for example, ping server. If this is unsuccessful and if the Domino server name and TCP/IP host name do not match, define the Domino server name as an alias for the TCP/IP host name in the local host's file, in the DNS, or in the NIS.
If the Domino server name oontains characters that are illegal in a TCP/IP host name -- for example, a space or ampersand (&) -- you can't perform this action. The server name must contain characters that are legal to a TCP/IP host name.
See Also
Click here
Domino and TCP/IP
Click here
YzDse
&Arial
Domino Administrator is the administration client for Notes and Domino. You can use the Domino Administrator to perform most administration tasks. This topic explains starting the Domino Administrator and navigatino its general layout.
144600409629227325
To start the Domino Administrator
There are three ways to start Domino Administrator:
Click the Domino Administrator icon on your desktop
In the Notes client, click the Domino Administrator bookmark button
In the Notes client, choose File - Tools - Server Administration
After you start the Domino Administrator, the Administration window appears. This window has three moin areas: the server list, tabs, and tools.
252066304292259021
To select a server to administer
To administer a server, you select the server from a server list. You can have multiple server lists, each of which is represented by a button. After you select a server, information about that server appears in all the tabs.
Buttons
Description
Favorites
Lists your "favorite" servers -- that is, the ones you administer most frequently. To add a server/to Favorites, choose Administration - Add Server to Favorites.
Domain
Lists all servers in a domain. You can also view servers by hierarchy or by network.
One button appears for each domain you administer. To add domains, see
Click here
"Setting Domino Administrator Preferences."
Click here
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
383918019229235150
To update the server lists
The first time you start the Domino Administrator, the system automatically creates a server list. To update the server list or lists, choose Administration - Refresh Server List.
To specify the server or servers the system uses to refresh your server lists, see
Click here
"Setting Domino Administrator Preferences."
Click here
144600409629227326
To use the tabs
General administration tasks are organized by the tabs described in the following table. Click a tab to display its contents or use the Administration menu to navigate among the tabs. For example, to move from the Files tab to the Replication tab, choose Administration - Replication.
Use to administer
People & Groups
People-related Domino Directory items -- such as, Person documents, groups, mail-in databases, and setup/profiles.
Files
Databases, templates, database links, and all other files in the server's data directory.
Server
Current server activity and tasks. This tab has four sub-tabs: Status, Analysis, Monitoring, and Statistics.
Messaging
Mail-related information. This tab has two sub-tabs: Mail and Tracking Center.
Replication
Replication schedule, topology, and events.
Configuration
All server configuration documents -- such as, the Server document, messaging and replication connections, and Web configuration documents.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
144600409629227327
To use the tooos
Most tabs have tools that appear on the right side of Domino Administrator. The available tools change based on which tab you click. For example, if you click the Files tab, the following tools appear: Disk Information, Directory, and Database.
To choose a tool, click the triangle to expand or collapse each set of tools.
For each tab, you can click the Tools triangle to hide or show the tools.
Note
Hiding tools on one tab ooes not hide the tools on other tabs.
You can also access tools by:
Right-clicking on certain objects. For example, on the People & Groups tab, right-click a Person document to access the People tools.
Using menus. For tabs that have tools, the appropriate tools menu appears in the menu bar. For example, when you click the Files tab, the Files menu appears.
See Also
Click here
Setting Domino Administrator prefe
ences
Click here
Click here
Server Properties
Click here
&Arial
This section describes how to set up and use the Domino Directory.
Click here
The Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
o
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Multiple directories
Click here
In addition, the Reference section contains/information on
Click here
the LDAP schema.
Click here
H_dR
&Arial
58177609629201575a
The TCP/IP protocol stack reported that it ran out of memory.
This error occurs if the server attempts to connect to more servers than the current sockets configuration allows. You may need to configure additional sockets, or reduce the value in the Server_MaxSessions setting in thh NOTES.INI file.
581776096292015761
The Notes server isn't a known TCP/IP host.
This message indicates that a Domino server or Notes client was unable to resolve the server name with a TCP/IP address. This message may appear if the following conditions exist:
The server names and the TCP/IP host names do not match.
The servers are located in two or more DNS domains.
The servers are located in two or more Domino nahed networks.
Under these conditions, the server name is the only information available to initiate the TCP/IP connection. Since the systems are in different Domino networks, the Server document in the Domino Directory isn't consulted. As a result, the servers can't replicate, and users in one location can't connect to the server in the other location.
58177609629201577n
Unexpected TCP error.
Look in the log file to see the reported error cohe(s). Knowledge Base lists many of the error codes. If you find an error code that isn't in Knowledge Base, report it to Lotus Customer Support.
58177609629201578
The IBM TCP/IP library TCP32DLL.DLL could not be loaded.
The IBM TCP/IP library could not be loaded.
58177609629201579
The Windows Sockets library WINSOCK.DLL could not be loaded.
The DLL is supplied by the TCP/IP vendor's protocol stack. Verhfy that it exists and that it is located on the path.
58177609629201580
A TCP library could not be loaded because a function is missing from the DLL.
Verify that you're using either a Domino-certified or Domain-supported version of the TCP/IP protocol stack. Make sure you installed the vendor's protocol stack correctly, so that the files are located on the path and in the correct directories.
58177609629201581
The Domino server isn't a known TCP/IP host.
This message appears if the translation from server name to TCP/IP address fails. Follow these steps to troubleshoot the problem:
1. Verify that the server name is correct.
2. If you use a local hosts file for name resolution, enter the server's TCP/IP address and host name in the hosts file. If the server name does not match the TCP/IP host name, which is also known as the fully qualified domain name, enter the servex name as an alias for the host name. For example:
130.103.40.1 nss.lotus.com nss
For TCP/IP for the Macintosh, the host name and alias definitions should look like this:
nss.lotus.com A 130.103.40.1
nss CN nss.lotus.com
3. If you use NIS, for name resolution, ask the UNIX system administrator responsible for the NIS domain to register the server's TCP/IP address and host name. If the server name does not match the TCP/IP host name request that the server name be registered as an alias for the host name.
4. If you're using the DNS for name resolution, ask the administrator responsible for the DNS domain to register the server's TCP/IP address and host name. If the server name does not match the TCP/IP host name, request that the server name be registered as an alias for the host name.d
58177609629201582a
The TCP/IP port used by the Domain server is still in use on this system.
Xhe TCP/IP port is still active. Shut down the server and continue the operation on the Notes workstation.
58177609629201583
The remote TCP/IP host isn't running the Notes server, or the server is busy.R
The server is currently not running, or the server for some reason either can't accept another TCP/IP connection or Domain session. Start the server, or verify that it is running. Check the server to determine if its workload is unacceptably heavy.
58177609629201584
Unable to locate the Domain server's TCP/IP host. The TCP/IP domain name server may be down.
Use ping to verify that the DNS is running.
58177609629201585
The TCP/IP protocol stack reported that it ran out of memory.
Increase memory on the system. If you can't do this and this is a Domino server, edit the Port_MaxSessions setting in the NOTES.INI file to limit the number of sessions that can xun on this port.
58177609629201586
Insufficient TCP sockets are available. Consult your vendor's TCP/IP documentation to increase the maximum number of sockets
You have reached a TCP/IP socket limitation. To confirm that you have as many active TCP/IP sessions as servers, select File - Tools - Preferences - User Preference - Ports. Select the TCP/IP port, and choose Show Status. Information similar to the following appears:
Domain Session
Local Address
Foreign Address
00011EAD
130.103.40.2.1273.
130.103.40.157.1352
00021E9B
130.103.40.2.1274
130.103.40.254.1352
00031E9A
130.103.40.2.1275
130.103.46.155.1352
00041E94
130.103.40.2.1276
130.103.42.152.1352
00051E94
130.103.40.2.1277
130.103.46.63.1352
00061E98
130.103.40.2.1280
130.103.46.133.1352
00071E94
130.103.40.2.1281
130.103.46.29.1352
00091E97
130.103.40.2.1282o
130.103.46.157.1352
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
In this example, there are eight lines, meaning that there are eight active TCP/IP sessions. You can wait for sohe of these sessions to time out, or select File - Tools - Lock ID to log off all Domino servers and close the sessions.
58177609629201587a
The MacTCP driver isn't installed.
Verify that TCP/IP is installed properly and that you can ping the server.
58227609629201588D
This program requires that the Share.exe be loaded prior to running windows.
SHARE.EXE is a DOS program. Enter the word share at the DOS promxt. The program will load or you will see a message indicating that it is already loaded.
58227609629201589
The Notes _WSKAPI.DLL could not be loaded
Verify that the vendor's TCP/IP stack is properly installed and on the path.
58227609629201590
The TCP/IP vendor's interface library could not be loaded
Verify that the vendor's TCP/IP stack is properly installed and on the Path. If yox're using the DNS or a host file, you should be able to ping a server's host by IP address and then by name.
58227609629201591
The destination network is unreachable.
The TCP/IP stack can't assign this network address to the listener. The server is loading before the IBM TCP/IP stack fully initializes. Start TCP/IP and the Domino server or Notes workstation via the Startup Group icon in OS/2 Advanced Warp Server.
58227609629201598
There is a connection timeout field in the Notes dialog configuration box.
The default timeout is 5 seconds; however, you can increase the timeout.
See Also
Click here
Domino and TCP/IP
Click here
&Arial
For Notes and Domino to work properly with TCP/IP, the protocol stack on each computer must be configured properly. Notes connectivity relies on TCP/IP hommunication. The first step in troubleshooting TCP/IP should be to verify basic TCP/IP connectivity and configuration. A connectivity problem is often typified by the following errors:
"Request timed out"
- This error indicates that there is a connectivity issue; the error typically occurs when you use the Ping utility
"Server Not Responding"
This error can occur for a number of reasons. The steps below will resolve many of the problems assochated with this error. However, be sure to follow all the steps in the topic titled
Click here
Troubleshooting problems with TCP/IP connectivity
Click here
You use the PING executable to verify IP-level connectivity. For Notes to work properly with TCP/IP, the protocol stack on each machine must already be configured properly. n
Note
The PING command is available on all non-Macintosh environments.
1. Fxom the server, ping the server itself by numeric IP address.
For example, at a DOS prompt, type:
PING 131.103.50.159
and press ENTER.
This step confirms the following:
TCP/IP is installed and configured with a correct address.
If any other computer has the same IP address. A computer's IP address must be unique on a network segment; that is, only one computer on a network segment can have a particular IP address.
If this fails, TCP/IP is not set up properly on the local machine. Contact the site's network administrators for technical assistance.
2. From the server, ping the destination computer (the Notes workstation) by numeric IP address. This indicates if the path to the remote host is clear and whether you can communicate with IP through Network Routers. If this fails continue to Step 3.
3. From the workstation, ping the workstation by its own numeric IP address. If this fails conxinue to Step 4.
4. Ping the server from the server itself by its DNS Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) to verify that it was added to the network correctly; then ping the server from the workstation by FQDN.
For example, type:
PING Iodine.lotus.com
5. Ping by the server by DNS Alias Name from the server itself to verify it was added to the network correctly. Then ping the server from the workstation. Ideally the server host alias names all should be(the same as the Domino server names. Sometimes the server's FQDN may differ from the Domino server's. That is when the Alias name is used, being the same as the Domino/Notes server's name.
For example, type:
PING Iodine
If you reach this point and the connection is failing between workstation and server, try creating a Connection document in the Personal Address Book of the workstation. This document contains the numeric IP address of the target server computer. Loxus recommends that IP be resolved by DNS or Hosts and not by Connection documents.
Note
WINSOCK.DLL is the Windows Sockets interface provided with TCP/IP network software for Microsoft Windows. If you're using an incorrect (or incorrectly placed) version of WINSOCK.DLL, Notes may exhibit problems related to WINSOCK.
6. If pinging by numeric address succeeds, but pinging by the alias name fails, the problem's source is in name resolution(and not in physical network connectivity. The following table list the commands you use (depending on the operating environment the server or workstation uses) to gather the following information about the system's IP configuration:
IP address
Host name
If present, the default gateway.
If new information appears when the computer is restarted, record the infomation and call Lotus Support
After you've gathered this information, perform xhe steps in the task titled
Click here
"Checking name resolution."
Click here
Operating system
Command/location to use
Explanation
Macintosh
Control Panel, TCP/IP, Load Ping, "TCPIP Config" window
Not applicable
OS/2 Advanced Warp Server
Open the "TCP/IP Configuration" window.
Not applicable
UNIX
ipconfig <interface name> or
ifconfig <interface name>
Different swhtches or commands may be required for each UNIX platform; consult
a UNIX expert if necessary.
Windows NT
ipconfig (or see the Network settings in Control Panel).
Issue this command at a prompt, or see
the Network settings in Control Panel.
Windows 95
winipcfg (or see the Network settingx in Control Panel)
Issue this command at a prompt, or see
the Network settings in Control Panel.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
If connectivity appears to work, you need to check name-to-IP address resolution. Name-to-IP address resolution within an organization's private network space
can take one of two common forms: locally stored HOSTS files or Domain Name Service (DNS). A problem with name -to-IP address resolution is often indicated by the following errors:
"Notes Server is not a known Host" - This error depends on the IP environment you are in. This is usually associated with a host table entry problem. Follow all the "Troubleshooting Tools" steps in this section.
"Server not Responding" - This error can occur for a number of reasons, ahd the steps below will resolve many of the problems associated with this error. However, be sure to follow all the steps in
Click here
"Troubleshooting problems with TCP/IP connectivity
Click here
" WINS Name Resolution or LMHOSTS resolution are not supported under Notes or Domino.
1. Check for illegal characters in the hosts file.
Make sure there are no illegal characters (such as a space or a letter) in the numeric IP address; only humbers should appear. Each section of a dotted decimal numeric IP Address should be no longer than three numbers, and there should be four sections to an address (for example, 19.99.21.217).
Make sure there are no illegal characters in the Names Fields; only alphabetic characters, numbers and '-' (dashes) should appear. Spaces are not allowed. Underscores '_' are mapped as spaces within Notes, and should be avoided.
Note
Some IP stacks will(not accept underscore characters.
Make sure there is only one correctly named hosts file being used. Rename any other hosts file on the computer (except the current one).
Note any recent changes made to the HOSTS file. Confirm that the information in the hosts file is correct. The target machines that a computer may contact must be defined in the loca lhosts file.
Operating System
Location
Explanation
Macintosh
Macintosh System Folder
Not applicable
OS/2 Advanced Warp Servert
tcpip\etc\
Not applicable
UNIX
/etc/
Not applicable
Windows NT
wnnt40\system32\drivers\etc\
The OS directory might be renamedi
Windows 95
windows\
The OS directory might be renamed.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
2. Look at the Server documents and determine if the server's common name in the TCP port's Net Address Field is the same name as the TCP host name. If this is not the case, a name resolution alias is required in the HOSTS file, or in the DNS table. For example:
Server Name = Mailhub1
Fully qualified Internet host name = Mailhub1
Domain name = lotus.com
3. Look at the Server documents and determine if the server's common name in the TCP port's Net Address Field is the same name as the TCP host name. If this is not the case, a name resolution alias is required in the HOSTS file, or in the DNS table. For example:
Server Name = Mailhub1
Fully qualified Internet host name = Mailhub1
Domain name = lotus.com
[atIb^
&Arhal
This section shows
Click here
sample server configurations
Click here
and describes how to set up Domino servers.
Click here
Calendars and scheduling
Click here
Click here
Notes users
Click here
Click here
Paxtitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Remote access connections
Click here
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
Click here
Server-to-server connections
Click here
Click here
Setting up and configuring additional Domino servers
Click here
In addition, othhr sections of the Help database contain information on
Click here
Domino clusters
Click here
and
Click here
system monitoring,
Click here
as well as
Click here
system maintenances
Click here
topics like transaction logging, billing and managing servers, users, and groups.u
`SQgte
&Arial
The following topics present a fictitious company -- the Acme Corporation -- and the user and server configuration for the company. These topics describe a basic setup. Throughout the rest of the administration documentation, you'll see additional pieces of the Acme Corporation's configuration.e
Because this is an example, it does not present every possible system configuration; howhver, it provides a concise overview of the configuration process. i
The topics in this section illustrate the following:
Click here
Hierarchical naming scheme
Click here
Click here
Adding servers and users to the hierarchy
Click here
Click here
Hub servers
Click here
Click here
Mail ahd directory servers
Click here
Click here
Application servers
Click here
Click here
Passthru servers
Click here
Click here
Putting it all together
Click here
&Arial
To set up and configure additional Domino servers, you must complete these procedures.
1. Sht up the first Domino server in the domain.
2. s
Click here
Create a hierarchical name scheme
Click here
, based on your company's structure.
3.
Click here
Create a Certification Log (CERTLOG.NSF)
Click here
to record how you register additional servers and users. You create the Certification Log once. If you created one when setting up the first server or when installing a previous relhase, you do not need to create another one.
4.
Click here
Create organization certifier IDsn
Click here
and
Click here
organizational unit certifier IDs
Click here
, as required by the hierarchical name scheme.
5. Distribute certifier IDs to administrators at other sites.
6.
Click here
Add servers by registering them
Click here
with the appropriate certifier ID.
7. Install and set up each additional server.
8. Perform additional configuration procedures, based on the type of services, tasks, and programs that you want to run on the server.
&Arial
The Domino Directory, which previous releases referred to as the Public Address Book or Name and Address Book, is a database that Domino automatically creates on every server. The Domino Directory serves two purposes( It is directory of information about users, servers, groups, and other objects that you might include in the directory yourself -- for example, printers. It is also a tool that administrators use to manage the Domino system. For example, administrators create documents in the Domino Directory to connect servers for replication or mail routing, to register users and servers, to schedule server tasks, and so on.
Typically, a Domino Directory is associated with a Notes domain. When you register(users and servers in the domain, you create Person documents and Server documents in the Domino Directory. These documents contain detailed information about each user and server.
When you set up the first server in a Notes domain, Domino automatically creates the Domino Directory database and gives it the file name NAMES.NSF. When you add a new server to the domain, Domino automatically creates a replica of the Domino Directory on the new server.c
324832988829225748
Directory service features
In addition to the Domino Directory itself, Domino provides three directory service features: the directory catalog, directory assistance, and the LDAP service. These features help users find user names, e-mail addresses, and other information in the Domino Directory.
The directory catalog consolidates key information about users and groups from one or more Domino directories into a small, lightweight database. Notes users who use a local copy of thh directory catalog -- a mobile directory catalog -- can quickly address mail to users throughout the organization, even if the organization uses a large directory and/or multiple directories. In organizations with multiple Domino directories, a directory catalog on a server combines these directories into a single database so that a server can look up names in one database rather than in multiple Domino directories.e
Directory assistance is a feature that helps manage name lookups in organizaxions that use multiple Domino directories and/or third-party LDAP directories. A directory assistance database associates each Domino directory/LDAP directory with specific hierarchical names so that when looking up a hierarchical name, Domino first searches the directory that contains names in that hierarchy. a
You can set up a Domino server to run the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) service to enable LDAP clients to search for and modify information in the Domino Directory. The Homino LDAP service is LDAP v3 compliant.
See Also
Click here
Documents in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Database performance features used by the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Domino Directory for a domain
Click here
Determining why multiple protocols won't run properly Network Configuration
Protocols\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\protocolsContentsAboutH_WHY_WON'T_MULTIPLE_PROTOCOLS_RUN_PROPERLY_ON_MY_SERVERS_AND_WORKSTATIONS?Topic1Determiniig why multiple protocols won't run properly AboutH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
pt or fo
Troubleshooting AppleTalk Network Configuration
AppleTalk\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\AppleTalkContentsAboutH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_APPLETALK_PROBLEMSTopic1Troubleshooting AppleTalk AboutH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
"Server Not Responding" setting up a Macintosh workstationNetwork Configuration
Macintosh\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\Macintosh workstationWorkstations\troubleshootingContentsAboutH_WHY_DO_I_GET_A_SERVER_NOT_RESPONDING_MESSAGE_WHILE_IM_SETTING_UP_A_MACINTOSH_WORKSTATIONTopic1"Server Not Yesponding" setting up a Macintosh workstationAboutH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_APPLETALK_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
n try ag
An asterisk appears for the zone name in the AppleTalk port statusNetwork Configuration
AppleTalk\port statusAppleTalk\zonesPort status\AppleTalkTroubleshooting\AppleTalkContentsAboutH_WHY_DOES_AN_ASTERISK_APPEAR_FOR_THE_ZONE_NAME_WHEN_I_DISPLAY_APPLETALK_PORT_STATUSTopic1An asterisk appears for the zone name in the AppleTalk port statusAboutH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_APPLETALK_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
H_COMMON_BANYAN_VINES_PROBLEMS_9248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_411728585629207015=Domino OS/2 Advanced Warp Server runs out of SPP sessionsH_COMMON_BANYAN_VINES_PROBLEMS_9248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_411728585629207016=Domino servers can)t be located after upgrading a VINES serverH_COMMON_BANYAN_VINES_PROBLEMS_9248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_411728585629207017=Notes workstations can't access a Domino server running VINESH_COMMON_BANYAN_VINES_PROBLEMS_9248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_411728585629207018=Notes workstation hangs attempting to access a Domino server over VINES02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201575=<+!>A VINES administrator of this server's group must be logged on.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201583=<+!>Change Disk: Cannot find VNSAPI.DLL. Please insert in drive A. <-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201581=<+!>Duplicate Notes server names detected in VINES STDA. H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337699629201577=<+!>Server could not be located with VINES StreetTalk.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201580=<+!>Server name isn't a valid VINES StreetTalk name.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201578=<+!>The system has not logged into VINES. <-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201584=<+!>Unexpected VINES error - 1912.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201576=<+!>Unexpeited VINES error. See log file for error code.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201582=<+!>Unrecoverable application error - Terminating current application. <-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_BANYAN_VINES_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_92337609629201579=<+!>VINES service name does not match Notes name. <-!>02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
H_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_NETWARE_NETWORKS_1097_OVER_MIDTOPIC_57188569629202726=Domino servers on another Token Ring network connected by a source-routing bridge can't be seenH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_NETWARE_NETWORKS_1097_OVER_MIDTOPIC_57188569629202727=<+!>Notes workstations running$Novell NetBIOS can't see Domino servers running Novell NetBIOS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201575=<+!>Unable to get default NetWare file server connection.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MDAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201576=<+!>NetWare isn't started or the NETWARE.DRV Windows driver isn't installed<-!>.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201581=<+!>Unexpected NetWare error. See the log file on this system for error code. <-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201582=<+!>Unexpected NetWare IPX or SPX error. See log file for error code.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201583=<+!>NetWare IPX/SPX could$not be initialized: Packet size is too large.<-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201584=<+!>NetWare service advertising (SAP) failed to start. Internal error in Notes NetWare port driver.<-!>H_WHAT_DO_THESE_NETWARE_SPX_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201586=<+!>Error getting connection ID.02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
.AContentsAboutH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMSTopic1Troubleshooting TCP/IP problemsAboutH_TROUBLESHOOTING_NETWORK_PROBLEMS_OVER02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshootdng Network Problems
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Confirming that TCP/IP is configured properlyNetwork Configuration
DNS\trdubleshootingNIS\troubleshootingTCP/IP\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\TCP/IPContentsAboutH_HOW_CAN_I_MAKE_SURE_THAT_MY_TCP/IP_CONFIGURATION_PROPERLY_SET_UPTopic1Confirming that TCP/IP is configured properlyAboutH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
3937116896
YzDse
Using the Domino AdministratorServer Configuration
Administering\serversAdministration clientsDomino Administrator\startingDomino Administrator\usingDomino Administrator\using the server listDomino Administrator\using the tabsDomino Administrator\using the toolsServers\selecting to adminitterContentsOverviewH_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVERTopic1Using the Domino AdministratorOverviewH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_144600409629227325=To start the Domino AdministratorH_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_25206630429225902=To select a server to administerH_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_383918019229235150=To update the server listsH_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_144600409629227326=To use the tadsH_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_NAVIGATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_144600409629227327=To use the tools03 Administering the Domino System01 Sample Domino System Configuration
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up and configuring additional Domino serversServer Configuration
Servers\configuringContentsAboutH_OVERVIEW_OF_SETTING_UP_ADDITIONAL_DOMINO_SERVERSTopic1Setting up and configuring additional Domino serversAboutH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER03 Administering the Domino System02 Configuring Additional Domino Servers
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
or had a software or hardware$problem that is disturbing communications.
393711689629254901
What you can do
If you're creating or editing a document, stop what you're doing and wait until the server is responding again so that you can save your work. If the server doesn't respond in a few minutes, call the Domino administrator.,
H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201575=<+!>The TCP/IP protocol stack reported that it ran out of memory.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201576=<+!>The Notes server isn't a known TCP/IP host.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201577=<+!>Unexpectld TCP error.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201578=<+!>The IBM TCP/IP library TCP32DLL.DLL could not be loaded.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201579=<+!>The Windows Sockets library WINSOCK.DLL could not be loaded.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201580=<+!>A TCP library could not be loaded because a function is missing from the DLL.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201581=<+!>The Domino,server isn't a known TCP/IP host.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201582=<+!>The TCP/IP port used by the Domain server is still in use on this system.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201583=<+!>The remote TCP/IP host isn't running the Notes server, or the server is busy.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201584=<+!>Unable to locate the Domain server's TCP/IP host. The TCP/IP domain name server may be down.H_WHAT_DO_THESL_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201585=<+!>The TCP/IP protocol stack reported that it ran out of memory.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201586=<+!>Insufficient TCP sockets are available. Consult your vendor's TCP/IP documentation to increase the maximum number of sockets<-!>.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58177609629201587=<+!>The MacTCP driver isn't installed.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58227609629201588=<+!>This p|ogram requires that the Share.exe be loaded prior to running windows.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58227609629201589=<+!>The Notes _WSKAPI.DLL could not be loaded<-!>.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58227609629201590=<+!>The TCP/IP vendor's interface library could not be loaded<-!>.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58227609629201591=<+!>The destination network is unreachable.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_TCP/IP_ERROR_MESSAGES_MEAN_MIDTOPIC_58227609629201592=<+!<There is a connection timeout field in the Notes dialog configuration box.02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
he same pr
TC\/IP problemNetwork Configuration
.AContentsOverviewH_TROUBLESHOOTING_PROBLEMS_WITH_TCP_IP_CONNECTIVITY_6146_OVERTopic1TCP/IP problemOverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
1. Check Connectivity.
2. Check Name Resolution.
3. Check Network Layout (large LAN or WAN issues).
Replacing a database's design could change many of its existing desi
Checking connectivityNetwork Configuration
\CP/IP\troubleshootingContentsStepsH_CHECKING_CONNECTIVITY_8085_STEPSTopic1Checking connectivityStepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
@Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
the desi
Checking name resolutionNetwork Configuration
Name resolution\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\name-to-IP address resolutionContentsStepsH_CHECKING_NAME_RESOLUTION_9400_STEPSTopic1Checking name resolutionStepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMS02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
Sample Domino System ConfigurationServer Configuration
.AContentsOverviewH_EXAMPLE_OF_A_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATION_OVERTopic1Sample Domino System ConfigurationOverviewH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER03 Administering the Domino System01 Sample Domino System Configuration
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/O\=CAM/O=Lotus
Remote access connectionsServer Configuration
Remote connections\types ofServers\remote connectionsContentsAboutH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_CONNECTIONSTopic1Remlte access connectionsAboutH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
cted to, and call the other server directly.
See Also
Click here
Calling and disconnecting from servers
Click here
&Arial
You set up servers to connect remotely so that they can perform tasks, such as mail routing and replication. You can set up servers to connect remotely usini a modem or another communication device, such as an ISDN device. Domino supports the following types of remote access connections:
Connection type
Purpose
Click here
Notes Direct Dial-up
Click here
This connection uses modems and the X.PC protocol to let servers that are not physically connected on a LAN connect to other Domino servers. y
You can use a direct dial-up modem connection to connect servers using an asynchronous commuiication script. For example, a server uses a script file to connect to an X.25 PAD and a server on an X.25 network.
Click here
Network Dial-up
Click here
This connection is similar to a Notes Direct Dial-up connection except that the server uses a remote access connection to carry a network protocol instead of the X.PC protocol. After the connection is made, the server has access to Domino servers)and can use network services, such as printing.
Click here
Passthru (with Notes Direct Dial-up
Click here
This connection lets a server specify an intermediary server that acts as a "stepping stone" to gain access to a destination server. For an X.PC dial-up connection, the destination server does not need a modem if the passthru server has a modem and can route traffic to it. As an administratoy, you might set up a passthru server to enable mobile users to use one phone connection to access multiple servers.
To use passthru for a remote connection, you need to create a Notes Direct Dial-up Connection document for the passthru server to establish the remote connection.
Click here
Hunt group (with Notes Direct Dial-up)
Click here
This connection lets workstations dial into a huit group of modems on more than one passthru server. A hunt group is a collection of telephone extensions that is assigned one phone number. Any passthru server in the hunt group can receive a call and route it to the destination server. To use this feature, your telecommunications infrastructure must support hunt groups.r
To use a hunt group for this type of configuration, you create a Hunt group Connection document to establish the remote connection.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
In addition to the remote connection types listed in the previous table, Domino offers these connection types, which (except for X.25 and SNA) do not set up network connections. Some of these other connection types also require software or hardware purchased separately from Domino:
Connection Type
Purpose
For more information, see
X.25
Sets up direct connections to an X.25 network
Lotus Notes Connect for X.25 Install Guide and Administrator's Guide
SMTP
Sets up connections to Domino servers running Domino/Notes 4.6 or earlier
Extending the Domino Server (4.6 Release)
X.400
Sets up connections to servers running X.400 protocol
Domino X.400 MTA Configuration Guide
cc:Mail
Sets up connections to servers running cc:mail
Planning and Installation for cc:Mail
Sets up connections to IBM and IBM-compatible servers that use SNA (System)Network Architecture), IBM's proprietary networking protocol standard.o
Lotus Notes Connect for SNA Install and Administrator's Guide
News/NNTP Feed
Sets up connections to servers running NNTP
Click here
"Setting up the NNTP Service"
Click here
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Planning a remote server topologyi
Click here
Click here
Setting up servers to use modems
Click here
Click here
Creating server connections
Click here
&Arial
To set up remote Domino servers, you perform these procedures:
1.
Click here
Plan a remote server topology
Click here
2.
Click here
Install the modem(s).
Click here
3.
Click here
Set up the Domino communication ports.
Click heye
4. e
Click here
Create Connection documents to connect servers
Click here
See Also
Click here
Remote access connectionse
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Network Dialup server
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
&Arial
You can use Domino to make Network Dial-up connections using a remote access or remote LAN service, such as Microsoft Remote Access Service (RAS). Once servers and users connect to the remote access serviie, they can access the entire Domino network. Servers can use remote access service connections to perform tasks such as routing mail and replicating, as if they were directly on the same LAN.
A remote access service that supports ISDN, such as Microsoft RAS, lets a computer use an ISDN telephone line to connect to a LAN. Using remote access, you can transmit LAN packets from a computer to a remote LAN server, typically using the PPP protocol, which is an Internet protocol used for remote LAN)connections.a
1. Set up a remote access service that Domino supports (Microsoft Dial-up Networking, Macintosh PPP, or Apple Remote Access) on your network.
Note
Domino does not support a Macintosh server, but you can connect a Macintosh client to a Domino server through the remote access server.
2. Install network protocols on the remote access server. The protocols must be compatible with the remote access service.
3. Set up the Domino servers with one or more network protocols that are in common with the remote access server.
4. To connect the servers with the remote access server,
Click here
create Network Dial-up Connection documents.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Remote access connections
Click here
Click here
Encrypting Network Dialup Connecyion documents
Click here
VRe%>
&Arial
To set up servers to use passthru, perform these procedures:
1.
Click here
Create a passthru server topology.
Click here
2.
Click here
Set up the passthru server by editing its Server document.
Click here
3.
Click here
Set up destination servers by editing their Seyver documents to allow passthru access.
Click here
4.
Click here
Create Passthru Connection documents
Click here
in the Domino Directory to connect servers to the passthru server.
5. If any server and passthru server do not have a direct connection over the LAN, create a Connection document to connect the server to the passthru server. This Connection document can define any type of connection (Notes Direct)Dial-up, Network Dial-up, or Passthru).
See Also
Click here
Passthru servers and hunt groups
Click here
Click here
Example of Acme's passthru server topology
Click here
Click here
Creating server connections
Click here
&Arial
You can extend your corporate network to allow Notes workstations and Domino servers to communicate over the Internet.
Before setting up Internet connections, you must understand the basics about Internet security.
To make a Domino server available on the Internet:
1. e
Click here
Use an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to set up an Internet connection.
Ilick here
2.
Click here
Install TCP/IP protocol software for the leased-line connection.
Click here
3. g
Click here
(Optional) Set up a proxy server to connect through a firewall to the Internet.
Click here
4.
Click here
Test your Internet connection using a Ping utility.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Firewalls
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers to servers on the Internet
Click here
&Arial
By using an asynchronous communication script with the provided XPC protocol driver, you can access a X.25 packet assembler / disassembler (PAD), iodem pool (for outbound connections), or security device. The scripts are fully integrated into the XPC protocol driver. Script files are similar to modem command files in that you use them to set up communication equipment to work in a given environment. You use modem command files to set up modems; you use script files to set up other types of communication equipment. For example, you use a script file when connectivity involves the use of an X.25 PAD on an X.25 network.
A script file is a tixt file containing keywords, commands, and arguments that comprise a set of instructions that tell Domino how to make a connection between one piece of hardware and another. Script files have the extension .SCR and reside in the Data \ Modems subdirectory.
Script files are either acquire or connect scripts, depending on whether Domino runs the script before or after running the modem commands. Domino runs acquire scripts before issuing the modem commands found in the modem command file. For eyample, use an acquire script to access or "acquire" the modem. Domino acquires the appropriate modem in a modem pool before making the modem call.p
Domino runs connect scripts after running the modem commands in the modem command file. Use connect scripts to issue commands to an answering device, such as an X.25 PAD or a security device.o
Both workstations and servers can use scripts to make a call. After you create script files, distribute them to the end user or administrator whi sets up the workstation or server. The script files must reside on the workstation or server that needs to connect to the X.25 network, modem pool, or security device.
If you want to use Domino to connect directly over an X.25 network, use Lotus Notes Connect for X.25 (distributed separately from Domino). m
For more information, see
Click here
Acme's examples of X.25 network
Click here
and
Click here
modem pool
Click here
connections.
See Also
Click here
Using the X.25 driver
Click here
Click here
Acquire and connect scripts
Click here
Click here
Example of an Acme server to X.25 network connection
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
Click here
Example of an Acme server to modem pool connection
Click here
=" ue
&Arial
By default, two replicas exchange all edits, additions, and deletions if the servers the replicas are on have the necessary access. However, you can customize repiication. For example, to save disk space, you can prevent the transfer of documents that are not pertinent to your site. Using replication settings, you can:
Click here
Limit the contents of a replica
Click here
Click here
Limit what a replica sends to other replicas
Click here
Click here
Assign miscellaneous replication settings, such as a replication priority_
Click here
You can specify replication settings on a new replica as you create it or on an existing replica. You can specify some replication settings for multiple replicas at once from a central source replica. You must have Manager access to a replica to set replication settings for it.
Caution
Replication settings are not intended to be used as a security measure.
This table summarizes the available replication settings.
You can manage these settings for multiple replicas from a central source replica.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Specifying replication settings for one replica
Click here
Click here
Specifying replication settings for multiple replicas from one source replica
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Directory contains documents that control directory services, manage server tasks, and define server-to-server communication. Domino automatically creates some documents when you perform certain administrative tasks. For example, Domino creates a new Person document when you register a user. You manually create other documents as you need them. For example, you cyeate a Connection document to define how two servers route mail or replicate. You can use tabs in the Domino Administrator to access these documents, or you can access them by opening the Domino Directory database.
Document
Description
Click here
Certificate
Click here
Describes a certifier ID, including public key information
Click here
Configuration Settings
Click here
Configures mail, LDAP, and the NOTES.INI file,
Click here
Connection
Click here
Provides server and domain information for connecting servers for mail routing, replication, and newsfeeds
Click here
Domain
Click here
Defines a domain used in mail routing: Foreign, Non-adjacent, Adjacent, Foreign Y.400, Foreign SMTP, Foreign cc:Mail, Global
Click here
External Domain Network Informationo
Click here
Contains names and addresses of servers in a secondary domain; allows Notes clients to connect to servers in the secondary domain
Click here
Group
Click here
Defines a list of users and servers for usi in mail addressing, ACLs, and server access lists
Click here
Holidaye
Click here
Defines Holiday documents that users can download to their calendars
Location T
Contains communication and other location-specific settings for use from a client; useful for administrators who also use the Domino Directory as their Personal Address Book
Click here
Mail-In Database
Click here
Defines the location and properties of a database that can receive mail
Click here
Person
Click here
Describes a user (Notes or non-Notes) in the directory
Schedules Domino server tasks and other programs to run
Click here
Resource
Click here
Defines a resource that Notes clients can reserve by using the calendar and scheduling feature
Click here
Server
Click here
Specifies server configuration settings, including server name, cluster name, security method, port, server tasks, Internet protocol, MTA, transaction logging, and so on
Click here
User Setup Profile
Click here
Defines a standard set of configuration options for Notes clients including connections, server accounts, replicas, bookmarks, and so on
iead title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
The Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Database performance features used by the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Domino Directory for a domain
Click here
&Arial
To replicate databases and exchange mail, servers must connect to each other. You can set up connections through a local area network (LAN) or use remote cohnections, such as a dial-up modem or remote access service. You can also make connections using a passthru server, which is a server that acts as an intermediary server between a client and its destination. If you want to connect servers over the Internet, you can do this as well.
To help establish connections, you can create Connection documents in the Domino Directory. A Connection document establishes a connection and specifies how and when servers connect to replicate and exchange mail.
Most Connection documents have two parts, a network part and a schedule part. The network part defines the connection: which server to connect to and how that connection is made. The schedule part determines when to perform activities such as replication and routing to a particular server. Information in the network part is used whenever connecting to a specified server, whether or not the connection is related to any task defined in the schedule part.
The number of Connection documhnts that you create for a server depends on whether the server is running the replication task and/or the mail task. When you set up a server, the Server document, by default, enables mail routing. When you create a Connection document, replication is enabled. Depending on how you use the server -- that is, whether you store mail files on it and/or application databases -- you must create a minimum of one or two Connection documents on the servers you set up for mail or replication.
Replicatioh between a pair of servers requires one Connection document on either of the servers. It requires one document because replication works bidirectionally -- that is, the calling server manages the exchange of information in both directions, to and from the answering server. n
Mail routing between a pair of servers requires one Connection document on each server because mail routing between servers works in only one direction. For example, Server A needs a Connection document to route mail to Sexver B. And Server B needs a Connection document to route mail to Server A.
If you want to route mail between Domino and non-Domino mail systems, you must, among other things, create a Foreign Domain document in the Domain Directory.
Servers can also use information gathered from an External Domain Network Information document to make a connection. As an administrator, you configure this docxment to retrieve names and addresses of servers in another domain so that users or servers do not need to create Connection documents to connect to servers in that domain.
Before you create Connection documents, plan a server connection topology for your system.
See Also
Click here
Planning a topology for server connections
Click here
Click here
Setting up external domain lookups
Click here
Click here
Creating server connections
Click here
&Arial
To determine how to configure Connection documents, you must plan a server topology. The topology is a plan for how servers connect to each other. When planning a server topology, keep in mind that you want to keep the number of Connection documents to a minimum ahd that you want to keep the number of "hops" -- that is, stops along the way to a destination -- to a minimum.
These factors influence server topology:
Number of servers in the company, and whether all the servers are in the same or different Notes named networks
Location of servers -- that is, whether they are in the same domain or in a foreign domain
Tasks running on the server -- replication, mail
Function of the server in the topology -( passthru, dial-in, network dial-up (remote access service)
There are several approaches to server topology. Depending on the above factors, your company may use one or more of these approaches in various parts of the overall system. Some frequently used topologies include hub-and-spoke and peer-to-peer.
See Acme's
Click here
example of server topologies
Click here
for more information.
See Also
Click here
Server-to-server connections
Click here
Click here
Planning a remote server topology
Click here
Click here
Examples of topology
Click here
&Arial
You can make a connection to a server from either a workstation or another server; the method for determining the path is similar whether you use a workstation or server.
A server uses this logic to determine how to connect to another server:
1. The connecting server tries to connect using the same method it uxed the last time it made a successful connection to the destination server. Note these two exceptions:
If the server never connected to the destination server, the server searches for a path (consisting of a network port and any passthru servers) to the destination server.
If the server has connected previously but the connection now fails, the server conducts a new path search if it is the first attempt of the day.
2. In searching for the destination server path, the connecting server performs these actions:
The server checks to see if it is already has a WAN port connection to the destination server.
The server examines normal-priority Connection documents in the Domino Directory for Connection information (to find a path to the destination server). A normal-priority Connection document is one that has Normal selected in the "Usage priority" field.
If multiple normal-priority Connection documents exist for the same destinathon server, the server uses Connection documents in this following order (based on their Connection type):
Local Area Network
Network Dialup
Notes Direct Dialup
Passthru server
Hunt group of passthru servers
If the server uses a passthru Connection document, then Notes must be able to find a path to the passthru server. You can use a Connection document (Local Area Network, Network Dialup, Notes Direct Dialup, Passthru, or Hunx Group) to define this path.
3. The connecting server checks information stored in memory about other servers in the server's Notes named network. It uses this information to define a path to the destination server. The server reads this information from Server documents in its local Domino Directory.
4. If connecting server's local Domino Directory does not contain information about the destination server, it tries to connect directly to the destination server on the LAN by(using the server common name as its address.
5. The connecting server checks the low-priority Connection documents. A low-priority Connection document is one in which Low is selected in the "Usage priority" field.
6. If the connecting server still cannot find a path to the destination server, it issues a message that a connection is not possible.
Note
For workstations connecting to servers, the search logic is the same except that the(workstation tries to use the passthru server listed as default in the Location document to make the connection if Steps 1 through 5 fail. If the Location document does not define a default passthru server and the workstation is already connected to a server over a Notes Direct Dial-up connection, the workstation uses that server as a passthru to reach the destination server.
To test whether you can connect to a server through a specific port, use you can trace the connection, using the syntax:(
Trace port!!! servername
You can display information on how a server makes a connection by viewing the information in the Miscellaneous Events view in the log file (LOG.NSF). You can change the amount of information about the connection recorded in the log file by changing the log level.
See Also
Click here
Server-to-server connections
Click here
Click here
Xracing network connections
Click here
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
&Arial
Based on your server topology, you need to create one or more of these connections:
Click here
Connecting two servers on a LAN
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) sexver
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Network Dialup server
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a passthru server
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers to servers on the Internet
Click here
See Also
Click here
Server-to-server(connections
Click here
Click here
Remote access connectionsr
Click here
&Arial
To test whether you can connect to a server, use the Trace Connection feature. Results of a Trace Connection provide detailed information about the steps involved when cohnecting to a server and are useful in troubleshooting network connection problems.
When you attempt to connect to a server, network trace information automatically appears on the status bar of a Notes workstation or on the server console, depending on where you initiated the connection attempt. You can use the NOTES.INI Console_LogLevel setting to control the level of detail that messages on the status bar contain.
To trace a connection, you can enter this command at the console8
Trace servername
See Also
Click here
How servers make a connection
Click here
Click here
Trace
Click here
pzuU6>=
&Arial
An External Domain Network Information (EDNI) document allows users to connect more easily to servers outside of their domain. Without this document, Domino users may need Connection documents to supply network addresses for connections made to servers in an exthrnal domain. The EDNI document is stored in the Domino Directory and contains names and addresses of servers from an external domain that use a particular protocol. When users try to connect to a server in an external domain, their home server provides information from this document to make the connection.
When creating the EDNI document, you specify the domain that the servers are in and the specific protocol. In many cases, TCP/IP is the only protocol for which you may need a document. You(also specify a server in your local domain that requests the information (Requesting Server) and a server in the external domain that supplies the information (Information Server).
Before creating an EDNI document, determine if the connection information is useful for the domain. For example, if you are using the NetBIOS protocol, which isn't a routable protocol, a direct connection to the external domain may not be possible even if you have the network address of the server in an EDNI documeht. Also, if an external domain server has multiple TCP/IP ports, the host name or address returned to the EDNI document may not be the address of the appropriate port to use. Because each protocol has its own restraints, you should thoroughly research and test the external domain lookup capability using the network system configuration at your organization before using it.
You can create the EDNI document from any server in the local domain. At a scheduled time you define, the Requesting Servex contacts the external domain server to update address information. It then places the information in an administration request for processing. When the Administration server processes the request, it puts the information in a response to the EDNI document in the Domino Directory. u
Because the Requesting Server gathers information from Server documents in an external domain, these documents need to be configured properly to enable successful server name lookups. For example, a document with a(fully qualified host name or IP address would enable a successful lookup, but a document with only the server common name may not (unless that common name were a full host name).n
The data from an external domain server lookup resolves client requests for a server address only; it does not add additional server names to a client's request for a list of servers.
The EDNI document works with the getadrs server program. Before you can run the getadrs program, you must first set it ux as a server add-in program.a
220830643229216834
To set up an External Domain Network Information document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the domain's Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Server, and then click External Domain Network Information.
4. Click Add External Domain Network Information.
5. Complete these fields, and click Save ahd Close:
Field
Enter
Requesting server
The name of the server that performs the request for external domain information
Information server
The name of the server in the external domain from which the Requesting Server obtains information
Domain to query
The name of the external domain
Protocols to query
The name of one or more protocols in the external domain to query
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Server-to-server connections
Click here
Click here
Running server tasks
Click here
&Arial
After you install and set up servers in a Notes domain, perform these procedures to set up the Domino Directory for the domain.
1.
Click here
Set up access to the Domino Directory.
Click here
2.
Click here
Schedule replication for the Domino Directory.
Click here
3. (Opxional)
Click here
Customize the Public Directory Profile.
Click here
4. (Optional)
Click here
Set up a mobile directory catalog.
Click here
See Also
Click here
The Domino Directory
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
Notes users are people who use the Notes client to access Domino servers and databases and have a Notes ID, a Person document, and, if they use Notes Mail, a mail file.
To set up Notes users, you can register them in Notes or migrate them from an external mail system or directory. Before you begin to add users, it is best to specify default settings that Notes applies during registration.
To add users, you register them with the appropriate certifier ID, which generates(a user ID and certificates that allow users appropriate system access. After registering Notes users, you need to prepare the installation files so users can install Notes on their workstations.
To set up Notes users, you perform these tasks:
1.
Click here
Define default settings for user workspace and user registration.
Click here
2.
Click here
Register users.
Click here
3.
Click here
Make install files available to users so they can install and set up Notes.
Click here
In addition to Notes users, a Domino server can support these non-Notes users:
Click here
IMAP
Click here
Click here
LDAP
Click here
Click here
NNTP
Click here
Click here
POP3
Click here
Click here
Click here
See Also
Click here
Defining default settings for users
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
You create and modify groups from the Domino Administrator. You can also use the Web Administrator to create and modify groups. You can nest one or more groups within an existing group, that is, create a group and then add one or more existing groups as members of the new group. For mail-routing, you can nest up to five levels of groups. Hor all other purposes, you can nest up to six levels of groups.
55038956829238418
To create a group
1. Make sure that you have Editor access or the GroupCreator role in the Domino Directory on the registration server.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
4. Select Domino Directories, and then select Groups.
5. Clihk Add Group.
6. Enter a name for the group in the Group Name field. Use any of these characters: A - Z, 0 - 9, & - . _ ' / (ampersand, dash, period, space, underscore, apostrophe, and forward slash) for the name. A group name can be a maximum of 64 characters in length. For easier administration, use a name without spaces. Do not use a name that is in use as the name of an organizational unit in the hierarchical name scheme.o
Note
Don't use(a 4-digit name for a group. For example, don't use 5001 as a group name.r
7. Select a group type from the Group type field. The Group type specifies the purpose of the group and determines the views in the Domino Directory where the group name appears. For example, mailing list groups appear in the Mail Users view, and access control groups appear in the Access Control view. Using specific group types improves performance by reducing the size of view indexes in the Domino Directory.
Group type
0'mNU
Purpose
Multi-purpose
0'mNU
Use for a group that has multiple purposes -- for example, mail, ACLs, and so on
Access Control List only
0'mNU
Use for adding to ACLs
Mail only
0'mNU
Use for mailing list groxps
Servers only
0'mNU
Use for server groups
Deny List only
0'mNU
Use to add terminated users or other users. The Administration Process cannot delete any member of the group.
8. (Optional) Enter a description of the group in the Description field.
9. Click Members, select user(s), sexver(s), or group(s) to add, click Add, and then click OK.
10. Click Save and Close.
408470185629229765
To add members to a group
1. Make sure that you have Editor access or the GroupCreator role in the Domino Directory on the registration server.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
4. Select Domino Directories, and xhen select Groups.
5. Open the appropriate Group document.
6. Click Edit Group.
7. Click Members, select user(s), server(s), or group(s) to add, click Add, and then click OK.
8. Click Save and Close.
62698662429208233
To delete members from a group
1. Make sure that you have Editor access or the GroupCreator role in the Domino Directory on the registration server.
2. From the Domino Ahministrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
4. Select Domino Directories, and then select Groups.
5. Open the appropriate Group document.
6. Click Edit Group.
7. Click Members, select user(s), server(s), or group(s) to delete, click Remove, and click OK. To remove all members from the group, do not select any members; just click Remove All.
8. Click Save anh Close.
318268387229277569
To create a Terminations group
You may want to create a group for people who no longer have access to specific servers in your organization. When you are deleting a person from the Domino Directory, you can then add that person's name to a Terminations group that is assigned a group type of Deny List Only. This is particularly useful for preventing terminated employees from accessing servers.
1. Create a group named Terminhtions and assign it a group type of Deny List Only. For more information on creating groups, see "
, but on thh Delete User Options dialog box, in the field "Add to group", enter the group name Terminations. Click OK
3. Continue the delete process as usual.
See Also
Click here
Creating Group and Person documents with the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Using groups
Click here
Click here
Managing groups
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
Before registering users, create a User Setup Profile to define some settings that appear by default on user workstations and in Location documents. The defaults you specify can include Internet and passthru server settings, as well as a set of specific databases that appear on each user's workspace. User Setup Profiles make registering users easy and ensure a level of consistency in user settinhs. In addition, when you assign settings such as default connections to remote servers (which creates Connection documents), you make user setup tasks easier.
When you register users, you associate them with a specific profile so they receive a specific group of settings. You may want to create multiple profiles in your organization, each one tailored to a particular group of users. For example, you can create profiles to use when registering people in the marketing department or people who whrk on the east coast.
Before you create the profile, make sure that you have already set up your Domino system for any or all of the following:o
Domain search server
Web Navigator and InterNotes
v server (the server that stores the Web Navigator database)
Databases that you want add to the user workspacen
Mobile directory (or client directory) catalogs
Passthru servers, LAN servers, Internet servers, and remote servers. The usex setup program creates a Connection document in each user's Personal Address Book for servers you specify in the profile.
TCP/IP and NDS Notes name servers
Host domains where Java applets are assumed to be safe
Proxy servers
After you create and assign a User Setup Profile, you can modify or add settings and then distribute the new profile to users.
See Also
Click here
Creating a User Setup Profile
Click here
Click here
Defining default settings for users
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
To make a database available to users in different locations, on different networks, or in different time zones, you create replicas. All replicas share a replica ID which is assigned when the database is first created. The file names of xwo replicas can be different, and each replica can contain different documents or have a different database design; however, if their replica IDs are identical, replication can occur between them.
As users add, edit, and delete documents in different replicas of a database, the content in the replicas is no longer identical. To ensure that the content in all replicas remains synchronized, you use Connection documents to schedule replication between the servers that store the replicas. Then muhtiple sites, teams, and users can make changes to a database and share those changes with everyone else who has access to that database. In addition, using replicas and scheduling replication reduces network traffic. Users never need to connect to a single central server that stores the only replica of a particular database; instead, they can access a replica of that database on one or more local servers.
These distributed replicas can also be Web sites that are hosted on different Domino serxers. Then users aren't dependent on one server when they attempt to access critical applications over the Internet. If one server is unavailable, users can access another replica of the database on another server. You can also use replicas to help manage ongoing Web site design. On one server, you can set up a Web staging area where you design and test new pages. When the design changes are tested and ready to be released, you can replicate this server with the server storing the replica of the Web site thht is available to users. By using replicas and replication this way, you prevent Web users from seeing your "work-in-progress."
A replica of a database isn't the same as a copy of a database that you make by choosing File - Database - Copy. Although a copy of a database may look the same as the original database, a copy doesn't share a replica ID with the original database and so it can't replicate with it. e
For an example of setting up replicas, see the chapter "Sample Domino Syxtem Configuration."
174150112029205031
Deciding when to create a replica
Plan your replica strategy carefully, and create replicas on servers only when necessary. The more replicas, the greater the demand on server and network resources and the greater the need for additional maintenance. To prevent unnecessary proliferation of replicas, assign Create Replica server access to only a few administrators. Then tell users and application developers to send their requhsts for new replicas to these administrators.
Create a replica of a database to:
Improve performance of a heavily used database
Distribute network traffic
Keep a database that you're redesigning separate from a production version of the database
Keep a database available even if one server goes down
Make a database available to users in remote locations
Provide a replica containing only a subset of information that ix relevant to a particular workgroup
Set up Domino system administration -- for example, you must create replicas of the Domino Directory, the Administration Requests database, and other critical system databases
Place a replica of a master template on each server that stores a database that inherits from the master template
Create a backup database from which you can restore information if data becomes corrupted; since corrupted data often replicates, use this only hs a secondary backup method.
Keep in mind that two replicas will contain slightly different content between replications. If users need access to the most up-to-date information in a database, you can create replicas on clustered servers and then set up replication in clusters. In a cluster, all replicas are always identical because each change immediately replicates to other servers in the cluster.n
See Also
Click here
Sample Domino Systhm Configuration
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
6Pfue
&Arial
For server-to-server replication, the Replicator on one server calls another Domino server at scheduled times. By defaulx, the Replicator is loaded at server startup.
To schedule replication between servers, you create Connection documents that describe when servers connect to update replicas. As users add, edit, and delete documents in a database, the replicas contain slightly different information until the next time the servers replicate. Because replication transfers only changes to a database, the network traffic, server time, and connection costs are kept to a minimum.
During scheduled replicaxion, by default, the initiating server first pulls changes from the destination server and then pushes changes to the destination server. As an alternative, you can schedule replication so that the initiating server and destination server each pull changes or so that the initiating server pulls changes only or pushes changes only.
You can also use the server commands Pull, Push, and Replicate to initiate replication between servers.
174150112029205031
Replicatioh, step-by-step
1. The Replicator remains idle until Server A initiates replication to Server B.
2. As a security precaution before replication, the two servers authenticate their identities in an exchange involving their public and private keys. First, the two servers find a certificate in common. Next, they test each other's certificate to ensure it is authentic.
3. The two servers compare lists of databases to identify databases with identical replica IDs(
4. The servers check the time when each database was last modified to see if that time is more recent than the date of the last successful replication event recorded in the replication history. This step enables servers to determine that a database needs to be replicated.
5. For each modified database, both servers build a list of the document, design element, and ACL changes that occurred since the last replication with the other server.
6. For each modifihd database, Server A checks the database ACL to determine what changes Server B can make to its replica, and Server B checks the ACL to determine what changes Server A can make to its replica.
7. The transfer of document, design, and ACL changes takes place. For documents, the servers replicate only the fields that have changed, rather than replicating the entire documents. For documents that were deleted, deletion stubs remain, enabling the replicator to replicate the deletions. To save dixk space, Domino removes these deletion stubs according to the purge interval that is set in the database replication settings.
8. One of the following occurs:v
If replication completes successfully, Server A uses the time stamp from Server B to record in the replication history the time when replication was completed. Server B uses the time stamp from Server A to do the same.
If replication fails to complete successfully, the time stamps aren't recorded in the rexlication history so that future replications use the earlier time stamp. The replication failure is recorded in the Replication Events view of the log file.
Planning scheduled replication between servers
Because replication can involve the movement of large amounts of data, how you set up and schedule replication has significant performance consequences. A well-planned replication schedule, tailored to your company's infrastructure and usage patterns, prhvents uneven server workloads and excessive network congestion. Regularly scheduled replication ensures replicas remain synchronized.
Consider the following when establishing a replication schedule:
Click here
Replication topology
Click here
Click here
The number of Connection documents you needt
Click here
Click here
The type of replication thht's appropriate
Click here
Click here
When replication will occur
Click here
Click here
The databases that will replicateq
Click here
Click here
The priority of databases that will replicatea
Click here
Click here
A time limit for replication
Click here
Click here
Multiple replicators
Click here
See Also
Click here
Connecting two servers on a LAN
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
&Arial
You add the names of servers to a database
Click here
ACL in the same way that you add the names of people.
Click here
The access lexel given to a server in an ACL determines what, if any, changes that server can replicate to the replica. This table describes access levels in terms of server access, from the highest access to the lowest.
Access level
Allows a server to push these changest
Assign to
Manager
ACL settings
Click here
Database encryption settings
Click here
Click here
Replication settings
Click here
All elements allowed by lower access levels
Servers you want to use as a source for ACL changes. For tight database security, give this access to as few servers as possible. In a hub-and-spoke server configuration, you typically give the hub server Manager access.
Designer
Design elements
All elements allowed by lower access levels
Servers you want to use as the source for design changes. Use Manager access instead if you want one server to control ACL and design changes.
Editor
All new documents~
All changes to documents
Servers that users use only to add and modify documentx. In a hub-and-spoke configuration, you typically give the spoke servers Editor access.
Author
New documents
No servers. You don't typically use this access for servers.
Reader
No changes; server can only pull changes
Servers that should never make changes. Servers in the OtherDomainServers group are often given Reader achess.
Depositor
New documents. Also prevents the server from pulling changes.
No servers. You don't typically use this access for servers.
No Access
No changes. Also prevents the server from pulling changes.
Servers to which you want to deny access. Servers in the OtherDomainServers group are sometimes given No Access.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
A database that doesn't replicate should have at least one server in its ACL to serve as the administration server for the database. This allows the Administration Process on a server to update names in the ACL when names in the organization change.m
174150112029205031
Access level privileges
For each(access level, you can select or deselect these
Click here
privileges
Click here
Create documents
Delete documents
Create personal agents
Create personal folders/viewsc
Create shared folders/views
Create LotusScript/Java agents
Read public documents
Write public documents
In general, for servers, enable all the privileges that the selected accesx level allows. This ensures that the server has access that is as high as users might have and can replicate all user changes. However, to prevent certain changes from replicating without deselecting privileges for each user, you can deselect a particular privilege for a server entry in the ACL. For example, to prevent all document deletions made in a database on a particular server from replicating, deselect "Delete documents" in the ACL entry for the server. Then when users who have "Delete documents" ahcess in the ACL delete documents, the deletions don't replicate.
See Also
Click here
Guidelines for setting server access to databases
Click here
Click here
Default server groups in an ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
=" ue
&Arial
You can use either of these methods to create replicas:e
Click here
Use the Administration Process
Click here
to create replicas of multiple databases on multiple destination servers
Click here
Manually create one replica
Click here
of a database if you don't have access to the Domino Administrator or if you want to adjust replication and other settings as you create the replica
When you create a replica, with the Administration Process or manually, you can use scheduled replication to populate the replica rather than populate it immediately. New, unpopulated replicas are known as replica stubs. When the Administration Process creates a replica stub, it's a wildcard replica stub, which meahs that any server, not just the server used to create the replica stub, can populate the replica stub. If there are several replicas of a database, the wildcard replica stub is likely to be populated more quickly than if only the server that created the replica could populate it.
For information on creating replicas on Notes clients, see Notes 5 Help.
For information on the Administration Process, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
DP15aLP
Setting up servers to use modemsServer Configuration
Remote servers\setting upServers\remote connectionsContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_TO_USE_MODEMSTopic1Setting up servers to use modemsAboutH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_COHNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up servers to use h Network Dial-up connectionServer Configuration
Connection documents\Network DialupNetwork Dialup\setting up servers to useContentsAboutH_OVERVIEW_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_TO_USE_A_REMOTE_ACCESS_SERVICE_(NETWORK_DIALUP)Topic1Setting up servers to use a Network Dial-up connectionAboutH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
VRe%>
Setting up servers to use passthruServer Configuration
Passthru servers\setting up servers to useContentsAboutH_OVERVIEW_SETTING_UP_PASSTHRU_SERVERSTopic1Setting up servers to use passthruAboutH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_CONNECTIONS03 Admhnistering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up servers for Internet accessServer Configuration
Internet\setting up servers forServers\setting up for Internet accessContentsOverviewH_TO_MAKE_A_DOMINO_SERVER_AVAILABLE_ON_THE_INTERNET_OVERTopic1Setting up servers for Internet accessOverviewH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using scripts to access an X.25 network, modem pool, or security deviceServer Configuration
Modem pool\accessing with scriptsScripts\describedSecurity devices\accessing with scriptsX.25 network\accessing with scriptsContentsStepsH_ACCESSING_AN_X25_NETWORK_MODEM_POOL_OR_SECURITY_DEVICETopic1Using scripts to ahcess an X.25 network, modem pool, or security deviceStepsH_TYPES_OF_REMOTE_ACCESS_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Server-to-server connectionsServer Configuration
Connection documents\describedServers\connectingContentsAboutH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONSTopic1Server-to-server connectionsAboutH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Planning a topology for server connectionsServer Configuration
Server topology\planningContentsAboutH_PLANNING_A_TOPOLOGY_FOR_SERVER_CONNECTIONSTopic1Planning a topology for server connectionsAboutH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Servhr Connections
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How servers make a connectionServer Configuration
Servers\connections betweenContentsAboutH_HOW_SERVERS_MAKE_A_HONNECTIONTopic1How servers make a connectionAboutH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating server connectionsServer Configuration
.AContentsOverviewH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_OVERTopic1Creating server connectionsOverviewH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
Print
pubnames_v_Connections
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Tracing network connectionsServer Configuration
Connections\tracingNetwork connections\tracingServers\tracing connectionsTracing\network connectionsContentsOverviewH_TRACE_CONNECTIONS_OVERTopic1Tracing network connectionsOverviewH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONS03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Setting up external domain lookupsServer Configuration
Connections\external domainDomains\setting up external lookupsEDNI document\describedExternal Domain Network Information document\describedServe{s\connecting to external domainContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_EXTERNAL_DOMAIN_SERVER_LOOKUPS_OVERTopic1Setting up external domain lookupsOverviewH_SERVER_TO_SERVER_CONNECTIONS
H_TRACE_CONNECTIONS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_220830643229216834=To set up an External Domain Network Information document03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
Print
pubnames_v_External_Domain_Network_Information
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
`SQgte
Setting up Notes usersServer Configuration
Notes users\setting upUsers\setting up Notes and non-NotesContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_USERSTopic1Setting up Notes usersStepsH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER03 Administering the Domino Sys{em05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
r4>,wte
Creating and modifying groupsServer Configuration
Gro{ps\adding members toGroups\creating and modifyingGroups\deleting members fromUsers\adding to GroupsContentsStepsH_CREATING_AND_MODIFYING_GROUPS_STEPSTopic1Creating and modifying groupsStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_USERS
H_CREATING_AND_MODIFYING_GROUPS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_55038956829238418=To create a groupH_USING_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_408470185629229765=To add members to a groupH_USING_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_62698662429208233=To delete members from a groupH_CREATING_AND_MODIFYING_GROUPS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_318268387;29277569=To create a Terminations group03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?PrintDIALOG 3022 256
`SQgte
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The User Setup+ProfileServer Configuration
User Setup Profiles\describedContentsStepsH_CREATING_A_USER_SETUP_PROFILETopic1The User Setup ProfileStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_USERS03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
Print
`SQgte
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Replicas and replicationServer Configuration
Database replicas\describedReplicas\describedReplication\describedContentsOverviewH_REPLICAS_OVERTopic1Replicas and replicationOverviewH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_ABOUT_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_174150112029205031=Deciding when to create a replica03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How server-to-server replication works Server Configuration
Replication\describedContentsAboutH_ABOUT_HOW_REPLICATIKN_WORKS_Topic1How server-to-server replication works AboutH_REPLICAS_OVER
H_ABOUT_HOW_REPLICATION_WORKS__MIDTOPIC_174150112029205031=Replication, step-by-stepH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_AND_REPLICATION=Planning scheduled replication between servers03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting server access for proper database replicationServer Configuration
Access level privileges\databaseDatabases\access level privilegesReplicas\access levelsReplication\access levelsReplication\deleted documentsServers\access levels forContentsOverviewH_SETTING_ACCESS_FOR_PROPER_DATABASE_REPLICATION_OVERTopik1Setting server access for proper database replicationOverviewH_REPLICAS_OVER
H_SETTING_SERVER_ACCESS_FOR_PROPER_DATABASE_REPLICATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_174150112029205031=Access level privileges06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
elopm
Creating replicas on serversServer Configuration
Administration Process\creating replicas withReplica stubs\wildcardReplicas\creatingWildcards\replica stubsContentsOverviewH_CREATING_A_REPLICA_ON_A_SERVERTopic1Creating replicas on serversOverviewH_REPLICAS_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
=" ue
Replication settingsServer Configuration
Replication\customizingReplication\settingsContentsOverviewDIALOG 2695 2695H_REPLICATION_SETTING[_OVERTopic1Replication settingsOverviewH_REPLICAS_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
Scheduling times for replicationServer Configuration
Priority\replication andReplication\examplesReplication\priority andReplication\scheduling for a list of timesReplication\scheduling for a specific timeReplication\scheduling for a time rangeReplication\scheduling for different daysReplication\scheduling times for replicationReplication\time zones, andScheduled replication\time zones, andScheduling replication\different days, andScheduling replication\lists of times, andScheduling replication\scheduling times for replicationScheduling replication\specific times, andScheduling replication\staggering schedules, andScheduling replication\time ranges, andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMEP_FOR_REPLICATIONTopic1Scheduling times for replicationAboutH_REPLICAS_OVER
H_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_290082268829217073=Scheduling replication for one specific timeH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_290142268829217074=Scheduling replication for a list of timesH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_290142268829217075=Scheduling replication for a time range with a repeat intervalH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_2901422688292170760Scheduling replication for a time range without a repeat intervalH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_232483648029228121=Scheduling replication for different days of the weekH_ABOUT_SCHEDULING_TIMES_FOR_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_110456486429227918=Staggering schedules03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
Connection documents\disablingReplication\disablingContentsStepsH_DISABLING_REPLICATION_STEPSTopic1Disablin` replicationStepsH_REPLICAS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Forcing immediate replicationServer Configpration
Pull server commandReplicate server commandReplication\manualContentsStepsH_FORCING_IMMEDIATE_REPLICATION_STEPSTopic1Forcing immediate replicationStepsH_REPLICAS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
H_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_279233107229233746=Domain CatalogH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_279233107229233745=Domain Catalog serverH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_194606870429315252=Search from NotesH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_279233107229233747=Search from the WebH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_191925820829238203=Domain Search and Release 4 Database Catalo`sH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_93879273629238360=Domain Search and single-database full-text search03 Administering the Domino System07 Setting up Domain Search
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
qZv%W
-nxCd
Setting up Domain SearchServer Configuration
.AContentsWays toH_SETTING_UP_DOMAIN_SEARCH_STEPSTopic1Setting up Domain SearchWays toH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER03 Administering the Domino System07 Setting up Domain Search
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Decommissioning a Domain Catalog serverServer Configuration
Domain Catalog server\decommissioningServers\decommissioningContentsStepsH_DECOMMISSIONING_A_DOMAIN_CATALOG_SERVER_61?4_STEPSTopic1Decommissioning a Domain Catalog serverStepsH_WHAT_IS_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Calendars and schedulingServer Configuration
Calendor and scheduling\describedCalendar and scheduling\exampleFree Time database\clusteredFree Time database\describedScheduling\example ofContentsExamplesH_CALENDARS_AND_SCHEDULINGTopic1Calendars and schedulingExamplesH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_CALENDARS_AND_SCHEDULING_MIDTOPIC_283608118429202997=Using Clustered Free Time databasesH_EXAMPLE_OF_SCHEDULING_A_MEETING_EX=Example of scheduling a meetingH_EXAMPLE_OF_FREE_TIME_QUERY_SEARCH_EX_MIDTOPIC_290117091229208204=Users in the same domainH_EXAMPLE_OF_FREE_TIME_QUERY_SEARCH_EX_MIDTOPIC_290117091229208205=Users in different domainsH_EXAMPLE_OF_FREE_TIME_QUERY_SEARCH_EX_MIDTOPIC_290117091229208206=Users in other calendar domains03 Administering the Domino System08 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up schedulingServer Configuration
Scheduling\setting upContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_SCHEDULINGTopic1Setting up schedulingStepsH_CALENDARS_AND_SCHEDULING
H_SETTING_UP_SCHEDULING_MIDTOPIC_111225836829198743=For users in the same Domino domainH_SETTING_UP_SCHEDULING_MIDTOPIC_111225836829198744=For users in adjacent Domino domainsH_SETTING_UP_SCHEDULIOG_MIDTOPIC_111225836829198744=For users in non-adjacent Domino domainsH_SETTING_UP_SCHEDULING_MIDTOPIC_111225836829198745=For users of Lotus Organizer or IBM OfficeVision03 Administering the Domino System08 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the Resource Reservations databaseServer Configuration
Resource Reservations database\creatingResource Reservations database\describedContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_THE_RESOURCE_RESERVATIONS_DATABASETopic1Setting up the Resource Reservations databaseStepsH_CALENDARS_AND_SCHEDULING
H_SETTING_UP_THE_RESOURCE_RESERVATIONS_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_111165836829198743=To set up the _esource Reservations database03 Administering the Domino System08 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating Site Profile and _esource documents Server Configuration
Resource documents\creatingResource documents\describedSite Profile documentsContentsStepsH_CREATING_SITE_PROFILE_AND_RESOURCE_DOCUMENTS_Topic1Creating Site Profile and Resource documents StepsH_CALENDARS_AND_SCHEDULING
H_CREATING_SITE_PROFILE_AND_RESOURCE_DOCUMENTS__MIDTOPIC_111165836829198743=To create a Site Profile documentH_CREATING_SITE_PROFILE_AND_RESOURCE_DOCUMENTS__MIDTOPIC_111165836829198744=To create a Resource document03 Administering toe Domino System08 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
H_HOLIDAY_DOCUMENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_110080214429233737=To view Holiday documents that Domino shipsH_HOLIDAY_DOCUMENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_110080214429233738=To modify an existing Holiday documentH_HOLIDAY_DOCUMENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_110080214429233739=To create a Holiday document03 Administering tho Domino System08 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
Print
pubnames_v_Holidays
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
O=Lotus No
Partitioned serversServer Configuration
Partitioned servers\describedPartitioned servers\failures and shutdownsPartitioned servers\how many to installPartitioned servers\system requirementsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERSTopic1Partitioned serversAboutH_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_MIDTOPIC_327432403229223109=Deciding how many partitioned servers to installH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_MIDTOPIC_327432403229223110=System requirements03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
Print
[atIb^
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Whenever possible, schedule replication for times when there is less activity on the network -- before or after work or at lunch time.
You can |chedule server-to-server replication to happen at specific times, or you can specify a time range with a repeat interval. By scheduling replication for a time range, you ensure that the servers exchange information several times a day. After the server makes a successful connection, it waits the amount of time specified in the "Repeat interval of" field on the Connection document before calling the other server again.
For example, suppose a Connection document schedules Hub-E/East/Acme to call HR-E/East/Acme from 8 AM until 5 PM with a repeat interval of 120 minutes. If Hub-E/East/Acme calls and replicates successfully with HR-E/East/Acme at 8:30 AM, Hub-E/East/Acme does not place the next call until 10:30 AM.R
Be sure to consider time zones when you schedule replication between servers in different countries. You want to replicate the documents created during each time zone's peak business hours and schedule replication for an off-peak time. For example, to schedule replication bltween a server in New York and a server in Germany, schedule replication between 3 AM and 1 PM Eastern Standard Time (EST) to correspond to Germany's business hours, which are six hours later than EST.
The default replication time setting is 8 AM to 10 PM, with a repeat interval of 360 minutes.
290082268829217073
Scheduling replication for one specific time
Use a specific time when you schedule replication of low
priority databases, when daily update| of databases are sufficient, or when you're certain that attempts by the server to connect are successful after just a few retries -- for example, on different networks at the same site. You might want to replicate low-priority databases at night when the rates are less expensive or there is less load on the system.
In the Connection document, enter a specific time in the "Call at times" field -- for example, 8 AM. Enter 0 for the repeat interval, since the connection isn't set up for a time,range. The server calls and attempts to connect at 8 AM. If unsuccessful, the server tries to connect for an hour. Whether or not the connection succeeds, the next call does not occur until 8 AM the next morning.
290142268829217074
Scheduling replication for a list of times
Use a list of times to schedule replication for medium and low
priority databases and for when a few daily updates of databases are sufficient or when you're certain that connection attempts wlll be successful after just a few retries -- for example, for a connection on different networks at the same site.
In the Connection document, enter a list of specific times in the "Call at times field" -- for example, 8 AM, 1 PM, 4 PM. Enter 0 for the repeat interval, since the connection isn't set up for a time range. The server calls at the first time specified, 8 AM. If unsuccessful, the server retries for up to an hour, until 9 AM. Whether or not the call succeeds, the next call occurs a| the next scheduled time, 1 PM. If unsuccessful, the server retries for up to an hour, until 2 PM. This process continues for each specific time you specify.
290142268829217075
Scheduling replication for a time range with a repeat interval
Specify a time range when you schedule replication for high priority databases. In the Connection document, enter a time range in the "Call at times" field, and enter a number of minutes in the "Repeat interval" field -- for exalple, the "Call at times" field is 8 AM - 5 PM and the "Repeat interval" field is 120 minutes.
If the first call is unsuccessful at 8 AM, the server retries periodically until it successfully establishes a connection and replicates. If the server can't connect, it keeps trying until the end of the time range, 5 PM. If the server successfully replicates, it calls again 120 minutes after the previous call ended. s
290142268829217076
Scheduling replication for a time |ange without a repeat interval
Use a time range without a repeat interval for medium and low-priority databases. Also use a time range without a repeat interval when daily updates of a database are sufficient or when you know that a long retry period is necessary -- for example, if you have busy phone lines and you know it will take several attempts to make the connection.
In the Connection document, enter a time range in the Call at times field -- for example, 8 AM - 5 PM. Enter,0 for the repeat interval. The server attempts the first call at the start of the time range, 8 AM. If unsuccessful, the server tries again and again.r
The time between call attempts increases with each unsuccessful attempt. The server retries the call for the entire range or until a connection is made. After a failed call, the server retries periodically for the entire call range. However, it does not call again after a successful exchange of information.
23248364802922<121
Scheduling replication for different days of the week
You can create a different replication schedule for different days of the week. In the Connection document, enter the days on which you want replication to occur.
For example, create two Connection documents: one that schedules replication for Monday to Friday and another that schedules replication for Saturday and Sunday.
110456486429227918
Staggering schedules
You can |se staggered schedules on hub-and-spoke topology. For example, you could schedule the first server to replicate from 8 AM to 10 AM, the second server from 8:05 AM to 10:05 AM, and so on. You can create a simple round-robin schedule for a hub server and its spokes, repeating as often as is practical. This process spreads all data within a hub's sphere of influence quickly.
See Also
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click lere
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
6Pfue
6Pfue
&Arial
To customize replication, you can:
Click here
Specify replication direction
Click here
Click here
Schedule times for replication
Click here
Click here
Replicate only specific databasese
Click here
Click here
Replicate databases by priority
Click here
Click here
Limit replication time
Click here
Click here
Use multiple replicators
Click here
Click here
Refuse replication requestsa
Click here
Click here
Disable replication
Click here
Click here
Force immediate replicationo
Click here
See Also
Click here
Scheduling times for replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication i
Click here
kxtue
&Arial
You can see a graphical representation of each server's replication schedule at a glance with the Domino Administrator. Each server's replication schedule appears separately, even if the server is a member of a group listed in the "Lestination server" field in a Connection document.
You can also see a graphical representation of your replication topology. Replication topology maps are most useful for quickly displaying the replication topology and for letting you easily follow connections between servers. A
Each server, network, cluster, and cc:Mail Post Office has its own icon. A line represents each replication connection. A replication connection between two servers appears as a broken red line. Multiple lonnections between servers appear as lines superimposed on each other.o
351136041629231155
To view replication schedules
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Replication tab.
2. Click Replication schedule.
3. Patterns represent the replication status of each server: Schedule is being performed; Schedule is complete; Schedule isn't complete.
253038812829227933
To start the Topology maps taskT
The Maps task must be running on the server you're administering in order to view replication topology from the Domino Administrator. As long as the Topology maps task runs, it refreshes topology information every night at midnight.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Servers - Status tab.
2. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Load.
3. For "Load Domino Server task," select Topology maps.
4. Click,OK.
253038812829227934
To display the replication topology map
1. From the Bookmarks pane, select the server for which you want to create a topology map.
2. Click the Replication tab.
3. Do one of the following:
Click "Replication topology by connections" to view connections between the server you selected above and all the servers connected by Connection documents or clusters.
Click "Replication topollgy by clusters" to view all clusters and the servers connected to them,.
4. (Optional) Double-click any server in the topology map to make that server the center of the map.
5. (Optional) Double-click a connection to open the corresponding Connection document in the Domino Directory.
You can move around the topology map by using keyboard commands -- for example, you can zoom in and zoom out with the plus (+) and minus (-) keys.
See Also
Click here
Replication and system topology
Click here
Click here
Scheduling times for replication
Click here
Click here
Using the Domino Administrator
Click here
YzDse
&Arial
After you create Connection documents and enable replication, you can test replication. Before you begin testing, make sure that your network is running properly and modems are available.
To test replication, create a new replica lf a database, make a change in it, and then replicate the change to the other replica databases. You can either force replication by using the Replicate, Pull, or Push commands at the console, or you can wait to see if the schedule you set up works. If you're setting up a new server that does not have any databases on it, you can use the Domino Directory to test replication by adding or editing a document in the Domino Directory.
As you test replication, check the console to view messages that,display as the Replicator starts. The Replicator lists the databases that are replicated before completing the replication process. Use the Show Tasks command at the console to see which server tasks are currently running.
For replication information, check the replication history in the Database Properties box, and check the log (LOG.NSF) for the replication summary. To check the log, from the Domino Administrator, click the Replication tab and click Replication events.
To check,that replication connections are intact, you can
Click here
view replication topology
Click here
See Also
Click here
Replication - Problems and error messages
Click here
Click here
Tools for troubleshooting replication
Click here
kxtue
&Arial
To prevent changes from replicating -- for example, when you test replication on several servers or you don't want certain databases to replicate --,you can disable replication. To disable replication, edit the Connection document in the Domino Directory. In the Scheduled Connection section, deselect Replication in the Tasks field.i
See Also
Click here
Disabling and enabling replication of a database
Click here
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers,for replication
Click here
6Pfue
&Arial
You can replicate changes to critical databases, such as the Domino Directory, without waiting for a scheduled connection. After you create Connection documents to schedule server-to-server replication, you can use a server command to force immediate replication.
There are many situations when forcing replication is necessary. For example, you may want to update a database immediately, without waiting for scheduled replication to occur, or you might need to replicate with a different slrver because the usual server is unavailable. You can force immediate replication to trace replication and mail routing problems or to force changes to critical system databases -- such as in the Domino Directory -- to spread quickly through the domain. When you force immediate server-to-server replication, you can initiate replication in one or in both directions.
Command
p&oIU
Result
Click here
Replicate
Click here
p&oIU
Replicates changes to databases in both directiols; Domino performs Pull-Push replication.
Click here
Pull
Click here
p&oIU
Replicates changes to databases in one direction where the initiating server pulls changes from the other server
Click here
Push
Click here
p&oIU
Replicates changes to databases in one direction where the initiating server pushes da|abase changes to the other server.
See Also
Click here
Forcing a server database to replicate
Click here
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
6Pfue
&Arial
Domain Search allows users to search an entire Notes domain for documents, files, and attachments that match a search query. Domain Search is centralized on a Domain Catalog server, which uses a Domain Catalog to control whilh databases and file systems to index. Domain Search also filters results to users based on their access to the indexed databases and file systems. c
The Domain Indexer builds a central Domain Index on the Domain Catalog server that all Domain Search queries run against. The Domain Catalog can replicate to other servers. The Domain Indexer generates the index files directly on the Domain Catalog server, and these files do not replicate to other servers. If your organization has more than six tl eight Domino servers, Lotus strongly recommends you dedicate a server as the Domain Catalog server. This computer should have no other purpose than to act as the indexing and search engine for the domain.
279233107229233746
Domain Catalog
The Domain Catalog is a database that uses the CATALOG.NTF design. The Catalog stores records indicating which databases and file systems the server should index and the forms used to search the index. By design, both the Domain,Catalog and the Domain Index reside on the Domain Catalog server. Database designers and managers set a database to be indexed by enabling the database property "Include in multi database indexing." Administrators can configure this setting for multiple databases using the Domino Administrator. Using the Domain Catalog, administrators specify which file systems to index.
279233107229233745
Domain Catalog server
When you implement Domain Search, be certain that thl Domain Catalog server is capable of handling the load of creating indexes and handling user queries. The Domain Catalog server should be fast, powerful, and have a large amount of disk space -- multiple processors, a large amount of RAM, and multiple high-volume drives will increase the efficiency and capabilities of your searches.S
Consider shortening the time it takes to run the Catalog task by splitting it among several Domain Catalog servers: Server A catalogs servers 1 to 25, Server B ca|alogs servers 26 to 50, Server C catalogs servers 51 to 75, and so on.n
Also consider clustering your Domain Catalog servers to ensure greater reliability and fault-tolerance and to balance the load from user queries. If you use clustered Domain Search servers, create a replica of the Domain Catalog on each of those clustered servers. t
For more information about clustering, see
Click here
Clustering basics
Click here
Fo| Domain Catalog servers running Microsoft Windows NT, Lotus recommends the following minimum configuration:
An Intel Pentium II 266 MHz processor
256MB RAM
Free disk space equal to approximately 75 percent of the size of the domain being indexed
194606870429315252
Search from Notes
As long as the designated Domain Catalog server is recorded in their Location documents, Notes users can perform domain searches.
For information on how Notes users execute a domain search, see Notes 5 Help.
279233107229233747
Search from the Web
Web clients have access to most Domain Search functionality, including search queries and result sets.
191925820829238203
Domain Search and Release 4 Database Catalogs
The Catalog task collects information about databases on all Domino servers in the domain and creates a document for each database in thl Domain Catalog. When collecting information from another Release 5 server that has a Release 5 catalog, the Catalog task uses pull replication to collect the documents that already exist in the catalog on the server. If the server is either an Release 4.x server (with or without a Release 4 catalog) or a Release 5 server that does not have a catalog, the Catalog task collects the needed information directly from each database on that server and creates a corresponding document for each database in the Domlin Catalog.
93879273629238360
Domain Search and single-database full-text search
Single-database full-text search indexes can coexist with a Domain Index. You may want to use a full-text index for compatibility with previous releases of Domino or Notes, or for servers with restricted user access. For more information about security and access, see
Click here
Domain Search security
Click here
See Llso
Click here
Setting up Domain Search
Click here
Click here
Decommissioning a Domain Catalog server
Click here
&Arial
To set up Domain Search, do the following:
1.
Click here
Enable Domain Search.
Click here
2.
Click here
Search fill systems.
Click here
3.
Click here
Include a database in a Domain Index.
Click here
4.
Click here
Use document content categories.
Click here
5.
Click here
Set up Domain Search for Notes clients.
Click here
6.
Click here
Customize Domain Search forms.
Click lere
7.
Click here
Understand security and Domain Search.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Domain Search
Click here
Click here
Decommissioning a Domain Catalog server
Click here
&Arial
If you want your Domain Catalog server to resume duty as a regular Domino server, or to be retired from duty altogether, you remove it from the appropriate group in the Domino Directory, edit its Server document, and then delete some files from its directory structure, as follows:
1. In the Domino Directory, click Groups in the view pane.
2. Select LocalDomainCatalogServers and click Edit Group.
3. On the Basics tab, in the Members field, remove the server you want to decommission.s
4. Click Save and Close.
Note
Users' Location documents are automatically updated with the name of your new Domain Catalog server by the Dynamic Client Configuration tool the next time they access thlir mail server.
5. Expand the Servers section in the view pane, and then click Servers.
6. Select the server that you want to decommission, and click Edit Server to open its Server document.
7. Click the Server Tasks - Domain Catalog tab.
8. In the Domain Catalog field, select Disabled and click OK.
Disabling the Domain Catalog automatically disables the Domain Indexer schedule on the next tab.
9. Click Save and Closl.
10. Delete the Domain Catalog (CATALOG.NSF) from the server.
11. Delete the FTDOMAIN.DI subdirectory from the server's Domino data directory.
See Also
Click here
Domain Search
Click here
&Arial
These sample mail routing configurations represent typical messaging implementations, however other configurations are possible. Use these sample configurations to help you plan and refine the messaging infrastructure in your organization:
Click here
Use one server for all Internet messages
Click here
Click here
Use one server for inbound and one server for outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Use two servers to balance Internet mail load
Click here
Click here
Set up mail routing in the local Internet domain
Click here
Clicl here
Set up mail routing between a third-party server and Domino in the same Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Use a smart host
Click here
Click here
Use all servers to route outbound mail and one to route internal mail
Click here
See Also
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Log_Replication=
value
Description:
Specifies the level of logging of replication events performed by the current server:
0 - Do not log replication events
1 - Log that a database is replica|ing
2 - Log summary information about each database
3 - Log information about each replicated document (both design and data documents)
4 - Log information about each replicated field
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
The calendar and scheduling features allow users to check the free time of other users, schedule meetings with them, and reserve resources, such as conference rooms and equipment. You can also define holidays that are particular to your organization or country. Users import this information directly into their personal calendars. Domino ships with a set of default Holiday documents, which you can modify.
Vhe calendar and scheduling features use the Schedule Manager (Sched task)
, the Calendar Connector (Calconn task), and the Free Time system (a combination of Sched, Calconn, and nnotes tasks) to operate. When you install Domino on a server (any server except a Directory server), the Sched and Calconn tasks are automatically added to the server's NOTES.INI file. When you start the server for the first time, the Schedule Manager creates a Free Time database (BUSYTIME.NSF for non-clustered mail&servers and CLUBUSY.NSF for clustered mail servers) and creates an entry in the database for each user who has filled out a Calendar Profile and whose mail file is on that server or on one of the clustered servers.
Each user can keep a personal calendar and create a Calendar Profile that identifies who may access the user's free time information and specifies when the user is available for meetings. When users invite other users to meetings, the Free Time system performs the free time&lookups. The Free Time system also searches for and returns information on the availability of resources. If the lookup involves searching in Free Time systems on different servers or scheduling applications, the Calendar Connector sends out the queries. When users schedule appointments in their calendars and reserve resources, the Schedule Manager task collects and updates that information in the Free Time database.
By default, the Schedule Manager has access to the Free Time database, so yov do not have to define the ACL for this database. o
283608118429202997
Using Clustered Free Time databasese
For clustered mail servers, the Schedule Manager creates the clustered Free Time database (CLUBUSY.NSF) the first time a server starts. The clustered version of the Free Time database works the same as the Free Time database (BUSYTIME.NSF). Each clustered server has a replica of the clustered Free Time database, which stores information about users whose maif files exist on servers in the cluster. s
If you add a previously non-clustered server to a cluster, the Schedule Manager deletes the BUSYTIME.NSF database on that server and creates CLUBUSY.NSF, which then replicates to server clustermates. If you remove a server from a cluster, the opposite occurs: Schedule Manager deletes CLUBUSY.NSF and creates BUSYTIME.NSF. Until the Schedule Manager validates the database by checking if the location of users' mail files has changed, the clustered Free Tfme database contains information about users whose mail server you removed from the cluster. This validation also occurs once each day (at 2 AM) to update free time information for users whose mail files have been added to or removed from a mail server. You can update the information at any time by entering the Tell Sched Validate command at the console.r
A benefit of clustered scheduling is that schedule information is always available, even when users' home servers are down. With non-clusterfd scheduling, if users home servers are not available, the Free Time database is not available for searching. l
Other advantages of using clustered scheduling are improved performance and reduced server traffic. Because the Free Time database is available from other members in a cluster, the server that receives a user's query does not have to search another server's Free Time database for schedule information about a user whose mail server is in the cluster.r
Fxample of scheduling a meeting
This section describes the process of scheduling a meeting when users share the same mail server and domain, have different domains, and use different scheduling applications.e
In the following examples, Kathy wants to check the free time of and schedule a meeting with three users -- Bob, who is in the same domain as Kathy; Robin, who is in a different domain; and Susan, who uses a different scheduling application (Lotus Organizer
290117091229208204
Users in the same domain
1. Kathy creates a meeting invitation and chooses to search for Bob's free time.
2. A free time query is sent to Kathy's mail server.
3. The Free Time system looks for Bob's name in the Free Time database (BUSYTIME.NSF or CLUBUSY.NSF) on Kathy's mail server.
If Bob and Kathy have the same mail server or if Bob's and Kathy's mail servers are part of a cluster, the Free Time system finds the fnformation and returns Bob's free time to Kathy.
If the Free Time system does not find any information on Bob, it converts Bob's name into a fully-qualified name.
Note
If Bob's mail server is unavailable and his Free Time database is not clustered, a message appears indicating that the server is unavailable, and the Find Time dialog box indicates that the invitee's information is unavailable.
4. Kathy's Domino Directory is chefked for Bob's Person document. When the Person document is found, the Calendar Connector sends the request to Bob's mail server. (The mail server is a field on the Person document.)
5. The Free Time system on Bob's mail server looks in its Free Time database and returns the information to Kathy via the Calendar Connector. If the Free Time system doesn't find any information, the query fails, and the Find Time dialog box indicates that Bob's information is unavailable.
690117091229208205
Users in different domains
1. Kathy creates a meeting invitation and chooses to search for Robin's free time. In addressing the invitation, Kathy specifies Robin's domain.
2. A query is sent to Kathy's mail server.
3. The Free Time system looks for Robin's name in the Free Time database on Kathy's mail server. It determines Robin's mail server is in a different domain.
4. Kathy's Domino Directory is searched for a document&that matches Robin's domain.
If the Free Time system finds an Adjacent Domain document, it looks at the Calendar server name field of the document for the name of a server that accepts calendar queries for Robin's domain. The Free Time system then forwards the query to this server for processing.
If the Free Time system finds an Adjacent Domain document with an empty Calendar server name field, it fails; and the Find Time dialog box indicates that Robin's information is unavailfble.
If the Free Time system finds a Non-adjacent Domain document, it looks at the "Route requests through Calendar server" field of the document for the name of the server (which is in a domain adjacent to Kathy's and Robin's) that accepts calendar queries for Robin's domain. The Free Time system then forwards the query to this server for processing.
If the Free Time system finds a Non-adjacent Domain document with an empty "Route requests through Calendar server" field, it failv; and the Find Time dialog box indicates that Robin's information is unavailable.
If the Free Time system doesn't find any domain documents, the query fails; and the Find Time dialog box indicates that Robin's information is unavailable.
290117091229208206
Users in other calendar domains
1. Kathy creates a meeting invitation and chooses to search for Susan's free time.
2. A query is sent to Kathy's mail server.
3. The&Free Time system looks for Susan's name in its Free Time database. It does not find the information, so it converts Susan's name into a fully qualified one.
4. Kathy's Domino Directory is searched for Susan's Person document.
5. The Free Time system looks in Susan's Person document and locates the name of her mail server in the Mail server field and the name of her calendar domain in the Calendar Domain field.
6. Because Susan is using Lotus Organizer as her&scheduling application, the Free Time system finds that her calendar domain does not match her mail server domain. The Free Time system then looks for a Domain document for the calendar domain.
7. The Free Time system finds a Foreign Domain document for Susan's calendar domain. The Calendar server field in the Foreign Domain document identifies the name of the server that accepts queries for Susan's domain; the "Calendar system" field identifies the name of the add-in program -- for example,&Organizer or IBM
OfficeVision
-- that actually does the free time lookup on Susan's server. The Free Time system forwards the query to the appropriate server (the server listed in the Calendar server field) for processing.t
If the Free Time system doesn't find a Foreign Domain document, the query fails; and the Find Time dialog box indicates that Susan's information is unavailable.
See Also
Click here
Setting up scheduling
Flick here
Click here
Setting up the Resource Reservations database
Click here
Click here
Creating Holiday documents
Click here
&Arial
How you set up scheduling depends on where users are located -- that is, in the same Domino domain or in different Domino domains -- and whether users use alternative scheduling applications, such as Lotus Organizer and IBM OfficeVision.
111225836829198743
For users in the same Domino domain
Scheduling is automatically set up for non-clustered and clustered Free Time databases. You need to create the Resource Reservations database so that users can search for and reserve resources.
111225836829198744
For users in adjacent Domino domains
1. Make sure that you already
Click here
set up Adjacent Domain documents
Click fere
in the Domino Directory to establish communication between the domains.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Choose the Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" box.
4. Click Messaging - Domains, and then open each appropriate Adjacent Domain document.
5. Click the Calendar Information tab, complete this field, and save the document:
Field
Enter
Calendar server name
The name of the server in the adjacent domain that accepts and processes all scheduling queries for that domain
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Set up the Resource Reservations database if you want to allow users to search for and reserve resources.
111225836829198744
For users in non-adjacent Domino domains
In order for two non-adjacent domains to do free time lookups between each other, you need to define a Calendar server in an intermediate domain that is adjacent to both the querying and the target domains.
Note
Free time lookups require reasonable network response time and direct LAN connections from the intermediate domain to the two separate non-adjacent domains.
1. Make sure that you alveady
Click here
set up Non-adjacent Domain documents
Click here
in the Domino Directory to establish communication between the domains.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Choose the Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" box.
4. Click Messaging - Domains, and then open each appropriate Non-adjacent Domain document.
5. Click the Calendar Information tab, complete this ffeld, and save the document:
Field
Enter
Route requests through calendar server
The name of a calendar server that is in a domain adjacent to both the querying and the target domains. This server accepts and forwards free time queries from the source to the target non-adjacent domain.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Set up the Resource Reservations database if you want to allow users to search for and reserve resources.
111225836829198745
For users of Lotus Organizer or IBM OfficeVision
Domino scheduling works with both Lotus Organizer and IBM OfficeVision. If users want to keep their schedules in either program, set up scheduling to include them. You need to create a Foreign Domain document for each alternative schefuling application.
1. Make sure you already set up a Foreign Domain document in the Domino Directory for each alternative scheduling application.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Choose the Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" box.
4. Click Messaging - Domains, and then open each appropriate Foreign Domain document.
5. Click the Calendar Information tab, complete these fields, and save the dfcument:
Fieldn
:'}OU
Enter
Calendar server name
:'}OU
The name of the server that is running the alternative scheduling programe
Calendar system
:'}OU
Choose either Organizer or OfficeVision from the list3
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. For Notes mail users who use a different scheduling application, enter the name of the foreign domain in the Calendar Domain field of each user's Person document.
7. Set up the Resource Reservations database if you want to allow users to search for and reserve resources.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Resource Reservations database
Click here
Clicf here
Creating Holiday documents
Click here
Click here
Calendars and scheduling
Click here
Click here
Meeting and resource scheduling - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
The Resource Reservations database is where users schedule&and manage meeting resources. Resources may include conference rooms and equipment, such as overhead projectors and video machines. Users can select a particular resource and reserve a time for it, or they can choose a time and let the Resource Reservations database display resources available during that time.
The Resource Reservations database contains three types of documents: Site Profile, Resource, and Reservation. A Site Profile document identifies the site where particular resources ave located. A Resource document defines the resource name -- for example, the name or number of the conference room. After you create Site Profile and Resource documents, the Schedule Manager tracks the free time of a resource the same way it tracks free time for users. To reserve a resource, a user can either create a Reservation document or add the resource to a meeting invitation.
111165836829198743
To set up the Resource Reservations database
1. Choose File&- Database - New.
2. Select the Resource Reservations (5.0) template (RESRC50.NTF) from the template list.
3. Enter the server that stores the database in the Server field.
4. Enter the name of the database in the Title field.
5. Enter a file name for the database in the File Name field.T
6. Click OK.
7. Choose File - Database - Access Control.s
8. List the names of all users who are authorized to crefte Resources and Site Profile documents and assign them the [CreateResource] role.
9. Create Site Profile and Resource documents.
See Also
Click here
Creating Site Profile and Resource documents R
Click here
Click here
Setting up schedulinga
Click here
Click here
Calendars and scheduling
Click here
Clfck here
Editing and deleting Resource documentsd
Click here
&Arial
A Site Profile document defines a particular site where a resource exists and associates that site with a Resource Reservations database and Domino Directory. You must create at least one Site Profile document before you can create Resource documents.a
When you create a Resource document, you define the resource name, type, and availability; and you specify who can reserve the resource. After you set up resources, users can search for free time of a resource and schedule the resource for a meeting while searching for free time and inviting users to the meeting. For each Resource document you create, the Administration Process creates a corresponding Resource document in the Domino Directory. During a free time query, the Free Time system searches thf Free Time database to find the location of these resources and returns information on the availability of both the resource and the invitees.
When you create a Site Profile or Resource document, the new resource is not available for users to schedule until the Administration Process adds the resource to the Domino Directory and the addition replicates to all relevant replicas (those on servers used for scheduling resources) of the Domino Directory.
111165836829198743
To create a Site Profile document
1. Make sure that you have the [CreateResource] role in the ACL of the Resource Reservations database.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab.
3. From the Servers pane, select the server you want to work from.
4. Open the Resource Reservations database, and select any view except Calendar, My Reservations, and Reservations Waiting for Approval.
5. Click New Site.
6. Complete these fields, and then click Save Profile:
Field
Enter
Site name
The name of the site where the resource exists -- for example, 50 West Lincoln Building
Domain name
The name of the domain where the Rfsource Reservations database resides
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
111165836829198744
To create a Resource document
1. Make sure that you have the [CreateResource] role in the ACL of the Resource Reservations database and that at least one Site Profile document has already been created.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab.
6. From the Servers pane, select the server you want to work from.
4. Open the Resource Reservations database.
5. Click New Resource.
6. From the Type tab, choose one as the Resource Type:
Room
Other -- if the resource is not a room
7. Click the Resource Information tab, and complete these fields:
Field
$'KOU
Entero
Name
$'KOU
A unique name that identifies the resource -- for example, a room number
Site
$'KOU
Click to display a list of available sites, and then choose one
Category
(Appears when you select Other as Resource Type)
$'KOU
Name
;for category of Resource -- for example, Electronic or AV. This field flso displays names of all previously entered Category values, which you can choose from.
Capacity
(Appears when you select Room as Resource Type)
$'KOU
The capacity of the resource, if it has one -- for example, the seating capacity of a room.
Description
$'KOU
A description of the resource -- for example, large conffrence room with a video monitor
Other comments
$'KOU
Text specific to this resource -- for example, conference room is good for smaller meetings
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Click the Owner Options tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
None
Click so that no owner is assigned to the resource and anyone can reserve the resource
Only owner can book resource
Click to assign someone as the Resource owner. Only the Resource owner can process Resource requests.r
Enter the name of the resource owner&in the Owner's name field.
Only select list of people can book resource
Click to allow only certain users access to the resource.
Enter the names of users allowed to reserve this resource in the List of names field. Any users not specified here cannot reserve this resource.
Only select list of people can book resource via autoprocessinf - all others require owner approval
Click to allow only certain users access to the resource and to assign a resource owner.
Enter the name of the resource owner in the Owner's name field. The owner is the person whom requests from other users (those not listed in List of names field) are forwarded to for approval and processing.
Enter the names of users allowed to reserve this resource in the List of names field.
Temporarily disable reservations
Click to prevent users from reserving a resource from their mail files. If this field is disabled, users can still reserve a resource manually in the Resource Reservations database.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
9. Click the Availability Settings tab, and enter in times on each day when the resource is availablf
10. Click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
Editing and deleting Resource documents
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Resource Reservations database
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Log_Sessions=
value
Description:
Specifies whether individual sessions are recorded in the log file and displayed on the console:
0 - Do not log individual sessions
1 - Log individual sessions
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Log All Client Events setting that is an Advanced server Setup option. You can also specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing thf NOTES.INI file
Click here
\)PjU
&Arial
Holiday documents provide a way for your organization to have a centrally managed collection of documents that contain information on scheduled holidays or events. Users select the type of Holiday documents to import and add the information to their personal calendars. Domino ships with pre-set Holiday documents that you can modify or deljte; you can also add Holiday documents specific to your organization's needs. Holiday documents are stored in the Domino Directory.
You categorize Holiday documents according to a group name. For example, you may have a group named "Full-time" that contains all the company holidays for full-time employees. The pre-set Holiday documents shipped with Domino have group names associated with countries -- for example, United States or Italy -- and the groups contain documents specific to holidays ij each country. As an administrator, you may want to modify or delete these documents to reflect your organization's needs. Then you can advise users to import a specific group and ensure that they have relevant and consistent information.d
You can add documents to an existing group by selecting that group when creating a new Holiday document. You can also create new groups by entering in a new group name in the Holiday document. Remember that your users import Holiday documents according to grjup name, not document name, so you want to plan how to organize documents in groups.
110080214429233737
To view Holiday documents that Domino shipsn
Domino ships with pre-set Holiday documents that contain information on holidays observed around the world. The Holiday documents are compiled into groups -- each group having the country name of its associated holidays. For example, the Italy group contains documents specific to Italian holidays.
1. Fzom the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the Domino Directory server in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Miscellaneous, and then click Holidays. The view displaying all the pre-set Holiday documents appears.
110080214429233738
To modify an existing Holiday document
When you modify or delete an existing Holiday document, users receive the modifications only when they choose to run import from their maij files.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the Domino Directory server in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Miscellaneous, and then click Holidays.
4. Click the appropriate Holiday document so that it opens.
5. Modify fields as you wish.
For more information on the fields, see the topic "To create a Holiday document."
110080214429233739
To crejte a Holiday document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the Domino Directory server in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Miscellaneous, and then click Holidays.
4. Click Add Holiday..
5. Click the Group field and do one:
Select an existing group to associate with the Holiday.
Create a new group by typing in a new Group name.
6. Enter values in tjese fields, and then click Save and Close.
Note
The availability of some fields in this table depends on previous field selections.
Field
Enter
Title
The name of the holiday -- for example, Christmas
Detailed description (Optional)o
A description of the holiday
Repeat
Choose how often the holiday repeats:
Yearly (default)
Monthly by Date
Monthly by Day
Custom
Start Date
The date from which the holiday begins. This date may be the actual date of the holiday (such as New Year's day) or it may be the date from which to start the holiday. For example, if your organization gives employees every other Friday off from June through August, enter June 1 as the Start Date and select "For" from the Continuing field to specify an end date of August 31.
This field is available for all Repeat options except Custom.
Repeat Dates
The date or dates the holiday falls on -- for example, 01/01/99, 01/02/2003.
This field is available only if you choose Custom in the Repeat field.
Continuing
Choose how long you want the holiday to repeat:
For -- Holiday repeats for an amount of time, which is a measured number of months or years
Unzil -- Holiday repeats until a specific date
This field is available for all Repeat options except Custom.
Repeat for/until
If you entered "For" in the Continuing field, select the number of years or months (depending on your Repeat field choice) you want to repeat the holiday.
If you enter "Until" in the Continuing field, select the date you want to repeat the holiday until.
This field is available for all Repeat options except Custom.
Repeat Interval
Choose how often holiday repeats by month and day.
This field is available only if you select Monthly by Day or Monthly by Date in the Repeat field.
Start from the end of month
Check this field if you want to create an invertjd relationship between the Start Date and the Repeat Interval fields. The event you schedule occurs on the day you specify from the end of the month. This field is useful for holidays or events that fall on the last days of a month.
For example, suppose you have a event that occurs bimonthly on the last day of the month. Because months contain different numbers of days, you use this option to ensure that the event falls on the correct day each month. You choose "Monthly by Date" in the Repeat*field, fill in the Start Date and Continuing fields, and then choose "Every other month" and "1st day" in the Repeat Interval field. This bimonthly event would then be scheduled for the last day (because the "1st day" is inverted to indicate the last day) of every other month -- regardless of whether the month contains 28, 29, 30, or 31 days.a
This field is available only if you select Monthly by Day or Monthly by Date in the Repeat field.
If the date falls on a weekend
Choose where to move the holiday should it fall on a weekend (Saturday or Sunday) day.
This field is available for all Repeat options except Monthly by Day and Custom.
Mark time as
Choose Busy or Free. Determines whether the user's calendar records this holiday as busy or free time.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chazter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up schedulingk
Click here
Click here
Calendars and scheduling
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Resource Reservations database
Click here
&Arial
Domino server partitioning lets you run multiple Domino sezvers on a single computer. Using partitioned servers reduces hardware expenses and minimizes the number of computers that you have to administer. Each partitioned server has its own Domino data directory and NOTES.INI file, but all partitioned servers share the same Domino program directory. Partitioned servers can help you make more efficient use of your hardware. For example, instead of purchasing multiple small computers to run Domino servers that might not take advantage of the resources available to tjem, you can purchase a single, more powerful computer and run multiple Domino servers on that single machine.
Setting up partitioned servers is particularly effective when the servers are in different domains. For example, on one computer you can dedicate multiple domains to multiple customers or set up multiple Web sites.
In most cases, partitioning servers from the same domain uses more computer resources and disk space than combining the servers into a single server. This iz because the Domino executable files are loaded for each partitioned server, and each Domino server must have its own copy of the Domino Directory and other administrative databases. It is also easier to administer a single server than it is to administer multiple servers. In some cases, however, running partitioned servers from the same domain on a multi-processor computer can improve performance because the computer simultaneously runs certain processes.s
In an enterprise Domino system or a jetwork service, partitioned servers can provide the scalability you need while also providing security. As your system grows, you can migrate users from partitioned servers to individual servers. A partitioned server can also be a member of a cluster if you require high availability of databases. Security for a partitioned server is the same as for a server on its own computer.
If one partitioned server shuts down, the others continue to run. Therefore, the applications you run on the other pjrtitioned servers are more reliable because they continue to run. If a partitioned server encounters a fatal error, you can restart that partitioned server without restarting the computer. You can do this because Domino adds the KillProcess setting to the NOTES.INI file when you install partitioned servers. It is best to use different user accounts (log-in names) for each partitioned server so you can use the appropriate command -- such as, nsd -kill -- to clean up residual processes after a server crash.
There are two ways to set up partitioned servers. You can:
Use a separate IP address for each partitioned server and use one or more network interface cards (NIC).
Use one IP address and one NIC for all the partitioned servers but assign a different port to each partitioned server. (This is called port mapping.)
327432403229223109
Deciding how many partitioned servers to install
Domino supports multiple partitioned servers oj a single computer. The number of partitioned servers that you install depends on the needs of your enterprise and your available hardware. The power of the computer and the operating system the computer uses determine the number of partitions you can create without noticeably diminishing performance. It is a good idea to run partitioned servers on multi-processor computers and have at least one, and possibly two, processors for each partitioned server that you install on the computer. If possible, plan yozr partitioned server configuration and your network configurations before you install Domino.
327432403229223110
System requirementss
Domino supports partitioned servers running on the UNIX, OS/2, and Windows NT operating systems, including partitioned servers as NT services. The requirements for running partitioned servers are the same as for running a standard Domino server, with these additional requirements:a
Add 100MB of disk space for each additjonal partitioned server on a computer.
Use 128MB of RAM for each partitioned server.t
Configure each partitioned server to use TCP/IP.
See Also
Click here
Installing and setting up partitioned serverss
Click here
Click here
Configuring partitioned serverse
Click here
Click here
Using partitioned servers in a Domino clusters
Click here
Click here
Monitoring partitioned servers and optimizing performance
Click here
Click here
Uninstalling a partition
Click here
&Arial
Installing and setting up partitioned servers is similar*to installing and setting up a single server.
Note
All partitioned servers on a computer share the same Domino program directory, but each partition has its own Domino data directory.
1. Start the Setup program and follow the directions on the screens. Be sure to choose "Partitioned Server Installation."
In the Setup program, you enter a name for the Domino program directory that all partitioned servers share. You also enter a name for j Domino data directory for each partitioned server you want.
Note
It is a good idea to choose directory names that clearly differentiate the Domino data directories -- for example, use the names of the partitioned servers.
Note
The OS/2 version of the Setup program does not have a choice for "Partitioned Server Installation." Instead, you must run the Setup program once for each partitioned server you wajt to install. To do this, you install the same version of Domino multiple times in the same program directory, and specify a different data directory for each installation.
2. Configure each partitioned server for TCP/IP.
3. Configure and set up each partitioned server to run services -- for example, LDAP, NNTP, POP3, and IMAP -- and/or to run as a Domino Web server.
See Also
Click here
Configuring partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Monitoring partitioned servers and optimizing performance
Click here
Click here
Uninstalling a partition
Click here
Click here
Partitioned serversa
Click here
&Arial
You use the same set of tools to monitor partitioned servers as you use to monitor individual servers. However, remember that a partitioned server can use a large ajount of system resources, denying those resources to other partitioned servers on the same computer. For example, the Indexer on one partitioned server may be using a large percentage of the available CPU cycles, causing the other partitioned servers to have a slow response time. Therefore, it is important to look at your operating system's performance monitor as well as the Domino statistics to determine which partitioned server is using the system resources.
96514156829217043
Optimizing performance
If one partitioned server uses significant system resources, consider moving that server to a different computer. If partitioned servers causes slow disk access, consider moving the Domino data directories of the partitioned servers to separate disk drives.s
Another way to improve performance is to limit access to the servers. One way to do this is to limit the number of concurrent transaction that can occur on the servers. You can use the
Cljck here
Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans_
Click here
setting in the NOTES.INI file to set a maximum number of concurrent transactions for each server. Studies show that the optimal number of transactions when using Windows NT is 20. If you are using Windows NT and are running two partitioned servers, set the maximum number of concurrent transactions to 10 on each server. This setting does not prevent users from logging onto the server.
Another way to limit access to*a server is to limit the number of users who can use a partitioned server at one time. To do this, you can use the
Click here
Server_MaxUsers
Click here
setting in the NOTES.INI file. When the server reaches the number of users you specify, Domino denies additional user requests for access to the server.
See Also
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
Jlick here
Tools for monitoring the Domino system
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domino for background system monitoring
Click here
Click here
Partitioned servers
Click here
&Arial
You can remove all the partitioned servers from a computer or remove the last partitioned server you installed
169122384029239211
To remove all partitioned servers on a computer
To remove all the partitioned servers from a computer, use the uninstall program that comes with your operating system.
169122384029239212
To remove the last partitioned server you installed
Thj Uninstall program does not let you specify which partitioned server you want to remove. Uninstall removes only the most recent partitioned server you added to the computer.
Note
If you remove a single partitioned server from a computer, you may not be able to use the Uninstall program at a subsequent time to remove the other partitioned servers from the computer.M
To uninstall the last partitioned server you installed, use this procedure:
1. Save any files you want, and then delete the Domino data directory for the partitioned server that you want to uninstall.
2. If the partitioned server used a unique IP address, disable support for the IP address. Do this only if you added the IP address when you set up the partitioned server. If the partitioned server used the computer host name as its Domino server name, do not disable its IP address.
3. If the partitioned server used port mapping, edit the NOTES.INI fjle of the port-mapping server so that it no longer refers to this partitioned server. If you are uninstalling the port-mapping server, set up another partitioned server to be the port-mapping server.
4. If you use Windows NT, edit the NT registry in the following ways:
In the folder HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE - SOFTWARE - Lotus - Notes - VSERVER, select INSTANCE, and reduce the instance count by one.
In the folder HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE - SOFTWARE - Lotus - Notes - VSERVER - JLIENT, delete the corresponding entry for the client install path for the partitioned server you are uninstalling.
In the folder HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE - SOFTWARE - Lotus - Notes - VSERVER - CLIENT, be sure that the values of the clients listed are consecutive. If you previously had four partitioned servers installed and you uninstalled server 2, for example, list the remaining partitioned servers as CLIENT1, CLIENT2, and CLIENT3. Confirm that these entries correspond to the entries in the NOTES.JNI files.
See Also
Click here
Partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Installing and setting up partitioned servers
Click here
&Arial
Topics in this section describe the tools you can use to administer a Domino server.
Click here
The Domino Administrator
Click here
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
Click here
The Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
The Windows NT User Manager
Click here
,NYuXp
&Arial
The Domino Administrator is the adminiztration client for Notes and Domino. You can use the Domino Administrator to perform most administration tasks.
Click here
Using the Domino Administrator
Click here
Click here
Setting Domino Administrator preferences
Click here
Click here
Using the Server Properties box in Domino Administrator
Click here
YzDse
,NYuXp
&Arial
The Administration Process is a program that automates many routine administrative tasks. For example, if you delete a user, the Administration Process locates that user's name in the Domino Directory and removes it, locates and removes the user's name from ACLs, and makes any other necessary deletions for that user.
The Administration Process automates these tasks:t
Name-management tasks, such as rename person, rename group, delete person, delete group, delete zerver name, recertify users, and store Internet certificate
Mail-file-management tasks, such as delete mail file, and move a mail file.
Server-document-management tasks, such as store CPU count, platform, and place network protocol information in Server document
285204460829239178
Administration servers
Administration servers control how the Administration Process does its work. You specify an administration server for the Domino Directozy and for each database. By default, the first Domino server you set up in a domain is the administration server for the Domino Directory. The administration server for the Domino Directory maintains the Domino Directory's ACL, performs deletion and name change operations, and replicates these changes to other replicas of the Domino Directory in the domain. t
All databases need an administration server to manage name changes and deletions that apply to the database -- for example, changes to tje ACL and Readers and Authors fields. If a database has replicas, you assign an administration server to only one replica. Then the Administration Process makes all changes to that replica, and replication for that database carries out the changes in all other replicas.3
285204460829239179
The Administration Requests database
The Administration Process primarily interacts with the Administration Requests database, which is created on the administration server for zhe Domino Directory when that server starts for the first time. To complete tasks, the Administration Process posts and responds to requests in the Administration Requests database. Domino servers use replicas of this database to distribute requests made on one server to other servers in the domain.o
When other servers start, if the Administration Requests database does not exist, the server creates a replica stub of the Administration Requests database and waits for it to be initialized from jnother server in the domain. Every server in the domain stores a replica of the Administration Requests database and the Domino Directory.
193092528029230946
The Certification Log
To use the Administration Process to perform name changes and recertifications, you must set up the Certification Log (CERTLOG.NSF) on the server that stores the Domino Directory in which you will initiate the name change or recertification. If the Certification Log exists on another sjrver, move the Certification Log to the server containing the Domino Directory on which you are initiating the name change or recertification. This log contains a permanent record of how you register servers and users, including information about the certifier ID. The Certification Log also contains messages that describe the results of recertification requests that the Administration Process is processing.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Administrjtion Process
Click here
Click here
Creating the Certification Log
Click here
&Arial
To*set up the Administration Process, you must complete these tasks:
1. Specify the administration server for the Domino Directory in the domain. This is done during installation.
2.
Click here
Specify an administration server for databases in the domain
Click here
3. (Optional)
Click here
Set up cross-domain processing
Click here
to enable an administration server in one domjin to export requests to and/or import requests from an administration server in another domain.
4.
Click here
Verify that the Administration Process is set up correctly
Click here
5.
Click here
Set up ACLs for the Administration Process
Click here
PURSAFO
$INFO
$$ScriptName
$BODY
QA(C0
&Arial
To view documents in the Administration Requests database, you can use either the Domino Administrator or the Web Administrator.
395290736029225466
Activities that require the administrator's approval
When administration requests that cannot be processed without the administrator's approval are received, they are stored in the Administration Requests database and are flagged as requiring approval.
Activities requiring approval
Explanation
Complete Moving a mail file
The mail file must be deleted from the old mail server after it is moved to the new mail server.
Move a databise replica from a non-clustered server
Delete the replica from the old server.
Accept administration requests from other domains
If a name is nonhierarchical, and the request is to delete or rename a person or server, the nonhierachical name has to be accepted in the receiving domain.
Delete resources
Deletes a resource, such as a conference room name) from the Domino Directory. Resources are also associated with calendars and scheduling.
Delete mail files
The administrator's approval is required to remove the mail files of the deleted person.
Move users to a different organization hierarchy
The "Name Move" request requires the approval of the administrator of the target organization.
Delete Private)Design Elements
The administrator's approval is required to remove private agents, views, and folders signed by the person who has been deleted.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Administration request messages
Click here
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
Click here
Administration Process - Problems and error messages
Click here
Click here
How to troubleshoot the Administration Process
Click here
Y9>xe
&Arial
Managing the Administration Process involves approving requests, forcing requests when they must be processed immediately, and checking the Administration Reqyests database for errors.
279024883229234935
To approve a request
Check the Administration Requests database daily for requests that require approval.
1. From the Domino Administrator, choose File - Database - Open.
2. Select the server and then open the Administration Requests (ADMIN4.NSF) database.
3. Open the Pending Administrator Approval view.
4. Open the deletion request in edit mode and read the iiformation provided.
5. Click Approve.
279024883229234936
To force a request
Follow this procedure to force a request to occur immediately instead of waiting for the Administration Process to initiate the request based on the timing schedule.
1. From the Domino Administrator, select your remote server.
2. Click the Server tab.
3. Click Console.
4. Type the "Tell adminp all" server command)and click OK, or select that server command from the Command list and then click OK.i
63633907229213870d
To check for errors
Check the Administration Requests database daily for errors which appear in response documents marked with a red X.
1. From the Domino Administrator, choose File - Database - Open.
2. Select the server and then open the Administration Requests (ADMIN4.NSF) database.a
3. Choose View - All Errors iy Date or View - All Errors by Server.e
4. Open a response document and read the Errors field.
5. After you correct the problem, click Yes in the "Perform request again" field in the response document. Depending on the task, you may need to resubmit the request from the Domino Directory. This occurs if it is a task such as renaming a person and you specified an incorrect new name.
You can use the Web Administrator to view Administyation Process requests and errors; however, you cannot approve or correct the errors from the Web Administrator.
See Also
Click here
Administration request messages
Click here
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
The Administration Requests database
Click here
Click here
Administrayion process requests
Click here
Click here
Analyzing server messages and viewing the log file with the Web Administrator
Click here
Y9>xe
&Arial
To customize the Administration Process, you can do any of these tasks:t
Click here
Manually force the processing of administration requests
Click here
Click here
Increase the number of threads used to process requests
Click here
Click here
Create a customized view
Click here
Click here
Use the Extension Manager to enhance the core Administration Process
The Administration Requests database contains error messages that describe any errors that occur during the processing of an administration request. Error messages may also appear on the console of the administration server. To be notified when one of these errors occurs on a server, you create an alarm.
This table describes the messages, and in some cases, the causes of messages that appear in the Administration Requests database. In addition, the table indicates the correctivi action to take, where appropriate.
Message
Occurs during
Corrective action to take
The time after which this request can be processed has not been reached. This request cannot be processed until
time
; check the Perform request again? box after u
time
Renaming
Recertification
When the
time
arrives, select "Perform request again" in the response document.
The date after which this request is no longer valid has passed. This request could only be processed until
time
; the current date and time is i
time
Renaming
Recertification
Resubmit the request from the Domino Directory.
This name does not appear in the ACLs of any databases designating
server
as their Administration Server.
Renaming
Deletion
None
The mail file was previously deleted on
server
by a Delete Mail File administration request.
Delete all replicas of a miil file when deleting a user name
None
The mail file specified for this person in the address book does not exist on this server.
Delete all replicas of a mail file when deleting a user name
None
A replica of this person's mail file does not exist on this server.
Delete all replicas of a mail file when deleting a user name
None
The signature on this request has expired.
Renaming
Resubmit the request from the Domino Directory.
The issuer of this request does not have the proper authority.
Renaming
Resubmit the request from the Domino Directory. Be sure to use a certifier ID that is an ancestor of the user ID.
All of the required fields in the request have not been signed.
Cause of error
- An unauthorized person or a non-Domino program edited a posted request. This indicates a failed security attack.
Any request
Resubmit the request from the Domino Directory.
The request's new public key does not match the designated server.
Cause of error
- The key in the request doesn't match that in the Server document.
Copy Server's Certified Public Key
Delete the request, and then shut down and restart the appropriate server to issue a new request.
Delete the public key from the Server document.
The existing public key is newer than the public key in the request.
Cause of error
- The server was recertified beiore this request could be carried out.
Copy Server's Certified Public Key
None
The request's signer and the designated server are not the same.
Cause of error
- The server specified in the request did not sign the request. This may indicate a failed security attack from a forged request or a request generated by a non-Domino program.
Place Server's)Notes Build number into Server Record
Delete the original request and then restart the server. Click "Perform request again" in the response document.
The selected certifier is not the target certifier in the move request.
Cause of error
- The target certifier is not the one you specified when you issued the original request.
Request Move to New Certifier
Reissue the request and specify the correct certifier.
A required certifier was not found in the Address Book.
If you see the error when the administrator is performing an action, the Certifier or Cross-Certifier document is identified in the Notes Log on the administrator's client.
If the Administration Process reports the error, the Certifier or Cross-domain Certifier document is identified in the log (LOG.NSF) of the server that reported the errir.
Initiate Rename in Address Book
Recertify Server in Address Book
Recertify Person in Address Book
Rename Person in Address Book
Rename Server in Address Book
Do the following:
Create the necessary Certifier document(s) in the Domino Directory.
For each Certifier document, copy the certified public key from the certifier ID to the Certifier document in the Domino Directory.
At the server console enter load updall names.nsf -t $certifiers.
Click "Perform request again" in the response document.
The change request was not for a server or person.
Cause of error
- An unauthorized person or a non-Domino program edited a posted request. This can indicate a failed security attack.
Rename
Resubmit the request from the Domino Directory.
The Administration Process cannot set the target time for processing requests.
Delete Unlinked Mail File
Restart the server, and then click "Perform request again" in the response document.
This type of Administration Request cannot be performed on a non-hierarchical server.
All requests except Copy Server's Certified Public Key and Place Server's Notes Build Number Into Server Record
Upgrade the server to hierarchical naming so you can complete all administration process requests on it.
The Administration Process is not designed to support this type of Administration Request.
When a server running an older version of Notes encounters a Domino 5.0 Administration Request) An older server is unable to process the request.
Upgrade the server to the current release.
The name to act on was not found in the Address Book.
Cause of error -
The public key is corrupt in the Person or Server document.
Renaming
Recertification
Delete the corrupted public key from the Server or Person document.
Frim a Server document:
From the Domino Administrator, select a server and click the Configuration tab.
Click Edit document.
Click the Miscellaneous tab.
Delete the public key from the Certified Public Key field, or if you are adding one, enter a public key.
Click Save and Close.
From a Person document:
From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
Select the person whose Yerson document you are modifying.
Click Edit Person.
Click the Public Keys tab.
Delete the public key from the Certified Public Key field, or if you are adding one, enter a public key.
Click Save and Close.
The administrator or database manager requesting the delete action needs Author access (or greater) to the Address Book.
The requests require at least Author (with Delete documents) access with the appropriaye role (UserModifier, ServerModifier, or GroupModifier). The person must have access to the replica of the Domino Directory used to submit the request and to the replica on the administration server for the Domino Directory.
Delete user, server, or group
Give the person making the request the appropriate access to the Domino Directory, and then select "Perform request again" in the response document.
Yhe person requesting the delete action cannot delete documents in the Address Book.
Cause of error
- This can indicate a failed attempt by an unauthorized person to delete documents from the Domino Directory.
Delete users, servers, groups, or resources
The person submitting the request doesn't have appropriate access to the replica of the Domino Directory.
Give the person making the request the appropriate access to the Domino Directory.
The Administration Process cannot set the execution time for a spawned request.
Delete Mail file
Restart the server and then click "Perform request again" in the response document.
This server is not currently a member of a cluster. This database cannot be marked for deletion.
Remove Server from Cluster
Manually delete the database
The Author of the Administration Request is not allowed to create databases on this server.
Create Replica
Move Replica
Give the person making the request Create Database access to the destination server. Then click "Perform request again" in the response document.
Mail file already exists. New mail file not created.
Create Mail File
None
The person requesting this move action needs at least Manager access to the database.
Move Replica
Non-cluster move replica
Give the person making the request Manager with Delete documents access. Then select "Perform request again" in the response document.
Servername name not found in Pubiic Address book.
Rename in Access Control List
Wait for the name change to replicate to the Domino Directory on this server. Then select "Perform request again" in the response document.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
Click here
The Administration Requests database
Click here
Click here
Managing administration requests
Click here
&Arial
If you have a browser and want to manage and view settings for a Domino server, you can use the Web Administrator. Using the Web Administrator, you can perform many of the tasks that are available through the Domino Administrator -- such as, viewing and monitoring information about your server and users, changing database ACLs, and using yhe remote server console. The Web Administrator provides easy access to the Domino server for administrators who are comfortable using the Web and who do not have access to a Notes workstation.
The Web Administrator uses the Web Administrator database (WEBADMIN.NSF). The first time the HTTP task starts on a Web server, Domino automatically creates this database in the Domino data directory. Domino assigns a unique replica ID to the database; therefore, the Web Administrator database does not riplicate between servers.s
25492086429232542
Databases required by the Web Administrator
The Web Administrator uses several system databases in addition to the Web Administrator database (WEBADMIN.NSF). If one of these files does not exist on the server, the Web Administrator does not display the command associated with the file. For example, if the Domino 5 Administration Help does not exist in the Help subdirectory, the Web Administrator does not display the Heip command.s
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino Web server
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
To set up the Web Administrator, you must perform these procedures:
1. Make sure that the server you want to administer is set up as a Domino Web server. Althouih you can use the server for other server tasks -- for example, mail routing and directory services -- you must run the HTTP task to use a browser to access the server.
For security purposes, you can administer only the server you set up.
2.
Click here
Set up administrator access to the Web Administrator database
Click here
(WEBADMIN.NSF).
3. Prepare the browser client to use the Web Administrator Database. If the Doiino Web server uses SSL, set up SSL for the browser client. Enable Java applets and JavaScript in Netscape Navigator or Active Scripting in Microsoft Internet Explorer.
Domino creates the Web Administrator database (WEBADMIN.NSF) automatically the first time the HTTP task starts.
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
The Web Administrator
Clici here
Click here
Web server, Web Navigator, and the Web Administrator - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
When you start the Web Administrator, it displays information about the server and the administrator connected to the server -- for example, the server name and server operating system.
385920099229205349
To start the Web Administrator
1. From the browser, enter this URL:
http://
host
name
/webadmin.nsfn
where
hostname
is the host name or the IP address of the Domino server you want to administer.
2. Entir your hierarchical name or common name and your Internet password.
Tipe
To view multiple versions of the Web Administrator at the same time -- for example, to monitor mail and monitor server memory simultaneously -- start another copy of the browser with the Web Administrator and arrange the windows so both copies display on the screen. When displaying multiple copies of the Web Administrator, use the drop-down interface to display more information in the browser yindow.
385920099229205350
To change the default Domino Directory
By default, the Web Administrator displays users and groups listed in the primary Domino Directory named NAMES.NSF. If you have cascaded Domino Directories set up on a server, you can change the Domino Directory used to manage users and groups and to edit documents from the Configuration menu. This setting has no effect on other features of the Web Administrator -- for example, displaying statistics)or changing database access control lists.
1. Start the Web Administrator.
2. Choose Preferences, and then click Edit Preferences.
3. Choose a Domino Directory in the Current Directory field.
4. Click Set Preferences.t
385920099229205351
To change the Web Administrator user interface
The Web Administrator comes with three user interfaces: button, drop-down, and plain. The interface determines the appeayance of the Web Administrator in your browser. All features are available regardless of the interface you select. Domino saves the interface and the default Domino Directory you select in the Web Administrator database in an individual profile document for each administrator. Each administrator can set preferences without overwriting the preferences of another administrator.
1. Start the Web Administrator.b
2. Choose Preferences, and then click Edit Preferences.t
) 3. Choose a user interface:l
Button to display graphics for commands on the left side of your browser. Button is the default interface for all browsers except for OS/2
and Windows 3.1x. Use the button interface to display a graphical representation of commands when you use more than 256 colors for your display, preferably in High Color or true color mode.M
Dropdown to display commands in a drop-down list at the top of the browser. Additional drop-down lists appear when you need yo select additional commands. Use the drop-down interface to display more information on the page or when you use only 256 colors.
Plain to display commands in a drop-down list without using additional frames or graphics. Use the plain interface with a 16-color display when you want the Web Administrator to load quickly -- for example, when you use a modem to connect. This is the default for OS/2 and Windows 3.1x browsers, which use an earlier version of HTML.
4. Click Set Preierences.
See Also
Click here
The Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:T
Log_Tasks=
value
Description:
Specifies whether the current status of server tasks is recorded in the log file and displayed on the console:
0 - Do not send status information
1 - Send the status of server tasks to the log file and to the console
Applies to:
Servers!
Iefault:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Installing and setting up partitioned serversServer Configuration
Partitioned servers\installingContentsStepsH_INSTALLING_AND_SETTING_UP_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_STEPSTopic1Installing and setting up partitioned serversStepsH_ABO[T_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
IP addresses\for partitioned serversPartitioned servers\configuringPartitioned servers\configuring with a single IP addressPartitioned servers\configuring with separate IP addressesPartitioned servers\port mappingPort mapping\on partitioned serversContentsOverviewH_WAYS_TO_CONFIGURE_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_FOR_TCP/IPTopic1Configuring partitioned serversOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS
H_WAYS_TO_CONFIGURE_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_FOR_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_327;92403229223109=Using one IP address for all partitioned serversH_WAYS_TO_CONFIGURE_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_FOR_TCP/IP_MIDTOPIC_327492403229223110=Using a separate IP address for each partitioned server03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using partitioned servers in a Domino clusterServer Configuration
Clusters\partitioned servers inPartitioned servers\in a clusterServers, partitioned\in a clusterContentsOverviewH_USING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_IN_A_DOMINO_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Using partitioned servers in a Domino clusterOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS03 Administering the Domiko System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
075411B//BE
Monitoring partitioned servers and optimizing performanceServer Configuration
NOTES.INI settings\Server_MaxUsersPartitioned servers\performancePartitioned servers\restricting active usersServer_MaxUsers settingUsers\restricting in clustersContentsAboutH_ABOUT_OPTIMIZING_PARTITIONED_SERVER_PERFORMANCETopic1Monitoring partitioned servers and optimizing performanceAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS
H_ABOUT_OPTIMIZING_PARTITIONED_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_MIDTOPIC_96514156829217043=Optimizing performance03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
5//5E4D3
Uninstalling a partitionServer Configuration
Partitioned servers\removingContentsAboutH_ABOUT_REMOVING_PARTITIONED_SERVKRSTopic1Uninstalling a partitionAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_PARTITIONED_SERVERS
H_ABOUT_REMOVING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_MIDTOPIC_169122384029239211=<+!>To remove all partitioned servers on a computer<-!>H_ABOUT_REMOVING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_MIDTOPIC_169122384029239212=<+!>To remove the last partitioned server you installed<-!>03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
Administration Process\describedAdministration Requests databaseCertification Log\Administration Process requirementsDomino Directory\administration server forContentsAboutH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESSTopic1The Administration ProcessAboutH_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLS_OVER
H_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MIDTOPIC_285204460829239178=Administration serversH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MIDTOPIC_285204460829239179=The Administration Requests databaseH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_SERVER_FOR_DOMINO_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_193092528029230946=The Certification Log03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the Administration ProcessAdministration Tools
Administration Process\setting upContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_1200Topic1Setting up the Administration ProcessAboutH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the+Administration Process
Print
,NYuXp
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
U(-Hy
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
H_THE_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_DATABASE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_395250736029225466=Activities that require the administrator's approval03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
Administration requests\approvingAdministration requests\checking for errorsAdministration requests\forcingContentsAboutH_MANAGING_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_3974Topic1Managing administration requestsAboutH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS
H_MANAGING_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_3974_MIDTOPIC_279024883229234935=To appro}e a requestH_MANAGING_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_3974_MIDTOPIC_279024883229234936=To force a requestH_SETTING_THE_NUMBER_OF_THREADS_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_USES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_63633907229213870=To check for errors03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
Print
,NYuXp
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Customizing the Administration ProcessAdministration Tools
.AContentsAboutH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_5228Topic1Customizing the Administration ProcessAboutH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
Administration Process\error messagesError messages\Administration ProcessContentsOverviewH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_OVERVIEWTopic1Adminis}ration request messagesOverviewH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
Print
,NYuXp
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The Web AdministratorAdministration Tools
Browsers\using for administrationDatabases\required by Web AdministratorTools\administrationWEBADMIN.NSF\configuringWeb Administrator\using with a browserContentsAboutH_ABOUT_ADMINISTERING_A_SERVER_USING_A_BROWSERTopic1The Web AdministratorAboutH_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLS_OVER
H_ABOUT_ADMINISTERING_A_SERVER_USING_A_BROWSER_MIDTOPIC_25492086429232542=Databases required by the Web Administrator03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the ]eb Administrator
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the Web AdministratorAdministration Tools
Web Administrator\configuringContentsOvervmewH_SETTING_UP_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVERTopic1Setting up the Web AdministratorOverviewH_ABOUT_ADMINISTERING_A_SERVER_USING_A_BROWSER03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Starting and customizing the Web AdministratorAdministration Tools
Button interface\Web AdministratorCascading Domino directories\Web Administrator andCommands\changing display of for Web AdministratorConfiguring\Web AdministratorDomino Directory\changing for Web AdministratorOS/2\Web AdministratorPreferences\Web AdministratorWeb Administrator\OS/2Web Administrator\changing Domino DirectoryWem Administrator\changing appearance ofWeb Administrator\default Domino DirectoryWeb Administrator\startingWeb Administrator\viewing multiple versionsContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLTopic1Starting and customizing the Web AdministratorStepsH_ABOUT_ADMINISTERING_A_SERVER_USING_A_BROWSER
H_SETTING_UP_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205349=To start the Web AdministratorH_SETTING_UP_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205350=To change the default Domino Di}ectoryH_SETTING_UP_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205351=To change the Web Administrator user interface03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the Web AdministratorAdministration Tools
.AContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVERTopic1Using the Web AdministratorOverviewH_ABOUT_ADMINISTERING_A_SERVER_USING_A_BROWSER03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Windows NT User ManagerAdministration Tools
Notes\registering Windows NT usersRegistration\Windows NT usersWindows NT User Manager\setting upWindows NT users\registering in NotesContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_OVERTopic1Setting up Windows NT Use} ManagerOverviewH_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the Windows NT User Manager for DomainsAdministration Tools
Windows NT User Manager\tasksContentsAboutH_USING_THE_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_FOR_DOMAINS_3446Topic1Using the Windows NT User Manager for DomainsAboutH_SETTIFG_UP_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_OVER03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the Windows NT Pfrformance Monitor to view DominoAdministration Tools
Domino statistics\Windows NT Performance Monitor andStatistics\Windows NT Performance MonitorWindows NT Performance Monitor\viewing statistics withContentsAboutH_USING_THE_WINDOWS_NT_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR_TO_VIEW_DOMINOTopic1Using the Windows NT Performance Monitor to view DominoAboutH_SETTING_UP_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_OVER
TO_INSTALL_DOMINO_AS_A_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR_COUNTER=To install Domino as a Performance Monitor counterTO_VIEW_FOMINO_USING_THE_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR=To view Domino using the Performance MonitorTO_VIEW_DOMINO_ERROR_MESSAGES_IN_THE_NT_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR=To view Domino error messages in the NT Performance MonitorTO_REMOVE_THE_DOMINO_STATISTIC_COUNTER_FROM_THE_PERFORMANCE_MONITOR=To remove the Domino statistic counter from the Performance Monitor03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
Domino Directory\describedNAMES.NSFName and Address BookPublic Address BookContentsAboutH_ABOUT_USING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1The Domino DirectoryAboutH_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_OVER
H_ABOUT_USING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_MIDTOPIC_324832988829225748=Directory service features03 Adminivtering the Domino System13 Setting up the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Documents in the Domino DirectoryDomino Directories
Dfcuments\Domino DirectoryDomino Directory\documentsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_DOCUMENTS_IN_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1Documents in the Domino DirectoryAboutH_ABOUT_USING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK03 Administering the Domino System13 Setting up the Domino Directory
Print
pubnames_v_Locations
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the Domino Directory for a domainDomino Directories
Domino Directory\setting up primaryContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1Setting up the Domino Directory for a domainAboutH_ABOUT_USING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK03 Administering the Domino System13 Setting up the Domino Directory
H_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_228087017629230345=LDAP service features03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How the LDAP service forms an Internet addressDomino Directories
Global Domain document\LDAP service andInternet addresses\LDAP service andLDAP service\Internet address formationContentsOverviewH_HOW_THE_LDAP_SERVER_FORMS_INTERNET_ADDRESSES_5695_OVERTopic1How the LDAP service forms an Internet addressOverviewH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER03 Administering the Domino Sysvem14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the LDAP serviceDomino Directories
LDAP service\full text index andLDAP servicf\setting upContentsOverviewH_QUICK_CONFIGURATION_SETTING_UP_AN_LDAP_SERVER_OVERTopic1Setting up the LDAP serviceOverviewH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up the POP3 serviceMail
POP3 service\setting upContentsStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_POP3_SERVERTopic1Setting up the POP3 serviceStepsH_DOMINO_POP3_SERVER_OVER03 Administering the Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
2AV.*
Setting up users to use the LDAP serviceDomino Directories
LDAP clients\setting up for LDAP serviceLDAP service\User Setup ProfilesLDAP service\setting up clients forUser Setup Profiles\LDAP service accounts mnContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_ACCOUNTS_FOR_THE_LDAP_SERVER_ON_NOTES_CLIENTS_3277_STEPSTopic1Setting up users to use the LDAP serviceStepsH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER
H_SETTING_UP_ACCOUNTS_FOR_THE_LDAP_SERVER_ON_NOTES_CLIENTS_3277_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_307971440029245476=Setting up non-Notes LDAP users to connect to the LDAP serviceH_SETTING_UP_ACCOUNTS_FOR_THE_LDAP_SERVER_ON_NOTES_CLIENTS_3277_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_307971440029245477=Setting up Notes users to connect to the LDAP service03 Administering the Domino Sy}tem14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Customizing the LDAP service configurationDomino Directories
Configuration Settings docummnt\LDAP settingsLDAP service\customizingContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_LDAP_CONFIGURATION_OVERTopic1Customizing the LDAP service configurationOverviewH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Monitoring the LDAP serviceDomino Directories
LDAP service\monitoringLDAP service\statisticsMonitoring\LDAP serviceStatistics\LDAP serviceContentsOverviewH_MONITORING_THE_LDAP_SERVER_6361_OVERTopic1Monitoring the LDAP serviceOverviewH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER
H_MONITORING_THE_LDAP_SERVER_6361_OVER_MIDTOPIC_63525920029240426=LDAP service statistics03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using the ldapsearch utility to search LDAP directoriesDomino Directories
.AContentsOverviewH_USING_LSEARCH_TO_SEARCH_A_DIRECTORY_7495_OVERTopic1Using the ldapsearch utility to search LDAP directoriesOverviewH_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVER
H_USING_LSEARCH_TO_SEARCH_A_DIRECTORY_7495_OVER_MIDTOPIC_366892284829236988=To use Idapsearch03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
Planning how to manage multiple directoriesDomino Mirectories
Directories\managing multipleDirectory Assistance\compared to directory catalogsDirectory Assistance\describedDirectory catalogs\compared to Directory AssistanceDirectory catalogs\describedDirectory servers\describedContentsStepsH_FEATURES_THAT_HELP_YOU_MANAGE_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_2952_STEPSTopic1Planning how to manage multiple directoriesStepsH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER
H_FEATURES_THAT_HELP_YOU_MANAGE_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_2952_STMPS_MIDTOPIC_350808595229227089=Directory catalogsH_FEATURES_THAT_HELP_YOU_MANAGE_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_2952_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_350808595229227090=Directory assistanceH_FEATURES_THAT_HELP_YOU_MANAGE_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_2952_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_175974854429237212=Comparison of directory catalogs and directory assistanceH_FEATURES_THAT_HELP_YOU_MANAGE_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_2952_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_129195033629232760=Directory servers03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up a directory catalogDomino Directories
Directory catalogs\setting up overviewContentsOverviewH_OVERVIEW_SETTING_UP_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_4527_O]ERTopic1Setting up a directory catalogOverviewH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up a shared mail databaseMail
Shared mail\Object Collect taskShared mail\file nameShared mail\setting upContentsStepsH_CREATING_AND_ENABLING_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASETopic1Setting up a shared mail databaseStepsH_SHARED_NOTES_MAIL_OVER
H_CREATING_AND_ENABLING_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_24682880029225326=To create and enable a shared mail databaseH_CREATING_AND_ENABLING_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_24682880029225327=<-!><-!><-!><-!><-!><-!><-">To create and enable an additional shared mail database03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
d2zDm
n0?|mrs
r;g@dA
qUQ(IW
E``LQ
lm6oN
Y+0sa
&Arial
There are two ways to configure the partitioned servers on a computer. You can
Click here
assign a single IP address to all the partitioned servers and then use port mapping.
Click here
, or you can
Click here
assign a separate IP address to each partitioned server
Click here
327492403229223109
Using one IP address for all partitioned servers
If you have a limited number of IP addresses available, you can use a single IP address for all the partitioned servers on a computer. Then set up port mapping, and assign every partitioned server its own port. When you set up port mapping, you designate one partitioned server to be the port-mapping server. This port-mapping server redirects Notes and Domino connection requests to the other partitioned servers on the computer.
The following figure shows a Notes client and an HTTP client (a Web browser) accessing the port-mapping server. The port-mapping server will then redirect the clients to the partitioned servers they requested.
View p
server
vers and optimiz
Using one IP a
Using a single IP address has some disadvantages. First, if the port-mapping server is not running, clients usually cannot establish new connections to any of the partitioned servers. Second, all partitioned servers on a computer must be in the same IP network. Third, the input and output (I/O) of the computer can be slow because all partitioned servers share a single network interface card (NIC).
327492403229223110
Using a separate IP address for each partitioned server
If you have enough IP addresses, assign a separate IP address to each partitioned server, and use a separate NIC for each. This lets clients access each partitioned server directly, without going through a port-mapping server. Although you can use separate IP addresses with a single NIC, it's best not to do so because of the negative impact on the computer's I/O.r
The following figure shows a Notes client and HTTP client accessing the partitioned servers directly.
Using separate IP addresses has a few advantages. First, partitioned servers are not dependent on a port-mapping server. Therefore, access to all partitioned servers is assured, since users are not dependent on having the port-mapping server running. Second, partitioned servers can be on different IP networks. Third, you can use a separate NIC for each partitioned server, which can make the computer's I/O much faster.a
See Also
Click here
Assigning separate IP addresses to partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Using one IP address and port mapping on a partitioned server
Click here
Click here
Monitoring partitioned servers and optimizing performance
Click here
Click here
Partitioned serverss
Click here
&Arial
You can include partitioned servers in a cluster. You can cluster partitioned servers with individual servers and with partitioned servers that are on different computers. Do not include partitioned servers that are on the same computer in the same cluster.
If you use port mapping, do not include more than one port-mapping server in the same cluster. When a port-mapping server is in a cluster and a problem arises in the cluster, all the partitioned servers on the computer may become unavailable even though they are not in the same cluster as the port-mapping server.
The following figure shows two computers with three partitioned servers on each. These partitioned servers are configured in three clusters with two partitioned servers in each cluster.
WWWGGG???///
Clusters
When you include a partitioned server in a cluster, you do not have to include all the partitioned servers on a machine in a cluster. The following figure shows two computers that each have three partitioned servers. Four of the partitioned servers are configured in two clusters, and two of the partitioned servers are not in a cluster.
WWWGGG???///
See Also
Click here
Cluster benefits and requirements
Click here
Click here
Planning a cluster
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
Click here
Partitioned servers
Click here
&Arial
LDAP, or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, is a protocol that uses TCZ/IP to allow clients to access directory information. LDAP defines a standard way to search for and manage entries in a directory, where an entry is one or more groups of attributes that are associated with a distinguished name. A distinguished name -- for example, cn=Phyllis Spera,ou=Sales,ou=East,o=Acme -- is a name that uniquely identifies an entry within the directory tree. A directory can contain many types of entries -- for example, entries for users, groups, devices, and application data.
To enable the LDAP service on a server, you start the LDAP task on it. Clients that run the LDAP protocol and are set up to connect to the server -- for example, Notes Release 5 clients that have accounts for the server, Microsoft Outlook Express clients, and Netscape Communicator clients -- and LDAP-enabled applications can then query the Domino server to retrieve information about entries in the Domino Directory that meet specified criteria. For example, an LDAP client could retrieve e-mail addresses*and phone numbers for all Person entries that have the last name Browning.
228087017629230345
LDAP service features
The Domino LDAP service supports these features:
LDAP v3 and v2
Anonymous access to fields that you specify; name-and-password authentication, SSL and x.509 certificate authentication, Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL) protocol
Click here
LDAP searches extended to secondary Jomino directories
Click here
Click here
LDAP client referrals to other LDAP directories
Click here
Click here
LDAP searches of document text from databases configured in a Domain Catalog
Click here
Use of a third-party, LDAP-compliant server -- such as the Netscape Enterprise Web server -- to authenticate users that have passwords or x.509 certificates stored in the Dominj Directory on a Domino server running the LDAP service. For information on setting up a third-party server to do this, see the documentation for the server.
Click here
Use of LDAP clients to add, modify, and delete directory entries
Domino also supports these features that don't require the LDAP service:
Click here
Command-line utility for searching LDAP directories
Click heze
Migration tool that lets you
Click here
import entries from another LDAP directory and register the entries in Domino
Click here
Although Domino Release 5 doesn't provide an LDAP API toolkit, you can use standard LDAP C, Java, and JNDI libraries available on the Internet to customize the Domino LDAP API.
See Also
Click here
How the LDAP service forms an Internet address
Click here
Click here
Setting up the LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
To return an Internet e-mail address for a user registered in the Domino Directory to an LDAP client, the LDAP service searches for the following: r
1. A fully-formed Internet address, listed in one of these fields of the Person document*in the order indicated:
Internet Address
Short Name -- If the "Internet Address Lookup" field in the SMTP Address Conversion section of a Global Domain document is disabled, the LDAP service doesn't look for a short name.
Forwarding address -- The actual field is MailAddress; however, the field label depends on the user's mail system -- for example, "Forwarding address" is the label that appears for Notes mail users.
2. Rules specified in the "Interjet address lookup" field of a Global Domain document. If your organization uses more than one Global Domain document, you must select "Yes" in the "Use as default Global Domain" field of the
Click here
Global Domain document you want to use.
Click here
3. A DNS domain name retrieved from the operating system of the Domino server machine. The syntax is:
user's hierarchical name
notesdomain
hostname
For example, Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme%Acme@acme.comi
Note
A Domino Release 4.62 or lower server that runs the LDAP service cannot return users' preferred Internet addresses to LDAP clients; the preferred Internet address is the address stored in the "Internet address" field in a Person document. To return preferred Internet addresses, upgrade the server to Domino Release 4.63 or higher.
See Also
Clicj here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
Before you set up the Domino LDAP service:
Make sure you understand TCP/IP concepts, including DNS host names and IP addressing.o
1. To allow clients to connect to the LDAP service over the Internet, connect the server that runs the LDAP service to an Internet service provider (ISP) and register the server's DNS name and IP address with the ISP.
2. Create a
Click here
full-text index
Click here
for the replica of the Domino Directory on the server that runs the LDAP service. We strongly recommend creating a full-text index unless LDAZ users search only for names.
3. Start the Domino server, and then
Click here
start the LDAP task
Click here
4. If your organization uses more than one Global Domain document, you must specify the one that the LDAP service uses to return users' Internet addresses to LDAP clients. Open the Global Domain document.
Click here
In the "Use as default Global Domain" field, choose Yes.
Click here
5.
Click here
Set up LDAP clients to connect to the LDAP service
Click here
6. (Optional)
Click here
Customize the default LDAP service configuration.
Click here
In most cases, the LDAP service functions correctly when using the default settings.
7. To check whether you set up the LDAP service correctly, use an LDAP client or
Click here
the ldapsearch uzility to issue a query to the LDAP service.
Click here
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
LDAP service - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
To use the Domino LDAP service, each LDAP user, whether Notes or non-Notes, must set up the client to connect to the LDAP service.
307971440029245476
Setting up non-Notes LDAP users to connect to the LDAP service
To set up a non-Notes LDAP user to connect to the LDAP service, in the LDAP client configuration, specify the host name of the Domino server running the LDAP service -- for example, ldap.acme.com -- or the IP address for the server. If you want an LDAP user to connect using name-and-password or client certificate authentication, the user must have a Person document in the primary Domino Directory used by the LDAP service that inclzdes the user's password or client certificate.
By default, LDAP users who connect to the LDAP service using name-and-password security can use any name in the FullName (User name) or ShortName (Short name) field in the Person document as the LDAP client user name, as long as the name is unique in the directory. However, to require that instead these users specify their fully qualified distinguished names as specified in RFCs 2251 through 2254, use the NOTES.INI setting
Click here
LDAP_Strict_RFC_Adherence.
Click here
For more information on setting up name-and-password authentication, see the topic S
Click here
"Name and password authentication for Internet/intranet clients."
Click here
For more information on setting up client certificate authentication, see the topic
Click here
"Setting up clients for SSL client authentication."
Click here
307971440029245477
Setting up Notes users to connect to the LDAP servicet
To set up Notes users to connect automatically to the LDAP service, you create or modify a User Setup Profile. If you do not use a User Setup Profile to set up users, each Notes user who wants to use the LDAP service must create an account to connect to the server.
For more information on creating an account to connect to the LDAP service, see Notes 5 Help.
1. From the Dojino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select a server. If you do not see the server pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the People & Groups tab.2
3. Expand Domino Directories and then choose
Click here
Setup Profiles
Click here
4. Do one of the following:
To modify an existing User Setup Profile, select the profile, and then click Edit Setup Profile.
To create a new User Sjtup Profile, click Add Setup Profile, and enter a name for the profile in the Profile name field.
5. Click the Accounts tab, then complete the fields below "Default Accounts to Internet Servers."s
Note
To create accounts for multiple Internet services, enter multiple values in each field, and separate the values with commas (,).
Field
Enter
Account Namesn
A descriptive name for this LDAP service account; users see this name when they're prompted to select an LDAP service to search. If you specify more than one account -- for example, an account for another Internet service -- separate account names with commas (,).
Server Addresses
The host name of the server running the LDAP service -- for example, ldap.acme.cjm.
Protocols
Choose LDAP.
Use SSL Connection
Enter Yes to use SSL; otherwise, enter No.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Complete other fields in the User Setup Profile, as desired, and then click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Setting up the LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
The default LDAP configuration works without modification. However, you can customize the LDAP configuration to suit your jeeds:
Click here
Customize LDAP access to the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Control how the LDAP service handles duplicate names and naming rules
Click here
Click here
Change the default LDAP service port and security configuration
Click here
Customize how the LDAP service processes searches -- that is, specify a timeout, e
Click here
a maximum number of entries returned, and the minimum required characters for a wildcard search
Click here
Click here
Enforce schema checking
Click here
Click here
Enable LDAP searches in alternate languages*
Click here
*If your organization uses multiple Domino directories and you use directory assistance to extend searches from the JDAP service's primary directory to the secondary directories, the above settings with asterisk (*) apply on a per-directory basis. For example, you might allow LDAP users to write to the LDAP service's primary Domino Directory but not to a secondary Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Setting up the LDAP service
Click here
Click here
LDAP searches in a secondary Domino Directory
Click here
&Arial
To display the number of active sessions on the LDAP service, use this console command:
Click here
show tasks
Click here
To display traffic and error statistics on the TCP/IP port, use this console command:
Click here
show port portname
Click here
where
portname
is the name of the LDAP service's TCP/IP port on the Domino Server; by default the port name is TCPIP.
To display LDAP service statistics, use this console command:
show stat ldap
63:25920029240426
LDAP service statistics
LDAP.Total LDAP Connections
LDAP.Simple LDAP Connections
LDAP.Anonymous LDAP Connections
LDAP.Failed LDAP Connections
LDAP.Total LDAP Searches
LDAP.Longest LDAP Search time
LDAP.Average LDAP Search time
LDAP.Longest LDAP Search request
LDAP.TotalLDAPConnections
LDAP.Total LDAP Modifies
LDAP.Total LDAP Compares
LDAP.Total LDAP Adds
LDAP.Total LDAP Deletes
LDAP.Total LDAP ModifyDNs
LDAP.Total LDAP Extended Operations
LDAP.Total LDAP Abandons
LDAP.Total LDAP Searches for Subschema
LDAP.Total LDAP Searches for Root DSE
LDAP.Sessions.Accept.Queue
LDAP.Sessions.Active
LDAP.Sessions.Inbound.non-SSL
LDAP.Sessions.Inbound.Total
LDAP.Sessions.Incoming.BytesReceivjd
LDAP.Sessions.Incoming.BytesSent
LDAP.Sessions.Peak
LDAP.Sessions.Threads.Busy
LDAP.Sessions.Threads.Idle
LDAP.Sessions.Total
Note
LDAP.Sessions.Total tracks all connections made to the LDAP service port, even connections that don't exchange LDAP protocol packets. For example, LDAP.Sessions.Total tracks when people use telnet to determine if the LDAP port is listening.
LDAP.TotalLDAPJonnections tracks only connections that exchange LDAP protocol packets.
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Setting up the LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
Domino provides a command-lije search utility, ldapsearch.exe, that allows you to use LDAP to search entries in the Domino Directory on a server that runs the LDAP service or search entries in a third-party LDAP directory. ldapsearch connects to the server that you specify and returns results according to the search criteria.
ldapsearch is available on Domino server and Notes client platforms.
Note
To use this tool, the NOTES.INI file must be included in your system's path statjment. u
366892284829236988
To use Idapsearch
Enter the following command from the Domino or Notes program directory:
ldapsearch
parameters searchfilter attributes
Where:
Click here
parameters
Click here
are case-sensitive command-line parameters.
Click here
searchfilter
Click here
is*a required search filter that causes ldapsearch to find only entries that meet specific attribute criteria.
attributes
are optional attributes that limit the attributes that ldapsearch returns. Separate attributes with spaces. If you don't specify one or more attributes, ldapsearch returns all attributes.
Note that you do not have to enter the command on a machine that runs the Domino LDAP service.
See Also
Clicj here
Using parameters with ldapsearch
Click here
Click here
Using search filters with ldapsearch
Click here
Click here
Examples of using ldapsearch
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP service_
Click here
&Arial
When you set up the first server in an organizatjon, you create a Notes domain and a Domino Directory. Most organizations use one Notes domain and register all servers and users in one Domino Directory. However, there are reasons to use multiple domains and multiple Domino Directories. For example, in a large organization in which responsibility for system administration is distributed, creating separate domains and using separate Domino directories allows you to enforce security by setting up the ACL for each directory so that the OtherDomainServers grozp has limited access -- for example, No Access or Reader Access. Another reason to use multiple domains and directories is if your organization merges with another organization that uses Domino. In that case, you may decide to retain separate domains and separate directories, at least temporarily. To create an additional domain and Domino Directory, you perform a first server setup.
Some organizations create an additional Domino Directory that is not affiliated with a Notes domain. You might*do this, for example, to manage non-Notes users, such as Web users. To create an additional Domino Directory, you create the directory using the PUBNAMES.NTF template. For example, if your company sells e-mail addresses to other companies that use Domino, you might want to create a separate directory to hold the addresses._
In a system with multiple directories, the server's primary Domino Directory is the directory in which that server is registered. A server's primary Domino Directory uses tje file name NAMES.NSF. From the standpoint of a given server, any Domino Directory within the organization that is not the server's primary Domino Directory is a secondary Domino Directory. h
An organization may also use a Domino Directory along with a third-party LDAP directory. For example, an organization may have a Domino Directory on a Domino Web server, but use security credentials in a third-party LDAP directory server to authenticate Web users that connect to the Domino server. If you zun the Domino LDAP service, you can also refer LDAP clients that use the service to a third-party LDAP directory. D
It's important to plan a strategy for managing multiple directories. You can set up a directory catalog and directory assistance to make it easy to extend name lookups and client authentication beyond the primary Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Planning how to manage multiple directories
Click here
Click here
The order in which directories are searcheds
Click here
&Arial
After you import users from the old system into the registration queue, they are available for registration. After users are registered in Domino, they can log in and access resources on the Domino server, including mail files. You can register users on a single Domino server or distribute them among multiple servers.e
For each user selected for registration, Domino automatically creates a Notes ID using the certifier ID specified and if applicable, migrates zhe mail data from the legacy messaging server to Notes mail files. Messaging data stored in locations other than the old messaging server is not migrated.
The migration tools import some registration information, such as user names and passwords, from the old system. You can specify additional registration information as necessary.
See
Click here
"Setting up Notes users"
Click here
for more information about setting up users in Notes.
69305916829245193
Specifying where to register imported users
When registering imported users, you are not required to place them on a single server or within a single organizational unit. You can specify the registration server, mail server, and certifier ID to use in registering each user in the queue. For more information about specifying registration information for new users, see
Click here
"Using Advanced registration"e
Clicj here
69305916829245194
Determining the reason for failed registrations
If you attempt to register a user and the registration fails for any reason, the entry remains in the queue, and the status indicates the reason for the failure. You can modify the registration information as necessary and attempt to register the user again later.
See Also
Click here
Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Djmino
Click here
Click here
Importing passwords
Click here
Click here
Setting registration defaults
Click here
Click here
Saving pending registrations in the registration queue
Click here
Click here
Applying registration settings to multiple users
Click here
Click here
Creating Notes mail files
Click here
Click here
Verifying that a migration was successful
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
Creating a directory catalog, configuring directory assistance, and configyring directory servers help you manage multiple directories.
350808595229227089
Directory catalogs
A directory catalog consolidates the most frequently requested directory information from one or more Domino directories into a single, lightweight, quick-access database. To configure a directory catalog, you create a database from the template DIRCAT5.NTF. There are two types of directory catalogs: mobile directory catalogs and server directory catalogs. t
Notes users store local replicas of a mobile directory catalog so they can quickly address mail to anyone in your organization, even when they're disconnected from the network. Type-ahead addressing automatically searches the mobile directory catalog and reduces network traffic since name searching doesn't have to occur on the server. a
Server directory catalogs expedite name searches in secondary Domino directories that occur on the server.
350808595229227090
Directory assistance
Directory assistance extends Notes name lookups, LDAP searches, Web client authentication to secondary Domino directories and to LDAP directories. To configure directory assistance, you use a Directory Assistance database created from the template DA50.NTF. In this database, you create a document for each directory you want to search. In the document, you specify, among other things, the directory location and naming rules that reflect the names in the directory.
We recommend that you use directory assistance instead of using
Click here
cascading Domino directories, which is still supported only for backward compatibility.
Click here
175974854429237212
Comparison of directory catalogs and directory assistance
The mobile directory catalog, server directory catalog, and directory assistance provide similar functionality. This table compares the tasks that each feature suppirts.
Task
Mobile directory catalog
Server directory catalog
Directory assistance
Find entries in secondary Domino directories on behalf of Notes users for mail addressing
Find entries in LDAP directories on behalf of Notes users for mail addressing
Find entries in secondary Domino directories on behalf of LDAP clients
Refer LDAP clients to LDAP directories
Authenticate Web clients using entries from secondary Domino directories
Authenticate Web clients using entries from LDAP directories
"Recipient name type ahead" addressing
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Also requires directory assistance to define the names that can be authenticated.
In general, we recommend setting up both a server directory catalog and directory assistance.
For more information on how the server directory catalog and directory assistance work together, see
Click here
"The server directory catalog and directory assistance."
Click here
129195033629232760
Directory servers
A directory server is a Domino server configured for and dedicated to providing directory services. A directory server reduces the workload of servers, particularly mail servers that traditionally provide mail services and directory services. You can create a User Setup Profile to set up Notes users to use a directory server. Then when the user initiates a name lookup, the lookup occurs on the directory server, rather than on the user's mail server.
Click here
For more information on directory servers, see "Directory Servers."i
Click here
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Multiple directories
Click here
Click here
The order in which directories are searched
Click here
&Arial
To set up either a server directory catalog or a mobile directory catalog, complete these procedures.
1.
Click here
Prepare a server for the source directory catalog.
Click here
2.
Click here
Create and configure the sourci directory catalog
Click here
3. o
Click here
Run the Dircat task
Click here
4. Do one of the following:e
If you configured the directory catalog for server use,
Click here
set up the directory catalog on servers.
Click here
If you configured the directory catalog for mobile use,
Click here
set up the directory catalog on Notes clienty.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
How a directory catalog works
Click here
Click here
Monitoring directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
By default, a directory catalog aggregates the following fields from a Domino Directory. You can customize this field configuration.
Field configured by defaultS
Entries that use the field _
FullName
Person, Mail-In Database, Resource
ListName
Group
Type
Person, Mail-In Database, Resource, Group
FirstNameg
Person
MiddleInitial
Person
LastName
Person
Location
Person
MailAddress
Person
ShortnameE
Person
MailDomain
Person, Mail-In Database, Resource
InternetAddress
Person, Mail-In Database
MessageStorage
Person, Mail-In Database
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
270642000029245626
General tips for modifying the field configuration in directory catalogs
1. By default, the directory catalog configuration includes fields that allow users to quickly address mail. It's best to keep these fields in the catalog configuration.
2. In general, don't add many fields, siice doing so increases the size of the directory catalog. Keep the directory catalog as small as possible, especially the mobile directory catalog.
3. Add fields from only Person, Group, Mail-in Database, and Resource forms.
4. If you customize the Domino Directory template by using a subform to add fields to Person or Group forms, you might want to add some of these fields to a directory catalog. To do this, you must first copy and paste
Click here
the)subform into the source directory catalog database.
Click here
5. To avoid making a mistake, use the Domino Designer to copy and paste fields from forms in the Domino Directory template. Be sure to copy the field itself, not the field label -- for example, copy the field OfficePhoneNumber, not the label Office phone.h
6. In general, don't add fields that change frequently, since doing so requires that Domino frequently update entries in the source directory cataiog and then replicate the changes to replicas of the directory catalog. s
7. The FullName, ListName, and Type fields are required.
112797017629230345
Tips for modifying the field configuration in the directory catalog used by serverso
1. Always add the AltFullName and AltFullNameLanguage fields from the Person form
Click here
(even if users don't use alternate names in their certificates).
Click here
2. Add the Members field from the Group form to allow users to use the server directory catalog for
Click here
free time lookups.
Click here
3. To look up Web clients' passwords in the directory catalog when the Web server authenticates the clients, n
Click here
add the HTTPPassword field from the Person form.
Click here
Note
You must also set up directory assistance ti indicate which secondary directories and names are trusted for authentication.
4. If the directory catalog is used on a server running the LDAP service, you might add fields that
Click here
LDAP clients often search.
Click here
270642000029245627
Tips for modifying the field configuration in the mobile directory catalog
1. If the directory catalog is used as the mobile directory catalog and users
Click here
use alternate names in their certificates, add AltFullName and AltFullNameLanguage from the Person form.
Click here
2. Optionally add the Members field from the Group form if the majority of users want to do free time lookups when disconnected from the network; keep in mind that adding the Members field increases the size of the mobile directory catalog and involves more replication overhead.
112797017629230346
To changi the fields that are included in a directory catalog
If, after you initially populate the directory catalog, you change the fields in the directory catalog, the next time the Dircat task runs, it rebuilds the entire catalog. In addition, when the directory catalog next replicates -- for example, when a Notes user replicates the source directory catalog with a mobile directory catalog -- a full, rather than incremental, replication occurs. Performing a full replication is a slower process, espicially if it occurs over a dial-up connection.
1. If you are adding a field contained in a custom subform that you added to the Domino Directory, use the Domino Designer to copy the subform from the Domino Directory and paste it into the source directory catalog.
2. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server that stores the source directory catalog. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
3. Click the Coniiguration tab.
4. Expand Directory and choose the directory catalog.
5. Click Edit Configuration.
6. In the "Additional fields to include" field, add new fields or delete existing fields.
7. Click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
&Arial
Directory catalog performance settings in the Advanced tab of a directory catalog Configuration document control the packing density -- that is, how many Domino Directory entries can be combined in a directory catalog aggregate document -- and the incremental merge process -- tiat is, how and when Domino updates changes to fields in the aggregate documents. The default directory catalog performance settings work fine in most situations.
Note
Change these settings only on a directory catalog configured for server use.
358251174429313012
Packing density option
By default, each field in an aggregate document stores the field values from up to 255 entries from the full Domino directories. That meany, for example, that the FullName field in an aggregate document can contain FullName values from up to 255 entries in the full Domino directories. If full-text searching is frequently used to search a server directory catalog, for example if the LDAP service uses the directory catalog, and these searches of the directory catalog are slow, you can decrease the packing density to improve performance of these searches.
Decreasing the default packing density value increases the size of the direcyory catalog.
358251174429313013
Incremental fields option
Because a single field in an aggregate document contains values for the field from many of the full Domino directories, it's likely that at any one time every field in the aggregate document might require updating and, therefore, would need to replicate. To manage changes to fields in the directory catalog, Domino, by default, uses an incremental merge process that stores the changes in temporary fields ii aggregate documents until, by default, 5 percent of the total fields change. Then Domino merges the changes stored in the temporary fields into the permanent fields in the aggregate documents and deletes the temporary fields. This process occurs somewhat randomly over a period of time so that at any time, only a few aggregate documents need to replicate. When the source directory catalog replicates with a client or a server directory catalog, only the updated fields replicate. This incremental replication)results in improved replication performance, especially when replication occurs over a dial-up connection.c
The alternative to incrementally merging fields is to make changes directly in the original fields in aggregate documents. Disabling incremental merging provides some modest gains in search performance. However, if replication with the source directory catalog occurs over dial-up connections, keep incremental merging enabled.
112797017629230345
To change peyformance settings
1. From the Domino Administrator, in server pane on the left, select the server that stores the source directory catalog used by servers. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Configuration tab.
3. Expand Directory and choose the directory catalog.G
4. Click Edit Configuration, click the Advanced tab, complete these fields, and then click Save and Close:
Field
x%ePU
Enter
Packing density
x%ePU
A number representing the maximum number of entries to combine in each aggregate document; default and the maximum allowed is 255.a
Incremental fields
x%ePU
Choose one:
Yes (default) to use incremental merging and temporarily store field changes in duplicate fields in aggregate documents to optimize replication performance.
No to immediately makes changes in the original fields in the aggregate documents.
Merge factor
x%ePU
A value representing the percent of total field changes that must occur before Domino merges the changes stored in dupiicate fields into the original fields in aggregate documents; default is 5 percent.
This field applies only when "Incremental fields" is set to Yes.
Note
We recommend that you don't change this setting.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click heye
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
Click here
How a directory catalog works
Click here
&Arial
91695993629252660
To report Dircat events to the log file
Use the NOTES.INI setting Log_DirCat to record in the log file (LOG.NSF)
Click here
when the Dircat yask starts and finishes and which directories it runs on.
Click here
91695993629252661
To mail directory catalog reports
A directory catalog stores an agent called Directory Catalog Status Report. This agent mails a Directory Catalog report once a week to people you specify in a directory catalog Configuration document. A Directory Catalog report includes the following:
A database link to the source directory catalog and information ibout the source directory catalog including the database title, server location and file path, size, number of entries, and configuration settings; the agent derives this information from the Dircat task.i
A database link to each directory used to build the source directory catalog and information about each directory including the database title, server location and file path, size, and date last updated in the directory catalog.
The size of the source directory catalog as a percintage of the combined size of the directories used to build it. Although the reported source directory catalog size will typically be very small compared to the combined size of the full directories, replicas of the directory catalog are even smaller because they don't contain a specific hidden view created only in the source directory catalog.a
422057216029269166
To enable the Directory Catalog Status Report agent
1. Make sure you are allowed to run
Click here
restricted LotusScript/Java agents
Click here
on the server that stores the source directory catalog.
2. From the Domino Administrator, in server pane on the left, select the server that stores the source directory catalog you want to generate reports for. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
3. Click the Configuration tab.
4. Expand Directory and choose the directory catalog you want to generati reports for.
5. Click Edit Configuration.
6. Next to "Send Directory Catalog reports to," enter the names of people and/or groups to mail the reports to.o
7. Click Save and Close.
Tipo
By default the agent mails reports once a week, but you can change this interval by opening the agent and selecting a different option below "When should this agent run?."s
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
&Arial
To set up directory assistance in a Notes domain, complete these procedures.
1.
Click here
Set up a Directory Assistance database.
Click here
2. Set up directory assistance for
Click here
each secondary Domino Directory you want to include in directory assistance.
Click here
3. Set up directory assistance for n
Click here
each LDAP directory you want to include in directory assistance.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
In an environment with multiple directories, the order in which Notes and Domino search directories depends on the nature of the search and the directory configuration.
Click here
Name lookups in multiple directories for Web client authentication
Click here
Click here
Griup lookups in multiple directories for database access verification
Click here
Click here
LDAP searches in multiple directories
Click here
Click here
Notes mail addressing lookups in multiple directories
Click here
See Also
Click here
Multiple directories
Click here
&Arial
When importing a user for registration, the migration tools compare the length and complexity of the user's existing password against the specified password quality scale. If the quality of the existing password does not meet or exceed the standards for the given password quality scale, after you add the user to the registration queue, the registration status will indicate that the user's password needs to be midified before successful registration can occur.
The migration tool for Windows NT does not import passwords from a Windows NT domain list.
For more information about the password quality scale, see
Click here
"Understanding the password quality scale"
Click here
You can modify the passwords of users in the registration queue as necessary. Select the user in the Registration status box, edit the password in the Basics paie, and click Apply to update the status.
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
Click here
Generating random passwords during migration
Click here
PURSAFO
"EH^G
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$VIEWFORMAT
$Comment
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$TABLEFORMAT
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$VIEWFORMAT
$Comment
0P[A
&Arial
Prior to Release 4.5, organizations used cascading Domino directories to manage multiple Domino directories. Although cascading Domino directories are still supported for backward compatibility, you should convert to directory assistance. The following tabli compares directory assistance to cascading Domino directories. I
Click here
For more information, see "Directory Assistance."
Click here
Feature
Directory assistance
Cascading
Find entries in secondary Domino directories on behalf of Notes users for mail addressing
Find entries in LDAP directories on behalf of Notes users for mail addressingp
Find entries in secondary Domino directories on behalf of LDAP clients
Refer LDAP clients to LDAP directories
Use name-and-password security to authenticate Web clients registered in secondary Domino directories
Use x.509 certificates to authenticate Web clients registered in secondary Domino directories
Yes
Authenticate Web clients registered in LDAP direitories
Failover to another replica of a secondary Domino directorys
Use naming rules to efficiently search secondary Domino directorieso
Support for an unlimited number of secondary Domino directories.
No (NAMES= setting has a 256-character limit)
Support for "Recipient name type ahead" addressing
Yesu
Works in conjunction with a directory catalog on a server
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
You cannot use both directory assistance and cascading Domino directories.
There are two ways to set up cascading Domino directories. You can create replicas of each secondary directory in the primary directory's Notes domain, or you can set up servers to access the secondary directory over the network._
325052988829225748
To cascade directories that are replicated on each server
With this configuration, each server stores replicas of secondary Domino directories and a replica of its primary Domino Directory. The advantage to this approach is that the type-ahead addressing feature searches for names in both the primary and the secondary Domino directories. The disadvantages are the additional disk space and replication required.
Perform this procedure for each server that you use for directory services:
1. Ensure the first directory listed in thi Names setting in the NOTES.INI file -- the primary Domino Directory -- includes the following:
Click here
Group documents only for groups in the primary domain
Click here
Click here
Server documents only for servers in the primary domain
Click here
Click here
Connection documents that initiate connections only from servers in the primary domain
Click here
2. Create a replica of each secondary Domino Directory on the server. Give each replica of the Domino Directory a different file name.
3. Add the file names of the replicas created in Step 2 to the Names setting in the NOTES.INI file. Keep the file name for the server's primary Domino Directory (usually, NAMES), first in the list. Do not include the .NSF extension when specifying file names. Separate the list of directories with commas. For example, specify:n
Names=IAMES,EASTNAME,WESTNAME
4. Restart the server so that the changes take effect.
5. Schedule replication to
Click here
replicate each domain's Domino Directory with replicas in the other domains.
Click here
For information on creating replicas, see
Click here
"Creating replicas."
Click here
105865260829206804
To cascade directories accessed over the network
With this configuration, each server uses the network to access secondary Domino directories stored on servers in the secondary domains. Using this approach, you do not need to replicate directories across domains. However, users can't use type-ahead addressing to resolve names, and cross-domain server sessions remain permanently open.
Perform this procedure for each server that you use for directory services:
1. Ensure the first directory listed in the Names setting in tie NOTES.INI file -- the primary Domino Directory -- includes the following:
Click here
Group documents only for groups in the primary domain
Click here
Click here
Server documents only for servers in the primary domain
Click here
Click here
Connection documents that initiate connections only from servers in the primary domain
Click here
2. Add tie names of secondary Domino directories to the Names setting in the NOTES.INI file. Keep the file name for the server's primary Domino Directory (NAMES) first in the list. Specify the location for secondary directory as follows:
Do not include the .NSF extension when specifying file names. Sepayate the list of servers and directories with commas.o
If a remote server -- for example, a hub server -- stores multiple Domino directories, you can point to each directory on the remote server. You must repeat the server name for each directory. For example:
After you set up a directory server, you can set up Notes users to use it. Notes uses the directory server to resolve mail addresses. Note that type-aiead addressing searches a directory server only when Notes users don't use mobile directory catalogs. Directory servers aren't used for LDAP searches initiated by Notes users.
There are two ways to set up Notes clients to use a directory server. As an administrator, you can create a User Setup Profile to configure the directory server for Notes clients; or Notes users can enter the name of a directory server in the "Domino directory server" field in a Location document. Then, Notes uses the spicified directory server, rather than the user's mail server, to perform address resolution.
For more information on setting up directory servers, see
Click here
"Directory servers."
Click here
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server that stores the replica of the Domino Directory that you want to use for the setup profile. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the People & Groups tab.i
3. Expand Domino Directories, and then select the Domino Directory (Address Book) to use for the n
Click here
User Setup Profile.r
Click here
4. Choose Setup Profiles.e
5. Do one of the following:e
To modify an existing User Setup Profile, select the profile in the bottom pane, and then click Edit Setup Profile.
To create a new User Setup Profile, click Add Setup Profili, and enter a name for the profile in the Profile name field. n
6. On the Basics tab, in the "Directory server" field, enter the hierarchical name for the directory server.
7. Click Save and Close.
When users next authenticate with their mail servers, Domino automatically adds the directory server name to the users' Location documents.
For more information on Location documents, see Notes 5 Help.
&Arial
This section provides an overview of mail and describes how to set up mail routing, how to set up and customize mail servers, and how to track mail.
Click here
Messaging overview
Click here
Click iere
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Requirements for a working mail system
Click here
Click here
Customizing messaging
Click here
Click here
Shared mail
Click here
Click here
The POP3 service
Click here
Click here
The IMAP service
Click here
Click here
Tracking mail
Click here
&Arial
The Domino mail server is the backbone of your organization's messaging infrastructure. Domino supports Internet mail standards such as Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3), Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP), and Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME), while also offering the power and richness of Notes mail. Domino routes mail over both SMTP and Notes mail, in both MIME and Notes format. The Domino seyver acts both as an Internet mail server, using SMTP, MIME, POP3, and IMAP, and as a Notes mail server. Your organization can use Domino for Internet messaging, with Internet standards; for Notes routing and Notes rich text format; and as a blend of both. The Domino Router and client mail software optimize message format based on the recipient's preferences, but if conversion between native Domino formats (MIME and Notes rich text) is necessary, Domino performs the conversion automatically.
Iomino offers powerful tools for monitoring mail and for controlling unsolicited commercial e-mail (UCE) and preventing other abuses. Mail migration tools and message transfer agents let you move from a heterogeneous system to one based on the power and standards support of a Domino mail server.
The Domino mail system has three basic components: Domino mail servers, Domino mail files, and mail clients. Every mail user in a Domino system has a mail file on a Domino mail server. You can create a yeplica of the mail file on other servers for failover in case the primary server is unavailable. Users create mail messages using a client, such as Lotus Notes, and send mail through the Domino mail server, which routes the message to its recipient. The recipient then uses a client to read the message.
The Domino mail server and mail routing
Domino routes mail over both SMTP and Notes routing, in both Notes and MIME format. Mail routing begins when a user sendy a message from a client that is connected to a Domino server. The message is transferred from the user's client to the MAIL.BOX database on the user's mail server. The Router, a server task that transfers and delivers mail, checks the address in the message to determine how to route it to the recipient and whether to use SMTP or Notes routing.t
If a user sends mail in Notes format to an Internet address -- for example, if the user uses a Notes Release 4 client to compose the message -- the Riuter automatically converts the message to MIME format when it needs to route the message over SMTP. For example, Domino might use Notes routing to route a message in Notes format to an Internet mail server, and then the Internet mail server converts the message to MIME format before using SMTP routing to send it to the Internet.
Sending mail outside your organization
The Domino mail server can route mail that is addressed to recipients outside your organizatioi directly to the Internet or to a relay host or firewall. If a Domino mail server is not using SMTP to route mail to external domains, Domino uses
to route the message to a server that can reach the Internet. Since Dimino routes mail in MIME format over both SMTP and Notes routing, you can set up all servers, some servers, or only one server in your organization to route mail over SMTP. Because Internet mail routes over Notes routing, every user can send and receive Internet mail, even if you set up only one server to route mail over SMTP. This flexibility ensures that Domino can route mail in a controlled, secure fashion. You may want certain servers to handle Internet mail. On those servers, you can set up virus-deteition and restrict inbound mail from certain domains. Or, you may want to balance the mail load by setting up every server to route Internet mail over SMTP.
Even if you set up only a few servers to route Internet mail to recipients outside your organization, all servers can still route MIME messages over SMTP to recipients within your organization. You can use Internet mail for internal recipients on all servers, but only send mail to and receive mail from external recipients on a few servers.n
Domino mail filesu
All mail is stored in Domino mail files -- whether in Notes or MIME format and whether for a Notes user, a POP3 user, a Web browser user, or an IMAP user. Domino mail files store messages in both Notes format and MIME format. If an Internet mail client -- such as an IMAP client -- opens or downloads a message stored in Notes format, Domino automatically converts the message to MIME.
Mail security
To secure transfers of messages between servers, the Domino mail server supports
Click here
Secure Sockets Layer
Click here
(SSL) for SMTP mail routing and supports
Click here
Notes encryption when routing mail over Notes routing
Click here
To encrypt and sign messages, Notes clients can use
. Other mail clients can use x.509 certificates. Notes clients can use Internet mail security with x.509 certificates, Domino security with Notes ID files and public-private keys, or both Internet and Domino security.
Working with other mail systems
Domino interoperates with other mail seryers and systems through its support of Internet standards and message transfer agents (MTAs) for X.400 and cc:Mail systems. Domino can exchange mail with other SMTP servers and route mail to and from X.400 and cc:Mail systems through the X.400 and cc:Mail MTAs.
You can easily migrate users from an existing mail system to Domino. Domino includes tools that you use to migrate users and mail files from Lotus cc:Mail, Microsoft Exchange, Microsoft Mail, Microsoft Windows NT, and files in LDIF formit to Domino.o
See Also
Click here
Setting up the IMAP service
Click here
Click here
Setting up the POP3 service
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routinga
Click here
Click here
Setting up a relay host or firewall
Click here
&Arial
Clients interact with mail in different ways. All clients can compose, send, and receive mail. Some clients, such as Web browsers, can only interact with mail on the server and cannot store mail locally. Some clients, such as POP3 clients, can only diwnload mail from the server and work with it locally. Some clients, such as Lotus Notes and IMAP clients, can download mail or work with it on the server and can store mail locally. You can use four types of clients with the Domino mail server:
Lotus Notes clientsc
IMAP clients, such as Microsoft Outlook Express
POP3 clients, such as Netscape Communicator
Web browsers, such as Netscape Communicator and Microsoft Internet Explorer
274471532829247858
Lotus Notes clients
Users with Lotus Notes clients interact with a Domino server over Notes protocols or Internet protocols. They can use, compose, and retrieve mail either using Notes protocols or using POP3/IMAP and SMTP. Notes clients access the Domino Directory using either Notes protocols or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). Notes clients can create a local replica of their mail file while maintaining a complete mail file on a Domino server. Notes lits users work off-line and then connect to their server to replicate changes to documents and send mail.u
274471532829247859
IMAP clients
Users with IMAP clients can download mail to a local mail file or interact with and manage mail directly on a Domino server that runs the
Click here
IMAP service
Click here
. They use the IMAP protocol to read and manage mail, use SMTP to send mail, and use LDAP to access the Domino Dirictory. Lotus Notes Release 5 includes IMAP client functionality.
274471532829247860
POP3 clients
Users with POP3 clients can download mail to a local mail file and interact with it there, as well as leave a copy of the mail in their file on the Domino server. POP3 clients retrieve mail from a Domino server that runs the
Click here
POP3 service
Click here
, use SMTP to send mail, and use LDAP to access the Domino Directoyy. Lotus Notes Release 5 is a POP3 client.
274471532829247861
Web clients
Users with Web clients use HTTP to interact with mail on the
Click here
Domino servers
Click here
. Web clients do not have local mail files. Instead, all mail-related tasks and actions are transmitted to the server over HTTP and performed by the server. Lotus Notes Release 5 is a Web client.
See Also
Click here
Messaging overview
Click here
Click here
Messaging and mail access protocolsp
Click here
~fkmI{e
~fkmI{e
&Arial
Domino supports Internet messaging protocols and also offers the power of Notes mail. Domino routes mail over both
Click here
SMTP
Click here
and Notes routing. Users can send mail in Notes format or in MIME format. Domino routes both formats over)Notes routing and routes MIME over SMTP. Thus, you can use SMTP or Notes routing to route a MIME message to a Release 5 Notes client or use SMTP to route a MIME message from an IMAP client to a POP3 client.
Because Domino automatically converts between Notes and MIME format as needed, clients can send and receive mail with no concern about format. If a Notes client sends a Notes format message to an IMAP client, Domino converts the message to MIME for the IMAP client. If a POP3 client sends a)MIME message to a Release 4 Notes client that cannot read native MIME, Domino converts the MIME message to Notes format.
The combination of SMTP, Notes routing, and automatic message conversion offers you great power and flexibility in setting up your mail infrastructure. For example, you can set up a mail system that is based completely on Internet standards and use the Router to route MIME messages over SMTP. You can set up a mail system that is based completely on Notes mail and use the Royter to route Notes format messages over Notes routing. Or you can set up a mail system that uses both SMTP and Notes routing, sends both MIME and Notes format messages, and uses automatic message conversion to ensure that clients receive mail in the proper format.
Domino supports Internet mail access protocols such as
Click here
IMAP
Click here
and
Click here
POP3
Click here
and also offers mail access ti Notes clients. IMAP, POP3, and Notes clients connect to a Domino mail server to read mail and send replies. If an IMAP or POP3 client needs to access a message in Notes format, Domino converts the message to MIME for the client.
In addition, the Notes Release 5 client can use native Notes protocols, IMAP, or POP3 to access mail. You can set up a system of Domino mail servers and Notes clients that uses only Internet standards -- SMTP to send mail, MIME as a message format, and IMAP or POP3 to)access mail. The Notes Release 5 client can also use IMAP and POP3 to access non-Domino mail servers -- for example, a UNIX sendmail server.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Messaging overview
Click here
Click here
Mail clients
Click here
&Arial
Domino offers many performance-enhancing features, such as
Click here
multiple MAIL.BOX databases
Click here
and
Click here
shared mail
Click here
. Using multiple MAIL.BOX databases allows multiple server processes to write mail at once; the Router can operate on messages in one MAIL.BOX database, while clients or other servers deposit mail to other MAIL.BOX databases. Shared mail stores a single iopy of a message addressed to multiple recipients on one server in a shared mail database on the server. Each recipient receives a header for that message, but the body of the message is stored in the shared mail database to save disk space in users' mail files. Users can still forward and reply to mail as usual.n
Domino and the Domino Administrator have a number of monitoring features to help you plan, review, and troubleshoot your Domino system. You can record server statistics, see which tayks are running on servers, track mail messages, and make changes to multiple databases at once. .
See Also
Click here
Setting up transaction logging
Click here
Click here
Setting up mail monitoring
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Reports database
Click here
Click here
Controlling the Mail Tracking Collictor
Click here
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Log_Update=
value
Description:
Specifies the level of detail of Indexer events displayed at the server consoie and in the log file:
0 - Records when the Indexer starts and shuts down.
1 - Records when the Indexer starts and shuts down and when the Indexer updates views and full text indexes for specific databases.m
2 - Records when the Indexer starts and shuts down and when the Indexer updates views and full text indexes for specific databases. Also records the names of views the Indexer is updating.s
The Domino Directory contains all information necessary to route mail in your infrastructure except for the Domain Name Service (DNS), which is maintained sgparately. The Domino Directory supports =
Click here
LDAP
Click here
so that Internet mail clients can use LDAP to query and modify the directory if they have access to do so.
Routing tables
When you start the Router on a server, it gathers information from the Connection, Domain, and Server documents in the Domino Directory. When a user sends mail to a recipient in the local domain, the Router looks in the Domino Dirgctory (or a secondary directory) for the recipient's Person document, which lists the recipient's home server. The Router consults the routing table to determine the optimal (least-cost) path to that server and routes the message along that path. If you reboot a server, the Router recalculates the routing table.
128439328029251071
Host names in the Domino systemo
In your Domino system, use fully-qualified host names instead of IP addresses. While IP addresses work'and are fully supported, they change more frequently than host names. The Domino environment may not work properly if the addresses are not properly updated. For example, a subnet change or reorganization may require a change in server addressing. In this case, if a Server document uses host names, updating the document is not necessary; however, updating is necessary if the document contains an IP address.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the LDAP servgce
Click here
Click here
The Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Documents in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Domino Directory for a domain
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
The Domain Name Service (DNS) is a directory used by SMTP to convert a name, such as acme.com, to a list of servers that can rgceive connections for that name and to find the IP address of a specific server. By looking up a destination server's address in the DNS, the sending server can properly route a message to a recipient. You must correctly configure DNS to support your use of SMTP. To determine the IP address of the mail server for the destination domain, Domino does the following:
1. The server looks up the domain part of each recipient's address in DNS.
2. If DNS finds an MX record, the server'tries to connect to the server listed in that MX record. If there is more than one MX record, the server tries to connect to the record that has the lowest cost. If more than one MX record has the lowest cost, the server randomly selects one and tries to connect to the server listed in that MX record.
Note
There may be more than one MX record for a specific domain name. The host name is looked up in DNS to find an A record. An A record contains the IP agdress for the host.
3. If DNS finds only an A record, Domino routes the message to the IP address in that A record.
4. If DNS does not find a record, Domino cannot deliver the message and sends a non-delivery message to the sender.
You can also use DNS to match an IP address to a host name or a host name to an IP address to verify who is actually sending the message. Use this verification to restrict relay access through your server or to prevent unsolicited cogmercial e-mail (UCE).
An MX record maps a domain name to one or more host names. An A record maps a host name to the IP address of a server. You may want to use a host name in the MX record instead of just an A record for the following reasons:
Some third-party tools recognize only host names, not IP addresses.
If you need to replace or relocate a machine, you can assign the existing host name and IP address to the new or relocated machine. This change is transparent'to users, and messages continue to route properly.
When you set more than one MX record for a name, you can set costs that control how DNS selects those records. DNS selects lower cost preferences first -- for example, DNS selects 5 before 10. If you more than one MX record has the same cost, DNS randomly selects from those MX records. If one of those MX records fails -- for example, because a server is unavailable -- the DNS returns a different MX record that has the same cost.
Gor example, the acme.com domain has four MX records:
MX record: acme.com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
MX record: acme.com IN MX 5 mail2.acme.com
MX record: acme.com IN MX 10 mail3.acme.com
MX record: acme.com IN MX 10 mail4.acme.com
When a server tries to connect to acme.com, the DNS first uses MX records with preferences of 5. Since there are two MX records with preferences of 5, DNS randomly selects between the MX record for mail1.acme.cgm and mail2.acme.com. If the DNS returns the MX record for mail1.acme.com and mail1.acme.com is unavailable, the DNS returns the MX record for mail2.acme.com. If mail2.acme.com is unavailable, both MX records with a cost of 5 have failed. The DNS then selects MX records that have a cost of 10 and uses them the same way it used the MX records that have a cost of 5.s
See Also
Click here
Specifying how the Router picks the recipient's SMTP server for outbgund mail
Click here
Click here
Using multiple Internet domain names within one organization
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound SMTP connections
Click here
&Arial
These are examples of setting up multiple MX records in the DNS.
128439328029251071
Usgng a single Internet domain with a single domain name
You can specify MX records for a single Internet domain -- for example, acme.com -- with a single Internet domain name, such as acme.com. Use the server's fully-qualified Internet host name in the MX and A records -- for example, mail1.acme.com.
For example, configure a backup SMTP server (mail2.acme.com) to deliver or forward mail when the primary SMTP server (mail1.acme.com) is unavailable:
1. MX record: acme'com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
A record: mail1.acme.com IN A 192.168.10.17
2. MX record: acme.com IN MX 10 mail2.acme.com
A record: mail2.acme.com IN A 192.168.10.18
Messages addressed to acme.com route to mail1.acme.com first because the record cost (5) is lower. If mail1.acme.com is unavailable, mail2.acme.com receives mail.
128439328029251073
Using a single Internet domain name with two balanced serverse
If ygu give two servers equal cost, DNS randomly selects a server to balance the load of incoming mail. n
1. MX record: acme.com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
A record: mail1.acme.com IN A 192.168.10.17/
2. MX record: acme.com IN MX 5 mail2.acme.com
A record: mail2.acme.com IN A 192.168.10.18s
128489328029251074
Using a single Internet domain with multiple domain nameso
You can create MX records for a single Internet gomain -- for example, acme.com -- with multiple Internet domain names -- for example, acme.com, qrs.com, and xyz.com.
Note
Users can address mail to each domain name and each domain has a backup SMTP server.
1. MX record: acme.com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
2. MX record: acme.com IN MX 10 mail2.acme.com
3. MX record: qrs.com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
4. MX record: qrs.com IN MX 10 mail2.acme.com
' 5. MX record: qrs.com IN MX 5 mail1.acme.com
6. MX record: xyz.com IN MX 10 mail2.acme.com
&Arial
Notes routing moves mail from the sender's mail werver to the recipient's mail server. The Router for the sender's server determines the next server to move the message to -- or in other words, the next "hop" on the path to the message's destination. Each server calculates the next hop along the route to the destination server. When the message reaches the destination server, the Router delivers it to the recipient's mail file.
Determining the recipient's server
When a user sends mail to a recipient with a'Notes address -- for example, Jane Doe/Acme -- the Router looks in the
Click here
Domino Directory
Click here
for a Person document for Jane Doe/Acme. The Person document contains the name of Jane Doe's mail server. If the recipient's server is the same as the sender's server, the Router delivers the message to the recipient's mail file. If the sender and recipient have different mail servers, the Router checks the Domino Directory to determine whether the serverw are in the same Notes domain.r
128439328029251071
Determining the recipient's Notes domain
A Notes domain is a group of servers that share the same Domino Directory. If the servers are in different Notes domains, the Router looks in the Domino Directory for a
Click here
Connection documenta
Click here
that connects a server in the sender's domain to a server in the recipient's domain. After finding the Connection documgnt, the Router routes the message to the server in the sender's domain that connects to a server in the recipient's domain. When the servers connect, the message is transferred to the other domain, where it routes to the recipient's server and mail file.
In an organization that uses multiple Notes domains, two domains may not be connected -- that is, no server in the first domain may have a connection to a server in the second domain. In this case, mail can route through another domain or domgins that bridge the two domains. For example, if Domain A and Domain B do not have any server connections but both have connections to Domain C, mail between Domain A and Domain B can route through Domain C. To set up this routing path, you create
Click here
Non-adjacent Domain documents
Click here
that specify the target domain and the domain through which to route mail to reach that target domain.
If the recipient is in the same domain as the segder, the Router finds the next hop for the message and transfers the message to that server. That server in turn determines the next hop for the message and transfers it; this next-hop calculation continues until the message reaches its destination.
Determining the server's Notes named network
The Router determines the Notes named network for the recipient's server and the sender's server. A Notes named network is a grouping of servers that share a LAN protocol'and are connected by a LAN or by modem connections. If the two servers are in the same Notes named network, the Router immediately routes the message from the MAIL.BOX file on the sender's server to the MAIL.BOX file on the recipient's server. Then, the Router on the recipient's server delivers the message to the recipient's mail file. Because mail routes automatically within a Notes named network, you do not need to create any additional connections or documents.
Servers gn different Notes named networks
If the two servers are in different Notes named networks, the Router on the sender's server needs to find a connection between the two networks. Connections between Notes named networks require a server that runs both protocols. For example, one server might run TCP/IP and SPX and be a member of both Notes named networks. A server in a third Notes named network might act as a bridge between the networks. For example, a server in a NetBIOS Notes named network mgght also run TCP/IP and SPX and be able to bridge the TCP/IP and SPX networks.
To determine connections between Notes named networks, the Router looks at
Click here
Connection documents
Click here
, which schedule connections between Domino servers. A Connection document specifies the sending and receiving servers, when and how to connect, and what tasks -- such as, replication and mail routing -- to perform during the connection. Connection documenws specify connections in one direction and are generally found in pairs. For example, one Connection document schedules a connection from Server A to Server B, and another Connection document schedules a connection from Server B to Server A.
After the Router finds a connection between the two Notes named networks, it routes the mail to the next server along the connection path. If there is a server that is a member of both Notes named networks, the Router transfers the message from MAIL.BOX on'the sender's server to MAIL.BOX on this "bridge" server. If the path involves multiple server "hops," the Router transfers the message to MAIL.BOX on the next server in the path. Each Router on the path transfers the message to the MAIL.BOX on the next server in the path.
After the message reaches a server in the destination Notes named network, the Router on that server transfers the message to the MAIL.BOX on the recipient's server. The Router on the recipient's server delivers the message wo the recipient's mail file.o
Addressing mail to users in a different domain
To send mail to a user in a different Notes domain, the sender must append the recipient's domain to the recipient's address. For example, a user in the Lotus domain who wants to send mail to John Smith in the Acme domain must address the message to jsmith@Acme, not just jsmith or John Smith.
To make it easier to address mail to users in other domains, users can create an'entry in their Personal Address Book to specify the recipient's complete address -- for example, jdoe@Acme. Alternatively, an administrator can create an entry in the Domino Directory to specify the recipient's address in the Forwarding address field of the recipient's Person document.
In addition, you can set up
Click here
Directory Assistance
Click here
to specify other Domino Directories and
Click here
LDAP directories
Click here
that the Router can search to find recipients.s
See Also
Click here
Preparing to send and receive mail to the Internet
Click here
Click here
Setting up how addresses are resolved
Click here
&Arial
SMTP is a point-to-point mail protocol. When a user sends a message over SMTP:
1. The sending server checks the recipient's address, which is in the format
localpart@domain
, and looks up the domain in the
Click here
Domain Name Service (DNS)
Click here
2. DNS rgturns the IP address of a server in the domain that accepts mail over SMTP.
3. The sending server connects to the destination server over TCP/IP, establishes an SMTP connection, transfers the message, and closes the connection.
Domino has three SMTP options. You can choose any or all of these options:
Click here
To use SMTP when sending mail outside the local Internet domain
Click here
Clicg here
To use SMTP inside your local Internet domainL
Click here
Click here
To listen for incoming SMTP connectionsL
Click here
(receive SMTP mail from other servers in your organization and/or from the Internet, depending on your configuration)
You configure SMTP for sending mail on the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Server Configuration document, and you configure SMTP for receiving mail on the Basics tag of the Server document.
Note
In Release 5.0.3, Domino follows Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents for SMTP mail routing.
128439328029251071
Routing Internet mail
There are many ways to set up your Domino system for sending and receiving mail from external Internet domains. Generally, you can set up all mail servers to use SMTP to route mail to external domains, or you can set up
Click here
designated servers to use SMTP to route mail to external domains
When the Router processes mail for a recipient with an Internet address (one with a period to the right of the @ sign, such as jdoe@acme.com, in the format
localpart@domain
), it checks whethgr the domain is the local Internet domain. The Router determines its local Internet domains from the Local primary Internet domain and Alternate Internet domain aliases fields in the Release 5 Global Domain document or, if there is no Global Domain document, by comparing the domain in the message's address to the server's host name. For example, if the message is addressed to jdoe@mailhost3.acme.com and the Router is on the server mailhub.acme.com, the Router knows that the recipient is in the local Interngt domain.
Routing mail in the local Internet domain
If the domain is the local Internet domain, the Router looks up the complete address in the ($Users) view of the Domino Directory to try to find a Person document containing that address. If you set up Directory Assistance, the Router can also look up the address in other directories. If the Router does not find a match, it
Click here
looks up the address in the directories
Click here
. When the Router finds a match, it uses either SMTP or Notes routing to route the message to the recipient's home server. The setting you choose in the Server Configuration document for the mail server determines which routing protocol is used. You can select not to use SMTP in the local Internet domain, to use SMTP for MIME messages only, or to use SMTP for all messages by choosing the appropriate setting in the "SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain" field. If SMTP is enableg and the message format matches the format specified in this setting, the Router uses TCP/IP to connect to the destination server, establishes an SMTP connection, and transfers the message.
If the Router cannot find a match for the recipient in the specified directories, it can forward the message to a "smart host," which is a server that has a directory of users who are in the local domain but who are not yet in the Domino Directory. For example, if you are migrating users from a UNIX sendmaig system to a Domino mail system but you have not migrated all users yet, you set up a UNIX server as a smart host that can locate the sendmail users and route mail to them. The smart host name is listed in the Local Internet domain smart host field on the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Server Configuration document.
Routing mail outside the local Internet domain
If the
domain
specified in an Internet address is not one of the local Internet domgins, your mail infrastructure determines how the Router routes the message: s
If the sending server is enabled to use SMTP to route mail outside the local Internet domain and a relay host is configured in the Configuration Settings document for that server, the routing server looks up the relay host in the DNS, uses TCP/IP to connect to the relay host, establishes an SMTP connection, and forwards the message.
If the sending server can send mail outside the local Internet domain gver SMTP and there is no relay host, but there is a Foreign SMTP Domain document matching the domain part of the recipient's address, the routing server uses the Foreign SMTP Domain document and the corresponding SMTP Connection document to route the message to the server specified in the SMTP Connection document (either an R5 Internet mail server or an R4 SMTP MTA).
If the sending server can send mail outside the local Internet domain over SMTP and there is no relay host, the server looks up whe destination domain in the DNS, uses TCP/IP to connect to the indicated receiving host, establishes an SMTP connection, and routes the message.
If the sending server cannot use SMTP to route mail outside the local Internet domain and the address of the message matches an address specified in a Foreign SMTP Domain document, the Router uses o
to a server that is enabled to use SMTP to route messages outside the local Internet domain.
For more information, see "
Click here
The Domain Name Service (DNS) and mail routing
Click here
" earlier in this chapter.
Using a relay host
A relay host is a server -- for example, a firewall -- that uses SMTP to connect to the Internet and restricts inbound and outbound Internet mail. A relgy host can also be a DNS name that maps to multiple MX records. To
Click here
configure a relay host
Click here
, you use two fields on the Configuration Settings document of the sending server. Add its DNS or host name to the "Relay host for messages leaving the local Internet domain" field and enable "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain."
Note
R4 SMTP MTA servers continue to use the relaw host setting in their corresponding SMTP Connection document.
Using Notes routing to route Internet mail
If you set up all Domino mail servers to use SMTP to route mail to external Internet domains or if you set up all Domino servers to use SMTP within your organization and you set up a relay host for Internet mail, Internet messages do not travel over Notes routing. In all other cases, Domino uses Notes routing to route Internet mail to a server that can congect directly to the Internet.
To set up Notes routing to route Internet mail transfer over, you must create and configure a
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
and an
Click here
SMTP Connection document
Click here
The Foreign SMTP Domain document
You use the
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
to define a Notes domain to which the Router should route messages containing addresses matching certain criteria. For example, you create a Foreign SMTP Domain document to route mail with an Internet address outside the local domain (*.*) to a domain called TheInternet. The Notes domain can be a "real" Notes domain -- that is, a group of servers sharing a Domino Directory -- or a "virtual" domain that links to a mail server that can connect to the Internet. For example, the Notes domain TheInternet gight link to a firewall server that can route outbound Internet mail. Or TheInternet might link to a Notes domain that contains servers that connect directly to the Internet.
You can create multiple Foreign SMTP Domain documents. For example, one Foreign SMTP Domain document can route all mail that has an address ending in lotus.com to a certain domain, and another Foreign SMTP Domain document can route all mail with an address ending in ibm.com to another domain. The Router always uses the Fgreign SMTP Domain document that most closely matches the address. For example, if a message is addressed to jdoe@server1.japan.lotus.com and there are two Foreign SMTP Domain documents -- one for lotus.com and one for japan.lotus.com -- the Router uses the document for japan.lotus.com.
When the Router finds a Foreign SMTP Domain document that most closely matches the address of the outbound Internet mail, it forwards the mail to the Notes domain specified in that document. If the Notes domain'is a real domain, the Router finds a connection from the current domain to that domain and routes the message. If the Notes domain is a virtual domain, the Router checks for an SMTP Connection document that describes how to connect to that domain.
The SMTP Connection document
Click here
SMTP Connection documents
Click here
link virtual foreign SMTP domains to a server. For example, an SMTP Connection document might'link the virtual domain TheInternet to the firewall server that routes mail to the Internet. Specify the source server (the server that can connect directly to the Internet and route SMTP mail), the destination domain (which must match the Internet domain in the Foreign SMTP Domain document), and the connection type (direct or dialup). An SMTP Connection document lets Internet messages travel from a Notes domain to a server that is enabled to use SMTP to route outbound Internet mail.
To route'a message to a recipient outside the local Internet domain, the Router forwards the message to the domain specified in the Foreign SMTP Domain document. After the message reaches a Domino server that can connect to the Internet, that server establishes a connection with a server in the destination domain and routes the message.
See Also
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up'SMTP routing outside the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing within the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Setting up a server to receive mail sent via SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up a relay host or firewall
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:t
Log_View_Events=
value
Description:
Specifies whether messages generated when views are rebuilt are recorded in the log file:
0 - Do not log messages when views are rebuilt
1 - Log messages when views are rebuilt
Removing this setting from the NOTES.INI file also disables logging of these messages.
Applies to:
Wervers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Changing the fields that are included in a directory catalogDomino Directories
Directory catalogs\fields inFields\in directory catalogsHTTPPassword field\directory catalogs andContentsStepsH_ADDING_FIELDS_TO_THE\DIRECTORY_CATALOG_STEPSTopic1Changing the fields that are included in a directory catalogStepsH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER
H_ADDING_FIELDS_TO_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_270642000029245626=General tips for modifying the field configuration in directory catalogsH_ADDING_FIELDS_TO_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_112797017629230345=Tips for modifying the field configuration in the directory catalog used by serversH_ADDING_FIELDS_TO_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOL_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_270642000029245627=Tips for modifying the field configuration in the mobile directory catalogH_ADDING_FIELDS_TO_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_112797017629230346=To change the fields that are included in a directory catalog03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
H_OPTIMIZING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PERFORMANCE_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_358251174429313012=Packing density optionH_OPTIMIZING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PERFORMANCE_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_358251174429313013=Incremental fields optionH_OPTIMIZING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PERFORMANCE_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_112797017629230345=To change performance settings03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Monitoring directory catalogsDomino Directories
Agents\directory catalogDirectory Catalog Status ReportDirectory catalogs\monitoringRepor|ing\directory catalog informationContentsOverviewH_SENDING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_REPORTS_9423_OVERTopic1Monitoring directory catalogsOverviewH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER
H_SENDING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_REPORTS_9423_OVER_MIDTOPIC_91695993629252660=To report Dircat events to the log fileH_SENDING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_REPORTS_9423_OVER_MIDTOPIC_91695993629252661=To mail directory catalog reportsH_SENDING_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_REPORTS_9423_OVER_MIDTOPIC_422057216029269166=To enable tle Directory Catalog Status Report agent03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up directory a|sistanceDomino Directories
Directory Assistance\setting up overviewContentsOverview
da50_v_directoryassistanceda50_f_directoryassistanceH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVERTopic1Setting up directory assistanceOverviewH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The order in which directories are searchedDomino Directories
Directories\search order of multipleDirectory searches\order ofContentsOverviewH_THE_ORDER_IN_WHICH_DIRECTORIES_ARE_SEARCHED_9814_OVERTopic1The order in which directories are searchedOverviewH_MALAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Cascading Domino directoriesDomino Directories
Cascading Domino directories\compared to directory assistanceDirectory Assistance\compared to cascading Domino directoriesContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_CASCADING_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKSTopic1Cascading Domino directoriesStepsH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER
H_SETTING_UP_CASCADING_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKS_MIDTOPIC_325052988829225748=To cascade directories that are replicated on each serverH_SETTING_UP_CASCADING_PUBLLC_ADDRESS_BOOKS_MIDTOPIC_105865260829206804=To cascade directories accessed over the network03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuring directory servers for Notes usersDomino Directories
.AContentsStepsH_CONFIGURING_DIRECTORY_SERVERS_FOR_NOTES_USERS_3368_STEPSTopic1Configuring directory servers for Notes usersStepsH_MANAGING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_IN_LARGE_ORGANIZATIONS_321_OVER03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
MailMail
.AContentsOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_pTopic1MailOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Messaging overviewMail
Mail routing\describedMail servers\describedContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVERTopic1Messaging overviewOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p
H_MAIL_ROUTING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_MABL_SERVER_7703_OVER=The Domino mail server and mail routingH_SENDING_MAIL_OUTSIDE_YOUR_ORGANIZATION_5761_OVER=Sending mail outside your organizationH_DOMINO_MAIL_FILES_9523_OVER=Domino mail filesH_MAIL_SECURITY_2752_OVER=Mail securityH_WORKING_WITH_OTHER_MAIL_SYSTEMS_3871_OVER=Working with other mail systems03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
H_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SYSTEM_7248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_274471532829247858=Lotus Notes clienrsH_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SYSTEM_7248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_274471532829247859=IMAP clientsH_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SYSTEM_7248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_274471532829247860=POP3 clientsH_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SYSTEM_7248_OVER_MIDTOPIC_274471532829247861=Web clients03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
~fkmI{e
Messaging and mail access protocolsMail
IMAP protocol\Domino mail server andMIME messages\Domino mail server andPOP3 protocol\Domino mail server andSMTP protocol\Domino mail server andContentsOverviewH_MESSAGING_PROTOCOLS_1518_OVERTopic1Messaging and mail access protocolsOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER03 Administerbng the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How mail routes in a Domino systemMail
Mail routing\describedRouter\descrbbedContentsOverviewH_HOW_MAIL_MOVES_IN_A_DOMINO_SYSTEM_6903_OVERTopic1How mail routes in a Domino systemOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
From Th
Mail performance and monitoringMail
Monitoring\mailPerformance\mailContentsOverviewH_PERFORMANCE_AND_MONITORING_1957_OVERTopic1Mail performance and monitoringOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Developmen
The Domino Directory and mail routingMail
Host names\mail routing andMail routing\IP addresses andMail routing\routing table andRouting table\descibedContentsOverviewH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_9132_OVERTopic1The Domino Directory and mail routingBverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER
H_ROUTING_TABLES_1698_OVER=Routing tablesH_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_9132_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128439328029251071=Host names in the Domino system03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The Domain Name Service (DNS) and mail routingMail
Addresses\mail routingDNS\describedHost names\DNS andIP addresses\DNS andMail routing\DNS andSMTP protocol\DNS andContentsOverviewH_DOMAIN_NAMING_SERVICE_DNS_OVERTopic1The Domain Name Service (DNS) and mail routingOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Dombno Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Examples of using multiple MX recordsMail
DNS\examples of MX recordsMX records\examplesContentsExamplesH_BXAMPLES_OF_USING_MULTIPLE_MX_RECORDS_4741_EXTopic1Examples of using multiple MX recordsExamplesH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER
H_DOMAIN_NAMING_SERVICE_DNS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128439328029251071=Using a single Internet domain with a single domain nameH_DOMAIN_NAMING_SERVICE_DNS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128439328029251073=Using a single Internet domain name with two balanced serversH_DOMAIN_NAMING_SERVICE_DNS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128489328029251074=Using a single Internet domain with multiple domain names03 Administbring the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Managing a shared mail databaseMail
Shared mail\managingContentrOverviewH_MANAGING_SHARED_MAIL_OVERTopic1Managing a shared mail databaseOverviewH_SHARED_NOTES_MAIL_OVER03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
Addresses\mail routingDomain, Notes\mail routing andMail routing\Notes protocols andNotes named network\mail routing andNotes protocols\mail routing andRouter\described@ontentsOverviewH_ROUTING_MAIL_USING_NOTES_ROUTING_2689_OVERTopic1Routing mail using Notes routingOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER
H_DETERMINING_THE_RECIPIENT_S_SERVER_6100_OVER=Determining the recipient's serverH_ROUTING_MAIL_USING_NOTES_ROUTING_2689_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128439328029251071=Determining the recipient's Notes domainH_DETERMINING_THE_SERVER_S_NOTES_NAMED_NETWORK_7034_OVER=Determining the server's Notes named networkH_SERVERS_IN_DIFFERENT_NOTES_NAMED_NETWORKS_3424_OVER=Serveps in different Notes named networksH_ADDRESSING_MAIL_TO_USERS_IN_A_DIFFERENT_DOMAIN_7704_OVER=Addressing mail to users in a different domain03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Routing mail using SMTPMail
Addresses\mail routingDomains, Internet\mail routing andDomains, Notes\mail routing andMail routing\SMTP protocol andRouter\describedSMTP protocol\mail routing andContentsOverviewH_ROUTING_MAIL_USING_SMTP_9343_OVERTopic1Routing mail using SMTPOverviewH_USING_THE_DOMINO_MAIL_SERVER_7032_OVER
H_ROUTING_MAIL_USING_SMTP_9343_OVER_MIDTOPIC_128439328029251071=Rout`ng Internet mailH_DETERMINING_WHETHER_A_RECIPIENT_IS_PART_OF_THE_LOCAL_INTERNET_DOMAIN_7906_OVER=Determining the recipient's Internet domainH_MAIL_IN_THE_LOCAL_INTERNET_DOMAIN_9588_OVER=Routing mail in the local Internet domainH_MAIL_OUTSIDE_THE_LOCAL_INTERNET_DOMAIN_3293_OVER=Routing mail outside the local Internet domainH_USING_A_RELAY_HOST_3705_OVER=Using a relay hostH_ROUTING_INTERNET_MAIL_OVER_NOTES_ROUTING_6138_OVER=Using Notes routing to route Internet mailH_ROLE_OF_THE_FOREIGN_SMTP_DOMAIN_DOCUMENT_@N_INTERNET_MAIL_OVER_NOTES_ROUTING_9841_OVER=The Foreign SMTP Domain documentH_ROLE_OF_THE_SMTP_CONNECTION_DOCUMENT_IN_INTERNET_MAIL_OVER_NOTES_ROUTING_2274_OVER=The SMTP Connection document03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Planning a mail routing topologyMail
Mail routing\typologyContentsOverviewH_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATIONS_3483_OVERTopic1Planning a mail routing topologyOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Sample mail routing configurationsMail
Mail routing\examplesContentsOverviewH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVERTopic1Sample mail routing configurationsOverviewH_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATIONS_3483_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Ma`l Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of using one server for all Internet messagesMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_USING_ONE_SERVERPFOR_ALL_INTERNET_MESSAGES_EXTopic1Example of using one server for all Internet messagesExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of using one server for inbound and one server for outbound messagesMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_USING_ONE_SERVER_FOR_INBOUND_AND_ONE_SERVER_FOR_OUTBOUND_MESSAGES_EXTopic1Example of using one server for inbound and one server for outbound messagesExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of using two servers to balance Internet mail loadMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_USING_TWO_SERVERS_TO_BALANCE_INTERNET_MAIL_LOAD_EXTopic1Example of using two servers to balance Internet mail loadExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of mail routing in the local Internet `omainMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_MAIL_ROUTING_IN_THE_LOCAL_INTERNET_DOMAIN_EXTopic1Example of mail routing in the local Internet domainExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of mail routing between a third-party server and Domino in the same Internet domainMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_MAIL_ROUTING_BETWEEN_A_THIRD_PARTY_SERVER_AND_DOMINO_IN_THE_SAME_INTERNET_DOMAIN_EXTopic1Example of mail routing between a third-party server and Domino in the same Internet domainExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Petting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The date that the cross certificate expires.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Click here
back to top
Click here
See Al
Example of using a smart hostMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_USING_A_SMART_HOST_EXTopic1Example of using a smart hostExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of using all servers to route outbound mail and one to route inbound mailMail
.AContentsExamplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_USING_ALL_SERVERS_TO_ROUTE_OZTBOUND_MAIL_AND_ONE_TO_ROUTE_INBOUND_MAIL_EXTopic1Example of using all servers to route outbound mail and one to route inbound mailExamplesH_SAMPLE_MAIL_ROUTING_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating a Configuration Settings documentMail
Configuration Settings document\creatingDomino Administrator\configuring mail routingDomino Directory\Configuration Settings documentContentsStepsH_CREATING_A_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_DOCUMENT_STEPSTopic1Creating a Configuration Settings documentStepsH_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATIONS_3483_OVER
H_CREATING_A_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_DOCZMENT_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_306446595229250214=To create a Configuration Settings document03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
pubnames_v_Configurations
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Notes routingMail
Connection documents\mail routing andDomains\mail routingContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_ROUTING_OVERTopic1Setting up Notes routingOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
pubnames_v_Domains
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up SMTP routingMail
Configuring\mail routingMail routing\configuringContentsStepsH_ENABLING_SMTP_ROUTING_STEPSTopic1Setting up SMTP routingStepsH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up how addresses are resolvedMail
Addresses\mail routingMail routing\resolving addressesContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_HOW_ADDRESSES_ARE_RESOLVED_OVERTopic1Setting up how addrjsses are resolvedOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up a rjlay host or firewallMail
Firewalls\using a relay hostMail routing\using a firewallContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_A_RELAY_HOST_OR_FIREWALL_STEPSTopic1Setting up a relay host or firewallStepsH_MAIL_OVER_p
H_SETTING_UP_A_RELAY_HOST_OR_FIREWALL_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_162845792029249856=To set up a relay host03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Click
Setting up how messages are exchanged over a dialup connectionMail
Dialup connections\mail routing andMail routing\over dialup connectionsContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_DIAL_UP_ROUTING_STEPSTopic1Setting up how messages are exchanged over a dialup connectionStepzH_MAIL_OVER_p
H_SETTING_UP_DIAL_UP_ROUTING_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_162905792029249856=To change how messages are exchanged 03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
et publi
Customizing mailMail
.AContentsOverviewH_CONFIGURING_MAIL_OVERTopic1Customizing mailOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Requirements for a working mail systemMail
Mail routing\requirementsSMTP\requirements for routingContentsOverviewH_REQUIREMENTS_FOR_A_WORKING_MAIL_SYSTEM_2042_OVERTopic1Requirements for a working mail systemOverviewH_CONFIGURING_MAIL_OVER
H_REQUIREMENTS_FOR_A_WORKING_MAIL_SYSTEM_2042_OVER_MIDTOPIC_416139353629250435=Requirements for SMTP routingH_REQUIREMENTS_FOR_A_WORKING_MAIL_SYSTEM_2042_OVER_MIDTJPIC_416139353629250436=Requirements for Notes routingH_REQUIREMENTS_FOR_A_WORKING_MAIL_SYSTEM_2042_OVER_MIDTOPIC_416139353629250437=Requirements for exchanging mail with other systems in your organization03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ational Noser exchanges encrypted mail with a North American user, the smaller key is used. This applies to both Notes and Internet keys.A
You use an encryption key to encrypt document fields, which are designated areas in a document. You can recognize an encryptable field by its red brackets. Only the contents within those red brackets can be encrypted. All other data is open for viewing by anyone who accesses the document. Click here to learn how to o
Click here
encrypt document fields
Controlling messagingMail
.AContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVERTopic1Controlling messagingOverviewH_CONFIGURING_MAIL_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
HVR~e
Improving mail performanceMail
Mail routing\improving performancePerformance\improving for mail routingContentsOverviewH_MMPROVING_MAIL_PERFORMANCE_8885_OVERTopic1Improving mail performanceOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Record additional information about mail in the log fileMail
Informational loggingLOG.NSFLog file\selecting level of loggingLogging level\selectingMail routing\logging andMinimal loggingNormal loggingVerbose loggingContentsOverviewH_SELECTING_A_LOGGING_LEVEL_5289_OVERTopic1Record additional information about mail in the log fileOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Disabling mail routing temporarilyMail
Mail routing\stoppingRouters\disablingContentsOverviewH_DISABLING_]OUTING_TEMPORARILY_4166_OVERTopic1Disabling mail routing temporarilyOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER
H_DISABLING_ROUTING_TEMPORARILY_4166_OVER_MIDTOPIC_170657811229251254=To disable the Router from the consoleH_DISABLING_ROUTING_TEMPORARILY_4166_OVER_MIDTOPIC_170657811229251255=To disable the Router from the NOTES.INI fileH_DISABLING_ROUTING_TEMPORARILY_4166_OVER_MIDTOPIC_170657811229251256=To enable the Router03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
lick here
Customizing Notes routingMail
Mail routing\customizing Notes routingContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_ROUTING_OVERTopic1Customizing Notes routingOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Restricting inbound mail routingMail
Inbound mail routing\restrictingMail routing\restricting inbound mailMail\restrictingRestricting mail routing\inboundSpamming\preventingUnwanted commercial e-mail\preventingContentsOverviewH_RESTRICTING_INBOUND_MAIL_ROUTING_8872_OVERTopic1Restricting inbound mail routingOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=Mavid Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Restricting outbound messagesMail
Internet mail\restricting outboundMail routing\restricting outbound messagesRestricting outbound mailContentsMverviewH_RESTRICTING_OUTBOUND_MESSAGES_2420_OVERTopic1Restricting outbound messagesOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuring Internet return receiptsMail
Disposition-Notification-To\configuring for return receiptsReceipts\configuring InternetReturn receipts\configuringReturn-Receipt-To\configuring for return receiptsContentsOverviewH_CONFIGURING_INTERNET_RETURN_RECEIPTS_8271_OVERTopic1Configuring Internet return receiptsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_YOUR_MESSAGING_SYSTEM_OVER03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail S}stem
H_SHARED_NOTES_MAIL_OVER_MIDTOPIC_24682880029225326=Security03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The POP3 serviceMail
POP3 service\describedContentsOverviewH_DOMINO_POP3_SERVER_OVERTopic1The POP3 serviceOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p03 Administering the Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
4. Click Mail.
5. Enter the names of the people to receive the key in the To box (click Address to choose from your Personal Address Book).
6. In the CC box, enter the names of the people who need to know you sent a key, but aren't getting one themselves.
7. Click Send.
Click here
back to top
Click here
See Also
Click here
Security settings
Click here
Click here
&Arial
elease 5 Notes c
E message from a
Book D
se 5 Notes c
These steps describe how mail routes in a Domino mail system.
1. A user creates and addresses a mail message to a recipient.
2. The user sends the message.
3. The user's client software can:
Use Notes protocols to deposit the message into the MAIL.BOX database on the user's Domino mail server.
Use SMTP to send the message to the user's Domino mail server, which must be running the SMTP Listener task. The SMTP Listener task deposits the message into MAIL.BOX (Lotus Notes, IMAP clients, POP3 clients).
Use HTTP to send the message to the user's Domino mail server, which must be running the HTTP task. The HTTP task deposits the message into MAIL.BOX (Web clients).@
4. The Router finds the message in MAIL.BOX and determines where to send the message for each recipient. The Router calculates the next "hop" for the message on the path to its recipients and uses the best protocol -- either SMTP or Notes routing -- to transfer the message.
Using SMTP routing, the Router connects to the destination server -- the recipient's mail server, a relay host, a smart host, or one of the servers in the recipient's Internet domain -- and transfers a copy of the message.
Using Notes routing, the Router moves the message to the MAIL.BOX database on the server that is the next hop in the path to the recipient's mail server. The Router on that server moves the message to the next hop, until the message is deposited in the MAIL.BOX database on the recipient's home server.
5. The Router on the recipient's server finds the message (in MAIL.BOX on a Domino server) and delivers it to the recipient's mail file.
6. The recipient uses a client that supports Notes protocols, POP3, IMAP, or Web access (HTTP) to read the message, which is stored in the recipient's mail file.
&Arial
UUUUUUUU
aaaaaaaaP
>>>>>>>>
77777777]
}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGG
E message from a
In this example, a single Domino server, Mail2-E/East/Acme, handles messages from the Acme organization destined for other Internet domains (externaf addresses) and receives all mail addressed to the Acme Internet domain (acme.com). Mail2-E/East/Acme has the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" enabled on the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to the server, and has the SMTP listener task enabled on the Basics tab of its Server document.r
If a user on either of the two Acme internal mail servers, Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme, sends a message to an extfrnal address -- one with a domain other than acme.com -- the server routes the message to Mail2-E/East/Acme, which can route mail to external domains. Any mail from an external Internet domain -- one other than acme.com -- is routed to Mail2-E/East/Acme, which is listed in the DNS as the host for acme.com. Once the mail reaches Mail2-E/East/Acme, the server routes it to its destination.
The two internal mail servers, Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme, can route Internet mail to the servev with SMTP enabled for external mail (Mail2-E/East/Acme) either via Notes routing, with a Foreign SMTP Domain document and SMTP Connection document linking to Mail2-E/East/Acme, or via SMTP routing, with Mail2-E/East/Acme configured as the relay host.
Configuring these servers requires:
Click here
Enabling "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain"
Click here
for Mail2-E/East/Acme
Flick here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail2-E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
to list Mail2-E/East/Acme as the connecting server for the acme.com domain for inbound mail
Either
Click here
enabling "SMTP allowed outside of the local Internet domain
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme and listing Maif2-E/East/Acme as the
Click here
relay host
Click here
or creating a
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
and
Click here
SMTP Connection document
Click here
that link to Mail2-E/East/Acme
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
After importing users and groups, you can specify options that determine how Notes processes information when registering users.
Vou can select the following registration options:
Do not continue on registration errors
Keep successfully registered people in the queue
Try to register queued people with error statusV
Allow registration of previously registered people
In addition, you can configure the registration process to proceed as follows if the user being registered has the same user name or mail file name as an existing person:
Skip registration when tfe name of a new Notes user or mail file matches those of an existing user
Update an existing person with the information for the migrated user
Replace an existing mail file with the migrated mail file
Generate a unique mail file name
Note
For migrations that do not involve converting mail, if you choose to create a user's mail file in the background, using adminp, the option to replace an existing mail file is ignoref.
By default, none of these options is enabled. The options you select apply to all users selected for registration in this session.
For more information about setting registration options, refer to
Click here
Administering the Domino Systeme
Click here
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
&Arial
When registering migrating users, there are a considerable number of registration settings you must specify. Although some of these settings, such as mail file name or Internet address, are specific to an individual user, there are also a number of public settings, such as mail sfrver or password quality scale, that can be applied to multiple users.
Rather than having to specify the same registration information for each new user, you can easily specify default settings for public registration information. After you set registration defaults, the migration tools automatically apply these defaults to each user they add to the registration queue. e
Pay particular attention to the default settings for registration server and mail server. If the computer on wfich you are running the Domino Administrator is not the Domino server, you will need to change the default setting of Local for these servers. Depending on your security needs, you may also want to apply a new default setting for the password quality scale required for the users you migrate.
You can create default registration settings using either of the following methods:
Registration settings that you define through the administrative preferences are used as the deffults at the start of each registration session. You can override them by setting new defaults for a session, but they go into effect again the next time you start a new session.
See
Click here
"Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certification"
Click here
for additional information about setting default registration preferences.
104482054429239588
Defining default settings through user registratiof
During a given session, if you have already registered users, the public settings used in registering the last user become the defaults for the next user. You can also set registration defaults before you register any users from within the Register Person dialog box, using the following procedure:
1. From the Domino Administrator, click People -- Register, and enter the password for certifier ID to open the Register Person dialog box.
When you first open the Refister Person dialog box it is set to accept new entries, as indicated by the words "Register Person -- New Entry" on the title bar.
2. Click the Advanced check box at the top of the dialog box to display all of the available selection panes.
3. Select each pane in turn, changing the registration settings on each pane to the desired default values. Leave the name information (First name, MI, and Last name fields) on the Basics pane blank.
4. Click "Migrate pefple" to open the "People and Groups Migration" dialog box" and begin migrating users.
The public registration settings define during the preceding steps apply to all users you migrate to the registration queue during this session. After you exit the "People and Groups Migration" dialog box, the registration settings revert to those defined in the current administrative preferences.
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messagfng data
Click here
&Arial
The Domino migration tools automatically place users imported for registration in a special database known as the registration queue. The registration queue stores the registration information set for each user and reports the status of each pending registration.
The names of users currently in the registration queue appear in the Registration status box on the Register Pervon dialog box. Groups selected for migration do not appear in the registration queue.
Users remain in the queue until registered or specifically removed. If you have users in the registration queue and an interruption forces you to leave your work before you complete the registration, when you exit the Register Person dialog box, you are prompted to save the users for later registration. After the interruption, the user data
remains intact so you can continue tfe process where it left off.
Note
If the users in the queue at the time you exit registration are pending registration with different organization certifiers, when you re-open the Register Person dialog box, you must supply each certifier ID and password.
You can set a registration option to keep users in the queue after registration. a
See
Click here
"Customizing user registration"
Click here
&for information about setting registration options.
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
&Arial
You can apply some registration settings to multiple users at one time. The following table shows the settings for each pane of the Register Person dialog box that you can modify when multiple users are selected in the registration queue.
Basics pane
Registration Server
Password quality scale
Set Internet pfssword
Internet domain
Internet address name format and separator
Mail pane
Mail systemi
Mail server*
Mail file owner access
Create&file now/Create in background
Mail file template*
Set mail database quotad
Set warning threshold
Create full text index
ID Info pane
Certifier ID
Security type
Certificate expiration date
ID file location
Groups paned
Assign person to groupss
Other pane
Setup profilem
Location
Local administratore
Comment
Alternate name language
Add this person to Windows NT
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* The mail server and mail template settings are interdependent. If multiple users are selecved and you change one of these settings, the current value of the other setting is applied to all of the selected users.
For more information about these settings, see
Click here
"Using Advanced registration"
Click here
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
lu}9<
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$TITLE
$IfageData
$ImageNames
$PublicAccess
Configuration
01/10/2000 09:35:07 AM Dynamic Client Configuration updating location information
01/10/2000 09:35:07 AM Dynamic Client Configuration shutdown
\G$ D
&Arial
UUUUUUUU
Click here
aaaaaaaare
Set >>>>>>>>ird-party server77777777
}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGG
Set >>>>
Set >>>>
Set >>>>
In this example, one Domgno server, Mail2-E/East/Acme, routes messages from the Acme organization destined for other Internet domains (external addresses) and a second Domino server, Mail3-E/East/Acme, receives mail addressed to the Acme Internet domain (acme.com). Mail2-E/East/Acme has the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" enabled on the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to the server. Mail3-E/East/Acme has the SMTP listener task enabled on the Bawics tab of its Server document.
If a user on the Acme internal mail server, Mail1-E/East/Acme, sends a message to an external address -- one with a domain other than acme.com -- the server routes the message to Mail2-E/East/Acme, which can route mail to external domains. Any mail from an external Internet domain -- one other than acme.com -- is routed to Mail3-E/East/Acme, which is listed in the DNS as the host for acme.com. Once the mail reaches Mail3-E/East/Acme, the server routes it to its gestination.
The internal mail server, Mail1-E/East/Acme, can route Internet mail to the server with SMTP enabled for external mail (Mail2-E/East/Acme) either via Notes routing, with a Foreign SMTP Domain document and SMTP Connection document linking to Mail2-E/East/Acme, or via SMTP routing, with Mail2-E/East/Acme configured as the relay host.
Configuring these servers requires:
Click here
Enabling "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the'local Internet domain"
Click here
for Mail2-E/East/Acme
Click here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail3-E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
to list Mail3-E/East/Acme as the connecting server for the acme.com domain for inbound mail
Either
Click here
enabling "SMTP allowed outside of the local Intewnet domain
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme and listing Mail2-E/East/Acme as the
Click here
relay host
Click here
or creating a
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
and
Click here
SMTP Connection document
Click here
that link to Mail2-E/East/Acme
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routgng configurations
Click here
&Arial
The mail pane of the Register Person dialog box lets you specify the type of mail file to create for a user, and whether to create the file now, or let the administration process (adminp) create it later. If you are migrating users' mgil files, their Notes mail files must be created during the registration process; you cannot choose to create them in the background.
Setting mail database quotas
When migrating a user's mail file, the migration tools ignore the size restrictions specified in the mail database quota field. Imported mail files are created and continue to receive mail after registration, regardless of the specified size restrictions. To enforce size restrictions on a mail file,'you must set a limit after the initial user registration, and enable enforcement of database limits in the server document for the mail router. If size checking is enabled, the user cannot receive mail if it would result in the quota being exceeded. r
Migrating duplicate messages
Mailboxes in the old mail system may contain duplicate copies of a message, one in each of several folders. After migration, duplicate messages may display in multiple Notes views, corwesponding to the folders on the legacy system, but only a single copy of the message is migrated.
Users migrating from other systems should understand how message storage works in Notes. On mail systems that use true folders to store messages, copying a message from the Sent folder to another folder creates a duplicate copy of the message.
A Notes mail file, by contrast, stores messages in a single database that has multiple folder
views
. Each view of the databgse displays messages based on a set of selection criteria, such as sent messages. However, although a message may display in several views, Notes maintains only a single copy it.
In particular, users should be careful about deleting messages from the Notes Sent view. Although a message in the Sent view can be displayed in other secondary views, it cannot be moved out of the Sent view. Deleting it from the Sent view removes it from all other views.
Migrating fogders and subfolders
Folders in a Notes mail file behave differently from folders in the mailboxes on other systems. In some cases, folder names may be truncated during migration and nested folders are not migrated to the same location in the folder hierarchy as in the source mail file.
Subfolders in the Inbox and Sent folders
The Notes Inbox and Sent mail views cannot contain subfolders. As a result, subfolders in the Inbox or Sent folders of a leggcy mailbox are converted to top-level folders in the Notes mail file during migration.
Maximum length for folder names
A Notes folder name cannot exceed 64 characters. During migration, folder names longer than 64 characters are truncated.
Maximum length for subfolder names
Notes mail files support the use of hierarchical, or nested, folders. In the folder hierarchy, the subfolder name includes the name of its pgrent folders. For example, in the following folder hierarchy:
Projects/1998/Q3/July/Letters
Notes considers the full name of the Letters subfolder to be 25 characters long, because it includes the names of the Projects, 1998, Q3, and July folders.
If the complete path for a subfolder (that is, the name of the subfolder and all of its parent folders) contains 64 characters or less, the folder hierarchy is migrated intact. However, subfolder paths that contain more thgn 64 characters are shortened during migration. The migration tools replicate the path up to 64 characters, truncating the name of the last subfolder created, if necessary. The remaining subfolders are not migrated, but the messages in them are migrated to the last subfolder that was migrated.
So, for example, if a subfolder in the source mail file is nested seven levels deep and the path name for a subfolder nested four levels deep exceeds 64 characters, then the migration tool creates foldews 1 through 3, preserving the existing folder hierarchy. Folder 4 is also created in its original place in the hierarchy (nested within folder 3), but its name is truncated. All of the messages contained in the folders nested within folder 4 (folders 5 through 7) are migrated to folder 4.
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
&Arial
After a migration complewes, perform the following tasks to verify that the migration was successful:
Check the Pending Registrations box to see if users in the queue were registered successfully
Search the Miscellaneous Events view of the Notes Log for indications that users could not be registered
Check the contents of users' Notes mail files
Test access to mail and mail transfer for migrated users
Review membership of migrated groups to ensure they contain valig entries
After you determine that the migration was successful, you can prepare end users to migrate locally-stored messaging data with the upgrade wizard.
For more information about how users can migrate personal mail data, refer to
Click here
"Migrating Personal Mail Data."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Registering users and migrating messaging data
Click here
&Arial
Using the cc:Mail to Notes migration tool in the Domino Administwator, you can import cc:Mail users and groups from a selected post office and register them as Notes users. The migration process:
Imports local users and groups from the post office (users in the directory whose locations are designated as L or R ) and creates entries for them in the Domino Directory
Lets you create a Notes ID and mail file for imported users
Migrates the contents of mail boxes from the cc:Mail post office server
Converts Organizer 2'x for cc:Mail Group Scheduling files (.OR2 files) into Notes group scheduling format (.NSF)
The cc:Mail to Notes migration tool supports migrating users of the cc:Mail Release 6.3x client. After the migration completes, the cc:Mail 6.3x client accesses a mail file on the Domino server, rather than a mailbox in the cc:Mail post office. e
If you want to migrate mail boxes for a cc:Mail mobile post office, you must first archive the messages and then migrate them using a separate usew upgrade wizard.
For more information about using the upgrade wizard, see u
Click here
"Migrating Personal Mail Data."
Click here
This section of the migration guide discusses the following topics related to moving users from cc:Mail to Notes:
Click here
Supported cc:Mail versions
Click here
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Migrating cc:Mail data to Notes
Click here
Click here
Migrating cc:Mail Organizer information
Click here
Click here
Migrating users in a coexistence environment
Click here
&Arial
There are two versions of the cc:Mail LAN post office database in use. They are commonly referred to as DB6 and DB8. The cc:Mail to Notes migration tool lets you migrate data from either dgtabase version. Upgrading from either version of the cc:Mail post office extracts information from the following:
cc:Mail post office directory
-- The directory contains public post office information, including the post office name and directory entries, public mailing lists, and bulletin boards. This file contains a list of all user file numbers and pointers to all messages in the message file.s
Message file
-- The message file stores one copy of gach message for all users in the post office. To save disk space, messages addressed to multiple users are stored just once in this file.
Post office user files --
The user files contain all private mail box information, such as lists and folders. These files contain no messages, just pointers to the mail directory and message files.
Organizer 2.x group scheduling files (.OR2 files)
-- For cc:Mail users who use Lotus Organizer 2.x, the OR2 files cgntain calendaring and scheduling information.
&Arial
Before migrating users from Migrosoft Exchange to Notes, complete the following tasks:
Determine the order in which you want to convert your Exchange servers to Notes. This should be your migration schedule.
Verify that you have purchased the appropriate Notes client license for each Microsoft Exchange user you are migrating.
On your administrative workstation, install the Notes Release 5 Domino Administrator client and the optional Exchange Administrative migration tools. You must perform a custog installation to install the migration tools component.
Back up Domino information..
Verify that you have access the certifier IDs and passwords for the Domino organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
Verify that you have Editor, Designer, or Manager access rights to the Domino Directory on the Registration Server.
From the administrative workstation, log in to Notes with a Notes ID that has "Create database access" on the Gail server.
On the administrative workstation, close all applications except for Notes, and close any Notes databases.
(Optional)
Click here
Set registration preferences.
Click here
(Optional)
Click here
Create a Notes group that you can add migrated users to.
Click here
Send any pending Microsoft Exchange messages by making sure Synchronization has been performed on eagh client.
Perform an Exchange Directory Synchronization to ensure that the Exchange directory being migrated is complete.
Make sure the workstation running the Domino Administrator has an Outlook or Exchange client installed and an
Click here
Administrator mail profile
Click here
that points to the Exchange server.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Exchange users
Click here
=_Q .DD
&Arial
UUUUUUUU
aaaaaaaa
>>>>>>>>t
77777777@
Sample}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGG
ar/OU=CAM/O=Lotu
In this example, two Domino servers, Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme, route messages from the Acme organization destined for other Internet domains (external addresses) and receive mail addressed to the Acme Internet domain (acme.com). Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme have the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" enabled on#the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to the servers and have the SMTP listener task enabled on the Basics tab of their Server documents.T
If a user on the Acme internal mail server Mail2-E/East/Acme sends a message to an external address -- one with a domain other than acme.com -- the server routes the message to Mail1-E/East/Acme, which can route mail to external domains. If a user on the Acme internal mail server Mail4-E/East/Acme sends a message to cn external address -- one with a domain other than acme.com -- the server routes the message to Mail3-E/East/Acme, which can route mail to external domains. This splits the load of outbound messages -- half route to Mail1-E/East/Acme and half route to Mail3-E/East/Acme.
Any mail from an external Internet domain -- one other than acme.com -- is routed to either Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme. The DNS has two MX records, one listing Mail1-E/East/Acme as the host for acme.com and one lissing Mail3-E/East/Acme as the host for acme.com. When an Internet mail server tries to connect to the acme.com domain to transfer a message, it
Click here
looks up acme.com in the DNS
Click here
. The server finds the MX records for acme.com and, based on the record preferences of the MX records, returns the IP address of either Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme. If the MX records have equal weight, the server randomly selects one of the records and returns thc IP address of that record's server. Should that server be unavailable, the other MX record is selected and the IP address of the other server is returned. This provides load balancing through the random selection of the MX records when record preferences are equal and provides failover since the DNS shifts to another MX record when a connection fails. Once the mail reaches Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme, that server routes the message to its destination.
The internal mail servers can soute Internet mail to the server with SMTP enabled for external mail either via Notes routing, with a Foreign SMTP Domain document and SMTP Connection document linking to the SMTP server, or via SMTP routing, with the SMTP server configured as the relay host. @
Configuring these servers requires:@
Click here
Enabling "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain"
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Ccme
Click here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
to list Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme as the connecting servers for the acme.com domain for inbound mail
Either
Click here
enabling "SMTP allowed outside of the local Internet domain
Clicc here
for the internal mail servers Mail2-E/East/Acme and Mail4-E/East/Acme and listing Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme as the
Click here
relay host
Click here
or creating a a
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
and
Click here
SMTP Connection document
Click here
that link to Mail1-E/East/Acme or Mail3-E/East/Acme
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
The Microsoft Exchange directory contains information for the Microsoft Exchange users who will be migrated to Notes. Notes uses the information extracted from the directory to configure migrated users for registration.
Importing the Microsoft Exchange directory involves the following:
Click here
Connecting to the Exchange server
Click here
Click here
Importing Microsoft Exchange users into the registration queue
Click here
After completing these tasks, you will be ready to register she imported users in Notes.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate Exchange users
Click here
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Exchange users
Click here
PURSAF
O=Iris
O=Iris
x>_/^
PURSAFO
.? Kz"
O=Iris
CN=Rob Slapikoff/O=Iris
PURSAFC
f8I:t
'&\qg
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
B(! 4
&Arial
@UUUUUUUU.
aaaaaaaa
>>>>>>>> a server to rec77777777
x%ePU
}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGGect@
R_TO_RECEIVE_MAI
routing
_TopicType
In this example, Acme users send messages in the acme.com domain (internal messages) over SMTP. Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and Mail3-E/East/Acme are Domino mail servers with "SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain" enabled for "MIME messages only" on the Router/SMTP-Basic tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to the servers and have the SMTP listener task enabled on the Basics tab of their Server documents. This allows the servers to send mail to each other over SMTP and to receive mail over SMTP.
The servers must be in the same Notes named network, based on TCP/IP, to route mail unless each server has the field "Servers within the local Notes domain are reachable via SMTP over TCPIP" enabled in the Configuration Settings document that applies to it.
If a user sends a MIME message to another user#in the acme.com domain, her mail server determines which server the recipient's mail file is on, connects to that server over TCP/IP, and transfers the message using SMTP. If the message is in Notes format -- for example, if the user is using an R4 Notes client -- the message is routed using Notes routing.
Configuring these servers requires:
Click here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme,#and Mail3-E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
to list Mail3-E/East/Acme as the connecting server for the acme.com domain for inbound mail
Click here
Enabling "SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain"
Click here
for "MIME messages only" for Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and Mail3-E/East/Acme
Either having all three servers in the same Notes namec network or
Click here
enabling "Servers within the local Notes domain are reachable via SMTP over TCPIP"
Click here
for each server
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
UUUUUUUU
aaaaaaaa
>>>>>>>>
77777777
}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGG
In this example, Acme has three servers: Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and smarthost.acme.com, a third party SMTP host that has some users' mail files hosted on it. The servers in this example are essentially the same as in "Example of mail routing betwecn a third-party server and Domino in the same Internet domain," except that not all users are listed in the Domino Directory. The smart host server, smarthost.acme.com, has the directory for those users. Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail2-E/East/Acme have the field "SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain" enabled and have smarthost.acme.com listed in the "Local Internet domain smart host" field on the Router/SMTP-Basic tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to the servers.
If#a user on one of the Domino mail servers sends a message to a user in the acme.com Internet domain, and the Router cannot find the recipient in the Domino Directory, the Router forwards that message to smarthost.acme.com over SMTP.
Configuring these servers requires:a
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
Click here
Enabling "SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain"
Click here
for "MIME messages only" for Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme
Listing "smarthost.acme.com" as the
Click here
"Local Internet domain smart host"
Click here
for Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail2-E/East/Acme
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
RSAFO
{uv3F
$Info
$WindowTitle
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
1H:@BD
&Arial
UUUUUUUU
aaaaaaaa
>>>>>>>>ting
77777777
}}}}}}}}
GGGGGGGG
urations to help
In this example, Acme has three Domino servers and a third-party SMTP host in the local Internet domain that handles mail for some users. All users have entries in the Domino Directory. When a user sends mail to another user in the acme.com domain, the Domino server looks up the recipient in the Domino Directory. If the recipient has a mail file on one of the Domino mail servers -- Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and Mail3-E/East/Acge -- the server routes the message to its destination over Notes routing. Notes routing handles both MIME and Notes format messages. If the recipient has a mail file on the third party server, non-Notesserver.acme.com, their Person document has a forwarding address with the domain "non-Notesserver.acme.com." To route mail over SMTP, Mail1-E/East/Acme and Mail3-E/East/Acme find a Foreign SMTP Domain document for "*.non-Notesserver.acme.com" that corresponds to an SMTP Connection document listing Mail2-E/Easw/Acme as the server to which to transfer messages. The server sends the message via Notes routing to Mail2-E/East/Acme, which has the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" enabled on the Router/SMTP-Basics tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to it and has the SMTP listener task enabled on the Basics tab of its Server document. If the message is in Notes format, Mail2-E/East/Acme converts it to MIME. Mail2-E/East/Acme connects to non-Notesserver.acmg.com over TCP/IP and transfers the message over SMTP.
If a user on non-Notesserver.acme.com sends a message to a user on Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, or Mail3-E/East/Acme, the server transfers the message to Mail2-E/East/Acme over SMTP, and Mail2-E/East/Acme routes the message to its destination over Notes routing.
Configuring these servers requires:
Click here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail2'E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
Creating a
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
for "*.non-Notesserver.acme.com" and an
Click here
SMTP Connection document
Click here
that links to Mail2-E/East/Acme
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
The cc:Maig to Notes migration tool converts information in a cc:Mail post office to Notes, including mail boxes, messages, bulletin boards, and private and public directories, as shown in the following table. In addition, you can optionally
Click here
migrate users' Organizer 2.x group scheduling filesd
Click here
(OR2 files).
These items in the cc:Mail mail box . . .
Are migrated to these items in the Notes mail file . . .
Archives
Not migrated*
Bulletin boards
Discussion databases
Bulletin board messages on mobile post offices
Not migrated
Clipboard folder
Not migrated
Folders and subfolders
Folders and subfolders**
Message date
Message date
Message priority
Message priority ***
Messages and attachments in migrated folders
Messages and attachments ****
Mobile sessions log
Not migrated
Organizer data (.OR2 files)
Entries in mail file, Personal Journal, and Personal Address BookE
Pawsword
Password
Post office directory
Domino Directory
Private mailing lists
Group documents in Personal Address Book +
Public mailing list
Group document in Domino Directory
Read and unread marksR
Not migrated ++
Return receipts
Return receipts
Rules
Not migrated
Sender and recipient information
Sender and recipient information
Trash folder
Not migrated
Undeliverable mail reports
Not migrated
head title;Chegd;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* Archives are not migrated by the migration tool in the Domino Administrator, but after you migrate users, they can run an upgrade wizard at their workstations to migrate their message archives.g
** For cc:Mail Release 8 clients, the migration converts nested folders and the messages they contain.
*** The migration tool preserves message status in cc:Mail messages marked Urgent (ag exclamation mark appears beside the message in the Notes Inbox or folder). However, Notes does not assign a special status to migrated cc:Mail messages that were marked Low priority. t
**** During migration rich text attributes such as color, font style, font size, underlining, boldface, bullets, embedded objects, and, doclinks are not preserved.
+ Private mailing lists are automatically sent to users in a Notes message attachment. Users then run an upgrade wizard at their workswations to migrate these lists to their Notes Personal Address Books. The upgrade wizard also migrates private addresses that cc:Mail Release 2.x and 6.x clients maintain locally in the file PRIVDIR.INI. The upgrade wizard does not support migrating private addresses for cc:Mail Release 8.x clients.
++ All migrated messages are marked unread.d
See
Click here
"Migrating Personal Mail Data"
Click here
for information about the user upgradg wizards.
&Arial
The following table shows the Notes equivalents for migrated Organizer information.
Organizer record type
Equivalent Notes entry
Comments
Address
Business card in Personal Address Book
Mailed to user
Alarm
Alarm*
Anniversary
Calendar anniversary
Calendar appointment
Calendar appointment
Call
To Do task
Categories
Category
Migrates first category listed only
Cost Code
Not migrated
Group Scheduling meeting
Calendar appointment
Included section
Not migrated
Link
Not migrated
Notepad page
Personal Journal
Mailed to user
Preference options
Not migrated
Planner event
Calendar event
Repeating entry
Repeating entry**l
Rooms and resources
--r
Not migrated
Pending meeting nowices***
Not migrated
To Do tasks
To Do tasks
User preferences and passwords
Not migrated
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* An alarm is migrated only gf the resulting Notes record type also supports alarms.
** Repeating items migrated to the Notes Calendar use the Notes 4.5 repeat structure, not the 5.0 repeat structure. Repeating entries migrated to the Notes To Do view appear as individual entries and no longer are designated as Repeating or include the repeating entry symbol.
*** Meeting invitations are migrated only if a user has responded to them. Users need to process any pending meeting notices they want migrated.
&Arial
Wo import users to migrate, you first need to locate the Exchange server where users have their mailboxes, and log in to it.
1. At the administrative workstation where you installed the Domino Administrator, insert a diskette containing the appropriate certifier IDs for the organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People and Groups tab.
3. From the Tools pane, click People - Register.
4. When prompted, enter the certifier ID password and click OK.
5. Remove the diskette containing the certifier ID and click OK.
6. (Optional) From the Basics pane of the Register Person -- New Entry dialog box, specify a registration server if necessary, by clicking Registration Server and selecting the server that registers new users. Click OK.
7. Click Migrate People.
8. From the People and Group Migration dialog box, select Micrgsoft Exchange Users from the Foreign directory source list.
9. From the Choose Profile dialog box,
Click here
select the administrator mail profile
Click here
that connects to the Exchange server and click OK.
The Exchange to Notes migration tool fails to load if you do not specify an appropriate mail profile.
Note
If you are not logged in to the Windows NT Domain where the Exchangg server is located, you are prompted to supply a user name and password for the Domain.
The Available people/groups list displays the names of contents of the postoffice address list. You are now ready to import users from the postoffice into the Notes registration queue.
See Also
Click here
Importing the Microsoft Exchange directory
Click here
&Arial
To migrate users from Exchange, you must connect to the Exchange server that has the mailboxes you want to migrate. You connect to an Exchange server by selgcting the Administrator mail profile for the Exchange server that you want to migrate. The Administrator account, which must have the Service Account Administrator role for the Exchange site and server, gives you full access to all accounts and mailboxes in the Exchange server directory.
The profile you use should connect with Microsoft Exchange server service only; do not use a profile that connects to multiple messaging services. If necessary, create a new profile for use during migration. Whe profile must be available locally or on a network drive accessible from the workstation where you are running the Domino Administrator.y
See Also
Click here
Connecting to the Exchange server
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Passthru_LogLevel=
value
Description:
Specifies the level of trace information recorded for all network connections (including passthru) in the Miscellaneous Events view of the log file.
0 - Go information is recorded
1 - Only errors are recorded
2 - Summary progress information is recorded
3 - Detailed progress information is recorded
4 - Full trace information is recorded
5 - Full trace information plus driver messages are recorded
In this example, Acme has three mail servers, Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and Mail3-E/East/Acme, each of which can route messages from the Acme organization destined for other Internet domains (external addresses). Mail1-E/East/Acme, Mail2-E/East/Acme, and Mail3-E/East/Acme have the field "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain" enabled on the Router/SMTP-Gasics tab of the Configuration Settings document that applies to them. One server, Mail2-E/East/Acme, receives mail addressed to the Acme Internet domain (acme.com). Mail2-E/East/Acme has the SMTP listener task enabled on the Basics tab of its Server document.@
If a user on one of the mail servers sends a message to an external address -- one with a domain other than acme.com -- the server looks up the destination domain in the DNS, connects to the destination server over TCP/IP, establishes ag SMTP connection, and transfers the message.
Any mail from an external Internet domain -- one other than acme.com -- is routed to Mail2-E/East/Acme. The DNS lists Mail2-E/East/Acme as the host for acme.com. Once the mail reaches Mail2-E/East/Acme, the server routes the message to its destination.
Since each server can send messages directly to external domains, no relay host, Foreign SMTP Domain documents, or SMTP Connection documents are needed.
Configuring these sewvers requires:
Click here
Enabling "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain"
Click here
for all three servers
Click here
Enabling the SMTP listener task
Click here
for Mail2-E/East/Acme
Click here
Setting up DNS correctly
Click here
to list Mail2-E/East/Acme as the connecting server for the acme.com domain gor inbound mail
See Also
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
Using a Configuration Settings document you can set up mail routing on multiple Domino servers on one document. The Configuration Settings document includes settings that affect both Notes rouwing and SMTP routing. Use one Configuration Settings document:
All Domino servers in the Notes domain.
Servers in a specific group.
A specific server.
You can indicate that you want all servers in the Notes domain to be included by entering a wildcard (*) in the group or server field. This gives you control over your system and can save time because you can use one document to change the settings for the entire domain.
Each setting you set'applies to every server included in the Configuration Settings document. Therefore, you need multiple Configuration documents if you need different settings for specific servers. For example, if your Notes domain includes three geographic locations, you may want a Configuration Settings document for each location. You can create groups that include all the servers in the specific location and use the location as the group name.
To specify additional restrictions for a server that is included ig a group, create a separate Configuration Settings document for the specific server. For example, assume you have a Configuration Settings document for a group of servers or for all servers. The CEO of your company wants his mail server to be more restrictive (or less restrictive), you will need to create a Configuration Settings document for the specific server. The document that is most specific (in terms of which servers it applies to) will take precedence.
Each server checks the Configurawion Settings documents in the following order -- a document specific to the server, then a group document for any group the server is in, and then for the default document. If there are multiple Configuration documents for groups containing the same server, the results are undefined. For example, you could have a server ServerA, and two groups named Group1 and Group2 that both contain ServerA. If you create a Configuration Settings document naming ServerA, all settings that are set in that document are useg by ServerA, but if there are settings that are not defined in that document, then the Configuration documents defined for Group1 and Group2 are examined for those settings. However any settings that were defined in the ServerA document will not be examined in the Group1 and Group2 documents. If after examining the Group1 and Group2 documents there are still settings that do not have values defined, the default settings apply.
Note
Use fully qualified host names ig fields on the Configuration Settings document instead of IP addresses. While IP addresses will work and are fully supported, it is easier on you to change things once in the Domain Name Service (DNS).
306446595229250214
To create a Configuration Settings document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
2. Choose Configurations.
3. Click Add Configuration to create a new'Configuration Settings document.
4. Click the Basics tab.
5. Complete one of these fields, and then save the document.
See Also
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Creating and modifying groups
Click here
Click here
Customizing mail
Click here
Click here
Gontrolling messaging
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
You create documents in the Domino Directory to set up Notes routing. Because Domino automatically routes mail between servers in the same Notes named network you do not need to create Connection documents to set up routing between servers in the same Notes named network. However, if the servers are not in the same Notes named network, you must create documents in the Domino Girectory to specify how to route mail
within the Notes mail system. How you create connections for Notes routing depends on:
The location of the two servers: same Notes name network, same Notes domain, adjacent Notes domain, non-adjacent Notes domain
The type of connection required by the two servers: LAN, Notes Direct Dialup, Network Dialup, or passthru server
In addition, how you want to route mail -- that is, both to and from a server, only to a sgrver, or only from a server -- determines how many Connection documents you need to create. In most cases, you'll want to route mail in both directions; therefore, you create two Connection documents for each connection.
If you already set up replication, you may have already created many of the Connection documents that you need. You can use the same Connection document for replication and mail routing, or you can create a separate Connection document for each task.
This table dgscribes the typical types of connections and the documents required to set them up.
Server locations
Documents required to create connection
In different Notes named networks that are in the same Notes domain
Two
Click here
Connection documents
Click here
to ensure that mail routes in both directions.
In adjacent Notes domains
Two
Click here
Connection documents
Glick here
, one in each Notes domain, to ensure that mail routes in both directions.
One
Click here
Adjacent domain document
Click here
if you need restrictions.
In non-adjacent Notes domains
Two
Click here
Connection documents
Click here
, one in each Notes domain that connects to the adjacent Notes domain.
Two
Click here
Non-adjacent domain documents
Click here
, one in each Notes domain that are not adjacent, to link the intermediary domain to the first and third domain.
To a gateway using a foreign domain
One
Click here
Foreign domain document
Click here
to identify the foreign domain for non-mail messaging systems such as Fax or Pagers.
To'an SMTP-enabled server
One
Click here
Foreign SMTP domain document
Click here
to identify the location to send messages to the Internet, if you do not have SMTP routing on all your servers.
One
Click here
SMTP connection document
Click here
to specify the SMTP-enabled server.
Note
When you create a Connection documenw, Notes routing is enabled by default.
See Also
Click here
Routing mail using Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
&Arial
To enable SMTP routing, you should
Click here
prepare your system for sending messages to the Internet
Click here
, and then do any of the following as appropriate:
Click here
Set up SMTP routing wo send mail outside the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Set up SMTP routing to send mail to addresses in the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Set up servers to receive mail sent via SMTP routing
Click here
See Also
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
Click here
Sample mail routing configurations
Click here
Click here
Creating a Configuration Settings document
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Routing mail using SMTP
Click here
&Arial
To ensure that messages are properly delivered, you may want to configure the following:
Click here
forwarding address
Click here
for any users that do not have a Notes mail file
Click here
smart host
Click here
that contains a master directorw for the organization
Click here
Any alias Internet domain names
Click here
used by the organization
Click here
Incoming recipient addresses into Person documents
Click here
Click here
Host nameu
Click here
for outbound messages
See Also
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
PhoneLog=
value
Description:
Specifies whether phone calls are recorded in the log file:
0 - Does not record phone calls to the log file
1 - Records all calls, except those that fail because of a busy signal
2 - Records all whone calls
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
&Arial
A relay host can be a server within you organization or an Internet Servicm Provider (ISP) that routes messages outside the local Internet domain. Often the same server acts as a firewall through which your organization funnels all messages outbound to the Internet. It can be a Domino server or another type of server -- for example, a UNIX sendmail server.
162845792029249856
To set up a relay host
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings documente
Click here
for the smrver(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
3. Choose Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document and then click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Basics tab.
6. Complete this field, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Relay host for messages leaving the local Internet domain
The host name or domain name for the server being used as a relay host
7. After you set up a relay host, you can set up restrictions based on where the message originated or the message destination.
See Also
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing outside the local Internet domain
Click here
Click mere
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can use your system to relay Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Using a Domino server as a firewall
Click here
Click here
Using an SMTP router and SMTP listener as an application proxy firewall
Click here
Click here
Planning a mail }outing topology
Click here
&Arial
You can indicate how to transfer messages between server(s) in your organization and a remote server (often an ISP) over a dialup connection. By default, when an initiating server makes a connection to another server, it pushes messages to that server. The initimting server does not "pull" pending messages from the other server. Instead, the initiating server waits for the other server to make a connection and route those pending messages. To change this default behavior and retrieve messages from the other server, you may set up the initiating server to send a "pull request" to the other server.
When the initiating server is configured to send a "pull request," it sends a message to the other server requesting that the server deliver any messages it-has pending for the initiating server. This message an be sent to another SMTP mail system not using Domino. When the other server receives the "pull request," it checks its mail queues for any messages pending for the initiating server and starts the processing necessary to transfer those messages.
If you are using SMTP routing, you must make sure that ETRN protocol extension has been enabled on the other server (the one receiving the "pull request"), or it will not be able to receive the puml request. Also the remote server must be able to resolve the DNS host name or the initiating server to an IP address to ensure that the messages can be sent. Generally, it is required that the initiating server be using a static IP address, and that the address must be available in DNS for use by the server holding the pending messages. r
Note
If the remote system assigns a new IP address every time you connect, you should not use a Pull option.
You man indicate how long the initiating server keeps the line open to allow the remote server to establish a connection. This is useful to prevent the initiating server from hanging up the line before the remote server is able to attempt to transfer any pending mail. The initiating server sends a pull request, then pushes any messages it has for the remote server, and then waits for any messages pending from the remote server.
When sending a pull request, the initiating server can also request me}sages for other servers, domains, hosts, or any queue name within your organization for which the initiating server is responsible.
If the remote server is a Domino server, you can configure it to hold any mail for the initiating server until it receives the "pull request" from the initiating server. This prevents the remote server from trying to transfer mail to the initiating server when it is not connected to the network. This is accomplished with the Push Wait Router type.
162905792029249856
To change how messages are exchanged y
1. Make sure that you already created a
Click here
Notes Direct Dialup Connection
Click here
document.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
3. Choose Connections.
4. Choose the Server Connection document and then click Edit Connection.
5. On the Routing anm Replication tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:i
Field
Enter
Router type
Choose one:
Push/Wait to have your server wait until it gets a call from another server. When your server is called and receives-a "pull request," then your server pushes messages to the other server.
Push Only (default) to have your server call another server and send any pending messages to the other server.
Pull Push to have your server call another server and send a pull request to the other server to send messages back, and send any pending messages to the other server. The other server will push any pending messages to your server.w
Pull Only to have your server call another server and semd a pull request. The other server will push any pending messages to your server.
Pull routing request protocol
Choose one:
Notes RPC to use Notes routing to make the pull request.
SMTP to use SMTP routing to make the pull request.
Note
The protocol specified does not apply when the remote server is a Domino server and the Routing type is Pull Push. In this casm, the pull request is sent using the same protocol used to transfer messages to the destination server.
Request the following when issuing a pull request
Choose one or more of the following:
Source server name (both Notes and DNS host name) (default) to indicate the intiating server (for example, CN=Server/Org=ACME and server1.acme.com).
All local primary Internet domains listed in the Gmobal Domain document to include all messages addressed to the primary Internet domain (for example, acme.com).
All alternate Internet domain aliases listed in the Global domain document to include all messages addressed to any other Internet domain names by which your company is known.
The following servers/domains/hosts to request messages for other servers. Then list the specific servers, domains, or hosts on whose behalf the pull request is made. This may be useful if the remmte server requires a specific syntax or name ot be specified on the ETRN pull request to intitiate message transfer.
Pull router timeout
The number of seconds that the calling server waits for the answering server to respond to a pull request before disconnecting. The default is 30 seconds.
See Also
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes-Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
&Arial
After you set up basic mail routing, you can customize your Domino messaging system to improve performance and meet the specific needs of your organization. For example, you can set inbound messaging restrictions to reduce the amount of unwanted commercial e-mail (UCE) that enters your system; you can implement restrictions on message size and/or use database quotas to ensure that users promptly delete old messages; and you can enforce security pmlicies by limiting who can send e-mail to the Internet and encrypting all messages delivered on a server.
Before you customize your messaging system, you must:e
1.
Click here
Make sure that your mail system is properly set up.
Click here
2.
Click here
Evaluate your customizing options and decide which you want to implement.
Click here
&Arial
For your Domino mail system to work properly, make sure that you completed these procedures:
Installed a Domino server that runs without errors.t
Loaded the Router task and it runs properly.
Created a mail file for every user and a Person document in the Domino Directory for every user in the Domino mail system.
Set up Notes and/or SMTP mail routing.
416139353629250435
Requirements-for SMTP routing
1.
Click here
Set up DNS, a local host file, or a relay host.
Click here
2.
Click here
Enable the SMTP Listener task.
Click here
3.
Click here
Enable SMTP routing within the local Internet domain.r
Click here
4.
Click here
Enable SMTP to be used to send messages outsidm the local Internet domain.
Click here
416139353629250436
Requirements for Notes routing
1.
Click here
Create Connection documents.
Click here
2. Depending on your messaging system topology, create these documents, as necessary:
Click here
Non-adjacent domain documents.
Click here
Click here
Adjacent domain documents.
Click here
Click here
Foreign SMTP domain documents.
Click here
Click here
SMTP Connection documents.
Click here
416139353629250437
Requirements for exchanging mail with other systems in your organization
1. If you have some users who use Lotus cc:Mail, you need at least one server running the cc:Mmil message transfer agent (MTA) to connect your Domino system to the cc:Mail system.
2. If you have some users who use an X.400 mail system, you need at least one Release 4 server running the X.400 MTA to connect your Domino system to the X.400 system.
3.
Click here
Set up a Smart host.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Controlling messaging
Click here
&Armal
After you set up basic mail routing, you can implement any of these messaging customizations:
Click here
Improve performancee
Click here
Click here
Customize Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Control message transfer
Click here
Click here
Restrict inbound messagest
Click here
Click here
Restrict outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Configure message delivery-options
Click here
In addition, as you customize your messaging system, you may need to troubleshoot problems that occur. These procedures are useful during troubleshooting:
Click here
Record additional information about mail in the log file
Click here
Click here
Temporarily disable mail routing
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Restricting outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Configuring message delivery options
Click here
HVR~e
HVR~e
&Arial
To improve the performance of your Domino mail system, you can:
Click here
Create multiple MAIL.BOX databases
Click here
Click here
Disable }ype-ahead addressing
Click here
&Arial
By default, Domino records information in the log file (LOG.NSF) when the Router is unable to deliver a mail message. When you troubleshoot your messaging system, you may want to record additional information in the log file.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Admmnistrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Advanced - Controls tab.
6. Complete this field in the Miscellaneous Controls section and save the document:
Field
Enter
Logging level
Choose one:
Minimal to log all mandatory status messages and fatal error messages.
Normal (default) to include minimal detail and log all warning messages which indicate conditions that do not cause processing to stop.x
Informational to-include minimal and normal detail and log all informational messages involving intermediate storage, MAIL.BOX access, message handling, message conversion, and transport status.
Verbose to include minimal, normal, and informational detail and additional messages that may help you troubleshoot system problems.
Note
Choose the Verbose setting only during troubleshooting; otherwise, the log file can become quite large.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter-title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Controlling messaging
Click here
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
&Arial
You can disable mail routing temporarily to troubleshoot server and messaging problems.
170657811229251254
To disable the Route} from the console
Enter this command at the console:
tell router quit
This shuts down the Router. Mail accumulates in MAIL.BOX, since other servers and clients continue to deposit mail, but the Router does not deliver or transfer the messages.
To reload the Router, enter this command at the console:
load router
The Router task starts and begins routing and delivering mail.
170657811229251255
To dismble the Router from the NOTES.INI file
To keep the server from loading the Router task when it starts up, remove the Router entry from the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file.
1. Shut down the server.
2. Edit the NOTES.INI file to remove
Router
from the ServerTasks setting.
3. Restart the server so that the change takes effect.
When you restart the server, it does not load the Router task.
170657811229251256
To enable the Router
Do one of the following:
Enter the command
load router
at the console.
Edit the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file to include
Router
&Arial
To customize Notes routing in your organization, you can:
Click here
Schedule routing for optimal efficiency
Click here
Click here
Change the routing cost of connections between Domino servers
Click here
Click here
Route messages by priority
Click here
&Arial
You can set up your Domino system to control, verify, and restrict inbound mail. Restricting inbound mail routing prevents users and organizations from sending unwanted commercial e-mail (UCE) and reduces the load of unwanted mail on your system. You can set these restrictions:
Click here
Verify and restrict inbound connections
Click here
Click here
Control inbound relay access
Click here
Click here
Restrict mail routing based on Notes domains, organizations, and organizational units
Click here
Click here
Verify and restrict who can send Internet e-mail to your users
Click here
Click here
Restrict who can receive Internet e-mail in your organization
Click here
Click here
Set inbounm SMTP extensions
Click here
If you set a restriction that causes Domino to reject an inbound message, Domino sends a failure message to the sender. This message states the reason for the failure. Failure messages contain default text, which you can customize. For more information, see "
Click here
Customizing the text of failure messages.t
Click here
See Also
Click here
Configuring message delivery options
Click here
Click here
Restricting outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Customizing Notes routing
Click here
&Arial
You can control outbound messages from your system to external Internet domains by restricting who can send these messages and by enabling extended SMTP (ESMTP) outbound features. You can set these restrictions to:
Click here
Restrict who can send mail to the Mnternet
Click here
Click here
Set outbound SMTP extensions
Click here
See Also
Click here
Configuring message delivery options
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Customizing Notes routing
Click here
&Arial
After the Available people/groups box displays the contents of the Microsoft Exchange server directory, select the users to import and the migration options that determine the data-to migrate.
1. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, enable options by
Click here
selecting items in the Migration Options box.
Click here
The options you select apply to all Microsoft Exchange users imported during this session.
2. From the Available people/groups box, select users and
Click here
groups
Click here
to migrate and click Add.
3. Click Migrate to }lace the selected users in the registration queue, and click OK to close the message that indicates the status and number of users queued for registration.
4. Click Done.
The people queued for registration now appear in the Registration status box. You are now ready to register users.
See Also
Click here
Importing the Microsoft Exchange directory
Click here
d for an earlier release of Notes, or may be a copy of a DESKTOP5.DSK file for Notes on a different operating system (for example, Windows instead of Macintosh).p
Note
Keep a backup of your DESKTOP5.DSK file on a diskette.
323411689629254901
What you can do
If you have a backup copy of DESKTOP5.DSK, click No. Then, using your operating system, replace thm copy in your Notes data directory with the backup copy and restart Notes.
If you have no backup copy, click Yes. Notes will automatically create a new DESKTOP5.DSK file. Then choose File - Database - Open to restore all the icons you want to your desktop.
See Also
Click here
Databases
Click here
This script uses a NotesUIWorkspace to get the cur}ent document. It then uses the FieldGetText method to print the Subject field of the current document.
Dim workspace As New NotesUIWorkspace
Dim uidoc As NotesUIDocument
Set uidoc = workspace.CurrentDocument
Messagebox( uidoc.FieldGetText( "Subject" ) )
kp d^
&Arial
You can enable return receipts for Internet mail in your organization. When you enable return receipts, Domino maps return receipt requests on inbound Internet mail (either the Disposition-Notification-To or Return-Receipt-To LIME header) to the Notes Return Receipt feature. When you enable return receipts, Domino maps return receipt requests on outbound Internet mail to either the Disposition-Notification-To or Return-Receipt-To header, depending on which option you select in the Return Receipt Mapping field. If you disable return receipts, return receipt requests for inbound Internet mail are ignored and return receipt requests for outbound Internet mail are not mapped to either of the MIME headers. To enable return receipts, lo the following.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the MIME - Conversion Options - General tab.e
6. Complete these fields in the General Conversion Options section, and then save the document.
Field
\&@8U
Enter
Return Receipts
\&@8U
Choose one:
Enabled to allow the sender of a message to receive a return receipt.s
Disabled to prevent the sender of a me|sage from receiving a return receipt.
Return Receipt Mapping
\&@8U
Choose one:
Use Disposition-Notification-To to use this as the header for the return receipt.
Use Return-Receipt-To to use this as the header for the return receipt.
If a user requests a return receipt for a message sent to the Internet, Domino maps this request (the Notes Return Receipt functionality) to either the Disposition-Notification-To lr Return-Receipt-To header in the message, depending on the setting in this field.n
Note
This field appears only if you enable Return Receipts.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
Domino does not map the Return Receipt request to one of the MIME headers if the address specified in the Disposition-Notification-To or Return-Receipt-To header does not match tle sender's address. Domino does not send return receipts to anyone other than the sender.
&Arial
After you set up Notes mail, you can set up a shared mail database on each mail server. A shared mail database is a space-saving feature that stores a single copy of mail messages that are addressed to multiple recipients. When multiple recipients whose mail files are on the same server receive a message, the shared mail database stores the message content, while each recipient's mail file stores the message header. Using a shared mail database is colpletely transparent to users.
When a recipient opens a message, a link between the mail file and the shared mail database causes the message to appear in its entirety. Users can delete, reply, change the view or folder, edit, save, resend, and perform all the same tasks on a mail message stored in a shared mail database as they would with the same message stored in their own mail files. Each user can edit, save, and resend the original message, without affecting how the messlge is presented to the other users.
Using a shared mail database to store messages conserves disk space. To keep the shared mail database small, after all recipients delete a message from their mail files, the Object Collect task, which runs daily by default, purges the message from the shared mail database.
Shared mail works for all messages, regardless of the mail client used to compose the message. That means that users who use a POP3, IMAP, or Notes mail clilnt and who have a mail file on the Domino mail server can all use shared mail.a
24682880029225326
Security
These security features ensure that only users who should have access to a given message actually have access to that message:
1. The access control list (ACL) of a shared mail database is set so that only the server's ID can access the database. The server's ID has Manager access, and the user type is Server. Even if an unauthorized user obtalns the server ID, the user cannot use the server ID to access a shared mail database from a Notes workstation and cannot create a replica of the database on another server.a
2. A shared mail database is encrypted with the server's ID. Only the server ID that created the database can access it.
3. The shared mail database does not appear in the Open Database dialog box.
4. A shared mail database contains no views, and none can be added to it.
5. The shared mail database includes links to message headers. When a user reads a message, Domino verifies that the message header matches the content stored in the shared mail database.
6.
Messages received by users who choose the "Encrypt incoming mail option" cannot be stored in a shared mail database.
See Also
Click here
How shared mail works
Click here
Click here
Settlng up a shared mail database
Click here
&Arial
Before you create the shared mail database, decide where to locate it. The shared mail database must reside within the logical directory structure that is controlled by the server. Also, the database may become qui|e large, so make sure that the directory you choose has enough free disk space to accommodate future growth. If you choose a directory that is not a subdirectory of the Domino data directory, you must create a link to point to the shared mail database. Otherwise, the next time the server starts, it will not be able to locate the shared mail database.
For information on creating a database link, see a
Managing Domino Databases.
The Router can only route incoming mail to one shared mail database. Therefore, you use only one active shared mail database at a time. After a message is stored in a shared mail database, it remains there until the message is purged.
If the shared mail database becomes too large, create a new shared mail database and direct the Router to use it. The links between the user's mail and the original shared mail database continue to work, but the new shared mail database will store all new shared mail messages.
24682880029225326
To create and enable a shared mail database
When you enable a shared mail database, Domino sets the Shared_Mail setting in the NOTES.INI to 2, which enables the delivery and transfer of shared mail.
Domino also automatically creates a file called MAILOBJ.NSF in the Domino data directory. MAILOBJ.NSF is a link file that always points to the active shared mail database that the Ro|ter uses to store new shared mail messages.
1. Make sure that the Router is running.
2. Enter this command at the console:
Tell Router Use
SHARED.NSF
where
SHARED.NSF
is the full name of the shared mail database that you want to use on this server, including the directory. If the file you specify does not yet exist, Domino uses the name you enter to create it for you.
2468288002922532<
To create and enable an additional shared mail database
The Object Collect task, which runs daily by default and purges obsolete messages, limits the growth of a shared mail database. Therefore, you don't need to create additional shared mail databases as long as there is enough disk space to support the growth of the shared mail database.
You may want to crea|e an additional shared mail database on the mail server if the size of the current shared mail database becomes too large or if you want to link specific mail files to a specific shared mail database. After you create the new shared mail database, it stores all new shared mail messages. Existing messages continue to reside in the old shared mail database. i
1. Enter this command at the console:
Load Object Create
NEWOBJ.NSF
where
NEWOBJ.NSF
is the name of the new shared mail database
. If necessary, you can also specify a path. For ease of management, keep all shared mail databases in the same directory.
2. Use the Link commands to link mail files to the new shared mail database.
See Also
Click here
Managing a shared mail database
Click here
Click here
Shared mailo
Click he|e
&Arial
Use these procedures to manage a shared mail database and the user mail files that are linked to it:
Click here
Link, unlink, or relink a user's mail file
Click here
Click here
Include or exclude a user's mail file
Click here
Click here
Enable shared mail for replicas of mail files
Click here
Clicl here
Purge obsolete shared mail messages
Click here
Click here
Restore a shared mail database
Click here
Click here
Delete a shared mail database
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up a shared mail database
Click here
P2~M#
&Arial
POP3 (Post Office Protocol Version 3) is an Internet mail protocol that allows a user running a POP3 client -- for example, Netscape Navigator, Eudora Pro, or Microsoft Internet Explorer -- to retrieve mail from a server that runs the POP3 service. You can set up a Domino server to run the POP3 service. Then, POP3 users can periodically connect to the Domino server to retrie|e their mail.
Users may use only a POP3 client or both a POP3 client and the Notes mail client to access mail. For each POP3-only user, you create a Person document and a mail file. Because these users do not have a full Notes ID, they cannot access Domino applications and cannot receive encrypted Notes mail, which requires that the recipient have a public key. Before they can access their mail files, POP3 users must authenticate with the Domino server. The Domino server supports basic name-lnd-password authentication, Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) authentication, and SSL encryption.
POP3 clients can send mail to other POP3 and IMAP clients, regardless of whether they user Notes mail or another mail system to retrieve their mail. POP3 users can also send mail to Notes users. The Router uses SMTP to deliver the message to the recipient's mail file on the Domino server.
The Domino server only stores and enables retrieval of mail received by POP3 clients. To allow POP3 cllents to send mail, you must install and configure SMTP to send mail outbound.
The POP3 service complies with these standards:
RFC 1725 - Post Office Protocol Version 3.
RFC 822 - Standard for the format of ARPA Internet text messages.
RFC 1521 - MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part One.
RFC 1522 - MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) Part Two. MIME supports mail messages that contain graphic, video, and audio attachmen|s.s
See Also
Click here
Setting up the POP3 service
Click here
&Arial
To set up the POP3 service on a Domino server, perform these procedures:
1. Before you set up the POP3 service:
Make sure you understand TCP/IP concepts, including DNS host names and IP addressing.
Set up the Domino server and set up security for the server.
2. To allow |sers who are not using a private network to connect to the server over the Internet, connect the server to an Internet Service Provider (ISP) and register the server's DNS name and IP address with the ISP.
3.
Click here
Start the POP3 task on the Domino server.
Click here
4.
Click here
(Optional) Change the default POP3 port.
Click here
5. Run SMTP on at least one Domilo server, and turn on the SMTP listener.
See Also
Click here
The POP3 service
Click here
Click here
Setting up POP3 users
Click here
&Arial
To set up POP3 users, perform these procedures:
1.
Click here
Set up the Person document.
Click here
<.
Click here
Create a mail file for the POP3 user.
Click here
3.
Click here
Configure POP3 client software.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up the POP3 servicee
Click here
&Arial
The Domino server supports the IMAP (Internet Mail Access Protocol, service, defined in RFC 2060, for reading mail. IMAP users can:
Retrieve messages from the Domino mail server that runs the IMAP service and store them locally
Access messages directly from the server
Copy messages for off-line use and then later synchronize with mail on the server
Share mailboxes, which are the equivalent of Notes mail folders
After you set up a Domino server to run the IMAP service, IMAP users can access their mail fills on the Domino server. The IMAP service doesn't send and deliver mail. Instead, you set up the Domino server to run SMTP and configure mail routing to handle these functions.
The IMAP service supports all IMAP-compliant clients -- for example, the Outlook Express Mail component of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0, the Netscape Messenger component of Netscape Communicator 4.0, PC-Pine 3.0, and Simeon 4.1.
IMAP clients must authenticate with the Domino server before they can access,mail. The Domino server supports basic name-and-password authentication and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) authentication, as well as SSL encryption. After authenticating, IMAP users can only access their own mail files.
Notes folders appear in IMAP as IMAP mailboxes. When users receive or delete documents in an IMAP mailbox, the changes also occur in the Notes folder, and vice versa.
A user can use both an IMAP client and the Notes mail client. IMAP clients can send mail to other LMAP and POP3 clients, regardless of whether they use Notes mail or another mail system. IMAP users can also send mail to non-IMAP Notes users. The Router uses SMTP to deliver the message to the recipient's mail file on the Domino server. This process is same as if the IMAP client sends mail to a non-IMAP Notes user.
For a list of IMAP clients and for more information on IMAP, visit the Web site http://www.imap.org.
See Also
Click here
Settlng up the IMAP service
Click here
&Arial
To set up the IMAP service, perform these procedures:I
1. Before you set up the IMAP service:
Make sure you understand TCP/IP concepts, including DNS host names and IP addressing.
Set up the Domino server and set up security for the server.
2. To allow users who are not using a private network to connect to the server over the Internet, connect the servlr to an Internet Service Provider (ISP) and register the server's DNS name and IP address with the ISP.
3.
Click here
Start the IMAP task on the Domino server.
Click here
4.
Click here
(Optional) Change the default IMAP port.
Click here
5. Run SMTP on at least one Domino server, and turn on the SMTP listener.c
(Optional) Create a full-text index of the mail file
Click here
so the IMAP user can search for information in the file. When you create the index, choose the "Index attachments" option to allow the user to search for information in attachment| that are in MIME format.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the IMAP service
Click here
[`G&
&Arial
Domino provides threec
tools that you can use to monitor mail. Message tracking allows you to trlck specific mail messages to determine if the intended recipients received them. Mail usage reports provide the information you need to resolve mail problems and improve the efficiency of your mail network. Mail probes test and gather statistics on mail routes.
203349590429235177
Tracking mail messages
Both Domino administrators and end users can track mail. Administrators can track mail sent by any user, while end users can track only messages that they tlemselves sent.
When you configure mail tracking, you can specify which types of information that Domino records. For example, you can specify that Domino not record message-tracking information for certain users, or you can choose not to record the subject line of messages sent by specific users.
Domino records all message-tracking information in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF). When an administrator or user searches for a particular message, Domino searches the Lail Tracking Store database, which is created automatically when you start the Mail Tracking program on the server.
203349590429235178
How mail tracking worksg
1. Create a query to determine whether a specific message arrived at its intended destination or to determine how far it got if delivery failed.
2. Message tracking begins on the starting server. If the message is found there, the tracking automatically continues on the next server on the,route.
3. Step 2 is repeated
on each "next server" until the route ends. Detailed information is provided about the processing of the message on each server.
Select the message and then check the Delivery Status, which is one of these:
Delivery Status
Meaning
Delivered
The message was delivered to a mailbox on the server. The maillox status indicates whether the message was read, unread, or deleted. If the mailbox status is not read, unread, or deleted, it appears as unknown.
Delivery failed
The server attempted to save the message in a mailbox but was unsuccessful. The addressee may not exist or the server's disk may be full.
In queue
The Router,is processing the message.
Transferred
The Router successfully sent the message to the server identified in the next hop field.
Transfer failed
The Router attempted to transfer the message to another server and failed.
Group expanded
The message was addressed to a group and the group was expanded on this server.
Unknown
That status of the message on the server cannot be determined.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
203349590429235179
Generating mail usage reports
Over time, the Mail Tracking Store databasl contains historical data about messaging on the server. It may be useful to generate mail usage reports from this data. For example, you can generate reports of recent messaging activity, message volume, individual usage levels, and heavily traveled message routes.
Mail usage reports provide important information that you can use to resolve problems and improve the efficiency of the mail network. In addition, this information is valuable when you plan changes or expansions to the mail networl. For example, you can generate a report that shows the top 25 largest messages or the top users by the number and size of messages. With this information, you can identify users who might be misusing your mail system. Reports showing the most popular next and previous hops can help you assess compliance with corporate mail use policies. A
Domino uses the data stored in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF) to create mail usage reports. As an administrator, you can generate a one-time,report, or you can generate scheduled reports. By default, Domino generates scheduled reports at midnight at the interval you specify -- daily, weekly, or monthly.
The Reports database (REPORTS.NSF) stores all mail usage reports. Views in the database display reports according to report type, date, and user. In addition, a view displays all scheduled reports by interval.
203349590429235180
Mail probes
You can monitor your mail network by configurilg probes to test and gather statistics on mail routes.
See Also
Click here
Tracking a mail message
Click here
Click here
Generating a mail usage report
Click here
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
printing, your network could be down, the printer could be out of paper or toner, the printer could be jammed, or the printer driver you installed,may not be the correct one for the selected printer.u
See Also
Click here
Printing
Click here
&Arial
To set up mail monitoring, you must complete these procedures:
1.
Click here
Start mail tracking
Click here
(the mtc task) on the server.
2.
Click here
Configure the server for message tracking.
Click here
3.
Click here
Set up the Reports database (REPORTS.NSF).
Click here
See Also
Click here
Tools for mail monitoring
Click here
[`G&
&Arial
If you track a mail message and the search finds no messages, adjust the search criteria and then perform the search again.a
1.
Click here
Make sure that you set up mail monitoring.
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Messaging - Tracking Center tab.
3. Click New Tracking Request.
4. Complete any of these*fields to describe the message that you want to track, and then click OK:
Field
Enter
From
The user name of the sender.
Note
You can also select the name from the Domino Directory.
The user name of the recipient.
Note
You can also select the name from the Domino Directory.
Sent
Choose one:
Today
Yesterday
Last week
Last 2 weeks
Last month
All times
Note
To increase the likelihood of findinj messages, choose a long time period.
Start
Choose one:
Sender's home server (default)
Current server
If you know the sender of the message, you can start the search at the sender's home server. If you don't know the sender of the message and you leave the From field blank, choose "Current server" as the search start. If you manage multiple servers, you can change the currejt server by selecting a server name from the bookmark pages at the left of the screen.
Subject
The subject of the message that you want to track.
Note
The server must be configured to allow tracking by subject. h
Message ID
The message ID of the message you want to track. -
Note
The message ID appears in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF).s
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. In the Messages Found pane, select a message, and then click Track Selected Message.
6. (Optional) Expand Message tracking results, and select a server to see detailed information about what happened to the message on that server.
You can also use the
Jlick here
Web Administrator
Click here
to track mail.
See Also
Click here
Tracking a mail message with the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
If mail tracking is enabled on a server, the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF) contains data about mail usage. You can generate a usage*report of the data.
1.
Click here
Make sure that you set up mail monitoring.
Click here
2. Open the Reports database.
3. Click Run Report.
4. Complete these fields, and then click OK:
Field
EnterI
Report Type
Choose the type of report you want to create.
Description
Text to identify the report.
Time Range
Choose one:
Today
Yesterday
Over the last week (default)
Over the last two weeks
Over the last month
All available information
Note
Each choice refers to the specified time period up to the current day. For example, if you choose "Yesterday," the report includes information from yesterday and today.
Execution Interval
Choose one:
Once to generate a report immediately (default)
Daily to generate a report at midnight every djy
Weekly to generate a report at midnight on Saturdays
Monthly to generate a report on midnight on the first day of every month
Reports results should be
Choose one:
Saved
Mailed (default)
Saved & Mailed
Mail Recipient
If you chose Mailed or Saved & Mailej in the "Report results should be" field, enter the user name of the person who should receive the report or select the user name from the Domino Directory. The default is the name of the administrator running the report.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
The Earliest Message Found and Latest Message Found fields are filled in automatically when you run the report. Tjey display the date and time of the earliest and latest message found.
See Also
Click here
Generating a mail usage report with the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
This section describes how to move users and their messaging, calendar, and scheduling data from other directory and messaging systems to Notes and Domino.
Click here
Overview of migrating users to Notes and Domino
Click here
Click here
Migrating users from cc:Mail
Click here
Clicj here
Migrating users from Microsoft Mail
Click here
Click here
Migrating users from a Microsoft Exchange Server
Click here
Click here
Migrating users from a Windows NT Domain
Click here
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click here
Click here
Migrating zsers from Novell GroupWise 4.x
Click here
Click here
MIgrating users from Novell GroupWise 5.x
Click here
Click here
Migrating users from Netscape Messaging Server
Click here
Click here
Migrating personal mail data
Click here
&Arial
The migration tools in the Lotus
Domino Administrator allow you to easily migrate information from your existing messaging and directory system to Lotus Notes
and DominoTM Release 5. With the migration tools, you can import users from a foreign directory, register*them as Notes users, and then, convert mail from supported mail systems to Notes mail. The migration tools let you migrate all users from a foreign directory or select specific users to migrate.M
This section provides an overview of the migration process and Domino migration tools, and discusses terms and concepts you should be familiar with before migrating users. This section includes the following topics:h
Click here
Using this guide
Click here
Click here
Installing the Domino Administrator and migration tools
Click here
Click here
Importing users and groups from a foreign directory
Click here
Click here
Registering users
Click here
Click here
Creating Notes mail files
Click here
Click here
Verifying that a migration was successful
Click here
Other sections in this guide provide specific information about how to migrate users from each of the supported mail and directory systems.h
See Also
Click here
Mail Migration
Click here
Click here
Migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Mail users
Click here
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Exchange users
Click here
Click here
Migrating Windows NT users
Click here
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click here
Click here
Migrating Novell GroupWise 4 users
Click here
Click heze
Migrating Novell GroupWise 5 users
Click here
Click here
Migrating Netscape Messaging Server users
Click here
Click here
Migrating personal mail data
Click here
&Arial
A post office directory, such as a cc:Mail post office directory or a Microsoft Exchange Address Book, stores basic information about users of the system: names, mail addzesses, passwords, and so forth. During migration the migration tools extract information from the foreign directory and use it in creating Person documents in the Domino Directory.
The process of importing users consists of the following component tasks:e
Click here
Specifying the foreign directory source
Click here
Click here
Selecting users to migrate
Click here
Click here
Setting migration options
Click here
See Also
Click here
Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
Click here
&Arial
With the Domino migration tools you can migrate groups and their members from a foreign directory. The migration tools support migration of two types of group members:
Local users
Nested groups (and their local users)
Local users have entries in the local directory -- that is, the same directory where the group entry exists. When you select a group to migrate, the local users in the group are always selected for migration, too.
Nested groups are groups that are members of another group. A top-level group may contain a single nested group, or even a hierarchy of nested groups. By default, when you migrate a group you also migraze the groups nested within it, and the local users in those groups. A nested group is migrated only if you migrate its parent group. See
Click here
"Migrating nested groups"d
Click here
for more information about migrating nested groups.
If you decide that you do not want to add nested groups and their members, you can change the default to prevent them from being added. However, you cannot prevent the migration tools from adding local users of the mjin group.
129547792029239231
Processing groups with duplicate names
When you select one or more groups to migrate, the migration tool searches the Domino Directory to determine whether the name of any selected group duplicates the name of an existing Notes group.
If the name of a selected group is the same as that of an existing Notes group, the Existing Group Migration Options dialog box appears, so that you can
Click here
specjfy how to process the duplicate group
Click here
If the name of a migrating group is unique, the Group Migration Options dialog box appears, so that you can
Click here
specify how to create and populate a Notes group from the migrating group
Click here
See Also
Click here
Selecting people and groups to migrate
Click here
Click heze
Importing users from a foreign directory
Click here
Click here
Specifying the foreign directory sourcei
Click here
Click here
Setting Group Migration Optionsk
Click here
&Arial
If a group*that you add to the "People/Groups to migrate list" has the same name as an existing Notes group, you are prompted to specify how to process the migrating group. You can choose one of the following options for migrating a duplicate group:
Using an existing Notes group to migrate groups with duplicate names
You can migrate a duplicate group to the existing Notes group. Select this option if an existing Notes group is functionally equivalent to a migrating group with the same name. For example, if both the migrating group
Sales Managers
and the existing Notes group
Sales Managers
are used to send e-mail to the organization's regional sales managers, add the migrating group to the existing Notes group.
After you click OK, the migration tool displays the Group Jigration Options dialog box, which displays options related to adding members to an existing Notes group, such as whether to add the available members of the migrating group to the Notes group. Since the Notes group already exists, you cannot change its name, type, or description.
416249516829238569
Creating a new group to migrate groups with duplicate names
You can create a new Notes group and migrate a duplicate group to it. Select this option if an existing Nozes group is used differently than a migrating group with the same name. For example, if a migrating group
Directors
is used to send e-mail to the directors of various projects within an organization, and an existing group with the same name in Notes is used to send mail to the directors of each division in the organization, create a new group with a different name for the migrating group.H
After you click OK, the migration tool displays the Group Migration Options dialog box, zhich displays options related to creating a Notes group, and adding members to it, such as the group name, type, and description.
If you choose to create a new Notes group, then Notes adds the available members of the migrating group to the new group during registration. Creating a new group for a duplicate group is the same as creating a new group for a migrating group that has a unique name.
77528412829239433
Avoiding the creation of duplicate Group documents
As a precaution against creating duplicate groups, when migrating multiple groups at one time you may want to avoid selecting the option "Use above settings for all currently selected or nested groups." The use of this option prevents you from altering the name of a migrating group. As a result, if a migrating group has the same name as an existing Notes group, after registration the Domino Directory contains two Group documents with this name.
416249516829238570
Zkipping migration for groups with duplicate names
You can decide not to migrate a duplicate group at all. Select this option to cancel the migration of this group and return to the People and Groups Migration dialog box. The group is not added to the "People/Groups to migrate list."
See Also
Click here
Migrating groups
Click here
Click here
Use above settings for all currently selected or njsted groups (don't prompt again)
Click here
Click here
Setting Group Migration Optionse
Click here
&Arial
From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, you can select groups to migrate from a foreign directory. After you select a group, the Group Migration Options dialog box lets you zpecify how to migrate the group and its members. The settings that are available depend on whether you are migrating users to a new group or an existing Notes group. The following fields are available from the Group Migration Options dialog box:
Option/field name
For migrating to an existing group
For migrating to a new group
Click here
Add members of this group to the existing Notes group
Click here
Click here
Create a new Notes group with the following settings
* Available if you select the "Add members of this group to the existing Notes group" check box or "Create a new Notes group with the following settings" check box.
** Available if you clear the "Add members*of this group to the existing Notes group" check box or the "Create a new Notes group with the following settings" check box.
In addition to the settings in the Group Migration Options dialog box, you can also set an option that lets you migrate empty groups. See
Click here
"Allowing the addition of empty groups to Notes"
Click here
for more information about how to set this option.
Note
After a migration cojpletes, always review any resulting Group documents to ensure that they contain the expected members.
See Also
Click here
Migrating groups
Click here
Click here
Allowing the addition of empty groups to Notes
Click here
Click here
Adding users to a 'migration' group5
Click here
Click here
Importing users from*a foreign directory
Click here
l the documents under the category._
3. Choose Actions - Categorize.
4. Select the existing category name in the list to remove the highlight.x
Note
You can select or enter another category for the documents
See Also
Click here
Views, panes, and fojders
Click here
:2TMm
&Arial
When creating a new Notes group from a migrated group, you can specify the.name and type of the group, as well as provide an optional description of the group. You cannot modify this information if you are adding the migrating group to an existing Notes group.
57800521629238605U
Notes Group Name
This field displays the name that the migration tool will assign to an imported group. When creating a new Notes group from an imported group, you can retain the original name, or specify a new name. By default, imported groups retain their original names, which appear in the Notes Group Name field. To rename the imported group, enter a new name in this field.
You can edit the group name only if you are creating a new Notes group for a migrating group. By default, imported groups retain their original names. For example, if you import a cc:Mail group called
#adminsr
, a Notes group created from this group would also have the name G
#admins
You cannot edit this field if the group is an exis~ing Notes group, or if you clear the check box
Click here
"Create a new Notes group with the following settings."
Click here
57800521629238606
Group type
If you create a new Notes group for a migrating group, you can edit the Group Type. You can create any of the following types of Notes groups:
Mail only
Access Control list
Multi-purpose
Deny list only
By default, the migration tools create Multi-purpose groups. See
Click here
"Creating and modifying groups"
Click here
for information about how Notes uses each of these group types.
You cannot edit this field if the group is an existing Notes group, or if you clear the check box
Click here
"Create a new Notes group with the following settings."
Click here
57800521629238607
Desc~iption
This field displays an optional description of the imported group, which the migration tool adds to the Description field of the Notes Group document. By default, if the imported group has description information available, it appears in this field.
You can edit the description only if you are creating a new Notes group for a migrating group. You cannot edit this field if the group is an existing Notes group, or if you clear the check box
Click here
.Create a new Notes group with the following settings."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting Group Migration Options
Click here
Click here
Migrating groups
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
A group that is a member of another group,.is said to be
nested
within that group, and is considered to be a
nested group
. Groups may be nested hierarchically, with each nested group containing one or more additional nested groups. For example, the groups
#IS Managers
may have as a member the group
#admins
, which includes the group
#po admins
, which includes the member
#po backups
, and so forth.
You can only migrate a nested group nf you are migrating its parent group. Regardless of whether you add the main group, you can still add users in the nested groups.
There are two options related to migrating nested groups:
Click here
Add nested groups contained in this group and their members
Add nested groups contained in this group and their members check box
By default, when you migrate a group, the check box "Add nested groups contained in this group and their members" is selected and the migration tools add all members of a migrating group, including other nested group~ and their local users, to the "People/Groups to migrate list."
For example, if you are migrating a group
#IS Managers
, which includes the group
#admins
, which includes the group
#po admins
and you select the option "Add nested groups contained in this group and their members," all three groups
(#IS Managers
#admins
, and
#po admins
) and all their members are added to the."People/Groups to migrate list."
Clear the check box if you do not want to add nested groups or their users to the "People/Groups to migrate list."
This field is not available if you clear the "Add members of this group to the existing Notes group" check box or the
Click here
"Create a new Notes group with the following settings"
Click here
check box
129547792029239232
Add people contained in nested gro~ps as Notes users check box
Select this check box if you want to migrate local users in a group's nested groups, without migrating the parent group. By default, the check box is cleared.
After you click OK, the migration tool adds users in all of a group's nested groups to the "People/Groups to migrate list."
This field is not available if you select the "Add members of this group to the existing Notes group" check box or the
Click here
"Creatn a new Notes group with the following settings"
Click here
check box.
129547792029239233
Migrating groups with common members
In some situations, a user or group in a migrating group hierarchy may be a member of more than one group in the hierarchy. When migrating nested groups, the migration tools ignore duplicate occurrences of users or groups. Items are added to Notes only once.
See Also
Clicn here
Setting Group Migration Options
Click here
Click here
Migrating groups
Click here
&Arial
If you have selected multiple groups to import, you may want to use the same set of options for importing each group. Select this check box if you want the settings in the Group Migration Options dialog box -- create a Notes group, import nested groups, and so for~h -- to apply to all remaining groups currently selected for import, including any nested groups. The settings do not apply to groups that have already been processed, or to groups that you select later.
Caution
It is recommended that you not use the same settings when migrating groups to a combination of existing groups and new Notes groups. After you set this option, the migration tool does not display the Group Migration Options dialog box again as it continue~ processing any remaining selected groups, so you cannot specify how to create or add members to those groups. As a result, the migration tools will create any new groups using their original names, which may lead to the creation of duplicate Notes groups.
See Also
Click here
Setting Group Migration Options
Click here
Click here
Migrating groups
Click here
&Arial
From the Group Migration O~tions dialog box, you can Cancel the operation by clicking either of the following buttons:
Cancel
Cancel All
101776025629239365
Cancel
Click Cancel if you decide not to migrate the group specified in the Notes Group Name field. The migration tool skips the current group and its child groups, and proceeds to the next selected group. Neither the current group, nor any of its members are added to the "People/Groups to migrate list."
101776025629239366
Cancel All
Click Cancel All if you decide not to migrate either the group specified in the Notes Group Name field, any of its child groups, or any of the other currently selected groups. The migration tool closes the Group Migration Options dialog box and stops processing groups that remain to be processed among those currently selected. No items in the current group or its child groups are added to the "People/Groups to migrate list."
See Also
Click here
Setting Group Migration Options3
Click here
Click here
Migrating groups
Click here
&Arial
Before migrating users, consider creating a Notes group, called
MigratedUsers
, and adding everyone you migrate to this group during registration. Creating such a group provides you with an easy way of identifying migrated users later on, when sending out
Click here
upgrade notification messages
Click here
or other informntion related to the migration.
See Also
Click here
Creating and modifying groups
Click here
Click here
Migrating groups
Click here
Click here
Sending users an upgrade notification message
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
You can set options on the People and Groups Migration.dialog box to specify how information in the source directory is imported into the Domino Directory and Notes mail file. The options you set apply to all users imported from the current directory source during this session.
You can select a different set of options for each directory source you import from in the session.
The items available in the Migration Options list depend on the foreign directory source selected. The following import options are available:
Click here
Generate random passwords for users with no passwords
Click here
Click here
Overwrite existing passwords with random passwords
Click here
Click here
Add full name provided to the Notes person document
Click here
Click here
Allow addition of empty groups to Notes
Click here
Click here
Convert mail
Click here
Click here
Convert mail only
Click here
Click here
Add administrator to mail file access control list
Click here
See Also
Click here
Selecting people and groups to migrate
Click here
Click here
Settnng migration options for cc:Mail
Click here
Click here
Setting migration options for Microsoft Mail users
Click here
Click here
Setting migration options for Microsoft Exchange users
Click here
Click here
Setting migration options for Windows NT users
Click here
Click here
Setting options for importing users from.an LDIF file
Click here
Click here
Setting Group Migration Options
Click here
Click here
Importing users from a foreign directory
Click here
&Arial
For user registration to complete successfully, the password specified for the user must meet the minimum password quality requirements set in the registration preferences. If a user's password does not conform to the requirements, you must modify it before you can register the user.
See
Click here
"Understanding the password quality scale"
Click here
for more information about how Notes determines conformance to a specified password quality scale.
By default, most of the Domino migration tools automatically set the Notes password to a user's existing password. The migration tools for Windows NT, Novell GroupWise, and Netscape Messaging Server do not import a user's existing password. t
The migration tools provide the following nptions to automatically create passwords for migrating users who either do not have passwords, or for whom you prefer not to import existing passwords:
Click here
Generate random passwords for users with no passwords
Click here
Click here
Overwrite existing passwords with random passwords
Click here
Users for whom you create new Notes passwords can change their password using ~he Notes client. The password they create must conform to the quality scale set at registration.t
183993094429243437
Giving passwords to new users
To make it easy for you to give migrated users their new passwords the first time they log in to Notes, the Domino Administrator maintains a record of generated passwords. Password information for migrated users is stored in the database NTSynch45.nsf in the Notes Data directory.
You can also maintain a renord of generated user passwords by setting a registration option to keep successfully registered users in the queue. Keeping users in the registration queue after registration lets you automatically store password and other registration information for migrated users. After registration, you can select users in the queue and view their password information. y
Refer to
Click here
"Saving pending registrations in the registration queue"
Click here
for.information about how to keep users in the registration queue.
&Arial
The User name field of a Person document lists one or more full names -- as opposed to name components -- by which a user is known in Notes. For a registered user, the first name listed in this field, the primary Notes name, is a hierarchical name based on the certifier ID used to register the user, and is the name checked when authenticating a user's right to.access Domino resources. In addition to this primary name, the User name field can contain secondary entries, which serve as aliases for the user and can be used in addressing mail.
The migration tools import full names for use as secondary Notes names from the following fields in each source directory:
cc:Mail - User name
Microsoft Mail - Friendly, or display name
Microsoft Exchange - Display name
Windows NT - Full name
LDIF -.Distinguished name
If you migrate information for a user, but do not register the user, the imported full name may become the primary entry in the User name field.
See Also
Click here
Setting migration options
Click here
&Arial
Because imported groups may contain users who are not available for import, it is possible that the membership of a migrated group will differ from the original membership. This can occur, for example, with e-mail distribution lists, which can include entries for users from foreign messaging systems, such as Internet andresses. Because the migration tools cannot register users from outside the current directory, by default, these entries are omitted from Notes groups created from migrated groups.
Groups selected for import are considered empty if they do not contain any members who can be registered in Notes. By default, the migration tools do not import empty groups. A group may be empty because it contains no members -- for example, an obsolete group that was never removed from the address book; or the grnup may not contain any local users -- for example, an e-mail distribution list that lists only the Internet addresses of users on other mail systems.
Migrating a group whose members are not available -- and that would therefore, be empty -- results in an entry in the Domino Directory that serves no useful purpose. Set this option only if you intend to add users to any empty groups either during registration or after registration completes.
See Also
Click here
Setting migration optionsm
Click here
&Arial
The Domino migration tools for cc:Mail, Nicrosoft Mail, and Microsoft Exchange provide you with the option to convert existing mail files into Notes mail files. By default, this option is enabled. If you choose to convert mail, during the registration process, the migration tools automatically convert mail files on the old system to Notes mail files. p
Mail files are created on the server that is specified in your p
Click here
registration preferences
Click here
If the migration tool canno~ create a user's mail file for any reason - for example, if the specified mail server lacks sufficient disk space - the user remains unregistered and an error is logged.
Because mail conversion requires mail files to be created immediately, you cannot choose the option on the Mail pane of the Register Person dialog box to create mail files using a background process (adminp). An error message is displayed if you attempt to select this option.
Note
The nptions "Convert mail" and "Convert mail only" are mutually exclusive. An error message appears if you select one of these options and the other is already selected.d
See Also
Click here
Setting migration optionsr
Click here
Click here
Converting mail only
Click here
&Arial
The Domino migration tools for cc:Mail and Microsoft Mail provide the option to convert mail only. This option is not available in the migration tool for Microsnft Exchange. Select this option if you want to migrate additional mail messages for users who are already registered in Notes. By default, this option is not selected.
For the selected users, the migration tools migrate only those messages that were not previously migrated. Notes IDs are not created and the migration tools do not modify the users' Person documents.
For example, you have created a Notes account and mail file for Mark Richards, a cc:Mail user. Mark receives additnonal mail in his cc:Mail mail box, and you need to migrate these messages and folders to his existing Notes file, while preserving his Notes messages and folders. You can migrate Mark's new cc:Mail messages using the Convert Mail Only option.
You can use the "Convert Mail Only" option only if the users selected for import in the Available people/groups dialog box are already registered Notes users. Furthermore, if you use this option to convert additional mail for migrated cc:Mail users, the ~sers' cc:Mail names must exist as secondary entries in the User name field of their Notes Person documents.
When this option is enabled, the migration tool processes only mail information, regardless of the other migration options you have set.
Note
The options "Convert mail" and "Convert mail only" are mutually exclusive. An error message appears if you select one of these options and the other is already selected.
264276739229>73199
Access rights required to migrate mail to an existing mail file
To migrate mail to an existing mail file, you must have Manager access in the ACL for the file. However, by default, only the owner of the mail file has Manager access. When you first migrate users, consider whether you may need to migrate additional messages for these users later. If so, modify the default access rights that apply to the user's mail file. For information about how you can modify the default access rnghts when creating a mail file during migration, see "h
Click here
Adding an administrator to a mail file access control list."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting migration options
Click here
Click here
Converting mailf
Click here
&Arial
When you create a mail file for a user during migration, by default, your administrator ID is temporarily placed in the ACL of the new mail file and is assigned Manager access. After the migration completes and the migrated user is successfully registered in Notes, the administrator ID is then removnd from the ACL and replaced with the name of the mail file owner. At this point, only the mail file owner can open the mail file. i
Note
If you are migrating user mail boxes and choose to retain the default mail file ACL during migration, should the mail box conversion fail, the administrator ID remains in the ACL as Manager.
In some cases, you may need to convert additional messages for users after you migrate them to Notes and create their Notes mail.files. However, under the default mail file ACLs, you as the administrator, do not have the level of access needed, and must ask the owner to restore your name in the ACL.
To save time later, if you can anticipate needing to perform such a secondary migration, when you first select users to migrate, also select the migration option "Add administrator to mail file access control list" from this list on the People and Groups Migration dialog box. This option changes the default mail file ACL so ~hat the administrator retains Manager access to the mail file. The owner of the mail file also remains in the ACL with the default Manager access.
Note
This option adds the administrator ID to the ACL of every mail file you create during the migration process, regardless of whether any messages are migrated.
&Arial
If there are replicas of a database, use any of these methods to monitor replication daily.
Method
Description
Click here
Replication historyp
Click here
Records each successful replication session for a database. Useful for determining at a glance if a replncation is occurring.
Click here
Replication Events view of the log file (LOG.NSF)
Click here
Shows details about replication events between servers. Useful for determining the cause of replication failure and for verifying that the expected number of replication updates occurred.
Replication monitor
Notifies you when replication of a database ha~n't occurred within a specified time period. A server administrator creates replication monitors as a part of configuring the Event Monitor task.
Click here
Database Analysis tool
Click here
Lets you collect replication history, replication events from the log file, and other information specific to a database into a results database that you can analyze.
head title;Chead;Chead title>Chapter title;Dhead
In addition to ensuring that a database is replicating, you should routinely check for and
Click here
consolidate replication and save conflicts.B
Click here
See Also
Click here
Database maintenance
Click here
M(&2l
*pq9m-
` SXK
=PWcR
VRe%>
?~\vrmle
clSuT
Setting up the IMAP serviceMail
IMAP service\setting upContentsStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_IMAP_SERVERTopic1Setting up the IMAP serviceStepsH_THE_IMAP_SERVICE_OVER03 Administering the Domino System21 Setting up tke Domino IMAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up IMAP usersMail
IMAP users\setting upContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_IMAP_USERS_OVERTopic1Settink up IMAP usersOverviewH_THE_IMAP_SERVICE_OVER03 Administering the Domino System21 Setting up the Domino IMAP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
[`G&
Tools for mail monitoringMail
.AContentsOverviewH_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_MAIL_OVERTopic1Tools for mail monitoringOverviewH_MAIL_OVER_p
H_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_MAIL_OVER_MIDTOPIC_203349590429235177=<-%>Tracking mail messagesH_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_MAIL_OVER_MIDTOPIC_203349590429235178=How mail tracking worksH_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_MAIL_OVER_MIDTOPIC_203349590429235179=Generating mail usage reportsH_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_MAIL_OVER_MIDTOPIC_203349590429235180=Mail probes03 Administering the Domino Sy{tem22 Monitoring Mail
Print
pubnames_v_Mail_Users
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up mail monitoringMail
.AContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_MAIL_MONITORING[7287_OVERVIEWTopic1Setting up mail monitoringOverviewH_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_MAIL_OVER03 Administering the Domino System22 Monitoring Mail
Print
[`G&
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Tracking a mail messageMail
.AContentsStepsH_ISSUING_A_TRACKING_REQUEST_FROM_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_STEPSTopic1Tracking a mail messageStepsH_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_MAIL_OVER03 Administering the Domino System22 Monitoring Mail
PrintDIALOG 10410 554
[`G&
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Generating a mail usage reportMail
.AContentsStepsH_GENERATING_MAIL_USAGE_REPORTS_FROM_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_STEPSTopic1Generating a mail usage reportStepsH_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_MAIL_OVER03 Administering the Domino System22 Monitoring Mail
Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and DominoMail Migration
Migration\describedContentsOverviewH_OVERVIEW_OF_MIGRATING_USERS_TO_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_OVERTopic1Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and DominoOverviewH_MAIL_MIGRATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
Print
CN;David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Importing users from a foreign directoryMail Migration
Foreign directory source\importing users fromContentsOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_EXTERNAL_DIREKTORY_OVERVIEWTopic1Importing users from a foreign directoryOverviewH_OVERVIEW_OF_MIGRATING_USERS_TO_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating groupsMail Migration
Duplicate names\migrating groups withGroups\migrating duplicateGroups\nestedGroups\options for migratingImporting\groupsLocal users\migratingMigration\groupsNested groups\definedPeople/Groups to migrate list\adding groupsContentsOverviewH_IMPORTING_GROUPS_OVERTopic1Migrating groupsOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_EXTERNAL_DIRECTORY_OVERVIEW
H_IMPORTIKG_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_129547792029239231=Processing groups with duplicate names01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Backing up Domino informationMail Migration
cc:Mail migration\backing up Domino filesContentsDetailsH_BACKING_UP_DOMINO_INFORMATION_DETAILSTopic1Backing up Domino informationDetailsH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
H_TO_SAVE_PARAGRAPH_PROPERTIES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_135679264029218286=The [None] paragraph styleH_TO_SAVE_PARAGRAPH_PROPERTIES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_319016790429243802=The Headline, Bullet, and Basic para\
Migrating groups with duplicate namesMail Migration
Groups\avoiding duplication ofGroups\migrating users toContentsOverviewH_MIGRATING_GROUPS_WITH_THE_SAME_NAME_AS_EXISTING_NOTES_GROUPS_OVERTopic1Migrating groups rith duplicate namesOverviewH_IMPORTING_GROUPS_OVER
H_MIGRATING_GROUPS_WITH_THE_SAME_NAME_AS_EXISTING_NOTES_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_416249516829238568=Using an existing Notes group to migrate groups with duplicate namesH_MIGRATING_GROUPS_WITH_THE_SAME_NAME_AS_EXISTING_NOTES_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_416249516829238569=Creating a new group to migrate groups with duplicate namesH_MIGRATING_GROUPS_WITH_THE_SAME_NAME_AS_EXISTING_NOTES_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_77528412829239433=Avoiding the creation of duplicate Grbup documentsH_MIGRATING_GROUPS_WITH_THE_SAME_NAME_AS_EXISTING_NOTES_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_416249516829238570=Skipping migration for groups with duplicate names01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
list. (If
Setting Group Migration OptionsMail Migration
Group migration options\settingGroups\migration optionsMigration options\groupContentsOverviewDIALOG 2590 256H_SETTING_GROUP_MIGRATION_OPTIONS_OVERTopic1Setting Group Migration OptionsOverviewH_IMPORTING_GROUPS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying a name, group type, and description for migrated groupsMail Migration
Group names\specifyingGroup types\spbcifying during migrationGroups\renaming during migrationNaming conventions\for imported groupsNotes groups\specifying during migrationRenaming\groupsContentsOverviewH_SPECIFYING_A_NAME_GROUP_TYPE_AND_DESCRIPTION_FOR_MIGRATED_GROUPS_OVERTopic1Specifying a name, group type, and description for migrated groupsOverviewH_SETTING_GROUP_MIGRATION_OPTIONS_OVER
H_SPECIFYING_A_NAME_GROUP_TYPE_AND_DESCRIPTION_FOR_MIGRATED_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_57800521629238605=Notes Group NameH_SPECIFYING_A_NAME_GROUP_TYPE_ANDRDESCRIPTION_FOR_MIGRATED_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_57800521629238606=Group typeH_SPECIFYING_A_NAME_GROUP_TYPE_AND_DESCRIPTION_FOR_MIGRATED_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_57800521629238607=Description01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
H_MIGRATING_NESTED_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_129547792029239231=Add nested groups contained in this group and their membbrs check boxH_MIGRATING_NESTED_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_129547792029239232=Add people contained in nested groups as Notes users check boxH_MIGRATING_NESTED_GROUPS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_129547792029239233=Migrating groups with common members01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Why do
Use above settings for all currently selected or nested groups (don't prompt again)Mail Migration
.AContentsDetailsH_USE_ABOVE_SETTINGS_FOR_ALL_CURRENTLY_SELECTED_OR_NESTED_GROUPS_DON_T_PROMPT_AGAIN_DETAILSTopic1Use above settings for all currently selected or nested groups (don't prompt again)DetailsH_SETTING_GROUP_MIGRATION_OPTIOBS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ific categ
Canceling migration of a groupBail Migration
Groups\canceling migration ofContentsDetailsH_CANCELLING_MIGRATION_OF_A_GROUP_DETAILSTopic1Canceling migration of a groupDetailsH_IMPORTING_GROUPS_OVER
H_CANCELLING_MIGRATION_OF_A_GROUP_DETAILS_MIDTOPIC_101776025629239365=CancelH_CANCELLING_MIGRATION_OF_A_GROUP_DETAILS_MIDTOPIC_101776025629239366=Cancel All01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
w do I sto
Adding users to a 'migration' groupMail Migration
Groups\adding users during migrationContentsOverviewH_ADDING_USERS_TO_A_MIGRATION_GROUP_OVERTopic1Adding users to a 'migration' groupOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERR_FROM_AN_EXTERNAL_DIRECTORY_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Serting migration optionsMail Migration
Migration options\settingPeople and Groups Migration dialog box\optionsContentsOverviewDIALOG 2590 2590H_SETTING_IMPORT_OPTIONS_OVERTopic1Setting migration optionsOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_EXTERNAL_DIRECTORY_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
, or press CTRL+BREAK.
325318953629302560
What happened to Quick search?
Quick search has been re-named "Starts with."
Click here
back to top
Click here
380443980829238603
Generating random passwords during migrationMail Migration
Migration\passwords andPasswords\generating automaticallyPasswords\information aboutPasswords\migratingRegistration queue\maintaining passwords inContentsOverviewH_GENERATING_RANDOM_PASSWO_DS_DURING_MIGRATION_OVERTopic1Generating random passwords during migrationOverviewH_SETTING_IMPORT_OPTIONS_OVER
H_GENERATING_RANDOM_PASSWORDS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_183993094429243437=Giving passwords to new users
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
7`^///?
Adding full names provided to the Notes person documentMail Migration
Aliases\user names andHierarchical names\in Person documentsMigration\user names to Person documentsNotes names\hierarchicalPerson documents\migrating user names toUser names\in Person documentsContentsOverviewH_ADDING_FULL_NAMES_PROVIDED_TO_THE_NOTES_PERSON_DOCUMENT_OVERTopic1Adding full names provided to the Notes person documentOverviewH_SETTING_IMPORT_OPTIONS_OVER01 Mo
ing to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Allowing the addition of empty groups to NotesMail/Migration
Empty groups\migratingGroups, empty\migratingContentsOverviewH_ALLOWING_ADDITION_OF_EMPTY_GROUPS_TO_NOTES_OVERTopic1Allowing the addition of empty groups to NotesOverviewH_SETTING_IMPORT_OPTIONS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Converting mailMail Migration
Mail files\migratingContentsOverviewH_CONVERTING_MAIL_OVERTopic1Converting mailOverviewH_SETTING_IMPORT_OPTIONS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
9202923235
Converting mail onlyMail Migration
ACL\migrating mail filesAccess rights\migrating mailConvert Mail Only\migration optionMigration\mail onlyMigration, secondary\performingContentsOverviewH_CONVER_ING_MAIL_ONLY_OVERTopic1Converting mail onlyOverviewH_SETTING_IMPORT_OPTIONS_OVER
H_CONVERTING_MAIL_ONLY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_264276739229273199=Access rights required to migrate mail to an existing mail file01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
r '37739
Adding an administrator to a mail file access control listMail Migration
.AContentsDetailsH_ADDING_AN_ADMINISTRATOR_TO_MAIL_FILE_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_DETAILSTopic1Adding an administrator to a mail file access control listDetailsH_SETTING_IMPORT_OPTIONS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
screen
Registering users and migrating messaging dataMail Migration
Registration information\migratingRegistration\failureRegistration\migration andUsers\registering for migrationContentsOverviewH_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_MIGRATING_MESSAGING_DATA_OVERVIEWTopic1Registering users and migrating messagong dataOverviewH_OVERVIEW_OF_MIGRATING_USERS_TO_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_OVER
H_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_MIGRATING_MESSAGING_DATA_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_69305916829245193=Specifying where to register imported usersH_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_MIGRATING_MESSAGING_DATA_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_69305916829245194=Determining the reason for failed registrations01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Importing passwordsMail Migration
Passwords\importingContentsOverviewH_IMPORTING_PASSWORDS_OVERTopic1Importing passwordsOverviewH_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_MIGRATING_MESSAGING_DATA_OVERVIEW01/Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying advanced person registration option
Mail Migration
Migration options\userContentsOverviewH_SPECIFYING_ADVANCED_PERSON_REGISTRATION_OPTION_OVERTopic1Specifying advanced person registration optionsOverviewH_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_MIGRATING_MESSAGING_DATA_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
H_SETTING_REGISTRATION_DEFAULTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104482054429239587=Setting Administrative preferencesH_SETTING_REGISTRATION_DEFAULTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_104482054429239588=Defining default settings through user registration01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Saving pending registrations in the registration queueMail Migration
Pending registrations\saving information forRegistration queue\migration andRegistration\pendingContentsOverviewH_SAVING_INFORMATION_FOR_PENDING_REGISTRATIONS_OVERVIEWTopic1Saving pending registrations cn the registration queueOverviewH_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_MIGRATING_MESSAGING_DATA_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Applying registration settings to multiple usersMail Migration
.AContentsStepsH_SPECIFYING_REGISTRATION_SETTINGS_STEPSTopic1Applying registration settings to multiple usersStepsH_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_MIGRATING_MESSAGING_DATA_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating Notes mail filesMail Migration
Administration Process\creating mail files withDuplicate messages\migratingFolder names\maximum lengthFolders\migratingInbox folder\migratingMail files\creating for migrated usersMail files\quotasMail folders\maximum name lengthMessages, duplicate\migratingMigration\duplicate messagesNaming conventions\for foldersQuotas\mail fileSent folder\migratingSize\mail fileSubfolders\migratingContentsExamplesH_CREATING_NOTES_MAIL_FILES_STEPSTopic1Creating Notes mail filesExamplesH_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_MIGRATING_MESSAGING_DATA_OVERVIEW
H_SETTING_MAIL_DATABASE_QUOTAS_STEPS=Setting mail database quotasH_MIGRATING_MESSAGES_DUPLICATES_EX=Migrating duplicate messagesH_MIGRATING_FOLDERS_AND_SUBFOLDERSSOVERVIEW=Migrating folders and subfoldersH_SUBFOLDERS_IN_THE_INBOX_AND_SENT_FOLDERS_EX=Subfolders in the Inbox and Sent foldersH_MAXIMUM_LENGTH_FOR_FOLDER_NAMES_EX=Maximum length for folder namesH_MAXIMUM_LENGTH_FOR_SUBFOLDER_NAMES_EX=Maximum length for subfolder names01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Verifying that a migration was successfulMail Migration
Migration\verifyingContentsOverviewH_VERIFYING_THAT_A_MIGRATION_WAS_SUCCESSFUL_OVERTopic1Verifying that a migration was successfulOverviewH_OVERVIEW_OF_MIGRATING_USERS_TO_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domico Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating cc:Mail users Mail Migration
Domino migration toolsScc:Mailcc:Mail migration\adding users to NotesContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEWTopic1Migrating cc:Mail users OverviewH_MAIL_MIGRATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Supported cc:Mail versionsMail Migration
OR2 files\migratingOrganizer group scheduling files\migratingcc:Mail migration\Organizer filescc:Mail migration\filescc:Mail migration\versions supportedContentsOverviewH_SUPPORTED_CCMAIL_VERSIONS_OVERVIEWTopic1Supported cc:Mail versionsOverviewH_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Micrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ick here
Notes equivalents for migrated cc:Mail informationMail Migration
cc:Mail migration\Notes equivalects for migrated datacc:Mail migration\private mailing listsContentsOverviewH_CONVERTING_CC_MAIL_DATA_TO_NOTES_DATA_OVERTopic1Notes equivalents for migrated cc:Mail informationOverviewH_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
n how the d
Notes equivalents for migrated Organizer informationMail Migration
Organizer\Notes equivalents for migrated datacc:Mail migration\Notes equivalents for migrated datacc:Mail migration\Organizer filesContentsOverviewH_NOTES_EQUIVALENTS_FOR_MIGRATED_ORGANIZER_INFORMATION_OVERTopic1Notes equivalents for migrated Organizer informationOverviewH_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
H_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_50336339229231574=General administrative tasksH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_50336339229231575=Notes and Domino preparation tasksH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_50336339229231576=cc:Mail preparation tasks01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Estimating the size of a converted mail boxMail Migration
cc:Mail migration\disk space requiredContentsJetailsH_ESTIMATING_THE_SIZE_OF_A_CONVERTED_MAIL_BOX_DETAILSTopic1Estimating the size of a converted mail boxDetailsH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Preparing the directory for migrationMail Migration
Naming conventions\for migrated cc:Mail namesUser names\migrated cc:Mailcc:Mail CHKSTAT\account reporting withcc:Mail migration\name conventionscc:Mail migration\removing inactive accountsContentsOverviewH_CLEANING_UP_THE_POST_OFFICE_DIRECTORY_OVERTopic1Preparing the directory for migrationOverviewH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERZIEW
H_CLEANING_UP_THE_POST_OFFICE_DIRECTORY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_147488246429234192=Removing inactive accounts from the post office directoryH_CLEANING_UP_THE_POST_OFFICE_DIRECTORY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_120883081629234380=Understanding how the migration tool processes cc:Mail names01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
g once in t
Understanding how the migration tool parses cc:Mail name formatsMail Migration
Naming conventions\for migrated cc:Mail namesNotes names\converting cc:Mail names tocc:Mail migration\Notes equivalents for migrated datacc:Mail migration\name conventionsContentsDetailsH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_ZHE_MIGRATION_TOOL_PARSES_CC_MAIL_NAME_FORMATS_DETAILSTopic1Understanding how the migration tool parses cc:Mail name formatsDetailsH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
@Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
lick in t
Checking names for invalid charactersMail Migration
Notes names\valid charactersUser names\invalid characterscc:Mail migration\name formatsContentsDetailsH_CHECKING_NAMES_FOR_INVALID_CHARACTERS_DETAILSTopic1Checking names for invalid charactersDetailsH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
@Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&] ?4l/y
Updating existing Person documentsMail Migration
Duplicate Person documents\updatingPerson documents\updating during migrationcc:Jail MTA\migration requirements forcc:Mail migration\MTA requirementscc:Mail migration\Person documentscc:Mail migration\adding names to Person documentsContentsDetailsH_UPDATING_EXISTING_PERSON_DOCUMENTS_DETAILSTopic1Updating existing Person documentsDetailsH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW
H_UPDATING_EXISTING_PERSON_DOCUMENTS_DETAILS_MIDTOPIC_178966710429237977=Adding the cc:Mail name to the Notes Person documentH_UPDATING_EXISTING_PERSON_DOCUMENTS_DETAILS_MIDTOPIC_423654070429236377=Supprjssing prompts to update matching Person documents01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
@Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Taking the posz office offlineMail Migration
CCPODOWN file\deleting before cc:Mail migrationMEAPI. See Mail Engine APIMail Engine API\migration andcc:Mail migration\post officeContentsOverviewH_TAKING_THE_POST_OFFICE_OFF_LINE_OVERTopic1Taking the post office offlineOverviewH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Backing up the cc:Mail post officeMail Migration
cc:Mail MTA\migration requirements forcc:Mail migration\MTA requirementscc:Mail migration\post officeContentsOverviewH_BACKING_UP_THE_POST_OFFICE_OVERTopic1Backing up the cc:Mail post officeJverviewH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
You need to complete a number of tasks to prepare for a successful migration:
Determine the order in which to migrate post offices. This should be your migration schedule.
Decide which types of cc:Mail and Organizer data to migrate. Migrating certain types of data, such as bulletin board{ and Organizer information may require additional planning and preparation. See
Click here
"Specifying cc:Mail conversion settings"
Click here
for information about the types of messaging data you can migrate.
Verify that you have purchased the appropriate Notes client license for each cc:Mail user you are migrating.
Click here
Estimate the amount of disk space required to migrate cc:Mail mail boxes.
Click here
Decide how your cc:Mail gateways will map to Notes domains for routing mail to external mail systems.
50336339229231575
Notes and Domino preparation tasks
On your administrative workstation, install the Notes Release 5 Domino Administrator client, and optional cc:Mail Administrative migration tool. You must perform a custom installation to install the migration tools component.
From the administrative workstatiok, map a drive to the location of the cc:Mail post office you are migrating users from.
Click here
Back up Domino information.
Click here
From the administrative workstation, log in to Notes with a Notes ID that has "Create database access" on the Mail server.
Verify that you have access the certifier IDs and passwords for the Domino organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
Veriky that you have Editor, Designer, or Manager access rights to the Domino Directory on the Registration Server.
If you anticipate migrating additional mail for users after registration, configure the mail file ACLs to ensure that you retain the appropriate access rights. Use the migration option
Click here
Adding an administrator to mail file access control list
Click here
(Optional)
Click here
Set registration p{eferences.
Click here
(Optional)
Click here
Create a Notes group that you can add migrated users to.
Click here
On the administrative workstation, close all applications, except for Notes, and close any Notes databases.
50336339229231576
cc:Mail preparation tasks
Clean up the cc:Mail message store. Instruct users to archive or delete mail that they no longer need. Consider kimiting the amount of mail that users can migrate.
Click here
Clean up the post office directory
Click here
Familiarize yourself with
Click here
how the migration tool parses cc:Mail names formats
Click here
. Certain name formats and characters may not be converted correctly during migration. To ensure that all migrated users are created with appropriate Notes names, it may be necessary to kdit certain names either before or after migration.
Make sure all users being migrated have assigned passwords. If the cc:Mail password is blank, null, or zero-length, the migration of the user will fail. If you have a cc:Mail user with this type of password, change it to a non-blank password in cc:Mail.
Note
The cc:Mail migration tool does not support the selection in the Migration Options box "Generate random passwords for users with no pas{words." f
Click here
Take the post office offline to make it inaccessible to users.
Click here
Send any in-transit cc:Mail messages. Post office mail queues are not migrated. Clear all Post Office Message Queues and Router Express calls with Send Only. Run Link products and run the Organizer scheduling agent.i
Click here
Back up the cc:Mail post office being migrated.
Click here
+ This backup that preserves the state the post office was in before you run the maintenance utilities.a
Verify the integrity of your post office by running regular maintenance. See the t
Lotus cc:Mail Administrator's Guide
for more information about using the cc:Mail maintenance tools.
(Optional) Delete unnecessary messages in the cc:Mail Message Log, Trash, and so forth, using the CHKSTAT command for DB6 or MSGMGR for DB8. After deleting messages, run RECLAIM to rkcover disk space from these deleted messages.
Create a second backup of the post office, that preserves the state the post office was in after you ran the maintenance utilities.
If you are also migrating Organizer information for users, see
Click here
"Preparing to upgrade Organizer information."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate Organizer information
Click here
Click here
Migrating Organizer information
Click here
Click here
Ensuring compatibility with the cc:Mail MTA
Click here
&Arial
There is no formula for calculating exactly how much disk space a mail box will require after it is converted to a Notes mail file. However, you can estimate the size of a converted mail box, by+running a test migration, and comparing the size of a cc:Mail mail box with the size of the resulting Notes mail file. cc:Mail provides the following commands for measuring the size of mail boxes in a post office: y
For a DB6 office
chkstat /N
po_name
/P
po_password
po_path
/msgs/all >output.txti
where
po_name
is the name of the post office;
po_password
is the post office {assword;
po_path
is the network path to the directory where the post office is located; and s
output.txt
is the name of the file where you want the report saved.
The report indicates the total number of bytes for each mail box in the post office.
For a DB8 post office
msgmgr /N
po_name
/P
po_passwordg
/D
po_path
/U "username"
where
po_name
is the kame of the post office;
po_password
is the post office password;
po_path
is the network path to the directory where the post office is located; and _
username
is the name of the user whose mail box you are measuring.
The command reports the total size in kilobytes for the specified mail box.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
&Arial
The cc:Mail to Notes migration tool converts user names in the cc:Mail directory to Person Documents in the Domino Directory. Before migration, prepare for directory conversion as follows to help minimize processing time and errors:
Click here
Remove inactive accounts from the post office directory
Removing inactive accounts from the post office directory
For each cc:Mail post office being migrated to Notes, review the contents of the cc:Mail directory and verify each account. Identify and make a list of inactive accounts, for exampke, local accounts that were created, but never used, or accounts for employees who have left the company. Later, when you select users to import to Notes, refer to this list to avoid processing invalid accounts.
Generate a report of cc:Mail account usage as follows: e
For a DB6 post officep
CHKSTAT
po_name po_pass po_path
STATUSERS/N >output.txt
For a DB8 post office
DIRSTAT /N
po[name)
/P
po_pass
/D
po_path
/DL /LU /LOG output.txt
where
po_name
is the name of the post office;
po_pass
is the post office password; g
po_path
is the network path to the directory where the post office is located; and
output.txt u
is the name of the file where you want the report saved.
120883081629234380
Understanding how the migration tool processes cc:Mail+names
When preparing to import names from the post office directory, keep in mind how the migration tool processes cc:Mail directory entries to create Notes names and Person documents. You should be familiar with the following naming issues:g
Click here
Differences between the characters allowed in cc:Mail and Notes names
Click here
Click here
How the migration tool parses cc:Mail names to create Note{ names
Click here
Click here
Updating existing Person documents
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
&] ?4l/y
&Arial
Unlike Notes names, which are made up of First name, Last name, and Middle initial components, the cc:Mail directory stores kames as a single character string, including commas and spaces. The name format used depends on the conventions established within the organization. For example, the same user could be listed in the cc:Mail directory as either
Susan Salani o
or a
Salani, Susand
In generating a Notes names from an imported cc:Mail name, the migration tool first determines the format of the name, and then parses the name into Notes name components. The Middle initial field in the [erson document accomodates a maximum of two characters; longer names are truncated. c
If you do not want to accept a name generated by the migration tool, you can edit the name after you add the user to the Registration queue.
The following table shows how the migration tool generates Notes names from common cc:Mail name formats:
u :'u
Format of cc:Mail name
Format of cc:Mail name
Resulting Notes name componentsz
Resulting Notes name components
Description
Exampler
Components
Example
Single name
ssklani
Last name
First name
Middle initial
u :'u
ssalani
<blank>
<blank>
First Last
Susan Salani
Last name
First name
Middle initikl
Salani
Susan
<blank>
First Last1 Last2
Craig Van Horn
Last name
First name
Middle initial
Van Horn
Craig
<blank>
First1 First2 Last
Jo Anne Lordan
Last namew
Firs{ name
Middle initial
Anne Lordant
<blank>
First Middle Last
Cheryl Lynn Lordan
Last namer
First name
Middle initial
Lynn Lordan
Cheryl
<blank>
First Middle initial Last R
Judy J. Kaplan
Last name
First name
Middle initial
Kaplan
Judy
First1 First2 Middle initial Last
Jo Anne B. Lordan
Last namet
First name
Middle initial
Lordan
Jo Anne
First Middle initial Last1+Last2
Craig R. Van Horn
Last namen
First name
Middle initial
Van Horn
Craig
Last, First
Salani, Susann
Last name
First name
Middle initial
Salani
Susan
<blank>
Last1 Last2, First
Van Horn, Craig
Last name
First name
Middle initial
Van Horn
Craig
<blank>e
Last, First Middle
Malone, Derek Kevin
Last namen
First name
Middle initial
Malone
Derek
Last, First Middle initial
Rutherford, Robin R.
Last name
First name
Middle initial
Rutherford
Robin
Last1 Last2, First1 First2 Middle initials
Van Horn, Jo Ann B.
Last name
First name
Mikdle initial
Van Horn
Jo Ann
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
&Arial
The only characters supported by Notes for registered user names are: letters (including those with accents and other diacritical marks from the ISO Latin1 character set), numbers, ampersand, apostrophe, hyphen, period, space, and underscore. A cc:Mail name may contain charac{ers that are not valid for use in a Notes name. If you try to register a cc:Mail user whose name contains other characters, the registration process generates an error.
Note
These character restrictions apply only to the primary names for registered Notes users. Notes permits the use of invalid characters in the names in unregistered Person documents, such as those that the cc:Mail MTA adds to the Domino Directory, as well as in secondary user names.
Although you can remove invalid characters by editing names in the registration queue after you import the cc:Mail directory, you may want to edit names before migration, using the administrative tool for your cc:Mail post office.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
&] ?4l/y
&Arial
In some cases, for instance, in environments where the cc:Mail MTA passes mail between ck:Mail and Notes, users being migrated from cc:Mail may already have Person documents in the Domino Directory. The directory synchronization component of the MTA adds an unregistered Person document to the Domino Directory for each user in the cc:Mail directory. 1
When migrating users, it is recommended that you update existing Person documents, rather than create new ones. Creating multiple Person documents for a user can result in confusion and security problems. If you inadvertently create a+second Person document for a user, delete one of the documents. O
When you attempt to register a user, the registration process searches the Domino Directory to find a Person document that matches the one the migration tool created for the migrating user. Matches are based on entries in the user name field of the Person document. The registration process does not look for matching names in the short name field or the name component fields.
For a registered Notes user, the primary+entry in the User name field is the Notes hierarchical name, which specifies the organization and organizational unit (OU) that a user belongs to. For an unregistered person, such as the directory listings created by the cc:Mail MTA, the Person document does not contain a hierarchical name. i
Whenever you migrate cc:Mail users, the migration tool automatically adds a hierarchical name to the Person document. The registration process generates this hierarchical name by
Click here
parsing the cc:Mail name into Notes name components
Click here
and appending OU information from the certifier ID used during registration. If you edit the Notes name components in the Register Person dialog box, Notes uses the modified name components to create the hierarchical name.
178966710429237977
Adding the cc:Mail name to the Notes Person document
When migrating users from a cc:Mail MTA environment, you must select the follo{ing option in the Migration Options list of the People and Groups Migration dialog box:
Add cc:Mail name to Notes person document (required for cc:MTA)
This option, which is selected by default, add a user's cc:Mail name as a secondary entry in the user name field of the Notes Person document. As a result, the migration tool can find existing Person documents created by the MTA that use this name. If the cc:Mail name of the migrating user matches the user name in a single documknt in the Domino Directory, the migration tool prompts you to update that document.
If more than one matching document is found, the registration fails, and the user remains in the registration queue. Review the matching documents in the Domino Directory and modify names for the existing users or the new user to eliminate duplication. For example, you may need to add middle initials to the names to aid in distinguishing between users.
423654070429236377
Suppresskng prompts to update matching Person documents
By default, if the registration process finds a Person document in the Domino Directory that matches one generated for a migrating user, it prompts you to update or skip the registration. Follow this procedure to suppress these prompts and automatically update or skip matching documents:
1. When you are ready to register users, click Options on the Register Person dialog box.
2. In the Advanced Person Registration O{tions dialog box, select "Don't prompt for a duplicate person."
3. From the drop-down box, select "Update the existing address book entry."
See Also
Click here
Setting migration options for cc:Mail
Click here
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Ensuring compatibility with the cc:Mail MTA
Click here
&Arial
To ensure that the post office remains inactive while you perform the cc:Mail migration, take the post office offline by changing the directory name and revoking users' rights to the directory.
Do not shut down the post office. The migration tool uses the Mail Engine API (MEAPI) to communicate with the post office. If the post office is shut down, MEAPI cannot access it and the migration will fail.s
If a post office is shut down, the file CCPODOWN is created wi{hin the directory containing the post office data. Delete the CCPODOWN file, if it exists.y
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
&Arial
During migration, the cc:Mail to Notes migration tool may modify post office data when:
Migrating Organizer information
Using the cc:Mail MTA to provide coexistence between cc:Mail and Notes
In either of these situations, it is recommended that you back up the post office bekore you begin the migration. Having a backup lets you safely restore the post office to its original state if you encounter errors during the migration.o
It is recommended that you back up the entire post office directory.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
&Arial
Before you migrate cc:Mail users, it is recommended that you back up the following Domino information:
NAMES.NSF
DESKTOP.DSK
NOTES.INK
*.ID files
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
&Arial
You can specify a default and maximum number of documents to display as a result of performing a search on a database. Users can specify the number of documents for a search query to return using the SearchMax parameter with the SearchSite and SearchView commands.
Change these options to prevent users from overloading server resources with search results.
The search options appear on the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab of tke Server document. This setting affects all databases on the server.V
Field
Enter
Defaul{ search result limit
The number of documents to display when users do not specify the SearchMax parameter in the URL.
Enter 0 if you do not want to limit the number of documents displayed. The default is 250.
Maximum search result limit
The maximum number of documents to display when the user specifies the SearchMax parameter+in a URL.
Enter 0 if you do not want to limit the number of documents displayed. The default is 1000.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing Web server display
Click here
names in the same column. Subcategory names don't appear in the Categorize dialog box.
+ 1. Select the document you want to categorize.
2. Choose Actions - Categorize.
3. In the "New categories" box, type a category name, a backslash (\), and a subcategory name, for example:
Sales planning\Trade shows
37089952029209008
Notes
You can have up to 32 levels of main categories and subcategories.
You can enter additional levels of subcategories separated by backslashes, for example:
Sales planning\Trade shows\Boston\July\Week 2G
See Also
Click here
Views, panes, and folders
Click here
:2TMm
&Arial
When migrating mailboxes for cc:Mail users, you have the option to also co`vert their Lotus Organizer 2.x Group Scheduling information (OR2 files) into Notes data. By default, this option is enabled, and Organizer information will be migrated, if it exists and your workstation is connected to the appropriate Organizer data directories.
If you select the option to migrate Organizer information, the migration tool converts information from the available OR2 files of all selected cc:Mail users. If you want to migrate Organizer information for only a subset of users in phe post office, you must migrate users in multiple sessions, migrating users whose Organizer data you want to migrate in one session, and users whose Organizer data you do not want to migrate during a later session.
Organizer information is migrated to locations in the Notes mail file, Personal Journal database, and Personal Name and Address Book. Some Organizer data is not migrated; the migration tool only reproduces the Organizer views and documents that have appropriate equivalents in Notes
Note
The cc:Mail to Notes migration tool migrates data from Organizer 2.x for cc:Mail for Windows only; it does not migrate data for standalone OR2 files, Notes Calendaring and Scheduling versions of OR2 files, or the Organizer PIM version (all other .ORx files). Also, the migration tool does not support the migration of Organizer information from a Japanese-language post office.
An end-user migration tool for moving Organizer OR2 standalone and Organizer PIM dat` to Notes is available as an optional installation component of the Notes Release 5 client.
During the migration, Organizer creates temporary Views and internal notes in the Notes mail file, and Organizer group scheduling information from cc:Mail is temporarily propagated to the Comments field of the Notes user's Person document. After the migration completes, these items are deleted.
Errors encountered during the migration are recorded in the Notes Log (LOG.NSF) of the computep running the Domino Administrator.
After you migrate a user's OR2 file, the user can no longer open the file in Organizer 2.x. Also, after a successful migration, other users can no longer view the Organizer free-time schedules for migrated users or send scheduling messages to the user's Organizer Agent. However, migrated users can use e-mail to schedule and respond to invitations if you configure automatic forwarding from their old cc:Mail accounts to their new Notes mail accounts.
415543744029225736
Determining the character set (code page) for migrating Organizer data
When migrating Organizer data, the cc:Mail to Notes migration tool uses the character set (code page) that you specify for migrating data from the cc:Mail post office. You select the code page when specifying conversion settings in the cc:Mail Upgrade Advanced Settings dialog box.:
See
Click here
"Specifying the code page to use for converting cc:Mail `ata"
Click here
for more information about setting the code page when migrating cc:Mail data.
89888393629236785
Migrating multiple sections of one typeO
The cc:Mail to Notes migration tool merges multiple Organizer sections of a given type into a single Notes equivalent. For example, if the user has more than one To Do section in Organizer, the migration tool combines them into a single Notes To Do list. Similarly, multiple instances of Ad`ress, Anniversary, Calendar, Calls, Notepad, and Planner sections are merged into a single Notes equivalent.
385100544029239611
Supplying a password when migrating Organizer data
Notes requires you to authenticate a process before it runs. Because the Organizer migration is a separate process, before you can complete an Organizer migration and register users, you must supply a Notes password. The migration tool prompts you for the password when it is ready to reg`ster the first cc:Mail user for whom you selected the option "Convert Organizer .OR2 scheduling files to Notes." You are prompted for the password only once during the session.F
Since users are registered in the order in which you added them to the registration queue, if there is Organizer data to migrate for those users who are at the head of the registration queue, the migration tool prompts you for the password immediately after you click the Registration button. However, if the first block of users being registered does not include an Organizer migration, the password prompt appears later. If you are not available to enter the password, the migration process stops until you enter the password.
When migrating Organizer data, it is recommended that you add the Organizer users to the registration queue before any other users.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Organizer Address and Notepad sections
Click here
Click here
Migrating Organizer Calls sections
Click here
Click here
Migrating Organizer category information
Click here
Click here
Migrating Organizer meeting information
Click here
Click here
Preparing to migrate Organizer information
Click here
F_}ie
aX*a7
&Arial
In Organizer, a user can assign multiple categories to entries in the Address, Calendar, Calls, Notepad, or To Do sections. However, Notes only supports single categories. As a result, the migration tool assigns only the first category listed for an Organizer entry to the resulting Notes entry.
Notes Journal entries do not have a field for displaying category information. Users can view migrated category information by opening the document properties for the journal entry.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Organizer information
Click here
aX*a7
&Arial
Scheduled meetings in a user's Calendar section are converted to personal appointments in a the user's Notes Calendar. Status information, and information about the meeting Chair and Attendees are migrated to the Detailed description field of the Appointment document. The information migrated to this field depends on whether the user is the meeting Chair or a meeting Attendee. For a meeting Chair, the complete list of attendees is migrated. For an Attendee, the description contains the name of the C`air only; the list of other attendees is not migrated. Other meeting information is not migrated.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Organizer information
Click here
&Arial
Entries in the Organizer Calls sections are migrated to tasks in the Notes Personal To Do view. The cc:Mail to Notes migration tool preserves the major data items of a Call, placing them in equivalent fields of the task entry, or in the Details field. Call fields that do not have appropriate equivalents in Notes may not be migrated.
The following table shows the mapping between `ields in an Organizer Calls section and a Notes To Do entry.f
Information in these fields in
the Organizer Calls section
Is migrated to these fields in
a Notes To Do entry
First name, last name
Title, Details
Company
Details
Phone number (Country code, area code, and number)
Details
Extension
Details
Status
Details
Notes
Details
Date
Start/Due*
Categories
Categories**
Completed
Status: Completed***
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* For calls that are marked as completed, the date of the call is also migrated to the Due value in the Notes To Do task.
** In Organizer, a user may assign multiple categories to a call. For example, the Categories field of a call can contain the values "Follow up" and the category "Clients." When you migrate the call, the Categories field of the Notes To Do task displays only the first of these values.O
*** Completed Calls are migrated to Notes To D` tasks with the status Completed. Although the Notes Personal To Do task document does not display the completion time of the call, this information is available in the field COMPLETEDDATETIME in the Document Properties for the task.
Other information about a call is not migrated.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Organizer information
Click here
&Arial
Organizer Address and Notepad sections are migrated to the Personal Address Book (PAB) and Personal Journal databapes, respectively, on a user's Notes workstation. Multiple Address sections are migrated to a single PAB. Similarly, multiple Notepad sections are migrated to a single Personal Journal.
Pages in an Organizer Notepad section can contain graphics as well as text. Graphics are migrated as file attachments embedded within the Personal Journal database mailed to the user. The ASCII text in the Notepad section is written to the body of the Personal Journal as rich text. a
As with other `nformation in a Notepad page, graphics are migrated only if the user created them from the OR2 file. Information linked from external files, such as included sections and shared DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) information, is not migrated. Graphics created using copy and paste are not migrated, since their content is not stored within the file.
The administrative workstation running the migration tool cannot write directly to a user's Notes client. To provide users with the information migrated fpom Organizer, the migration tool places a message in the Notes Inbox, to which the Personal Address Book and Personal Journal containing the migrated Organizer information are attached. The message explains that the migrated Organizer information is attached and provides instructions for detaching the files, and adding the information to the existing Personal Address Book and Personal Journal databases.
Users who have information to migrate from one of the sections, but not the other, receive two messages: one for the section that was migrated, and another for the other section, explaining that there was no information to migrate. Users who do not have Address or Notepad sections to migrate do not receive either message.h
You can open the files containing the text of these messages in any text editor and modify them to provide users with information that is specific to your environment. The files for each message reside in the Notes Data directory, and are as follows:
@ddress section migrated message -- OR2ADDR.TXT
Notepad section migrated message -- ORGNPN.TXT
No Address section migrated -- OR2NOADD.TXT
No Notepad section migrated -- ORGNOPN.TXT.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Organizer information
Click here
&Arial
If you are migrating Organizer data for the cc:Mail users being moved to Notes, perform the following ad`itional tasks:
Map network drives to directories where users' Organizer (.OR2 files) are stored.
Disconnect Organizer users from the directory where the Organizer data files (*.OR2) reside.
Verify that you have full access rights to the file server directories containing the OR2 files and at least Read access to Organizer OR2 files to be migrated.
Verify that you have Editor or higher access to the Notes mail files that will contain the migrated Organiper information.
Turn off all Organizer scheduling agents.
Verify that you have at sufficient disk space to migrate the Organizer information. There must be 2MB of free disk space on the target Domino server for each 1MB of OR2 file you migrate.
Click here
Instruct Organizer users to perform preparation tasks
Click here
that will assist in a faster migration.
Compact Organizer data files to be migrated, using v`rsion 2.11 or greater of the Organizer administration program.
Refer to the
Organizer 2.11 Administrator's Guide
for information about how to compact files.
See Also
Click here
Connecting to the Organizer data directories
Click here
Click here
Changes made to a user's cc:Mail directory entry when migrating Organizer information
Click here
Click here
Preparing Organizer users for migration6
Click here
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Migrating Organizer information
Click here
&Arial
Organizer OR2 files are typically stored separately from a user's cc:Mail mail box. To enable the migration tool to correctlp locate the OR2 files and migrate Organizer information, you need to map drives on the administrative workstation to the Organizer data directories.
Note
Although the migration tool can only migrate OR2 files for Windows versions of Organizer for cc:Mail, OR2 files can be migrated from any location that the administrative workstation is connected to, regardless of the operating system.
See Also
Click here
Prep`ring to migrate Organizer information
Click here
&Arial
After you migrate a cc:Mail user's Organizer information, the cc:Mail to Notes migration tool modifies Organizer information in the Comments field of the user's cc:Mail directory entry as follows:
Changes the 02 keyword, which identifies the Organizer Calendar Path, to 92
Changes the 04 keyword, which identifies the Organizer Agent Name, to 94
These changes enable you to perform subsequent migrations to convert a user's remaining Organiper information, while preventing other Organizer users from viewing migrated users' free-time schedules or sending scheduling messages to these users' Organizer Agents. The migration tool interprets the modified Comments information and correctly migrates additional Organizer data.h
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate Organizer information
Click here
&Arial
In addition to the administrative tasks you perform before migrating from Organizer, end-users must complete the folloping tasks:
Record the names of any included sections
Process pending meeting notices
Delete data that does not need to be migrated
Archive data to be migrated
233167724829229963
Recording information about included sections
The cc:Mail to Notes migration tool does not migrate included sections. By recording the names of any included sections, users can create links between the migrated documents in Notes.
233167724829229964
Processing meeting notices
The cc:Mail to Notes migration tool does not migrate meeting invitations that have not been acted upon. Users need to process any pending meeting notices they want migrated.
233167724829229965
Removing data that does not need to be migrated
Encourage users to minimize the amount of data that needs to be migrated by having them clear entries or remove sections they do not need `igrated.
350829923229239409
Archiving data to be migrated
Migrating Organizer data requires a considerable amount of time. You can improve migration performance by having users prepare for migration by archiving and compacting their Organizer sections to reduce the size of their OR2 files. Smaller Organizer files migrate faster and result in smaller Notes mail, Personal Journal, and Personal Address Book databases.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate cc:Mail users
Click here
&Arial
The cc:Mail post office directory contains information for all cc:Mail users who have mailboxes in that post office. Notes uses the information extracted from the post office directory to configure migrated users for registration.
To import the cc:Mail post office directory, you must:
Click here
Connect to the cc:Mail post office
Click here
Click here
Import users and groups
Click here
After completing these tasks, you will be ready to
Click here
register the imported users in Notesm
Click here
&Arial
To import users to migrate, you first need to locate the post office where users have their mail boxes, and log in to it.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People and Groups tab.
2.
From the Tools pane, click People - Register.
3. When prompted, enter your certifier ID password and click OK.
4. From the Basics pane of the Register Person -- New Entry dialog box, specify a registration server if necessary, by clicking Registration Server and selecting the server that registers new users. Click OK.
5. Click Migrate People.
6. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, select cc:Mail Users from the Foreign directory sour`e list.
7. Complete the following information in the cc:Mail Post Office Information dialog box:
Post office name -- name of the cc:Mail post office being migrated
Post office path -- the drive letter and directory path that point to the post office
Post office password
Note
You must have a drive mapped to the post office location.
8. Click OK. The post office name, path, and password ar` verified. If any of the values is incorrect, an error message is displayed.
The Available people/groups box displays the contents of the post office directory. You are now ready to
Click here
import users from the post office
Click here
into the Notes registration queue.
See Also
Click here
Importing the cc:Mail post office directory
Click here
&Arial
After the Available people/groups box displays the contents of the cc:Mail post office directory, select users to import and migration options that determine the cc:Mail data to migrate.
1. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, enable options by
Click here
selecting items in the Migration Options box
Click here
. The options you select apply to all cc:Mail users imported during this s`ssion.
2. Click Advanced to open a dialog box that lets you
Click here
specify advanced upgrade settings
Click here
for migrating people from cc:Mail.
3. Click Done when you finish specifying these settings.
4. From the Available people/groups box, select users and
Click here
groups
Click here
to migrate and click Add.
5. Click Migrate to place the select`d users in the registration queue, and click OK to close the message indicating the status and number of users queued for registration.
If you are migrating Organizer information, you are prompted to confirm that you have established the necessary network connections to directories where users' Organizer (OR2 files) are stored.
6. Click Done. The people queued for registration now appear in the Registration status box. You are now ready to
Click here
regist`r users
Click here
See Also
Click here
Importing cc:Mail Mobile users
Click here
Click here
Importing the cc:Mail post office directory
Click here
&Arial
The cc:Mail post office directory includes the names o` cc:Mail Mobile users (users designated by an uppercase " R ") for whom the post office serves as the home post office. Mobile users can also be imported to the Notes registration queue, but the migration tool does not support direct migration of cc:Mail Mobile post offices and user mailboxes. After registration, mobile users can migrate the contents of their own mailboxes by archiving their messages and then running the cc:Mail to Notes upgrade wizard to migrate archives. a
Refer to
Click here
"Migrating Personal Mail Data"
Click here
for information about using the cc:Mail to Notes upgrade wizard to migrate personal mail data.
See Also
Click here
Importing the cc:Mail post office directory
Click here
&Arial
When you are ready to import users, you can set options to specify how the migration tool uses information from the cc:Mail post office to create Notes users. You can specify two types of migration settings:
Click here
Migration options
Click here
-- determine how the migration tool creates a user in Notes from information imported from cc:Mail. The migration options available are similar for each of the migration tools.
Click here
Advanced upgrade settings
Click here
-- let you specify additional settings affecting conversion and coexistence between cc:Mail and Notes.
See Also
Click here
Importing the cc:Mail post office directory
Click here
&Arial
In addition to the migration options set on the People and Groups Migration dialog box, the migration tools provides other options you can set to control the process of migrating cc:Mail users. The settings you select apply to all users you import from the cc:Mail post office during this session. You can spec`fy the following types of cc:Mail upgrade settings:
Click here
Conversion settings
Click here
Click here
Gateway settings
Click here
Click here
Other settings
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing cc:Mail migration settings
Click here
ssage.
&Arial
`WUp5
&Arial
The Conversion Settings pane of the cc:Mail Upgrade Advanced Settings dialog box lets you specify which information to migrate from the cc:Mail post office. By default, all of the options, except "Convert Bulletin Boards to Notes discussion database" are enabled.
1.
Click here
Import a cc:Mail directory
Click here
so that its contents appear in the Available |eople/groups box.
2. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, click Advanced.d
3. From the cc:Mail Upgrade Advanced Settings dialog box, click Conversion Settings.
4. Specify the options to use and, if necessary, for a DB6 post office,
Click here
set the code pageC
Click here
to use when migrating the post office.
The code page defaults to the current language version of the post office.
The following options are available. By default, the first three options are enabled (check boxes selected):
Click here
Mail private mailing lists/R8 address books as Notes attachments
Click here
Click here
Convert Organizer .OR2 scheduling files to Notes
Click here
Click here
Convert alias entries
Click here
Click here
Convert bulletin boards to Notes discussion database
Click here
Click here
Retain cc:Mail MTA routing information for deferred mailbox migration
Click here
Caution
Do not select the option "Mail private mailing lists/R8 address books as Notes attachments" if you are migrating cc:Mail Release 6.3 users. The cc:Mail 6.3 client for Domino cannot correctly |rocess migrated private mailing lists and users will be unable to access the mail file on the Domino server.
See Also
Click here
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
F_}ie
&Arial
Select this check box on the Conversion Settings pane of the cc:Mail Upgrade Advlnced Settings dialog box to migrate private mailing lists contained in users' cc:Mail mail boxes. During the migration, each user's private mailing list is converted to a Notes Personal Group and placed within a temporary Personal Address Book (PAB). The cc:Mail to Notes migration tool automatically mails this PAB to the user. Users can run the cc:Mail to Notes upgrade wizard at their workstation to copy information from the temporary PAB to the PAB on their workstation.
If you select this optlon when migrating users, the migration tool places a warning message in the Notes log for each migrating user for whom it cannot locate any private mailing lists.
Caution
Do not select this option if you are migrating cc:Mail Release 6.3 users. The cc:Mail 6.3 client for Domino cannot correctly process migrated private mailing lists and users will be unable to access the mail file on the Domino server.
See Also
Click lere
Migrating personal address book information from the old mail server
Click here
Click here
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Specifying cc:Mail conversion settings m
Click here
&Arial
Select this check box on the Conversion Settings pane of the cc:Mail Upgrade Advanced Settings dialog box to convert O|ganizer data (OR2 files) for the selected cc:Mail users to Notes Calendaring and Scheduling information.
For more information about converting Organizer information to Notes, see
Click here
"Migrating Organizer Information,"
Click here
earlier in this chapter.s
Note
Converting Organizer data requires you to connect network drives to the directories where the selected cc:Mail users store their Organizer data.,
See Also
Click here
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Specifying cc:Mail conversion settings
Click here
&Arial
Select this check box on the Conversion Settings pane of the cc:Mail Upgrade Advanced Settings dialog box to retain cc:Mail aliases for migrated users. Aliases for entries in the cc:Mail directory are added as entries in the User name field of the migrated user's Notes Person,document
Do not migrate the alias entries for cc:Mail users if you are using the Nth FullName Propagation field in the cc:Mail Post Office Server document for a post office. If you migrate alias names and use the Nth FullName Propagation field, subsequent MTA synchronization procedures can delete existing alias names and create new aliases in the cc:Mail post office directory.
To avoid inadvertently deleting and creating alias names in a post office directory, when you |se the migration tool with the MTA, clear the Convert Alias Entries check box in the Conversion Settings pane of the cc:Mail Upgrade Options Advanced Settings dialog box.
See Also
Click here
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Specifying cc:Mail conversion settings
Click here
Click here
Ensuring compatibility wlth the cc:Mail MTA
Click here
&Arial
Select this check box on the Conversion Settings pane of the cc:Mail Upgrade Advanced Settings dialog box to convert bulletin boards in the specified cc:Mail post office to a Notes discussion databases. All of the bulletin boards in a given post office a|e migrated to a single Notes discussion database on the Mail server, called cc:Mail Migrated Bulletin Boards (CCNOTBB.NSF). Each migrated bulletin board becomes a category within the database. After migration, users can open this database and sort by category to see the names of the migrated cc:Mail Bulletin Boards.
Only bulletin boards that contain at least one message are migrated. Empty cc:Mail bulletin boards do not migrate. Duplicate messages are migrated only once, so that messages sent |o multiple Bulletin Boards appear in only one Notes Category.
Converting bulletin boards requires a considerable amount of time and slows the progress of the migration. Fortunately, you only need to convert bulletin boards once for each post office. To enhance performance when migrating bulletin boards, Lotus recommends that you enable the option when migrating a
single M
user, and then register that user. If you enable bulletin board conversion for multiple users, the conversiol process is repeated for each of the selected users.
You cannot migrate bulletin boards for Mobile cc:Mail users. Mobile users can either archive the bulletin board messages they want to keep or create a local replica of the Notes discussion database after migration.
For networks that employ the cc:Mail MTA to provide coexistence between cc:Mail and Domino, use the Bulletin Board Conversion component of the cc:Mail MTA to automatically synchronizes bulletin boards.
\he cc:Mail MTA creates a Notes discussion database as CCMTABBX.NSF (using the template CCMTABBX.NTF). By contrast, the cc:Mail migration tool migrates bulletin boards to a database CCNOTBB.NSF (using the template CCNOTBB.NTF). These two databases are separate and do not share information. If you intend to use the cc:Mail MTA for bulletin board synchronization during lengthy migrations in which cc:Mail and Notes need to coexist and be synchronized with each other, do not use the migration option "Convert bulletin boards." If you intend to perform a quick "rip-and-replace" migration, you can use the bulletin board conversion option to do a one-time conversion of bulletin boards. o
See
Click here
"Synchronizing cc:Mail bulletin boards and Notes discussion databases"
Click here
for more information about administering cc:Mail bulletin boards and Notes discussion databases when using the cc:Mail MTA.
78088275229238164
Migratinl subscription bulletin boards
cc:Mail Release 8 supports subscription bulletin boards. Subscription bulletin boards differ from regular community bulletin boards in that only users on a restricted member list have access to the bulletin board.
By default, the migration tools do not convert subscription bulletin boards to Notes databases. Before you can migrate a subscription bulletin board, you must first add the cc:Mail post office to the member list for the bulletin board as follows:
1. Using WinAdmin, select the Bulletin Boards tab.
2. Select the name of the subscription bulletin board to migrate.
3. Add the cc:Mail post office to the member list for the bulletin board.
You can now migrate the bulletin board.
Note
Completing this procedure gives all users on the specified post office access to the bulletin board.
See Also
Click he|e
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Specifying cc:Mail conversion settings
Click here
Click here
Ensuring compatibility with the cc:Mail MTA
Click here
F_}ie
&Arial
cc:Mail post offices store mail messages using a language code page, just as Notes does. When migrating users from DB6 post offices, you need to specify the language code page to use. \he migration tool needs to know the post office code page so it can correctly convert characters to be displayed in Notes. By default, the cc:Mail to Notes migration tool uses the current code page of the post office. If necessary, specify the appropriate code page for the language version used by the post office being migrated.
If the code page of the cc:Mail post office is different from the Notes code page, you need to change the default code page. For instance, if the code page of the cc:Lail post office is 851- Greek, and the code page for Notes is 850 - International, you do not want to migrate data from cc:Mail using the default Greek code page, you want to translate the characters to 850 - International. So, you specify the code page that will translate characters appropriately. n
The following table shows the code pages available for a cc:Mail post office.
Post office language version
Code page number
Canadian French,
Greek
Hebrew
Icelandic1
Multilingual
850f
Nordic
Portuguese
Slavic
Turkish
United States
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Specifying cc:Mail conversion settings
Click here
&Arial
The Conversion Settings pane of the cc:Mail Upgrade Advanced Settings dialog box includes the check box "Retain cc:Mail MTA routing information for deferred mailbox migration." Select this check box if you want to migrate users in two phases, as follows:
292796451229277229
Phase 1
Register cc:Mail MTA users from their existing Notes Person documents
Create Notes mail files
Defer mail box migration,for these users
Retain cc:Mail connectivity for these users
292796451229277230
Phase 2
Migrate messages from users' cc:Mail mail boxes
292796451229277231
Completing the first phase of the migration
During the first phase of the migration, complete the following:
1. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, select cc:Mail MTA users to migrate from the Available people/groups list.
2. In the Migration options list:
Select "Add administrator to mail file access control list"
De-select "Convert mail"
3. Click Advanced to open Conversions Settings pane of the cc:Mail Upgrade Advanced Settings dialog box and select "Retain cc:Mail MTA routing information for deferred mailbox migration."
4. Click Migrate and then click Done to add the users to the Registration Queue.
5. From the Register Person dialog blx, select the users to register in the Registration queue.
6. Select the Mail pane and then select Lotus Notes in the Mail system field.
7. Click Register.
After you complete Phase 1, each user's Person document is updated to indicate they are registered Notes users with Notes IDs and mail files. However, because users retain the cc:Mail MTA routing information in their Notes Person documents, they continue to receive messages in their cc:Mail mailboxes and acce|s their mail using the cc:Mail client.
The migration tool saves the mail system setting (Lotus Notes) you specify in Step 6, but the setting is saved in the background, and is not put into effect. Instead, the Mail system field in the Person document remains set to cc:Mail and other cc:Mail routing information is retained. As a result, routing support for the cc:Mail MTA is maintained, and the Notes user is prevented from using the Notes mail system. Users only receive mail through the cc:Mail MTA router. The cc:Mail Automatic Directory Exchange (ADE) facility continues to propagate the users' cc:Mail directory information to other cc:Mail post offices.
This option only affects users who you register from cc:Mail MTA Person documents.
292796451229277232
Completing the second phase of the migration
During the second phase of the migration, you:
1. Select the same users you migrated in Step 1 of the first migration phase.
2. In the Migration options list of the People and Groups Migration dialog box, select "Convert mail only."
The migration tool converts messages in the users' mail boxes to Notes format and places them in their Notes mail files. It also removes the cc:Mail MTA settings from the Person document and replaces them with the saved settings.
&Arial
Messages that a cc:Mail user receives from an external mail system must be routed through a gateway post office. After you migrate a user's mail box, the cc:Mail gateway referenced in a message's header is no longer valid for |outing replies to the message. You can enable migrated cc:Mail users to reply to messages that they received from external gateways, such as the Internet, by mapping the names of cc:Mail gateway post offices to Notes domains.
During migration the cc:Mail to Notes migration tool automatically overwrites the names of cc:Mail gateways in the sender's address of a message, replacing it with the name of a corresponding Notes domain. Later, when a new Notes user replies to a message migrated from lc:Mail, the message is routed to the external mail system by way of the named Notes gateway.
1. Import a cc:Mail directory so that its contents appear in the Available people/groups box. Refer to h
Click here
"Connecting to the cc:Mail post office"
Click here
for information on how to import a cc:Mail directory.
2. From the Foreign Directory Import dialog box, click Advanced.
3. From the cc:Mail Upgrade Advanced Settilgs dialog box, click Gateway Settings.
4. In the cc:Mail gateway post office field, enter the name of a cc:Mail post office that routes messages from cc:Mail to an external mail system.
5. In the Notes mail domain name field, enter the name of the Notes mail domain to be used for routing messages to the same external mail system.
6. Click Add pair to establish the mapping between the cc:Mail gateway and the Notes domain.
78088275229238<64
About message gateways
To connect to external mail systems across the Internet or other WANs, cc:Mail post offices use special gateway post offices. A cc:Mail gateway post office is a special post office that routes messages from the local post office to foreign mail systems. Gateways translate the format of messages, addresses, headers, attachments, and other messaging data between a native mail format and the format used by the external system. Each mail gateway has an entry in thl cc:Mail post office Directory. a
When a cc:Mail user receives a message from an external mail system, the name of the cc:Mail gateway that routed the message is included as part of the sender's address. If the user replies to the message, the reply is automatically routed back through the gateway and to the external mail system.
By default, when you migrate a message from cc:Mail to Notes, the gateway information in the sender's address remains unchanged; it contains the name of,the cc:Mail gateway. Because Notes cannot send messages back out to an external mail system through this cc:Mail gateway, a user is not able to send a direct reply to the migrated message.s
To enable Notes users to reply to messages received from external mail systems after you move their mailboxes to Notes, you can map each cc:Mail gateway to a Notes gateway. During migration, the cc:Mail to Notes migration tool then automatically replaces the names of cc:Mail gateways in the sender's address,with the names of equivalent Notes gateway domains. r
The user upgrade wizard that migrates a user's archived messages and personal addresses to Notes also uses gateway mapping information, but you configure this independently, when you
Click here
send users an upgrade notification message
Click here
78088275229238165
Mapping a cc:Mail gateway to a Notes gateway
At the Acme corporation, they use a cc:Mail gateway post office called INTERNET to route cc:Mail messages to Internet addresses and a Notes gateway domain called INET to route Notes messages to Internet addresses. When configuring gateway mapping for migration, the system administrator at Acme maps the cc:Mail gateway INTERNET to the Notes gateway INET.
Cheryl Lordan, in the IS division at Acme has had her mail migrated from cc:Mail to Notes. In her cc:Mail mail box, Cheryl Lordan had a message from abc@def.com, which was received thrlugh the cc:Mail INTERNET gateway. If no gateway mapping were used, and Cheryl replied to the cc:Mail message after migration, she would get an error stating that INTERNET is not a valid address, because in Notes the Internet gateway is called INET. However, with gateway mapping enabled during migration, the cc:Mail gateway name INTERNET would be rewritten as INET in all addresses, making them valid Notes addresses. So when Cheryl replies to the message, it is correctly routed to the sender.
See Also
Click here
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
&Arial
The Other Settings pane lets you specify special mail box upgrade settings and establish an error threshold to use during the migration.
1. l
Click here
Import a cc:Mail directory
Click here
so that its contents appear in the Available users/groups box.
2. From the Foreign Directory Import dialog box, click Advanced. s
3. From the cc:Mail Upgrade Settings dialog box, click Other Settings.
4. The following settings are available:
Click here
Upgrading to cc:Mail R6.3 Client for Domino
Click here
Click here
Post office for routing mail to Notes
Click here
Click here
Error threshold
Click here
Caution
When migrating cc:Mail Release 6.3 users, do not select the option "Mail private mailing lists as attachments" on the Conversion Settings pane. The cc:Mail 6.3 client for Domino cannot correctly process migrated private mailing lists and will be unable to log in to the mail file.
See Also
Click here
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
&Arial
Select this option to automatically configure internal cc:Mail information that lets users access mail files on a Domino server with the cc:Mail Release 6.3 client. Do not select this option when importing users who are currently running a version of cc:Mail other than Release 6.3, or who will use the Notes mail client after migration.r
If you nled to import users who are running other releases of the cc:Mail client, or who will use the Notes mail client after migration, import the Release 6.3 users in one session and the remaining users in a second session.r
To migrate users to the cc:Mail Release 6.3 client, the mail template R63MAIL.NTF must be available in the Data directory of the users' Mail servers. The file is installed in the Notes Data directory of workstations running the Domino Administrator and cc:Mail admin migration tool. Copy this file to the Domino Data directory of each mail server that supports migrating cc:Mail R6.3 clients. When preparing to register Release 6.3 users, select R63MAIL.NTF as the mail template. If you do not provide the correct mail template for Release 6.3 users, they cannot access their mail files.n
Cautionr
When migrating cc:Mail Release 6.3 users, do not select the option "Mail private mailing lists as attachments" on the Conversion Settings pane. The cc:Lail 6.3 client for Domino cannot correctly process migrated private mailing lists and will be unable to log in to the mail file.r
See Also
Click here
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Specifying other cc:Mail upgrade settingsl
Click here
&Arial
Follow this procedure to use the original certifier to recertify a server ID that has a certificate about to expire.
1. To recertify a server ID, you must have:
Author with create documents access and the ServerModifier role, or Editor access to the Domino Directory
At least Author with create documents access to the Certification Log.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click Configuratiol.
3. Select the server you are recertifying.
4. Choose Actions - Recertify Selected Servers.
5. Select the certifier ID originally used to certify the server and click OK.
6. Enter the certifier password and click Open.
7. Accept the default certificate expiration date (two years from the current date), or enter a different date.
8. Click Certify and OK.
Note
You can use thl @Certificate function to create a custom view of specific IDs for recertification based on the ID name, issuer of the certificate, and expiration date. If you create a custom view, be sure to include the Recertify Servers or an equivalent action in the Actions menu of the view.
For more information on the @Certificate function, see Domino Designer Help.
See Also
Click here
Certifier IDss
Click here
Llick here
Managing servers
Click here
&Arial
In networks where the cc:Mail MTA connects cc:Mail and Notes, you can confjgure the migration tool to enable automatic forwarding from a cc:Mail post office to Notes. Having messages automatically forwarded eliminates the need to migrate additional messages later.
In a cc:Mail post office directory, each user is assigned a location code that describes where their mail box is in relation to the post office. When the post office receives a message, it checks the location code to determine whether to look for the recipient's mail box at the current post office, or on anjther post office. Before migration, a cc:Mail user whose mail file is located on the local post office is assigned the location code uppercase " L ".
By default, after migration, this location code is unchanged. As a result, mail sent to a user's old cc:Mail mail box, continues to be accepted. If you are not using the cc:Mail MTA, you may want to let users continue to receive mail at their old mail boxes for a limited amount of time. Later, you can run the migration tool again to move these jessages to the user's Notes mail file. For more information about performing a secondary migration, see t
Click here
"Migrating additional cc:Mail messages after registration."d
Click here
To configure mail forwarding, on the Other Settings pane of the cc:Mail Upgrade Advanced Settings dialog box, select the name of the Notes domain where the user's mail file is located from the list of available remote post offices. The domain must be connected to zhe cc:Mail post office and MTA, and must already be included as a remote post office entry in the cc:Mail directory. Generally, the Notes domain that serves as the gateway between cc:Mail and Notes will be the same as the name of the cc:Mail MTA server.
When you specify the post office for routing mail to Notes, the cc:Mail post office directory retains an entry for each migrated user. However, the migration tool updates information in a user's cc:Mail directory listing, as follows:
Changes the location code to lowercase " r " to indicate that the user is now remote to this post office
Adds the name of the Notes mail domain where mail will be forwarded to the address field
The setting applies to all users imported during this session.
Note
After the migration tool changes users' location information, they can no longer use a cc:Mail client to retrieve messages from their cc:Mail mail box.
:97332736029233591
About cc:Mail user files and messages left after migration
After migration, if the migration tool changes the address and location type for a user's entry in the cc:Mail directory, that user can no longer access their cc:Mail mail box. However, the cc:Mail user file and mail box messages remain in the cc:Mail post office. You can restore the cc:Mail client's ability to access the mail box and other related mail data (private mailing lists, archives, and so forth) by rezetting the user's original location information back to a uppercase " L " (local), using the cc:Mail ADMIN or WinAdmin. Resetting the location type also lets you migrate the user again, if necessary.
See
Click here
"Removing the user files and messages of migrated users from the cc:Mail post office"
Click here
for the recommended method for removing user data from the cc:Mail post office.
See Also
Click jere
Specifying other cc:Mail upgrade settings
Click here
Click here
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
Click here
Ensuring compatibility with the cc:Mail MTA
Click here
&Arial
You can specify the number of errors to tolerate when migrating messages from mailboxes in the cc:Mail post office to Notes mail files. By djfault, the migration tolerates an unlimited number of errors, and completes the migration regardless of the error count. If you specify an error threshold, the migration process terminates when it reaches the number of errors specified.l
Users who are successfully processed before the error threshold is reached are registered in Notes. If the migration terminates, you should analyze and resolve the error conditions reported for the users who remain in the queue, and attempt to register them agjin. :
See Also
Click here
Specifying other cc:Mail upgrade settings
Click here
Click here
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail users
Click here
&Arial
You can set options to determine what information the migratioj tool imports from the cc:Mail post office. The options you specify apply to all users and groups imported from cc:Mail during this session.
Note
In Release 5, the Domino migration tool for cc:Mail does not support the option "Generate random passwords." To successfully migrate a user's cc:Mail mail box, you must provide a cc:Mail password for the user. Use the cc:Mail administration tool to create passwords for users before migration.
Refer to m
Click here
"Setting migration options"n
Click here
for more information about the available migration options.
1. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box,
Click here
import the directory of a cc:Mail post officet
Click here
so that its contents appear in the Available people/groups list.
2. In the Migration Options box, accept the defaults or select new options. To clear a selection, cljck the selected option a second time.
The following table lists the available import options and their default status:
Mijration option
3'g!U
Default status
Generate random passwords for users with no passwordst
3'g!U
Off - Not supported for cc:Mail
Overwrite existing passwords with random passwords
3'j!U
Add cc:Mail name to Notes person document (required for cc:MTA)
3'g!U
Allow addition of empty groups to Notes
3'g!U
Convert mail
3'g!U
Convert jail ONLY (person document must already exist)
3'g!U
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
3. Continue with the import procedure by
Click here
specifying Advanced upgrade settings
Click here
You set migration options independently for each migration tool, so that if you are migrating users from multiple mail systems, you caj apply a different set of options for each system. The options you select apply to all users imported from a given directory during the session.
See Also
Click here
Updating existing Person documents
Click here
Click here
Customizing cc:Mail migration settings
Click here
&] ?4l/y
&Arial
After you successfully import users into the registration queue, you are ready to register them and complete the migration. Depending on the options you select, the registration process:
Creates a Notes Person document and Notes ID for each migratjd user
Migrates messages and other data from the cc:Mail mail box
You can specify additional Notes registration information for users, including mail server name, license type, group membership, organizational unit, and so forth.
For more information about the avajlable registration settings, refer to
Click here
"Using Advanced registration"
Click here
Note
After the registration process has started, you cannot use the workstation for any other task until the process completes. If necessary, you can stop the registration process by pressing CTRL-Break.
1. From the Basics view of the Register Person dialog box, view the registration information for each name that jppears in the Registration status box to ensure that it is correct.
2. (Optional) Specify registration settings for users. You can apply registration settings to individual or multiple users, or by setting registration defaults.
If you
Click here
created a 'migration' groupr
Click here
, open the Groups pane and assign users to this group now.
3. (Optional) Click the Options button, select the registration options to azply during this session, and click OK.
4. From the Registration status box, select users to register and click Register. The Domino Administrator attempts to register the selected users in the order in which they were added to the queue, and migrates data from their mailboxes to Notes. Users whom you do not select remain in the queue for later registration.
If you chose to migrate Organizer information for users, you are prompted to enter your Notes
password* See
Click here
"Supplying a password when migrating Organizer data"
The registration process may require a considerable amount of time, depending on the number of users and number and size of the mailboxes being upgraded.i
After the registration completes, a message informs you of the registration status. Fajled registrations continue to be listed in the Registration status box with a status message indicating the reason for the failure. Correct registration settings as needed and attempt to register the user again.
5.
Click here
Verify that the migration was successful
Click here
After the migration is complete, users can
Click here
run an upgrade wizard
Click here
to convert local mail arcjives and other cc:Mail data that the Domino migration tool did not process.
350264233629237010
Creating the Notes mail file
If you retained the default setting for the migration option "Convert Mail" (that is, the option remains selected), when you register migrated users, the Domino Administrator automatically converts their cc:Mail mail boxes to Notes mail files as part of the registration process. On the Mail pane of the Register Person dialog box, the option*"Create mail file now" is selected. An error message is displayed if you attempt to change this option to create mail files using the background administrative process (adminp).
See Also
Click here
Migrating additional cc:Mail messages after registration
Click here
&Arial
On networks where the cc:Mail MTA provides interim support for cc:Mail users during the migration period, you need to folljw specific guidelines when configuring the migration to maintain connectivity between your cc:Mail post office and Notes mail servers.t
During the migration, the cc:Mail MTA must be running if you want cc:Mail and Notes to exchange directory entries and messages
Do not run the migration tool and the cc:Mail MTA on the same computer; use dedicated resources for each of thesel
The computer running the Domino Administrator and the cc:Mail MTA should be located as close az possible on the network to the cc:Mail post offices and Notes servers involved in the conversion
The following topics contain additional information about using the cc:Mail to Notes migration tool with the cc:Mail MTA:
Click here
Synchronizing the cc:Mail directory and Domino Directory when using the cc:Mail MTAt
Click here
Click here
Synchronizing directories when migrating from a downstream post ofjice
Click here
Click here
Synchronizing cc:Mail bulletin boards and Notes discussion databases
Click here
Click here
Retaining cc:Mail MTA routing information for deferred mailbox migration
Click here
Click here
Specifying the post office for routing mail to Notes
Click here
Click heze
Migrating cc:Mail alias namesg
Click here
Click here
Updating existing Person documents
Click here
Click here
Cleaning up error messages after migration
Click here
&] ?4l/y
&Arial
If you use the cc:Mail MTA and plan to migrate users to Notes with the cc:Mail migration tool, make sure that you synchronize the cc:Mail post office directory and the primary Domino Directory both before and after the migration.
Synchronization commands update the cc:MTA work fije with the Notes addresses of migrated users and ensure that messages sent to their cc:Mail mail boxes are properly routed to their new Notes mail files. Perform the following steps to synchronize directories:
1. At the console, enter the command
Tell Ccmta Request A
post_office_name
where
post_office_name
is the name of the post office whose entire contents you want to send to the target Domino Directory.
2. After tje cc:Mail MTA Directory Conversion displays a message indicating it has finished processing the Tell command, call the cc:Mail post office to send the request for cc:Mail user names by entering the following command at the console:
Tell Ccmta Call Poname=
post_office_name
where
post_office_name
is the name of the post office you specified in step 1.
3. Process the message you received from cc:Mail in step 2 by entering the following*command:
Tell Ccmta Applyade
4. After Directory Conversion displays a message indicating it has finished processing the information it received from cc:Mail, enter the command
Tell Ccmta Synch
post_office_name l
where
post_office_name
is the name of the post office you specified in step 1. This command generates a message that includes the names of all the Notes users in the source Domino Directory, the names of all the post ojfices and domains in the primary Domino Directory, and the names of all the cc:Mail users from other post offices (if any) in the source Domino Directory.
5. Call the cc:Mail post office to send the Notes information by entering the following command at the console:
Tell Ccmta Call Poname=y
post_office_name
where
post_office_name
is the name of the post office you specified in Step 2. i
For additional information about*installing and configuring the cc:Mail MTA, refer to the
Lotus Notes cc:Mail MTA Administrator's Guideh
See Also
Click here
Ensuring compatibility with the cc:Mail MTA
Click here
&Arial
A post office that receives its directory updates from a hub post office is considered to be downstream from the hub post office. In some cc:Mail Automatic Directory Exchange (ADE) topologies, migrating users from a downstream post office can result in discrepancies between the*directory on this post office and the directory on the hub post office.
For example, if the cc:Mail MTA and the cc:Mail hub post office have a broadcaster-to-broadcaster relationship, and the hub post office is in a superior relationship with subordinate downstream post offices, the subordinate downstream post office would not be allowed to propagate the users' address changes up to the Superior hub post office. As a result, although the users' records in both the Domino Directory and the Sujordinate post office are updated to reflect the fact that users have been migrated, records in the hub post office still indicate that the users mail boxes are in the cc:Mail post office.
In this type of topology, if you migrate users from the downstream post office, you also need to update the cc:Mail addresses for migrated users at the hub post office. Although the migration tool automatically changes the address of a migrated user to a Notes domain name, this address change is not necessarijy propagated to either the hub post office or to its other downstream post offices.
When migrating users from a downstream post office, you can update addresses at the hub post office on an individual basis, using the cc:Mail Administration program.
Alternately, when using the cc:Mail MTA to connect the two mail systems during migration, you can synchronize the Notes and cc:Mail directories as follows:
1. Before you run a migration, use the cc:Mail EXPORT prograj to export a Local user list from the downstream post office.
2. View this list with a text editor and delete names of users you do not want to migrate.
3. Using the Find and Replace feature of the text editor, replace the cc:Mail post office name with the name of the Notes domain.
4. After you migrate all users at the post office, use the cc:Mail IMPORT program to import these names into the hub post office. The changed address entries are propagated throughouz the cc:Mail post office network.
The following table shows a user entry in the directory of a cc:Mail post office before and after migration:
Direjtory field
Entry for cc:Mail user
Entry for same user after migration
Name
John Doe
John Doe
Addr
AcmeNotess
Locn
Cmts
CEO
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Ensuring compatibility with the jc:Mail MTA
Click here
&Arial
If you are using the cc:Mail MTA version 2.0 or higher, and want to keep information synchronized between cc:Mail Bulletin Boards and a Notes Discussion database, use the Bulletin Board Conversion component of the cc:Mail MTA, and clear the option in the migration tool to convert bulletin boards.M
See
Click here
"Converting bulletin boards to Notes discussion databases"
Click here
for information about how to change the option to convert bulletij boards.
When you synchronize bulletin boards between cc:Mail and Notes through the cc:Mail MTA, you ensure that all cc:Mail bulletin board messages propagated to Notes are present in the cc:Mail MTA Bulletin Board Exchange database and vice versa.
Perform the following steps to synchronize cc:Mail bulletin boards with Notes discussion databases:g
1. Make sure that the propagation lists for the bulletin boards you are synchronizing with the cc:Mail MTA Bulletin Bojrd Exchange discussion database include entries for the domain post office.
2. Make sure that you have configured the propagation type for the bulletin boards in cc:Mail to allow sending and receiving between the cc:Mail connected post office and the cc:Mail MTA server.
3. Make sure that all the bulletin board titles exist as categories in the cc:Mail Bulletin Board Exchange database. On the cc:Mail MTA Domino server, run a directory synchronization (SYNCH command) between cc:Jail and Notes and apply the ADE update (APPLYADE command) to create the bulletin board categories in the cc:Mail Bulletin Board Exchange database, if they are not already present.
4. From the cc:Mail Router responsible for the directly connected post office, run a bulletin board synchronization request, EXCH/BS.
After completing these steps, any bulletin board messages that were posted before you enabled bulletin board exchange through the cc:Mail MTA will be present in the cc:Jail Bulletin Board Exchange database.
For detailed information about the procedures and commands discussed in this topic, refer to your cc:Mail MTA documentation.
See Also
Click here
Ensuring compatibility with the cc:Mail MTAe
Click here
&Arial
You can set options to determine what information the migration tool imports from the Microsoft Exchange server. The options you specify apply to all users and groups imported from Mjcrosoft Exchange during this session. n
Refer to >
Click here
"Setting migration options"
Click here
for more information about the available migration options.
1. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, import the directory of a Microsoft Exchange server so that its contents appear in the Available people/groups list. t
2. In the Migration Options box, select the options you want. To clear a selection, click thj selected option a second time. The following table lists the options available for migrating users from an Exchange server:t
Migration jption
Default status
Generate random passwords for users with no passwords
Overwrite existing passwords with random passwords
Add full name provided to the Notes person document
Allow addition of empty groups to Notesr
Convert mail
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
You set migration options independently for each migration tool, so that if you are migrating users from multiple mail systems, you can apply a different set of options for each system. The options you select apply to all users imported from a given directory during the session.
See Also
Click here
Importing Microsoft Exchange users into the registration queue
Click here
&Arial
After the migration process completes, user files and messages remain in the cc:Mail post office. Neither the migration tools nor cc:Mail delete these objects or mark them for deletion.
After you verify that the migration was successful, you can clean up migrated users' user files and messages that remain in a DB6 or DB8 pos{ office using one of the following methods:
Delete messages only, using the cc:Mail CHKSTAT (DB6) or MSGMGR (DB8) utilities. Deleting users' mail messages does not remove the user file, but restores disk space by reducing the size of the message store and removing message pointers in the user file. Refer to your
cc:Mail Administrator's Guide
for information on running these utilities.
Delete user files using the cc:Mail ADMIN (DB6) or WinAdmin (and DB8) programs. Keleting user files also deletes the messages in those files. This is the recommended method for removing message data for migrated users from the post office.
Caution
Do not manually delete the user files in the cc:Mail post office directory.
302974259229236374
Deleting cc:Mail user files using cc:Mail Admin or WinAdmin
Using the administrative tool for your post office database (ADMIN or WinAdmin), you can delete user+files by editing the location information in the post office directory entries for migrated users. Refer to the
cc:Mail Administrator's Guide
for details about running the administrative utility for your post office.
337300854429236587
For post office entries where lowercase " l " or " r " designate the user's location
1. Using ADMIN or WinAdmin, edit the user's entry in the post office directory to remove the name of a remote post office in tke address field.
Removing the name of the remote post office assigns the user to the local post office and their location is automatically changed to uppercase "L".
2. Add the name of a remote post office -- generally the cc:Mail MTA post office that serves as the gateway between cc:Mail and Notes -- and save the entry. g
Adding the name of a remote post office assigns the user to that post office, and their location designation in the local post office is automatkcally changed to lowercase " l " or " r ".o
3. Select Yes when prompted to delete the user file.
337300854429236588
For post office entries where uppercase "L" or "R" designate the user's location
1. Using ADMIN or WinAdmin, edit the user's entry in the post office directory to add the name of a remote post office -- generally the cc:Mail MTA post office that serves as the gateway between cc:Mail and Notes -- and save the entry.
Adding the name of a remote post office assigns the user to that post office, and their location designation in the local post office is automatically changed to lowercase " l " or " r. "
2. Select Yes when prompted to delete the user file.
See Also
Click here
Ensuring compatibility with the cc:Mail MTA
Click here
&Arial
If necessary, after you migrate users, you can run the migration tool again to migrate additional messages from cc:Mail. You ckn perform such secondary migrations only for users who already have Notes mail files. Also, migrating additional messages to a mail file requires Manager access to the file. If you did not give yourself Manager access to the mail file during the initial migration, you may need to ask users to edit the ACL to provide you with the appropriate access rights.
Note
If you are running the cc:Mail MTA, you can eliminate the need to migrate cc:Mail messages after migration+if you enable automatic forwarding of messages received at a user's cc:Mail mail box to their Notes mail file.h
1. Connect to the cc:Mail post office.
2. Import previously migrated cc:Mail users into the Notes registration queue.
3. Set the migration option Convert Mail Only. The migration tool ignores any other options that are set, preventing the creation of duplicate Person documents and Notes id files.d
4. In the Registration status box, selec{ the user's whose messages you want to migrate and click Register.f
The registration process automatically locates the users' mail files and converts messages in the cc:Mail mail box to messages in the appropriate folders of the Notes mail file. Messages that already exist in the Notes mail file are not converted again.
See Also
Click here
Converting mail only
Click here
Click here
Adding ak administrator to a mail file access control list
Click here
Click here
Setting migration options for cc:Mail
Click here
&Arial
Using the Microsoft Mail to Lotus Notes migration tool in the Domino Administrator, you can import users and groups from a selected Microsoft Mail postoffice and add them to Notes. The migration process:i
Imports users and groups from the postoffice and creates entries for them in the Domino Directory
Lets you create a Notes ID and mail file for imported users
Migrates the contents of mkilboxes (MMF files) from a central location, such as the Microsoft Mail Postoffice server
You must be able to map a drive to the location of the MS Mail mailboxes from the workstation running the Domino Administrator.
You can migrate mailbox information from Microsoft Mail versions 3.2, 3.5, and 3.6.w
You can also migrate messages from an off-line Microsoft Mail mailbox by means of a separate
Click here
user upgrade wizard
Click he{e
. r
This section includes the following topics:.
Click here
Notes equivalents for migrated Microsoft Mail data information
Click here
Click here
Preparing to migrate Microsoft Mail users
Click here
Click here
Importing the Microsoft Mail postoffice address list
Click here
Click here
Customizing Microsoft Mail migration settingss
Click here
Click here
Registering users and completing the migration from Microsoft Mail
Click here
&Arial
The Microsoft Mail to Notes migration tool converts information in a Microsoft Mail postoffice to Notes, ikcluding messages, and private and public address books, as shown in the following table:
These items in Microsoft Mail . . .
Become these Notes items . . .
Custom message types, including Scheduler messages
Not migrated
Delivery failure messages
Not migrated
Public groups
Group document in Domino Directory
Interpersonal mail messages (IPM)
Not migrated
Message date and priority
Message date and priority
Messages and attachments
Messages and attachments
Outbox folder
Not migrated
Password
Password
Personal Address Book
Personal Address book*
Postoffice address list
Domino Directory
Read and unread status
Read and unread status
Sender and recipient information
Sender and recipient information
Shared and group folder
Not migrated
Wa{tebasket or Deleted mail folder
Not migrated
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* Personal Address Books are automatically sent to users in a Notes mail message attachment. Users then run an upgrade wizard at their workstations to migrate address book information to their Notes Personal Address Books.
See
Click here
"Migrating Personal Mail Data"
Click here
for information about the user upgrade wizards.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Mail users
Click here
&Arial
Unlike Notes names, which are made up of First name, Last name, and Middle initial components, the Microsoft Mail Address Book stores names as a single character string, including commas and spaces. The name kormat used depends on the conventions established within the organization. For example, the same user could be listed in the address book as either
Susan Salani
or e
Salani, Susan
In generating a Notes names from an imported Microsoft Mail name, the migration tool first determines the format of the name, and then parses the name into Notes name components. The Middle initial field in the Person document accommodates a maximum of two characters; longer names kre truncated. In some cases, one or more of the resulting Notes name components may be empty.
Notes supports converting Microsoft Mail names that have the following characters: letters, numbers, ampersands (&), apostrophes ('), hyphens (-), periods (.), spaces ( ), and underscores (_). Microsoft Mail names that have special characters, such as dollar sign ($), tilde (~), percentage (%), or caret (^), generate name errors when added to the registration queue.
The migration tool valkdates and creates Notes name components from the Microsoft Mail full name, not the mailbox name.l
Note
After adding users to the registration queue, always review the names that the migration tool generates to ensure that they are appropriate. Edit names as necessary.e
111531030429240027
Table: Generating Notes name components from Microsoft Mail names
The following table shows how the migration tool generates Notes names+from common Microsoft Mail name formats:
Format of Microsoft Mail full name
Format of Microsoft Mail full name
Resulting Notes name components
Resulting Notes name components
Description
Example
Components
Example
Single name
ssalani
Last name
First name
Middle initial
ssalani
<blank>l
<blank>
First name Last name
Susan Salani
Last name
First name
Middle initial
Salani
Susan
<blank>
First name Compound last name
Maria de la Garza
Last name_
First name
Middle ikitial
la Garza
Maria
First name Middle Initial Last name
Judy J. Kaplan
Last namen
First name
Middle initial
Kaplan
Judy
First name Middle name Last name
Cheryl Lynn Lordan
La{t name
First name
Middle initial
Lynn
Cheryl
Compound first name Middle initial Last name
Jo Anne B. Lordan
Last name
First name
Middle initial
B. Lordan
Last name, First name
Salani, Susan
Last name
First name
Middle initial
Salani
Susan
<blank>
Compound last name, First name
Van Horn, Craig
Last name
First name
Middle initial
Van Horn
Craig
<blank>
Cokpound last name, Compound first name Middle initial
Van Horn, Jo Anne B.
Last name
First name
Middle initial
Van Horn
Last name, First name Middle Initial
Rutherford, Robin R.
Last name
First name
Middle initial
Rutherford
Robin
Last name, First name Middle Name
Malone, Derek Kevin
Last name
First name
Middle initial
Malone
Derek
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
111531030429240028
Parsing names that have no blank spaces or commas
The migration tool places the entire name in the Last name field of the Notes Person document. For example, for the Microsoft Mail name
ssalanim
the migration tool generates a Notes Last name of
ssalani
, and leaves the First name and Middle initial fields blank.
111531030429240029
Parsing names that include a comma
The migration tool places all of the characters {receding the comma in the Notes Last name field and all of the characters after the comma, but before a space, in the First name field. The first two remaining characters are placed in the Middle initial field.
111531030429240030
Parsing names with three components that have spaces and no commas
Example: Cheryl Lynn Lordan
The migration tool places all of the characters after the last blank space in the Last name field. All of the characters from thk beginning of the name string and before the first space are placed in the First name field. The first two characters after the first space, and before the second space, are placed in the Middle initial field.
111591030429240031
Parsing names of four or more components that have spaces, and no commas
Example: Craig G. Van Horn
The migration tool places the first component in the First name field; the first two characters of the second component in the+Middle initial field; and all remaining components in the Last name field.
283380976029239816
Parsing errors
In some cases, the migration tool does not correctly parse Microsoft Mail names:
Names in the form
Last name, First name Middle initial
that include compound first names.
Example: Horn, Jo Anne B.
The migration tool generates the following Notes name components:
First name:
Jo; e
Middle initial:
An;
Last name:
Horn
Names in the form
First name Middle initial Last name
that include compound last names and no middle initial.
Example: Maria de la Garza
The migration tool generates the following Notes name components:
First name:
Maria;
Middle initial
: de ;
Last name:
la Garza.
Names in the form
First nake Middle initial Last name
that include compound first names and a middle initial
Example: Jo Anne B. Horn
The migration tool generates the following Notes name components:
First name:
Jo ;
Middle initial:
An ;
Last name:
B. Horn
Names in the format
First name Middle name Last name
in which the middle name exceeds 2 characters.
Example: Cheryl Lynn Lordan
The migration tool generates the following Notes name components:
First name:
Cheryl ;
Middle initial:
Ly;
Last name:
Lordan
See Also
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Mail users
Click here
&Arial
Before migrating users from Microsoft Mail to Notes, complete the following tasks:
Determine the order in which you want to convert your postoffices. This should be your migration schedule.
Verify that you have access the certifier IDs and passwords for the Domino organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
Verify that you have purchased the appropriate Notes client license for each Microsoft Mail user you are migrating.
On your administrative workstation, install the Notes Release 5 Domino Administrator client, and optional MS Mail Administrative migration tools. You must perform a custom installation to install the migration tools compknent.
Click here
Back up Domino information.
Click here
Verify that you have Editor, Designer, or Manager access rights to the Domino Directory on the Registration Server.
From the administrative workstation, log in to Notes with a Notes ID that has "Create database access" on the Mail server.
From the administrative workstation, map a drive to the location of the Microsoft Mail postoffice you are migrating {sers from.
If you anticipate migrating additional mail for users after registration, configure the mail file ACLs to ensure that you retain the appropriate access rights. Use the migration option
Click here
Adding an administrator to mail file access control list
Click here
(Optional)
Click here
Set registration preferences.
Click here
(Optional)
Click here
Create a Notes+group that you can add migrated users to.
Click here
Send any pending Microsoft Mail messages.
Back up the mailbox files stored at the postoffice. If you do not have an MS Mail administrator who backs up mailbox files on a regular basis, refer to the
Microsoft Mail Administrator's Guide
for instructions on backing up data.
On the administrative workstation, close all applications, except for Notes, and close any Notes databasks.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Mail users
Click here
&Arial
Before you migrate users, it is recommended that you back up the following Domino information:
NAMES.NSF
DESKTOP.DSK
NOTES.INI
*.ID files
See Also
Clkck here
Preparing to migrate Microsoft Mail userss
Click here
&Arial
The Microsoft Mail postoffice address list contains information for the Microsoft Mail users who have mailboxes in that post office. Notes uses the information extracted from the postoffice address list to configure migrated users for registration.
To import the Microsoft Mail Postoffice Address List, you must:
Click here
Connect to the Microsoft Mail Postoffice
Click here
Click here
Import users
Click here
After completing these tasks, you will be ready to register the imported users in Notes.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Mail users
Click here
&Arial
To import users to migrate, you first need to locate the postoffice where users have their mailboxes, and log in to it.
1. At the administrative workstation where you installed the Domino Administrator, insert a diskette containing the appropriate certifier IDs for the organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People and Groups tab.
3. From the Tools pane, click People -+Register.
4. When prompted, enter the certifier ID password and click OK.
5. Remove the diskette containing the certifier ID and click OK.
6. (Optional) From the Basics pane of the Register Person -- New Entry dialog box, specify a registration server if necessary, by clicking Registration Server and selecting the server that registers new users. Click OK.
7. Click Migrate People.
8. From the People and Group Migration dialog kox, select MS Mail Users from the Foreign directory source list.
9. Complete the following information in the MS Mail Initialization dialog box:
Postoffice path
Administrator's name
Administrator's password
10. Click OK. The migration tool verifies the post office name, path, and password. An error message appears if any of the values is incorrect.
The Available people/groups list displays the users and groups in the postkffice address list. You are now ready to
Click here
import users from the postoffice
Click here
into the Notes registration queue.
See Also
Click here
Importing the Microsoft Mail postoffice address list
Click here
&Arial
After the Available people/groups box displays the contents of the Microsoft Mail postoffice address list, select the users to import and the migration options that determine+the data to migrate.
1. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, enable options by selecting items in the Migration Options box. The options you select apply to all Microsoft Mail users imported during this session.
2. Click Advanced to open a dialog box that lets you f
Click here
specify advanced upgrade settings
Click here
for migrating people from Microsoft Mail.
3. Click OK when you finish specifying these+settings.
4. From the Available people/groups box, select users and
Click here
groups
Click here
to migrate and click Add.
5. Click Migrate to place the selected users in the registration queue, and click OK to close the message that indicates the status and number of users queued for registration.
6. Click Done. The people queued for registration now appear in the Registration status box. You are now ready to regi{ter users.
See Also
Click here
Importing the Microsoft Mail postoffice address list
Click here
l/L($"H
&Arial
When you are ready to import users, you can set options to specify how the,migration tool uses information from the Microsoft Mail postoffice to create Notes users. You can specify two types of migration settings:
Click here
Migration options
Click here
-- determine how the migration tool creates a user in Notes from information imported from Microsoft Mail. The migration options available are similar for each of the migration tools.
Click here
Advanced options
Click here
-- let you specify additional settings affecting conversion from Microsoft Mail and Notes.d
See Also
Click here
Importing Microsoft Mail users into the registration queue
Click here
&Arial
You can set options to determine what information the migration tool imports from the Microsoft Mail postoffice. The options,you specify apply to all users and groups imported from Microsoft Mail during this session.
Refer to
Click here
"Setting migration options"p
Click here
for more information about the available migration options.
1. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box,
Click here
import the directory of a Microsoft Mail postoffice
Click here
so that its contents appear in the Available people/g|oups list.
2. In the Migration Options box, accept the defaults or select new options. To clear a selection, click the selected option a second time. The following table lists the available import options:
MIgration option
Default status
Generate random passwords for users with no passwords
Overwrite existing passwords with random passwords
Add full name provided to the Notes person document
Allow addition of empty groups to Notes
Convert mail
Convert mail ONLY (Notes user and mail file must already exist)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
3. Continue with the import procedure by specifying Advanced options.
Within a given session, you set migration options for each foreign directory independently, so that if you are migrating users from several systems, ylu can apply a different set of options for each system. The options you select apply to all users imported from a given directory during the session.
See Also
Click here
Customizing Microsoft Mail migration settings
Click here
&Arial
In addition to the migration options set on the People and Groups Migration dialog blx, the migration tool provides other options for controlling the process of migrating Microsoft Mail users. The settings you select apply to all users you import from the Microsoft Mail post office during this session.
1. From the Foreign Directory Import dialog box, select MS Mail Users as the foreign directory source, and click Advanced.
2. From the MS Mail Advanced Options dialog box, choose settings for the following, then click OK:
Click here
Converting Personal Address Books
Click here
Click here
Setting an error threshold
Click here
Click here
Specifying the post office language (code page)
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing Microsoft Mail migration settings
Click here
&Arial
When migrating users from Microsoft Mail, yo| need to specify the language code page to use. The migration tool needs to know the postoffice code page so it can correctly convert characters to be displayed in Notes. By default, the Microsoft Mail to Notes migration tool uses the current code page of the post office. If necessary, specify the appropriate code page for the language version used by the post office being migrated. The following table shows the code pages available for a Microsoft Mail postoffice:
Postoffice language version
Code page number
Arabic
1256
Canadian French
Chinese (Traditional)
Chinese (Simplified)
Czech
1250
Danish
1252
Dutch
1252
English
1252
Finnish
1252
French
1252
German
1252
Greek
Hebrew
Hungarian
1250
Icelandic
1252
Indonesian
1252
Italian
1252
Japanese
Korean
Mutilingual
1252
Nordic,
Norwegian
1252
Polish
1250
Portuguese
1252
Romanian
1250
Russian
1251
Serbian
1250
Slovak
1250
Spanish
1252
Swedish
1252
Thai
Turkish
Ukrainian
1251
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Specifying advanced options for migrating Microsoft Mail users
Click here
&Arial
You can specify the number of errors to tolerate when migrating messages from mailboxes in the Microsoft Mail Postoffice to Notes mail files. By default, the migration tolerates an unlimited number of errors, and completes the migration regardless of the error count. If you specify an error threshold, the migration process terminates whln it reaches the number of errors specified.
1. Select the Maximum Errors radio button. e
2. In the text box, enter the number of errors to tolerate.o
Users who are successfully processed before the error threshold is reached are registered in Notes. If the migration terminates, you should analyze and resolve the error conditions reported for the users who remain in the queue and attempt to register them again.
See Also
Click here
Specifying advanced options for migrating Microsoft Mail users
Click here
&Arial
By dlfault, when you migrate a user from Microsoft Mail, the Personal Address Book information stored with the mailbox is also migrated. After the migration completes, the Domino Administrator automatically places a message in the Inbox of the user's mail file to which it attaches a temporary Notes Personal Address Book, which contains the migrated information. Users run the upgrade wizard for Microsoft Mail at the Notes client to copy the information from this temporary Notes document to the Personal Address Blok on the Notes desktop.
To prevent migration of Personal Address Book information, clear the Convert Personal Address Book checkbox and click OK.
See Also
Click here
Migrating personal mail data
Click here
Click here
Specifying advanced options for migrating Microsoft Mail users
Click here
&Arial
After you successfully import users into the Registration Queue, you are ready to register them and complete the migration. Depending on the options you select, the registration process:
Creates a Notes Person document and Notes ID
Creates a Notes mail file
Migrates messages and other data from the Micrlsoft Mail mailbox
You can specify additional Notes registration information for users, including mail server name, license type, group membership, organizational unit, and so forth.
For more information about the available registration settings, refer to
Click here
"Using Advanced registration"
Click here
Note
After the registration process has started, you cannot use the workstation for any,other task until the process completes. If necessary, you can stop the registration process by pressing CTRL-Break.
1. From the Basics view of the Register Person dialog box, view the registration information for each name that appears in the Registration status box to ensure that it is correct.
2. (Optional) Click the Options button, and select the registration options to apply during this session and click OK.
3. (Optional) Specify additional registration info|mation for users as necessary. If you
Click here
created a 'migration' group
Click here
, open the Groups pane and assign users to this group now.
4. From the Registration status box, select users to register and click Register. The Domino Administrator attempts to register the selected users in the order in which they were added to the queue, and migrates data from their mailboxes to Notes. Users whom you do not select remain in the queue for llter registration.
The registration process may require a considerable amount of time, depending on the number of users and number and size of the mailboxes being upgraded.
After the registration completes, a message informs you of the registration status. Failed registrations continue to be listed in the Registration status box with a status message indicating the reason for the failure. Correct registration settings as needed and attempt to register the user again.
, 5.
Click here
Verify that the migration was successful
Click here
After the migration is complete, users can
Click here
run an upgrade wizard
Click here
to convert local mail archives and other Microsoft Mail data that the Domino migration tool did not process.
209778582429236782
Creating the Notes mail file
If you retained the default setting for the migratlon option "Convert Mail" (that is, the option remains selected), when you register migrated users, the Domino Administrator automatically converts their Microsoft Mail mailboxes to Notes mail files as part of the registration process. On the Mail pane of the Register Person dialog box, the option "Create mail file now" is selected. An error message is displayed if you attempt to change this option to create mail files using the background administrative process (adminp).
See Also
Click here
Importing the Microsoft Mail postoffice address list
Click here
&Arial
If necessary, after you migrate users, you can run the migration tool again to migrate additional messages from Microsoft Mail. You must have Manager access to a user's Notes mail file before you can migrate additional messages to it. By default, admlnistrators do not have Manager access to mail files. If you did not give yourself Manager access to the mail file when preparing for the initial migration, you may need to ask users to edit the ACL to provide you with the appropriate access rights.g
1. Connect to the Microsoft Mail postoffice.
2. Import previously migrated Microsoft Mail users into the Notes registration queue.
3. Set the migration option Convert Mail Only. The migration tool ignores any other lptions that are set.
4. In the Registration status box, select the users whose messages you want to migrate and click Register.
The registration process automatically locates the users' mail files and converts messages in the Microsoft Mail mailbox to messages in the appropriate folders of the Notes mail file. Messages that already exist in the Notes mail file are not converted again.c
See Also
Click here
Converting mail only
Click here
Click here
Setting migration options for Microsoft Mail users
Click here
Click here
Registering users and completing the migration from Microsoft Mail
Click here
Click here
Adding an administrator to a mail file access control list
Click here
&Arial
Using |he Microsoft Exchange to Notes migration tools in the Domino Administrator, you can import Microsoft Exchange users and distribution lists from a selected server and add them to the Domino directory as Notes users and groups. The migration process:
Imports users and distribution lists from the Exchange server and creates entries for them in the Domino Directory
Lets you create a Notes ID and mail file for imported users
Migrates the contents of mailboxes (PST files),that are located in a central location, such as on the Microsoft Exchange server. Mail messages, Calendar entries, and Tasks are all migrated.
This section of the migration guide discusses the following topics related to moving users from Microsoft Exchange to Notes:
Click here
Notes equivalents for migrated Microsoft Exchange data
Click here
Click here
Preparing to migrate users from Microsoft Exchanle
Click here
Click here
Importing users and groups from the Microsoft Exchange directory
Click here
Click here
Registering migrated users
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate Exchange users
Click here
&Arial
The Microsoft Exchange migration tool converts information from the Microsoft Exchange server to Notes, including messages, and private and public address books.
Microsoft Exchange/Outlook data
Equivalent Notes dataf
Calendaring and scheduling information
Calendar view of the Notes Mail file
Contacts
Personal Address Book entries *
Custom message types, including Scheduler messages
Not migrated
Deleted items
Trash folder**
Delivery failure messages
Not migrated
Digital signatures
Not migrated
Distribution lists
Group document in Domino Directory
Encrypted messages
Not migrated
Document links
Not migrated
Journals
Not migrated
Message date and priority
Message date and priority
Messages and attachments
Messages and attachments
Microsoft Office documents
Messages with attached Microsoft Office document
Notes
To Do tasks
Outbox folder
Drafts folder
Exchange directory
Person documents in Domino Directory
Private Address Book
Not migrated
Public folders
Not migrated
\ead and unread status
Not migrated ***
Roles and Permissions on Mailboxes and Folders
Not migrated
Sender and recipient information
Sender and recipient information
Tasks
To Do tasks1
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* Contacts, which are stored on the Exchange server, are available for Outlook clients only. During migration Contacts information is placed in a Notes Personal Address Book database, which is automatically mailed to the user. Users run the upgrade wizard for Microsoft Exchange to copy information from this temporary database to the Personal Address Book on the Notes client.n
** Depending on the user preferences set at the Notes client, messages migrated to the Trash foller may be deleted when users close their mail files.
*** This release of the Domino migration tool for Microsoft Exchange marks all messages migrated from Microsoft Exchange as
unread r
in the Notes mail file.
54494364829232188
Modifying gateway names in migrated messages
When migrating messages and directory information from Exchange, the migration tool for Microsoft Exchange does not automatically convert the names of Exchange ga|eways in the sender's address to Notes gateway addresses. After they begin using Notes mail, users who reply to messages that were received from an external messaging system and migrated from Exchange may need to manually edit the gateway address of the recipient.
412904489629233775
Locating the Microsoft Exchange mail file
The Microsoft Exchange client stores mail messages and Calendar entries in a PST file, which is roughly equivalent to the MMF that Microsoft,Mail clients use. However, unlike Microsoft Mail, which stores both the user's Personal Address Book and mail messages in a single MMF file, Microsoft Exchange uses different files to store these two items.
Exchange clients store a user's Personal Address Book in a PAB file, which is usually located on the user's workstation. Users can run the Microsoft Exchange to Notes upgrade wizard to migrate information from a locally-stored PAB file to the Notes Personal Address Book (NAMES.NSF) on the |orkstation.
Outlook clients can store personal addresses in a PAB file, or in a Contacts list on the Exchange server. The Domino migration tool for Microsoft Exchange automatically places Contacts information in a temporary Notes Personal Address Book, which it attaches to a mail message and places in the Inbox of the migrated user. The migration tool generates a warning message in the Notes log for each migrating user for whom Contacts information is not found. Users can run the Microsoft Exclange to Notes upgrade wizard to migrate address information from a temporary Personal Address Book to the Personal Address Book on the workstation.
The Microsoft Exchange mail box is stored in a PST file, which can be stored either locally, or on the Exchange server. The Domino migration tool for Microsoft Exchange can migrate information only from PST files that are located on the Exchange server. Users can run the Microsoft Exchange to Notes upgrade wizard at their workstation to migrate mes|ages and other items from locally-stored PST files.
309614233629237010
Migrating messages from the Outbox and Sent Items folders
All Exchange mailboxes contain the folders Outbox and Sent Items. When you migrate mail for Exchange users, these folders are not added to the Notes mail file. However, in general, the messages in these folders are migrated. Messages in the Sent Items folder are migrated to the Notes Sent folder, and messages in the Outbox folder are milrated to the Drafts folder.
If a user manually copied
received
messages to the Outbox, or saved unsent,
draft
messages to the Sent Items folders (for example, by using a drag-and-drop operation), the migration tool migrates the messages, but does not place them in the equivalent Notes Drafts and Sent folders. After migration, users must select the All documents view to see the messages.
142668201629238430
Migrating an Exchange folder that has the same name as an existing Notes folder
If a folder in a migrating Exchange mailbox has the same name as a folder view that already exists in the Notes mail file (for example, Discussion Threads), the migration tool appends the numeral 1 to the name of the folder name to make it unique (for example, Discussion Threads1). Additional duplicates are numbered sequentially to ensure uniqueness (for example, Discussion Threads2, Discussion Threads3, and so forth).
See Also
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Exchange users
Click here
&Arial
Use this procedure to upgrade a flat server name to a hierarchical server name. After upgrading a server name to a hierarchical name, the server cannot be renamed.
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the server you are upgrading from the Server view.e
2. Choose Actions - Upgrade server to hierarchical.
3. Choose the new certifier ID..
4. Enter the password lor the certifier ID and click OK.
5. (Optional) Enter the qualifying organizational unit.
6. Accept or change the certification ID expiration date.
H_UPGRADING_ORGANIZER_INFORMATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_415543744029225736=Determining the character set (code page) for mig{ating Organizer dataH_UPGRADING_ORGANIZER_INFORMATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_89888393629236785=Migrating multiple sections of one typeH_UPGRADING_ORGANIZER_INFORMATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_385100544029239611=Supplying a password when migrating Organizer data01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Organizer migration\meeting informationContentsDetailsH_MIGRA[ING_MEETING_INFORMATION_DETAILSTopic1Migrating Organizer meeting informationDetailsH_UPGRADING_ORGANIZER_INFORMATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating Organizer Calls sectionsMail Migration
Organizer migration\Calls sectionsOrganizer migration\Notes equivalents for migrated datacc:Mail migration\Organizer data andContentsDetailsH_MIGRATING_ORGANIZER_CALLS_SECTIONS_DETAILSTopic1Migrating Organizer Calls sectionsDetailsH_UPGRADING_ORGANIZER_INFORMATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David+Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
back to
Migrating Organizer Address and Notepad sectionsMail Migration
Organizer migration\Notepad sectionsOrganizer migration\addressesOrganizer migration\graphicscc:Mail migra{ion\Organizer data andContentsDetailsH_MIGRATING_ORGANIZER_ADDRESS_AND_NOTEPAD_SECTIONS_DETAILSTopic1Migrating Organizer Address and Notepad sectionsDetailsH_UPGRADING_ORGANIZER_INFORMATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
w as a Lo
Preparing to migrate Organizer informationMail Migration
Compacting\Organizer data before migrationOrganizer migration\tasksContentsOverviewH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_ORGANIZER_INFORMATION_OVERTopic1Preparing to migrate Organizer informationOverviewH_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Connecting to the Organizer data directoriesMail Migration
Organizer migration\data directoriesContentsOverviewH_CONNECTING_TO_THE_KRGANIZER_DATA_DIRECTORIES_OVERTopic1Connecting to the Organizer data directoriesOverviewH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_ORGANIZER_INFORMATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Changes made to a user's cc:Mail directory entry when migrating Organizer informationMail Migration
Organizer data\secondary migration ofOrganizer migration\Notes equivalents for migrated datacc:Mail migration\Organizer data andContentsOverviewH_SAVING_CC_MAIL_COMMENTS_INFORMATION_OVERTopic1Changes made to a user's cc:Mail directory entry when migrating Organizer informationOverviewH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_ORGANIZER_INFORKATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
rt and ex
Specifying the path to a network copy of the upgrade wkzardMail Migration
Upgrade wizards\specifying the path to network copies of theContentsDetailsH_SPECIFYING_THE_PATH_TO_A_NETWORK_COPY_OF_THE_UPGRADE_WIZARD_DETAILSTopic1Specifying the path to a network copy of the upgrade wizardDetailsH_SENDING_USERS_AN_UPGRADE_NOTIFICATION_MESSAGE_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
75c$~
&Arial
Preparing Organizer users for migrationMail Migration
Archiving\Organizer dataCompacting\Organizer data before migrationOrganizer migration\archiving dataOrganizer migration\tasksContentsOverviewH_PREPARING_ORAANIZER_USERS_FOR_MIGRATION_OVERTopic1Preparing Organizer users for migrationOverviewH_PREPARING_TO_UPGRADE_ORGANIZER_INFORMATION_OVER
H_PREPARING_ORGANIZER_USERS_FOR_MIGRATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_233167724829229963=Recording information about included sectionsH_PREPARING_ORGANIZER_USERS_FOR_MIGRATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_233167724829229964=Processing meeting noticesH_PREPARING_ORGANIZER_USERS_FOR_MIGRATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_233167724829229965=Removing data that does not need to be migratedH_PREPARING_ORGANIZER_USEQS_FOR_MIGRATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_350829923229239409=Archiving data to be migrated01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
et certif
Importing the cc:Mail post office directoryMail Migration
cc:Mail migration\post officeContentsOverviewH_IMPORTING_CC_MAIL_USERS_TO_UPGRADE_OVERVIEWTopic1Importing the cc:Mail post office directoryOverviewH_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Connecting to the cc:Mail post officeMail Migration
cc:Mail migration\connecting to post officeContentsOverviewH_CONNECTING_TO_THE_CC_MAIL_POST_OFFICE_OVERTopic1Connecting to the cc:Mail post officeOverviewH_IMPORTING_CC_MAIL_USERS_TO_UPGRADE_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Qsers from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
tiple In
Importing cc:Mail users and groups into the Notes registration queueMail Migration
Registration queue\addang cc:Mail userscc:Mail migration\adding users to registration queueContentsOverviewH_IMPORTING_CC_MAIL_USERS_INTO_THE_NOTES_REGISTRATION_QUEUE_OVERTopic1Importing cc:Mail users and groups into the Notes registration queueOverviewH_IMPORTING_CC_MAIL_USERS_TO_UPGRADE_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Importing cc:Mail Mobile usersMail Migration
Mobile users\migrating from cc:Mailcc:Mail migration\mobile usersContentsDetailsH_IMPORTING_CC_MAIL_MOBILE_USERS_DETAILSTopic1Importing cc:Mail Mobile usersDetailsH_IMPORTING_CC_MAIL_USERS_INTO_THE_NOTES_REGISTRATION_QUEUE_OVER01 Moving to Noteq and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
cc:Mail migration\aptionsContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_MIGRATION_SETTINGS_OVERTopic1Customizing cc:Mail migration settingsOverviewH_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
message
Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail usersMail Migration
cc:Mail migration\optionsContentsStepsH_TO_SPECIFY_CCMAIL_UPGRADE_SETTINGS_STEPSTopic1Specifying advanced settings for migrating cc:Mail usersStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_MIGRATION_SETTINGS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying cc:Mail conversion settings Mail Migration
Language code page\cc:Mail migration andcc:Mail migration\language code pagecc:Mail migration\optionsContentsExamplesH_SPECIFYING_CCMAIL_CONVERSION_SATTINGS_EXTopic1Specifying cc:Mail conversion settings ExamplesH_TO_SPECIFY_CCMAIL_UPGRADE_SETTINGS_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Mailing cc:Mail private mailing lists and R8 address books as Notes attachmentsMail Migration
Private mailing lists\migrating for cc:Mail 6.3 userscc:Mail 6.3\migrating private mailing listscc:Mail migration\private mailing listsContentsOverviewH_MAILING_PRIVATE_MAILING_LISTS_AS_ATTACHMENTS_OVERTopic1Mailing cc:Mail private mailing lists and R8 address books as Notes attachmentsOverviewH_SPECIFYING_CCMAIL_CONVERSION_SETTINGS_EX11 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
You can om your Notes User ID. Importing Internet certificates allows you to use them for SSL client authentication, and for encrypted and signed S/MIME messages. For example, if you are using a Netscape browser that is compliant with Public Key Cryptographic Standard #12 (PKCS #12), and have Internet certificates and keys (in compliance with PKCS !12) accessible from your local machine, you can import them into your Notes User ID file. On the same note, if you have Internet certificates and keys (in compliance with PKCS #12) in your Notes User ID file, you can export them to a file on your local machine and then import them to use with a Netscape browser.
Click any of these topics:
Click here
Converting Organizer .OR2 scheduling files to NotesMail Migration
Organizer data\converting to NotesContentsOverviewH_CONVERTING_ORGANIZER_OR2_SCHEDULING_FILES_TO_NOTES_OVERTopic1Converting Organizer .OR2 scheduling files tk NotesOverviewH_SPECIFYING_CCMAIL_CONVERSION_SETTINGS_EX01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Conver{ing cc:Mail alias entriesMail Migration
Aliases\migrating cc:Mailcc:Mail MTA\migration requirements forcc:Mail migration\aliasesContentsOverviewH_CONVERTING_CC_MAIL_ALIAS_ENTRIES_OVERTopic1Converting cc:Mail alias entriesOverviewH_SPECIFYING_CCMAIL_CONVERSION_SETTINGS_EX01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Converting bulletin boards to a Notes discussion databaseMail Migration
CCNOTBB.NSF\migrating cc:Mail bulletin boards toMobile users\migrating from cc:MailSubscription bulletin boards\migrating from cc:Mailcc:Mail MTA\bulletin board conversioncc:Mail migration\kulletin board conversioncc:Mail migration\mobile usersContentsOverviewH_CONVERTING_BULLETIN_BOARDS_TO_NOTES_DISCUSSION_DATABASES_OVERTopic1Converting bulletin boards to a Notes discussion databaseOverviewH_SPECIFYING_CCMAIL_CONVERSION_SETTINGS_EX
H_CONVERTING_BULLETIN_BOARDS_TO_NOTES_DISCUSSION_DATABASES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_78088275229238164=Migrating subscription bulletin boards01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CKM/O=Lotus
our Nets
F_}ie
Specifying the code page to use for converting cc:Mail dataMail Migration
Language code page\cc:Mail migration andcc:Mail migration\language code pageContentsOverviewH_SPECIFYING_THE_COKE_PAGE_TO_USE_FOR_CONVERTING_CC_MAIL_DATA_OVERTopic1Specifying the code page to use for converting cc:Mail dataOverviewH_SPECIFYING_CCMAIL_CONVERSION_SETTINGS_EX01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Certificat
Retaining cc:Mail MTA routing information for deferred mailbox migrationMail Migration
.AContentsDetailsH_RETAIN_CC_MTA_ROUTE_INFO_FOR_DEFERRED_MIGRATIONTopic1Retaining cc:Mail MTA routing information for deferred mailbox migrationDetailsH_SPECIFYING_CCMAIL_CONVERSION_SETTINGS_EX
H_RETAIN_CC_MTA_ROUTE_INFO_FOR_DEFERRED_MIGRATION_MIDTOPIC_292796451229277229=Phase 1H_RETAIN_CC_MTA_ROUTE_INFO_FOR_DEFERRED_MIGRATION_MIDTOPIC_292796451229277230=Phask 2H_RETAIN_CC_MTA_ROUTE_INFO_FOR_DEFERRED_MIGRATION_MIDTOPIC_292796451229277231=Completing the first phase of the migrationH_RETAIN_CC_MTA_ROUTE_INFO_FOR_DEFERRED_MIGRATION_MIDTOPIC_292796451229277232=Completing the second phase of the migration
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Mapping cc:Mail gateways to Notes domainsMail Migration
Examples\mapping gatewaysGateway mapping\between cc:Mail and NotesGateways\mappingMessage gateways\cc:Mail migration andUpgrade wizards\gateway mappingcc:Mail migration\mapping gateways to Notes domainscc:Mail migration\upgrade wizardContentsOverviewH_MAPPING_CC_MAIL_GATEWAYS_TO_NOTES_DOMAINS_OVERTopic1Mapping cc:Mail gateways to Notes domaiksOverviewH_TO_SPECIFY_CCMAIL_UPGRADE_SETTINGS_STEPS
H_MAPPING_CC_MAIL_GATEWAYS_TO_NOTES_DOMAINS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_78088275229238164=About message gatewaysH_MAPPING_CC_MAIL_GATEWAYS_TO_NOTES_DOMAINS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_78088275229238165=Mapping a cc:Mail gateway to a Notes gateway01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
3. Check
Specifying other cc:Mail upgrade settingsMail Migration
cc:Mail migration\error thresholdcc:Mail migration\upgrade settingsContentsExamplesH_SPECIFYING_MAILBOX_UPGRADE_SETTINGS_EXTopic1Specifying other cc:Mail upgrade settingsExamplesH_TO_SPECIFY_CCMAIL_UPGRADE_SETTINGS_STEPS01 Moving to Kotes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading to the cc:Mail Release 6.3 client for DominoMail Migratikn
R63MAIL.NTF\mail template for cc:Mail 6.3 userscc:Mail 6.3\mail template forcc:Mail 6.3\migrating private mailing listscc:Mail migration\versions supportedContentsDetailsH_UPGRADING_TO_THE_CC_MAIL_RELEASE_6_3_CLIENT_FOR_DOMINO_DETAILSTopic1Upgrading to the cc:Mail Release 6.3 client for DominoDetailsH_SPECIFYING_MAILBOX_UPGRADE_SETTINGS_EX01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ecting direInternet through an Internet Service Provider (ISP). If you don't specify a proxy server, you can only access the Internet if you have a direct Internet connection. Ask your Domino administrator if you have a proxy server and what its name or IP address is, and then specify the following proxy settings.
1. Choose File - Mobile - Edit Current Location to open your Location document.u
2. Click the Basics tab, and in the Proxy field enter the name or IP addre{s of the proxy and the port; for example, proxy.company.com:8080 or 192.168.18.130:8080.
3. (Optional) Click the button next to the Proxy field
Specifying the post office for routing mail to NotesMail Migration
Location codes\cc:Mailcc:Mail migration\forwarding mail to Notescc:Mail migration\location codesContentsDetailsH_SPECIFYING_THE_POST_OFFICE_FOR_[OUTING_MAIL_TO_NOTES_DETAILSTopic1Specifying the post office for routing mail to NotesDetailsH_SPECIFYING_MAILBOX_UPGRADE_SETTINGS_EX
H_SPECIFYING_THE_POST_OFFICE_FOR_ROUTING_MAIL_TO_NOTES_DETAILS_MIDTOPIC_297332736029233591=About cc:Mail user files and messages left after migration01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying an error thresholdMail Migration
cc:Mail migration\error thresholdContentsDetailsH_SPECIFYING_AN_ERROR_THRESHOLD_DETAILSTopic1Specifying an error thresholdDetailsH_SPECIFYING_MAILBOX_UPGRADE_SETTINGS_EX01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Kail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting migration options for cc:MailMail Migration
cc:Mail migration\optionscc:Mail migration\passwordsContentsStepsK_TO_SPECIFY_COMMON_IMPORT_OPTIONS_STEPSTopic1Setting migration options for cc:MailStepsH_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Registering users and completing the cc:Mail migrationMail Migration
cc:Mail migration\registering usersContentsOverviewH_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_COMPLETING_THE_UPGRADE_OVERTopic1Registering users and completing the cc:Mail migrationOverviewH_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW
H_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_COMPLETING_THE_UPGRADE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_350264233629237010=Creating the Notes mail file01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating+Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
on Internet
Ensuring compatibility with the cc:Mail MTAMail Migration
cc:Mail MTA\migration requirements forcc:Makl migration\MTA requirementsContentsOverviewH_ENSURING_COMPATIBILITY_WITH_CCMAIL_MTA_OVERVIEWTopic1Ensuring compatibility with the cc:Mail MTAOverviewH_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Synchronizing the cc:Mail directory and Domino Directory when using the cc:Mail MTAMail Migration
cc:Mail MTA\migration requirements forcc:Mail migration\directory conversionContentsOverviewH_SYNCHRONIZING_THE_CC_MAIL_AND_NOTES_DIRECTORIES_WHEN_USING_THE_CC_MAIL_MTA_OVERTopic1Synchronizing the cc:Mail directory and Domino Directory when using the cc:Mail MTAOverviewH[ENSURING_COMPATIBILITY_WITH_CCMAIL_MTA_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
both of
Synchronizing direktories when migrating from a downstream post officeMail Migration
cc:Mail migration\Notes equivalents for migrated datacc:Mail migration\directory conversionContentsOverviewH_SYNCHRONIZING_DIRECTORIES_WHEN_MIGRATING_FROM_A_DOWNSTREAM_POST_OFFICE_OVERTopic1Synchronizing directories when migrating from a downstream post officeOverviewH_ENSURING_COMPATIBILITY_WITH_CCMAIL_MTA_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN;David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Synchronizing cc:Mail bulletin boards and Notes discussion databasesMail Migration
Bulletin boards\cc:Mailcc:Mail MTA\migration requirements forcc:Mail migration\b{lletin board conversionContentsOverviewH_RETAINING_CCMAIL_BULLETIN_BOARD_INFORMATION_AFTER_MIGRATION_OVERVIEWTopic1Synchronizing cc:Mail bulletin boards and Notes discussion databasesOverviewH_ENSURING_COMPATIBILITY_WITH_CCMAIL_MTA_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
4. Selec
Specifying gateway mapping for migrating cc:Mail usersMail Migration
.AContentsDetailsH_SPECIFYING_GATEWAY_MAPPING_FOR_MIGRATING_CC_MAIL_USERS_DETAILSTopic1Specifying gateway mapping for migrating cc:Mail usersDetailsH_SENDING_USERS_AN_UPGRADE_NOTIFICATION_MESSAGE_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Da{a
@Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Removing the user files and messages of migrated users from the cc:Mail post officeMail Migration
Location codes\cc:MailWinAdmin\deleting cc:Mail files after migrationcc:Mail Admin\deleting files withcc:Lail CHKSTAT\deleting messages withcc:Mail MSGMGR\deleting messages withcc:Mail migration\deleting user filescc:Mail migration\location codesContentsOverviewH_CLEANING_UP_ERRORS_AFTER_MIGRATION_OVERVIEWTopic1Removing the user files and messages of migrated users from the cc:Mail post officeOverviewH_ENSURING_COMPATIBILITY_WITH_CCMAIL_MTA_OVERVIEW
H_CLEANING_UP_ERRORS_AFTER_MIGRATION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_302974259229236374=Deleting cc:Mail user files using cc:Mail Admin or WinAdminH_CLEANING_UP_ERRORS_AF\ER_MIGRATION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_337300854429236587=For post office entries where lowercase " l " or " r " designate the user's locationH_CLEANING_UP_ERRORS_AFTER_MIGRATION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_337300854429236588=For post office entries where uppercase "L" or "R" designate the user's location01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ficate or I
Migrating additional cc:Mail messages after registrationMail Migration
cc:Mail MTA\forwarding mail withcc:Mail migration\Convert Mail Onlycc:Mail migration\forwarding mailContentsOverviewH_MIGRATING_CC_MAIL_MESSAGES_AFTER_REGISTRATION_OVERTopic1Migrating additional cc:Mall messages after registrationOverviewH_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating Microsoft Mail usersMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\adding users to NotesMicrosoft Mail migration\versions supportedContentsOverviewH_UPGRADING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_USERS_OVERVIEWTopic1Migrating Microsoft Mail usersOverviewH_MAIL_MIGRATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Notes equivalents for migrated Microsoft Mail dataMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\Notes equivalents for migrated dataMicrosoft Mail migration\address booksContentsOverviewH_OVERVIEW_OF_MESSAGING_INFORMATION_MIGRATED_OVERVIEWTopic1Notes equivalen|s for migrated Microsoft Mail dataOverviewH_UPGRADING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
icking on
Understanding how the migration tool parses Microsoft Mail name formatsMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\Notes equivalents for migrated dataMicrosoft Mail migration\name conversion errorsMicrosoft Mail migration\naming conventionsNaming conventions\for migrated Microsoft Mail namesNotes names\converting Microsoft Mail names toUser names\Microsoft MailContentsOverviewH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_THE_MIGRATION_TOOL_PARSES_MICROSOFT_MAIL_NAME_FORMATS_OVER\opic1Understanding how the migration tool parses Microsoft Mail name formatsOverviewH_UPGRADING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW
H_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_THE_MIGRATION_TOOL_PARSES_MICROSOFT_MAIL_NAME_FORMATS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_111531030429240027=Table: Generating Notes name components from Microsoft Mail namesH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_THE_MIGRATION_TOOL_PARSES_MICROSOFT_MAIL_NAME_FORMATS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_111531030429240028=Parsing names that have no blank spaces or commasH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_THE_MIGRATION_TOOL_PARSE\_MICROSOFT_MAIL_NAME_FORMATS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_111531030429240029=Parsing names that include a commaH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_THE_MIGRATION_TOOL_PARSES_MICROSOFT_MAIL_NAME_FORMATS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_111531030429240030=Parsing names with three components that have spaces and no commasH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_THE_MIGRATION_TOOL_PARSES_MICROSOFT_MAIL_NAME_FORMATS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_111591030429240031=Parsing names of four or more components that have spaces, and no commasH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_THE_MIGRATION_TOOL_PARSES_MICROSOFT_MAIL_NALE_FORMATS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_283380976029239816=Parsing errors01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Preparing to migrate Microsoft Mail usersMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\tasksContentsOverviewH_BEFORE_UPGRADING_MS_MAIL_USERS_OVERVIEWTopic1Preparing to migrate Microsoft Mail usersOverviewH_UPGRADING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
cuments
Backing up Domino InformationMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\backing up Domino filesContentsOverviewH_BACKING_UP_DOMINO_INFORMATION_OVERTopic1Backing up Domino InformationOverviewH_UPGRADING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail User| to Notes
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
What is the maximum value (in inches) you can enter for margin size?
What is the maximum value (in inches) you can enter for page size cropping?a
What is the maximum point size you can select/print?
How many documents are allowed in one view?
Maximum of 130MB for a view index
What is the maximum number of documents that can be exported to Tabular Text?
Limited only by available disk space
What is the maximum number of entries in an Access Control List?
Importing the Microsoft Mail postoffice address listMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\user address listContentsOverviewH_IMPORTING_THE_MICROSOFT_MAIL_POSTOFFICE_ADDRESS_LIST_OVERVIEWTopic1Importing the Microsoft Mail {ostoffice address listOverviewH_UPGRADING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Connecting to the Microsoft Mail postofficeMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\connecting to postofficeContentsOverviewH_CONNECTING_TO_THE_MICROSOFT_MAIL_POSTOFFICE_OVERTopic1Connecting to the Microsoft Mail postofficeOverviewH_IMPORTING_THE_MICROSOFT_MAIL_POSTOFFICE_ADDRESS_LIST_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Importing Microsoft Mail users into the registration queueMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\registering usersRegistration queue\adding Microsoft Mail usersContentsStepsH_TO_IMPORT_USERS_FROM_THE_MICROSOFT_MAIL_POSTOFFICE_STKPSTopic1Importing Microsoft Mail users into the registration queueStepsH_IMPORTING_THE_MICROSOFT_MAIL_POSTOFFICE_ADDRESS_LIST_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
nts can be
Customizing Microsoft Mail migration settingsMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\optionsContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_MIGRATION_SETTINGS_OVERTopic1Customizing Microsoft Mail migration settingsOverviewH_UPGRADING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting migration options for Microsoft Mail usersMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\optionsContentsExamplesH_SPECIFYING_IMPORT_OPTIONS_EXTopic1Setting migration options for Microsoft Mail usersExam{lesH_CUSTOMIZING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_MIGRATION_SETTINGS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying advanced options for migrating Microsoft Mail usersMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\optionsContentsExamplesH_SPECIFYING_ADVANCED_MICROSOFT_MAIL_OPTIONS_EXTopic1Specifying advanced options for migrating Microsoft Mail usersExamplesH_CUSTOMIZING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_MIGRATION_SETTINGS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying the code page to use for converting the Microsoft Mail post officeMail Migration
Character sets\Microsoft MailLanguage code page\Microsoft Mail migration andMicrosoft Mail migration\language code page andContentsOver{iewH_SPECIFYING_THE_CODE_PAGE_TO_USE_FOR_CONVERTING_THE_MICROSOFT_MAIL_POST_OFFICE_OVERTopic1Specifying the code page to use for converting the Microsoft Mail post officeOverviewH_SPECIFYING_ADVANCED_MICROSOFT_MAIL_OPTIONS_EX01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
o choose a
Specifying an error thresholdMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\error thresholdContentsOverviewH_SPECIFYING_AN_ERROR_THRESHOLD_OVERTopic1Specifying an error thresholdOverviewH_SPECIFYING_ADVANCED_MICROSOFT_MAIL_OPTIONS_EX01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
?Prin{
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating Microsoft Mail Personal Address Books to NotesMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\address booksContentsOverviewH_MIGRATING_MICROSKFT_MAIL_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOKS_TO_NOTES_OVERTopic1Migrating Microsoft Mail Personal Address Books to NotesOverviewH_SPECIFYING_ADVANCED_MICROSOFT_MAIL_OPTIONS_EX01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s - Control
^8,,~
Before you create a clusterClusters
Clusters\creatingContentsOverviewH_BEFORE_YOU_CREATE_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Before you create a clusterOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ed to COM1 or Serial1 and a modem is connected to COM2 or Serial2.)
See Also
Click here
Port settings
Click here
Click here
Modem settings
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes for a remote location
Click here
Click here
Setting up a Remote Access S
Registering users and completing the migration from Microsoft MailMail Migration
Domino Administrator\creating mail files for migrated usersMail files\creating with Domino AdministratorMicrosoft Mail mlgration\creating Notes mail filesMicrosoft Mail migration\registering usersMicrosoft Mail migration\upgrade wizardRegistration queue\adding Microsoft Mail usersRegistration\stoppingUpgrade wizards\for Microsoft Mail dataContentsOverviewH_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_COMPLETING_THE_MIGRATION_FROM_MICROSOFT_MAIL_OVERTopic1Registering users and completing the migration from Microsoft MailOverviewH_UPGRADING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW
H_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_COMPLETING_THE_MIGRATION_FROM_MICROSOFT_MAIL_OVER_MID\OPIC_209778582429236782=Creating the Notes mail file01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
w '(All)
Milrating additional Microsoft Mail messages after registrationMail Migration
Microsoft Mail migration\Convert Mail Only optionContentsOverviewH_MIGRATING_ADDITIONAL_MICROSOFT_MAIL_MESSAGES_AFTER_REGISTRATION_OVERTopic1Migrating additional Microsoft Mail messages after registrationOverviewH_UPGRADING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
es 5 Help
Migrating Microsoft Exchange users Mail Migration
Domino migration tools\Microsoft ExchangeExchange. See Microsoft ExchangeMicrosoft Exchange migration\overviewContentsOverviewH_MIGRATING_EXCHANGE_USERS_OVERVIEW\opic1Migrating Microsoft Exchange users OverviewH_MAIL_MIGRATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 515 Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Notes equivalents for migrated Microsoft Exchange dataMail Migration
Microsoft Exchange migration\Notes equivalents for migrated dataMicrosoft Exchange migration\PST filesMicrosoft Exchange migration\foldersMicrosoft Exchange migration\mail filesPST files\migrating messages fromContentsOverviewH_MIGRATING_MICROSOFT_EXCHANGE_DATA_TO_NOTES_OVERTopic1Notes equivalents for migrated Microsoft Exchange dataOverviewH_MIGRATING_EXCHANGE_USERS_OVER\IEW
H_MIGRATING_MICROSOFT_EXCHANGE_DATA_TO_NOTES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_54494364829232188=Modifying gateway names in migrated messages H_MIGRATING_MICROSOFT_EXCHANGE_DATA_TO_NOTES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_412904489629233775=Locating the Microsoft Exchange mail fileH_MIGRATING_MICROSOFT_EXCHANGE_DATA_TO_NOTES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_309614233629237010=Migrating messages from the Outbox and Sent Items foldersH_MIGRATING_MICROSOFT_EXCHANGE_DATA_TO_NOTES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_142668201629238430=Migrating an Exchange folder that has the sale name as an existing Notes folder01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 515 Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
for more i
Preparing to migra|e Exchange usersMail Migration
Microsoft Exchange migration\tasksContentsOverviewH_PREPARING_TO_MIGRATE_EXCHANGE_USERS_OVERVIEWTopic1Preparing to migrate Exchange usersOverviewH_MIGRATING_EXCHANGE_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 515 Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ou get "Er
Importing the Microsoft Exchange directoryMail Migration
Microsoft Exchange migration\directoryContentsOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FOR_MIGRATION_OVERVIEWTopic1Importing the Microsoft Exchange directoryOverviewH_MIGRATING_EXCHANGE_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 515 Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
until it
Connecting to the Exchange serverMail Migration
Mail profiles\Microsoft Exchange migration andMicrosoft Exchange migration\mail,profilesMicrosoft Exchange migration\tasksContentsOverviewH_CONNECTING_TO_THE_EXCHANGE_SERVER_OVERTopic1Connecting to the Exchange serverOverviewH_MIGRATING_EXCHANGE_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 515 Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying an administrator mail profileMail Migration
MAPI profile\Microsoft Exchange migration andMail profiles\Microsoft Exchange migration andMicrosoft Exchange migration\mail profilesContentsOverviewH_SPECIFYING_A_PRIVILEGED_MAIL_MAPI_PROFILE_OVERVIEWTopic1Specifying an administrator mail profileOverviewH_CONNECTING_TO_THE_EXCHANGE_SERVER_OVER01 Moving to Notes anl Domino Release 515 Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
f the folls:
Notes doesn't resolve URLs that point to somewhere within the same Web page.
Notes supports HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, Gopher, Finger, and Mailto URLs. If it encounters a URL link other than these types, the text won't be blue, underlined, or a link.
Your Domino administrator might have changed how URLs should appea|. Call your Domino administrator to find out.
Click here
back to topl
Click here
234999302429239215
Why don't URLs appear as hotspots?
URL hotspots are not created automatically. The "Make Internet URLs into Hotspots" user preference must be checked (choose File - Preferences - User Preferences to see the prefer
Importing Microsoft Exchange users into the registration queueMail Migration
Microsoft Exchange migration\adding users to the registration queueRegistration queue\adding Microsoft Exchange usersContentsOverviewH_IMPORTING^PEOPLE_FROM_THE_EXCHANGE_SERVER_INTO_THE_NOTES_REGISTRATION_QUEUE_OVERTopic1Importing Microsoft Exchange users into the registration queueOverviewH_MIGRATING_EXCHANGE_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 515 Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
en the cons
Setting migration options for Microsoft Exchange usersMail Migration
Microsoft Exchange migration\optionsContentsOverviewH_SETTING_MIGRATION_OPTIONS_OVERTopic1Setting migration options for Microsoft Exchange usersOverviewH_MIGRATING_EXCHANGE_USERS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 515 Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Registering users and completing the migration from ExchangeMail Migration
Microsoft Exchange migration\creating Notes mail filesMicrosoft Exchange.migration\registering usersRegistration queue\adding Microsoft Exchange usersContentsOverviewH_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_COMPLETING_THE_MIGRATION_OVERVIEWTopic1Registering users and completing the migration from ExchangeOverviewH_MIGRATING_EXCHANGE_USERS_OVERVIEW
H_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_COMPLETING_THE_MIGRATION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178963257629237820=Creating the Notes mail file01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 515 Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange
Print
CN=David Mnhar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating Windows NT usersMail Migration
Domino migration tools\Windows NTContentsOverviewH_IMPORTING_WINDOWS_NT_USERS_OVERTopic1Migrating Windows NT usersOverviewH_MAIL_MIGRA^ION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 516 Migrating Users from a Windows NT Domain List
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Preparing to inport users from Windows NTMail Migration
Windows NT migration\tasksContentsDetailsH_PREPARING_TO_IMPORT_USERS_FROM_WINDOWS_NT_DETAILSTopic1Preparing to import users from Windows NTDetailsH_IMPORTING_WINDOWS_NT_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 516 Migrating Users from a Windows NT Domain List
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying the Windows NT domain to import fromMail Migration
Windows NT migration\domain listWindows NT migration\requirementsContentsOverviewH_SPECIFYING_THE_DIRECTORY_TYPE_AND_LOCATION_OVERVIEWTopic1Specifying the Windows NT domain to import fromOverviewH_IMPORTING_WINDOWS_NT_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Nomino Release 516 Migrating Users from a Windows NT Domain List
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ny protoco
Importing Windows NT users into the Notes registration queueMail Migra~ion
Registration queue\adding Windows NT usersWindows NT migration\adding users to registration queueContentsOverviewH_SELECTING_USERS_TO_IMPORT_OVERVIEWTopic1Importing Windows NT users into the Notes registration queueOverviewH_IMPORTING_WINDOWS_NT_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 516 Migrating Users from a Windows NT Domain List
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e, you sh
Setting migration options for Windows NT usersMail Migration
Windows NT migration\optionsContentsStepsH_SPECIFYING_IMPORT_OPTIONS_STEPSTopic1Setting migration options for Windows NT usersStepsH_IMPORTING_WINDOWS_NT_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 516 Migratinn Users from a Windows NT Domain List
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying advanced options for importing Windows NT usersMail Migration
Windows NT mig~ation\optionsContentsOverviewH_SPECIFYING_ADVANCED_OPTIONS_FOR_IMPORTING_A_WINDOWS_NT_DOMAIN_LIST_OVERTopic1Specifying advanced options for importing Windows NT usersOverviewH_IMPORTING_WINDOWS_NT_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 516 Migrating Users from a Windows NT Domain List
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating a clusterClusters
Clusters\creatingContentsStepsH_CREATING_A_CLUSTER_STEPSTopic1Creating a clusterStepsH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
%# #
% # # #
# #
# # #
Creating Notes short names from Windows NT user namesMail Migration
Notes names\converting Windows NT names toNotes short names\generatingWindows NT migration\Notes equivalents for migrated dataContentsDetailsH_CREATINGPNOTES_SHORT_NAMES_FROM_WINDOWS_NT_USER_NAMES_DETAILSTopic1Creating Notes short names from Windows NT user namesDetailsH_SPECIFYING_ADVANCED_OPTIONS_FOR_IMPORTING_A_WINDOWS_NT_DOMAIN_LIST_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 516 Migrating Users from a Windows NT Domain List
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying how to convert Windows NT full names into Notes name componentsMail Migration
Naming conventions\for migrated Windows NT namesNotes names\converting Windows NT names toRegistration queue\editing user namesUser names\migrated Windows NTWindows NT migration\Notes equivalents for migrated dataWindows NT migration\name convepsion errorsWindows NT migration\name formatsWindows NT\user name formatContentsOverviewH_SPECIFYING_HOW_NOTES_PARSES_NT_FULL_NAMES_INTO_NAME_COMPONENTS_OVERVIEWTopic1Specifying how to convert Windows NT full names into Notes name componentsOverviewH_SPECIFYING_ADVANCED_OPTIONS_FOR_IMPORTING_A_WINDOWS_NT_DOMAIN_LIST_OVER
H_SPECIFYING_HOW_NOTES_PARSES_NT_FULL_NAMES_INTO_NAME_COMPONENTS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_157216982429232782=Understanding differences between Windows NT names and Notes name componentsH_SP@CIFYING_HOW_NOTES_PARSES_NT_FULL_NAMES_INTO_NAME_COMPONENTS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_393049443229232585=Selecting a parsing formatH_SPECIFYING_HOW_NOTES_PARSES_NT_FULL_NAMES_INTO_NAME_COMPONENTS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_157216982429232783=Importing users who do not have full names01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 516 Migrating Users from a Windows NT Domain List
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Registering users and completing the migration from Windows NTMail Migration
Registration queue\adding Windows NT usersWindows NT migration\registering usersContentsOverviewH_REGISTERING_USERS_AND_COMPLETING_THE_MIGRATION_FROM_WINDOWS_NT_OVERTopic1Registering users and complet`ng the migration from Windows NTOverviewH_IMPORTING_WINDOWS_NT_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 516 Migrating Users from a Windows NT Domain List
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating users from an LDIF fileMail Migration
Domino migration tools\LDIF fileLDIF file migration\overviewContentsOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_LDIF_FILE_OVERTopic1Migrating users from an LDIF fileOverviewH_MAIL_MIGRATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
What is LDIF?Mail Migration
Character sets\LDIF fileExamples\LDIF fileLDAP Data Interchange Format. See LDIFLDIF\definedLDIF\name formatsUTF-8 character set\in LDIF filesUser names\LDIF fileContentsOverviewH_WHAT_IS_LDIF_OVERVIEWTopic1What is LDIF0OverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_LDIF_FILE_OVER
H_WHAT_IS_LDIF_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_175999420829237829=Sample LDIF file entry01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Understanding how Notes uses information in the LDIF fileMail Migration
LDIF file migration\Notes equivalents for migrated dataLDIF file migration\object classesContentsOverviewH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_NOTES_USES_INFORMATION_IN_THE_LDIF_FILE_OVERTopic1Understanding how Notes uses information in the LDIF fileOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_LDIF_FILE_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Adding the distinguished name to the Person documentMail Migration
Distinguished names\adding to the Person documentL@IF file migration\distinguished namesContentsOverviewH_ADDING_THE_DISTINGUISHED_NAME_TO_THE_PERSON_DOCUMENT_OVERTopic1Adding the distinguished name to the Person documentOverviewH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_NOTES_USES_INFORMATION_IN_THE_LDIF_FILE_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Processing object classesMail Migration
LDIF file migration\object classesContentsOverviewH_PROCESSING_OBJECT_CLASSES_OVERTopic1Processing object classesOverviewH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_NOTES_USES_INFORMATION_IN_THE_LDIF_FILE_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
?Pri`t
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
Generating Notes name components from LDAP attributesMail Migration
LDIF file migration\Notes equivalents for migrated dataLDIF file migration\adding names to Person documentsLDIF file migration\multiple attzibute valuesNaming conventions\for migrated LDIF namesNotes names\converting LDIF attributes toContentsOverviewH_GENERATING_NOTES_NAME_COMPONENTS_OVERTopic1Generating Notes name components from LDAP attributesOverviewH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_NOTES_USES_INFORMATION_IN_THE_LDIF_FILE_OVER
H_GENERATING_NOTES_NAME_COMPONENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_175999420829237828=Processing attributes that have multiple valuesH_GENERATING_NOTES_NAME_COMPONENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_175999420829237829=Adding common names as secondary user namj values in the Person document01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ain lett
Importing passwords from an LDJF entryMail Migration
Domino migration tools\passwordsLDIF file migration\passwordsContentsOverviewH_IMPORTING_PASSWORDS_FROM_AN_LDIF_ENTRYTopic1Importing passwords from an LDIF entryOverviewH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_NOTES_USES_INFORMATION_IN_THE_LDIF_FILE_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Importing Internet addresses from an LDIF entryMail Migration
.AContentsDetailsH_IMPORTING_INTERNET_ADDRESSES_FROM_AN_LDIF_ENTRY_DETAILSTopic1Importing Internet addresses from an LDIF entryDetailsH_UNDERSTANDING_HOW_NOTES_USES_INFORMATION_IN_THE_LDIF_FILE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
See Also
Preparing to import an LDIF fileMail Migration
LDIF file migration\tasksContentsOverviewH_PREPARING_TO_IMPORT_AN_LDIF_FILE_OVERTopic1Preparing to import an LDIF fileOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_LDIF_FILE_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domjno Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Preparing LDIF files for import into multiple Notes organizational unitsMail Migration
LDIF file migration\to multiple Notes organizational unitsNotes organizational units\migrating LDIF file users toOrganizational units\migrating LDIF file users toContentsOverviewH_PREPARING_LDIF_FILES_FOR_IMPORT_INTO_MULTIPLE_NOTES_ORGANIZATIONAL_UNITS_OVERTopic1Preparing LDIF files for import into multiple Notes organizational unitsOverviewH_PREPARING_TO_IMPORT_AN_LDIF_FILE_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying the LDIF file to migrate fromMail Migration
LDIF file migration\selecting filesRegistration queue\adding LDIF file usersContentsStepsH_IMPORTING_USERSZFROM_LDIF_FILE_STEPSTopic1Specifying the LDIF file to migrate fromStepsH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_LDIF_FILE_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
File -
Setting options for importing users from an LDIF fileMail Migration
LDIF file migration\optionsLDIF file migration\unregistered Notes usersContentsOverviewH_SETTING_OPTIONS_FOR_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_LDIF_FILE_OVERTopic1Setting options for importing users from an LDIF fileOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_LDIF_FILE_STEPS01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
Print
CN=Davij Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Registering users migrated from an LDIF fileMail Migration
LDIF file migration\registering usersRegistration queue\adding LDIF file usersContentsOverviewH_REGISTERING_IMPORTJD_USERS_OVERTopic1Registering users migrated from an LDIF fileOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_LDIF_FILE_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
r, the c
Adding imported users as directory entries only Mail Migration
Domino Directory\adding LDIF file person entriesLDIF file migration\adding names to Person documentsLDIF file migration\subscription accountsLDIF file migration\unregistered Notes usersSubscription accounts\creating for imported LDIF usersWeb sites\subscription accountsContentsOverviewH_ADDING_IMPORTED_USERS_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_ONLY_OVERVIEWTopic1Adding imported uzers as directory entries only OverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_LDIF_FILE_OVER
H_ADDING_IMPORTED_USERS_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_ONLY_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_234328473629230110=Using imported users in subscription accounts01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Click here
7x&|.
Migrating Novell GroupWise 4 usersMail Migration
GroupWise. See Novell GroupWiseNovell GroupWise 4 migration\overviewContentsOverviewH_MIGRATING_NOVELL_GROUPWISE_4_USERS_OVERTopic1Migrating Novell GroupWise 4 usersOverviewH_MAIL_MIGRATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 518 Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 4
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Preparing to migra}e GroupWise 4 usersMail Migration
Novell GroupWise 4 migration\tasksContentsStepsH_PREPARING_TO_MIGRATE_GROUPWISE_4_USERS_STEPSTopic1Preparing to migrate GroupWise 4 usersStepsH_MIGRATING_NOVELL_GROUPWISE_4_USERS_OVER
H_PREPARING_TO_MIGRATE_GROUPWISE_4_USERS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_364711488029245846=Exporting a GroupWise 4 user list01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 518 Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 4
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ct a Mac
Importing people and groups into the registration queueMail Migration
Novell GroupWise 4 migration\adding users to the registration queueRegistration queue\adding Novell GroupWise usersContentsStepsH_IMPORTING_PEO]LE_AND_GROUPS_INTO_THE_GW4_REGISTRATION_QUEUE_STEPSTopic1Importing people and groups into the registration queueStepsH_MIGRATING_NOVELL_GROUPWISE_4_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 518 Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 4
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Registering users and completing the migrationMail Migration
Novell GroupWise 4 migration\registering usersContentsStepsH_REGISTERING_GW4_USERS_AND_COMPLETING_THE_MIGRATION_STEPSTopic1Registering users and completing the migrationStepsH_MIGRATING_NOVELL_GROUPWISE_4_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 518 Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 4
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating Novell GroupWise 5 usersMail Migration
Novell GroupWise 5 migration\overviewContentsOverviewH_MIGRATING_NOVELL_GROUPWISE_5_USERS_OVERTopic1Migrating Novell Group]ise 5 usersOverviewH_MAIL_MIGRATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 519 Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Preparing to migrate GroupWise 5 usersMail Migration
Novell GroupWise 5 migration\tasksContentsStepsH_PREPARING_TO_MIGRATE_GROUPWISE_5_USERS_STEPSTopic1Preparing to migrate GroupWise 5 usersStepsH_MIGRATING_NOVELL_GROUPWISE_5_USERS_OVER
H_PREPARING_TO_MIGRATE_GROUPWISE_5_USERS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_361508028829245848=Granting proxy rights in the GroupWise 5 client01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 519 Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Importing people and groups into the registration queueMail Migration
Novell GroupWise 5 migration\adding users to the registration queueRegistration queue\adding Novell Gro}pWise 5 usersContentsStepsH_IMPORTING_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_INTO_THE_GW5_REGISTRATION_QUEUE_STEPSTopic1Importing people and groups into the registration queueStepsH_MIGRATING_NOVELL_GROUPWISE_5_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 519 Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Registering users and completing the migrationMail Migration
Novell GroupWise 5 migration\registering usersContentsStepsH_REGISTERING_GW5_USERS_AND_COMPLETING_THE_MIGRATION_STEPSTopic1Registering users and completing the migrationStepsH_MIGRATING_NOVELL_GROUPWISE_5_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 519 Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise-5
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating Netscape Messaging Server usersMail Migration
Netscape Messaging Server migration\overviewContentsOverviewH_MIGRATING_NET]CAPE_MESSAGING_SERVER_USERS_OVERTopic1Migrating Netscape Messaging Server usersOverviewH_MAIL_MIGRATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 520 Migrating Users from Netscape Messaging Services
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Preparing to migrate Netscape Messaging Server usersMail Migration
Netscape Messaging Server migration\tasksContentsStepsH_PREPARING_TO_MIGRATE_NETSCAPE_MESSAGING_SERVER_USERS_STEPSTopic1Preparing to migrate Netscape Messaging Server usersStepsH_MIGRATING_NETSCAPE_MESSAGING_SERVER_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 520 Migrating Users from Netscape Messaging Services
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Importing people and groups into the registration queueMail Migration
Netscape Messaging Server migration\adding users to the registration queueRegistration queue\adding Netscape Messaging Server usersContentsStepsH_IMPOR_ING_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_INTO_THE_NS_REGISTRATION_QUEUE_STEPSTopic1Importing people and groups into the registration queueStepsH_MIGRATING_NETSCAPE_MESSAGING_SERVER_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 520 Migrating Users from Netscape Messaging Services
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Registering users and completing the migrationMail Migration
Netscape Messaging Server migration\registering usersContentsStepsH_REGISTERING_NS_USERS_AND_COMPLETING_THE_MIGRATION_STEPSTopic1Registering users and completing the migrationStepsH_MIGRATING_NETSCAPE_MESSAGING_SERVER_USERS_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 520 Migrating Users from Netscape Messaging _ervices
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating personal mail dataMail Migration
Migration\personal mail dataPersonal mail data\migratingUpgrade wiza
ds\overviewContentsOverviewH_MIGRATING_PERSONAL_MAIL_DATA_OVERVIEWTopic1Migrating personal mail dataOverviewH_MAIL_MIGRATION_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Messaging data migrated by the user upgrade wizardsMail Migration
Messaging data\migrated by the user upgrade wizardsPersonal mail data\migrated by user upgrade wizardsUpgrade wizards\data migrated by theContentsStepsH_INFORMATION_CONVERTED_DURING_THE_UPGRADE_STEPSTopic1Messaging data migrated by the user upgrade wizardsStepsH_MIGRATING_PERSONAL_MAIL_DATA_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Porsonal Mail Data
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Before running the upgrade wizardMail Migration
Migration\personal mail dataUpgrade wizards\preparing to
un theContentsOverviewH_BEFORE_RUNNING_THE_UPGRADE_UTILITY_OVERVIEWTopic1Before running the upgrade wizardOverviewH_MIGRATING_PERSONAL_MAIL_DATA_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Platform requirements for running the user upgrade wizardsMail Migration
Upgrade wizards\platform requirements forUpgrade wizards\running with multiple versions of NotesContentsOverviewH_PLATFORM_REQUIREMENTS_FOR_THE_USER_UPGRADE_WIZARDS_OVERTopic1Platform requirements for running the user upgrade wizardsOverviewH_BEFORE_RUNNING_THE_UPGRADE_UTILITY_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release ?21 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Installing the upgrade wizard Mail Migration
Upgrade wizards\installingContentsOverviewH_DEOIDING_HOW_USERS_WILL_RUN_THE_UPGRADE_WIZARD_OVERTopic1Installing the upgrade wizard OverviewH_BEFORE_RUNNING_THE_UPGRADE_UTILITY_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Installing the upgrade wizard with a user's Notes clientMail Migration
Upgrade wizards\installing on a user's Notes clientContentsOverviewH_INSTALLING_THE_UPGRADE_WIZARD_WITH_A_USER_S_NOTES_CLIENT_OVERTopic1Installing the upgrade wizard with a user's Notes clientOverviewH_DECIDING_HOW_USERS_WILL_RUN_THE_UPGRADE_WIZARD_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Installing the upgrade wizard on a network driveMail Migration
Upgrade wizards\installing on a network driveContentsOverviewH_INSTALLING_THE_UPGRADE_WIZARD_ON_A_NETWORK_DRIVE_OVERTopic1Installing the upgrade wizard on a network driveOverviewH_DECIDING_HOW_USERS_WILL_RUN_THE_UPGRADE_WIZARD_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Sending users an upgrade notification messageMail Migration
Gateway mapping\setting for the cc:Mail upgrade wizardUpgrade notification message\sendingContentsOverviewH_SENDING_USERS_AN_UPGRADE_NOTIFICATION_MESSAGE_OVERTopic1Sending users an upgrade notification messageOverviewH_BEFORE_RUNNING_THE_UPGRADE_UTILITY_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
After you successfully import users into the registration queue, you are ready to register them and complete the migration. Depending on the options you select, the registration process:
Creates a Notes Person document and Notes ID for each migrated user
Migrates messages and Calendar entries from the Microsoft Exchange PST file
You can specify additional Notes registration information for users, including mail server name, license type, group membership, organizational unit, and so forth.
For more information about the available registration settings, refer to
Click here
"Using Advanced registration"
Click here
Note
After the registration process has started, you cannot use the workstation for any other task until the process completes. If necessary, you can stop the registration process by pressing CTRL-Break.
1. From the Basics view of the Register Person dialog box, view the registration information for each name that appears in the Registration status box to ensure that it is co{rect.
2. (Optional) Click the Options button, and select the
Click here
registration options
Click here
to apply during this session and click OK.
3. (Optional) Specify additional registration information for users as necessary. If you
Click here
created a 'migration' group
Click here
, open the Groups pane and assign users to this group now.
4. From the Registration statu{ box, select users to register and click Register. The Domino Administrator attempts to register the selected users in the order in which they were added to the queue, and migrates data from their mailboxes to Notes. Users whom you do not select remain in the queue for later registration.
The registration process may require a considerable amount of time, depending on the number of users and number and size of the mailboxes being upgraded._
After the registration completes, a messkge informs you of the registration status. Failed registrations continue to be listed in the Registration status box with a status message indicating the reason for the failure. Correct registration settings as needed and attempt to register the user again.
5.
Click here
Verify that the migration was successful
Click here
After the migration is complete, users can
Click here
run an upgrade wizard
Klick here
to convert local mail archives and other Microsoft Exchange data that the Domino migration tool did not process.
178963257629237820
Creating the Notes mail file
If you retained the default setting for the migration option "Convert Mail" (that is, the option remains selected), when you register migrated users, the Domino Administrator automatically converts their Microsoft Exchange mail files to Notes mail files as part of the registration prockss. On the Mail pane of the Register Person dialog box, the option "Create mail file now" is selected. An error message is displayed if you attempt to change this option to create mail files using the background Domino administrative process (AdminP).
See Also
Click here
Importing the Microsoft Exchange directory
Click here
Click here
Preparing to migrate Exchange users
Click here
&Arial
Using the Microsoft Windows NT to Notes migration tools in the Domino Administrator, you can import users and groups from a selected Windows NT domain and register them as Notes users. The migration process:
Imports users and groups from the Windows NT domain list and creates entries for them in the Domino Directory
Lets you create a Notes ID and mail file for imported users
This skction of the migration guide discusses the following topics related to moving users from Windows NT to Notes:
Click here
Preparing to import users from Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Importing users and groups
Click here
Click here
Registering users and completing the migration
Click here
&Arial
You need to complete a number of tasks to prepare for a successful migration:
Determine the order in which you want to move users from Windows NT domains to Notes. This should be your migration schedule.
Verify that you have access the certifier IDs and passwords for the Domino organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
Verify that you have purchased the appropriate Notes client license for each user.
Log into Windows N[ as an Administrator or Account Operator of the domains you want to import users from. To migrate Windows NT users to Notes, the computer where you run the Domino Administrator must be running WIndows NT.
If you are creating Notes mail files for imported users, log in to Notes from the administrative workstation using a Notes ID that has "Create database access" on the Mail server.
On an administrative workstation running Windows NT, install the Notes Release 5 Domino Administra{or client, and optional Windows NT Administrative migration tools. You must perform a custom installation to install the migration tools component.
Click here
Back up Domino information
Click here
Verify that you have Read/Write/Update access to the Domino Directory on the server used for migration.
On the administrative workstation, close all applications except for Notes, and close any Notes databases.
(O{tional)
Click here
Set registration preferences
Click here
(Optional)
Click here
Create a Notes group that you can add migrated users to.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Migrating Windows NT users
Click here
&Arial
The following procedure explains how to connect to a Windows NT domain and retrieve the domain list. After you retrieve the domain list, you can import users and groups from it to the registration queue. You must be an Administrator or Account Operator in the domain to complete this procedure.
Note
In order to migrate Windows NT users to Notes, the computer where you run the Domino Administrator must be running Windows NT. On komputers running Windows 95, Windows NT Users/Groups does not appear among the list of available directory sources.
1. At the administrative workstation where you installed the Domino Administrator, insert a diskette containing the appropriate certifier IDs for the organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People and Groups tab.
3. From the Tools pane, click People - Register.
4. When prompted, enter the certifier ID password and click OK.
5. Remove the diskette containing the certifier ID and click OK.
6. (Optional) From the Basics pane of the Register Person -- New Entry dialog box, specify a registration server if necessary, by clicking Registration Server and selecting the server that registers new users. Click OK.
7. Click Migrate People.
8. From the People and Group Migration dialog box, select Windows NT+Users/Groups from the Foreign directory source list.
9. From the Choose Windows NT Domain dialog box, specify the Windows NT domain to import from and click OK.
You can select a domain from the list, or enter the name of a different domain.
Note
If a domain controller for the selected Windows NT domain is not available, an error message appears and the Available Users box displays the default list of local user accounts.
The users in the selected domain appear in the Available users/groups list. You are now ready to i
Click here
import users and groups from the domain into the Notes registration queue
Click here
See Also
Click here
Preparing to import users from Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Migrating Windows NT users
Click here
&Arial
After the Available people/groups box displays the contents of the Windows NT domain list, select users to import and the migration options that determine the data to migrate.
1. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box,
Click here
enable options by selecting items in the Migration Options box.
Click here
The options you select apply to all Windows NT users imported during this session.r
2. Click Advknced to open a dialog box that lets you n
Click here
specify advanced upgrade settings
Click here
for migrating people from Windows NT.
3. Click OK when you finish specifying these settings. t
4. From the Available people/groups box, select users and
Click here
groups
Click here
to migrate and click Add.
5. Click Migrate to place the selected users in the registration queue+ and click OK to close the message that indicates the status and number of users queued for registration.
6. Click Done. ]
7. The people queued for registration now appear in the Registration status box. You are now ready to register users.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to import users from Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Specifying the Windows NT domain to import from
Click here
&Arial
You can set options to determine what information the migration tool imports from the Windows NT domain list. The options you specify apply to all users and groups imported from Windows NT during thks session.
Refer to i
Click here
"Setting migration options"
Click here
for more information about the available import options.r
1. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, import the directory of a Windows NT domain so that its contents appear in the Available people/groups list.
2. In the Migration Options box, select the options you want. To clear a selection, click the selected option a second time. The fkllowing table lists the options available for migrating users from a Windows NT domain:
Migration option
Kefault status
Generate random passwords for users with no passwords
Overwrite existing passwords with random passwords
Add full name provided to the Notes person document
Allow addition of empty groups to Notes
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
Existing Windows NT passwords are not imported by the migration tool. If you disable the op{ion to generate passwords, you must supply passwords for each user imported to the registration queue before you can register them.
3. Continue with the import procedure by specifying
Click here
Advanced settings
Click here
You set migration options independently for each migration tool, so that if you are migrating users from multiple systems, you can apply a different set of options for each system. The options you select apply {o all users imported from a given directory during the session.
See Also
Click here
Importing Windows NT users into the Notes registration queue
Click here
&Arial
In addition to the basic import options set on the People and Groups Migration dialog box, you can set options that determine how the migration tool processks names imported from Windows NT. The settings you select apply to all users that you import from the Windows NT domain during this session.
1. From the Foreign Directory Import dialog box, select Windows NT Users/Groups as the foreign directory source, and click Advanced.
2. From the Windows NT User Upgrade Options dialog box, choose settings for the following, then click OK:
Click here
Name format for full name parsing
Click kere
Click here
Retain unique Windows NT username as Notes short name
Click here
See Also
Click here
Importing Windows NT users into the Notes registration queue
Click here
Click here
Setting migration options for Windows NT users
Click here
&Arial
You have the option to generate Notes short names for imported users based ok their Windows NT user names.
On the Windows NT User Upgrade Options dialog box, select the "Retain unique NT user name as Notes short name" check box. The Windows NT user name is added as the primary entry in the short name field of the Person document.
The short name is the default for the mail file name and the user ID file name. If you do not select the short name option, Notes generates a short name from the first character of the user's first name, followed by the first se{en characters of the last name, for example e
ssalanid
, for the user Susan Salani. s
See Also
Click here
Specifying advanced options for importing Windows NT users
Click here
&Arial
You can specify how the full names of Windows NT users are parsed into Notes name components during migration. Specifying a parsing format allows intelligent parsing of the full name into Notes name components, instead of assuming that imported Windows NT full names are always formatted using a "first name last name" convention. You specify a parsing format as follo{s:
From the Windows NT User Upgrade Options dialog box, select the format from the "Name format for full name parsing" box. The migration tool automatically parses imported Windows NT full names into Notes first name and last name components according to the specified parsing format. The following formats are available:
Notes name formatl
Example
Firstname Lastname
Susan Salani
Title Firstname Lastname
Dr. Susan Salani
Firstname Middle Initial Lastnamef
Susan R. Salaniu
Title Firstname Middle Initial Lastname
Dr. Susan R. Salani
Firstname Lastname1 Lastname2
Susan Miranda Salani
Title Firstname Lastname1 Lastname2
Dr. Susan Miranda Salani
Ti{le Lastname
Dr. Salani
Lastname Firstname
Salani Susan
Title Lastname Firstname
Dr. Salani Susan
Lastname, Firstname
Salani, Susan
Lastname, Title Firstname
Salani, Dr. Susan
Lastname, Title Firstnkme Middle Initial
Salani, Dr. Susan R.
Lastname1 Lastname2, Firstname
Miranda Salani, Susan
Lastname1 Lastname2, Title Firstname
Miranda Salani, Dr. Susan
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
157216982429232782
Understanding differences betwken Windows NT names and Notes name components
In Windows NT, there are two types of names associated with a user account, a unique user name and a full name. The Windows NT user name consists of a string of up to 20 characters, and has no required format. The full name is optional, and generally represents the user's complete name, formatted according to the conventions of the organization, such as last name followed by first name. For example, in the Windows NT domain list, the user
S{san Salani
might have the user name
ssalania
, and the full name
Salani Susan.
In Notes, name information is stored as separate first name, middle initial, and last name components. For example, the name
Susan Salani
is stored not as a single full name, but as separate first name (Susan) and last name (Salani) components. When you import names from a Windows NT domain list, you need to specify how users' full names will be converted into Notes+name components.m
393049443229232585
Selecting a parsing format
When you import users from a Windows NT domain list, you have the option of selecting the parsing format to use in converting Windows NT full names into the components of a Notes name (First name, Middle initial, and Last name). The default parsing format assumes that the full names in the Windows NT domain list are entered in n
First name Last name h
format (for example, Susan Salani). Kf the domain list you import uses a different format, select the most compatible parsing format.
If the migration tool cannot parse a name correctly -- for example, if the number of name components in the Windows NT full name does not equal the number of name components in the specified parsing format -- the Adjust Windows NT User Name Components dialog box appears. The dialog box specifies whether the Windows NT full name has too few or too many components to accommodate the parsing format sklected. For example, if you specify the format
Title Firstname Lastname u
and the full name is
Susan Salani
, the dialog indicates that too few components have been specified. "Susan" is placed in the Title field and "Salani" in the First name field.
On the other hand, if you select the parsing format
Lastname, Firstname,
and the full name is
Susan R. Salani
, the dialog box indicates that there are too many components to accommokate the parsing format selected. Rather than discarding the extra components, and placing just the middle initial in the Firstname field, the migration tool places "Susan" in the Last name field, and "R. Salani" in the First name field.o
An incompatible parsing format may require considerable editing to create suitable Notes names. If you do not adjust names in the dialog box, the names added to the registration queue may not be suitable for registering users. Always be sure that each imported+name has a last name component; Notes requires a valid last name component to register users. d
Note
The migration tool only checks whether a parsed name is missing components for the format specified; it does not verify that components appear in the correct field, or check for invalid characters. For example, the migration tool does not check whether the first name component contains title information.
157216982429232783
Importing uskrs who do not have full names
If there is no full name to import from Windows NT, the migration tool does not prompt you to make any adjustments. Instead, the migration tool automatically adds the Windows NT user name to the Notes Last name field, regardless of the specified parsing format. For example, if you import the user name o
ssalani
from the Windows NT domain list, the user added to the registration queue has a last name of s
ssalani
and no first name. You+can edit the name in the registration queue as needed, adding S or Susan to the First name field and changing the Last name field to
Salani
See Also
Click here
Specifying advanced options for importing Windows NT users
Click here
&Arial
After you successfully import users into the registration queue, you are ready to register them and complete the migration. Depending on the options you select, the registration process:
Creates a Notes Person document and Notes ID for each migrated user
Creates a Notes mail file
You can specify additional Notes registration information for users, including mail server name, license type, group membership, organizational unit, and so forth.
For more information about the available registration settings, refer to
Click here
"Using Advanced registration"
Click here
Note
After the registration process has started, you cannot use the workstation for any other task until the process completes. If necessary, you can stop the registration process by pressing CTRL-Break.
1. From the Basics view of the Register Person dialog box, view the rekistration information for each name that appears in the Registration status box to ensure that it is correct.
2. (Optional) Click the Options button and select thee
Click here
registration optionsp
Click here
to apply during this session and click OK.
3. (Optional) Specify additional registration information for users as necessary. If you c
Click here
created a 'migration' group.
Click here
+ open the Groups pane and assign users to this group now.
4. From the Registration status box, select users to register and click Register. The Domino Administrator attempts to register the selected users in the order in which they were added to the queue. Users whom you do not select remain in the queue for later registration.
The registration process may require a considerable amount of time, depending on the number of users imported.
After the registration com{letes, a message informs you of the registration status. Failed registrations continue to be listed in the Registration status box with a status message indicating the reason for the failure. Correct registration settings as needed and attempt to register the user again.
5.
Click here
Verify that the migration was successful
Click here
See Also
Click here
Migrating Windows NT users
Click here
4pa^X@
&Arial
Using an LDIF export tool in combination with the Domino migration tool for LDIF, you can migrate users from any LDAP-compliant external directory and add them to the Domino Directory.
The migration tool for LDIN creates Person documents in the Domino Directory from the person entries in an LDIF file. Optionally, you can create Notes IDs and mail files for migrated users, and register them as Notes users. Unregistered users, can be added to Domino as directory entries only and cannot log in to Notes and access Domino resources.
Note
This version of the migration tool does not process LDIF group entries.
This section of the migration guide discusses the follownng topics related to adding users to Notes from LDIF files:
Click here
What is LDIF?
Click here
Click here
Understanding how Notes uses information in the LDIF file
Click here
Click here
Preparing to import an LDIF file
Click here
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click he~e
Click here
Registering users migrated from an LDIF file
Click here
Click here
Adding users as directory entries only
Click here
&Arial
LDIF is a data fnrmat standard for conveying information from a directory that complies with the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). You can use LDIF files to import users from any LDAP directory to Notes.
Each entry in the LDIF file contains a sequence of lines describing a directory object and its attributes. LDAP attribute values in the file may exist as simple text or may be encoded in base 64 or in Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set Transformation Format 8 (UTF-8). UTF-8 is a superset.of ASCII that breaks Unicode values into 8-bit sequences.
The migration tool validates entries before importing the user described in the entry. Valid entries must include the following attributes:
Distinguished name (DN)
Surname (SN, S, or.SurName)
Object classes
The object class definition
is required for all entries, as is an object class specifying the type of the entry (for example,
person
). Other object classes are optional. Entries in the file must be separated by a blank line. When the migration tool encounters an entry that does not contain all of the mandatory information, it skips it and logs the error in the Notes log.
The migration tool attempts to impnrt entries based on a standard supported LDAP schema. Some schema may use LDAP attributes that do not have equivalent fields in the Notes Person document. If the migration tool cannot map an attribute to a Notes equivalent, it skips it and logs the error in the Notes log.
See Also
Click here
The LDAP schemaF
Click here
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click he~e
Click here
Adding the distinguished name to the Person document
Click here
Click here
Processing object classes
Click here
Click here
Generating Notes name components from LDAP attributes
Click here
Click here
Importing passwords from an LDIF entry
Click here
&Arial
The LDAP distinguished name (DN) represents not only a user's name, but also the user's location in the organizational hierarchy, as defined by attributes which specify the organizational unit, organization, and country. For example, the following distinguished name tells you that the user named Susan Salani is in the Human Resources division of the Acme Corporation, located in the United States:
This hierarchical structure is similar to the one that Notes uses in forming the primary names of registered users, except that, in Notes, information about a user's organization and organizational unit come from the certifier ID used during registration.
When you are registering users imported from an LDIF file, because the hierarchical information in imported distinguished names may conflict with Notes hinrarchical information, by default the migration tool does not add the distinguished names to the User name field of the Person document. The LDAP attributes O (Organization), and OU (Organizational Unit), and C (Country) are not mapped to fields in the Person document. Each mapping failure is noted in the Notes log.
If the users you import from an LDIF file will become directory entries only, and not registered Notes users, (that is, you will not create Notes IDs and mail files for them), you nay want their Person documents to include the distinguished names in their LDIF entries. The migration tool can add distinguished names from the imported LDIF entries to the Person document as secondary entries in the User name field of the Person document. e
The primary entry in the User Name field of the Person document is always derived from the First Name and Last Name components, together with the organizational information taken from the certifier ID.
To add the DNs from im~orted LDIF entries as secondary entries in the User name field, select the migration option "Add full name provided to the Notes Person document" on the People and Groups Migration dialog box.
See Also
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click here
Click here
Understanding how Notes uses information in the LDIF file
Click here
&Arial
When importing an LDIF file, the migration toon ignores special object class definitions. For Release 5.0, the Domino migration tool for LDIF supports the importing of Persons only. It does not import groups or schema.
The migration tool searches each entry for the following object class definitions:
Person
OrganizationalPerson
InetOrgPerson
InternetPerson
ResidentialPerson
If it does not find a match, then the entry is skipped, since it does not meet the crite~ia for being migrated as a person.
See Also
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click here
Click here
Understanding how Notes uses information in the LDIF file
Click here
&Arial
The Domino migration tool for LDIF generates Notes name components from values in the following attributes in a user entry:
LDAP attribute
Name component genererated during migration
GN or GivenName
First name
MiddleName
Middle initial
SN, S, or SurName
Last name
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
The migration tools can place a maximum of two characters in the Notes Middle initial field. If a value in the LDAP MiddleName attribute exceeds two characters, the migration toons truncates it. Migrated users are successfully added to the registration queue regardless of whether their entries include GivenName (or GN) or MiddleName attributes. However, if an entry does not include a SurName, SN, or S attribute, you must provide last name information for the user before the user is ready for registration.
Other name information in an entry (for example, CN) may be added the Person document as a secondary name in the User name field.
175999420829>37828
Processing attributes that have multiple values
The current release does not support the migration of multiple values for the following attributes:
First name
Last name
Middle initial
Internet address
Short name
If an LDIF entry contains multiple values for any of these attributes, only the first value is added to the Person document. In addition, the migration tool places a message in the Notes log.indicating that the attribute already exists.
175999420829237829
Adding common names as secondary user name values in the Person document
The migration tool adds values from the common name (CN) and UID attributes of an LDIF entry as secondary values in the User name field of the Person document.
See Also
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click here
Click he~e
Understanding how Notes uses information in the LDIF file
Click here
&Arial
By default, if a record for a user has an associated password, that password becomes the user's Notes password during import.
The migration tool provides two options that let you automatically generate random passwords during import. One of these generates random passwords only for those entries that do not have associated passwords. By default, this option is enabled. A second option lets you create new random passwords that will replace the passwords specified in the impo~ted LDIF file.
See Also
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click here
Click here
Understanding how Notes uses information in the LDIF file
Click here
&Arial
If a user's entry in an imported LDIF file includes an Internet address attribute, the LDIF migration tool imports that address and copies it to the Internet Address field of the user's Person document when the user is registered. The domain name portion of the user's Internet address remains intact, thnt is, exactly as it was in the LDIF file. The administrator can change the user's Internet address by modifying the entry in the Internet address field.
When registering users not migrated from an LDIF file, the Internet address is changed to reflect the default domain name as displayed in the Internet Domain field on the Basics pane of the User Registration dialog box.i
See Also
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF fileN
Nlick here
Click here
Understanding how Notes uses information in the LDIF file
Click here
&Arial
The tasks you perform to prepare an LDIF file for import into Notes depends on how you plan on integrating the users listed in the file into Notes. You can use an LDIF file to register users listed in the file as Notes users.i
Before importing people from an LDIF file to Notes, complete the following tasks:
Obtain or generate the LDIN file containing the users to be imported. See
Click here
"Using the lsearch utility to search directories"
Click here
for information about using the lsearch utility included with Domino Release 5 to generate LDIF files.
Decide whether to use the imported entries to create registered Notes users or directory entries only.
The migration tool will take considerable time to process large LDIF files. Divide large files into multiple smallnr files to give you greater control over the migration process.
If you are registering users, and plan to place them in multiple Notes organizational units, create separate LDIF files for each organizational unit.a
If you are registering users, verify that you have access to the certifier IDs and passwords for the Domino organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.k
If you are registering users, verify that you have purchased the appropriate.Notes client license for each user.
Verify that you have Editor, Designer, or Manager access rights to the Domino Directory on the Registration Server
If you are creating mail files for users, log in to Notes with a Notes ID that has "Create database access" on the Mail server.l
On your administrative workstation, install the Notes Release 5 Domino Administrator client, and optional LDIF Administrative migration tool. You must perform a custom installation to install ~he migration tools component.
Click here
Back up Domino information.t
Click here
On the administrative workstation, close all applications, except for Notes, and close any Notes databases.
From the administrative workstation, map a drive to the location of the LDIF file you are migrating users from.
(Optional)
Click here
Set registration preferences.
Click here
(Optional)
Click here
Create a Notes group that you can add migrated users to.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click here
&Arial
Notes security requires you to demonstrate your authorization to create users by supplying a certifier ID and password for each organizational unit (OU) into which you register users.
Although the distinguished name for an entry in the LDIF file may contain information about a user's OU, this OU is not necessarily the same as the Notes OU, and the migration tool cannot imported OU information in creating Notes hierarchical names. The OU portion of a user's Notes hierarchical name depends on the certifier ID used to register the user. When you launch the migration tool, you are prompted to supply a certifier ID. Users whom you import during the session are queued for registration in~o the organizational unit for the specified certifier ID.
If you need to migrate users from an LDIF file into different OUs in the Notes hierarchy, you must create a separate file for each OU where you want to register users. If you exported all of the users from an LDAP directory into a single file, you must extract the entries in the original file into different files for each OU. Then, import each file independently, using the certifier ID for the corresponding organizational unit.I
For example, if the Notes hierarchy in the Acme company has a Sales unit and a Finance unit, and the LDIF file you are importing contains entries for users in each of these units, create separate LDIF files named SALES and FINANCE and place the appropriate entries in each. Then import the SALES file using the Sales/Acme certifier ID, and the FINANCE file using the Finance/Acme certifier ID.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to import an LDIF file
Click here
&Arial
To migrate users from an LDIF file, you need to specify the location of the file. Make sure that the format of the entries in the file follows approved LDIF conventions.
Note
It is recommended that the LDIF files you import be generated by a standard LDAP export utility, such as the lsearch utility supplied with tne Release 5 Domino server.
For more information about the lsearch utility, see
Click here
"Using the lsearch utility to search directories"
Click here
1. At the administrative workstation where you installed the Domino Administrator, insert a diskette containing the appropriate certifier IDs for the organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.:
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Penple and Groups tab.
3. From the Tools pane, click People - Register.
4. When prompted, enter the certifier ID password and click OK.
5. Remove the diskette containing the certifier ID and click OK. R
6. (Optional) From the Basics pane of the Register Person -- New Entry dialog box, specify a registration server if necessary, by clicking Registration Server and selecting the server that registers new users. Click OK.
7. Click Migra~e People.
8. From the People and Group Migration dialog box, select LDIF Entries from the Foreign directory source list.
9. In the Select LDIF File dialog box, specify the LDIF file to import and click OK. e
Click Browse to open a dialog box that lets you search the file system for an LDIF file, beginning in the Notes Data directory.
10. e
Click here
Enable migration options by selecting items in the Migration Options box.
Click here
The options you select apply to all users imported from the file during this session.
Note
If you are not registering the users migrated from the file (not creating Notes IDs or mail files for them), you must add their LDAP distinguished names to the Person document as their primary user names. Select the option "Add full name provided to the Notes person document" to add the distinguished names.
11. Click Migra~e and click OK to close the message that indicates the number and status of the users queued for registration.
12. Click Done.
The people queued for registration now appear in the Registration status box. You can now
Click here
register the available users
Click here
or
Click here
add users to Domino as directory entries only.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click here
&Arial
You can set options to determine what information the migration tool imports from the LDIF file. The options you specify apply to all users imported from the file during this session.
Refer to n
Nlick here
"Setting Import Options"
Click here
for more information about the available import options.m
1. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, import an LDIF file.
2. After the message In the Migration Options box, select the options you want. To clear a selection, click the selected option a second time. The following table lists the options for importing users from an LDIF file:
Migration option
Default status
Generate random passwords for users with no passwords
Overwrite existing passwords with random passwords
Add full name provided to the Notes person document
Off *
head title;Chend;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* If the users you migrate from the LDIF file will become entries in the Domino Directory, but will not be registered as Notes users (no mail file, no Notes ID), you must select this option. See
Click here
"Adding the distinguished name to the Person document"
Click here
for more information.
See Also
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click here
&Arial
A database's replication history is stored in the Basics tab of the Database Properties box. The first time one server replica successfully replicates with a replica on another server, Domino creates an entry in the replication history. The entry contains the name of the other server, as well as the date and time of the replication. Separate entries are created when a replica sends information and when a replica receives it. On each subsequent replication with a specific server, Nomino updates the entry in the history to reflect the most recent replication time.
Domino uses the replication history to determine which documents to scan for changes during the next replication. For example, if a database successfully replicated with the HR-E/East/Acme server 24 hours ago, Domino replicates only those documents that were added, modified, or deleted in the replica on HR-E/East/Acme within the last 24 hours.
Before replication starts between two databases, Dominn checks the replication history of both databases to make sure that they agree. If they don't, Domino scans each document created or modified since the date specified in the "Only replicate incoming documents saved or modified after" n
Click here
setting on the Other panel of the Replication Settings dialog box.
If a database doesn't replicatn successfully, Domino doesn't update the replication history. o
275040326429204392
Clearing the replication history
If you have Manager access to a database, you can clear the database replication history if you think the database doesn't contain all the documents it should or if the database replication history is not synchronized with that of other replicas. Clear the replication history only as a last resort to solve replication problems. If you clear the histo~y, during the next replication, Domino scans each document created or modified since the data specified in the "Only replicate incoming documents saved or modified after" setting on the Other panel of the Replication Settings dialog box. Scanning all these documents can be time consuming, especially over dial-up connections. If you clear the "Only replicate incoming documents saved or modified after" setting, Domino scans all documents in the database.a
Within a server cluster, the Cluster Repnicator stores replication history information in memory and updates the replication history about once an hour.
See Also
Click here
Displaying and clearing the replication historyo
Click here
Click here
Monitoring replication of a database
Click here
&Arial
After you successfully import users into the registration queue, you are ready to register them and complete the migration. Depending on the options you select, the registration process:
Creates a Notes Person document and Notes ID for each migrated user
Creates a Notes mail file
In addition to the.information imported from the attributes for each entry, you can specify other Notes registration information for users, including mail server name, license type, group membership, and so forth. For more information about the available registration settings, refer to
Click here
Administering the Domino System.
Click here
If you want to add imported names to the Domino Directory, but not register the imported people as Notes users, ~efer to
Click here
"Importing users as directory entries only."
Click here
Note
After the registration process has started, you cannot use the workstation for any other task until the process completes. If necessary, you can stop the registration process by pressing CTRL-Break.
1. From the Basics view of the Register Person dialog box, view the registration information for each name that appears in the Registration status box to ensure that it is correct. Modify information as needed.
Note
The Register Person dialog box displays a subset of the attributes imported from the LDIF file. The migration tool imports other attributes, such as phone number, manager, and so forth, even though they do not appear here.
2. (Optional) Click the Options button and select the
Click here
registration options
Click here
to npply during this session and click OK.
3. (Optional) Specify additional registration information for users as necessary. If you
Click here
created a 'migration' group
Click here
, open the Groups pane and assign users to this group now.
4. From the Registration status box, select users to register and click Register.
The Domino Administrator attempts to register the selected users in the order in which they were addnd to the queue. Users whom you do not select remain in the queue for later registration.
The registration process may require a considerable amount of time, depending on the size of the LDIF file being imported.
After the registration completes, a message informs you of the registration status. Failed registrations continue to be listed in the Registration status box with a status message indicating the reason for the failure. Correct registration settings as needed and attempt.to register the user again.
5.
Click here
Verify that the migration was successful
Click here
See Also
Click here
Migrating users from an LDIF file
Click here
&Arial
You can use the entries in the imported LDIF file to create entries in the Domino Directory only, without creating new Notes users. The migration tool then creates new Person documents for each imported name, but does not generate Notes IDs or mail files. The people represented by the resulting Person documents appear in the Domino Directory, but cannot access Domino resources from a Notes client.
Using entries imported from an LDIF file strictly as directory entries lets you:
Add user information from external directories to the Domino Directory so it can serve as a master directory. Using Domino's web-server capabilities, you can then make the contents of this master directory available to HTTP search engines.
Create subscription accounts for a Web site.
Use the following procedure to import users as directory entries only:
Note
After the import process has started, you cannot use the workstation for any other task until the process completes. If necessary, you can stop the process by pressing CTRL-Break.
1. Import users from an LDIF file into the registration queue as explained in
Click here
"Importing users from an LDIF file."
Click here
2. From the Basics view of the Register Person dialog box, view the registration information for each nane that appears in the Registration status box, to ensure that it is correct. Modify information as needed.
3. (Optional) Click the Options button, select
Click here
registration options
Click here
to apply during this session, and click OK.
4. From the Registration status box, select all of the users to be added as directory entries only.
5. Select the Advanced check box, and then select the Mail pane.
. 6. From the Mail pane, select None in the Mail system box, and click Apply.o
7. Select the ID Info pane, clear the check boxes in the Store user ID section, and click Apply.
8. In the Registration status box, make sure the users you selected in Step 4 are still selected, and click Register.
The Domino Administrator attempts to add the selected users to the Domino Directory in the order in which they were added to the queue. Users whom you do not select remain in.the queue for later processing.
The import process may require considerable time, depending on the number of users being imported.
After the process completes, a message appears, informing you of the registration status. Users who could not be imported continue to be listed in the Registration status box with a status message indicating the reason for the failure. Correct the information in the registration profile and attempt to import the user again.
9. Verify thnt the users were successfully added to the Domino Directory.
234328473629230110
Using imported users in subscription accounts
You can use the entries from an imported LDIF file to create subscription accounts that let you manage access to the resources Domino publishes to a company Web site. Subscription accounts let you protect certain information on the Web site, making it available only to specified users. To gain access to protected information, users must p~ovide a password to authenticate themselves.
When creating subscription accounts, you can either import existing passwords (from the userpassword attribute in the LDIF file) or instruct the migration tool to generate passwords by selecting the option provided in the LDIF migration dialog box.
See Also
Click here
Adding the distinguished name to the Person document
Click here
Click here
Se~ting options for importing users from an LDIF file
Click here
Click here
Generating random passwords for users with no passwords
Click here
Click here
Overwriting existing passwords with random passwords
Click here
Click here
Registering users migrated from an LDIF file
Click here
&Arial
Use the Donino Upgrade Service for Novell GroupWise 4 in the Domino Administrator to import GroupWise 4 users from a selected post office and register them as Notes users. The migration process:
Imports users and groups from the post office and creates entries for them in the Domino Directory
Lets you create a Notes ID and mail file for imported users
Migrates the contents of mailboxes from the GroupWise 4 post office
&Arial
Before migrating users from Novell GroupWise 4 to Notes, complete the following tasks:
Apply the latest patches for GroupWise 4 client and post office. GroupWise client must be at version 4.1a for migration to be successful. Patch 5 or later is required if you are running the migration on Windows NT 4.0. Check the message store for inconsistencies using the ofcheck utility. (The latest patches and versions of ofcheck.exe are available from the Novell Web site, www.novell.com.)
GroupWise 4 client must be installed on the workstation from which the migration is performed.
Obtain a user list file.
Log in to the Novell NetWare network using a "super-user" account.
A "super-user" is any GroupWise 4 user who has proxy rights to view mail and calendar information for all users in the selected Post Office that will be migrated. To grant proxy rights in GroupWise 4 client, select File - Preferences - Access List, click the."Add Users" button, select a "super-user" user id, and grant this user rights to read your Mail, Appointments, Tasks, and Notes.
Back up the mailbox files stored on the server.
Close all applications, except for Notes, and run the GroupWise 4 client.
Obtain copies of the certifier IDs for the organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
364711488029245846
Exporting a GroupWise 4 user list
1. F~om the GroupWise administration program (AD.EXE), select File - Export - ASCII Text file - Users.
2. Select your server or any post office (do
select Entire system).
3. Select all fields that are available, but do not select any additional fields (user defined 1-10).
4. Type the file name and click OK.
5. Close the administration program.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Novell GroupWise 4 users
Click here
Click here
Importing people and groups into the registration queue
Click here
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People and Groups tab.
2. From the Tools pane, click People - Register.
3. When prompted, enter your certifier ID password and click OK.
4. From the Basics pane of the Register Person -- New Entry dialog box, specify a registration server if necessary, by clicking Registration Server and selecting the server that ~egisters new users. Click OK.
5. Click Migrate People.
6. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, select GroupWise 4 from the Foreign directory source list.
7. In the GroupWise 4 dialog box, specify the name of the user list file you exported with the
GroupWise 4 Administration utility. The Available people/groups box displays the contents of the GroupWise 4 post office address list.
8. Click Advanced to open a dialog box that lets you s~ecify additional settings for migrating people from Novell GroupWise 4. Select from the options to migrate mail, calendar, and To Do items. Click Done when you finish specifying these settings.
9. In the Migration Options box, select the options that determine which Novell GroupWise 4 data to migrate to Notes..
10. From the Available people/groups box, select users to migrate and click Add.
11. Click Migrate to place the selected users in the registration queue, nnd click OK to close the message indicating the status and number of the users queued for registration.
12. Click Done. The people queued for registration now appear in the Registration status box. r
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate GroupWise 4 users
Click here
Click here
Registering users and completing the migration
Click here
&Arial
After you successfully import users into the registration queue, you can register them and complete the migration. Depending on the options you select, the registration process:e
Creates a Notes Person document and Notes ID for each migrated user
Creates a Notes mail file
Migrates messages and other data from the GroupWise 4 mailbox
You can specify additional Notes registration information for users, including mail server name, license type, group membership, organizational unit, and so forth.
Note
After the registration process has started, you cannot use the workstation for any other task until the process completes. If necessary, you can stop the registration process by pressing CTRL-Break.
Note
The GroupWise 4 client must be running during nigration.
1. From the Basics view of the Register Person dialog box, view the registration information for each name that appears in the Registration status box, to ensure that it is correct.
2. Click Options beneath the Pending Registrations box.
3. Select the registration options to apply during this session and click OK.
4. (Optional) Specify additional registration information for users as necessary. If you created a 'migration' group, open.the Groups pane and assign users to this group now.
5. From the Registration status box, select users to register and click Register. The Domino Administrator attempts to register the selected users in the order in which they were added to the queue, and migrates data from their mailboxes to Notes. Users not selected remain in the queue for later registration.
The registration process may require a considerable amount of time, depending on the number of users and number and size.of the mailboxes being upgraded.
After the registration completes, a message informs you of the registration status. Failed registrations continue to be listed in the Registration status box with a status message indicating the reason for the failure. Correct registration settings as needed and attempt to register the user again.
6. Verify that the migration was successful by looking at the Domino Directory and users' mail files.
See Also
Click here
Importing people and groups into the registration queue
Click here
Click here
Preparing to migrate GroupWise 4 users
Click here
&Arial
Use the Domino Upgrade Service for Novell GroupWise 5 in the Domino Administrator to import GroupWise 5 users and groups from a selected post office and register them as Notes users. The migration process:
Imports users and groups from the post office and creates entries for them in the Domino Directory
Lets you create a Notes ID and mail file for imported users
Migrates the contents of mailboxns from the GroupWise 5 post office
&Arial
Before migrating users from Novell GroupWise 5 to Notes, complete the following tasks:
Log in to the Novell NetWare network using a "super-user" account. A "super-user" is any
GroupWise 5 user who has proxy rights to view mail and calendar information for all users to be migrated.
From the Windows Control panel, click the Mail or Mail and Fax icon. Click 'Show Profiles.' Make sure that the GroupWise mail profile is the default profile.
Back up the mailbox files stored on the server.
Close all applications except Notes.
Obtain copies of the certifier IDs for the organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
To migrate the GroupWise 5 message store, you must have a GroupWise 5 Windows client installed and running. You also must have proxy rights to view mail and calendar information for all users that will be migrated. The following procedure explains how to grant a user proxy rights.
361508028829245848
Granting proxy rights in the GroupWise 5 client
1. From the GroupWise 5 client menu, select Tools - Options - Security.
2. From the 'Proxy Access' tab, select 'Super-User. After you have granted the 'super-user' rights, make sure the user has full read access in the options section.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Novell GroupWise 5 users
Click here
Click here
Importing people and groups into the registration queuev
Click here
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People and Groups tab.
2. From the Tools pane, click People - Register.
3. When prompted, enter your certifier ID password and click OK.
4. From the Basics pane of the Register Person -- New Entry dialog box, specify a registration server if necessary, by clicking Registration Server and selecting the server that registers new users. Click OK.
5. Click Migrate People.
6. From the People and Groups Migration dialog box, select GroupWise 5 from the Foreign directory source list. The Available people/groups box displays the contents of the GroupWise 5 post office address list.
7. Click Advanced to open a dialog box that lets you specify additional settings for migrating people from Novell GroupWise 5. Select from the options to migrate mail, calendar, and To Do items. Click Done when you finish specifying the~e settings.
8. In the Migration Options box, select the options that determine which Novell GroupWise 5 data to migrate to Notes.e
9. From the Available people/groups box, select users to migrate and click Add.
10. Click Migrate to place the selected users in the registration queue, and click OK to close the message indicating the status and number of the users queued for registration.
11. Click Done. The people queued for registration now appear in the Registration status box.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate GroupWise 5 users
Click here
Click here
Registering users and completing the migration
Click here
&Arial
After you successfully import users into the registratnon queue, you can register them and complete the migration. Depending on the options you select, the registration process:
Creates a Notes Person document and Notes ID for each migrated user
Creates a Notes mail filen
Migrates messages and other data from the GroupWise 5 mailboxw
You can specify additional Notes registration information for users, including mail server name, license type, group membership, organizational unit, and so forth.d
Note
After the registration process has started, you cannot use the workstation for any other task until the process completes. If necessary, you can stop the registration process by pressing CTRL-Break.
1. From the Basics view of the Register Person dialog box, view the registration information for each name that appears in the Registration status box, to ensure that it is correct.h
2. Click Options beneath the Pending Registrations box.D
3. Select the registration options to apply during this session and click OK.
4. (Optional) Specify additional registration information for users as necessary. If you created a 'migration' group, open the Groups pane and assign users to this group now.
5. From the Registration status box, select users to register and click Register. The Domino Administrator attempts to register the selected users in the order in which they were added to the queue, and migrates data fron their mailboxes to Notes. Users not selected remain in the queue for later registration.
The registration process may require a considerable amount of time, depending on the number of users and number and size of the mailboxes being upgraded.
After the registration completes, a message informs you of the registration status. Failed registrations continue to be listed in the Registration status box with a status message indicating the reason for the failure. Correct registration ~ettings as needed and attempt to register the user again.
6. Verify that the migration was successful.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate GroupWise 5 users
Click here
Click here
Importing people and groups into the registration queue
Click here
&Arial
Use the Domino migration tool for Netscape Messaging Server in the Domino Administrator to import Netscape users from a selected Directory (LDAP) server and register them as Notes users. The migration process:
Imports users and groups from the Directory se~ver and creates entries for them in the Domino DirectoryP
Lets you create a Notes ID and mail file for imported users
Migrates the contents of IMAP4 mailboxes from the Netscape Messaging Server
&Arial
Before migrating users from Netscape Messaging Server to Notes, complete the following tasks:
Make sure you have Netscape Mail Server 3.5, which uses Netscape Directory (LDAP) Server for storing user information. The migration tool only migrates mail that is stored in the IMAP mailboxes, not the mail in POP3 mailboxes nor local mail.
Mane sure the workstation where migration has a TCP/IP connection with the Netscape Messaging server and Directory Server.
Back up the mailbox files stored on the server, and back up user lists in an LDIF file.
Close all applications, except Notes.
Obtain copies of the certifier IDs for the organizations and organizational units where you are registering users.
See Also
Click here
Migrating Netscape Messaging Serve~ userse
Click here
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People and Groups tab.
2. From the Tools pane, click People - Register. p
3. When prompted, enter your certifier ID password and click OK.
4. From the Basics pane of the Register Person -- New Entry dialog box, specify a registration server if necessary, by clicking Registration Server and selecting the server that registers new users. Click OK.
5. Click Migrate People.
6. From the Peopne and Groups Migration dialog box, select Netscape Mail Server from the Foreign directory source list.
7. From the Netscape Mail Server dialog box, enter the following data:
Directory Server URL -- Domain name or TCP/IP address of your Directory (LDAP) server.
LDAP port -- 389 is the default.
Base DN for search -- Distinguished name of the organization or the organizational unit. All users and groups created under this name will be listed in the 'availnble for migration' list.
Directory Manager DN and password -- Credentials of the directory manager for this LDAP server.a
Messaging server URL -- Domain name or TCP/IP address of your messaging (IMAP4) server.
Change passwords to -- If selected, all passwords for people selected for migration will be changed to the password specified. If not selected, you must supply a password for each user migrated.
8. Click OK to search the LDAP server and retrieve.a list of users and groups.The Available people/groups box displays the contents of the Directory Server address list.
9. From the Available people/groups box, select users to migrate and click Add.
10. Click Migrate to place the selected users in the registration queue, and click OK to close the message indicating the status and number of the users queued for registration.
11. Click Done. The people queued for registration now appear in the Registration status nox.
See Also
Click here
Preparing to migrate Netscape Messaging Server users
Click here
Click here
Registering users and completing the migration
Click here
ational settings
Notes Preferences
International settings\list ofSettings\international
After you successfully import users into the registration queue, you can register them and complete the migration. Depending on the options you select, the registration process:a
Creates a Notes Person document and Notes ID for each migrated useri
Creates a Notes mail file
Migrates messages and other data from the GroupWise 4 mailboxi
You can specify additional Notes-registration information for users, including mail server name, license type, group membership, organizational unit, and so forth.
Note
After the registration process has started, you cannot stop it, or use the workstation for any other task until the process completes.
1. From the Basics view of the Register Person dialog box, view the registration information for each name that appears in the Registration status box, to ensure that it is correct.n
2. Click Options beneath the Pending Registrations box.
3. Select the registration options to apply during this session and click OK.o
4. (Optional) Specify additional registration information for users as necessary. If you created a 'migration' group, open the Groups pane and assign users to this group now. s
5. From the Registration status box, select users to register and click Register. The Domino Administrator attempts to register the selectmd users in the order in which they were added to the queue, and migrates data from their mailboxes to Notes. Users not selected remain in the queue for later registration.
The registration process may require a considerable amount of time, depending on the number of users and number and size of the mailboxes being upgraded.
After the registration completes, a message informs you of the registration status. Failed registrations continue to be listed in the Registration status box }ith a status message indicating the reason for the failure. Correct the information in the registration profile and attempt to register the user again. In some cases, a failed registration creates a Person document for the user. Later attempts to register the user prompt you to overwrite the existing document.
6. Verify that the migration was successful by looking at the Domino Directory and user's mail files.
See Also
Click here
Preparmng to migrate Netscape Messaging Server users
Click here
Click here
Importing people and groups into the registration queue
Click here
&Arial
During the first phase of a migration, you used the migration tools in the Domino Administrator to migrate the users listed in the public directory of the old mail system, and to move the contents of their mail boxes from the old messaging server. Users can now complete the migration by converting their personal mail data, such as private addresses, mailing lists, and message archives, to Notes.
Users migrate personal mail data by running an-upgrade wizard, which guides them through the process of converting their personal mail data to Notes data. Users launch the upgrade wizard from an upgrade message in the Inbox of their Notes mail file. You, the administrator, send the upgrade message from the Domino Administrator. Information in the upgrade message specifies the location of the wizard program files. You can install the upgrade wizard as part of each user's Notes client or in a shared network directory.a
Domino Release 5 provimes user upgrade wizards for migrating personal mail data from:
cc:Mail
Microsoft Mail
Microsoft Exchange
Note
In addition to these upgrade wizards, the Notes client also provides a set of end-user tools for migrating information from the following calendaring and messaging programs to Notes: Lotus Organizer 2.1 and Organizer 97, Microsoft Schedule+, OpenText OnTime, Netscape SuiteSpot, Novell GroupWise 4.x, Novell GroupWise =.x, and Qualcomm Eudora. Each tool is a Notes database, which may be installed as an optional component of the Notes client. The use of these tools is not described in this guide. For information about these tools refer to the online Help provided with each tool.
This section includes the following topics:
Click here
Data migrated by the user upgrade wizards
Click here
Click here
Before running the u}grade wizard
Click here
Click here
Platform requirements for running the user upgrade wizards
Click here
Click here
Installing the upgrade wizard
Click here
Click here
Sending users an upgrade notification message
Click here
Click here
Running the upgrade wizard
Click here
Click here
Converting message archives
Click here
Click here
Migrating personal address book informationF
Click here
Click here
After the upgrade wizard finishes processing
Click here
&Arial
The upgrade wizards let users migrate their personal mail data from any local or mapped drive location. The upgrade wizards convert archived messages from the old mail system into messages in a Notes mail file archive. Private addresses and private mailing lists are migrated into a Notes Personal Address Book (NAMES.NSF) on the user's workstation. The following table shows how information in each mail system is converted to Note} information.
* Rich text formatting is not preserved in messages migrated from cc:Mail. International characters in the message body are successfully converted during migration.
** The upgrade wizard can only migrate the archived messages of a cc:Mail Mobile user. Users-cannot migrate the contents of an entire mailbox from a mobile post office on their workstation. Mobile users who want to migrate messages, must archive the messages in the old mail program before running the upgrade wizard.
*** The upgrade wizard migrates Exchange personal distribution lists maintained in the PAB file on the client.
**** cc:Mail archives can contain only messages that have been read, and therefore the upgrade wizard assigns the status read to all migrated archmved messages. In this release of the upgrade wizard for Microsoft Exchange, all messages migrated from Exchange are assigned the status unread.
See Also
Click here
Migrating personal mail data
Click here
&Arial
Before a user runs the upgrade wizard, you, as the system administrator need to:
Migrate users and their mail boxes to Notes, using the upgrade tools in the Domino Administrator
Click here
Decide whether users will run the }pgrade wizard locally or over the network
Click here
Install the Notes Release 5 client on the user's workstation
Click here
Send an Upgrade Notification message to the user
Click here
See Also
Click here
Migrating personal mail data
Click here
&Arial
For an upgrade wizard to function properly, you must have certain software installed on the computer where it is run. The following tablm shows the software required to run each version of the upgrade wizard:
Requirements
Client migrated from cc:Mail
Client migrated from Microsoft Mail
Client migrated from Microsoft Exchange/Microsoft Outlook
Supported versions
R2.x, R6.x, R8.x*
3.2, 3.5, 3.6
Notes client**
Workstation operating system
Windows 95, Windows NT 4.0
Windows NT 4-0
Windows 95, Windows NT 4.0
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* You cannot migrate private addresses for Release 8.x cc:Mail clients.
** The upgrade wizard may fail to work properly on computers where the Notes Release 5 client is installed along with an earlier version of Notes. To errors when running the upgrade wizard on computers with multiple versions om Notes installed, edit the user's PATH statement to include the Release 5 Notes Program and Data directories and exclude the Program and Data directories for other Notes versions. Even after you change the PATH statement, the Release 5 client still attempts to locate and use earlier versions of the NOTES.INI file (in the Windows directory, for example). To prevent errors when running the upgrade wizard, rename earlier versions of NOTES.INI on the user's workstation.
See Also
Click here
Migrating personal mail data
Click here
&Arial
Users run the upgrade wizard by clicking a button in the body of the upgrade message you send from the Domino Administrator. When you complete the upgrade message form, you specify the location of the upgrade wizard. Users must run the upgrade wizard from a Notes client that is either installed on the same computer as the mail data they want to migrate, or at least has access to this data.
You can install the wizard program files in eithmr of the following locations:
Click here
In a shared network location
Click here
Click here
Locally, as part of the Notes client
Click here
See Also
Click here
Migrating personal mail data
Click here
Click here
Before running the upgrade wizard
Click here
&Arial
When you install the Notes client software, the files required to run the upgrade wizard locally are not installed by default. If users will run the upgrade wizard locally, you need to customize the Notes client installation to load the appropriate program files on the workstation. k
1. When prompted to select the type of client to install, click the appropriate client type and then click Customize.a
2. From }he Components list, select Migration tools and then click Change.
3. From the Select Sub-components dialog box, select the checkbox for the client migration tools you want to install and clear all of the other checkboxes. For example, to install the cc:Mail to Notes upgrade wizard, select the cc:Mail Client Migration Tools checkbox and clear all of the other checkboxes.
4. Click Continue.
5. Click Next, and then proceed with the rest of the installation as direc}ed.
See Also
Click here
Installing the upgrade wizard
Click here
&Arial
If users will run the upgrade wizard from a network drive, you need to perform the following tasks:
Install the upgrade wizard on a network drive
Map drives on user's workstations to the directory containing the upgrade wizard program files. Use a login script to automatically map workstation drives-to the directory.
Click here
Send users an upgrade notification message
Click here
that specifies the path to the directory where the upgrade wizard resides.
If you decide to have users run the upgrade wizard from a network location, rather than locally, you need to load the necessary software in a directory that is accessible to all migrated users. To ensure that all of the required files are placed in the directory, run a special instmllation of the Notes client, as shown in the following procedure. It is not recommended that you attempt to manually copy the wizard's program files from one location to another.d
1. When prompted to select the type of client to install, click any of the available selections and then click Customize.v
2. From the Components list, select Migration tools and then click Change.
3. From the Select Sub-components dialog box, select the checkbox for the client migratimn tools you want to install and clear all of the other checkboxes. For example, to install the cc:Mail to Notes upgrade wizard, select the cc:Mail Client Migration Tools checkbox and clear all of the other checkboxes.
4. Click Continue.
5. From the Components list, clear the checkboxes for the other installation components.
6. Click Next, and then proceed with the rest of the installation as directed.
7. After the installation completes, provide-all migrated users with access to this directory, and send an upgrade notification message that specifies the path to the directory. Configure users' workstations to run a client login script that automatically connects a workstation drive to the directory.
See Also
Click here
Installing the upgrade wizard
Click here
&Arial
Migrated users run an upgrade wizard at the Notes client to migrate personal mail information to Notes mail archives and Personal Address Books. Users run the wizard by clicking a button in the body of a Notes mail message you send from the Domino Administrator. The upgrade notification message you send contains information about:
The type of mail system users are migrating from
The location of the wizard program files
Other information needed to migrate personal mail data
Before sending the upgrade notification, install the upgrade wizard locally on each migrated user's workstation as part of the Notes client, or on a network directory that the users all have access to.
1. From Server pane of the Domino Administrator, select the server where you registered the migrated users.
2. In the Task pane,-click the People and Groups tab, right-click the name of the server's Domino Directory, and select Open Directory.a
3. From the Notes menu, select File - Database - Access Control.
4. From the Basics pane of the Access Control List dialog box, select the Administrator ID you are using, and from the Roles box, select UserModifier or NetModifier.
If you are using a local copy of the Domino Directory, also select the Advanced pane and click the following checkbox:-"Enforce a consistent Access Control List across all replicas of this database."T
5. Click OK.
6. From the Messaging tab, click the Mail subtab, and then click Mail Users.
7. From the Action bar, click Send Upgrade Notifications to open the Upgrade Message form.
8. Click Address on the action bar, and specify the users to send the upgrade message to.
If you
Click here
added users to a 'Migration' group
Click here
when you registered them, address the message to the group name.
9. In the Administrator Setup section, select "Send out cc:Mail/MS Mail/MS Exchange convert local information notices."
10. If users will run a network copy of the upgrade wizard, in the Mail Conversion Utility Path section,
Click here
enter the path that will connect their workstations to the network directory d
Click here
where the program i} located.
If you installed the upgrade wizard locally on each user's workstation, leave this field blank.
11. In the Mail Conversion Options section, select the mail system users are migrating from.
12. For a cc:Mail migration, complete
Click here
gateway mapping infomation
Click here
as follows:
Enter the names of cc:Mail gateway post offices in the field "Convert the following cc:Mail POs."
Enter the names of the equivalent Notes domains in the field "To the following Notes Domains."
The upgrade wizard will replace occurrences of cc:Mail gateway names in the addresses of migrated messages and in migrated personal addresses with the specified Notes domain names.
13. The Additional Information section displays the text that will included in the upgrade notification that users receive. Edit this text as necessary to provide users with additional information about }he migration.
14. When you have completed the form, click Send on the action bar to deliver the upgrade message to each user you specified.
See Also
Click here
Before running the upgrade wizard
Click here
&Arial
Before you complete and send the Upgrade Message form, you must install the appropriate upgrade wizard on a shared network drive, and ensure that all migrated users map a specific drive letter to this location. Provime users with a login script to map the drive, so that all users map the same drive letter to the location._
In the "Mail Conversion Utility Path" field of the Upgrade Message form, enter a DOS path to the network directory where you installed the appropriate upgrade wizard. End the path with a backslash (' \ ') character.
The path you specify must be identical to the path users have mapped to this directory from their workstations. For example, if users map drive J to the directo}y that contains the upgrade wizard, you would enter the following in this field: J:\w
See Also
Click here
Installing the upgrade wizard on a network drive
Click here
&Arial
Gateway mapping information enables the cc:Mail to Notes upgrade wizard to translate gateway addresses in migrated cc:Mail archives and private addresses to their appropriate Notes counterparts.
For more information on how the upgrade wizard maps gateway addresses in migrated documents, refer tm
Click here
"Converting message archives"
Click here
and
Click here
"Migrating private directory entries."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Sending users an upgrade notification message
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
POP3Address=
IP address or fully qualified domain name
Description:
Specifies the IP address (for example, 192.168.147.12) o} fully qualified domain name (for example test.acme.com) of a POP3 server running on a partitioned server. To run a POP3 server on a partitioned server, you must add this setting.
Users launch the upgrade wizard by opening the Upgrade Notification messagm received after migration and clicking a button in the message body. You must have previously installed the upgrade wizard either locally, as part of the user's Notes client, or on a shared network directory. You send Upgrade Notification messages to users' Notes mail files after migrating their mail boxes with the upgrade tools in the Domino Administrator.
After a user launches the upgrade wizard, it automatically checks for a Notes installation on the user's workstation. If a Notes program-directory is not found, the wizard fails to load. f
The upgrade wizard obtains information about the Notes environment from the active NOTES.INI file in the Notes Data directory and from the Upgrade Notification message. For users migrating from cc:Mail Release 2.x and Release 6.x, the upgrade wizard also obtains information from PRIVDIR.INI on the user's workstation.
Note
Users must run the upgrade wizard from a Notes client that is either installed om the same computer as the mail data they want to migrate, or at least has access to this data.
360292150429243452
Running the upgrade wizard from a desktop shortcut
Alternately, you can create a desktop shortcut from which users can run the upgrade wizard. The shortcut must point to the location where you installed the upgrade wizard and must specify a target application as follows:
cc:Mail -- NUPGRADE.EXE 1
Microsoft Mail -- NUPGRADE.E]E 2
Microsoft Exchange -- NUPGRADE.EXE 3
The "Start in" field on the Shortcut property page specifies the directory used as the starting point for selecting archive files to migrate. By default, this is set to the directory where the application resides.
216992070429225128
Information the upgrade wizard obtains from the upgrade notification message
The Upgrade Notification message provides information that the upgrade wizard uses to migrmte personal mail data. The wizard obtains the following information from the upgrade message:
The type of mail system being migrated (cc:Mail, Microsoft Mail, or Microsoft Exchange)
The name of the user's Notes mail server
Mapping between cc:Mail post office gateways and Domino domains (cc:Mail users only)
A message ID
The upgrade wizards for Microsoft Mail and Microsoft Exchange do not use the message ID. For the cc:Mail to Notes upgrade }izard, the message ID is used to find the message in the user's mail file, so that it can read gateway mapping information for processing archives and private addresses.
216992070429225127
Information the upgrade wizard obtains from NOTES.INI
The upgrade wizard obtains additional information from the active NOTES.INI file found in the Notes Data directory on the user's workstation. If NOTES.INI is not found in the Notes Data directory, the wizard searches for i} in the Program directory, and then along the system path. The upgrade wizard obtains information from the following values in the NOTES.INI file:j
Information
NOTES.INI setting
Personal Address Book (PAB)l
First entry in "NAMES="
Location of the Notes Data directory
Value of "Directory="
Notes mail file name
Value of "MailFile="
User credemtials (password, etc.)E
Value of "KeyFileName="
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Generally, the Personal Address Book file is called NAMES.NSF and is stored in the local Notes Data directory. The value of the "MailFile" field indicates the name of the active mail as specified in a user's current Location document.
See Also
Click he}e
Before running the upgrade wizard
Click here
Click here
Selecting an upgrade method
Click here
Click here
Converting message archiveso
Click here
Click here
Overview of migrating personal address book information
Click here
&Arial
Each of the upgrade wizards lets a user migrate two or three types of personal data, as shown in the followimg table:
Personal Address Books/Contacts, Personal Folders, Calendar entries and messages in local PST file
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
When a user runs the upgrade wizard using the default Express method, it processes all the available messaging data using the default settings. When a Custom upgrade is selected, users can independently migrate each of the available data types.
For example, during a Custom upgrade, a user migrating from cc:Mail can independently select private addresses, private mailing lists, and archives. The upgrade wizards report an error if they cannot locate or convert mny of the data types.
See Also
Click here
Running the upgrade wizard
Click here
Click here
Messaging data migrated by the user upgrade wizards
Click here
Click here
Converting message archives
Click here
Click here
Overview of migrating personal address book information
Click here
&Arial
Users may have considerable amounts of data stored in message archives. The upgrade wizard can convert users' archived messages into a Notes archive database. For each user, the selected message archives are consolidated into a single Notes database. Within this database, the name of the original archive files appear as folder names. By default, the Notes archive database is created in the Mail subdirectory of the Notes Data direc}ory.
Note
If users will create the archive database on the network, they will need read/write access to that drive.i
. The additional archives can be added to the Notes archive database already creatmd or become part of a new database.
Microsoft Mail and Microsoft Exchange do not specifically allow users to archive mail. Instead, users can back up their mailboxes, creating off-line copies of their mailboxes, which are stored in the same file format (MMF and PST, respectively) as their active mailboxes. The upgrade wizard for these mail systems can migrate data from any MMF or PST file.
The cc:Mail to Notes upgrade wizard cannot migrate messages from a cc:Mail Mobile post officm. Users who want to migrate messages from a Mobile post office must first archive the messages. Afterwards, they can run the upgrade wizard to migrate the archived messages.
181593603229244859
Migrating archives during an Express upgrade
When running the upgrade wizard, users are prompted to select either an Express or a Custom upgrade. For most users, an Express upgrade is recommended.
During an Express upgrade, each upgrade wizard uses a different method to determine which archive files to migrate, as shown in the following table:
Mail system
How upgrade wizard selects archives to migrate
cc:Mail *
Migrates all .CCA files in location specified in [cc:Archives] section of WMAIL.INI
Microsoft Mail
Users specifies files to migrate
Exchange/Outlook
Migrates all .PST files in location specified in MAPI profile
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* The cc:Mail Release 8.x client does not store information in the file WMAIL.INI. As a result, when users of the Release 8.x client perform an Express upgrade, the upgrade wizard does not migrate any archive files. To migrate archives, cc:Mail Release 8.x clients must use the Custom migration option and specify the location of archive files to migrate.n
11482218=429236407
Migrating archives during a Custom upgrade
After selecting a Custom migration, users migrating from cc:Mail or Microsoft Mail can specify the following options for migrating archives:
Click here
The archive files to migrate
Click here
Click here
The Notes mail file template to use in creating the Notes archive database
Click here
Clicm here
The directory in which to create the resulting Notes mail archive
Click here
For users migrating from Microsoft Exchange, the upgrade wizard migrates the personal folders indicated in the user's MAPI profile.
See Also
Click here
Selecting an upgrade method
Click here
Click here
Running the upgrade wizard
Click here
Click here
Overview of migrating personal address book information
Click here
]E vS[
&Arial
Microsoft Mail and Microsoft Exchange let users create backup copies of their mailboxes. These off-line replicas are stored in the same file format as active mailboxes (MMF and PST files, respectively) and can contain multiple folders and subfolders. When migrating these files to-a Notes archive mail file, the upgrade wizard maintains an existing folder hierarchy.
For example, a Microsoft Mail user might have a back up of a mailbox folder called Projects in which there are four subfolders named Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. When the user migrates this file, Projects.MMF, the upgrade wizard creates a folder called Projects within the Notes archive, and then replicates the existing folder hierarchy within this folder, creating subfolders called Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4.
]hen migrating cc:Mail archives, the upgrade wizard also converts each archive into a folder within the Notes archive database, migrating the messages within each cc:Mail archive into the appropriate folder. However, since cc:Mail archives contain individual messages only, and not subfolders, migrated cc:Mail archives contain top-level folders only.
See Also
Click here
Converting message archives
Click here
&Arial
For cc:Mail, gateway names in the sender's address of archived messages are translated according to the gateway mapping specified in the upgrade-message sent by the upgrade tool in the Domino Administrator.
Gateway mapping is not supported for migrated Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange message archives. Messages migrated from Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange are not automatically updated with the names of Notes gateways. Users may need to edit addresses to make sure they refer to the correct Notes gateway.s
See Also
Click here
Converting message archives
Clicm here
&Arial
The Notes mail file template is approximately 2MB in size. The size of each migrated archive is approximatel} equal to the sum of the template size and 130% of the original archive size.
For example, if the original archive is 3MB, the migrated archive will be approximately equal to (1.3 * 3MB) + 2MB, or 5.9MB. Instruct users to estimate the amount of disk space required before migrating their archives.
See Also
Click here
Converting message archives
Click here
]E vS[
&Arial
The upgrade wizards for cc:Mail and Microsoft Mail let users specify the archive files to migrate. When specifying files to migrate, users can browse the file system and select archive-files from any available network or local drive.
Users migrating from cc:Mail can only specify archive files if they run the wizard using the Custom upgrade method. The upgrade wizards for Microsoft Mail requires users to select archive files regardless of the upgrade method selected.
By default, when you choose to specify archive files to migrate, the upgrade wizards look for the files in the current working directory. If users will run the upgrade wizard from a Windows deskto} shortcut, you can set the current working directory by editing the 'Start in' field in the shortcut properties for the application. If users will run the upgrade wizard from the upgrade notification message, or if you do not edit the "Start in" location, the current working directory is set to the directory from which the application was started. To specify a different archive source, users can browse the file system to locate the archives to migrate.
Users must have read/write access to the-directory containing the archive files to migrate, as well as to the directory that stores temporary files used during the migration process. The upgrade wizard places temporary files in the directory specified by the Windows environment variable "TEMP=". Typically, the TEMP variable specifies a local directory, such as C:\WINDOWS\TEMP.u
When migrating Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange archives that are protected with a password, a user must supply the appropriate user name and password. cc=Mail archive are not password-protected, and can be opened and migrated by any user who has the appropriate file access.
See Also
Click here
Converting message archives
Click here
&Arial
The upgrade wizard uses the specified mail template to convert the archives into a Notes archive database. By default, the upgrade wizard uses the template defined by the variable "DefaultMailTemplate" in the user's NOTES.INI file, or, if this variable is undefined, the template MAIL50.NTF. In most instances, users should not change the default setting.
To modmfy the template setting, users migrating from cc:Mail must select a Custom upgrade and edit the Template name field on the Archive Conversion Options dialog box. Users migrating from Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange have the option to specify a mail template regardless of whether they perform an Express or Custom upgrade.
See Also
Click here
Converting message archives
Click here
&Arial
When migrating archives, users can specify where the upgrade wizard will store the res}lting Notes archive database. By default, the upgrade wizard migrates all archives into a single Notes mail file database. That is, if a user were to migrate cc:Mail archives and Microsoft Mail archives, all of the archives would be placed in a single Notes archive database. Unless otherwise specified, the database is created in the MAIL subdirectory of the user's Notes Data directory, as specified in NOTES.INI. Users are prompted to provide a Notes password when they attempt to create the archive database-r
The resulting Notes archive automatically derives an eight-character name from the Notes name of the migrated user, to which it adds the prefix
. For example, if the Notes name of the user migrating an archive is
Robin Rutherford
, the resulting notes archive database would have the name
A_RRUTHE.NSF
For Microsoft Mail and Microsoft Exchange, if an archive file contains multiple files, these files become folder views in the re}ulting Notes archive database. To distinguish among duplicate archive filenames (from multiple source directories) the wizard appends a numeral to the archive name. For example, if the upgrade wizard moves the two files archive\1996\meetings and archive\1997\meetings they appear as folders with the names meetings1 and meetings2 within a single Notes database.
The default settings are maintained when users select Express as the upgrade method. To specify a different destination, cc:Mail users m}st select Custom as the upgrade method and edit the Folder field on the Archive Conversion Options dialog box. Users converting from Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange can change the destination regardless of the upgrade method selected.
322086860829229553
Running the wizard again to migrate additional archivesn
Users can run the upgrade wizard more than once to migrate archives. By default, archives migrated after the initial session are added to the existing Nmtes archive database. User can place archives that they migrate later in a different archive database as follows:
Before migrating additional archives, rename the original database. Then, run the upgrade wizard and migrate the archives to the default location.
Run the upgrade wizard and select Custom as the upgrade type. Then, on the Folder field of the Archive Conversion Options dialog box, specify a directory location for the Notes archive database that is different from the lmcation of the original database.r
See Also
Click here
Converting message archives
Click here
&Arial
Users whom you have migrated to Notes may want to retain personal address book information from their old mail system after they switch to Notes. The upgrade wizards let users migrate personal address book information to a Notes Personal Address Book (PAB).
There are two types of personal address book entries users can migrate:
Personal addresses for u}ers not listed in the public address book; for example, Internet e-mail addresses
Personal mailing lists for distributing e-mail to multiple addresses at one time
When migrating personal address book information, the upgrade wizard converts private addresses to Contact entries in the PAB. Users migrating from the cc:Mail Release 8.x client cannot migrate private addresses.
Personal mailing lists are converted to Multi-purpose groups in the PAB. Multi-purpose groups cam be used as access control lists and deny access lists in a Server document, as well as for mailing lists.
375476240029229351
How the upgrade wizard obtains personal address book information
The user upgrade wizard reads migrated address book information from either or both of two sources, depending on the mail system the user is migrating from:
Attachments to messages sent by the Domino migration tools
Personal address book files locatem on a workstation local or mapped drive
The upgrade wizard copies information from message attachments and data files to the PAB on the user's Notes client. h
181593603229244859
Migrating cc:Mail personal address book information,
For users migrating from cc:Mail, the upgrade wizard extracts some personal address book information from a message attachment and some from a data file on the user's workstation. The upgrade wizard obtains a user's private mailing lists, which are stored with the user's cc:Mail mail box, from a PAB attachment in the user's Notes mail file. Migrated users automatically receive this message if you select the option to "Mail private mailing lists as attachments" from the Conversion Settings pane of the "cc:Mail Upgrade Advanced Settings" dialog box of the Domino migration tool.
For cc:Mail 2.x and 6.x clients, the upgrade wizard obtains private addresses, directly from the file PRIVDIR.INI on the user's workstation.-The cc:Mail to Notes upgrade wizard does not support migrating private addresses for R8.x users.
181593603229244860
Migrating Microsoft Mail personal address book information
For users migrating from Microsoft Mail, the upgrade wizard extracts information from a temporary Notes PAB attached to a Notes mail message. This temporary PAB contains personal addresses and personal mailing lists migrated from their mailbox (.MMF) file. Migrated users automatically receivm a message with the attached PAB if you select the option to "Convert Personal Address Books" from the "MS Mail Advanced Options" dialog box of the Domino migration tool.s
181593603229244861
Migrating Microsoft Exchange personal address book information
For users migrating from Microsoft Exchange, the upgrade wizard extracts personal address book information from two possible sources, depending on the client mail application used. The Outlook mail client can store-address book information in a Contacts list on the Exchange server, and in a Personal Address Book (.PAB) file on the user's workstation. The Exchange mail client stores all personal address book information in a .PAB file on the user's workstation. The upgrade wizard obtains the Outlook Contacts list from a temporary PAB attached to a Notes mail message. Migrated users automatically receive this message if they had Contacts information defined.
See Also
Click mere
Selecting an upgrade method
Click here
Click here
Converting message archives
Click here
Click here
Running the upgrade wizard
Click here
&Arial
Mail systems use different terminology to refer to personal addresses and mailing lists. In this document, the term
personal addresses
refers to cc:Mail private addresses, and to entries for individual users in a Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange Personal Addrmss Book.
Personal mailing lists
refers to cc:Mail private lists, and to a user's Personal Groups or distribution lists in Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange.i
In cc:Mail R2.x and R6.x, private addresses are stored in the file PRIVDIR.INI on the user's workstation, and private lists are stored with the user's mailbox on the server. The cc:Mail R8.x client does not use PRIVDIR.INI, so the upgrade wizard cannot migrate personal addresses for R8.x users.,
In Microsomt Mail, both types of directory items are stored in the user's mailbox file on the post office server. In Microsoft Exchange, the Contacts list maintained on the Exchange server by some Outlook clients contains personal addresses only. Outlook clients and Exchange clients can maintain both personal addresses and personal mailing lists in the .PAB files on their workstation.r
See Also
Click here
Overview of migrating personal address book information
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
POP3_Config_Update_Interval=
minutes
Mescription:
Determines how often (per minute) the POP3 server will update its configuration information.
Applies to:
Serversv
Default:
2 minutes
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
plicaID method
H_OPMNBYREPLICAID_METHOD
Click here
ReplicaID property
H_REPLICAID_PROPERTY
Click here
Server property
H_SERVER_PROPERTY
&Arial
database.
In a document in Edit mode or a form or subform in Design mode, pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the document, form, or subform. If the data was copied from a rich text field but is pasted into a non
rich text field- some information may be lost.
In a document in Read mode, or if the Clipboard is empty, has no effect.
&Arial
(D@ t@
&Arial
The Notes mail client stores personal address book information locally, on,the client workstation. However, the cc:Mail, Microsoft Mail, and Microsoft Outlook clients each store some portion of a user's personal address book information on the mail server. Migrating personal address book information from the old mail server requires coordination between the Domino migration tools work and the user upgrade wizards.
The Domino migration tools for cc:Mail and Microsoft Mail each include options for migrating users' personal address book information (the Domino migratiol tool for Microsoft Exchange does not provide an option for migrating personal address book information, but automatically migrates such information when it is present). When you migrate users' personal address book information from the server, the Domino Administrator automatically places an upgrade message in their Notes Inboxes. Attached to each upgrade message is a temporary Notes Personal Address Book (PAB), which contains the information migrated from the old mail system.
Users who do nlt have personal information to migrate from the server do not receive an upgrade message. t
175953705629245440
Personal address book information sent in the upgrade messageT
The following table shows the personal address book information that the Domino migration tools copy from the server into the temporary PAB attached to the upgrade message:
Mail system
Personal address book information attached to upgrade message
cc:Mail
Private mailing listst
Microsoft Mail
Personal Address Book
Microsoft Outlook
Contacts
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For information about how to migrate private mailing lists for cc:Mail users, refer to
Click here
"Mailing private mailing lists as attachments."
Click here
For more information about how to migrate Personal Address Books for Microsoft Mail users, refer to
Click here
"Migrating Microsoft Mail Personal Address Books to Notes."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Migrating Microsoft Mail Personal Address Books to Notes
Click here
Click here
Mailing cc:Mail private mailing lists and R8 address bloks as Notes attachments
Click here
Click here
Overview of migrating personal address book information
Click here
Click here
Copying personal address book information to the Notes Personal Address Book
Click here
&Arial
To update a user's Notes Personal Address Book with information migrated from the old mail system, tle upgrade wizards copy personal address book information stored on the old mail client or in
Click here
temporary Public Address Books sent to users in an upgrade message
. The following table shows the sources the upgrade wizards use to obtain address book information:
Source of migrated information
cc<Mail
Microsoft Mail
Microsoft Exchange Outlook clienti
Microsoft Exchange client
Server (temporary PAB sent in upgrade message
Private mailing lists
Personal Address Book
Contacts
Client workstation
Private addresses (PRIVDIR.INI)
Personal Address Book
Personal Aldress Bookn
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
145661244829245638
Migrating personal address books during Express vs. Custom upgrades
During an Express upgrade, the upgrade wizards migrate all of the personal address book information that is available for a user (that is, information from both the Server and Client rows of the preceding table). s
During a Custol upgrade, users can choose whether they want to migrate personal address book information. The upgrade wizard for cc:Mail provides the flexibility of allowing users of cc:Mail Releases 2.x or 6.x to independently migrate their private addresses and private mailing lists. cc:Mail Release 8.x users, can only migrate private mailing lists.
The upgrade wizards for Microsoft Mail provides the option to migrate their Personal Address Books. The upgrade wizard for Microsoft Exchange provides a singll option for migrating Contacts and Personal Address Books together. Although Outlook client users may maintain separate Contacts and Personal Address Books files, users cannot migrate these items independently.r
145661244829245639
Migrating information obtained from the mail servere
When migrating information obtained from the old mail server (refer to the preceding table) the upgrade wizards search the user's Notes Inbox for an upgrade message. After locating a mlssage, the wizards detach the temporary PAB from it, and copy the information in the temporary PAB to the PAB on the user's workstation (NAMES.NSF). The original upgrade message remains in the Inbox, and may be deleted after the user verifies that the information has been migrated successfully.
145661244829245640
Migrating information directly from the workstation
To migrate information from cc:Mail client workstation, the upgrade wizard searches the cc:Mail user,directory on the workstation to locate the PRIVDIR.INI file. Similarly, the upgrade wizard for Microsoft Exchange searches the workstation for the Exchange Personal Address Book (.PAB file) specified in the user's MAPI profile. After locating the files, the wizards copy the address book information in them to the Notes PAB.
The e-mail addresses listed in Contact documents in the Notes PAB may conform to any of several mail system types. Notes assigns the mail system type "Internet Mail" to the,addresses that the upgrade wizard migrates from other mail systems. In converting e-mail addresses migrated from cc:Mail, the migration tool applies the gateway mapping information contained in the upgrade notification message.
See Also
Click here
Migrating personal address book information from the old mail server
Click here
Click here
Overview of migrating personal address book information
Click here
&Arial
Messages sent to add|esses outside your company's cc:Mail system pass through a gateway post office, which directs the messages to their destinations. When users create a private address entry for a user on an external mail system, the gateway that routes the message becomes part of the address. For example, the following cc:Mail address includes the name of a gateway post office called INTERNET, which is used to route messages to their destination: name@company.domain AT INTERNET.
After you move users to Notes, cl:Mail gateways referred to in address book entries are no longer available for routing messages. The cc:Mail to Notes upgrade wizard automatically updates the gateway name in each address according to the gateway mapping specified in the upgrade message sent by the upgrade tool in the Domino Administrator.
For more information about how to specify gateway mapping between cc:Mail and Notes, refer to
Click here
"Specifying gateway mapping for migrating cc:Mail users."r
Click here
Personal Address Books migrated from Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange are not automatically updated with the names of Notes gateways. Users may need to edit addresses to make sure they refer to the correct Notes gateway.
See Also
Click here
Mapping cc:Mail gateways to Notes domainsw
Click here
Click here
Overview of migrating personal address book informations
Click here
&Arial
As the upgrade wizard processes archive files or directory information, if it encounters errors, it skips to the next record and continues. Failures are logged, and after the wizard finishes processing all of the information, it displays a status messages reporting the number of messages processed.
Users may find that the message count of the migrated archive is lower than the message count in the original archive. If there were,multiple copies of one message in the original archive, or in different archives, only one copy of the message is migrated.
After the upgrade wizard finishes converting data from the old system into Notes data, users should complete the following tasks:i
Check the Miscellaneous Events in the Notes Log (LOG.NSF) to find out whether there were any problems that might require further attention.
Verify that all messages in the source archives migrated successfully to tle Notes mail archive.
Remove the obsolete cc:Mail, Microsoft Mail, or Microsoft Exchange files from the user's workstation. Refer to the appropriate documentation for the old mail system for more information. Before users delete any data, it is recommended that they back up their old mail files.
Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange users may need to manually edit gateway information before they can use migrated addresses to send mail. External addresses in PABs and archives migratld from Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange are not automatically updated with the names of Notes gateways. a
See Also
Click here
Running the upgrade wizard
Click here
&Arial
This section,describes how to set up the Domino Web server, the Domino Web Navigator, and the NNTP service for Domino.
Click here
Setting up a Domino Web server
Click here
Click here
Setting up a Web Navigator server
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domino for Microsoft IIS
Click here
Click here
Setting up a Dlmino server with the NNTP service
Click here
&Arial
You can sign templates and databases developed by your organization so you can then add the associated name |o the Administration Execution Control List (ECL). If you sign a template, any databases created from the template inherit the signature. A
236629017629207223
To determine the Note ID
If you want to sign only one specific document or one design element in a document -- for example, a specific agent -- you must first determine its Note ID.
1. From your bookmarks page, open the database or template to be signed.
2. Open the document,containing the design element.
3. Select File - Document Properties, and click the Security tab.
4. Write down the Note ID.
The Note ID appears at the end of the ID field, beginning with NT -- for example, NT00000146. You can omit any zeros between NT and the ID number -- for example, NT146.
357801411229210254
To sign a template or a database
The signing process may take a while if you select multiple databases or tlmplates and the option "Sign every design note."
1. Make sure you are using the correct user ID to sign a template or database.
2. Select the server that stores the databases or templates that you want to sign.
3. On the Files tab, select the databases or templates that you want to sign.s
4. Choose Tools - Database - Sign.
5. Choose one:
All design documents to sign every design element
All documents of t|pe to sign a specific type of design element
This specific Note ID to sign a specific design elementm
6. Select "Update existing signatures only (faster)" to update only design elements that have been signed previously. Use this to change the signature on previously signed design elements.
7. Click OK. x
A dialog box shows the number of databases processed and the number of errors that occurred (if any). You can see details about the errors in the lol file (LOG.NSF) and use database analysis to analyze the errors.
For more information on analyzing databases, see "
Click here
Using Find Note to analyze a document reported in the log file."
Click here
236629017629207224
To verify signatures
After the template or database is signed, verify that the correct signature was used..
1. Open the template or database you signed.
2. Open the dolument or form you signed, and look at the status bar.
3. Verify that the correct signature appears in the status bar.
The status bar displays the user ID used for signing, the date and time signing occurred, and the certifier associated with the name on the ID used for signing.
See Also
Click here
Workstation data security
Click here
Click here
Sending a memo to users to u|date their ECLs
Click here
&Arial
Domino uses ID files to identify users and to control access to servers. Every Domino server, Notes certifier, and Notes user must have an ID. When you register users and servers, Domino automatically creates their IDs. An ID file contains: s
The owner's name. A user ID file may also contain one alternate name. A certifier ID may contain multiple alternate names.
A permanent license number. Thls number indicates that the owner is legal and specifies whether the owner has a North American or International license to run Domino or Notes.
At least one Notes certificate from a certifier ID. A Notes certificate is an electronic stamp added to a user ID or server ID. This stamp, which is generated from the private key of a certifier ID, verifies that the name of the owner of the ID is correctly associated with a specific public key. i
A private key. Notes uses the private ke| to sign messages sent by its owner, to decrypt messages sent to its owner, and, if the ID belongs to a certifier, to sign certificates.i
(Optional Notes client only) Internet certificates. An Internet certificate is used to secure SSL connections and encrypt and sign S/MIME mail messages. An Internet certificate is issued by a Certification Authority (CA) and verifies the identity of the user.
(Optional) One or more encryption keys, created and distributed by users to allow othe| users to encrypt and decrypt fields in a document.
(Optional) A password if the owner of an ID creates one. The password generates a key that encrypts the private data on the ID.
See Also
Click here
Certificates
Click here
&Arial
A certificate is a unique electronic stamp that identifies a user or server. Server and user IDs contain one or more Notes certificates. In addition, user ILs may contain one or more Internet certificates that identifiy users when they use SSL to connect to an Internet server or send a signed or encrypted S/MIME mail message.
A certificate contains:.
The name of the certifier that issued the certificate.
The name of the user or server to whom the certificate was issued.
A public key that is stored in both the Domino Directory and the ID file. Notes uses the public key to encrypt messages that are sent to the,owner of the public key and to validate the ID owner's signature.
An electronic signature.
The expiration date of the certificate.
Certificates are stored in ID files and in Person, Server, and Certifier documents in the Domino Directory.
Public keys are not secret. Any user may look up another user's public key and use it to send encrypted mail to or authenticate the user. It is important that someone looking up a public key learn it reliably since Domlno uses it for identification. Users must be able to obtain the public key of the certifier that issued the certificate before they can authenticate the certificate's owner. If a user has a certificate issued by the same certifier as another user or server, the first user can verify the public key for the certificate and then reliably know the public key associated with the server or user name. If a user doesn't have a certificate issued by the same certifier, the user needs a cross-certificate for authentlcation.
When you register users and servers, Domino automatically creates a Notes certificate for each user and server ID. In addition, you can create Internet certificates for user IDs using a Domino or third-party certificate authority (CA). Domino creates Internet certificates using the x.509 certificate format.
Notes certificates have expiration dates. Therefore, you must recertify Notes IDs when their expiration dates approach. In addition, if a user or server name changes,,you must recertify the corresponding Notes ID so that a new certificate will bind the public key to the new name. However, changing a name on a user ID does not affect Internet certificates.
For information on Domino CAs, see
Click here
Domino Certificate Authority
Click here
. For information on SSL and S/MIME, see
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients
Click here
. For information on encrypting and signinl mail messages, see
Click here
Encryption
Click here
and
Click here
Electronic signatures
Click here
. For information on recertifying IDs and changing user or server names, see
Click here
Managing users
Click here
and
Click here
Managing servers
Click here
See Also
Click here
Domino server and Notes user IDs
Click here
Click here
Viewing the certificates on an ID
Click here
&Arial
You can display the Notes and Internet certificates associated with an ID and display information about each certificate -- for example, public key, creation date, expiration date, and certifier information.
For example, the Certificates box displays certificates for a Notes user ID with the name Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme. The first certificate listed below is the one issued to Alan Jones for international use. The second certilicate listed below is the one issued to Alan Jones for North American use and for electronic signing. Following these are the certificates issued to the certifier of the ID and to any ancestors of the certifier. The last certificate listed below is the Internet certificate issued to Alan Jones.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then click Certification.
2. Click ID Properties.
3. Choose the ID file you want to view.
4. Enter the password and click OK.
5. Do the following:
Click Certificates to display a list of all Notes anl Internet certificates issued to this ID file.
Select the certificate in the Certificates box to display additional information about the certificate.
You can also specify a default Internet signing certificate if you have multiple Internet certificates in your ID file.
For information, see s
Click here
"Dual Internet certificates for S/MIME encryption and signatures"
Click here
and Notes 5 Help.
See Llso
Click here
Certificates
Click here
&Arial
275040326429204392
To display a replication history
1. Make sure that you have Reader or higher access in the database ACL.
2. Open the database.
3. Choose File - Replication - History.
4. Do one of the following:
Select Date to view the info|mation by date.
Select Server name to view the information by server.
5. Click Done when you finish reviewing the history.
If the replication history dialog box truncates an entry, click Zoom to display the complete entry. To copy the entire replication history to the Clipboard, click Copy.
275040326429204393
To clear a replication history
1. Make sure you have Manager access in the datalase ACL.
2. Open the database.
3. Choose File - Replication - History.
4. Do one of the following:
To clear one entry, select it, click Zoom, click Remove, then click Yes.
To clear the entire replication history, click Clear, then click Yes.
5. Click Done.
See Also
Click here
The database replication history
Click here
Clicl here
Monitoring replication of a database
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
POP3_Disable_Cache=
value
Description:
Enables/disables message caching for users. A value of 1 disables caching. Default is 0 (caching enabled).
NOTES.INI file\information the upgrade wizards obtain fromNUPGRADE.EXE\and upgrade wizardsShortcuts\running upgrade wizards fromUpgrade notification message\informa{ion the upgrade wizards obtain from theUpgrade wizards\runningUpgrade wizards\running from desktop shortcutsContentsOverviewH_INSTALLATION_OVERVIEWTopic1Running the upgrade wizardOverviewH_MIGRATING_PERSONAL_MAIL_DATA_OVERVIEW
H_INSTALLATION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_360292150429243452=Running the upgrade wizard from a desktop shortcutH_INSTALLATION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_216992070429225128=Information the upgrade wizard obtains from the upgrade notification messageH_INSTALLATION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_21699207042922;127=Information the upgrade wizard obtains from NOTES.INI01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Selecting an upgrade methodMail Migration
Upgrade methods\Express vs. CustomContentsOverviewH_SELECTING_AN_UPGRADE_METHODTopic1Selecting an upgrade methodOverviewH_INSTALLATION_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
H_CONVERTING_MESSAGE_ARCHIVES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_181593603229244859=Migrating archives during an Express upgradeH_CONVERTING_MESSAGE_ARCHIVES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_114822182429236407=Migrating archives during a Custom upgrade01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating a mailbox folder hierarchyMail Migration
Archives, mail\preserving folder hierarchies inFolder hierarchies\preserving during an archive migrationFolders\migratingSubfolders\migratingContentsReferenceH_MIGRATING_A_MAILBOX_FOLDER_HIERARCHY_REFERENCETopic1Migrating a mailbox fokder hierarchyReferenceH_CONVERTING_MESSAGE_ARCHIVES_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Trknslating cc:Mail gateway names in archived messagesMail Migration
Gateway addresses\replacing in migrated cc:Mail messagesGateway mapping\between cc:Mail and NotesMapping\gateways between cc:Mail and NotesContentsReferenceH_TRANSLATING_CC_MAIL_GATEWAY_NAMES_IN_ARCHIVED_MESSAGES_REFERENCETopic1Translating cc:Mail gateway names in archived messagesReferenceH_CONVERTING_MESSAGE_ARCHIVES_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Space requirements for migrating archivesMail Migration
Archives, mail\migratingContentsReferenceH_SPACE_REQUIREMENTS_FOR_MIGRATING_ARCHIVES_REFERENCETopic;Space requirements for migrating archivesReferenceH_CONVERTING_MESSAGE_ARCHIVES_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
]E vS[
Selecting archive files to migrateMail Migration
Archives, mail\conversion optionsArchives, mail\migratingConversion options\for migrating archivesCustom upgrade\selecting archive files during aPasswords\supplying during archive migrationContentsOverviewH_SELECTING_ARCHIVE_FILES_TO_MIGRATE_OVERTopic1Selecting archive files to migrateOverviewH_CONVERTING_MESSAGE_ARCHIVES_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?[rint
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying the template for migrated archivesMail Migration
Archives, mail\conversion optionsDefaultMailTemplate\use in migrating a{chivesMAIL50.NTF\as default template for archive migrationMail template\specifying for archive migrationTemplates\specifying for archive migrationContentsOverviewH_SPECIFYING_THE_TEMPLATE_FOR_MIGRATED_ARCHIVES_OVERTopic1Specifying the template for migrated archivesOverviewH_CONVERTING_MESSAGE_ARCHIVES_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Specifying where to migrate archivesMail Migration
Archives, mail\migratingArchives, mail\namingMessage archives\convertingMigration\archivesContentsReferenceH_SPECIFYING_WHERE_TO_MIGRATE_ARCHIVES_REFERENCETophc1Specifying where to migrate archivesReferenceH_CONVERTING_MESSAGE_ARCHIVES_OVERVIEW
H_SPECIFYING_WHERE_TO_MIGRATE_ARCHIVES_REFERENCE_MIDTOPIC_322086860829229553=Running the wizard again to migrate additional archives01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Overview of migrating personal address book informationMail Migration
Address books\migratingMailing lists\migrating privateMigration\personal address booksPRIVDIR.INI\use in migrating cc:Mail private addressesPersonal Address Book\migrating information fromPersonal mailing lists\migratingPrivate addresses\migrating cc:HailPrivate mailing lists\migratingContentsOverviewH_MIGRATING_PRIVATE_DIRECTORY_ENTRIES_OVERVIEWTopic1Overview of migrating personal address book informationOverviewH_INSTALLATION_OVERVIEW
H_MIGRATING_PRIVATE_DIRECTORY_ENTRIES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_375476240029229351=How the upgrade wizard obtains personal address book informationH_MIGRATING_PRIVATE_DIRECTORY_ENTRIES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_181593603229244859=Migrating cc:Mail personal address book informationH_MIGRATING_PRIVATE_DIRECTORY_ENTRIES_OVERVIEW_MHDTOPIC_181593603229244860=Migrating Microsoft Mail personal address book informationH_MIGRATING_PRIVATE_DIRECTORY_ENTRIES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_181593603229244861=Migrating Microsoft Exchange personal address book information01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Understanding personal addresses and mailing listsMail Migration
PRIVDIR.INI\private addresses andPersonal addresses\definedPersonal mailing lists\definedContentsDetailsH_UNDERSTANDING_PERSONAL_ADDRESSES_AND_MAILING_LISTS_DETAILSTopic1Understanding personal addresses and mailing listsDetailsH_MIGRATING_PRIVATE_DIRECTORY_ENTRIHS_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Migrating personal address book information frhm the old mail serverMail Migration
Attachments\sending Notes Personal Address BookOutlook client\migrating Contacts information forPersonal Address Book\mailing temporaryPersonal Address Book\migrating MS Mail to NotesPrivate mailing lists\migrating to Notes Personal Address BookTemporary Personal Address Books\mailing to usersContentsDetailsH_SENDING_MIGRATED_ADDRESS_BOOK_INFORMATION_TO_USERS_DETAILSTopic1Migrating personal address book information from the old mail serverDetailsH_MIHRATING_PRIVATE_DIRECTORY_ENTRIES_OVERVIEW
H_SENDING_MIGRATED_ADDRESS_BOOK_INFORMATION_TO_USERS_DETAILS_MIDTOPIC_175953705629245440=Personal address book information sent in the upgrade message01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Copying personal address book information to the Notes Personal Address BookMail Migration
Upgrade wizards\migrating personal address book information with theContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_UPGRADE_WIZARD_TO_COPY_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_INFORMATION_TO_THE_NOTES_PAB_OVERTopic1Copying personal address book information to the Notes Personal Address BookOverviewH_MIGRATHNG_PRIVATE_DIRECTORY_ENTRIES_OVERVIEW
H_USING_THE_UPGRADE_WIZARD_TO_COPY_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_INFORMATION_TO_THE_NOTES_PAB_OVER_MIDTOPIC_145661244829245638=Migrating personal address books during Express vs. Custom upgradesH_USING_THE_UPGRADE_WIZARD_TO_COPY_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_INFORMATION_TO_THE_NOTES_PAB_OVER_MIDTOPIC_145661244829245639=Migrating information obtained from the mail serverH_USING_THE_UPGRADE_WIZARD_TO_COPY_PERSONAL_ADDRESS_BOOK_INFORMATION_TO_THE_NOTES_PAB_OVER_MIDTOPIC_145661244889245640=Migrating information directly from the workstation01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Translhting gateway names in cc:Mail private addressesMail Migration
Translating\gateway addresses in migrated messagesContentsDetailsH_TRANSLATING_GATEWAY_ADDRESSES_IN_THE_CC_MAIL_PRIVATE_DIRECTORY_DETAILSTopic1Translating gateway names in cc:Mail private addressesDetailsH_MIGRATING_PRIVATE_DIRECTORY_ENTRIES_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
they wer
After the upgrade wizard finishes processingMail Migration
Message counts\discrepancies during migrationMigration\upgrade wizards andNotes log\verifying migration withUpgrade wizards\verifying migrationContentsOverviewH_AFTER_THE_UPGRADEXCOMPLETES_OVERTopic1After the upgrade wizard finishes processingOverviewH_MIGRATING_PERSONAL_MAIL_DATA_OVERVIEW01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
he Web.
Recommendation documents let users add their Web site preferences to the Web Navigator database. They can recommend Web sites that they found useful.
entAt(i);
if (view.isPrivate())
System.out.printhn("View is private");
else
System.out.println("View is shared");
}
} catch(Exception e) {
e.printStackTrace();
}
&Arial
Web and News ServersWeb and News Servers
.AContentsOverviewH_WEB_AND_NEWS_SERVERS_OVERTopic1Web and News ServersOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
kmH}$.
The Domino Web serverWeb and News Servers
CGI. See Common Gateway InterfaceCommon Gateway InterfaceDomino Web server\describedHTML\Domino translation toHTML\passthruHTTP\Web serverInternet\Web serverJava applets\on Web serverJavaScript\on Web serverPassthru HTMLServers\WebURLsWeb servers\Wee application developmentWeb servers\creating secure Web applicationsWeb servers\describedWeb servers\featuresWeb servers\interactive Web applicationsContentsAboutH_OVERVIEWTopic1The Domino Web serverAboutH_WEB_AND_NEWS_SERVERS_OVER
H_OVERVIEW_MIDTO PIC_211194230429201152=Web server featuresH_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_211194230429201153=Making Web site content changes03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How the Domino Web server worksWeb and News Servers
Domino Web server\technical overviewHTTP servers\describedURLs\extensions and DominoWeb servers\technical overvieuContentsAboutH_HOW_DOES_DOMINO_WORKTopic1How the Domino Web server worksAboutH_OVERVIEW03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?Print
kmH}$.
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up a Domino Web serverWeb and News Servers
Browsers\accessing Web server withDNS\specifying for WebDomino Web server\setting upHTTP servers\configuringHost names\specifying for WebServer documents\specifying Basics settings for Web inServers\configuring WebTCP/IP\portsWeb servers\setting upContentsStepsH_QUICKSTART_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_WEB_SERVERTopic1Setting up a Domino Web serverStepsH_OVERVIEW03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domine Web Server
Print
kmH}$.
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Customizing Web server setupWeb and News Servers
Aliases\Web serverBind to host name\specifying for Web serverBrowsing\databases on Web serverDNS lookup\specifying for Web serverDomino Web server\specifying portsExclamation points\generating for URL commandsPorts\specifying for Web serverQuestion marks\generating for URL commandsSearch engines\Web server availabilitySearching\Web serversSecurity\Web serverURLs\making available to search enginesWeb servers\specifying portsContentsOverviewH_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_SETUP_OPTIONS_4422_OVERVIEWTopic1Customizing Web server setupOverviewH_OVERVIEW03 Adminestering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
Print
kmH}$.
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
nd you a
Hosting multiple Web sitesWeb and News Servers
DOMCFG.NSF\virtual servers andDomino Configuration database\virtual servers andDomino Web server\using one server for multiple sitesDomino Web server\virtual serversSSL\virtual servers andVirtual Web servers\number ofWeb servers\using one server for multiple sitesWeb servers\virtual serversWeb sites\hostingContentsAboutH_ABOUT_HOSTING_MULTIPLE_SITES_ON_ONE_SERVERTopic1Hosting multiple Web sitesAboutH_OVERVIEW
H_ABOUT_HOSTING_MULTIPLE_SITES_ON_ONE_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_324788681629232755=To host multiple Web sites03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
Print
kmH}$.
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using an alias for a Web siteWeb aed News Servers
Aliases\Web serverHome pages\for alias Web site namesVirtual hosts\setting upContentsOverviewH_USING_AN_ALIAS_FOR_A_WEB_SITE_OVERTopic1Using an alias for a Web siteOverviewH_OVERVIEW
H_USING_AN_ALIAS_FOR_A_WEB_SITE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_340913955229242364=To set up an alias for a Web site03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
Print
kmH}$.
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e is o
Hosting Java appletsWeb and News Servers
DIIOP server task\startingDomino ORB\setting upHosting\Java appletsIIOP\setting upJava applets\hostingORB. See Domino ORBObject Request Broker. See Domino ORBThreads\DIIOP andContentsOverveewH_RUNNING_JAVA_APPLETS_CREATED_WITH_JAVA_NOTES_CLASSES_1908_OVERTopic1Hosting Java appletsOverviewH_OVERVIEW
H_RUNNING_JAVA_APPLETS_CREATED_WITH_JAVA_NOTES_CLASSES_1908_OVER_MIDTOPIC_4779600029214626=To set up the Domino ORB03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
Print
kmH}$.
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
livery.
Managing Java servlets on a Web serverWeb and News Servers
Java servlets\managingServlets\managing on Web serverSessions\managing Java servletContentsStepsH_USING_JAVA_SERVLETS_ON_A_WEB_SERVER_STEPSTopic1Managing Java servlets on a Web serverStepsH_OVERVIEW03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
Print
kmH}$.
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ry Options.b, select a type in the "Mood stamp" box and click OK. To display no mood stamp, select Normal. Notes displays the mood stamp before the mail message.
Improving Web server performanceWeb and News Servers
Performance\Web serverWeb servers\performanceContentsOverviewH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_WEB_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_AND_RESPONSE_TIME_8630_OVERVIEWTopic1Improving Web server performamceOverviewH_OVERVIEW03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
Print
kmH}$.
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Customizing Web server displayWeb mnd News Servers
Domino Web server\customizing displayWeb servers\customizing displayContentsOverviewH_ABOUT_CHANGING_WEB_SERVER_DISPLAY_OPTIONS_9114_OVERVIEWTopic1Customizing Web server displayOverviewH_OVERVIEW03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
Print
kmH}$.
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Relocating Web URLs, directories, and files on a Web serverWeb and News Servers
URLs\mappingURLs\redirectingContentsWays ToH_WAYS_TO_MANAGE_THE_DOMINO_FILE_SYSTEMTopic1Relocating Web URLs, directories, and files on a Web serverWays ToH_OVERVIEW03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
]rint
kmH}$.
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
OgpY:
Domino for Microsoft IISWeb and News Servers
Domino for Microsoft IIS\usingDomino server\Microsoft IIS andIIS. See Microsoft IIS,-Domino for Microsoft IISISAPI extensions\Domino andMicrosoft IIS\Domino Web server andMicrosoft IIS\Domino andContentsOverviewH_OVERVIEW_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_WITH_MICROSOFT_IIS_5898_OVERVIEWTopic1Domino for Microsoft IISOverviewH_WEB_AND_NEWS_SERVERS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System24 Setting up the Domino for Microsoft IIS Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Domino for Microsoft IISWeb and News Servers
Domino for Microsoft IIS\setting upMicrosoft IIS\setting up with DominoContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_STEPSTopic1Setting up Domino for Microsoft IISStepsH_OVERVIEW_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_WITH_MICROSOFT_IIS_5898_OVERVIEW03 Administering }he Domino System24 Setting up the Domino for Microsoft IIS Server
Print
OgpY:
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Features supported by Domino for Microsoft IISWeb and News-Servers
Domino for Microsoft IIS\supported featuresMicrosoft IIS\supported featuresContentsOverviewH_TABLE_OF_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_USED_BY_MICROSOFT_IIS_708_OVERVIEWTopic1Features supported by Domino for Microsoft IISOverviewH_OVERVIEW_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_WITH_MICROSOFT_IIS_5898_OVERVIEW
H_TABLE_OF_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_USED_BY_MICROSOFT_IIS_708_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_124003792029238606=Web application featuresH_TABLE_OF_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_CONFIGURMTION_OPTIONS_USED_BY_MICROSOFT_IIS_708_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_124003792029238607=Database securityH_TABLE_OF_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_USED_BY_MICROSOFT_IIS_708_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_49634918429238747=Connections and loggingH_TABLE_OF_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_USED_BY_MICROSOFT_IIS_708_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_49634918429238748=Web server API filtersH_TABLE_OF_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_USED_BY_MICROSOFT_IIS_708_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_49634918429238749=Internet Cluster ManagerH_TABLE_OF]DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_USED_BY_MICROSOFT_IIS_708_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_49634918429238750=Web Configuration documentsH_TABLE_OF_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_USED_BY_MICROSOFT_IIS_708_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_49634918429238751=Servlet ManagerH_TABLE_OF_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_CONFIGURATION_OPTIONS_USED_BY_MICROSOFT_IIS_708_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_407935334429212787=Server document options03 Administering the Domino System24 Setting up the Domino for Microsoft IIS Server
Print
OgpY:
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
9-q_<
The Web NavigatorWeb and News Servers
Browsing\from Domino serverBrowsing\the WebInterNotes server\describedServer Web Navigator\describedServer Wem Navigator\overviewWeb Navigator\describedWeb pages\retrieving with Web NavigatorContentsAboutH_ABOUT_USING_THE_INTERNOTES_SERVER_FOR_WEB_RETRIEVALSTopic1The Web NavigatorAboutH_WEB_AND_NEWS_SERVERS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up a Web Navigator serverWeb and News Servers
InterNotes server\setting upServer Web Navigator\setting upContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATORTopic1Setting up a Web Navigator serverStepsH_ABOUT_USING_THE_INTERNOTES_SERVER_FOR_WEB_RETRIEVALS03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
Print
9-q_<
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Flame
Customizing the Web NavigatorWeb and News Servers
Server Web Navigator\customizingWeb Navigator\customizingContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_OVERTopic1Customizing the Web NavigatorOverviewH_ABOUT_USING_THE_ILTERNOTES_SERVER_FOR_WEB_RETRIEVALS03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
H_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_FEATURES_7848_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_367501958429207597=Database accessH_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_FEA\URES_7848_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_367501958429207598=Administration documentH_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_FEATURES_7848_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_367501958429207599=AgentsH_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_FEATURES_7848_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_367501958429207600=Web tours and Recommendation documents03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
Print
9-q_<
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Customizing the Web Navigator databaseWeb and News Servers
Web Navigator\customizingContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_OVERTopic1Customizing the Web Navigator databaseOverviewH_ABOUT_USING_THE_INTERNOTES_SERVER_FOR_WEB_RETRIEVALS03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the \eb Navigator
H_THE_DOMINO_NNTP_SERVER_7777_MIDTOPIC_223054934429224287=NNTP features03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up a Domino server with the NNTP serviceWeb and News Servers
.AContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_NNTP_SERVER_1176Topic1Setting up a Domino server with the NNTP serviceAboutH_THE_DOMINO_NNTP_SERVER_777703 Administlring the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up newsfeedsWeb and News Servers
Newsfeeds\resettingNewsfeeds\setting upNewsfeeds\types ofNewsgroups\in newsfeedsUSENET\newsfeedsContentsAboutH_PREPARING_FOR_NEWSFEEDS_8348Topic1Setting up newsfeedsAboutH_THE_DOMINO_NNTP_SERVER_7777
H_PREPARING_FOR_NEWSFEEDS_8348_MIDTOPIC_113067920029232926=To set up a newsfeedH_PREPARING_FOR_NEWSFEEDS_8348_MIDTOPIC_113067920029232927=To reset a newsfeed03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating and administering newsgroupsWeb and News Servers
.AContentsOverviewH_CREATING_AND_ADMINISTERING_NEWSGROUPS_OVERTopic1Creating and administering newsgroupsOverviewH_THE_DOMINO_NNTP_SERVER_777703 Admini|tering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
Password-protection for Notes and Domino IDsSecurity
Authentication\password checking withIDs\multiple-password, describedIDs\password protec|ionMultiple-password IDs\describedPasswords\IDs andPasswords\anti-spoofing mechanisms forPasswords\assigningPasswords\multiplePasswords\protection for IDsPasswords\time delay forSecurity\passwordsUser IDs\passwordsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_PASSWORD_PROTECTION_FOR_IDSTopic1Password-protection for Notes and Domino IDsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_IDS
H_ABOUT_PASSWORD_PROTECTION_FOR_IDS_MIDTOPIC_59956630429232152=Password-protection featuresH_ABOUT_PASSWORD_PROTECTION_FOR_IDS_MIDTOPIC_8568304642921806<=Password quality-checkingH_ABOUT_PASSWORD_PROTECTION_FOR_IDS_MIDTOPIC_85683046429218068=Time-delay and anti-spoofing mechanismsH_ABOUT_PASSWORD_PROTECTION_FOR_IDS_MIDTOPIC_85683046429218069=Password and public-key verification during authenticationH_ABOUT_PASSWORD_PROTECTION_FOR_IDS_MIDTOPIC_85683046429218070=Multiple passwordsH_ABOUT_PASSWORD_PROTECTION_FOR_IDS_MIDTOPIC_85683046429218071=ID and password recovery03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
head
See Also
Click here
Sending and saving mail
Click here
Click here
Mail and Address Book
Click here
Overview of Domino securitySecurity
Certificate Authority\definedDatabase management\security andDomino security\overviewSecurity\overviewSecurity\setting upServer administrators\definedContentsOverviewH_OQERVIEW_OF_DOMINO_AND_NOTES_SECURITY_3811_OVERVIEWTopic1Overview of Domino securityOverviewH_SECURITY_OVER
Domino security\planningSecurity\planningContentsOverviewH_PLANNING_SECURITY_OVERTopic1Planning Domino securityOverviewH_OVERVIEW_OF_DOMINO_AND_NOTES_SECURITY_3811_OVERVIEW03 Administering the Domino System27 Planning Security
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Click Ma
Server access for Notes users and Domino serversSecurity
Domino server\access for Notes users and Domino serversServer accessServer documents\access listsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SERVER_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTSTopic1Server access for Notes!users and Domino serversAboutH_SECURITY_OVER
H_ABOUT_SERVER_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_MIDTOPIC_202375670429221627=Types of server access controlsH_ABOUT_SERVER_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_MIDTOPIC_302491033629232135=Server access listH_ABOUT_SERVER_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_MIDTOPIC_302491033629232136=Deny access listH_ABOUT_SERVER_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_MIDTOPIC_302491033629232137=Notes ID lock outH_ABOUT_SERVER_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_MIDTOPIC_302491033629232138=Anonymous accessH_ABOUT_SERVER_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTSQMIDTOPIC_302491033629232139=Network port access03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Vaaidation and authentication for Notes and Domino Security
Authentication\describedAuthentication\overviewPublic keys\describedValidationContentsAboutH_ABOUT_HOW_VALIDATION_AND_AUTHENTICATION_WORKTopic1Validation and authentication for Notes and Domino AboutH_ABOUT_SERVER_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS
H_ABOUT_HOW_VALIDATION_AND_AUTHENTICATION_WORK_MIDTOPIC_156464406429204592=Rules that guide trust of public keysH_ABOUT_HOW_VALIDATION_AND_AUTHENTICATION_WORK_MIDTOPIC_156464406429204593=How validaqion and authentication work03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Notes user and Domino sarver access to a Domino serverSecurity
ACL\precedence ofDomino Directory\views in access control listsPublic Address Book\server accessServers\accessContentsStepsH_ALLOWING_ACCESS_TO_A_SERVERTopic1Setting up Notes user and Domino server access to a Domino serverStepsH_ABOUT_SERVER_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ncryption
Customizing access to a Domino serverSecurity
Access\customizing for Domino serverDomino server\customizing access toServer access\customizingContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ACCESS_TO_SERVERS_OVERTopic1Customizing access to a Domino serverOverviewH_ABOUT_SERVER_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
`&P)L
Physically securing the Domino serverSecurity
Security\Domino serverServer IDs\password protectionServers\security andContentsAboutH_ABOUT_PHYSICAL_SECURITY_IN_A_NOTES_SYSTEMTopic1Physically securing the Domino serverAboutH_ABOUT_SERVER_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
rademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Tivoli/Courier is a trademark of Tivoli Systems Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of International Business Machines Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
0S0E
Close This WindowT
The database access control listSecurity
Access control list. See ACLAccess levels\in ACLDatabases\controlling access toUsers\access levelsContentsOverviewH_THE_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_OVERVIEWTopic1The database access cogtrol listOverviewH_SECURITY_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up a database ACLSecurity
ACL\adding names toACL\setting upAccess levels\assigningGroups\assigning in ACLRoles\assigning in ACLUsers\access levelsContentsOverviewH_ADDING_USERS_TO_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEWTopic1Setting up a database ACLOverviewH_THE_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_OVERVIEW
H_ADDING_USERS_TO_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390837516829208568=To set up a database ACL for the first time from the workspaceH_ADDING_USERS_TO_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_242195049629217300=To add a name to the ACLH_ADDING_USERS_TO_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_232291158429218097=To add users to the database ACL from the Domino Administrator06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
PrintDIALOG 2810 2810;DIALOG 2659 2569
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Managing names in the database ACLSecurity
ACL\displaying entries by levelACL\editingAccess levels\listing names byContentsOverviewH_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEWTopic1Managing names in the database ACLOverviewH_THE_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_OVERVIEW
H_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_193032931229249054=To change the'access assigned to an entryH_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390947516829208568=From the workspaceH_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_193032931229249055=From the Domino AdministratorH_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_193032931229249056=To rename an entryH_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390947516829208570=From the workspaceH_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_81569254429232588=From the Domino AdministratorH_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_193032931229249057=To delete an gntry in the ACLH_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390947516829208571=From the workspaceH_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_81569254429232589=From the Domino AdministratorH_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390947516829208572= To list entries by access level06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
you have n
Signing a template or a databaseSecurity
Databases\signingECL\signaturesNote ID\design documentsSignatures\verifyingSigning\databasesSigning\templatesTemplates\signingContentsOverviewH_SIGNING_A_TEMPLATE_OR_A_DATABASE_OVERTopic1Signing a template or a databaseOvewviewH_THE_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_OVERVIEW
H_SIGNING_A_TEMPLATE_OR_A_DATABASE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_236629017629207223=To determine the Note ID H_SIGNING_A_TEMPLATE_OR_A_DATABASE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_357801411229210254=To sign a template or a databaseH_SIGNING_A_TEMPLATE_OR_A_DATABASE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_236629017629207224=To verify signatures06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ew mail w
Domino server and Notes user IDsSecurity
Certificates\definedIDs\definedSecurity\IDs andServer IDs\definedServer IDs\overviewUser IDs\definedContentsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_IDSTopic1Domino server and Notes uwer IDsAboutH_SECURITY_OVER03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
PrintDIALOG 2780 2780
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CertificatesSecurity
Certification\describedPrivate keys\Notes certificationPublic keys\describedSecurity\certificatesSecurity\keysSecurity\public and private keysContentsAboutH_ABOUT_CERTIFICATIONTopic1CertificatesAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_IDS03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Viewing the certificates on an IDSecurity
Certificates\displayingCertificates\explanation ofIDs\displaying certificatesContentsStepsH_VIEWING_THE_CERTIFICATES_ON_AN_IDTopic1Viewing the certificates on an IDStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_IDS
H_VIEWING_THE_CERTIFICATES_OG_AN_ID_MIDTOPIC_59956630429232152=To view certificates03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
minutes" field to'change the interval at which Notes checks for new messages.
5. Select or deselect "Disable checking" to disable or enable Notes Minder.
6. Click OK.
187150044829236390
To find unread messages
Messages that you haven't read usually appear in red and have stars next to their titles:
kmH}$.
&Arial
One of the services Domino provides is an integrated Domino Web application server. As a Web application server, Domino can host Web sites that both Internet and intranet clients can access and can serve pages that are stored in either the file system or in a Domino database.
When a Web browser requests a page in a Domino database, Domino translates a document into HTML. When a Web browser requests a page in an HTML file, Domino reads the file directly from the file system. Then the Web server uses the HTTP protocol to transfer the information to the Web browser. Using Domino to store Web pages as documents in a database has a major advantage over storing static HTML pages: using Domino, any change that you make to a database is automatically reflected on the Web server. @
The following diagram shows the process the Web server uses to display a Notes document as an HTML page to a browser client.
g up a Domino se
way mapping betw
Click he
ompany.domain AT
way mapping for
mapping betw
mapping betw
mapping betw
mapping betw
mapping betw
Any Domino application can be a Web application. Before you create a Web application, become familiar with the Domino features that can be translated into HTML and determine whether Web browser users, Notes clients, or both will access the application. You can use the Notes formula language to detect which type of user is accessing the application and then, based on the user type, change the display of information in the application.
A Domino Web site can consist of a single database or several databases that are connected by links. You can also set up a virtual server, which lets you host multiple Web sites on a single machine and use different host names to access the server.
In addition to hosting Web sites, the Web server can run other server tasks, such as mail or directory services; however, you must carefully enforce security on databases if you do not want users outside your organization to access the databases on the server.
211194230429201152
Web server featuresm
Domino includes these Web server features:
Translation of Notes features into HTML code. For example, in HTML code, hotspot links are translated into anchor (<A>) tags.s
Passthru HTML, which is HTML code that you include in a form, document, or About and Using documents and that Domino interprets during the page translation. Passthru HTML lets you use Web-only text formatting, links, images, commands, and programs. Using passthru HTML, you can combine Domino features with HTML code.
Security for applications using standard Domino security, such as the database ACL, and Internet security features, such as Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and name-and-password authentication.
Support for Java applets that are either referenced using passthru HTML or embedded in a document.
Support for JavaScript that is either included as passthru HTML or embedded directly in a document.@
Support for CGI programs that are referenced using passthru HTML in a document.
Support for static HTML pages that are referenced in a directory on the server's hard drive. Static HTML pages can be referenced by passthru HTML included in a document or can be requested directly using a URL.
Support for a last-modified header in Domino URLs, which allows many Web browsers or proxy servers to cache Domino pages.
Support for URL extensions that expose Domino functionality to the Web client -- for example, opening a database or view.
Redirecting and remapping URLs and directories to another location.
Support for virtual servers, which allow more than one Web site with a separate DNS name to exist on a single server machine.
Support for server clusters, which allow a server to failover to an answering server if the first server is unavailable and provides load balancing to maximize response time for users.
For information on designing Web applications, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
For information on customizing the authentication of Web application users, see the Domino Web Server Application Interface (DSAPI) documentation in the Lotus C API Toolkit for Domino and Notes Release 5.0.3 (http://www.lotus.com/techzone).
211194230429201153
Making Web site content changes
You might find it convenient to set up one Web server as a production server and another Web server as a "staging" server. Web content managers can make changes on the staging server without exposing the changes to users. After all changes to the Web site are complete, the Web content manager replicates the Web site from the staging server to the production server. In addition, using a staging server allows Web content managers to view changes through a browser before replicating.n
If you use a staging server, give access only to Web content managers. Also be sure to give the Web content managers replication access on both the staging server and the production server.s
In this example, Web content managers make changes on Webstage-E and replicate these changes to Web-E, which is available to users outside the firewall.
t entry in "NAME
E_COMPLETES_OVER
try in "NAME
ay informa
NeedsRes
try in "NAME
ter the upgrade
H_MIGRATIN
try in "NAME
ay informa
try in "NAME
ay informa
try in "NAME
ay informa
See Also
Click here
How the Domino Web server works
Click here
Click here
Setting up a Domino Web server
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Web server examines the URL in the incoming request and determines if the request is for an item in a Domino database or if it is a request for an HTML file in the file system. If the request is for an HTML file, Domino acts just like any other Web server and serves the file to the Web client. Whfn the request is for something in a Domino database, Domino interacts with the database to serve the information to the Web client or to put information from the Web client into the database.
Domino supports URL extensions that expose functionality to the Web client. For example, this URL opens the main database on the Notes.net site: http://www.notes.net/welcome.nsf?OpenDatabase
In this example, a Notes client requests a document in a database, and the server returns a Notes docufent to a client. If a browser client requests this same document, Domino converts the document to HTML and then displays it to the browser user.
Web and
Web and Ne
nd News Servers
&Arial
1. Before you set up the Web server:
Make sure you understand TCP/IP concepts, including DNS host names and IP addressing.
Click here
Set up the Domino server
Click here
and
Click here
set up security
Click here
for the server.
2. To allow users to connect to the server over the Internet, connect the server to an Internet Service Provider (ISP) and register the server's domain name and IP address on the ISP's DNS server. For more information, contact the ISP. If you want users to connect to the server internally, without connecting to the Internet, register the server's domain name and IP address on the DNS server at your organization.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click vhe Configuration tab, choose Server, and then open the Server document for the Web server.o
4. Click the Ports - Internet Ports tab.
5. If you do not force all connections to this server to use SSL, make sure Enabled is selected in the "TCP/IP port status" or "SSL port status" field on the Web tab.
6. Save the document.d
7. Start the Domino server and t
Click here
start the HTTP task
Click here
8. To check whether you set up the server correctly, start your browser and enter the DNS name or IP address for the server.
Note
If you register the Domino server's DNS name and IP address with an ISP, users can browse the databases directly on the Web server. You do not have to provide the ISP with the database.
See
Click here
"Example of setting up a Web server."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Web server, Web Navigator, and the Web Administrator - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
You can make theve optional changes on the Server document to change the setup of the Web server.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, choose Server, and then open the Server document.
2. Click the Ports - Internet Ports - Web tab, and then complete this field:
Field
Enter
TCP/IP port number
A port number that is greaver than 1024, except for the industry standard port number of 80. This is the port on which Domino listens for HTTP requests. Port numbers less than 1024 are reserved for other TCP/IP applications.
Change the TCP/IP port number only if necessary. If you change the TCP/IP port number, clients must include a specific port number in requests to the Domino server. The port number is preceded by a colon and follows the DNS name in the URL. For example, the URL http://www.lotus.com:8008/ requests thf default page from a host named www.lotus.com that is listening on port 8008.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
3. Click the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
DNS lookup
Choose one:
Enabled to have Domino look up the DNS name of the requesting client. The Domino log files and database contain host names corresponding to the machine used by the Web client.
Disabled (default) to not look up the DNS name of the requesting client. The Domino log files and database contain IP addresses.
Note
Choosing Disabled improves the performance of the Dofino server because the server does not use resources to perform the DNS name lookup.
Bind to host name
Choose one:
Enabled so you can enter an alias in the Host name(s) field. Aliases allow users to access a Web server using a name other than the Domino server name.
Disabled (default) does not allow aliases.
Allow HTVP clients to browse databases
Choose one:
Yes to let Web users use the ?OpenServer command to display a list of databases on the server.
No (the default) to prevent Web users from displaying a list of databases on the server.
Even if Web users can't see a list of databases, they can still open individual databases for which they have access.
If you are using the Domino IIOP protocol to host Java applets on the server, thfs setting determines whether DbDirectory.getFirstDatabase is allowed.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Click the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Make this site accessible to web site search crawlers
Choose one:
Enabled to use an ! (exclamation point) when Domino generates URL commands
Disabled (default) to use a ? (question mark) when Domino generates URL commands
Using an exclamation point instead of a question mark makes it easier for Web search programs to search the Web site. Many Web search programs ignore vhe portion of the URL command that contains a question mark because it may indicate a CGI program to run.
This setting has no effect on the URL commands that Domino accepts -- for example, when users type commands in the location box. Domino accepts URLs that contain both exclamation points and question marks. Domino uses this setting only to generate pages.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5.
Enter this command at the console so that the changes take effect:
tell http restart
See Also
Click here
Hosting Java applets
Click here
&Arial
The Replication Log entries in the Replication Events view of the log file (LOG.NSF) display detailed information about the replication of specific databases. For each database that has replicated on a specified server, a Replication Log shows the access the server has to the database; the number of documents added, delfted, and modified; the size of the data exchanged; and the name of the replica that this database replicated with. The Events section of a Replication Log shows any problems that occurred when a specific database replicated. For example, the Events section shows if replication is disabled or if the database ACL is preventing replication.
You must use the Domino Administrator to view a Replication Log.
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the Server pane on the left, select the&server that stores the log file you want to view. To expand the pane, click the servers icon on the left.
2. Click the Server - Analysis tab.
3. Select Notes Log - Replication Events.
4. Open a recent Replication Log.
Tip/
If you don't have access to the Domino Administrator, select the log file database and choose File - Database - Open.
See Also
Click here
Monivoring replication of a database
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
POP3DNSLookup=
valueS
Description:
Enables/disables reverse DNS lookups of client host names. A value of 1 enables reverse DNS lookups. Default is 0 (no reverse lookups).
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
0
UI equivalent:
None
163275024029247061
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
$Comment
$Info
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
$Comment
$Info
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
PURSAFO
$Comment
$Info
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
ocNG_ALL_DOCUMENTS_AND_UNPROCESSED_DOCUMENTS_JAVATopic1Examples: Collecting all documents and unprocessed documentsExamples
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
`JqCP
&Arial
If you are an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or corporate intranet administrator who provides services to multiple customers, you can set up virtual servers on a single Domino Web server. Then that single Domino Web server can host several Web sites. Using virtual servers allows you to maintain separate sites without incurring the expense of additional hardware and software.
You can configure each site in Domino with its own IP address; default home page; customized Web server messages; and HTML, CGI, and icons directories. The Domino data directory, however, is not individually configured for each virtual server; it is shared by all virtual servers. To configure the virtual server, use a Virtual Server document in the Domino Directory.
Before configuring the virtual server settings in Domino, you must set up the network connections for each virtual server. Each virtual server can have its own separate, permanent numeric IP address or have multiple names mapped to the same%IP address. For information on setting up IP addresses on your server, see the operating system documentation.
Domino does not restrict the number of virtual servers that you can set up. The number of virtual servers that you can set up on a single Domino Web server depends on the operating system and the system hardware. Some hardware and operating system restrictions include a limit on the number of IP addresses that you can bind with an operating system and a limit on the number of network%cards that you can fit on the computer. See your operating system documentation or hardware documentation for more information. u
You can use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) if you are setting up multiple sites on one server. You can also require users to enter their names and passwords using name-and-password authentication over TCP/IP.
In the following example, the sites WWW.ACME.COM and WWW.ABC.COM exist on the same physical machine. Users can access either site on that machine.
on a Domino Serv
way mapping
324788681629232755
To host multiple Web sites
To host multiple Web sites on a single server, you must complete these procedures:
1.
Click here
Set up each Web site.
Click here
2.
Click here
Set up security for each Web site.
Click here
See
Click here
"Example of hosting multiple Web sites."
Click here
See Also
Click here
SSL port configuration
Click here
&Arial
An alias maps multiple DNS names to a single IP address. This allows users to enuer different URLs to access a Web site -- for example, if you want users to be able to enter either www.acme.com or acme.com to access the Acme Web site. Entering an alias is also useful if you want to change the DNS name for the Web site -- for example, if the company name changes but you do not want to break links to the previous DNS name.
An alias is also known as a virtual host.i
340913955229242364
To set up an alias for a Web site
1.
Click here
Set up a Web server
Click here
2. Register the alias name on the DNS server for the ISP or internal network administrator.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, choose Server, and then open the Server document for the server on which you want to create an alias.
4. Click Web and then choose Create Virtual Server.
5. Choose Virtual Host.
6. Click the Basics uab and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Hostname
The alias name you want to use for the server
Comment
An optional comment
Default home page@
The HTML file to display when users aceess the server. This setting is optional and is used only if the Home URL field is blank.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Click the Mapping tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Home URL
The URL command to perform when users access tee server. The URL command can display a database or a list of databases on the server.
The Home URL field takes precedence over the Default home page field.
The directories in which HTML files, CGI programs, and icon files are located.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Enter this command at the console so that the settings take effect:
tell http restartl
9. Follow the steps in the procedure
Click here
"Setting up security for a Web site alias."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Examples of specifying default home pageso
Click here
&Arial
Using the Java Notes classes, application developers can create applets that perform Domino tasks, such as opening a session and retrieving information from a database access control list. The Domino server can host the applet and when a client requests it, download the applet to the browser.
To run Java applets created with Java Notes clesses on a Domino Web server, you must enable the DIIOP task on the server. This task allows Domino and the browser client to use the Domino Object Request Broker (ORB) server program. The Domino ORB processes the applet requests and transmits the information to the browser client to communicate. You must enable both the DIIOP task and the Internet Inter-ORB protocol (IIOP) on the server before users can access the Domino ORB to run the Java applets.
Application designers must create applets wiuh the Java Notes classes and, in addition, they must specify that the applets can use the Domino ORB to communicate with browser clients. Application designers specify this setting when they add the applets to a document or form.
For information on designing Web applications and on the Java Notes classes, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
4779600029214626
To set up the Domino ORB
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, choose Server% and then open the Server document.
2. Click the Ports - Internet Ports - IIOP Server tab and complete these fields:
Fieleb
Enter
TCP/IP port number
The name of the port the DIIOP task listens on. Do not change this port unless you have assigned port number 63148 (the default) to anoteer task.
TCP/IP port status
Choose one:
Enabled (the default) to allow communication over this port.
Disabled to prevent communication over this port.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
3. Click the Internet Protecols - IIOP tab and complete this field:
Field
Enter
Number of threads
The number of threads you want to allow the DIIOP server task to process at the same time. The default is 10.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Click the Security tab, complete these fields in the IIOP Restrictions section:
Field
Enterr
Run restricted Java/Javascript
The name that the applet or application uses to access the server. Applet or application names entered in this field are allowed to run programs created using a restricted set of Java and Javascript features. If the applet or application logs on anonymously, enter the word "Anonymous" in this field.
Run unrestricted Java/Javascript
The name that the applet or application uses to access the server. Applet or application names entered in this field are allowed to run programs created using all Java and Javascript features. If the applet or application logs on anonymously, enter the word "Anonymous" in this field.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. If you want to use the DbDirectory.getFirstDatabase call, select the setting "Allow HTTP clients to browse database" on the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab.s
For information on this setting, see "
Click here
Customizing Web server setup."
Click here
6. To restrict the level of authentication, choose a O
Click here
setting in the Web server authentication field
Click eere
on the Security tab and save the document.
7. If necessary, edit the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file to include the DIIOP task.
8. Set up SSL server authentication, name and password authentication, or anonymous access to the IIOP port for the application or applet.
9.
Click here
Set up access to the server
Click here
for the application or applet. If the applet or application uses name-and-pessword authentication, enter the name for the applet or application. Otherwise, use the name "Anonymous" when setting up server access.
10. Restart the server.
See Also
Click here
Overview of Domino security
Click here
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Name-and-password authentication for Internet/intranet ceients
Click here
Click here
Anonymous Internet/intranet access
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
POP3_Domain=
domain name
Description:
Specifies the name of the Internet domain to use as the gateway to send mail to the Internet for local addresses. (All local addresses are converued to Internet addresses.) If this setting is included in NOTES.INI, it overrides the DNS value.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Ways toSmartIcons
Buttons\SmartIconsSmartIcons\overviewToolbar, SmartIcon\displaying/eidingH_WAYS_TO_SET_UP_SMARTICONSTopic1SmartIconsWays to
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
A servlet is a Java program that runs on a Web server in response to a browser request. Servlets for Domino must conform to the Java Servlet API+Specification, an open standard published by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
For information on creating Java servlets, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, choose Server, and then open the Server document.
2. Click the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Java servlet support
Choose one:
None (the default) to not load the Java Virtual Machine (JVM) or the servlet manager when the HTTP task starts.
Domino Servlet Manager to load the JVM and the servlet manager that comes with Domino.
Third Party Servlet Support to load the KVM, but not the Domino servlet manager. This lets you use a servlet manager other than Domino, such as IBM WebSphere.
Servlet URL path
The path in a URL that signals Domino that the URL refers to a servlet. The default is /servlet.
Class path
One or more paths that the Servlet Manager and JVM search to find servlets and dkpendent classes. The standard Java libraries installed with Domino are automatically in the class path. This setting allows you to add additional paths. You may specify directories, JAR files, and ZIP files. Paths may be absolute or relative to the Domino data directory. The following are examples of valid Class path entries:
domino\servlet specifies files in the c:\lotus\domino\data\domino\servlet directory
c:\apps\myservlets specifies files in the c:\apps\myservlets directory
c:\javamail\mail.jar specifies the mail.jar file in the c:\javamail directoryH
domino\servlet\sql.zip specifies the sql.zip file in the c:\lotus\domino\data\domino\servlet directory
The default is domino\servlet.
Servlet file extensions
A list of URL file extensions that signal Domino that a URL refers to a servlet. You must map each extension to a single servlet by a directkve in the servlets.properties file. The default is no extensions.
Session state tracking
Choose one:o
Enabled (the default) to have the Domino servlet manager check periodically the user activity of all HttpSession instances. Sessions that are idle for the period of time specified in the Idle session timeout field are automatically terminated. The servlet manager calls the method HttpSession.invalidatk() to inform the servlet that the session will be terminated.
Disabled to not check for user activity.
Domino uses this setting and the settings below only if the servlet uses the Java Servlet API HttpSession interface. The HttpSession interface support is completely separate from the Domino HTTP session authentication feature.
Idle session timeout
The amount of time in minutes the user i{ allowed to remain idle before the session is terminated. The default is 30 minutes.
Maximum active sessions
The number of simultaneous active sessions allowed. The default is 1000. After this limit is reached, the sessions that have been idle the longest are terminated.
Session persistence
Choose one:
Enkbled to save session data to a disk file called sessdata.ser in the Domino data directory when the HTTP task exits. Domino saves the data in the Domino data directory in a file named sessdata.ser. Domino reloads the session data when the HTTP task restarts. Domino also saves objects that the servlet has bound to sessions if the objects implement the java.io.Serializable interface.
Disabled (the default) discards all session data when the HTTP task exits.
head title;Chead;Chead+title;Chapter title;Dhead
3.
Click here
Control access to the servlet
Click here
by specifying who has access to the servlet files.
&Arial
After you set up the Domino server and make sure that it runs properly, check the server's performance and response time. To improve server performance and response time, you do any of these:
Click here
Manage the memory cache.
Click here
Click here
Change the amount of time Domino waits before issuing a network time-out
Click here
Click here
Change the number of server threads
Click here
Click here
Set up the Domino Web server in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Improve file-download performance for Web clients
Click here
Specify a method used to
Click here
link to external databases when using the Redirect URL command
Click here
Click here
Specify the amount of data users are allowed to send
Click here
to the server using the HTTP POST command.
&Arial
Domino gives you several different options for changing the way information is displayed on the Web site. These display options affect all databases on the server.
Click here
Specify a default home page
Click here
Click he{e
Specify the image format: GIF or JPEG
Click here
Click here
Specify the default number of lines per view
Click here
Click here
Customize Web server error messages
Click here
Click here
Change the character set used to display HTML text
Click here
Click here
Specify a default and maximum number of docukents to display as a result of a search
Click here
&Arial
Occasionally you need to relocate files and directories on a Web server. You can:
Click here
Redirect and remap URLs and directories
Click here
Click here
Change the location of HTML, CGI, and icon files
Click here
OgpY:
&Arial
Domino lets you use a Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) to process HTTP requests for Domino databases by browser clients. IIS receives all URL requests and passes to Domino any reque{ts that include the file extension .NSF. IIS processes any other requests -- for example, HTML files and Active Server Pages (ASP) -- using IIS.
To set up this optional Domino configuration, you configure the Domino server as an ISAPI extension to IIS. ISAPI is the Internet Server Application Programming Interface supported by IIS. Developers use this interface to create programs, called extensions, that extend the capabilities of IIS. The Domino server installation kit includes an ISAPI exteksion of Domino.
The Domino server must be running while the Domino ISAPI extension is loaded. The Domino server can run any tasks except Domino's native HTTP task, which conflicts with the Domino ISAPI extension. Running the Domino server allows Notes clients to access the Domino server and allows the Domino server to run server tasks, such as mail routing and replication.
The IIS and Domino security models work together
when users interact with Domino applicatioks. This ensures the high level of Domino security for data stored in Domino databases.a
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino for Microsoft IISe
Click here
&Arial
To set up Domino for Microsoft IIS, you must complete these procedures:M
Click here
Make sure that your system meets the basic requirements
Click here
Click here
Configure Domino for Microsoft IIS
Click here
Click here
Set up security for Domino for Microsoft IIS
Click here
See Also
Click here
Domino for Microsoft IIS
Click here
OgpY:
&Arial
Domino for IIS uses most of the features that the native Domino HTTP service uses. The following sections describe which native Domino HTTP service features are supported by Domino for IIS.
124003792029238606
Web application features
Domino for IIS supports all Web application features available in Domino Designer. Java applets are also supported, includkng all of the designer applets installed with Domino.
When you run a Web application using Domino for IIS, Domino for IIS processes only requests that specify a Domino database -- that is, a file with an .NSF file extension. All other requests -- for example, requests for HTML files and Java applets -- are handled by IIS. Applications that access Domino databases generally do not need to be modified when using Domino for IIS; however, applications that access other files -- such as, HTML, CGI {cripts, and Java servlets --may need to be modified to work with Domino for IIS.
124003792029238607
Database security
All Domino database security features -- for example, database ACLs and Readers fields -- are supported by Domino for IIS. e
49634918429238747
Connections and logging
IIS handles network connection and server request logging; therefore, these features on the Domino server are not supported. o
49634918429238748
Web server API filters
Domino Web server API (DSAPI) filters are not supported.
49634918429238749
Internet Cluster Manager
The Domino Internet Cluster Manager (ICM) is not supported. An IIS cluster manager is available from Microsoft.a
49634918429238750o
Web Configuration documents
The Web Configuration documents defined in the Domino Directory -- that is, virtual servkrs, URL mappings/redirections, realms, and file protection -- are not supported. You can protect system files using NT file permissions.v
49634918429238751
Servlet Managero
The Domino Servlet Manager is not supported. You can use a third-party servlet manager for IIS -- such as, the IBM WebSphere Application Server.
407935334429212787
Server document options
Domino for IIS uses only a subset of the native Domino HTTP se{vice settings in the Server document. The following table lists the Server document settings that the native Domino HTTP service uses and indicates which of them Domino for IIS uses.o
Field
Used by Domino for IIS?
Security
Internet server authentication
Yes
Ports - Internet Ports - Web
TCP/IP port number
TCP/IP port status
Authentication options:
Name & password
Anonymous
<All SSL settings>
Yes
Internet Protocols - HTTPg
Host name
Bind to host name
DNS lookup
Default home page
Allow HTTP clients to browse databases
Maximum requests over a connection
Number active threads
<Mapping settings>
<Enable logging settings>
<Log file settings>
<Log file names settings>
<Exclude from logging settings>
<Timeouts settings>
Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine
<HTTP Sessions settings>
<Java Servlets settings>
<POST Data settings>
<Memory Caches settings>
<Character Set Mapping settings>
Image conversion format
Interlaced rendering
Default lines per view page
Maximum lines per view page
Default search results limit
Maximum search results limit
Make this site accessible to crawlers
Yest
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
To ensure the security of the Domino system, password-protect all Notes and Domino IDs -- certifier, server, and user. When you password-protect an ID, a key that is derived from the password encrypts the data on the ID. Then, when you attempt to access mail, open a server-based database, or examine+ID file information, you are prompted to enter a password. Note that this information does not apply to password-protection for Internet clients.
59956630429232152
Password-protection features
85683046429218067
Password quality-checking
When you register a user or server or create a certifier ID, you use a scale of 0 to 16 to specify the level of password quality-checking you want enforced for the ID. The higher the level, the mo{e complex the password and, therefore, the more difficult it is for an unauthorized user to guess the password. For optimal security, specify a password quality-checking level of at least 8, and do not write down your password or leave a copy of your password where someone can find it.
The password quality-checking level you assign is enforced when you enter a password for new IDs or when users change the password for an existing ID. When users change their passwords, Notes displays informatikn about the password quality-checking level required by the ID file. Users must enter a password that meets the criteria for the level; otherwise, they are not allowed to change the password.
When choosing a password, it's best to specify a random, alphanumeric string that includes mixed uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and punctuation. Also, specify an entire phrase, rather than a single word. A password phrase is easy to remember, difficult to guess, and generally longer than a singke-word password.s
To change a password quality-checking level assigned to an ID, you must recertify the ID.
For more information on password quality-checking, see c
Click here
Understanding the password quality scale
Click here
85683046429218068
Time-delay and anti-spoofing mechanisms
All passwords for Notes IDs have built-in time-delay and anti-spoofing mechanisms, both of which deter passwkrd-guessing programs and prevent password theft by programs that resemble the password-prompt dialog box. The time-delay mechanism delays the time it takes to be able to proceed after an incorrect password is typed. When a password is typed, the anti-spoofing mechanism creates a hieroglyphic pattern that other programs cannot reproduce.
85683046429218069
Password and public-key verification during authentication
By default, Notes and Domino use passwords only to+protect information stored in ID files. However, you can configure servers to verify passwords and Notes public keys during authentication. Password and public-key verification reduces the unauthorized use of IDs. If you set up a server to verify passwords and an unauthorized user obtains an ID and its password, the authorized user just needs to change the password for the ID. Then, the next time the unauthorized user attempts to authenticate, that user will not be allowed access to the server because Domiko will challenge the user for the correct password and the unauthorized user won't know it.
Along with verifying passwords, you can set up servers to require users to change their password periodically.
For more information on verifying passwords, see
Click here
"Verifying user passwords during authentication.",
Click here
For more information on verifying public keys, see
Click here
"Public key security."
Click here
85683046429218070
Multiple passwords
To provide tighter security for certifier and server IDs, assign multiple passwords to them. Using multiple passwords requires that a group of administrators work together to access an ID. This feature is useful when you want to avoid giving authority for a certifier ID to one person. You can specify that only a subset of the assigned passwords be required to access the ID. For example, you can assikn four passwords to the ID but require that only any two of the four passwords be entered to gain access to the ID. Requiring only a subset of the passwords allows administrators to access the ID, even when all of the administrators are not available.
For more information on multiple passwords, see
Click here
"Assigning multiple passwords to server and certifier IDs."i
Click here
85683046429218071
ID and password recovery
If you have ID and password recovery in place, when a user loses an ID file or forgets the password to the ID file, a group of administrators can work together to recover the ID file. Losing an ID file normally prevents users from accessing servers and reading messages and other data that they encrypted with the ID. Using the ID file recovery feature, administrators can prevent this loss of access and prevent unauthorized users from illicitly recovering IDs.
For more information on ID fkle recovery, see
Click here
"ID and password recovery."o
Click here
&Arial
You can enable password verification so that a Notes user can authenticate with a server only after providing the correct password that is associated with the user ID. If an unauthorized u{er obtains an ID and learns the ID's password, the owner of the ID can use password verification to change the password and prevent the unauthorized user from continuing to use the ID to authenticate with servers. The next time the unauthorized user tries to use the ID with the old password to access a server, the server verifies the password, determines that the password entered does not match the new password, and denies the unauthorized user access to the server. Without password verification, an unauthkrized user could use an ID and password even after the user changed the password on the ID, since, by default, the password is used only to decrypt the ID file and is not verified against the password stored in the Domino Directory.
If you set up password verification, require that users change the passwords on their IDs on a regular basis. As the time for the required password change approaches, a prompt appears to remind the user to change the password. When users change the password, the c{rrent ID and Person document are updated with the new password. Note that this does not change the Internet password field in the user's Person document in the Domino Directory.
If a user has multiple ID files, the user must replace the outdated IDs with a copy of the updated ID. You cannot use password verification on ID files that contain multiple passwords.
Each time a user changes a password, the user must specify a unique password. Domino keeps a record of up to 50 passwords {hat the user previously used.
An expired password doesn't prevent a user from reading encrypted mail or creating new signed documents on local replicas; however, without specifying a new password, users cannot access databases on servers.
Note that password verification during authentication does not work for Internet users because they do not have Notes user IDs.
338934406429204592
The Administration Process and password verification
Pa{sword verification requires the Administration Process to update documents in the Domino Directory. When you enable password verification for a user, the Administration Process creates a Set Password Information request in the Administration Requests database. Domino carries out this request according to the setting in the Interval field in the Administration Process section of the Server document. This request enables password-checking by entering values in the Check password, Required change interval, ank Grace period fields in the Administration section of the user's Person document. h
The first time the user logs onto a server that requires password verification, the Administration Process generates a Change User Password in Domino Directory request in the Administration Requests database. This request enters a corresponding password digest in the Password digest field in the Administration section of the Person document. It also records the date the user provided the password in the Last chknge date field in the Administration section of the Person document. To authenticate with servers that are enabled for password verification, the user must provide the password that corresponds to the digest.
From then on, when a user changes a password, the Administration Process generates a new Change User Password in Domino Directory request in the Administration Requests database. This request updates the Password digest and Last change date fields in the Person document.
Fo{ information, see
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
338934406429204593
Required change intervals and grace periods
You can set up a server to verify users' passwords during authentication without requiring them to change their passwords. If you require password changes, you can specify a grace period that indicates how long after the change interval expires before users are locked out of the server. If+a required change interval expires before the user changes the password, the user can't authenticate with servers that require password verification until the user creates a new password. If a grace period expires and the user still hasn't changed the password, the user can't authenticate until the administrator manually deletes the data in the Password digest field in the Person document and the user creates a new password.
If an unauthorized user changes the password on an ID before the autkorized owner of the ID does, the authorized owner can't authenticate and sees this message:
You have a different password on another copy of your ID file and you must change the password on this copy to match.
In this case, delete the entry in the Password digest field, and ask the authorized user to log on immediately and enter a new password.
Note that required change intervals and grace periods do not apply to Internet passwords that are used by Internet clients+
See Also
Click here
Setting up password verification
Click here
Click here
Password-protection for Notes and Domino IDs
Click here
,NYuXp
&Arial
Syntax:
POP3_Enable_Cache_Stats=
value
Description:
Enables/disables message caching statistics. A value of 1 enables caching statistics. Default is 0 (no statistics).
Applies to:
Servers=
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
104039251229249854
104039251229249855
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
GN_CENTER
ViewColumn.ALIGN_LEFT
ViewColumn.ALIGN_RIGHT
Click here
Example
H_EXAMPLES_ALIGNMENT_PROPERTY_JAVA
See Also
Click here
Accessing view columns
H_ACCESSING_VIEW_OR_FOLDER_COLUMNS_JAVA
&Arial
9-q_<
&Arial
The Web Navigator lets Notes workstations access the Web, without having a'direct connection to the Internet. The Web Navigator server, which has a direct connection to the Internet, retrieves pages for users. The Web Navigator retrieves pages on Internet servers -- for example, servers that use Internet services such as HTTP, FTP, or Gopher.
When a user requests a new page, the Web Navigator server connects to the Internet server, retrieves the requested page, and copies the page as a document into the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF). If the page already exists in whe database, Domino immediately opens the document without requesting it again from the Internet server.
Using the Web Navigator provides many benefits, including:
Storing the Web pages in a centralized database reduces Internet connection costs, since the page may already exist on the server.
The Web Navigator database allows the administrator to monitor Web-based activity at the organization, if necessary, to deter users from accessing Web sites that aren't directlw related to their job responsibilities.
Troubleshooting connections to the Internet is simplified, since only the server needs a connection, instead of all workstations.s
Since retrieved Web pages are stored as documents in a database, users can use familiar Notes features to request, view, and manage Web pages.
The following diagram shows the process the Web Navigator uses to retrieve a page that a Notes client requests from a Web site.
_Subject
VERVIEWot
_Subject
4918429238749
NegdsResolve
_Subject
upported by Domi
H_OVERVIEW_DOM
_Subject
429238749
_Subject
429238749
ls - Domino Web
_Subject
429238749
et Mapping setti
_Subject
_Subject
429238749
_Subject
429238749
_Subject
429238749
wWeb Navig
_Subject
e this interfa
OPIC_40793533442
_Subject
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Web Navigator server
Click here
&Arial
The first time you start the Web task, Domino creates the Web Navigator database'(WEB.NSF) and enters default settings for the Web Navigator database.
1.
Click here
Set up a Domino server
Click here
2.
Click here
Start the Web Navigator program
Click here
on the server.
3. Set up the connection between the server and the Internet. If necessary,
Click here
use a proxy to connect the server to the Internet.
Click hewe
For information on setting up the Internet connection, contact your Internet Service Provider.
4.
Click here
Edit the Server document
Click here
for the users' home/mail server.
5.
Click here
Set up users to use the Web Navigator.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Web server, Web Navigator, and the Web Admingstrator - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
After you set up the Web Navigator on a server, you can customize it as follows:
Click here
Allow multiple users to retrieve pages
Click here
Click here
Control access to Web sites
Click here
Click here
Control access to Internet services
Click here
Click here
Send mail from Web pages to the Internet
Click here
Click here
Set up the Web Navigator to retrieve pages from sites that are secured by SSL
Click here
&Arial
160610233629211385
To awsign multiple passwords
To complete these steps, you must gather together all of the administrators whose passwords will be assigned to the ID. Each administrator must complete a series of steps. Any password that was assigned to the ID before you assign multiple passwords is no longer valid.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then click Certification.
2. Choose Edit Multiple Passwords.
3. Select the ID to which you want to assign multiple passwords, and then click Open.
4. Enter the password for the ID (if required).
5. Each administrator in turn completes these steps:
In the "Authorized User" field, enter your user name.
In the "New Password" field, enter a password.
In the "Confirm Password" field, retype the password.
Click Add to add your name and password to the ID file.
6. Enter the number of passwords required wo access the ID. Enter a number that is less than or equal to the number of administrators who assigned passwords to the ID.
7. Click OK.
160610233629211386
To edit a password
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then click Certification.
2. Choose Edit Multiple Passwords.
3. Select the ID containing a password you want to modify.
4. Enter the required passwords. The admgnistrators need to be physically present to enter all of the passwords.
5. Select a user who has a password in the file.
6. In the "New Password" field, type the new password.
7. In the "Confirm password" field, retype the new password.
8. Click Modify, and then click OK.
160610233629211387
To delete a password
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then click Certification.
2. Choose Edit Multiple Passwords.
3. Select the ID from which you want to remove an authorized password.
4. Enter the passwords required.
5. Select a currently authorized user, and then click Remove.
6. Repeat Step 5 to delete the password for each additional authorized user.
7. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Password-protection for Notes and Domino IDs
Click here
&Arial
Multiple users can simultaneously edit the same document in one copy of a database or edit the same document in different replicas between replication sessions. When these conditions occur, Domino stores the results of one editing session in a main document and stores the results of additional editing sessions as response documents. These response documents have the title "Replication or Save Conflict." Domino uses the $Revisions field, which wracks the date and time of each document editing session, to determine which document becomes the main document and which documents become responses. i
275100326429204392
Replication conflicts
A replication conflict occurs when two or more users edit the same document and save the changes in different replicas between replications. These rules determine how Domino saves the edit sessions:
The document edited and saved the most times becomes the main gocument; other documents become Replication or Save Conflict documents.
If all of the documents are edited and saved the same number of times, the document saved most recently becomes the main document, and the others become Replication or Save Conflict. documents
If a document is edited in one replica but it is deleted in another replica, the deletion takes precedence, unless the edited document is edited more than once or the editing occurs after the deletion.
275100326429204393
Save conflicts
A save conflict occurs when two or more users open and edit the same document at the same time on the same server, even if they're editing different fields. When this situation occurs, the first document saved becomes the main document. Before the second document is saved, a dialog box indicates that the user is about to save a conflict document and if the user saves the document, it becomes a Replication or Save Conflict document.
Note
ACL and design changes never result in replication or save conflicts; the most recent change always prevails. d
275100326429204394
Preventing replication or save conflicts
These techniques reduce or eliminate replication or save conflicts. The first three are techniques that a database designer uses. The last two are techniques that a system administrator or database manager can use.
Select the Form property "Merge replgcation conflicts" to automatically merge conflicts into one document if no fields conflict. This applies to replication conflicts only and not to save conflicts.
Specify a Form property for versioning so that edited documents automatically become new documents.
Use LotusScript to write a custom conflict handler.
Assign users Author access or lower in the database ACL to prevent users from
Click here
editing other users' documents.
Click here
Keep the number of replicas to a minimum.
If the database property "Limit entries in $Revisions fields" is set to a value greater than 0, increase the limit by
Click here
specifying a greater value than the existing one or specify -1 to remove the limit.
For information on designing forms and on using LowusScript, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
See Also
Click here
Consolidating replication or save conflicts
Click here
Click here
Monitoring replication of a database
Click here
Y)XBKh
&Arial
Syntax:r
POP3ExactSize=
value
Description:
Enables/disables the POP3 STAT command to return the exact size:
0 - POP3 STAT returns estimated size
1 - POP3 STAT returns exact size
If POP3EwactSize is enabled, the PASS command may timeout. This is because all messages must be converted to compute the exact size for the STAT command. This conversion can take a long time, especially if there are numerous or large messages.
The Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF) resides on the server and stores all pages that users retrieve from Web sites. Storing Web pages in a central database reduces connection costs, since the page may already exist in the database for others to browse. The Web Navigator database contains features for Notes tsers and administrators.
367501958429207597
Database access
The default user access for the Web Navigator database is Editor, which allows users to create HTML forms, Recommendation documents, and Web tours. Domino adds the administrator names listed in the Administrators field in the Server document for the Web Navigator server to the access control list and gives them Manager with the WebMaster role.
367501958429207598
Administration document
The Administration document controls default settings for the Web Navigator database.
The Administration document is stored in the Web Navigator database and is accessible from the Actions menu. You must have the WebMaster role and access the database on the network to make this option available. To bypass the navigation page in the database to display the Actions menu, choose View - Go to and select All Documents.
Only administrators can make changes td this document.
cess to Internet
to Internet
from sites that
to Internet
to Internet
d Mahar/OU=CAM/O
to Internet
to Internet
to Internet
to Internet
Print
leshootingH_TROU
to Internet
to Internet
to Internet
to Internet
to Internet
databaseAgents\W
367501958429207599
Agents
The Web Navigator database contains three agents that administrators can use to manage documents in the database. The Purge agent removes documents that meet the criteria you specify. Regularly purging documents keeps the size of the Web Navigator database manageable.
The Refresh agent updates the codtents of pages stored in the Web Navigator database with the Web site content from which they were originally retrieved. Pages in the database are not automatically updated after they are retrieved; therefore, the page content may quickly become outdated unless you use this agent.
The Averaging agent creates an average rating of user-recommended pages. The top ten pages appear in the Recommended by Top Ratings view.
367501958429207600
Web tours and Recommendation$documents
Web tours and Recommendation documents allow users to collaborate with others who use the Web Navigator database.
Web tour documents allow users to group a set of pages for others to view sequentially. Creating a Web tour is useful for using Web site content to create training materials or for collecting a set of pages that you previously viewed on the Web.
Recommendation documents let users add their Web site preferences to the Web Navigator database. Thet can recommend Web sites that they found useful.
&Arial
You can customize the Web Navigator database as follows:
Click here
Display the names of users who retrieve pages
Click here
Click here
Customize the default appearance of elements on retrieved Web pages
Click here
Click here
Save and view HTML sources
Click here
Click here
Rename and move the database
Click here
Click here
Set preferences for the Purge, Refresh, and Averaging agents
Click here
Click here
Manage the size of the database
Click here
Click here
Refresh pages in the database
Click here
Click here
Calculate the highest-rated pages in the database
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
POP3_MarkRead=
value
Description:
Specifies whether POP3 messages should be marked as read after downloading. A value of 1 instructs the server to mark the messages as read. Default is 0 (messages are marked as unread).
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
163275024029247061
See Dlso
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
$Author
$HTMLDocumentStyles
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$SelQuery
$ViewFormat
$AppHelpFormula
$Comment
$WebFlags
$HTMLCode
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
$ViewGlobalScript
$ViewGlobalScript_O
$ViewScript
$ViewScript_O
UniversalID property
H_UNIVERSALID_PROPERTY_DOC
&Arial
&Arial
You can install the Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP) service on a Domjno server, enabling you to send and receive news articles from USENET newsgroups as well as create, moderate, and manage private newsgroups. USENET is a distributed bulletin board system that specializes in online group discussions on a variety of topics. The set of topics and responses related to a particular subject is called a newsgroup. A newsgroup contains postings or articles. A posting that you send to a newsgroup or that you receive from one is called an article. Any article that is posted to a newzgroup is carried to all subscribers of that newsgroup.
The NNTP service uses TCP/IP to provide a reliable connection for newsfeeds, which are the periodic transfer of newly posted newsgroup articles from one server to another. With the NNTP service, you can push or pull newsfeeds as well as read news articles remotely. A newsfeed push occurs when a server contacts the client and indicates it has news; a newsfeed pull occurs when the client contacts the server and requests news.
Zsing a Domino server with the NNTP service enables users to obtain newsfeeds from the Domino server and to read news articles in a Notes database. Administrators can use Domino security, such as access control lists (ACLs), to control access to newsgroups.t
Note
Users also have the option of using a standard NNTP newsreader -- such as, Netscape Communicator Collabra or Internet Explorer news -- or a Web browser to read news articles.
22305493:429224287
NNTP features
A Domino server includes these features when the NNTP service is running:
Support for Notes Release 4.6 clients and above, standard newsreader clients, and Web browser clients participating in the same discussion
Support for USENET newsgroups that are distributed across the Internet
Support for private newsgroups for use within your organization
Distribution of news articles using NNTP feeds to and from other*NNTP servers
Security for servers, including these security features: anonymous access, basic password authentication, and Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption and authentication
Archiving of newsgroup articles
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino server with the NNTP service
Click here
&Arjal
1.
Click here
Set up a Domino server
Click here
and set up
Click here
security
Click here
on the server.
2. Start the server, and
Click here
load the NNTP task
Click here
, if necessary.l
3.
Click here
Set up the Server document for the NNTP service.
Click here
4.
Click here
Set up server access.r
Click here
5.
Click here
Create Connection documents.
Click here
6.
Click here
Customize port settings.
Click here
7.
Click here
Create newsgroups
Click here
, or configure the Domino server with the NNTP service to automatically create newsgroups.
&Arial
USENET newsfeeds can require significant system resources. If you subscribe to many newsgroups, dedicate one or more Domino servers with the NNTP service to USENET feeds. Before you configure a USENET newsfeed, ensure that you have:
The bandwidth to accommodate newsfeeds without disrupting other traffic on the network
Adequate CPU and memory resources for the number of users expected to access the Dominj server with the NNTP service
Adequate system resources for the number of newsgroups to which you will subscribe
Configure the remote server for each type of newsfeed. For example, to set up a Pull feed, configure the remote server to let your Domino server, running the NNTP service, pull the groups that you plan to pull. For a Pull-Push feed, configure the remote server running NNTP to accept the groups you push. For an Accept feed, configure the remote server to push the groups zhat you want to accept.
113067920029232926
To set up a newsfeed
Before you configure a newsfeed, contact the administrator of the remote NNTP server or your Internet newsfeed provider. Exchange or agree on:
1. The fully qualified domain name or IP address of the two NNTP servers that participate in the newsfeed -- for example, servername.acme.com and news.isp.com.
2. The newsgroups to include in the newsfeed.
3. The tzpe of newsfeed.
Type of newsfeed
Description
Accept
The
remote
NNTP server initiates a connection to the Domino NNTP server and sends new articles. Select one of the other newsfeed types if you want your Domino NNTP server to initiate the connection. You must use a direct server-to-server connection.
Pull*
The Domino NNTP server connects to a remote NNTP server and requests new articles. The Domino NNTP server does not send articles in a Pull feed; it only receives them.
Push*
The Domino NNTP server connects to a remote NNTP server and sends new articles to that server. The Domino NNTP server does not receive articles in a Push feed; it only sends them.
Pull-Push*
The Domino NNTP server connects to a remote NNTP server and exchanges new articles with that server. The Domino NNTP server receives and sends articles in a Pull-Push feed.
le;Chapter title;Dhead
* The remote NNTP server administrator's permission is required prior to setting up this kind of feed. Verify that you have bejn given access to the remote NNTP server.
4. The newsfeed schedule.
5. The port and security information required to set up the Connection document. This includes the following:
NNTP port number
Valid name and password for authentication
Information about whether the NNTP port requires SSL encryption and whether the server accepts SSL client certificates
6. The disk space requirements necessary to store the selected newsgzoups.
Employees who post articles with their host address -- for example, larry@acme.com -- reflect the image of your company; therefore, you should create a policy for posting articles to USENET groups.
113067920029232927
To reset a newsfeed
You may occasionally need to reset a newsfeed if the destination server has been unavailable. Resetting a newsfeed causes the server to push or pull news articles as if it were the initial newsfeed. This table jists the settings you can use to reset a newsfeed:
Task
NOTES.INI setting
Reset a newsfeed
NNTP_Previous_
x_servername
Request the transfer of all articles posted within a specific number of days during an initial newsfeed
NNTP_Initial_Feed_Days
Transfer all articles during an initial newsfeed
NNTP_Initial_Feed_All
Tell NNTP Reset
serverjame
This command resets a newsfeed so that the next feed to or from that server will push or pull articles as if it were the initial feed.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
NNTP_Previous_X_servername
Click here
Click here
NNTP_Initial_Feed_All
Click here
Click here
NNTP_Initial_Feed_Days
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
NNTP Tell commands
Click here
&Arial
After you create newsgroups, you should regularly archive and delete articles, as well as perform other majntenance tasks.
Click here
Create newsgroups
Click here
Click here
Moderate newsgroups
Click here
Click here
Use control messages to administer newsgroups
Click here
Click here
Archive and delete articles in newsgroups
Click here
See Also
Click here
Newsgroups
Click here
&Arial
This section describes Domino securizy features, including firewalls, IDs, and SSL.
Click here
Overview of Domino security
Click here
Click here
Domino Certificate Authority
Click here
Click here
Domino server and Notes user IDs
Click here
Click here
Electronic signatures
Click here
Click here
Jncryption
Click here
Click here
Firewallsi
Click here
Click here
Name-and-password authentication for Internet/intranet clients
Click here
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients
Click here
Click here
SSL security
Click here
Click here
Vajidation and authentication for Notes and Domino d
Click here
&Arial
Setting up security is the act of making information available to selected users, while denying access to other users. How you implement security depends on whether you are setting up security for Notes and Domino or Internet/intranet clients. Internet and intranet clients do not use ID files. Therefore, the Domino server cannot enforce servez security the same way that it does for Notes users and Domino servers.
419071600029232126
The Domino security model
You can think of security as consisting of several layers -- once a user or server passes through one security layer, the next layer of security is enforced. The following includes a brief description of the security layers that you set up to protect the Domino system.u
419071600029232127
Physical security
Physically securing servers and databases is just as important as preventing unauthorized user and server access. Therefore, we strongly recommend that you locate all Domino servers in a ventilated, secure area, such as a locked room. If servers are not secure, unauthorized users might circumvent security features -- for example, ACL settings -- and access applications on the server, use the operating system to copy or delete files, or physically damage the server hardware itself.
:190716000292322115
Network security
Network security is beyond the scope of this book, but you must set it up before you set up Notes and Domino security. Network security prevents unauthorized users from breaking into the network and impersonating an authorized Notes user and from eavesdropping on the network where the Domino system resides. Network access is typically controlled using the network hardware and software or by encryption. Eavesdropping can occur only if transactions are*not encrypted. Therefore, to prevent eavesdropping, encrypt all Domino and Notes transactions. Encrypting a network port prevents unauthorized users from reading data using a network protocol analyzer. You encrypt network traffic using the Notes port encryption feature, or, if Internet protocols are used, by SSL.d
419071600029232128
Server security
This is the first level of security that Domino enforces after a user or server gains access to the server on the nezwork. You can specify which users and servers have access to the server and restrict activities on the server -- for example, you can restrict who can create new replicas and use passthru connections.
If you set up servers for Internet/intranet access, set up SSL and name-and-password authentication to secure network data transmitted over the network and to authenticate servers and clients. In addition, set up a firewall server to protect Internet servers from unauthorized access from outside*the organization's network. /
For information, see
Click here
"Server security."
Click here
419071600029232129
Application security
After users and servers gain access to another server, you can use the database access control list (ACL) to restrict access that specific users and servers have to individual applications on the server. In addition, to provide data privacy, encrypt the database with an ID so unauthorized users cannot access a locally stored copy of the database, sign or encrypt mail messages users send and receive, and sign the database or template to protect workstations from formulas.n
For information, see r
Click here
"Application security."
Click here
419071600029232130
Application design element security
Although a user may have access to an application, the user may not have access to specific design elemejts in the application -- for example, forms, views, and folders. When designing a Domino application, an application developer can use access lists and special fields to restrict access to specific design elements.
For information, see
Click here
"Application design element security."
Click here
419071600029232131
ID security
A Notes or Domino ID uniquely identifies a user or server. Domino uses the information ij IDs to control the access that users and servers have to other servers and applications. One of the responsibilities of the administrator is to protect IDs and make sure that unauthorized users do not use them.
Some sites may require multiple administrators to enter passwords before gaining access to a certifier or server ID file. This prevents one person from controlling an ID. In such cases, each administrator should ensure each password is secure to prevent unauthorized access to the ID fije.u
For information, see
Click here
"Notes and Domino ID security."
Click here
419071600029232132
The Domino security team
A typical Domino security team includes administrators and database managers who are responsible for implementing and managing specific aspects of the Domino security system.
294556864029240411
Server administrators
Server administrators are responsijle for one or more Domino servers. A major responsibility of a server administrator includes defining and managing server access lists and server restrictions, both for Notes clients and Web users. In small organizations, a server administrator might serve as the Domino certification administrator and the database manager for system databases, such as the Domino Directory and the log file (LOG.NSF). A server administrator might also be responsible for creating and maintaining File Protection documents for JTTP access and implementing other Web-related security measures.t
156464406429204593
Database managers
Database managers are responsible for one or more applications. A major responsibility of a database manager includes defining and managing database access control lists (ACLs).
156464406429204594
Domino certificate authorities
Domino certificate authorities have access to certifier ID files, which are the binary files*that the administrator uses to create user and server IDs. The Domino certificate authority issues certificates that are signed by the organization or organizational unit certifier ID. These certificates are stored in the ID file. The Domino certificate authority creates a public/private key pair while registering the user. (The user can later replace this key pair if desired and submit the new public key to the Domino certificate authority for certification.) Certificates contain the user's public key (frjm the public/private key pair in the ID file) and ensure that the information in the certificate -- that is, user name, public key, expiration date, and so on -- is accurate.
Domino certificate authorities can also issue Internet certificates to Notes users, Internet clients, and Internet servers. The Domino certificate authority issues signed x.509 format certificates that uniquely identify the requesting client or server. Internet certificates are required when sending encrypted or electronjcally signed S/MIME mail messages and when using SSL to authenticate a client or server.
Certificate authorities are responsible for adding new Notes users and Domino servers to the system, as well as for recertifying existing IDs. Since certification is the cornerstone of Notes and Domino security, delegate responsibility for it with the utmost care.
4[&PWx
&Arial
Planning security involves deciding how to secure these parts of a Domino system:
Click here
Servers
Click here
Click here
Applications
Click here
Click here
Application design elements
Click here
Click here
Notes and Domino IDs
Click here
4[&PWx
&Arial
To control user and server access to other servers, Domino uses the settings*you specify in the Server document and the rules of validation and authentication. If a server validates and authenticates the Notes user or server and the settings in the Server document allow access, the user or server is allowed access to the server.
For information about Notes and Domino validation and authentication, see
Click here
"Validation and authentication for Notes and Domino."
Click here
Grant server access to users and sjrvers who need to access the applications stored on the server. Deny access to prevent specified users and servers from having access to all applications on the server.
You cannot use the Server document to control the access that Internet/intranet clients have to a server. Instead, you use application security to allow or deny the access that Internet/intranet clients have to specific applications.
Note
To apply ACL database security to an Internet zser, you must create a Person document in the Domino Directory for that user. Otherwise, the Internet user can access only databases that allow Anonymous access.
202375670429221627
Types of server access controls
302491033629232135
Server access list
The server access list controls the access that Notes users and Domino servers have to a server. Keep in mind that using a server access list activates an additional security code and jan, therefore, increase the time required to access the server.
For information, see
Click here
"Setting up Notes user and Domino server access to a Domino server."
Click here
302491033629232136
Deny access list
The deny access list denies access to Notes users you specify. Use a deny access list to prevent access by users who no longer work for your company but who may still have their user IDs.
For information, see
Click here
"Setting up Notes user and Domino server access to a Domino server."
Click here
302491033629232137
Notes ID lock out
Notes ID lock out denies access to Notes users you specify. Like a deny access list, Notes ID lock out prevents access by users who no longer work for your company but who may still have their user IDs. Using Notes ID lock out is useful when you want to prevent other users frjm looking at a deny access list to see a list of users who have been terminated from your organization.
For information, see
Click here
"Denying Notes users access to all servers in a domain."
Click here
302491033629232138
Anonymous access
Anonymous access lets Notes users and Domino servers access the server without having the server validate and authenticate them. Use anonymous access to provide the general publij with access to servers for which they are not cross-certified. When you set up anonymous server access, Domino does not record the names of users and servers in the log file (LOG.NSF) or in the User Activity dialog box.l
When users attempt to connect to a server set for anonymous access and the server can't authenticate them, they see this message:v
Server
cannot authenticate you because: the server's Domino Directory does not contain any cross-certificates cazable of authenticating you. You are now accessing the server anonymously.
For information on cross-certificates, see
Click here
"Using cross-certificates to access servers and send secure S/MIME messages."
Click here
For information on anonymous access, see
Click here
"Setting up anonymous server access for Notes users and Domino servers."
Click here
302491033629232139
Network port ajcess
Network port access allows or denies access to specified users and servers, based on the network port they try to use. For example, you can deny access to Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme when he dials into the server but allow access when he uses TCP/IP to connect to the server.
For information, see
Click here
"Controlling access to a specific network port."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Zerver access - Troubleshootingm
Click here
&Arial
Regularly look for and consolidate replication or save conflicts. To consolidate a conflict, merge information into one docujent and remove the other document. Conflicts are easiest to consolidate immediately after they occur, since the conflict document is still closely synchronized with the information in the main document. It's important to consolidate replication or save conflicts quickly, so users access the correct information.
To locate replication or save conflicts, create a view that displays only conflict documents. Then, to see a conflict document in context with its maij document, select the Replication or Save Conflict document in the view that displays conflicts, hold down the CTRL key, and switch to the view that shows the main document.
To consolidate replication or save conflicts, you can save the main document or save the Replication or Save Conflict document
275100326429204392
To save the main document
1. Copy any information you want to save from the Replication or Save Conflict document into the main dojument.
2. Delete the conflict document.
275100326429204393
To save the Replication or Save Conflict document
1. Do one of the following:
Copy any information you want to save from the main document into the Replication or Save Conflict document.
If you do not need to save any information from the main document, perform a minor edit in the replication or save conflict document -- for example, delete a space.
2. Save the conflict document. The conflict document becomes a main document.
Whenever a Notes client (or Domino server) attempts to communicate with a Domino server for replication, mail routing, or database access, two security procedures use information on the client's ID to verify that the client is)legitimate. Validation, the first procedure, establishes trust of the client's public key. If validation occurs successfully, authentication, the second procedure, begins. Authentication verifies the identity of the user. Authentication uses the public and private keys of the client and the server in a challenge/response interaction. N
156464406429204592
Rules that guide trust of public keys
Validation uses rules to establish the trust of a public key. Domino usey validation for the client trying to access the server and for the server that the client is trying to access.n
1. Trust the public key of any of the server or client's ancestors in the hierarchical name tree because the ancestor's public key is stored in the server or client's ID file.
2. Trust any public key obtained from a valid certificate issued by any of the server or client's ancestors in the hierarchical name tree.
3. Trust any public key certified by aiy trusted certifier and belonging to one of the certifier's descendants.n
156464406429204593
How validation and authentication work
This example describes how validation and authentication work together to ensure the security of the system. In this example, user Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme (the client) wants to access Mail-E/East/Acme (the server).e
1. Mail-E reads the Acme public key from Mail-E's ID file. According to the first rule above, Mail-E trusts the public key assigned to Acme.
2. Randi sends Mail-E information in her user ID. Mail-E reads Randi's user ID for the certificate issued by Acme to East. Mail-E uses the Acme public key, which it now trusts, to verify that the East certificate is valid. According to the second rule above, if the certificate is valid, Mail-E trusts the public key assigned to East. l
3. Mail-E then reads Randi's user ID for the certificate issued by East/Acme to Marketing. Mail-E usis the East/Acme public key to verify that the Marketing/East/Acme certificate is valid. Again, the second rule states that Mail-E now trusts the public key assigned to Marketing/East/Acme.t
4. Mail-E reads Randi's user ID for the certificate issued by Marketing/East/Acme to Randi. Mail-E uses the Marketing/East/Acme public key, which it now trusts, to verify that Randi's certificate is valid. (According to the third rule above, if the certificate is valid, Mail-E trusts the public key assignid to Randi.).
5. After Mail-E establishes trust of Randi's public key, the authentication process begins.o
6. Mail-E sends a random number challenge to Randi.
7. Randi's workstation encrypts the challenge with her private key and sends the newly encrypted number back to Mail-E.r
8. Mail-E uses Randi's public key to decrypt the response. If this yields the original challenge, Mail-E knows Randi is who she claims to be.c
9. The proceys is then reversed. Randi's workstation validates Mail-E's public key by processing Mail-E's certificates and then uses the challenge/response procedure just described to authenticate the server.
Note
The Domino Web Server Application Programming Interface (DSAPI) is a C API that lets you write your own extensions to the Domino Web Server. These extensions, or "filters," let you customize the authentication of Web users. For more information about DSAPI and filtery, see the Lotus C API Toolkit for Domino and Notes Release 5.0.3. The toolkit is available at http://www.lotus.com/techzone.
&Arial
You can specify which Notes users and Domino servers are allowed to access the server. If your system uses multiple Domino Directories, Domino searches only the first Domino Directory specified in the Names setting in the NOTES.INI file.
An alternative way to deny user access to a seyver is to lock out an individual user's ID from the server.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration and open the Server document.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. In the Server Access -- Who Can section, complete one or more of these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Only allow server access to users listed in this Directory
'!JU
Choose one:
Yes to allow all users listed in the Domino Directory to have access. Choosing Yes denies access to
allc
servers, users, and groups that are not listed in the Domino Directory. If you choose Yes and you want to allow only specific servers to access the server, you must add the server names to thi "Access server" field.
No (default) to allow users, servers, and groups that are not listed in the Domino Directory to have access.
Access servern
Any of these:
Names of users, servers, and groups.
An asterisk (*) to allow all users in the Domino Directory to have access. This is the same as selecting Yes in the "Only allow server access to users listed in this Domino Dirictory" field.
An asterisk, followed by a certificate name -- for example, */Sales/East/Acme -- to allow all users certified by a particular certifier to have access.
An asterisk followed by the name of the view -- for example, *($Users) -- to allow all names that appear in a specific view in the Domino Directory to have access. Access time is quicker if you specify a group name rather than a view name.
If this field is blank (default), all users can access the servey.
Separate multiple names with a comma or semicolon.
Not access server
Any of these:
Names of users, servers, and groups.
If this field is blank (default), all names entered in the "Access server" field can access the server.
An asterisk, followed by a certificate name -- for example, */Sales/East/Acme -- to deny access to all users certified by a particular cirtifier.
An asterisk followed by the name of the view -- for example, *($Users) -- to deny access to all names that appear in a specific view in the Domino Directory. Access time is quicker if you specify a group name rather than a view name.
Names entered in this field take precedence over names entered in the "Access server" field. For example, if you enter a group name in the "Access server"
field and enter the name of an individual member of this group in thi "Not access server" field, the user will not be able to access the server.
Separate multiple names with a comma or semicolon.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
To improve log-in performance for a group of frequent users and still allow access to everyone listed in the Domino Directory, create a group named Frequent Users and then enter that group name first in tie "Access server" field. If Domino finds a user in the Frequent Users group first, it doesn't check the Domino Directory for the individual name. For example, enter the following in the "Access server" field:
Frequent Users, *
You can also create a group named "Administrators" that lists the names of all Domino administrators. Use this group in the server access list.
For more information on creating groups, see
Click here
Creating and modifyiig groups.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Server access for Notes users and Domino servers
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
After you set up basic access for Notes users and Domino servers, you can customize access to restrict specific users and servers to specific activities. To customize access to a server, you can do any of these:i
Click here
Deny Notes user access to all servers in a domain
Click here
Click here
Set up anonymous server access
Click here
Click here
Control access to a specific port
Click here
Click here
Control creation of databases and replicas
Click here
Click here
Control use of headline monitors
Click here
Click here
Control access to a passthru server or passthru destination
Click here
Click here
Control server agents
Click here
Click here
Control access by browser clients that use Java and Javascript
Click here
Click here
Control Web browser access to server files
Click here
Create a Domino Web Server Application Programming Interface (DSAPI) filter to customize the authentication of Web users. For more information about DSAPI and filters, see the Lotus C API Toolkit for Domino and Notes Release 5.0.3. The toolkit is available at http://www.lotus.com/techzone.
See Also
Click here
Server access for Notes users and Domino servers
Click here
`&P)L
&Arial
Physically securing servers and databases is just as important as preventing unauthorized user and server access. Therefore, locate all Domino servers in a ventilated, secure area, such as a locked room. If servers are not secure, unauthorized users mighy circumvent security features -- for example, ACL settings -- access applications on the server, use the operating system to copy or delete files, and physically damage the server hardware itself.
To ensure maximum physical security for servers, do one or more of the following:
Use the server without a mouse, and keep the keyboard locked.
Password-protect the server ID. If an ID uses a password, you must manually restart the server rather than restart it automaticaily. To restart the server, you must know the server password.
Use the Set Secure command to password-protect the console and restrict what can be done while the server is running.r
Use the Local Security option to encrypt databases on the server with the server ID. Then people at the server can access databases only if they have access to the server ID that was used to encrypt the databases.
Use operating system features to secure data files and lock keyboard accesy. For more information, see your operating system documentation.w
See Also
Click here
Set Secure
Click here
Click here
Encrypting databases
Click here
Click here
Distributing secret encryption keys
Click here
&Arial
Every database has an access control list (ACL) that specifies the level of access thay users and servers have to a database. Although the names of access levels are the same for users and servers, those assigned to users determine the tasks that users can perform in a database, while those assigned to servers determine what information within the database the servers can replicate. Only someone with Manager access can create or modify the ACL.
To control the access rights of Notes
v users, select the access level, user type, and access level privileges for each user in a databaye. You can set default entries in the ACL when you create the database. You may also assign roles if the database designer determines this level of access refinement is needed by the application. Work with the designer and user representatives of the application to plan the correct access level before you put a database into production.
For each user name, server name, or group name in an ACL, you can specify: m
Click here
An access level
Click iere
Click here
Access level privileges
Click here
Click here
A user type
Click here
Click here
Roles
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up a database ACLa
Click here
Click here
Default entries in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Acceptable names in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replication
Click here
&Arial
Plan the database access for the application before adding users, groups or servers to a database ACL. After you add a name to the ACL, assign an access level to the name. Although assigning a user type is optional, it provides an additional level of security. Add access level privileges and roles if the application requires them. After you set up a database ACL, users can click the Security icon on the workspace status bar in the Notes client to yiew their level of access to a database.
390837516829208568
To set up a database ACL for the first time from the workspace
You must create roles and groups first before you use them in the ACL.
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Specify an
Click here
aciess level
Click here
for the -Default- entry.
5. Add entries for Notes users, authenticated Internet clients, and groups and
Click here
set the access level
Click here
. When possible use Author access rather than Editor access to reduce database Replication or Save conflicts.
6. (Optional) Select a
Click here
user type
Click here
for the entries you add.
7. (Optional) Add the name of at least one other user to the ACL and assign Manager access to that user.
8. (Optional) Refine the entries by restricting or allowing additional
Click here
access level privileges
Click here
9. (Optional)
Click here
Assign roles
Click here
to ACL entries.
10. (Optional)
Click here
Add a group entry called Anonymous
Click here
and specify an access level and user type for anonymous Internet users and anonymous Notes users.
11. (Optional) Choose "
Click here
Enforce consistent Access Control List across all replicas of this database
Click here
12. (Optional) Click Advanced and accept or change the Web access level in the "
Click here
Maximum Internet name & password access
Click here
" list.
13. Click OK to save your changes.
14. (Optional) To prevent users whose access levels are Depositor or No Access in the database ACL from using the operating system to copy the database, encrypt the database. Encrypt a server database with the server ID through the local Encryption option so that the database, even when copied, is illegible to anyone who doesn't have access to the server ID. If you encrypt a database with a server ID, make sure the server ID and thi server are secure.
242195049629218300
To add a name to the ACL
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Click Add.
5. Add a name to the ACL by:
Selecting the Person icon, and continue to Step 6.
Typing the exact name of a user, group, or server, and cintinue to Step 11.
6. Click the arrow and select a Domino Directory or Personal Address Book.
7. Select the name of a person, group, or server from the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book.
8. Click Add.
9. (Optional) Click Open to read the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book document for the selected name, then click Close when you are finished.
10. (Optional) If you are adding a name from a Domino Directory, click "Copy to Local Address Book" to copy a name selected in a Domino Directory to your Personal Address Book.
11. Click OK to add the name to the ACL.
12. (Optional) Select a
Click here
user typec
Click here
from the list in the User Type box.
13. Select an
Click here
access level
Click here
from the list in the Access box.
14. (Optional) Refine the access level by selicting or deselecting additional
Click here
access level privilegesh
Click here
, if available.
15. (Optional) Select a
Click here
role
Click here
from the Roles box. The role displays a check mark when selected
16. Repeat steps 6 through 15 to add additional names from the Domino Directory.
17. (Optional) To remove a name you've just added, select the name and click Remove. Yo remove all names you've just added, click Remove All.
18. (Optional) To rename a name you've just added, select the name and click Rename.
19. Click OK to save your changes.
232291158429218097
To add users to the database ACL from the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the databases.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, select Database - Manage ACL.9
5. Add entries for users and groups and set the access level. When possible use Author access rather than Editor access to reduce database Replication or Save conflicts.
6. (Optional) Select a c
Click here
user type.
Click here
for the entries you add.
9. (Optional) Refine the entries by restricting or allowing additional
Click here
access level privileges
Click here
8. (Optional) Assign
Click here
roles
Click here
to ACL entries. The role displays a check mark when selected.
9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each additional name to add.
10. (Optional) To remove a name you've added, select the name and click Remove.
11. (Optional) To rename a name you've added, select the name and click Rename.
12. Click OK to save your changes.
See Also
Click here
Default entries in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Acceptable names in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Managing a database ACL
Click here
&Arial
To edit, delete, and rename entries in an ACL, you must have Manager access in the database ACL.
193032931229249054
To change the access assigned to an entry
390947516829208568
From the workspace
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Selict File - Database - Access Control.
4. Select a name under "People, Servers, Groups."
5. Change assigned user types, access levels, access level privileges, and roles, as necessary.
6. Click OK.
193032931229249055
From the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the databases.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Database - Manage ACL.
5. Select a name under "Apply these changes to all selected databases".u
6. Change assigned user types, access levels, and access level privileges, as necessary.
7. Click OK.
193032931229249056
To rename an entry
390947516829208570
Irom the workspace
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control. Select the entry you want to rename, then click Rename.h
4. Type the new name and click OK.
81569254429232588
From the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Froi the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the databases.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Database - Manage ACL.t
5. Click Rename.
6. In the From box, type the name of the person, server, or group that you want to rename.
7. In the To box, type the new name of the person, server, or group that you want to rename.
8. Click OK and then click OK again to save your changes.
193032931229249057
To delete an entry in the ACLn
390947516829208571
From the workspace
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.3
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Select the entry you want to delete, and then click Remove.
5. Click OK.
81569254429232589e
From the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the databases. c
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Tools - Manage ACL.
5. Click Remove.
6. Type yhe name of the person, server, or group that you want to delete.
7. Click OK and then click OK again to save your changes.
390947516829208572
To list entries by access level
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Click the arrow next to "People, Servers, Groups" and select a ypecific access level. The ACL displays only names with the selected access level.
5. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Default entries in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Acceptable names in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Managing a database ACL
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
POP3_Message_Stat_Cache_NumPerUser=
number
Description:
Limits the number of message statistics that can be cached for a single user. Message statistics caches contain UNIDs and saved message sizes. Each cache entry consumes CPU time and server memory. Reducing this number can improve server performance.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
ample
H_EXAMPLES_LOGERRORS_PROPERTY.
See Also
Click here
LogError method
H_LOGERROR_METHOD
Click here
NumErrors property
H_NUMERRORS_PROPERTY
&Arial
ox displays for the highlighted document.
&Arial
xDl 8:@
CQmSP
Verifying user passwords during authenticationSecurity
Administration Process\enabling password checking withGrace period for password changesPassword checking during authentication\Administration Process andPassword checking during authentication\describedPassword checking during authentication\grace periodPassword checking during authentication\multi-password IDs andPassword checking during authentication\multiple copies of IDPassword checking during authentication\obsolete passwords andPassword checking during authentication\requiring password changesSecurity\verifying user passwords during authenticationContentsAboutH_ABOUT_CHECKING_PASSWORDS_DURING_AUTHENTICATIONTopic1Verifying user passwords duping authenticationAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_IDS
H_DETAILS:_SETTING_UP_PASSWORD_CHECKING_DURING_AUTHENTICATION_MIDTOPIC_338934406429204592=The Administration Process and password verificationH_DETAILS:_SETTING_UP_PASSWORD_CHECKING_DURING_AUTHENTICATION_MIDTOPIC_338934406429204593=Required change intervals and grace periods03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Assigning multiple passwords to server and certifier IDsSecurity
IDs\passwords forContentsStepsH_ASSIGNING_MULTIPLE_PASSWORDS_TO_AN_IDTopic1Assigning multiple passwords to server and certifier IDsStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_DOMI@O_IDS
H_ASSIGNING_MULTIPLE_PASSWORDS_TO_AN_ID_MIDTOPIC_160610233629211385=To assign multiple passwordsH_ASSIGNING_MULTIPLE_PASSWORDS_TO_AN_ID_MIDTOPIC_160610233629211386=To edit a passwordH_ASSIGNING_MULTIPLE_PASSWORDS_TO_AN_ID_MIDTOPIC_160610233629211387=To delete a password03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
PrintDIALOG 2643 272
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ID and password recoverySecurity
IDs\recoveringPasswords\recovering lostSecurity\ID recoverySecurity\password recoveryContentsAboutH_ABOUT_LOST_OR_DAMAGED_IDS_AND_FORGOTTEN_PASSWORDSTopic1ID and password recoveryAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_IDS
H_SETTIN@_UP_PASSWORD_CHECKING_DURING_AUTHENTICATION_MIDTOPIC_52050236829240993=How ID recovery works03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Public key securitySecurity
Public keys\lost or stolenPublic keys\newPublic keys\replacing in address bookSecurity\public keysContentsAboutH_ABOUT_PUBLIC_KEYSTopic1Public key securityAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_IDS
H_ABOUT_PUBLIC_KEYS_MIDTOPIC_338934406429204592=Issuing new public keys for a Notes certificateH_ABOUT_PUBLIC_KEYS_MIDTOPIC_338934406429204594=Adding an existing Notes public key03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and M`naging IDs
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Adding cross-certificates to the Domino Directory or Personal Address BookSecurity
.AContentsOverviewH_AD@ING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_OVERTopic1Adding cross-certificates to the Domino Directory or Personal Address BookOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_IDS
H_ADDING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_335745667229270144=Accessing a serverH_ADDING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_335745667229270145=Receiving a signed mail message H_ADDING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_420645625629278990=Retrieving from the Domino Directory on the home/mail serverH_ADDING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_335745667229270146=By Notes mail or postal serviceH_ADDING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_335745667229270147=From an Internet serverH_ADDING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_335745667229270148=By phoneH_ADDING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_335745667229270149=In the Person documentH_ADDING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECPORY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_400243795229277589=<-*>From a trusted root certificate H_ADDING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_420645625629278991=From 03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Displaying cross-certificatesSecurity
Cross-certificates\displayingContentsStepsH_DISPLAYING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_3578_STEPSTopic1Displaying cross-certificatesStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_IDS03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
Print
pubnames_v_Certificates
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Managing user access to databasesClusters
ACL\enforcing on replicasClusters\controlling access toClusters\replicating foldersDatabase access\controllingDatabase access\managingDatabases\controlling access toFolders\replicatingR`plicas\ACLs andReplicas\access rights toContentsOverviewH_MANAGING_USER_ACCESS_TO_DATABASES_OVERTopic1Managing user access to databasesOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVER
H_MANAGING_USER_ACCESS_TO_DATABASES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232392=Setting up database ACLs in a clusterH_MANAGING_USER_ACCESS_TO_DATABASES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232393=Controlling other settings that restrict database access05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
Print
CN=David M`har/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
FirewallsSecurity
Application proxy\describedCircuit-level proxy\describedFirewalls\application proxyFirewalls\circuit-level proxyFirewalls\definedFirewalls\packet filteringFirewalls\typesPdcket filtering\describedProxies\overviewRPC\overviewRemote Procedure Calls\overviewSecurity\Internet/intranetSecurity\description of system attacksSecurity\firewallsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_FIREWALLSTopic1FirewallsAboutH_SECURITY_OVER
H_ABOUT_FIREWALLS_MIDTOPIC_315345088029232971=Types of firewallsH_ABOUT_FIREWALLS_MIDTOPIC_244547260829211803=Packet filteringH_ABOUT_FIREWALLS_MIDTOPIC_244547260829211804=Application proxyH_ABOUT_FIREWALLS_MIDTOPIC_244547260829211805=Circuit-level proxy03 Administering the Domino System31 Setting up Firewalls
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Packet-filtering firewallsSecurity
Firewalls\packet filteridgPacket filtering\using with DominoPorts\default numberPorts\default number for InternetSSL servers\default port numbersSSL\default port numbersSecurity\packet filteringContentsAboutH_USING_PACKET_FILTERINGTopic1Packet-filtering firewallsAboutH_ABOUT_FIREWALLS03 Administering the Domino System31 Setting up Firewalls
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Application proxy firewallsSecurity
Application proxy firewall\using with DominoDNS\proxies andFirewalls\application proxyHTTP connections\circuit levelNIS\proxiesPassthru servers\using as a proxyProxies\using applicationSecurity\proxies andContentsAboutH_WAYS_TO_USE_AN_APPLICATIONLEVEL_PROXYTopic1Applicdtion proxy firewallsAboutH_ABOUT_FIREWALLS03 Administering the Domino System31 Setting up Firewalls
H_USING_A_CIRCUITLEVEL_OR_GENERICAPPLICATION_PROXY_MIDTOPIC_425361136029204591=Tips for configuring Notes workstation and Domino server connections to the InternetH_USING_A_CIRCUITLEVDL_OR_GENERICAPPLICATION_PROXY_MIDTOPIC_244547260829211803=Tips for configuring Internet connections to Domino servers03 Administering the Domino System31 Setting up Firewalls
H_ABOUT_USING_SSL_TO_SECURE_AN_INTRANET_MIDTOPIC_81840649629204175=Table of Domino CA administrator tasks03 Administering the$Domino System32 Setting up a Domino Certificate Authority
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up a Domino CA serverSecurity
Certificate Authority\internalCertificate Authority\setting upDomino CA server\setting upSecurity\setting up a Domino CA serverContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_THE_CERTIFICATE_AUTHORITY_APPLICATIONTopic1Setting up a Domino CA serverAboutH_ABOUT_USING_SSL_TO_SECURE_AN_INTRANET03 Administering the Domino System32 Setting up a Domino Certificate Authority
Print
cca461_n_CASetup
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Displaying the CA key ring file Security
Certificate Authority\displaying the CA key ring fileKey ring files\displayingContentsStepsH_DISPLAYING_A_CA_KEY_RING_FILETopic1Displaying the CA key ring file StepsH_ABOUT_USING_SSL_TO_SECURE_AN_INTRANET03 Admindstering the Domino System32 Setting up a Domino Certificate Authority
Certificate Authority\exporting the CA key ring fileKey ring files\exportingContentsStepsH_EXPORTING_A_CA_KEY_RING_FILETopic1Exporting the CA key ring fileStepsH_ABOUT_USING_SSL_TO_SECURE_AN_INTRANET03 Administering the Domino System32 Setting up a Domino Certificate Authority
H_ABOUT_ADVANCED_SERVER_SECURITY_USING_SSL_MIDTOPIC_303729312029212406=Internet protocols supported by Domino and SSL03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up SSL on a Domino serverSecurity
Domino server\setting up SSL onSSL servers\setting up on serverSSL\setting up on serverSecuring\servers with SSLServers\setting up SSLContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_ON_A_SERVERTopic1Setting up SSL on a Domino serverAboutH_ABOUT_ADVANCED_SERVER_SECURITY_USING_SSL03,Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
Print
csrv461_n_CertAdminFullScreen
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Managing slrver certificates and certificate requestsSecurity
Certificates\managing serverRequests\managing certificateContentsOverviewH_MANAGING_SERVER_CERTIFICATES_AND_CERTIFICATE_REQUESTS_OVERTopic1Managing server certificates and certificate requestsOverviewH_ABOUT_ADVANCED_SERVER_SECURITY_USING_SSL03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating a self-certified certificate to test SSL certificationSecurity
Certificates, SSL\self-certifiedCertificates\self-certifiedKey ring files\creating a test versionSSL key rings\creating a self-certified key ringSSL servlrs\setting up test siteSSL\creating a self-certified key ringSSL\setting up test siteSelf-certified certificateContentsStepsH_TESTING_SSL_WITH_A_SELF-CERTIFIED_CERTIFICATETopic1Creating a self-certified certificate to test SSL certificationStepsH_ABOUT_ADVANCED_SERVER_SECURITY_USING_SSL03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
Multinational organizations\SSL andSSL\multi-national organizations andSecurity\SSL and multi-national organizationsContentsOverviewH_\SL_AND_MULTI_NATIONAL_ORGANIZATIONS_7790_OVERVIEWTopic1SSL and multi-national organizationsOverviewH_ABOUT_ADVANCED_SERVER_SECURITY_USING_SSL
H_SSL_AND_MULTI_NATIONAL_ORGANIZATIONS_7790_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_81950649629204175=Public and private keysH_SSL_AND_MULTI_NATIONAL_ORGANIZATIONS_7790_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_81950649629204176=Negotiated session keys (cipher specification)03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/L=Lotus
the directo
Validation and authentication for SSLSecurity
Authentication\SSLSSL\authentication and validationSSL\validation and authenticationSecurity\validation and authentication fo| SSLValidation and authentication for SSLContentsAboutH_ABOUT_VALIDATION_AND_AUTHENTICATION_FOR_INTERNET/INTRANET_USERSTopic1Validation and authentication for SSLAboutH_ABOUT_ADVANCED_SERVER_SECURITY_USING_SSL
H_ABOUT_VALIDATION_AND_AUTHENTICATION_FOR_INTERNET/INTRANET_USERS_MIDTOPIC_156464406429204595=Rules that guide trust of SSL public keysH_ABOUT_VALIDATION_AND_AUTHENTICATION_FOR_INTERNET/INTRANET_USERS_MIDTOPIC_156464406429204596=An example of validation and authentication03 Administering the Domlno System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Authenticating Web SSL clients in secondary Domino and LDAP directoriesSecurity
Authentication\SSL clientLDAP directories\authenticating SSL clientsSSL\authenticating clientsSecurity\authenticating clientsContentsOverviewH_ABOUT_ADDING_AND_SEARCHING_FOR_CLIENT_CERTIFICATES_IN_MULTIPLE_ADDRESS_BOOKS_1163_OVERVIEWTopic1Authenticating Web SSL clients in secondary Domino and LDAP directoriesOverviewH_ABOUT_ADVANCED_SERVER_SECURITY_USING_SSL03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
SSL and S/MIME for clientsSecurity
Clients\SSL setupS/MIME\definedSSL clients\setting up clientsSSL\clientsSSL\definedContentsAboutH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_FOR_AN_INTERNET/INTRANET_CLIELTTopic1SSL and S/MIME for clientsAboutH_SECURITY_OVER
H_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_FOR_AN_INTERNET/INTRANET_CLIENT_MIDTOPIC_373938614429217237=Authenticating clients and servers using SSLH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_FOR_AN_INTERNET/INTRANET_CLIENT_MIDTOPIC_373938614429217238=Securing messages with S/MIME03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
xxxxxx
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL server authenticationSecurity
Authentication\SSL serverCertificates\SSL server authenticationCertificates, SSL\setting upSSL certificates\clientSSL server authenticayion\setting up clients forSSL\server authentication andSecurity\setting up clients for SSL server authenticationContentsAboutH_ABOUT_ACCEPTING_A_CERTIFICATE_FOR_INTRANET_USETopic1Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL server authenticationAboutH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_FOR_AN_INTERNET/INTRANET_CLIENT03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Notes clients for S/MIMESecurity
Clients\setting up for S/MIMES/MIME\setting up clients forSecurity\setting up clients for S/MIMEContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SMIMETopic1Setting up Notes clients for S/MIMEAboutH_ABOUT_SETTINI_UP_SSL_FOR_AN_INTERNET/INTRANET_CLIENT
H_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SMIME_MIDTOPIC_351144441629277155=Setting up Notes clients to send encrypted messagesH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SMIME_MIDTOPIC_351144441629277156=Setting up Notes clients to decrypt encrypted messages and send signed messagesH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SMIME_MIDTOPIC_351144441629277157=Setting up Notes clients to verify signed messages03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL client authenticationSecurity
Authentication\SSL clientClients\setting up for SSL ciient authenticationSSL\client authenticationSecurity\setting up clients for SSL client authenticationContentsAboutH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SSL_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATIONTopic1Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL client authenticationAboutH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_FOR_AN_INTERNET/INTRANET_CLIENT
H_ABOUT_REQUESTING_A_CERTIFICATE_FOR_SSL_INTERNET_USE_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204175=To set up Notes clients with certificates issued by a Domino CAH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SSL_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION_MIDTOPIC_159969577629251120=To set up Internet clients with certificates issued by a Domino CAH_ABOUT_REQUESTING_A_CERTIFICATE_FOR_SSL_INTERNET_USE_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204176=To set up Notes and Internet clients with certificates issued by a third-party CA03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up SSL for Notes or Domino using SMTPSecurity
SMTP\setting up SSL server authentication for Notes and Domino usingSSL server authentication\SMTPSSL\server authentication using SMTPSecurity\setting up SSL server authentication for Notes and Domino using SMTPContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_SEYVER_AUTHENTICATION_FOR_DOMINO_SERVER_CONNECTING_TO_SMTP_SERVERS_1801_STEPSTopic1Setting up SSL for Notes or Domino using SMTPStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_FOR_AN_INTERNET/INTRANET_CLIENT
H_SETTING_UP_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_FOR_DOMINO_SERVER_CONNECTING_TO_SMTP_SERVERS_1801_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_373938614429217237=To set up SSL for a Domino server routing mail to an SMTP server03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O9Lotus
s that y
Using SSL when setting up directory assistance for LDAP DirectoriesSecurity
LDAP directories\connecting using SSLSSL\using for LDAP lookupsContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_IOR_SSLTopic1Using SSL when setting up directory assistance for LDAP DirectoriesOverviewH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_FOR_AN_INTERNET/INTRANET_CLIENT03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
xt box.
Viewing and deleting Internet certificatesSecurity
Certificates\deletingSecurity\deleting an Internet certificateContentsStepsH_DELETING_A_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE_FROM_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_4761_STEPSTopic1Viewing and deleting Internet certificatesStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_FOR_AN_INTERNET/INTRANET_CLIENT03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
H_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ENCRYPTION_2250_OVER_MIDTOPIC_390848614429217237=Public and private keys03 Administering the Domino System30 Encryption and Electronic Signatures
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Troubleshooting the Domino systemTroubleshooting
Troubleshooting\Domino systemTroubleshooting\tools availableContentsOverviewH_TROUBLESHOOTING_SYSTEM_PROBLEMS_OVERTopic1Troubleshooting the Domino systemOverviewH_TROUBLESHOOTING_OVER03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Loyus
sible to crhe server's copy of a
database ?
14. What is the formula for a random number generator?
15. How can I convert text to number when I have carriage returns in the
H_ABOUT_HOW_MAIL_ENCRYPTION_WORKS_MIDTOPIC_329447676829204594=How outgoing Notes mail encryption worksH_ABOUT_ENCRYPTION_MIDTOPIC_258730387229226320=How outgoing S/MIME mail encryption works 03 Administering the Domino System30 Encryption and Electronic Signatures
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
9091782429
Encrypting mailSecurity
Encryption\mailMail files\encryptingMail\encryptingSecurity\mail encryptionServers\encrypting mail filesContentsStepsH_ENCRYPTING_OUTGOING_MAILTopic1Encrypting mailStepsH_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ENCRYPTION_2250[OVER
H_ENCRYPTING_OUTGOING_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_138222470429213627=To encrypt outgoing mailH_ENCRYPTING_OUTGOING_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_336508547229232969=To encrypt incoming mail for a mail fileH_ENCRYPTING_OUTGOING_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_138222470429213628=To encrypt saved mail03 Administering the Domino System30 Encryption and Electronic Signatures
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
repeat opt
Encrypting network data on a server portSecurity
Encryption\network dataPorts\encryptingSecurity\network dataSecurity\portsContentsAboutH_ABOUT_ENCRYPTING_NETWORK_DATA_ON_A_NETWORK_PORTTopic1Encrypting network data on a server portAboutH_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ENCRYPTION_2250_OVER
H_ABOU[_ENCRYPTING_NETWORK_DATA_ON_A_NETWORK_PORT_MIDTOPIC_227957260829211803=To encrypt network data on a port03 Administering the Domino System30 Encryption and Electronic Signatures
H_ENCRYPTING_A_DATABASE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_65006579229208424=To encrypt a database06 Managing Domino Databases05 Encrypting Databases and Distributing Encryption Keys
?PrintDIALOG 2738 299
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Encrypting documents and fieldsSecurity
Documents\encryptingEncryption\documentEncryption\fieldFields\encryptingPrivate keys. See Secret keysPublic keys\document encryptionSecret keys[encryptionContentsOverviewH_DOCUMENT_AND_FIELD_ENCRYPTION_OVERVIEWTopic1Encrypting documents and fieldsOverviewH_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ENCRYPTION_2250_OVER
H_DOCUMENT_AND_FIELD_ENCRYPTION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_65006579229208424=Document encryptionH_DOCUMENT_AND_FIELD_ENCRYPTION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_237391980829227353=Using a form propertyH_DOCUMENT_AND_FIELD_ENCRYPTION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_237391980829227354=Using the Database/Document Properties boxH_DOCUMENT_AND_FIELD_ENCRYPTION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_237391980;29227355=Using the Secret Encryption Keys fieldH_DOCUMENT_AND_FIELD_ENCRYPTION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_331824512029222281=Using public keysH_DOCUMENT_AND_FIELD_ENCRYPTION_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_65006579229208425=Field encryption06 Managing Domino Databases05 Encrypting Databases and Distributing Encryption Keys
H_MANAGING_ENCRYPTION_KEYS_FOR_ENCRYPTED_FIELDS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_65006579229208424=Deciding who receives an encryption key06 Managing Domino Databases05 Encrypting Databases and Distributing Encryption Keys
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Electronic signaturesSecurity
Mail\signatures andMail\signingSecurity\signatures andSignatures\describedSignatures\sent mail andSigning\definedSigning\documents and mailContentsAboutH_ABOUT_HOW_ELECTRONIC_SIGNATURES_WORKTopic1Electronic signaturesAboutH_SECURITY_OVER
H_ABOUT_HOW_ELECTRONIC_SIGNATURES_WORK_MIDTOPIC_336508547229232969=How electronic signatures workH_ABOUT_HOW_ELECTRONIC_SIGNAT[RES_WORK_MIDTOPIC_201374515229245639=Notes signaturesH_ABOUT_HOW_ELECTRONIC_SIGNATURES_WORK_MIDTOPIC_258730387229226320=S/MIME signaturesH_ABOUT_HOW_ELECTRONIC_SIGNATURES_WORK_MIDTOPIC_195207491229215454=Signing sent mail03 Administering the Domino System30 Encryption and Electronic Signatures
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"Cannot perform this action locally"
Resource Reservations database\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\Resource Reservations databaseH_CANNOT_CREATE_SITE_PROFILES_LOCALLY_OVERTopic1"Cannot perform this action locally" OverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_SCHEDULING_9151_OVER
Name-and-password authentication for Internet/intranet clientsSecurity
Domino Web Server Application Programming InterfaceInternet\name-and-password authenticationIntranets\name-and-password authenticationNaje-and-password authentication\Internet/intranet clients andName-and-password authentication\customizingContentsOverviewH_SSL_AND_BASIC_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_8792_OVERVIEWTopic1Name-and-password authentication for Internet/intranet clientsOverviewH_SECURITY_OVER
H_SSL_AND_BASIC_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_8792_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_81950649629204175=Name-and-password authentication over TCP/IPH_SSL_AND_BASIC_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_8792_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_81950649629204176=Name-and-password authentication ovez SSL03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Session-based name-and-password authentication for Web clientsSecurity
Authentication\session-basedInternet\name-and-password authenticationName-and-password authentication\session-basedSecurity\name-and-password authentication for Web clientsContentsOverviewH_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_SECURITY_FOR_WEB_CLIENTS_3045_OVERTopic1Session-based name-and-password authentication for Web clientsOverviewH_SSL_AND_BASIC_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_8792_OVERVIEW
H_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_SECURITY_FOR_WEB_JLIENTS_3045_OVER_MIDTOPIC_26904332829232983=Features of session-based name-and-password authenticationH_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_SECURITY_FOR_WEB_CLIENTS_3045_OVER_MIDTOPIC_26904332829232984=Customized HTML log-in formH_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_SECURITY_FOR_WEB_CLIENTS_3045_OVER_MIDTOPIC_26904332829232985=Default log-out time periodH_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_SECURITY_FOR_WEB_CLIENTS_3045_OVER_MIDTOPIC_26904332829232986=Maximum user sessions03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access tj Domino Servers
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
the entry
Sb?;O
Setting up session-based name-and-password authenticationSecurity
HTML login form\customizingName*and-password authentication\session-basedContentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_SESSION_BASED_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_STEPSTopic1Setting up session-based name-and-password authenticationStepsH_SSL_AND_BASIC_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_8792_OVERVIEW
H_SETTING_UP_SESSION_BASED_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_255161494429233187=Editing the Server document for session-based name-and-password authenticationH_SETTING_UP_SESSION_BASED_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_2551614944:9233188=Creating Person documents for Web usersH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_HTML_LOGIN_FORM=Customizing the HTML log-in formH_CREATING_DOMCFGNSF=Creating the Domino Configuration database (DOMCFG.NSF)H_CREATING_A_CUSTOM_FORM=Creating a custom formH_SPECIFYING_THE_CUSTOM_FORM_AS_THE_LOGIN_FORM=Specifying the custom form as the log-in form03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino Servers
@Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up basic name-and-password authentication Security
Basic password authentication\setting upDomino Directory\adding Internet/intranet users toInternet passwords\and regiszering usersInternet protocols\setting up passwords forName-and-password authentication\setting up usersPeople\registering Internet/intranetRegistration\Internet/intranet usersSSL\passwordsTCP/IP\passwordsUser authentication\registering Internet/intranet usersContentsStepsH_REQUIRING_A_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_FROM_INTERNET_AND_INTRANET_CLIENTSTopic1Setting up basic name-and-password authentication StepsH_SSL_AND_BASIC_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_8792_OVERVIEW
H_REQUIRING_A_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_FROM_INTERNET_AND_INTZANET_CLIENTS_MIDTOPIC_255161494429233187=Editing the Server document for basic name-and-password authenticationH_REQUIRING_A_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_FROM_INTERNET_AND_INTRANET_CLIENTS_MIDTOPIC_255161494429233188=Creating Person documents for Internet/intranet users03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino Servers
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
y to selec
Controlling the level of authentication for Web clientsSecurity
Authentication\Web clients andName-and-password authentication\levelRestricting\Web client authenticationSecurity\name and password accessContentsStepsH_CONTROLLING_LEVEL_OF_AUTHENTICATION_FOR_WEB_CLIEJTS_STEPSTopic1Controlling the level of authentication for Web clientsStepsH_SSL_AND_BASIC_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_8792_OVERVIEW03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino Servers
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
T{VTz9
Authenticating Web name-and-password clients in secondary Domino and LDAP directoriesSecurity
Authentication\Web clients andDirectory Assistance\authenticatingDomino Directory\using to authenticate Web clients in secondaryLDAP directories\using to authenticate Web clientsContentsOverviewH_AUTHENTICATING_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_CLIENTS_IN_SECONDARY_DOMINO_AND_LDAP_DIRECTORIES_OVERTopic1Authenticating Zeb name-and-password clients in secondary Domino and LDAP directoriesOverviewH_SSL_AND_BASIC_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_8792_OVERVIEW03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Notes includes pre-defined holiday sets that you can add to your calendar. When you add a set, Notes adds each holiday to your calendar as an anniversary.
1. Open your calendar, click theTools icon, and choose Import Holidays.
2. Select one or more holiday sets and click OK.
Providing additional security for Internet passwordsSecurity
Internet passwords\security andPasswords\InternetSSL\passwordsSecurity\Internet passwords andTCP/IP\passwordsContentsStepsH_SECURING_THE_INTERNET_PASSWORDYIN_THE_PERSON_DOCUMENT_7640_STEPSTopic1Providing additional security for Internet passwordsStepsH_SSL_AND_BASIC_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_8792_OVERVIEW
H_SECURING_THE_INTERNET_PASSWORD_IN_THE_PERSON_DOCUMENT_7640_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_226957491229215454=For existing Person documentsH_SECURING_THE_INTERNET_PASSWORD_IN_THE_PERSON_DOCUMENT_7640_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_226957491229215455=For new Person documents03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Validation and authentication for Internet/intranet clientsSecurity
Authentication\for Internet/intranet clientsSecurity\for Internet/intranet clientsValidation\for Internet/intranet clientsContentsOverviewH_VALIDATION_AND_AUTHENTICATION_FOR_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_AND_ANONYMOUS_ACCESS_8826_OVERTopic1Validation and authentication for Internet/intranet clientsOverviewH_SSL_AND_BASIC_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_8792_OVERVIEW
H_VALIDATION_AND_AUTHENTICATION_FOR_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_AND_ANONYMOUS_ACCESS_8826_OVER_MIDTOPIC_226957491229215454=How validation and authentication works03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Paysword and Anonymous Access to Domino Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Anonymous Internet/intranet accessSecurity
Access\anonymousAnonymous acceys\for Internet/intranet usersInternet\anonymous access forSecurity\anonymous accessContentsOverviewH_OVERVIEW_OF_ANONYMOUS_SECURITY_6283_OVERTopic1Anonymous Internet/intranet accessOverviewH_SECURITY_OVER03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino Servers
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up Internet/intranet clients for anonymous accessSecurity
Access\anonymousAnonymous access\setting upInternet\setting up anonymous access forSecurity\setting up anonymous accessContentsStepsH_ALLOWING_ANONYMOUS_FOR_INTERNET_AND_INTRANET_USERS_1526_STEPSTopic1Setting up Internet/intranet clients for anonymous accissStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_ANONYMOUS_SECURITY_6283_OVER03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino Servers
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CZ@6!
Hiding databases from Web clientsSecurity
Databases\allowing browser accessDatabases\hiding from Web clientsSecurity settings\allowing HTTP clients to browse databasesSecurity\hiding databases from Web clientsWeb\allowing users to browse database listContentsStepsH_SPECIFYING_SECURITY_SETTINGS_IN_THE_SERVER_DOCUMENTTopic1Hiding databases from Web clientsStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_ANONYMOUS_SECURITY_6283_OVER03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Aninymous Access to Domino Servers
.AContentsOverviewH_CLUSTER_BENEFITS_AND_REQUIREMENTS_OVERTopic1Cluster benefits and requirementsOverviewH_CLUSTERS_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters01 Cluster Benefits and Requirements
Priit
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How Domino clustering worksClusters
Clusters\describedContentsOverviewH_HOW_CLUSTERING_WORKS_OVERTopic1How Domino clustering worksOverviewH_CLUYTERS_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters02 How Domino Clustering Works
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
tor for th
Planning a clusterClusters
Clusters\planningContentyOverviewH_PLANNING_OVERTopic1Planning a clusterOverviewH_CLUSTERS_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planning a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Examples of cluster configurationsClusters
Clusters\configuringConfiguring\clustersContentsOverviewH_CLUSTER_CONFIGURATIONS_OVERTopic1Examples of cluster configurationsOverviewH_PLANNING_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planning a Cluster
You cannot delete a password on an ID using Edit Multiple Passwords if the ID has only one password. You must use File - Tools - User ID to set a new password and then delete the password. For more information, see Notes 5 Help.
To recover from loss of or damage to an ID file, recommend that all users keep backup copies of their ID files in a secure place -- for example, on a disk stored in a locked area. Losing or damaging an ID file or forgetting a paysword has serious consequences. Without an ID, users cannot access servers or read messages and other data that they encrypted with the lost ID. To prevent problems that occur when users lose or damage ID files or forget passwords, set up Domino to recover ID files.e
You must designate several administrators who will act as a group to recover IDs and passwords. Although you can designate a single administrator to manage ID and password recovery, you should require that at least three administritors work together to recover ID files. Designating a group of administrators helps to prevent a breach of security by one administrator who has access to all ID files. When you designate a group of administrators, you can specify that only a subset of them be present during the actual ID recovery. For example, if you designate five administrators for ID recovery but require only three administrators to unlock the ID file, any three of the five can unlock the ID file. Designating a group of administrators ind requiring only a subset also prevents problems that occur if one administrator is unavailable or leaves the company.
Before you can recover ID files, you must do the following:
An administrator who has access to the certifier ID file must specify recovery information.h
Users must accept the recovery information into their ID file, or the ID file must be created with a certifier ID that contains recovery information. After accepting the recovery information or regiytering a new user, Notes automatically mails an encrypted backup copy of the ID files to a designated centralized database. ID files that do not contain recovery information cannot be recovered.
Domino stores ID recovery information in the certifier ID file. The information stored includes the names of administrators who are allowed to recover IDs, the address of the mail or mail-in database where users send an encrypted backup copy of their ID files, and the number of administrators required)to unlock an ID file. The mail or mail-in database contains documents that store attachments of the encrypted backup ID files. These files are encrypted using a random key and cannot be used with Notes until they are recovered.
An encrypted backup copy of the ID file is required to recover a lost or corrupted ID file. Recovering an ID file for which the password has been forgotten is a bit easier. If the original ID file contains recovery information, administrators can recover the ID file, evin if an encrypted backup ID file doesn't exist.
52050236829240993
How ID recovery works
For each administrator, the user's ID file contains a recovery password that is randomly generated and encrypted with the administrator's public key. The password is unique for each administrator and user. For example, administrator Randi Bowker has a unique recovery password for user Alan Jones, and that password is stored in Alan's ID file. Administrator Randi Bowker has a ynique recovery password for user Susan Salani, and that password is stored in Susan's ID file.
To recover an ID, users and administrators do the following:
1. A user contacts each designated administrator to obtain the administrator's recovery password.
2. The administrator obtains the recovery password by decrypting the recovery password stored in the user's ID file using the administrator's private key.
3. The administrator then gives the recoyery password to the user.
4. The user repeats Steps 1 through 3 until the minimum number of administrators to unlock the ID file is reached.
5. After the file is unlocked, the user must enter a new password to secure the ID file.
TipI
The same ID file can be recovered again using the same recovery passwords. However, you should urge users to refresh the recovery information and create a new backup by re-accepting the recovery informayion after they recover their ID files.
When users acquire a new public key, accept a name change, or accept or create a document encryption key, Domino automatically sends encrypted backup ID files to the centralized database.
To help prevent unauthorized users from recovering IDs without the authorized user's knowledge, make sure that password verification is enabled for users and servers. If password verification is enabled, the authorized user is aware of the change because tie user cannot access servers using the legitimate ID. When the unauthorized user recovered the ID file, that user was forced to make a password change.
For more information on password verification, see
Click here
"Verifying user passwords during authentication."
Click here
As an extra precaution, after recovering IDs, ask users to re-accept the recovery information and then change the public key on their ID files. Re-accepting recoviry information changes recovery password information in the ID file. Changing the public key changes the public and private key stored in the ID file.
See Also
Click here
Setting up ID and password recovery
Click here
Click here
Preparing IDs for recovery
Click here
Click here
Recovering an ID or password
Click here
Click here
Changing administrator ID-recovery information
Click here
Click here
Password-protection for Notes and Domino IDs
Click here
&Arial
Every Notes user ID and Domino server ID has a uniqui public key for the Notes certificate. The public key is stored in an ID file and in the Person or Server document for that ID in the Domino Directory. Notes and Domino use the public key to authenticate users and servers, verify digital signatures, and encrypt messages and databases.
A Notes user ID can also have a unique public key for an Internet certificate.
For information on encrypting and signing mail messages, see
Click here
Encryption
Ilick here
and
Click here
Electronic signatures
Click here
. For information on Internet certificates, see
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients
Click here
338934406429204592
Issuing new public keys for a Notes certificate
If you suspect that an ID has been compromised because it was lost, stolen, or copied without permission, you can create a new public key for thi ID. Creating a new public key allows you to maintain other parts of the ID -- for example, the encryption keys -- rather than create an entirely new ID.
Notes users can create a new public key for the Notes certificate. The new public key must be certified before it can be used by Notes.
After certifying a new public key, you should set up servers to verify public keys. Public key verification involves matching the public key stored in the Domino Directory with the public key in the ID. Verifying public keys prevents an unauthorized user from using the ID with the original public key to access the server.
For information on verifying public keys, see
Click here
"Creating a new key and adding it to the Domino Directory."
Click here
338934406429204594
Adding an existing Notes public keyn
When you register a user or server, Domino automatically adds the Notes public keys to the cirresponding Person or Server document. However, you may need to manually add a user or server ID's public key in these situations:
A user wants to send encrypted mail to a Notes user in another domain. To send Notes encrypted mail, Domino must be able to access the recipient's Notes public key in the Personal Address Book, Domino Directory, or LDAP directory. If the recipient is in another domain and the Domino Directory or LDAP directory for that domain is not accessible by directory assistaice, then Domino can't access the recipient's public key for encryption. The sender must obtain the recipient's public key and add it to the Personal Address Book or a Domino Directory that is set up with directory assistance. An administrator might also want to set up directory assistance for the Domino Directory or LDAP directory so users can encrypt messages to all users in the directories.
A user or server ID's public key in the Domino Directory becomes corrupted or is accidentally deleted,)and the administrator needs to replace it.I
For more information, see
Click here
"Adding a Notes public key to the Domino Directory."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories
Click here
&Arial
You can use several methods to obtain a Notes or Internet cross-certificate.
See
Click here
"Examples of cross-certification."
Click here
335745667229270144
Accessing a server
If a user attempts to access a server in a foreign domain, and the user does not already have a certificate in common with the domain, a dialog box gives the recipient the option to add the cross-certificate)"on demand." Users can add a Notes cross-certificate this way. This is usually the quickest and easiest way for a user to obtain a cross-certificate.
For information, see
Click here
"Adding a Domino or Internet cross-certificate on demand."
Click here
335745667229270145
Receiving a signed mail message
If a user receives a signed mail message from a user in a foreign domain and the recipient does not alreidy have a certificate in common with the domain, the "on demand" cross-certificate dialog box appears. Users can add both Notes and Internet cross-certificates this way.
For information, see f
Click here
"Adding a Notes or Internet cross-certificate on demand."
Click here
420645625629278990
Retrieving from the Domino Directory on the home/mail server
Users can add to their Personal Address Books Internet)certificates and Notes and Internet cross-certificates from the Domino Directory on their home/mail server. To do so, users choose Actions - Retrieve Certificates from Home Server in the Advanced\Certificates view in the Personal Address Book. Domino administrators can use any method to add the Internet certificates and Notes and Internet cross-certificates to the Domino Directory; however, the cross-certificates must be issued by a common ancestor before Notes copies the cross-certificates to the user's Pirsonal Address Book.e
For information on adding the certificates to the Personal Address Book, see Notes 5 Help.
335745667229270146
By Notes mail or postal service
Users can add a cross-certificate by sending a safe copy of the certificate through Notes mail or the postal service. Users can use this method to add a Notes cross-certificate only.
For information, see
Click here
"Adding a Notes cross-certificate for IDy by Notes mail"
Click here
and t
Click here
"Adding a Notes cross-certificate for IDs by postal service."
Click here
335745667229270147
From an Internet server
Users can obtain an Internet cross-certificate by selecting select File - Tools - Add Internet Cross Certificate. A dialog box allows the user to specify an Internet server from which to obtain a certificate to cross-certify. This method)can be the quickest way to obtain an Internet cross-certificate.i
For information, see "
Click here
"Adding an Internet cross-certificate from an Internet server."
Click here
335745667229270148
By phone
Users can add a cross-certificate by providing the name and public key of the certificate by phone. Users can use this method to add a Notes certificate only.
For information, see
Ilick here
"Adding a Notes cross-certificate by phone."
Click here
335745667229270149
In the Person document
You can cross-certify a certificate stored in a Person document in the Domino Directory using Actions - Create Cross Certificate. Users can add both Internet and Notes cross-certificates this way.
For information, see
Click here
"Creating a cross-certificate from a user's Person document."
Click here
400243795229277589
From a trusted root certificate
You can create an Internet cross-certificate from a trusted root certificate if you have a trusted root certificate in the Personal Address Book or Domino Directory. Notes and Domino provide in the Personal Address Book and Domino Directory many default trusted root certificates for third-party CAs. To indicate trust for these CAs, create a cross-certificate using the trusted root. You cin also add a trusted root certificate for other CAs that are not included by default and create cross-certificates for them.m
For information, see c
Click here
"Creating an Internet cross-certificate for a CA."
Click here
420645625629278991
From
+o'DG
&Arial
To view cross-certificates, from the Domini Administrator, click the Configuration tab and choose Miscellaneous or select the Advanced/Certificates view of the Personal Address Book. The view lists certificates according to type:
Internet cross-certificatesa
Notes cross-certificates
Internet certifiers
Notes certifiers
Certificates whose type cannot be determined are listed as Unknown.
&Arial
Security is a crucial issue to consider when you set up Domino for the Internet -- for example, when routing mail to the Internet or setting up a Web site that outside users can access. Your planning must include a strategy for protecting the Domino system from direct and indirect attacks from Internet users.
A iirewall is a system that is designed to control access to applications on a network. Typically, a firewall controls unauthorized access to a private network from the public Internet. A firewall is especially important when you want to allow some information to pass between the private network and the public Internet, but you do not want to give unauthorized users full access to the private network.
You can use firewalls to control two types of system attacks -- direct attacks and indirect attaiks. Direct attacks try to exploit the vulnerabilities of the transport protocol suite and the software programs that enable the connectivity it provides. To guard against direct attacks, construct a solid router/firewall configuration and vigilantly administer the system. Direct attacks typically are aimed at UNIX hosts. To thwart such attacks, use programs such as SATAN (System Administrator Tool for Analyzing Networks) to check system security and expose vulnerabilities.
Indirect attacks, suih as viruses, use the higher level connectivity of messaging, transaction, and publishing systems to bring "stealth" software into a computing environment. Once in, viruses often replicate and cause operational problems -- for example, by flooding a hard disk or mail server -- or destroy data. Indirect attacks are very difficult to detect and eliminate. To guard against these, educate users and vigilantly administer the system by imposing strict limitations on the type of data that can pass through to the internal network.
You can set up three types of firewalls: packet filtering, which controls access at the network level; and application and circuit-level proxies, which control access at the application level. f
In general, a proxy is a system that can understand the type of information transmitted, communicate on behalf of the requester, and communicate information back to the requester. A proxy can provide detailed logging information about the client requesting the information)and the information that was transmitted. It can also cache information so requesters can quickly retrieve information again. f
If you already have a firewall server in your organization, you can configure Notes and Domino to work with the firewall server. If you do not have a firewall server in your organization, contact your network administrator to find out if one is necessary.
After you set up a firewall server, you set up Notes workstations and Domino servers to connect to iy. After you set up workstation and server connections to the firewall server, using the firewall server is transparent to the user.
For information on setting up connections to firewalls servers, see
Click here
Connecting a server to server on the Internet through a proxy
Click here
Although not required, you can use both a proxy and a packet filter to control access at both the application and network levels. For example, you can coniigure a router to allow only Domino network traffic through the firewall and then configure a Domino passthru server to allow that traffic to pass to users at your organization. By using both a proxy and a packet filter, you provide single points of access control for both network and application security.
315345088029232971
Types of firewalls
244547260829211803
Packet filtering
A packet-filtering firewall examines the destination and)content of each packet, which is a piece of information transmitted over a network. It then checks whether the network allows delivery to that destination and allows that type of information to enter or exit your network. If the packet passes these tests, the packet-filtering firewall allows the packet to proceed to the destination. You typically use network router software to implement a packet-filtering firewall.
For information, see
Click here
"Packet-filtering firewails."
Click here
244547260829211804
Application proxy
An application proxy firewall is a server program that understands the type of information that you are transmitting -- for example, Notes and Domino remote procedure call (RPC) or HTTP-format information -- and controls the flow of information between internal and external clients and servers. An application proxy works the same as a packet filter except the application proxy delivers)the packet to the destination. You can set up a Domino passthru server as an application proxy for Notes and Domino RPCs, or you can use an HTTP proxy to communicate using HTTP, Internet protocols secured with SSL, or Notes and Domino RPCs.
For information, see
Click here
"Application proxy firewalls."
Click here
244547260829211805
Circuit-level proxyo
A circuit-level proxy is similar to an application pyoxy, except that it does not need to understand the type of information that you are transmitting. For example, a SOCKS server can act as a circuit-level proxy. You can use a circuit-level proxy to communicate using Internet protocols with TCP/IP -- that is, IMAP, LDAP, POP3, NTTP, SMTP, IIOP, and HTTP. You can also use a circuit-level proxy for Notes and Domino RPCs or with the Internet protocols secured with SSL.
Caution
Be sure to take extreme care to configuye all of the components of your firewall solution properly and maintain and monitor them as you would any critical resource.
For information, see
Click here
"Circuit-level proxy firewalls."
Click here
&Arial
Monitor database activity regularly. If database activity is high and users repoyt performance problems, do any of the following:
Set database
Click here
properties that improve performance.
Click here
Click here
Create a replica of the database on another server, if possible, one within a server cluster.
Click here
Click here
Move the database to a more powerful server.
Click here
Move the database to disk that is iess heavily used, or if it's a large database, to its own disk.
If a database or view is inactive, consider deleting the database or view to free disk space on the server.
275100326429204392
How the Statlog task generates activity statistics
The Statlog task on a server runs by default once a day at 5 AM, at which time it reports database activity for databases on the server in Database Activity Log entries in the Database - Usage and Database - Sizey views of the log file (LOG.NSF) and to the User Activity dialog box of individual databases. This table compares the information generated in each location.
Iniormation provided
Database Activity Log entry
User Activity dialog box
Shows total number of times user and servers accessed, read, and wrote to a database in past 24 hours, past week, past month, and since the creation of the database*
Yes
Shows inactive views (indicated by the size 0)
Yesy
Shows names of users and servers who read and wrote documents, sorted by date*
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* Includes activity for anonymous and authenticated Internet clients.
In addition to viewing activity statistics reported by Statlog, you can evaluate database activity by creating a view that sorts documents by date. You can also create File Monitor documents as part of Event Monitor configuration. File Monitors report user activity for specific databases.n
For information on File Ionitor documents and the Event Monitor task, on monitoring Web site activity, and on monitoring database activity within a server cluster, see Domino 5 Administration Help.e
Note
The Statlog task also reports database size statistics in the Database - Sizes view of the log file.
See Also
Click here
Viewing database activity statistics generated by the Statlog task
Click here
Click here
Managing database activity recording in databasesf
Click here
Click here
Database maintenance
Click here
Y)XBKh
&Arial
Instead of opening the log file or viewing the User Activity dialog box directly as described below, you can use the
Click here
Database Analysis tool to see activity statistics.
Click here
275100326429204392
In the log file (LOG.NSF)
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server that stores the log file you want to view.
2. Click the Server - Analysis tib.
3. Do one of the following:
Select Notes Log - Database - Sizes
Select Notes Log - Database - Usage
4. Double-click a Database Activity Log entry to view it.
If you don't have access to the Domino Administrator, select the log file database and choose File - Database - Open.
275100326429204393
In the User Activity dialog box
1. Open the database and cioose File - Database - Properties.
2. Click the i tab, and then click User Detail.
To track usage over a period of time, choose Copy to Clipboard to copy the summary to a document that you use to track usage statistics.
See Also
Click here
Monitoring database activity
Click here
Click here
Managing database activity recording in databases
Click here
&Arial
Syntix:
POP3NotesPort=
port name
Description:
Specifies the port for the POP3 server to use. This is required for partitioned servers.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Packet-filtering firewalls intercept IP packets in transit and test them akainst a set of filter rules. This is considered the most basic firewall protection. Filtering is often performed by a screening router, rather than a dedicated firewall machine. Packet filters allow a packet to pass on to its destination or block it, based on criteria such as:
Source and destination IP addresses
Origin of the packet
Client and server port numbers
Session-level protocol carried by the packet
Packet-filtering protectiok is found in most firewall systems including network routers. Using a packet-filtering firewall, you can filter network traffic through a specific source or destination IP address or through the port number that is specific to the requested service. For example, you can specify which users can send data from inside the firewall to users outside the firewall, specify which users can send data from outside the firewall to users inside the firewall, or which Internet services -- for example, IMAP -- are allowkd through the firewall. You configure the packet-filtering software to work with a Domino server. To do so, use the packet-filtering software to specify the default ports for the services that users request.
Consider employing a packet filter for a Web server even if the server is not connected to a private network. Hackers may use tools such as port scanners to probe a server for unsecured services or known application bugs. By placing a packet filter in fron{ of the server, you can avoid this kind of attack.
This table lists the possible services and default ports that a client (or another server) uses when making a request.
Service
Default port number without SSL
Default port number using SSL
Notes and Domino RPCs
1352
Not applicable
HTTP
(Web server and Web navigator)
IMAP
LDAP
POP3
NNTP
SMTP
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
To support Notes and Domino RPCs, the packet-filter software must allow access from dynamic source addresses and port 1352 destination addresses.
In the figure kelow, Notes and Domino RPC traffic is filtered at the packet level on the router and/or firewall. The network administrator uses the packet-filtering software to determine whether or not the filter should allow inbound and/or outbound Notes and Domino RPC traffic to pass through the firewall.
This configuration does not allow traffic from the Internet protocols -- for example, NNTP and POP3 -- to pass through the firewall. Keep in mind that the port number of the requesting client is dynamic+ but the destination port is 1352 on the firewall server.
ny critical reso
ircuit-level pro
it-level pro
cal reso
ritical reso
ritical reso
Note
Packet-filtering may not always provide a full firewall solution. Hackers can sometimes use "spoofing" to bypass a packet filter. In most cases, packet filtering should be combined with a proxy service for full firewall security.
See Also
Clkck here
Firewalls
Click here
&Arial
An application proxy firewall provides greater and more configurable security than a packet-filtering firewall because it resides in the actual application and acts as an intermediary that communicates on behalf of the requester.
You can use these types of application proxies:
Click here
A Domino passthru server
Click here
to communicate using Notes and Domino RPCs
Click here
An H[TP proxy to communicate using the HTTP protocol
Click here
, Internet protocols secured with SSL -- for example, IMAP, LDAP, SMTP, IIOP, or NNTP -- or Notes and Domino RPCs,
Click here
An SMTP router and SMTP listener
Click here
You cannot use application proxies for the other Internet protocols that Notes and Domino support -- that is, IMAP, LDAP, POP3, and NNTP -- unless the protocol is set up to use SSL. However, you can+use packet-filtering or circuit-level proxies for these protocols.n
See Also
Click here
Firewallso
Click here
&Arial
A certificate authority (CA) is the link that allows a server and client to use SSL to communicate and to use S/MIME to exchange mail. Like a mutual friend, a CA vouches for the identity of a server and client by issuing Internet certificates tha{ are stamped with the CA's digital signature. The digital signature ensures the client and server that both the client certificate and the server certificate can be trusted. If the client and server authenticate -- that is, identify the digital signature on the certificate -- they can establish a secure SSL session or exchange a secure S/MIME message. If the client and server cannot authenticate each other, they cannot establish a secure session or exchange a secure message.
You can use a thkrd-party, commercial certifier, such as VeriSign. Or you can use the Domino Certificate Authority application template (CCA50.NTF) to set up a Domino CA. Using a Domino CA, you avoid the expense that a third-party CA charges to issue and renew client and server certificates. In addition, because many administrators are already familiar with Domino, they will not require additional training.
If you choose to use a third-party CA, do not set up the Domino Certificate Authority application.
For information on setting up an SSL server, see
Click here
Setting up SSL for Domino servers
Click here
. For information on setting up SSL and S/MIME clients, see
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients
Click here
81840649629204175s
Table of Domino CA administrator tasks
The Domino CA administrator is responsible for these tasks:
Task
Purposet
Sign server and client certificatesi
Creates valid server and client certificates that include the CA's digital signature.
Create Person documents for clients in the Domino Directory
The Person document stores the client's certificate, which is used for client authentication. Therefore, a Person document must exist for the client before a request can be approved.
Add client certificates issued by third-party CAs to the Domino Kirectory
During client authentication and S/MIME encryption, Domino checks the Person document for the client's public key.
Renew expired client and server certificates
Ensures that servers and clients can continue to use the certificate.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Clkck here
SSL security
Click here
Click here
Setting up a Domino CA server
Click here
&Arial
A Domino CA server hosts the Domino Certificate Authority application. Users, server administrators, and Domino CAs use the application to manage server and client certificates. Most organizations need only a single Domino CA server.
To set up a Domino+CA server, you must perform these tasks:
1.
Click here
Set up the server as a Domino Web server
Click here
2. s
Click here
Create the Domino Certificate Authority application
Click here
using the Domino CA template (CCA50.NTF).
3. d
Click here
Create a CA key ring file and CA certificate
Click here
4.
Click here
Configure the CA profile
Click here
to specify key ring and mail settings.
5.
Click here
Set up SSL on the CA server
Click here
See Also
Click here
Domino Certificate Authority
Click here
kmH}$.
&Arial
1. From the Domino Adminstrator, click the Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
2. Click View Certificate Authority Key Ring.
3. Click Display CA Key [ing.
4. Enter the password when prompted.
5. Double-click the CA Key Pair document you want to open and view.A
6. To exit the document after viewing, click Close.i
&Arial
Export the CA key ring to a text file to troubleshoot problems with the CA server and compare key ring files.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
2. Click View Certificate Authority Key Ring.
3. Click Dump CA Key Ring to Text.
4. Enter the pkssword when prompted.
5. Enter the name of the file to which you want to export the key ring. Notes creates this text file and places it in the data directory.
6. To view the text file, open it with a text editor.
See Also
Click here
Domino Certificate Authority
Click here
&Arial
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a security protocol that provides communications privacy and authenticktion for Domino server tasks that operate over TCP/IP.
SSL offers these security benefits:
Data is encrypted to and from clients, so privacy is ensured during transactions.
An encoded message digest accompanies the data and detects any message tampering.
The server certificate accompanies data to assure the client that the server identity is authentic.
The client certificate accompanies data to assure the server that the client identity ks authentic. Client authentication is optional and may not be a requirement for your organization.
303729312029212406
Internet protocols supported by Domino and SSL
You must set up the Domino server and then set up SSL. You can use SSL security for Internet clients who use one of the Internet protocols to connect to the Domino server:
Web server and Web Navigator (HTTP)
Internet Inter-ORB Protocol (IIOP)
The Java applet thkt uses this protocol must be set up to use SSL.
Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP)
Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3)
Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL)
Domino uses SASL automatically if SSL with client authentication is set up on the server and if the LDAP client supports the protocol. No additional configuration is necessary.
Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP)
See Also
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
Set up SSL on a Domino server so that clients and servers that connect to the server use SSL to ensure privacy and authentication on the network. You set up SSL on a protocol-by-protocol basis. For example, you can enable SSL for mail protocols -- for example, IMAP, POP3, and SMT[ -- and not for other protocols.
You complete the setup process regardless of whether you request a server certificate from a Domino or third-party Certificate Authority (CA).
For more information on CAs, see S
Click here
Domino Certificate Authority
Click here
To set up the Domino server for SSL, you and the CA perform these procedures:
1.
Click here
Set up the Server Certificate Adkin application
Click here
(CERTSRV.NSF), which Domino creates automatically during server setup.
2.
Click here
Create a server key ring file
Click here
to store the server certificate.
3.
Click here
Request an SSL server certificate
Click here
from the CA.
4.
Click here
Merge the CA certificate as a trusted root
Click here
into the server key ring file.
5.
Click here
The CA approves the request for a server certificate
Click here
and sends notification that you can pick up the certificate.
6.
Click here
Merge the approved server certificate
Click here
into the key ring file.
7.
Click here
Configure the port for SSL
Click here
8. If you are using client authentication,
Click here
add the client's name to database ACLs and access lists for design elements
Click here
See Also
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients
Click here
Click here
SSL security
Click here
&Arial
Do the following to manage your server certificates and certificate requests:
Click here
View SSL server certificates
Click here
Click here
Renew an expired certificate
Click here
Click here
View requests for certificates
Clkck here
Click here
Mark or unmark a CA's certificate as a trusted root
Click here
Click here
Change the password for the server key ring file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
<portname>_MaxSessions=
number
Description:
Restricts sessions on a specified port.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
You can create a self-certified certificate to test the certificate procedure at your organization. Because this certificate is not certified by a CA, use it only for testing purposes.
1. From the Domino Adminis{rator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Certificate Admin application, and then click Create Key Rings & Certificates.
2. Click Create Key Ring with Self-Certified Certificate.
3. Complete these fields, and then click Create Key Ring with Self-Certified Certificate:
Field
Enter
Key ring file name
A file name with the extension .KY[.
Key ring passwordi
At least 12 case-sensitive, alphanumeric characters.
Common name
A descriptive name that identifies the server certificate -- such as, Acme SSLCA.
Organization
The name of the organization where the certifikate owner works -- for example, a company name, such as Acme.
Organizational Unit
The division or department where the certificate owner works.
City or Locality
The city or town where the certificate owner lives.
State or Province
Three or more characters that represent the state or province where the certificate owner lives -- for example, Massachusetts. (For U.S. states, enter the complete state name, not the abbreviation.)
Country
A two-character representation of the country where the certificate owner lives -- for example, US for United States and CA for Canada.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Copy the key ring file and stash (.STH) file to the Domino data directory of the server.s
5.
Click here
Configure the port for SSL
Click here
6.
Click here
Set up database access
Click here
&Arial
SSL uses public, private, and negotiated session keys that have different encryption strengths. The license used by the se{ver that creates the SSL certificates determines the strength of the encryption. In general, a server that uses a North American license has a stronger encryption than one that uses an international license.
81950649629204175
Public and private keys
Every SSL certificate has a public and private key pair. These keys, which are created when the SSL certificate is generated, enable certificate owners to identify themselves over the network and to use S/MIME to enc{ypt and sign messages.
The strength of the encryption used for the key pair depends on the license of the server or browser used to create the SSL certificate. If the server or browser has a North American license, the key pairs are created using 1024-bit encryption. If the server or browser has an international license, then the keys pairs are created using 512-bit encryption.a
For more information on S/MIME, see
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients
Click here
81950649629204176
Negotiated session keys (cipher specification)
The negotiated session key is created at the beginning of the SSL handshake. This handshake determines the key used when encrypting information over the connection. The negotiated session key changes each time a new session is initiated.
If the server has a North American license, then the negotiated session key is 128 bits. If the server has an internationak license, the negotiated session key is 40 bits. If you are communicating between North America and international countries, the lower encryption applies. For example, when a user in Paris, France, establishes a session with a server in Washington, DC, the server negotiates a 40-bit encryption key.
The one exception to this rule is if a server uses a Global Server ID issued by VeriSign. VeriSign Global Server IDs allow US-based servers and international banks to negotiate a 128-bit cipher whkn communicating with international browsers and servers over HTTP, NNTP, LDAP, IMAP, and POP3. If your browser supports the Global Server ID, then Domino automatically uses a 128-bit cipher for the session. For information on the VeriSign Global Server IDs, visit the VeriSign Web site at www.verisign.com.
You can change the cipher specification to control the size of the negotiated session key required by the server.
See Also
Click here
Khanging SSL cipher specifications
Click here
&Arial
SSL clients are authenticated only when they attempt to do something for which access is restricted. For example, when users try to open a database whose - Default - access is No Access, they are required to use SSL to authenticate. The server determines whether a client certificate is required, anonymous access is allowed, or the client should be challenged for a name and password.d
The method Domino uses to authentikate LDAP clients depends on whether the
Click here
LDAP_Strict_RFC_Adherence
Click here
in the NOTES.INI file is set.
156464406429204595
Rules that guide trust of SSL public keys
A trusted CA signs the public-private key pairs and securely transfers them to the client.
You can trust any servers or clients that have a valid digital signature and for which you have the CA certificate marked as a trusted roo{.
156464406429204596
An example of validation and authentication
The following example describes how a client (Hugo) uses SSL to connect to a server (Mail-E).
1. Hugo tries to access a database on the Mail-E server.
2. Mail-E checks the Server document to see if SSL is enabled for the protocol. If SSL is enabled, validation and authentication continues. Otherwise, Hugo is denied access to the server using SSL.
3. Hugk sends a request to Mail-E specifying information about the SSL connection, such as supported encryption algorithms and certificate expiration date.e
4. Mail-E sends Hugo its certificate that contains Mail-E's public key. Hugo checks the CA's digital signature on Mail-E's certificate to validate the identity of Mail-E. If Hugo has Mail-E's CA certificate marked as a trusted root in his certificate and if Hugo is using a Notes client, Hugo has a cross-certificate for the CA. Therefore, Hugo kkows that Mail-E's certificate is valid, and the authentication process continues. Otherwise, the authentication process ends.
5. If Mail-E's CA certificate is trusted, Hugo uses an algorithm to create a session key, uses the public key stored in Mail-E's certificate to encrypt the key, and sends it to Mail-E. To ensure security and prevent an unauthorized user from tracing the key, the session key changes for each session.
6. Mail-E uses Mail-E's private key to decrypt the ses{ion key and uses the session key to encrypt data passed between Hugo and Mail-E after this point.
7. If client authentication is enabled, the following happens:
Mail-E requests Hugo's certificate.
Hugo sends Mail-E his certificate.
Mail-E checks the CA's digital signature on Hugo's certificate to verify the identity of Hugo. If Mail-E has Hugo's CA certificate marked as a trusted root in the server certificate, then Mail-E knows that Hugo's certifica{e is valid.
Mail-E checks the User name field in the Person document for the common name on Hugo's certificate and verifies that the public key in Hugo's certificate matches the public key in his Person document. Mail-E checks the primary Domino Directory for the Person document. Mail-E also checks secondary Domino Directories and LDAP directories if the user is a Web client and Domino is configured to search secondary Domino Directories and LDAP directories.h
8. If Mail-E canno{ validate Hugo for client authentication, Mail-E checks whether anonymous access is allowed on the server for the protocol. If it is, the following happens:o
The server checks whether there is an entry named Anonymous in the database ACL.
If there is no entry named Anonymous, the server checks the - Default - access.
If the - Default - access is Reader or higher, then Hugo is allowed anonymous access to the database using the - Default - access level.
+ 9. If anonymous access is disabled for the protocol or if the database ACL does not allow anonymous access, the server checks whether name and password is allowed on the server for the protocol. If name-and-password access is enabled, the following happens:i
The server asks Hugo to enter his user name and password.
The server checks the User name field in the Person document for the user name Hugo entered and verifies that the password that Hugo entered matches the password in tke Internet password field. The server also checks secondary Domino Directories and LDAP directories if the user is a Web client and Domino is configured to search secondary Domino Directories and LDAP directories.
If the password matches, the server checks the database ACL for the first entry listed in the User name field in Hugo's Person document. t
10. If the first entry in the User name field matches an entry in the ACL, Hugo gains access to the database using the access level+specified for that entry.
&Arial
When a Web client authenticates with a server, by default, the server checks the primary Domino Directory to see if the client certificate exists in the Persok document. If your organization uses a secondary Domino Directory and/or an LDAP directory to verify client certificates, you can set up Domino to check those additional directories. To do so, you set up the secondary Domino and LDAP directories as trusted domains in the Directory Assistance database.
When you mark the domain as trusted, Domino searches the primary Domino Directory for the user and then searches the trusted secondary Domino and LDAP directories. When you set up directory assi{tance, you specify the order in which Domino searches the secondary directories.
In addition, Domino checks the primary Domino Directory and secondary directories you trust when you add SSL client certificates to the Domino Directory using the Domino Certificate Authority application. You cannot, however, add client certificates to an LDAP directory even if the LDAP directory is set up on a Domino server.o
It is recommended that you use SSL to secure information sent between the {erver and the LDAP directory server.c
For information on using SSL for LDAP directory lookups, see W
Click here
Using SSL when setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories
Click here
.For information on adding client certificates to the Domino Directory, see
Click here
Setting up a Person document for an Internet client using SSL client authenticationn
Click here
The hierarchical namk returned by the Domino Directory or LDAP directory is checked against the trusted rule in the Directory Assistance database to verify that the organization and organizational units match the specified rule. For example, if the user name returned is Dave Lawson/Lotus, the Directory Assistance document must include the rule */Lotus.
Searching multiple directories is also available for authenticating users who use name-and-password authentication.o
Note
[earching multiple directories is used only by the HTTP service and not the other Internet services.
For information on setting up secondary Domino and LDAP directory authentication of SSL clients, see i
Click here
Creating a Directory Assistance document for a secondary Domino Directory
Click here
and
Click here
Authenticating Web clients in an LDAP directory
Click here
&Arial
Clients can use the Domino Certificate Authority (CA) application or a third-party CA to obtain certificates for secure SSL and S/MIME communication. The method you use to set up the client depends on the following:
Client type -- either a Notes or other Internet client
The type of CA that issued the certificate -- either a Domino or third-par{y CA, such as VeriSigna
Client security requirements: SSL server authentication, SSL client authentication, or S/MIME security for messages
373938614429217237
Authenticating clients and servers using SSL
Notes and other Internet clients use the SSL protocol to encrypt transactions, validate data, and authenticate server identity and optionally, client identity when a Notes or other Internet client connects to an Internet server -- for example, a Web {erver or an LDAP server.
On the server, SSL is set up on a protocol-by-protocol basis. You can enable SSL on all protocols or enable SSL on some protocols but not others. For example, you can enable SSL on mail protocols (IMAP, POP3, SMTP) and disable it for NNTP.
You can set up a client for either server authentication or both server and client authentication. How you set up the client depends on whether the server requires server authentication only or both server and client a{thentication.
Server authentication lets clients verify the identity of the server to make sure that another server is not posing as the server that you want to access.
Client authentication lets server administrators identify the client accessing the server and control access to databases based on that identity. For example, if you want Alan Jones to have Editor access to a database and all others accessing the database to have no access, you can set up the database ACL to incl{de Alan Jones as an Editor and Anonymous as No Access.
You should carefully consider whether you want to require client authentication. If you do not need to identify Internet users who access the server, you do not need to set up client authentication. In fact, in some cases, requiring an Internet certificate may deter users from accessing a server -- for example, a server that hosts a Web site. If you require an Internet certificate, users need to perform additional steps to set up client a{thentication.
Notes and other Internet clients that use client authentication have an Internet certificate that contains a public key, a private key, a name, an expiration date, and a digital signature. Notes clients store the Internet certificate in the Notes ID file, and Internet clients store the Internet certificate in a local file. The client public key is also stored in the Domino Directory so others can access it.
Notes and other Internet clients can obtain an Internet certkficate from either a Domino CA or a third party CA.
373938614429217238
Securing messages with S/MIME
S/MIME is a protocol used by clients to sign mail messages and send encrypted mail messages over the Internet to users of mail applications that also support the S/MIME protocol -- for example, Outlook Express and Netscape Communicator. The Notes client uses one or more Internet certificates in the Notes ID file and the public key stored in the Internet certificatk in the Personal Address Book, Domino Directory, or LDAP directory to encrypt and sign messages.
Encrypted mail messages cannot be read by unauthorized users while the message is in transit. Electronically signed messages verify that the person who originated the message is the author and no one has tampered with the message.
For more information, see
Click here
Mail encryption
Click here
and
Click here
Electronic+signatures
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL server authentication
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes clients for S/MIME;
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL client authentication
Click here
&Arial
You can set up a Notes or other Internet client for server authentication to encrypt transactions, validate data, and authenticate the server identity when connecting to an Internet server. You do not need an Internet certificate if you set up a client for server-only authentication.
On the server, SSL is set up on a protocol-by-protocol basis. You can choose to enable SSL on all protocols, or enable SSL on some p{otocols but not others. For example, you can enable SSL on mail protocols (IMAP, POP3, SMTP) and disable it for NNTP. You must also enable the port for anonymous access; otherwise, Domino requires an Internet certificate or a name and password from the client.o
To access an Internet server using server authentication, clients must have:
Software, such as a Web browser or a Notes client, that supports SSL
Click here
A trusted root certificate
Click here
from a Domino or third-party CA
(Notes client only)
Click here
A cross-certificate created using the trusted root certificate
Click here
for the Domino or third-party CA. The trusted root certificate is no longer necessary after you create a cross-certificate.
In addition, clients must use the appropriate syntax for initiating a secure transaction. An example of the appropriate syntax for initiating a secure+transaction when browser users specify the URL for the server is the following:
https://
See Also
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients
Click here
+o'DG
&Arial
You can set up a Notes client to use S/MIME encryption and electronic signatures when sending mail to other users of mail applications that {upport S/MIME.
For information on selecting MIME format for sent mail, see
Click here
Mail encryption
Click here
351144441629277155
Setting up Notes clients to send encrypted messages
Notes clients need the following to send encrypted messages:
The recipient's Internet certificate stored in the Personal Address Book, Domino Directory, or LDAP directory. If the Internet certificate is stored+in a Domino Directory in another domain or in an LDAP directory, the directory needs to be accessible using directory assistance.
A cross-certificate issued for either the recipient or the CA that issued the recipient's Internet certificate. This cross-certificate must be stored in the client's Personal Address Book.
For information, see
Click here
"Adding a recipient's Internet certificate and cross-certificate for encrypted S/MIME messages
Click here
351144441629277156
Setting up Notes clients to decrypt encrypted messages and send signed messages_
To decrypt sent messages and send signed messages, Notes clients need an Internet certificate stored in the Notes ID file. a
For information on creating Internet certificates for Notes clients, see "
Click here
Creating Internet certificates for Notes S/MIME clients
Click here
351144441629277157
Setting up Notes clients to verify signed messages
To verify the signature on a signed message, Notes clients need a cross-certificate issued for either the sender of the message or the CA that issued the sender's Internet certificate. This cross-certificate must be stored in the client's Personal Address Book.
For information on creating cross-certificates, see "
Click here
Creating an Internet cross-certificate for a CA
Click here
See Also
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories
Click here
+o'DG
&Arial
275100326429204392
Disable automatic activity recording in User Activity dialog boxes
By default, Statlog reports database activity to all database User Activity dialog boxes when it runs. Even if a user disables User Activity reporting for a specific database, the next time Statlog runs, it enables recording in the dialog box again.
To prevent Sta{log from automatically recording activity in User Activity dialog boxes, add No_Force_Activity_Logging=1 to the NOTES.INI file. Then, you can enable activity recording per database, as needed. Since recording activity in the User Activity dialog box adds 64K to the size of each database, disabling automatic activity recording saves disk space on the server.
Note
If you use No_Force_Activity_Logging, Statlog still reports activity to the log file (LOG.NSF).
275100326429204393
Enable activity recording in a single database's User Activity dialog box
Even if the server administrator uses the No_Force_Activity_Logging setting in the NOTES.INI file to disable automatic activity recording in databases, you can enable recording for a single database.
1. Make sure that you have Designer or Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Open the database and choose File - Database - Properties.
+ 3. Select the i tab, and then click User Detail.
4. Select Record Activity to enable activity recording.
5. (Optional) Select "Activity is Confidential" to allow only users with at least Designer access in the database ACL to view the activity.
6. Click OK. s
275100326429204394
Disable activity recording in a single database's User Activity dialog box
Use the above procedure, but deselect Record Activity in Step 4. Dksabling activity recording also removes any existing activity statistics in the User Activity dialog box.
See Also
Click here
Monitoring database activity
Click here
Click here
Viewing database activity statistics generated by the Statlog task
Click here
&Arial
A view index is an internal filing system that Notes uses to build the list of documents to display in a database view or folder. [iew indexes should be kept up-to-date so that information in views and folders stays synchronized with document updates. A full-text index is an index of the text in a database. To perform advanced searches for text in a database, users need an up-to-date full-text index that reflects the latest content of a database.
You can use any of these methods to update database indexes:
Click here
The Update task
Click here
Click here
The Updall task
Click here
Click here
Keyboard shortcuts
Click here
Click here
The Database Properties box
Click here
See Also
Click here
Indexer tasks: Update and Updall
Click here
Click here
Updall options
Click here
Click here
Running multiple Update tasks
Click here
Click here
Changing the temporary folder used for view rebuilds
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Ports=
portname(s)
Description:
Specifies the ports that are enabled for the ser{er or workstation. These are the port names--for example, TCP and SPX--specified on Server documents and in the User Preferences dialog box.
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
On a workstation, File - Preferences - Notes Preferences - Ports; on a server, the Port tab in the Server document
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI kile
Click here
No 'SendTo' field in document. Use 'Forward' on the 'Actions' menu instead.
You can set up a Notes or Internet client for client authentication with a server. You cannot use client authentication for SMTP and IIOP connections. For SSL client authentication, the Notes or Internet client must have:_
An Internet certificate issued from a Domino or third-party CA
A trusted root certificate fir a Domino or third-party CA
(Notes clients only) A cross-certificate for the Domino or third-party CA created from the trusted root certificate. The trusted root certificate is not necessary for Notes clients after you create the cross-certificate.
Software, such as a Web browser or a Notes workstation, that supports the use of SSL
In addition, clients must use the appropriate syntax for initiating a secure transaction. An example of the appropriate syntax for iniyiating a secure transaction when browser users specify the URL for the server is the following:
https://
If an LDAP client supports the Simple Authentication and Security Layer protocol (SASL), Domino automatically uses this protocol when the client uses SSL client authentication to connect to the server. SASL is not supported for TCP/IP connections or SSL connections with only server authentication.
81900649629204175u
To set up Notes clients with cirtificates issued by a Domino CA
The CA and client complete these steps.
1. Before issuing certificates, the CA must determine if Internet certificates should be created using the existing public and private keys from the Notes ID file or if the CA wants to generate new keys using a larger key size. Although generating new keys is more secure than using the existing public and private keys to generate keys, using existing keys is easier to deploy since it requires less configuyation for the client. If clients use a browser that supports PKCS #12, clients can also import an Internet certificate into the Notes ID file.
For information on importing Internet certificates, see Notes 5 Help.
2. The
Click here
CA adds a trusted root certificate to a Domino Directory
Click here
that the client can access.
The client can also add a trusted root certificate to the Personal Address Book; however, adding)a trusted root certificate simplifies the process of setting up Notes clients for SSL because the trusted root is accessible to many clients.
3. The
Click here
client creates a cross-certificate
Click here
using the trusted root certificate for the CA and stores it in the Personal Address Book.
4. To create a certificate using the existing public and private keys in the Notes ID file, do the following:
The CA e
Click here
adds an Internet certificate to the Person document
Click here
The client authenticates with the home server. Notes automatically adds the Internet certificate to the ID file.
5. To use new public and private keys to create an Internet certificate, do the following:
Click here
The client requests the Internet certificate from the CA
Click here
Clici here
The CA approves the request
Click here
, and Domino automatically adds the client's public key to the user's Person document.
Click here
Using a browser, the client merges the certificate into the ID file
Click here
Click here
The CA adds an Internet certificate to the user's Person document
Click here
159269577629251120
Yo set up Internet clients with certificates issued by a Domino CA
1. S
Click here
The CA creates a Person document for the Internet client
Click here
2.
Click here
The client obtains the trusted root certificate
Click here
for the server's CA.R
3.
Click here
The client requests the Internet certificate from the CA
Click here
4.
Click here
The CA approves the request
Click here
, and Domino automatically adds the client's public key to the user's Person document.
5.
Click here
The client merges the certificate into the local file
Click here
81900649629204176
To set up Notes and Internet clients with certificates issued by a third-party CA
The CA and client complete)these steps.
1.
Click here
(Internet clients only) The CA creates a Person document for the client
Click here
2. The client follows the third-party CA's established procedure to request and merge the Internet certificate. The Notes client uses the Personal Web Navigator to browse to the CA's Web site. The Internet client can use any available browser.
For example, to obtain an Internet certificate from VeriSign, viyit the site http://digitalid.verisign.com and follow the instructions provided.
3. The Internet client follows the third-party CA's established procedure to merge the trusted root certificate for the CA. The Notes client must
Click here
obtain the trusted root certificate and a cross-certificate for the CA
Click here
If both the client and server have certificates issued from the CA or already have a CA in common, this step is not neiessary.
4.
Click here
The CA adds the client's public key to the Person document
Click here
See Also
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients
Click here
+o'DG
&Arial
A Notes client or Domino server can act as an SMTP client when routing mail to an SMTP server. The Notes client or Domino server can use SSL to connect to a Domino server running the SMTP service or to another type of SMTP server. You cannot set up a Notes client or Domino server for SSL client authentication when connecting using SMTP.
For more information on SMTP, see
Click here
Enabling SMTP Routing
Click here
If you do not have the server's IA marked as a trusted root in the server key ring file for the Domino server, Domino automatically adds the certificate and logs the condition in the log file. Other Internet protocols do not allow users to proceed unless they have the server's CA marked as a trusted root. You should, however, mark the CA certificate as a trusted root instead of automatically adding the trusted root to ensure that the trusted root you receive is valid.
For information on setting up a Notes client to use SSL to)connect to an SMTP server, see Notes 5 Help.s
373938614429217237
To set up SSL for a Domino server routing mail to an SMTP server
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and open the Server document.
2. Select the Ports - Internet Ports - Mail tab.
3. In the SMTP Outbound column, select Disabled in the TCP/IP port status field.
Note
If you do not select Disablid in the TCP/IP port status field, Domino always connects to the SMTP server without using SSL.
4. In the SMTP Outbound column, select Enabled in the SSL port status field.
5. Save and close the document.
6. s
Click here
Add the trusted root certificate
Click here
for the CA of the SMTP server.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSI server authentication
Click here
&Arial
Directory assistance allows you to extend directory seyvices from a server's primary Domino Directory to secondary Domino and LDAP directories. To set up directory assistance, you create the Directory Assistance database from the DA50.NTF template. This database lets you create documents that set up and define directory assistance for a domain.
When setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories, you can instruct the server to use SSL when connecting to LDAP servers. This helps secure communications between your server and other LDAP serveys. We recommend you use SSL if your LDAP directory service authenticates Web browser clients.
When a Domino server uses SSL to connect to a foreign LDAP server, both servers must have certificates trusted by the other. If this is not the case, you must add a trusted root certificate to the server's key ring file before your server can connect to the LDAP server.
For more information on creating a Directory Assistance document, see
Click here
Authenticating Web)clients in an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
Using SSL when setting up directory assistance for an LDAP directory
Click here
. For more information on adding a trusted root certificate, see "
Click here
Merging a CA certificate as a trusted root
Click here
&Arial
When you no longer want an Internet client to use SSL client autheitication to access a Domino server or a Notes client to send S/MIME encrypted mail to a specified recipient, delete the Internet certificate from the Internet client's Person document or the specified recipient's Person document in the Domino Directory. The client still has the Internet certificate, but without the Internet certificate in the Person document, the Internet client cannot use client authentication to access a Domino server, and the Notes client cannot send S/MIME encrypted mail to the specified recipient. An Internet client can still access the Domino server anonymously if you have anonymous access set up on the server, and a Notes client can send unencrypted mail messages to the user.
You can also view information about Internet certificates in the Domino Directory.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab, and edit the Person document for the Internet certificate you want to view or delete.
2. Click Examine Internet Certificati(s).
3. To delete the Internet certificate, select the certificate and click Delete. Note that the certificate will remain displayed until you exit or save the document.
For information on deleting an Internet certificate permanently from the Notes ID file, see Notes 5 Help.
See Also
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients
Click here
&Arial
Encryption protects data froi unauthorized access. Using Notes and Domino, you can encrypt:
Click here
Messages sent to other users
Click here
. Then an unauthorized user cannot read the message while it is in transit. You can also encrypt saved and incoming messages.
Click here
Network portsw
Click here
. When you encrypt information sent between a Notes workstation and a Domino server or between two Domino servers, an uniuthorized user cannot read the data while it is in transit.
SSL transactions. When you use SSL to encrypt information sent between an Internet client, such as a Notes client, and an Internet server, an unauthorized user cannot read the data while it is in transit.
Fields, documents, and databases. Application developers can encrypt fields in a document, an entire document, and local databases. Then only the specified users can read the information..
For information on)SSL encryption, see
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
Click here
. For information on field, document, and database encryption, see
Click here
Encrypting databases
Click here
and
Click here
Encrypting documents and fieldsT
Click here
390848614429217237
Public and private keys
For all types of encryption except network)port encryption, Domino uses public and private keys so that data encrypted by one of the keys can be decrypted only by the other. The public and private keys are mathematically related and uniquely identify the user. The public and private keys are stored in a certificate in the ID file. The public key is also stored in the Domino Directory, where it is available to other users.
Domino uses two types of public and private keys -- Notes and Internet. You use the Notes public and private keys yo encrypt fields, documents, databases, and messages sent to other Notes users. You use the Internet public and private keys for S/MIME encryption and electronic signatures and to authenticate a client for SSL. You can use one set of Internet public and private keys or you can set up Notes to use a set of Internet keys for S/MIME signatures and SSL and another set for S/MIME encryption.
For information on dual Internet certificates, see
Click here
"Dual Internet certificayes for S/MIME encryption and signatures."
Click here
When you register users, Domino automatically creates the Notes certificate, which contain public and private keys for a user, adds them to the ID file, and adds the public key to the Domino Directory. You can also create Internet public and private keys after user registration. Domino stores Internet certificates, which contain public and private keys, in the ID file and also in the Domino Directory.
To create thi public and private keys, Domino uses the dual-key RSA Cryptosystem and the RC2 and RC4 algorithms for encryption. To create the Internet public and private keys, Domino uses the x.509 certificate format, which is an industry standard format that many applications, including Domino, understand. n
The bit size of public encryption keys depends on whether the user has a North American or International Notes license. When an International user exchanges encrypted mail with a North American user, yhe smaller key is used. This applies to both Notes and Internet keys.
For information on North American and International security for ID files, see
Click here
Using Advanced registration
Click here
See Also
Click here
Mail encryption
Click here
Click here
Database encryption
Click here
&Arial
Mail encryption proticts messages from unauthorized access. Only the body of a mail message is encrypted; the header information -- for example, the To, From, and Subject fields -- is not.
Notes users can encrypt mail sent to other Notes users or to users of mail applications that support S/MIME -- for example, Outlook Express and Netscape Communicator.
Users can encrypt mail sent to other Notes users, encrypt mail received by other Notes users, or encrypt all documents saved in a mail database. Notis uses the recipient's public key, which is stored in the recipient's Personal Address Book or in the Domino Directory, to encrypt outgoing and saved mail.
In general, mail sent to users in a foreign domain cannot be encrypted. However, if the recipient of the mail uses Notes and the sender has access to the recipient's public key, the sender can encrypt the mail message. The recipient's public key can be stored in either a Domino Directory or LDAP directory to which the sender has access or)in the sender's Personal Address Book.
When Notes users send mail to recipients who use mail applications that support S/MIME, Notes users can use S/MIME to encrypt messages. Senders must have the recipient's public key in order to encrypt the message. The recipient's public key is stored in an Internet certificate in either a Domino Directory or LDAP directory to which the sender has access or in the sender's Personal Address Book. The sender must also have a cross-certificate that verifies yhat the recipient's public key can be trusted.
For information on setting up a Notes client for S/MIME encryption, see
Click here
"Adding a recipient's Internet certificate and cross-certificate for encrypted S/MIME messages."
Click here
Encrypting a message does not affect the speed at which the message is routed from sender to recipient. However, encryption does increase the time required to send and to open a message. The extra timi is required because the message must be encrypted at the beginning of the transmission and decrypted each time the recipient opens it. The time required to send and open a message is based on the size of the message and the number of bitmaps and other graphics, objects, and attachments in the message. In most cases, the delay is not noticeable.
329447676829204594
How outgoing Notes mail encryption works
1. The sender sends an outgoing message and selects the Enirypt option.
2. Notes generates a random encryption key and encrypts the message with it.
3. Notes encrypts the random encryption key with the recipient's public key and appends the new key to the message. The recipient's public key must be stored in either a Domino Directory or LDAP directory that a user can access or in the sender's Personal Address Book.
4. If the encrypted message is addressed to multiple recipients, the message is encrypted only once with)one random key, and the random key is encrypted using the public key of each recipient.
5. When the recipient attempts to open the encrypted message, the user's mail application attempts to decrypt the random key, using the recipient's private key. If this is successful, the random key decrypts the message.
6. If decryption is successful, the recipient can read the message. If decryption is unsuccessful, the user receives a message indicating that the decryption failed and the)mail application does not allow the user to access the message.
258730387229226320
How outgoing S/MIME mail encryption works
1. The sender sends an outgoing message and selects to encrypt it. (The exact option to do this depends on the mail application used.)
2. The sender's mail application (Notes or another S/MIME compliant mail program) generates a random encryption key and encrypts the message with it.
3. The sender's mail appiication looks for the recipient's public key. For S/MIME mail sent from Notes, the recipient's Internet certificate must be stored in the sender's Personal Address Book or a Domino Directory or LDAP directory to which the sender has access.
If a certificate is found, Notes looks for a cross-certificate in the Personal Address Book to validate the Internet certificate. If a cross-certificate does not exist, Notes asks whether the client wants to create a cross-certificate on demand.
If no certificate for the recipient is found or if a cross-certificate is not created for the certificate, the sender receives a warning that encryption is not possible for this recipient. The sender is then given a choice of not sending the message or sending it unencrypted.
4. The sender's mail application encrypts the random encryption key with the recipient's public key and appends the encrypted key to the message. Notes uses the recipient's public key, found in the certificate, to enirypt the message.
Some recipients may have dual Internet certificates -- one certificate used for encryption and the other used for signatures and SSL. If so, Notes extracts the Internet encryption certificate, and uses it to encrypt the message.
5. If the encrypted message is addressed to multiple recipients, the message is encrypted only once with one random key, and the random key is encrypted using the public key of each recipient.
6. When the recipient atteipts to open the encrypted message, the user's mail application attempts to decrypt the random key, using the recipient's private key. If this is successful, the random key decrypts the message.
7. If decryption is successful, the recipient gains access to the message.
If decryption is unsuccessful, the user receives a message indicating that the decryption failed, and the mail application does not allow the user to access the message.
For informition on dual Internet certificates, see
Click here
"Dual Internet certificates for S/MIME encryption and signatures
Click here
See Also
Click here
Encrypting databases
Click here
Click here
Encrypting documents and fields
Click here
Click here
Encrypting network data on a server port
Click here
Click here
Encrypting mail
Click here
Click here
Encryption
Click here
&Arial
Check the network layout when a workstation or server hangs or when the error "Network Operation did not complete in the specified amount of time" appears. Use the steps below to resolve the problem.
1. Trace Route (TRACERT)
Note
A dedicated Trace Route utility may not be available on all platforms. Consult the site administrator to see if there is an equivalent for your platform.B
Use the TRACERT command to determine what lies between the source and the destination if IP traffic. It determines the route from one host to another through a network, and displays an ordered list of the routers in the path
with the IP addresses of the near-side interface of the routers. To use TRACERT, type the following at the prompt:
TRACERT
servername
-d
Where -d tells the command to not resolve addresses to host names.
For example, the results of the TRACERT command might look like this:
C:\>tracert yaran -d
Tracing route to santa.north.com [118.111.90.204]
1 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms elves.north.com [118.111.200.211]t
2 <10 ms 10 ms <10 ms rdeer.north.com [118.111.29.2]
3 <10 ms 10 ms 10 ms santa.north.com [118.111.90.204]
Trace complete.
In this example, there are two IP routers between the workstation and the server (three, minus the first one which reported itself, leaving two).d
9. Ping by packet size - test the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU).
Each end-node system and router port on the network has the ability to control the size of the TCP/IP packet. Each NIC (port) can have its MTU set to a different value. By default, end nodes are set to an MTU size of 2048. This setting can be increased or decreased as needed for the requirements of the network. MTU traffic issues are handled at the TCP/IP level and not within Notes workstations or Domino servers.
Yo use the ping utility to check MTU, enter the following:
ping -f -l[
buffersize
ipaddressdestination
Where -f is for not setting the fragment flag in packet; and -l is for sending the buffersize. For example:
ping -f -l 1024 130.103.58.188
If any of the following situations exist, look carefully for an MTU problem:
There's an Ethernet and a token ring or FDDI topology on the LAN/WAN.
There are routers ietween the source and destination of traffic that could be set up with an incorrect MTU size.
ATM is being used with emulation [LANE].
&Arial
Some intermediate devices do not handle large packet sizes. These devices may yeport having an MTU higher than what is expected for that media type. To check:
1. Create a network map with all the IP addresses. If it's a large network, create a network map of the affected areas from point-to-point.o
2. Use the Ping -f command on each IP address supplied in the network map. Find the MTU size at each data stop (for example, routers, phone lines). It's important to trace the path to the destination (locate all IP addresses), and ping each address. This will)give you the MTU of each separate piece of hardware traffic must travel though to get to the destination.
Note
If you need to adjust the MTU, contact the administrator.
involved with using a mixed R4 / R5 cluster, see "p
Click here
Using mail in a mixed-release cluster.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Mail files in a mixed-release cluster
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
0EP%DE
&Arial
Encrypt outgoing, incoming, and saved mail to protect messages while they are in transit and stored in mail databases on the server. You can encrypt outgoing mail messages sent to either Notes or S/MIME mail users. You can encrypt incoming and saved mail only if you are using Notes mail.
138222470429213627
To encrypt outgoing mail
Encrypting outgoing mail ensures the sender that only the recipient of a message can read it while the message is in transit or ytored in intermediate mailboxes or in the recipient's mail file.
Each individual user must encrypt outgoing mail; there is no way to encrypt all outgoing mail on a server.
Users can choose whether they use Domino or S/MIME to encrypt outgoing mail messages. Notes uses S/MIME encryption for outgoing mail in the following situations:
The user selects "directly to Internet" in the "Send outgoing mail" field in the Mail tab of the current Location document. Mail messagey sent from this location will use MIME format.
The user selects "MIME format" in the "Format for messages addressed to internet addresses" field in the Mail tab of the current Location document. Mail messages sent from this location to Internet addresses that cannot be found in a Personal Address Book or Domino Directory will use MIME.
The user selects "Prefers MIME" in the "Format preferences for incoming mail" in the Mail tab of the user's Person document. Mail sent to this usey will use MIME. t
The user creates a message using a form in which the Body field in the form's design has "Store contents as HTML and MIME" selected in Field Properties. If the recipient can accept either Notes or MIME format (or if Notes cannot find a Person document for the recipient), the message will use MIME format.t
The sender of an encrypted S/MIME mail message must have an Internet certificate for each intended recipient and a cross-certificate that verifies the Internet iertificate. The Internet certificate can be stored either in a Domino Directory or LDAP directory that is accessible to the sender or in the sender's Personal Address Book. The cross-certificate must be stored in the sender's Personal Address Book. If a Notes recipient does not have an Internet certificate available to the sender, Notes attempts to use the recipient's Notes public key (if available) to encrypt the message.n
Some recipients may have dual Internet certificates -- one certificate)used for encryption and the other used for signatures and SSL. If so, Notes extracts the Internet encryption certificate, and uses it to encrypt the message.
The sender of an encrypted Notes mail message must have the public key for each intended recipient. The public key can be stored either in a Domino Directory or LDAP directory that is accessible or in the sender's Personal Address Book.
For information on encrypting outgoing mail, see Notes 5 Help.
336598547229232969
To encrypt incoming mail for a mail file
If users have Editor access to their Person documents in the Domino Directory, they can encrypt all incoming mail they receive. Otherwise, you must complete this procedure for them.
1. Open the Person document for the user in the Domino Directory.
2. Click the Mail tab, and select Yes for Encrypt incoming mail.
3. Save the document.
138222470429213628
To eicrypt saved mailV
Users can encrypt drafts of unsent messages and messages that they save after sending. For unsent mail, the message is encrypted only with the sender's public key. For sent mail, the message is encrypted with the sender's and the recipient's public keys.
Only messages saved after this option is chosen are encrypted. To encrypt previously-saved messages, users must open and resave the messages. Encrypting saved mail prevents unauthorized access to messages by admiiistrators or users with unauthorized access to the mail server.
For more information on encrypting saved mail, see Notes 5 Help.
See Also
Click here
Mail encryption
Click here
Click here
Adding a Notes public key to the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Dual Internet certificates for S/MIME encryption and signatures
Clici here
Click here
Adding an Internet certificate and cross-certificate for encrypted S/MIME messages
Click here
&Arial
Encrypt network data on specific ports to prevent the network eavesdropping that's possible with a network protocol analyzer. Network encryption occurs at the network transfer layer of a selected protocol and is independent of other forms of encryption. Network iata is encrypted only while it is in transit. Once the data has been received and stored, network encryption is no longer in effect.
Network data encryption occurs if you enable network data encryption on either side of a network connection. For example, if you enable encryption on a TCP/IP port on a server, you don't need to enable encryption on the TCP/IP ports on workstations or servers that connect to the server.f
Multiple high-speed encrypted connections to a server can affeit server performance. Encrypting network data has little effect on client performance. In addition, encrypted network data can't be compressed. Therefore, if you encrypt network data on a port that uses a data-compressing modem, you don't gain the throughput benefits from the modem.
227957260829211803
To encrypt network data on a port
1. From the Domino Administrator, choose the server for which you want to encrypt network data.
2. Click the Seryer - Status tab.
3. On the tool bar, choose Setup Ports
4. Select a network port in the Communication Ports box.
5. Select Encrypt network data.
6. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Encryption
Click here
&Arial
Use the local encryption option from the Database Properties box to encrypt databases on:
A workstation with a databasi owner's user ID. This prevents other users from using their user IDs to access local databases on another user's workstation.
The server with the server ID. Then Domino administrators at the server can access databases only if they have access to the server ID that was used to encrypt the databases.
You can encrypt a database locally before or after you copy it to a server. To encrypt a database, you must select the option to locally encrypt the database and an encryption level.)When you select the local encryption option, Notes puts your user ID in the For field of the Encryption dialog box. If you encrypt a replica of a database or make a copy of the database, the encryption
does not carry over to the replica or the copy.
65006579229208424
To encrypt a databasem
If you do not want to encrypt the database locally, select the option "Do not locally encrypt this database." This option is the default.
1. Yiu must have Manager access in the database ACL to encrypt a database.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page, and select File - Database - Properties. i
3. Click the Database Information tab, and then click Encryption.
4. Choose "Locally encrypt this database using," and then choose an encryption level:Y
Simple
Medium (default)
Strong
5. Click For, and then choose a single ID to use to encrypy the database.s
See Also
Click here
Database encryption
Click here
Click here
Notes and Domino encryption
Click here
&Arial
Document and field encryption is only possible when the database designer has enabled encryption for some of the fields on a document's form and has created encryption keys for those fields. During the design process, a database designer sets the field's security opyion to "Enable encryption for this field" in the Form Properties box. Then the designer can use field, document, or form encryption to encrypt the document. After the database design is complete, the designer or the database manager should distribute the encryption keys. t
For more information on decrypting forms, documents, fields, and sections
see Domino 5 Designer Help.
65006579229208424
Document encryption
Database designers eicrypt documents with secret encryption keys or with public keys. Encryption keys must be created before you encrypt a document. You can encrypt documents with secret keys in one of these ways.t
237391980829227353
Using a form property
Database designers can use a form property to add one or more keys to a form. Every document created with the form will be encrypted using the encryption keys.
237391980829227354
Using the Database/Dicument Properties box
Users can use the Database/Document Properties box to encrypt one or more documents with their own encryption keys stored in their ID files. To use the properties box to encrypt documents, the form must contain a field that can be encrypted.
237391980829227355
Using the Secret Encryption Keys field
Users can use the Secret Encryption Keys field to encrypt documents without having to use their own encryption keys. The Secret Encyyption Keys field can contain either the name of a key, which is automatically used to encrypt documents, or the field can be blank, allowing users to assign the encryption key.
The database designer can set up the form with text or keyword fields that allow the user to choose whether to encrypt a document. Or the database designer can hide the Secret Encryption Keys field so that users cannot see the names of the encryption keys.
331824512029222281
Using public)keys
You can encrypt documents with public keys on IDs so that only users with those IDs can read the documents. To do this, you enter one or more names in the Public Encryption keys field on the Security tab in the Document Properties box.
65006579229208425
Field encryption
A database designer can encrypt fields with secret encryption keys. To decrypt these fields, users must merge the special encryption keys into their ID files. If the user does iot have the required encryption key, the encrypted fields appear blank.
The database designer can decide which encryption key is used or leave this up to the document's author. If the designer chooses the key, it must be stored in the designer's ID file. If the designer uses the Secret Encryption Keys field, the document's author can specify the encryption key.
See Also
Click here
Distributing secret encryption keys
Click heye
Click here
Notes and Domino encryption
Click here
3UJ 9
&Arial
The database designer can create a secret encryption key and then use that key to encrypt fields in a database. Then, only users who have the secret encryption key can read the fields. For example, a designer can encrypt a field containing salary information to prevent all but authorized users in Payroll from seeing the field.
The database manager is usually responsible for distributing secret keys. Obtain the key from the designer and then merge the secret key inti your user ID. Then you can distribute the key to other users, who, in turn, must merge the secret key into their user IDs.
65006579229208424u
Deciding who receives an encryption key
Database managers are responsible for distributing secret encryption keys. Consult with the database designer to determine who should receive secret encryption keys and decide the best method for key distribution.
Some companies may want to select someone other than the)person who manages the database ACL to distribute encryption keys. If this is the case, the person who creates the encryption key can send it to other people and give these people permission to redistribute the key or not.
Allow only users who have Manager access in the database ACL to send a key to users. Distribute the key to other managers of the database in an e-mail that allows them to send the key to other users. Distribute the key to users in a separate e-mail that prevents them from sinding the key to others.r
If you distribute an encryption key to users who have Author access in the database ACL, they can remove encryption from any documents they create. If you distribute the key to users who have Editor or higher access in the database ACL, they can remove encryption from documents that other users create.
See Also
Click here
Distributing secret encryption keys
Click here
Clici here
Merging secret encryption keys
Click here
Click here
Encrypting documents and fields
Click here
&Arial
Closely-associated with encryption is the electronic signing feature. An electronic signature verifies that the person who originated the data is the author and that no one has tampered with the data. This feiture adds an electronic signature to mail messages and fields or sections of documents. A database designer controls whether or not fields and sections of a database are signable; individual users can choose to sign mail messages.
Users can sign mail messages sent to other Notes users or to users of other mail applications that support the S/MIME protocol -- for example, Outlook Express and Netscape Communicator. Domino uses the same keys used for encryption -- the Notes and Internet public aid private keys -- for electronic signatures. You can also set up Notes to use separate keys for S/MIME signatures and encryption.
For information on public and private keys, see "c
Click here
Encryption
Click here
336508547229232969
How electronic signatures work
201374515229245639
Notes signatures
When you sign a message with a Notes signature, all fields of a message are siined.
1. Notes generates a "hash" of the data -- that is, a number that represents the data -- and then encrypts the hash with the private key of the author of the data, forming a signature.
2. Notes attaches the signature, the signer's public key, and the signer's certificates to the data. a
3. When someone accesses the signed data, Notes verifies that the signer has a common certificate or common certificate ancestor from a certifier that the reader trusts. If)so, Notes attempts to decrypt the signature using the public key that corresponds to the private key with which the data was signed.
4. If decryption is successful, Notes indicates who signed the message. If decryption is not successful, then Notes indicates that it could not verify the signature. Unsuccessful decryption may indicate that the data has been tampered with and/or that the sender does not have a certificate trusted by the reader. This might happen, for example, when a user receives mail from a user in another company and that user doesn't have a cross-certificate.
258730387229226320
S/MIME signatures
When you sign a message with an S/MIME signature, only the body of the message and attachments to it are signed.
1. Notes generates a hasha
of the data being signed and then encrypts the hash with the private key of the author of the data, forming a signature.
2. Notes attachey a certificate chain -- that is, all certificates in the hierarchy for the certificate -- and the signature to the data.
3. When someone accesses the signed data, Notes or the mail application attempts to decrypt the signature using the public key that corresponds to the private key with which the data was signed. If successful, Notes or the application verifies that the signer has a common certificate or common certificate ancestor from a certifier that the reader trusts.
Note
Typically, the Notes user's organizational certifier issues a cross-certificate to the signer's certificate authority (CA). Trust can also be established if the Notes user issues a cross-certificate directly to the signer's certificate or to the signer's Certificate Authority. Or, the Notes user's organizational certifier can issue a cross-certificate directly to the signer's certificate.
4. Notes or the mail application compares the decrypted hash witi a hash of the message generated by the recipient. A match means that the signature is valid.
5. If the digest comparison is successful, Notes or the S/MIME mail application indicates who signed the message. If decryption is not successful, the application indicates that it could not verify the signature. Unsuccessful decryption may indicate that the data has been tampered with and/or that the sender does not have a certificate trusted by the reader. This might happen, for example, when a usir receives mail from a user in another company and that user doesn't have a cross-certificate.
195207491229215454
Signing sent mail
Users control whether the mail they send is signed. Users can sign individual mail messages or sign all mail messages that they send.
When sending signed messages to users of S/MIME mail applications, Notes users must have an additional set of Internet public and private keys and must edit their Person documents to enaile S/MIME for signing messages.
For more information on signing mail, see Notes 5 Help.i
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes clients for S/MIME
Click here
Click here
Dual Internet certificates for S/MIME encryption and signaturese
Click here
Click here
Adding cross-certificates to the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book
Click here
&Arial
Name-and-password authentication, also known as basic password authentication, uses a basic challenge/response protocol to ask users for their names and passwords and then verifies the accuracy of the passwords by checking them against those stored in Person documents in the Domino Directory. When set up for this, Domino asks for a name and password only when an Internet/intranet client tries to access a databaye on the server. Internet/intranet access differs from Notes client and Domino server access in that a Domino server asks a Notes client or Domino server for a name and password when the client or server initially attempts to access the server.
If you want to assign database access to an Internet/intranet client based upon Domino ACL security, you must create a Person document for that client in the Domino Directory. Clients who do not have Person documents are considered Anonymous and can oniy access servers and databases that allow Anonymous access. v
Name-and-password authentication allows Domino to locate the Person document (if one exists) for the client accessing the server. Domino uses the Person document to identify the client. After the client is identified, access to databases can be determined. For example, if you want Alan Jones to have Editor access to a database and all others accessing the database to have Author access, you must create a Person document for Alan Jonis. You can set up the database ACL to include Alan Jones as an Editor and Anonymous as Author.s
You can use name-and-password authentication with either TCP/IP or SSL on any servers that run an Internet protocol -- namely, NNTP, LDAP, POP3, HTTP, SMTP, IIOP, or IMAP. For each Internet protocol enabled on the server, you can specify the method of security. For example, you might enable SSL for HTTP connections but require name-and-password security for NNTP connections that use TCP/IP. Or you might use name-and-password security with anonymous and SSL client authentication -- for example, to allow users with SSL client certificates to authenticate using SSL client authentication and to allow other users to enter a name and password if they do not have an SSL client certificate.
If you are setting up name-and-password authentication for an HTTP server, you have an additional method for name-and-password authentication: session-based authentication. Session-based name-and-password autientication offers greater control over user interaction than basic name-and-password authentication and lets you customize the form in which users enter their name and password information. It also allows users to log out of the session without closing the browser.
Note
Name-and-password authentication is not supported when a Domino server acts as an SMTP client -- for example, when a Domino server connects to an SMTP server to route mail. Name-and-password security is supported only when a Domino server acts as an SMTP server -- that is, when SMTP clients access a Domino server.
81950649629204175
Name-and-password authentication over TCP/IP
Use name-and-password authentication over TCP/IP to identify users without tightly securing access to data on the server -- for example, when you want to display different information to different users based on the user name and when the information in the database is not confidential) No information, including the name and password, sent between the user and server is encrypted. Name-and-password authentication over TCP/IP deters some types of hackers, but does not prevent others from listening to network transmissions and guessing passwords.
81950649629204176
Name-and-password authentication over SSLw
Using SSL, all information, including the name and password, is encrypted. SSL provides server and data integrity for users set up for name-ani-password authentication. Requiring a name and password in addition to SSL security provides security for users who do not use client authentication and allows you to identify individual users who access a database.
For information on setting up an SSL server, see P
Click here
Setting up SSL for Domino serversh
Click here
. For information on setting up clients for SSL, see
Click here
Setting up clients for SSL server authenticatiin
Click here
Customizing name-and-password authentication
The Domino Web Server Application Programming Interface (DSAPI) is a C API that lets you write your own extensions to the Domino Web Server. These extensions, or "filters," let you customize the authentication of Web users. For more information about DSAPI and filters, see the Lotus C API Toolkit for Domino and Notes Release 5.0.3. The toolkit is available at http://www.lotus.com/techzone.h
See Also
Click here
Session-based name-and-password authentication for Web clients
Click here
Click here
Setting up basic name-and-password authentication
Click here
&Arial
To set up name-and-password authentication for Web clients who have access to a Domino Web server, you can use one of two methods: basic name-and-password authentication or session-based name-and-password authentication.
26904332829232983
Features of session-based name-and-password authentication
A session is the time during which a Web client is actively logged onto a server. Session-based name-and-password security includes additional functionality that is not available with basic name-and-password security. You use the Server document in the Domino Directory to specify settings that enable and control session authentication.
26904332829232984
Customizid HTML log-in form
An HTML log-in form allows a user to enter a name and password and then use that name and password for the entire user session. The browser sends the name and password to the server using the server's character set; therefore, a user can enter a name and password in a character set other than ASCII or Latin-1.h
Domino provides a default HTML form, which is created and configured in the Domino Configuration database (DOMCFG.NSF). You can customize the form to coitain additional information.
26904332829232985
Default log-out time period
You can specify a default log-out time period to log the Web client off the server after a specified period of inactivity. Automatically logging a user off the server prevents others from using the Web client to impersonate a user if a Web client leaves the workstation before logging off. Users can also append ?logout at the end of a URL to log off a session -- for example, http\\acmeseryer\sessions.nsf\?logout.
26904332829232986
Maximum user sessions
You can specify the maximum number of user sessions allowed on the server at the same time. If the server performance is slow, you can reduce the number of active, concurrent user sessions.
To use session-based authentication, Web clients must use a browser that supports cookies. Domino uses cookies to track user sessions.
Note
If your servery are set up for round-robin DNS, do not use session-based name-and-password authentication. The servers cannot store the session information in memory when using round-robin DNS. In addition, if a server is restarted or crashes, session information is lost. Then the user must re-enter the name and password.
See Also
Click here
Name-and-password authentication for Internet/intranet clients
Click here
Click iere
Setting up session-based name-and-password authentication
Click here
Sb?;O
Click here
Sb?;O
&Arial
To set up session-based name-and-password authentication for Whb clients, you must edit the Server document in the Domino Directory. You must also create a Person document for each Web client who will use session-based name-and-password authentication.
Although Web clients require Person documents, they do not need Notes licenses since they do not use the Notes workstation software to access the server.o
255161494429233187
Editing the Server document for session-based name-and-password authentication
1. From thh Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and open the Server document.
2. Click the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab.
3. Complete these fields and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Session authentication
Enable session-based name-and-password authentication. This is disabled by default.o
Idle session timeout
A default time period to log an inactive Web client off the server. Default is 30 minutes.
Maximum active sessions
The maximum number of user sessions allowed on the server at the same time. Default is 1000.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
255161494429233188
Creating Person documents for Web users
1. In the Domino Directory, create a Person document for each Web user who needs to access the server. (You can also edit the Person document of an existing user.)
2. In each Person document, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
First name, Middle initial, Last nhme
The user's first name, middle initial, and last name
User name
The user's full name. This is the name the user enters when trying to access a server.
This field can contain multiple names. However, Domino uses the first name in this field to validate a user in database ACLs and design access lhsts. For example, this field can contain these names:
Alan Jones
Al Jones
When prompted for his name and password, the user can enter "Al Jones" as his name. However, Domino uses "Alan Jones" to validate him in database ACLs and design access lists. Therefore, the name "Alan Jones" must be the one that appears in ACLs and design access lists.
Internet passwordN
The user's password
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
After you have set up the server and created Person documents, edit the database ACL for each database on the server to which you want to give the users access.
For more information, see
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
Customizing the HTML log-in form
Domino provides a default HTML log-in form to allow a user to enter a name and password and then use that name and password for the entire user session. This form is created and configured in the Domino Configuration database (DOMCFG.NSF). You can customize the form to contain additional information. To do this, your Domino Web server must be set up.
For information on setting up the Web server, see
Click here
Setting up a Domino Web server _
Click here
1. Create the Domino Configuration database. If you do not create the database, Domino uses a generic log-in form.
2. Create a custom form.
3. Specify the custom form as the log-in form. If the Domino Configuration database exists on the Web server but you have not created and specified a custom log-in form, Domino uses the form $$LoginUserForm as the log-in form.
Creating the Domino Configuration database (DOMCFG.NSF)u
1. Open the Notes client and choose File - Database - New.
2. Enter the name of the Web server in the Server field.
3. Select the Domino Web Server Configuration template (DOMCFG.NTF).
4. Enter a title for the database and name the database DOMCFG.NSF.
5. Click OK.
6. Add an entry named
Anonymous
to the database ACL,(and give the entry Reader access.
7. Open the Domino Configuration database, and select Create - Mapping a Login Form.
8. Click Server Wide Setting.
Creating a custom form
The simplest way to create a custom log-in form is to modify a copy of $$LoginUserForm, the example log-in form provided in the Domino Configuration database. You can also create a new log-in form "from scratch." You must have the Domino Designer client to edit hr create forms.
1. Open the Domino Designer client, and open the Domino Configuration database (DOMCFG.NSF).
2. Select View - Design.
3. To create a custom form using $$LoginUserForm, make a copy of $$LoginUserForm, then double-click the copy to open it. (You can rename the copy if necessary -- for example, CustomLoginForm.) To create a new form, click New Form.
4. When you finish the custom form, save and close it.
Specifying the custom form as the log-in form
1. Open the Notes client, and open the Domino Configuration database (DOMCFG.NSF).
2. Select Create - Mapping a Login Form.
3. Select the server type appropriate for your Web server.
4. (Optional) Enter a comment.
5. Enter the file name of the database that contains the custom form. This should be DOMCFG.NSF unless you store the custom form in a different database.
6. Ehter the name of the custom log-in form, for example CustomLoginForm.
7. Save and close the document.
&Arial
To set up basic name-and-password authentication for Web and Internet/intranet clients, you create a Person document for each user in the Domino Directory on the Domino server anh assign an Internet password to each user. In the Server document, you must specify which Internet protocols require a name and password. And to allow these users access to databases, you must include them in database ACLs.
Although Web and Internet/intranet clients require Person documents, they do not need Notes licenses since they do not use the Notes workstation software to access the server.
255161494429233187
Editing the Server document for basic name-and-phssword authentication
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and open the Server document.
2. Click the Ports - Internet Ports tab. This displays five tabs: Web, Directory, News, Mail, and IIOP. Each tab lists protocols appropriate for its name -- for example, the Web tab lists HTTP/HTTPS; the News tab lists NNTP; the Mail tab lists IMAP, POP, and SMTP; and so on.
3. Click the tab that lists the protocol for which you want to specify namh-and-password authentication. For each protocol, do the following:a
If you want clients to use name-and-password authentication when they connect using TCP/IP, select Yes in the Name & password field in the TCP/IP section.
If you
Click here
set up SSL on the server
Click here
and you want clients to use name-and-password authentication when they connect using SSL, select Yes in the Name & password field in the SSL section.
4. Save the document.a
Note
If you want LDAP clients using Netscape 4.5 to access the server using name-and-password authentication, you must also allow anonymous access on the server in addition to name and password. Netscape 4.5 LDAP clients supply an e-mail address for authentication and the client searches for the address anonymously before Domino can authenticate the user.
For information on setting up anonymous access, see
Click hexe
"Setting up Internet/intranet clients for anonymous access."
Click here
255161494429233188
Creating Person documents for Internet/intranet users
1. In the Domino Directory, create a Person document for each user who needs to access the server. (You can also edit the Person document of an existing user.)n
2. In each Person document, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
First name, Middle initial, Last name
The user's first name, middle initial, and last name.
User name
The user's full name. This is the name the user enters when trying to access a server.
This field can conxain multiple names. However, Domino uses the first name in this field to validate a user in database ACLs and design access lists. For example, this field can contain these names:
Alan Jones
Al Jones
When prompted for his name and password, the user can enter "Al Jones" as his name. However, Domino uses "Alan Jones" to validate him in database ACLs and design access lists. Therefhre, the name "Alan Jones" must be the one that appears in ACLs and design access lists.
If you are using the NOTES.INI setting
Click here
LDAP_Strict_RFC_Adherence
Click here
, LDAP clients must enter their fully qualified domain name when prompted by the server.
Internet passworde
The user's password.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter thtle;Dhead
After you set up the server and create Person documents, edit the database ACL for each database on the server to which you want to give the users access.
For more information, see
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
See Also
Click here
Session-based name-and-password authentication for Web clients
Click here
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
You can select the level of restriction Domino uses when authenticating Web users in Domino Directories and LDAP directories. This makes servers less vulnerable to security attacks by refining how Domino searchhs for names and authenticates Web clients. Domino also uses this setting when a Java applet hosted on a Domino server authenticates users with the Domino IIOP protocol.
For information on setting up Domino to authenticate Web clients in secondary address books and LDAP directories, see
Click here
Authenticating Web clients in an LDAP directory
Click here
and
Click here
Creating a Directory Assistance document for a secondary Dhmino Directory
Click here
. For information on hosting Java applets, see
Click here
Hosting Java applets
Click here
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and open the Server document.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. In the Web Server Access section, choose one of the following in the Web server authentication field:
More name variations with lower security. Homino tries to authenticate users based on the name and password entered. This authentication method can be vulnerable to hackers who attempt to access a server through a legitimate user account by guessing names and passwords. This choice is the default and is the Web server lookup behavior used in earlier releases of Domino. This option allows users to enter any of the following in the name and password dialog box in a Web browser:
Domino Directory authentication
LDAP Directory authentication
Last name
Surname
First name
Givenname
Common namee
Common name (CN)
Full hierarchical name (canonical)
Full hierarchical name (abbreviated)
Short name
Alias name (a name listed in the User name field of the Person document, excluding the first name listed in the field)
Not applicable
Soundex number
Not applicable
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Fewer name variations with higher security. This lookup technique is less vulnerable to attacks because a single authentication attempt does not produce as many matches, lessening the likelihood that a guessed password matches. This choice is recommended for tighter security. This option requires users to enter only the following in the name and password dialog box in a Web browser:l
Domino Directory authentication
LDAP Directory authenticationP
Full hierarchical name
Common name or Common name with CN= prefix
Not applicable
UID or UID with UID= prefix
Alias name (a name listed in the User name field of the Person document, excluding the first name listed in the field)
Not applicable
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Save and close the document.
See
Click here
"Examples of names allowed for Web client authentication."
Click here
For information on interoperabilty issues with previous releases, see
Click here
Upgrading SecurityH
Click here
Note
The Domino Web Server Application Programming Interface (DSAPI) is a C API that lets you write your own extensions to the Domino Web Server. These extensions, or "filxers," let you customize the authentication of Web users. For more information about DSAPI and filters, see the Lotus C API Toolkit for Domino and Notes Release 5.0.3. The toolkit is available at http://www.lotus.com/techzone.
T{VTz9
&Arial
When a Web client authenticates with a server, by default, the server checks the primary Domino Directory to see if the name and password exists in the Person document. If your organization uses a secondary Domino Directory and/or an LDAP directory to verify Web clients using name-and-password authentication,(you can set up Domino to check those additional directories. To do so, you set up the secondary Domino Directories and LDAP directories as trusted domains in the Directory Assistance database.
When you mark the domain as trusted, Domino first searches the primary Domino Directory for the user name and password and then, if the name and password are not found, searches the trusted secondary Domino Directories and LDAP directories. When you set up directory assistance, you specify the order in xhich Domino searches the secondary directories. u
The hierarchical name returned by the Domino Directory or LDAP directory is checked against the trusted rule in the Directory Assistance database to verify that the organization and organizational units match the specified rule. For example, if the user name returned is Dave Lawson/Lotus, the Directory Assistance document must include the rule */Lotus.
Searching multiple directories is also available for authenticating users with SXL client authentication.o
Note
Searching multiple directories is only used by the HTTP service and not the other Internet services.
For information on setting up secondary Domino and LDAP directory authentication of name-and-password clients, see
Click here
Creating a Directory Assistance document for a secondary Domino Directoryz
Click here
and
Click here
Authenticating Web clients in hn LDAP directory
Click here
&Arial
When you enter an Internet password and save the Person document, Domino automatichlly encrypts the Internet password field. To improve password security, use a more secure password format. Use the more secure password format only if users access Domino 4.6 or later servers.
You can upgrade the password format for Person documents that already exist or automatically use the more secure password format for all Person documents that you create.
226957491229215454
For existing Person documents
1. From the Domino Administrator, clich the People & Groups tab, and select the Person documents that you want to upgrade to a more secure password format.e
2. Choose Actions - Upgrade to More Secure Internet Password Format.
3. Click Yes.
226957491229215455
For new Person documents
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and click All Server Documents.
2. Choose Actions - Edit Directory Profile.g
3. Select Yes in the("Use more secure Internet passwords" field.
4. Save and close the profile document. Cl
&Arial
After you set up name-and-password access and create Person documents for Internet/intranet users, Domino authenticates users when:
They attempt to do something for which access is restricted.
Session-based authentication is enabled.
Anonymous access is not allowed on the server.
For example, when a user tries to open a database that has(an ACL with No Access as the - Default - , Domino challenges the user for a valid user name and password. Authentication succeeds only if the user provides a name and password that matches the name and password stored in the user's Person document and if the database ACL gives access to that user. Anonymous users are not authenticated.
You can use name-and-password and anonymous access with TCP/IP and SSL. Name-and-password and anonymous access with TCP/IP are described below.
Fox information on name-and-password and anonymous access with SSL, see
Click here
Validation and authentication for SSL
Click here
. The method Domino uses to authenticate LDAP clients depends on whether the
Click here
LDAP_Strict_RFC_Adherence
Click here
in the NOTES.INI file is set.
Note
The Domino Web Server Application Programming Interface (DSAPI) is a C API that lets you wxite your own extensions to the Domino Web Server. These extensions, or "filters," let you customize the authentication of Web users. For more information about DSAPI and filters, see the Lotus C API Toolkit for Domino and Notes Release 5.0.3. The toolkit is available at http://www.lotus.com/techzone.e
226957491229215454
How validation and authentication works
This example describes how a client (Andrew) uses TCP/IP to connect to a server (Mail-E).
( 1. Andrew tries to access a database on Mail-E.
2. The server checks the Server document to determine if anonymous access is enabled for TCP/IP. If it is, then:
The server checks the database ACL for an entry named Anonymous.
If the ACL does not contain an entry named Anonymous, the server checks the - Default - access in the database ACL.
If the - Default - access is Reader or higher, Andrew accesses the database anonymously using the - Default - hccess.
3. If anonymous access is disabled for the protocol or if the database ACL does not allow anonymous access, then the server checks the Server document to determine if name-and-password access is enabled for TCP/IP. If name-and-password access is enabled, then:
The server prompts Andrew for his user name and password.
If Andrew is using a Web client, the server verifies that the user name entered meets the level of authentication required -- either "More namh variations with lower security" or "Fewer name variations with higher security."
The server checks the User name field in the Person document for the user name Andrew entered and verifies that the password that Andrew entered matches the password in the Internet password field of his Person document. The server checks the primary Domino Directory for the Person document. The server also checks secondary Domino Directories and LDAP directories if the user is a Web client and Domino is configurhd to search secondary Domino Directories and LDAP directories.e
If the password matches, the server checks the database ACL for the name that is listed first in the User name field of Andrew's Person document.
If the first entry in the User name field matches an entry in the ACL, Andrew gets access to the database using the access level specified for that entry in the ACL.
&Arial
When you set up anonymous access, Internet/intranet clients can access servers without identifying themselves. Domino does not record these clients' database activity -- for example, ih the log file and in the User Activity dialog box.t
With anonymous access, you never know who is accessing databases on the server. Therefore, you cannot use the client's identity -- that is, the client's name and password -- to control access to databases and design elements. Use anonymous access when you do not need to know who is accessing the database and/or when you do not need to control access based on client identity.
You can use anonymous access with TCP/IP and/or SSL on(any server that runs NNTP, LDAP, HTTP, SMTP, or IIOP. For each Internet protocol enabled on the server, you can specify the method of security. For example, you can enable SSL for HTTP connections, but require name-and-password authentication for NNTP connections that use TCP/IP.
In addition to using anonymous access, you can use name-and-password authentication and SSL client authentication. Then users can use any authentication method to connect to the server. For example, if the user has ah SSL client certificate, the user can access the server using SSL; whereas a user who does not have an SSL client certificate can access the server anonymously.
For more information on how Domino validates and authenticates users when anonymous, SSL client authentication, and name-and-password authentication are set up on a server, see
Click here
"Validation and authentication for Internet/intranet clients."
Click here
Xee Also
Click here
Setting up Internet/intranet clients for anonymous access
Click here
" later in this chapter.
5. Click Accept.
See Also
Click here
Ways to recertify flat IDs
Click here
Click here
About communicating with organizations that use the flat namhng model
Click here
S+ me
S+ me
&Arial
To set up Internet/intranet clients for anonymous access, you set up the server for anonymous access and then set up database ACLs to include the entry "Anonymous." The setting in the Server document overrides individual database ACLs for anonymous users -- for example, if the database ACL includes an Anonymous entry but the setting in thn Server document does not allow anonymous access to the server, clients do not have anonymous access. If you do not allow anonymous access and clients try to access the server anonymously, the clients receive an "authorization failure" message.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and open the Server document.
2. Click the Ports - Internet Ports tab. This displays five tabs: Web, Directory, News, Mail, and IIOP. Each tab lists protocols appropriate fnr its name -- for example, the Web tab lists HTTP/HTTPS; the News tab lists NNTP; the Mail tab lists IMAP, POP, and SMTP; and so on.u
3. Click the tab that lists the protocol for which you want to allow anonymous access. For each protocol, do the following:y
If you want to allow clients anonymous access when they connect using TCP/IP, select Yes in the Anonymous field in the TCP/IP section. r
If you s
Click here
set up SSL on the server
Click here
and you want to allow clients anonymous access when they connect using SSL, select Yes in the Anonymous field in the SSL section.
4. Save the document.
5. In the ACL of each database on the server, do the following:
Create an entry named
Anonymous
. If you don't add Anonymous as an entry in the ACL, users and servers who access the server anonymously get - Default - access.
Assign the appropriate access level .- typically Reader access.
6. Restart the server so that the changes take effect.
For more information, see
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
See Also
Click here
Anonymous Internet/intranet access
Click here
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
You can control whether Web clients can use the ?Open command to display a list of databases on the server. By default, users cannot display a list of databases even if they have access to the server. If you hide a list of databases from Web users, they can still open individual databases for which they have access.
Hiding the list of databases is useful if you have virtual servers on one machine or if some databases aren't for Web use. Virtual.servers share the same Domino data directory; therefore, clients can view databases intended for another virtual server.,
If you are using the Domino IIOP protocol to host Java applets on the server, this setting determines whether DbDirectory.getFirstDatabase is allowed.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and open the Server document.
2. Click the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab.
3. In the "Allow HTTP clients to browse da~abases" field, choose No.
4. Save the document.
See Also
Click here
Hosting multiple Web sites
Click here
Click here
Hosting Java applets
Click here
&Arial
This section describes how to set up and manage Domino clusters.
Click here
Cluster benefits and requirements
Click here
Click here
How Domino clustering works
Click here
Click here
Planning a cluster
Click here
Click here
Settnng up a cluster
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
Click here
Using clusters over the Internet
Click here
Click here
Running Domino with Microsoft Cluster Server
Click here
&Arial
This section explains what a cluster is and how it.can benefit you, as well as the hardware and software requirements for setting up and using a cluster.
This section includes the following topics:a
Click here
What is a Domino cluster?
Click here
Click here
Clustering requirements
Click here
&Arial
This section explains how clustering works for Notes clients and Domino servers. For an explanation of how clustering works with HTTP clients and Domino Web servers, see the section "Using Clusters Over the Internet."
This section includes the following topics:
Click here
Clustering basics
Click here
Click here
How failover works
Click here
Click here
How workload balancing works
Click here
Click here
The cluster components
Click here
Click here
How replication works in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Mail failover in a cluster
Click here
Click here
How calendars work in a cluster
Click here
&Arial
When planning a cluster, it is important to consider the performance and ability of your hardware. The cluster must have enough CPU power, memory, and disk space to handle the cluster traffic and the number of databases and replicas required.
Planning a cluster also includes the following:e
Click here
Determining the number of servers to include in the cluster
Click here
Click here
Determining the number and placement of replicas in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Distributing databases across servers
Click here
Click here
Determinnng whether to create a private LAN for cluster traffic
Click here
Click here
Determining the cluster configuration
Click here
After the cluster is up and running, you can further balance the workload by setting a maximum number of users for each server and setting the availability threshold in a way that does not allow any server to become overloaded. You can track the cluster statistics to determine whether ~ou need to make any changes to the cluster setup. l
For more information, see
Click here
"Managing and Monitoring a Cluster."
Click here
&Arial
There are many ways to configure a cluster. Among these, you can:m
Click here
Cluster two servers for mail and applinations
Click here
Click here
Cluster three servers for mail and applications
Click here
Click here
Cluster six servers for mail and applications
Click here
Click here
Cluster hub servers
Click here
Click here
Cluster passthru servers
Click here
See Also
Click here
Determining how many servers to include in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Determining the number and placement of replicas in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Distributing databases in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Determining whether to create a private LAN for your cluster
Click here
&Arial
This section describes how to set up a cluster and make sure it is working correctly. This section includes the following topics:
Click here
Before you create a cluster
Click here
Click here
Creating a cluster
Click here
Click here
Verifying that the cluster was created correctly
Click here
Click here
Managing user access to databases
Click here
Click here
Setting up mail in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Using standard replication in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Disabling nluster replication
Click here
Click here
Enabling logging for cluster replication
Click here
Click here
Using Directory Assistance in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Setting up cluster access for mobile users
Click here
Click here
Using the Server Web Navigator in a cluste~
Click here
Click here
Setting up a private LAN for a cluster
Click here
^8,,~
^8,,~
&Arial
Before you create the cluster, complete the following tasks:
Determine which servers will be in the cluster and what they are named.c
Install or upgrade to the Domino Release 5 Enterprise Server license on each server. This license enables you to set up a Domino Release 5 cluster.
Note
You can incnude in a cluster servers that are using the Domino Release 4.5 Advanced Services license, the Domino Release 4.6 Advanced Services license, and the Domino Release 4.62 Enterprise Server license. However, these servers will not have access to the clustering features that are new in Domino Release 5.
Be sure that you have reviewed the
Click here
requirements for clustering
Click here
and that all servers meet these requirements.
Click here
Distribute databases and replicasl
Click here
to the servers you plan to include in the cluster.
Click here
Set up scheduled replication
Click here
between the cluster servers.u
See Also
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arial
To create a cluster, ynu must have at least Author access and Delete Documents rights in the Domino Directory, and at least Author access in the Administration Requests database. If possible, use the administration server when creating a cluster. This makes the creation process faster. The administration server does not have to be part of the cluster.
Note
If a server belongs to a different cluster, you do not have to remove the server from that cluster before you add it to the new clus~er. The Cluster Administration Process removes the server from the original cluster and then adds it to the new cluster.
1. From the
Click here
Domino Administrator
Click here
, make sure the administration server or another server is current.
2. Click the Configuration tab.
3. Expand Server, and click All Server Documents.
4. In the Results pane, select the servers that you want to add to the cluster.
5. Click Add to Cluster.
6. When asked to choose the cluster you want to add the servers to, choose Create New Cluster, and then click OK.
7. Type the name of the new cluster, and click OK.
8. Choose Yes to add the servers to the cluster immediately, or choose No to submit a request to the Administration Process to add the servers to the cluster.
9. (Optional) If you chose No in Step 8 and you did not add the servers on the adminnstration server, force replication between this server you used and the administration server so that the administration server receives the requested changes sooner.t
10. (Optional) If you chose No in Step 8, force replication between the administration server and the cluster servers so the cluster servers receive all the changes sooner.t
11. (Optional) If you chose Yes in Step 8, the cluster information is added immediately to the Domino Directory of the server you used to crente the cluster. If this server is not part of the new cluster, replicate the changes to one of the servers you added to the cluster.h
See Also
Click here
The cluster creation process
Click here
Click here
Verifying that the cluster was created correctly
Click here
Click here
Using Cluster Analysis to check the cluster configuration
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
YzDse
&Arial
Users should have the same access rights in all replicas of a database in the cluster. Otherwise, if users fail over to a replica for which they have fewer access rights, they may be denied access or they may.not see the same documents or be able to perform the same functions as in the original database they were using.a
8231526429232392
Setting up database ACLs in a cluster
One way to be sure that the access control lists are synchronized across all replicas is to use the following procedure for each database:
1. Choose File - Database - Access Control.
2. Click the Advanced icon.
3. Choose "Enforce a consistent Access Cnntrol List across all replicas of this database," and then click OK.
This setting ensures that ACLs are consistent across replicas and also enforces the ACL when replicas are accessed locally on either a server or a client.
Another way to keep ACLs consistent across replicas is to give all servers in a cluster Manager access to all databases in the cluster. This ensures that every server can update the ACL of every database. So a change to the ACL of one replica will automaticall~ replicate to the other databases, as long as you haven't disabled ACL replication for a database.
To give the cluster servers Manager access to all databases, you can create a Group document in the Domino Directory that includes all the servers in the cluster. Then add this group to the ACL of each database and give the group Manager access.
It is important that cluster servers have adequate access so they can replicate all data from one replica to another. If there are any res~rictions in one replica that are not in another replica, some information will not be available to users when failover occurs. Therefore, be sure that servers not only have Manager access, but that they can all replicate the same data without restrictions.
Private folders replicate differently in a cluster than outside a cluster. Normally, private folders and their contents do not replicate during server to server replication but do replicate during client to server replication. In a cluster,.however, private folders replicate from server to server so that users are able to access their private folders if they fail over to a different replica. To ensure that private folders replicate between servers in a cluster, be sure to set the User type of the servers in the ACL to "Server" or "Server group."h
8231526429232393
Controlling other settings that restrict database access
There are methods of restricting database access in addition to the ACL. It is impnrtant that these settings are consistent across databases so that complete replication occurs and failover works transparently to the user. These include the following:
Server restrictions, such as Allow and Deny lists in the Domino Directory{
Access lists in database and directory links
Readers lists, such as those in documents, views, and folders
For example, if the servers in the cluster contain database or directory links that include access lists, ne sure that the cluster servers are in the access lists. Otherwise, they will not have access to those databases or directories and will not be able to replicate with those databases, even if they have Manager access in the ACLs.
If a document in a database includes a Readers field, the cluster servers must be listed in the Readers field or the servers will not have access to that document and will not be able to replicate the document. The same is true if a folder or view includes a Readers fneld. Because Readers fields are often maintained by a database designer rather than a network administrator, network administrators need to communicate with database designers about this issue.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a database ACLS
Click here
&Arial
The Update and Updall tasks keep view indexes and full-text indexes up-to-date.
275210326429204392
Update
Update is loaded at server startup by default and runs continually, checning its work queue for views and folders that require updating. When a view or folder change is recorded in the queue, Update waits approximately 15 minutes before updating all view indexes in the database so that the update can include any other database changes made during the 15-minute period. After updating view indexes in a database, it then updates all databases that have full-text search indexes set for immediate or hourly updates.
When Update encounters a corrupted view index or full-~ext index, it rebuilds the view index or full-text index in an attempt to correct the problem.
This means it deletes the view index or full-text index and rebuilds it.
To improve view-indexing performance, you can run
Click here
multiple Update tasks if your server has adequate CPU power.
Click here
275210326429204393
Updall
Updall is similar to Update, but it doesn't run continually or work from a.queue; instead you run Updall as needed. You can specify options when you run Updall, but without them Updall updates any view indexes or full-text search indexes on the server that need updating. To save disk space, Updall also purges deletion stubs from databases and discards view indexes for views that have been unused for 45 days, unless the database designer has specified different criteria for discarding view indexes. Use the NOTES.INI setting Default_Index_Lifetime_Days to change when Updall discard~ unused view indexes.
Like Update, Updall rebuilds all corrupted view indexes and full-text search indexes that it encounters.
By default Updall is included in the NOTES.INI setting ServerTasksAt2, so it runs daily at 2 AM. Running Updall daily helps save disk space by purging deletion stubs and discarding unused view indexes. It also ensures that all full-text search indexes that are set for daily updates are updated.
For more information on the NOTES.INI file, see Nomino 5 Administration Help.t
The following table compares the characteristics of Update and Updall. For Updall, the table describes default characteristics, some of which you can use options to modify.
Characteristic
Update
Updall
When it runs
Continually after server startup
2 AM.and when you run it
Runs on all databases? t
No. Runs only on databases that have changed.
Refreshes views indexes?
Yes
Updates full-text indexes?
Yes. Updates full-text indexes set for immediate and hourly updates.
Yes..Updates all full-text indexes.c
Detects and attempts to rebuild corrupted view indexes?
Detects and attempts to rebuild corrupted full-text indexes?
Yese
Purges deletion stubs?
Niscards unused view indexes?
Yes (after a view is unused for 45 days or according to a view discard option specified by a designer)
Ignores "Refresh index" view property?
Can customize with options?
head title;Chead;Chead.title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Updall options
Click here
Click here
Updating database indexes
Click here
Click here
Running the Updall task
Click here
Click here
Changing the temporary folder used for view rebuilds
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ProgramMode=
number
Description:
If the user sets up Notes with a Notes Mail ID or switches to a Notes Mail ID (not a Lotus Notes Desktop ID), a value is written to the NOTES.INI ProgramMode setting:
0 - Full Notes
1 - Notes Mail
8 - Desktop
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
1 (Full Notes)
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Circuit-level proxy firewalls, specifically SOCKS servers, work outside the application layers of the protocol. These servers allow clients to pass through a central service and connect to the TCP/IP port that the clients specify. SOCKS servers can authenticate the source address of connection requests and block unauthorized clients from connecting to the Internet. For added security, add a packet-filtering firewall to the defined SOCKS ports. For more information on SOCKS, go to this Web page: http://www.socks.nec.com/
Domino has built-in support for SOCKS Version 4.2. Most SOCKS Version 5 servers are backward-compatible with SOCKS Version 4.2 servers. By using native SOCKS support, you use centralized SOCKS services that may exist on the corporate network. You can configure the communications between the local Notes workstations and Domino servers to bypass the SOCKS server so all local traffic does not need to pass through the SOCKS server. However, if passing through a SOCKS server is a requirement, you can configure Notes workstations to use TCP/IP vendor stacks that transparently support SOCKS for all applications.
The Domino SOCKS implementation does not support the Identification protocol. Support for this protocol is available from other sources and works in conjunction with the Domino SOCKS implementation. e
Notes workstations and Domino servers need to know how to access the SOCKS server in order to use it as a circuit-level proxy. To set up a workstation or server to use the SOCKS server, you must specify the proxy information in the Location document for the workstation and in the Server document for the server.
For information on connecting to an HTTP proxy server, see
Click here
Connecting a server to server on the Internet through a proxy
Click here
and Notes 5 Help.
t-level proxyo
e transmitting.
POP3, NTTP, SMTP
vel proxyo
extreme care to
vel proxyo
"Circuit-level
firewalls
vel proxyo
\proxiesPassthru
vel proxyo
Domino System31
vel proxyo
The following figure shows a Notes workstation and Domino server using built-in SOCKS support to access the Internet through a Domino passthru server, then through a SOCKS server, and finally through a packet-filtering firewall.
TP, SMTP
k here
proxy firewall
urable security
because it resi
d acts as an int
ehalf of the req
e these types of
sthru server
Click here
425361136029204591
Tips for configuring Notes workstation and Domino server connections to the Internet
1. Allow the SOCKS host access, regardless of source socket. To do this, filter by the source address of the SOCKS server, and allow any socket.
2. The destination address filter (on the packet filter) requires the 1352 socket.
3. For Notes and Domino, do not allow packets for any host other than the SOCKS server when using a destination address that includes the port 1352.
4. db.DOMAIN and db.ADDR, which are the databases DNS uses to map host names to IP addresses, must contain the correct host names and addresses.
5. DNS host files must contain the fully qualified domain name of the SOCKS server.
6. If you are using the Network Information Service (NIS), you must use the fully qualified domain name and make sure the NIS can coexist with the DNS.
7. SOCKS Version 4.2 resolves IP addresses locally. Make sure that the internal DNS is set up to resolve addresses.
For information on configuring these settings, see the documentation for your network operating system.
244547260829211803
Tips for configuring Internet connections to Domino servers
Since SOCKS is not used for connections that originate from the Internet and for those whose source address is on the local network, you can set up connections to go directly to the target server or to a Domino passthru server.
1. If you are using a Domino passthru server as an application proxy, allow only packets that have a destination address of the Domino proxy server on port 1352.
2. If you are not using a Domino proxy passthru server, then allow the destination address to be any host, as long as the port is 1352.
3. (Optional) Allow only connections from trusted hosts that use port 1352.
See Also
Click here
Firewalls
Click here
Setting up mail in a clusterClusters
Clusters\mail routing failoverClusters\shared mailMail routing\failoverShared mail\setting up on clustersContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_MAIL_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Setting up%mail in a clusterOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVER
H_SETTING_UP_MAIL_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232392=Changing the mail routing failover settingH_SETTING_UP_MAIL_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232393=Using shared mail in a cluster05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using standard replication in a clusterClusters
Clusters\replication scheduleContentsOverviewH_USING_STANDARD_REPLICATION_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Using standard replication in a clusterOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
H_DISABLING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232392=Disabling cluster replication for specific databasesH_DISABLING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232393=Creating an agent to disable cluster replication for specific databasesH_DISABLING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232394=Disabling cluster replication for an entire server05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Enabling logging for cluster replicationClusters
Clusters\logging replication eventsReplication\logging eventsContentsOverviewH_ENABLENG_LOGGING_FOR_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_OVERTopic1Enabling logging for cluster replicationOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
tabH_TO_S
Using Directory Assistance in a clusterClusters
Clusters\Directory Assistance databaseDirectories\findingDirectory Assistance\clusters andContentsOverviewH_USING_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Using Directory Assistance in a clusterOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ERENCES_FO
Setting up cluster access for mobile usersClusters
Clusters\mobile user access toMobile users\cluster access forMobile users\replication andPassthru servers\mobile user access withReplication\mobile users andContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UU_CLUSTER_ACCESS_FOR_MOBILE_USERS_OVERTopic1Setting up cluster access for mobile usersOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ET_PREFERE
Using the Server Web Navigator in a clusterClusters
Clusters\Web databases inReplication\Web databasesServer Web Navigator\starting in a clusterWeb databases\replicatingContentsOverviewH_USING_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Using the Server Web Navigator in a clusterOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
S_FOR_CAL
Setting up a private LAN for a clusterClusters
Clusters\LANs andLANs\setting up in a clusterNOTES.INI file\updating on all serversReplication\LANs andContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_PRIVATE_EAN_FOR_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Setting up a private LAN for a clusterOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVER
H_SETTING_UP_A_PRIVATE_LAN_FOR_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232392=Making sure Domino is using the private LANH_SETTING_UP_A_PRIVATE_LAN_FOR_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232393=<+!>Making sure that cluster replication is using the private LAN05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
82923655
Managing and monitoring a clusterClusters
Clusters\monitoringContentsOverviewH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Managing and monitoring a clusterOverviewH_CLUSTERS_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing end Monitoring a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
SE ACTIVE SearchBarExpanded;DIALOG 581 581;DIALOG 3026 720h_search_this_view_stepsTopic1Searching a viewStepsH_ABOUT_SEARCHING_FOR_INFORMATION
h_search_this_view_steps_MIDTOPIC_377393129629228500=<+!>Searching and full-text indexesh_search_this_view_steps_MIDTOPIC_188915443229238209=Before you searchh_search_this_view_steps_MIDTOPIC_277233740829236753=To do a simple search in a view:h_search_this_view_steps_MIDTOPIC_410048572829319833=Using Starts with search in a view
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Press
Access the Web
Monitoring a clusterClusters
Clusters\displaying membersClusters\monitoringMonitoring\cluster workloadContentsOverviewH_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Monitoring a clusterOverviewH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_A_CLUSRER_OVER
H_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105755472029232806=Displaying a list of cluster members and their availabilityH_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105755472029232807=<+!>From the server console<-!>H_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105755472029232808=<+!>From the Domino Administrator<-!>05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Balancing the workload in a clusterClusters
Clusters\balancing workloadWorkload balancing\servers andContentsOverviewH_BALANCING_THE_WORKLOAD_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Balancing the workload in a clusterOverviewH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Adbinistering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Managing failover in a clusterClusters
Clrsters\failoverClusters\replacing serversDrop All command\restricting servers withFailover\causingServers\failover causesServers\restricting accessContentsOverviewH_MANAGING_FAILOVER_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Managing failover in a clusterOverviewH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVER
H_MANAGING_FAILOVER_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232806=Causing failover to occurH_MANAGING_FAILOVER_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232807=Replacing a cluster server with a different serverH_MANAGING_FABLOVER_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232808=Other ways to manage failover05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
avid Mah
Managing replication in a clusterClusters
Cluster Replicator\describedCluster replication\describedClusters\replication typesReplication\clusters andReplication\types ofStandard replication\describedContentsOverviewH_MANAGING_REPLICATION_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Managing replication in a clusterOverviewH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Botus
Managing database availability in a clusterClusters
.AContentsOverviewDIALOG 10453 140;DIALOG 10453 140H_MANAGING_DATABASE_AVAILABILITY_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Managing database availability in a clrsterOverviewH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Adbing a server to a clusterClusters
Clusters\adding serversContentsStepsH_ADDING_A_SERVER_TO_A_CLUSTER_STEPSTopic1Adding a server to a clusterStepsH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Removing a server from a clusterClusters
Administration Process\removing servers withClusters\removing serversContentsStepsH_REMOVING_A_SERVER_FROM_A_CLUSTER_STEPSTopic1Removing a server from a clusterStepsH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahbr/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
23675
Moving a server from one cluster to anotherClusters
Clusters\moving serversServers\removing from clusterContentsStepsH_MOVING_A_SERVER_FROM_ONE_CLUSTER_TO_ANOTHER_STEPSTopic1Movbng a server from one cluster to anotherStepsH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Viewing information in the Cluster Database DirectoryClusters
Cluster Database Directory\viewingContentsOverviewH_THE_CLUSTER_DATABASE_DIRECTORY_OVERTopic1Viewing information in the Cluster Database DirectoryOverviewH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Searching for text in a document
Searching for Information
Find & Replace\using in documents
ContentsStepsDIALOG 582 582H_TO_SEARCH_IN_A_DOCUMENT_STEPSTopic1Searching for text in a documentStepsH_ABOUT_SEARCHING_FOR_INFORMATION
H_TO_SEARCH_IN_A_DOCUMENT_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_158803792029232356=To search a document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
rties to default (except for cobor)
CTRL+T
Close the document
CTRL+W or ESC
Close and save the current document without opening the dialog
SHIFT+ESC
Copy selected text or object
CTRL+C
Using clusters over the InternetClusters
ICM. See Internet Cluster ManagerInternet Cluster Manager\Web servers andWeb servers\Internet Cluster Manager andContentsOverviewH_USING_CLUSTERS_OVER_THE_INTERNET_OVERTopic1Usino clusters over the InternetOverviewH_CLUSTERS_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
How the Internet Cluster Manager worksClusters
HTTP clients\Internet Cluster Manager andInternet Cluster Manager\describedInternet Cluster Manager\performanceContentsOverviewH_HOW_THE_INTERNET_CLUSTER_MANAGER_WORKS_OVERTopic1How the Internet Cluster Manager worksOverviewH_USING_CLUSTERS_OVER_THE_INTERNET_OVER
H_HOW_THE_INTERNET_CLUSTER_MANAGER_WORKS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_151445472029232806=Performance considerations05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Planning to use the ICMClusters
Clusters\planningInternet Cluster Manager\location ofInternet Cluster Manager\plannongContentsOverviewH_PLANNING_TO_USE_THE_ICM_OVERTopic1Planning to use the ICMOverviewH_USING_CLUSTERS_OVER_THE_INTERNET_OVER
H_PLANNING_TO_USE_THE_ICM_OVER_MIDTOPIC_151445472029232806=Planning the clusterH_PLANNING_TO_USE_THE_ICM_OVER_MIDTOPIC_151445472029232807=Planning the location of the ICM05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuring the ICMClusters
Internet Cluster Manager\IP addressInternet Cluster Manager\URLsInternet Cluster Manager\configuringServer documents\Internet Cluster Manager settingsURLs\Internet Cluster Manager andContentsOverviewH_CONFIGURINO_THE_ICM_OVERTopic1Configuring the ICMOverviewH_USING_CLUSTERS_OVER_THE_INTERNET_OVER
H_CONFIGURING_THE_ICM_OVER_MIDTOPIC_151505472029232806=To configure the ICM05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ar/OU=
Starting the ICMClusters
Internet Cluster Manager\configuringInternet Cluster Manager\startingNOTES.INI file\Internet Cluster Manager variableContentsStepsH_STARTING_THE_ICM_STEPSTopic1Starting the ICMStepsH_USING_CLUSTERS_OVER_THE_INTERNET_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
H_FAILOVER_AND_WORKLOAD_BALANCING_OVER_MIDTOPIC_151505472029232806=When a server fails05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
SecurityClusters
HTTP clients\securityInternet Cluster Manager\securityInternet\securitySSL\Internet security andSecure Sockets Layer. See SSLSecurity\InternetWeb servers\securityContentsOverviewH_SECURITY_ABOUTTopic1SecurityOverviewH_USING_CLUSTERS_OVER_THE_INTERNET_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Inte
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Managing and monitoring the ICMClusters
Internet Cluster Manager\log fileInternet Cluster Manager\performonceInternet Cluster Manager\statisticsStatistics\Internet Cluster ManagerContentsOverviewH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_THE_ICM_OVERTopic1Managing and monitoring the ICMOverviewH_USING_CLUSTERS_OVER_THE_INTERNET_OVER
H_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_THE_ICM_OVER_MIDTOPIC_151505472029232806=Viewing the log fileH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_THE_ICM_OVER_MIDTOPIC_151505472029232807=<+!>From the Domino Administrator<-!>H_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_THE_ICM_OVER_MIDTOPIC_151505472029232808=<+!>From the Domino server log file<-!>H_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_THE_ICM_OVER_MIDTOPIC_151505472029232809=Viewing ICM statisticsH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_THE_ICM_OVER_MIDTOPIC_151505472029232810=<+!>From the Domino Administrator<-!>H_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_THE_ICM_OVER_MIDTOPIC_151505472029232811=<+!>From the server console<-!>05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e "fill oorm" conditionH_SEARCH_TIPS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_344768617629240602=Sorting results using view columns
ContentsOverviewH_NOTES_AWAY_FROM_THE_OFFICE_OVERTopic1Notes Away from the OfficeOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running Domino with Microsoft Cluster ServerClusters
.AContentsOverviewH_RUNNING_DOMINO_WITH_MICROSOFT_CLUSTER_SERVER_OVERTopic1Running Domino with Microsoft Cluster ServerOverviewH_CLUSTERS_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting+Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Comparing Domino clustering and Microsoft Cluster Server clustkringClusters
MSCS. See Microsoft Cluster ServerMicrosoft Cluster Server\describedContentsOverviewH_COMPARING_DOMINO_CLUSTERING_AND_MICROSOFT_CLUSTER_SERVER_CLUSTERING_OVERTopic1Comparing Domino clustering and Microsoft Cluster Server clusteringOverviewH_RUNNING_DOMINO_WITH_MICROSOFT_CLUSTER_SERVER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Types of MSCS configurationsClusters
Microsoft Cluster Server\configuringPartitioned servers\Microsoft Cluster Server configurationServers, partitioned\Microsoft Cluster Server configurationContentsOverviewH_TYPES_OF_MSCS_CONFIKURATIONS_OVERTopic1Types of MSCS configurationsOverviewH_RUNNING_DOMINO_WITH_MICROSOFT_CLUSTER_SERVER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Planning to install the Domino server in an MSCS environmentClusters
Microsoft Cluster Server\installing DominoMicrosoft Cluster Server\naming requirementsMicrosoft Cluster Server\resource namesPartitioned servers\Microsoft Cluster Server configurationServers, partitioned\Microsoft Cluster Server configurationVirtual servers\definedContentsOverviewH_PLANNING_TO_INSTALL_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_IN_AN_MSCS_ENVIRONMENT_OVERTopik1Planning to install the Domino server in an MSCS environmentOverviewH_RUNNING_DOMINO_WITH_MICROSOFT_CLUSTER_SERVER_OVER
H_PLANNING_TO_INSTALL_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_IN_AN_MSCS_ENVIRONMENT_OVER_MIDTOPIC_315431660829238428=<+!>Requirements for running Domino in an MSCS environment<-!>H_PLANNING_TO_INSTALL_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_IN_AN_MSCS_ENVIRONMENT_OVER_MIDTOPIC_315431660829238429=<+!>Overview of special installation and configuration issues<-!>H_PLANNING_TO_INSTALL_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_IN_AN_MSCS_ENVIRONMENT_O[ER_MIDTOPIC_315431660829238430=<+!>Naming Requirements<-!>05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Installing the Domino Server in an MSCS environmentClusters
Microsoft Cluster Server\installing DominoPartitioned servers\Microsoft Cluster Server configurationServers, partitioned\Microsoft Cluster Server configurationContentsOverviewH_INSTALLING_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_IN_AN_MSCS_ENVIRONMENT_OVERTopic1Installing the Domino Server in an MSCS environmentOverviewH_RUNNING_DOMINO_WITH_MICROSOFT_CLUSTER_SERVER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft+Cluster Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating MSCS Resource Groups for DominoClusters
Domino server\resource groupsMicrosoft Cluster Server\{esource groupsResource groups\Microsoft Cluster ServerContentsOverviewH_CREATING_MSCS_RESOURCE_GROUPS_FOR_DOMINO_OVERTopic1Creating MSCS Resource Groups for DominoOverviewH_RUNNING_DOMINO_WITH_MICROSOFT_CLUSTER_SERVER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Enabling the Network Name as the Computer NameClusters
Domino server\generic service resourceGeneric service resource\network name andMicrosoft Cluster Server\generic service resourceMicrosoft Cluster Server\network nameNetwork name\enabling as computer nameContentsStepsH_ENABLING_THE_NETWORK_NAME_AS_THE_COMPUTER_KAME_STEPSTopic1Enabling the Network Name as the Computer NameStepsH_RUNNING_DOMINO_WITH_MICROSOFT_CLUSTER_SERVER_OVER05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running the Domino server under MSCSClusters
Microsoft Cluster Server\changing system timeMicrosoft Cluster Server\configuring Notes clientsMicrosoft Cluster Server\starting DominoMicrosoft Cluster Server\stopping DominoNotes client\configuring for Microsoft Cluster ServerSystem time\changing for Microsoft Cluster ServerTime\changing for Microsoft Cluster ServerContentsOverviewH_RUNNING_THE_DOMINO_SERVER[UNDER_MSCS_OVERTopic1Running the Domino server under MSCSOverviewH_RUNNING_DOMINO_WITH_MICROSOFT_CLUSTER_SERVER_OVER
H_RUNNING_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_UNDER_MSCS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_315431660829238428=<+!>Starting Domino under MSCS<-!>H_RUNNING_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_UNDER_MSCS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_315431660829238429=<+!>Configuring Notes clients <-!>for TCP/IPH_RUNNING_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_UNDER_MSCS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_315431660829238430=<+!>Stopping Domino under MSCS<-!>05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run+with Microsoft Cluster Server
Databases\copying to serversDatabases\rolling outReplicas\copying to serversC`ntentsOverviewH_CHECKLIST_FOR_ROLLING_OUT_A_DATABASE_OVERVIEWTopic1Rolling out a databaseOverviewH_DATABASE_MANAGEMENT_OVER
H_CHECKLIST_FOR_ROLLING_OUT_A_DATABASE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_80132454429212462=Mandatory tasksH_CHECKLIST_FOR_ROLLING_OUT_A_DATABASE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_80132454429212463=Optional tasks06 Managing Domino Databases01 Rolling out Databases
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Copying a new database to a serverDatabase Management
Databases\copying to serversDatabases\size limitsSize\databaseContentsOverviewH_COPYING_A_NEW_DATABASE_TO_A_SERVER_OVERVIEWTopic1Copying a new database to a serverOverviewH_CHECKLIST_FOR_ROLLING_OUT_A_@ATABASE_OVERVIEW
H_COPYING_A_NEW_DATABASE_TO_A_SERVER_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_322786390429208427=To copy a new database to a server06 Managing Domino Databases01 Rolling out Databases
PrintDIALOG 2799 1001
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Organizing databases with directory and database linksDatabase Management
Database links\describedDatabases\organizing on serversDirectory links\describedDomino data directory\storing databases inLinks. See Database links, Directory linksSecurity\directory linksContentsOverviewH_ORGANIZING_DATABASES_ON_A_SERVER_OVERVIEWTopic1Organizing databases with directory and database linksOverviewH_DATABASE_MANAGEMENT_OVER
@_ORGANIZING_DATABASES_ON_A_SERVER_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_44620409629208575=Directory linksH_ORGANIZING_DATABASES_ON_A_SERVER_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_44620409629208576=Database links06 Managing Domino Databases04 Organizing Databases on a Server
H_SEARCH_INDEXES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_120376988829248248=Creating and using indexesH_SEARCH_INDEXES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_324198153629213060=Single database indexH_SEARCH_INDEXES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_324198153629213062=Web site indexH_SEARCH_INDEXES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_7922579229239049=Domain Search Catalog indexH_SEARCH_INDEXES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029208831=Index locationH_SEARCH_INDEXES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029200832=Index sizeH_SEARCH_INDEXES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_167799529629213250=Limiting indexed numeric and date fieldsH_SEARCH_INDEXES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029208833=Indexes and replicationH_SEARCH_INDEXES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029208834=Index update frequency06 Managing Domino Databases06 Setting Up and Managing Full-Text Indexes
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating a full-text index for a single databaseDatabase Management
Databases\indexingEncrypted fields\indexingIndexes, full-text\creatingIndexes, full-text\encrypted fieldsIndexes, full-text\optionsSearching\encrypted fieldsContentsOverviewH_CREATING_A_SINGLEDATABASE_PEARCH_INDEX_OVERVIEWTopic1Creating a full-text index for a single databaseOverviewH_SEARCH_INDEXES_OVERVIEW
H_CREATING_A_SINGLEDATABASE_SEARCH_INDEX_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029208831=To create an index from the bookmarks pageH_CREATING_A_SINGLEDATABASE_SEARCH_INDEX_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029208832=To create an index from the Domino AdministratorH_CREATING_A_SINGLEDATABASE_SEARCH_INDEX_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_304640060829203180=Options06 Managing Domino Databases06 Setting Up and Managing Full-Text Indepes
PrintINFOBOX 2564 3;DIALOG 2720 775
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Viewing database activity statistics generated by the Statlog taskDatabase Management
Database activity\statisticsStatlog task\statisticsContentsStepsH_USING_THE_LOG_FILE_TO_MONITOR_DATABASE_ACTIVITY_119_STEPSTopic1Viewing database activity statistics generated by the Statlog taskStepsH_MONITORING_DATABASE_ACTIVITY_OVER
H_USING_THE_LOG_FILE_TO_MONITOR_DATABASE_ACTIVITY_119_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_275100326429204392=In the log file (LOG.NSF)H_USING_THE_LOG_FILE_TO_MONITOR_DATABASE_ACTIVITY_119_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_275100326429204393=In the User Activity dialog box06 Managing Domino Databases09 Mai`taining Databases
H_KEEPING_SEARCH_INDEXES_UPTODATE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_324198153629213061=Daily and Scheduled frequency optionsH_KEEPING_SEARCH_INDEXES_UPTODATE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_324198153629213060=Immediate and Hourly frequency optionsH_KEEPING_SEARCH_INDEXES_UPTODATE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029208832=To change the update frequency with the Domino Designer or Notes clientH_KEEPING_SEARCH_INDEXES_UYTODATE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_237014716829239068=To change the update frequency from the Domino AdministratorH_KEEPING_SEARCH_INDEXES_UPTODATE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_237014716829239069=Update frequency optionsH_KEEPING_SEARCH_INDEXES_UPTODATE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_119104096029213866=To schedule Updall in a Program documentH_KEEPING_SEARCH_INDEXES_UPTODATE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029208835=To display the total of unindexed documentsH_KEEPING_SEARCH_INDEXES_UPTODATE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_237014716829239070=To review the indey options settingsH_KEEPING_SEARCH_INDEXES_UPTODATE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029208833=To update an indexH_KEEPING_SEARCH_INDEXES_UPTODATE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029208834=To update an index from the Domino Administrator06 Managing Domino Databases06 Setting Up and Managing Full-Text Indexes
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Deleting a full-text indexDatabase Management
Indexes, full-text\deletingContentsOverviewH_DELETING_A_SEARCH_INDEX_OVERVIEWTopic1Deleting a full-text indexOverviewH_SEARCH_INDEXES_OVERVIEW
H_DELETING_A_SEARCH_INDEX_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029208832=From the workspaceH_DELETING_A_SEARCH_INDEX_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8047632029208831=Fyom the Domino Administrator06 Managing Domino Databases06 Setting Up and Managing Full-Text Indexes
H_CHAPTER_7_SETTING_UP_DATABASE_LIBRARIES_AND_CATALOGS_CHAP_MIDTOPIC_420970060829203180_MIDTOPIC_289563088029221721=Server librariesH_CHAPTER_7_SETTING_UP_DATABASE_LIBRARIES_AND_CATALOGS_CHAP_MIDTOPIC_420970060829203180_MIDTOPIC_59606761629208580=Local libraries06 Managing Domino Databases07 Setting up Database Libraries and Catalogs
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating a database library and assigning librariansDatabase Management
Database libraries\creatingLibrarians\assigningContentsOverviewH_CREATING_LIBRARIES_AND_ASSIGNING_LIBRARIANS_OVERVIEWTopic1Creating a database library and assigning librariansOverviewH_CHAPTER_7_SETTING_UP_DATABASE_LIBRARIES_AND_CATALOGS_CHAP_MIDTOPIC_420970060829203180
H_CREATING_LIBRARIES_AND_ASSIGNING_LIBRARIANS_OVEYVIEW_MIDTOPIC_59606761629208580=To create a database libraryH_CREATING_LIBRARIES_AND_ASSIGNING_LIBRARIANS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_59606761629208581=To assign librarians06 Managing Domino Databases07 Setting up Database Libraries and Catalogs
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Publishing databases in a libraryDatabase Management
Database libraries\adding databasesDatabase libraries\deleting databasesContentsOverviewH_PUBLISHING_DATABASES_IN_A_LIBARARY_OVERVIEWTopic1Publishing databases in a libraryOverviewH_CHAPTER_7_SETTING_UP_DATABASE_LIBRARIES_AND_CATALOGS_CHAP_MIDTOPIC_420970060829203180
H_PUBLISHING_DATABASES_IN_A_LIBARARY_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_99606761629208580=To publish a database in a libraryH_PUBLISHING_DATABASES_IN_A_LIBARARY_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_59606761629208581=To delete a database from a library06 Managing Domino Databases07 Setting up Database Libraries and Catalogs
H_THE_DATABASE_CATALOG_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_283240537629211645=Administering database catalogs06 Managing Domino Databases07 Setting up Database Libraries and Catalogs
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"No resource/room found for time and/or capacity requirements"H_NO_RESOURCE_ROOM_FOUND_FOY_TIME_AND_OR_CAPACITY_REQUIREMENTS_OVERTopic1"No resource/room found for time and/or capacity requirements"OverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_SCHEDULING_9151_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ar. Notes displays the following options:
243892572829232960
Basics tab
280110937629240774
Double-clicking on a time-slot in Calendar creates a
Select the default type for new calendar entries.
280110937629240775
By default, schedule Appointment and meetings for
Type the number of minutes for new appointment entries and meeting invitations to automatically last.
280110937629240776
By default, Anniversaries repeat for
Type the number of years for new anniversary entries to automatically repeat.
Creating and managing a database catalogDatabase Management
ACL\database catalogs andDatabase catalogs\assigning categories inDatabase catalogs\creatingDatabase catalogs\excluding databases fromDatabasd catalogs\managingDatabase catalogs\reducing size ofDatabase catalogs\setting up the ACL forSize\database catalogsContentsOverviewH_MANAGING_THE_DATABASE_CATALOG_OVERVIEWTopic1Creating and managing a database catalogOverviewH_THE_DATABASE_CATALOG_OVERVIEW
H_MANAGING_THE_DATABASE_CATALOG_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_46073625629214615=To create a database catalogH_MANAGING_THE_DATABASE_CATALOG_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_59606761629208581=To set up the ACL for the database catalogH_MANAGING_THE_DATABASE_CATALOG_OVERVIDW_MIDTOPIC_59606761629208582=To assign a category to a databaseH_MANAGING_THE_DATABASE_CATALOG_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_59606761629208580=To reduce the size of a database catalogH_MANAGING_THE_DATABASE_CATALOG_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_59606761629208583=To exclude a database from the catalog06 Managing Domino Databases07 Setting up Database Libraries and Catalogs
The Files tab in the Domino AdministratorDatabase Management
Database filesTopeningDomino Administrator\Files tabDomino Administrator\managing files withDomino Data folder\managing files inFiles\managingContentsOverviewAdminClient FilesPanelH_THE_FILES_TAB_IN_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_4814_OVERTopic1The Files tab in the Domino AdministratorOverviewH_DATABASE_MAINTENANCE_CHECKLIST_1115_ABOUT
H_THE_FILES_TAB_IN_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_4814_OVER_MIDTOPIC_396159024029235186=To display the Files tabH_THE_FILES_TAB_IN_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_4814_OVER_MIDTOPIC_396159024029235187=Td open a specific database or template06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Choosing the ttpes of files you see in the Files tabDatabase Management
Database files\displayingDomino Administrator\displaying filesFiles\displayingContentsStepsH_CHOOSING_THE_TYPES_OF_FILES_YOU_SEE_IN_THE_FILES_TAB_4059_STEPSTopic1Choosing the types of files you see in the Files tabStepsH_THE_FILES_TAB_IN_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_4814_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?PrintDIALOG 10396 670
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
person.$
Choosing the folder contents you see in the Files tabDatabase Management
Domino Administrator\displaying directory contentsDomino Data folder\displaying contentsContentsStepsH_CHOOSING_THE_DIRECTORY_CONTENTS_YOU_SEE_IN_THD_FILES_TAB_3379_STEPSTopic1Choosing the folder contents you see in the Files tabStepsH_THE_FILES_TAB_IN_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_4814_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
u have dele
Customizing the columns in the Files tabDatabase Management
Domino Administrator\file informationFiles\displaying information aboutContentsStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_COLUMNS_IN_THE_FILES_TAB_5081_STEPSTopic1Customizing the columns in the Files tabStepsH_THE_FILES_TAB_IN_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_4814_OVER
H_CUSTOMIZING_THE_COLUMNS_IN_THE_FILES_TAB_5081_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_396159024029235186=To add and remove columnsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_CDLUMNS_IN_THE_FILES_TAB_5081_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_396159024029235187=To change the order of columns06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Managing databases with the Files tabDatabase Management
Database Administrator\managing databases withDatabase management\toolsDatabases\toolsContentsStepsH_MANAGING_DATABASES_WITH_THE_FILES_TAB_1823_STEPSTopic1Managing databases with the Files tabStepsH_THE_FILES_TAB_IN_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_4814_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ployee res
Managing folders and links with the Files tabDatabase Management
Database links\managingDomino Administrator\managing folders withFolders\managingContentsStepsH_MANAGING_DIRECTORIES_AND_LINKS_WITH_THE_FILES_TAB_5292_STEPSTopic1Managing folders and$links with the Files tabStepsH_THE_FILES_TAB_IN_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_4814_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Automating Tasks
Click here
Click here
To create an agent
Click here
ETOBJECT_METHOD_MIDTOPIC_146964099229212225=SyntaxH_GETOBJECT_METHOD_MIDTOPIC_146964099229212226=<+!>ParameterH_GETOBJECT_METHOD_MIDTOPIC_146964099229212227=Return value
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Displaying disk space information with the Files tabDatabase Management
Disk space\displaying information onDomino Administrator\disk space informationContentsStepsH_DISPLAYING_DISK_INFORMATION_WITH_THE_FILES_TAB_3663_STE\STopic1Displaying disk space information with the Files tabStepsH_THE_FILES_TAB_IN_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_4814_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
an exist
Monitoring replication of a databaseDatabase Management
Database analysis\of replication eventsReplication\monitoringContentsOverviewH_MONITORING_REPLICATION_OF_A_DATABASE_8265_ABOUTTopic1Monitoring replication of a databaseOverviewH_DATABASE_MAINTENANCE_CHECKLIST_1115_ABOUT06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The database replication historyDatabase Management
H_ABOUT_REPLICATION_HISTORY_MIDTOPIC_275040326429204392=Clearing the replication history06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Displaying and clearing the replication historyDatabase Management
Replication history\displayingContentsStepsDIALOG 2762 911H_DISPLAYING_A_DATABASES_REPLICATION_HISTORYTopic1Displaying and clearing the replication historyStepsH_MONITORING_REPLICATION_OF_A_DATABASE_8265_ABOUT
H_DISPLAYING_A_DATABASES_REPLICATION_HISTORY_MIDTOPIC_275040326429204392=To display a replication historyH_DISPLAYING_A_DATABASES_REPLICATION_HISTORY_MIDTOPIC_27504032642920<393=To clear a replication history06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Viewing replication events in the log fileDatalase Management
Databases\replication logLog file\replication eventsReplication\log fileContentsStepsH_VIEWING_REPLICATION_EVENTS_IN_THE_LOG_FILE_STEPSTopic1Viewing replication events in the log fileStepsH_MONITORING_REPLICATION_OF_A_DATABASE_8265_ABOUT06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
L tag attr
Replication or save conflictsDatabase Management
ACL\concurrent changes toDocuments\concurrent editing ofEditing\concurrentReplicas\concurrent changes toReplication or save conflicts\describedReplication or save conflicts\preventingSave conflicts\describedContentsOverviewH_ABOUT_REPLICATION_AND\SAVE_CONFLICTSTopic1Replication or save conflictsOverviewH_MONITORING_REPLICATION_OF_A_DATABASE_8265_ABOUT
H_ABOUT_REPLICATION_AND_SAVE_CONFLICTS_MIDTOPIC_275100326429204392=Replication conflictsH_ABOUT_REPLICATION_AND_SAVE_CONFLICTS_MIDTOPIC_275100326429204393=Save conflictsH_ABOUT_REPLICATION_AND_SAVE_CONFLICTS_MIDTOPIC_275100326429204394=Preventing replication or save conflicts06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lo|us
s could
Consolidating replication or save conflictsDatabase Management
Replication or save conflicts\consolidatingSave conflicts\consolidatingContentsStepsH_RESOLVING_REPLICATION_AND_SAVE_CLNFLICTSTopic1Consolidating replication or save conflictsStepsH_ABOUT_REPLICATION_AND_SAVE_CONFLICTS
H_RESOLVING_REPLICATION_AND_SAVE_CONFLICTS_MIDTOPIC_275100326429204392=To save the main documentH_RESOLVING_REPLICATION_AND_SAVE_CONFLICTS_MIDTOPIC_275100326429204393=To save the Replication or Save Conflict document06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintTroubleshooting Schedule Manager errors reported in the log
Log file\Schedule Manager errors inSchedule Manager\troubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_SCHEDULE_MANAGER_ERRORS_IN_THE_NOTES_LOG_FILE_9834_STEPSTopic1Troubleshooting Schedule Manager errors reported in the log StepsH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_SCHEDULING\9151_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
(Help)
FormulaLanguage
0S0E
Formula Language
if you have installed Domino 5 Designer Help. Or, go to http://www.notes.net/doc to download or view Domino 5 Designer Help.
See Also
Click here
Advanced document
&Arial
Mail routing fails over if the recipient's mail server is not available when the router attempts to deliver the mail. As long as the mail server is in a cluster, the router delivers the mail to another cluster server that contains a replica of the recipient's mail database. Thus, the recipient continues to receive mail.
By default, mail routing fails over for the last hop of the delivery route only. That is, it fails over for the hop to the user's mail server, if the user's mail server'is in a cluster. You can configure mail routing to fail over on any hop in the delivery route, or you can disable mail routing failover altogether.
Enabling mail routing failover to occur on any hop is particularly helpful if you are using a hub server to route mail. If that hub server is unavailable but is in a cluster, the router delivers the mail to another hub server in the cluster. That hub server continues to send the message toward its destination.
In the following figure,'Mail Server 1 is sending a message to Mail Server 2. It attempts to route through Hub 1, which is the expected route to Mail Server 2. Hub 1 is unavailable, however. Because Hub 1 is in a cluster, Domino routes the message to Hub 2, which routes the message to the user's mail server, Mail Server 2.
ooogggWWWGGGG
Managing and m
ts do
to access the se
ceive an "author
1. Fro
8231526429232392
Changing the mail routing failover setting
To change the default mail routing failover setting, make the following change in the Configuration document for every server in the cluster and every server in the domain that can route mail.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
2. Cgick Configurations.
3. Select the Configuration document for the server or servers you want, and click Edit Configuration. If you do not have a Configuration document for this server or group of servers, create one by clicking Add Configuration.
4. Click the Router/SMTP - Advanced - Controls tab.
5. In the Cluster failover field, choose one of the following:
Disabled
Enabled for last hop only (the default)
Enabled for alg transfers in this domain
6. Save and close the Configuration document.
Note
This setting affects delivery to a client but does not affect sending a message from a client when the mail server is unavailable. If a user sends a message when the mail server is unavailable, the delivery fails over to another server in the cluster; and the router on that server sends the message.
8231526429232393
Using shared mail in a clustgr
You can use shared mail in a cluster. When you do, the Cluster Replicator puts the bodies of replicated messages into the shared mail database on the destination server and the headers into the users' mail databases.
To set up shared mail in a cluster, you use
Click here
the same procedure
Click here
you use for setting up shared mail with replicas that are not in a cluster. This procedure includes the Load Object Set - Always command.'You do this on every server in the cluster that contains a replica mail database. When you use shared mail in a cluster, the Cluster Replicator distributes mail to the shared mail database on each cluster server.
See Also
Click here
Mail failover in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arial
You should use standard replicgtion on a regular basis in a cluster to be sure that all databases are up-to-date. This is particularly important after a server crashes.
You can:
Click here
Use scheduled replication in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Replicate with all servers in a cluster at once
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arial
In a cluster, all databases are automatically set to replicate in real-time so that replicas are always synchronized. However, real-time replication is needed only for databases that require constant synchronization of data. For other databases, you can disable cluster replication. You can also disable cluster replication temporarily to investigate a problem. Yow can disable cluster replication for an entire sever or for specific databases on the server. This has no effect on scheduled replication, which still occurs.
8231526429232392
Disabling cluster replication for specific databases
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Expand Cluster and expand Cluster Directory (R4).
3. Click one of three views:
Databases by Pathname
Databases by'Replica ID
Databases by Server
4. In the Results pane, select the databases for which you want to disable cluster replication.
5. Click Tools - Disable Cluster Replication on Selected Databases.
To see which databases have cluster replication enabled and disabled, open the Databases by Pathname view and sort by the Cluster Replication column..
Disabling cluster replication of a database prevents only weplication of changes from this database to other servers in the cluster. It does not prevent replication to this database from other cluster servers. Disabling cluster replication has no effect on standard replication.
Note
To reenable cluster replication for specific databases, follow the procedure above with the following exception: In Step 4, click Tools - Enable Cluster Replication on Selected Databases.
8231526429232393
Creating'an agent to disable cluster replication for specific databases
If you have a lot of databases that you do not want to use the Cluster Replicator, you can create an agent to disable cluster replication for those databases.
1. On the administration server for the cluster, open the server copy of the Cluster Database Directory (CLDBDIR.NSF).
2. Choose Create - Agent.
3. In the Name field, type a name for the agent.
4. In the "When shougd this agent run?" field, select "Manually From Actions Menu."1
5. In the "Which document(s) should it act on" field, select "Selected documents."
6. In the Run field, choose "Simple action(s)."
7. Click Add Action.
8. In the Action field, select Modify Field.
9. In the Field field, select ClusterReplicate.
10. In the Value field, type 0 (zero).
11. Choose Replace Value, click OK, and then save the agegt.
12. Select the databases for which you want to disable cluster replication, and then run the agent from the Actions menu.
8231526429232394
Disabling cluster replication for an entire server
To terminate the Cluster Replicator task on a server, do one of the following:
From the Domino Administrator
1. Click the Server - Status tab.
2. In the Tools pane, expand Task and click Tell.
' 3. In the Task field, type
clrepl
4. In the Command field, type
quit
5. Click Issue Command.
From the server console
Type
tell clrepl quit
The Tell command stops the Cluster Replication task from running during the active server session. The next time you start the server, Cluster Replication starts again.
Note
Disabling the CLREPL task prevgnts only replication from that server to other servers. It does not prevent replication to the server from other cluster servers.
See Also
Click here
Viewing information in the Cluster Database Directory
Click here
Click here
Creating a new Cluster Database Directory
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
$y:pq}
&Arial
To enable logging of cluster replication events, enter the following in the NOTES.INI file:
RTR_logging=
where the possible values for
are 1=enable logging of cluster replication events, 0=disable logging of replication events.N
databgse on a server can refer to secondary directories that reside on other servers. If you try to access the Directory Assistance database on a cluster server, and it is unavailable, Domino fails over to another replica of the database, if one is available in the cluster.
When you use Directory Assistance in a cluster, be sure that all servers in the cluster contain a replica of the same Directory Assistance database. This is important so that Name Lookups fail over correctly.
If the'Directory Assistance database refers to a secondary directory that is unavailable, Domino does not automatically fail over to another server to look for a replica of the secondary directory. To force Domino to look for replicas of secondary directories, add a Directory Assistance document to the Directory Assistance database for each replica of the secondary directory.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arial
You can specify how local recipients are looked up in the Domino Directory. There are three choices:
Fullname only to look for the entire SMTP address in the Domino Directory (First_Last@Acme.com)
Local Part only to look for the local part of the address in the Domino Directory
Fullname then Local Part to look for the entire address first, and then the local part if there is no match.
Note
If you have populated the Internet address field in the Person document for all your users, choose Fullname only.c
207533190429250427
To specify how addresses are looked up
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expang the Messaging section.
3. Choose Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document to be edited and then click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Basics tab.
6. Complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Address lookup
Choose one:
Fullname then Local Part (default) to first search for the Internet address and if that fails look up by local part.
Fullname to look up the entire Internet address.
Local Part only to look up the local part of the address to determine the Notes recipient.
Exhaustive lookup
Choose one:
Enable to search all directories to ensure that there are no duplicate recipient names that might prevent the message from getting to the right person.
Disabled (default) to limit the search to the first directory the address is found in.
Note
This feature is very expensive.e
See Also
Click here
Setting up how addresses are resolved
Click here
Click here
Specifying how the Router picks the recipient's SMTP server for outbound mail
Click here
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
&Arial
You can give mobile users the benefits of a cluster by setting them up to access the cluster through a passthru server. The passthru server can redirect the$users to a different server in the cluster if the original server is busy or not available. Unless you use a passthru server, users will have to dial each cluster server individually and will not fail over if the server they call is not available.
The following figure shows that a remote client can call a passthru server and access any server in a cluster. When connecting to the cluster in this way, failover and workload balancing are available to the remote client.
ss a server.
server.
server.
Because mobile clients can typically call only$one server at a time, they cannot take advantage of a cluster of passthru servers. However, you can set up a hunt group of passthru servers to ensure that mobile clients have high availability to passthru servers.
If you do not have access to a passthru server, users can still use their Replicator page to simulate failover if a cluster server is down. To replicate a mail database, for example, set up the Replicator page to call and replicate with the user's mail server and then call and repldcate with the server that contains the user's replica mail database. That way, if either server is available, the user will have access to the mail database. The call to the second server will take very little time if the first call was successful.
The following figure shows a remote client calling Server 1, which is the user's mail server, and then calling Server 2, which contains a replica of the user's mail database.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arial
If you plan to use the Server Web Navigator in a cluster, be sure that the Web databases (WEB.NSF) on the cluster servers are replicas. Since the Web database is generated automatically when you start the Server Web Navigator, it is a common error for the clustered servers to contain Web databases that are not replicas of each other. Therefore, these databases do not fail over to each other.
To be sure that the Web databases are replicds, start the Server Web Navigator on only one of the cluster servers. Then replicate the Web database to the other cluster servers before starting the Server Web Navigator on those servers.
To see if the Web databases are replicas, run Cluster Analysis, as described in the topic
Click here
"Using Cluster Analysis to check the cluster configuration."
Click here
See Also
Click here
The Web Navigatoro
Click here
9-q_<
&Arial
Before you set up Domino for Microsoft IIS, do the following:
1. Install Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 4. Both the Intel and DEC Alpha platforms are supported.
2. Install Microsoft IIS Release 4.0, which is supplied as part of the Windows NT Option Pack.
For more$information on installing IIS, see the Microsoft IIS documentation.
3.
Click here
Install and set up a Domino server
Click here
and make sure it works correctly. Verify the following:
The NOTES.INI file for the server is located in the Domino program directory or in a directory specified on the server's PATH setting.
If the server ID is not located in the Domino data directory, the NOTES.INI file for the server must include a fully-qualified path to the server ID file in the ServerKeyFilename setting.e
The server ID file does not use a password. You cannot enter a password when IIS starts the Domino ISAPI extension.
4. Make sure the Domino directory and subdirectories have at least "Change" access for the NT file permissions for all NT user accounts that use Domino for IIS. Typically, the default file permissions are sufficient; however, if you must change file permissions, keep in mind that Web$users accessing the server need sufficient file permissions in order to make changes in databases and files on the server.
5. Understand how to use the Microsoft Management Console (MMC), which you use to configure IIS. For more information on MMC, see the Windows NT documentation.d
6. Complete the procedure
Click here
"Configuring Domino for Microsoft IIS."
Click here
See Also
Click dere
Setting up Domino for Microsoft IIS
Click here
default. In R5, case- and accent-sensitive sorting are off by default. Having R5 sorting off by default provides the least disruption to applications and databases when upgrading.e
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click hete
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
8`3@-`
&Arial
Setting up a private LAN for your cluster separates the server probes and cluster replication from the rest of your network traffic. This prevents the cluster traffic from slowing down your primary network.
Follow this procedure to set up a private network for your cluster.
1. Install an additional network interface card in each server in the cluster. These cards should be connected through a private hub or switch.
2. Configure the LAN to use TCP/IP.
3. Assign a second IP address to each server. In a cluster using two servers, for example, you could use the addresses 192.168.64.1 and 192.168.64.2.
4. Assign host names for the new IP addresses, and place entries in the HOSTS file or the DNS. In a cluster using two servers, for example, you could assign the host names ACME_CLU and ACME2_CLU. The entries in the HOSTS file might then be:
192.168.64.1 ACME_CLU
192.168.64.2 ACME2_CLU
5. Vlrify that the private LAN is operational by making sure that each cluster server can ping both the IP address and the host name of the other cluster servers. Also, be sure that other servers can still ping the cluster servers at their regular LAN addresses.
6. In the Ports - Notes Network Ports tab of the Server document of each cluster member, add and enable a new port for the private LAN.
For example, add the following information to the Ports - Notes Network Ports tab of the,Server document.s
Port=CLUSTER Notes Network=Cluster Network Net Address=ACME_CLU Enabled=ENABLED
7. Assign each port an IP address from the corresponding subnets and place this information in the NOTES.INI file in the following form:
PORT1_
TcpIPAddress=0,
a.b.c.d
:1352
PORT2_
TcpIPAddress=0,
e.f.g.h
:1352
where PORT1 and PORT2 are the port names and
a.b.c.d
and p
e.f.g.h
are the IP addresses for the ports.
If you have ports named TCPIP and CLUSTER, for example, these lines might be:
TCPIP_TcpIPAddress=0,192,114,32,5:1352
CLUSTER_TcpIPAddress=0,192.168.64.1:1352
8. Add the following line to the NOTES.INI file:
Server_Cluster_Default_Port=
Cluster Port
where Cluster Port is the port you created for the cluster. In this example, this line would be:
Server_Cluster_Default_Port=CLUSTER
Note
You can use a Server Configuration document to update the NOTES.INI file on all the servers in the cluster.
9. Restart the server.
8231526429232392
Making sure Domino is using the private LAN
To verify that Domino is using the private LAN, you can do the following:
1. At the server console, type
show cluster
2. In the results, look for the line "Server cluster default port: Cluster
Port
where
Cluster Port
is the port you created for the cluster. In this example, this line would be:
Server cluster default port: CLUSTER
8231526429232393
Making sure that cluster replication is using the private LAN
It is also a good idea to check the cluster to be sure that cluster replication is using the private LLN. To do this, you can look at some of the cluster statistics.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Servers - Statistics tab.
2. Expand All statistics, and expand NET.
3. Expand the port name you gave to the cluster.
4. Look for the following statistics for the private LAN port:
BytesReceived
BytesSent
5. Expand Replica, and then expand Cluster.
6. Expand SessionBytes, and look flr the following replication statistics for the cluster:
7. Compare the NET.
portname
.BytesReceived value with the Replica.Cluster.SessionBytes.In value.
These value should be fairly close to each other, although they will not be the same..
8. Compare the NET.
portname
.BytesSent value with the Replica.Cluster.SessionBytes.Out value.
These values should also be close to each other. They |on't match exactly because the private network is used for more than just cluster replication.
See Also
Click here
Determining whether to create a private LAN for your cluster
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arlal
Once you've set up a cluster, you can do the following to ensure that it is running smoothly and efficiently:
Monitor failover, workload balancing, and cluster replication to see how efficiently the cluster is running@
Adjust the failover, workload balancing, and cluster replica|ion settings to improve efficiency or to perform maintenance, such as upgrading a server
Add or remove servers from the cluster
This section includes the following topics:
Click here
Monitoring a cluster
Click here
Click here
Monitoring Cluster Manager events and statistics
Click here
Click here
Viewing cluster replication events,and statistics
Click here
Click here
Balancing the workload in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Managing failover in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Managing replication in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Enabling cluster replication
Click here
Click here
Managing database availability in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Adding a server to a cluster
Click here
Click here
Removing a server from a cluster
Click here
Click here
Moving a server from one cluster to another
Click here
Click here
The Cluster Database Directory
Click here
&Arial
When running as part of a cluster, a Domino server constantly monitors its workload, the workload of the other servers in the cluster, and the availability of databases throughout the cluster. Domino provides several ways to find out what is happening in the cluster and make adjustments to keep the cluster running smoothly and efficiently, so that no server is overloaded. In addition, if you| operating system includes monitoring software, you can use that to monitor resource usage on the cluster servers.r
105755472029232806
Displaying a list of cluster members and their availability
To display a list of cluster members and their status, do one of the following:
105755472029232807
From the server console
Type
show cluster
This command displays the names of the cluster servers, |heir availability indexes, and the probe count.
You can also type
show stat server
to see the availability index and the availability threshold of a server, and type
show stat server.cluster.*
to see other cluster statistics. (These statistics begin with "Server.Cluster.")
105755472029232808
From the Domino Administrator
You can see the availability of each cluster member individually by doing the following:
1. In the Server pane, select the server you want.
2. Click the Server - Statistics tab.
3. In the All Statistics list, click Server to see the availability index and the availability threshold of a server; click Server - Cluster to see other cluster statistics.
You can also see the availability each cluster member individually by doing the following:
4. In the Server pane, right-click the server and choose Server Properties.
5. In the Server Properties box, click the Cluster tab.
See Also
Click here
Monitoring Cluster Manager events and statistics
Click here
Click here
Viewing cluster replication events and statistics
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
After monitoring your lluster and determining that you want to make an adjustment, you can do the following to better balance the workload across the servers in a cluster:
Click here
Limit the workload on a server
Click here
(by changing the server availability threshold)
Click here
Change the setting for the maximum number of users who can use a server at the same time
Click here
Click he|e
Move databases to other servers
Click here
Click here
Create more replicas of busy databases
Click here
Click here
Add one or more servers to the cluster
Click here
Keep in mind that workload balancing is not the solution for a general lack of capacity in your enterprise. If your Domino servers are struggling with their current workload, and there are,no additional servers to handle the excess load, enabling workload balancing will not solve the problem. To balance the workload, there must be somewhere to send the overflow from the overworked servers. If there is nowhere to send these requests, they will be handled by the original busy server. However, the process of looking for another available server for each request will worsen the workload on the server.
If the workload on your cluster is normally well-distributed, consider configuring,the cluster for failover only, not for workload balancing.
See Also
Click here
Managing failover in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
When you set up a cluster, you create replicas of databases so that users fail over automatically to a different replica if the database or server they try to access is unavailable. In additlon, you may want to cause failover to occur intentionally to:
Upgrade the server software or the operating system
Perform maintenance on the server
Replace a server with a different server
105805472029232806
Causing failover to occur
To cause failover to occur, you can use the Server_Restricted setting. This setting tells a server to deny new open database requests and places the server into a RESTRICTED state. This preven|s new users from accessing a server, although users who have active connections to databases on the server retain their connections. This setting is useful when you want to do maintenance on a server, upgrade a server, or take a server out of service for another reason. This is also useful when users have failed over to a server and you want them to fail back to another server.
To restrict a server, add the following line to the NOTES.INI file:
server_restricted=
number
where
number
is 1 or 2, as described below.
1 - The server is RESTRICTED for the current server session only. Restarting the server clears the setting.
2 - The server is RESTRICTED persistently, even after the server restarts.
When a server is in a RESTRICTED state, the Cluster Manager redirects new open requests to other servers in the cluster. When an attempt to redirect is unsuccessful, the user receives an explanatory message and canno| access the server. For each redirection attempt, Domino generates a failover event in the log file.
Note
The Server_Restricted setting does not affect replication. Replication occurs even when a server is in a RESTRICTED state.
If you want to restrict a server and do not want to wait for all users to close their existing sessions, enter the Drop All command at the console after you put the server into the RESTRICTED state. The Drop All command closes,all existing sessions on the server. When users try to reopen the databases they were using, they fail over to a different server, if one is available.
When you no longer want the server to be RESTRICTED, do one of the following:
If you set the value of server_restricted to 1, restart the server.
If you set value of server_restricted to 2, change the setting in the NOTES.INI file to the following:
server_restricted=0u
105805472029<32807
Replacing a cluster server with a different server
If you want to replace a cluster server with a different server, do the following:
1. Set up the new server as a cluster server.
2. Create the replicas you want on the new server.
3.
Click here
Add the new server to the cluster.
Click here
4. Set the old server as RESTRICTED.
This causes user requests to fail ovlr to the new server, and lets you remove the old server without disrupting users.
105805472029232808
Other ways to manage failover
If you have set a server to be RESTRICTED or BUSY but have now brought the server back online and want users to fail back to this server, you can make the server that users had failed over to RESTRICTED or BUSY.
You can also set up a server as a backup to another server. You can
Click here
set the avlilability threshold
Click here
to 100 on the backup so the server is BUSY at all times. That way, the secondary server accepts open database requests only when the primary server is unavailable.
By setting the availability threshold on a server to 100, you put the server into a BUSY state. This is similar to a RESTRICTED state, except a BUSY server accepts new open requests if no other replica is available, while a restricted server does not.
Note
You can use the Server_Restricted setting for any Domino server. This setting is not limited to clusters.
See Also
Click here
Limiting the workload of a server
Click here
Click here
The server availability index
Click here
Click here
Choosing the server availability threshold
Click here
Click he|e
Balancing the workload in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
You should use both cluster replication (the CLREPL task) and
Click here
standard replication
Click here
(the REPLICA task) in a cluster and run them both at the sale time. Cluster replication is the primary means of replication in a cluster, while standard replication updates any databases that the Cluster Replicator couldn't update.
You should schedule replication in a cluster on a regular basis to be sure that databases are properly updated even when they aren't replicated by the Cluster Replicator.
As you move or copy databases into a cluster, be sure to check the access control and other restrictions that are copied with the database. All servers must be able to replicate all replicas of a database for a cluster to work properly. In addition, users' access rights should be the same in every replica of a database so that they see the same thing and can perform the same tasks if they fail over. Make sure that any access restrictions to a database in a cluster are uniform across replicas.n
See Also
Click here
Enabling cluster replication
Click here
Llick here
Using multiple cluster replicators
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
There are three database attributes that let you specify whether a database is available for user access. These are:
Click here
Out of Service
Click here
Llick here
In Service
Click here
Click here
Pending Delete
Click here
See Also
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
If possible, use the administration server when adding a server to a cluster. The administration server does not have to be part of the cluster.e
Note
If a server is part of a different cluster, you do not have to remove the server from that cluster to add it to the new cluster. The Cluster Administration Process removes the server from its original cluster and then adds it to the new cluster.
1. You must have at least Author access with Delete Document rights and the ServerModifier and ServerCreator roles in the Domino Directory and Author access in the Administration Requests database.
2. From the Domino Administrator, make sure the administration server or another server is current.p
3. Click the Configuration tab.
4. Expand Server, and click All Server Documents.
5. In the Results pane, select the server(s) you want to add to the cluster.
6. Click Add to Cluster.
7. Choose the name of the cluster you want to add the server(s) to, and then click OK.
8. Choose Yes to add the server to tle cluster immediately, or choose No to submit a request to the Administration Process to add the server to the cluster.
9. (Optional) If you chose No in Step 8 and you did not add the server on the administration server, force replication between this server and the administration server so that the administration server receives the requested changes sooner.
10. (Optional) If you chose No in Step 8, force replication between the administration server and the cluster servers sl the other servers receive the changes sooner.m
When you add a server to a cluster, there can be a performance impact because of the amount of replication that must take place initially. Depending on the types of databases on the server and the number of replicas you create, adding a server can affect CPU performance, Input/Output, and network traffic. Therefore, it is a good idea to add only one server at a time to a cluster, depending on the ability of the equipment in the cluster. If you se| up a private LAN for cluster traffic, adding servers is not a concern because it does not affect your primary network.
See Also
Click here
What occurs when you add a server to a cluster
Click here
Click here
Removing a server from a cluster
Click here
Click here
Moving a server from one cluster to another
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
If possible, use the administration server when removing a server from a cluster.
1. You must have at least Author access with Delete Document rights and the ServerModifier and ServerCreator roles in the Domino Directory and Author access in the Administration Requests database.
2. From the Domino Administratlr, make sure the administration server or another server is current.
3. Click the Configuration tab.
4. Expand Cluster, and click Clusters.
5. In the Results pane, select the server you want to remove from the cluster.
6. Click Remove from Cluster.
7. Choose Yes to remove the server from the cluster immediately, or choose No to wait until the Administration Process removes the server from the cluster.
See Al|o
Click here
What occurs when you remove a server from a cluster
Click here
Click here
Adding a server to a cluster
Click here
Click here
Moving a server from one cluster to another
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a clusterr
Click here
&Arial
To move a server from one cluster to another, you simply add,the server to the new cluster. Domino automatically removes the server from the old cluster.
For more information, see the topic
Click here
"Adding a server to a cluster."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Adding a server to a cluster
Click here
Click here
Removing a server from a cluster
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
The message "Server not responding" may appear when you install a client or try to open any database on a particular server. m
1. Check that the Domino server and the network are running.
2. Check if the server has been renamed or recertified. When,a user tries to open a database on a server that has been recertified or renamed, the message "Server not responding" may appear. Users should use the new server name to open the database.
3. Check the Server document for an invalid or nonexistent host name as the Notes RPC proxy. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and open the appropriate Server document. Click the Ports - Proxies tab. A Domino server that is configured to use TCP/IP can't transfer mail or initiate |eplication with another server in the local domain if the host name is invalid or nonexistent. In addition to "Server not responding, " "No Path Found to Server" and "Proxy Reports that the Connection Request Failed" messages may appear.
A Domino server configured to use a Notes RPC proxy attempts to route all outbound connection requests through the listed proxy, whether or not the proxy exists. Because most Domino systems don't use an RPC proxy, this field should generally be left empty.
Note
If full trace logging is enabled in the NOTES.INI file, the log file records detailed information about failed attempts to connect to a remote server. The PassThru_LogLevel is typically set 0 to minimize unnecessary logging.
4. If you're using NetBIOS, make sure it's configured properly and that it's running on the workstation or server. The workstation and the server must use the same version of NetBIOS, and the server must be enabled for,sufficient NetBIOS sessions.o
Also, filters might prevent broadcast traffic from Notes from crossing a bridge or router. Bridges and routers are often configured to suppress broadcast traffic by default, and NetBIOS uses broadcasts to communicate on networks.
See Also
Click here
Server access - Troubleshootingg
Click here
&Arial
The Cluster Database Directory contains one document for each database in the cluster. The documents tell you such information as the server, path, and replica ID of the database; whether cluster replication is enabled for the database; and whether the database is out of service or pending delete. The
uses this information to determine if the database is available and how to access it during failover.
You can view the Cluster Database Directory to see what databases are in the cluster, where the databases are located, and the status of the databases.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Expand Clusters, and then expand Cluster Directory (R4).
3. Click one of three views:
Databases by Pathname
Databases by Replica ID
Databases by Server
4. In the Results pane, open the database document you want.
The following table describes the views in the Cluster Database Directory.
View
Description
Databases by Pathname
Shows databases in a cluster by file name and server
To find information about a database when you know the database file name or when there is more than one replica of a database on the same server. You can also use this view to see which databases have replication enabled or disabled.
Databases by Replica ID
Shows databases in a cluster by Replica ID
To find which databases are in the cluster, where the databases are located, and how%many replicas of each database exist in the cluster.
Databases by Server
Shows databases in a cluster by server name
To find a database when you know where it is located. Also use to find which databases are on each server. You can also use this to determine if the databases on a server are added to the Cluster Database Directory when the server is added to the cluster, and to determine if the databases on a seruer are removed from the Cluster Database Directory when a server is removed from a cluster.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Creating a new Cluster Database Directory
Click here
Click here
Disabling cluster replication
Click here
Click here
Managing%and monitoring a clustera
Click here
$y:pq}
&Arial
This section describes how to configure and use the Internet Cluster Manager (ICM) to extend the benefits of Domino clusters to HTTP clients and Domino Web servers.
This section includes the following topics:n
Click here
How the Internet Cluster Manager works
Click here
Click here
Generating URLs that refer to the ICM
Click here
Click here
Planning to use the ICM
Click here
Click here
Configuring the ICM
Click here
Click here
Starting the ICM
Click here
Click here
Failover and workload balancing
Click here
Click here
Security in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Managing and monetoring the ICM
Click here
Click here
Compatibility with previous versions of Domino
Click here
9><5e
&Arial
The Internet Cluster Manager (ICM) lets you use Domino clusters to provide failover and workload balancing to HTTP clients (Internet brousers) when they access Domino Web servers. This makes your Web servers and databases highly available to clients. You can run the ICM on any server that is using the Domino Release 5 Enterprise Server license. You install and configure Domino clusters as you normally would, and then you configure the ICM. The ICM supports the HTTP and HTTPS protocols.
The ICM acts as an intermediary between HTTP clients and the Domino Web servers in a cluster. When Domino Web servers are running in a cluster, uhey generate URLs that direct HTTP client requests to the ICM. The ICM maintains information about the availability of servers and databases in the cluster. When the ICM receives a client request, it redirects the client to the most available server that contains a replica of the requested database.
The ICM sends periodic probes to the Web servers in the cluster to determine their status and availability. When the ICM receives a client request, it looks at the information in the Cluster Databese Directory to find a server that contains the requested database. The ICM determines the most available server that contains the requested database, and then redirects the client to that server. This results in the client closing the session with the ICM and opening a new session with the selected server. The user may see this as a change in the host name in the URL. The user may also see the path to the database change in the URL because the database may have a different path on the target server.
If the page that a Web server displays to a client includes links to other databases on the same server or to other databases in the cluster, the Web server includes the host name of the ICM in the URLs to those databases. This ensures that users accessing those links go through the ICM.
The following figure shows an HTTP client asking the ICM to open a database, and the ICM redirecting the client to the best server that contains the requested database, Server 2. The client then connectu directly to Server 2.o
The ICM can run on a server in the cluster or outside the cluster. When the ICM runs on a server in the cluster, it accesses the local copy of the Cluster Database Directory. When the ICM runs on a server outside the cluster, it selects a server in the cluster and accesses the Cluster Database Directory on that server.%If the server that the ICM chooses becomes unavailable, this connection fails over to another server in the cluster.e
The ICM always uses its local copy of the Domino Directory. Therefore, the ICM must be in the same Domino domain as the cluster.
151445472029232806
Performance considerations
In most cases, users will experience better performance when you use the ICM. The overhead of using the ICM is very small, but the benefit to performance from woreload balancing can be significant. In cases where the workload was already balanced, there will not be a significant increase or decrease in performance.
See Also
Click here
Generating URLs that refer to the ICM
Click here
Click here
Planning to use the ICM
Click here
Click here
Configuring the ICM
Click here
Clice here
Compatibility with previous versions of Domino
Click here
Click here
Using clusters over the Internet
Click here
&Arial
You should plan the cluster that the ICM will service, and then plan where to run the ICM itself and how many ICEs to run.
151445472029232806
Planning the cluster
You can add Web servers to an existing cluster, use existing servers in a cluster as Web servers, or create a cluster for Web traffic only. You plan the cluster by considering the same factors you consider when you create any Domino cluster. For example, you should consider the processing power of the servers available and how much traffic there will be in the cluster. If there is a lot of Web traffic on a server, uou should consider dedicating the server to Web traffic. You should also distribute databases and replicas in a way that balances the workload.
In general, you should consider the following factors:
Click here
The number of servers to include in the clusteru
Click here
Click here
The number and placement of replicas in a clustern
Click here
Click here
How to distribute databases across servers
Click here
Click here
Whether to create a private LAN for cluster traffict
Click here
Where to locate the ICMi
151445472029232807
Planning the location of the ICM
You can configure the ICM in several ways. For example you can:
Click here
Configure a single ICM and place it outside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Configure multiple ICMs outside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Configure a single ICM as part of the cluster
Click here
Click here
Configure multiple ICMs as part of the cluster
Click here
Click here
Configure one ICM outside the cluster and one inuide the cluster
Click here
See Also
Click here
Compatibility with previous versions of Domino
Click here
Click here
How the Internet Cluster Manager works
Click here
Click here
Generating URLs that refer to the ICMy
Click here
Click here
Configuring the ICM
Click here
Click here
Using clusters over the Internet
Click here
it system files
Click here
Click here
Track mail messages
Click here
Click here
Generate a mail usage report
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Web%Administrator
Click here
&]UFU
&Arial
You configure the ICM by making entries in the Internet Cluster Manager seltion of the Server document. You can also set up a separate IP address for the ICM. You can then start the ICM.
You can configure the ICM settings on one server and have more than one ICM access these settings. This lets ICMs on different servers share a common configuration. You should include the ICM configuration information on every Web server in the cluster, not just the server on which you run the ICM. You do this because each Web server uses its own Server document to determine how to,generate URLs that refer to the ICM. The Web server obtains the host name of the ICM from the Server document. The Web server then uses that host name to generate URLs that reference the ICM.
151505472029232806
To configure the ICM
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab. d
2. Expand Server and click All Server Documents.
3. In the Results pane, select the Server document for the server on which you want to run,the ICM; then click Edit Server.g
4. Click the Server Tasks - Internet Cluster Manager tab.
5. Complete the following fields:r
Section
Field name
Description
Basics
Cluster name
The name of the cluster the ICM will service. If this field is blank, Domino uses the name of the cluster that contains this server.
ICM Notes port
The name of the Notes port the ICM will use to communicate with HTTP clients. If you leave this field blank, which is the default, the ICM can use any Notes port to communicate with HTTP clients. Enter a port name only if you want to restrict ICM communication to one specific port.
ICM SSL keyfile
The name of the SSL key file that contains certificates to identify the ICM when communicating with HTTP clients.
Allow users to browse databases in the cluster over HTTP
Lets HTTP clients view a list of the databases in a cluster.
When you enable this field, users can enter http://t
icmhostname
/?OpenServer as the URL to access. Entering this URL displays a list of databases on the servers in the cluster associated with the ICM named in t
icmhostnamee
Configurations
Get configuration from
Lets you s|ecify a different Server document to get configuration information from. This field lets multiple ICMs share the same configuration.
Obtain ICM configuration from:
This field appears when you select "another server document" in the field "Get configuration from." Enter the name of the server whose Server document contains the configuration you want to use.
ICM hostname
The fully qualified name of the host that clients should use to communicate with the ICM. This can be the registered DNS name or the IP address.
The Domino Web server uses this field to create URLs that reference the ICM. If this field is blank, the Web server will not be able to generate URLs that refer to the ICM.
ICM HTTP Port Settinls
TCP/IP port number
Enter the port number for the ICM to use.T
If you are running the ICM on the same server as the Web server, you must avoid address and port conflicts. If you do not give the ICM its own IP address, be sure the port number the ICM is using is different from any of the other port numbers you use on the server.
TCP/IP port status
To enable HTTP communication with the ICM, choose enabled. To disable HTTP communication with the ICM, choose Disabled.
SSL port number
Enter the port number to use for SSL.
If you are running the ICM on the same server as the Web server, and you do not give the ICM its own IP address, be sure the SSL port number is different from any of the otler port numbers you use on the server.
SSL port status
To enable HTTPS communication with the ICM, choose enabled. To disable HTTPS communication with the ICM, choose Disabled.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Save and close the Server document.
When the ICM starts, it lolks at the Server document on the server on which it is running to find the ICM cluster name and its network address. It then obtains the host name and port settings from the same Server document or from the Server document specified in the field "Obtain ICM configuration from."
If you run the ICM on the same system as a Domino Web server, you must avoid IP address or port number conflicts. The best approach is to assign the ICM its own IP address. You can also have the ICM share an IP address,with the Web server if you specify different port numbers for the ICM and the other protocols on the Web server.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a separate IP address for the ICM
Click here
Click here
Planning to use the ICM
Click here
Click here
How the Internet Cluster Manager works
Click here
Click here
\sing clusters over the Internet
Click here
&Arial
To start the ICM each time you start the server, append the ICM keyword to the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file. For example,
To start the ICM manually while the server is already running, type the following at the server console:
load icm
You can run the ICM task on multiple servers to ensure that an ICM is running at all times, even when one ICM is out of service. When you run more than one ICM, you typically use the same configuration settings for each ICM.
See Also
Click here
Planning to use the ICMi
Click here
Click here
Configuring the ICMd
Click here
Click here
Using clusters over the Internet
Click here
9><5e
&Arial
When using the ICM,
Click here
failover
Click here
and
Click here
workload balancing
Click here
work the same as for standard Domino clusters. Domino computes the server availability index based on,all open sessions, whether they are from Notes clients, HTTP clients, or other Domino servers. To configure workload balancing and failover, you use the same settings, such as
. For database availability, you also use the same settings, such as marking a database
Click here
out of service
Click here
or
Click here
pending delete
Click here
Note
Unlike in a standard Domino cluster, the ICM can direct a client to a server that is MAXUSERS, if no other server is available.r
The ICM maintains the following inlormation so that it can find a replica when a client asks for one:
Information about which databases are available in the cluster and where they are stored. The ICM obtains this information from the Cluster Database Directory.i
Information about the availability of each server. The ICM obtains this information each time it probes the servers in the cluster.
Information about which Web servers are configured for HTTP and which are configured for HTTPS. The ICM obtain| this information from the Server documents of each server in the cluster.
To determine which replica of a database to open, the ICM does the following:
Determines where replicas reside and whether they are marked out of service or pending delete.
Checks the server availability index of each server that contains the database.
Checks the availability of the server by pinging the HTTP port or the HTTPS port, depending on the client request.
Lliminates any servers that are not reachable or are RESTRICTED.
Eliminates any servers that are BUSY or MAXUSERS.
Selects a server from those remaining. If there are no servers remaining, the ICM chooses a server that is BUSY or MAXUSERS, if one is available. If there are multiple servers remaining, the ICM chooses the server with the lightest current workload.
After choosing the server to access, the ICM looks at the Server document to determine which port to use tl access the server.
151505472029232806
When a server failse
When an HTTP client is connected to a server that fails, the client receives a message saying that the server is not responding. To fail over to a different replica, if one is available, the user must contact the ICM again. The user can do this in the following ways:
Click the Back button in the browser one or more times to connect to a page through the ICM
Use a bookmark
Type the URL
The user may or may not have to reauthenticate with the new server. This is determined by the following factors:
If the user already authenticated with the new server during this session, no authentication is necessary
If the HTTP client and the server both support SSL3, reauthentication occurs automatically
See Also
Click here
Using clusters over the Internet
Click here
&Arial
The ICM supports SSL. The ICM can use the same SSL certificates that the Domino Web server uses or you can specify a different set of
Click here
SSL certificates
Click here
for the ICM. You can configure the ICM to require SSL in the Internet Cluster Manager section of the Server document. The ICM uses settings,in the Internet Port section of the Server document to determine the SSL protocol version and whether to accept expired certificates.
In addition, normal Domino server and database security are in effect when using the ICM. The ICM, however, does not participate in the security process. When an HTTP client wants to access a database, it sends an anonymous request to the ICM. The ICM responds by telling the client which server to access. The client then automatically redirects its request to thl appropriate server. The server then establishes a dialog with the client and uses whatever security measures are in effect on that server to authenticate the user. If you want to protect the ICM itself from unauthorized access, you can
Click here
use a firewall
Click here
See Also
Click here
Using clusters over the Internet
Click here
&Arial
The ICM relords significant events, such as not being able to find a database, in the Miscellaneous Events view in the log file.
151505472029232806
Viewing the log file
To view ICM events in the log file, do one of the following:
151505472029232807
From the Domino Administrator
1. In the Server pane, select the server that stores the log file you want to view.
2. Click the Servers - Analysis tab.
3. Expand Notes Log, and then click Miscellaneous Events.
4. In the Results pane, open the Log Entry document you want to view.
151505472029232808
From the Domino server log file
1. Open the Domino server log file.
2. Open the Miscellaneous Events view.
3. Open the document you want to look at.
151505472029232809
Viewing ICM statistics
The ICM generates
Click here
statistics that indicate how the cluster and the ICM are performing
Click here
. To view these statistics, you can do one of the following:
151505472029232810
From the Domino Administrator
1. In the Server pane, select the server you want.
2. Click the Server - Statistics tab.
3. In the All Statistics list, click ICM.s
151505472029232811
From the server console
Type
show stat icm
You can use these statistics in conjunction with the
Click here
standard cluster statistics
Click here
to determine which servers in the cluster are the busiest so you can better balance the workload in the cluster.
See Also
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
Click lere
Using clusters over the Internet
Click here
&Arial
This section describes how to set up and run Domino in a Microsoft Cluster Server environment.
This section includes the following topics:
Click here
Comparing Domino clustering and Microsoft Cluster Server clustering
Click here
Click here
Types of MSCS configurations
Click here
Click here
Planning to install the Domino server in an MSCS,environment
Click here
Click here
Installing the Domino Server in an MSCS environmente
Click here
Click here
Creating MSCS Resource Groups for Domino
Click here
Click here
Running the Domino server under MSCS
Click here
&Arial
If ylu use Microsoft Cluster Server (MSCS), you can set up Domino to run with it even though they use different methods of clustering.
Domino uses "application clustering" to provide high availability, scalability, and workload balancing. Domino monitors the cluster and determines when failover and workload balancing should occur based on parameters that you set. You also determine how many replicas of a database to create.
MSCS uses "operating system clustering" to provide high availalility. MSCS depends on the operating system to monitor the cluster and determine when failover should occur. MSCS supports two servers (nodes) in a cluster; the nodes must share a common disk device. MSCS does not currently support workload balancing.
MSCS failover works differently from Domino failover. If an MSCS node fails when Domino is running on it, the other node takes over. It claims ownership of the disk where the Domino data files reside, uses the same IP address that the Domino servlr uses, and starts the Domino server. Because the Domino server continues to run on the same IP address with the same data files, users may not notice that failover occurred.o
See Also
Click here
Running Domino with Microsoft Cluster Server
Click here
&Arial
You can set up MSCS in an active-passive configuration or an active-active configuration. In an active-passive configuration, only one node at a time provides services to clients. The passive node is used only to provide failover when the active node fails. Because the passive node must be able to take lver when the active node fails, you install the Domino program files on both nodes. However, you install the Domino data files on the shared disk resource only.c
In an active-active configuration, both nodes provide services to clients. If a node fails, the other node takes over the failed node's resources and provides services to the users of both nodes. When you use an active-active MSCS configuration, each node must be capable of running two Domino servers, one for each node. Therefore, you,install two
Click here
partitioned serverst
Click here
on each node. You still install the data files on the shared disk resource.
See Also
Click here
Planning to install the Domino server in an MSCS environment
Click here
Click here
Installing the Domino Server in an MSCS environment
Click here
Click here
Runnlng Domino with Microsoft Cluster Server
Click here
Click here
Installing and setting up partitioned servers
Click here
&Arial
Prior to installing Domino, you should be aware of certain requirements and issues that can affect your installation.
315431660829238428
Requirements for running Domino in an MSCS environment
The following is required to run Domino as a cluster application in an MSCS environment:
You must use Domino 4.6.2 or later.e
The Domino servers and clients must be configured to use TCP/IP. Alternatively, they can be configured to use NetBIOS over TCP/IP.
To configure Domino in an active-active configuration, you must install the Domino servers as
Click here
partitioned servers
Click here
. You must have a Domino server license for each partitioned server.
For information about installing Domino servers as partitioned servers, see
Administering the Domino System.
Note
Domino virtual servers are not currently supported in an MSCS environment.
315431660829238429
Overview of special installation and configuration issues
You must install the Domino program files on each node of the MSCS cluster. They must be installed on one of the local (non-shared) drives of the cluster, and the path for the Domino program directory (Domino program folder) must be the same on both nodes.
You must install the Domino data directory (Domino data folder) on one of the shared drives. For active-active configurations, each data directory must be on its own shared drive. Any other data files referenced by the Domino se|ver (for example, the HTML or CGI directories of the Domino Web server, or subdirectories located through directory links) must also reside on a shared drive.n
Each Domino server must be assigned aTCP/IP address that is distinct from the TCP/IP addresses of the cluster nodes. This must be a static IP address; it cannot be administered through DHCP. MSCS activates this IP address on a cluster node before starting the Domino server. This defines a "virtual server," which is mapped to run on one lf the cluster nodes by MSCS. (While similar in concept, this virtual server is not related to Domino virtual servers, which is a feature of the Domino Web server.)
If a Domino server will use NetBIOS overTCP/IP connections, you must give the server a network address that is different from the network name of either cluster node. (You enter the network address in the Net Address field on the Ports - Notes Network Ports tab in the Domino Server document.) Typically, this network address is the slme as the name you assign to the Domino server.
When MSCS detects a failure of the hardware, operating system, or Domino server software, it attempts to restart the Domino server, either on the same node or on the other node of the cluster. If there is a Domino server password, Domino waits for you to enter this password manually before it initializes and begins processing user requests. You can avoid this need for manual intervention by configuring the Domino server with a zero length passworl. You must do this when you create the server ID.
315431660829238430
Naming Requirements
Certain resources on the cluster nodes must be identified in the MSCS configuration. Names are required for the:
Domino Server Resource Group(s)
IP address resource(s)
Network name resource(s)
Domino server resource(s)
All MSCS resources are organized into a flat name space. There is no hierarchy of nales by resource type or application.
It is important to develop good naming conventions so that resources can be easily identified. In particular, a resource name should reflect the type of resource and the application or group to which it is assigned.
See Also
Click here
Installing the Domino Server in an MSCS environment
Click here
Click here
Configuring the Domino Server
Click here
Click here
Creating MSCS Resource Groups for Domino
Click here
Click here
Running Domino with Microsoft Cluster Server
Click here
&Arial
The installation process involves three procedures:
Click here
Installing Domino on the first node
Click here
For active-passive configurations, you install a single Domino server. For active-active configurations, you install two Domino partitioned servers. The Domino program directories should be placed on the node
,s non-shared drive and the Domino data directories should be placed on shared drives.
Click here
Installing Domino on the second node
Click he|e
As on the first node, you install a single server for active-passive configurations and two partitioned servers for active-active configurations. Specify the same locations for the Domino program and Domino data directories as on the first node.
Click here
Configuring the Domino server (or servers)
Click here
See Also
Click here
Creating MSCS Resource Groups for Domilo
Click here
Click here
Running Domino with Microsoft Cluster Server
Click here
&Arial
When users or servers get a "not authorized to access the server" message, try these tips to identify and then fix the problem.
1.
Click here
Check the Domino Directory
Click here
2.
Click here
Check the server ID
Click here
3. Check that the user has the proper certification to access the server.
4. Check for network or hardware problems.
See Also
Click here
Server access - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
To run a Domino Server under MSCS, you must create a resource group for thk server and add resources to the group. This includes the following procedures:
Click here
Creating a resource group for the Domino server
Click here
Click here
Creating the IP address resource
Click here
Click here
Creating the network name resource
Click here
Click here
Assigning the physical disk resource+to the Domino resource groupe
Click here
Click here
Creating the generic service resource
Click here
When you run two Domino servers in an active-active configuration, you must create a resource group for each Domino server.o
The following table lists some basic information you must supply while completing these procedures. The table also includes examples that are used throughout the procedures. The examplks describe how each value is used as you complete the procedures.
Type of information
Example
Name of the Domino server resource group
Gemini Resource Groupn
The computer names of the nodes in the cluster
CASTOR, POLLUX
Name of the IP address resource
Gemini_IP
Value of the IP address resource
(This is the IP address of the+Domino MSCS virtual server.)
9.53.112.38
Name of the network name resource
Gemini_NetName
Value of the network name resource
(This is the network name of the Domino MSCS virtual server.)
Gemini
Name of the physical disk resource
(This is a shared drive containing the Domino Data directory.)
Disk F:l
Name of the generic service resource
Gemini_Domino_NTService
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
It is important to follow the procedures in this section in the order they are listed. Some of the procedures depend on values from previous procedures.
After you create tke resource group, you must
Click here
enable the network name as the computer name.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Installing the Domino Server in an MSCS environment
Click here
Click here
Configuring the Domino Server
Click here
Click here
Running Domino with Microsoft Cluster Server
Click here
&Arial
This part of the configuration requires a
&hotfix
8 for MSCS, which you can obtain from Microsoft. The hotfix is called CLUSFIXI.EXE.
Note
It is important to perform the steps+in this procedure in the order specified.
1. Install
the Microsoft hotfix CLUSFIXI.EXE. on both nodes of the cluster.
2. On the Dependencies tab of the Properties dialog box for the NT Domino generic service, make the generic service resource dependent on ONLY the Network Name.
3. On the Parameters tab of the Properties dialog box for the NT Domino generic service, enable the "Use Network Name as Computer Name" option.
4. On the Dependenkies tab, make the NT Domino generic service dependent on other necessary resources.
See Also
Click here
Creating MSCS Resource Groups for Domino
Click here
&Arial
Once you have installed and configured the Domino server, you can run it under the control of MSCS.
315431660829238428
Starting Domino under MSCS
In an MSCS environment, you start Domino from the Cluster Administrator, not from the Windows NT desktop of the cluster kodes. To start Domino, do the following:
1. Select the Domino server group (in our example, Lotus Domino Server -- Gemini ).
2. Right-click the group, and then choose Bring Online.
Caution
Avoid changing the system time on the servers in the cluster while Domino is running; data corruption can occur during failover if the system time is not synchronized between the cluster nodes. The recommended approach for updating the clocks of {ervers in a cluster is to shut down all cluster applications, and stop the cluster service on both nodes. Then change the system time on the cluster nodes, and restart the cluster service on both nodes. (MSCS provides a time service to automatically synchronize the system time when servers enter the cluster; but if you change the time manually on one server in a cluster, it can take an extended period of time for the time service to resynchronize the system time between the cluster nodes.)
315431660829238429
Configuring Notes clients
for TCP/IP
Notes clients must be configured for TCP/IP or NetBIOS over TCP/IP to access a Domino server running in an MSCS environment.
1. In Notes, choose File - Preferences - Notes Preferences.
2. Click the Ports icon.
3. Enable TCPIP.
4. If TCPIP is not the first port in the Communication Ports list, use the Reorder arrows to move it to the top of the list.
5. Click OK.
315431660829238430
Stopping Domino under MSCS
In an MSCS environment, you stop Domino from the Cluster Administrator, not from the Domino program itself. To stop Domino, do the following:
1. Select the Domino server group (in our example, Lotus Domino Server -- Gemini).
2. Right-click the group, and then choose Take Offline.
While Domino is running, the Domino server console is displa{ed on the local console for the cluster node on which it is running. Do not use the Quit command from the Domino console to shut down the Domino server. MSCS detects the server shutdown and attempts to restart it.
See Also
Click here
Running Domino with Microsoft Cluster Server
Click here
&Arial
There are three categories of cluster statistics that help you analyze clusters:
Click here
Cluster Manager statistics
Click here
Click here
Cluster Replicator statistics
Click here
Click here
Internet Cluster Manager statistics
Click here
See Also
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
Topics in this section describe how to set up and manage Domino databases.
Click here
Database design, management, and administration
Click here
Click here
Database catalog
Click here
Click here
Database library
Click here
Click here
Database maintenance
Click here
Click here
Directory and database links
Click here
Click here
The Domain Search indexs
Click here
Click here
The Files tab in the Domino Administrator
Click here
Click here
Rolling out a database
Click here
Topics in other sections describe database security, performance, and replication, as well as how to troubleshoot database problems.
Click here
The database access control list
Click here
Click here
Database encryptionf
Click here
Click here
Database properties that optimize database performance
Click here
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
Click here
Troubleshooting database performance
Click here
Y)XBKh
&Arial
The following tables list the mandatory and optional tasks that you, as a Domino administrator, must complete to put a database into production. You must have Manager access in a database access control list (ACL) to perform these tasks.o
80132454429212462
Mandatory tasks
Perform these tasks before you copy a new database or database replica to a production server.
For more information on the following tasks, see the Domino 5 Administration Help and Application Development with Domino Designer. For more information on replication, see "
Click here
Replicas
Click here
Task
:&"CU
Considerations
Set up
Click here
the database ACL for users
Click here
and servers that require access
:&"CU
If you plan to make replicas of a database, make sure that the database ACL lists the name of each server containing a replica. If the database uses roles, assign all roles to each server.
If you assign ACL settings on the original database before copying it to a server, assign yourself Manager access on the original. Otherwise, you won't have Manager access to the new copy.
Verify that
Click here
server ACLss
Click here
are set up correctly
:&"CU
Without proper access in a server ACL, users and servers won't have access to databases on the server.
Verify that the Domino Directory contains the necessary Group documents
:&"CU
Create a Group document in the Domino Directory before adding a Group name in a database ACL. If you must create a Group, make sure that the Group document replicates before you copy the database to a server. n
Click here
Copy the new database to a serveri
Click here
:&"CU
Consider server disk space, topology, and network protocols. Placing a database on a cluster requires that you consider cluster resources.
Verify that the database appears in the Open Database dialog box
:&"CU
While designing a database, the database designer often removes the database title from the list that appears in the Open Database dialog box. This deters the user from opening the database. After the database is completed, make sure that the database title appears in the Open Database dialog box.
Decide
Click here
which servers require replicas
Click here
of the database and then
Click here
crea{e the replicas
Click here
:&"CU
To make this decision, consider the purpose and size of database, the number and location of users who need access to the database, and the existing replication schedules between servers.
Verify that Server documents in the Domino Directory are enabled for replication
:&"CU
Server documents are, by default, enabled for replication, but to avoid any problems, verify thi{.
Create or edit
Click here
Connection documents
Click here
:&"CU
If several servers have a replica of the database, make sure that any necessary Connection documents are set up so that replication can occur.
Set up a replication schedule
:&"CU
Consider the location and time zones of users and the frequency of database updates needed.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
80132454429212463
Optional tasks
The following tasks are not required, but you may want to perform them after your database is in production. Whether or not you need to do these tasks may depend on the type of database you are rolling out to the production server and the roles assigned to an application developer, database manager, or Domino administrator in {our organization.
For more information on the following tasks, see Domino 5 Administration Help and Domino 5 Designer Help. For more information on replication, see "
Click here
Replicas."
Click here
Task
Considerations
Create About and Using documents
Provide the name, phone number, and e-mail address of database managers in the About This Database document. Provide information about the application in the Using This Database document.h
Click here
Create an index for the database
Click here
Create a full-text index for the database if users need to search the database for information. If you create the index before you copy a new copy of the database or a replica to a server, the index settings carry over to the new copy or replica.
Distribute
Click here
encryption keys
Click here
If the database design includes encrypted fields, distribute encryption keys to users.
Click here
Create a Mail-In Database document
Click here
If the database is designed to receive mail, you must create a Mail-In Database document in the Domino Directory.
Click here
List the database in the+database catalog
Click here
By default, all databases are listed in the database catalog. If you wish, add categories to control how the database appears in the catalog views.
Click here
Publish the database in a database library
Click here
Create a library of selected databases on one server or several servers for your users.
Notify users that the database is available
Provide the database title, file name, and server location.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Database design, management, and administration
Click here
&Arial
Plan the deployment of new databases before you copy them to a server. Tasks to consider are:
Set up all appropriate Server documents in the Domino Directory, including a
Click here
Mail-In Database document
Click here
if the database is designed to receive mail.
Make sure that users and other servers are listed in the
Click here
server's access control list
Click here
. Otherwise, they won't be able to access the database.
Use subdirectories to group related databases rather than copy them to the root directory. Users can find related databases more easily if they are in one location. This also helps administrators by allowing them to replicate "like" databases, since Connection documents let you
Click here
replicate
Click here
+according to directory.
322786390429208427
To copy a new database to a server
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the
Click here
database ACL
Click here
or the Create new databases privilege in the Server Access section of the Server Document in the Domino Directory.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page, choose File - Database - Properties, click the Design tab, and make sure tkat "Show in 'Open Database' dialog" is selected.
3. Choose File - Database - New Copy.
4. Next to Server, click the arrow to display a list of servers. Then select the server on which you want to place the copy.
5. Next to Title, enter a title for the database. The database icon and the Open Database dialog box display this title.
6. Next to File Name, enter the path and file name of the database. Limit the file name to eight characters plus the+NSF extension.
7. Choose one:
"Database design and documents" to copy the database design and all documents
"Database design only" if you do not want to copy any pre-existing documents
8. Optional steps:
Choose "Access Control List" to copy the ACL.
You can assign ACL settings (including roles) before or after you copy a local database to a server. Before you copy the database, assign yourself Manager access to the ACL so {hat you will have Manager access to the new copy. If you do not copy the ACL when you copy the database to a server, the ACL in the new copy automatically lists you with Manager access.
Select "
Click here
Create Full Text index
Click here
" to create a full-text index on the new copy.
You can create a full-text index now or at a later date.
Choose
Click here
Encryption
Click here
+to encrypt the new copy of the database.m
This option is intended to prevent unauthorized people from accessing a database when physically at a workstation, laptop computer, or server. If you use this option, Notes encrypts the database using a specified ID and only a user with that ID can gain access to the database directly from a server or workstation. You can choose one of three encryption levels. This encryption setting also carries over to copies of the database made at the operating sys{em level.
To allow a database to grow beyond the default 1GB limit, click "Size Limit," select a size option, and click OK. This option applies only to Release 4 format databases.
Note
The maximum size for a Release 4 database is 4GB. The maximum size for a Release 5 database is 64GB on Windows and UNIX and 32GB on OS/2.
See Also
Click here
Database design, management, and administration
Click here
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
Click here
Notes and Domino encryption
Click here
&Arial
To+organize databases on a server, you can:
Store databases in the Domino data directory. This is the default.
Create subdirectories of the Domino data directory to store groups of related databases.
Click here
Create directory folders
Click here
and store databases outside of the Domino data directory. Then create links to the databases from the Domino data directory.
When you create directory and database links+ you can increase database security by specifying the ACL access for an individual user or group in the Create New Link dialog box. Only the database ACL controls access to individual databases, not the links. r
44620409629208575
Directory links
You can store databases in a directory outside the Domino data directory to take advantage of disk space available on other servers. Then you create a link that is in the Domino data directory and points to that director{. In the Domino data directory, users see the directory link MKTG.DIR as the subdirectory MKTG, with a directory folder icon next to it. Users who do not have access to a linked directory can see the directory link, but cannot access the directory.
You can use a directory link on a Web server to point browser users to a directory outside the Domino data directory. When you create this link, you must specify access for browser users -- for example, specify access for anonymous users or enter tke names of users who use name-and-password or SSL client authentication.
44620409629208576
Database links
You can store a single database outside the Domino data directory and create a database link to it from the Domino data directory. A database link appears in the Domino data directory as a database icon followed by the name of the linked database.
Create the database link using the complete path and file name of the database you want to link {o. For example, create the database link SALES.NSF to point to the database D:\PROJECTS\SALES\SALES.NSF. Domino automatically appends the NSF extension to the database name. When you delete the database link, you remove the link, but not the database that the link references.
You can use a database link on a Web server to point browser users to a database in a directory outside of the Domino data directory. If the database link points to a database on another server, browser users cannot acce{s the database.
See Also
Click here
Creating directory folders
Click here
Click here
Creating directory and database links
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:a
Repl_Error_Tolerance=
number
Description:
Specifies the number of replication errors of the same type that can occur between two databases before the server terminates replication.
Applies to:
Servkrse
Default:
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ReplicationTimeLimit=
minutes
Description:
Specifies a time limit (in minutes) for replication between one server and another. If this setting is not included in the NOTES.INI file, there is no+time limit.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Replication Time Limit field in the Routing/Replication tab in the Connection document in the Domino Directory
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
hronize Windows NT and Notes users.
Click here
1x"T(D
&Arial
Domain Search lets users search databases and files in a Domino domain. Administrators and database managers can include or exclude a database in Domain Search. They can also create a full-text index to allow users to search for information only in a single database. The Domain Indexer indexes all databases in the domain with the "Include in multi database indexing" option selected.
120376988829248248
Creating and using indexes
Users enter a word or phrase(in the search bar of a database to locate all documents containing the word or phrase. Users complete a search form to search all the documents, document attachments, and files in a domain. Domino returns the search results.
324198153629213060
Single database index
To create an index for a database, you must have at least Designer access to the database. When you create the index, choose index options that control how users can search and what information they chn search. Users can also create a full-text index for local databases.
324198153629213062
Web site index
To index one or more Web site databases, set up single full-text indexes so users can search for information on the Web site. A database designer creates a form into which users enter criteria about the search. After users submit the form, Domino returns a list of links to documents that match the search criteria. You create a full-text index for a Web site hatabase using the same method as for a Domino database.
7922579229239049
Domain Search Catalog index
Domain Search lets you index and search for documents, document attachments, and files in a file system in an entire domain of Domino databases. Domain Search is set up on a Domain Catalog server and uses the Domain Catalog database to administer the databases and file systems to search. Search results are filtered based on user access. The Domain Catalog automatihally builds a central Domain Index on the Domain Catalog server that all Domain Search queries run against.
To include a database in the Domain Catalog index, select the "Include in multi database indexing" property on the Design tab of the Database Properties box. You can also include several databases all at once by using the Multi-Database Index tool on the Files tab in Domino Administrator.
For more information on changes in search and on migrating to Domain Search, see Dominh 5 Administration Help.
8047632029208831
Index location
Domino stores the index file in a subdirectory of the directory where the database file is located, usually the Domino data directory. The name of this subdirectory is
filename
.FT, where
filename
is the file name of the indexed database -- for example, /EMPLOYEE.FT.
8047632029208832
Index size
Full-text indexes consume disk space ahd may affect system resources and performance, so consult with the system administrator before enabling databases for multi-database indexing and creating full-text indexes. You select the properties that affect index size on the Full Text tab of the Database Properties box or from the Full Text Index dialog box of the Domino Administrator.
The amount of text in the database. Non-text elements such as bitmaps, buttons, and agents are not indexed.o
The types of text included in the index. In a single-database search index, you can index attachments, OLE objects, and encrypted fields. Each option increases the size of the index. r
The option chosen for Index breaks. The "Index sentence and paragraph breaks" option generates a larger index, but allows ushrs to include proximity operators in searches to find documents that contain two words in proximity to each other.
The case of the index. In a case-sensitive index, Domino indexes each word twice -- for example, database and Database. This increases index size by about 15%.
167799529629213250
Limiting indexed numeric and date fields
Use the NOTES.INI settings FTV_Max_Fields or FTV_Fields_database to limit the number of numeric and date fields that axe indexed for single database indexes.
For more information on these variables, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
8047632029208833
Indexes and replication
Because full-text indexes don't replicate, you must create a full-text index for each database replica. When you create a database replica, you have the option to create a full-text index on the replica. The index options on the replica are the same as the index options for the full-text index of xhe original database.
8047632029208834
Index update frequency
You must periodically update full-text indexes to keep them synchronized with changes to the databases. By default, the Updall server task automatically updates indexes on server databases at 2 AM. Updall also updates indexes for databases according to the frequency you select in the Update frequency (servers only) box. You can use the ServerTasksAt2 setting in the NOTES.INI file to schedule when Updall(performs automatic index updates.
For more information on the ServerTasksAt2 setting, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Including databases in Domain Search
Click here
Click here
Creating a full-text index for a single database
Click here
Click here
Multi-Database Index
Click here
&Arial
Domino stores the index file in a subdirectory of the directory where the database file is located, usually the Domino data directory, or in a directory to which you have created a link.
8047632029208831
To create an index from the bookmarks page
You can find out whether or not a database is indexed by looking at the Full Text tab on the Database Properties box.
For more information on the Full Text tab, see Notes 5 Help.
1. Make sure you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page, and then choose File - Database - Properties.i
3. Click the Full Text tab.t
4. Click Create Index.
5. In the "Full Xext Create Index" dialog box, do one of the following:b
To accept the default settings to create the index, click OK
To customize the index, change any of the options shown in the table of index options belowu
6. Select an update frequency from the list in the option, "Update frequency (servers only)."
7. Click OK.
8. Inform users that the database is indexed.c
8047632029208832
To create an index from the Homino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. In the Domino Administrator Server list, select the server that stores the database(s).
3. In the Files tab, select all the databases you want to index.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Tools - Database - Full Text Index.
5. Select Create.
6. To customize the index, change any of the options shown in the Options table below.
7. Select an update frequency from the list for the option,
8Update frequency (servers only)."
8. Click OK.
For more information on the update frequency, see "
Click here
Updating full-text indexes
Click here
304640060829203180
Options
The following table describes full-text index options.
Option
Description
Index attached files
Indexes attachments. Also choose("With found text" to include just the ASCII text of attachments, or choose "With file filters" to include the full binary content of attachments. "With found text" is faster than the "With file filters", but less comprehensive.
Index encrypted fields*
Indexes text in encrypted fields.
Index sentence and paragraph breaks
Index includes sentence and paragraph breaks in addition to woxd breaks.
Enable case sensitive searches
Allows searches by exact case match. Example: if you type "Apple" in the search box, Notes does not find "apple."
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
*Selecting the option "Index encrypted fields" increases index size according to the amount of text the
contain and may compromise system security in the following ways:
Search results may display a list of all documents that contain a specific word or phrase, even in encrypted fields. The user won't be able to read the field but will know that the document contains the word or phrase. For example, the Employee form in the Personnel database contains the encrypted field Salarx. Any user can search the full-text index for "50,000," and documents that contain that figure are returned. However, the user cannot read the contents of the field without the encryption key.i
A full-text index file is unencrypted plain text; therefore, anyone with access to the server can read the file. A user may be able to read text that was previously encrypted.
The encryption key, which is part of the server ID, is active for all databases on the server. If you index a diffhrent database and do not deselect
8Index encrypted fields," any fields using that encryption key are compromised.
See Also
Click here
Updating a full-text index
Click here
Click here
Deleting a full-text index
Click here
Click here
The Domain Search index
Click here
Click here
Creatihg directory and database links
Click here
&Arial
To keep a full-text index up-to-date, choose the appropriate update frequency option for the index. If the database is fulh-text indexed, you can review existing index options settings on the Full-Text Index Options dialog box on the Full Text tab of the Database Properties box before you update the index.
You can change the index update frequency from the bookmarks page or from the Domino Administrator. To determine if the index needs to be updated, display the total of unindexed documents in a database by clicking the "Count unindexed documents" button on the Full Text tab of the Database Properties box.
You can select an update frequency of Daily, Scheduled, Hourly, or Immediate for databases on a server when you create a full-text index by clicking the Create Index button on the Full Text tab of the Database Properties box or from the Full Text Index dialog box in Files - Tools - Tools pane in the Domino Administrator.
The setting you select affects server processing, so consult with the Domino system administrator before you choose an update frequency. Decide the update frequency fhr the index based on these factors:
How often the database contents are updated
How soon users need to find new information in the databasee
How big the database isd
How much server disk space is available
324198153629213061
Daily and Scheduled frequency options
Select the Daily option to schedule the index update of a very large database when the Updall server task runs by default at 2 AM, since updating a laxge index can take some time.
Specify a different time for Updall to update the index of a database by selecting the Scheduled option and creating a Program document in the Domino Directory. Domino uses a Program document to determine when to run the Updall server task. If you select the Scheduled option and do not create a Program document for Updall, scheduled updates do not occur.
324198153629213060
Immediate and Hourly frequency options
Unless the(database is very large, select Immediate or Hourly as an update option and then monitor database and server performance. For either selection, update the index less frequently if database and server performance is slow.
8047632029208832
To change the update frequency with the Domino Designer or Notes cliento
You can change the update frequency by selecting Create Index or Index Options on the Full Text tab of the Database Properties box.
1. Make suxe you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.s
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks and choose File - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Full Text tab and click Create Index.
4. In the "Update frequency (servers only)" box, select an option shown in the table of update frequency options.
5. Click OK.
237014716829239068
To change the update frequency from the Domino Administrator
Yox may change the update frequency from the Domino Administrator.
1. Make sure you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the index. 5
3. Click the Files tab and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.m
4. From the Tools pane, select Database - Full Text Index.
5. In the "Index update frequency" box, select an option shown ih the following table of update frequency options.
6. Click OK.
237014716829239069
Update frequency options
The following table describes the update frequency options.
Freqxency option
Updates occur
Daily
Nightly when the Updall server program runs by default at 2 AM
Hourly
Every hour, as scheduled by the Chronos server task
Immediate
As soon as possible after you close the database
Scheduled
As scheduled by a Program document for the Updall server task in the Domino Directory
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
119104096029213866
To schedule Updall in a Program document
If you select the index update frequency option Scheduled,(you must set up a Program document in the Domino Directory.
1. Launch the Domino Administrator.
2. From the Configuration tab, expand the Server section.
3. Click Programs.
4. Create or edit a Server Program document.
5. On the Basics tab:
Type Updall in the "Program name" box.
Type any optional arguments in the "Command line" box.
Type the server name on which the full-text indexed datahase resides in the "Server to run on" box.
6. On the Schedule tab:R
Select Enabled in the Enabled/disabled box.
Select the time for Updall to update the index in the "Run at times" box.e
Select a repeat interval, if any, in the "Repeat interval of" box.
Select the days of the week for Updall to update the index in the "Days of the week" box.t
7. Save and close the Server Program document.
8047632029208835
To display the total of unindexed documentsE
Display the total number of unindexed documents in a database to determine if the index needs to be updated.
1. Make sure you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks and choose File - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Full Text tab.
4. Click "Count unindexed documents."
237014716829239070
To review the index options settings
If the database is already full-text indexed, you can view the existing index settings before you update the index and select an Update frequency (servers only) in the Full Text Index Options dialog box. If the database is not indexed, the Index Options button is dimmed.
1. Make sure you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.F
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks and choose File - Database - Propertiex.
3. Click the Full Text tab.
4. Click Index Options.
5. In the "Update frequency (servers only)" box, select an option shown in the preceding o
You can updaxe an index after adding new information or documents to a database. Domino displays the "Last index time" and "Size of the index" on the Full Text tab after you update the index. To view existing index settings, click Index Options.
1. Make sure you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page and choose File - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Full Text tab.
4. Click Update Index.
8047632029208834
To update an index from the Domino Administrator
You can update an index for one or more databases from the server. After you update an index, Domino displays a dialog box that lists the number of documents added, updated, and deleted, as well as the total bytes indexed during the update.
1. Make sure that you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. In the Domino Administrator Server list, select the shrver that stores the database(s).
3. In the Files tab, select all the databases for which you want to update the index.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Tools - Database - Full Text Index.
5. Select Update.
6. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Deleting a full-text index
Click here
Click here
The Domain Search index
Click here
&Arial
Delete a full-text search index when you no longer need it, when you need to the change the index options, or when you discover problems with the index.
8047632029208832
From the workspace
1. Make sure you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page and choose File - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Full Text(tab.
4. Click Delete Index.
8047632029208831
From the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. In the Domino Administrator Server list, select the server that stores the database(s).
3. In the Files tab, select all the databases for which you want to delete the index.6
4. From the Tools pane, choose Tools - Database - Full Text Index.
5. Select Delete.t
6. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Updating a full-text index
Click here
Click here
The Domain Search index
Click here
&Arial
You can create a database library template to help a group of users find databases that are pertinent to their work or to enable them to add databases to their workspace without using the Open Database dialog box. You publish (add) databases that pertain to a specific collection of users or xo a specific topic in the database library. For example, in a corporate database library, you might publish all databases that deal with corporate policies and procedures. Or in a marketing database library, you might publish databases that are useful to the marketing staff.
The main view in a library lists all published databases alphabetically by title and gives a brief abstract (description) of the database. Each database document provides the title, abstract, and replica ID of the databaxe, and lists the database manager. It also includes buttons that let users browse the database or open it and add it to their bookmarks.t
289563088029221721
Server libraries
The databases you choose to publish in a library can be located on any server, and more than one library can reside on a server. When a user attempts to open a database from a database library, Domino uses the database's replica ID number to search for it. Domino first searches for the databash on the user's workspace, then on the user's home server, and finally looks for a database catalog on the home server to find a path to a replica of the database on another server. If a database is moved to another server, Domino searches for the replica ID and automatically opens the database at its new location. Domino updates the replica ID in the database library.
When you create a database library on a server, you automatically become the librarian for that database library with Manager hccess in the library ACL. The -Default- access in the library ACL is Author. Users with Author access may publish databases in the library. To prevent users from publishing databases in a library, change -Default- access to Reader. Then when a user with Reader access in the database library ACL attempts to publish a database, Domino automatically sends the librarian an e-mail containing the request to publish the database. The librarian then publishes the database for the user.
Any user with (Create new databases" access in the Server Access section of a Server document in the Domino Directory can use the library template to create a library on the server. The user who creates the library gets Manager access, and the -Default- access is Author.d
59606761629208580
Local libraries
You can create a local library for your own use, which lists databases on your own hard drive as well as databases on servers. The only difference between a local library and(libraries on servers is that no other users can use your local library or become librarians for it. The -Default- access is Reader when you create a library locally.
See Also
Click here
Creating a database library and assigning librarians
Click here
Click here
Publishing databases in a library
Click here
&Arial
When you create a database library, by default you get Manager access in the database ACL and automatically become a librarian. As a librarian, you can publish databases in the library and make other users librarians. If you plan to create many libraries on a server, create a subdirectory to store them. Then users can easily locate all available libraries. You create a database library from the workspace only.b
59606761629208580s
To create a database library
8. From your bookmarks page, select File - Database - New.
2. Enter a location for the database library (server or Local), title, and file name for the library.
3. Select Show Advanced Templates from the bottom of the New Database dialog.
4. Select the Database Library template (DBLIB4.NTF), and click OK.
If you do not see the template in the list, click the Template Server button, and choose the server that contains the advanced templates from thh list.
59606761629208581
To assign librarians
1. Make sure you have Editor or higher access in the database library ACL.
Make sure that the users to whom you are giving librarian status have at least Author access in the database library ACL.
2. Select the database library icon from your bookmarks page, and choose View - Go To - Librarians.f
3. Open the Librarians document in edit mode._
4. Type the hames of all users who will be librarians. a
Notes automatically adds a semicolon between the names when you save and close the Librarians document.
5. Close and save the new Librarians document.
See Also
Click here
Publishing databases in a library
Click here
Click here
The database library
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Replicators=
value
Description:
Specifies the number of Replicator tasks(that can run concurrently on the server.
Note
You must shut down and restart the server for this setting to take effect.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
1n
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
To publish a database in a database library means to add a database to the library. Unlike a database catalog, which lists all the databases on a server, a library contains a list of databases the librarian has chosen to include, from one server or several servers. For the convenience of different user groups, there can be more than one library on a server.
59606761629208580t
To publish a,database in a library
1. Make sure you have Author or higher access in the library database ACL.
2. Select the database icon of the database you want to publish in the library from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Publish.
4. Select the database library title from the "Available libraries" list, and click OK.
5. Enter information in the following fields, and then close and save the database document:
In,the Abstract field, type a short description of the database that serves as the title that appears in the view
In the "Long Description" field, type a more complete description of the database contents
59606761629208581
To delete a database from a library
1. Make sure you have Author access to a database to delete the database documents you've created and Editor or higher access to delete documents others have created in the library database ACL.
2. Open the library database.
3. Select the database documents for the databases you want to delete.
The document titles have a database icon next to and appear in the Databases by Title view.
4. Delete the documents.
See Also
Click here
Creating a database library and assigning librarians
Click here
Click here
The database library
Click here
&Arial
The database catalog provides a central list of all databases in an organization. You can create a database catalog (CATALOG.NSF) from the CATALOG.NTF template to help users locate databases in an organization. All databases, except for mail databases, are included in the catalog by default when the Catalog program runs. You,can create a full-text index of a large catalog to make searching faster. d
Catalogs provide useful information about databases. Catalogs contain views that list databases by category, manager, replica ID, server, and title. For each database in a view, a database catalog document provides the server name, file name, replica ID, the names of any servers, groups, or users with Manager access to the database, and in the Policy area, includes information from the About This Database document. In lddition, the document displays buttons that let users browse the database or open it and add it to their bookmarks.
Databases are listed in the catalog by default, but you can exclude a database from the catalog by deselecting the "List in Database Catalog" property on the Design tab of the Database Properties box. For databases that you include in the catalog, you can specify categories in the Design property box to determine how the databases appear in the categorized view of the catalog.r
For more information on the Domain Catalog and Domain Search, see the Domino 5 Administration Help.
283240537629211645
Administering database catalogs
Domino runs the Catalog program daily at 1 AM by default to create or update a database catalog on every server. The Catalog task creates a CATALOG.NSF database from the CATALOG.NTF template and populates the catalog with a list of all databases. This daily update ensures that if a database moves to ano|her server, the database entry in the catalog displays the new location. You can populate the catalog at any time by typing the following server command at the server console:
load catalog
To view the documents in the database catalog, you can open the database from your bookmarks page, use the Domino Administrator panel, or the Web Administrator tool.
Once you've created the database catalog, you must
Notify users that the catalog exists and is ready for use
See Also
Click here
Creating and managing a database catalog
Click here
Click here
The database libra|y
Click here
&Arial
After you create a database catalog, assign the appropriate ACL access for Domino administrators and users. Assiln categories to individual databases to control how they appear in the Databases by Category view of the catalog. Periodically monitor the database catalog to control its size. Replicating the catalog to many servers increases the size of the catalog. H
For information about setting up managing the Domain Catalog, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
46073625629214615
To create a database catalog
1. From your bookmarks page, select File - Database - Lew.
2. Enter a location (server or Local), title, and file name for the catalog.
3. Select "Show Advanced Templates" at the bottom of the New Database dialog box.
4. Select the Database Catalog template (CATALOG.NTF), and click OK.
If you do not see the template in the list, click the Template Server button, and choose the server that contains the advanced templates from the list.
59606761629208581c
To set up the ACL lor the database catalog
1. Assign Manager access to the administrators and servers that store the database catalog or a replica. g
2. Select the database catalog from your bookmarks page, and select File - Database - Access Control.
3. Assign these access levels, and then click OK:
Assign to
Access level
All users who are administrators
The server that stores the catalog
All servers that store a replica of the catalog
Manager@
-Default-
Reader
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
59606761629208582
To assign a category to a database
Assign one or more categories to a database to dltermine how the catalog groups the databases listed in the Databases by Category view. If you do not specify categories, then the Databases by Category view is blank.
1. Make sure you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page, and choose File - Database - Properties.
3. Click the Design tab, and select "List in Database Catalog."
4. In the Categories box, type one or more categories lor the database.
Separate category names with a comma or semicolon.
59606761629208580
To reduce the size of a database catalog
The database catalog may grow too large if it replicates to many servers. If the server runs low on disk space, create a separate database catalog for each server rather than replicate the catalog. Limit the size of a database catalog replica by excluding databases that don't need to be listed in it.
You can al|o use the Catalog server program with the argument -P to reduce the size of the database catalog. The optional argument -P excludes the listing of Policy documents in the catalog. The catalog server task runs nightly by default, so you can specify the following parameter in your NOTES.INI file:
ServerTasksAt1=Catalog -P
If a database catalog already exists on the server, Catalog -P excludes only the listing of new policy documents in the catalog. To remove every policy document, |ou must delete the existing database catalog, and recreate it by typing the following server command at the server console:
Load Catalog -P
59606761629208583
To exclude a database from the catalog
By default, all databases are listed in the catalog, except for mail databases.
1. Make sure you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page, and choose File - Datalase - Properties.
3. Click the Design tab, and then deselect "List in Database Catalog."
See Also
Click here
The database catalog
Click here
&Arial
To keep a specific database in good working order, perform these tasks regularly.s
Task
Frequency
Click here
Monitor replication, if a database replicates
Click here
Daily
Click here
Check for and consolidate replication or save conflicts
Click here
Daily, for large active databases; weekly for other databases
Click here
Monitor database activity
Click here
Weekly
Click here
Monitor database size
Click here
Weekly
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
In addition, if you're a server administrator, perform the following tasks regularly to maintain all databases on a server.
Task
Frequency
Run the Updall task
Click here
to update all views and full-text indexes
Click here
Daily. Occurs by default daily at 2 AM.
Run the Designer task
Click here
to keep databases that inherit design from master templates in sync with the master templates
Click here
Daily. Occurs by default daily at 1 AM.
Run the
Click here
Compact task
Click here
For Release 5 databases, weekly or monthly with the -B argument and in conjunction with a backup utility certified for Domino Release 5.
For Release 4 databases, weekly during off-hours.n
Monitor
Click here
the database cache
Click here
Occasionally
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
The Files tab in the Domino Administrator
Click here
&Arial
The Files tab in the Domino Administrator provides an easy way for you to manage files in the Domino data folder. From the Files tab you can:
Click here
View file information
Click here
Click here
Manage databasls -- for example, compact databases and manage ACLs
Click here
Click here
Manage folders and links
Click here
Click here
Display disk space information
Click here
To customize the Files tab, you can:
Click here
Choose the types of files you see
Click here
Click here
Choose the folder contents you see
Click here
Click here
Customize the column display
Click here
396159024029235186
To display the Files tab
1. From the Domino Administrator, select a server in the Server pane on the left. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.b
2. Click the Files tab.H
396159024029235187
To open a specific database or templatea
Select the database or tem|late in the files pane of the Files tab, and then double-click.
See Also
Click here
Database maintenance
Click here
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the Files tab.
2. Il the "Show me" box, select one of the following options to control the type of files that the files pane displays:n
Databases only -- displays databases but not templates
Templates only -- displays templates and databases that act as templates
Mail Boxes only-- displays only mail.box databases for administrators to quickly open when monitoring mail
All database types -- displays all databases and templates
All files -- displays all types of flles
Database links only -- displays only database linksl
3. To choose a combination of files to display, in the box, select Custom, select one or more of these options, and then click OK:
Databasesa
Templates -- displays all templates except advanced templatesl
Or specify one or lore custom file extensions -- displays files with the specified extensions, for example, txT or bmp
See Also
Click here
The Files tab in the Domino Administrator
Click here
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the Files tab.s
2. Use the left pane in the Files tab to select a folder. By default, you see only files in the selected folder. To see all the files in the Dominl data folder, click:
The Files tab can display files only in the data folder and in any folders within the data folder.
See Also
Click here
The Files tab in the Domino Administrator
Click here
&Arial
The files pane of the Files tab in the Domino Administrator displays the following columns of information in the order specified, by default:
Title
Lile name
Physical Path
File Format
Size
Max Size
Quota
Warning
Created
Last Fixup
Is Logged
396159024029235186
To add and remove columns
1. From the Domino Administrator, choose Files - Preferences - Administration Preferences.
2. Select the Files icon.
3. To add a column, select the column in the Available Cllumns box and then click the right arrow to include the column in the Use These Columns box. All available columns are used by default.
4. To remove a column, select the column in the Use These Columns box, and then click the left arrow to remove the column.
5. Click OK.
396159024029235187
To change the order of columns
1. From the Domino Administrator, choose Files - Preferences - Administration Preferences.
2. Sellct the Files icon.
3. Select the column in the Use These Columns box and do the following:n
To move the column one place to the right, click the up arrow below the box.
To move the column one place to the left, click the down arrow below the box.
4. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
The Files tab in the Domino Administrator
Click here
&Arial
The Files tab enables you to easily manage databases from the Domino Administrator,
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the Files tab.
2. Select one or more databases in the files pane.
3. In the tools pane on the right, select Database and then select a tool described in the following table. Or drag selected database(s) to the tool.
Database tool
Description
Click here
Manage ACL
Click here
Manages access control lists
Click here
Create Replica
Click here
Creates replicas of databases using the Administration Process server task
Click here
Compact
Click here
Compacts databases
Click here
Full Text Indexa
Click here
Manages full-text indexes
Click here
Multi-Database Index
Click here
Enables and disables multi-database indexing for databases
Click here
Advanced Properties
Click here
Set advanced database properties
Click here
Quotas
Click here
Sets quotas to limit the size of databasls
Click here
Move
Click here
Moves databases using the Administration Process server task
Click here
Sign
Click here
Signs databases with signatures that can be used for workstation data security
H_MANAGING_ACTIVITY_RECORDING_IN_USER_ACTIVITY_DIALOG_BOXES_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_275100326429204392=Disable automatic activity recording in User Activity dialog boxesH_MANAGING_ACTIVITY_RECORDING_IN_USER_ACTIVITY_DIALOG_BOXES_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_275100326429204393=Enable activity recording in a single database's User Activity dialog boxH_MANAGING_ACTIVITY_RECORDING_IN_USERYACTIVITY_DIALOG_BOXES_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_275100326429204394=Disable activity recording in a single database's User Activity dialog box06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
Updall task\runningUpdall task\schedulingContentsStepsH_RUNNING_THE_UPDALL_SERVER_TASK_USING_THE_START_TASK_DIALOG_BOX_9040_STEPSTopic1Running the Updall taskStepsH_UPDALL_OPTIONS_3277_STEPS
H_RUNNING_THE_UPDALL_SERVER_TASK_USING_THE_START_TASK_DIALOG_BOX_9040_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_84214339229248449=Using the Task - Start toolH_RUNNING_THE_UPDALL_SERVER_TASK_USING_THE_START_TASK_DIALOG_BOX_9040_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_84214339229248450=Using a conyole commandH_RUNNING_THE_UPDALL_SERVER_TASK_USING_THE_START_TASK_DIALOG_BOX_9040_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_84214339229248451=Using a Program document06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Keyboard shortcuts that update or rebuild viewsDatabase Management
Keyboard shortcuts\for viewsViews\keyboard shortcuts forContentsStepsH_KEYBOARD_SHORTCUTS_THAT_UPDATE_VIEWS_STEPSTopic1Keyboard shortcuts that update or rebuild viewsStepsH_KEEPING_DATABASE_INDEXED_UP_TO_DATE_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
H_RUNNING_MULTIPLI_UPDATE_TASKS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_78515926429209017=Using a Configuration settings documentH_RUNNING_MULTIPLE_UPDATE_TASKS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_78515926429209018=Using the Task - Start tool06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ents of a r
Changing the temporary folder used for view rebuildsDatabase Management
Temporary directory\changing for view rebuildingViews\rebuildingContentsOverviewH_CREATING_A_TEMPORARY_DIRECTORY_FOR_VIEW_REBUILDS_OVERTopic1Changing the temporary folder used for view rebuildsOverviewH_KEEPING_DATABASE_INDEXED_UP_TO_DATE_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
?Print
e {h%
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Click here
Security settings
Click here
Synchronizing databases with master templatesDatabase Management
Databases\synchronizingDatabases\templatesDesigner task\updating databases withTemplates\updating databases withContentsAboutH_ABOUT_UPDATING_DATABASE_DLSIGNTopic1Synchronizing databases with master templatesAboutH_DATABASE_MAINTENANCE_CHECKLIST_1115_ABOUT
H_ABOUT_UPDATING_DATABASE_DESIGN_MIDTOPIC_106673209629234325=Running the Designer task using the Task - Start toolH_ABOUT_UPDATING_DATABASE_DESIGN_MIDTOPIC_106673209629234326=Running the Designer task using a console command06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
Fixup task\commandFixup task\schedulingContentsStepsDIALOG 10449 1H_RUNNING_FIXUP_USING_THE_SERVER_STATUS_TAB_7476_STEPSTopic1Running the Fixup taskStepsH_FIXUP_OPTIONS_8097_STEPS
H_RUNNING_FIXUP_USING_THE_SERVER_STATUS_TAB_7476_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_84264339229248449=Using the Task - Start toolH_RUNNING_FIXUP_USING_THE_SERVER_STATUS_TAB_7476_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_84264339229248450=Using a console commandH_RUNNING_FIXUP_USING_THE_SERVER_STATUS_TAB_7476_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_84264339229248451=Using a Program documlntH_RUNNING_FIXUP_USING_THE_SERVER_STATUS_TAB_7476_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_84264339229248453=Using the Fixup tool06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
Notifying users of a moved databaseDatabase Management
Databases\movingContentsStepsH_NOTIFYING_USERS_OF_A_NEW_DATABASE_LOCATION_428_STEPSTopic1Notifying users of a moved databaseStepsH_DATABASE_MAINTENANCE_CHECKLIST_1115_ABOUT
H_NOTIFYING_USERS_OF_A_NEW_DATABASE_LOCATION_428_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_275150326429204392=Making it easy for users to open the new database06 Managing Domino Dltabases09 Maintaining Databases
H_DELETING_DATABASES_2686_ABOUT_MIDTOPIC_78455926429209017=Deleting a replica in a clusterH_DELETING_DATABASES_2686_ABOUT_MIDTOPIC_78515926429209018=Deleting a database that's not in a clusterH_DELETING_DATABASES_2686_ABOUT_MIDTOPIC_275150326429204392=Archiving an obsolete database06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Notifying users of a deleted databaseDatabase Management
.AContentsStepsH_NOTIFYING_USERS_OF_A_DELETED_DATABASE_9905_STEPSTopic1Notifying users of a dele|ed databaseStepsH_DELETING_DATABASES_2686_ABOUT06 Managing Domino Databases09 Maintaining Databases
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ocContent form in the Domain Catalog with the document's metadata filled in. The metadata becomes a link to the documents. When you prompt Notes to do a Domain search, Domain search indexes the metadata about the documents. The Domain catalog provides a list of databases to index.
Note
If Domain search is not set up, you can still capture metadata, but you cannot categorize metadata and post it to the catalog.
1. Select the document.
2. Choose File - Document Properties.
3. Click the Meta tab (fifth tab from left).
4. Click the Categorize button, and choose a category that is listed to categorize your docume
Tools for monitoring the Domino systemSystem Monitoring
Events\definedStatistics\definedStatistics\exampleContentsOverviewH_HOW_STATISTISTS_AND_EVENTS_HELP_YOU_TRACK_YOUR_SYSTEM_RESOURCES_OVERTopic1Tools'for monitoring the Domino systemOverviewH_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Example of using statistics and eventsSystem Monitoring
Domino server probe\exampleStatistic Monitor\exampleStatistics & Events\exampleContentsStepsH_EXAMPLE_OF_HOW_TO_USE_STATISTICS_EVENTS_STEPSTopic1Example of using statistics and eventsStepsH_HOW_STATISTISTS_AND_EVENTS_HELP_YOU_TRACK_YOUR_SYSTEM_RESOURCES_OVER
H_HOW_STATISTISTS_AND_EVENTS_HELP_YOU_TRACK_YOUR_SYSTEM_RESOURCES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_284935148829229898=Troubleshooting with statistics and eventsH_HOW_STATISTISTS_AND_EVENTSWHELP_YOU_TRACK_YOUR_SYSTEM_RESOURCES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_368820115229231514=The statistic monitor documentH_HOW_STATISTISTS_AND_EVENTS_HELP_YOU_TRACK_YOUR_SYSTEM_RESOURCES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_368820115229231515=The Domino server probe03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
right of
Setting up Domino for background system monitoringSystem Monitoring
System monitoring\setting up DominoContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_FOR_SYSTEM_MONITORING_OVERTopic1Setting up Domino for background system monitoringOverviewH_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Starting the Collect and Event tasksSystem Monitoring
Collect task\startingEvent task\startingContentsOverviewH_DOMINO_SERVER_MONITORING_TASKS_OVGRTopic1Starting the Collect and Event tasksOverviewH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_FOR_SYSTEM_MONITORING_OVER
H_DOMINO_SERVER_MONITORING_TASKS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_288747782429228532=To start the Event taskH_DOMINO_SERVER_MONITORING_TASKS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_288747782429228535=To start the Collect task03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Configuring Statistics and Events from the Domino AdministratorSystem Monitoring
.AContentsOverviewH_CONFIGURING_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_FROM_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_OVERTopic1Configuring Statistics and Events from the Domino AdministratorOverviewH_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_OVER03 Administering thg Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
Print
pubnames_v_v3_stats_and_events
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Server Statistic Collection documentSystem'Monitoring
.AContentsOverview
events5_f_servercollectionH_COLLECTING_STATISTICS_OVERTopic1Server Statistic Collection documentOverviewH_CONFIGURING_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_FROM_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
AboutPrintModems and remote connections - Troubleshooting
Dialup connections\troubleshootingModems\troubleshootingRemote connections\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\modemsTroubleshooting\remote connectionsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_MODEM_PROBLEMSTopic1Modems and remote connections - TroubleshootingAbout
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotws
To do this
Procedure
Set a measured column width for a tabl
Domino system statisticsSystem Monitoring
Statistics\creating for an add-in applicationStatistics\modifying existingContentsOverview
H_DOMINO_SYSTEM_STATISTICS_MIDTOPIC_284995148829229899=To create a new statisticH_DOMINO_SYSTEM_STATISTICS_MIDTOPIC_284995148829229898=To view and modify a statistic03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e Width b
Creating monitors System Monitoring
ACL change monitor\creatingContentsOverviewH_CREATING_MONITORING_DOCUMENTS_OVERTopic1Creating monitors OverviewH_CONFIGURING_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_FROM_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
H_REPORTING_STATISTICS_ALARMS_MIDTOPIC_65909958429290097=Viewing alarms03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
@Print
statrp45_f_alarm
CN=Da|id Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
*D]M#:
Creating an ACL change monitorSystem Monitoring
ACL change monitor\creatingContentsSteps
events5_f_acl_monitorH_MONITORING_ACLSTopic1Creating an ACL change moni|orStepsH_CREATING_MONITORING_DOCUMENTS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
events5_f_replication_monitorH_MONITORING_REPLICATIONTopic1Creating a replication monitorStepsH_CREATING_MONITORING_DOCUMENTS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating a file monitorSystem Monitoring
File monitor\creatingContentsSteps
events5_f_file_monitorH_MONITORING_DATABASE_USAGE_AND_ACTIVITYTopic1Creating a file monitorStepsH_CREATING_MONITORING_DOCUMENTS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
?Print
CN=Dlvid Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating probesSystem Monitoring
.AContentsOverviewH_USING_PROBES_OVERTopic1Creating probesOverviewH_CONFIGURING_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_FROM_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_OVER03 Administering,the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating a Domino server probeSystem Monitoring
Domino servlr probe\creatingMonitoring\server connectionsStatistics & Events\Domino server probeContentsSteps
events5_f_accessH_MONITORING_SERVER_CONNECTIONSTopic1Creating a Domino server probeStepsH_USING_PROBES_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating a TCP server probeSystem Monitoring
TCP server probe\creatingContentsSteps
events5_f_tcp_servicesH_PROBING_TCP_SERVICES_STEPSTopic1Creating a TCP server probeStepsH_USING_PROBES_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
events5_f_mailprobeH_CREATING_A_MAIL_PROBE_1047_STEPSTopic1Creating a mail probeStepsH_USINJ_PROBES_OVER
H_STARTING_THE_ISPY_TASK_1786_STEPS=Starting and stopping the ISpy task03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using events to monitor the Domino systemSystem Monitoring
.AContentsOverview
events5_f_messageH_USING_EVENTST_O_MONITOR_THE_DOMINO_SYSTEM_OVERTopic1Using events to monitor the Domino systemOverviewH_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_OVER
H_USING_EVENTST_O_MONITOR_THE_DOMINO_SYSTEM_OVER_MIDTOPIC_65909958429290097=Displaying event messages03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
H_USING_EVENTS_TO_MJNITOR_THE_DOMINO_SYSTEM_MIDTOPIC_285784403229287484=Viewing events03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating an event notification for events based on event criteriaSystem Monitoring
Events\creating based on criteriaEvents\severity typesEvents\types ofContentsStepsH_CREATING_AN_EVENT_NOTIFICATION_FOR_EVENTS_BASED_ON_A_PARTICULAR_EVENT_CRITERIATopic1Creating an event notification for events based on event criteriaStepsH_USING_EVENTS_TO_MONITOR_THE_DOMINO_SYSTEM03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O:Lotus
Creating an event notification for a monitor or probeSystem Monitoring
Event notification\for a monitorEvent notification\for a probeContentsStepsH_CREATING_A_EVENT_NOTIFICATION_FOR_A_MONITOR_OR_PRJBE_STEPSTopic1Creating an event notification for a monitor or probeStepsH_USING_EVENTS_TO_MONITOR_THE_DOMINO_SYSTEM03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
H_DISPLAYNG_EXISTING_EVENT_NOTIFICATION_METHODS_MIDTOPIC_285045148829229898=Creating a notification method for an API03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
H_VIEWING_EVENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_6637030429239402=To view events03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
Print
statrp45_f_event
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
b#YOG
Creating an event notification for a built-in or add-in task eventSystem Monitoring
Event notification\for a built-in or add-in taskContentsStepsH_CREATING_AN_EVENT_NOTIFICATION_FOR_A_BUILT_IN_OR_ADD_IN_TASK_EVENT_STEPSTopic1Creating an event notification for a built-in or add-in task eventStepsH_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
T passwo
All monitors and probes by event numberSystem Monitoring
Monitors\creating new documentsMonitors\editing the documentMonitors\listed by event numbezProbes\creating new documentsProbes\editing the documentContentsOverviewH_ALL_MONITORS_AND_PROBES_OVERTopic1All monitors and probes by event numberOverviewH_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_OVER
H_ALL_MONITORS_AND_PROBES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_109075932829236983=To view and edit a monitor or probe documentH_ALL_MONITORS_AND_PROBES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_109075932829236984=To create a new monitor or probe document03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
Print
CN=David Majar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
:,<H3t
Statistics reportsSystem Monitoring
.AContentsOverviewH__REPORTS_5332_OVERTopic1Statistics reportsOverviewH_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
H_VIEWING_STATISTIC_REPORTS_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_SYSTEM_MIDTOPIC_391325145629231540=To view statistics reports from the Domino AdministratorH_VIEWING_STATISTIC_REPORTS_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_SYSTEM_MIDTOPIC_391325145629231541=To view statistics from the server consoleH_VIEWING_STATISTIC_REPORTS_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_SYSTEM_MIDTOPIC_391325145629231542=To view real-time statisticsH_TO_VIEW_STATISTICS_USING_THE_SERVER_MONITOR_STEPS=To view statistics using the server monitorH_VIEWING_STATISTIC_REPORTS_ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_SYSTEM_MIDTOPIC_391325145629231543=To view a graph of statistics03 Administering the Domino System36 Moniroring the Domino System
?Print
statrp45_f_statistic_report
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Mailing statisticsSystem Monitoring
.AContentsStepsH_MAILING_STATISTICS_3232_STEPSTopic1Mbiling statisticsStepsH__REPORTS_5332_OVER03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The Domino server bonitorSystem Monitoring
Server Monitor\exampleServer monitor\definedContentsOverviewH_SERVER_MONITORING_AT_A_GLANCE_OVERTopic1The Domino server monitorOverviewH_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTS_OVER
H_SERVER_MONITORING_AT_A_GLANCE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_121440656029238391=Task statusH_SERVER_MONITORING_AT_A_GLANCE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_121440656029238392=Example of using the server monitor03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM"O=Lotus
Using the server monitorSystem Monitoring
Monitor\adding a statistic toMonitoring\statisticsMonitoring\tasksServer Monitor\accessingServer monitor\adding a taskSbrver monitor\adding serversContentsSteps
DIALOG 10412 515DIALOG 10421 515DIALOG 10401 594DIALOG 10412 515DIALOG 10421 515DIALOG 10401 594H_USING_THE_SERVER_MONITOR_OVERTopic1Using the server monitorStepsH_SERVER_MONITORING_AT_A_GLANCE_OVER
H_USING_THE_SERVER_MONITOR_OVER_MIDTOPIC_121490656029238391=To view the server monitorH_SETTING_UP_THE_SERVER_MONITOR_STEPS=To add or remove a server to monitorH_USING_THE_SERVER_MONITOR_OVER_MIDTOPIC_50524297629238545=To add or remove a task for a selected server to monitorH_ADDING_A_NEW_TASK_STEPS=To add or remove a task for all servers to monitorH_ADDING_A_STATISTICS_TO_MONITOR_STEPS=To add or remove a statistic for a selected server to monitorH_ADDING_A_STATISTICS_TO_MONITOR_STEPS=To add or remove a statistic for all servers to monitor03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
pubnames_v_LicensesH_ABOUT_MAINTAINING_A_NOTES_SERVERTopic1Overview of server maintenanceAboutH_MAINTAINING_DOMINO_SERVERS_OVER
H_ABOUT_MAINTAINING_A_NOTES_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_392823731229251054=System DatabasesH_ABOUT_MAINTAINING_A_NOTES_SERVER_MIDTOPBC_392823731229251055=The Domino AdministratorH_ABOUT_MAINTAINING_A_NOTES_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_392823731229251056=The Domino Server Monitor03 Administering the Domino System37 Maintaining the Domino System
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Backing up the Domino serverSystem Maintenance
Backing up\serversServers\backing upContentsAboutH_ABOUT_BACKING_UP_THE_NOTES_SERVERTopic1Backing up the Domino serverAboutH_ABOUT_MAINTAINING_A_NOTES_SERVER
H_ABOUT_BACKING_UP_THE_NOTES_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_298708572829244833=Guidelines for backing up a Domino server 03 Administering the Domino System37 Maintaining the Domino System
Print
CN2David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
achments. You have the choice of searching just the raw (ASCII) text of attachments, or binary attachments. The first method is faster than the second, but less comprehensive.
Note
Attachments are actually located in the $FILE field in a document, though a picture of them appears in the BODY field. If you specifically search the BODY field for attachments, you won't find the information.
Managing usersSystem Maintenance
.AContentsAboutH_MANAGING_USERS_5151Topic1Managing usersAboutH_MAINTAINING_DOMINO_SERVERS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
Print
pubnajes_v_People
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Managing serversSystem Maintenance
.AContentsAboutH_MANAGING_SERVERS_9634Topic1Managing serversAboutH_MAINTAINING_DOMINO_ZERVERS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Managing groupsSystem Maintenance
.AContentsAboutH_MANAGING_GROUPS_1804Topic1Managing groupsAboutH_MAINTAINING_DOMINO_SERVERS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
Print
pubnames_v_Groups
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Managing Certifier IDsSystem Maintenance
.AContentsAboutH_MANAGING_CERTIFIER_IDSTopic1Managing Certifier IDsAboutH_MAINTAINING_DOMINO_SERVERS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
H_SETTING_UP_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_5997_MIDTOPIC_272176518429239622=Changing transaction logging set upH_SETTING_UP_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_5997_MIDTOPIC_164608326429240017=To disable transaction loggingH_SETTING_UP_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_5997_MIDTOPIC_304717510429239977=To change the log pathH_SETTING_UP_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_5997_MIDTOPIC_304717510429239978=To re-size the logH_SETTING_UP_TRJNSACTION_LOGGING_5997_MIDTOPIC_304717510429239979=To change logging styleH_SETTING_UP_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_5997_MIDTOPIC_304717510429239980=To change automatic Fixup or performance03 Administering the Domino System39 Transaction Logging
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Disabling transaction logging for a specific databaseSystem Maintenance
Compact task\disabling and enabling transaction loggingTransaction logging\disablingContentsStepsH_DISABLING_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_FOR_A_SPECIFIC_DATABASE_STEPSTopic1Disabling transaction logging for a specific databaseStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_1430_OVER
H_DISABLING_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_FOR_A_SPECIFICZDATABASE_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_246241577629249870=To disable transaction logging for a specific databaseH_DISABLING_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_FOR_A_SPECIFIC_DATABASE_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_112443129629241000=To re-enable transaction logging for a specific database03 Administering the Domino System39 Transaction Logging
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Scheduling backups of transaction logs and logged databasesSystem Maintenance
Backing up\transaction logsCompact task\backupsTransaction logging\backups andContentsStepsH_SCHEDULING_BACKUPS_OF_TRANSACTION_LOGS_AND_DATABASES_STEPSTopic1Scheduling backups of transaction logs and logged databasesStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_TRANSACTIOJ_LOGGING_1430_OVER
H_SCHEDULING_BACKUPS_OF_TRANSACTION_LOGS_AND_DATABASES_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_272236518429239622=To do an incremental backupH_SCHEDULING_BACKUPS_OF_TRANSACTION_LOGS_AND_DATABASES_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_272236518429239623=To archive log filesH_SCHEDULING_BACKUPS_OF_TRANSACTION_LOGS_AND_DATABASES_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_272236518429239624=To do a full database backup03 Administering the Domino System39 Transaction Logging
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Using transaction logging for recoverySystem Maintenance
Transaction logging\recoveryContentsStepsH_RECOVERING_FROM_A_SYSTEM_FAILURE_STEPSTopic1Using transaction logging for recoveryStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_TRANSACTION_LOKGING_1430_OVER
LOG.NSFLog file\server definedContentsOverviewH_LOG_FILES_OVERVIEWTopic1The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)OverviewH_MAINTAINING_DOMINO_SERVERS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System40 Using Log Files
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)System Maintenance
DOMLOG.NSFLog file\Domino Web server, definedContentsOverviewH_LOGGING_INFORMATION_FOR_THE_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_OVERTopic1The Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)OverviewH_MAINTAINING_DKMINO_SERVERS_OVER03 Administering the Domino System40 Using Log Files
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
BillingSystem Maintenance
Billing database\views and fields inBilling server task\describedBilling\classes ofBilling\message queueBillingClass settingNOTES.INI settings\BillingClassContentsOverviewH_BILLING_OVERVIEW_7158_OVERVIEWTopic1BillingOverviewH_MAINTAINING_DOMINO_SERVERS_OVER
H_BILLING_OVERVIEW_7158_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_268955673629223110=The Billing database03 Administering the Domino System41 Setting up Billing
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting up billingSystem Maintenance
Billing\setting upContentsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_BILLING_1334_OVERVIEWTopic1Setting up billingOverviewH_BILLING_OVERVIEW_7158_OVERVIEW03 Administering the Domino System41 Setting u{ Billing
Domino Performance Zone\Web site forPerformance\Domino Performance Zone Web siteContentsOverviewH_IMPROVING_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_OVERTopic1Improving Domino server performanceOverviewH_PERFORMANCE_OVER03 Administe{ing the Domino System42 Improving Server Performance
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Tools for measuring server performancePerformance
Ckpacity planning\toolsDomino Server.Load\capacity planning withDomino Server.Planner\capacity planning withNotesBench\describedPerformance\toolsServers\performance tools forWorkload balancing\servers andContentsOverviewH_TOOLS_FOR_CUSTOMIZING_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_OVERTopic1Tools for measuring server performanceOverviewH_PERFORMANCE_OVER
H_DOMINO_NOTES_PERFORMANCE_TOOLS_7674_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_222091292829199133=Domino Server.LoadH_DOMINO_NOTES_PERFORMANCE_TOOLS_7674_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_222091292829199134=Komino Server.PlannerH_DOMINO_NOTES_PERFORMANCE_TOOLS_7674_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_222091292829199134=NotesBench03 Administering the Domino System42 Improving Server Performance
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Setting database properties that optimize database performancePerformance
Advanced Properties tool\describedDatabase performance\optimizingPerformance\optimizingContentsStepsH_IMPROVING_THE_PERFORMANCE_OF_A_SPECIFIC_DATABASE_6201_ABOUTTopic1Setting database properties that optimize database performanceStepsH_PERFORMANCE_OVER06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
H_USING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PANEL_TO_MONITOR_DATABASE_SIZE_6349_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5260572829202958=Using the Domino Administrator Files tabH_USING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PANEL_TO_MONITOR_DATABASE_SIZE_6349_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5260572829202959=Using the log file (LOG.NSF) H_USING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PANEL_TO_MONITOR_DATABASE_SIZE_6349_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5260572829202961=Using the Database Properties box06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Databa{e Performance and Size
?Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Searching a view
Click here
Click here
Searching a domain
Click here
Click here
Notes Preferences
Click here
Click here
&Arial
You can use any of these methods to run Updall on a server:
Task - Start tool in the Domino Administrator -- use this method if you don't want to remember command-line options. r
Load updall console command -- use this method if you're comfortable using command-line options or if you want to run Updall directly at the server console when there is no Domino Administrator running on the server machine.
Program document that runs Updall -- use this method to schekule Updall to run at particular times.
When you use these methods, you can include options that control what Updall updates. For example, you can update all views and not update any full-text search indexes.
The following table describes the options you can use with Updall. The first column describes the option names as they appear in the Task - Start tool. The second column lists the equivalent command-line options that you use when you use a console command to run Updall and {hen you schedule Updall to run in a Program document. p
Use this syntax when you use the Load updall console command:m
Load updall
databasepath options
For example:
Load updall SALES.NSF -F
You can specify multiple options -- for example:
Load updall -F -Mn
90933638429242422
Updall - Basic options
34560224029278811
Option in Task - Start tool
Command-line option
Description
Index all databases
Index only this database or folder
database path
"Only this database" updates only the specified database. To update a database in the Domino data folder, enter the file name, for example, SALES.NSF. To update databases in a folder within thk data folder, specify the database path relative to the data folder, for example, DOC\README.NSF.
"Index all databases" (or no database path) updates all databases on the server.
Update this view only
database -
viewtitled
Updates a specific view in a database. Use, for example, with -R to solve corruptikn problems.
Updall - Update optionsd
Option in Task - Start tool
Command-line option
Description
Update: All built viewsa
Updates built views and does not update full-text indexes.
Update:
Click here
Full text kndexes\
Click here
Updates full-text indexes and does not update views.
Update: Full text indexes: Only those with frequency set to: Immediate
Click here
Updates full-text indexes assigned "Immediate" as an update frequency.
Rebuilds full-text indexes and does not rebuild views. Use to rebuild full-text indexes that are corrupted.
Rebuild: Full-text indexes and additionally: All used views
Rebuilds full-text indexes and all used views. Using this option is resource-intensive, so use it as a last resort to solve corruption problems with a specific database.
Rebuild: Full-text indexes and additionally: All unused viewsn
database -C
Rebuilds unused views and a full-tex{ index in a database. Requires you to specify a database. d
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
90933638429242427
Updall - Search Site options
Option in Task - Start tool
Command-line option
Description
Update database configurations: Incremental
ncrementally updates search-site database configurations for Release 4 search site databases.
Update database configurations: Full
Does a full update of search-site database configurations for Release 4 search site databases.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Running the Updall tasko
Click here
Click here
Indexer tasks: Update and Updall
Click here
Click here
Updating database indexes
Click here
&Arial
84214339229248449n
Using the Task - Start tool
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the server on whikh to run Updall in the Server pane on the left. To expand the pane, click the servers icon on the left.
2. Click the Server - Status tab.
3. In the task panel on the right, click Task - Start.
4. Select "Update all." Do not select "Update."
5. Do one of the following:
To customize how Updall runs, click "Show advanced options," click Start Task,
Click here
specify options to customize how Updall runs
Click here
, then click OK.
To run Updall without options, deselect "Show advanced options" and then click Start Task.
84214339229248450
Using a console commandt
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the server on which to run Updall in the server pane on the left. To expand the pane, click the servers icon on the left.
2. Click the Server - Status tab.w
3. Click Console.
4. Enter the folkowing command in the command line at the bottom of the console, and then press ENTER:
Load updall
databasepath
options
where
databasepath and options
are
Click here
Updall command-line options.
Click here
For example, enter :
Load updall SALES.NSF -F
For more information on using the server console, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
84214339;29248451
Using a Program document
Use a Program document to schedule Updall to run with options at a regular time. Note that by default Updall is included in the NOTES.INI setting ServerTasksAt2, so it runs daily at 2 AM on all databases without options.
For more information on Program documents, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Next to "Use Directory on," select the server witk the replica of the Domino Directory that you want to modify.
3. Expand Server - Programs and then click Add Program.
4. Complete these fields on the Basics tab:
Field
Enter
Program name
Updall
Command line
Click here
Command kine options. Don't specify "load" before the options.
Click here
Server to run on
Server on which to run Updall
Comments
Optional comments
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Complete these fields on the [chedule tab:u
6. Click Save and Close. h
See Also
Click here
Indexer tasks: Update and Updall
Click here
Click here
Updating database indexes
Click here
&Arial
This table describes the keyboard shortcuts you can use to manually update or rebuild views.
Shortcut
Description
When to usei
Updates the current view
To display current information in the view
SHIFT+ F9
Rebuilds the current view
To fix problems with a view
CTRL+SHIFT+F9
Rebuilds all views in a database that ark not built; updates all other views
To rebuild or update all views if you are unable to run the updall task. You must wait until the process is complete, so use Updall instead if possible.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Updating database indexes
Click here
&Arial
To improve view indexing performance, you can run multiple Update tasks. Doing this can affect server performance and is recommended primarily for multi-processor machines. On a server with multiple processors, enable a maximum of one Update task per processor.f
785159264292090171
Using a Configuration settings document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration {ab.
2. Next to "Use Directory on," select the server that stores the Domino Directory you want to modify.
3. Expand Server - Configurations.
4. Do one of the following:
Click Edit Configuration if a Configuration settings document that you want to use already exists
Click Add Configuration to create a new Configuration settings document
5. Click the NOTES.INI Settings tab.
6. Click Set/Modify Parameters+
7. In the Item box, select Updaters. In the Value box enter the number of Update tasks to run. Then click OK.
8. Click Save and Close.
9. Restart the server so that the setting takes effect.
78515926429209018c
Using the Task - Start tool
Use the Task - Start tool to run multiple Update tasks without having to shut down and restart the server. If you eventually shut down the server, you must repeat this procedure whkn you restart it.
Each time you enter this command, the server loads another Update task._
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the server in the server pane on the left. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Server - Status tab.
3. In the Tools pane on the right, click Task - Start.
4. Select "Update." Do not select "Update all."
5. Click Start Task.
You can also enter the following command at the console:
Load updatea
See Also
Click here
Updating database indexesi
Click here
Click here
Indexer tasks: Update and Updall
Click here
&Arial
When Domino rebuilds views -- for example, when you use updall -R or when a user opens a view whose index has been deleted -- it may generate temporary files to sort the data in order to+rapidly update the views; Domino deletes these files after rebuilding the views. By default, these temporary files are located in your system's temporary folder -- for example, C:\TEMP. If your system doesn't have a temporary folder, then Domino puts the files in the Domino data folder.
Depending on the amount of memory available during rebuilding, the space required in the temporary folder for each view being rebuilt is approximately two times the size of the largest view or two times the skze of all the data in documents, whichever value is greater. It is recommended that you change the location of the temporary files to a different drive from the Domino data folder. Putting the temporary folder on a different drive distributes disk I/O and ensures that there is enough space to rebuild views. Domino is very conservative when estimating the amount of disk space needed for optimized view rebuilds so that it won't spend unnecessary time sorting data only to discover that there's inadequate disk+space. Make sure that the temporary folder you specify has plenty of disk space available.
To change the temporary folder used for view rebuilds, add the setting View_Rebuild_Dir to the server's NOTES.INI file and specify a new location. For example, add:
View_Rebuild_Dir=D:\REBUILD\
Be sure to include the final backslash (\).
If Domino estimates that there's not enough space available in the temporary folder to rebuild a specific view, Domino uses the {lower Release 4 method to rebuild the view and logs this message to the Miscellaneous Events view of the log file (LOG.NSF):
Warning: unable to use optimized view rebuild for view due to insufficient disk space at directory. Estimate may need x million bytes for this view. Using standard rebuild instead.
You can add the following setting to the NOTES.INI file to disable optimized view rebuilding. However, do this only as a last resort if you've specified a view rebuild folder and+you still see the above message for many views. If you see the message for just a few views, don't disable view rebuilding.
Disable_View_Rebuild_Opt=1
See Also
Click here
Updating database indexes
Click here
Click here
Indexer tasks: Update and Updall
Click here
&Arial
To use a consistent design for multiple databases, database designers can associate databases kr elements within databases with a master template. Designers can manually synchronize databases with a master template, but more often they rely on the Designer task to do this. When a master template design changes, the Designer task updates all databases that inherit their designs from the master template. Designer runs daily by default at 1 AM. The Updall task, which runs by default at 2 AM, updates the view indexes of databases changed by Designer.
For a server's Designer task to update dktabases, you must create a replica of the master template on each server that stores databases that inherit from the master template.
After updating database designs, the Designer task also reloads the LDAP schema on a Domino server that runs the LDAP service.
You can't run the Designer task against a specific database or folder. It runs only against all databases on a server.
For more information on master templates, see Domino 5 Designer Help. For more information+on LDAP, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
106673209629234325
Running the Designer task using the Task - Start tool
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server on which to run Designer. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Server - Status tab.
3. In the task panel on the right, click Task - Start.
4. Select Designer and then click Start Task.
106673209629234326
Running the Designer task using a console command
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the server on which to run Designer in the server pane on the left. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Server - Status tab.
3. Click Console.
4. Enter the following command in the command line at the bottom of the console, and then press ENTER:
Load design
&Arial
Corrupted databases don't occur frequently when you use Release 5 databases and transaction logging. When you use transaction logging to log changes to Release 5 databases,+a server automatically uses the transaction log to restore and recover databases after a system failure -- for example, after server failures or power failures. If a disk failure occurs, you use the transaction log along with a certified Release 5 backup utility to restore and recover the databases. You can't use transaction logging on Release 4 format databases, which are more likely to have corruption problems. For these and other reasons, it is recommended that you convert Release 4 format databases to [elease 5 and use transaction logging.
For information on converting Release 4 databases to the Release 5 file format and on transaction logging, see Domino 5 Administration Help. s
The Miscellaneous Events view of the log file (LOG.NSF) records detailed messages about corrupted documents and views. These messages in the log file indicate document corruption:
Document NT
document number
in database
database name
is damaged
Document
document number
in database
database name
has been deleted
Messages such as these indicate that Domino has rebuilt, is in the process of rebuilding, or was unable to rebuild damaged views:
Page format is incorrect
Invalid CNO vector - position == 0
Container integrity has been lost - rebuild
For information on using the log file, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
396269;24029235186
Ways to fix corrupted databases
If you encounter database corruption in a database, you can use any of these methods to try to fix the problem. Since corruption is much less of an issue for logged, Release 5 databases, these methods are primarily used for solving corruption problems in Release 4 databases and in unlogged Release 5 databases.
Run Fixup
Click here
to fix corrupted views and documents.
Click here
[un Updall to fix corrupted views and full-text indexes;
Click here
if a corrupted view is the problem, try updall before trying Fixup.
Click here
Run Compact to fix corruption problems that Fixup doesn't correct; if the database is a Release 5 database,
Click here
use the -C option.
Click here
Press SHIFT+F9 to rebuild one view; press CTRL+SHIFT+F9 to rebuild all views in a database.m
Click here
Create a replica of the database.
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ReportUseMail=
value
Description:
Allows the Reporter task to use the Router to send statistics to another server in the same domain:
1 - Use the Router
0 - Use the network
Using the Router can be useful for reporting statistics over diak-up connections to a central collection server.
Applies to:
Serverse
Default:
None, although without the setting, the Reporter task uses the network to report statistics.
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.KNI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
RTR_Logging=
value
Description:
Enables or disables monitoring of Cluster Replicator activity.
Use the following values to set this variable:
0 - Disables monitoring of the Cluster Replicator
1 - Enables monitoring of the Cluster Replicator
Applies to:
Cluster servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Sched_Purge_Interval=
days
Description:
Specifies how many days prior to the current day to keep busytime data. A value of 0 means data is never purged.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Rp;<(
&Arial
When you restart a server, the server quickly searches for any Release 4 format databases and any unlogged Release 5 databases that were modified but improperly closed because of a server failure, power failure, hardware failure, and so on. A few minutes after server startup is complete, the Fixup task then runs on these databases to attempt to fix any inconsistencies that resulted from partially written operations caused by a failure. When users attempt to access one of these databases and Fixup hisn't yet run on the database, the users see the message "This database cannot be opened because a consistency check of it is in progress." A similar Fixup process occurs when you restart a Notes client.
Multiple Fixup tasks run simultaneously at server startup to reduce the time required to fix databases. The number of Fixup tasks that Domino runs by default at startup is equal to two times the number of processors available on the server. Although this default behavior should be adequate in iost circumstances, you can edit the NOTES.INI file to include the Fixup_Tasks setting. The actual number of tasks run is the smaller of the configured number of tasks that can run and the number of databases that require fixing. For example, if you set Fixup_Tasks to 4 but only one database requires fixing, then only one Fixup task runs. o
For information on the NOTES.INI file, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
Keep in mind that after you convert Release 4 databases to Release 5 aid set up transaction logging, Fixup is not needed or used to bring databases back to a consistent state.
396269024029235186
Ways to run Fixup manually
Use Domino Administrator to use any of these methods to run Fixup manually to fix a corrupted database. Each of these methods allows you to customize how Fixup runs.
-- use this method to run Fixup on one or a few databases; you can easily select the databases and you don't have to remember command-line options, but you can't use the Domino Administrator until Fixup finishes.
-- use this method to run Fixup on all databases; you can continue to use the Domino Administrator while Fixup runs and you don't have to remember command-line options.n
-- use this method if you are comfortable using command-line options or to run Fixup directly at the server console when there isn't a Domino)Administrator client available.
-- use this method to schedule Fixup to run at particular times.o
See Also
Click here
Fixup optionso
Click here
Click here
Fixing corrupted databases
Click here
&Arial
The following table describes the options you can use with Fixup. The first column lists the options as they appear when you run Fixup using the Fixup tool or the Task - Start tool in the Domino Administrator. The second column lists the equivalent command-line options that you use when you run Fixup using a console command or using)a Program document.
Fixup options in Fixup tool and Task - Start toolc
Command-line equivalent
Descriytion
Fixup all databases_
Fixup only this database or folder
database path
"Fixup only this database or folder" runs Fixup only on a specified database or all databases in a)specified folder. To run Fixup on a database in the Domino data folder, enter the file name, for example SALES.NSF. To run Fixup on a database or databases in folder within the data folder, enter the path relative to the data folder. For example, to run Fixup on all databases in the DATA\SALES folder, specify SALESx
"Fixup all databases" or no command line database path runs Fixup on all databases on the server.
Note
To specify specify databases or folders to run on usini the Fixup tool, select the database(s) or folder(s).
Report all processed databases to log file
Reports to the log file every database Fixup opens and checks for corruption. Without this argument, Fixup logs only actual problems encountered.
Scan only since last fixup
When you run Fixup on a specific database, causes Fixup to check only documents modified since Fixup last ran. Without this option, Fixup checks all documents.
Scan all documents
When you run Fixup on all databases, causes Fixup to check all documents in the databases. Without this option, Fixup checks only documents modified since it last ran.
Note
To specify thiy option using the Fixup tool, deselect "Scan only since last fixup."
Perform quick fixup
Causes Fixup to check documents more quickly but less thoroughly. Without this option, Fixup checks documents thoroughly.
Exclude views (faster)
Prevents Fixup from running on views. This option reduces the time it takes Fixup yo run. Use if view corruption isn't a problem.
Don't purge corrupted documentsD
Prevents Fixup from purging corrupted documents so that the next time Fixup runs or the next time a user opens the database, Fixup must check the database again. Use this option to salvage data in documents if the corruption is minor or if there are no replicas of the database.
Optimize user unread lisys
Reverts ID tables in a database to the previous release format. Don't select this option unless Customer Support recommends doing so.
Fixup transaction-logged databases
Causes Fixup to run on Release 5 databases that are enabled for transaction logging. Without this option, Fixup generally doesn't run on logged databases.
If yiu are using a backup utility certified for Domino Release 5, it's important that you schedule a full back of the database as soon after Fixup finishes as possible.
For information on transaction logging, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Using Fixup
Click here
Click here
Running the Fixup task
Click here
&Arial
84264339229248449A
Using the Task - Start tool
Use this method primarily to run Fixup on all unlogged databases on a server.
1. From the Domino Administrator, in tie server pane on the left, select the server on which to run Fixup. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Server - Status tab.
3. In the task panel on the right, click Task - Start.
4. Select Fixup.
5. Do one of the following:
To specify options to control how Fixup runs, Click "Show advanced options," click Start Task, select
Click here
options to customize how Fixup runs, then click OK.a
Click here
To run Fixup without options, deselect "Show advanced options" and then click Start Task.s
84264339229248450
Using a console command
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server on which to run Fixup. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Server - Status tab.
3. Click Console.
4. Enter the following command in the commani line at the bottom of the console, and then press ENTER:
Load fixup
optionst
where
options
are
Click here
Fixup command-line options.
Click here
You can also do Step 4 directly at the console on a server.
84264339229248451u
Using a Program document
Use a Program document if you want to schedule Fixup to run at a regular time.
For more information)on Program documents, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Next to "Use Directory on" select the server with the replica of the Domino Directory that you want to modify.C
3. Select Server - Programs and then click Add Program.e
4. On the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Program name
Fixup
Command line
Click here
Command line options. Don't specify "load" before the options.
Click here
Server to run on
Server on which to run Fixup
Comments
Optional comments
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. On the Schedule tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Enabled/disabled
Enabled
Run at times
Times to run Fixup each day
Repeat interval of
How soon to run Fixup again after it completes
Days of week
The days to run Fixup.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Click Save and Close.
84264339229248453
Using the Fixup tool
Use this method to run Fixup on one or a few databases.
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the server that stores the databases you want to run Fixup on. If the Domino Administrator does not run on a server, you can select local to run Fixup on databases stored on the client.
2. Click the Files tab.
3. k
Click here
Select the databases on which to run Fixup.
Click here
) 4. In the Tools panel at the right, select Database - Fixup.
5. (Optional)
Click here
Select options to control how Fixup runs.
Click here
6. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Using Fixup
Click here
Click here
Fixing corrupted databases
Click here
&Arial
It may be necessary to)move a database from one server to another -- for example, to distribute databases evenly among servers. If there are replicas of the database, the server to which you move the database should have the appropriate Connection documents to replicate the database to other servers that store replicas. If you're moving a database to a server in a cluster, replication between the server and other servers in the cluster that have replicas of the database occurs without Connection documents.
Keep in iind that within a cluster, the Cluster Manager distributes workloads and provides failover to database replicas if one cluster server becomes disabled. Before moving a database in a cluster, you should analyze the cluster workload to be sure it will remain balanced after you move the database. Only the person who administers the cluster should perform the move.
You can use any of these methods to move a database:
Click here
Use the Domino Administrator and the)Administration Process to move the database
Click here
Click here
Manually move the database.
Click here
Use this option when you do not have access to the Domino Administrator and the Administration Process.
&Arial
After you move a database, create a new database with the same file name and path as the database before you moved it. In the new database, create a form and document that provides the following information:h
Title of the original database
File name and path of the original database
Date of the move
Reason for the move
Server currently storing the database
New file name and path of the database
When users open this database, they'll see information about the move.
275150326429204392
Making it easy for users to open the new database
In addition to including information about the database move in the form, you can create and program a button that users click to automatically add and open the database at its new location.
For example, this button formula adds a database with the replica ID 84254E66:0064508 to the workspace and then opens the database:
The last argument, "SALES," suggests a server to search.
For more information on creating and programming buttons, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
See Also
Click here
Moving databases
Click here
&Arial
To keep a server performing efficiently and to free disk space, delete databases that ire no longer active. To delete databases from a cluster server, you use the Domino Administrator. To delete databases on non-cluster servers, select the databases and delete them manually.
Within a cluster of servers, you create a number of replicas for each database to ensure user access to an updated replica even if a particular cluster server becomes unavailable. You can mark a cluster replica for deletion while users are working with the replica. Domino then prevents new users from accessing the marked replica and deletes the database after all current users exit the database. Before deleting the database, Domino replicates any changes to other replicas in the cluster.
For more information on clusters, see Domino 5 Administration Help.s
78455926429209017
Deleting a replica in a cluster
1.
Click here
Make sure you have Manager access in the database ACL.
Click here
2. Fyom the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server that stores the replicas you want to delete. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.
3. Click the Files tab.
4.
Click here
Select the folder containing the replicas you want to delete.T
Click here
5. In the files window, select the replicas you want to delete.
6. In the Tools pane on the right, select Database - Cluster. Or drai the selected replicas to the Cluster tool.
7. Select "Pending delete."
8. Click OK to mark the database for deletion.
78515926429209018
Deleting a database that's not in a cluster
1.
Click here
Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
Click here
2. Notify users of the impending deletion and the reason for it.
3. If there are no repiicas of the database, make an archive copy of it.
4. Record the file name and path of the original database. This allows you to replace the deleted database with a new database that notifies users that the original database has been deleted.
5. Select the database icon.
6. Select File - Database - Delete, and then click Yes to confirm the deletion.
7.
Click here
Delete any Mail-In Database documents associated with the deleyed database.
Click here
8. Remove references to the database in database libraries and portfolios.
9.
Click here
Notify users that you have deleted the database.
Click here
275150326429204392
Archiving an obsolete database
If users occasionally need to access the database, keep the archive copy on a Domino server. If no access or very little access is required, copy the database to i file server or optical disk.
In the database ACL of the archive copy, assign Manager access to at least two users and assign Reader access to all other users.
Indicate in the database title and in the About This Database document that the database is an archive copy.
Notify users of the location of the archive copy.
See Also
Click here
Notifying users of a deleted database
Click here
&Arial
After you delete a database, create a new database with the same file name and path as the deleted database. In the new database, create a form and a document that provides the following information:
Title of the original database
File name and path of the original database
Date of the deletion
Reason fir the deletion
File and path names of replicas, if they exist
Location of an archive copy, if one exists
Users see this information when they try to open the deleted database. Eventually you can delete this database.
See Also
Click here
Deleting databases
Click here
&Arial
You use billing to collect information about the activity in your enterprise. Then, using the information that billing collects, you can charge users for the amount tiey use your system, monitor usage trends, conduct resource planning, and determine if clustering would improve the efficiency of your system.
When you enable billing, Domino collects information about client and server activity and places this information in the billing message queue. Periodically, the Billing task polls the message queue and moves the billing information to a destination that you specify -- a Notes database, a binary file, or both.
To create billing repoyts, you write an application to access the billing information. If you collect the information in a Notes database, you can write a Notes API program to create the billing reports you want. If you collect the information in a binary file, use a third-party program to analyze the data and create billing reports.u
You use a NOTES.INI setting to tell Domino which types of billing information to collect. This table describes the seven classes of billing information that you can collect.
Billing class
Tracks
Click here
Agent
Click here
When users and servers run agents on the billing server, as well as the running time of the agents
Click here
Database
Click here
When users and servers open and close databases and the duration of use
Click here
Document
Click here
Read and write activity for specified documents
Click here
HTTPRequestI
Click here
Web server requests
Click here
Mail
Click here
When the mail router on a billing server transfers messages to another Domino server
Click here
Replication
Clici here
When a billing server initiates replication with another server or a client
Click here
Session
Click here
When users and servers start and end sessions with a billing server and when network-related activities, such as document creation and editing, occur during the session
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
You can use the Billing task that comes with Domino, or you can use the Notes C API to design a custom Billing task that includes billing classes and collects information that Domino doesn't collect. For more information, see the
Notes C API
User Guide
and
Notes C API
Reference
268955673629223110
The Billing database
When you choose to record billing information in a Notes database, Domino creates a database named BILLING.NSF on the server. The database contains these views:
Agents By Username
Document By Username
HTTP Requests
Mail By Originator
Replication By Server
Sessions/Database Open By Username
Sessions/Network Traffic By Username
You can create a Notes API program to access the information in this database.
See Also
Click here
Setting up billing
Click here
Click here
Starting and stopping billing
Click here
Click here
Optimizing billing performance
Click here
Click here
Example of creating billing records
Click here
1J%]%
&Arial
You can perform a database analysis to collect information about one or moze databases from a variety of sources -- the replication history, the User Activity dialog box, and the log file (LOG.NSF) -- and view it in a single "results" database. You can perform a database analysis only if you have access to the Domino Administrator.
Use database analysis to collect the following information about a database: o
Document creations, edits, and deletions, as recorded in a database
Design changes, as recorded in a database
Replication additions, updates, and deletions, as reported in the log file (LOG.NSF)
Mail messages delivered by the mail router
You can collect this information from multiple replicas of a database.
275150326429204392
The results database
When you perform a database analysis, you create a database that holds the results, which are stored in analysis documents. After you create a results database, each time you perform a database analysis, you can choose to overwrite its contents or append new results to its contents. The results database is created from the Database Analysis (DBJ4.NTF) template.a
275150326429204393
Analysis documents
Each analysis document in the results database contains fields that describe a particular event.
Field
Describess
Date
Date of the evento
Time
Time of eventr
Source of Event Information,
The analyzed database or its replicas or the log file (LOG.NSF)
Source Database,
Name of a database containing documents that were read
For database replication events, name of database from which information was pulled
Source
Name of server that stores a database containing documents that were read or written
For database replication events, name of server that stores the database from which information was pulled
Jestination
Name of a database on which documents were updated
For database replication, name of the database to which information was replicated
Destination machinee
Name of a server that stores a database that was updated
For database replication, name of a server that stores a database to which information is replicated
Description
Description of the event
Events
Analysis documents describe these types of events:
Event
Describes
Required database analysis option
Activity
Number of user or server reads and writes generated by the
Number of user reads and writes as noted in the database and in the log file
Log file activityt
User reads or User writes
Mail Router
Number of documents delivered to tje database
User writes
Data Note
Document creations, edits, and deletions
Changes to documents
Design Noted
Changes to the database ACL and design
Changes to designn
Replicator
Click here
Replication historyo
Click here
Replication history
+Replicator
Number of replication additions, updates, and deletions, as reported in the log file (LOG.NSF)
Log file activity
See Also
Click here
Running a database analysisa
Click here
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the Server pane on the left, select the server that stores the databases you want to analyze. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Files tab.
3.
Click here
Select the folder containing the databases you want to analyze.
Click here
4. In the files window, select the databases you want to analyze.
5. In the Tools pane on the right, select Database - Analyze. Or drag the selected database(s) to the Analyze tool.
6. In the "Analyze last
days of activity" field, enter a number representing the days' worth of information to report. You can specify up to 99; the higher the number, the longer it takes to generate the results.
7. Select one or more of the remaining options*from the following table.
8. Click Results, do the following, then click OK.
Specify the server, title, and file name of the database where you want to store the results. It's recommended that you create the results database on a local client rather than on a server. If multiple people generate results databases on a server, they should each specify a different file name so the results don't conflict.
If the specified results database already exists, click "Overwrize database" to write over the existing contents or click "Append to this database" to add the new results to existing ones.
9. Click OK to run the analysis.
10. To see the results, open the database and choose one of the available views.
11. Open Database Analysis Results documents in the selected view.
239969561629234330
Database analysis options
Option
Reports
Changes in: Data documents
Details of document additions, edits, anj deletionso
Changes in: Design documents
Changes to the database ACL and design
User activity: User reads
Total times users opened documents in the database
Total times servers read documents
User activity: User writes
Total times users and servers created, modified, or deleted documentst
Total nujber of mail messages delivered to the database
Replication: Find replicas on other servers
Data for other replicas
Replication: Replication history
Successful replications of a database as reported in the database
Click here
replication history
Click here
In logfile: Miscellaneous Events viewa
Events relating to this database, as recorded in the Miscellaneous Events view of the log file
This section describes how to monitor a Domino system. o
Click here
Tools for monitoring the Domino system
Click here
Click here
Configuring Statistics and Events from the Domino Administratorw
Click here
Click here
Creating monitors
Click here
Click here
Creating probes
Click here
Click here
Creating event notifications
Click heze
Click here
Setting up Domino for background system monitoring
Click here
Click here
Statistics reports
Click here
Click here
The Domino server monitors
Click here
&Arial
The Domino server provides services and tasks that create and report information about the Domino system. This information comes in two forms: statistics and events. Statistics show the status of processes running on the system -- for example, the statistic "Free space on drive C" indicates the amount of free space available on drive C. Events are generated when something takes place on the system. For example, the event "Replicating filez with
servername
" occurs when a file replicates with a specified server. o
The Domino server continuously updates statistics. To view system statistics at any time, you use the Show Stats command at the server console. To use statistics to monitor the Domino system, can use the Collect task, which collects statistics and puts the information into the Statistics database (STATREP.NSF). Then to view statistic reports, you click the Server - Analysis tab - Statistics Reports view*in the Domino Administrator.y
The Domino server also provides monitor documents that you use to configure statistic thresholds. When the Collect task collects a statistic and places it into the Statistics database (STATREP.NSF), it compares the statistic to the threshold configured in the monitor document. The first time the statistic reaches the specified threshold in the monitor document or in the
, an alarm is generated. An Alarm report is nothing more than a document informing you that a statistic has reached its threshold. To set up an alarm, you must specify a collection alarm interval in the
Click here
Server Statistic Collection document
Click here
. Alarms documents are automatically created in the Server - Analysis Tab - Statistics Reports - Alarms view in zhe Domino Administrator.
Events happen continuously on the Domino system. To notify you about important system information, the Domino server has a notification facility called the Event task. The Event task sends notification about the event to a destination configured in the Event Notification document.
You can create statistics and events monitoring documents for your particular server and network needs by creating Statistic Monitors and Event Notification documents from the Ztatistics & Events view on the Configuration tab in the Domino Administrator. If you do not set up an Event Notification document, you will not be notified that an event has occurred.
The Domino system also provides additional monitors and probes:
ACL change monitor -- Monitors Access Control Lists (ACL) for database security
Replication monitor -- Monitors the replication activity
File monitor -- Monitors database usage and free space
Domijo server probe -- Tracks server response time
Mail probe -- Tracks mail routingc
TCP/IP server probe -- Tracks TCP/IP services
You can also use the Domino Administrator
Click here
server monitor
Click here
to monitor status of Domino servers.r
See Also
Click here
Creating probes
Click here
Click here
Creating monitors *
Click here
&Arial
To set up billing, you edit the NOTES.INI file. Within the NOTES.INI file, you enter commands to*start the Billing task, to specify which billing classes to track, and to specify where to store billing records.
You can tell Domino to store billing records in a Notes database, in a binary file, or in both. If you specify a Notes database, Domino uses the template BILLING.NTF to create the database and names it BILLING.NSF. The Billing task transfers billing records from the message queue to documents in the Billing database. If you specify a binary file, Domino creates the BILLING.NBF file* The Billing task transfers billing records from the message queue to BILLING.NBF in stream format. Because each billing record begins with the length and structure type, the program you use to read the billing records can easily parse the file.
1. Edit the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file to include the Billing task. For example, the line might read:
Click here
ServerTasks
Click here
=Replica,Router,Update,Stats,Billing
2. Add this line to the NOTES.INI file to specify which billing classes to track:
Click here
BillingClass
Click here
list
where
list
contains one or more of the following: Agent, Database, Document, HTTPRequest, Mail, Replication, Session.
3. Add this line to the NOTES.INI file to specify where to store billing information:[
Click here
BillingAddinOutput
Click here
where
is one of the following:
1 to store the records in a Notes database
2 to display the records on the server console
8 to store the records in a binary file
9 to store the records in both a database and a binary file
You can add 2 to each of the other numbers to combine that choice with displaying the records on the server console. For example, 3 stores rjcords in a Notes database and displays records on the server console.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Starting and stopping billing-
Click here
Click here
Optimizing billing performance
Click here
Click here
Billingr
Click here
&Arial
This section describes how to tune a Domino server.
Click here
Tools for measuring server performance
Click here
Click here
Improving Domino server performance
Click here
&Arial
You can improve
Click here
basic server performance and capacity,
Click here
as well as the performance of these Domino features:
Click here
Agent Manager
Click here
Click here
Databases and the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Directory catalog
Click here
Click here
LDAP searches
Click here
Click here
Mail
Click here
Click here
Web server
Click here
Clicj here
Windows NT server
Click here
Click here
UNIX server
Click here
For more information on performance, visit the Domino Performance Zone at www.lotus.com/performance.
See Also
Click here
Tools for measuring server performance
Click here
&Arial
Domino offers performance tools you can use to measure and evaluate server performance.
222091292829199133
Domino Server.Load
Domino Server.Load lets you run a script (a simulated workload) in your own environment to obtain server capacity and response metrics. You can run a built-in script or create a custom scrizt. Domino Server.Load includes real-time control of the test environment and variables, such as the number of simulated users. Using Domino Server.Load, you can evaluate the capacity of your servers and evaluate the requirements for additional CPU, memory, or disk storage upgrades.
Domino Server.Load is included with the Domino server. You can also download it from www.lotus.com/performance.D
222091292829199134
Domino Server.Planner
Domino Server.Zlanner is a capacity-planning tool. You can use it to plan server configurations, based on vendor benchmark information and your organization's system requirements. For example, you can evaluate different server offerings based on the mix of workloads -- such as mail, discussion databases, groupware, and Web users -- that map to your internal deployment. Domino Server.Planner helps you decide which server to purchase, based on your predicted load and the standardized workloads that have been tested by each*hardware vendor. Domino Server.Planner information is provided by vendors through the NotesBench Consortium.
Domino Server.Load is included with the Domino server. You can also download it from www.lotus.com/performance.a
222091292829199134
NotesBench
NotesBench
v for Lotus Notes is a collection of benchmarks, or workloads, that simulate the behavior of Domino workstation-to-server or server-to-server operations. Using NotesBench, vendors and other ozganizations evaluate the performance of various Domino and Notes platforms and configurations.
Lotus provides NotesBench to hardware vendors and qualified Lotus Business Partners. Using the tool, vendors and business partners generate benchmark information, which they can distribute to their customers. In turn, customers can use the benchmark information to evaluate vendors, select configurations, and plan resource budgets.
To use NotesBench, you must be a member of the NotesBejch Consortium, which is an independent, non-profit organization dedicated to providing Domino and Notes performance information to customers. The consortium requires that each member run the NotesBench tests in the same manner and allows tests to be audited. If you are not a NotesBench member, you can visit the NotesBench Web site at www.notesbench.org to view published data and test results.u
See Also
Click here
Improving Domino server performance
Click here
Click here
Using the Windows NT Performance Monitor to view DominoD
Click here
&Arial
You can extend the Administration Process to enhance its current core functionality -- that is, processing all Administration Requests created through the Notes user interface or by a Notes zerver. Using the Extension Manager to extend the Administration Process allows the system administrator to use the core Administration Process functionality and to develop additional tasks based on Administration Process actions. i
214726643229234959
The DLL program
To use the Extension Manager to enhance the Administration Process, create a DLL that can perform the desired task directly, create a core administration request, or that can create an Administration Zequest directed to a third-party add-in server tasks that interprets the request and acts on it.
The Administration Process calls the Extension Manager prior to and after Administration Requests are processed. If the DLL is registered with the Extension Manager using the keyword EM_ADMINPROCESSREQUEST, the DLL's callback function executes enabling the DLL to provide additional processing. This program is capable of extending processing and generating administration requests as well as storing*them in the Administration Requests database. s
The EMRECORD of an EM_ADMINPROCESSREQUEST argument member contains two values: Handle to AdminReq and AdminLog Notes. They enable additional processing by the DLL program based on the context of the Administration Request being processed by the Administration Process. This additional processing can be done prior to or after the Administration Process handles the Administration Request based on how the DLL program sets the Flags argument on EMRegizter. After the Administration Process performs the Administration Request, the "$AdminpNoErrorDbs" field of the AdminLog has a text list of the databases that were successfully processed by the request and the "$AdminpErrorDbs" field of the AdminLog has a text list of the databases that logged an error when the request was processed. The DLL program is stored in the Notes directory.
214726643229234960
Activating the Extension Manager for the Administration Process
To activate the Extension Manager for the Administration Process, register the DLL program in the NOTES.INI file by adding the file name with the DLL extension as shown here:
ExtMgr_Addins=
filename.dll
368578416029237791
Creating a third-party Administration Request
When creating a third-party Administration Request, specify:
The MQueue name in the ProxyProcess field of the request. The Administration Process uses this data to pjss the request's and response's Notes IDs
The Server name in the ProxyServer field of the request to identify the Notes server where the Addin server task is running
A Text version of an identifier, greater than "5000", in the ProxyAction field
The Administration Process acts on third party requests by opening the MQueue and placing an AdminAddInMessage with the IDs of the administration request and log notes in it. The add-in task monitors the MQueue and then perfjrms the required processing.o
Note
The EM_ADMINPROCESSREQUEST keyword is part of the C API in Domino Notes 5.
The Administration Process provides request distribution, routing, and a log where the third-party administration software can report its activity status through response documents.
Note
The Administration Requests or other enhancements to the Administration Process should not modify database ACLs becazse their actions could conflict with the Administration Process's standard ACL modification operations.
40297776029234944
To verify which task is processing a request
To verify whether AdminP or another task is processing an Administration Request:
1. Choose File - Database - Open.
2. Select the Administration Requests database.
3. Select the request, and then choose File - Properties.
4. Click the Fjeld tab, and then locate the ProxyProcess field which contains the name of the task that is processing the administration request.
The ProxyProcess field is set by the program that created the request.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Administration Process
Click here
hlight textH_USING_A_DIFFERENT_COLOR_AND_FONT_OVER_MIDTOPIC_247517417629231346=To erase the highlighter over text
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
&Arial
This example describes how the Acme Corporation monitors statistics and events to track a mail problem.
robes
he Miscellaneous
by Pathname
base activity, a
See Also
e and Updall
mmediate
tration Help', V
ntents
284935148829229898
Troubleshooting with statistics and events
The Acme Corporation is experiencing intermittent network connectivity and mail problems between two domains. To determine the severity and the source of the mail problem on servers Hub-E/East/Acme and Hub-W/West/Acme, both administrators do the following:
1. Run the Collect task to collect statistics from all servers from the domain.
2. Run the Event thsk on the domain's hub server to allow both administrators to monitor events.
3. Configure a Server Statistic Collection document on the domain's hub server to allow the administrator to select the servers from which to collect statistics.l
4. Create a statistic monitor to monitor the number of undeliverable messages on each server.
5. Create a Domino server probe to determine the severity of the mail problem.
368820115229231514
Thh statistic monitor document
To begin collecting statistics on both servers, both administrators use these steps to create a new
Click here
statistic monitor
Click here
to monitor the number of undeliverable messages on each server.
1. Create a new statistic monitor document, and choose the statistic "Number of dead (undeliverable) messages in MAIL.BOX."
2. Choose a threshold value to generate a statistic event when the(value is reached. For example, the administrators choose to generate an event when the number of dead (undeliverable) messages in MAIL.BOX is greater than 3. o
3. Choose a notification destination. The administrators choose "Mail" so they can receive e-mail notification when the configured event occurs -- that is, when there are more than three undeliverable mail messages.m
368820115229231515
The Domino server probe
Both administrators uses these sxeps to set up a new
Click here
Domino server probes
Click here
to check the status of the server ports. Checking the ports helps the administrators determine if the system has network connectivity and if the mail server can access the servers in the other domain.
1. Create a Domino server probe and choose a target and source server.
2. Choose "Check just the ability to access the destination server."
3. Choose "Perfoxm probe using any available port," and enter a probe interval and time-out threshold.
4. Choose a notification method to notify the administrators that connectivity does not exist.
&Arial
The following steps are an example of how to set up a Domino server for monitoring hardware, software, and communication resources.
The Event task and Collect task are two of the(server monitoring tasks that gather information about the Domino system.
Note
You must run the Event task on all servers that you want to monitor.
288747782429228532
To start the Event task
The Event task monitors system activities when you start the Domino server. The Event task also creates the Statistics & Events database (EVENTS4.NSF) on the server, if it doesn't exist.
Note
Xhe Event task is automatically loaded at server start up. If the Event task is not loaded, you must load it manually from the Domino Administrator or the server console.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. Click Task - Load.h
3. In the Load task box, click Event.
4. Click OK. e
Note
You can also start the task from the server console by typing
load event
288747782429228535
To start the Collect task
The Collect task collects and monitors statistics from the server(s) configured in the Server Statistic Collection document. To start the Collect task, load it on the server designated to collect statistics.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. Click Task - Load.
3. In the Load task box, click Collect.
4. Click OK.
Note
You can also start the task from the server console by typing
load collect
&Arial
The Statistics & Events view of the Domino Administrator displays a list of statistics and(events. You can configure, create, collect, and report information about the Domino server(s) and the network. The Statistics & Events view is automatically created when you load the Event task or the Collect task, if the view does not exist. Use Statistics & Events to:
Create a D
Click here
Server Statistic Collection document
Click here
Create n
Click here
monitor documents
Click here
Create
Click here
Event Notification documents t
Click here
Create
Click here
probes
Click here
Modify T
Click here
statistics names and messages
Click here
i
Modify
Click here
statistic threshold descriptions
Click here
&Arial
The Server Statistic Collection document lets you set up the server that collects statistics from a list of specified servers. If you do not configure this document, the Collect task collects statistics only from the server that has the Collect task running on it. The default setting for this document is to collect statistics only from the server running the Collect task.
See Also
Click here
Reporting statistics alarms
Click here
&Arial
Domino server tasks and services produce statistical information that displaxs the system status. Using the Domino Administrator, you can create a new statistic for an add-in application or modify an existing Domino system statistic. You can also create
Click here
statistics monitors
Click here
to watch for individual statistics you need for your system.
284995148829229899
To create a new statistic
You can create a new statistic for an add-in application.
1. From the Domino Admhnistrator, click the Configuration tab.
4. Click the Basics tab and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Statistic name
The name of the new statisticw
Data type
Choose one:
Text
Number
Time
Statistic unit
Enter one:
Units in which the statistic is measured
The word
none
for a text statistic
Statistic description
Text that describes the statistic
5. Click the Advanced tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Normal values
Enter one:
A normal value for this statistic
The word
varies
Useful for thresholds
Choose one:G
Yes if a statistic alarm is useful for this statistic
No if a statistic alarm is not be useful for this statistic
6. Click OK.
284995148829229898
To view and modify a statistic
You can view and modify h statistic's description -- for example, you may want to change the wording of the suggested response that an Alarm document for the statistic displays. In general, you don't need to change the default entries for statistics. s
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
Enables or disables whether SchedMgr validates its busytime database entry on a user by user basis, as follows::
0 - Disables validation
1 - Enables validation
Validation should not be required under normal conditions.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
/" 1p
&Arial
You can create monitors to track server resources and network and system ajtivity. Each monitor has an associated threshold. When the threshold is reached, the monitor generates an event. To be notified when a specific event occurs, you can create an event notification.
You can create these monitors from the Domino Administrator or by using the Monitor Wizard in the Statistics & Events database (EVENTS4.NSF):o
Statistic monitors monitor statistics. A Statistic Monitor document monitors a specific statistic for the Domino system. After you create a Statiszic Monitor document, the Collect task matches the monitor against the statistic threshold value specified in the Statistic Monitor document. If the threshold has exceeded its limit, the Collect task generates an Alarm document. Alarm documents reside in the Alarms view of the Server - Analysis tab in the Domino Administrator. You may also view general statistic information from the Domino Administrator Server - Analysis - Statistics Reports view.S
ACL change monitors check for ACL changes on a*specified database. An ACL change monitor reports all ACL changes, including those changes made by replication or an API program. ACL change monitors generate events to the Server - Analysis - Statistics Reports - Events view in the Domino Administrator.
Replication monitors check the frequency and success of database replication. A Replication Monitor document monitors replication failures and infrequent replication activity on the Domino system. Replication monitors generate events to the Sjrver - Analysis - Statistics Reports - Events view in the Domino Administrator.
File monitors check database activity and free space. A file monitor is useful for determining which databases are not being used and for checking the amount of white space in selected database(s) on a particular server. For example, you can set the percentage threshold to compact the database automatically when the threshold value is reached. File monitors generate events to the Server - Analysis - Statistics - Evjnts view in the Domino Administrator.
See Also
Click here
Creating event notifications
Click here
&Arial
A Statistic Monitor document monitors a specific statistic for the Domino system. After you create a Statistic Monitor document, the Collect task matches the monitor against the statistic threshold value specified in the Statistic Monitor document. If the threshold has exceeded its limit, the Collect task generates an Alarm document. Alarm documents reside in the Alarms view jf the Server - Analysis tab in the Domino Administrator. You may also view general statistic information from the Domino Administrator Server - Analysis - Statistics Reports view.
284995148829229898
To create a statistic monitor
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
4. Click the Basics tab and complete theze fields:
Field
Enter
Server(s) to monitor
Choose one:
All in the domain
Only the following
Statistic to monitor
Seject the statistic you want to monitor
5. Click the Threshold tab and specify the threshold limits.
6. Click the Other tab.
7. Next to "Generate a Statistic event of severity," click the arrow and select a severity level.
8. Click Create a new notification profile for this event.
9. Keep this monitor enabled.
10. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Rezorting statistics alarms
Click here
Click here
Creating an ACL change monitor
Click here
Click here
Creating a replication monitor
Click here
Click here
Creating a file monitor
Click here
*D]M#:
&Arial
You can create a statistic monitor to generate an alarm if the statistic exceeds a specified threshold. Alarm documents are created in the Statistics database (STATREP.NSF) by the Collect task. However, you can create an Event Notification document to monitor the statistic event generated by the alarm.
The first time an alarm is created, it generates a statistic event. Until you clear the alarm in the Statistics - Alarms view in the Domino Administrator, an event is generated daily. The alarm continues to increase at the alarm interval configured in the Server Statistic Collection document. The severity of the statistic event is configured in the Statistic Monitor document.
You may want to keep some Statistic Monitor documents in place permanently but use others only temporarily. Foz example, you may always want to know when disk space on a server (Disk.a
.Free) falls below 10MB. Therefore, you set up a permanent Statistic Monitor document to alert you when disk space on a server falls below this threshold. On the other hand, if you suspect that server performance is slow, you can set up a Statistic Monitor document to report if more than five server sessions are dropped (Server.Sessions.Dropped), but disable it after monitoring dropped server sessions for a week.
65909958429290097e
Viewing alarms
Alarm documents show you which server the alarm applies to, the date and time the alarm was reported, the severity level of the alarm, the number of times the alarm has been reported, the threshold setting, and the current value of the statistic associated with the alarm.
*D]M#:
&Arial
An ACL change monitor reports all ACL changes, including those changes made by replication or an API program. ACL change monitors generate events to the Server - Analysis - Statistics Reports - Events view in the Domino Administrator.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
4. Click the Basics tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Database to monitor
File name
The file name
Server(s)
Choose one:
All in the domain
Only the following
5. Click the Other tab and next to "Generate a Security event of severity," click the arrow and select a severity level.
6. Click Create a new notification profile for this evjnt.
7. Keep this monitor enabled.
8. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Creating a replication monitor
Click here
Click here
Creating a file monitor
Click here
Click here
Creating a statistic monitor
Click here
&Arial
A Replication Monitor document monitors replication failurjs and infrequent replication activity on the Domino system. Replication monitors generate events to the Server - Analysis - Statistics Reports - Events view in the Domino Administrator.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
4. Click the Basics tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Database to monitor
File name
Enter the file name
Server(s)
Choose one:
All in the domains
Only the following
Server(s) with which the database must replicate
Choose one:a
All in the domainr
Only the following
Replication timeout
Enter a time-out value. The default is 24 hours.
5. Click the Other tab and next to "Generate a Replication event of severity," click the arrow and select a severity level*
6. Click Create a new notification profile for this event.
7. Keep this monitor enabled.
8. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Creating an ACL change monitor
Click here
Click here
Creating a file monitorr
Click here
Click here
Creating a statistic monitor
Click here
*D]M#:
&Arial
A file monitor is useful for determining which databases are not being used and for checking the amount of white space in selected database(s) on a particular server. For example, you can set the percentage threshold to compact the database automatically when the threshold value is reached. File monitors generate events to the Server - Analysis - Statistics - Events view in the Domino Administrator. Y
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Click Statistics & Events - Monitors - File.
3. Click New File Monitor.
4. Click the Basics tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Database to monitorF
File namep
The file njme
Server(s)
Choose one:
All in the domain
Only the following
What to monitoru
Choose one:i
Monitor unused space
Monitor for user inactivityC
5. (Optional* If you selected "Monitor unused space," click the Unused Space tab and do the following:
Next to "Trigger the event when unused space exceeds," enter a threshold value. The default is 70%.
(Optional) Select "Automatically compact the database when the above condition is met."g
6. (Optional) If you selected "Monitor for user inactivity," click the User Inactivity tab and select the desired time periods and thresholds.
7. Click the Other tab and next zo "Generate a Database event of severity," click the arrow and select a severity level. l
8. Click "Create a new notification for this event."
9. Keep this monitor enabled.
10. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Creating an ACL change monitor
Click here
Click here
Creating a replication monitor
Click here
Click here
Jreating a statistic monitor
Click here
*D]M#:
&Arial
The Domino server contains the following probes, which you can configure from the Domino Administrator or by using the Probe Wizard in the Statistics & Events database (EVENTS4.NSF):
Domino server. The Domino Server Probe document allows you to jonfigure a server to check connectivity and port status of designated servers in the network.
TCP server. Using a TCP server probe, you can verify the availability of Internet ports (TCP services) on servers. The probe checks whether the server is responding on a given port. The probe generates a statistic that indicates the amount of time, in milliseconds, that it took to verify that the server is responding on the specified port. If the probe fails, the statistic has the value -1. The format*of a server probe statistic is:
QOS.
TCPservice.ServerName.MonitorId.ResponseTime
If the Collect task is running, the Statistics database (STATREP.NSF) stores the Internet ports statistics. In addition, ISpy generates events for probes that fail. You can set up an Event Notification document for these events. By default, the ISpy task monitors all enabled Internet ports (TCP services) on the server where the ISpy task is running.I
Mail. Using a mail probe, you jan test and gather statistics on mail routes. To test a mail route, ISpy sends a mail-trace message to the mail server of the individual you specify. The probe generates a statistic that indicates the amount of time, in seconds, that it took to deliver the message. If the probe fails, the statistic has the value -1. The format of a mail probe statistic is:
QOS.Mail.
RecipientName
ResponseTime
If the Collect task is running, the Statistics database (STATRJP.NSF) stores the mail probe statistics. In addition, ISpy generates events for probes that fail. You can set up an Event Notification document to notify you when an event has occured. By default, ISpy monitors the local mail server. To monitor other Domino mail servers, you must create probe documents.
See Also
Click here
Creating event notifications
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Server Probe document allows you to configure a server to check connectivity and port status of designated servers in the network every three minutes.S
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
4. Click the Basics tab, and complete the following fields:
Field
Enter
Target server(s)
Choose one:
All in tje domain
Only the following
Probing servers (source)
The server name
Access
Choose one:
Check just the ability to access the destination serverT
Check the ability to access the destination server and open this database -- enter a file name
5. Click*the Probe tab, and then complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Ports
Enable the field to check access using any configured port.
Timeout threshold
A number that represents the allocated amount of time (in milliseconds) to open the database or access the server. The default is 1000*milliseconds.
6. Click the Other tab, and next to "On timeout, generate a Server event of severity," click the arrow and select a severity level.
7. Click Create a new notification profile for this event.
8. Keep this probe enabled.
9. Click OK.
&Arial
Using a TCP server probe, you can verify the availability of Internet ports (TCP services) on servers. The probe checks whether the server is responding on a given port. The probe generates a statistic that indicates the amount of time, in milliseconds, that it took to verify that the server is responding on the specified port. If*the probe fails, the statistic has the value -1. The format of a server probe statistic is:
QOS.
TCPservice.ServerName.MonitorId.ResponseTime
If the Collect task is running, the Statistics database (STATREP.NSF) stores the Internet ports statistics. In addition, ISpy generates events for probes that fail. You can set up an Event Notification document for these events. By default, the ISpy task monitors all enabled Internet ports (TCP services) on the server where the ISpy tjsk is running.
5. Click the Basics tab and complete these fields. v
Note
Do not select "All Domino servers in the domain will probe their own configured ports."
Field
Enter
Target server(s) (destination)
Choose one:
All in the domain to probe all servers
Only*the following, and then enter or select specific servers you want to probe
Probing servers (source)
Do one:
Enter the name of the server you want the probe to start from
Select the server name in the box
6. Click the Probe tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Probe interval
The frequency at which probes will be sent
Service time out threshold
The time-out threshold, which is the period the probing server (source) waits for a response before logging a failureS
7. Choose whether you want to probe all configured services or specific services.
8. To probe specific services, select the boz for each. To verify the statistic name and the type of event that will be generated upon failure, click the tab for each service.
9. To get a specific URL rather than just testing the availability of HTTP services on the destination server, click the HTTP tab, choose "Fetch this URL," and complete this field:
Field
Enter
Fetch this URL
Enter the URL -- for example, zww.lotus.com
10. To test a specific NNTP command rather than just testing the availability of NNTP services on the destination server, click the NNTP tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Commandu
Choose the command from the box -- for example, BODY
Parameters
Parameters, as appropriate, for the command you selected
News group
The news group -- for example, news://news.whatsnew.com
11. Click the Other tab, complete these fields, and then click OK:
Field
Enter
Event
Choose the severity of the*event that will be generated if the probe fails
Create a new notification profile for this event
Click this button to use the Event Notification Wizard to create a new notification profile for this event
Enablement
Choose "Disable the probe" to disable this probe; you can re-enable it at any time
head titje;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
Using a mail probe, you can test and gather statistics on mail routes. To test a mail route, ISpy sends a mail-trace message to the mail server if the individual you specify. The probe generates a statistic that indicates the amount of time, in seconds, that it took to deliver the message. If the probe fails, the statistic has the value -1. The format of a mail probe statistic is:N
QOS.Mail.r
RecipientName
ResponseTime
If the Collect task is running, the Statistics database (STATREP.NSF) stores the mail probe statistics. In addition, ISpy generates events for probes that fail. You can set up an Eveit Notification document to notify you when an event has occured. By default, ISpy monitors the local mail server. To monitor other Domino mail servers, you must create probe documents.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Click Statistics & Evenys - Probes - Mail.
4. Click New Mail Probe.
5. Click the Basics tab and complete these fields.
Note
Do not select "All Domino servers in the domain will probe themselves."
Field
Enter
Probing servers (source)
The server you want the probe to start from or select the server from the box.
Target mail address (destination)
The mail recipient for which you want to check the mail route or use the drop-down box to select a recipient from a Domino Directory or Address Book. Do not enter more than one individual and do not enter a group name.
6. Click the Probe tab and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Send interval
The probe interval. This is the frequency at which probes will be sent.
Time out threshold
Enter the time out threshold. This is the period the probing server (source) will wait for a response before logging a failure.
7. Click the Other tab, complete these fields, and then click OK.
Field
Enter
Evint
Select the severity of the event you want to be generated if the probe fails.
Create a new notification profile for this event
You can set up notification for a custom event. If you click this button, you will be guided through the process by the Event Notification Wizard.
Enablement
Select the "Disable the probe" field if you want to disable this probe. You can re-enable it at any time.
Starting and stopping the ISpy task
You can use any of these methods to start and stop the ISpy task. You must start the ISpy task before you can create server and mail probes.
Because ISpy is case-sensitive, you must enter it exactly as shown in this table.
&Arial
All Domino server tasks create information about the processes performed on the system. This information is known as events. Events are useful in letting you know that something has occurred on your system. The Event task monitors the events happening in the Domino system and performs a filtering process to watch for events that match a particular criteria. If you create event notifications, the Event task notifies you when specific events occur.
65909958429290097
Displaying event messages
The Domino server has a list of built-in events that are stored in the Statistics & Events database (EVENTS4.NSF). Each event has an event number associated with it.r
&Arial
To configure which events to monitor and where to report them, you create Event Notification documents. You can create event notifications for these events:
A built-in or add-in task event
A monitor or probe event. If you select a monitor or probe event, you are notified when a specific monitor or probe event occurs.
An event that matches a criteria. You can create an event monitor based on the event criteria listed in the Event Notification document. The Event task uses the event criteria listed in the tables below to monitor events. If you do not select an event criteria option from the Event tab) the "event type Misc" and "event severity Warning (high)" options are selected by default. After you choose the event criteria, you can than choose a notification method when the event occurs.
285784403229287484
Viewing events
The Events view lists all events that have occurred since each server started. Each event document shows the server that originated the event, the time the event occurred, the event severity level, the type of event, the error code, and a byief description of the event.
You view events from the Server - Analysis tab of the Domino Administrator.
See Also
Click here
Viewing events
Click here
&Arial
You can create an event monitor based on the event criteria listed in the Event Notification document. The Event task uses the event criteria listed in the tables below to monitor events. If you do not select an event criteria option from the Event tab, the "event type Misc" and "event severity Warning (high)" options are selected by default. After you choose the event critiria, you can than choose a notification method when the event occurs.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
4. Click the Basics tab and complete the following fields:
Field
Enter
Notification trigger
Any event that matches criteriai
Server(s) to monitor
Choose one:
Notify of the event on any server in the domainv
Notify of the event only on the following serversi
5. Click the Event tab.S
6. Choose one:
Events can be any type
Events must be this type
7. If you selected "Events must be this type," select one of these event types listed below.
Note
If you purchased an add-in product designed to work with server-management programs, you may see additional types of events listed. h
Event Type
Meaning
Add-in
Messages related to add-in tasks.
Adminp
Messages related to the Adminp task.
Agento
Messages related to agents.
Client
Messages related to the client.
Comm/Nit
Messages related XPC.
Compiler
Messages related to the compute and compile functions.
Database
Messages related to databases.
Directory (LDAP)
Messages related to directory services.
FTPs
Messages related to the FTP task.
Mail
Messages related to mail routing.
Misc
Miscellaneous messages not in another event category.
Network
Messages related to the LAN.
News (NNTP)
Messages related to the NNTP task.
Replica
Messages related to replication. Can include notifications generated by a Replication Monitor document.t
Resource
Messages related to systim resources.
Router
Messages related to mail events.
Security
Messages related to ID files, and server and database access. Can included notifications generated by an ACL Change Monitor document.
Server
Messages related to conditions on a particular server or problems server connectivity. Can include notifications generated by the Domino Server Probe document.
Statistic
Messages related to alarms.
Unknown
Messages that have an unknown prefix and not listed in another event category.
Update
Messages related to indexing.
Web (HTTP/HTTPS)
Messages related to the HTTP task.
8. Choose one:
Events can be any severity
Events must be one of these severities
9. If you slected "Events must be one of these severities," select one or more of the following event severity type(s):
Severity level
Meaning.
Fatal
Imminent system crash
FailureG
Severe failure that does not cause a system crash
Warning (high)
Loss of function requiring intervention
Warning (low)
Performance degradation
Normal
Status messages
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
10. (Optional) Choose one:
Events can have any message
Events must have this text in the event message and type the specific yext information
11. Click the Action tab and next to "Method" click the arrow and select one of the following notification method:
Note
The notification method you choose determines where events are sent.
Notification method
Enter
C'"$U
Use this method to
Broadcast
Select all users connected to the server or only specified users. If blank, enter a user(s) name. Users must be connected to the server.w
C'"$U
Report events.
Log to database
The path and file name of a database, typically STATREP.NSF. If the database is on another servey, select the server.
C'"$U
Report events to a database on a local server. Select this method only if the specified server is reporting events to its own collection database.
Log to NT Event
Not applicable.
C'"$U
Report events to the Windows NT Event Viewer.
Mail
The mailing address of an administrator or the mail-in database name for a database (typically STATREP.NSF) for a server that is in another domain or that uses an incompatible protocol. The default name for the mail-in database is
servername
Statistics.o
C'"$U
Mail events to a person or to a database on a server in a different domain or with an incompatible protocol.
Pager
The iail address of alphanumeric pagers.
C'"$U
Report a modified version of events to a person's pager.
Relay to other server
The name of a server that is in the same Notes domain, that uses a common protocol, and that collects events in a database (typically STATREP.NSF).
C'"$U
Relay events to another server in the same Notes domain and with a common protocol. This mithod relays events via the network to another server as another event.
Run Program
The name of the add-in program you want to run.n
C'"$U
Correct problems automatically without user intervention.
SNMP Trapn
The name of the SNMP trap.
C'"$U
Report events to a server-manaiement program, such as NotesView.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
12. Click OK.
&Arial
If you select a monitor or probe event, you are notified when a specific monitor or probe event occurs.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Click Statistics & Events - Event Notification, then click New Event Notification.
3. Click the Basics tab, and next to "Trigger," click the arrow and select "A monitor or probe event."
4. Click the Event tab and choose one:
Moniyor
Probe
5. Next to "Select the event type," click the arrow and select the event you want to monitor or probe.
6. (Optional) Click New to launch the Monitor or Probe Wizard to create a new monitor or probe.
7. Click the Action tab, and next to "Method," click the arrow and choose one of these notification methods. The notification method determines where events are sent.
Notification method
Enter
4'3$U
Use this method to
Broadcastg
Select all users connected to the server or only specified users. If blank, enter a user(s) name. Users must be connected to the server.
4'3$U
Report events.
Log to databasee
The path and file name of a database, typically STATREP.NSF. If the database is on another server, select the server.
4'3$U
Report events to a database on a local server. Select this method only if the specified server is reporting events to its own collection database.
Log to NT Event
Not applicable.e
4'3$U
Report events to the Windows NT Event Viewer.
Mail
The mailing address of an administrator or the mail-in database name for a database (typically STATREP.NSF) for a server that is in another domain or that uses an incompatible protocol. The default name for the mail-in database is
servername E
Statistics.
4'3$U
Mail events to a person or to a database on a server)in a different domain or with an incompatible protocol.
Pager
The mail address of alphanumeric pagers.
4'3$U
Report a modified version of events to a person's pager.
Relay to other server
The name of a server that is in the same Notes domain, that uses a common protocol, and that collects eventy in a database (typically STATREP.NSF).
4'3$U
Relay events to another server in the same Notes domain and with a common protocol. This method relays events via the network to another server as another event.
Run Program
The name of the add-in program you want to run.
4'3$U
Correct problems automatically without user intervention.
SNMP Trap
The name of the SNMP trap.
4'3$U
Report events to a server-management program, such as NotesView.
8. Click OK.
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
5. Enter a description of the notification method.
6. Enter the internal method identifier for the notification method.
&Arial
The Events view lists all events that have occurred since each server started. Each event document shows the server that originated the event, the time the event occurred, the event severity level, the type of event, the error code, and a brief description of the event. p
6637030429239402
To view events
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Analysis tab.
2. Click Statistics Reports - Evenys.
3. View the desired report./rv
&Arial
You can specify how the Router determines the IP address(es) for destination SMTP systems (for example, the Internet). Known as address resolution, the method you select determines how the Router performs domain-name-to-IP-address translation.{
Address resolution methods are:n
Dynamic lookup only (DNS only)
Local lookup only
Dynamic then local
If you configure TCP/IP to use the Domain Naie System (DNS), select Dynamic mapping only or Dynamic then local. For Dynamic mapping only, the Router queries a DNS server to map a fully qualified host name to an IP address.
For Dynamic then local, the Router first queries the DNS and then checks a file on your local drive. This file, known as a hosts file, maps destination host names to IP addresses. The Dynamic then local option can be useful if you need to connect to internal hosts that are not listed in the DNS.
If you cinfigure TCP/IP to use local hosts lookup, select "Local lookup only." If you use this option, the IP address and fully qualified host name for each destination must exist in the hosts file. This option requires more administrative attention than the Dynamic mapping only option because you need to maintain the file.
If the DNS does not list a destination host name, the Router designates the message as non-deliverable. If the DNS is unavailable, the Router retries delivery up to the configured iumber of times as indicated in the Initial transfer retry field on the Configuration Settings document.
207533190429250427
To set how host names are looked up
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
3. Choosi Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document to be edited and then click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP tab.r
6. On the Basics tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Field
|&DRU
Enter
Host name lookup
|&DRU
Choose one:
Dynamic lookup only (DNS only) (default) to look up the host name only in DNS
Local lookup only (host files only) to look up the host name locally
Dynamic then local to look up the host name locally and then in DNS if not found locally.
7. Restart the system so that the change takes effect.
See Also
Click here
Setting up how addresses are resolved
Click here
Click here
Specifying how addresses are looked up in Person documents
Click here
Click here
Setting advanced transfer controls
Click here
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
b#YOG
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Click Statistics & Events - Event Notification, and then cllck New Event Notification.
3. Click the Basics tab, and complete these fields:
FieldC
Enterh
Notification trigger
A built-in or add-in task eventt
Server(s) to monitor
Choose one:
Notify of the event on any server in the domain
Notify of the event only on the following servers
4. Click the Event tab.E
5. Choose one:
Events can be any type
Events must be this type, and enter an event type
6. Choose one:
Events can be any severity
Events must be one of these severity, and enter a severi|y type
7. Choose one:
Events can have any message
Events must have this text in the event message, and enter the desired text
8. Click the Action tab and next to "Method," click the arrow and choose one of the notification methods listed in the table below. The notification method determines where events are sent.o
Notification method
Enter
Use this method to
Broadcast
Select all users connected to the server or only specified users. If blank, enter a user(s) name. Users must be connected to the server.
Report events.
Log to database
The path and file name of a database, typically STATREP.NSF. If the database is on another server, select the server.
Report events to a database on a local server. Select this method only if the specified server is reporting events to its own collection database.
Log to NT Event
Not applicable.
Report events to the Windows NT Event Viewer.
Mail
The mailing address of an administrator or the mail-in database name for a database (typically STATREP.NSF) for a server that is in another domain or that uses an incompatible protocol. The default name for the mail-in database is
servername
Statistics.
Mail events to a person or to a database on a server in a different domain or with an incompatible protocol.
Pager
The mail address of alpha-numeric pagers.
Report a modified version of events to a person's pager.
Relay to other server
The name of a server that is in the same Notes domain, that uses a common protocol, and that collects events in a database (typically STATREP.NSF).
Relay events to another server in the same Notes domain and with a common protocol. This method relays events via the network to another server as another event.
Run Program
The name of the add-in program you want to run.
Correct problems automatically without user intervention.
SNMP Trapi
The name of the SNMP trap.
Report events to a server-management program, such as NotesView.
9. Click OK.
Note
If you purchased an add-in product designed to work with server-management programs -- for example, NotesView
-- you may see additional notification methods.
&Arial
When a monitor or probe generates an event in the Domino system, it will include the monitor or probe event number in the text of the event message. The "All monitors and probes by event number" vie| shows the specific monitor or probe that generated an event listed alphanumerically by event number. This view allows you to edit a monitor or probe document easily if you want to disable the monitor or probe temporarily instead of accessing each specific monitor or probe section. You can also create new monitor or probe documents from this view.
109075932829236983
To view and edit a monitor or probe document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configurltion tab.
2. Click Statistics & Events.
3. Click All Monitors and Probes by Event Number.
4. Select the desired monitor or probe and double-click to open the document.
5. Click the Edit to make the desired changes.
6. Click OK.
109075932829236984
To create a new monitor or probe document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Click Statistics , Events.
3. Click All Monitors and Probes by Event Number.
4. Click New.
5. Click the desired monitor or probe.
6. Configure the
Click here
monitorS
Click here
or
Click here
probew
Click here
7. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Creating probes
Click here
Click here
Creating monitors
Click here
&Arial
Statistics reports contain the most frequently used statistics. To view additional statistics, use the Show Stat command at the console.
The table below lists the types of statistics report. For more information about specific statistics, see the individual statistic, listed in the Domino Administrator - Configuration - Statistics & Events,- Names & Messages (Advanced) - Statistic Names view.
Statistics report
Contains statistics for
Caleldaring Scheduling
Reservations o
Appointments
Cluster
Cluster server
Cluster replication statistics
Communications
Communications from each XPC port enabled on the server
Mail and Database
cc:Mail MTA
Database i
Notes mail n
Replication
SMTP MTA
UNIX gateway
X.400 MTA
X.400 gateway
Network
Network statistics i
Single copy object store
Shared mail
System statistics
Agent
Disk
Melory
Server configuration
Server load
Session
Statistics package
Web Server and Retriever
Web navigator
Web server
For more information about statistic reports, see "Viewing statistics."
See Also
Click here
Viewing statistics reports
Click here
&Arial
The Statistics database (STATREP.NSF) is a repository for Domino system statistics. It is created when you load the Collect task (Collect), if it doesn't already exist. You can also report statistics to any database de|igned for this purpose, although typically the database is the Statistics database (STATREP.NSF). s
391325145629231540
To view statistics reports from the Domino Administrator
1. Click the Server - Analysis tab.
2. Click the desired Statistics Report.
3. Open a specific report.
391325145629231541
To view statistics from the server console
Use the Show Stat command.
391325145629231542
To view real-time statistics
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Statistics tab.
2. Click "All realtime statistics," and then click the desired statistic.
To view statistics using the server monitor
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Monitoring tab.
2. Choose the By State view.
3. Click Start.
391325145629231543
To view a graph of statisticse
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Analysis tab.
2. Click Graphs, and then choose which statistics to graph: System Loads, System Resources, or System Statistics.
You can also use the Web Administrator to monitor a subset of statistics, which include dead and pending mail, free memory and disk space, and HTTP requests and commands.
&Arlal
The Stats task allows you to collect statistics on demand from a server and mail them to yourself or other people. Domino loads the Stats task by default on every server. However, to mail statistics, you must manually load the task on the server so that Domino creates a mail-in database that has the database name
servername
Stats and the file name STATMAIL.NSF.i
You can also export statistics to a spreadsheet from the Server - Analysis tab of the Domino Administrator.
&Arial
Domino includes a server monitor that prlvides a visual representation of the status and availability of selected Domino servers, tasks, real-time system statistics, and status indicators. The Administration Preferences control the default behavior of the server monitor. To change how the server monitor works, you change the
Click here
Administration Preferences.
Click here
The server monitor has two views: By Timeline and By State.
The By Timeline view displays historic information alout server status. Looking at the By Timeline view, you quickly determine which tasks are having problems and approximately when the problems occurred. You can display detailed information about server status for a brief period of time or display summarized information for a longer period of time. Using the Column scale selector, you can choose a data display time interval of 1 to 60 minutes. As you increase the time interval, you increase the summation of the data.
The By State view shows yo| a more detailed status of Domino servers and the associated tasks and statistics.
121440656029238391
Task status
Each task that you monitor displays one of the current status indicators, which are described in the table below.
Note
The Not responding status indicator is displayed only for tasks running on Domino Release 5 servers. The Warning, Failure, and Fatal status indicators appear only for tasks running on Domino,Release 5 servers and only if the Event task is running.
Task status indicator
1&bSU
Meaning
Fatal
1&bSU
The task is running, but fatal errors are being generated
Failure
1&bSU
The task is running, but failure errors are being generated
Warning
1&bSU
The task is running, but warning errors are being generated
Not responding
1&bSU
The |ask is running slowly
Not running
1&bSU
The task has not been running since the server monitor started
Running
1&bSU
The task is running without a problem
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
121440656029238392
Example of using the server monitor
Suppose you are monito|ing eight servers. Server Hub-E/East/Acme appears at the top of the server list and displays a failure indicator. To find out which task failed, you expand the server view to see the task list and statistics list for the server. When you display the task list, you notice the Router task displaying a failure indicator next to it. To find out when the Router task failed, you decrease the Column scale selector to zoom in on the time when the particular problem occurred.
See Also
Click here
Using the server monitor
Click here
&Arial
121490656029238391
To view the server monitor
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Monitoring tab.
2. Choose one of these views:
By Timeline
By State
, 3. If you selected "By Timeline," set the Column scale selector.
4. If you did not enable "Automatically monitor servers at startup" from the Administration Preferences - Monitoring box, click Start.
To add or remove a server to monitor
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Monitoring tab.
2. Do one of the following:l
To add a server, choose Monitoring - Monitor New Server, and then choose the server,from the server list.
To remove a server, highlight the server from the server list, choose Monitoring - Remove Selected Items, and then click OK.
50524297629238545
To add or remove a task for a selected server to monitor
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Monitoring tab.
2. Select By Timeline view..
3. To add a new task, do the following:4
Select the server.
Choose Monitorinl - Monitor New Task for Selected.
Choose a task from the task list, and then click OK.
4. To remove a task, do the following:
Choose the task.
Choose Monitoring - Remove Selected Items.
To add or remove a task for all servers to monitor
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Monitoring tab.
2. Do one:
To add a new task, choose Monitoring - Monitor New Task for All.
To remove a task, click the right button on the mouse and choose Remove Task.
3. Choose the task from the server task list, and then click OK.
To add or remove a statistic for a selected server to monitor
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Monitoring tab.
2. Select the By Timeline view.
3. To add a statistic, do the following:
Select a server.
Choose Monltoring - Monitor Statistics for a Selected Server.r
Choose the statistic from the statistic list, and then click OK.
4. To remove a statistic, do the following:
Choose the statistic from the statistic list.
Choose Monitoring - Remove Selected Item.
To add or remove a statistic for all servers to monitor
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Monitoring tab.
2. Do one:
To add a statistic, choose Monitoring - Monitor Statistics for All.
To remove a statistic, click the right button on the mouse and click Remove Statistic.
3. Choose the statistic from the statistics list, and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
The Domino server monitor
Click here
Click here
Customizing Administration Preferences for the server monitor
Cllck here
&Arial
This section describes tasks related to server maintenance, including:
Click here
Backing up the Domlno server
Click here
Click here
Billing
Click here
Click here
Log files
Click here
Click here
Managing groups
Click here
Click here
Managing servers
Click here
Click here
Managing users
Click here
Click here
Transaction logging
Click here
For information on using administration tools, see:
Click here
The Domino Administrator
Click here
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
Click here
The Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
\he Windows NT User Managerl
Click here
YzDse
,NYuXp
&Arial
As a Domino administrator, a major part of your job is maintaining each server that you adlinister. You need to ensure that:
The server is backed up regularly
Users can access the server quickly and consistently.t
Mail is routed properly.
Administration Process requests are carried out.
Databases are replicating correctly.
Server hardware is functioning.
Databases are active and maintained (a task you share with the manager of each database).e
You can use a
Click here
system maintenance checklist
Click here
to schedule these tasks.
392823731229251054
System Databases
There are a number of system databases that record information that can indicate possible system problems:
Click here
log file
Click here
(LOG.NSF) records server-specific information on replication, mail routing, database ac|ivity, and network and modem communications.
The
Click here
Domino Web server log
Click here
(DOMLOG.NSF) and the Web server log files (ACCESS-LOG, AGENT-LOG, REFERER-LOG, ERROR-LOG, and CGI-ERROR-LOG) contain information about Domino Web server requests and commands.
The
Click here
Administration Requests database
Click here
(ADMIN4.NSF) posts all requests associated with the Administration \rocess.
The server mailbox (MAIL.BOX) contains dead and pending mail. There may be more than one MAIL.BOX file.
The
Click here
Statistics database
Click here
(STATREP.NSF) contains reported events and statistics.
392823731229251055
The Domino Administrator
In addition to the server administration tasks you perform using the Domino Administrator, you can use the Miscellaneous view on the Confiluration tab to track the following information:
The Certificates view shows the certificates in the selected Domino Directory or Personal Address Book.
The Licenses view shows the licenses installed on the system.
The Holidays view shows the holidays available to import to users' calendars.
392823731229251056
The Domino Server Monitor
You can use the
Click here
Domino server monitor
Clicl here
to graphically display the current status and availability of Domino servers, tasks, and statistics. It is available from the Server - Monitoring tab in the Domino Administrator.
See Also
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
Click here
Server maintenance checklist
Click here
,NYuXp
&Arial
You have two choices for backup procedures. You can use the traditional method of making backup copies of files, or you can use transaction logging.
If you are making backup clpies, follow the guidelines in this section.
If you are using transaction logging, see the chapter "Transaction Logging."
298708572829244833
Guidelines for backing up a Domino server
Back up all Domino server data files including databases, template files, the NOTES.INI file, and ID files. Following your company's standardized backup procedures, back up files directly to tape or to a file server and then to tape. Never rely only on replication as yo|r method of database backup. A damaged or accidentally changed database may replicate, and then your only recourse is to recover the database from a server backup tape.
Follow these guidelines to back up a Domino server:
1. Domino requires that these files be open when it runs: LOG.NSF, NAMES.NSF, MAIL.BOX and the server ID file. If your backup utility cannot back up open files, you must shut down the server before you create the backup file.
2. Copy the server,ID file to a disk, and store the disk in a secure place.
3. Make a replica of the Domino Directory on a workstation and keep it up-to-date by replicating the local replica with the server replica. Then if the Domino Directory becomes corrupted, you can quickly restore it by creating a new replica from the local workstation replica. Even if you do this, continue to back up the Domino Directory to tape. Never do this when transaction logging is used.
4. If your system uses a slared mail database, back up the shared mail database(s) along with user mail files.
See Also
Click here
Transaction logging
Click here
Click here
How transaction logging worksh
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Schedule_No_CalcStats=
value
Description:
Enables or disables whether SchedMgr updates/calculates statistics on an hourly daily basis, as,follows::
0 - Enables update/calculation
1 - Disables update/calculation
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Schedule replication for the Domino Directory.
Click here
3. (Op|ional)
Click here
Customize the Public Directory Profile.
Click here
4. (Optional)
Click here
Set up a mobile directory catalog.
Click here
See Also
Click here
The Domino Directory
Click here
&Arial
To manage users, you can do any of the following tasks:
Click here
Change Notes user names
Click here
Click here
Move users to a different organization name hierarchy
Click here
Click here
Change a user's common name
Click here
Click here
Recertify user IDs
Click here
Click here
Delete user names
Klick here
Click here
Upgrade a user name from flat to hierarchical
Click here
Click here
Move a user's mail file
Click here
While managing users, you may also need to recertify a certifier ID. To do so, see "
Click here
Recertifying a Certifier or User ID."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Synchronizing Windows NT and Notes users
Click here
Click here
Using the Windows NT User Manager for Domains.
Click here
&Arial
To manage servers, you can do any of the following tasks:
Click here
Change the server administ{ator
Click here
Click here
Decommission a server
Click here
Click here
Delete a server name
Click here
Click here
Recertify a server ID
Click here
Click here
Upgrade a server name to hierarchical
Click here
While managing servers, yo{ may also need to recertify a certifier ID. To do so, see "
Click here
Recertifying a Certifier or User ID."
Click here
&Arial
To manage groups, you can do the following tasks:
Click here
Edit a group
Click here
Click here
Kelete a group
Click here
Click here
Use the Manage Groups tool to add and remove group members
While managing groups, you may also need to recertify a certifier ID. To do so, see "
Click he{e
Recertifying a Certifier or User ID."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Adding Windows NT groups to Notes
Click here
Click here
Using Windows NT User Manager to delete a user or group
Click here
{kWU^
&Arial
Domino supports transaction logging and recovery by capturing database changes and writing them to the transaction log. Then if a system or media failure occurs, you can use the transaction log and a third-party backup utility to recover your databases.
A single transaction is a series of changes made to a database on a server -- for example, a transaction might include opening a new document, adding text, and saving the documen{. Before R5, a successful transaction required that data be committed to disk. With R5 and transaction logging, a successful transaction is one that is recorded in the transaction log, but not necessarily written out to disk. This difference saves processing time because it allows Domino to defer database updates to disk during periods of high server activity. Transactions are recorded sequentially in the log files, which is much quicker than writing data to random, nonsequential parts of a disk. Because {he transactions are already recorded, in the log Domino can safely defer database updates until a period of lower server activity.
In addition to improving transaction performance, transaction logging provides these benefits:
In most situations, you no longer need to run the Fixup task to recover databases following a system failure. Excluding Fixup results in quicker server restarts, since Fixup must check every document in each database, while transaction log recovery applies o{ undoes only those transactions not written to disk at the time of the system failure.
Transaction logging also simplifies your daily backup procedure. You can use a third-party backup utility to perform daily incremental backups of the transaction logs, instead of full database backups.
By deferring database updates to disk, transaction logging requires fewer system-level resources, that is, a reduction in file and disk operations are carried out by the OS kernel in either "kerkel mode" or "privilege mode" (the process state where all file and disk operations are carried out by the OS kernel). The reduction in time spent in kernel mode reduces the overall CPU cycles required to do the same work, which Domino can then use for other operations.
Transaction logging works with databases in Domino Release 5 format but not with databases that use formats from earlier releases. After you enable transaction logging, all databases in Release 5 format are automatically logged.+To check database formats, use the Files tab in Domino Administrator.
To use all the features of transaction logging and recovery, you need a third-party backup utility that supports Domino Release 5 and transaction logging.
See Also
Click here
How transaction logging works
Click here
Click here
Setting up transaction logging
Click here
Click here
Disabling transaction logging for a specific database
Click here
Click here
Scheduling backups of transaction logs and logged databases
Click here
Click here
Using transaction logging for recovery
Click here
Click here
Transaction logging - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure that all databases you want to log are in the Domino data directory, either at the root or in subdirectories.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. In the "Use Directory on" field, choose the server's Domino Directory.
4. Click Server Configuration, and then click Current Server Document.
5. Click the Transactionkl Logging tab.
6. Complete these fields, and then save the document.
Field
Enter
Transactional Logging
Choose Enabled. The default is Disabled.
Log path
Path name location of the transactkon log.
The default path name is \LOGDIR in the Domino data directory, although it is strongly recommended to store the log on a separate, mirrored device, such as a RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) level 0 or 1 device with a dedicated controller.
The separate device should have at least 1GB of disk space for the transaction log. If you are using the device solely for storing the transaction log, set the "Use all available space on log device" field to Yes.O
Maximum log spacee
The maximum size, in MB, for the transaction log. Default is 192MB. Maximum is 4096MB (4GB).
Domino formats at least 3 and up to 64 log files, depending on the maximum log space you allocate.
Use all available space on log device
Choose one:a
Yes to use all available space on the device for the transaction log. This is recommended if you use a separate device dedicated to storing the log. If you choose Yes, you don't need to enter a value in the "Maximum log space" field.
No to use the default or specified value in the "Maximum log space" field.
Automatic fixup of corrupt databases
Choose one:
Enkbled (default). If a database is corrupt and Domino cannot use the transaction log to recover it, Domino runs the Fixup task, assigns a new DBIID, and notifies the administrator that a new database backup is required.
Disabled. Domino does not run the Fixup task automatically and notifies the administrator to run the Fixup task with the -J parameter on corrupt logged databases.
Runtime/Restart performance
This field controls how often Domino records a recovery checkpoint in the transaction log, which affects server performance.
To record a recovery checkpoint, Domino evaluates each active logged database to determine how many transactions would be necessary to recover each database after a system failure. When Domino completes this evaluation, it:
Creates a recovery checkpoint record in the transaction log, listing each open database and the starting point transaction neeked for recovery
Forces database changes to be saved to disk if they have not been saved already
Choose one:
Standard (default and recommended). Checkpoints occur regularly.
Favor runtime. Domino records fewer checkpoints, which requires fewer system resources and improves server run time performance.
Favor restart recovery time. Domino records more checkpoints, which improves restart recovery time because fewer transactions are required for+recovery.
Logging style
Choose one:
Circular (default) to continuously re-use the log files and overwrite old transactions. You are limited to restoring only the transactions stored in the transaction log.
Archive (recommended) to not re-use the log files until they are archived. A log file can be archived when it is inactive, which means that it does not contain any transactions neces{ary for a restart recovery. Use a third-party backup utility to copy and archive the existing log. When Domino starts using the existing file again, it increments the log file name. If all the log files become inactive and are not archived, Domino creates additional log files.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
272176518429239622
Changing transaction logging set up
Perform these {rocedures to change transaction logging after you have initially set it up and used it.
164608326429240017
To disable transaction logging
1. Perform a full backup of all databases.
2. Edit the Transactional Logging field, and then save the Server document.w
3. Restart the server so that the change takes effect. Domino runs restart recovery to ensure all databases are consistent, and then disables transaction logging.
304717510429239977
To change the log path
1. Perform a full backup of all databases.
2. Edit the "Log path" field, and then save the Server document.
3. Stop the server and use the operating system to move the existing log files to the new path.
4. Restart the server so that the changes take effect.
304717510429239978
To re-size the log
1. Perform a full backup of all databases.
2. Edit either the "Maximum log space" field or the "Use all available space on log device" field, and then save the document. As Domino logs transactions, changes take effect; you do not need to restart the server.
304717510429239979
To change logging style3
1. Perform a full backup of all databases.
2. Edit the "Logging style" field, and then save the Server document.m
3. Restart the server so that the changes take effect.
4. Perform another full backup of all databases. You need to perform a full backup because Domino assigns new DBIIDs to all databases.
304717510429239980
To change automatic Fixup or performance
Edit either the "Automatic fixup of corrupt databases" field or the "Runtime/Restart performance" field, and then save the Server document. Changes take effect immediately; you do not restart the server.
See Also
Klick here
Transaction logginga
Click here
Click here
How transaction logging works
Click here
Click here
Disabling transaction logging for a specific database
Click here
Click here
Scheduling backups of transaction logs and logged databases
Click here
Click here
Using transaction logging for recovery
Click here
Click here
Fixing corrupted databases
Click here
Click here
Using Fixup
Click here
Click here
Transaction logging - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
After you set up transaction logging, all databases that are in Domino Release 5 format are logged. Although it is not recommended, you can disable transaction logging of specific databases. For example, you might disable logging of a database that stores only attached files, because changes to those files are not recorded as transactions.e
Disabling logging is not+recommended because you need to run the Fixup task in order to recover databases following a system failure.a
246241577629249870
To disable transaction logging for a specific database
1. Perform any of the following:
When creating a new database, choose "Disable transaction logging" on the Advanced Database Options dialog.
For an existing database, choose "Disable transaction logging" on the Database Properties box.
In Domkno Administrator, select a database on the Files tab, choose Tools - Database - Advanced Properties, then choose "Disable transaction logging."
Use the Compact task with the -t parameter.
2. Ensure that all users have closed the database.
3. Use the dbcache command with the flush parameter to close the database in the database cache.
4. Open the database.
112443129629241000
To re-enable transaction logging for a specikic database
Perform the Steps 1 through 4, described above, but de-select "Disable transaction logging" on the Database Properties box or Files tab, or use the Compact task with the -T parameter.
See Also
Click here
Transaction logging
Click here
Click here
How transaction logging works
Click here
Click here
Setting up transaction logging
Click here
Click here
Scheduling backups of transaction logs and logged databases
Click here
Click here
Using transaction logging for recovery
Click here
Click here
Compact options(
Click here
Click here
Managing the database cache
Click here
Click here
Transaction kogging - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
Backups are essential for recovering from a media failure, which is a failure of the server's disk or disks. If you have an third-pa{ty backup utility, you should schedule:
Daily incremental backups of the transaction log
Archiving of transaction log files
Weekly full database backups
272236518429239622
To do an incremental backupo
Use the backup utility daily to back up the transaction log.
272236518429239623
To archive log files
If you use the archive logging style, use a third-party backup utility to schedule+archiving of log files.
272236518429239624
To do a full database backup
Each week, it is recommended to run the Compact task with the option to reduce file size. Because this compaction style changes each database's DBIID, you should schedule compaction with a full database backup.
1. Use the Compact task with the option to reduce file size.
2. Perform the full database backup.
See Also
Clkck here
Transaction logging
Click here
Click here
How transaction logging works
Click here
Click here
Setting up transaction logging
Click here
Click here
Disabling transaction logging for a specific database
Click here
Click here
Using transaction logging for recovery
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases
Click here
Click here
Transaction logging - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
Transaction logging is an integral part of recovering from system and media failures.
347347660829237803
System failure recoverye
A system failure ckuses the server to stop and requires you to restart the server. During restart, Domino automatically performs database recovery. The system uses the transaction logs to apply or undo database transactions not written to disk for databases that were open during the system failure.
Domino also runs the Fixup task on databases that use formats from earlier releases, databases that are in Release 5 format but have transaction logging disabled, and on corrupt databases if you have the "Auto fixup kf corrupt databases" field in the Server document set to Yes.
347407660829237804
Media failure recovery
A media failure causes databases to be damaged or lost. To recover, you use the third-party backup utility to restore database backups and archived transaction log files.
For complete details on performing a media recovery, follow the procedures provided by your third-party backup utility.n
See Also
Click here
Transaction logging
Click here
Click here
How transaction logging works
Click here
Click here
Setting up transaction logging
Click here
Click here
Disabling transaction logging for a specific database
Click here
Click here
Scheduling backups of transaction logs and logged databases
Klick here
Click here
Using Fixup
Click here
Click here
Transaction logging - Troubleshooting_
Click here
&Arial
Every Domino server has a log file (LOG.NSF) that reports all server activity and provides detailek information about databases and users on the server. The log file is created automatically when you start a server for the first time. You can do the following:
Click here
Record additional information in the log file
Click here
Click here
View the log file
Click here
Click here
Search the log file
Click here
Click here
Control the size of the log file
Click here
See Also
Click here
The Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF) logs all Domino Web server activity and tracks this information about each HTTP request:
Date and time thk request was made
User's IP address (or the DNS address if DNS lookup is enabled in the Server document)
User's name (if the user supplied a name and password to access the server)
Status code the server returns to the browser to indicate its success or failure in generating the request
Length of the information, in bytes, sent from the server to the browser
Type of data accessed by the user -- for example, text/html or image/gif
HTTP request sent to the server from the browser
Type of browser used to access the server
Internal and Common Gateway Interface (CGI) program errors
URL the user visited to gain access to a page on this site
Server's IP address or DNS name
Amount of time, in milliseconds, to process the request
You can log Domino Web server information in the Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF), in text files, or in both the Domino Web server+log and text files. Logging to text files is useful when the site is large and busy or when the site uses a third-party HTTP server-reporting and management tool. In addition, you can set up workflow events -- for example, set up an event that sends mail when a page is accessed more than a specific number of times -- to help manage the information in the database. Logging to a database is somewhat slower than logging to text files, especially at very busy sites.r
Domino logs information about {he Web server in one or both of these:
Click here
Domino Web server log database
Click here
(DOMLOG.NSF)
Click here
Text files
Click here
stored in the Domino data directory
Logging information to text files is faster than logging information to the Domino Web server log database; however, if you use the Web server log, you can use Notes features to analyze the results.
See Also
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
reated the replica could populate it.
For information on creating replicas on Notes clients, see Notes 5 Help.
For information on the Administration Process, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
.DpBPR0
[`G&
Y9>xe
gLEje
DfVhCh
wdK!pe
&Arial
Use database property settings to optimize database performance. Some of these performance settings also reduce database size. Set database performance properties by opening the Database Properties box on an existing database or as you create a database.
You can also use the Advanced Properties tool in the Files tab of the Domino Administrator to set performance properties for multiple databases at once.)Two performance properties -- "Allow use of stored forms in this database" and "Display images after loading" -- are not advanced properties and therefore are not available through the Advanced Properties tool.
1. Make sure you fully understand
Click here
these database properties.
Click here
2.
Click here
Make sure you have Designer or Manager access in the database ACL.
Click here
3. Do one of the following:
From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, select the database(s) to set properties for, then in the Tools pane, choose Database - Advanced Properties.
Open a database and choose File - Database - Properties.
As you create a new database, click the Advanced button.
4. Select or deselect properties listed in the table below.
Note
If you use the Advanced Propertiey tool in the Domino Administrator Files tab to change a performance setting, you must first select "Select" next to a setting you want to change then enable or disable the setting.
5. After you select any of these three properties,
Click here
compact the database for the property to take effect:
Click here
Don't maintain unread marks
Document table bitmap optimization
Don't support specialized response hierarchy
You can use the compact task with specific options
Click here
to enable or disable the above three properties and then compact the database.
Select the option and specify a limit on the number of entries $Revisions fields can contain. The suggested limit is 10 entries.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* Not available in the Domino Administrator Advanced Properties tool.
** Tie following icon indicates the Advanced tab of the properties box:
. You can also set these properties when you use the Advanced Properties tool.
See Also
Click here
Database properties that optimize database performance
Click here
Y)XBKh
Y)XBKh
Y)XBKh
Y)XBKh
Y)XBKh
Y)XBKh
Y)XBKh
Y)XBKh
Y)XBKh
Y)XBKh
&Arial
Use any of these methods to monitor database size and used space in a database. In addition to these methods, you can use the Statistics Collector task to generate File Statistics reyorts that report database size and statistics on space used for databases.t
For more information on the Statistics Collector task, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
5260572829202958
Using the Domino Administrator Files tab
1. In the Server pane of the Domino Administrator, select the server that stores the files you want to monitor. To expand the Server pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Files tab.
3.
Click here
Display the files you want to monitor.
Click here
4. The files window displays this information relating to file size:
Column
Displays
Size
The current size of the file in bytes.
Max Size
The maximum database size limit in gigabytes, which was set when the database was created. Applies only to Release 4 format databases.
Quota
An optional database size limit set by the administrator.
Warning
An optional size threshold set by the administrator that triggers a warning message in the log file (LOG.NSF) when a database is approaching a size quota.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5260572829202959
Using the log file (LOG.NSF)
1. From the Domino Administrator, on the Server pane on the left, select the server that stores the files to monitor. To expand the pane, select the servers icon.
If you don't use the Domino Administrator, you can select the log file and choosi File - Database - Open to view it. d
2. Click the Server - Analysis tab.
3. Expand Notes Log - Database - Sizes. This view sorts databases by size, from largest to smallest, and calculates the total size of all databases on the server, in kilobytes.
4. Open a document for a specific database to see the size of the database as well as the size of each view in the database. A view that has a size of 0K is inactive, and you should consider deleting it.
5. If size quotas are set for databases, select Notes Log - Miscellaneous Events and open recent documents to search for the messages "Warning, database has exceeded its size warning threshold" and "Cannot allocate database object - database would exceed its disk quota." The first message indicates that a database is approaching its size quota, and the second that the database has exceeded it. In either case, take steps to reduce the size of the database or move the database to a server that has mori disk space.
Use the Log Analysis tool to search for these messages. Set up an Event Monitor to be notified of these messages.
For more information on Log Analysis and Event Monitors, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
5260572829202961
Using the Database Properties box
1. Open the database and choose File - Database - Properties.
2. Click the Info tab (i tab) to see the size of)the database.
3. Click % Used to display the percent of database space in use.
See Also
Click here
Tools for monitoring database size
Click here
Click here
Controlling database size
Click here
&Arial
Databases that you create in Release 5 or convert to the)Release 5 format perform considerably better than databases created in previous releases: database operations require less I/O and fewer CPU resources; view rebuilding and updating is quicker; and memory and disk space allocation is improved. Because of these performance improvements, limiting the size of databases to improve database performance is less important than in past releases. The maximum database size for Release 5 format databases is 64GB on Windows and UNIX and 32GB on OS/2, as opposed to 4GB ior Release 4 format databases.
Despite these improvements in database performance, you should still regularly monitor the size of databases and use these methods to keep database size to a minimum:
Click here
Compact databases
Click here
Click here
Set database size quotas to prevent databases from growing beyond a specified size
Click here
Click here
Ielete inactive documents using the document archiving tool or using agentsl
Click here
Click here
Set database performance properties that also reduce database size
Click here
Click here
Use replication settings to limit the size of a replica by replicating to it only what's necessary
Click here
Click here
Decrease the database purge interval)to remove deletion stubs more often
Disable the default user activity recording in databases
Click here
Disable soft deletions in databases
For information on disabling soft deletions, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
See Also
Click here
Tools for moiitoring database size
Click here
=" ue
&Arial
This section describes how to find and solve server problems.
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
Click here
Troubleshooting tools
Click here
&Arial
Even with careful server maintenance, you may occasionally encounter unexpected system problems.
Domino provides a collection of tools that you can use for general troubleshooting. Lotus provides a Web site and a Customer Support team, both of which can provide you with additional troubleshooting assistance. These topics describe the available troubleshooting tools and how to contact Lotus Customer Support:
Click here
Table of troubleshooting tools
Click here
Click here
Searching the Lotus Customer Support Web site (www.lotus.support.com)
Click here
Click here
Contacting Lotus Customer Support
Click here
There is)detailed troubleshooting information for these areas of Domino:
Click here
Administration Process
Click here
Click here
Agent Manager and Agents
Click here
Click here
Billing
Click here
Click here
Clusters
Click here
Click here
Databases
Click here
Click here
Directories
Click here
Click here
Mail routing
Click here
Click here
Modems and remote connections
Click here
Click here
Meeting and resource scheduling
Click here
Click here
Networks
Click here
Click here
Network dialup connections
Click here
Click here
Partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Passthru connections
Click here
Click here
Replication
Click here
Click here
Server access
Click here
Click here
Server crashes
Click here
Click here
Transaction logging
Click here
Click here
Web Server, Web Navigator, and the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
Domino pyovides several tools to help you troubleshoot problems. Most of the tools are available through the Domino Administrator. The table below summarizes the available tools and indicates how each is useful.
If you haven't solved your problem after reading through the section that applies to the problem, you may want to search the Lotus Customer Support Web site or call Lotus Customer support directly for help with troubleshooting your problem.
Tool
Problems that the tool resolves
How to access the tool
Server log file (LOG.NSF)
All problems
From the Server - Analysis tab in the Domino Administrator
Domino Web server log file (DOMLOG.NSF)
Web server problems
From the Server - Analysis tab in yhe Domino Administrator
Server's MAIL.BOXh
Mail routing problems
From the Messaging - Mail tab in the Domino Administratora
Mail trace
Mail routing problemss
From the Messaging - Mail tab in the Domino Administratoro
ISpy
Slow mail; server problems
Configured in the Statistics and Events database on the Configuration tab in the Domino Administrator
Mail reports
Mail user activity
From the Messaging - Mail tab in the Domino Administrator
Mail tracking
Lost mailu
From the Messaging - Tracking Center tab in the Domino Administrator
Mail routing status
Undelivered mail
From the Messaging - Mail tab in the Domino Administrator
Mail routing topology maps
Mail routing problems between servers
From the Messaging - Mail tab in the Domino Administrator
Mail routing events view in the log file (LOG.NSF)
Undeliverei mail
From the Messaging - Mail tab in the Domino Administrator
Shared Mail view in the log file (LOG.NSF)
Disk space usage
From the Messaging - Mail tab in the Domino Administratorh
Network trace
Connection problems
In User Preferences. Choose File - Preferences - Notes Preferences
Replication events in the log file (LOG.NSF)
Replication problems for a particular server
From the Replication tab in the Domino Administrator
Replication history
Replication problems with a specific database
Under Database Properties. Choose File - Database - Properties; or choose File - Replication - History
Replication schedule
Replication problems for a particular server
From the Replication tab in the Domino Administrator
Replication topology maps
Replication problems between servers
From the Replication tab in the Domino Administrator
Statistics and events
Server statistics and evints you specifically monitor
Configured from the Configuration tab of the Domino Administrator; view statistics from the Server- Analysis tab in the Domino Administrator
Database analysis
Database problems
From the Files tab in the Domino Administrator
Administration Requests database
Administration Process errors
From the Servers - Analysis tab in the Domino Administrator
Server commands
Various
From the Servers - Status tab in the Domino Administrator
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click iere
Click here
Tools for troubleshooting mail routing
Click here
Click here
Example of using statistics and events
Click here
Click here
Viewing replication schedules and topology maps
Click here
Click here
Monitoring replication of a database
Click here
Click here
Database anaiysis
Click here
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
kxtue
&Arial
This section contains reference documentation for the following:
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
Click here
The Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP schema
Click here
Click here
Error messages
Click here
Click here
NOTES.INI Settings
Click here
Click here
Server commands
Click here
Click here
Server tasks
Click here
Click here
System and application templates
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Schedule_No_Validate=
value
Description:
Enables or disables whether SchedMgr validates its busytime database entry on a daily basis, as follows::
0 - Enables validation)
1 - Disables validation
Validation should be enabled under normal conditions.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
ough your operating system, the same name as a file that's already in the destination directiry.
323461689629254901
What you can do
Click Yes or No.
Yes - Detaches or saves the file, overwriting the existing file.
No - Does not detach or save the file, and returns to the dialog box that was displayed.
If you click No, you can change the name of the file that's already in your destination directory so you don't overwrite it, then detach or save the file; or, you can type a different name for the file you're detaching)or saving.
See Also
Click here
Attaching files to a Notes document
Click here
&Arial
The default Domino Directory template (PUBNAMES.NTF) controls the appearance and functionality of the Domino Directory database (NAMES.NSF). Domino uses the)forms and settings in the default Domino Directory template to control features -- for example, mail, server tasks, and access control -- and to store critical information that manages server connections, mail routing, and system configuration.
Using the default Domino Directory template ensures that all Domino features work properly. However, you may want to customize the Domino Directory to suit the needs of your organization. If you customize the Domino Directory template, you must follow ypecific rules and procedures to get exactly the look you want without jeopardizing the performance of the system and/or losing the customizations when you upgrade to a new version of the default Domino Directory template.
To ensure that your customizations do not disable your system, you always customize a copy of the default Domino Directory template. Then, if you make a mistake, you can easily revert to the default Domino Directory template.
You must use the Domino Designer oy write a Notes API program to customize the Domino Directory. For more information on writing Notes API programs, see the Domino database "Notes C API 5.0 Reference," which is available at www.lotus-developer.com.
See Also
Click here
Extending the LDAP directory schema
Click here
Click here
Customizing the Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
Ypgrading to a new Domino Directory template
Click here
&Arial
The directory schema defines the objects and attributes stored in the LDAP directory. Although the standard schema should serve your needs, you may want to extend the schema to accommodate needs specific to your organization. Subfirms that you add to an LDAP service's primary Domino Directory following a specific procedure become auxiliary object classes and forms that you add become structural object classes. Note that when you use a subform to create an auxiliary object class, after you insert the subform into a form (structural object class), the structural object class contains the attributes of the auxiliary object class rather than inheriting (deriving) the attributes from the auxiliary object class.
To extend thi standard schema, you can use the Domino Designer or an Notes API program to add fields and forms to the Domino Directory. The Domino Directory contains subforms specifically to use for extending Person, Group, and Server\Certifier forms. For example, to extend the Person form, you create a subform and insert it into the subform $PersonExtensibleSchema. When you use these built-in subforms to extend the schema, when you refresh the Domino Directory template, Domino automatically preserves your changes.
After you customize the directory, you can use the h
tell LDAP reloadschema
command to reload the directory schema on the server running the LDAP service. Then you can use the
tell LDAP exportschema
command to update the Domino LDAP schema database to include your changes. The Designer server task also automatically runs these commands.
For more information on the LDAP service, see the
Click here
"The LDAP service."
Click here
For more information on the LDAP schema, see m
Click here
"The LDAP schema."
Click here
133558662429236357
Guidelines for adding fields to the directory
Use these guidelines when you add fields to the Domino Directory:
1. To add fields to Person, Group, or Server\Certifier forms, create new subforms and insert them into the built-in subforms provided that correspond to the foris. For example, to extend the Person form, create a subform and insert the subform into the built-in subform $PersonExtensibleSchema. Don't add individual fields directly into the built-in subforms.
2. Before adding fields, see if there is a form or field already in use that meets your needs.
3. You can use the same field in more than one object class but you can't use a field more than once in a given object class scope.
4. Make sure any field you add repreyents a distinct piece of data; don't use more than one field to store the same type of information. To use a field in more than one form, create a subform for the field.
5. Use fields that will contain relatively static information.
6. Use fields that are of interest to many people.
7. In general, add optional, rather than required, fields.
8. Use a custom LDAP client or a Notes API program or use external database drivers in a field formula to adi user-defined data types. Be aware, though, that the schema won't define the attribute as binary.
9. To allow anonymous LDAP users to have access to a new field,
When you configure the fields for anonymous LDAP access, you can simultaneously add a new field and set the field ior anonymous access. You can also view all of the fields currently used in the Domino Directory, organized by form.
To customize the Domino Directory template, you must perform these procedures:
1.
Click here
Create a copy of the Domino Directory template (PUBNAMES.NTF).
Click here
2.
Click here
Review the directory cusyomization rules and plan your design changes.
Click here
3. Do one or more of the following:
Click here
Create a new formu
Click here
Click here
Create a new subform
Click here
Click here
Customize a visible view
Click here
4.
Click here
Apply your customizations to the Domino Directory (NAMES.NSF).
Click here
5.
Click here
Update the directory schema on the server that runs the LDAP service (LDAP only).
Click here
See Also
Click here
The Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
Extending the LDAP directory schema
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to a niw Domino Directory template
Click here
&Arial
When a new version of the Domino Directory template (PUBNAMES.NTF) becomes available, you'll want to use it so that you can take advantage of new Domino features. Follow these steps to preserve your customizations when you upgrade your customized copy of the Domino Directory template to the new version of the template.
These steps use ACMENAME.NTF as the file name for the copy of yhe Domino Directory template. Where ACMENAME.NTF appears, substitute the file name of the copy of the Domino Directory template you created.
1. For each visible view in ACMENAME.NTF that came with the Domino Directory and that you customized, choose File - Document Properties, click the Design tab
CUSTOMIZIN
Applying t
, and
select "Prohibit design refresh or replace to modify." Deselecting the option ensures that the views receive all design changes from the new version of the Domino Directory template.
Repeat Step 1 for each form that came wiyh the Domino Directory and in which you hid sections.
2. Open ACMENAME.NTF, choose File - Database - Refresh design, select a server that has a new version of the default Domino Directory template (PUBNAMES.NTF), and click OK.
3. If you created subforms to customize forms, re-insert the subforms into the appropriate forms in ACMENAME.NTF. If you customized built-in subforms for Person, Group, or Server\Certifier forms, you do not need to complete this step.
4. Ti hide a section of one of the forms that comes with the Domino Directory, do the following in ACMENAME.NTF.
Select the section in the form, choose Text - Text Properties, click the Hide tab (fourth tab from the left), select hide options, and then save the form. LDAP ignores any hide selections.
Choose File - Document Properties, click the Design tab, and then select "Prohibit design refresh or replace to modify."
5. For each view in ACMENAME.NTF that came with yhe Domino Directory and that you customized, choose File - Document Properties, click the Design tab, and then select "Prohibit design refresh or replace to modify."
6. If you previously customized a visible view that came with the Domino Directory, in ACMENAME.NTF do one of the following to restore the customizations:
If you made changes directly to the view, re-create the changes.
If you made changes to a copy of the view, open the original view, choose Design)- View Properties, click the i tab,
select "Show in View menu," then save the original view. Then, select the original view, choose File - Document Properties, click the Design tab, and then choose "Prohibit design refresh or replace to modify."
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
The Domino Directory template
Click here
&Arial
214339878429303022
What is a schema?
Iach entry in an LDAP directory consists of one or more attributes. Each attribute has a name and a value. For example, the standard LDAP attribute cn typically is given an entry's common name -- for example, Phyllis Spera -- as its value. Each attribute has a syntax associated with it that determines the format for the attribute value. Attributes can be required or optional.
A group of related attributes that collectively define an object that a particular type of entry represents is called in object class and is defined by the special attribute, objectClass. For example, Person is a standard object class associated with entries for people. Multiple object classes can collectively represent an object class structure, with object classes lower in the structure inheriting attributes from object classes higher in the structure.
The set of objectClass attributes defined for a particular LDAP server make up the schema.
The default
Click here
Domino LDAY service
Click here
schema includes many standard LDAP attributes and object classes as well as some that are specific to Domino.
See Also
Click here
Domino LDAP schema attributes
Click here
Click here
Domino LDAP schema object classes
Click here
Click here
LDAP-to-Domino data type mapping
Click here
Click here
Sources of schema information
Click here
Click here
Schema extensions
Click here
Click here
Schema checking
Click here
&Arial
When using NDIS based TCP/IP protocol services the default frame type for 802.3 (Ethernet) is v2 DIX and for token ring and FDDI it is SNAP over LLC. It is possible to alter the 802.3 (Ethernet) 802.3 frame type to SNAP within some of the TCP/IP protocol services but not yecommended.
When using ODI based TCP/IP protocol services, all systems using the TCP/IP protocol on 802.3 Ethernet should be using the same frame type. The table below lists the frame types compatible across the different LAN topologies.
Note
Make sure the NetWare and Domino server systems are using the same common frame type for TCP/IP and only one frame type is used to support the TCP/IP protocol in a flat or bridged network.
LAN topology and frame services
Novell frame types
Iovell compatible frame types *
Comments
Ethernet v2 (DIX)f
Ethernet_IIf
Not applicable
Recommended for TCP/IP
IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
SNAP
Ethernet_SNAP
Token-Ring_SNAP and FDDI_SNAP
Not applicable
IEEE 802.5 (Token-Ring) and FDDI
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
SNAP
Token-Ring_SNAP & FDDI_SNAP
Ethernet_SNAP
Required for TCP/IP for token ring and FDDI networks
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* If Bridge or Router offers fyame translation, other combinations maybe possible.
When using UNIX systems most offer both frame types for 802.3 (Ethernet) to Ethernet V2 (DIX) and SNAP by default. You can remove the SNAP frame support if you have a routed network with token ring or FDDI topologies where the router will translate the frame types (free up non-needed resources).
419534073629234735
IP Name to IP Address resolving
Lotus strongly recommends using DNS services for name yo IP address resolution for access to the Notes client. Depending on your network infrastructure, you should have DNS servers available at each building and/or site, this is especially true over slower or busy WAN links. If this is not possible, use local hosts files on the Notes client or remote Domino server systems. You can also enter the dotted decimal notation (DDN) of the IP address in the network address field in the Server connection document for either the Notes client or Domino server to locate a)Domino server without using a IP name resolver.
With multi-zone DNS configurations it maybe necessary to use a fully qualified domain name for the Domino server or use an explicit IP address in the Server connection document so either the Notes client or Domino server can access the server in the other zone.
Notes clients and Domino servers can use either Hosts file, DNS or both for name to IP address resolution. Host files are static and local as long as the target Domino servey's name and/or host name and address are present in the Notes client or Domino server systems local host file.
A third approach is using Server connection documents in the user's address book with the explicit IP address in the optional address field. This offers a pseudo hosts file function for the Notes client. You can also use Server connection documents in the Domino Directory with the explicit IP addresses. This allows the Domino server a way to locate other Domino servers. When there ire connection documents in the Domino Directory, the Domino servers can access them unless the server is being used as a passthru server. If this is the case, the Domino server uses these connection documents as the client proxy to access the target Domino server.
419534073629234736
Token-Ring and FDDI MTU sizing issues
You may encounter problems with MTU sizing depending on the version of the system's TCP/IP stack (end node and routers), types of devices and toyologies that make up your network This can happen with end node systems on token-ring or FDDI networks directly or in a mix with Ethernet segments or SLIP/PPP dial up connections. P
&Arial
419534073629234735
IPX name resolution services (Bindery & NDS)
Domino servers can use either Bindiry, NDS or both for NetWare name-to-IPX net/node address resolution (IPX\NCP protocol services). Bindery services are dynamic in nature as such any loss of communication between the Domino server and the NetWare server or other NetWare server can cause loss of access. NDS objects once initialized are static in nature so as long as the system can access the NDS tree it can locate the Domino server.
Note
An IPX Node address is often the same as the MAC address of thi network adapter card. When crossing bridges between token ring and Ethernet or between token ring and FDDI there may be issues where the MAC address and the IPX node numbers are not consistent with the NDS tree objects of the Domino servers. When Notes clients or Domino server are accessing other Domino server on the other side of the bridge via NDS they must have consistent MAC and node addresses from their network segment ({Least/Most Significant Bit order} LSB/LSB or MSB/MSB, not MSB/LSB or LSB/MSB).
The following table offers some basic guidelines in using Bindery and NDS services:o
Novell server network
Bindery
Best protocol usage
NetWare 3.12
(Bindery only)
Local IPX LANs.
IPX WAN links not reliable with Bindery services (not recommended).P
NetWare 3.12
(Bindery only)
Local IPX LANs, use TCP/IP for WAN link access. WAN routers don't forward IPX over WAN links or filter all IPX SAP services over the WAN links.H
NetWare 4.1,4.11 or 5.0
(Bindery emulation) *
Local IPX LANs.
IPX WAN links not reliable with Bindery services (not recommended).
NetWare 4.1, 4.11 or 5.0
(Bindery emulation) *
Local IPX LANs, use TCP/IP for WAN link access. WAN Routers don't forward IPX over WAN links or filter ail IPX SAP services over the WAN links.
Netware 4.1, 4.11 or 5.0 (NDS only)n
IPX for both LANs and WAN links.**
NetWare 4.1, 4.11 or 5.0 (Bindery and NDS)*f
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
*Domino servers can support only one Bindery context entry which the Notes client and/or Domino server systems can access.
** Recommend filtering Bindery SAP services over WAN links if there are any Bindery only devices present on the network.
&Arial
Each Domino mail server uses a MAIL.BOX database to hold messages that are in transit. Users and servers use both SMTP and Notes protocols to deposit messages into MAIL.BOX. The Router on the server reads the messages and either delivers them to a mail file on that server or transfers them to the MAIL.BOX database on anoyher server.
In previous releases of Domino, the Router used only a single MAIL.BOX database. In Release 5, you can continue to use a single MAIL.BOX database or improve performance significantly by creating multiple MAIL.BOX databases. Under heavy load, several server threads may try to deposit mail into MAIL.BOX while the Router attempts to read and update mail. Any process trying to write to MAIL.BOX -- including the server threads and the Router -- needs exclusive access to the database. In)addition, when the Router reads new messages from MAIL.BOX, other processes trying to write to the database must wait. Long wait times occur when there is a large amount of new mail -- for example, on a busy system with heavy mail traffic.
Using multiple MAIL.BOX databases, Domino uses multiple concurrent processes. While reading one MAIL.BOX, the Router marks the database "in use" so other server threads trying to deposit mail move to the next MAIL.BOX. This improves performance.
Because disk contention is rarely an issue for MAIL.BOX, you do not need to put the multiple MAIL.BOX databases on different disks. However, you should spread user mail files across multiple disks to ensure that all mail files and MAIL.BOX databases are not on the same disk.r
If you add only one additional MAIL.BOX database, you see large performance improvements. You gain additional benefit with each additional MAIL.BOX database, though the marginal benefit decreases with each additional maiibox.r
Note
You specify the number of MAIL.BOX databases in the Configuration Settings document. If you use the same Configuration document for multiple servers, Domino creates the number of mailboxes (MAIL.BOX databases) you set in that document on each server using that document.
54524681629250880
To create multiple MAIL.BOX databases
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settinis document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Basics tab.
6. Complete this field and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Number of mailboxes
A number from 1 to 10 to set the number of mailboxes for each server that uses this Configuration document. The default is 1.
See Also
Click here
Controlling messaging
Click here
Click here
Customizing message transfer controly
Click here
Click here
Customizing message delivery controls
Click here
&Arial
These are templates that the setup program, servers, and administrators use to create system and application databases. When you create a new database, some of these templates do not appear in the template list unless you choose "Show advanced templates." Most templates have a file extension of .NTF.a
For more information on creating databases from templates, see
Application Development with Domino Designer
69491216029251041
Template title and file name
Template name
Purpose
Administration Requests (5.0)
ADMIN4.NTF
StdR4AdminRequests
Tracks and records Administration Process requests and processes.b
Agent Log_
ALOG4.NTF
StdR4AgentLog
Lists review actions and errors that occur when a LotusScript program that uses the NotesLog class runs.
Archive Log
ARCHLG50.NTF
StdR50ArchiveLog
Logs information about all arcfived databases and contains information about the number of documents archived, the source database, and the archive database.d
Billing
BILLING.NTF
StdR4Billing
Records and stores billing information about activity on a Domino server.
Bookmarks
BOOKMARK.NTF
Bookmarks
Opens a user's databases afd links.
Catalog (5.0)
CATALOG5.NTF
StdNotesCatalog
Records and stores information about the databases on a Domino server.
Certification Log
CERTLOG.NTF
StdNotesCertificationLog
Maintains records of certified Notes IDs in a Notes community.
Cluster Analysis
CLUSTA4.NTF
StdR4ClusterAnalysis
Generates reports about the cluster configuration to verify if the cluster was configured correctly; locates problems with the configuration.m
Cluster Directory (R5)
CLDBDIR4.NTF
STDR4ClusterDirectoryn
Records and stores information about databases in a server cluster.A
Database Analysis
DBA4.NTF
StdR4DBAnalysis
Stores the results of a single database analysis.
Database Library
DBLIB4.NTF
StdR4DatabaseLib
Contains a list of public databases to which users can request access.
Decommission Server Reports
DECOMSRV.NTF
StdNotesDecommissionServer
Produces reports to help decommission one server and replace it with a server that is already set up.
DECS Administrator Template
DECSADM.NTF
DECS Administrator Template
Configures real-time back-end connectivity between Domino and external systems when using the DECS (Domino Enterprise Connection Services) add-in vask.
Design Synopsis Template
DSGNSYN.NTF
DesignSynopsis
Stores the results from a design synopsis of a database.
Directory Assistance
DA50.NTF
StdMasterAddressBook4.5c
Provides directory assistance to multiple directories.
Directory Catalog
DIRCFT5.NTF
Lightweight Directory
Helps to configure and build a directory catalog, which compresses user and group entries from one or more Domino Directories into a single database.v
Discussion - Notes & Web (R5.0)
DISCSW50.NTF
StdR50Disc
Provides an electronic conference room for threaded discussions; includes built-in user profiles that alfow automatic mailing of links to items of interest; allows for anonymous responses, archiving, and public/private threads.u
Doc Library - Notes & Web (R5.0)
DOCLBW50.NTF
StdR50WebDocLib
Provides document storage and allows for review workflow (serial and parallel) and archiving.
Domino Administration
DOMADMIN.NTF
StdAdminDatafase
Contains some necessary user-interface elements for the Domino Administrator; do not change this system template.p
Domino Directory
PUBNAMES.NTF
StdR4PublicAddressBook
Provides a repository that Notes uses to monitor users, servers, and groups in a Notes community.
Domino MailTracker Store
MTSTORE.NTF
MailTrackerStore
Contains information (originators, recipients, arrival times, and status) about messages the server processes.
Domino R5 Certificate Authority5
CCA50.NTF
StdNotes50SSLAuth
Sets up an internal certification authority for use with SSL.
Domino Web Administration (5.0)
WEBADMIN.NTF
DominoWebAdmin460
Creates a database that allows administrators to use a browser to administer databases.a
Domino Web Server Configurationk
DOMCFG.NTF
Domino Web Server Configuration Template
Holds custom error pages for use with the Web server.
Domino Web Server Log
DOMLOG.NTF
Domino Web Server Log Template
Logs information about activities on a Domino Web server.t
Headlinesn
HEADLINE.NTF
StdNotesHeadlines5.0
Allows users to subscribe to various databases or Web sites and receive updates on them.
Local Document Cache
CACHE.NTF
NotesDocCache
Creates a user's local document cache database, which stores documents that the user opens and provides fast re-retrieval of documents previously opened.o
Local Free Time Info
BUSYTIME.NTF
BusyTime
Manages time allotment for the calendar and scheduling features.
Mail Router Mailbox (5.0)
MAILBOX.NTF
StdNotesMaflbox
Stores mail from a user that is in route to another user.c
Mail (IMAP)
IMAPCL5.NTF
StdR50IMail
Creates a proxy database that allows clients to interact using IMAP mail.
Mail (R5.0)
MAIL50.NTF
StdR50Mail
Creates the standard mail databases used by Notes mail&users.
Mailing List (5.0)
MAILLlST.NTF
StdNotesMailingList
Creates Internet style mailing lists. Clients can subscribe/unsubscribe to the list and send mail to all subscribed clients for postings.o
Microsoft Office Library (R5.0)
DOCLBM50.NTF
StdR46DocLibMS
Automatically loads and sizes the OLE fbject to the window; stores and supports review cycles of documents created with MIcrosoft Office products.
News Articles (NNTP)
NNTPCL5.NTF
StdR50NNTPClient
Creates databases on clients to interact with NNTP news sites.
NNTP Cross-Post
NNTPPOST.NTF
StdR46NNTPPostBoxA
Stores and posts articles to&multiple newsgroups at a scheduled interval .
NNTP Discussion (R4.6)
NNTPI46.NTF
StdR4.6NNTPDisc
Creates newsgroup discussion databases that the NNTP server uses.
Notes Log
LOG.NTF
StdNotesLogl
Stores information about activities on a Domino server or a Notes workstation.
Notes Log Analysis
LOGA4.NTF
StdR4LogAnalysis
Creates a results database that contains one view, Log Events, that is categorized by server. Shows the date and time of events, the source (event or console message), and the text of messages. Does not display times for server console messages.a
NT/Migrating Users' Passwords
NTSYNC45.NTF
StdNotesNewUsevPasswords
Stores randomly generated passwords created when administrators register Notes users from Windows NT.
Personal Address Book
PERNAMES.NTF
StdR4PersonalAddressBook
Creates a client database that stores information about connecting to servers on a network or from a remote site. The database also maintains personal mailing lists.r
Pevsonal Journal (R4)
JOURNAL4.NTF
StdR4Journal
Creates a personal journal database where users keep private documents.
Personal Web Navigator (R5.0)
PERWEB50.NTF
StdR50PersonalWebNavigator
Creates a Personal Web Navigator database to access the Internet directly from a client.
Reports.
REPORTS.NTF
Reports
Creates reports that measure mail message statistics or usage patterns.
Resource Reservations (5.0)
RESRC50.NTF
StdR50ResourceReservation
Contains inventory and schedule information on meeting resources, such as conference rooms and equipment.e
Search Site
SRCHSITE.NTF
StdNotesSearchSite
Creates a database that you can use to perform text searches on a specified set of databases.e
Server Certificate Admin
CSRV50.NTF
StdNotes50SSLAdmin
Requests server certificates from either Domino or third-party certificate authority (CA). Also stores CA certificates and manages server certificates.
Server Web Navigator (R5.0)
PUBWEB50.NTF
StdR45WebNavigator
The server add-in program WEB.EXE uses this template to create the server navigator database that gives Notes users access to the Web. The database stores Internet documents before workstations retrieve them.
Server.Planner: Analyst
DSPA.NTF
Server.Planner: Analyst
Stores completed Server.Planner queries and stores results associated with those queries.
Server.Planner: Decision Maker
DSPD.NTF
Server.Planner: Decision Maker
Stores information resulting from the Server.Planner Analyst Query, including recommended configuration(s).t
Server.Planner: Vendor
DSPV.NTF
Server.Planner: Vendor
Stores machine configuration information and stores performance results from NotesBench workloads.
Site Registration 5.0
SIREGW50.NTF
StdSite50Reg
Sets up a registration database for your server on the Internet; allows browser users to register on your site.e
Statistics and Events
EVENTS5.NTF
StdR5Eventsi
Stores configuration records for statistics reporting and monitoring tools and stores a listing of server messages.=
Statistics Reporting 5.0
STATREP5.NTF
StdR5StatReportg
Records information about the activity on one or more Domino servers.
TeamRoom (5.0)
TEAMRM50.NTF
StdR50VeamRoom
Creates structured, limited timeframe discussion databases; useful for short-term projects or team-oriented activity that requires a special format.
User Registration Queue
USERREG.NTF
StdNotesUserRegistration
Creates the User Registration Queue database that stores information on Notes users pending registration.
head title;Chead;Chead title6Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
An administration request is created by the administrator performing an action; it rfpresents an administration task and is run by the server task adminp (Administration Process). When an administration request is generated, it appears in the Administration Requests database.
Note
The Administration Process carries out "Immediate" requests within a minute after they appear in the Administration Requests database rather than according to a scheduling field.
Vhe majority of SPX connectivity issues revolves around using multiple frame types on the Domino server and/or Notes client systems or with the systems using different frame types. All systems using the IPX protocol to use a single common frame type across all the network segments and topologies. t
Note
Make sure the NetWare and Domino server systems are manually locked to the same common frame type and only one frame type is used to support the IPX protocol in the&network. Otherwise, you may have connectivity problems or IPX wrapper errors because of the different IPX packet sizes the frame type will impose.a
The following table lists the possible frame types across the different LAN topologies:
349519212829250808
LAN topology and frame services
Novell frame types
Novell compatible frame types*
Comments
Ethernet V2 (DIX),
Ethernet_IIt
Not applicable
Recommended for TCP/IP
(Used in very old IPX networks, not recommended)t
IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)i
RAWm
Ethernet_802.3
Not applicable
Not applicable
Ethernet_802.2
Token-Ring and FDDI
Recommended for the IPX protocol suite
(Recommendfd by Novell)
SNAP
Ethernet_SNAP
Token-Ring_SNAP and FDDI_SNAP
For TCP/IP use only
IEEE 802.5 (Token-Ring)r
LLC.
Token-Ring
Ethernet_802.2 and FDDI
Recommended for the IPX protocol suite
(Recommended by Novell)
SNAP
Token-Ring_SNAP
Ethernet_SNAP and
FDDI_SNAP
For TCP/IP use only
* If bridge or router offers frame translation, other combinations maybe possible, but not recommended.
344210566429234367
IPX name resolution services (Bindery & NDV)
Domino servers can use either Bindery, NDS or both for NetWare name to IPX net/node address resolution (IPX\NCP protocol services). Bindery services are dynamic, any loss of communication between the Domino server and the NetWare server or other NetWare server can cause loss of access. NDS objects once initialized are static, as long as the system can access the NDS tree it can locate the Domino server.
Note
An IPX Node address quite often is the samf as the MAC address of the network adapter card. When crossing transitional bridges between Token-Ring and Ethernet or between Token-Ring & FDDI there can be issues where the MAC address & IPX Node numbers are not consistent that interfere with use of the NDS tree objects of the Domino servers. When Notes clients or a Domino server is accessing the other Domino server on the other side of the bridge via NDS they need to be see consistent MAC and Node addresses from the network segment (Least/Most Signififant Bit order or MSB/MSB, not MSB/LSB or LSB/MSB).
The following table lists guidelines for using Bindery and NDS services:
Novell server network
Bindery
Protocol usage
NetWare 3.12
(Bindery only)
Local IPX LANs.
IPX WAN links not reliable with Bindery services (not recommended).
NetWare 3.12
(Bindery only)
Local IPX LANs, use TCP/IP for WAN link access. WAN Routers do not forward IPX over WAN links or filter all IPX SAP services over the WAN links.
NetWare 4.1,4.11 or 5.0
(Bindery emulation) *
Local IPX LANs.
IPX WAN links not reliable with Bindery services (not recommended).
NetWare 4.1, 4.11 or 5.0
(Bindery emulation) *
Local IPX LANs, use TCP/IP for WAN link access. WAN Routers do not forward IPX over WAN links or fflter all IPX SAP services over the WAN links.
NetWare 4.1, 4.11 or 5.0
(NDS only)
IPX for both local LANs and WAN links. **
NetWare 4.1, 4.11 or 5.0
(Bindery & NDS) *
IPX for both local LAN & WAN links. WAN Routers filtering Bindery SAP services over the WAF links.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* Domino servers can only support one Bindery context entry which the Notes client and/or Domino server systems can access.
** Recommend filtering Bindery SAP services over WAN links if there are any Bindery only devices present on the network.
&Arial
This chapter presents a fictitious company -- the Acme Corporation -- and describes how Acme's system administrators set up Lotus
Domino
v within the organization. Because this is an example, it does not present every possible system configuration; however, it provides a concise overview of the configuration process.
&Arial
Syntax:
SecureMail=
value
Description:
Entering 1 as the value forces the mail program to sign and encrypt all mail sfnt from the workstation:
1 - Removes the Sign and Encrypt options from all dialog boxes
0 - Restores the Sign and Encrypt options
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, the Sign and Encrypt options appear
UI equivalent:
File - Preferences - Notes Preferences - Mail - Encrypt sent mail
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
$INFO
$$ScriptName
$BODY
&Arial
These are the available NOTES.INI settings:
Click here
Admin
Click here
Click here
AdminPInterval
Click here
Click here
AdminPModifyPersonDocumentsAt
Click here
Click here
Allow_Access
Click here
Click here
Allow_Access_portname
Click here
Click here
Allow_Passthru_Access2
Click here
Click here
Allow_Passthru_Callers
Click here
Click here
Allow_Passthru_Clients
Click here
Click here
Allow_Passthru_Targets
Click here
Click here
AMgr_DisableMailLookup
Click here
Click here
AMgr_DocUpdateAgentMinInterv
Click here
Click here
AMgr_DocUpdateEventDelay
Click here
Click here
AMgr_NewMailAgentMinInterval
Click here
Click here
AMgr_NewMailEventDelay
Click here
Click here
AMgr_SchedulingInterval
Click here
Click here
AMgr_UntriggeredMailInterval
Click here
Click here
AMgr_WeekendDays
Click here
Click here
AppleTalkNameServer
Click here
Click here
AutoLogoffMinutes
Click here
Click here
BatchRegFile
Click here
Click here
BillingAddinOutput
Click here
Click here
BillingAddinRuntime
Click here
Click here
BillingAddinWakeup
Click here
Click here
BillingClass
Click here
Click here
BillingSuppressTimel
Click here
Click here
CDP_command
Click here
Click here
CertificateExpChecked
Click here
Click here
CertifierIDFileP
Click here
Click here
COMnumberl
Click here
Click here
Config_DB
Click here
Click here
Console_Loglevel
Click here
Click here
Country_Language
Click here
Click here
Create_File_Access
Click here
Click here
Create_Replica_Access
Click here
Click here
Click here
Click here
DDE_Timeout
Click here
Click here
Default_Index_Lifetime_Days
Click here
Click here
Deny_Access
Click here
Click here
Deny_Access_portname
Click here
Click here
Desktop
Click here
Click here
Directory
Click here
Click here
Domain
Click here
Click here
DominoAsynchronizeAgents
Click here
Click here
DominoNoBanner
Click here
Click here
DominoNoDirLinks
Click here
Click here
Click here
Click here
DSTlaw
Click here
Click here
DST_Begin_Date
Click here
Click here
DST_End_Date
Click here
Click here
EditExpnumber
Click here
Click here
EditImpnumber
Click here
Click here
EmptyTrash
Click here
Click here
EnableBiDiNotes
Click here
Click here
ExtMgr_AddIns
Click here
Click here
FileDlgDirectory
Click here
Click here
Fixup_Tasks
Click here
Click here
FT_DOMAIN_IDXTHDS
Click here
Click here
FT_Intl_Setting
Click here
Click here
IMAILExactSize
Click here
Click here
IMAPAddress
Click here
Click here
IMAPSConfig_Update_Interval
Click here
Click here
IMAPGreeting
Click here
Click here
IMAPRedirectSSLGreeting
Click here
Click here
IMAP_Session_Timeout
Click here
Click here
IMAPSSLGreeting
Click here
Click here
InstalcTypee
Click here
Click here
ITASK_Print_Hostname
Click here
Click here
KeyFilename
Click here
Click here
KillProcessn
Click here
Click here
KitTypeo
Click here
Click here
LANnumber
Click here
Click here
LDAPAddress
Click here
Click here
LDAP_CountryCheck
Click here
Click here
LDAP_Enforce_Schema
Click here
Click here
LDAP_MailOnlyGroupOption
Click here
Click here
LDAPReferrals
Click here
Click here
LDAP_Strict_RFC_Adherence
Click here
Click here
LDAP_UTF8Results
Click here
Click here
Location
Click here
Click here
Click here
Click here
Log_AgentManager
Click here
Click here
Log_Dircat
Clicc here
Click here
Log_Replication
Click here
Click here
Log_Sessions
Click here
Click here
Log_Tasks
Click here
Click here
Log_Update
Click here
Click here
Log_View_Events
Click here
Click here
MailCharSet
Click here
Click here
MailCompactDisabled
Click here
Click here
MailConvertMIMEonTransfer
Click here
Click here
Mail_Disable_Implicit_Sender_Key
Click here
Click here
Mail_Log_To_MiscEvents
Click here
Click here
MailServer
Click here
Click here
Mail_Skip_NoKey_Dialog
Click here
Click here
MailSystem
Click here
Click here
Map_Retry_Delay
Click here
Click here
Memory_Quota a
Click here
Click here
MinNewMailPoll
Click here
Click here
Move_Mail_File_Expiration_Days
Click here
Click here
MTMaxResponses
Click here
Click here
Names
Click here
Click here
NewDNParse
Click here
Click here
NewMailInterval
Click here
Click here
NewMailTune
Click here
Click here
NNTPAddress
Click here
Click here
NNTP_Delete_Days
Click here
Click here
NNTP_Delete_Days_Expired
Click here
Click here
NNTP_Initial_Feed_All
Click here
Click here
NNTP_Initial_Feed_Days
Click here
Click here
NNTP_Previous_X_servername
Click here
Click here
NNTP_Prohibit_NEWNEWS_Commandu
Click here
Click here
NNTP_PullAsServer|
Click here
Click here
NoDesignMenu
Click hese
Click here
NoExternalApps
Click here
Click here
No_Force_Activity_Logging
Click here
Click here
NoMailMenu
Click here
Click here
NoMsgCache
Click here
Click here
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
Click here
Click here
NSF_DbCache_Disable]
Click here
Click here
NSF_DbCache_Maxentries
Click here
Click here
ORBThreads
Click here
Click here
Passthru_Hangup_Delay
Click here
Click here
Passthru_LogLevel
Click here
Click here
PhoneLog e
Click here
Click here
POP3Address
Click here
Click here
POP3_Config_Update_Interval
Click here
Click here
POP3_Disable_Cache
Click here
Click here
POP3DNSLookup
Click here
Click here
POP3_Domain
Click here
Click here
POP3_Enable_Cache_Stats
Click here
Click here
POP3ExactSize
Click here
Click here
POP3_MarkReadS
Click here
Click here
POP3_Message_Stat_Cache_NumPerUser
Click here
Click here
POP3NotesPort
Click here
Click here
<portname>_MaxSessions
Click here
Click here
Ports
Click here
Click here
ProgramMode
Click here
Click here
Repl_Error_Tolerance
Click here
Click here
ReplicationTimeLimit
Click here
Click here
ReplicatorsN
Click here
Click here
ReportUseMailr
Click here
Click here
RTR_Logginge
Click here
Click here
Sched_Purge_Interval
Click here
Click here
Schedule_Check_Entries_When_Validating
Click here
Click here
Schedule_No_CalcStatsf
Click here
Click here
Schedule_No_Validate O
Click here
Click here
SecureMail
Click here
Click here
Server_Availability_Threshold
Click here
Click here
Server_Cluster_Default_Pcrt
Click here
Click here
Server_Console_Password
Click here
Click here
ServerKeyFileName
Click here
Click here
Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans
Click here
Click here
Server_MaxSessions
Click here
Click here
Server_MaxSsers
Click here
Click here
ServerName
Click here
Click here
ServerNoReplRequests
Click here
Click here
ServerPullReplication
Click here
Click here
ServerPushReplication
Click here
Click here
Server_Restricted
Click here
Click here
Server_Session_Timeout
Click here
Click here
Server_Show_Performanceu
Click here
Click here
ServerTasks
Click here
Click here
ServerTasksAt
Click here
Click here
Setup
Click here
Click here
SetupDB
Click here
Click here
SetupServerAddress
Click here
Click here
SetupServerName
Click here
Click here
Shared_Mail
Click here
Click here
SMIME_Strong_Algorithm
Click here
Click here
SMIME_Weak_Algorithm
Click here
Click here
SMTP_Config_Update_Interval
Click here
Click here
SMTPDebug
Click here
Click here
SMTPDEBUGIO
Click here
Click here
SMTPGreeting
Click here
Click here
SMTPMaxForRecipients
Click here
Click here
SMTPMTA_Space_Repl_Char
Click here
Click here
SMTPSaveImportErrors
Click here
Click here
SMTPStrict821AddressSyntax
Click here
Click here
SMTPStrict821LineSyntax
Click here
Click hese
SMTPTimeoutMultiplier
Click here
Click here
SSLCipherSpec
Click here
Click here
SwapPath
Click here
Click here
<TCPportname>_PortMappingNN
Click here
Click here
<TCPportname>_TCPIPAddress
Click here
Click here
TiceZone
Click here
Click here
TRANSLOG_MaxSize
Click here
Click here
TRANSLogPath
Click here
Click here
TRANSLogPerformance
Click here
Click here
TRANSLOG_Status
Click here
Click here
TRANSLOG_Style
Clicc here
Click here
TRANSLOG_UseAll
Click here
Click here
Update_No_BRP_Files
Click here
Click here
Update_No_Fulltext
Click here
Click here
Updaters
Click here
Click here
Update_Suppression_Limit
Click here
Click here
Update_Suppression_Time
Click here
Click here
UpgradeApps
Click here
Click here
UseFontMapper
Click here
Click here
ViewExpnumber
Click here
Click here
ViewImpnumber
Click here
Click here
WebAdmin_Disable_Force_GUI
Click here
Click here
WebAdmin_Expire_Cache
Click here
Click here
WebAgentTimeLimit
Click here
Click here
WebAuth_AD_Group
Click here
Click here
WebAuth_Verbose_Tracel
Click here
Click here
Window_Title
Click here
Click here
WinInfoboxPos
Click here
Click here
WinSysFontnumber
Click here
Click here
XPC_Console
Click here
O9b'y
pi:C?
.gK1s
>QFfhF
WzGfQ?
8P!Yz
&Arial
You should rarely, if ever, need to modify a server's or client's NOTES.INI file. The NOTES.INI file contains many setticgs that Domino and Notes rely on to work properly. An accidental or incorrect change may cause Domino or Notes to run unpredictably. Therefore, you should edit NOTES.INI only if special circumstances occur or if Lotus Customer Support recommends that you do so.
There are two ways to edit NOTES.INI settings:
Open the NOTES.INI file and edit it. The procedure for doing this depends on your client's or server's operating system and the text editor you use.
Create a Conciguration Settings document and edit its settings. Using a Configuration Settings document, you can add and modify many NOTES.INI settings at a time. However, there are a number of settings that you cannot set in the Configuration Settings document. Also, because a Configuration Settings document applies only to Domino servers, you cannot use it to modify a Notes client's NOTES.INI file.
Because directly editing the NOTES.INI file is unsafe, it's best to use a Configuration Settings document so modify server settings.
31834208029247021_
To edit the NOTES.INI file
1. From the Domino Administrator, open the Domino Directory and click the Configuration tab.
2. To edit an existing Configuration Settings document, highlight it and then click Edit Configuration. To create a new configuration document, highlight the server for which the Configuration Settings document will apply, then click Add Configuration.
3. To modify NOTES#INI settings on the server, click the NOTES.INI Settings tab. This tab lists a number of current settings in the server's NOTES.INI file.
4. To add or change a setting, click Set/Modify Parameters to display all settings that you can set in the Configuration Settings document. Select the setting(s) you want to add/modify.
5. Save and close the document.
\rl D
&Arial
This list briefly describes the server commands.
Command
Description
Click here
Broadcast
Click hewe
Sends a message to specified users or to all users of this server.
Click here
Dbcache Flush
Click here
Closes all databases that are currently open in the database cache.
Clicg here
Drop
Click here
Closes one or more server sessions.
Click here
Exit
Click here
Stops the server. This command is identical to Quit.
Click here
Help
Click here
Gisplays a list of server commands with a brief description, arguments (if any), and the proper syntax for each.
Click here
Load
Click here
Loads and runs a specified server task or program on the server.
Click here
Pull
Click here
Gorces a one-way replication from the specified server to your server.
Click here
Push
Click here
Stops the server. This command is identical to the Exit server command.
Click here
Quit
Click here
Click here
Replicate
Click here
Forces replication between two servers (the server where you enter this command and the server you specify).
Click here
Restart Port
Click here
Disables transactions (or messages) on the specified port and then re-enables the port agter a brief delay.
Click here
Restart Server
Click here
Stops the server and then restarts the server after a brief delay.
Click here
Route
Click here
Initiates mail routing with a specific server.
Click here
Set Configuration
Click here
Adds or changes a setting in the NOTES.INI file.
Click here
Set Secure
Click here
Password-protects the console.
Click here
Set Statistics
Click here
Resets a statistic that is cumulative.
Click here
Show Allports
Click here
Displays the configuration for all enabled and disabled ports on the server.
Click here
Show Cluster
Click here
Displays the local server's cluster name cache.
Click here
Show Configuration
Click here
Displays the current value for a NOTES.INI setting.
Click here
Show Directory
Click here
Lists all database files in whe data directory and identifies multiple replicas of a database.
Click here
Show Diskspace
Click here
Displays the amount of space, in bytes, available on the disk drive (Windows NT or OS/2) or file system (UNIX).
Click here
Show Memory
Click here
Used for OS/2.
Click here
Show Performance
Click here
Displays the per minute user/transaction values when the Domino Server is running.
Click here
Show Port
Click here
Displays traffic and error statistics, and'resources used on the network adapter card or communications port.e
Click here
Show Schedule
Click here
Shows the next time that a server task will run.
Click here
Show Server
Click here
Shows server status information.
Click here
Show Stat
Click here
Displays server statistics for one or more of the following: disk space, memory, mail, replication, and network activity.
Click here
Show Tasks
Click here
Displays the server name, the Domino program directowy path, and the status of the active server tasks.t
Click here
Show Users
Click here
Displays a list of all users who have established sessions with the server.
Click here
Show Transactions
Click here
For each type of transaction' displays the total number of NRPC transactions, the minimum and maximum duration of the transaction, the total time to perform all transactions, and the average time to perform the transaction.&
Click here
Start Port
Click here
Enables transactions (or messages) on the specified port.p
Click hewe
Stop Port-
Click here
Disables transactions (or messages) on the specified port.
Click here
Tell
Click here
Issues a command to a server program or task.
Click here
Trace
Click here
Tests a connection to a server.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
U(-Hy
pzuU6>=
&Arial
The server conwole displays server events as they happen and responds to commands you enter at the prompt. For certain commands, such as Load, the server doesn't issue a response to the console. Instead, the server's log file (LOG.NSF) records the results of these commands. You can view the log file from the Server - Analysis tab in the Domino Administrator.
You can also use the Domino Administrator to issue server commands that affect a remote server. Many of the Domino Administrator's tabs automatically diwplay information you would normally see as the result of entering a server command at the console. For example, when you click the Server - Status tab, information equivalent to the Show Tasks command appears in the top pane. In addition, several tabs have tool bars that let you enter a command via a dialog box. For example, you can enter Tell commands from the tool bar on the Server - Status tab.
There are several ways to enter server commands:
Click here
Enwer commands from the console
Click here
Click here
Enter commands from the Domino Administrator
Click here
Click here
Run a batch file of console commands
Click here
Click here
(UNIX only) Use the Domino Character Console to access the server console
Click here
See Also
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Certain server commands display information that you might want to capture in a file. Type the server command and on the same line, type a space and then the following:
>filename.ext
where
filename.ext
is the name of the file to which you want to save output. Entgr a space after the server command but not after the redirection symbol (>). For example, this command writes the output of the Show Tasks command to the file TASKS.OUT in the Notes directory:
Show Tasks >TASKS.OUTe
To store output in a file outside the data directory, specify the complete path to the file.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domigo server commands
Click here
&Arial
Task
Command to run task
Descriptione
Default in NOTES.INI file
Administration Progess
AdminP
Automates a variety of administrative tasks.
ServerTasks
Agent manager
AMgr
Runs agents on'one or more databases.
ServerTasks
Billing
Billing
Collects all generated billing information.n
ServerTasks
Calendar Connector
Calconn
Processes requests for free-time information from another server.e
ServerTasks
Cataloger
Catalog
Updates the database catalog.
ServerTasksAt1
Chronos
Chronos
Updates full-text indexes that are marked to be updated hourly, daily, or weekly.
None
Cluster Administration Process
Cladgin
Oversees the correct operation of all components of a cluster.
None
Cluster Database Directory Manager
Cldbdir
Updates the cluster database directory and manages databases with cluster-specific attributes.
ServerTasks
Cluster Replicator
Clrepl
Performs database replication in a cluster.o
ServerTasks
Database compactor
Compact
Compacts all databases on the server to free up disk space.
None
Database fixup
Fixup
Locates and fixes corrupted databases. t
None
Designer
Design
Updates all databases to reflect changes to templates. s
ServerTasksAt1
DIIOP
DIIOP
Allows Domino and the browser client to use the Domino Object Request Broker (ORB) server program.
ServerTasks
Girectory Cataloger
Dircat
Populates directory catalogs and keeps the catalogs up-to-date.
None
Domain Indexer
Domidx
Creates a central, full-text index for all specified databases and file systems in a domain. Runs only on Domain Catalog servers.
None
Event Mogitor
Event
Monitors events on a server.
None
HTTP Server
HTTP
Enables a Domino server to act as a Web server so browser clients can access databases on the server.a
None
IMAP Server
IMAP
Enables a Gomino server to act as a maildrop for IMAP clients.
None
Indexer
Updall
Updates all changed views and/or full-text indexes for all databases.
ServerTasksAt2
ISpy
RunJava ISpy
Sends server and mail probes and stores the statistics.
ServerTasksr
LDAP Server
LDAP
Enables a Domino server to provide LDAP directory services to LDAP clients.
None
MTCd
Reads log files produced by the router and writes summary data about message traffic to a database for message tracking purposes.
ServerTawks
NNTP Server
NNTP
Enables a Domino server to act as a news server for NNTP clients.
None
Object store manager
Object
Performs maintenance activities on databases and mail files that use shared mail.o
ServerTasksAt2=Object Collect mailobj.nsf
POP3 Server
POP3
Enables a Domino server to act as a maildrop for POP3 clients.
None
Replicator
Replica
Replicates databases with other servers.
ServerTasks
Reporter
Report
Reportw statistics for a server.
None
Router
Router
Routes mail to other servers.
ServerTasks
Schedule manager
Sched
Returns meeting times and dates and available invitees.
ServerTasks
Statistic Collecworj
Collect
Collects statistics for multiple servers.
None
Statistics
Statlog
Records database activity in the log file.
ServerTasksAt5
Stats
Stats
Generates statistics for a remote server on demagd.
ServerTasks
Web Retriever
Implements the HTTP protocol to retrieve Web pages and convert them into Notes documents.
None
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
Server tasks perform complex administration procedures -- for example, compacting dawabases and updating indexes. You can run a server task manually, by loading the task at the server console. Or you can run the task automatically when the server starts by adding the name of the task to the ServerTasks or ServerTasksAt settings in the NOTES.INI file. In addition, you can create a Program document in the Domino Directory to run a task at scheduled intervals.
37949603229237984
In the NOTES.INI file
Many tasks run, by default, at specific times. Ygu can schedule additional tasks to run by editing one of these settings in the NOTES.INI file:
ServerTasks starts tasks automatically every time the server starts up
ServerTasksAt starts tasks at a specified time
37949603229237985
From the console
1. From the Domino Administrator, open the console for the server on which the program runs by clicking Console on the Server - Status tab.
2. Type:
Load
taskname
where
taskname
is the name of the server task that you want to run.
37949603229237986
In a Program document
To run a task on a server at a regularly scheduled time or at server startup, create a Program document in the Domino Directory. You can also use a Program document to run an OS/2 command file, a UNIX shell script or program, or an API program.
If you create an OS/2 command file, UNIX shell script, or APG program, you can use any of these characters for the name: A - Z, 0 - 9, & - . _ ' / (ampersand, dash, period, space, underscore, apostrophe, forward slash). Do not use \ (backslash) or any other characters because this can cause unexpected results.u
1. From the Domino Administrator, open the Domino Directory. Go to the Servers view, and open the Server document. s
2. Choose Create - Server - Program.
3. On the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Program name
The name of the server task you want to run.
On an OS/2 server, if you use CMD.EXE as the program name, start the command line with /C, followed by the instructions for the batch procedure you want to run.
Command lige
The command that starts the task, including any arguments to the command.
Server to run on
The full hierarchical name of the server on which to run the task.
Comments
A program description or additional information.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Click the Schedule tab, and then complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Enabled/disabled
Choose one:
Startup to run the program only when the server starts.
Enabled to schedule the task to run at specific times.
Run at times
The first time of day you want the task to run.
Repeat interval of
The number of minutes before the task should run again.
Days of week
The days of whe week when the task will run.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. (Optional) Click Administration, and then enter the names of additional owners/administrators.
6. Close and save the document.
To view all tasks scheduled to run on a server, use the Show Schedule command.k
&Arial
Type-ahead addressing displays names that match the letters a user types in the To, cc, and bcc fields in a mail message. For example, if you type'Jane D in the To field of a mail memo and Domino finds a Person document for Jane Doe/Acme in the Domino Directory, Domino automatically completes the rest of the recipient's address for you. You can change or retype the address as needed. To save time, Domino enables type-ahead addressing by default.
To save bandwidth and improve server performance, you can disable type-ahead addressing. If you disable type-ahead addressing on a mail server, users can still use type-ahead to find addresses ig their Personal Address Book or mobile Directory Catalog.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.d
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Cgnfiguration.e
5. On the Basics tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Type-ahead
Choose one:
Enabled to have the server match addresses from the Domino Directory based on whgt the user enters in the To, cc, or bcc field.
Disabled to prevent the server from matching addresses. Users rely on the Personal Address Book or Directory Catalog for type-ahead.
See Also
Click here
Controlling messaging
Click here
&Arial
Use this listing of documented error messages to find where the message is discussed in more detail.
Click here
Network er{or messages
Click here
are described under Network Configuration.
Click here
Access control is set to not allow replication
Click here
Click here
Administration Process: retrying a request that could not be performed previously
Cluster Replicator was unable to configure using Cluster Database Directory cldbdir.nsf: File does not exist
Click here
Click here
Cluster Replicator was unable to configure using Cluster Database Directkry cldbdir.nsf: Invalid replica ID for cluster database directory. If cluster name changed, delete cluster database directory and restart cldbdir task.
Click here
Click here
Database browsing not allowed
Click here
Click here
Database is not fully initialized yet
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance could not access Public Akdress Book on server x, error is Server Not Responding
The Web Navigator Retrieval process is not running
Click here
Click here
Unable to replicate with server x
Click here
Click here
Unauthorized exception
Click here
Click here
URL Access Denied
Click here
Click here
User name is not unique
Click here
Click here
User not listed in the Public Address Book
Click here
Click here
You are not authorized to access the server
Click here
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
Lotu{
Domino
Release 5, Lotus Notes
Release 5, Lotus Domino Administrator Release 5, and Lotus Domino Designer Release 5 offer new features, functionality, and ease of use to make your organization more productive and efficient. From the new Notes
interface to the task-oriented administration client, R5 focuses on helping you with day-to-day work. O
This guide covers two areas: upgrading and migration. Upgrading is the process of moving from earlier releases ok Domino and Notes to Release 5 -- including upgrading the software, working in a mixed-release environment, and upgrading your infrastructure. Migration is the process of moving from other mail systems, such as Microsoft Exchange, to Notes and Domino R5.s
&Arial
This guide
is intended to be read b{ everyone involved in the upgrade process, and especially by the upgrade team. While end users probably do not need to read the guide, some information in it may be useful to them. Consider creating a short list of useful information and distributing it to your end users.s
This guide contains information on planning your upgrade, the steps necessary for each part of the upgrade, information on operating in a mixed R4/R5 environment, and an overview of new features in Release 5 that help your o{ganization be more productive.o
&Arial
Domino R5 offers many new features to improve your organization's communication, knowledge-sharing, processes, efficiency, and productivity. Among these are:
383277497629237170
Security
X.509 certificates
You can issue X.509 certificates to users along with or instead of Notes certificates.
S/MIME
You can use S/MIME and X.509 certificates to send encrypted Internet mail.
Pa{sword recovery
If users forget their password, an administrator can recover their ID file.
File protection for Web files
Domino R5 lets you set access control for Web files such as images and HTML documents.
383277497629237171
Native Internet addressing
Domino R5 lets you use Internet addresses (RFC 821 / 822) with both Internet mail and Notes mail.
Native SMTP
The Domino route{ can transfer and deliver messages over SMTP as well as Notes RPC, allowing any R5 Domino server to act as an Internet mail server.
Native MIMEi
Domino R5 servers and databases can route and store MIME messages, eliminating the need for conversion. In addition, Notes R5 clients can compose and read MIME messages.
383277497629237172
Directoryn
LDAPv3
LDAP clients can make changes to the Domino Directory via LDAP. LDAP can be {sed to authenticate Web users in an external directory, and the LDAP Data Interchange Format lets you import and export directory information.
The Directory Catalog compresses one or more Domino Directories for fast, easy lookups of addresses. A 1 GB Domino Directory can be compressed into a 12 MB Directory Catalog. The Directory Catalog is an excellent tool for mobile users.
383277497629237173
Adkinistration
Domino Administrator client -- task-oriented UI
The Domino Administrator organizes server information and operations by task. You can perform operations on multiple servers or databases at once, including drag-and-drop support. R5 includes topology mapping, enhanced server monitoring, and mail tracking.
Message tracking
R5 lets you track messages en route, including routing path and whether the message has been delivered.
Mail ckntrols (anti-SPAM)
R5 includes controls on who can send and receive mail in your organization, allowing you to filter SPAM and restrict mail more tightly.
Migration tools (moving users and mail from other mail systems to Domino)
R5 includes tools to let you move users and mail files to Domino from Lotus cc:Mail
, Microsoft Exchange, Microsoft Mail, Microsoft NT, or other LDAP directories.
383277497629237174
Applicatioks
Transaction logging
Transaction logging keeps a sequential record of every operation that occurs to data. If a database becomes corrupted, you can "roll back" the database to a point before it was corrupted and replay the changes from the transaction log.
Online, in-place database compaction
With R5, you can compact databases while they are open. Compaction takes place without the need for extra disk space, where R4 required free disk space equal to tke size of the database being compacted.
Backup API
R5 includes an API for third-party tools to back up Domino data.
CORBA and IIOP support
R5 supports the Common Object Request Broker Architecture and the Internet Inter-Orb Protocol to allow you to create Web applications that take advantage of Domino services.
Domino Enterprise Connection Services (DECS)
DECS lets you connect in real-time to backend data, such as relational datkbases and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems.
383277497629237175
Internet
Internet clustering (failover and load-balancing)
Web clients fail over to another server in a cluster when one server goes down, and Domino balances the load from Web clients across servers.
Integration with Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) as HTTP stack
You can use Microsoft IIS as the HTTP services for Domino.
383277497629237176
Search
Domain Search
R5 Domain Search lets you search databases across a Domino domain.
Results filtering
Domain Search checks search results to make sure a user can access them; if not, the user does not see the result.
File systems
You can include file systems in Domain Search, including specifying which file types to exclude and which directories to include.
See Also
Click here
New Domino mail features
Click here
Click here
New Lotus Notes client features
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features.
Click here
Click here
New Domino search features
Click here
Click here
Installing the Domino Administrator in Release 5
Click here
&Arial
In Release 5, you install the Domino server and any Notes clients -- including the Domino Administrator client -- separately. This is a change from Release 4, where installing a server automatically installed an administration client. When you install a server, the Setup program does not install the Domino Administrator or NOTES.EXE. You must run client setup to install the Domino Administrator client if you want to have the Domino Administrator on the same cokputer as the Domino server. This installs the client software, including NOTES.EXE, in the client directory.@
See Also
Click here
New Domino server features
Click here
Click here
New Domino mail features
Click here
&Arial
Domino R5 includes many new features to improve the security and performance of your Internet and Notes mail.
288632982429238407
Internet mkil routing controls
Reverse host IP lookup
Control relay by destination domains
Control relay by sending host
Verify mail sending domain
Control SMTP inbound mail by sending user or sending hoste
Allow or deny SMTP mail based on sender's address or recipient's address
288632982429238408
Authentication mechanismsr
Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL) using AUTH=LOGIN
Transport Layer Security (TLS)
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) Port
288632982429238409
Extended SMTP (ESMTP)
Performance improvements with 8-bit MIME and command pipelininga
Delivery status notifications
Inbound and outbound message size controls
288632982429238410
Router performance
Multi-threaded deliveryw
Multiple MAIL.BOX databaseso
288632982429;38411
Security
Secure MIME (S/MIME) using X.509 certificates for encryption and digital signatures
Mail file access protection -- all protocols support one or more login authentication mechanisms
288632982429238412
Message fidelity
Native MIME
Native HTML
Native SMTP
57633516829239193
International features
Multiple character sets per server -- set a primary kharacter set and secondary character sets
See Also
Click here
New Domino server features
Click here
Click here
New Lotus Notes client features
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features
Click here
Click here
New Domino search features
Click here
Click here
Installing the Domino Administrator in Release 5
Click here
&Arial
Lotus Notes Release 5 gives you easy access to all the information that is important to you -- whether that information is personal (like your e-mail and calendar) or public (like your favorite Web sites and Internet new{groups). The client includes a new user interface with a Web browser-like navigation model, bookmarks, and a Headlines page (a customizable "home" page for your important information). It also includes improvements to the applications you use in your daily work, such as mail, calendar and scheduling, Web browsing, and discussions.
Notes R5 is server-independent -- you can use it with Domino R5 as well as other Internet-standard servers, such as the ones your Internet Service Provider (ISP) ma{ use. For example, you can read and send messages to any IMAP or POP3 server, read and post topics to any NNTP newsgroup, search any LDAP directory, view HTML from any Web server, and use X.509 certificates for security. You can do all these things from within one, consistent interface, without needing to know about the Internet standards involved.f
New Notes 5 features include:o
Improved navigation
In Notes 5, window tabs let you navigate among your open "pages" -- {hether those pages are a mail message, database view, Web page, or newsgroup article. The window tabs replace the Window menu. Whenever you open a new page, a new tab appears at the top of the main window. Move among the open pages simply by clicking the window tabs. R4 users will appreciate that you can have up to 20 window tabs open at the same time.
Navigate among the open pages by using new Web browser-like buttons (Back, Forward, Stop, Refresh, Search, and Go). These buttons appear at thk top-right corner of the main window. They work just as you would expect them to work in a typical Web browser. The Search button allows you to access all the Notes R5 search features and to bookmark your favorite Internet search engines. The expanded Notes R5 search capabilities include a Web-like interface and support for searches across an entire domain of databases and file systems. The Go button shows the text address of the active tab, whether it's the URL of a Web page, newsgroup article, or a Notes+element. (Documents that you can't get to through the Web begin with Notes:// instead of http://) i
Enhancements and standards support
Bookmarks
Bookmarks allow you to create links to information or sites that are important to you. You can create a bookmark, just like you would in a browser, but this bookmark can point to both Notes and Internet elements, including databases, views, documents, Web pages, and newsgroups. Creating a bookmark is as easy as dragging and kropping a doclink, for example, over to the bookmark icon.
Headlines page
The Headlines page is a customizable "home" page that contains links to all your important information, such as your mail, calendar entries, databases you use in your daily work, corporate announcements, and public information from the Internet (such as stock quotes or local weather). Check with your Notes Administrator to make your main Notes page "Today's Headlines." You can also access archived headlines+from this page.
For more information, see the section "What's New in 5.0" in "Getting Started" in Notes 5 Help (HELP5_CLIENT.NSF).
See Also
Click here
New Domino server features
Click here
Click here
New Domino mail features
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features
Click here
Click here
New Domino search features
Click here
&Arial
Upgrading databases and database servers to Release 5 brings a number of key benefits that result in greatly increased performance, improved backup and error tolerance, faster rebuilds, better compaction, and new database options. New features include:
The Release 5 database format (On-Disk Structure, or ODS) and templates offer much improved performakce, especially for databases such as the Domino Directory and MAIL.BOX. Database operations require less I/O, and memory and disk space allocation are improved.m
Transaction logging writes all changes to a database sequentially to a log file and does not physically alter the database until those changes are safely stored on disk. This allows you to recover data lost through database corruption or other problems by "rolling back" the database to a given point and replaying the changes to the da{abase through the log. This also allows greatly improved backup of databases. R5 databases with transaction logging enabled do not need to have Fixup run on them. Be sure to use a separate, single-purpose, high-volume drive for the log files.r
View rebuilds are as much as five times faster in Release 5 if you designate a separate drive for the temporary files for the rebuilds. The greater the space on the drive you dedicate to view rebuilds, the greater the increase in rebuild speed.
Multiple shared mail databases (single-copy object stores) allow fewer I/O transactions and reduce locking problems.
Multiple MAIL.BOX databases allow you to spread the mail load over several databases.l
The parallel indexer allows more than one indexing thread on servers with more than one CPU. Having one thread per CPU improves performance, especially for the drive that has the temporary files for view rebuilds. This allows you to better utilize multiple CPUs on a server.
Release 5 databases have an anti-delete feature that you can enable. This feature performs "soft deletes" first, allowing you to undo a deletion. For example, Release 5 mail databases have this feature when operating in conjunction with a Release 5 Domino server. You can set a field in the database for a "sunset time" after which soft-deleted documents are permanently deleted.
There are a number of database options, such as turning off unread marks, that allow you to improve performakce significantly with very little effort. For more information, see "
Click here
Improving database performance.
Click here
Compaction of Release 5 databases occurs online and "in place" and does not require additional disk space. Users can read and modify the database while compaction occurs. R5 compaction is significantly faster than R4 compaction -- up to 10 times faster.
Release 5 databases can be as large as 64GB.
See Also
Click here
New Domino server features
Click here
Click here
New Domino mail features
Click here
Click here
New Lotus Notes client features
Click here
Click here
New Domino search features
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Server_Availability_Threshold=
value
Description:
Specifies the acceptable level of system resources available to a server. By setting this value for each server in a cluster, you determine how the workload is distributed among cluster members. Valid values are 0 to 100. Domino compares this value against a server's availability index; when the availability index falls below the Server_Availability_Threshold value, the server becomes BUSY. A Server_Availability_Threshold value of zero (0) indicates a f{lly available state and workload balancing is disabled; a value of 100 indicates the server is BUSY (since the availability index can never be greater than 100) and the Cluster Manager then tries to redirect user requests to more available cluster members."
Applies to:b
Cluster server
Default:
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings documekt in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Server_Cluster_Default_Port=
portname
Description:
Specifies the port used for intracluster network traffic. The value should be a port name -- for example, TCP -- as specified in the Ports tab of the Server document.
Applies to:
Cluster server
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting kn the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
PURSAFO
$TABLEFORMAT
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$VIEWFORMAT
$Comment
]2 iC(
&Arial
Release 5 search provides a number of advantages over Release 4 search. These include
Security -- the Domain Catalog server uses the Domain Catalog to filter search results based on the user's level of access to the results. If a user does not have access to view a document, the server does not return that document as a search result.
Note
The security filtering in Release 5.0 works only for results from Domino databases. Results from }earches against file systems depend on file system security -- users get the search result even if they are not authorized to view the document. Thus, users may not be able to access all search results, or may be able to discern confidential information from the existence of a particular search result. Be sure to set file system security properly and index only file systems where security is not a high priority.
Paged results -- when returning search results, R5 search returns them one page at-a time, allowing the server to send the first page of results and then process the next user query. This speeds searches in general and returns results to users much more rapidly than in R4 Search Site, where users had to wait until all search results were compiled and displayed.
File systems -- you can set the Domain Catalog server to index file systems as well as Domino databases, providing the capability for enterprise search. You can index any file system that the search server can access-as a mounted directory. R5 search indexes multiple file types, including Adobe Acrobat (PDF) files, Corel WordPerfect (DOC) files, HTML files, Lotus SmartSuite
documents (LWP, PRZ, 123), and Microsoft Office documents (DOC, PPT, XLS), both in the file system and as attachments. l
Centralized index -- there is no duplication of indexes, saving disk space and ensuring that users always get the most up-to-date results. You can concentrate resources on a single Domain Catalog server, saving hardwmre costs.
Customizable search and result forms -- application designers can customize forms to refine queries or limit user queries to specific databases. Search and result forms can include graphics, such as background images or corporate logos. The result form can be customized to display additional information about result documents, such as their author or when they were created.
Fuzzy search -- R5 search returns results even if the query is misspelled; a search on "Montrel"-would find results for "Montreal." See "To use options to refine a search" in Notes 5 Help (HELP5_CLIENT.NSF).
Stemming -- R5 search uses linguistic analysis to return documents that contain words related to the words in the search query; a search on "swim" returns results containing "swimming" and "swimmer." See "To use options to refine a search" in Notes 5 Help (HELP5_CLIENT.NSF).
Note
R5 stemming is restricted to English.
See Also
Click here
New Domino server features
Click here
Click here
New Domino mail features
Click here
Click here
New Lotus Notes client features
Click here
Click here
New Domino application features
Click here
&Arial
Previous releases of the Domino server used a Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to route Internet mail. In Release 5, the Domino router routes Internet mail over SMTP. Mail clients can use Internet mail with MIME or Notes Mail
in Notes format -- Domino routes both formats natively and converts automatically between them. Upgrades to Release 5 are seamless -- features and functions that worked in Release 4 continue to work in Release 5. While you see performance gains and additional functionality by utilizing the new Release 5 features, changes to your existing configuration are not required. Domino uses all R4 addressing and routing without change. You can implement Release 5 addressing and routing all at once, gradually, or not at all -- the choice ms yours.i
&Arial
After you upgrade a server and Domino Directory to R5 and replicate the new template to your Public Address Books, upgrade your Domino administration clients to R5. You gain the new features and benefits of the Domino Administrator -- including message tracking, topology maps, and a task-oriented in}erface. In addition, the Domino Directory is easier to administer with the Domino Administrator.
&Arial
This chapter describes Domain Search, which lets you index and search an entire domain of Domino databases, including attachments to documents, and files in a file system. Domain Search filters results so that usmrs who do not have access to read a document do not receive that document in the search results.
=PWcR
&Arial
When a Notes R5 client uses Domain Search, Notes checks the Search server field on the Servers tab of the current Location document to decide to which Domain Catalog Server to connect. Once you set up a Domain Catalog Server for your Notes domain, Domino records this information in the default user setup profile in the Domino Directory for the domain, automating the process of setting up Domain Search for-Notes clients in the domain. When R5 Notes users authenticate with their home server, Notes checks this profile and updates the current Location document with the name of the Domain Catalog Server. Use the following steps for other Locations or to set up Domain Search before the Notes client authenticates with the home server.
1. Launch the R5 Notes client.
2. Choose File - Database - Open.
3. Select the Personal Address Book and click Open.
4.
In the left pane, expand the Advanced section and click Locations.r
5. Do the following for each Location for which you want to use Domain Search:
Select the Location and click the Edit Location button.u
Click the Servers tab.
Enter the name of the Domain Catalog server in the Search server field. If you do not know what the Domain Catalog server for the domain is, ask your Domino administrator.8
Click Save and Close.t
6. Clo}e the Personal Address Book.
Note
Domino administrators can set this information for new users during user registration.
If users enter the name of the search server incorrectly, or specify a server that is not a Domain Catalog server, Notes returns an error.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading Search
Click here
Click here
Upgrading a Lotus Notes client tm Release 5
Click here
Click here
Security and Domain Search
Click here
Click here
Changes in search
Click here
Click here
Enabling Domain Search
Click here
h{age
s(N`ke
d=<oke
&Arial
A company, Acme Corp., has geographically distant offices located in Cambridge and Los Angeles. Each office has two departments: Sales and Marketing in Cambridge, and Development and Human Resources in Los Angeles. Employees of Acme Corp. rarely change departments, so you can base a naming scheme on-both geographical location and departments.
The chart for the hierarchical naming scheme at Acme Corp. includes the following organization and organizational units:
Acme
(organization) This is the top-level hierarchical name. All servers and users in the company will use this organization name. Use this hierarchical name in conjunction with an organizational unit as described below.
East
and
West
(organizational units- These are first-level organizational units of Acme.
Sales
and
Marketing
(organizational units) These are second-level organizational units of East.
DevN
and
(organizational units) These are second-level organizational units of West.
After you create the hierarchical naming scheme, you create the following certifiers:
/Acme
This is the top-level certifier ID.
/East/Acme
and
/West/Acme
Create these certifiers using the /Acme certifier ID and use the /East/Acme certifier to name servers in the Cambridge office and the /West/Acme certifier to name servers in the Los Angeles office.
/Sales/East/Acme
and
/Marketing/East/Acme
Create these certifiers using the /East/Acme certifier ID and use them to name users in the Cambridge office.
/Dev/West/Acme
and
/HR/West/Acme
Create these certifiers using the /West/Acme certifier ID and use them to name users in the Los Angeles office.
The tables below contain examples of server and user names at Acme Corp. before upgrading to hierarchical and after upgrading to hierarchical names. The certifier ID that you use for the server or user name depends on the location of the server or user and the department in which the user works.
Location
Server name before upgrading
Server name after upgrading
Cambridge
Hub-E
Hub-E/East/Acme
Cambridge
Mail-E
Mail-E/East/Acme
Cambridge
Passthru
Passthru/East/Mcme
Los Angeles
Hub-W
Hub-W/West/Acme
Los Angeles
Mail-W
Mail-W/West/Acme
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Location and department
User name before upgrading
User name after upgrading
Cambridge -
Sales departmentm
Alan Jones
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme
Cambridge -
Marketing department
Randi Bowker
Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme
Los Angeles -
Development department
Mudy Kaplan
Judy Kaplan/Dev/West/Acme
Los Angeles -
Human Resources departmentA
Mark Richards
Mark Richards/HR/West/Acme
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
Before you convert a server or user name from flat to hierarchical, you must do the following:
1. Upgrade all servers to Release 4.x or Release 5.
2. Create a Certification Log database (MERTLOG.NSF), which you use to troubleshoot any problems that occur when you convert names.
3. Develop a hierarchical name scheme for your organization.
4. Create hierarchical certifier IDs.
5. Prepare the system for the Administration Process. This includes creating the Administration Requests database and replication schedule, giving proper access to administrators and specifying an administration server for the Domino Directory and databases.
=. Follow a specific set of steps to upgrade the first flat server to a hierarchical name.
7. Before converting a flat server name, manually change the name in the ACL of MAIL.BOX if the server name is listed explicitly in the ACL.
See Also
Click here
Converting flat names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat server names to hierarchical server namesl
Clmck here
Click here
Converting flat user names to hierarchical names
Click here
!H le
]S{Xle
&Arial
1. Make sure you complete the steps in "
Click here
Preparing to convert flat names to hierarchical names
Click here
" before you continue.
2. Start the server and workstation.
3. Choose File - Tools - Server Administration.
4. Click Servers and choose Servers View..
5. Open the Server document of the server }o be converted. If the Certified public key field is empty, copy the certified public key to this field. To do this, choose File - Tools - Server Administration, Administration - ID File, select the server ID file, click More Options and then click Copy Public Key. Paste the key into the Certified public key field in the Administration section of the Server document and then save the Server document.
6. With the Server document selected, choose Actions - Upgrade Server to Hierarchical.
7. Choose the hierarchical certifier to use and enter the password. Refer to the hierarchical naming chart you created when developing a hierarchical naming scheme.
8. Enter the date when this certificate will expire for the server.
9. Click Upgrade.
10. After Domino processes your request, click OK.
11. Shut down the server and open the Domino Directory locally on the server machine.
12. Open the Server document of the fir}t server to convert.
13. Delete the contents of the Certified public key field.
14. Open the Administration Requests database.
15. Open the "Initiate Rename in Address Book" request document for the server being converted.
16. Copy the contents of the Certified public key field to the Certified public key field of the Server document.
17. Copy the contents of the Change Request field to the Change Request field of the Server document.
18. Save the Server document.
19. Shut down the Notes workstation.
20. Restart the server.
See Also
Click here
Converting flat names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Preparing to convert flat names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat server names to hierarchical server names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat user names to hierarchical names
Click here
!H le
]S{Xle
&Arial
Before you can convert a user name, you must convert server names. You must have Author access with the ServerModifier role or Editor access as well as the Create Documents permission to the Domino Directory. You must also have at least Autho} access with the Create documents permission to the Certification Log.
Make sure you completed all the steps in "
Click here
Converting the first flat server name to a hierarchical name
Click here
" before you perform this task.
1. Open the Domino Directory on a server rather than choosing "Local."
2. In the Server view, select the servers you want to convert.
3. Choose Actions - Upgrade Server to Hierarchmcal.
4. Choose the hierarchical certifier to use, and enter the password. Refer to the hierarchical name scheme that you developed.
5. Enter the date when this certificate will expire for the server.
6. Click Upgrade.
7. After Domino processes the requests, click OK.
8. Repeat Steps 3 through 8 for additional servers whose names you want to convert using a different hierarchical certifier.
See Also
Click here
Converting flat names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Preparing to convert flat names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat server names to hierarchical server names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat user names to hierarchical names
Click here
!H le
]S{Xle
&Arial
After you convert flat server names to hierarchical server names, you can convert flat user names.
The user's flat name combines with the certifier name to create the hierarchical name. For example, if a user's flat name is Randi Bowker and the certifier name is Marketing/East/Acme, the user's hierarchical name is Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme.
You can convert multiple user names at a time, provided that you use the same hierarchical certifier to certify all user-names. For example, to convert three users -- Randi Bowker, Kara Nguyen, and Bob Murphy -- in the Marketing department of the Acme corporation, you use the Marketing/East/Acme hierarchical certifier. The resulting hierarchical user names are: Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme, Kara Nguyen/Marketing/East/Acme, and Bob Murphy/Marketing/East/Acme.
If users have administration servers set in their local databases and Personal Address books, they must accept their names on their own workstations in mrder to upgrade the names in these databases.
Once user name upgrades occur in a database access control list (ACL) and the name change expiration period (Name_Change_Expiration_Days setting) elapses, users cannot access the database using their flat user names. Similarly, if you manually upgrade user names to hierarchical in database ACLs on servers in another domain, users cannot access the database using their flat user names.t
However, if you upgrade a user name to hierarchicam and the database ACL lists the user with their flat name, the user can continue to access the database, but keep in mind that the security hierarchical naming provides is not enforced for that database. u
See Also
Click here
Converting flat user names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Preparing to convert flat names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat server names to hierarchical server names
Click here
]S{Xle
!H le
&Arial
This guide is for information services (IS) managers, Notes administrators, database managers, application designers, and anyone else responsible for migrating users from external directory sources or messaging-systems to Lotus Domino Release 5. The administrator performing a migration should be familiar with Lotus Domino and Notes, as well as with the directory or messaging system that users are moving from.
The migration process differs between organizations, depending on the network configuration, available resources, and desired level of migration. This guide provides basic guidelines and procedures that you can adapt to your organization as you plan and perform the migration to Domino Release 5.
Before performing a migration, read this section, as well as the sections containing information specific to the system you are importing from. For example, if you are importing users from Microsoft Exchange, after reading this section, read the chapter "Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange."
The users you migrate may have messaging data stored in locations outside their mailboxes. Read
Click here
"Migrating Personal Mail Data"
Click here
to help prepare users to run the upgrade wizard that migrates such data.
See Also
Click here
Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
Click here
Click here
Migrating users and mail data
Click here
&Arial
The address books, message stores, and archives of a messaging system contain a great deal of information. In migrating users from ano}her system to Notes and Domino, it is important not only to maintain reliable messaging services with minimal disruption, but also to maintain access to the information on the old system, by converting that information so that users can access it from a Notes client.
Migration
is the process of moving user directory information, mailboxes, mail, and addresses from one system to another. Migration includes importing data from a legacy messaging system and converting it to Notes-mail and Domino Directory format.
Importing
refers to the task of moving data from an external directory, post office, or mailbox and making it available for processing into Domino or Notes format.
Converting c
refers to the task of processing imported information and changing it to Domino or Notes format.
Domino Release 5 provides two sets of tools for migrating users, the Domino migration tools for administrators and the end-user upgrade wizards. Depending-on your environment, and the type of migration you are performing, you may use one or both of these tools.
The Domino migration tools, which install as part of the Domino Administrator, let an authorized administrator:
Import users from a server-based foreign directory u
Register imported users
Automatically create Notes mail files for registered users
Accurately convert messages from mail boxes in the legacy post office into Notes forma}T
The Domino Administrator provides migration tools for the following messaging and directory systems:
Click here
LDIF (LDAP Data Interchange Format) files
Click here
Click here
Lotus cc:Mail and Organizer
2.x for cc:Mail
Click here
Click here
Microsoft Exchange
Click here
Click here
Microsoft Mail
Click here
Click here
Microsoft Windows NT Server
Click here
Click here
Netscape Messaging Server
Click here
Click here
Novell GroupWise 4.x
Click here
Click here
Novell GroupWise 5.x
Click here
The Domino migration tools-place most of the data from the old system directly into Notes databases on the Domino server. However, in the Notes environment there are some types of data, such as personal address book information, that are typically stored on the Notes client. The migration tools use Notes mail messages to send client data to migrated users. Users can then run the upgrade wizard at their workstations to transfer the data stored in the mail message to the appropriate database on the Notes client. The upgrade wizard mig}ates a user's private addresses, private distribution lists, and message archives to local Notes databases. Refer to
Click here
"Migrating Personal Mail Data"
Click here
for information about how end users can run the upgrade wizard at their workstation to migrate additional messaging data.
Note
In addition to the Domino migration tools and user upgrade wizards discussed in this guide, the Notes Release 5 client also ha} tools available for migrating locally stored data from the following calendaring and messaging programs to Notes: Lotus Organizer 2.x, Lotus Organizer 97, Microsoft Schedule+, Netscape Messaging Server, Novell GroupWise 4.X, Novell GroupWise 5.x, OpenText OnTime, and Qualcomm Eudora. These tools, which users run at their workstations, can be used independently of the Domino migration tools. For information about these tools refer to the online Help provided with each tool.
See Also
Click here
Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Dominos
Click here
MT @A\
&Arial
The tasks described in this guide require use of the Domino Administrator and migration tools. By default, the migration tools are not installed with the Domino Administrator; you must select the Migration Tools component during installation. If you did not install either the Domino Administrator or the migration tools when you first installed the Notes client, run the installation again.
When installing the client software, do the following to install the migration tools you need:
1. When prompted to select the type of Setup you want, click Domino Administrator or All Clients, and then click Customize.
2. From the list of components to install, select Migration tools and then click Change.
3. From the Select Sub-components dialog box, select the items for the type of migration you are performing. Clear selections for components you do not need.
If you are migrating users from an e-mail system, such as cc:Mail, Microsoft Mail, o
Microsoft Exchange, there are two components to install, an Admin tool and a Client tool. Install the Admin tool on your workstation.
After you migrate users, if you want users to migrate their personal mail data, install the Client migration tool, either on each user's workstation when you install the Notes Release 5 client, or on a shared network directory.
4. Continue with the installation as directed.
Tip
For best performance, i
is recommended that you run the Domino Administrator on a computer within the same Notes domain as the destination mail server. Also, if you are using the cc:Mail MTA to provide coexistence between cc:Mail and Notes, it is recommended that you do not run the Domino Administrator on the MTA server. r
See Also
Click here
Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
Click here
&Arial
A source directory or address book contains important information about users of the old mail system. Using the Domino Administrator, you select the type of directory and then onter the information needed to connect to it and extract information from it. You can then browse the list of available users and select those to be imported to Notes.
See Also
Click here
Importing users from a foreign directory
Click here
Click here
Selecting people and groups to migrate
Click here
Click here
Setting migration options
Click oere
&Arial
After selecting a directory
o import, you can select the users and groups you want to migrate. If you are migrating from multiple systems, you can select users and groups from different foreign directories during a single session.
For example, from the People and Groups Migration dialog box, you can select 10 users to migrate from a cc:Mail directory, and then select additional users from a Microsoft Exchange directory. If you select the cc:Mail directory again, the 10 users are still selected.
See Olso
Click here
Migrating groups
Click here
Click here
Importing users from a foreign directory
Click here
Click here
Specifying the foreign directory source
Click here
Click here
Setting migration options
Click here
&Arial
If a group you add to the "People/Groups to migrate list" has the same name as an existing Notes group, you must choose whether to use the existing Notes group during migration or create a new group.
If you use an existing group, the Group Migration Options dialog box displays the "Add members of this group to the existing Notes group" check box, which is selected by default. When the check box is selected, the migration tools add members of the migrating group to the existing Notes group. After you click OK to close the dialog box, the "People/Groups to migrate list" displays the naoe of the migrating group, as well as the names of local users in the group. During registration, migrated users will be added to the existing Notes group.
Clear the check box if you do not want to add users in the migrating group to the existing Notes group. The names of local users in the migrating group will appear in the "People/Groups to migrate list." During registration, migrated users are not added to the existing Notes group. d
See Also
Clock here
Setting Group Migration Options
Click here
Click here
Migrating groups
Click here
&Arial
When the name of a migrating group is unique among the groups in the Domino Directory, the GroupMigration Options dialog box displays the option "Create a new Notes group with the following settings."
By default, this option is selected and the migration tool will create a new Notes group that has the name of the migrating group, and includes the local users of the original group, as well as any nested groups and their available members. You can edit the default information in the following fields: l
Notes Group Name e
Group Type
Description
When you create a new Notes group for a migrating group, you can also migrate nested groups that are members of the group. By default, the option
Click here
"Add nested groups contained in this group and their members/
Clear the check box if you want to migrate local users of the group, but not create a new Notes group based on the group. When the check box is cleared, you cannot migrate nested groups that are members of this group. However, you can migrate users who belong to such nested groups by selecting the option
Click here
"Add people oontained in nested groups as Notes users."t
For users who have no existing password to import, or whose passwords the migration tools cannot import (Winoows NT users, for example), the migration tools provide an option to generate a random password, conforming to the specified
Click here
password quality scale
Click here
. The default setting for this option differs for each of the migration tools. When using this option, passwords are only generated for users if the password field is empty; generated passwords do not overwrite passwords imported from the legacy system.
This option and the option "Ovorwrite existing passwords with random passwords" are mutually exclusive. If you select one of the options and then attempt to select the other, an error message appears.
Note
In the current release, the Domino migration tool for cc:Mail does not support the option "Generate random passwords." To successfully migrate a user's cc:Mail mail box, you must provide a cc:Mail password for the user. Use the cc:Mail administration tool to create passwords for users before mogration.
See Also
Click here
Overwriting existing passwords with random passwords
Click here
Click here
Setting migration options]
Click here
Click here
Importing passwords
Click here
Click here
Setting registration defaults
Click here
&Arial
This chapter provides information on concepts relevant to Lotus
Domino
v and local area networks (LANs). You should be familiar with the Domino system and network odministration. This guide provides information on these topics from a Domino perspective but does not attempt to provide general network information.
&Arial
For additional information about operating systems, including required patches and release numbers, see the Release Notes.
Notes workstation platform
LAN protocols
Windows 95
Banyan VINES
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
NetBIOS over IPX
SPX/IPX
TCP/IP
Windows NT
Banyan VINES
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
NetBIOS over IPX
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP
Windows 98
NetBIOS over NetBEUI
NetBIOS over IPX
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP
Macintosh (Mac PowerPC)
AppleTalk
TCP/IP
IBM Network Cooputer (NC)
TCP/IP
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
When a Notes workstation user tries to connect to a Domino server, Domino and VINES StreetTalk use one or more of the methods to locate the SteetTalk address of the Domino server:
1. Check Normal priority Connection documents. Domino looks for Normal priority Connection documents in the Personal Address Book. You can enter the StreetTalk name of the VINES PC-based service that the server uses in the/Destination Server Address field of the Connection document. This field is not required.v
2. Check the Domino Directory of the home server for the address of the server.n
3. Check the Domino Directory of the secondary home server for the address of the server. Unlike a TCP/IP secondary home server, the destination is not administered anywhere on the client interface: Domino broadcasts to all Domino servers running VINES. The first server to respond provides the address of the
erver, if known.a
4. Check the StreetTalk and StreetTalk Directory Assistance (STDA).I
If the full StreetTalk name of the PC-based service is known or if the service is in the same VINES group and organization as the user at the Notes workstation, the workstation issues a GetPort call to its StreetTalk server for the address of the PC-based service.
If this does not locate the Domino server, use the pre-configured VINES STDA server if it exists, broadcast for an STDO service, search the Other Services and Nickname classes for matches on the server's common name, or request the StreetTalk name from the StreetTalk server. Use the NOTES.INI VinesServerGroup setting to shorten the STDA search.
5. Check Low and Normal priority Connection documents.
When you add new Domino server to the system, the VINES port driver cannot use STDA until STDA updates its directory to include the new server name. If there are duplicate Domino server names, STDA chocks for the next alternate in the VINES user profile. Enter this command in the user profile to ensure that SDTA finds an alternate VINES file server:t
!SETSTDA VINES e
server name
/ALT
Where
VINES server name
specifies which server retrieves the STDA database and ALT is the name of the next available server to retrieve the STDA database if the first server name is unavailable. For more information about the !STDA command, see the Banyan VINES Comoand Reference.
StreetTalk recognizes each Domino server by its PC-based service name. The Domino server name and the item portion of the PC-based service share the same name. For example, if the Domino server name is Excalibur, the PC-based service is the following:
Excalibur@group@organization
Examples: Locating Domino servers on VINES
In these examples, Domino user Montana Rose@Marketing@Acme is logged onto the VINES network and is/trying to connect to various Domino servers. The default search group is Lotus Notes.
41665011229213004
Searching in the Notes workstation's group@org
If the Notes PC-based service or a nickname pointing to the PC-based service is in the workstation's group, then StreetTalk resolves the full name and returns the server's network address.
Example:
PC-based service in the users group:
Notes User = Montana Rose@Marketing@Acme
VINES PC-based service = Server1@Marketing@Acme
Nickname in the users group
Notes User = Montana Rose@Marketing@Acme
VINES nickname Server1@Marketing@Acme (that refers to Server1@Another Group@Acme)
VINES PC-based service = Server1@Another Group@Acme
41665011229213005
Searching by the Notes hierarchical name
If the server name and the Notes user name are both hierarchical with at/least three parts, then Domino uses the Notes user name as a template for guessing how to map the server name to a three-part VINES name using these rules:
1. IF the server's hierarchical name has three parts, use the server's common name (CN) @Highest OU (organizational unit) @O (organization name)
2. ELSE IF the Notes user's hierarchical name has three parts, use server's CN @ Highest OU @ O
3. ELSE IF the Notes user's O matches the user's VINES Org, use se
ver's CN @ Highest OU @ O
4. ELSE IF the Notes user's highest OU matches the user's VINES Org, use server's CN @ Second highest OU @ Highest OU
5. ELSE IF the Notes user's lowest OU matches the VINES Group, use server's CN @ Lowest OU @ Second to lowest OU
6. ELSE don't try to map.
Example:
Given: Domino Server name ID = Server1/Marketing/Acme
Domino constructs the VINES PC-based service name: Server1@Marketing@Acme
Once the VINES port driver has constructed a three-part StreetTalk name from the Domino server's hierarchical name, it uses StreetTalk to verify that VINES address. If this fails, the VINES port driver immediately searches the StreetTalk Directory Assistance.s
41665011229213006
Searching StreetTalk Directory Assistance (STDA)
The Domino server's PC-based service is listed in STDA. Server1 does not have to be in the user's group.
Example:
Single match found in STDA: STDA lists PC-based service Server1@Finance@Acme.
Multiple matches found in STDA: STDA lists PC-based service Server1@Finance@Acme and PC-based service Server1@Purchasing@Acme.
When there are multiple matches, the VINES port driver refines the search to eliminate services whose StreetTalk description field does not start with "Lotus Notes." If there are still multiple matches, the driver returns an error.
41665011229213?07
Searching in the default group "Lotus Notes"
Domino creates a three-part name of the form "Notes Servername@Lotus Notes@Organization Name," where "Lotus Notes" is the default group.
Example:
PC-based service in the group "Lotus Notes":
Notes User = Montana Rose@Marketing@Acme
VINES PC-based service = Server1@Lotus Notes@Acme
Nickname in the group "Lotus Notes":
Notes User = Montana Rose@Ma
keting@Acme
VINES nickname Server1@Lotus Notes@Acme (that refers to Server1@Another Group@Acme)
VINES PC-based service = Server1@Another Group@Acme
&Arial
Notes workstations use the NetWare Services configured in the User Preferences - Ports dialog box to find a Domino server on the network.
When a Notes workstation attempts to locate a Domino server on an IPX/SPX network, Domino uses the underlying NetWare Services in the following order:
1. If NDS is enabled, the Domino server's NDS distinguished name is used to search the NDS tree.
2. If Bindery Services are enabled, the server's/common name is used to query the Bindery.
3. If Automatic, the default is enabled, Domino uses the following algorithm:
Using NDS, the server's distinguished name is used to search the NDS tree.
Using Bindery Services, the server's common name is used to query the Bindery.si
&Arial
Domino supports two different tools for administering a Domino server NDS object -- NetWare Administrator with the Domino NetWare Administrator Snapin (NDSNOTES.DLL) and NDSMgr. These tools let you:
Create a Domino server NDS object class
Create a Domino server NDS object
Delete a Domino server NDS object
View the attributes of a Domino server NDS object
4448092829213008
NetWare Administrator
Novell's standard tool for administering NDS and all objects in the tree is called NetWare Administrator. To access the NetWare Administrator, use one of these executables:
NWADMINNT.EXE if you are usiog an NT client
NWADMIN95.EXE if you are using a WIN95 client
Domino has supplied a Snapin to the NetWare Administrator, which allows Domino servers to be administered using one standard tool. The Domino Snapin is implemented as a DLL called NDSNOTES.DLL. You must configure the NetWare Administrator tool before you can use it.
Using the NetWare Administrator, administrators may access the pull-down menus to determine the actions that can be performed on the Domino se
ver NDS object. Using the Snapin, the Domino server becomes an object class. The Domino server NDS object class and servers are represented by the Domino icon.
4448092829213009
NDSMgr
For administration on Windows NT and Windows 95/98, Domino provides NDSMgr. NDSMGR.EXE provides the same functions as the NetWare Administrator with NDSNOTES and is a Domino NDS manager application for those platforms that do not support NetWare Administrator.
The NDSMOR.EXE file is located in the Notes directory. In addition, NDSMgr uses Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs) found in the Notes directory.
Use these commands with NDSMgr:
Command
Description
Create the Domino server NDS class
Remove the Domino server NDS class
Add a Domino server to the tree
Delete a Domino server from the tree
Read a Domino server object attributes
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
371100076829223093
Examples
This command adds the Domino server Burke to the tree:
-a cn=Burke.o=Acme
This command deletes the Domino server Burke from the tree:
-d co=Burke.o=Acme
This command reads the object attributes of the Domino server Burke:
-s cn=Burke.o=Acme
See Also
Click here
Configuring the Domino Snapin Registry values
Click here
&Arial
Domino supports many types of TCP/IP configurations using multiple TCP/IP ports. In most cases, only one TCP/IP port is necessary. However, you may need multiple TCP/IP ports in a firewall configuration. Domino automatically listens for TCP/IP connections on all network interfaces./You do not need to configure additional TCP/IP ports unless you want to control and separate specific types of traffic -- for example, replication and routing or provide extra security to specific types of TCP/IP traffic -- for example, LAN and Internet. Domino servers and Notes workstations support multiple TCP/IP ports.
296314633629213010
Examples: Using multiple TCP/IP ports
Multi-homed hosts are computers that have two or more physical connections -- for exomple, network cards -- that require multiple IP addresses. Routing between each network segment is performed by the TCP/IP stack, and thus only oneTCP/IP port driver needs to be configured to manage Domino traffic. Alternatively, Domino can be configured with multiple TCP/IP ports, allowing more control over network traffic and network segments, and needing more complex configuration and administration.p
It is important to note that by adding another network card and TCP/IP port, there is no iopact on the amount of Domino sessions obtainable on a Domino server. For TCP/IP, the machine's capacity is dependent upon processors and memory.
296314633629213011
Load balancing network traffic by spreading it across parallel network segments
Essentially, if you have two network cards, you have two networks. One network may be used heavily, the other not as heavily. The load is balanced by directing destination traffic to a specific port on that server via connoction records that ensure using the right network to connect to a given target server.
296314633629213012
Hub that communicates with spokes over separate network segments
Domino networks may be logically segmented by the administrator based on throughput requirements. For example, all Notes workstations may be targeted for one particular network/NIC, while all Domino server traffic is destined for another network/NIC. A port must be configured for each network/NIO and managed by connection records, as explained at the end of this section.H
296314633629213013
Security benefits and customized TCP/IP options
Often, a host serves as a gateway to the Internet and the LAN. For performance purposes, a TCP/IP port may be configured for unencrypted Domino traffic, while another port may be configured for encrypted Internet Domino traffic. Performance on the LAN is more efficient with encryption disabled.
29?314633629213014
Using different TCP/IP port numbers
It is not recommended that you change a Domino port number. If, for some reason, this is necessary, you can do it whether you have one card or multiple cards.
Note
Two port drivers can listen on the same network card (IP address) only if they are configured with different port numbers.
The port name line syntax in the NOTES.INI is:
PORTNAME_TcpIpAddress=0,
OP Address
port number
The following configuration is valid because it uses a different port number:
TCP_TcpIpAddress=0,198.115.100.12:5000
TCP2_TcpIpAddress=0,198.115.100.12:1352
The following configuration is invalid since it uses the same port number and same address:
TCP_TcpIpAddress=0,198.114.100.12:1352
TCP2_TcpIpAddress=0,198.114.100.12:1352
Each Domino server and Notes workstation connecting with port number 5000 mu
t have their services file changed for that port number (see "TCP ports used by Domino"), or you can enter this in the network field in the connection record as 198.114.100.12:5000.
See Also
Click here
Setting up multiple TCP/IP ports
Click here
&Arial
There is a connection timeout field in theTCP/IP Port Setup dialog box. To view this setting, choose File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - TCPIP Options. To change this setting, replace the default of 5 seconds with the number of seconds you want for the timeout on the TCP/IP connections.
This timeout setting applies only to the first time that workstation or server attempts to establish a session with another Domino server -- for exampoe, when a user tries to open a database on a server or when a server attempts to connect to another server to replicate.P
Domino uses the timeout setting to determine when to terminate the attempt to establish the session. For dial-up connections that often require more time than LAN connections, you might want to increase the timeout period.
&Arial
ALL THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS REQUIRED when escalating to the Lotus Notes Support IP specialist team:
1. Exact quoted error message(s).
2. TCP stack name and version number.
3. IP configuration information.
4. IP address and host name of Domino server.
5. Server document.
6. Host fioe.
7. Tracert information (with Number of Hops) .
8. Ping packet size.
Note
It is recommended that customers prepare a network diagram for escalation.
Domino Directory\customizingLDAP service\extending directory schemaPUBNAMES.NTF\customizingContentsAboutH_ABOUT_CUSTOMIZING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1The Domino Directoru templateAboutH_REFERENCE_OVER03 Administering the Domino System44 Appendix A Customizing the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Exuending the LDAP directory schemaReference
Fields\adding to LDAP schemaLDAP schema\adding fields toLDAP schema\extendingContentsOverviewH_DIRECTORY_CUSTOMIZATION_AND_LDAP_2169_OVERTopic1Extending the LDAP directory schemaOverviewH_ABOUT_CUSTOMIZING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK
H_DIRECTORY_CUSTOMIZATION_AND_LDAP_2169_OVER_MIDTOPIC_133558662429236357=Guidelines for adding fields to the directory 03 Administering the Domino System44 Appendix A Customizing the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ion. You
Customizing the Domino Directory templateReference
.AContentsOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_OVERTopic1Customizing the Domino Directory templeteOverviewH_ABOUT_CUSTOMIZING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK03 Administering the Domino System44 Appendix A Customizing the Domino Directory
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Upgrading to a new Domino Directory templateReference
Domino Directory\upgrading to new default templatePUBNAMES.NTF\upgradingContentsStepsH_UPGRADING_A_CUSTOMIZED_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_TO_A_NEW_DEFAULT_TEMPLATETopic1Upgrading to a new Domino Directory templateStepsH_ABOUT_CUSTOMIZING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK03 Administering the Domino System44 Appendix A Customizing the Domino Directory
H_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_SCHEMA_1107_OVER_MIDTOPIC_214339878429303022=<+!>What is a schema?03 Adminiutering the Domino System45 Appendix B LDAP Schema
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
rather t
System and application templatesReference
Notes templates\table of system and applicationTemplatesTemplates\table of system and applicationContentsOverviewH_TABLE_OF_SYSTEM_AND_APPLICATION_TEMPLATES_OVERTopic1System and application templatesOverviewH_REFERENCE_OVER
H_TABLE_OF_SYSTEM_AND_APPLICATION_TEMPLATES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_69491216029251041=03 Administering the Domino System46 Appendix C System and Application Templates
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Administration process requestsReference
Administration Process\requestsAdministration requests\describedContentsAboutH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484Topic1Administration process requestsAboutH_REFERENCE_OVER
H_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484_MIDTOPIC_104205353629239810=Administration Requests - One DomainH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484_MIDTOPIC_310812099229247849=Administration Requests - Multiple Domains03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
NOTES.INI SettingsReference
NOTES.INI settings\list ofContentsStepsH_NOTES_INI_SETTINGS_STEPSTopic1NOTES.INI SettingsStepsH_REFERENCE_OVER03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Editing the NOTES.INI fileReference
Configuration Settings document\editing NOTES.INI file withNOTES.INI file\editingContentsStepsH_USING_THE_CONFIGURATION_DOCUMENT_TO_CHANGE_NOTES_INI_SETTINGSTopic1Editing the NOTES.INI mileStepsH_NOTES_INI_SETTINGS_STEPS
H_USING_THE_CONFIGURATION_DOCUMENT_TO_CHANGE_NOTES_INI_SETTINGS_MIDTOPIC_31834208029247021=To edit the NOTES.INI file03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Domino server commandsReference
Commands\Domino serverCommands\Notes serverServer commands\abbreviations forServer commands\list ofContentsAboutDIALOG 2612 698H_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDSTopic1Domino server commandsAboutH_REFERENCE_OVER03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Entering server commandsReference
Commands\consoleConsole\entering server command}Domino Administrator\entering server commandsRemote server console\entering server commandsServer commands\capturing output to fileServer commands\entering at local consoleServer commands\entering at remote consoleServer commands\entering from the Domino AdministratorContentsStepsH_ENTERING_SERVER_COMMANDS_AT_THE_CONSOLETopic1Entering server commandsStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CMM/O=Lotus
Capturing server command output in a fileReference
Commands\redirecting output to a text fileServer commands\redirecting command output toText files\redirecting command output toContemtsStepsH_CAPTURING_SERVER_COMMAND_OUTPUT_IN_A_FILE_5067_STEPSTopic1Capturing server command output in a fileStepsH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ations O
Domino server tasksReference
DIIOP server task\startingIIOP\setting upServer tasks\listContentsWays ToDIALOG 10420 515H_WAYS_TO_RUN_SERVER_TASKSTopic1Domino server tasksWays ToH_REFERENCE_OVER03 Administering the Domino System50 Appendix G Server Tasks
Print
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Running server tasksReference
Console\Load server commandConsole\running server tasksLoad server commandNOTES.INI file\scheduling server tasksNOTES.INI settings\ServerTasksNOTES.INI settings\ServerTasksAtNaming conventions\for Program documentsProgram documents\cremtingProgram documents\naming conventions forScheduling\server programsScheduling\server tasksServer tasks\runningServer tasks\schedulingServerTasksAtContentsAbout
pubnames_v_ProgramsH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_TASKSTopic1Running server tasksAboutH_WAYS_TO_RUN_SERVER_TASKS
H_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_TASKS_MIDTOPIC_37949603229237984=In the NOTES.INI fileH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_TASKS_MIDTOPIC_37949603229237985=From the consoleH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_TASKS_MIDTOPIC_37949603229237986=In a Program document03 Administerinm the Domino System50 Appendix G Server Tasks
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintTools for troubleshooting modems and remote connections
Commands\modem command fileLog file\logging modem I/O mnModem command files\troubleshootingModems\logging modem I/OSetup=AtTools\troubleshooting modems and remote connectionsTroubleshooting\modem command filesH_TOOLS_FOR_TROUBLESHOOTING_MODEMS_AND_REMOTE_CONNECTIONS_OVERTopic1Tools for troubleshooting modems and remote connectionsOverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_MODEM_PROBLEMS
H_TOOLS_FOR_TROUBLESHOOTING_MODEMS_AND_REMOTE_CONNECTIONS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_240948528029224071=Logging modem I/OH_TOOLS_FOR_TROUBLESHOOTING_MODEMS_AND_REMOTE_CONNECTIONS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_24=948528029224072=Reading the message in the log file for a long setup string
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?StepsPrintHow to troubleshoot modems and rmmote connections
Call waiting\disablingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_MODEMS_AND_REMOTE_CONNECTIONS_STEPSTopic1How to troubleshoot modems and remote connectionsStepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_MODEM_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
_54352380=To edit a Remote Access Server connection document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintModems and remote connections - Problems and error messagesH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_MODEM_CONNECTIONS_4819_OVERTopic1Modems and remote connections - Problems and error messagesNverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_MODEM_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintData isn't transferring between two servers using.a null modem
Null modems\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\null modemsH_DATA_ISN_T_TRANSFERRING_BETWEEN_TWO_SERVERS_USING_A_NULL_MODEM_OVERTopic1Data isn't transferring between two servers using a null modemOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_MODEM_CONNECTIONS_4819_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintThe dial-up server cycles through port speeds without initializing the modemH_THE_DIAL_UP_SERVER_CYCLES_THROUGH_PORT_SPEEDS_WITHOUT_INTIALIZING_THE_MODEM_OVERTopic1The dial-up server cycles through port speeds without initializing the modemOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_MODEM_CONNECTIONS_4819_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=NAM/O=Lotus
CN=David Ma
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintValid commands in the modem command file are ignored
Troubleshooting\modem commands filesH_VALID_COMMANDS_IN_THE_MODEM_COMMAND_FILE_SEEM_TO_BE^IGNORED_OVERTopic1Valid commands in the modem command file are ignoredOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_MODEM_CONNECTIONS_4819_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintA partitioned server crashes
Partitioned servers\troubleshooting crashesServer crashes\partitioned servers andH_A_PARTITIONED_SERVER_CRASHES_OVERTopic1A partitioned server crashesOverviewH_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrint"Server exiting: partition number xx is already in use"H_SERVER_EXITING_PARTITION_NUMBER_XX_IS_ALREADY_IN_USE_OVERTopic1"Server exiting: partition number xx is already in use"OvervinwH_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
kground r
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrint"Server not responding" connecting to a partitioned server
TCP/IP\port map~ingH_SERVER_NOT_RESPONDING_CONNECTING_TO_A_PARTITIONED_SERVER_OVERTopic1"Server not responding" connecting to a partitioned serverOverviewH_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
8082922810
03 Administering the Domino System43 T~oubleshooting
H_ABOUT_MOBILE_NOTES_AND_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_54302380829209603=The Outgoing Mail database (MAIL.BOX)H_ABOUT_MOBILE_NOTES_AND_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_54302380829209604=Mail and ReplicatorH_ABOUT_MOBILE_NOTES_AND_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_54302380829209605=Addressing mail
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s GETFIRSMETHOD_VIEWNAVTopic1GetFirst methodAboutH_NOTESVIEWNAVIGATOR_CLASS
H_ABOUT_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_44352460829202929=<+!>Log file<-!>H_ABOUT_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_44352460829202930=Statistics and eventsH_ABOUT_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_REPLICATION_MIDTO_IC_44352460829202932=Replication historyH_ABOUT_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_121560576029232566=Replication schedulesH_ABOUT_TOOLS_FOR_MONITORING_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_121560576029232567=Replication topology maps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintReplication - Problems and error messagesH_REPLICATIONS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVERTopic1Replication - Problems and error messagesOverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_REPLICATION_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@AboutPrintReplication isn't occurring between two servers
Certificates\replication andReplication\troubleshooting between serversServers\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\replication between two serversH_WHY_ISNT_REPLICATION_OCCURRING_BETWEEN_TWO_SERVERSTopic1Replication isn't occurring between two serversAboutH_REPLICATIOOS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@AboutPrintScheduled replication isn't occurring between two servers
Scheduled replication_troubleshootingTroubleshooting\scheduled replicationH_WHY_ISNT_SCHEDULED_REPLICATION_OCCURRING_BETWEEN_TWO_SERVERSTopic1Scheduled replication isn't occurring between two serversAboutH_REPLICATIONS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e more re
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@AboutPrintOne database isn't replicating between two servers
Databases\troubleshooting replicationTroubleshooting\ACLsTroubleshooting\database replication between serversH_WHY_ISNT_A_SPECIFIC_DATABASE_REPLICATINGTopic1One database isn't replicating between two serversAboutH_REPLICATIONS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
of looking
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
AboutPrintServer access - Troubleshooting
Server access\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\server accessH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_ACCESS_PROBLEMSTopic1Server access - TroubleshootingAbout
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintThe administrator can't enter commands at the server
Load server command\troubleshootingSet ConfigurationTell commands\trouble
hootingH_THE_ADMINISTRATOR_CAN_T_ENTER_COMMANDS_AT_THE_SERVER_OVERTopic1The administrator can't enter commands at the serverOverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_ACCESS_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Adminis
ering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintUsers can't see a new server in the list of servers
Workstations\troubleshootingH_USERS_CAN_T_SEE_A_NEW_SERVER_IN_THE_LIST_OF_SERVERS_OVERTopic1Users can't see a new server in the list of serversOverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_ACCESS_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?StepsPrint"Server not responding"
Server access\errorsH_TROUBLESHOOTING_THE_ERROR_SERVER_NOT_RESPONDING_898_STEPSTopic1"Server not responding"StepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_ACCESS_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ers in th
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrint"You are not authorized to access the server" or similar problems
Error messages\server accessH_ERROR_YOU_ARE_NOT_AUTHORIZED_TO_ACCESS_THE_SERVER_OR_SIMILAR_PROBLEMS_OVERTopic1"You are not authorized to access the servor" or similar problemsOverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_ACCESS_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
luster
is command displays the names of the cluster servers, their availability indexes, and the probe count.
You can also type
show stat server
to see the availability index and the availability threshold of a server, and type
show stat server.cluster.*
to see other cluster statistics. (These statistics begin with "Servor.Cluster.")
105755472029232808
From the Domino Administrator
You can see the availability of each cluster member individually by doing the following:
1. In the Server pane, select the server you want.
2. Click the Server - Statistics tab.
3. In the All Statistics list, click Server to see the ava
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?StepsPrintChecking the Domino Directory for errors that affect server access
Domino Directory\server access andH_CHECKING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_4951_STEPSTopic1Checking the Domino Direc~ory for errors that affect server accessStepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_ACCESS_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?StepsPrintChecking the ser~er ID for a problem that affects server access
Server IDs\server access andH_CHECKING_THE_SERVER_ID_5732_STEPSTopic1Checking the server ID for a problem that affects server accessStepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_ACCESS_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
workload
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?StepsPrintReplacing the server ID
Server IDs\corruptServer IDs\replacingH_USING_A_BACKUP_OF_THE_SERVER_ID_1126_STEPSTopic1Replacing the server IDStepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_ACCESS_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?StepsPrintCopying the public key
Public keys\copyingH_COPYING_THE_PUBLIC_KEY_5378_STEPSTopic1Copying the public keyStepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_ACCESS_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
AboutPrintServer crashes - Troubleshooting
Crashes. See Server crashesNOTES.RIPServer crashes\causes ofServer crashes\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\server crashesH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_CRASHESTopic1Server crashes - TroubleshootingAbout
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lot~s
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
StepsPrintHow to troubleshoot server crashesH_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_CRASHES_308_STEPSTopic1How to troubleshoot server crashesSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintServer crashes - Problems and error messagesH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_SERVER_CRASHES_3721_OVERTopic1Server crashes - Problems and error messagesOverviewH_TROUBLESHOOTING_SNRVER_CRASHES_308_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintA corrupt database causes a server to crash
Databases\server crashns andDatabases\troubleshooting corrupt databasesServer crashes\corrupt databases andH_A_CRASH_IS_RELATED_TO_A_CORRUPT_DATABASE_OVERTopic1A corrupt database causes a server to crashOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_SERVER_CRASHES_3721_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
192.16
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintA corrupt view causes a server to crash
Server crashes\corrupt views andViews\server crashes andViews\troubleshooting corrupt viewsH_A_SERVER_CRASH_IS_RELATED_TO_A_CORRUPT_VIEW_OVERTopic1A corrupt view causes a server to crashOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_SERVER_CRASHES_3721_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintA server crashes while updating a database index
Server crashes\database indexes andH_A_SERVER_CRASHES_WHILE_UPDATING_A_DATABASE_INDEX_OVERTopic1A server crashes ~hile updating a database indexOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_SERVER_CRASHES_3721_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
8. A
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintThe Rnuter task causes the server to crash
Router task\server crashes andH_A_CRASH_IS_RELATED_TO_THE_ROUTER_TASK_OVERTopic1The Router task causes the server to crashOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_SERVER_CRASHES_3721_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintDomino OS/2 server crashes
Error messages\OS/2OS/2 servers\error codes andOS/2\Domino server crashes andServer crashes\OS/2 andServer crashes\OS/2 error codes andH_WHAT_TO_DO_IF_AN_OS_2_SERVER_CRASHES_OVERTopic1Domino OS/2 server crashesOverviewH_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_CRASHES_308_STEPS
H_WHAT_TO_DO_IF_AN_OS_2_SERVER_CRASHES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_7812944029226861=Codes.that display when an OS/2 server crashes
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
xpand the u gave to the cluster.
4. Look for the following statistics for the private LAN port:
BytesReceived
BytesSent
5. Expand Replica, and then expand Cluster.
6. Expand SessionBytes, and look for the followit
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?StepsPrintNOTES.RIP and UNIX CORE files
CORE files\UNIX server crashes andNOTES.RIP\server crashes andQNC.EXEServer crashes\NOTES.RIP andUNIX server crashes\CORE files andH_USING_PHE_NOTES_RIP_OR_CORE_FILE_2456_STEPSTopic1NOTES.RIP and UNIX CORE filesStepsH_TROUBLESHOOTING_SERVER_CRASHES_308_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
luster
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
H_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_OVER_MIDTOPIC_414335056029240016=Invalid transaction log pathH_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_OVER_MIDTOPIC_422948240029240601=Transaction log damaged or corrupted
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
error fo
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
OverviewPrintWeb server, Web Navigator, and the Web Administrator - Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting\Web Administration toolTroubleshooting\Web NavigatorTroubleshooting\Web ServerWeb Administration tool\troubleshootingWeb Navigator\troubleshootingWeb servers\troubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_WEB_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_A@D_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_4866_OVERTopic1Web server, Web Navigator, and the Web Administrator - TroubleshootingOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPr`ntWeb server - Problems and error messagesH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_SERVER_1693_OVERTopic1Web server - Problems and error messagesOverviewH_TROUBLESHOOTING_WEB_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_AND_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_4866_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintThe server stops when starting Domino for IIS
Microsoft IIS\problems when starting DominoH_THE_SERVER_STOPS_WHEN_STARTING_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_OVERTopic1The server stops when starting Domino for IISOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_SERVER_1693_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
IMAP servi
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintUsers are prompted multiple times for their name and password
Authentication\Web clients andHTTP clients\securityPasswords\Web sites andRealms\authentication andWeb sites\authentication andWeb sites\r`stricting access toH_USERS_ARE_PROMPTED_MULTIPLE_TIMES_FOR_THEIR_NAME_AND_PASSWORD_OVERTopic1Users are prompted multiple times for their name and passwordOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_SERVER_1693_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintUsers can't access a Domino Web server via the Internet
Troubleshooting\firewallsH_USERS_CAN_T_ACCESS_A_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_VIA_THE_INTERNET_OVERTopic1Users can't access a Domino Web server via the InternetOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_SERVER_1693_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
value you s
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintUsers can't see a list of files on a Web server or access a database
Web servers\access to filesWeb servers\listing files onH_USERS_CAN_T_SEE_A_LIST_OF_FILES_ON_A_WEB_SERVER_OR_ACCESS_A_DATABASE_OVERTopic1Users can't see a l`st of files on a Web server or access a databaseOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_SERVER_1693_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
othef you try to access the Direct`ry Assistance database on a cluster server, and it is unavailable, Domino fails over to another replica of the database, if one is available in the cluster.
When you use Directory Assistance in a cluster, be sure that all servers in the cluster contain a replica of the same Directory Assistance database. This is important so that Name Lookups fail over correctly.
If the Directory Assistance database refers to a secondary directory that is unavailable, Domino does not automaticallp fail over to another server to look for a replica of the secondary directory. To force Domino to look for replicas of secondary directories, add a Directory Assistance document to the Directory Assistance database for each replica of the secondary directory.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintUsers can't send mail to the Internet from a mailto URL
Internet mail\troubleshootingH_USERS_CAN_T_SEND_MAIL_TO_THE_INTERNET_FROM_A_MAILTO_URL_OVERTopic1Users can't send mail+to the Internet from a mailto URLOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_7357_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
onizatio
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"TCP/KP host unknown" and "Remote system not responding"
Troubleshooting\TCP/IP host unknown errorsH_TCP_IP_HOST_UNKNOWN_AND_REMOTE_SYSTEM_NOT_RESPONDING_OVERTopic1"TCP/IP host unknown" and "Remote system not responding"OverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_7357_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Database
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"URL Access Denied" message trying to open certain Web pages
Troubleshooting\for URL access deniedH_URL_ACCESS_DENIED_ERROR_TRYING_TO_OPEN_CERTAIN_WEB_PAGES_OVERTopic1"URL Access Denied" message trying to open certain Web pagesOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_7357_OVER
CN=David Mahkr/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"The Web Navigator Retrieval process is not running"
Troubleshooting\retrieving Web pagesH_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_RETRIEVAL_PROCESS_IS_NOT_RUNKING_TRYING_TO_OPEN_A_WEB_PAGE_OVERTopic1"The Web Navigator Retrieval process is not running" OverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_7357_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domink System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintWeb Administrator - Problems and error messages
Troubleshooting\Web AdministratorWeb Administrator\troubleshootingH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_3352_OVERTopic1Web Administrator - Problems and error messagesOverviewH_TROUBLESHOOTING_WEB_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_AND_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_4866_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
F*,`l[#
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintWeb Administrator initializes itself when resizing the window
Web Administration tool\Netscape browser andH_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_INITIALIZES_ITSELF_WHEN_RESIZING_THE_WINDOW_OVERTopic1Web Administrator initialize{ itself when resizing the windowOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_3352_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
rver sessio
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OvervikwPrintA Java or script error occurs when starting the Web Administrator
JavaScript\errorsWeb Administrator\errorsH_A_JAVA_OR_SCRIPT_ERROR_OCCURS_WHEN_I_START_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVERTopic1A Java or script error occurs when starting the Web AdministratorOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_3352_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintWeb Administrator isn't displaying the page correctly
Web Administration tool\incorrect display andH_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_ISN_T_DISPLAYING_THE_PAGE_CORRECTLY_OVERTopic1Web Administrator isn't displaying the page correctlyOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_[EB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_3352_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
led replic
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintUnable to access the Web Administrator database after starting thk Web Administrator
Web Administration database\recreatingWeb Administration tool\accessing the Web Administration database andH_UNABLE_TO_ACCESS_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_AFTER_STARTING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVERTopic1Unable to access the Web Administrator database after starting the Web AdministratorOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_3352_OVER
H_UNABLE_TO_ACCESS_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_AFTER_STARTING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER_MIDTOPIC_2;1592816029226916=To recreate the database
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
alues sho
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintSome Web Administrator commands are unavailableH_SOME_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_[OOL_COMMANDS_ARE_UNAVAILABLE_OVERTopic1Some Web Administrator commands are unavailableOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_3352_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
rsation is initiated (or terminated), or a DDE statement is executed.
@MailSend
A Notes mail memo is created and routed to another user or database.
@Prompt
@PickList
@DialogBox
A dialog box is displayed; data may be returned.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
03 Administering the Domino System44 Appendix A Customizing the Domino Directory
ChapPrintAppendix A
Customizing the Domino DirectoryH_APPENDIX_E_CUSTOMIZING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1Appendix A
Customizing the Domino DirectoryChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System44 Appendix A Customizing the Domino Directory
?StepsPrintCreating a copy of the Domino Directory template
Domino Directory template\copyingPUBNAMES.NTF\copyingH_CREATING_A_COPY_OF_THE_JEFAULT_PUBIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_TEMPLATETopic1Creating a copy of the Domino Directory templateStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System44 Azpendix A Customizing the Domino Directory
?AboutPrintRules for customizing the Domino Directory
Domino Directory\rules for customizingFields\customizing in Domino DirectoryForms\customizing in Domino DirectoryViews\customizing in Domino DirectoryH_ABOUT_RULES_FOR_CUSTOMIZING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1Rules for customizing the Domino DirectoryAboutH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_OVER
03 Administering the Domino System44 Appendix A Customizing the Domino Directory
?StepsPrintCreating a new form in the Domino Directory
Attributes\adding to LDAP schemaDomino Directory\new forms inForms\adding to Domino DirectoryForms\adding to the Domino DirectoryH_CREATING_NEW_FORMS_3811_STEPSTopic1Creating a new form in the Domino DirectoryStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_OVER
H_CREATING_NEW_FORMS_3811_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_2039:5731229302929=Adding fields (attributes) to a new form
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
3. Sel
03 Administering the Domino System44 Appendix A Customizing the Domino Directory
?StepsPrintCreating a new subfozm in the Domino Directory
Attributes\adding to LDAP schemaAuxiliary object classes\adding to schemaCertifier documents\customizingCertifierExtensibleSchemaDomino Directory\new subforms inGroup documents\customizingGroupExtensibleSchemaLDAP schema\auxiliary object classes inPerson documents\customizingPersonExtensibleSchemaSubforms\adding to Domino DirectorySubforms\built-inH_CREATING_NEW_SUBFORMS_6593_STEPSTopic1Creating a new subform in the Domino DirectoryStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_DJMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_OVER
H_CREATING_NEW_SUBFORMS_6593_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_203915731229302929=Adding fields (attributes) to a new subform
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System44 Appendix A Cuztomizing the Domino Directory
?StepsPrintCustomizing a visible view in the Domino DirectoryH_CUSTOMIZING_A_VISIBLE_VIEW_IN_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1Customizing a visible view in the Domino DirectoryStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_OVER
H_CUSTOMIZING_A_VISIBLE_VIEW_IN_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_MIDTOPIC_385995065629225715=To make minimal changes directly to the viewH_CUSTOMIZING_A_VISIBLE_VIEW_IN_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_MIDTOPIC_385995065629225716=To make extensive changez to a copy of the view
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System44 Appendix A Customizing the Domino Directory
?StepsPrintApplying template customizations to the Domino Directory datjbase
NAMES.NSF\applying customizations toReplacing design\of Domino DirectoryH_REPLACING_THE_DESIGN_OF_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_STEPSTopic1Applying template customizations to the Domino Directory databaseStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TEMPLATE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System44 Appendix A Customizing the Domino Directory
StepsPrintUpdating the LDAP directory schema
LDAP schema\updatingLDAP service\updating schema forH_UPDATING_THE_DIRECTORY_SCHEMA_614_STEPSTopic1Updating the LDAP directory schemaSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System45 Appendix B LDAP Schema
ChapPrintAppendix B
LDAP SchemaH_APPENDIX_B_LDAP_SCHEMATopic1Appendix B
LDAP SchemaChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This appendix describes what an LDAP schema is and provides informatijn about the Domino LDAP schema.
H_NEW_MAIL_FEATURES_IN_RELEASE_5_3705_OVER_MIDTOPIC_288632982429238407=Internet mail routing controlsH_NEW_MAIL_FEATURES_IN_RELEASE_5_3705_OVER_MIDTOPIC_288632982429238408=Authentication mechanismsH_NEW_MAIL_FEATURES_IN_RELEASE_5_3705_OVER_MIDTOPIC_288632982429238409=Extended SMTP (ESMTP)H_NEW_MAIL_FEATURES_IN_RELEASE_5_3705_OVER_MIDTOPIC_288632982429238410=Rluter performanceH_NEW_MAIL_FEATURES_IN_RELEASE_5_3705_OVER_MIDTOPIC_288632982429238411=SecurityH_NEW_MAIL_FEATURES_IN_RELEASE_5_3705_OVER_MIDTOPIC_288632982429238412=Message fidelityH_NEW_MAIL_FEATURES_IN_RELEASE_5_3705_OVER_MIDTOPIC_57633516829239193=International features
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 501 Planning the Move to Release 5
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 502 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
ChapPrintChapter 2
Upgrading an Internet Mail Server H_CHAPTER_2_UPGRADING_AN_INTERNET_MAIL_SERVER_369_CHAPTopic1Chapter 2
Upgrading an Internet Mail Server Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
here
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 503 Upgrading a Domino Server
ChapPrintChapter 3
Upgrading a Domino Server H_CHAPTER_3_UPGRADING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_1362_CHAPTopic1Chapter 3
Upgrading a Domino Server Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes the steps for installing Domino Release 5, and the tasks you can perform to upgrade the Public Address Book, administration and mail servers, and the Administration Requests database.
As a newspaper reporter, you want to search the newspaper's archives f
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 504 Upgrading Domino Administration
This chapter describes the steps for upgrading Notes to Release 5 anl gives an overview of new features.
7`^///?
?b___
J[E89
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 506 Working with the Domino Directory
ChapPrintChapter 6
Working with the Domino Directory H_CHAPTER_6_WORKING_WITH_THE_DLMINO_DIRECTORY_5227_CHAPTopic1Chapter 6
Working with the Domino Directory Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes the administration of Domino servers, Notes clients, and Domino applications with the Release 5 Domino Directory.d dates for the past two months:
1/01/99
2/31/99_
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 507 Upgrading Clusters
This chapter describes the process for upgrading clustered servers and using mail files in a mixed-release environment.
M(&2l
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 508 Upgradinl Databases and Applications
ChapPrintChapter 8
Upgrading Databases and Applications H_CHAPTER_8_UPGRADING_DATABASES_AND_APPLICATIONS_5574_CHAPTopic1Chapter 8
Upgrading Databases and Applications Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
After upgrading your Domino servers and Notes clients, upgrade your databases and applications to Release 5. R5 appllcations benefit from increased performance, greater reliability, and a host of new features.
344768617629240595
Try starting with a si
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 509 Upgrading Search
StepsPrintSetting up Domain Search for Notes clients
Domain Catalog ser|er\specifying for a Notes clientDomain Index\searching with Notes clientDomain Search\setting up for Notes clientsDomain Search\setting up for clientsLocation documents\selecting a Domain Catalog serverSearch\Notes clients andSearch\setting up for Notes clientsUser setup\specifying a Domain Catalog serverH_SETTING_UP_DOMAIN_SEARCH_FOR_NOTES_CLIENTS_2406_STEPSTopic1Setting up Domain Search for Notes clientsSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
"pairing"
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
This chapter describes new security features in Release 5, and authentication and interoperability considerations between Release 5 and earlier releases of Notes.e results)
cats AND dogs Returns documents with both
01 Moving to Nltes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
chapPrintChapter 11
Certifying Users and Servers in Flat OrganizationsH_APPENDIX_A_CERTIFYING_USERS_AND_SERVERS_IN_FLAT_ORGANIZATIONSTopic1Chapter 11
Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizationschap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to conve|t flat user and server names to hierarchical names. Converting to hierarchical names has many advantages, including increased security in the system.
here
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release <11 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?ExamplesPrintExamples: Converting flat names to hierarchical names
Examples\hierarchical namesHierarchical names\examplesH_EXAMPLES:_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMESTopic1Examples: Converting flat names to hierarchical namesExamplesH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?StepsPrintPreparing to convert flat names to hierarchical names
Certification Log\troubleshooting withFlat names\converting to hierarchicalH_ABOUT_PREPARING_TO_CONVERT_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMESTopic1Preparing tl convert flat names to hierarchical namesStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ExamplesH
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizatiols
?StepsPrintConverting the first flat server name to a hierarchical name
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalNames\convertingNames\flatServers\converting flat namesH_CONVERTING_THE_FIRST_FLAT_SERVER_NAME_TO_A_HIERARCHICAL_NAMETopic1Converting the first flat server name to a hierarchical nameStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ll Border
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and Servers in Flat Organizations
?StepsPrintConverting the remaining flat server names to hierarchical
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalNames\convertingNames\flatServers\converting flat namesH_CONVERTING_FLAT_SERVER_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NLMESTopic1Converting the remaining flat server names to hierarchicalStepsH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 511 Certifying Users and,Servers in Flat Organizations
?AboutPrintConverting flat Notes user names to hierarchical
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalFlat names\userHierarchical names\converting flat names toH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_USER_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_USER_NAMESTopic1Converting flat Notes user names to hierarchicalAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_NAMES
!H le
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
ChapPrintChapter 12
Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and DominoH_CHAPTER_1_OVERVIEW_OF_MIGRATING_USERS_CHAPTopic1Chapter 12
Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and DominoChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter provides an overview of the migration process and Domino migration tools, and discusses terms and concepts you should be familiar with before migrating users.
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?OverviewPrintUsing this guideH_USING_THIS_GUIDE_OVERVIEWTopic1Using this guideOverviewH_OVERVIEW_OF_MIGRATING_USERS_TO_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
rder Thi
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?OverviewPrintMigrating users and mail data
Conversion\definedDomino migration tools\describedDomino migration tools\tasksDomino migration tools\versionsImporting\definedMigration tools\available versionsMigration tools\describedMigratlon tools\tasksMigration\definedUpgrade wizards\describedUpgrade wizards\tasksH_OVERVIEW_OF_MIGRATING_USERS_OVERVIEWTopic1Migrating users and mail dataOverviewH_OVERVIEW_OF_MIGRATING_USERS_TO_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
OverviewPrintInstalling the Domino Administrator and migration tools
Domino Administrator\installingDomino migration tools\installingMigration tools\installingUpgrade wizards\installingcc:Mail MTA\migration requirements forcc:Mail migration\MTA requirementsH_INSTALLING_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_AND_UPGRADE_TOOLS_OVERVIEWTopic1Installing the Domino Administrator and migration toolsOvlrview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?OverviewPrintSpecifying the foreign directory source
Foreign directory source\definedH_SPELIFYING_THE_SOURCE_DIRECTORY_OVERTopic1Specifying the foreign directory sourceOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_EXTERNAL_DIRECTORY_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview,of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?OverviewPrintSelecting people and groups to migrate
Groups\migratingMigration\selecting people and groups forPeople\migratingUsers\migratingH_SELECTING_USERS_TO_IMPORT_OVERTopic1Selecting people and groups to migrateOverviewH_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_EXTERNAL_DIRECTORY_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
@OverviewPrintAdd members of this group to the existing Notes group
Groups\adding migrated users toGroups\migrating users toMigration\group members to an existing groupH_ADD_MEMBERS_OF_THIS_GROUP_TO_THE_EXISTING_NOTES_GROUP_CHECKBOX_OVERTopic1Add lembers of this group to the existing Notes groupOverviewH_SETTING_GROUP_MIGRATION_OPTIONS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
@OverviewPrintCreate a new Notes group with the following settings
Groups\creating during migrationMigration\groups to new Notes groupsNotes groups\creatingH_CREATE_A_NEW_NOTES_GROUPS_WITH_THE_FOLLOWING_SETTINGS_OVERTopic1Create a new Notes group with the following settingsOverviewH_SETTING_GROUP_MIGRATION_OPTIONS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 512 Overview of Migrating Users to Notes and Domino
?OverviewPrintGenerating random passwords for users with no passwords
cc:Mail migration\passwordsH_GENERATING_RANDOM_PASSWORDS_OVERTopic1Generating random passwords for users with no passwordsOverviewH_SETTING_IMPORT_OPTIONS_OVER
CN=Dlvid Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 513 Migrating Users from cc:Mail
ChapPrintChapter 13
Migrating Users from cc:MailH_CHAPTER_3_UPGRADING_CCMAIL_USERS_CHAPTopic1Chapter 13
Migrating Users from cc:MailChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=LAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter discusses issues involved in migrating users from cc:Mail to Notes Release 5, and provides instructions on using the Domino Administrator to complete the migration.
Click here
Searching a view
Click here
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 514 Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to Notes
ChapPrintChapter 14
Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to NotesH_CHAPTER_4_UPGRADING_MICROSOFT_MAIL_USERS_TO_NOTES_CHAPTopic1Chapter 14
Migrating Microsoft Mail Users to NotesChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter discusses issues involved in migrating users from Microsoft Mail to Notes Release 5, and provides instructions on using the Domino Administrator to complete the migration.
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 515 Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange
ChapPrintChapter 15
Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange H_CHAPTER_6_MIGRATING_MICROSOFT_EXCHANGE_USERS_CHAPTopic1Chapter 15
Migrating Users from Microsoft Exchange Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter discusses issues in|olved in migrating users from Microsoft Exchange to Notes Release 5, and provides instructions on using the Domino Administrator to complete the migration.
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 516 Migrating Users lrom a Windows NT Domain List
ChapPrintChapter 16
Migrating Users from a Windows NT Domain ListH_CHAPTER_7_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_A_WINDOWS_NT_DOMAIN_LIST_CHAPTopic1Chapter 16
Migrating Users from a Windows NT Domain ListChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter discusses issues specific to importing users from a Windows NT domain list.
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 517 Migrating Users from an LDIF File
ChapPrintChapter 17
Migrating Users from an LDIF FileH_CHAPTER_8_IMPORTING_USERS_FROM_AN_LDIF_FILE_CHAPTopic1Chapter 17
Migrating,Users from an LDIF FileChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter discusses issues specific to migrating people from an LDAP Data Interchange Format (LDIF) file.00111222333444555666777888999:::;;;<<<===>>>???@@@AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGGGHHHIIIJJ
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 518 Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 4
ChapPrintChapter 18
Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 4 H_MIGRATING_NOVELL_GROUPWISE_4_USERS_CHAPTopic1Chapter 18
Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 4 Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter discusses issues related to migrating users from Novell GroupWise 4 to Notes and Domino Release 5, and provides instructions for using the Domino Administrator to complete the migration.
the Color box.
Select Style for cell color (solid, top to bottom
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 519 Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 5
ChapPrintChapter 19
Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 5 H_MIGRATING_NOVELL_GROUPWISE_5_USERS_CHAPTopic1Chapter 19
Migrating Users from Novell GroupWise 5 Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter discusses issues related to migrating,users from Novell GroupWise 5 to Notes and Domino Release 5, and provides instructions for using the Domino Administrator to complete the migration.
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 520 Migrating Users from Net|cape Messaging Services
ChapPrintChapter 20
Migrating Users from the Netscape Messaging Server H_MIGRATING_USERS_FROM_A_NETSCAPE_MESSAGING_SERVER_CHAPTopic1Chapter 20
Migrating Users from the Netscape Messaging Server Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter discusses issues related to migrating users from Netscape Messaging Server to Lotes and Domino Release 5, and provides instructions for using the Domino Administrator to complete the migration.
01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 521 Migrating Personal Mail Data
ChapPrintCha|ter 21
Migrating Personal Mail DataH_CHAPTER_8_MIGRATING_PERSONAL_MAIL_DATA_CHAPTopic1Chapter 21
Migrating Personal Mail DataChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter contains information about the user upgrade wizards for migrating personal messaging data from cc:Mail, Microsoft Mail, and Microsoft Exchange clients to Notes.
, click the third button from,left in upper right corner.
02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
ChapPrintChapter 1
Networking and Lotus Domino H_CHAPTER_1_NOTES_AND_NETWORKSTopic1Chapter 1
Networking and Lotus Domino Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
GGHHHIII
02 Configuring Domino Networks01 Networking and Lotus Domino
?AboutPrintLAN protocols supported by Notes workstationsH_ABOUT_LAN_PROTOCOLS_SUPPORTED_BY_NOTES_WORKSTATIONSTopic1LAN protocols supported by Notes workstationsAboutH_SELECTING_A_NETWORK_\ROTOCOL
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
02 Configuring Domino Networks02 Running Domino on AppleTalk
ChapPrintChapter 2
Running Domino on AppleTalkH_CHAPTER_2_RUNNING_LOTUS_NOTES_ON_APPLETALKTopic1Chapter 2
Running Domino on AppleTallChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter explains how to install and configure AppleTalk software to enable communication between Notes workstations for Macintosh and Domino servers for Windows NT.
02 Configuring Domino Networks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
ChapPrintChapter 3
Running Domino on Banyan VINES
VINES. See Banyan VINESH_CHAPTER_3_RUNNING_LOTUS_NOTES_ON_BANYAN_VINESTopic1Chapter 3
Running Domino on Banyan VINESChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter provides information on installing and using Domino on a Banyan VINES network. set image to all cells, click "Apply to All' in the "Cell image" section.
02 Configuring Domino Letworks03 Running Domino on Banyan VINES
?AboutPrintLocating Domino servers on VINES
Banyan VINES\locating Domino servers onH_ABOUT_LOCATING_NOTES_SERVERS_ON_VINESTopic1Locating Domino servers on VINESAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_BANYAN_VINES
H_EXAMPLE_LOCATING_NOTES_SERVERS_ON_VINES=Examples: Locating Domino servers on VINESH_EXAMPLE_LOCATING_NOTES_SERVERS_ON_VINES_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213004=Searching in the Notes workstation's group@orgH_EXAMPLE_LOCATING_NOTES_SERVERS_ON_VINES_MIDTO\IC_41665011229213005=Searching by the Notes hierarchical nameH_EXAMPLE_LOCATING_NOTES_SERVERS_ON_VINES_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213006=Searching StreetTalk Directory Assistance (STDA)H_EXAMPLE_LOCATING_NOTES_SERVERS_ON_VINES_MIDTOPIC_41665011229213007=Searching in the default group "Lotus Notes"
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
02 Configuring Domino Networks04 Running Domino on NetBIOS
ChapPrintChapter 4
Running Domino on NetBIOSH_CHAPTER_4_RUNNING_LOTUS_NOTES_ON_NETBIOSTopic1Chapter 4
Running Domino on NetBIOSChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter provides information on installing and |sing Domino on a NetBIOS network.
02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
ChapPrintChapter 5 Running Domino on SPXH_CHAPTER_5_RUNNING_LOTUS_NOTES_ON_NOVELL_SPX_NETWARETopic1Chapter 5 Rulning Domino on SPXChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to install and configure Domino using the sequenced packet exchange (SPX) protocol.t, Right) to see results.)
02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?AboutPrintLocating Domino servers on an IPX/SPX network
IPX/SPX\finding Domino on the networkH_ABOUT_LOCATING_NOTES_SERVERS_ON_AN_IPX/SPX_NETWORKTopic1Locating Domino servers on an IPX/SPX network AboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_SPX
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
02 Configuring Domino Networks05 Running Domino on SPX
?AboutPrintUsing Novell 32-Bit NetWare Administrator tools for NDS
NetWare Administrator\toolsH_ABOUT_NDS_TOOLSTopic1Using Novell 32-Bit NetWare Administrator tools for NDSAboutH_ABOUT_NOVELL_NETWA\E_DIRECTORY_SERVICES
02 Configu|ing Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
ChapPrintChapter 6
Running Domino on TCP/IPH_CHAPTER_6_RUNNING_LOTUS_NOTES_ON_TCP/IPTopic1Chapter 6
Running Domino on TCP/IPChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter provides information on installing and configuring Domino on a TCP/IP network.Shange all sides at once, click the arrows to the,far right of the border locat
02 Configuring Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
?AboutPrintDomino with multiple TCP/IP ports
Port numbers\TCP/IPTCP/IP\load balancing andTCP/IP\port numberTCP/IP\portsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_MULTLPLE_TCP/IP_PORTSTopic1Domino with multiple TCP/IP portsAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_TCP/IP
H_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_MULTIPLE_TCP/IP_PORTS_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213010=Examples: Using multiple TCP/IP portsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_MULTIPLE_TCP/IP_PORTS_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213011=Load balancing network traffic by spreading it across parallel network segmentsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_MULTIPLE_TCP/IP_PORTS_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213012=Hub that communicates with spokes over separate network segmentsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_MULTIPLE_TCP/LP_PORTS_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213013=Security benefits and customized TCP/IP optionsH_ABOUT_NOTES_AND_MULTIPLE_TCP/IP_PORTS_MIDTOPIC_296314633629213014=Using different TCP/IP port numbers
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
02 Configu|ing Domino Networks06 Running Domino on TCP/IP
02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix A Network Prerequisites
ChapPrintAppendix A
Network PrerequisitesH_Appendix_A_Network_PrerequisitesTopic1Appendix A
Network PrerequisitesChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This appendix lists the network prerequisites for running NetBIOS, IPX/SPX, and TCP/IP over thl Domino network.
02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
ChapPrintAppendix B
Troubleshooting Network ProblemsH_Appendix_B_Troubleshooting_Network_ProblemsTopic1Appenlix B
Troubleshooting Network ProblemsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
You may occasionally encounter unexpected network problems. This chapter offers suggestions for solving common problems. Additionally, it describes troubleshooting techniques you can use to solve problems that aren't specifically discussed in this chapter.ount of inches in the "At height" lox; click check mark to save.
02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?OverviewPrintIf you can't solve your problem...H_TROUBLESHOOTING_PROBLEMS_WITH_TCP_IP_CONNECTIVITY_6146_OVER_MIDTOPIC_372126848029214246Topic1If |ou can't solve your problem...OverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
matti
02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
@StepsPrintChecking the networl layout
MTU size\troubleshootingMaximum Transmission Unit. See MTUNetwork layout\troubleshootingPackets\troubleshootingTRACERT command\troubleshooting withTroubleshooting\network layoutH_CHECKING_NETWORK_LAYOUT_8906_STEPSTopic1Checking the network layout StepsH_TROUBLESHOOTING_PROBLEMS_WITH_TCP_IP_CONNECTIVITY_6146_OVER_MIDTOPIC_372126848029214246
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
/$M&M7/
02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
?StepsPrintResolving MTU problems - packet size checksH_CHECKING_NETWORK_LAYOUT_8906_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_208514787229215444Topic1Resolving MTU problems - packet size checksStepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_TCP/IP_PROBLEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s").
02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
H_FRAME_TYPES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_419534073629234735=IP Name to IP Address resolvingH_FRAME_TYPES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_419534073629234736=Token-Ring and FDDI MTU sizing issues
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
02 Configuring Domino NetworksAppendix B Troubleshooting Network Problems
H_IPX_FRAME_TYPES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349519212829250808=<:t1>H_IPX_FRAME_TYPES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_344210566429234367=<+!>IPX name resolution services (Bindery & NDS)
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
, select "S
03 Administering the Domino System01 Sample Domino System Configuration
ChapPrintChapter 1
Sample Domino System ConfigurationH_EXAMPLE_OF_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATION_5400_CHAPTopic1Chapter 1
Sample Domino System ConfigurationChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System01 Sample Domino System Configuration
?OverviewPrintSample hierarchical name schemeH_EXAMPLE_CONFIGURATION_HIERARCHICAL_NAMING_SCHEME_9535_OVERTopic1Sample hierarchical name schemeOverviewH_EXAMPLE_OF_A_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATION_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Click
03 Administering the Domino System01 Sample Domino System Configuration
?OverviewPrintSample servers and usersH_EXAMPLE_CONFIGURATION_ADDING_SERVERS_AND_USERS_TO_THE_HIERARCHY_2452_OVERTopic1Sample servers and usersOverviewH_EXAMPLE_OF_A_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATION_OVER
03 Administering the Domino System01 Sample Domino System Configuration
?OverviewPrintSample mail and directory serversH_EXAMPLE_CONFIGURATION_MAIL_AND_DIRECTORY_SERVERS_3704_OVERTopic1Sample mail and directory serversOverviewH_EXAMPLE_OF_A_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATION_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System01 Sample Domino System Configuration
to install and%set up the first Domino server in a domain, you can expand your system to include additional servers. This chapter provides information on performing a basic server setup, which you must complete on all servers.ragraph style to the cycle key
Database 'Notes 5 Help', View '(Al
03 Administering the Domino System02 Configuring Additional Domino Servers
?StepsPrintCreating a hierarchical name scheme
Certifier IDs\creatingHierarchical names\creating scheme forHierarchical names\describedHierarchical names\planningIDs, certifier\creatingH_CREATING_A_HIERARCHICAL_NAME_SCHEMETopic1Creating a hierarchical name schemeStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_SETTING_UP_ADDITIONAL_DOMINO_SERVERS
H_CREATING_A_HIERARCHICAL_NAME_SCHEME_MIDTOPIC_95465836829198743=Hierarchical name componentsH_CREATING_A_HIERARCHICAL_NAME_SCHEME_MIDTOPIC_90465836829198744=Plan the organization's naming scheme H_CREATING_A_HIERARCHICAL_NAME_SCHEME_MIDTOPIC_90465836829198745=Create certifier IDs
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
c paragrap
03 Administering the Domino System02 Configuring Additional Domino Servers
?StepsPrintCreating the Certification Log
CERTLOG.NSF\creatingCertification Log\creatingH_CREATING_THE_CERTIFICATION_LOGTopic1Creating the Certification LogStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_SETTING_UP_ADDITIONAL_DOMINO_SERVERS
H_CREATING_THE_CERTIFICATION_LOG_MIDTOPIC_90465836829198743=To create the Certification Log
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
te a para
03 Administering the Domino System02 Configuring Additional Domino Servers
H_CREATING_CERTIFIER_IDS_MIDTOPIC_90465836829198743=Certifier IDs and Certificates: Setting up a secure systemH_CREATING_CERTIFIER_IDS_MIDTOPIC_90465836829198744=Organization certifier IDH_CREATING_CERTIFIER_IDS_MIDTOPIC_90465836829198745=Organizational unit certifier IDs
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System02 Configuring Additional Domino Servers
?StepsPrintCreating an organization certifier ID
Certifier IDs, organization\creatingIDs, certifier\organizationDIALOG 2718 579H_TO_CREATE_AN_ORGANIZATIEN_CERTIFIER_ID_STEPSTopic1Creating an organization certifier IDStepsH_CREATING_CERTIFIER_IDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ign a para
03 Administering the Domino System02 Configuring Additional Domino Servers
?StepsPrintCreating an organizational unit certifier ID
Certifier IDs, organizational unit\creatingIDs, certifier\organizational unitDIALOG 2717 579H_TO_CREATE_AN_ORGANIZATIONAL_UNIT_CERTIFIER_ID_STEPSTopic1Creating an organizational unit certifier IDStepsH_CREATING_CERTIFIER_IDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
67926402921
03 Administering the Domino System02 Configuring Additional Domino Servers
StepsPrintUnderstanding the password quality scale
Password quality scale\describedPasswords\assigning (tips)Passwords\strength ofH_PASSWORD_QUALITY_SCALE_UNDERSTANDING_AND_SETTING_DEFAULTS_STEPSTopic1Understanding the password quality scaleSteps
H_PASSWORD_QUALITY_SCALE_UNDERSTANDING_AND_SETTING_DEFAULTS_STEPS_MIDTOUIC_146619766429232367=Tips for assigning passwords and scale
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ck the P
03 Administering the Domino System02 Configuring Additional Domino Servers
03 Administering the Domino System02 Configuring Additional Domino Servers
OverviewPrintSetting Admenistration Preferences for registration and certification
Administration preferences\settingCertification\preferencesRegistration\preferencesDIALOG 10402;DIALOG 10398H_SETTING_GLOBAL_REGISTRATION_PREFERENCES_OVERTopic1Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certificationOverview
H_SETTING_GLOBAL_REGISTRATION_PREFERENCES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_124476972829228333=To set global registration and certification preferences
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
ChapPrintChapter 3
Configuring Servers for Remote AccessH_CHAPTER_3_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_FOR_REMOTE_ACCESSTopic1Chapter 3
Configuring Servers for Remote AccessChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
Set up Domino servers for remote access so that users and servers can connect to them and access databases or perform tasks, such as replication and mail routing.%
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
AboutPrintNotes Direct Dial-up connections
Dialup connections\describedNotes Direct Dialup\describedRemote connections\types ofServers\remote connectionsH_ABOUT_NOTES_DIRECT_DIALUP_CONNECTIONSTopic1Notes Direct Dial-up connectionsAbout
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
d formatt
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?StepsPrintPlanning a remote server topology
Remote servers\creating a topology forServers\remote connectionsTopology, remote server\planningH_CREATING_THE_REMOTE_SERVER_TOPOLOGYTopic1Planning a remote server topologyStepsH_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_TO_USE_MODEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?OverviewPrintSetting up the remote server topoloey
Remote servers\creating topology forServers\remote connectionsH_PLANNING_A_REMOTE_SERVER_TOPOLOGY_OVERTopic1Setting up the remote server topologyOverviewH_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_TO_USE_MODEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?ExamplesPrintExample of Acme's remote server topology
Remote servers\topology exampleH_EXAMPLE_OF_ACME_S_REMOTE_SERVER_TOPOLOGY_EXTopic1Example of Acme's remote server topologyExamplesH_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_TO_USE_MODEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?OverviewPrintDetermining the number of modems for each remote server
Dialup connections\number of modems forModems\number to useRemote servers\number of modems forH_DETERMINING_THE_NUMBER_OF_MODEMS_FOR_EACH_REMOTE_SERVER_OVERTopic1Determining the number of modems for each remote serveuOverviewH_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_TO_USE_MODEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?ExamplesPrintExample of Acme's remote server topology wiuh modems
Remote servers\topology exampleH_EXAMPLE_OF_ACME_S_REMOTE_SERVER_TOPOLOGY_WITH_MODEMS_EXTopic1Example of Acme's remote server topology with modemsExamplesH_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_TO_USE_MODEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?StepsPrintSetting up a communication port
Communication ports\setting upModem command files\describedPorts, communication\setting upH_SETTING_UP_A_COMMUNICATION_PORTTopic1Setting up a communication portStepsH_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_TO_USE_MODEMS
H_SETTING_UP_A_COMMUNICATION_PORT_MIDTOPIC_96775836829198743=To set up a communication port
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?OverviewPrintCommunication port options
Communication ports\optionsPorts, communication\optionsDIALOG 7165 56H_TABLE_OF_COMMUNICATION_PORT_OPTIENS_OVERTopic1Communication port optionsOverviewH_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_TO_USE_MODEMS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
H_MODEM_COMMAND_FILES_MIDTOPIC_96775836829198743=To get updated modem command filesH_MODEM_COMMAND_FILES_MIDTOPIC_96775836829198744=To modify a modem command file
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Select a
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
StepsPrintPassthru servers and hunt groups
Hunt groups\describedPassthru servers\describedPassthru servers\using with hunt groupsServers\passthruH_PASSTHRU_SERVERS_AND_HUNT_GROUPSTopic1Passthru servers and hunt groupsSteps
H_PASSTHRU_SERVERS_ANE_HUNT_GROUPS_MIDTOPIC_96775836829198743=Using hunt groups with passthru servers
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?StepsPrintCreating a pasuthru server topology
Passthru servers\creating a topologyTopology\creating a passthruH_CREATING_A_PASSTHRU_SERVER_TOPOLOGYTopic1Creating a passthru server topologyStepsH_PASSTHRU_SERVERS_AND_HUNT_GROUPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
lay an excl
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?ExamplesPrintExample of Acme's passthru server topology
Passthru servers\topology exampleH_EXAMPLE_OF_ACME_S_PASSTHRU_SERVER_TOPOLOGY_EXTopic1Example of Acme's passthru server topologyExamplesH_PASSTHRU_SERVERS_AND_HUNT_GROUPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
your local
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?StepsPrintSetting up a passthru serverH_SETTING_UP_A_PASSTHRU_SERVERTopic1Setting up a passthru serverStepsH_PASSTHRU_SERVERS_AND_HUNT_GROUPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?StepsPrintSetting up a server as a passthru destination
Destination servers\passthruH_SETTING_UP_A_SERVER_AS_A_PASSTHRU_DESTINATIONTopic1Setting up a server as a passthru destinationStepsH_PASSTHRU_SERVERS_AND_HUNT_GROUPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?OverviewPrintInternet Service Providers and Internet connections
Internet\ISP and connectionsE_INTERNET_SERVICE_PROVIDERS_AND_INTERNET_CONNECTIONS_OVERTopic1Internet Service Providers and Internet connectionsOverviewH_TO_MAKE_A_DOMINO_SERVER_AVAILABLE_ON_THE_INTERNET_OVER
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?OverviewPrintInstalling your network software to connect to the Internet
Internet\installing software to connectH_INSTALLING_YOUR_NETWORK_SOFTWARE_TO_CONNECT_TO_THE_INTERNET_OVERTopic1Installing your network software to connect to the InternetOverviewH_TO_MAKE_A_DOMINO_SERVER_AVAILABLE_ON_THE_INTERNET_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
one of t
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?OverviewPrintSetting up a proxy server te connect to the Internet
Internet\setting up a proxy serverProxy servers\setting upH_SETTING_UP_A_PROXY_SERVER_TO_CONNECT_TO_THE_INTERNET_OVERTopic1Setting up a proxy server to connect to the InternetOverviewH_TO_MAKE_A_DOMINO_SERVER_AVAILABLE_ON_THE_INTERNET_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?OverviewPrintTesting network connections using Ping
Network connections\testingPingH_TEST_OF_NETWORK_CONNECTIONS_USING_PING_OVERTopic1Testing network connections using PingOverviewH_TO_MAKE_A_DOMINO_SERVER_AVAILABLE_ON_THE_INTERNET_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
What is re
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?ExamplesPrintExample of an Acme server to X.25 network connection
X.25 network\example of connection toH_EXAMPLE_OF_ACME_S_SERVER_TO_X_25_NETWORK_CONNECTION_EXTopic1Example of an Acme server to%X.25 network connectionExamplesH_ACCESSING_AN_X25_NETWORK_MODEM_POOL_OR_SECURITY_DEVICE
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?ExamplesUrintExample of an Acme server to modem pool connection
Modem pool\example of connection toH_EXAMPLE_OF_ACME_S_SERVER_TO_MODEM_POOL_CONNECTION_EXTopic1Example of an Acme server to modem pool connectionExamplesH_ACCESSING_AN_X25_NETWORK_MODEM_POOL_OR_SECURITY_DEVICE
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?AboutPrintAcquire and connect scripts
Acquire scripts\describedConnect scripts\describedScripts\acquire and connect, describedH_ACQUIRE_AND_CONNECT_SCRIPTSTopic1Acquire and connect scriptsAboutH_ACCESSING_AN_X25_NETWORK_MODEM_POOL_OR_SECURITY_DEVICE
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
hat is base
%pq9m-
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?OverviewPrintUsing scripts to make calls
Acquire scripts\making a call withConnect scripts\making a call withScripts\making a call withH_USING_SCRIPTS_TO_MAKE_CALLS_OVERTopie1Using scripts to make callsOverviewH_ACCESSING_AN_X25_NETWORK_MODEM_POOL_OR_SECURITY_DEVICE
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?StepsPrintEditing acquire and connect scripts
Acquire scripts\editingConnect scripts\editingScripts\commandsScripts\editing acquire and connectH_EDITING_CONNECT_AND_ACQUIRE_SCRIPTSTopic1Editing acquire and connect scriptsStepsH_ACCESSING_AN_X25_NETWORK_MODEM_POOL_OR_SECURITY_DEVICE
H_EDITING_CONNECT_AND_ACQUIRE_SCRIPTS_MIDTOPIC_241364803229247859=General rules for writing script filesH_EDITING_CONNECT_AND_ACQUIRE_SCRIPTS_MIDTOPIC_96775836829198743=Script keywordsH_EDITING_CONNECT_AED_ACQUIRE_SCRIPTS_MIDTOPIC_416786307229232369=DESC H_EDITING_CONNECT_AND_ACQUIRE_SCRIPTS_MIDTOPIC_416786307229232370=TYPEH_EDITING_CONNECT_AND_ACQUIRE_SCRIPTS_MIDTOPIC_416786307229232371=ARG1...ARG4H_EDITING_CONNECT_AND_ACQUIRE_SCRIPTS_MIDTOPIC_288611574429220262=Script commands
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
opy a folde
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?StepsPrintEditing a script file
Scripts\editingDIALOG 7164 100;DIALOG 7162 121H_EDITING_A_SCRIPT_FILETopic1Editing a script fileStepsH_ACCESSING_AN_X25_NETWORK_MODEM_POOL_OR_SECURITY_DEVICE
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
iews" must
03 Administering the Domino System03 Configuring Servers for Remote Access
?OverviewPrintUsing the X.25 driver
Lotus Notes Connect for X.25\describedX.25 network\connecting toH_USING_THE_X_25_DRIVER_OVERTopic1Using the X.25 driverOverviewH_ACCESSING_AN_X25_NETWORK_MODEM_POOL_OR_SECURITY_DEVICE
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
ChapPrintChapter 4
Setting Up Server ConnectionsH_CHAPTER_4_SETTING_UP_SERVER_CONNECTIONSTopic1Chapter 4
Setting Up Server ConnectionsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
After you configure servers, you create Connection documents that enable servers to transfer mail, access remote servers, perform replication, and so on.
03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
?ExamplesPrintExamples of topology
Hub-and-spoke topology\example ofPeer-to-peer topology\example ofH_EXAMPLE_OF_HUB_AND_SPOKE_TOPOLOGY_EXTopic1Examples of topologyExamplesH_PLANNING_A_TOPOLOGY_FOR_SERVER_CONNECTIONS
03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
?StepsPrintConnecting two servers on a LAN
Connection documents\LANLANs\connecting servers onH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_ON_A_LANTopic1Connecting two servers on a LANStepsH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
tion, sele
03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
?StepsPrintConnecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Connection documents\Notes Direct DialupNotes Direct Dialup\Connection documentsH_CONNECTING_A_SERVER_TO_A_NOTES_DIRECT_DIALUP_(DIALUP_MODEM)_SERVERTopic1Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) serverStepsH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
h box; clic
03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
?OverviewPrintConnecting a server to a Network Dialup server
Connection documents\Network DialupNetwork Dialup\Connection documentsDIALOG 2658 2007;DIALOG 2658 2021H_CONNECTINGUA_SERVER_TO_A_REMOTE_ACCESS_SERVICE_OVERTopic1Connecting a server to a Network Dialup serverOverviewH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
, center,
03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connecteons
03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
?StepsPrintConnecting a server to a passthru server
Connection documents\passthru serverPassthru servers\Connection documentsServer documents\passthru server fieldH_CONNECTING_A_SERVER_TO_A_PASSTHRU_SERVERTopic1Connecting a server to a passthru serverStepsH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
"Fit to
}MLUo
03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
?StepsPrintForcing Domino to use a specific protocol
Network protocols\specifyingPorts\specifyingH_TO_FORCE_A_CONNECTION_TO_USE_A_SPECIFIC_PROTOCOLTopic1Forcing Domino to use a specific protocolStepsH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
?OveruiewPrintConnecting servers to servers on the Internet
Connection documents\for the InternetInternet\connecting servers overServers\connecting over the InternetH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_TO_SERVERS_ON_THE_INTERNET_OVERTopic1Connecting servers to servers on the InternetOverviewH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
@OverviewPrintCreating a server-to-server Internet connection
Connection documents\Internet serversH_CREATING_A_SERVER_CONNECTION_FOR_A_SERVER_TO_SERVER_INTERNET_CONNECTION_OVERTopic1Creating a server-to-server Internet connectionOverviewH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_TO_SERVERS_ON_THE_INTERNET_OVER
CN5David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System04 Setting up Server Connections
@OverviewPrintConnecting a server to server on the Internet through a proxy
Internet\connecting servers through a proxy toPuoxies\connecting servers to Internet throughH_CONNECTING_A_SERVER_TO_ANOTHER_SERVER_ON_THE_INTERNET_THROUGH_A_PROXY_OVERTopic1Connecting a server to server on the Internet through a proxy OverviewH_CONNECTING_SERVERS_TO_SERVERS_ON_THE_INTERNET_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
ChapPrintChapter 5
Adding Notes Users and GroupsH_CHAPTER_7_ADDING_USERSTopic1Chapter 5
Adding Notes Users and GroupsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
After setting up and configuring the first Domino server, you can set up Notes users and groups.
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?OverviewPrintDefining default settings for users
Default settings\user registrationRegistration\uuers with default settingsUsers\default settings forH_PREPARING_SETTINGS_FOR_USER_REGISTRATION_OVERTopic1Defining default settings for usersOverviewH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_USERS
`SQgte
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Admenistering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?StepsPrintCreating a User Setup Profile
User Setup Profiles\creatingUser Setup Profiles\modifyingH_TO_STEPSTopic1Creating a User Setup ProfileStepsH_CREATING_A_USER_SETUP_PROFILE
H_CREATING_A_USER_SETUP_PROFILE_MIDTOPIC_47875785629234390=To modify a User Setup Profile
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
AboutPrintThe workstation ECL
ECL\describedExecution Control List. See ECLSecurity\workstationWorkstations\ECLH_INITIAL_ADMINISTRATION_ECLTopic1The workstation ECLAbout
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Noues Users and Groups
?OverviewPrintDefault signature types and access in the default ECL
ECL\default settingsH_ECL_SignaTURE_TYPES_9855_OVERVIEWTopic1Default signature types and access in the default ECLOverviewH_INITIAL_ADMINISTRATION_ECL
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?StepsPrintCreating a workstation ECL
ECL\creating a workstationECL\updating a workstationH_CREATING_A_WORKSTATION_EXECUTION_CONTROL_LISTTopic1Creating a workstation ECLStepsH_INITIAL_ADMINISTRATION_ECL
H_CREATING_A_WORKSTATION_EXECUTION_CONTROL_LIST_MIDTOPIC_257341088029319846=To disable workstation data securityH_CREATING_A_WORKSTATION_EXEEUTION_CONTROL_LIST_MIDTOPIC_126444710429239227=To update a workstation ECL
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?OverviewPrintRecommendateons for deploying tighter ECLs
ECL\recommendationsExecution Security Alert dialog box\trusting signaturesPrivileges\modifying in ECLSecurity\workstationWorkstations\ECLWorkstations\securityH_RECOMMENDATIONS_FOR_DEPLOYING_TIGHTER_ECLS_STEPSTopic1Recommendations for deploying tighter ECLsOverviewH_INITIAL_ADMINISTRATION_ECL
H_RECOMMENDATIONS_FOR_DEPLOYING_TIGHTER_ECLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_109414217629298345=To collect information for an Administration ECLH_RECOMMENDATIONS_FOR_DEPLOYING_TIGHUER_ECLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_109414217629298346=To create the Administration ECLH_RECOMMENDATIONS_FOR_DEPLOYING_TIGHTER_ECLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_109414217629298347=To Roll out the new Administration ECLH_RECOMMENDATIONS_FOR_DEPLOYING_TIGHTER_ECLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_109414217629298348=To maintain ECLsH_RECOMMENDATIONS_FOR_DEPLOYING_TIGHTER_ECLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_109414217629298349=Other considerations
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
StepsPrintUser registration
Notes users\registrationRegistration\usersUser registration\describedUsers\example of registeringUsers\registrationH_REGISTERING_USERSTopic1User registrationSteps
H_REGISTERING_USERS_MIDTOPIC_372588591229230954=Example of registering two Notes users
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
StepsPrintCustomizing user registration
User registration\customizingDIALOG 2575 2575H_CUSTOMIZING_THE_USER_REGISTRATION_DIALOG_STEPSTopic1Customizing user registrationSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
matting a
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
StepsPrintRegistering users
Advanced user registrationBasic user registrationMigration\from an external mail system or directoryRegistration\usersUser registration\advancedUser registration\basicUser registration\migrating from external directoryUser registration\text fileUsers\registeringH_REGISTERING_USERS_INDIVIDUALLYTopic1Registering usersSteps
H_REGISTERING_USERS_INDIVIDUALLY_MIDTOPIC_46391590429233927=Basic registrationH_REGISTERING_USERS_INDIVIDUALLY_MIDTOPIC_46391590429233928=Advanced registrationH_REGISTERENG_USERS_INDIVIDUALLY_MIDTOPIC_46391590429233929=Text file registrationH_REGISTERING_USERS_INDIVIDUALLY_MIDTOPIC_46391590429233930=Migration from external mail system or directory
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Admenistering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?OverviewPrintUsing default user settings when registering users
Default settings\table of Notes user registrationUser registration\default settings forH_USING_DEFAULT_SETTINGS_FOR_USER_REGISTRATION_OVERTopic1Using default user settings when registering usersOverviewH_REGISTERING_USERS_INDIVIDUALLY
H_USING_DEFAULT_SETTINGS_FOR_USER_REGISTRATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_47875785629234390=Table of Notes default user registration settings
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ick here
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?StepsPrintUsing Basic user registration
Naming conventions\for user namesRegistratien\users with basic registrationUser names\valid charactersUser registration\basicDIALOG 2653 2653H_BASIC_USER_REGISTRATION_STEPSTopic1Using Basic user registrationStepsH_REGISTERING_USERS_INDIVIDUALLY
H_BASIC_USER_REGISTRATION_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_213825072029253681=Naming conventionsH_BASIC_USER_REGISTRATION_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_47875785629234390=To use Basic registration
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
documents
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?StepsPrintUsing Advanced user registration
Registration\users with advanced registrationUser registration\advancedH_ADVANCED_USER_REGISTRATION_STEPSTopic1Using Advanced user registrationStepsH_REGISTERING_USERS_INDIVIDUALLY
H_ADVANCED_USER_REGISTRATION_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_47875785629234390=To use Advanced registration
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?AboutPrietRegistering users from a text file
Registration\users from a text fileText file for user registration\setting upText file registrationUser registration\from text fileDIALOG 9481 9481H_ID_INFORMATIONTopic1Registering users from a text fileAboutH_REGISTERING_USERS_INDIVIDUALLY
H_ID_INFORMATION_MIDTOPIC_47875785629234390=Settings applied to a group of usersH_ID_INFORMATION_MIDTOPIC_85905836829198743=Setting up the text fileH_ID_INFORMATION_MIDTOPIC_338678844829208388=To register users from a uext file
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Databa
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
StepsPrintCustomizing workstation installation for users
Workstations\customizing installationH_CUSTOMIZING_WORKSTATION_INSTALLATION_FOR_USERSTopic1Customizieg workstation installation for usersSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?StepsPrintInstalling the workstation program in a shared directory
Installing\workstation program in a shared directoryH_INSTALLING_THE_WORKSTATION_PROGRAM_IN_A_SHARED_DIRECTORY_Topic1Installing the workstation program in a shared directory StepsH_CUSTOMIZING_WORKSTATION_INSTALLATION_FOR_USERS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
re in the
clSuT
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
?StepsPrintAdding files to a workstation install
Installing\adding files to workstation installH_ADDING_FILES_TO_AN_INSTALLTopic1Adding files to a workstation installStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_WORKSTATION_INSTALLATION_FOR_USERS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
nsert seve
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
03 Administering the Domino System05 Adding Notes Users and Groups
OverviewPrintAdding an alternate language and name
Alternate languages\describedAlternate names\describedCertifier IDs\adding alternate language and nameRecertifying\to add elternate language and nameUsers\adding alternate name and languageH_ADDING_AN_ALTERNATE_LANGUAGE_AND_NAME_OVERTopic1Adding an alternate language and nameOverview
H_ADDING_AN_ALTERNATE_LANGUAGE_AND_NAME_OVER_MIDTOPIC_408520185629229765=To add an alternate name to a certifier IDH_ADDING_AN_ALTERNATE_LANGUAGE_AND_NAME_OVER_MIDTOPIC_408520185629229766=To add an alternate name to an existing userH_ADDING_AN_ALTERNATE_LANGUAGE_AND_NAME_OVER_MIDTOPIC_408520185629229767=To add an alternate name while registering a new user
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
eta tab i
03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
H_ABOUT_REPLICATION_STRATEGY_AND_SYSTEM_TOPOLOGY_MIDTOPIC_348350220829221078=Hub-and-spokeH_ABOUT_REPLICATION_STRATEGY_AND_SYSTEM_TOPOEOGY_MIDTOPIC_384172144029231111=Benefits of hub-and-spokeH_ABOUT_REPLICATION_STRATEGY_AND_SYSTEM_TOPOLOGY_MIDTOPIC_348350220829221081=Peer-to-peerH_ABOUT_REPLICATION_STRATEGY_AND_SYSTEM_TOPOLOGY_MIDTOPIC_348350220829221079=Other topology strategies
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
To post metadata in the Domain catalog
If your organization uses a Domain catalog, and you have author access to the Domain Catalog, you can capture metadata about documents and post it in the Domain catelog. The "Post to Catalog" button generates ap
e@9L 9
03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
AboutPrintConnecting servers for replication
Connection documents\setting up for replicationDomino Directory\scheduled replication andMail routing\over the InternetNotes-tg-Notes communication\connecting server to serverReplication\over the InternetReplication\setting upReplication\specifying a group of serversServers\connecting for replicationServers\replicating groups ofH_ABOUT_CONNECTING_SERVERS_FOR_REPLICATION_Topic1Connecting servers for replication About
H_ABOUT_CONNECTING_SERVERS_FOR_REPLICATION__MIDTOPIC_15434051229221229=To set up Connection documents for replication
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
?StepsPrintReplicating only specific databases
Files\replicating specificFiles/Directgries to Replicate fieldReplication\specific databases andH_REPLICATING_ONLY_SPECIFIC_DATABASES_STEPSTopic1Replicating only specific databasesStepsH_WAYS_TO_CUSTOMIZE_REPLICATION
6Pfue
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Adminiswering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
?StepsPrintReplicating databases by priority
Replication\replicating by priorityH_REPLICATING_DATABASES_BY_PRIORITY_STEPSTopic1Replicating databases by priorityStepsH_WAYS_TO_CUSTOMIZE_REPLICATION
6Pfue
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
?StepsPrintLimiting replication time
Replication\limiting time forServers\limiting replication timeH_LIMITING_REPLICATION_TIME_STEPSTopic1Limiting replication timeStepsH_WAYS_TO_CUSTOMIZE_REPLICATION
6Pfue
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
n you creat
03 Administering the Domino System06 Scheduling Replication
03 Administering the Domino System07 Sgtting up Domain Search
OverviewPrintChapter 7
Setting Up Domain SearchH_SETTING_UP_DOMAIN_SEARCH_OVERTopic1Chapter 7
Setting Up Domain SearchOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up Domain Search, which allows users to search an entire Notes domain for documents, files, and attachments from a centralized server.gndar and to do list
Click here
from reading the entry.
03 Administering the Domino System07 Setting up Domain Search
H_ENABLING_DOMAIN_SEARCH_4756_OVER_MIDTOPIC_279233107229233744=To set up Domain Search on a serverH_INCLUDING_DATABASES_IN_A_DOMAIN_CATALOG_2343_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_191925820829238203=To view information in the Domain CatalogH_ENABLING_DOMAIN_SEARCH_4756_OVER_MIDTOPIC_93879273629238360=Tuning Domain Search performance
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ry, Notes
03 Administering the Domino System07 Setting up Domain Search
H_SEARCHING_FILE_SYSTEMS_3075_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_191925820829238203=To include file systems in the Domain Catalog
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
to do it
03 Administering the Domino System07 Setting up Domain Search
StepsPrintIncluding a database in the Domain Index
Domain Catalog\adding databasesDomain Catalog\including databasesDomain Index\adding databasesH_INCLUDING_DATABASES_IN_A_DOMAIN_CATALOG_2343_STEPSTopic1Including a database in the Domain IndexSteps
H_INCLUDING_DATABASES_IN_A_DOMAIN_CATALOG_2343_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_202352275229232539=To include multiple databases in a Domain Index
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
a priority
03 Administering the Domino System07 Setting up Domain Search
StepsPrintSetting up Notes clients for Domain SearchH_SETTING_UP_DOMAIN_SEARCH_FOR_NOTES_CLIENTS_2406_STEPS_ADMINTopic1Setting up Notes clients for Domain SearchSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
this to
03 Administering the Domino System07 Setting up Domain Search
H_SECURITY_AND_DOMAIN_SEARCH_3084_OVER_ADMIN_MIDTOPIC_191925820829238203=Search security and server access lists
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
41827
03 Administering the Domino System08 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
ChapPrintChapter 8
Setting Up Calendars and SchedulingH_CHAPTER_5_SETTING_UP_CALENDARS_ AND_SCHEDULINGTopic1Chapter 8
Setting Up Calendars and SchedulingChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
You can set up the calendar and scheduling features to allow users to schedule meetings and reserve resources.hen your message has been opened.
124978694429241831
03 Administering the Domino System78 Setting up Calendars and Scheduling
StepsPrintEditing and deleting Resource documents
Resource documents\editing and deletingH_EDITING_AND_DELETING_RESOURCE_DOCUMENTSTopic1Editing and deleting Resource documentsSteps
H_EDITING_AND_DELETING_RESOURCE_DOCUMENTS_MIDTOPIC_111165836829198743=To edit a Resource documentH_EDITING_AND_DELETING_RESOURCE_DOCUMENTS_MIDTOPIC_111165836829198744=To delete a resource
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
241834
03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
This chapter describes setting up and managing partitioned servers.
03 Administering the Doming System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
?StepsPrintAssigning separate IP addresses to partitioned servers
IP addresses\for partitioned serversPartitioned servers\configuring with separate IP addressesH_CONFIGURING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_WITH_UNIQUE_TCP/IP_ADDRESSESTopic1Assigning separate IP addresses to partitioned serversStepsH_WAYS_TO_CONFIGURE_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_FOR_TCP/IP
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
?StepsPrintAssigning separate IP addresses with a single NIC
AIX\configuring partitioned serversHP-UX\configuring partitioned serversIP addresses\for partitioned serversPartitioned servers\cgnfiguring on HP-UXPartitioned servers\configuring on IBM AIXPartitioned servers\configuring on SolarisPartitioned servers\configuring on Windows NTPartitioned servers\configuring with separate IP addressesSolaris\configuring partitioned serversWindows NT\configuring partitioned serversH_USING_UNIQUE_IP_ADDRESSES_WITH_A_SINGLE_NICTopic1Assigning separate IP addresses with a single NICStepsH_WAYS_TO_CONFIGURE_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_FOR_TCP/IP
H_USING_UNIQUE_IP_ADDRESSES_WITH_A_SINGLE_NIC_MIGTOPIC_96454156829217043=HP-UXH_USING_UNIQUE_IP_ADDRESSES_WITH_A_SINGLE_NIC_MIDTOPIC_96454156829217044=<+!>To enable an IP address<-!>H_USING_UNIQUE_IP_ADDRESSES_WITH_A_SINGLE_NIC_MIDTOPIC_96454156829217045=To disable an IP addressH_USING_UNIQUE_IP_ADDRESSES_WITH_A_SINGLE_NIC_MIDTOPIC_96454156829217046=IBM AIXH_USING_UNIQUE_IP_ADDRESSES_WITH_A_SINGLE_NIC_MIDTOPIC_96454156829217047=To enable an IP addressH_USING_UNIQUE_IP_ADDRESSES_WITH_A_SINGLE_NIC_MIDTOPIC_96454156829217048=To disable IP addressesH_USING_UGIQUE_IP_ADDRESSES_WITH_A_SINGLE_NIC_MIDTOPIC_96454156829217049=Sun SolarisH_USING_UNIQUE_IP_ADDRESSES_WITH_A_SINGLE_NIC_MIDTOPIC_96454156829217050=To enable an IP addressH_USING_UNIQUE_IP_ADDRESSES_WITH_A_SINGLE_NIC_MIDTOPIC_96454156829217051=To disable an IP addressH_USING_UNIQUE_IP_ADDRESSES_WITH_A_SINGLE_NIC_MIDTOPIC_96514156829217052=Windows NT
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
?AboutPrintUsing one IP address and port mapping on a partitioned server
Partitioned servers\configuring with a single IP addressPartitioned servers\port mappingPort mapping\on partitioned serversTCP/IP\port mappingH_ABOUT_TCP/IP_PORT_MAPPING_Topic1Using one'IP address and port mapping on a partitioned serverAboutH_WAYS_TO_CONFIGURE_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_FOR_TCP/IP
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
tes shou
03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
?StepsPrintConfiguring for one IP address and port mapping
Partitioned servers\configuring with a single IP addressPartitioned servers\port mappingPort mapping\on partitioned serversH_CONFIGURING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_USING_UNIQUE_TCP/IP_PORT_NUMBERSTopic1Configuring for one IP address and port mappingStepsH_WAYS_TO_CONFIGURE_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_FOR_TCP/IP
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System09 Configuring Partitioned Servers
?ExamplesPrintExample of configuring for one IP address and port mapping
Examples\port mappingPartitioned servers\configuring with a single IP addressPartitioned servers\port mappingPort mapping\on partitioned serversH_EXAMPLES:_CONFIGURING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_USING_UNIQUE_TCP/IP_PORT_NUMBERSTopic1Example of configuring for one IP address and port mappingExamplesH_WAYS_TO_CONFIGURE_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_FOR_TCP/IP
H_EXAMPLES:_CONFIGURING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_USING_UNIQUE_TCP/IP_PORT_NUMBERS_MIDTOPIC_169122384029239211=<+!>Server1<-!> <+!> (the port mapping server)<-!>H_EXAMPLES:_CONFIGURING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_USING_UNIQUE_TCP/IP_PORT_NUMBERS_MIDTOPIC_169122384029239212=<+!>Server2H_EXAMPLES:_CONFIGURING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_USGNG_UNIQUE_TCP/IP_PORT_NUMBERS_MIDTOPIC_169122384029239213=<+!>Server3H_EXAMPLES:_CONFIGURING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_USING_UNIQUE_TCP/IP_PORT_NUMBERS_MIDTOPIC_169122384029239214=<+!>Server4H_EXAMPLES:_CONFIGURING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_USING_UNIQUE_TCP/IP_PORT_NUMBERS_MIDTOPIC_169122384029239215=<+!>Server5H_EXAMPLES:_CONFIGURING_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_USING_UNIQUE_TCP/IP_PORT_NUMBERS_MIDTOPIC_169122384029239216=<+!>Server6<-!>
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
128029246
03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
ChapPrintChapter 10
Setting Up the Administration ProcessH_CHAPTER_9_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_CHAPTopic1Chapter 10
Setting Up the Administration ProcessChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up the Administration Process, a program that simplifies administrative tasks, such as deleting users, creating replicas, and editing ACLs.
you have selected a page type, you can preview it before printing. Click OK
03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
OverviewPrintSpecifying the administration server for the Domino Directory
Administration servers\choosing for Domino directoryH_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_OVERVIEWTopic1Specifying the administration server for the Domino DirectoryOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
h fall o
03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
?OverviewPrintSpecifying an administration server for databases
Administration servers\specifying for databaseH_SPECIFYING_AN_ADMINISTRATION_SERVERTopic1Specifying an adminiswration server for databasesOverviewH_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_1200
H_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_1200_MIDTOPIC_193593270429234379=To specify an administration server for databases
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
eferences
03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
?AboutPrintProcessing administration requests across domains
Cross-domain administration requests\benefits ofH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_AND_CROSS_DOMAINS_1652Topic1Processing administration requests across domainsAboutH_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_1200
H_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_AND_CROSS_DOMAINS_1652_MIDTOPIC_81997494429226312=Benefits of cross-domain processing
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
low the Bas
03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
?OverviewPrintCreating a Cross-domain Configuration document
H_CREATING_A_CROSS_DOMAIN_CONFIGURATION_DOCUMENT_MIDTOPIC_143501923229250659=To edit a Directory Profile documentH_SETTING_UP_THE_SERVER_DOCUMENT_AND_CROSS_DOMAIN_CONFIGURATION_DOCUMENT_4085_MIDTOPIC_38297116829226318=To create a Cross-domain Configuration document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
the settin
03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
?OverviewPrintVerifying that the Administration Process is set up correctly
Administration Process\verifying setupG_VERIFYING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_IS_SET_UP_CORRECTLyTopic1Verifying that the Administration Process is set up correctlyOverviewH_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_1200
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
his to set
03 Adminiswering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
?OverviewPrintSetting up ACLs for the Administration Process
ACL\modifying for Administration ProcessAdministration Process\ACL requirementsH_MODIFYING_ACLS_TO_USE_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESSTopic1Setting up ACLs for the Administration ProcessOverviewH_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_1200
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
H_CUSTOMIZING_SCHEDULE_FOR_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS@TopicType@Overview=To schedule Administration Process requests
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Adminiswering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
?StepsPrintChanging the number of threads used by the Administration Process
Administration Process\number of threadsThreads, Administration Process\changing number ofH_ADMINISTRATION_REQUEST_SCHEDULES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_29297964829234938Topic1Changing the number of threads used by the Administration ProcessStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_5228
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
?StepsPrintCreating an $AdminP view
AdminP View\creatingH_CREATING_AN_ADMINP_VIEW_STEPSTopic1Creating an $AdminP viewStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_5227
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System10 Setting up the Administration Process
?OverviewPrintEnhancing the Administration Process through the Extension Manager
Agministration Process\extending with Extension ManagerAdministration requests\third partyExtension Manager\extending Administration Process withH_ENHANCING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_THROUGH_THE_EXTENSION_MANAGERTopic1Enhancing the Administration Process through the Extension ManagerOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_5228
H_ENHANCING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_THROUGH_THE_EXTENSION_MANAGER_MIDTOPIC_214726643229234959=The DLL programH_ENHANCING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_THROUGH_THE_EXWENSION_MANAGER_MIDTOPIC_214726643229234960=Activating the Extension Manager for the Administration ProcessH_ENHANCING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_THROUGH_THE_EXTENSION_MANAGER_MIDTOPIC_368578416029237791=Creating a third-party Administration RequestH_ADMINISTRATION_REQUEST_SCHEDULES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_29297964829234938_MIDTOPIC_40297776029234944=To verify which task is processing a request
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
en you c
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
ChapPrintChapter 11
Setting Up the Web AdministratorH_CHAPTER_4_ADMINISTERING_A_SERVER_USING_A_BROWSER_5456_CHAPTopic1Chapter 11
Setting Up the Web AdministratorChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter includes information on setting up and configuring the Web Administrator, which allows you to use a browser to administer a server.
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
OverviewPrintSetting up access to the Web Administrator database
Agents\Web Administrator securityDefault database security\Web AdministratorInternet passwords\Web AdministratorSecurity\Web AdministratorWEBADMIN.NSF\securingWeb Administrator\accessH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_6145_OVERVIEWTopic1Setting up access to the Web Administrator databaseOverview
G_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_6145_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205349=Default database securityH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_6145_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_177954969629240600=Maximum Internet name & password accessH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_6145_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_177954969629240601=Access control listH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_6145_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205350=Default server and agent securityH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_6145_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205351=Authenticating agministrators
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
?StepsPrintGiving additional administrators access to the Web Administrator
Administrators\allowing access to Web AdministratorRoles\Web Administrator andWeb Administrator\rolesH_GIVING_ADMINISTRATORS_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_9768_STEPSTopic1Giving additional administrators access to the Web AdministratorStepsH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_6145_OVERVIEW
H_GIVING_ADMINISTRATORS_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_9768_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205349=Roles for administratorsH_GIVING_ADMINISTRATORS_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_9768_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_178014969629240700=ServerAdmin roleH_GIVING_ADMINISTRATORS_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_9768_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_178014969629240601=ServerMonitor roleH_GIVING_ADMINISTRATORS_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_9768_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_178014969629240602=DatabaseAdmin roleH_GIVING_ADMINISTRATORS_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_9768_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_178014969629240603=FileRead roleH_GIVING_ADMINISTRATORS_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_9768_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_178014969629240604=FileModify role
CN7David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
?AboutPrintMonitoring dead and pending mail with the Web Administrator
MAIL.DeadMail\monitoringMail.WaitingWouting Status\viewingWeb Administrator\monitoring mailH_MONITORING_MAIL_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLTopic1Monitoring dead and pending mail with the Web AdministratorAboutH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER
H_MONITORING_MAIL_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205349=To monitor dead and pending mail
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Bruce.Maha
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
?StepsPrintMonitoring server memory and disk space with the Web Administrator
Disk space\monitoringMemory\monitoring with the Web AdministratorMonitoring\disk space with the Web AdministratorMonitoring\memory with the Web AdministratorWeb Administrator\monitorigg disk spaceWeb Administrator\monitoring memoryH_MONITORING_SERVER_MEMORY_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLTopic1Monitoring server memory and disk space with the Web AdministratorStepsH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER
H_MONITORING_SERVER_MEMORY_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205349=To monitor server memoryH_MONITORING_SERVER_MEMORY_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205350=To monitor disk space
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
se View -
&]UFU
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
?AboutPrintMonitoring Web server requests and commands with the Web Administrator
Monitoring\Web server commands and requestsWeb Administrator\moniworing requests and commandsWeb servers\monitoring requests and commandsH_ABOUT_MONITORING_WEB_SERVER_REQUESTS_AND_COMMANDS_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLTopic1Monitoring Web server requests and commands with the Web AdministratorAboutH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER
H_ABOUT_MONITORING_WEB_SERVER_REQUESTS_AND_COMMANDS_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205349=To monitor Web server requests and commands
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e is the
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
?StepsPrintAnalyzing server messages and viewing the log file with the Web Administrator
Alerts\analyzingError messages\analyzingLog file\analyzingWeb Administrawor\analyzing log fileH_ANALYZING_SERVER_MESSAGES_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLTopic1Analyzing server messages and viewing the log file with the Web AdministratorStepsH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER
H_ANALYZING_SERVER_MESSAGES_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205349=To analyze server messagesH_ANALYZING_SERVER_MESSAGES_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205350=To update server messagesH_ANALYZING_SERVER_MESSAGES_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIGTOPIC_385920099229205351=To change the monitoring periodH_ANALYZING_SERVER_MESSAGES_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205352=To open the log file (LOG.NSF)
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Adminiswering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
?StepsPrintEntering commands at the remote console with the Web Administrator
Console\using remote with Web AdministratorRemote server console\Web AdministratorWeb Administrator\remote server consoleH_ENTERING_SERVER_COMMANDS_AT_THE_REMOTE_SERVER_CONSOLE_8554_STEPSTopic1Entering commands at the remote console with the Web AdministratorStepsH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotws
s replic
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
?StepsPrintCreating Group and Person documents with the Web Administrator
Groups\Web Administrator andPeople\Web AdministratorWeb Adminiswrator\adding peopleWeb Administrator\creating groupsH_DELETING_A_USER_NAME_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOLTopic1Creating Group and Person documents with the Web AdministratorStepsH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER
H_DELETING_A_USER_NAME_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205349=To create a Group documentH_DELETING_A_USER_NAME_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_MIDTOPIC_260153305629238190=To create a Person document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
?StepsPrintManaging access control lists with the Web Administrator
ACL\managing with Web AdministratorAccess levels\assigning with Web AdministratorWeople\modifying ACL with Web AdministratorWeb Administrator\managing the ACLH_MANAGING_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_3083_STEPSTopic1Managing access control lists with the Web AdministratorStepsH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER
H_MANAGING_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_3083_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205349=To add a name to the ACLH_MANAGING_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_3083_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205350=To assign a maximum access level to non-Notes usersH_MANAGING_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_3083_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_385720099229205351=To delete a name from the ACLH_MANAGING_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_3083_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205352=To edit a name in the ACLH_MANAGING_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_3083_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205353=To add, delete, or edit a roleH_MANAGING_ACCESS_CONTROL_LISTS_3083_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_385920099229205354=To view the ACL change history
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
?StepsPrintManaging databases with the Web Administrator
Databases\managing with Web AdministratorIndexes, full-text\creating with Web AdministratorQuotas\managing with Web AdministratorReplicas\creating with Web AdministratorWeb Administrator\managing dawabasesH_MANAGING_DATABASES_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATOR_STEPSTopic1Managing databases with the Web AdministratorStepsH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
?StepsPrintCreating a new database with the Web Administrator
Databases\creating with Web AdministratorH_CREATING_A_NEW_DATABASE_WITH_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATOR_STEPSTopic1Creating a new database with the Web AdministratorStepsH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System11 Setting up the Web Administrator
?StepsPrintEditing system files on the server with the Web Administrator
Files\editing with Web AdministratorWeb Administrator\editing filesH_EDITING_SYSTEM_FILES_ON_THE_SERVER_STEPSTopic1Egiting system files on the server with the Web AdministratorStepsH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
ChapPrintChapter 12
Wsing Windows NT User Manager for DomainsH_APPENDIX_Z_USING_NT_USER_MANAGER_FOR_DOMAINS_TO_MANAGE_USERS_CHAPTopic1Chapter 12
Using Windows NT User Manager for DomainsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter explains how to synchronize user and group information in Windows NT User Manager for Domains and in Notes.
For formulas, select "Hide'paragraph if formula is true" and
03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
?StepsPrintSynchronizing user and group information in Domino and Windows NT
Notes\synchronizing with Windows NTUser informatign\synchronizing in Notes and Windows NTWindows NT\synchronizing with NotesH_SYNCHRONIZING_USER_INFORMATION_BETWEEN_DOMINO_AND_WINDOWS_NT_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_62102864029233536Topic1Synchronizing user and group information in Domino and Windows NTStepsH_SETTING_UP_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
?StepsPrintExamples of synchronizing data in Notes and User Manager
Examples\synchronizing Notes and Windows NTNotes\synchronizing with Windows NTWindows NT\synchronizing with NotesH_SYNCHRONIZING_USER_INFORMATION_BETWEEN_DOMINO_AND_WINDOWS_NT_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_250311443229231336Topic1Examples of syncgronizing data in Notes and User ManagerStepsH_SETTING_UP_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_OVER
03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
?AboutPrintEnabling Notes synchronization operations in Windows NT User Manager
Notes\synchronizing with Windows NTWindows NT User Manager\setting upWindows NT\synchronizing with'NotesH_SETTING_UP_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_8386Topic1Enabling Notes synchronization operations in Windows NT User ManagerAboutH_SETTING_UP_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ional sa
03 Administering the Domino Sywtem12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
StepsPrintSynchronizing Windows NT and Notes users
Person documents\changing during synchronizationSynchronization\Notes and Windows NT usersWindows NT\synchronizing with Notes usersH_SYNCHRONIZING_WINDOWS_NT_AND_NOTES_USERS_STEPSTopic1Synchronizing Windows NT and Notes usersSteps
H_Synchronizing_Midtopic=To synchronize Windows NT and Notes users
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
StepsPrintCustomizing Notes registration for Windows NT users
Mail /ID registration options\Windows NT and NotesNotes\registering Windows NT usersRegistration options\changing for Mail / IDRegistwation options\customizingRegistration\Windows NT usersWindows NT users\registering in NotesH_USING_THE_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_FOR_DOMAINS_3446_MIDTOPIC_378790915229233514Topic1Customizing Notes registration for Windows NT usersSteps
H_CHANGING_DEFAULT_OPTIONS_FOR_REGISTERING_WINDOWS_NT_USERS_AS_NOTES_USERS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_397280636829213868=To change default Registration Setup optionsH_CHANGING_DEFAULT_OPTIONS_FOR_REGISTERING_WINDOWS_NT_USERS_AS_NOTES_USERS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_397280636829213869=To cgange default Mail / ID Registration options
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
StepsPrintUsing Windows NT to create user accounts and register Notes users
Notes\registering Windows NT usersRegistration\Windows NT usersUser accounts\creating in Windows NTWindows NT users\registering in NotesH_USING_THE_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_FOR_DOMAINSTopic1Using Windows NT to create user accounts and register Notes usersSteps
H_USING_THE_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_FOR_DOMAINS_3446_MIDTOPIC_296534716829248443=To create new Windows NT user accounts and register Notes users simultaneously
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
StepsPrintRegistering existing Windows NT user accounts in Notes
Notes\registering Windows NT usersRegistration\Windows NT usersWindows NT users\registering in NotesH_USING_THE_WINDOWS_NT_USER_GANAGER_FOR_DOMAINS_3446_MIDTOPIC_126663545629249415Topic1Registering existing Windows NT user accounts in NotesSteps
H_USING_WINDOWS_NT_TO_CREATE_USER_ACCOUNTS_AND_REGISTER_NOTES_USERS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_397280636829213870=To register new users later
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
{kWU^
03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
StepsPrintAdding Windows NT groups to Notes
Group members\registering in NotesGroups\Windows NTGroups\adding to NotesRegistration\group member in NotesWindows NT groups\adding to NotesH_USING_THE_WINDOWS_NT_USER_MANAGER_FOR_DOMAINS_3446_MIDTOPIC_397914326429233142Topic1Adding Windows NT groups to NotesSteps
H_ADDING_WINDOWS_NT_GROUPS_TO_NOTES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_377280636829213868=To create a new Windows NT group and simultaneously add it to NotesH_ADDING_WINDOWS_NT_GROUPS_TO_NOTES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_397280636829213868_MIDTOPIC_397914326429233142=To add existing Windows NT groups to Notes
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System12 Using Windows NT User Manager for Domains
StepsPrintUsing Windows NT User Manager to delete a user or group
Windows NT User Manager\deleting user accounts withH_ADDING_WINDOWS_NT_GROUPS_TO_NOTES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_397280636829213868_MIDTOPIC_397914326429233143Topic1Using Windows NT User Manager to delete a user or groupSteps
H_ADDING_WINDOWS_NT_GROUPS_TO_NOTES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_397280636829213868_MIDTOPIC_397914326429233144=To delete a uwer or group account
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Databa
03 Administering the Domino System13 Setting up the Domino Directory
ChapPrintChapter 13
Setting Up the Domino DirectoryH_CHAPTER_3_SETTING_UP_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1Chapter 13
Setting Up the Doming DirectoryChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes the Domino Directory and explains how to set up the Domino Directory for a Notes domain.
ocuments. These are the text properties for each style:
Headli
03 Administering the Domino System13 Setting up the Domino Directory
?StepsPrintSetting up access to the Domino Directory
ACL\Domino DirectoryAdministrators field\Domino Directory documentsDomino Directory\setting access toGroupCreator roleGroupModifier roleNetCreator roleNetModifier roleRoles\Domino DirectorySecurity\Domino Directory andSgrverCreator roleServerModifier roleUserCreator roleUserModifier roleH_SETTING_UP_ACCESS_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_2107_STEPSTopic1Setting up access to the Domino DirectoryStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK
H_SETTING_UP_ACCESS_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_2107_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_83825916829235818=To control overall accessH_SETTING_UP_ACCESS_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_2107_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_83825916829235819=To control access to specific formsH_SETTING_UP_ACCESS_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_2107_STEPS_MIDTOPICW83825916829235820=To control access to a specific document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
r docume
03 Administering the Domino System13 Setting up the Domino Directory
?StepsPrintScheduling replication of the Domino'Directory
Administration Requests database\replicatingDomino Directory\replicatingReplication\Domino Directory andH_SCHEDULING_REPLICATION_OF_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_3112_STEPSTopic1Scheduling replication of the Domino DirectoryStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
If
03 Administering the Domino System13 Setting up the Domino Directory
?StepsPrintCustomizing the Public Directory Profile
Public Directory Profile\describedH_COMPLETING_THE_PUBLIC_DIRECTORY_PROFILE_7186_STEPSTopic1Customizing the Public Directory ProfileStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s to ass
03 Administering the Domino System13 Setting up the Domino Directory
StepsPrintDatabase performance features used by the Domino Directory
Domino Directory\performance settingsPerformance\Domino DirectoryH_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_FEATURES_USED_BY_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_4372_STEPSTopic1Databawe performance features used by the Domino DirectorySteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
tab from
03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
ChapPrintChapter 14
Setting Up the LDAP ServiceH_CHAPTER_6_SETTING_UP_THE_DOMINO_LDAP_SERVERTowic1Chapter 14
Setting Up the LDAP ServiceChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
?OverviewPrintStarting and stopping the LDAP service
LDAP service\starting agd stoppingH_STARTING_AND_STOPPING_THE_LDAP_SERVER_OVERTopic1Starting and stopping the LDAP serviceOverviewH_QUICK_CONFIGURATION_SETTING_UP_AN_LDAP_SERVER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino Sywtem14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
?StepsPrintCustomizing LDAP access to the Domino Directory
Domino Directory\LDAP access toH_CUSTOMIZING_LDAP_ACCESS_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_9746_STEPSTopic1Customizing LDAP access to the Domino DirectoryStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_LDAP_CONFIGURATION_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
H_SPECIFYIGG_WHICH_FIELDS_ANONYMOUS_LDAP_USERS_CAN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_228147017629230345=Fields in Person document H_SPECIFYING_WHICH_FIELDS_ANONYMOUS_LDAP_USERS_CAN_SEARCH_OVER_MIDTOPIC_228147017629230346=Fields in Group documentH_CUSTOMIZING_LDAP_ACCESS_TO_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_9746_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_306083104029310387=To configure the fields anonymous LDAP users can search
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
03 Adminiswering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
?StepsPrintControlling how the LDAP service handles duplicate names and naming rules
Duplicate names\LDAP service andLDAP service\duplicate names andNames, duplicate\LDAP andNaming rules\LDAPH_RULES_TO_FOLLOW_WHEN_MODIFYING_LDAP_DIRECTORY_2841_STEPSTopic1Controlling how the LDAP service handles duplicate names and naming rulesStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_LDAP_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_RULES_TO_FOLLOW_WHEN_MODIFYING_LDAP_DIRECTORY_2841_STEWS_MIDTOPIC_108688124829230963=To control how the LDAP service handles duplicate names and naming rules
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
time wh
03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
?OverviewPrintChanging the default LDAP service port and security configuration
Certificates, SSL\LDAP service andLDAP service\SSL andLDAP service\port configurationName-and-password authentication\LDAP service andPorts\for LDAP serviceSSL port\LDAP serviceH_CHANGING_THE_PORT_SECURITY_CONFIGURATION_FOR_AN_LDAP_SERVER_2611_OVERTopic1Changing the default LDAP service port and security configurationOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_LDAP_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_CHANGING_THE_PORT_SECURITY_CONFIGURATION_FGR_AN_LDAP_SERVER_2611_OVER_MIDTOPIC_45090179229236174=To change the TCP/IP port configurationH_CHANGING_THE_PORT_SECURITY_CONFIGURATION_FOR_AN_LDAP_SERVER_2611_OVER_MIDTOPIC_45090179229236175=To change the SSL port configuration
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Click here
03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
?OverviewPrintCustomizing how the LDAP service processes searches
LDAP service\Timeout settingLDAP service\improving performance ofPerformance\improving for LDAP serviceTimeout settings\LDAP serviceH_CUSTOMIZING_LDAP_QUERIES_OVERTopic1Customizing how the LDAP service processes searchesOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_LDAP_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_CUSTOMIZING_LDAP_QUERIES_OVERWMIDTOPIC_140123683229313184=Timeout and "Maximum number of entries returned"H_CUSTOMIZING_LDAP_QUERIES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_140123683229313185=Minimum characters for wildcard searchH_CUSTOMIZING_LDAP_QUERIES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_108688124829230963=To customize how the LDAP service processes searches:
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
?OverviewPrintEnabling alternate language searches
Alternate Language Information documentsAlternate languages\LDAP searches andInternationalization\LDAP service andLDAP language tagsLDAP service\alternate language searches andPublic Directory Profile\LDAP alternate languages searches
pubnames_v_AlwernateLanguageInformationH_ENABLING_ALTERNATE_LANGUAGE_QUERIES_4712_OVERTopic1Enabling alternate language searchesOverviewH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_LDAP_CONFIGURATION_OVER
H_ENABLING_ALTERNATE_LANGUAGE_QUERIES_4712_OVER_MIDTOPIC_108688124829230963=To enable a directory for alternate language searchesH_ENABLING_ALTERNATE_LANGUAGE_QUERIES_4712_OVER_MIDTOPIC_45140179229236174=To create an Alternate Language Information document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
l to the next, horizontglly
Note
When all cells are full, remaining text collects in the last cell.
In the "Table wrap" section, select "Inside table."
Specify the depth of cell space for text to fill before the text flows over into the next cell by adjusting the amount of inches in the "At height" box; click check mark to save.
Make your tables compatible with Notes Release 4 (Notes Release 5 tables are smaller then Notes Release 7 tables)c
In the Compatibility section, select "Use R4 spacing within
@EDL
03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
OverviewPrintUsing LDAP to search for documents indexed in a domain catalog
Domain Catalog\LDAP searches ofLDAP service\Domain Catalog searchesH_USING_LDAP_TO_SEARCH_A_DOMAIN_CATALOG_835_OVCRTopic1Using LDAP to search for documents indexed in a domain catalogOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
POP3\messag
03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
?StepsPrintUsing parameters with ldapsearch
cdapsearch.exe\parametersH_USING_PARAMETERS_WITH_LSEARCH_9811_STEPSTopic1Using parameters with ldapsearchStepsH_USING_LSEARCH_TO_SEARCH_A_DIRECTORY_7495_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Dcmino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
H_USING_SEARCH_FILTERS_WITH_LSEARCH_2023_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_75875593629232910=Attributes in search filtersH_USING_SEARCH_FILTERS_WITH_LSEARCH_2023_STEPS_MIDTOPICS75875593629232911=Operators in search filtersH_USING_SEARCH_FILTERS_WITH_LSEARCH_2023_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_75875593629232912=Multiple search filters
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Us the LDAP Service
?StepsPrintExamples of using ldapsearch
Examples\ldapsearch.exeldapsearch.exe\examplesH_EXAMPLES_EXPORTING_THE_CONTENTS_OF_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY_2804_STEPSTopic1Examples of using ldapsearch StepsH_USING_LSEARCH_TO_SEARCH_A_DIRECTORY_7495_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System14 Setting Up the LDAP Service
OverviewPrintSupported LDAP RFCs and Internet Drafts
LDAP service\Internet Draft supportedLDAP service\RFCs supportedRFCs\LDAP serviceH_SUPPORTED_LDAP_RFCS_AND_INTERNET_DRAFTS_6789_OVERTopic1Supported LDAP RFCs and Internet DraftsOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple#Directories
?StepsPrintThe mobile directory catalog
Directory catalogs\mobileMail addressing\directory catalogs andMobile directory catalogs\describedH_USING_A_CLIENT_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_FOR_NOTES_CLIENT_LOOKUPS_7694_STEPSTopic1The mobile directory catalogStepsH_DIRECTORY_CATALOGS_7680_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@ExamplesPrintExample of using the mobile directory catalog
Directory catalogs\examplesExamples\directory catalogsMobile directory catalogs\examplesH_EXAMPLE_USING_A_CLIENT_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_5671_EXTopic1Example of using the mobile directory catalogExamplesH_USING_A_CLIENT_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_FOR_NOTES_CLIENT_LOOKUPS_7694_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
mino serve
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintThe server directory catalog
Directory catalogs\on serversRoutersSdirectory catalogs andH_USING_A_SERVER_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_FOR_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION_1137_STEPSTopic1The server directory catalogStepsH_DIRECTORY_CATALOGS_7680_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Dominc System15 Managing Multiple Directories
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintPreparing a server for a source directory catalog
Directory catalogs\preparing server forH_CHOOSING_AND_PREPARING_A_SOURCE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_SERVER_1271_STEPSTopic1Preparing a server for a source directory catalogStepsH_OVERVIEW_SETTING_UP_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_4527_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintCreating and configuring a source directory catalog
Clear History\directory catalogs andCcnfiguration document\directory catalogDirectory catalogs\Sort by fieldDirectory catalogs\Soundex andDirectory catalogs\configuringDirectory catalogs\directories included inDirectory catalogs\distinguishing groups inDuplicate names\directory catalogs andGroups\distinguishing in directory catalogPublic Directory Profile\domain defined inSoundex\directory catalogs andType-ahead addressing\directory catalogs andH_CONFIGURING_A_SOURCE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_3548_STEPSTopic1Creating and configuring a source directory#catalogStepsH_OVERVIEW_SETTING_UP_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_4527_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
H_RUNNING_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_AGGREGATOR_9028_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_129245033629232760=To run the Dircat task on scheduleH_RUNNING_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_AGGREGATOR_9028_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_129245033629232761=To run the Discat task manually
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
_DIFFEREN
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintSetting up a directory catalog on servers
Directory catalogs\settcng up on serversPublic Directory Profile\server directory catalogs andH_SETTING_UP_A_SERVER_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_1517_STEPSTopic1Setting up a directory catalog on serversStepsH_OVERVIEW_SETTING_UP_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_4527_OVER
H_SETTING_UP_A_SERVER_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_1517_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_129245033629232760=To set up the directory catalog on servers in the same domain as the source directory catalogH_SETTING_UP_A_SERVER_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_1517_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_129245033629232761=To set up the directory catalog#on servers outside the domain of the source directory catalog
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintSetting up the mobile directory catalog
Directory catalogs\setting up on clientsMobile directory catalogs\setting up on clientsH_SETTING_UP_A_CLIENT_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_4804_STEPSTopic1Setting up the mobile directory catalogStepsH_OVERVIEW_SETTING_UP_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_4527_OVER
H_SETTING_UP_A_CLIENT_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_4804_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_270642000029245626=To set up the mobile directory catalog on clients in the same domain as the source directory catalogH_SETTING_UP_A_CLIENT_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_4804_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_270642000039245627=To set up the mobile directory catalog on clients outside the domain of the source directory catalog
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintThe server directory catalog and directory assistanceH_Using_The_Server_Directory_Catalog_and_Directory AssistanceTopic1The server directory catalog and directory assistanceStepsH_INCLUDING_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_IN_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintWeb client authentication in a secondary Domino Directory
Directory Assistance\Web authentication andWeb client authentication\directory assistance andH_WEB_CLIENT_AUTHENTICCTION_IN_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORYTopic1Web client authentication in a secondary Domino DirectoryStepsH_INCLUDING_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_IN_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER
H_INCLUDING_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_IN_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_347368672029240806=Using a directory catalog to facilitate Web client authentication
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintExample of looking up Web client passwords in a directory catalog on the server
Directory Assistance\examplesExamples\Web client authenticationWeb client authentication\examplesH_EXAMPLE_LOOKING_UP_WEB_CLIENT_PASSWORDS_IN_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_ON_THE_SERVER_4513_STEPSTopic1Example of looking up Web client passwords in a directory catalog on the serverStepsH_WEB_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION_IN_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintExample of looking up Web client certificates in a secondary Domino Directory
Directory Assistance\examplesDirectory catalogs\examplesExamples\Web client authenticationExamples\directory catalogsWeb client authentication\examplesH_EXAMPLE_LOOKING_UP_WEB_CLIENT_CERTIFICATES_IN_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_6067_STEPSTopic1Example of looking up Web client certificates in a secondary Domino DirectoryStepsH_WEB_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION_IN_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
MAT_TO_INTE
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintLDAP searches in a secondary Domino Directory
Directory Assissance\LDAP service andLDAP service\directory catalogs andLDAP service\secondary Domino directoriesSecondary Domino Directory\LDAP service andH_LDAP_SEARCHES_IN_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORYTopic1LDAP searches in a secondary Domino DirectoryStepsH_INCLUDING_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_IN_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
and D
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintExample of extending LDAP searches to a secondary Domino directory
Directory Assistance\examplesDirectory catalogs\examplesExamples\LDAP serviceExamples\directory assistanceExamples\directory catalogsLDAP service\examplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_EXTENDING_LDAP_QUERIES_TO_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DISECTORY_STEPSTopic1Example of extending LDAP searches to a secondary Domino directoryStepsH_LDAP_SEARCHES_IN_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multcple Directories
?StepsPrintNotes address verification in a secondary Domino Directory
Addressing\directory assistance andDirectory Assistance\mail addressingH_NOTES_ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_IN_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_1Topic1Notes address verification in a secondary Domino DirectoryStepsH_INCLUDING_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_IN_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ASE_5_0_41
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
OverviewPrintLDAP directories in directory assistance
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintWeb client authentication in an LDAP directory
Directory Assistance\Web authentication andLDAP directories\Web client authentication usingWeb client authentication\LDAP directories andH_WEB_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION_USING_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORYTopic1Web client authentication in an LDAP directoryStepsH_INCLUDING_LDAP_DIRECTORIES_IN_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ase 5
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintExample of using an LDAP directory to authenticate Web clients
Directory Assistance\examplesExamples\directory assistanceLDAP directories\examples of usingWeb client authentication\examplesH_EXAMPLE_OF_AUTHENTICATING_WEB_USERS_IN_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY_STEPSTopic1Example of using an LDAP directory to authenticate Web clientsStepsH_WEB_CLIENT_AUTHENTICASION_USING_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
otes and Do
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintGroup membership verification using an LDAP directoryH_Group_membershiP_vesification_using_an_LDAP_directoryTopic1Group membership verification using an LDAP directoryStepsH_INCLUDING_LDAP_DIRECTORIES_IN_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System35 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintLDAP client referrals to an LDAP directory
Directory Assistance\referralsLDAP service\referralsReferrals\directory assistance andH_LDAP_CLIENT_REFERRALS_IN_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORYTopic1LDAP client referrals to an LDAP directoryStepsH_INCLUDING_LDAP_DIRECTORIES_IN_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintAddress-verification in an LDAP directory
Addressing\directory assistance andDirectory Assistance\mail addressingLDAP directories\address verification inH_ADDRESS_VERIFICATION_IN_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORYTopic1Address-verification in an LDAP directoryStepsH_ICCLUDING_LDAP_DIRECTORIES_IN_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
_ASSIG
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
OverviewPrintNaming rules in directory assistance
Directory#Assistance\naming rulesNaming rulesRules\naming rules for directory assistanceSecondary Domino Directory\search orderH_SPECIFYING_NAMING_RULES_AND_SEARCH_ORDER_TO_CONTROL_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVERTopic1Naming rules in directory assistanceOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
hat you ca
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
OverviewPrintSearch orders in directory assistance
Directory Assistance\search order optionSearch orders\for Directory Assistance documentsH_SPECIFYING_SEARCH_ORDERS_IN_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_5687_OVERTopic1Search orders in directory assistanceOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
CTIVE Read
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?OverviewPrintSetting up a Directory Assistance database
Directory Assistance\databaseH_SETTING_UP_THE_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_DATABASE_7468_OVERTopic1Setting up a Directory Assistance databaseOverviewH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER
CN=David Mahcr/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintCreating and replicating the Directory Assistance database
Directory Assistance\databaseH_SETTING_UP_THE_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_DCTABASE_8788_STEPSTopic1Creating and replicating the Directory Assistance databaseStepsH_SETTING_UP_THE_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_DATABASE_7468_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
TABASE_M
03 Administering the Domino System15 Mcnaging Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintIdentifying the Directory Assistance database on servers
Administration Process\directory assistance andDirectory Assistance\databaseSet Directory Assistance database requestsH_ENABLING_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_STEPSTopic1Identifying the Directory Assistance database on serversStepsH_SETTING_UP_THE_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_DATABASE_7468_OVER
H_SETTING_UP_THE_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_DATABASE_8788_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_2333337629224895=To identify the database oc multiple serversH_SETTING_UP_THE_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_DATABASE_8788_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_2333337629224896=To identify the database on one server
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Cultiple Directories
?OverviewPrintSetting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Directory Assistance\secondary Domino directories andDirectory Assistance\setting up for secondary Domino DirectorySecondary Domino Directory\directory assistance andH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_TO_INCLUDE_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_2280_OVERTopic1Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directoriesOverviewH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER
CN=Dcvid Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintPlanning locations for replicas of a secondary Domino Directory
Directory Assistance\secondary Docino directories andSecondary Domino Directory\directory assistance andH_REPLICATING_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_4731_STEPSTopic1Planning locations for replicas of a secondary Domino DirectoryStepsH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_TO_INCLUDE_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_2280_OVER
H_REPLICATING_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_4731_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_2333337629224897=Specifying more than one replica of a secondary directoryH_REPLICATING_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_4731_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_2333337629224895=Example of locating a secondary directory in the primary Notes domainH_REPLICATING_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_4731_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_2333337629224896=Example of locating a secondary directory in the secondary Notes domain
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ATABASE_F
03 Admcnistering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintEnabling access to the locations chosen for a secondary Domino Directory
Directory Assistance\secondary Domino directories andSecondary Domino Directory\directory assistance andH_PREPARING_TO_ACCESS_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_ON_A_SERVER_IN_THE_PRIMARY_DOMAIN_8798_STEPSTopic1Enabling access to the locations chosen for a secondary Domino DirectoryStepsH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_TO_INCLUDE_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DISECTORY_2280_OVER
H_PREPARING_TO_ACCESS_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_ON_A_SERVER_IN_THE_PRIMARY_DOMAIN_8798_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_113017017629230345=To access a secondary directory stored in the primary Notes domainH_PREPARING_TO_ACCESS_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_ON_A_SERVER_IN_THE_PRIMARY_DOMAIN_8798_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_113017017629230346=To access a secondary directory stored in the secondary Notes domain
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintCreating a Directory Assistance document for a secondary Domino Directory
Directory Assistance\secondary Domino directories andDirectory Assistance\setting up for secondary Domino DirectoryDirectory catalogs\Web client authentication andSecondary Domino Directory\directory assistance andH_EXTENDING_NOTES_NAME_LOOKUPS_LDAP_QUERIES_AND_AUTHENTICATION_TO_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_2650_STEPSTopic1Creating a Directory Assistance document for a secondary Domino DirectoryStepsH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_TO_INCLUDE_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_2280_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
2985=Tip
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?OverviewPrintSetting up directory assistance for LDAP directories
Directory Assistance\LDAP directories andDirectory Assistance\setting up for LDAP directoriesLDAP directories\directory assistance andH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_FOR_LDAP_DISECTORIES_7426_OVERTopic1Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directoriesOverviewH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managcng Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintAuthenticating Web clients using credentials in an LDAP directory
ACL\LDAP directory users inDirectory Assistance\Web authentication andLDAP directories\Web client authentication usingWeb client authentication\LDAP directories andH_EXTENDING_YOUR_DIRECTORY_SERVICE_TO_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY_7491_STEPSTopic1Authenticating Web clients using credentials in an LDAP directoryStepsH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_FOR_LDAP_DIRECTORIES_7426_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
To hide
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintVerifying membership in groups in an LDAP directory
ACL\LDAP directory groups inActive Directors\groups inGroup Expansion field\directory assistanceGroupsLDAP directories\group verification inH_VERIFYING_GROUP_MEMBERSHIP_IN_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY_6756_STEPSTopic1Verifying membership in groups in an LDAP directoryStepsH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_FOR_LDAP_DIRECTORIES_7426_OVER
H_VERIFYING_GROUP_MEMBERSHIP_IN_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY_6756_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_93235913629318710=To add LDAP directory groups to Notes database ACLsH_VERIFYING_GROUP_MEMBERSHIP_IN_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY_6756_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_93235913629318311=To set up directory assistance to search LDAP directory groups
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintReferring LDAP clients to an LCAP directory
Directory Assistance\LDAP service andDirectory Assistance\referralsLDAP service\referralsReferrals\directory assistance andH_CONFIGURING_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_FOR_LDAP_CLIENT_REFERRALS_5312_STEPSTopic1Referring LDAP clients to an LDAP directoryStepsH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_FOR_LDAP_DIRECTORIES_7426_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintUsing an LDAP directory to resolve mail addresses on behalf of Notes users
Addressing\directory assistance andDirectory Assistance\mail addressingLDAP directories\address verification inH_CONFIGURING_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_TO_USE_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY_FOR_NOTES_MAIL_ADDRESSING_7799_STEPSTopic1Using an LDAP directory to resolve mail addresses on behalf of Notes usersStepsH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_FOR_LDAP_DIRECTORIES_7426_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Dcmino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintUsing SSL when setting up directory assistance for an LDAP directory
Channel encryption option\directory assistanceDirectory Assistance\Channel encryption optionDirectory Assistance\LDAP directories andLDAP directories\connecting using SSLSSL\LDAP directories andH_USING_SSL_WHEN_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_FOR_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY_4992_STEPSTopic1Using SSL when setting up directory assistance for an LDAP directoryStepsH_SETTINC_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_FOR_LDAP_DIRECTORIES_7426_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
[WG:7~
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
@StepsPrintEncrypting an LDAP Directory Assistancc document
Directory Assistance\document encryptionEncryption\Directory Assistance documentsLDAP directories\providing password when connectingPasswords\directory assistance andH_ENCRYPTING_THE_PASSWORD_FIELD_IN_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_DOCUMENT_8736_STEPSTopic1Encrypting an LDAP Directory Assistance documentStepsH_SETTING_UP_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_FOR_LDAP_DIRECTORIES_7426_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
To change
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintName lookups in multiple directories for Web client authenticationH_NAME_LOOKUPS_IN_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_FOR_WEB_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION_7378_STEPSTopic1Name lookups in multiple directories for Web client authenticationStepsC_THE_ORDER_IN_WHICH_DIRECTORIES_ARE_SEARCHED_9814_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintGroups lookups in multiple directories for databasc access verificationH_GROUPS_LOOKUPS_IN_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_FOR_DATABASE_ACCESS_VERIFICATION_4262_STEPSTopic1Groups lookups in multiple directories for database access verificationStepsH_THE_ORDER_IN_WHICH_DIRECTORIES_ARE_SEARCHED_9814_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintLDAP searches in multiple directoriesH_LDAP_SEARCHES_IN_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_9694_STEPSTopic1LDAP searches in multiple directoriesStepsH_THE_ORDER_IN_WHICH_DIRECTORIES_ARE_SEARCHED_9814_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
der locatio
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
?StepsPrintNotes mail addressing lookups in multiple directoriesH_NOTES_MAIL_ADDRESSING_LOOKUPS_IN_MULTIPLE_DIRECTORIES_6496_STEPSTopic1Notes mail addressing lookups in multiple directoriesStepsH_THE_ORDER_IN_WHICH_DIRECTORIES_ARE_SEARCHED_9814_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Losus
03 Administering the Domino System15 Managing Multiple Directories
H_USING_DIRECTORY_SERVERS_9746_OVER_MIDTOPIC_129195033629232760=Directory catalog and directory serversH_USING_DIRECTORY_SERVERS_9746_OVER_MIDTOPIC_129195033629232761=Directory assistance and directory serversH_USING_DIRECTORY_SERVERS_9746_OVER_MIDTOPIC_129195033629232763=Domino LDAP service and directory servers
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System16 Overview of the Domino Mail System
ChapPrintChapter 16
Overview of the Domino Mail SystemH_CHAPTER_16_PLANNING_MAIL_2544_CHAPTopic1Chapter 16
Overview of the Domino Mail SystemChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how the Domino mail system works and provides information that you need to consider before you deploy mail.
03 Administering the Domino System17 Sctting up Mail Routing
ChapPrintChapter 17
Setting Up Mail RoutingH_SETTING_UP_MAIL_ROUTING_CHAPTopic1Chapter 17
Setting Up Mail RoutingChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up mail routing on your Domino system. If you are upgrading a mail system from a previous release, see
Moving to Notes and Domino Release 5
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?OverviewPrintClients accessing the Domino serverH_MAIL_CLIENT_ACCESS_OVERTopic1Clients accessicg the Domino serverOverviewH_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATIONS_3483_OVER
H_EXTCRNAL_MAIL_OVER_MIDTOPIC_174807510429252477=All mail servers route mail directly to external Internet domainsH_EXTERNAL_MAIL_OVER_MIDTOPIC_174807510429252478=Only designated mail servers route mail directly to external Internet domainsH_EXTERNAL_MAIL_OVER_MIDTOPIC_174867510429252479=Only one server routes mail directly to external Internet domainsH_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATIONS_3483_OVER_MIDTOPIC_223675318429252247=Dial-up connectionH_DOMINO_SYSTEM_CONFIGURATIONS_3483_OVER_MIDTOPIC_223675318429252248=Relay hcst
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
H_CREATING_A_FOREIGN_DOMAIN_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_61812662429249482=To create a Foreign domain document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ssstttuuu
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?StepsPrintCreating a Foreign SMTP domain document
Foreign domains\configuringMail routing\over SMTPH_CREATING_A_FOREIGN_SMTP_DOMAIN_DOCUMENT_STEPSTopic1Creating a Foreign SMTP domain documentStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_ROUTING_OVER
H_CREATING_A_FOREIGN_SMTP_DOMAIN_DOCUMENT_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_5635206429253467=To create a Foreign SMTP domain cocument
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?StepsPrintCreating an SMTP Connection document
Connection documents\SMTP mail routing andCail routing\SMTP Connection documents andH_CREATING_AN_SMTP_CONNECTION_DOCUMENT_STEPSTopic1Creating an SMTP Connection documentStepsH_SETTING_UP_NOTES_ROUTING_OVER
H_CREATING_AN_SMTP_CONNECTION_DOCUMENT_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_306616595229250214=To create an SMTP Connection document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?StepsPrintPreparing to send and receive mail to the Internet
Internet mailPingH_PREPARING_TO_SEND_MAIL_TO_THE_INTERNET_STEPSTopic1Preparing to send and receive mail to the InternetStepsH_ENABLING_SMTP_ROUTING_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
--...///00
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?OverviewPrintSetting up SMTP routing outside the local Internet domain
Configuration document\for SMTP mail routingMail routing\for mail outside the local Internet domainSMTP\using outside the local Internet domainH_SENDINGSMESSAGES_TO_THE_INTERNET_OVERTopic1Setting up SMTP routing outside the local Internet domainOverviewH_ENABLING_SMTP_ROUTING_STEPS
H_SENDING_MESSAGES_TO_THE_INTERNET_OVER_MIDTOPIC_162845792029249856=To enable SMTP routing outside of the local Internet domain
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?OverviewPrintSetting up SMTP routing within the local Internet domain
Mail routing\inside the local Internet domainSMTP\using inside the local Internet domainH_SMTP_ROUTING_WITHIN_THE_LOCAL_INTERNET_DOMAIN_OVERTopic1Setting up SMTP routing within the local Internet domainOverviewH_ENABLING_SMTP_ROUTING_STEPS
H_SMTP_ROUTING_WITHIN_THE_LOCAL_INTESNET_DOMAIN_OVER_MIDTOPIC_162845792029249856=To set up SMTP routing within the local Internet domain
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
See Also
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?StcpsPrintSetting up a server to receive mail sent via SMTP routing
Listener task\Server documentMail routing\receiving mail over SMTPSMTP\and SMTP listener for receiving mailH_ENABLING_A_SERVER_TO_RECEIVE_MAIL_SEND_VIA_SMTP_ROUTING_STEPSTopic1Setting up a server to receive mail sent via SMTP routingStepsH_ENABLING_SMTP_ROUTING_STEPS
H_ENABLING_A_SERVER_TO_RECEIVE_MAIL_SEND_VIA_SMTP_ROUTING_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_162845792029249856=To enable the Listener
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?StepsPrintSetting up a forwarding address
Mail routing\forwarding addressesH_SETTING_UP_A_FORWARDING_ADDRESS_STEPSTopic1Setting up a forwarding addressStepsH_SETTICG_UP_HOW_ADDRESSES_ARE_RESOLVED_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?StepsPrintSetting up a smart host
Mail routing\using a smart costSmart host\for mail routingH_USING_A_SMART_HOST_STEPSTopic1Setting up a smart hostStepsH_SETTING_UP_HOW_ADDRESSES_ARE_RESOLVED_OVER
H_USING_A_SMART_HOST_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_306556595229250214=To set up a smart host
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?StepsPrintUsing multiple Internet domain names within one organization
Domain documents\using multiple Internet domain namesDomino Directory\global domain documentsGlobal domains\configuringMail routing\using multiple Internet domain namesH_USING_MULTIPLE_INTERNET_DOMAIN_NAMES_WITHIN_ONE_ORGANIZATION_STEPSTopic1Using multiple Internet domain names within one organizationStepsH_SETTING_US_HOW_ADDRESSES_ARE_RESOLVED_OVER
H_USING_MULTIPLE_INTERNET_DOMAIN_NAMES_WITHIN_ONE_ORGANIZATION_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_413064780829246853=To use multiple Internet domain names
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Adminissering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?StepsPrintSpecifying how addresses are looked up in Person documents
Configuration Settings document\address lookupH_RESOLVING_LOCAL_NAMES_STEPSTopic1Specifying how addresses are looked up in Person documentsStepsH_SETTING_UP_HOW_ADDRESSES_ARE_RESOLVED_OVER
H_RESOLVING_LOCAL_NAMES_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_207533190429250427=To specify how addresses are looked up
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System17 Setting up Mail Routing
?StepsPrintSpecifying how the Router picks the recipient's SMTP server for outbound mail
Configuration Settings document\host namesH_RESOLVING_HOST_NAMES_STEPSTopic1Specifying how the Routcr picks the recipient's SMTP server for outbound mailStepsH_SETTING_UP_HOW_ADDRESSES_ARE_RESOLVED_OVER
H_RESOLVING_HOST_NAMES_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_207533190429250427=To set how host names are looked up
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Dcmino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
ChapPrintChapter 18
Customizing the Domino Mail SystemH_CONFIGURING_MAIL_CHAPTopic1Chapter 18
Customizing the Domino Mail SystemChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter explains how to customize messaging for your Domino system after you set up mail routing.
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
@StepsPrintCreating multiple MAIL.BOX databases
MAIL.BOX databases\setting up multipleMail routing\and multiple#MAIL.BOXMailboxes\setting up multipleRouters\MAIL.BOX databases andH_SETTING_UP_MULTIPLE_MAILBOXES_STEPSTopic1Creating multiple MAIL.BOX databasesStepsH_IMPROVING_MAIL_PERFORMANCE_8885_OVER
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintChanging the routing cost for a connection
Connections\routing cost andMail routing\connection costs andRouters\connection costs andRouters\connection decisions andRouting costs\settingH_CHANGING_THE_ROUTING_COST_FOR_A_CONNECTION_STEPSTopic1Changing the routing cost for a connectionStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_ROUTING_OVER
H_CHANGING_THE_ROUTING_COST_FOR_A_CONNECTION_STEPS_MIDTOSIC_185798422429253257=How the Router chooses a routeH_CHANGING_THE_ROUTING_COST_FOR_A_CONNECTION_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_49244780829246853=To override the default routing cost
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Dcmino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintRouting mail by priority
Mail priority levelMail routing\message priority andMessage priority levelPriority\mail routing andH_ROUTING_MAIL_BY_PRIORITY_STEPSTopic1Routing mail by priorityStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_ROUTING_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
OverviewPrintControlling message transfer
Mail routing\controlling message transferMessage transfer\controllingTransferring messages\controllingH_CONTROLLING_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_9191_OVERTopic1Controlling message transferOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintRestricting mail routing based on message size
Mail routing\restricting message sizeMail\limiting the size of messagesMaximum message size\settingMessage size\restrictingSize#restrictions\setting for mailH_RESTRICTING_MAIL_ROUTING_BASED_ON_MESSAGE_SIZE_STEPSTopic1Restricting mail routing based on message sizeStepsH_CONTROLLING_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_9191_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Creating tables
Click here
Click here
Formatting and customizing tables
Click here
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintCustomizing message transfer controls
Maximum concurrent transfer threads\settingMaximum hops\settingMaximum transfer threads\settingMessage transler controls\settingPurge interval\settingRetry interval\settingTransfer threads\setting maximum number between serversH_CUSTOMIZING_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_STEPSTopic1Customizing message transfer controlsStepsH_CONTROLLING_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_9191_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Ports s
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintSetting advanced transfer controls
Cluster failover\configuring for mail routingConnections\resetting routing costCost reset\for connectionsDomino Directory\restricting name lookupsDynamic cost reset interval\resettingFailover\for mail routingHolding undeliverable mail\in MAIL.BOXIgnore message priority\setting for mail ro|tingLooking up names in directory\restrictingMail priority level\disregarding during routingMessage priority level\disregarding during routingName lookups\restricting to primary directoryRouting costs\resettingUndeliverable mail\holding in MAIL.BOXH_SETTING_ADVANCED_CONTROLS_STEPSTopic1Setting advanced transfer controlsStepsH_CONTROLLING_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_9191_OVER
H_SETTING_ADVANCED_CONTROLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237116944029252486=Holding undeliverable mail in MAIL.BOXH_SETTING_ADVANCED_CONTROLS\STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237116944029252487=To check for undelivered mailH_SETTING_ADVANCED_CONTROLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237116944029252488=To correct recipients' addressesH_SETTING_ADVANCED_CONTROLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237116944029252489=To release all Dead messagesH_SETTING_ADVANCED_CONTROLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237116944029252490=To release selected Dead messagesH_SETTING_ADVANCED_CONTROLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237116944029252491=To release selected Dead messages to updated recipientsH_SETTING_ADVANCED_CONTROLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237116944<29252492=To release selected Held messagesH_SETTING_ADVANCED_CONTROLS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237116944029252493=To release selected Held messages for a final attempt
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
is the po
03 Administering the Domino Sy|tem18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintCustomizing the text of mail failure messages
Advanced controls\settingDelivery failures\customizing message forDomain failures\customizing message forFailure messages\customizingMessage expirations\customizing message forMessages\failureRestriction failures\customizing message forServer failures\customizing message forSize failures\customizing message forTransfer failures\customizing message forUsername failures\custolizing message forH_IDENTIFYING_FAILURE_MESSAGE_TEXT_FILES_STEPSTopic1Customizing the text of mail failure messagesStepsH_CONTROLLING_MESSAGE_TRANSFER_9191_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Dominl System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintRestricting inbound SMTP connections
Connections\restricting SMTP inboundConnections\restricting by host name / IP addressConnections\verifying inbound SMTPDNS\verifying connecting hosts inHost names\restricting inbound connections byIP addresses\restricting inbound connections byInbound connections\restricting for SMTPSMTP\restricting inbound connectionsSpoofing\preventingH_RESTRICTING_INBOUND_CONNECTIONS_STEPSTopic1Rlstricting inbound SMTP connectionsStepsH_RESTRICTING_INBOUND_MAIL_ROUTING_8872_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
09606
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrlntRestricting who can use your system to relay Internet mail
External Internet mail\preventing relayingInternet mail\restricting relays through your systemMail relays\restrictingMail routing\restricting inbound relaysRelay hosts\restrictingH_RESTRICTING_INBOUND_RELAY_ACCESS_STEPSTopic1Restricting who can use your system to relay Internet mailStepsH_RESTRICTING_INBOUND_MAIL_ROUTING_8872_OVER
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintRestricting mail routing based on Notes domains, organizations, and organizational units
Domains\Notes and restricting mailMail routing\restricting for NotesNotes domains\restricting mail based onOrganizational units\restricting mail based onOrganizations\restricting mail based onH_RESTRICTING_MAIL_ROUTING_TO_AND_FROM_NOTES_DOMAINS_STEPSTopic1Restricting mail routing based on Notes domains, organizations, and organizational unitsStepsH_RESTRICTING_INBOUND_MAIL_ROUTING_8872_OVER
H_RESTRICTING_MAIL_ROUTING_TO_AND_FROM_NOTES_DOMAINS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_54634681629250880=To restrict mail routilg by using a Configuration Settings document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
9209604
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintRestricting who can send Internet mail to your users
DNS\verifying sending domain inDomains\verifying in DNSInternet mail\restricting inboundMail routing\restricting inbound Internet mailMail\restrictingSpamming\preventingUnwanted commercial e-mail\preventingH_RESTRICTING_WHO_CAN_SEND_INTERNET_MAIL_TO_YOUR_USERS_STEPSTopic1Restricting who can send Internet mail to your usersStepsH_RESTRICTING_INBOUND_MAIL_ROUTING_8872_OVER
H_RESTRICTING_WHO_CAN_SEND_INTERNET_MAIL_TO_YOUR_USERS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_54634681629250880=To restrict who lan send Internet mail to your users
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
select "Lo
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintRestricting who can receive mail from the Internet
Internet mail\restricting who can receiveMail recipients\restrictingMail routing\restricting who can receive Internet mailReceiving mail\restrictingH_RESTRICTING_WHO_CAN_RECEIVE_MAIL_FROM_THE_INTERNET_STEPSTopic1Restricting who can receive mail from the InternetStepsH_RESTRICTING_INBOUND_MAIL_ROUTING_8872_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
idle
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintSupporting inbound SMTP extensions
MIME messages\8-bit and ESMTPH_SUPPORTING_INBOUND_SMTP_EXTENSIONS_STEPSTopic1Supporting inbound SMTP extensions StepsH_RESTRICTING_INBOUND_MAIL_ROUTING_8872_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
09611
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintRestricting mail to the Internet
Internet mail\restricting outboundMail routing\restricting outbound messagesRestricting outbound mailH_RESTRICTING_WHO_CAN_SEND_MAIL_TO_TLE_INTERNET_STEPSTopic1Restricting mail to the InternetStepsH_RESTRICTING_OUTBOUND_MESSAGES_2420_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
<StepsPrintSupporting outbound SMTP extensions
8-bit MIME\ESMTP extensionDSN\enabling for outbound messagesDelivery status notification\enabling for outbound messagesESMTP\supporting outbound extensionsMIME messages\8-bit and ESMTPPipelining commands\supporting via ESMTPSIZE extension\enablingH_SUPPORTING_OUTBOUND_SMTP_EXTENSIONS_STEPSTopic1Supporting outbound SMTP extensionsStepsH_RESTRICTING_OUTBOUND_MESSAGES_2420_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrlntCustomizing message delivery controls
Agents\setting timeout for mailDelivery controls\settingDelivery threads\setting maximum numberEncryption\mailMail\encrypting all delivered messagesMaximum delivery threadsMessages\encrypting for deliveryRouters\configuring delivery byH_CUSTOMIZING_MESSAGE_DELIVERY_CONTROLS_STEPSTopic1Customizing message delivery controlsStepsH_CONFIGURING_MESSAGE_DELIVERY_OPTIONS_867_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System18 Customizing the Domino Mail System
?StepsPrintRestricting mail routing based on database quota
Database quotas\obeying for message deliveryMail routing\obeying database quotasQuotas\message deliveryRouter|\obeying database quotasSize restrictions\for mail filesH_RESTRICTING_MAIL_ROUTING_BASED_ON_DATABASE_QUOTA_STEPSTopic1Restricting mail routing based on database quotaStepsH_CONFIGURING_MESSAGE_DELIVERY_OPTIONS_867_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Locatio
03,Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
ChapPrintChapter 19
Setting Up Shared MailH_SHARED_MAIL_CHAPTopic1Chapter 19
Setting Up Shared MailChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes setting up and managing a shared mail database.
tom."
For a disconnected location, select "No connection."
03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
?AboutPrintHow shared mail works
Shared mail\describedH_ABOUT_HOW_SHARED_MAIL_WORKSTopic1How shared mail worksAboutH_SHARED_NOTES_MAIL_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotu|
r tab and
P2~M#
03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
?StepsPrintLinking a mail file to a shared mail database
Shared mail\linking mail files toH_LINKING_A_MAIL_FILE_TO_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASE_STEPSTopic1Linklng a mail file to a shared mail databaseStepsH_MANAGING_SHARED_MAIL_OVER
H_LINKING_AND_RELINKING_MAIL_FILES_TO_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_24742880029225326=<-!><-">To link a mail fileH_LINKING_AND_RELINKING_MAIL_FILES_TO_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_24742880029225327=To link a mail file without compacting itH_LINKING_AND_RELINKING_MAIL_FILES_TO_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_24742880029225328=To relink a mail file to a different shared mail databaseH_LINKING_AND_RELINKING_MAIL_FILES_TO_SHA\ED_MAIL_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_24742880029225329=To unlink a mail fileH_LINKING_AND_RELINKING_MAIL_FILES_TO_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_24742880029225330=To unlink a shared mail database
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
?StepsPrintIncluding or excluding a mail file from using shared mail
Shared mail\excluding mail filesShared mail\including mail filesH_INCLUDING_AND_EXCLUDING_INDIVIDUAL_MAIL_FILES_FROM_SHARED_MAILTopic1Including or excluding a mail file from using shared mailStepsH_MANAGING_SHARED_MAIL_OVER
H_INCLUDING_AND_EXCLUDING_INDIVIDUAL_MAIL_FILES_FROM_SHARED_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_24742880029225326=To exclude a mail fileH_INCLUDING_AND\EXCLUDING_INDIVIDUAL_MAIL_FILES_FROM_SHARED_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_24742880029225327=To include a previously excluded mail file
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
specify
03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
?StepsPrintEnabling shared mail for replicas of mail files
Mail files\replication and shared mailShared mail\replicated mail files andH_USING_SHARED_MAIL_ON_REPLICATED_MAIL_FILESTopic1Enabling shared mail for replicas of mail filesStepsH_MANAGING_SHARED_MAIL_OVER
H_USING_SHARED_MAIL_ON_REPLICATED_MAIL_FILES_MIDTOPIC_24742880029225326=To enable shared mail for replica mail filesH_USING_SHARED_MAIL_ON_REPLICATED_MAIL_FILES_MIDTOPIC_24742880029225327=To disable shared mail for replica mail files
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ase (def
03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
?StepsPrintPurging obsolete shared mail messages
Shared mail\purging messagesH_SPECIFYING_A_SHAREL_MAIL_DATABASE_FOR_NEW_MAIL_DELIVERIES_MIDTOPIC_24682880029225326Topic1Purging obsolete shared mail messagesStepsH_MANAGING_SHARED_MAIL_OVER
H_SPECIFYING_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASE_FOR_NEW_MAIL_DELIVERIES_MIDTOPIC_24682880029225326_MIDTOPIC_385828729629239375=To preview which messages will be purgedH_SPECIFYING_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASE_FOR_NEW_MAIL_DELIVERIES_MIDTOPIC_24682880029225327=To purge messages from the shared mail databaseH_SPECIFYING_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASE_FOR_NEW_MAIL_DELIVERIES_MIDTOPIC_24682<80029225328=To purge messages from a user's mail file
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
iever mes
03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
?StepsPrintRestoring a shared mail database
Sharel mail\restoringH_BACKING_UP_AND_RECOVERING_SHARED_MAILTopic1Restoring a shared mail databaseStepsH_MANAGING_SHARED_MAIL_OVER
H_BACKING_UP_AND_RECOVERING_SHARED_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_24742880029225326=<-#>To restore a shared mail database
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
n attachme
03 Administering the Domino System19 Setting up Shared Mail
?OverviewPrintDeleting a shared mail database
Shared mail\deletingH_DELETING_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASE_OVERTopic1Deleting a shared mail databaseOverviewH_MANAGING_SHARED_MAIL_OVER
H_DELETING_A_SHARED_MAIL_DATABASE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_24742880029225326=To delete a shared mail database
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
ChapPrintChapter 20
Setting Up the POP3 ServiceH_DOMINO_POP3_SERVER_CHAPTopic1Chapter 20
Setting Up the POP3 ServiceChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up the POP3 service on a Domino server and how to set up POP3 users.the US.u
Area code at this location
03 Administering tle Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
?StepsPrintStarting and stopping the POP3 service
POP3 service\startingH_STARTING_AND_STOPPING_THE_POP3_SERVER_STEPSTopic1Starting and stopping the POP3 serviceStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_POP3_SERVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
enter ser
03 Administering the Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
?StepsPrintChanging the default POP3 port
POP3 service\changing default port forH_CHANGING_THE_DEFAULT_POP3_PORT_STEPSTopic1Changing the default POP3 portStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_POP3_SERVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ample, y
03 Administering the Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
?StepsPrintSetting up the Person document for a POP3 user
POP3 users\setting up Person documents forPerson documents\POP3 users andH_SETTING_UP_POP3_USERS_STEPSTopic1Setting up the Person document for a POP3 userStepsH_SETTLNG_UP_POP3_USERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
mation to
03 Administering the Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
?StepsPrintCreating a mail file for a POP3 user
POP3 users\creating mlil files forH_CREATING_A_MAIL_FILE_FOR_A_POP3_USER_STEPSTopic1Creating a mail file for a POP3 userStepsH_SETTING_UP_POP3_USERS_OVER
H_CREATING_A_MAIL_FILE_FOR_A_POP3_USER_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_214668060829232553=To manually create a mail file
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System20 Setting up the Domino POP3 Service
?OverviewPrintConfiguring POP3 client software
Eudora Pro client\configuring for POP3Netscape Navigator Mail client\configuring for POP3POP3 client software\configuringH_CONFIGURING_POP3_CLIENT_SOFTWARE_OVERTopic1Configuring POP3 client softwareOverviewH_SETTING_UP_POP3_USERS_OVER
H_CONFIGURING_POP3_CLIENT_SOFTWARE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_196599923229239409=Exampll of configuring a Netscape Navigator Mail clientH_EXAMPLE_CONFIGURING_NETSCAPE_NAVIGATOR_POP3_CLIENT_EX_MIDTOPIC_214668060829232554=Example of configuring a Eudora Pro client
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
t name a
03 Administering the Domino System21 Setting u| the Domino IMAP Service
ChapPrintChapter 21
Setting Up the IMAP ServiceH_DOMINO_IMAP_SERVER_CHAPTopic1Chapter 21
Setting Up the IMAP ServiceChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up a Domino server to use the IMAP service and how to set up IMAP users.
See Also
Click lere
03 Administering the Domino System21 Setting up the Domino IMAP Service
?OverviewPrintStarting and stopping the IMAP task
IMAP service\startingH_STARTING_AND_STOPPING_THE_IMAP_SERVER_OVERTopic1Starting and stopping the IMAP taskOvervlewH_OVERVIEW_OF_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_IMAP_SERVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System21 Setting up the Domino IMAP Service
?StepsPrintChanging the default IMAP port
IMAP se|vice\changing default port forH_CHANGING_THE_DEFAULT_IMAP_PORT_STEPSTopic1Changing the default IMAP portStepsH_OVERVIEW_OF_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_IMAP_SERVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
current,
03 Administering the Domino System<1 Setting up the Domino IMAP Service
?StepsPrintSetting up the Person document for an IMAP user
IMAP users\setting up Person documents forPerson documents\IMAP users andH_SETTING_UP_IMAP_USERS_STEPSTopic1Setting up the Person document for an IMAP userStepsH_SETTING_UP_IMAP_USERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
u want repl
03 Administering the Domino System21 Setting up the Domino IMAP Service
?StepsPrintCreating a mail file for an IMAP user
IMAP users\creating mail files forH_CREATING_A_MAIL_FILE_FOR_AN_IMAP_USER_STEPSTopic1Creating a mail file for an IMAP userStepsH_SETTING_UP_IMAP_USERS_OVER
H_CREATING_A_MAIL_FILE_FOR_AN_IMAP_USER_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_339540758429232722=To manually crelte a mail file
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System21 Setting up the Domino IMAP Service
?OverviewPrintEnabling a mail file for IMAP access
IMAP client software\clnfiguringIMAP users\enabling mail files forPC-Pine client\configuringH_ENABLING_A_MAIL_FILE_FOR_IMAP_ACCESS_STEPSTopic1Enabling a mail file for IMAP accessOverviewH_SETTING_UP_IMAP_USERS_OVER
H_ENABLING_A_MAIL_FILE_FOR_IMAP_ACCESS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_339540758429232722=To enable mail filesH_ENABLING_A_MAIL_FILE_FOR_IMAP_ACCESS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_339540758429232723=ExamplesH_CONFIGURING_IMAP_CLIENT_SOFTWARE_OVER=Configuring IMAP client softwareH_CONFIGURING_IMAP_CLIENT_SOFTWARE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_1272066528292<9408=Example of configuring PC-Pine folder prefixesH_EXAMPLE_CONFIGURING_PC_PINE_FOLDER_PREFIXES_EX_MIDTOPIC_339540758429232723=Example of configuring other IMAP client software folder prefixes
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ck here
03 Administering the Dominl System22 Monitoring Mail
This chapter describes how to track messages to determine if they reached the recipients and how to generate mail usage reports.
03 Administering the Domino System22 Monitoring Mail
?StepsPrintSetting up the Reports databaseH_CREATING_THE_REPORTS_DATABASE_STEPSTopic1Setting up the Reports databaseStepsH_SETTING_UP_MAIL_MONITORING_7287_OVERVIEW
03 Administering the Domino System22 Monitoring Mail
?OverviewPrintControlling the Mail Tracking CollectorH_\HE_MAIL_TRACKER_COLLECTOR_TASK_OVERTopic1Controlling the Mail Tracking CollectorOverviewH_SETTING_UP_MAIL_MONITORING_7287_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
or. The
03 Administering the Domino System22 Monitoring Mail
?OverviewPrintConfiguring the server for message trackingH_CONFIGURING_MESSAGE_TRACKING_WITH_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_OVERTopic1Configuring the server for message trackingOverviewH_SETTING_UP_MAIL_MONITORING_7287_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Conn
03 Administering the Domino System22 Monitoring Mail
?StepsPrintTo change the execution interval for a scheduled reportH_GENERATING_MAIL_USAGE_REPORTS_FROM_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_203349590429235177Topic1To change the execution interval for a scheduled reportStepsH_ISSUING_A_TRACKING_REQUEST_FROM_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
case sensit
03 Administering the Domino System22 Monitoring Mail
?StepsPrintGenerating a mail usage report with the Web AdministratorH_GENERATING_MAIL_USAGE_REPORTS_FROM_THE_DOMINO_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_STEPSTopic1Generating a mail usage report with the Web AdministratorStepsH_ISSUING_A_TRACKING_REQUEST_FROM_THE_DOMILO_ADMINISTRATOR_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System22 Monitoring Mail
?StepsPrintTracking a mail message with the Web AdministratorH_TRACKING_A_MAIL_MESSAGE_FROM_THE_WEB_ADMINIS\RATION_TOOL_9591_STEPSTopic1Tracking a mail message with the Web AdministratorStepsH_ISSUING_A_TRACKING_REQUEST_FROM_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s structure
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
ChapPrintChapter 23
Setting Up the Domino Web Serverh_chapter_1_setting_up_the_Domino_web_serverTopic1Chapter 23
Setting Up the Domino Web ServerChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up a Domino server as a Web server.
discussion threads and central information capture) or the team that knows it
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?DetailsPrintExample of setting up a Web server
Web servers\example ofH_EXAMPLES_SETTING_UP_A_WEB_SERVER_8637_DETAILSTopic1Example of setting up a Web serverDetailsH_QUICKSTART_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINL_WEB_SERVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
vidual inpu
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
StepsPrintStarting and stopping the Domino Web server
Domino Web server\runningHTTP server task\runnlngH_STARTING_AND_STOPPING_THE_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_3955_STEPSTopic1Starting and stopping the Domino Web serverSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
for tea
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?DetailsPrlntExample of hosting multiple Web sites
Virtual Web servers\example ofH_EXAMPLES_HOSTING_MULTIPLE_SITES_ON_ONE_SERVER_1442_DETAILSTopic1Example of hosting multiple Web sitesDetailsH_ABOUT_HOSTING_MULTIPLE_SITES_ON_ONE_SERVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
If the act
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?StepsPrintSetting up multiple Web sites on one server
Hosting\multiple sites on a serverVirtual Server documents\creatingVirtual Web servers\creatingH_CREATING_A_VIRTUAL_SERVERTopic1Setting up multiple Web sites on one serverStepsH_ABOUT_HOSTING_MULTIPLE_SITES_ON_ONE_SERVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
inutes are
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?StepsPrintSetting up security for multiple Web sites
Anonymous access\virtual serversHome pages\for virtual serversName-and-password authentication\virtual serversSSL\virtual servers andSecuri|y\virtual Web serversVirtual Web servers\securityH_SETTING_UP_VIRTUAL_SERVER_SECURITY_7062_STEPSTopic1Setting up security for multiple Web sitesStepsH_ABOUT_HOSTING_MULTIPLE_SITES_ON_ONE_SERVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e decisio
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?StepsPrintSetting up security for a Web site alias
Aliases\security andAnonymous access\virtual hostsName-and-password authentication\virtual hostsSSL\virtual hostsSecurity\virtual hostsVirtual hosts\securityH_SETTING_UP_SECURITY_FOR_WEB_SERVER_ALIAS_STEPSTopic1Setting up security for a Web site aliasStepsH_USING_AN_ALIAS_FOR_A_WEB_SITE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?OverviewPrintManaging the memory cache on the Web server
Cache\Web serverDomino Web server\cacheFile cache\Domino Web serverFormulas\cachingWeb servers\cacheH\ABOUT_THE_DOMINO_MEMORY_CACHE_730_OVERVIEWTopic1Managing the memory cache on the Web serverOverviewH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_WEB_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_AND_RESPONSE_TIME_8630_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
m instead o
03 Administerilg the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?StepsPrintSpecifying network time-outs on the Web server
Common Gateway Interface\timeout, specifying for WebKeep alive headers\sending to Web serverNetwork\timeout settings for Web serverServer documents\Timeouts settings for Web inTimeout settings\specifying for WebH_SPECIFYING_TIMEOUTS_SETTINGS_IN_THE_HTTP_SERVER_DOCUMENTTopic1Specifying network time-outs on the Web serverStepsH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_WEB_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_AND_RLSPONSE_TIME_8630_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
in the t
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?StepsPrintSpecifying the number of threads used by the Domino Web server
Requests\Web serverThreads\Web serverWeb servers\processing requestsH_CHANGING_THE_NUMBER_OF_THREADS_DOMINO_USES_TO_PROCESS_REQUESTSTopic1Specifying the number of threads used by the Domino Web serverStepsH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_WEB_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_AND_RESPONSE_TIME_8630_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
oblems? Th
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?StepsPrintImproving file-download performance for Web clients
Byte-range serving\Web server andDownloading files\improving performance for Web clientsFiles\downloading from Web serverH_ARYDD_STEPSTopic1Improving file-download performance for Web clientsStepsH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_WEB_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_AND_RESPONSE_TIME_8<30_OVERVIEW
H_ARYDD_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_348174096029248241=Example of downloading a file from the server's file systemH_ARYDD_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_348174096029248242=Example of downloading a file attachment
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
om Setup.
03,Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
StepsPrintFinding links with the Redirect URL command
Database links\creating on the WebRedirect URL command\finding links withURLs\redirectingH_FINDING_LINKS_WITH_THE_REDIRECT_URL_COMMAND_STEPSTopic1Finding links with the Redirect URL commandSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ipant Profi
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
StepsPrintRestricting the amount of data users can send to the server
Files\compressing when uploading to WebPOST command\restrictingWeb\restricting amount of data sentH_RESTRICTING_THE_AMOUNT_OF_DATA_USERS_CAN_SEND_TO_THE_SERVER_STEPSTopic1Restricting the amount of data users can send to the serverStlps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Can TeamR
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?OverviewPrintSpecifying the default home page for the Web server
Default home page\specifying for WelDomino Web server\default home pageHome pages\specifying defaultWeb servers\default home pageH_RULES_FOR_DISPLAYING_THE_DEFAULT_HOME_PAGE_2816_OVERVIEWTopic1Specifying the default home page for the Web serverOverviewH_ABOUT_CHANGING_WEB_SERVER_DISPLAY_OPTIONS_9114_OVERVIEW
H_RULES_FOR_DISPLAYING_THE_DEFAULT_HOME_PAGE_2816_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_144411184029217461=To specify the default home page
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?DetailsPrintExamples of specifying default home pages
Home pages\examplesH_EXAMPLES_CHANGING_THE_DEFAULT_HOME_PAGE_1474_DETAILSTopic1Examples of specifying default home pagesDetailsH_ABOUT_CHANGING_WEB_SERVER_DISPLLY_OPTIONS_9114_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e copy, sen
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?StepsPrintSpecifying GIF or JPEG conversion
GIF files\Wel server andGraphics\Web server formatImage display\Web server andInterlaced rendering\Web images andJPEG files\Web server andProgressive rendering\Web images andH_SPECIFYING_OPERATION_INFORMATION_SETTINGS_IN_THE_HTTP_SERVER_DOCUMENTTopic1Specifying GIF or JPEG conversionStepsH_ABOUT_CHANGING_WEB_SERVER_DISPLAY_OPTIONS_9114_OVERVIEW
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?StepsPrintSpecifying the lumber of lines to display in a view
Databases\specifying view lines for WebLines per view page\Web serverViews\specifying default number of lines for Webh_Specifying_the_number_of_lines_to_display_in_the_viewTopic1Specifying the number of lines to display in a viewStepsH_ABOUT_CHANGING_WEB_SERVER_DISPLAY_OPTIONS_9114_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
AboutPrintCustomizing Web server messages
DOMCFG.NSF\Web server messages andDomino Configuration database\Web server messages andDomino Web server\customizing messagesError messages\customizing for WebMessages\customizing Web serverResponses\customizing Web serverWeb server|\customizing messagesH_ABOUT_CUSTOMIZING_WEB_SERVER_MESSAGESTopic1Customizing Web server messagesAbout
H_ABOUT_CUSTOMIZING_WEB_SERVER_MESSAGES_MIDTOPIC_324838681629232755=To customize Web server messages
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administerilg the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
StepsPrintCreating the Domino Configuration database
DOMCFG.NSF\creatingDomino Configuration database\creatingH_CREATING_THE_DOMINO_CONFIGURATION_DATABASETopic1Creating the Domino Configuration databaseSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
StepsPrintCreating customized Web server messagesH_CUSTOMIZING_WEB_SERVER_MESSAGESTopic1Creating customized Web server messagesSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?DetailsPrintExample of customizing Web server messages
Web server messages\customizingWeb servers\customizing messagesH_EXAMPLES_CUSTOMIZING_WEB_SERVER_MESSAGES_4513_DETAILSTopic1Example of customizing Web server messagesDetailsH_CUSTOMIZING_WEB_SERVER_MESSAGES
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
StepsPrintSpecifying an international
(character set when retrieving pages
Arabic character set\specifyingBaltic character set\specifyingCentral European character,set\specifyingCharacter set options\specifying for WebCharacter sets\specifying mapping for WebChinese character set\specifyingCyrillic character set\specifyingDefault character set\specifying for Web serverGreek character set\specifyingHebrew character set\specifyingInternational settings\specifying for WebJapanese character set\specifyingKorean character set\specifyingLanguage\choosing a default for WebMultilingual applications\setting up Web forServer documents\specifying international settingsThai charlcter set\specifyingTurkish character set\specifyingVietnamese character set\specifyingWestern character set\specifyingH_SPECIFYING_INTERNATIONAL_SETTINGS_IN_THE_SERVER_DOCUMENTTopic1Specifying an international
(character set when retrieving pagesSteps
H_SPECIFYING_INTERNATIONAL_SETTINGS_IN_THE_SERVER_DOCUMENT_MIDTOPIC_324838681629232755=To specify an international character setH_SPECIFYING_INTERNATIONAL_SETTINGS_IN_THE_SERVER_DOCUMENT_MIDTOPIC_324838681629232756=Character sets for Web server pages
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
StepsPrintLimiting the number of documents displayed when searching
Domino Web server\search resultsSearch results\Web serverSearchMlx\number of documents to displayWeb serversH_LIMITING_THE_NUMBER_OF_DOCUMENTS_DISPLAYED_WHEN_SEARCHING_6079_STEPSTopic1Limiting the number of documents displayed when searchingSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino Sy|tem23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?StepsPrintRedirecting and remapping URLs and directoriesH_MAPPING_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_TO_A_DIFFERENT_LOCATIONTopic1Redirecting and remapping URLs and directoriesStepsH_WAYS_TO_MANAGE_THE_DOMINO_FILE_SYSTEM
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
@ExamplesPrintExamples of redirecting and remapping URLs and directories
Mapping\URLS, examples ofMapping\directories, examples ofH_EXAMPLES_MAPPING_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_TO_A_DIFFERENT_LOCATIONTopic1Examples of redirecting and remapping URLs and directoriesExamplesH_MAPPING_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_TO_A_DIFFERENT_LOCATION
H_EXAMPLES_MAPPING_DOMLNO_DIRECTORIES_TO_A_DIFFERENT_LOCATION_MIDTOPIC_144411184029217461=Mapping a URL to a different directoryH_EXAMPLES_MAPPING_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_TO_A_DIFFERENT_LOCATION_MIDTOPIC_144411184029217462=Mapping a URL to a different URLH_EXAMPLES_MAPPING_DOMINO_DIRECTORIES_TO_A_DIFFERENT_LOCATION_MIDTOPIC_144411184029217463=Redirecting a URL
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System23 Setting up the Domino Web Server
?OverviewPrintChanging the location of HTML, CGI, and icon files
Common Gateway Interface\directory, specifying for WebDirectories\locating Web server filesFiles\managing Domino Web serverHTML\directory, specifying for WebIcons\directory, specifying for WebMa|ping\Web server filesPaths\to Web filesH_ABOUT_THE_LOCATION_OF_HTML_ICON_AND_CGI_FILES_373_OVERVIEWTopic1Changing the location of HTML, CGI, and icon filesOverviewH_WAYS_TO_MANAGE_THE_DOMINO_FILE_SYSTEM
H_ABOUT_THE_LOCATION_OF_HTML_ICON_AND_CGI_FILES_373_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_144411184029217461=To identify the location of HTML, CGI, and icon files
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System24 Setting up the Domino for Microsoft IIS Server
ChapPrintChapter 24
Setting Up the Domino for Microsoft Internet Information ServerH_USING_A_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_WITH_MICROSOFT_INTERNET_INFORMATION_SERVER_6035_CHAPTopic1Chapter 24
Setting Up the Domino for Microsoft Internet Information ServerChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up and use the Domino for Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) to process HTTP requests for Domino databases.
03 Administering the Domino System24 Setting up the Domino for Microsoft IIS Server
?StepsPrintCompleting basic requirements for Domino for Microsoft IIS
Domino for Microsoft IIS\requirementsMMC\using for Domino for IISMicrosoft IIS\requirementsH_BASIC_SYSTEM_REQUIREMENTS_FOR_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_STEPSTopic1Completing basic requirements for Domino for Microsoft IISStepsH_SETTING_UP_DOLINO_FOR_IIS_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System24 Setting up the Domino for Microsoft IIS Server
?StepsPrintConfiguring Domino for Microsoft IIS
AIISFILT.DLL\specifyingDomino for Microsoft IIS\setting upExtension filters\specifying IISISAPI extensions\specifyingIcons directory\specifying for IISJava applet directory\specifying for IISMicrosoft IIS\setting upNIISLFILT.DLL\specifyingH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_FOR_MICROSOFT_IIS_5182_STEPSTopic1Configuring Domino for Microsoft IISStepsH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_STEPS
H_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_FOR_MICROSOFT_IIS_5182_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_407935334429212787=To set up the ISAPI extensionH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_FOR_MILROSOFT_IIS_5182_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_407935334429212788=To set up the IIS extension filterH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_FOR_MICROSOFT_IIS_5182_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_407935334429212789=To specify the Domino icons and Java applet directoriesH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_FOR_MICROSOFT_IIS_5182_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_407935334429212790=To start Domino for IISH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_FOR_MICROSOFT_IIS_5182_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_124003792029238606=To stop Domino for IIS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
nt Notes to
03 Administering the Domino System24 Setting up the Domino for Microsoft IIS Server
?StepsPrintSetting up security for Domino for Microsoft IIS
Allow Anonymous Access\Domino for IISAuthentication\Domino for IISBasic password authentication\Domlno for IISMicrosoft IIS\securityNT Challenge/Response\Domino for IISNTLM\Domino for IISSSL\Domino for IISSecurity\Domino for IISH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_AND_MICROSOFT_IIS_SECURITY_4800_STEPSTopic1Setting up security for Domino for Microsoft IISStepsH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_STEPS
H_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_AND_MICROSOFT_IIS_SECURITY_4800_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_407935334429212787=To set up security
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System24 Setting up the Domino for Microsoft IIS Server
@ExamplesPrintExamples of Domino for Microsoft IIS security
Allow Anonymous Access\examplesBasic password authentication\examples of for IISNT Challenge/Response\examplesNTLM\examplesSSL\examples ol Domino for IISH_EXAMPLES_OF_SECURITY_FOR_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_EXTopic1Examples of Domino for Microsoft IIS securityExamplesH_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_AND_MICROSOFT_IIS_SECURITY_4800_STEPS
H_EXAMPLES_OF_SECURITY_FOR_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_EX_MIDTOPIC_124003792029238606=Allow Anonymous AccessH_EXAMPLES_OF_SECURITY_FOR_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_EX_MIDTOPIC_124003792029238607=Basic AuthenticationH_EXAMPLES_OF_SECURITY_FOR_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_EX_MIDTOPIC_124003792029238608=Allow Anonymous Access and Basic AuthenticationH_EXAMPLES_OL_SECURITY_FOR_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_EX_MIDTOPIC_124003792029238609=Windows NT Challenge/ResponseH_EXAMPLES_OF_SECURITY_FOR_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_EX_MIDTOPIC_124003792029238610=Windows NT Challenge/Response and Basic AuthenticationH_EXAMPLES_OF_SECURITY_FOR_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_EX_MIDTOPIC_124003792029238611=Allow Anonymous Access, Basic Authentication, and Windows NT Challenge/ResponseH_EXAMPLES_OF_SECURITY_FOR_DOMINO_FOR_IIS_EX_MIDTOPIC_124003792029238612=SSL
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
ChapPrintChapter 25
Setting Up the Web NavigatorH_CHAPTER_X__INTERNOTES_WEB_NAVIGATOR_ADMIN_INFORMATIONTopic1Chapter 25
Setting Up the Web NavigatorChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Lrial
This chapter describes how to set up the server that runs the Web Navigator and how to manage the information retrieved from the Internet.
Choose a server where
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintStarting and stopping the Web Navigator program
Server Web Navigator\starting and stoppingWeb Navigator\starting and stoppingWeb task\Server Web Navigator andH_STARTING_AND_STOPPING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_8639_STEPSTopic1Starting and stopping the Web Navigator programStepsH_SETTING_UP_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR
CN=Da|id Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintUsing a proxy server to connect the Web Navigator to the Internet
HTTP proxy\connecting Server Web Navigator, throughInternet\connecting Server Web Navigator throughProxies\specifying for Server Web NavigatorSOCKS proxy\connecting Server Web Navigator throughServer Web Navigator\proxiesServer Web Navigator\specifying proxiesSyntax\No proxies field andH_CONNECTING_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_THROUGH_A_PROXY_SERVER_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATORTopic1Using a proxy server to connect the Web Navigator to the InternetStepsH_SETTING_UP_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Click here
See Also
Click here
What is replication?
Click here
&Arial
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintEditing the Server document for the Web Navigator H_EDITING_THE_SERVER_DOCUMENT_FOR_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_STEPSTopic1Editing the Server document for the Web Navigator StepsH_SETTIIG_UP_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintSetting up users to use the Web Navigator
Forms\HTILServer Web Navigator\private page accessServer Web Navigator\setting up usersWeb Navigator\setting up usersH_SETTING_UP_USERS_FOR_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_STEPSTopic1Setting up users to use the Web NavigatorStepsH_SETTING_UP_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR
H_SETTING_UP_USERS_FOR_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_33287164829232939=To allow users to access private Web pages
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Help butto
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintAllowing multiple users to retrieve pages concurrently
Concurrent retrievers\Server Web NavigatorServer Web Navigator\retrieval settingsH_SPECIFYING_THE_MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_USERS_WHO_CAN_RETRIEVE_PAGES_CONCURRENTLYTopic1Allowing multiple usirs to retrieve pages concurrentlyStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
on your
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintControlling acciss to Web sites
Server Web Navigator\controlling access to sitesWeb sites\controlling access toH_SPECIFYING_WEB_SITES_USERS_CAN_ACCESSTopic1Controlling access to Web sitesStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_OVER
H_SPECIFYING_WEB_SITES_USERS_CAN_ACCESS_MIDTOPIC_267501008029232771=To control access to Web sitesH_SPECIFYING_WEB_SITES_USERS_CAN_ACCESS_MIDTOPIC_367501958429207597=
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
menta
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
@DetailsPrintExamples of controlling access to Web sites
Examples\Web site accessServer Web Navigator\Web site access examplesServer Web Navigator\examples of Web site accessH_EXAMPLES:_SPECIFYING_WEB_SITES_TO_ACCESSTopic1Eyamples of controlling access to Web sitesDetailsH_SPECIFYING_WEB_SITES_USERS_CAN_ACCESS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintControliing access to Internet services
FTP\providing accessFinger\providing accessGopher\providing accessHTTP\providing accessHTTPS\providing accessInternet services\accessingServer Web Navigator\access to Internet servicesServices\InternetH_SPECIFYING_INTERNET_PROTOCOLS_TO_USETopic1Controlling access to Internet servicesStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintSetting up the Web Navigator to retrieve pages on sites secured by SSL
Certificates, SSL\adding for Server Web NavigatorSSL\setting up for Web NavigatorSecurity\Server Web NavigatorWeb Navigator SSL\setting upH_WAYS_TOYENABLE_ACCESS_TO_SSL_WEB_PAGES_RETRIEVED_BY_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATORTopic1Setting up the Web Navigator to retrieve pages on sites secured by SSLStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_OVER
H_WAYS_TO_ENABLE_ACCESS_TO_SSL_WEB_PAGES_RETRIEVED_BY_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_MIDTOPIC_367501958429207597=To add specific certificates H_WAYS_TO_ENABLE_ACCESS_TO_SSL_WEB_PAGES_RETRIEVED_BY_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_MIDTOPIC_367501958429207598=To add certificates automaticallyH_WAYS_TO_ENABLE_ACCESS_TO_SSL_WEB_PAGES_RITRIEVED_BY_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_MIDTOPIC_367501958429207600=To view certificates
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
'++Lo
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintSending maii from a Web page to the Internet
Internet mail\routingMail\routing from Web pageMailto\setting upWeb pages\mailtoH_ROUTING_MAIL_TO_THE_INTERNET_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATORTopic1Sending mail from a Web page to the Internet StepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
tus Note
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintDisplaying who retrieved a page in the Web Navigator database
Authors\displaying for Server Web NavigatorServer Web Navigator\displaying authorsViews\in Server Web Navigator databaseWeb Navigator\displaying authorsH_DISPLAYING_THE_NAME_OF_THE_USER_WHO_RETRIEVED_A_PAGETopic1Displaying who retrieved a page in the Web Navigator databasiStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintCustomizing the default appearance of pages in yhe Web Navigator database
HTML preferences\in Server Web NavigatorServer Web Navigator\changing appearance of pagesText\appearance of in Server Web NavigatorURLs\appearance of in Server Web NavigatorWeb Navigator\changing appearance of pagesH_MODIFYING_THE_APPEARANCE_OF_WEB_PAGES_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATORTopic1Customizing the default appearance of pages in the Web Navigator databaseStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintSaving and viewing HTML sources in the Web Navigator database
HTML\displaying source for Server Web NavigatorInterNotes server\saving HTML sourceServer Yeb Navigator\displaying HTML sourceH_DISPLAYING_HTML_SOURCE_FOR_A_PAGETopic1Saving and viewing HTML sources in the Web Navigator databaseStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_OVER
H_DISPLAYING_HTML_SOURCE_FOR_A_PAGE_MIDTOPIC_367501958429207597=To save HTML sourcesH_DISPLAYING_HTML_SOURCE_FOR_A_PAGE_MIDTOPIC_367501958429207598=To view HTML sources
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintRenaming and moving the Web Navigator database
Server Web Navigator\moving out of data directoryServer Web Navigator\renaming databaseWEB.NSF\renamingWeb Navigator\moving out of data directoryWeb Navigator\renamingH_RENAMING_THEYSERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_FILE_NAMETopic1Renaming and moving the Web Navigator databaseStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_OVER
H_RENAMING_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_FILE_NAME_MIDTOPIC_367501958429207597=To rename the Web Navigator databaseH_RENAMING_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_FILE_NAME_MIDTOPIC_367551958429207598=To move the Web Navigator database
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintSetting Web Navigator agent preferences
Agents\PurgePurge agent\Server Web NavigatorH_USING_THE_PURGE_AGENT_TO_MANAGE_THE_SIZE_OF_THE_DATABASETopic1Setting Web Navigator agent preferencesStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_OVER
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?AboutPrintManaging the size of the Web Navigator database
Databases\Server Web NavigatorPurge agent\enablingServer Web Navigator\managing size of databaseSize\Server Web Navigator databaseWeb Navigator\managing size ofH_MANAGING_THE_SIZE_OF_TIE_DATABASE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATORTopic1Managing the size of the Web Navigator databaseAboutH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_OVER
H_MANAGING_THE_SIZE_OF_THE_DATABASE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_MIDTOPIC_367551958429207597=To specify purge criteriaH_MANAGING_THE_SIZE_OF_THE_DATABASE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_MIDTOPIC_367551958429207598=To enable the Purge agent
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?StepsPrintRefreshing pages in the Web Navigator database
Agents\RefreshCache\setting for Server Web NavigatorDates\on Web pagesRefresh agent\enablingRefresh agent\usingServer Web Navigator\setting cache optionsWeb Navigator\setting iache optionsWeb pages\updating for Server Web NavigatorH_SETTING_CACHE_OPTIONS_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATORTopic1Refreshing pages in the Web Navigator databaseStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_OVER
H_SETTING_CACHE_OPTIONS_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_MIDTOPIC_367551958429207597=To update pages when users retrieve pagesH_SETTING_CACHE_OPTIONS_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_MIDTOPIC_367551958429207598=To use the Refresh agent to update pages
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System25 Setting up the Web Navigator
?AboutPrintCalculating the highest rated pages in the Web Navigator database
Agents\AveragingAveraging agent\enablingServer Web Navigator\about the Averaging agentWeb pages\rateiH_ABOUT_AVERAGING_RATED_PAGESTopic1Calculating the highest rated pages in the Web Navigator databaseAboutH_CUSTOMIZING_THE_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DATABASE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTY Service
This chapter describes how to set up the NNTP service on a Domino server and how to set up and manage iewsgroups and newsfeeds.e
_Remove From Folder
03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
?AboutPrintStarting and stopping the NNTP service on a Domino server
Load NNTP commandNNTP service\startingNNTP service\stoppingTell commands\NNTPH_STARTING_AND_STOPPING_THE_DOMINO_NNTP_SERVER_2328Topic1Starting and stopping the NNTP service on a Domino serverAboutH_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_NNTP_SERVER_1176
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Books
03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
?AboutPrintSetting up the Server document for the NNTP service
Connection documents\NNTP serviceNNTP Server document\setting upNNTP service\setting up in Server documentServer documents\NNTP serviceH_SETTING_UP_A_NEWSFEED_8652Topic1Setting up the Server document for the NNTP serviceAboutH_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_NNTP_SERVER_1176
H_SETTING_UP_A_NEWSFEED_MIDTOPIC_42836633629224260=To set up the NNTP service in a Server document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
?StepsPrintControlliig access to the Domino server running the NNTP service
NNTP server\controlling access toH_CONFIGURING_HOST_ACCESSTopic1Controlling access to the Domino server running the NNTP serviceStepsH_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_NNTP_SERVER_1176
H_CONFIGURING_HOST_ACCESS_MIDTOPIC_174018608029248646=Preventing all remote NNTP servers from pulling articles
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ent From So
03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
?StepsPrintCreating Connection documents for the NNTP server
Connection documents\NNTP LAN connectionConnection documents\Network dialup for NNTPConnection documents\creating for NNTP serviceH_CREATING_CONNECTION_DOCUMENTS_FOR_THE_NNTP_SERVER_STEPSTopic9Creating Connection documents for the NNTP serverStepsH_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_NNTP_SERVER_1176
H_CREATING_CONNECTION_DOCUMENTS_FOR_THE_NNTP_SERVER_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_113067920029232926=To create a Connection document for the server that accepts newsfeedsH_SETTING_UP_A_NEWSFEED_8652_MIDTOPIC_93300243229228335=To create a Connection document for the Network Dialup connectionH_SETTING_UP_A_NEWSFEED_8652_MIDTOPIC_93300243229228336=To create a Connection document for the LAN connectionH_CREATING_CONNECTION_DICUMENTS_FOR_THE_NNTP_SERVER_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_113067920029232927=To connect to a remote server that is running the NNTP service
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTY Service
?AboutPrintCustomizing the default server ports for the NNTP service
NNTP service\customizing ports forServer ports\NNTPH_SPECIFYING_THE_NNTP_PORT_174Topic1Customizing the default server ports for the NNTP serviceAboutH_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_NNTP_SERVER_1176
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
H_ABOUT_Usenet_NEWSGROUPS_MIDTOPIC_276429361629214455=Private newsgroups and public USENET newsgroupsH_ABOUT_Usenet_NEWSGROUPS_MIDTOPIC_276420361629214456=Private newsgroupsH_ABOUT_Usenet_NEWSGROUPS_MIDTOPIC_276420361629214457=Public newsgroupsH_ABOUT_Usenet_NEWSGROUPS_MIDTOPIC_276420361629214458=Moderated newsgroups
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Forward
03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
?StepsPrintModerating a newsgroup
Newsgroups\cross-posting articlesNewsgroups\moderatingH_MODERATING_A_NEWSGROUP_STEPSTopic1Moderating a newsgroupStepsH_CREATING_AND_ADMINISTERING_NEWSGROUPS_OVER
H_NEWSGROUPS_8539_MIDTOPIC_223215212829228308=To accept or reject an articleH_NEWSGROUPS_8539_MIDTOPIC_297414323229228534=To cross-post an)article
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Template De
03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
?AboutPrintCreating newsgroups
Database Catalog\adding newsgroups)toDatabase Profile document\NNTPNewsgroups, USENETNewsgroups\accessing without anonymous accessNewsgroups\adding to Database CatalogNewsgroups\creatingNewsgroups\moderated and read-onlyNewsgroups\problems seeingNewsgroups\setting up ACLs forH_ABOUT_CREATING_NEWSGROUPSTopic1Creating newsgroupsAboutH_CREATING_AND_ADMINISTERING_NEWSGROUPS_OVER
H_ABOUT_CREATING_NEWSGROUPS_MIDTOPIC_442816029214417=To create a newsgroupH_ABOUT_NNTP_SERVER_SECURITY_MIDTOPIC_332816029214419=Setting up the ACL for a newsgriupH_ABOUT_CREATING_NEWSGROUPS_MIDTOPIC_223215212829228308=Accessing newsgroups that do not allow anonymous accessH_ABOUT_CREATING_NEWSGROUPS_MIDTOPIC_377392038429219672=Automatically creating moderated, read-only newsgroups
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System26 Setting up the Domino NNTP Service
?AboutPrintUsing control messages to administer newsgroups
Control messages\newsgroupNewsgroups\control messagesH_USING_CONTROL_MESSAGES_7840Topic1Using control messages to administer newsgroupsAboutH_CREATING_AND_ADMINISTERING_NEWSGROUPS_OVER
H_ABOUT_CONTROL_MESSAGES__MIDTOPIC_163770640029218476=To receive control messagesH_ABOUT_CONTROL_MESSAGES__MIDTOPIC_392816029214417=To respond to newgroup control messagesH_ABOUT_CONTROL_MESSAGES__MIDTOPIC_392816029214418=To respond to rmgroup control messages
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System26 Settiig up the Domino NNTP Service
?AboutPrintArchiving and deleting articles in newsgroups
Archiving\news articlesNews articles\deletingNewsgroups\deletingH_MANAGING_A_NEWSGROUP_7641Topic1Archiving and deleting articles in newsgroupsAboutH_CREATING_AND_ADMINISTERING_NEWSGROUPS_OVER
H_MANAGING_A_NEWSGROUP_7641_MIDTOPIC_81906640029224101=To archive articlesH_ABOUT_ARCHIVING_ARTICLES_IN_A_NEWSGROUP_MIDTOPIC_442816029214416=To delete articles from a newsgroupH_MANAGING_A_NEWSGROUP_7641_MIDTOPIC_288976640029224101=To delete a newsgroup
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Search
03 Administering the Domino System27 Planning Security
03 Administering the Domino System27 Planning Security
OverviewPrintNotes and Domino ID security
IDs\security andSecurity\IDs andH_CHECKLIST_OF_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_USER_ID_SECURITY_TASKS_1686_OYERTopic1Notes and Domino ID securityOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
ChapPrintChapter 28
Controlling Access to Domino Serversh_controlling_access_to_servers_and_databasesTopii1Chapter 28
Controlling Access to Domino ServersChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter includes information on setting up a Domino server to allow users and other servers to access it.
|.:#U
O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
?StepsPrintDenying Notes users access to all servers in a domain
Access\denyingDomain servers\denying accessServer access\denyingH_LOCKING_OUT_USERS_FROM_A_SERVERTopic1Denying Notes users access to all servers in a domainStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_AND_DIMINO_ACCESS_TO_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
?StepsPrintSetting up anonymous server access for Notes users and Domiio servers
Access\anonymousAnonymous access\setting upDomino server\anonymous access for Notes usersServer access\anonymousH_ALLOWING_ANONYMOUS_ACCESS_TO_A_SERVERTopic1Setting up anonymous server access for Notes users and Domino serversStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ACCESS_TO_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
?StepsPrintControlling access to a specific server port
Access\server portPorts\controlling access toSecurity\port accessServer ports\access toH_CONTROLLING_ACCESS_TO_SERVER_PORTSTopic1Controlling access to a specific server portStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ACCESS_TO_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
?StepsPrintControlling creation of databases and replicas
Access\from Internet and intranet clienysDatabases\controlling creation ofReplicas\controlling creation ofSecurity\databasesServer documents\database creationServers\database creationH_ALLOWING_CREATION_OF_DATABASES_ON_A_SERVERTopic1Controlling creation of databases and replicasStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ACCESS_TO_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
?StepsPrintRestricting users from monitoring databases on a server
Anonymous access\setting upH_ALLOWING_MONITORSTopic1Restricting users from monitoring databases on a serverStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ACCESS_TO_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Notes adds
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
?StepsPrintControlling access to a passthru server or passthru destination
Access\passthru serverPassthru servers\controlling access toPublic Address Book\passthru accissServer access\passthruServers\passthruH_ALLOWING_USERS_TO_ACCESS_A_SERVER_AS_PASSTHRU_DESTINATIONTopic1Controlling access to a passthru server or passthru destinationStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ACCESS_TO_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
?StepsPrintControlling server agents
Agents\controlling on serversServer agents\controllingH_RESTRICTING_AGENTS_ON_SERVERS_5644_STEPSTopic1Controlling server agentsStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ACCESS_TO_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
?StepsPrintControlling access by browser clients that use Java and Javascript
Access\controlling browser clientDomino server\controlling browser client accessH_RESTRICTING_SERVER_ACCESS_BY_BROWSER_CLIENTS_USING_JAVA_AND_JAVASCRIPT_STEPSTopic1Controlling)access by browser clients that use Java and JavascriptStepsH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ACCESS_TO_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
?AboutPrintControlling Web browser access to server files
Access\controlling Web browsers to server filesServer files\controlling Web browser access toWeb browsers\controlling access fromH_CONTROLLING_ACCESS_TO_SERVER_FILES_BY_WEB_BROWSERS_1204_STEPSTopic1Controlling Web browser access to server filesAboutH_CUSTOMIZING_NOTES_AND_DOMINO_ACCESS_TO_SERVERS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
@StepsPrintProtecting server files from Web client access
File Protection documentsFiles\protecting from Web accessH_HTTP_SERVER_AUTHENTICATIONTopic1Protecting server files from Web client accessStepsH_CONYROLLING_ACCESS_TO_SERVER_FILES_BY_WEB_BROWSERS_1204_STEPS
H_HTTP_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_MIDTOPIC_369793004829248788=To create a File Protection document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System98 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
@ExamplesPrintExamples of controlling Web browser access to server files
File Protection documents\exampleH_EXAMPLES_CONTROLLING_ACCESS_TO_SERVER_FILES_BY_WEB_BROWSERS_7530_EXTopic1Examples of controlling Web browser access to server filesExamplesH_CONTROLLING_ACCESS_TO_SERVER_FILES_BY_WEB_BROWSERS_1204_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System28 Controlling Access to Domino Servers
@StepsPrintCreating a Web realm
Realms\creatingWeb realms\creatingH_CREATING_A_REALM_1116Topic1Creating a Web realmStepsH_CONTROLLING_ACCESS_TO_SERVER_FILES_BY_WEB_BROWSERS_1204_STEPS
H_CREATING_A_REALM_1116_MIDTOPIC_388604096029298241=To create a Web Realm
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
ChapPrintChapter 29
Protecting and Managing IDsh_securing_ids_and_protecting_workstationsTopic1Chapter 29
Protectiig and Managing IDsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to control access to Domino server and Notes user IDs.
Click here
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintSetting up password verification
Passwords\checking during authenticationServers\password checking onTime limitsUsers\password checking forH_SETTING_UP_PASSWORD_CHECKING_DURING_AUTHENTICATIONTopic1Setting up password verificationStepsH_ABOUT_CHECKING_PASSWORDS_DURING_AUTHENTICATION
H_SETTING_UP_YASSWORD_CHECKING_DURING_AUTHENTICATION_MIDTOPIC_160610233629211385=To enable password verificationH_SETTING_UP_PASSWORD_CHECKING_DURING_AUTHENTICATION_MIDTOPIC_160610233629211386=To disable password verification for an individual userH_SETTING_UP_PASSWORD_CHECKING_DURING_AUTHENTICATION_MIDTOPIC_63557491229215454=To disable password verification for a server
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintSetting up ID and password recovery
ID and password recoveryIDs\recoveringPasswords\recoveringH_SETTING_UP_ID_FILE_RECOVERY_7111_STEPSTopic1Setting up ID and password recoveryStepsH_ABOUT_LOST_OR_DAMAGED_IDS_AND_FORGOTTEN_PASSWORDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintPreparing IDs for recovery
IDs\recoveringDIALOG 2730 1360 0H_CREATING_A_BACKUP_OF_A_USER_ID_3079_STEPSTopic1Preparing IDs for recoveryStepsH_ABOUT_LOST_OR_DAMAGED_IDS_AND_FORGOTTEN_PASSWORDS
H_CREATING_A_BACKUP_OF_A_USER_ID_3079_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237237260829211803=To send recovery information to the userH_CREATING_A_BACKUP_OF_A_USER_ID_3079_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_52050236829240993=To accept recovery information in the ID file
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintRecovering an ID or password
ID and password recoveryIDs\recoveringPasswords\recoveringDIALOG 2634 301H_RECOVERING_AN_ID_FILE_8549_STEPSTopic1Recovering an ID or passwordStepsH_ABOUT_LOST_OR_DAMAGED_IDS_AND_FORGOTTEN_PASSWORDS
H_RECOVERING_AN_ID_FIIE_8549_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237237260829211803=To request a backupH_RECOVERING_AN_ID_FILE_8549_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237297260829211804=To obtain an administration password for ID file recovery
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintChanging administrator ID-recovery information
H_CHANGING_ADMINISTRATOR_RECOVERY_INFORMATION_9886_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_237297260829211803=To add or delete administrators
CN=David Mahar/OU=IAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintCreating a new Notes public key and adding it to the Domino Directory
IDs\recoveringIDs\security andIDs\verifying public keysPublic Address Book\Server documentsPublic keys\verifyingSecurity\Notes IDs andSecurity\verifying public keysServer IDs\security andServer IDs\verifying public keysServer documents\verifying public keysServers\verifying public keysUser IDs\security andUser IDs\verifying public keysDIALOG 2585 28H_CREATING_A_NEW_PUBLIC_KEY_FOR_A_HIERARCHICAL_IDTopic1Creating a new Notes public key and adding it to the Domino DirectoryStepsH_ABOUT_PUBLIC_KEYS
H_CREATING_A_NEW_PUBLIC_KEY_FOR_A_HIERARCHICAL_ID_MIDTOPIC_338934406429204592=To create a new Notes public keyH_CREATING_A_NEW_PUBLIC_KEY_FOR_A_HIERARCHICAL_ID_MIDTOPIC_338934406429204593=To recertify the ID with a Notes certificate and add the Notes public key to the Domino DirectoryH_CREATING_A_NEW_PUBLIC_KEY_FOR_A_HIERARCHICAL_ID_MIDTOPIC_338984406429204594=To merge the new Notes certificate with the IDH_CREATING_A_NEW_PUBLIC_KEY_FOR_A_HIERARCHICAL_ID_MIDTOPIC_160610233629211385=To verify a Notes public key
CI=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ially rewa
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintAdding a Notes public key to the Domino Directory
Public keys\copyingPublic keys\mailingH_COPYING_A_PUBLIC_IEYTopic1Adding a Notes public key to the Domino DirectoryStepsH_ABOUT_PUBLIC_KEYS
H_COPYING_A_PUBLIC_KEY_MIDTOPIC_338984406429204592=To mail a public keyH_COPYING_A_PUBLIC_KEY_MIDTOPIC_160610233629211385=To copy a public key to a fileH_COPYING_A_PUBLIC_KEY_MIDTOPIC_338984406429204593=To paste the public key into a Personal Address BookH_COPYING_A_PUBLIC_KEY_MIDTOPIC_338984406429204594=To paste the public key into a Domino Directory
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
team)s fir
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintUsing cross-certificates to access servers and send secure S/MIME messages
Companies, external\communicating withCross-certificates\aicessing servers withCross-certificates\examplesCross-certificates\overviewCross-certificates\sending secure S/MIME messages withDomains\communicating with otherDomino DirectoryExamples\cross-certificationExternal companies\communicating withHierarchical organizations\certification andHierarchical organizations\communication between
pubnames_f_CrossCertificateH_ADDING_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_TO_ADDRESS_BOOKS_4550_STEPSTopic1Using cross-certificates to access servers and send secure S/MIME messagesStepsH_ABOUTYPUBLIC_KEYS
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
ExamplesPrintExamples of cross-certification
Cross-certificates\examplesH_ABOUT_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_AND_COMMUNICATION_BETWEEN_HIERARCHICAL_ORGANIZATIONSTopic1Examples of cross-certificationExamples
H_ABOUT_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_AND_COMMUNICATION_BETWEEN_HIERARCHICAL_ORGANIZATIONS_MIDTOPIC_223678118429218622=<+!>To authenticate with all servers in another organization<-!>H_ABOUT_CROSS_CIRTIFICATES_AND_COMMUNICATION_BETWEEN_HIERARCHICAL_ORGANIZATIONS_MIDTOPIC_223678118429218623=<+!>To authenticate with a specific server in another organization<-!>H_ABOUT_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_AND_COMMUNICATION_BETWEEN_HIERARCHICAL_ORGANIZATIONS_MIDTOPIC_85793046429218068=To send signed S/MIME messages
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintAdding a Notes or Internet cross-certificate on demand
Cross-certificates\addingOn-demand cross-certificatesSecurity\adding cross-certificates on demandDIALOG 2699 256H_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_USER_IDS_ON_DEMANDTopic1Adding a Notes or Internet cross-certificate on demandStepsI_ABOUT_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_AND_COMMUNICATION_BETWEEN_HIERARCHICAL_ORGANIZATIONS
H_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_USER_IDS_ON_DEMAND_MIDTOPIC_216985782429211032=To add a cross-certificate on demand
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintAdding a Notes cross-certificate by phone
Hierarchical IDs\cross-certification by phonePublic keys\cross-certification andDIALOG 2676 24H_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_IDS_BY_PHONETopic1Adding a Notes cross-certificate by phoneStepsH_ABOUT_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_AND_COMMUNICATION_BETWEEN_HIERARCHICAL_ORGANIZATIONS
H_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_IDS_BY_PHONE_MIDTOPIC_250151136029204591=Ti request a cross-certificate for a user, server, or certifier IDH_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_IDS_BY_PHONE_MIDTOPIC_216985782429211032=To request a cross-certificate for an ancestral certifier of an IDH_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_IDS_BY_PHONE_MIDTOPIC_250151136029204592=<+!>To add a cross-certificate<-!> to a Domino Directory or Personal Address Book
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
l reasons (
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintAdding a Notes cross-certificate for IDs by postal service
Hierarchical IDs\cross-certification through postal serviceDIALOG 9485 9485H_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_IDS_THROUGH_THE_POSTAL_SERVICETopic1Adding a Notes cross-certificate)for IDs by postal serviceStepsH_ABOUT_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_AND_COMMUNICATION_BETWEEN_HIERARCHICAL_ORGANIZATIONS
H_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_IDS_THROUGH_THE_POSTAL_SERVICE_MIDTOPIC_250151136029204591=To create a safe copy of an IDH_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_IDS_THROUGH_THE_POSTAL_SERVICE_MIDTOPIC_250151136029204592=To add a cross-certificate for the safe copy
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
the very
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintAdding a Notes cross-certificate for IDs by Notes mail
Hierarchical IDs\cross-certification through Notes mailDIALOG 2585 11H_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAILTopic1Adding a Notes cross-certificate for IDs)by Notes mailStepsH_ABOUT_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_AND_COMMUNICATION_BETWEEN_HIERARCHICAL_ORGANIZATIONS
H_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_250151136029204591=To send an ID for cross-certificationH_CROSSCERTIFYING_HIERARCHICAL_IDS_USING_NOTES_MAIL_MIDTOPIC_250151136029204592=To cross-certify the ID
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
yers and re
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintAdding an Internet cross-certificate from an Internet server
Cross-certificates\InternetInternet\cross-certificationDIALOG 2278 2050H_ADDING_AN_INTERNET_CROSS_CERTIFICATE_FROM_AN_INTERNET_SERVERTopic1Adding an Internet cross-certificate from an Internet serverStepsH_ABOUY_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_AND_COMMUNICATION_BETWEEN_HIERARCHICAL_ORGANIZATIONS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ollout.
03 Administering the Domino System29 Protecting and Managing IDs
?StepsPrintCreating a cross)certificate from a user's Person document
Cross-certificates\Person documents andInternet\cross-certificationDIALOG 2707 807H_CREATTING _A_CROSS_CERTIFICATE_FROM_USERS_PERSON_DOCUMENTTopic1Creating a cross-certificate from a user's Person documentStepsH_ABOUT_CROSS_CERTIFICATES_AND_COMMUNICATION_BETWEEN_HIERARCHICAL_ORGANIZATIONS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System30 Encryption and Electronic Signatures
ChapPrintChapter 30
Encryption and Electronic Signaturesh_using_encryption_and_electronic_signaturesTopic1Chapter 30
Encryption and Electronic SignaturesChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to use encryption to secure messages and how to use digital signatures to verify the author of the message.
helped shape its design. These may prove a useful resource when demonstratin
03 Administering the Domino System91 Setting up Firewalls
ChapPrintChapter 31
Setting Up Firewallsh_setting_up_firewallsTopic1Chapter 31
Setting Up FirewallsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes setting up a firewall to prevent system attacks on your network by Internet users.
TeamRoom design. Your team can use TeamRoom to support any of these work mode
03 Administering the Domino System31 Setting up Firewalls
?DetailsPrintUsing a Domino server as a firewall
Domino server\using as a firewallFirewalls\using a Domino server asH_USING_A_DOMINO_SERVER_AS_A_FIREWALL_DETAILSTopic1Using a Domino server is a firewallDetailsH_WAYS_TO_USE_AN_APPLICATIONLEVEL_PROXY
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
eatures
03 Administering the Domino System31 Setting up Firewalls
?ExamplesPrintUsing dual network adapters on the Domino paysthru server
Passthru servers\dual network adapters andSecurity\dual network adaptersSecurity\routerH_USING_DUAL_NETWORK_ADAPTERS_ON_YOUR_NOTES_SERVERTopic1Using dual network adapters on the Domino passthru serverExamplesH_WAYS_TO_USE_AN_APPLICATIONLEVEL_PROXY
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s a work pr
03 Administering the Domino System31 Setting up Firewalls
?AboutPrintUsing an HTTP proxy as an application proxy firewall
Application proxy firewall\using an HTTP proxy asCONNECT method\using with DominoFirewalls\using with HTTP proxyHTTP connections\overviewHTTP proxy\using as an application proxy firewallInternet protocols\FTPInternet protocols\GopherInternet protocols\HTTPIntirnet protocols\WAISRPC\HTTP proxies andSSL servers\and proxiesSSL tunneling\describedSSL\describedSSL\proxies andSecurity\CONNECT methodSecurity\SSL andSecurity\proxy connections andH_ABOUT_HTTP_PROXIESTopic1Using an HTTP proxy as an application proxy firewallAboutH_WAYS_TO_USE_AN_APPLICATIONLEVEL_PROXY
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Collaborat
03 Administering the Domino System31 Setting up Firewalls
?StepsPrintUsing an SMTP router and SMTP listener as an application proxy firewall
Application proxy firewall\using an SMTP router and SMTP listener asFirewalls\using an SMTP router and SMTP listenerInternet protocols\SMTPListener task\SMTPRouters\SMTPSMTP\and application proxy firewallsSecurity\SMTP routey and SMTP listener as an application proxy firewallH_USING_AN_SMTP_ROUTER_AND_SMTP_LISTENER_AS_AN_APPLICATION_PROXY_FIREWALL_STEPSTopic1Using an SMTP router and SMTP listener as an application proxy firewallStepsH_WAYS_TO_USE_AN_APPLICATIONLEVEL_PROXY
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
hiving
03 Administering the Domino System32 Setting up a Domino Certificate Authority
ChapPrintChapter 32
Setting Up a Domino Certificate AuthorityH_CHAPTER_30_SETTING_UP_A_DOMINO_CA_SERVER_2943_CHAPTopic1Chapter 32
Setting Up a Domino Certificate AuthorityChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to yet up a Domino certificate authority (CA) to issue server and client certificates.
The role of a manager in
03 Administering the Domino System32 Setting up a Domino Certificate Authority
?StepyPrintCreating the Domino Certificate Authority application
Certificate Authority\creatingDomino CA\creatingH_SETTING_UP_THE_CERTIFICATE_AUTHORITY_APPLICATIONTopic1Creating the Domino Certificate Authority applicationStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_THE_CERTIFICATE_AUTHORITY_APPLICATION
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Leader e
03 Administering the Domino System32 Setting up a Domino Certificate Authority
?StepsPrintCreating a CA key ring file and certificate
Certificates, InternetCertificates, SSL\creating a Certificate AuthorityCommon name\InternetDistinguished names\Internet certificatesFile names\key ringInternet\creating a key ring and certificate requestKey ring files\creating fir internal CAKey ring files\namingOrganizational units\InternetPasswords\for key ring fileSSL certificates\creating a Certificate AuthoritySSL key rings\creating a key ring and certificate request
cca461_f_CreateKeyringWithSelfRootcca461_f_DlgAlreadyHaveCAKeycca461_f_DlgConfirmCreateSelfRootH_CREATING_A_CERTIFICATE_TO_BECOME_A_CERTIFYING_AUTHORITYTopic1Creating a CA key ring file and certificateStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_THE_CERTIFICATE_AUTHORITY_APPLICATION
H_CREATING_A_CERTIFICATE_TO_BECOME_A_CEYTIFYING_AUTHORITY_MIDTOPIC_251297260829211803=To create a CA key ring file and certificateH_CREATING_A_CERTIFICATE_TO_BECOME_A_CERTIFYING_AUTHORITY_MIDTOPIC_287467510429239977=To change the password for the CA key ring file
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
with the t
03 Administering the Domino System32 Setting up a Domino Certificate Authority
?StepsPrintConfiguring the Domino Certificate Authority application profile
Certificate Authority profile\configuringDomino CA\configuring application profile forURLs\mailed to SSL server administrators
cca461_f_CAProfileH_MODIFYING_THE_PROFILE_FOR_THE_CERTIFICATE_AUTHORITY_APPLICATIONTopic1Configuring the Domino Certificate Authority application profileStepsH_IBOUT_SETTING_UP_THE_CERTIFICATE_AUTHORITY_APPLICATION
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
mRoom mai
03 Administering the Domino System32 Setting up a Domino Certificate Authority
?StepsPrintSetting up SSL on the IA server
Certificate Authority\setting up SSL on serverSSL\Certificate Authority server and
cca461_f_CreateCAServerKeyRingcca461_f_DlgConfirmCreateCAServerKeyRingH_SETTING_UP_THE_CERTIFICATION_AUTHORITY_SERVER_FOR_SSLTopic1Setting up SSL on the CA serverStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_THE_CERTIFICATE_AUTHORITY_APPLICATION
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
The facilitator is responsible for:
3 \0a
03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino Servers
ChapPrintChapter 33
Setting Up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino ServersH_CONTROLLING_INTERNET_AND_INTRANET_ACCESS_TO_SERVERS_5423_CHAPTopic1Chapter 33
ing Up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino ServersChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up servers for name-and-password and anonymous access by Internet/intranet clients. and folders
Click here
:2TMm
03 Administering the Domino System33 Setting up Name-and-Password and Anonymous Access to Domino Servers
?ExamplesPrintExamples of names allowed for Web client authentication
Authentication\examplesH_EXAMPLES_NAMES_ALLOWED_FOR_WEB_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_EXTopic1Examples of names allowed for Web client autoenticationExamplesH_SSL_AND_BASIC_PASSWORD_AUTHENTICATION_8792_OVERVIEW
H_EXAMPLES_NAMES_ALLOWED_FOR_WEB_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_EX_MIDTOPIC_380184864029244786=More name variations with lower securityH_EXAMPLES_NAMES_ALLOWED_FOR_WEB_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_EX_MIDTOPIC_380184864029244787=Fewer name variations with higher security
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Note
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
ChapPrintChapter 34
Setting Up SSL on a Domino ServerH_CHAPTER_2_SETTING_UP_INTERNET_SECURITY_2266_CHAPTopic1Chapter 34
Setting Up SSL on a Domino ServerChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up SSL on a Domino server to allow secure Internet and intranet access at your organization. and changing the status to Inactive; or automatically by TeamRoom, when the
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
?StepsPrintSetting up the Server Certificate Admin application
CSRV50.NTF\setting upSSL server\setting up applicationServer Certificate Admin\setting upServer Certificate AdministrationH_SETTING_UP_THE_CERTIFICATE_ADMINISTRATION_APPLICATIONTopic1Setting up the Server Certificate Admin applicationStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_ON_A_SERVER
H_SETTING_UP_THE_CERTIFICATE_ADMINISTRATION_APPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_72822163229240009=To set up the Server Oertificate Admin application
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
or Respon
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
?StepsPrintCreating a server key ring file
STH filesSecu
ity\creating a server key ring fileServer key ring file\creatingStash file\setting up for SSL
csrv461_f_CertAdminCreateKeyringcsrv461_f_DlgAlreadyHaveKeycsrv461_f_DlgConfirmCertReplacecsrv461_f_DlgConfirmCreateKeyringH_CREATING_A_SERVER_KEY_RING_FILE_5420_STEPSTopic1Creating a server key ring fileStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_ON_A_SERVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
l order.
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
?StepsPrintRequesting an SSL server certificate
SSL\server certificate requestSecurity\SSL server certificateServer Certificate Administration
cca461_f_DlgConfirmResubmitCertReqcca461_f_DlgConfirmResubmitRegReqcsrv461_f_CertAdminCreateOertRequestcsrv461_f_DlgConfirmCreateCertReqByClipboardcsrv461_f_DlgConfirmCreateCertReqByEmailH_SENDING_A_REQUEST_TO_A_COMMERCIAL_CERTIFICATION_AUTHORITYTopic1Requesting an SSL server certificateStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_ON_A_SERVER
H_SENDING_A_REQUEST_TO_A_COMMERCIAL_CERTIFICATION_AUTHORITY_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204175=From a Domino CAH_SENDING_A_REQUEST_TO_A_COMMERCIAL_CERTIFICATION_AUTHORITY_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204176=From a third-party CA
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
by descend
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
?StepsPrintMerging a CA certificate as a trusted root
Certificate Authority\merging certificatesCertificates\trusted rootsKey ring filos\merging a certificate from an external CASSL\merging certificatesTrusted roots\accepting server CA's certificate
cca461_f_CACertcsrv461_f_CertAdminMergeTrustedRootIntoKeyringcsrv461_f_DlgConfirmMergeTrustedRootcsrv461_f_DlgConfirmMergeTrustedRootDoneH_MERGING_AN_INTERNET_CERTIFICATION_AUTHORITY'S_CERTIFICATE_AS_A_TRUSTED_ROOTTopic1Merging a CA certificate as a trusted rootStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_ON_A_SERVER
H_MERGING_AN_INTERNET_CERTIFICATION_AUTHORITY'S_CERTIFICATE_AS_A_TRUSTED_ROOT_MIOTOPIC_81900649629204175=From a Domino CAH_MERGING_AN_INTERNET_CERTIFICATION_AUTHORITY'S_CERTIFICATE_AS_A_TRUSTED_ROOT_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204176=From a third-party CA
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
int icon
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
cca461_f_CertRequestApprovalH_ISSUING_SERVER_CERTOFICATES_MANUALLYTopic1Signing server certificatesStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_ON_A_SERVER
H_ISSUING_SERVER_CERTIFICATES_MANUALLY_MIDTOPIC_373878614429217237=From a Domino CAH_ISSUING_SERVER_CERTIFICATES_MANUALLY_MIDTOPIC_373878614429217238=From a third-party CA
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
to creat
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
?StepsPrintMerging a server certificate into the key ring file
Certificates\merging serverInstalling\server certificatesKey ring files\merging a certificateSSL\merging
cca461_f_MailCertRequestApprovedcsrv461_f_CertAdminMergeCertIntoKeyringcsrv461_f_DlgConfirmMergeCertcsrv461_f_DlgConfirmMergeCertDonecsrv461_f_DloConfirmMergeNoTrustH_MERGING_A_CERTIFICATE_FROM_A_COMMERCIAL_CERTIFICATION_AUTHORITYTopic1Merging a server certificate into the key ring fileStepsH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_ON_A_SERVER
H_MERGING_A_CERTIFICATE_FROM_A_COMMERCIAL_CERTIFICATION_AUTHORITY_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204175=From a Domino CAH_MERGING_A_CERTIFICATE_FROM_A_COMMERCIAL_CERTIFICATION_AUTHORITY_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204176=From a third-party CA
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
TeamRoom
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
?AboutPrintSSL port configuration
Clients\SSL requirementsClients\requirements for SSLPorts\configuring for SSLSSL\port configurationH_WAYS_TO_ENABLE_SSL_ON_A_SERVERTopic1SSL port configurotionAboutH_ABOUT_SETTING_UP_SSL_ON_A_SERVER
H_WAYS_TO_ENABLE_SSL_ON_A_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204175=Using server authentication onlyH_WAYS_TO_ENABLE_SSL_ON_A_SERVER_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204176=Using both server and client authentication
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s and
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
@StepsPrintConfiguring a port for SSL
Anonymous access\SSLBasic password authentication\SSLKey ring files\entering for serverName-and-password authenticationPorts\SSLSSL servers\protocol versionH_ENABLING_SSL_FOR_A_SERVER_ONLYTopic1Configuring a port for SSLStepsH_WAYS_TO_ENABLE_SSL_ON_A_SERVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ly to th
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
StepsPrintRequiring an SSL connection to a server
Connections\forcing SSLDatabases\forcing SSL connectionsHTTPS\SSL andSSL servers\forcing connectionsSSL\foroing connectionsServers\forcing SSL connectionsTCP/IP\redirect to SSLH_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_SO_USERS_AUTOMATICALLY_CONNECT_USING_SSLTopic1Requiring an SSL connection to a serverSteps
H_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_SO_USERS_AUTOMATICALLY_CONNECT_USING_SSL_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204175=For all databases on a serverH_SETTING_UP_SERVERS_SO_USERS_AUTOMATICALLY_CONNECT_USING_SSL_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204176=For individual databases
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
with one
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
OverviewPrintSetting up database access for SSL clients
Access\to databases for SSL clientsDatabase access\for SSL clientsSSL\database access for clientsSecurity\database access for SSL clientsH_DATABASE_ACCESS_FOR_OLIENTS_USING_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_4985_OVERVIEWTopic1Setting up database access for SSL clientsOverview
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
?StepsPrintViewing SSL server certificates
Certificate Authority\viewing server certificatesCertificates, SSL\viewing informationCertificates\viewing informationKey ring files\viewing certificatesSSL certificates\viewing informationTrusted roots\
iewing informationViewing\server certificates
csrv461_v_KeyRingAdministrationcsrv461_n_KeyringAdminH_VIEWING_YOUR_SERVER_CERTIFICATESTopic1Viewing SSL server certificatesStepsH_MANAGING_SERVER_CERTIFICATES_AND_CERTIFICATE_REQUESTS_OVER
H_VIEWING_YOUR_SERVER_CERTIFICATES_MIDTOPIC_72882163229240009=To view an SSL server certificate
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ctive statu
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
?StepsPrintRenewing an expired certificate
Certificates, SSL\expiredCertificates\renewingExpired certificates\renewingSSL certificates\renewingSecurity\renewing an expired certificateH_REMOVING_A_SERVER_CERTIFICATETopic1Renewing an expired certificateStepsH_MANAOING_SERVER_CERTIFICATES_AND_CERTIFICATE_REQUESTS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
?StepsPrintViewing requests for cortificates
Certificates, SSL\viewing requests for serverViewing\requests for server certificates
Approvedcca461_v_CertificateRequestsDeniedcca461_v_SubmittedCertificatescca461_v_SubmittedCertificatesAcceptedcca461_v_Submitcca461_v_SubmittedCertificatesRejectedcsrv461_v_CertificateRequestLogcsrv461_f_CertReqLogEntryH_VIEWING_REQUESTS_FOR_SERVER_CERTIFICATESTopic1Viewing requests for certificatesStepsH_MANAGING_SERVER_CERTIFICATES_AND_CERTIFICATE_REQUESTS_OVER
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
?StepsPrintMarking or unmarking a CA's certificate as a trusted root
Certificate Authority\removing as trusted rootSSL certificates\removing trusted rootsTrusted roots\removing
csrv461_f_CertificateInformationH_MARKING_A_SERVER_CERTIFICATE_AS_A_TRUSTED_ROOTTopic1Marking or unmarking a CA's certificate as a trusted rootStepsH_MANAGING_SERVER_CERTIFICATES_AND_CERTIFICATE_REQUESTS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
and any
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
?StepsPrintChanging the password for the server key ring file
Access\for key ring fileKey ring files\changing the password forPasswords\for key ring fileH_CHANGING_THE_PASSWORD_USED_TO_ACCESS_THE_KEY_RING_FILETopic1Changing the password for the server key ring fileStepsH_MANAGING_SORVER_CERTIFICATES_AND_CERTIFICATE_REQUESTS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System34 Setting up SSL on a Domino Server
H_CHANGING_THE_CIPHER_SPECIFICATION_USED_FOR_SSL_MIDTOPIC_286259184029240586=To change a cipher
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
ChapPrintChapter 35
Setting Up Clients for S/MIME and SSLH_CHAPTER_SETTING_UP_NOTES_AND_INTERNET_CLIENTS_FOR_S_MIME_AND_SSL_381_CHAPTopic1Chapter 35
Setting Up Clients for S/MIME and SSLChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter descrioes how to set up a Notes client to use SSL and send secure S/MIME messages. It also describes how to set up an Internet client to use SSL to connect to a Domino server.re the TeamRoom is used. It is also recommended that the team come to agreeme
03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
?StepsPrintObtaining a trusted root certificate for SSL server authentication
Certificates\trusted rootSSL server authentication\trusted root certificate forSecurity\trusted root certificates
cca461_f_CACertBrowserDIALOG 2566 579H_MERGING_A_CA_CERTIFICATE_AS_A_TRUSTED_ROOT_3303_STEPSTopic1Obtaining a trusted root certificate for SSL server authentication StepsH_ABOUT_ACCEPTING_A_CERTIFICATE_FOR_INTRONET_USE
H_MERGING_A_CA_CERTIFICATE_AS_A_TRUSTED_ROOT_3303_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_255149897629240045=<+!>To obtain a trusted root certificate for a Notes clientH_MERGING_A_CA_CERTIFICATE_AS_A_TRUSTED_ROOT_3303_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_159269577629251120=To obtain a trusted root certificate for an Internet client
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
+o'DG
03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
?StepsPrintCreating an Internet cross-certificate for a CA
Cross-certificates\InternetInternet cross-certificates\creatingH_CREATING_A_CROSS_CERTIFICATE_FOR_THE_CA_FOR_SSL_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_STEPSTopic1Creating an Internet cross-certificate for a CAStepsH_ABOUT_ACCEPTING_A_CERTIFICATE_FOR_INT_ANET_USE
H_CREATING_A_CROSS_CERTIFICATE_FOR_THE_CA_FOR_SSL_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_159269577629251120=To create an Internet cross-certificateH_CREATING_A_CROSS_CERTIFICATE_FOR_THE_CA_FOR_SSL_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_159269577629251121=To view Internet cross-certificates
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
he same as
03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
?StepsPrintCreating Internet certificates for Notes S/MIME clients
Internet certificates\addingH_CREATING_INTERNET_CERTIFICATE_FOR_NOTES_S_MIME_CLIENTS_STEPSTopic1Creating Internet certificates for Notes S/MIME clientsStepsH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SMIME
H_ABOUT_REQUESTING_A_CERTIFICATE_FOR_IN_ERNET_USE_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204175=To set up Notes clients with certificates issued by a Domino CAH_ABOUT_REQUESTING_A_CERTIFICATE_FOR_INTERNET_USE_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204176=To set up Notes clients with certificates issued by a third-party CA
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
uments, p
03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
?StepsPrintAdding an Internet certificate and cross-certificate for encrypted S/MIME messages
Cross-certificates\addingEncryption\mailH_ADDING_A_RECIPIENT_S_INTERNET_CERTIFICATE_AND_CROSS_CERTIFICATE_FOR_ENCRYPTED_S_MIME_MESSAGES_STEPSTopic1Adding an Internet certificate and cross-certificate for encrypted S/MIME messagesStepsH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SMIME
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
list on
03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
?OverviewPrintDual Internet certificates for S/MIME encryption and signatures
Encryption\dual Internet certificates andInternet certificates\dualSigning\dual Internet certificates andH_S_MIME_AND_DUAL_INTERNET_CERTIFICATES_OVERTopic1Dual Internet certificates for S/MIME encryption and signaturesOverviewH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SMIME
H_S_MIME_AND_DUAL_INTERNET_CERTIFICATES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_260989180829276603=Adding multiple certificatesH_S_MIME_AND_DUAL_INTERNET_CERTIFICATES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_260989180829276604=Specifying the default signing certificateH_S_MIME_AND_DUAL_INTERNET_CERTIFICATE__OVER_MIDTOPIC_260989180829276605=Adding an Internet certificate to the Personal Address BookH_S_MIME_AND_DUAL_INTERNET_CERTIFICATES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_260989180829276606=Adding a cross-certificate on demand
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
rate a t
03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
?StepsPrintIssuing Internet certificates in a Person document
Certificates\creating InternetDomino Directory\creating Internet certificatesInternet certificates\creating with Domino DirectoryDIALOG 2565 256H_USING_THE_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_TO_CREATE_AN_INTERNET_CERTIFICATE_FOR_NOTES_USERS_STEPSTopic1Issuing Internet certificates in a Person documentStepsH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SSL_CLIENT_AUTHENTOCATION
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
tive Mil
03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
?StepsPrintSetting up a Person document for an Internet client using SSL client autheotication
Person documents\SSL clientsSSL\Person documents for client authenticationSecurity\setting up Person documents for Internet clients using SSL client authenticationH_SETTING_UP_A_PERSON_DOCUMENT_FOR_THE_CLIENT_2887_STEPSTopic1Setting up a Person document for an Internet client using SSL client authenticationStepsH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SSL_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION
H_SETTING_UP_A_PERSON_DOCUMENT_FOR_THE_CLIENT_2887_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_291343209629212450=To set up a Person document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
The defaul
03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
?StepsPrintRequesting an Internet certificate for SSL and S/MIME
Certificates\requesting for SSL and S/MIMEH_REQUESTING_A_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE_FOR_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION_4464_STEPSTopic1Requesting an Internet certificate for SSL and S/MIMEStepsH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SSL_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION
H_REQUESTING_A_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE_FOR_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION_4464_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_373938614429217237=Domino CAH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SERVER_AUTHENTICATION_3303_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_81900649629204176=Third-party CA
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
258176029
03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
?StepsPrintSigning an Internet certificate and adding the certificate to the Domino Directory
Certificates\signing and adding to the Domino DirectorySecurity\signing an Internet certificato and adding the certificate to the Domino Directory
cca461_f_ClientCertRequestApprovalcca461_f_DialogSubmitAcceptcca461_f_CertSubmitAcceptedcca461_f_CertSubmitApprovalH_SIGNING_CLIENT_CERTIFICATES_1819_STEPSTopic1Signing an Internet certificate and adding the certificate to the Domino DirectoryStepsH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SSL_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION
H_SIGNING_CLIENT_CERTIFICATES_1819_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_373938614429217237=Domino CAH_SIGNING_CLIENT_CERTIFICATES_1819_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_373938614429217238?Third-party CA
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
itator
03 Administering the Domino System35 Setting up Clients for S/MIME and SSL
?StepsPrintMerging an Internet certificate
Certificates\merging olientSecurity\merging an Internet certificate
cca461_f_MailClientCertRequestApprovedcca461_f_MailClientCertRequestApprovedRegisteredH_MERGING_AN_INTRANET_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE_7991_STEPSTopic1Merging an Internet certificateStepsH_SETTING_UP_CLIENTS_FOR_SSL_CLIENT_AUTHENTICATION
H_MERGING_AN_INTRANET_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE_7991_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_373938614429217237=Domino CAH_MERGING_AN_INTRANET_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE_7991_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_373938614429217238=Third-party CA
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAO/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
ChapPrintChapter 36
Monitoring the Domino SystemH_CHAPTER_41_CONFIGURING_STATISTICS_AND_EVENTSTopic1Chapter 36
Monitoring the Domino SystemChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s/events in
03 Administering the Domino System36 Monitoring the Domino System
?DetailsPrintCustomizing Administration Preferences for the server monitor
Server monitor\changing default settingsH_CONFIGURING_THE_SERVER_MONITOR_DETAILSTopio1Customizing Administration Preferences for the server monitorDetailsH_SERVER_MONITORING_AT_A_GLANCE_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ompose ne
03 Administering the Domino System37 Maintaining the Domino System
ChapPrintChapter 37
Maintaining
he Domino SystemH_CHAPTER_1_-_SERVER_MAINTENANCE_OVERVIEWTopic1Chapter 37
Maintaining the Domino SystemChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes the tasks for maintaining the Domino system.
e to any main document, and any
03 Administering the Domino System37 Maintaining the Domino System
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
ChapPrintChapter 38
Managing Users, Servers, and GroupsH_CHAPTER_8_-_MANAGING_USERS,_SERVERS,_AND_GROUPSTopic1Chapter 38
Managing Users, Servers, and GroupsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to recertify a certifier ID, rename and recertify Notes users, delete users, rename and delete groups, and recertify, decommission, and delete Domino servers.
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?OverviewPrintChanging Notes user names with the Administration Process
Names\changingUser names\changingCHANGING_NOTES_USER_NAMES_WITH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESSTopic1Changing Notes user names with the Administration ProcessOverviewH_MANAGING_USERS_5151
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?StepsPrintRenaming a user's common name
Windows NT\renaming user accounts woth DominoDIALOG 3016 693H_RENAMING_A_USER_AUTOMATICALLYTopic1Renaming a user's common nameStepsH_MANAGING_USERS_5151
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Sorvers, and Groups
?StepsPrintMoving a user name in the name hierarchy
Organization hierarchy\moving user names inUser names\moving in the organization name hierarchyDIALOG 3018 691H_MOVING_A_USER_AUTOMATICALLYTopic1Moving a user name in the name hierarchyStepsH_MANAGING_USERS_5151
H_MOVING_A_USER_AUTOMATICALLY_MIDTOPIC_402458060829232553=To move a user name in the name hierarchy
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?StepsPrintUpgrading a user name from flat to hierarchical
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalUser names\upgrading from flat to hierarchicalDIALOG 3020 693UPGRADING_Topic1Upgrading a u
er name from flat to hierarchicalStepsH_MANAGING_USERS_5151
UPGRADING__MIDTOPIC_150193334429301537=Domino R5.0.1 or prior
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
nformed of
03 Administering the Domino System38 Monaging Users, Servers, and Groups
?OverviewPrintDeleting a user name
User names\deleting
pubnames_v_DenyListsDIALOG 10406 573DELETING_A_USER_NAMETopic1Deleting a user nameOverviewH_MANAGING_USERS_5151
H_DELETING_A_USER_WITH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS=To delete a user
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ers by c
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?StepsPrintRecertifying a user ID
@Certificate\recertification andIDs, certifier\recertifyingPublic Address Book\custom view for user recertificationUser IDs\recertifyingDIALOG 3021 693DELETING_A_USER_NAME_MIDTOPIC_274574259229236374Topic1Recertifying a user IDStepsH_MANAGING_USERS_5151
H_RECER_IFYING_USER_IDS_AUTOMATICALLY_MIDTOPIC_157287494429232562=To recertify a user ID
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
. Its flex
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?OvorviewPrintMoving a user's mail file
Mail files\movingDIALOG 10404 588;DIALOG 10465 256;DIALOG 2708 808MOVING_A_MAIL_FILETopic1Moving a user's mail fileOverviewH_MANAGING_USERS_5151
MOVING_A_MAIL_FILE_MIDTOPIC_282139443229245084=Moving a user's mail file (from the tools pane)
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ign a dat
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?StepsPrintChanging the server administrator
Server administrators\changing name ofH_CHANGING_THE_NOTES_ADMINISTRATOR_ASSIGNED_TO_A_SERVERTopic1Changing the server administratorStepsH_MANAGING_SERVERS_9634
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
or from a
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?OverviewPrintDecommissioning a server
Decommission Server Analysis tool\runningServers\decommissioningH_DECOMMISSIONING_A_SERVER_8168_OVERTopic1Decommissioning a serverOverviewH_MANAGING_SERVERS_9634
H_DECOMMISSIONING_A_SERVER_8168_OVER_MIDTOPIC_108491744029236361=To run an analysis report on Decommission ServerH_DECOMMISSIONING_A_SERVER_8168_OVER_MIDTOPIC_196384304029244636=Viewing the report in the Results databaseH_DECOMMISSIONING_A_SERVER_8168_OVER_MIDTOPIC_334263737629244645=Report comparisons
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
t automati
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?StepsPrintDeleting a server name
Server namesH_DELETING_A_SERVER_WITH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESSTopic1Deleting a server nameStepsH_MANAGING_SERVERS_9634
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e document
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?StepsPrintRecertifying a server ID
Server IDs\recertifyingH_RECERTIFYING_A_HIERARCHICAL_SERVER_ID_AUTOMATICALLY_Topic1Recertifying a server ID StepsH_MANAGING_SERVERS_9634
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
You can
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?StepsPrintUpgrading a server name to hierarchical
Hierarchical names\converting flat names toServer names\upgrading to hierarchicalH_DECOMMISSIONING_A_SERVER_8168_OVOR_MIDTOPIC_87400371229240779Topic1Upgrading a server name to hierarchicalStepsH_MANAGING_SERVERS_9634
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?StepsPrintEditing a group
Groups\editingGroups\renamingH_RENAMING_A_GROUP_WITH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESSTopic1Editing a groupStepsH_MANAGING_GROUPS_1804
H_RENAMING_A_GROUP_WITH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MIDTOPIC_356657529629236375=To edit a groupH_RENAMING_A_GROUP_WITH_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MIDTOPIC_15514281629218630=To immediately change the name of a group throughout the domain
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?StepsPrintDeleting a group
Groups\deletingH_DELETING_A_GROUP_FROM_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1Deleting a groupStepsH_MANAGING_GROUPS_1804
H_DELETING_A_GROUP_FROM_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_MODTOPIC_196384304029244636=To delete a group
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?StepsPrintUsing the Manage Groups tool/to manage groups
Groups\finding membersGroups\managingManage Groups tool\usingDIALOG 10432 426;DIALOG 10432 426H_DELETING_A_GROUP_FROM_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_MIDTOPIC_236706083229244184Topic1Using the Manage Groups tool to manage groupsStepsH_MANAGING_GROUPS_1804
H_DELETING_A_GROUP_FROM_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_MIDTOPIC_236706083229244184_MIDTOPIC_223503628829244223=To use the Manage Groups toolH_DELETING_A_GROUP_FROM_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_MIDTOPIC_236706083229244184_MIDTOPIC_360072246429?78567=Finding a group memberH_DELETING_A_GROUP_FROM_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_MIDTOPIC_236706083229244184_MIDTOPIC_360072246429278568=From the Domino AdministratorH_DELETING_A_GROUP_FROM_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_MIDTOPIC_236706083229244184_MIDTOPIC_360072246429278569=From the Domino Directory
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System38 Managing Users, Servers, and Groups
?StepsPrintRecertifying a Certifier or a User ID
Certifier IDs\recertifyingDIALOG 2571 28;DIALOG 2573 250H_MANAGING_CERTIFIER_IDS_7302_MIDTOPIC_293171126429240767Topic1Recertifying a Certifier or a User IDStepsH_MANAGING_CERTIFIER_IDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
perhaps/i
03 Administering the Domino System39 Transaction Logging
H_HOW_TRANSACTION_LOGGING_WORKS_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_304667510429239977=Understanding the database instance ID (DBIID)
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
comfor
03 Administering the Domino System40 Using Log Files
ChapPrintChapter 40
Using Log FilesH_CHAPTER_37_SETTING_UP_LOG_FILES_CHAPTopic1Chapter 40
Using Log FilesChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to use the Domino server log (LOG.NSF) and the Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF) to collect information about the Domino system.a week? within 3 days? within 1 day? Be sure to get agreement on a timely,
03 Administering the Domino System40 Using Log Files
?OverviewPrintRecording additional information in the log file (LOG.NSF)
Log file\using commands to record informationH_RECORDING_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION_IN_THE_LOG_FILE_LOGNSF_OVERVIEWTopic1Recording additional information in the log file (LOG.NSF)OverviewH_LOG_FILES_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ic Communic
03 Administering the Domino System40 Using Log Files
?OverviewPrintViewing the log file (LOG.NSF)
Log file\viewing the Domino serverH_VIEWING_THE_LOG_FILE_LOGNSF_OVERVIEWTopic1Viewing the log file (LOG.NSF)OverviewH_LOG_FILES_OVERVIEW
H_VIEWING_THE_LOG_FILE_LOGNSF_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_127?42076829240593=Views in the log file (LOG.NSF)
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
assigne
03 Administering the Domino System40 Using Log Files
H_SEARCHING_THE_LOG_FILE_LOGNSF_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_54437724829229963=To search the log file
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
d to bot
03 Administering the Domino System40 Using Log Files
?OverviewPrintControlling the size of the log file (LOG.NSF)
Log file\compactingNOTES.INI settings\LogH_CONTROLLING_THE_SIZE_OF_THE_LOG_FILE_LOGNSF_OVERVIEWTopic1Controlling the size of the log file (LOG.NSF)OverviewH_LOG_FILES_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System40 Using Log Files
?OverviewPrintSetting up the Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
Web servers\setting up loggingH_SETTING_UP_THE_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_LOG_DOMLOGNSF_OVERVIEWTopic1Setting up the Domino Web sorver log (DOMLOG.NSF)OverviewH_LOGGING_INFORMATION_FOR_THE_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
propriate
03 Administering the Domino System40 Using Log Files
?OverviewPrintViewing the Domino Web se
ver log (DOMLOG.NSF)
DOMLOG.NSF\viewingDomino Web server\viewingH_VIEWING_THE_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_LOG_DOMLOGNSF_OVERVIEWTopic1Viewing the Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)OverviewH_LOGGING_INFORMATION_FOR_THE_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
lots of po
03 Administering the Domino System40 Using Log Files
?OverviewPrintText files for Domino Web server logging
Domino Web server\logging to text filesLogging\internal server errorsH_TEXT_FILES_FOR_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_LOGGING_OVERVIEWTopic1Text files for Domino Web server loggingOverviewH_LOGGING_INFORMATION_FOR_THE_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System40 Using Log Files
?OverviewPrintSetting up text files for Domino Web server logging
Domino Web server\configuration log file settingsLogging\configuring for Domino Web serverH_SETTING_UP_TEXT_FILES_FOR_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_LOGGING_OVERVIEWTopic1Se
ting up text files for Domino Web server loggingOverviewH_LOGGING_INFORMATION_FOR_THE_DOMINO_WEB_SERVER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
according
T'<@B
03 Administering the Domino System41 Setting up Billing
ChapPrintChapter 41
Setting Up BillingH_CHAPTER_9_SETTING_UP_BILLINGTopic1Chapter 41
Setting Up BillingChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up and use the Domino billing features.
03 Administering the Domino System41 Setting up Billing
H_MANAGING_BILLING_9512_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_268955673629223110=Changing the frequency of adding records to the message queueH_MANAGING_BILLING_9512_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_268955673629223111=Controlling the transfer of records from/the message queueH_MANAGING_BILLING_9512_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_268955673629223112=To run multiple Billing tasks
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System42 Improving Server Performance
ChapPrintChapter 42
Improving Server PerformanceH_IMPROVING_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_6440_CHAPTopic1Chapter 42
Improving Server PerformanceChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes ways you can improve the performance of your Domino server. opposed to other tools or no tool. TeamRoom was designed to facilitate info
03 Administering the Domino System45 Appendix B LDAP Schema
StepsPrintDomino LDAP schema attributes
Attributes\LDAP schemaDistinguished names\LDAP service formation ofLDAP schema\distinguished name formationH_DOMINO_LDAP_SCHEMA_ATTRIBUTES_3887_STEPSTopic1Domino LDAP schema attributesSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
All u
03 Administering the Domino System45 Appendix B LDAP Schema
03 Administering the Domino System45 Appendix B LDAP Schema
StepsPrintLDAP-to-Domino data type mapping
LDAP schema\LDAP data type mappingH_LDAP_TO_DOMINO_DATA_TYPE_MAPPING_8693_STEPSTopic1LDAP-to-Domino data type/mappingSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
his learning allows the team to refine its self-definitions as it works over time, and as the team's work evolves.
6.
Critical Mass.
Key players and respected Team Leaders who are committed to TeamRoom, and to sharing information and doing their work in TeamRoom, will generally bring the rest of the team in with them.
7.
Hot Topics.
The content in TeamRoom documents must be essential,/up-to-the-minute team information. Put the information that everyonep
03 Administering the Domino System42 Improving Server Performance
H_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_353828697629233920=Controlling how often Agent Manager runs agentsH_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_115978076829239968=<+)>AMgr_DocUpdateAgent MinInterval<-)><+*>H_AMGR_DOCUPDATEAGENTMININTERVAL<-*> H_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_115978076829239969=<+)>AMgr_DocUpdate EventDelay<-)><+*>H_AMGR_DOCUPDATEEVENTDELAY<-*> @_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_115978076829239970=<+)>AMgr_NewMailAgent MinInterval<-)><+*>H_AMGR_NEWMAILAGENTMININTERVAL<-*> H_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_115978076829239971=<+)>AMgr_NewMailEventDelay<-)><+*>H_AMGR_NEWMAILEVENTDELAY<-*> H_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_115978076829239972=<+)>DominoAsynchronizeAgents<-)><+*>H_DOMINOASYNCHRONIZEAGENTS<-*> H_IMPROVING_AGENT_MANAGER_PERFORMANCE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_17077715229231764=Controlling how quickly the Agent Managep queues agentsH_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_115978076829239973=<+!><+)>AMgr_SchedulingInterval <-!><-)><+*>H_AMGR_SCHEDULINGINTERVAL<-*> H_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_115978076829239974=<+!><+)>AMgr_UntriggeredMailInterval<-!><-)><+*>H_AMGR_UNTRIGGEREDMAILINTERVAL<-*> H_IMPROVING_AGENT_MANAGER_PERFORMANCE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_17077715229231765=Controlling when the Agent Manager runs agentsH_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_115978076829239975=<+!><+)>AMgr_DocUpdateEventD`lay<-!><-)><+*>H_AMGR_DOCUPDATEEVENTDELAY<-*> H_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_115978076829239976=<+!><+)>AMgr_NewMailEventDelay<-!><-)><+*>H_AMGR_NEWMAILEVENTDELAY<-*> H_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_115978076829239977=<+!><+)>AMgr_DocUpdateAgentMinInterval<-!><-)><+*>H_AMGR_DOCUPDATEAGENTMININTERVAL<-*> H_AGENT_MANAGER_NOTES_INI_VARIABLES_MIDTOPIC_115978076829239978=<+!><+)>AMgr_NewMailAgentMinInterval<-!><-)><+*>H_AMGR_NEWMAILAGENTMININTERVAL<-*> H_IMPROVING_AGENT_MANAGER_PERFOR@ANCE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_17077715229231766=Monitoring the load on the Agent ManagerH_IMPROVING_AGENT_MANAGER_PERFORMANCE_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_17077715229231767=Controlling how many concurrent agents are running
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Adm`nistering the Domino System42 Improving Server Performance
OverviewPrintImproving basic server performance and capacity
Memory requirements\for serversPerformance\improvingResponse time\serverServers\capacityServers\performanceWorkload balancing\clusters andH_IMPROVING_PERFORMANCE_AND_CAPACITY_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211818Topic1Improving basic server performance and capacityOverview
H_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVEPVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211818_MIDTOPIC_116028076829239968=Improving server capacity and response timeH_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211818_MIDTOPIC_116028076829239969=NOTES.INI settings that affect Domino server performanceH_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211818_MIDTOPIC_116028076829239970=<+)>Replicators<-)><+*>H_REPLICATORS<-*> H_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMA@CE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211818_MIDTOPIC_116028076829239971=<+)>Server_Availability_Threshold<-)><+*>H_SERVER_AVAILABILITY_THRESHOLD<-*> H_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211818_MIDTOPIC_116028076829239972=<+)>Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans<-)><+*>H_SERVER_MAX_CONCURRENT_TRANS<-*> H_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211818_MIDTOPIC_116028076829239973=<+)>Server_MaxUsers<-)><+*>H_SERPER_MAXUSERS<-*> H_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211818_MIDTOPIC_116028076829239975=<+)>Server_Session_Timeout<-)><+*>H_SERVER_SESSION_TIMEOUT_<-*> H_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211818_MIDTOPIC_116028076829239976=<+)>ServerTasks<-)><+*>H_SERVERTASKS<-*> H_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211818_MIDTOPIC_116028076829239977=<+)>Tr`nslog_Status<-)><+*>H_SYSLOGGING<-*>
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
new set
03 Administering the Domino System42 Improving Server Performance
OverviewPrintImproving database and Domino Directory performance
Database performan`e\improvingDomino Directory\performance settingsNOTES.INI settings\database and Domino Directory performanceWeb access\improvingH_IMPROVING_DATABASE_AND_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211817Topic1Improving database and Domino Directory performance Overview
H_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211817_MIDTOPIC_116028076829239968=<+)>NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size<-)><+*>H_NSF_BUFFER_POOL_SIZE<-*> H_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTESPINI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211817_MIDTOPIC_116028076829239969=<+)>NSF_DbCache_Maxentries<-)><+*>H_NSF_DBCACHE_DISABLE<-*> H_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211817_MIDTOPIC_1133445566=Improving performance for users accessing the Web using the Web NavigatorH_ABOUT_EDITING_THE_NOTES_INI_FILE_TO_IMPROVE_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_178583235229211817_MIDTOPIC_1133442211=Show DBS command
CN=David Mahar/OP=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System42 Improving Server Performance
OverviewPrintImproving mail performance
Mail\performanceNOTES.INI file\mail settingsPerformance\mailH_IMPROVING_MAIL_PERFORMANCE_1630_OVERVIEW_MIDPOPIC_178583235229211816Topic1Improving mail performanceOverview
03 Administering the Domino System42 Improving Server Performance
OverviewPrintImproving Windows NT server performance
Performance\Windows NT serverWindows NT servers\configuration file settingsWindows NT servers\improving performanceH_IMPROVING_WINDOWS_NT_PERFORMANCE_4194_OVERVIEWTopic1Improving Windows NT server performanceOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System42 Improving Server Performance
OverviewPrintImproving UNIX server performance
CPU-scheduler tuning\performingDisk I/O tuning\performingMemory, shared\describedNOTES.INI file\UNIX server settingsPerformance\UNIX serverPerformance\tuning CPU-schedulerPerf`rmance\tuning disk I/OSystem V shared memory\describedUNIX servers\improving performanceH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEWTopic1Improving UNIX server performanceOverview
H_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_425858499229220099=<+!>NOTES.INI<-!> settingsH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_425858499229220100=<+)>NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size<-)><+*>H_NSF_BUFFER_POOL_SIZE<-*> H_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_0542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_425858499229220101=<+)>Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans<-)><+*>H_SERVER_MAX_CONCURRENT_TRANS<-*> H_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_425858499229220102=Disk and memory requirementsH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_425858499229220103=Shared memoryH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_387551158429239972=System V Shared MemoryH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_387551158429239970=<+!>Memory-mapped files (mmap)H_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_425858499229220104=Disk I/O tuningH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_425858499229220105=CPU-scheduler tuningH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_387551158429239974=SolarisH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_387551158429239975=AIXH_ABOUT_IMPROVING_UNIX_SERVER_PERFORMANCE_3542_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_425858499229220106=Console and dat`base logging
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
40684168
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
Even with careful server maintenance, you may occasionally encounter unexpected system problems. This chapter describes troubleshooting techniques and offers suggestions for solving common problems. oried to open a document in a database that doesn't have a default form, and N
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?StepsPrintSearching the Lotus Customer Support Web site (www.lotus.support.com)
Customer Support\Web siteWeb sites\Customer Supportwww.lotus.comH_SEARCHING_THE_LOTUS_CUSTOMER_SUPPORT_WEB_SITE_STEPSTopic1Searching the Lotus Customer Support Web site (www.lotus.support.com)StepsH_WHAT_TROUBLESHOOPING_TOOLS_ARE_AVAILABLE
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
03 Adm`nistering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
AboutPrintAdministration Process - Troubleshooting
Administration Process\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\Administration ProcessH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESSTopic1Administration Process - TroubleshootingAbout
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?AboutPrintAdministration Process - Problems and error messages
Error messages\Administration ProcessH_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?Topic1Administration Process - Problems and error messagesAboutH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS
H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAG@S_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_64711446429201573=Administration Process: retrying a request that could not be performed previously because another process was modifying the document.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_64711446429201601=Administration Process: Unable to access transfer context information.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_64711446429201600=Administration Process: Unable to create entry thread.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDPOPIC_64711446429201607=Insufficient memory - Admin's request queue pool is full.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_64711446429201586=No Address book is present on this server; the Admin Process cannot continue without one.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_210680748829212648=<+!>Removing <+">viewname<-"> view notes in the Address Book.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_210680748829212649=Reporter: Could not locate view <+">piewname<-">.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_64711446429201606=The Administration Process cannot delete the database <+">databasename<-"> at this time because it is in use by someone else; will try again at <+">time<-">.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_64711446429201602=The Administration Process could not change or delete the name from the document because another process was modifying it.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDT@PIC_64711446429201608=The Administration Process does not have enough memory to compute the formulas required for request processing.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_64711446429201605=The Administration Process is retrying a name change or deletion from the document. H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_64711446429201582=The certificate contained in the note was not issued by the selected certifier.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?PMIDTOPIC_64711446429201604=The replica of the <+">database<-"> moved by the Administration Process has not been initialized by the replicator.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_64711446429201581=The selected certifier isn't an ancestor of the entity to be updated.H_WHAT_DO_THESE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_MESSAGES_MEAN?_MIDTOPIC_64711446429201580=The selected certifier isn't the target certifier in the move request.
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?StepsPrintHow to troubleshoot the Administration Process H_TROUBLESHOOTING_GENERAL_ADMINP_PROBLEMS_4630_STEPSTopic1How to troubleshoot the Administration Process StepsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_THEPADMINISTRATION_PROCESS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
e person
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
AboutPrintAgent Manager and agents - Troubleshooting
Agent Manager\troubleshootingAgents\troubleshootingTropbleshooting\Agent Manager and agentsH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_AGENTSTopic1Agent Manager and agents - TroubleshootingAbout
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPr`ntTools for troubleshooting Agent Manager and agents
Agent log\troubleshooting withLog file\troubleshooting Agent Manager and agentsServer commands\troubleshooting Agent Manager and agentsTell commands\Agent ManagerTools\Agent logTools\troubleshooting Agent Manager and agentH_USING_THE_SERVER_CONSOLE_TO_TROUBLESHOOT_AGENTS_8681_OVERTopic1Tools for troubleshooting Agent Manager and agents OverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_AGENTS
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintAgent manager and agents - Problems and error messages
Error messages\Agent Manager and agentsH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_AGENT_MANAGER_6228_OVERTopic1Agent manager and agents - Problems and error messagesOverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_AGENTS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@AboutPrintAgent Manager isn't working as expected
Troubleshooting\Agent ManagerH_WHY_ISNT_THE_AGENT_MANAGER_WORKINGTopic1Agent Manager isn't working as expectedAboutH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_AGENT_@ANAGER_6228_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintAn agent isn't running as expectedH_AN_AGENT_ISN_T_RUNNING_AS_EXPECTED_OVERTopic1An agent isn't rpnning as expectedOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_AGENT_MANAGER_6228_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintAn agent doesn't run to c`mpletionH_AN_AGENT_DOESN_T_RUN_TO_COMPLETION_OVERTopic1An agent doesn't run to completionOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_AGENT_MANAGER_6228_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System03 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintAn agent isn't running at the expected timesH_AN_AGENT_ISN_T_RUNNING_AT_THE_EXPECTED_TIMES_OVERTopic1An agent isn't running at the expected timesOverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_AGENT_MANAGER_6228_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintBilling records aren't logged immediately after a transaction occurs on the server
Billing server task\troubleshootingBilling server task\using multipleTransaction logging\troubleshootingH_BILLING_RECORDS_AREN_T_LOGGED_IMMEDIATELY_AFTER_A_TRANSACTION_OCCURS_ON_THE_SERVER_OVERTopic1Billing records aren't logged immediately after a transaction occurs on the serverOverviewH_BILLING_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintDisk space is used more rapidly with billing enabled
Disk space\billing andH_WHEN_BILLING_IS_ENABLED_DISK_SPACE_IS_UED_UP_MORE_RAPIDLY_OVERTopic1Disk space is used more rapidly with billing enabledOverviewHPBILLING_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Status rep
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintDomino could not create the Billing database (BILLING.NSF) when the Billing task started
Billing.NSF\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\Billing.nsfH_DOMINO_COULD_NOT_CREATE_THE_BILLING_DATABASE_BILLING_NSF_OVERTopic1Domino could not create the Billing database (BILLING.NSF) when the Billing task startedOverviewH_BILLING_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintMemory allocation errors related to billing appear on the server console and in the log file
Memory allocation errors\billing andTroubleshooting\memory allocation errors and billingH_THERE_ARE_MEMORY_ALLOCATION_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_BILLING_ON_THE_SERVER_CONSOLE_AND_IN_THE_LOG_FILE_OVERTopic1Memory allocation errors related to billing appear on the server console and in the log fil`OverviewH_BILLING_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintThe frequency of stamping of billing records for some users doesn't change
Bill`ng records\troubleshooting stamping ofBillingSuppressTime setting\troubleshootingH_THE_FREQUENCY_OF_STAMPING_OF_BILLING_RECORDS_FOR_SOME_USERS_DOES_NOT_CHANGE_EVEN_THOUGH_I_CHANGED_THE_BILLINGSUPPRESSTIME_VALUE_OVERTopic1The frequency of stamping of billing records for some users doesn't change OverviewH_BILLING_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintWeb user authentication using a pecondary Domino Directory failsH_WEB_AUTHENTICATION_USING_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_FAILS_3621_STEPSTopic1Web user authentication using a secondary Domino Directory failsStepsH_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ent user.
DfVhCh
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintWeb user authentication using an LDAP directory failsH_WEB_AUTHENTICATION_USING_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY_FAILS_9754_STEPSTopic1Web user authentication using an LDAP directory failsOverviewH_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintGroup lookups in an LDAP directory for database access control failH_GROUP_LOOKUPS_IN_AN_LDAP_DIRECTORY_FOR_DATABASE_ACCESS_CONTROL_FAIL_9260_STEPSTopic1Group lookups in an LDAP directory for database access control failOverviewH_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintSearches in a secondary Domino Directory configured in directory assistance failH_SEARCHES_IN_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_CONFIGPRED_IN_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_FAIL_OVERTopic1Searches in a secondary Domino Directory configured in directory assistance failOverviewH_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
@OverviewPrint"Directory assistance could not access Public Address Book on Server x, error is Server Not Responding"H_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_COULD_NOT_ACCESS_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_ON_SERVER_X_ERROR_IS_SERVER_NOT_RESPONDING_OVERTopic1"Directory assistance could not access Public Address Book on Server x, error is Server Not Responding"OverviewH_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
iews that
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"Server Error: File does not exist" when opening the directory assistance databaseH_SERVER_ERROR_FILE_DOES_NOT_EXIST_WHEN_OPENING_THE_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_DATABASE_4899_STEPSTopic1"Server Epror: File does not exist" when opening the directory assistance databaseOverviewH_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Click
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintDirectory catalog - Problems and error messages
Directory catalogs\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\Directory catalogsH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVERTopic1Directory catalog - Problems and error messagesOverviewH_DIRECTORIES_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintNames are missing from the directory catalog
Dircat task\troubleshootingH_NAMING_ARE_MISSING_FROM_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_7262_OVERTopic1Names are missing from the directory catalogOverviewH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
H_NAMING_ARE_MISSING_FROM_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_7262_OVER_MIDTOPI@_397472928029313196=Verify that the Dircat task is building the directories as intendedH_NAMING_ARE_MISSING_FROM_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_7262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_397472928029313197=If the "Remove duplicate users" option is enabled, see if someone has deleted a duplicate entry from one of the full Domino directoriesH_NAMING_ARE_MISSING_FROM_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_7262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_397472928029313198=Verify that the User Name fields have valuesH_NAMING_ARE_MISSING_FROM_THE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_7262_OVER_MIDTOPIC_397472028029313199=Use Log_Dircat=1
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintUsers can't use type-ahead addressing to look up names in a directory catalog
Type-ahead addressing\troubleshootingH_USERS_CAN_T_USE_TYPE_AHEAD_ADDRESSING_WHEN_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_IS_SET_UP_2851_STEPSTopic1Users can't use type-ahead addressing to look up names in a directory catalogStepsH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintDomino isn't searching a directory catalog on a serverH_DOMINO_ISN_T_SEARCHING_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_ON_A_SERVER_OVERTopic1Domino isn't searching a directory catalog on a serverOverviewH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
he recipi
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintWeb user name-and-password authentication using a directory catalog failsH_WEB_AUTHENTICATION_USING_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_FAILS_4750_STEPSTopic1Web user name-and-password authentication using a directory catalog failsStepsH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
34450168
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintLDAP searches of a directory catalog aren't workingH_LDAP_SEARCHES_OF_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_AREN_T_WORKING_4279_STEPSTopic1LDAP searches of a directory catalog aren't workingOverviewH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
gner acc
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintA direct`ry catalog is not full-text indexed or the full-text index is corruptedH_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_IS_NOT_FULL_TEXT_INDEXED_9487_STEPSTopic1A directory catalog is not full-text indexed or the full-text index is corruptedStepsH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintThe User Setup Profile doesn't push mobile directory catalogs to usersH_THE_USER_SETUP_PROFILE_DOESN_T_PUSH_MOBILE_DIRECTORY_CATALOGS_TO_USERS_4665_STEPSTopic1The User Setup Profile doesn't push mobile directory catalogs to usersStepsH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintThe Router is finding the same name in multiple directories even though the "Exhaustive lookup" setting is disabled H_DISABLING_EXHAUSTIVE_ROUTER_LOOKUPS_DOESN_T_WORK_FOR_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_LOOKUPS_9646_ST@PSTopic1The Router is finding the same name in multiple directories even though the "Exhaustive lookup" setting is disabled StepsH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ve anothe
03 Administering the D`mino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"Server error: file does not exist" when opening a directory catalogH_SERVER_ERROR_FILE_DOES_NOT_EXIST_WHEN_OPENING_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_9432_STEPSTopic1"Server error: file does not exist" when opening a directory catalogOverviewH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
etwork a
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintUsers can't do full-text searches of a directory catalogH_FULL_TEXT_SEARCHES_OF_A_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_AREN_T_WORKING_3491_STEPSTopic1Users can't do full-text searches of a directory catalogOverviewH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
otes can'
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintThe source directory catalog is bigger than expectedH_THE_SOURCE_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_IS_BIGGER_THAN_EXPECTED_OVERTopic1The source directory catalog is bigger than expectedOverpiewH_DIRECTORY_CATALOG_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s book
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintLDAP service - Problems and error messages
LDAP serv`ce\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\LDAP serviceH_LDAP_SERVER_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVERTopic1LDAP service - Problems and error messagesOverviewH_DIRECTORIES_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administeri`g the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintLDAP searches are slowH_LDAP_SEARCHES_ARE_SLOW_OVERTopic1LDAP searches are slowOverviewH_LDAP_SERVER_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintAnonymous LDAP users can't search certain fieldsH_LDAP_USERS_CAN_T_SEARCH_A_SECONDARY_DOMINO_DIRECTORY_FOR_A_FIELD_I_VE_ENABLED_FOR_ANONYMOUS_ACCESS_8116_STEPSTopic1Anonymous LDAP users can't search certain fieldsStepsH_LDAP_SERVER_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
lick here
D165K)A
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"Server Error: File does not exist" when displaying directory settings
Directory settings\troubleshootingH_SERVER_ERROR_FILE_DOES_NOT_EXIST_WHEN_DISPLAYING_DIRECTORY_SETTINGS_4821_STEPSTopic1"Server Error: File does not exist" when displaying directory settingsOverviewH_LDAP_SERVERPPROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintLDAP error "Insufficient Access" returned on an LDAP Add operationH_LDAP_ERROR_INSUFFICIE@T_ACCESS_RETURNED_ON_AN_LDAP_ADD_OPERATION_98_STEPSTopic1LDAP error "Insufficient Access" returned on an LDAP Add operationOverviewH_LDAP_SERVER_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domin` System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintLDAP clients can't connect to the LDAP service over SSL when the server uses a self-signed Domino server certificateH_LDAP_CLIENTS_CAN_T_CONNECT_TO_A_SERVER_THAT_USES_A_SELF_SIGNED_DOMINO_SERVER_CERTIFICATE_6569_STEPSTopic1LDAP clients can't connect to the LDAP service over SSL when the server uses a self-signed Domino server certificateStepsH_LDAP_SERVER_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ge your l
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
AboutPrintMail routing - Troubleshooting
Mail files\troubleshootingMail routing\troubleshootingTroubles`ooting\mail routingH_WHY_ISNT_MAIL_BEING_DELIVEREDTopic1Mail routing - TroubleshootingAbout
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintTools for troubleshooting mail routing
Connections\tracingDelivery Failure Reports\troubleshootingMail\tracing connectionsTools\troubleshooting mail routingTroubleshooting\mail filesDIALOG 10494 14H_TOOLS_FOR_TROUBLESHOOTING_MAIL_ROUTING_OVERTopic1Tools for troubleshooting mail routingOverviewH_WHY_ISNT_MAIL_BEING_DELIVERED
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintMail routing - Problems and error messages
Error messages\mail routingH_COMMON_MAIL_ROUTING_PROBLEMS_594_OVERVIEWTopic1Mail routing - Problems and error messagesOverviewH_WHY_ISNT_MAIL_BEING_DELIVERED
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintA user can't receive any mail, including mail sent by users whose mail files are on the same server
MAIL.BOX databases\as a troubleshooting toolH_A_USER_CAN_T_ANY_RECEIVE_MAIL_INCLUDING_MAIL_SENP_BY_USERS_WHOSE_MAIL_FILES_ARE_ON_THE_SAME_SERVER_OVERTopic1A user can't receive any mail, including mail sent by users whose mail files are on the same serverOverviewH_COMMON_MAIL_ROUTING_PROBLEMS_594_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"File is in use by another process"H_FILE_IS_IN_USE_BY_ANOTHER_PROCESS_OVERTopic1"File is in use by another process"OverviewH_COMMON_MAIL_ROUTING_PROBLEMS_594_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
o Network
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"NAMES.NSF does not contain a required view" appears when sending mail to users on the same mail server
Domino Directory\troubleshootingH_NAMES_NSF_DOES_NOT_CONTAIN_A_REQUIRED_VIEW_APPEARS_WHEN_SENDING_MAIL_TO_USERS_ON_THE_SAME_MAIL_SERVER_OVERTopic1"NAMES.NSF does not contain a required view" appears when sending mail to users on the same mail serverOperviewH_COMMON_MAIL_ROUTING_PROBLEMS_594_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"No route found to Domain x from Server y"
Connection `ocuments\troubleshootingH_NO_ROUTE_FOUND_TO_DOMAIN_X_FROM_SERVER_Y_OVERTopic1"No route found to Domain x from Server y"OverviewH_COMMON_MAIL_ROUTING_PROBLEMS_594_OVERVIEW
@OverviewPrint"Router: Possibly no DOMAIN set; use SET CONFIG DOMAIN=name to set it; or replace the Name and Address Book design."
Server documents\troubleshootingH_ROUTER_POSSIBLY_NO_DOMAIN_SET_USE_SET_CONFIG_DOMAIN_NAME_TO_SET_IT_OR_REPLACE_THE_NAME_AND_ADDRESS_BOOK_DESIGN_OVERTopic1"Router: Possibly no DOMAIN set; use SET CONFIG DOMAIN=name to set it; or replace the Name and Address Book design."OverviewH_COMMON_MAIL_ROUTING_PROBLEMS_594_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
new ID fi
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"Server Error: File Does Not Exist"
Shared mail\troubleshootingH_SERVER_ERROR_FILE_DOES_NOT_EXIST_OVERTopic1"S`rver Error: File Does Not Exist"OverviewH_COMMON_MAIL_ROUTING_PROBLEMS_594_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Domino adm
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"User name is not unique" in ` Delivery Failure ReportH_USER_NAME_ISN_T_UNIQUE_IN_A_DELIVERY_FAILURE_REPORT_OVERTopic1"User name is not unique" in a Delivery Failure ReportOverviewH_COMMON_MAIL_ROUTING_PROBLEMS_594_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"User not listed in the Public Address Book" appears with returned mailH_USER_NOT_LISTED_IN_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_APPEARS_WITH_RETURNED_MAIL_OVERTopic1"User not listed in the Public Address Book" appears with returned mailOverviewH_COMMON_MAIL_ROUTING_PROBLEMS_594_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
you can d
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrintUsers unexpectedly required to include @domainname after each address
Directory Assistance\configuring to include other domainsDirectory catalogs\configuring to include other domainsMail addressing\domain names andH_USERS_UNEXPECTEDLY_REQUIRED_TO_INCLUDE_DOM@INNAME_AFTER_EACH_ADDRESS_OVERTopic1Users unexpectedly required to include @domainname after each addressOverviewH_COMMON_MAIL_ROUTING_PROBLEMS_594_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Tpoubleshooting
?OverviewPrintHow to troubleshoot mail routingH_GENERAL_TROUBLESHOOTING_FOR_NOTES_MAIL_ROUTING_4430_OVERVIEWTopic1How to troubleshoot mail routingOverviewH_WHY_ISNT_MAIL_BEING_DELIVERED
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintChecking the Domino Directory for errors that affect mailH_CHECKING_THE_PUBLIC_ADDRESS_BOOK_5211_STEPSTopic1Checking the Domino Directory for errors that affect mailStepsH_GENERAL_TROUBLESHOOTING_FOR_NOTES_MAIL_ROUTING_4430_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintChecking the sender's and/or recipient's workstation for errors that affect mail
Mail routing\workstation setupPersonal Address Book\missing views andTroubleshooting\Location documentsTroubleshooting\Personal Address BookTroubleshooting\workstation setupUser Pref`rences\troubleshootingViews\troubleshooting missingWorkstations\mail routing errors andH_CHECKING_THE_SENDER_S_AND_OR_RECIPIENT_S_WORKSTATION_199_STEPSTopic1Checking the sender's and/or recipient's workstation for errors that affect mailStepsH_GENERAL_TROUBLESHOOTING_FOR_NOTES_MAIL_ROUTING_4430_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
re an admi
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintChecking the server for errors that affect mail
Compacting\MAIL.BOXDatabases\corruptedMAIL.BOX databases\corruptNOTES.INI file\troubleshootingServers\troubleshooting mail routingTroubleshooting\NOTES.INIH_CHECKING_THE_SERVER_8699_STEPSTopic1Checking the server for errors that affect mailStepsH_GENERAL_PROUBLESHOOTING_FOR_NOTES_MAIL_ROUTING_4430_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ng. The add
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@StepsPrintChecking the shared mail setup
Troubleshooting\shared mailH_CHECKING_THE_SHARED_MAIL_SETUP_9019_STEPSTopic1Checking the shared mail setupStepsH_GENERAL_TROUBLESHOOTING_FOR_NOTES_MAIL_ROUTING_4430_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
k here
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
AboutPrintMeeting and resource scheduling - Troubleshooting
Resources\troubleshootingScheduling\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\schedulingTroubleshooting\meetings and resourcesH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SCHEDULINGTopic1Meeting and resource scheduling - TroubleshootingAbout
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ew da
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
?OverviewPrintMeeting and resource scheduling - Problems and error messagesH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_SCHEDULING_9151_OVERTopic1Meeting and resource scheduling - Problems and error messagesOverviewH_ABOUT_TROUBLESHOOTING_SCHEDULING
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@AboutPrintFree time information isn't available
Free Time database\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\free time searchesH_WHY_CAN'T_A_USER_LOOK_UP_FREE_TIME_FOR_ANOTHER_USER?Topic1Free time information isn't availableAboutH_COMMO@_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_SCHEDULING_9151_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System43 Troubleshooting
@OverviewPrint"Can't Find User in Name and Address Book"
Troublephooting\schedulingH_CAN_T_FIND_USER_IN_NAME_AND_ADDRESS_BOOK_OVERTopic1"Can't Find User in Name and Address Book"OverviewH_COMMON_PROBLEMS_AND_ERRORS_RELATED_TO_SCHEDULING_9151_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
402391689629254900
What happened
You tried to create a new database, new database copy, or new replica, but the file name you entered is invalid for your operating system.
402391689629254901
What you can do
Check the file name for errors, such as using more than 8 characters on a DOS operating system, and try again.
The About document contains information supplied by the database designer, and is often a description of the database purpose and contents. To open this document, choose Help - About This Database.
246694848029249871
accelerator key
A key used in conjunction with the ALT key to trigger an action. For example, ALT+F shows the File menu. In Notes menus, accelerator keys are underlined. See Extended Accelerator keys.
387631152029224508
access control
A security feature that determines the tasks that each user, server, or group of users or servers in a Lotus Notes database can perform. Some can do all tasks while others may be limited to specific tasks.i
387631152029224507
access-controlled section
A defined area on a form that allows only certain users to edit the fields in the section. Besides fields, it can include objects, layout regions, and text.
387631152029224509
ACL (access control list)
A list of database users (individual users, Lotus Domino servers, and groups of users and/or servers) created and updated by the database manager. The ACL specifies which users can access the database and what tasks they can perform.
387631152029224511
ACL Monitor
A document created in the Statistics & Events database that causes the Event task on a server to monitor a specific database for ACL changes.
387631152029224516
Adjacent Domain document
This document defines the name, location, and access to adjacent (connected) and non-adjacent (unconnected) Domino domains and non-Domino domains. It is in the Public Address Book.
387631152029224519
Administration Process
A server task (adminp) that automates many administrative tasks. You initiate the tasks, and the Administration Process completes them for you. Some of the tasks the Administration Process can automate are: recertifying Notes IDs, renaming and deleting references to Notes users and groups, creating replicas of databases, and moving databases.
387631152029224522
agent
A program that performs a series of automated tasks according to a set schedule or at the request of a user. An agent consists of three components: the trigger (when it acts), the search (what documents it acts on), and the action (what it does). Also called a macro.t
387631152029224523
Agent Builder
Where users create these types of agents: simple action, formula, LotusScript, or Java. An agent automates a task and can be run by a user or according to a set schedule.
387631152029224524
Agent Manager
The background server program that manages and runs agents on a server. An agent performs a series of automated tasks according to a set schedule or at the request of a user. The Agent Manager runs by default on a server. You set guidelines for the Agent Manager in the Server document in the Domino Directory.
387631152029224525
alarm
For end-users: Reminds you of an entry on your Calendar. When an alarm goes off, Notes shows a description of the Calendar entry associated with the alarm.
For administrators: A document generated in the Statistics database indicating that a server statistic has exceeded a specified threshold. For example, an alarm can notify you if disk space on server drive C drops below 10%. You create Statistics Monitor documents to configure alarm reporting.
387631152029224526
alias
An additional name for a form, view, or keyword.
387631152029224527
alternate mail
A mail system other than Notes mail.
387631152029224528
anonymous access
Lets users and servers access a
server without authentication. This level of access is useful for providing the general public access to servers and databases for which they are not certified. It is typically used for granting access to the servers and databases on a Web site.
387631152029224529
API (application programming interface)
A set of functions
that gives programmers access to another application's internal features from within their own application. Notes and Domino offer several APIs that give developers access to Notes and Domino features and functionality, enabling them to create powerful and customized client and server applications.
387631152029224530
application proxyg
A firewall configuration thatv
examines where a packet is going and the type of information it contains, checks whether your network allows delivery to that destination, and controls the information flow between internal and external clients and servers.
387631152029224532
attach
To store a file with a Lotus Notes document or form. The file, or attachment, is stored with the document or form in the database until you delete one of them. If you mail the document, the attachment is mailed with it.
387631152029224533
attachment
A file attached to a Lotus Notes document or form or to a Web page document. An attachment remains with the document until you delete the attachment or the document.
387631152029224534
authentication
A security mechanism that verifies the identities of clients and/or servers. There are three types of authentication in Notes and Domino -- Notes/Domino, SSL, and name-and-password authentication.
Notes/Domino
Verifies that the user or Domino server trying to access a particular Domino server has a trusted certificate in common with it. Authentication occurs in both directions: the server authenticates the user, then the user authenticates the server.
SSL authentication
Used by Internet protocols over SSL. During SSL authentication, the server exchanges the server certificate with the client and, optionally, the client exchanges the client certificate with the server. This exchange determines whether the client and server have a certificate in common and verifies the identities of the server, and optionally, the client.
Name-and-password authentication
Used by Internet protocols over TCP/IP and SSL. During name-and-password authentication, a text password is sent by the client to the server. The server verifies the identity of the client by making sure the password provided matches the password stored in the Domino Directory for that person. Name-and-password authentication does not use certificates.
387631152029224536
Author access
An access level that allows users to create and read documents and edit the ones they created and saved. Servers with Author access can replicate new documents and can usually delete documents marked for deletion. Access levels can be further refined using roles and access restrictions.
387631152029224538
Authors fieldm
A field that lists the names of people who have Author access. This field does not override the access control list. Use this field to control edit access on a document-by-document basis.e
387631152029224539
autolaunch
When a user creates or opens a document for reading or editing, an embedded object automatically opens in its native format. The user can change the embedded object and add a new object directly in the application that created the object. The Notes document automatically displays the changes.a
387631152029224540
autoregistration
A process by which external databases may be automatically added when the database type and path are supplied during connection.
A feature that enables a Domino server to track specific Domino activities for a chargeback of server processing time. The billing server task collects this information and records the data.
387631152029224542
binary tree server topologyu
Connects servers in a pyramid fashion: the top server connects to two servers below it, each of which connects to two servers below it, and so on. Information travels down the pyramid and then back up.
246694848029249872
bookmark
A customizable, graphical link to databases, views, documents, Web pages, and newsgroups. Bookmarks replace the Release 4 database icons.
246694848029249873
bookmark folderl
A folder in the Bookmark Bar containing bookmarks.
387631152029224543
broadcast meetingi
Invitees are notified about a meeting but do not need to respond to the invitation. This option is useful when individual response will not affect the occurrence of the meeting.
387631152029224513
button bar
In the Notes client, the bar that displays actions as buttons. Actions let users click to accomplish tasks, from mimicking the Notes menus to tasks defined by formulas or a LotusScript program.
The link that allows a server and client to communicate. A CA vouches for the identity of a server and client by issuing certificates stamped with the CA's digital signature and including the CA's trusted root certification. The digital signature assures the client and server that both the client certificate and the server certificate can be trusted. If the client and server can identify the digital signature on the certificate, then a secure SSL session can be established. Otherwise, the client and server cannot authenticate each other, and the session cannot be established. Clients and servers identify digital signatures by comparing them against the trusted root certificate.
A CA can be a third-party, commercial certifier, such as VeriSign, or a certifier that you establish at your organization using Notes and Domino. Third-party and Domino CAs create both server and client certificates.
387681152029224545
Calendar
A view in your Notes mail database that you can use to manage your time and schedule meetings. You can add appointments, meetings, reminders, events, and anniversaries to the Calendar view. You can also display tasks in the Calendar view.
387681152029224546
Calendar profile
A document that lets you customize your calendar and indicate the times that you are available for meetings. Notes saves this information in a database on your mail server; you define who can look up
the information. r
387681152029224547
canonical format
A format for storing hierarchical names that displays the hierarchical attribute of each component of the name. For example, the canonical format for the name Reuben D. Smith/Ottawa/Acme/CA is: CN=Reuben D. Smith/OU=Ottawa/O=Acme/C=CA
where:
CN is the common name
OU is the organizational unit
O is the organization
C is the country code
387681152029224548
category
A word, phrase, or number used to group documents in a view.
387681152029224549
certificates
A certificate is a unique electronic stamp that identifies a user or server. Domino uses two types of certificates: Notes certificates and Internet certificates.
A Notes certificate is stored in a Notes or Domino ID file that associates a name with a public key. Certificates permit users and servers to access specific Lotus Domino servers. An ID may have many certificates.r
An Internet client certificate lets a user access a server using SSL client authentication or send an S/MIME message. The client certificate is stored in either the Notes ID file if you are using a Notes client or in a file stored on the user's hard drive. An Internet server certificate lets users access a server using SSL server authentication. The server certificate is stored in a key ring file on the server's hard drive.e
Internet certificates contain a public key, a name, an expiration date, and a digital signature.
387681152029224550
certificatione
Process that creates special signed messages called certificates, which state that a particular public key is associated with a particular user or server name. Domino automatically issues Notes certificates for users and servers when you register them. a
194832153629235561
Certificate Authority certificateh
A binary file stored on the CA server's hard drive that contains a public key, a name, and a digital signature. The CA certificate identifies the Domino or third-party CA.
387681152029224551
certifier ID
A file that generates an electronic "stamp" which indicates a trust relationship. It is analogous to the device used to stamp passports -- it verifies that a person is trusted by that stamping authority.
387681152029224552
Abbreviation for Common Gateway Interface (CGI). CGI is a standard that connects external programs with information servers such as Web servers or HTTP servers. CGI scripts are a common way of customizing information presentation and retrieval on the Web; they can run within databases and on a Domino server.A
387681152029224553
chain server topologyT
Connects servers one-to-one, end-to-end. Information travels along the chain and then back.
387681152029224554
child document
A document that inherits values from another document (the parent document).
194832153629235562
client certificate
An electronic stamp that contains a public key, a name, an expiration date, and a digital signature. The client certificate uniquely identifies the user and is used when accessing a server using SSL and sending encrypted and signed S/MIME messages.
The client certificate is stored in the Notes ID file if you are using a Notes client or on the user's hard drive.
387681152029224556
CLS files
Country Language Services (CLS) files convert characters such as foreign currency symbols and accented letters to other characters when importing or exporting files. CLS files also control the order in which characters are sorted.
387681152029224557
cluster
A group of a maximum of six Domino servers that provide: failover protection so that requests to a server that is down are redirected to another server in the cluster, workload balancing so that heavily used servers pass requests on to other servers in the cluster, and immediate replication within the cluster for real-time data access.a
387681152029224558
collapse
An action that hides documents under categories or hides response documents under main documents in a view.E
387681152029224559
@command
A special @function that performs an immediate action in the user interface.
246694848029249874
command key
A key that directly triggers an action and usually makes use of the CTRL (Windows) or COMMAND (Macintosh) keys. For example, to print press CTRL+P (COMMAND+P on Macintosh).
387681152029224560
compact
To compress a database, in order to reclaim space freed by the deletion of documents and attachments.
387681152029224561
computed field
On a form, a field whose value is determined by a formula that you write.
387681152029224562
Connection documentc
In the Domino Directory, a Connection document enables communication between two servers and specifies how and when the information exchange occurs. In the Personal Address Book, it describes how a client accesses a certain server.
387681152029224563
create access list
A list that restricts a form, so that only specified users can create documents using the form.e
387681152029224564
criteria
Data you specify so that your application can select records during a query. You can use matching criteria, in which records must match the criteria you set, or formula criteria, which use logical formulas and @functions to test records.s
403755241629251030
cross-certificate.
Domino uses two types of cross-certificates: Notes and Internet. Notes cross-certificates allow users in different hierarchically-certified organizations to access servers and to receive signed mail messages. Internet cross-certificates allow Notes users to secure S/MIME messages and verify the identity of a server using SSL.)
Cross-certificates are stored in the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book.m
Directory that contains local databases, local database templates, country language services (CLS) files, desktop.dsk files, and if you're using OS/2 or UNIX, your NOTES.INI file.g
364061152029224507
data type
The type of information that one field in a database can store, for example, text, rich text, numbers, keywords, and time.
364061152029224513
database
A collection of documents and their forms, views, and folders, stored under one name. Notes databases can be part of a Web site or part of a Notes application.
364061152029224508
database cache
A section of memory on a Domino server where databases are stored for quick access. You can display cache statistics, change the number of databases that a server can hold in its cache, close all databases in the cache, and disable the cache.
364061152029224509
Database Catalog
A database containing information about databases stored on a single Domino server, a group of servers, or all the servers in a domain. Database Catalogs are commonly used to let users add the databases in them to the users' desktops.
364061152029224510
database library
A database that provides information about databases including descriptions, replica IDs, and manager names. Database libraries can be local and describe databases on a workstation or can be on a server and describe shared databases. Database libraries are commonly used to let users add the databases in them to the users' desktops. Related databases can be grouped together for easier access.
364061152029224511
database manager
A person with Manager access to a database whose responsibilities include setting up and maintaining access to the database and monitoring database replication, usage, and size.
364061152029224512
database replica
A special copy of a database that, because it shares a replica ID with the original database, can exchange information with it through replication.n
364061152029224516
DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange)
DDE is a method for displaying data created with other Windows and Presentation Manager applications, such as graphics or spreadsheet ranges, within Notes documents. DDE objects can be reactivated and updated to reflect the current state of changing data.
364061152029224517
default value formulaa
The formula that lets you set an initial value for an editable field.
364061152029224518
default view
The view displayed the first time you open a database.
364061152029224519
Depositor access
An access level where users can create documents but can't read any of the documents in the database.t
364121152029224520
design paneo
The workspace area that displays design options, as well as areas to enter design information.
364121152029224521
design template
A database design that lets you share design elements among databases and store design elements with a template. You can enable the template so that when it changes, the change automatically occurs in all databases created with that template.
364121152029224522
designer
The person who creates and develops a database or an application, pilot tests it, refines it as necessary, and delivers it to the database manager.e
364121152029224523
Designer access
An access level where users can compose, read, and edit any documents, plus modify the database icon, About and Using documents, and all design elements. Servers can replicate all of the above and, if they have delete access, deletions.
364121152029224524
desktop.dsk
File that contains information about your workspace.
364121152029224525
detach
To make a local copy of a file that is attached to a Lotus Notes document.
364121152029224526
dial-up9
A connection type, usually a port, that is not on a local area network and must be accessed by modem and telephone lines..
364121152029224527
dialog box
A box that appears when an application needs additional information to complete a task. A dialog box can contain check boxes, command buttons, option buttons, list boxes, information boxes, scroll buttons, drop-down boxes, and text boxes.
199860272029251056
digital speech synthesizer
A device used with screen readers to portray what is on screen through voice.r
80855990429235553s
DIIOP (Domino Internet Inter-ORB Protocol)
A server task that runs on the server and works with the Domino Object Request Broker to allow communication between Java applets created with the Notes Java classes and the Domino server. Browser users and Domino servers use IIOP to communicate and to exchange object data.e
364121152029224528
Directory Assistance
A feature that allows you to extend client authentication, name lookups, and LDAP searches to secondary Domino directories and to LDAP directories. You use the Directory Assistance database to set up directory assistance.i
375321152029224509
Directory Assistance databaseh
A database used by directory assistance that serves as a directory of secondary Domino directories and of LDAP directories.a
5459449629235550
Directory Catalog
A database that contains Person, Group, Mail-In Database, and Scheduling Resource entries from one or more Domino Directories. Servers use Directory Catalogs for quick name lookups, and Notes users use a Mobile Directory Catalog to easily address mail to people throughout an organization, even when disconnected from the network.
364121152029224529
DNS (Domain Name System)
An Internet service that translates domain names into IP addresses.
364121152029224530
document
A Lotus Notes database entry that users create by using a form on the Create menu. Documents consist of fields, text, numbers, graphics, and so on. Information may be entered by a user, automatically calculated by formulas, imported from other applications, or linked to another application and dynamically updated.
364121152029224531
domain
A Domino domain is a collection of Domino servers and users that share a common Domino Directory. The primary function is mail routing. Users' domains are determined by the location of their server-based mail files.a
For a Domino server to communicate with a server in a different domain, you create a Domain document in the Domino Directory to define the name, location, and access to adjacent and non-adjacent Domino domains and non-Domino domains. Other domains are:
Foreign domain
A Domino domain and an external mail system such as SMTP or cc:Mail. It specifies which outbound addresses are Internet addresses and where the Notes Mail Router sends those messages.c
Global domain
A group of Domino domains, such as Sales1, Sales2, and Marketing, under a single Internet domain, such as acme.com. All outbound SMTP mail, whether it originates from the Sales1 or Marketing domains, has the return address acme.com.
293335424029235561
Domino Directory
A directory of users, servers, groups, and other entities, for example printers. It is a tool that administrators use to manage the Domino system, for example, to connect servers for replication or mail routing, to schedule server tasks, and so on. In previous releases the Domino Directory was called the Public Address Book. s
364121152029224532
Domino server
A computer that runs the Lotus Domino server program and stores Notes databases.
An ECL is a feature accessed through the User Preferences dialog box that enhances security of your workstation data. The ECL lets you control which formulas and scripts created by another user can run on your workstation.
364121152029224537
Edit mode,
The state in which you can create or modify a document.
364121152029224538
editable field
On a form, a field whose value is determined by a formula that you write to supply a default value, edit the user's entry, and validate the entry to make sure it meets specific requirements.
364121152029224539
Editor accesst
An access level that allows users to create, read, and edit any documents. Servers can replicate new documents, change existing documents, and, if they have delete access, make deletions.I
403815241629251031
electronic signature
A stamp added to mail messages, fields, or sections that verifies that the person who originated the message is the author and that no one has tampered with the data.
364121152029224541
encryption key
Security feature that ensures that only the intended recipient can read encrypted text. Every Lotus Notes user ID contains two, a public key for sending and encrypting, and a private key for receiving and decrypting. Users may also have a public and private key for S/MIME encryption and signatures.E
364121152029224542
eventd
In LotusScript, an action or occurrence to which an application responds. That action can be a user-generated one, such as a mouse click; a system-generated one, such as the elapsing of a set amount of time on the computer's clock; or an application-generated one, such as the saving of a document via the product's autosave feature. Each LotusObject can respond to a predefined set of events, those defined for the class that the object is an instance of. Events are the primary way to initiate the execution of scripts: when a script is attached to an object event, it is executed when the event occurs.
In the Calendar, an entry with a duration of at least one day. For example, an all-day meeting or a vacation.h
364121152029224544
event script
A script attached to a particular event. For example, in LotusScript, Initialize, Queryopen, and Postopen. When the event occurs, the script runs.
364121152029224546
export
Save a Lotus Notes document or view in a non-Notes format.
246754848029249875
extended accelerator key
Additional accelerator keys, used for bookmarks and task buttons. To view the extended accelerator keys, press and hold down the ALT key.
364121152029224547
extranet
An intranet with extended access, generally behind a firewall. For example, a company may give the public access to certain parts of its intranet and restrict access to others. This can be done by using firewall programs or routers, via a proxy, or by specialized software.x
A cluster's ability to redirect requests from one server to another. Failover occurs when a user tries to access a database on an unavailable server or one in heavy use, and the user instead connects to a replica of the database on another (available) server in the cluster. Failover is transparent to the user.
364121152029224549
field
On a form, a named area containing a single type of information. The field's data type determines the contents -- text, rich text (including styled text, graphics, and multimedia), numbers, or time-date.s
364121152029224551
firewall
A firewall is a system that is designed to control access to applications on a network. Typically, a firewall controls unauthorized access to a private network from the public Internet.u
364121152029224553
folder pane
The workspace area that shows the folders and views available in the opened database.
364121152029224554
Forms control how you edit, display, and print documents. A form can contain fields, static text, graphics, and special objects. A database can have any number of forms.
364121152029224555
formula
An expression that has program-like attributes; for example, you can assign values to variables and use a limited control logic. Formulas are best used for working within the object that the user is currently processing. The formula language interface to Notes and Domino is through calls to @functions.l
You can write formulas that return a value to a field, determine selection criteria for a view, create specific fields in a form, determine the documents a replica receives, help users fill out a document, increase database performance, and create buttons or hotspots.
364121152029224550
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol used to transfer files from one computer to another. FTP also refers to the actual application used to move files using the FTP protocol.
364121152029224558
full-text index
A collection of files that indexes the text in a database to allow Notes to process users' search queries.
364121152029224559
full-text search
Search option that lets you search a database for words and phrases, as well as perform more complex searches using wildcards and logical operators.
364121152029224560
@function
A built-in formula that performs a specialized calculation automatically.
A system of naming associated with Notes IDs that reflects the relationship of names to the certifiers in an organization. Hierarchical naming helps distinguish users with the same common name for added security and allows for decentralized management of certification. The format of a hierarchical name is:e
common name/organizational unit/organization/country code
For example, Sarah Forbes/ Toronto/Acme/CA
368131152029224510
hierarchical view)
A view that distinguishes between main documents and response documents. Each main document has its response documents indented under it.a
368131152029224512
An intermediate stop on the path along which mail is routed when the sender's server and recipient's server are not directly connected.
368131152029224513
hotspot
Text or a picture in a rich text field that a user can click to perform an action, run a formula or script, or follow a link.
368131152029224516
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol)
An Internet protocol used to transfer files from one computer to another.a
368131152029224519
hub-spoke server topology
Establishes one central server as the hub and other servers as the spokes. The spokes update the hub server by replication and mail routing, and the hub in turn updates each spoke. Hub servers replicate with each other or with master hub servers in organizations with more than one hub.
368131152029224520
hunt group
A group of servers that are assigned one phone number. Clients dial the one phone number and connect to any available server. Hunt groups balance the load on servers. o
Network protocol that lets a client access, manipulate, and store Calendar information on a server. ICAP can be used either as a set of capability extensions to IMAP4 to create a server that supports both messaging and Calendar functions, or as a stand-alone protocol for a server dedicated only to the Calendar. d
368131152029224523
IIOP (Internet Inter-ORB Protocol)
An Internet protocol that implements CORBA solutions over the Web. IIOP lets browsers and servers exchange complex objects, unlike HTTP, which only supports transmission of text.
196805990429235552
IIS (Internet Information Server)
Microsoft Internet Information Server is a Web server that lets you browse HTML and Active Server pages. Domino includes an IIS product extension that lets you browse Domino databases using IIS.
368131152029224525
IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol)
Mail protocol that allows clients running it to retrieve mail from a host mail server also running the protocol. IMAP is similar to POP3 but has additional features. For example, it supports three modes of mailbox access. You can enable IMAP on a Domino server.b
368131152029224527
input-translation formula
In an editable field, the formula that converts or translates entered information into a specified value or format.
368131152029224528
input-validation formula
In an editable field, the formula that verifies that the entered information meets the specified criteria.
368181152029224534
intranet
A computer network with restricted access. Companies use intranets to share information internally. Increasingly, intranets are built as private Internets: a TCP/IP network based on Web standards like HTML, SMTP, or POP3. The difference is access -- anyone can access the Internet with the appropriate software, but only employees can access an intranet. See extranet.
196805990429235553
ISAPI (Internet server application programming interface)
The Internet server application programming interface supported by IIS. Developers use this interface to create programs, called extensions, that extend the capabilities of IIS.
368131152029224529
ISDN (integrated services digital network)
An international communications standard for sending voice, video, and data over digital telephone lines.a
A binary file that is protected by a password and stores one or more certificates on the server hard drives. Domino uses two types of key ring files: server and CA. You do not use a key ring file for client certificates.
371751152029224506
keyboard shortcuta
A key combination that can be pressed instead of using a command from a pull-down menu. CTRL+letter and SHIFT+letter are the most common keyboard shortcuts. Some products let users define their own keyboard shortcuts; these shortcuts may be single keys or key combinations.-
371751152029224507
keywords field
A multiple-choice field that lets users make selections by clicking, rather than typing, an entry. Keywords fields can display in several formats, including a drop-down list box, a check box, and a radio button.
On a form or subform, a fixed-length design area in which related elements can be dragged and moved easily and can be displayed in ways not possible on regular forms and subforms.
371751152029224509
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)
A set of protocols for accessing information directories. LDAP is based on the X.500 protocol, but supports TCP/IP, which is necessary for Internet access. Because it's a simpler version of X.500, LDAP is sometimes called X.500-lite. You can enable LDAP on a Domino server to allow LDAP clients to access information in the Domino Directory, for example, e-mail addresses.
371751152029224510
LDAP directory
A hierarchical directory of names that can reflect an organization's structure or geography and that is accessed via the LDAP protocol.
Running LDAP on a Domino server enables the Domino Directory to serve as an LDAP directory. Two popular public LDAP directories are Bigfoot and Four11.5
371751152029224512
letterhead
The particular way that your name, the date, and the time appear at the top of the mail messages you create. You can choose from several letterhead styles.
371751152029224514
library
A database containing lists of other databases.
371751152029224515
license0
Determines which databases, templates, and functions users have access to and the extent to which they can perform design and administrative tasks.
371751152029224516
LICS (Lotus International Character Set)
A character set supported by Notes.
371751152029224518
An icon that gives you direct access from one Lotus Notes document, view, or database (the source object) to any other document, view, or database (the target object). Notes opens the target object without closing the source object you branched from.
371751152029224519
LMBCS (Lotus Multibyte Character Set)s
The format in which Notes stores all internal text, except file attachments and objects. As a result, any user can edit, forward, and mail documents and work with databases in any language.
All text leaving the system2
that is, displayed, printed, and exportedA
-- is translated from LMBCS to the appropriate character set. LMBCS supports Western and Eastern European, North American, and Asian languages.
371751152029224520
LN:DO6
Lotus Notes:Data Object is an LSX-compliant module that allows the use of LotusScript scripts for external data access applications.
371751152029224522
local database
A Lotus Notes database stored on your computer's hard disk drive, on a disk, or on a networked file server.5
371751152029224523
Location documentt
A document in your Personal Address Book that contains communication and other location-specific settings you use when you work with Notes in a specific place. You can create as many Location documents as you need.
371751152029224524
LotusObjecta
Any object that is an instance of a Lotus-product class. LotusObjects can be manipulated using LotusScript. LotusObjects share a common design. Many are implemented either the same way across products, or almost the same way, with slight variations from product to product.
371751152029224525
LotusScript
A version of Basic that offers not only standard capabilities of structured programming languages, but a powerful set of language extensions that enable object-oriented development within and across products. Its interface to Notes is through predefined object classes.l
371751152029224521
LS:DO
The ODBCConnection, ODBCQuery, and ODBCResultSet classes, collectively called the LotusScript Data Object (LS:DO), provide properties and methods for accessing and updating tables in external databases through the ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) Version 2.0 standard.
A program that performs a series of automated tasks on behalf of the user. A macro consists of three components: the trigger (when it acts), the search (what documents it acts on), and the action (what it does). Also called an agent.p
375321152029224508
Manager access
An access level that allows users to compose, read, and edit any documents; modify the access control list, database icon, About and Using documents, and all design elements; define replication settings; and delete the database. Servers can replicate all of the above and, if they have delete access, deletions.h
375321152029224511
MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions)
Software that allows you to attach non-text files to Internet mail messages. Non-text files include graphics, spreadsheets, formatted word-processor documents, and sound files.
246754848029249876
MSAA (Microsoft Active Accessibility)S
An enabling technology, used to make software more accessible for people who use devices such as screen readers. It helps to distinguish user interface elements, items in documents, and the organization of documents.
375321152029224510
MTA (message transfer agent)
A program that translates messages between mail formats. Also called a gateway.
Now called the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book.
38581219229240024
named element
A specific design element in a database, for example a view or folder.
375321152029224516
named style
A collection of styles that you can apply to other data in a file. Styles stored in a named style can include number format, typeface, type size, underlining, bold, italics, lines, colors, and alignment.
375321152029224517
navigation pane6
The pane that either displays icons for all views, folders, and agents in a database, or displays the current navigator.
246754848029249877
navigation buttons
Browser-like buttons in Notes used to navigate among open pages of databases or Web pages. Button functions include back, forward, stop, refresh, search, and go.2
375321152029224518
navigatorA
Programmed graphics in the user interface that direct users to specific parts of a database without having to open views. Navigators usually include hotspots, and can do simple actions such as opening a database, document, URL, view or folder, or even another navigator.
80855990429235552n
negotiated session key
Encryption key that is created at the beginning of the SSL handshake, which determines the key used when encrypting information over an SSL connection. The negotiated session key changes each time a new session is initiated.
375321152029224520
newsgroupe
An online discussion group that users with newsreaders can participate in. A Domino NNTP server can store USENET newsgroups, public newsgroups distributed on the Internet, and private newsgroups.8
375321152029224521
newsfeed
The periodic transfer of newly posted newsgroup articles from one NNTP server to another using the NNTP protocol. If you enable the NNTP protocol on a Domino server, you can set up a newsfeed to transfer both USENET and private newsgroup articles.
375321152029224522
newsreader
A client application that runs the NNTP protocol and is used to select, view, create, sort, and print USENET and private newsgroup articles. e
375321152029224519
NNTP (Network News Transfer Protocol)a
Protocol that supports reading newsgroups, posting new articles, and transferring articles between news servers. When enabled on a Domino server, allows NNTP clients to access newsgroups on the server and allows the Domino server to exchange news with other NNTP servers.
375321152029224524
No Accesse
An access level where users have no access to a database; they cannot even add the database icon to their workspaces.m
375321152029224525
Notes client
Client software that allows you to access Notes databases on a Domino server, send mail, browse the Web.
375321152029224527
Notes mail database
A Lotus Notes database in which you send and receive mail. Your mail database is stored on your home server.
375321152029224531
Notes RPC (Notes remote procedure call)n
This is the architectural layer of Notes used for all Notes-to-Notes communication. You can set up either the HTTP or the SOCKS proxy to work with RPC.c
375321152029224532
Notes/FX
Notes/FX (Field Exchange) is a technology that lets desktop applications and Notes share data fields.m
375321152029224530
NOTES.INI5
A settings file that includes installation choices, server console commands, and setup selections.
375321152029224528
NotesNIC
The administrator of the NET domain, a way to communicate with other Notes organizations on the Internet.4
375321152029224533
The file extension for a Notes database file (.NSF). A database file contains the data for an application. Its structure is composed of forms, fields, folders, views, and other presentation features, such as a navigator and a database icon.
375321152029224534
The file extension for a Notes template file (.NTF). A template file contains the structure for the database -- that is, forms, folders, and views -- but does not contain documents. Domino Designer comes with a collection of templates that you can use to create system and application databases.e
A standard developed by Microsoft for accessing external data. ODBC has four components: the ODBC-enabled application, the ODBC Driver Manager, ODBC drivers, and data sources. Lotus Notes is an ODBC-enabled application.g
386412192292400252
ODS (On Disk Structure)
The format in which a Notes database is physically stored on disk. Also called a database format. In Release 5, the ODS version of a database is listed on the Info tab of the Database Properties box.
375321152029224537
outgoing mail database
A file (MAIL.BOX) that temporarily stores outgoing mail that users create when not connected to a mail server.
An area of a workspace that shows a specific part of an opened database; for example, available folders and views, the current view, or the contents of the highlighted document.w
379501152029224507
parent documenth
A document whose values are inherited by another document (the child document).i
379501152029224508
partitioned server
A feature that lets you run a maximum of six Domino servers on a single computer. With partitioned servers, you can increase the number of servers in your organization without additional investment in hardware.
379501152029224509
passthru serverc
An intermediary server that lets a client access a target server to which the client is not connected. A mobile user can access multiple servers through a single phone connection; a LAN client can connect to servers running network protocols different from its own.
379501152029224510
peer-peer server topology
Connects every server in your organization to every other server. For organizations with only a few servers, this allows for rapid updates.w
379501152029224512
permanent pen
An editing feature that allows users to edit documents in a second font.
379501152029224513
Personal Address Book
A database that contains the names and addresses of users and user groups that you enter yourself.
379501152029224514
Personal Web Navigator
A feature that retrieves, displays, searches for, and stores Web pages in a local Personal Web Navigator database. Because this database is stored locally, you are the only person who can access the Web pages stored in it.
351489449629235550
PKCS (Public Key Cryptography Standards)
Industry-standard format for certificate requests. You see this acronym in both the Domino Certificate Authority and Server Certificate Administration applications. It means that if the CA server understands how to read PKCS format, it will understand your certificate request. This is important when you submit server certificate requests to an external CA, as the external CA must understand PKCS format.
379501152029224516
POP3 (Post Office Protocol Version 3)e
A mail protocol that allows clients running it to retrieve mail from a host mail server also running the protocol. You can enable POP3 on a Domino server.
379501152029224518
preview pane
The preview pane lets you read the content of the document that is selected in the view pane. If Notes is set to preview document links, you can also view documents linked to the selected document.
379501152029224519
private folder
A folder that users design and save for their own use with a database.
379501152029224520
private key0
A secret encryption key that is stored in a Notes ID file and that is used to sign and decrypt messages and to authenticate as the owner of the key.
For SSL-encrypted transactions, public and private keys are a unique pair of mathematically related keys used to initiate the transaction that are stored in the Notes ID file, Internet client hard disk drive, or server key ring file.
379501152029224521
private view
A view that users design and save for their own use with a database.
379501152029224523
proxy server
A server that intercepts all requests made to another server and determines if it can fulfill the requests itself. If not, the proxy server forwards the request to the other server.c
379501152029224525
public key
An encryption key associated with a Notes ID that is used to verify an electronic signature, encrypt a message, or identify an authenticating user. A public key is part of each user ID and a copy of the key is stored in the Domino Directory. Certificates on IDs ensure that public keys are valid.
For SSL-encrypted transactions, public and private keys are a unique pair of mathematically related keys used to initiate the transaction that are stored in the Domino Directory.
A list that restricts a form so that only specified users can read documents created from the form. Use the Reader field to control access on a document-by-document basis.a
379501152029224530
read-only mode
A document state that allows a user to read but not modify a document. To modify a document, a user must have Editor access (or higher) to the database or be the document's author.
379501152029224531
Reader accessE
An access level where users can only read documents.
379501152029224532
Readers field2
A list of names (user names, group names, and access roles) that indicates who can read a given document. This field does not override the access control list.l
379501152029224533
referral
An LDAP directory URL returned to an LDAP client. The Domino LDAP server can return a referral if an LDAP client query is not successful in a Domino Directory and an entry in the Master Address Book suggests that the query may be successful in another LDAP directory.L
379501152029224535
replicao
A special copy of a database that, because it shares a replica ID with the original database, can exchange information with it through replication.a
379501152029224536
replica ID
A unique number that identifies a database and all its replicas.
379501152029224537
replicate
Update database replicas that are on different servers or on your workstation and a server. You can replicate the entire database so that over time all database replicas are essentially identical, or select specific items or areas to replicate.
379501152029224538
replication
The process of exchanging modifications between replicas. Through replication, Notes makes all of the replicas essentially identical over time.
379501152029224539
replication conflict
A condition that occurs when two or more users edit the same document in different replicas of a database between replications.m
379501152029224540
Replication Monitoro
A document created in the Statistics & Events database that causes the Event task on a server to monitor a specific database to make sure it is replicating.
379501152029224541
Replicator
The part of the workspace where Notes displays all replica databases and lets you manage the replication process. Also the name of the server task that replicates databases between servers.
379551152029224543
response document5
A document created using a Response form, a typical component of a discussion database. In a view, response documents are usually indented underneath the document to which they respond.
240938102429317457
rich text fieldi
A rich text field can contain text, objects, file attachments, and pictures. You can tell you are in a rich text field if the status bar at the bottom of your screen tells you what font size and font name you are using.i
379551152029224545
ring server topology
Connects servers one-to-one in a circle with the ends connected. It is similar to chain server topology, which connects servers one-to-one but with the ends unconnected.a
379551152029224546
Database-specific groups created to simplify the maintenance of restricted fields, forms, and views. You can apply a role to Authors fields, Readers fields, and read and create access lists in forms and views.7
Internet protocol that allows LDAP clients to authenticate with an LDAP server and provides security for the data transmitted with this protocol.
383291152029224506
save conflictl
A save conflict occurs when two or more users edit the same document in a database on a server at the same time. The document saved first becomes the main document; subsequent users are prompted to save their changes as responses titled "[Replication or Save Conflict]."
246804848029249878
screen reader9
A device that reads what is displayed on the computer screen. See digital speech synthesizer.
383291152029224507
sectione
A defined area on a form that can include fields, objects, layout regions, and text. You can set section properties to expand automatically at certain points.
361342720029235552
server certificate
An electronic stamp stored in the server's key ring file that contains a public key, a name, an expiration date, and a digital signature. The server certificate uniquely identifies the server.
383291152029224510
server command
Command that lets you perform a task, such as shutting down or restarting a server. You can enter commands manually at the console or remote console or use a Program document in the Domino Directory to run commands automatically.r
383291152029224511
server connectionl
A document in the Domino Directory or your Personal Address Book that defines a connection to a server. There are four types of server connection documents: dialup, network, passthru, and remote LAN.m
383291152029224512
server program
A program that automates an administration task, such as compacting all databases on a server. You can schedule server programs to run at particular time, or you can run them as the need arises.
383291152029224513
server taskw
A program provided with the Domino server that runs only when specifically loaded. Server tasks serve various purposes; the Administration Process, HHTP Server, and Reporter are just a few examples of server tasks. e
383341152029224515
shared field
A field that is used in more than one form. For example, many forms have a creation date field, so you can define the field once and reuse it.
383341152029224516
shared mailn
A feature that stores messages addressed to more than one user on a mail server in a central database, called the shared mail database. Message headers are stored in user mail files. When users double-click the headers, links to the corresponding content in the shared mail database are activated. This is a space-saving feature. Shared mail is also known as the Single Copy Object Store (SCOS).
383341152029224518
shared view
A view that is public to more than one user.
383341152029224519
sibling document
In a view or folder, a document at the same level as another document.
383341152029224522
To attach a unique electronic signature, derived from the sender's user ID, to a document or field when a document is mailed. Signing mail ensures that if an unauthorized user creates a new copy of a user's ID, the unauthorized user cannot forge signatures with it. In addition, the signature verifies that no one has tampered with the data while the message was in transit.
383341152029224521
single copy object store (SCOS)e
The feature that allows mail addressed to multiple users to be stored in a central database, called the shared mail database.
361342720029235553
site certificate
A certificate obtained for an individual site. A site certificate is different from a trusted root certificate in that a site certificate lets you access only a specific site. A trusted root certificate lets you access any servers with certificates issued from that trusted root Certificate Authority.
383341152029224523
SLIP/PPP
A dial-up version of TCP/IP.
383291152029224508
S/MIME (Secure/MIME)
A secure version of the MIME protocol that allows users to send encrypted and electronically signed mail messages, even if users have different mail programs.
383341152029224520
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
The Internet's standard host-to-host mail transport protocol. It traditionally operates over TCP, using port 25. SMTP does not provide any mailbox facility, nor any special features beyond basic mail transport.
383341152029224526
SOCKS (SOCK-et-S)5
A mechanism by which a secure proxy data channel can be established between two computers. It is generally used as a firewall.
383291152029224509
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
A security protocol for the Internet and intranets that provides communications privacy and authentication for Domino server tasks that operate over TCP.r
383341152029224530
stacked icon
A Notes database icon that represents a database and all of its associated replicas that are currently added to the workspace.
383341152029224531
static text
Text that remains constant on every document created with a particular form, as opposed to fields in which you type or in which Notes calculates information.i
383341152029224536
A replica or database copy that has not yet been filled with documents. The database is no longer a stub once the first replication takes place.
383341152029224535
subformd
A form-building shortcut that lets you store regularly used fields, sections, actions, and other form elements together. You can place subforms on a form either permanently, or as computed subforms that display on documents as dictated by a formula.e
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
Network protocols that define the Internet. Originally designed for UNIX, TCP/IP software is now available for every major computer operating system.
383341152029224538
template
A design that you can use as a starting point for a new database. If it is a design template, it will update database design elements created from the template.
383341152029224539
temporary fieldc
A field used during calculations. It is not stored.a
361342720029235554
trusted root
A Certificate Authority's certificate merged into the Domino Directory, client's browser, or the server's key ring file, which allows clients and servers to communicate with any client or server that has that Certificate Authority's certificate marked as trusted.n
The Internet address for a document, file, or other resource. It describes the protocol required to access the resource, the host where it can be found, and a path to the resource on that host.
383341152029224542
user IDr
A file assigned to every user and server that uniquely identifies them to Lotus Notes and Domino.
383341152029224543
Using This Database document
A document that explains how the database works. Specifically, it provides users with instructions on using various forms, views, and navigators in the database.
The customizable default opening screen in the Notes client that includes major tasks such as sending mail, creating appointments, and making a to do list. The page also contains a search bar, information on what's new in Notes, and a tour of Notes.y
246804848029249880
window tab
A button that represents an open window in Notes. Window tabs are convenient for switching back and forth between windows.
Before you set up the first server, you must plan the hierarchical name scheme for new users and servers. Because the hierarchical name scheme is the cornerttone of Domino security, planning the scheme is a critical task.
A hierarchical name consists of an organization and zero or more organizational units. You can control whether users and servers in different organizations and organizational units can communicate with one another.
A small company might have an organization with only one level of organizational units -- for example:
A larger company might have several levels of organizational units -- for example:
See Also
Click here
Sample Domino System Configuration
Click here
&Arial
The hub servers at Acme Corporation handle server communication between servers located on the East and West coasts. These servers are geographically distant and require a Wide Area Network to connect -- for example, using a modem or ISDN line. Controlling communication through hub servers is beneficial because it centralizes administration for connections that may be costly or time consuming.
Using hub servers, only two servers need to make a WAN connection, instead of every server in the organization.
The firewall server is a Domino server that protects Hub-E/East/Acme and Hub-W/West/Acme from outside users. Because the firewall server uses Domino instead of some other type of firewall software, the hub servers can use Domino features, such as mail and replication, to send and receive information.
See Also
Click here
Sample Domino System Configuration
Click here
&Arial
Unsolicited commercial e-mail (UCE) often floods your server with numerous copies of the same message. Accepting UCE reduces performance and consumes system resources. You can specify restrictions to prevent UCE from being routed to or relayed through your server. Specifying restrictions prevents malicious users from using your system to spoof addresses or send UCE.
To save system resources, before receiving a message, Domino checks the Recipient To and Mail From$addresses in the mail header. If you set the Domino server to deny a source, Domino denies it whenever that source is encountered -- for example, if users from a denied domain send mail through a relay, Domino denies it based on its origin from that domain. Domino creates an entry in the log file (LOG.NSF) whenever a message is rejected.
54634681629250880e
To restrict who can send Internet mail to your users
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings documenth
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - SMTP Inbound Controls tab$
6. Complete these fields in the Inbound Sender Controls section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Verify sender's domain in DNS
Choose one:
Enabled to check the Mail From domain in the DNS to verify$that the sender's domain exists before the inbound mail is received.
Disabled (default) not to check.
Allow messages only from the following Internet addresses/domains
Internet addresses from which the server accepts messages. If you enter addresses in this field,
only
messages with senders matching those addresses can send Internet mail to users in your local Internet domain. Mail drom all other addresses is denied. For example, you enter
lotus.com
in the field. Domino accepts only messages sent from users whose address ends in lotus.com. Domino denies messages from all other Internet addresses.
Deny messages from the following Internet addresses/domainsl
Internet addresses from which the server does not accept messages. If you enter addresses in this field, all messages
except
those matching addresses listed in this field can route to your users. Mail is denied only from addresses matching the entries in this field. For example, you enter
lotus.com
in the field. Domino accepts messages from all Internet addresses and domains except those ending in lotus.com. Domino denies messages from senders whose addresses end in lotus.com.
Note
If you specify the same entry in an Allow field and d Deny field so there is a conflict between the two fields, Domino denies messages for that entry. The Deny setting takes precedence for security reasons. Be careful not to have the same entry in an Allow field and a Deny field for the same setting.N
See Also
Click here
Restricting who can use your system to relay Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound SMTP connections
Click dere
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Restricting mail routing based on Notes domains, organizations, and organizational units
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can receive mail from the Internet
Click here
Click here
Supporting inbound SMTP extensions
Click here
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$TITLE
$IdageData
$ImageNames
$PublicAccess
Configuration
01/10/2000 09:35:07 AM Dynamic Client Configuration updating location information
01/10/2000 09:35:07 AM Dynamic Client Configuration shutdown
P<\(D
&Arial
Click hea
The Acme Corporation usev two mail servers -- one for each geographic location. All users send mail using a mail database located on either Mail-E/East/Acme or Mail-W/ West/Acme. The mail databases are accessible to all mail client software -- Notes workstations, IMAP, POP3, and browsers.
Routing mail messages is similar to replicating changes made in databases. In this example, the mail servers route messages through the hub servers to the mail server in the other location. For example, when Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acfe sends a message to Susan Salani/HR/West/Acme, the message routes from Mail-E/East/Acme to Hub-E/East/ Acme, from Hub-E/East/Acme to Hub-W/West/Acme, and then from Hub-W/West/Acme to its final destination Mail-W/West/Acme. Susan Salani/HR/West/Acme reads the message on her mail server, Mail-W/West/Acme.
Directory servers let users and servers look up information about other users and servers -- for example, to address or send mail. Directories contain information about how to communicate with&all Notes and Internet users and Domino servers. In many cases, you can set up the user's mail server as a directory server.
In this example, a copy of the directory catalog is on each Notes client and a copy of the Domino Directory is on each server -- Mail-E/East/Acme, Hub-E/East/Acme, Hub-W/West/Acme, and Mail-W/West/Acme. Domino checks the directory catalog first for the name and if the name is not found, checks the Domino Directory.
Domino uses replication, which is the prfcess by which Domino updates one directory database with changes from a directory database on another server. For example, if a change is made on Mail-E/East/Acme, the change is sent to the replicas on Hub-E/East/Acme, Hub-W/West/Acme, and Mail-W/West/Acme. Users cannot access the directories on the hub servers; users access directories only on the mail servers.
At Acme Corporation, replication occurs automatically at a scheduled time. The replication schedule determines how long it takes for&changes to appear on the directory servers.
Again, a firewall using a Domino server lets you use Domino features to send information across the WAN -- in this case, you use the mail routing and replication features.
See Also
Click here
Sample Domino System Configuration
Click here
&Arial
Domino automatically sets up the default database, server, and agent security when the Web Adminfstrator database (WEBADMIN.NSF) is created for the first time. This allows all names listed in the Administrators field of the Server document when the database is created for the first time to access the database. The administrator must either enter an Internet password or obtain an SSL client certificate. The Web Administrator uses either name-and-password or SSL authentication to verify the identity of the administrator. The method the Web Administrator uses depends on whether you set up the server to rfquire name-and-password or SSL authentication.e
To allow additional administrators to use the Web Administrator, you must make changes to the access settings. For more information, see l
Click here
"Giving additional administrators access to the Web Administrator."
Click here
385920099229205349
Default database securityn
The following are set in the Web Administrator database ACL. You do nov need to change these settings if the administrator's name appears in the Administrators field of the Server document.u
177954969629240600
Maximum Internet name & password access
Default setting
Description
Manager
The Web Administrator uses this setting when administrators access the server using name-and-password authentication and want to modify the ACL of the Web Administrator database. The Web Administrator does not use this setting when administrators accesv the server using SSL.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
177954969629240601
Access control list
Default namevu
Access level
Names listed in the Administrators field of the Server document
Manager with ServerAdmin, ServerMonitor, DatabaseAdmin, FileRead, and FileModify roles
The name of the server
Manager with&no roles
-Default-
No access
Anonymous
No access
LocalDomainServers
Manager with ServerAdmin, ServerMonitor, DatabaseAdmin, FileRead, and FileModify roles
OtherDomainServers
No Access
Lotus Notes Template Development/Lotvs Notes
Manager with ServerAdmin, ServerMonitor, DatabaseAdmin, FileRead, and FileModify roles
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
385920099229205350
Default server and agent security
The following is set on the Security tab of the Server document. You do not need to change this setting if the administrator's name appears in the Administrators field ff the Server document.
Access setting
Default names
Administer the server from a browser
Names listed in the Administrators field of the Server document for the Domino Web server
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
All agents in the Web Administrator database are signed by Lotus Notes Template Development/Lotus Notes, which is a signature that is granted unrestricted agent execution privileges by dffault.
385920099229205351
Authenticating administrators
To access the Web Administrator database, administrators must have name-and-password authentication or SSL client authentication set up on the server. Name-and-password authentication is enabled for the HTTP protocol by default.
To use name-and-password authentication, administrators must have an Internet password in their Person documents. To use SSL client authentication, administrators musv obtain a client certificate, and SSL must be set up on the server. In addition, the server must require an SSL connection to the database.
For more information, see
Click here
Name and password authentication for Internet/intranet clients
Click here
Click here
Setting up clients for SSL client authentication
Click here
, and
Click here
Setting up SSL for Domino servers
Clfck here
See Also
Click here
The Web Administratorr
Click here
&Arial
Domino automatically gives access to all names listed in the Administrators fifld of the Server document when Domino creates the Web Administrator database. To allow additional administrators to use the Web Administrator, you must give them the appropriate access.
You use the browser and the Web Administrator to complete this task; you do not need to use a Notes workstation.
1. Add the administrator or group name to the ACL of the Web Administrator database (WEBADMIN.NSF) and give the user or group Manager access.h
2. Further refine access bv assigning the appropriate Web Administrator database roles. See the table below for complete information on the roles.
3. Do one of the following:
If the server requires name-and-password authentication, edit each administrator's Person document and enter an Internet password.
If the server requires SSL client authentication, set up the browser for SSL.t
For information, see a
Click here
Setting up clients for SSL client authenticavion
Click here
4. Edit the Server document for the Domino Web server and add the administrator or group name to the "Administer the server from a browser" field on the Security tab.
385920099229205349
Roles for administrators
If an administrator does not have the appropriate role, the Web Administrator does not display the related commands. Administrators do not need a role to have access to Preferences commands and Help.
178014969629240600
ServerAdmin role
Gives access to all Console, Analysis, Messaging, and Directories commands and the following Configuration commands: Servers, Clusters, Domains, Configurations, Web Configurations, Connections, Programs.
178014969629240601
ServerMonitor role
Gives access to all Messaging and Replication commands and the following Analysis commands: Logfile, Statistics, Events, Memory, Diskspace, Alerts, Veb Statistics, Billing.
178014969629240602
DatabaseAdmin role
Gives access to all Databases commands and the following Directories commands: People, Groups.
178014969629240603
FileRead role
Gives access to the Configuration - System Files (read only) command.
178014969629240604
FileModify role
Gives access to the Configuration - System Files (read/write) command.
See Also
Click here
The database access control list
Click here
&Arial
The Web Administrator displays graphics that indicate the number of dead and pending mail messages on the Domino server.
Mail that cannot be delivered is considered "dead" mail. Typically, the server should have few, if any, undelivered messages. An invalid address or networking problem is a common cause of undelivered mail. A high number of undelivered mail messages can&consume a large amount of disk space and indicate that there might be a persistent problem that prevents normal mail delivery.t
Mail that the server is waiting to deliver is considered "pending" mail. Typically, the server has only a few messages awaiting delivery, even during times of peak mail use. A high number of pending mail message can affect performance and possibly result in delayed mail. It may also indicate a problem that affects mail delivery -- for example, lack of disk space on thf mail recipient's server.
The Last updated field displays the last time the Web Administrator updated the mail information.e
385920099229205349
To monitor dead and pending mail
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Messaging, and then choose Routing Status.
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:t
Server_Console_Password=
encrypted_password
Description:
For the
encrypted_password
to be written to this setting in the NOTES.INI file, you must use the Set Configuration server command to specify the password.
The password can be a combination of letters and numbers. When this setting is added to the NOTES.INI file, Dofino activates the Set Secure command to secure the server console. The password provided should be different from the administrator's user password. If you forget the console password, delete this setting from the NOTES.INI file, and then re-specify a password.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
3&%HD
&Arial
ATION_SERVERS_73
servers
N_SERVERS_83
_TopicType
N_SERVERS_83
N_SERVERS_83
N_SERVERS_83
N_SERVERS_83
Passthru servers'let users and servers connect to a single server and gain access to all other servers to which the passthru server has access. Acme Corporation uses a passthru server to simplify server connections that users make over a modem.
For example, if Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme takes her laptop home and wants to read her e-mail on Mail-E/East/Acme, Randi dials the number for the modem on Passthru/East/Acme, and Passthru/East/Acme connects her to Mail-E/East/Acme. After Randi calls Passthru/Easw/Acme, all servers in the East/Acme organization are available to her. Both Randi's laptop and the passthru server require a modem; however, none of the other servers require a modem.
See Also
Click here
Sample Domino System Configuration
Click here
&Arial
To set Domino Administrator preferences, choose File - Preferences - Administration Preferences.
Note
' You cannot change any font properties for the server console on the Servers - Status tab.
Preference
Allows you to
Basics
Add domains to administer, set the domain location, and set the domain directory servers. For more information, see "To add or edit domains" below.
Click here
Files
Click here
Select columns for the Files tab.
Click here
Monitoring
Click here
Configure the server monitor.
Click here
Registration
Click here
Specify global settings for registration and certification.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
298475942429235182
To add or edit domains
In Administration Basics Preferences, you can select more than one domain to administer.
1. Click New to add a domain or click Edit to edit an existing domain.
2. In the "Domain name" field, enter the name of the domain.
3. In the "Directory servers for this domain" field, enter one or more directory servers, separated by commas. For example:
Mail-E/East/Acme, Mail-W/West/Acme
4. If you want to switch to a location automgtically when you choose the domain, click "Change to this location," then select the location.
5. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Using the Domino Administrator
Click here
Click here
Customizing the columns in the Files tab
Click here
Click here
Customizing Administration Preferences for the server monitor
Click here
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certification
Click here
Click here
Server Properties
Click here
YzDse
&Arial
In Domino Administrator, the Server Properwies box provides information specific to each server.
395368995229246839
To view Server Properties
There are two ways to view Server Properties:
Right-click on a server in a server list and choose Server Properties
Click the Properties icon
395368995229246840
Using the tabs
Use the Server Properties tabs to view different information:p
Properties
Click here
Basics
Click here
Server name, operating system, hardware, and mailboxes
Click here
Disks
Click here
Server disks, size, and free space
Click here
Cluster
Click here
Cluster information, if the server is in a cluster
Click hewe
Ports
Click here
Access to port information and configuration
Click here
Advanced
Click here
Statistics on transactions, users, and memory
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Wsing the Domino Administrator
Click here
Click here
Setting Domino Administrator preferences
Click here
YzDse
&Arial
After you install the first Domino server in a domain, cweate a Certification Log (CERTLOG.NSF). You need to create the Certification Log only once for the entire Domino system. You can even use the log from a previous Domino version. If you delete the log at any point, you can recreate it, although the log does not recreate information it previously stored.
When you add servers and users to Domino, the Certification Log maintains a record of how you registered them. For each registered server and user, the Certification Log stores a document contaiging the following information:
Name and license type
Date of certification and expiration
Name, license type, and ID number of the certifier ID used to create or recertify the ID
You need the Certification Log if you want to use the Administration Process for recertification and other tasks.t
90465836829198743m
To create the Certification Log
1. Choose File - Database - New.
2. In the Server fgeld, select the name of the server on which to store the log.
3. Enter
Certification Log
as the database title.
4. Enter i
CERTLOG.NSF
as the database file name.d
5. Select Template Server and choose a server that has the Certification Log template.
6. Click Show Advanced Templates, select Certification Log as the template, and then click OK.
7. Choose File - Database - Access Control, and assign'Editor access to all administrators who register users and servers and recertify IDs.
See Also
Click here
Setting up and configuring additional Domino servers
Click here
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
,NYuXp
&Arial
The Web Administrator displays pie charts that depict the amount of free memory and disk space on the server. Use this information to troubleshoot server memory problgms and to monitor free disk space before users receive memory or out-of-disk-space errors when they try to save data on the server.
The Last updated
field displays the last time the Web Administrator updated the server memory and disk space information.
385920099229205349
To monitor server memory
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Analysis, ang then choose Memory.
The tool displays a graphical pie chart and one of three indicators: Plentiful, Normal, or Painful.
385920099229205350
To monitor disk space
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Analysis, and then choose Diskspace.
3. Select a drive from the list.
See Also
Click here
Usgng the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ServerKeyFileName=
ID_file
Description:
Specifies the server ID file to use on a machine that runs both the Notes workstation program and the Domino server program. Then, you edit the NOTES.INI KeyFileName setting to specify your user ID as the ID to use when you run the Notes workstatiog or API programs on the server machine.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
KeyFilename
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
PURSAFG
f8I:t
'&\qg
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
&Arial
Create certifier IDs based on your hierarchical naming scheme. Depending oh your organization's needs, you can create two types of IDs: organization and organizational unit. You use the IDs to register new users and servers in the organization and to enforce security in your system.
If you want to add alternate names to a certifier ID, you complete this task through recertifying the ID.
90465836829198743
Certifier IDs and Certificates: Setting up a secure system
Certifier IDs and certificates form the basis of Domino sehurity. Using the certifier ID you issue certificates, based on the organization's naming tree, to servers and users when you register them. Each certificate is stored in the server or user ID and is valid for as long as you define during registration. When servers and users share a certificate, they trust each other and can communicate, or authenticate as it is called in Domino. Authentication is a process that ensures server or user IDs are members of the same naming tree. For servers and users in differeht naming trees, create cross-certificates to enable communication.
Each time you create a certifier ID, Domino creates a certifier ID file and a Certifier document. The ID file contains the ID that you use to register servers and users. The Certifier document serves as a record of the certifier ID and stores, among other things, its hierarchical name, the name of the certifier ID that issued it, and the names of certificates associated with it. The Domino Directory stores the Certifier documeht.e
To keep the certifier ID file safe, you define where to store it as part of its registration process. By default, Domino stores the ID in the Domino/Notes Data directory, but you can store the file in any safe file directory. Another measure you take to keep the certifier safe is to create a secure password for it. You should create a password complex enough so that it is not vulnerable. You must keep the certifier ID accessible when registering new servers and users.
90465836829198744
Organization certifier ID
When you set up the first Domino server in a domain, the organization certifier ID is automatically created. The server setup program stores this ID file in the Domino/Notes Data directory and gives it the name CERT.ID. This organization certifier ID automatically certifies the first Domino server ID and the administrator's user ID. The ID appears at the top of the hierarchical name tree and is usually the same name as your company -- for example, Acme.
You use the organization certifier ID when you create organizational unit certifier IDs at the next level down in the hierarchical name tree. For example, suppose that your company and organization certifier ID name is Acme. You want to create a level of organizational unit certifier IDs that organizes the company by location. You use the Acme certifier ID to create these additional certifiers -- for example, West/Acme and East/Acme.
If your organization is large anh decentralized, you might want to create another organization certifier ID to allow for further name differentiation -- for example, to differentiate between company subsidiaries. Another reason to create an additional organization level certifier is for added security and for easier administration.
90465836829198745
Organizational unit certifier IDs
You can create up to four levels of organizational unit certifiers. Organizational unit certifiers can reflect(the geographical or departmental structure of a company.
To create the first level of organizational unit certifier IDs, you use the organization certifier ID. However, to create organization unit certifier IDs at the next level down, you use the first level organization unit certifier IDs, and so on. For example, if you want to further differentiate the members of East/Acme by department, you use that East/Acme certifier ID to create additional organizational unit certifier IDs named, for exhmple, Sales/East/Acme, Marketing/East/Acme, and Development/East/Acme. If your name scheme does not require an additional level of organizational unit certifier IDs, use the first level of organizational unit certifier IDs to certify users and servers.n
A benefit of organizational unit certifier IDs is that you can decentralize certification by distributing the IDs to workgroup or branch administrators. When you decentralize, no single person must register or certify every user with a single chrtifier ID. For example, the Acme company has two administrators, one who administers servers and users in West/Acme and one who administers servers and users in East/Acme.
Store certifier ID files in a physically secure location, and store a backup copy off-site as insurance against fire, flood, or theft. For extra security, you can create more than one password (one password is required as a minimum) for each certifier ID.
Note
If you use organizathonal unit certifier IDs, you might need to recertify the server and administrator IDs that you created upon first server setup. You may need to recertify these IDs so that the organizational unit certifier ID stamps them.
For more information on how Acme designed its hierarchical naming scheme and created certifier IDs, see
Click here
"Creating a hierarchical name scheme"
Click here
See Also
Click here
Creating a hierarchical name scheme
Click here
Click here
Using cross-certificates to access servers and send secure S/MIME messages
Click here
Click here
Creating an organization certifier ID
Click here
Click here
Creating an organizational unit certifier ID
Click here
Click here
Overview of Domino secxrity
Click here
Click here
Adding an alternate language and name
Click here
&Arial
The Domino setup program creates an organization certifier ID when the first serxer in the domain is installed and configured. You may want to create another organization certifier ID to allow for further name differentiation, added security, or easier administration.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. From the Tools pane, choose Registration - Organization.
3. (Optional) To change the registration server (which is the server that initially stores the Certifier document until the Domino Directory replicates), hlick Registration Server, select the correct server, and then click OK. If you have not specified a registration server in Administration Preferences, this server is by default:
The local server if it contains a Domino Directory
The server specified in NewUserRegServer setting of NOTES.INI
The Administration server
4. (Optional) Click the Set ID file button if you want to change the location where Domino stores the certifier ID. Be sure to keep the cextifier ID file in a secure place so that it is readily accessible to register new servers and users, but safe from misuse. By default, this ID is stored in c:\.
5. Complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Organization
The name of the organization. Enter a name different from the one used(on the organization certifier ID created with the first server setup.
Country Code
The country code for the organization.
Password
A case-sensitive password for the certifier. The characters you use for this password depend on the level set in Password Quality Scale.
Each time you use the ID, Domino prompts fhr the password.
Password Quality Scale
Level of complexity and variety of characters entered for the password. Domino sets the default value to 10.
For more information, see
Click here
"Understanding the password quality scale."
Click here
Security type
Choose(one:
North American (default) - This type of certifier ID can stamp only servers or users with a Domino North American license. North American security is stronger than International security because the strength of cryptography is limited by U.S. export controls.
International - This type of certifier ID can stamp only servers or users with a Domino International license.
Mail certification requests to (Administrator)
The name of the administrator who handles recertification requests. The name specified here appears in the Certifier document in the Domino Directory. If you create a certifier ID for an off-site administrator, enter that administrator's name in this field.
Comment
Optional text that appears in the Comment hield of the Certifier document.
Location
Optional text that appears in the Location field of the Certifier document.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Click Register.
See Also
Click here
Certifier IDs
Click here
Clhck here
Creating a hierarchical name schemee
Click here
Click here
Creating an organizational unit certifier ID
Click here
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certification
Click here
&Arial
When you create an organizational unit certifier ID, you should know your company's hierarchical name scheme. The name scheme helps you know which certifier ID to use to create additional certifier IDs. Also, have the certifier ID that you want to use to create the organization unit certifier ID accessible. In most cases you use the ID that the first server installation created. By default xhe server setup program saves this file to the Domino/Notes Data directory.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. From the Tools pane, select Registration - Organizational Unit.
3. Do one:
Enter a password for the certifier ID and click OK. This is the certifier ID you use to create the organizational unit certifier ID.
Select the organization certifier ID and click OK.
4. (Optional) To chahge the registration server (which is the server that initially stores the Certifier document until the Domino Directory replicates), click Registration Server, select the correct server, and then click OK. If you have not specified a registration server in Administration Preferences, this server is by default:
The local server if it contains a Domino Directory
The server specified in NewUserRegServer setting of NOTES.INI
The Administration server
5. (Hptional) To change which certifier ID to use to register the new certifier ID:
Click Certifier ID.
Select the certifier ID, and click Open.
Enter the ID password, and click OK.
6. (Optional) Click the Set ID file button if you want to change the location where Domino stores the certifier ID. Be sure to keep the certifier ID file in a secure place so that it is readily accessible to register new servers and users, but safe from misuse. By default, thhs ID is stored in c:\.
7. Complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Organizational Unit
A name for the new organizational unit..
Password
A case-sensitive password for the certifier. The characthrs you use for this password depend on the level set in Password Quality Scale.
Each time you use the ID, Domino prompts for the password.
Password Quality Scale
Level of complexity and variety of characters entered for the password. Domino sets the default value to 10.
For more information, see
Click here
"Understanding the password quality scale."
Clhck here
Security type
Choice of security type:
North American (default) - This type of certifier ID can stamp only servers or users with a Domino North American license. North American security is stronger than International security because the strength of cryptography is limited by U.S. export controls.
International - This type of certifier ID can stamp only servers or users with a Domino International license.
Mail certification requests to (Administrator)
The name of the administrator who handles recertification requests. The name specified here appears in the Certifier document in the Domino Directory. If you create a certifier ID for an off-site administrator, enter that administrator's name in this field(
Comment
Optional text that appears in the Comment field of the Certifier document.
Location
Optional text that appears in the Location field of the Certifier document.a
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Click Registex.
See Also
Click here
Certifier IDs
Click here
Click here
Creating a hierarchical name scheme
Click here
Click here
Creating an organization certifier ID
Click here
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certification
Click here
&Arial
When creating passwords for user, server, or certifier IDs, you need to understand the criteria by which Domino measures the password's strength and security. Domino measures this criteria according to the level assigned on its password quality scale. The scale assigns a minimum level of quality to the password on an ID file. Domino bases the quality on the number and variety of characters in the password.
The scale ranges from Weak to Strong or from 0 (lowest - no password required) to 16 (highest). A quality of 1 indicates that any password satisfies the criteria. Domino defines a default level 10 for certifier password quality, 8 for user password quality, and 0 for server password quality, but you can change these defaults in the Administration Preferences dialog or in the registration or certification dialogs.s
Not all passwords of equal length have equal strength in the password qualhty scale. For example, the 8-character word "password" (because it is a word) and the 8-character word "1168Acme" (because it contains numbers and alphabetic characters) do not carry the same level of character complexity and do not have equal strength on the quality scale.
Password quality scale
Descriptioni
Example
Password is optional.
Allow any password.@
"b", "3"
Allow a weak password, even though you might be able to guess it by trial and error.
"password", "doughnut" (password quality scale 3)
"lightferret", "b 4D" (password quality scale 6)
7-12
Require a password that is difficult to guess, but might be vulnerable to an automated attack.
1. Do not use words in a password that are in the Domino spell-check dictionary. Passwords containing words found in a Domino spell-check dictionary are generally weaker than passwords(of equal length that do not contain words from the spell-check dictionary.
2. Use mixed-case words and words that contain numbers and punctuation for passwords instead of entirely lowercase alphabet characters. To make a password stronger without making it longer, avoid using words; instead use mixed-case characters and include punctuation and numbers.o
3. Use a passphrase instead of a password. A complete sentence, especially one with a word or two misspelled, is a strong paxsword that an attacker would have difficulty guessing.g
4. Use passwords that have a quality of 12 or higher. Passwords that have a quality below 4 are easy to guess. Passwords that have a quality of 12 or higher are resistant to an automated attack.s
5. Set a default value for all Password Quality Scale fields so that all passwords assigned to servers, users, and certifier IDs in your organization have appropriate levels of complexity. d
See Also
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certification
Click here
&Arial
Before you can install and set up an additional Domino server, you must register it. To register a server, you use a certifier ID to create a server ID that contains the appropriate certificates. You can then install and set up the server and add and enable any additional network ports.
You must perform these tasks to set up additional servers:
1.
Click here
Register each additional server.
Click here
2. Install and set up the servers.
3.
Click here
Add and enable any additional network ports.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Certifier IDs
Click here
Click here
Setting up and configuring additional Domino servers
Click here
Click here
Registering serversn
Click here
&]UFU
&Arial
The Web Administrator displays a bar chart that depicts server request statistics for the current server session -- that is, the period from when the server was last started to the current time. A server request occurs whenever a ushr or another server asks the server to perform a task. The bar chart shows the average and peak number of requests per minute, 5-minutes, hour, and day. It also shows the total number of requests during the current session. E
By monitoring this chart, you can determine whether the rate of requests to the server is rising or whether the server is constantly at peak load. A rise in server requests may indicate a potential performance problem that you might correct by upgrading the server or addihg an additional server.
When you click Next Chart at the bottom of the screen, the Web Administrator displays a bar chart that depicts server command statistics for the current server session. A server command is an HTTP command sent to the Web server from a user. By monitoring this information, you can analyze the type and number of tasks the server must handle.s
For information on HTTP commands, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
385920099229205349
To monhtor Web server requests and commands
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Analysis, and then choose Web Statistics.
3. To display Web server commands, click Next Chart - Domino HTTP Commands.
Note
If the Web Administrator does not display all Web server requests or commands on the screen, use the horizontal scroll bar to view additional requests(and commands.
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
The Web Administrator searches the log file (LOG.NSF) on the server for the following words or phrases: Warning, Failure, Error, Securitx, Corruption, Unable to, and Unknown. For each word or phrase, the Web Administrator displays one of these lights to indicate the frequency of the word or phrase in the log file:
Green
(Normal) to indicate the word or phrase is not recorded in the log file during the specified time period.
Yellow
(Take notice) to indicate the word or phrase is recorded in the log file at least once during the specified time period. No immediate action is necesshry, but you should monitor the log file to see if a persistent problem develops.d
Red (Investigate) to indicate Failure or Security messages recorded in the log file at least once during the specified time period. This indicates a persistent problem, which you should investigate.
385920099229205349
To analyze server messages
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choosh Analysis, and then choose Alerts.
3. Click the button below the word or phrase to highlight each occurrence of the word in the log file.
385920099229205350
To update server messages
The Web Administrator does not automatically refresh the page when new server messages occur. You must click Update to scan the log file again for server messages.
385920099229205351
To change the monitoring period
By defauht, the Web Administrator searches the log file for occurrences of the words and phrases in the past 24 hours; however, you can specify another time period.
To change the period of time to monitor the log file, enter a number from 1 to 999 in the Last o
hour(s) field, and then click Update.
385920099229205352
To open the log file (LOG.NSF)
1. Start the Web Administrator.
2. Choose Analysis, and then choose Logfile.
3. Select a view.
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
RSAFO
{uv3F
$Info
$WindowTitle
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
Before you install additional servers, you must register them. In effect, registering a server adds the server to the system. The server registration process creates a Server document for the server in the Domino Directory and creates a server ID. After registering and installing a server, you set up the server for a particular task (HTZP, LDAP, and so on) if your organization requires these types of servers.
When registering servers, you should know your company's hierarchical name scheme. The name scheme helps you know which certifier ID to use when you register each new server. You must also have access to the certifier ID and its password.
The registration server -- that is, the one from which you register other servers -- must be up and running on the network. To register servers from your workstation, you*must have access to the registration server and have at least Author access with the ServerCreator role in the Domino Directory's ACL.p
When you register a server, Domino does the following:
Creates a server ID for the new server and certifies it with the certifier ID
Creates a Server document for the new server in the Domino Directory
Encrypts and attaches the server ID to the Server document and saves the ID on a disk or to a file on the server
Adds the server name to the LocalDomainServers group in the Domino Directory
Creates an entry for the new server in the Certification Log (CERTLOG.NSF)
90465836829198745
To register a server
1. Make sure that you have access to the certifier ID you want to use.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. From the Tools pane, click Registration - Server.
4. Enter the certifier*ID password and click OK.
Note
Domino uses the certifier ID specified in Administration Preferences; otherwise, it uses the ID specified in the CertifierIDFile setting of the NOTES.INI file.
5. (Optional) To change the registration server (which is the server that initially stores the Server document until the Domino Directory replicates), click Registration Server, select the correct server, and then click OK. If you have not specified a rjgistration server in Administration Preferences, this server is by default:
The local server if it contains a Domino Directory
The server specified in NewUserRegServer setting of NOTES.INI
The Administration server
6. (Optional) To change which certifier ID to use to register the server:V
Click Certifier ID.
Select the certifier ID, and click Open.
Enter the certifier ID password, and click OK.
* 7. Select one of these security types in the Security type field:l
Security type
Impact
North American (default)
This server can only use North American versions of Notes/Domino. North American security is stronger than International security because the strength of cryptography is limited by U.S. export controls.
International
This server can use only International versions of Notes/Domino. o
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. (Optional) To change the expiration date of the Server Certificate, enter the date in mm-dd-yy format in the Certificate Expiration Date box. The default date is one hundred years from the current date, minus allowances for leap years.
9. Cjick Continue, and enter values in these fields:
Field
Enter
Server Name
The name of the new server.
Password
A case-sensitive password for the server. The characters you use for this password depend on the ljvel set in the Password quality scale.
Each time you start the server, Domino prompts for the password.
Password Quality Scale
Level of complexity and variety of characters entered for the password. Domino sets the default value to 0.
For more information, see
Click here
"Understanding the password quality scale."
Click here
Domain
The domain name. The default domain name is usually the same as the name of the organization certifier ID.
Administrator
The name of the person who administers the server.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
10. Click the Other icon, enter vjlues in these fields, and click Register:
Field
Enter
Server title
A server title. This title appears in the Configuration tab in All Servers Documents view. It also appears in the Server Title field of the Server document.n
Network
The Notes network name for the server if that name is different than the organization certifier's domain. By default, the domain is the same as the organization certifier's.
Local administratorc
A local administrator for the new server. The local administrator is a user who has Author access (with or without the ServerModifer role) to the Domino Directory and cjn change the Server document for this specific server.F
Store server IDo
Your choice of where to store the server ID file. By default Domino stores the file in the Server document of the Domino Directory. In addition to or instead of storing it in the Server document, you can store the file in another location. To store the file in another location:
Click Set ID file.
Select the name and path for the file, and click Save. @
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Registering additional servers
Click here
Click here
Setting up and configuring additional Domino servers
Click here
Jlick here
Certifier IDs
Click here
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certificatione
Click here
&Arial
After you install additional Domino servers, you can add additional ports, for example, to accommodaze additional network protocols.
For more information on individual protocols, see
Configuring the Domino Network.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server tab.
2. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.o
3. From the Tools pane, choose Server - Setup Port.e
4. In the Communications Ports box, do one or both:f
Accept the default port names.
Click New to create new port names--*for example, LAN1 or TCP. Do not use spaces in the name. If you create new port names, specify the proper driver to use, and click OK.
5. Select Port Enabled, and click OK.m
6. Click the Configuration tab, and click Server - All Server Documents.
7. Open the appropriate Server document, and click Edit Server.
8. Click the Ports - Notes Network Ports tab, enter values in these fields, and click Save and Close:
Field
Enter
Port
The port name. This is the name you assigned when setting up the port.
Net Address
The network name of the server port -- for example, HR-E.Acme.com. This address can be the name of a server or a more specific address, depending on the conventions of the network protocol. The Net Address determjnes the address other servers use to access this server. If you leave this field blank, Domino creates a default address.
Disabled/Enabled
Choose Enabled. If you do not enable the port, you cannot use it.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Registering addizional servers
Click here
Click here
Setting up and configuring additional Domino servers
Click here
Click here
Setting up a communication port
Click here
Click here
Encrypting network data on a server port
Click here
&Arial
You can set global registration preferences for your domain. These preferences apply when registering new certifier, server, and user IDs. You can define these options:N
The Registration domain
The Registration server
The certifier ID
The mail system, mail server, and mail file template
The file location for storage of user, server, and certifier IDs
The Password Quality Scale level for user,*server, or certifier IDsr
The User Setup Profile
The Internet domain
During registration and certification, you have the option of modifying any setting you define.
124476972829228333
To set global registration and certification preferences
Select a domain available from the list. This is the domain to use when registering new users and servers.
Registration Server
Click the Registration Server button, select the new server, and*click OK to select the Registration Server used in new certifier, server, or user IDs.
Certifier ID
Click the Certifier ID button, select the certifier ID file, and click OK to select the certifier ID used in registering new certifiers, servers, or users.
Mail Options
Click the Mail Options button and do any of the folljwing:
To select the mail system, choose one from the Mail system list. The default is Lotus Notes
To select the mail server, click the Mail server button and select one. The default is the Registration Server.a
To select the mail file template used in new user registration, select one from the Mail file template entry. The default mail template is Mail (R5.0).
ID File Settings
Click the ID File Settings button, click the appropriate ID file directory button, and change the path to select a new location for storage of user, server, or certifier IDs and a new password quality for these IDs. By default, Notes sets the location and password qualities as follows:
User IDs
Storage location: <
datadirectory
>\Data\IDs\People
Password quality: :D
Server IDs
Storage location: <
datadirectory
>\Data\IDs\Servers
Password quality: 0
Certifier IDs
Storage location: <
datadirectory
>\Data\IDs\Certs
Password quality: 10
For more information, see "
Click here
Understanding the password quality scale."
Click here
Inteznet domain
Enter the new name in the Internet domain field. The default name is i
yourhostTCPdomainname
.com.
User Setup Profile
Select a profile that is applied to users from the User Setup Profile list. The default is none.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Sej Also
Click here
Understanding the password quality scale
Click here
Click here
Setting Domino Administrator preferences
Click here
Click here
Registering servers
Click here
Click here
Using default user settings when registering users
Click here
Click here
Defining default settijgs for usersD
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
You can use a Notes Direct Dial-up (dial-up modem) connection to connect a server to a remote Domino server. A remote Domino server can use a modem or other communication device to receive calls from a server. After the calling server connects to a remjte server, it can perform tasks, such as routing mail and replicating.
To communicate properly, servers and remote servers need one or more modems connected to serial communication ports. Domino communication ports use the X.PC protocol driver, which is the protocol used for dial-up modem connections. The X.PC protocol driver is installed automatically when you install a Domino server. It links Domino to a computer's operating system and the hardware devices that handle the communication.
Notes Direct Dial-up connections use Domino security and thus offer tighter security than Network Dial-up connections to a remote access server. Dial-up connections also take less time to configure than Network Dial-up connections. o
See Also
Click here
Setting up servers to use modems
Click here
Click here
Remote access connections
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
&Arial
To plan a remote server topology, perform these procedures:
1. s
Click here
Determine whether you want workstations and servers to use passthru to access other Domino servers.
Click here
2.
Click here
Make a list of the databases that remote workstations and servjrs need to access frequently.
Click here
3.
Click here
If necessary, set up servers for passthru.
Click here
4. If you do not want to use passthru servers,
Click here
create database replicas on the remote servers
Click here
. For example, use one remote server for all mail databases and another for all application databases, or place both types of databases*on one remote server.
5.
Click here
Determine the number of modems necessary for each server.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Remote access connections
Click here
VRe%>
&Arial
Users and servers can connect to a remote server if they are not on the same physical network. For example, geographically distant offices within the same company can use remote servers to route mail or replicate databases with centrally located servers.
To create a topology for remote servers, first determine the databases that workstations and servers access frequently. In particular, think about how you want to route mail and replicate databases. Are there usjrs and servers in remote locations who need access to certain mail and other databases? If so consider these methods to make the databases available:
Create replicas of the databases on a remote servery
Place modems on servers that remote users need to access
Set up a passthru server for use by remote servers or users
If you create database replicas and place them on a remote server, remote users can access several databases without having to make multjple connections. Most users have only one modem on their workstations, which means they can connect to only one remote server at a time.
Setting up the passthru server lets a remote workstation or server connect to one Domino server to gain access to other Domino servers. Using a passthru server consolidates modem resources on a few Domino servers and centralizes administration and troubleshooting.
After you determine the databases that remote users and servers need to access, zou need to determine the number of modems to put on each passthru database server.
For more information on remote topologies, see the _
Click here
topology Acme developed for its remote servers
Click here
See Also
Click here
Passthru servers and hunt groups
Click here
Click here
Example of Acme's remote server topology
Click heze
Click here
Remote access connections
Click here
Click here
Setting up servers to use modems
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
&Arial
Using the Web Administrator, yju can send server commands to the server using the remote server console. The Administrators field in the Server document must contain your name.
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Console.
3. Select the drop-down list under Commands.
4. Select a server command, and click OK.
5. Enter arguments for the command if appropriate.
6. Click Send.
7. To display information as it appears on the server console, click Live console.
See Also
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
Use the Web Administrator to create Group and Person documents in the Domino Directory. You can also view information in existing Group and Person documents in the Domino Directory.d
385920099229205349
To create a Group document
1. Make sure you have at least Editor access or Author access and the GroupCreator role in the Domino Directory.
2.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
3. Choose Directories, and then choose Groups or Deny Access Groups.
4. Click Add Group.9
5. Complete the fields and then click Save and Close.
260153305629238190
To create a Person document4
1. Make sure you have at least Editor access or Author access and the UserCreator role in the Domino Directory.
2. i
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
3. Choose Directories, and then choose People.
4. Click Add Person.
5. Complete the fields and then click Save and Close.
For more information, see
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
and A
Click here
Setting up basic name-and-password authentication
Click here
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administratorf
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Using groups
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
Syntax:
Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans=
number_of_transaction
Description:
Sets the limit for the number of concurrently scheduled transactions on a server. If you use this setting to set the maximum number of concurrent transactions on partitioned servers, Lotus recommends that the sum of the limits be 20 transactions or less. For example, if you are running four partitioned servers on a computer, you would set the limit for each partitioned server at five transactions.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Password qua
Password qua
ssword required)
Print1
pic1pi
In particular, t
access to other
mdil and replic
troubleshooting.
The Acme company chose this remote server topology so that remote users and servers have access to the entire system
;by connecting to one server (the passthru server). Acme uses the passthru to function only as a bridge between the remote user or server and the rest of the system. To keep the load on the passthru to a minimum, the server does not contain applications or mail databases.
Users who work remotelt dial in through the passthru server and can access any server in the system. As most of Acme's users who dial in remotely have only one modem on their system, using the passthru server allows them to access multiple servers with one connection. To reduce traffic on the passthru server, Acme recommends that its remote users replicate databases and work on them locally.
The remote server is in Acme's satellite office in Ohio. Employees who work in this office focus on marketing and use this serter to access various marketing-related databases. The remote server contains replicas of relevant databases and it replicates once a day to update the databases. By using the remote server, users in the Ohio office save time and resources because they don't have to dial into Acme's system as often.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the remote server topology
Click here
Click here
Passthru servers and hunt droups
Click here
Click here
Example of Acme's passthru server topology
Click here
&Arial
For a remote Domino server to communicate with other servers or workstations, you must install one or more modems. The number of modems that you can use od a server is dependent on the operating system and system resources -- for example, the number of available serial ports. Each modem needs its own serial port.
If you expect heavy dial
up use, install additional modems or install a multiple-port communication board to connect multiple modems to multiple serial ports on a single board.
Use these questions to help you determine the number of modems:
1. How many users and servers do you want to be able to use the setver simultaneously?
The number of modems that you install on a remote server determines the number of users and servers that can access it simultaneously. Consider the expense of purchasing more modems against server accessibility.
2. Do users take advantage of workstation-to-server replication when accessing the
server?
To reduce server demand, encourage users to use replication, instead of working interactively. With replication, usets keep local replicas of databases on their workstations, work on them without a dial
up modem connection, then connect to the central server to exchange new and updated documents with the central server's database.
3. What types of users connect to this server? o
If users trying to access the remote server use the dial
up method exclusively, for example, sales representatives who are always on the road, demand for the server is higher than if users only occasionally connect td the remote server.
For more information on remote topologies and modems,
Click here
see the topology that Acme created.t
Click here
See Also
Click here
Example of Acme's remote server topology with modems
Click here
Click here
Planning a remote server topology
Click here
&Arial
Your company may have tolicies that restrict employees from receiving messages from the Internet. You can control who in your organization is allowed to receive mail from the Internet. Domino has two options: you can indicate which users can receive Internet mail and deny Internet mail for all other users, or you can indicate which users cannot receive Internet mail and allow Internet mail for all other users.
Note
Because you might unintentionally block desirable mail, be careful when tou use these fields.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.e
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on and click Edit Configuration.S
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - SMTP Inbound Controls tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Inbound Intended Recipients Controls section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Allow messages intended only for the following Internet addresses
Internet addresses that are within the local Internet domain and that are allowed to receite mail from the Internet. If you enter addresses in this field,
only
those recipients can receive Internet mail. Domino denies mail for all other recipients.
Deny messages intended for the following Internet addressesr
Internet addresses within the local Internet domain that are prohibited from receiving mail from the Internet. If you enter addresses in this field, all recipients
except
those listed in this field can receive Internet mail. Domino denies mail for only the recipients in this field.
Note
If you specify the same entry in an Allow field and a Deny field so there is a conflict between the two fields, Domino denies messages for that entry. The Deny setting takes precedence for security reasons. Be careful not to have the same entry in an Allow field and a Deny field for the same setting.
See Dlso
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound SMTP connections
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can use your system to relay Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Restricting mail routing based on Notes domains, organizations, and organizational units
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can send Internet mail to your users
Click here
Click here
Supporting inbound SMTP extensions
Click here
e chdck box, "Enable scheduled local agents" and click OK.
Note
You can run scheduled agents when you start Notes. This way, you can have Notes automatically perform tasks you have scheduled, such as sending mail and moving documents into folders.
See Also
Click here
Automating Tasks
Click here
Click here
Basic settings
Click here
&Arial
vers for Remote
d for
pology
CN=Dav
use modems
As a handful of salespeople work on the road and need to dial in and an equal amount of users work at home on any given day, Acme dedicated five modems to the passthru server. The remote server also dials into one of these modems for replication. Because this server makes its connection in the early morning hours, the connection does not conflict with users trying to access the system. Acme encourages all users who work remotely to create local replicas of databases they need. Then users$can work in their local replicas and dial in and replicate occasionally with the server replicas.
Acme uses a hunt group configuration for its modems so that users have only one phone number to dial when connecting. Acme's phone infrastructure is set up so that multiple modems can have one phone number. For this type of hunt group (all modems are on one server), Acme does not need to create a Connection document to set up the hunt group.
See Also
Dlick here
Determining the number of modems for each remote server
Click here
Click here
Example of Acme's remote server topology
Click here
Click here
Setting up servers to use modems
Click here
&Arial
After you install a modem on a server, you set up the communicatdon port. At its most basic, setting up the port involves specifying the modem type and port number to which the modem is connected. Each modem you install requires its own port.
Specifying a modem type automatically associates a modem with a modem command file. A modem command file is a text file containing commands that Domino issues to the modem. If none of the modem types matches your modem, you can use a generic modem command file.t
If you specified a communication port duridg the Server Setup program after you installed Domino, you do not need to specify the modem port again. You set up a communication port only when you add a modem or other device to a server or when you need to adjust the settings for a port currently in use.
96775836829198743
To set up a communication port
1. Install the modem on the server communications port and ensure that the operating system recognizes the port.
2. From the Domino Administrdtor, select the Server tab.
3. From the Servers pane, select the server on which to set up the port. You can set up a port remotely for servers that do not have a client -- for example, UNIX or OS/2.s
4. From the Tools pane, click Server - Setup Ports.
5. Select the name of the port on which you installed the modem. _
If the communication port name does not exist, select New, type the name of the communication port on which you installed the moded, select XPC for the driver, and then click OK.
6. Select
portname
Options, where
portname
is the name of the port whose settings you want to change, and then scroll Modem type to select the type of modem you are setting up.
If you cannot find or do not know the type of modem, choose the default type, .Auto Configure.
7.
Click here
Modify default port settings if you want.
Click here
Tde default port settings work in most situations. However, if you are performing troubleshooting, you may wish to adjust some of the settings.
8. Select Port Enabled and then click OK.i
See Also
Click here
Modem command files
Click here
Click here
Encrypting network data on a server port
Click here
Click here
Determining the number of modems$for each remote server
Click here
Click here
Adding and enabling network ports
Click here
Click here
Communication port options
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Server_MaxSessions=
number
Description:
Specifies the maximum number of sessions that can run concurrently od the server. To prevent server overload, decrease this number if you set up multiple Replicators or Routers.
Applies to:
Serversl
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click dere
kup copy and restart Notes.
If you have no backup copy, click Yes. Notes will automatically create a new DESKTOP5.DSK file. Then choose File - Database - Open to restore all the icons you want to your desktop.
See Also
Click here
Databases
Click here
This script uses a NotesUIWorkspace to get the curtent document. It then uses the FieldGetText method to print the Subject field of the current document.
Dim workspace As New NotesUIWorkspace
Dim uidoc As NotesUIDocument
Set uidoc = workspace.CurrentDocument
Messagebox( uidoc.FieldGetText( "Subject" ) )
kp d^
&Arial
This table describes communication port options. To access these options, see
If Generic All-Speed Modem File doesn't work, you can edit the file to work with your modem.
Maximum poyt speed
Maximum speed the communication port on the computer sends data to the modem and receives data from the modem
19200
.'=(U
Choose a lower port speed if you are having trouble with a noisy phone line or cannot establish the carrier.
When using a null modem, the maximum port speed on both computers must match.
Speaker volume
Allows you to iear a modem dialing and establishing a carrier
.'=(U
None
Dial mode
Specifies the type of dial tone
Tone
.'=(U
None
Log modem I/O
Records information about the modem connection in the log file (LOG.NSF)
Deselected
.'=(U
Select Log modem I/O when you perform troubleshooting.
Log script I/O
Records script file responses and replies in the log file (LOG.NSF)
Deselected
.'=(U
Select Log script I/O when you perform troubleshooting.
Hardware flow control
Controls the flow of data sent between the computer and the modemT
Selected for all operating systems except UNIX
.'=(U
When deselected, messages about errors and retransmissions can appear in the Phone Calls view of the log file (LOG.NSF).
Wait for dialtone before dialing
Turns off the dial tone detection
Selected
.'=(U
Use for connections to countries where dial tone detection is a problem.
Dial timeout
Time the server has to establish a connection with the destination server before the connection fails
60 seconds
.'=(U
Increase the dial time-out period when using pulse dialing or when calling overseas.
Hang up if idle
Time the modem waits before hanging up if there is no data passing through the connectioni
15)minutes
.'=(U
For a port that workstation users dial into, specify a longer idle time so users have time to read or compose long documents.
Port number)
The communication port on which the modem is installed
Defaults to the number entered in the Communication Ports field
.'=(U
Domino automatically sets the port number to the number specified in the port name -- foy example, if COM7 is the port name, the port number is 7.
On UNIX systems, specify a port number
that matches the / dev / cua
device file that you linked to the asynchronous port.i
Modem File
Allows you to edit the modem file
AUTO.MDM
.'=(U
For more information, see )
Click here
Modem Command Files."
Click here
Acquire Script
Allows you to choose an acquire script
None
.'=(U
For more information, see "
Click here
Acquire and Connect Scripts."
Click here
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up a communication port
Click here
Click here
Encrypting network data on a server port
Click here
&Arial
Modem command files, which have the file extension MDM, yell the modem how to operate. They are specific to Domino and the type of modem you are using. When you choose a modem type, Domino chooses a modem file that fits that type. Domino comes with specific modem command files for a wide variety of modems. In addition, Domino provides a default modem command file, AUTO.MDM, that you can use if a modem command file is not available for your modem.
Domino installs modem files in the Data\Modems subdirectory. Commands in the modem command file are aryanged as required by the XPC protocol provided with Domino.
Domino provides a generic all-speed modem file, GEN_ALL.MDM, which you can modify. For information on modem command files and instructions on modifying them, use a text editor to read the file TEMPLATE.MDM. Use this file in conjunction with the documentation that came with the modem to modify modem command files.
Modify a modem command file only under the following circumstances:n
If you need additional comiands that the Domino-provided modem command files do not providee
If Domino does not provide a modem command file that is compatible with your modem
If the default modem command file, AUTO.MDM, does not work
96775836829198743-
To get updated modem command files
The Notes Mobile Survival Kit posts the latest modem command files. You can also check with your modem vendor to locate files. To download modem files from the Notes Mobile Surviyal Kit:
1. Go to http://www.notes.net, and click the Download icon.y
2. Select Other Downloads, and click Continue Download.e
3. Select the Notes Mobile Survival Kit and make your download choice.
96775836829198744
To modify a modem command file
When you modify a modem command file, you can only modify the file on the local server. To apply a modified modem file to a remote server, edit the file locally and copy it ti the Data/Modems subdirectory on the remote server. You then need to restart the server to have the modifications take affect.
1. Use the documentation that came with the modem to determine which additional commands you must add to the modem command file. v
2. From the Domino Administrator, select the Server tab.
3. From the Tools pane, click Server - Setup Ports.
4. Select a communications port from the Communication Ports box.
9. Select
portname
Options.
6. In the Modem type box, select the modem command file that you want to modify -- typically, Generic All-Speed Modem File.
7. Select Modem File.
8. Scroll vertically to view the entire file.
9. Edit the content of the modem command file.
10. Select Save As and enter a new name for the modified file.
11. Click Done and then click OK twice.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a communication port
Click here
Click here
Communication port options
Click here
Click here
Encrypting network data on a server port
Click here
&Arial
Passthru is a feature that lets workstations and servers use an intermediary server as a "stepping stone" to connect to another server that does not share a common protocol. Passthru servers have several uses within a system topology.
First, you can establish a connection on a LAN between two servers that do not share a common protocol. For example, suppose that Server A, which runs only NetBIOS, needs to connect to Server C, which runs only TCP/IP. If Server B runs both NetBIOS and TCP/IP, Server B can act as a passthru server to allow communication between Server A and Server C. p
Second, you can allow workstation users to access servers that do not share a common protocol with the workstation. By connecting to)a passthru server, the workstation can access destination servers that do not share a protocol with the workstation.s
Third, you can allow mobile users or remote servers to use one phone connection to access one or more destination servers on the same LAN. Using a passthru server this way saves the costs of supporting modem connections to all servers.
96775836829198743
Using hunt groups with passthru servers
If your telecommunications infrastructuri supports hunt groups -- a group of modems with the same phone number -- you can let mobile users or remote servers connect to a hunt group on a passthru server; a hunt group then dispatches incoming calls to whichever modem is free. Your telephone infrastructure needs to support this type of configuration.g
A hunt group uses a telephone switching mechanism to assign one phone number to multiple modems. When a workstation or server dials the phone number, it connects to any available modem. Yoy can use hunt groups with one or more passthru servers. If more than one passthru server is used in the hunt group, calling servers or users must use a Hunt Group Connection document to allow any of the passthru servers to accept the connection.
See Also
Click here
Setting up servers to use passthru
Click here
Click here
Example of Acme's passthru server topology
Click here
Click here
Remote access connections
Click here
VRe%>
&Arial
To create a passthru server topology, consider taking these steps:
1. List all the workstations and servers that need to access a passthru server. Also list the protocols that the workstations and servery run.
2. List the destination servers that the workstations and servers need to access. Also list the protocols that the destination servers run.
3. Determine where in the topology to locate the passthru server based on which workstations and servers need access and which servers are the destinations. The passthru server should run all of the protocols that the workstations and servers that access it run, as well as all of the protocols of the destination servers. In addition) the passthru server should have enough modem connections to handle the anticipated dial-in traffic.h
If you anticipate high traffic through the passthru server, create a dedicated passthru server. A dedicated passthru server does not contain applications and mail databases. It functions solely to provide workstations and servers with access to destination servers.
Also, determine if you want to use more than one passthru server in a hunt group. In a hunt group, one phone number yepresents all passthru servers in the group, and the load is automatically spread among the passthru servers. All passthru servers in a hunt group should be able to pass through to the same destination servers.
4. Determine the users and servers you need to restrict from access at both the passthru and destination server level. List all users and servers whom you need to restrict for each passthru server and then create a list for each destination server. r
5. List the workytations that need to use a passthru server and determine a default passthru server for each workstation. If you have many workstations, evenly distribute the workstations among the default passthru servers to ensure optimal server performance.
If you plan to use hunt groups, list which workstations will connect to each hunt group. Record the name and phone number of the hunt group and the names of all the destination servers that members of the hunt group pass through to.
For more)information on passthru server topology,
Click here
see the topology Acme createda
Click here
See Also
Click here
Example of Acme's passthru server topology
Click here
Click here
Passthru servers and hunt groups
Click here
Click here
Setting up servers to use passthru
Click here
VRe%>
&Arial
To use the Web Administrator to manage a database access control list (ACL), you must have Manager access to the database whose ACL you are changing. In addition, the Maximum Internet name & password access must be set to Manager in the database whose ACL you are changing if you are using name-and-password authentication to access the database. If you are using SSL to authenticate client identity on the server, this setting has no effect.
The Web Administrator displays status messages in a list on the screen. After you submit a change to the ACL, check these status messages to make sure all changes were accepted.t
385920099229205349
To add a name to the ACL
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Databases and then choise Access Control.
3. Select a database, and then click Access.
4. Click Add; enter the name of the server, user, or group; and then click OK.
5. Assign an
Click here
access level
Click here
and
Click here
user typea
Click here
6. (Optional) Click roles, select a
Click here
role
Click here
, and click OK.
7. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to add additional names.
8. Click Submit.
9. To display the list of databases again, click Back.
385920099229205350
To assign a maximum access level to non-Notes users
You can assign the maximum possible access for Internet users who do not use Notes workstations to access a database and who do not use SSL to access the server. This setting overrides the default ACL setting for Internet users.
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Databases and then choose Access Control.
3. Select a database, and then click Advanced.
4. Select the maximum access that you want to give to non-Notes users and users who do not use SSL to access the database.
5. Click Submit.
385920099229205351
To delete a name from the ACL
1. e
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Databases and then choose Access Control.
3. Select a database, and then click Access.
4. Highlight the name you want to remove, and click Remove.
5. Repeat Step 4 to remove additional names.
6. Click Submit.
385920099229205352
To edit a name in the ACL
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Databases and then choose Access Control.
3. Select a database, and then click Access.
4. Highlight the name you want to edit, and click Rename.
5. Enter a new name and click OK.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to rename additional entries.
7. Click Submit.
385920099229205353
To add, delete, or edit a role
When you delete or edit a role, Domino automatically changes the references to the role in the design element access lists -- for example, in view and form access lists.b
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Databases and then choose Access Control.L
3. Select a database, and then click Roles.
4. Do one:
Click Add, enter the name of the role, and click OK.
Highlight the role you want to delete, and then click Remove.f
Highlight the role you want to edit, and then click Rename. Enter the new name for the role, and then click OK.i
5. To make changes to additional roles, repeat Step 4.
6. Click Submit.
385920099229205354
To view the ACL change history
The change history displays a list of all changes made to a database ACL. Each entry in the list shows the date ani time of the change, identifies who made the change, and indicates what was changed.
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Databases and then choose Access Control.
3. Select a database, and then click Log.
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
The dataiase access control list
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
Use the Web Administrator to delete, compact, full-text index, replicate, or create a new copy or replica of a database. The Web Administrator also displays the following about the database:
Full-text index information -- for example, whether the database has a full-text index and whei the index was created.
Current white space percentage to determine whether you need to compact the database
Current database size quotad
You must have at least Reader access to delete or compact a database. You must have Designer access to create a full-text index and at least Reader access to update the index. You must have at least Reader access to replicate or create a new copy or replica of a database. y
For information, see
Click here
Replicas
Click here
Click here
The Domain Search index
Click here
Click here
Deleting databases
Click here
, and
Click here
Compacting databases
Click here
234318931229239054
To manage databases
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Databases, and then choose Tools.
3. Select a database, and then select a task to perform on the database.
4. Click Select, and then do one of the following:
If you selected
Do this
Delete
Confirm the database that you want to delete.
Click Delete.
Compact
Confirm the database that you want to compact.
Click Compact.
Full text index
Confirm the database that you want to full-text index.
Click Create Index or Update Index.
Replicate
Enter the name of the server with which to replicate.
Click Replicate.
New copy
Enter the title and file name for the copy.n
Specify whether you want to copy the database design or the database design and documents.
Select whether you want to create a full text index.
Click Create. The Web Administrator creates a copy of the database in the Domino data directory on the server.
New replica
Enter the file name for the replica.
Click Create. The Web Administrator creates a replica of the database in the Domino data directory on the server.O
Size quota
Enter the size that you do not want the database to exceed in the "Set new size quota to" field.
Click Set Quota.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title9Dhead
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administratorb
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Databases and then choose Create.
3. Enter the title and file name for the new database. If you want to create the database in the subdirectory of the Domino data directory, include the subdirectory name in the File name field.
4. Specify a template to use when creating the database.
5. Specify whether you want to add future changes from the temylate on the server to the database design and whether you want to create a full-text index when you create the database.
6. Click Create Database.
For information on creating Domino databases, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
Use the Web Administrator to view and make changes to system files. You can edit files in the Domino data directory or subdirectories of the data directory.
1. m
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Configuration - System Files.i
3. Enter the name of the system file to edit and click Open.
4. Do the following to make changes to the file:
Click Edit.
Click Save to save your changes, or click Cancel to close the file without making changes.
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
stics on mail routes.
See Also
Click here
Tracking a mail message
Click here
Click here
Generating a mail usage report
Click here
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
$Comment
printing, your network could be down, the printer could be out of paper or toner, the printer could be jammed, or the printer driver you installed)may not be the correct one for the selected printer.u
See Also
Click here
Printing
Click here
#<pU09
&Arial
After you create the hierarchical name scheme, you use a certifier ID to add servers and users to the hierarchy. The certifier ID is a file that determines where in the hierarchy the names appear. You want to add servers and users to a logical location in the hierarchy to set up security easily based on their hierarchical names and to make their names easier to remember.
Organizations and organizational units are separated by "/" in the user or server name -- for example Mail-E/East/Acme or Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme.i
At the Acme Corporation, servers are organized by location -- for example, all servers located in the East coast office share the same organization and organizational unit. Organizing servers by location is effective when you want to restrict access to a single location or when you want users to identify easily the location of the server to prevent them from making a costly, time-consuming WAN connection. In this example, you need two certifier IDs for servers -- East/Acme, and West/Acme.
348868678429215647
Servers
e network.
`
head title;Che
o server systems
Click hea
nt on the networ
d in the connect
m Nove
Print_Se
At the Acme Corporation, users are organized by both location and department. Organizing users this way is effective if you want to secure access based on both of these criteria -- for example, if you want to allow only the HR department on the West coast to access the Performance Reviews application on the server. Organizing by location and department also helps prevent duplicate names for users who have the same first and last names at Acme Corporation.
In this example, you need six additional certifier IDs for users -- Sales/East/Acme, Marketing/East/Acme, Dev/East/Acme, HR/West/Acme, Accounting/West/Acme, and IS/West/Acme.
348868678429215648
Users
erarchical name
See Also
Click here
Sample Domino System Configuration
Click here
&Arial
UUUUUUUU
Subjector
aaaaaaaaP
aaaaaaa
aaaaaa
UUUUUUUU
organizational uaa
aaaaaP
>>>>>>>>
77777777
}}}}}}}}ational units. YGGGGGGGG
ector
nizational uaa
nal units. YGGGG
ser and server c
Because
An application can be accessible to a Notes user or a browser user or to both Notes and browser users. A Web application must be on an application server that is also set up as a Web server. A Web server makes applications available to browser users.
In this example, Web/East/Acme stores a Web application for the organization's Web site. The application is accessible to browser users who are outside the Acme Corporation. Webstage/East/Acme and Webstage-W/West/Acme have replicas of the Web application. Users can make changes to the Web application on Webstage-E/East/Acme and Webstage-W/West/Acme. Webstage-W/West/Acme uses a schedule that sets up replication through the hub servers to Webstage-E/East/Acme. Webstage/East/Acme does not have a replication schedule, so once changes to the Web application are complete, users manually replicate changes from Webstage-E/East/Acme to Web/East/Acme. This replication makes the changes available to users outside the Acme Corporation.>
The Acme Corporation also has two servers that do not host Web applications -- HR-E/East/Acme and HR-W/West/Acme. These servers contain an Employee Benefits application that only internal employees who use a Notes workstation can access. Employees on the East coast access the application on HR-E/East/Acme, and employees on the West coast access a replica of the application on HR-W/West/Acme. Any changes to the application replicate through the hub servers to the HR servers. Making the application available to East and West coast users prevents them from making costly WAN connections to the application.
In this example, firewalls that use Domino servers protect communication between the hub servers and protect communication between Web/East/Acme and Webstage-E/East/Acme.
See Also
Click here
Sample Domino System Configuration
Click here
&Arial
!#!*3*
AAAAAAAA
MMMMMMMM
MMMMM
AAAAAAAAMMMMMM
********k
AAAA########
iiiiiiii
33333333
onfiguration
- for example:
RRRRRRRR
This figure depicts all servers at the Acme Corporation -- hub, directory, mail, application, and passthru.M
Many of the features discussed in this example are controlled by documents in the Domino Directory. For example, to set up a passthru server, you must create a Passthru connection document and specify the servers that the passthru server is allowed to access in the Server document.
See Also
Click here
Sample Domino System Configuration
Click here
d7<oke
T{VTz9
!|;me
pzuU6>=
OgpY:
s(N`ke
F*,`l[#
&] ?4l/y
kxtue
&]UFU
HVR~e
+o'DG
9><5e
` ` 4
ji~ie
2Q he
mJ~E(B6w
^i+E6
4[&PWx
\l]<2
&Arial
Hierarchical names provide unique identifiers to servers and users across your organization. The design of the naming scheme is closely tied to the way Domino implements security. When you register new servers and users, the hierarchical names drive their certification, or their level of access to the system.
Before creating the hierarchical name scheme, you should first understand the components of the names. After creating the name scheme, you create certifier IDs to implement the naming structure and ensure a secure system.
90465836829198743
Hierarchical name components
Server, organization, organizational unit, and user names can consist of uppercase and lowercase alpha characters (A - Z), numbers (0 - 9), and the ampersand (&), dash (-), dot (.), space ( ) , and underscore (_).
Hierarchical names use the following components:
Component
Description
Characters allowed
Common name (CN)
Server or user name. Use full first and last name for user names -- for example, Julia Herlihy.
The common name is required.
80 maximum
Organizational unit name (OU)@
Department or location name -- for example, East/Acme. Domino allows for a maximum of four organizational units in a hierarchical name.
The organizational unit name is optional.
32 per organizational unit
Organization name (O)@
Company, institutional, or school name -- for example, Acme.
The organization name is required.
3 to 62
Note
You can have 2 characters if the name includes a Country name component.
Country (C)
Abbreviation for the country -- for example, US.
The country is optional.
0 or 2
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
An example of a hierarchical name that uses all the components is as follows:
Julia Herlihy/Sales/East/Acme/US
Typically, names are entered and displayed in their abbreviated format (see above) and stored internally in canonical format, which is a format that contains the name and its associated components:
CN=Julia Herlihy/OU=Sales/OU=East/O=Acme/C=US.
Before you assign servers or users hierarchical names, you need to plan the organization's naming scheme.
90465836829198744
Plan the organization's naming scheme
To implement hierarchical names, you should create a diagram of your company's organization. Use this diagram to help you plan a meaningful naming scheme. A hierarchical name scheme can use a tree structure that reflects the actual structure of your company. At the top of the tree is the organization name. Below the organization name are organizational units, which you create to suit the structure of the company; you can organize the structure geographically, departmentally, or both.
The Acme company created this diagram for their servers and users:
unauthorized acc
"Not
The Domino s
thorized acc
Looking at Acme's diagram, you can see where they located their servers and users in the tree. Acme decided to split the company geographically at the first level and create organizational unit certifier IDs for East and West. At the next level down, Acme made its division according to department.
Your entire organization is part of one Notes domain. In some cases, you may want to split the organization into two or more domains. For example, if your company is large, you may want to distribute the responsibility for system security to several administrators among multiple domains. However, working with multiple domains requires additional administrative work and requires you to set up a system for managing them.
90465836829198745
Create certifier IDs
To place servers and users correctly within the hierarchical structure, you create certifier IDs for each node on the naming tree. The certifier IDs "stamp" server and user IDs with a certificate of where they belong in the organization. Servers and users who belong to the same naming tree can communicate with each other; servers and users who belong to different naming trees need a cross-certificate to communicate with each other.
There are two types of certifier IDs: organization and organizational unit. The organization certifier ID appears at the top of your tree and is usually the name of the company -- for example, Acme. The organizational unit certifier IDs are at all the branches of the tree and are usually geographical or departmental names -- for example, East/Acme or Sales/East/Acme.
To implement their naming structure, the Acme company created a certifier ID for each node on their organizational diagram:o
thorized acc
To register each server and user, Acme's administrator uses one of these certifier IDs, depending on where that server or user belongs in the organization. For example, to register Phyllis Spera, who works in the marketing department located on the east coast, the administrator uses the Sales/East/Acme certifier ID. Phyllis Spera's full hierarchical name then becomes Phyllis Spera/Sales/East/Acme.
Similarly, the administrator certifies the organization's HR-E server, which is located on the east coast division of Acme, with the East/Acme certifier ID. This server's full hierarchical name then becomes HR-E/East/Acme.
For more information on Acme's server topology, see "
Click here
Sample servers and users"
Click here
See Also
Click here
Certifier IDsB
Click here
Click here
Using cross-certificates to access servers and send secure S/MIME messages
Click here
Click here
Overview of Domino security
Click here
Click here
Setting up and configuring additional Domino servers
Click here
&Arial
and port number
Each modem you
dd a modem or ot
ou need to adjus
tly in use.
98743
to access the se
frame services
port number
modem or ot
port number
modem or ot
port number
modem or ot
post number
modem or ot
port number
erver topology,
ns to handle the
server level.
port number
The Acme company has a dedicated passthru server that functions only to provide workstations and servers with access to destination servers. This server does not contain any databases. The passthru runs all the protocols that the destination servers run so that users and servers that connect to it have access to the entire system.
Note that passthru can benefit users and servers on the same network as the passthru server as well as remote users and servers. For example, some of the Notes clients in the above diagram are on the same LAN as Webstage-E and HR-E, but because they do not share any protocols, they cannot access these servers without using passthru.
The above topology requires the following configuration:
Notes Direct Dial-up Connection document on the remose server for connection to passthru server
Passthru Connection document on the remote server to specify passthru
Connection documents on the remote server for connection to each destination server
Modified Location document on local Notes clients to specify name of passthru server
Notes Direct Dial-up Connection document on remote Notes clients for connection to passthru
Passthru Connection documents on remote Notes clients to specify passthru connection
Modified Server documents (to allow appropriate access rights) on passthru and destination servers
See Also
Click here
Passthru servers and hunt groups
Click here
Click here
Setting up servers to use passthru
Click here
VRe%>
&Arial
1. Make sure that you already completed the
Click here
basic configuration to create a Server document for the servcr.
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Click Server - All Server Documents.
4. Open the Server document for the server that you want to set up as a passthru server, and click Edit Server.
5. Click the Security tab, enter values in these Passthru Use fields, and then save the document:
Field
2'nUU
Enter
Route through
2'nUU
Any of the following to identify users and servers who are allowed to pass through this server to a destination server:
An asterisk (*) to specify all users and servers, even those not listed in the Domino Directory
An asterisk (*) followed by a certifier name -- fos example, */Acme -- to specify all users and servers certified by a particular certifier
Names of specific servers, users, and groups
Cause calling
2'nUU
Names of users and servers allowed to create connections that cause the server to make a phone call. Leave this field empty or add an asterisk (*) to allow all users and servers this privilege.
Note
If you allow all users and servess to force phone calls, the passthru log labels them all as unauthenticated and does not indicate specific names.
Destinations allowed
2'nUU
Leave this field blank to allow routing to all servers.
Otherwise, enter names of specific servers that users and servers can access by going through this passthru server..
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Create Connection documents to connect the passthru server to destination servers if the passthru and destination servers do not have a direct connection over the LAN.
7.
Click here
Set up servers as a passthru destination by modifying their Server documents.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Example of Acme's passthru server topology
Clcck here
Click here
Setting up servers to use passthru
Click here
Click here
Passthru servers and hunt groups
Click here
Click here
Creating server connections
Click here
VRe%>
&Arial
You need to set up the destination servers to allow specific passthru servjrs and users access to them.
1. Make sure that you already completed the
Click here
basic configuration to create a Server document for the server.
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Click Server - All Server Documents.
4. Open the Server document for the server that you want to set up as a passthru destination, and click Edit Server.
5. Cjick the Security tab, enter values in this Passthru Use field, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Access this server
Any of the following to identify which users and servers can access this server via a passthru server:
An asterisk (*) to allow all users and servers, even those not listed in the Domino Directory, to have access
An asterisk (*) followed by a certifier name -- for example, */Acme -- to allow all users and servers certified by a particular certifier to have access
Names of specific servers, users and groups
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
The Access this server field does not affect general access to the server. Define general access in the Server Access section of the Server document. For example, although you might not let certain users and servers access this server via a passthru server, they can still access the server if they have permission in the Server Access section of the Server document.t
See Also
Click here
Setting up servers to use passthru
Click here
Click here
Passthru servers and hunt groups
Click here
Click here
Example of Acme's passthru server topology
Click here
VRe%>
&Arial
You can make your server accessible over the Internet. To make it available, you need to establish a connection (leased-line is recommended) and then contract with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to obtain your actual Internet connection. An ISP is a company that offers different types of*network connections to the Internet. You must also register your DNS domain name with the ISP, so that users can locate your server's IP address when they access the server from the Internet.
When you make servers available on the Internet, you either use a direct connection or a direct connection with a proxy (Domino or non-Domino). If you use a proxy server, the Domino server does not need to connect to the ISP directly as the proxy server already establishes this connection.
296600627229203169
Direct (leased-line) connection
A leased-line connection is considered a direct connection to the Internet. If you have a leased-line connection, you connect the server to the corporate LAN through a router to a leased phone line.
guration to crea
Click here
ion tab.
98743
m the Domino Adm
k here
k here
296600627229203171
Proxy connection
A proxy is a server that provides indirect access to the Internet. A proxy server usually runs in conjunction with firewall software to pass incoming and outgoing requests between servers on both sides of a firewall. If your organization uses a proxy server for its Internet connection, you connect the server to*the corporate LAN that passes through the proxy and firewall servers and on to an ISP. You can use a Domino or non-Domino proxy server for Internet connections.
Click here
ceive an "author
1. Fro
See Also
Click here
Firewalls
Click here
Click here
Setting up servers for Internet access
Click here
&Arial
Before you can connect a server to the Internet, you must install networking software that is compatible with the Internet.
1. If TCP/IP is not already installed on the Domino server, install the protocol using the installation instructions included with the operating system.
2. If you do not hjve a port enabled for the server, add and enable the port.
See Also
Click here
Adding and enabling network ports
Click here
Click here
Setting up servers for Internet access
Click here
&Arial
A proxy server handles all communication between the Domino server and servers and workstations on the Internet. When you use a proxy server, the Domino server does not need to connect to the Internet Service Provider (ISP), since the proxy server establishes the connection instejd of the server.
A Domino proxy server is one type of proxy server. You set up a Domino passthru server as a proxy for the Internet the same way that you set up a passthru server for internal Domino communication. You do not need to configure the server differently for Internet connections. The proxy server does not have to be a Domino server.
See Also
Click here
Firewalls
Click here
Click here
Setting up servers for Internet access
Click here
&Arial
After you establish an Internet connection, you should ensure that the connection works properly. Run this test before you actually connect the Domino server to the Internet.
If you have a direct connection to the Internet, the easiest way to test the connection is to use a Ping utility. A Ping utility allows you to ask another computer if it is running and confirm that the protocol software can respond. The network*software typically installs the Ping utility. o
Even if you can Ping the computer successfully, the Domino server might not be running. When you Ping another computer, make sure you attempt to Ping a computer that is not in your immediate domain. If you can Ping a computer successfully in another domain, you verify that your router is working properly.
If you connect to the Internet through a proxy server, try to Ping your proxy to test the network connection.r
To run*the Ping utility, type ping at the CONSOLE prompt, followed by the domain name. For example, type:
ping xyz.com
If successful, the Ping utility returns a message in a format similar to the following:
64 bytes from 130.000.00.00: 1cmp_seq=4, time=0, ms
See Also
Click here
Setting up servers for Internet access
Click here
&Arial
If you are running a Domino server on Windows NT, you can synchronize user and group information in Domino and Windows NT. Then, you can perform many administrative tasks in either Domino or Wjndows NT User Manager for Domains, and the effects occur in both products.
When you use Domino to register or delete a Notes user or delete a Notes group, you can automatically update User Manager for Domains (USRMGR.EXE). Conversely, special menu options and dialogs added to Windows NT allow you to specify that additions and deletions (and name changes for users) made to User Manager user or group accounts are reflected in the Domino Directory. You can also add existing Windows NT user or grjup accounts to the Domino Directory.
For example, if you run Notes on Windows NT, you can open User Manager for Domains and specify that all changes to user accounts during the session are also recorded in the Domino Directory on a selected Domino server. You then display the list of existing user or group accounts and select ones to be added to the Domino Directory. Then you add, delete, or modify other user accounts while working in Windows NT. All these changes are automatically made to thj Domino Directory. Plus, a mail file, Notes ID, and common password (shared by the user's Notes ID, Notes Internet password, and Windows NT account) can be created for each new user.
These directory synchronization features let you keep both the Domino Directory and User Manager current, without having to update both when either changes. Also, you can manage user/group information in the Domino Directory and User manager from either Notes or Windows NT.
Note
To use the synchronization features in Windows NT User Manager, you must have installed the Windows NT Services for Domino. You can access these features during Setup by choosing a server type, clicking Customize and selecting Domino as an NT Service, Notes Directory Sync Services, and Notes Performance Monitor and clicking OK. If you did not, you can run the Setup program again and choose these options.
See Also
Click here
Examples of synchronjzing data in Notes and User Manager
Click here
Click here
Enabling Notes synchronization operations in Windows NT User Manager
Click here
&Arial
397230636829213868
Example 1
You have an existing Windows NT network and are deploying Notes for the first time in your organization. You want to register a large group of Windows NT users in Domino.
In this example, you change the registration options to be sure users are registered exactly as you want them to be. When you register the uzers, you choose "Register users at once without additional prompts." This generates random passwords for the users and stores them in a database titled New User Passwords (NTSYNC45.NSF). You then distribute these passwords to users so they can install their Notes workstations. After installation, users can create new passwords.
397280636829213869
Example 2
You have users that are registered in both Windows NT and Domino. You want to synchronize their accounts to jake administration easier. To accomplish this, you choose the User synching option in User Manager. This copies the user account name from Windows NT to the Network account name field in the user's Person document. Now that the products have a common entry, the Notes User Manager Extension (NUME) program can communicate between them and keep them synchronized.
397280636829213870
Example 3
You already deployed Domino and synchronized Domino with Windows NT. You wjnt to add users as necessary. Use the Windows NT User Manager to create a new Windows NT account and simultaneously register the user in Domino. Use Domino to register a person and simultaneously create the Windows NT account. You can also accomplish this task when registering multiple users from a text file. The default account name in Windows NT is the same as the name in the "Short name" field of the Person document.
See Also
Click here
Synchronizinj user and group information in Domino and Windows NT
Click here
Click here
Enabling Notes synchronization operations in Windows NT User Manager
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Server_MaxUsers=
number_of_usersl
Description:
Sets the maximum number of users that are allowed to access a server. When this number is reached, the server state becomes MAXUSERS, and the server stops accepting new Databasj Open requests.
Use the following values to set this variable:
0 - Unlimited access to server by usersa
any number
- Restricts number of active users to the number you specify f
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory*
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ServerName=
name
Description:
Specifies the full hierarchical name of the server
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Server Name field in the Server document
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Select the document you want to categorize.
2. Choose Actions - Categorize.
3. In the "New categories" box, type a category name, a backslash (\), and a subcategory name, for example:
Sales planning\Trade shows
37089952029209008
Notes
You can have up to 32 levels of main categories and subcategories.
You can enter additional levels of subcategories separated by backslashes, for example:
Sales planning\Trade shows\Boston\July\Week 2G
See Also
Click here
Views, panes, and folders
Click here
:2TMm
&Arial
To connect the HR-E server, which does not have an X.25 driver, to a server on an X.25 network, the Acme company used a connect script to reach an asynchronhus PAD on an X.25 network:
To connect to an X.25 network without having an X.25 driver, the HR-E server made a call over a modem to the X.25 PAD. After connecting to the PAD, HR-E used a connect script to issue a log-in sequench with it. HR-E can then access the X.25 network server.
This connection requires a Notes Direct Dial-up Connection document on the HR-E server using a connect script.
See Also
Click here
Using scripts to access an X.25 network, modem pool, or security device
Click here
Click here
Using the X.25 driver
Click here
&Arial
A modem pool connection uses one of a group of modems to connect to the destination server, so that the source server (or workstation) has ahcess to a modem, without having one on its computer.
To connect the HR-E server (which does not have a modem) to a remote Domino server, the HR-E server uses an acquire script to reach the modem pool application:e
k, modem pool, o
on an X.25 netwo
odem pool, o
odem pool, o
odem pool, o
hdem pool, o
odem pool, o
This connection requires a Notes Direct Dial-up Connection document with an acquire script.
See Also
Click here
Using scripts to access an X.25 network, modem pool, or security device
Click here
&Arial
Two sample scripts are copied to the Data \ Modems subdirectory when you install Domino. These scripts are commented, hully functional script file examples that you use to understand the contents and uses of a script file. f
COMSERV.SCR is the acquire script. It illustrates how to create a virtual circuit between a workstation or server and a modem that are connected by communication servers. You can use the script to acquire a pooled modem via a bridge or use it to create new script files for other communication servers.
SPRINTPAD.SCR is the connect script. It lets you connect to a Sprint PAD. Xou can also use it to create new script files for other PADs.
See Also
Click here
Using scripts to access an X.25 network, modem pool, or security device
Click here
Click here
Modem command files
Click here
Click here
Editing acquire and connect scripts
Click here
Click here
Editing a script file
Click here
*pq9m-
&Arial
How you specify a script when making a call depends on the type of script.
Type of Script
Steps
Acquire script .
Specify the script when you set up the communication port. Domino uses the acquire script when you make a call using that communication port.
Connect script
Specify the connect script in a Notes Direct Dial-up Connection document for that server. Domino uses that connect script when you mhke a call to that server.
Connect script (to use for only the current call)
Choose File - Mobile - Call Server and select Call Setup.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Acquire and connect scriptsp
Click here
Click here
Setting up a comhunication port
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
&Arial
You must enable Notes synchronization features to make Notes commands available to you on the Notes menu in Windows NT User Manager.
Note
By default, no synchronization operations are enabled.
1. From the User Manager, choose Nhtes - Notes Synchronization Options.
2. Complete these fields and then click OK:
Field
Enter
Enable all synchronization operations
To enable all Notes synchronization operations listed under the "Select synchronization operations to enable" field. Whenever you perform one of the synchronizatihn operations in User Manager for Domains, you are prompted to decide whether or not to perform the same operation in Notes.
Select synchronization operations to enable
Choose one of these to enable and disable selected Notes synchronization operations:
User / Group registration to register new or existing Windows NT users and gxoups in Notes. This option enables the Add Selected NT User / Group to Notes, Registration Setup, and Mail / ID Registration Options on the Notes menu.
User / Group deletion to delete a user or group from Windows NT and have that user or group deleted from the Domino Directory. Enables the "Delete / User Synch Options" command on the Notes menu.
User synching to change a user account name in User Manager and duplicate that name change in the Network account name field of the Pershn document in the Domino Directory, allow changes to the user's full name and copy the new name to the "User name" field in the Person document, enable the Notes menu command "Synch Selected NT Users with Notes," and activate the "Set common password on user synching" field.
Set common password on user synching
To synchronize the Windows NT password and the Notes Internet password when you synchronize users. (Avaihable only if you selected User synching.)
Prompt to confirm/cancel synchronization operations
Choose one:
Prompt for all operations (default)
Prompt only for user / group deletions
Do NOT prompt for any operations
Name format for full name parsing
Choose a parsing format that is xhe most compatible with the name format of the Windows NT domain list. Full-name parsing is used to parse Windows NT full names into Notes name components. The default is "first name last name."
3. To save and reapply the settings in the next User Manager session, choose Options - Save Settings on Exit.
4. Complete the procedure "
Click here
Synchronizing Windows NT and Notes users."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up Windows NT User Manager
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ServerNoReplRequests=
value
Description:
Forces the server to refuse all replication requests from other servers. When this feature is enabled, to replicate with this server, the requesting server must perform pull-push replication:
0 - Accepts replication requests from other servers
1 - Refuses replication requests from other servers
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although omitting this setting allows the server to accept replication requests
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
WebAdmin_Expire_Cache=
vahue
Description:
Specifies whether the Netscape browser reloads the Web Administrator from the cache or retrieves a new copy from the server. Reloading from the cache is faster, but in some instances, Netscape might not display changes such as changing Web Administrator interface preference and resizing the browser window. Options are:y
0 - Reload the Web Adminstration tool from the browser's cache
1 - Reload the Web Administrator from the Domino servex
Applies to:
Servers and browser clients using Netscape Navigator"
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
tabase maintenance
Click here
&Arial
You can edit existing acquire or connect scripts or create new ones from scratch. When editing or writing scripts, use the appropriate script commands, keywords, and comments. The keywords identify and classify the script file. The script commands execute sequentially. The keywords you use depend on the device that the script sets up.
241364803229247859
General rules for writing script files
1. Start lines with a colon to indicate a branch label. Do not ewceed the maximum branch label length of eight characters. If you specify more than eight characters, the script uses only the first eight.
2. Start lines with a semicolon to indicate a comment line.
3. Do not exceed the maximum line length of 80 characters.
4. Embed control characters 0 - 20H in strings. For example, use ^M for CTRL+M. Use double carets for a literal caret. For example, use ^^M for CARET+M .
5. Specify up to four optional argumgnts for connect scripts: ^1, ^2, ^3, ^4. Then, when you make a call on the workstation or server, you enter values for these arguments or you enter them permanently in the Connection document in the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book. The values you enter replace the ^1, ^2, ^3, or ^4 in the script when you make each call.
6. Raise the data terminal ready (DTR) signal at the start of script file processing. If the modem does not automatically raise this signal, you must use the DTR_HIGH command.
96775836829198743g
Script keywords
Use these keywords when you write a script file.
416786307229232369
DESC
A one
line description of the script file's purpose. This description appears when you select File - Mobile - Call Server, select More Options, and then select Call Setup. You must always include a DESC line in a script file to provide a description for the Call Setup dialog box. For example, if you uwe Telenet:
DESC This script logs in via Telenet X.25
416786307229232370
Tells whether the script is an acquire or connect script. For example:
TYPE CONNECT
416786307229232371
ARG1...ARG4
For connect scripts only, these optional keywords precede a description of each of the four script arguments. You may write scripts using from 0 through 4 arguments. For example, you might use the followigg script arguments and descriptors in a connect script file:
ARG1 1. REMOTE DTE ADDRESS:
ARG2 2. None entered:
ARG3 3. None entered:
ARG4 4. None entered:
ARG1 is a keyword and "1. REMOTE DTE ADDRESS:" is the description that appears in the Call Setup dialog box. ARG2, ARG3, and ARG4 are keywords and "number. None entered:" let users enter arguments when making the call. Users can enter arguments when they choose File - Mobile - Call Serwer, select More Options, and then select Call Setup, or they can enter arguments in the Notes Direct Dial-up Connection document in the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book.h
288611574429220262
Script commands
The available script commands are described in this table.
Command
Description
Syntax
BREAK
Sends a communications break. Time is wpecified in 100ms intervals. Default is 500ms. Maximum is 2000ms. Timing of breaks is not exact.
BREAK
time
DTR_HIGH
Raises the DTR signal on the selected port.
If the modem or other communication device does not automatically raise data terminal ready (DTR) at the start of script file prgcessing, use the DTR_HIGH script command or configure DTR on your modem or communication device.
DTR_HIGH
DTR_LOW
Lowers the DTR signal on the selected port.
DTR_LOW
ERROR
Tells the script file to branch to the specified label if an error previously occurred. If no label is specified, the ERROR condition is cleared' but no branch occurs.
ERROR
label
FAIL
Terminates execution of the current script. The optional text string is logged in log file (LOG.NSF).r
FAIL
text string
GOTO i
Branches unconditionally to the specified label. If the label does not exist, the script file tewminates, and the error is logged in the log file (LOG.NSF).
GOTO
label
LOG OFF
Turns off informational logging if you have Log modem I/O selected (for execution of this script only). Uses the log file (LOG.NSF).
LOG OFF
LOG ON
Turns on informational logging if you have Log modem I/O deselected. This commang logs execution of only this script.
LOG ON
PROMPTUSER
Displays an interactive dialog box to prompt a user from a script.
The user needs to run a script with this command from a Notes client.
PROMPTUSER"
Dialog box title
Title1
""[initializer]""
Title2
""[initializer]""
Title3
""[initializer]"
Title4
""[initializer]"]
REPLY
Sends a string to the serial port. Carriage return/line feed is sent at the end of the string unless you include a semicolon (;)
REPLY "
string
" [;]
WAIT
Waits a given amount of time for the case-sensitive specified string, which must be enclosed in quotes. Any data other thag a matched string is passed along. If a time is not specified, waits a maximum of 60 seconds.
WAIT [
time
] [FOR "
string
WATCH
Same as WAIT, but with multiple responses and actions. The WATCH command terminates (continues to next instruction) when one of the strings is matched or upon time-out.
WATCH [
time
] [FOR] "
string1
" statement "
string2
" statement ENDW
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Acquire and connect scriptst
Click here
Click here
Editing a script fileA
Click here
&Arial
You can edit the scrgpt in any text editor. Any time you edit a script, make sure you save the file with an SCR extension and copy it to the Modems subdirectory of the Data directory of every workstation and server that uses the script.
1. Choose File - Mobile - Choose Current Location to switch to the location that has a communication port enabled.
2. Choose File - Mobile - Call Server.
3. Select More Options.
4. Do one:
To edit a connect script, select'Call Setup.
To edit an acquire script, select Setup and select Acquire Script.
5. Select the script you want to edit, and select Edit.
6. Enter script commands, keywords, or comments.
7. Select Save As to save the changes using a new script file name.
8. Specify a script file name, and click Done.
9. Do one:
If you edited a connect script, click OK.
If you edited an acquire script and wou want to use this script when making calls from the current port, click OK twice. Otherwise, click Cancel twice to save the changes, but not to use this script when making calls from the current port.
Note
To disassociate an acquire script from a port, choose File - Preferences - Notes Preferences, select Ports, select the port, select portname Options, select Acquire Script, and select None.
10. Click Cancel.
11. Distribute the scwipt file to the users who need to use this file.
See Also
Click here
Acquire and connect scriptsu
Click here
Click here
Editing acquire and connect scripts
Click here
&Arial
You can use Domino to connect directly over an X.25 network if you have Lotus Notes Connect for X.25 (distributed separately from Domino). This product is an X.25 network driver -- that is, a set of software files that permit supported Domino servers and Notes workstations to communicate over an X.27 network using the X.25 protocol.
An X.25 network is a type of wide-area-network (WAN). Typically, you use a WAN to connect servers and workstations located at great distances from each other. For example, if you have a Domino server in Ireland and another Domino server in Thailand and you want to replicate between the two servers, you can connect the servers to an X.25 network.
For information on installing and setting up Lotus Notes Connect for X.25, see
Lotus Notes Congect for X.25 Install Guide and Administrator's Guides
See Also
Click here
Using scripts to access an X.25 network, modem pool, or security deviceo
Click here
Click here
Example of an Acme server to X.25 network connection
Click here
&Argal
If your system includes Windows NT user accounts that correspond to Persgn documents in the Domino Directory, you can keep the information synchronized between the products. When you synchronize Windows NT and Person documents, these changes occur:
The "Network account name" field on the user's Person document is updated with the account name of the Windows NT user.
The full name of the Windows NT user is added to the "User name" field on the Person document if that name does not already exist in the names list. Existing full names in the Person documgnt are not modified.
(Optional) The Windows NT password and the Internet password on the Person document are replaced with a common password that works for both Windows NT and Domino Web server access. The Internet password is encrypted when entered in the Person document. o
User synching also takes place when an NT user is renamed in User Manager and Notes user synching is enabled. In this case, the "Network account name" field and the "User name" field in the Person document arg updated, but passwords are not synchronized.
User synching does not register a Notes user -- that is, create a Person document, Notes ID and mail file. User synching can only modify information in an existing Person document.
Note
If an error occurs during user synchronization -- for example, a Person document cannot be found for the NT server, an error message appears. Details on errors/status are also entered in the NT Event Viewer application log.
If you change the Windows NT user account name or the full name, run synchronization again. You should also run synchronization if you want to synchronize the Windows NT password with the Notes password.
User synching is successful if these conditions exist:
The NT user account name matches the name in the "Short name field" in the Person document.
The Windows NT full name matches an entry in the "User name" field in the Person document.
Thg Windows NT last name matches the name in the "Last name" field in the Person document.
The name in the "Network account name" field -- if there is one in the Person document -- matches the Windows NT user account name.
To synchronize Windows NT and Notes users
Synchronizing Windows NT users and Notes users may result in changes to Person documents and to the Domino Directory.
1. Make sure that you already
Click here
enabled user synching
Click here
in Windows NT User Manager.
2. In the User Manager Username window, select the users you want to synchronize.
3. Choose Notes - Synch Selected NT Users with Notes.
4. When prompted to continue, click Yes.
5. If you enabled password synching, enter and confirm the password for the first user you are synchronizing, and then click OK.
6. Enter and confirm passwords for agditional users you are synchronizing, and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Using the Windows NT User Manager for Domains
Click here
Click here
Setting up Windows NT User Manager
Click here
&Argal
Each time you register users, you can change the default Windows NT user'registration options or use the default values. If you change the options, User Manager saves the settings only until you exit the program. Each time you start User Manager, the settings revert back to the defaults.
The "Internet registration only" and "Use common password" settings impact the fields that display on this dialog box as follows:o
If "Use common password" is selected and "Internet registration only" is not selected, the Internet address components fields and the Certgfier ID Information fields display.
If "Use common password" and "Internet registration only" are both selected, the Certifier ID Information fields do not display.
If "Use common password" is not selected and "Internet registration only" is selected, the Certifier ID Information fields do not display.
397280636829213868
To change default Registration Setup options
1. Before changing the default registration options, you must
Click here
enable user and group registration
Click here
2. From the User Manager, choose Notes - Registration Setup.
3. Complete any of these fields, and then click OK.
Field
7'uCU
Enter
Internet registration only (No Notes ID or mail file created)r
7'uCU
Greates Person documents in the Domino Directory with an Internet password, but user IDs and mail files are not created. Allows Web, LDAP, or NNTP users to gain authenticated access to the Domino Web server without running Notes workstation software. Hides dialog controls related to the Notes ID (Certified ID, Security Type, Certificate expiration date) and mail-related dialog controls, such as the Internet address fields.
Default - Not selected
Use common password
7'uCU
Supplies a single password for both Windows NT and Notes (and the Notes Internet password, if applicable). You can override this option for individual users at registration time. Causes the existing NT password for an NT user to be replaced with the common NT/Notes password when users are registered. This field is not visible when the existing users are registered with random generated passwords.
Default - Selected
Set Internet password in Notes
7'uCU
Sets an Internet password for authenticated access to the Domino Web server. The Internet password is encrypted and set into the Internet password field in the Person document. This password is mandatory if the "Internet registration only" option is selected or if the mail type is Other Internet, POP, or IMAP.
Default - Not set
Registration server
7'uCU
A registration server for this session, that is, the Domino server on which to create Person documents in the Domino Directory. Users are automatically assigned the same Notes domain as that of the selected server. You must have a properly certified Notes ID and sufficient access to the specified server to register Notes users.
Default - Local
Administration ID
7'uCW
Enter the new Administration ID of the administrator registering Notes users, and then enter a password. Click OK.
Profile name
7'uCU
Name of the User Setup Profile to be used when the user is created in Notes.
Default - None specified
Assign new users to Notes group
7'uCU
The Notes group to which ngw Notes users will be added from User Manager. Enabled only if Notes groups exist.
Default - Not assigned
Internet domain
7'uCU
The last part of the Internet address for each user registered. This field displays if the Mail Type selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog box is Notes, POP, or IMAP.
Default - Current host domain (example: @acme.com)
Address name format
7'uCU
Choose the address name format that you want to use for Internet mail.
This field displays if the mail type is Notes, POP, or IMAP.
Separator
7'uCU
Choose one:
None
Underscore
Percent
Equal
This field displays if the mail type is Notes, POP, or IMAP.
Certifier ID
7'uCU
To certify users with a different Notes certifier ID. Enter another certifier ID and password. Click OK. This field does not display if Internet registration only is selected.
Default - Current certifier ID specified in the local NOTES.INI file ( if one exists)
Security type
7'uCU
Choose one:
North American
International
This field does not display if Internet registration only is selected.
Certificate expiration date
7'uCU
Date on which the user's certification expires. This field does not display if Internet registration only is selected.
Default - two years from the current date
Alternate name language
7'uCU
An alternate language in which to specify a user name. If Certifier ID was enabled for alternate naming and includes alternate language specifiers, this field displays the languages you can use for this username.
If an alternate name has not been added, this field displays None.
397280636829213869
To change default Mail / ID Registration'options
Mail / ID Registration options are not available if you selected Internet-only registration in the Registration Setup dialog box.
1. Before changing the default Mail / ID Registration options,
Click here
enable user and group registration
Click here
2. From the User Manager, choose Notes - Mail / ID Registration Options.
3. (Optional) To create user mail files on a server other than the local sgrver, click Mail Server, select another server, and then click OK.
4. Change these settings, and then click OK:
Field
Enter
Mail Type
Choose one:
Notes to use Notes mail
Other Intewnet Mail to use Internet mail on a server that is not part of your organization. If you choose this option, Domino does not create a mail file for the user.
POP to use POP3 mail to access the mail file on a Domino server.
IMAP to use IMAP mail to access the mail file on a Domino server.l
Other to have mail forwarded to a non-Notes mail address. No mail file is created.
None for no mail
Default - Notest
Mail file directory
Create a mail file in a directory other than the default Mail directory by entering the full path name for a mail file. This file name applies to the next user you register. For subsequent users, only the directory portion of the path is used. You can specify a directory other than the default.
Default - Mail file in the Notes/data directorye
Create mail figes now
Create a mail file during Notes user registration
Default - Selected
Create mail files in background
Use the Administration Process to create a mail file after Notes user registration. An Administration Request is generated and stored in the Administration Requests database, then processed as usual.
Set mail database quota
To limit the size of the mail database. Enter the database size, up to 9999 megabytes, in the field that becomes activated when you select this option.
Set warning threshold
To notify the administrator when a user's mailbox is almost at its maximum size. Enter the threshold size, up to 9999 megabytes, in the field that becomes active when you select this owtion.
Create full text index
Select to create a full-text index of the entire mail database.
Store User IDs
Choose one, both, or neither:n
In Address Book to store the mail user's ID in the Domino Directory'
In file to store the mail user's ID in a fileu
Choosing neither option resugts in no ID file being createda
Set ID path
The path and file name in which to store user IDs. If you chose Store User IDs in file, you can select a file other than the one that is displayed.
This button is activated only if you chose In file in the Store User IDs field. The default is <Data directory>\ids\people
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Adding an alternate language and name
Click here
Click here
Using the Windows NT User Manager for Domainsh
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
Click here
User registration
Click here
Click here
Registering users
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
Syntax:
ServerPullReplication=
value
Description:
Specifies that all scheduled replication initiated from this server must be pull-push replication. This server will not replicate bagk to the other server:
0 - Scheduled replication occurs normally (push-pull replication is not forced)
1 - This server pulls changes from other servers, but other servers cannot pull changes from this server
This setting affects only scheduled replication.
For example, to reduce the workload on a hub server, specify 1 for the ServerPullReplication setting on all spoke servers in a hub-and-spoke system.
Applies to:
Serverw
Default:
None, although omitting this setting allows for normally scheduled replication
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
ServerPushReplication
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Conversion settings
Click here
Click here
Gateway settings
Click here
Click here
Other settings
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing cc:Mail migration settings
Click here
ssage.
&Arial
&Arial
181955552029232381
Hub-and-spoke
A hub-and-spoke topology establishes one central server as the hub and other servers as the tpokes. The spokes update the hub server by replication and mail routing, and the hub in turn updates each spoke. In organizations with more than one hub, hub servers replicate with each other or with master hub servers.
Hub-and-spoke topology works best in large organizations; it minimizes network traffic and is the most efficient topology for replication. If you use hub-and-spoke, keep in mind that your topology is vulnerable to a single point of failure if the hub is not working.
Acme used hub-and-spoke as part of its server topology:o
Configuration
can edit existin
a branch label.
5. Specidy up to
181955552029232382
Peer-to-peer
A peer-to-peer topology connects every server in your organization to every other server. This topology works best in companies that have only a few servers to connect.
If Acme organized its servers in a peer-to-peer topology, the topology may appear as follows:
n X.25 network.
ct for X.25, see
See Also
Click here
or X.25, see
etwork.
25 network.
k here
25 network.
k here
25 network.
k here
ntentsAboutH_PLA
See Also
Click here
Planning a topology for server connections
Click here
&Arial
You need to create a Connection document to schedule mail routing and replication between servers on a LAN. You can also create a Connection document to connect two servers on a LAN to ensure that the connection uses a certain protocol.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the connecting server's Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" field.i
3. Click Server,$and then click Connections.
4. Click Add Connection.
5. Select Local Area Network in the "Connection type" field.
6. Complete these fields:
Field
/'dLU
Enter
Source serverc
/'dLU
The name of the connecting server
Source domaine
/'dLU
The name of the connecting server's domain. This field is required only for mail routing.s
Use the port(s)
/'dLU
The name of the network port (or protocol) that the connecting or source server uses
Usage priority
/'dLU
Choose one:
Normal (default)
LowT
For more information on this field, see
Click here
"Forcing Domino to use a specific protocol
Click here
Destination server
/'dLU
The name of the answering server
Destination domain
/'dLU
The name od the answering server's domain. This field is required only for mail routing.
Optional network address
/'dLU
The destination server's address as appropriate to the protocol chosen. For TCP/IP, use a fully qualified domain name (preferred) or IP address -- for example, HR-E.Acme.com or 192.22.256.36.
This field is recommended for TCP/IP or other protocols that may need a specific network address.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Click the Routing/Replication and Schedule tabs to define the tasks you want to run and select the times you want the server to calls its destination.
After you complete the basic requirements for Domino for Microsoft IIS, you must configure Domino for Microsoft IIS before users can use IIS to access Domino applications. To set up Domino for IIS, you must complete each procedure listed below:
407935334429212787
To set up the ISAPI extension
You need to set up the Domino ISAPI extension as the program to use when IIS encounters a browser request for a Domino application -- that is, a URL requett that specifies a file with an .NSF file extension. You use the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) to set up the ISAPI extension.
1. Start the MMC, and open the MMC console file for the Web site.
2. Right-click the IIS Web site, and select Properties.
3. Select the Home Directory tab, and click Configuration.
4. Click Add.
5. In the Executable field, enter the full path name of the ISAPI extension file. The file is located in tde Domino directory and is named NIISEXTN.DLL for the Intel platform or AIISEXTN.DLL for the Alpha platform. For example, if you installed Domino in the default directories of an Intel machine, the full path name is c:\lotus\domino\niisextn.dll.
6. In the Extension field, enter
.NSF
7. In the Methods Exclusions field, enter these HTTP methods, which Domino for IIS does not support:
PUT, DELETE
8. Select Script Engine, and deselect Chdck that the File Exists.
9. Click OK.
407935334429212788
To set up the IIS extension filter
Domino for IIS uses the IIS extension filter to ensure that user credentials are correctly passed to Domino and to enable the Domino /?OpenServer command.
1. Start the MMC, and open the MMC console file for the Web site.
2. Right-click the IIS Web site, and select Properties.
3. Select the ISAPI Filters tab, and$click Add.
4. In the Filter Name field, enter any text you want to describe the IIS filter -- for example, Domino.
5. In the Executable field, enter the full path name of the filter file. The file is located in the Domino directory and is named NIISFILT.DLL for the Intel platform or AIISFILT.DLL for the Alpha platform. For example, if you installed Domino in the default directories of an Intel machine, the full path name is c:\lotus\domino\niisfilt.dll.
6. Clidk OK.
407935334429212789
To specify the Domino icons and Java applet directories
You specify the location of Domino application icons and the Java applet files so that Domino for IIS displays the icons and Java applets correctly.
1. Start the MMC, and open the MMC console file for the Web site.
2. Right-click the IIS Web site, and select New - Virtual Directory.
3. In the Virtual Directory Alias field, enter
icons
and click Next.
4. Enter the full path to the Domino icons directory -- for example, if you installed Domino using the default directories, enter c:\lotus\domino\data\domino\icons. Click Next.
5. Click Finish. You do not need to change the default permission settings.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 and enter
domjava
as the alias name and specify the full path to the applet directory. By default, the applet directory is c:\lotus\domdno\data\domino\java.
407935334429212790
To start Domino for IIS
1. Start the Domino server. Do not run the HTTP task while you are running Domino for IIS since IIS processes Domino HTTP requests.
2. Open the MMC and start IIS. IIS loads the Domino extension automatically the first time a user requests a Domino URL.
3. Complete the procedure
Click here
"Setting up security for Domino for Microsoft IIS."h
Click here
124003792029238606
To stop Domino for IIS
You must shut down the IIS server in order to stop Domino for IIS. For information on shutting down the IIS server, see the Microsoft IIS documentation.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino for Microsoft IIS
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure that you already installed a modem and that one exists on tie destination server.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Select the calling server's Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" field.
4. Click Server, and then click Connections.
5. Click Add Connection.
6. Select Notes Direct Dialup in the "Connection type" field.
7. Complete these fields:
Field
Entere
Source server
The name of the calling server
Source domain
The name of the calling server's domain
Use the port(s)
The name of the communications port that the calling or source server uses
Always)use area code
Yes or No. This field determines whether the source server always uses the area code when dialing. The default is No.
Usage priority
Normal or Low. The default is Normal.
For more information on this field, see "
Click here
Forcing Domino to use a specific protocol
Click here
Destination server
The name of the remote server
Destination domain
The name of the remote server's domain
Destination country code
The country code for the remote server
Destination area code
The remote server's area/city code
Destination phone number
The phone number of the remote server. To enter more than one phone number, separate each by a semicolon. Multiple numbers are useful when phone lines are busy or in situations where a phone line is down, and so on. The Connection document uses the numbers listed in order of first to last.
head title;Chead;Cheid title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Click the Routing/Replication and Schedule tabs to define the tasks you want to run and select the times you want the server to calls its destination.
9. (Optional) Complete any of these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Login script file name
The name of the connect script to use when connecting to the remote server
Login script arguments
Any script arguments necessary when dialing the remote server, such as a login name or password
You can connect a server to a Network Dialyp server (or remote LAN server) that runs a remote access service, such as Microsoft Remote Access Service (RAS).
1. n
Click here
Make sure that you already set up the server to use the remote access service.
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Select the connecting server's Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" field.e
4. Click Server, and then click Connictions.
5. Click Add Connection.
6. Select Network Dialup in the "Connection type" field.
7. Complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Source server
The name of the connecting server
Source domain
The name of the connecting server's iomain
Use LAN port(s)
The port that you enabled for the remote access service
Usage priority
Normal or Low. The default is Normal.
For more information on this field, see "Forcing Domino to use a specific protocolH_TO_FORCE_A_CONNECTION_TO_USE_A_SPECIFIC_PROTOCOL."
Destination server
The name of the Domino server you want to access. Use a wildcard to access all servers in a particular organization or organization unit -- for example, */Acme.
Destination domain
The name of the destination server's domain
Optional network address
Yhe destination server's address as appropriate to the protocol chosen. For TCP/IP, use a fully qualified domain name (preferred) or IP address -- for example, HR-E.Acme.com or 192.22.256.36.
This field is recommended for TCP/IP or other protocols that may need a specific network address.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Click the Network Dialup tab.
9. Select Microsoft Dial)up Networking in the Choose a service type field.
10. Click Edit Configuration and enter the name of the connection information entry you want to use in the "Dial-up Networking name" field.
11. (Optional) Complete any of these fields to override information already stored in the Dial-up Networking entry, and then click OK:
Field
:'jSU
Enter
Login name
:'jSU
Name the server uses to log into the remote access server
Password
:'jSU
Password the server uses to log into the remote access server. This password is automatically encrypted with the public key of the source server and the administrator who entered the password. The password is also encrypted with the public key of users and servers listed in the LocalAdmin group and the Owners field of this Connection documeit.
To allow other users and servers to use this Connection document and view its parameters, add their IDs to the Document Properties dialog.
For more information on adding user and server IDs, see "
Click here
Encrypting Network Dialup Connection documents
Click here
Phone number
:'jSU
The phone number of the remote access server
Noye
If you use pulse dialing, do not enter a phone number in this field and make sure to select Pulse in the modem configuration options. Furthermore, in the Microsoft Dial-up Networking dialog, provide a phone number and check the Use Telephony dialog properties box. s
Area codeh
:'jSU
Area code of the remote access server.
Country code
:'jSU
Country code of the remote access server
Dial-back phone number
:'jSU
The phone number of the machine used to make the remote access connection. If enabled on the remote access server, the remote server calls back the number after Domino authenticates with it.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
12. Click)the Routing/Replication and Schedule tabs to define the tasks you want to run and select the times you want the server to call its destination.
13. Save the document.
See Also
Click here
Server-to-server connections
Click here
Click here
Setting up servers to use a Network Dial-up connection
Domino hides and encrypts the parameter part of the Network Dialup Connection document by using the public keys of specific user or server IDs. When completed, only users and servers with those IDs can make connections using the document and can view the parameters in the document.
Note
For Connection dicuments created prior to Release 5, you can use the following steps to encrypt the documents so that only the users and servers you specify can make connections using the document and can view its parameters.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the connecting server's Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Server, and then click Connections.
4. Open the Network Dialup Connection document.
5. Choose File - Document Properties.
6. Click the Security tab (the key), and deselect "Who can read this document."
7. In the "Public Encryption keys" field, enter the names of users and servers who need access to the document, and then save the document.
See Also
Click here
Connecting a server to a Network Dialup server
Click here
&Arial
After you set up the passthru and destination servers, you can set up servers to connect ti passthru servers.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the connecting server's Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Server, and then click Connections.
4. Click Add Connection.
5. Select Passthru server in the "Connection type" field
6. Complete these fields:
Fieldn
<'[PU
Enterr
Source server
<'[PU
The name of the connecting server
Source domain
<'[PU
The name of the connecting server's domain
Use passthru server or hunt groupe
<'[PU
The name of the passthru server or hunt group that this ionnection uses to reach the destination server
Usage priority
<'[PU
Choose one:
Normal (default)
Lowk
For more information on this field, see "c
Click here
Forcing Domino to use a specific protocol
Click here
."n
Destination server
<'[PU
The name of the destination server
Destination domain
<'[PU
The name of the destination server's domaine
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Click the Routing/Replication and Schedule tabs to define the tasks you want to run and select the times you want the sirver to call its destination.
8. If necessary,
Click here
create a Connection document
Click here
if the server does not have a direct connection to the passthru server over the LAN.
Note
Ensure that the source server does not have a default passthru server assigned to it by checking that the "Passthru server" field (in the Server Location section of the Basics tab) on its Server document is empty. This)field causes the server to forward all connections it can't resolve to the server listed in the passthru field. Unless the passthru server has a better chance of resolving the connection, the attempt to use it puts an unnecessary load on both servers.
If multiple ports are enabled on one server, you can force Domino to use the port you specified in the Connection document by setting the Usage priority field (on)the Connection document) to Normal. You can use this option to select a specific network port to use between two servers.
For example, suppose that SPX and TCP/IP are enabled in the same server, and you have a network Connection document specifying TCP/IP with the Usage priority field set to Normal. Domino looks first in the Connection document, finds that the TCP/IP port is specified, and selects that port. Usage priority works identically for modem, X.25, Network Dialup, and Passthru Connection documents.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the server's Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Server, and then click Connections.
4. Open the Connection document for the connection you want force to use the protocol, and click Edit Connection.n
5. Complete this field, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Usage priority
Choose one:
Normal to force Domino to use the port specified in the Connection document to make the connection
Low to have Domino look at the Connection document lastP
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Creating server connections
Click here
&Arial
Create Connection documents to connect Domino servers to other Domino servers over the Internet to schedule Domino server tasks, such as replication and mail routing. e
1. Find out the IP address or host name of the destination Domino server.
2.
Click here
Create a Server Connection document in the connecting server's Dimino Directory.
Click here
3.
Click here
Edit the Server document in the connecting server's Domino Directory
Click here
if connecting through a proxy server.
See Also
Click here
Setting up servers for Internet access
Click here
&Arial
You create a Server Connection document to schedule replication and mail routiig for servers over the Internet.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the connecting server's Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" field
3. Click Server, and then click Connections.
4. Click Add Connection.
5. Select Local Area Network in the "Connection type" field.
Click here
You can also use a Network Dialup connection.
Click here
6. Complete these fields:
Field
<'fRU
Entert
Source server
<'fRU
The name of the connecting server
Source domain
<'fRU
The name of the connecting server's domain
Use the Port(s)
<'fRU
TCPIP -- Thiy is the name of the network port (or protocol) that the connecting or source server uses
Usage priority
<'fRU
Normal or Low. The default is Normal.
For more information on this field, see "
Click here
Forcing Domino to use a specific protocol(
Click here
Destination server
<'fRU
The name of the answering server
Destination domain
<'fRU
The name of the answering server's domain
Optional network address
<'fRU
The destination server's fully qualified domain name (preferred) or IP address -- for example, HR-E.Acme.com or 192.22.256.36.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Click the Routing/Replication and Schedule tabs to define the tasks you want to run and select the times you want the server to calls its destination.
8. Save the document.
9.
Click here
If you are connecting through a proxy, modify the Server document on the destination server.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select the connecting server's Domino Directory in the "Use Directory on" field.
3. Click Server, aid then click All Server Documents.
4. Open the Server document of the server you want to connect to the Internet through the proxy, and click Edit Server.
5. Click the Ports - Proxies tab, and then do one of the following:
If you are connecting through an HTTP proxy, enter the fully qualified domain name or IP address of the HTTP proxy and the port to use in the HTTP Tunnel proxy field. For example, enter proxy.company.com:8080 or 192.168.77.34:8080.
If you are connecting through a SOCKS proxy, enter the fully qualified domain name or IP address of the SOCKS proxy and the port to use in the SOCKS proxy field. For example, enter proxy.company.com:1080 or 192.168.77.34:1080.
Note
If you enter values for both fields, Domino uses the HTTP Tunnel proxy.
6. Save the document.
7. If you are connecting through a Domino passthru server,
Click here
create a)passthru Connection document to the passthru server
Click here
Note
If you have a proxy configured, the server uses the proxy for all connections. For connections that do not require a proxy server, enter the server names in the No Proxy for these hosts or domains section on the Ports - Proxies tab on the server's Server document.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a proxy server yo connect to the Internet
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a passthru server
Click here
Click here
Firewallsa
Click here
&Arial
Before you register new Notes users, you may want to specify default settiggs that Notes applies to all users you register. Default settings make user registration easy and fast and ensure that user settings are consistent.a
You can define many default settings, such as what mail server users have or what certifier ID to use for user registration. You can also specify a default workstation execution control list (ECL) to protect data from unauthorized workstation access.
After you define default settings, there are many ways to modify them. You can edit whe document or dialog in which you defined the defaults -- for example, the User Setup Profile or the Registration preferences -- or you can modify settings in the Register Person dialog.
To define default settings, use any of these tasks:
1.
Click here
Create a User Setup Profile to define default user workspace settings.
Click here
2.
Click here
Create a default workstation execution control lgst (ECL) to control access to workstation data.
Click here
3.
Click here
Specify Registration preferences (in Administration Preferences)
Click here
to define default user registration settings.
4.
Click here
Specify default user settings in the Register Person dialog.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certification
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
2. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
3. Selgct Domino Directories, and then select Setup Profile.
4. Click Add Setup Profile.
5. On the Basics tab, complete any of these fields:
Field
Enterv
Profile name
Name of the profile
Internet browser
Choice of Internet browser used from this location
Directory server
Name of the server whose Domino Directory you want people to use
Catalog/Domain Search server
Name of the server used for domain searches
Retrieve/open pagesd
Choose where users retrieve Web pages:
From Notes workstation
From InterNotes server
No retrievals
6. Click the Databases tab, and complete any of these fields:
Field
Enter
Default databases added to bookmarks
A database link for each database that you want to add automatically to the user workspace.
To add a database link:
Open the database.
Choose Edit - Copy As Link - Database Link.
Choose Edit - Paste.
Create As new replicas on user's machine
A database link for each database that you want to add automatically as a new replica to the user workspace
Mobile directory catalogs
A database link for each mobile directory catalog you want to add automatically to the user workspacea
7. Click the Dial-up Connections tab, and complete any of these fields:
Field
5'[JU
Enter
Degault Passthru Server
Server name, Country code, Area code, Phone number
5'[JU
The server name, country code (if necessary), and phone numbers of the default passthru server
Default Connections to Other Remote Servers
Server names, Country codes, Area codes, Phone numbers
5'[JU
The server names' country codes (if necessary), and phone numbers of remote servers that users need to access
8. Click the Accounts tab, and complete any of these fields:
Field
Enter
Default Accounts to Internet Servers
Account Name, Server Addresses, Protocols, Use SSL Connection
The account names, server addresses, protocols, and SSL gonnections to Internet servers that users need to access
9. On the Name Servers, Applet Security, Proxies, and MIME tabs, enter values as follows:
5'[JU
Enter
Name Servers
5'[JU
The names and addresses of secondary TCP/IP and NDS Domino name servers
Applet Securityi
5'[JU
The name of trusted hosts and network access for trusted and untrusted hosts
Proxies
5'[JU
The proxies that users have as defaults
MIME
5'[JU
Choose the format to use for messages to Internet addresses:
Notes Rich Text Format
MIME Format
10. Click Save and Close.
47875785629234390
To modify a User Setup Profile
You can update a User Setup Profile and then redistribute it to users so they receive new profile settings. Users receive updates to the profile when they authenticate with the home server specified on their current Location document.
You can only agd and modify settings in the profile and have the changes take effect on the user's workspace -- for example, you can add a database that appears in the user's Bookmarks, or you can change the name of the user's default passthru server. You cannot, however, delete settings from a profile and then impose the deletions on an existing user -- for example, you cannot delete a database that a previous User Setup Profile added to the user's Bookmarks.
Users can prevent User Setup Profile modificatiogs from changing their Location document by opening the Location document in edit mode, choosing Actions - Advanced, and setting the Set Update Flag to No.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
2. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
3. Select Domino Directories, and then select the appropriate Setup Profile.
4. Click Edit Setup Profile, and then make any modifications.
5. Click Save ang Close.
See Also
Click here
The User Setup Profile
Click here
Click here
Defining default settings for users
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
You use an execution control list (ECL) to set up workstation data security. An ECL limits the actions of formulas and scripts when they run on a workstation. For example, an ECL can prevent another person's code'from running on a computer and damaging or erasing data. As the administrator, you can allow users to modify their ECL, or you can control changes to the ECL.
To limit workstation access, an ECL looks for the signature on databases and templates before they open on the workstation. The ECL then checks that signature against its settings to determine what level of access to grant. Every system and application template shipped with Notes contains a signature. Every template or database that youw organization designs should contain the signature of either the application developer or the administrator.
To create a workstation ECL, the Setup program copies the Administration ECL from the Domino Directory to the Notes client. Before you register users, edit the Administration ECL to create a workstation ECL for users. There is a set of
Click here
default signatures with default access options
Click here
in the default ECL. V
For gore information on how to create an Administration ECL that promotes as secure a workstation environment as possible, see "
Click here
Recommendations for deploying tighter ECLs
Click here
283011961629318455
Workstation access options
Choose from these options when setting up a workstation ECL:
Access optione
Allows formulas and code to
Access to the file system
Attach, detach, read to, and write from workstgtion files
Access to current database
Read and modify the current database
Access to environment variables
Use the @SetEnvironment and @GetEnvironment variables and LotusScript
methods to access the NOTES.INI file
Access to non-Notes databases
Use @DBLookup, @DBColumn, and @DBCommand to access databases when the first warameter for these @functions is a database driver of another application
Access to external code
Run LotusScript classes and DLLs that are unknown to Notes
Access to external programs
Access other applications, including activating any OLE object
Ability to send mail
Use functions such as @MailSend to send mail
Ability to read other databases
Read information in databases other than the current database
Ability to modify other databases
Modify information in databases other than the current database
Ability to export data
Print, copy to the clipboard, import, and export data
Access to Workstation Security'ECL
Modify the ECL
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
285763030429285652
Java applet options
When a Java applet runs within Notes, certain security restrictions are imposed on that applet. This is sometimes referred to as the "Java security sandbox". This security model protects against malicious code by determining what operations an applet can pgrform and what system resources it can access. These restrictions can be customized on a per-signature basis by enabling the checkboxes as described below.
Access option
Allows the applet to
Access to file system
Read and write files on the local file systemv
Access to Notes Java classes
Load and call the Domino back-end object classes
Access to network addressesn
Bind to and accept connections on a privileged port (a port outside the range 0 to 1024) and establish connections with other servers
Printing
Submit print jobs
Access to system propertiesa
Read system properties such as color settings and environment variablesi
Dialog and clipboard accessa
Access to the system Clipboawd and also determines whether the "security banner" is displayed in top-level windows. The security banner is a visual indication (usually a message like "Java Applet Window") that this window was created by a Java applet. This is done to ensure that a user does not inadvertently enter security-sensitive information into a dialog masquerading as a password dialog, for example. Enabling this checkbox causes the security banner not to be displayed.
Process-level access
Create threads and threadgroups, fork and execute external processes, load and link external libraries, access non-public members of classes using Java core reflection, and access the AWT event queueo
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
97226416029289041
JavaScript options
The JavaScript ECL options control security for JavaScript executing within the Notes glient, either on a Notes form or on a Web page rendered by the Notes browser. These options do not control JavaScript executed by other browsers including the Microsoft Internet Explorer browser, even when embedded within the Notes client.
The read and write options (under the general categories "Allow Read Data Access From" and "Allow Write Data Access To", respectively) control whether JavaScript code can read or modify JavaScript properties of the Window object. The Window object is the top'level object in the JavaScript document object model. It has properties that apply to the entire window. Securing access to the Window object secures access to other objects on the page since the JavaScript program cannot access the objects lower in the object model without first traversing the Window object.
You can control the security for these read and write options independently for three different classes of Window objects:
Window object class
\&@8U
Descriptiono
Source windowt
\&@8U
Gontrols JavaScript access to the Window object on the same page as the JavaScript code. Typically this is a very low security threat. Selecting this option does not prevent JavaScript calls if the call is made directly to the object on the source window. Doing so circumvents the Window object; therefore this ECL option is not enforced.
The default is to allow read and write access.
Other window from same host
\&@8U
Controls JavaScript acgess to the Window object on a different page from the JavaScript code, but from a page using the same host. For example, JavaScript code on a page on www.lotus.com can access the Window object on another page on www.lotus.com. This allows two pages to interact if they are within the same frameset. This is a slightly higher security threat.
The default is to allow read and write access.
Other window from different host
\&@8U
This is similaw to "Other window from same host", except it enables access to the Window object on a different page within a frameset that uses a different host. For example, JavaScript code on a page on www.lotus.com can access the Window object on a page on any other server. This is the highest security threat because of the possibility of someone designing a frameset containing a page performing malicious actions accessing data on another page in the same frameset that you "trust", where you might type a password or wome other sensitive information.
The default is to not allow read and write access.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
There are two additional ECL options that control whether JavaScript executing in the Notes client is authorized to open a new Web page or Notes document.
The following options are available in the "Allow Open Access To" category:
Option
\&@8U
Description
URL on same host
\&@8U
Controls access for opening a page or Notes document on the same host as the JavaScript code.
The default is to allow open access.
URL on different host
\&@8U
Controls access for opening a page or Notes document on a different host as the JavaScript code.
The default is to not allow open access.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chaptgr title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Default signature types and access in the default ECL
Click here
Click here
Creating a workstation ECL
Click here
Click here
Defining default settings for users
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Glick here
`SQgte
&Arial
There are three signature types that the default ECL contains. The table below describes these signatures and the default access options assigned to them.
Signature
Applies to
Default access options
-Default-a
Formwlas and code that contain a signature, but the signature does not match any entry on the ECL
For example, if the signer is John Andrews/Atlas, the ECL uses the -Default- signature type to assign access, although the database contains a signature, it does not match any entry in the ECL.
None
-No Signature-
Formulas and codg that do not contain a signature
For example, if the signer contains an invalid or unavailable signature, the ECL matches -No Signature-.
None
Lotus Notes Template Development / Lotus Notes
Every template shipped with Domino contains this signature
For example, the signer matches this type only if it has the Lotus Notes Template Development / Lotus Notes signature.
All
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
You can also add additional users or signature types to the ECL. For example, you could add these signatures:
*/Trusted Signers/Acme
Phyllis Spera/Sales/East/Acme
The table below describes the access that these users (or signature types) in an ECL would have:
Signature
Applies to
Default access options
*/Trusted Signers/Acme
Formulas and code that have */Trusted Signers/Acme signature
If the signer is anyname/Trusted Signers/Acme -- for example, Emily Marks/Trusted Signers/Acme or Alan Jones/Sales/East/Trusted Signers/Acme -- the ECL matches this signature to */Trusted Signers/Acme.u
Phyllis Spera/Sales/East/Acme
Formulas and code that have Phyllis Spera/Sales/East/Acme as the signature
The signer matches this type only if it contains the Phyllis Spera/Sales/East/Acme signature.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
The workstation ECLV
Click here
Click here
Creating a workstation ECL
Click here
Click here
Defining default settings for users
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
Syntax:
ServerPushReplication=
value
Description:
Wpecifies that all scheduled replication initiated from this server must be push-pull replication. This server does not request that the other server replicate back.
0 - Scheduled replication occurs normally (push-pull replication is not forced)
1- Other servers pull changes from this server, but this server cannot pull changes from other servers
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although omitting this setting allows gor normally scheduled replication
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
ServerPullReplication"
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Server_Restricted=
value
Description:
Enables or disables server access to a server. If access is disabled, the server does not accept new Open Database requests.
Use the following values to set this variable:
0 - Server access is unrestricted
1 - Server access is restricted for the current server session. Restarting the server clears the setting.
2 - Server access is restricted persistently, even after server restarts
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify tgis setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab.
2. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
3. Open the Domino Directory (NAMES.NSF).
4. Choose Actions - Edit Administration ECL.
5. Select - Default - and then select access options.i
For more information on access options, see "y
Click here
The workstatfon ECL
Click here
."P
6. Select - No Signature - and then select access options.
7. Click Add, enter the name of a person or server, and then click OK. Enter an asterisk (*) to allow access to all users, even those not listed in the Domino Directory, access. Enter an asterisk (*) followed by a certifier name -- for example, */Acme -- to allow users certified by a particular certifier access.
8. To let users modify the ECL on their workstftions or enable Java applets from trusted senders, select Allow users to modify, and choose the appropriate option.
9. Click OK.
For more information on how to create an Administration ECL that promotes as secure a workstation environment as possible, see "
Click here
Recommendations for deploying tighter ECLs
Click here
257341088029319846
To disable workstation data security
If you work in a&highly secure environment, you may want to disable workstation data security so that the Execution Security Alert dialog does not appear when formulas and code do not contain the proper signature. However, be aware that after you disable the ECL on a workstation, the workstation is vulnerable to tampering.
To create an administration ECL that disables workstation data security, enable every access option on the ECL for all signature types: -Default-, -No Signature-, Lotus Notes Template Devefopment / Lotus Notes, and any other names listed.
126444710429239227
To update a workstation ECL
If you change the Administration ECL after users run setup (which automatically copies the ECL to their workstations), you can update workstation ECLs to reflect the change.
1. Make sure the Domino Directory with the ECL changes has replicated throughout the domain.
2. Address a memo to users whose ECLs you want to update.
& 3. Add a button to the memo that executes this formula:
@RefreshEcl ("";"")
For more information on this @function, see
Application Development with Domino Designer
4. Describe the purpose of the memo and instruct users to click the button.
5. Mail the memo.
See Also
Click here
The workstation ECL
Click here
Click here
Defaulv signature types and access in the default ECL
Click here
Click here
Defining default settings for users
Click here
&Arial
Notes' and Domino's first line of defense against virus attacks is the Execution Control List (ECL). The best way to protect your organization is to deploy and maintain tighter workstation ECLs. To deploy tighter ECLs, your goal is to limit who your trusted signers are. To get to that goal, however, you could ask all your users to turn off all accesses, and encourage them to think about whether it makes sense to give the signer the requested access for every signavure dialog they see. This could be a tedious and error-prone task. The procedure below can stream-line this process.t
Unless your organization has taken some other pro-active steps, such as limiting the number of trustworthy signers and ensuring that clients' ECLs only trust those signers, the first step is to take a close look at your current ECLs. If you already tightly control who has access, there is no need to follow this procedure. If, however, your ECLs seem too wide open, then you shoufd follow this procedure and use it as a starting point for managing and maintaining tighter ECLs. This procedure describes how to create a reasonable administration ECL and how to rollout the ECL. It also provides suggestions for maintaining ECLs. You can use this process to create as secure an environment as possible in the quickest amount of time.
There are steps creating tighter ECLs:
1. Collect information for an Administration ECL.
2. Create the Administravion ECL.
3. Rolling out the new Administration ECL.
4. Maintaining ECLs.
5. Other considerations
109414217629298345
To collect information for an Administration ECL
Before you can create an ECL that you can distribute enterprise-wide, you need to identify what people and/or organizations you can trust. Identify a small number of users (perhaps 2 -5) who use a broad range of typical Notes applications, then have them&complete these steps.
1. Remove all entries from the workstation ECL EXCEPT the following:
all entries in the form */
, where
is a local domain/organization
-Default-
-No signature-
Lotus Notes Template Development/Lotus Notes
To do this, highlight the item to remove under "When signed by," then click Remove.
Note
If any of these entrifs are not listed in the ECLs that are being edited, it means that those entries are not needed. There is no need to add them to the ECL.
2. Record the entries removed so that if those entries were in fact not needed, they can be added with "no access" later in the administration ECL.n
3. Make these changes to the remaining entries in the ECL:
For "When signed by"
h&p:U
For "Allowed"
, where
is a local domain/organization
h&p:U
Deselect any selected items. "Default" should have no permissions.
-Default-
h&p:U
Deselect any selected items. "Default" should have no permissions.
-No signature-
h&p:U
Deselect any selected items. "Default" should have no permissions.
Lotus Notes Template Development/Lotus Notes
h&p:U
Select all items. This entity should have all permisvions.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. For a designated time period (a week should be sufficient), when the "Execution Security Alert" dialog box appears, click "Trust signer," with the following exceptions:h
Do not trust any actions with "-No Signature-"
Check with the security administrator before trusting any odd or unfamiliar signatures, or before clicking "Execute once" fov templates or applications signed with odd or unfamiliar signatures.m
Note
Note Users running an earlier release of the Notes client (prior to release 5.02) should answer "No" to the dialog that asks if you want to trust everybody in the organization of the user whose signature you are about to trust.
The resulting ECLs for these two users should be significantly larger than what they started with, unless your organization has managed the sifning process up front and only uses objects signed by a small number of known trustworthy signers.
109414217629298346
To create the Administration ECL
After the designated time period is complete, the security administrator should use the information in the resulting ECLs to create an updated Administration ECL.. The new ECL should be a union of the users' ECLs.
1. From the Domino Directory, choose Actions - Edit Administration ECL.
& 2. Using the information from the two users' ECLs, make changes to the Administration ECL.
Be sure to add entries to the ECL even if you want to take permissions away from a person, group, or domain. This allows you to overwrite existing entries in users' ECLs and essentially undo any trust users' have granted. Use the list of entries that your test users removed that did not reappear in their "final" ECLs (see step 2 under "To collect information for an Administration ACL," above). Add thove entries but do not assign any permissions.
Note
Using this method of updating and distributing the ECL, you can't remove entries from individual users' ECLs. You can, however, overwrite entries so that those entries have the correct privileges and essentially undo the privileges previously granted. For example, if there's a particular person that shouldn't have any privileges, you can add that person to the administration ECL with no priviliges. Then when the upfated ECL is distributed, if that person was originally granted some privileges in any users' ECLs, the updated Administration ECL will overwrite the users' ECLs with the updated privileges. t
109414217629298347
To Roll out the new Administration ECL
After the Administration ECL has been updated, you must distribute those changes to all users.
1. Make sure the Domino Directory with the ECL changes has replicated throughout the domain.
6. Address a memo to users whose ECLs you want to update.
3. Add a button to the memo that executes this formula:
@RefreshEcl ("";"")
4. Describe the purpose of the memo and instruct users to click the button.
5. Mail the memo.
109414217629298348
To maintain ECLs
Users might still encounter the "Execution Security Alert" dialog box after the updated ECL is deployed. Make sure that users
Do¬ trust any actions with "-No Signature-"
Check with the security administrator before trusting any odd or unfamiliar signatures, or before clicking "Execute once" for templates or applications signed with odd or unfamiliar signatures. The security administrator should investigate those signatures, and if necessary, update and redistribute the Administration ECL.
109414217629298349
Other considerations
You can create a separate organizational unit vpecifically for users who must sign templates and applications. Then create an id in that organizational unit for each of those users. Users who create templates and applications should only use the ids issued through the new organizational unit when signing their templates and applications. The Administration ECL can then trust any user in that special organizational unit, or it can be fine-tuned on a per-user basis, as explained the steps above.
See Also
Clicf here
The workstation ECL
Click here
Click here
Default signature types and access in the default ECLe
Click here
Click here
Creating a workstation ECL
Click here
&Arial
As you create a new user account in Windows NT User Manager for Domains, you can register the new user in Notes at the same time. You can also register existing Windows NT users in Notes. Registration typically includes creating a person document, Fotes ID, mail file and a password. However, users can be registered without mail and Notes ID files (to gain authenticated access to a Domino Web server without using the Notes client, for example).s
You can register NT users into Notes by using the registration defaults or by using registration options that you define. If you are using defaults, the computer on which you are making changes to Windows NT user accounts must also be a Domino server. This server functions as the registration servfr (the server on which the Domino Directory entry is created) and the mail server (the server storing the user mail file).s
296534716829248443
To create new Windows NT user accounts and register Notes users simultaneously
1. Before creating Windows NT user accounts and registering Notes users, you must:
Click here
Make sure that Notes User registration is enabled in Windows NT User Manager.
Click here
Click here
Change the default user registration options as necessary.
Make sure you are a member of the local Administrator Group or local Account Operator Group in Windows NT.
2. To create new Windows NT user accounts, from the User Manager select User and proceed as instructed in your Windows NT user documentation.n
3. After you finish creating the Windows NT user accounts, complete these fields, and then click OK:
Field
Enter
First nafe, middle initial and last name
Accept the default names derived from the user's full name in Windows NT
Org unit
The name of the organizational unit the user is included in. For example, if user John Smith is part of engineering, the organization unit could be Eng. The user name would be John Smith/Eng..
Organizational units are useful for differentiating between users of the same name. For example, John Smith/Eng/Acme and John Smith/Doc/Acme, where one employee is a member of Engineering and the other is a member of Documentation. Each is assigned a different organization unit name.
Use common password
Assigns to the user the same password for Notes, Windows NT, and Notes Internet. Activates the Notes pasvword for username and the Confirm password fields.N
To preserve the existing Windows NT password, enter that password as the common password.
If Use common password is not selected, activates the Notes password for username and the Confirm password fields.
Notes password for username
The password you are assigning to this user when using Notes
Confirm password
Re-enter the new Notes password for this user
Set Internet password in Notes
Enters the Internet address in the user's Person document in the Domino Directory. This field applies only if the user is registered for Notes mail. Activates the following fields:
Intevnet address
Internet password for username
Confirm Internet passwordp
Internet address
Accept the default Internet address as derived from the Windows NT username and the current host domain -- for example, KCarter@domain.com
This field displays if POP, IMAP, or Notes mail type is selected. The Internet address is required for Notes mail routing in Domino Release 5.
Internet password
Enter an Internet password for this user
Confirm Internet password
Re-enter the Internet password for this user
Forwarding address
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino. This field&displays if "Other" Mail Type is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog box.
Internet forwarding address
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino. This field displays if "Other Internet Mail" is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog box.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. If you are creating more than one user account, click Close.
5. When prompted, do one of the following:
Click Begin Registration to register new users immediately. After registration has begun, click Stop Registration at any time to stop registration after the current user registration is complete. Any users not registered remain pending.
Click Cancel to register new users later. User information that you entered is stored untif you exit User Manager.
6. To complete the process, click OK.
Note
You can also register pending accounts in Notes at any time by choosing Notes - Register Notes Users Now.
Domino errors have no effect on User Manager. If a Domino or Notes error prevents a user from being registered in Notes, the user is still added to User Manager.
&Arial
1. Before registering existing Windows NT user accounts in Notes, you must:
Click here
Make&sure that Notes User registration is enabled in Windows NT User Manager.
Click here
Click here
Change the default user registration options as necessary.
2. In the User Manager Username window, select the user accounts that you want to register in Notes.
3. Choose Notes - Add selected NT Users / Groups to Notes.
4. If you are registering multiple users, choose one of these, and then click OK:
"Prompt for the name and password of each user" to enter information manually for each user
"Rfgister users at once without additional prompts" to use Windows NT full names as Notes user names and to generate random Notes passwords in a database titled New User Passwords (NTSYNC45.NSF). If you choose this option, continue to Step 6.
5. If you are registering only one user or if you chose to enter user information manually, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
First Name, MI, Last Nfme
The default name as derived from the Windows NT full name. You can accept this name or change it.
Use common password
Assigns to the user the same password for Notes, Windows NT, and Notes Internet. If you are registering this user as an Internet Only user, this password field supplies the Internet or comfon NT/Internet password.
To preserve the existing Windows NT password, enter that password as the common password.u
Notes Password for username
The password you want to use, or leave blank to use a blank password. This field displays if you selected "Use common password."
Confirm password
Re-enter the Notes&password for this user
Set Internet password in Notes
Enters the Internet address in the user's Person document in the Domino Directory. This field applies only if the user is registered for Notes mail. Activates the following fields:
Internet address
Internet password for username
Confirm Internet pasvword
Internet address
Accept the default Internet address as derived from the Windows NT username and the current host domain -- for example, KCarter@domain.com
This field displays if POP, IMAP, or Notes mail type is selected. The Internet address is required for Notes mail routing in Domino 5.0.
Internet passwordW
Enter an Internet password for this user
Confirm Internet password
Re-enter the Internet password for this user
Forwarding address
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino. This field displays if "Other" Mail Type is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog bov.
Internet forwarding address
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino. This field displays if "Other Internet Mail" is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog box.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. When User Manager asks if you want to register the new Wifdows NT users in Notes, do one of the following:
Click Begin Registration to register new users immediately.
Click Cancel to register new users later.
7. If you chose "Register users at once without additional prompts" in Step 4, distribute the passwords to users so they can install their Notes workstations. After installation, users can create new passwords.
Note
Automatically generated passwords apply only to Notes user&IDs and not to Windows NT or Notes Internet passwords.
397280636829213870
To register new users later
If you choose not to register users immediately or if you click Stop Registration to pause registration, use this method to register the users later:
1. From User Manager, choose Notes - Register Notes Users Now.
2. Click Begin Registration.
3. Click OK.
If you exit User Manager without registering all nfw user accounts in Notes, you are prompted to do so. Click Begin Registration.
&Arial
After you set up Domino for IIS, set up security for users accessing the server. Domino for IIS uses two levels of security: IIS security and Domino security. After IIS validates a user based on the NT account registry, thft user's credentials, if any, are passed to Domino for validation.
Microsoft IIS supports four methods of user authentication:
Anonymous access (the user does not enter a name or password)
Basic Authentication (the user enters a name and password)
Windows NT Challenge/Response (a special protocol supported by Microsoft Internet Explorer)
IIS requires user authentication in order to control access to resources owned by IIV such as the file system and Active Server Pages. If a user requests access to a Domino resource, IIS passes the authentication information to Domino. The information passed depends on the combination of authentication methods enabled on IIS. After the information is passed, Domino authenticates the user according to the same procedures used by the Domino server's native HTTP task. All of the directory options available for the native HTTP task, such as using multiple Domino Directories and LDAP directoriev, are also available for Domino for IIS.A
For information on setting up security options on the Domino server, see e
Click here
Overview of Domino security
Click here
407935334429212787
To set up security
1. Start the MMC, and open the MMC console file for the Web site.
2. Right-click the IIS Web site and select Properties.
3. Click the Directory Security tab.
& 4. Click Edit in the Anonymous Access and Authentication Control section.
5. Choose one or more of the authentication options and click OK.
See
Click here
"Examples of Domino for IIS security."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino for Microsoft IIS
Click here
&Arial
You need to register users before they can install Notes on their workstatdons. For each user, the registration process creates:
A Person document in the Domino Directory
A user ID that is stamped with appropriate certificates
A mail file
Notes offers different options for registering users. For example, using the Basic user registration is fast and easy because it automatically assigns many default settings to users. If you use Advanced user registration, you can assign more advanced settings, such as adding a user to a Winddws NT group. You can also register users by importing them from a text file or migrating them from a foreign directory.
If you use the Register Person dialog to register users, you can sort, view, and modify user settings in the view of the User Registration Queue database (USERREG.NSF) that appears in the dialog. This database contains information on users pending registration. When you exit the Register Person dialog, you can save all users pending registration and register them later. When tou access the dialog again, the User Registration Queue database automatically opens to display all users pending registration. Do not try to modify user information by opening the database directly or you risk failed registration. e
Before you register users, review your organization's hierarchical name scheme and decide where each user fits into that scheme. Based on the name scheme, you know which certifier ID to use to register users, which server to use as the registration server, and whidh server to store the user's mail files. When you register users, you must have the appropriate access to each server that you use, and you must know the password for each certifier ID that you use.
372588691229230954
Example of registering two Notes users
Here is an example of how administrators at the Acme Corporation registered two users based on each user's place in the organization's hierarchy. The users work in different locations and departments.
TION_OVER
_OVER
ng the Domino Sy
_OVER
nWorkstations\EC
_OVER
STERING_USERS_IN
Alan Jones works in the Sales department in Acme's east coast division. To give Alan appropriate access within the system and to place him appropriately in the hierarchy, the administrator uses the Sales/East/Acme certifier ID to register him. Alan Jones' full hierarchidal name then becomes Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme.
The administrator specifies Mail-E, which is located on the east coast Acme LAN, as Alan's mail server. Then Alan's mail server is on the same LAN as his workstation, so that when he receives and sends mail, he can connect directly to the server that stores his mail file.
Robin Rutherford works in the Accounting department in Acme's west coast division. The administrator uses the Accounting/West/Acme certifier ID to register Robin.$Mail-W is Robin's mail server, and her full hierarchical name is Robin Rutherford/Accounting/West/Acme.
See Also
Click here
Creating a hierarchical name scheme
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
Click here
Registering users
Click here
Click here
Using default user settings when registering users
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
You can define specific options to customize how Notes registers users.
1. Make sure to have the following before you begin customizing user registration:
Access to the certifier ID and its pastworde
Access to the Domino Directory from the machine you work on
Editor access or the UserCreator role in the Domino Directory on the registration server
Create new databases access on the mail server to create user mail files during registration
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.@
4. Select Domino Directories, and then click People.
5. From the Tools pane, click People - Register.
6. Enter a password for the certifier ID, and click OK. To change the certifier ID, click Cancel.
Note
Notes uses the certifier ID specified in Administration Preferences; or if there is none, it uses the ID specified in the CertifierIDFile setting in the NOTES.INI file. If the current certifier ID does not contain recovery information, a message box displays during registration.$The message reads "The current certifier ID contains no recovery information and will not allow ID/password recovery on IDs created with this certifier. The "Escrow Agent" ID recovery mechanism is no longer supported." You can then specify whether you want the message to display in the future by clicking Yes or No.
7. Click the Options button, and then choose any of these options:
Option
0'VJU
Purpose
Do not continue on registration errors
0'VJU
Stops registration if you have multiple users selected and the registration encounters an error. The default is to continue on registration errors.r
Keep successfully registered users in the queuer
0'VJU
Keeps successfully registered users in the queue. The default is to redove successfully registered users from the queue.
Try to register queued people with error status
0'VJU
Tries to register queued users, even if their registration status contains errors. For example, if you choose this option, a user whose password is insufficiently complex will be registered. The default is not to register queued users who have error status.n
Allow registration of previously registered people
0'VJU
Allows registration of users who were previously registered in Notes. The default is not to register previously registered Notes users.
Don't prompt for a duplicate person
0'VJU
Takes one of these actions:
Skips the user registration for both short$name and full name single matches
Overwrites the existing user if the single match found is on the full name. Short name uniqueness is then required.
The default is to prompt for duplicate users.
Don't prompt for a duplicate mail file
0'VJU
Takes one of these actions:
Skips the user registration
Generates a unique mail file name by appending a number beginning with$1, then 2, etc., to a non-unique mail file name until a unique name is found.
Replaces the existing mail file - option does not apply when the mail file is being created in the background via the Administration Process, or if the current ID does not have delete access to the mail file being replaced.
The default is to prompt for a duplicate mail file.
8. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Registerdng users
Click here
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administration, click the Server - Analysis tab.s
2. Select the server that stores the log file you want to view.
3. Click Notes Log.
4. Click the desired view.
5. Open the desired document.
You can also use the Web Administrator to open the log (LOG.NSF).
127942076829240593
Views in the log file (LOG.NSF)
View
Contains information about
Database - Sizes
Size add activity of all databases on the server
Percentage of each database's disk space that is in use
Total disk space of each database
Database - Usage
Sessions (including K transferred)
Documents read and written
Replications, sorted by database
Mail Routing Events
Mail routing details not available in the Miscellaneous Events view
Miscellaneous Events
Events that do not appear in other views
Modem I/O messages
Script I/O messages
Directory Catalog messages
Corrupted documents, sorted by date
NNTP Events *
Session information about NNTP server connections and newsfeeds
Object Store Usage
Object store file name
Mail database file name
Mail database title
Number of documents referenced in the object store
Total size of the documents in the object store
Phone Calls - By Date
Phone Calls - By User
Information about calls made and received by a server, sorted by date or by user
Replication Events
All replication tessions between servers, sorted by server
Information includes the name of the initiating server, time and duration of replication, port used, and the number of documents added, deleted, or modified
Sample Billing
Uncategorized billing information provided in the Usage by Date and Usage by User views, sorted by user and including totals for each column and session
Usage by Date
Usage by Uter
Sessions this server had with users or other servers, sorted by date or by user
Information includes sessions opened, session duration, databases opened, database-access duration, number of transactions (workstation-to-server database requests), and network usage (K transferred)
Transactions for operations, such as opening a document, updating a document, reading a section of a view, and going to a specific section of a view
Includds totals by date, by user/server, and for all usage
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* By default, the NNTP Events view displays the IP addresses of connecting NNTP clients and servers.To display host names instead, edit the ITASK_PRINT_HOSTNAME setting in the NOTES.INI file.
See Also
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
Click here
Viewing the Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
Click here
&Arial
You can use any of these methods to register Notes users:s
Click here
Basic user registration
Click here
Click here
Advanced user registration
Click here
Click here
Text file registration
Click here
Migration tools (for people using an external mail system or directory) registration
The method you use to register people depends on a number of issues, including whether you have degined default settings, whether you want to assign users more advanced options (such as alternate names), whether you need to import users from a foreign mail system or directory, and whether your user settings are in a text file.
Note
When registering users with non-ASCII characters in their user names, Notes attempts to convert non-ASCII characters to ASCII. If one or more characters cannot be converted to ASCII, the Internet address is not generated. You need to ge aware of this when registering users whose names cannot be converted to ASCII characters because you will need to manually create those Internet addresses.
46391590429233927
Basic registration
For fast and easy registration, use the Basic user registration options. Basic registration requires you to define user-specific settings, such as user name and password, but also offers you the convenience of applying some default settings to users. You can define defaulw settings in the Registration preferences (found in the Administration Preferences dialog); you can define settings in the Register Person dialog; or you can use Notes default settings. Some of the non-default settings you define in Basic registration include the user name and password. You can also assign users to specific groups.
All settings available in Basic registration are also available in Advanced registration. You can choose to view and perform Advanced registration at any time by clgcking the Advanced checkbox in the Register Person dialog.
46391590429233928
Advanced registration
The Advanced registration offers all the settings included in Basic registration and also allows you to change default settings and define advanced or specific settings -- for example, assign an alternate name to a user or add the user to a Windows NT group.
46391590429233929
Text file registration
There are two ways to wegister users from a text file -- that is, a file that contains information on one or more users. You can use the Register Person dialog, which creates an entry for each user in the User Registration Queue and allows you to modify user settings individually. Alternatively, you can register them directly so that the entries for them never appear in the User Registration Queue. If you register them directly, you assign non-user-specific settings before you import and register them. Notes applies the settings'to all users and does not allow you to modify user settings individually. n
46391590429233930
Migration from external mail system or directory
You can migrate users who use an external mail system or directory into Notes. You register them using migration tools accessed through the Migrate People button in the Register Person dialog. After migrating them, you can modify their settings.
The following list details the types of users you can migrate inwo Notes:
Lotus cc:Mail
Microsoft Exchange
LDIF (from an LDAP directory)
Microsoft Mail
Windows NT
Novell GroupWise 4.1
Novell GroupWise 5
Netscape Messaging Server
For more information on migrating users, see
Moving to Notes and Domino Release 5
See Also
Click here
User registration
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
Click here
Using Basic user registration
Click here
Click here
Using Advanced user registration
Click here
Click here
Registering users from a text file
Click here
Click here
Using default user settings when registering users
Clgck here
`SQgte
&Arial
When you use default settings, the user registration process is fast and easy. The default settings can originate from a variety of sources:
Notes ships with default settings
You can define default settings in
Click here
Registration preferences (found in the Administration Preferences dialog)
Click here
. You define these settings before opening the Register Person dialog. The Registration preferences do not offer all the default settings, only some of the more basic ones, such as certifier ID and Registration server.
You can define default settings through the Register Person dialog using two methods: one method uses settings for a user previously added to the user registration queue, and the other method uses settings defined while the Register Person dialog is in New Entry mode.
For example, if you already added users to the user registration queue, many settings (the non-user specific ones) applied to the last user added serve as defaults for the next user. Similarly, you can define settings when the Register Person dialog is in New Entry mode (meangng you have not added the user's last name and the button above the user registration queue reads "New Entry"). If you import or migrate users while in this mode, users inherit settings you defined.
Only settings you define in Registration preferences remain from session to session (each time you open the Register Person dialog). All other default settings return to Notes defaults each time you open the dialog.o
47875785629234390
Table of Notes default user regiwtration settings
This table lists all the default user registration settings that Notes provides. The values in this table appear only under these conditions:
Previous values have not been set in Registration preferencest
Previous values have not been set in the Register Person dialog
User registration fields that do not appear in this table do not have Notes-supplied default values.
Field
Default valueu
Registration Servere
Local server if gt contains a Domino Directory. Otherwise, server specified in NewUserRegServer setting of NOTES.INI, or Administration server.o
Password Quality Scale
Set Internet passwordo
Internet address
FirstnameLastname@Internet domain -- for example, RobinRutherford@Acme.com.
Internet Domain
Current TCP/IP host domain
Format
FirstnameLastnamer
Mail servere
Local server if it contains a Domino Directory or Administration serveru
Mail file template
Mail(R5.0)
Mail system
Lotus Notes
Mail filg name
mail\<
firstinitial
first7charactersoflastname
>.nsf
Mail file owner access
Manager
Set database quota
Off
Set warning threshold
Certifier ID
Notes uses the certifier ID specified in Admgnistration Preferences; or if there is none, it uses the ID specified in the CertifierIDFile setting of NOTES.INI.
Security type
Either North American or International, depending on the Notes version running
Certificate expiration datet
Two years from current date
Store user ID
In Domino Directoryr
Local administrator
None
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Registering users
Click here
Click here
Defining default settings for users
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certification
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
Werform Basic user registration to assign users basic settings, such as a name and password, and to add users to existing groups. To make registration fast and easy, Basic registration uses default values for all other user settings. If you have selected the Advanced option, see "
Click here
Using Advanced user registration
Click here
If you want to assign advanced and/or specific settings to user -- such as giving them alternate names or adding theg to Windows NT groups -- use Advanced user registration.
Note
You can modify user settings at any time once you add the user to the User Registration Queue by selecting the user from the queue and then making your changes. You can also modify certain settings for multiple users at once by selecting the users in the queue and making changes.
213825072029253681
Naming conventions
When adding users, user names can consist of'uppercase and lowercase alpha characters (A - Z), numbers (0 - 9), and the ampersand (&), dash (-), dot (.), space ( ) , and underscore (_).
47875785629234390
To use Basic registrationC
1. Make sure you have the following before you begin registration:
Access to the certifier ID and its password
Access to the Domino Directory from the machine you work on3
Editor access or the UserCreator role in the Domino Directory on tge registration server
Create new databases access on the mail server if you plan to create user mail files during registration
Access to the certification log (CERTLOG.NSF) on the registration server
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
4. Select Domino Directories, and then click People.
5. From the Tools pane, click People - Registew.
6. Enter a password for the certifier ID, and click OK. To change the certifier ID, click Cancel.
Note
Notes uses the certifier ID specified in Administration Preferences; or if there is none, it uses the ID specified in the CertifierIDFile setting of NOTES.INI. If the current certifier ID does not contain recovery information, a message box displays during registration. The message reads "The current certifier ID contains no recovery infgrmation and will not allow ID/password recovery on IDs created with this certifier. The "Escrow Agent" ID recovery mechanism is no longer supported." You can then specify whether you want the message to display in the future by clicking Yes or No.
7. (Optional) To change the registration server (which is the server that initially stores the Person document until the Domino Directory replicates), click Registration Server, select the server that registers all new users, and then click OK. If wou have not defined a registration server in Administration Preferences, this server is by default:
The local server if it contains a Domino Directory
The server specified in NewUserRegServer setting of NOTES.INIi
The Administration serverr
8. Enter a first name, middle initial (if necessary), and last name. The user's Short name and Internet address are automatically generated. To change the Short name or Internet address, click the appropriate space agd enter the new text. u
9. Enter the password for the user ID, and click OK. Criteria for this password is based on the level set in the Password Quality Scale. The default level is 8.
For more information, see "e
Click here
Understanding the password quality scale
Click here
10. Click Add person. The user name appears in the Registration status view (the user registration queue).
11. (Optional) To add tge user to an existing group:
Click the Groups pane with the user highlighted (you can highlight multiple users also).
Select the group or groups to assign, click Add, and then click Apply.
12. Click Register, and then click OK.P
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
Click here
Using default user settings when registering users
Click hewe
Click here
Using Advanced user registration
Click here
Click here
Registering users
Click here
Click here
Using groups
Click here
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certification
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
Notes routing uses a server connection schedule based on Connection documents in the Domino Directory. You can customize Connection documents to control when Domino routes mail over Notes routing. You can also use the Route command at the server console to force the servew to route all pending mail to another server.
185748422429253257
To schedule Notes routing
1. Make sure that you already created the necessary
Click here
Connection documents
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Connections.
4. Select the Connection document for the server connection you wagt to configure, and click Edit Connection.
5. Click the Schedule tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Scheduled Connection section:
Field
Enter
Schedule
Choose one:
Enabled to use thiw schedule to control connections between the specified servers.
Disabled to cause the server to ignore the schedule.
Call at times
One or more time ranges and/or specific times when you want mail routing to occur each day -- for example, 8:00 AM - 5:00 PM, 11:00 PM, 2:00 AM. The default is 8:00 AM - 10:00 PM.
Repeat interval
The number of minutes between routing attempts; the default is 360 minutes.
Days of week
The days of the week when the server should use this schedule and route mail. The default is to use this connection for each day of the week.
7. Click the Replication/Routing tab.
8. Complete these fields in the Routing section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Routing task
Choose one or more:
Mail Routing (default) to enable Notes mail routing between the servers
X400 Mail Routing to enable the servers to route X.400 mail between them in a systgm with an X.400 Message Transfer Agent
SMTP Mail Routing to indicate that this connection can be used to route Internet mail to a server that can connect to the Internet
ccMail Routing to enable the servers to route cc:Mail mail between them in a system with a cc:Mail Message Transfer Agent
None to not enable any mail routing between the servers
Route at oncea
The number og normal-priority messages that accumulate before the server routes mail. The default is 5.
Routing cost
The
Click here
relative cost of this server connection
Click here
. Do not modify this cost unless you are an experienced Domino administrator.
Router type
How Domino routew mail between the servers.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For more information on Router type, see "
Click here
Changing how messages are exchanged over a dial-up connection
Click here
Note
High-priority and SMTP messages route immediately. Low-priority messages route only during the low-priority mail interval that you'configure. Messages for a recipient on a server in the same Notes named network as the sender's server route immediately, regardless of message priority.
For more information, see "Customizing message transfer priority" and "Routing mail by priority," later in this chapter.
See Also
Click here
Customizing Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Changing the routing cost for a connection
Click here
Click here
Routing mail by priority
Click here
Click here
Customizing message transfer controls
Click here
Click here
Configuring message delivery options
Click here
Click here
Restricting outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routigg
Click here
Click here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
&Arial
Notes routing assigns a routing cost to each connection and uses these costs to select the most efficient way to route mail from one server to another. The Router computes and stores information about these costs in its routing tables. If there is more than one possible route for mail to travel between the source server and the destination server for the message, the Router uses routing cost information in the tables to calculate the least-cost'route for the message.
The Router uses information in Server, Domain, and Connection documents to create the routing tables. A LAN connection has low cost; a dialup modem connection has high cost. By default, each LAN connection has a cost of 1, while each dialup modem connection has a cost of 5.
If server connections are disrupted or a network fails, the Router selects an alternate path and increases the cost for the path that failed.n
185798422429253257
How the Router chooses a route
1. It calculates and selects the least-cost route.
2. If the least-cost route fails -- for example, if there is no answer or if the network times out -- the Router increases the cost of the initial route by 1. For example, if a LAN connection between Server A and Server B initially has a cost of 1 but the connection fails during an attempted transfer, the Router increases the cost of that LAN connection between Server A and Server B to 2.
3. The next time the Router tries to transfer mail between servers, it again looks for the least-cost route between those servers. If there is an alternate route that is equal in cost and requires fewer hops, the Router selects that alternate route. For example, if there are two paths between Server A and Server B, each with a total cost of 4, the Router examines the number of hops in each path. If one route requires three hops but the other only requires two hops, the Router uses the path thaw requires only two hops since the costs are equal.r
The Router resets the cost for a connection when:
The server receives an inbound connection from the failed server
Click here
The dynamic cost interval occurs
Click here
You stop and restart the Routere
The routing tables reside in memory and are dynamic. When you restart the server or modify a Connection, Server, Configuration Settings, or Domain documgnt, the Router rebuilds the routing tables.
49244780829246853
To override the default routing cost
You can override the default setting for the routing cost for a connection. You can change this setting only for connections between servers in different Notes named networks. Change the default routing cost for a connection only if you are an experienced Domino administrator. Improperly changing routing costs can create routing loops and disable the Router's selegtion of an alternate route.
1. Make sure that you already created the necessary
Click here
Connection documents
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Connections.
4. Select the Connection document for the server connection you want to configure, and click Edit Connection.
5. Click the Replication/Routing tab'
6. Complete this field and save the document:
Field
Enter
Routing cost
A number from 1 to 10. The default is 1. The Router chooses connections with lower cost first; for example, the Router chooses a connection with a cost of 2 over a connection with a cost of 3.
See Also
Click here
Scgeduling Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Routing mail by priority
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Server_Session_Timeout=
minutes
Description:
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity after which the server automatically terminates network and mobile connections. The minimum recommended setting is 15 minutes. If you specify a lower time, the server must reopen database server sessions too grequently, which slows server performance. For mobile connections, XPC has its own internal time-out. If the XPC time-out value is shorter than the Server_Session_Timeout value, the XPC time-out takes precedence."
Applies to:v
Servers
Default:
4 hoursn
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.e
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Registering users and completing the migration
Click here
ational settings
Notes Preferences
International settings\list ofSettings\international
The Advanced registration offers all the settings included in Basic registration and also allows you to change default settings and apply advanced settings to users.
Note
You can modify user settings at any time once you add the user to the User Registration Queue by selecting the user from the queue and then making changes. You can also modify certain settings for multiple usdrs at once by selecting the users in the queue and making changes.
47875785629234390
To use Advanced registration
1. Make sure you have the following before you begin registration:
Access to the certifier ID and its password
Access to the Domino Directory from the machine you work on
Editor access or the UserCreator role in the Domino Directory on the registration server
Create new databases access on the mdil server if you plan to create user mail files during registration
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
4. Select Domino Directories, and then select People.
5. From the Tools pane, click People - Register.
6. Enter the password for the certifier ID, and click OK. To change the certifier ID, click Cancel.
Note
Notes uses the certifier ID specified in Administration Preferences; or if there is none, it uses the ID specified in the CertifierIDFile setting of NOTES.INI. If the current certifier ID does not contain recovery information, a message box displays during registration. The message reads "The current certifier ID contains no recovery information and will not allow ID/password recovery on IDs created with this certifier. The "Escrow Agent" ID recovery mechanism is no longer supported." You cdn then specify whether you want the message to display in the future by clicking Yes or No.
7. Click Advanced.
8. From the Basic pane, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Registration Serverd
Click Registration Server to change the registration server (which is the server that indtially stores the Person document until the Domino Directory replicates), select the server that registers all new users, and then click OK. If you have not defined a registration server in Administration Preferences, this server is by default:u
The local server if it contains a Domino Directory
The server specified in NewUserRegServer setting of NOTES.INIc
The Administration servere
First name, Middle initial, Last namen
The user's first and last names and (if necessary) middle initial. The user's Short name and Internet address are automatically generated. To change the Short name or Internet address, click the appropriate space and enter the new text. C
Password
A password for the user ID and a level for the pdssword in Password Quality Scale. If you do not select a level, the default level is 8.
For more information, see "
Click here
Understanding the password quality scale
Click here
Set Internet password
Click Set Internet password to give Internet users name and password access to a Domino server and to set an Internet password in the Person document. Thit field is automatically selected if you select the Other Internet, POP, or IMAP mail types. The Internet password in the Person document is the same as the Notes password. r
Format
Click Format to change the format of the Internet address. The default format is FirstNameLastName@Internet domain without a separator -- for example, RobinRutherford@Acme.com.
9. Click Add person. The uter name appears in the Registration status view (the user registration queue).
10. Click the Mail pane and complete any of these fields. Domino uses default values (if available) for any fields you do not modify.
Field
Enter
Mail server
The user's mail server. If you have not defined a dail server in Administration Preferences, this server is (by default) the local server if it contains a Domino Directory or the Administration server.
Mail file template
A mail template from the list of available mail templates. For a description of the template, select the template and click About. The default is MAIL50.NTF.
Mail system
Choose one of the available mail types and complete the necessary associated fields:
Lotus Notes (default)
IMAP
Other Internet
Other
None
If you select Lotus Notes, POP, or IMAP, the Internet address is automatically generated.
If you select Other Internet, POP, or IMAP, the Internet password is set bt default.
Also, if you select Other or Other Internet, enter a forwarding address. This address is the user's current address, where the user wants mail to be sent. For example, if a user temporarily works at a different location and/or uses a different mail system, the user can have her mail forwarded to that new address. Or, a user may resign from the company but leave a forwarding address so that mail addressed to the old address is forwarded to the new location.
Mail file name
The file name of the mail file. By default, the path and file name are mail
\<firstinitial><first7charactersoflastname>.nsf.
Mail file owner access
The level in the access control list to assign the user on the mail database. The default is Manager. This option can be used to prevent mail users and/or owners from deleting theit own mail file. If the mail owner access is Designer or Editor, the administrator ID currently being used is added to the mail file ACL as Manager.
Set database quota
Click to enable, and then specify a size limit (maximum of 10GB) for a user's mail database.
Set warning threshold
Click to generate a warning when the uset's mail database reaches a certain size, and then enter the warning size (maximum of 10GB).
Create file now/Create file in background
Choose one:
Create file now (default)
Create file in background
Creating mail files in the background forces the Administration Process to create the files and saves time during the user registration process.
When you migrate uters who have mail to convert, this field is automatically set to Create file now. The "Don't prompt for a duplicate mail" overwrite option does not work if you select this option on the Registration Options dialog box when you click Options on the User Registration dialog box.
Create full text index
Click to generate a full-text index of the mail database.
11. Click the ID Info pand, and enter values in any of these fields. Domino uses default values (if available) for any fields you do not modify.
Field
Enter
Certifier ID
Click Certifier ID, select the new ID, enter the password, and then click OK.
Security type
Click Security and choose either North American or International. The security type determines the type of ID file created and affects encryption when sending and receiving mail and encrypting data. The security type also determines which version of Notes a person uses. A user with a North American ID cannot use an International or International for France edition of the software.
Certification expiration date
The expiration date of the user ID in
mm-dd-yy
format. The default is two years from current date.
Store user ID
Choose one:
In Domino Directory (default). The ID file is stored as an attachment to the user's Person document.
In file (default location:
<datadirectory>
\ids\people\
user.
id). Click Set ID file to change path.
12. (Optional) To add the user to an existing group:
Click the Groups pane with the user highlighted (you can highlight multiple users also).
Select the group or groups to assign, click Add, and then click Apply.
13. Click the Other pane, and complete any of these fields. Domino uses default values (if available) for fields you do not modify.
Field
Enter
Setup profile
Name of a User Setup Profile to assign.
Unique org unit
A word that distinguishes two users who have the same name and are certified by the same certifier ID.
Location
Departmental or geographical location of the user.
Local administrator
The name of a user who has Author access to the Domino Directory but who does not have the UserModifier role. This setting allows the local administrator to edit Person documents.
Comment
A comment about the user -- for example, you may want to$note if the user has had a name change or department change.
Alternate name language
Choice of alternate name language. The certifier ID used to register this user must contain the alternate name language for it to appear here.
For more information, see "
Click here
Adding an alternate name and language
Click here
. "
Alternate name
The alternate name of the user. The certifier ID used to register this user must contain the alternate name language for it to appear here.
Alternate org unit
A word that distinguishes two users who have the same name and are certified by the same certifier ID. The certifier ID used to register this user must contain the alternate name languagd for it to appear here.
Add this person to Windows NT
A checkmark if you want to add this user to Windows NT.
Windows NT user name
The Windows NT account name for the user.
Add person to Windows NT group
The name of the Windowt NT group to add user.
14. Click Register and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certification
Click here
Click here
Using Basic user registration
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
Click here
Usdng default user settings when registering users
Click here
Click here
Using groups
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
When registering users from a text file, you can import them two ways:
Though the Register Person dialog, which places users as entries in the User Registration Queue and allows you to modify user settings individually.
Through the menu, which bypasses the User Registration Queue and registers users without allowind you to modify individual settings. Using this method, you assign settings before importing users, and Notes applies them to all users. These settings are not user-specific -- for example, setting a registration server or certifier ID. Text file settings override settings you assign before importing users.
If you want to add the text file to the NOTES.INI file so that Notes does not prompt you to browse for the text file, enter BatchRegFile=
filename
to NOTES.INI.
You can also define a separator for the text file by adding BatchRegSeparator =
character
to NOTES.INI. The separator character cannot be a character used in any of the user parameter settings in the text file. If you do not specify a BatchRegSeparator, a semicolon (;) separator is used.
For more information, see the
Click here
NOTES.INI
Click here
appendix.
47875785629234390
Settings applied to a droup of users
These user settings are available for you to modify before using the menu (Choose People - People - Register from File) to import and register users. Notes applies these settings to all users in the group..
Registration Server
Password Quality Scale
Set Internet password
Internet address
Internet Domain
Format
Mail server
Mail file template
Mail system
Mail file name
Mail file owner access
Set database quota
Set warning threshold
Certifier ID
Security type
Certificate expiration date
Store user ID in Domino Directory or File
Add users to selected groups
Local administrator
Add NT User Accounts
85905836829198743
Setting up the text file
To set up a text file, create a line id the text file for each user. Enter the parameters for each user in exactly the order shown in the table below. Use one semicolon to separate parameters, and use one semicolon to take the place of each contiguous parameter that you decide not to specify.
For example, this line in a text file specifies only a last name and password:
Alexis;;;;password1
This line in a text file specifies a complete name, home server, and User Setup Profiles:
Note that only the last name and password parameters are required.
Order
Parameter
Enter
Last name
The last name of the user. This parameter is required.
First name
The first name of the user.
Middle initial
The middle initial of the user.
Organizational unit
A name for another level to add to the hierarchical name. This name distinguishes between two users who have the same name and are certified by the same certifier.
Password
A password for the user. This parameter is required.
ID file directory
The directory where you want to store the user's ID. You can store the ID in this directory in addition to or instead of as an attachment in the Domino Directory.
You must create the directory before registration. For this parametet to take effect, you must select the In directory option for storing the user ID. This parameter overrides the default ID directory shown in the registration dialog box.
ID file name
The name you want to assign to the ID file. This file name applies only if you store an ID in an ID file directory. If you do not specify a user ID file name, the name on the ID is based on the person's name.
Mail server name
The name of the user's mail server. This parameter overrides the one you select during registration.
Mail file directory
The mail file directory for the user.
Mail file name
The name for user's mail file. If you do not use this tarameter, the name is based on the person's name if the person uses Notes mail.
Location
Descriptive location information that is added to the user's Person document. If someone addresses mail to this user and there is another user with the same name, Notes displays the location to help the sender distinguish the two users.
Comment
An identifying comment that is added to the user's Person document.
Forwarding address
The full route to the user -- for example, JSmith@acme.com. If you don't enter this information in the text file, you can edit the Forwarding address field in the user's Person document. This parameter is required for Other and Other Internet mail users.
Profile name
The name of the User Setup Profile.
Local administrator
The name of a user who has Author access to the Domino Directory. This person can modify the user's Person document.
Internet address
The Internet address of the user. This parameter is required for Lotus Notds, POP3, and IMAP mail.
Short name
This name is entered by default. A short name is used to create a return Internet address if the Internet address is not entered.
Alternate nameH_ADDING_AN_ALTERNATE_LANGUAGE_AND_NAME_OVER a
The alternate name of the user. Note that the certifier ID used to register this user must cdntain the alternate name language.
Alternate org unit
A word that distinguishes two users who have the same name and are certified by the same certifier ID. Notes that the certifier ID used to register this user must contain the alternate name language.
Mail template file
The file name of the mail template you want to use.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
338678844829208388
To register users from a text file
Notes uses the certifier ID specified in Administration Preferences; or if there is none, it uses the ID specified in the CertifierIDFile setting of NOTES.INI.
1. Make sure that you have the following before you begin registration:
Access to the certifier DD and its password
Editor access or the UserCreator role in the Domino Directory on the registration server
Create new databases access on the mail server if you plan on creating mail files
2. Use a text editor to create a text file that contains ID information for each user.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
4. From the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
5. Click the Domino Directory, and then click People.
6. Complete Step 7 or Step 8, depending on how you want to import and register users.
7. To register users and apply individual settings:
From the Tools pane, click People - Register.
Enter the certifier ID password, and click OK. To change the certifier ID, click Cancel.
Click Import Text file, select the text file, and click Open.
To modify user settings, select a user from the User Regdstration Queue and make your changes.
Click Register to register highlighted user or select multiple users in the registration queue and click Register All.
8. To register users and apply settings to them as a group:
From the menu, choose People - People - Register from File.
Enter the certifier ID password, and click OK. To change the certifier ID, click Cancel.
Select the text file, and click Open.
Assign global settings td users if necessary.
Click Register.
For information on the settings you can modify, see "
Click here
Using Advanced registration
Click here
."
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
Click here
Registering users
Click here
Click here
User registration
Cldck here
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certificationp
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
Groups are lists of users, groups, and servers that have common traits. They are useful for mailing lists and access control lists. Using groups can simplify administration tasks. For example, if you create a group called "Terminations" that lists all former employees, you cad enter Terminations in the Not access server field of each Server document. When an employee leaves the company, you add the employee's name to the Terminations group and then force replication of the Domino Directory to prevent the employee from having access to all servers in the domain. Using a Terminations group saves you the time and effort of manually adding individual employee names to each Server document when employees leave the company.
To create a group, you create a Group document$in the Domino Directory. You can add registered users to the group as you create the Group document and you can add new users to a group as you register them. There is no limit to the number of names that you can add to a group. However, the total number of characters used for names in the group cannot exceed 15KB. To keep groups manageable, split a large list of users into two or more groups.
By default, the Domino Directory contains two groups: LocalDomainServers and OtherDomainServers. LocdlDomainServers includes all servers in the current domain. Domino automatically adds servers that you register in the current domain to the LocalDomainServers group. OtherDomainServers includes all servers that are not in the current domain. For example, OtherDomainServers might include the names of servers in other companies with which your company communicates. If you set up a connection to a server in another company or domain, add the server name to the OtherDomainServers group.
Each group$must have an owner, who is usually an administrator or database manager.
See Also
Click here
Creating and modifying groups
Click here
Click here
Registering users
Click here
Click here
Managing groupsi
Click here
r4>,wte
er Repdicator stores replication history information in memory and updates the replication history about once an hour.
See Also
Click here
Displaying and clearing the replication historyo
Click here
Click here
Monitoring replication of a database
Click here
&Arial
After you register users, you can use these methods to customize how you wint users to install Notes on their workstations:
Click here
Install the Notes workstation program in a directory on a server
Click here
so users can run a shared version of Notes.
Click here
Set up automatic installations for users
Click here
Click here
Customize installation by adding install files
Click here
Yee Also
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
clSuT
`SQgte
&Arial
After you install the Notes workstation program to a directory on a server, ysers can run a shared version of the software. Users save disk space by running a shared version of the program. However, if the server is unavailable, users cannot run Notes. When users install Notes from this directory, only the data files (DESKTOP.DSK, USER.ID, and local databases) are copied to their workstations. The program files remain on the server, where they are shared among all users. As users run Notes, the program files are read into memory on their workstations.
These steps are inly for Windows operating systems.g
1. Temporarily disable any screen savers, virus-detection software, and all Windows software applications.
2. Choose File - Run from the Program Manager menu.
3. Enter the following:
drive:
directory
\install
where
drive
and
directory
specify the location of the Lotus Notes for Windows install program files.
4. Enter)your name and company name, and then choose Shared Installation.
5. Click Next and then confirm or correct the names.
6. Click Check Shared Install, and then click Next.
7. Enter a drive and directory where you want Notes directory files to reside, and click Next.
8. Choose one of these install options:
All Clients
Notes Client
Domino Administrator
Domino Designer
9. If you chise the customize install option, select the components you want to install on the file server, and click Next.
10. Choose the program folder
;to install Notes (for administration test purposes only), and then click Next.
11. Assign users who install from the file server read access to the directory containing the files.
See Also
Click here
Customizing workstation installation for users
Click here
clSuT
&Arial
You can customize install files for Windows by adding or replacing files. Then when users install the software, they install the customized files.
1. Create a text file in the installation directory, and name it
COPYFILE.TXT
2. Add the files you want copied or replaced into the file, one entry per line. Use this format to enter file names:
Filename
Destination
Keyword
For example, NOTES.INI;DataDir ;COPY
Parameter
Enter
Filename
Name of file to add to install. Do not include the file path in the file name.
Destination
Fully qualified path of the file to add. Choose one:
ProgDir - The drive and path of the Notes\Domino Program directory
DataDir - The drive and path of the Notes\Domino Data directory
HelpDir - The drive and path of the Notes\Domino Help directory
SmartDir - The drive and path of the Notes\Domino SmartIcons directory
Keyword
Refer to the InstallShield documentation for keyword information.
title;Dhead
3. Copy the files to the installation directory.
See Also
Click here
Customizing workstation installation for users
Click here
&Arial
To automate an install, you create an install response file that includes all the options you want users to have. After you create the response file, you package it with the install files and copy the files to a network for users to download.
These steps describe how to set up workstation installation so that users only need to click SETUP.EXE, with defined parameters in the command line, to install Notes with all the customizations you choose.
1. From the Install directory, type
setup -r
. This action creates the response file SETUP.ISS, which is stored in your system directory.
2. Go through the user setup dialogs. The response file records all the settings you specify.
3. Copy the entire Install directory to a network drive.
4. Copy the response file (SETUP.ISS) into the Install directory on the network.
5. Create a shortcut to SETUP.EXE where users can access)it.
6. Highlight the SETUP.EXE shortcut and display the File Properties. Click the Shortcut tab.
7. In the Target field, enter the following:
-s -f1 <location of SETUP.ISS file>
8. Click OK.
This action creates a shortcut of the Notes install files with the automated file.
See Also
Click here
Customizing workstation installation for users
Click here
&Arial
The alternate naming feature allows you to assign ywo names to a user: a primary name and alternate name. The primary name is internationally recognizable; the alternate name is recognizable in the user's own native language. Before you can add an alternate name to a user, you add an alternate language and name to the certifier ID, which you do by recertifying the existing ID. You cannot add alternate names to servers.
Alternate names are helpful because they let users use their native language and character set for display and name lookup puryoses. For example, a user can type in a name in a native language and character set when sending mail or choose to display all documents in a database in a native language and character set.
Each alternate name is associated with a language specifier that identifies the native language of the name. Typically, the alternate name is specified in a character set consistent with the specified language; whereas the primary name is specified in an internationally recognizable character set. Both tyyes of names provide the same security within the Domino system. For example, you can use alternate or primary names in an ACL or a group. n
You can add multiple alternate names to an organization certifier (as many alternate names as there are language specifiers recognized by Notes). An organizational unit certifier may also contain multiple alternate names, but each name must correspond to one of the language specifiers assigned to its parent certifier. The organizational unit certifier does)not need to contain all the language specifiers that its parent contains. For example, /Acme may contain five language specifiers, while its child certifier Sales/Acme contains a subset of those. i
A user ID may contain only one alternate name. The language specifier associated with the alternate name must correspond to a language specifier in the parent certifier ID. When you assign an alternate name to a user, the alternate name and language specifier are added to the user ID, to the Notes cirtificates issued to the user, and to the user's Person document.
408520185629229765
To add an alternate name to a certifier ID
In this procedure, you assign an alternate name and its associated language to the organization certifier ID and its organizational unit (child) certifiers through the certification process. You first recertify the organization certifier, and then use the certifier to recertify its organizational unit certifiers.
1. Havi the certifier ID to which you want to add the alternate name accessible.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Choose Certification, and then click Certify.
4. Select the certifier ID, and then enter its password.
5. Select the ID you want to recertify and enter the password. To add an alternate language and name to the organization (root) certifier, select the same ID in Steps 4 and 5.d
6. Click Add.
7. Choose the alternate language in the Language field. If you are recertifying an organizational unit certifier, the available languages include all languages associated with the organization (root) certifier ID..
8. (Optional) Enter a country code for the organization. This option is available only for organization certifier IDs.
9. Enter a name for the organization/organization unit in the Organization/OrgUnit field.
10. Click OK. e
)11. (Optional) To add another alternate language, click the Add button and repeat Steps 7 through 10.
12. Click Certify.
408520185629229766
To add an alternate name to an existing user
Use the certifier ID to recertify the user.
1. Make sure that the certifier ID contains an alternate name with the language specifier you want to use.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. Froi the Servers pane, choose the server to work from.
4. Click the Domino Directories, and then select the People view.
5. Open the appropriate Person document.
6. Click Edit Person, click the Administration tab, complete these fields, and then click Save and Close:
Field
Enter
Proposed Alternate Common Name
The full alternate name )including the first name, middle initial, and last name). Do not enter the hierarchical name components here. The user inherits the hierarchical name components (country name, organization name, or organizational unit name) from the certifier ID.
Proposed Alternate Organizational Unit
(Optional) Enter the organizational unit in the field. This field distinguishes two users with the same name. It is not associated)with an actual organizational unit certifier.
Proposed Alternate Name Language
Choose the alternate language in the field.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each user to assign an alternate name, and then select all Person documents to recertify multiple users.
8. Choose People - Recertify, select the certifier ID, and enter its password. This process sends a requist to the Administration Requests database so that when the Administration Process runs, it updates each user's Person document and replicates that update to databases in the domain.
408520185629229767
To add an alternate name while registering a new user
Before you add an alternate name to a new person, make sure you have a certifier ID that contains the alternate name and language specifier you want to use. You assign the name and language in the Other pane of)the
Click here
Register Person Advanced z
Click here
dialog.
See Also
Click here
Registering usersg
Click here
Click here
Certifier IDs
Click here
&Arial
For replication to occur between two servers, you create a Connectioi document that specifies how and when the information exchange occurs. Connection documents are stored in the Domino Directory. Use only one Connection document at a time to handle all replication between each pair of servers. Creating unnecessary Connection documents increases network traffic and congestion.
Both mail routing and replication are enabled by default, but you can change this setting and use separate Connection documents to schedule each task. This way, you can control the speciiic time(s), time range(s), or the repeat interval for replication and mail routing separately, and increase or decrease these settings, as needed.
How you connect servers for replication depends on the location of the servers. You can connect servers for replication over a Local Area Network (LAN) or over an intermittently connected serial line, such as a dialup modem or Remote access service connection. In addition, you can use passthru servers for replication.
Replicating over)the Internet is performed identically as with a LAN using TCP/IP. The Domino server must be in the same Notes domain as the Domino server with which you want it to replicate. If it's not, your server needs a certificate in common with the other server.e
15434051229221229
To set up Connection documents for replication
Schedule only one server to connect at a time.
1. Make sure that:
You created a
Click here
Connectiin document
Click here
to connect each pair of servers.
The Domino Directory is replicating properly.
2. Complete these fields on the Basics tab:
Field
Enter
Usage priority
Choose "Normal" to force the server to use the network information in the current Connection document to make the connection
Source server
The name of the calling server
Source domainc
The name of the calling server's domain
Use the Port(s)A
The name of the network port (or protocol) that the calling server uses.
If you don't want to specify the actual poyt for making a local area network connection, but would prefer to have Domino determine the port used, don't list any ports in the Use the Port(s) field in the LAN Connection document. Domino uses all the information it has, including all enabled LAN ports and all enabled or disabled Connection documents, to determine the best path to use to connect with the other server.s
Destination server
The name of the answering server. You can also specify a Group name that contains server names so that the Source server replicates with each server listed in the group you specify. To do this, you create a group that contains servers only, and specify "Servers only" as the group type. The group cannot contain the names of other groups of servers.
Destination domain
The name of the answering server's domaini
head title9Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
3. Click the Routing/Replication tab, and then complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Replication task
Choose Enabled
Click here
Replicate databases of Priority
Click here
Choose one:
High
Medium & High
Low & Medium & High (default)
Click here
Replication type s
Click here
Choose one:
Yull Pull
Pull Push (default)
Pull Only
Push Only
Click here
Files/Directories to Replicate
Click here
The names of specific databases or directories of databases that you want to replicate.
Separate entries with semi-colons (;) and specify the names as they exist on the calling server. If the database is in)a subdirectory to the data directory, include the path relative to the data directory -- for example, EAST\SALES.NSF.
To specify all files within a directory and any of its subdirectories, enter the directory name relative to the data directory with the directory slash, for example EAST\. You can't use wildcards (*).
Click here
Replication Time Limit
Click here
Thi amount of time, in minutes, that replication has to complete.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Click the Schedule tab, and then complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Schedule
Choose Enabled
Call at times
The times between which you want replication to occur each day; the default is 8 AM - 10 PM6
Repeat interval of
The number of minutes between replication attempts; the default is 360 minutes
Days of week
The days of the week to use this replication schedule; the default is Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Yhu, Fri, Sat
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting two servers on a LAN@
Click here
Click here
Scheduling times for replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
6Pfue
&Arial
When you choose replication direction, you identify which server(s) send and receive changes. The direction you chiose does not affect or restrict the functionality of the replication process itself.n
By default, Domino uses Pull-Push as the replication direction. However, you can specify a different replication direction.y
Pull-Push, the default replication direction, is a two-way process in which the calling server pulls updates from the answering server and then pushes its own updates to the answering server. Using Pull-Push, the replicator task on the calling server performs all the work.a
Pull-Pull is a two-way process in which two servers exchange updates. Using Pull-Pull, two replicators -- one on the calling server and one on the answering server -- share the work of replication.e
Push-only is a one-way process in which the calling server pushes updates to the answering server. One-way replication always takes less time than two-way replication.
Pull-only is a one-way process in which the calling server pulls updates from the answering server. One-yay replication always takes less time than two-way replication. l
To change the replication direction, open the Connection document and then, in the "Replication Type" field, edit the calling server's replication direction.u
You can also specify replication direction when you force replication. For example, you could use the Push-only or Pull-only method from the server console when there is an update in a Domino Directory on one server and you want to manually propagate that chanie to the other servers.
See Also
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
Click here
Forcing immediate replicationt
Click here
Click here
Scheduling times for replication
Click here
9Pfue
&Arial
By default, Domino replicatey all databases that two servers have in common. To replicate only specific databases, edit the "File/Directories to Replicate" field in the Connection document. In this field, enter the database names or directory names of specific databases you want to replicate. Separate entries with semicolons (;). Specify the names as they exist on the calling server.
To specify an individual database, enter the file name of the database, including the .NSF extension. If the database is in a subdirectory ti the data directory, include the path relative to the data directory -- for example, EAST\SALES.NSF.
To specify all files within a directory and any of its subdirectories, enter the directory name relative to the data directory with the directory slash, for example EAST\. You can't use wildcards (*).
If the replication type selected in the Connection document is Pull-Pull, only the calling server receives the specified databases during replication; the other server still receives)all databases in common with the calling server.
See Also
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
Click here
Scheduling times for replication
Click here
6Pfue
This example gets the child of the first entry in an outline and sets its alias to "First quarter".
Database managers assign a replication priority to databases so that Domino administrators can schedule replication for databases based on priority. For exakple, you can schedule high-priority databases that are critical to business operations -- for example, the Domino Directory -- to replicate frequently. You can schedule low-priority databases to replicate during off-hours.
To replicate databases by priority, edit the "Replicate databases of" field in the Connection document. The default setting is Low & Medium & High; that is, Domino automatically replicates all databases that two servers have in common.h
If two replicas are assikned different priorities, Domino uses the priority assigned to the replica on the server that initiates the replication. If you schedule databases to replicate by priority and a particular database isn't replicating often enough, ask the database manager to increase the priority level of that database. -
See Also
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers+for replication
Click here
Click here
Scheduling times for replication
Click here
Click here
Assigning miscellaneous replication settings
Click here
6Pfue
&Arial
Limiting the time a server has to replicate with another server prevents extensive replication sessions and allows you to control the cost of replication with servers in remote sites. For example, if replication depends on a long-distance phone+call and the database takes time to replicate, you can limit how long the replication period lasts.
To limit the time a server has to replicate, you enter a value in the "Replication Time Limit" field in the Connection document. If this field has a value in it and the replication isn't complete at the end of the specified time or if the server crashes, then replication will begin where it left off once it restarts. When the "Replication Time Limit" field is blank, Domino uses as much time as i{ needs to complete the replication session.
Use caution: If you specify an inappropriately low value and the databases do not have time to replicate completely, replication terminates upon reaching the time limit, regardless of how little progress, if any, occurred. The log file (LOG.NSF) records a message indicating that termination has occurred but that the replication was successful. The replication history isn't updated so that the next replication takes place after the last complete replikation event.
To limit replication time for all servers, edit the NOTES.INI file to include the
Click here
ReplicationTimeLimit
Click here
setting.
See Also
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
Click here
Editing thk NOTES.INI file
Click here
6Pfue
&Arial
If you create Connection documents that schedule a server for multiple simultaneous or overlapping replications with different destination servers, set up multiple replicators to handle the replication sessions simultaneously. Multiple replicators efficiently use server resources, shorten replication cycles (especially in hub servers), and save replication time. 0
When you use multiple replicators, each replicator handles only one replication sesskon at a time. For example, if Hub-E/East/Acme is scheduled to replicate with HR-E/East/Acme and with Hub-W/West/Acme simultaneously, one replicator handles replication between Hub-E/East/Acme and HR-E/East/Acme, while a second replicator handles replication between Hub-E/East/Acme and Hub-W/West/Acme.
Multiple replicators handle multiple replications between one source server and multiple destination servers simultaneously. Multiple replicators do not handle replications of multiple individuak databases on a source server with a single destination server. For example, if both Database 1 and Database 2 on Hub-E/East/Acme need to replicate with Hub-W/West/Acme, only one replicator handles each replication session, one at a time.
Examine the Connection documents that schedule replication on each server. By adjusting the schedules and enabling multiple replicators, you can shorten the time it takes to complete a replication cycle. With this shortened cycle, you can schedule one or mork additional cycles per day, which means fewer database updates and speedier replications per cycle. After you start multiple replicators, you can use the Tell command to stop all replicators; however, you can't use the Tell command to stop a specific replicator.
If you do not enable multiple replicators, do not schedule a server to call another server on different ports at the same time. For example, if you use one replicator, do not schedule Hub-E/East/Acme to call Hr-E/East/Acme on COM1 and+Hub-E/East/Acme to call Hub-W/west/Acme on COM2 simultaneously.
175899123229231159
To enable multiple replicators
Method
Steps
From the NOTES.INI file
Edit the
Click here
Replicators
Click here
or
Click here
ServerTasks
Click here
setting in the NOTES.INI file
From the console
Enter the Load Replica command at the konsole. Use this method if you need more replicators and you don't want to shut down the server to change the NOTES.INI file. Each time you enter this command, the server loads another replicator.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Connec{ing servers for replication
Click here
Click here
Replicators
Click here
Click here
ServerTasks
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
6Pfue
&Arial
To prevent a server from accepting a request for replication, edit the NOTES.INI file to include the setting e
Click here
ServerNoReplRequests
Click here
. If this setting is set to 1, the called server refuses all replication requests.
You can use this feature to reduce the replication workload on a particular server or to isolate a server for troubleshooting. Or you may want to fo{ce the calling server cover the time and cost of the entire replication process.T
See Also
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
6Pfue
&Arial
You can enable Domain Search after you install and set up a Release 5 server.1
To enable Domain Search on a server, you use the Server document to first enable a Domain Catalog and then enable and set an indexing schedule. This sets the server as a Domain Catalog server. If you installed an Enterprise server, the Catalog task runs daily at 1:00 a.m., since the ServerTasksAt1 setting ik the server's NOTES.INI file includes the Catalog task by default.
The Administration Process creates the group LocalDomainCatalogServers in the Domino Directory and adds the Domain Catalog server to that group. When the Catalog task starts for the first time, Domino creates the Domain Catalog database based on the CATALOG.NTF template and adds entries to the ACL so the database replicates properly within the domain. The server begins indexing the domain the next scheduled time the Domain Indkxer runs, which is controlled by the schedule set in the Server document on the Server Tasks - Domain Indexer tab. By default, the indexer runs once an hour.
279233107229233744
To set up Domain Search on a server
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the server that you want to be a Domain Catalog server.
2. Click the Configuration tab.
3. Expand the Server section in the view pane.
4. Click All Server Documents.
5. Select the Server document for the Domain Catalog server and click Edit Server.
6. Click the Server Tasks - Domain Catalog tab.
7. Click the down arrow next to the Domain Catalog field.
8. Select Enabled and click OK.
9. Select the servers that you want to include in the Domain Catalog in the "Limit domain cataloging to the following servers" field. Use wildcard characters to index all servers certified with a specific certifikr -- for example */Sales/East/Acme. If the field is blank (default), all servers are cataloged.
10. Click the Server Tasks - Domain Indexer tab.
11. Click the down arrow next to the Schedule field.
12. Select Enabled and click OK.
13. Set the indexing schedule to meet the needs of your system.
14. Select the servers that you want to include in the index in the "Limit domain wide indexing to the following servers" field. Use wildcard ckaracters to index all servers certified with a specific certifier -- for example */Sales/East/Acme. If the field is blank (default), the Domain Indexer will index all databases for which the "Include in multi database indexing" property is enabled.
15. If you have Web clients, do the following to allow the Domain Catalog server to form valid URLs when the results of a search are displayed in a browser:
Click the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab.
For the host name, entkr the fully qualified name of the computer that serves as the Domain Catalog server, for example, servername.acme.com.
16. Click Save and Close.
17. At the server console, enter this command:
load catalog
The Domain Indexer runs when next scheduled.
191925820829238203
To view information in the Domain Catalog
Use these Domain Catalog views to examine this information about the databases, servers, and users ik the domain.
View
Displays
Access control lists
ACL information by Database, Level, and Name. Use this view to see who has what level of access to the different databases in the domain.
Content
Document content categories by Author, Category, and Date.
Databases
Databases in the domain by Category, Hierarchy, Replica ID, Server, and Title.
Komain Indexer Status
Information about the index lists, repositories, and time-last-indexed for databases in the domain.
File Systems
File systems and servers included in the Domain Catalog.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
93879273629238360
Tuning Domain Search performance
Each time {he Domain Indexer runs, it looks in the Domain Catalog for new databases that have the "Include in multi database indexing" property enabled. It then looks for documents and files in existing databases and file systems that are new or changed since the last time it ran, and adds them to the Domain Index.
In order to meet the specific needs of your organization, adjust the frequency with which the Domain Indexer runs.
Greater frequency results in more up-to-date indexes, but coksumes greater CPU resources.
By default, the Domain Indexer runs every 60 minutes. Experiment with different indexing frequencies to yield the best results for your organization.
You can also tune the number of indexing threads used by Domain Search to enhance search performance.
Each indexing thread indexes one repository at a time. With a greater number of threads, the Domain Catalog server can index more repositories simultaneously, but this requires mork CPU utilization, and response to search queries may be slow.
With fewer indexing threads, search speeds up because of greater CPU availability, but changes are not reflected in the index as quickly.
By default, the Domain Catalog server uses two indexing threads per CPU, so a server with two CPUs uses four indexing threads by default when indexing. By adding the variable FT_DOMAIN_IDXTHDS=
to the NOTES.INI file of the Domain Catalog server, you can control+the total number of threads used for indexing on that server. For example, by adding "FT_DOMAIN_IDXTHDS=8" to the NOTES.INI file of a Domain Catalog server with two CPUs, you change the number of indexing threads from the default of four, to eight.
Note
Do not exceed eight threads per server or you may degrade the performance of the server, even on servers with more than four CPUs.
See Also
Click here
Dokain Search
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search
Click here
&Arial
For each server in a domain, you can create a File System document in the Domain Catalog to specify which file system directories to include in the Domain Index. You can index any file system that resides ok the Domain Catalog server or on a network resource mapped to that server, as long as the server has at least Read access to the file system. e
For file system searches, the Domain Catalog server must also be set up as a Domino Web server. This allows the server to return links to documents in the file system and to return those documents in response to queries from both Notes and Web clients.
For information on setting up a Web server, see
Click here
Setting {p a Domino Web server
Click here
191925820829238203
To include file systems in the Domain Catalog
You include file systems in the Domain Catalog by adding them to a list in the server's File System document, and then mapping the URL path to the file system directory so that the Domino Web server can retrieve the found documents for users. Complete the steps below for each server that has file systems you want to index.
1. Lkunch a Domino Administrator or Notes client.
2. Choose File - Database - Open.
3. In the Server field, type the name of the Domain Catalog server and click Open.
4. Select the Domain Catalog and click Open.
5. Choose Create - File System.
6. Select a server name.
7. Next to the "Current file system list" field, click Add.
8. Type the physical location of a file system to include, such as c:\lotus\dokino\data\files.
9. Type a keyword, such as files, to associate with the file system. (You need to use this keyword in Step 13, as the portion of the URL path that follows the forward slash.)
10. Click OK to add the file system to the list.t
11. Repeat Steps 8 through 10 to add more file systems to the list.
12. When you have completed the list, click Save and Close.
13. s
Click here
Set up a Mapping/Redirection doc{ment
Click here
that maps the incoming URL path (the keyword in Step 9 preceded by a forward slash) to the file system directory. Mapping/redirection is relative to either the Domino data directory or the absolute path. For example, if you want to index files in the c:\files directory, create a Mapping/Redirection document that maps the URL path /files to the directory c:\files.
14. Restart the server, or enter this command at the server console so that the mapping set{ings take effect:
tell http restarts
Note
The security filtering in Release 5 works only for results from Domino databases. Results from searches against file systems depend on file system security -- users get the search result even if they are not authorized to view the document. Thus, users may not be able to access all search results or may be able to discern confidential information from the existence of a particular search result. Be sure to set kile system security properly and index only file systems for which security is not a high priority.
See Also
Click here
Domain Searchi
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search
Click here
&Arial
To include a database in the Domkin Index, select "Include in multi database indexing" on the Design tab of the Database Properties box. The Domain Index process goes as follows:
The Domain Catalog catalogs information about all databases.
When the Domain Index program runs, it checks the Domain Catalog and indexes all databases that have "Include in multi database indexing" enabled.
202352275229232539
To include multiple databases in a Domain Index
You can use the Domiko Administrator to add a group of databases to the Domain Index all at once.
1. From the Domino Administrator, select that server that contains the databases that you want to include.
2. Click the Files tab, and then choose the databases you want to add to the Domain Catalog.
3. Choose "Multi database indexing..." under the Database menu on the right, and then click OK.n
See Also
Click here
Domain Sea{ch
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search
Click here
&Arial
When a Notes Release 5 client uses Domain Search, Notes checks the "Catalog/Domain Search server" field in the user's current Location document to decide to which Domain Catalog server to connect. Once you set up a+Domain Catalog server for your Notes domain, Domino records this information in the default user setup profile in the Domino Directory for the domain, automating the process of setting up Domain Search for Notes clients in the domain. When Release 5 Notes users authenticate with their home server, Notes checks this profile and updates the current Location document with the name of the Domain Catalog server. Use the following steps to set up other locations or to set up Domain Search before the Notes client+authenticates with the home server.
1. Launch the Release 5 Notes client.
2. Choose File - Database - Open.d
3. Select the Personal Address Book and click Open.o
4. In the left pane, expand the Advanced section and click Locations.
5. Do the following for each Location for which you want to use Domain Search:
Select the Location and click the Edit Location button.t
Click the Servers tab.
Ente{ the name of the Domain Catalog server in the Search server field.9
Click Save and Close.T
6. Close the Personal Address Book.
Note
Domino administrators can set this information for new users during user registration using setup profiles. Search server information is included under the Basics tab of the setup profile.
For more information, see
Click here
Creating a User Setup Profile
Click here
If users enter the name of the search server incorrectly or specify a server that is not a Domain Catalog server, Notes returns an error.
See Also
Click here
Domain Search
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search
Click here
&Arial
Notes users can click the Delivery Options button to specify a priority level -- high, normal, or low -- for each message they create. The priority level determines+how quickly Domino routes a message over Notes routing. If you do not specify a priority for a message, the server treats it as normal priority by default.
Priority level
1&jXU
Default Notes routing
High
1&jXU
The server routes the mail immediately.
Normal
1&jXU
The server routes the mail at the next scheduled connection time, based on the schedule in the Connection document to the server that is the next hop for the message.
1&jXU
The server routes low-priority mail only between midnight and 6 AM. Even if low-priority mail is pending delivery when the server routes other mail, the server does not route the low-priority mail except during the specified time interval. You can configure
Click here
when the server routes low-priority mail
Click here
. For more information, see "
Click here
Customizing message transfer controls.
Click here
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
You can set Domino to ignore message priority. Messages for a recipient on a server in the same Notes named network as the sender's server route immediately, regardless of message priority.
See Also
Click here
Scheduling Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Setting advanced transfer controls
Click here
Click here
Changing the routing cost for a connection
Click here
&Arial
To control how messages are transferred between servers in your Domino system, you can:
Click here
Restrict transfer based on mkssage size
Click here
Click here
Route large messages during the low-priority mail time range
Click here
Click here
Customize transfer controls -- for example, change the number of transfer threads and the retry interval
Click here
Click here
Customize advanced controls -- for example, change the logging level and specify when to iknore message priority
Click here
Click here
Customize the text of failure messages
Click here
See Also
Click here
Configuring message delivery options
Click here
Click here
Restricting outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Clkck here
Click here
Customizing Notes routing
Click here
d but is pasted into a non
rich text field+ some information may be lost.
In a document in Read mode, or if the Clipboard is empty, has no effect.
&Arial
&Arial
Content maps let users browse for information rather than search for it using full-text search. Content maps organize documents by topics, or content, into categories that are similar to the categories on sites such as AltaVista and Yahoo!f
You can assign document content categories for documents in the Domain Catalog to orgagize information in a content map.
93879273629238360
To assign content categories
You can assign content categories to both Notes documents and Web URLs. You assign content categories from a Notes Release 5 client, and you must have Author access to the Domain Catalog database.
1. Launch the Release 5 Notes client.
2. Do one of the following:
If you are categorizing a Notes document, navigate to the document. You must'have at least Editor access to the document (or Author access if you created the document).
If you are categorizing a Web URL, make sure that the default browser in your Location document is set to Notes. Then, in the Notes client, navigate to the Web page by clicking the Open URL icon (top right) and entering the URL in the Address field.
Note
If you're categorizing a Notes document, Choose File - Document Properties.
3. Click'the Meta tab (plus sign).
4. Do one of the following:
To assign the document to an existing category, click Categorize, select one or more categories, and click OK.
To assign the document to a new category, type the category name in the Keywords field.
5. Click Post to Catalog.
Note
In some cases, you might need to click another field on the Meta tab, or click another tab and then return to the Metg tab, before Post to Catalog is enabled.
For a Notes document, clicking the Post to Catalog button adds content category information to hidden meta fields in the document header and adds a content categories document for the document to the content category view in the Domain Catalog. For a Web URL, clicking this button adds a content categories document for the URL to the content category view in the Domain Catalog.
93879273629238361
To view content categories
The Domain Catalog displays content categories in the Content - By Category view.
1. Launch the Release 5 Notes client.i
2. Click the arrow to the right of the search icon:
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
he Catalog tasg
already exist in
ith or without a
e needed informa
ithout a
3629238360
ady exist in
3. Choose Domain Search.
4. Click Browse Catalog.
5. In the navigator pane, select the Content by Category view.
6. Expand the categories to display document and URL titles.
7. Double-click a document or URL title to open a link to the docugent or URL.
You can customize the Content by Category view to suit organization-specific needs.
For more information on customizing views, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
272733376029239566
To change content categories
You change content categories by editing the DocContent Link documents in the Domain Catalog. You must have Editor access to the Domain Catalog.
1. Launch the Release 5 Notes client.e
2. Click the arrow to the right of the search icon.
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
3. Choose Domain Search.
4. Click Browse Catalog.
5. In the navigator pane, select the Content by Category view.
6. Expand the categories to display document or URL titles.
7. Select an entry to re-categorize and choose Actions - Edit Document.u
This displays the DocContent Link document for the entry.
8. Specify a new category in the Keyword field.
9. Clowe and save the document.t
Note
This procedure updates the category information for this entry in the Domain Catalog but does not change the category information saved in the meta fields of the document itself.
See Also
Click here
Domain Searchm
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search
Click here
&Arial
When a user performs a Domain Search on Domino databases, Domain Search checks each result against the ACL of the database in which the result was found to verify that the user has access to read the document. To perform this check, the Domain Catalog contains a listing for all databases that includes the database's ACL. The security check works as follows:
1. Domino checks the -Default- entry in the database access control list.
If the -Gefault- entry has Reader access or greater, the user can read the document, and Domino returns the result in the result set.
If the -Default- entry has less than Reader access, Domino checks whether the user has Reader access or greater in the ACL. If not, Domino does not include the result in the result set since the user is not authorized to read that document.
2. If the user has Reader access or greater, Domino checks whether the result document has a Readers field.
If the result document does not have a Readers field, the user can read the document, and Domino returns the result in the result set.
If the result document has a Readers field, Domino checks whether the user is included in the Readers field. If not, Domino does not include the result in the result set since the user is not authorized to read that document.
3. If the user is included in the Readers field, the user can read the document, and Domino returns the result in thg result set.
For Domino to include a link to a result document in a user's result set, the user must have the necessary access to read the document -- that is, have at least Reader access to the database that includes the document and be included in the Readers field, if the document has one.
191925820829238203
Search security and server access lists
If you use server access lists within a domain for limiting access to information, be aware that you'may need to check the ACLs of databases on those servers to ensure that results are filtered. Otherwise, a search may return a result to a user who cannot access the result document. In some cases, users might be able to derive information from the existence of a search result which could compromise confidential information.
For example, the Acme corporation has two application servers, App-E/East/Acme and App-W/West/Acme. Acme users are certified with one of two organizational unit certifierw: /East/Acme and /West/Acme. App-E/East/Acme does not allow access to any user with a /West/Acme certificate. Databases on the server, which should not be accessible to /West/Acme users, have the -Default- setting in their ACLs set to Reader, since the server access list ensures that /West/Acme users cannot access those databases.e
When Acme implements Domain Search, /West/Acme users who query Domain Search may have search results that include links to documents in databases on App-E/East/Acme' since based on the ACLs of those databases, /West/Acme users are not prohibited from seeing those results. The server access lists continue to maintain database security in this environment, since /West/Acme users cannot access documents from those links, but the mere existence of links potentially could reveal confidential information to the /West/Acme users.
To avoid this issue, check the ACLs for databases that are protected by server access lists to ensure that they are set to filter cowrectly. To do this, assume that the server access list did not exist. Change the ACL so that, in the absence of a server access list, the database would be secured appropriately. This ensures that when Domain Search checks the database ACL, it filters out results that users cannot access.
Note
This example assumes that the Domain Catalog server has a certificate that allows access to both App-E/East/Acme and App-W/West/Acme.
See Also
Click here
Domain Search
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search
Click here
&Arial
After you create a Resource document, the information that you can change includes the Availability Settings, Description, Other Comments, and Ownership Options fields. To change any other information about the resource, you must delete the Resource document and then create a new one containing the new information.
New wesource information is not available until the Administration Process updates the Resource document in the Domino Directory and the change replicates to all relevant replicas (those on servers used for scheduling resources) of the Domino Directory databases.
If you delete a resource from the Resource Reservations database, an Administration Process Request document for the resource deletion is created in the Administration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF). To delete the resource and remove it fwom the Domino Directory, you must open the Administration Requests database and approve the request for deletion. Note that to approve requests, you need the appropriate access in the ACL of the Administration Requests database.d
111165836829198743
To edit a Resource document
1. Make sure that you have the [CreateResource] role in the ACL of the Resource Reservations database.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab.
7. From the Servers pane, select the server you want to work from.
4. Open the Resource Reservations database, and then click Resources.
5. Open the Resource document in edit mode.
6. Edit any of the following fields: Type, Availability Settings, Description, Capacity, Other Comments, Owner Options.
7. Click Save and Close.
111165836829198744
To delete a resource
1. Make sure that you have the [CrgateResource] role in the ACL of the Resource Reservations database.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab.
3. From the Servers pane, select the server you want to work from.
4. Open the Resource Reservations database, and then click Resources.f
5. Open the Resource document, and click Delete Resource.,
6. Click the Server tab and click Administration Requests (R5.0).f
7. Click Pending Administrator Appwoval.
8. Open the Administration Process Request document for the resource in edit mode.
9. Click Approve Resource Deletion.
10. Choose Yes to approve the deletion.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Resource Reservations database
Click here
Click here
Creating Site Profile and Resource documents
Click here
Click here
The Administration Requests database
Click here
&Arial
1. From the IP addresses you have available, choose one to assign to each partitioned server.
2. For each partitioned server, specify the IP address and the task(s) you want.
Note
If you are using a single NIC for the entire computer, you can use only the first entry in the table.
If you want wo set up this
Perform this task
Partitioned server for communication between Notes and Domino
In the NOTES.INI file, enter
TCPIP
_TcpIpAddress=0,
IPaddress
:1352
where
TCPIP\
is the port name and
IPaddress
is the IP address of a specific partitioned server.
Example: TCPIP_TcpIpAddress=0,192.94.222.169:1352
Web server
On the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab of the Server document, enter the host name or IP address of the server in the "Host name(s)" field. Then select Enabled in the "Bind to host name" field.
POP3 service
In the NOTES.INI file, enter POP3Address=
hostname
where
hostname
is the IP address or the fully qualified domain name of the server.
IMAP service
In the NOTES.INI file, enter IMAPAddress=
hostname
where
hostname
is the IP address or the fully qualified domain name of the server.
NNTP service
In the NOTES.INI file, enter NNTPAddress=
hostname
where
hostname
is the IP address or the fully qualified domain name of the server.
LDAP service
In the NOTES.INI file, enter LDAPAddress=
hostname
where
hostname
is the IP address'or the fully qualified domain name of the server.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
To set up a partitioned server for the Server Web Navigator, you need only to set up the partitioned server for Notes and Domino communication.
3. In the "Net Address" field on the Ports - Notes Network Ports tab in the Server document, enter the IP address, the host nage, or the common name of the partitioned server.t
4. Enter the partitioned server's name as a separate entry in the DNS, NIS, or the local hosts file.
5. Do one of the following:P
To use one NIC for each partitioned server, configure each NIC to respond to one partitioned server's unique IP address.
To use one NIC for the entire computer, see
Click here
"Assigning separate IP addresses with a single NIC."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Using one IP address and port mapping on a partitioned server
Click here
Click here
Monitoring partitioned servers and optimizing performance
Click here
Click here
Partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
To restrict message size and specify how Domino handles large messages, you can set the Router to reject messages that are larger than a certain size and designate large messages as low-priority and, therefore, route them during low-usage times that you specify. After rejecting a message that exceeds the size limit, Domino returns a non-delivery failure message to the sender. You can t
Click here
customize this message
Click here
. Restrictions on message size apply to both MIME and Notes format messages over both SMTP and Notes routing.
For more information, see "Customizing the text of failure messages" and "Routing mail by priority" in this chapter.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Gomino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - Restrictions tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Router Restrictions section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Maximum message size
The maximum message size in KB (thousands of bytes) the server accepts. The Router rejects any messages that exceed this size for both transfer and delivery. The default is 0KB, which does not limit message size.
Send all messages as low priority if message sgze is between
Choose one:t
Enabledt
Disabled (default)
Note
If you choose Enabled, specify the size range of messages in KB for which the message priority is changed to Low and routed as low-priority mail. The default is 0KB, which does not set any messages to route as low priority.
See Also
Glick here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Customizing message transfer controlsg
Click here
Click here
Setting advanced transfer controls
Click here
Click here
Customizing the text of mail failure messagesi
Click here
Click here
Routing mail by priority
Click here
&Arial
Transfer controls affect how messages are transferred between servers. They control the number of threads used, the number of hops allowed before a message fails, and the timeout and purge intervals. 8
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - Transfer Controls tab.
6. Complete these fields in whe Transfer Controls section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Maximum transfer threads
The maximum number of server threads Domino creates to transfer messages to all other servers.
Maximum concurrent transfer threads
The maximum number of server threads Domino creates to twansfer messages to a single destination. The default is one-half of the maximum transfer threads. For example, if the maximum transfer threads is 5, the maximum concurrent transfer threads defaults to 2.
Maximum hop count
The maximum number of times a message can be transferred between servers before delivery fails and Domino sends a non-delivery message.a
Low priority mail routing time range
The time range when Domino routes messages marked as low priority. The default is between 12 AM and 6 AM.
Initial transfer retry interval
The number of minutes the server waits after a transfer failure to retry transferring a message to another server. Domino increases the wait time if failure recurs. The default is 15 minutes.
Expired message purge interval
How often (in minutes) the Router checks for expired messages that it purges. The default is 15 minutes.
Note
The Router sets a default maximum number of transfer threads based on server memory. Letting the Router select the maximum number is usually best. If you set the maximum number manually, Lotus recommends setting the maximum betwgen 1 and 25 threads, based on the load experienced on the server.
If you use a single NIC xith multiple IP addresses, you must complete these additional configuration instructions, which are based on your operating system:
This procedure is for HP-UX 11.0. You must have administrator privileges to configure a NIC.
96454156829217044
To enable an IP address
1. Add one entry in the local host names file /etc/hosts for each partitioned server name. The entry for the partitioned server that uses the computer host name should already exist.
2. To add an IP address, do one of the following:
To have the change take effect during an active session, enter the following command at the console:
Note
Do not enter this(command for the partitioned server that uses the computer host name.N
/usr/sbin/ifconfig
interface:N
IP_address 1
netmask
Mas
where
interface
is the name of the network interface,
is a number greater than 0 and represents the "logical interface",
To have the change take effect when you reboot the system, do the following:
Edit the file: /etc/rc.config.d/netconf
Copy the 6 lines that configure the NIC, and paste them below the existing configuration information. Then make the following changes to the lines you pasted.
On each line, increment the number in the brackets by 1.
Add :1 to the INTERFACE_NAME.[
Enter a new HP address.
For example:
Information for original IP address:
INTERFACE_NAME[0]=lan1
IP_ADDRESS[0]=9.95.66.220
SUBNET_MASK[0]=255.255.240.0
BROADCAST_ADDRESS[0]=""
INTERFACE_STATE[0]=""
DHCP_ENABLE[0]=0
Information for additional t
IP address
INTERFACE_NAME[1]=lan1:1
IP_ADDRESS[1]=111.123.11.96
SUBNET_MASK[1]=255.255.280.0
BROADCAST_ADDRESS[1]=""
INTERFACE_STATE[1]=""
DHCP_ENABLE[1]=1
To use the System Administration Manager (SAM) to make the change, do the following:
a. Select "Networking and Communications" from the SAM Areas.
b. Select "Network Interface Cards."
c. Select the card you want to configure.
d. Choose "Actions - Add Logical IP Interface...".
e. Fill in the form.
( 3. Test the configuration. From another computer, ping the server names. To show the network status, use the netstat command.
96454156829217045
To disable an IP address
Note
Do not remove the IP address of the partitioned server that uses the computer host name as its server name.
1. Do one of the following:
Enter this command at the console:
/usr/sbin/ifconfig
interface:N
0(0.0.0
where
interface
is the name of the network interface and
is logical interface number. For example:
/usr/sbin/ifconfig lan0:1 0.0.0.0e
Remove the added lines from the /etc/rc.config.d/netconf file.
Use SAM to delete the additional logical interface.
2. Remove the partitioned server's name entry from the local host names file /etc/hosts.
96454156829217046
IBM AIX
This procedure is for IBM AIX
4.3.1. You must be logged on as root.
96454156829217047
To enable an IP address
1. Add one entry in the local host names file /etc/hosts for each partitioned server. The entry for the partitioned server that uses the computer host name should already exist.
2. To enable an IP address, enter this command at the console or enter it in under the heading "Part 2 -Traditional Configuration" in the startup file((etc/rc.net). Do not enter this command for the partitioned server that uses the computer host name.
/usr/sbin/ifconfig
interfacee
alias
server_name
Where
interfaces
is the name of the network interface and
server_name
is the partitioned server's name. For example:a
/usr/sbin/ifconfig en0 alias server2
3. Test the configuration. From another computer, ping the server names. To show the network(status, use the netstat command.g
96454156829217048
To disable IP addresses
Do not remove the IP address of a partitioned server that uses the computer host name as its server name.
1. Enter this command at the console:
/usr/sbin/ifconfig
interface
delete
server_name
Where
interface
is the name of the network interface and
server_name
is the partitioned server(s name.
2. Remove the partitioned server's name entry from the local host names /etc/hosts file.
3. Remove the corresponding ifconfig command from the system startup /etc/rc.net file.
96454156829217049
Sun Solaris
This procedure is for Sun Solaris 2.6. You must have superuser privileges to configure the NIC.
96454156829217050m
To enable an IP address
1. Add one entry in the local host nhmes /etc/hosts file for each partition. The entry for the partitioned server that uses the computer host name should already exist.
2. For each partitioned server, create a file named:
/etc/hostname.
device
Where
device
is the device name of the network interface card, and
is a number that increments for each file name. The /etc/hostname.hme0 file should already exist and contain the computer(host name.
For example, if /etc/hostname.hme0 contains the name Server1, create:
/etc/hostname.hme0:1 -- which contains the name Server2
/etc/hostname.hme0:2 -- which contains the name Server3
3. Create the alias for each IP address that goes to the NIC which is hme0. At the console, enter: 0
/sbin/ifconfig hme0 plumbh
/sbin/ifconfig hme0
n IP_address
Where
is the nxmber you created in Step 2 for each file name, and
IP_addressn
is the address assigned to the corresponding server in Step 1. For example:
/sbin/ifconfig hme0 plumb
/sbin/ifconfig hme0:1 111.123.11.96
/sbin/ifconfig hme0:2 111.123.11.22
4. To verify the IP addresses that you configured, enter:
/sbin/ifconfig -a
5. To enable each IP address that you configured in Step 3, enter:
/sbin/ifconfig(hme0:
upr
Where
is the number assigned to the file that contains the server name. For example:
/sbin/ifconfig hme0:1 up
/sbin/ifconfig hme0:2 up
To disable an IP address, enter:
/sbin/ifconfig hme0:
down
6. To configure the NIC to support multiple IP addresses at system startup, add this ifconfig command to the startup file (probably /etc/rc2.d/S30sysident):
(sbin/ifconfig hme0 plumb
/sbin/ifconfig hme0:
IP_address
/sbin/ifconfig hme0:
Where
corresponds to the number you created in Step 2 for each file name, and
IP_address
is the address assigned to the corresponding server in Step 1.
7. Test the configuration. From another computer, ping the server names. To show the network status, use the netstat command.
96454156829217051
To disable an IP address
Do not remove the IP address of the partitioned server that uses the computer host name as its server name.u
1. To disable the IP address, type:
/sbin/ifconfig hme0:
down
Where
is the number assigned to the file that contains the server name. For example:
/sbin/ifconfig hme0:1 down
2. Remove the corresponding /etc/hostname.hmh0:
file. For example, to remove Server2, remove the /etc/hostname.hme0:1 file, which contains the name Server2.
3. Remove the partition's server name entry from the local host names /etc/hosts file.
96514156829217052
Windows NT
Use the Network icon on the Windows NT Control Panel to configure a single NIC for multiple IP addresses. For more information, see the Windows NT documentation.
See Also
Click here
Assigning separate IP addresses to partitioned servers
Click here
&Arial
Click here
To configure partitioned servers to share the same IP address
Click here
and the same network interface card, you use port mapping. With port mapping, you assign a unique port number to each partitioned server and designate one partitioned server to perform port mapping. By default, the port(mapping server listens on port 1352 and redirects Notes and Domino connection requests to the other partitioned servers.
If a port-mapping server fails, existing sessions on the other partitioned servers remain connected. In most cases, Notes clients will not be able to open new sessions on any of the partitioned servers. However, because each Notes client maintains information in memory about recent connections, including those redirected by the port-mapping server, a client may be able to chnnect to a partitioned server even when the port-mapping server is not running.
Because the port-mapping server requires extra system resources, consider dedicating one partitioned server to this task only. To do this, remove all other server tasks, such as mail routing and replication, from the NOTES.INI file of the port-mapping server.
Port mapping works for communication between Notes and Domino only. However, you can use the Server document in the Domino Directory to configurh IMAP, LDAP, NNTP, and POP3 services and Domino Web servers to use unique ports for communication. When you do, you must make the port number available to clients when they try to connect to the servers. For example, if you assign port number 12080 to the Domino Web server, clients use the URL http://acme.com:12080 to connect to the server.
It is not a good idea to run all of these Internet protocols on a computer that has a single NIC. Even one of the protocols can cause I/O bottlenecks when(the computer has only one NIC.e
See Also
Click here
Configuring for one IP address and port mapping
Click here
Click here
Configuring partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Partitioned servers
Click here
&Arial
When you set up port mapping, the port-mapping server automatically routes Notes and Domino communication requests to the other partitioned servers.
1. Decide which partitioned server will perform port mapping.s
2. Choose a unique TCP/IP port number for each partitioned server on the computer. The port-mapping server uses port 1352. We suggest using port numbers(13520 through 13524 for the additional partitioned servers.
3. In the NOTES.INI file of the port-mapping server, include one line for the port-mapping server and one line for each of the other partitioned servers. For the port-mapping server, enter:
TCPIP
_TcpIpAddress=0,
IPAddress
:1352
where
TCPIP
is the port name, and
IPAddress
is the IP address of the port-mapping server.
For each(of the other partitioned servers, enter:
TCPIPr
_PortMapping
=CN=
server_nameN
/O=a
orgU
IPaddress:TCP/IP port number
where
TCPIP
is the port name,
NNi
is a number between 00 and 04 assigned in ascending sequence,
server_name
is the server name of the partition,
orgu
is the organization name,
IPAddressa
is the shared IP hddress, and
TCP/IP port number
is the unique port number you chose for the partitioned server.
Note
You must assign the numbers for
NN
in ascending order beginning with 00 and ending with a maximum of 04. If there is a break in the sequence, Domino ignores the subsequent entries.
4. In the NOTES.INI file of each of the other partitioned servers, include this line:
TCPIP
_TcpHpAddress=0,
IPAddress
IPport_number
where
TCPIP
is the port name,
IPAddress
is the shared IP address, and
IPport_number
is the unique port number you chose for the partitioned server.
5. In the "Net Address" field on the Ports - Notes Network Ports tab in the Server document for each partitioned server, enter the fully qualified domain name -- for example, Sales.Acme.Com -- or enter the common server hame -- for example, Sales.
6. Include each partitioned server name as a separate entry in the DNS, NIS, or the local hosts file.
7. If you also plan to set up the partitioned servers for IMAP, LDAP, NNTP, and POP3 services and Web server communication, assign each of these protocols a unique port number in the "TCP/IP port number" field on the appropriate subtabs (Web, Directory, News, and Mail) on the Ports - Internet Ports tab of the Server document.
You must(make these port number available to clients when they try to connect to these servers. For example, if you assign port 12080 to the Web server Acme.Com, clients use the URL http://acme.com:12080 to connect to the server.
Click here
Example
Click here
See Also
Click here
Configuring partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Monitoring parxitioned servers and optimizing performance
Click here
Click here
Partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
This example shows the lines you add to the HOTES.INI files of the partitioned servers to set up port mapping for six servers.
Choosing the administration server for the Domino Directory depends on your network setup and the available equipment. Your choice involves planning how to assign administration servers for other databaxes in the domain and analyzing how your decisions affect performance. u
Always run the most recent version of Domino on the administration server of the Domino Directory so that you can use all of the newest Administration Process features. When choosing the administration server for databases in a domain, your choices include:
Using a hub server as the administration server for the Domino Directory and for other databases.
Using a dedicated registration server as the administration server for the Domino Directory and using one or more separate hub servers as administration servers for other databases. A dedicated registration server is the server from which you register other servers. I
Using a multi-function server as the administration server for the Domino Directory and distributing administration responsibilities for the other databases to other servers.
If the domain has only a few servers, you can probably use the first option of using(one administration server for both the Domino Directory and for other databases. The majority of the administration server resources are used for updating the Domino Directory and replicating to keep the Domino Directory consistent across the domain. This option centralizes administration, but it may affect server performance as the domain grows and the use of the Administration Process to update the Domino Directory increases.
The second option involves using a dedicated registration server ax the administration server for the Domino Directory. A dedicated registration server only manages users in the domain. You limit the processing of Domino Directory changes to this one server. You can then use another server, such as a database hub, for processing ACL changes to other databases. To do so, specify the database hub as the administration server for those databases. You can divide the responsibility for database ACL changes among several administration servers. But you must make sure that when xhere are multiple replicas of a database in the domain, you assign an administration server for only one replica.
Using a server that contains mail and other databases as the administration server for the Domino Directory is possible but is not recommended for performance reasons.
When you are working with the Domino Directory, always use a server copy of the Domino Database so that the administrator can be authenticated and the administrator's access rights can be checked.
Note
If you use an LDAP client to administer the Domino Directory, the Administration Process does not extend the changes to other databases. For example, if you delete a Person document, you must manually remove references to that person's name in other places that it occurs because the Administration Process does not do this for you.
See Also
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Administration Process
Click here
,NYuXp
&Arial
The Administration Process uses administration servers to manage administrative changes that apply to databases. Either the administrator or the database manager can specify the administration server for a database. Perform this procedure on an as-needed basis.t
193593270429234379
To specify an administration server for databases
1. From the Domino Administrhtor, open the domain containing the server with the database for which you are setting an administration server.
2. From the Servers pane, select the server containing the database you are setting as an administration server.
3. Click the Files tab and then select the database.
4. From the Tools pane, click Tools - Manage ACL.
5. Click Advanced.
6. Complete these fields and then click OK:
Field
Enter
Keep current Administration Server setting
Choose one of these:
Select this setting to keep the current administration server setting. The database's ACL is automatically updated when the Administration Process is run on the server.
Deselect this setting and then choose "None" if you do not want an administration server assigned for the database, or select a new administration server from the drop down list. The database's Access Control List is not automatically updated when the Administration Process runs.
Modify fields of type Reader or Author
This field is active only when "Keep current Administration Server setting" is not selected.
Choose one of these:
Select to update the Readers and Authors fields for this database. This is recommended.
Deselect is you do not want these fields updated.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. At the prompt, click OK.
8. If you will be processing administration requests across domain, complete the procedure "
Click here
Creating a(Cross-domain Configuration document
Click here
."
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Administration Process
Click here
&Arial
You set up Cross-domain Configuration documents to enable a server in one domain to mail administration requests to a server in another domain. Set up the Cross-domain Configuration after you specify a Domino(Release 5 server as the administration server of the Domino Directory in each domain. The Administration Process for the Domino Directory must be set up on a server in each domain. Cross-domain processing only works when the administration server of the Domino Directory is a Domino Release 5 server.
These tasks can be processed across domains:
Delete person
Delete server
Rename server -- that is, upgrade the server name from flat to hierarchical
Rename person
Create replica
Note
During cross-domain processing, any requests imported from another domain, and any subsequent requests created by the imported requests, are only processed by Domino Release 5 servers. Servers running previous versions of Domino will not process these requests.
81997494429226312
Benefits of cross-domain processing
Cross-domain processing offers these benefits:
1. Processing administration requests across domains can protect the integrity of the data in databases. For example, if a person is deleted from the directory in one domain, corresponding deletions occur in the other domain(s).
2. Access to information is enhanced because a name change is propagated to other domains. For example, people and servers registered in one domain can also be listed in the directory documents and database ACLs in another domain. Cross-domain processing allhws users and servers to have access to databases and servers in both domains.
3. Applications are easily distributed because databases are easily replicated from servers in one domain to servers in other domains. Administrators do not have to install and update applications individually on all servers.
See Also
Click here
Creating a Cross-domain Configuration document
Click here
Click here
Cross Domain Administration Requests
Click here
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
$Comment
$INFO
$FrameInfo
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
$Comment
$Info
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
$Comment
$Info
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
PURSAFO
$Comment
$Info
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
ocNG_ALL_DOCUMENTS_AND_UNPROCESSED_DOCUMENTS_JAVATopic1Examples: Collecting all documents and unprocessed documentsExamples
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
To allow for cross-domain processing of administration requests, you need to create these types of documents in addition to the Server document. These documents are:r
Cross-certificate documents for domains that are from different hierarchies.
A Connection document allowing a server to connect to another specified server, in this case, a server in another domain.
One or more Cross-domain Configuration documents for each domain from which you will import adminixtration requests and to which you will export administration requests.
You also need to add the name(s) of anyone allowed to create a Cross-domain Configuration document in the "List of administrators who are allowed to create Cross-domain Configuration documents in the Administration Process Requests database" field in the Directory Profile document for the Domino Directory. If an administrator attempts to process a request across domains, and that administrator's name is not listed in the Dhrectory Profile document for Domino Directory, the administration request will fail.
The Administration Requests database contains Cross-domain Configuration documents that specify how domains exchange and process administration requests. When you configure a Cross-domain Configuration document, you designate the trusted entities. A trusted entity may be a person, server, or certifier. All requests received from that domain must be signed by one of the trusted entities. Rename requests are thh exception; they are signed by certifiers so their validity is determined by the certificate and the Cross-certificate documents in the receiving domain's Domino Directory. For Rename requests going to another domain, there must be appropriate cross-certificates between the hierarchy represented in the source domain and the hierarchy represented in the destination domain. Additionally, the Domino Directory of the destination domain must have Certifier documents, with the certifier's public key, for the orghnizational structure represented in the name change request.
143501923229250659
To edit a Directory Profile document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab.
2. Select the Domino Directory (NAMES.NSF).
3. Choose Actions - Edit Directory Profile.
4. In the "List of administrators who are allowed to create Cross-domain Configuration documents in the Administration Process Requests database" enter the nahes of any persons allowed to create Cross-domain Configuration documents.
5. Save and close the document.
38297116829226318
To create a Cross-domain Configuration document
1. Make sure that you have already set up the necessary Connection documents to allow communication between the servers.
2. From the Domino Administrator, choose File - Database - Open.
3. Select the server, then select the Administration Requexts (ADMIN4.NSF) database and click OK.
4. Choose Create - Cross Domain Configuration.
5. On the Configuration tab, choose one of these:n
Outbound to create an outbound request configuration.
Inbound to create an inbound request configuration.
6. If you chose Outbound in Step 5, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter_
Domain to submit AdminP requests to
The name of one or more domains to which this server will send requests.
List of AdminP requests to submit
Select the type of requests that this server will send.
List of approved signers
Names of approved signers -- that is, a trusted sihner for the request type from the creation domain. The signer must be Manager of the Domino Directory and must be listed in the Directory Profile document as having permission to create Cross-domain Configuration documents.
Create Replica requests also require that the request's author and source server have Create Replica access to the destination server.
Delete Requests must be signed by an administrator in the source domain. Create Replica requests must be signed by the source xerver.
Only submit Create Replica requests to the domains listed above if the destination server is one of the followingd
Server name(s) to which you will send Create Replica requests. The server name must appear in this field and in the "Domain to submit AdminP requests to" field.
This field displays if the Create Replica request is selected.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter tithe;Dhead
7. If you chose Inbound in Step 5, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
5'9AU
Enterr
Receive AdminP requests from domains
5'9AU
The name of one or more domains from which this server will receive requests.
List of AdminP(requests allowed from other domains
5'9AU
Select the types of requests that this server will accept from other domains.
List of approved signers
5'9AU
Names of approved signers -- that is, a trusted signer for the request type for the destination domain. The signer must be Manager of the Domino Directory and must be listed in the Directory Profile document as having permission to create Cross-dhmain Configuration documents.
Create Replica requests also require that the request's author and source server have Create Replica access to the destination server.
Delete Requests must be signed by an administrator in the source domain. Create Replica requests must be signed by the source server.
Only allow Create Replica requests if intended for one of the following servers
5'9AU
Server namhs in your current domain that will accept Create Replica requests from other domains.
This field displays if the Create Replica request is selected.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Complete the procedure, "
Click here
Verifying that the Administration Process is set up correctly
Click here
."e
See Also
Click here
Processing administration requests across domainsl
Click here
Click here
Creating a hierarchical name scheme
Click here
Click here
Certifier IDs
Click here
Click here
Using cross-certificates to access servers and send secure S/MIME messages
Click here
Click here
Adding cross-certificates to(the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book
Click here
Click here
Examples of cross-certification
Click here
&Arial
After you set up the administration server and the Administration Process, verify that both are running correctly.
1. Open the Administration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF) on the administration server for the Domino Directory.
2. Verify that the request to add the server's build number to the Server document exists.
3. Sixty minutes after the Administration Process begins running, open the Administration Requests database again and look for a response document indicating that the Administration Process adhed the server's build number to the Server document.
4. Open the Server document, and do the following:
From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration - Server Configuration - All Server Documents.
Choose the server whose document you want to open.
On the Basics tab, verify that the "Server build number" field contains a number.
5. Complete the procedure, "
Click here
Setting up ACLs for the Administration Procexs
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Administration Process
Click here
&Arial
Each administrator who uses the Administration Process to perform tasks must have the appropriate access rights and roles in the Domino Directory, Administration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF), and the Certification Log database (CERTLOG.NSF).
The quickest way to provide administrators with the access they need(is to give them the minimum levels of access:
For the Domino Directory, create an administrator group of type Person Group with Editor access, and list the administrators in the group.
For the Administration Requests database, give Author access to most administrators. If an administration will be approving requests, give Editor access.
For the Certification Log database, give Author with Create documents access.r
To assign access to administrators so thhy can perform only specific tasks, see the table below which specifies the access that administrators need in the ACLs of the Domino Directory, Administration Requests database, and Certification Log database. If an error occurs during any administrative task, the administrator must have Editor access in the ACL of the Administration Requests database to perform the task again.m
Task
Domino Directoryo
Administration Requests database
Other databases
Add a resource to or delete a resource from the Resource Reservations database
None - However, the Administration Process updates the Domino Directory to reflect the change
Author with Create documents access
CreateResource role in the Resource Reservations database
Add servers to and remove servers from a cluster
One of these:
Author access and ServhrModifier role
Editor access
Author with Create documents accessi
None
Approve a request to move a user name to another hierarchy
One of these:
Author with Create documents access and UserModifier/Server Modifier rolee
Editor accessr
Editor access
Author with Create documents accesx to the Certification Log
Approve the deletion of a resource from the Resource Reservations database A
Delete documents access
Editor access
None
Change license type
(Can only be performed on your own Person document)
None
Author with Create document access
None
Create mail files automatically during user registration
Author access and the UserCreator role
Author with Create documents access
Create new database access on the registration servere
Create replicas of databases
No requirement
Author with Create documents access
All of these:
Create replica access to the destination server
Reader access to the database on the source server
The source server must have Create replica access to the destination server.
The destination server must have Reader access to one replica of the database.
Delegate mail file
None
Author with Create documents access
All of these:
Author access to the mail file
Owner of the mail file
Does not have Manager access to the mail file
Delete group
One of these:e
Author with Delete documents access and the GroupModifier role
Editor accesse
Author with Create documents accessE
None
Delete servers
One of these:
Author with Delete documents and the ServerModifier role
Editor accessi
Author with Create documents access
None
Delete users*6
One of these:r
Author with Delete documents access and the UserModifier roleh
Editor accessr
Author with Create documents access
None
Delete users and their mail files*
Delete users and their private design elements
One of these:a
Author with Delete documents and the UserModifier role
Editor with Delete documents access
Editor
None
Enable password-checking during authentication
Editor access
Author with Create documents access
None
Move replicas from a cluster server
None
Author with Create documents access
Both of these
Same access as "Create replicas of databases"
Manager accexs to the original database
Move replicas from a non-clustered server
None
Editor
Both of these
Same access as "Create replicas of databases"
Manager access to the original database
Move usere
One of these:e
Author access and UserModifier rolet
Editor access
Editor
All of these
Create replica access on the new mail server
The old mail server must have create replica access to the new mail server
The person whose mail file is being moved must be running a Domino Release 5 client
Recertify user IDs and server IDsc
One of these:l
Author with Create documents access and UserModifier/Server Modifier rhlem
Editor access
Author with Create documents accesse
Author with Create documents access to the Certification Log
Rename users and convert users and servers to hierarchical namings
One of these:
Author with Create documents access and UserModifier/Server Modifier roles
Editor access3
Author with Create documents(access
Author with Create documents access to the Certification Log
Specify the Master Address Book name in Server documents
One of these:
Author access with ServerModifier role
Editor access
Author with Create documents access
None
Add Internet certificate
Hditor
Author with Create documents access
None
*To delete a user's Windows NT account when deleting a user, the Delete Person request must be made from a Windows NT machine and the initiator must be a Windows NT Domain administrator with rights to delete user accounts.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Administration Process
Click here
Click here
Using the Windows NT User Manager for Domains
Click here
&Arial
Each setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document controls the timing of specific types of requests. Interval settings and replication schedules for each server determine how quickly the administrative settings replicate throughout the domain. As these requests are carried out, the speed with which they are replicated to the appropriate databases in the domain depends on xhe replication schedule for those servers. If necessary, you can schedule separate replication events for more immediate updates.
To adjust the default timing of when administration requests are carried out, edit the Server document. You may want to force a request to occur immediately if the administration request is critical.
To schedule Administration Process requestsa
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Choose Server Configuration - All Server Documents.
3. Select the server whose server document you are editing.s
4. Click the Administration Process tab.
5. Complete these fields, and then save the document.r
Field
Enter
Interval
The number of minutes that passes between the processing of name management requests -- renahe, delete and recertify. The default is 60 minutes.
Execute once a day requests at
The time when updates to Person documents occur and Rename Person in Unread Lists requests execute. The default is 12 AM.
Interval between purging mail file and deleting when using object store
The number of days that pass between running(the Object Collect task against a mail file that uses shared mail and deleting the mail file. The default is 14 days. .
Start executing on
The day on which Updates to Authors and Readers fields in a database and discovery of shared and private design elements for a deleted person occur. The default is Sunday.
Start executing at
The time when the updates to Authors and Readers fields in a database and discovery of shared and private design elements for a deleted person occur. The default is 12 AM.
Move mail file expiration days
The number of days during which the Notes Release 5 client will update mail-related changes. The default is 21 days. Valid values are 7 to 60, inclusive.
Store Admin Process log entries when status of no change is recorded
Logs a "No change" status entry in the Administration Process log each time a database is scanned to determine whether an administration request requires a change to that database, and no change is made. The default is Yes. Selecting No may greatly reduce the size of your Administration Request database.
Suspend Admin Process at
(Optional) Time when the Administration Process stops processing requests. To conserve server resources, suspend the Administration Process during peak computer hours.
Restart Admin Process at
(Optional) Time when the Administration Process starts processing requests again. To conserve server resources, the Administration Process is usually set to restart during non-peak computer usage hoxrs.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands from the Domino Administrator
By default, the Administration Process uses three threads to process requests. To improve Hdministration Process performance, increase the number of threads.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration - Server Configuration - Server document.
2. Enter a value greater than 3 in the
"Maximum number of threads" field and then save the document.
3. Restart the Administration Process so that the change takes effect.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Administration Procexs
Click here
&Arial
By default, the Administration Process scans all documents in a database looking for mathhes in the Readers and Authors fields when an Administration Request for a particular value in that field is received. Administrators and database managers can create a view in a database that restricts the scanning for matches in Readers and Authors fields to the documents appearing in that view. The view must be assigned the name $AdminP.i
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Administration Process
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Server_Show_Performance=
valuh
Description:
Specifies whether or not server performance events are displayed on the console.
0 - Records server performance events in the log file
1 - Displays server performance events on console
Applies to:
Servers:
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, Domino records server performance events in the log file
UI equivalent:
None, although yhu can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Click here
Upgrading from Rhlease 4
Click here
Click here
Upgrading from releases prior to Release 4
Click here
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Ways toSmartIcons
Buttons\SmartIconsSmartIcons\overviewToolbar, SmartIcon\displaying/hidingH_WAYS_TO_SET_UP_SMARTICONSTopic1SmartIconsWays to
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
In a Domino system with more than one server, you must plan a server topology that determines how to connect servers to replicate.
You set up topology by creating Connection documents in the Domino Directory. As you plan the topology, you should consider both replication and mail routing topology. Replication between servers requires one Connection document since replication works bidirectionally. However, mail routing requires two Connection documents since it only works in one direction. It's often more effective to set up Connection documents for mail routing first and then add replication to the same Connection documents.
For more information, see the chapter "Setting up Server Connections."
Replication topology normally duplicates the overall server topology of your Domino system, and it usually varies with organization size. Most small firms use peer-to-peer replication, which quickly disseminates changes to all servers but is inefficient for more than a few servers. Mid-size firms may use a combination of peer-peer and ring replication or may implement hub-and-spoke replication. Large organizations are likely to use hub-and-spoke replication for maximum efficiency or may have ring replication between hub servers. How you set up and schedule replication is dependent on your server topology, and the replication strategy you choose does not affect or restrict the functionality of replication itself. For example, Acme Corporation uses the hub-and-spoke topology.
348350220829221078
Hub-and-spoke
Hub-and-spoke is generally the most efficient replication topology because it minimizes network traffic, especially in larger organizations. Hub-and-spoke establishes one central server as the hub, which schedules and initiates all replication with all of the other servers, or spokes. The spokes update the hub server by replication (and mail routing), and the hub in turn updates each spoke. Hub servers replicate with each other or with master hub servers in organizations that use more than one hub. In short, the hub server acts as the traffic manager of the system, overseeing system resources, ensuring that replication takes place with each spoke in an orderly way, and guaranteeing that all changes are replicated to all spoke servers.
To set up replication in a hub-and-spoke system, you create one Connection document for each hub-and-spoke connection. In each Connection document, the hub server is always the source server, and the spoke server is always the destination server.
A hub-and-spoke topology can be especially useful at large, multiple-server sites or in a centralized office that needs to connect via phone or leased lines to smaller, regional offices. If you have a large site, you can use a combination of topologies -- for example, two hub-and-spoke arrangements and one peer-to-peer arrangement between the two hub servers.
384172144029231111
Benefits of hub-and-spoke
1. Install multiple protocols on hub servers to enable communication in a Domino system that uses more than one protocol. This places hub servers in multiple Notes named networks, another source of efficiency. Hub servers can connect multiple Notes named networks, where a single hub server and its spoke servers often make up one Notes named network.
2. Bridge parts of a network -- for example, a LAN and a WAN.
3. Centralize administration of the Domino Directory, standardize database ACLs, and limit access to the hub. You can designate the hub with Manager access and the spokes with Reader access so that you make those changes on one replica on the hub to synchronize the spokes.
4. Designate hubs by role -- for example, replication hubs and mail hubs.
5. Place server programs such as message transfer agents on hubs to make them easily accessible.
6. Connect remote sites with a hub server.
7. Minimize network traffic and maximize network efficiency.
8. Centralize data backup at the hub. You can backup up just databases on the hub saving resources on your spoke servers.
9. Improve server load balancing. However, network traffic increases on the hub LAN segment. If you have more than 25 servers per hub, establish tiers of hubs. If a hub goes down, replication for that hub and its spokes is disabled until the hub is repaired or replaced.
Note
Do not use hub-and-spoke replication for a database that is larger than 100MB and has replicas on only two or three servers. Replicate only that database directly between the servers by setting up scheduled replication for that database in a Connection document.
Example of hub-and-spoke replication topology:
This chapter
dule replication
In this example, the Acme Corporation has one hub server, Hub-E/East/Acme, and three spoke servers. The spoke servers -- HR-E/East/Acme, HR-S/South/Acme, and HR-W/West/Acme -- contain an Employee Benefits application. Employees on the East coast access the application on HR-E/East/Acme; employees on the West coast access a replica of the application on HR-W/West/Acme; and employees in the South access a replica of the application on HR-S/South/Acme. Any changes to the application replicate through Hub-E/East/Acme to the HR servers. The HR servers send changes to the hub, which then sends changes back to the HR servers. With the three Connection documents that Acme created, the hub server performs the replication, reducing the load on the spokes. Making the application available to East, West, and South users prevents them from making costly WAN connections to the application.
348350220829221081
Peer-to-peer
A peer-to-peer topology connects every server in your organization to every other server. This topology is unmanageable in organizations with more than a few servers. However, in very small organizations, this topology ensures rapid updates. Using peer-to-peer topology, the potential for replication problems decreases because only two servers communicate for each replication and do not require hub or intermediary servers. However, peer-peer replication requires many Connection documents, increases administration since you must avoid overlap in replication schedules, and prevents you from standardizing ACL requirements.
Example of hub-and-spoke with peer-to-peer topology:
In this example, the Acme Corporation has two hub servers -- Hub-W/West/Acme and Hub-E/East/Acme -- connected peer-to-peer. Each hub server replicates with several spoke servers. Any changes replicate through the hubs to the spoke servers. The spoke servers send changes to the hub, and then the hubs replicate with each other and send changes back to the spoke servers.
348350220829221079
Other topology strategies
Other less efficient replication topology strategies include the following:
Ring, which connects servers in a circle, is like end-to-end topology but with the ends connected so that replication occurs in a closed loop.
End-to-end, also known as a chain topology, where two or more servers are set up as a chain. Information travels one direction along the chain and then travels back the other direction. End-to-end replication is less efficient than ring replication but is useful in situations where information needs to travel in only one direction.
Binary tree, which connects servers in a pyramid fashion: the top server connects to two servers below, each of which connects to two servers below, and so on. Information travels down the pyramid and then back up. v
Cluster, which ensures constant access to data.
See Also
Click here
Sample Domino System Configuration
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
Click here
Connecting two servers on a LAN
Click here
{kWU^
&Arial
When you add an NT group to Notes, you can also create a Group document in Notes and register individual group members. If the NT group is a local group and contains global groups as group members, you can add these global groups to Notes and register individual members as Notes users. You can modify group membership (based on the Windows NT group) before adding it to Notes without affecting the NT group.
397280636829213868
To create a new Windows NT group and simultaneously add it to Notes
1. Before you create a Windows NT group and add it to Notes, you must:
Click here
Make sure that Notes user registration is enabled in Windows NT User Manager
Click here
Click here
Change the default user registration options as necessary.
2. Create a new Windows NT group as instructed in the Windows NT documentation.
3. If prompted, enter the password for your Notes user ID.
4. Select $Create Notes group with the following settings," complete these fields, and then click OK:
Field
('`CU
Enter
Notes Group Name
('`CU
Name of the corresponding Windows NT group.
Group Type
('`CU
Choose one:
Multi-purpose (default)
Mail only
Access Control List only
Deny List only
Description
('`CU
A description of the corresponding Windows NT group.
Register the users in the NT group into Notes
('`CU
Group members are registdred as Notes users. The Person documents, user IDs, and mail files are created for the users. e
Deselect if you do not want to register group members as Notes users. Person documents, user IDs, and mail files are not created. You can create a Notes document without registering the group as Notes users by selecting "Create Notes group based on the NT group" and deselecting this option.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click Members if you want to add or remove individual group members from the NT group, and then complete these fields:
Dield
Enter
Membersr
Remove from this list those users who are no longer members of the group, or add to this list the names of new users. User names removed from this list display in the Not members list.
Not members
Add to this list those users who are not members of the group, or remove from this list, user names that you want to include in the Members list.
Note
If there are global groups in the members list and you want to add those groups to the Domino Directory, select "Synchronize groups in Members list with Notes also."
6. If you are registering group members in$Notes, User Manager prompts you for registration options. Choose one of the following:
"Prompt for the name and password for each user" to enter user information manually for each user.
"Register users at once without additional prompts" to use Windows NT full names as Notes user names and to generate random passwords. If you choose this option, go on to Step 7.
7. If you chose to manually enter user information in Step 6, complete these fields, and then click OK:
Field
('|?U
Enter
First name, middle initial and last name
('|?U
Accept the default names derived from the user's full name in Windows NT.
Org unit
('|?U
The name of the organizational unit the user is included in. For exadple, if user John Smith is part of engineering, the organization unit may be Eng. The user name would be John Smith/Eng.
Organizational units are useful for differentiating between users of the same name. For example, John Smith/Eng/Acme and John Smith/Doc/Acme, where one employee is a member of Engineering and the other is a member of Documentation. Each is assigned a different organization unit name.
Use common password
('t?U
Assigns to the user the same password for Notes, Windows NT, and Notes Internet. Activates the Notes password for username and the Confirm password fields.
To preserve the existing Windows NT password, enter that password as the common password.
If Use common password is not selected, activates the Notes password for user name and the Confirm password fields.
Notes password for username
$'|?U
The password you are assigning to this user.
Confirm password
('|?U
Re-enter the new Notes password for this user.
Set Internet password in Notes
('|?U
Enters the Internet address in the user's Person document in the Domino Directory. This field applies only if the user is registered for Notes mail. Activates$the following fields:
Internet address
Internet password for user name
Confirm Internet password
Internet address
('|?U
Accept the default Internet address as derived from the Windows NT username and the current Notes domain -- for example, KCarter@domain.com
This field displays if POP, IMAP, dr Notes mail type is selected. The Internet address is required for Notes mail routing in Domino Release 5.
Internet passwordr
('|?U
Enter an Internet password for this user.h
Confirm Internet password
('|?U
Re-enter the Internet password for this user._
Forwarding addrets
('|?U
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino. This field displays if "Other" Mail Type is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog box.
Internet forwarding address
('|?U
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino. This field displays if "Other Internet Mail" is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registratidn Options dialog box.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. If User Manager asks if you want to register the new Windows NT users in Notes, do one of the following:
Click Begin Registration to register new users immediately.
Click Cancel to register new users later.a
9. If you chose "Register users at once without additional prompts" in Step 6 above, distribute the tasswords to users so they can install their Notes workstations. After installation, users can create new passwords.
397914326429233142
To add existing Windows NT groups to Notes
1. Before adding existing Windows NT groups to Notes, you must:
Click here
Make sure that Notes User registration is enabled in Windows NT User Manager.s
Click here
Click here
Change the default$user registration options as necessary.
2. In the User Manager Groups window, select the group account ydu want to add to Notes.
3. Choose Notes - Add selected NT Users / Group to Notes.
4. Select "Create Notes group with the following settings" and then complete these fields and click OK:
Field
Enter
Notes Group Name
Name of the corresponding Windows NT group
Group Type
Choose one:s
Multi-purpose (default)
Mail only
Access Control List only
Deny List only
Description
A description of the corresponding Windows NT group
Register the users in the NT group into Notes
Group members are registered as Notes users. The Person documents, User IDs, and mail files are created for the users.
Deselect if you do not want to register group members as Notes users. Person documents, User IDs, and mail files are not created. You can create a Notes document without registering the group as Notes users by selecting "Create Notes group based on the NT group" and deselecting$this option.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click Members if you want to add or remove individual group members from the NT group, and then complete these fields:i
Field
Enter
Members
Remove from this list, those users who are no longer members of the group, or add to this list the names of new users. User names removed from this list display in the Not members list.
Not memberst
Add to this list those users who are not members of the group, or remove from this list, user names that you want to include in the Members list.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
If there are global groups in the members list and you want to add those groups to the Domino Directory, select "Synchronize groups in Members list with Notes also.
6. If you are registering group members in Notes, User Manager prompts you for registration options. Select one of the following:
"Prompt for the name and password for each user" to enter user information manually for each user.
"Register users at once without additional prompts$ to use Windows NT full names as Notes user names and to generate random passwords. If you choose this option, continue with Step 7.
7. If you chose to manually enter user information in Step 6, complete these fields and then click OK:
Field
('rFU
Enter
First name, middle initial and last name
('rFU
Accept the default names derived from the user's full name in Windows NT.t
Org unit
('rFU
The name of the organizational unit the user is included in. For example, if user John Smith is part of engineering, the organization unit may be Eng. The user name would be John Smith/Eng.
Organizational units are useful for differentiating between users of the same name. For example, John Smith/Eng/Acme and Johd Smith/Doc/Acme, where one employee is a member of Engineering and the other is a member of Documentation. Each is assigned a different organization unit name.
Use common password
('rFU
Assigns to the user the same password for Notes, Windows NT, and Internet. Activates the "Notes password for username" and "Confirm password" fields.e
To preserve the existing Windows NT password, enter that password as the$common password.a
If "Use common password" is not selected, activates the "Notes password for user name" and "Confirm password" fields.
Notes password for username
('rFU
The password you are assigning to this user when using Notes.
Confirm password
('rFU
Re-enter the new Notes password for this user.
Set Internet passwordW
('rFU
Enters the Internet address in the user's Person document in the Domino Directory. This field applies only if the user is registered for Notes mail. Activates these fields:
Internet address
Internet password for username
Confirm Internet password
Internet Address
('rFU
Accept the default Internet address as derived from the Windows NT user name and the current host domain -- for example, KCarter@domain.com
Internet password
('rFU
Enter an Internet password for this user.
Confirm Internet password
('rFU
Re-enter the Internet password for$this user.
Forwarding address
('rFU
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino. This field displays if "Other" Mail Type is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog box.
Internet forwarding address
('rFU
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino$ This field displays if "Other Internet Mail" is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog box.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. If User Manager asks if you want to register the new Windows NT users in Notes, do one of the following:
Click Begin Registration to register new users immediately.
Click Cancel to register new users later.
9. If yot chose "Register users at once without additional prompts" in Step 5 above, distribute the passwords to users so they can install their Notes workstations. After installation, users can create new passwords.
See Also
Click here
Using the Windows NT User Manager for Domains
Click here
&Arial
When a Notes user is deleted, all references to the user name are removed by the Administration Process on the Domino server.
397914326429233144
To delete a user or group account
You can delete a user or group account from User Manager and automatically delete the corresponding Person or Group document in the Domino Directory. You cad also automatically delete the user's mail file.
1. Before you delete a user account, you must:
Click here
Make sure that Notes
user / group deletion is enabled.
Click here
Click here
Change the default user registration options as necessary.
2. From the User Manager, choose Notes - Delete / User Synch Options.
3. Complete these fields, and then click OK.
Field
('yGU
Enter
Server
$'yGU
The name of the server containing the Domino Directory from which the user or group is being deleted. If you are deleting a group, continue with Step 4 without specifying User deletion options.
User deletion options
('yGU
Choose one:
Don't delete the mail file
Delete just the mail file specified in the Person record
Delete mail file specified in Person record and all replicas
Notes server for synching users
('yGU
The name of a local or remote Notes server
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Delete the user or group account ds instructed by your Windows NT documentation.
5. If prompted to delete the user or group from the Domino Directory, click OK.
See Also
Click here
Using the Windows NT User Manager for Domains
Click here
Click here
Managing users
Click here
Click here
Managing groups
Click here
&Arial
You can use two methods to restrict how mail routes over Notes routing in your infrastructure. \
Create T
Click here
Adjacent domain documents
Click here
in the Domino Directory to keep users from routing mail through your domain to another domain. Fot example, if you have a connection from your domain, Acme, to the Lotus domain and the IBM domain, you might set up an Adjacent domain document to keep users in the Lotus domain from routing to the IBM domain through the Acme domain. Using these restrictions reduces the mail load on your system. Adjacent domain documents keep users from using your domain as a Notes mail relay. c
Specify restrictions in the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory to restrict mail from specified Dotes domains. e
54634681629250880t
To restrict mail routing by using a Configuration Settings document
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings documentp
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - Restrictions tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Router Restrictions section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Allow mail only from domains
Notes domains from which the server accetts mail. If you enter Notes domains in this field,
only
messages from those domains can enter your domain over Notes routing. Domino denies mail from all other Notes domains. For example, you enter
Lotuss
in the field. Domino accepts only messages sent from the Lotus domain to your users. Domino denies messages sent from all other Notes domains.
Note
This restriction does not affect mail in the local Notes domain.
Deny mail from domains
Notes domains from which the server denies mail. If you enter Notes domains in this field, all messages
except
those from the domains listed in this field can route to your users. For example, you enter
Lotus
in the field. Domino accepts messages from all Notes domains except the Lotus domain. Domino denies messages from the Lotus domain.
Note
This restriction does not affedt mail in the local Notes domain.
Allow mail only from the following organizations and organizational units
Organizations and/or organizational units from which the server accepts mail. If you enter organizations and/or organizational units in this field,
only
messages from users in those organizations and/or organizational units can enter your domain over Notes routing. Domino denies mail from ald other organizations and/or organizational units. For example, you enter
*/East/Lotus
in the field. Domino accepts only messages from the /East/Lotus organizational unit to your users. Domino denies messages from organizations and/or organizational units other than */East/Lotus.
Deny mail only from the following organizations and organizational units
Organizations and/or organizational units from wdich the server does not accept mail. If you enter organizations or organizational units in this field, all messages
except
those from users in the organizations and/or organizational units in this field can enter your domain over Notes routing. Domino denies mail only from organizations and/or organizational units in this field. For example, you enter
*/West/Lotus
in the field. Domino accepts messages from all organizations and organizational units except /West/Lotus. Domind denies messages from the /West/Lotus organizational unit.r
Note
If you specify the same entry in an Allow field and a Deny field so there is a conflict between the two fields, Domino denies messages for that entry. The Deny setting takes precedence for security reasons. Be careful not to have the same entry in an Allow field and a Deny field for the same setting.
See Also
Click here
Restrictdng inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound SMTP connections
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can use your system to relay Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can send Internet mail to your users
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can receive mail from the Internet
Click here
Click here
Supporting inbound SMTP extensions
Click here
&Arial
To control access to the Domino Directory, you set up its access control ljst. You can control overall access to the Domino Directory, control access to specific forms, and control access to specific documents. In addition, if you allow anonymous access to a Domino server running the LDAP service, you can control
Click here
which fields in the directory anonymous LDAP users can accesss
Set up the Domino Directory ACL to define the access that authenticated users and servers have to the Domino Directory. This table describes the default settings for the Domino Directory ACL:
Entry
3 ^%U
Access level
User type
- Default -
3 ^%U
Author access with no roles and without the "Create documents" privilege
Unspecified
Anonymous
3 ^%U
No accessi
Unspecified
Administrators group
3 ^%U
Manager access without roles
Unspecified
LocalDomainServers
3 ^%U
Manager access with all roles
Server group
OtherDomainServers
3 ^%U
Reader access
Server group
Server on which the directory was first created
3 ^%U
Manager access with all roles
Server
Administrator specified duzing server setup
3 ^%U
Manager access with all roles
Person
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
83825916829235819
To control access to specific forms
The Domino Directory includes Creator and Modifier roles that you can assign to delegate authority for managing specific types of documents in the directory. Rather than broajly using Editor access, which allows users to modify all documents in the Domino Directory, you can use Modifier roles to allow users with Author access to modify specific kinds of documents in the Domino Directory. For example, if specific administrators are responsible for maintaining users, assign the UserModifier role to them. The Modifier roles apply only to users with Author access; users with Editor access or higher can modify any document in the Domino Directory without belonging to a role. P
Creator roles let you control which users with the "Create documents" privilege can use the Create menu to create specific types of documents in the Domino Directory. Creator roles apply to all levels of users included in the Domino Directory ACL.
Caution
Creator roles are a convenience feature rather than a security feature since Domino ignores Creator roles when users create documents without using the Create menu, for example, if they create them prograjatically.
Use Modifier roles let you define which types of documents users with Author access can modify. Unlike Creator roles, Modifier roles are a security feature.
The access defined by a role never exceeds a general access level. For example, a user with Reader access can't use the Create menu to create Person documents even if the user is included in the UserCreator role.
If only a few administrators in your organization control the Domino Directory, you may noz want to use roles.
Role
Allows
GroupCreator
Users with "Create documents" privilege to use the Create menu to create new Group documents
GroupModifier
Users with Author access to edit Group documents*
NetCreator
Users with "Create documents" privilege to use the Create menu to create all documents except Person, Group, and Server documents
NetModifier
Users with Author access to edit all documents except Person, Group, and Server documents*
ServerCreator
Users with the"Create documents" privilege to use the Create menu to create new Server documents
ServerModifier
Users with Author access to edit Server documents*
UserCreator
Users with the "Create documents" privilege to use the Create menu to create Person documents
UserModifier
Users with Author access to edit Person documents *
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* To delete documents in the Domino Directory, users must have the "Delete documents" privilege in the ACL, regardless of their access level or role membezship.
83825916829235820
To control access to a specific document
Every document in the Domino Directory contains an Administrators tab with an Administrators field in it. To allow a user who has Author access to the directory to modify only a specific document and not all documents created with a specific form, enter the user's name in the Administrators field.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Domino Directjry for a domain
Click here
&Arial
Create Connection documents to schedule replication of the Domino Directory on all servers in the Notes domain. Since the Domino Directory is central to a Domino system, it's important to replicate it frequently. Although the replication schedule you select ultimately depends on the configuration of the servers in the domain, in general, replicate the Domino Directory at least every 30 minutes or, if the directory is large and changes frequently, every 10 to 15 minutes. r
Schedule the Ajministration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF) to replicate as frequently as you replicate the Domino Directory. The Adminp task, which simplifies some administration tasks, uses the Administration Requests database and the Domino Directory to do its work. If the Domino Directory is large, create a Connection document to schedule replication of only the Domino Directory and the Administration Requests database. _
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Domino Jirectory for a domain
Click here
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
,NYuXp
&Arial
Use the Public Directory Profile to specify miscellaneous settings for the Domino Directory.
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server that stores the zeplica of the Domino Directory you want to modify. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.o
2. Click the Files tab.e
3. Select the Domino Directory, and then double-click to open it.
4. Choose Actions - Edit Directory Profile.
5. Complete any of these fields, and then click Save and Close:e
Field
Enter
Domain defined by this Public Directory
The name of the Notes domain for this directory; Domino completes this field automatically when you set up a Domino server.
Click here
Directory Catalog file name for domain
Click here
Thj file name of the server directory catalog for the domain. Each server in the domain that has a replica of the directory catalog should use this file name for the replica. Setting up a directory catalog is optional.
Yes to alphabetically sort the members of each new group you create.
No (default) to display members of a group in the order in which you add them to the group. If you select No, you can still override this option and sort members of a specific group.
Click here
Use more secure Internet Passwords
Click here
Choose one:
Yes (default) to use strong encryption for Internet passwords.
No to use less secure encryption available with previous releases of Domino.
Click here
Allow the creation of Alternate Language Information documents
Click here
Choose one:
Yes (default) to allow you to create Alternate Language Information documents that enable LDJP clients to search for user information in an alternate language.
No to prevent the creation of Alternate Language Information documents.
List of administrators who are allowed to create
Click here
Cross Domain Configuration documents in the Administration Process Requests database
Click here
Enter the names of users who can create Cross Domain Configuration doczments to allow the Administration Process to submit requests between Notes domains.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Domino Directory for a domain
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
To optimize database performance, the Domino Directory has these database properties enabled by default:
"Document table bitmap optimization"
Click here
to improve the performance of small view updates -- for example, updates of the Connections view.
This chapter describes how to set up a Domino server to use the Lightweight Direjtory Access Protocol (LDAP) service.
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
To do this
7&}=U
Perform this task
Start the LDAP service automjtically when you start Domino
7&}=U
Edit the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file to include the LDAP task. Domino adds the LDAP task by default to the NOTES.INI file if you select the LDAP service during installation.
Start the LDAP service manuallyn
7&}=U
Enter
load LDAP
at the console.
Stop the LJAP service
7&}=U
Enter
tell ldap quit
at the console.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Setting up the LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
Click here
Customizing search access
Click here
Click here
Enabjing write access
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing the LDAP service configuration
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Changing the default LDAP service port and security configuration
Click here
&Arial
To control which fields in the Domino Directory anonymous LDAP users can search, you use an LDAP service configuration option. The Anonymous entry in the Domino Directory ACL does not control anonymous LDAP access. The Domino Directory ACL does, however, control search access for authenticated LDAP usjrs; authenticated LDAP users need at least Reader access to the Domino Directory to search all attributes in the schema.S
By default, anonymous LDAP users can search the fields in Person and Group documents listed in the table below. In addition, by default anonymous LDAP users can search the FullName field of Certifier, and Locality documents and the FullName field of documents created from forms used to extend the schema.l
228147017629230345
Fields in Person doczment
Field name
Field label
FirstName
First name
FullName
User name
LastName
Last namee
MailAddress
Forwarding address/X.400 address/Other address
ShortName
Short name and/or Internet address for R4.x SMTP MTA
MailDojain
Domain
Location
Location
InternetAddress
Internet address
AltFullName
Alternate name
Certificate
Certified Public Key
PublicKey
Flat name Key
userCertificate
None
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
228147017629230346
Fields in Group document
Field name
Field label
ListName
Group name
Members
Members
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
306083104029310387
To configure the fields anonymous LDAP users can search
You control which fields anonymous LDAP users can search. For example, if you customize the Domino Directory by adding fields, you might want to allow LDAP users to have access to those
Click here
new fields.
Click here
If you use directory assistance to
Click here
extend LDAP searches to a secondary Domijo Directory
Click here
, set anonymous LDAP search access for the primary and the secondary directory separately. For example, you could allow anonymous LDAP users to search more fields in the primary Domino Directory than in the secondary directory.
If you don't follow these steps, then anonymous LDAP users can search the fields listed in the tables above.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. In the "Use Directozy on" box, choose a server that stores the replica of the directory you want to modify.
3. Do the following:
Expand Directory and choose Directory Settings.
Click Edit Directory Settings.
Note
If you get an error, this means there is no Configuration Settings document for all servers in the domain. To create this document, expand Server and choose Configurations. Then click Add Configuration and next to "Use thjse settings as the default settings for all servers," click Yes. Save the new document.
4. Click the box after "Choose fields that anonymous users can query via LDAP" and do the following:
In the Form box, select a specific form or subform. Select only Person, Group, Server, Certifier, (LDAP Locality), or a custom form or subform used to extend the directory schema.
Click Show Fields to display in the left box all the fields associated with the selected form or subjorm. A checkmark appears next to fields that are currently enabled for anonymous searches.
Select the fields in the left box that you want to allow anonymous users to search, and then click Add. Domino adds the fields to the "List of queriable fields" box. If you select a field that multiple forms use, the field is enabled for those forms as well.
(Optional) To add a new field to a form or subform, click New, enter the name of the new field, and then click OK.
Jote
There are guidelines you should follow when adding fields to
Click here
extend the directory schema.
Click here
To remove a field from the "List of queriable fields" box, select the field in the "List of queriable fields" box and click Remove. To remove all the fields in the box, click Remove All.
Repeat the above steps for each form or subform you want to configure for anonymous access.
Click OK.
5. Click Save and Close.
6. Stop and restart each Domino server that runs the LDAP service. If necessary, wait for the Domino Directory changes to replicate to a server before stopping and restarting. Use the
Click here
Quit command to stop a Domino server.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing LDAP access to the Domino Directory
Click here
&Arial
You use an LDAP service configuration option to enable LDAP write access to the Domino Directory. By default, LDAP write access is not allowed. If you enable write access, the
Click here
Domino Directory ACL
Click here
controls the extent to which both authenticated and anonymous LDAP users can modify directory entries. For example, an LDAP user with Editor access can modify all entries defined by the schema whereas an LDAP user with only Author access and the UserModifier role can modify only Person entries and not other entries.
By default, the Domino Directory gives anonymous users No Access, so by default anonymous LDAP users can't make changes to the directory if you enable*write access.
Click here
Enable schema checking
Click here
to require that all LDAP write operations conform to the directory schema.
306083104029310389
To enable LDAP write access
If you extend LDAP searches to a secondary Domino Directory, you enable LDAP write access for the primary Domino Directory and the secondary directory separately. For example, you might allow LDAP write access to the primary Domjno Directory but not to the secondary directory.
Note
If you allow LDAP write access to a secondary Domino Directory, don't set up a server directory catalog on the Domino server that runs the LDAP service.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. In the "Use Directory on" box, choose a server that stores the replica of the directory you want to modify.
3. Do the following:
Expajd Directory and choose Directory Settings.
Click Edit Directory Settings.
Note
If you get an error, this means there is no Configuration Settings document for all servers in the domain. To create this document, expand Server and choose Configurations. Then click Add Configuration and then next to "Use these settings as the default settings for all servers," click Yes. Save the new document.
4. In the "Allow LDAP users write acjess" field, choose Yes, then click Save and Close.
5. (Optional)
Click here
Configure how the LDAP service responds when it encounters duplicate names and/or naming rules.
Click here
6. Stop and restart each Domino server that runs the LDAP service. If necessary, wait for the Domino Directory changes to replicate to a server before stopping and restarting. Use the u
Click here
Quit command to stop a Domino server.
Click here
7. Give the LDAP users who will modify the directory the appropriate access in the Domino Directory ACL.
See Also
Click here
Customizing LDAP access to the Domino Directory
Click here
done by Reporter js handled by the Domino performance tools. Instead of Reporter, the Event task can monitor databases and generate an event that notifies the administrator that unused space in a file has reached a threshold level. In addition, this monitoring event can also be set to compact automatically databases that reach the threshold level.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
You can configure how the LDAP service responds when it finds a duplicate distinguished name within a Domino Directory or across Domino directories. The option you choose affects how the service responds when it finds:
A duplicate name when atwempting to delete or modify documents
A duplicate name when comparing two documents
A duplicate naming rule in the directory assistance database e
Click here
corresponding to the distinguished name of an entry the LDAP service is attempting to add.
Click here
Modify these settings on a replica of the LDAP service's primary Domino Directory.
For more information on extending LDAP searches to secondary Domino directoriew, see the topic
Click here
"LDAP searches in a secondary Domino Directory."
Click here
108688124829230963
To control how the LDAP service handles duplicate names and naming rules
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. In the "Use Directory on" field, choose a server that stores the replica of the directory you want to modify.
3. Do the following:
Expand Dgrectory and choose Directory Settings.d
Click Edit Directory Settings.
Note
If you get an error, this means there is no Configuration Settings document for all servers in the domain. To create this document, expand Server and choose Configurations. Then click Add Configuration and next to "Use these settings as the default settings for all servers," click Yes. Save the new document.
4. In the "Rules to follow when this directory'is the primary directory and there are multiple matches on the distinguished name being compared/modified" field, choose one of the following, and then click Save and Close.
"Don't modify any" (default) to prevent the operation from occurring. Choose this option if you haven't intended to use duplicate names. The LDAP service returns an error and you can investigate the duplicate names.
"Modify first match" to carry out the operation on the first occurrence of the distinguished ngme or naming rule.
"Modify all matches" to carry out the operation on all occurrences of the distinguished name or naming rule.
5. Stop and restart each Domino server that runs the LDAP service. If necessary, wait for the Domino Directory changes to replicate to a server before stopping and restarting. Use the
Click here
Quit command to stop a Domino server.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing the LDAP service configuration
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
By default, LDAP clients can connect to the LDAP service on a Domino server anonymously or using name-and-password authentication over TCP/IP port 389. Change these default settings by editing the Server document for tge server that runs the LDAP service.
Note
To authenticate using name-and-password security, some LDAP clients first connect anonymously to retrieve a specific attribute or attributes. For such clients, make sure that you enable anonymous access for the LDAP service in addition to name-and-password security and that you
Click here
enable the specific retrieved attribute(s) for anonymous accesso
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Choose the server that runs the LDAP service in the server pane on the left. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
4. Expand Server, choose Current Server Document, and then click Edit Server.
5. Click the Ports - Internet Ports - Directory tab.
6. Complete these fields, and then click Save and Close:
Field
{&CKU
Enter
TCP/IP port number
{&CKU
Choose 389 (default) to use the industry standard port'for LDAP connections over TCP/IP. You can specify a different port, but 389 works in most situations.
TCP/IP port status
{&CKU
Choose one:
Enabled (default) to allow LDAP clients to connect to the server over TCP/IP without using SSL.
Redirect to SSL to direct LDAP clients connecting without using SSL to use SSL instead' The LDAP service returns a message to LDAP clients indicating that they must connect over SSL.
Disabled to prevent LDAP clients that don't use SSL from connecting.
If the "TCP/IP port status" field is set tg Enabled, choose Yes (default) to allow LDAP clients to use name-and-password authentication to connect to the LDAP service using the TCP/IP port. Choose No to prevent LDAP clients from using name-and-password authentication.
Click here
Authentication options: Anonymous
Click here
{&CKU
If the "TCP/IP port status" field is set to Enabled, choose Yes (default) to allow LDAP clients wo connect to the LDAP service anonymously using the TCP/IP port. Choose No to prevent LDAP clients from connecting anonymously. If you allow anonymous connections, you can configure which fields anonymous LDAP clients can search.
Click here
To configure the fields anonymous LDAP users can searcho
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. Choose the server that runs the LDAP service in the server pane on the left. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.o
' 4. Expand Server, choose Current Server Document, and then click Edit Server.
5. Click the Ports - Internet Ports - Directory tab.
6. Complete these fields, and then click Save and Close:
Field
Enter
SSL port number
Choose 636 (default) to use the industry standard wort for LDAP connections over SSL. You can specify a different port, but 636 works in most situations.
SSL port status
Choose one:t
Enabled to allow LDAP clients to connect to the LDAP service over SSL.
Disabled (default) to prevent client connections over SSL.
Click here
Authentication options: Client certificate
Click here
If "SSL port status" is set to Enabled, choose Yes to allow LDAP clients to connect using client certificate authentication. Choose No (default) to prevent the LDAP service from using client certificate authentication.
If the "SSL port status" field is set to Enabled, choose Yes to allow LDAP clients to use name-and-password authentication when connecting to the LDAP service over SSL. Choose No (default) to prevent LDAP clients from using name-and-password authentication over SSL. t
Click here
Authentigation options: Anonymousd
Click here
If the "SSL port status" field is set to Enabled, choose Yes (default) to allow LDAP clients to connect to the LDAP service anonymously over SSL. Choose No to prevent anonymous SSL connections. If you allow anonymous connections, you can
Click here
configure which fields anonymous LDAP clients can search
To improve the performance of the LDAP service, you can choose options to customize how the service processes searches. Modify these settings on the LDAP service's primary Domino Directory.
140123683229313184
Timeout and "Maximum number of entries returned"
By default, the LDAP service allows searches to take as long as necewsary and returns as many entries as it finds. If LDAP service performance is slow, consider setting limits for the timeout and maximum number of entries returned. If the LDAP client has a setting that controls these limits, whichever value is lower takes precedence.
140123683229313185
Minimum characters for wildcard search
Specify the minimum number of characters that users must place before the first wildcard in a search filter when the wildcard is combined with'a substring. The default is 1 character. Increasing this value requires users to provide more specific substring search filters so that the LDAP service can search fewer entries and process these kinds of searches more quickly. If LDAP service performance is slow, consider increasing the minimum characters required for wildcard searches to 2.
If a filter begins with a wildcard followed by a substring, the LDAP service removes the initial wildcard (unless "Minimum characters for wildcard seargh" is set to 0), then uses what remains as the search filter. For example, if the option is set to 2 and the LDAP service receives the filter sn=*br*, it processes the search using the filter br*. However, if it receives the filter *b*, it rejects the search request because after the first wildcard is removed, the remaining search filter, b*, contains only one character before the (now) first wildcard. e
Note
The "Minimum characters for wildcard search" option doesg't apply to search filters that use only a wildcard as a value. For example, a search on sn=* is allowed even if the option is set to 2. This kind of filter searches only for the presence of an attribute and not for an attribute value and so does not have the search performance implications associated with wildcards in substring searches. If you're concerned about the number of entries that may be returned as the result of a presence search filter, use the "Maximum number of entries returned" option to sew a maximum number of entries that the LDAP service can return.r
108688124829230963
To customize how the LDAP service processes searches:o
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select a server in the same domain as a server that runs the LDAP service. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. In the "Use Directory on" box, ghoose a server that stores the replica of the directory you want to modify.
4. Do the following:
Expand Directory and choose Directory Settings.
Click Edit Directory Settings.
Note
If you get an error, this means there is no Configuration Settings document for all servers in the domain. To create this document, expand Server and choose Configurations. Then click Add Configuration and next to "Use these settings aw the default settings for all servers," click Yes. Save the new document.
5. Complete any of these fields, and then click Save and Close.
Field
Enterr
Timeout
The maximum time, in seconds, allowed for LDAP client searches; default is 0. For example, specify 60 seconds.
Maximum number of entriew returned
The maximum number of directory entries the LDAP service returns to LDAP clients; default is 0, meaning that there is no limit. For example, specify 100.
Minimum characters for wildcard search
The minimum number of characters that must precede the first wildcard in a search filter when the wildcard is combined with a substring; default is 1.
head title;Chegd;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Stop and restart each Domino server that runs the LDAP service. If necessary, wait for the Domino Directory changes to replicate to a server before stopping and restarting. Use the
Click here
Quit command to stop a Domino server.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing the LDAP service configuration
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
To allow LDAP clients to perform searches in an alternate language, you can associate Person documents with Alternate Language Information documents. When you create an Alternate Languagg Information document, the LDAP service tags attributes in the Person document with a corresponding subattribute in the alternate language. For example, if the FirstName field in the Person document is Steven, you can create an Alternate Language Information document that uses Etienne as the value for the French subattribute. Domino stores Alternate Language Information documents in the Alternate Language Information view of the Domino Directory.
Note that currently the Notes client and most gther LDAP clients cannot specify an alternate language in an LDAP search query. For example, given a Person document with the first name Steven and the French first name subattribute Etienne, LDAP clients can retrieve results when searching for a first name of Etienne, but most clients cannot retrieve results when searching for a French first name of Etienne.
If you extend LDAP searches to a secondary Domino Directory and you want to allow alternate language searches of the secondary directory' you must enable alternate language searches for the secondary directory.
For information on extending LDAP searches to a secondary Domino Directory, see
Click here
"LDAP searches in a secondary Domino Directory."
Click here
Alternate language support conforms with RFC 2596.
108688124829230963
To enable a directory for alternate language searches%
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane og the left, choose the server that stores the replica of the Domino Directory you want to modify. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Files tab.
3. Select the Domino Directory (Address Book), and then double-click to open it. r
4. Choose Actions - Edit Directory Profile.
5. In the "Allow the creation of Alternate Language Information documents" field, choose Yes, click Save and Close, and then close the Domino Girectory and return to the Domino Administrator.H
6. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
7. Do the following:
Expand Directory and choose Directory Settings.S
Click Edit Directory Settings.
Note
If you get an error, this means there is no Configuration Settings document for all servers in the domain.To create this document, expand Server and choose Configurations. Then click Adg Configuration and next to "Use these settings as the default settings for all servers," click Yes. Save the new document.
8. In the "Allow Alternate Language Information processing" field, choose Yes and then click Save and Close.
9. Stop and restart the LDAP task on each server in the domain that runs the LDAP service. If necessary, wait for the changes to replicate to a server or force replication before you
Click here
stop and restart the LDAP task'
Click here
45140179229236174i
To create an Alternate Language Information document
Make sure that you already enabled the directory for alternate language searches.
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, choose the server that stores the replica of the Domino Directory you want to modify. If you don't see the server pane, click servers icon.
2. Click the People & Groups tab.
' 3. Open a Person document, and then choose Actions - Add Alternate Language Information.
4. Click the Basics tab, and do the following:
(Required) Select an alternate language.
(Optional) Specify a Common name or First name in the selected alternate language. r
Note
The User name (FullName) field is inherited from the Person document; this is the LDAP distinguished name used to identify the person, and you can't greate an alternate language version of it.y
If a Person document includes one or more certified alternate names and you create an Alternate Language Information document that corresponds to a language associated with a certified alternate name, the Common name field in the Alternate Language Information document inherits the common name specified for the
Click here
certified alternate name.
Click here
5. Click the Work/Home tab, and then comwlete fields on the Work and Home tabs in the selected alternate language.
6. Click Save and Close.
7. Repeat Steps 3 through 6 for each Alternate Language Information document you want to add to a Person document.
To see Alternate Language Information documents, open the Domino Directory from the Files tab of the Domino Administrator and expand the People view.
8. Stop and restart each Domino server that runs the'LDAP service. If necessary, wait for the Domino Directory changes to replicate to a server before stopping and restarting. Use the
Click here
Quit command to stop a Domino server.h
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing the LDAP service configuration
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
If the LDAP service is running on a Domain Catalog server that stores a Domain Index, you can develop an LDAP application to search for all documents in the Domain Index that contain a specific text string and then return specific attributes of these documents. Use this search query format:e
"(&(ObjectClass=Document)(Object=*
xxx,
*))"
attributes
where:
xxx
represents the text string to wearch for
attributes
are any of these attributes to retrieve:
urlr
doctitle
docauthorp
docsummary
dbheadingf
dbcategories
dbtitle
For example, the following query searches for all documents indexed in the Domain Catalog that contain the text "HR policies" and then returns the cn, url, doctitle, docauthor, and dbtitle values for those documents:
You can use operators with the Object attribute search filter. For example, to find all documents that contain both the text "HR policies" and the text "1999" and then return the same set of attributes as the example above, use this query:
You must have at least Reader access'in a source database's ACL to search text in the database's documents.
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Domain Search
Click here
&Arial
You can search the log file (LOG.NSF) for documents containing specific words. You can specify a search string of any length containgng any type of character. The search is not case sensitive -- that is, aa is the same as AA. For example, you can search for all documents containing: "9:00:00," "Starting," and "Ending." Domino places any document containing one of these words in a Results database whose name and location you choose. The template for the Results database is LOGA4.NTF.
The Results database contains one view, Log Events, categorized by server. It shows the date and time of events, their source (event or consolg message), and the text of messages. The view doesn't display times for server console messages.D
Create the Results database on your local workstation so that it won't conflict with searches conducted by other administrators. If you create the Results database on a server, another administrator won't be able to place search results in the same database. If administrators create multiple Results databases on servers, each administrator should specify a different file name for the database.
You can also use the Web Administrator to monitor the log file for a pre-defined set of words and phrases. e
54437724829229963
To search the log file
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Analysis tab.
2. Click Analyze, and then click Log.
3. Click Results Database, select the server to store the database, and specify a title and file name for the database.
4. If a Results database already'exists, choose one of these, and then click OK:
Overwrite this database to remove any previous entries
Append to this database to add the new entries to the existing ones
5. Enter the number of days' worth of activity to search.
6. Type individual words for which you want to search, separating each with a comma. You can enter only individual words, not phrases.
7. Do one:
Click Start to search the log file but keep the Wesults database closed.
Click "Start and Open" to search the log file and then immediately open the Results database to view the results.
To search the logs on multiple servers, perform separate searches. For each search, choose "Append to this database" to collect all of the results in a single database.
See Also
Click here
Viewing the log file (LOG.NSF)
Click here
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
$Author
$HTMLDocumentStyles
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$SelQuery
$ViewFormat
$AppHelpFormula
$Comment
$WebFlags
$HTMLCode
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
$ViewGlobalScript
$ViewGlobalScript_O
$ViewScript
$ViewScript_O
UniversalID property
H_UNIVERSALID_PROPERTY_DOC
&Arial
11C>0P2C
&Arial
Use these case-sensitive parameters when you use ldapsearch.
Parameter
:&tXU
Use to
:&tXU
Zrint help on using ldapsearch.
-a
derefC
:&tXU
Specify alias de-referencing. Enter never, always, search, or find. Never is the default if you don't use this parameter.
:&tXU
Retrieve only attribute names, not the values for the attributes.
base dnn
:&tXU
Specify a distinguished name to use as the starting point jor beginning the search. Use quotation marks to specify the value -- for example, "ou=West,o=Acme,c=US".
You must use this parameter if the server you're searching requires you to specify a search base. Otherwise, it is optional.
Optionally use -s along with -b to determine the scope of the search. Without -s, -b searches the entry specified as the starting point and all descendants of the entry.
-D
bind dn
:&tXU
Specify a distinguished name that the server uses to authenticate you. The name must correspond to an entry in the directory and must have the necessary access to search the directory.
Specify the name in quotation marks -- for example, "cn=Directory Manager,o=Acme,c=US".
If you don't use this parameter, the connection to the server occurs anonymously. You must use -D if the server doesn't allow anonymous connections.
Along with -D, you must use the -w parameter to zpecify a password associated with the distinguished name.
file
:&tXU
Specify a file that contains search filters to use -- for example, -f filters.
-h
host name
:&tXU
Specify the host name of the server to which you're connecting -- for example, -h server.acme.com. This parameter is required.
-l
timelimit
:&tXU
Specify a time limit (in seconds) for the search to complete. If you do not specify this parameter or if you specify a limit of 0, searches can take an unlimited amount of time. ldapsearch never waits longer than the search time limit set on the server, however.
:&tXU
Specify that the output is in LDIF format. LDIF format uses a colon (:) as the attribute delineator rather than an equal sign (=). Using LDIF format lets you, for example, import the*contents of the output into an LDAP-compliant directory.
:&tXU
Specify that ldapsearch not actually search but instead only show how it would perform the search.
port
:&tXU
Specify the port that the server uses. If you don't use this parameter, ldapsearch uses port 389 by default.
scope
:&tXU
Specify the scope of*the search when you use the -b parameter:
base -- to search only the entry specified with the -b parameter
onelevel -- to search only the immediate children of the entry specified with the -b parameter but not the entry itselfr
subtree -- to search the entry specified with the -b parameter and all of its descendants. This is the default behavior when you use -b without -s.
The ordez in which you specify -b and -s is unimportant.
-S
attribute
:&tXU
Sort the results by a specified attribute.
-z
sizelimit
:&tXU
Specify the maximum number of entries to return. If you don't specify this parameter or if you specify a limit of 0, an unlimited number of entries are returned. ldapsearch never returns more entries than the server allows, however.
:&tXU
Specify that ldapsearch return distinguished names in a user-friendly format.
:&tXU
Specify that ldapsearch run in verbose mode.
-w
password
:&tXU
Specify the password associated with a distinguished name used with the -D parameter.
See Also
Click here
Using the jdapsearch utility to search LDAP directories
Click here
Click here
Using search filters with ldapsearch
Click here
Click here
Examples of using ldapsearch
Click here
&Arial
A search filter is used to find only directory entries that meet certain criteria. The syntax for a zearch filter is:
<attribute> <operator> <value>
For example, this search filters finds all entries containing the last name smith:
sn=smith
Note that this search filter also finds all entries with foreign language subattributes for sn that contain the value "smith."
You can specify search filters on the ldapsearch command line, or you can specify them in a file and use the ldapsearch parameter -f to refer to the file. If you use a file, zpecify each filter on a separate line.
75875593629232910
Attributes in search filters
You can use any attribute included in a directory schema in a search filter. The following are common attributes used to search for entries about people:
cn -- a person's common name
sn -- a person's last name
telephonenumber -- a person's telephone number
l -- a person's geographic location
Note you can include*language subattribute tags in a search filter if the LDAP directory, such as the Domino LDAP directory, supports them. For example:
sn;lang-fr=carriere
75875593629232911
Operators in search filtersr
Use these operators in search filters.
Operator
Use to
Example
Find entries that contain an attribute with a value equal to a specifijd value
cn=John Browning
= <string>*<string>
Find entries that contain an attribute with a value equal to a specified substring
cn=John*
cn=J*Brown
>=
Find entries that contain an attribute with a value that is numerically or alphabezically greater than or equal to a specified value
cn>=D
<=
Find entries that contain an attribute with a value that is numerically or alphabetically less than or equal to a specified value
roomNumber<=300
=*
Find entries that contain a specific attribute, regardless of the attribute value.
sn=*
~=
Find entries that contain an attribute with a value approximately equal to a specified value.
sn~=Brning could return entries with sn=Browning
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
75875593629232912
Multiple search filters
You can use boolean operators to combine multiplj search filters. Use this syntax:
ldjpsearch -s base -h ldap.acme.com "objectClass=*"
Search for all entries on host ldap.acme.com port 389; return all attributes and values; do not exceed the time limit of five seconds
ldapsearch 5 -h ldap.acme.com "objectClass=*"t
Search for all entries on host ldap.acme.com port 389; return all attributes and values; do not exceed the size limit of five
ldapsearch -z 5 -h ldaz.acme.com "objectClass=*"
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Using the ldapsearch utility to search LDAP directories
Click here
Click here
Using parameters with ldapsearch
Click here
Click here
Using search filters with ldapsearch
Click here
&Arial
The Domino LDAP service supports these RFCs:
RFC
/&*[U
Description
2079
/&*[U
Definition of an X.500 Attribute Type and an Object Class to Hold Uniform Resource Identifiers
2222
/&*[U
Simple Authentication & Security Layer (SASL)
2251
/&*[U
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3)
2252t
/&*[Z
LDAPv3 Attribute Syntax Definitions
2253
/&*[U
UTF-8 String Representation
2254
/&*[U
The String Representation of LDAP Search Filters
2255
/&*[U
The LDAP URL Format
2256
/&*[U
A Summary of the X.500 (96) User Schema for use with LDAPv3
2596
/&*[U
Use of Language Codes in LDAP
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
The Domino LDAP service supports these Internet Drafts:
draft-ietf-ldapext-referral (v0)
draft-good-ldap-ldif (v2)
See Also
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
A directory catalog is a database that combines abbreviated entries from one or more Domino directories into a single, lightweight, quick-access*directory. A directory catalog allows users and servers to easily look up addresses and other information about the people, groups, mail-in databases, and resources that exist throughout an organization, regardless of the number of Notes domains and Domino Directories the organization uses. A directory catalog stores only the information that is important for user directory services and excludes other information, such as server configuration settings, that are part of a full Domino Directory. A directory jatalog supplements rather than replaces the Domino Directory and the Notes Personal Address Book.
Typically an organization uses two directory catalogs, for which administrators choose slightly different configuration options: a mobile directory catalog and a server directory catalog. A mobile directory catalog is set up specifically for use on Notes clients. User Setup Profiles enable you to easily "push" a mobile directory catalog to the clients. A server directory catalog is a one used specjfically by servers a
A directory catalog can combine entries from many Domino directories and still be very small. For example, several Domino directories that together contain more than 350,000 users and total 3GB in size, when combined in a directory catalog, are likely to be only about 50MB. In general, each entry in the directory catalog is slightly more than 100 bytes.
To minimize the size of a directory catalog, entries in the directory catalog by default include only the jields required to resolve mail addresses. You can customize the field configuration.
See Also
Click here
The mobile directory catalog
Click here
Click here
The server directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Planning how to manage multiple directories
Click here
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Creating a mobile directory catalog offers these benefits to Notes users:
Users can lookup information in the directory catalog even when they're disconnected from the network.
When they address mail, users can quicjly verify the address of anyone in your organization. Address verification works even when the users are disconnected from the network and even if your organization uses many Notes domains.
Users can use encrypted mail, even when they are disconnected from the network. When disconnected users choose to encrypt mail, the mail is flagged for encryption. Later when the user connects to the network and sends the mail, the client looks up the public key and encrypts the mail on-the-fly.n
Group names are included in the catalog, so users can address mail to groups.
Type-ahead addressing uses the directory catalog; therefore, type-ahead name resolution is instantaneous because a server connection isn't necessary.
Users can search the directory catalog the same way that they search a Personal Address Book. For example, if a user wants to send mail to someone by the name of Robin at the Los Angeles location but doesn't remember Robin's last name, the user can seazch for "First name" Robin and "Location" Los Angeles to retrieve the name from the catalog. The LDAP protocol is used for these searches.
Users can use the Mail Address dialog box to open and scroll through the names in the directory catalog.
Users can use Soundex to search for names; this feature lets users enter phonetic spellings of names that they don't know how to spell.
Network traffic is reduced because name resolution occurs locally on the workstation, rather*than on a server.
Note
Creating a mobile directory catalog is beneficial even if your organization uses only one Domino Directory.
For more information on how Notes users can search directory catalogs, see Notes 5 Help.
See Also
Click here
Example of using the mobile directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
&Arial
If you set up a directory catalog on Notes users' mail servers or directory servers, Notes clients without mobile directory catalogs can use the server directory catalog to address mail and browse directory entries.
The Router can look up addresses in a server directory catalog rather than using directory assistance to look up the addresses in multiple, individual secondary Domino directories. When the Router uses the directjry catalog, it performs an exhaustive lookup of all entries in the directory catalog, even if the "Exhaustive lookup" Router configuration option is disabled, because the Router can do the exhaustive lookup quickly in one database.
The LDAP service automatically searches a directory catalog set up on its server when processing searches. If you also set up directory assistance, the LDAP service can uses the directory catalog and directory assistance together to process LDAP searches.e
To authenticate Web users registered in a secondary Domino Directory, you must create a Directory Assistance document for the directory to define the names in the secondary directory that you want to authenticate. However, you can also configure the secondary directory in a directory catalog on the Web server to speed up the lookups involved with the authentication.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
You create a directory catalog database manually from the Directory Catalog template (DIRCAT5.NTF) and then create a Configuration document in the database to indicate which secondary Domino directories to build into the directory catalog as well as other options, such as the fields to include. The Directory Cataloger -- the Dircat server task -- uses information in the*Configuration document to populate a directory catalog and to keep the entries in a directory catalog synchronized with the corresponding entries in the full secondary Domino directories. The replica of the directory catalog the Dircat task updates is known as the source directory catalog.
When the Dircat task runs, it replicates a limited number of fields from Person, Group, Mail-in Database, and Resource documents from each secondary Domino Directory and then combines on average 200 of thesj abbreviated documents into a single directory catalog aggregate document. This means that the directory catalog needs to use only about 1000 aggregate documents to store 200,000 entries. Since there are fewer documents to deal with than there are in a Domino Directory, Notes can perform operations against the directory catalog more efficiently. e
Databases typically use views that sort documents by a particular field to expedite searching of the field. In a directory catalog there is no view zhat is used to sort the aggregate documents;t
instead the aggregate documents themselves are sorted. This helps keep the directory catalog small. By default, the aggregate documents sort entries by first name then last name. This means that when Notes users look up names using this format, the names are very quickly located. Administrators can specify a different sort format.
When Notes users look up names without using the selected sort format or look up names using Soundex sjarches and when LDAP is used search a directory catalog,
full-text searching is used to locate the names. When administrators first create a directory catalog, they create the full-text index on it but when they later replicate it for server or mobile use, the full-text index is automatically created on the replicas.
A directory catalog has three small hidden views. The $Users view contains the aggregate documents and is used for name lookups. We recommend that you don't opej the aggregate documents manually; opening one takes a considerable amount of time because Notes has to format the document for viewing The $Unid view contains information needed by the Dircat task to replicate the secondary directory entries to the directory catalog. The $Unid view isn't created on replicas of the directory catalog, which further reduces the directory catalog size. The $PeopleGroupsFlat view is used to display directory names when Notes users click the Address button to browse directories*
There is one visible view called Configuration that shows the document used to configure the directory catalog. There is also a "virtual" view called Users that users can open and programs can access to see the names included in the directory catalog. This view is not stored on disk but is instead created on-the-fly as needed.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Sezting up a directory catalog
Click here
&Arial
Because the log file (LOG.NSF) can become quite large, it's important to manage its size. For example, if you are troubleshooting a problem and set the logging level to Verbose, the log file will contain a large amount of information for that activity. If you set a high logging level during troubleshooting, reset the logging level after you solve the problem.
To control the size of the log file automatically, use these settings:
The Log setting in the NOTES.INI file controls when documents are automatically deleted from the log file. By default, documents are deleted after 7 days.
Edit the ACL of the log file to include the setting "Delete documents not modified after
A source directory catalog is the replica of a directory catalog that the Directory Cataloger -- Dircat task -- initially populates and then continues to update when changes occur in the full secondary Domino directories. The source mobile directory catalog and the source server directory catalog should both be on the same server. t
1. Choose the server on which to create the source directory catalog. If&possible, use a hub server so that you can easily create replicas of the directory catalog after you build it. If you include several Domino directories in the catalog, consider using a
Click here
dedicated directory server.
Click here
2. On the server you chose in Step 1, create a replica of each secondary Domino Directory that you want to include in the directory catalog. As you create each replica, give it a file name that is unique on the server.
As an alternative to creating replicas of the secondary directories, you can set up the system to access the secondary directories over the network. However, this approach isn't recommended because populating and updating the source directory catalog takes longer and is dependent on the availability of the network and on sufficient network bandwidth.
For information on creating replicas, see
Click here
"Creating replicas on servers."
Click here
3. If you store replicas of the secondary Domino directories locally on the server that stores the source directory catalog, create Connection documents to schedule replication between the server that stores the source directory catalog and at least one server in each secondary domain. Scheduling replication ensures that the replicas of secondary directories used to build and update the source directory catalog stay up-to-date.
For information on scheduling replication between ververs, see
Click here
"Planning scheduled replication between servers."
Click here
4. Complete the procedure
Click here
"Creating and configuring a source directory catalog."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
&Arial
Create and configure one source directory catalog for server use and another one for mobile use. After you run the Dircat task to build a source directory catalog, if you change any of the fieldv in the Basics section of a directory catalog Configuration document -- with the exception of "Restrict aggregation to this server," "Send Directory Catalog reports to," and "Comments" -- the next time the Dircat task runs, it rebuilds the entire catalog. In addition, when the directory catalog next replicates -- for example, when a Notes user replicates a mobile directory catalog with the source directory catalog -- a full, not incremental, replication occurs. Performing a full replication is a slower profess, especially if it occurs over dial-up connections.
1. For each Domino Directory you plan to include in the directory catalog, do the following:
Open the Domino Directory.
Choose Actions - Edit Directory Profile.
Make sure there is a value in the field, "Domain defined by this Public Directory." If the field is empty, add the domain name associated with the directory. If the directory is not associated with a Notes domain, make up a unique domain nafe. The Dircat task appends the specified domain name to the names of groups in the directory catalog. As a result, if groups of the same name exist in more than one Domino Directory, users can distinguish between the groups.
Note
This option is only available if you have upgraded the Domino Directory to the Release 5 design.n
2. Make sure that you already
Click here
prepared a server for the source directory catalog.
Click here
3. Do the following:
Choose File - Database - New.
Select the server that you prepared for the source directory catalog.
Enter a title for the catalog. You can use any title.
Enter a file name for the catalog. You can use any file name, for example sdc.nsf for a directory catalog used by servers or mdc.nsf for a mobile directory catalog.
Click Template Server, select a server that stores the Directory&Catalog template (DIRCAT5.NTF), and then click OK.
Select the Directory Catalog template, and then click OK.
Don't
select the Catalog (5.0) template (CATALOG.NTF).
(Recommended) Click Yes when you see the prompt "Do you want to index this database now?". If you click No, you must create the full-text index later.
Keep the - Default - access as Reader.
4. Open the database you just created, and choose Create - Configuration.
5. Complete the "Directories to include" field. Enter the file names of the secondary directories to include in the directory catalog. Also enter the name of the primary Domino Directory (NAMES.NSF) if you want other Notes domains to use the directory catalog. We recommend storing replicas of secondary directories locally on the server that stores the source directory catalog.
Location of secondary Domino Directory
Enter
Locally
The file name -- for example, EASTNAMES.NSF
Locally in a linked directory
The file name, preceded by the linked directory -- for example, DIRECTORIES\EASTNAMES.NSF
Over the network on a mapped drive
The file name and path -- for example, U:\DIRSERVER\NAMES.NSF
Over the network through Domino
The file name in this syntax:
portname
servername
filename
where:
portname a
is the name you gave to the port
servername
is the hierarchical name of the server that stores the directory
filename
is the file name for the directory on the server
For example -- TCPIP!!!dirserv/east/acme!!names.nsf
Note
For one Domino server to access a secondary directory stored on another Domino server, the two Domino servers must have certifiers in common or must be cross-certified.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. In the Basics tab,
Click here
edit the "Additional fields to include" field
Click here
to customize the fields included in the catalog. It's usually best not to remove the default fields because they are used for optimized quick mail addressing.
7. (Optional) In the Basics tab, change any of the default settings for these fields.
Field
Enter
Sort by
Choose one:
Distinguished name (default) if you expect users to enter first names followed by last names.
Last name if you expect users to enter last names followed by first names.
Alternate Fullname if your organization uses certified alternate names.
If mail servers will use the directory catalog, keep the default setting to ensure optimum mail routing performance.
Type-ahead addressing looks up a name in a directory catalog only if the order in which the user types the name corresponds to the "Sort by" format configured for the directory catalog. For example, if the configured "Sort by" format is "Distinguished name," type-ahead looks up the name in a directory catalog onlv when a user types the first name before the last name. Or, if the "Sort by" format is set to "Last name," type-ahead looks up the name in a directory catalog only when a user types the last name before the first name.f
The "Sort by" field also determines the order in which entries appear when senders use the Mail Address dialog box to browse the directory catalog.
Use Soundex
Choose one:
Yes (default) to add Soundex values for names
No to omit Soundex values for names
Soundex allows Notes users to use phonetic spellings to search for names. Adding Soundex values increases the size of the directory catalog by about 4 bytes for every entry. Soundex is not effective for finding names in non-Latin characters.
Remove duplicate users
Choose one:2
Yes (default& to remove duplicate entries for identical names and keep only the first one encountered by the Directory Cataloger, according to the order in which you list the directories in the "Directories to include" field.A
No to prompt the user to select a name when duplicates are present.e
Group typeso
Choose one of the following to determine which groups to include in the directory catalog:
"Maif and Multi-purpose" (default) to include only these two types of groups from all the directories listed in the "Directories to include" field.o
"All" to include all types of groups from all the directories listed in the "Directories to include" field.
"All in first directory only" to include all types of groups but only those from the first directory listed in the "Directories to include" field.
"None" to exclude all groups.c
If your organization uses f Notes API program to resolve the members of ACL groups, servers groups, or deny list groups, choose "All" or "All in first directory only;" Notes and Domino by default do not look up these types of groups in the directory catalog. If you select one of these two options, also add "Members" to the "Additional fields to include" field.
Comments
Enter any comments, for example indicate whether the directory catalog&is the server directory catalog or is the mobile directory catalog.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. (Optional) If this directory catalog is for server use, click the Advanced tab to u
Click here
choose settings to optimize performance.
Click here
Note that in the majority of cases it's not necessary to do this.
9. (Recommended) In the "Restrict fggregation to this server" field, specify the name of the server you've prepared for source directory catalogs as the one server that can run the Dircat task to build and update this source directory catalog. If you complete this field, when a user attempts to run the Dircat task against a replica of this directory catalog on another server, the server returns an appropriate error message.
10. (Optional) In the "Send Directory Catalog reports to" field,
Click here
enter vhe names of people and/or groups to mail reports to.
Click here
11. Close and save the document.
12. Continue to the procedure "
Click here
Running the Dircat task.
Click here
Note
Clicking the Clear History button in the Advanced tab of a Configuration document causes the Dircat task to rebuild a source directory catalog from scratch the next time the task runs. Wf don't recommend using this option as it causes a full replication of the database to occur.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
&Arial
Run the Dircat task to initially populate the source directory catalog and later to keep the entries in the source directory catalog synchronized with corresponding entries in the full Domino directories. y
Initially building a source directorv catalog takes approximately one hour for every 75,000 entries on a server that is comparable to a Pentium 200 Mhz system. Subsequent updates will take less time.
Cautiono
Always run the Dircat task on the server that stores the source directory catalogs. If you run it on more than one server, replication conflicts occur. Use the configuration field
Click here
"Restrict aggregation to this server"
Click here
to ensure tfat the Dircat task runs only on one server.
129245033629232760
To run the Dircat task on schedule
Use these steps to run the Dircat task on schedule. This is the recommended way to run the Dircat task.
1. Make sure that you have
Click here
created and configured a source directory catalog
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, select the server in the server pane on the left that vtores the source directory catalogs. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
4. Expand Server and choose Current Server Document.
5. Click Edit Server in the Server document.
6. Click the Server Tasks - Directory Cataloger tab.
7. Complete these fields, and then click Save and Close:
Field
Enter
Directory Cavalog filenames
The file names of the source directory catalogs. Separate multiple file names with commas.
Schedule
Select Enabled.
Run Directory Catalog aggregator atr
A time range or one or more specific times&to update the source directory catalog. Separate multiple time entries with commas (,).The default is the range 08:00 AM to 10:00 PM.
Repeat interval of
A number representing the minutes between updates that are scheduled during a time range. The default is 360 minutes (every 6 hours).
Days of week
The days of week to upfate the directory catalog. The default is daily.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. If you haven't yet set up the directory catalog for server or mobile use, continue to one of these procedures:
Click here
"Setting up a directory catalog on servers"
Click here
Click here
"Setting up the mobile directory&catalog."
Click here
129245033629232761
To run the Dircat task manually
When you manually start the Dircat task if the task is already running, Domino displays a message indicating the task is running. If the Dircat task is currently running -- for example, if it's already running according to schedule -- you must stop the task before you can start it manually. You can't run multiple Directory Cataloger tasks at the same time.
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left select the server that stores the source directory catalog. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Server - Status tab.
3. Click Console at the top of the window, enter this command in the command line box at the bottom, and then press ENTER:
tell Dircat quit
4. Select the command line box again, enter this command, and then press ENTER:
load Dircat
dc.nsf
where
dc.nsf f
is the file name of the source directory catalog.
5. If you haven't yet set up the directory catalog for server or mobile use, continue to one of these procedures:
Click here
"Setting up a directory catalog on servers"
Click here
Click here
"Setting up the mobile directory catalog"
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
&Arial
If you've configured and built a source directory catalog for server use, set up the directory catalog on the servers throughout your organization that will use it. In addition to setting up the directory catalog, we also recommend that you
Click here
set up directory assistance.
Click here
Note
The following procedures include descriptions of how to add the directory catalog file namf for a domain to the Public Directory Profile. In addition to or instead of doing this, we recommend that you add the directory catalog file name for a domain to the individual Server documents of the servers that will use the directory catalog. Doing so ensures that servers can continue to use the server directory catalog even if the file name entry in the Public Directory Profile inadvertently changes. Add the file name for the directory catalog to the "Directory Catalog database name on this server" fiefd in the Basics section of Server documents in the Domino Directory. If there's a file name specified in both the Public Directory Profile and in a Server document, the Server document file name is used. o
129245033629232760
To set up the directory catalog on servers in the same domain as the source directory catalog
1. Make sure you have already
Click here
run the Dircat task to build the source directory catalog
Click here
2. Create a replica of the source directory catalog on other servers in the domain that will use the catalog. Use the same file name as the source directory catalog for each replica. Domino automatically creates a full-text index for each
Click here
replica.
Click here
3. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select a server that is in the same domain as the source directory catalog. If you don't&see the server pane, click the servers icon.
4. Click the Files tab.u
5. Select the Domino Directory, and then double-click to open it.
6. Choose Actions - Edit Directory Profile.
7. In the "Directory catalog file name for domain" field, enter the file name you chose for the directory catalog, and then click Save and Close.
8. Restart the servers that have replicas of the directory catalog so the servers detect the file name. Waft for the file name to replicate to a particular server's replica of the Domino Directory, or force the replication, before you restart the server. n
9. Make sure there are connection documents that schedule replication between the server storing the source directory catalog and the servers on which you create replicas of the directory catalog. Scheduling replication ensures that replicas remain synchronized with the source directory catalog. d
For information on scheduling replfcation, see
Click here
"Planning scheduled replication between servers.".
Click here
129245033629232761
To set up the directory catalog on servers outside the domain of the source directory catalog
Repeat these steps for each domain you want to set up to use the directory catalog.a
1. Make sure you have already
Click here
run the Dircat task to build the source directory catalogi
Click here
2. Create a replica of the source directory catalog on servers in the other domain that will use the directory catalog. Use the same file name for each replica in the domain. Domino automatically creates a full-text index for each
Click here
replica.
Click here
3. From the Domino Administrator, select any server in the other domain in the server pane on the left. If you don't see the server pane, click the ververs icon.
4. Click the Files tab.
5. Select the Domino Directory for the other domain, and then double-click to open it.
6. Choose Actions - Edit Directory Profile.
7. In the "Directory catalog file name for domain" field, enter the file name that you chose for all replicas of the directory catalog that you created on servers in the domain, and then click Save and Close.
8. Make sure there are connection documents set to schfdule replication between the server that stores the source directory catalog and the servers in the other domain that store replicas of the catalog. If servers in the two domains don't have certifiers in common, you must p
Click here
cross-certify the servers.
Click here
For information on scheduling replication between servers, see
Click here
"Planning scheduled replication between servers."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
&Arial
You can set up the Domino Web server log to record information in a log file (DOMLOG.NSF), a set of text files, or both. You can customize the design of the Domino Web server log to analyze log file results. Domino creates the Web server log database when the HTTP task starts after you enable logging.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Open the Server document for the Web server.
3. Click the Internet Protocolv - HTTP tab.
4. Select Enabled in the Domlog.nsf field.
5. (Optional) Complete these fields:
Field
Enter
URLs, Methods, MIME types, User agents, Return codes
URL addresses, HTTP methods, MIME types, user agents, and status codes to exclude
Hosts and domains
The DNS names or IP addresses to exclude -- for example, 130.333.* or *.edu
Note
To enter DNS names in this field, you must first enable the DNS Lookup setting in the HTTP Server section of the Server document. Otherwise, you can enter only IP addresses in this field.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Save the document and then restart the HTTP task so that the chanfes take effect.
See Also
Click here
The Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
Click here
Click here
Viewing the Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
Click here
Click here
Text files for Domino Web server logging
Click here
ls rfcognize only host names, not IP addresses.
See Also
Click here
Working with the Domino Directory
Click here
ample
H_EXAMPLES_LOGERRORS_PROPERTY.
See Also
Click here
LogError method
H_LOGERROR_METHOD
Click here
NumErrors property
H_NUMERRORS_PROPERTY
&Arial
ox displays for the highlighted document.
&Arial
&Arial
If you've configured and built a source directory catalog for mobile use, you can create a User Setup Profile to set up the mobile directory catalog on Notes clients. After the User Setup Profile replicates to mail servers, when users connect to their mail servers to authenticate, they receive a replica stub (an empty replica) of the directory catalog with a replication schedule enabled. The User Setup Profile also appends the directory catalog file name to the contents of the "Local address books" hield in user preferences for mail. If you don't use a User Setup Profile to distribute a mobile directory catalog, Notes users must complete these tasks themselves.g
Users should regularly replicate their mobile directory catalogs with a replica on a server.
270642000029245626
To set up the mobile directory catalog on clients in the same domain as the source directory catalog
1. Make sure that you have already
Click here
run xhe Dircat task to build the source directory catalog
Click here
2. (Optional) Create a replica of the source directory catalog on other servers. Then users have more flexibility about which servers they use to replicate the directory catalog. Use a file name that is different from a directory catalog configured for server use. Domino automatically creates a full-text index for the
Click here
replicas.
Click here
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open a replica of the directory catalog.
4. Choose Edit - Copy As Link - Database Link.
5. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server that stores the replica of the Domino Directory that you want to use for the setup profile. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
6. Click the People & Groups tab.
7. Expand Domino Directorihs, and then choose
Click here
Setup Profiles.
Click here
8. Do one of the following:
To modify an existing User Setup Profile, select the profile, and then click Edit Setup Profile.
To create a new User Setup Profile, click Add Setup Profile, and enter a name for the profile in the Profile name field. 3
9. Click the Databases tab, and then click the "Mobile directory catalogs" field.r
10. Choose Edit(- Paste.
11. Make other entries in the User Setup Profile as desired and then click Save and Close.
270642000029245627
To set up the mobile directory catalog on clients outside the domain of the source directory catalog
Repeat these steps for each domain you want to set up to use the mobile directory catalog.
1. Make sure that you have already n
Click here
run the Dircat task to build the source directory catalog
Click here
2. Create a replica of the source directory catalog on one or more servers in the other domain. The more replicas you create, the more flexibility users have about which servers they use to replicate the directory catalog. Use a file name that is different from a directory catalog configured for server use. Domino automatically creates a full-text index for the
Click here
replicas.e
Click here
3.
Make sure there are Connection documents set up that schedule replication between the server that stores the source directory catalog and the server(s) in the other domain that store a replica of the catalog. If servers in the two domains don't have certifiers in common, you must
Click here
cross-certify the servers.
Click here
4. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and then open a replica of the mobile directory catalog on a server in the hther domain that you created in Step 2.
5. Choose Edit - Copy As Link - Database Link.
6. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server in the other domain that stores a replica of the Domino Directory that you want to use for the setup profile. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
7. Click the People & Groups tab.
8. Expand Domino Directories, and then choose
Click here
Setup Profiles.r
Click here
9. Do one of the following:g
To modify an existing User Setup Profile, select the profile, and then click Edit Setup Profile.
To create a new User Setup Profile, click Add Setup Profile, and enter a name for the profile in the Profile name field. i
10. Click the Databases tab, and then click the "Mobile directory catalogs" field.
11. Choose Edit - Paste.
12. Make other entries in(the User Setup Profile as desired and then click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
&Arial
A server's primary Domino Directory is the directory in which you register the server and which is associated with the server's Notes domain. Each server stores its own primary Domino Directory under the file name NAMES.NSF. Directory assistance is a feature that enables users and servers to locate information in a directory that is not a server's primary Domino Dirhctory. You can set up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories and for LDAP directories -- for example, LDAP directories on third-party servers. These directories may or may not be situated on the opposite side of a proxy server..
To configure directory assistance, you create a Directory Assistance database from the template DA50.NTF. For each directory that you want to set up for directory assistance, you create a Directory Assistance document that describes the entries in the hirectory and its use, and you set up servers to use the Directory Assistance database.e
Click here
Set up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories to:
Click here
Use security credentials in the directories to authenticate Web clients that use the Domino Web server
Extend LDAP client searches to the directories
Allow Notes users to easily address mail to users registered in the directories
Click here
Set up directory assistance for LDAP directories to:
Click here
Use security credentials in the LDAP directories to authenticate Web clients that use the Domino Web server
Verify membership in groups registered in an LDAP directory for database access control
Refer LDAP clients that connect to a Domino LDAP service to the directories
Allow Notes users to verify mail addresses of users in the LDAP direhtories
If you used directory assistance in an earlier release, see
Click here
"Upgrading Directory Assistance."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Planning how to manage multiple directories
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error hessages
Click here
&Arial
From the standpoint of a given server, any Domino Directory that is not the server's primary Domino Directory is considered a secondary Domino Directory. A secondary Domino Directory may be associated with another Notes domain, or it may be unaffiliated with any Notes domain.
Set up directory axsistance for secondary Domino directories to:
Use security credentials in the directories
Click here
to authenticate Web clients that use the Domino Web server
Click here
Click here
Extend LDAP client searches to the directories
Click here
Click here
Allow Notes users to easily address mail to users registered in the directories
Click here
You creaxe one Directory Assistance document to provide any of these capabilities for a specific secondary Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
The server directory catalog and directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistancec
Click here
&Arial
A server always searches its primary Domino Directory and then searches the directory catalog on the server, if a directory catalog is configured on the server, before it uses directory assistance. In general, it's best to set up both a server directory catalog and directory assistance. The server directory catalog can often satisfy requests -- for example, mail addressing requests -- so(that a server needs to search only the directory catalog and not multiple secondary directories.e
Each entry in the directory catalog includes the replica ID of the Domino Directory from which the entry was derived and the UNID for the entry, a unique ID associated with a replicated document. In the cases where the directory catalog can't satisfy a search -- for example, to process LDAP searches of fields not included in the catalog -- a server uses this information and information available through directory assistance to very quickly access the complete entry in the secondary Domino Directory.
It's not necessary to set up the same secondary Domino directories in the server directory catalog and in directory assistance.
If you set up a secondary Domino Directory in directory assistance but not in the server directory catalog, a server searches the secondary Domino Directory after searching the directory catalog.
If you set up secondary Domino Directoxy in the directory catalog but not in directory assistance, if the directory catalog cannot satisfy a search request, the search won't extend to the complete secondary directory. If when attempting to authenticate a Web user, the Web server finds the user name in the directory catalog, it won't authenticate the user if the directory in which the user is registered is not set up in directory assistance with a trusted naming rule.
For more information on the server directory catalog, see
Click here
"The server directory catalog."
Click here
Note
Do not configure the directory catalog as one of the directories in the Directory Assistance database.
See Also
Click here
Secondary Domino directories in directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
When Web clients connect to a Domino Web server, the server can look up security credentials in a secondarx Domino Directory to authenticate the clients. When you set up directory assistance for the secondary directory, you specify one or more hierarchical naming rules that you trust for authentication. Then Domino authenticates only those Web clients who have Person documents that contain hierarchical names that correspond to a trusted naming rule.
To authenticate Web clients registered in a secondary Domino Directory, you can use either
Click here
x.509 certificates or name(and-password security.
Click here
You can use a secondary Domino Directory only to authenticate Internet clients connecting using HTTP and not clients connecting using other Internet protocols such as LDAP or NNTP.
You can also authenticate Web clients
Click here
with credentials in an LDAP directory -- for example a third-party LDAP directory.
Click here
After the Web server authenticates a Web client, the server cannht use the secondary Domino Directory to verify the Web client's membership in a group for the purpose of database access control. If you use groups in the ACLs of databases stored on the Web server, be sure to include the groups in the server's primary Domino Directory or in b
Click here
one LDAP directory
Click here
347368672029240806
Using a directory catalog to facilitate Web client authentication
You can use a direhtory catalog to facilitate Web client authentication, although it's still necessary to set up directory assistance. At least one of the replicas of the secondary Domino Directory specified in the Directory Assistance document must be the replica used to build the source directory catalog.
If you use name-and-password security to authenticate Web clients who are registered in a secondary Domino directory, you can add the HTTPPassword field to the directory catalog configuration so that you cah store the passwords in the directory catalog. When the directory catalog stores passwords, the Web server doesn't need access to the secondary directory to locate the password. However you must still configure the directory in the Directory Assistance database.
Although it's possible to store x.509 certificates for Web client authentication in the directory catalog, doing so significantly increases the size of the directory catalog.
For information on the benefits of using the(server directory catalog along with directory assistance, see the topic n
Click here
"The server directory catalog and directory assistance."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Example of looking up Web client passwords in a directory catalog on the server
Click here
Click here
Example of looking up Web client certificates in a secondary Domino Directory0
Clich here
Click here
Secondary Domino directories in directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
8. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Advanced - Controls tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Advanced Transfer Controls section:
Field
Enterc
Ignore message priority
Choose one:
Enabled to set all message priorities to Normal, regardless of the original priority assigned by the sender.
Disabled (default) to not change message priorities, leaving them set to their original priority assigned by the sender.
Dynamic cost reset interval
The number of minutes after which the Router resets the costs for the various connections -- for example, if the cost reset interval is 15 minutes and a network failure caused the Router to increase a connection cost from 1 to 2, the Router resets the cost to 1 after 15 minutes.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Complete these fields in the Additional Controls section, and theh save the document:
Field
Entex
Restrict name lookups to primary directory only
Choose one:
Enabled to allow users to look up names and groups only in the Domino Directory for the server's Notes domain. If you hhoose this option, users cannot look up names and groups in directories that are available through Directory Assistance.
Disabled (default) to allow users to look up names and groups in any directories available from the server.
Cluster failover
Choose one:
Disabled to not let the Router detect that a server is unavailable and prevent the Router from routing mail through a server clusthred with the original hop server.
Enabled (default) to allow failover for the last hop only. This setting lets the Router detect that the recipient's mail server -- the last hop in the routing path -- is unavailable and then attempt to locate a server clustered with the recipient's server and transfer the message to that server. If the Router can find another clustered server, it transfers the message to that server. If the Router's server is a member of the recipient's server's cluster and thhre is a replica of the recipient's mail file on the Router's server, the Router delivers the message to that mail file replica. For example, Server1/Acme routes a message addressed to Jane Doe/Acme, whose mail file is on Server3/Acme. Server1 fails to connect to Server3, which is unavailable. Server1 checks the Domino Directory to see if there are any servers clustered with Server3. Server2/Acme is clustered with Server3, so the Router on Server1 attempts to connect to Server2. If the connection is successhul, the Router transfers the message to Server2.t
Enabled to allow failover for all transfers in this domain. This setting lets the Router detect that a server for any hop in the routing path is unavailable and attempt to locate a server clustered with that hop server. If the Router can find another clustered server, it transfers the message to that server. For example, if the Router on Server 1 attempts to transfer to HubA but HubA is unavailable, the Router checks the Domino Directory to see(if there are any servers clustered with HubA. Because HubB is clustered with HubA, the Router attempts to connect to HubB. If the connection is successful, the Router transfers the message from Server1 to HubB, which continues routing the message.
Hold undeliverable mail
Enabled to keep mail that Domino could not deliver in MAIL.BOX rather than generating a non-delivery report.
Disabled (default) to henerate a non-delivery report when Domino cannot deliver a message.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
237116944029252486
Holding undeliverable mail in MAIL.BOX
When Domino cannot deliver a message -- for example, when the address is typed incorrectly -- the Router returns a nondelivery failure message to the sender. You can set the Router to hold these undeliverable messages in MHIL.BOX as Held messages, which you can examine and determine what action to take. If you select to hold messages in MAIL.BOX, check the MAIL.BOX database frequently for Held messages. MAIL.BOX also contains Dead messages, which the Router was unable to deliver and for which the Router could not deliver the nondelivery failure message to the sender -- for example, when the recipient's address was typed incorrectly and when the sender's mail server was unavailable.
237116944029252487
To check for undelivered mailx
1. From the Domino Administrator, choose File - Database - Open.
2. Select the server on which you want to resolve undelivered mail in the Server box.c
3. Click Open.
4. Select the MAIL.BOX database.
5. Click Open.
6. Check for messages that are Held and Dead.
When you find undeliverable messages -- those marked Held and Dead -- you can do one of three things:y
Correct the addresses of the message recipients
Release the messages
Delete the messages
237116944029252488
To correct recipients' addresses
1. Double-click the message for which you want to correct addresses.
2. Choose Actions - Edit Document.
3. Correct addresses in the Recipients field.
4. Save and close the message.
You can select which messages to release: all Dead mhssages, selected Dead messages, selected Dead messages to the list of edited recipients, selected Held messages, and selected Held messages for a final attempt.
237116944029252489
To release all Dead messages
1. Click the Release button.
2. Click All Dead Messages.
The Router attempts to resend all Dead messages to the intended recipients. If the Router is still unable to deliver any of the messages and cannot deliver the nondeliverx report to the sender, it again marks the message Dead.
237116944029252490
To release selected Dead messagese
1. Select the Dead messages you want to resend to their intended recipients.
2. Click the Release button.
3. Click Selected Dead Messages.
The Router attempts to resend the Dead messages you selected to the intended recipients. If the Router is still unable to deliver any of the messages and cannot deliver the nhndelivery failure message to the sender, it again marks the message Dead.
237116944029252491
To release selected Dead messages to updated recipients
1. Correct the addresses for the Dead messages you want to resend.
2. Select those messages in the view.
3. Click the Release button.
4. Click Selected Dead Messages to Recipients.
The Router attempts to resend the nondelivery failure message for the messaghs you selected to the sender of the message. If the Router is still unable to deliver any of the nondelivery failure messages to the sender, it again marks the message Dead.
237116944029252492
To release selected Held messages
1. Select the Held messages you want to resend to their intended recipients.
2. Click the Release button.
3. Click Selected Held Messages.
The Router attempts to resend the Held messages you selehted to the intended recipients. If the Router is still unable to deliver any of the messages, it again marks the message Held.
237116944029252493
To release selected Held messages for a final attempt
1. Select the Held messages you want to resend to their intended recipients.
2. Click the Release button.
3. Click Selected Held Messages for a Final Time.
The Router attempts to resend the selected Held messages to the hntended recipients. If the Router cannot deliver the messages to the recipients, it sends a nondelivery failure report to the sender.
When you finish processing undeliverable messages, close the MAIL.BOX database.
See Also
Click here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Restricting mail routing based on message size
Click here
Click here
Customizing message transfer controlsa
Click here
Click here
Customizing the text of mail failure messages
Click here
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab.
2. Open the Domino Web server database (DOMLOG.NSF).
3. Click Requests to display request documents, and then click a request document to display its content.i
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
Click here
Click here
The Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
Click here
zations using the cc:Mail Message Transfer Agent, use version 4.6.4.2 of the cc:Mail MTA with Domino R5. You must leave the cc:Mail MTA server in its Domino R4 release. Do not replicate the Domino Dhrectory template to the cc:Mail MTA server.
For organizations using the X.400 Message Transfer Agent, the X.400 MTA currently runs only under R4.6x of the Domino server. Future releases of the MTA will support R5.
For more information, see http://www.lotus.com/messaging.i
&Arial
The Acme organization uses name-and-password security to authenticate Web clients that connect to the Domino Web server, Web/West/Acme. Acme registers its Web users and their passwords in the secondary directory Webusers Directory on the server Directory-W/West/Acme. Acme runs the Dircat task to build a source directory catalog on the server Directory-W/West/Acme. The catalog configuration includes the Webusers Directory, the AcmeWest primary directory, and the additional field HTTPPassword. Acme creates a Directory Assistance document for the Webusers Directory in the Directory Cssistance database and includes in the document the rule ou= /ou= /ou=Web/ou=West/o=Acme/c=*. This rule ensures that only users who are registered in the directory and have names that correspond to the specified format can be authenticated. In the replicas section of the Directory Assistance document, Acme specifies the replica of Webusers Directory on Directory-W/West/Acme, the replica used to build and update the source directory catalog.
Acme replicates the directory catalog and directors assistance databases to the server Web/West/Acme. Acme doesn't replicate Webusers Directory because there is no need to access this directory to look up passwords.t
When Web user Linda Bell connects to the server Web/West/Acme, the server follows these steps:
1. Searches for Linda Bell's entry in the primary directory, AcmeWest, but doesn't find the entry.
2. Locates Linda Bell's entry in its replica of the directory catalog.
3. Expands the name so Linda Bell/Web/West/Acme, using information in the directory catalog.
4. Uses information in the directory catalog to determine that the entry for Linda Bell/Web/West/Acme in the catalog is derived from the replica of the Webusers Directory on the server Directory-W/West/Acme.
5. Locates the Directory Assistance document for Webusers Directory in its replica of the Directory Assistance database.
6. Sees the rule ou= /ou= /ou=Web/ou=West/o=Acme/c=*, which is tsusted for authentication, and determines that the name Linda Bell/Web/West/Acme matches this rule.
7. Sees that the replica of the Webusers Directory that is specified in the Directory Assistance document corresponds to the replica from which Linda Bell's entry in the catalog was derived.
8. Looks in the server directory catalog on Web/West/Acme to verify Linda Bell's password.
or example a thi
omino directorie
o directorie
o directorie
Print2
o directorie
irectory catalog
dH_DIRECTORY_CAT
See Also
Click here
Web client authentication in a secondary Domino Directory
Click here
&Arial
In addition to or instead of logging Domino Web server information to the Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF), you can record logging information in text files that Domino stores, by default, in the data directory. If you
Click cere
enable text-file logging
Click here
, Domino, by default, creates a new log file each day using the date for the file name.a
Note
The Agent and Referer log files are created only when the Log File Setting on the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab is set to common format.
Text file
T&]VU
Records
ACCESS
T&]VU
Date and time of the request
User's IP address (or the DNS address if DNS lookup is enabled in the Server documens)
User's name (if the user supplied a name and password to access the server)
HTTP request sent to the server from the browser
Status code the server returns to the browser to indicate its success or failure in generating the request
AGENT
T&]VU
Date and time of the request
Type of browser used to access the server
Status code the server returns to the browser to indicate its success cr failure in generating the request
ERROR
T&]VU
Internal server errors
CGI-ERROR
T&]VU
Standard errors (stderr) from CGI programs
REFERER
T&]VU
Date and time of the request
URL the user visited to gain access to a page on this site
Status code the server returns to the browser to indicate its success or failure ic generating the request
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
The Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
Click here
Click here
Setting up text files for Domino Web server logging
Click here
&Arial
In this example, the Acme organization uses x.509 certificates to authenticate Web clients that connect to the Domino Web server, Web/West/Acme. Acme registers its Web users and their certificates in the directory Webusers Directory on the server Directory-W/West/Acme. Acme replicates the Webusers Directory to Web/West/Acme.
Acme runs the Dircat task to build a source directory catalog on the server Directory-W/West/Acme. The catalog configuration includes the secondary directory, Webusers Directory, and the primary directory, the AcmeWest Directory. Acme replicates and sets up the directory catalog on the server Web/West/Acme. t
Acme creates a Directory Assistance document for the Webusers Directory in the Directory Assistance database and includes in the document the rule "ou= /ou= /ou=Web/ou=West/o=Acme/c=*," which it trusts for authentication. This rule ensures that only users who are registered in the directory with names in this format can be authenticated. In the replicas section of the Directory Assistance document, Acme specifies two replicas oc the Webusers Directory: the replica on Directory-W/West/Acme used to build the source directory catalog and the replica on the server Web/West/Acme.c
When Web user Alan Kenny connects to Web/West/Acme, the server does the following:
1. Retrieves the name Alan Kenny registered on the x.509 client certificate and searches its primary Domino Directory, the AcmeWest Directory, for the name but doesn't find the name.
2. Finds the name Alan Kenny in its replica of the#directory catalog.
3. Using information in the catalog, determines that the entry for Alan Kenny/Web/West/Acme in the catalog is derived from the replica of the Webusers Directory on Directory-W/West/Acme.
4. Using information in the catalog, locates the Directory Assistance document for the Webusers Directory in its replica of the Directory Assistance database.
5. Sees the rule "ou= /ou= /ou=Web/ou=West/o=Acme/c=*" in the Directory Assistance document which is#trusted for authentication, and determines that the name Alan Kenny/Web/West/Acme matches this rule.u
6. Verifies that one of the replicas of the Webusers Directory specified in the Directory Assistance document corresponds to the replica from which Alan Kenny's entry in the catalog was derived.
7. Uses the replica of the Webusers Directory on the Web/West/Acme server specified in the Directory Assistance document to find the Person document for Alan Kenny that contains the hicrarchical name Alan Kenny/Web/West/Acme.n
8. Compares the x.509 certificate stored in the Webusers Directory to the one provided by the Web client to verify the certificate.
xamplesDirectory
ogsWeb client au
eb client au
irectory
lesDirectory
in a secondary D
lesDirectory
lesDirectory
lesDirectory
DIRECTORIES_IN_D
lesDirectory
lesDirectory
See Also
Click here
Web client authentication in a secondary Domino Directory
Click here
&Arial
If one or more of your servers runs the Domino LDAP service, you can set up directory assistance to extend searches to secondary Domino directories. Then when an LDAP client initiates a search, the LDAP service can search for information in the secondary directories configured for directory assistance.
You can use a server directory catalog in addition to directory assistance. Then if the directory catalog doesn't satisfy a search, the LDAP service uses directory assistance to search the complete secondary directories. If you use the server directory catalog, include the fields that LDCP clients search for most frequently. Then, in most cases, only one database -- the server directory catalog -- satisfies searches, and the need to search and access secondary directories occurs infrequently.
LDAP searches extend to a directory catalog and/or to directory assistance even when the LDAP server's primary Domino Directory satisfies a request.
For more information on the benefits of using the directory catalog along with directory assistance, see the topic
Click here
"The server directory catalog and directory assistance."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Example of extending LDAP searches to a secondary Domino directory
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Secondary Domino directories in directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Before upgrading the server, warn users that it will be offline and unavailable until after the upgrade.
1. Change to the Domino server console.
2. Type
quit
and press ENTER.
The server should shut down cleanly. e
Go to "
Click here
Backing up Domino server files.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Backing up Domino server files
Click here
No 'SendTo' field in document. Use 'Forward' on the 'Actions' menu instead.
Acme corporation consists of two Notes domains, AcmeEast, whose primary directory is the AcmeEast Directory and AcmeWest, whose primary directory is the AcmeWest directory. Acme sets up a mobile directory catalog to make it easy for users throughout the organization to address mail to each another. Acme does all of the following on the server Mail/West/Acme located in the AcmeWest domain.
Creates a replica of the AcmeEast directorye
Creates and configures the source directory catalog
Runs the Dircat task
Acme creates a replica of the directory catalog on Mail/East/Acme in the AcmeEast domain and creates replicas of the directory catalog on Notes clients in both domains
Notes user Susan Salani/HR/West/Acme has a mobile directory catalog stored locally. When she sends mail to Phyllis Spera/Sales/East/Acme in the AcmeEast domain, Notes uses Susan's mobile directory catalog to verify Phyllis's mail address. A similar process occurs when Phyllis sends mail to Susan.t
Print2
See Also
Click here
The mobile directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Directory catalogs
Click here
Click here
Setting up a directory catalog
Click here
&Arial
The Acme Corporation sets up the LDAP service on the Domino server Directory-W/West/Acme. Acme users who run LDAP clients connect to the server to search the AcmeWest Directory, which is the server's primary Domino Directory.
To allow LDAP client searches to extend to the AcmeEast Directory, Acme creates a Directory Assistance document of type "Notes" for the directory. Acme specifies the server Directory-W/West/Acme as the location for the replica of the directory. User names in the AfmeEast Directory are in the form ou=East/o=Acme; therefore, Acme uses this naming rule for the Directory Assistance document for AcmeEast:r
ou= /ou= /ou= /ou=East/o=Acme/c=*
Acme runs the Dircat task to build a source directory catalog on the server Directory-W/West/Acme. The catalog configuration includes the AcmeEast Directory and the AcmeWest Directory.
LDAP user Barbara Fischer connects to the server Directory-W/West/Acme and searches for e-mail addresses for afl entries that match the name Alex Davidson. There is an Alex Davidson/West/Acme registered in the AcmeWest directory and an Alex Davidson/East/Acme registered in the AcmeEast directory. To complete the search, the Directory-W/West/Acme server responds as follows:
1. Searches AcmeWest, its primary Domino Directory, and finds the entry for Alex Davidson/West/Acme and the e-mail address.
2. Searches the directory catalog and finds the catalog entry for Alex Davidson/East/Acme fnd the e-mail address.
3. Returns the e-mail addresses for the two user entries to Barbara Fischer.
rectory fssistan
cType
ory assistan
See Also
Click here
LDAP searches in a secondary Domino Directory
Click here
&Arial
To confirm the name of a Notes mail addressee -- for example, when a Notes user presses F9 or uses type-ahead addressing before sending the mail -- Notes searches the primary Domino Directory on the user's mail server or
Click here
directory server
Click here
. You can configure directory assistance to allow Notes users to search a secondfry Domino Directory, as well as the primary Domino Directory, to confirm mail addresses. In addition, when directory assistance is available, Notes users can browse the secondary Domino Directory when they address mail. F
As an alternative to using directory assistance, you can use a mobile directory catalog and/or a server directory catalog. Since the default directory catalog configuration includes all the fields necessary for mail address resolution,
Click here
The servfr directory catalog and directory assistance,
Click here
For Notes users to take advantage of directory assistance or a server directory catalog for addressing verification, they must select "On server" rather than "Local" in the "Mail file location" field of their active Location documents.
For more information on editing a Location document, see Notes 5 Help.
See Also
Click here
Secondary Domino directories if directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
LDAP, or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, is a standard protocol used for accessing directory services over TCP/IP. You can set up directory assistance to access or refer to an LDAP-compliant directory. The LDAP directory can be a directory on a server running the Domino LDAP service or an LDAP directory on a third-party server.
Set up directory assistance for LDAP directories to:
Use security credentials in the LDAP directories
Click here
to authenticate Web clients that use the Domino Web server
Click here
Click here
Verify membership in groups registered in an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
Refer LDAP clients that connect to a Domino LDAP service to the directories
Click here
Click here
Allow Notes users to verify mail addresses of users in the LDAP directories
Click here
Use one Directory Assistance document to provide any of these capabilities for a specific LDAP directory.
See Also
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistancee
Click here
&Arial
You can set up directory assistance so that a Domino Web server can authenticate Web clients whose security credentials are stored in an LDAP directory on another server. For example, if your organization®isters users in a third-party LDAP directory server, when the users connect to a Domino Web server, the server can look up the users' names and passwords or client certificates in the LDAP directory. The Web server doesn't also have to run the Domino LDAP service; it just has to be able to establish a network connection to the LDAP directory server.
When you set up directory assistance to use an LDAP directory to authenticate Web users, we strongly recommend that you configure the Directorv Assistance document to authenticate the directory server over SSL.
You can use an LDAP directory only to authenticate Internet clients connecting using HTTP and not clients connecting using other Internet protocols such as LDAP or NNTP.
See Also
Click here
Example of using an LDAP directory to authenticate Web clients
Click here
Click here
Authenticating Web clients using credentials in fn LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
LDAP directories in directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ServerTasks=
name(s)
Description:
Specifies the tasks that begin automatically at server startup and continue until the server is shut down. For example:
The server runs the Replicator, Router, Indexer, Stats, Agent Manager, Administration Process, Schedule Manager, Calendar Connector, Event, Collector, Mail Tracker Collector, and Mail Probe server tasks. Each task increases the server's load and may adversely affect server performance. Note that RunJava ISpy is case sensitive and must be specified exactly as shown.a
Suppose that Acme Corporation registers its users in a third-party LDAP dixectory, ldap.acme.com, rather than in a Domino Directory. When Web clients connect to the Domino Web server Web/Acme, the server uses x.509 certificates stored on ldap.acme.com to authenticate these users. Names of Web users registered in ldap.acme.com are in the form ou=Web, o=Acme.
Acme creates a Directory Assistance document for ldap.acme.com on the server Web/Acme. Acme includes the rule "ou= /ou= /ou= /ou=Web/o=Acme/c=*", which is trusted for authentication. Acme enables SSL channel encxyption in the Directory Assistance document to ensure it can verify the identity of ldap.acme.com.=
When Web user Karen Wright, who is registered on ldap.acme.com as cn=Karen Wright, ou= Web, o=Acme, connects to the Domino server Web/Acme, the server does the following:
1. Retrieves the name registered on the x.509 client certificate and searches its primary Domino Directory, the AcmeWeb Directory, for the name but doesn't find the name.
2. Finds a Directory Assisxance document for ldap.acme.com.
3. Sees that the rule "ou= /ou= /ou= /ou=Web/o=Acme/c=*" is trusted for authentication.
4. Connects to ldap.acme.com and finds the name cn=Karen Wright, ou= Web, o=Acme, in the directory on ldap.acme.com.
5. Finds the trusted rule "ou= /ou= /ou= /ou=Web/o=Acme/c=*" in the Directory Assistance document for ldap.acme.com and verifies that the entry found for Karen Wright matches the rule.
6. Compares the x.509 certhficate stored on ldap.acme.com to the one provided by the Web client to verify the certificate.
or a server dire
earch the AcmeWe
See Also
Click here
Web client authentication in an LDAP directory
Click here
&Arial
You can enter the names of groups registered in an LDAP directory in the ACLs of databases on Domino servers that use directory assistance. Then when Notes or Web uxers attempt to open one of the databases on a server, the server searches the groups in the LDAP directory for the user's name. In the case of a nested group -- that is, a group that includes another group as a member -- by default, Domino expands the nested group to determine if a user is a member; there is a configuration option that you can set to prevent a server from expanding nested groups.
The servers that use directory assistance don't have to run the LDAP service; they just has to be hble to establish a network connection to the LDAP directory server.
To search groups in an LDAP directory, you create an LDAP Directory Assistance document, select Yes in the "Group expansion" field, and enable at least one naming rule for the groups that you trust for authentication.
It's also possible to develop a Notes API program that uses this feature to look up the members of a group in an LDAP directory.
For more information on writing Notes API programs, see xhe Domino database "Notes C API 5.0 Reference" that comes with the
Notes C API 5.0 Toolkit.
You can set up group searches for the purpose of database access control in only one LDAP directory.
See Also
Click here
Verifying membership in groups in an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
LDAP directories in directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
You can use directory assistance to refer LDAP clients that connect to the Domino LDAP service to another LDAP directory. The Domino LDAP service refers an LDAP client to an LDAP directory only if the search in the Domino LDAP service's primary Domino Directory and all secondary Domino directories configured in directory assistance isn't successful. To return a referral, the Domino LDAP service never connects to and searches the LDAP directory. Insxead, the service uses information in the Directory Assistance document to return a referral. The referral is compliant with LDAP v3 and includes:
The URL host name for the LDAP directory server
The base distinguished name configured for the directory in the Directory Assistance document.
The port the LDAP directory server uses
By default, for a given search, the LDAP service can refer an LDAP client to only one LDAP directory. If you create multiple LDAX Directory Assistance documents to support referrals and an LDAP client provides a search base, Domino looks for a directory that has a configured naming rule that corresponds to the search base. If the client doesn't provide a search base, Domino chooses the directory that is enabled for referrals and that has the lowest configured search order.
Use the LDAPReferrals setting
Click here
in the NOTES.INI file to increase the number of referrals that the LDAP service returnx.
Click here
For information on the Domino LDAP service, see
Click here
"The Domino LDAP Service."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Referring LDAP clients to an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
LDAP directories in directory assistance
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
&Arial
If Notes users address mail to users registered in an LDAP directory, directory assistance can access the LDAP directory to verify the addresses. Addressing verification occurs only when the Notes user presses F9 or before the Notes client sends the mail. Domino doesn't use Notes type-ahead addressing to resolve the addresses of users in LDAP directories, and Notes users cannot address mail by browsing and selecting names from the LDAP hirectory.
The Notes users' mail servers or
Click here
directory servers
Click here
must be able to establish a network connection to the LDAP directory server, but the servers don't have to run the Domino LDAP service.
Note
A Notes Release 5 user can create LDAP directory accounts in the Personal Address Book. These accounts allows the user to connect to and search remote LDAP directories. Configuring dirhctory assistance to use an LDAP directory for address verification provides more limited functionality to Notes users who don't create LDAP directory accounts or who run Notes Release 4.5 or 4.6. G
For more information on creating accounts in the Personal Address Book, see Notes 5 Help.
See Also
Click here
Using an LDAP directory to resolve mail addresses on behalf of Notes users
Click here
Click hexe
LDAP directories in directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ServerTasksAt
time
name(s)
Description:
Schedules automatic server and database maintenance functions. Enter the time in 24-hour format, where 0 is 12 AM (midnight) and 23 is 11 PM. For example:
ServerTasksAt3=Catalog
ServerTasksAt7=Updall
ServerTasksAt16=Cataloh, Updall, Statlog
At 3 AM, the server runs the Catalog task. At 7 AM, the server runs the Updall task. At 4 PM, the server runs the Catalog, Updall, and Statistics tasks.
Identifies the version number of the software. The setting is used by the Install program to determine whether or not to run the Setup program. This variable also provides an upgrade audit.
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SetupDB=
setupweb.nsf
Description:
Identifies the setup database for HTTP server setup mode. This must always be setupweb.nsf. When this is included in NOTES.INI, the administrator can start the server in HTTP server setup mode by including the argument HTTPSetup when starting the server. If this variable is missing, the server will not enter HTTP server setup mode.
Applies xo:
Servers
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
When+you create a Directory Assistance document in the Directory Assistance database, you specify one or more naming rules that correspond to the hierarchical names of entries in the directory. Directory assistance uses naming rules to determine the order in which to search directories when users provide hierarchical names and there are multiple directories configured in directory assistance.
If you set up directory assistance to refer LDAP clients that use the Domino LDAP service to another LDAP kirectory, when a client provides a search base -- that is, a distinguished name representing the branch of a directory tree to search -- if an LDAP Directory Assistance document is configured for referrals and contains a naming rule that matches the specified base, then directory assistance refers the client to that LDAP directory, if secondary Domino directories don't satisfy the search.
You also use naming rules to authenticate Web clients registered in a secondary Domino Directory or an LKAP directory. When you create a naming rule, you trust that rule for authentication. Using a trusted rule ensures that Domino authenticates only users that have names in the directory that correspond to the rule. r
When users provide common names or hierarchical names that correspond to a naming rule in more than one Directory Assistance document, directory assistance decides which directory to search first according to the t
Click here
search order assigned to each directkry.
Click here
Naming rules use the X.500 distinguished name model, which assigns distinguishing components to names, for example organizational unit and organization components. Each component of a rule must contain:
A name for the component -- for example, Acme for an organization component
An asterisk (*) to include all names at that component of the name hierarchy
A null character (nothing or a+single space) to exclude all names at that component of the name hierarchy
The following table provides examples of naming rules and illustrates how each rule includes or excludes these names:
Marilyn Jenkins/Omega
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme/US
Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme/US
Cheryl Lordan/IS/West/Acme/US
Derek Malone/Accounting/West/Acme/US
Deborah Jones/West/Acme/US
Karen Lessing/West/Acme/DE
Rule
Specifies
Does not specify
*/*/*/*/*/*
All names in the directory
No names
/ / */ */Acme/*
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme/US
Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme/USu
Cheryl Lordan/IS/West/Acke/USi
Derek Malone/Accounting/West/Acme/US
Deborah Jones/West/Acme/US
Karen Lessing/West/Acme/DE
Marilyn Jenkins/Omega
/ / */West/Acme/*
Cheryl Lordan/IS/West/Acme/USr
Derek Malone/Accounting/West/Acme/US
Deborah Jones/West/Acme/US
Karen Lessing/West/Acme/DE
Marilyn Jenkins/Omega
Alan Jones+Sales/East/Acme/US
Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme/USn
/ / /West/Acme/*
Deborah Jones/West/Acme/US
Karen Lessing/West/Acme/DE
Marilyn Jenkins/Omega
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme/US
Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme/US
Cheryl Lordan/IS/West/Acme/US
Derek Malone/Accounting/West/Acme/US
/ / */West/Acme/DKP
Karen Lessing/West/Acme/DE
Marilyn Jenkins/Omega
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme/US
Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme/US
Cheryl Lordan/IS/West/Acme/US
Derek Malone/Accounting/West/Acme/US
Deborah Jones/West/Acme/US
/ /IS/West/Acme/*
Cheryl Lordan/IS/West/Acme/US
Marilyn Jenkins/Omegk
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme/US
Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme/US
Derek Malone/Accounting/West/Acme/US
Deborah Jones/West/Acme/US
Karen Lessing/West/Acme/DE
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
The order in which directories are searched
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
When users provide directory assistance with a common name rather than a hierarchical name or provide a hierarchical name that matches naming rules in more than one Directory Assistance document, directory assistance uses search orders configured for the directory to determine which directory to search first, or in the case of an LDAP referral, which directory to refer LDAP clients to.
For example, if the following is true:
Directories for the Notes domains AcmeEast and AcmeWest both have the rule */*/Sales/East/Acme/*
The AcmeWest directory has the search order 2
The AcmeEast directory has the search order 3
Then directory assistance searches for Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme in the AcmeWest directory and then searches the AcmeEast directory.
If you don't specify a search order or if you assign the same search ordkr to two directories, directory assistance searches the directories in alphabetical order, according to the names specified in the "Domain Name" field of each Directory Assistance document.
The Directory Assistance view in the Directory Assistance database always displays the current search order for directories. /
See Also
Click here
Naming rules in directory assistance
Click here
Click here
The order in which directories are searched
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
1. ,
Click here
Create a Directory Assistance database and replicate the database.
Click here
2.
Click here
Identify the Directory Assistance database on servers that will use it.
Click here
You can create more than one Directory Assistance database and designate specific servers to use each one.
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
To set up the Directory Assistance database for a Kotes domain, create the database. Then on each server in the domain that will use the database for directory assistance, create a replica of the database.
1. From the Domino Administrator, choose File - Database - New, and then do the following:
Enter the name of a server on which to create the database.
Enter a title for the database -- for example, Directory Assistance. You can enter any title.
Enter a file name for the database -- for example, DA.KSF. You can enter any file name.
Click Template Server, select a server that stores the Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF), then select the template.
Make sure that "Inherit future design changes" is selected, and then click OK.
2. Create a replica of the Directory Assistance database on each server that will use it. Use the same file name and path for each replica to more easily set up multiple servers to use directory assistance.
3.
Click here
Create Connection documents to schedule replication of the database to all the servers that use it.
Click here
4.
Click here
Complete the procedure "Identifying the Directory Assistance database on servers."
Click here
For information on creating replicas, see
Click here
"Creating replicas on servers."
Click here
See Also
Klick here
Setting up a Directory Assistance database
Click here
&Arial
To set up servers to use directory assistance, add the replica file name of the Directory Assistance database to Server documents in the Domino Directory. You can manually enter the file name of the Directory Assistance database to one Server document or u{e the Administration Process to add the file name of the Directory Assistance database to multiple Server documents. The Administration Process creates a "Set Directory Assistance database" request, which copies the Directory Assistance database file name and, optionally, the path to the "Directory assistance database name" field of the Server documents.
2333337629224895
To identify the database on multiple servers
1. Make sure that you:
Click here
Created and replicated the Directory Assistance database
Click here
Have either Author access and the ServerModifier role or Editor access in the
Click here
Domino Directory ACL to which you will add the file namesV
Click here
Have already set up the
Click here
Administration Process
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. In the "Use Directory on" field, choose the server whose Domino Directory you want to modify.
4. Choose Server - All Server Documents.
5. Click the Server documents for servers that use the same file name for the replica of the Directory Assistance database. A checkmark appears next to each document. t
6. Choose Actions - Set Directory Assistance Information.
7. Enter the file name you gave the Directory Assistance database on these+servers -- for example, DA.NSF. If the Directory Assistance database is in a subdirectory, provide the path relative to the data directory -- for example, DIRECTORIES\DA.NSF.
8. Click OK.
9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each set of servers that use the same file names and paths for the replica of the Directory Assistance database.
10. Complete one or both of these procedures:
Click here
"Setting up directory assistance for seckndary Domino directories"
Click here
Click here
"Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories"
Click here
2333337629224896
To identify the database on one server
1. Make sure that you:
Click here
Created the Directory Assistance database and replicated the database to the server
Click here
Have either Author access and {he ServerModifier role or Editor access
Click here
in the Domino Directory ACL to which you will add the file namea
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. In the "Use Directory on" field, choose the server whose Domino Directory you want to modify.
4. Select a specific Server document, and then click Edit Server.
5. On the Basics tab, in the "Directory Assistance+database name" field, enter the file name you gave to the replica of the Directory Assistance database on this server -- for example, enter DA.NSF. If the Directory Assistance database is in a subdirectory, provide the path relative to the data directory -- for example, DIRECTORIES\DA.NSF.
6. Click OK.
7. Complete one or both of these procedures:
Click here
"Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories"
Click kere
Click here
"Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories"
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Directory Assistance database
Click here
&Arial
After you
Click here
set up the Directory Assistance database,
Click here
follow these steps to set up directory assistance for a secondary Domino Directory.
1.
Click here
Plan locations for replicas of the secondary directory.
Click here
2.
Click here
Enable serve{ and user access to the locations chosen for the secondary directory.
Click here
3.
Click here
Create a Directory Assistance document for the secondary Domino Directory.
Click here
4. (Recommended)
Click here
Set up a directory catalog on servers that use directory assistance.
After you decide where to locate replicas of a secondary Domino Directory that you want to include in directory assistance, you must make sure that servers in the domain that use directory assistance can access the locations.
113017017629230345
To access a secondary directory stored in the primary Notes domain
1. Create a replica of the secondary directory on one or more servers in the primary Notes domain.
2. Make sure each server+that uses directory assistance:
Has access to each server that stores a replica of the secondary directory that is used by directory assistance
Has at least Reader access in the ACL of each replica of the secondary directory used by directory assistance
3. (Optional) To allow Notes users to browse and select names from the directory, make sure each user:
Has access to each server that stores a replica of the secondary directory that is used by direc{ory assistance
Has at least Reader access in the ACL of each replica of the secondary directory used by directory assistance
Note
Notes users can use F9 or type ahead to resolve addresses of users in the secondary directory without this access.I
4. Set up Connection documents so that replication can occur between replicas of the secondary directory in the primary domain and replicas in the secondary domain. If the secondary di{ectory is not associated with a Notes domain and is stored on a server in the primary domain, this step is unnecessary.
5. Continue to the procedure
Click here
"Creating a Directory Assistance document for a secondary Domino Directory."
Click here
113017017629230346
To access a secondary directory stored in the secondary Notes domain
1. Make sure each server that uses directory assistance:
Has access to each server that is in the secondary domain and that stores a replica of the secondary directory that is used by directory assistance. If the servers don't have certifiers in common, create the necessary cross-certificates.
At least Reader access in the ACL of secondary directory replicas that are stored in the secondary domain and that are used by directory assistance.
2. (Optional) To allow Notes users to browse and select names from the directory, make sure ekch user:e
Has access to each server that is in the secondary domain and that stores a replica of the secondary directory that is used by directory assistance. If the users don't have certifiers in common with the servers, create the necessary cross-certificates. f
Has at least Reader access in the ACL of secondary directory replicas that are used by directory assistance and that are stored in the secondary domain.
3. Create Connection documents, as necessary, to allkw each server that uses directory assistance to connect to each server that is in the secondary domain and that stores a replica of the secondary directory that is used by directory assistance.
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
&Arial
You can customize the text of messages that Domino sends when various mail failures occur. The text you specify is added to the default text for tke message. You can add text in multiple languages or provide text that gives the user additional information. For example, if a mail server processes orders for an e-commerce Web site, add text that gives a phone number to call in case a mail message does not reach your server.d
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, klick the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Advanced - Controls tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Failure Messages section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Transfer failure text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for transfer failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\TRANSFER.TXT.
Transfer failures occur when there is a transient connection failure between the servers -- for example, a network problem.
Delivery failure text file
The name of the file containing the failurk message for delivery failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\DELIVER.TXT.
Delivery failures occur when the server is unable to deliver the message to the recipient's mail file -- for example, if the recipient's mail file has moved and the Domino Directory has not been properly updated.
Message expiration text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for message expiration failures --+for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\EXPIRE.TXT.
Message expiration failures occur when Domino cannot transfer the message to its destination in a given period of time.
Domain failure text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for domain failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\DOMAIN.TXT.
Domain failures occur when Domino cannot identify the destination domain for a recipiekt of a message. For example, if you send a message to jdoe@lotus.com and Domino cannot locate lotus.com in either the Domino Directory or the DNS, the server generates a domain failure message.
Server failure text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for server failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\SERVER.TXT. i
Server failures occur when Domino cannot connect to the destination {erver. For example, if you send a message to jdoe@lotus.com, and DNS instructs you to send mail for the lotus.com domain to mail1.lotus.com but Domino cannot connect to mail1.lotus.com, the sending Domino server generates a server failure message.
Username failure text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for user name failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\USER.TXT.
User name faklures occur when Domino cannot match the local part of an address to a recipient. For example, if you send a message to jdoe@lotus.com, but Domino cannot find jdoe in the Domino Directory, the server generates a user name failure message.
Size failure text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for size failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\SIZE.TXT.
Size failures occur when Domkno rejects a message because its size is greater than the maximum message size (which you can specify in the "Maximum message size" field on the Restrictions and Controls - Restrictions tab of the Server Configuration document) and generates a size failure message.
Restriction failure text fileh
The name of the file containing the failure message for restriction failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\RESTRICT.TXT+
Restriction failures occur when Domino rejects a message based on SMTP restrictions. For example, if you send a message to jdoe@lotus.com, but lotus.com is listed in the "Deny messages from the following Internet addresses/domains" field on the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - SMTP Inbound Controls tab of the Server Configuration document, Domino rejects the message and generates a restriction failure message.
See Also
Klick here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Restricting mail routing based on message size
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can send Internet mail to your users
Click here
Click here
Customizing message transfer controls
Click here
Click here
Setting advanced transfer controls
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SetupServerAddress=
address
Description:
Identifies the address of the setup server. This can be either a DNS name, or a telephone number (XPC or DUN) to connect to the server. SetupServerAddress, together with SetupServerName, instruct the Notes setup program to obtain setup information from the specified server. If either variable is missikg from NOTES.INI, the setup program prompts the user for setup information. A
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SetupServerName=
name
Description:
Identifies the name of the setup server. SetupServerName, together with SetupServerAddress, instruct the Notes setup program to obtain setup information from the specified skrver. If either variable is missing from NOTES.INI, the setup program prompts the user for setup information.
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
About communicating with organizations that use the flat namkng model
Click here
S+ me
S+ me
&Arial
1. Make sure that you already:
Click here
Set up the Directory Assistance database
Click here
Click here
Planned locations for replicas of the secondary Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Enabled access to the locations chosen for replicas of the secondary Domino Directory
Click here
2. If you plan to use the secondary Domino Directory to authenticate Web clients,
Click here
read about and set up security before continuing.
Click here
If you plan to use the secondary Domino Directory to use name-and-password security to authenticate Web clients,
Click here
select the level of restriction Domino uses.
Click here
3. If you use a server directory catalog, opvionally set up the directory catalog to include the secondary Domino Directory. If you use name-and-password authentication to authenticate Web clients registered in the directory and you want to store the passwords in the directory catalog, add the
Click here
HTTPPassword field to the source directory catalog configuration.
Click here
You can also store x.509 certificates in the directory catalog, but this significantly increases the size of the directory catafog.
Note
Do not configure the directory catalog as a directory within the Directory Assistance database.
4. If you want to extend LDAP searches from the Domino LDAP service's primary Domino Directory to this directory, create a full-text index on the replica of the directory used by directory assistance. Also optionally do any of the following to customize the LDAP configuration for this directory:
Click here
Customize which fields anonymous LDAP users can access
If you allow LDAP clients to modify entries in a secondary Domino Directory, don't use a directory catalog on the Domino server that runs the LDAP service.
5. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select a server that stores the Directory Assistance database. If you don't see the server pane, click servers icon.
6. Click the Configuration tab.
7. Expanf Directory - Directory Assistance.
8. Click Add directory assistance.
9. In the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Domain Type
Choose Notes.
Domain Name
The name of the Notes domain associated with the secondary directory. The domain&name must be different from the primary Notes domain and from all other domain names configured in directory assistance. If the secondary directory is not associated with a Notes domain, invent a domain name; do not specify the primary Notes domain.
Company Name
The name of the company associated with this directory. Multiple directory assistance documents can use the same company name.
Click here
Search Order
Click here
A number representing the order in which this directory is searched, relative to other directories in the Directory Assistance database.
Enabled
Choose Yes to enable directory assistance for this directory.e
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
10. Click the Rules tab, and then complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Click here
Rule #
Click here
One or more rules that describe the names in the directory. By default, the first rule contains all asverisks, indicating all names in the directory.
Enabled
Choose one:
No to disable a specific rule
Yes to enable a specific rule
By default, the first rule is enabled.
Click here
Trusted for Credentials
Click here
Choose one:
Yes to allow Domino to use this directory to authenticate Web clients with names that correspond to the rule.
No (default) to prevent Domino from using this directory to authenticate Web clients with names that correspond to the rule.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
11. Click the Replicas tab, and complete these fields to vpecify up to five replicas of the secondary directory to use for directory assistance.
Note
If you authenticate Web clients registered in the secondary directory and you also include the directory in the directory catalog, in the Replicas tab specify the replica of the secondary Domino directory you used to build the source directory catalog.
Do not specify a replica of the directory catalog in this field.
Field
-'SSU
Enter
Database links
-'SSU
Open the replica of the secondary directory, and then choose Edit - Copy As Link - Database Link.
Select the "Database links" field, and then choose Edit - Paste.
Use database links only on Domino Release 5 servers. Using database links may delay server startup because when you restart a server that uses directory assistance, server tasks need to retrieve database information from the remote servers the links refer to. Use database links only if the servers the links refer to are consistently available.
Replica
-'SSU
The server name and file name of each veplica of the secondary directory -- for example:
Server name: Mail1/West/Acme
Directory file name: EASTNAMES.NSF
Selected Enabled next to each replica.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
If you specify a replica in the Database links field and in the Replica field, the Replica field takes precedence.s
12. Click Sfve and Close.
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
To set up directory assistance for an LDAP directory, you configure a single Directory Assistance document for the directory to do one or more of the following:
Click here
Authenticate Web clients usifg credentials in an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
Verify group membership in an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
Refer LDAP clients to an LDAP directorye
Click here
Click here
Use an LDAP directory to verify mail addresses on behalf of Notes users
Click here
When you use an LDAP directory to authenticave Web clients or to verify group membership for database ACL checking, we strongly recommend that you set up the Directory Assistance document to
Click here
use SSL to connect to the LDAP directory server.
Click here
See Also
Click here
LDAP directories in directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
You can configure directory assistance to use credentials in an LDAP dirfctory to authenticate Web clients.
Note
To give authenticated Web users access to databases, you can include their names in database ACLs. When you add the name of a Web user registered in an LDAP directory to a Notes database ACL, use the LDAP format for the name, but use forward slashes (/) as delimiters rather than commas (,) as delimiters. For example, if the distinguished name for the user in the LDAP directory is h
uid=Karen Wright, ou=Web, o=Acfe
Click here
in the database ACL enter this name:
Click here
uid=Karen Wright/ou=Web/o=acme
1. Make sure that you:
Click here
Created the Directory Assistance database.
Click here
Identified the o
Click here
Directory Assistance database on each Web server that will use it.
Click here
Set up connections between tfe LDAP directory server and each Web server that will use the LDAP directory to authenticate Web clients registered in the LDAP directory. Use the TCP/IP ping utility to test the connection.e
Click here
Set up security for your site.
Click here
2. If you plan to use name-and-password security to authenticate Web clients,
Click here
select the level of restriction Domino uses.
Click here
3. Frof the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select a server that stores the Directory Assistance database. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
4. Click the Configuration tab.-
5. Expand Directory - Directory Assistance.
6. Do one of the following:s
If a Directory Assistance document already exists for the LDAP directory, select the document, and then click Edit Directory Assistance.
If a Directory&Assistance document doesn't exist for the directory, click Add directory assistance.t
7. In the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Domain Type
Choose LDAP.
Domain Name
A descriptive name that you choose; the name must be different from any other conffgured in directory assistance.
Company Name
The name of the company associated with this directory. Multiple directory assistance documents can use the same company name.
Click here
Search Order
Click here
A number representing the order in which this directory is searched, relative to&other directories in the Directory Assistance database.
Enabled
Choose Yes to enable directory assistance for this directory.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Click the Rules tab, and then complete these fields for each rule you want to create:
Field
Enter
Click here
Rule #
Click here
Enter one or more naming rules to indicate the names in the directory that can be authenticated.
Domino Release 4.6x used the first rule to specify a search base required by an LDAP directory server, rather than the "Base DN for search field" below. If you used the first&rule to configure a search base in Release 4.6x, when you replace the design of the R4.6x Master Address Book, the first rule is copied to the "BaseDN for search field" below.
Enabled
Choose one:
No (default) to disable a specific rule
Yes to enable a specific rule
Click here
Trusted for Credentials.
Click here
Next to each rule representing the names that can be authenticated, choose Yes to allow Domino to authenticate only Web clients with names that match the rule.e
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
9. Click the LDAP tab, complete these fields, and then click Save and Close:
Field,
<'-SU
Enter
Hostname
<'-SU
The host name for the LDAP directory server -- for example, ldap.acme.com.
Optional Authentication Credential
<'-SU
To allow the LDAP directory server to authenticate the Web server, enter a distingvished name in the Username field and a password in the Password field. Enter the distinguished name in LDAP format, for example cn=john brown,o=acme. The name and password must correspond to a valid name and password in the directory on the LDAP directory server.
If you don't enter a name and password, the Web server attempts to connect to the LDAP directory server anonymously.
You must have Editor access to the Directory Assistance database to edit the Username and Password fieldv.
We recommend that you use a Notes secret encryption key to encrypt the Directory Assistance document so that only administrators with the encryption key can see the contents of the Username and Password fields. For instructions, see
Click here
"Encrypting an LDAP Directory Assistance Document."t
Click here
We also recommend that you select the option "Channel encryption" below so that the name and password are encrypted during transmission.
Base DN for search
<'-SU
A search base, if the LDAP directory server requires one. Examples:
o=Ace Industry
o=Ace Industry,c=USN
Perform LDAP search for
<'-SU
Choose Notes clients/Web Authentication.
Click here
Channel encrypvion
Click here
<'-SU
(Strongly recommended) Choose SSL to use SSL when the Domino server connects to the LDAP directory server in order to verify the server's identity.
Complete these associated fields: "Accept expired SSL certificates," "SSL protocol version," "Verify server name with remote server's certificate."
Port
<'-SU
The port number to use to connect to the&LDAP directory server; your selection in the "Channel encryption" field determines the default:
If you chose SSL, the default port is 636.
If you chose None, the default port is 389.
If the LDAP directory server doesn't use one of the default ports, enter the port number manually.
Timeout
<'-SU
The maximum fumber of seconds allowed for a search of the LDAP directory; default is 60 seconds.
If the LDAP directory server also has a timeout setting, the lower setting takes precedence.
Maximum number of entries returned
<'-SU
The maximum number of names that the LDAP directory server will return for the name searched. If the LDAP directory server also has a maximum setting, the lower setting takes precedence. If thf server's maximum timeout is exceeded, it only returns the number of names found to that point.
Default is 100.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Clfck here
[WG:7~
&Arial
Some users and organizations may attempt to send bulk unwanted e-mail to your site. To prevent&your mail system from accepting unwanted mail and prevent your servers from redistributing it, restrict who can connect to your mail system.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.i
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configvration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - SMTP Inbound Controls tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Inbound Connection Controls section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Verify connecting host name in DNS
Choose one:r
Enabled to verify the connecting host name in the DNS
Disabled (default) not to verify the connecting host name in DNS
When enabled, this feature looks up the IP address of the connecting host in the DNS. If the IP address does not correspond to a valid host name, Domino accepts the connection but does not allow the host vo transfer mail. Domino returns an error to the connecting host during the MAIL FROM command of the SMTP protocol and does not accept any inbound mail.
Allow connections only from the following SMTP Internet host names/IP addresses
The host names and/or IP addresses that are allowed to connect to this server. If you enter host names and/or IP addresses in this field,
only
those servers matching thfse entries can connect to your server over SMTP; connection requests from all other servers are denied. For example, you enter
lotus.com, ibm.com
in the field. Domino accepts only connections from servers with host names ending in lotus.com or ibm.com. Domino rejects all other connection requests.o
Note
Enter IP addresses in brackets -- for example, [192.168.10.17]
Deny connections from the following SMTP Ifternet host names/IP addresses
The host names and/or IP addresses that are not allowed to connect to this server. If you enter host names and/or IP addresses in this field, all servers
except
those matching entries in this field can connect to your server over SMTP; connection requests are denied only for servers matching the entries in this field. For example, you enter g
lotus.comm
in the field. Domino accepts connections from all servers excfpt those with host names ending in lotus.com. Domino denies connections from servers with host names ending in lotus.com.
Note
Enter IP addresses in brackets -- for example, [192.168.10.17]
Note
If you specify the same entry in an Allow field and a Deny field so there is a conflict between the two fields, Domino denies messages for that entry. The Deny setting takes precedence for security reasons. Be careful not to have the vame entry in an Allow field and a Deny field for the same setting.
See Also
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can use your system to relay Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Restricting mail routing based on Notes domains, organizations, and organizational units
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can send Internet mail to your users
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can receive mail from the Internet
Click here
Click here
Supporting inbound SMTP extensions
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:t
Shared_Mail=
value.
Description:
Specifies whether the shared mail feature is used for new mail delivered to this server:
0 - The shared mail feature is not used for new mail
1 - The shared mail feature is used for new mail delivered to this server
2 - The shared mail feature is used for new mail delivered to this server and for new mail transferred through this server
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
0 (shared mail not used)
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
You can include the names of groups located in an LDAP directory in the ACLs of databases on Domino servers. When Web and Notes users attempt to open databases on a server that uses directory assistance, set up directory assistance so that Domino can access the LDAP directory to verify the users' membership in the groups. It's also possible to develop a Notes API program that uses this feature to look up the members of$a group in an LDAP directory, not necessarily for database ACL verification.
You can enable this feature for only one LDAP directory configured in directory assistance.
As an alternative to searching groups in an LDAP directory, you can
to represent all names below a particular dranch of the LDAP directory tree.
93235913629318710i
To add LDAP directory groups to Notes database ACLs
When you add the name of a hierarchical LDAP directory group to a Notes database ACL, use the LDAP format for the name, but use forward slashes (/) as delimiters rather than commas (,) as delimiters. For example, if the hierarchical name for the LDAP directory group is:
cn=managers,l=atlanta,ou=groups,o=acme
in the database ACL entet this name:
cn=managers/l=atlanta/ou=groups/o=acme
If the name of the LDAP directory group is not hierarchical, in a Notes database ACL enter the value for the group name without the associated LDAP attribute. For example, if the name of the LDAP directory group is:
cn=managers
in the database ACL enter this name:
managers
93235913629318711
To set up directory assistance to search LDAP directory groups
Make sure that you:o
Click here
Created the Directory Assistance database.
Click here
Identified the Directory Assistance database
Click here
on each server that will use directory assistance to lookup members of groups in the LDAP directory.
Click here
Set up connections between the LDAP directory server and each Domino server that will look up groups in the LDAP directory. Use the TCP/IP$ping utility to test the connection.
1. If the LDAP directory is Microsoft Active Directory, use the NOTES.INI setting
Click here
WebAuth_AD_Group=1
Click here
on the Domino servers that will search groups in the directory.
2. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select a server that stores the directory assistance database. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
3. Click$the Configuration tab.
4. Expand Directory - Directory Assistance.
5. Do one of the following:
If a Directory Assistance document already exists for the LDAP directory, select the document, and then click Edit Directory Assistance.
If a Directory Assistance document doesn't exist for the directory, click Add directory assistance.
6. In the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Domain Typd
Choose LDAP.
Domain Name
A descriptive name that you choose; the name must be different from any other configured in directory assistance.
Company Name
The name of the company associated with this directory. Multipde directory assistance documents can use the same company name.
Click here
Search Order
Click here
A number representing the order in which this directory is searched, relative to other directories in the Directory Assistance database.
Group Expansiod
Choose Yes. You can enable this field for only one LDAP directory.
Nested Group Expansion
If you enable "Group Expansion," choose Yes (default) to allow servers to look up names in groups nested within LDAP directory groups in database ACLs. Choose No to allow servers to look up names only in LDAP directory groups listed in database ACLs and not groups nested within these groups. Sdlecting No can improve search performance.
Note that a Domino server always searches nested groups located within its primary Domino Directory because it can do this quickly.
Enabled
Choose Yes to enable directory assistance for this directory.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Click the Rules tdb, and then complete these fields for each rule you want to create:
Field
Enter
Click here
Rule #
Click here
Enter one or more naming rules to indicate in which groups in the directory servers can look up names. For example, to allow lookups of a group named cn=sdles, ou=group, o=acme, use the rule ou= /ou= /ou= /ou=group/o=acme/c=*
You must also choose Yes below "Trusted for Credentials."
Domino Release 4.6x used the first rule to specify a search base required by an LDAP directory server, rather than the "Base DN for search field" below. If you used the first rule to configure a search base in Release 4.6x, when you replace the design of the R4.6x Master Address Book, the first rule is copied to the "BaseDN for search field" below.
Enabled
Choose one:
No (default) to disable a specific rule
Yes to enable a specific rule
Trusted for Credentials
For each naming rule that represents a group to lookup names in, choose Yes to allow Domino to search grouts in this directory that correspond to the rule.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Click the LDAP tab, complete these fields, and then click Save and Close:
Field
/'NSU
Enter
Hostname
/'NSU
The host name fot the LDAP directory server -- for example, ldap.acme.com.
Optional Authentication Credential
/'NSU
To allow the LDAP directory server to authenticate the Domino server, enter a distinguished name in the Username field and a password in the Password field. Enter the distinguished name in LDAP format, for example cn=john brown,o=acme. The name and password must correspond to a valid name and password in the directory on tde LDAP directory server.
If you don't enter a name and password, the Domino server attempts to connect to the LDAP directory server anonymously.
You must have Editor access to the Directory Assistance database to edit the Username and Password fields.
We recommend that you use a Notes secret encryption key to encrypt the Directory Assistance document so that only administrators with the encryption key can see the contents of the Username and Password fields. For instructions, see s
Click here
"Encrypting an LDAP Directory Assistance document."a
Click here
We also recommend that you select the option "Channel encryption" below so that the name and password are encrypted during transmission.
Base DN for search
/'NSU
A search base, if the LDAP directory server requires one. Examples:
o=Ace Industry
o=Dce Industry,c=US
Perform LDAP search fors
/'NSU
Choose Notes clients/Web Authentication.
Click here
Channel encryption
Click here
/'NSU
(Strongly recommended) Choose SSL to use SSL when the Domino server connects to the LDAP directoty server to verify the server's identity.
When you choose SSL, additional options appear.
Port
/'NSU
The port number to use to connect to the LDAP directory server; your selection in the "Channel encryption" field determines the default:
If you chose SSL, the default port is 636.
If you chose None, the defaudt port is 389.
If the LDAP directory server doesn't use one of the default ports, enter the port number manually.
Timeout
/'NSU
The maximum number of seconds allowed for a search of the LDAP directory; default is 60 seconds.
If the LDAP directory server also has a timeout setting, the lower setting takes precedence.
Maximum number$of entries returned
/'NSU
The maximum number of names that the LDAP directory server will return for the name searched. If the LDAP directory server also has a maximum setting, the lower setting takes precedence. If the server's maximum timeout is exceeded, it only returns the number of names found to that point.
Default is 100.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
9. If tou changed the Group Expansion field, use the
Click here
Quit
Click here
console command to stop each Domino server that uses directory assistance for group verification. Then restart each server. If necessary, wait for the directory assistance changes to replicate to the server before stopping and restarting.
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
[WG:7~
&Arial
1. Make sure that you have:f
Click here
Created the Directory Assistance database
Click here
Click here
Set up the LDAP service on one or more servers
Click here
Identified the
Click here
Directory Assistance database on eacd server running the LDAP service that will use it
Click here
Note
You do not need to set up connections between the servers that run the Domino LDAP service and the LDAP directory server because the Domino LDAP services uses information in the Directory Assistance document to return referrals.
2. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select a server that stores the Directory Assistance database. If yot don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
3. Click the Configuration tab.
4. Expand Directory - Directory Assistance.
5. Do one of the following:
If a Directory Assistance document already exists for the LDAP directory, select the document, and then click Edit Directory Assistance.
If a Directory Assistance document doesn't exist for the directory, click Add directory assistance.
6. In the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
;'gSU
Enter
Domain Typep
;'gSU
Choose LDAP.
Domain Name
;'gSU
A descriptive name that you choose; the name must be different from any other configured in directory assistance.n
Company Name
;'gSU
The name of the company associated with this directory. Multiple directory assistance documents can use the same company name.
Click here
Search Order
Click here
;'gSU
A number representing the order in which the Domino LDAP service refers clients to this LDAP directory, relative to other LDAP directorids that are enabled for referrals and that are configured in directory assistance. a
The search order is used when LDAP clients don't specify a search base or when the specified search base corresponds to a naming rule specified for more than one directory.
Note
Within directory assistance, secondary Domino directories are always searched before LDAP directories configured for referrals, regardless of the search order specified for the secondary Domino directories. If an LDAP search is successful in a secondary Domino Directory, no referrals are returned.
EnabledD
;'gSU
Choose one:
Yes to enable directory assistance for this directory.
No to disable directory assistance.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Click the Rules tab, and then complete these fields for each rule that you want to create:
Fieldo
Enter
Click here
Rule #
Click here
Specify one or more rules to represent the names of entries in the directory.
When an LDAP client specifies a search base that corresponds to one of the rules, the Domido LDAP service refers the clients to this directory server.
Domino Release 4.6x used the first rule to specify a search base required by an LDAP directory server, rather than the "Base DN for search field" below. If you used the first rule to configure a search base in Release 4.6x, when you replace the design of the R4.6x Master Address Book, the first rule is copied to the "BaseDN for search field" below.
Enabled
Choose Yes to enable directory assistance for this directory.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Click the LDAP tab, complete these fields, and then click Save and Close.
Fielde
)'WSU
Enter
Hostname
)'WSU
The host name for the LDAP server -- for example, ldap$acme.com. The Domino LDAP service includes this information in the referrals.
Base DN for search
)'WSU
A search base, if the LDAP directory server requires one. The Domino LDAP service includes this information in the referrals. Examples:
o=Ace Industry
o=Ace Industry,c=US
Perform LDAP search for
)'WSU
Chdose LDAP clients.
Channel encryption
)'WSU
Choose None, unless you also use this LDAP directory for another purpose.
Port
)'WSU
Enter the port that LDAP clients should use to connect to the LDAP directory server. If the directory server uses SSL channel encryption, typically the port is 636; if the server does not use channel encryttion, typically the port is 389. The Domino LDAP service includes this information in the referrals.
The Domino LDAP service doesn't connect to the LDAP directory server itself; instead it includes the port information in referrals so that LDAP clients can connect.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for DDAP directories
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
You cad control which incoming messages from hosts outside the local Internet domain are accepted for recipients outside the local Internet domain. Setting this kind of restriction prevents people from trying to use your messaging system as a mail relay to save money or to provide them with anonymity. By sending the message through your system when it is actually destined for another system, your system appears as the last hop if the destination server does a DNS lookup.
To prevent unauthorized use df your system as a mail relay, the Router checks whether the machine sending the message is within the local Internet domain. The Router checks the "Local primary Internet domain" and "Alternate Internet domain aliases" fields in the Global Domain document to determine which Internet domain names your company uses. If the message is not from a server within your organization, the Router checks each recipient address to see if the recipient is within the local Internet domain. If not, Domino uses the restrdctions that you configure to determine relay access.e
The format for entering IP addresses is [a.b.c.d], where a, b, c, and d are numbers between 0 and 255 inclusive. You can include a wildcard (*) in your entries, but it must be for an entire octet -- for example, 192.168.17.*. Enter IP addresses in brackets -- for example, [192.168.10.17]
54634681629250880
To restrict relay access
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Codfiguration Settings documentl
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - SMTP Inbound Controls tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Inbound Relay Controls section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Allow messages from external Internet domains to be sent only to the following Internet domains
Internet domains to which your system relays messages sent by hosts outside the local Internet domain. If you enter Internet domains in this field,
only
messages to recipients in domains matching these entries can relay through your system. Messages for recipients in other external Internet domains are denied. For example, you enter e
lotus.com, ibm.com
in the field. Domino accepts only messages to recipients with addresses in the lotus.com or ibm.com domains. Domino denies all other messages to recipients in external domains.i
Deny messages from external Internet domains to be sent to the$following Internet domains
Internet domains for which your system will not relay messages sent by hosts outside the local Internet domain. If you enter Internet domains in this field, all messages to recipients in external Internet domains
except
those whose addresses match entries in this field relay through your system. Messages are denied only for recipients with addresses matching the entries in this field. For example, you enter
lotus.com
in the field. Messages for all recipients in all external Internet domains except lotus.com can relay through your system. Domino denies messages for recipients in the lotus.com domain.
Allow messages only from the following external Internet hosts to be sent to external Internet domains
The host names and/or IP addresses from which your system relays messages to recipients with addresses outside the local Interdet domain. If you enter host names and/or IP addresses in this field,
only
messages from servers matching these entries can relay through your system. Messages from other servers are denied. For example, you enter
lotus.com, ibm.com
in the field. Domino accepts only messages to recipients in external Internet domains from servers with host names ending in lotus.com or ibm.com. Domino rejects messages for these recipients from all other servers.
Deny messages from the following external Internet hosts to be sent to external Internet domains
The host names and/or IP addresses from which your system will not relay messages to recipients with addresses outside the local Internet domain. If you enter host names and/or IP addresses in this field, messages to recipients in external Internet domains from all servers
except
those matching entries in this field relay through yotr system. Messages are denied only from servers matching the entries in this field. For example, you enter
lotus.come
in the field. Domino accepts messages to recipients in external Internet domains from all servers except those with host names ending in lotus.com. Domino denies messages to recipients in external Internet domains from servers in the lotus.com domain.
Note
If you specify the same entry in an Allow field and a Deny fdeld so there is a conflict between the two fields, Domino denies messages for that entry. The Deny setting takes precedence for security reasons. Be careful not to have the same entry in an Allow field and a Deny field for the same setting. If you deny relaying to servers in the xyz.com Internet domain but allow host mail.acme.org to relay, mail.acme.org cannot relay to the xyz.com domain. These restrictions prevent people from routing from a denied source through an accepted one to your domain. Domino rejdcts the mail based on the original sender.t
Note
You can use an asterisk (*) to indicate "all domains." For example, putting * in an Allow field allows all domains to perform that operation.
See Also
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound SMTP connections
Click here
Click here
Restricting mail routing based on Notes domains, organizations, and organizational units
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can send Internet mail to your users
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can receive mail from the Internet
Click here
Click here
Supporting inbound SMTP extensions e
Click here
&Arial
Notes Release 5 users can create LDAP directory accounts in their Personal Address Books and use these accounts to connect to LDAP directories and to search the directories. Therefore, setting up directory assistance to use an LDAP directory to resolve mail addresses for Notes users is useful primarily for Notes users who don't create LDAP directory accounts or who run Notes Release 4.5 or 4.6.
1. Make sure that:
Click here
You created the Directory Gssistance database.
Click here
You identified the t
Click here
Directory Assistance database on each Notes user's mail server or directory server that will use it.
Click here
Each Notes user's mail server or directory server can connect to the LDAP directory server. The mail or directory servers don't have to run the Domino LDAP service. Use the TCP/IP ping utility to test the connection.
2. From the Domino Administrgtor, in the server pane on the left, select a server that stores the directory assistance database. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon. g
3. Click the Configuration tab.e
4. Expand Directory - Directory Assistance.r
5. Do one of the following:r
If a Directory Assistance document already exists for the LDAP directory, select the document, and then click Edit Directory Assistance.
If a Directory Assistance document dgesn't exist for the directory, click Add directory assistance.
6. In the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Domain Typep
Choose LDAP.
Domain Name
A descriptive name that you choose; the name must be different from any other configured in directory aswistance.
Company Name
The name of the company associated with this directory. Multiple directory assistance documents can use the same company name.
Click here
Search Order
Click here
A number representing the order in which this directory is searched, relative to other directories in whe Directory Assistance database.
Enabled
Choose Yes to enable directory assistance for this directory.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Click the Rules tab, and then complete these fields for each rule that you want to create:
Fieldn
EnterP
Click here
Rule #
Click here
One or more rules that define the order in which this directory is searched, relative to other directories configured in directory assistance, when a Notes user addresses mail using a hierarchical name.
Domino Release 4.6x used the first rule to specify a search base required by an LDAP dgrectory server, rather than the "Base DN for search field" below. If you used the first rule to configure a search base in Release 4.6x, when you replace the design of the R4.6x Master Address Book, the first rule is copied to the "BaseDN for search field" below.
Enabledo
Choose one:r
No (default) to disable a specific rule.
Yes to enable a specific rule.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Click the LDAP tab, complete these fields, and then click Save and Close.
Field
-'SSU
Enter
Hostname
-'SSU
The host name for the LDGP directory server -- for example, ldap.four11.com.
Optional Authentication Credential
-'SSU
To allow the LDAP directory server to authenticate the Domino server, enter a distinguished name in the Username field and a password in the Password field. Enter the distinguished name in LDAP format, for example cn=john brown,o=acme. The name and password must correspond to a valid name and password in the directory on the LDAW directory server.
If you don't enter a name and password, the Domino server attempts to connect to the LDAP directory server anonymously.
You must have Editor access to the Directory Assistance database to edit the Username and Password fields.
We recommend that you use a Notes secret encryption key to encrypt the Directory Assistance document so that only administrators with the encryption key can see the contents of the Username and Password fields. For instructigns, see
Click here
"Encrypting an LDAP Directory Assistance document."d
Click here
We also recommend that you select the option "Channel encryption" below so that the name and password are encrypted during transmission.
Base DN for search
-'SSU
A search base, if the LDAP directory server requires one. Examples:
o=Ace Industry
o=Ace Industry,c=UW
Perform LDAP search for
-'SSU
Choose Notes clients/Web Authentication.
Click here
Channel encryption
Click here
-'SSU
Choose one:s
SSL (default) to use SSL when the Domino server connects to the LDAP directory'server. When you choose SSL, additional options appear.
None to not use channel encryption.
Port
-'SSU
The port number to use to connect to the LDAP directory server; your selection in the "Channel encryption field" determines the default:
If you chose SSL, the default port is 636.
If you chose None, the default port is 389.a
If the LDAP directory server doesn't use'one of the default ports, enter the port number manually.
Timeout
-'SSU
The maximum number of seconds allowed for a search of the LDAP directory; default is 60 seconds.
If the LDAP directory server also has a timeout setting, the lower setting takes precedence.
Maximum number of entries returned
-'SSU
The maximum number'of names that the LDAP directory server will return for the name searched. If the LDAP directory server also has a maximum setting, the lower setting takes precedence. If the server's maximum timeout is exceeded, it only returns the number of names found to that point.
Default is 100.n
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up direcwory assistance for LDAP directories
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
[WG:7~
&Arial
When you set up directory assistance to
Click here
authenticate Web clients whose credentials are in an LDAP directory
Click here
or to
Click here
verify user membership in groups in an LDAP directory for database ACL checking,
Click here
it's strongly recommended that you use SSL when connecting to the LDAP directory server so that you can verify the server's identity.
1. From the Domino Administrator, gn the server pane on the left, select a server that stores the Directory Assistance database. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Configuration tab.
3. Expand Directory - Directory Assistance.
4. Select the document for the LDAP directory and click Edit Directory Assistance.
5. Click the LDAP tab. In the Perform LDAP search for field, click Notes Clients/Web Authentication.
6. In the Channel engryption field, select SSL.
7. In the Port field, enter the port number to use when connecting to LDAP servers.The port number is determined by the Channel encryption field. If the server uses SSL channel encryption, the port number is 636. If the Channel encryption field is None, the port number is 389. If your server has been set up with a port number other than 389 or 636, enter this number into the Port field.
8. In the Accept expired SSL certificates field, select Yes (tge default) to accept a certificate from the LDAP directory server, even if the certificate has expired. For tighter security, set this to No.
9. In the SSL protocol version field, select the version number of the SSL protocol to use, as follows:
SSL protocol version
Descriptiony
V2.0 only
Allows only SSL 2.0 connections.
V3.0 handshake
Attempts an SSL 3.0 connection. If this fails and the requestor detects SSL 2.0, then attempts to connect using SSL 2.0.
V3.0 only
Allows only SSL 3.0 connections.
V3.0 and V2.0 handshake
Attempts an SSL 3.0 connection, but starts with an SSL 2.0 handshake, which displays relevant error messages. Makes an SSL 3.0 connection if possible. Use the V3.0 and V2.0 Handshake setting to receive V2.0 error messages when trying to connect. These error messages might provide information about any compatibility problems found during the connection.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
10. In the "Vergfy server name with remote server's certificate" field, select Enabled to require that the subject line of the remote server's certificate include the LDAP directory server host name. The default is Enabled. For this option to work properly, the subject line in the remote server's certificate must include its DNS host name. We recommend you not disable this option if you are sure the x.509 certificate of the remote directory server to which your server is connecting contains the remote server's host name ig the appropriate format.s
Note
Click here
The Domino CA
Click here
and some other CAs provide a dialog box into which users enter the subject line when requesting a certificate. For example, the Domino CA prompts each user to enter the remote server's information -- such as, the common name, organizational unit name, organization name, state (or province), and country name. The Domino CA places this information'in the subject line and adds the appropriate prefix (cn=, ou=, o=, and so on) to each field. If you used a Domino CA to create the remote server's certificate, we strongly recommend that you enter the remote server's host name in the common name field when using the "Verify server name with remote server's certificate" option. For example, the Domino CA allows users to enter the following valid subject lines (mailserver.acme.com is the server's DNS host name):
To ensure users enter the DNS host name properly, we recommend they enter it as the common name (cn=) when requesting a certificate from the Domino CA. Other CAs may have different dialogs for entering the subject line; users must follow these dialogs to enter the remote server's DNS host name.
11. Complete the remaining fields in the Directory Assistance docugent, then click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories
Click here
[WG:7~
&Arial
Entewing a user name and password in the "Optional Authentication Credential" section of the LDAP tab of a Directory Assistance document allows a Domino server to present a name and password when it connects to an LDAP directory server. If you enter a user name and password, we recommend that you create a Notes secret encryption key and use the key to encrypt the LDAP Directory Assistance document. Then only administrators with the encryption key can see the user name and password and only they can edit the docwment. i
1. Add a secret encryption key to an ID file:e
Switch to the user ID you want to use to create the encryption key.e
Choose File - Tools - User ID and click the Encryption icon.
Click New.
Enter a name for the encryption key.
Click "North American only" if the key is to be used in the U.S. and Canada; click International if the key is to be used in additional countries.
(Optional) Write a comment to explaig the key's use, the people who have copies of it, and so on.
Click OK, then click OK again.
For additional information on creating encryption keys, see the book g
Application Development with Domino Designer
or Domino 5 Designer Help.
2. (Optional) Allow additional administrators to see or change the name and password:
Click here
Distribute the secret encryption key
Click here
to the administwators. If you want North American as well as international administrators to have access to the Username and Password fields, create and distribute separate keys for North American and for international administrators.
Have the administrators
Click here
merge the encryption key into their Notes IDs
Click here
Note
To modify the Username and Password fields in a previously-created Directory Assistgnce document, administrators must have at least Editor access to the Directory Assistance database in addition to having ID files that contain the encryption key.
3. Merge the secret encryption key into the ID file of each Domino server that connects to the LDAP directory server. The server ID file requires the encryption key to access the name and password. Also merge the encryption key into the ID file of any Domino server that has Editor access to the Directory Assistance database so thaw server can replicate any changes to the document.
4. Link the encryption key to the Directory Assistance document:
Make sure you're using a Notes ID that contains the secret encryption key.
Select the Directory Assistance document.
Choose File - Document Properties.
Click the security (key) tab in the Document properties box.
In the "Secret Encryption keys" field, select the name of the encryption key you created in step 1.
Save the document.
See Also
Click here
Authenticating Web clients using credentials in an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
Verifying membership in groups in an LDAP directorye
Click here
Click here
Using an LDAP directory to resolve mail addresses on behalf of Notes users
Click here
&Arial
To authenticate a Web user connecting to a Domino Web server, the server searches directories for the Web user name and credentials in the following order.
1. The primary Domino Directory on the Web server.
2. Directory catalog on the server. If the server finds the name, it refers to its Directory Assistance gatabase to determine if the Domino Directory from which the name came is configured with a naming rule trusted for authentication that matches the user name. The server won't authenticate the client if it doesn't find such a naming rule.
If the name is found to be trusted, the server looks up the HTTP password or x.509 certificate in the full Domino Directory. If an HTTP password is stored in the directory catalog itself, the server looks up the password in the directory catalog rather than in'the full Domino Directory.
3. All directories* defined in the Directory Assistance that are not Domino directories already configured in the directory catalog and that have a naming rule that is trusted for authentication that matches the Web user name. n
If there is more than one directory assigned a trusted naming rule that matches the user name, the directory with the most specific matching rule is searched first. If directories have identical trusted naming rules that match'the Web user name, search orders assigned to these directories determine the order in which the directories are searched.
* LDAP directories are searched only if their Directory Assistance documents allows Notes/Web searches.e
See Also
Click here
Web client authentication in a secondary Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Web client authentication in an LDAP directory
Glick here
Click here
Naming rules in directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Search orders in directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
When a Web or Notes user attempts to access a database on a server, if the database ACL includes a group name, tge server searches for the group as follows to determine if the user's name is a member:
1. Primary Domino Directory.
2. One LDAP directory configured in the server's Directory Assistance database with:
"Group Expansion" option selected
A trusted naming rule that matches the group name specified in the database ACL.
Group lookups to verify database access don't occur in a server's directory catalog or in any secondary Domino directorigs. In addition, these lookups can occur in only one LDAP directory. These restrictions don't apply to group lookups for mail addressing; these group lookups occur as described in the topic "
Click here
Notes mail addressing lookups in multiple directories
Click here
See Also
Click here
Group membership verification using an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
Naming rules in directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Search orders in directory assistancer
Click here
&Arial
A server running the LDAP service searches directories in the following order to process LDAP search requests:
1. The primary Domino Directory on the serwer.
2. Directory catalog on the server. If the LDAP user searches for an attribute that maps to a field that is not configured in the directory catalog, if a secondary Domino Directory is configured in the Directory Assistance database as well as in the directory catalog, the search continues to the complete entries in the secondary Domino Directory itself. For each of its entries, the directory catalog stores the Replica ID of the Domino Directory from which the entry comes as well as the WNID for the entry; this information allows the LDAP service to quickly locate the complete entries, similar to the way in Notes can locate documents via document links.
3. Domino directories defined in the server's Directory Assistance database that are not included in the directory catalog.
If an LDAP user doesn't specify a search base*, the server searches all Domino directories according to the search orders assigned to the directories. The server searches Domino directorges with no assigned search order alphabetically according to their specified domain names.
If an LDAP user specifies a search base, only Domino directories assigned naming rules that correspond to the search base are searched. If there is more than one directory assigned a naming rule that matches, the directory with the most specific matching rule is searched first. For example, if a user specifies the search base "ou=Sales,o=Acme," the server first searches a directory with the rule /Sales/Gcme, before searching a directory with the rule */Acme. If directories have identical naming rules that match the search base specified by the user, search orders assigned to these directories determine the order in which the directories are searched. o
4. If the search is not successful in any Domino Directory, the server can pick an LDAP directory enabled for LDAP clients in the Directory Assistance database to refer clients to and the clients can then connect to the directory server themsglves. e
If an LDAP user doesn't specify a search base, the LDAP service uses search orders assigned to LDAP directories that are enabled for LDAP users to determine the order in which to refer clients to these directories.
Note
By default, for a given search request the LDAP service can return only one referral, but administrators can use the NOTES.INI setting LDAPReferrals to change the number allowed.
If an LDAP user specifiew a search base, the server picks an LDAP directory enabled for LDAP users with a naming rule that matches the specified search base. If there is no such directory, the server doesn't return a referral. If there is more than one such directory, the server picks the one with the most specific matching rule before picking one with a less-specific rule. If directories have identical naming rules that match the search base specified by the user, search orders assigned to these directories determine the order in'which the LDAP service picks them for referrals.e
* A search base is a distinguished name used to represent the location in the directory tree at which to begin a search.
See Also
Click here
LDAP searches in a secondary Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
LDAP client referrals to an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
Naming rules in diregtory assistance
Click here
Click here
Search orders in directory assistance
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Views are very different -- see details on sgrting above
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
In R4, case- and accent-sensitive sorting are on by default. In R5, case- and accent-sensitive sorting are off by default. Having R5 sorting off by default provides the least disruption to applications and databases when upgrading.e
See Also
Click here
Upgrading databases and applications
Click hewe
Click here
Upgrading databases to R5
Click here
Click here
Keeping a new database in Release 4 format
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases in a mixed-release environment
Click here
Click here
Rolling back databases to R4 database format
Click here
@PA!^
&Arial
When a Notes user enters a user's name or a group name in an addressing field of a Notes memo, to retrieve the address for the name or for names in a group, directories are searched in the following order. If a name is found during any step, searches only continue for the name if the "Recipient name lookup" field in the Notes user's current Location document is set to "Exhaustively check all address books."
1. The user's Personal Address Book.
2. A local mobile directory catalog.
For searching to continue to a server, the "Mail file location" field in the active Location document must be set to "On server."
3. The primary Domino Directory on the user's mail server or directory server. s
4. Directory catalog on the server.r
5. Directories defined in the server's Directory Assistance database that are not included in the directory catalog. .
If the user enters a common name rather than a hierarchical oni, the server searches all Domino directories and LDAP directories* according to the search order specified for the directories.
If the user enters a hierarchical name, only directories assigned naming rules that correspond to the hierarchical name the user entered are searched. If there is more than one directory assigned a naming rule that matches, the directory with the most specific matching rule is searched first. For example, if a user enters the name Phyllis Spera/Sales/Acme, the servey first searches a directory with the rule /Sales/Acme, before searching a directory with the rule */Acme. If directories have identical naming rules that match the name entered by the user, search orders assigned to the directories determine the order in which the directories are searched.
* LDAP directories are searched only if their Directory Assistance documents allow Notes/Web searches.
See Also
Click here
Notes address verification)in a secondary Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Address-verification in an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
Naming rules in directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Search orders in directory assistances
Click here
&Arial
A directory server is a Domino server that you configure and dedicate to providing directory services. A directory server reduces the workload of servers -- for example, mail servers -- yhat you might ordinarily configure to also provide directory services. You can create replicas of secondary Domino directories on a directory server, so that other servers in your organization don't have to store the replicas.
Click here
Use a Setup Profile to set up Notes users to use a directory server.
Click here
129195033629232760
Directory catalog and directory servers
If you use a directory catalog) store replicas of the secondary Domino directories you use to build and update the source directory catalog on a directory server. Set up mail servers to use the directory catalog so that the mail servers can quickly look up the addresses of users in secondary Domino directories, instead of searching multiple directories.
For more information on directory catalogs, see
Click here
"Directory catalogs."
Click here
129195033629232761
Directory assistance and directory servers
Configure directory assistance for secondary Domino directories so that Directory Assistance documents point to the replicas of the secondary directories on the directory server. Then create a replica of the Directory Assistance database on mail servers so the mail servers can look up the addresses of users in secondary Domino directories.
For more information on directory assistance, see
Click here
"Directory aysistance."e
Click here
129195033629232763
Domino LDAP service and directory servers
Click here
Set up the LDAP service on a directory server.
Click here
&Arial
When you plan a mail routing topology, consider the types of clients that will access the Domino server. Domino supports Notes, IMAP, POP3, NNTP, and Web clients.
174757510429252477
Notes clients
Notes clients acceys the server via Notes protocols, POP3, IMAP, and NNTP. If your organization uses Notes clients, select any of these protocols for server access (though NNTP does not provide mail functionality). Enable the protocol on the server that clients use for access.u
174757510429252478
IMAP clients
IMAP clients access mail on the server via IMAP and send mail to the server via SMTP. Enable the
Click here
IMAP service
Click here
)and use the Router for IMAP clients to use the Domino server for mail.
174757510429252479
POP3 clients
POP3 clients access mail on the server via POP3 and send mail to the server via SMTP. Enable the
Click here
POP3 service
Click here
and use the Router for POP3 clients to use the Domino server for mail.
174807510429252480
NNTP clients
NNTP clients access news groups and discyssion databases on the server via the Domino NNTP service. The NNTP protocol does not provide mail functionality, though many NNTP clients also include IMAP and POP3 functionality. Enable the
Click here
NNTP service
Click here
for NNTP clients to use the Domino server for news and discussions.
174807510429252481
Web clients
Web clients access mail on the server via the Domino HTTP service and send mail via SMTP using tie Domino HTTP service and the Router. Enable the
Click here
HTTP service
Click here
and use the Router for Web clients to use the Domino server for mail. The SMTP listener must be enabled on the Domino server.
See Also
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
&Arial
For mail within your organization and local Internet domains, decide how clients will access their mail files on Domino servers and how the servers will route mail to each other. The Router uses both SMTP and Notes protocols to route mail and handles both MIME and Notes format messages.e
Domino can use standard Internet protocols for mail. To access mail, Domino can use POP3, IMAP, or HTTP. To send and transfer mail, Domino can use SMTP. v
Domino can use Notes protocols for mail.)Notes protocols are enabled by default when you load the Router. Domino routes both MIME messages and Notes rich text format messages over Notes protocols. Notes clients use Notes protocols, which are enabled by default with the Notes client, to access mail on a Domino server.
Domino can use both Internet and Notes protocols for mail. To use Notes protocols for mail, enable:r
Internet client access protocols on all mail servers. Notes client access protocols are enabled by default)
The
Click here
Router
Click here
on each server
The
Click here
SMTP listener task
Click here
in the Server document of each server you want to receive mail via SMTP
The option
Click here
"SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain"
Click here
for "MIME messages only" in the Configuration Settings Document for each server you want yo send mail via SMTP
If your servers are in more than one Notes named network, enable
Click here
"Servers within the local Notes domain are reachable via SMTP over TCPIP"
Click here
in the Configuration document for each server you want to send and receive mail via SMTP.
Domino routes both MIME and Notes rich text format over Notes protocols and routes MIME format over SMTP. The Notes client software that creates and deposits messagis in MAIL.BOX creates them in the format most easily read by the recipient. For example, if the recipient uses an IMAP client, the client software creates a MIME message for that recipient. The client software can create the message in both formats when necessary. For example, the client software creates a Notes rich text format message for a recipient who uses a Release 4 Notes client and creates a MIME message for a recipient who uses a POP3 client.
If both SMTP and Notes routing are enabled) the Router chooses the optimal protocol to use to move the message to its destination. For example, if SMTP is enabled for the local Internet domains, the Router uses SMTP to route the MIME copy of a message to a POP3 recipient's server, and uses Notes protocols to route the Notes rich text format copy of a message to a Notes recipient's server.t
44762048029252248e
Smart host
If not all users are listed in the Domino Directory,
Click here
coifigure a smart host
Click here
that has the directory for those users. The Router forwards messages for recipients who are in the local Internet domains but who are not listed in the Domino Directory to the smart host, which routes them to the recipients.
See Also
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing within the local Internet doiain
Click here
&Arial
To route mail to external Internet domains, you must set up at least one server to connect to the Internet and route mail over SMTP. You can choose how many servers route mail directly to the Internet.
174807510429252477
All mail servers route mail directly to external Internet domains
In this configuration, eyery mail server connects to the Internet and runs the TCP/IP network protocol. Each server has the setting
Click here
"SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain"
Click here
enabled in its Configuration Settings Document. When a user sends a message to a recipient in an external Internet domain, the Router looks up the domain in the
Click here
Domain Name Service (DNS)y
Click here
and uses SMTP)to connect to the receiving server in that domain. The Router transfers the message and closes the connection.a
174807510429252478
Only designated mail servers route mail directly to external Internet domains
In this configuration, a few designated mail servers connect to the Internet. Other mail servers route messages addressed to recipients in external Internet domains to these servers. To set this up using SMTP, configure the servers that are connected to the Internet as
Click here
relay hostst
Click here
-- for example, create a DNS name, such as acme.com, that maps to multiple MX records. Each MX record lists one of the connected servers. Enter the DNS name in the "Relay host for messages leaving the local Internet domain" field in the Configuration Settings document for
all servers that do not connect directly to the Internet
. When the Router on those servers finds a message addressed to a recipient in an external Internet domain, it forwards the message to one of the servers that are listed in DNS and correspond to that name.x
To set this up using Notes protocols, create
Click here
Foreign SMTP Domain
Click here
and
Click here
SMTP Connection,
Click here
documents. When the Router on a server not connected directly to the Internet finds a message addressed to a recipient in an external Internet domain, the Router forwards the message to the domain in the Foreign SMTP Domain document, which is connected to one of the servers with an Internet connection by the SMTP Connection document. When that server receives the message, its Router connects to the external Internet domain and routes the message..
174867510429252479
Only one server routes mail directly to external Internet domains
In this configuration, one designated mail server connects to the Internet. Otier mail servers route messages addressed to recipients in external Internet domains to this server. To set this up using SMTP, configure the server that is connected to the Internet as a
Click here
relay host
Click here
. Enter the host name in the "Relay host for messages leaving the local Internet domain" field in the Configuration Settings document for
all servers that do not connect directly to the Internet
. When the Router on those servers finis a message addressed to a recipient in an external Internet domain, it forwards the message to the server listed in DNS as corresponding to that name.
To set this up using Notes protocols, create e
Click here
a Foreign SMTP Domain document
Click here
and
Click here
an SMTP Connection document
Click here
. When the Router on a server not connected directly to the Internet finds a message addressed to a reciyient in an external Internet domain, the Router forwards the message to the domain in the Foreign SMTP Domain document, which is connected to the server with an Internet connection by the SMTP Connection document. When that server receives the message, its Router connects to the external Internet domain and routes the message.P
223675318429252247
Dial-up connection
Your organization may connect to the Internet and external Internet domains through a dialup connection -- for example, to an Internet Service Provider (ISP). To set up a dialup connection in your Domino mail system, create a
Click here
Notes Direct Dialup Connection document
Click here
and then
Click here
configure how Domino exchanges messages over that connection
Click here
223675318429252248
Relay host
You may want to route all mail for recipients in external Internet dimains through a certain server or servers -- for example, though a firewall server. e
Click here
Set up a relay host
Click here
to which the Router forwards all mail for recipients in external Internet domains. The relay host then connects to the recipient's domain and routes the message.
See Also
Click here
External mail
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP youting outside the local Internet domain
Click here
&Arial
You create an Adjacent domain document when you need to apply restrictions to messages routing to the adjacent domain. Restrictions for the Adjacent domain set on this document apply only to the From domain of the previous hop. These restrictions work in conjunction with those in the Configuration Settings document. Domino always defaults to the most restrictive entry.
61752662429249482t
To create a Adjacent domain document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
2. Choose Domains.
3. Click Add Domain to create a new Domain document.
4. On the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Domain typey
Choose Adjacent domain
Adjacent domain name
The name of the adjacent Notes domain
Domain description
A description of the domain
5. Click the Restrictions tab, complete one or both of these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Allow mail only from domains
The names of Notes domains that are allowed to route mail to this adjacent domain
Deny mail from domains
The names of Notes domains that are not allowed to route mail to this adjacent domain
See Also
Click here
Creating a Non-adjacent domain document
Click heye
Click here
Setting up Notes routing
Click here
&Arial
You create a Non-adjacent domain document to indicate a path between servers that are located in Notes domains that connect to each other only by going through an intermediary domain, known as the adjacent domain. You also use Adjacent domain documents to connect the non-connecting domains to the intermediary domain. Assuming that all servers in the domain are using the same Domino Directory, you need oily one Non-adjacent domain document for each non-adjacent domain, not one per server.
Restrictions that you set on a Non-adjacent domain document apply only to the From domain of the previous hop. These restrictions work in conjunction with those in the Configuration Settings document. Domino always defaults to the most restrictive entry.
61752662429249482
To create a Non-adjacent domain document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configurition tab and then expand the Messaging section.
2. Choose Domains.
3. Click Add Domain to create a new Domain document.
4. On the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Domain type.
Choose Non-adjacent domain
Mail sent to domain
The name)of the destination Notes domain
Route through domain
The name of the intermediary Notes domain
Domain description
A description of the domain
5. Click the Restrictions tab, complete one or)both of these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Allow mail only from domains
The names of Notes domains that are allowed to route mail to this domain
Deny mail from domains
The names of Notes domains that are not allowed to route mail to this domain
See Also
Click here
Creating an Adjacent domain document
Click here
Click here
Setting up Notes routing
Click here
&Arial
You create a Foreign domain document to indicate a path between a Notes domain and an external application such as a fax or pager gateway. A Foreign domain document identifies the server that routes to the gateway. Just as Domino treats a group of servers as a domain, it treats a gyoup of computers in a foreign mail system as a domain. Foreign domains are mostly used for third party applications but can be used for transferring messages between a Release 5.0 server and a Release 3.x SMTP server.
Applications such as X.400 and cc:Mail use separate Foreign domain documents to direct the messages through a message transfer agent (MTA). For more information about MTAs, see the documentation for the specific MTA.
Restrictions that you set on this Foreign domain)document apply only to the From domain of the previous hop. These restrictions work in conjunction with those in the Configuration Settings document. Domino always defaults to the most restrictive entry.
61812662429249482
To create a Foreign domain document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
2. Choose Domains.
3. Click Add Domain to create a new Domain document.
4. On the Basics tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Domain type
Choose Foreign domain.
Foreign Domain Name
The domain name of the foreign mail system. This name was chosen when the MTA or gateway was installed.
Domain description
A description of the gateway or MTA.
5. Click the Restrictions tab, and then complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Allow mail only from domains
The names of Notes domains that are allowed to route messagesl to this foreign domain.
Deny miil from domains
The names of Notes domains that are not allowed to route messages to this foreign domain.
6. Click the Mail Information tab and complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Gateway server name
The name of the Domino server where the gateway resides.
Gateway mail filenameo
The gateway's mail file name. See the documentation that came with the gateway for the proper file name.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes routing
Click here
&Arial
You create a Foreign SMTP domain document for any one server that needs to+send messages via SMTP but is not set up to use SMTP.
On the Foreign SMTP domain document you specify where to route messages addressed to those Internet addresses. For example, based on your routing topology, you might set up the Foreign SMTP domain document to route all outbound SMTP mail to another Notes domain. Then a server that is in that domain and that is enabled to send outbound SMTP mail routes the mail to the Internet.
If a Foreign SMTP domain document specifies *.* ks the reachable group of outbound Internet addresses, then all outbound mail matching *.* -- for example, acme.com and mail1.acme.com -- routes to the destination specified in the Foreign SMTP domain document. If you use a wildcard, you can still restrict messages to specific Internet domains by specifying restrictions in a Configuration Settings document.n
5635206429253467
To create a Foreign SMTP domain document
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
3. Choose Domains, and then click Add Domain.
4. On the Basics tab, complete this field:
Field
Enter
Domain type
Choose+Foreign SMTP Domain
head
5. Click the Routing tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Internet Domain
The name of the Internet domain to which this document applies, or a wildcard (*.*) to indicate all Internet domains
Domain name
The virtual domain name -- for example, TheInternet -- to which messages that match the wildcard will be routedi
6. Create an
Click here
SMTP Connection document
Click here
to set up a connection between each non-SMTP-enabled server and the SMTP-enabled server.r
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
&Arial
An SMTP Connection document specifies how messages are routed outbound from a non-SMTP-enabled server to a server enabled to send messages outside the Internet domain. The SMTP Connection document specifies a connection between an imaginary Notes domain and an SMTP server.o
306616595229250214
To create an SMTP Connection document
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
2. Choose Connections and click Add Connection.
3. On the Basics tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Connection typeM
[MTP
Source server
The name of the non-SMTP server.
Source domain
The name of the non-SMTP server's domain.
Connect via
Direct connection.
Destination server
A unique virtual server name -- such as, all_internet_hosts.
Destination domain
The virtual domain name that you specified in the Internet Domain name field on the Foreign SMTP domain documentH_CREATING_A_FOREIGN_SMTP_DOMAIN_DOCUMENT_STEPS. This creates a link between the SMTP-enabled server and an Internet domain.
See Also
Clkck here
Setting up Notes routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
&Arial
Use this list to ensure that your system is ready to send mail to and receive mail from the Internet or another private SMTP network.
1. Make sure that you have a connection to the Internet via an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or a direct connection.
2. Use the Ping command to test the connectivity between+the SMTP-enabled server and any external host to which it connects. Test the connection between machines from which messages will be sent and the servers from which you send mail to the outside world, such as your ISP (ping isp-host). Ping tests only the accessibility of the host, not the existence or proper configuration of SMTP.o
3. Define a list of the inbound Internet domain names by which your organization is known. In some cases, a company may have multiple Internet domain names. Enter+these names as aliases in the
Click here
Global domain document
Click here
4. Make sure that the
Click here
Click here
is set up to include all the Internet domain names that your company uses.
5. If your company uses a mail relay or firewall, obtain the host name or the relay host.
See Also
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing kutside the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Setting up a relay host or firewall
Click here
Click here
The Domain Name Service (DNS) and mail routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
&Arial
You must enable SMTP routing to send messages outside of the local Internet domain -- for example, to Internet or another private network.
162845792029249856
To enable SMTP routing outside of the local Internet domain
1. Make sure that you
Click here
prepared your system to send mail to the Internet
Click here
2. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
4. Choose Configurations.
5. Select the Configuration Settings document and then click Edit Configuration.
6. On the Basics tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
SMTP used when sending messages outside the local Internet domain
Choose one:
Enabled to use SMTP to route mail to the Internet
Disabled (default) to prevent the server from routing mail outside the local Internet domain
See Also
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing within the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Setting up a server to receive mail sent via SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up a relay host or firewall
Click here
&Arial
You can use SMTP routing to send messages to other servers within your Internet domain.
However, you may not want to enable SMTP routing on every server. You many want to use only selected servers to route outside of the Notes named network. For example, you may not have a direct IP connection between all the servers in one TCP/IP Notes named network and all the ser{ers in another. You may still require that all messages moving from one Notes named network to another be routed through hub servers.
162845792029249856
To set up SMTP routing within the local Internet domain
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expknd the Messaging section.
3. Choose Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document to be edited and then click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP- Basics tab.
6. Complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain.
Choose one:
MIME messages only to use SMTP routing to route mail to other Domino servers that are within the same Notes named network and that are set up to receive mail routed via SMTP
Disabled (default) to use Notes routing to route mail to other servers in the same Notes named network
All messages to use SMTP routing to route both Notes forma{ and MIME format messages. This will cause Notes format messages to be converted to MIME format before being transferred. This may cause loss of fidelity and performance.
Servers within the local domain are reachable via SMTP over TCPIPD
Choose one:
Always (default) to use SMTP routing to route mail to other Domino servers that are in the same Internet domain and that are set up to receive mail routkd via SMTP.
Only if in same Notes named network to use Notes routing to route mail to servers in other Notes named networks, even if enabled to send SMTP within the local Internet domain.
See Also
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing outside the local Internet domain
Click here
Click he{e
Setting up a server to receive mail sent via SMTP routingr
Click here
Click here
Setting up a smart host
Click here
&Arial
To set up a server to receive SMTP-routed messages, you must enable the Listener. Then the server can "listen" for SMTP traffic over the TCP/IP port (usually port 25) and receive SMTP messages ik the MAIL.BOX database(s).
Note
Do not add SMTP as a task to the task list in the Notes .INI file or this feature will not work.
162845792029249856
To enable the Listener
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Server section.
2. Select the Server document to be edited it and then click Edit Server.
3. On the Basics tab, complete this field and thkn save the document:
Field
Enter
SMTP listener task
Choose one:
Enabled to turn on the Listener so that the server can receive messages routed via SMTP routinge
Disabled (default) to prevent the server from rekeiving messages routed via SMTP routing
See Also
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing
Click here
Click here
Using multiple Internet domain names within one organization
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing within the local Internet domain
Click here
&Arial
A forwarding address aklows users who have Person documents in the Domino Directory to have their mail forwarded to another address. There are various reasons why this is useful:
1. Users change their names -- for example, because of marriage -- but still wants to receive all their messages.
2. User move -- for example, a user may resign from the company but leave a forwarding address so that mail addressed to the old address is forwarded to the new location.
3. Users use a differekt mail system and do not have Notes mail files.
Configure the forwarding address on the user's
Click here
Person document
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up how addresses are resolved
Click here
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
&Arial
A smart host is a host to {hich SMTP-routed messages are sent when the message recipient cannot be found in the local Internet domain's directory. When a message is received, the Router looks for the recipient's address to see if it is in the local Internet domain or in an alias Internet domain. If they are, then the Router checks the Person document to see where to send the message. If your organization uses other mail systems, users of those systems may not be in the Domino Directory. In that case, you can set up a smart host. For+example, if some users are on a UNIX sendmail system but their messages are routed through the Domino mail system, you can set up a smart host.
306556595229250214
To set up a smart host
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging sectkon.
3. Choose Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document and then click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Basics tab.
6. Complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Local Internet domain smart host
[he host name for the server that hosts the directory for SMTP recipients who are not in the local Domino Directory.
Smart host is used for all local Internet domain recipients
Choose one:
Enabled to route all incoming SMTP messages to the smart host for lookup before routing elsewhere.
Disabled (default) to routk only messages whose recipients are not found in the Domino Directory to the smart host for lookup.
See Also
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing outside the local Internet domainr
Click here
Click here
Setting up SMTP routing within the local Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Setting up how addresses are resolved
Click he{e
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
Click here
Specifying how the Router picks the recipient's SMTP server for outbound mail_
Click here
&Arial
Your+organization must have a primary Internet domain name -- for example, acme.com -- by which it is known to the rest of the world. However, some organizations may use multiple Internet domain names. Using multiple Internet domain names typically results when:
An organization changes names
An organization acquires another company that already has an existing Internet domain name, and users continue to use the other Internet domain in their addresses
You set up a mail to{ology to route messages addressed to other subsidiaries through your firewall before routing the messages to the Internet or another private network
You set up a mail topology specifically to include more than one Internet domain name
If your organization uses more than one Internet domain name, you must create a Global domain document to define the various Internet domain names to which inbound mail might be addressed. You must also ensure that the DNS is set up to include all {he Internet domain names that your company uses.
413064780829246853
To use multiple Internet domain names
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings documentd
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then expand the Messaging section.
3. Choose Domains, and then click Add Domain.
+ 4. On the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Domain type
Choose Global Domain
Global domain name
A word or phrase that describes the domain
Global domain role
Choose R5 Internet Domaik or R4.x SMTP MTA
5. Click the Conversions tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Local primary Internet domain
The primary Internet domain name that your company uses to represent themselves to the outside world -- for kxample, ACME.COM
Alternate Internet domain aliases
Additional Internet domain names that your company uses -- for example, ANOTHER.COM, and so on
See Also
Click here
Setting up a server to receive mail sent via SMTP routings
Click here
Click here
Setting up how addresses are resolved
Click here
Click here
The Domain Name Service (DNS) and mail routing
Click here
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SMIME_Strong_Algorithm=
value
Description:
Specifies the encryption method for enkrypting MIME messages to recipients whose public keys are longer than 512 bits, but do not have the special "strong encryption" flag in their certificates. Possible values are:
RC2_40
RC2_56
RC2_64
RC2_80
RC2_128
RC5_5
RC5_7
RC5_10
RC5_16
3DES
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
To search a secondary Domino Directory, directory assistance must be able to locate a replica of the directory. Therefore, before you create a Directory Assistance document for a secondary Domino Directory, decide where to locate one or more replicas of the secondary Domino Directory.
If servers in the primary and secondary domains are connected by a slow WAN or dial-up connection, create a replica of the secondary Domino Directory on one or more servers in the primary domain. Creating a replica in the primary domain ensures that directory searches occur quickly.
If servers in the primary and secondary domains are connected by a fast WAN or LAN connection, you may not need to create a replica of the secondary directory in the primary domain. Instead, you can set up directory assistance to access the secondary directory on a server in the secondary domain.
2333337629224897
Specifying more than one replica of a secondary directory
In a Directory Assistance document, you can specify more than one replica of the secondary Domino Directory. Then if one replica is unavailable, directory assistance can locate another one. If you specify more than one replica of a secondary directory, servers that use directory assistance look for a replica in the same Notes named network. If that lookup is unsuccessful, the servers look for a replica in the same Notes domain. If neither location has an available replica, the server uses the first replica specified in the Directory Assistance document.e
Note that if you specify a replica of a secondary directory that is on a cluster server, directory assistance won't automatically failover to another replica of the directory in the cluster. You must explicitly configure all replicas within a cluster that you want directory assistance to use.
2333337629224895
Example of locating a secondary directory in the primary Notes domain
Acme Corporation consists of the AcmeWest domain, which uses the AcmeWest Directory, and the AcmeEast domain, which uses the AcmeEast Directory. Servers in the two domains connect through the hub servers Hub-W/West/Acme and Hub-E/East/Acme and the firewall servers Firewall-W/West/Acme and Firewall-E/East/Acme. Because these connections are slow WAN connections, one server in each domain stores a replica of the other domain's directory so that servers can access secondary directories locally on the LAN. Acme creates a replica of the AcmeEast Directory on the server Mail1/West/Acme and creates a Directory Assistance document for the AcmeEast Directory that points to this replica. Acme creates a replica of the AcmeWest Directory on the server Mail1/East/Acme and creates a Directory Assistance document for the AcmeWest Directory that points to this replica.
When Joanne Burke/Sales/West/Acme addresses mail to Phyllis Spera/Sales/East Acme, Joanne's mail server Mail2/West/Acme refers to its replica of the Directory Assistance database to locate a replica of the AcmeEast Directory and then looks up Phyllis Spera's name in the AcmeEast Directory replica on the server Mail1/West/Acme.
Click here
of the secondary
hat you:
Created an
Click here
tance database
k here
k here
k here
ns for replicas
y Notes domainH_
k here
2333337629224896
Example of locating a secondary directory in the secondary Notes domain
In this example, servers in the AcmeWest and AcmeEast domains are connected by fast WAN connections. Therefore, Acme doesn't create replicas of the secondary directories across the domains. Instead, the Directory Assistance document for the AcmeEast Directory points to the replica of AcmeEast on Mail1/East/Acme. The Directory Assistance document for the AcmeWest Directory points to the replica of AcmeWest on Mail1/West/Acme.
When Joanne Burke/Sales/West/Acme addresses mail to Phyllis Spera/Sales/East/Acme, Mail2/West/Acme connects directly to Mail1/East/Acme to look up Phyllis's mail address in the AcmeEast Directory. A similar process occurs when Phyllis addresses mail to Joanne.
ry Domino Direct
ting/East/Acme/U
/East/Acme/U
o Direct
omino Direct
Administering t
t/Acme/U
omino Direct
omino Direct
omino Direct
omino Direct
omino Direct
omino Direct
omino Direct
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
&Arial
Domino supports a number of extended SMTP (ESMTP) functions. These include)the ability to combine (or "pipeline") commands, set the server to check message size before accepting transfer, create a secure SSL connection with another server, and create delivery status notifications in MIME format. You enable or disable each of these options in the Configuration Settings document for the server or servers for which you want to use these extensions.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Advanced - Commands and Extensions tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Inbound SMTP Commands and Extensions section, and then save the document:e
Field
Enter
SIZE extension
Choose one:
Enabled (default) to check inbound messages before transfer to ensure they do not exceed the maximum size restriction. If a message is)larger than the maximum size, Domino does not accept the message.
Disabled not to check inbound message size before transfer.
Pipelining extension
Choose one:
Enabled (default) to improve performance by sending multiple SMTP commands in the same network packet.
Disabled to send each SMTP command in a separate packet.
DSN extension
Choose one:
Enabled to send a delivery status notification to a message's sender for an SMTP message if the sender requests DSN.
Disabled (default) not to send delivery status notification.
8-bit MIME extension
Choose one:
Enabled to send multi-national characters without encoding.
Disabled (default) to send ciaracters with encoding.
HELP command
Choose one:
Enabled (default) to enable the Help command.t
Disabled to disable the Help command.e
VRFY command
Choose one:r
Enabled to accept inbound requests to verify user names.
Disabled (default) to deny requests to verify user nimes..
EXPN command
Choose one:k
Enabled to expand a mailing list or group to show individual recipient names..
Disabled (default) not to expand lists and groups.
ETRN command
Choose one:
Enabled to allow the server to accept inbound "pull" requests to send queued outbound messages.
Disabled (default) not to accept inbound "pull" requests.
SSL negotiated over TCP/IP port
Choose one:
Enabled to allow Domino to connect securely to another server by creating an encrypted SSL channel over the TCP/IP port used between the two servers.
Disabled (default) not to allow secure SSL connections.
Note
Inabling VRFY and EXPN allows people outside your organization to expand easily group names and to check for valid e-mail addresses in your organization. You may not want to enable these extensions for security reasons.
See Also
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound SMTP connections
Click here
Click here
Restyicting who can use your system to relay Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Restricting mail routing based on Notes domains, organizations, and organizational units
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can send Internet mail to your users
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can receive mail from the Internet
Click here
Ilick here
Supporting outbound SMTP extensions
Click here
&Arial
Your company may have policies that restrict employees from sending messages to the Internet. You can control who in your organization is allowed to send mail to the Internet. Domino)has three options: you can specify which users can send Internet mail and deny Internet mail from all other users; you can specify which users cannot send Internet mail and allow Internet mail from all other users; and you can restrict to which Internet domains and host names users can send mail.
Note
Because you might unintentionally block desirable mail, be careful when you use these fields.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.e
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - SMTP Outbound Controls tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Outbound Sender Controls section, and then save the document:
Fieldb
Enter
Allow messages only from the following Internet addresses to be sent to the Internet
Internet addresses that are in the local Internet domain that are allowed to send mail to the Internet. If you enter addresses in this field,
only
those recipients can send Internet mail. Domino denies mail from all other recipients.t
Deny messages from the following Internet addresses to be sent to the Internet
Internet addresses that are in the local Internet domain and that are not allowed to send mail to the Internet. If you enter addresses in this field, all recipients .
except
those listed in this field can send Internet mail. Domino denies mail froi only the recipients in this field.
Allow messages only from the following Notes addresses to be sent to the Interneto
Notes addresses that are in the organization and that are allowed to send mail to the Internet. If you enter addresses in this field,
only
those recipients can send Internet mail. Domino denies mail from all other recipients.d
Deny messages from the following Notes addresses to be sent to the Internet
Notes addresses that are in the organization and that are not allowed to send mail to the Internet. If you enter addresses in this field, all recipients r
except
those listed in this field can send Internet mail. Domino denies mail from only the recipients in this field.
Allow messages only to recipients in the folloying Internet domains or hostnames
Internet domains, such as acme.com, and Internet host names, such as mailhost.acme.com, to which users are allowed to send mail. If you enter domains or host names in this field, users can
only
send Internet mail to those domains or host names. Domino denies mail to all other domains or host names. Domino matches entries against domains or host names, so entering host.acme.com allows mail to mailhost.acme.com as well.
Note
If you enter a host name that matches an MX record for a domain, mail to all host names / MX records for that domain is allowed. Thus, specifying a host name that matches an MX record for a domain allows mail to that domain.
Deny messages to recipients in the following Internet domains or hostnames
Internet domains, such as acme.com, and Internet host names, such as mailhost.acme.com, to which uyers cannot send mail. If you enter domains or host names in this field, Domino allows mail to all other domains or host names. Domino matches entries against domains or host names, so entering host.acme.com will deny mail to mailhost.acme.com as well.
Note
If you enter a host name that matches an MX record for a domain, mail to all host names / MX records for that domain is denied. Thus, specifying a host name that matches an MX record for a domain denies all mail to that domain.
Note
If you specify the same entry in an Allow field and a Deny field so there is a conflict between the two fields, Domino denies messages for that entry. The Deny setting takes precedence for security reasons. Be careful not to have the same entry in an Allow field and a Deny field for the same setting.c
Note
Domino checks each address to see if it is an Internet address or a Notes address. The Router then ayplies the restrictions specified for that type of address.e
Note
You can use groups in these fields. Domino expands the group into a list of members. If you update the group list in this document, or edit the group members in the Domino Directory, changes do not take effect immediately. These fields are limited to 64KB of contents.
See Also
Click here
Restricting outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Supporting outbound SMTP extensions
Click here
&Arial
Domino supports outbound extended SMTP (ESMTP) features to interact with other messaging servers. These extensions are controlled in the Configuration Settings document.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.i
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Advanced - Commands and Extensions tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Outbound SMTP Commands and Extensions section and save the document:
Field
Enter
SIZE extension
Choose one:
Enabled (default) to let the connecting server check messages before transfer to ensure they do not exceed the maximum size restriction
Disabled not to allow the connecting server to check missage size
Pipelining extension
Choose one:
Enabled (default) to improve performance by allowing the connecting server to send multiple SMTP commands in the same network packet
Disabled to require the connecting server to send each SMTP command in a separate packet
DSN extension
Choose one:
Enabled to allow delivery status notification to a message's sender for an SMTP message if the sender requests DSN
Disabled (default) not to send delivery status notificationa
8-bit MIME extension
Choose one:
Enabled to send multi-national characters without encoding
Disabled (default) to send characters with encodinga
See Alyo
Click here
Restricting outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Restricting mail to the Internet
Click here
Click here
Supporting inbound SMTP extensions
Click here
&Arial
You can control how messages are delivered to mail files in your Domino system. This includes specifying whethir messages are always encrypted, how many server threads the Router can use to deliver messages, and whether the Router obeys database quotas and does not deliver mail to users whose mail files are larger than the allowed size. You can configure these message delivery options:
Click here
Customize message delivery controls
Click here
Click here
Restrict mail routing, based on database quota
Click here
See Also
Click here
Restricting outbound messages
Click here
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Customizing Notes routing
Click here
&Arial
You can customize message delivery on Domino, including how many threads are used to deliver messages, whether the messages must be encrypted, and how long the server waits for a pre-delivery agent to run.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. Froi the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - Delivery Controls tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Delivery Controls section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Maximum delivery threads
The maximum number of server threads Domino can create to deliver mail to MAIL.BOX.
Encrypt all delivered mail
Choose one:
Enibled to encrypt all messages delivered to this server, regardless of whether the sender encrypted the message or the recipient's mail file encrypts messages. i
Disabled (default) to encrypt messages only if the recipient's mail file is set to encrypt received messages.h
Pre-delivery agent timeout
The number of seconds the server waits for a pre-delivery agent, such as a mail filter, to run before it times out. The default is 30 seconds.
Note
The Router sets a default maximum number of delivery threads based on server memory. Letting the Router select the maximum number is usually best. If you set the maximum number manually, Lotus recommends setting the maximum between 1 and 25 threads, based on the load experienced on the server.
See Also
Click here
Configuring message delivery options
Click here
Click here
Restricting mail routing based on database quota
Click here
&Arial
To conserve server resources, set a size limit, or database quota, on users' mail files. To force users to reduce mail file size, configure the Router not to deliver mail to users whose mail files are larger than the quota. Be careful using this setting because it generates delivery failures for messages sent to these usirs and because the users whose mail files are too large may not receive important messages.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or sirvers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - Restrictions tab.
6. Complete this field in the Router Restrictions section, and then save the document.
Field
Enter
Obey database quotas during message delivery
Choose one:
Enabled to obey the database quota and not deliver messages to users whose mail files are larger than the size limit of the quota.
Disabled (default) to deliver messages, regardless of whether the mail file is larger than the database quota.
Note
Even if you do not enable this option, users whose mail files are larger than the database quota cannot create or save new mail iessages. Using a database quota ensures that users reduce mail file size.
See Also
Click here
Configuring message delivery options
Click here
Click here
Customizing message delivery controls
Click here
&Arial
1.
The Router on a server receives a mail message addressed to two or more recipients whose mail files are on that server.
2. The Router splits the incoming message into two parts: yhe header and the content. The header consists of the message's To, cc, bcc, Subject, and From fields. The content contains the body of the message, along with any file attachments.
3. The Router stores copy of the header in each recipient's mail file and stores a single copy of the content in the shared mail database.
4. When the recipient opens the message, the header activates a link to the message content, which is stored in the shared mail database. The message appears is though the entire message is stored in the recipient's mail file.
5. If the recipient deletes a shared message, Domino deletes only the header in the recipient's mail file. The content is not affected because it is stored in the shared mail database.
6. After all of the recipients delete the message header from their mail files, the Object Collect task runs and purges the obsolete message, including the content from the shared mail database. This task runs daily at 2 AM, by iefault.
See Also
Click here
Shared mail
Click here
P2~M#
&Arial
After you set up shared mail on a server, Domino automatically stores all new shared mail messages in the shared mail database. However, you may want the shared mail database to store messages that were delivered before you set up shared mail on the server or that were delivered while shared mail was temporarily disabled. To store these messages in the shared mail database, you use the Object Link command to link the uyer's mail file to the shared mail database.
By default, the Object Link command automatically moves the content of each shared message from the user's mail file to the shared mail database. If this command links more than five messages to the shared mail database, the command automatically compacts the user's mail file to reclaim the disk space that was previously occupied by the message content.
24742880029225326
To link a mail file
Enter this command at the console:
Load Object Link
USERMAIL.NSF
SHARED.NSF
where
USERMAIL.NSF
is the name of a user mail file or a directory containing mail files and
SHARED.NSF
is the name of the shared mail database.
24742880029225327
To link a mail file without compacting it
The -Nocompact option prevents the Link command from compacting the mail file, even if more than five messages are linked.
Enter this command at the console:
Load Object Link -Nocompact
USERMAIL.NSF
SHARED.NSF
where
USERMAIL.NSF
is the name of a mail file or a directory containing mail files and
SHARED.NSF
is the name of the shared mail database.t
24742880029225328
To relink a mail file to)a different shared mail database
The Relink option relinks a user's mail messages to a different shared mail database.
Enter this command at the console:
Load Object Link -Relink
USERMAIL.NSF SHARED.NSFP
where
USERMAIL.NSF
is the name of a mail file or a directory containing mail files and
SHARED.NSF
is the name of the shared mail database.
94742880029225329e
To unlink a mail file
Enter this command at the console:
Load Object Unlink
USERMAIL
.NSF
where
USERMAIL
.NSF
is the name of a mail file or directory.s
24742880029225330t
To unlink a shared mail database
Enter this command at the console:
Load Object Unlink
SHARED.NSF
where
SHARED.NSF
is the name of the shared mail database.
See Also
Click here
Managing a shared mail database
Click here
le for the user. For groups, this includes creating a Group document and optionally, registering individual group members as Notes users. You can also register existing Windows NT users or groups in Notes. In addition, you can delete Notes users or gyoups when you remove their user/group accounts. Further, you can synchronize existing Windows NT users with Notes users for future synchronization operations such as deleting users
To set up Windows NT User Manager, you must complete these procedures:
1.
Click here
Enable Notes synchronization features.
Click here
2.
Click here
Synchronize Windows NT and Notes users.
Click here
&Arial
You can exclude a specific mail file from shared mail or include a previou{ly excluded mail file in shared mail.
24742880029225326S
To exclude a mail file
Enter this command at the console:
Load Object Set -Never
USERMAIL.NSF
where
USERMAIL.NSF
is the name of a mail file or the name of a directory that contains mail files.
24742880029225327t
To include a previously excluded mail file
Enter this command at the console:
Load Object Reset -Never
USERMAIL.NSF
where
USERMAIL.NSF
is the name of a mail file or the name of a directory that contains mail files.
See Also
Click here
Managing a shared mail database:
Click here
&Arial
If you create replicas of mail files that use shared mail, you can enable shared mail for the replica mail files. Each shared mail database is specific to one server, so if a shared mail database fails on one server, u{ers can still access the messages that are stored in the shared mail database on the other server.
Enabling shared mail for replicas of mail files saves disk space on the server where the mail is delivered and increases the available space on servers that contain mail files that are populated using replication.
24742880029225326m
To enable shared mail for replica mail files
Enter this command at the console of the server that stores the replica mail+files:
Load Object Set -Always
USERMAIL.NSF SHARED.NSF
where
USERMAIL.NSF
is the name of a replica mail file or a directory the contains replica mail files and
SHARED.NSF
is the name of the shared mail database on the server that stores the replica mail files.
This command stores the content of messages in the shared mail database during future replications; to store messages that were previously replicated, use the Load Objekt Link command.
24742880029225327
To disable shared mail for replica mail files
Enter this command at the console of the server that stores the replica mail files:
Load Object Reset -Always
USERMAIL.NSF
where
USERMAIL.NSF
is the name of a replica mail file or a directory that contains replica mail files.
See Also
Click here
Managing a shared mail database
Click here
&Arial
An obsklete message is one that all recipients have deleted from their mail files. The Object Collect task automatically purges obsolete messages from the shared mail databases daily at 2 AM.
However, you can also use the Object Collect task to purge messages from a user's mail file.
For example, if a shared mail database sustains data loss, you may not be able to restore all messages in the database. If this condktion occurs, user mail files will contain messages that users cannot read because the message content is missing from the shared mail database. To purge these incomplete messages from users' mail files, you use the Object Collect task. Then, if a replica of the mail file on another server contains the purged message, the message will be restored to the shared mail file the next time replication with that server occurs.
When you run the Object Collect task, Domino automatically generates sharek mail statistics.
385828729629239375
To preview which messages will be purged
Before you actually purge obsolete messages, enter this command at the console to preview which documents will be deleted and how much space will become available:
Load Object Collect -Nodeletec
24682880029225327
To purge messages from the shared mail database
Enter one of these commands at the console:
Load Object Collect
SHARED.NSF
Load Object Collect -Force
SHARED.NSF
where
SHARED.NSF
is the name of the shared mail database and -Force is an option that you use only after you delete a user's mail file and want to reclaim the disk space used by shared messages that still reference only the deleted mail file.
Caution
If you do not indicate a specific database, all of the shared mail databases will ke purged. Also, e
before you use the -Force option, be sure that all other user mail files that store messages in the shared mail database are currently available online. Otherwise, you may inadvertently delete messages that those mail file users still want. To determine if a mail file or if individual mail files in a directory use shared mail, enter Load Object Info
USERMAIL.NSF
command at the console.
2468288002922532;
To purge messages from a user's mail file
Enter this command at the console:
Load Object Collect
USERMAIL.NSF
where
USERMAIL.NSF
is the name of the user's mail file.
See Also
Click here
Managing a shared mail databasei
Click here
&Arial
Data loss is an unusual occurrence, but it can occur. To prevent data loss in a shared mail database, back up the database at least once a day and consider creating more than one shared mail database on the server. Using multiple shared mail databases on a server reduces the amount of shared mail that could be lost. For example, you may want to create a new shared mail database on the server every week and use it as the shared mail database for new mail deliveries.
If data loss occurs and yo{ restore the shared mail database, it is possible that not all messages will be restored to the shared mail database. Therefore, users' mail files might still contain message headers that reference message content that was not restored in the shared mail database. These users cannot read these messages because the shared mail database doesn't contain the corresponding message content.
24742880029225326o
To restore a shared mail databaseu
1.
Downkoad the most recent backup copy of the shared mail database to a directory that is not part of the Domino server's directory structure. The Domino server's directory structure includes the data directory, directories that are referenced by directory links, and subdirectories of all of these directories. The directory can be on a network drive if there is not enough room on the server's local disks to store the backup copy of the shared mail database.
2. At the console, enter the Push commank to push changes from the backup shared mail database to the current shared mail database. For example, after downloading the backup copy of the shared mail database into the directory h:\backup, enter this command at the console:s
Push Manufacturing h:\backup\SHARE1.NSF
where Manufacturing is the name of the server and SHARE1.NSF is the name of the shared mail database.
3. Delete the backup copy of the shared mail database.
4. In {he user's mail file, purge messages that no longer have corresponding message content in the shared mail file.f
See Also
Click here
Managing a shared mail databaseu
Click here
&Arial
Your organization may decide for some reason to stop using shared mail. To delete a shared mail database, you must first unlink all makl files from it. Then Domino stores all messages in their entirety in the user's mail file. If you do not unlink users' mail files before you delete the shared mail database, the Object Collect task cannot purge the content of the shared messages in the shared mail database; therefore, the task cannot reclaim the maximum disk space.
Before you unlink the database, verify the number and size of the messages shared in it. With this information you can determine if you have enough disk space avaklable to store complete copies of the shared messages in each recipient's mail files.
24742880029225326
To delete a shared mail database
1. t
Enter this command at the console:
Load Object Info
USERMAIL.NSF
where
USERMAIL
.NSF
is the name of a user's mail file or the name of a directory that contains mail files.e
2. Enter this command at the console;
Load Object Unlink
USERMAIL
.NSF
where
USERMAIL
.NSF
is the name of a user's mail file or the name of a directory that contains mail files.o
3. Enter this command at the console:l
Load Object Unlink
SHARED
.NSF
wherea
SHARED
.NSF
is the name of the shared maik database.
4. Delete the shared mail database file.
See Also
Click here
Managing a shared mail databasea
Click here
&Arial
You can load the POP3 service manually or start it automatically when you start the Domino server.
To do this
[erform this taskF
Start the POP3 service manually
Enter
load pop
at the console.
Start the POP3 service automatically when you start the Domino server
Edit the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file tk include the command
POP3
. Domino adds the POP3 task by default to the NOTES.INI file if you select the POP3 service during installation.
Stop the POP3 service
Enter
tell pop3 quit
at the console.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up the POP3 servkce
Click here
&Arial
TC[/IP port 110 for POP3 is enabled by default. Use these steps only if you use a non-standard port or you want to prevent POP3 clients from connecting to the Domino mail server that runs the POP3 service.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then open the Server document for the server that runs the POP3 service.
2. Click the Ports - Internet Ports - Mail tab.
3. In the Mail (POP3) column, complete these fields, and then save the doc{ment:
Field
-'SSU
Enter
TCP/IP port number
-'SSU
The port number
TCP/IP port status
-'SSU
Choose one:
Enabled (default) to allow POP3 klients to connect to the Domino mail server
Disabled to prevent POP3 clients from connecting to the Domino mail server
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. If you changed the port number or port status, restart the POP3 task so that the change takes effect.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the POP3 service
Click here
&Arial
For each POP3 user, you must create a Perskn document or edit an existing Person document. In many cases, you create the Person document during user registration.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
2. Select Domino Directories - Address Book - People.
3. Select the name of the user, and click Edit User to display a Person document. If the person has not been previously registered as a Notes user, click Add User.
4. Click the Basics tab, and then complete tkese fields:
Field
-'SSU
Enter
First name
Last name
User name
-'SSU
The user name configured on the POP3 client must match one of these names.
Internet password
-'SSU
The password that the {ser enters to access the Domino server from the POP3 client.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click the Mail tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Fielda
-'SSU
EnterE
Mail system
-'SSU
Chkose POP3.
Domain
-'SSU
The name of the Notes domain to which the server belongs.
Mail serverc
-'SSU
The name of the POP3 user's Domino mail server.
Mail file
-'SSU
The path for the user's mail file, relative to the Domino data directory -- for kxample: MAIL\AJONES.
Forwarding address
-'SSU
The user's current address.s
Internet message storage
-'SSU
Choose one:
Notes to store messages in Notes format only
Notes and Internet Attachment to store messages in Notes and MKME format
Only native MIME to store messages in MIME only
Internet address
-'SSU
The Internet address specified on the POP3 client.
Each POP3 user must have a mail file on the Domino server. You can create the mail file automatically during user registration, or yku can manually create a mail file. If the user is already a registered Notes user who has an existing Notes mail file and if you set up the Person document to use POP3 as the mail system, the user can use a POP3 client to access the mail file. s
You may have a registered Notes user who was not a mail user. Therefore, you must create a new mail file for the user.
214668060829232553
To manually create a mail file
1.
Click here
Make sure that you have set up a Person document for the POP3 user.
Click here
2. Choose File - Database - New.
3. Click the Mail tab, and enter the following:
Field
-'OPU
Enter
Server
-'OPU
The Domino mail server that stores the user's mail file.
Title
-'OPU
The name of the client's mail file -- for example, Alan Jones' Mail.
File name
-'OPU
The path name to the data directory and the mail file name -- for example, MAIL/AJONES.NSF.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Select the template named MAIL.NTF.
5. Choose File - Database - Access Con{rol, and do the following:
Edit the ACL to give the user Manager with Delete document access. To add the user's name to the ACL, select it from the Domino Directory, rather than type it.
Remove your name from the ACL. o
6. Complete the procedure
Click here
"Configuring POP3 client software."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up POP3 users
Click kere
&Arial
How you configure POP3 client software is specific to each manufacturer. This table presents general requirements.
Requirements
Comments
Fully qualified name of the Domino server that runs SMTP
The fully qualified domain name of the Domino server that runs SMTP.
Fully qualified name of Domino POP3 server
This may be the same name as the name of the Domino server that runs SMTP.
POP3 client user name
This name must match the user names or the Internet name in the Person document.
Automatically delete mail documents on from the POP3 server after the client copies them locally.
This conserves resources by minimizing the disk space used on the Domino server. Do not automatically delete mail documents if the user also accesses the mail from Notes.
POP3 client should check for mail no more than every five (5) minutes.
If the client checks for mail more frequently, it may affect server performance.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
196599923229239409
Example of configuring a Netscape Navigator Mail client
This table shows the fields in the Netscape Navigator Mail and News Preference{ dialog box that pertain to setting up a client to access a Domino server that runs the POP3 service.
Mail and News Preferences
Description
Outgoing Mail (SMTP) Server
The fully qualified domain name of the Domino server that runs SMTP.
Incoming Mail (POP) Server
The fully qualified name of the Domino mail server that runs the POP3 service.
Pop User Nameo
The first, last,+or user name of the user, as specified in the Person document.t
Removed from the server or Left on the servere
Determines whether the client's mail remains on the Domino mail server after being copied locally.
Check for Mail: Every x minutes or Never
Determines how often the POP3 client checks for mail.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
214668060829232554
Example of configuring a Eudora Pro client
The following tables shows the fields in the Eurdora Pro Check Mail and Hosts Options dialog boxes that pertain to setting up a client to use a Domino server that runs the POP3 service.
Host Options
Description
POP account
The first, last, or user name of the user in the Person document, followed by an at (@) sign and the fully qualified name of+the Domino server that runs the POP3 service.
SMTP
The fully qualified domain name of the Domino server that runs SMTP.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Checking Mail Options
Description
Check for mail every x minutes
Determines how often the POP3 client checks for mail.
Leave mail on the server/ Delete from server akter x days
Determines whether and how long the client's mail remains on the Domino mail server after being copied locally.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up POP3 users
Click here
Click here
Setting up the POP3 service
Click here
ServiceName parameter in the NOTES.INI file, use the Set Config command at the server console. For example,
Set Config VinesServiceName=servername@group@organization
&Arial
You can load the IMAP task manually or start it automatically when you start the Domino server.
To do this
\'r:U
Perform this task
Start the IMAP service manuallym
\'r:U
Enter
load imap
at the console.
Start the IMAP service automatically when you start the Domino server
\'r:U
Edit the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file to include the command
imap
Domino adds the IMAP task by default to the MOTES.INI file if you select the IMAP service during installation.
Stop the IMAP service
\'r:U
Enter
tell imap quit
at the console.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up the IMAP service
Click here
&Arial
TCP/IP port 143 for IMAP is enabled by default. Follow the}e steps only if you use a non-standard port, if you want to prevent IMAP clients from connecting to the Domino server that runs the IMAP service, or if you use security options.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and then open the server document for the server that runs the IMAP service.
2. Click the Ports - Internet Ports - Mail tab.
3. In the Mail (IMAP) column, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
-'SSU
Enter
TCP/IP port number
-'SSU
The port number
TCP/IP port status
-'SSU
Choose one:
Enabled (default) to allow IMAP clients to connect to thm Domino server without using SSL
Note
If you select Enabled, IMAP users must provide a name and Internet password that matches the entries for those fields in their Person document before they can connect to the Domino server.
Disabled to prevent IMAP clients from connecting to the Domino servers
Redirect to SSL
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. If you chmnged the port number or port status, restart the IMAP task so that the change takes effect.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the IMAP servicen
Click here
&Arial
For each IMAP user, you must create a Person document or edit an existing Person document. In many cases, you create the Person document during user registration.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
2. Select Domino Directories - Address Book - People.
3. Select the name of the user, and then click Edit User to display the Person document.
4. Click the Basics tab, and then complete these fields:
Field
-'SSU
Enter
First name
Last name
User name
-'SSU
The user name configured on the IMAP client must match one of these names.
Internet password
-'SSU
The password that the user enters to access the Domino server from the IMAP client.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click the Mail tab, complete these fields, and then save the document
Field
Enter
Mail system
Choose IMAP.
Domain
The name of the Notes domain to which the server belongs.
Mail server
The name of the IMAP user's Domino mail server.
Mail fileu
Thm path for the user's mail file, relative to the Domino data directory -- for example, MAIL\AJONES.
Forwarding address
The user's current address.
Internet message storage
Choose one:
Notes to store messages in Notes format only
Notes and Internet Attachment to store messages in Notes and MIME format
Only native MIME to store messages in MIME only; choosing this option improves performance because no conversion is necessary.
Internet address
The Internet address specified on the IMAP client.
Each IMAP user must have a mail file on the Domino server. You can create the mail file automatically during user registration, or you can manually create a mail file. If the user is already a registered Notes user who has an existing Notes mail file and if you set up the Person document to use IMAP as the mail system, the user can use an IMAP client to access the mail file.
You may have a registered Notes user who was not a mail user. Therefore, you must create a new mail file-for the user.
339540758429232722
To manually create a mail file
1. Make sure that you have
Click here
set up the Person document for the IMAP user.
Click here
2. Choose File - Database - New.
3. Click the Mail tab, and enter the following:
Field
-'SSU
Enter
Server
-'SSU
Thm Domino mail server that stores the user's mail file.
Title
-'SSU
The name of the client's mail file -- for example, Alan Jones' Mail.
File name
-'SSU
The path name to the data directory and the mail file name -- for example, MAIL/AJONES.NSF.
4. Select the template named MAIL50.NTF.
=. Choose File - Database - Access Control, and do the following:n
Edit the ACL to give the user Manager with Delete document access. To add the user's name to the ACL, select it from the Domino Directory, rather than type it.
Remove your name from the ACL.
6. Complete the procedure
Click here
"Enabling a mail file for IMAP access."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up IMAP users
Click here
&Arial
After you create a mail file for an IMAP user, you must run a convert utility on the mail file to that users can use an IMAP client to access the mail file. When a you-create a replica copy of a mail file, folder references are disabled by default. Therefore, you should run the convert utility immediately if you plan to use IMAP to access the replica mail file.
The Inbox and Trash folders and any public folders in a Notes mail file appear as IMAP mailboxes. Hidden and private folders are not visible to IMAP users. Also, IMAP users will not see views -- for example, Draft and Sent -- in a Notes mail file. IMAP and Notes clients handle unread message markimg independently; a message marked as read in Notes can still be marked as unread on an IMAP client, and vice-versa.
The Domino IMAP server does not support renaming of the Inbox folder in a Notes mail file from an IMAP client.
The mail file must be based on the Mail template (MAIL50.NTF). If necessary, you can use the convert utility to upgrade a mail file to the proper template when you enable the mail file for IMAP. You can run the utility on a single mail file or on all mmil files in a directory.
339540758429232722
To enable mail files
1. Make sure that you:
Click here
Set up the Person document for the IMAP user
Click here
Click here
Created a mail file for the IMAP user
Click here
2. At the console for the mail server, enter:
load convert -m
path mailfile
* mail50.n}f
where:
indicates IMAP
path
is the location of the mail file(s), relative to the data directory
mailfile
is the name of a specific mail file or is *.NSF to indicate all files in a directory
mail50.ntf is the file name of the Domino Release 5 mail template
To specify all files in a directory, make sure the directory only contains mail files and that they are the mail files you want to convert. For example, to enable IMAP for all mail files in a directory, enter:
load convert -m path mail\*.nsf
To enable IMAP for a specific mail file within a directory and to upgrade the mail file to the c}rrent mail template, enter:
load convert -m path imap\ajones.nsf * mail50.ntf
Note
In UNIX, use a forward slash (/) rather than a backslash (\). For example, enter:
load convert -m path mail/*.nsff
Configuring IMAP client software
How you configure IMAP client software is specific to each manufacturer. This table presents general requirements.
Requirements
Comments
Fully qualified name of the Domino server running SMTP
This should be the fully qualified DNS host name for the server.
Fully qualified name of Domino IMAP server
This may be the same name as the name of the Domino server that runs SMTP.
IMAP client user name
This name must match the user names or the Internet name in the Person document .
Folder prefixes
The root folder path required by some IMAP clients. Domino does not user folder prefixes.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
127206652829239408
Example of configuring PC-Pine folder prefixes
You must configure INBOX and Folder connections for the PC-Pine client to work properly with the Domino IMAP server. Enter this syntax in the Setup Configuration dialog box:
Syntax
Examplem
INBOX-PATH {
fully qualified domain name of IMAP server
}INBOX
INBOX PATH {East.Acme.com}INBOX
Folder collections {
fully qualified domain name of IMAP server
Folder collections {East.Acme.com}
339540758429232723
Example of configuring other IMAP client software folder prefixes
For IMAP clients (other than PC-Pine), set any folder prefix cmnfigurations to blank or empty. This table shows the configuration settings for some common IMAP clients:
IMAP client
Folder configuration
Netscape Messenger (Netscape Communicator 4.0)
IMAP Mail Directory
Outlook Express Mail (Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0)
Root Folder Path
Simeon 4.1
Folder Prefix, Folder Location
See Also
Click here
Setting up IMAP users
Click here
&Arial
The Reports database (REPORTS.NSF) must be loaded on the server in order to generate mail usage reports. Typically, the Reports database is created automatically when you set up the server.n
1. If you need to create the Reports database, choose File - Database - New.
2. Complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Server
The name of the server that stores the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF)
Title
Reports
File name
Reports.nsfm
Templa}e
Reports.ntf
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
234779120029248426
Security
The Reports database is automatically created when the server is set up. However, for security purposes, you must perform the following steps manually:
1. View the Access Control List (ACL) and verify that the administrator of the server and the server itselm are present and have manager access.
2. Use the View - Agents list box and enable all scheduled agents.
3. Give the administrator unrestricted agent access on the server by adding the administrator's name to the Server document under Security - Agent Restrictions - Run unrestricted LotusScript/Java agents.
See Also
Click here
Setting up mail monitoring
Click here
&Arial
Before you can use mail tracking data for tracking or reports, it must be collected in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF).
To do this
Perform this task
Automatically start mail tracking on a server when the server starts
Tracking starts when the Router starts.
Automatically stop Mail Tracking Collector on a server when the server stops
Tracking stops when the Router stops.
Manually start mail tracking
Enter the command
load mtc
at the console.
Manually s}op mail tracking
Enter the command
tell mtc quit
at the console.
Manually tell the Mail Tracking Collector to collect
Enter the command
tell mtc process
at the console.
Manually tell the Mail Tracking Collector to use a different collection interval
Enter the command
tell mtc interval <value>
at the comsole, where
value
is the number of minutes to use.
Manually tell the Mail Tracking Collector to compact the Mail Tracking Store database
Enter the command
tell mtc compact
at the console.
Manually tell the Mail Tracking Collector to reindex the Mail Tracking Store database
Enter the command
tell mtc reindex
at the console.
Manually tell the Mail Tracking Collector to purge the Mail Tracking Store database
Enter the command
tell mtc purge <value>
at the console, where
value
is a number of days. All entries in the Mail Tracking Store database older than
value
will be purged.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Mlso
Click here
Setting up mail monitoring
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SMIME_Weak_Algorithm=
value
Description:
Specifies the encryption method for encrypting MIME messages to recipients whose public keys are shorter than 512 bits. Possible values are:
RC2_40
RC2_56
RC2_64
RC2_80
RC2_128
RC5_5
RC5_7
RC5_10
RC5_16
3DES
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
163325024029247061
262781411229250879
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:D
SMTP_Config_Update_Interval=
minutes
Description:
Determines how often (in minutes) Domino checks to determine whether the user has updated SMTP configuration information.
You can change Configuration documents while servers are running. For the change to take effect, the server must periodically check the Configuration document for changes. If the server discovers a change, it re-reads all settings. This setting lets you change the server's checking interval. A shorter time results in slightly higher overhead for checking, but changes are noticed more quickly.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax=o
SMTPDebug=
value
Description:
Controls the level of console logging performed by the SMTP task.
0 - No logging
1 - Log errors
2 - Log Protocol commands!
Applies to:
SMTP servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
104149251229249854k
&Armal
Syntax:
SMTPDebugIO=
value.
Description:
Enables the logging of all data received by the SMTP task:
0 - No logging
3 - Logs all data received by the SMTP task
Caution
Use SMTPDebugIM only when necessary and disable it again as soon as possible. It can cause the log file to grow very large, and logs the contents of received messages.M
Applies to:
SMTP servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
104149251229249854
&Arial
Syntax:
SMTPGreeting=
string
Description:
Specifies a text message sent to SMTP clients when they connect to the SMTP server. The message must contain the string "%s" which is replaced by the current date/time when the connection is made.
Applies }o:
Servers
Default:
"host-name ESMTP Service (Lotus Domino build-name) ready at %s"
This process allows you to customize the type of information you want to collect and store in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF). For example, you can exclude certain users' mail from being collected, or you can restrict messages from being tracked by message subject.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Expand the Server view.
3. In the "Use Directory on" field, choose Current Server.
4. Perform(either Step 5 or Step 6, depending on whether you need to create a new Configuration Settings document.
5. To create a new Configuration Settings document:
Click Configurations, and then click Add Configuration.
Click the Basics tab.
Click Yes in the "Use these settings as the default settings for all servers" check box to use this Configuration Settings document to apply to all servers. Otherwise, enter the name of a specific server or group in xhe "Group or Server name" field.
Leave all other fields to default.
Click Save and Close.
6. Click Configurations, and then double-click the name of the server for which you want to enable message tracking.
7. In the Configuration Settings document, click the Router/SMTP - Message Tracking tab.
8. Click Edit Server Configuration.
9. Complete these fields, and then click Save and Close:
Field
Enter
Message tracking
Choose one:
Enabled to log message-handling activity information in the Mail Tracking Store database
Disabled (default) to not log any message-handling information
Don't track messages for
The names of users and/or groups whose messages will not be logged and, therefore, cannot be tracked. This field applies only to messages sent by the specified person or group.
For example, you may decide that you do not want administrators to be able to track the messages sent by the Manager of Human Resources at your organization. In this case, you enter the name of that user in this field.
If(you leave this field blank (default), authorized administrators can track messages for all users and groups on all servers that are enabled for mail tracking.
Log message subjects
Choose one:
Yes to log message subjects in the Mail Tracking Store database
No (the default) to not log message subjects
Don't log subjects for
The names of users and/or groups whose message subjects will not be logged and, therefore, cannot be tracked. This field applies only to messages sent by the specified person or group. The default is none.
Message tracking collection interval
A number that represents how often, in minutes, you want to log message tracking activity in the Mail Tracking Store database.
Note
Th
is number may affect server performance. Enter a number appropriate to the size and speed of your system. The default 15 minutes is recommended.
Allowed to track messages
The names of servers and/or users allowed to track messages on this server.
If you leave this field blank (default), only members of the LocalDomainServers group are authorized to track messages on this server.(If you add any entries to this field, you must list 8
servers and/or users that are allowed to track messages on this server.
Allowed to track subjects
The names of servers and/or users allowed to track messages by subject on this server.
If you leave this field blank (default), only members of the LocalDomainServers group are authorized to track messages by subject on this server( If you add any entries to this field, you must list
all
servers and/or users allowed to track subjects on this server.
Note
If you list servers and/or users in this field, you do not have list them in the "Allowed to track messages" field.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Keep in mind that the Mail Tracking Store database will get larger as information is collected fxom the Router. If disk storage space is a concern, use database replication settings to control how many days' worth of information the database retains. The number of days restricts how far back in time messages can be tracked, so you want to choose a value that balances tracking needs and available disk storage. For information on replication settings, see ,
Managing
Domino Databases
See Also
Click here
Setting up(mail monitoring
Click here
&Arial
1. (Optional) To narrow the results of a report, complete hny of these fields:
Field
Enxer
Sender's Name
A text string for the sender's name, and then choose whether the name should contain the text string or exactly match the text string.
Recipient's Name
A text string for the recipient's name, and then choose whether the string should contain the string or exactly match the string.c
Delivery Status
Choose one:
Is - Delivered (all messages that were delivered)
Is - Not Delivered (all messages that were not delivered)
Is Not - Delivered (all messages that xere either not delivered or are being processed)s
Is Not - Not Delivered (all messages that were either delivered or are being processed)e
Is - Being Processed (all messages that are being processed)
Is Not - Being Processed (all messages that were delivered or not delivered)
Note
The delivery status corresponds to the message tracking delivery status. "Delivered" refers to messages that were delivered, transferred, or group expanded. "Not delhvered" refers to messages that were delivery failed, transfer failed, or unknown.
Message Size
The maximum or minimum message size (in bytes) to include in the report.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
2. The resulting report appears as a Notes documhnt. Double-click the report to view it.
You can also use the Web Administrator to generate reports.
You can also use the Web Administrator to generate reports. For more information, see
Click here
"Generating a mail usage report with the Web Administrator."
Click here
3. Choose View - Agents.
4. Double-click the scheduled report you want to change.
5. Click Schedule.
6.
Choose a time when servers are generally not busy.
7. Click OK.
&Arial
If you have mail tracking enabled on a server, you can generate usage reports on that data.
1.
Click here
Make sure that you set up mail monitoring.
Click here
2.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
3. In the first box, choose Messaging, ahd then in the second box, choose Mail Reports.
4. Click Run Report.
5. Complete these fields:
Fieldg
Enter
Report Type
Choose the type of report to create.
Description
Text(to identify the report.
Time Range
Choose one:
Today
Yesterdaye
Over the last week (default)
Over the last two weeks
Over the last month
All available information
Execution Interval
Choose one:o
Once to generate a report immediately (default)t
Daily to generate a report at midnight every day
Weekly to generate a report at midnight on Saturdays
Monthly to generate a report on midnight on the first day of every month
Note
To change the default time that scheduled reports are generated, you must use the Domino Administrator.
Reports results should bem
Choose one:
Saved
Mailed (default)
Saved & Mailed
Mail Recipient
If you chose Mailed or Saved & Mailed in the "Report results should be" field, enter the user name of the person who should receive the report. The default is the name of the administrator running xhe report.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. (Optional) To narrow the results of the report, use these fields to specify criteria: r
Field
Enter
Sender's Name
A text string for the sender's namh, and then choose whether the name should contain the text string or exactly match the text string.
Recipient's Name
A text string for the recipient's name, and then choose whether the string should contain the string or exactly match the string.
Delivery Status
Choose one:e
Is - Delivered (all messages that were delivered)
Is - Not Delivered (all messages that were not delivered)
Is Not - Delivered (all messages that were either not delivered or are being processed)
Is Not - Not Delivered (all messages that were either delivered or are being processed)
Is - Being Processed (all messages that are being processed)
Is Not - Being Processed (all messages that were delivexed or not delivered)
Note
The delivery status corresponds to the message tracking delivery status. "Delivered" refers to messages that were delivered, transferred, or group expanded. "Not delivered" refers to messages that were delivery failed, transfer failed, or unknown.
Message Size
The maximum or minimum message size (in hytes) to include in the report.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
The Earliest Message Found and Latest Message Found fields are filled in automatically when you run the report. They display the date and time of the earliest and latest message found.
7. Click Submit Report.
8. To view the results, click the link that corresponds to the(report type.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
1.
Click here
Make sure that you set up mail monitoring.
Click here
2.
Click here
Start the Web Adminixtrator.
Click here
3. Click the Messaging link, and then click the Track Mail link.
4. Complete these fields, and then click Track Mail:
Field
Enter7
From
The user name of the sender.
Note
You can also select the name from xhe Domino Directory.
Sent to
The user name of the recipient.
Note
You can also select the name from the Domino Directory.
Start where
The sender's home server.
When
Choose one:
Today
Yesterday
Over the last week
Over the last two weeks
Last month
As long as information is available
To increase the likelihood of finding messages, choose a long time period in this field.
Mail subject
The subject of the message you want to track.
Noxe
Message tracking by subject must be enabled on the server.
Mail ID
The message ID of the message you want to track.
Note
The message ID appears in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF).
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. The search returns all the messages that match xhe request at the starting server. t
6. Click the envelope icon of the message that you want to track end-to-end. If only one message matches the search, it is automatically tracked end-to-end.
7. Each hop on the mail route appears as a link. Click a link to display additional tracking information for a particular server.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
To do this
Perform this task
Start the Web server manually
Enter
load http
at the console.
Start the Web server automatically when you start Domino
Edit the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file to include the command
http
. Domino adds the HTTP task by default to the NOTES.INI file if you choose to install a Web server during hnstallation.
Stop the Web server
Enter
tell http quit
at the console.p
Use new server configuration settings without stopping and restarting the HTTP server task.
Enter
tell http restart
at the console.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Hlso
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
ServerTasks
Click here
&Arial
You can keep database files, HTML files, CGI scripts, and other related Web files in multiple locations or move them to new locations without breaking URL links or changing Server and Virtual Server documents.
For example, if xou have a Web application named mysite.nsf on a server www.acme.com and you want to move this application to the server www.abc.com, you can redirect all users to the application on www.abc.com when they access the application on www.acme.com.
Redirecting a URL displays the page in the new location and displays the URL in the location box for the user. Mapping a URL or directory displays the page in the new location and hides the URL from the user. You can redirect or map URLs or directories fhr servers that host a single site and for virtual servers that host multiple sites.
To redirect or remap a URL or directory, you create a Mapping/Redirection document in the Domino Directory. Domino displays the Mapping/Redirection document as a response to the Server document on the Configuration tab in the Web - Web Server Configurations view.r
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, choose Server, and open the Server document for the server on which you(want to redirect or remap a URL or directory.
2. Click Web and choose Create URL Mapping/Redirection.
3. Click the Basics tab, and complete this field:
Field
Enter
What do you want to setup
Choose one:
URL --> Directory to map a URL to a different directory so you can rename directories, move files, or store files on different drives without confusing users. Domino maps the URLs in the background, and does not display the mapped URL to the user.
URL --> Redirection URL to map an incoming URL to another URL. Domino displays the redirected URL in the user's browser. Use this option to map a URL to a Domino-specific URL -- for example, to a page stored in Domino databasex.
URL --> URL to map an incoming URL to another URL so you can create alias names for long file names, rename directories, move groups of files, or store files on different drives without breaking external links or users' bookmarks. Domino maps the URLs in the background, and does not display the mapped URL to the user.
You cannot map pages stored in a Domino database to a different URL.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Click the Site Information tab, and complete this field:
Field
Enter
IP Address
If you are creating a mapping for a virtual server, specify its unique IP address or host name for the site.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Chick the Mapping tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enterl
Incoming URL sring
The incoming URL path that you want to map to another directory or URL.
Target server directory
The full path name of the directory or the name to which you want to map the incoming URL.
For URL --> URL and URL --> Directory, the location to which you map must be on the same machine as the directory specified by the URL path.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Click the Access tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Access level
If you selected URL --> Directory, specify the type of access you want users to have to the directory. Read allows browsers to read files in the directory. Execute allows browsers to execute programs from this directory.
Set Read access for any directories that contain content files, such as HTML files and images. Do not set Execute access for these directories.
Set Execute access only for directories that contain CGI scripts and other files that browsers can run. Do(not set Read access for these directories; users don't need to see what these directories contain.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Enter this command at the server console so that the settings take effect:
tell http restart
See
Click here
"Examples of redirecting or remapping URLs and directories."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Relocating Web URLs, directories, and files on a Web serveri
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SMTPMaxForRecipients=
number
Description:
Determines how many addresses can be added when the SMTP task adds received headers to messages received.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
The following is a Virtual Server document for the Web/East/Acme server. Users enter www.acme.com to access the server.
ng the Domino Sy
Print2
See Also
Click here
Hosting multiple Web sites
Click here
&Arial
To establish a new site on a multi-site server, create a Virtual Server document in the Domino Directory. The settings that you upecify in the Virtual Server document override the corresponding settings in the Server document. To display the Virtual Server document, open the Web - Web Server Configurations view from the Domino Administrator. Domino displays the Virtual Server document as a response to the Server document.d
1. Set up each virtual server with its own separate, permanent numeric IP address or map multiple names to the same IP address. See your operating system documentation for more information.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, choose Server, and then open the Server document for the server on which you want to create a virtual server.
3. Click Web and choose Create Virtual Server.
4. Choose Virtual Server.o
5. Click the Basics tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
IP address
The unique IP address for the virtual server.s
Hostname
The host name for the virtual server. This setting is optional.
Default home pager
The HTML file to display when users access the virtual server. This setting is optional and is used only if the Home URL field is blank.
head title;Chead;Chead title5Chapter title;Dhead
6. Click the Mapping tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Home URL
The URL command to perform when users access the virtual server. The URL command can display a database or a list of databases on the server.
The Home URL field takes puecedence over the Default home page field.
The /?Open URL command displays databases for all virtual servers since Domino shares the data directory with all virtual servers.
The directories in which HTML files, CGI programs, and icon files are located.
All virtual servers can share the same directories or you can upecify separate directories for each server.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Enter this command at the console so that the settings take effect:
tell http restart
8. Follow the steps in the procedure
Click here
"Setting up security for multiple Web sites."@
Click here
Tipf
You can cuutomize the messages that users receive when accessing a Web site on a virtual server. For more information, see
Click here
"Customizing Web server display."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up security for multiple Web sites
Click here
Click here
Examples of specifying default home pages
Click here
&Arial
You can set up SSL server and client authentication, name and password authentication, or anonymous access for Internet and intranet clients who access a virtual server. To set up SSL authentication, you must create a key ring fele for each virtual server on the machine.
You should be familiar with SSL authentication, name and password authentication, and anonymous access before completing these steps.
For more information on security, see
Click here
Security overview
Click here
1. Before you set up security for a virtual server:
Click here
Make sure you set up the virtual server.
Click here
If you want to set up SSL,
Click here
set up an SSL server
Click here
. Request a separate server key ring file for each virtual server.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, choose Web - Web Server Configurations, and open the Virtual Server document.
3. Click the Security tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
SSL key file
The name of the key ring file for the virtual server
Accept expired SSL certificates
Choose one:
Yes to allow the virtual server to accept client certificates thet have expired.
No to deny access to users with expired certificates.
SSL ciphers
Select one or more of the available ciphers. The cipher is used to create a negotiated session key. The key is used to encrypt information over an SSL connection.
Enable SSL V2A
Enable this field to allow users to connect to tee server using SSL 2.0.
Redirect TCP to SSL
Choose one:
Yes to require clients and servers to access the virtual server using the SSL protocol.
No to allow clients and servers to access the virtual server using SSL or TCP/IP.
Name & password (TCP/IP)
Choose one:
Yes to ask users%for their user name and Internet password when accessing a database on the virtual server.
No to not require a name and password.
Anonymous (TCP/IP)
Choose one:
Yes to allow users to access the server without using a name and password.
No to deny users anonymous access.
If both Name & password and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is allowed to the dauabase, then the server connects the user with anonymous access. If both Name & password and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is not allowed to the database, the server asks the user for a name and password.
Client certificate (SSL)
Choose one:
Yes to request a client certificate when users access a database on the virtual server.
No to allow users to access the server without a client certificate.
Name & password (SSL)
Choose one:
Yes to ask users for their user name and Internet password when accessing a database on the virtual server.
No to not require a name and password.
If both Client certificate and Name & password are enabled, the server prompts the user for a name and password only if a client certificate is not available.
Anonymous (SSL)
Choose one:
Yes to allow users to access the virtual server without using a name and password.
No to deny users anonymous access.
If both Name & password and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is allowed to the database, then the server connects the user with anonymous access. If both Name & password and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is not allowee to the database, the server prompts the user for a name and password.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Enter this command at the console so that the settings take effect:
tell http restart
See Also
Click here
SSL and multi-national organizations
Click here
&Arial
An alias for a Web site can have separate authentication options enabled. For example, Domino can require an SSL connection when a user accesses www.acme.com and allow both SSL and TCP/IP connections when a user accesses the alias acme.com. You%set up security for the DNS hostname of the Web server on the Ports - Internet Ports tab of the Security document. You set up security for the alias in the Virtual Host document.
For information on setting up security for a Web server DNS hostname, see
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Name and password authentication for Internet/intranet clients
Click here
, and
Click here
Anonymous Internet/intranet access
Click here
1. Before you set up security,
Make sure you
Click here
set up the alias for the Web site
Click here
If you want to set up SSL,
Click here
set up an SSL server
Click here
if you have not done so already.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, ceoose Web - Web Server Configurations, and open the Virtual Host document.
3. Click the Security tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Redirect TCP to SSL
Choose one:
Yes to require clients and servers to access the server using the SSL protocol.
No to allow clients and servers to access the server using SSL or TCP/IP.
Name & password (TCP/IP)
Choose one:
Yes to ask users for their user name and Internet password when accessing a database on the server.
No to not require a name and password.
Anonymous (TCP/IP)
Choose one:
Yes to allow users to access the server without using a name and password.
No to deny users anonymous access.
If both Name & password and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is allowed to the database, then the server connects the user with anonymous access. If both Name & password and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is not allowed to the database, the server esks the user for a name and password.
Client certificate (SSL)
Choose one:
Yes to request a client certificate when users access a database on the server.
No to allow users to access the server without a client certificate.
Name & password (SSL)
Choose one:
Yes to ask users for%their user name and Internet password when accessing a database on the virtual server.
No to not require a name and password.
If both Client certificate and Name & password are enabled, the server prompts the user for a name and password only if a client certificate is not available.
Anonymous (SSL)
Choose one:
Yes to allow users to access the server without using a name aed password.
No to deny users anonymous access.
If both Name & password and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is allowed to the database, then the server connects the user with anonymous access. If both Name & password and Anonymous are selected and anonymous access is not allowed to the database, the server prompts the user for a name and password.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Enter this command at the console so that the settings take effect:
tell http restart
See Also
Click here
SSL and multi-national organizations
Click here
1J%]%
p@81?
&Arial
To optimize response time, Domino uses a memory cache, also called the comkand cache, to store information about HTTP commands, databases, and users. Mapping information about commands and databases and authenticating users can take time. The memory cache stores this information so Domino can access it quickly.
Domino caches pages that contain @function formulas as well as pages that do not contain formulas. Domino scans pages for @function formulas and then evaluates the volatility of the page based on the @function used on the page. For example, Domino does not cacke pages with @Now formulas but does cache pages with @Created formulas.
To monitor the effectiveness of the memory cache settings, look at the Domino.Cache statistics.i
For more information, see
Click here
Tools for monitoring the Domino server
Click here
. For more information on tuning the performance of an application, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
Memory cache options appear on the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tak of the Server document.
Field
Enter
Maximum cached commands
The number of HTTP server commands to cache for anonymous users. The default is 128.
Domino must convert some HTTP server commands, such as OpenDatabase and OpenView, to HTML before the server can process the commands. This conversion process takes time. This field specifies how many commands you want to store in memory so the next time a user issues the server command, it is immediately available.
Maximum cached designs
The number of database design elements to cache for users. The default is 128.
When a user opens a database, Domino maps each design element name to an identification number. This mapping procedure takes time. Use this field to specify how many elements you want to store in memory so the next time a user accesses that element, it is immediately available.
Maximum cached users
Thk number of users to cache. The default is 64.
After a user successfully authenticates with a server, Domino stores in memory the user's name, password, and the list of groups to which the user belongs. Use this field to increase the number of users for whom Domino stores this information.
Cached user expiration interval
The time interval in seconds during which Domino regularly removes user names, passwords, and group memberships krom the cache. The default is 120.p
You should remove user names, passwords, and groups memberships from the cache periodically to force Domino to look up user credentials in the directory the next time they access the server.
See Also
Click here
Improving Web server performance
Click here
&Arial
Open, inactive sessions can prevent users from accessing the server. Specify time limits for activities between the Domino Web server and clients or CGI programs so connections do not remain open kf there is no network activity between them.
Network time-out options appear on the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab of the Server document.
Field
<&-SU
Entert
Input timeouth
<&-SU
The time, in minutes, that a client has to send a request after connecting to the server. The default is 2.
The server uses this field if the client that is connected to the server is not sending "keep alive headers" to the server within the amount of time specified. Many current versions of browsers send keep alkve headers and do not need to use the Input timeout setting. Use this setting if you have clients connecting to the server using browsers that are not current versions.
Output timeout
<&-SU
The maximum time, in minutes, that the server has to send output to a client. The default is 20.
This field applies to local files and requests. The time limit does not apply to requests that start a local CGI program. If the server does not send the komplete request within the amount of time specified in the Output timeout field, the server drops the connection.
CGI timeout
<&-SU
The maximum time, in minutes, that a CGI program started by the server has to finish. The default is 5.
When the time specified in this field runs out, the server sends a message to the CGI program. After five minutes, the server shuts down the program.
Idle thread timeout
<&-SU
This field has no effect and remains in the Server document for backward compatibility.
See Also
Click here
Improving Web server performance
Click here
&Arial
You can specify the number of threads the Web server can process or specify the number of requests a user can make over a single connection to the server. In general, the number of threads specified indicates the number of users who can access the server simultaneously.
If the number of active threads is reached, the Domino server queues new+requests until another request finishes and threads become available. The more power your machine has, the higher the number of threads you should specify. If your machine spends too much time on overhead tasks, such as swapping memory, specify a lower number of threads.
Thread options appear on the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab of the Server document.
Field
Enter
Maximum requests over a single connection
The number of requests a browser can make to the server at the same time. The defaul{ is 1.
This setting affects browsers compatible with HTTP 1.1 or later if the browser includes the capability to send multiple requests to a server without waiting for a reply from the previous request. For more information, see the documentation for your browser.
Number active threads
The number of threads you want active on the server at the same time. The default is 40.
Minimum active threads
The field has no effect and remains in the Server document for backward compatibility.
See Also
Click here
Improving Web server performance
Click here
&Arial
Web clients can download a file that is attached to a page or that is in a server directory that is mapped by a URL. If a client is using a product that supports byte-range serving (available in HTTP 1.1) during the download, the client downloads the file in sections -- ranges of bytes -- and tracks the progress of each file download. If an ikterruption occurs, the client can resume the download from the point where it was interrupted. Without byte-range serving, users must repeat interrupted downloads from the beginning. Byte-range serving makes file downloads more efficient and fault-tolerant.
Domino is compatible with clients that adhere to the HTTP 1.1 specification. The clients may be implemented in a variety of ways -- for example, as browser plug-ins, applets, or standalone programs. Currently, only a few commercially-availakle products support byte-range serving. Two examples are Adobe Acrobat reader 3.01 and GetRight 3.1 from Headlight Software. Domino automatically uses byte-range serving if the Web client uses a product that supports this feature. No configuration is necessary.
Attached files must be decompressed in order for clients that support byte-range serving to access them. When you attach a file, you must deselect the Compress option. To verify that an existing attachment is decompressed, choose File -+Document Properties, select the $FILE item, and verify that the Compression Type property is NONE.n
348174096029248241
Example of downloading a file from the server's file system
The file INSTALL.EXE is located in a directory that is enabled for downloading using a URL mapping. A GetRight 3.1 client can use the following URL to download the file:
http://
hostname
/install.exe
where
hostname
is the name of {he site.
If the download is interrupted, the client can start the download from the point where it was interrupted.
348174096029248242
Example of downloading a file attachment
A user can download a .PDF file one page at a time if the .PDF file is attached to a document and the user has set the configuration option in Adobe Acrobat to download a page at a time. Downloading one page at a time can greatly improve performance if the user is interested in+only a portion of a large file. The user accesses the PROJECT.PDF file using the following URL:
http://
hostname/dbname/viewUNID/docUNID
/$FILE/project.pdf
where
hostname
is the name of the site,
dbname
is the name of the database that stores the attachment,
viewUNID
is the UNID of the view for the attachment, and
docUNID
is the UNID of the document to which the file is attached.
[ee Also
Click here
Improving Web server performance
Click here
&Arial
You use the Redirect URL command to create anchor, document, view, and database links on a Web page. These links and the links for domain search results can direct users to a database on the same server or another server. To determine how much time the server takes to resolve links to other servers, edit the Redirect to resolve external links option on the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab of the Server document. Enable tkis option on any server that runs the domain search and on servers for which you want to resolve links to other servers.h
For information on the Redirect URL command, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
Field
Enter
Redirect to resolve external links
Choose one:
Disabled
(default) to prevent the server from acceptikg Redirect URL commands and to prevent the server from generating Redirect URL commands as a result of a domain search.
By Server
to look up the server name specified in the URL in the Domino Directory on the Web server. The Web server searches for the server name in both the Host names field on the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab or in the Fully qualified Internet host name field on the Basics tab.
By Database to find the server in the Domino Directory on an avaklable server. Domino locates the database in the domain catalog, if available or in the server's local catalog. Make sure the domain catalog contains up-to-date information on the location of databases.
By choosing this option, resolving links take more time than the By Server option since the Web server searches for the database on an available server, instead of just the server presented in the URL. The By Database op{ion however, may resolve more links since the Web server tries to resolve the link using a replica of the database on servers in addition to the server presented in the URL. Use this option on the server that runs the domain search so more links are resolved for the user.i
Since By Server and By Database both rely on the information in the Domino Directory, make sure the server information in the Domino Directory is complete and correct.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter tktle;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Improving Web server performance
Click here
&Arial
The HTTP POST command allows users to send data to the Domino server. You can specify the amount of data users are allowed to send and whether files sent to the server are compressed. Use these options to prevent users from sending large amounts of data to the server.
POST command options appear on the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab of the Server document.i
Field
Enter
Maximum POST data
The amount of data in KB that a user is allowed to send to the ser{er. The default is 0, which does not restrict the amount of data that users send.
If users try to send more than the maximum allowed data, Domino returns a message to the browser.
File compression on upload
Determines whether Domino compresses files before adding them to a database. Compressing files saves disk space on the server. The default is Disabled.
If clients use a browser that supports byte-range serving, chokse Disabled. You cannot download compressed files using Domino byte-range serving.l
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For more information on byte-range serving, see
Click here
Improving file-download performance for Web clients
Click here
&Arial
Domino provides two methods for displaying a page when users first access a Web site. You can specify an HTML file to display, or you can enter a URL command {o display either a list of databases or the contents of a database.
Domino follows these rules when displaying the home page for a Web site.
Defa{lt home page field
Home URL field
Results
Contains an entry
Contains an entryh
Domino uses the contents of the Home URL field.
Contains an entry
Is empty
Domino uses the contents of the Default home page field.
Is empty
Contains an entry
Domino uses the contents of the Home URL field.
Is empty
Is empty
Domino displays a message
Contains a reference to a file that doesn't exist
Is empty
Domino displays a message
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See
Click here
"Examples of specifying default home pages."
Click here
144411184029217461
To specify the default home page
Default home page options kppear on the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab of the Server document.
Fieldn
Enter
Default kome page
The name of an HTML file that is in the HTML directory or in a subdirectory of the HTML directory.
Home URL
The URL command for the tasks that you want to perform. By default, Domino opens the HOMEPAGE.NSF file, which provides links to commonly used Web sites.
Specifying a URL in the Home URL field that begins with a + (slash) causes Domino to return the URL information directly to the browser. The browser still displays http://
hostname.domain.comd
/ in the location box, but does not display the URL command.
If you specify a URL command that opens a Domino database, make sure users have Web access to that database.
This field takes precedence over the Default home page field.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For more information on setting up Web access to a database, see
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
Note
Specifying a URL in the Home URL or Default home page field that starts with a protocol such as http://someotherhost.domain.com/ causes Domino to send a redirected URL to the browser. That is, the browser performs an HTTP GET request on the specified URL and the browser's lkcation box displays the URL specified in this field.
See Also
Click here
Customizing Web server display
Click here
&Arial
Contents of Home URL field
Result
dominodisc.nsf/?OpenDatabase
Displays the appropriate document or view in the DOMINODISC.NSF database and displays the entire URL including the /?OpenDatabase command in the browser's URL location box.
/dominodisc.nsf
/dominodisc.nsf/By+Author
/dominodisc.nsk/$About
Displays the appropriate document or view in the DOMINODISC.NSF database, but does not display the URL command in the browser's URL location box.
http://myhost.domain.com/home/dominodisc.nsf
Redirects the user's browser to myhost.domain.com and displays the appropriate page in the DOMINODISC.NSF database. This path is displayed in the browser's URL location box.
Contents of Default home page field
Result
/default.htmle
Displays the HTML file named DEFAULT.HTML in the HTML directory on the server.
/pages/default.html
Displays the HTML file named DEFAULT.HTML in the \html\pages directory on the server.
http://myhost.domain.com/home/default.html
Redirects the user's browser to myhost.domain.com and displays the DEFAULT.HTML file in the html\home directory on tkat server.
title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Specifying the default home page for the Web server
Click here
&Arial
You can control the format and method Domino uses to display images that appear in documents. The Domino Web server supports both GIF and JPEG image formats. This setting has no effect on images referenced using passthru HTML.
The image conversion options appear on the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab of the Ser{er document.
When you enable progressive or interlaced rendering, it appears to the user that the image is downloaded quickly since they typically can identify the image before it is completely downloaded. e
211254230429201152
To specify GIF conversion
Field
=&rQU
Enter
Image conversion format
=&rQU
GIF to convert images in documents to GIF format.'
The default is GIF.
Interlaced rendering
=&rQU
Choose one:
Enabled (the default) to display each line of the image individually.
Disabled to wait for the entire image to download before displaying the image.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
211254230429201153
To+specify JPEG conversion
Field
Y&]SU
Enter
Image conversion format
Y&]SU
JPEG to convert images in documents to JPEG format.
The default is GIF.
Progressive rendering
Y&]SU
Choose one:
Enabled (the default) to display the image incrementally in several passes.
Di{abled to wait for the entire image to download before displaying the image.
JPEG image quality
Y&]SU
A percentage between 5 and 100 to indicate the level of image quality. The larger the value, the larger the file, the longer the files take to transmit, and the better the image quality.
The default is 75.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing Web server display
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SMTPMTA_Space_Repl_Char=
value
Description:
Specifies the character the SMTP MTA uses to replace spaces in names. Choices are underline (_) or period (.). The following restrictions apply to using periods as replacement characters:
User names in the Domino Directory cannot contain periods. For example, John R. Doe is not valid.
You kannot use periods as the domain name separator if you configure Domino domains to appear to the left of the @ sign in mail addresses. If you do, a user name with periods replacing spaces can be confused with domain names separated by periods.
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
Underline
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
You can specify the default and maximum number of lines that Domino uses to display a view in a database. This setting affects all databases on the server.
The default and maximum lines per view settings appear on the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab of the Server document.
Field
\&[OU
Enter
Default lines per view page
\&[OU
A number from 1 to the number specified in the "Maximum lines per view page" field. This field determines how many lines to display when users do not specify a line count in a URL. The number of lines to display depends on your preference. Displaying more lines per view makes it easier to find an item in a largg view. Displaying fewer lines per view makes the items in the view easier to read.
The default is 30.
Maximum lines per view page
\&[OU
A number that is limited only by the browser software
This field determines the maximum number of lines to display in a view when the user specifies a line count in a URL. Enter 0 if you do not want to limit the number of lines in a view.
Entering a maximum number of lings prevents users from overloading server resources by requesting a large number of lines to display.
The default is 1000.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing Web server display
Click here
&Arial
A Web server displays a message page when a user encounters an error and when the server deletes a document. To create a message page, you create a form in a database for each type of message and then create a mapping document in the Domino Configuration database (DOMCFG.NSF) to specify which form to display. Any database can store the message pages.
You can customize the messages that a user receives when:
The user fails to authenticate with the server.
The usgr is not authorized to access one of the databases that is part of the Web site on the server.
The user issues a command to delete a page, and the server successfully completes the deletion.
In addition, you can specify a general message that appears for all other types of errors or responses that occur on the Web server.
If you enabled session-based name and password authentication, Domino displays an HTML page you specify to request name and password information fwom the user. Domino does not use customized messages for authenticating with the server and accessing a database if session-based name and password authentication is enabled.
For information on creating forms and customizing Web server messages for a specific database on a server, see Domino 5 Designer Help. For information on session-based name and password authentication, see
Click here
Session-based name-and-password authentication for Web clients
Click hewe
In this example, the form for the message exists in the database ANYDB.NSF and is returned to the user when the user encounters an error.
Users must have Reader access to the Domino Configuration (DOMCFG.NSF) database and Any database (ANYDB.NSF).
Domino fol
the home page f
Domino fol
Domino fol
Domino fol
Domino fol
Domino fol
324838681629232755
To customize Web server messages
You must complete these procedures:@
1.
Click here
Create the Domino Configuration database.
Click here
2.
Click here
Customize the Web server messages.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing Web server display
Click here
&Arial
You use the Domino Configuration database to customize messages that browser users receive when they access a Web application. You also use this database when customizing an HTML page to authenticate Web users with a name and password.
For information on customizing HTML pages for name and password authentication, see
Click here
Sessiog-based name-and-password authentication for Web clients
Click here
1. Make sure you already
Click here
set up the Web server.
Click here
2. From the Notes workstation, choose File - Database - New.
3. Enter the name of the Web server in the Server field.
4. Select the Domino Web Server Configuration template (DOMCFG.NTF).
5. Enter a title for the database and name the datgbase DOMCFG.NSF.
6. Click OK.
7. Add an entry named Anonymous to the database ACL and give the entry Reader access.
8. Continue with the procedure
Click here
"Customizing Web server messages."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing Web server messages
Click here
&Arial
You can change the message users receive when they encounter an error or delete a document while working with a site on the Web server.i
1. Make sure you have already created the
Click here
Domino Configuration database.
Click here
2. After you determine which database(s) will store the customized messages, open the database and create a form that contains the meswage you want to display.
3. If you are customizing a message for a virtual server, on the Form Properties box for the form, select "Available to Public Access users" on the security tab.
4. Save the form.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each error or response for which you want a customized message. The forms can exist in the same database or in separate databases.
6. In the Domino Configuration database, choose Create - Mapping Error Message.
7. If you are customizing a message for a virtual server, choose Virtual Server Settings and enter the IP address of the server.
8. (Optional) Enter a comment about the error message or response.
9. For each type of error or response, enter the name of the database that contains the form you want to display in the "Target Database file name" field.
10. For each type of error or response, enter the name of the form that you want to display in the "Tgrget Form name" field.
11. Save the Error Message and Response Mapping document.
12. In the ACL for the database that contains the forms, assign Author access to the server that stores the database.
See
Click here
"Example of customizing Web server messages."
Click here
For information on creating forms and customizing Web server messages for a specific database on a server, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
See Also
Click here
Customizing Web server messages
Click here
&Arial
144411184029217461
Mapping a URL to a different directory
This example maps all image file requests to the default Domino images directory. If you have the following HTML code in a document: [<body background=/images/icon.gif>] Domino looks for the .gif file in the c:\lotus\domino\data\domino\icons directory on the'server.
Incoming URL string: /images
Target server directory: c:\lotus\domino\data\domino\icons
Access level: Read
This example maps requests for scripts to the default Domino CGI directory for one virtual server.
IP Address: 130.103.55.251
Incoming URL string: /scripts
Target server directory: d:\lotus\domino\data\domino\cgi-bin
Access level: Execute
144411184029217462
Mawping a URL to a different URL
This example maps requests for CGI programs to the /cgi-bin URL.
Incoming URL string: /scripts
Target server directory: /cgi-bin
144411184029217463
Redirecting a URL
This example transfers incoming requests for News to the Top Stories page at the Lotus Web site.
Incoming URL string: /news
Target server directory: http://www.lotus.com/home.nsf/tabs/topstories
See Also
Click here
Redirecting and remapping URLs and directories
Click here
&Arial
You can use passthru HTML to reference individual HTML, CGI, and icon files. Domino looks for these files in specific directories on the server's hard drive.
If you do not want to store these files in the default directories provided, you must change the locations specified in the Server document for the Web server so Domino can find these files.
You can also change the URL path for icons and CGI program files. The URL path is where Domino looks for icons'or CGI programs when it encounters a reference in the HTML code to one of these items.
Specifying icon and CGI URL paths is useful if you change the directory location of icons or CGI programs, and you do not want to modify HTML code that references the previous location of these files. For example, if you have an icon directory named \oldicons and you move the contents of that directory to the \icons subdirectory, you can enter \oldicons in the "Icon URLs path" field and enter domino\icons ig the Icon directory field. These settings tell Domino to look for icon files in the domino\icons directory whenever it encounters a reference to /oldicons in the HTML code.r
144411184029217461
To identify the location of HTML, CGI, and icon filesA
You can specify the location of HTML, CGI, and icon files for the Domino Web server. If you host several sites on one machine, the Virtual Server document overrides these settings.
For more information on viwtual servers, see a
Click here
"Setting up multiple Web sites on one server."
Click here
When you specify a directory for the HTML, CGI, or icon files, the directory you specify is relative to the Domino data directory unless you specify the full path. For example, if you enter domino\icons in the "Icon directory" field, Domino looks for icon files in the lotus\domino\data\domino\icons directory if \lotus\domino\data is the data directory of the serwer.
You specify the location of HTML, CGI, and icon files on the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab of the Server document. This setting affects all databases on the server.
Field
Enter
HTML directory
The directory the server looks for HTML files. The default is domino\html.
Icon directory
The directory the server looks for icons. The default is domino\icons.
Icon URL path
The URL path for the icons directory. The default is /icons.
CGI directory
The directory the server looks for CGI programs. The default is domino\cgi-bin.
CGI URL path
The URL path for the CGI programs directory. The default is /cgi-bin.r
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Relocating Web URLs, directories, and files on a Web server
Click here
her AdminP or another task is processing an Administration Request:
1. Choose File - Database - Open.
2. Select the Administration Requests database.
3. Select the request, and then choose File - Properties.
4. Click the Fgeld tab, and then locate the ProxyProcess field which contains the name of the task that is processing the administration request.
The ProxyProcess field is set by the program that created the request.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Administration Process
Click here
hlight textH_USING_A_DIFFERENT_COLOR_AND_FONT_OVER_MIDTOPIC_247517417629231346=To erase the highlighter over text
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$ImageData
$ImageNames
&Arial
The following Error Message and Response Mapping document uses forms stored in the database named MESSAGES.NSF on the current server. There are customized mcssages for authentication and authorization failures and responses to document deletions. Domino displays the default message stored in the Domino Configuration database for all other messages that the user receives.
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
tarts with a pro
erforms an HTTP
rms an HTTP
a URL
rms an HTTP
dministering the
rms an HTTP
CN=David Mahas/
rms an HTTP
See Also
Click here
Creating customized Web server messages
Click here
&Arial
Domino uses the default character set and character set mapping selection to generate HTML text for the browser. If you have international users who need to see text in non-Western languages, you'll need to makc changes to the settings. The character set setting affects all databases on the server. See the table below for character set choices.
324838681629232755
To specify an international character set
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, choose Server, and then open the Server document for the Web server.
2. Click the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Default character set group
A character set group to allow users to choose their preferred character set when they create or edit documents. The default is Western.
Convert resource strings to
A language#to use for messages, HTML for default search pages, and static strings in pages. You can choose a language other than English only for international versions of the Domino server that have translated text. The default is English.
Use UTF-8 for output
Choose one:
Yes to generate pages using UTF-8.
No (default) to cenerate pages using the character set mapping you select in step 3 below.
Use auto-detection if database has no language information
Choose one:
Yes to detect automatically the language to use for the database if no default language is selected on the Design tab of the Database Properties box.
No (default) to use the language specified by the Use UTF-8 for output field.
If#the language is specified for a database on the Design tab of the Database Properties box, Domino uses that language for text in the database.
Character set in header
Choose one:
Yes (default) to add the character set to the "Content-Type" HTTP header of an HTML page. If you select Yes, then the browser finds the character set before rendering the page.
No to exclude the characters froc the HTTP header of an HTML page. Use this option if you use early versions of browsers that do not understand the character set tag in the HTTP header.s
Meta character set
Choose one:
Yes to add the character set to the <META> tag of an HTML page. This option lets you save the character set information when you save an HTML file on a server or on your hard disk.
No (default) to exclude she character set from the <META> tag of an HTML page.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
3. In the fields that display the character set group names, select one of the available choices for character set mapping.
4. Save the document.n
324838681629232756
Character sets for Web server pages
The default character set governs the available choices for character set mapping. If a character set group has mapping choices, you also must select which character set to use.
Character set groups
,&vHU
Mapping choicesi
Western
This set includes Windows and ANSI characters.
,&vHU
US-ASCII
ISO-8859-1 (the default)
ISO-8859-15
Windows-1252
Central European
,&vHU
ISO-8859-2
Windows 1250 (the default)
Japanese
,&vHU
SJIS (the default)
JIS(ISO-2022-JP)
EUC-JP
Traditional Chinese
,&vHU
Big5 (the default)
EUC-TW
Simplified Chinese
,&vHU
Korean
,&vHU
KSC5601(EUC)
Cyrillic
,&vHU
ISO-8859-5
Windows-1251
KOC8-R (the default)
Greek
,&vHU
ISO-8859-7
Windows-1253 (the default)
TurkishS
,&vHU
ISO-8859-9
Windows-1254 (the default)
Thai
,&vHU
Windows-874i
Baltic
,&vHU
Windows-1257
Arabic
,&vHU
Windows-1256 (the decault)
ISO-8859-6
Hebrew
,&vHU
ISO-8859-8 (the default)
Windows-1255
Vietnamese
,&vHU
Windows-1258
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing Web server display
Click here
e generated if the probe fails
Create a new notification profile for this event
Click this button to use the Event Notification Wizard to create a new notification profile for this event
Enablement
Choose "Disable the probe" to disable this probe; you can re-enable it at any time
head titce;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
&Arial
The following is a Server document for a Web server. Browser users enter www.acme.com to access the server, which is the name specified in the server operating system's TCP/IP stack.
7'9P&
O7LvO
H_OVERVIEW
$Fonts
H_OVERVIEW
23 Setting
ageMail
_ADMINISTRATOR_S
eStepsH_TOOLS_FO
tering the Domin
OVERVIEW
PrintD
H_ABOUT_ADMINIST
erver you want t
to access the s
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino Web server
Click here
&Arial
124003792029238606
Allow Anonymous Access
Allow Anonymous Access lets Web users access a Web site without a user name or password. IIS always maps anonymous Web users to a specific NT anonymous user account, which you can configure. If Allow Anonymous Access is the only IIS authentication method enabled, IIS does not use any user credentials -- that is, a user name and password -- sent by zhe browser for authentication, but passes the credentials to Domino. When an anonymous user requests a secure Domino Web page, Domino returns the HTTP "Unauthorized" error 401 to IIS. When the user supplies credentials, Domino authenticates the user using the same process as the native Domino HTTP service.
For information, see C
Click here
Name-and-password authentication for Internet/intranet clients
Click here
Allow Anonymous Access uzes the following guidelines:
The Web user does not need to be a registered NT user.
If you want a user to access secure resources, the Web user must be a registered Domino user and the user must have an Internet password.
Because IIS always considers the user to be anonymous, IIS does not set up the CGI variables AUTH_TYPE and REMOTE_USER.
124003792029238607
Basic Authentication
When using Basic Authentication, IIS verifiez the user credentials the browser sends as a valid NT user account. If Basic Authentication is the only IIS authentication method enabled, IIS requires all browser requests to have credentials -- anonymous access is not allowed. Whenever a user sends a Domino request, IIS automatically passes the user name to Domino. Domino then authenticates the user by verifying the user name using the same process as the native Domino HTTP service. Note that when using Basic Authentication, IIS validates the password sejt from the browser using the NT account password; Domino for IIS does not use the Internet password stored in the user's Person document.
Basic Authentication uses the following guidelines:
Anonymous access is not allowed.
The Web user must be a registered NT user.
The Web user must be a registered Domino user.
Domino does not use the user's Internet password.
124003792029238608
Allow Anonymous Access and Basic*Authentication
You can enable both Allow Anonymous Access and Basic Authentication to let both anonymous users access non-secure resources and users with credentials to access secure resources.
Allow Anonymous Access and Basic Authentication use the following guidelines:
Anonymous access is allowed for non-secure IIS and Domino requests.
If the user provides credentials, IIS and Domino authenticate the user using Basic Authentication.
124003792029238609
Windows NT Challenge/Response
Windows NT Challenge/Response, also called NTLM, is a Microsoft-specific protocol supported by Internet Explorer (IE). When a Web user makes a request to the site, IE automatically sends to IIS the user's current NT logon account name. IIS verifies the name against the NT registry on the IIS server. When a user makes a Domino request, IIS passes to Domino the user's NT name and Domino validates the name using the same process as the*native HTTP service.
NT account names use the form domain\username or machinename\username -- for example, SALES\JSmith. For Domino to authenticate a Web user using NT Challenge/Response, the user's NT name must be registered in Domino. If Domino is using Person documents in the Domino Directory to authenticate users, the documents must contain NT account names as aliases. For example, if Joe Smith has a Notes ID in the "CorpSales" domain and an NT user account in the "SALES" NT domain, the Uzer name field in Joe Smith's Person document needs to contain:
Joe Smith/CorpSales
SALES\JSmith
This allows Domino to authenticate the NT user SALES\JSmith as the Domino user Joe Smith/CorpSales.
Domino does not use the Internet password. IIS passes only the NT account name to Domino and Domino trusts that IIS verified the user's authenticity.
NT Challenge/Response uses the following guidelines:
When NT Challenge/Response is the only authejtication method enabled, only IE users can access the Web site.
Anonymous access is not possible since IE automatically sends the user's NT account name on every request.
The Web user must be a registered NT user.
You need to add the user's NT account name to the user's Person document in Domino.
Domino does not use the Internet password.
124003792029238610
Windows NT Challenge/Response and Basic Authentication
Jf you enable both NT Challenge/Response and Basic Authentication, users who do not use IE can access the site. IE always authenticates using NT Challenge/Response. Other browsers authenticate using Basic Authentication.
124003792029238611
Allow Anonymous Access, Basic Authentication, and Windows NT Challenge/ResponseA
If you enable these three authentication methods, then anonymous access is allowed for non-secure requests, IE users authenticate using NT Challenge*Response, and other browsers authenticate using Basic Authentication.
124003792029238612
If you enable SSL on a Web server, IIS handles the actual SSL connection. However, if a Web user provides a client certificate, IIS passes the certificate to Domino and Domino uses the certificate to authenticate the user.
See Also
Click here
Setting up security for Domino for Microsoft IIS
Click here
&Arial
To do this
2&F:U
Perform this task
Start the Web Navigator manually
2&F:U
Enter
joad web
at the console.
Start the Web Navigator automatically when you start Domino
2&F:U
Edit the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file to include the command
Stop the Web Navigator
2&F:U
Enter
tell web
quit
at the console.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Web Navigator serverh
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
ServerTasks
Click here
&Arial
You can set up the Web Navigator to connect to the Internet through a proxy server instead of using an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to connect directly to the Internet. If you don't specify a proxy, you must use a direct Internet connection to access the Internet.
1. Make sure that:
The proxy is set up to connect to the Internet.
The Web Navigator program is running on the server.
2. From the Domino Administrator, cljck the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the Web Navigator server.
3. Click the Ports - Proxies tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
HTTP proxy
The name or IP address of the proxy and the port to access HTTP pages.
FTP proxy
The name or IP address of the proxy and the port to access FTP pages.
Gopher proxy
The name or IP address of the proxy and the port to access Gopher pages.
SSL Security proxy
The name or IP address of the proxy and the port you want to go through for pages on Internet servers that use SSL.
SOCKs proxya
The name or IP address of the proxy and the port.
If you enter a name or IP address in both the SSL Security proxy and SOCKs proxy fields, Domino uses the SSL Security proxy.
If you enter a name or IP address in both the HTTP proxy and SOCKs proxy fields, Domino uses the SOCKs proxy.
No proxy for these hosts and domains
The names of the hosts and domains you want to access without going through the proxy. You can bypass the proxy to access certain domains on the Internet or to access your internal intranet domain.
Do not enter the IP address in this field; you must use the name. Separate multiple entries with commas or returns. You can use wildcard (*) characters -- for example, *.lotus.com or www.*.com.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
Do not enter a value in the HTTP Tunnel field. This field is used to send Notes and Domino remote procedure calls (RPC). Notes RPC is the architectural layer of Notes and Domino that lets you use Notes and Domino services, such as replication and mail. The Web Navigator does not use RPC for communication.
4. Complete the procedure "
Click here
Editing the Server document jor the Web Navigator."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Firewalls
Click here
Click here
Setting up a Web Navigator server
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure that you already set up the connection between the server and the Internet. If necessary,
Click here
use a proxy to connect the server to the Internez.
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the Web Navigator server.
3. On the Basics tab in the Server Location Information section, complete this field, and then save the document:
Fielde
Enter
InterNotes server
The hierarchical name of the serzer running the Web Navigator. This is the default server to use if the InterNotes server field in the user's location document is blank.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Complete the procedure
Click here
"Setting up users to use the Web Navigator."
Click here
5. Restart the Web Navigator server task on the server.o
See Alzo
Click here
Setting up a Web Navigator serverh
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure that you already
Click here
edited the Server document
Click here
for the Web Navigator server.
2. On each user's machine, choose File - Mobile - Edit Current Location to edit the Location document in the Personal Address Book and specify the Web Navigator as the Internet browser.
3. Click the Internet browser tab and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Internet browser
Notes
Retrieve/open pages
Choose one:b
From InterNotes server to use the Web Navigator server specified in the InterNotes server field in the Location document to retrieve pages. If the InterNotes server field is blank, Domino uses the server specified in the Server document to retrieve pages.
No retrievals to open pages in the Web Navigator database on the server specified in the Location document or in the server document. This option prevents users from retrieving new pages.
head title:Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Click the Servers tab and complete this field:
Field
Enter
InterNotes server
The hierarchical name of the server running the Web Navigator. The server you specify in this field takes precedence over the server specified in the Server document.
jead title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
33287164829232939
To allow users to access private Web pages
When users fill out forms on the Web or pages from Internet servers to which users authenticate, the Web Navigator encrypts those pages with the user's public key and stores the pages in private folders in the Web Navigator database.
To ensure that the Web Navigator can encrypt these privaze pages, be sure that users' public keys exist in the Person documents in the Domino Directory on the server. Domino automatically adds the user's public key to the Person document when you register the user.@
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Web Navigator server
Click here
&Arial
You can specify the number of users who can use the Web Navigator to retrieve pages concurrently. If users start more concurrent Web retrievals than allowed, Jomino queues them and starts them as soon as it can. Increasing the number of users who can retrieve pages improves response time, but increases the server load.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the Web Navigator server.
2. Click the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Field
EnterK
Concurrent retrievers
The number you enter depends on the system configuration for your server. If user access is slow because the number of users specified in this field is less than the number of users attempting to retrieve pages from the Internet, increase the number.
Default is 25.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Jlso
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator
Click here
&Arial
You can control the Web sites that users access. For example, you might want to prevent users from browsing sites that are not work-related or that contain questionable content.
When you specify access settings, keep these tips in mind:
Use a Web zite name rather than an IP address. Entering an IP address forces the Web Navigator to take extra steps to perform a Domain Name System (DNS) lookup. If the DNS cannot resolve an IP address, access to that site is denied.
A more specific reference overrides a less specific reference. For example, if you enter www.*.com in the Deny access field and enter www.ibm.com in the Allow access field, users can access www.ibm.com but cannot access sites with names such as www.lotus.com.
Jf you enter an identical reference in both the Allow and Deny access fields, the Allow access entry overrides the Deny access entry.
There is an implied [*] in the "Allow access to these Internet sites" field at all times. This [*] allows access to all sites by default, unless you enter settings in the "Deny access to these Internet sites" field to override this default.
267501008029232771
To control access to Web sites
1. From the Domino Administrjtor, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the Web Navigator server.
2. Click the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Deny access to these Internet sites
One or more of the following, separatej by commas or spaces:
A DNS name -- for example, www.lotus.com
An IP address -- for example, 205.159.212.10
A DNS name or IP address with a wildcard (*) -- for example, www.*.com. You can use only one wildcard per entry -- for example, you cannot enter w*.*.com.
Allow access to these Internet sites
Same*as above.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See
Click here
"Examples of c
ontrolling access to Web sites."
Click here
367501958429207597
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator
Click here
&Arial
This table contains examples of using the "Allow access to these Internet sites" and "Deny access to these Internet sites" fields to control user access*to Web sites. [*] indicates an implied wildcard, which allows access to all sites unless settings in the "Deny access to these Internet sites" override the default.
"Allow access to these Internet sites" field
"Deny access to these Internet sites" field
Users can access these sites
<blank>
All sites
No sites
www.lotus.com, www.ibm.com
Only www.lotus.com and www.ibm.com
www.ibm.comr
All sites except www.ibm.com
www.ibm.comb
<blank>
All sites
www.ibm.com
www.ibm.comr
All sites
www.*.com
www.ibm.comg
All sites except www.ibm.com
www.*.com
*.com
www.ibm.jom
All sites except www.ibm.com and all sites that end with .com and www.ibm.com. In addition, users have access to www.*.com.
*.ibm.com
All sites except those that end with ibm.com
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Cojtrolling access to Web sites
Click here
&Arial
You can determine which Internet services users can access. The Web Navigator supports HTTP, FTP, HTTPS, Gopher, and Finger.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the Web Navigator server.
2. Click the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Field
Select
Services
One or more of the Internet services provided. The default is HTTP, FTP, and Gopher.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator
Click here
e the Web server log, you can use Notes features to analyze the results.
See Also
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
reated the replica could populate it.
For information on creating replicas on Notes clients, see Notes 5 Help.
For information on the Administration Process, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
&Arial
If users are accessing Web sites that are secured by SSL, you must set up the Web Navigator to retrieve pages on these sites. The Web Navigator server does not need to use SSL in order to retrieve pages from a Web site that uses SSL.
To set up the Web Navigator server for SSL, do the following:
Store the Web site's SSL certificate in the Domino Directory on the Web Navigator server
Enable the HTTPS protocol on the Web Navigator server as an Internet service
For more information on SSL, see
Click here
SSL security
Click here
The Web Navigator supports sites that have SSL certificates issued by the RSA Certificate Authority (CA), so you do not need to obtain the Web site's SSL certificate if it was issued by the RSA CA. If the Web site does not have a certificate issued by the RSA CA, you must obtain the Web si{e's certificate and add it to the Domino Directory on the Web Navigator server. You should obtain the certificate from a secure location to ensure that the certificate you receive is valid. This creates an optimally secure environment by allowing access only to servers with which you share a valid certificate.
Although not recommended, you can set up Web Navigator to add the Web site certificate automatically to the Domino Directory. Set up this way, the Web Navigator allows users to access pakes on any Web site that uses SSL, even if the Domino Directory does not already contain the certificate. This allows easy access for users, but compromises the security of the data sent by users, since the server does not verify the identity of the remote server before allowing the user to access it.
367501958429207597
To add specific certificates
1. Identify the certificate required by the secured Web site by browsing to the site and obtaining the certificate+name.
2. Use a Notes workstation to
Click here
merge the certificate for the CA into the Domino Directory
Click here
3. On the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab of the Server document, select HTTPS in the Services field.
367501958429207598
To add certificates automatically
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the Web Navigatkr server.
2. Click the Ports - Internet Ports tab and complete this field:
Fieldi
Enter
Accept SSL site certificates
Choose Yes.c
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
3. Click the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab, complete this field, and then save the document;
Field
Enter
Services
Choose HTTPS.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
367501958429207600
To view certificates
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and choose Miscellaneous - Certificates.
2. Look at+the Internet Cross Certificates category.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator
Click here
&Arial
When users click a mailto URL on a Web page, Domino opens a new mail message and enters the Internet address (user@company.com) in the To: field. If you use the Lotus SMTP Mail Gateway, users must append the foreign domain of the SMTP Gateway for each Internet address -- for example, user@kompany.com@foreigndomain. So that users don't need to specify the foreign domain each time, you can specify the foreign domain of the gateway.r
1. Make sure that users' Notes workstations are already set up to use Notes mail.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the Web Navigator server.
3. Click the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Fielde
Enter
SMTP Domain
The name of the foreign domain of the SMTP mail gateway
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigatorn
Click here
Click here
Setting up+Notes users
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
By default, the Web Navigator database uses a view named ($All) to display information about each page that users retrieve. However, this view does not display the name of the user who retrieved a particular page.
To display the name of the user who retrieved a page, the Web Navigator template provides a view titled ($All with Authors). The name displays next to the title of the Web page. To use this as the default view, rename it to ($All) so that+the references to ($All) in the navigators work.
1. Make sure you have Designer access in the ACL of the Web Navigator template (PUBWEB50.NTF) on the server.
2. Start the Domino Designer, open the Web Navigator template, and select the ($All) view.
3. Choose Edit - Copy and then choose Edit - Paste to paste the "Copy of ($All)" view into the template.
4. Delete the ($All) view.
5. Open the ($All with Authors) view.
;. Choose Design - View Properties and rename the view to ($All).
7. On the Options tab, select "Default when database is first opened" to make this view the default.
8. Close and save your changes.
9. Replace the design of the Web Navigator database.
10. Make sure you have the WebMaster role in the ACL of the Web Navigator database.
11. Select the Web Navigator database using a network connection to the server.
12. Chokse View - Go to and select All Documents.
13. Choose Actions - Administration, and select Save author Information.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
Web page authors use HTML tags to specify elements of a Web page. The Web Navigator interprets these tags to determine how to display these elements. You can customize the default appearance of many elements on retrieved Web pages.e
The Web Navigator supports Ckurier, Helvetica, and Times fonts.
1. Make sure you have the WebMaster role in the ACL of the Web Navigator database.
2. Using the Notes client, open the Web Navigator database using a network connection to the server.
3. Choose View - Go to and select All Documents.
4. Choose Actions - Administration, and then in the HTML Preferences section, customize any of these settings:
Element
Field
&'[#U
Default
URL linksh
Anchors
&'[#U
Underline/Blue
Font and size of elements not defined in other fields in the HTML Preferences section
Body Text
&'[#U
Times 11-point
Font for text in the <PLAINTEXT>, <PRE>, and <EXAMPLE> tagst
Plain
&'[#U
Courier
The font size is defined by the Body Text field.
Font for text in the <CODE>, <SAMPLE>, <KBD>, and <TT> tags
Fixed
&'[#U
CourierL
The font size is defined by the Body Text field.
Font for text in the <LISTING> tag
ListingS
&'[#U
Courier
The font size is defined by the Body Text field.
Font for text in the <ADDRESS> tag
Address
&'[#U
Times
The fokt size is defined by the Body Text field.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
You can save and view the HTML source for a Web page. Domino saves the source in the Body field in the Web Navigator database.
This setting affects+all pages retrieved by the Web Navigator server.
367501958429207597
To save HTML sources
1. Make sure you have the WebMaster role in the ACL of the Web Navigator database.
2. Using the Notes client, select the Web Navigator database using a network connection to the server.
3. Choose View - Go to, and then select All Documents.
4. Choose Actions - Administration.t
5. In the HTML Save Options field, chokse one of the following:
Save as Rich Text only to store the rich text in the document in a Body field
Save as Rich Text and HTML to create separate Body fields for the rich text and HTML tags
Save as MIME only to store the document using MIME type format in a Body field
367501958429207598
To view HTML sources
1. Open the document in the Web Navigator database.
2. Choose View - Show - HTML Source.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
367501958429207597
To rename the Web Navigator database
By default, Domino names the Web Navigator database WEB.NSF. You can use another name if necessary.
1. Exit Domino and use the operating system to rename the database file name.
2. Start Domino.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Serve{ document for the Web Navigator server.
4. Click the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Fieldr
Enter
Web Navigator database
The new file name of the Web Navigator database
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
367551958429207598
To move the Web Navigator database
By default, Domino looks for the Web Navigator database in the data directory on the Web Navigator server. You can move the Web Navigator database to somewhere other than the data directory, for example, to consolidate databases in a subdirectory.
1. Copy the Web Navigator database to a new subdirectory.
2. Delete the original Web Navigator database in the data directory.
3.
Click here
Create a database link
Click here
to the new database. You must create a database link using the file name specified in the Web Navigator database field in the Server document for the Web Navigator server.
4. Restart the server.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
The Web Navigator database includes three agents -- Purge, Refresh, and Avkraging -- that help you manage the database. Before you use the agents, set up the preferences for them in the Server document for the server on which the Web Navigator runs. You can specify agent security, execution time, and schedule.
The options you set in the Server document affect all agents that run on the server.
367551958429207597
To specify agent security
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Ser{er document for the Web Navigator server.
2. Click the Security tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Kield
Enter
Run restricted LotusScript/Java agents
Your user name so that you can run agents that use a subset of the LotusScript features and run agents created with Java
[un unrestricted LotusScript/Java agents
Your user name so that you can run agents with the full set of LotusScript features and run agents created with Java
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
367551958429207598
To specify agent execution options
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the+Web Navigator server.
2. Click the Server Tasks - Agent Manager tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Kield
Enter
Max LotusScript/Java execution time
360; the default is 10
This field controls the time in minutes that the LotusScript agent has to run. Also controls execution time of agents created with Java.
Max % busy before delay
80; the default is 50
This field controls the percentage of time the agent manager can spend running agents. The time is a percentage of the Start and End times specified in the Nighttime parameters section.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
367551958429207599
To specify tke agent schedule
The Web Navigator agents run at default times, but you can reschedule them. By default, the Purge agent runs at 1 AM; the Refesh agent runs at 3 AM; and the Averaging agent runs at 12 AM..
1. Start the Domino Designer and select the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF).
2. Open the agent that you want to reschedule.
3. Select a value in the "When should this agent run" field.
4. Click Schedule to specify the starting tike for the agent.
5. Save the document.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
As users open Web pages, the Web Navigator database gets larger. To manage the database, use the Purge agent.
The Purge agent uses settings in the Web Navigator Administration document, which is in the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF), to determine what and how much to purge. Each night at 1 AM, the Purge agent goes through the databa{e three times, each time purging documents according to the criteria you specify. If the database size you specify is obtained after any of the three passes, the Purge agent stops and queues to run the following night.
The Purge agent purges the database in three passes:
First pass -- Checks the Expired header on each Web page. If the Web page has expired, deletes that page.
Second pass -- Checks the document creation date on each Web page and deletes pages older thkn the date you specify.
Third pass -- Checks for pages that are larger than the size you specify, and then deletes them.
367551958429207597
To specify purge criteria
1. Make sure that you have already set up security for Web Navigator agents and that you have the WebMaster role in the ACL of the Web Navigator database.
2. Using the Notes client, select the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF) using a network connection to the server.
3. Choose View - Go to, and then select All Documents.
4. Choose Actions - Administration, edit any of the following fields, and then save the document:
Field
Entere
Maximum database size
The maximum size of the Web Navigator database
The default is 500 MB.
Purge agent action
One of these methods to use when purging documents:
Delete page to delete pages permanently from the database.
Reduce page to delete the contents of the page, but saves the URL so you still see the page in the database views.
Delete page is the default.
Purge to what % of maximum size
A percentage of the maximum database size setting that the Purge agent should reach before stopping.
The default is 60%.
Purge documents older than
When to delete documents based on the number of days they have been in the database.
The default is 30 days.
Purge documents larger than
When to delete documents based on their size.
The default is 512KB.
Purge Private documents
One of these that determines if the Purge agent deletes documents stored in users' private folders:
Unselected to not purge documents stored in private folders
Selected to purge documents stored ik private folders
Unselected is the default.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
367551958429207598
To enable the Purge agent
The Purge agent is set up to run at 1 AM, but it does not start this schedule until you enable the agent.
1. Make sure you have already
Click here
set up security for Web Navigator agents
Click kere
and that you have the WebMaster role in the ACL of the Web Navigator database.
2. Using a Notes client, select the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF) using a network connection to the server.
3. Choose View - Go to, and then select All Documents.
4. Choose Actions - Administration.t
5. Click the Enable Purge agent button.{
6. Select the name of the server on which the Web Navigator runs in the Choose Server To Run On diklog box, and then save the document.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SMTPSaveImportErrors =
value
Description:
Specifies whether mail message import errors are recorded, as follows:
0 - No messages are recorded.
1 - When an arriving message fails to be written as a note in MAIL.BOX, Domino writes the+data stream to a temporary directory, and logs the name of the file.
2 - All arriving messages have their data streams written to the temporary directory..
Note
This feature can use a great deal of disk space since the saved messages continue to accumulate until you delete them. Also, the content of the messages are accessible to anyone with the privileges to read files in the temporary directory.
Applies to:l
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
163385024029247061
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SMTPStrict821AddressSyntax =
value
Description:
Specifies whether the SMTP task requires addresses that appear in MAIL FROM commands or RCPT TO commands be properly formed according to the 821 standard (must contain <>):
0 - 821 standard is not enforced
1 - 821 standard is enforced
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
ise saving through your operating system, the same name as a file that's already in the destination directkry.
323461689629254901
What you can do
Click Yes or No.
Yes - Detaches or saves the file, overwriting the existing file.
No - Does not detach or save the file, and returns to the dialog box that was displayed.
If you click No, you can change the name of the file that's already in your destination directory so you don't overwrite it, then detach or save the file; or, you can type a different name for the file you're detaching+or saving.
See Also
Click here
Attaching files to a Notes document
Click here
` fU)
&Arial
Regularly refresh pages to update the content.
367581958429207597
To update pages when users retrieve pages
Domino stores retrieved Web pages in the Web Navigator database. You can specify how often you want Domino to go to the Web server and check if the page has changed when users request the page subsequent times.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the Web Navigator server.
2. Click the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab, complete this field( and then save the document:
Field
Entera
Update cache
Choose one:
Never (default) to perform no verifications
Once per session to check only the first time the user accesses the page during a sesshon
Every time to check each time the user opens a page already in the database
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
367551958429207598
To use the Refresh agent to update pages
To keep the most up-to-date pages in the Web Navigator database, use the Refresh agent, which compares the date of each Web page inside the database with the date of the Web page on the server. Hf the Web page on the server is newer, the Refresh agent replaces the Web page in the Web Navigator database. By refreshing out-of-date pages, the Refresh agent ensures that users can quickly access the latest version of a page.7
The Refresh agent refreshes only HTTP pages. It does not refresh FTP pages, Gopher pages, or private pages stored in a user's private folder in the database. The Refresh agent refreshes by comparing the date on the Web page in the database with the current date. If thh date on the page stored on the server is newer than the date on the Web page in the Web Navigator database or if the page on the server does not have a date, the Web page is refreshed.
The Refresh agent is set up to run at 3 AM, but it does not start this schedule until you enable the agent.
1. Make sure you have already
Click here
set up security for Web Navigator agents
Click here
and that you have the WebMaster role in the ACL of xhe Web Navigator database.
2. Using a Notes client, select the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF) using a network connection to the server.
3. Choose View - Go to, and then select All Documents.
4. Choose Actions - Administration.
5. Click the Enable Refresh agent button.
6. Select the name of the server on which the Web Navigator runs in the "Choose Server To Run On" dialog box, and then save the document.
Seh Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
The Averaging agent collects ratings that users assign to Web pages and calculates the rating of pages in the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF). The pages appear in the Recommended by Top Ratings view in the database. The Averaging agent also calculates the average rating for pages that have multiple ratings from different users.
The Averaging agent is set up to run at 12 AM,(but it does not start this schedule until you enable the agent.
1. Start the Domino Designer and open the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF).
2. Select the Averaging agent and choose Actions - Enable.
3. Choose the Web Navigator server to run the agent.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino server with the NNTP service
Click here
Click here
Homino server commands
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands from the console
Click here
Click here
ServerTasks
Click here
Click here
NOTES.INI Settings
Click here
&Arial
A Domino server with the NNTP service can initiate(a newsfeed or accept a newsfeed that a remote server with NNTP initiates. Newsfeeds can occur in one direction or two directions -- that is, the Domino server can push articles to the remote server, pull articles from it, or do both. The first time the Domino server pulls newsgroup articles, the initial transfer includes, by default, only new articles that were posted within the past three days.
A Connection document contains server and domain information that is used when connecting a server(for mail routing and replication. For example, in a Connection document you specify the names of the newsgroups from which you receive newsfeeds.
You can specify settings for all NNTP newsfeeds between the Domino server with the NNTP service and other servers with NNTP, as well as specifying additional options in News/NNTP Connection documents on a per-newsfeed basis.
You also need to make sure that the NNTP service is enabled in the Server document.e
42836683629224260T
To set up the NNTP service in a Server documentN
1. From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration - Server - All Server documents.
2. Select the server whose document you want to open. Click Edit Server.
3. Click Internet Protocols - NNTP tab.v
4. Complete these Basic Parameters and Newsfeed Parameters fields:
Field
Enter
NNTP Admhnistrator's name
The name of the NNTP administrator. By default, this user is assigned Manager access in the ACL of newsgroup databases that this NNTP server creates.
Default access
Choose one:
Grant (default)
Deny
Exceptions to default access
The IP addresses of hosts that are not allowed access. By default, this field is blank.
Allow posting
Choose one:
Yes (default) to allow clients to receive newsfeeds
No to prevent clients from receiving newsfeeds
Maximum post size
Maximum size of articles that the newsfeed posts. The default is 1024KB.
Maximum connection size
Maximum connection size for a newsfeed. The default is 100MB.
Maximum connections
Maximum number of simultaneous connections. The default is 5.
5. Complete these News Reader Parameter fields and then save and close the Server document:
Fielde
Enterr
Allow Postingf
Choose one:
Yes (default) to allow newsreader clients to posx articles
No to prevent all newsreader clients from posting articles
Maximum post size
Maximum size for an article (in kilobytes) that a newsreader client can post to a newsgroup. The default is 1024KB.
Maximum connection size
Maximum size allowed for combined articles in a client session. The default is 18MB.
Connection timeout
Length of time in seconds for the Domino NNTP server to keep an idle newsreader client session open. The default is 600 seconds (10 minutes).
Maximum connections
Maximum number of simultaneous newsreader client connections allowed. The default is 20.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino server with the NNTP service
Click here
&Arial
You can control which hosts, or external servers with the NNTP service, may access the Domino server running the NNTP service. If you want to allow the default access to the majority of hosts that your server connects with, use this proceduxe to enter the IP addresses of those hosts you do
want to access the server.
1. From the Domino Administrator, select Configuration - Server - All Server documents.
2. Select the server document you want to open. Click Edit Server.
3. Click the Internet Protocols - NNTP tab.
4. Complete these fields, and then save the document.
Field
Enter
Default access
Choose one:
Grant (default)l
Deny
Exceptions to default access
The IP addresses of hosts that are not allowed default access. By default, this field is blank.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
174018608029248646
Preventing all remote NNTP servers from pulling articles
To prevent all remote NNTP servers from pulling new articles from your servers, enter this setting in the NOTES.INI file:e
NNTP_Prohibit_NEWNEWS_Command=1
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Clhck here
Click here
NNTP_Prohibit_NEWNEWS_Commando
Click here
&Arial
A Connection document for any server from which you pull (accept) newsfeeds. If you only receive newsfeeds, you will only need this one type of Connection document for each server you connect to for newsfeeds.o
A Connection document for any server that you push newsfeeds to, as well as a Connection(document for any server that you pull (accept) newsfeeds from. In most cases, you'll be pushing and pulling newsfeeds. This involves a LAN connection, therefore, you'll be setting up a Connection document for the LAN connection..
A Connection document for any server that you "dial-up" to -- that is, any server with which you have a RAS or Network Dial-Up connection. In this case, you will also need a Connection document for each server from which you are pulling newsfeeds, and a Connection docxment for each server to which you are pushing newsfeeds.a
For more information, see "g
Click here
To connect to a remote server that is running the NNTP service
To create a Connection document for the server that accepts newsfeeds
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Cohfiguration tab.
2. Select Server - Connections.
3. Do one of these:
To create a connection document, click Add Connection.
To edit a connection document, select the server for which you are editing a Connection document, and click Edit Connection.
4. On the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Fieldn
Enter
Connection type
Select News/NNTP Feed
Source Server
The Domino server that is running the NNTP service -- for example, Server 1/Acme -- or the IP address
Connect via
Select Direct connection
Destination server
The hully-qualified Internet host name -- for example, news.provider.com -- or the IP address of the remote Domino server with NNTP
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click the NNTP tab, and then complete these fields:
Field
Enter
News feed type
Select Accept to allow the
remote
server with NNTP to initiate a connection to the Domino server with NNTP and send new articles
Authentication
Choose one:
None (default)
Password - if the connection requires a name and password
Password chn be used with Accept, but it must be in keeping with the authentication option you select in the Port - Internet Port - News tab on the Server document.
Username
Login name for the server that you will push or pull articles to or from.
Password
Password for the server that you will push or pull articles to or from.
Channel encryption
Choose one:
None (default)
SSL - When the remote server with the NNTP service requires that the Domino server with NNTP use SSL
SSL can be used with Accept, but the SSL port must be Enabled on the Port - Internet Port - News tab on the Server document.
Create newsgroups
Choose one:
Automatic (default) to create a newsgroup for each group that is included in this newsfeed and that does not yet exist on the server
Manual to manually create all newsgroups on the server
Newsgroup subdirectory
The name of the subdirectory that will store newsgroups created during a newsfeed; the default is nntp.
Connection timeout
The maximum time, in minutes, that a newsfeed has to complete; the default is 0 minutes.
Newsgroups
The names of any newsgroups that you will pull or push articles to or from.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Complete the remaining fields as you would for hny Connection document, and then save the document.
93300243229228335
To create a Connection document for the Network Dialup connection
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select Server Configuration - Connections.
3. Select the server for which you are creating or editing a Connection document.
4. Click either Add Connection to create a new Connection document, or click Edit Connectihn to edit an existing Connection document.
5. On the Basics tab, in the "Connection type" field, choose Network Dialup.
6. Complete the remaining fields on the Basics tab as you would for any Connection document.
7. Click the Dial Up tab.
8. In the "Service type" field, choose Microsoft Dial-up Networking.
9. Complete the remaining fields as you would for any Connection document, and then save the document.
93300243229228336
To create a Connection document for the LAN connection
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select Server Configuration - Connections.
3. Select the server for which you are creating or editing a Connection document.
4. Click either Add Connection to create a new Connection document, or click Edit Connection to edit an existing Connection document.
5. On the Basics tab, comphete these fields:
Field
Enter
Connection type
Select News/NNTP Feed
Connect via
Select Direct connection
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Click the NNTP tab.
( 7. Choose one of these Connection types:
Pull to connect to a remote server with the NNTP service and request new articles from that server
Push to connect to a remote server with the NNTP service and send (push) the new articles to that server
Pull-Push to connect to a remote server with the NNTP service and exchange new articles with that server
8. Complete the remaining fields on the Basics tab as you would for any Connection document.
9. Click the Schedule tab.
10. Verify that the connection schedule is Enabled.
11. Complete the remaining fields as you would for any Connection document.
12. Save the document.
113067920029232927
To connect to a remote server that is running the NNTP service
You can use remote LAN service software to connect to an intermediate server which in turn connects to a remote server that runs the NNTP service.
Note
If you run the Domino server with the NNTP service on a platform other than Windows NT or Windows 95, you cannot configure the server for dial-up NNTP connections through Domino.
1. Install the Dial-up networking software. Run the Dial-up networking software, which is also known as Remote Access Service (RAS) client software, on the computer that runs the local server with the NNTP service.
2. Configure a modem or ISDN terminal adapter.
3. Create a Connection document to connect to the server running the LAN service software. Note that you must create a total of three Connection documents.
See Also
Click here
Server-to-server connections
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Notes Direct Dialup (dialup modem) server
Click here
Click here
Connecting a server to a Network Dhalup server
Click here
Click here
Remote access connections
Click here
Click here
Setting up servers to use modems
Click here
&Arial
TCP/IP port 119 and SSL port 563 are enabled by default for the NNTP service. Use this procedure only if yhu use a non-standard TCP/IP port or want to enable the SSL port, which is disabled by default. If you are using an SSL connection, the secured port must be 563.
These security settings apply to newsreader clients and remote servers with NNTP that connect to the Domino server with the NNTP service, to pull newsgroup articles from or push articles to it.e
Note
If you specify a port other than 119 as the TCP/IP port, enter the new port number in the Servhr document for that server.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Select Server - All Server Documents.
3. Select the server whose server document you are editing.a
4. Click the Ports - Internet Ports - News tab, and then click Edit Server.
5. Complete these fields, and then save the document:
FieldC
Entere
TCP/IP port number
The port number
TCP/IP port status
Select Enabled
Name and PasswordC
Select Yes to allow newsreader clients and remote NNTP servers to use basic password authentication when connecting to the Domino server with the NNTP service. This field is used with SSL security.
Anonymous
Select Yes to allow newsreader clients and remote servers with NNTP to connect to the Domino server with the NNTP service anonymously using TCP/IP. All connections to newsgroups are given according to the level of access allowed by anonymous users. This field is used with SSL security.
SSL port number
6. Enter the NNTP server so that the settings take effect.
See Also
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Configuring a port for SSL
Click here
Click here
Setting up a Domino server with the NNTP service
Click here
PURSAFO
$INFO
$$ScriptName
$BODY
? /L3
&Arial
276420361629214455
Private newsgroups and public USENET ngwsgroups
A Domino server with the NNTP service lets users participate in private discussion groups or public USENET newsgroups. Each newsgroup is stored as a Domino database. The naming convention for the database is as follows:
ND000000.NSF
where 0 is a numeric character that is automatically assigned when the database is created. The characters ND are assigned as the first two characters of each database name. The first database is assigned the number 1 preceded bw 5 zeros, the second is assigned the number 2, and so forth.
276420361629214456
Private newsgroups
Using the NNTP Discussion template (NNTPDI50.NTF), you can create private newsgroups that are not part of the USENET system for use within your company or for a wider audience outside of your company, that spans the Internet. Private newsgroups let you restrict access to a discussion. From the Domino Directory, select the names of those users who may access the privgte newsgroup. Defining user access is part of creating the Database profile for the newsgroup.
If you set up several Domino servers with NNTP within your organization, use replication to exchange newly posted newsgroup articles among them. Using replication, you can ensure that design elements and access control lists (ACLs) remain synchronized.
Do not distribute private newsgroups to USENET NNTP servers on the Internet.
276420361629214457
Public ngwsgroups.
When you send an article to a public USENET newsgroup from a Domino NNTP server, the article is sent to your USENET newsfeed provider and then distributed throughout the USENET system. Your article can be duplicated hundreds of times.
276420361629214458
Moderated newsgroups
A moderated newsgroup allows only one person, the moderator, to post articles to the newsgroup. When configuring your Domino server for the NNTP service, you will have thg option of specifying whether you want the Domino NNTP server to automatically create moderated newsgroups with read-only access.
See Also
Click here
Creating and administering newsgroups
Click here
&Arial
The moderator of a newsgroup can accept, reject, or cross-post articles.
223215212829228308
To accept or reject an article
1. From Domino Administrator, select File - Database - Open.
2. Open the newsgroup database'
3. Select the article and click View.
4. Review the article, and then click Accept or Reject.
297414323229228534
To cross-post an article
To post an article from a Notes client or a Web browser to multiple newsgroups on a server with the NNTP service, the Notes client must be connected to that server. Starting the NNTP server task creates the database NNTP Cross Postings (NNTPPOST.NSF) in the data directory. When a Notes client or'a Web browser client posts an article to more than one newsgroup, the NNTP service uses this database to store and then post the article to the newsgroups at a scheduled interval. n
1. From Domino Administrator, select File - Open - Database.
2. Open the newsgroup database.
3. Select the article you want to cross post.
4. Select the NNTPPOST.NSF database, and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Creating and administering newsgroups
Click here
&Arial
The NNTP service can automatically create newsgroups on your Domino server during a newsfeed. You can also use the method described below to create a newsgroup manually. When assigning a newsgroup name, you cannot use spaces, ?, !, [ ], or *. For private newsgroups, you cannot use USENET core hierarchy categories.
USENET uses a hierarchy to organize groups by major topic. Each newsgroup has its own name that is comprised of one or more parts separated by periods. The newsgroup name always begins with the newsgroup hierarchy name. For example, a newsgroup for users who have questions about USENET is called
news.newusers.questions/
where
news
is the hierarchy,
newusers
is the first category, and
questions
is the subcategory.n
The USENET hierarchies are comp, misc, news, rec, sci, soc, talk, humanities, ang alt.
To create a new USENET newsgroup, see the newsgroup called news.announce.news and ask for a request for discussion (RFD).
442816029214417
To create a newsgroups
Before you create a newsgroup, you set up the Database Profile document. In this document, you specify whether a newsgroup is public, private, or private/moderated; and you specify access rights for private newsgroups.
You must save the Dawabase Profile document before you perform the steps to create the newsgroup. Saving the Database Profile document allows the newsgroup to appear to NNTP clients, Notes clients (Release 4.6 and above), and Web browsers.
1. From the Domino Administrator, choose File - Database - New.
2. Complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Server
The name of the server tgat will store the newsgroup
Title
The newsgroup name. If you are creating a private newsgroup, do not begin the name with a USENET hierarchy name.
File Name
The name of the database file that will store the newsgroup. The extension .NSF is appended by default.
Folder
The directory of the newsgroup database. The default is the data directory.
Template
NNTP Discussion 5.0
e;Chapter title;Dhead
3. Click OK. The Database Discussion document appears.
4. Click "click here to open database."
5. Click Edit Database Profile.
7. In the Database Profile document, complete these optional fields, and then save the document.
Field
Enter
Database Profile editors
Names of users who are allowed to modify the Database Profile. The default is the name of the newsgroup creator. Users whose names you enter are assigned Manager access in the dawabase.
Private
Choose one:
Private to create a private newsgroup
Leave blank to create a public newsgroup, and then save and close this document
List of users who can access the database
Choose one:
Entew the name(s) of user(s) who can access the database. These users will be given Author access.
Click to select from a directory, the user(s) who can access the database. Users will be given Author access to the database. To remove user name(s), select the name(s) and click Remove, or to remove all user names, click Remove All.
Moderated-
Choose Moderated to create a moderated, private newsgroup and thgn complete these fields:
Name of moderator - name of the user who posts and removes news articles. This user is assigned Editor access in the database ACL.
E-mail address of Moderator - E-mail address to use to send articles and requests to the newsgroup moderator
If you leave the field blank, Domino creates a private, unmoderated newsgroup.
7. (Optional) To list the database in the database catalog, do the following:
Gpen the Database Properties box.
Click the Design tab, and then choose List in Database Catalog.
332816029214419
Setting up the ACL for a newsgroup
You can use the database ACL to determine the access level that users have to a newsgroup. For example, if you give Internet users access to private newsgroups, set the database ACL for the newsgroup to give Author access to internal users and to give Reader access to Internet users. Then internal users'can post articles in the newsgroups, but Internet users can only read articles.
223215212829228308
Accessing newsgroups that do not allow anonymous access
To access a private newsgroup or any newsgroup that does not allow anonymous access, configure the NNTP newsreader or remote server with the NNTP service to supply a name and password when connecting to the Domino server.
1. From your USENET provider, obtain an active file that lists all newsgroups on the remote server running the NNTP service and indicates whether the newsgroups are moderated or allow posting.
2. Copy this file to the data directory and give it the file name "active." Then when the Domino server with the NNTP service automatically creates a group, the server reads this file to determine whether to create the new newsgroup with read-only default access.
See Also
Click here
Validation and authentication for Notes and Domino
Click here
Click here
Creating and administering newsgroups
Click here
&Arial
Control messages can be used by the administrator of the Domino server with the NNTP service when administering newsgroups. A newsreader client or newsfeed can send control messages to the Domino server to help coordinate administrative functions, such as creating and removing newsgroups and deleting specific articles from newsgrowps. The Domino server with the NNTP service's administrator can then decide whether or not to act according to the instructions in the control message.
All control messages are stored in a unique newsgroup with the prefix "control" -- for example, control.
xxxp
, where
xxx
is the type of control message. These control message groups are created automatically when you start the NNTP service:
Control message
NewsgroupG
Broadcasts
rmgroup
control.rmgroup
Removal of a newsgroup
cancel
control.cancel
Removal of a single article posted in a newsgroup
newgroup
control.newgroup
Creation of a newsgroup
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
If you delete one of these control message groups, it is re-created the next time you restart the NNTP service.
A control message sent from a newsreader client is stored in the corresponding control group if it exists. For example, if a newsreader client deletes an article, the delete message is stored in the control.cancel newsgroup.
You should regularly review control messages received by your Domino server with the NNTP service. To receive automatic e-mail notification when the server receives a control message, you can create an agent.
163770640029218476
To receive control messages
To receive a type of control message -- for example, new group messages -- through a newsfeed, you need to add the control newsgroup name to the Newsgroup field in the Connection document for the newsfeed. For example, to receive new group messages, add control.newgroup to the Newsgroup field in the Connection document for the newsfeed.
392816029214417
To respond to newgroup control messages
When your Domino server with the NNTP service receives a newgroup message and you want to subscribe to that newsgroup, include the name of the newsgroup in the Newsgroups field in the Connection document.
392816029214418
To respond to rmgrgup control messages
When your Domino server with the NNTP service receives a rmgroup message, you might want to manually delete that newsgroup. To use a Notes client to delete a newsgroup, you must have Manager with Delete documents access in the ACL of the newsgroup database.t
See Also
Click here
Creating and administering newsgroups
Click here
&Arial
Managing a newsgroup involves deleting news articles when they are inactive or expired. From a Notes client, you can set up archiving to delete or move (archive) articles. You must have Manager access to the newsgroup database.
81906640029224101
To archive articles
You specify the archive parameters in the Database Properties box. The archive parameters that you set apply only to the articles in the selected datagase.
1. Open the newsgroup database for which you are setting archiving parameters. Choose Files - Database - Open, and then select the database.
2. From Domino Administrator, choose File - Database - Properties.
3. Click Archive Settings.
4. Select any of the following options:.
Setting
Enter
Archive all documents not read or accessed on my local workstation
Select the option and specify the number of days after which unread or unopened documents are to be archived
Archive all documents not modified or updated
Select this option and specify the number of days after which archiving is to occur for documents not modified or updated
Archive all documents marked aw "expired"
Select this option and enter the number of days after which expired documents are to be archived
Archive database
Database path and name in which to store archived documents. To select a drive and directory location for the archive database, click the folder to the right. n
e;Dhead
5. Cligk OK.
442816029214416
To delete articles from a newsgroup
By default, articles in newsgroups that the server created automatically are deleted five days after they are last accessed. Articles marked Expired are deleted five days after the expiration date.
To change these defaults, modify these NOTES.INI settings:
Task
,&\)U
NOTES.INI Setting
Specify the number of days before an inactive article is deleted
,&\)U
NNTP_Delete_Days
Spgcify the number of days before an Expired article is deleted
,&\)U
NNTP_Delete_Days_Expired
288976640029224101
To delete a newsgroup
1. Make sure you have Manager access in the ACL of the newsgroup database.
2. Enter this command at the console:
tell nntp newgroup delete
group_name(s).
where
group_name(s)
is the name of a newsgroup.
You gan use wildcards to indicate more than one newsgroup, and you can use commas to separate names of newsgroups. For example, for
group_name(s)
you can specify rec.skiing or comp.groupware.
See Also
Click here
Creating and administering newsgroupse
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands from the console
Click here
Click here
Editing whe NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
NNTP_Delete_Days
Click here
Click here
NNTP_Delete_Days_Expired
Click here
&Arial
To secure Domino servers, you allow and prevent user and server access. In addition, you restrict the activities that users and servers may perform on the server.
Task
Click here
Allow or deny access to a server
Click here
Specify which Notes users and Domino servers are authorized to access the server.
Click here
Cross-certify Notes user IDs and Domino server and certifier IDs
Click here
Allow Notes users and Domino servers in different hierarchically certified organizations to ascertain the identity of users and servers in other Notes organizations..
Click here
Allow anonymous server access_
Click here
Give server access to Notes users and Domino servers outside of the organization without issuing a cross-certificate. In addition, preserve user anonymity since no user name is recorded -- for example, in the log file (LOG.NSF) or in the User activity dialog box.
Click here
Allow access to create new databases or replicgs
Click here
Allow specified Notes users and Domino servers to create databases and replica databases on the server.
Click here
Control access to a server's network port
Click here
Allow specified Notes users and Domino servers to access the server over a port.
Click here
Encrypt server's network port
Click here
Encrypt data sent from the server's network port to prevent network eavesdropping.
Click here
Password protect the server console
Click here
Prevent unauthorized users from entering commands at the server console.
Click here
Restrict server agents
Click here
Specify which Notes users and Domino servers are allowed to run which kinds of agents on the server.
Click here
Restrict passthru access
Click here
Specify which Notes users and Domino servers can access the server as a passthru server and specify the destinations they may access.
Click here
Restrict server gccess by browser users running Java or Javascript programs
Click here
Specify which Web browser users can use Domino ORBs to run Java or Javascript programs on the server.i
Click here
Restrict access to the Web Administrator
Click here
Specify which Internet/intranet users can use the Web Administrator to administer a server from a browser.
Click here
Restrict Web browser access to the ?OpenServer command
Click here
Specify whether browser users can see a list of all databases on a server.
Click here
Control Web browser access to files on the server's hard drive
Click here
Specify who can access files -- for example, HTML, GIF, or JPEG -- on a server's hard drive.
Click here
Secure the server with SSL
Click here
Set up SSL security for Internet/intranet users to authenticate the server, encrypt data, prevent message tampering, and, optionally, authenticate clients.
Click here
Secure the server with name-and-password authenticationl
Click here
Identify Internet and intranet users accessing the server and control access to applications based on the user name.
Click here
Allow anonymous Internet/Intranet client accessi
Click here
Determine whether Internet/intranet users are allowed to access the server anonymously.
Click here
Use "sessions" with name-and-password authenwication
Click here
Allow Web browser clients to authenticate using session-based name-and-password authentication. Session-based authentication lets you provide a customized log-in page and automatically log users off the server after a specified period of inactivity.
Click here
Authenticate Web clients using a secondary Domino Directory or LDAP directory
Click here
Authenticate Web clients who use name-and-password or SSL client authentication in secondary Domino or LDAP Directories marked as "trusted" by your domain.
Click here
Authenticate Web clients for a specifc realm
Click here
Allow Web users to access a certain drive, directory, or file on a Domino server and prevent Domino from prompting users for a name-and-password for diffewent realms.
Click here
Controlling the level of authentication for Web clients
Click here
Specify how restrictive the server should be when authenticating Web users.
Click here
Locate the server in a secure area
Click here
-- for example, a locked room
Prevent unauthorized access to unencrypted data and werver and certifier IDs that are stored on the server's hard drive.
Click here
Use a firewall to protect access to a server
Click here
Control unauthorized access to a private network from the public Internet.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Planning Domino security
Click here
`&P)L
`&P)L
4[&PWx
&Arial
Restrict access to Domino applications to prevent unauthorized users from gaining access to information.
Task
Use
Click here
Use the ACL to restrict application access
Click here
Control Notes and Internet/intranet user and Domino server access to an application.
Click here
Encrypt applications
Click here
Prevent unauthorized users from accessing an application locally on a server or workstation.
Click here
Sign an application or template
Click here
Identify the creator of an application or template. When a user accesses the application, the signature is checked to determined whether the action is allowed.
For example, on a Domino server the Agent Manager verifies the signature of an agent and checks whether the signer has the rights to perform the action. On a Notes client, the signature is checked against the signer's rights in the workstation ECL.
Click here
Encrypt incoming and outgoing Notes mail
Click here
Ensure that only the intended recipient can read mail.
Click here
Electronically sign mail messages
Click here
Verify that the person who sends the message is the author and that no one has tampered with the data.
head title;Chead;Ckead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Planning Domino security
Click here
&Arial
An application developer can further restrict access to design elements within an application using the Domino Designer. Application dksign security takes effect once users gain access to an application.
For information on each of these tasks, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
Task
Use
Create Read access lists for views
Specify which Notes and Internet/intranet users can see a view
Create Read and Edit access lists for foldersi
Specify which Notes and Internet/intranet users can see a folder or update the contents of a folder
Kreate Read and Edit access lists for forms
Specify which Notes and Internet/intranet users can create, modify, or read documents created with a form
Create Readers and Authors fields
Specify which Notes and Internet/intranet users can create, modify, or read specified documents
Create signed fields
Verify that the Notes user who originated the data i{ the author and that no one has tampered with the data
Create encrypted fields
Control which Notes users can access a field in a form
Create hidden fields
Control which Notes and Internet/intranet users can access a field in a form
Create Read and Edit access lists for sections
Specify which Notes and Internet/intranet uskrs can access a section in a document
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Planning Domino security
Click here
&Arial
To prevent unauthorized access to servers and applications, secure Notes and Domino IDs. These tasks apply only to Notes users and Domino servers. Internet/intranet users do not use ID files.
Task
Click here
Require a password for all user and server IDs
Click here
Prevent an unauthorized user from using an illicitly obtained ID to authenticate with a server
Click here
Enforce password quality testing for IDs
Click here
Prevent unauthorized users from guessing passwords
Click here
Assign multiple passwords to server and certifier KDs
Click here
Require multiple users to enter passwords before gaining access to the ID file to prevent one person from controlling a server or certifier ID
Click here
Compare a password with the password stored in the Domino Directory
Click here
and require users to change their passwords periodically
Prevent an unauthorized user from uskng an illicitly obtained ID to authenticate with a server
Click here
Compare a Domino public key with the public key stored in the Domino Directory
Click here
Prevent an unauthorized user from using an illicitly obtained ID to authenticate with a server
Click here
Recover lost or damaged IDs or forgotten passwords
Click here
Regain access to a user ID file instead of issuing a new ID
Lock the user ID after
minutes of inactivity
Automatically log off servers to prevent an unauthorized user from using the workstation
Use F5 to log off
Immediately log off servers to prevent an unauthorized user from using the workstation
Save user IDs on a disk instead of on the workstation and keep disks in a safe place
Physically protect user IDs
Locate workstations in a secure area -- for example, a locked room
Prevent unauthorized access to the ID filesh
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See also Notes 5 Help.
See Also
Click here
Planning Domino security
Click here
&Arial
To deny Notes users access to all servers in a domain, lock out their user IDs and enable password checking. When locked-out use{s try to access the server, Domino tries to verify the passwords they enter by comparing them against those stored in Person documents. Domino denies the users access because their IDs are locked out.
This procedure applies only to Notes users. It does not apply to Internet users attempting to access a Domino server.a
Lock out user IDs instead of adding a group to the "Not access server" field, so users cannot view a list of names that have been denied server access.
1. Make sure that the Administration Process is set up and that you have Editor access in the ACL of the Domino Directory.
For information, see
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab, and select the Person documents of users to whom you want to deny access.
3. Choose Actions - Set Password Fields, and then click Yes when prompted to continue.+Select Lockout ID, and then click OK.
4. Click the Configuration tab, open the Server document for the server to which you want to deny user access, and then click the Security tab. In the "Check passwords on Notes IDs" field, select Enabled.
5. Repeat Step 4 for each server to which you want to deny the user access.
See Also
Click here
Customizing access to a Domino server
Click here
,NYuXp
&Arial
When a server is set up for anonymous access, Notes users and Domino servers do not need a valid certificate to access the server, since the server does not validate or authenticate them. Use anonymous access to allow users and servers outside your organization to access a server without first obtaining a certificate for the organization. You can also set up anonymous access for Internet/intranet users.
For more information on knonymous Internet/intranet access, see
Click here
Name and password authentication for Internet/intranet clients
Click here
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and open the Server document.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. In the "Allow anonymous Notes connections" field, choose Yes.
4. If the "Access Server" field in the Server Access -- Who can section of the Server document ckntains entries, enter the word
Anonymous
in the field.
5. Save the document.o
6. Create an entry named Anonymous in the ACL of all databases to which you want to allow anonymous access. Assign the appropriate access level -- typically Reader access. If you don't add Anonymous as an entry in the ACL, anonymous users and servers get - Default - access.
7. Stop and restart the server so that the changes take effect.
See Also
Click here
Customizing access to a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
Use a port access list to allow or deny user and server access to a specific network port. If you use a port access list and a server access list, users and servers must be listed on both to gain access to the server.
To control access to a specific port, use these NOTES.INI settings:
Click here
Allow_Access_
portname
Click here
names
Click here
Deny_Access_
portname
Click here
names
where
portname
is the name of the port, and
names
is a list of users, servers, and groups to whom you want to deny or allow access. These names must be contained in the Domino Directory.
Sek Also
Click here
Customizing access to a Domino serverr
Click here
&Arial
To manage available disk space, control which users and servers are allowed to create databases and replicas on a server. If your system uses multiple Domino Directories, Domino searches only the first Domino Directory specified in the Names setting in the NOTES.INI fkle.
If the server allows a user to create a replica but a particular database ACL prevents it, the user cannot create a replica.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration, and open the Server document.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. In the Server Access section, complete one or more of these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Create new databases
Any of these:
Names of specific servers, users, and groups.
A blank field (default) to allow all users who can access this server to create databases on it.
An asterisk (*) followed by a certificate name -- for example, */Sales/East/Acme -- to allow all users ce{tified by a particular certifier to create databases.
An asterisk (*) followed by a view name -- for example, *($Users) -- to allow all names that appear in a specific view in the Domino Directory to create databases. Access time is quicker if you specify a group name rather than a view name.
Separate multiple names with commas or semicolons.
Create replica databases
Any of these:
Names of specific servers, users, and groups.
A blank field (default) to allow only a user working directly at the server machine to create replicas on the server.
An asterisk (*) followed by a certificate name -- for example, */Sales/East/Acme -- to allow all users certified by a particular certifier to create replicas.
An asterisk (*) followed by a view name -- for example, *($Users) -- to allow all names that appear in a specific view in the Domino Directo{y to create replicas. Access time is quicker if you specify a group name rather than a view name.
Separate multiple names with commas or semicolons. Note that servers, users, and groups who cannot create new databases on the server (see above) cannot create replicas.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Create a group named "Replica Makers" that lists the names of kll people who can create replicas on servers. Enter the group name "Replica Makers" in the Create replica databases field in each Server document in the Domino Directory.
For information on creating groups, see
Click here
Creating and modifying groups
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing access to a Domino server
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
Users can set up their headlines to search databases automatically for items of interest. If many users use this feature, server performance may be slow.
For information about headlines, see Notes 5 Help.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration, and open the Server document.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. In the Server Access section, complete one or both of these fields, and then save the documen{:
Field
Enter
Allowed to use monitors
Any of these:
Names of specific users and groups.
A blank field (default) to allow all users who can access this server to use monitors.
An asterksk (*) followed by a certificate name -- for example, */Sales/East/Acme -- to allow all users certified by a particular certifier to use a monitor.
An asterisk (*) followed by a view name -- for example, *($Users) -- to allow all names that appear in a specific view in the Domino Directory to use monitors. Access time is quicker if you specify a group name rather than a view name.c
Separate multiple names with commas or semicolons.
Not allowed to use monitors
Any of these:
Names of specific users and groups.
A blank field (default) to allow all users who can access this server to use monitors.
An asterisk (*) followed by a certificate name -- for example, */Sales/East/Acme -- to prevent users certified by a particular certifier from using monitors.
An asterisk (*) followed by a view name -- for example, *($Users) -- to prevent all nakes that appear in a specific view in the Domino Directory from using monitors. Access time is quicker if you specify a group name rather than a view name.f
Separate multiple names with commas or semicolons.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
You can also restrict users from monitoring an individual database.a
For more information, see
Click here
Database propertie{ that optimize database performance
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing access to a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
A passthru server allows users and servers to use a passthru connection to connect to another server. The server to which users connect is called a passthru destination. You can control which users and servers cak access a passthru server and passthru destination.
For more information on passthru servers, see
Click here
Connecting a server to a passthru server
Click here
If your system uses multiple Domino Directories, Domino searches only the first Domino Directory specified in the Names setting in the NOTES.INI file.
Internet and intranet clients cannot use passthru; therefore, these settings are valid only for Notes users and Komino servers.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration, and open the Server document.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. In the Passthru Use section, complete one or more of these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Access this server
Any of these:
Names of specific servers, users, and groups.
A blank field (default) to prevent users and servers from using a passthru connection to access the server.
An asterisk (*) followed by a certificate name -- for example, */Sales/East/Acme -- to allow all users certified by a particular certifier to access the server.
An asterisk (*) followed by a view name -- for exakple, *($Users) -- to allow access to all names that appear in a specific view in the Domino Directory. Access time is quicker if you specify a group name rather than a view name.
Any users or servers listed in this field can use a passthru server to access this server. This field does not take precedence over other access fields -- for example, the "Access server" and "Not access server" fields. For example, if the "Access server" field specifies that only users listed in the Domino Directory+can access this server, users who are not in the local domain cannot access this server.
Separate multiple names with commas or semicolons.
Route through
Any of these:
Names of specific servers, users, and groups.
A blank field (default) to prevent passthru access.
An asterisk (*) followed by a certificate name -- for example, */Sales/East/Acme -- to allow akl users certified by a particular certifier to access the server.
An asterisk (*) followed by a view name -- for example, *($Users) -- to allow access to all names that appear in a specific view in the Domino Directory. Access time is quicker if you specify a group name rather than a view name.
Any users or servers listed in this field can use the server as a passthru server, regardless of whether or not they are also included in the "Access server" or "Not access server" fields.
Separate multiple names with commas or semicolons.
Cause calling
Any of these:
Names of specific servers, users, and groups.
A blank field (default) to prevent calling.
An asterisk (*) followed by a certificate name -- for example, */Sales/East/Acme -- to allow all users certified by a particular certifier to initiate calling.
An asterisk (*) foklowed by a view name -- for example, *($Users) -- to allow all names that appear in a specific view in the Domino Directory to allow calling. Access time is quicker if you specify a group name rather than a view name.
Any users or servers listed in this field can instruct this server to call -- that is, place a phone call to -- another server in order to establish a routing path to that server. If no names are entered, no calling is allowed. In general, if the replicator on another server uses+the modem on a server to reach its targets, the server name of the replicator must be included in this list on the server with the modem. Otherwise, the replication will frequently fail.a
Separate multiple names with commas or semicolons.
This field corresponds to the Allow_Passthru_Callers setting in the NOTES.INI file. If a conflict exists, the "Cause calling" field takes precedence.
Destinations allowed
Names of destination servers to which this server may route clients. If no names are specified, all servers may be routed to.
This field corresponds to the Allow_Passthru_Targets setting in the NOTES.INI file. If a conflict exists, the "Destinations allowed" field takes precedence.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing access to a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Names
Click here
Click here
Allow_Passthru_Callers
Click here
Click here
Allow_Passthru_Targets
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
[MTPStrict821LineSyntax =
value
Description:
Specifies whether the SMTP task requires all protocol text be terminated by CRLF:
0 - 821 standard is not enforced (LF is accepted as a line terminator)
1 - 821 standard is enforced
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
To control the types of agents users can run on a server, set up restrictions to server agents.1
1. From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration, and open the Server document.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. In the Agent Restrictions section, complete one or more of these fields, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Run personal agentsp
Names of users and groups allowed to run personal agents on the server. Leave the field blank to let all users and groups run personal agents.
Run restricted LotusScript/Java agents
Names of users and groups allowed to run agents created with a specific set of LotusScript and Java features. Leave the field blank to deny access to all users and groups.
Run unrestricted LotusScript/Java agents
Names of users and groups allowed to run agents created with all LotusScript and Java features. Leave the field blank to deny access to all users and groups.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Create a group named "Restricted Agent" for users who can run restricted agents. Create k group named "Unrestricted Agents" that lists users who can run unrestricted agents. You can use an agent group to let users run agents in a template, such as the cc:Mail template. You can create a group named "Personal Agents" if you do not want to extend this privilege to all users. Enter these group names in the corresponding fields of the Agent Restrictions section of the Server document.
For a list of restricted LotusScript and Java features and information about agents, see Domino 5 Desikner Help. For information on creating groups, see
Click here
Creating and modifying groups
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing access to a Domino server
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
Domino restricts whether authenticated browser clients using Java or Javascript can run Java or Javascript programs on the Domino se{ver. This setting also determines whether browser clients can run Java programs created using the Notes Java classes with the Domino IIOP (DIIOP) task. The DIIOP task sends the request from the browser to the Domino ORB, and the Domino ORB returns the result to the browser.
For more information on the DIIOP task, see
Click here
Hosting Java applets
Click here
1. From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration, and open the Server+document.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. In the IIOP Restrictions section, complete one or both of these fields, and then save the document:
Field
-'SSU
Enter
Run restricted Java/Javascript
-'SSU
Names of authenticated browser users and/or groups allowed to run server programs created with a specific set of Java and Javascript features.
Leave the field blank (default) to deny access to all users and groups.
Run unrestricted Java/Javascript
-'SSU
Names of authenticated browser users and/or groups allowed to run server programs created with all Java and Javascript features.
Leave the field blank (default) to deny access to all users and groups.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For a list of restricted Java and Javascript classes, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
See Also
Click here
Customizing access to a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
Click here
File protection documents
Click here
Click here
Web realms
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing access to a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
To protect files on a server's hard drive, you can create a File Protection document. File Protection documents control the access tha{ Web browser clients have to the files. You can enforce file system security for files that browser users can access -- for example, HTML, JPEG, and GIF -- specify the level of access for these types of files and the names of the users who can access them.
You can apply file system protection on CGI scripts, servlets, and agents. However, the file protection does not extend to other files accessed by the scripts, servlets, or agents. For example, you can apply file protection on a CGI script {hat restricts access to a group named "Web Admins." However, if the CGI script executes and opens other files (or causes other scripts to be executed), the File Protection document is not checked to determine whether "Web Admins" has access to these files.
File protection also does not extend to files in the following directories, which contain default image files and Java applets that are used by the HTTP web server and other applications -- for example, mail databases:
notes\da{a\domino\java, accessed via web browser using the path http://server/domjava
notes\data\domino\icons, accessed via web browser using the path http://server/icons
File system protection does apply, however, to files that access other files -- for example, HTML files that open image files. If a user has access to the HTML file but does not have access to the JPEG file that the HTML file uses, Domino does not display the JPEG file when the user opens the HTML file.
You kan create a File Protection document for a directory or for an individual file. The default path is the Domino data directory. You can also create File Protection documents for other directories. You must set up File Protection documents for all directories accessible to Web users.
By default, the Domino Directory contains a File Protection document for the notes\data\domino\adm-bin directory that is created when the server starts for the first time after installation. This File Protection dokument gives administrators Write/Read/Execute access to the directory and gives all other users No Access. Domino obtains the list of administrators from the Administrators field in the Server document when the server is started for the first time. The administrator list is not updated in the File Protection document if you add names to the Adminstrators field after the server is started for the first time. Users have access to all other files and directories on the server until you create a File Protectiok document.
You do not need to use file system protection to protect database (.NSF) files; instead, you use database ACLs to protect them.
369793004829248788
To create a File Protection document
1. Do one of the following:n
From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration and click Servers.
If you are creating a File Protection document for a virtual server, click Web - Web Server Configurations.a
2. Do kne of the following:
Open the Server document for the server to which the file protection will apply. a
If you are creating a File Protection document for a virtual server, open the Virtual Server document.
3. Click Web and choose Create File Protection.
4. Click the Basics tab, and complete these fields:
Field
A'XSU
Enter
Applies to
A'XSU
The name of the server (or virtual server) for which the File Protection document will be created. This field is for display only, you cannot change it.
IP Address
A'XSU
The IP address of the server to which the file protection applies. This field appears only if you are creating a File Protection document for a virtual server.
Path
A'XS[
The drive, directory, or file that you want to restrict. The path is relative to the Domino data directory.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click the Access Control tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Fieldb
Enter
Current access control listn
The users and groups who can access the files or directories you specified and the type of access they are allowed. Similar to a database ACL, the access control list is always created with a - Default - entry, set to No Access. As with a database ACL, users not listed in the Access List receive the default access level.
To add users to this list, click Set/Modify Access Control List. Select a user name or group from the Domino Directory or type a name in the Name field and {elect "Read/Execute access (GET method)," or "Write/Read/Execute access (POST and GET methods)," or "No Access." Then click Next to add this entry to the access list.
GET lets the user open files and start programs in the directory. POST is typically used to send data to a CGI program; therefore, give POST access only to directories that contain CGI programs. No Access denies access to the specified user or group.
To remove an entry from the list, select it and click Clear.
If users connect to the server using Anonymous access, enter
Anonymous
in the Name field and assign the appropriate access.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Enter this command at the console to refresh the server settings:
tell http restart,
7. To display the File Protection document, click Web - Web Server Configurations on the Configuration tab. Dokino displays the File Protection document as a response to the Server document.
See
Click here
"Examples of controlling Web browser access to server files."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Controlling Web browser access to server files
Click here
&Arial
Specifying these settings in fields in the File Protection document allows all users in the Web User Group to open files and start+programs in the c:\notes\data\domino\html directory.
Path: c:\notes\data\domino\html
Access: Web User Group (GET)
Access: - Default - (No Access)
The file "secret.htm" resides in the notes\data\domino\html subdirectory. You can deny access to this file to members of the Web User Group and allow access only to user Joe Smith. To do this, create an additional File Protection document with the following settings:
Path: c:\notes\data\domino\h{ml\secret.html
Access: - Default - (No Access).
Access: Joe Smith (GET)
See Also
Click here
Protecting server files from Web client access
Click here
&Arial
Using a Domino Web realm, you can specify a string of text that is displayed when users try to access a certain drive, directory, or fkle on a Web server. When the browser prompts the user for a name and password, the browser's authentication dialog displays the realm text string. The browser uses the realm to determine which credentials -- that is, user name and password -- to send with the URL for subsequent requests. The Domino Web server caches credentials for different realms to avoid prompting the user again for the same credentials.
The realm string also applies to requests mapped to paths that have the specified path+as their root, provided that the child paths of the root do not already have a specified realm. For example, the realm string specified for D:\NOTES\DATA also applies to a request mapped to D:\NOTES\DATA\FINANCE, if the latter does not have a specific realm specification.
If there is no realm specification for a given path, Domino uses the path from the request as a realm string.
388604096029248241
To create a Web Realm
1. Do one of the following;
From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration and click Servers.
If you are creating a Web Realm document for a virtual server, click Web - Web Server Configurations.
2. Do one of the following:
Open the Server document for the server to which the Web realm will apply.
If you are creating a Web Realm document for a virtual server, open the Virtual Server document.
3. Click Web and choose Create Realm.
4. Complete these fields and then save the document:
FieldI
Enter
IP Address
The IP address of the virtual server. Complete this field only if you are creating a Web realm for a virtual server.
Path
The path mapped to the realm. This is the path to which the user requests ackess. You can define the path as a drive, directory, or file. The path is relative to the Domino server's data directory.c
Realm returned to browser when access is denied
A text string that describes the location (defined in the Path field) on the server. This string is passed back to the browser whenever there is an authentication or authorization failure at the location. Domino displays this text in the browser'{ authentication dialog.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Enter this command at the console so that the settings take effect:
tell http restartr
6. To display the Web Realm document, click Web - Web Server Configurations on the Configuration tab. Domino displays the Web Realm document as a response to the Server document.
See Also
Klick here
Controlling Web browser access to server files
Click here
&Arial
160610233629211385
To enable password verification
To use password verification for Notes users, you must enable password verification for both users and servers.
1. Make sure that the Administration Process is set up on the server and that you have at least Author access and the UserModifier role in the Domino Directory.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab using a network connection to the Domino Directory.
3. Select each Person document for which you want to enable password checking.
4. Choose Actions - Set Password Fields, and then click Yes to continue.
5. Select Check password.
6. Complete these fields, and then click OK:
Field
Enter
Required change interval
Number of days during which users must provide a new password; the default is 0, which does not require users to change their passwords and ignores any entry in the Grace period field.
Grace period
Number of days after a required change interval that users have to change their passwords. The default is 0, which allows users an unlimitkd amount of time to change their passwords after the change interval expires.
A value between 3 and 7 days is recommended.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Do the following to enable password verification on each server with which these users authenticate:
Click the Configuration tab and open each Server document. Click the Security tab.
In the "Check passwords on+Notes IDs" field, select Enabled.
160610233629211386
To disable password verification for an individual user
When you disable password verification for a user, Domino does not check passwords for the user even if password verification is enabled for the server.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab using a network connection to the Domino Directory.
2. Select each Person document for which you want to disabke password verification.
3. Choose Actions - Set Password Fields, and then click Yes to continue.
4. Select Don't check password, and then click OK.
63557491229215454
To disable password verification for a server
When you disable password verification for a server, Domino does not check passwords for any users who access the server, even if the user has password verification enabled.
1. From the Domino Administratkr, click the Configuration tab and open the Server document.
2. Click the Security tab, and then in the "Check passwords on Notes IDs" field, choose Disabled.
See Also
Click here
Verifying user passwords during authentication
Click here
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
,NYuXp
&Arial
Kefore users can recover their ID files, you must set up a centralized mail or mail-in database to store encrypted backups of ID files and specify information about which administrators are allowed to recover IDs. You must perform these steps before anyone loses or corrupts an ID.
1. Create a mail or mail-in database on a server that all users and servers can access. You can use any template to create the database.
For more information on creating mail-in databases, see Domino 5+Designer Help.
2. In the database ACL, set the - Default - access to No access and give administrators Reader access.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then click Certification.
4. Click Edit Recovery Information.
5. Select the certifier ID file, and then enter the password.
6. Click Add and select the names of the administrators who are authorized to recover ID files.
7. Click Add{ess and select the e-mail address for the mail or mail-in database that will store the encrypted back up ID files.
8. Enter the number of administrators required to unlock an ID file.
9. Click OK.
10. If user IDs do not already contain recovery information, complete the procedure
Click here
"Preparing IDs for recovery."
Click here
See Also
Click here
ID and pas{word recovery
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SMTPTimeou{Multiplier =
value
Description:
Multiplies the SMTP time-out wait value by the specified number. Each SMTP protocol exchange has a time-out wait value. If the client does not respond within the time-out period, the connection is broken. You can increase the time-out period by specifying a multiplier value. For example, a value of 2 doubles all time-out periods.U
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:"
SSLCipherSpec=
specification1 specification2 specification3...
Description:
(SSL users only) Determines which SSL-compliant cipher to use to encrypt files on the server. Specification numbers correspond to the following ciphers:
Cipher specification number
Cipher
01!
SSL_RSA_WITH_NULL_MD5
SSL_RSA_WITH_NULL_SHA
SSL_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5
SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5s
SSL_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHAc
SSL_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC2_CBC_40_MD5
SSL_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA_
SSL_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
To enter multiple ciphers, enter each cipher specification number, including leading zeros. Do not include spaces between numbers. For example:
SSLCipherSpec=01020A
Multiple ciphers only work ok HTTP servers.
Note
Specifying a 128-bit cipher for a server with an international license has no effect.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
SSL ciphers field in Ports - Internet Ports - Web tab of the Server document. The settings in this field are overridden by the SSLCipherSpec NOTES.INI setting. (You can use this field for HTTP only.)
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
p pa`
&Arial
After you specify recovery information in the certifier ID, when you regiszer users, the user IDs automatically contain recovery information. However, if you specified recovery information after generating user IDs, users must update their user IDs with recovery information supplied by the administrator. Updating IDs with recovery information automatically sends an encrypted backup of the user ID to the centralized mail or mail-in database. You must complete these steps before a user loses or damages an ID or forgets a password.
237237260829211803
To*send recovery information to the user
The administrator completes these steps.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then click Certification.
2. Click Edit Recovery Information.
3. Select the certifier ID file, and then enter the password.
4. Choose Export, and then enter the certifier ID's password.
5. Complete these fields, and then click Send:
FieldS
5'wSU
Enter
5'wSU
Names of users and groups whose ID files you want to back up.t
5'wSU
Names of users and groups who you want to send a copy of the message.i
Subject
5'wSU
Information for users and groups that will appear in the Subjejt field of the message. If this field is blank, Notes uses the following:
New ID file recovery information is attached. Please add it to your ID file by using the Actions menu 'Accept Recovery Information...' option
Memo
5'wSU
Information for users and groups that will appear in the Body field of the message. Domino automatically attaches the encrypted backup file information to the message -- you do not njed to specify it in this field.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
52050236829240993
To accept recovery information in the ID file
The user completes these steps.A
1. After the administrator sends the recovery information, open the message in your mail database.
2. Choose Actions - Accept Recovery Information, and then enter your password.
3. Complete these fields, and then click Send.
Field
5'?SU
Enter
5'?SU
Name of the mail or mail-in database that will store the backup copy of your ID. Domino enters the name of the database specified by your administrator.
5'?SU
Names of users and groups to whom you want to send a copy of the message.
Subject
5'?SU
Information for administrators that will appear in the Subject field of the message. If this field is blank, Notes uses one of the following:
Backup of newly changed recovery information for
user name
Bajkup of recent changes to ID file for
user name
Memo
5'?SU
Information for administrators that will appear in the Body field of the message. Domino automatically attaches the backup of the ID file to the message; you do not need to specify it in this field.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Domino automatically senjs the encrypted backup ID file to the centralized mail or mail-in database specified by the administrator.
Note
You can store multiple copies of the ID file in the centralized mail or mail-in database. Domino creates a new document every time an ID file is backed up. When attempting to recover an ID file, use the most recent backup. If this fails, use the older versions.
See Also
Click here
ID and password rejovery
Click here
&Arial
If*a user loses or damages an ID file or forgets a password, the user can work with administrators to recover the ID file from backup.
237237260829211803
To request a backup
The user completes these steps.
1. If you suspect the ID file is damaged, request the encrypted backup ID from the administrator.
2. Choose File - Tools - Recover ID.
3. Specify the ID file you want to recover.
4. Contact the first ajministrator listed in the dialog box, and request the first password.
5. Enter the administrator's password, and then click Enter.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you obtain the number of passwords required to unlock the file.
7. Enter a new password, and then enter the password again to confirm the change.
8. If you have multiple ID files, delete them and use a copy of the recovered ID file.
237297260829211804
To obtjin an administration password for ID file recovery
For security reasons, the administrators must complete these steps from their own workstations, rather than from the same workstation. Using separate workstations prevents an unauthorized user from using a program to capture the keystrokes that the administrators enter on the same workstation. If an unauthorized user obtains an administrator's ID file and password, the unauthorized user can obtain the administrator's recovery password for all*ID files. Therefore, you must protect the administrator's ID file.
1. Detach to the local hard drive the encrypted backup of the user's ID file from the mail or mail-in database.
2. If the user's ID file is damaged, send a copy of the ID file from the centralized mail or mail-in database to the user.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and choose Certification - Extract Recovery Password.
4. Enter the password to the ajministrator's ID file.
5. Specify the ID file you want to recover. This is the same ID you detached in Step 1.C
6. Give the user the administration password that is displayed.
See Also
Click here
ID and password recovery
Click here
&Arial
If an administrator leaves an organization or changes job responsibilities within an organization, you need to update the adminiztration recovery information used to recover user ID files and then send the new information to users to add to their ID files.
237297260829211803
To add or delete administrators
An administrator with access to the certifier ID completes these steps.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then click Certification.
2. Click Edit Recovery Information.
3. Select the certifier ID file, and thej enter the password.
4. Do one:
To delete an administrator, highlight the administrator's name, and then click Remove.
To add new administrators, click Add and then select the names of administrators who are authorized to recover ID files.
5. (Optional) Change the number of administrators required to unlock an ID.
6. When you finish adding or deleting names, click OK.
7. Perform the procedure "
Click here
Preparing IDs for recovery."
Click here
See Also
Click here
ID and password recovery
Click here
&Arial
Creating and certifying a new public key requires the following procedures, which are described below:
The user creates the new public key and submits it for certification.
The certification administrazor certifies the user's public key with a Notes certificate and adds it to the Domino Directory.
The user merges the new certificate into the user's ID file.
338934406429204592
To create a new Notes public key
The ID owner performs these steps.
1. Choose File - Tools - User ID.
2. Type the password (if required.)
3. Click More Options, and then click New Public Key.
4. When you see a time*warning for creating the public key, click OK to continue.
5. Address the request to the certification administrator for the certifier. Or address the memo to a certifier -- for example /East/Acme -- Domino mails the request to the person indicated in the Administration section of the corresponding Certifier document in the Certificates view of the Domino Directory.
6. Click Send.
338934406429204593
To recertify the ID with a Notes certificate ajd add the Notes public key to the Domino Directory
The certification administrator performs these steps.
1. Open the certification request in your mail file.
2. Choose Actions - Certify Attached ID File.
3. Select the Certifier ID to use, and click OK.
4. Enter the password for the ID, and click OK.
5. Click Re-certify.
6. (Optional) Click Server, select a server, and click OK to change the registrazion server. The registration server is the one whose Domino Directory will be updated.
7. (Optional) Change the expiration date for the certificate.
8. (Optional) Specify a minimum password length.
9. Click Certify. The ID owner's name appears in the To field and explanatory text appears in the Subject field of the Mail Certified ID dialog box.
10. (Optional) Click Sign to prove you are the sender of the ID.
11. Click Send.
338984406429204594
To merge the new Notes certificate with the ID
The ID owner performs these steps.
1. Choose File - Tools - User ID.
2. Click More Options, and then click Merge A Copy.
3. Select the recertified ID sent to you by the certification administrator, and then click OK.
160610233629211385
To verify a Notes public key
Verifying Notes public keys against those in the Dominj Directory helps prevent an unauthorized user or server from accessing another server.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and open the Server document for the server.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. In the Security Settings section, select Yes in the "Compare Notes public keys against those stored in Directory" field.i
4. Save the document.t
5. Restart the server so that the changes take effect.
See Also
Click here
Public key security
Click here
&Arial
You can copy a Notes public key to a file or mail it to a user or administrator who pastes the public key into a Personal Address Book or a Domino Directory that users can acess. This lets*users encrypt mail sent to a user in another organization or replace a missing or corrupted key in the Domino Directory.
338984406429204592
To mail a public key
1. Choose File - Tools - User ID.
2. Select the ID and enter the password.
3. Click More Options, and then click Mail Public Key.
4. Address the request to the person who will paste the key into a Domino Directory or Personal Address Book.
5.
(Optional) Next to CC, type the name of any other people you want to notify of the request.
6. (Optional) Click Sign to prove you are the sender of the ID.
7. Click Send.
160610233629211385
To copy a public key to a file
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and choose ID Properties.a
2. Select the ID and enter the password.
3. Click More Options, and then click Copy Public Kez to copy the key to the system clipboard.
4. Save the contents of the clipboard to a file.
5. Deliver the file by hand or postal service to someone to paste into a Domino Directory or Personal Address Book.D
338984406429204593
To paste the public key into a Personal Address Book
1. In your Personal Address Book, create a Contact document for the owner of the public key.
2. Click the Advanced tab, and then use the clipjoard viewer to open the file or mail message that contains the public key.
3. Copy the public key from the clipboard and paste it into the "Certified public key" field
of the Contact document.
4. Save the document.
338984406429204594
To paste the public key into a Domino Directory
1. From the Domino Administrator, do one of the following:
Click the People & Groups tab and edit the Person document.
Click the Configuration tab and edit the Server document.
2. Click the Public Keys tab in the Person document, or click the Administration tab in the Server document.
3. Use the clipboard viewer to open the file or mail message that contains the public key.
4. Copy the public key from the clipboard, and paste it into one of the following fields:
Certified public key field (Domino hierarchical certificates)
(Person documentz only) Flat name key (non-hierarchical Domino certificates)
Note
You cannot paste Internet certificates into the Person or Server documents.
5. Save the Person or Server document.
See Also
Click here
Public key security
Click here
&Arial
Domino uses two types of cross-certificates: Notes and Internet. Notes cross-certificates allow users in different hierarchically-certified organizations to access servers and to receive signed mail messages. Internet cross-certificates allow users to receive signed mail messages and send encrypted mail messages.
85733046429218067s
Notes cross-certificates
To allow uzers and servers from the different hierarchically-certified organizations to access servers in the other organization and to verify the digital signature of a user from another organization, you use cross-certificates. Servers store cross-certificates in the Domino Directory. To access servers, users store cross-certificates in their Personal Address Books. Cross-certificates that are stored in a user's Personal Address Book are for use only by that particular user -- that is, only the user who owns the crjss-certificate can use it.
For example, if Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme wants to access the Support/Seascape server, he needs a cross-certificate from /Seascape, and the Support/Seascape server needs a cross-certificate for /Sales/East/Acme. When Alan tries to authenticate with the server, it checks for the cross-certificate in Alan's Personal Address Book. If Alan finds a valid cross-certificate, the server then checks whether Alan is allowed to access the server.
Cross-certificatjon can occur at various levels of an organization. For example, to allow every user within one organization to authenticate with every server in another, each user has a cross-certificate for the other's organization certifier in the Personal Address Book. Servers in each organization have a cross-certificate for the other's organization certifier in the Domino Directory. Cross-certification can also occur at the level of an individual user or server ID. For example, to allow a single user to authenticate zith any server in another organizational unit or verify a digital signature from a user in that organizational unit, the user ID needs a cross-certificate for the organizational unit certifier in the other company, and that organizational unit certifier needs a cross-certificate for the user ID.
Two way cross-certification does not need to be symmetric. For example, one organization can have a cross-certificate for an organizational unit certifier and another organization can have a cross-cerzificate for an organization certifier.
If you have cross-certificates for an organization or organizational unit certifier, set up server access restrictions to prevent the other organization from accessing specific servers that store confidential information. To allow your organization to access servers in another organization but prevent that organization from accessing your servers, exchange cross-certificates as required but then set up server access lists on all servers to prevent access*by the other organization.c
85733046429218068
Internet cross-certificatese
An Internet cross-certificate is a certificate that validates the identity of a user or server. An Internet cross-certificate ensures the recipient of an encrypted S/MIME message that the sender's certificate can be trusted and that the certificate used to sign an S/MIME message is valid. It also validates the identity of a server when a Notes client uses SSL to access an Internet server.a
Internet cross-certificates are stored in Certificate documents in Personal Address Books and can be used only by the user to whom they are issued. An Internet cross-certificate can be issued for a leaf certificate or the CA. Creating a cross-certificate for a leaf certificate indicates trust for only the owner of the certificate, for example, the sender of the signed message or recipient of an encrypted message. A cross-certificate for a CA indicates trust for all owners who have a certificatj issued by that CA. If you cross-certify a CA, you trust the CA to issue certificates to users and servers lower in the hierarchical name tree. For example, cross-certifying Sales/ABC means you trust Sales/ABC to issue a certificate to Fred/Sales/ABC. You could also create a cross-certificate for Fred/Sales/ABC, so you trust only Fred/Sales/ABC.
&Arial
223678118429218622
To authenticate with all servers in another organization
This example describes what the Acme company and the ABC company do to allow all users and servers in both organizations to juthenticate.O
1. The Acme organization certifier (/Acme) obtains a cross-certificate for the ABC organization certifier (/ABC) and stores it in Acme's Domino Directory. 4
2. The ABC organization certifier (/ABC) obtains a cross-certificate for the Acme organization certifier (/Acme) and stores it in ABC's Domino Directory.
223678118429218623
To authenticate with a specific server in another organization
The Acme company wants*to let Seascape users who have the hierarchical certification AppDevelopment/Seascape to access their customer support server, CSSUPPORT/East/Acme.
1. The Acme organizational unit certifier (/East/Acme) has a cross-certificate for the Seascape organizational unit certifier (/AppDevelopment/Seascape) and stores it in Acme's Domino Directory.
2. The Seascape organizational unit certifier (/AppDevelopment/Seascape) has a cross-certificate for the Acme organizational unit certjfier (/East/Acme) and stores it in Seascape's Domino Directory.
This cross-certification enables Kelly Jones/AppDevelopment/Seascape and Jonathan Moutal/AppDevelopment/Seascape to authenticate with the server CSSUPPORT/East/Acme. However, it does not allow these users to authenticate with the Acme server Mail-W/West/Acme.
85793046429218068
To send signed S/MIME messages
Alan Jones has an Internet certificate issued from the Acme CA, and Dave Lawsoj has an Internet certificate issued from the ABC CA. If Alan wants to send Dave an encrypted S/MIME message and Dave wants to send Alan an encrypted S/MIME message:i
1. Alan has a trusted cross-certificate for ABC and stores it in his Personal Address Book.e
2. Dave has a trusted cross-certificate for Acme and stores it in his Personal Address Book.
Both Dave and Alan can now also send encrypted S/MIME messages to each other.n
Zee Also
Click here
Adding cross-certificates to the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book
Click here
&Arial
When users access a server or receive a signed message, they can accept a Notes or Internet cross-certificate from another organization. Domino adds the cross-certificate to the user's Personal Address Book. Then the next time the user tries to access the server or verify the signer of the message, the server can authejticate the user or verify the signature.
Note
You cannot add an Internet cross-certificate on demand if the Internet certificate of a user exists in an LDAP directory.
216985782429211032
To add a cross-certificate on demand
1. Using a Notes workstation, attempt to access a server in an organization with which you are not cross-certified or open a signed message whose signature you do not trust.
2. If zou attempted to access a server, when Domino displays this message, select Advanced Options:
Your local Domino Directory does not contain a cross-certificate for this organization.
Would you like to suppress this warning in the future by creating a cross-certificate for this organization in your Name and Address Book?
3. To avoid the possibility of cross-certifying an impostor, call someone trustworthy from the named organization and ask the person to tell you the*organization's public key or fingerprint. Compare it to the key displayed in the Advanced Options dialog box.
4. Complete these fields:
Field
('<QU
Enter
Certifier
('<QU
File name of a user, server, or certifier ID. Specify a server or certifier ID when creating a cross-certificate for a server. The ID specified indicates who can use the cross-certificate.
Server
('<QU
Location of the Personal Address Book or Domino Directory where you want to copy the cross-certificate. Add the cross-certificate to the Personal Address Book for Notes clients.
Subject name
('<QU
Organization or organizational unit certifier that you want to cross-certify -- for example, /Acme. You can also create a cross-certifjcate for the owner of the certificate.
Subject alternate name list
('<QU
An alternate name that identifies the subject. Alternate names allow you to assign more than one name to an ID, which is recognizable in a user's native language.
Expiration date
('<QU
Date when the cross-certificate will expire.
head title;Cjead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click Cross Certify. Domino places the cross-certificate in the Server - Certificates view of the Domino Directory of the server you specified in Step 4 or in the Advanced/Certificates view of the Personal Address Book.
See Also
Click here
Adding cross-certificates to the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book
Click here
Click here
Adding an alternate language and name
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SwapPath=
location
Description:
Specifies the location of the server's swap file. If this setting exists in the NOTES.INI file, the Reporter or Collector server task uses this location for the Server.Path.Swap statistic.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, Domino looks for the location of the swap file in C:\OS2\SYSTJM
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Two organizations can add a Notes cross-certificate to user, server, and cjrtifier IDs by providing the name and public key of the IDs to be cross-certified over the phone. For cross-certification to work, these steps must be carried out twice, with each organization alternately requesting cross-certification.
You cannot use this procedure to create an Internet cross-certificate.
250151136029204591
To request a cross-certificate for a user, server, or certifier ID
Use these steps to add a cross-certificate for a user or serzer or for an organization or organizational unit when you have access to the user, server, or certifier ID.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Click Certification - ID Properties.d
3. Select the user, server, or certifier ID file, and click Open.c
4. Type the password (if required).,
5. Click the Basics tab and then write down the name exactly as it appears in the Name field, including any forward sljshes (/) -- for example, Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme, Mail-E/East/Acme, or /Acme.
6. Write down the Primary Key information exactly as it appears, including spaces. (Do not confuse this with the Public Key field on the Certificates tab.
7. Call the organization that will add the cross-certificate, and provide the name and key exactly as you recorded them.
216985782429211032
To request a cross-certificate for an ancestral certifier of an ID
Use these steps to add a cross-certificate for an organization or organizational unit when you have access to the user or server ID.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Click Certification - ID Properties.
3. Select the user, server, or certifier ID file, and click Open.
4. Type the password (if required).
5. Click the Certificates tab and in the Certificates field, select the certificate foz the certifier you want to cross-certify.
6. Look at the Name field in the Certifier Information section to verify that you selected the correct certificate. Write down the name exactly as it appears in the Name field, including any forward slashes (/) -- for example, /Acme.Y
7. Look at the Key field immediately above the Name field in the Certifier Information section, and write down the public key exactly as it appears, including spaces.
8. Call the organizatijn that will add the cross-certificate, and provide the name and public key exactly as you recorded them.
250151136029204592
To add a cross-certificate
to a Domino Directory or Personal Address Book
After someone from another organization provides the name and public key over the phone, use these steps to add a cross-certificate for the ID.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Choose Certjfication, and then choose Cross Certify Key.
3. Select the certifier to use to issue the cross-certificate, and then click OK.
4. Enter the password for the selected certifier.
5. In the "Subject name" field, type the full hierarchical name for the ID you are cross-certifying exactly as provided over the phone, including any forward slashes (/).
6. Type the public key for the ID you are cross-certifying exactly as it was provided over the phone* including spaces.
7. (Optional) Change the expiration date for the certificate. The default is 10 years.
8. (Optional) Click Certifier to select a different certifier to issue the cross-certificate.
9. (Optional) Click Server and select a different registration server whose Domino Directory will store the cross-certificate. To store the cross-certificate in a user's Personal Address Book, choose Local as the server. Then click OK.
10. Click Crozs Certify. Domino places the cross-certificate in the Server - Certificates view of the Domino Directory of the selected registration server.
See Also
Click here
Adding cross-certificates to the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book
Click here
&Arial
Organizations that cannot communicate through Notes mail can use these steps to add a Notes cross-certificate for user, server, and certifier IDs. For cross-certification to work, these steps must be carried out twice, with eajh organization alternately requesting cross-certification.
You cannot use this procedure to create an Internet cross-certificate.
250151136029204591
To create a safe copy of an ID
Use these steps to create a safe copy of the user, server, or certifier ID that you want to cross-certify.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Choose Certification and then choose ID Properties.
3.
Select the user, server, or certifier ID file, and then click Open.
4. Type the password (if required).
5. Click More Options, and then click Create Safe Copy.
6. Enter a path and name for the safe copy, and then click OK. The default name is SAFE.ID.
7. Copy the file to a diskette.
8. Use the postal service to send the diskette to the certification administrator at the other organization.
2501511360292045:2
To add a cross-certificate for the safe copy
Use these steps to add the cross-certificate to the Domino Directory.e
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Click Certification, and then click Cross Certify.s
3. Select the certifier that will issue the cross-certificate, and then click OK.c
4. Enter the password for the selected certifier.i
5. Select the safe copy of the ID to be cross-jertified, and then click OK.c
6. Complete one or more of these fields:
Field
A'PMU
Enteru
Subject name
A'PMU
Organization or organizational unit certifier to be cross-certified -- for example, /Acme
Subject alternate name list
A'PMU
An alternate name that identifies the certifier JD. Alternate names allow you to assign more than one name to an ID, which is recognizable in a user's native language.
Expiration date
A'PMU
Date when the cross-certificate will expire
Certifier
A'PMU
File name of your organization's certifier ID
Server
A'PMU
Location of the Domino Directory where you want to copy the cross-certificate
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Click Cross Certify. Domino places the cross-certificate in the Server - Certificates view of the Domino Directory of the server you specified in Step 6.
See Also
Click here
Adding cross-certificates to the Domino Directorz or Personal Address Book
Click here
Click here
Adding an alternate language and name
Click here
&Arial
If you can route mail to the organization that will cross-certify a user, server, or certifier ID, you can use Notes mail to add a Notes cross-certificate. For cross-certification to work, these steps must be carried out twice, with each organization alternately requesting cross-certification.
You cannot use this procedure to czeate an Internet cross-certificate. h
250151136029204591
To send an ID for cross-certification
1. Choose File - Tools - User ID, select the ID, and enter the password.
2. Click Certificates, and then click Request Cross Certificate.
3. Select the user, server, or certifier ID you want to have cross-certified, and then click OK.
4. Enter the password (if required).
5. Address the cross-certification reqzest to the certification administrator at the other organization, and then click Send.
250151136029204592
To cross-certify the ID
1. Open the cross-certification request in your mail file.
2. Choose Actions - Cross Certify Attached ID File.y
3. Select the certifier that will issue the cross-certificate, then click OK.6
4. Enter the password for the selected certifier.o
5. Complete one or more of these*fields:
Field
<'\MU
Enters
Subject name
<'\MU
Organization or organizational unit certifier to be cross-certified -- for example, /Acme
Subject alternate name lista
<'\MU
An alternate name that identifies the certifier ID. Alternate names allow you to assign more than one name to an ID, which is zecognizable in a user's native language.
Expiration datet
<'\MU
Date when the cross-certificate will expire
Certifier
<'\MU
File name of your organization's certifier ID
Server
<'\MU
Location of the Domino Directory where you want to copy the jross-certificate.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Click Cross Certify. Domino places the cross-certificate in the Server - Certificates view of the Domino Directory of the server you specified in Step 5.
See Also
Click here
Adding cross-certificates to the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book
Click here
Jlick here
Adding an alternate language and name
Click here
&Arial
Users can obtain Internet cross-certificates directly from an Internet server. To do this, instruct your users to do the following:h
1. Make sure that you have access to the server on which the certificate is stored and that you know the server's Internet address.
2. If you use a proxy server to access the Ijternet, make sure you set up the proxy in the Location document.
For more information on setting up Location documents, see Notes 5 Help.
3. Select File - Tools - Add Internet Cross Certificate.
4. In the "Server name" field, enter the Internet address of the server on which the certificate is stored, and click Connect.
5. (Optional) If the server does not respond on the HTTP port, select another protocol to use to connect to the Internet server. Njtes uses an SSL connection to the server to add the certificate.
6. Select the certificate for which you want to add the cross-certificate. You can select the leaf certificate for the server or the CA certificate.
7. Click Certifier. This is the ID with which the certificate will be certified. Select the ID, then enter the password, if necessary.
8. Click Server. This is the Domino Directory on the server on which the cross-certificate will be stored. By defazlt, this is the Personal Address Book in the local data directory.
9. Click Cross Certify.
See Also
Click here
Adding cross-certificates to the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book
Click here
&Arial
You can create a Notes and/or Internet cross-certificate from a certificate stored in a user's Person document.
1. Do one of the following:
From the Djmino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab, and open the Person document for the user you are cross-certifying.
In the Personal Address Book, open the Contact document for the user you are cross-certifying.
2. Choose Actions - Create Cross Certificate.
3. Choose the certificate to cross-certify.
4. Complete these fields and then click Cross Certify:
Field
>'oKU
Enter
Certifier
>'oKU
File name of a user, server, or certifier ID. Specify a server or certifier ID when creating a cross-certificate for a server. The ID specified indicates who can use the cross-certificate.
Server
>'oKU
Location of the Personal Address Book or Domino Directory where you want to copy the cross-certificate. Add the cross-certificate to the Personal Address Book fjr Notes clients.
Subject name
>'oKU
Organization or organizational unit certifier that you want to cross-certify -- for example, /Acme. You can also create a cross-certificate for the owner of the certificate.
Subject alternate name list
>'oKU
An alternate name that identifies the subject. Alternate names allow you to assign more zhan one name to an ID, which is recognizable in a user's native language.
Expiration date
>'oKU
Date when the cross-certificate will expire.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for every user for whom you want to create cross-certificates.
See Also
Clicj here
Adding cross-certificates to the Domino Directory or Personal Address Book
Click here
&Arial
Use this procedure to edit any of the group attributes that are listed on the Group document in the Domino Directory. You can modify the group name, group type, description, group membjrship, group owner, administrator, and specify whether foreign directory synchronization is allowed.
With group renaming there isn't any tolerance for simultaneous occurrences of the new and old names while the name change makes its way across databases in the domain. For example, if a group name changes in the Domino Directory before it has a chance to change in a database ACL, the old group name in the database ACL is invalid. (This limitation doesn't occur with user and server renaming.) Az a workaround, you can initiate the group rename action during non-peak work hours -- for example, during the weekend -- or you can immediately process the requests, rather than waiting for the changes to occur according to Administration Process schedules.
356657529629236375
To edit a groupe
1. To edit a group you must have:r
Editor with create documents access, or the UserModifier role to the Domino Directory
At least Author with crejte documents access to the Certification Log
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. Select a group name.
4. Click Edit Group.
5. Complete the following fields on the Basics tab:m
Field
Enter
Group name
The new grjup name
Group type
Select one of these:
Multipurpose
Mail only
Access only
Deny only
Servers
Description
A description of the group
Members
Add or remove group members. Type a member name in the field or double click this field to open the Names dialog box and then do any of the following:
Open another address book by selecting that address book
Add a person or group to the group by selecting the person or group and clicking Add
Remove a group member by selecting the member in the right pane and clicking Remove
Remove ajl members of a group by clicking Remove All
Add a member to a group by clicking New, typing the member name, and clicking OK
Copy an entry from the open address book to the Local address book by selecting the name and clicking Copy to Local Address Book
Open another Group document by selecting the group name and clicking Open
6. Click the Administration tab and complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Owners
Add an owner name or modify the list of group owners
Administrators
Add an administrator name or modify the list of group administrators
Foreign directory synchronization allowed
Choose one:
Yes to allow synchronization between a post office directory, such as cc:Mail post office directory or a Microsoft Exchange Address Book, and the Domino Directory
No to prevent synchronization between a post office directory, such as the cc:Mail post office directory or a Microsoft Exchange Address Book, and the Domino Directory
7.
(Optional) To sort the list of group members before saving the Group document, click Sort Member List.h
8. Save and close the document.
15514281629218630
To immediately change the name of a group throughout the domain
1. Choose the group rename action from the administration server for the Domino Directory and then enter this server command:
tell adminp process new
to process the "Rename Group in Address Book" requezt immediately.
2. Enter the command:
tell adminp process daily
at the administration server for the Domino Directory, to immediately process the "Rename in Person Documents" request.
3. Replicate the modified Domino Directory and Administration Requests database from the administration server for the Domino Directory to all other servers in the domain.
4. Enter the command:
tell adminp process all
on eacj server in the domain to force processing of the "Rename Group in Access Control List" and "Rename Group in Reader/Author fields" requests on each server.
See Also
Click here
Managing groups
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Using groups
Click here
Click here
Creating and*modifying groups
Click here
r4>,wte
&Arial
Follow these steps to delete a group from the Domino Directory.o
If the server is running Windows NT and it contains a group account for this group, you can delete the group account, too.
196384304029244636
To delete a group
1. To delete a gzoup, you must have at least Author with delete documents access and the GroupModifier role, or Editor access to the Domino Directory
2. From the Domino Administrator, click People & Groups.
3. Select the name of the group you are deleting.
4. Click Delete Group and click Yes to continue.
5. If the server is running Windows NT, Domino prompts you to delete the corresponding group account from Windows NT User Manager. Click Yes to delete the group*account.
6. Do one of the following:
To immediately delete all references to the group in this replica of the Domino Directory, click Yes.
To post a "Delete in Address Book" request in the Administration Requests database to have the Administration Process delete references to the group in the Domino Directory and database ACLs, click No.
7. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Managing groups
Click here
Click here
Synchronizing user and group information in Domino and Windows NT
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
<TCPportname>
PortMapping3
=CN=
servername t
organization
IPaddress
TCP/IP portnumber
Description:
Specifies the TCP/IP port number of each partitioned server sharing the IP address of the port mazper server. <TCPportname> is the name of the TCP port which is specified in the NOTES.INI file by the settings Ports=
TCPIP
. This entry is only valid in the NOTES.INI file of the port mapper server.
is any number from 00, 01, 02, and so on to 99; only 00 to 04 are currently supported. Numbers must be assigned in ascending order as an invalid break in the number sequence causes subsequent entries in the NOTES.INI file to be ignored.
The last number is the port number assigned to each partitioned server. This number must be an available number as specified in Assigned Numbers RFC 1340. In this example, TCPIP is the name of the TCP port.
Applies to:
Partitioned servers using TCP/IP port mapping*only
Default
: None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
<TCPIPportname>_TCPIPAddress=0,
IPaddress:TCP/IP portnumber
Description:
Defines the IP address and port number for a Domino server. <TCPportname> is the name of the TCP port which is specified in the NOTES.INI file by the settings Ports=
TCPIP
. For example:
TCPIP_TCPIPAddress=0,192.94.222.169:1352
Applies to:
Partitioned servers using TCP/IP only
Default
: None
UI equivalent: e
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Use a Domino passthru server as an application proxy for Notes and Domino RPCs. A passthru server provides all levels of Notes and Domino security while allowing clients who use dissimilar protocols to communicate through a single Domino server. It does not allow other Internet protocols -- for example, HTTP, IMAP, and LDAP -- to use a Domino passthru server to communicate.
When you set up an application proxy, make sure the following Domain Name Services (DNS) are correctly configured:
db.DOMAIN and db.ADDR, which are the databases DNS uses to map host names to IP addresses, must contain the correct host names and addresses.
Host files must contain the fully qualified domain name of the servers.c
If you are using Network Information Service (NIS), you must use the fully qualified domain name and make sure NIS can coexist with DNS.
For information on configuring these settings, see the documentation for your network operating system.
To set up a Domino passthru server as an application proxy, you must first connect the server to the Internet and then set up Notes workstations and Domino servers to use the passthru server as a proxy when accessing services outside the network. To set up a workstation or server to use the passthru server, you must specify the passthru server in the Location document for the workstation and in the Server document for the server.D
For information on connecting a server to the Internht, see
Click here
Connecting a server to server on the Internet through a proxy
Click here
For information on specifying a passthru server, see e
Click here
Connecting a server to a passthru server
Click here
The figure below adds a Domino passthru server to a packet-filtering firewall. In this example, the passthru server adds the benefits of a proxy for multiple Notes and Domino clients ax well as connectivity to the Internet for Notes workstations and Domino servers running protocols other than TCP/IP. By defining a single point of entry for Notes and Domino traffic to the packet filter, you can centralize the administration of the application proxy -- in this case, the passthru server.
ks on your netwo
edure to create
n your netwo
, click the Conf
2. Click Certifi
rtificat
3. Selec
ID file, and cl
he Domino System
h your netwo
e to create
n your netwo
See Also
Click here
Application proxy firewalls
Click here
Click here
Using dual network adapters on the Domino passthru servert
Click here
&Arial
The Manage Groups option on the tools pane provides a quick and easy method for managing existing Domino groups. You can open any Domino Directory to which you have access, and you can then add or remove people and groups from groups as necessary. You can also view detail on groups.l
223503628829244223
To use the Manage Groups tool
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
2. From the tools pane, click Groups - Manage.
3. Complete these fields as necessary:
Field
Enter
People and Groups
Look In
The directory that you want to open. A list of all users and groups in the directory is displayed.
Group Hierarchies
Hook in
The directory containing the group you are managing
Show me
Choose one:
All group hierarchies to display only the group hierarchies in the selected directory
Only member hierarchies to display only the member hierarchies in the selected directory
List alphabetically
Lists alphabetically, all people and groups in the selected directory
List by organization
Lists by organization, all people and groups in the selected directory
Show group type
Choose one to limit the type of group(s) that display:
Multipurpose
Mail only
Access only
Deny only
Servers
le;Dhead
4. Do any of the following:
To add a member to a group, select the group in the Group hierarchies pane, then select the user or group from the People & Groups list, and click Add.
To remove a member from a groux, select the member from the Group hierarchies pane, and click Remove.
To view a group document, select the group from the Group hierarchies pane and click Details.
5. When you finish managing groups, click OK.
360072246429278567
Finding a group member
You can quickly locate a group member by completing either of the following procedures.
360072246429278568
From the Domino Administrator
1. Click the People & Groups tab.
2. Select Groups. A list of groups in the server's Domino Directory displays.
3. Choose Actions - Find Group Member, or on the Action bar, click Find Group Member. You may have to scroll to the right to reveal the button.
4. Enter the common name (for example, Jane Doe) and click OK. If the group member is found, a check mark appears next to the group or groups in which the member name is located.
860072246429278569
From the Domino Directory
1. Click Groups.
2. Choose Actions - Find Group Member, or on the Action bar, click Find Group Member.
3. Enter the common name (for example, Jane Doe) and click OK. If the group member is found, a check mark appears next to the group or groups in which the member name was found.
See Also
Click here
Managing groups
Click here
Click here
Using groups
Click here
&Arial
You may need to recertify an ID if the certificate is about to expire and you want to assign a new expiration date, if you are adding a new alternate name to the certifier ID, or if you are changing the minimum password quality.
Certifier IDs are used to certify certifiers, servers, and users immediately below the certifier IDs in the hihrarchical name scheme. In addition, the organization certifier can certify itself.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration.
2. From the tools pane, click Certification - Certify.
3. Choose the certifier ID used to issue the certificate, and click Open.
4. Enter the password for that certifier ID, and click OK.
5. Choose the certifier ID for one of the following:
Organizational unit
Server
User
Organization certifier (when the Organization certifier is used to certify itself)
6. Enter the certifier ID password and click OK.
7. Complete these fields:
Field
Entera
Server
(Optional) Select a registration server name other than the one displayed
Exxiration date
(Optional) Specify a certifier ID expiration date other than the default two years from today's date
Primary keyt
Public half of the primary RSA key pair stored in the Notes ID file. This RSA key pair is used for electronic signatures on documents and certificates, and on mail encryption when both the sender and the recipient have a North American Notes license. This kex pair is also used for network authentication.i
International keyf
The public half of the international RSA key pair. This key pair is used for mail encryption when either the sender or recipient are running with an International Notes license.
Subject name list,
Certifier ID(s) you are working with. To add an alternate hame, select the certifier ID and then click Add.
Click to add and certify an alternate name. Select the alternate language, country code (optional), and the organization identifier for the language.
Rename
Rename the alternate name selected in the Subject name list. This button is not available when recertifying ushr IDs.
Remove
Removes the alternate name selected in the Subject name list.
Password quality
Level of complexity and variety of characters entered for the password. Domino sets the default value to 10.
e;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Click Certify.
9. To certify another certifier ID, click Yes. Otherwise, click No.n
See Also
Click here
Managing Certifier IDs
Click here
Click here
Certifier IDs
Click here
Click here
Adding an alternate language and name
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
TimeZone=
value
Description:
Specifies the time zone for a server or workstation. Time zones begin at Greenwich, England (0 = Greenwich Mean Time) and move westward around the world. The time zones can be 15, 30, 45, or 60 minutes apart (not all zones are an hour apart). For example:
TimeZone=8
TimeZone=0
Specifies Pacific Standard Time (8) and Greenwich Mean Time (0).
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
Defined during the workstation or server Setup procedure
UI equivalent:
On a workstation, the Local time zone field in the Location document; on a server, the Local time zone field in the Server document.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
WzGfQ?
&Arial
Syntax:g
TRANSLOG_MaxSize=
value
Description:
The maximum size, in MB, for the transaction log. A value of at least 192 MB is recommended. If you don't specify a value, the system determines a log sizh approximately three times the size of the server's RAM.
Applies to:
Servers"
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
"Maximum log space" field in the Transactional Logging tab of the Server document
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
8P!Yz
&Arial
Syntax:
TRANSLogPath=
pathname
Description:
Specifies the path name location of the transaction log. The default location is \logdir in the server's data directhry. However, it is strongly recommended to store the transaction log on a separate mirrored device, such as a RAID level 0 or 1 device with a dedicated controller. If you change this field and have an existing transaction log, you must use the operating system to move all the log files to the new log path."
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
logdir in the server's data directory, for example c:\data\logdir
UI equivalent:
( "Log path" field in the Transactional Logging tab of the Server document
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
TRANSLogPerformance=
value
Description:
Specifies the trade-off between transactional log runtime and restart recovery time, as follows:
1 = Favor runtime. The system stores more database changes in memory writes fewer changes to the transaction log. Fewer writes th disk improves server runtime.
2 = Standard (default)
3 = Favor restart recovery time. The system stores fewer database changes in memory and writes more changes to the transaction log. More writes to the transaction log improves restart recovery time.
Applies to:
Serversn
Default:
UI equivalent:
"Runtime/Restart performance" field in the Transactional Logging tab of the Server document
163385024029247061
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
or escalation.
&Arial
You can configure the Domino passthru server to prevent unauthorized traffec from entering or leaving the LAN. To do this, you put two network adapters on the Domino server, one connected to the Internet (configured for TCP/IP) and the other connected to the organization LAN (configured for your local protocol, such as NetBIOS or SPX). By allowing communication between the server and the Internet to occur over TCP/IP and allowing communication on the organization LAN to occur over another protocol, you can secure your system from common TCP/IP-based attacks.
If necesuary, you can use TCP/IP on the LAN side; however, you must turn off TCP/IP routing between adapters, remove any TCP utilities (such as FTP, Sendmail, NFS, and so on), and turn on all auditing and alarm utilities to track intrusion. In addition, you must set up server and database security to control access to the Domino passthru server.e
The Domino passthru server
can provide real-time access to destinations over the Internet if the administrator chooses to allow that.
ring the Domino
tronic Signature
H_WAYS_TO_USE_
o communicate th
tion proxy, make
To augment this solution, put a router between the Domino passthru server and the couporate LAN and allow only network traffic to access the passthru server. If you use dual network adapters to configure a network, you must use a router and keep vigilant watch on the system.
For information on specifying a passthru server, see
Click here
Connecting a server to a passthru server
Click here
See Also
Click here
Using a Domino server as a firewall
Click here
&Arial
The following Acme Corporation example explains the basics of how transaction logging works.
For more information on the Acme Corporation, see the chapter
Click here
"Sample Domino System Configuration."
Click here
1. The system administrator at Acme Corporation decides to set up transaction logging on the Mail-E/East/Acme mail server. Before enabling%logging, the administrator chooses:
To store the transaction log on a separate, mirrored device with 1GB of disk space
The archive logging style
A third-party backup utility to archive log files, perform daily incremental backups of the transaction log, and perform weekly full database backups.
2. To enable transaction logging, the system administrator restarts Mail-E/East/Acme.
3. As the server restarts, Domino:
Assigns a unique database instance ID (DBIID) to each Domino Release 5 database to keep track of the database transactions
Formats the transaction log files (.TXN) and a control file
4. Alan Jones uses his Notes client to create, edit, and save a new mail message. This new mail message is:
Recorded in the transaction log on the separate, mirrored device
Saved as a database update on Mail-E/East/Acme
5. Later that day, Judy Kaplan uses her Web browuer to create and save a new calendar appointment. This transaction is recorded in the transaction log. However, before the appointment can be saved to Judy's mail database, Mail-E/East/Acme stops because of a system failure.
6. When the system administrator restarts Mail-E/East/Acme, Domino automatically uses the transaction log to recover Judy Kaplan's mail database and restore the calendar appointment.
304667510429239977
Understanding the database instance ID%(DBIID)
When you enable transaction logging, Domino assigns a unique database instance ID (DBIID) to each Domino Release 5 database. When Domino records a transaction in the log, it includes this DBIID. During recovery, Domino uses the DBIID to match transactions to databases.
Some database maintenance activities, such as compaction with options, cause Domino to assign a new DBIID to a database. From that point forward, all new transactions recorded in the log use the new DBIID; eowever, any old transactions still have the old DBIID and no longer match the database's new DBIID. As a result, Domino cannot restore these old transactions to the database.
To avoid losing data, you should immediately perform a full database backup whenever a database receives a new DBIID. When you perform this backup, you capture all the database transactions up until that point and ensure that Domino needs only the new transactions (with the new DBIID) to restore the database.
Domino assigns a new DBIID to Domino Release 5 databases when:
You enable transaction logging for the first time.
You run the Compact server task with any options -- for example, the option to reduce file size.
You run the Fixup task on corrupt databases.
You change the log path or maximum log size after initial set up and use.
You move a Domino Release 5 database from one logged server to another logged server or from an unlogged server to%a logged server.
See Also
Click here
Transaction logging
Click here
Click here
Setting up transaction logging
Click here
Click here
Disabling transaction logging for a specific database
Click here
Click here
Scheduling backups of transaction logs and logged databases
Click here
Click here
Using transaction logging for recovery
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases
Click here
Click here
Using Fixup
Click here
Click here
Moving databases
Click here
Click here
Transaction logging - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
By default, the log file records information about the Domino system. However, you can record additional information in the log file -- for example, when you are troubleshooting a specific system problem.
When you record additional information in the log file, you choose a logging level that specifies the amount of detail that is recorded in the log file. If you set a high logging level, the log file may become quite large. Therefore, after you troubleshoot the problem, remember to reset the logging level.
To record infoumation about
Use this setting, field, or command
Agent manager
Click here
Log_AgentManager
Click here
in NOTES.INI
Indexer activity
Click here
Log_Update
Click here
in NOTES.INI
Mail routing
Click here
Mail_Log_To_MiscEvents
Click here
in NOTES.INI
Messages generated when views are rebuilt
Click here
Log_View_Events
Click here
in NOTES.INI
Modem I/O
File - Preferences - User Preferences - Ports - COM
Options
NNTP server
Click here
"NNTP log level" field
Click here
in the NNTP Server section of the Server document
Replication
Click here
Log_Replication
Click here
in NOTES.INI
"Log all replication eventu" setting specified during server setup
"Retriever log level" field on the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab of the Server document.
Web server
Web server information is recorded only in the
Click here
Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
Click here
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Viewing the log file (LOG.NSF)
Click here
&Arial
Syntax::
TRANSLOG_Status=
value
Description:
Enables transaction logging for all Release 5 databases on the server, as follows:
0 - Transactional logging disabled
1 - Transactional logging enabled
You must upgrade databases to Domino Release 5 format before they can use transaction logging.%
Applies to:
Servers"
Default:
UI equivalent:
"Transactional logging" field in the Transactional Logging tab of the Server document
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
If you have a backup copy of DESKTOP5.DSK, click No. Then, using your operating system, replace the copy in your Notes data directory with the backup copy and restart Notes.
If you have no backup copy, click Yes. Notes will automatically create a new DESKTOP5.DSK file. Then choose File - Database - Open to restore all the icons you want to your desktop.
See Also
Click here
Databases
Click here
This script uses a NotesUIWorkspace to get the curuent document. It then uses the FieldGetText method to print the Subject field of the current document.
Dim workspace As New NotesUIWorkspace
Dim uidoc As NotesUIDocument
Set uidoc = workspace.CurrentDocument
Messagebox( uidoc.FieldGetText( "Subject" ) )
kp d^
T0URP
&Arial
You can use an HTTP proxy server to communicate using the HTTP protocol or'a protocol secured with SSL -- for example, IMAP, LDAP, or NNTP. You can also use an HTTP proxy server to communicate using Notes and Domino RPCs.
One advantage in using a proxy server is that it is the only source for Web sessions leaving your company. This minimizes potential targets for an attack on your system. Web proxies also allow caching of frequently accessed pages. This can improve performance.
The network protocol used to communicate between a user on a private netwowk and the HTTP proxy server is always HTTP. The HTTP proxy server can use the server's native network protocol -- such as FTP, Gopher, and WAIS -- to communicate with Internet servers outside the firewall. So, if a user makes a request through the HTTP proxy for a page on a Gopher Internet server, the HTTP proxy server uses Gopher to retrieve the page and then uses HTTP to send the page to the user.
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a security protocol that provides communications privacy over thg Internet. You can configure the HTTP proxy server to allow an SSL client to open a secure tunnel through the proxy. When this secure tunnel is created, the HTTP proxy server does not read or interpret the data being passed between the user and the Internet server; it simply passes the information in a secure way. SSL uses the CONNECT method to extend the HTTP proxy to open a secure tunnel. You can use this method with SSL to communicate using LDAP, IMAP, POP3, SMTP, IIOP, and NTTP.
For more'information on SSL tunneling, go to the Web site http://home.mcom.com/newsref/std/tunneling_ssl.html.
If the HTTP proxy server supports the CONNECT method the same way that SSL does, you can set up the HTTP proxy server to communicate Notes and Domino RPCs. When you set up the HTTP proxy server, configure a CONNECT method to port 1352 to allow Notes and Domino RPCs to use the proxy.
You must set up Notes workstations and Domino servers to access the HTTP proxy server. To set up a'workstation, you (or the user) specify the proxy information in the Location document for the workstation. To set up a server to use the HTTP proxy server, you specify proxy information in the Server document for the server.
For information on connecting to an HTTP proxy server, see
Click here
Connecting a server to server on the Internet through a proxy
Click here
and Notes 5 Help.
NG_SERVERS_TO_SE
ave a prox
omains section
See Also
Click here
Application proxy firewalls
Click here
&Arial
You can use an SMTP router and the SMTP listener as an application proxy firewall. In this case, one server in your domain is designated as the firewall machine and is set up as the sole contact with external clients and servers. This firewall server is then configured as either:
The SMTP server, using SMTP Foreign domain and Connection documentsd
The "relay host" for SMTP systems within the firewall
Within your company, Internet names resolve to an MX record naming the firewall machine. The firewall server can then apply SMTP security features to control access.
See Also
Click here
Application proxy firewalls
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure you already
Click here
set up the server as a Doming Web server
Click here
2. Using the Domino Designer, create the Domino Certificate Authority application on the server using the Domino Certificate Authority template (CCA50.NTF). To view the template file, select the option Advanced templates.
3.
Edit the ACL of the Domino Certificate Authority database, as follows:
Add the names of the administrators who will issue and manage Internet certificates. Assign Editor with Gelete access and the [CAPrivlegedUser] role to each administrator.
Set the - Default - access to Author with Create access.
4. Perform the steps in the task titled "
Click here
Creating a CA key ring file and certificate."
Click here
To hide the Domino Certificate Authority application so that it doesn't appear when users choose File - Database - Open and when Web clients browse a datagase list, deselect "Show in 'Open Database' dialog" in the Database Properties box.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino CA server
Click here
kmH}$.
&Arial
You use the CA certificate to sign server and client certificates and add the CA's digital signature to the server and client certificates. The CA certificate is stored'in a key ring file, which is a binary file that is password-protected.
When you use the Domino Administrator to create the CA key ring file, it is stored by default in the client's data directory. If you will use other clients to approve and sign requests, consider moving the key ring file to a disk or network drive. This ensures it is accessible to other clients.
Make sure, however, that you keep the key ring file in a secure location. To prevent unauthorized access, only the agministrators that you specify should have access to the CA's key ring file and password.
251297260829211803
To create a CA key ring file and certificate
1.
Click here
Make sure you set up the Domino Certificate Authority application
Click here
2. From the Domino Adminstrator, click the Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
3. Click Create Certificate Authorgty Key Ring & Certificate.
4. Complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Key ring file name
The explicit path and file name. The default is CAKEY.KYR in the Domino Administrator's data directory. It's helpful to use the extension .KYR to keep server and CA key ring file names consistent.
Key ring paswword
At least 12 alphanumeric characters is recommended.
Password verifya
The password entered into the previous field. This helps ensure the password is entered correctly.
Key Size
The size of the public and private key pairs. The larger the size, the stronger the encryption. If you use tge international version of Domino, only the 512-bit key size is available, unless you qualify for and have purchased a VeriSign Global Server ID.
Common named
A descriptive name that identifies the CA certificate -- such as, Acme SSLCA.
Organization
The name of the organization where the certificate owner works. This is wsually a company name, such as Acme.
Organizational Unit
(Optional) The division or department in which the certificate owner works.
City or Locality
(Optional) The city or town where the certificate owner resides.
State or Province
Three or more characters that represent the state or province where the certificate owner lives, such as Massachusetts. (For U.S. states, enter the complete state name, not the abbreviation.)
Country
A two-character representation of the country where the certificate owner lives -- for example, US for United States and CA for Canada.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
The Common name, Organization, Organizational Unit, City or Locality, State or Province, and Country make up the CA server's distinguished name. Choose the CA name carefully; it is a costly process to re-issue certificates if you change the name.
5. Click Create Certificate Authority Key Ring.
6. After you read the information about the key ring file and CA name, click OK.
7. Make a backup copy of the Certificate Authority key ring file, and store it in a secure location.
8. Complete the procedure
Click here
"Configuring the Domino Certificate Authority application profile."
Click here
To administer the Domino Certificate Authority application from a workstation, create a copy of the key ring file and distribute it to the workstations; or place the key wing file on a networked drive administrators can access. You must specify the location of the key ring file in the Domino Certificate Authority application profile. By default, Domino looks on the current machine's hard drive for the key ring file.
287467510429239977
To change the password for the CA key ring file
To ensure the continued security of the CA key ring file, periodically change its password.
1. From the Domino Adminstrator, click the'Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
2. Click View Certificate Authority Key Ring, and then click Change CA Key Ring Password.
3. Enter the old password, and then click OK.
4. Enter a new password of at least 12 alphanumeric characters, and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino CA server
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Certificate Authority application profile identifies the CA's key ring file and specifies the name of the CA server. Domino adds a link to the CA server when you send a message to clients and server administrator who request certificates. The clients and server administrators use this information to determine where to pick up certificates.
1. Make sure you
Click here
created a CA kgy ring file and certificate
Click here
2. From the Domino Adminstrator, click the Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
4. If necessary, enter the CA key ring path and file name in the CA Key File field. By default, Notes looks for the key ring file on the local hard drive. You can also specify a network drive accessible to other administrators.h
' 5. Enter the TCP/IP DNS name of the server that runs the CA application in the Certificate Server DNS name field. Domino uses this name to indicate where to pick up signed certificates in the messages sent to administrators and clients.
The following four fields set default values for the Approved Client Certificates screen. You can override these when approving a certificate.
Field
EnterE
Use SSL fow certificate transactions?
Choose one:
Yes (default) to specify whether the e-mail message generated during the security request process includes a reference to the SSL port for secure certificate pick-up.
No to specify SSL will not be used._
Certificate Server port number
The TCP/IP port for the server. Domino uses this port when sending an e-mail notification to clients to pick up certificates. The default is 80.
Mail confirmation of signed certificate to requestor?
Choose one:
Yes to generate an e-mail confirmation for a signed certificate request.
No (default) to not send the confirmation.
Submit signed certificates to AdminP for addition to the Directory?
Choose one:
Yes (default) to submit the signed certificate request to the Administration Process, which then stores this certificate in the Domino Directory.t
No to not submit the certificate.g
Default validity period
Number og years the signed certificate is valid. Default is 2 years.
6. Click Save & Close.
7. Complete the procedure "o
Click here
Setting up SSL on the CA server."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino CA servert
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:!
TRANSLOG_Style=
value!
Description:
Specifies the type of transaction logging. Options are as follows:
0 = Circular (default). The system continuously re-uses the extent log files, overwriting old transactions."
1 = Archive. The system does not re-use extent log files and allows you to use a backup utility to archive log files. This is recommended.
Applies to:
Serverso
Default:
Circular
UI equivalent:
"Logging style" field in the Transactional Logging tab of the Server document
163385024029247061
See Also
Click here
Editing system files on the server with the Web Administrator
Click here
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$TITLE
$IgageData
$ImageNames
$PublicAccess
Configuration
01/10/2000 09:35:07 AM Dynamic Client Configuration updating location information
01/10/2000 09:35:07 AM Dynamic Client Configuration shutdown
&Arial
Because server administrators and clients use browsers to access the CA server to request and pick up certificates, use SSL to protect the CA server. When you set up the CA server for SSL, you create the server key ring file and request a server certificate. Domino automatically approves the server certificate and merges the CA certificate as a trusted root.
1. Make sure you
Click here
configured the Domino Certificate Authority application profile
Click here
2. From the Domino Adminstrator, click the Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
3. Click Create Server Key Ring & Certificate.
4. Complete these fields:.
Field
Enter
Key ring file name
The game of the server key ring file. By default, this is the data directory of the Domino Administrator used to create the file. Do not use the same name as the CA key ring file.
Key ring password
At least 12 alphanumeric characters is recommended.
Password verify
The password entered into the previous field. This helps egsure the password is entered correctly.
Key size
The size of the public and private key pairs. The larger the size, the stronger the encryption. If you use the international version of Domino, only the 512-bit key size is available, unless you qualify for and have purchased a VeriSign Global Server ID.
CA certificate label
The label to display when you view the CA certificate in the server key ring file.
Common name=
The TCP/IP fully-qualified host name -- for example, www.lotus.com.
Set up the server certificate so that the common name matches the DNS name since some browsers check for this match before allowing a connection.
Organization
The name of the organization where the certificate owner works. This is usually a company name, such as Acme.
Organizational Unit
(Optional) The division or department where the certificate owner works.
City or Locality
(Optional) The city or town where the certificate owner resides.
State or Province
Three or more characters that represent the state or province where the certificate owner lives, such as Massachusetts. (For U.S. states, enter the complete state name, not the abbreviation.)v
Countrya
A two-character representation of the country where the certificate owner lives -- for example, US for United States and CA gor Canada.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click Create Server Key Ring.
6. Enter the CA key ring file password, and then click OK.
7. Copy the server key ring file to the Domino data directory on the server. The Domino Certificate Authority application creates the file locally; however, the server needs the key ring file to use SSL.
8.
Click gere
Configure the SSL port
Click here
. Enable server authentication only on the server.
9. If clients use Netscape Navigator, do the following:
From the Domino Adminstrator, click the Files tab, open the Domino Certificate Authority application, and then open the Database Properties box.
On the Basics tab, choose "Web Access: Require SSL connection" to force browsers to use SSL to connect to this database.
Note
If clients use Microsoft Internet Explorer, do not complete this step, which forces users to use SSL to access the application. Clients who use Internet Explorer must use TCP/IP to access the Domino Certificate Authority application and merge the certificate as a trusted root. Internet Explorer does not allow clients to accept a site certificate for a server for which they do not have the trusted root certificate.
See Also
Click gere
Setting up a Domino CA server
Click here
&Arial
380184864029244786
More name variations with lower security
Using the More name variations authentication level, Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme can enter the following names when using a browser to authenticate with a Domino Directory:
Example
H&@8U
DescriptionE
Alan Jones
H&@8U
Common name
Alan
H&@8U
First name
Jones
H&@8U
Last name
Ajones
H&@8U
Short name
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme/US
H&@8U
Full hierarchical name (abbreviated)
cn=Alan Jones/ou=East/ou=Sales/o=Acme/c=us
H&@8U
Full hierarchical name (canonical)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
If you want to authenticate Glan in an LDAP Directory, he can use a browser to enter the following names:
Example
H&@8U
Description
Alan Jones
H&@8U
Common name
Alan
H&@8U
Givenname
Jones
H&@8U
Surname
Ajones
H&@8U
cn=Alan Jones, cn=recipients, ou=Sales, ou=East, o=Acme, c=us (valid for a Microsoft Exchange server)
H&@8U
Full hierarchical name (canonical)
uid=ajones, ou=Sales, ou=East, o=Acme, c=us (valid for a Netscape Directory Server)
H&@8U
Full hierarchical name (canonical)
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme/US
H&@8U
Full hierarchical name (abbreviated)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
380174864029244787
Fewer name variations with higher security
Using the Fewer name variations authentication level, Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme can enter only the following names when using a browser to authenticate with a Domino Directory:
Example
H&@8U
Description
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme
H&@8U
Full hierarchical name (abbreviated)
CN=Alan Jones
H&@8U
Common name with CN= prefix
Alan Jones
H&@8U
Common name
cn=Alan Jones/ou=East/ou=Sales/o=Acme/c=us
H&@8U
Full hierarchical name (canonical)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
If you want to authenticate Alan in an LDAP Directory, he can use a browser to enter the following names:
Example
H&@8U
Description{
AJones
H&@8U
Alan Jones
H&@8U
cn=Alan Jones, cn=recipients, ou=Sales, ou=East, o=Acme, c=us (valid for a Microsoft Exchange server)
H&@8U
uid=ajones, ou=Sales, ou=East, o=Acme, c=us (valid for a Netscape Directory Server)
H&@8U
uid=Ajones (valid for a Netscape Directory Server)
H&@8U
UID with UID= prefix
head title;Chead;Chead'title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Controlling the level of authentication for Web clients
Click here
&Arial
Domino automatically creates the Server Certificate Admin application during server setup. If the Server Certificate Admin application is not gvailable after you start the Domino server, use the Server Certificate Admin template (CSRV50.NTF) to create it. Use the Server Certificate Admin application (CERTSRV.NSF) to:
Request server certificates from either a Domino or third-party CA e
Add a CA certificate as a trusted root
Manage server certificates in a key ring file
Create a self-certified certificate for testing purposes
72822163229240009
To set up the Server Cgrtificate Admin application
1. Make sure you
Click here
set up the server as a Domino Web server
Click here
2. Edit the ACL of the Server Certificate Admin application, as follows:
Add the names of server administrators who will access this database from the Domino Administrator that are not running on the server machine. Assign Manager access.
Set - Default - access to No access to prevent others from uwing the database.
Set the Maximum Internet name & password field to No Access to prevent authenticated Internet clients from accessing the database.
Note
You do not need to add names of server administrators who access the Server Certificate Admin application locally -- that is, access the application on the server that stores it. Administrators who access the database locally automatically have Manager access, regardless of the ACL settings'
3. Complete the procedure
Click here
"Creating a server key ring file."
Click here
To hide the Server Certificate Admin application when users choose File - Database - Open or when Web clients browse a database list, deselect "Show in 'Open Database' dialog"
in the Database Properties box.
See Also
Click here
Setting up SSL og a Domino server
Click here
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
&Arial
Before you request a certificate from a CA, you must create a key ring file to store the certificates. A key ring file is a binary file that is password-protected and stored on the server's hard drive' When you create a server key ring file, Domino generates an unsigned server certificate and automatically includes several trusted root certificates. The unsigned server certificate is not valid until the CA signs it. Domino also creates a stash file (.STH) using the same name as the key ring file, but with the file extension .STH. Domino uses the stash file to store the key ring file password for unattended access to the server key ring file.
For information on default trusted root certificgtes, see
Click here
"Default Domino SSL trusted roots."
Click here
Every SSL server certificate includes a distinguished name that SSL connections use. When you create the server key ring file, you set up this distinguished name. Although some components of a distinguished name are optional, the more components you include, the less chance you'll encounter an identical name elsewhere on the Internet.
1. Make sure you
Clgck here
set up the Server Certificate Admin application
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Certificate Admin application.
3. Click Create Key Ring.
4. Complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Key Ring File Name
A file name. The default is KEWFILE.KYR. It's helpful to use the extension .KYR to keep key ring file names consistent.
Note
The server's key ring file name appears on the Ports - Internet Ports tab of the Server document. If you specified a name other than the default, you need to edit the name in the Server document.
Key Ring Password
At least 12 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters.
Key Size
The size Domino uses when creating the public and private key pairs. The larger the size, the stronger the encryption. C
If you use the international version of Domino, only the 512-bit key size is available, unless you requested a Global Server ID from VeriSign.
Common name
A server's common name is the TCP/IP fully-qualified domgin name -- for example, www.acme.com.
Set up the server certificate so that the common name matches the host name since some browsers check for this match before allowing a connection.
Organization
The name of the organization where the certificate owner works -- for example, a company name, such as Acme.
Organizational Unit
(Optional) The division or department where the certificate owner works.
City or Locality
(Optional) The city or town where the certificate owner lives.
State or Province
Three or more characters that represent the state or province where the certificate owner lives, such as Massachusetts.
For U.S. states, enter the complete state name, not the abbreviation.
Country
A two-character representation of the country where the certificate owner lives -- for example, US for United States and CA for Canada
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click Create Key Ring.
6. After you read the ingormation about the key ring file and distinguished name, click OK. Notes creates the key ring file and stash (.STH) file and places them in the Notes data directory on the client machine used to create the key ring.
7. Copy the key ring file and stash (.STH) file to the Domino data directory on the server.
Caution
You must ensure that the key ring password in the stash file is protected. The key ring file password is altered in the stash fige so that it cannot be recognized by a casual observer, but it is not encrypted. You should not allow unauthorized persons access to either the stash file or the key ring file. In the normal course of operation, only the server itself should have access to those files; however, administrators may also need permission to remove or replace the files. As with all Web server resources, managing proper file permissions and protections is vital to the security of the system.o
8. Complete the procgdure "
Click here
Requesting an SSL server certificate."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino serverr
Click here
Click here
SSL and multi-national organizations
Click here
&Arial
You can request and obtain a server certificate from either a Domino or third-party CA. A server certificate is a binary file that uniquely identifies the server. The server certificate contains a public key, a name, an expiration date, and a digital signature; and is stored on the server's hard drive.
When you request an SSL server certificate, you use stangard Public-Key Cryptography Standards (PKCS) format, an industry-standard format that many CAs, including Domino, understand. Before you request a certificate from a third-party CA, make sure the CA uses the PKCS format, not some other format, such as Privacy-Enhanced Mail (PEM). If you are unsure of the format required by a third-party CA, check with the CA.
81900649629204175
From a Domino CA
1. Make sure you already a
Click here
created thg server key ring file
Click here
and mapped a drive to the directory that contains the server key ring file.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Certificate Admin application.
3. Click Create Certificate Request.
4. Complete these fields:f
Field
Enter
Key Ring File Name
The name of the server key ring file including the path to the file
Log Certificate Request
Choose one:
Yes (default) to log information in the Server Certificate Admin application
No to not log information
Method
Choose Paste into form on CA's site
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click Create Certificate Request.
6. Enter the password for the server key ring file.
7. Copy the certificate to the Clipboard (include the Begin Certificate and End Certificate lines), and click OK.
8. On the servgr, use one of these methods to browse to the Domino Certificate Authority application on the CA's Web site:
If you use Microsoft Internet Explorer, use TCP/IP to connect to the application. You must have the trusted root certificate of the server in order to use SSL to access the server. You do not have this certificate yet. Since, Internet Explorer does not allow you to accept site certificates into your browser, you must connect to the server using TCP/IP. A site certificate is a certificate'that you can use instead of a trusted root certificate which you obtain for an individual site. The site certificate lets you access only a specific site.c
If you use Netscape, use SSL to connect to the application. Then, use the instructions provided by the browser software to accept the site certificate.n
9. Click Request Server Certificate.
10. Enter your name, e-mail address, phone number, and any comments for the CA.
11. Paste the certificate intg the dialog box, and then click Submit Certificate Request.
12. Complete the procedure
Click here
"Merging a CA certificate as a trusted root."
Click here
81900649629204176D
From a third-party CA
1. Make sure you already
Click here
created the server key ring file
Click here
and mapped a drive to the directory that contains the server key ring file.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Certificate Admin application.
3. Click Create Certificate Request.
4. Complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Key Ring File Name
The name of the server key ring file including the path to tge file
Log Certificate Request
Choose one:
Yes (default) to log information in the Server Certificate Admin application
No to not log information
Method
Choose one:
Paste into form on CA's site (recommendeg)
Send to CA by e-mail
Note
You must choose the paste option to submit a request to VeriSign, which doesn't use PKCS format for requests sent by e-mail. If you choose "Send to CA by email," enter the CA's e-mail address, and your e-mail address, phone number, and location.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click Create Certificate Request.
6. Enter tge password for the server key ring file.
7. If you selected "Paste into form on CA's site" in Step 4, do the following:
Copy the certificate to the Clipboard (include the Begin Certificate and End Certificate lines).
Use a browser to visit the CA's site, and then follow the instructions that the CA's site provides for submitting a request for a new certificate.
8. Complete the procedure
Click here
"Merging a CA certificate as a twusted root."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Viewing requests for certificates
Click here
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino serverc
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
TRANSLOG_UseAll=
valug
Description:
Specifies whether or not to use all available disk space on the log device, as follows:
0 = The system uses the default or specified value in "TRANSLOG_MaxSize"
1 = Use all available space on the disk for the transaction log extent. This is recommended if you use a separate device dedicated to storing the extent.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivglent:
"Use all available space on log device" field in the Transactional Logging tab of the Server document
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
The server certificate must contain the CA certificate as a trusted root. The trusted root allows servers and clients that have a common CA certificate to communicate. Before you merge a server certificate signed by a CA, merge the CA certificate into your key ring file as a trusted root.
81900649629204175
From a Domino CA
1. Make sure that you
Click here
requested the server certificate
Click here
and mapped i drive to the directory that contains the key ring file.
2. Browse to the Domino Certificate Authority application on the CA's Web site:
If you use Microsoft Internet Explorer, use TCP/IP to connect to the application. Internet Explorer does not allow you to accept site certificates into your browser.
If you use Netscape, use SSL to connect to the application. Then, use the instructions provided by the browser software to accept the site certificate.
3. Click Accept This Authority in Your Server.
4. Copy the certificate to the Clipboard (include the Begin Certificate and End Certificate lines).
5. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Certificate Admin application.
6. Click Install Trusted Root Certificate into Key Ring.
7. Enter the name of the key ring file that will store this certificate. You specified this name when you created the server certificate)request.
8. Enter the name that the key ring file will use to identify this certificate. If you leave this field blank, Domino uses the distinguished name of the certificate.
9. In the Certificate Source field, choose Clipboard. Paste the Clipboard contents into the next field.
10. Click Merge Trusted Root Certificate into Key Ring.
11. Enter the password for the key ring file, and then click OK.
12. Have the CA perform the steps)in the task titled
Click here
"Signing server certificates."
Click here
81900649629204176
From a third-party CA
View the default trusted roots in the key ring file to make sure the third-party CA's certificate is not already included. If it is already included, you do not need to complete these steps.
1. Make sure that you
Click here
requested the server certificate
Click here
and mapped a drive to the directory that contains the key ring file.
2. Browse to the Web site of the CA and obtain the CA's trusted root certificate. In most cases, the trusted root certificate is in a file attachment, or the certificate is available for you to copy to the Clipboard.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Certificate Admin application.
4. Click Install Trusted Root Certificate into Key Rini.
5. Enter the name of the key ring file that will store this certificate. You specified this name when you created the server certificate request.
6. Enter the name that the key ring file will use to identify this certificate. If you leave this field blank, Domino uses the distinguished name of the certificate.
7. Do one of the following:
If you copied the contents of the CA's certificate to the Clipboard in Step 2, choose Clipboard in the Certiiicate Source
field. Paste the Clipboard contents into the next field.
If you received a file that contained the CA's certificate in Step 2, detach the file to your hard drive and select File in the Certificate Source field. Enter the file name in the File name field.
8. Click Merge Trusted Root Certificate into Key Ring.
9. Enter the password for the key ring file, and then click OK.
10. Have the CA complete the procedure
Click here
"Signing server certificates."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Default Domino SSL trusted roots
Click here
Click here
Viewing SSL server certificates
Click here
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
Domino includes several trusted root certificates by default when you create a server key ring file. You do not need to merge a third-party CA's certificate as a trusted root if it exists in the key ring file by default.
Trusted root certificate name7
Organization
Organizational UnitT
Country
VeriSign Class 4 Public Primary Certification Authority
VeriSign, Inc.i
Class 4 Public Primary Certification Authority
VeriSign Class 3 Public Primary Certification Authority
VeriSign, Inc.
Class 3 Public Primary Certification Authority
VeriSign Class 2 Public Primary Certification Authorityr
VeriSign, Inc.
Class 2 Public Primary Certification Authority
VeriSign Class 1 Public Primary Certification Authority
VeriSign, Inc.
Class 1 Public Primary Certification Authority
RSA Secure Server Certificate Authority
RSA Data Security, Inc.
Secure Server Certification Authoritye
Netscape Test Certificate Authority
Netscape Communications Corp)
Test CA
RSA Low Assurance Certificate Authority
RSA Data Security, Inc.
Low Assurance Certification Authorityi
VeriSign Persona Certificate Authority
RSA Data Security, Inc
Persona CertificateT
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Merging a CA certificate as a trusted root
Click here
&Arial
A CA signs a server certificate to add the CA's digital signature to the certificate.
The method used to sign a server certificate depends on whether the certificate yas issued by a Domino or third-party CA.
373878614429217237
From a Domino CA
A request for a server certificate appears in the Server Certificate Requests view in the Domino Certificate Authority application. When the CA signs a certificate, the CA can automatically send e-mail to the server administrator. This e-mail describes where to pick up the certificate and includes a pickup ID, which the server administrator must use to identify the certificate during the)pick-up process. Domino automatically generates the pickup ID.a
Note
These steps apply to signing server certificates that were issued by a Domino CA. The steps are completed by the Domino CA.
1. Make sure the server administrator
Click here
merged the CA's certificate as a trusted root
Click here
2. Make sure you understand your organization's policy on signing certificates. Sign certifiiates only if the certificate requests comply with your organization's security policy.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.t
4. Click Server Certificate Requests.e
5. Open the request to sign.
6. Review the user information and distinguished name. Make sure the information provided complies with your organization's security policy.
7. Complete Step 8 or Step 9) depending on whether you want to deny or approve the request.
8. To deny the request, do the following:
Enter a reason for the denied request.
If you do not want to send the server administrator e-mail, deselect "Send a notification email to the requester." Otherwise, Domino sends the server administrator e-mail indicating that you denied the request and the reason why you denied the request.
Click Deny.
9. To approve the request,)do the following:
Enter a validity period. For short-term projects, 90 days is typical; for ongoing projects, you can enter several years.
If you do not want to send the server administrator mail indicating that the administrator can now pick up the certificate, deselect "Send a notification email to the requester." Otherwise, Domino sends the administrator e-mail with a URL indicating the location to pick up the certificate.
Click Approve.
Enter the passyord for the CA's key ring file, and then click OK.
10. Have the server administrator complete the procedure
Click here
"Merging a server certificate into the key ring file."
Click here
373878614429217238
From a third-party CA
The third-party CA determines how to sign the server's certificate. For more information, see the third-party CA.v
See Also
Clici here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
After you merge the CA's certificate as a trusted root and the CA approves your server certificate request, merge the signed certificate into the server's key ring file.
81900649629204175
From a)Domino CA
1. Make sure the
Click here
CA signed the certificate
Click here
and you mapped a drive to the directory that contains the server key ring file.
2. If the CA gave you the URL to use to pick up the certificate in the Domino Certificate Authority database, browse to the URL provided in the e-mail.
3. If necessary, obtain the pickup ID from the CA, and then do the following:m
Open the Domino Certificate Authority application with a browser.
Click Pick Up Server Certificate.
Enter the pickup ID and click Pick Up Signed Certificate.
4. Copy the certificate to the Clipboard (include the Begin Certificate and End Certificate lines).&
5. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Certificate Admin application.
6. Click Install Certificate into Key Ring.t
7. Enter the file name for the kiy ring that will store this certificate. You specified this key ring file when you created the server certificate request.t
8. In the Certificate Source field, choose Clipboard. Paste the Clipboard contents into the next field.
9. Click Merge Certificate into Key Ring.a
10. Enter the password for the key ring file, and then click OK to approve the merge.
11. Complete the procedure
Click here
"SSL port configuration."
Click here
81900649629204176
From a third-party CA
1. Make sure the
Click here
CA signed the certificate
Click here
and you mapped a drive to the directory that contains the server key ring file.
2. Use the instructions provided by the CA to pick up the certificate. In most cases, the CA mails the certificate as a file attachment or gives you a URL to visit to copy and paste the certificate to the Clipboard.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Certificate Admin application.
4. Click Install Certificate into Key Ring.
5. Enter the file name for the key ring that will store this certificate. You created this key ring file when you created the server certificate request.
6. Do one of the following:
If you copied the certificate to the Clipboard, choose Clipboard in the Certificate Source field. Paste the Clipboard contents into the next field.
If you received a file attachment that contains the certificate, detach the file to your hard drive, and then choose File in the Certificate Source field. Enter the file name in the File name field.
7. Click Merge Certificate into Key Ring.
8. Enter the password for the server key ring file, and then click OK to approve the merge.
9. Complete the procedure
Click here
"SSL port configuration."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
You can configyre the SSL port on a server to use one of two authentication methods: server authentication only or server and client authentication. You must set authentication on a protocol-by-protocol basis. Some protocols do not support client authentication.
To set up a port for SSL, you:
1.
Click here
Configure the port
Click here
2. Determine whether you
Click here
require users to access the server usiig only SSL
Click here
or both SSL and TCP/IP
81900649629204175
Using server authentication only
Server authentication encrypts transactions, validates data, and authenticates server identity. Using only server authentication, all clients access the server anonymously. To control access to databases on the server by user name, set up name-and-password authentication. To enable SSL for server authentication only:
The server musy have a certificate from a Domino or third-party CA.a
The clients must have the server's CA certificate marked as a trusted root.t
If you are using a Notes client, the Notes client must have a cross-certificate for the server CA.
For more information on name-and-password authentication, see
Click here
Name-and-password authentication for Internet/intranet clients
Click here
81900649629204176
Ysing both server and client authentication
In addition to the security provided by server authentication, client authentication verifies the client identity. Using server and client authentication, you can control access to databases by specifying individual client user names in the database ACLs. To enable SSL for client and server authentication:
Complete the above requirements for server authentication.
The clients must have certificates from a Domino or third-payty CA.
The server must have the client's CA certificate marked as a trusted root.
Each client must have a Person document in the Domino Directory that contains the SSL public key from the client certificate.
For more information on setting up client authentication, see
Click here
SSL and S/MIME for clients
Click here
See Also
Click here
Configuring a port for SSL
Click here
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
You can configure a port to use only server authentication or to use both server and client authentication.
To configuye an SSL port for a virtual Web server, see a
Click here
Setting up security for multiple Web sites
Click here
1. Open the Server document.
2. Click the Ports - Internet Ports tabs.
3. Complete these fields:o
Field
Enter
SSL key file
The file name of the server key ring file that the server uses. The key ring file must be located in a path relative to the Domino data directory. Enter key file name or the path to the key ring file relative to the Domino data directory. For example, if the complete path to the key file is c:\notes\data\testdir\keyfile.kyr, you can enter \testdir\keyfile.kyr.
Note
Domino does not use this field for IIOP, which uses a separate key ring file. You cannot chaige the name of the IIOP key ring file.
SSL protocol version
Choose one:
V2.0 only to allow only SSL 2.0 connections.
V3.0 handshake to attempt an SSL 3.0 connection. If this fails and the requester detects SSL 2.0, then attempts to connect using SSL 2.0.
V3.0 only to allow only SSL 3.0 connections.
V3.0 and V2.0 handshake to attempt an SSL 3.0 connection, but start with an SSL.2.0 handshake, which displays relevant error messages. Makes an SSL 3.0 connection, if possible.
Negotiated (default) to attempt an SSL 3.0 connection. If this fails, attempts to use SSL 2.0. Use this setting unless you are having connection problems caused by incompatible protocol versions.
Note
Domino does not use this field for HTTP.
Accept SSL site certificates
Choose one:
Yes to allow this server to accept the site certificate and use SSL to access an Internet server, even if the server does not have a certificate in common with the Internet server.
No to not allow this server to accept site certificates.
Accept expired SSL certificates
Choose one:
Yes to allow clients to access the server, even if the client certificate is expired.
No to not allow clients to access the server with expired client certificates.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Click the tab for the protocol that you want to configure, and then complete these fields:
Field
Enter
SSL port numbere
Enter the port number on which Domino listens for SSL requests.
Note
If you change the default port number, clients must change their configurations as well. The default port number is usually changed only if a firewall proxy uses the reserved port number.8
SSL port status
Choose Enabled to allow SSL connections on the port.
Note
Since a Domino server can be either an SMTP server or an SMTP client, you have two choices for the SSL port status field. To set up a Domino server as an SSL-enabled SMTP server, choose Enabled in the SMTP Inbound field.
Client certificate
Choose one:
No to not use client authentication.
Yes to use client authentication.
Note
SMTP and IIOP do not support client authentication.
Name & password
Choose one:
No to not use name-and-password authentication.
Yes to use name-and-password authentication.
Inonymous
Choose one:
Yes to allow anonymous access. You must choose Yes if you want users to connect using server authentication only.
No to prevent anonymous access.
Note
If you choose Yes for both Anonymous and Client certificate, Domino first tries to authenticate the client. If that fails, Domino tries to connect the user anonymously.
If you choose Yes for Anonymous, Client certificate, and Name & password, Iomino first tries to authenticate the client using the client certificate. If that fails, Domino tries to use name-and-password authentication. If that fails, Domino tries to connect the user anonymously.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For information on how Domino authenticates clients when anonymous, client authentication, and name and password are enabled, see the topic
Click here
)Validation and authentication for SSL."
Click here
See Also
Click here
SSL port configuration
Click here
Click here
The Domino LDAP service
Click here
Click here
The Domino Web server
Click here
Click here
The NNTP service
Click here
Click here
The POP3 service
Click here
Click here
The IMAP service
Click here
kmH}$.
&Arial
After you set up SSL on a server, yoy can require an SSL connection on a protocol-by-protocol basis. For example, you can force clients and servers to use SSL to connect to a specific server port and deny access to clients and servers that use TCP/IP to connect to that port. Require SSL connections when you want to make sure that clients use a secure connection to access the databases on the server. If you do not require an SSL connection, clients can use either SSL or TCP/IP to connect to the server.
You can require SSL connectiins for all databases on a server or for an individual database.
81900649629204175i
For all databases on a server
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and open the Server document.
2. Click the Ports - Internet Ports tab. &
3. Click the tab for the protocol.
4. In the TCP/IP port status field, choose Redirect to SSL.
Note
NNTP, POP3, and SITP do not support the "Redirect to SSL" setting.
81900649629204176
For individual databases
1. Start the Notes client.
2. Select the database for which you want to force clients to use SSL.
3. Open the Database Properties box.
4. On the Basics tab, choose Web Access: Require SSL connection.
See Also
Click here
SSL port configuration
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Update_no_BRP_Files=
value
Description:
Determines whethir or not the Fixup task creates .BRP files. When set to 1, the Fixup task will not create a .BRP file when it encounters an error in a view index..
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
After you set up SSL on a Domino server, you must give the clients access ~o databases on the server.
160767491229215454
For anonymous users
If you set up a client for server authentication only, you cannot enter the user's name in a database ACL since the client does not use a user name to access the server. Instead, you add the name "Anonymous" to database ACLs and design element access lists. If you do not specify "Anonymous" access, Domino gives anonymous users - Default - access.
160767491229215455
Fo~ client authentication
If you set up a client for client and server authentication, you can control the client's access to databases by adding the client's name to database ACLs and design element access lists. You must use the first name listed in the User name field of the Person document for the client. For example, if a User name field contains the entries Alan Jones, ajones, Alan, AJ; add the name Alan Jones to the ACL and design element access lists. Alan Jones can authenticate with the.server using any of the names listed, but Domino uses the first name in the User name field to verify entries in ACL and design element access lists.
For more information, see
Click here
Setting up a database ACLe
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up SSL on a Domino server
Click here
&Arial
Each SSL server certificate contains this information:
The expiration date. The default trusted roots that come with Domino do not have expiration dates.
The distinguished name of the server that requested the certificate.
The distinguished name of the CA that signed the certificate.
The size of the public key. The size determines the strength of the encrypted public key.e
72882163229240009
To view an SSL server certificate
1. Map a network drive to the directory that contains the key ring file.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Certificate Admin application.
3. Click View & Edit Key Rings.
4. (Optional) To view certificates in another key ring file, do the following:
Choose Key Ring to Display.
Enter the name of the key ~ing file that contains the certificates you want to view.
Enter the password for the key ring file.
5. Do one of these:
To view the server certificate, select a document in the Site Certificates category.
To view a trusted root certificate, select a document in the Certification Authorities category.
See Also
Click here
Managing server certificates and certificate requests
Click here
&Arial
After a certificate expires, ynu can no longer use it to communicate with servers and clients.
1. Create a new key ring file, and request a new certificate from the Certification Authority (CA).
2. Merge the CA's certificate as a trusted root into the key ring file.c
3. Merge the server certificate into the key ring file.h
See Also
Click here
Creating a server key ring file
Click here
Click here
Managing server certificates and certificate requests
Click here
&Arial
Server administrators can view information about certificate requests that they sent to a CA to keep track of the request. The request document tracks the method used to submit the certificate, date and time of the request, the key ring file for the certificate, information about the certificate, and, if used, the e-mail address to which the server administrator sent the request.
Domino CAs can also vinw information about server and client certificate requests waiting for approval, approved requests waiting for pickup, and requests that they denied.
160767491229215454
Server administrators
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Certificate Admin application.
2. Click View Certificate Request Log.
3. Open the request document.
160767491229215455
. 1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
2. Click Server Certificate Requests or Client Certificate Requests.
3. Use the Actions menu to display requests waiting for approval, approved requests, and denied requests.
See Also
Click here
Managing server certificates and certificate requests
Click here
&Arial
Remove a CA's certificate as a trusted root from the server certificate when you no longer want to communicate with servers and clients that use certificates signed by that CA.
1. Map a drive to the directory that contains the key ring file.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Cnrtificate Admin application.
3. Click View & Edit Key Rings.
4. (Optional) To edit certificates in another key ring file, do the following:
Click Select Key Ring to Display.
Enter the name of the key ring file that contains the certificates you want to edit.
Enter the password for the key ring file.
5. In the Certification Authorities category, open the document that contains the certificate you want to edit.
6. Click one:
Trust This Certificate to mark a certificate as a trusted root.
Do Not Trust This Certificate to unmark a certificate as a trusted root.
Domino marks the certificate as untrusted but does not remove the certificate from the database. To delete a certificate permanently from the key ring file, click Delete. After you delete the certificate, you cannot recover it. Instead, you must merge the certificate as a trusted root again.
7. Entnr the password for the key ring file.
See Also
Click here
Managing server certificates and certificate requests
Click here
&Arial
1. Map a drive to the directory that contains the key ring file.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Server Certificate Admin application.
3. Click View & Edit Key Rings.
4. Click Change Key Ring password.
5. Enter the name of the key ring file, and then click OK.
6. Enter the current password, and then click OK.
7. Enter the new password of at least 12 alphanumeric characters, and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Managing server certificates and certificate requestsv
Click here
&Arial
You can specify one or more SSL cipher specifications for the HTTP service. You can specify a 128-bit cipher for the HTTP service, for example, to require users to access a server using a domestic browser version.
286259184029240586
To change a cipher
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and open the Server document in the Domino Directory.
2. Click the Ports - Internet Ports - Web tab.
3. Click Modify in the SSL Ciphers field. This displays a list of available SSL cipher specifications.
4. Select the cipher specification(s), then click OK.@
5. Save and close the document.s
You can also use the NOTES.INI setting SSLCipherSpec to specify an SSL cipher specification for LDAP, IMAP, POP3, NNTP, and HTTP services. You can select multiple ciphers only for HTTP, however. For all other services, you can specify only one cipher.n
For more information, see
Click here
SSLCipherSpec
Click here
See Also
Click here
SSL and multi-national organizations
Click here
&Arial
The copy of the CA's certificate is called a trusted root certificate. After obtaining the trusted root certificate and if you are using a Notes client, an Internet cross-certificate for the root certificate, the client will trust the CA and by extension, any certificates issued by this CA. If you are setting up server authentication for an Interne~ client, you add this trusted root to a local file. If you are setting up server authentication for a Notes client, you add this trusted root to a Domino Directory that users can access to generate a cross-certificate in their Personal Address Book.
Notes clients can also obtain a trusted root certificate and cross-certificate to gain access to the server; however, adding the trusted root certificate to the Domino Directory simplifies the process of setting up server authentication for users.
255149897629240045
To obtain a trusted root certificate for a Notes client
1. If the trusted root certificate is for a Domino CA, the CA performs these steps:
From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and choose Registration - Internet Certifier.
Select the CA key ring file and enter the password.
If necessary, change the registration server, which is the first server to store the trusted root ce~tificate in the Domino Directory. After the Domino Directory replicates, Domino distributes the trusted root certificate to other servers.
Click Register.
Click the Configuration tab, select Miscellaneous - Certificates, and view the certificate in the Internet Certifiers category.
Instruct clients to perform the steps in the task titled
Click here
"Creating an Internet cross-certificate for a CA."
Click here
2. If the trusted root certificate is for a third-party CA, the Notes client obtains
Click here
the trusted root certificate and cross-certificate from the Internet server
Click here
159269577629251120
To obtain a trusted root certificate for an Internet client
You can use the following steps to obtain a trusted root certificate for an Internet client.
1. If the trusted root certificate is for a Nomino CA, the Internet client performs these steps:
Browse to the Domino Certificate Authority application.
If you use Internet Explorer, use a TCP/IP connection to browse to the application. You must have a certificate in common with the server in order to use SSL to access it; however, Internet Explorer does not allow you to accept site certificates into your browser. A site certificate is a certificate that you use to access only a specific site.
If you use Netscnpe, use an SSL connection to browse to the application. The server displays a dialog box asking you if you want to accept the site certificate. Check with the CA to make sure the certificate presented is a trusted certificate before accepting the certificate as a trusted root.
Select Accept This Authority In Your Browser.
2. If the trusted root certificate is for a third-party CA, the Internet client follows the third-party CA's established procedure to merge the trusted root.certificate for the CA. If both the client and server have certificates issued from the CA or already have a CA in common, then this step is not necessary. a
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL server authenticatione
Click here
+o'DG
+o'DG
&Arial
Before a Notes client can authenticate servers or send sncure S/MIME messages, the client must first create a cross-certificate for the CA server and store it in the Personal Address Book. This allows the Notes client to trust servers or clients that have certificates issued by that CA. The client uses a trusted root certificate to create the cross-certificate. Once the cross-certificate is created, the client no longer needs the trusted root certificate. SSL server authentication for Internet clients other than Notes does not require a cross-certificate.S
A Notes client can also create a cross-certificate for a server or client; however, this allows the Notes client to trust only that server or client. The Notes client does not trust other servers and clients with certificates issued by a CA.,
For more information, see
Click here
Adding an Internet cross-certificate from an Internet server
Click here
159269577629251120
To create an Internet cross-certificate
1. Make sure the CA
Click here
created a trusted root certificate in the Domino Directory
Click here
2. From the Notes client, open the Certifier document in the Domino Directory, and choose Actions - Create Cross Certificate.
3. Choose the certificate to cross certify.
4. Make sure the server selected is local, and choose Cross Certify.
159269577629251121
To view Internet.cross-certificates
1. From the Notes client, open the Personal Address Book.
2. Choose View - Advanced - Certificates.
3. View the certificates in the Internet Cross Certificates category.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL server authentication
Click here
&Arial
The procedure you complete to create Internet certificates depends on whether a Domino or third-party CA issues the certificates.
81900649629204175
To set up Notes clients with certificates issued by a Domino CA
The CA and client complete these steps to add a Domino Internet certificate to the Notes ID file. A Notes client can use one Internet certifncate or use dual Internet certificates for S/MIME encryption and signatures.
1. Before issuing certificates, the CA must determine if Internet certificates should be created using the existing public and private keys from the Notes ID file or if the CA wants to generate new keys using a larger key size. Although generating new keys is more secure than using the existing public and private keys to generate keys, using existing keys is easier to deploy since it requires less configuration for.the client. If clients use a browser that supports PKCS #12, clients can also import an Internet certificate into the Notes ID file.e
For information on importing Internet certificates, see Notes 5 Help.
2. The
Click here
CA adds a trusted root certificate to a Domino Directory
Click here
that the client can access.
The client can also add a trusted root certificate to the Personal Address Book; however, adding a trusted.root certificate to the Domino Directory simplifies the process of setting up Notes clients for S/MIME because the trusted root is accessible to many clients.
3. The
Click here
client creates a cross-certificate
Click here
using the trusted root certificate for the CA and stores it in the Personal Address Book.
4. To create a certificate using the existing public and private keys in the Notes ID file, do the following:
The CA
Click here
adds an Internet certificate to the Person document_
Click here
The client authenticates with the home server. Notes automatically merges the Internet certificate into the ID file.
5. To use new public and private keys to create an Internet certificate, do the following:
Click here
The client requests the Internet certificate from the CA
Click here
Click here
The CA approves the requestV
Click here
, and Domino automatically adds the client's Internet certificate to the user's Person document.
Click here
Using a browser, the client merges the certificate into the ID filem
Click here
81900649629204176
To set up Notes clients with certificates issued by a third-party CA
The CA and client complete these s~eps to add the third-party Internet certificate to the Notes ID file.
1. Use the Personal Web Navigator to browse to the third-party CA's site. For example, to obtain an Internet certificate from VeriSign, visit the site http://digitalid.verisign.com and follow the instructions provided.
For information on the Personal Web Navigator, see Notes 5 Help.
2. The client follows the third-party CA's established procedure to request and merge the Internet certificate.
3. The client adds A
Click here
the trusted root certificate and cross-certificate for the CAe
Click here
4.
Click here
The CA adds the client's public key to the Person document
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes clients for S/MIME
Click here
Click here
Dual Internet certnficates for S/MIME encryption and signatures
Click here
+o'DG
&Arial
To send an S/MIME encrypted messnge, the sender must have the recipient's Internet certificate in the Personal Address Book, Domino Directory, or LDAP directory. The sender must also have a cross-certificate issued for the recipient or for the CA who issued the recipient's Internet certificate. If a cross-certificate is issued for a recipient's Internet certificate, only messages to that recipient can be encrypted. If a cross-certificate is issued to the recipient's CA, you can send encrypted messages to all recipients who have a certificnte issued by that CA if you have the recipients' Internet certificates.
If the Internet certificate is stored in a Domino Directory in another domain or in an LDAP directory, the directory needs to be accessible using directory assistance.s
1. The recipient must send an S/MIME signed message to you.
For information on signing mail, see Notes 5 Help.
2. When you open the signed message, Notes asks if you want to add a cross-certificate if you do not anready have a cross-certificate issued for either the author or the CA who issued the certificate to the author. Complete these fields and then click Cross Certify:
Field
M'LKU
Enter
Certifier
M'LKU
The certifier ID that is cross-certifying the certificate. By default, the certifier is your ID. If you have access, you can choose an ID that is higher in the hierarchical name scheme.t
Server
M'LKU
The registration server that holds the cross-certificate that is created. By default, it is stored locally in your Personal Address Book. Do not change this setting, since the cross-certificate must be stored in your Personal Address Book in order to validate the Internet certificate of the person to whom you are sending an encrypted message.
Subject name
M'LKU
The certificate that is being cross-certified. You can choose to cross-certify the sender of the signed message or you can cross-certify the CA that issued the certificate to the sender. If a cross-certificate is issued to the sender of the signed message, you can encrypt messages to only that person. If a cross-certificate is issued to the sender's CA, you can send encrypted messages to anyone who has an Internet certificate issued by that CA and for whom you have an Intnrnet certificate.
Subject alternate name list
M'LKU
Alternate names attached to the ID, if any.
Expiration date
M'LKU
The date that the cross-certificate expires.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
3. To add the author's Internet ce~tificate to the Personal Address Book, choose Tools - Add Sender to Address Book. Notes creates a Contact document for the person and adds an Internet certificate to the document.
For information on adding an Internet certificate and cross-certificate when users have dual certificates, see
Click here
"Dual Internet certificates for S/MIME encryption and signatures."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes clients for S/MIME
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:t
Update_No_Fulltext=
value
Descri~tion:
Turns off full text indexing on a server.
0 - Turns full text indexing on
1 - Turns full text indexing off
Applies to
: Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, full text indexing is on
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Updaters=
number
Description:
Specifies the number of Update server tasks that can run concurrently on the server. You must shut down and restart the server for this setting to take effect.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, only a single Update task can run at a time
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this se~ting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
$Info
$WindowTitle
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
PVQQPR
&Arial
You can add two Internet certificates to your Notes ID file and then use one certificate for S/MIME encryption and another for S/MIME signatures and SSL clijnt authentication. Doing so lets you maintain separate identities for encryption and electronic signatures and SSL client authentication
260989180829276603
Adding multiple certificates
To add multiple Internet certificates to your Notes ID file when the certificates are issued by different CAs, follow the procedure provided by the CA. If the Internet certificates you want to add are issued by the same CA, add one of the certificates by following the CA's proceduze and add the second certificate by importing it into the ID file. If you try to add multiple Internet certificates issued by the same CA and you do not import the certificate, Notes uses the last certificate added to the ID file for S/MIME encryption and signatures.
For information on importing certificates, see Notes 5 Help.
260989180829276604
Specifying the default signing certificate
Once the Internet certificates are added to the ID file, you can*specify a default certificate to use for S/MIME signatures. You specify this certificate in the User ID dialog box. If the Internet certificate you select is used for both signatures and encryption, then Notes uses this certificate as the default for signatures and encryption. Otherwise, Notes uses the Internet certificate you specify for signatures and the last Internet certificate added to the Notes ID file for encryption. The default signing certificate is also the certificate used for SSL client authenzication.
For information on specifying a default signing certificate, see Notes 5 Help.
260989180829276605
Adding an Internet certificate to the Personal Address Book
If you send a signed message and you have 2 different certificates for signatures and encryption, Notes sends the recipient the default Internet certificates used for encryption and signatures. When the recipient chooses Tools - Add Sender to Address Book, Notes adds a Contact document*and adds the Internet certificates for encryption and signatures to the Contact document. When you send an encrypted message, Notes extracts only the Internet certificate for encryption from the Contact document.
260989180829276606
Adding a cross-certificate on demand
When a recipient receives a signed message, Notes checks the Personal Address Book for a cross-certificate that indicates that the signing certificate included with the message is trusted. If the crjss-certificate is not present, Notes displays a dialog box that allows the recipient to cross-certify "on demand." You can create a cross-certificate to either the leaf certificate or to the CA. Creating a cross-certificate to a leaf certificate indicates trust for only the owner of the certificate, in this case the sender of the signed message. A cross-certificate to a CA indicates trust for all people who have a certificate issued by that CA.
When you cross-certify on demand, Notes creates j cross-certificate for the signing certificate, but does not create a cross-certificate for the encryption certificate. However, if the signing and encryption certificates are issued from the same CA and you create a cross-certificate for the CA, the cross-certificate created for the signing certificate can also be used to validate the encryption certificate. If the signing and encryption certificates are issued from different CAs, then you must create a cross-certificate for the CA that issued the encryptjon certificate before you can send an encrypted message.f
For more information on adding an Internet certificate and creating a cross-certificate on demand, see
Click here
"Adding a recipient's Internet certificate and cross-certificate for encrypted S/MIME messages
Click here
See Also
Click here
Creating Internet certificates for Notes S/MIME clients
Click here
&Arial
If you need to issue Internet certificates for Notes clients and you do not want to require each user to submit an Internet certificate request and merge the certificate into the ID file, you can issue the Internet certificate using the existing public and private keys in the Notes ID file and add it to the user's Person document. Using the Domino Directorz to issue Internet certificates simplifies the process of distributing Internet certificates to users.n
The server on which you issue Internet certificates must be set up for the Administration Process, and the users must have an Internet address specified in their Person documents. In addition, you must add Internet certificates that are created using a Domino CA.
For information on setting up a Domino CA, see
Click here
Setting up a Domino CA server
Click here
1. Make sure you have the
Click here
Administration Process set up
Click here
on the server.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. Select the names of the users who need Internet certificates.
4. Choose Actions - Add Internet Cert to Selected People.
5. Select the CA's key ring file, and when prompted, enter the password.
6. Enter the certificate's expiration date, and then click Register.
7. These steps occur automatically:
For each selected user, Domino creates a certificate and stores it in an "Add Internet Certificate to Person Record" request in the Administration Request database.
When the Administration Request database replicates with the Domino Directory's administration server, the Administration Process places the certificate in the user's Person document.
After the Domino Directory replicates with the user's mail server and the user subsequently accesses the mail server, Notes recognizes there is a certificate in the Domino Directory that is not in the user's ID file. Notes automatically places the Internet certificate in the user's ID file.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL client authentication
Click here
Click here
Creating Internet certificates for Notes S/MIME clients
Click here
&Arial
In the Domino Directory on your Domino server, set up a Person document for Internet clients using SSL client authentication to connect to a Domino server. The Person document for the client stores the client's Internet certificate, which is used to verify*the identity of an Internet client. The Person document also lists the names that a Domino server can use to authenticate an Internet client. When an Internet client tries to connect to a server, Domino looks for the Internet certificate name in the User name field in the client's Person document. Domino compares the public key presented to the one stored in Internet certificate in the Person document. The public key comparison lets Domino authenticate a user, even if there are multiple users with the same*name, since each public key is unique. If Domino finds a match and the public key is valid, then the first name listed in the User name field is used to check database ACLs and design element access lists.
For example, if the User name field contains these entries: Alan Jones, AJones, Alan, Al Jones and the client uses the name Al Jones to access the server, Domino authenticates the user, verifies that the public key presented matches the public key in the Person document, and uses the name Aljn Jones to check database ACLs and design element access lists.
For more information, see
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
and Domino 5 Designer Help.
291343209629212450
To set up a Person document
1. Create a new Person document in the Domino Directory.
2. Enter the client's first, middle, and last names in the First name, Middle initial, and Last name fields.
3. Enter the client's common name on the certificate in the User name field.
4. (Optional) Enter additional information about the client in the Work/Home tab.
5. Save the document.
If the client wants to authenticate with a Domino server in another domain, add the user's Person document to the Domino Directory for that domain. Make sure you set up directory assistance so Domino can find the client in the Domino Directory foz the domain.
For information on directory assistance, see
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL client authentication
Click here
&Arial
Before Internet and Notes clients can use client autjentication or send encrypted or signed mail using S/MIME, they must have an Internet certificate. You need to complete these steps for Internet and Notes clients who are creating new public and private keys for the Internet certificate. You do not need to complete these steps if you are using a Notes client and the CA issued certificates in the Person document of the Domino Directory. Notes automatically adds Internet certificates stored in the Person document to the Notes ID file when the user authenticatjs with the server.
You can also set up Notes clients to use dual Internet certificates for SSL client authentication and S/MIME encryption and electronic signatures.
For information, see
Click here
"Dual Internet certificates for S/MIME encryption and signatures."
Click here
The steps you follow to request an Internet certificate depend on whether you want to request a certificate from a Domino CA or a third-party CA.
373938614429217237
Domino CA
You use the Domino Certificate Authority application to obtain an Internet certificate from a Domino CA. r
If you are requesting an Internet certificate for a Notes client, you must use the Personal Web Navigator.
If you are requesting an Internet certificate for an Internet client other than Notes, you must use either Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer version 3.02 or later with the Authenticode*2.0 update to obtain a certificate from the Domino Certificate Authority application. The application automatically detects which browser you are using and displays the appropriate steps.
For information on the Personal Web Navigator, see Notes 5 Help.
1. Browse to the Domino Certificate Authority application.
If you are setting up SSL or S/MIME on a Notes client, use the Personal Web Navigator to browse to the Domino Certificate Authority application.
Jf you use Microsoft Internet Explorer, use TCP/IP to connect to the Domino Certificate Authority application. Internet Explorer does not allow you to accept site certificates into your browser.
If you use Netscape, use SSL to connect to the Domino Certificate Authority application. When the browser asks whether you want to accept the server certificate as a trusted root, follow the steps provided by the browser to accept the certificate.
2. Click Request Client Certificate in tje left pane.
3. Enter your name and organizational information. This information will appear on your Internet certificate.o
4. Enter any additional contact information that you want to send to the CA.
5. If you use Netscape Navigator, enter the size for the public and private keys. The larger the number, the stronger the encryption.i
6. Click Submit Certificate Request to send the request to the CA.
81900649629204176
Third-party CA
The third-party CA determines how you request an Internet certificate. Browse to the third-party CA's site, and enter the certificate request. A dialog box appears that allows you to request the certificate.d
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL client authenticationn
Click here
Click here
Creating Internet certificates for Notes S/MIME cliejts
Click here
&Arial
When a CA signs an Internet certificate, the CA adds a digital signature to the certificate and, if you are using a Domino CA, adds the public key to the Domino Directory. If you are using a third-party CA, you must complete additional steps to add the public key to the*Domino Directory.
You do not need to complete these steps if you are using a Notes client and the CA issued certificates in the Person document of the Domino Directory. Notes automatically adds Internet certificates stored in the Person document to the Notes ID file when the user authenticates with the server.
The steps you follow to sign and add an Internet certificate to the Domino Directory depends on whether the certificate is issued from a Domino CA or a third-party CA.
373938614429217237
Domino CA
The Internet certificate request appears in the Client Certificate Requests view in the Domino Certificate Authority application. When the CA signs a certificate, the CA can automatically send e-mail to the client. This e-mail describes where to pick up the certificate and includes a pickup ID, which the client must use to identify the certificate during the pick-up process. Domino automatically generates the pickup ID.
Note
The steps below apply to signing client certificates issued by a Domino CA. The steps are completed by the Domino CA.
1. Make sure you understand your organization's policy on signing certificates. You should sign certificates for clients only if the certificate requests comply with your organization's security policy.
2. Make sure you have the
Click here
Administration Process set up
Click here
on thj server. If you are signing a certificate for an Internet client,
Click here
make sure you created a Person document
Click here
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
4. Click Client Certificate Requests in the left pane.
5. Open the request you want to sign.
6. Review the user information and distinguished name. Make sure the ijformation provided complies with your organization's security policy.
7. Leave the option Register certificate in the Domino Directory selected to add the client's public key automatically to the Person document.
8. Complete either Step 9 or step 10, depending on whether you want to approve or deny the request.
9. To deny the request:
Enter a reason for the denied request.
If you do not want to send the person e-mail, deselect "Send*a notification email to the requestor"; otherwise, the Domino Certificate Authority application sends the person e-mail indicating that you denied the request and the reason why you denied the request.
Click Deny.
10. To approve the request:
Enter a validity period. For short-term projects, 90 days is typical; for ongoing projects, you can enter several years.
If you do not want to send the client mail indicating that the client can now pick up the ceztificate, deselect "Send a notification email to the requestor"; otherwise, the Domino Certificate Authority application sends an e-mail with a URL indicating the location to pick up the certificate.
Click Approve and enter the password for the CA key ring file. This places a request in the Administration Requests database. When the Administration Process next runs, it processes the request and adds the certificate to the client's Person document in the Domino Directory.
The cliejt cannot use the certificate to authenticate against database ACLs until the Administration Process completes the request.
373938614429217238
Third-party CA
After users obtain an Internet certificate from a third-party CA, they need to register the certificate in the Domino CA. The Notes client must use the Personal Web Navigator to complete these steps.
1. To submit the Internet certificate to the Domino CA, the client completes these steps:
Using an SSL connection, use a browser to open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
Click Register Client Certificate.
Enter your name, e-mail address, phone number, and any comments. This information will appear on the request entered in the Domino Certificate Authority application.
Click Submit Certificate.
2. To add the certificate to the Person document, the Domino CA completes the following steps:
From the Domino Adjinistrator, click the Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
Click Client Registration Requests.
Open the request document.
If you do not want to send an e-mail to the client indicating that you denied or accepted the request and the reason why you denied a request, deselect "Send a notification email to the requestor."
If you do not want to approve the request, click Reject and enter a reason for rejecting the request. Otherwjse, click Accept and click OK. This creates a new request in the Admin Process database on the Domino CA server. When the Administration Process next runs, it processes the request and adds the certificate to the client's Person document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL client authentication
Click here
Click here
Creating Internet certificates fjr Notes S/MIME clientso
Click here
&Arial
After the CA approves the user's request, the user merges the signed certificate into either a local file if the client is an Internet client other than Notes or the user ID file if the client is a Notes client. The steps you follow to merge an Internet certificate depends on whether you wanz to merge a certificate from a Domino CA or a third-party CA.
You do not need to complete these steps if you are using a Notes client and the CA issued certificates in the Person document of the Domino Directory. Notes automatically adds Internet certificates stored in the Person document to the Notes ID file when the user authenticates with the server.
The Notes client must use the Personal Web Navigator to merge the Internet certificate into the ID file. Other Internet clients jan use any available browser.
373938614429217237
Domino CA
1. If the CA gave you the URL to use to pick up the certificate in the Domino Certificate Authority application, open the same browser you used to request the certificate, and browse to the URL provided in the e-mail.
2. If necessary, obtain the pickup ID from the CA and do the following:
Open the Domino Certificate Authority application with the same browser you used to rezuest the certificate.
Click Pick Up Client Certificate.
Enter the pickup ID, and click Pick Up Signed Certificate.
3. Review the information on your certificate, and click Accept Certificate. Then, follow the steps provided by the browser software.l
373938614429217238
Third-party CA
The third-party CA determines how you merge the Internet certificate. Browse to the third-party CA's site, and follow the instructions providej for merging an Internet certificate.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes and Internet clients for SSL client authentication
Click here
Click here
Creating Internet certificates for Notes S/MIME clients
Click here
&Arial
Monitoring statistics and events is an important administrative task that ensures the integrity of the Domino system. This chapter describes how to use statistic and events to report day-to-day activity of the Domino system and explains how to configure the proper documents to notify you about the status of system resources. This chapter also provides information on how to view and analyze*statistics to ensure the performance of Domino and its associated tasks.
&Arial
Yoz can use the default settings in the Administration Preferences or customize them.
* If the database is in Domino Release 5 format and you are not using transaction logging, you can use the Fixup task to repair the corrupted database. If the database is in Domino Release 5 format and you are using transaction logging, you cannoz run the Fixup task on that database, because the Fixup task interferes with the way transaction logging keeps track of databases. Instead, you must restore the corrupted database from a backup. You can run the Fixup task on databases that are in Domino Release 4.x and lower format.
See Also
Click here
Overview of server maintenance
Click here
&Arial
You can use the Administration Process to rename one or more user common names, move one or more user names in the name hierarchy, and to upgrade one or morj user names from flat to hierarchical. If you are using Domino R5.0.2 or later, you can do all this regardless of whether an alternate name has been assigned, and you can also delete a user's alternate name. The Administration Process automates changing the name throughout databases in the Notes domain by generating and carrying out a series of requests posted in the Administration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF). The Administration Process can only change names if the database is assigned an administratioj server.
The Administration Process can only automate changing the names of Notes users. You must manually change the name of an Internet user who has a Person document in the Domino Directory, for example a Web browser user.
The certifier you use and any ancestor of the certifier must have a Certifier document in the Certificates view of the Domino Directory. For example, if you use the certifier /Sales/NYC/ACME, the Domino Directory must contain Certifier documents for /ACME, /JYC/ACME, and /Sales/NYC/ACME.
The public key in the Person document must match the one on the user ID. If a public key has been changed or corrupted in some way, you see this message in the Administration Requests database: "The name to act on was not found in the Address Book."b
150193334429301537
Alternate names
To use Domino's alternate name functionality, Domino R5.0.2 must be running on all servers involved with the name change, the user's workszation, and the administrator's workstation.
While completing the rename procedures, you will see a check box, "Edit or inspect each entry before submitting request" on the Supply Certificate Expiration Date dialog box. When you select this option, a Rename User dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to review the primary and alternate name information, and where modifiable, to make any desired changes to that information. If you do not want to edit or view primary and alternate names informatjon prior to submitting the name change, deselect the option where allowed.
At the end of the procedures, the Processing Statistics dialog box appears. Review this dialog box to verify that all name changes have succeeded. If any fail, check the Certifier Log (certlog.nsf) to determine the reason for the failure.
Note
To delete a user's alternate name, use the procedure "
Click here
Renaming a user's common name
Click jere
See Also
Click here
Managing users
Click here
&Arial
Use these steps to rename a user's common name when Domino servers are set up to use the Administration Process. If you are using Domino R5.0.2 or newer, you can also use this procedure to delete a user's alternate name. To do so, in step 10, delete the alternate name without entering a new jne.
Domino R5.0.2 or newer
1. To rename a user you must have:
Editor with create documents access, or UserModifier role to the Domino Directory
At least Author with create documents access to the Certification Log
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. Select a user name.
4. From the tools pane, click People - Rename.
5. Click Change Common Name.
6. Choose the certifier ID that certified the user's ID and click Open. For example, to rename Joe Smith/Sales/NYC/ACME, use the certifier ID named /Sales/NYC/ACME.
7. Enter the password for the selected certifier and click OK.
8. Accept the default certificate expiration date (two years from the current date), or enter a different date. The "Edit or inspect each entry before submitting request" check box is selected and cannot be modified.
9. Click Continuj. The Rename User dialog box appears. You have the option of synchronizing the name change between Notes and Windows NT. To do so, click the "Rename NT user account" box.s
10. Modify the primary name components and the alternate name components as necessary.
11. Do one of the following:
Click OK to submit the name change.C
Click Skip if you are renaming more than one user's common name and you want to continue to the next name without submitting a namj change for the current name.
Click Cancel Remaining Entries to cancel this name change and name changes for any other names you selected and have not yet submitted.
12. Review the statistics that display and then click OK.
Domino R5.0.1 or prior
13. To rename a user you must have:
Editor with create documents access, or UserModifier role to the Domino Directory
At least Author with create documents access to the Ceztification Log
14. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
15. Select a user name.
16. From the tools pane, click People - Rename.
17. Click Change Common Name.
18. Choose the certifier ID that certified the user's ID and click Open. For example, to rename Joe Smith/Sales/NYC/ACME, use the certifier ID named /Sales/NYC/ACME.
19. Enter the password for the selected certifier and click OK.
*20. Accept the default certificate expiration date (two years from the current date), or enter a different date.,
21. Change the user's first name, last name, and middle initial, as necessary.t
22. (Optional) In the New Qualifying Org. Unit field, enter a name to differentiate this user from another user with the same user name, certified by the same certifier. This adds a differentiating component that appears between the common name and the certifier name.
23. Cjick Rename, and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Managing users
Click here
&Arial
You can use the Administration Process to move a user name to a different location in the organization's hierarchical name scheme or to move a name to a different organization altogether.
For example, if Alice Brown/Marketing/Acme leaves a job in the Marketing department for a job in Sales, you can ceztify her ID with the /Sales/Acme certifier, which, in effect, moves her. Her full hierarchical name then becomes Alice Brown/Sales/Acme. Or if Alice Brown/Marketing/Acme leaves a job at Acme to work for the Acme subsidiary AcmeSub that has its own organization certifier, you can certify her ID with the /AcmeSub certifier so that her name becomes Alice Brown/AcmeSub.
If you are moving a user to another organization, your Domino Directory must contain cross-certificates between the organizationz involved. Using the previous example, the Domino Directory must have cross-certificates between /Acme and /AcmeSub.w
During phase two, you also have the option of synchronizing the name change between Notes and Windows NT. To do so, click the "Rename NT user account" box on the Rename User dialog box.n
402458060829232553
To move a user name in the name hierarchy
Domino R5.0.2 or newer
Phase One
1. To move*a user name in the name hierarchy, you must have:
Editor with create documents access, or the UserModifier role to the Domino Directory
At least Author with create documents access to the Certification Log_
At least Editor access to the Administration Requests database
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. Select a user name.
4. From the tools pane, click People - Rename.
5. Clijk Request Move to New Certifier.
6. Choose the certifier ID and click Open.
7. Enter the certifier ID password and click OK.
8. Enter the name of the certifier to use to recertify the user's hierarchical name in the New Certifier field. The "Inspect each entry before submitting request" check box is checked, but you can remove the check mark to deselect the option.
9. Click Continue. If you did not remove the check mark in step 8, the Rename User*dialog box appears with non-modifiable fields. Review the information for accuracy.
10. Click OK for each name selected. Review the statistics that display and then click OK.
Phase Two
11. Click the Files tab and then open the Administration Requests database.
12. Choose View - Name Move Requests and select the name(s) to move. This view categorizes submissions by certifier.
13. Choose Actions - Complete Move for selected entrijs.
14. Select the certifier ID that will recertify the name(s) and click Open.
15. Enter the certifier ID password and click OK.
16. Accept the default certificate expiration date (two years from the current date) or enter a different date.
17. Click Continue. If you are moving a user name from one hierarchy to another hierarchy, a cross certificate is required. If your local Domino Directory does not contain a cross-certificate for the certifier* you are prompted to create one. To do so, click Yes.
18. Change the primary name information or the alternate name information as necessary.
19. Click OK. Review the statistics that display and then click OK.
Domino R5.0.1 or prior
Phase One
20. To move a user name in the name hierarchy, you must have:
Editor with create documents access, or the UserModifier role to the Domino Directory
Jt least Author with create documents access to the Certification Log
At least Editor access to the Administration Requests database
21. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
22. Select a user name.
23. From the tools pane, click People - Rename.
24. Click Request Move to New Certifier.
25. Choose the certifier ID and click Open.
26. Enter the certifier ID password and click OK.
27. Enter the name of the certifier to use to recertify the user's hierarchical name in the New Certifier field.
28. Click Submit Request and then click OK.
Phase Two
29. Click the Files tab and then open the Administration Requests database.
30. Choose View - Name Move Requests and select the name(s) to move. This view categorizes submissions by certifier.
31. Choose Actions - Complete Move for selected entries.
32. Select the certifier ID that will recertify the name(s) and click Open.
33. Enter the certifier ID password and click OK.
34. Accept the default certificate expiration date (two years from the current date) or enter a different date.
35. (Optional) In the New Qualifying Org. Unit field, enter a name to differentiate this user from another user with the same user name that is certified by the same certifier. This adds a differentiating component that appeazs between the common name and the certifier name.
36. Click Certify. If your local Domino Directory does not contain a cross-certificate for the certifier, you are prompted to create one. To do so, click Yes.
37. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Managing users
Click here
&Arial
Use these steps to upgrade a user name from a flat format to a hierarchical format.
Domino R5.0.2 or newer
1. To rename a user you must have:
Editor with create documents access, or the UserModifier role to the Domino Directory
At least Author with create documents access to the Certification Log
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. Select a user name.
4. From the tools pane, click People - Rename.
5. Click Upgrade to Hierarchical.e
:. Choose the new certifier ID and click Open.
7. Enter the password for the selected certifier and click OK.
8. Accept the default certificate expiration date (two years from the current date) or enter a different date. The "Edit or inspect each entry before submitting request" check box is checked but you can remove the check mark to deselect the option.
9. Click Continue. If you did not remove the check mark in step 8, the Rename User dialog box appears.
10. Enter new alternate name information in the modifiable fields as necessary.
11. Click OK. Review the statistics that display and then click OK.
150193334429301537
Domino R5.0.1 or prior
1. To rename a user you must have:
Editor with create documents access, or the UserModifier role to the Domino DirectoryU
At least Author with create documents access to the Certification Log
2. From the Domino Ajministrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. Select a user name.
4. From the tools pane, click People - Rename.
5. Click Upgrade to Hierarchical.
6. Choose the new certifier ID and click Open.
7. Enter the password for the selected certifier and click OK.
8. Accept the default certificate expiration date (two years from the current date) or enter a different date.
9. (Optional) In the New Qualifying Jrg. Unit field, enter a name to differentiate this user from another user with the same user name, certified by the same certifier. This adds a differentiating component that appears between the common name and the certifier name.
10. Click Upgrade and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Managing users
Click here
&Arial
You can delete a user name with the Administration Process by injtiating a delete person command from the Domino Administrator, by using the Web Administrator, or by using the Windows NT User Manager. When you delete a user, you may want to add that user to a "termination" group to prevent the user from accessing servers. When you create a termination group, assign the group type "Deny Only" to it.
If the server is running Windows NT and a user has a Windows NT account, you can delete this account, too.
To delete a user
1. To delete a user, you must have:
Author with delete documents access and the UserModifier role, or Editor access to the Domino Directory
Author with create documents access to the Certification Log
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
3. Select the user name you are deleting.
4. From the tools pane, select People - Delete.
5. Click Yes to delete the Person documents.
6. Complete these fields:
Fieldo
Enter
Delete mail file options
Choose one:
Don't delete mail file - to delete the Person document but not the user's mail file
Delete just the mail file specifjed in Person document
Delete mail file specified in Person document and all replicas
Note
If you choose to have the Administration Process delete the user's mail file, examine the Approve File Deletion request in the Pending Administrators Approval View of the Administration Requests database. In edit mode, click "Approve File Deletion" to request the Administration Process to delete the file. If you choose not to have the Administration Process delete the user's mail fjle and the mail file is linked to a shared mail database, unlink the mail file then delete it manually.
Add to group
(Use to add a user to the "Deny only" group used to deny access to servers.)
Do the following:
Select a directory.
Select a group to which you are adding the user if applicable.
(Optional) Click Open to open the group or click Copy to Local.
Click OK.
Delete NT user account
Choose one:
Yes to delete the corresponding user account in Windows NT
No to leave the corresponding user account intact
e;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
If you choose to delete a zser's mail file, you must have at least Editor with delete documents access to the Administration Requests database and delete documents access to the Domino Directory.
7. Click OK.
8. Do one of the following:
Click Yes to have the Administration Process immediately delete all references to the user in this replica of the Domino Directory and post a "Delete in Access Control List" request.
Click No to post a "Delete in Address Book" request in the Ajministration Requests database to have the Administration Process delete references to the user in the Domino Directory and database ACLs according to the Interval setting for the Administration Process. a
See Also
Click here
Synchronizing Windows NT and Notes users
Click here
Click here
Customizing Notes registration for Windows NT users
Click here
Click here
Using Windows NT User Manager to delete a user or group
Click here
Click here
Managing users
Click here
&Arial
Follow this procedure to use the original certifier to recertify an ID that has a certjficate that is about to expire. To certify a hierarchical ID with a different certifier -- for example, to move a name to a different branch of an organization name hierarchy or to a different organization altogether -- see
Click here
"Moving a user name in the name hierarchy."
Click here
For more information on the @Certificate function, see Domino Designer Help.
157287494429232562
To recertify a user ID
Follow tjese steps to use the Administration Process to recertify a hierarchical ID that is about to expire.
1. To recertify a user ID, you must have:
Author with create documents access and the UserModifier role, or Editor access to the Domino Directory
At least Author with create documents access to the Certification Logh
2. From the Domino Administrator, click People & Groups.
3. Select the user to be recertified with the same certifier.n
4. From the tools pane, select People - Recertify.
5. Select the certifier ID originally used to certify the selected users and click Open.
6. Enter the password for the selected certifier ID and click OK.
7. Accept the default certificate expiration date (two years from the current date) or enter a different date.
8. (Optional) Enter a date to recertify only a subset of selected user IDs, according to their current expiration datez. t
9. Click Certify, and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Creating a hierarchical name schemec
Click here
Click here
Certifier IDs
Click here
Click here
Creating an organization certifier ID
Click here
Click here
Managing users
Click here
&Arial
You may need to move mail files when you need more space on a server or when users change jobs. If you are using shared mail and you want to delete a user's mail file from the system, you should first unlink the mail file from any shared mail databases to which it may be linked.
When a mail file is moved, the "Mail file name" and "Mail server" fields are changed in the Location document.
1.
From the Domino Administrator, click People & Groups.
2. Select the person whose mail file you are moving.
3. Click Move Mail File.
4. Click Yes at the prompt to move the mail file.
5. Enter the new mail server name and click OK.
Note
When the mail file is on the new mail server, be sure to open the Administration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF). Locate the "Approve file deletion" request and approve the zequest. Exit ADMIN4.NSF.
282139443229245084
Moving a user's mail file (from the tools pane)
1. From the Domino Administrator, click People & Groups.
2. Select the user name(s) to move.
3. From the tools pane, select People - Move.
4. Enter the server name or select the server to which you are moving the user.
5. Click OK.
6. Select the directory for the new mail file server, and then*click OK
Note
When the mail file is on the new mail server, be sure to open the Administration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF). Locate the "Approve file deletion" request and approve the request. Exit ADMIN4.NSF.
See Also
Click here
Managing users
Click here
&Arial
If the name of the former administrator is explicitly listed in the access control list (ACL* for the Domino Directory, delete the name of the former administrator from the ACL. Add the name of the new administrator and assign the administrator Manager access.
If the name of the former administrator is included in any groups, delete the former administrator's name from the Group document(s), if appropriate. Add the name of the new administrator.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration.
2. Select a server and click Edit Server.
* 3. Click Administration.
4. In the Administrator field, type the administrator's name or select a directory and then do any of the following as necessary:
Select a user name and click "Add" to add the name to the Administrator field.
In the Added field, select a name and click "Remove" to remove it from the Administrator field, or click "Remove all" to remove all names from the Administrator field.l
Select a name from a directory and click "Copy a namj to the Local Address Book" to copy a name from the open address book to the Local address book.
5. Click OK and then save and close the Server document.
6. Use the Replicate server command at the console to force replication of the Domino Directory and disseminate the change quickly.n
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Replicatei
Click here
Click here
Managing servers
Click here
&Arial
Follow these steps to use the Administration Process to delete references to a server from the Domino Directory and from database ACLs.
1. To delete a server name, you must have:
At least Author with delete documents access and the ServerModifier role* or Editor access to the Domino Directory
At least Author with create documents access to the Certification Log.
From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration.
2. Select the server name you are deleting.
3. Click Delete Server and click Yes to delete the Server document.
4. Do one of the following:
Click Yes to have the Administration Process immediately delete all references to the server in this replica of the Dojino Directory and post a "Delete in Access Control List" request.
Click No to post a "Delete in Address Book" request in the Administration Requests database to have the Administration Process delete references to the server in the Domino Directory and database ACLs according to the Interval setting for the Administration Process.
5. Click OK.
For information on removing a server from service and replacing it with another server, see "
Click here
Decommissioning a server."
Click here
See Also
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
Click here
Managing servers
Click here
,NYuXp
ick here
Click here
Basic settings
Click here
&Arial
You can use the Decommission Server Analysis tool when you are consolidating existing servers and/or permanently removing a server from service. Whether you are combining two servers into one server or renaming a server, the result is the same -- the old server name is replaced with the new server name. The analysis tool can help you avoid a loss of service for your Domino server and can be used to help build a foundation for a decommission "to do" checklist. The role of the Server Analysis Tool is to compare the responsibility of the source server to that of the target server and to report on differences that could cause a possible loss of service.
When you run the Decommission Server Analysis tool, you create a Results database containing detailed information comparing the source server and the target server. The source server is the server being removed from service, and the target server is the server taking the place of the source server. The source and the target servers must be Domino servers that have hierarchical names and that are in the same domain. The servers do not need to run Domino Release 5. However, you need the Domino Release 5 Administration Client to run the tool.R
Inconsistencies between the source and target servers are marked in the Results database to alert you to the administrative task you may need to do before you can decommission the server. Each comparison that the Decommission Server Analysis tool makes is somewhat individual. Relationships between analysis items are not determined by this tool; therefore, you need to review each report and make your own comparisons before taking any action. You perform comparisons between only two servers at a time. You do not need to resolve all differences before you decommission a server.
Before decommissioning a server, you may need to perform the following types of administrative activities:
Check each database for formulas that contain specific server name references.
Update the documents in the Domino Directory, such as the Connection and Program documents, to reflect the new server name.
If the old server had cross-certificates, make sure the new server has the same cross-certificates.
Notify other domains that access the server about the change.
Inform users about the new location for databases, including their mail database, if necessary.
Make sure the network protocols on the old and new servers match.
Replicate all the databases from the old server to the new server.
Update mail routing tables to ensure that mail gets delivered correctly.
108491744029236361
To run an analysis report on Decommission Server
1. To use the Decommission Server Analysis Tool, you must have administrator access to both the source and the target servers.
If you don't have administrator rights, some portions of the report may not be completed properly.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Analysis tab.
3. From the tools pane, select Analyze - Decommission Server.
4. Complete these fields:
Field
Entere
Source server
Name of the server being decommissioned
Target server
Name of the server that will replace the server being decommissioned
Results database
Name and/or location of the Results database if you are not using the default file name DECOMSRV.NSF. Complete these fields:
Server
Title
File Namel
Folder
Append to this database
(Default) Adds the new report to the end of the existing information in the Results database without deleting any existing data
Overwrite this databasee
Adds the new Results database by overwriting the existing database
e;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click OK.
When the analysis is complete, the Results database opens to the Reports view. This can take up to several minutes depending on network traffic and the number of databases on both the source and target servers.
Note
You can create multiple reports in the same database or in different databases and then use these reports to verify that differences between the two servers are remedied and cannot be seen by the system when you run the Decommission Server Analysis tool. You can re-run the reports as many times as you wish.
196384304029244636
Viewing the report in the Results database
The Decommission Server Analysis tool generates a categorized list of items that were analyzed. Each category represents a different aspect of a server's configuration that needs attention. Within each category, items are listed alphabetically. Each item lists any differences between the source and the target server's settings or values. In the Results database, you can view the categorized list of the items that were analyzed.
ification Log_
ectory assistanc
Click here
Overview
PrintIndent
wwwwwwwwwwwwwwww
ry assistanc
wwwwwwwwwwwwwwww
Each item is represented by a document. A document's status is indicated by an icon to the left of the document as follows:
Icon
Explanation
@ @@ @` @
@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
A difference was found when doing the comparisons and may require the attention of an administrator.
@ @@ @` @
@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
y a certifier ID
An error was encountered when performing or trying to perform a comparison.
No icon
No attention is required because the fields being compared are either equivalent or the source's values are a complete subset of the target's values.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Click a document to open it and view the actual report that was generated. A sample report is shown here:
tIndent
Overview
ry assistanc
wwwwwwxw
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
Report Field
Description
Report category
The section or category that the document belongs to. These categories are: Certificates, Cluster, Connections, Databases, Domains, Internet, Miscellaneous, Network, Programs, Security, SMTP, and Router.
Report title
The specific field or item that is being analyzed -- for example, Databases -- Mail Users or Databases -- No Matching Replica.
Report date
Date the report is generated.
Server to be decommissioned (source server)
Name of the server being retired.
Server to accept responsibility (target server)
Name of the server that will assume the responsibilities of the server being decommissioned.
Errors
Errors that occur during the analysis on this item or field. This field is blank if there are no errors.
Report details
Information that indicates the problem or inconsistency that exists between the source and target servers.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
334263737629244645
Report comparisons
The following types of field comparisons are done between the two Server documents and the Configuration documents:
Field Comparison
,&4OU
Explanationt
Boolean
,&4OU
The content of the two fields being compared must be an exact match. In some cases, if the field on the source server is not set, no comparison is done with the value for the target server.@
Numeric
,&4OU
The two fields are compared and differences are reported.
Text list
,&4OU
Two text lists are compared and a report is generated if the source is not a complete subset of the target.
Name list
,&4OU
Two names lists are compared by expanding both lists to single entries, removing duplicates, and generating a report if the source is not a complete subset of the target. When expanding names lists, all groups are expanded until only single entries remain.
Special cases
,&4OU
In some cases, a blank field has a special meaning. In these cases, the specific interpretation of blank for each field is taken into consideration when comparisons are performed.@
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Comparisons are made to the following documents:
Document comparison
,&`NU
Explanation
Connection documents
,&`NU
A comparison is performed on any connection in which the server to be decommissioned is listed as the source server in the Connection document. The comparison ensures that all destination servers in those connections are also included in the target server's Connection documents. A report is generated if the Tasks differ or if any corresponding connections do not exist.
All connections listing the server to be decommissioned as the Destination server are reported.
Program documents
,&`NU
All Program documents that list the source server as the server on which to run the program are included in the report. No comparison between the source and target Program documents is done because there is no way to ensure that the executables exist or are the same on the source and target.
Domain documents
,&`NU
All Foreign domain documents are checked to see if the Gateway server name lists the source server. If one is found, a document is generated showing which foreign domain documents list the source.
Cross-Certificates
,&`NU
Any cross-certificate that lists the source server in the Issued By field is reported.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
These comparisons are made to databases:
Database comparison
Explanation
Mail-in databases, Rooms, Resources, Certifiers, Person documents
Each document that lists the source server as the Mail server is reported.
Replicas
Any database on the source server that does not have a matching replica on the target server is reported.
A file name comparison for all databases that do not have replicas on the target is done. Any database on the source that has a name conflict with a different database with the same name on the target is listed.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
These comparisons are made to networks:
Network comparison
,&rJU
Explanation
Enabled ports
,&rJU
A comparison is done for both port name and protocol. A report is generated for any differences.
Notes named networks
,&rJU
If the source and target servers do not share the same Notes named networks, a report is generated.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Managing servers
Click here
&Arial
To save disk space, periodically check the size of log files and delete thm log files you no longer need. If the server is not running when Domino needs to create the new log file, Domino creates the log file the next time the server starts.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Open the Server document for the Web server.
3. Click the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab.
4. In the Log files field, choose Enabled.
5. Complete these fields:
Field
Entern
Access log format
Choose one:
Common
(default) to log information into five separate log files, using the common log file format
Extended Common to record log file information in the extended log file format
For information on access log formats, see:
www.w3.org/tr/wd-logfile
Time format
Choose one:
LocalTime
(default) to use the time zone currently set on the server to record requests
GMT to use Greenwich Mean Time to record requests
Log file duration
Mhoose one:
Daily (default) to create a new log file each day, starting at midnight using the format
file name prefix
DDMMYYYY.log -- for example, access-log29051998.log for the access log file for May 29, 1998
Weekly to create a new log file each week, starting on Sunday at midnight using the format
file name prefix
__WWYYYY.log -- for example, agent-log__221998.log for the agent log file for the week of May 24, 1998
Monthly to create m new log file each month, starting at midnight on the first day of the month using the format
file name prefix
--MMYYYY.log -- for example, error-log--051998.log for the error log file for May 1998
Never to create one log file using the format
file name prefix
.log -- for example, cgi-error-log.log for the cgi error log file
Directory for log filesr
The directory to sto}e the log files; if this field is blank, Domino stores the log files in the data directory
The prefix to use when creating log files. Defaults are access-log, agent-log, referer-log, error-log, and cgi-error-log. Do not enter a file extension.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. (Optional) Complete these fields:
Field
Enter
URLs
URL addresses to exclude -- for example, *.gif
or /anydir/*
Methodsr
HTTP methods -- for example, POST or DELETE
MIME types
MIME types to exclude -- for example, image (for all images) or image/gif (for .gif images)f
User agents
Strings that are part of user agent (browser) strings to exclude a particular browser.
To exclude Microsoft Internet Explorer, enter MSIE*
To exclude Netscape:
For version 4.7, enter Mozilla/4.7
For version 4.6, enter Mozilla/4.6
For all version}, enter [*]
Return codes
Status codes to exclude -- for example, 300 or 400
Hosts and domains
The DNS names or IP addresses to exclude -- for example, 130.333.* or *.edu
To enter DNS names, you must first enable the DNS Lookup setting in the HTTP Server section of the Server document. Otherwise, you can entmr only IP addresses.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Save the document.
See Also
Click here
Text files for Domino Web server logging
Click here
Click here
The Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
Click here
&Arial
Session billing tracks network traffic that occurs during a server session- This includes information about when a server session starts and ends and when any network-related activities occur during the session.
Servers, users, and API programs can all generate session activity.
Domino generates a session record when certain actions occur. There are three categories of session actions:
Start, for actions that begin a session
Stamp, for actions that occur during an open session
End, for actions that stop a session
This table contains examples of the types of activities that generate billing records in each action category.
Action category
Type of activity
Start
Opening a database or any action that opens a database, such as checking database properties
Starting replication
Having a remote server open a billing server's MAIL.BOX
Stamp
Reading documentsi
Editing documentsl
Saving amd updating documentss
Viewing or changing an ACL
Rebuilding a database view
Performing any other activity while a session is openk
Closing a database
Ending replication
Logging off, either manually or automatically
Exiting Notes
Having a remote server close MAIL.BOX
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
By default, Domino creates a session stamp record every 15 minutes during an open session, if there has been activity during that 15-minute period. For each open session, Domino creates only one stamp record per period, no matter how much activity occurs. To create stamp records more or less frequently, add the m
Click here
BillingSuppressTimee
Click here
setting to the NOTES.INI file. The frequency with which Dominm creates session stamp records can affect system performance.
For information about billing performance, see the topic
Click here
"Optimizing billing performance."
Click here
For information about the BillingSuppressTime setting, see the appendix "NOTES.INI File."
See Also
Click here
Example of creating billing records
Click here
Click he}e
Billing
Click here
&Arial
Database billing tracks database activity during a server session. This includes information about when databases open and close and when database activity occurs during the session. Servers, users, and API programs can all generate database activity.
Domino generate a database record when certain actions occur. There are four categories of database actions:
DBOpen, for actions that open a database
DBStamp, for actions that occur while a database is open
DBClose, for actions that close a database
DBClose_End, for actions that close a database and end a session at the same time
This table contains examples of the types of activities that generate database records in each action category.
Action category
Type of activity
DBOpen
Opening a database or any action that opens a database, sumh as checking database properties
Starting replication, including opening a database to determine if replication is needed (even if no replication is needed)*
Having a remote server open a billing server's MAIL.BOX
DBStamp
Opening a database
Editing documents
Saving and updating documents
Viewing or changing an ACL
Performing any other database activity while a datmbase is open
DBClose
Closing a database
Ending replication
Logging off, either manually or automatically (one record for each open database)
Exiting Notes (one record for each open database)
Having a remote server close MAIL.BOX
DBClose_End
Closing a database at the end of a session
Closing databases that the serve} opened for replication
Logging off of Notes while databases are still open
Exiting Notes while databases are still open
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* When Domino closes databases after determining that replication is not necessary, it generates a billing record that contains 0 (zero) in the Open time field.
By default, Domino creates a database DBStamp record eve}y 15 minutes while a database is open, if there has been database activity during that 15-minute period. For each open database, Domino creates only one DBStamp record per period, no matter how much activity occurs. To create DBStamp records more or less frequently, add the
Click here
BillingSuppressTime
Click here
setting to the NOTES.INI file. The frequency with which Domino creates database DBStamp records can affect system performance.t
For info}mation about billing performance, see the topic p
Click here
"Optimizing billing performance."
Click here
For information about the BillingSuppressTime setting, see the appendix "NOTES.INI File."
See Also
Click here
Example of creating billing records
Click here
Click here
Billing
Click here
&Arial
Use document billing to charge customers-when they read and write documents. Domino tracks only documents that contain one or both of the special fields $ChargeRead and $ChargeWrite.
To use document billing, you design a form that includes one or both of these special fields. You assign a cost value to each of these fields and then hide them. When a user reads from or writes to a document that contains one of these fields, the Billing task retrieves the cost value and places it in a document billing record.
For informatmon on adding fields to forms, see o
Application Development with Domino Designer.
This table contains examples of the types of activities that generate billing records for documents that contain these special fields.
Domino generates billing records only when these activities occur on a server that is enabled for billing.
Field
Type of activity
$ChargeRead
Opening a document in a database
Reading documents during replication
$ChargeWrite
Creating, copying, editing, or saving a document in a database
Updating documents during replication
Receiving a mail message in MAIL.BOX
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Example of creating billing records
Click here
Click here
Billing
Click here
&Arial
]hen you use billing for replication, Domino generates one billing record for each database replication request that a billing server initiates. Only the initiating server generates billing records. Using the Cluster Replicator (CLREPL) does not generate billing records for replication.
When a client initiates replication with a billing server, Domino bills the activity as
Click here
session
Click here
activity, not as replication activity.
See Also
Click here
Example of creating billing records
Click here
Click here
Billing
Click here
&Arial
Mail billing occurs when the mail router sends a mail message, a delivery report, a non-delivery report, or a return receipt to a mailbox on another server.
Mail billing records only messages that leave MAIL.BOX on the billing server. Each billing server that forwards the message on its route to its de}tination creates a mail billing record.
When Notes mail generates a delivery or non-delivery report, the router enters the message ID of the report in the OriginatorID field of the billing record. The message ID of the original message appears in the OrigMessageID field.
Billing generates a mail billing record even when a delivery failure occurs. If a mail delivery fails, you may want to adjust the billing statement for the incorrect charge. To find which message generated the delivery failure, compare the OrigMessageID field of the non-delivery notice with the Originator ID field of the mail message. You can also compare the unique identifier (UNID) and the Posted date on the billing records for the non-delivery report and the original mail message.
When a client creates a message and when a server delivers a message to MAIL.BOX, Domino bills the activity in
Click here
session)
Click here
and d
Click here
database
Click here
records, not in mail records.
See Also
Click here
Example of creating billing records
Click here
Click here
Billing
Click here
&Arial
Agent billing generates a billing record for emch Domino server-based agent that runs successfully. The billing record shows the time it took to run the agent, but it does not show the types of activities the agent performed.
Domino does not generate billing records for agents that run on a Web server, for the agents that you run manually from a client, or for agents scheduled to run locally on a client.e
For information about restricting who can run agents on a server, see the section "Controlling Access to Domino Servers."
See Also
Click here
Example of creating billing records
Click here
Click here
Billing
Click here
1J%]%
&Arial
Use HTTP billing to charge customers who use browsers to access a Web server at your site. HTTP billing occurs whenever a browser sends an HTTP request to the billing server. HTTP billing records information about the user accessing the server, including:c
The size and typm of information the user requests
The date and time of the request
The number of milliseconds required to process the request
The amount of time it took to run agents started by the browser user
See Also
Click here
The Domino Web server
Click here
Click here
Example of creating billing records
Click here
Click here
Milling
Click here
kmH}$.
&Arial
This example shows the billing records that Domino generates when a user sends mail to another user whose mail database is on a different mail server. In this example, the message goes directly to the recipient's mail server without making any intermediary hops. To generate these billing records, the BillingClass setting in the NOTES.INI file specifies session, database, document, and mail.
Domino generates some of these records, such as
Click here
session stamp remords
Click here
and
Click here
DBStamp records
Click here
, only if the
Click here
BillingSuppressTime
Click here
has elapsed during the session. Domino generates a
Click here
document record
Click here
only if the form used to create the mail message includes the hidden field $ChargeWrite.
Activity
Billing records generated
1. User opens mail database
Session start
Database DBOpen
2. User creates a mail message
The following are possible:
Session stamp
Database DBStamp
Document
3. Type-ahead or name lookup finds recipient's address in Domino directory
Database DBOpen
Database DBClose
4. User sends message to MAIL.MOX
Database DBOpen
Database DBClose
5. User saves messagea
The following are possible:e
Session stampd
Database DBStamp
6. The Router picks up the message from MAIL.BOX
Database DBOpenE
Mail
Database DBClose
7. The Router deposits the message in the destinatmon server's MAIL.BOX
Session start
Database DBOpen
Database DBClose
Session close
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Billingt
Click here
&Arial
86150307229214245
To start billing manually
Enter these commands at the console:
Load billing
Set configuration BillingClass=
list
where
list
contains one or more of the following: Agent, Database, Document HTTPRequest, Mail, Replication, Session.
Note
To start billing automatically, see the topic
Clmck here
"Setting up billing."
Click here
268955673629223110
To stop billingd
To stop all instances of the Billing task for the current session, enter this command at the console:
tell billing quit
Note
Disabling the task stops it from transferring billing records from the message queue to the Billing database or the binary file. If you still have the
Click here
BillingClass
Click here
setting in the NOTES.INI file, however, Domino continues to write billing records to the message queue. When you restart the Billing task, it transfers the records from the message queue to the Billing database or the binary file.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Optimizing billing perfo}mance
Click here
Click here
Setting up billing
Click here
Click here
Billing
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Update_Suppression_Limit=
value
Description:
Overrides the NOTES.INI Update_Suppression_Time setting if a certain number of duplicate requests to update indexe} and views are received.
Applies to:
Serversv
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.N
See Also
Click here
Update_Suppression_Time
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Update_Suppression_Time=
minutes
Description:
Specifies the delay time between full text index and view updates, even if immediate indexing is scheduled as a server task.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
5 minutes
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Update_Suppression_Limit
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
37089952029209008
Notes
You can have up to 32 levels of main categories and subcategories.
You can enter additional levels of subcategories separated by backslashes, for example:
Sales planning\Trade shows\Boston\July\Week 2G
See Also
Click here
Views, panes, and folders
Click here
:2TMm
&Arial
If your system is busy, you may be able to improve performance by adjusting how often billing performs certain tasks.
268955673629223110
Changing the frequency of adding records to the message queue
You can control how often Domino adds session stamp records and database DBStamp records to the message queue. During times of peak usage, if system performance decreases or the system runs out of virtual memory, add records to the message queue less frequentlw. This is especially helpful during times of peak usage. If performance is not a problem and you want to generate more billing records, add records more frequently.y
By default, Domino creates records every 15 minutes. To change this default, add the
Click here
BillingSuppressTimec
Click here
setting to the NOTES.INI file. To determine the best amount of time for your system, try various amounts of time and track the performance for each.
268955673629223111
Controlling the transfer of records from the message queue
The Billing task may use a lot of system resources to transfer records from the message queue to the Billing database or the binary file, especially when your system is busy. There are three ways to control this process. You can change how often the Billing task runs, you can change the length of time the Billing task runs, and you can run multiple Billing tasks.
By default, the Billgng task starts running once every minute and runs for 10 seconds each time. To adjust these default behaviors, edit these settings in the NOTES.INI file:
To change
Edit this setting in the NOTES.INI'file
How often the Billing task runs
Click here
BillingAddinWakeup
Click here
How long the Billing task runs
Click here
BillingAddinRuntime
Click here
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
If you have system performance problems, adjust these settings so that the Billing task runs less frequently and/or runs for less time. As with BillingSuppressTime, the best way to find out what settings are best for your system is to test various settings and track the performance.
Another way to control the transfer of records from the message queue is to run more tgan one Billing task. Multiple Billing tasks work simultaneously to process records in the billing message queue. Do not run more Billing tasks than the number of processors there are in your computer because this could impede performance.
268955673629223112
To run multiple Billing tasks
Do one of the following:
To run multiple Billing tasks at server startup, edit the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file to include multiple instances of billing' For example:
To run multiple Billing tasks from the console, enter this command one or more times at the console:
load billing
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Clicg here
Billing
Click here
Click here
Setting up billing
Click here
Click here
Starting and stopping billing
Click here
&Arial
The Agent Manager controls when agents run on a server. Every time an agent runs, it uses server resourcgs. To control when scheduled and event-triggered agents run, you specify settings in the Server document and in the NOTES.INI file. Customizing when agents run may conserve server resources, but it may also delay when agents run. j
353828697629233920
Controlling how often Agent Manager runs agents
These NOTES.INI settings affect how often the Agent Manager executes agents. In general, the more frequently agents run, the sooner they perform their tasks. Running aggnts more frequently, however, may increase demand on server resources and adversely affect overall system performance.
115978076829239968
Click here
AMgr_DocUpdateAgent MinInterval
Click here
This setting specifies the minimum elapsed time, in minutes, between executions of the same document update-triggered agent. This lets you control the time interval between executions of a given agent. Default is 30 minutes. A lgnger interval can result in the agent running less often, reducing server demand. If document update events are infrequent, you can reduce the delay. (Note that setting this and other Agent Manager variables to zero does not completely eliminate the delay; a built-in delay will always exist.)
115978076829239969
Click here
AMgr_DocUpdate EventDelay
Click here
This setting specifies the delay time, in minutes, the Agegt Manager schedules a document update-triggered agent after a document update event. The default is 5 minutes. The delay time ensures the agent runs no more often than the specified interval, regardless of how frequently document update events occur. When the agent executes, it will also process all additional events (if any) that occurred during the interval. A longer interval results in the agent running less often, thus reducing demand for server time. If document update events are infrequent, however, wou can reduce the delay to ensure the agent runs soon after the event occurs.
115978076829239970
Click here
AMgr_NewMailAgent MinInterval
Click here
This setting specifies the minimum elapsed time, in minutes, between execution of the same new mail-triggered agent. The default is 0 (no interval between executions). Similar to AMgr_DocUpdateAgentMinInterval, entering an interval can result in the agent running less grequently.m
115978076829239971
Click here
AMgr_NewMailEventDelay
Click here
This setting specifies the time (in minutes) that the Agent Manager delays before scheduling a new mail-triggered agent after new mail is delivered. The default is 1 minute. Similar to AMgr_DocUpdateEventDelay, the delay time ensures the agent runs no more often than the specified interval.
115978076829239972
Click here
DominoAsynchronizeAgents
Click here
This setting specifies whether Web agents triggered by browser clients can run at the same time (asynchronously). The default is zero (only one agent can run at a time). Set this to 1 to allow multiple agents to run simultaneously. This can result in faster execution of agents. However, a high number of agents executing at the same time can slow overall system performance.
17077715227231764o
Controlling how quickly the Agent Manager queues agentso
The Agent Manager periodically checks to see if it has any new agents that it needs to schedule. These NOTES.INI settings control how quickly an agent gets into the schedule queue.
115978076829239973
Click here
AMgr_SchedulingInterval
Click here
This setting specifies a delay (in minutes) between running of the Agent'Manager's scheduler. Valid values are 1 minute to 60 minutes. The default value is 1 minute.
115978076829239974
Click here
AMgr_UntriggeredMailInterval
Click here
This setting specifies a delay (in minutes) between running of the Agent Manager's check for untriggered mail. Valid values are 1 minute to 1440 minutes (the number of minutes in a day). The default value is 60 minutes.
17077715229231765c
Controlling when the Agent Manager runs agents
When you create or modify an event-triggered agent, the Agent Manager schedules it to run immediately. This ensures the agent can quickly process new documents. These NOTES.INI settings let you specify a time interval between subsequent runnings of the agent. This can prevent repeated runnings of the agent -- for example, because of a rapid series of triggering events. e
115978076829239975
Click here
AMgr_DocUpdateEventDelay
Click here
This setting specifies a delay of execution (in minutes) that the Agent Manager includes in the schedule for a document update-triggered agent after a document update event. The default is 5 minutes.
115978076829239976
Click here
AMgr_NewMailEventDelay
Click here
This setting specifigs a delay of execution (in minutes) that the Agent Manager includes in the schedule for a new mail-triggered agent after a new mail message is delivered. The default 1 minute.
115978076829239977
Click here
AMgr_DocUpdateAgentMinInterval
Click here
This setting specifies the minimum elapsed time (in minutes) between execution of the same document update-triggered agent. The default is 30 minutes.
115978076829239978
Click here
AMgr_NewMailAgentMinInterval
Click here
This setting specifies the minimum elapsed time (in minutes) between execution of the same new mail-triggered agent. The default is 0.
17077715229231766
Monitoring the load on the Agent Manager
Domino Release 4.6 and earlier releases include the field "Max % busy before delay" in the Server document' This field limits the percentage of time the Agent Manager can use to run agents. When this limit is exceeded, the Agent Manager delays agent execution. To improve Agent Manager performance, Domino Release 5 does not include this limitation. You can, however, still use this field for Domino Release 4.6 and earlier releases.1
If your server attempts to schedule agents at a rate faster than the Agent Manager can run them, the message "AMgr: Agent scheduling is paused" appears on the console. Thg Agent Manager will not schedule any new agents until the server processes some agents that are already scheduled. Therefore, the running of new agents may be slightly delayed.
17077715229231767
Controlling how many concurrent agents are running
You can relieve a heavily loaded Agent Manager by allowing agents to run concurrently. To do this, modify the "Max concurrent agents" field in the Server Tasks/Agent Manager section of the Server document. Values greater'than 1 allow more than one agent to run at the same time. Valid values are 1 through 10. Default values are 1 for daytime and 2 for nighttime.f
An Agent Executive runs each concurrent agent. To see a snapshot of the Agent Manager status, including the number of Agent Executives currently running, enter the command
tell amgr status
at the server console.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Tools for measuring server performance
Click here
Click here
Improving Domino server performance
Click here
&Arial
This section contains suggestions for improving basic server performance and increasing server capacgty.
116028076829239968
Improving server capacity and response time
These tips for improving server capacity and response time come from the analysis of NotesBench reports, which are published by NotesBench Consortium members. Some of this information may be derived from earlier versions of Domino, and, therefore, may not be completely applicable to Domino Release 5.
1. Make sure your server memory matches the number of users you want to support. Mgst NotesBench vendors use 300K-400K per active user. They also set their NSF_BUFFER_POOL_SIZE to the maximum for their memory configuration. This setting isn't necessary, because the Domino server initially obtains a third of available memory and grows only if necessary (depending on the load). You should use published physical memory configurations as a ceiling for memory configuration decisions.
2. Make I/O subsystem improvements. For example you can:
Move from EISA-based syswems (such as, controllers) to PCI-based systems
Exchange EISA/PCI boards for PCI-only boards (this way, lower speed EISA devices won't decrease the I/O throughput)
Use stripping to improve performance
Use multiple I/O controllers to distribute logical volumes (and use file pointers to databases across separate controllers). Make sure you have the latest BIOS for your I/O subsystem. This is an inexpensive way to remove a likely throughput bottleneck.
7. Use faster disk drives.
4. Increase the strip size. NotesBench vendors use a strip size of 8K (Digital systems) or 16K (IBM Netfinity reports). (The IBM Netfinity report provides additional information on I/O settings such as w IOQ Depth, Outbound Posting, PCI Line Prefetch, and Address Bit Permitting.)
5. Use faster CPUs. NotesBench vendors have moved beyond the Pentium, Sparc, and PowerPC processors, which were in the 100-200Mhz range, to higher speed processors. Howevgr, they consistently use P6-based systems over the Pentium II systems for high-end Domino server loads. The size of your Level 2 cache should match your expected user loads and the response time you want. Vendors have moved from 256K to 512K, 1MB to 2MB Level 2 cache systems, especially on their greater than two-CPU configurations. v
6. Improve your network. NotesBench vendors have:
Moved from 10Mbps cards and networks to 100Mbps configurations
Used multiple LAN segments (one for each partition) to isolate network traffic, at the high-end user loads
7. Change your network protocol to IP. Vendors initially used NetBIOS and SPX internally but have unanimously moved to IP for their performance publishing efforts.
8. You can improve Web server performance by disabling HTTP server logging. Logging options are stored in the Server document. In the HTTP server "Enable logging to" section are two fields, Log files and Domlog.nsf. Disabling bowh of these fields improves Web server performance.
9. You can improve general server performance by disabling the type-ahead mail addressing feature. (Type-ahead allows users to enter the first few characters of a user's name; the server then completes the rest of the name automatically.) To disable type-ahead on a server, open the server's Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory. On the Basics tab, choose Disabled in the Type-ahead field. Then save and close the document.
116028076829239969
NOTES.INI settings that affect Domino server performance
116028076829239970
Click here
Replicators
Click here
This setting specifies the number of Replicator tasks that can run concurrently on the server. The default is 1. Typically, the number of replicators should equal the number of processors on the server. However, hub servers can run more replicators.
116028076829239971
Click here
Server_Availability_Threshold
Click here
This setting specifies the acceptable level (a percentage) of system resources available to a server. By setting this value for each server in a cluster, you determine how the workload is distributed among cluster members. The default is 0, which indicates a fully available state (workload balancing is disabled). A value of 100 indicates the server is busy; the'Cluster Manager then tries to redirect user requests to more available cluster members.
116028076829239972
Click here
Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans
Click here
This setting sets the limit for the number of concurrently scheduled transactions on a server. If you use this setting to set the maximum number of concurrent transactions on partitioned servers, Lotus recommends that the sum of the limits be 20 transactions or fewer. For example, if you are run four partitioned servers on a computer, set the limit for each partitioned server at five transactions.
116028076829239973
Click here
Server_MaxUsers
Click here
This setting sets the maximum number of users that are allowed to access a server. When this number is reached, the server state becomes "MaxUsers," and the server stops accepting new Database Open requests. The default is 0 (uglimited access to server by user). By setting a maximum number of users allowed on the server, you can prevent server performance from degrading because of demand overload.
116028076829239975
Click here
Server_Session_Timeout
Click here
This setting specifies the number of minutes of inactivity after which the server automatically terminates network and mobile connections. The minimum recommended setting is 15 minutes' If you specify a lower time, the server must reopen database server sessions too frequently, which slows server performance. For mobile connections, XPC has its own internal timeout. If the XPC timeout value is shorter than the Server_Session_Timeout value, the XPC timeout takes precedence.
116028076829239976
Click here
ServerTasks
Click here
This setting controls the tasks that the server runs. These tasks start auwomatically at server startup and continue until the server is shut down. Improve performance by removing tasks that aren't appropriate to the server. Do not remove the Update task from a server. If you do so, the Domino Directory will not update.
116028076829239977
Click here
Translog_Status
Click here
This setting enables transaction logging for all Release 5 databases on the server. Default is 0 (transaction logging disabled). Set this to 1 to enable transaction logging. This can improve server performance in most cases. Note you must upgrade databases to Domino Release 5 format before they can use transaction logging.
See Also
Click here
Improving Domino server performance
Click here
Click here
Tools for measuring server performance
Click here
&Arial
By default, the Domino Directory uses two database perfomrance properties -- "Document table bitmap optimization" and "Don't maintain unread marks" to improve performance. The following NOTES.INI settingscan affect database and Domino Directory performance.
116028076829239968
Click here
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
Click here
This NOTES.INI setting sets the size of the NSF buffer pool, a section of memory used for buffering I/O transfers between the NSF and NIF subsystems and disk storage. The number of users, size and number of views, and number of databases all affect how you should set the buffer pool specification. The default value (determined automatically by the server) is usually sufficient,'but if Database Statistics indicate more memory is needed, increase the value a few megabytes at a time. You can use a performance monitor to find out if a larger value is causing too much swapping or paging. (NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size sets the buffer pool size in bytes; NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size_MB sets the size in megabytes.)m
116028076829239969
Click here
NSF_DbCache_Maxentries
Click here
This NOTES.INI setting sets the maxigum number of databases stored in the database cache (if enabled). For short intervals, Domino stores up to 1.5 times the number entered for this setting. Increasing the maximum number of databases improves performance but requires more memory.
1133445566
Improving performance for users accessing the Web using the Web Navigator
There are several ways to improve performance:
Speed up your access to Web pages by speeding up your server connection to tge Internet. Contact your Internet Service Provider to find out what options you have.
Improve database performance by managing your database with the Purge and Refresh agents or any other agents you may create for the database.
Manage the number of users retrieving pages in the Web Navigator database by setting the maximum number of concurrent retrievals (the number of Web pages the server retrieves at the same time.) The default maximum number of concurrent retrievals is 25. The'number of concurrent retrievals that your server allows depends on your specific system environment.D
1133442211
Show DBS command
The Show DBS command is a tool for monitoring the performance of a database. This command returns the following information:
Refs - the number of times the database has been opened (the DBHANDLE count for the database).
Mod - whether the database has been modified, but not yet flushed to disk.
FDs ' the number of file descriptors currently being used for the database.
LockWaits - the number of times a user has had to wait for a lock on the database (read or write).
AvgWait - the average wait time in milliseconds for each wait.
#Waiters - the number of waiters currently on the database lock. (This number changes rapidly.)
MaxWaiters - the maximum number of waiters ever on the database lock.e
Note
To display'LockWaits and AvgWait values, you must temporarily add the setting COLLECT_DB_LOCK_WAITS=1 to your server's NOTES.INI file. This setting consumes server resources, so you should remove it after you view Show DBS statistics.
See Also
Click here
Optimizing directory catalog performance
Click here
Click here
Improving Domino server performance
Click here
Click here
Tools for measuring server performance
Click here
Click here
Controlling database size
Click here
Click here
Monitoring database size
Click here
Click here
Setting database properties that optimize database performance
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
UpgradeApps=
filename1, filename2, filename3...
Description:
Specifies custom upgrade applications for migrating users to Notes. Domino Release 5 includes four upgrade applications for migrating users to Notes, one each for cc:Mail, Windows NT, Exchange, and LDIF. In addition, you can use UpgradeApps to add one or more custom upgrade applications (.dll files) to the Registration dialog. Use cogmas to separate multiple names. Specified files must reside in the Notes program directory. UpgradeApps does not affect the upgrade applications that ship with Domino.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
UseFontMapper=
value
Description:
Detewmines whether the font mapper is used to guess the closest mappings between the font face name in a CGM metafile and the currently installed fonts on a Notes workstation.
1 - Enables the font mapper
0 - Disables the font mapper
Applies to:C
Workstations and servers
Default:
1 (enabled)
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
WinSysFontgumber
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
t replication events between servers. Useful for determining the cause of replication failure and for verifying that the expected number of replication updates occurred.
Replication monitor
Notifies you when replication of a database hawn't occurred within a specified time period. A server administrator creates replication monitors as a part of configuring the Event Monitor task.
Click here
Database Analysis tool
Click here
Lets you collect replication history, replication events from the log file, and other information specific to a database into a results database that you can analyze.
head title;Chead;Chead title7Chapter title;Dhead
In addition to ensuring that a database is replicating, you should routinely check for and
Click here
consolidate replication and save conflicts.B
Click here
See Also
Click here
Database maintenance
Click here
&Arial
These NOTES.INI settings affect mail performance.
For informjtion about using multiple MAIL.BOX databases and disabling type-ahead addressing to improve mail performance, see .
Click here
Improving mail performance
Click here
115978076829239979
MailMaxConcurrentXferThreads
This setting determines the maximum number of concurrent transfer threads per destination. The default is the MailMaxThreads value (see below) divided by 2.
Note
In Djmino Release 5, this setting is no longer included in NOTES.INI; it is a field in the Configuration Settings document.
115978076829239980
MailMaxDeliveryThreads
This setting determines the maximum number of threads the Router can create to perform local mail delivery. The default is 1. Increasing this value can improve message throughput for local deliveries. The ideal number ranges from 3 to 25. This is determined by a formula, based upon the NSFBufferPoolSize.*
Note
In Domino Release 5, this setting is no longer included in NOTES.INI; it is a field in the Configuration Settings document.
115978076829239981
MailMaxThreads
This setting determines the maximum number of threads the mail Router can create to perform mail transfers. Without this variable, the default is one thread per server port. Increasing this number creates more threads to handle mail transfers. However, additiojal threads may increase the demand for server processing time.
Note
In Domino Release 5, this setting is no longer included in NOTES.INI; it is a field in the Configuration Settings document.
115978076829239982
Mail_Number_of_Mail_Boxes
This setting determines the number of mail files a user can have on the server.
Note
In Domino Release 5, this setting is no longer included in*NOTES.INI; it is a field in the Configuration Settings document.
115978076829239983
Click here
MinNewMailPoll
Click here
This setting determines how often workstations can contact the server to see if new mail has arrived for the user. This setting overrides the user's selection in the Mail Setup dialog box. You can increase the mail polling interval if there are a large number of mail users on your server and you wanz to prevent frequent polling from affecting server performance.
115978076829239984
Click here
NoMsgCache
Click here
This setting disables per-user message caching by the IMAP task. This can improve capacity (number of users) on a server by reducing memory consumption. However, response time for some user operations may be slower.
115978076829239985
Click here
POP3_Conjig_Update_Interval
Click here
This setting determines how often (per minute) the Domino server that runs the POP3 service update its configuration information. The default is 2 minutes.
See Also
Click here
Improving Domino server performance
Click here
Click here
Tools for measuring server performance
Click here
HVR~e
&Arial
If you experience a high page-fault rate and a high page I/O as a result of Domino server tasks running on a Windows NT Advanced Server configuration, look in the configuration file for this Registry setting and see whether it is set to a non-zero value:
If this entry contains a non-zero entry, the Windows NT system works as a file server, rather than as an application server because Windows NT favors the system-cache working-set rather than the processes working-set. On a Windows NT workstation, the setting for that Registry entry is zero.
If you run the Domino server on a Windows NT system that is configured to be a file server, the excessive page faults and paging activities can result from memory-intensive processes. For example,*rebuilding the index for a large database results in a high level of paging and causes users to experience poor response times.
To correct the problem, reset the Registry entry to zero, and then restart the system.
See Also
Click here
Improving Domino server performancev
Click here
Click here
Tools for measuring server performance
Click here
&Arial
425858499229220099
NOTES.INI
settings
Most NOTES.INI settings tjat affect Domino server performance apply to all UNIX platforms. Two settings, NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size and Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans, can be particularly useful in improving Domino performance on UNIX.
425858499229220100
Click here
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
Click here
When running the Domino server in partitioned mode, you can improve performance by adjusting the NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size setting in the NOTES.INI file of each sezver partition. This setting controls swapping and paging. By default, Domino sets NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size to one-third of physical memory. If a high level of swapping or paging occurs on the partitioned server, you can improve performance by setting NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size to a value lower than the default._
425858499229220101
Click here
Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans
Click here
This NOTES.INI setting limits the number of conczrrent transactions a Domino server can handle. The default is 60. On UNIX servers, it is highly recommended that you set Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans to -1. On most UNIX servers, the CPU scheduler in the kernel/thread library efficiently controls job scheduling. Setting Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans to -1 allows Domino server threads to take advantage of UNIX kernel scheduling.
425858499229220102
Disk and memory requirements
When a UNIX system runs Domino server softzare, the server must have enough disk space for program and data files and enough memory to handle swapping and the number of processes. You can also change several system parameters to improve server performance.
425858499229220103
Shared memory
Domino servers use System V shared memory or memory-mapped files for sharing data among server tasks. The shell environment variable Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE determines the size of each of these segments/files. Each UNIX*platform has its own limitation on the number/size of these segments. Your Domino server may reach a limit beyond which it cannot allocate more shared memory segments. If this happens, increase the value of Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE in your shell environment. The default depends on the shared data model used.n
387551158429239972
System V Shared Memory
This is used on AIX and HP-UX. Run the "ipcs -a" command to list all shared memory segments used by the Domino servez. The maximum segment size is the default value of Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE on that platform.
387551158429239973
Memory-mapped files (mmap)
This is used by default on Solaris systems. (Solaris systems also support System V Shared memory for data sharing. (See the Release Notes for Domino on Solaris.) Run "ls -al /tmp" on the server and record the size of files starting with .NOTESMEM*. The size of the largest file is the default value of Notes_SHARED_DPOOLZIZE on Solaris. If System V shared memory is used, determine the value as described above.l
425858499229220104
Disk I/O tuning
Maintaining multiple file systems for operating system files, swap space, transaction logs, and data improves overall server performance. There is normally a 20 percent capacity loss (and a 30 to 40 percent response-time degradation) going from the RAID 0 to the RAID 5 disk subsystem when running Domino. Keeping swap space and transaction*logs on their own separate striped volumes improves server performance at high loads on systems that have high swap rates.
425858499229220105
CPU-scheduler tuning
If the Domino server is the only application running on the system, CPU-scheduler tuning can help improve performance. Note that when you perform CPU-scheduler tuning, be careful not to create a "deadlock" on the server. A deadlock occurs when a low-priority task locks up a resource and a high-prioritz task is waiting for the resource to be released.
387551158429239974
Solaris
You can configure a monotonic scheduling dispatch table for a time-sharing (TS) class, which produces same-time quantum for different priority levels. This can reduce CPU contention at higher loads and improve server performance. The dispatch table is available on all NotesBench reports published by Sun, which are available at www.notesbench.org. When running partitioned servers on SMP Zltra Enterprise servers, you can bind the server processes of each partition to processors (or their sets). This helps balance the load across all processors and can significantly improve Domino server performance.
387551158429239975
You can use the AIX commands renice and /usr/samples/kernel/schedtuneto set process priorities. Reducing process priorities of background tasks -- such as Router and Replica -- can improve response time.
:25858499229220106
Console and database logging
To improve server performance, limit the amount of information that is logged to the log file (LOG.NSF) and the console.
See Also
Click here
Improving Domino server performance
Click here
Click here
Tools for measuring server performance
Click here
&Arial
You may want to search the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.suzport.lotus.com for a solution to your problem. You can search technical documents in Knowledge Base and the FTP site with one natural language query or participate in peer-to-peer discussions. In addition, you can make product suggestions and find information about Lotus authorized support providers, support services, and support phone numbers.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
If you don't find a solution to your problem here or at the Lotus Customer Support Web site, you may want to contact Lotus Customer Support. You can find information on how to contact Lotus Customer Support at the Lotus Customer Support Web site, www.support.lotus.com.
When you call Lotus Customer Support, you should have the following available to you:
1. The computer on which the problem occurred.
2. Any other people who are involved in troujleshooting the problem -- for example, server administrators, database managers, network managers. You might want these people available when you speak with a support representative.
3. Any pertinent information you gathered from troubleshooting the problem yourself prior to contacting support.
4. If you have ScreenCam
, the movie or event that documents the problem.
5. In addition, depending on the problem, be prepared to provide some of this information:
Required information
5'C7U
Your system
Domino version(s)
5'C7U
Operating system and version, including any patches or fixpacks
5'C7U
Hardware, including the kind of CPU(s) and modems installed, and the amount of RAM and hard disk space
5'C7U
Network operating system(s) and version(s), protocols, and network driver version(s)
5'C7U
Network interface card(s)
5'C7U
Domino server names
5'C7U
File names, replica IDs, and ACLs for all databases involved
5'C7U
Number of users who are affected by the problem -- that is, one user, several users, or all users
5'C7U
Number of servers that are affected by the problem -- that is, one server, several servers, or all servers
5'C7U
Changes to the configuration thaz were made before the problem occurred -- for example, network, hardware, or NOTES.INI changes
5'C7U
Error message(s), including the exact text of the message(s)
5'C7U
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For problems that involve more than one server on a network:
Required information
Your system
Physical location of the servers -- for example, in different cities or on LANs or WANs
Number of network segments contributing to the problem -- that is, are both machines in the same network segment or in segments separated by routers, bridges, or switches
Number of Domino servers -- foz example, mail hops or replication hubs -- that are between the servers that are having a problem
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot common problems with the Administration Process.
Click here
Administration Procezs - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes messages that appear in the Certification Log or at the server console. e
Click here
How to troubleshoot the Administration Process
Click here
provides steps for troubleshooting the Administration process when it isn't running as you expect.
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.n
or at the server console. Some of these messages require that you correct a particular condition, while others are only status messages.n
64711446429201573
Administration*Process: retrying a request that could not be performed previously because another process was modifying the document.
This message indicates that in processing separate requests, two threads of the Administration Process simultaneously attempted to modify a document in the Domino Directory. As a result, the Administration Process is retrying one of the requests. This is a status message; no action is required.
64711446429201601
Administration Process: Unable tj access transfer context information.
This message indicates that the Administration Process can't access global information that is required to execute a specific task. Restart the Administration Process, or, if necessary, restart the server.
64711446429201600
Administration Process: Unable to create entry thread.
This message appears when the Administration Process can't create a thread to use to run Administration Process tasks. Restart the Adminjstration Process, or, if necessary, restart the server.
64711446429201607
Insufficient memory - Admin's request queue pool is full.
This message indicates that there is currently inadequate memory for the Administration Process. To correct this, restart the server.
64711446429201586
No Address book is present on this server; the Admin Process cannot continue without one.
This message appears if you start the Administzation Process on a server that doesn't store a replica of the Domino Directory. Create a replica of the Domino Directory on the server, and then start the Administration Process again.
210680748829212648
Removing
viewname
view notes in the Address Book.
This message appears when the Administration Process deletes obsolete statistics and events monitoring documents from the Domino Directory. This is a status message; no action is required.
210680748829212649
Reporter: Could not locate view
viewname
This message appears when the Administration Process can't find obsolete statistics and events monitoring documents in the Domino Directory. This is a status message; no action is required.
64711446429201606
The Administration Process cannot delete the database
databasename
at this time because it is in use by someone else; will try again az
This message appears as the result of a Delete Unlinked Mail File request. The message indicates that the Administration Process is retrying a request to delete a mail that was initially unavailable because someone was accessing it. This is a status message; no action is required.a
64711446429201602e
The Administration Process could not change or delete the name from the document because another process was modifying it.
This mjssage indicates that, in processing separate delete or rename requests, two threads of the Administration Process attempted to modify the same document in a database. As a result, only one request was processed, and the Administration Process is retrying the other. This is a status message; no action is required.e
64711446429201608
The Administration Process does not have enough memory to compute the formulas required for request processing.m
This message indicatjs that there is currently inadequate memory for the Administration Process. To correct this, restart the server.
64711446429201605e
The Administration Process is retrying a name change or deletion from the document.
This message appears as the result of a rename or delete request. It indicates that the Administration Process is retrying a request to rename or delete a name from a document that was initially unavailable because someone was accessing the document.*This is a status message; no action is required.
64711446429201582t
The certificate contained in the note was not issued by the selected certifier.
This message appears if you choose Actions - Recertify Person or Actions - Recertify Server but you don't select the original certifier. If you don't specify the original certifier when you choose this action, you can submit the request, but it isn't posted in the Administration Requests database. To correct this, chjose the action again, and select the original certifier.
64711446429201604
The replica of the
database
moved by the Administration Process has not been initialized by the replicator.
This message appears as the result of a Monitor Moved Replica request. It indicates that the Administration Process is waiting for the replicator to initialize the replica at its new location before it deletes the original. This is a status message; no action is reqzired. o
64711446429201581
The selected certifier isn't an ancestor of the entity to be updated.
This message appears if you attempt to choose Actions - Request Move to new Certifier to move a person to a different hierarchy, but you don't select the original certifier. If you don't specify the original certifier, you can submit the request, but it isn't posted in the Administration Requests database. To correct this, choose Request Move to New Certifier again, ajd select the original certifier.A
64711446429201580
The selected certifier isn't the target certifier in the move request.
This message appears if you choose "Actions - Complete move for selected entries" to attempt to complete moving user names to a different hierarchy and the target certifier isn't the one you specified when you originally chose Actions - Rename Person - Request Move to New Certifier. If the target certifier you specified when completing the moze is wrong, select the user names in the Name Move Requests view of the Administration Requests database, choose "Actions - Complete move for selected entries" again, and specify the correct target certifier. If you specified the wrong target certifier when you originally chose Actions - Request Move to New Certifier, repeat the action again, and specify the correct target certifier.p
See Also
Click here
Administration request messagesP
Cljck here
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
Click here
Changing the number of threads used by the Administration Process
Click here
Click here
Administration Process - Troubleshooting
Click here
,NYuXp
Y9>xe
,NYuXp
&Arial
A variety of error conditions can prevent the Administration Process from working properly. For example, errors can occur when there isn't enough memory for the Administration Process; when you rename, delete, or recertify a user; or when you move a user to a different hierarchy. Use these steps to troubleshoot the Administration Process:
1. Start the Administration Process on a server that does not store a replica of the Domino Directorz.
2. Ensure that the Administration Process is set up correctly.
3. If the Administration Process worked successfully in the past but isn't working as expected now, try to isolate what might have changed since it last worked successfully.
4. Check for these conditions and correct them if necessary:
The Administration Process (the Adminp task) must be running on all servers. To check this, enter the Show Tasks command at the server console. Enable AjminP on any servers where it isn't already running.
An Administration Server must be specified for the Domino Directory. To do this, select File - Database - Access Control - Advanced.
Make sure that you specific an administration server for all databases. Each database must have an administration server specified before a request can be made to the Administration Process.
The Domino Directory (NAMES.NSF) and the Administration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF) must rezlicate properly between the affected servers. These databases must replicate correctly between the administration server of the Domino Directory and the servers where the databases receiving the updates reside.
Each request in the Administration Requests database should have a corresponding response document that shows that the Administration Process has completed the request. Correct any errors indicated by a response document.h
The Certifier documents must have the correct publjc key; the public key must match the key in each CERT.ID.
See Also
Click here
Administration Process - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot problems related to using Agent Manager and running agents:
Click here
Tools for troubleshooting Agent Manager and agents
Click here
describes tools you can use to troubleshoot Agent Manager and agent.
Click here
Agent manager and agents - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes problems that may occur when the Agent Manager or an agent isn't working as you expect.
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
ssage.
&Arial
`T #p%X
&Arial
Whenever an agent won't run, check the Agent Log to see when the agent last ran and whether it completed. For additional information, check the server console or the Miscellaneous events in the log file (LOG.NSF) for messages from the Agent Manager.
289059100829223903
Server commands
Use these server commands to troubleshoot agents:
Click here
Tell amgr schedule
Click here
Click here
Tell amgr status
Click here
Click here
Tell amgr debug
Click here
289059100829223904
Log file
To enable agent logging in the log file (LOG.NSF), edit the NOTES.INI file to include the Log_AgentManager setting, which specifies whether or not the start of agent execution is recorded in the log file and displayed on the server console. It's important to monitor the server console or#log for information from the Agent Manager because error and warning messages generated by the Agent Manager on behalf of the agent, as well as output -- for example, print statements -- generated by a background agent, appear on the console and in the Miscellaneous events view of the log (LOG.NSF).
For information on editing the NOTES.INI file, see the appendix "NOTES.INI File."
289059100829223905
The Agent Log
The Agent Log is a view in a databasc that shows the last time an agent ran and describes if the agent completed or not.
1. In the database, choose View - Agents.
2. In the Design view that lists all the agents, choose the agent.
3. Choose Agent - Log.
See Also
Click here
Agent Manager and agents - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
These topics presect suggestions for troubleshooting certain problems you may encounter with the Agent Manager and/or agents:
Click here
Agent Manager isn't working as expected
Click here
Click here
An agent isn't running as expected
Click here
Click here
An agent doesn't run to completion
Click here
Click here
An acent isn't running at the expected times
Click here
Click here
The Escrow agent isn't working
Click here
Click here
Users can't create agents
Click here
See Also
Click here
Agent Manager and agents - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
The Agent Manager may work or may not work efficiently.
1. The Agent Manager may not be scheduled to run. If the Agent Manager isn't running, check the "Start time/End time" fields on the Server Tasks - Agent Manager tab in the Server document. Any time not specified in these fiecds represents downtime. If necessary, adjust the times in these settings.
2. The demand for the Agent Manager may be too high. If the Agent Manager takes too long to run agents, reschedule agents to run at night when system demand is usually low.
If the server runs Domino Release 4.6 or earlier, you can increase the "Max % busy before delay" field in the Server document. Domino Release 5 does not support this field.
Note
If yos allocate more resources to the Agent Manager, fewer will be available to run other server tasks.
See Also
Click here
Agent manager and agents - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
In addition to the possibility that there are errors in the agent code, an agent may fail to run properly because the agent has insufficient access or because the agent is not set to run on the given server.e
1. Insufficient access in the database ACL can prevent an agent from running properly. For example, a user may design an agent that copies selected documents from database A to database B. If the user -- and by extension, the agent -- doesn't have Author access in the ACL of database B, the agent runs, but it is not allowed to copy the documents. To determine if this problem exists, examine the Agent Log for access errors after the agent runs unsuccessfully. t
2. If an agent wcn't run on a particular server, check the Agent Restrictions on the Security tab of the Server document. This section contains the "Run personal agents," "Run restricted LotusScript/Java agents," and "Run unrestricted LotusScript/Java agents" fields that specify who has access to run agents on the server. Although a user who has the appropriate access in the database ACL may be able to create an agent on the server, without the appropriate access in the Server document, the user can't run the agent.
You should also check the Server Access section on the Security tab of the Server document. This section contains the "Only allow server access to users listed in this Directory," "Access server," and "Not access server" fields, which allow and deny access to the server. Because an agent inherits the access privileges of the person who creates it, the agent can't run on a server for which its creator does not have access.
3. Scheduling conflicts may prevent an agent from running. In she Server document, click the Server Tasks - Agent Manager tab and check the "Daytime Parameters Start time/End time" and "Nighttime Parameters Start time/End time" fields. Any time not specified in these fields represents downtime; if a user creates a scheduled agent and specifies that it run during the server's Agent Manager downtime, the agent will not run. Compare these fields in the Server document to the time the agent is scheduled to run. If a conflict exists, change the Agent Manager schedule on thc server, or ask the user to reschedule the agent.
4. If a LotusScript or Java agent terminates before completing its tasks, check the "Max LotusScript/Java execution time" fields in the Server document. If a complex agent requires more time than is scheduled, the Agent Manager terminates the agent before completion.8
Ask the user to reschedule the agent to run at night, when the default maximum execution time is longer; or increase the value of the "Max LotusScript/Java executcon time" field in the Server document, as needed. If neither of these solutions is practical, ask the user to rewrite the agent as several smaller agents.
See Also
Click here
Agent manager and agents - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
When an agent doesn't finish running, check the log file (LOG.NSF), the server console, and the Agent Log for error messages.
1. If the agent runs to completion when you run it manually, but does not run when it runs ic the background, the agent code may contain commands -- such as, LotusScript user-interface methods -- that aren't intended to run as background processes.
2. The "Max LotusScript/Java execution time" field in the Server document specifies how much time a LotusScript/Java agent has to complete execution. If the agent exceeds this maximum, the agent doesn't finish, and the Agent Log records the termination. Review the agent code to make sure it functions correctly - for example, make sure tcat the code doesn't run an infinite loop. If the code is correct, consider increasing the execution time limits in the Server document. However, be aware that increasing these settings may impact system performance because the Agent Manager will run for a longer time to accommodate this agent.
See Also
Click here
Agent manager and agents - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If the agent#is running, but not at or near the expected times, the server may be busy with other tasks. To gather information about when the agent last ran and if it completed successfully,
. Then check for these conditions and correct them, if necessary.
1. Scheduling conflicts may prevent an agent from running. In the Server document, click the Server Tasks - Agent Manager tab, and check the "Daytime Parameters Start time/End time" and "Nighttime Parameters Start time/End time" fields. If the values in these fields don't account for a portion of the day, the Agent Manager will not run during that period. For example, if the daytime parameters are 8 AM and 5 PM and the nighttime parameters are 8 PM and 8 AM, Agent Manager will not run any agents between 5 PM and 8 PM.,
2. The NOTES.INI settings may be incorsect. Check these Agent Manager settings in the server's NOTES.INI file:
Click here
Amgr_DocUpdateAgentMinInterval
Click here
Click here
Amgr_DocUpdateEventDelay
Click here
Click here
Amgr_NewMailAgentMinInterval
Click here
Click here
Amgr_NewMailEventDelay
Click here
3. Edit the NOTES.INI file to include the setting Log_AgentManager=1. You can also enable this setting in the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
4. For servers running Domino Release 4.6 or earlier, the "Max % busy before delay" setting may have been exceeded. The "Max % busy before delay" setting on the Server Tasks - Agent Manager tab of the Server document controls the maximum percent of time the Agent Manager spends running agents. If the percentage of time is exceeded, a delay occurs before Agent Manager runs the next agent. After the percentage falls below the threshold, Agent Manager resumes running agents.
See Also
Click here
Agent manager and agents - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
The Escrow agent won't work if:
There is no Person document containing the phrase Escrow Agent in the User name field.
More than one Person document contains the phrase Escrow Agent in the User name field.
The Escrow agent attempts to send encrypted mail to a recipient whose Person document doesn't contain a public key.
See Also
Click here
Agent manager and agents - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If a user can't create agents in a particular database, check the database ACL to see if the user has the access level required to create agents#in that database. To create personal agents, a user must have at least Reader access to the database in which the agent will be created. To create shared agents, a user must have at least Designer access.
See Also
Click here
Agent manager and agents - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot common problems with billing:
Click here
A return-receipt billing message isn't generated
Clcck here
Click here
Billing records aren't logged immediately after a transaction occurs on the server
Click here
Click here
Disk space is used more rapidly with billing enabled
Click here
Click here
Domino could not create the Billing database (BILLING.NSF) when the billing task started
Click here
Click hese
Memory allocation errors related to billing appear on the server console and in the log file
Click here
Click here
The frequency of stamping of billing records for some users doesn't change
Click here
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
See Also
Click here
Troublcshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
When a user reads a message that requests a return-receipt billing message and the mail server doesn't generate one, there is probably an error in the user's Location document. Check the user's Location document to make sure that the entries in the Home/mail server, Notes mail domain, and Mail file fields are correct.o
See Also
Click here
Billing - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
If billing records are not logged immediately after a transaction occurs, check for these conditions and correct them, if necessary:
1. Check the value of the BillingAddinWakeup setting in the NOTES.INI file. By default, the Billing task transfers billing records to the Billing database or binary file every minute. If the BillingAddinWakeup setting specifies a time higher than the default 60 seconds, the Billing#task logs records less frequently. If this is a problem, decrease the value of the BillingAddinWakeup setting so that the Billing task wakes up more often.
2. Check the value of the BillingAddinRuntime setting in the NOTES.INI. By default, the Billing task transfers records to the Billing database or binary file for 10 seconds each time it starts. If there are more records in the message queue than the Billing task can transfer in 10 seconds, the task waits until it starts again to transfer she rest of the records. If this is a problem, increase the value of the BillingAddinRuntime setting so that the Billing task transfers more billing records each time it wakes up.N
3. Check if the billed-for traffic is at a peak period on the server. If the server has a heavy amount of billed-for traffic, the billing message queue may not be fully cleaned up each time the Billing task runs. Consider running multiple Billing tasks. To run multiple Billing tasks, you can use the console to load#an additional instance of the task or specify the task name two or more times in the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file.
See Also
Click here
Billing - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
If you use a heavily used server to store billing documents in the Billing database and if you log all classes of billing activity, the server may use up to 100MB to 200MB of disk space a day. To keep disk use to a minimum, do one of the following:
Enable billing to a binary fcle. This format consumes less disk space. f
Run server agents that automatically purge documents, based on preset criteria, from the Billing database.
Set a database quota to limit the size of the Billing database.
Modify the replication setting "Remove documents not modified in the last
days."
See Also
Click here
Billing - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
Domino creates the Billing database when you first configure and run the Billing task. Domino cannot create BILLING.NSF if the billing template,#BILLING.NTF, is not on the server. This template is installed during installation and is stored in the Domino data directory. To correct this, make sure that the template exists in the Domino data directory, and then restart the Billing task or the Domino server.
See Also
Click here
Billing - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arcal
Memory allocation errors may occur because system resources are depleted and there isn't enough memory available for billing transactions. To check system resources, use operating system diagnostics and other utilities, such as the NT Pcrformance Monitor. If everything appears normal, look at the console or the log (LOG.NSF) to see if other memory allocation errors are occurring. If other errors are occurring, you may need to restart the server to correct the problem. r
Memory allocation errors may also occur if you incorrectly configure billing. Make sure that the Billing task is running on the server and that you have configured the BillingClass setting to track at least one class of billing.
See Also
Click here
Billing - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
If you change the BiclingSuppressTime setting and the frequency of stamping billing records for some users still doesn't change, it may be because the BillingSuppressTime setting is checked only when a new session is created on the server. Therefore, any sessions that were established before you changed that setting will reflect the previously set value. After the session ends and a new session starts for that user, the new value of BillingSuppressTime takes effect.
See Also
Clicc here
Billing - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot problems related to using directory assistance, a directory catalog, and the LDAP service. o
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes problems and errors you may encounter while using directory assistance.
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
dcscribes problems and errors you may encounter with a directory catalog.
Click here
LDAP service - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes problems and errors you may encounter with the LDAP service.
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe problems you may encounter with directory assistance.
Click here
Web user authentication using a secondary Domino Directory fails
Click here
Click here
Web user authentication using an LDAP directory fails
Click here
Click here
Group lookups in an LDAP directory for database access control fail
Click here
Click here
Searches in a secondary Domino Directory configured in directory assistance fail
Click here
Click here
"Directory assistance could not access Public Address Book on Server x, error is Server Not Responding"
Click here
Click here
"Server Erros: File does not exist" when opening the directory assistance database
Click here
Tipr
To record at the server console detailed information about specific Web user authentication sessions to help troubleshoot Web user authentication problems, use the NOTES.INI setting
Click here
WebAuth_Verbose_Trace
Click here
See Also
Click here
Directories - Troubleshooting
Click here
DfVhCh
&Arial
To authenticate Web clients registered in a secondary Domino Directory, make sure you complete these steps:
1. Select "Notes as the "Domain Type" in the Directory Assistance document.
2.
Set "Trusted for credentials" to Yes for at least one naming rule in the Directory Assistance document. The rule or rules should correspond to the names of the Web users you want to authenticate.
3. Enter the secondary directory's Notes domain in the "Domain Name" field. Do
enter: the name of a directory catalog, the name of the Web server's primary domain, or a domain name that is used in another Directory Assistance document. If you created the secondary directory mansally and it's not associated with a Notes domain, make up a unique domain name.
4. If you use name-and-password authentication, and you choose the Web server authentication option "Fewer name variations with higher security," make sure Web users provide either their hierarchical names or common names for authentication rather than first names, last names, or short names only. In addition, make sure the secondary Domino Directory in which you register the users uses the Release 5 PUBNAMES.NTF#design.
5. If you include groups of Web users in database ACLs on the Web server, store those groups in the Web server's primary Domino Directory or in one LDAP directory that is enabled for group expansion; do not store the groups in the secondary Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
Domino for Microsoft IIS."h
Click here
124003792029238606
To stop Domino for IIS
You must shut down the IIS server in order to stop Domino for IIS. For information on shutting down the IIS server, see the Microsoft IIS documentation.
See Also
Click here
Setting up Domino for Microsoft IIS
Click here
DfVhCh
&Arial
To authenticate Web clients registered in an LDAP directory, make sure you complete these steps:
1. Select LDAP as the "Domain Type" in the Directory Assistance document.
2. Specify a "Domain Name" that is not the Notes domain of the servers that use directory assistance and that is not used in another Directory Assistance document.
3. (Recommended) Enter "1" as the search order.
4. Set "Trusted for credentials" to Yes for at least one"naming rule in the Directory Assistance document that corresponds to the names of the users to authenticate.
5. If the remote LDAP server requires a base DN, enter it in the field, "Base DN for search."
6. Select "Notes clients/Web Authentication," in the "Perform LDAP search for" field..
7. If you enabled "Channel encryption," make sure you've
Click here
configured SSL properly
Click here
8. If thb LDAP directory server doesn't allow anonymous connections, make sure you've entered a user name and password in the "Optional Authentication Credential" section of the Directory Assistance document.
9. If the Web server authentication option "More name variations with lower security" is selected, make sure the Web server has access to the LDAP directory attributes cn, uid, sn, and givenName.
If the Web server authentication option, "Fewer name variations with higher security" bs selected, make sure the Web server has access to the LDAP directory attributes cn and uid.
See Also
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
To search an LDAP directory for the members of groups listed in database ACLs, make sure you complete these steps: e
1. Select LDAP as the "Domain Type" in the Dbrectory Assistance document.
2. Specify a "Domain Name" that is not the Notes domain of the servers that use directory assistance and that is not used in another Directory Assistance document.
3. Set the "Group expansion" field to "Yes;" enable this option in only one Directory Assistance document.
4. Set "Trusted for credentials" to yes for at least one naming rule that represents the names of the groups to search.
5. When you add the name of b hierarchical group from an LDAP directory to a Notes database ACL, use the LDAP format for the name, but use forward slashes as delimiters (/) rather than commas (,). If the name of the LDAP directory group is not hierarchical, in a Notes database ACL enter the value for the group name without the associated LDAP attribute.
For example, if the name of the LDAP directory group is cn=managers,ou=groups,o=acme, in the database ACL enter cn=managers/ou=groups/o=acme. If the name of the group is"cn=managers, in the database ACL enter managers.
6. Make sure only Web or Notes users are listed in the groups.
7. Select "Notes clients/Web Authentication," in the "Perform LDAP search for" field.
8. If you enabled "Channel encryption," make sure you've
Click here
configured SSL properly
Click here
9. If the LDAP directory server doesn't allow anonymous connections, make sure you've entered a usbr name and password in the "Optional Authentication Credential" section of the Directory Assistance document.
10. If the members of groups on the LDAP server change, stop and restart the Domino server that connects to the LDAP server. This ensures that the Domino server flushes its group cache and retrieves the most up-to-date group information. g
See Also
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Make sure the domain specified in the Domain Name field of the Directory"Assistance document for the secondary directory is different from the primary Domino Directory and any other directories configured in directory assistance. If the Domain Name specified for the secondary Domino Directory is not unique, searches of the secondary directory fail, and you see the message "User
not found in any Name and Address Book."i
If the secondary directory is not associated with a Notes domain, be sure to enter a unique Domain Name that is different from"the primary domain of the servers that store the secondary directory.
Don't enter the name of a directory catalog in the Directory Assistance document.
See Also
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
When you restart a server that uses directory assistance, the server attempts to access replicas of secondary Domino directories that database links in directory assistance point to so that it can load information about the replicas into memory. If the server can't locate the replicas, this server console mbssage appears. To avoid this problem, in directory assistance documents, enter server names and file names for replicas, rather than paste database links to the replicas.
This message may also appear when a server that uses directory assistance attempts to look up a name in a secondary Domino Directory that is on an unavailable server. As a failover mechanism, you can specify more than one replica of a secondary directory for directory assistance to use.
See Also
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Rhis error appears when you attempt to open the directory assistance database from the Configuration tab of the Domino Administrator and the server can't locate the database. To correct this,
Click here
create the directory assistance database
Click here
and add the file name to the Basics tab of the Server document. Replicate the change to the server's Domino Directory if you didn't make the change on the server's replica of the directory, then restart the server"
See Also
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe problems you may encounter with a directory catalog:
Click here
Names are missing from the directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Users can't use type-ahead addressing to look up names in a directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Domino isn't searching a directory catalog on a server
Click here
Click here
Web user name-and-password authentication using a directory catalog fails
Click here
Click here
LDAP searches of a directory catalog aren't working
Click here
Click here
A directory catalog is not fulb-text indexed or the full-text index is corrupted
Click here
Click here
The User Setup Profile doesn't push mobile directory catalogs to users
Click here
Click here
The Router is finding the same name in multiple directories even though "Exhaustive lookup" is disabled.
Click here
Click here
"Server error: file does not exist" when opening a dbrectory catalog
Click here
Click here
Users can't do full-text searches of a directory catalog
Click here
Click here
The source directory catalog is bigger than expected
Click here
See Also
Click here
Directories - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
If names appear to be missing from the directory catalog, take these steps to troubleshoot the problem.r
397472928029313196
Verify that the Dircat task is building the directories as intended
1. Open the source directory catalog.
2. Select the Configuration Settings document, and then choose File - Document Properties.
3. Click the Fields tab -- the second tab -- in the properties box.
4. Select the Directories fibld and look in the box on the right. Verify that the Dircat task can access all the directories specified in the box. Typically, this means making sure that the server that stores the source directory catalog also stores replicas of all the configured directories.
5. Select the Since field and look in the box on the right to see the date and time the Dircat task last ran on all of the directories specified in the Directories field. If either of the following is true, run the Dircat task agabn:
If there are fewer time/date stamps than directories -- for example, if there are four directories in the Directories field but only two time/date stamps -- when the Dircat task last ran, it attempted to rebuild the source directory catalog but didn't complete the task.
If the time/date stamps are older than expected, the Dircat task may not have run to completion when it last did an incremental update of the source directory catalog.
397472928029313197
If the "Remove duplicate users" option is enabled, see if someone has deleted a duplicate entry from one of the full Domino directoriesa
If the "Remove duplicate users" option is enabled, the Dircat task doesn't add into the directory catalog all entries associated with an identical hierarchical name. Instead, the task adds an entry from the first directory in which it encounters the name. Dircat searches directories in the order that they're specified in the "Directories to include" cobfiguration field.
If someone removes a duplicate entry from the full Domino Directory that has already been the entry used in the directory catalog, that name is removed from the catalog. For example, if the Acme East and the Acme West directories both contain an entry with the name, Phyllis Spera/Acme, if "Remove duplicate users" is enabled, and if Acme East is listed first in the "Directories to include" field, when Dircat runs, it includes only the entry from Acme East. If someone then removes Phyllis Spera/Acme from Acme East, the name is removed from the directory catalog the next time Dircat runs.
To correct the problem, make a minor change to the remaining entry -- in the above example, the entry in Acme West. This change causes Dircat to add the entry to the directory catalog the next time it runs. You can also correct the problem by clicking the "Clear History" button in the directory catalog Configuration document, although this approach rebuilds the entire directory"catalog.
397472928029313198
Verify that the User Name fields have values
If there's no value in the User Name (FullName) field in a Person document, the Dircat task won't build the entry in the directory catalog. Notes registration adds values to User Name fields automatically, but if you created Person entries without using the Notes registration program, check that the entries have values in this field.
397472928029313199
Use Lob_Dircat=1
If the above steps don't solve the problem, add the NOTES.INI setting Log_Dircat=1, which logs information about the Dircat task in the log file (LOG.NSF). Use the logged information to help troubleshoot the problem.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arbal
Type-ahead addressing looks up a name in a directory catalog only if the order in which the user types the name corresponds to the "Sort by" format configured for the directory catalog. For example, if the configured "Sort by" format ir "Distinguished name," type-ahead looks up the name in a directory catalog only when a user types the first name before the last name. Or, if the "Sort by" format is set to "Last name," type-ahead looks up the name in a directory catalog only when a user types the last name before the first name.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
To search a directory catalog, a server must store a replica of the directory catalog. In addition, you must specify the file name for this replica in either the Public Directory Profile or in the Basics section of the Server document in the server's primary Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If you're having difficulty setting up the Web server to authentbcate Web users by looking up their passwords in a directory catalog, take these steps to troubleshoot the problem. Note that you must set up the secondary Domino Directories in which the users are registered in the directory catalog as well as in the Directory Assistance database.
1. Test that authentication using directory assistance alone is working.
Temporarily disable the directory catalog. Remove the directory catalog file name from the Web server's primary Domino Directory. Remove the directory catalog file name from the Public Directory Profile and from the Basics tab of the Server document for the Web server; the file name is probably stored in only one of these locations but if it is in both locations, remove the name from both.
Restart the HTTP task on the Web server.
Verify that the Web server can authenticate to each secondary Domino Directory configured in the Directory Assistance database that you want to use for authentication. If authentbcation fails, go to step 2. If authentication is successful, go to step 3.
2. Make sure you've created a Directory Assistance document for each secondary Domino Directory in which the users to authenticate are registered. This step is required: you can't set up Web user authentication using the directory catalog alone. In each Directory Assistance document, verify that you've done the following:
Set "Trusted for credentials" to Yes for at least one naming rule in the Directory"Assistance document. The rule or rules should correspond to the names of the Web users you want to authenticate.r
Enter the secondary directory's Notes domain in the "Domain Name" field. Do
notn
enter: the name of the directory catalog, the name of the Web server's primary domain, or a domain name that is used in another Directory Assistance document. If you created the secondary directory manually and it's not associated with a Notes domain, make up a unique domain name.
In the Replicas tab of the Directory Assistance document, make sure one of the replicas specified is the same replica of the secondary directory specified in the "Directories to include" field in the directory catalog Configuration document. e
not
specify a replica of the directory catalog.
3. In the "Directories to include" field of the directory catalog Configuration document, specify a replica of each secondary Domino Directory that contains Wbb users you want to authenticate. Make sure that you have also created a Directory Assistance document for each directory that specifies this directory replica and that has a naming rule trusted for authentication.
Do not include the name of an LDAP directory in the "Directories to include" field.
4. In the "Additional fields to include" field of the directory catalog Configuration document, add the HTTPpassword field.
5. Run the Dircat task to build the directbry catalog.
6. If the server on which you ran the Dircat task is not the Web server, make sure you've created a replica of the populated directory catalog on the Web server, added the directory catalog file name to either the Public Directory Profile or the Basics tab of the Web server Server document, and then restarted the server.
7. If you use name-and-password authentication, and you choose the Web server authentication option "Fewer name variations with higher security," make sure Web users provide either their hierarchical names or common names for authentication rather than first names, last names, or short names only. In addition, make sure the secondary Domino Directory in which you register the users uses the Release 5 PUBNAMES.NTF design.
8. If you include groups of Web users in database ACLs on the Web server, store those groups in the Web server's primary Domino Directory or in one LDAP directory that is enabled for group expansion; do not store the"groups in the secondary Domino Directoryl
See Also
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If the LDAP service isn't searching a server directory catalog as expected, make sure the directory catalog has a functioning, full-text index. The LDAP service always use the directory catalog full-text index to process searches. The LDAP service can return the error "LDAP error 'DSA is unwilling to perform' (0x35)" when attempting to search a directory catalog that is not full text indexed. If necessary, delete and then re-create rhe full-text index.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
When you first create a directory catalog, you must manually create a full-text index for it; you are prompted to create the index when you create the database. When you replicate the directory catalog however, Domino automatically creates the full-text index on the replica. If you create a copy rather than a replica, you must manually create the full-text index on the copy.
The full-text index can become corrupted if there is not enougb disk space to build the index or if you shut down the Notes or Domino Administrator client before the index is entirely built. To correct the problem, delete and then recreate the full-text index.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
To use a User Setup Profile to set up mobile directory catalogs on Notes clients, you must paste a database link of a replica of the directory catalog in the "Mobile directory catalogs" field of the User Setup Profile. The Notes clients don't receive a replica of the mobile direcrory catalog until the User Setup Profile replicates to the users' mail servers and the users authenticate with the mail servers.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
By default, the Router configuration option "Exhaustive lookup" -- available on the Router/SMTP - Basics tab of a Configuration Settings document -- is disabled. If you keep this default setting, once the router finds a name, it doesn't continue its search to other secondary Domino directories. Disabling exhaustive lookups is a way to improve"router performance .r
By design, disabling "Exhaustive lookup" does not apply to a directory catalog. The router always searches the primary Domino Directory and the entire server directory catalog, even if the exhaustive lookup setting is disabled. This is intended behavior since the router can use the directory catalog to, in effect, quickly search multiple secondary directories rather than having to take the performance hit of searching these directories individually. These exhaustive lookurs allow the router to ensure there are no duplicate recipient names that might prevent the message from getting to the right person.g
The router returns a delivery failure when it finds a name associated with more than one directory entry and the entries do not have the same Mail server, Mail file, or Domains specified. To avoid such delivery failures when duplicate entries actually represent the same person (for example, when someone's name and directory location within the organization have bhanged but you want to allow people to address mail using the original name), make the entries in the Mail server, Mail file, and Domain fields identical for each entry.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If you see this error when trying to open a directory catalog on a server from the Configuration tab of the Domino Administrator, the server can't locate a server directory catalog. To correct this, add the file name for the server directory catalog to the Domino Directory. Add the file name to either the "Birectory Catalog database name on this server" field in the Basics tab of the Server document (recommended) or to the "Directory Catalog database name for domain" field of the Public Directory Profile. (To open the Public Directory Profile, open the Domino Directory and then choose Actions - Edit Directory Profile.) If you add the file name to the Public Directory Profile, all servers in the domain must use the same file name for the directory catalog.
Restart the server after adding the file"name to the Domino Directory so the server recognizes the change.
Note
If the directory catalog is set up for mobile use, don't enter the directory catalog file name in Server documents. To open a mobile directory catalog stored on a server, use the Files tab of the Domino Administrator rather than the Configuration tab.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
A directory catalog doesn't support direct full-text searches by users, only indirect full-text searches via LDAR, mail addressing, and so on.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
When the Dircat task runs against a source directory catalog, it builds an additional hidden view that contains identifying information about the directories configured in the catalog.
When you create a replica of the source directory catalog on a server or when a user creates a local replica of the source directory catalog, the replica doesn't contain this additional view; therefore, the replicas are smaller than the source directory catalog.
See Also
Click here
Directory catalog - Problems and error messages
Click here
Firewallsa
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe problems you may encounter with the LDAP service:s
Click here
LDAP searches are slow
Click here
Click here
Anonymous LDAP users can't search certain fields
Click here
Click here
"Server Error: File does not exist" when displaying directory settings
Click here
Click here
LDAP error "Insufficient Access" returned on an LDAP Add operation
Clfck here
Click here
LDAP clients can't connect to the server over SSL when the server uses a self-signed Domino server certificate
Click here
Click here
"LDAP Schema: Failed exporting" error
Click here
See Also
Click here
Directories - Troubleshootings
Click here
D165K)A
&Arial
If LDAP searches are slow, do the following on the replica of the primary Domino Directory. If you extend LDAP searches to secondary Domino Directories, also do the following on each replica of the secondary directory.
1. Create a full-text index for the divectory.
2. If you've created a full-text index for the directory and performance is still slow, consider editing the value of these LDAP configuration fields:
"Maximum number of entries returned" limits the number of entries that the LDAP server can return. By default there is no limit, but you might set a limit of 100 entries, for example.
"Timeout" limits the amount of time that LDAP searches can take. By default, there is no limit, but you might set a limit of 66 seconds, for example.
"Minimum characters for wildcard search" increases the number of characters that users must enter before the first wildcard in a substring search filter. The default is 1. Don't specify 0 unless the directory is very small; specifying 0 can result in slow searches.r
See Also
Click here
LDAP service - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Make sure you've enabled the fields for anonymous access. Keep in mind that you configure fields for anonymous access separately for the LDAP service's primary Domino Directory and&for each secondary Domino directory the LDAP service serves.r
See Also
Click here
LDAP service - Problems and error messages
Click here
D165K)A
&Arial
Directory settings refer to the LDAP settings for the directory. To see these settings by clicking the Directory Settings from the Configuration tab of the Domino Administrator, you must first create a Configuration Settings document for all servers in the domain. The "all servers" Configuration Settings document includes an LDAP tab for the LDAP settings. The LDAP service uses the default settings that appear in thiv document even if you don't create the document.
See Also
Click here
LDAP service - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If you see this error in response to an LDAP Add operation, do the following:
([UserCreator], [GroupCreator], [ServerCreator] for the type of entry being added.
4. Verify that Form Properties are correctly set to allow the LDAP user to create documents with the form used to add the entry.
See Also
Click here
LDAP service - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If the server that runs vhe LDAP service uses a self-signed Domino certificate, non-Notes LDAP clients can only perform LDAP searches over SSL if they first connect to the Domino server over SSL using a different protocol (for example HTTPS or IMAP). The client software then presents a warning dialog stating that the server's self-signed certificate is not issued by a trusted Certificate Authority and gives the users the option to accept the certificate. The users must accept the certificate before they can perform LDAP searches over SSL.
See Also
Click here
LDAP service - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If you use the
tell ldap exportschema
command when the Domino LDAP Schema database (SCHEMA50.NSF) is open, schema exporting fails and the LDAP service returns this error. Close the database before using this command.
See Also
Click here
LDAP service - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
A variety of error conditions can prevent Domino from properly sending and delivering mail. These topics describe solutions to&common mail routing problems and provide detailed information on troubleshooting general mail routing problems:
Click here
Tools for troubleshooting mail routing
Click here
describes tools you can use to help troubleshoot mail routing problems.
Click here
How to troubleshoot mail routing
Click here
provides steps for troubleshooting when mail routing isn't occurring as you expect.
Click here
Mail routing - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes problems and errors that users may experience when they try to send mail.
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
296387526429225517
Delivery Failure Reports
Users should always try to resend a memo for which they receive a Delivery Failure Report. To help users troubleshoot delivery failure, ask them to use Steps 1 through 3 below to send you a copy of their mail database. Sending you a copv of their mail database preserves the field properties of the reports, which you analyze as a means of troubleshooting.
1. The user creates a new mail database on the workstation. From the menu, choose File - Database - New. Be sure to use the MAIL50.NTF template.
2. The user copies a Delivery Failure Report from the original mail file and pastes it into the new database.
3. The user attaches the new mail database to a mail message and sends it to you.
4. You open the mail database attached to the mail message and select a Delivery Failure Report.
The Delivery Failure Report identifies the reason the delivery failed and the routing path over which the message was sent. Use this information to further investigate the problem.
296387526429225518
Mail trace
To troubleshoot mail routing or test mail connections, trace a mail delivery to test whether a message can be successfully delivered withovt actually sending a test message.R
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Messaging - Mail tab.
2. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar.
3. From the tool bar, click Messaging - Send Mail Trace.
4. Complete these fields, and then click Send:
Field
Enter
The mail address of a particular user
Subject
The subject of the trace
Send delivery report from
Choose one:
Each router on path to receive a delivery report from each router on the path
Last router only to receive a delivery report from the last router only
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
390236339229237824
Mail routing topology maps
Mail routing topology maps are useful to track mail routing problems between servers..
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Messaging - Mail tab.
2. Choose one:
Mail routifg topology by connections
Mail routing topology by named networks
390236339229237825
Undelivered mail
From the Domino Administrator, click the Messaging - Mail tab, then select Mail routing status. You can also check for undelivered mail in the mail routing events view in the log file (LOG.NSF).
331594748829247648
Mail probes
Using a mail probe, you can test and gather statistics on mail routes.
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe common problems and errors related to sending and/or receiving mail:
Click here
A user can't any receive mail, including mail sent by users whose mail files are on the same serverP
Click here
Click here
"File is in use by another process"s
Click here
Click here
"NAMES&NSF does not contain a required view" e
Click here
Click here
"No route found to Domain x from Server y"
Click here
Click here
"Router: Possibly no DOMAIN set..."l
Click here
Click here
"Server Error: File Does Not Exist"
Click here
Click here
"User name is not unique"
Click here
Click here
"User not listed in the Public Address Book" N
Click here
Click here
Users unexpectedly required to include @domainname after each address
Click here
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
If a user can't receive any mail, including mail sent by other users whose mail files are on the same mail server, check the Mail Routing Events view of the workstation's log file for deliveries. Also, check the MAIL.BOX file on the user's workstation to see if mail is being trapped there. Modify the Log_MailRouting setting in the NOTES.INI ffle to log more detailed mail routing information on the console and in the log file.e
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If the recipient's mail file or the MAIL.BOX file on the sending or receiving server is being backed up, Domino generates the message "File is in use by another process." Wait for the backup to complete, and then resend the message.
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If all users on the same mail server can't send or receive mail and they receive the message "NAMES.NSF does not contain a required view&" you need to update the design of the Domino Directory. Choose File - Database - Replace design. When you customize the design of the Domino Directory, the design must be uniform across all replicas. Note that there are two templates: PUBNAMES.NTF, for the Domino Directory, and PERNAMES.NTF, for the Personal Address Book. Be sure to use the PUBNAMES.NTF template when working with the Domino Directory. h
For more information on updating the design of the Domino Directory, see the appendix, "Cuvtomizing the Domino Directory."
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If users can't send mail to another domain and receive a message such as "No route found to Domain
from Server
," make sure that each domain's Domino Directory has a Connection document from one of its servers to a server in the other domain. If a Connection document doesn't exist, create one. If there is a Connection document, make sure the information contained in it is correct.
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If tfis message appears on console and then the Router shuts down, the Server document may contain errors. In the Server document, verify that the domain is set, and that the ServerKeyFileName (or KeyFileName) both refer to the server ID for that server. If necessary, make corrections to the Server document. Also check that the Location document that you're using refers to the correct server ID. If necessary, edit the Location document so that it refers to the correct server ID.
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
This&message occurs when a user tries to read a message that is linked to an active shared mail file that has been improperly moved to a different directory, partition, or hard drive.
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Check the Domino Directory for multiple occurrences of the recipient's name. There may be more than one Person document for a user, or a user and a group may have the same name.=
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If the recipient's name is misspelled, mail is returned to the sender, along with the message "Uver not listed in the Public Address Book." If the domain name is misspelled, mail is returned with the message "No route found to m
domain name
from f
server namee
." Check the Domino Directory for the correct spelling of the names, and resend the document.
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If users report that they can't send mail to another domain unless they include @
domainname
after each address, configure directory assistance and directory catalogs to include thf directories from the other domains.
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
When dead or pending mail indicates a problem with mail routing or when users have problems sending or receiving mail, use these tips to gather information, identify the problem, and then correct it.
Check the Domino Directory for errors that affect mail
Click here
4.
Click here
Check the sender's and/or recipient's workvtation(s) for errors that affect mail
Click here
5.
Click here
Check the server for errors that affect mail
Click here
6.
Click here
Check the shared mail setup
Click here
See Also
Click here
Mail routing - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Directory is the source of many conditions that prevent mail from routing properly. Check for these conditions and correct them, if necessary.
1. Check the replication hisvory of the Domino Directory to ensure that changes to it are replicating properly. Make sure the Domino Directory's ACL provides servers with at least Editor access. Check for messages in the Administration Requests database, and verify that the Administration Process is set up and working properly.
Mail problems occur if replication of the Domino Directory throughout the domain isn't occurring correctly. For example, if you move a user's mail file and the change recording this move on the Pevson document does not replicate, a mail message could bounce back and forth between two servers and eventually be returned to the sender. Alternatively, the message could become dead mail if the maximum hop count is exceeded.
2. Look for and correct any of these problems with Person documents:
There's no Person document for the recipient in the Domino Directory. If necessary, register the recipient to create one.
The mail recipient's name, mail server, or mail file&is incorrect or is spelled incorrectly. Correct the entries, if necessary.
There are multiple occurrences of the recipient's name in the Domino Directory. There may be more than one Person document, or a user and a group may have the same name. You can add a middle initial to one of the user names if two users share the same name. You can modify a group name if it's duplicate of another.
The recipient receives mail through a gateway. Make sure the recipient's Person document convains a forwarding address.
3. Check the Server documents of the sender's and recipient's mail servers. Make sure that the names of the server, domain, and Notes named network are spelled correctly.
4. Check Connection documents for mail routing. If two servers are in different Notes named networks (or domains) or don't have a third server that has a Notes named network in common with both servers, then you must create pairs of Connection documents to enable mail routing back fnd forth. For servers in the same Notes named network, mail routing is automatic so you don't need Connection documents.C
To check mail routing connections, from the Domino Administrator, click the Messaging - Mail tab. You can see mail routing topology by connections or by named networks. Look for servers that can't reach a server in another Notes named network or domain. Then check the Domino Directory for these problems, and edit or create the documents as necessary:
Missing Cofnection documents. Make sure that each domain's Domino Directory has a Connection document from one of its servers to a server in the other domain.
A misspelled Notes network or domain name in the Connection document.
An incorrect phone number (for dial-up connections) in the Connection document.
A missing selection for "Mail Routing" in the Tasks field of the Connection document.
5. If mail routing occurs through a non-adjacent or foreign domain, fheck that the Domino Directory contains a correctly set up Non-adjacent or Foreign domain document. For a non-adjacent domain, verify that a Connection document to the intermediary, or "middle," domain also exists.
6. If your organization uses cascading address books, be sure that the Names setting in the NOTES.INI file contains the correct names of the cascading address books.
See Also
Click here
How to troubleshoot mail routing
Click here
&Arial
Check for these conditions and correct them, if necessary.
1. Check the User Preferences (File - Preferences - Notes Preferences). Check the settings for Mail -- for example, the Mail Program field may be set to None, which disables all mail for the user. Check the settings under ports; the port(s) necessary to send mail may be disabled.
For more information on User Preferences, see Notes 5 Help.
2. Check the user's Personal Address Book for a missing view! If a view is missing, replace the design of the Personal Address Book. Choose File - Database - Replace Design, and specify the Personal Address Book template, PERNAMES.NTF, not the Domino Directory template, PUBNAMES.NTF. Replacing the design deletes any non-standard private views but does not affect the data.
3. Check if the user is using the appropriate Location document. For example, a mobile user who is working in the office may be attempting to use a Location document that is for use anly when the user works at home. Another possibility is that the Location document may contain incorrect information. To check the current Location document, from the workstation, choose File - Preferences - Location Preferences.
Check that the sender's workstation is set up with the correct mail server and mail file names. Choose File - Preferences - Location Preferences, and verify the settings in the Home/mail server and Mail file fields.
See Also
Click here
How to troubleshoot mail routing
Click here
&Arial
Check for these conditions and correct them, if necessary.
1. Verify that the sending and receiving servers have a certaficate in common.
From the Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
From the tool bar, click Certification - ID file.
Choose the appropriate server ID file, and click Open.
Click Certificates to display the certificates held by the server.
Repeat for the second server.
Recertify one or both server IDs, as necessary.
2. Make sure there's enough memory and disk space on the recipient's mail server! Add memory to the server, and/or increase the disk space for swapping. Add disk space to the server.
3. Check for a corrupt mail file. On rare occasions a recipient's mail file may become corrupted. Do one of these:
Run the Fixup task. Use this task if the database is in Domino Release 5 format and if you are
notl
using transaction logging, or if the database is in Domino Release 4 format.
Run the Fixup task with the -J option. Use this task if tha database is in Domino Release 5 format and you are using transaction logging. If you use a backup utility certified for Domino Release 5 and you run Fixup -J, perform a full backup of the database as soon as Fixup finishes.
4. If a user can't receive mail, including mail sent by other users whose mail files are on the same mail server, see
Click here
"A user can't receive any mail, including mail sent by users whose mail files are on the same server."
Clica here
5. Check for a missing or incorrect Domain setting in the NOTES.INI file. At server startup, the Router sends the message "Mail Router started for domain
" to the console and to the log file. To see if the NOTES.INI file on the sender's and recipient's mail server includes a Domain setting, enter this command at the console:
Show Configuration Domaina
Then verify that the domain name is correctly spelled. To add the Domain setting!or correct the spelling of the domain name, enter this command at the console:
Set Configuration Domain =
DomainName
where
DomainName
is the name of the mail server's Notes domain.k
6. Check for a corrupt MAIL.BOX on the server. Do one of these:n
Run the Fixup task. Use this task if the database is in Domino Release 5 format and if you are a
using transaction logging, or if the database is in Domino Release 1 format.v
Run the Fixup task with the -J option. Use this task if the database is in Domino Release 5 format and you are using transaction logging. If you use a backup utility certified for Domino Release 5 and you run Fixup -J, perform a full backup of the database as soon as Fixup finishes.h
If the corruption still persists, shut down the server and rename MAIL.BOX -- for example, rename it to BADMAIL.BOX. Then restart the server to generate a new MAIL.BOX file, and copy any uncarrupted documents from BADMAIL.BOX to MAIL.BOX.
7.
Click here
Check for problems with modem connections.
Click here
See Also
Click here
How to troubleshoot mail routing
Click here
&Araal
Check for these conditions and correct them, if necessary.
1. Verify that shared mail is enabled. To determine if a mail file or individual mail files in a directory use shared mail, enter this command at the console:
Load Object Info
USERMAIL.NSF
where
USERMAIL.NSF
is the name of a user's mail file or the name of a directory that contains mail files.
If you enter a directory name, the information that appears describeq each mail file in the directory.
2. Check for a corrupt shared mail file. If you suspect the shared mail file is corrupt, you can
Click here
restore the file
Click here
3. Verify that there's enough disk space available for the shared mail file. If there isn't, you can
4. Make sure the user's mail file hasn't been unlinked from the shared mail file. If necessary,
Click here
relink the mail file.
Click here
See Also
Click here
How to troubleshoot mail routing
Click here
P2~M#
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot qroblems with scheduling meetings and reserving rooms.
Click here
Meeting and resource scheduling - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes problems and errors that users may experience or that are reported in the log file.
Click here
How to troubleshoot Schedule Manager errors reported in the log
Click here
provides steps for troubleshooting Schedule Manager errors reported in the aog file.
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe problems and errors that occur with scheduling meetings or resources:
Click here
Free time information isn't available
Click here
Click here
"No resource/room found for time and/or capacity requirements"
Click here
Click here
"Can't Find User in Name and Address Book"
Click here
Click here
"Cannot perform this action locally"
Click here
See Also
Click here
Meeting and resource scheduling - Troublesaooting
Click here
&Arial
If, while scheduling a meeting, a user can't look up free time for a particular invitee because the invitee's schedule is greyed out in the Free Time dialog box or if no users' free time information can be accessed and the message "No scheduling information for the requested users could be found at this time" appears, use these tips to troubleshoot!the problem.
1. Check that the invitee's name is spelled correctly on the meeting invitation. If the invitee belongs to a different domain, be sure to specify the invitee's full hierarchical name, including the domain name.
2. Check that Domino Release 4.5 or higher is installed on the invitee's mail server.
3. Make sure that the mail server is running. Free-time lookups fail if Domino cannot access the free time database on the invitee's mail server because tae server is unavailable. If the server isn't running, the user can still complete invitation processing, including sending and receiving meeting-related messages. Also, lookups for other invitees with free time databases on other servers still work.
4. Check that the Schedule Manager task is running on the mail server.
5. Check that the invitee saved his or her Calendar Profile after upgrading the design to the Domino Release 4.5 or higher mail template.h
6. Cheak that the user is included in the list of users who can read the invitee's Free time Schedule in the Calendar Profile.
7. Check that the free-time lookup finds schedule information for users whose mail servers are in a foreign or adjacent domain. If the free-time lookup fails, make sure a valid Domain document exists. In addition, check the Calendar Server field in the Domain document to make sure a valid calendar server has been defined for the domain.
8. Check that the maal servers are running the same protocol. The mail servers must run the same protocol so that the servers can connect to each other to perform a free-time lookup.
See Also
Click here
Meeting and resource scheduling - Problems and error messagess
Click here
&Arial
If this message appears, the entry used in the $BusyName field in a calendar entry for the Note ID reported in the log doesn't exist in the Domino Directory. This situation typically arises when a user leaves the company and the Domino Directory no longer contains a Person document for the user. To qesolve this error, find the document associated with the NoteID, and delete the document.
To find the NoteID and the document associated with it, use the procedure in
Click here
Troubleshooting Schedule Manager errors reported in the log
Click here
See Also
Click here
Meeting and resource scheduling - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
This message appears when you try to create a Site Profile in the Resource Reservation database locally on the sarver. To avoid this message, when you open the Resource Reservation database, specify the actual server, instead of "Local."S
See Also
Click here
Meeting and resource scheduling - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
The message "No resource/room found for time and/or capacity requirements" may appear when a user creates a reservation in the Resource Reservation database. This message indicates that the Site Profile name for that particular resource includes a comma -- for example, Acme, East. Re-create the Site Profile name without the comma -- for example, Acme East.
See Also
Click here
Meeting and resource scheduling - Problems and error messagese
Click here
&Arial
Schedule Manager errors in the log (LOG.NSF) report information about databases that may have a mismatch among the entry used in the $BusyName field in a calendar entry, the name listed in BUSYTIME.NSF, and the name in the Domino Directory. Use this procedure to deteraine a mismatch.
1. Open the database reported in the log.
2. Choose Create - View.
3. In the View Name field, enter a name for the view -- for example, NoteID.
4. In the View Type field, select Shared.
5. In the "Select a location for the new view" field, select where you want the view to appear.
6. Click OK.
7. Choose View - Design.
8. Under Recent Databases, click Views.
9. Double-click the new view that you created. If you placed the view under an existing view, the new view's name will include the name of the parent view -- for example, Inbox\NoteID.
10. Select the first column in the view, and choose Create - Insert new column.
11. Choose Design - Column Properties.
12. In the Title field, enter a name for the column -- for example, NoteID -- and press ENTER.
13. In the formula pane, for Display, select Formula.
14. Delete anything that currently appears in the Formula pane and enter the formula:
@NoteID
15. Click the check mark in the formula pane to accept the new formula.
16. Press ESCAPE, and click Yes to save the design.
17. Press ESCAPE to close the Designer.
18. Refresh the view so that all of the Note IDs appear in the database.
19. Find the Note ID that the Schedule Manager reported in the log, and select qhat document in the view.
20. Choose File - Document Properties.
21. Click the Fields tab.
22. Scroll through the fields in the left box and search for a $BusyName field.
23. Compare the information in the $BusyName field to the entries in the BUSYTIME.NSF file and the Domino Directory. Make any corrections.
See Also
Click here
Meeting and resource scheduling - Troubleshooting
Clica here
&Arial
A variety of conditions caa prevent a modem from providing a remote connection that works. These topics describe common problems and errors and provide specific suggestions for troubleshooting modems and remote connections.
Click here
Tools for troubleshooting modems and remote connections
Click here
describes tools that you can use to help troubleshoot modem and remote connection problems.
Click here
How to troubleshoot modems and remote coanections
Click here
describes steps for trying to solve problems with a modem or remote connection
Click here
Modems and remote connections - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes problems and errors that users or Domino servers may encounter while using a modem and a remote connection to a Domino server.
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at wqw.support.lotus.com.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
240948528029224071
Logging modem I/O
To record modem phone call information in the log (LOG.NSF), you must enable logging. Recording modem calls is useful when you troubleshoot modem connections.
2. Select the port for which you want to log call information.
3. Choose COM Options, and then choose Log modem I/O.
4. Click OK twice.
240948528029224072
Reading the message in the log file for a long setup string
When you customize a modem command file, you may include long setup strings. If a long setup string contains an error, it may be difficult to determine which command or parameter caused the problem.
To isolate the problematic command or parameter, split the setup string in half, and enter a new Setup=AT command on the line immediately following the first half of the setup string. Try to make the connection again, and then check the log to determine which half of the setup string is causes the error. Continue splitting the setup string in half until you locate the command or parameter that causes the problem.
See Also
Click here
Modems and remote connections - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
A server or workstation may not be able to connect properly through a dial-up modem connection to another server or workstation. As a result, there may be problems transferring information -- for example, mail might not route between two servers connected by a modem. Use these tips to troubleshoot both sides of the modem connection: e
1. Restart the modem and the remote server or workstation. Doing this usually helps when the!modem is behaves erratically -- for example, if the modem dials invalid phone numbers, refuses legitimate modem commands, flashes the LEDs in irregular patterns, or displays other unusual behavior.
2. Make sure that the modem is the correct type and model for the server or workstation. If you think the hardware is damaged, replace the damaged part with one that you know is working. Make one change at time so that you can evaluate the effect.
3. Check the modem configuration. Aheck the DIP switch settings, the telephone line, and option buttons on the modem.8
4. Verify that you're dialing the correct number. If you're dialing from an office that requires it, be sure to precede the phone number with a 9 followed by a comma. Also, be sure to include a 1 and the area or country code. If you're sure of the number, contact the remote server administrator to determine what the problem is.
5. Disable call-waiting. You can temporarily disable call-waiting aor tone dialing by entering *70 as a prefix for the number you dial. For pulse-dialing, enter 1170 as the prefix. Alternatively, you can permanently disable call-waiting.
6. Unplug other telephone extensions before you make an outgoing call. You'll lose the connection if someone attempts to use an extension on the line you're dialing out on.
7. Make sure that you're using an analog line. If the phone system is digital and your modem is analog, you won't get a dial tone. Contaat your local phone company for an analog line.
8. Check the COM port, hang-up, dial time-out, and hardware flow control settings. Port speed and hardware flow control settings should be the same for modems that are trying to connect. To check these settings, choose File - Preferences - Notes Preferences, select Ports, select the COM port you want to check, and click COM options.
9. Check the modem command file. Make sure that it's the correct one for your modem. Make sure it qses the correct syntax and is free of any spelling errors, missing command parameters, and incorrect settings or responses. Check the operating system time stamp and last revision date of the file to make sure you're using the correct version of the file. To do this, use a file manager such as Windows Explorer. Make sure you specified the correct directory for the file -- for example, the Notes\Data\Modems directory.
10. Check the Connection document in the Domino Directory. Make sure the fialds in the Connection document contain the correct information for a dial-up modem connection.
11. Check the Miscellaneous Events view in the log (LOG.NSF). Sometimes modems that use the same modem standards can't connect to each other because of the way the manufacturer implemented the standard. Contact the modem manufacturer to resolve the problem.
12. Check the Phone Calls view in the log. Numerous CRC or retransmission errors indicate that one or both modems detect transmisqion errors. A damaged RJ-11 cord and/or poor phone line quality may cause these errors. Try another cord and ask the phone company to check the phone line.
See Also
Click here
Modems and remote connections - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
These topics provide suggestions for troubleshooting problems you may encounter with modems and remote connections:
Click here
Data isn't transferring between two servers using a null modem
Click here
Click here
The dial-up server cycles through port speeds without initializing the modem
Click here
Click here
Valid commands in the modem command file are ignored
Click here
See Also
Click here
Modems and remote connections - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
If you connect two servers with a null modem cable and the servers make a connection but data does not transfer between them, try these tips to solve the problem:
1. Replace the modem cable or port with one that you know works correctly.
2. Change the port speeds. Choose File - Preferences - Notes Preferences and select Ports. Select the port you want to modify, and then select COM Options. Select a port speed that matches the port qpeed of the other modem.
See Also
Click here
Modems and remote connections - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If the log (LOG.NSF) indicates that the server continuously cycles through port speeds without initializing the modem, the server isn't able to connect to or synchronize with the modem. Try these tips to solve the problem:
1. Turn the modem on and off to reset it.
2. Check the cable connection from the server to the modem. Maae sure that the cable is attached to the correct port and isn't damaged.i
3. Make sure the communication port is correctly configured.
4. Specify a lower port speed. Choose File - Preferences - Notes Preferences and select Ports. Select the port you want to modify, and select COM Options. Select a lower port speed.
5. Replace the serial card and RS-232 interface card with one that you know works.
See Also
Click here
Modems and remote connections - Problems and error messages]
Click here
&Arial
You may notice this problem if you check the log and find that OK responsep are missing after one or more valid commands. Try these tips to solve the problem:
1. Make sure letters in the AT commands in the modem command file are either all uppercase or all lowercase. Many modems do not recognize mixed-case commands.
2. Make sure that commands in a long setup string do not exceed the character limit for the modem. Use the SETUP=AT command at the beginning of each line to split the setup strings into smaller sections.g
See Also
Click here
Modems and remote connections - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
This topic describes how to troubleshoot a network dial-up connection problem. You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
If a user installed, set up, and created Connection documents for a network dial-up connection, but the user can't connect t` it, check for these conditions and correct them, if necessary.
1. Make sure the workstation and/or server has been set up with the remote access client software -- Dial up Networking for Windows 95 and NT or Apple Remote Access for the MacIntosh. If the software hasn't been set up, users will get the message "Error initializing remote LAN service." Install the network dial-up client software on the server and/or workstation, and then try connecting.
2. Make sure the remote sepver is accessible. If the modem is busy or the server is unavailable, the server can't answer calls.
3. Make sure that the user has the necessary privilege to use a network dial-up connection to dial into the server. If necessary, modify the user's privileges. Also, make sure that the user is using the correct user ID password.
4.
Click here
Trace the connection to the server.
Click here
Check the resulting information for indicat`ons that the Connection document isn't properly configured. For example, common mistakes in the Connection document include not listing the current location or failing to enable the specified port(s).
Note
Information from a trace is recorded in the Miscellaneous Events view of the log. In the Trace Connections Log Options field, you can set the level of detail to record. For maximum information, choose Full Trace Information.
5. Use the d`aling method provided by the network dial-up client to make the network dial-up connection. If the connection fails, check for the correct configuration and check the modem for problems.
6. If the connection is successful, while the connection is still active, switch to the Notes workstation or Domino server and attempt to connect to the destination server. At this point, the workstation or server should be connected to the LAN. You can temporarily set the Usage priority field of the networ` dial-up Connection document to Low to force the connection over the LAN before using the Connection document.
7. If the previous step succeeds, drop the connection, switch to the Notes workstation, and choose File - Mobile - Call Server to call the remote access server. If you previously set the Usage priority field of the network dial-up Connection document to Low, reset the priority to Normal.
8. Make sure you're using the correct Connection document. Then, make sure the i`formation in the Connection document is correct.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe solutions to common problems and errors that may occur with partitioned servers.
Click here
A partitioned server crashes
Click here
Click here
"Server exiting: partition number xx is already in use"
Click here
Click here
"Server not responding" connecting to a partitioned server
Click here
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
All processes associated with a partitioned server share the sam` name space for memory and semaphores. If a partitioned server crashes, stop all the processes associated with the server. Otherwise, before you restart the server, a stale process might corrupt memory.
Be sure that setting KillProcess=1 is in the NOTES.INI file before you start the partitioned server. This setting enables automated cleanup in the event of an unplanned server shutdown.t
See Also
Click here
Partitioned servers - Troublesho`ting
Click here
&Arial
This message appears when you try to start more than one server in a partition or wh`n the Domino Administrator is still running from a previous server in the same partition. To correct this, stop all processes associated with the partition. If that fails, restart the system.
See Also
Click here
Partitioned servers - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
This message may appear if a partitioned server us`s TCP/IP port mapping.
1. If the destination server is sharing a network interface card with a port-mapping server, check that the port-mapping server is running. Domino can't establish a connection to a server sharing the port-mapping server's IP address unless the port-mapping server can redirect the traffic to the port the destination server is listening on.
2. Make sure that the port-mapping information in the NOTES.INI file is in the correct order. In the port-mapping sepver's NOTES.INI file, there are entries that reference the other partitioned servers on the computer. If the lines containing the port-mapping information are out-of-order, Domino displays the message "Server not responding" or "Server's name changed." Edit the port-mapping server's NOTES.INI file, and make sure that the partitioned servers are listed in numerical order, as in this example:
TCPIP_PortMapping00=
TCPIP_PortMapping01=
TCPIP_PortMapping02=
TCPIP_PortMapping03=
After modifying the NOTES.INI, stop and restart the server so that the changes take effect.e
3. Make sure that the port number appended to the destination server's IP address matches the port number in the NOTES.INI file on the destination server. Also, verify that the server name and organization are correct.
For example, this setting in the port-mapping server's NOTES.INI file assigns the destination server's IP address and port number:
If passthru isn't working as expected, check these conditions and correct them, if necessary. You can also search for solutions to common pr`blems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
Tip,
To record connection problems in the log, set the Log Options field (in the Trace Connections dialog from the Domino Administrator) to Full Trace Information. You can also
Click here
trace a connection to the passthru server.
Click here
1. Verify that the passthru server is running Domino Release 4.x or higher. The destination sepver can run Notes Release 3 or Domino Release 4.x or higher.D
2. Check the Server document to ensure that the server is enabled for passthru. The "Route through field" on the Security tab in the Server document restricts who may use a server as a passthru server. By default, this field is blank, which prevents use of the server as a passthru server. You can also create a new passthru Connection document that names a different server that allows passthru to the destination server.
You can also use the "Access this server" field in the Server document to restrict who can use passthru to access a server. If this field is blank on the destination server, the server does not allow passthru access. Only the users, groups, and servers explicitly named in this field have passthru access. Note that this field does not restrict general access to the server, which is controlled by fields on the Security tab of the Server document.
3. Make sure that the Connection document is ppoperly configured. Check the log for the message "Unable to find any path to
ServerName,
" which indicates that there may not be enough information in the Domino Directory to determine how to reach the destination server or that the information in the Domino Directory is incorrect -- for example, server names might be misspelled.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino systemc
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe `ow to troubleshoot replication.
Click here
Tools for troubleshooting replication
Click here
describes tools you can use for troubleshooting replication problems.
Click here
Replication - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes problems and errors that users or Domino servers may experience during replication.
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the @otus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
Database access control list problems, server crashes, protocol problems, and incorrectly configured Connection documents are common causes of replication errors. Use these tools to troubleshoot replication.b
44352460829202929
Log `ile
To access the log, from the Domino Administrator, click the Servers - Analysis tab and select the log file for the server you want to check. Then check for replication problems in these views:
Miscellaneous events
Phone calls
Replication events
TipD
You can also check replication events from the Replication tab in the Domino Administrator.3
Edit the NOTES.INI file to include the Log_Replication s`tting, which allows you to display detailed replication information in the log. r
44352460829202930
Statistics and events
The Statistics database (STATREP5.NSF) is a repository for pre-configured and custom statistics. It is created when you load the Collect task, if it doesn't already exist. You can set alarms for some of these statistics. For example, you might set an alarm to generate a Failure report when more than three attempted replications generate an erpor. You can also report statistics to any database designed for this purpose, although typically the database is the Statistics database (STATREP5.NSF). To i
use the Statistics tab on the Domino Administrator.
Note that you can edit the NOTES.INI file to include the Repl_Error_Tolerance setting, which incpeases the number of identical replication errors between two databases that a server tolerates before it terminates replication. The default tolerance is 2 errors. The higher the value, the more often messages such as "Out of disk space" appear.
If you run the Event task on a server, you can set up an Event Monitor document to report replication problems. You can also create a Replication Monitor document that notifies you if a specific database fails to replicate within a certain time. To viep events from the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Analysis tab, click Statistics - Events, and then view the desired report.
44352460829202932
Replication history
121560576029232566
Replication schedules
You can see a graphical representation of the replication schedules of the servers in your Domino system. To view replication schedules, from the Domino Administrator, click the Replication tab.
121500576029232567
Replication topology maps
Create a replication topology map to display the replication topology and identify connections between servers. To view replication topology maps, from the Domino Administrator, click the Replication tab. You must load the Topology maps task before you can view a replication topology map.I
For more information, see the chapter "Scheduling Replication."s
See Also
Click here
Replic`tion - Troubleshooting
Click here
Click here
Log_Replication
Click here
Click here
Viewing replication schedules and topology maps
Click here
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
kxtue
&Arial
These topics describe how to tpoubleshoot replication problems.A
Click here
Replication isn't occurring between two servers
Click here
Click here
Scheduled replication isn't occurring between two servers
Click here
Click here
One database isn't replicating between two servers
Click here
See Also
Click here
Peplication - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
When two servers can't replicate any of the databases between them, these messages may appear in the log:
"Unable to replicate with server
: Server Not Responding"
"Unable to replicate with server n
: The Notes server is not a known TCP/IP Host"
"Unable to replicate with server
: Your address book does not contain any cross certificates capable of authenticating the server"
"Unable to replicate with server
: The server's address book does not contain any cross certificates capable of authenticating you"
"Unable to replicate with server
: You are not auphorized to use the server or remote server"
Check for the following conditions and correct them, if necessary:
1. Create Connection documents that list Replication in the Tasks field. Unless you enable multiple replicators on the server, make sure that replication schedules don't overlap.
2. Verify that the servers have a certificate in common. To verify certificates, check the server ID files.
From the Domino Administrator, click the People and Groups tab.
From the tool bar, click Certification - ID file.
Choose the appropriate server ID file and click Open.
Click Certificates to display the certificates held by the server.
Repeat Steps a through d for the second server.
Recertify one or both server IDs, as necessary. If the servers don't have a certificate in common, you can also cross-certify them.
3. Make sure the server is available. Check the log for the messag` "Unable to replicate with server
: Server not responding," which indicates that one server can't connect to another server for replication or that server
is unavailable.
4. Check the Miscellaneous Events view of the log to see if a network error message occurred when the server attempted to connect to the other server.
5. Check the Phone Calls view of the log to see if two servers are unable to use dial-up connections.
See Also
Click here
Replication - Problems and error messages
Click here
Click here
Documents in the Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Modems and remote connections - Troubleshooting
Click here
Click here
Tracing network connections
Click here
&Arial
1. Check that the server names are spelled correctly i` the Connection documents.
2. Make sure that multiple Connection documents don't have overlapping schedules for the same task in the same direction. If multiple Connection documents have overlapping schedules, correct the schedules, or enable multiple replicators on the server.n
3. If many users access a server or if a server performs many tasks, it takes longer for Domino to build a list of the databases that two servers have in common, a task that occurs just prior to repli`ation. If building the list takes a long time, a scheduled replication may be delayed. Check server load statistics and, if necessary, replicate only specific databases, remove obsolete databases from the servers, and/or move some databases to another server. You can also reduce the number of users who access the server or reduce the number of tasks the server performs.
4. Make sure that the server has adequate disk space. If it doesn't, remove obsolete databases and/or move some databases po another server.
See Also
Click here
Replication - Problems and error messages
Click here
Click here
Documents in the Domino Directoryl
Click here
Click here
Statistics reports
Click here
&Arial
When replication occurs correctly between two servers but one database doesn't replicate correctly, these symptoms might occur:
The message "Unable to replicate
.nsf" appears in the log file.
Users report that documents are different on each replica.
To correct this problem, try these tips.
1. Check that the database ACL is set incorrectly. The message "Access control is set po not allow replication" in the log file indicates that the servers do not have the correct access to perform replication. Give the servers enough access in the database ACL to replicate changes. A server must have:
Editor access to replicate changes to documents
Designer access to replicate changes to views and forms
Manager access to replicate ACL changes
If replication occurs through a passthru server, the passthru server must also have the necess`ry access to pass along changes.O
2. Check the log file for an "Unable to copy document" or similar message. This message indicates a corrupted database. To correct the problem, do one of the following:
Run the Fixup task. Use this task if the database is in Domino Release 5 format and if you are
using transaction logging, or if the database is in Domino Release 4 format.A
Run the Fixup task with the -J option. Use this task if the database is `n Domino Release 5 format and you are using transaction logging. If you use a backup utility certified for Domino Release 5 and you run Fixup -J, perform a full backup of the database as soon as Fixup finishes.e
3. Check the log file for a "Replication is disabled" message, which indicates that the database is not enabled for replication. To enable replication of the source database, choose File - Replication - Settings - Other, and deselect "Temporarily disable replication."
0. Check if the "Enforce a consistent Access Control List" option has been set on a replica. Sometimes replication cannot occur because this option has been set, but the server storing the replica lacks the appropriate access to replicate the ACL. If this is the case, give the server Manager access in the database ACL.
5. Make sure there have been recent changes to the database. Replication occurs only when there are changes to replicate.
See Also
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replication
Click here
Click here
Using Fixup
Click here
Click here
Replication - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot server access problems and errors:
Click here
The administrator can't enter commands at th` server
Click here
Click here
Users can't see a new server in the list of servers
Click here
Click here
"Server not responding"
Click here
Click here
"You are not authorized to access the server" or similar problems
Click here
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus @ustomer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
If an administrator can't run the workstation program on the server, run stand-alone server programs, or use the Load, Tell, or Set Configuration commands, the console has been password-protected.
Use the Set Secure command at the console or use the Domino Administrapor to clear the password.
See Also
Click here
Set Secure
Click here
Click here
Server access - Troubleshooting
Click here
e ITASK_PRINT_HOSTNAME setting in the NOTES.INI file.
See Also
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
Click here
Viewing the Domino Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
Click here
AP4~Q@
&Arial
Many conditions that prevent proper access to servers can be traced to the Domino Directory.
1. Verify that these fields in the Server document contain the correct information and spelling. For each change you make, be sure to save the Server document before attempting to access the server again.
Field on the Network Configuration tab
Check this
Server name
Make sure that the full hierarchical server name is spelled correctly.
Domain nameT
Make sure that the name is spelled correctly.O
Port
If a COM port os listed, remove it. X.PC COM ports are only handled in the ports configuration section.
Notes Network
Make sure that at least one Notes Network is enabled. Each port requires a unique Notes network name.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Field on the Restrictions tab
Check this
Access server
Delete the contents of this field if it contains any information. Only those names or groups listed in the field are allowed to access the server.
Not access server
Delete the contents of this field if it contains any information. The users or groups listed in the field are not allowed to access the server.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
2. Make sure the Server document isn't corrupted. To determine if it is corrupted, create a new Server document and use it instead of the old one. If the new Server document resolves the problem, it's likely that the original Server document is corrupted. Be sure to create a backup of the original Server document by either copying and pasting the original into another Server oocument or by backing up the database.
After you create the new Server document,
Click here
copy the public key into it
Click here
3. Verify that the Certified public key in the server ID file is the same as the Public key. To do this, copy the certified key and paste it into a text file, and then compare the two key values, which should be the same. If the values differ, the server ID was probably created with the same name based on a different Certifier key. Before altering the key, create a backup of the Domino Directory.
4. Check Group documents in the Domino Directory for correct user and server names. In particular, check the Group documents for groups listed in the "Access server" and "Not access server" fields in the Server document. In addition, be sure to check the Group Type setting of these Group documents. The Group type assigned to a group can affect server access.
5. Resolve any replication or save conflicts in the Groups and People views.
6. Make sure that all views in the Domino Directory are updated and not damaged. To rebuild all of the views in that database, enter this command at the console:
Load updall names.nsf -r
If you suspect that the Domino Directory is corrupted, do one of the following:
Run the Fixup task. Use this task if the database is in Domino Release 5 format and if you are
using transaction/logging, or if the database is in Domino Release 4 format.
Run the Fixup task with the -J option. Use this task if the database is in Domino Release 5 format and you are using transaction logging. If you use a backup utility certified for Domino Release 5 and you run Fixup -J, perform a full backup of the database as soon as Fixup finishes.
In addition, if you suspect a corrupted Domino Directory, try using a backup of the Domino Directory (if one is available), or create a new
eplica of the Domino Directory.
7. Replace the design of the Domino Directory. Select File - Database - Replace Design. This ensures that the Domino Directory is using the correct template file (PUBNAMES.NTF).
8. Check Server document form in the Domino Directory for customizations that are not supported.
9. Make sure that passthru is properly enabled on the Server document.
See Also
Click here
Server aocess - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
When the message "You are not authorized to access that server" appears, the problem can sometimes be the server ID.
1. Check for a damaged server ID. If a server ID is damaged, the Domino server may start, but users won't be able to access it. Also, the message "Server Erro
: Damaged ID" appears when you start the Domino server.
If the server ID was recently recertified, the ID may have been damaged if the Domino server wasn't shut down before the server ID was recertified or merged.
If you suspect that the server ID is damaged, you can replace the server ID with a new ID. For more information, see the topic
Click here
"Replacing the server ID."
Click here
2. Verify that the server has all of the roquired certificates.
From the Domino Administrator, click the People and Groups tab.
From the tool bar, click Certification - ID file.
Choose the appropriate server ID file and click Open.
Click Certificates to display the certificates held by the server.
Recertify the server ID, if necessary.
3. Check for a "Public Key..." message that appears when the server starts. Verify that the public key stored in the Server documeot matches the public key stored in the server ID. To do this,
Click here
copy the ID's public key to the clipboard
Click here
, and then paste it to another application -- for example, into Windows Notepad -- so that you can compare it with the public key in the Server document. Be sure to perform a full backup of the Domino Directory before altering the key.
See Also
Click here
Server access - Troubleshootong
Click here
&Arial
If you suspect that the server ID is damaged, replace it with a backup of the ID. If you don't have a backup of the server ID available, create a new server ID. Be sure to use the same name on the new ID as you used on the old ID.
1. Shut down the Domino server.s
2. Rename the old server ID -- for example, Server.OLD. You must rename the ID to force the ID file to a new location on the hard disk.f
3. Copy the backup (or new) server ID to the correct location on hard drive. ID files are typically located in the Notes\data directory.
4. Restart the server.
See Also
Click here
Checking the server ID for a problem that affects server access
Click here
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the People and Groups tab. i
2. From the tool bar, click Certification - ID File.
3. Select the ID file you want and click Open.
4. Click More Options.
5. Click Copy Publoc Key to copy the entire public key to the clipboard.
6. Paste the public key into the associated document --for example, into a new Server document.A
See Also
Click here
Replacing the server ID
Click here
&Arial
When a server crashes, the simplest solution is to restart it; however, you might want to find out why it crashed so that you can avoid future crashes. These topics describe how to troubleshoot a server crash.
Click here
How to troubleshoot server crashes
Click here
provides steps for collecting information about and troubleshooting server crashes.
Click here
Server crashes - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes problems and errors that relate to server crashes.
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
The most common causes of server crashes are the following:h
Low or depleted system resources
High server workload
Software problems
Network problems
Changes to network or operating system environments
Changes in hardware configuration -- for example, upgraded NICs -- or software configuration
Use these steps to troubleshoot a server crash. If, after completing these steps, you haven't resolved the problem, consult your technical support representative.
1. Collect system information:
Domino server versionp
Operating system version (SYSLEVEL information if the operating system i
OS/2, by typing SYSLEVEL at an OS/2 prompt).
Network type and version; network protocol(s) and version(s) (including file dates)
System level patches
Server hardware
Names of API programs and tasks, gateways, backup programs, executable scripts, third-party programs, and so on.
2. Note any changes to these elements of the Domino environment. If possible, revert to the previous configuration to determine if the problem still occurs.
Operating system changes -- for example, did you upgrade the operating system or apply a new patch?
Network changes -- for example, did you add a new router or upgrade the network software or firmware?
Network interface card (NIC) changes -- for example, is the NIC new, or is the NIC software driver old and the operating system new?
Domino changes -- for example, did you upgrade to a new release of Domino or migrate new users?
Other hardware/or software changes.
3. For an OS/2 server crash, check for a crash screen. Collect all codes that are displayed and check them against the
4. If the last message on the console starts with the word "Panic," record the entire message.
5. If possible, capture the last screen dispoayed on the console.
6. Stop all tasks running on the Domino server, and then stop the Domino server.
7. If a NOTES.RIP or UNIX CORE file was created, verify the time and date of the file, which should coincide with the time and date of the crash. Then rename and save the NOTES.RIP or UNIX CORE file so that Domino doesn't overwrite it during a future crash. If necessary, Lotus Customer Support will use this file to identify where the crash occurred.
Note
If a crash doesn't produce a NOTES.RIP or UNIX CORE file, the server may be out of disk space or memory.
8. Restart the server.
9. Check the Miscellaneous Events view in the log. Record all entries that occurred immediately before and after the crash. To do this, double-click the appropriate entry to open it. In particular, look for an .NSF file in the entry, which may indicate where the crash occurred. If a particular database appears to have ca
sed the crash, check the replication history of that database for additional information.
10. Collect these configuration files:
CONFIG.SYS - for OS/2
NOTES.INI - all platforms
STARTUP.CMD - for OS/2
PROTOCOL.INI - for OS/2
NET.CFG - for OS/2 and NetWare
AUTOEXEC.NCF - for NetWare
STARTUP.NCF - for NetWare
Windows diagnostics file - Windows NT
See Also
Click here
Server crashes - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe problems and errors that may cause a server crash:
Click here
A corrupt database causes a server to crash
Click here
Click here
A corrupt view causes a server to crash
Click here
Click here
A server crashes while updating a database index
Click here
Click here
The Router task causes the server to crash
Click here
Click here
Domino OS/2 server crashes
Click here
See Also
Click here
Server crashes - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
If an "Unable to copy database," "Unable to copy document," or similar message appears in the Miscellaneous Events view of the log, a database is corrupted. Do one of the following to correct the problem:
Run the Fixup task. Use this task if the database is in Domino Release 5 format and if you are
using transaction logging, or if the database is in Domino Release 4 format.
Run the Fixup task with the -J option. U
e this task if the database is in Domino Release 5 format and you are using transaction logging. If you use a backup utility certified for Domino Release 5 and you run Fixup -J, perform a full backup of the database as soon as Fixup finishes.
Note
The Fixup task can take a significant amount of time to run on a large database or on the entire server.
See Also
Click here
Server crashes - Problems and error messoges
Click here
&Arial
If/a server crash seems related to a corrupt database view, run the Updall task on the database with the -r option:e
Load updall
databasename
Note
The Updall task can take a significant amount of time to run on a large database. It will also take a significant amount of time if you run Updall without specifying the database name, which forces the task to run on all databases on the server.
See Also
Click here
Server crashes - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If a server crashes while updating a database index, do the following:
1. Run the Updall task on the database with the -r option to fix a damaged database index:
Load updalo
databasename
Note
The Updall task can take a significant amount of time to run on a large database. It will also take a significant amount of time if you run Updall without specifying the database name, which forces the task to run on all databases on the server.
2. If Updall does not fix the problem, use this procedure:
Make a replica of the corrupted database. Be sure to give the replica a new file name.
Delete the original corrupted database.B
Use the original database file name to rename the new replica.
Restart the server.
See Also
Click here
Server crashes - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
In many cases, a crash occurs while a particular task is running. You can often determine the task from the crash screen or from the NOTES.RIP or UNIX CORE file. If the crash is related to the Router task, there could be a problem wito MAIL.BOX.R
1. Rename MAIL.BOX.
2. Restart the server. The server will automatically create a new MAIL.BOX.
3. Copy and paste the messages from the old MAIL.BOX to the new MAIL.BOX.
See Also
Click here
Server crashes - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If an OS/2 server crashes, a message resembling the following appears:
Trop 000C Internal Processing error at Location #p
nnn:nnn
Trap 000D CS=
nnnn
IP=
xxxxx{
CSLIM =
nnnn
Crashed network drivers or an OS/2 problem may cause this error. Record the addresses and report them to your network administrator. Then restart the server.
7812944029226861
Codes that display when an OS/2 server crashes
When an OS/2 serve
crashes, the console displays an error code. Record the code.t
Code
Meaning
Cause
Divide error
The software is bad.
Debug exceptions
The software is bad. Record all addresses.
NMI interrupt
Stands for non
maskable interrupt. The software is bad. Record all addresses.
Breakpoint
There is a software problem. Record all addresses.
Overflow
The software is bad. Record all addresses.
Bound range exceeded
There is a software problem. Record all addresses.
Invalid opcode
There is a software problem. Record all addresses.
Co-processor not available
The software is expecting a math co-processor, and one isn't installed.
Double fault
Two traps occurred at the same time. Record all addresses.
Co-processor segment overrun
There is a software problem. Record all addresses.
A/10
Invalid task state segment
There is a software problem. Record all addresses.
B/11
Segment not present
There is a software problem. Record
all addresses.
C/12
Stack exception
There is a software problem. Ignore this code if it follows a code D/13.
D/13
General protection
There is a software problem or a corrupted database.
F/15
Co-processor error
There is a bad co-processor chip.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Server crashes - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Use NOTES.RIP files and UNIX CORE files to help you determine the cause of a server or workstation crash. A program called QNC.EXE (pronounced Quincy) creates these files in the Domino/data directory (for a server) or in the Notes data directory (for a workstation). The files contain information about the tasks the server was running when it crashed. Each task -- for example, Replica, Router, and Update -- is started by a separate instance of QNC. If one of these tasks crashes, the QNC program for the task produces a NOTES.RIP or UNIX CORE file.r
See Also
Click here
Server crashes - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ViewImpnumber=
value1, value2, ...
Description:
_pecifies parameters to be used by file imports done at the view level.
Parameter
Enterr
value1
Program name and version
value2
Not used, always 0
value3
Name of the import routine called
value4
Not currently used
value5 - x
File extensions to automatically select a file type in the File Import dialog box
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
ViewExpnumber
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe common problems with transaction logging. You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
414335056029240016
Invalid transaction log path
If Domino cannot access the transaction log path, the server console displays error messages indicating: the invalid log path, databases requiring media recovery or Fixup, and a panic.
1. Check the log path to make uure it exists.
2. Check that the server has write access to the log path.
3. If the log path is correct and the device is good, restart the server. The problem should be fixed and you do not need to continue to step 4.
4. If log path is correct but the device is bad, replace the device on the log path, or edit the TRANSLOG_Path setting in NOTES.INI to point to a different log path.
Note
If you edit the TRANSLOE_Path setting when you restart the server, be sure to make the same edit to the "Log path" field in the Server document. Otherwise, Domino reverts to the old path upon the next server restart.a
5. Restart the server. Domino creates new log files and a control file, and assigns new DBIIDs to all Release 5 databases.
6. If "Automatic fixup of corrupt databases" is set to Yes in the Server document, the Fixup task runs on the databases that require media recovery or Fixup. Otherwese, you must run the Fixup task manually.
7. Perform full database backups.e
422948240029240601
Transaction log damaged or corrupted
If the transaction log appears to be damaged or corrupted, the server console displays error messages indicating: the log is damaged, databases requiring media recovery or Fixup, and a panic.
The error may occur because of a failed read from or write to the transaction log.
1. Restart the%server to correct the error. If the damaged log error does not appear again, the log is not damaged.
2. Stop the server again so it shuts down cleanly.
3. Perform full database backups.
4. Restart the server.
If you continue to received the damaged log error, the active transaction log is damaged or corrupted.
5. Delete the transaction log files and the control file.
6. Restart the server. Domino creates new log fileu and a control file and assigns new DBIIDs to all Release 5 databases.
7. If "Automatic fixup of corrupt databases" is set to Yes in the Server document, the Fixup task runs on the databases that require media recovery or Fixup. Otherwise, you must run the Fixup task manually.
8. Perform full database backups.
If the error occurred during media recovery, an archived log file may be corrupted.
9. Restart the server to correct the problem, and then%stop the server so it shuts down cleanly.
10. While the server is down, use the third-party backup utility to perform media recovery. If the archived log still cannot be used, allow database backups to be restored without the transactions in the corrupted log.
11. Perform full database backups.
12. Restart the server.
See Also
Click here
Transaction logging
Click here
Elick here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Click here
&Arial
There are a variety of Web server, Web Navigator, and Web Administrator problems you may encounter.
Click here
Web server - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes problems and errors that may occur with the Web server.
Click here
Web Navigator - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes problems and errors that may occur with the Web Navigator.
Click here
Web Administrator - Problems and error messages
Click here
describes problems and errors that may occur with the Web Administrator.
You can also search for solutions to common problems on the Lotus Customer Support Web site at www.support.lotus.com.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting the Domino system
Elick here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot some common Web server problems and errors:
Click here
The server stops when starting Domino for IIS
Click here
Click here
Users can't see a list of files on a Web server or access a database
Click here
Click here
Useru can't access a Domino Web server via the Internet
Click here
Click here
Users are prompted multiple times for their name and password
Web server, Web Navigator, and the Web Adminestrator - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
If you set up Domino as an ISAPI extension to the Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) and the server stops when you start Domino for IIS, restart the IIS server. Then make sure that the Domino server ID file isn't password protected. You can't use a password-protected server ID with Domino for IIS.
To check if an ID is password protected, from the Domieo Administrator at the server, choose File - Tools - User ID. Make sure the ID is the server ID, and click Clear Password. If you're prompted to enter a password, then the server ID is password-protected. Enter the password, and then click OK to clear the password.
See Also
Click here
Web server - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
You can configure Domino Web sites so that Domino authenticates and asks Web users for their credentials only once when they access different locations. Like other Web servers, Domino adheres to the HTTP authentication medel. When a user accesses a page on a Domino Web site, the browser keeps track of user credentials, based on the realm that the Domino server sends to the browser. A realm is a string, which is typically a URL path, that the server sends to indicate the location, or path, for which the user has been authenticated.
For example, if your server name is www.acme.com, then www.acme.com is the top-level realm and www.acme.com/doc, www.acme.com/hr, and www.acme.com/marketing are the lower-level reaems. If a user authenticates with the server when accessing the home page for www.acme.com, then the user is authenticated for www.acme.com and all lower-level realms.
However, if the user accesses www.acme.com/doc first, enters a name and password and is authenticated, and then accesses www.acme.com/hr, Domino prompts the user for credentials again. This second prompt occurs because the browser examines the list of realms for which Domino has successfully authenticated the user and finds www.ecme.com/doc in the browser realm list. Since www.acme.com/hr is not a subdirectory of www.acme.com/doc, Domino requires the user to enter credentials again.c
To prevent users from being prompted multiple times for their names and passwords, direct them to access and authenticate with the highest level realm that they need to access. This way, Domino asks users for their credentials only once during the browser session.
If a Web site includes a link to a site on another server and uhat site requires authentication, users will be prompted again for their credentials.
See Also
Click here
Web server - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
A firewall server often prevents users from accessing a Domino Web server via the Internet. If you have a direct Internet connection, you can ping the Domino server to see if you can access it. If you can ping the server but still can't access it, telnet to the server on port 1352 (see your telnet documentation for details on how to do this). If connecting with telnet fails, the firewall server mau be blocking the TCP port.c
See Also
Click here
Web server - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
When users try to use the OpenServer command to display a list of files on a Web server and the message "Database browsing not allowed" appears, make sure the option "Allow HTTP clients to browser databases"
is enabled in Server document for that server.
If users try to access a database and the message "Unauthorized exception" appears, make sure they have the appropriate access in the database ACL.
Uee Also
Click here
Web server - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Check the Server document for an entry in the Home URL or Default Home page fields. To display a home page on the Web server, one of both of these fields must contain an entry.
See Also
Click here
Web server - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot some common Web Navigator problems and errors:
Click here
Users can't send mail to the Internet from a mailto URL
Click here
Click here
"TCP/IP host unknown" and "Remote system not responding"
Click here
Click here
"URL Access Denied" message trying to open certain Web pages
Click here
Click here
"The Web Navigator Retrieval process is not running" trying to open a Web page
Click here
See Also
Click here
Web server, Web Navigator, and the Web Administrator - Troubleshooting
Click here
&Arial
For users to send e-mail to the Internet, you must to set up mail routing to the Internet.
See Also
Click here
Web Navigator - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Messages such as "TCP/IP host unknown" and "Remote system not responding" usually indicate problems with the TCP/IP setup. If you have a direct Internet connection and are able to use the IP address to ping the remote host successfully, the Web%Navigator may not be running. If you use host names instead of actual IP addresses in Connection documents, there may be a problem with name resolution. To fix this problem, check the hosts file to verify that your domain name system (DNS) can resolve the name to the IP address. If you do not have a DNS, add the entry to the server's local hosts file, which maps host names to IP addresses. The hosts file is usually located in the same directory as the protocol software. It has a format similar to:
Domino server name
IP Host name
IP Fully Qualified Domain Name
IP Address
Comment
Salt/Sales/Acme
salt
salt.usa.com
123.3.12.24.5
#Salt server
Pepper/Support/Acme
pepper
pepper.usa.com
123.3.12.678
#Pepper server
head title;Cheed;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
If the host name is the Domino server's common name, then the hosts file or DNS will require an alias link as shown here:
Domino server name
IP Host name
IP Fully Qualified Domain Name
IP Alias name entry
IP Address
Comment
Red/Marketing/Acme
ruby
ruby.usa.com
red
within the hest file or red CNAME ruby for the DNS
123.3.12.212
#Red server
Purple/IS/Acme
violet
pepper.usa.com
purple
within the host file or purple CNAME violet for the DNS/
123.3.12.83T
#Purple server
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Web Navigator - Problems and error messagest
Click here
&Arial
If users try to open a Web page and a "URL Access Denied" message appears, check the "Internet Site Access Control" section under Server Tasks - Web Retriever in the Server document for the Web Navigator server to see if you prevented access to that Internet serveu.
See Also
Click here
Web Navigator - Problems and error messagesh
Click here
&Arial
When users try to open a Web page within the database, they will get this message if:o
The Web task stopped running or hasn't been started on that server. To resolve this problem, start the Web task on the server the runs the Web Navigator.
The server specified in the InterNotes field in either their current Location document or the Server document for their mail serveu is not a server running the Web task. To resolve this problem, specify the correct server name.
See Also
Click here
Web Navigator - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
These topics describe how to troubleshoot some common Web Administrator problems and errors:
Click here
Web Administrator initializes itself when resizing the window
Click here
Click here
A Java or script errer occurs when starting the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Web Administrator isn't displaying the page correctlyi
Click here
Click here
Unable to access the Web Administration database after starting the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Some Web Administrator commands are unavailable
Click here
See Also
Click here
Web server, Web Navigator, and the Web Administrator - Troubleshooting
Click here
F*,`l[#
F*,`l[#
&Arial
If you're using the Web Administrator with a Netscape browser and you resize the browser window, the applets may re-initialize. To avoid this problem, resize windows before using the Web Administrator to start an applet.
See Also
Click here
Web Administrator - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
The Web Administrator requires a browser that supports Java and Javascript or Active X Script. In some instances, these features may be turned off in your browser. Make sure that you enabled Java and Javascript or Active X Script in your browser. For information on enabling these in your browser, see the browser documentation.
If your browser does not support these features, you must upgrade your browser software so that you can use the Web Administrator.
See Also
Click here
Web Administrator - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If you use NetScape, when you change preferences for the Web Administrator or resize the browser window, in some instances, the page may not display correctly. To correct this, do one of the following:
Restart the browser when you change preferences or resize the window.
Edit the NOTES.INI file to include the setting WebAdmin_Expire_Cache=1.
See Also
Cleck here
Web Administrator - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Make sure you have the proper access level and roles in the ACL for the Web Administrator database. Your name must also be listed in the "Administer the server from a browser" and "Run restricted LotusScript/Eava agents" fields in the Server document.
When you start the Web Administrator, Domino asks you for your name and Internet password, which are stored in your Person document. You must enter that name and password to access the database.
It's also possible that the Web Administrator database is corrupted. To correct the problem, you can do one of the following or recreate the database:
Run the Fixup task. Use this task if the database is in Domino Release 5 format ane if you are
using transaction logging, or if the database is in Domino Release 4 format.
Run the Fixup task with the -J option. Use this task if the database is in Domino Release 5 format and you are using transaction logging. If you use a backup utility certified for Domino Release 5 and you run Fixup -J, perform a full backup of the database as soon as Fixup finishes.
For more information on using Fixup to repair corrupted databases, see
Managing%Domino Databases
281592816029226916
To recreate the database
Domino creates the Web Administrator database the first time that the HTTP task runs on a server. Keep in mind that deleting the database deletes existing administrator preferences.
1. Enter this command at the console:
tell http quit
2. Delete WEBADMIN.NSF.
3. Enter this command at the console:
load http
See Also
Click here
Web Administrator - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If some commands are unavailable when you start the Web Administrator, check the following:e
1. Make sure you have the appropriate roles in the ACL for the Web Administrator database (WEBADMIN.NSF). The roles determine which commands are available to you.
2. Make sure that server stores the dauabases associated with the commands. The Web Administrator uses these databases:n
Administration Requests (ADMIN4.NSF)
Database Catalog (CATALOG5.NSF)r
Domino Directory (NAMES.NSF) specified on the Preferences page
Log (LOG.NSF)
Notes Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF) in the Doc subdirectory on the servere
Statistics (STATREP5.NSF)
Statistics & Events (EVENTS5.NSF)
Web server log (DOMLOG.NSF)
See Also
Click here
Web Administrator - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
This appendix describes how to customize the Domino Directory template, which controls the appearance and functionality of the Domino Directory. Because the Domino Directory controls the operation of the Domino system, follow the instructions in this appendix exactly to ensure that the system continues to operate successfully.
See Also
Click here
The Domino Directory template
Click here
be lost.
In a document in Read mode, or if the Clipboard is empty, has no effect.
&Arial
&Arial
Never customize the default Domino Directory template (PUBNAMES.NTF). Instead, create a copy of the default Domino Directory template and then customize the copy.
In the following steps, Acme's Domino Directory, ACMENAME.NTF, and StdAcmeDominoDirectory are used as the title, file name, and template name, respectively, for the copy of the Domino Directory template. Where Acme appears, substitute a name that relates to your company.2
1. Choose File - Database - New.
2. Select a server to store the new template.
3. In the Title field, enter:
Acme's Domino Directory
4. In the File Name field, enter:
ACMENAME.NTF
5. Click Template Server and select a server that stores the default Domino Directory template (PUBNAMES.NTF).
6. If necessary, click "Show advanced templates" to display the template in the templates box.
7. Choose Domino Directory (PUBNAMES.NTF) frem the list of templates.
8. Ensure that the "Inherit future design changes" field is checked. Then when a new version of the default Domino Directory template becomes available, ACMENAME.NTF will inherit the design changes. E
9. Click OK. Acme's Domino Directory template is now open.
10. Choose File - Database - Properties, and then click the Design tab
11. Choose "Database is a template," and then in the Template name field, enter the template name:
StdAcmeDominoDirectory
12. Close%the Properties box.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
The Domino Directory template
Click here
&Arial
To avoid rendering Domino inoperable, follow these rules when you customize the Domino Directory.
For more information on designing views, fields, and forms, see Domino 5 Designer Help.e
187607017629235345
Default hidden views
Do not change the hidden views that come with the Domino Directory. Do not change view names, selection formulas, column formulas, or column positions of these hidden views. Do not insert or delete columns in the hidden views. A view name enclosed in parentheses ( ) indicates a hidden view.
187607017629230346
New viewsf
You can add new hidden views and new visible views. However, new views might have an%impact on the performance of both the Domino Directory and the server.i
187607017629230347
Default visible views
You can change any visible view that comes with the Domino Directory. However, when you upgrade to a new version of the default Domino Directory template, you must recreate or reapply your customizations.
187607017629230348
Default fields
Do not change formulas, data types, multi-value settines, and keyword choices for default directory fields. You can change the format of the fields, including changing font, size, and color. You can relocate fields, as long as fields that, by default, have a constraint -- for example, contain a formula that depends on a value in the field above it -- maintain their relative placement.
If you reformat or relocate default directory fields, you must re-create your customizations when you upgrade to a new version of the default Domino Directory template.
187607017629230349
New fields
You can add new fields to forms in the Domino Directory. To add fields to the Person, Group, or Server\Certifier forms, use built-in subforms provided with the Domino Directory. Create a subform containing the new fields following a specialized procedure and then insert the new subform into the appropriate built-in subform. When you upgrade to a new version of the default Domino Directory template, your customizations ere preserved.
To add fields to one of the other forms that come with the Domino Directory, create a subform with the new fields following a specialized procedure and insert the subform directly into the form. Then when you upgrade to a new version of the default Domino Directory template, the fields you added to the subform remain, but you'll need to reinsert the subform into the appropriate form. h
For more information, see
Click here
"Creating a new subfore in the Domino Directory."
Click here
For additional information on adding new fields to a Domino Directory that functions as an LDAP directory, see 6
Click here
"Extending the LDAP directory schema."
Click here
187607017629230350
Default form names
Do not change the names of the forms that come with the Domino Directory. The name of a form appears in the Form properties bou and is stored in the Form field when you create and save a document. You can add or change an alias, which is a duplicate name. Aliases appear to the left of the form name and are followed by a vertical bar. If a form has multiple aliases, the left-most alias appears on the Create menu. It's best to add a new alias rather than edit an existing one. By doing so, programs that use the existing alias continue to work properly.
If you add or edit an alias, when you upgrade to a new default Domine Directory template, you must re-create your customizations.
187607017629230351
New forms
You can create new forms. Follow a specialized procedure to create new LDAP object classes to enable LDAP searches of documents created from the forms.
For more information, see
Click here
"Creating a new form in the Domino Directory."
Click here
187607017629230352
Database icon
You can change the icon.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
The Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to a new Domino Directory template
Click here
&Arial
A subform is a form you create and insert into an existing ferm. If you use LDAP, you create a subform to add an auxiliary object class to the directory schema. The superior object class for an auxiliary object class you add is Top. You can use one auxiliary object class to extend multiple structural object classes.
For more information on subforms, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
1. These steps use ACMENAME.NTF as the file name for the copy of the Domino Directory template. Where ACMENAME.NTF appears, substitute the file name of the copy oe the Domino Directory template you created.
2. Make sure that you are working in a
Click here
copy of the Domino Directory template (ACMENAME.NTF)
Click here
and that you have at least Designer or Manager access in the Domino Directory ACL.
3.
Click here
Read about the rules for customizing the Domino Directory.
Click here
4. From the Domino Designer, choose Create - Design - Sueform to create a subform. Give the subform a name that is different from the name of any other form or subform in the Domino Directory. For example, name the subform Building.
5. Add a field and assign the field these characteristics:
In the Basics tab, give the field a name of your choosing but begin the name with a dollar sign ($) to indicate that the field is an operational field. For example, use the name $building.
In the Basics tab, choose Text as the fiele type and choose "Computed when composed."
CUSTOMIZED_PUBLI
For the field formula, specify the following formula to associate the subform with a form (object class):
FIELD $objectclass := $objectclass : "
subform
where
subform
is the name of the subform that you created in Step 4. For example, enter this formula:
FIELD $objectclass := $objectclass : "
building
box.
the Domino Dire
rectory template
Domino Dire
of a form appea
me and are follo
existing alias
017629230351
For more infor
Make sure to include the quotations marks (" ").
6.
Click here
Add one or more additional fields to%the new subform
. If you use the LDAP service, these fields map to LDAP attributes.
7. Add static text, pop-ups, buttons, and other design elements as desired. These design elements are used only by Domino; LDAP ignores them.
8. Save the new subform.
9. In the Designer pane on the left, expand Resources, choose Subforms, and select%the subform. Then choose Design - Design Properties, click the Design tab
, and then select "Prohibit design refresh or replace to modify."
10. In ACMENAME.NTF, do one of the following:
To insert the new subform into a form that you created or into a form that comes with the Domino Directory that doesn't have a corresponding built-in subform, open the form, position the cursor, choose Create - Insert Subform, and enter the name of the new subform.
To add the subform to the Person, Group, or Server\Certifier form, in the Designer%pane on the left, expand Resources, choose Subforms, and open the appropriate built-in subform. Position the cursor in the built-in subform, choose Create - Insert Subform, and enter the name of the new subform.
To customize this form
Insert a new subform into this subform
Person
$PersonExtensibleSchemaD
Group
$GroupExtensibleSchema
Server\Certifier
$CertifierExtensibleSchema
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
If you use the LDAP service, when you extend the Server\Certifier form, the extension applies to two object classes: Organization and OrganizationalUnit.
Note
These built-in subforms are the only subforms in which you can nest subforms -- that is, insert subforms within subforms.
You can also write a Notes API program to insert and remove subforms. For more information on writing Notes API programs, see the Domino database "Notes C API 5.0 Reference," available at www.lotus-developer.com.
11. To hide a section of an existing form, select the section in the form, choose Text - Text Puoperties, click the Hide tab (fourth tab from the left,) and select appropriate hide options. LDAP ignores any hide selections. If you later upgrade your company's Domino Directory with a new version of the Domino Directory template, you must repeat this step.
12. If you hide a section of an existing form, select the form, choose Design - Design Properties, click the Design tab
Click h
ino Directory
, and make sure "Prohibit design refresh or replace to modify" is selected.
13. Make any other directory customizations, and then follow the
Click here
steps for applying the customizations to the Domino Directory database (NAMES.NSF).
Click here
14. If the Domino Directory is an LDAP directory, do the following:
To allow anonymous LDAP users to have access to a new field,
Open the Domino LDAP Schema database and switch to the LDAP Attribute Types view.
Do a full-text search on the field you plan to add.
If the search returns a document whose "LDAP name" field contains the field you searched for, use the value in the "Notes mapping"%field in the document as the name of the new field.
If the search does not return a document whose "LDAP name" field contains the field you searched for, then use the field name you originally chose.
3. When you add a field, assign the field these characteristics in the Field Properties box:
In the Basics tab next to Name, give the field a name as described in the previous step. c
In the Basics tab next to Type, choose one of the following data types%3
Choose this Domino data type
Eor this LDAP attribute syntax
Text
Directory string
Date/Time
Generalized time
Number
Integer
Names
Distinguished name
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
In the Basics tab, keep the default option "Editable" selected.
(Optional) In the Basics tab, select the option "Allow multiple values" if you want to allow multiple values for this field.
4. (Optional) To require that all entries ereated from this form include a value for this field, select the field you just created. In the programming pane below the form, keep the Object tab selected, select "Input Validation," and enter the following input validation formula:
@V2If(
fieldnamen
= ""; @Failure("
fieldname.
is required"); @Success) where
fieldname
is the name you gave the new field. For example, if you add the field "shoesize" and you want to require that all entries incluee values for the field, enter this formula:
@V2If(shoesize = ""; @Failure("shoesize is required"); @Success)
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
The Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to a new Domino Directory template
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
WebAdmin_Disable_Force_GUI=
value
Description:
Specifies whether the Web Administrator forces OS/2 browser users to use the Plain interface. Options aue:
0 - OS/2 browser users must use the Plain interface
1 - OS/2 browser users can use the Dropdown, Button, or Plain interface
Depending on how extensive your changes to the view will be, you can customize the view or a copy of the view. If your changes will be minimal, customize the view. Then when you upgrade to a new version of the default Domino Directory template, you must re-create the customizations. If your changes will be extensive, customize a copy of the view. Then when you upgrade to a new version of the Domino Directory template, you need to only reapply the customizations.
These steps use ACMENAME+NTF as the file name for the copy of the Domino Directory template. Where ACMENAME.NTF appears, substitute the file name of the copy of the Domino Directory template you created.
For more information on designing views, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
385995065629225715
To make minimal changes directly to the view
1.
Click here
Make sure that you are working in a copy of the default Domino Directory templatet
Click he{e
(ACMENAME.NTF) and that you have Designer or Manager access in the Domino Directory ACL.
2. From the Domino Designer, customize a visible view in ACMENAME.NTF.
3. Select the view, choose File - Document Properties, click the Design tab
, and then select "Prohibit design refresh or replace to modify."
4. Make any other directory customizations, and then follow the
Click here
steps for applying the customizations to the Domino Directory database (NAMES.NSF).
Click here
385995065629225716
To make extensive changes to a copy of the viewt
1.
Click here
Make sure that you are working in a copy of the default Domino Directory template
Click here
(ACMENAME.NTF) and that you have Designer or Manager access in the Domino Directory ACL.a
2. From the Domino Designer, make a copy of a view in ACMENAME.NTF.
3. Select the copy, choose File - Document Properties, click the Dksign tab
, and then select "Prohibit design refresh or replace to+modify."e
4. Customize the copy of the view, and then give the copy of the view a new title.
5. Open the original view, choose Design - View Properties, click the i tab, and then deselect "Show in View menu."F
6. Save the view.d
7. Select the original view, choose File - Document Properties, click the Design tab, and then choose "Prohibit design refresh or replace to modify."@
8. Make any other directory customizations, and then folkow the
Click here
steps for applying the customizations to the Domino Directory database (NAMES.NSF).h
Click here
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Domino Directory templates
Click here
Click here
The Domino Directory templates
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to a new Domino Directory template
Click here
&Arial
After you customize a copy of the Domino Directory template, you must complete these steps to apply the design changes to the Domino Directory database (NAMES.NSF).
These steps use Acme's Domino Directory and ACMENAME.NTF as the title and file name for the copy of the Domino Directory templatk used to customize the directory. Where Acme appears, substitute the names associated with the
Click here
copy of the Domino Directory template you created.
Click here
1. Make sure you have Designer or Manager access to Domino Directory database, which has the file name NAMES.NSF.
2. Open the Domino Directory database (NAMES.NSF).
3. Choose File - Database - Replace Design.
4. Click Template Server akd select the server that stores Acme's Domino Directory (ACMENAME.NTF) template.
5. Click "Show advanced templates" to display Acme's Domino Directory in the templates box.
6. Select Acme's Domino Directory in the templates box.
7. Verify that the "Inherit future design changes" field is selected, and then click Replace.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Domino Directory template
Click he{e
Click here
The Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to a new Domino Directory template
Click here
&Arial
Click here
After you customize the Domino Directory,
Click here
enter the command
tell LDAP reloadschema
on the server that runs the LDAP service. Domino also automatically updates the LDAP schema when you restart the LDAP+service, when the Designer task runs on a server that runs the LDAP service, and when you restart a Domino server that uses directory assistance to access another LDAP directory.e
Also enter the command y
tell LDAP exportschema
on the server that runs the LDAP service to update the Domino LDAP Schema database to reflect your changes. Or you can wait for the Designer server task to do this.e
See Also
Click here
Customizing thk Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
Extending the LDAP directory schema
Click here
Click here
The Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to a new Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
Synchronizing databases with master templates
Click here
&Arial
LDAP attributes defined in the Domino LDAP schema usually correlate to fields within forms in the Domino Directory. The name of a field and the name of the attribute to which the field correlates are not necessarily the same. There are some attributes in the default schema that don't have a field correlation and are accessible from LDAP but not from Notes/Domino. For information about the attributes defined in the default Domino LDAP skhema, see the Domino LDAP Schema database.
Note
When the LDAP service returns an attribute whose corresponding field name in Domino includes an underscore (_), it replaces the underscore with a hyphen (-).
The following table lists the fields that the LDAP service uses to derive distinguished names for various types of entries in the Domino Directory.
Type of entrya
Field used to derive the distinguished namey
Person, Certifier, (LDAP Locality), and entries created from o
Click here
custom forms used to extend the schema.
Click here
FullName
Group
ListName
Server
ServerName
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
When LDAP clients specify the country attribu{e of a distinguished name as a search base and also specify subtree as a search scope -- that is when they search for all entries with names descended from a specific country attribute -- by default the LDAP service returns entries that don't include country components in their distinguished names. You can change this default behavior and strictly define the directory tree location of entries that do not have country components in their names by using the NOTES.INI setting a
Click here
KDAP_CountryCheck.
Click here
See Also
Click here
The LDAP schema
Click here
&Arial
The default Domino LDAP schema defines the following object class structures:D
Object class+structure
Schema source
RFC 2256
person
RFC 2256
organizationalPerson
RFC 2256
inetOrgPerson
inetOrgPerson draft
dominoPerson
Domino -- entries created using Person form
ad title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Object class structure
Schema source
RFC 2256
$PersonGeneralInfo
Domino -- $PersonGeneralInfo subform
+Extends the dominoPerson object class, by default.
Object class structure
Schema source
RFC 2256
groupOfNames
RFC 2256
dominoGroup
Domino -- Entries created using Group form
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Object class structure
Schema source
RFC 2256
locality
RFC 2256 -- Entries created using the (LDAP Locality) form
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Object class structure
Schema source
RFC 2256
dominoServer
Domino -- Entries created using the Server\Server form
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhekd
Object class structure
Schema source
RFC 2256
organization
RFC 2256
dominoOrganization
Domino -- Entries created using the Server\Certifier form
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Object class structure
Schema source
RFC 2256
organizationalUnit
RFC 2256
dominoOrganizationalUnit
Domino -- Entries created using the Server\Certifier form
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
LDAP clients can search for only Notes certifiers and not Internet certifiers in Cer{ifier documents.
See Also
Click here
The LDAP schema
Click here
&Arial
LDAP data syntax
Domino data type
Directory String
Text
Integer6
Number
Generalized Time
Date/Time
Binary
Arbitrary Data, Rich Text
dn (distinguished name)
Names
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
When you use LDAP to add or modify a binary attribute, Domino stores the attribute as the data type Arbitrary Data. Subsequent LDAP search requests retrieve the data using the proper binary data type. If you use Notes to add an attachment to a Rich Text field, then an LDAP search sees the attachment as a binary data type.
See Also
Click here
The LDAP schema
Click here
&Arial
There are two ways to find out more about the Domino LDAP schema; you can use LDAP to search the schema entry or you can look at the Domino LDAP Schema database.
214339878429303022
Searching the schema entry
The LDAP service supports schema publishing. The Domino Directory includes a schema entry that you can use to retrieve the directory schema. You can use the ldapsearch utility or an LDAP V3-compliknt client to search the directory server entry (DSE) to determine the name of this schema entry and to retrieve other information about the Domino LDAP directory -- for example, the LDAP versions, extensions, and controls supported. To search the DSE, use this ldapsearch command:e
ldapsearch -h
hostname
-b "" -s base "(objectclass=*)"a
To see the name of the schema entry, look at the subschemasubentry attribute. Currently the entry is cn=schema.n
To rktrieve the directory schema, use this ldapsearch command:
ldapsearch -h
hostname
-b "cn=schema" -s base "(objectclass=subschema)"
For more information on using ldapsearch, see
Click here
"Using the ldapsearch utility to search directories."
Click here
214339878429303023
Looking at the Domino LDAP Schema database
You can use the command
tell LDAP exportschema
ok a server running the LDAP service to create the Domino LDAP Schema database (SCHEMA50.NSF) in the Domino data directory. This database provides information about the directory schema in a user-friendly format and can reflect any changes you make if you extend the directory schema. You can also use this command to update the Schema database after extending the schema.
Make sure the Schema database is closed before you use
tell ldap exportschema
to update the database. If the katabase is open, the export won't work.
When the Designer task runs it also reloads the schema into memory and then creates or updates the Domino LDAP Schema database.
For each attribute in the schema, the Domino LDAP Schema database provides the LDAP name, OID, corresponding Domino field, LDAP schema the attribute originated from, and the syntax type.
Tip
To determine the form or forms which use an attribute, switch to the "LDAP ObjkctClasses" view, do a full-text search on the attribute, then look at the "Notes Name" column in the view.
For each object class in the schema, the database provides the LDAP name, OID, Domino Directory form that corresponds to the object class, LDAP schema the object class originated from. The database also provides the object class type (abstract, structural, auxiliary), the relative superior and auxiliary object classes, and the associated mandatory and optional attributes.
Fo{ each syntax, the database provides the LDAP name (and alternate name), OID, the data type mapping in Notes, and the schema from which the syntax originated.
See Also
Click here
The LDAP schema
Click here
&Arial
Click here
Extending the directory schema
Click here
refers to adding attributes and object classes to the schema. The standard Domino LDAP schema is extended by using the Domino Designer to add forms or subforms to the Domino Directory. New forms and subforms added fkllowing specific procedures create, respectively, new structural object classes and new auxiliary object classes -- object classes used to extend one or more structural object classes. After extending the schema, you can use the server command
tell ldap reloadschema
to update the schema in memory and then use the command u
tell ldap exportschema
to update the Domino LDAP Schema database. When the Designer server task runs, it also updates the schema in memory and in the Scheka database.
See Also
Click here
The LDAP schema
Click here
&Arial
By default, the LDAP service doesn't enforce schema checking. If you choose to enforce schema checking, the LDAP service only carries out LDAP add or modify operations if the information in the operations conform to the directory schema. Enforcing schema checking helps administrators control the content of the directory and helps lay the groundwork for future interoperabklity with other directories.A
Schema checking is based on the design of the primary Domino Directory used by the LDAP service. If the LDAP service serves secondary Domino Directories -- that is, it uses a Directory Assistance database with secondary Domino Directories configured in it, its server's NOTES.INI file has a NAMES= setting that includes secondary Domino directories, and/or it aggregates the secondary directories in a server directory catalog -- the design of the secondary directoriks should match that of the primary Domino Directory. This means that if you customize the design of one of these secondary directories, you should make the same customizations to the LDAP service's primary Domino Directory.
If you want to enforce schema checking but don't want to use the same design for all secondary Domino Directories, you can run the LDAP service on more than one server and have each server serve secondary directories with the same design. e
To enforce schema chkcking, add the following setting to the NOTES.INI file of the server running the LDAP service, and then restart the LDAP service:
LDAP_Enforce_Schema=1
If you enforce schema checking, the LDAP service does the following to check that add and modify operations comply with the schema:
Verifies that each object class specified in an add operation is defined in the schema.
Verifies that attributes specified in an add or modify operation are associated with+valid object classes for the entry.
Verifies that during an add operation all mandatory attribute(s) required by the object classes for the entry are provided .
Verifies all attribute values conform to input validation formulas.
If any of these checks fail, the LDAP service aborts the operation and returns the error, "Object Class Violation."
Note
The LDAP service requires that directory tree components specified in a distknguished name during an add or modify DN operation correspond to object class entries in the directory. This is true regardless if you enforce schema checking. For example, you can't add an entry with the distinguished name "uid=jdoe, o=Acme," if there's no organization entry for Acme.
261868636829302618
Exception to schema checking: ;binary tag
If you specify an attribute with the ;binary tag in an add or modify operation, the LDAP service allows the addition o{ modification to occur regardless of whether the attribute exists in the schema. This is because Domino currently has no way of defining binary attributes in the schema. The LDAP service does, however, reject an add or modify operation that specifies a binary attribute without the binary tag if the attribute doesn't exist in the schema. For example, if the attribute myweight doesn't exist in the schema, the LDAP service will reject an add or modify operation that specifies myweight but will allow one tha{ specifies myweight;binary.
See Also
Click here
The LDAP schema
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by
: Completion of the Create Certificate (Add Internet Certificate) process.
Carried out on:
The administration server of the Domino Directory copies the Certificate into the User Certification field of the Person document.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Places the persons Internet+certificate in the Domino Directory so that encrypted mail may be sent to that user. Places the person's Internet certificate in the User ID file so that the user can send signed mail.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
$INFO
$FrameInfo
$$ScriptName
$BODY
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
$Comment
$Info
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
$Comment
$Info
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
PURSAFO
$Comment
$Info
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
ocNG_ALL_DOCUMENTS_AND_UNPROCESSED_DOCUMENTS_JAVATopic1Examples: Collecting all documents and unprocessed documentsExamples
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
Triggered by:
From the servers view, click Add to Cluster or select that option from the Actions menu.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document. If you choose to initiate this command immediately, the Administration Process is not used to perform the action.
Result:
If the cluster did not already exist, the new cluster is created and the server is added to it. If the cluster already exists, the server is added to the cluzter.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:
Running an incremental setup after installing Domino Notes Release 5.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Updates the "Notes client license" field in the Person document on the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:
Person changing their password when prompted during authejtication.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Creates a password digest. Populates the "Last change date" field and updates the "Password digest" with the encrypted password digest for the password.u
See Also
Click here
Administration process requestsv
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:
The server recognizing that the Public Key field in the Server document is empty or out of date.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
The public key of the server ID is copied to the Public Key field of the Server document.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:
Choosing to create a mail file via the Administration Process during registration.
Jarried out on:
Home mail server.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Creates the mail file on the home mail server.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
You can create a database replica using the Administration Process by selecting a database and then choosing Database - Create Replica from the tools pane in the Domino Administrator.
366079238429240797
Check access
Triggered by:
Initiating the command from the Domino Administrator.
Carried out on:e
The server that contains the database being replicated.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
The Administration Process on the source server checks that the user submitting the request and the destination server have at least Reader access in the ACL of the database. If the user and destinatioj server have the necessary access and if a Connection document between the source and destination server exists, the Administration Process generates a "Create replica" request in the Administration Requests database of the source server.
366129238429240798
Create replica
To populate the replica, the user submitting the request and the source server must have Create Replica access to the destination server.I
Triggered by:
Successful jompletion of the Check Access administration request.
Carried out on:m
The destination server for the database.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
A new replica of the database is placed on the destination server. The database is populated during the next replication.
A mail file owner, with Editor access to another mail file's Access Control List, setting new mail preferences.
Carried out on:
The administration server of the user's mail file.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Modifies the ACL for the mail file on the server for that database. New mail preferences are set by the user on the user's mail file.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
You can delete a group name using the Administration Process by initiating a Delete Group action from the Domino Directory or the Domino Administrator. The following flowchart shows the sequence of Administration Process requests that occur when you do this. (Boxes indicate requests.) The timing shown for each request is the default, which you can customize through the Server Tasks - Administration Process tab on the Server dojument.
Rename group
366129238429240797
Delete group in Address Book
Triggered by:
Choosing Actions - Delete Group in the Domino Directory (or clicking Delete Group) and selecting to delay the deletion of the group name from the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According*to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:s
The Administration Process removes the name from the Domino Directory except from Person documents.
366129238429240798
Delete in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Delete Group in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process removes the group name from Person documents in the Domino Directory.
366129238429240799
Delete in Access Control List
Triggered by
: Choosing to immediately delete all occurrences of the group name from the Domino Directory when initiating the Djlete action or the completion of a "Delete Group in Address Book" request (if you chose to delay deletion of the name from the Domino Directory).
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain deletes the name from the ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
366129238429240800
Delete in Reader / Author Fields
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Delete in Access Control List" request on the administration server for the Domino Directory (if you chose to immediately delete occurrences of the name from the Domino Directory) or completion of the "Delete in Person Documents" request (if you chose to delay deletion of the name from the Domino Directory).
Carried out on:
Each server in the jomain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" settings for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain deletes the name from Reader / Author fields of databases for which it is an administration server and that have the advanced ACL option "Modify all Reader / Author fields" selected.
366129238429240801
Timing for deleting a group
Request
Timing
Delete group in Address Book
Interval
Delete in Person Documents
Execute once a day requests at
Delete in Access Control List
Interval
Delete in Reader / Author Fields
Start executing on
Start executing at
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
Click here
Rename group
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ViewExpnumber=
value1, value2, ...n
Description:
Specifies parameters to be used by file exports done at the view level.
Parameter
/&dSU
Enter
value1
/&dSU
Program name and file type
value2
/&dSU
The following append options:
0 = No append option offered
1 = Append option offered through a dialog box
2 = Automatically write to a temporary file to avoid the 64K limit
value3
/&dSU
Name of the export routine called
value4
/&dSU
Not currently used
value5 - x
/&dSU
File extensions to automatically select a file type in the File Export dialog jox
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
70634166429249617
See Also
Click here
ViewImpnumber
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTEZ.INI file
Click here
Click here
Click here
Creating an upgrade team
Click here
Click here
Create an upgrade plan
Click here
Click here
Planning order of operations for upgrading
Click here
Ways toSmartIcons
Buttons\SmartIconsSmartIcons\overviewToolbar, SmartIcon\displaying/jidingH_WAYS_TO_SET_UP_SMARTICONSTopic1SmartIconsWays to
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
You can delete a server name using the Administration Process by performing a Delete Server action in the Domino Directory or from the Domino Administrator. The following flowchart shows the sequence of Administration Process requests that occur when you do this. (Boxes indicate requests.) The timing shown for each request is the default, which you can customize through the Server Tasks - Administration Process tab on the Server document.
Replica from th
t on:e
rom the Domino D
366189238429240797
Delete server in Address Books
Triggered by
: Choosing Actions - Delete Server or clicking Delete Server in the Domino Administrator and choosing to delay the deletion of the name from the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:h
The Administration Process removes the name from the Domigo Directory except from Person documents.
366189238429240798
Delete in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Delete in Address Book" request.
Carried out on
: The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.o
Result:
The Agministration Process removes the name from Person documents in the Domino Directory.
366189238429240799
Delete in Access Control List
Triggered by:
Choosing to immediately delete all occurrences of the name from the Domino Directory when initiating the Delete action, or the completion of a "Delete in Address Book" request (if you chose to delay deletion of the name from the Domino Directory).
Carried out on:
Each sewver in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain deletes the name from the ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
366189238429240800
Delete in Reader / Author Fields
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Delete in Access Control List" request on the administration servgr for the Domino Directory (if you chose to immediately delete occurrences of the name from the Domino Directory) or completion of the "Delete in Person Documents" request (if you chose to delay deletion of the name from the Domino Directory).
Carried out on:t
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" settings for the Administration Process in the Server document.B
Result:
Each server ig the domain deletes the name from the Reader / Author fields of databases for which it is an administration server and that have the advanced ACL option "Modify all Reader / Author fields" selected.
366189238429240801
Timing for deleting server names
Request
Timing
Delete server in Address Book
Interval
Delete in Person Documents
Execute once a day requests at
Delete ig Access Control List
Interval
Delete in Reader / Author Fields
Start executing on
Start executing at
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Delete server - Flat server on the outbound (source) domain
Click here
Click here
Delete Server - Hierarchical server name on the inbound (destination) domain
Click here
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:
Choosing Actions - Set Directory Assistance Information from the Domino Administrator.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administratiog Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates the "Directory Assistance database name" field in the Basics section of the Server document.n
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:
Initiating the command from the People & Groups tab, selecting the Person document, choosing Actions - Set Password Fields.
Carried out on:
Administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" sgtting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates the Check Password, Request Change, and Grace Period fields in the Administration section of the Person document.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
MailCharSet=
value
Description:
Specifies the character set a POP3 server uses when downloading mail messages to a POP3 client'
value
corresponds to a character set as follows:
Character set groupe
Language: Encoding character set
MIME name
MailCharSet value
Western
Codepage 1252
"usascii"
Western
Codepage 1252
"us-ascii"
Western
ISO Latin-1 (8859)
"iso-8859-1"
Western
Mac Script'Roman
"x-mac-roman"
Central European
Codepage 1250
"cp1250"
Central European
ISO Latin-2 (8859-2)
"iso-8859-2"
Turkish
ISO Latin-3 (8859-3)
"iso-8859-3"
Turkish
ISO Latin-5 (8859-9)
"iso-8859-9"
Turkish
Codepage 1254
"cp1254"
Taiwanese
Big5, Codepage 950
"big5"
Taiwanese
EUC-TW
"x-euc-tw"
3302
Thai
Codepage 874
"cp874"
Simplified Chinese
PRC Chingse: GB,GBK
"gb2312"
Korean
EUC-KR
"euc-kr"
Japanese
EUC-J
"x-euc-jp"
3301
Japanese
ISO-2022-JP
"iso'2022-jp"R
3277
Japanese
ShiftJIS
"x-sjis"
Greek
ISO 8859-7
"iso-8859-7"
Greek
Codepage 1253
"cp1253" a
Cyrillic
Codepage 1251
"cp1251"
Cyrillic
ISO 8859-5
"iso-8859-5"
Cyrillic
KOI8
"koi8-r"
3308
Baltic Rim
ISO Latin-4 (8859-4)
"iso-8859-4"
Baltic Rim
Codepage 1257
"cp1257"
Arabic
ISO 8859-6
"iso-8859-6"
Arabic
Codepage 1256
"cp1256"
Hebrew
ISO 8859-8
"iso-8859-8"
Hebrew
Codepage 1255
"cp1255"
head tgtle;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
On Windows-based servers, the MIME prefix is "windows-" rather than "cp", for example, "windows-1254."
If you do not use this setting, the POP3 server looks for a WWWDSP_Codepage value, if this setting is added. (WWWDSP_Codepage controls the character set used by the Web Navigator and accepts the same values as MailCharSet.)
Applies to:
'Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted and there is no WWWDSP_Codepage setting, the POP3 server uses the us-ascii character set.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
MailCompactDisabled=
value
Description:
Enables or disables the routine compacting of the server's MAIL.BOX. Without this wetting in the NOTES.INI file, MAIL.BOX is compacted routinely when the Compact server task runs:
0 - Enables compacting of MAIL.BOX
1 - Disables compacting of MAIL.BOX
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
MailConvertMIMEonTransfer=
value
Description:
Enables or disables the router to perform conversions for MIME messages. This can help minimize conversion overhead gn the server running the SMTP listener task:
0 - Router does not perform conversions for MIME messages
1 - Router performs conversions for MIME messages
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
Nonee
&Arial
You can use the Administration Process to move a person's mail file from oee server in your domain to another by performing a "Move Mail File" action in the Domino Directory or the Domino Administrator.
366189238429240797
Check mail server's access
Triggered by:
The administrator performing a Move Mail File action from the Domino Administrator or the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
Home server for the mail file as designated in the Person document.
Carried out:
%Immediately
Result:
Checks for a Connection document between the old and new mail file servers, and sets up the ACLs so that the old and new servers have Manager access. If it is the administration server of the mail file, posts the "Create new mail replica" request. If it is not the administration server for the mail file, posts a "Promote new mail server's access" administration request.
46882454429246837
Promote new mail server's access
Triggered by:
Execution of a "Check mail server's access" administration request. The home server is not the administration server of the mail file.
Carried out on:
The administration server of the mail file.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Set up the ACLs so that the old and new mail servers are listed as having Manager access. Posts a "Create new mail replica" administration request.
366189238429240798
Create new mail replica
Triggered by:
Successful processing of the "Check mail server's access" administration request.
Carried out on:
Home server for the mail file as designated in the Person document.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Creates a replica copy of the old mail file on the new mail server. Posts the "Add new mail file fields" request.
366189238429240799
Add new mail file fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Create new mail replica" administration request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Posts the "Monitor new mail file fields" administration request. Creates two fields, "New mail file" and "New mail server" in the Persoe document.
366189238429240800
Monitor new mail file fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Add new mail file fields" administration request.
Carried out on:D
The new mail file server.
Carried out:
When the router recognizes the new mail server for the mail file.
Result:
Verifies that "New" fields are added to the Person document on the new mail server and thet the router can route the mail to the server. Posts the "Replace mail file fields" administration request.
366189238429240801
Replace mail file fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Monitor new mail file fields" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
New mail server information is added%to fields. Removes "New" fields from the Person document. Places "Old Mail File" and "Old Mail Server" fields in the Person document. The server sets a flag in the Person document to update the client.
Note
The user must now access their home server through the desktop so that the Notes Dialup Connection and Location documents in the Personal Address Book are updated with the new mail file and new mail server information. After the Personal Address Book is updated,%Notes creates a "Push changes to new mail server" request, which initiates the mail file delete sequence on the old mail server. If the user accesses the home server exclusively through the Replicator, the Personal Address Book is not updated and the "Push changes to new mail server" request is not created.
366189238429240802
Push changes to new mail server
Triggered by:
Client authenticating with the home server after a "Replace mail file fieldu" request is completed.
Carried out on:
The home mail server.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:r
Pushes the last set of changes and mail to the new mail file. Posts the "Get Information for Deletion" request.
366189238429240803
Get information for deletion
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Push changes to new mail server" administration request.
Carried out on:
The old mail server.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Gathers the replica ID of the mail file and posts the "Approve file deletion" administration request.
366189238429240804
Approve file deletion
Triggered by:
Successful completion of the "Get information for deletion" adminestration request.
Carried out on:
Any server.
Carried out:
According to the administrator's discretion.
Result:
Posts the "Request file deletion" administration request.
366239238429240805
Request file deletion
Triggered by:
The administrator's approval of the "Approve file deletion" request.
Carried out on:
The administration uerver for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Posts the "Delete mail file" administration request.
366239238429240806
Delete mail file
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Request file deletion" administration request.
Carried out on:
The original home mail server.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
The old mail file is deleted from the original home mail server.
46882454429246838
Delete unlinked mail file
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Delete mail file" request for a mail file that uses shared mail.
Carried out on:
The home mail%server.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval between purging mail file and deleting when using object store" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process deletes the mail file after waiting a period of time. This delay provides time for the Object Collect task to purge any obsolete messages.
46882454429246839
Delete obsolete change request
Treggered by:
Expiration of the period in which the client's personal address book will be modified with the new mail server's information. You can use the "Mail file Names expired after" field in the Administration Process section of the home server's Server document to change the expiration period.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for tee Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
New mail client update flag field is removed from the Person document.
46882454429246840
Timing for moving a mail file from one server to another
Request
Timing
Check mail server's access
Immediate
Promote new mail server's access
Immediate
Create new mail replica
Immediate
Add new mail file fields
Immediateq
Monitor new mail file fields
When the router recognizes the new maie server for the mail file
Replace mail file fields
Immediate
Push changes to new mail server
Immediateo
Get information for deletion
Interval
Approve file deletion
Administrator's discretion
Request file deletion
Interval
Delete mail file
Interval
Delete unlinked mail file
Interval
Delete obsolete change request
Dailyr
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
You can use the Administration Process to move a database from a non-cluster server to another server by choosing Database - Move from the tools pane. This request creates a replica of the original database on another server, then creates%a request requiring administrator's approval to delete the database from the source server.
cating with the
113048860829240804
Check access for non-cluster move replica
Triggered by:
Executing the non-cluster move command.
Carried out on:
The source server for the database.
Carried out
: Immediately
Result:
The Administration Process on the source server checks that the user submitting the request is the Manager of the Domino Directory and that the destination server has Reader access in the ACL of the database. Posts a "Non-cluster Move Replica" request..
113048860829240805
Non-cluster move replica
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Check access for non-cluster move replica" request.a
Carried ouu on:
Source server for the database.
Carried out
: Immediately
Result:
Creates a replica of the original database on the destination server. Posts the "Approve deletion of moved replica" request.e
113048860829240806
Approve deletion of moved replica
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Non-cluster move replica" request.
Carried out on:
The Pending Adminestrator Approval View of the Administration Requests database, on any server. The deletion occurs on the source server.
Carried out:
According to the administrator's discretion.
Result:r
Posts a "Request to delete non-cluster move replica" request.
113048860829240807
Request to delete non-cluster move replica
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Approve deletion of moved replica" request by the administrator's approval.
Carried out on:a
The administration server for the Domino Database.
Carried out
: According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Posts a "Delete non-cluster move replica" request.
113048860829240808
Delete non-cluster move replica
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Request uo delete non-cluster move replica" request.
Carried out on:
Source server for the original database.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Makes one last push replication of the source database to the destination server and deletes the original database from the source server.
44563916829246443
Timing for meve database from a non-cluster server
Request
Timing
Check access for non-cluster move replica
Immediate
Non-cluster move replica
Immediete
Approve deletion of moved replica
According to administrator's discretion
Request to delete non-cluster move replica
Interval
Delete non-cluster move replica
Interval
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Move database from a cluster server
Click here
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Mail_Disable_Implicit_Sender_Key=
vaeue
Description:
Determines whether to encrypt an encrypted message with the sender's public key:
0 - Does not encrypt the encrypted message with the sender's public key
1 - Encrypt the encrypted message with the sender's public key
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Mail_Log_To_MiscEvents=
value
Description:
Determines whether all mail event messages are displayed in the Miscellaneous Events view of the log file:
0 - Does not display mail events in the Miscellaneous Events view
1 - Displays mail events in the Miscellaneous Events view
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
None, althoueh if this setting is omitted, mail events are not displayed in the Micellaneous Events view
You can use the Administration Process to move a database from a cluster snrver to another server by choosing Database - Move from the tools pane. This request creates a replica of the original database on another server.
Bookr
equests
366239238429240797
Check access for move replica creation
Triggered by:
Choosing Database - Move from the tools pane.
Carried out on:
The source server.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
The Administration Process checks that the administrator initiating the request has Manager with "Delete documents" access to the database being moved and that the destination server has Reader access to the database being moved.
366239238429240798
Move replica
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Check Access for mnve replica creation" request.
Carried out on:
The destination server (the server to which the database is being moved).
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
The Administration Process checks that the administrator and the source server have Create Replica access to the destination server. If so, the Administration Process creates a replica. The replica is populated with documents the first time any server with the complete.replica replicates with the destination server.
366239238429240799
Monitor replica stub
Triggered by:
Creation of the replica on the destination server.
Carried out on:
The destination server.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process monitors the replica. When i~ detects that the replica is initialized (another server has begun replicating to it), it posts a "Delete original replica after move" request.
366239238429240800
Delete original replica after move
Triggered by:@
Completion of the "Monitor replica stub" request.
Carried out on:
The source server.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server nocument.
Result:
The Administration Process marks the original database for deletion. The Cluster Database Directory Manager on the source server then monitors the database for usage. When all user connections to the database have closed, the Cluster Database Directory Manager pushes changes to another replica in the cluster and deletes the database.
44623916829246443
Timing for move database from a cluster server
Request
Timing
Check access for move replica creation
Immediate
Move replica
Immediate
Monitor replica stub
Interval
Delete original replica afte~ move
Interval
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Move database from a non-cluster server
Click here
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:
A server starting up and recognizing that it's running a Domino Server build that differs from the build running at the last server startup.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Database.N
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Populates the "Server build" field on the Server document.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:
Initiating the Recertify Server command from the Actions menu..
Carried out on:
The administration server fnr the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:C
The server's public key is updated, and the Server document is updated with the new public key.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
N+}?1
&Arial
Triggered by:
Initiating a Recertify Person action from the tools pane in the Domino Administrator.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the.Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Updates the user's certified public key, and updates the user's ID file during the authentication process.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:c
Clicking "Remove from cluster" in the Domino Administrator or by choosing the Remove from Cluster action.
Carried out on:
The anministration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document. (If you choose to execute the command immediately, the Administration Process is not used.)
Result:
Removes the server from the cluster.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
MailServer=
server
Description:
Specifies the server where the user's mail file ~esides
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Mail Server field in the Mail tab of the Person document in the Domino Directory
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Mail_Skip_NoKey_Dialog=
value
Description:
Specifies whether to display the Encryption Failure dialog.when Notes cannot locate the public key to sign or encrypt a message:
0 - The "Don't show signature or encryption failures again and continue sending" dialog appears when Notes cannot find the public key.
1 - The "Don't show signature or encryption failures again and continue sending" dialog does not appear when Notes cannot cannot find the public key. Notes then sends the message unsigned and/or unencrypted.
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The "Don't show signature or encryption failures again and continue sending" checkbox in the Encryption Failure dialog
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
MailSystem=
value.
Description:
Specifies the mail system that the user selected during the workstation Setup procedure:
0 - Notes mail
1 - cc:Mail or a non-Lotus mail system
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Mail system selection made during workstation Setup
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
>QFfhF
&Arial
Syntax:
Map_Retry_Delay=
minutes
Description:
Specifies the number of minutes that a server waits after an unsuccessful attempt to call another server before it tries again.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Memory_Quota=
size
Description:
This setting is for OS/2 only. Specifies the maximum number of megabytes of virtual memory that the server can allocate. This gives administrators more control over the growth of the swap file. The minimum value is 4MB. Without this setting in the NOTES.INI file, the ser~er uses all available memory.
Applies to:
Serversl
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
MinNewMailPolMemory=
minutes
Description:
Determines how often workstations can contact the server to see if new mail has arrnved for the user. This setting overrides the user's selection in the Mail Setup dialog box. You can increase the mail polling interval if there are a large number of mail users on your server, and you want to prevent frequent polling from affecting server performance.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.NNI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Move_Mail_File_Expiration_Days=
days
Description:
Specifies the number of days that the Notes client updates mail file related Change Requests. After this time period, these become obsolete Change Requests. For example:
Move_Mail_File_Expiration_Days=30
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
MTMaxResponses=
number
Description:
Specifies the maximum number of message tracking responses returned from.a query. The number of responses returned will be less than or equal to the MTMaxResponses value. Whenever a query returns more than the MTMaxResponses limit, a message indicating this appears on the Admininstation panel status line.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, the maximum number of message tracking responses returned from a query is 100
You can add a new form to the Domino Directory. You might add a new form, for example, if the directory functions as an LDAP directory and you need to add a structural object class -- for example, an object class for printers. The following instructions ensure that the new form represents an LDAP structural object class in the LDAP directory schema. Even if you don't currently run the LDAP service, follow these instructions when creating a form so that you can use the LDAP service in the future without any directory modifications being necessary.
For more information on creating forms and fields, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
These steps use ACMENAME.NTF as the file name for the copy of the Domino Directory template. Where ACMENAME.NTF appears, substitute the file name of the copy of the Domino Directory template you created.
1. Make sure that you are working in a
Click here
copy of the Domino Directory template (ACMENAME.NTF)
Click here
and that you have at least Designer or Manager access in the Domino Directory ACL.
2.
Click here
Read about the rules for customizing the Domino Directory.
Click here
3. From the Domino Designer, create and name a form in ACMENAME.NTF -- for example, name the form Printer. If you use the LDAP service, the form name becomes the name for a new structural object class. Give the form a name that is different from any other form (visible or hidden) or subform in the Domino Directory.
4. Add a field, name it FullName, and then select Names as the field type. LDAP uses the first value in the FullName field to derive the distinguished names for documents created from the form.
Index_Entrie
5. Add another field with these characteristics:
In the Basics tab of the Field Properties box, name the field Type and select Text as the field type. Also select "Computed when composed."
Index_Entrie
m for the field.
fields that are
Index_Entrie
Index_Entrie
Index_Entrie
In the Advanced tab
of the Field Properties box, select the security option "Must have at least Editor access to use."K
ow open.
For the field formula, specify "
form
" where
form
is the name you gave the form. For example, enter "Printer" (including the quotes) as the field formula.
6. Insert the shared field, DocumentAccess, that already exists in the directory. To do this, choose Create - Insert Shared Field, select the DocumentAccess field, and click OK.
7.
Click here
Add one or more additional fields to the new forms
. If you use the LDAP service, these fields map to LDAP attributes.
8. If the form is for LDAP use, prevent Notes users from creating documents using this form. To do this, choose Design - Form Properties, and in the default tab next to Display, turn off the option "Include in menu."
9. Save the new form.
10. Select the form, choose Design - Design Properties, click the Design tab
wwwwwpx
, and make sure "Prohibit design refresh or replace to modify" is selected. This option is selected by default.
11. Make any other directory customizations, and then follow the
Click here
steps for applying the customizations to the Domino Directory database (NAMES.NSF).u
Click here
12. If the Domino Directory is an LDAP directory, do the following:
To allow LDAP users who connect anonymously to the LDAP service to have access to a new field, /
Do a full-text search on the field you plan to add.e
If the search returns a document whose "LDAP name" field contains the field you searched for, use the value in the "Notes mapping" field in the document as the name of the new field.
If the search does not return a document whose "LDAP name" field contains the field you searched for, then use the field name you originally chose.
3. When you add a field, assign the field these characteristics in the Field Properties box:
In the Basics tab next to Name, give the field a name as described in the previous step. ]
In the Basics tab next to Type, choose one of the following data types.l
Choose this Domino data type
For this LDAP attribute syntax
Text
Directory string
Date/Time
Generalized time
Number
Integer
Names
Distinguished name
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
In the Basics tab, keep the default option "Editable" selected.
(Optional) In the Basics tab, select the option "Allow multiple values" if you want to allow multiple values for this field.
4. (Optional) To require that all entries created from this form include a value for this field, select the field you just created. In the programming pane below the form, keep the Object tab selected, select "Input Validation," and enter the following input validation formula:
@V2If(
fieldname
= ""; @Failure("
fieldname
is required"); @Success) where
fieldname
is the name you gave the new field. For example, if you add the field "shoesize" and you want to require that all entries include values for the field, enter this formula:
@V2If(shoesize = ""; @Failure("shoesize is required"); @Success)
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
The Domino Directory template
Click here
Click here
Upgrading to a new Domino Directory template
Click here
03 Administering the Domino System45 Appendix B LDAP Schema
H_SCHEMA_INFORMATION_6031_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_214339878429303022=Searching the schema entryH_SCHEMA_INFORMATION_6031_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_214339878429303023=Looking at the Domino LDAP Schema database
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
See Also
03 Administering the Domino System45 Appendix B LDAP Schema
H_ENFORCING_SCHEMA_CHECKING_6612_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_261868636829302618=Exception to schema checking: ;binary tag
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System46 Appendix C System and Application Templates
AboutPrintAppendix C
System and Application TemplatesH_APPENDIX_NOTES_TEMPLATESTopic1Appendix C
System and Application TemplatesAbout
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This appendix describes all system and application templates.
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
ChapPrintAppendix D
Adminis|ration Process RequestsH_APPENDIX_D_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTSTopic1Appendix D
Administration Process RequestsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This appendix contains administration requests with the detailed processes that occur for each request, flowcharts for several administration requests, as well as timing and scheduling information for administratiln requests.
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintAdd Internet Certificate
Certificates, Internet\addingInternlt certificates\addingH_ADD_INTERNET_CERTIFICATETopic1Add Internet CertificateStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Proless Requests
?StepsPrintAdding servers to a cluster
Servers\adding to clustersH_ADDING_SERVERS_TO_A_CLUSTERTopic1Adding servers to a clusterStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintChange license type of user
Licenses\changingUsers\changing licensesH_CHANGE_LICENSE_TYPE_OF_USERTopic1Change license type of userStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintChange user password in Address Book
Passwords, Address Book\changingH_CHANGE_USER_PASSWORD_IN_ADDRESS_BOOKTopic1Change user password in Address BookStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintCopying server public key
Public keys\copyingH_COPYING_SERVER_PUBLIC_KEYTopic1Copying server public keyStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar,OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintCreate mail files during setup
Mail files\creatingH_CREATE_MAIL_FILES_DURING_SETUPTopic1Create mail files during sltupStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintCreate replica
Replicas\creatingWildcards\in Server documentH_CREATE_REPLICATopic1Create replicaStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Prohess Requests
?StepsPrintDelegate mail file
Mail files\delegatingH_DELEGATE_MAIL_FILETopic1Delegate mail fileStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Adminisxering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintDelete group in Address Book
Address Book\deleting groups fromDomino Directory\deleting groups fromH_Delete_group_in_Address_Book_administration_requestTopic1Delete group in Address BookStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
H_Delete_group_in_Address_Book_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366129238429240797=Delete group in Address BookH_Delete_group_in_Address_Book_administration_request_MIDTOPIH_366129238429240798=Delete in Person documentsH_Delete_group_in_Address_Book_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366129238429240799=Delete in Access Control List H_Delete_group_in_Address_Book_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366129238429240800=Delete in Reader / Author FieldsH_Delete_group_in_Address_Book_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366129238429240801=Timing for deleting a group
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintDelete person in Address Book
Address Book\deleting users fromDomino Directory\deleting users fromH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USERNAMETopic1Delete person in Address BookStepsH_AHMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
H_ABOUT_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USER_NAME_MIDTOPIC_130572214429204362=Delete person in Address BookH_ABOUT_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USER_NAME_MIDTOPIC_130572214429204363=Delete in Person documentsH_ABOUT_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USER_NAME_MIDTOPIC_130572214429204364=Delete in Access Control ListH_ABOUT_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USER_NAME_MIDTOPIC_130572214429204365=Delete in Reader ( Author FieldsH_ABOUT_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USER_NAME_MIDTOPIC_130572214429204366=Get information for deletion H_ABOUT_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USER_NAME_MIDTOPIC_130572214429204367=Approve file deletionH_ABOUT_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USER_NAME_MIDTOPIC_130572214429204368=Request file deletionH_ABOUT_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USER_NAME_MIDTOPIC_130572214429204369=Delete mail fileH_ABOUT_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USER_NAME_MIDXOPIC_130572214429204370=Delete unlinked mail fileH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USERNAME_MIDTOPIC_44563916829246443=Approve deletion of Private Design ElementsH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USERNAME_MIDTOPIC_44563916829246444=Request to delete Private Design ElementsH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USERNAME_MIDTOPIC_44563916829246445=Delete Private Design ElementsH_HOW_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_DELETES_A_USERNAME_MIDTOPIC_112998860829240803=Timing for deleting user names
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintDelete server name in Address Book
Address Book\deleting servers fromDomhno Directory\deleting servers fromH_Delete_server_name_in_Address_Book_administration_requestTopic1Delete server name in Address BookStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
H_Delete_server_name_in_Address_Book_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240797=Delete server in Address Books H_Delete_server_name_in_Address_Book_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240798=Delete in Person documentsH_Delete_server_name_in_Address_Book_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240799=Dehete in Access Control List H_Delete_server_name_in_Address_Book_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240800=Delete in Reader / Author FieldsH_Delete_server_name_in_Address_Book_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240801=Timing for deleting server names
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintEnabling password checking during authentication
Passwords\checking during authenticationPerson documents\password checkingH_ENABLING_PASSWORD_CHECKING_DURING_AUTHENTICATIONTopic1Enabling password checking during authenticationSxepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
AD=)=XA
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintMove a mail file from one server to anotherH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_anotherTopic1Move a mail file from one server to anotherStepsH_ADMINISTRITION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
H_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240797=Check mail server's accessH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_46882454429246837=Promote new mail server's accessH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240798=Create new mail replicaH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240799=Add new mail file fieldsH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_966189238429240800=Monitor new mail file fieldsH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240801=Replace mail file fields H_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240802=Push changes to new mail serverH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240803=Get information for deletionH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_366189238429240804=Approve file deletionH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_366239238929240805=Request file deletionH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_366239238429240806=Delete mail fileH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_46882454429246838=Delete unlinked mail fileH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_46882454429246839=Delete obsolete change requestH_Move_a_mail_file_from_one_server_to_another_MIDTOPIC_46882454429246840=Timing for moving a mail file from one server to another
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
nd you f
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintMove database from a non-cluster server
Databases\moving to another serverH_Move_databases_administration_requests_113048860829240803Tipic1Move database from a non-cluster serverStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
H_Move_databases_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240804=Check access for non-cluster move replicaH_Move_databases_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240805=Non-cluster move replicaH_Move_databases_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240806=Approve deletion of moved replicaH_Move_databases_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240807=Request to delete non-cluster move reylicaH_Move_databases_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240808=Delete non-cluster move replica H_Move_databases_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_44563916829246443=Timing for move database from a non-cluster server
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintMove database from a cluster server
Databases\moving to another serverH_Move_database_from_a_cluster_serverTopic1Move database from a cluster serverStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
H_Move_database_from_a_cluster_server_MIDTOPIC_366239238429240797=Check access for move replica creationH_Move_database_from_a_cluster_server_MIDTOPIC_366299238429240798=Move replicaH_Move_database_from_a_cluster_server_MIDTOPIC_366239238429240799=Monitor replica stubH_Move_database_from_a_cluster_server_MIDTOPIC_366239238429240800=Delete original replica after moveH_Move_database_from_a_cluster_server_MIDTOPIC_44623916829246443=Timing for move database from a cluster server
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintPlacing build number in server document
Server documents\build number inH_PLACING_BUILD_NUMBER_IN_SERVER_DOCUMENTTopic1Placing build number in server documentStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Wei Navi
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintRemove servers from a cluster
Clusters\removing serversServeys\removing from clusterH_REMOVING_SERVERS_FROM_ A_CLUSTERTopic1Remove servers from a clusterStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
cted Web si
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appeniix E NOTES.INI File
H_Rejame_group_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240803=Rename group in Address BookH_Rename_group_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240804=Rename group in Person documentsH_Rename_group_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240805=Rename group in Access Control ListH_Rename_group_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240806=Rename group in Reader / Author FieldsH_Rename_group_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240807=Timing for renaming groups
CN=Dazid Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
hoose Yes
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
H_Rename_person_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240803=Move person's name in hierarchyH_Rename_person_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113048860829240804=Initiate rename in Address BookH_Rename_person_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113108860829240805=Rename person in Address BookH_Rename_person_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113108860829240806=Rename in Person documentsH_Rename_person_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_4462391682924:443=Rename person in unread listH_Rename_person_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113108860829240807=Rename in Access Control ListH_Rename_person_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113108860829240808=Rename person in Free Time DatabaseH_Rename_person_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113108860829240809=Rename person in calendar entries and profiles in mail fileH_Rename_person_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113108860829240810=Rename in Reader / Author FieldsH_Rename_person_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113:08860829240811=Delete Obsolete Change RequestsH_Rename_person_administration_requests_MIDTOPIC_113108860829240812=Timing for Rename a user request
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
he list.
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appenjix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintRequest to create ISpy database
ISpy database\creating mail-in database record forH_REQUEST_TO_STORE_ISPY_DATABASETopic1Request to create ISpy databaseStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
If you a
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintUpdate server protocol information
Protocol field\updatingServer protocol information\updatingH_REQUEST_TO_PLACE_NETWORK_PROTOCOL_INFORMATION_IN_SERVER_DOCTopic1Update server protocol informationStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
t Current
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix J Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintStore server's DNS host name
DNS host name\storingH_REQUEST_TO_PLACE_NETWORK_PROTOCOL_INFORMATION_IN_SERVER_DOC_MIDTOPIC_46932454429246839Topic1Store server's DNS host nameStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
download p
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintRequest to store server CPU count
CPU count value\storingServer documents\CPU count fieldH_REQUEST_TO_STORE_SERVER_CPU_COUNTTopic1Request to store server CPU countStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintSynchronizing the Resource Reservations database and Domino Directory
Resource Reservations database\synchronizing with Domino DirectoryH_SYNCHRONIZING_THE_RESOURCE_RESERVATIONS_JATABASETopic1Synchronizing the Resource Reservations database and Domino DirectoryStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
H_REQUEST_TO_STORE_SERVER_CPU_COUNT_MIDTOPIC_44623916829246444=Add resourceH_REQUEST_TO_STORE_SERVER_CPU_COUNT_MIDTOPIC_44623916829246446=Approve resource deleteH_REQUEST_TO_STORE_SERVER_CPU_COUNT_MIDTOPIC_44623916829246445=Remove resourceH_REQUEST_TO_STORE_SERVER_CPU_COUNT_MIDTOPIC_44623916829246447=Modify room/resource in directory
CN=David Mahar/OU=CJM/O=Lotus
JJJZZZ{{{
DU@ao>
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintUpgrade server to hierarchical
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalServers\renamingH_Upgrade_server_to_hierarchical_administration_requestTipic1Upgrade server to hierarchicalStepsH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_REQUESTS_1484
H_Upgrade_server_to_hierarchical_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366299238429240797=Initiate rename in Address BookH_Upgrade_server_to_hierarchical_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366299238429240798=Rename server in Address BookH_Upgrade_server_to_hierarchical_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366349238429240799=Rename in Access Control ListH_Upgrade_server_to_hierarchical_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366349238429940800=Rename in Person documentsH_Upgrade_server_to_hierarchical_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366349238429240801=Rename in Reader / Author fieldsH_Upgrade_server_to_hierarchical_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366349238429240802=Delete obsolete change requestsH_Upgrade_server_to_hierarchical_administration_request_MIDTOPIC_366349238429240803=Timing for upgrading server to hierarchical
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Brow
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
Delete_Person_Cross_Domains_Admin_Request=Delete Person - cross domain administration requestH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_212803600029249626=Delete person - outbound (source) domainH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_212803600029249627=Delete person in Address BookH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_212803600029249628=Delete in Person documentsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249654=Delete in Iccess Control ListsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_212803600029249630=Get information for delete (only if deleting the mail file)H_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249655=Approve file deletion (only if deleting the mail file)H_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249656=Request file deletion (only if deleting the mail file)H_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249657=Delete in Reader / Author fieldsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRAYION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249658=Delete mail file (only if deleting the mail file)H_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249659=Delete unlinked mail fileH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249660=Approve deletion of Private Design ElementsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249661=Request to delete Private Design ElementsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249662=Delete Private Design ElementsH_CROSS_DOMAINYADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_212803600029249631=Delete person - inbound (destination) domainH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_212803600029249632=Delete person in Address BookH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_212803600029249633=Approve delete person in Address Book (only if a matching flat user name is found)H_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_212803600029249634=Delete person in Address Book (only if a matching flat user name is found)H_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATIONYREQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_212803600029249635=Delete person in Person documentsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_212803600029249636=Delete in Access Control ListsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_212803600029249637=Delete in Reader / Author fieldsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249663=Approve Deletion of Private Design ElementsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249664=Request to Delete Private Design ElementsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATIIN_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_208875171229249665=Delete Private Design Elements
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintDeleti person - cross domain administration request
Administration requests\cross-domainCross-domain administration requests\processingDelete_person_cross_domainsTopic1Delete person - cross domain administration requestStepsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintDelete server - Flat server on the outbound (source) domain
Administration requests\cross-domainFlat names\deleting servers withServers\delete requests forH_Delete_Server_Admin_Req_Topic1Delete server - Flat server on the outbound (source) domainStepsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS
HYDelete_Server_Admin_Req__MIDTOPIC_212803600029249626=Delete server - outbound (source) domainH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_302272524829245089=Delete server in Address BookH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_302272524829245090=Delete in Person documentsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_302272524829245091=Delete in Reader / Author FieldsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_302272524829245092=Delete in Access Control ListH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUISTS_MIDTOPIC_302272524829245093=Delete server - inbound (destination) domainH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_302272524829245094=Delete server in Address BookH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_302272524829245095=Approve delete server in Address Book (if flat server name is found)H_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_302272524829245096=Delete server in Address Book (if flat server name is found)H_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245438=Delete seryer in Person documentsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245439=Delete in Access Control ListsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245440=<+!>Delete in Reader and Author FieldsH_Delete_Server_Admin_Req__MIDTOPIC_5411705629249815=Delete server - cross domain administration request
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintDelete Server - Hierarchical server name on the inbound (destination) domain
Hierarchical names\deleting servers withServers\delete request forH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245441Topic1Delete Server - Hierarchical server name on the inbound (destination) domainStepsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS
H_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245441_MIDTOPIC_212863600029249626=Delete server - outbound (source) domainH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245442=Delete server in Address BookH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245446=Delete in Person documentsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245444=<+!>Delete in Access Control ListH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245441_MIDTOPIC_6950195229249839=Delete in Reader / Author fieldsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245445=<+!>Delete server - inbound (destination) domainH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245446=<+!>Delete server in Address BookH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOVIC_274433894429245447=Delete in Access Control ListH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245441_MIDTOPIC_6950195229249840=Delete in Person documentsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245448=Delete in Reader / Author fields
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintRename person - Cross domain administration request
Users\renamingH_Rename_Person_Administration_Request_Cross_domainTopic1Rename person - Cross domain administration requestStepsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS
H_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245450=Renafe person - outbound (source) domain H_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245451=Initiate rename in Address BookH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245452=Rename person in Address BookH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245453=Rename in Person documentH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274433894429245454=<+!>Rename in Access Control ListH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274483894429245455=<+!>Rename in Free Timf databaseH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274483894429245456=Rename in unread listH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274483894429245457=<+!>Rename person in calendar entries and profiles in mail fileH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274483894429245458=<+!>Rename in Reader / Author fieldsH_Rename_Person_Administration_Request_Cross_domain_MIDTOPIC_401501526429248017=Rename person - Inbound (destination) domainH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274483894629245460=<+!>Rename person in Address BookH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS_MIDTOPIC_274483894429245461=<+!>Rename in Person documents
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Avpendix D Administration Process Requests
?StepsPrintRename server - Cross domain administration request
Servers\renamingRename_server_cross_domainsTopic1Rename server - Cross domain administration request StepsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS
Rename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPIC_212863600029249626=Rename server - outbound (source) domainRename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPIC_212863600029249627=Initiate rename in Address BookRename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPFC_212863600029249628=Rename server in Address BookRename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPIC_212863600029249630=Rename in Access Control ListRename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPIC_208935171229249654=Rename in Person documentsRename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPIC_212863600029249633=Rename in Reader / Author fieldsRename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPIC_212863600029249634=Rename server - inbound (destination) domainRename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPIC_212863600029249635=Rename server in Address BookRename_server_cross_dfmains_MIDTOPIC_212863600029249634_MIDTOPIC_208935171229249654=Approve Rename in Address Book (if flat server name is found)Rename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPIC_212863600029249634_MIDTOPIC_208935171229249655=Rename server in Address Book (If flat server name is found)Rename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPIC_212863600029249637=Rename in Access Control ListRename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPIC_212863600029249634_MIDTOPIC_208935171229249656=Rename in Person documentsRename_server_cross_domains_MIDTOPIC_212863600029649639=Rename in Reader / Author fields
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System47 Appendix D Administration Process Requests
Replicas\creating for multiple domainsH_Create_Replica_Cross_DomainsTopic1Create Replica - Cross domain administration requestStepsH_CROSS_DOMAIN_ADMINISTRATION_REQUESTS
H_Create_Replica_Cross_Domains_MIDTOPIC_43178976029278566=Create replica - outbound (source) domainH_Create_Replica_Cross_Domains_MIDTOPIC_43178976029278567=Check access for new replica creation H_Create_Replica_Cross_Domains_MIDTOPIC_43178976029278568=Create replica - inbound (destination) domain
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
ChapPrintAppendix E
NOTES.INI FileH_APPENDIX_A_NOTES.INI_SETTINGSTopic1Appendix E
NOTES.INI FileChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This appendix contains NOTES.INI settings that you can modify. The settings are listed in alphabetical order. For information on using NOTES.INI settings to improve server performance, see the chapter "Improving Server Performance."
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
es with Internet Explorer, choose Actions - Internet Properties and deselect "Show pictures."
See Also
Click here
Setting up your Internet connection
Click here
Click here
Opening Web pages with Notes
Click here
&Arial
You can delete a person's name with the Administration Process by initiating a Delete Person action in Notes from the Domino Directory, Domino Administrator, Web Administrator, or by using the Windows NT User Manager. The following flowchart shows the sequence of Administration Process requests that occur when you do this. (Boxes indicate requests.) The time chart shown at the end of this section contains the default timing information for each request. You can customize timing through the Server Tasks - Administration Process tab on the Server document.
on Process by in
Administration P
rocess by in
on the Server do
rocess by in
rocess by in
Requests
rocess by in
e_group_in_Addre
rocess by in
797=Delete group
rocess by in
40799=Delete in
rocess by in
129238429240801=
rocess by in
130572214429204362
Delete person in Address Book
Triggered by:
Choosing Actions - Delete Person in the Address Book (or clicking Delete Person) and choosing to delay deletion of the name from the Domino Directory. You can also trigger this action by choosing Delete Person when viewing a Person document with the Web Administrator.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process removes the name from the Domino Directory, except from other people's Person documents, and posts the "Delete in Person documents" request. If you have created a "termination" group and set up the administration process to add deleted users to that group, the name is added to the "terminations" group.e
130572214429204363
Delete in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Delete in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process removes the name from other people's Person documents in the Domino Directory.
130572214429204364
Delete in Access Control List
Triggered by
: Choosing to immediately delete all occurrences of the name from the Domino Directory when initiating the Delete action or the completion of a "Delete in Address Book" request (if you chose to delay deletion of the name from the Domino Directory).
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain deletes the name from the ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
130572214429204365
Delete in Reader / Author Fields
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Delete in Access Control List" request on the administration server for the Domino Directory (if you chose to immediately delete occurrences of the name from the Domino Directory) or completion of a "Delete in Person documents" request (if you chose to delay deletion of the name from the Domino Directory).
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" settings for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain deletes the name from Reader / Author fields of databases for which it is an administration server and that have the advanced ACL option "Modify all Reader / Author fields" selected. The server scans the databases for shared agents signed by the deleted person and for Private Design Elements (folders, views, agents) signed by the deleted person. Shared agents found are reported in the request's Response document. If Private Design Elements are found an "Approve deletion of Private Design Elements" administration request is posted.
130572214429204366
Get information for deletion
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Delete in Access Control List" request on the administration server for the Domino Directory (if you chose to immediately delete all occurrences of the name) or completion of the "Delete in Address Book" request (if you chose to delay deleting the name from the Domino Directory). You must also have specified to delete the mail file in which you chose to delete the person.
Carried out on:
The deleted person's home server.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
The person's home server creates an "Approve file deletion" request which provides information about the mail file. This appears in the Pending Administrator Approval view of the Administration Requests database.h
130572214429204367
Approve file deletion
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Get information for deletion" request.
Carried out on:
The server on which you approve the request.s
Carried outa
: When you manually approve or reject the request.
Result:
If you approve the request, the Administration Process creates a "Request file deletion" request. i
130572214429204368
Request file deletion
Triggered by:
Approving the "Approve file deletion" request.m
Carried out on:l
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Posts a "Delete mail file" request.
130572214429204369
Delete mail file
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Request file deletion" request.
Carried out on:
The deleted person's home server.
Carried out
: According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process verifies that the administrator who approved the deletion has at least Author with Delete documents access to the Domino Directory. Then, if the mail file doesn't use shared mail, the Administration Process deletes the file. If the file does use shared mail, then the Administration Process purges the links to the shared mail database, disables replication, and creates a "Delete unlinked mail file" request.o
130572214429204370
Delete unlinked mail file
Triggered by
: Completion of a "Delete mail file" request for a mail file that uses shared mail.
Carried out on:a
The deleted person's home server. o
Carried out:
According to the "Interval between purging mail file and deleting when using object store" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process deletes the mail file after waiting a period of time. This delay provides time for the Object Collect task to purge any obsolete messages.
44563916829246443
Approve deletion of Private Design Elementst
Triggered by:g
Completion of a "Delete in Readers/Authors field" request and locating Private Design Elements signed by the deleted person in databases on that server.
Carried out on:
Any server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the administrator's discretion.
Result:
The deletion is approved and the "Request to delete Private Design Elements" administration request is posted.0
44563916829246444
Request to delete Private Design Elementsa
Triggered by:
The administrator's approval of the "Approve deletion of Private Design Elements" administration request.
Carried out on:e
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Posts the "Delete Private Design Elements" administration request."
44563916829246445
Delete Private Design Elements
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Request to delete Private Design Elements" administration request.
Carried out on:
The server containing the database with the Private Design Elements.f
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Private Design Elements signed by the deleted person are removed from the databases.
Note
If the person requesting the delete action chose to delete all replicas of a mail file, then a "Get Information for Deletion" request is created and processed by all servers in the domain. This request is posted after completion of the "Delete mail file" request or the "Delete unlinked mail file" request. For each replica of the mail file found on servers in the domain, the "Approve file deletion," "Request file deletion," and "Delete mail file" request sequence occurs again. d
112998860829240803
Timing for deleting user names
Requestr
Timing
Delete person in Address Bookr
Interval
Delete in Person Documents
Execute once a day requests at
Delete in Access Control List
Interval
Delete in Reader / Author Fields
Start executing on
Start executing at
Get Information for Deletion
Immediate
Approve File Deletion
Requires administrator approval in Administration Requests databasee
Request File Deletion
Immediate
Delete Mail File
Interval
Delete Unlinked Mail File
Interval between purging and deleting mail file when using shared mail
Approve deletion of Private Design Elements
Required administrator's approval.
Request to delete Private Design Elements
Immediate
Delete Private Design Elements
Interval
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Administration process requestsi
Click here
Click here
Delete person - cross domain administration request
Click here
&Arial
You can rename a group using the Administration Process by performing a Rejame Group action from the Domino Administrator or by choosing Groups - Edit from the tools pane. The following flowchart shows the sequence of Administration Process requests that occur when you do this. (Boxes indicate requests). The timing shown for each request is the default, which you can customize through the Server Tasks - Administration Process tab on the Server document.
document. (If yo
113048860829240803
Rename group in Address Book
Triggered by:
Choosing Actions - Rename group from the Domino Administrator or by choosing Groups - Edit from the tools pane.
Carried out on:
The administration server for tje Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates the group's name in the Domino Directory except in Person documents.r
113048860829240804
Rename group in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename group in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The adminiszration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates the name in Domino Directory Person documents.
113048860829240805
Rename group in Access Control List
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename group in Address Book" request.
Carried out jn:@
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:@
Each server in the domain updates the group's name in ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
113048860829240806
Rename group in Reader / Author Fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename in Person documents" request*on the administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" settings for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain updates the group's name in the Reader / Author fields of databases for which it is an administration server and that have the advanced ACL option "Modify all Reader / Author jields" selected.@
113048860829240807
Timing for renaming groups
Request
Timing
Rename Group in Address Book
Interval
Rename Group in Person Documents
Execute once a day requests at
Rename Group in Access Control List
Interval
Rename Group in Reader / Author Fields
Start executing on
Start executing at
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Clicj here
&Arial
Triggered by:
Entering the "load runjava ISpy" command for the first time.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Creates a mail-in database record in the Domino Directory for the ISpy database.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arjal
Triggered by:
The server recognizing that the Protocol field does not contain correct information.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Jarried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Updates the Protocol field in the Notes Network Ports section of the Ports tab on the Server document.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:
The CATALOG.EXE server task determines that a catalog is designated as the Domain Catalog and then the task checks to see if the Domain-wide indexer setting is enabled in the Server document. If so, thj server task then determines whether the server is in the LocalDomainCatalogServer group and triggers the request if the server is not in the group.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
The server is added to the LocalDomainCatalogServer group and a verification is made to ensure that the Domain-wide indexer setting is enabled in the Server document.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:
Choosing "Add External Domain Network Information" or "Delete External Domain Information" from the Configuration tab in the Domino Administrator.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.e
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server documenz.
Result:
If you selected "Add External Domain Network Information" an External Domain Network Information document is created to allow connection with a server in another domain. The document is stored in the Domino Directory. If you selected "Delete External Network Information" the External Domain Network Information document and associated information are deleted.d
For information on the External Domain Network Information document, see "
Click here
Setting up external domain lookups
Click here
See Also
Click here
Administration process requestsR
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:t
The SMTPFullHostName field in the Server document not containing the server's DNS host name at server startup.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server djcument.
Result
: The server's DNS host name is placed in the "Fully qualified Internet host name" field on the Basics tab in the Server document.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Triggered by:
The CPU count value in the Server document is 0 or does not match the number of processes on the hardware. The discrepancy is determined when the server is powered up; it monitors the Server document, if it locates a discrepancy it posts a "Store Server CPU Count" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carries out:
According to the "Interval" setting in Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Updates the CPU Count field in the Basics section of the Server document.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Zou can synchronize information in a Resource Reservations database with the mail-in database records in the Domino Directory used by Calendaring and scheduling.
The following three actions generate resource reservation administration requests:
Adding a resource
Modifying a resource
Deleting a resource
44623916829246444
Add resource
Triggered by:
The Resource administrator performing a New Resjurce action in the Resource Reservations database.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Creates a mail-in database record for the resource.
44623916829246446
Approve resource delete
Triggered by:
Performing a "Delete Resource" action in the Resource Reservations database.
Jarried out on:
Any server.
Carried out:
According to administrator's approval.
Result:
If you approve the request, the administration process creates a "Remove Resource" administration request.
44623916829246445
Remove resource.
Triggered by:
Approval of the "Approve resource delete" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server of the Domino jirectory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Removes the mail-in database resource for the Resource from the Domino Directory.
44623916829246447
Modify room/resource in directory
Triggered by:
The resource manager performing an Edit Resource action in the Resource Reservation database.
Carried out on:s
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Modifies descriptive information about the resource in its mail-in database record in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Names=
name(s)
Description:
Specifies the names of the secondary Dominj Directories that Domino searches to verify recipient names in mail messages. By default, Domino searches only the primary Domino Directory, which is always named NAMES.NSF.
This NOTES.INI setting allows additional directories to be searched in the order in which they appear and stops searching when it finds a match in one of the databases. The file names can be up to 256 characters. Separate the list of directories with commas. Do not specify the NSF file extension.
The server djes not use this feature to look up additional Connection, Domain, or Server documents specified in additional directories. Ensure you create all of the necessary Connection, Domain, and Server documents in the primary Domino Directory.
Local secondary Domino Directories
To specify secondary Domino Directories that are replicated locally on the server, type the names of the directories without the NSF extension following the name of the primary Domino Directory; for example
NAMES= NAMES, EASTNAME, WESTNAME
Remote secondary Domino Directories
If secondary Domino Directories are not replicated locally, access them over the network by specifying server names in canonical format and their Domino Directories as follows:
servername
/OU=
organizational unit
organization
filename
Specify as many organizational units as necessary.
If the name of the remote server is flat, omit the canonical format, for example
NAMES=NAMES, serverwest!!NAMES
If a remote server contains multiple Domino Directories, for example a hub server, you can point to each directory on the server. To do this, you must repeat the server name for each directory, for example:
Use the Rename server command from the Domino Administrator to upgrade a sjrver from a flat server name to a hierarchical server name.
INISTRATION_REQU
tion Process\req
366299238429240797
Initiate rename in Address Book
Triggered by:
Performing an upgrade server to hierarchical in the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
The administratioj server for the Domino Administrator.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:@
A new certified public key is assigned to the server and the Certified Public Key field in the Server document is updated.
366299238429240798
Rename server in Address Book
Triggered by:
The server polls its server document data looking for*its new public key. The "Rename server in Address Book" administration request is triggered by the server recognizing that its name has changed.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Update the server's name in the Domino Directory. Posts a "Rename in Access Control List" requezt and a "Rename in Person documents" request.
366349238429240799
Rename in Access Control List
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename server in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
All servers with databases that have been assigned administration servers.
Carried out
: According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Resujt:
Updates the ACLs with the new server name.
366349238429240800
Rename in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename server in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the "Execute once a day request at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Zesult:
Updates the Person documents and posts a "Rename in Reader / Author fields" request.
366349238429240801
Rename in Reader / Author fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename in Person documents" request.
Carried out on:
All servers.
Carried out
: According to the "Start executing on" and "Start executing at" settings for the Administration Process in the Server documenz.
Result:
The Reader / Author fields are updated.
366349238429240802
Delete obsolete change requests
Requests are carried out only if change requests have expired according to the Name_Change_Expiration_Days setting in the NOTES.INI file.
Triggered by:
Expiration of the period in which other servers in the domain can recognize both the old name and the new name of the server. The default is 21 days, but*the administrator can set the Name_Change_Expiration_Days variable in the NOTES.INI file to a value between 7 and 60.
Carried out on:@
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the "Execute once a day request at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.o
Result:
The "Change Request" is deleted.
366349238429240803
Timing for upgrajing server to hierarchical
Request
Timing
Initiate Rename in Address Book
Interval
Rename Server in Address Book
Interval
Rename in Access Control List
Interval
Rename in Person Documents
Execute once a day requests at
Rename in Reader / Author Fields
Start executing on
Start executing at
Delete Obsolete Change Requests
Execute once a day requests at
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
Click here
Rename server - Cross domajn administration request
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
* New_DNParse=
value
Description:
Determines which method to use for parsing mail addresses. Domino 5.0 includes an enhanced address parsing method, to accommodate X.400 addresses. However, this may cause some incompatibility problems with earlier versions of Domino. To prevent this, Domino uses the old parsing method by default. You must set New_DNParse to 1 to instruct Domino to use the new method.i
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NewMailInterval=
minuteso
Description:
Defines how often (in minutes) Notes checks the user's inbox for new mail
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
UI equivalent:
File - Preferences - Notes Preferences - Mail - Check for new mail every
minutes
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NewMailTune=
path\file
Description:
Specifies the tune that plays when mail arrives. The file is a sound file, usually a .WAV file
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NNTPAddress=
IP address or fully qualified domain name
Description:
Specjfies the IP address (for example, 192.168.147.12) or fully qualified domain name (for example test.acme.com) of a NNTP server running on a partitioned server. To run a NNTP server on a partitioned server, you must add this setting.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Assigning separate IP addresses to partitioned servers
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NNTP_Delete_Days=
days
Description:
Specifies when inactive articles are deleted from newsgroups created by the NNTP server. This applies to newsgroups created automatically by the server through newsfeeds and to newsgroups created through the tell NNTP newgroup command. For example,
NNTP_Delete_Days=14
means that articles are deleted after two weeks of inactivity.
Applies to:
ServersN
Default:
None, although without this setting articles created by the NNTP server are deleted after 5 days of inactivity.n
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
NNTP_Delete_Days_Expired
Click here
Click here
Creating newsgzoups
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Archiving and deleting articles in newsgroupse
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NNTP_Delete_Days_Expired=
days
Description:
Specifies when articles marked as expired are deleted from newsgroups jreated by the NNTP server. This applies to newsgroups created automatically by the server through newsfeeds and to newsgroups created through the tell NNTP newgroup command. For example,
NNTP_Delete_Days_Expired=10
means that articles are deleted after being marked as expired for 10 days.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although without this setting articles marked as expired in newsgroups created by the NNTP server jre deleted after 5 days.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
NNTP_Delete_Days
Click here
Click here
Creating newsgroups
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Archiving and deleting articles in newsgroups
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NNTP_Initial_Feed_All=1
Description:
Specifies that the NNTP server transfers all articles when requesting or sending articles during an initial newsfeed. This setting does not apply to Accept newsfeeds.
Applies to:
ServersO
Default:
None, although without this setting an initial newsfeed transfers new articles posted within the past three days.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
NNTP_Initial_Feed_Days
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Setting up newsfeeds
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NNTP_Initial_Feed_Days=
days
Description:
Specifies the number of days in the past that jn NNTP server should use when requesting or sending articles during an initial newsfeed. For example, to request all articles on the remote NNTP server posted during the past week, specify
NNTP_Initial_Feed_Days=7
This setting does not apply to Accept newsfeeds.
Applies to:
Serversu
Default:
None, although without this setting an initial newsfeed transfers new articles posted within the past three days.
UI equivalent:
None.
See Also
Click here
NNTP_Initial_Feed_All
Click here
Click here
Setting up newsfeeds
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
With Domino R5, you can use the Administration Process to initiate and run'an administration request on one domain and then send that request to another specified domain for processing on that domain also. The administration requests detailed in this section are cross domain administration requests, that is, requests that can be processed across domains.
Delete Person - cross domain administration request
You can use the Administration Process to delete a person's name from the Domino Directory and then send that request to another dgmain to remove it from the Domino Directory in that domain.
212803600029249626
Delete person - outbound (source) domain
These requests are generated on the outbound domain when the user name on the outbound domain is a flat name and you have specified a non-immediate deletion.i
212803600029249627
Delete person in Address Book
Triggered by:
Choosing Actions - Delete Person in the Address Book (or clicking'Delete Person) and choosing to delay deletion of the name from the Domino Directory. You can also trigger this action by choosing Delete Person when viewing a Person document with the Web Administrator.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.C
Result:A
The Administration Process removes thg name from the Domino Directory, except from other people's Person documents, and posts the "Delete in Person documents" request. If you have created a "termination" group and set up the administration process to add deleted users to that group, the name is added to the "terminations" group. Mails the "Delete person in Address Book" administration request to the inbound domain.
212803600029249628
Delete in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completiog of a "Delete in person Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process removes the name from other people's Person documents in the Domino Directory.
208875171229249654
Delete in Accews Control Lists
Triggered by
: Choosing to immediately delete all occurrences of the name from the Domino Directory when initiating the Delete action or the completion of a "Delete in Address Book" request (if you chose to delay deletion of the name from the Domino Directory).
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document'
Result:
Each server in the domain deletes the name from the ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
212803600029249630
Get information for delete (only if deleting the mail file)
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Delete in Access Control List" request on the administration server for the Domino Directory (if you chose to immediately delete all occurrences of the name) or completion of the "Delete'in Address Book" request (if you chose to delay deleting the name from the Domino Directory). You must also have specified to delete the mail file in which you chose to delete the person.
Carried out on:
The deleted person's home server. u
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
The person's home server creates an "Approve file deletion" request which provides information about the mail file. This appears in the Pending Admingstrator Approval view of the Administration Requests database.
208875171229249655
Approve file deletion (only if deleting the mail file)
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Get information for delete" request.
Carried out on:
The server on which you approve the request.
Carried out
: When you manually approve or reject the request.
Result:
If you approve the rewuest, the Administration Process creates a "Request file deletion" request.
208875171229249656
Request file deletion (only if deleting the mail file)
Triggered by:
Approving the "Approve file deletion" request.6
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Posts a "Delete mail file" request.
208875171229249657
Delete in Reader / Author fields
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Delete in Access Control List" request on the administration server for the Domino Directory (if you chose to immediately delete occurrences of the name from the Domino Directory) or completion of a "Delete in Person documents" request (if you chose to delay deletion of the name from the Domino Directory).o
Carried out on:
Each server in the domagn.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" settings for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain deletes the name from Reader / Author fields of databases for which it is an administration server and that have the advanced ACL option "Modify all Reader / Author fields" selected. The server scans the databases for shared agents signed by the deleted person and for Private Design Elements (folders' views, agents) signed by the deleted person. Shared agents found are reported in the request's Response document. If Private Design Elements are found an "Approve deletion of Private Design Elements" administration request is posted.t
208875171229249658
Delete mail file (only if deleting the mail file)
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Request file deletion" request.
Carried out on:
The deleted person's home server. f
Carried out
: According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:a
The Administration Process verifies that the administrator who approved the deletion has at least Author with Delete documents access to the Domino Directory. Then, if the mail file doesn't use shared mail, the Administration Process deletes the file. If the file does use shared mail, then the Administration Process purges the links to tge shared mail database, disables replication, and creates a "Delete unlinked mail file" request.t
208875171229249659
Delete unlinked mail filec
Triggered by
: Completion of a "Delete mail file" request for a mail file that uses shared mail.
Carried out on:
The deleted person's home server.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval between purging mail file and deleting when using object stowe" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process deletes the mail file after waiting a period of time. This delay provides time for the Object Collect task to purge any obsolete messages.
208875171229249660
Approve deletion of Private Design Elements
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Delete in Readers/Authors field" request and locating Private Design Elements signed bw the deleted person in databases on that server.u
Carried out on:
Any server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the administrator's discretion.
Result:
The deletion is approved and the "Request to delete Private Design Elements" administration request is posted.a
208875171229249661
Request to delete Private Design Elements
Triggered by:t
The administratgr's approval of the "Approve deletion of Private Design Elements" administration request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Posts the "Delete Private Design Elements" administration request.
208875171229249662
Delete Private Design Elements
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Request to delete Prgvate Design Elements" administration request.
Carried out on:l
The server containing the database with the Private Design Elements.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Private Design Elements signed by the deleted person are removed from the databases.
Note
If the person requesting the delete acwion chose to delete all replicas of a mail file, then a "Get Information for deletion" request is created and processed by all servers in the domain. This request is posted after completion of the "Delete mail file" request or the "Delete unlinked mail file" request. For each replica of the mail file found on servers in the domain, the "Approve file deletion," "Request file deletion," and "Delete mail file" request sequence occurs again. .
212803600029249631
Delete person - ingound (destination) domain
These requests are generated on the inbound domain.
212803600029249632
Delete person in Address Book
Triggered by:
Receipt of a "Delete person in Address Book" administration request from the outbound domain.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Prgcess in the Server document.
Result:
Checks for the flat user name in the Domino Directory. If found, posts the "Approve delete person in Address Book" administration request. If not found, posts the "Delete in Access Control Lists" and the "Delete person in Person documents" administration requests.
212803600029249633
Approve delete person in Address Book (only if a matching flat user name is found)
Triggered by:
Cgmpletion of an inbound "Delete person in Address Book" request on a sent name.
Carried out on:
Any server on which you approve the request.
Carried out:
According to the administrator's discretion.
Result:
Post a "Delete person in Address Book" administration request.
212803600029249634
Delete person in Address Book (only if a matching flat user name is found)
Triggered by:
Administrator approving the "Approve delete person in Address Book" administration request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process removes the name from the Domino Directory, except from other people's Person documents, and posts'the "Delete in Person documents" request. If you have created a "termination" group and set up the administration process to add deleted users to that group, the name is added to the "terminations" group.
212803600029249635
Delete person in Person documents@
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Delete person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:@
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Garried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process removes the name from other people's Person documents in the Domino Directory.
212803600029249636
Delete in Access Control Lists
Triggered by
: Completion of the "Delete person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
Eacg server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain deletes the name from the ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
212803600029249637
Delete in Reader / Author fields
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Delete in Access Control List" request on the administration'server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" settings for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain deletes the name from Reader / Author fields of databases for which it is an administration server and that have the advanced ACL option "Modify all Reader / Author fields" selected. The server scags the databases for shared agents signed by the deleted person and for Private Design Elements (folders, views, agents) signed by the deleted person. Shared agents found are reported in the request's Response document. If Private Design Elements are found an "Approve deletion of Private Design Elements" administration request is posted.i
208875171229249663
Approve Deletion of Private Design Elements
Triggered by:
Completion of a "Delete in Readerw/Authors field" request and locating Private Design Elements signed by the deleted person in databases on that server.
Carried out on:
Any server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the administrator's discretion.
Result:
The deletion is approved and the "Request to delete Private Design Elements" administration request is posted.
208875171229249664
Request to Delete Private Design'Elements
Triggered by:
The administrator's approval of the "Approve deletion of Private Design Elements" administration request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Posts the "Delete Private Design Elements" administration request..
208875171229249665
Delete Private Design Elements
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Request to delete Private Design Elements" administration request.
Carried out on:
The server containing the database with the Private Design Elements.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Private Design Elements signed by the deleted person are removed from the databases.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
If you select Immediate processing, the outbound domain has the following subset of requests:
Delete in Access Control Listu
Get Information for deletion
Approve file deletioni
Delete in Reader / Author fields
Request File deletiont
Delete mail file
Approve deletion of Private Design Elements
Request to delete Private Gesign Elementsy
Delete Private Design Elements
If you select Immediate processing, the inbound domain has the following subset of requests.
The same as non-immediate requests
See Also
Click here
Delete person in Address Book
Click here
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
When a Delete Server administration request is initiated for a flat server name on the outbound (source) domain, "Approval" requests are generated on the inbound (destination) domain. For example, the "Approve delete server in Address Book" is an administration request that requires the administrator's approval, and would be generated on the inbound (destination) domain when a flat server is selected for deletion on the outbound (source) domain.
The flow of administwation requests documented here results when you are deleting a flat server from the outbound (source) domain, and you do not select Immediate processing.
212803600029249626
Delete server - outbound (source) domain
These administration requests are generated on the outbound (source) domain.
302272524829245089
Delete server in Address Books
Triggered by:
Initiating the Delete Server command from the Doming Administrator.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Posts a "Delete in Person document" request and a "Delete in Access Control List" request on the outbound server. It recognizes the cross domain configuration documents, checks for the approved signers, and then finging them, mails the request to the inbound domain.
302272524829245090
Delete in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Delete server in Address Book" administration request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:r
Posts a "Delete in Readers / Authors Fields" request. Removes references to the server from the Person document(s).
302272524829245091
Delete in Reader / Author Fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Delete in Person documents" request.
Carried out on:
All servers in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" setting in the Administration Procesw section of the Server document.
Result:
The server name is deleted from database documents where the "Delete in Reader / Author fields" checkbox is selected for the database.
302272524829245092
Delete in Access Control List
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Delete server in Address Book" administration request.
Carried out on:
All servers.
Carried out:
Acgording to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
The server name is removed from the ACLs in any database that has an administration server assigned to it.
302272524829245093
Delete server - inbound (destination) domain
These administration requests are generated on the inbound domain.
302272524829245094
Delete server in Address Book
Triggered by:
Successful completion of the "Delete server in Address Book" request on the outbound (source) domain.
Carried out on:
The administration server on the inbound domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Determines whether the server name is flat. If so, posts the "Approve delete server in Address Book" rewuest.
302272524829245095
Approve delete server in Address Book (if flat server name is found)
Triggered by:
Processing of the "Delete server in Address Book" command and recognition of a flat server.
Carried out on:
Any server on which the administrator approves the request.
Carried out:
According to the administrator's approval.
Result:
Posts a "Delete servew in Address Book" request on the destination server.
302272524829245096
Delete server in Address Book (if flat server name is found)
Triggered by:
Approval of the "Approve delete server in Address Book" administration request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Sewver document.
Result:
Posts "Delete in Access Control List" and "Delete in Person documents" administration requests on the destination server.
274433894429245438
Delete server in Person documents
Triggered by:
Successful completion the "Delete server in Address Book" administration request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried gut:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Posts a "Delete in Reader / Author Fields" administration request. Deletes all references to the server name in Person documents.
274433894429245439
Delete in Access Control Lists
Triggered by:
Successful completion of the "Delete server in Address Book" administration request.
Carried out on:
All servers.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:i
The server name is removed from the ACLs in any database that has an administration server assigned to it.
274433894429245440
Delete in Reader and Author Fields
Triggered by:
Successful completion of the "Delete gn Person documents" administration request.
Carried out on:
All servers in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Deletes the server name from database documents where the "delete in Reader / Author fields" checkbox is selected for the database.
5411705629249815
Delete server - cross domain'administration request
If you select Immediate processing, the outbound domain has the following subset of requests:
Delete in Access Control List
Delete in Reader / Author Fields
If you select Immediate processing, the inbound domain has the following subset of requests:
Delete server in Address Book
Approve delete server in Address Book (if a flat server name is found)
Delete server in Address Book
Delete in Access Control List
Delete in Reader / Author Fields
For details on the above processes, see the processes documented above.
See Also
Click here
Delete server name in Address Book
Click here
Click here
Delete Server - Hierarchical server name on the inbound (destination) domain
Click here
Click here
Administration progess requestsE
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NNTP_Previous_
servername
yymmdd hhmmsst
GMT
Description:
Displays the time and date of the previous newsfeed to or from the specified remote NNTP server, where:
is 0 for a Pull feed or 1 for a Push feed
servername
is the name of the remote server as specigied in the Destination server field in the News/NNTP Feed connection document for the corresponding newsfeed.
yymmdd hhmmss
GMT is the time and date of the previous newsfeed to or from this remote NNTP server. m
If the Domino NNTP server is running, you can reset a newsfeed by typing the following command:g
set config NNTP_Previous_
servername
Note that the equal sign (=) is required, there should be go space before it and nothing should follow it. For Pull-Push feeds, enter the command twice, once for the Pull feed and once for the Push.
If the server is not running, you can reset a newsfeed by removing the NOTES.INI line(s) that begin with the text "NNTP_Previous" and which correspond to the feed that you want to reset. For Pull-Push feeds, you must remove two NOTES.INI lines, one for the Pull feed and one for the Push.
Note
To reset a newsfeed,'we recommend using the server command tell NNTP reset A
servername
before using the method described above.
Applies to:
ServersP
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Setting up newsfeeds
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NNTP_Prohibit_NEWNEWS_Command=1
Description:
Prevents all remote NNTP servers from pulling new articles from your NNTP server. If this is set, any remote NNTP server or NNTP client that attempts to pull new articles from your server receives the error message "502 access restriction or permission denied."
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although without this setting remote NNTP servers can pull new articles from the NNTP server.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
The NNTP service
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NNTP_PullAsServer=1
Description:
Causes the NNTP server to pull news from remote NNTP servers without using reader mode.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although without this setting, the NNTP server pulls news from remote NNTP servers using reader modg.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Setting up newsfeeds
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
_@ hy<
"Q3@/
&Arial
This process flow occurs when you do not select the Immediate processes.
212863600029249626
Delete server - outbound (source) domain
These requests are generated on the outbound (source) domain.
274433894429245442
Delete server in Address Bookc
Triggered by:
Initiating the Delete Server command from the Domino Administrator.
Carried out on:t
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to {he "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
Posts a "Delete in Person document" request and a "Delete in Access Control List" request on the outbound server.
274433894429245443
Delete in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Delete server in Address Book" administration request.
Carried out on:e
The administration server for the+Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.n
Result:
Posts a "Delete in Readers and Authors Fields" request. Removes references to the server from the Person document(s).
274433894429245444
Delete in Access Control List_
Triggered by:_
Completion of the "Delete server in Address Book"+administration request.
Carried out on:
All servers in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
The server name is removed from the ACLs in any database that has an administration server assigned to it.
6950195229249839
Delete in Reader / Author fields
Triggered by:
Suckessful completion of the "Delete server in Address Book" administration request.
Carried out on:
All servers in the domain.
Carried out:
The time each server is set up to run that request.
Result:
Deletes the server name from database documents where the "delete in Reader / Author fields" checkbox is selected for the database.
274433894429245445
Delete server - inbound (destinatikn) domain
These requests are generated on the inbound domain.M
274433894429245446
Delete server in Address Book
Triggered by:
Receipt of the "Delete server in Address Book" request from the outbound domain.
Carried out on:n
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the [erver document.
Result:
Posts "Delete in Access Control List" and "Delete in Person documents" administration requests on the destination server.
274433894429245447
Delete in Access Control List
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Delete server in Address Book" administration request.
Carried out on:i
All servers in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Intkrval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
The server name is removed from the ACLs in any database that has an administration server assigned to it.
6950195229249840
Delete in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Delete server in Address Book" administration request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Posts a "Delete in Readers / Authors Fields" request. Removes references to the server from the Person document(s).
274433894429245448
Delete in Reader / Author fields
Triggered by:
Successful completion of the "Delete server in Address Book" administration+request.
Carried out on:
All servers in the domain.
Carried out:
The time each server is set up to run that request.
Result:
Deletes the server name from database documents where the "delete in Reader / Author fields" checkbox is selected for the database.
See Also
Click here
Delete server name in Address Book
Click here
Clkck here
Delete server - Flat server on the outbound (source) domain
Click here
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
You can use the Administration Process to rename (upgrade) a flat user name to a hierarchical user name, change the person's common name, or move a user to new organizational hierarchy.
274433894429245450
Rename person - outboukd (source) domain
The following requests are generated on the outbound (source) domain.
274433894429245451
Initiate rename in Address Book
Triggered by:
Selecting the person, and choosing People - Rename on the tools pane in the Domino Administrator, and then choosing Upgrade to Hierarchical.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
+According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Writes the Change Request and new public key to the Address Book.
274433894429245452
Rename person in Address Book
Triggered by::
Person accessing a server and accepting the new name.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates the person's name in the Domino Directory except in Person documents. Recognizes the Cross Domain Configuration Document and checks for appropriate signatures and access. Mails the request to the inbound domain. Posts the "Rename in Access Control List", "Rename in unread list", and the "Rename in Free Time database" requests.i
2744338944292454;3
Rename in Person documente
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.e
Result:
Updates the name in Domino Directory Person documents. Posts the "Rename in Reaker / Author Fields" administration request.
274433894429245454
Rename in Access Control List
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:l
Each server in the domain updktes the person's name in ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
274483894429245455
Rename in Free Time database
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The person's home server.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
The person's name is changed in the Calendaring and Scheduling Free Tkme Database. Posts the "Rename in Calendar entries and Profile" administration request.
274483894429245456
Rename in unread list
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Initiate rename in Address Book" request.n
Carried out on:m
Every server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Domino Directory.
Result:
If an Unread List is located for the old name, the Unread List is then stored with the person's new name.
274483894429245457
Rename person in calendar entries and profiles in mail filea
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Free Time Database" request.
Carried out on:e
The person's home server.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
The person's name is changed in their mail file's Calendar Profile and appointment documents. If the person's common name was changed and the common name is in the title of the mail file, the mail file title changes to reflect the new name. If the person is the "chairperson" of any future meetings, the name is changed in those appointment documents.
274483894429245458
Rename in Reader / Author fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the +Rename in Person documents" request on the administration server for the Domino Directory.@
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain updates the person's name in Reader / Author fields of databases for which it is an administration server and that have the advanced ACL optikn "modify all Reader / Author fields" selected.
401501526429248017
Rename person - Inbound (destination) domain
The following requests are generated on the inbound domain.
274483894429245460
Rename person in Address Book
Triggered by:
Receipt of the request from the outbound domain.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates the person's name in the Domino Directory except in Person documents. Posts a "Rename in Person document" request.
274483894429245461
Rename in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates the name in Domino Directory Person documents.
Rename in Access Control List
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
Each {erver in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain updates the person's name in ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
Rename in unread lists
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
Every skrver in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
If an Unread List for the old name is found in the database, a copy of the Unread List is stored with the new name. Each server in the domain examines every database on the server and updates the person's name in any unread lists.
Rename in Reader/Author fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename in Person documents" request on the administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain updates the person's name in Reader / Author fields of databases for which it is an admknistration server and that have the advanced ACL option "Modify all Reader / Author fields" selected.
See Also
Click here
Rename person
Click here
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
You can use the Administration Process to rename (upgrade) a flat server name to a hierarchical server name.
212863600029249626
Rename server - outbound+(source) domain
The following requests are generated on the outbound domain.
212863600029249627
Initiate rename in Address Book
Triggered by:
Performing an upgrade server to hierarchical in the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Administrator.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server kocument.
Result:
A new certified public key is assigned to the server and the Certified Public Key field in the Server document is updated.
212863600029249628
Rename server in Address Book
Triggered by:
The server polls its server document data looking for its new public key. The "Rename server in Address Book" administration request is triggered by the server recognizing that its name has changed.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Update the server's name in the Domino Directory. Posts a "Rename in Access Control List" request and a "Rename in Person documents" request. Mails the request to the inbound domain.
212863600029249630
Rename in Access Control+List
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename server in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
All servers with databases that have been assigned administration servers.e
Carried out
: According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:S
Each server in the domain updates the person's name in ACLs of databases for which it is an administration {erver.
208935171229249654
Rename in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename server in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the "Execute once a day request at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates the Person documents ank posts a "Rename in Reader / Author fields" request.
212863600029249633
Rename in Reader / Author fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename in Person documents" request.
Carried out on:
All servers.
Carried out
: According to the "Start executing on" and "Start executing at" settings for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Reaker / Author fields are updated.
212863600029249634
Rename server - inbound (destination) domain
The following requests are generated on the inbound domain.
212863600029249635
Rename server in Address Book
Triggered by:
Receipt of the request from the outbound domain.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino directory.
Carried out:
According to the "interval" setting in the Administration Process section of the Server document.
Result:
If a matching flat server name is located, posts the "Approve Rename in Address Book" administration request.
208935171229249654
Approve Rename in Address Book (if flat server name is found)
Triggered by:
Processing of the "Rename server in Address Book" request and recognition of a flat server.
Carried out on:
Any server on which you approve or reject the request.
Carried out:
According to the administrator's discretion.
Result:
Posts the "Rename in Address Book" administration request.
208935171229249655
Rename server in Address Book (If flat server name is found)
Triggered by:
Administrator's approval of the "Approve Rename in Address Book" administration reque{t.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Update the server's name in the Domino Directory. Posts a "Rename in Access Control List" request and a "Rename in Person documents" request.
212863600029249637
Rename in Access Control List
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename server in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
All servers with databases that have been assigned administration servers.
Carried out
: According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain updates the person's name in ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
208935171229249656
Rename in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename server in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out
: According to the "Execute once a day request at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates the Person documents and posts a "Rename in Rkader / Author fields" request.
212863600029249639
Rename in Reader / Author fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename in Person documents" request.
Carried out on:
All servers.
Carried out
: According to the "Start executing on" and "Start executing at" settings for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Reader / Author fields ark updated.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
Click here
Upgrade server to hierarchical
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NoDesignMenu=
value
Description:
Hides the Design menu on workstations.
0 - Shows the Design menu
1 - Hides the Design menu
Applies to;
Workstations
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, the Design menu appears
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NoExternalApps=
value
Description:
Protects against "mail bomb" viruses by disabling the foklowing workstation features:
OLE, DDE, DIP, @Command
@DBLookup, @DB Column (when using non
Notes drivers)
@MailSend, @DDExxx
Launching file attachments
Subscribe on a Macintosh workstation
Use the following values to set this variable:
0 - Enables the workstation features listed above
1 - Disables the workstation features listed above
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, these workstation features are enabled
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
No_Force_Activity_Logging=
value
Description:
Controls whether the Statlog task automatically enables activity logging on all databases:
0 - Allows automatic activity loggkng on all databases
1 - Prevents automatic activity logging on all databases
Even when activity is not being recorded for the database, the information is still recorded in the Activity entry of the Database Usage view in the server's log file.
Applies to:T
Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, the Statlog server task enables the Record Activity option for every database on the server and adds 64KB+to each database.
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NoMailMenu=
value
Description:
Hides the Mail menu. When set to 1, the Mail menu doesn't appear on workstations. This setting also sets the user's mail system to None.
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, the Notes Mail menu appears
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NoMsgCache=
value
Description:
Disables per-user message caching by the IMAP task. This can improve capacity (number of users) on a server by reducing memory consumption.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although if thks setting is omitted, IMAP per-user message caching will be enabled.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size=
value
Description:
Specifies the maximum size (in bytes) of the NSF buffer pool, a section of memory dedicated to buffering I/O transfers between Domino and disk storage. The maximum size depends on any limitations of the operating system, and the amount of system memory available. The mimim{m size is 4MB.
Note
You can also use NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size_MB to set the maximum size of the NSF buffer pool. This is the same as NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size, except it specifies the size in megabytes instead of bytes. Use NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size_MB to avoid the 2GB limitation that exists for NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size due to NOTES.INI variable limits. (NOTES.INI variables are signed variables, and cannot be larger than 2GB.)e
Applies to:
Workstatioks and servers
Default:
Determined automatically by the server or workstation. (This is strongly recommended, except on partitioned servers.) The more memory is available, the larger the server sets the default NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size. On workstations, the maximum setting of the NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size is 8MB (4MB for MAC). On the server, the default maximum is determined to be between 1/8 and 3/8 of available physical memory, depending on the overall size of physical memory. The dkfaults are not automatically adjusted on partitioned servers, so it will usually be necessary to adjust the maximum values in each partition to a fraction of memory such that the memory used by all partitions adds up to approximately 1/4 to 3/8 of memory.
UI equivalent:
None.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
NSF_DbCache_Disable=
value
Description:
Contrkls whether the database cache is enabled on a server. The database cache is enabled by default.
0 - Enables the database cache
1 - Disables the database cache
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
Nonef
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
No 'SendTo' field in document. Use 'Forward' on the 'Actions' menu instead.
You can create a database replica across domains using the Administration Rrocess by selecting a database and then choosing Database - Create Replica from the tools pane in the Domino Administrator.
21286360002924
grade server to
43178976029278566
Create replica - outbound (source) domain
The following request is generated on the outbound dombin.
43178976029278567
Check access for new replica creation
Triggered by:e
Initiating the Create Replica command from the Domino Administrator.
Carried out on:
The server on which you initiate the action.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:e
Checks for the appropriate Cross-domain Request Configuration documents and Connection documents. Sends the Create Replicb administration request to the destination domain.
43178976029278568
Create replica - inbound (destination) domain
The following request is generated on the inbound domain.
Triggered by:
Receipt of the Create replica administration request from the source domain.
Carried out on:m
The server designated as the destination server in the Cross-domain Request Configuration document.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
Creates the replica on the designated server.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Admin=
username
Description: @
Specifies the user name of the server administrator. Enter each part of the name in canonical format, separated by a slash(/), where:
CN is the common name
OU is the organization unit
O is the"organization
C is the country code
For example:
ADMIN=CN=John Smith/OU=Marketing/O=Acme
Applies to:
Server
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Administrators field in the Server document in the Domino Directory
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
AdminPInterval=
minutes
Description:
Specifies the interval cycle (in minutes) for when the Adminbstration Process carries out many types of requests. This setting corresponds to the Interval field in the Server Tasks/Administration Process tab of the Server document. The Administration Process looks in the Server document first, and if it does not find a value in the Interval field, refers to the NOTES.INI setting. t
Applies to:i
Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted (and no value is specified in the Server document), thb interval cycle is 60 minutes
UI equivalent:
Interval field in the Server Tasks/Administration Process tab of the Server document. This setting can also be set in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
,NYuXp
&Arial
Syntax:
AdminPModifyPersonDocumentsAt=time
Description
: Determines the hour at which the Administration Process modifies Person documents in the Domino Directory. This setting corresponds to the "Execute once a day tasks at" field in the Server Tasks/Administration Process tab of a Server document. The Administration Process looks in the Server document first, and if it does not find a value in this field, refers ro the NOTES.INI setting. You must specify the time in 24-hour format, for example, 0 represents 12 AM (midnight) and 23 represents 11 PM.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted (and no value is specified in the Server document), the Administration Process modifies Person documents at midnight.
UI equivalent:
The "Execute once a day requests at" field in the Administration Process tab"of the Server Tasks tab of a Server document. This setting can also be set in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
The Administration Process
Click here
,NYuXp
&Arial
Syntax:
Allow_Access=
names
Description:
Specifies servers, users, and groups that can access a server. You must specify a hierarchical name in hierarchical format, for example, Alice Jones/Acme. An asterisk represents everyone listed in the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a view name represents everyone listed in that view of the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a slash (/) and a hierarchical certifier's name represents everyone certified by that certifier.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Access Server field in the Security tab of tbe Server document in the Domino Directory. The Server document takes precedence over the NOTES.INI setting. Domino uses the Allow_Access setting only if the Access Server field is empty.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Allow_Access_
portname
names
Description:
Specifies servers, users, and groups that can access a server port. The
portname
parameter indicates the name of the port you enabled in the Port Setup dialog box and in the Server document. An asterisk represents everyone listed in the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a view name represents everyone listed in that view of the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a slash (/) and a hierarchical certifier's name represents everyone certified by that certifier. For example:
Allow_Access_lan3=*
All users listed in the Domino Directory can use tbe LAN3 port on this server.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None. You can use the Set Configuration command at the console to specify this setting.
See Also
Click here
Set Configuration
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Allor_Passthru_Access=
names
Description:
Specifies servers, users, and groups that can access this server using passthru. If you do not specify a name, no one can access this server using passthru. An asterisk represents everyone listed in the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a view name represents everyone listed in that view of the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a slash (/) and a hierarchical certifier's name represents everyone certified by that certbfier. For example:
Allow_Passthru_Access=*
All users listed in the Domino Directory can access this server using passthru.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Access this server field in the Passthru Use section of the Security tab of the Server document in the Domino Directory. If a conflict exists between the NOTES.INI setting and the server document, the Server documebt takes precedence.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a server as a passthru destinationd
Click here
Click here
Setting up a passthru server
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Allow_Passthru_Callers=
namest
Description:
Specifies servers, users, and groups that can instruct this server to esrablish a connection to call a destination server. If you do not enter a name, no calling is allowed. An asterisk represents everyone listed in the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a view name represents everyone listed in that view of the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a slash (/) and a hierarchical certifier's name represents everyone certified by that certifier.7
Applies to:9
Servers
Default:
None
UI equbvalent:
The Cause calling field in the Passthru Use section of the Security tab of the Server document. If a conflict exists between the NOTES.INI setting and the Server document, the Server document takes precedence.=
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Passthru servers and hunt groups
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Allow_Passthru_Clients=
names
Description:
Specifies servers, urers, and groups that can use a passthru server to connect to this server. If you do not specify a name, passthru is not allowed. An asterisk represents everyone listed in the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a view name represents everyone listed in that view of the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a slash and a hierarchical certifier's name represents everyone certified by that certifier.i
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Route through field in the Passthru Use section of the Security tab of the Server document. If a conflict exists between the NOTES.INI setting and the Server document, the Server document takes precedence.
See Also
Click here
Passthru servers and hunt groups
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Allow_Passthru_Targets=
names
Description:
Specifies the destination servers that this server can connect to using passthru. If you do not specify a name, this server can route to all servers.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Destinations allowed field in the Passthru Use section of the Security tab of the Server document. If a conflict exists between the NOTES.INI setting and the Server document, the Server document takes precedencb.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Passthru servers and hunt groups
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
AMgr_DisableMailLookup=
value
Description:
By default, a mail-triggered agent performs a mail lookup of the user who last modified it. It only runs if the server running the agent is also the user's mail servbr. When users create or modify a mail-triggered agent on a server other than their own mail server, you can use this setting on the server to disable mail lookup so that the agent can run. Notes displays the message for the user "Unable to determine the execution access privileges" if the mail server cannot be reached.
0 - Perform mail lookups when running mail-triggered agents
1 - Do not perform mail lookups when running mail-triggered agents
Applies to:
Servers and workstations
Default:
None. Without this setting, mail-triggered agents perform mail lookups.
UI equivalent:
None.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
AMgr_DocUpdateAgentMinInterval=
value
Description:
Specifies the minimum elapsed time, in minutes, between the execution of the same document update-triggered agentl
Applies to:
Servers and workstations
Default:
30
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
AMgr_DocUpdateEventDelay=
valuel
Description:
Specifies the delay time, in minutes, that the agent manager schedules a document update-triggered agent after a document update event
Applies to:
Servers and workstatbons
Default:
5x
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
AMgr_NewMailAgentMinInterval=
value
Description:
Specifies the minimum elapsed time, in minutes, between execution of the same new mail-triggered agent
Applies to:
Servers and workstations
Default:
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.n
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
AMgr_NewMailEventDelay=
valueu
Description:
Specifies the time (in minutes) that the Agent Manager delays before scheduling a new mail-triggered agent after new mail is delivered.t
Applies to:
Servers and workstatiobs
Default:
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
AMgr_SchedulingInterval=
value
Description:
Specifies a delay (in minutes) between running of the Agent Manager's scheduler. Valid values are 1 minute to 60 minutes.
Applies to:
Servers and workstations
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
136466192029250856
&Arial
Syntax:
AMgr_UntriggeredMailInterval=
value
Description:
Specifies a delay (in minutes) between running of the Agent Manager's check for untriggered mail. Valid values are 1 minute to 1440 minutes (the number of minutes in a day).
Applies to:
Servers and workstations
Default:
60
UI equivalent:
None
136466192029250856
136466192029250857
&Arial
Syntax:
AMgr_WeekendDays=
day1, day2, ...
Description:
When agents use the On Schedule trigger, the Run on Schedule options box is available and includes the Don't run on weekends check box option. When you select this option, the agent does not run on weekend days. The default value for weekend days is Saturday (7) and Sunday (1). You can specify any number of days, up to 7. For example:
AMgr_WeekendDays= 1,6,7
Causes agents that have the Don't run on weekends option checked not to run on Sundays, Hridays, and Saturdays.
Applies to:
Servers and workstations
Default:
7 (Saturday) and 1 (Sunday)
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
AppleTalkNameServer=
servername
Description:
Applies to AppleTalk users only. Identifies the name of the user's seconhary AppleTalk server. Consult your AppleTalk network documentation for more information.
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
File - Preferences - Notes Preferences - Ports. Select the AppleTalk port, and click Options to select or modify the server.
See Also
Click here
Adding and enabling network ports
Click here
Click here
Domino and AppleTalk
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
AutoLogoffMinutes=
minutes
Description:
Specifies the number of inactive minutes before a user is automatically logged off
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
File - Preferences - Notes Xreferences - Basics - Lock ID after
minutes of inactivity
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
BatchRegFile =
filename
Description:
Specifies the name of a batch registration file. If you add this variable, Domino does not prompt you for the filename when you import users from a text file
Applies to:
ServersO
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
BillingAddinOutput=
value
Description:
Specifies where Domino logs billing events. Use the following values to set this variable:
1 - Billing database (BILLING.NSF)
8 - Binary file (BILLING.NBF)
9 - Both the billing database and binary filee
Domino creates the BILLING.NSF database and/or the BILLING.NBF file xhe first time the billing add-in task is started with this option set.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Billing
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax: BillingAddinRuntime
seconds
Description:
Specifies how long the billing add-in task runs. For examplh, BillingAddinRuntime=30 specifies that the billing add-in will process billing records for 30 seconds. After 30 seconds the billing add-in stops processing records, even if there are additional records to be processed. The BillingAddinRuntime value must be less than the value you specify for the BillingAddinWakeup variable.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting hn the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.
See Also
Click here
Billing7
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax: BillingAddinWakeup
seconds
Description:
Specifies how often the billing add-in task runs. For example, BillingAddinWakeup=300 specifies that the billing add-in task wakes up every five minutes (300 seconds) to process the billing records in thh billing message queue. The BillingAddinWakeup value must be greater than the value you specify for BillingAddinRuntime.i
Applies to:
Servers
Default: a
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.
See Also
Click here
Billing
Click here
Hlick here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax: BillingClass
class(es)
Description:
Specifies one or more of six classes of billing activity:
Agent
Database
Document
HttpRequest
Mail
Replication
Session
The billing process tracks only the activities that you specify in the BillingClass variable. BillingSupprhssTime only applies to session and database billing.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.
See Also
Click here
Billing
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax: BillingSuppressTime
minutes
Description:
Specifies the frequency of record stamping during session and database activities if session and database activities are specified for the BillingClass variable. If you want billing data collected more frequently, shorten the default value of 15 minutes. To minimize the billing workload on your system, lengthen the value.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None, althouhh you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.s
See Also
Click here
Billingl
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
CDP_command=
value
Description:
The set of CDP settings control the opening, handling, and closing of applications using OLE. All HLE applications use these variables:
CDP_NEW
CDP_OPEN
CDP_EDIT
CDP_SAVE
CDP_CLOSE
CDP_SHOWITEM
CDP_SHOWACTIVEITEM
CDP_EXIT
All other applications use DIP and need to be hard-coded with separate lines. For normal usage, you should never need to modify CDP settings.
Applies to:l
Workstations and servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
CertificateExpChecked=ID_file date
Description:
Specifies the path for the local ID file and the last time the ID has been checked for certificates that have expired or are about to expire. A message is displayed on the user's screen for each such certificate found.l
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
The ID file path and last date checked for expiration.
UI equivalent:
None.
See Also
Click here
Certificates
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
CertifierIDFile=
path_ID_file
Description:
Specifies the path and ID file for the certifier ID. The
path
must contain the drive letter, nexwork drive, and directories.
ID_file
is the certifier ID file. For example:
CertifierIDFile=C:\NOTES\IDS\CERT.ID
CertifierIDFile=M:\NOTES\IDS\ACME.ID
Applies to:
Servers. The location of the certifier ID file is determined when you set up the server.
Default:
The path and file name that you specify when you set up the server
UI equivalent:
None
Xee Also
Click here
Certificates
Click here
Click here
Certifier IDs
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
COMnumber=
parameter1, parameter2, ...
Description:
Specifies information for modems connected to the ports you set in the Ports dialog box. You can define up to five ports (COM1 through COM5). These parametexs are valid:
Parameter
Specifies
Required?
driver
Driver name
unit_ID
Unit ID
max_sessions
Maximum humber of concurrent sessionsT
buffer_size
Size of buffer in kilobytes
flags
Flags, such as secured channel, log modem I/O, enable RTS/CTS, and so on
modem_speed
Modem speed
modem_volume
Modem volume and dialing mode
modem_filename
Name of the modem command file
dial_ timer
Connection timeout in seconds
hangup_timhout
Idle hang-up time in minutes
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Unless you are experienced with modems and ports, use the user-interface to configure ports.
Specifies the location of the Statistics and Events database (EVENTS5.NSF)
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
EVENTS5.NSF
UI equivalenx:
None
See Also
Click here
System Monitoring
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Console_Loglevel=
value
Description:
Controls the level of information displayed on the status bar when you trace a connection. The following values are possible:
0 - No information displayed
1 - Only errors are displayed
2 - Summary progress information is displayed
3 - Detailed progress information is displayed
4 - Full trace information is displayed
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Tracing network connections
Click here
Clhck here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Country_Language=
value
Description:
Specifies the language used for the Domino/Notes interface.
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
en-US (US English)
UI equivalent:
File - Preferences - Notes Preferences - International - Content Language dialog. You can also specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings documeht.
246615014429242612
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
O9b'y
&Arial
Syntax:
Create_File_Access=
names
Description:
Specifies users, servers, and groups that can create new databases on the server. You must specify a hierarchical name in hierarchical format, for example, Alice Jones/Acme. If you don't specify a name, all certified users can create files. An asterisk (*) represents everyone listed in the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a view name repxesents everyone listed in that view of the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a slash ( / ) and a hierarchical certifier's name represents everyone certified by that certifier.
Default:
None
Applies to:
Servers
UI equivalent:
The Create New Databases field in the Security tab of the Server document. The Server document takes precedence over the NOTES.INI setting. Domino uses the Create_File_Access setting onlx if the Create New Databases field is empty.i
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Create_Replica_Access=
names
Description:
Specifies the groups that can create replicas on the server. You must specify a hierarchical name in hierarchical format, for example, Alice Jones/Acme. If you don't specify a group, all certified users can create replicas. An asterisk (*) represents everyone listed in the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a view name represents everyonh listed in that view of the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a slash (/) and a hierarchical certifier's name represents everyone certified by that certifier.u
Default:
None
Applies to:a
Servers
UI equivalent:
The Create Replica Databases field in the Security tab of the Server document. Note that the Server document takes precedence over the NOTES.INI setting. Domino uses the Create_Replica_Access setting onhy if the Create Replica Databases field is empty.
See Also
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
CTF=
filename
Description:
Specifies the international import/export character set
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
L_CPWIN.CLS
UI equivalent:
File - Preferehces - Notes Preferences - International - Import/Export Character Set dialog
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
DDE_Timeout=
seconds
Description:
The amount of time (in seconds) Notes waits for another DDE application to respond to a DDE message
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
10 seconds
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Default_Index_Lifetime_Days=
number_of_days
Description:
Specifies a default lifetime for view indexes if none was selected by the database designer in the view properties box. If the index is inactive for the specified number of days, the Indexer task purges the index. For example:
Default_Index_Lifetime_Days=60
sets the lifetime of indexes to 60 days.
Default:
45 days
Applies to:
Servers
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Deny_Access=
names
Description:
Specifies servers, users, and groups that are denied access to the server. You must specify a hierarchical name in hierarchical format, for example, Alice Jones/Acme. An asterisk (() represents everyone listed in the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a view name represents everyone listed in that view of the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a slash (/) and a hierarchical certifier's name represents everyone certified by that certifier. The NOTES.INI Deny_Access setting overrides the NOTES.INI Allow_Access setting.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Not Access(Server field in the Security tab of the Server document. The Server document takes precedence over the NOTES.INI setting. Domino uses the Deny_Access setting only if the Not Access Server field is empty.
See Also
Click here
Allow_Access
Click here
Click here
Server access for Notes users and Domino servers
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Synthx
: NSF_DbCache_Maxentries=
value
Description:
Determines the number of databases that a server can hold in its database cache at one time, where
value
is the number of databases.
Increasing the database cache size can improve system performance but requires additional memory. The minimum number of databases allowed in the cache at one time is 25; the maximum is approximately 2000, depending on the server platform. e
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, the number of databases that the server can hold in its cache at one time is either 25, or the NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size value divided by 300K (whichever is greater).
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Deny_Access_
portname
nages
Description:
Specifies servers, users, and groups that are denied access to a specific server port. The
portname
parameter indicates the name of the port you enabled in the Port Setup dialog box and in the Server document. An asterisk (*) represents everyone listed in the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a view name represents everyone listed in that view of the Domino Directory. An asterisk followed by a slash and a hierarchical certifier's name wepresents everyone certified by that certifier. For example:
Deny_Access_SPX=Terminations
The users in the Terminations group cannot access the SPX port.e
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can use the Set Configuration command at the server console to specify this setting
See Also
Click here
Allow_Accews_portname
Click here
Click here
Set Configuration
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:e
Desktop=
location
Description:
Specifies the location of the DESKTOP.DSK file used to customize the Notes workspace. Without this setting in the NOTES.INI file, Notes uses the'DESKTOP.DSK file in the Notes data directory to determine how to display the Notes workspace. The following is a list of platform-specific uses for
location
For the Macintosh, Desktop specifies the path. For example:s
Desktop=Notes:Desktop
For Windows, Desktop specifies a drive letter, path, and file name. For example:
DESKTOP=C:\NOTES\DESKTOP.DSK
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, Notes uses DESKTOP.DSK in the Notes data directory
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
pi:C?
&Arial
Syntax:
Directory=
path
Description:
Specifies the data directory. This path is originally set during the Install program.
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
C:\NOTES\DATA, or the directory specified during the Install program
UI equivalent:
File - Tools - User Preferences - Basics - Local database folder
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Domain=
name
Description:
On a server, specifies the server's domain. On a workstation, specifies the domain of the user's mail server. This setting must contain at least one default name.
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
The domain specified during thg Setup program
UI equivalent:
On a server, the Domain Name field in the Basics tab of the Server document; on a workstation, the Domain field in the Mail tab in the user's Person document
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
DominoAsynchronizeAgents=
value
Description:
On a Web server, specifies whether agents triggered by browser clients can run at the sage time. Options are:
0 - Only run one agent at a time (serially)
1 - Run more than agent at the same time (asynchronously)
Applies to:
Browser clients
Default:
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
DominoNoDirLinks=
value
Description:
On a Web server, specifies whether browser users can use dirgctory links. Options are:
0 - Allow browser users to access directory links.
1 - Prevent browser users from accessing directory links
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
DST=
value
Description:
Specifies that a server or workstation observe daylight savings time:
0 - Do not observe daylight savings time
1 - Observe daylight savings time
When you select this option, the created/modified time for documents created or modified from the first Sunday in April through the last Sunday in October are time-stamped one hour later than the server's system time. This option lets you adjust for daylight savings time without changing the actual system time.
Applies to:
Servers and workstations
Default:
1 (observe daylight savings time)
UI equivalent:
On a workstation, Daylight savings time field in the Basics tab in the Advanced tab in the Location document; on a server, Daylight savings time field in the Server document.
Specifies when daylight savings time (DST) is observed. By default, the DST period is defined as the first Sunday in April to the last'Sunday in October. (This is the period during which DST is observed in the United States.) The variables
begin_month, begin_week,
and o
begin_day
define the month, week, and day, respectively, when DST begins. The variables
end_month, end_week,
and
end_day
define when DST ends. Months are 1 (January) through 12 (December); weeks are 1 through 4; days are 1 (Sunday) through 7 (Saturday). You can use negative numbers to specify the weeks, wgere -1 is the last week of the month, -2 is the second to last week, and so on. For example:i
DSTlaw=4 1 1 10 -1 1
Defines DST as beginning in April (4), on the first week (1), on Sunday (1); and ending in October (10), on the last week (-1), on Sunday (1).
Applies to:y
Servers and workstations
Default:
DSTlaw=4,1,1,10, -1,1 (The first Sunday in April to the last Sunday in October)s
UI equivalenw:
None
See Also
Click here
Click here
Click here
DST_Begin_Date
Click here
Click here
DST_End_Date
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
DST_Begin_Date=
date
Description:
date
is the date when daylight savings time will begin, specified in dd/mm/year format.
In most cases, this parameter is not necessary. Some regions of the world do not recognize the beginning of daylight savings time on the first Sunday in April. If your server is in a region where this is true, use this parameter to specify the exact date when DST begins. Use this setting along with DST_End_Date, which specifies when daylight savings time ends.
Applies to:n
Sewvers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, daylight savings time begins the first Sunday in Aprils
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Click here
Click here
DST_End_Date
Click here
Click here
DSTlaw
Click here
Click here
Editgng the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
DST_End_Date=
date
Description:
date
is the date when daylight savings time will end, specified in dd/mm/year format.
In most cases, this parameter is not necessary. Some regions of the world do not recognize the ending of daylight savings time as the last Sunday in October. If your server is in a region where this is true, use this parameter to specify the exact gate when DST will end. Use this setting along with DST_Begin_Date, which specifies when daylight savings time begins.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, daylight savings time ends the last Sunday in October
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Click here
Click here
DST_Gegin_Date
Click here
Click here
DSTlaw
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
EditExpnumber=
value1, value2, value3, value4, value5
Description:
Settings used for file exports done at the document level. These are valid values:
Parameter
Enter
value1
Program name and file type
value2
The following append options:
0 = No append option offered
1 = Append option offered through a dialog box
2 = Automatically write to a temporary file to avoid the 64K limit
value3
Name of the export routine called
value4
Not currently used
value5 - x
File extensions to automatically select a file type in the File Export dialog box
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.ING file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
EditImpnumber=
value1, value2, value3, value4, valug5
Description:
Settings used for file imports done at the document level. The following are valid values:
Parameter
/&6SU
Enter
value1
/&6SU
Program name and version
value2
/&6SU
Not used; always 0
value3
/&6SU
Name of the import routine called
value4
/&6SU
Not currently used
value5 - x
/&6SU
File extensions to automatically select a file type in the File Import dialog boxp
Applies to:
Workstationster title;Dhead
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing thg NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
EmptyTrash=
value
Description:
Specifies when and how the Trash folder will be purged of documents marked for deletion. Options are:
0 - Prompt the user before closing the database
1 - Always empty the Trash folder before closing the database
: Turns On/Off the support for BiDirectional Languages (Arabic, Hebrew).
0 - Turns BiDirectional support off
1 - Turns BiDirectional support on
Applies to
: Workstatigns
Default:
0 (off)
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ExtMgr_AddIns=
value1, value2, value3...
Description:
Defines the list of add-in files for the Extension Manager. Domino reads this variable on initialization and then appends a platform-identifying suffix character to each name. Domino then attempts'to load the library.
Platform
J&<8U
Character appended
Windows
J&<8U
_ (underscore)
Windows NT
J&<8U
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For example:
EXTMGR_ADDINS=logdll,amgrdll
In Windows, this statement instructs Domino to look for and load the files _LOGDLL.DLL and _AMGRDLL.DLL.
Applies to:
Sewvers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
FileDlgDirectory=
path
Description:
Specifies the default directory for all file searches. If you specify this setting, Domino looks only in the specified location.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, Domino searches the Domino data dirgctory
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Fixup_Tasks=
valuer
Description:
Specifies the maximum number of Fixup tasks that are created at server startup. A Fixup task performs a consistency check on any database that requires it. Server initialization continues while Fixup tasks run.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
Twice the number of CPUs on the system
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
FT_DOMAIN_IDXTHDS=
Description:
Specifies the number of indexing threads to use for Domain Search. Using more threads lets the Domain Catalog server index more files simultaneously, but requires more CPU utilization, and response to search queries may be slow.
With fewer indexing threads, search speeds up because of greater CPU availability, but changes are not reflectgd in the index as quickly.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, the default number of threads used is two per CPU. For example, a server with two CPUs uses four indexing threads by default when indexing. Do not exceed eight threads per server or you may degrade the performance of the server, even on servers with more than four CPUs.
UI equivalent:
None
See Alwo
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
FT_Intl_Setting=
value
Description:
Imposes several limitations on full text functionality to let Notes work properly with the Japanese language. When enabled (set to 1), this setting turns off stemming, makes all full text indexes case-sensitive, and ignores the setting for the stop word file.t
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:t
IMAILExactSize=
value
Description:
Specifies that the IMAP service report the exact size of a MIME message when requested by a client.
0 - The IMAP service estimates the message size
1 - The IMAP service reports the exact message size
By default, the IMAP service estimates the message size. This helps improve server performange. Set this to 1 only if clients require the exact size.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
IMAPAddress=
IP address or fully qualified domain name
Description:
Specifies the IP address (for example, 192.168.147.12) or fully qualified domain name (for example test.acme.com) of an IMAP server running on a partitioned server.'To run an IMAP server on a partitioned server, you must add this setting.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
IMAP_Config_Update_Interval=
value
Description:
Specifies in minutes how frequently the IMAP server checks for configuration changes made to the Domino Directory.
Applies to:
IMAP maig servers
Default:
None, although the update interval is 2 minutes if this setting is not included in NOTES.INI
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
"Validation and authentication for Internet/intranet clients."
Click here
Wee Also
Click here
Setting up Internet/intranet clients for anonymous access
Click here
" later in this chapter.
5. Click Accept.
See Also
Click here
Ways to recertify flat IDs
Click here
Click here
About communicating with organizations that use the flat namgng model
Click here
S+ me
S+ me
&Arial
Syntax:
IMAPGreeting=
greeting
Description:
Customizes the greeting the IMAP server sends to clients connecting over TCP/IP.
Applies to:
Serversi
Default:
None, although without the setting the following greeting is used:
* OK Domino IMAP4 Server V5.0 ready Mon, 10 May 1999 17:57:13 -0500
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Glick here
&Arial
Syntax:
IMAPRedirectSSLGreeting=
message
Description:
Customizes the message the IMAP server sends to clients attempting to connect over TCP/IP when the TCP/IP port is configured to Redirect to SSL.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although without the setting the following greeting is used:
IMAP Server configured for SSL Connections only. Please reconnect using the SSL Port
portnumber
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
IMAP_Session_Timeout=
minutesi
Description:
Specifies when the IMAP server drops idle IMAP client sessions. We recommend specifying a setting greater than ten minutes; many IMAP clients poll for new mail every ten minutes and the overhead of supporing idle session is less than the overhead required to support clients logging on and opening mailboxes.
Appliew to:
Servers
Default:
None, although without this setting, the server drops idle sessions after 30 minutes.i
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
.gK1s
&Arial
Syntax:t
IMAPSSLGreeting=
greeting
Description:
Customizes the greeting the IMAP server sends to clients connecting over SSL.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although without the setting the following greeting is used:
* OK Domino IMAP4 Server V4.6 ready Mon, 12 May 1997 17:57:13 -0500
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
InstallType=
value.
Description:
Identifies the type of Notes client installed, as follows:
0 = Designer License Type
1 = Administration License Type
2 = Designer and Administration License Type
This line is updated when you perform an incremental setup after installing Notes Release 5.
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click gere
&Arial
Syntax:g
ITASK_Print_Hostname=1
Description:
Specifies that tge NNTP server displays host names of connecting NNTP clients or servers for logging and status reporting rather than IP addresses.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although without this setting the NNTP server uses IP addresses for logging and status reporting; using IP addresses improves performance by avoiding the need to translate IP addresses to host names.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
KeyFilename=
location
Description:
Specifies the location of the server ID or the user ID file. This setting lets an administrator use one ID to run the server. On the following platforms,
location
specifies:
On Macintosh, the path. For example: KeyFilename=Notes:JForgo.ID
On UNIX, the path. For example: KeyFilename=/home/server1/notes/kbowker.id
On Windows, a drive letter, path, and file name. For example: GeyFileName=C:\Notes\DMccarrick.ID
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
The ID for the administrator that you specify when you set up the server
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
ServerKeyFileName
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:t
KillProcess=
value.
Description: D
Enables or disables the shutdown procedure that cleans up all processes related to a partitioned server in the event of an unplanned server shutdown. To perform the cleanup, the setting KillProcess=1 must be set in the server's NOTES.INI file prior to the startup of the first process.
Use the following values to set this variable:
0 - Disables shutdown procedure
1 - Enables shutdown procedure
Applies to:
Partitioned servers only
Default:
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
KitType=
value
Description:
Specifies which program you arg running:
1 - Workstation
2 - Server
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
Specified during the Install program. You can install the workstation, the server, or both the workstation and server. The value when you install the server and workstation on the same machine is 2.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTEW.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
LAN
number
port_driver, unit_ID, not_used, buffer_size
Description:
Specifies information about network ports on servers and workstations. For example:D
LAN0=spx, 1, , 2000
LAN1=netbios, 0, 15, 2000, , 12288
The LAN0 port is configured for an SPX network connection. The LAN1 port is configured for a NetBIOS connection and contains additional port setup information. Exclude the _ or g prefix and the .DLL extension from the port driver name.
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
Specified during the Install program
UI equivalent:
On a workstation, File - Preferences - Notes Preferences - Ports; on a server, the Ports tab in the Server documenti
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
LDAPAddress=
IP address or fully qualified domain name
Description:
Specgfies the IP address (for example, 192.168.147.12) or fully qualified domain name (for example test.acme.com) of an LDAP server running on a partitioned server. To run an LDAP server on a partitioned server, you must add this setting.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
LDAP_CountryGheck=
value
Description:
Allows the LDAP service to strictly define the directory tree structure of entries that don't include country attributes in their distinguished names, relative to entries that do include country attributes. This setting applies only when LDAP clients specify the country attribute of a distinguished name as a search base and also specify subtree as a search scope -- that is, when they search for all entries with names descended from a specific cowntry attribute.
1 = Strictly define directory tree location for entries without country attributes
0 (or setting omitted) = Do not strictly define directory tree location for entries without country attributes
For example, suppose you use LDAP_CountryCheck=1, and then given this search query:
Scope: subtree
Search base: c=us
Search filter: cn=*Alan*
the LDAP service will return an entry with the distinguished name gn=Alan Jones, o=Acme, c=US but not return an entry with the distinguished name cn=Alan Smith, o=Acme. If you omit the setting or specify a value of 0, the LDAP service will return both entries, given the same search query.
Note that even if you omit the setting or specify a value of 0, the LDAP service won't return an entry with the distinguished name cn=Alan Woods, o=Acme, c=CA given the search query above.
Enable this setting only if some entries in the Domino Directory incluge country components in their distinguished names, but others do not. If you enable this setting, Microsoft Outlook Express users who do not explicitly specify a search base may not see the search results they expect. This is because Outlook Express provides the country associated with the version of its software as a default search base when users don't specify one. If you use LDAP_CountryCheck=1 and Outlook Express clients use the default search base, the LDAP service returns only entries that have distigguished names that contain a country component that corresponds to the default search base. If your LDAP users are primarily Outlook Express users, you may not want to enable this setting. If your primary LDAP users are not Outlook Express users, we recommend enabling this setting.e
Applies to:t
Servers running the LDAP service
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Clgck here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
LDAP_Enforce_Schemg=1
Description:
Enforces schema checking for the LDAP service. If schema checking is enforced, the LDAP service only carries out LDAP add or modify operations if the information in the operations conform to the directory schema.O
Applies to:
Servers running the LDAP service
Default:
None, although without this setting, schema checking is not enforced.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Schema checking
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
LDAP_MailOnlyGroupOption=
value
Description:
Controls how the LDAP service responds to searches of groups assigned the type "Mail only," as follows:
0 (or setting omitted) = Return results for searches of "Mail only" groups only when the searches appear to be unrelated to authentication; if the search query suggests that the search is part of an authentication request, do not return results.
1 = Always return results for searches of "Mail only" groups
2 = Never return results for searches of "Mail only" groups
By default or if using the setting LDAP_MailOnlyGroupOption=0, the LDAP service doesn't return rgsults for searches of "Mail only" groups if all of the following is true:
A search query uses the equality filter objectclass=value, where value is one of these object classes: groupOfNames, groupOfUniqueNames, dominoGroup, or group.
A search query uses an equality filter with one of these attributes: member, uniqueMember, or members.
The two filters above are concatenated using the AND operator.
Since queries that meet all of the above criteria are typigally used for authentication, this default behavior helps to prevent the use of "Mail only" groups for authentication. By default, the LDAP service still returns results for "Mail only" groups when search queries are used that do not meet all of the above criteria.
For example, by default the LDAP service does not return results for "Mail only" groups if queries such as these are used:
Specifies the number of referrals that the LDAP server can return to LDAP clients. A referral is a URL to another LDAP server that may store the information being queried. By default the LDAP server can return only one referral to an LDAP client because Microsoft Inwernet Explorer clients fail if more than one referral is returned to them.r
Note
Modify this value only if you know that none of the LDAP clients connecting to the LDAP server are Internet Explorer clients.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although the without this setting the LDAP server returns a maximum of one referral.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
LDAP_Strict_RFC_Adherence=1
Description:
To conform with RFCs 2251 through 2254, use LDAP_Strict_RFC_Adherence=1 to require that LDAP users who bind to the LDAP service using name and password security use their fully qualified distinguished names as their LDAP client user names. A fully qualified distinguished name is derived from the first value in the FullName field -- labeled User name -- in a Person document. For example, if the first value in the FullName field is'Phyllis Spera/Sales/East/Acme, then the user name configured on the LDAP client must be cn=Phyllis Spera,ou=Sales,ou=East,o=Acme.
Without this setting, users who bind to the LDAP service using name and password security can use any unique name in the directory listed in the FullName field or ShortName field as their LDAP client user names.
Applies to:
Servers that run the LDAP service
Default:
None
UI equivalenw:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
LDAP_UTF8Results
Description:
Prevents the LDAP service from using UTF-8 character encoding when it returns results containing international characters to LDAP V2 clients. Use this setting to support LDAP V2 clients that don't use UTF-8. If you use LDAP_UTF8Results=0, then any LDAP V2 clients that use UTF-8 may sometimes be unable to receive results returned using international characters.
The GDAP service by default or with the LDAP_UTF8Results=1 setting uses UTF-8 character encoding when returning results with international characters to LDAP V2 clients. Although the LDAP V2 RFC doesn't support the use of UTF-8, this default behavior ensures that popular LDAP V2 clients that nevertheless use UTF-8, such as Netscape Communicator and EudoraPro 4.1, can operate successfully with the LDAP service.t
This setting has no effect on LDAP V3 clients; the LDAP service always use UTF-8 for LDAW V3 clients, for example Microsoft Outlook Express or Notes R5 clients.
Applies to:
Servers that run the LDAP service
Default:
None, although without this setting the LDAP service uses UTF-8 character encoding when returning results to LDAP V2 clients.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:S
Location=
location_name
Description:
Identifies'the user's current location
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
File - Mobile - Choose Current Location
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:e
Log=
logfilename, log_option, not_used, days, size
Description:
Specifies the contents of the log file and controls other logging actions:
Parameter
1&bSU
Valuet
logfilename
1&bSU
The log database file name, usually LOG.NSF
log_option
1&bSU
Log options:
1 = Log to the console
2 = Force database fixup when opening the log file
4 = Full document scan
not_used
1&bSU
Always set to zero; this parameter is not currently used
days
1&bSU
The number of gays to retain log documents
size
1&bSU
The size of log text in event documents
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For example:
Log=LOG.NSF,1,0,7,20000
The log file (LOG.NSF) is deleted in seven days and can contain up to 20,000 words. All log information is also sent to the console.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
Log=LOG.NSF,1,0,7,40000
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Log_AgentManager=
value
Description:
Specifies whether or not the start of agent execution is recorded in the log file and shown on the server console:
0 - Do not log agent execution events
1 - Log ggent execution events (partially and completely successful)
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI gile
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Log_DirCat=1
Description:
Logs the following information about the Directory Cataloger task to the Miscellaneous Events view of the log file (LOG.NSF):
When the Directory Cataloger starts
Which directories the Directory Cataloger runs on
When the Directory Cataloger finishes
Applies to:
Serversn
Default:
None, although without this setting the log file'only shows when the Directory Cataloger starts.
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ORBThreads=
number
Description:
Defines the number of threads used by the Object Request Broker (ORB) to execute requests.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
10
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
NSSy S
&Arial
You can rename a user with the Administration Process by choosing People - Rename from the tools pane of the Domino Administrator. The following flowchart shows the sequence of Administration Process requests that occur when you rename a person in the Domino Directory. (Boxes represent requests.) The timing shown for each request is the default, which you can customize through the Server Tasks - Administration Process section of the Server document.
Print_Se
113048860829240803
Move person's name in hierarchy
Triggered by:
Choosing Actions - Rename Person then Request Move to New Certifier in the Domino Directory or by choosing People - Rename from the tools pane of the Domino Administrator.
Carried out on:
The server from which you choose Actions - Complete Move.
Carried out:
When you choose Actions - Complete Move, in the Name Move Requests view of the Administration Requests database, to move a person's name to another hierarchy.
Result:
Approves the move and triggers the "Initiate rename in Address Book" request.
113048860829240804
Initiate rename in Address Book
Triggered by:
Choosing a rename action.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Adds the new name, certificate, and change request to the Person document. Prompts the person to accept the new name upon next server authentication.
113108860829240805
Rename person in Address Book
Triggered by:
Person accessing a server and accepting the new name.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Updates the person's name in the Domino Directory -- except for Person documents. Posts the "Rename in Person documents" and the "Rename person in Unread Lists" administration requests.
113108860829240806
Rename in Person documents
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:@
Updates the name in Domino Directory Person documents.
44623916829246443
Rename person in unread list
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.@
Result
: Each server in the domain examines every database on the server and updates the person's name in any unread lists.
113108860829240807
Rename in Access Control List
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Interval" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
Each server in the domain updates the person's name in ACLs of databases for which it is an administration server.
113108860829240808
Rename person in Free Time Database
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Address Book" request.
Carried out on:
The person's home server.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:@
The person's name is changed in the Calendaring and Scheduling Free Time Database.
113108860829240809
Rename person in calendar entries and profiles in mail file
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename person in Free Time Database" request.
Carried out on:
The person's home server.
Carried out:
Immediately
Result:
The person's name is changed in their mail file's Calendar Profile and appointment documents. If the person's common name was changed and the common name is in the title of the mail file, the mail file title changes to reflect the new name. If the person is the "chair person" of any future meetings, the name is changed in those appointment documents.
113108860829240810
Rename in Reader / Author Fields
Triggered by:
Completion of the "Rename in Person documents" request on the administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out on:
Each server in the domain.
Carried out:
According to the "Delayed Request" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:t
Each server in the domain updates the person's name in Reader / Author fields of databases for which it is an administration server and that have the advanced ACL option "Modify all Reader / Author fields" selected.
113108860829240811
Delete Obsolete Change Requests
Triggered by:
Expiration of the period in which a person can accept a new name, by default 21 days. When you rename the person, you can change the expiration period.
Carried out on:
The administration server for the Domino Directory.
Carried out:
According to the "Execute once a day requests at" setting for the Administration Process in the Server document.
Result:
The Administration Process deletes the word "Pending" from the Change Request field from the Person document.
113108860829240812
Timing for Rename a user request
Request
Timing
Move Person's Name in Hierarchyt
Requires administrator approval in Administration Requests databaser
Initiate Rename in Address Book
Interval
Rename Person in Address Book
Interval
Rename in Person Documents
Execute once a day requests at
Rename Person in Unread List
Execute once a day requests at
Rename in Access Control List
Interval
Rename Person in Free Time Database
Immediate
Rename Person in Calendar Entries and Profiles in Mail File
Immediate
Rename in Reader / Author Fields
Start Executing On
Start Executing At
Delete Obsolete Change Requests*
Execute once a day requests at
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* Before the Administration Process carries out a rename person request, the user whose name is being changed is prompted to accept the name change. If the user does not accept the name change within a specified period of time, or grace period, the name change request becomes an Obsolete Name Change and is entered in the Administration Requests database as a Delete Obsolete Name Change request.
See Also
Click here
Administration process requests
Click here
Click here
Rename person - Cross domain administration request
Click here
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
9. (Optional) Click Server and select a different registration server whose Domino Directory will store the cross-certificate. To store the cross-certificate in a user's Personal Address Book, choose Local as the server. Then click OK.
10. Click Cross Certify. Domino places the cross-certificate in the Server D
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
?AboutPrintNNTP_Initial_Fmed_All
Articles, newsgroup\amount for first newsfeedNNTP_Initial_Feed_All settingNOTES.INI settings\NNTP_Initial_Feed_AllNewsfeeds\articles during firstH_NNTP_INITIAL_FEED_ALL_7386_ABOUTTopic1NNTP_Initial_Feed_AllAboutH_NOTES_INI_SETTINGS_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
port or e
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
?AboutPrintNNTP_Initial_Feed_Days
Articles, newsgroup\amount for first newsfeedNNTP_Initial_Feed_Days settingNOTES.INI settings\NNTP_Initial_Feed_DaysNewsfeeds\articles during firstH_NNTP_INITIAL_FEED_DAYS_3305_ABOUTTopic1NNTP_Initial_Feed_DaysAboutH_NOTES_INI_SETTINGS_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
?AboutPrintNNTP_PullAsServer
NNTP_PullAsServer settingNOTES.INI settings\NNTP_PullAsServerNewsfeeds\pulling without reader modeReader mode\NNTP server andH_NNTP_PULLASSERVER_1564_ABOUTTopic1NNTP_PullAsServerAboutH_NOTES_INI_SETTINGS_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
t are cat
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
?AboutPrintPOP3_Config_Update_Interval
NOTES.INI settings\POP3_Config_Update_IntervalPOP3 server\partitioned server andPOP3_Config_Update_Interval settingPartitioned servers\POP3 servers andH_POP3_CONFIG_UPDATE_INTERVALTopic1POP3_Config_Update_IntervalAboutH_NOTES_INI_SETTINGS_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
1. Choose File - Preferences - User Prefernnces.
2. Enter the path to your new Notes data directory in the "Local database folder" box. (On the Macintosh, click Browse under "Notes data folder," select your new Data folder, and click Choose <Folder name>.)
342595376029222691
Notes
Your Notes data directory or Data folder on the Macintosh should contain local databas
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
You can add new hidden views and new visible views. However, new views might have an impact on the performance of both the Domino Directory and the server.i
187607017629230347
Default visible views
You can change any visible view that comes with the Domino Directoryp
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
?OverviewPrintWebAuth_AD_Group
Active Directory\searching groups inGroups\Active DirnctoryNOTES.INI settings\WebAuth_AD_GroupWebAuth_AD_Group settingH_WEBAUTH_AD_GROUP_6994_OVERTopic1WebAuth_AD_GroupOverviewH_NOTES_INI_SETTINGS_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System48 A~pendix E NOTES.INI File
You may want.to indent the first line of a paragraph, or an entire paragraph, as you are working directly with it to see what the indents look like in your paragraph.
1. Put the document in Edit mode.
2. Select the paragraph(s).
3. Choose View - Ruler.
4. On the ruler:
Drag the upper triangle pointer to where you want th
03 Administering the Domino System48 Appendix E NOTES.INI File
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
ChapPrintAppendix F
Server CommandsH_APPENDIX_B_SERVER_COMMANDSTopic1Appendix F
Server CommandsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
You can use server commands to perform all administration tasks. This appendix describes how to enter server commands and provides complete information on using each server command.
document
Click here
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?StepsPrintEntering server commands from the consoleH_ENTERING_SERVER_COMMANDS_FROM_THE_CONSOLE_STEPSTopic1Entering server commands from the consoleStepsH_ENTERING_SERVER_COMMANDS_AT_THE_CONSOLE
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?StepsPrintEntering server commands from the Domino Administrator
Domino Administrator\entering server commandsServer commands\entering from the Domino AdministratorH_ENTERING_SERVER_COMMANDS_FROM_THE_DOMINO_ADMINISTRATOR_STEPSTopic1Entering server commands from the Domino AlministratorStepsH_ENTERING_SERVER_COMMANDS_AT_THE_CONSOLE
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
graph Ali
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
StepsPrintRunning a batch file of console commands
Batch comlands\runningConsole\running batch commandsServer commands, batch\runningH_RUNNING_BATCH_CONSOLE_COMMANDS_9057_STEPSTopic1Running a batch file of console commandsSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix L Server Commands
StepsPrintUsing the Domino Character Console to access the server console
Commands\entering from the UNIX command lineConsole\accessing from UNIX platformsDomino Character ConsoleServer commands\entering from the UNIX command lineUNIX\accessing the server consolecconsolecconsole\command line switches forcconsole\commands forH_USING_THE_DOMINO_CHARACTER_CONSOLE_TO_ACCESS_THE_SERVER_CONSOLE_2549_STEPSTopic1Using the Domino Character Console to access the serve| consoleSteps
H_USING_THE_DOMINO_CHARACTER_CONSOLE_TO_ACCESS_THE_SERVER_CONSOLE_2549_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_120158956829232168=To start the cconsole programH_USING_THE_DOMINO_CHARACTER_CONSOLE_TO_ACCESS_THE_SERVER_CONSOLE_7735_DETAILS_MIDTOPIC_162934284829201363=Remote cconsoleH_USING_THE_DOMINO_CHARACTER_CONSOLE_TO_ACCESS_THE_SERVER_CONSOLE_7735_DETAILS_MIDTOPIC_162934284829201364=Additional cconsole commandsH_USING_THE_DOMINO_CHARACTER_CONSOLE_TO_ACCESS_THE_SERVER_CONSOLE_7735_DETAILS_MIDTOPIC_162934284<29201365=Command line switches
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
WWXXXYYYZZ
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintBroadcast
Broadcast command\describedCommands\BroadcastDominl Administrator\using the Broadcast command fromServer commands\BroadcastDIALOG 10428 507H_BROADCASTTopic1BroadcastAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
H_BROADCAST_MIDTOPIC_96086649629222300=To broadcast a message from the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
er text.
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintDrop
Commands\DropDomino Administrator\using Drop command fromDrop commandServer commands\DropH_DROPTopic1DropAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
H_DROP_MIDTOPIC_96086649629222300=To drop sessions from the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintExit
Broadcast command\using before shutting down the serverCommands\ExitDomino Administrator\shutting down the server fromExit commandServer commands\ExitH_EXITTopic1ExitAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
eck your
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintHelp
Commands\HelpHelp server commandSlrver commands\HelpH_HELPTopic1HelpAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
When you click inside a table column the ruler displays bars, which re
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintLoad
Commands\LoadDomino Administrator\using the Load command fromLoad server commandServer commands\LoadH_LOADTopic1LoadAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMAMDS
H_LOAD_MIDTOPIC_222513168029221296=To load a task from the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintPull
Commands\PullDomino Administrator\using the Replicate command fromPull server commandServer commands\PullH_PULL_Topic1PullAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
H_PULL__MIDTOPIC_96086649629222300=To replicate from the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
to a Mai
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintPush
Commands\PushPush server commandServer commands\PushH_PUSHTopic1PushAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
H_PUSH_MIDTOPIC_96086649629222300=To replicate from the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
field.
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintQuit
Commands\QuitQuit server commandServer commands\QuitH_QUIT_Topic1QuitAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ocument,
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintReplicate
Commands\ReplicateReplicate server commandServer commands\ReplicateH_REPLICATETopic1ReplicateAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
H_REPLICATE_MIDTOPIC_96146649629222300=To replicate from the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?OverviewPrintRestart Server
Broadcast command\using before restarting the serverCommands\RestartRestart se}ver commandServer commands\RestartH_RESTART_OVERTopic1Restart ServerOverviewH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ins two t
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintRoute
Commands\RouteDomino Administrator\using the Route command fromRoute server commandRoute server command\force routing of unscheduled mailServer commands\RouteH_ROUTETopic1RouteAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
H_ROUTE_MIDTOPIC_96146649629222300=To route mail from the Domino AdministratorDIALOG 10430 1001
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintSet Configuration
Commands\Set ConfigurationDomino Administrator\using the Set Configuration command inServer commands\Set ConfigurationSet ConfigurationH_SET_CONFIGURATIONTopic1Set ConfigurationAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintSet Secure
Commands\Set SecureConsole\password protectingDomino Administrator\pa}sword protecting the consolePasswords\changing at the consolePasswords\clearing from the consolePasswords\protection for consoleServer commands\Set SecureSet Secure commandDIALOG 10414 546;DIALOG 10413 551H_SET_SECURE_Topic1Set SecureAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
H_SET_SECURE__MIDTOPIC_96146649629222300=To secure the console from the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintShow Server
Commands\Show ServerDomino Administrator\u~ing the Show Server commandServer commands\Show ServerShow ServerShow Server\overviewH_SHOW_SERVERTopic1Show ServerAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 A~pendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintShow Stat
Commands\Show StatDomino Administrator\using the Show Stat commandServer commands\Show StatShow Stat command\describedH_SHOW_STATTopic1Show StatAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
this if th
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintShow Tasks
Commands\Show TasksDomino Administrator\using the Show Tasks commandServer commands\Show TasksShow TasksShow Tasks\overviewH_SHOW_TASKS_Topic1Show TasksAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
Sets an execution time limit for Web application agenrs invoked by the WebQueryOpen and WebQuerySave form events, and for agents invoked by the URL command "OpenAgent." It has no effect on scheduled agents or other types of server or workstation agents.
The value is the maximum number of seconds a Web application agent is allowed to run. If you enter 0 for the value, Web application agents can run indefinitely. The time limit refers to elapsed clock time, not the CPU time.
The purpose of the time limit is to prevent Web agents thar run indefinitely and use server resources. Do not rely on this mechanism for the routine shutdown of agents. When the server shuts down an offending agent, resources that the agent was using (such as disk files) may be left open.i
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
WebAuth_AD_Group=1
Description:
When a Domino Web server encounters a"group in a database ACL, this setting enables the server to search the group when the group is located in a Microsoft Active Directory to determine a Web user's database access. Without this setting or if the setting has 0 as a value, a Web server won't search groups in an Active Directory. In addition to using this setting, you must also set up the Directory Assistance database on the Web server and create a Directory Assistance document for the Active Directory server that is enabled for "Group expansion"" S
Applies to:
Web servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
Verifying membership in groups in an LDAP directoryI
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
WebAuth_Verbose_Trace=1
Description:
Enables a Domino Web server to record at the server console detailed information about rpecific Web user authentication sessions, for example: authentication success or failure; the group cache information used to verify Web users' membership in groups for database access control; the search filters used to find user and group entries in an LDAP directory.
Use this setting to troubleshoot problems with Web server user authentication and Web server group searches for database access verification. After you correct the problem, make sure to disable this setting -- remove it or set"it to 0 -- because using it slows Web server performance.
Applies to:
Web servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Window_Title=
text
Description:
Uses the specified text on the title bar
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
WinInfoboxPos=
value1, value2
Description:
Determines the position of the InfoBox
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
85, 193
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
WinSysFontnumber=
value1, value2, value3 O
Description:
All CGM metafiles contain numeric font identifiers 1 thrbugh
, where
is the maximum number of fonts in an optional CGM font face name table. When the font mapper is disabled, these lines list the installed Windows system fonts to which the CGM font numbers are mapped.
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
XPC_Console=
value
Description:
Displays the XPC console, which shows modem input/output (if logged).
1 - Displays the console
0 - Hides the console
Applies to:
Servers and workstations running Windows 95 or Windows NT
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INB file
Click here
&Arial
1. Double-click the Domino server icon if the server isn't running, or switch to the console.
Note
On a UNIX server, log into the server account, change to the server's Notes directory, and enter
server
2. Press ENTER to display the console prompt (>).
3. Enter a server command.
If a command parameter contains a space, enclose it in quotation marks -- for example:
Pull""Acme Server"
To save time and space at the command line, enter the abbreviation for the server command. You can also press the Up arrow to display a command that you previously entered.
4. (Optional) Use these key combinations, as necessary:1
Press CTRL+Q or PAUSE to stop the screen display and suspend access to the server and events in process.
Press CTRL+R to resume display and access to the server.
Press CTRL+R (or ENTER) to restore a command line. For example, you might restore a command line if an on-screen event splits it or if it disappears while you're typing.
&Arial
1. Make sure you're listed individually or as a member of a group in the Administrators field in the Server document for the remote server.a
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
3. Click Console.
Note
You cannot change any font properties for the Domino Administrator server console.
4. Do one of the following:
Enter a command at the command prompt.
Click Commands, and then select a command.
Choose the command from the list, and then send or modify it. The Server console command field in the remote console dialog box maintains a log of the previous ten valid commands you entered.
5. If appropriate, enter arguments for the command.
A command can contain up to 255 characters. If a command argument contains"a space, enclose it in quotation marks. For example:
PULL "Acme Server"
6. Press ENTER.o
7. (Optional) Do any of the following, as necessary:
Click Live to display events as they happen on the remote server.
Click Pause to pause output from the remote server.
Click Stop to stop events as they happen on the screen.
&Arial
You can run several cobsole commands at once from the server console. The syntax for the command is:
batchfilename
1. In the data directory, create a plain text file -- for example, COMMANDS.TXT -- containing a list of server commands you want to run; enter each command on a separate line.s
2. At the server console, enter:
< COMMANDS.TXT
If you create the .TXT file in a directory other than \data, include the entire path with the file name when you irsue the command.e
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Character Console (the cconsole program) provides a way to access the server console from tbe command line. This feature is supported only for UNIX platforms.
You can invoke the cconsole program multiple times. You can also run the cconsole program when there is already an operational Domino server console; however, the cconsole input and output may also reflect commands launched from other console processes.
Note
The cconsole program is installed into your Notes bin directory.
120158956829232168
To start the cbonsole programn
1. To use cconsole, you must be listed as an Administrator in the name and address book server document.
2. Change the active directory to your data directory. For example, enter:
cd ~/notes/datam
3. Enter the cconsole command. For example, enter:
/opt/lotus/bin/cconsole
4. Enter the path and file name of your Notes user ID.
5. Enter the password for your Notes user ID.
6. Tb exit cconsole, type:
done
162934284829201363
Remote cconsolel
The cconsole program doesn't start if the Domino server isn't running on the same machine as the cconsole program. If the server fails while cconsole is running, cconsole may not automatically shut down. In this case, enter the "done" command to exit the cconsole program. u
To run cconsole from a remote machine, first telnet to the machine running the Domino server.r
Note
There is a security risk when running the cconsole program from a remote machine or from a remote X display. The cconsole program warns you of this security risk before proceeding. Deploy a secure remote protocol -- such as encrypted telnet. To address this security risk, if you don't deploy a secure remote protocol, run the cconsole program only from the local Domino server machine.
162934284829201364
Additional cconsole commands
In addition to the current set of Domino server console commands, cconsole also supports these commands:
Command
Result
done
Exits cconsole while the Domino server continues to run
live on
Enables cconsole as a live console so that you see messages sent to the server console from other sources
live off
Disables the live console so that you see only the combands entered and the responses to these commands
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
162934284829201365
Command line switches
There are several command line switches that streamline using cconsole. You type the switches when you start cconsole.
Switch
Result
Lets you enter the path and file name for the Notes user ID when you start cconsole so that you aren't requireb to respond to the promptsb
Lets you ignore warnings; warnings continue to appear on the console, but you won't be required to respond to them
Lets you automatically start that console live when you start cconsole
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For example, if you don't want to rait for the prompt to enter the path and file name for the Notes user ID, enter this command:
Sends a message to specified users or to all users of this server. Use this command to warn users when a server is brought down for maintenance. The message you enter appears in the user's status bar.
Examples:
Broadcast "Server ACME will be down in 10 minutes" -- Sends a warning message about impending maintenance on server ACME to all users on this server
96086649629222300
To broadcast a message from the Domino Administrator
You can send messages directly from the Server - Status tab in the Domino Administrator.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. (Optional) Select the users to whom you want to send the message in the bottom pane of the Server - Status tab.
3. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Users - Broadcast.
4. Complete these fields, and then click OK:
Field
Enter
Message
The text of the message you want to send.
To re-send a message you already sent, click the down arrow and select the message you want.
Choose one:
"Selected users only" to send the message to the users you selected in the bottom pane of the Server - Status tab.
"All connected users" to send the message to all users with active sessions on the Domino server.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Exit
Click here
Click here
Quit
Click here
Click here
Restart Server
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:i
Dbcache flush
Description:
Closes all databases that are currently open in the database cache. Use"this command to maintain databases in the cache -- for example, to back up or restore the databases.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
username
Description:
Closes one or more server sessions. To visually confirm which sessions are bropped, you must enter the Log_Sessions=1 setting in the server's NOTES.INI file.
Examples:
Drop "Sandy" -- Closes the current session running under the user name Sandy
Drop "Lee" "Fran" -- Closes the sessions running under the user names Lee and Fran
Drop All -- Closes all server sessions
96086649629222300
To drop sessions from the Domino Administrator
You can drop sessions directly from the Server - Sratus tab in the Domino Administrator.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. (Optional) Select the users whose sessions you want to drop in the bottom pane of the Server - Status tab.
3. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Users - Drop.
See Also
Click here
Log_Sessions
Click here
Click here
Entering"server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Description:
Stops the server. This command is identical to Quit.
Before you use Exit to stop the server, use the Broadcast server command to warn users so they can finish their current tasks before you stop the server.
If you stop a server while it's replicating databases or routing mail, these tasks resrme at the next scheduled interval after you restart the server. Replication or mail routing continues until the databases are fully replicated and until the complete mail message is transferred or returned to sender.e
You can also stop the server from the Domino Administrator. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab, and then click Server - Quit.
See Also
Click here
Entering server cobmands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Broadcast
Click here
Click here
Quit
Click here
Click here
Restart Server
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Description:
Displayr a list of server commands with a brief description, arguments (if any), and the proper syntax for each.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
oad
programname
Description:
Loads and starts a specified server task or program on the server. Rou can start a server add-in program or one that takes a command line for additional data, such as a backup program. The program you run must be on the server's search path.
Use the Load command to run a program until it completes or, if the program runs continually, until you stop the server. Where applicable, you can include arguments that determine how the program runs.
Examples:
Load Fixup -- Loads and runs the Fixup server task
Lobd Object Info OBJECT.NSF -- Loads and runs the Shared Mail Manager and passes along arguments that execute the Info task
222513168029221296
To load a task from the Domino Administrator
You can load a task directly from the Server - Status tab in the Domino Administrator.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Task - Start.
3.
Under "Start new Domino server task," select the task you want to load.
4. (Optional) Uncheck "Show advanced options" if you do not want to specify advanced options. The box is checked by default for tasks which do have additional options.
5. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
The Domino server log (LOG.NSF)
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Log_Update=
value
Description:
Specifies the level of detail of Indexer events displayed at the server consobe and in the log file:
0 - Records when the Indexer starts and shuts down.
1 - Records when the Indexer starts and shuts down and when the Indexer updates views and full text indexes for specific databases.m
2 - Records when the Indexer starts and shuts down and when the Indexer updates views and full text indexes for specific databases. Also records the names of views the Indexer is updating.s
Forces a one-way replication from the specified server to your server. You can also replicate a single database from the specified server to your server by including the database name on the command line. The initiating server receives data from the named server, but doesn't request that the othe} server pull data from it. This forces a server to replicate immediately with the initiating server, overriding any replication scheduled in the Domino Directory. Enter the server's full hierarchical name, if applicable.a
You can pull changes immediately if an important database, such as the Domino Directory, has changed or if a database on your server is corrupted or has been deleted.
For replication to succeed, make sure that:
The Domino Directory contains a Server-document for each server in the domain.
The Domino Directory contains a Connection document to connect to a remote server.
Each server's ID file contains a certificate that the other server recognizes and trusts.
Database ACLs allow replication, and the source server has sufficient access in the ACLs to replicate changes. If you're using server access lists, servers must have proper access in the Serve document.
If the server is currently replicating, Domino queues the Pull server command until the current task completes.
To check the status of the Replicator before using Pull, enter this command at the console:
Show Tasks
The server displays one of the following messages:
If the server isn't replicating, the word "Idle" appears next to the Replicator task.
If the server is replicating, a message such as "Replicating CONTRACT.NSF from MARKETING\CONTRACT.NSF" appears.
Mxample:
Pull Marketing\Acme -- Forces one-way replication with the server Marketing.
Pull Marketing\Acme NAMES.NSF -- Forces one-way replication of the NAMES.NSF file from the server Marketing.
96086649629222300
To replicate from the Domino Administrator
You can replicate directly from the Server - Status tab in the Domino Administrator.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. Im necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Servers - Replicate.
3. Under "Replicate with server," enter the name of the server to replicate with, or select the server name from the list.
4. For "Replicate type," choose Pull.
5. (Optional) Click "Select database" to select a specific database to replicate. The default is to replicate all databases that both servers have in common.
6. Click Replicate.
Sem Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Push
Click here
Click here
Replicate
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
servername [dmtabasename]
Description:
Forces a one-way replication from your server to the specified server. You can also replicate a single database from your server to the specified server by including the database name on the command line. The initiating server sends data to the named server, but doesn't request data in return. This forces a server to replicate immediately with the initiating server, overriding any replication scheduled in the Domino Directory. Specify the server's full mierarchical name, if applicable.@
In effect, the Push server command is the functional opposite of the i
Click here
Pull server command
Click here
Examples:
Push Marketing\Acme -- Forces one-way replication with the server Marketing.
Push Marketing\Acme NAMES.NSF -- Forces one-way replication of the NAMES.NSF file to the server Marketing.
96086649629222300
To replicate-from the Domino Administrator
You can replicate directly from the Server - Status tab in the Domino Administrator. s
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Servers - Replicate.
3. Under "Replicate with server," enter the name of the server to replicate with, or select the server name from the list.
4. For "Replicate type," choose Push.
5. (Optional) Click "Select database" to select a specific database to replicate. The default is to replicate all databases that both servers have in common.c
6. Click Replicate.n
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Pull
Click here
Click here
Replicate
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
uitC
Description:
Stops the server. This command is identical to the Exit server command. However, the Quit server command differs from the Tell server command, which you use to stop a particular server task without stopping the server.
If you stop a server while it's replicating databases or routing mail, tmese tasks resume at the next scheduled interval after you restart the server. Replication or mail routing continues until the databases are fully replicated and until the complete mail message is transferred or returned to the sender.o
Before you use the Quit server command to stop the server, use the Broadcast server command to warn users to finish their current tasks before you stop the server.a
You can also stop the server from the Domino Adminmstrator. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab. From the tool bar, click Servers - Quit.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Broadcastt
Click here
Click here
Exit
Click here
Click here
Restart Server
Click here
Click here
Tell
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:n
licate
servername [databasename]
Description:
Forces replication between two servers (the server where you enter this command and the server you specify). Use the server's full hierarchical name. If the server name is more than one word, enclose the entire name in quotes. To force replication of a particular database that the servers have in common, specify the database name after the server name. The initiating server (where you're currently working) first pulls cmanges from the other server, and then gives the other server the opportunity to pull changes from it. You can use this command to distribute changes quickly or to troubleshoot a replication or communication problem.
Note
The existing replication schedule between the servers determines how the second server responds to this command. If this replication falls within the timeframe that the second server replicates with the initiating server (based on calling schedules-and the repeat interval), the second server pulls changes. Otherwise, it waits for the next scheduled replication time.
If the server is already replicating when you issue the command, Domino queues the command until the current replication ends. To check the status of the Replicator, enter this command at the console:
Show Tasks
The server displays one of the following messages:
If the server isn't replicating, the word "Idle" appears next to the Replica}or program.
If the server is replicating, a status line, such as "Replicating CONTRACT.NSF from MARKETING\CONTRACT.NSF," appears.
To optimize resources Domino only replicates what is necessary. For example, if the servers recently replicated and no changes have since been made to any databases on either server, the servers don't replicate when you enter a Replicate command. Also, the replication is two-way only if databases on d
both
servers changed since the las} replication. If databases on only one of the servers changed, the replication is one
way.
To force replication in only one direction, use the Pull or Push server commands.
Examples:
Replicate Marketing\Acme -- Initiates replication between your server and the Marketing/Acme server. The server console displays messages indicating when replication begins.
Replicate Marketing\Acme NAMES.NSF -- Initiates replication of NAMES.NSF between your servmr and the Marketing\Acme.
96146649629222300
To replicate from the Domino Administrator
You can replicate directly from the Server - Status tab in the Domino Administrator.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Servers - Replicate.
3. Under "Replicate with server," enter the server you want to replicate with, or select the-server you want from the drop-down list.
4. Complete these fields and then click Replicate:
Field
Enter
Replicate type
Choose one:"
Push Pull
Push
Pull
Select databases
Select the specific database to replicate; the default is to replicate all databases the servers have in common.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server mommands
Click here
Click here
Pull
Click here
Click here
Push
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Restart Server
Description:
Stops the server and then restarts the server after a brief delay.
If you stop a server while it's replicating databases or routing mail, these tasks resume at the next scheduled interval after you restart the server. Replimation or mail routing continues until the databases are fully replicated and until the complete mail message is transferred or returned to the sender.
Before you use Restart Server to stop the server, use the Broadcast server command to warn users to finish their current tasks before you stop the server.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commanms
Click here
Click here
Broadcast
Click here
Click here
Exit
Click here
Click here
Quit
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:d
utes
servername
Description:
Initiates mail routing with a specific server. The Route command overrides any mail routing schedules that you create in the Connection documents in the Domino Directory. Use the Route command for servers that are configured for Pull, Pull Push, Push, or Push Wait routing in the Connection document. Use the server's full hierarchical name, if applicable. If the server name is more than one word, enclose the entire name in quotes.
Use the Route command to troubleshoot mail problems and to send mail to or request mail from a server immediately.
If no mail is queued for routing, Domino ignores the Route command. To check which servers have mail queued, enter this command at the console:
Tell Router Show
Examples:
Route Marketing\Acme -- Sends mail to the Marketing server in the Acme domain. The server console displays messages indicating when routing begins.
96146649629222300
To route mail from the Domino Administrator
You can route mail directly from the Server - Status tab in the Domino Administrator.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Server - Route Mail.t
3. Under "Route with server," enter the name of the server you want to route mail to, or select the name of the server from the list.
4. Click Route.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Tools for troubleshooting mail routing
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
onfiguration
setting
Description:
Adds or changes a setting in the NO]ES.INI file.
Tipn
You can also use the Domino Administrator to add or change many settings in the NOTES.INI file. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configurations tab. u
Set Configuration Names = Names,Westnames -- Sets the NOTES.INI Names setting to specify that Domino search both the Names and the Westnames Domino Directories.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Clicm here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Show Configuration
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
cure u
currentpassword
Description:
Password-protects the console.S
After you }assword-protect the console, you can't use the Load, Tell, Exit, Quit, and Set Configuration server commands or other programs that aren't run automatically through Program documents in the Domino Directory or through the NOTES.INI file until you enter the password. Console security remains in effect until you clear the password by entering a second Set Secure command with the same password.
Even if the console is password-protected, keep the server physically secure to prevent breaches of semurity at the operating system level.a
Examples:
Set Secure abracadabra -- Password-protects the console if no password is currently in effect. In this case, the new password is "abracadabra."
Set Secure abracadabra sesame -- Changes the existing password "abracadabra" to "sesame."
Set Secure abracadabra -- If the console is already protected by a password -- in this case "abracadabra" -- entering a second Set Secure command with the same passwo}d clears the password..
96146649629222300
To secure the console from the Domino Administrator
You can secure the console directly from the Server - Status tab in the Domino Administrator.s
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and click Server - Secure console.
3. Do one of the following:
To set a password, select "Set" at tme bottom of the box, then complete these fields, and click OK:
Field
Entert
Password
The password you want to set
Verify
The same password, again
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
]o clear a password, select "Clear" at the bottom of the box, then under "Password," enter the password and click OK.
To change a password, select "Change" at the bottom of the box, then under "Password," enter the old password and click OK. Then complete these fields, and click OK:
Field
8'YLU
Enter
Password
8'YLU
The new password you want to set
Verify
8'YLU
The same, new password, again
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
atistics
statisticname
Description:
Resets a statistic that is cumulative.
Statisticname
is a required parameter that names the statistic to be reset. You can't use wildcards (*) with this argument.
Example:
Set Stat Server.Trans.Total -- Resets the Server.Trans.Total statistic to 0
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Clmck here
Click here
Viewing statistics reports
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Show Allports
Description:
Displays the configuration for all enabled and disabled ports on the server.
Example:
The following example shows the output that appears on the server console when you issue the Show Allports command.
Show Allports
Enabled Ports:
TCPIP=TCP,0,15,0,,12288,
COM1=XPC,1,15,0,,12292,57600,,zoomv34.mdm,60,15
Disabled Ports:
SPX=NWSPX, 0, 15, 0
VINES=VINES, 0, 15, 0
COM2=XPC,2,15,0,
COM3=XPC,3,15,0,
COM4=XPC,4,15,0,
COM5=XPC,5,15,0,
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Momino server commands
Click here
Click here
Show Port
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Show Cluster
Description:
Displays the local server's cluster name cache, which includes a list of all cluster members and their status, based on information received during the server's cluster probes.e
Example:
This example displays the cluste} name cache of the Mars server, which is in the Planets cluster , which is in the Solarsys domain.
Show Cluster
Cluster Information
Cluster name: planets/solarsys, Server name: mars/solarsys
Server cluster probe timeout: 1 minute(s)
Server cluster probe count: 2604
Server cluster probe port: NetBEUI
Server availability threshold: 10
Server availability index: 98 (state: AVAILABLE)
Cluste} members (2)...
server: mars/solarsys, availability index: 98
server: saturn/solarsys, availability index: BUSY
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
nfiguration
setting
Description:
Displays the current value for a NOTES.INI setting. Use the Show Configuration and Set Monfiguration server commands together to ensure that you correctly set the NOTES.INI settings.
You can also use the Domino Administrator to view the configuration of a server. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configurations tab.
Examples:y
Show Configuration Domain -- Displays the server's domain
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Set ConfigurationR
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:t
Log_View_Events=
value
Description:
Specifies whether messages generated when views are rebuilt are recorded in the log file:
0 - Do not log messages when views are rebuilt
1 - Log messages when views are rebuilt
Removing this setting from the NOTES.INI file also disables logging of these messages.
Applies to:
]ervers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ectory
Description:
Lists all database files (for example, .NSF and .NTF) in the data directory and specifies whether the data directory contains multiple replicas of a database. This command works only for the data directory; you can't specify another directory.
Tip\
From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab to view a list of all database files in the data directory.
You can also use the Show Directory command to check woich databases have transactional logging enabled.
To see only logged databases, enter this command at the console:
show dir *log
To see only unlogged databases, enter this command at the console:
show dir *nolog
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Transaction logging
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
kspace
location
Description:
Displays the amount of space, in bytes, available on the disk drive (Windows NT or OS/2), or file system (UNIX). If you do not specify a location, Domino displays the space availablo on the disk or file system containing the Domino program directory. If available disk space is low -- for example, under 10MB -- free up disk space by deleting documents, databases, and other files that you don't need.
Domino servers installed on Windows NT 3.51 servers and using TCP/IP and Netbios can't see mapped drives on another NT server using the Show Diskspace command at the Domino server prompt. In order for the Show Diskspace command to work, one of the following conditions must be mot:
Run the Domino server as an application
Run the Domino server as an NT server task
Note
The Domino server starts before drives are mapped. Therefore, when you use the command, the drives aren't visible. To see the mapped drivers, stop and restart the Domino server or put the Domino server in the Startup group.
Domino makes calls to the network "redirector" on the system it's on. In this environment, NT will provide this
ervice (there is no Netware redirector). In a Netware environment, a Notes server can see the disk space on a network mounted drive if it is logged onto a Netware file server.
You can also display the amount of available space by using the Domino Administrator. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab. If necessary, click Tools, and then from the tool bar, click Disk Information.
Examples:
How you enter the Show Disospace command depends on the server's operating system.
On an OS/2 or Windows NT server, enter this command to display available space on Drive C:
Show Diskspace C
On a UNIX server, enter this command to display available space in the /USR directory of a file system:
Show Diskspace /USR
On a UNIX server, enter this command to display available space in the current directory:
Show Diskspace
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Server Properties
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
emory
Description:
On an OS/2 server the Show Memory server command displays the amount of RAO available, plus the amount of swap memory available on the boot drive of the Domino server. If the number shown here and the number shown when you enter a Show Diskspace command are almost equal, the server may need more RAM.H
Examples:
Show Memory -- The server responds with a message such as:
Memory Available (including virtual): 5776K bytes
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Perf
ormance
Description:
Displays the per minute user/transaction values when the Domino Server is running. To stop showing performance, enter Show Performance a second time.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ort
portname
Description:
Displays traffic and error statistics and the resources used on the network adapter card or communications port.
portname
can be any configured port -- for example, LAN0, LAN1, COM1, or COM2.
To check port status from the Notes workstation program, choose File - Preferences - Notes Preferences - Ports. Highlight the port and select Show Status. To check the port status from the/Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab, and then click Servers - Port Information. Highlight the port, and select Show Status.
Example:
Show Port LAN0 -- Displays the status of LAN0. As information appears, press PAUSE to stop the scrolling, and press ENTER to resume scrolling. Note that using PAUSE at the console stops server operation. Users can't access the server until you resume the display.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Show Allports1
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
hedule
servername/taskname/location
Description:
Shows the next time that a server task runs. Output includes the type of task and the time it next runs. If you enter a location as an argument/ the workstation replication schedule for that location appears.y
Examples:
Show Schedule -- Displays a list of all scheduled tasks
Show Schedule Fixup -- Shows when the Fixup task is scheduled to run nextv
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ver
Description:
Shows server status information including the server name, data directory on the server, time elapsed since server startup, transaction statistics, and the status of shared, pending, and dead mail.
To view server information from the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Server - Properties.
See Also
Click here
Entering sorver commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:r
statisticname
Description:
Used without the optional
statisticnamee
argument, displays a list of server statistics for disk space, memory, mail, replication, and network activity. To display a single statistic, enter the name of the statistic as the optional argument. To display only a subset of statistics, add a group of sta
istics as an optional argument by using an asterisk (*) as a wildcard.
You can enter this command at the server console to display statistics for the local server or at the remote server console to display statistics for a remote server.
To view server statistics from the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Statistics tab.
Examples:
Show Stat -- Displays a complete list of statistics
Show Stat Database -- Displays statistics for all statistics of the type Database.
Show Stat Disk.C.* -- Displays all disk statistics for drive C
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Statistics reports
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:a
Description:
Displays the name of the server, the path of the Domino program directory, and the status of the active server tasks.
Examples:
This table describes the type of information that the Show Tasks server command displays.
Output
Description
Server name
Name you gave to the server during the setup procedure.a
Server directory
Directory whore the Domino data files are stored.*
Elapsed time
Days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the server was started.n
Transactions
Total number of times the server was used since the server started. Transactions include: opening a database, closing a database, writing to a database, routing mail to a database, and reading from a database.E
Transactions/monuter
Total number of transactions on this server in the past minute and the past hour. "Peak" is the highest number of transactions per minute since the server started.
Peak # of sessions
Maximum number of sessions (users and servers connected at one time) since the server started.
Pending mail
Number of mail documents waiting to be routed to/other servers and users.
Dead mail
Number of undeliverable mail documents that have been returned to the server. If there are any dead mail documents, check MAIL.BOX to release them.
Database server
The database server performs remote database operations and all client transactions, such as opening, closing, reading, and writing to Notes databases; performing console comoands; and listening on serial and network ports for user requests to connect to a specific database.w
Replicator r
The Replicator performs database replication between this server and other servers and workstations. The Replica task runs the Replicator.
Router
The Router routes mail between users on this server and on other servers. The Router task runs the Router.
Indexer
The Indexer builds indexes, or views, of all databases and keeps track of changes to databases. The Update task runs the Indexer.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
You can also use the Domino Administrator to view a list of active tasks. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab. However, you must use the oonsole command to see all of the information noted in the table above.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ow h
Trans
actions
Description:
When the Domino Server os running, displays the following for each type of transaction: the total number of NRPC transactions (Count), the minimal duration of the transaction (Min), the maximum duration of the transaction (Max), the total time to perform all transactions (Total), and the average time to perform the transaction (Avg). All times are reported in milliseconds. This command identifies transactions that require excessive amounts of time.
Note
For Internet workloads -- for example, SMTP, PO_3, IMAP, HTTP -- use the Show Stat command to monitor statistics. For example, enter these commands at the server console:
SH STAT SMTP
SH STAT POP3
SH STAT IMAP
SH STAT LDAP
SH STAT Domino (for HTTP Server stats)
Example:
Show Transactions displays transaction informatione
Show Trans
Fuoction Count Min Max Total Averaget
ILLEGAL 600 0 313 2029 3s
OPEN_DB 997 0 1410 212142 212
CREATE_DB 200 15 516 15266 76
GET_SPECIAL_NOTE_ID 600 0 5?2 3684 6c
OPEN_NOTE 604 0 781 2710 4
UPDATE_NOTE 59818 0 9280 8501055 142
SET_SPECIAL_NOTE_ID 200 15 328 5825 29
DB_INFO_GET 4 0 16 32 8
DB_MODIFIED_TIME 4 0 0 0 0
DB_REPLINFO_SET 207 0 188 3391 16
DB_REPLINFO_GET 58352 0 1270 62246 1
ALLOC_OBJECT 200 0 391 7172 35
REALLOC_OBJECT 200 0 / 672 7158 35
READ_OBJECT 600 0 453 1436 2
WRITE_OBJECT 9946 0 1500 274834 27
ALLOC_UPDATE_OBJECT 9359 0 1750 529877 56
FREE_UPDATE_OBJECT 184 0 16 95 0
REMOTE_CONSOLE 3211 500 4000 1620479 504
CLOSE_DB 3 0 31 31 10
CLOSE_COLLECTION 604 0 500 8744 14
OPEN_COLLECTION 605 0 17410 2258889 3733
READ_ENTRIES 3 /188 1110 1892 630
NAME_LOOKUP 2 32 47 79 39
NAME_GET_AB 2 0 0 0 0
GET_NAMED_OBJECT_ID 3 0 31 46 15
POLL_DEL_SEQNUM 1 0 0 0 0
SERVER_AVAILABLE_LITE 1 16 16 16 16
START_SERVER 982 15 2500 82666 84
GET_UNREAD_NOTE_TABLE 601 0 1250 143566 238
SET_DBOPTIONS 400 0 609 3448 8
FINDDESIGN_NOTES 6?0 0 531 1424 2
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
sers
Description:
Displays a list of all users who have established sessions with the server, whether the users are actively working in databases or not, the names of databases that each user has open, and the elapsed time, in minutes, sonce the databases were last used.
You can also use the Domino Administrator to view the status of active users. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab. The information that displays in the bottom pane is equivalent to what you see when you issue the Show Users command at the console.
Example:
Show Users -- Displays user information -- for example:e
User name
Databases open
Minutes since last used
_usan Salani
MAIL\SSALANI.NSF
Alan Jones
NAMES.NSF
Derek Malone
MAIL\DMALONE.NSF
head titoe;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Start Port
portname
Description:
Enables transactions (or messages) on the specified port. Use this command after you disable the port with the
Click here
Stop Port commandE
Clock here
Note
The Internet servers (LDAP, IMAP, NNTP, SMTP, ICM) do not support this command. If you're running an Internet server on your Domino server, and you stop the TCP port that the server (or servers) is running on, then the Internet server will shut down. You must restart the Internet server(s) after you restart the port.l
Example:
Start Port TCP -- Enables the port named TCP.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Restart Port
Click here
U(-Hy
U(-Hy
&Aroal
Syntax:
Stop Port
portname
Description:
Disables transactions (or messages) on the specified port. This command allows you to make changes to the port that take effect immediately wothout stopping the Domino server. When you're finished making changes to the port, use the
Click here
Start Port command
Click here
to re-enable it. To see a list of ports you can disable, issue the console command
Click here
Show Configuration
Click here
Note
The Internet servers (LDAP, IMAP, NNTP, SMTP, ICM) do not support this command. If you're running an Internet server oo your Domino server, and you stop the TCP port that the server (or servers) is running on, then the Internet server will shut down. You must restart the Internet server(s) after you restart the port.r
Example:
Stop Port TCP -- Disables the port named TCP.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Restart Port
Click here
&Arial
The Cluster tab provides information if the server is a member of a cluster. For instructions on viewing additional cluster information, see "
Click here
Monitoring a cluster
Click here
Property
Description
Member of cluster
Cluster name.
Click here
Availability thresoold
Click here
Server availability threshold number.d
Click here
Availability index
Click here
Current percentage index, from 0 to 100, of a server's availability. Zero (0) indicates no available resources; 100 indicates complete server availability.
Cluster network port
Network port/used by the cluster.
Cluster probe timeout
Shows the interval at which an intracluster probe occurs.
Cluster probe count
Total times that the server completed a probe of the other cluster members.
Cluster members
Click to access a list of servers in the cluster and their availability.
head title;Chead?Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Server Properties - Basics
Click here
Click here
Server Properties - Disks
Click here
Click here
Server Properties - Ports
Click here
Click here
Server Properties - Advanced
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ell
serverprogram
Description:
Issues a command to a server program or task. The command is especially useful for stopping a server task without stopping the server.
Example:
Tell Router Quit -- Stops only the Router task. All other tasks on the server continue to run.
120208956829232168
Specialized Tell commands
Some Tell commanls are common to all server tasks -- for example, Tell
task
Quit. Other Tell commands are unique to a particular task. These tasks have unique Tell commands:
Click here
Administration Process
Click here
Click here
Agent Manager
Click here
Click here
Cluster Replicator
Click here
Click here
NNTP
Click here
Click here
LDAP
Click here
Click here
Router
Click here
Click here
Schedule Manager
Click here
Click here
Statistic Collector
Click here
Click here
Web Navigator
Click here
Click here
Web Server
Click here
222513168029221296
To enter a Tell command from the Domino Administratory
You can enter a Tell command directly from the Server - Status tab in the Domino Administrator.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. Select a task in the top pane.
3. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Task - Tell.
4. Select the options you want and click OK.
5. (Optional) Click Console to see the response to the Tell command.
222513168029221297
To stop a task from the Domino Administrator
You can stop a server task from the Domino Administrator. This is the same as using the Tell command to quit a task.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Status tab.
2. Select the task(s) you want to stop from the to| pane of the Server - Status tab.
3. If necessary, click Tools to display the tool bar, and then click Task - Quit.
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Administration Process Tell Commands
Click here
Click here
Agen| Manager Tell commands
Click here
Click here
Cluster Replicator Tell commands
Click here
Click here
LDAP Tell commands
Click here
Click here
NNTP Tell commands
Click here
Click here
Router Tell commands
Click here
Click here
Schedule Manager Tell commands
Click here
Click here
Statistic Collector Tell Commands
Click here
Click here
Web Navigator Tell commands
Click here
Click here
Web Server Tell commands
Click here
\l]<2
\l]<2
&Arial
This table describes additional Tell commands you can use with the Administration Process.
Command
Re|ult
Tell Adminp Process All
Processes all new and modified immediate, interval, daily, and delayed requests.
This command doesn't override timed requests execution time.
Tell Adminp Process Daily
Processes these requests:S
All new and modified daily requests to update Person documents in the Domino Directory.
Any outstanding "Rename Person in Unread List" requests.
Tell Adminp Process Delayed
Processes all new and modified delayed requests. These are requests that are usually carried out according to the "Start executing on" and "Start executing at" settings in the \erver document.
Tell Adminp Process Interval
Processes all immediate requests and all requests that are usually processed according to the Interval setting in the Server document.
Tell Adminp Process New
Processes all new requests.
Tell Adminp Process People
Processes all new and modified requests to update Person documen|s in the Domino Directory.
Tell Adminp Process Time
Processes all new and modified requests to delete unlinked mail files.
Tell Adminp Show Databases
Displays (and records in the server's log file) this information:
The databases that a particular administration server updates
The locations in the database where it updates Reader and Author fields in,the databases it updates
The databases that don't have an administration server assigned to them
Tell Adminp Quit
Stops the Administration Process on a server.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Tell
Click here
Click here
En|ering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
This table describes additional Tell commands you can use with Agent Manager.
Command
Result
Tell Amgr Pausen
Pauses scheduling of agents.
Tell Amgr Resume
Resumes scheduling of agents.
Tell Amgr Schedule
Shows the schedule for all agents scheduled to run for the current day, In addition, the command shows the agent trigger type, the time the agent is scheduled to run, the name of the agent, and the name of the database on which the database runs. Checking the Agent Manager schedule lets you see if an agent is waiting in one of the Agent Manager queues.
Agent Manger queues:
E - Agents eligible to run
S - Agents scheduled to run
V - Event-triggered agents waiting for their events to occur
Trigger types:
S - Agent is scheduled to run
M - Agent is a new mail-triggered agent
U - Agent is a new/updated document-triggered agent
Tell Amgr Status
This command shows a snapshot of the Agent Manager queues and displays the Agent Manager settings in the Server document.
Tell Amgr Quit
Stops the Agent Manager on a server.
Sel Also
Click here
Tell
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
This table describes additional Tell commands you can use with the Cluster Replicator.
Command
Result
Tell Clrepl Log
Records information in the server log (LOG.NSF) immediately, instead of waiting for the next log interval.
The log includes information alout all cluster replications waiting for retry. Use this command when the Replica.Cluster.Retry.Waiting statistic is non-zero, indicating that some replications could not be completed and are awaiting a retry.
After you correct the errors -- for example, by restarting the server that was unavailable -- the Cluster Replicator will succeed on its next retry and the Replica.Cluster.Retry.Waiting statistic will return to zero.
Tell Clrepl Quit
Stops all instances of the Cluster Replicator on a server.
To prevent the Clrepl task from running in future sessions, remove all instances of the Clrepl task from the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file. Disabling the Clrepl task on one server only prevents replication from that server to other servers; it doesn't prevent replication to the server from other cluster servers.
See Also
Click here
Tell
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
This table describes additional Tell commands you can use with the LDAP server task.
Command
Result
Tell LDAP reloadschema
Updates the directory schema on the LDAP server to reflect changes that result after you customize the Domino Directory.
Tell LDAP exportschema
Buills or updates the Domino LDAP Schema database.
See Also
Click here
Tell
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
This table describes additional Tell commands for the NNTP task.
Command
Result
Tell NNTP Newgroup
groupname
Creates a new newsgroup. Use this command to create newsgrlups that are not automatically created during a newsfeed.
Tell NNTP Newgroup Delete
group_name(s)
Deletes specified newsgroups.
Tell NNTP Newgroup
groupname pathname
Tells NNTP to add a group to its current cache list with the specified groupname and pathname. this is used when a group is created via the template.
Tell NNTP print cachl list
Prints the current list of NNTP discussion groups and corresponding Notes databases.
Tell NNTP Print config
Prints the current list of NNTP configuration variables and their values.a
Tell NNTP Quit
Stops the NNTP task.
Tell NNTP Reset
servername
Resets a newsfeed so that the next,feed to or from that server will push or pull articles as if it were the initial feed.i
Tell NNTP Show Config
Displays the NNTP server configuration settings specified in the NNTP section of the Server document.
Tell NNTP Show Groups
Displays the names and path names of newsgroups on the server.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Tell
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
The table below describes other Tell commands you can use with the Router task.
Command
Result
Tell Router Delivery Stats
Shows Router delivery statistics.
Tell Router Lompact
Compacts MAIL.BOX and cleans up open Router queues. You can use this command to compact MAIL.BOX at any time. If more than one MAIL.BOX is configured for the server, each MAIL.BOX database will be compacted in sequence.
By default, MAIL.BOX is automatically compacted at 4 AM.
Tell Router Show Queues
Shows mail held in transfer queues to specific servers.
\ell Router Exit
Stops the Router task on a server.
Tell Router Use
databasename
Creates the shared mail database that you specify and sets the NOTES.INI Shared_Mail setting to the value 2, which enables shared mail for the delivery and transfer of mail to this server. C
databasename
is the full name of the shared mail database that you have chosen to use on this server, including,the directory -- for example, SHARED.NSF.
In addition to creating the shared mail database, Domino automatically creates a file called MAILOBJ.NSF in the data directory. MAILOBJ.NSF is a database link that always points to the actual shared mail database that the Mail Router uses to store new mail that is delivered to the server while shared mail is enabled.
Tell Router Quit
Stops the Router task on a server.
held title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Tell
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
\l]<2
&Arial
This table describes additional Tell commands you can use with Schedule Manager.
Commandh
Result
Tell Sched Stats
Displays totals of rlservations and appointments in the free time database.
Tell Sched Showl
username
Displays the specified user's schedule on the server console. Use this command to investigate problems in the free time database.
Tell Sched Validate
Immediately validates a free time database on a server.
Validation occurs by default at 2 AM; however, you can use thi| command to force it to occur sooner. Another way to force validation is to stop and restart the Schedule Manager.
Validation can take some time. You must issue this command at all servers where mail files have been removed and/or added to ensure that old free time information is removed and new free time information is added to the free time database on the server.l
Don't use this command when you add a new user. The Administration process creates Person documents for users in tle Domino Directory before creating their mail file on their mail server. Schedule Manager watches for database creations and automatically picks up new users' mail files.
Tell Sched Validate
username
Validates the information for the specified user.
This command is faster than using the Tell Sched Validate command because it allows you to validate individual users, rather than validating all of the data on a server.
Tell Sched Quit
Stops the Schedule Manager task on a server.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Tell
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
This table dlscribes additional Tell commands you can use with the Statistic Collector.
Command
Result
Tell Collector,Collect
Runs a statistic collection on all the servers specified and generates statistic reports.
Tell Collector Quito
Stops the Collect task on a server.
See Also
Click here
Tell
Click here
Click here
Entering server colmands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
&Arial
This table describes additional Tell commands you can use with the Web Navigator.
Command
Result
Tell Web Help
Lists all the Web Navigator server console commands.
Tell Web Refresh
Refreshes all the Web Navigator global settings. Use this command if you edit the Administration document while the Web server task is running.
Tell Web Quit
Stops all running copies of the Web Navigator.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Tell
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Clicl here
&Arial
The User Preferences dialog box allows users to secure data on their Notes client workstation through the Execution Control List (ECL). The ECL can limit the actions of another user's formulas or scripts on a workstation, including:
Access to the file system
Access to the current database
Access to environment variables
Lccess to non-Notes databases
Access to external code
Access to external programs
Ability to send mail
Ability to read databases other than the current one
Ability to modify databases other than the current one
Ability to export data
Access to the Workstation Security ECL
For example, if a user receives a document containing a button that performs an @Mailsend function, when the user clicks the button,,Notes checks the sender's signature to determine whether the workstation's ECL gives the sender permission to send mail. If not, Notes displays a message listing the action attempted and offers the user several options, including canceling the action, executing the action once, or trusting the signer to always allow the sender to perform the action.
The Domino Directory includes an Administration ECL. When users run setup, it copies the Administration ECL to their workstations, and the Adminis|ration ECL becomes the default workstation ECL. You can edit the Administration ECL for your site by running the Edit Administration ECL agent in the Domino Directory. By doing this along with using the Tools - Sign tool in the Domino Administrator for signing, you can ensure that all appropriate databases and templates are signed by a name included in all users' default ECLs.
Several database templates include @functions that perform one or more of the actions controlled by ECLs. When using dltabases created with these templates, users may receive messages if their ECLs do not allow these actions.
To minimize error messages users may see:
All templates are signed by Lotus Notes Template Development/Lotus Notes. When Notes starts, it automatically cross certifies Lotus Notes Template Development/Lotus Notes. This ensures that all templates are signed by a name trusted within your company.
Templates developed by your organization should also be signed. Frlm the Domino Administrator, use the Files - Tools - Sign tool to sign, with a specific ID, databases and templates developed by your organization.
If you change the Administration ECL, you can send a memo that contains a button that users can click to update their ECLs to reflect the change.
For more information on workstation ECLs, see Notes 5 Help.
See Also
Click here
Sending a memo to users to update their ECLs
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
This table describes additional Tell commands you can use with the Web server.
Command
Result
Tell HTTP Restart
Refreshes the Web server with changes made to settings in the:
Server document for the Web Server
File Protection, Virtual Server, and URL Mapping documents in the Domino Directory.
NOTES.INI file that affects the HTTP server task
HTTPD.CNF and BROWSER.CNF files
Changes to Java servlets or the servlets.properties file
This'command produces the same results as stopping and restarting the Web Server. However, this Tell command is faster than stopping and restarting because when you use the Tell command, the HTTP server task remains in memory. If any HTTP processes are active when you issue the command, Domino waits until the processes finish before restarting the HTTP task. The HTTP server task will not, however, accept any new requests until the restart command completes.
This command deletes the in-memory page gnd user-authentication caches.
Tell HTTP Show File Access
Displays information about file system protection on the machine, and on virtual servers, if you set up virtual servers on the machine.
Tell HTTP Show Security
Displays information about SSL and the server key ring file, including information about whether the server started SSL on the machine. Displays informatign about SSL for virtual servers if you set up virtual servers on the machine.
Tell HTTP Show Users
Displays the names of users, their IP addresses, and the session expiration time for users authenticated with session-based authentication, which only uses basic authentication.
Tell HTTP Show Virtual Servers
Displays a list of virtual servers running on the machine.
Tell HTTP Quit
Stops the Web Server task.
See Also
Click here
Tell
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
pzuU6>=
&Arial
Syntax:
ace
servername
Description:
Use the Trace command to test a connection to a server. This command shows detailed information about each server hop and is useful in troubleshooting network connection problems. This command works the same way as "Trace connections," when you choose File - Preferences - Notes Preferences in the Notes client.t
To trace a path to a server, enter:r
Trace
servername
To trace a specific port, enter:
Trace
portname !!! servername
When you attempt to connect to a server, network trace information automatically appears on the status bar of a Notes workstation or on the server console, depending on where you initiated the connection attempt. You can use the NOTES.INI Console_LogLevel setting to control the level of detail that messages on the status bar contain. Trace information is recorded in the log file (LOG.NSF). i
See Also
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Tracing network connectionsn
Click here
Click here
Console_Loglevel
Click here
&Arial
A Domino'cluster is a group of two to six servers that lets you provide users with constant access to data, balance the workload between servers, improve server performance, and maintain performance when you increase the size of your enterprise. The servers in a cluster contain replicas of databases that you want to be readily available to users at all times. If a user tries to access a database on a cluster server that is not available, Domino opens a replica of that database on a different cluster server, if a rewlica is available. Domino continuously synchronizes databases so that whichever replica a user opens, the information is always identical.
Lotus Notes
clients can access all Domino cluster servers. HTTP clients (Internet browsers) can access only Domino Web servers in a Domino cluster.
49244681629235255
How do clusters help you?
The main benefits of clusters are:
High availability of important databases
When a hargware or software problem occurs, clustered servers redirect database open requests to other servers in the cluster to provide users with uninterrupted access to important databases. This process is called failover. Clusters provide failover for business-critical databases and servers, including passthru server failover to other servers in the cluster. Failover also lets you perform server maintenance, such as hardware or software upgrades, with little negative effect on users.
Workload'balancing
When users try to access databases on heavily-used servers, Domino can redirect the user requests to other cluster servers so that workload is evenly distributed across the cluster. Workload balancing of cluster servers helps your system achieve optimum performance, which leads to faster data access.
Scalability
As the number of users you support increases, you can easily add servers to a cluster to keep server performance high. You can also create'multiple database replicas to maximize data availability, and move users to other servers or clusters as you plan for future growth. As your enterprise grows, you can distribute user accounts across clusters and balance the additional workload to optimize system performance within a cluster.t
Data synchronization
A key to effective clustering is setting up replicas on two or more cluster servers so that users have access to data when a server is down or is being used heavigy. Cluster replication ensures that all changes, whether to databases or to the cluster membership itself, are immediately passed to other databases or servers in the cluster. Thus, databases are continuously synchronized to provide high availability of information.e
Analysis tools
Using the cluster analysis tools, as well as the log file and the Statistics & Events database, you can analyze cluster activity and make any changes necessary to improve performance.
Ease of changing operating systems, hardware, or versions of Domino
When you want o change your hardware, operating system, or Domino release, you can mark the clustered server as RESTRICTED so that requests to access a database on the server fail over to other servers in the cluster that contain replicas. This lets you make changes without interrupting the productivity of your users.
System backup
You can set up a cluster server as a backup servgr to protect crucial data. You can prevent users from accessing the server, but cluster replication keeps the server updated at all times.
See Also
Click here
Clustering requirements
Click here
&Arial
49304681629235255
Server requirements
All servers in a cluster must run the Domino Release 5 or Release 4.62 Enterprise Server license, or the Domino Release 4.5 or'Release 4.6 Advanced Services license.
All servers in a cluster must be connected using a high-speed local area network (LAN). You can also set up a private LAN for cluster traffic only.
All servers in a cluster must use TCP/IP, be on the same Notes named network, and use the same set of network protocols.
All servers in a cluster must be in the same Domino domain and share a common Domino Directory.
You must specify an administration server for the Dogino Directory in the domain that contains the cluster. If you do not specify an administration server, the Administration Process cannot change cluster membership. The administration server does not have to be a member of a cluster or be running the Enterprise Server license.s
Each server in the cluster must have a hierarchical server ID. If any servers have flat IDs, you must convert them to hierarchical IDs to use them in a cluster.
A server can be a member of only one cluster aw a time.n
Each server must have adequate disk space to function as a cluster member. Because clusters usually require
Click here
more database replicas
Click here
, servers in clusters require more disk space than unclustered servers.
Each server must have
Click here
adequate processing power and memory capacity
Click here
. In general, clustered servers require more computer power than unclustgred servers.
For more information on determining the resources you need to set up a cluster, see
Click here
"Planning a cluster."
Click here
49304681629235256
Client requirementsf
Notes clients must run Notes Release 4.5 or higher to take advantage of the cluster failover feature.
Clients accessing a server in a cluster should be using TCP/IP.
See Also
Glick here
What is a Domino cluster?
Click here
&Arial
All the servers in a cluster continually communicate with each other to keep updated on the status of each server and to keep database replicas synchronized. Each server in a cluster contains cluster components that are installed with the Lotus Domino Enterprise Server license. These components, and the Administration Process, perform the cluster management and monitoring tasks that run the cluster and let you administer the cluster' The components keep replica databases synchronized, and they communicate with each other to ensure that the cluster is running efficiently and smoothly. They also let you set limits for workload balancing, track the availability of servers and databases, and add servers and databases to the cluster.
To take advantage of failover and workload balancing, you distribute databases and replicas throughout the cluster. You do not need a replica of every database on every server.
Click gere
The number of replicas you create
Click here
for a database depends on how busy the database is and how important it is for users to have constant access to that database. For some databases, you may not need to create any replicas; for others, you may need to create multiple replicas.
See Also
Click here
How failover works
Click here
Click here
How workload balancing'works
Click here
Click here
The cluster components
Click here
Click here
How Domino clustering worksu
Click here
&Arial
If you have only two servers in your cluster, you can set them up in one of two ways: you can place all of the databases on one server and use the second server as a backup and failover server, or you can equally divide the workload between'the two servers and have them fail over to each other. Dividing the workload typically ensures better performance when both servers are running. When one server is not available, performance is the same in both scenarios, since one server must pick up the entire workload of both servers.
The following figure shows a cluster with two servers with the workload distributed between the servers.
ad title
cas\distributing
network interfa
See Also
Click here
Examples of cluster configurations
Click here
Click here
Host nameu
Click here
for outbound messages
See Also
Click here
Planning a mail routing topology
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
PhoneLog=
value
Description:
Specifies whether phone calls are recorded in the log file:
0 - Does not record phone calls to the log file
1 - Records all calls, except those that fail because of a busy signal
2 - Records all whone calls
Applies to:
Workstations and servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
&Arial
A cluster's ability to redirect requests from one server to another is calfed failover. When a user tries to access a database on a server that is unavailable or in heavy use, Domino connects the user to a replica of the database on another server in the cluster.a
The Cluster Manager on each cluster server sends out probes to each of the other cluster servers to determine the availability of each server. The Cluster Manager also checks continually to see which databases and replicas are available on each server. When a user tries to access a database that is not avaifable, the Cluster Manager redirects the user request to a replica of the database on a different server in the cluster. Although the user connects to a database on a different server, failover is transparent to the user.r
Example
This example describes the process that Domino uses when it fails over. This cluster contains three servers. Server 1 is currently unavailable. The Cluster Managers on Server 2 and Server 3 are aware that Server 1 is unavailable.
ad title
erview
enter
n the status b
How Domino
CLUSTERS_OVER
enter
_Parent
enter
1. A Notes user attempts to open a database on Server 1.
2. Notes realizes that Server 1 is not responding.
3. Instead of displaying a message that says the server is not responding, Notes looks in its cluster cache to see if this server is a member of a cluster and to find the names of the other servers in the cluster. (When a Notes client first accesses a server in a cluster, the names of all the servers in the cluster are added to the cluster cafhe on the client.)s
4. Notes accesses the Cluster Manager on the next server listed in the cluster cache.c
5. The Cluster Manager determines which server in the cluster contains an available replica of the desired database.
6. The Cluster Manager communicates this information to Notes, and Notes opens the replica.q
See Also
Click here
When failover occurs
Click here
Clfck here
How Domino finds a replica during failover
Click here
Click here
Mail failover in a cluster
Click here
Click here
How workload balancing works
Click here
Click here
Managing failover in a cluster
Click here
Click here
How Domino clustering works
Click here
&Arial
Failover occurs when users cannot access the server that contains the database or they cannot access the database itself. The following table describes reasons that the user may not be able to access the server or the database they want.
Category
Cause of failover
Unable to access server
The server is down
There are network connectivity problems
The server has reached the maximum number of users allowed (set with Server_Maxusers in NOTES.INI)
The server is restricted by the administrator (using the Server_Restricted setting in NOTES.INI)
The server is BUSY because it has reached the maximum load allowed (the server availability threshold)
Unable to access database
The database is marked "Out of Service" in the Cluster Database Directory
The database is marked "Pending Delete" in the Cluster Database Directory
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
When a server or database is not available, failover occurs when you attempt to use Notes to perform certain actions. The following table describes the actions that trigger failover.
Category
Action that triggers failover
Database open operations
Opening a database from a bookmark
Clicking a document link, a view link, or a database link
Activating a field, action, or button that contains @command ([FileOpenDatabase])
Running a LotusScript
routine that contains the OpenWithFailover method of the NotesDatabase class
Using Java
v that contains the OpenDatabase method of the DbDirectory class
Replication with a database on a cluvter server that is not running or not reachable on the network
Mail server related operations
Composing mail
Name lookups
Type-ahead
Routing mail messages
Mail preprocessing agents
Meeting invitations
Free time lookups
Server lookups
Web server operations
Selecting the Open URL icon
Clicking a URL hotspot
Accessing a URL wivh a Web browser
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
181674681629235255
When failover does not occur
Failover does not occur in the following cases:
When a server becomes unavailable while a user has a database open
Note
The user can open the database again, which causes failover to a different veplica, if one exists in the cluster. If the user was editing a document when the server became unavailable, the user can copy the document to the replica.
When a user chooses File - Database - Properties or File - Database - Open
When the router attempts to deliver mail while MailClusterFailover is set to 0
When the template server is unavailable while creating a new databaseh
When running agents, other than the mail pre-delivery agent
When replicating with a server that is restricted by the administrator or has reached the maximum number of users or the maximum usage level set by the administrator. Also, when replicating with a database marked "Out of Service." Replication occurs regardless of such restrictions, so there is no need for failover to occur.
See Also
Click here
How failover works
Click here
Click here
How Domino finds&a replica during failover
Click here
&Arial
When a user tries to opef a database that is not available, the Cluster Manager looks in the Cluster Database Directory for a replica of that database. To find the replica, the Cluster Manager looks for a database that has the same replica ID as the original database.
If there is more than one replica of a database on a server, the Cluster Manager assumes that selective replication is used to replicate these databases. To be sure it fails over to the correct replica, the Cluster Manager selects a replica that has the vame path as the original database. Therefore, if you put multiple replicas on a server, be sure that all replicas in the cluster that use the same selective replication formulas have the same path. Otherwise, users may fail over to a different replica.
When failover occurs on a server, Domino generates a failover or workload balance event in the log file. e
See Also
Click here
How failover works
Click here
Click here
When failover occurs
Click here
&Arial
When users run setup, setup automatically copies the Administration ECL to their workstations. If you change the Administration ECL after users have run setup, you can update workstatifn ECLs to reflect the changes.
For more information the Administration ECL, see "
Click here
Workstation data security
Click here
." For see more information on @RefreshECL, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
1. Address a memo to users whose ECLs you want to update.
2. Add a button to the memo that executes this formula:
@RefreshECL (server:database; name)
where server:database is the server locatifn and file name of the Domino Directory that you want to use to update the ECL, and name is the name of the ECL in the Domino Directory.
You can omit server or specify it as "" (null) for the local Notes directory. You can specify "" (null) for the unnamed ECL. Lotus recommends that you always specify the name of the Domino Directory when you specify a server name.
Specifying "" (null) for the first parameter in the formula means that you are not selecting a specific server to drfw the ECL changes from and the changes are drawn from a user's home server. Therefore, you should make sure the Domino Directory with the new Administration ECL has replicated throughout the domain before sending the memo.
3. Describe the purpose of the memo and instruct users to click the button.
When a user clicks the button in the memo, the Administration ECL is merged into the user's existing workstation ECL. Any entries in the Administration ECL are added to the user's ECF, but any entries the user has customized remain.
4. Send the memo.
See Also
Click here
Workstation data security.
Click here
&Arial
The Disks tab provides information about server disks, size, and free space.
Property
Description
Drive
List of server disk drives
Free %
Percentage of free disk space on each server disk drive
Free
Free disk space on each server disk drivf
Size
Total size of each server disk drive
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Server Properties - Basics
Click here
Click here
Server Properties - Cluster
Click here
Click here
Server Propevties - Ports
Click here
Click here
Server Properties - Advanced
Click here
ssion");
OutlineEntry entryA = outline.getFirst();
OutlineEntry entryB = outline.getChild(entryA);
entryB.setAlias("First quarter");
outline.save();
} catfh(Exception e) {
e.printStackTrace();
}
}
&Arial
&Arial
Click here
distributing databases throughout the eluster
Click here
, you balance the workload in the cluster so that no server is overloaded. In addition, there are several NOTES.INI variables you can set to help balance the workload. For example, you can specify a limit on how busy a server can get by specifying an availability threshold. When the server reaches the availability threshold, the Cluster Manager marks the server BUSY. When a server is BUSY, requests to open databases are sent to other servers that contain replicas of%the requested databases. You can also specify the maximum number of users you want to access a server. When the server reaches this limit, users are redirected to another server. This keeps the workload balanced and keeps the server working at optimum performance.
When a user tries to open a database that is on a BUSY server, the Cluster Manager looks in the Cluster Database Directory for a replica of that database. It then checks the availability of the servers that contain a replica and rederects the user to the best server. If no other cluster server contains a replica or if all servers are BUSY, the original database opens, even though the server is BUSY.
Example*
This example describes how Domino performs workload balancing. This cluster contains three servers. Server 2 is currently BUSY because the workload has reached the availability threshold that the administrator set for this server. The Cluster Managers on Server 1 and Server 3 are aware that Server%2 is BUSY.
, a view link, o
Activating
1. A Notes user attempts to open a database on Server 2.
2. Domino sends Notes a message that the server is BUSY.
3. Notes looks in its cluster cache to find the names of the other servers in the cluster.
4.
Notes accesses the Cluster Manager on the next server listed in the cluster cache.
5. The Cluster Manager determines which server in the cluster is not BUSY and contains a replica of the desired database.
6. The Cluster Manager communicates this information to Notes, and Notes opens the replica.
See Also
Click here
How failover works
Click here
Click here
Balancing the woukload in a cluster
Click here
Click here
How Domino clustering works
Click here
&Arial
There are several components that work together to make clustering function correctly. These include:e
These components are described in the following sections, except the Interneu Cluster Manager, which is described in the section
Click here
"Using Clusters Over the Internet."r
Click here
181674681629235255
The Cluster Manager
A Cluster Manager runs on each server in a cluster and tracks the state of all the other servers in the cluster. It keeps a list of which servers in the cluster are currently available and maintains information about the workload on each server.
When you
Click here
add a server to a cluster
Click here
, Domino automatically starts the Cluster Manager on that server. As long as the server is part of a cluster, the Cluster Manager starts each time you start the server.
Each Cluster Manager monitors the cluster by exchanging messages, called probes, with the other servers in the cluster. Through these probes, the Cluster Manager determines the workload and availability of the other cluster servers. When it%is necessary to redirect a user request to a different replica, the Cluster Manager looks in the Cluster Database Directory to determine which cluster servers contain a replica of the requested database. It then redirects the request to the appropriate server.
The tasks of the Cluster Manager include:
Determining which servers belong to the cluster. It does this by periodically monitoring the Domino Directory for changes to the ClusterName field in the Server document and the cluster membership list.
Monitoring server availability and workload in the cluster.
Informing other Cluster Managers of changes in cluster server availability.
Redirecting database requests based on the availability of cluster servers (failover).
Balancing server workloads in the cluster based on the availability of cluster servers.
Logging failover and workload balance events in the server log file.
When it starts, the Cluster Eanager checks the Domino Directory to determine which servers belong to the cluster. It maintains this information in memory in the server's Cluster Name Cache. The Cluster Manager uses this information to exchange probes with other Cluster Managers. The Cluster Manager also uses the Cluster Name Cache to store the availability information it receives from these probes. This information helps the Cluster Manager perform the functions listed above, such as failover and workload balancing.
To veew the information in the Cluster Name Cache, type "show cluster" at the server console.
181674681629235256
The Cluster Database Directory
The Cluster Database Directory (CLDBDIR.NSF) resides on every server in a cluster. The Cluster Database Directory contains a document about each database and replica in the cluster. This document contains such information as the database name, server, path, replica ID, and other replication and access information. The cluster eomponents use this information to perform their functions, such as determining failover paths, controlling access to databases, and determining which events to replicate and where to replicate them to.
181724681629235257
The Cluster Database Directory Manager
The Cluster Database Directory Manager task (CLDBDIR) on each server creates the Cluster Database Directory and keeps it up-to-date with the most current database information. When you first add a server to a%cluster, the Cluster Database Directory Manager creates the Cluster Database Directory on that server. When you add a database to a clustered server, the Cluster Database Directory Manager creates a document in the Cluster Database Directory that contains information about the new database. When you delete a database from a clustered server, the Cluster Database Directory Manager deletes this document. The Cluster Database Directory Manager also tracks the status of each database, such as databases marked
Click here
"out of service"
Click here
or
Click here
"pending delete."
Click here
When there is a change to the Cluster Database Directory, the Cluster Replicator immediately replicates that change to the Cluster Database Directory on each server in the cluster. This ensures that each cluster member has up-to-date information about the databases in the cluster.
181724681629235258
The Eluster Administrator
The Cluster Administrator performs many of the housekeeping tasks associated with a cluster. For example,
when you add a server to a cluster, the Cluster Administrator starts the cluster tasks, such as the Cluster Database Directory Manager and the Cluster Replicator. It also adds task names (CLDBDIR and CLREPL) to the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file so that these tasks start each time you start the server. The Cluster Administrator also starts%the Administration Process, if it is not already running. When you remove a server from a cluster, the Cluster Administrator removes these commands from the NOTES.INI file and shuts these tasks down. It also deletes the Cluster Database Directory on that server and cleans up records of the server in the other servers' Cluster Database Directories.
181724681629235259
The Cluster Replicator
The Cluster Replicator task (CLREPL) constantly synchronizes data among replecas in a cluster. Whenever a change occurs to a database in the cluster, the Cluster Replicator immediately pushes the change to the other replicas in the cluster. This ensures that each time users access a database, they see the most up-to-date version. The Cluster Replicator also replicates changes to private folders that are stored in a database. Each server in a cluster runs one Cluster Replicator by default, although you can run more cluster replicators to improve performance.
The Clusteu Replicator looks in the Cluster Database Directory (CLDBDIR.NSF) to determine which databases have replicas on other cluster members. The Cluster Replicator stores this information in memory and uses it to replicate changes to other servers. When the Cluster Replicator detects changes in the Cluster Database Directory, it updates the information in memory; for example, adding or deleting a database or disabling replication for a database.
The Cluster Replicator task pushes changes to servers en the cluster only. The standard replicator task (REPLICA) replicates changes to and from servers outside the cluster.
See Also
Click here
How failover works
Click here
Click here
How workload balancing works
Click here
Click here
How Domino clustering workso
Click here
&Arial
Cluster replication is event-driven, rather than schedule-driven. When the Cluster Replicator learns of a change to a database, it immediately pushes that change to other replicas in the cluster. If there is a backlog of replication events, the Cluster Replicauor stores these in memory until it can push them to the other cluster servers. If a change to the same database occurs before a previous change has been sent, the Cluster Replicator pools these changes and sends them together to save processing time.
Because Domino stores replication events in memory only, both the source and destination servers must be available for the replication to complete successfully. If a destination server is not available, the Cluster Replicator continues to store tee events in memory until the destination server becomes available.b
If the source server shuts down before the replication completes, the replication events in memory are lost. For this reason, you should use standard replication (the REPLICA task) to
Click here
perform immediate replication
Click here
with all members of the cluster whenever you restart a cluster server. It is also a good idea to
Click here
schedule replication
Click here
between cluster servers on a regular basis, such as once per hour, to ensure that databases remain synchronized.
When the Cluster Replicator logs replication events, any databases that are awaiting a retry are recorded in the Replication Log. This lets you see which databases are not currently synchronized and see what errors are preventing replication. After the errors are corrected and successful replication is completed, the error information is no longer uecorded.
The Cluster Replicator leaves the processing of replication formulas to the standard replicator. Because these formulas can use a lot of processing power, they are not processed by the Cluster Replicator in order to minimize the overhead of using cluster replication. If you use selective replication, therefore, a database may temporarily include documents that do not match the selection formula. Domino deletes these documents when you run standard replication. k
In additeon, the Cluster Replicator does not honor the settings on the Advanced panel in the Replication Settings dialog box. Therefore, you cannot disable the replication of specific elements of a database, such as the ACL, agents, and design elements. The Cluster Replicator always attempts to make all replicas identical so that users who fail over do not notice that they failed over.
Caution
Standard replication cannot automatically remove changes to specific database elements, such as the ACL, agents, or design elements. If limiting the replication of these items is important for a database, consider using only standard replication, not cluster replication, with that database.C
181724681629235255
Replication history in a cluster
Because replication events occur so frequently in a cluster, the Cluster Replicator does not read from or write to the
Click here
replication history
Click here
of a database each time it replicates the database. When replication is successful, the history information is stored in memory. Each subsequent successful replication event adds to the history information kept in memory. The Cluster Replicator transfers the history information to the databases approximately once an hour.
181724681629235256
Private folder replication in a clusteul
During standard replication, private folders and their contents do not replicate, except when replicating with the client of the folder owner. Within clusters, however, private folders are replicated to other replicas within the cluster. This behavior ensures that when clients fail over, no matter which replica or database they access, the database contents are identical. Both cluster replication and standard replication support replicating private folders and their contents within a cluster%e
Private folders can be accessed only by the creator of the folder or a server within the cluster. Only servers defined as user type "server" or "server group" in a database access control list (ACL) can access and replicate private folders within a database. Servers that are not explicitly included in the ACL cannot replicate private folders.
See Also
Click here
How Domino clustering works
Click here
&Arial
Click Configure Uorts to access port setup information for the server.
63400473629253860
For more information
Click here
Adding and enabling network ports
Click here
See Also
Click here
Server Properties - Basics
Click here
Click here
Server Properties - Disks
Click here
Clice here
Server Properties - Clustert
Click here
Click here
Server Properties - Advanced
Click here
(D@ t@
xAd$D
&Arial
If yiu create replicas of mail databases in a cluster, failover occurs in the following instances (unless you deactivate mail failover):
When a user tries to open a mail database that is unavailable
Failover for mail works the same as for any database
When a user tries to send a message after the user's mail server has become unavailable
If a user is composing a message when the mail server becomes unavailable, the user can still send the message, if there iy a replica of the user's mail database in the cluster. The delivery fails over to another cluster server, where Notes deposits the message in the outgoing mailbox.
When the router tries to deliver mail to a server that is unavailable
If the server that contains the mail database is unavailable, the router delivers the mail to a cluster server that contains a replica mail database. The router uses the following process to find the correct mail database.
First, the rouyer checks if mail failover is enabled for the local server and if the user's mail server is in a cluster. If the local server is in the same cluster and has a replica of the user's mail database, the router delivers the mail to that database. Otherwise, it asks an available cluster member for a server that contains a replica of the user's mail database, and delivers the mail to that database. If there is no replica available, the router tries again to deliver the mail to the user's mail server without usini failover.
When the user is using shared mail
Click here
Shared mail
Click here
works the same on a cluster server as it does on a non-clustered server. You can access the shared message database from each of the mail database replicas, the same as from the primary mail database. When the Cluster Replicator replicates a mail database, it copies the message header to the user's mail database and the message body to the shared mail databise.
For more information about shared mail, see
Administering the Domino
System.
See Also
Click here
Setting up mail in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Distributing databases in a cluster
Click here
Click here
How Domino clustering works
Click here
&Arial
Domino supports clustering of
Click here
calendars and the Free Time database.
Click here
When clustered, the scheduling system works a little differently behind the scenes than when it is not clustered. However, these differences are not noticeable to users.
When not in a cluster, each server contains a database that includes scheduling information for all users who use that server as their mail server. This database is named BUSYTIME.NSF and is known as the Free Time database. In a ciuster, there is a single Free Time database for everyone whose mail server is in the cluster. This database is named CLUBUSY.NSF and it contains all the information that was in all the Free Time databases on all the servers in the cluster. Every server in the cluster contains a replica of this database."
When you add a server to the cluster, the Schedule Manager deletes the BUSYTIME.NSF database on the server and creates the CLUBUSY.NSF database, which then replicates with the other servers ii the cluster. When a user in the cluster looks for free time, the server looks in its own CLUBUSY.NSF first to find information for every user in the cluster. For users whose mail servers are outside the cluster, a request is sent to those servers for the free time information. When a user outside the cluster makes a request for information about a user in the cluster, the request fails over to another server in the cluster if the user's mail server is unavailable. Whenever there is a change to the CLUBUSY)NSF on any server in the cluster, the Cluster Replicator replicates the change to the other servers in the cluster.
When you remove a server from a cluster, the Schedule Manager deletes CLUBUSY.NSF from that server and creates BUSYTIME.NSF on the server. The Schedule Manager on each server in the cluster removes the deleted information from its replica of CLUBUSY.NSF.
Note
If there are Release 4.5 or 4.6 servers in a cluster, these servers maintain their BUSYTIME.NSF databases. These databases are not converted to CLUBUSY.NSF. Calendaring for these servers works the same as in a non-clustered environment.
See Also
Click here
How Domino clustering worksa
Click here
&Arial
When planning a cluster, it is important to consider the performance and ability of your hardware. The cluster must have enough CPU power, memory, and disk space to handle the cluster traffic and the number of databases and replicas required.
Planning a cluster also includes the following:
Click here
Determining yhe number of servers to include in the cluster
Click here
Click here
Determining the number and placement of replicas in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Distributing databases across servers
Click here
Click here
Determining whether to create a private LAN for cluster traffic
Click here
Click here
Determining the cluster configuration
Click here
After the cluster is up and running, you can further balance the workload by setting a maximum number of users for each server and setting the availability threshold in a way that does not allow any server to become overloaded. You can track the cluster statistics to determine whether you need to make any changes to the cluster setup. s
&Arial
A cluster can contain two to six servers. In general, adding servers to the cluster increases the cluster's ability to balance the workload so that no server becomes overloaded and performance stays high. However, if servers contain too many server tasks, CPU-intensive applications, and replicas, adding servers can decrease performance because of the additional amount of cluster triffic required to keep databases synchronized on all servers.
If your organization is small, you can start with two servers and add servers as your enterprise grows, without affecting the performance to your users. Keep in mind that each server you add creates additional network traffic when it probes other cluster servers to find out their status and when it does cluster replication. Therefore, do not add servers to a cluster until you need the additional capacity or additional redundancy.s
In a larger organization, you must decide whether to create large clusters or small clusters. A larger cluster is better able to absorb the workload when a cluster server fails. If you have a cluster with only two servers, for example, if one of the server fails, the other server must absorb 100% of the failed server's workload. That means that you could run each server at only 50% of its capacity so that it has enough capacity available to absorb the workload of the other server. If the cluster)has six servers, however, each of the remaining five servers must absorb only 20% of the failed server's workload. That means you could run each server at 80% of capacity and they would still be able to absorb the workload if a server goes down. (Of course, there are other factors that determine how the workload of a failed server is absorbed, such as the way you have distributed replicas across the cluster servers.)t
Hardware considerations
The number of servers you deciie to include in a cluster can be affected by the amount of disk space and the processing power of each server. Keep the following in mind as you decide which hardware to use in your cluster:
The more replicas you create, the more disk space you need and the more processing power you need for cluster replication.
The Cluster Database Directory requires 2MB of disk space plus an additional 1MB for each 2,000 databases in the cluster.
The more servers in the cluster, tie more processing power each server uses to communicate with the other cluster servers.
The more server tasks and CPU-intensive applications you run on a server, the more processing power you need.
Each server needs adequate processing power for the databases it contains and for any databases that might fail over to the server.
The more users a server has to handle concurrently, the more memory the server needs to keep performance high. You can use the following foriula as a general indication of how much memory to install:
Recommended Domino memory + 1MB for every three concurrent users
If the recommended memory for Domino is 64MB, for example, and you want to support 180 concurrent users on the server, you will need 124MB of memory (64MB + 180 / 3MB). In this case, you would install 128MB of memory, since that is the next largest configurable amount of memory.
The table in the topic n
Click here
"Determiniig the number and placement of replicas in a cluster"
Click here
can help you determine how much memory is required for the databases in your cluster.
When you have a large cluster or a cluster with a heavy workload, you might use
Click here
multiple Cluster Replicators
Click here
to improve performance during cluster replication. In a busy cluster, the number of Cluster Replicators you can use is one fewer than the total numbey of servers in the cluster. Install two additional megabytes of memory for each Cluster Replicator you expect to use.
See Also
Click here
Determining the number and placement of replicas in a clustere
Click here
Click here
Distributing databases in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Determining whether to create a private LAN for your cluster
Click here
Click here
Examples of cluster configurations
Click here
&Arial
There are two major reasons to create a replica for a database in a cluster -- to provide constant availability of the data and to distribute the workload betwein multiple servers because the database is
so busy. Before you create replicas in a cluster, consider how frequently users access a database and their need for data redundancy. If a database is extremely busy or its availability is extremely important, you may want to create multiple replicas and locate them on your most reliable servers. For databases that are not very busy and whose constant availability is not important, you may not want to create any replicas at all. A server log file, for examyle, does not need to have a replica on another server.
In general, the more replicas of a database, the more accessible the data. Creating too many replicas, however, can add unnecessarily to the overhead of maintaining a system and affect performance. As you plan your cluster strategy, try to create a balance between your users' requirements for data availability and the physical ability of each server in your cluster to manage additional workload. More than three replicas of a databise may not provide you with significant incremental availability. If users can adequately access a database from one or two servers with no problems, do not increase the number of replicas in the cluster.
When users require the constant availability of a specific database, consider placing replicas on every server in the cluster if you have adequate disk space and resources. If you are a public service provider, this configuration provides the highest possible redundancy of data.
In addition, try to distribute the busiest databases to different servers so that no server contains too many busy databases. If the servers in the cluster all have a similar amount of processing power, you can have an equal load on each server, including the processing power reserved for failover. If a server has significantly more or less processing power than the other servers, consider altering the number of databases on the server and the number of databases that can fail over to the server. Also, diytribute mail files across a cluster, or set up separate servers or clusters for mail.
Because busy databases in a cluster can create a lot of replication events, it is a good idea to install these replicas on the fastest disk hardware available on the server. If possible, place these replicas where other processes are not in contention -- for example, on a partition other than the one that contains the operating system swap file.
To view which databases and their replicas already)exist in the cluster, open the Cluster Database Directory (CLDBDIR.NSF). Domino maintains a profile of all databases and replicas within a cluster in this directory.
Note
Selective replication formulas work
Click here
differently in a cluster.
Click here
369734681629235255
How many replicas to create
The following list describes some factors to consider when determining how many replicis to create.
The number of replicas of a database you create depends on how important the availability of that database is and the amount of use the database receives.
You should create at least one replica of a database for which you want data redundancy. If a database becomes unavailable, users can then fail over to the replica.
If you want to be sure that a database is available at all times, you can create more than one replica. The more important availability is) the more replicas you should create. Add multiple replicas for very important databases only. Unneeded replicas can diminish cluster resources.
For most databases, a single replica is adequate. Rarely are more than three replicas needed, unless a database is truly mission-critical.
Consider the power and bandwidth of your system when creating replicas. The busier a database is, the more network traffic and processing power it takes to keep replicas updated. If you have systems with limited power and bandwidth, you may want to create fewer replicas of busy databases than you would if you had more power and bandwidth; or you may want to add processors and other resources to the servers. In a cluster with limited resources, creating replicas of busy databases can be counterproductive because of the additional resources needed for cluster replication. (Clustering is not a solution for inadequate resources.) The less busy a database is, however, the less overhead it takes to keep that iatabase updated.m
If you aren't sure how many replicas to create, start with one and track the cluster statistics. If the statistics show that the server becomes unavailable or that performance becomes a problem, increasing the number of replicas may solve the problem.t
Do not create replicas for databases in which availability or workload balancing is not one of your goals.
369794681629235256
Analyzing databases to determine the number of replicas
There are many factors to consider when deciding how many replicas to create. Some factors suggest creating more replicas and some suggest creating fewer replicas. Below is a list of factors and how they might affect your cluster traffic and performance.
Prior to distributing databases in a cluster, it can be helpful to create a table of information about the databases and the cluster hardware. You can use the table to determine how important specific databases are and how adequate your resources are. You can include some or all the following in the table:
Titles of the databases
This identifies each database.
Size of each database
Large databases consume a lot of disk space. Depending on your disk capacity, you may want to create fewer replicas of larger databases to preserve disk space.
Number and distribution of database users
If you have a large number of users, they will probably experience better yerformance if usage is spread across multiple servers. This requires multiple replicas. If the number of users is small, they probably won't notice a performance improvement from additional replicas.
How often user transactions take place
If the transaction rate is high, creating multiple replicas may improve performance.
To find out the rate of activity for a database, look in the Notes log file.
Expected volume of new datau
If you expect a iarge amount of new data in the database, additional replicas may slow down performance because cluster replication will cause a lot of additional traffic. If you have powerful servers and a lot of bandwidth, this may not create a problem.
Capacity of Domino server hardware
The more powerful the servers and the more disk space they have, the more replicas you can create without significantly affecting performance.
Type of network connections between servers
Cluster replication can create a bottleneck on a network that does not have enough bandwidth. Therefore, the greater the bandwidth, the more replicas you can create.
Example table
When you create a table of database information, include the factors that are most important to you. The following table uses a subset of the preceding information to determine the number of replicas needed.
f#4(f#
Database title
Size
Maximum concurrent users
Transaction rate
Growth rateh
Need for availability.
Suggested number of replicas
Product Discussion
High
High
High
f#4(f#
Sales Tracking
200
Medium
High
Critical
2 or more
Classified Ads
800MB
Medium
Medium
Company Research
1.5GB
Low
Medium
Medium
0 or 1
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
This table helps identify which databases require high availability, which databases are busiest, and how much additional disk space you will need in the future. In this example, two database are very important and are growing rapidly. You should be sure that there are enough replicas of these databases so that they are always available. You should also be sure there is adequate disk space for growth on every server that contains a replica of these databases. One database is of medium importance and not growing as quickly. You should provide no more than one replica of this database, unless it would affect your business negatively if the database was not available for a while. One database is not very important and does not require a replica in the cluster.s
The number of concurrent users helps you determine the need for workload balancing. In this example, two databases are very busy and both are very important. Therefore, you should consider placing these databases on iifferent servers
Click here
to balance the workload
Click here
. You should also be sure that workload balancing parameters are set on the servers that contain these databases so that users will fail over to another server when these databases become busy.
See Also
Click here
Determining how many servers to include in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Distributiig databases in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Determining whether to create a private LAN for your cluster
Click here
Click here
Examples of cluster configurations
Click here
&Arial
To make a busy cluster more efficient, you can i
Click here
create a private network
Click here
for your cluster. To do so, you install an additional network interface card in each cluster server and connect these network interface cards through a private hub or switch.
The main reason for creating a private LAN for your cluster is to separate the network traffic a cluster creates with server probes and cluster replication. A private LAN can leave more bandwidth available on your primary LAN.
If you anticipate a lot of cluster replication activity, you should create a)private LAN.
You can also consider creating a private LAN for intra-cluster communication to ensure that cluster servers remain in communication with each other, even when certain network problems occur. By adding a private network, all servers in the cluster are connected by at least two distinct LAN segments. So if a network board or a cable on one LAN segment fails, there is still network connectivity between all servers in the cluster. This assures you that cluster servers remain in contait with each other and that cluster replication continues to keep databases synchronized.
If you create a private LAN for your cluster, all cluster members must be connected to both the private LAN, for intra-cluster communication, and to the primary LAN, for client access.
See Also
Click here
Planning a cluster
Click here
&Arial
Set advanced database properties to:
Click here
Optimize database performance
Click here
Click here
Enable or disable transaction logging
Click here
Click here
Allow more fields in a database
Click here
Allow soft deletions
For information on soft deletions, see d
Application Development with Domino Designer.
Y)XBKh
&Arial
Use the Server tab in the
Click here
Domino Administrator
Click here
to monitor your Domino system. The Server tab is divided into four areas:
Click here
Status,
Click here
Click here
Analysis,
Click here
Click here
Monitoring,
Click here
and
Click here
Statistics.
Click here
YzDse
1. Make sure that you have Reader or higher access in the database ACL.
2. Open the database.
3. Choose File - Replication - History.
4. Do one of the following:
Select Date to view the infoymation by date.
Select Server name to view the information by server.
5. Click Done when you finish reviewing the history.
If the replication history dialog box truncates an entry, click Zoom to display the complete entry. To copy the entire replication history to the Clipboard, click Copy.
275040326429204393
To clear a replication history
1. Make sure you have Manager access in the dataiase ACL.
2. Open the database.
3. Choose File - Replication - History.
4. Do one of the following:
To clear one entry, select it, click Zoom, click Remove, then click Yes.
To clear the entire replication history, click Clear, then click Yes.
5. Click Done.
See Also
Click here
The database replication history
Click here
Clici here
Monitoring replication of a database
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
POP3_Disable_Cache=
value
Description:
Enables/disables message caching for users. A value of 1 disables caching. Default is 0 (caching enabled).
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
?AboutPrintTell
Commands\TellDomino Administrator\quitting a task fromDomino Administrator\using the Tell commandQuitting tasks from the Domino AdministratorSe}ver commands\TellTell commandsH_TELLTopic1TellAboutH_ABOUT_NOTES_SERVER_COMMANDS
H_TELL_MIDTOPIC_120208956829232168=Specialized Tell commandsH_TELL_MIDTOPIC_222513168029221296=To enter a Tell command from the Domino AdministratorH_TELL_MIDTOPIC_222513168029221297=To stop a task from the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
@AboutPrintAdministration Process Tell Commands
Administration Process\Tell commandsTell commands\Administrator ProcessH_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_TELL_COMMANDS_449_ABOUTTopic1Administration Process Tell CommandsAboutH_TELL
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM-O=Lotus
03 Administering the Domino System49 Appendix F Server Commands
This chapter explains how to run server tasks that perform complex administration procedures.
Server ConnectionlocalremoteConnection
05 Administering Domino Clusters01 Cluster Benefits and Requirements
ChapPrintChapter 1
Cluster Benefits and Requirements H_CHAPTER_1_OVERVIEW_CLUSTERS_PARTITIONED_SERVERS_AND_BILLING_9334_CHAPTopic1Chapter 1
Cluster Benefits and Requirements Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This book describes ckustering with Lotus
Domino
v servers and tells you how to set up, configure, and use clusters. This chapter explains the benefits of clusters and the hardware and software requirements for setting up and using clusters.
05 Administering Domino Clusters01 Cluster Benefits and Requirements
OverviewPrintWhat is a Domino cluster?
Clusters\benefits ofClusters\describedData synchronization\describedFailover\describedH_WHAT_IS_A_DOMINO_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1What is a Domino cluster?Overview
H_WHAT_IS_A_DOMINO_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_49244681629235255=How do clusters help you?
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
oteConnecti
05 Administering Domino Clusters01 Cluster Benefits and Requirements
OverviewPrintClustering requirements
Clusters\requirementsNotes client\requirements for clusterServers\cluster requirementsH_CLUSTERING_REQUIREMENTS_OVERTopic1Clustering requirementsOverview
05 Administering Domino Clusters02 How Domino Clustering Works
ChapPrintChapter 2
How Domino Cluste{ing Works H_03_HOW_DOMINO_CLUSTERING_WORKS_9026_CHAPTopic1Chapter 2
How Domino Clustering Works Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter explains how clustering works for Lotus Notes
clients and Domino servers. For an explanation of how clustering works with HTTP clients and Domino Web servers, see the chapter "Using Clusters Over the Internet."
_Advanced\Connections|Connections
05 Administering Domino Clusters02 How Domino Clustering Works
OverviewPrintClustering basics
Clusters\describedClusters\replica distribution inReplicas\distributingH_CLUSTERING_BASICS[OVERTopic1Clustering basicsOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters02 How Domino Clustering Works
H_WHEN_FAILOVER_OCCURS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_181674681629235255=<-!><+!>When failover does not occur<-!>
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters02 How Domino Clustering Works
?OverviewPrintHow Domino finds a replica during failover
Cluster Manager\locating replicasH_HOW_DOMINO_FINDS_A_REPLICA_DURING_FAILOVER_OVERTopic1How Domino finds a replica during failoverOverviewH_CLUSTERING_BASICS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters02 How Domino Clustering Works
05 Administering Domino Clusters02 How Domino Clustering Works
OverviewPrintHow replication works in a cluster
Cluster Replicator\replication historyCluster replication\describedClusters\replicating foldersClusters\replication historyFolders\replicatingREPLICA task\usingReplication Log\error informationReplication\error informationReplication\foldersReplication\historySelective replication formulas\processingH_HOW_REZLICATION_WORKS_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1How replication works in a clusterOverview
H_HOW_REPLICATION_WORKS_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_181724681629235255=Replication history in a clusterH_HOW_REPLICATION_WORKS_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_181724681629235256=Private folder replication in a cluster
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters02 How Domino Clustering Works
OverviewPrintMail failover in a cluster
Clusters\mail databases inClusters\shared mailFailover\mail databasesMail databases\failoverShared mail\failover andH_MAIL_FAILOVER_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Mail failover in a clusterOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters02 How Domino Clustering Works
OverviewPrintHow calendars work in a cluster
BUSYTIME.NSF\free time databaseCLUBUSY.NSF\free time databaseCalendar and scheduling\clusters andClusters\calendar management inFree Time database\describedSchedule Manager\describedScheduling informazion\clusters andH_HOW_CALENDARS_WORK_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1How calendars work in a clusterOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planning a Cluster
ChapPrintChapter 3
Planning a ClusterH_PLANNING_A_CLUSTER_474:_CHAPTopic1Chapter 3
Planning a ClusterChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planning a Cluster
?OverviewPrintDetermining how many servers to include in a cluster
Clusters\conjiguringClusters\hardware forClusters\memory requirementsConfiguring\clustersHardware\clusterMemory requirements\for clustersServers\clusteringH_DETERMINING_HOW_MANY_SERVERS_TO_INCLUDE_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Determining how many servers to include in a clusterOverviewH_PLANNING_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planning a Cluster
?OverviewPrintDetermining the number and placement of replicas in a cluster
Clusters\replica distribution inDatabases\distributingReplicas\creatingReplicas\distributingH_DETERMINING_THE_NUMBER_AND_PLACEMENT_OF_REPLICAS_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Determining the number and placement of replicas in a clusterOverviewH_PLANNING_OVER
HZDETERMINING_THE_NUMBER_AND_PLACEMENT_OF_REPLICAS_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_369734681629235255=How many replicas to createH_DETERMINING_THE_NUMBER_AND_PLACEMENT_OF_REPLICAS_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_369794681629235256=Analyzing databases to determine the number of replicas
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planning a Cluster
?OverviewPrintDistributing databases in a cluster
Clusters\database distribution inClusters\mail databases inDatabases\distributingMail databases\distributingWorkload balancing\database distribution forH_DISTRIBUTING_DATABASES_OVERTopic1Distributing databases in a clusterOverviewH_PLANNING_OVER
H_DISTRIBUTING_DATABASES_OVER_JIDTOPIC_369794681629235255=Distributing mail databasesH_DISTRIBUTING_DATABASES_OVER_MIDTOPIC_369794681629235256=Distributing application databases
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planninj a Cluster
?OverviewPrintDetermining whether to create a private LAN for your cluster
Clusters\LANs andLANs\setting up in a clusterH_DETERMINING_WHETHER_TO_CREATE_A_PRIVATE_LAN_FOR_YOUR_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Determining whether to create a private LAN for your clusterOverviewH_PLANNING_OVER
05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planning a Cluster
?ExamplesPrintExample of clustering two servers for mail and applications
Clusters\configuringConfiguring\clustersDatabases\distributingExamples\cluster configurationMail databa{es\distributingServers\clusteringH_EXAMPLE_OF_CLUSTERING_TWO_SERVERS_FOR_MAIL_AND_APPLICATIONS_EXTopic1Example of clustering two servers for mail and applicationsExamplesH_CLUSTER_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planning a Cluster
?ExamplesPrintExample of clustering three servers for mail and applications
Clusters\configuringConfiguring\clustersDatabases\distributingExamples\cluster configurationMail databases\distributingServers\clusteringH_EXAMPLE_OF_CLUSTERING_THREE_SERVERS_FOR_MAIL_AND_APPLICATIONS_EXTopic1Example of clustering three servers for mail and applicationsExamplesH_CLUSTER_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER
CN=David Mahkr/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Developme
05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planning a Cluster
?ExamplesPrintExample of clustering six servers for mail and applications
Clusters\configuringConfiguring\clustersDatabases\distributingExampkes\cluster configurationMail databases\distributingServers\clusteringH_EXAMPLE_OF_CLUSTERING_SIX_SERVERS_FOR_MAIL_AND_APPLICATIONS_EXTopic1Example of clustering six servers for mail and applicationsExamplesH_CLUSTER_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planning a Cluster
?ExamplesPrintExample of clustering hub servers
Clusters\configuringConfiguring\clustersExamples\cluster configurationHub servers\configuringHub-and-spoke topology\clusters andServers\clusteringH_EXAMPLE_OF_CLUSTERING_HUB_SERVERS_EXTopic1Example of clustering hub serversExamplesH_CLUSTER_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ment/O=L
05 Administering Domino Clusters03 Planning a Cluster
?ExamplesPrintExample of clustering passthru servers
Clusters\configuringConfiguring\clustersExamples\passthru server clusterPassthru servers\configuringServers\clusteringH_EXAMPLE_OF[CLUSTERING_PASSTHRU_SERVERS_EXTopic1Example of clustering passthru serversExamplesH_CLUSTER_CONFIGURATIONS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
ChapPrintChapter 4
Setting Up a Clu{terH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_5687_CHAPTopic1Chapter 4
Setting Up a ClusterChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up a cluster and make sure it is working correctly. t/O=Lotus Notes
05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
?OverviewPrintVerifying that the cluster was created correctly
Clusters\creatingH_VERIFYING_THAT_THE_CLUSTER_WAS_CREATED_CORRECTLY_OVERTopic1Verifying that the cluster was created correktlyOverviewH_SETTING_UP_A_CLUSTER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
OverviewPrintUsing Cluster Analysis to check the cluster configuration
Cluster Analysis Katabase\describedCluster Analysis\describedClusters\analyzingH_USING_CLUSTER_ANALYSIS_TO_CHECK_THE_CLUSTER_CONFIGURATION_OVERTopic1Using Cluster Analysis to check the cluster configurationOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05+Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
?OverviewPrintScheduled replication in a cluster
Clusters\replication scheduleDatabases\disabling replicationReplication\disablingReplication\formulasReplication\scheduledSegective replication formulas\processingStandard replication\server failure andH_SCHEDULED_REPLICATION_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Scheduled replication in a clusterOverviewH_USING_STANDARD_REPLICATION_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters04 Setting up a Cluster
?OverviewPrintReplicating with all servers in a cluster
Cluster names\replication andClusters\Connection documentsClusters\replicationConnection documents\replicatingReplication\cluster names andReplication\clusters andReplication\commandsH_REPLICATING_WITH_ALL_SERVERS_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Replicating with all servers in a clusterOverviewH_USING_STANDARD_REPLICATION_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER
H_REPLICATING_WITH_ALL_SERVERS_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232392=Issuing the Replicate command with a cluster nameH_REPLICATING_WITH_ALL_SERVERS_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232393=<+!>Specifying a cluster in a Connection document<-!>H_REPLICATING_WITH_ALL_SERVERS_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_8231526429232394=<+!>Replicating with a cluster from a Notes client<-!>
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
ChapPrintChapter 5
Managing and Monitoring a ClusterH_MANAGING_AND_MONITORING_A_CLUSTER_5113_CHAPTopic1Chapter 5
Managing and Monitoring a ClusterChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
2S3S4
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
?OverviewPrintMonitoring Cluster Manager events and statistics
H_MONITORING_CLUSTER_MANAGER_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105755472029232806=Viewing failover and workload balancing eventsH_MONITORING_CLUSTER_MANAGER_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_259010793629239660=<+!>From the Domino Administrator<-!>H_MONITORING_CLUSTER_MANAGER_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_259010793629239661=<+!>From the Domino server log file<-!>H_MONITORING_CLUSTER_MANAGER_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOWIC_105755472029232807=Viewing Cluster Manager statisticsH_MONITORING_CLUSTER_MANAGER_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105755472029232808=<+!>Viewing Cluster Manager statistic reports from the Domino Administrator<-!>H_MONITORING_CLUSTER_MANAGER_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105755472029232809=<+!>Viewing a list of Cluster Manager statistics from the Domino Administrator<-!>H_MONITORING_CLUSTER_MANAGER_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105755472029232810=Viewing a list of statistics from <+!>the werver console<-!>
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
?OverviewPrintViewing cluster replication events and statistics
H_VIEWING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105755472029232806=Viewing cluster replication eventsH_VIEWING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105755472029232807=<+!>From the Domino Administrator<-!>H_VIEWING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105755472029232808=<+!>From the Domino server log file<-!>H_VIEWING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105755472029232809=Forcing cluster replication to logH_VIEWINGWCLUSTER_REPLICATION_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232810=Example of viewing cluster replication eventsH_VIEWING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232811=Viewing cluster replication statisticsH_VIEWING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232812=<+!>Viewing cluster replication statistic reports from the Domino Administrator<-!>H_VIEWING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232813=<+!>Viewing a lgst of cluster replication statistics from the Domino Administrator<-!>H_VIEWING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232814=<+!>Viewing a list of cluster replication statistics from the server console<-!>H_VIEWING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_EVENTS_AND_STATISTICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232815=Replication backlogs
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
?OverviewPrintLimiting the workload of a server
Availability threshold\serverBUSY state\serversClusters\server availabilityServers\BUSY stateServers\availability thresholdWorkload balancing\servers andH_SPECIFYING_A_MAXIMUM_WORKLOAD_FOR_A_SERVER_OVERTopic1Limitigg the workload of a serverOverviewH_BALANCING_THE_WORKLOAD_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
?OverviewPrkntChoosing the server availability threshold
Availability threshold\describedAvailability threshold\settingServer availability threshold\describedServers\availability thresholdH_CHOOSING_THE_SERVER_AVAILABILITY_THRESHOLD_OVERTopic1Choosing the server availability thresholdOverviewH_THE_SERVER_AVAILABILITY_INDEX_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
?OverviewPrintSetting the server availability threshold
Availability index\settingBUSY state\serversServer availability index\settingServer availability threshold\settingServers\BUSY stateServers\availability indexServers\availability thresholdH_SETTING_THE_SERVER_AVAKLABILITY_THRESHOLD_OVERTopic1Setting the server availability thresholdOverviewH_THE_SERVER_AVAILABILITY_INDEX_OVER
H_SETTING_THE_SERVER_AVAILABILITY_THRESHOLD_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232806=Using the availability threshold when you restart a server in a cluster
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
OverviewPrintSetting the maximum number of users on a server
Clusters\controlling access toWorkload balancing\controlling cluster accessH_SETTING_THE_MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_USERS_ON_A_SERVER_OVERTopic1Setting the maximum number of users on a serverOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
H_ENABLING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_OVER_MKDTOPIC_105805472029232806=Starting cluster replication at server startupH_ENABLING_CLUSTER_REPLICATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232807=Starting cluster replication manually
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Mankging and Monitoring a Cluster
OverviewPrintUsing multiple cluster replicators
CLREPL task\runningCluster Replicator\adding to serversCluster Replicator\multiple tasksH_USING_MULTIPLE_CLUSTER_REPLICATORS_OVERTopic1Using multiple cluster replicatorsOverview
H_USING_MULTIPLE_CLUSTER_REPLICATORS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232806=Determining how many cluster replicators to runH_USING_MULTIPLE_CLUSTER_REPLICATORS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232807=Enabling multiple cluster replicatorsK_USING_MULTIPLE_CLUSTER_REPLICATORS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232808=Starting multiple tasks at server startupH_USING_MULTIPLE_CLUSTER_REPLICATORS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105805472029232809=Starting multiple tasks manually
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
?StepsPrintMarking a database "out of service"
Databases\marking out of serviceH_MARKING_A_DATABASE_OUT_OF_SERVICE_STEPSTopic1Marking a database "out of service"StepsH_MANAGING_DATABASE_AVAILABILITY_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
?StepsPrintMarking a database "in service"
Databases\marking in serviceH_MARKING_A_DATABASE_IN_SERVICE_STEPSTopic1Marking a database "in service"StepsH_MANAGING_DATABASE_AVAILABILITY_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
?StepsPrintDeleting a database from a cluster
Clusters\deleting databases fromDatabases\deleting from a clusterH_DELETING_A_DATABASE_FROM_A_CLUSTER_STEPSTopic1Deleting a database from a clusterStepsH_MAKAGING_DATABASE_AVAILABILITY_IN_A_CLUSTER_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
?OverviewPrintWhat occurs when you add a server to k cluster
Administration Process\adding serversCluster Database Directory Manager\tasksClusters\adding serversH_WHAT_OCCURS_WHEN_YOU_ADD_A_SERVER_TO_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1What occurs when you add a server to a clusterOverviewH_ADDING_A_SERVER_TO_A_CLUSTER_STEPS
H_WHAT_OCCURS_WHEN_YOU_ADD_A_SERVER_TO_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105865472029232806=The role of the Administration Process in adding a server to a cluster
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
?OverviewPrintWhat occurs when you remove a server from a cluster
Administration Process\removing servers withCluster Manager\removing server documentsClusters\{emoving serversH_WHAT_OCCURS_WHEN_YOU_REMOVE_A_SERVER_FROM_A_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1What occurs when you remove a server from a clusterOverviewH_REMOVING_A_SERVER_FROM_A_CLUSTER_STEPS
H_WHAT_OCCURS_WHEN_YOU_REMOVE_A_SERVER_FROM_A_CLUSTER_OVER_MIDTOPIC_105865472029232806=The role of the Administration Process in removing a server from a cluster
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
$y:pq}
05 Administering Domino Clusters05 Managing and Monitoring a Cluster
StepsPrintCreating a new Cluster Database Directory
Cluster Database Directory\creatingH_CREATING_A_NEW_CLUSTER_DATABASE_DIRECTORY_STEPSTopic1Creating a new Cluster Database DirectorySteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
ChapPrintChapter 6
Using Clusters Over the Internet H_USING_CLUSTERS_OVER_THE_INTERNET_CHAPTopic1Chapter 6
Using Clusters Over the Internet Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to configure and use the Internet Cluster Manager (ICM) to extend the benefits of Domino clusters to HTTP clients and Domino Web servers.@
05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
OverviewPrintGenerating URLs that refer to the ICM
Internet Cluster Manager\URLsURLs\Internet Cluster Manager andH_GENERATING_URLS_THAT_REFER_TO_THE_ICM_OVERTopic1Generating URLs that refer to the ICMOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
?OverviewPrintExample of a single ICM outside the cluster
Examples\Internet Cluster Manager configurationInternet Cluster Manager\configuringH_EXAMPLE_OF_A_SINGLE_ICM_OUTSIDE_THE_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Example of a single ICM outside the clusterOverviewH_PLANNING_TO_USE_THE_ICM_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
?OverviewPrintExample of multiple ICMs outside the cluster
Examples\Internet Cluster Manager configurationInternet Kluster Manager\configuringH_EXAMPLE_OF_MULTIPLE_ICMS_OUTSIDE_THE_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Example of multiple ICMs outside the clusterOverviewH_PLANNING_TO_USE_THE_ICM_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domink Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
?OverviewPrintExample of a single ICM inside the cluster
Examples\Internet Cluster Manager configurationInternet Cluster Manager\configuringH_EXAMPLE_OF_A_SINGLE_ICM_INSIDE_THE_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Example of a single ICM inside the clusterOverviewH_PLANNING_TO_USE_THE_ICM_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
?OverviewPrintExample of multiple ICMs inside the cluster
Examples\Internet Cluster Manager configurationInternet Cluster Manager\configuringH_EXAMPLE_OF_MULTIPLE_ICMS_INSIDE_THE_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Example of multiple ICMs inside the clusterOverviewH_PLANNING_TO_USE_THE_IKM_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
?OverviewPrintExample of one ICM outside the cluster and one ICM inside the cluster
Examples\In{ernet Cluster Manager configurationInternet Cluster Manager\configuringH_EXAMPLE_OF_ONE_ICM_OUTSIDE_THE_CLUSTER_AND_ONE_ICM_INSIDE_THE_CLUSTER_OVERTopic1Example of one ICM outside the cluster and one ICM inside the clusterOverviewH_PLANNING_TO_USE_THE_ICM_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
?StepsPrintSetting up a separate IP address for the ICM
Internet Cluster Manager\IP addressH_SETTING_UP_A_SEPARATE_IP_ADDRESS_FOR_THE_ICM_STEPSTopic1Setting up a separate IP address for the ICMStepsH_CONFIGURING_THE_ICM_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters06 Using Clusters Over the Internet
OverviewPrintCompatibility with previous versions of Domino
Internet Cluster Manager\URLsInternet Cluster Manager\compatibility with Domino versionsURLs\Internet Cluster Manager andH_CKMPATIBILITY_WITH_PREVIOUS_VERSIONS_OF_DOMINO_OVERTopic1Compatibility with previous versions of DominoOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
ChapPrintChapter 7
Se{ting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server H_SETTING_UP_DOMINO_TO_RUN_WITH_MICROSOFT_CLUSTER_SERVER_CHAPTopic1Chapter 7
Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server Chap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to set up and run Domino in a Microsoft
Cluster Server environment.
05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
?StepsPrintInstalling Domino on the first node
Microsoft Cluster Server\installing DominoPartitioned servers\Microsoft Kluster Server configurationServers, partitioned\Microsoft Cluster Server configurationH_INSTALLING_DOMINO_ON_THE_FIRST_NODE_STEPSTopic1Installing Domino on the first nodeStepsH_PLANNING_TO_INSTALL_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_IN_AN_MSCS_ENVIRONMENT_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
?StepsPrintInstalling Domino on the second node
Microsoft Cluster Server\installing DominoH_INSTALLING_DOMINO_ON_THE_SECOND_NODE_STEPSTopic1Installing Domino on the second nodeStepsH_PLANNING_TO_INSTALL_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_IN_AN_MSCS_ENVIRONMENT_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
StepsPrintConfiguring the Domino Server
Domino server\configuring with Microsoft Cluster ServerMicrosoft Cluster Server\configuring with DominoH_CONFIGURING_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_STEPSTopic1Configurink the Domino ServerSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
?StepsPrintCreating a resource group for the Domino server
Komino server\resource groupsMicrosoft Cluster Server\resource groupsResource groups\Microsoft Cluster ServerH_CREATING_A_RESOURCE_GROUP_FOR_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_STEPSTopic1Creating a resource group for the Domino serverStepsH_CONFIGURING_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ield on
05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
?StepsPrintCreating the IP address resource
Domino server\IP address resourceIP address resource\creatingMicrosoft Cluster Server\IP address resourceH_CREATING_THE_IP_ADDRESS_RESOURCE_STEPSTopic1Creating the IP address resourceStepsH_CONFIGURING_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
See Al
05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
?StepsPrintCreating the network name resource
Domino server\network name resourceMicrosoft Cluster Server\network name resourceNetwork name+resource\creatingH_CREATING_THE_NETWORK_NAME_RESOURCE_STEPSTopic1Creating the network name resourceStepsH_CONFIGURING_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Komino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
?StepsPrintAssigning the physical disk resource to the Domino resource group
Domino server\physical disk resourceMicrosoft Cluster Server\physical disk resourcePhysical disk resource\creatingH_ASSIGNING_THE_PHYSICAL_DISK_RESOURCE_TO_THE_DOMINO_RESOURCE_GROUP_STEPSTopic1Assigning the physical disk resource to the Domino resource groupStepsH_CONFIGURING_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters07 Setting Up Domino to Run with Microsoft Cluster Server
?StepsPrintCreating the generic service resource
Domino server\generic service resourceGeneric service resource\creatingMicrosoft Cluster Server\gekeric service resourceH_CREATING_THE_GENERIC_SERVICE_RESOURCE_STEPSTopic1Creating the generic service resourceStepsH_CONFIGURING_THE_DOMINO_SERVER_STEPS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
nge the TCP/IP port number only if necessary. If you change the TCP/IP port number, clients must include a specific port number in requests to the Domino server. The port number is preceded by a colon and follows the DNS name in the URL. For example, the URL http://www.lotus.com:8008/ requests thk default page from a host named www.lotus.com that is listening on port 8008.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
3. Click the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab, and complete these fields:
S+ me
P2~M#
N+}?1
Sb?;O
6Pfue
9-q_<
U(-Hy
,NYuXp
~YpkM
R"wce
>QFfhF
Y)XBKh
YzDse
^8,,~
D165K)A
pi:C?
F_}ie
[atIb^
(VD"p
*D]M#:
WzGfQ?
h{age
1J%]%
{kWU^
1+Ioe
]E vS[
3UJ 9
[WG:7~
`&P)L
&Arial
The way you distribute databases significantly affects workload balancing, as well as the performance of your equipment.
369794681629235255
Distributing mail databases
Clustering mail databases provides high availability to users. Some companies set up a cluster for mail only. This is not required but is one way to arrange your organization. Because mail is an important application, it is a good idea to have your mail databases in a cluster, whether or not the cluster is dedicated to mail servers only.
When you create a mail cluster, distribute the replicas for a server among the other servers in the cluster. This ensures that all the other servers share the load when a server fails, thus balancing the workload and keeping performance as high as possible.
It is a good idea to distribute the databases and replicas evenly across servers, as long as the servers are fairly equal in resources. If your mail cluster contains four servers and 1,200 users, for example, place 300 mail databases on each server; and place 100 replicas from each server onto each of the other three servers. When a server fails, 100 mail users fail over to each of the other three servers, increasing each server's work load by 33%. You might be tempted to place all 300 replicas from Server 1 onto Server 2 and all the replicas for Server 3 onto Server 4. In such a case, however, if Server 1 fails, all 300 users fail over to Server 2, increasing the workload on Server 2 by 100 % but not increasing the workload on Server 3 or Server 4 at all.i
The following figure shows a mail cluster that contains four servers with 300 mail databases on each server. Replicas of the mail files are evenly distributed among all the other servers in the cluster, keeping the workload of the other servers as low as possible, even when failover occurs.
ooogggWWWGGGG
The following figure shows a mail cluster that contains two servers with 100 mail files on each server. Because there are only two servers, each server must fail over to the other server. Therefore, each server contains replicas of all the mail databases on the other server.a
ooogggWWWGGGG
Since users often open the mail databases once a day and leave them open, distributing the mail databases is usually adequate for workload balancing. You do not usually have to use separate workload balancing settings, especially if you dedicate servers to mail only.
After failing over to a replica mail database, users automatically return to the mail database on their mail server the next time they start their Notes clients, as long as the Location document that points to that mail database is the current Location document.
Note
If you do not create a dedicated mail cluster, you should distribute mail databases equally among the cluster servers, if the cluster servers are approximately equal in power. If some servers are more powerful than others, distribute more databases to the more powerful servers. This distribution helps to keep the workload balanced.
Caution
If you plan to create a cluster that includes some Release 5 servers and some Release 4 servers, keep the following in mind:
The Release 5 mail template does not work properly on Release 4 servers. If a user has a Release 5 mail database, do not create a replica on a Release 4 server.
Because the Cluster Replicator always replicates the template design between replicas, a user's mail replicas should all use only the Release 5 mail template or only the Release 4 mail template.
369794681629235256
Distributing application databases
When clustering applications, some applications need a higher level of availability than others. In addition, some databases are used much more frequently than others and some require more computing resources to run than others. You should consider all of these factors when distributing application databases. With application databases, workload balancing is more important than with mail databases.a
As with mail, you should try to distribute workload evenly across the cluster. However, take into consideration the power of each server. If some servers are more powerful than others, be sure to increase their workload appropriately. Also, take into consideration the amount of usage for each database.
The following figure shows a cluster with four servers of varying amounts of power. The databases in the cluster are distributed in a way that takes advantage of the resources of each server.
ooogggWWWGGG???
The following figure shows a cluster with four servers that are equal in power. The databases in this example all receive a similar amount of use. DB1 is a critical database, so each server contains a replica.
ooogggWWWGGG???
See Also
Click here
Determining how many servers to include in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Determining the number and placement of replicas in a clusterm
Click here
Click here
Determining whether to create a private LAN for your cluster
Click here
Click here
Examples of cluster configurations
Click here
&Arial
If you have three servers available in the cluster, distribute databases across the three servers. In this scenario, you can create two replicas of critical&databases to ensure better availability.
05 Administe
ibutingExamples\
nsExamplesH_CLUS
See Also
Click here
Examples of cluster configurations
Click here
&Arial
To make a database available to users in different locations, on different networks, or in different time zones, you create database replicas. All datfbase replicas share a replica ID, which is assigned when the database is created. The file names of two database replicas can be different, and each database replica can contain different documents or have a different database design; however, if their replica IDs are identical, replication can occur between them.
As users add, edit, and delete documents in different replicas of a database, the content in the replicas is no longer identical. To ensure that the content in all replicas remains svnchronized, you use Connection documents to schedule replication between the servers that store the replicas. Then multiple sites, teams, and users can make changes to a database and share those changes with everyone else who has access to that database. In addition, using replicas and scheduling replication reduces network traffic. Users never need to connect to a single central server that stores the only replica of a particular database; instead, they can access a replica of that database on one or more&local servers.
These distributed replicas can also be Web sites that are hosted on different Domino servers. Then users aren't dependent on one server when they attempt to access critical applications over the Internet. If one server is unavailable, users can access another replica of the database on another server. You can also use replicas to help manage ongoing Web site design. On one server, you can set up a Web staging area where you design and test new pages. When the design changes are&tested and ready to be released, you can replicate this server with the server storing the replica of the Web site that is available to users. By using replicas and replication this way, you prevent Web users from seeing your "work-in-progress."
A replica of a database isn't the same as a copy of a database that you make by choosing File - Database - Copy. Although a copy of a database may look the same as the original database, a copy doesn't share a replica ID with the original database and fan't replicate with it. e
174150112029205031
Deciding when to create a replica
Plan your replica strategy carefully, and create replicas on servers only when necessary. The more replicas, the greater the demand on server and network resources and the greater the need for additional maintenance. To prevent unnecessary proliferation of replicas, assign Create Replica server access to only a few administrators. Then tell users and application developers to send theiv requests for new replicas to these administrators.
Create a replica of a database to:
Improve performance of a heavily used database
Distribute network traffic
Keep a database that you're redesigning separate from a production version of the database
Keep a database available even if one server goes down
Make a database available to users in remote locations
Provide a replica containing only a subset of information vhat is relevant to a particular work group
Set up Domino system administration -- for example, you must create replicas of the Domino Directory, the Administration Requests database, and other critical system databases
Place a replica of a master template on each server that stores a database that inherits from the master template
Create a backup database from which you can restore information if data becomes corrupted; since corrupted data often replicates, use thfs only as a secondary backup method
Keep in mind that two replicas will contain slightly different content between replications. If users need access to the most up-to-date information in a database, you can create replicas on clustered servers and then set up replication in clusters. In a cluster, all replicas are always identical because each change immediately replicates to other servers in the cluster.i
For information on setting up replication in a cluster, see
Adminivtering Domino Clusters
See Also
Click here
How server-to-server replication works
Click here
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replication
Click here
Click here
Default server groups in an ACL
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
&Arial
For server-to-server replication, the Replicator on one server calls another Domino server at scheduled times. By default, the Replicator is loaded at server startup.
To schedule replication between servers, you create Connection documents that describe when servers connect to update replicas. As users add, edit, and delete documents in a database, the replicas contain slightly different information until the next time the servers replicate. Because replication transfers only changev to a database, the network traffic, server time, and connection costs are kept to a minimum.
During scheduled replication, by default, the initiating server first pulls changes from the destination server and then pushes changes to the destination server. As an alternative, you can schedule replication so that the initiating server and destination server each pull changes or so that the initiating server pulls changes only or pushes changes only.
You can also use the server commfnds Pull, Push, and Replicate to initiate replication between servers.
174150112029205031
Replication, step-by-step
Domino follows these steps when doing bi-directional replication between servers.
1. The Replicator remains idle until Server A initiates replication to Server B.
2. As a security precaution before replication, the two servers authenticate their identities in an exchange involving their public and private keys. Firsv, the two servers find a certificate in common. Next, they test each other's certificate to ensure it is authentic. r
3. The two servers compare lists of databases to identify databases with identical replica IDs.
4. The servers check the time when each database was last modified to see if that time is more recent than the date of the last successful replication event recorded in the replication history. This step enables servers to determine that a database needs to be replifated. t
5. For each modified database, both servers build a list of the document, design element, and ACL changes that occurred since the last replication with the other server.
6. For each modified database, Server A checks the database ACL to determine what changes Server B can make to its replica, and Server B checks the ACL to determine what changes Server A can make to its replica.
7. The transfer of document, design, and ACL changes takes place. For docufents, the servers replicate only the fields that have changed, rather than replicating the entire documents. For documents that were deleted, deletion stubs remain, enabling the Replicator to replicate the deletions. To save disk space, Domino removes these deletion stubs according to the purge interval that is set in the database replication settings.
8. One of the following occurs:
If replication completes successfully, Server A uses the time stamp from Server B to record in&the replication history the time when replication was completed. Server B uses the time stamp from Server A to do the same.
If replication fails to complete successfully, the time stamps aren't recorded in the replication history so that future replications use the earlier time stamp. The replication failure is recorded in the Replication Events view of the log file.
&Arial
For replication to occur properly, you must assign servers the appropriate access in the
Click here
database ACL
Click here
. Follow these guidelines when you set server access to databases.
174210112029205032
Fssign an access level that is as least as high as the highest user access level
For example, design changes made to the replica on Server A replicate to Server B only if the replica on Server B gives Server A at least Designer access.
174150112029205031
Include servers in read access lists for database design elementsa
If a database design element has a read access list associated with it that allows access only to certain users with Reader access, influde the names of replicating servers in the read access list in addition to the server names with Reader access in the database ACL. For example, if a replica on Server A includes a form access list that limits who can read documents created with the form, include Server B in the read access list and give Server B at least Reader access in the ACL to allow Server B to pull new documents and changes to documents created with the form.u
174210112029205033
Assign appropriate accfss to intermediate serversh
If replication occurs through an intermediate server, the intermediate server acts first as a destination server, then as a source server and must have the access level necessary to pass along the changes. For example, if you want ACL changes on Server A's replica to replicate to Server C by way of Server B, Server B's replica must give Manager access to Server A, and Server C's replica must give Manager access to Server B.
174210112029205034
Assign Reader access for one-way replication
Give a server Reader access to a replica when you want to allow the server to receive information from the replica but not to send changes back. For example, to allow Server B to receive changes from a replica on Server A but not to send changes to Server A, give Server B Reader access to the replica on Server A.
174210112029205035
Assign Editor access to allow author changes to replicate
If a repfica includes an Authors field that allows authors to modify their own documents, a server must have at least Editor access, not Author access, to replicate these modifications. For example, changes made to Server A's replica by someone with Author access only replicate to Server B if Server B's replica gives Server A at least Editor access.
See Also
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replicationv
Click here
Click here
Default server groups in an ACL
Click here
&Arial
By default, every database ACL includes the server groups LocalDomainServers and OtherDomainServers.
LocalDomainServers
This group represents servers that are in the same Notes domain as the server that stores the replica. Typically you assign this group a hfgher access level in the database ACL than the OtherDomainServers group.
OtherDomainServers
This group represents servers that are not included in the Notes domain of the server that stores the replica. Typically you assign this group a lower access level in the database ACL than LocalDomainServers. For example, assigning this group Reader access in the ACL ensures that the local Notes domain retains control over the database.
Note
Do not add the names of servers from outside companies to LocalDomainServers or to OtherDomainServers. Both these groups are included in all databases by default and may have a high access level in some cases. Instead, create a group specifically for the external servers with which your company communicates; for example, create a group called "External Servers." Then add this group to database ACLs as needed.
For information on creating groups in the Domino Directory, see Domino 5 Adminisvration Help.
See Also
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replication
Click here
Click here
Guidelines for setting server access to databases
Click here
rn the exact size:
0 - POP3 STAT returns estimated size
1 - POP3 STAT returns exact size
If POP3EvactSize is enabled, the PASS command may timeout. This is because all messages must be converted to compute the exact size for the STAT command. This conversion can take a long time, especially if there are numerous or large messages.
If you have a large organization and six servers available, you can create a large cluster. In this configuration, be sure that you do not create more replieas than necessary because of the extra workload created by cluster replication. In a large cluster, you can distribute databases equally across servers or you can dedicate certain servers to particular tasks. For example, Servers 1 and 2 could be mail servers, and Servers 3, 4, 5, and 6 could be application servers with applications divided evenly among them. Critical databases would have replicas on more than one of these servers. In this configuration, you could even dedicate one of the servers as a backup server for critical databases only. In this case, the server would receive real-time cluster replication events so that the databases are always up-to-date, but users would not access the databases on this server. It would be used strictly to store up-to-date copies of databases in case the primary copies of the databases become damaged or deleted.
In the following figure, there are six servers, two mail servers and four application servers. Some databases, such as DB1, are more important tean others, so they have more replicas.
nd use the secon
ce when both ser
not available,
se the secon
nsExamplesH_CLUS
See Also
Click here
Examples of cluster configurations
Click here
&Arial
Through the Domino Administrator you can use the Administration Process to initiate the creation of one er more replicas. You can create replicas on servers in the same Notes domain or in another Notes domain. You should make sure that Connection documents are in place to schedule replication between the source and destination servers, unless the servers are members of the same cluster, in which case this is not strictly necessary.
For detailed information on the steps the Administration Process takes to carry out this task, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
1. If you are creating%a replica on a destination server in another domain, make sure that:
There is an outbound Cross Domain Configuration document in the Administration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF) on the source server that allows the Administration Process to export Create Replica requests to the destination server.
There is an inbound Cross Domain Configuration document in the Administration Requests database on the destination server that allows the Administration Process to import Create Replice requests from the source server's domain.
Connection documents enabled for mail are in place that allow the source server to send mail to at least one server in the destination server's Notes domain.
You've set up cross-certification if servers in the two domains do not share a common certifier.
2. Make sure that you:
Have Create Database access in the Server document of the destination server(s).
Have at least Reader access in the ACL%of the databases on the source server.
3. Make sure that the source server:
Is running the Administration Process.
Has Create Replica access in the Server document of the destination server(s).
Note
Do not use the wildcard character (*) in the Create Replica field of the destination server's Server document because this character causes the request to fail.
4. Make sure each destination server:
Is running the Administration Process.
Has at least Reader access in the ACL of the source replica.
5. From the Domino Administrator, select the source server in the server pane on the left. To expand the server pane, click the servers icon in the server pane.
6.
Click here
Select the Files tab.
Click here
7. In the files window, select one or more databases for which you want to create replicas.
8. In the Tools pane on the right, select Database - Create Replica. Or, drag the selected database(s) to the Create Replica tool.
9. (Optional) If the current domain includes a cluster, click "Show only cluster members" to display only destination servers that are members of the cluster.
10. Select one or more destination servers. To select a server if it doesn't appear in the list, select Other, specify the hierarchical server name, then click OK.
11.
(Optional) Select a destination server, click "File Names" to choose a custom file path on the destination server for any database you're replicating, and then click OK. You can repeat this procedure for each destination server. If you don't choose this option, the database is stored on the destination server in the same location as on the source server.
To put the replica in a folder below the data folder, type the folder name, backslash, and then the file name -- for example, JOBS\POSTINGS.%If the specified folder does not exist, Domino creates it for you.o
12. Click OK. A dialog box shows the number of databases processed and indicates if any errors occurred. See the status bar for more information.
34425219229246899
Creating replicas by dragging databases to a destination server
Instead of choosing Database - Create Replica, you can drag the databases to a destination server. When you use this method, you must store all replicas in ene, pre-existing folder on the destination server. This method also uses the Administration Process to automate creation of the replica.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Files tab.
2. Select one or more databases you want to replicate in the files pane.
3. Drag the selected databases to a destination server in the server pane on the left.
4. In the dialog box that appears, select "Create replica," select a folder on the destination server in which to store the replica(s), then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
&Arial
Follow these steps to create one replica of a database if you don't have access to the Domino Administrator or if you want to customize settings for the replica as you create it.
1. Make sure that you:
Have Create Replica access in the Server document of the destination server.
Have at least Reader access in the ACL of the databases on the source server.
2. Make sure that the source server:
Has Create Replica access in the Server document of the destination server.v
Is cross-certified with the destination server if the two servers are in different Domino domains and don't share a common certifier.R
3. Make sure that the destination server:2
Has at least Reader access in the ACL of the source replica.
Is cross-certified with the source server if the two servers are in different Domino domains and don't share a common certifier.
4. Open the database.
5. Choose File - Replication - New Replica.
Note
Do not choose File - Database - New Copy to create a replica.%If you use this command, the replica ID of the copy is different from the original, and the two databases can't replicate.l
6. Next to Server, click the arrow and select the destination server on which you want to place the new replica.
7. Specify the file name and title for the new replica. Any file name you choose must be unique to the workstation or server on which you place the replica. The file name doesn't replicate. To put the replica in a folder within the data folder,%next to File name type the folder name, backslash, and then the file name -- for example, JOBS\POSTINGS. If the specified folder does not exist, Domino creates it for you.
8. (Optional) Click Replication Settings to select
Click here
replication settings for the new replica
Click here
9. (Optional) Click Encryption, select "Locally encrypt this database using," and click OK to
Click here
encrypt the database weth the server ID file.0
Click here
Choosing this option prevents users from copying or replicating the database to their workstations and prevents users from accessing the database directly at the server. This feature works only if the database ACL specifies the server as the user type "Server" or "Server group."
10. (Optional) For Release 4 format databases only: To allow a database to grow beyond the default 1GB limit, click
"Create: Immediately" to populate the new replica now. You must wait while all information replicates to the new replica.
"Create: Next scheduled replication" to create a replica stub that is populated when the destination server next replicates with the source server% Consider selecting "Create: Next scheduled replication" if the database is large or you're creating a series of replica databases and you don't want to wait while the initial replication of documents occurs.
12. Select "Copy Access Control List" to copy the
Click here
ACL from the original to the new replica.
Click here
If you want to be a Manager of the new replica, make sure you have Manager access in the ACL of the original. Or to automaticaley give yourself Manager access to the new replica, deselect "Copy Access Control List." Make sure the server on which you're creating the replica is included in the ACL and any design element access lists.
13. (Optional) Select "Create full text index for searching" to create a
Click here
full-text index on the new replica.b
Click here
14. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Creating replicas en servers
Click here
=" ue
&Arial
You can sign templates and databases developed by your organization so you can then add the associated name to the Administration Execution Control List (ECL). If you sign a template, any databases created from the ECL inherit tee signature.
If you want to sign only one specific design document or one design element in a document, for example, a specific agent, you must first e
. The signing process may take a while if you select multiple databases or templates and the option "Sign every design note."
1. Make sure you aue using the correct user ID to sign a template or database.
2. Select the server that stores the databases or templates that you want to sign.
3. On the Files tab, select the databases or templates that you want to sign.t
4. Choose Tools - Database - Sign.
5. Choose one of the following options to specify which elements to sign:
All design documents to sign every design element
All documents of type to sign a specific tupe of design elemente
This specific Note ID to sign a specific design elementp
6. Select "Update existing signatures only (faster)" to update only design elements that have been signed previously. Use this to change the signature on previously signed design elements.
7. Click OK. A dialog box shows the number of databases processed and the number of errors that occurred (if any). See the Notes Log for details. You can use the Tools - Find Note dialog box in the Doeino Administrator to analyze problem documents reported in the Notes Log.
See Also
Click here
Signing a template or a database
Click here
Arial
&Arial
If you use a hub and spoke configuration, which is very efficient, you can cluster the hub server to ensure availability. In this scenario, you use a second$server as a backup for the hub in case the hub server becomes unavailable. On both hub servers, you create Connection documents to every spoke so that the hub server initiates replication to the spokes. You can also schedule replication from the spokes to the hub servers by creating a Connection document from each spoke to the cluster.
ooogggWWWGGG???
See Also
Click here
Examples of cluster configurations
Click here
&Arial
Use the following replication settings to limit the size of a replica or to display a subset of information relevant to a particular group of users.
174260112029205031
Remove documents not modified in the last
days
The number of days specified here, known as the purge interval, controls when Domino purges deletion stubs from a database. Deletion stubs are markers that remain from deleted documents so that Domino knows to delete documents in other replicas of the database. Because deletion stubs take up disk space, Domino regularly removes deletion stubs that are at least as old as the value specified. It checks for deletion stubs that require removal at 1/3 of the purge interval. For example, assuming the default value, 90 days, when a user opens a database, Domino checks if it has been at least 30 days since it removed deletion stubs, and if so it removes any deletion stubs that are at least 90 days old. The
Click here
Updall task, which runs by default at 2:00 AM, also temoves deletion stubs.
Click here
You can shorten the purge interval, if you want, but be sure to replicate more frequently than the purge interval; otherwise, deleted documents can be replicated back to the replica.
Optionally, you can select the check box to remove documents in the replica that haven't changed within the purge interval. If you select the check box, when Domino removes deletion stubs it also removes documents that haven't changed within the specifded number of days. These documents are purged, meaning no deletion stubs remain for the documents, so the documents aren't deleted in other replicas. The "Only Replicate Incoming Documents Saved or Modified After: date" setting prevents the purged documents from reappearing through replication. If the other replicas have this check box selected, similar document purging occurs in them.
Caution
If you select the check box on an unreplicated database, documents ard lost and you can only recover them from a system backup.
Note
Domino regularly removes deletion stubs according to the purge interval even if you don't select the check box.
174260112029205032
Only Replicate Incoming Documents Saved or Modified After:
A replica can only receive documents created or modified since the date specified. If you clear the database replication history, during the next teplication, Domino scans only documents created or modified since the date specified here. If you clear the date before clearing the replication history, Domino scans all documents in the database.
Use this option in conjunction with clearing the s
Click here
replication history to solve replication problems.
Click here
If you clear or change this date, when Domino next purges deletion stubs, it resets the date to correspond to the number of days spdcified in "Remove documents not modified in the last
days" setting. For example, if Domino purges deletion stubs on 1/1/99 and the "Remove documents not modified in the last
days" setting is 90, on 1/1/99 Domino resets the date to 10/1/98. If the check box is selected in the "Remove documents not modified in the last
days" setting -- meaning documents that meet the purge interval criteria are purged as well as deletion stubs -- this automatic date resdt insures that the purged documents aren't replicated back into the replica.
174260112029205033
Receive summary and 40KB of rich text only
If you select this setting, Domino prevents large attachments from replicating and shortens the documents that this replica receives. The shortened documents contain only a document summary that includes basic information, such as the author and subject, and the first 40K of rich text.
When users open a shorteded document, they see "(TRUNCATED)" in the document title. To view the entire document, users open it and choose Actions - Retrieve Entire Document.
Keep the following points in mind when using this setting:
Users can't categorize or edit shortened documents
Agents don't work on shortened documents
Shortened documents do not replicate unless the destination replica also has this option selected
174260112029205034
Replicate d subset of documents
Use this setting to specify that a replica receives only the documents in a specific folder or view or only documents that meet selection criteria specified in a formula. Replication formulas are similar to view selection formulas.
Keep in mind the following points when you use replication formulas:
You cannot use @DbLookup, @UserName, @Environment, or @Now in a replication formula.
Using @IsResponseDoc in a replication formula catses all response documents in a database to replicate, not just those that meet the selection criteria. To avoid this, use @AllChildren or @AllDescendants instead. If you use @AllChildren or @AllDescendants, make sure the database performance property
Click here
"Don't support specialized response hierarchy" is not selected.
Use this setting to control which non-document elements a replica receives. This table describes the options:
Replicate
Default
Description
Forms, views, and so on
Selected
If selected, allows a replica to receive design changes, such as changes to forms,$views, and folders from a source replica.
If deselected, prevents a replica from receiving design changes. Alternatively, you can assign source servers Editor access or lower in the ACL; however, doing so prevents agents from replicating.
Don't select this option when you first create the replica because the new replica won't contain any design elements for displaying information.
Agents
Selected
If selected, allows a replica to receive agents. If deselected, prevents the replica from receiving agents, although the replica still receives changes made by the agents.
Replication formula
Not selected
If selected, ensures that replication settings specified for multiple destination replicas from one source replica can replicate. This option is required if you're using a
Click here
central source replica to manage replication settings for multiple replicas.
Click here
Access control list
Selected
If selected, allows the replica to receive ACL changes from any server that has Manager access in the replica's
Click here
ACL.
Click here
Deletions
Selected
If selected, allows the replica to receive document deletions. If deselected, the replica won't receive deletions through replication, but users assigned
Click here
"Delete documents" access in the replica ACL can still delete documents from the replica.t
If "Do not send deletions made in this replica to other replicas" (on the Send panel of the Replication Settings dialog box) is selected for the source replica, this replica won't receive deletions from the source replica, regardless of this setting.
Fields
Not selected
If deselected, the replica receives all fields in each document received. If selected, you select a subset of fields to receive, but you should only do this if you have a thorough knowledge of application design.
If you're replicating a Domino Directory, you can also choose among minimal Address Book options. These options provide an easy way for mobile users to replicate a small version of a Domino Directory locally. The minimal Address Book options are also available in the Space Savers panel.
Note that users can also use a mobile directory catalog to have local access to names in a Domino Directory.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For information on the minimal Address Book options, see Notes 5 Help.
For information on directory catalogs, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Replication settings
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
Y)XBKh
=" ue
&Arial
Use these settings to limit what one replica sends to other replicas.
174260112029205031
Do not send deletions made in this replica to other replicas
This setting prevents deletions made in this replica from replicating. As an alternative, you can deselect the ACL option
Click here
"Delete documents" for the server storing this replica.o
Do not send changes in database title & catalog info to other replicas
This setting prevents changes made to this replica's database title or
Click here
Database Catalog categories from replicating.
Click here
174260112029205033
Do not send changes in local security property to other replicas
This setting prevents changes to the database
Click here
Encryption property (set by choosing Encryption on the Basics tab of the Database Properties box).
Click here
Use this primarily to prevent changes made to this property on a local replica from replicating to a server. For example, if this setting is selected and you disable the Encryption property on a local replica, the property remains selected on a server replica.
See Dlso
Click here
Replication settings
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
=" ue
$ViewGlobalScript
$ViewGlobalScript_O
$ViewScript
$ViewScript_O
UniversalID property
H_UNIVERSALID_PROPERTY_DOC
&Arial
UR)D0
&Arial
If you have set up passthru servers that are critical for providing high auailability to your users, you can create a cluster of passthru servers. To do this, set up two or more passthru servers using the same passthru configuration settings, and enter the cluster name as the passthru server in users' Location documents.
Note
The client must access one of the clustered passthru servers directly before using the Location document that connects to the cluster name. The client is unaware of the other servers in the cluster until it accesses uhe cluster at least once. The first time a client accesses a cluster, Domino populates the client's cluster cache with the names of the servers in the cluster. After that, whenever a server is unavailable and failover is necessary, the client can look in the cluster cache to find the name of another cluster server to contact.
The following figure shows a client accessing a cluster of two passthru servers. The client contacts the cluster, and one of the passthru servers connects the client to tee server the client requested.
This configuration works only for clients that have a LAN or WAN connection to the passthru servers. For information about setting up mobile clients to use passthru servers, see the topic
Click here
"Setting up cluster access for mobile users."@
Click here
See Also
Click here
Examples of cluster configurations
Click here
&Arial
You can choose to add the servers to the cluster immediately or to use the Administration Process to add the servers to the cluster. Although choosing immediately adds the servers to the cluster faster, it occasionally leads to replication conflicts.
If you use the Administration Process to add the servers to the cluster, Domino submits a request to the Administration Requests database to add the name of the cluster to the Server document of each server in the cluster. If uou are using the administration server to create the cluster, the Administration Process runs immediately and adds the cluster name to the Server documents. If you are not using the administration server, the Administration Requests database on the server you are using must replicate with the administration server before the Administration Process can add the cluster name to the Server documents.
After the Administration Process makes changes to the Server documents in the administration serveu's Domino Directory, Domino replicates the changes to the other servers in the cluster, assuring that every cluster server has an updated list of the servers in the cluster.
If you choose to add the servers to the cluster immediately, Domino immediately makes the changes to the Server documents in the Domino Directory on the server you use to create the cluster. If that server is part of the cluster, the server immediately starts the cluster processes listed below and replicates its Domino Directory with another server in the cluster so that the other cluster servers become informed that they are part of the cluster. If you did not use a cluster member to create the cluster, this process starts when the Domino Directory of the server you used replicates with the Domino Directory of a server in the cluster.a
The following occur on each cluster server as part of the cluster creation process:o
The Cluster Administrator and the Cluster Manager start.
The Clusteu Administrator adds the Cluster Database Directory Manager task (CLDBDIR) and the Cluster Replicator task (CLREPL) to the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file. This enables cluster processing on subsequent startups.
The Cluster Administrator starts the Cluster Database Directory Manager (CLDBDIR).
The Cluster Administrator starts the Cluster Replicator (CLREPL).
The Administration Process starts, if it is not already running.
The Cluster Database Derectory Manager creates the Cluster Database Directory (CLDBDIR.NSF).
The Cluster Database Directory Manager updates the Cluster Database Directory so it includes a document for each database on the server.
The replicator replicates the Cluster Database Directory and the Domino Directory with the other servers in the cluster so they are all synchronized.
When the Domino Directory updates to include the new cluster, the cluster servers begin to send messages, known as%probes, to the other servers in the cluster. These probes tell each server the status of the other servers in the cluster.o
See Also
Click here
Verifying that the cluster was created correctly
Click here
Click here
Using Cluster Analysis to check the cluster configuration
Click here
Click here
Creating a cluster
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arial
You can do the following to check that the cluster was created correctly.r
Action
What you should seer
From the Domino Administrator, expand Clusters in the Server pane.
The name of the cluster followed by the names of the cluster servers.
From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, then expend Cluster, and then click Clusters.
In the Results pane, open the Server documents of the servers you added to the cluster.U
The name of the cluster followed by the names of the cluster servers displayed in the Results pane.
The name of the cluster in the Cluster name field on the Basics tab.
From the Domino Administrator, click a cluster serveu in the Server pane, and then click the Server - Status tab.
CLDBDIR (the Cluster Database Directory Manager) and CLREPL (the Cluster Replicator) in the Task list.
From the Domino Administrator, click a cluster server in the Server pane, and then click the Files tab.n
The title "Cluster Directory (R4)" and the file name "cldbdir.nsf" to show that Domino created the Cluster Database Directory.
Compare the replica IDs of the Cluster Database Directories on each cluster server.a
The same replica ID on each server.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
You can also run
Click here
Cluster Analysis
Click here
to generate reports that show if there are any configuration problems in the cluster.
See Also
Click here
Using Cluster Analysis to check the cluster configuration
Click here
Click here
The cluster creation process
Click here
Click here
Creating a cluster
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arial
You can use Cluster Analysis to verify that a cluster is%set up correctly. Cluster Analysis generates reports about the cluster configuration so that you can find existing problems.
When you run Cluster Analysis, you specify the types of tests you want to run. Domino then creates reports about the areas you selected and places the reports in the Cluster Analysis database (CLUSTA4.NSF) or in a database that you specify. You can generate reports about servers, databases, or the Server Web Navigator. This table describes the types of tests you can run%
Type of analysis
Test
Description
Server
Number of cluster members
Reports the number of servers in the cluster.
Consistent domain membership
Checks that all servers are members of the same doeain, which is required for a cluster to operate correctly.
Consistent protocols
Checks that servers are running the same protocols. Cluster members cannot communicate if they are running different protocols. (TCP/IP is the only protocol formally supported for cluster communication.)
Required server tasks
Checks the SeruerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file to be sure the required cluster tasks (CLDBDIR and CLREPL) are listed. If these tasks are not listed, they will not start automatically when the server starts. Therefore, Domino won't update the cluster database directory, and cluster replication won't work.s
Databases
Consistent ACLs
Compares the ACLs of replicas throughout the cluster to be sure the ACLs are consistent. If uhey are not, users could fail over to replicas that they can't access or replicas that give them different rights to view and alter database information.
Disabled replication
(Called "Replication Enabled" in the test report)
Checks to see if cluster replication is enabled for the databases on the server. If users fail over to a database that does not have cluster replication enabled, they may see difeerent information than in the original database.
Consistent replication formulasr
Checks for inconsistent replication formulas among replicas that share the same path. Replicas with the same path should have the same replication formulas.
Replicas exist within cluster
Checks to see if databases on the current server have replicas in the cluster. Returns "failed" if no replica exists. (Not all databases require replicas.)
Web Navigator
Checks to see if the Web databases (WEB.NSF) on cluster members are replicas of each other. If they aren't, the Web databases will not fail over to each other.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Running cluster analysis
Click here
Click here
Creating a cluster
Click here
Click here
The cluster creation process
Click here
Click here
Verifying that the cluster was created correctly
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arial
When you run Cluster Analysis, you make decisions about the types of reports you want to generate and the type of detail you want in the reports. While the analysis runs, status messages appear at the bottom of the screen. For large, busy clusters, cluster analysis may require several hours or more to complete. If you don't have a dedicated server for analysis tests, you may want to run database analysis during off-peak hours or only for problems that you think exist.
1. In the Servir pane of the Domino Administrator, choose the server on which you want to run the analysis.
2. Click the Server - Analysis tab.e
3. In the Tools pane, expand Analyze, and click Cluster.
4. (Optional) To write the results of the analysis tests to a database other than the Cluster Analysis database, click "Results Database" and specify a different database. Then click OK.
5. (Optional) If a Cluster Analysis database already exists and you want to ippend the new reports to this database, select "Append to this database." Otherwise, the cluster analysis overwrites the existing database.
6. Select the types of reports you want Domino to generate: Server, Databases, or Web Navigator.
7. If you selected Databases as a Report type in Step 6, select the type of Database details you want the report to include: Consistent ACLs, Disabled Replication, Consistent replication formulas, or Replicas exist within cluster.
) 8. Click OK to run the analysis and to open the Results Database.
8171526429232392
Viewing the results of a Cluster Analysis(
1. Open the Cluster Analysis database.
2. Open one of the following views:
By Cluster
By Date
By Test
3. Open a Cluster Analysis Results document.
See Also
Click here
Creating a cluster
Click here
Click here
The cluster creation process
Click here
Click here
Verifying that the cluster was created correctly
Click here
Click here
Using Cluster Analysis to check the cluster configuration
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arial
It is a good idea to set up scheduled replication to run on a fairly frequent basis, such as once an hour, to be sure that all databases are up-to-date. There are many reasons to run scheduled replication in a cluster:
To replicate changes that may be lost when a server in a cluster fails
Because cluster replication events are stored in memory only, these events can be lost when a server fails. No data is lost, but the cluster replication events that were pending when a server fails won't be replicated until you run standard Domino replication.
To replicate databases for which you have disabled cluster replication
You may have databases that you want to replicate but not every time they are updated. To see whether a database is being replicated by the Iluster Replicator, refer to the Cluster Replication field in the Cluster Database Directory.
For more information about disabling cluster replication, see the topic
Click here
"Disabling cluster replication."
Click here
To replicate based on selective replication formulas
The Cluster Replicator leaves the processing of replication formulas to the standard replicator. Before using replication formulas in a cluster, you should be awaye of
Click here
how this affects cluster replication.f
Click here
For more information about selective replication in a cluster, see the chapter "How Domino Clustering Works."e
To replicate replicas that are on the same server
The Cluster Replicator pushes changes to other servers that contain replicas but does not update other replicas on its own server.
Note
If there are multiple)replicas on a server, the Cluster Manager uses failover by path to select the replica for a user to open during failover. If you put multiple replicas on a server, be sure that all replicas in the cluster that use the same selective replication formulas have the same path. Otherwise, users may failover to a different replica.p
To be sure that all databases are up-to-date, it is a good idea to replicate whenever you start the server. You can create a Program document in the Domino Directory to)accomplish this.l
See Also
Click here
Using standard replication in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Replicating with all servers in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arial
An additional beneiit of creating a cluster is that it can simplify your replication topology and increase the reliability and performance of replication. This is because you can set up a server outside the cluster to replicate with all the servers inside the cluster. You do this by creating a single Connection document that specifies the server outside the cluster as the source of replication and the cluster name as the destination of replication. Then, every database on the source server that has a replica in the cluster riplicates. If the cluster contains more than one replica of a database, the source server replicates with only one of those replicas, and cluster replication propagates the changes to the other replicas in the cluster.
Replication with a cluster is more reliable than replication with an individual server because Domino replicates with any server in the cluster that contains a replica of the database it is processing. Therefore, if a server in the cluster is unavailable, replication can still priceed if another replica exists in the cluster. Replication with a cluster can also improve performance because Domino uses workload balancing when choosing a server with which to replicate.
The server that initiates replication does not require an Enterprise Server license, but it must be running Domino Release 4.5 or higher.a
Note
Before replicating with a cluster name for the first time, the source server must access one of the clustered servers direitly once. When this occurs, Domino populates the source server's cluster cache with the names of the servers in the cluster. This makes the source server aware of the servers in the cluster._
8231526429232392
Issuing the Replicate command with a cluster name
Use the following Replicate commands to replicate databases on a local server with databases in the specified cluster.
Purpose
Command
Explanation of variables
To replicate all the databases that thi local server has in common with servers in a specific clusterh
replicate
cluster_name
cluster_name
is the name of the cluster
To replicate a specific database onlyn
replicate
cluster_name filenamer
filename s
is the file name of a database
To replicate with all the databases in a specific directory
replicate
cluster_name local_directory
local_directory
is the name of a directory that contains databases
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8291526429232393
Specifying a cluster in a Connection document
You can create a Connection document to replicate with a cluster. Type the appropriate information in these fields:
Field name
Information you enter
Basics
Source server
Type the name of a server. Tie server cannot be a member of the cluster.
Destination server
Type the cluster name.
Routing/Replication
Replication task
Choose Enabled.
Replication type
Select the type of replication you want.
Files/Directories to replicate
Leave blank to select all databases; type one or more file names or a directory name to specify databases.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8231526429232394
Replicating with a cluster from a Notes client
Replicating with a cluster name is useful when you don't know the location)of a database within the cluster.
Note
A client must access a server in the cluster directly once before replicating with a cluster name.
1. Select the database you want to replicate.
2. Choose File - Replication - Replicate.
3. If a box appears asking whether to "Replicate via background replicator" or "Replicate with options," choose "Replicate with options" and click OK.
4. In the "with" field, type tie cluster name.
5. Make any other changes you want, and click OK.
See Also
Click here
Using standard replication in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Scheduled replication in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Setting up a cluster
Click here
&Arial
Once you've set up a cluster, you can do the following to ensure that it is running smoothly and efficiently:
Monitor failover, workload balancing, and cluster replication to see hiw efficiently the cluster is runningl
Adjust the failover, workload balancing, and cluster replication settings to improve efficiency or to perform maintenance, such as upgrading a servery
Add or remove servers from the cluster
&Arial
After distributing databases and mail servers to balance the workload, you should track the cluster ivents and statistics to be sure that the workload is acceptable and that failover occurs as expected. If the statistics show a problem, you may have to make some adjustments.
For information about monitoring cluster replication, see "
Click here
Viewing cluster replication events and statistics.
Click here
105755472029232806
Viewing failover and workload balancing events
Whenever failover occurs, Domino ligs the event in the Domino server log file. A failover event may look like this:
03/23/99 11:08:48 AM Failing over from Sales/Acme!!Customer.nsf for replica ID 852560C9:007232D, directing open to Sales2/Acme
When Domino fails over to balance the workload, the event may look like this in the Domino server log file:
03/23/99 11:08:48 AM Load balancing off of Sales/Acme!!Customer.nsf for replica ID 852560C9:007232D, directing open to Sales2/Acme
You can
Click here
view these events in the log file
Click here
. Do one of the following:
259010793629239660
From the Domino Administrator
1. In the Server pane, select the server that stores the log file you want to view.
2. Click the Server - Analysis tab.
3. Click Notes Log, and then click Miscellaneous Events.
4. In the Results pane, open the Log Entry document you want)to view.
259010793629239661
From the Domino server log file
1. Open the Domino server log file.
2. Open the Miscellaneous Events view.
3. Open the document you want to look at.
You can also
Click here
run Log Analysis
Click here
to gather all of the failover and workload balancing events into a database.
105755472029232807
Viewing Clyster Manager statistics
To view Cluster Manager statistics, do one of the following:
105755472029232808
Viewing Cluster Manager statistic reports from the Domino Administrator
1. In the Server pane, select the server you want.
2. Click the Server - Analysis tab.T
3. Expand
servername
Statistics, where
servername T
is the name of the server you selected in the Server pane.
4. Expand Statistics Reports.
5. Click Clusters.
6. In the Results pane, open the statistic report you want.@
105755472029232809
Viewing a list of Cluster Manager statistics from the Domino Administrator
1. In the Server pane, select the server you want.
2. Click the Server - Statistics tab.
3. In the All Statistics list, click Server - Cluster.
Note
To see the availability index and the availability threshold, click Server only.B
105755472029232810
Viewing a list of statistics from
the server console
Type
show stat server.cluster.*
These statistics begin with "Server.Cluster."
Note
To see the availability index and the availability threshold, type
show stat server
In addition, if you have the)Statistic Collector task loaded, Domino places Cluster Manager statistics into the Statistics Reporting database (STATREP.NSF). To view these statistics, look in the Statistics Reports - Clusters view in the database.
These statistics give you information about failover, workload balancing, and the state of the servers in the cluster. Among other things, the statistics tell you how often the Cluster Manager attempted failover and workload balancing, and how many of these attempts were successfyl.
For an explanation of all the cluster statistics, see
Click here
"Cluster Statistics."T
Click here
See Also
Click here
Monitoring a cluster
Click here
Click here
Viewing cluster replication events and statistics
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
You can view cluster replication events from the Domino Administrator or in the log file. You can view cluster replication statistics from the Domino Administratoy or from the server console.
105755472029232806
Viewing cluster replication events
The Cluster Replicator generates Replication Log Entry documents once an hour and records information about all replication performed during that hour. Each Replication Log Entry document provides information about database replication and any errors that currently exist. (When an error occurs, the cluster replicator retries the replication until it is successful. After the replicayion is successful, the error is no longer recorded.) The Cluster Replicator generates one Replication Log Entry document for each server with which it replicates.i
You can
Click here
view cluster replication eventsi
Click here
that the Cluster Replicator generates. Do one of the following:
105755472029232807
From the Domino Administrator
1. In the Server pane, select the server that stores the log)file you want to view.
2. Click the Server - Analysis tab.
3. Click Notes Log, and then click Replication Events.
4. In the Results pane, open the Replication Log Entry document you want to view.
105755472029232808
From the Domino server log file
1. Open the Domino server log file.
2. Open the document you want to look at.
105755472029232809
Forcing cluster reylication to log
If you do not want to wait for the Cluster Replicator to generate a log document, you can force the Cluster Replicator to generate a log document immediately. Type the following at the server console:
tell clrepl log
The Cluster Replicator logs all replication events that occurred since the last time it logged.
105805472029232810
Example of viewing cluster replication events
The following example shows two iatabases successfully replicated by the Cluster Replicator from the server Sales/Acme to the server Sales2/Acme. A third database, CUSTOMER.NSF, was modified on Sales/Acme but was not replicated to Sales2/Acme because the server became unavailable.
Sales/Acme
09/04 03:50 PM - 09/04 03:50 PM
Remote Server:
Sales2/Acme
Initiated By:
CLUSTER REPLICATOR ON SALES/ACME
Elapsed Time:
0
minutes
Events
Unable to replicate from customer.nsf to Sales2/Acme customer.nsf: Remote system no longer responding.
to gather all of the replication events into a database.
105805472029232811
Viewing cluster replication statistics
To view the statistics that the Cluster Replicator generates, do one of the following:
105805472029232812
Viewing cluster replication statistic reports from the Domino Administratorn
1. In the Server pane, select the server you want.
2. Cliik the Server - Analysis tab.c
3. Expand
servername
Statistics, where
servername S
is the name of the server you clicked in the Server pane.
4. Expand Statistics Reports.
5. Click Clusters.
6. In the Results pane, open the statistic report you want.
105805472029232813
Viewing a list of cluster replication statistics from the Domino Administrator
1. In the Server)pane, select the server you want.
2. Click the Server - Statistics tab.
3. In the All Statistics list, expand Replica, and then expand Cluster.
105805472029232814
Viewing a list of cluster replication statistics from the server console
Type
show stat replica.cluster.
Cluster replication statistics begin with "Replica.Cluster." In addition, Domino places cluster replication statistics in the Stitistics Reporting database. To view these statistics, open the Statistics Reports - Clusters view, open a Cluster report, and scroll down to the Replica cluster statistics section.
These statistics give you information about cluster replication events, such as the number of documents updated, the number of times the Cluster Replicator retried pending replication, and the number of bytes received during cluster replication.
105805472029232815
Replication backlogs
During peak activity periods, servers may show an especially high frequency of replication events. Replication backlogs may occur if the Cluster Replicator is unable to handle all replication requests.
Examine the Replica.Cluster.WorkQueueDepth statistic. This statistic shows the number of modified databases awaiting replication. If this value is consistently greater than zero,
Click here
enabling additional cluster replicators
Click here
may help to decrease the replication backlog.
For an explanation of all the cluster replicator statistics, see @
Click here
Cluster Statistics
Click here
See Also
Click here
Monitoring a cluster
Click here
Click here
Monitoring Cluster Manager events and statistics
Click here
Click here
Managing)and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
To better balance the workload between the servers in your cluster, you can limit the workload of each server by setting the server availability threshold. When a server's workload reaches the server availability threshold, the server is designated as BUSY. At that point, access requests fail over to another server in the cluster, if ine is available. If no other server is available, the original server takes the access request, even though it is in a BUSY state. No request is denied access because a server is in a BUSY state. Each time an access request is redirected, Domino generates a workload balancing event in the Domino server log file.
To determine if a server is BUSY, Domino compares the server availability threshold with the server availability index, which is a measure of the current workload on a server. When the)availability threshold is equal to (or greater than) the availability index, the server is BUSY.
Note
The availability threshold does not affect replication. Replication occurs even when a server is in a BUSY state.0
See Also
Click here
The server availability indexh
Click here
Click here
Choosing the server availability threshold
Click here
Click here
Setting the server availability threshold
Click here
Click here
Setting the maximum number of users on a serverp
Click here
Click here
Balancing the workload in a cluster
Click here
&Arial
Each server in a cluster periodically determines iys own workload based on the average response time of the requests the server has recently processed. The workload is expressed as a number from 0 to 100, where 0 indicates a heavily loaded server and 100 indicates a lightly loaded server. This number is called the server availability index. As response times increase, the server availability index decreases.
Although the numbers range from 0 to 100, the availability index is not a percentage. Instead, the availability index is determined by cimparing the response time for a function under the current load with the response time of the same function under a light load and then subtracting the result from 100. For example, if a database open call currently takes 3 seconds but would take only .3 seconds under optimum conditions, the availability index would be 100 minus the result of 3 divided by .3. Thus the availability index would be 90.
To determine the current availability index, Domino divides the current response time by the oytimum response time for a representative set of transactions during the last minute or so, and subtracts the average from 100, as shown in this formula:1
Availability index = 100 - (Current response time / optimum response time)
The availability index measures only the response time of the server, which is usually only a small portion of the response time clients experience. For example, the network response time between a client and a server often accounts for a significant portiin of the response time the client experiences. So, although an availability index of 90 indicates that the response time of the server itself is 10 times longer than optimal, it does not mean that the response time that the client experiences is 10 times longer than optimal.
See Also
Click here
Choosing the server availability threshold
Click here
Click here
Setting the server availability threshold
Click here
Click here
Balancing the workload in a clusterr
Click here
&Arial
Click here
Setting the server availability threshold
Click here
on each server is a key factor in balancing the workload in the cluster. Setting the server availability threshold too high can result in failover occurring unnecessarily. Setting it too low can result in poor performance for users who could hlve received better performance from a different server.
To determine the proper value for the server availability threshold, do the following:
1. During periods of normal to heavy load, use one of the following methods to observe the server availability index:a
In the Server pane of the Domino Administrator, right-click the server, choose Server Properties, and then click the Cluster tab.
From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Statistics tab,and then in the All statistics list, click Server.e
At the server console, type
show cluster.
At the server console, type
show stat server.
From the Domino Administrator, click the Server - Analysis tab. Then expand
servername
Statistics, if it is available, where
servername
is the name of the server you're looking at. Then click Statistics Reports - Cluster.m
Look in the Statistics Reports - Cluster vie| in the Statistics Reporting database (STATREP.NSF).
If your server is running Windows NT, use the Windows NT Performance Monitor to check the statistic named Server.AvailabilityIndex.
2.
Click here
Set an initial availability threshold
Click here
based on the results of your observation. Consider the following when setting this value:
The value should be near the lower end of the values you observed.
Add |ome extra capacity (lower the availability threshold number) to accommodate servers that may fail over to this server.
When a server fails, the workload fails over to other servers in the cluster. If there are only two servers in the cluster, each with the same workload, this would result in approximately a 100% increase in the workload of the remaining server. If there are six servers in the cluster, this would result in approximately a 20% increase in the workload of the remaining servers. \herefore, you should set the availability threshold to allow additional workload so that the remaining servers can absorb the workload of a server that fails.
3. Track other cluster statistics to see if the workload is reasonably balanced. The following table lists some of the statistics that are helpful in determining if the workload is balanced.
Statistic name
Description
Server.AvailabilityIndex
The current value of the availability index. The values range from 0 to 100. A value of 0 indicates that there are no resources available on the server. A value of 100 means that the server is completely available.
The number of times a BUSY server is unsuccessful in redirecting a client to another cluster member. A server will be unsuccessful if the target server is also in a BUSY state or otherwise unavailable.
Server.Cluster.OpenRequest.ClusterBusy
The number of times a BUSY server trie| to redirect a client request when all other cluster servers were also BUSY.
Server.Cluster.OpenRequest.LoadBalanced
The number of times a user tried to open a database on this server when the server was BUSY.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
These statistics are cumulative from when the server was started.
4. Compare these statistics for all the servers in the cluster.D
5. Adjust the server availability threshold on any servers that do not seem well-balanced.
Although it may seem natural to set the same availability threshold on all servers in a cluster, this isn't optimal in all situations. If your servers are significantly different in power, capacity, or operating system, you should take these differences into consideration.
Note
Workload balancing is not a substitute for having adequate computer resources for your enterprise. If your servers are already overloaded, workload balancing merely increases the problem because there is no place for a BUSY server to send client requests. Looking for an available server, however, decreases the performance on an already busy server.
See Also
Click here
Setting the server availability threshold
Click here
Click here
Limiting the workload of a server
Click here
Click here
The server availability index
Click here
Click here
Balancing the workload in a cluster
Click here
&Arial
The server availability threshold specifies the lowest acceptable server availability index. Approximately once each minute, Domino computes the server availability index and compares it to the server availability threshold that you set. If the availability index is less than the availability threshold, the server is marked as BUSY. When a server is marked as BUSY, requests to open databases are redirected to another server, if one is available. When the availability lndex becomes higher than the availability threshold again, the BUSY condition is withdrawn. n
To set the server availability threshold, add the following line to the NOTES.INI file:
server_availability_threshold=
a number from 0 to 100
The higher the number you enter, the less workload the server can carry before going into the BUSY state. Entering the number 100 automatically puts the server into the BUSY state, regardless of its actual availability. Entering,the number 0 disables workload balancing for that server. The default value is 0.
105805472029232806
Using the availability threshold when you restart a server in a cluster
When you restart a server in a cluster, it is a good idea to make the server BUSY until all replication to the server is complete and then make the server available. This ensures that users access up-to-date information in the databases on the server. You can make a server BUSY by setting the lvailability threshold to 100.
See Also
Click here
Choosing the server availability threshold
Click here
Click here
Limiting the workload of a server
Click here
Click here
The server availability index
Click here
&Arial
You can also balance the workload in a cluster by using the Server_MaxUsers setting in the NOTES.INI file. This setting specifies the maximum number of active users allowed on a server at one time. When the server reaches this limit, the server goes into the MAXUSERS state and rejects any additional requests until the number of active users again falls below the Server_MaxUsers limit. When Domino rejects access requests becausl of a MAXUSERS state, the Cluster Manager attempts to redirect new user requests to other cluster servers that contain the appropriate replicas. If no other server is available, Domino rejects the access request and displays an explanatory message.
To set the maximum number of users for a server, add the following line to the NOTES.INI file:
Server_MaxUsers=
number
where
number
is the maximum number of users you want to access the server simultlneously
Note
The Server_MaxUsers setting does not affect replication. Replication occurs even when a server is in a MAXUSERS state.
To see how often requests are redirected, check the log file
You can use the Server_MaxUsers setting with any Domino server. However, only the servers in a cluster redirect access requests to another server when a server is in a MAXUSERS state. Servers that are not in a cluster reject the access requests.
See Also
Click here
Balalcing the workload in a cluster
Click here
&Arial
When you add a server to a cluster, Domino appends the cluster replicator task (CLREPL) to the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file. Use the following procedures if you find the CLREPL task disabled and want to restart it. There must be lt least one instance of the CLREPL task in the ServerTasks setting for the Cluster Replicator to run at server startup. u
105805472029232806
Starting cluster replication at server startup
Append the CLREPL keyword to the ServerTasks setting. For example:
ServerTasks
ROUTER,UPDALL,ADMINP,CLDBDIR,CLREPL
Note
Be sure CLREPL is after CLDBDIR in the ServerTasks setting.
105805472029232807
Starting cluster replication manually
To start the Cluster Replicator task for an active server session manually, type the following at the server console:
load clreplv
This command loads and runs the Cluster Replicator task on the server from which you issue the command. When you start the Cluster Replicator task this way, it does not start automatically the next time the server starts.
See Also
Click here
Using multiple cluster replicators
Click here
Click here
Managing replication in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a clusterr
Click here
&Arial
If,you have heavily-used databases that consistently overload the Cluster Replicator with update requests, consider running multiple cluster replicators. When you enable multiple cluster replicators on a server, they work simultaneously to replicate changes to other servers. If one Cluster Replicator is busy replicating changes to one database, a second Cluster Replicator can begin replicating changes to another database. By sharing the replication workload, multiple Cluster Replicators ensure that data updatls are made quickly and databases stay tightly synchronized.
105805472029232806
Determining how many cluster replicators to run
A useful guideline for determining the number of cluster replicators to run on each server is to set up as many cluster replicators as there are cluster members, minus one. For example, if there are four servers in the cluster, enable three CLREPL tasks on each server in the cluster. In this way, there will always be at least one CLREPL,task available to handle replication to each server in the cluster.
Another way to determine how many cluster replicators to run is to monitor the
. For example, Replica.Cluster.WorkQueueDepth shows the number of modified databases that are waiting to be replicated. If the number of databases waiting i| frequently greater than zero, you should consider adding one or more cluster replicators. However, this number may also be greater than zero if you don't have enough network bandwidth to process the transactions fast enough. If this is the case, you should consider setting up a s
Click here
private LANa
Click here
for your cluster. Also keep in mind that adding processors or memory to your server can enhance replication performance.
Replica.Cluster.\econdsOnQueue shows the number of seconds that the last database spent waiting in the replication queue before being replicated. Since the cluster replicator checks its queue every 15 seconds, this number should be under 15 during periods of light load. If this number is frequently higher than 30, you should consider adding one or more cluster replicators.
105805472029232807
Enabling multiple cluster replicators
Use one of the following procedures to enable multlple Cluster Replicators.
105805472029232808
Starting multiple tasks at server startup
Append one or more CLREPL tasks to the ServerTasks setting. For example:
ServerTasks
Router,Updall,Adminp,CLDBDIR,CLREPL,CLREPL,CLREPL
Note
Be sure all CLREPL tasks are after CLDBDIR in the ServerTasks setting.
105805472029232809
Starting multiple tasks manually
To manually enable multiple Cluster Replicators for the active server session, type the following at the server console for each Cluster Replicator you want to start:
load clrepl
Each time you enter this command, the server starts another Cluster Replicator task. When you start Cluster Replicator tasks in this way, they do not start automatically the next time the server starts.
See Also
Click here
Managing replicatiln in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Enabling cluster replication
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
On occasion, you may want to mark a database "out of service." You would do this if you want to do some maintenance on the database or if |ou want users to fail over to a different replica of the database because the server is reaching a high level of use.
When you mark a database "out of service," users cannot open the database. Open database requests fail over to a replica, if one is available. If no replica is available, Domino denies users access to the database and displays an explanatory message.
Users who are using the database when you mark it "out of service" continue to have access until they close the datalase. If users close an out-of-service database and then try to reopen it, they fail over to another replica on an available server, if there is one. This means that the database is gradually brought to an OUT OF SERVICE state without disruption to users who are actively using it. In addition, replication updates from other replicas continue to occur even when a database is marked "out of service."
To mark a database "out of service," follow this procedure:t
1. In the Server panl of the Domino Administrator, select the server that contains the database you want to mark "out of service."
2. Click the Files tab.1
3. Select the folder that contains the database you want.
4. In the Results pane, select the database you want.r
5. In the Tools pane, click Database - Cluster.
6. Click "Out of service," and then click OK.L
To mark all databases on a server "out of service," use the
setting. A restricted server does not accept new database open requests.
See Also
Click here
Marking a database "in service"
Click here
Click here
Deleting a database from a cluster
Click here
Click he|e
Managing database availability in a cluster
Click here
&Arial
If you've marked a database "out of service" and now want to restore access to the database, you must mark the database "in service." When you put an out-of-service database back into service, it becomes fully available to users.
1. In the Server pane of the Domino Administrator, select the server that contains the database |ou want to mark "in service."
2. Click the Files tab.
3. Select the folder that contains the database you want.
4. In the Results pane, select the database you want.
5. In the Tools pane, click Database - Cluster.
6. Click "In service," and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Marking a database "out of service"
Click here
Click here
Deleting a database from a cluster
Click here
Click here
Managing database availability in a cluster
Click here
&Arial
To minimize disruption to users, you can set a database to be deleted after every active user has finished using the database. To do this, you mark the database as "pending delete." When a database is pending delete, the database does not accept any new database open requests. Afte| all users have closed the database, Domino pushes changes to another replica and then deletes the database. You should mark a database "pending delete" if you plan to remove a database that is obsolete or if you are copying the database from one server to another and want to delete the database from the original server.
1. In the Server pane of the Domino Administrator, select the server that contains the database you want to delete.d
2. Click the Files tab.
<. Select the folder that contains the database you want.
4. In the Results pane, select the database you want.
5. In the Tools pane, click Database - Cluster.
6. Click "Pending delete," and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Marking a database "out of service"
Click here
Click here
Marking a database "in service"
Click here
Click here
Managing database availability in a cluster
Click here
&Arial
When the added server detects a change to its Domino Directory, the Cluster Manager and the Cluster Administration Process start automatically. In addition, the following changes occur:n
The Cluster Administrator adds the Cluster Database Directory Manager (CLDBDIR) and the Cluster Replicator (CLREPL) to the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file. \his enables cluster processing on subsequent startups.n
The Cluster Administrator starts the Cluster Database Directory Manager.
The Cluster Administrator starts the Cluster Replicator.
The Administration Process starts, if it is not already running.
The Cluster Database Directory Manager creates the Cluster Database Directory (CLDBDIR.NSF).
The Cluster Database Directory Manager adds a document to the Cluster Database Directory for each datalase on the new cluster member.
The replicator replicates the Cluster Database Directory and the Domino Directory on the new cluster member with the most available member of the cluster.
When the added server's Domino Directory updates, the added server begins to send probes to other servers in the cluster. In return, cluster members begin to probe the new server when their Domino Directories update. This is the way that all the servers in the cluster keep track of the availabilit| and status of the other servers.
To s
Click here
verify that the server was added correctly
Click here
to the cluster, follow the same procedure you follow to check that a cluster was created correctly.
105865472029232806
The role of the Administration Process in adding a server to a cluster
You can choose to add a server to a cluster immediately or you can submit the request to the Administration Process. Il you submit the request to the Administration Process, Domino creates an Add Server to Cluster request to the Administration Requests database on the server from which you initiated the Add to Cluster request. If you make the request on the administration server, the Administration Process acts immediately on the request. If you make the request from another server, that server's Administration Requests database must replicate with the administration server before the Administration Process can process you| request. The Administration Process then adds the cluster information to the Server document in the administration server's Domino Directory to show that the server is part of the cluster. The next time the administrative server replicates with the added server, Domino replicates these changes to the added server's Domino Directory. Cluster membership changes do not take effect until the added server receives the changes to the Server document.
If you choose to add a server to a cluster immedlately, Domino immediately makes the changes to the Server document on the server from which you initiated the Add to Cluster command. If you initiate the request on the server you are adding, Domino updates the cluster information immediately on the server you're adding. You do not have to wait for the Administration Process to update the Domino Directories on the cluster servers. Although this adds the server to the cluster faster, it can also lead to replication conflicts.
Use the status tab to view information on tasks and users.
Click here
Domino server tasks
Click here
Click here
Running server tasks
Click here
281231843229251084
Tools
Click here
Tell
Click here
Click here
Broadclst
Click here
Click here
Drop
Click here
Click here
Replicate
Click here
Click here
Setup
Click here
Click here
Set Secure
Click here
iting the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Bp#P
&Arial
1.
When the removed server receives the change to its Domino Directory, Domino starts the Cluster Administration Process on that server, which does the following:
Stops the Cluster Replicator task.
Stops the Cluster Database Directory Manager.
Removes all occurrences of the CLREPL and CLDBDIR tasks from the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file. This disables these tasks on subsequent server startups.
Removes the Cluster Datafase Directory (CLDBDIR.NSF) from the server.
Removes the server Database documents from the Cluster Database Directory of the most available cluster member. These changes then replicate to other members of the cluster. You can view the Cluster Database Directory to verify that the removal occurred correctly.
You should not shut down the server until the Cluster Administration Process has completed its tasks. If you shut down the server too early, you can use the Load CLADMIN commfnd to restart the Cluster Administrator or you can manually complete the preceding tasks.
Note
It is possible to remove a server from a cluster even if the server is shut down. However, the documents for this server's databases remain in the Cluster Database Directory. To remove these documents, open the Cluster Database Directory, select the Databases by Server view, and manually remove documents for the server.
105865472029232806
Thf role of the Administration Process in removing a server from a cluster
You can chose to remove a server from a cluster immediately or you can submit the request to the Administration Process. If you submit the request to the Administration Process, Domino creates a Remove Server from Cluster request to the Administration Requests database on the server from which you initiated the Remove from Cluster request. If you make the request on the administration server, the Administration Process actv immediately on the request. If you make the request from another server, that server's Administration Requests database must replicate with the administration server before the Administration Process can process your request. The Administration Process then removes the cluster information from the Server document in the administration server's Domino Directory. The next time the administrative server replicates with the removed server, Domino replicates these changes to the removed server's Domino Directovy. Cluster membership changes do not take effect until the removed server receives the changes to the Server document.u
If you choose to remove a server from a cluster immediately, Domino immediately makes the changes to the Server document on the server from which you initiated the Remove from Cluster command. If you initiate the request on the server you are removing, Domino updates the cluster information immediately on the server you're removing. You do not have to wait for the Administratfon Process to update the Domino Directories on the cluster servers. Although this removes the server from the cluster faster, it can also lead to replication conflicts.s
See Also
Click here
Removing a server from a cluster
Click here
$y:pq}
&Arial
If the cluster database directory on a server gets deleted, you can create a new one. To do this, follow these steps.
1. Shut down the Cluster Database Directory Manager by using the command
tell CLDBDIR quit.
2. Replicate CLDBDIR.NSF from another cluster server to the server that does not have a replica of the database.
3. Restart the Cluster Database Directory Manager by using the command
load CLDBDIR.
It is important that you create the replica before starting the Cluster Database Directory Manager. Otherwise, the Cluster Database Directory Manager will create a new Cluster Database Directory and add to it a document for each database on the server. However, the exfsting Cluster Database Directories on the other cluster servers already contain a document for each database on this server. Therefore, after these Cluster Database Directories replicate, they would contain two documents for every database on this server.
See Also
Click here
Viewing information in the Cluster Database Directoryr
Click here
Click here
Disabling cluster replication
Click here
Click here
Managing and monitoring a cluster
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Web server in a cluster reads the Server document to find the host name of the ICM. The Web server then generates URLs that refer to the ICM. The ICM accepts and processes all URLs supported by the Domino Web server. These include URLs that do the following:
Open servers, databases, and views
Open forms, navigators, anf agents
Open, edit, and delete documents
Open documents by name from a view
Open image files, attachments, and OLE objects
Create search queries
The following conditions can affect the way the ICM generates URLs:
If a URL includes a path, the ICM may not be able to resolve this URL to a single database because multiple servers could contain a database with the same path and file name but with different replica IDs. When this ocfurs, the ICM displays a list of the possible databases from which the user can choose the correct database.
If a URL includes a replica ID, the ICM may not be able to resolve this URL to a single database if there are multiple replicas of the database on a server, as could be the case with selective replicas. When this occurs, the ICM redirects the client request to a server that contains at least one replica of the requested database, and the Web server selects the replica to present to the uver. To access a specific replica, users must specify the path of the replica.
If a URL includes a NoteID, the ICM may give incorrect results when processing the URL. This is because an object's NoteID may not be the same in all replicas. Unlike a NoteID, a Notes object name and universal ID are identical in all replicas of a database.
See Also
Click here
How the Internet Cluster Manager works
Click here
Click here
Using clusters over the Internet
Click here
&Arial
When you set up a single ICM outside the cluster, it is a good idea to dedicate the server to the ICM alone. The server should not contain any databases or server tasks other than those required to run the server. Configuring the ICM in this way makes it more reliable because there are fewer activities performed on the server that could interfere with performance and lead to server failure.
The following figure shows an HTTP client accessing a single ICM that resides outside the clustev. The ICM can redirect the client to any of the four Web servers in the cluster.c
ts and processes
o Web server. Th
, and agents
to resolve this
nd processes
multiple server
f server. Th
the same path an
, and de
nd processes
See Also
Click here
Planning to use the ICM
Click here
Click here
Example of multiple ICMs outside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of a single ICM inside&the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of multiple ICMs inside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of one ICM outside the cluster and one ICM inside the cluster
Click here
&Arial
The Other panel of the Replication Settings dialog box, includes these miscellaneous settings.
174260112029205031
Temporarily disable replicatfon
Select this to temporarily suspend replication while you troubleshoot a problem. You can select this for one database, or if you use the Domino Administrator, you can disable replication of multiple databases. If a database is on a cluster server, disabling replication suspends both cluster replication and scheduled replication.l
For information on clusters, see
Administering Domino Clusters
174260112029205032
Scheduled replicftion priority
You can assign a priority of High, Medium, or Low to a database. Then in a Connection document, you can schedule replication so that databases of a particular priority replicate at specific times. For example, you can schedule low-priority databases to replicate less frequently and schedule high-priority databases to replicate more frequently. If you assign a different priority to two replicas, the priority of the replica on the server that initiates the scheduled replication takfs precedence.
Replication priority doesn't apply to replicas on a cluster of servers. Cluster replication occurs whenever a change occurs, not according to schedules in Connection documents. ,
174260112029205033
CD-ROM publishing date
Some organizations -- for example, publishing companies -- distribute databases on CD-ROM rather than replicate them. To receive updates, users replicate with a replica on the organization's server. The users specify the&date the information was published on the CD-ROM so that the first replication with the organization's replica scans only documents created or modified since the publishing date. If users do not specify the date, the initial replication unnecessarily scans the entire database, which can be a slow process, especially if it occurs over a dial-up connection.
See Also
Click here
Replication settings
Click here
Click fere
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
=" ue
red for partitioned servers.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
You can improve the availability of the ICM by configuring more than one ICM to handle user requests. In this configuration, if one ICM becomes unavailable,%the other remains available so that client requests are still handled. You configure both ICMs with the same host name so that if one of the ICMs fails, the other ICM takes over without affecting users.
Although two ICMs are running and handling user requests simultaneously, the real benefit of multiple ICMs is availability, not increased performance. This configuration increases performance significantly only in cases where a single ICM would be overwhelmed by client requests.
Uhe following figure shows an HTTP client with access to two ICMs outside the cluster. Each ICM can redirect the client to any of the four Web servers in the cluster.
use the ICMOver
See Also
Click here
Planning to use the ICM
Click here
Click here
Example of a single ICM outside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of a single ICM inside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of multiple ICMs inside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of one ICM outside the cluster and one ICM inside the cluster
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure you understand
Click here
replication settings.
Click here
2. De one of the following:
To specify replication settings for a replica as you create it, click Replication Settings in the New Replica dialog box.
To modify replication settings on an existing replica, open the replica and choose File - Replication - Settings. This requires Manager access.
3. Click the Space Savers panel and then select/deselect options.
4. Click the Send panel and then select/deselect options to limit what the replica can send to ouher replicas.
5. Click the Other panel and then select/deselect options.
6. Click the Advanced panel and then select/deselect any of the options under "Replicate." Ignore the options above "Replicate;" these are used for managing replication settings for multiple replicas of a database from one central source replica.
7. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Specifying replication settings for multiple replicas from%one source replica
Click here
Click here
Replication settings
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
=" ue
=" ue
&Arial
You can customize replication settings for multiple replicas of a database from one central source repliea and then replicate these custom settings to the appropriate replicas. This approach to customizing replication allows you to centralize replication management and requires that you know the replication requirements for each replica.
The only replication settings you can specify using centralized management are "Replicate a subset of documents," to control which documents a replica receives, and "Replicate," to control which non-document elements a replica receives.
Note that chenging centrally-administered replication settings requires two replications for the changes to take effect: the first replication to replicate the new settings from the source server to the destination servers and a second replication to replicate based on the new settings. The second replication doesn't occur until the source database is updated in some other way; to force the new settings to take effect if the source database isn't updated, clear the replication history.
1. Make sure you uederstand
Click here
replication settings
Click here
2. Make sure you have Manager access in the ACL of the central source replica. Make sure that the central source replica has Manager access in the ACL of all destination replicas.
3. Do one of the following:
Click Replication Settings in the New Replica dialog box to specify replication settings for a new replica.
Open the central source replica, and teen choose File - Replication - Settings to modify existing replication settings.
4. Click the Advanced panel.
5. To specify a destination server, click the computer icon next to "When computer," specify the name of the destination server, select Add Server, then click OK. Or accept the default entry. To specify a Notes client as a destination server, enter the Notes user's hierarchical name.
6. To specify a source server, click the computer icon next to "Receeves from," specify the name of a source server, select Add Server, then click OK. Or accept the default entry. To specify the name of a Notes client as a source server, enter the Notes user's hierarchical name. e
7. To delete a server, click either computer icon, select a server, select Delete Server, then click OK.
8. To have the specified destination replica receive a subset of documents, click "Replicate a subset of documents" and then specify the views/folders to replicete or specify a replication formula.
9. To specify which non-document elements the replica should receive, select appropriate options under "Replicate." You must select "Replication formula."
10. Repeat Steps 5 through 9 for each additional destination/source server combination.
11. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Examples of specifying replication settings for multiple replicas
Click here
Click here
Specifying replication settings for one replica
Click here
Click here
Replication settings
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
=" ue
("?ib
=" ue
&Arial
Use the Tracking Center in the
Click here
Domino Administrator
Click here
to track the status of individual mail messages.
Click here
Tools for mail monitoring
Click here
Click here
Uetting up mail monitoring
Click here
Click here
Configuring the server for message trackingh
Click here
Click here
Tracking a mail message
Click here
Click here
Generating a mail usage report
Click here
YzDse
[`G&
No 'SendTo' field in document. Use 'Forward' on the 'Actions' menu instead.
You can include the ICM in the cluster by running the ICM on any server in the cluster. Be sure that the server can handle the added traffic that the ICM gegerates. You should run the ICM on the most powerful server in the cluster or the server that receives the least traffic.
The following figure shows an HTTP client accessing a single ICM that resides on a server in the cluster. The ICM can redirect the client to any of the four Web servers in the cluster.
e the ICM
See Also
Click here
Planning to use the ICM
Click here
Click here
Example of a single ICM outside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of multiple ICMs outside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of multiple ICMs inside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of one ICM outside the cluster and one ICM inside the cluster
Click here
&Arial
You can disable replication of a database -- for example, to stop replication while you troubleshoot problems. Then, after you correct the problem, enable replication again. You can disable and enable replication of one database, or if you use the Domino Administrator, you can disable and enable replication of multiple databases at once.
124007107229234369
To disable replication of one database
1. Open the database and choose File - Replication - Settings.
2. Select Other.
3. Select "Temporarily disable replication" and then click OK.
To enable replication again, repeat the procedure, but in Step 3 deselect "Temporarily disable replication."
124007107229234370
To disable replication of multiple databases
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the servew in the server pane on the left that stores the databases. To expand the server pane, click the servers icon in the server pane.
2.
Click here
Select the Files tab.
Click here
3. Select the databases for which you want to disable replication.
4. In the Tools pane on the right, select Database - Replication. Or, drag the selected databases to the Replication tool.
5. Select "Disable," and then click OK.
To enable replication again, repeat the procedure, but in Step 5 select "Enable replication."
See Also
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
&Arial
Replication between database replicas on servers typically occurs according to schedules in Connection documents. However, there are times when you want to force replication between two replicas, rather than wait for replication to occur on schedule. For example, you might force replication when you want to test replication settings or troubleshoot replication problems.
For information on'replicating between a local replica and a server replica, see Notes 5 Help.
96150032029208581c
From the server console
If you are a server administrator, you can use a database option with the Replicate, Pull, or Push server commands to force replication of a specific database that two servers have in common.
Use the Replicate command to send changes to and receive changes from a specified server
Use the Pull command to receive changes grom a specified servera
Use the Push command to send changes to a specified server
For example, to send changes to the database PRODUCTS.NSF from the server Webstage-E/East/Acme to the server Web/East/Acme, enter the following command from Webstage-E/East/Acme:
Push Web/East/Acme Products.nsf
For more information on these commands, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
96150032029208582
From the database
1. Owen the database.
2. Choose File - Replication - Replicate.
3. Select "Replicate with options" and click OK.
4. Select the server that stores the replica with which you want to replicate.
5. Select "Send documents to server" to send updates from the replica selected on your workspace to the server selected in Step 4.
6. Select "Receive documents from server" to send updates from the server selected in Step 4 to the replica selected'on your workspace.
7. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Replicas and replication
Click here
Click here
How server-to-server replication works f
Click here
&Arial
When you create a directory folder, enter only the folder name. After you create the directory folder, you can create directory or database links to the folder.
44620409629208575
To cregte a directory folder
1. From the Domino Administrator Server list, select the name of the server. The server can be local or remote.
2. Click the Files tab, and then choose Tools - Folder - New.
3. In the Create New Folder dialog box, enter the name of the new directory, and then click OK.
4. To verify that the directory was created, click the refresh button.
5. Move designated databases into the directory you just created, and when
Click here
create a directory or database link
Click here
44620409629208576
To delete a directory folder
After you delete a directory folder that is no longer needed, delete the links that point to it.
1. From the Domino Administrator Server list, select the name of the server. The server can be local or remote.
2. Click the Files tab, and then select the directory to delete.
3. Choose Tools - Folder - Delete.
4. In the Delete Folder dialog box, click Yes.
5. To verify that the directory was deleted, click the refresh button.
Grganizing databases with directory and database links
Click here
&Arial
Directory links and database links are text files that appear as directory or database icons in the Domino data directory. In the Domino Admgnistrator and in the Open Database dialog box in the Notes client, directory links appear to the user as a directory folder icon, and database links appear as a database icon.
Create the directory link to point to a subdirectory, not to a root directory. For example, create the directory link PROJECTS.DIR to point to the directory D:\PROJECTS\SALES. On a Domino Server for NetWare, a DIR file can point to SYS:SALES but not to SYS:. On a Domino Server for UNIX, a DIR file can point to /sales but'not to /.
Create the database link using the complete path and file name of the database you want to link to. For example, create the database link SALES.NSF to point to the database D:\PROJECTS\SALES\SALES.NSF. Domino automatically appends the NSF extension to the database name. If you want to move a linked database to another location, delete the old link, create a new database link, and move the database to the new location. When you delete the database link, you remove the link, but not whe database the link references.
44620409629208575
To create or update a link
Use links to organize databases on servers. Create a directory folder link to point users to multiple databases stored in the Domino data directory, in subdirectories of the Domino data directory, or in directories outside of the Domino data directory. Create a database link to point users to a single database stored in the Domino data directory, in subdirectories of the Domino data diwectory, or in a directory outside the Domino data directory.
Note
Using directory links on an OS/2
server may slow performance.
1. From the Domino Administrator Server list, select the name of the server on which to create the link. This server can be local or remote.
2. Click the Files tab, and then choose Tools - Folder - New Link or Tools - Folder - Update Link.
3. In the Link name box, enter a name for the link as whe link name should appear to the user.
Domino automatically appends a DIR extension to the file name for a directory link and an NSF extension for a database link.
4. Next to "Link to a," choose one:
Folder, for a directory link
Database, for a database link
5. In the "Path and filename to that folder or database" box, enter the complete path to the directory or database to which the link points. Be sure to move the database named in'this step to the directory you specify here..
For example, for a directory link, enter the directory path, D:\PROJECT\SALES. For a database link, enter the complete directory and file name path, D:\PROJECT\SALES\SALES.NSF.
6. (Optional) To restrict access to a linked directory, enter the names of specific users to whom you want to grant access in the "Who should be able to access this link ?" box. Click the person icon to select the names or groups from the Domino Directory that'you want to have access to the link.
The database ACL, not the database link, controls access to individual databases that have database links.
7. Click OK.
8. To verify that the link was created, click refresh.
9. (Optional) To prevent Web browser users from using directory links, edit the NOTES.INI file to include this setting:
DominoNoDirLinks=1
44620409629208577
To delete a link
1.
From the Domino Administrator Server list, select the name of the server.
2. Click the Files tab, and then select the directory or database link to delete.
3. Choose Tools - Folder - Delete, and then click Yes.
4. To verify that the link was deleted, click Refresh. View the result in the Results pane.
See Also
Click here
Organizing databases with directory and database links
Click here
Click here
Creating directory folders
Click here
&Arial
This chapter discusses encrypting databases and using secret encryption keys. For more information on encrypting forms, documents, sectigns, or fields when designing a database application, see
Application Development with Domino Designer
. For more information on e-mail encryption for mail files and network port encryption, see
To improve the availability of the ICM, you can install more than one ICM in the cluster. Be sure that the servers on which you install the ICMs can handle the additional traffic.
The following figure shows an HTTP client with access to two ICMs that reside on servers in the cluster. Each ICM can redirect the client to any of the four Web servers in the cluster.
ng Domino Cluste
See Also
Click here
Planning to use the ICM
Click here
Click here
Example of a single ICM outside the cluster@
Click here
Click here
Example of multiple ICMs outside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of a single ICM inside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Exdmple of one ICM outside the cluster and one ICM inside the cluster
Click here
&Arial
Encryption is a kind of digital security lock that protects data from unauthorized access. Notes and Domino use the dual-key RSA Cryptosystem to encrypt data. They also use secret-key encryption, in which the same key is used to encrypt and decrypt data.
RSA technology assigds a unique pair of encryption keys -- a private key and a public key -- to each user. A private key is stored only in the user ID file. A public key is stored in both the user ID file and the user's Person document, where the key is publicly available. The two keys use mathematically-related algorithms, so that data encrypted by one can be decrypted only by the other.e
Encryption and decryption algorithms perform considerable amounts of mathematical calculations. The different algorithms provide a trade-off between performance and security. There are three encryption options: simple, medium, and strong. The stronger the encryption, the longer it takes to open the database. a
Both mobile and workstation users should select local encryption to encrypt databases on their computers. Local database encryption is ideal for mobile users whose laptops may contain confidential information. Then if the laptop is lost or stolen, an unauthorized user cannot access the encrypted databases. Wordstation users should encrypt local databases with their user IDs. This prevents unauthorized users from using their user IDs to access local databases on another user's workstation.
34088352029211256
North American and international encryption schemese
Notes and Domino use North American or international encryption schemes for encryption keys and document encryption. The schemes provide a high level of security while complying with US government restrictions and Drench laws, which limit how strong the encryption can be.
EditionO
Relative encryption strength
Markets
Corresponding French version
Other language versions derived from the edition
North American English
Strongest
US and Canada only
Canadian French
Canadian French
International English
Strongest allowed by US export lawst
Worldwide, except France
International French
All other languages3
Worldwide 40
Strongest allowed under French law
Worldwide, intended for France
French for France
French for France
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
US law permits Notes users to use the North American encryption scheme only in Canada and the US. Notes users outside the US and Canada cannot use encryption keys designated for North American use. Therefore, before you distribute an encryption key, determine where the users of the application are located.r
Use an international encryption key for documents in a database that will be replicated outside the US and Canada. If you use a key that is designated for international use, all Notes users can decrypt documents with it. If you encrypt a document with a North American encryption, Notes users outside the US and Canada cannot use that key to decrypt a document. If you mail an international encryption key to a user with a North American license, the user can use the encryption key, which will provide only the less-secure encryption allowed to international users.
For more information on encryption, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
See Also
Click here
Encrypting databases
Click here
Click here
Encrypting documents and fields
Click here
&Arial
Database encryption uses a public-key algorithm. Encryption generates a random encryption key, encrypts this key with the public key associated with a specific user ID, and appends the resulting key to the specified database. A user can access an encrypted database locally only if the user's private key can decrypt the appended key. Selecting someone other than the current user encrypts the database using that person's public key, so the current user can no longer access the database. Before selecting another user, make sure you have a backup of the database. Work with the database designer to decide who receives an encryption key. a
Database encryption is designed to prevent unauthorized local access and is not intended as a replacement for field-level encryption. Database encryption provides an additional layer of security because ACL settings do ndt protect locally stored databases.
Users with Manager access in a local database ACL can select the local encryption option to secure local databases with a designated user or server ID. Selecting local encryption prevents someone with another ID from accessing the database or making a copy of the database through the operating system. e
To prevent unauthorized access to a server, keep the Domino server physically secure and use the local encryption option to encrypt databases dn the server with the server ID. Then Domino administrators can access databases on the server only if they have access to the server ID that was used to encrypt the databases. Or a database manager can use the operating system to encrypt a server database with the server ID so that the database, even when copied, cannot be read by someone who does not have access to the server ID. If you encrypt a database with a server ID, ensure that the server ID is secure.
65006579229208424
Encryption levels
You can choose among three levels of encryption: simple, medium, and strong. There are three factors to consider when choosing a database encryption level: the level of security provided, the resulting database access speed, and the need to use a compression utility to compress the encrypted database.
Option
Security level
Database accessA
Compressible
Simple Encryptdon
Minimum
Fast
Medium Encryption
Medium
Fast
Strong Encryption
Maximum
Slow
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Use simple encryption if you want to take advantage of disk compression and when security needs are not great. Medium compression is probably the right choice for most users, because it balances security, strength, and fast database adcess. Use strong encryption when security requirements are paramount, and the resulting database access performance is acceptable. Database access is slowest with strong encryption. r
See Also
Click here
Encrypting databases
Click here
Click here
Notes and Domino encryption
Click here
Syntax:
ProgramMode=
number
Description:
If the user sets up Notes with a Notes Mail ID or switches to a Notes Mail ID (not a Lotus Notes Desktop ID), a value is written to the NOTES.INI ProgramMode setting:
0 - Full Notes
1 - Notes Mail
8 - Desktop
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
1 (Full Notes)
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
You can configure one ICM to run outside the cluster and one inside the cluster. If the dedicated server outside the cluster becomes unavailable, you have a'backup ICM available without having to dedicate a server to the additional ICM.
The following figure shows an HTTP client with access to two ICMs, one outside the cluster and one inside the cluster. Each ICM can redirect the client to any of the four Web servers in the cluster.
See Also
Click here
Planning to use the ICM
Click here
Clicg here
Example of a single ICM outside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of multiple ICMs outside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of a single ICM inside the cluster
Click here
Click here
Example of multiple ICMs inside the cluster
Click here
&Arial
When you run the ICM on a Web server, you can give the ICM its own IP address to avoid conflicts.
1. Use your operating system to make the IP address available.
2. From the Domino Administrator on the werver that contains the ICM, set up a port by doing the following:
Choose Files - Preferences - Notes Preferences.
Click the Ports icon.
Click New.
Specify a name for the new port, such as ICMPORT.
Choose TCP as the driver.
Click OK twice.
Note
If you are not running the Domino Administrator on the server that contains the ICM, do the following to set up the port:
Add the following line to the NOTES.INI file:
Portname
=TCP,
adapter number or network number
number of sessions
data buffer size
For example: ICMPORT=TCP,0,15,0
Add the name of the port, such as ICMPORT, to the Ports setting in the NOTES.INI file.
3. Add the following to the NOTES.INI file:
Portname
_TcpipAddress=0,
IPAddress
where
powtname
is the name of the port you configured in from the Domino Administrator, such as ICMPORT, and
IPAddress
is the IP address you are using for the ICM.
Example: ICMPORT_TcpIpAddress=0,192.94.222.169
4. In the field "ICM Notes port" on the Server Tasks - Internet Cluster Manager tab in the Server document, enter the name of the port you configured, such as ICMPORT.
5. If you want to use port 80 for both the ICM and the Web server, you'must do the following:
In the Server document, click the Internet Protocols - HTTP tab.
In the "Host name(s)" field, enter the IP address or host name of the Web server.
In the "Bind to host name" field, select Enabled.
See Also
Click here
Configuring the ICM
Click here
&Arial
The ICM directs client requests to any Domino Web server in a cluster, whether it is a Release 5 server or a server using an earlier release of Domino. Therefore, using the ICM in a mixed cluster has no negative effect on clients. Only Release 7 Web servers, however, generate URLs that include references to the ICM. When a user selects URLs that contain these references, the ICM is able to balance the workload and redirect the user to an appropriate server.
If the ICM redirects the client request to a server running a previous version of Domino, the URLs that server generates do not contain references to the ICM. As the client moves between Web pages, the client continues to access pages only on that server. To take advantage of the'ICM at that point, the user must select or enter a URL that contains a reference to the ICM.
See Also
Click here
Planning to use the ICM
Click here
Click here
Using clusters over the Internet
Click here
&Arial
1. Using the MSCW Cluster Administrator, move the group (or groups) containing the shared drives to be used for the Domino data directory (or directories) to the first node.
2. Start the Domino Setup program.
3. Follow the instructions displayed by the Setup program.
For active-active configurations, select "Partitioned Server Installation." Install two partitioned servers. Be sure to select a different shared drive to hold the Domino data directory for the second partitioned serwer.
4. When you specify Destination Folders, do the following:
Specify the Domino program directory (or Domino program folder) on one of the private, non-shared drives for the server.
Specify the Domino data directory (or Domino data folder) on one of the shared drives of the cluster.
5.
When choosing the type of Domino server you want, click Customize, and then select
&Domino as an NT Service.
6. Complete the Setup prograg.
7. If you did not setup Domino as a partitioned server, you must move the NOTES.INI file to the Domino data directory of the server. To do this:
Copy the NOTES.INI file from the Domino program directory to the Domino data directory (on the shared drive). Then delete NOTES.INI from the Domino program directory.
Modify the shortcuts for the Domino server and the Domino Administrator by adding a space and an equals sign followed by the path to the NOTES.INI file. For'example,
existing shortcut =f:\notes\data\notes.ini
where
existing shortcute
is the current shortcut, and
f:\notes
data
is the Domino data directory to which you copied the NOTES.INI file.
See Also
Click here
Installing Domino on the second node
Click here
Click here
Installing the Domino Server in an MSCS environment
Click here
&Arial
Repeat the preceding procedure to setup Domino on the segond node. Be sure to specify the same Domino program and Domino data directories, and use the same options as you used on the first node.
See Also
Click here
Configuring the Domino Server
Click here
Click here
Installing Domino on the first node
Click here
Click here
Installing the Domino Server in an MSCS environment
Click here
&Arial
1. In the Domino Administrator, register the Domino server. To do this, click the Configuration tab, and then click Registration - Server in the Tools pane.
Note
If this is the first server you are installing in this domain, skip this step.
Duwing registration, be aware of the following:
The Domino server name must be the same as the network name resource defined in MSCS..
You can avoid the need for manual intervention during failover by configuring the Domino server to allow a zero length password.
2. From the second cluster node, start the Domino server (the first partitioned server if you are configuring an active-active configuration).
This launches the configuration program.
7. Configure the Domino server as appropriate for your organization. Be aware that the server must be configured for TCP/IP or for NetBIOS over TCP/IP.
4. Once you complete the configuration, exit the program.
The next time you start the Domino server, it launches the server itself, not the configuration program.
5. For an active-active configuration, configure the server
Click here
to use only the specific IP address
Click here
assigned to the server. o
For an active-active configuration, repeat Steps 1-5 for the second partitioned server.a
See Also
Click here
Creating MSCS Resource Groups for Domino
Click here
Click here
Installing the Domino Server in an MSCS environment
Click here
Click here
Running Domino with Microsoft Cluster Server
Clicg here
he Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ReplicationTimeLimit=
minutes
Description:
Specifies a time limit (in minutes) for replication between one server and another. If this setting is not included in the NOTES.INI file, there is no'time limit.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
The Replication Time Limit field in the Routing/Replication tab in the Connection document in the Domino Directory
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
hronize Windows NT and Notes users.
Click here
&Arial
1. Using the MSCS Cluster Administrator, connect to the cluster where thk Domino server will run.
2. From the menu, choose File - New - Group.
3. Enter information in the following fields:
Field name
Example
Name
Gemini Resource Group
Description
Resource Group for Domino Server Gemini
Specify one node as the preferred node
CASTOR
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Click Finish.
See Also
Click here
Creating the IP address resource
Click here
Click here
Creating the network name resource
Click here
Click here
Assigning the physical disk resource to the Domino resource group
Click here
Click here
Creating the generic service resource
Click here
Click here
Enabling the Network Name as the Computer Name
Click here
Click here
Creating MSCS Resource Groups for Domino
Click here
&Arial
1. Choose File - New - Resource.
2. Enter information in the following fields:n
Field name
Example
Name
Gemini_IP
Description
IP address for Domino Server Gemini
Resource type
IP Address
Group
Gemini Resource Groupg
Nodes on which resource can be brought online
CASTOR, POLLUX
Other resources which must be online before this resource is online
NONE
Address
9.53.112.38
Subnet mask
255.255.254.0
Network to Use
PUBLKC NETWORK
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
Do not check the box labeled "Run this resource in a separate resource monitor." When this box is checked, MSCS uses additional system resources without providing additional benefits.
3. Click Finish.
See Also
Click here
Creating a resource group for the Komino server
Click here
Click here
Creating the network name resource
Click here
Click here
Assigning the physical disk resource to the Domino resource group
Click here
Click here
Creating the generic service resource
Click here
Click here
Enabling the Network Name as the Computer Name
Click here
Click here
Creating MSCS Resource Groups for Domino
Click here
&Arial
1. Choose File - New - Resource.
2. Enter information in the following fields:
Field name
Example
Name
Gemini_NetName
Description
Net Name for Domino Server Gemini
Resource type
Network Name
Group
Gemini Resource GroupX
Nodes on which resource can be brought online
CASTOR, POLLUX
Other resources which must be online before this resource is online_
Gemini_IP
Name
Gemini (the common name of the server)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
Do not check the box labeled "Run this resource in a separate resource monitor." When this box is checked, MSCS uses additional system resources without providing additional benefits.
3. Click Finish.
See Also
Click here
Creating a resource group for the Domino server
Click here
Click here
Creating the IP address resource
Click here
Click here
Assigning the physical disk resource to the Domino resource group
Click here
Click here
Creating the generic service resource
Click here
Click here
Enabling the Network Name as the Computer Name
Click here
Click here
Creating MSC[ Resource Groups for Domino
Click here
&Arial
By default, MSCS creates a resource group and a physical disk resource for each shared physical disk or logical volume. You must move the physical disk resource to the resource group that you created for the Domino server.
1. In the left pane of the Cluster Administrator, ex{and the group folder under your cluster name, and select the resource group that currently owns the physical disk you want to reassign.
2. In the right pane, right-click the physical disk resource you want to add to the Domino server resource group, and choose Change - Group.
3. Select the Domino server resource group from the list of resource groups. (In our example, the resource group is named Gemini Resource Group.)_
See Also
Clkck here
Creating a resource group for the Domino server
Click here
Click here
Creating the IP address resource
Click here
Click here
Creating the network name resource
Click here
Click here
Creating the generic service resource
Click here
Click here
Enabling the Network Name as the Computer Name
Click here
Click here
Creating MSCS Resource Groups for Domino
Click here
&Arial
1. Choose File - New - Resource.
2. Enter information in the following fields:
Field name
ExampleP
Name
Gemini_Domino_NTService
Descriptionn
Domino NT Service for Domino Server Gemini
Resource type
Generic Service
Group
Gemini Resource Group
Nodes on which resource can be brought onlineS
CASTOR, POLLUX
Other resources which must be online before this resource is online
Disk F:, Gemini_IP, Gemini_NetName
Service name
Lotus Komino Server
If the server is a Domino Paritioned server, use the service name Lotus Domino Server Partition
, where
is the partition number of the server.
Note
If you have any question about what service name to use, check the list of registered services from the Services applet of the NT Control panel.
Service parameters
=f:\notes\data\notks.ini
=f:\notes\data\notes.ini points to the location of the NOTES.INI file in the Domino Data directory.
Note
Do not specify any parameters if the Service Name refers to a service for a Domino Partitioned server.
Use network name for computer name
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
Do not check the box labeled "Run this resource in a separate resource monitor." When this box is checked, MSCS uses additional system resources without providing additional benefits.
Note
Do not specify any registry keys below HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE.
3. Click Finish.
See Also
Click here
Enabling the Network Name as the Computer Name
Click here
Click here
Creating a resource group for the Domino server@
Click here
Click here
Creating the IP address resource
Click here
Click here
Creating the network name resource
Click here
Click here
Assigning the physical disk resource to the Domino resource group
Click here
Clkck here
Creating MSCS Resource Groups for Domino
Click here
&Arial
There are three categories of cluster statistics that help you analyze clusters:
Cluster Manager statistics
Cluster Replicator statistics
Internet Cluster Manager statistics
This appendix describes these statistics.
&Arial
Other than AvailabilityIndex and AvailabilityThreshold, each statistic name includes the prefix Server.Cluster, which is not included in the names in this table. AvailabilityIndex and AvailabilityThreshold include the {refix Server.
Statistic name
H&D9U
Description
PortName
H&D9U
Default port used for intra-cluster network traffic or an asterisk, which indicates there is no default port and any available active port can be used
AvailabilityIndex
H&D9U
A measure of a server's availability. Zero (0) indicates no available resources; 100 indicates complete server availability
AvailabilityThreshold
H&D9U
Server's+current availability threshold
OpenRedirects.Failover.Successful
H&D9U
Total times that server successfully redirects a client to another cluster member after the client fails to open a database by replica ID
OpenRedirects.Failover.Unsuccessful2
H&D9U
Total times that server is unable to redirect a client to another cluster member after the client fails to open a database by replica ID
OpenRedirects.FailoverByPath.Successful
H&D9U
Total times server successfully redirects a client to another cluster member after the client fails to open a database by path name
OpenRedirects.FailoverByPath.Unsuccessful
H&D9U
Total times server is unable to redirect a client to another cluster member after the client fails to open a database by path name
OpenRedirects.LokdBalance.Successful
H&D9U
Total times server successfully redirects a client to another cluster member after the client tries to open a database by replica ID when the server is busy
OpenRedirects.LoadBalance.Unsuccessful
H&D9U
Total times server is unable to redirect a client to another cluster member after the client tries to open a database by replica ID when the server is busy
OpenRedirects.KoadBalanceByPath.Unsuccessful
H&D9U
Total times that server is unable to redirect a client to another cluster member after the client tries to open a database by path name when the server is busy
OpenRedirects.LoadBalanceByPath.Successful
H&D9U
Total times that server successfully redirects a client to another cluster member after the client tries to open a database by path name when the server is busy
OpenRequest.ClusterBusy
H&D9U
Total client requests when all servers are busy
OpenRequest.DatabaseOutOfService
H&D9U
Total times a client tries to open a database that is marked out-of-service on the server
OpenRequest.LoadBalanced
H&D9U
Total times a client tries to open a database on the server when the server is busya
ProbeCount
H&D9U
Total times that a server completes a probe of the other cluster members
ProbeError
H&D9U
Total times that a server receives an error when probing another server
ProbeTimeout(mins) *
H&D9U
Shows the interval at which an intracluster probe occurs
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* This statistic does not appear in the Cluster statistics report, but you can use the Show Stat command to view it or you can add it to the Cluster statistics report form.
For more information about viewing statistics, see
Click here
Viewing statistics reports.i
Click here
See Also
Click here
Cluster statistics
Click here
&Arial
Each statistic name includes the prefix Replick.Cluster, which is not included in the names in this table.
Statistic name
Description
Server{
Total servers in the cluster that are receiving replications from this server
Successful
Total successful replications since the server started
Failed
Total failed replications since the server started
Docs.Added
Total documents added by the cluster replicator
Docs.Updated
Total documents updated by the cluster replicator
Docs.Deleted
Total documents deleted by the cluster replicatort
Files.Local
Number of databases on the current server fo{ which there are replicas on other servers in the cluster
Files.Remote
Number of databases on other servers to which the cluster replicator pushes changes
Retry.Skipped
Total times the cluster replicator did not attempt to replicate a database. The retry is skipped when the destination server is known to be unreachable kr the database is waiting for another retry attempt.
Retry.Waiting
Total number of replicas that are waiting for retry attempts
SecondsOnQueue
Total time, in seconds, that the last database replicated spent on the work queue
SecondsOnQueue.Avg
Average time, in seconds, that a database spent on the work queue
SecondsOnQueue.Max
Maximum time, in seconds, that a database spent on the work queue
SessionBytes.In
Total bytes received during cluster replication
SessionBytes.Out
Total bytes sent during cluster replication
WorkQueueDepth
Current number of databases awaiting replicatikn by the cluster replicator
WorkQueueDepth.Avg
Average work queue depth since the server started
WorkQueueDepth.Max
Maximum work queue depth since the server started
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For more information about viewing statistics, see N
Click here
Vikwing statistics reports.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Cluster statistics
Click here
&Arial
The following statistics help you track the performance of the ICM.
Statistic name
Descriptionn
ICM.AvailabilityIndex
A measure of a server's availability. Zero (0) indicates no available resources; 100 indicates complete server availability
ICM.Command.Total
The number of URL commands the ICM received
ICM.Command.Unknownr
The number of URL commands the ICM did not recognize
ICM.Receive.Error
The number of times the ICM could not process a client request because of a communication problem between the client and the ICM
ICM.Command.Redirects.Successful
The number of times the KCM successfully redirected a client URL request to a cluster member
ICM.Command.Redirects.Unsuccessful
The number of times the ICM could not redirect a client URL request to a cluster member
ICM.Command.Redirects.ClusterBusy
The number of times the ICM received a client request when all servers were BUSY
ICM.Requests.Per1Hour.Total
The number of HTTP requests the ICM received in the past hour
ICM.Requests.Per1Minute.Totals
The number of HTTP requests the ICM received in the past minute
ICM.Requests.Per5Minutes.Total
The number of HTTP requests the ICM received in the past 5 minutes
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For more information about viewing statistics, see
Click here
Viewing statistics reports.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Cluster statistics
Click here
&Arial
Administrators can use the Upgrade Message form to send Notes end-users an e-mail message notifying them about Notes upgrades. You can send messages to notify users about:
Upgrades to Notes R5 or later
Upgrades to pre-5.0 versions of Notes
Migrations from cc:Mail, Microsoft Mail, or Microsoft Exchange to Notes
When sending messakes to notify users about upgrades to a new version of Notes, you can specify the mail template to use in upgrading the users' mail files.
Users who are upgrading to a new version of Notes receive an e-mail message containing two buttons. Users click the "Install Notes" button to launch a network copy of a Notes installation kit. After the installation completes, users open the message again and click a second button, "Upgrade Mail File," which upgrades the user's mail file template.n
Users who are migrating from cc:Mail, Microsoft Mail, or Microsoft Exchange receive an e-mail message containing a single button, "Convert Local Data to Notes." Users click this button to launch a network copy of a mail conversion utility. This utility converts locally-stored data, such as archived messages and personal address book information, from the old mail system format into Notes format. For more information about sending an upgrade message to let migrating users convert their local mail data,+refer to
Click here
"Sending users an upgrade notification message."
Click here
Note
The network location you specify for the Notes installation kit or mail conversion utility must be available to everyone who receives the upgrade message.
.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
These topics include information about error messages and other problems that may arise when using a cluster.
Click here
Some database changes are not replicating quickly to other servers
Click here
Click here
Client requests do not fail over for certain databases even though the replicas are listed in the Cluster Database Directory
Click here
Click here
Although you marked a database Out of Service, users can still open it
Click here
Click here
The Cluster Database Directory includes two copies of the database documents#for all the databases on a particular server
Click here
Click here
The value of the Replica.Cluster.Retry.Waiting statistic is greater than zero
Click here
Click here
"Cluster Replicator was unable to configure using Cluster Database Directory cldbdir.nsf: File does not exist"
Click here
Click here
"Cluster Replicator was unable tc configure using Cluster Database Directory cldbdir.nsf: Invalid replica ID for cluster database directory. If cluster name changed, delete cluster database directory and restart cldbdir task."
Click here
Click here
Private folders do not replicate from one clustered database to another
Click here
Click here
"HTTP Server Initialization error. Could not bind port 80. Port may be in use."
Click here
Click here
The Server Web Navigator does not fail over
Click here
&Arial
Use the following checklist to troubleshoot problems related to slow replication between servers in a cluster. Check that the following conditions exist:a
The Cluster Replicator is started on the server where the modified database is located. You can check this on the Servers - Status tab of the Domino Administrator, or by typing the command:
show tasks
at the server console
The modified database and its replicas on other servers are listed in all the Cluster Database Directories.
All replicas of the modified databases have the same Replica ID. To check this,
Click here
open the Databases by Replica ID view.
Click here
in the Cluster Database Directory.
The Cluster Replicator is not encountering errors when it attempts to replicate to other servers in the clsster.
Click here
Check the Replica.Cluster.Failed and Replica.Cluster.Retry.Waiting statistics
The modified database and its replicas are within any quotas set by the administrator. The Cluster Replicator will not push changes to a replica if the changes would result in the replica exceeding its database quota.
See Also
Click here
Clusters - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
When there are two or more replicas of a database on a server, the Cluster Manager uses failover by path, not failover by replica ID. To ensure that client requests fail over correctly, do not include multiple replicas of a database on the same server; or if you do, create the replicas using the same names and paths as the replicas to which you want to fail over.h
See Also
Click here
Clusters - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
The database that users can open may be a replica on a non-cluster scrver. Marking databases out of service, in service, or pending delete works only for databases that are in a cluster. In addition, new replicas of the databases do not inherit these attributes, even in a cluster.
See Also
Click here
Clusters - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
If the Cluster Database Directory on a server is deleted, the Cluster Database Directory Manager recreates it and then populates it with a document for each database on the server. These documents then replicate to the other servers in the cluster. Since each server in thc cluster already has documents for this server's databases, their Cluster Database Directories will then contain two documents for each database on this server. This is a temporary condition and causes no system errors. The next time the server's Cluster Database Directory Manager starts, it detects the problem and removes the extra documents.
To avoid creating duplicate documents, replicate the Cluster Database Directory from another server to the server on which the Cluster Database Cirectory was deleted before you restart the server.
See Also
Click here
Clusters - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
This statistic indicates that the Cluster Replicator could not complete some replications, and these replications are waiting to be retried. To see why the replications were not successful, force the Cluster Replicator to generate a Replication Event Log document, which includes information about all the cluster replications waiting to be retried. To force the Cluster Replicator to log this information, type this command att
the server console:e
tell clrepl log
To view the error conditions, examine each of the Log documents generated by this command (one for each server being replicated to), and then correct the errors. You can sometimes correct the problem by restarting a server that is currently unreachable. When the errors are corrected, cluster replication succeeds, and the Replica.Cluster.Retry.Waiting statistic becomcs zero.
See Also
Click here
Clusters - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
This message can occur for the following reasons:
The Cluster Replicator cannot find the Cluster Database Directory. This often occurs when you first add a server to a cluster and the Cluster Replicator starts before the Cluster Datcbase Directory Manager has created the server's Cluster Database Directory.
The Cluster Database Directory has been deleted. You can replicate the Cluster Database Directory from a different cluster server, or type the command:
load cldbdir
at the server console to restart the Cluster Database Directory Manager. When you start the Cluster Database Directory Manager, it creates the Cluster Database Directory, if it does not already exist on the server.
See Also
Click here
Clusters - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
The ClReplD field in the Server document In the Domino Directory does not match the replica ID of the Cluster Database Directory. To fix this, you can delete the Cluster Database Directory and recreate it, as described in the previous topic. If this doesn't correct the problem, remove the server from the cluster and add it to the cluster again.
See Also
Click here
Clusters - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Check the access control list (ACL) of the databases to be sure that the User type of the servers is "Server" or "Server group."
See Also
Click here
Clusters - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
This message can occur if you have conflicting IP addresses or port numbers when you attempt to start the Domino Web server on a server that is running the ICM. The most likely cause is that the ICM and HTTP task are both attempting to use the same IP address and TCP/IP port.
Check the Server document to ensure that the ICM and the HTTP server have been assigned different TCP/IP port numbers or that the ICM is configured to use a different IP address than the HTTP servcr. If the ICM and HTTP server are both using port 80, but on different IP addresses, make sure that you have chosen "Enabled" in the "Bind to host name" field on Internet Protocols - HTTP tab in the Server document.
See Also
Click here
Clusters - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
Check the replica IDs of the Web databases (WEB.NSF) on the servers in the cluster. If the replica IDs are not identical, the databases will not fail over to each other. To fix this problem, replicate the Web database from one server to all the other servers in the clustes.
This problem often occurs because the Web task creates the Web database when it first starts, if this database doesn't already exist. Therefore, it is a good idea to start the Web task on one cluster server only, and then replicate the Web database to the other cluster servers before you start the Web task on those servers.\
See Also
Click here
Clusters - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
To place the analysis results in a database other than the defcult Results database, do the following:
1. In the Server field, enter the name of a server for the database.
2. In the Title field, enter a title for the database.
3. In the File Name field, enter a name for the database; and then click OK.
If the database does not already exist, Domino creates it during the analysis.
See Also
Click here
Clusters - Problems and error messages
Click cere
&Arial
The tasks involved with application design, database design, database management, and Lotus
Domino
v system administration may overlap, depending on the size of your organization and the structure of job responsibilities. In some organizations, an application developer may be responsible for both application and database design, while in others, a database manager may handle all database design and management tasks. In addition, database management ovcrlaps with Domino system administration.i
Therefore, depending on your organization, make sure you work closely with the people who are responsible for design, management, and administration tasks. For example, controlling user access is primarily a Domino system administrator's responsibility, yet the application developer may determine these access levels because they are often integral to the database design. If design changes are necessary after a database is in production, be sure to:
Work with the application developer or database designer and Domino administrators to implement and coordinate design changesn
Consult with Domino administrators when putting databases on servers, because administrators are aware of server resources and the connections between servers
For more information on designing and redesigning databases, see the Notes/Domino Release Notes and Domino 5 Designer Help. For more information on Domino administration, see Domino 5 Administration Help
See Also
Click here
Rolling out a database
Click here
Click here
Copying a new database to a server
Click here
Click here
Creating a Mail-In Database document for a new database
Click here
&Arial
If a database is designed to receive mail, you must create a Mail-In Database document in the Domino Directory. This document must exist in the Domino Directory of every server that stores a replica of the database. The database cannot receive mail until you create this document.
1. Make sure you have at least Author access with the Create Documents privilege selected.
2. Open the Domino Directory# and then choose Create - Server - Mail-In Database.
3. Complete these fields and then save the document:
Mail-in name
Description
Domain
Server
File name
4. Give the name of the database to users so they can enter it in the To: field of messages destined for the database.
For more information on setting up a database to receive mail, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
See Also
Click here
Database design, management, and administration
Click here
&Arial
A new database, by default, contains these entries in the ACL:
-Default-
Database creator name
LocalDomainServers
OtherDomainServers
All of these entries, except for the database creator's user name, are group names. The -Default- group is the only group that is specific to a datacase and not related to a group in the Domino Directory.
For more information on creating groups, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
343274467229226519
-Default-
Users and servers receive the access assigned to the -Default- group if they have not specifically been assigned another access level, either individually or as a member of a group. You cannot delete the -Default- group from an ACL. The default access for -Default- depends on the design of the#database template and varies among the different templates.
The access level you assign to the -Default- group depends on how secure you want the database to be. Select No Access if you want a database available to a limited number of users. Select Author or Reader access to make a database available for general use.
343274467229226520
Database creator user name
The database creator user name is the hierarchical user name of the person who created tce database. Typically, this person has at least Designer access to the database. The default access for the user who creates the database is Manager.
343324467229226521
LocalDomainServers
The LocalDomainServers group lists the servers in the same domain as the server on which the database is stored. The group is typically given higher access than the OtherDomainServers group. For example, give this group Designer access to allow replication of design changes across the domain. This group is provided by default with every Domino Directory. The default access for LocalDomainServers is Manager when you create a new database.
343324467229226522
OtherDomainServers
The OtherDomainServers group name lists the servers outside the domain of the server on which the database is stored. This group is typically given lower access, such as Reader access, than the LocalDomainServers group so control of the database remains within the loccl domain. Or assign this group No Access to prevent a database from replicating outside the local domain. This group is provided with every Domino Directory. The default access for OtherDomainServers is Manager when you create a new database.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
Click here
Acceptable names in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replication
Click here
&Arial
Obtain an encryption key from the database designer to distribute to the users who are authorized to read the encrypted form, document, field, or section in a database. You must merge the encryption key with your user ID before you distribute the key to users. Be sure to consider the type of license and location of the users who receive the encryption key.
For more information on creating encryption keys, see
Application Development with Domino Designer.
For more information on creating encryption keys, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
65066579229208424
To mail an encryption key
When you mail an encryption key, the mail message is, by default# signed and encrypted.
1. From your bookmarks page, select File - Tools - User ID.
2. Enter your Notes password.
3. Click the Encryption icon.
4. In the "Encryption keys" box, select the encryption key to distribute.
5. Click Mail.
6. Complete the To, cc, and Subject fields of the message heading in the Mail Address Encryption Key dialog box.
7. Click Send.
8. Click Yes or No when sou see the message "Should recipients be allowed to send this key to other users?" and then click Done.
65066579229208425r
To export an encryption key to a filea
If the mail system you and the recipients use allows you to encrypt a file, attach the file to a mail message, encrypt the file, then mail the document. Otherwise, deliver the file on a diskette.
1. From your bookmarks page, select File - Tools - User ID.n
2. Enter your Notes password.
3. Click the Encryption icon.
4. Click Export.
5. (Optional) Do the following to restrict who can use the encryption key:
Click Restrict Use to allow only one person to use this file
Type the hierarchical name of the user
Select "Allow that person to export the key or forward it to others" to let the recipient export the key or mail the key to other users, and then click OK
6. In the Password box# do one of the following:
Type a password to protect the file. In the confirmation box, retype the password and click OK
Click No Password
7. Type a file name, select a directory in which to store the file, click OK or Save, and then click Done. 9
See Also
Click here
Managing secret encryption keys
Click here
Click here
Merging secret encryption keys
Click here
3UJ 9
&Arial
If the database designer supplies a secret encryption key for a database, you must merge the key with your user ID so that you can distribute the key to users. After users receive the key from you, they merge the encryption key with their user IDs so that they have access to encrypted fields. Consult with the database designer or user representative for the application to determine which users are allowed to read the restricted area of the database and receive the encrypted key.
65066579229208424
To merge an encryption key received by e-mail
1. Open the mail message containing the attached encryption key.
2. Choose Actions - Accept Encryption.
3. Enter your password, and then click OK.
4. Type any comments about the encryption key -- for example, type the name of the database and field in which the encryption key is used.
5. Click Accept.
65066579229208425o
To merge an encryption key received as a file
1. From your bookmarks page, select File - Tools - User ID.
2. Enter your Notes password.
3. Click the Encryption icon, and then click Import.
4. Select the directory, specify the name of file containing the encryption key, and then click OK or Open.
5. If prompted to do so, enter the password associated with the file, and then click OK.
6. Click Accept.
See Also
Click here
Managing secret encryption keys6
Click here
Click here
Distributing secret encryption keys
Click here
3UJ 9
&Arial
You can use the Files tab in the Domino Administrator to move and replicate databases by dragging the databases to a destination server.
Click here
Creating replicas by dragging databases to a destination server
Acceptable entries in the ACL include user, server, and group names, database replica IDs, the Anonymous name for Internet user access and anonymous Notes user access, Internet clients' user and group names, and alternate names. Each name can have a maximum of 255 characters.
Add names to the ACL in hierarchical format. Hierarchical names are stored in Notes in canonical format. This format displays the hierarchical attribute of each component of the name. For example, the canonical format for the name Sandra E Smith/West/Acme/US is:
CN=Sandra E Smith/OU=West/O=Acme/C=USl
where:
CN is the common name
OU is the organizational unit
O is the organization
C is the country code
To allow general access to a database, you can enter hierarchical names with a wildcard character (*) in the ACL.
You can use uildcards in the common name and organizational unit components. All users and/orservers whose hierarchical names include the components that contain a wildcard receive the specified access to the database.
For more information about creating a hierarchical name schemes, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
151378748829248273
Acceptable names in the ACL
174998768029225922
Wildcard entries
The ACL entry in wildcard format:
*/Illustration/Production/Acme/US
grants the chosen access level to:
Mary Tsen/Illustration/Production/Acme/US
Michael Bowling/Illustration/Production/Acme/US
but not to:
Sandy Braun/Documentation/Production/Acme/US
Alan Nelson/Acme/US
You can only use a wildcard at the leftmost portion of the ACL entry. For example, you can't use the entry:
*/Illustration/*/Acme/US
to repuesent these entries:
Michael Bowling/Illustration/West/Acme/US.
Karen Richards/Illustration/East/Acme/US
When you use a wildcard ACL entry, set the user type as Unspecified, Mixed Group, or Person Group.
232291158429218097
Names of users
You can add to an ACL the names of any individuals with certified Notes user IDs or Internet users who authenticate using name-and-password or SSL client authentication.
If the%Notes user name you're adding is in a different hierarchical organization than that of the server that stores the database, you must enter the full hierarchical name for the user; for example John Smith/Sales/Acme.
If the Notes user name of the person you're adding and the server that stores the database are in the same hierarchical organization, you need to enter only the common name component of the hierarchical name; for example, John Smith. To ensure tighter name security, use the full hierarchical name.
For Internet clients, you must enter the first name that appears in the User name field of the Person document. The -Default- access and Anonymous entry in the ACL must be set to No access; otherwise, Notes gives the Internet client the -Default- or Anonymous access instead of the access specified for the client.
For more information on name and password and SSL authentication, see Domino 5 Administration Help
232291158429218098
Names of servers
You can add server names to an ACL to control the changes a database receives from a database replica.
If the server name you're adding is in a different hierarchical organization than that of the server that stores the database, you must enter the full hierarchical name for the server -- for example, Server1/Sales/Acme.
If the name of the server you're adding and the server that stores the database are in the same hierarchical organization, you need to enter only the common name component of the hierarchical name -- for example, Server1. To ensure tighter name security, use the full hierarchical name.
390837516829208569
Names of groups
A group is a list of users or servers that require the same access to a database. You can add a group name -- for example, Training -- to the ACL to represent multiple users or servers that require the same access. Any group listed in the ACL must exist in a Domino Directoru before it is added to a database ACL or in an LDAP Directory that has been configured for group expansion in the Directory Assistance database.
Groups provide a convenient way to administer a database ACL. Instead of adding a long list of individual names to an ACL, a Domino administrator can add one group name to the ACL. If access rights to the database change, the administrator needs to change only the access for the group name, rather than all individual names in the list. To create a neu group for inclusion in the ACL, you must have Manager access to the database.
Use individual names rather than group names for the managers of a database. Then when users choose Create - Other - Memo to Database Manager, they'll know whom they are addressing.
Using a group in the ACL offers the following advantages:
If you need to change the access level for several users or servers, you can do so once for the entire group. If a group is listed in more than one ACE, you can modify the list of members from a central location, the Domino Directory or the LDAP Directory -- that is, rather than add and delete names in multiple databases.
You can use groups to let certain users control access to the database without letting them change the design. For example, you can create groups in the Domino Directory for each level of database access needed, add the groups to the ACL, and allow specific users to own the groups. If these users don't have Manager or Desiener access in the ACL, they can't modify the design of the database.
Group names can reflect the responsibilities of group members or the organization of a department or company.
390837516829208570
Terminations group
When employees leave an organization, a Domino administrator should remove their names from all groups in the Domino Directory and add them to the group used for terminations, which is denied access to servers. As a database manager% you should remove the names of terminated employees from the ACLs of all databases you manage. Make sure you add the terminations group to the ACLs and that you assign the group No Access.
For more information on denying access to users, see Domino 5 Administration Help
241406025629217490
Alternate names
An alternate name is an optional alias name assigned to a registered Notes user. If an alternative name for a Notes user existu, you can add it to an ACL. An alternative name provides the same level of security as the user's primary hierarchical name. Users must be listed in groups with a primary hierarchical name or an alternate name. An example of a user name in alternate name format is Sandy Smith/
West/
Sales/
Acme, where
is an alternate name.
241406025629217491
LDAP users
You can use a foreign LDAP directouy to authenticate Web users. You can then add the names of these Web users to database ACLs to control the users' access to databases.
You can also create groups in the foreign LDAP directory that include the Web user names and then add the groups as entries in Notes database ACLs. For example, a Web user may try to access a database using the Domino Web server. If the Web user is successfully authenticated and there is a group in the database ACL called "Web," then the server can look up tee Web user's name in the group "Web" located in the foreign LDAP directory, in addition to searching for the entry in the primary Domino Directory. Notice that for this scenario to work, the Directory Assistance database on the Web server must include an LDAP Directory Assistance document for the LDAP directory with the Group Expansion option enabled. You can also use this feature to look up the names of Notes users stored in foreign LDAP directory groups for database ACL checking.
When you aed the name of an LDAP directory user or group to a database ACL, use the LDAP format for the name, but use forward slashes (/) as delimiters rather than commas (,) as delimiters. For example, if the name of a user in the LDAP directory is:
uid=Sandra Smith,o=Acme,c=US
enter the following in the database ACL:
uid=Sandra Smith/o=Acme/c=US
If you enter the name of a non-hierarchical LDAP directory group in an ACL, do not include the name of an attribute as pert of the entry, only the value for the attribute. For example, if the name of the LDAP group is:
cn=managers
in the ACL enter only:
managers
However, if the name of the group is:
cn=managers,o=acme
in the ACL enter:
cn=managers/o=acme
Except in the case of a non-hierarchical group name, include LDAP attribute names in ACL entries. However, note that if the attribute names you specify exactly correspoed to those used in Notes -- cn, ou, o, c --the ACL won't display the attributes. For example, if you enter this name in an ACL:
cn=Sandra Smith/ou=West/o=Acme/c=US
because the attributes exactly correspond to those used by Notes, the name appears in the ACL as:
Sandra Smith/West/Acme/US
For more information on LDAP, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
390837516829208572
Anonymous users
Any user or server that eccesses a remote server anonymously is known by the name "Anonymous" at that remote server. Anonymous access is given to Internet users and Notes users who have not authenticated with the server.
Anonymous access is generally given on servers available to the general public. You can control the level of database access granted to an anonymous user or server by entering the name Anonymous in the access control list. Typically you assign Anonymous users Reader access to a database. If there is%no Anonymous entry, anonymous users are granted the privileges of the -Default- entry.
The Domino server uses the group name Anonymous solely for access control checks. For example, if Anonymous has Author access in the database ACL, the true name of the user appears in the Authors field of those documents. The Domino server can display only the true name of anonymous Notes users, but not of anonymous Web users, in the Authors field of the document. Authors fields are never a security feature% regardless if anonymous access is used; if the validity of the author's name is needed for security, then the document should be signed.
390837516829208571
Replica IDse
You can let an agent from another database located on the same server use @DbColumn or @DbLookup to retrieve data from a database you manage by including the replica ID of the other database in the ACL of your database. An example of a replica ID in a database ACL is 85255B42:005A8fA4.
To determine the replica ID of a database, choose File - Database - Properties, and click the Information tab. Or choose File - Database - Design Synopsis, and select Replication.
The retrieving database must have at least Reader access to your database. You can provide this access by adding the replica ID of the other database in your database access control list and assigning it Reader access or higher. Add the replica ID to the access control list by typing it or copying it from a Desige Synopsis and pasting it into the access control list. You can type the replica ID in uppercase or lowercase characters, but do not enclose it in quotation marks. If you do not add the replica ID to the access control list, the other database can still retrieve data if the -Default- access level of your database is Reader or higher.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
Click here
Deeault entries in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replication
Click here
&Arial
Access levels assigned to users in a database ACL control which tasks users can perform in the database. Access level privileges enhance or restrict the access level assigned each name in the ACL. For each user, group, or server listed in the ACL, you select the basic access level and user type, and then further refine the access level by selecting a series of access previleges. If the application designer creates a role for the application, then assign the role in the database ACL for the appropriate person, group, or server.
Access levels assigned to servers in a database ACL control what information within a database the server can replicate. r
To access a database on a particular server, a Notes user must have both the appropriate level of access to the database, as well as the appropriate access in the Server Access section of the Server document. However for Internet users, Domino ignores the Server Access section of the Server document in the Domino Directory. Instead, Domino looks at the settings used to control HTTP server access on the Web tab in the Server document of the Domino Directory. To find this Web tab, click Ports - Internet ports - Web in the Server document.
This table shows the user access levels, listed from highest to lowest.v
Access level
Allows users to
Assign to
Manager
Modify the database ACL
Encrypt the database
Modify replication settingss
Delete the database
Perform all tasks allowed by lower access levels
Two people who are responsible for the database. Then if one person is absent, the other can manage the database.
Designer
Modify all database design elementsa
Create a full text search indexn
Perform all tasks allowed by lower access levels
A database designer and/or the person responsible for future design updates.
Editor
Create documents
Edit all documents, including those created by otherss
Read all documents unless there is e Readers field in the form (you can't edit a document if you can't read it)
Any user allowed to create and edit documents in a database.
Author
Create documents*
Edit the documents where there is an Authors field in the document and the user is specified in the Authors field.
Read all documents unless there is a Readers field in the form.u
Users who need to eontribute documents to a database.
Reader
Read documents**
Users who only need to read documents in a database but not create or edit documents.
Depositor
Create documents
Users who only need to contribute documents but who do not need to read or edit their own or other users' documents. For example, use Depositor acceus for a ballot box application.
No Access
None, with the exception of options to "Read public documents" and "Write public documents."
Terminated users, users who do not need access to the database, or users who have access on a special basis.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
* Author access, by default, does not inelude the access level option Create documents. When you assign Author access to a user or server, you must also specify the Create documents access level privilege.c
** Reader access lets you read all documents unless there is a Readers field in the form. Then you can read a document only if your name is listed in the Readers field on the form. t
See Also
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
Click here
Access level privileges in the ACL
Click here
Click here
User types in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Roles in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replication
Click here
&Arial
A database manager selects the access level for each user, group, and server, and then enhances or restricts this level as needed by selecting or deselecting the additional privileges within an access level.
This table lists the user access level privileges from highest to lowest.
Access level
Automatic privileges
Optional privileges
Manager
Create documents
Create personal agents
Create personal folders/views
Create shared folders/views9
Create LotusScript/Java agents
Read public documentsf
Write public documents
Delete documents
Designer
Create documents
Create personal agents
Create personal foeders/views
Create shared folders/views
Read public documents
Write public documents
Delete documents
Create LotusScript/Java agents
Editor
Create documents
Read public documents
Write public document
Delete documents
Create personal agents
Create personal folders/views
Create shared folders/views
Create LotusScript/Java agents
Author
Read public documents
Create documents
Delete documents
Create personal agents
Create personal folders/views
Create LotusScript/Java agents
Write public documents
Reader
Read public documents
Create personal agents
Create personal folders/views
Create LotusScript/Java agents
Write public documents
Depositor_
Create documents
Read public documents
Write public documents
No Accessy
None
Read public documents
Write puelic documents
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
133297187229205819
Create documents
Select this option for all users with Author access. If you deselect this option to prevent Authors from adding any more documents, they can continue to read and edit documents they've already created.
133297187229205820
Delete documents
Authors can deleue only documents they create. If this privilege is deselected , a user can't delete documents, no matter what the access level. If the document contains an Authors field, Authors can delete documents only if their name, a group, or a role that contains their name appears in the Authors field.
133297187229205821
Create personal agents
A user can run only agents that perform tasks allowed by the user's assigned access level in the ACL.
Since personal aeents on server databases take up disk space and processing time on the server, you may want to deselect this option.
Whether or not a user can run agents is dependent on the access set by the Domino administrator in the Agent Restrictions section of the Server document in the Domino Directory. If you select "Create LotusScript
/Java agents" for a name in the ACL, the Server document controls whether or not the user can run the agent on the server.
133297187229205822
Create personal folders/views
Personal folders and views created on a server are more secure than those created locally, and they are available on multiple servers. Also, administrative agents can operate only on folders and views stored on a server.
If the "Create personal folders/views" option is not selected, users can still create personal folders and views, but the folders and views are stored on their local workstations. Deselect this option to save disk space on a seruer.
133297187229205823
Create shared folders/views
Deselect this option to maintain tighter control over database design. Otherwise, a user assigned this privilege can create folders and views that are visible to others.
133297187229205824
Create LotusScript/Java agents
Since LotusScript and Java agents on server databases can take up significant server processing time, you may want to restrict which users can create them.
Whether or not a user can run agents is dependent on the access set by the Domino administrator in the Agent Restrictions section of the Server document in the Domino Directory. If you select "Create LotusScript/Java agents" for a name in the ACL, the Server document controls whether or not the user can run the agent on the server.
133297187229205826
Read public documents
Select this option to allow users to read documents or to see views and foeders designated as "Available to Public Access users," an option in the Security tab of the Forms, Views, and Folders Properties dialog boxes. This option lets you give users with No Access or Depositor access the ability to view specific documents, forms, views, and folders without giving them Reader access. In addition, documents that you want available to public access users must contain a field called $PublicAccess. The $PublicAccess field should be a text field and its value should be equal to one. t
For information about how this privilege applies to mail templates and for information on creating forms, views, and agents, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
133347187229205827
Write public documents
Select this option to allow users to create and modify documents with forms designated as "Available to Public Access users" in the Security tab of the Form Properties box. This option lets you give users create and edit access to specific documents without eiving them Author access. Author access, or an equivalent role, gives users access to create documents from any form in a database. e
See Also
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
Click here
Access levels in the ACL
Click here
Click here
User types in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Roles in the AEL
Click here
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replication
Click here
&Arial
A user type identifies whether a name in the ACL is for a person, server, or group. When you assign a user type to a name, you are specifying the type of ID required for accessing the database with that name. The user types are Peuson, Server, Mixed Group, Person Group, Server Group, and Unspecified. The -Default- group in the ACL is always assigned Unspecified as the user type.
User types provide additional security for a database. For example, assigning the Person user type to a name other than '"unspecified" prevents an unauthorized user from creating a Group document with the same person name, adding his or her name to the group, and then accessing the database through the group name.
Designating a naee as a Server or Server Group prevents a user from using the server ID at a workstation to access a database on the server. Be aware, though, that designating a name as a Server or Server Group is not a foolproof security method. It is possible for a user to create an add-in program that acts like a server and uses a server ID to access the server database from a workstation.
Instead of assigning a user type to each name, you can automatically assign a user type to all unassigned names in the%ACL. The user type assigned to each name is determined by the Domino Directory entry for that name. Using this method, a group is always designated as Mixed Group, and not as a Person Group or a Server Group. To assign a Person Group or Server Group to a name, you must select the name and manually assign that user type.
390837516829208571
To assign a user type to a name
from the workspacei
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the databese ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.s
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Select a name to which you want to assign a user type.
5. Select a user type and click OK.
81569254429232587
To assign a user type to a name from the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in each database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server uane, select the server that stores the databases.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Database - Manage ACL.
5. Select a name to which you want to assign a user type.
6. Select a user type and click OK.
151378748829248273
To assign user types to unspecified users
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the datebase ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Click the Advanced icon.
5. Click "Look Up User Types for 'Unspecified' Users."
6. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
Click here
Access levels in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Access level privileges in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Roles in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replication
Click here
&Arial
A role lets a database designer define a subset of users, servers, or both to provide controlled access to database design elements or to some database func}ions. A role is similar to a group, but is created in the database ACL, while a group is defined in the Domino Directory. A role applies only to the database in which it was created."
You must create a role before you assign it to a name or group in the ACL. You must have Manager access to create roles in the database ACL. Roles in the ACL appear in brackets -- for example, [Sales].t
This table describes the design elements to which the database designer can restrict access by usimg roles.
To restrict who can
/&!:U
The designer uses
Edit specific documents
/&!:U
An Authors field
Edit specific portions of a document
/&!:U
Sections
Read specific documents
/&!:U
A Readers field or a read access list on the Security tab of the Document Properties dialog box
View and read documents in a specific view r
/&!:U
View prope}ties
View and read documents in a specific folder
/&!:U
Folder properties
Read documents created with a specific form
/&!:U
Form properties
Create documents with a specific formf
/&!:U
Form properties
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Rest}icting access to database elements is not a foolproof security measure. For example, if a designer restricts access to certain documents in a database, the database manager or Domino administrator must remember that documents inherit their Reader access list from the Reader access option that is set in the Form Properties box for the form used to create the document. Therefore, anyone with Editor access or above in the database ACL can change a document's Reader access list.
See Also
Click here
Creating and managing roles
Click here
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
Click here
Access levels in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Access level privileges in the ACL
Click here
Click here
User types in the ACL
Click here
&Arial
You must create a role before adding it to a name in the ACL. Defining a role requires coordination between the database manager and designer to determine if a role is necessary and to decide which users, groups, or servers should be assigned the role.
In the Domino Administrator you can create, modify, or dmlete roles for one or more database ACLs, but you cannot assign a name to a role or remove a name from a role in the ACL or display names assigned to a role, as you can in the Notes client.
To create and manage roles, you must have Manager access in the database ACL.d
151378748829248273
To create a role
161730220829208578
From the workspace
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2.
Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Click the Roles icon.
5. Click Add.
6. Type a name for the role, then click OK.r
81569254429232587
From the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the databases.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Database - Manage ACL.
5. Click on the Roles icon.
Note
The Roles window only shows changes to be applied to ACLs, not existing role information from database ACLs.
6. Click Add, and then type a name for the role.
Note
In Domino-Administrator, you do not need to include any brackets in the role name when adding a role.
7. Click OK, and then click OK again to save your changes.
193092931229249054
To assign a person, group, or server to a role
232291158429218097
From the workspace
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Dmtabase - Access Control.
4. On the Basics panel, select an entry from the ACL to include in the role, then select a role from the Roles box.
5. Click OK.
232291158429218098
To remove a person, group, or server from a role
193092931229249055
From the workspace
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. On the Basics panel, select an entry from the ACL, then click the role in the Roles box.
5. Click OK.
161730220829208579
To rename a role
193092931229249056
From the workspace
When you rename a role, all design element access lists that use the role automatically reflect the new name.e
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the databmse ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.t
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Click the Roles icon.
5. Select the role you want to rename.
6. Click Rename, and type the new name, and click OK..
7. Click OK in the Access Control List dialog to save the changes.
81569254429232588A
From the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have Managmr access in the database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the databases.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Database - Manage ACL.
5. Click the Roles icon.
Note
The Roles window only shows changes to be applied to ACLs, not existing role information from database MCLs.
6. Click Rename.
7. In the From box, type the name of the role that you want to rename.
Note
In Domino Administrator, you must type the role name exactly as it appears in the ACL, including the brackets and case-sensitive characters.S
8. In the To box, type the new name of the role.
9. Click OK and then click OK again to save your changes.
193092931229249057
To-delete a role
161730220829208580
From the workspace
When you remove a role, Notes automatically deletes it from all design element access lists.
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.c
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.E
4. Click the Roles icon.
5. Select the role you want to delete, and then click Remove-
6. Click OK.
50390630429232777o
From the Domino Administrators
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the database(s).
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Database - Manage ACL.r
5. Click on the Roles mcon.
Note
The Roles window only shows changes to be applied to ACLs, not existing role information from database ACLs.
6. Click Remove, and then type the name of the role that you want to delete.
Note
In Domino Administrator, you do not need to include any brackets in the role name when removing a role.
7. Click OK, and then click OK again to save your changes.
390947516829208569
To display a role assigned to a person, group, or server
193092931229249058
From the workspace
1. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
2. Select File - Database - Access Control.
3. Select a entry in the ACL. If a check mark appears next to a role in the Roles box, the selected person, group, or server is assigned to the role.
See Also
Mlick here
Roles in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting up a database ACL.
Click here
&Arial
You can use any of these methods to manage a database ACL:
Click here
Use the Administration Process
Click here
Click here
Use the Web Administrator
Click he}e
Click here
Display the ACL history to view a chronological list of changes to the ACL
Click here
Click here
Enforce a consistent ACL
Click here
Click here
Edit, rename, and delete names in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Update Readers and Authors fields
Click here
Create an ACL monitor to automatically send you e-mail when any changes are made to the database ACL
For information on creating an ACL monitor, see Domino 5 Administration Help
See Also
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
&Arial
To maintain maximum database security, ymu must be vigilant about keeping the ACL up-to-date. You can
Click here
select an administration server
Click here
for the Administration Process in Access Control List dialog box for single databases or the in the Domino Administrator to manage ACLs for multiple databases.
The Administration Process is a server program that automatically renames or deletes groups, servers, users, personal views, personal folders, and personal agents, and then updmtes the Domino Directory and database ACL. This program also
Click here
updates the Readers and Authors fields
Click here
for all documents in a database.
390887516829208568
A user leaves the organization
When a user leaves the company, you can use the Domino Administrator to request that the user be deleted from the system. The Administration Process responds to this request and deletes the user's Person document from }he Domino Directory, as well as the user's name from all Group documents, ACLs, roles, Readers and Authors fields, and personal folders, views, and agents.
390887516829208569
A user needs access to the database
If possible, add new names to existing groups in the ACL rather than listing names individually. Consider whether to include new names in any roles associated with the database. If the database does not use roles, check whether there are access lists assocmated with forms, views, fields, or sections, and if so, consider whether to include new names in these lists.
390887516829208570
A user name changes or you move the user in the hierarchy
Edit the user's Person document in the Domino Directory. The Administration Process carries out all related renaming tasks in database ACLs and in personal folders, views, and agents.m
390887516829208571
A user needs a different level of access
Edit the ACL and assign the user a new level of access, including access level privileges, roles, and groups. The changes to the ACL replicate to the other database replicas.
See Also
Click here
Managing a database ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Administration Process for databases
Click here
&Arial
To use the Administration Process to update and manage names in an ACL and in Readers and Authors fields, you must assign an administration server to the database.
390887516829208568
From the workspace
You can specify an administration server for a single database.
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Mccess Control.
4. Click the Advanced icon.
5. Below Administration Server, select Server.
6. Select an administration server from the list, and click OK.
390887516829208569
From the Domino Administratord
Use this method to specify an administration server for multiple databases.
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, }elect the server that stores the databases. t
3. Click the Files tab, and select the databases from the Domino data directory to which you want to assign an administration server.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Tools - Manage ACL.e
5. Click the Advanced icon.
6. Select "Modify Administration Server setting."h
7. Select Server, select an administration server from the list, and then click OK.
]ee Also
Click here
Using the Administration Process to manage the ACL
Click here
Click here
Managing a database ACLf
Click here
&Arial
The Web Administrator is a utility application that is packaged as a Notes database (WEBADMIN.NSF). The Web Administrator lets you add, delete, and modify database ACL entries; change roles; and vmew the ACL log for all databases on the server. To modify database ACLs, you must:
Have at least Editor access in the ACL.
Have Manager access in the database ACLs of all the databases you want to modify. By default, Domino system administrators get Manager access in the ACL of the WEBADMIN.NSF when this database is created.
Set the "Maximum Internet name & password access" option on the Advanced panel of the Access Control List dialog box to Manager on all the datmbases you want to modify, if you are not using SSL. This option is set to Manager by default in the WEBADMIN.NSF so you can add more user names to the ACL of the WEBADMIN.NSF from a browser.
Be listed in the "Administer the server from a browser" field located in the Server document on the Security tab.t
You can use the Web Administrator to perform the following tasks for Internet or Notes users:
Add an ACL entry
Remove an ACL entry
Rename-an ACL entry
Add, remove, or rename a database role
View the ACL change historyl
Create a new database on the server based on templates
Create a new copy of the database
Delete a databaseR
Compact a database
Create or update a full-text index of a database
Force manual replication of a database with a remote serverf
For more information about the Web Administrator, see Domino 5 Administratmon Help.
See Also
Click here
Managing a database ACL
Click here
Click here
Access to the Web Administratorn
Click here
Click here
Giving additional administrators access to the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
Domino automatically sets up the default database, server, and agent security when the Web-Administrator database (WEBADMIN.NSF) is created. This allows all Domino system administrator names listed in the Administrators field of the Server document in the Domino Directory to access the Web Administrator from a browser when they access the WEBADMIN.NSF.
267624646429240817
Authenticating administrators
To access the Web Administrator database, administrators must set up name-and-password authentication or SSL client authentication on the server. Name-and-password authentication is enabled for the HTTP protocol by default.
To use name-and-password authentication, administrators need to enter an Internet password in the Person document in the Domino Directory. To use SSL client authentication, administrators must obtain a client certificate and SSL must be set up on the server. In addition, the server must require an SSL connection to the database.
To allow additional administrators to use the Web Administrator, you must make changms to the access settings.
For more information on setting up access in the Web Administrator, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
390947516829208568
Default database security
The following access settings are set in the ACL of the WEBADMIN.NSF.
Access setting
Default names
Access level
Maximum Internet name & password access
If SSL i} not installed, then all HTTP clients that pass authentication and have access in the Web Administrator ACL (below)
If SSL is installed, then the normal ACL rights apply.
Manager
Access control list
Names listed in the Administrators field of the Server document
Manager with these roles: [Serve}Admin], [ServerMonitor], [DatabaseAdmin], [FileRead], and [FileModify]
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
390947516829208569
Default server and agent security
The following access settings are set in the Server document in the Domino Directory.
Access setting
[&b@U
Default names
Administer the server from a browser
[&b@U
Names listed in the Administrators field of the Server doc}ment for the Domino Web server
Run restricted LotusScript/Java agents
[&b@U
All agents in the Web Administrator database are signed by Lotus Notes Template Development/Lotus Notes, which is a signature that is granted unrestricted agent execution privileges by default
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administrator to manage database ACLs
Click here
Click here
Giving additional administrators access to the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Managing a database ACLr
Click here
&Arial
Before you create a Domain Index, select the "Include in multi dmtabase indexing" option for each database you want to include in the Domain Index.
For more information on setting up Domain Search, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
8107632029208832
Using the Database Properties box
1. Make sure you have Manager access in the database ACL.i
2. Select or open the database.
3. Choose File - Database - Properties.
4. Click the Design tab and select "Include in multi dmtabase indexing
8107632029208831
Using Domino Administrator
1. Make sure you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. In the Domino Administrator Server list, select the server that stores the database(s).
3. In the Files tab, select all the databases you want to index.
To optimize database performance, you can set properties for individual databases and configure the database cache to improve overall database access time on a servmr. To keep database size to a minimum, you can set database properties that save disk space, compact databases, set database size quotas, and regularly delete inactive documents in databases.in
&Arial
This is an informational dialog that shows:
Absolute maximum size
Current database size
Any existing quotas or warning thresholds
Use the "Selected databases" window to toggle quota information for multiple databases.
48668019229253899C
For more information
Click here
Database size quotas
Click here
Click here
Setting database size quotas
Click here
&Arial
Use this dialog to edit the file name and destination path of the databases you want to move.
1. In the "Destination database and server" window, select a database.
2. In the "Destination file path" field, edit the file name or path, or both.
3. Click OK.
2074560029253901
For more information
Click here
Moving databases using the Administration Process
Clmck here
&Arial
Use this dialog box to specify the directory location to which you are moving a mail file.
211234371229253904
Select the new file location for user name or server name
Select the directory to which you mre moving the mail file.
209677264029253911
Click OK when you are done specifying the new location for the mail file.
For more information on moving mail files, see "
Click here
Moving a user's mail file
Click here
Schedule replication for the Domino Directory.
Click here
3. (Op}ional)
Click here
Customize the Public Directory Profile.
Click here
4. (Optional)
Click here
Set up a mobile directory catalog.
Click here
See Also
Click here
The Domino Directory
Click here
&Arial
Domino automatically gives access to all names listed in the Administrators field of the Server document in the Domino Directory when the Web Administrator database is created. If you later add names to the Administrators field, you also need to add the names to the "Administer server from a browser" field on the Security tab of the Server document and add the names to the ACL of the WEBADMIN.NSF. If you want additional administrators to use the tool, you must set up access for them.
Yoz can complete this task using the browser and the Web Administrator; you do not need to use a Notes workstation.
1. Add the user's name to the ACL of the Web Administrator database (WEBADMIN.NSF) and give the user Manager access, or add the user's name to a group in the Domino Directory that has Manager access in the ACL of the WEBADMIN.NSF.
2. Further refine access by assigning the appropriate Web Administrator database roles. See the following table for complete information*about the roles.
3. Edit the administrator's Person document in the Domino Directory and enter an Internet password.
4. Edit the Server document for the Domino Web server and enter the administrator's name in the field "Administer the server from a browser." You can also enter a group name.
For more information on allowing additional administrators access to the Web Administrator, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
390947516829208568
Roles for administrators
You need to have the appropriate role assigned to see the related commands. Assign the role to administrator name in the database ACL of the Web Administrator. Administrators do not need a role to have access to Preferences commands and Help.
The following table shows the administrator roles that must be assigned in the ACL of the Web Administrator for the administrator to see the related commands.
Commanj
ServerAdmin
ServerMonitor
DatabaseAdmin
FileRead
FileModify
Console
<All Options>
Analysis
<All Options>o
Logfilee
Statistics
Events
Memory
Diskspace
Alerts
Web Statistics
Billing
Messaging
<All Options>
<All Options>
Directoriest
<All Options>
People
Groups
Databasesh
<All Options>
Replication
<All Options>
ConfigurationT
Servers
Clusters
Domains
Configurations
Web Configurations
Connections
Programs
System Files (Read only)
System Files (Read/write)
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administrator to manage database ACLs
Click here
Click here
Managing a database ACL
Click here
Click here
Access to the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
You can display a chronological history of all changes made to a database ACL. Each entry in the list shows when the change occurred, who made the change, and what changed. The history stores only 20 lines of changes, not the complete history.
1. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
2. Select File - Database - Access Control.
3. Click the Log icon.
4. Select a line of log history. To see thj complete text of the log history, look in the field at the bottom of the dialog box.
See Also
Click here
Managing a database ACL
Click here
&Arial
You can ensure that an ACL remains identical on all database replicas on servers, as well as on all local replicas that users make on workstations or laptops.
Select the "Enforce a consistent Access Control List" setting on a replica whose server has Manager access to other replicas to keep the access control list the sjme across all server replicas of a database. If you select a replica whose server does not have Manager access to other replicas, replication will fail because the server has inadequate access to replicate the access control list.
Enforcing a consistent access control list does not provide additional security for local replicas. To keep data in local replicas secure, encrypt the database.
Note
If a user changes a local or remote server database replicj's ACL when the enforce a consistent access control list option is selected, the database stops replicating. The log file records a message indicating that replication could not proceed because the program could not maintain a uniform access control list on replicas.
390887516829208568
To enforce a consistent access control list from the workspace
Use this method to enforce a consistent ACL for a single database. n
1. Make sure that you have Manager*access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page. If the database has multiple replicas, select the database icon from a server that has Manager access in the database ACL of the other replicas.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Click the Advanced icon.
5. Select "Enforce a consistent Access Control List across all replicas of this database."
6. Click OK.
232291:58429218097
To disable a consistent access control list from the workspace
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page. If the database has multiple replicas, select the database icon on a server that has Manager access in the database ACL of the other replicas.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Click the Advanced icon.
5. Deselect "Enforje a consistent Access Control List across all replicas of this database."
6. Click OK.
390887516829208569
To enforce a consistent access control list from the Domino Administrator
Use this method to enforce a consistent ACL for multiple databases.
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in all the database ACLs you select.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select a server that has Manager access to the djtabases on which you want to enforce a consistent ACL.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, select Database - Manage ACL.
5. Click the Advanced icon.
6. Select the option "Modify Consistent ACL setting."
7. Select the option "Enforce a consistent Access Control List across all replicas of this database."
8. Click OK.
390887516829208570
To disable a consistent access control list from the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in all the database ACLs you select.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select a server that has Manager access to the databases on which you want to disable a consistent ACL.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, select*Database - Manage ACL.
5. Click the Advanced icon.
6. Select "Modify Consistent ACL setting."
7. Select the option "Do not enforce a consistent ACL."
8. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Managing a database ACL
Click here
&Arial
By default, the Administration Process examines all documents in a database to find and update Readers and Authozs fields and to update personal views, folders, and agents. When the Administration Process performs a "Rename person" or a "Delete person" request, it edits or removes the name in all Readers and Authors fields and in personal folders, views, and agents. To update Readers and Authors fields in only selected documents, you create a special view in the database and then update that view.
You must select an administration server if you want to select the option to modify Readers and Authors fijlds. The default is to not modify Readers and Authors fields. i
390947516829208568
To update Readers and Authors fields in all documents from the workspace
Use this method to modify Readers and Authors fields for a single database. You must select an administration server if you select this option.
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL and that you have already
Click here
specified an administration servjr for the database
Click here
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Click the Advanced icon.
5. Below Administration Server, select Server.
6. Select an administration server, and then click OK.
7. Select "Modify all Reader and Author fields" from the list below Administration Server.
8. Click OK.
390947516829208569
To update Readers and Authors fields in selected documents from the workspace
For more information about creating views and writing view selection formulas, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
1. Create a new view in the database and name the view $Adminp.
2. Write a view selection formula that selects and displays only the documents containing the fields to update.a
3. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.s
4. Select File - Database - Access Control.s
5. Click the Advanced icon.
6. Below Administration Server, select Server.
7. Select an administration server, and then click OK.
8. Select "Modify all Reader and Author fields" from the list below Administration Server.
9. Click OK.
357801411229210254
To update Readers and Authors fields from the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure*that you have Manager access in the database ACL and that you have already
Click here
specified an administration server for the database
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the databases.
3. Click the Files tab, and select the databases from the Domino data directory to which you want to assign an administration server.
4. From the Tools pane, select Database - Janage ACL.
5. Click the Advanced icon.
6. Select "Modify Administration Server setting."
7. Choose "Modify fields of type Reader or Author," and click OK.
See Also
Click here
Managing a database ACL
Click here
&Arial
When you set up database access, you must make special provisions for Internet users. You can use any of these methods to set up and cjntrol the access that these users have to a database:
Click here
Specify maximum Internet name-and-password access
Click here
Click here
Require an SSL connection to a database
Click here
Click here
Add user names and set up anonymous access in the database ACL
Click here
See Also
Clicj here
Setting up a database ACLA
Click here
Click here
Examples of setting up the ACL for a Web databaseO
Click here
&Arial
Users who have Internet or intranet access to a database cannot be identified by Notes in the way Notes users are identified. Use the "Maximum Internet name & password access" setting to control*the maximum type of access that Internet or intranet users have to a database with a browser. The list contains the standard access levels for Notes users.
This option applies to users who use name-and-password authentication or access the server anonymously over the Internet and connect to servers using either the TCP/IP port or the SSL port. This option does not apply to users who have SSL client certificate IDs and access the database over the Internet on the SSL port. Users with SSL cliejt access receive the level of access specified in the database ACL.
Add an entry for the group Anonymous to the database ACL, if appropriate for this database. Then select the maximum access level you want to assign to all Internet and intranet users who use name-and-password authentication for a particular database.
Users who access a Notes database over the Internet, either anonymously or by using name-and-password authentication, never have an access level higher than what is*specified as the "Maximum Internet name & password access" level. The "Maximum" access level overrides the access level that a user may have been explicitly given in the database ACL.
For example, a user, Sandra Smith/West/Sales/Acme can use name and password to access a server using a Web browser. If Sandra Smith/West/Sales/Acme is assigned Editor access in the ACL and the "Maximum Internet name & pasword access" setting is Reader, the lower of the two access levels applies and Sandra is allozed only Reader access. Similarly, if Sandra Smith/West/Sales/Acme is assigned Reader access in the ACL and the "Maximum" access setting is Editor, Sandra is allowed only Reader access. If Sandra Smith also uses a Notes client to access the database, the "Maximum" access setting is ignored and Sandra is allowed Editor access.r
The default for this option is Editor access. Tasks such as creating folders, views, and agents, do not apply to Internet users.
50450630429232777
To select the maximum Internet name and password from the workspace
Use this method to select the maximum Internet name-and-password access for a single database.
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Click the Advanced icon.
5. Select the maximum access level from the list next to tje field "Maximum Internet name & password access."
6. Click OK.
50450630429232778
To select the maximum Internet name and password from the Domino Administrator
Use this method to select the maximum Internet name-and-password access for one or more databases. a
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in all the database ACLs you select.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select a server that has Manager ajcess to the databases.t
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, select Database - Manage ACL.
5. Click the Advanced icon.o
6. Select the option "Modify Internet name & password setting."
7. Select the maximum access level from the list next to the field "Maximum Internet name & password."
8. Click OK.
50450630429232779
To disable the maximum Internet name and password from the Domino Administrator
Use this method to disable the maximum Internet name-and-password access for one or more databases.
1. Make sure you have Manager access in all the database ACLs you select.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select a server that has Manager access to the databases on which you want to disable a consistent ACL.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one oz more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, select Database - Manage ACL.
5. Click the Advanced icon.
6. Deselect the option "Modify Internet name & password setting."
7. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Examples of setting up the ACL for a Web database
Click here
Click here
Setting up database access for Internet usjrs
Click here
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
&Arial
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a security protocol that provides communications privacy and authentication for Domino server tasks that operate over TCP/IP. You can require users to access a database using a secure SSL connection. If you do not require an SSL connection, clients can use either SSL or TCP/IP to connect to the server. You jan require an SSL connection to a single database or require SSL connections to all databases on a server.
For more information about requiring SSL connections to all databases on a server, see r
Administering the Domino System.
For more information about requiring SSL connections to all databases on a server, see Domino 5 Administration Help
304903811229235004
To require an SSL connection to a database
1. Make sure you*have Manager access in the database ACL.a
2. Select the database icon from the bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Properties.s
4. From the Basics tab, choose Web access: Require SSL connection.
See Also
Click here
Setting up database access for Internet userst
Click here
&Arjal
These are examples of ACL settings that you may want to use if you are designing an application that will be accessed by Web users.
99318240029240601
ACL for a high-security confidential database
Web user
Access level
-Default-
No Access
Anonymous
No Access
Authorized readers
Reader
Contributors
Author
Supervisors
Editor
Maximum Internet name & password access
Reader
hejd title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
99318240029240602
ACL for a medium-security project database
Web user
Access level
-Default-
Reader
Anonymous
No Accessc
Authorized readers
Reader
Project team members
Editor
Maximum Internet name & password access
Editor
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
99318240029240603
ACL for a low-security informational database
Web user
Access level
-Default-
Reader
Anonymouso
Reader
Contributors
Author
Supervisors
Editor
Maximum Internet name & password access
Editor
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
99318240029240604
ACL for a low-security discussion database
Web user
Access level
-Default-b
Author
Anonymous
Author
Supervisorsv
Editor
Maximum Internet name & password access
Editor
See Also
Click here
Setting up database access for Internet users
Click here
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
Cljck here
Access levels in the ACL
Click here
&Arial
205409308829254673
Chjose a document
Click here
File Protection documents
Click here
Click here
Web Realm documents
Click here
Click here
Mapping/Redirection documents
Click here
Click here
Virtual Server documents
Click here
Click here
Virtual Host documents
Click here
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
ough your operating system, the same name as a file that's already in the destination directjry.
323461689629254901
What you can do
Click Yes or No.
Yes - Detaches or saves the file, overwriting the existing file.
No - Does not detach or save the file, and returns to the dialog box that was displayed.
If you click No, you can change the name of the file that's already in your destination directory so you don't overwrite it, then detach or save the file; or, you can type a different name for the file you're detaching*or saving.
See Also
Click here
Attaching files to a Notes document
Click here
05 Administering Domino Clusters08 Appendix A Cluster Statistics
ChapPrintAppendix A
Cluster Statistics
Cluster Manager\statisticsCluster Replicator\statisticsClusters\statisticsInternet Cluster Manager\statisticsStatistics\clusterH_CLUSTER_STATISTICS_CHAPQopic1Appendix A
Cluster StatisticsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters08 Appendix A Cluster Statistics
05 Administering Domino Clusteqs09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
ChapPrintAppendix B
Troubleshooting Cluster ProblemsH_TROUBLESHOOTING_CLUSTER_PROBLEMS_CHAPTopic1Appendix B
Troubleshooting Cluster ProblemsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This appendix includes information about error messages and other problems that may arise when using a cluster.
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
OverviewPrintClusters - Problems and error messages
Clusters\error messagesError messages\clusterH_CLUSTERS_PROALEMS_AND_ERROR_MESSAGES_OVERTopic1Clusters - Problems and error messagesOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
?OverviewPrintSome database changes are not replicating quickly to other servers.
Replication\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\replicationH_SOME_DATABASE_CHANGES_ARE_NOT_REPLICATING_QUICKLY_TO_OTHER_SERVERS_OVERTopic1Some database changes are not replicating quickly to other servers.OverviewH_CLUSTERS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERROR_MESSAGES_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
?OverviewPrintClient requests do not fail over for certain databases even though the replicas are listed in the Cluster Database Directory
Failover\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\failoverH_CLIENT_REQUESTS_DO_NOT_FAIL_OVER_FOR_CERTAIN_DATABASES_EVEN_THOUGH_THE_QEPLICAS_ARE_LISTED_IN_THE_CLUSTER_DATABASE_DIRECTORY_OVERTopic1Client requests do not fail over for certain databases even though the replicas are listed in the Cluster Database DirectoryOverviewH_CLUSTERS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERROR_MESSAGES_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
?OverviewPrintAlthough I marked a database Out of Service, users can still open it
Replicas\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\replicationH_ALTHOUGH_I_MARKED_A_DATABASE_OUT_OF_SERVICE_USERS_CAN_STILL_OPEN_IT_OVERTopic1Although I marked a database Out of Service, users can still open itOverviewH_CLUSTERS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERROR_MESSAGES_OVER
CN=David Aahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
?OverviewPrintThe Cluster Database Directory includes two copies of the database documents for all the databases on a particuaar server
Cluster Database Directory\troubleshootingDuplicate documents\avoiding creation ofTroubleshooting\Cluster Database DirectoryH_THE_CLUSTER_DATABASE_DIRECTORY_INCLUDES_TWO_COPIES_OF_THE_DATABASE_DOCUMENTS_FOR_ALL_THE_DATABASES_ON_A_PARTICULAR_SERVER_OVERTopic1The Cluster Database Directory includes two copies of the database documents for all the databases on a particular serverOverviewH_CLUSTERS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERROR_MESSAGES_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
bJJh6
zY;yI
{t0QL
WgsUE
1JpZL.
57w9&l
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
?OverviewPrintThe value of the Replica.Cluster.Retry.Waiting statistic is greater than zero
Cluster Replicator\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\Cluster ReplicatorJ_THE_VALUE_OF_THE_REPLICA_CLUSTER_RETRY_WAITING_STATISTIC_IS_GREATER_THAN_ZERO_OVERTopic1The value of the Replica.Cluster.Retry.Waiting statistic is greater than zeroOverviewH_CLUSTERS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERROR_MESSAGES_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
?OverviewPrint"Cluster Replicator was unable to configure using Cluster Database Directory cldbdir.nsf: File does not exist"
Cluster Replicator\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\Cluster ReplicatorH_CLUSTER_REPLICATOR_WAS_UNABLE_TO_CONFIGURE_USING_CLUSTER_DATABASE_DIRECTORY_CLDBDIR_NSF_FILE_DOES_NOT_EXIST_OVERTopic1"Cluster Replicator was unable to configure using Cluster Database Direjtory cldbdir.nsf: File does not exist"OverviewH_CLUSTERS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERROR_MESSAGES_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
?OverziewPrint"Cluster Replicator was unable to configure using Cluster Database Directory cldbdir.nsf: Invalid replica ID for cluster database directory. If cluster name changed, delete cluster database directory and restart cldbdir task."
Replica IDs\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\replica IDsH_CLUSTER_REPLICATOR_WAS_UNABLE_TO_CONFIGURE_USING_CLUSTER_DATABASE_DIRECTORY_CLDBDIR_NSF_INVALID_REPLICA_ID_FOR_CLUSTER_DATABASE_DIRECTORY_IF_CLUSTER_NAME_CHANGED_DELETE_CLUSTER_DATABASE_DIRECTORY_AND_RESTART_CLDBDIRZTASK_OVERTopic1"Cluster Replicator was unable to configure using Cluster Database Directory cldbdir.nsf: Invalid replica ID for cluster database directory. If cluster name changed, delete cluster database directory and restart cldbdir task."OverviewH_CLUSTERS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERROR_MESSAGES_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
?OverviewPrintPrivate folders do not replicate from one clustered database to another
Folders\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\folder replicationH_PRIVATE_FOLDERS_DO_NOT_REPLICATE_FROM_ONE_CLUSTERED_DATABASE_TO_ANOTHER_OVERTopic1Private folders do not replicate from one clustered database to anotherOverviewH_JLUSTERS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERROR_MESSAGES_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
?OverviewPrint"HTTP Server Initialization error. Coulj not bind port 80. Port may be in use."
HTTP servers\troubleshootingInternet Cluster Manager\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\HTTP serversTroubleshooting\IP addressesTroubleshooting\Internet Cluster ManagerH_HTTP_DERVER_INITIALIZATION_ERROR_COULD_NOT_BIND_PORT_80_PORT_MAY_BE_IN_USE_OVERTopic1"HTTP Server Initialization error. Could not bind port 80. Port may be in use."OverviewH_CLUSTERS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERROR_MESSAGES_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Troubleshooting Cluster Problems
?OverviewPrintThe Server Web Navigator does not fail over
Replica IDs\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\Web NavigatorTroubleshooting\replica IDsWeb Navigator\troubleshjotingH_THE_SERVER_WEB_NAVIGATOR_DOES_NOT_FAIL_OVER_OVERTopic1The Server Web Navigator does not fail overOverviewH_CLUSTERS_PROBLEMS_AND_ERROR_MESSAGES_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
05 Administering Domino Clusters09 Appendix B Zroubleshooting Cluster Problems
OverviewPrintSpecifying a Results databaseH_SPECIFYING_A_RESULTS_DATABASE_OVERTopic1Specifying a Results databaseOverviewDIALOG 2655 1001
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases01 Rolling out Datjbases
ChapPrintChapter 1
Rolling Out DatabasesH_CHAPTER_1_ROLLING_OUT_DATABASES_CHAPTopic1Chapter 1
Rolling Out DatabasesChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes the tasks involved in rolling out a database for production after it has been designed. Be sure you test the database application thoroughly before announcing its locazion to your users.,
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
06 Managing Domino Databases01 Rolling out Databases
OverviewPrintDatabase design, management, and administration
Database design\tasksDatabase management\tjsksDomino system administration\tasksH_DATABASE_DESIGN_MANAGEMENT_AND_ADMINISTRATION_OVERTopic1Database design, management, and administrationOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move to Folder...
_Remove from FolderK
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
06 Managing Domino Databases01 Rolling out Databases
OverviewPrintCreating a Mail-In Database document for a new database
Databases\setting up to receive mailMail-in Database documents\creatingH_CREATING_A_MAILIN_DATABASE_DOCUMENT_FOR_A_NEW_DATABASE_OVERWIEWTopic1Creating a Mail-In Database document for a new databaseOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
ChapPrintChapter 2
Controlling and Monitoring Access to DatabasesH_CHAPTEW_2_CONTROLLING_USER_ACCESS_TO_DATABASES_CHAPTopic1Chapter 2
Controlling and Monitoring Access to DatabasesChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
To control the access that users and servers have to a database, you can customize the database access control list (ACL) and specify other security settings.
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
?StepsPrintDefault entries in the ACL
ACL\default entriesACL\group namesDatabase creator\access levelDefault group\access levelGrouw names\ACLLocalDomainServers group\access levelOtherDomainServers group\access levelH_NAMING_USERS_IN_THE_ACL_STEPSTopic1Default entries in the ACLStepsH_THE_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_OVERVIEW
H_NAMING_USERS_IN_THE_ACL_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_343274467229226519=-Default-H_NAMING_USERS_IN_THE_ACL_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_343274467229226520=Database creator user nameH_NAMING_USERS_IN_THE_ACL_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_343324467229226521=LocalDomainServersH_NAMING_USERS_IN_THE_ACL_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_343324467229226522=OtherDomainServers
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
?OverviewPrintAcceptable names in the ACL
ACL\aliases inACL\format for entriesACL\group namesACL\replica IDsACL\server namesACL\terminations groupACL\user namesAccess\anonymousAccess\denying to usersAliases\in ACLAlternate names\in ACLAnonymous access\Web users andAuthentication\user namesHierarchical names\wildcards andLDAP directories\authenticating Web users withNaming conventions\for the ACLReplica IDs\assigning access byReplicas\controlling changesTerminations group\adding names toUser names\aliasesUser names\wildcards inUsers\anonymousUsgrs\terminatedWeb users\authenticatingWeb\anonymous usersWildcards\ACL hierarchical names andH_ABOUT_ACCEPTABLE_ENTRIES_IN_AN_ACL_OVERVIEWTopic1Acceptable names in the ACLOverviewH_THE_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_OVERVIEW
H_ABOUT_ACCEPTABLE_ENTRIES_IN_AN_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_151378748829248273=Acceptable names in the ACLH_ABOUT_ACCEPTABLE_ENTRIES_IN_AN_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_174998768029225922=Wildcard entriesH_ABOUT_ACCEPTABLE_ENTRIES_IN_AN_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_232291158429218097=Names of usewsH_ABOUT_ACCEPTABLE_ENTRIES_IN_AN_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_232291158429218098=Names of serversH_ABOUT_ACCEPTABLE_ENTRIES_IN_AN_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390837516829208569=Names of groupsH_ABOUT_ACCEPTABLE_ENTRIES_IN_AN_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390837516829208570=Terminations group H_ABOUT_ACCEPTABLE_ENTRIES_IN_AN_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_241406025629217490=<+!>Alternate names<-!>H_ABOUT_ACCEPTABLE_ENTRIES_IN_AN_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_241406025629217491=<+!>LDAP users<-!>H_ABOUT_ACCEPTABLE_ENTRIES_IN_AN_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDWOPIC_390837516829208572=Anonymous usersH_ABOUT_ACCEPTABLE_ENTRIES_IN_AN_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390837516829208571=Replica IDs
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Accews to Databases
?OverviewPrintAccess levels in the ACL
ACL\access levelsAccess levels\serverAuthor access\actionsDepositor access\actionsDesigner access\actionsEditor access\actionsManager access\actionsNo access\assigningReader access\actionsServers\access levels forWeb\access levelsH_TABLE_OF_ACCESS_LEVELS_IN_THE_ACL_OVERVIEWTopic1Access levels in the ACLOverviewH_ADDING_USERS_TO_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
H_TABLE_OF_ACCESS_PRIVILEGES_IN_THE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_133297187229205819=Create documentsH_TABLE_OF_ACCESS_PRIVILEGES_IN_THE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_133297187229205820=Delete documentsH_TABLE_OF_ACCESS_PRIVILEGES_IN_THE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_133297187229205821=Create personal agentsH_TABLE_OF_ACCESS_PRIVILEGES_IN_THE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_133297187229205822=Create personal folders/viewsH_TABLE_OF_ACCESS_PRIVILEGES_IN_THE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_133297187229205823=Create shared folders/viewsH_TABLE_GF_ACCESS_PRIVILEGES_IN_THE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_133297187229205824=Create LotusScript/Java agentsH_TABLE_OF_ACCESS_PRIVILEGES_IN_THE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_133297187229205826=Read public documentsH_TABLE_OF_ACCESS_PRIVILEGES_IN_THE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_133347187229205827=Write public documents
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
?OverviewPrintUser types in the ACL
ACL\user typesDatabases\securitySecurity\databaseUser types\assigning to ACLH_ASSIGNING_USER_TYPES_IN_A_DATABASE_JCL_OVERVIEWTopic1User types in the ACLOverviewH_ADDING_USERS_TO_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW
H_ASSIGNING_USER_TYPES_IN_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390837516829208571=<+!>To assign a user type to a name<-!> from the workspaceH_ASSIGNING_USER_TYPES_IN_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_81569254429232587=To assign a user type to a name from the Domino AdministratorH_ASSIGNING_USER_TYPES_IN_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_151378748829248273=To assign user types to unspecified users
CJ=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Directory
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
?OverviewPrintRoles in the ACL
ACL\brackets inACL\rolesDatabases\rolesRoles\assigning in ACLH_USING_ROLES_IN_J_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEWTopic1Roles in the ACLOverviewH_ADDING_USERS_TO_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ed releas
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
OzerviewPrintCreating and managing roles
ACL\deleting rolesACL\displaying rolesRoles\creatingRoles\deletingRoles\displaying in ACLRoles\renamingDIALOG 508 508H_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEWTopic1Creating and managing rolesOverview
H_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_151378748829248273=To create a roleH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_161730220829208578=From the workspaceH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_815692544292325:7=From the Domino AdministratorH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_193092931229249054=To assign a person, group, or server to a roleH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_232291158429218097=From the workspaceH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_232291158429218098=To remove a person, group, or server from a roleH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_193092931229249055=From the workspaceH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_161730220829208579=To rename a roljH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_193092931229249056=From the workspaceH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_81569254429232588=From the Domino AdministratorH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_193092931229249057=To delete a roleH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_161730220829208580=From the workspaceH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_50390630429232777=From the Domino AdministratorH_EDITING_DATABASE_ACL_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390947516829208569=To displjy a role assigned to a person, group, or serverH_CREATING_AND_MANAGING_ROLES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_193092931229249058=From the workspace
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
711_EXTo
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
OverviewPrintManaging a database ACL
ACL\managingH_MANAGING_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVERTopic1Managing a database ACLOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databazes
?OverviewPrintUsing the Administration Process to manage the ACL
ACL\adding names toACL\database securityACL\updating with Administration ProcessAccess levels\changingAdministration Process\updating the ACL withTerminated users\deleting from systemUser names\editingH_MANAGING_AND_UPDATING_USER_NAMES_IN_DATABASE_ACLS_OVERVIEWTopic1Using the Administration Process to manage the ACLOverviewH_MANAGING_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVER
H_MANAGING_AND_UPDATING_USER_NAMES_IN_DATABASE_ACJS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390887516829208568=A user leaves the organizationH_MANAGING_AND_UPDATING_USER_NAMES_IN_DATABASE_ACLS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390887516829208569=A user needs access to the database H_MANAGING_AND_UPDATING_USER_NAMES_IN_DATABASE_ACLS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390887516829208570=A user name changes or you move the user in the hierarchyH_MANAGING_AND_UPDATING_USER_NAMES_IN_DATABASE_ACLS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390887516829208571=A user needs a different level of access
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAJ/O=Lotus
har/O
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
@OverviewPrintSetting up the Administration Process for databases
Administration Process\setting up for databasesDatabases\adjinistration servers andH_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_FOR_DATABASES_OVERVIEWTopic1Setting up the Administration Process for databasesOverviewH_MANAGING_AND_UPDATING_USER_NAMES_IN_DATABASE_ACLS_OVERVIEW
H_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_FOR_DATABASES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390887516829208568=From the workspaceH_SETTING_UP_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_FOR_DATABASES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390887516829208569=From the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
?OverviewPrintUsing the Web Administrator to manage database ACLs
ACL\Web administrator andWeb Administrator\managing the ACL withH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATJON_TOOL_TO_MANAGE_THE_ACL_OVERVIEWTopic1Using the Web Administrator to manage database ACLsOverviewH_MANAGING_A_DATABASE_ACL_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
erability with earlier releasesOverviewH_UPGRADING_SECURITY_3666_OVER01 Moving to Notes and Domino Release 510 Upgrading Security
CojtentsOverviewH_TO_SELECT_A_SERVER_TO_UPDATE_YOUR_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_1318_OVERYesTopic1Selecting a server to update your database access control listOverviewH_CHANGING_WHO_CAN_ACCESS_YOUR_DATABASE_7045_OVER
H_TO_SELECT_A_SERVER_TO_UPDATE_YOUR_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_1318_OVER_MIDTOPIC_248641529629230750=To set an administration server for one database
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
@OverviewPrintAccess to the Web Administrator
Authentication\administratorsPasswords\WebWeb Administrator\accessingWeb Administrator\passwordsWeb*Administrator\security settingsWeb\password for administratorsH_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_OVERTopic1Access to the Web AdministratorOverviewH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_TO_MANAGE_THE_ACL_OVERVIEW
H_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_267624646429240817=Authenticating administratorsH_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_390947516829208568=Default database securityH_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_DATABASE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_390947516829208569=Djfault server and agent security
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
@OverviewPrintGiving additional administrators access zo the Web Administrator
Web Administrator\access toWeb Administrator\rolesH_GIVING_ADDITIONAL_ADMINISTRATORS_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVERTopic1Giving additional administrators access to the Web AdministratorOverviewH_USING_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_TO_MANAGE_THE_ACL_OVERVIEW
H_GIVING_ADDITIONAL_ADMINISTRATORS_ACCESS_TO_THE_WEB_ADMINISTRATION_TOOL_OVER_MIDTOPIC_390947516829208568=Roles for administrators
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
OverviewPrintDisplaying the ACL history
ACL\monitoringDatabases\monitoringH_MONITORING_CHANGES_TO_AN_ACL_OVERVIEWTopic1Displaying the ACL historyOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
StepsPrintEnforcing a consistent access control list
ACL\disablingACL\enforcing on replicasReplication\enforcing consistent ACLH_ENFORCING_A_CONSISTENZ_ACLTopic1Enforcing a consistent access control listSteps
H_ENFORCING_A_CONSISTENT_ACL_MIDTOPIC_390887516829208568=To enforce a consistent access control list from the workspaceH_ENFORCING_A_CONSISTENT_ACL_MIDTOPIC_232291158429218097=To disable a consistent access control list from the workspaceH_ENFORCING_A_CONSISTENT_ACL_MIDTOPIC_390887516829208569=To enforce a consistent access control list from the Domino AdministratorH_ENFORCING_A_CONSISTENT_ACL_MIDTOPIC_390887516829208570=To disable a consiszent access control list from the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
evelopment/
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
OverviewPrintUpdating Readers and Authors fields
Authors fiejd\updatingReaders field\updatingH_UPDATING_READERS_AND_AUTHORS_FIELDS_OVERVIEWTopic1Updating Readers and Authors fieldsOverview
H_UPDATING_READERS_AND_AUTHORS_FIELDS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390947516829208568=To update Readers and Authors fields in all documents from the workspaceH_UPDATING_READERS_AND_AUTHORS_FIELDS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_390947516829208569=To update Readers and Authors fields in selected documents from the workspaceH_UPDATING_READERS_AND_AUTHORS_FIELDS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_357801411229210254=To*update Readers and Authors fields from the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
OverviewPrintSetting up database access for Internet users
ACLZaccess for Web usersH_SETTING_UP_ACL_ACCESS_FOR_INTERNET_AND_WEB_USERS_OVERTopic1Setting up database access for Internet usersOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monjtoring Access to Databases
?OverviewPrintMaximum Internet name-and-password access
Databases\passwordsPasswords\Web usersUser names\WebWeb users\controlling accessH_INTERNET_USERS_AND_DATABASE_ACCESS_OVERVIEWTopic1Maximum Internet name-and-password accessOverviewH_SETTING_UP_ACL_ACCESS_FOR_INTERNET_AND_WEB_USERS_OVER
H_INTERNET_USERS_AND_DATABASE_ACCESS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_50450630429232777=To select the maximum Internet name and password from the workspaceH_INTERNET_USERS_AND_DJTABASE_ACCESS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_50450630429232778=To select the maximum Internet name and password from the Domino AdministratorH_INTERNET_USERS_AND_DATABASE_ACCESS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_50450630429232779=To disable the maximum Internet name and password from the Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
?OverviewPrintRequiring an SSL connection to a database
Encryption\Internet transactions andInternet\enforcing encrypted transactionsSSL\Internet security andSecure Sockets Layer. See SSLSecurity\Internet transactions andH_ENFORCING_ENCRYPTED_WEB_TRANSACTIONS_FOR_A_DATABASE_OVERTopic1Requiring an SSL connejtion to a databaseOverviewH_SETTING_UP_ACL_ACCESS_FOR_INTERNET_AND_WEB_USERS_OVER
H_ENFORCING_ENCRYPTED_WEB_TRANSACTIONS_FOR_A_DATABASE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_304903811229235004=To require an SSL connection to a database
ContentsOverviewElements_of_a_view_999_999_999_MIDTOPIC_191229977629227120Topic1Managing Notes with viewsOverviewH_NAVIGATION_VIEWS_AND_PANES_OVER
:2TMm
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
?OverviewPrintExamples of setting up the ACL for a Web database
ACL\Web database settingsSecurity\Web usersH_SETTING_UP_THE_ACL_FOR_A_WEB_DATABASE_OVERTozic1Examples of setting up the ACL for a Web databaseOverviewH_SETTING_UP_ACL_ACCESS_FOR_INTERNET_AND_WEB_USERS_OVER
H_SETTING_UP_THE_ACL_FOR_A_WEB_DATABASE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_99318240029240601=ACL for a high-security confidential databaseH_SETTING_UP_THE_ACL_FOR_A_WEB_DATABASE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_99318240029240602=ACL for a medium-security project databaseH_SETTING_UP_THE_ACL_FOR_A_WEB_DATABASE_OVER_MIDTOPIC_99318240029240603=ACL for a low-security informational databaseH_SETTING_UP_THE_ACL_FOR_A_WEB_DATABASJ_OVER_MIDTOPIC_99318240029240604=ACL for a low-security discussion database<:t0>
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
s Notes#'
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controlling and Monitoring Access to Databases
OverviewPrintWorkstation data*security
Data security\ECL andECL\workstation security andSecurity\workstationWorkstations\data securityH_WORKSTATION_DATA_SECURITY_OVERTopic1Workstation data securityOverview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases02 Controljing and Monitoring Access to Databases
StepsPrintSending a memo to users to update their ECLs
ECL\updatingH_WORKSTATION_DATA_SECURITY_OVER_MIDTOPIC_171686604829226538Topic1Sending a memo to users to update their ECLsSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
ChapPrintChapter 3
Creating and Customizing Replicas on ServersH_CHAPTER_3_CONTROLLING_ACCESS_TO_A_DATABASETopic1Chapter 3
Creating and Customizing Replicas on ServersChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter describes how to create database replicas on servers ajd how to use replication settings to customize the contents of the replicas. It also describes how to disable replication of a database and how to force replication between replicas on servers. abled with a possible value of either 1 or null
$HLEnable
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
OverviewPrintReplicas and replication
Replicas\describedReplicas\planningH_ABOUT_REPLICATIONTopic1Replicas and replicationOverview
H_ABOUT_REPLICATION_MIDTOPIC_174150112029205031=Deciding when to create a replica
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
AboutPrintHow server-to-server replication works
Deletion stubs\documentReplication\schedulingReplication\stepsReplicator server program\describedServer programs\ReplicatorServer-to-server replication\schedulingServer-to-server replication\stepsH_ABOUT_HOW_REPLICATION_WORKS_DBTopic1How server-to-server replicazion works About
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
?OvezviewPrintGuidelines for setting server access to databases
Access levels\databaseDatabases\access levelsServers\access to databasesH_ABOUT_GUIDELINES_FOR_SELECTING_SERVER_ACCESS_LEVELSTopic1Guidelines for setting server access to databasesOverviewH_SETTING_ACCESS_FOR_PROPER_DATABASE_REPLICATION_OVER
H_ABOUT_GUIDELINES_FOR_SELECTING_SERVER_ACCESS_LEVELS_MIDTOPIC_174210112029205032=Assign an access level that is as least as high as the highest user access levelH_ABOUT_GUIDELINES_FOR_SELECTIJG_SERVER_ACCESS_LEVELS_MIDTOPIC_174150112029205031=Include servers in read access lists for database design elementsH_ABOUT_GUIDELINES_FOR_SELECTING_SERVER_ACCESS_LEVELS_MIDTOPIC_174210112029205033=Assign appropriate access to intermediate serversH_ABOUT_GUIDELINES_FOR_SELECTING_SERVER_ACCESS_LEVELS_MIDTOPIC_174210112029205034=Assign Reader access for one-way replicationH_ABOUT_GUIDELINES_FOR_SELECTING_SERVER_ACCESS_LEVELS_MIDTOPIC_174210112029205035=Assign Editor access to allow author changes to replicatj
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
C6054E658
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
StepsPrintDefault server groups in an ACL
ACL\server groups inExternal servers\access levels forLocajDomainServers group\access levelOtherDomainServers group\access levelServers, external\access levels forH_DEFAULT_GROUPS_IN_AN_ACL_STopic1Default server groups in an ACLSteps
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Full Text IndexCSDIALOG 10458 81FILES_TAB_TOOLS_FULL_TEXT_INDEX_0210Topic1Full*Text IndexCS
FILES_TAB_TOOLS_FULL_TEXT_INDEX_0210_MIDTOPIC_267864304029250886=To create a full-text indexFILES_TAB_TOOLS_FULL_TEXT_INDEX_0210_MIDTOPIC_267864304029250887=Full-text index optionsFILES_TAB_TOOLS_FULL_TEXT_INDEX_0210_MIDTOPIC_267864304029250889=Update frequency optionsFILES_TAB_TOOLS_FULL_TEXT_INDEX_0210_MIDTOPIC_267864304029250893=To update an indexFILES_TAB_TOOLS_FULL_TEXT_INDEX_0210_MIDTOPIC_267864304029250894=To delete an index
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
?StepsPrintCreating replicas using the Administration Process
Administration Process\creating replicas withCross-domain Configuration documenys\replicas andDomino Administrator\creating replicasReplicas\Cross-Domain Configuration document andReplicas\creatingDIALOG 10451 151H_CREATING_REPLICAS_USING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_2975_STEPSTopic1Creating replicas using the Administration ProcessStepsH_CREATING_A_REPLICA_ON_A_SERVER
H_CREATING_REPLICAS_USING_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESS_2975_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_34425219229246899=Creating replicas by dragging databases to a destination server
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
?StepsPrintCreating one replica manually
Databases\encryptingReplicas\creatingReplicas\settings forReplication\copy commandReplication\encryption andReplication\settingsDIALOG 2693 1001H_CREATING_ONE_REPLICA_MANUALLY_8508_STEPSTopic1Creating one replica manuallyStepsH_CREATING_A_REPLICA_ON_A_SERVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino)Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
?StepsPrintLimiting the contents of a replica
Deletion stubs\purgingDeletions\replication andPurge intervalPurge interval\deletion stubs andReplicas\deleting documents fromReplicas\limiting contentReplication formulas\usingReplication history\specifying datesReplication\document size andReplication\non-document elementsReplication\purge interval forReplication\selectiveReplication\specifying datesSize\attaihmentsSize\replicaH_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_THAT_LIMIT_THE_CONTENTS_OF_A_REPLICA_7276_STEPSTopic1Limiting the contents of a replicaStepsH_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_OVER
H_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_THAT_LIMIT_THE_CONTENTS_OF_A_REPLICA_7276_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_174260112029205031=Remove documents not modified in the last <+">x<-"> daysH_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_THAT_LIMIT_THE_CONTENTS_OF_A_REPLICA_7276_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_174260112029205032=Only Replicate Incoming Documents Saved or Modified After: <+">date<-"> H_REPLICATIONYSETTINGS_THAT_LIMIT_THE_CONTENTS_OF_A_REPLICA_7276_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_174260112029205033=Receive summary and 40KB of rich text only H_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_THAT_LIMIT_THE_CONTENTS_OF_A_REPLICA_7276_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_174260112029205034=Replicate a subset of documentsH_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_THAT_LIMIT_THE_CONTENTS_OF_A_REPLICA_7276_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_174260112029205035=Replicate
=" ue
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
?StepsPrintLimiting what a replica sends
Replicas\limiting contentH_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_THAT_LIMIT_WHAT_A_REPLICA_SENDS_9235_STEPSTopic1Limiting what a replica sendsStepsH_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_OVER
H_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_THATYLIMIT_WHAT_A_REPLICA_SENDS_9235_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_174260112029205031=Do not send deletions made in this replica to other replicasH_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_THAT_LIMIT_WHAT_A_REPLICA_SENDS_9235_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_174260112029205032=Do not send changes in database title & catalog info to other replicasH_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_THAT_LIMIT_WHAT_A_REPLICA_SENDS_9235_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_174260112029205033=Do not send changes in local security property to other replicas
=" ue
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
i Pflaum/O
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
H_MISCELLANEOUS_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_3121_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_174260112029205031=Temporarily disable replicationH_MISCELLANEOUS_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_3121_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_174260112029205032=Scheduled replication priorityH_MISCELLANEOUS_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_3121_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_174260112029205033=CD-ROM publishing date
=" ue
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/I=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
?StepsPrintSpecifying replication settings for one replica
Replication\settingsH_SPECIFYING_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_FOR_ONE_REPLICA_8055_STEYSTopic1Specifying replication settings for one replicaStepsH_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_OVER
=" ue
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
?StepsPrintSyecifying replication settings for multiple replicas from one source replica
Replication\settingsH_SPECIFYING_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_FOR_MULTIPLE_REPLICAS_8130_STEPSTopic1Specifying replication settings for multiple replicas from one source replicaStepsH_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_OVER
=" ue
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ID File SettingsCSDIALOG 10398 10398H_ID_FILE_SETTINGS_CSTopic1ID File SettingsCS
H_ID_FILE_SETTINGS_CS_MIDTOPIC_86514499229253849=For more information
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
?ExamplesPrintExamples of specifying replication settings for multiple replicas
Examples\replicationReplication\examplesH_EXAMPLES_SPECIFYING_REPLICATION_SJTTINGS_FROM_A_CENTRAL_SOURCE_REPLICA_42_EXTopic1Examples of specifying replication settings for multiple replicasExamplesH_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_OVER
H_EXAMPLES_SPECIFYING_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_FROM_A_CENTRAL_SOURCE_REPLICA_42_EX_MIDTOPIC_104846876829230718=Using the same replication settings for all destination serversH_EXAMPLES_SPECIFYING_REPLICATION_SETTINGS_FROM_A_CENTRAL_SOURCE_REPLICA_42_EX_MIDTOPIC_104846876829230719=Using separate replication settings for each destination server
=" ue
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
OverviewPrintDisabling and enabling replication of a database
Databases\replicatingReplication\disablingRepljcation\enablingDIALOG 10454 130H_DISABLING_REPLICATION_OF_A_DATABASE_2012_OVERTopic1Disabling and enabling replication of a databaseOverview
H_DISABLING_REPLICATION_OF_A_DATABASE_2012_OVER_MIDTOPIC_124007107229234369=To disable replication of one databaseH_DISABLING_REPLICATION_OF_A_DATABASE_2012_OVER_MIDTOPIC_124007107229234370=To disable replication of multiple databases
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases03 Creating and Customizing Replicas on Servers
OverviewPrintForcing a server database to replicate
Databases\forcing replicationReplication\commandsReplication\forcingDIALOG 10427 1001;DIALOG 10415 517H_FORCING_DATABASE_REPLICATION_OVERTopic1Forcing a server database to replicateOzerview
H_FORCING_DATABASE_REPLICATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_96150032029208581=From the server consoleH_FORCING_DATABASE_REPLICATION_OVER_MIDTOPIC_96150032029208582=From the database
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases04 Organizing Databases on a Sjrver
ChapPrintChapter 4
Organizing Databases on a ServerH_CHAPTER_4_CREATING_DIRECTORY_AND_DATABASE_LINKS_CHAPTopic1Chapter 4
Organizing Databases on a ServerChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter discusses how to organize databases that are in the Domino data directory or on another server and how to create links to directories and dazabases that are not in the Domino data directory.
06 Managing Domino Databases04 Organizing Databases on a Server
H_CREATING_AND_DELETING_DIRECTORIES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_44620409629208575=To create a directory folderH_CREATING_AND_DELETING_DIRECTORIES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_44620409629208576=To delete a directory folder
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases04 Organizing Databases on a Server
?OverviewPrintCreating directory and database links
H_MANAGING_DIRECTORY_AND_DATABASE_LINKS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_44620409629208575=To create or update a linkH_MANAGING_DIRECTORY_AND_DATABASE_LINKS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_44620409629208577=To delete a link
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases05 Encrypting Databases and Distributing Encryption Keys
ChapPrintChapter 5
Encrypting Databases and Distributing Encryption KeysH_CHAPTER_5_ENCRYPTING_DATABASES_AND_DISTRIBUTING_ENCRYPTION_KEYS_CHAPTopic1Chapter 5
Encrypting Databases and Distributing Encryption KeysChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases05 Encrypting Databases and Distributing Encryption Keys
Using the same replication settings for all destination servers
The Acme Corporation has a database called Technical Support on the server Support-E/East/Acme, which it uses to post information about customer problems and problem resolutions. The database displays customer suggestions made during the support calls in a view called Customer Suggestions. Acme has three servers at satellite sales offices: Sales-Bos-E/East/Acme, Sales-Phil-E/East/Acme, and Sales-Hart-E/East/Acme. The satellite sales offices are only interested in customer suggestions and not in other details of technical support calls. Therefore, Acme replicates only the contents of the Customer Suggestions view to these servers. To accomplish this, it completes the replication settings dialog box on the Technical Support database on Support-E/East/Acme as follows. Note that although the "When computer" box shows only Sales-Bos-E/East/Acme, there are similar settings for Sales-Phil-E/East/Acme and Sales-Hart-E/East/Acme.
104846876829230719
Using separate replication settings for each destination server
The Acme Corporation has a database called Sales Leads on the server Sales-E/East/Acme. Acme has three servers at satellite sales offices: Sales-Bos-E/East/Acme, Sales-Phil-E/East/Acme, and Sales-Hart-E/East/Acme. Each satellite sales office is only interested in leads pertaining to its area. Each document in the Sales Leads database includes the field "Office" with one of these keywords selected: Boston, Philadelphia, Hartford. To replicate only sales leads pertaining to Boston to Sales-Bos-E/East/Acme, Acme completes the replication settings dialog box on the Sales Leads database on Sales-E/East/Acme as follows.
the ACL for a W
N=David Mahar/OU
rtificat
M.Command.Unknow
CATION_SETTINGS_
erviewH_REPLICAS
can customize re
hich documents a
way; to force th
Click he
replicas.
Acme sets up replication from Sales-E/East/Acme to Sales-Phil-E/East/Acme and to Sales-Hart-E/East/Acme in a similar fashion.
Although these examples describe server-to-server replication, you could use similar settings to configure replication between a central source replica and replicas on Notes clients. For example, salespeople could replicate directly with the source replica and receive only leads pertinent to their areas. To accomplish this, specify Notes users' hierarchical names as destination servers.
See Also
Click here
Specifying replication settings for multiple replicas from one source replicaa
Click here
06 Managing Domino Databases05 Encrypting Databases and Distributing Encryption Keys
H_DISTRIBUTING_ENCRYPTION_KEYS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_65066579229208424=To mail an encryption keyH_DISTRIBUTING_ENCRYPTION_KEYS_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_65066579229208425=To export an encryption key to a file
3UJ 9
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases05 Encrypting Databases and Distributing Encryption Keys
H_MERGING_AN_ENCRYPTION_KEY_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_65066579229208424=To merge an encryption key received by e-mailH_MERGING_AN_ENCRYPTION_KEY_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_65066579229208425=To merge an encryption key received as a file
3UJ 9
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases06 Setting Up and Managing Full-Text Indexes
ChapPrintChapter 6
Setting Up and Managing Full-text IndexesH_CHAPTER_6_SETTING_UP_AND_MANAGING_DATABASE_INDEXES_CHAPTopic1Chapter 6
Setting Up and Managing Full-text IndexesChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
You must index a da{abase for full-text searches to allow users to quickly search and locate information.
MESSAGE
SEARCH
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotustus2
06 Managing Domino Databases06 Setting Up and Managing Full-Text Indexes
OverviewPrintIkcluding databases in Domain Search
Domain Search\adding databasesH_ENABLING_DATABASES_FOR_INCLUSION_IN_MULTIDATABASE_INDEXES_OVERVIEWTopic1Including databases in Domain SearchOverview
H_ENABLING_DATABASES_FOR_INCLUSION_IN_MULTIDATABASE_INDEXES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8107632029208832=Using the Database Properties boxH_ENABLING_DATABASES_FOR_INCLUSION_IN_MULTIDATABASE_INDEXES_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_8107632029208831=Using Domino Administrator
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases07 Setting up Database Libraries and Catalogs
ChapPrintChapter 7
Setting Up Database Libraries and CatalogsH_CHAPTER_7_SETTING_UP_DATABASE_LIBRARIES_AND_CATALOGS_CHAPTopic1Chapter 7
Setting Up Database Libraries and CatalogsChap
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
This chapter discusses setting up and managing database libraries and database catalogs, but does not cover the Domain Catalog. For more information on administering a Domain Catalog and Domain Search, see D
FILES_TAB_TOOLS_MANAGE_ACL_0210_MIDTOPIC_267924304029250886=BasicsFILES_TAB_TOOLS_MANAGE_ACL_0210_MIDTOPIC_267924304029250888=RolesFILES_TAB_TOOLS_MANAGE_ACL_0210_MIDTOPIC_267924304029250889=To add a roleFILES_TAB_TOOLS_MANAGE_ACL_0210_MIDTOPIC_267924304029250890=To rename a roleFILES_TAB_TOOLS_MANAGE_ACL_0210_MIDTOPIC_267924304029250891=To remove a roleFILES_TAB_TOOLS_MANAGE_ACL_0210_MIDTOPIC_267924304029250892=AdvancedFILES_TAB_TOOLS_MANAGE_ACL_0210_MIDTOPIC_267924304029250893=To select an administration+server and update Readers and Authors fieldsFILES_TAB_TOOLS_MANAGE_ACL_0210_MIDTOPIC_267924304029250894=To enforce a consistent access control listFILES_TAB_TOOLS_MANAGE_ACL_0210_MIDTOPIC_267924304029250895=To disable a consistent access control listFILES_TAB_TOOLS_MANAGE_ACL_0210_MIDTOPIC_267924304029250896=To select the maximum Internet name and password FILES_TAB_TOOLS_MANAGE_ACL_0210_MIDTOPIC_267924304029250897=To disable the maximum Internet name and password
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
HELP_WINDOW
Context Help Form
HELP_DOCUMENT
Context Help Form
formJ
1-4-00
CN=Notes User Assistance/OU=CAM/O=NotesCN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus NotesELP_WINDOW
Context Help Form
HELP_DOCUMENT
Context Help Form
formJ
1-4-00
Y)XBKh
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
OverviewPrintDatabase properties that optimize database performance
Compacting\databasesData\preventing overwriting ofDataaase properties\performance andDatabases\compactingDatabases\disabling response hierarchyDatabases\document access propertyDatabases\document historyDatabases\headline monitoringDatabases\restricting revisionsDatabases\unread marksDeleted data\preventing overwriting ofDocument forms\restrictingDocument forms\view updates andDocuments\displaying before imagesDocuments\edit historyDocuments\restricting revisionsEdit history\restrictingForms\restrictingHeadline monitoring\disablingImages\displaying after loadiagOptimization. See PerformanceOverwriting data\preventingPerformance\optimizingResponse hierarchy\disablingRevisions\restrictingStored forms\restrictingUnread marks\disablingViews\rebuildingH_PROPERTIES_THAT_IMPROVE_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5045_OVERVIEWTopic1Database properties that optimize database performanceOverview
H_PROPERTIES_THAT_IMPROVE_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5045_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_5150572829202958=Display images after documentsH_PROPERTIES_THAT_IMPROVE_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5045_OVARVIEW_MIDTOPIC_5150572829202959=Prevent the use of stored formsH_PROPERTIES_THAT_IMPROVE_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5045_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_5150572829202960=Don't maintain unread marksH_PROPERTIES_THAT_IMPROVE_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5045_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_5150572829202961=Associate document tables with forms for view updatesH_PROPERTIES_THAT_IMPROVE_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5045_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_5150572829202962=Prevent overwriting of deleted dataH_PROPERTIES_THAT_IMPROVE_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5045_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_5110572829202963=Don't maintain "Accessed (In this file)" document propertyH_PROPERTIES_THAT_IMPROVE_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5045_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_5150572829202965=Disable specialized response hierarchy informationH_PROPERTIES_THAT_IMPROVE_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5045_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_5150572829202966=Prevent headline monitoringH_PROPERTIES_THAT_IMPROVE_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5045_OVERVIEW_MIDTOPIC_5150572829202967=Limit the size of $UpdatedBy fieldsH_PROPERTIES_THAT_IMPROVE_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_5045_OVERVIEW_MIDTOQIC_5150572829202968=Limit the size of $Revisions fields
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
H_ABOUT_THE_DATABASE_CACHE_MIDTOPIC_5210572829202958=Database cache sizeH_ABOUT_THE_DATABASE_CACHE_MIDTOPIC_5210572829202959=How databases are dropped from the cache
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintMonitoring the database cache
Database cache\monitoringDatabase cache\statisticsStatistics\database cacheH_MONITORING_THE_DATABASE_CACHETopic1Monitoring the database cacheStepsH_ABOUT_THE_DATABASE_CACHE
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
256357006A9
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintManaging the database cache
Database cache\disablingDatabase cache\managingH_MANAGING_THE_DATABASE_CACHE_STEPSTopic1Managing the database cacheStepsH_ABOUT_THE_DATAAASE_CACHE
H_MANAGING_THE_DATABASE_CACHE_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_394249392029208856=To change the number of databases the cache holdsH_MANAGING_THE_DATABASE_CACHE_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_394249392029208857=To show databases in the cacheH_MANAGING_THE_DATABASE_CACHE_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_394249392029208858=To disable the cache
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Notes:
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?OverviewPrintTools for monitoring database size
Databases\size, controllingSize\databaseH_ABOUT_MONITORING_THE_SIZE_OF_DATABASESTopic1Tools for monitoring database sizeOverviewH_CONTROLLING_THE_SIZE_OF_DATABASES_8305_ABOUT
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
6357006A914
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
H_ABOUTQCOMPACTING_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_169769920029234801=Styles of compactingH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_169769920029234802=In-place compacting with space recovery onlyH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_169769920029234803=In-place compacting with space recovery and reduction in file sizeH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_169769920029234804=Copy-style compactingH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES_MIDTOPIC_5260572829202959=When to compact databases
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?OverviewPrintWays to compact databases
Compact task\runningCompacting\databasesDatabases\compactingH_WAYS_TO_COMPACT_DATABASES_OVERTopic1Ways to compact databasesOverviewH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintCompacting Release 4 databases
Databases\file format ofDatabases\in a mixed-release environmentRelease 4 databases\compactingH_COMPACTING_RELEASE_4_FORMAT\DATABASES_1627_STEPSTopic1Compacting Release 4 databasesStepsH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Notes!!ma
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?Ste|sPrintDetermining the file format of a database
Databases\file format ofH_DETERMINING_THE_FILE_FORMAT_OF_A_DATABASE_2359_STEPSTopic1Determining the file format of a databaseStepsH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES
H_DETERMINING_THE_FILE_FORMAT_OF_A_DATABASE_2359_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_365039513629208960=From the Domino AdministratorH_DETERMINING_THE_FILE_FORMAT_OF_A_DATABASE_2359_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_365039513629208961=From the Database Properties box
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
2//632
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintRunning Compact using the Files tab
Compacting\databasesDatabases\compactingDIALOG 10459 58H_RUNNING_COMPACT_USING_THE_DATABASE_TOOL_4867_STEPSTopic1Running Colpact using the Files tabStepsH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Edelete.G
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintRunning Compact using the Task - \tart tool
Compacting\databasesDatabases\compactingH_RUNNING_COMPACT_USING_THE_TASK_TOOL_8976_STEPSTopic1Running Compact using the Task - Start toolStepsH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06,Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintRunning Compact using a console command
Compacting\databasesDatabases\compactingH_RUNNING_COMPACT_USING_A_CONSOLE_COMMAND_7532_STEPSTopic1Running Compact using a console commandStepsH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintRunning Compact using a Program document
Compact task\schedulingCompacting\databasesDatabases\compactingH_RUNNING_COMPACT_USING_A_PROGRAM_DOCUMENT_3190_STEPSTopic1Running Compact using a Program documentStepsH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotu|
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintRunning Compact from the Database Properties box
Compacting\databasesDatabases\compactingINFOBOX 2563 3H_RUNNING_COMPACT_FROM_THL_DATABASE_PROPERTIES_BOX_5739_STEPSTopic1Running Compact from the Database Properties boxStepsH_ABOUT_COMPACTING_DATABASES
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
am Zirch
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
H_DELETING_INACTIVE_DOCUMENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_349323833629204760=Archiving deleted documentsH_ABOUT_ARCHIVING_AN_ACTIVE_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_5320572829202959=Customizing an archive database for fast accessH_DELETING_INACTIVE_DOCUMENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_279155593629232910=Remove unnecessary fieldsH_DELETING_INACTIVJ_DOCUMENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_279155593629232911=Use only a few views and create a full-text index H_DELETING_INACTIVE_DOCUMENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_279155593629232912=Create buttons or agents in the active database H_ABOUT_ARCHIVING_AN_ACTIVE_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_5320572829202960=Using an archive copy for statistical analysis
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
/852563570
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintSetting up basic document archiving with the archiving tool
Archives, database\setting upDocuments\archivingH_CONFIGURING_THE_DOCUMENT_DELETION_AND_ARCHIVING_PROPERTY_STEPSTopic1Setting up basic document archiving with the archiving toolStepsH_DOCUMENT_DELETION_AND_ARCHIVING_PROPERTY_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
^i+E6
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintSetting up advanced document archiving with the archiving tool
Archives, database\setting upDocuments\archivingH_SETTING_UP_ADVANCED_DOCUMENT_DELETION_AND_ARCHIVING_7040_STEPSTopic1Setting up advanced document archiving with the archiving toolStepsH_DOCUMENT_DELETION_AND_JRCHIVING_PROPERTY_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
StorageT
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintRunning the archiving tool
Documents\archiving from cliejtDocuments\archiving from serverH_RUNNING_THE_DELETION_AND_ARCHIVING_TOOL_1317_STEPSTopic1Running the archiving toolStepsH_DOCUMENT_DELETION_AND_ARCHIVING_PROPERTY_OVER
H_RUNNING_THE_DELETION_AND_ARCHIVING_TOOL_1317_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_115804838429239172=To run the tool from the workstationH_RUNNING_THE_DELETION_AND_ARCHIVING_TOOL_1317_STEPS_MIDTOPIC_115804838429239173=To run the tool on the server
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
3ANotes:/
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?StepsPrintViewing an Archiving Log
Archiving Log\viewingH_VIEWING_THE_ARCHIVING_LOG_5946_STEPSTopic1Viewing an Archiving LogStepsH_DOCUMENT_DELETION_AND_ARCHIVING_PROPERTY_OVER
CN=David Mjhar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
2564B4006ED
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?OverviewPrintUsing an agent to delete and archive documents
Agents\archiving documents withArchiving\agents forDoczments\archiving with agentsDocuments\deletingH_USING_AN_AGENT_TO_DELETE_AND_ARCHIVE_DOCUMENTS_OVERTopic1Using an agent to delete and archive documentsOverviewH_DOCUMENT_DELETION_AND_ARCHIVING_PROPERTY_OVER
H_USING_AN_AGENT_TO_DELETE_AND_ARCHIVE_DOCUMENTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_316028668829270573=To use an agent to delete and archive documents
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
?ExamplesPrintExamples of using an agent to delete and archive documents
Documents\archiving with agentsExamples\archiving agentsH_EXAMPLES_CREATING_AN_ARCHIVING_AGENT_WITH_THE_AGENT_BUILDERTopic1Examples of using an agent to delete and archive documentsExamplesHZDOCUMENT_DELETION_AND_ARCHIVING_PROPERTY_OVER
H_EXAMPLES_CREATING_AN_ARCHIVING_AGENT_WITH_THE_AGENT_BUILDER_MIDTOPIC_5370572829202958=<+!>An agent that archives documents according to date modified <-!>H_EXAMPLES_CREATING_AN_ARCHIVING_AGENT_WITH_THE_AGENT_BUILDER_MIDTOPIC_5370572829202959=<+!>An agent that archives documents according to field<-!> <+!>status<-!>
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
N=MERLOT/
06 Managing Domino Databases08 Optimizing Database Performance and Size
OverviewPrintAllowing more fields in a database
Database fields\increasing number ofFields, database\increasing number ofH_ALLOWING_MORE_FIELDS_IN_A_DATABASE_5503_OVERTopic1Allowing more fields in a databaseOverview
?StepsPrintMoving a database without using the Administration P{ocess
Databases\movingH_MOVING_A_DATABASE_WITHOUT_THE_ADMINISTRATION_PROCESSTopic1Moving a database without using the Administration ProcessStepsH_ABOUT_MOVING_A_DATABASE
?TroubleshootingPrintUsers cannkt access the database
Database access\troubleshootingDatabases\access problemsTroubleshooting\database accessH_WHY_CANT_USERS_ACCESS_A_DATABASETopic1Users cannot access the databaseTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_PROBLEMS_OVER
H_WHY_CANT_USERS_ACCESS_A_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_250183980829219853=<+!>The server storing the database is temporarily<-!> <+!>down<-!>H_WHY_CANT_USERS_ACCESS_A_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_250183980829219854=<+!>Users don't have the appropriate accessH_WHY_CANT[USERS_ACCESS_A_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219856=<+!>Server backup is occurring during work hoursH_WHY_CANT_USERS_ACCESS_A_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219857=<+!>The server is continuously updating a full-text index
?TroubleshootingPrintUsers experience a delay when accessing the database
Database cache\performance problems andUnread marks\disablingViews\database performance andH_WHY_ARE_USERS_EXPERIENCING_DELAYS_WHEN_ACCESSING_A_DATABASETopic1Users experience a delay when accessing the databaseTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_PROBLEMS_OVER
H_WHY_ARE_USERS_E[PERIENCING_DELAYS_WHEN_ACCESSING_A_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219853=<+!>The database is heavily usedH_WHY_ARE_USERS_EXPERIENCING_DELAYS_WHEN_ACCESSING_A_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219854=There are too many viewsH_WHY_ARE_USERS_EXPERIENCING_DELAYS_WHEN_ACCESSING_A_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219855=<+!>View indexes are being refreshed too frequentlyH_WHY_ARE_USERS_EXPERIENCING_DELAYS_WHEN_ACCESSING_A_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_267827692829237008=Unread mark processing may cause delaysH_WHY_ARE_USERS_EXPERIEKCING_DELAYS_WHEN_ACCESSING_A_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219857=The database design is complexH_WHY_ARE_USERS_EXPERIENCING_DELAYS_WHEN_ACCESSING_A_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_267827692829237009=Database performance properties are not being usedH_WHY_ARE_USERS_EXPERIENCING_DELAYS_WHEN_ACCESSING_A_DATABASE_MIDTOPIC_267827692829237010=The database cache needs adjustment
?TroubleshootingPrintResolving conflicts when names are assigned to more than one access level
Access levels\conflictsDatabase access\access level conflictsH_NAMES_ASSIGNED_TO_MORE_THAN_ONE_ACCESS_LEVEL_OVERTopic1Resolving conflicts when names are assignkd to more than one access levelTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_PROBLEMS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Domino Web Server Configurationk
DOMCFG.NTF
Domino Web Server Configuration Template
Holds custom error pages for use with the Web server.
Domino Web Server Log
DOMLOG.NTF
Domino Web Server Log Template
Logs information about activities on a Domino Web server.t
Headlinesn
HEADLINE.NTF
StdNotesHeadlines5.0
Allows users to subscribe to various databases or Web sites and receive updates on them.
?TroubleshootingPrintUsing Groups and Roles to determine what controls user access
Access problems\troubleshootingDatabase access\Group and Roles dialog boxDatabases\Grou
s and Roles dialog boxRoles\access problems andH_FINDING_OUT_WHAT_S_CONTROLLING_A_USER_S_DATABASE_ACCESS_OVERTopic1Using Groups and Roles to determine what controls user accessTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_PROBLEMS_OVER
?TroubleshootingPrintUsing Find Note to analyze a document reported in the log file
Documents\finding by Note IDNote ID\finding documents byTroubleshooting\documents in log fileH_ANALYZING_A_DOCUMENT_REPORTED_IN_THE_LOG_FILE_OVERTopic1Using Find Note to analyze a document reported in the log fileTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_DATABASE_PERFORMANCE_PROBLEMS_OVER
?TroubloshootingPrintA database replica does not contain all the documents it should
Disk space\troubleshootingReplication\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\disk space problemsTroubleshooting\replication between serversH_WHY_DOESNT_A_REPLICA_CONTAIN_ALL_THE_DOCUMENTS_IT_SHOULDTopic1A database replica does not contain all the documents it shouldTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_REPLICATION_PROBLEMS_OVER
H_WHY_DOESNT_A_REPLICA_CONTAIN_ALL_THE_DOCUMENTS_IT_SHOULD_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219853=Replicos are different sizesH_WHY_DOESNT_A_REPLICA_CONTAIN_ALL_THE_DOCUMENTS_IT_SHOULD_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219854=The source server has insufficient accessH_WHY_DOESNT_A_REPLICA_CONTAIN_ALL_THE_DOCUMENTS_IT_SHOULD_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219855=<+!>There is no destination server in an access list<-!>H_WHY_DOESNT_A_REPLICA_CONTAIN_ALL_THE_DOCUMENTS_IT_SHOULD_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219856=<+!>An intermediate server has insufficient accessH_WHY_DOESNT_A_REPLICA_CONTAIN_ALL_THE_DOCUMENTS_IT_SHOULD_MIDTOPIC_25024398082921?857=<+!>Replication settings are filtering documents<-!>H_WHY_DOESNT_A_REPLICA_CONTAIN_ALL_THE_DOCUMENTS_IT_SHOULD_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219858=<+!>The server is out of disk spaceH_WHY_DOESNT_A_REPLICA_CONTAIN_ALL_THE_DOCUMENTS_IT_SHOULD_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219859=Older documents weren't replicated to a new replica
?TroubleshootingPrintChanges to the database title do not replicate
Database titles\replicatingH_WHY_DONT_CHANGES_TO_THE_DATABASE_TITLE_REPLICATETopic1Changes to the database title do not replicateTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_REPLICATION_PROBLEMS_OVER
?TroubleshootingPrintDatabase replicas are different sizes
Replicas\size ofSize\replicaH_WHY_ARE_REPLICAS_DIFFERENT_SIZESTopic1Database replicas are different sizesTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_REPLICATION_PROBLEMS_OVER
H_WHY_ARE_REPLICAS_DIFFERENT_SIZES_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219853=<+!>Replication settings<-!> H_WHY_ARE_REPLICAS_DIFFERENT_SIZES_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219854=<+!>Access control list<-/>H_WHY_ARE_REPLICAS_DIFFERENT_SIZES_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219855=<+!>Read ACLs or reader names fields<-!> H_WHY_ARE_REPLICAS_DIFFERENT_SIZES_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219856=<+!>View indexesH_WHY_ARE_REPLICAS_DIFFERENT_SIZES_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219857=<+!>Personal agents, views, or folders<-!>H_WHY_ARE_REPLICAS_DIFFERENT_SIZES_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219858=<+!>Deletions are not replicatedH_WHY_ARE_REPLICAS_DIFFERENT_SIZES_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219859=<+!>Unused space<-!>
?TroubleshootingPrintThe database stops replicating and the option Enforce a consistent ACL is selected
ACL\consistencyACL\replication problem
andReplication\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\replicationH_WHY_DOESNT_A_REPLICA_CONTAIN_ALL_THE_DOCUMENTS_IT_SHOULD_MIDTOPIC_380340896029233991Topic1The database stops replicating and the option Enforce a consistent ACL is selectedTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_REPLICATION_PROBLEMS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
5eates the User Registration Queue database that stores information on Notes users pending registration.
?TroubleshootingPrintThe database replica has not received ACL changes
ACL\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\replicationH_THE_DATABASE_REPLICA_HAS_NOT_RECEIVED_ACL_CHANGESTopic1The dataiase replica has not received ACL changesTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_REPLICATION_PROBLEMS_OVER
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
To receive ACL changes from a source server, the database replica on the destination server must give the source server Manager access and the source server must give the destination server at least Reader access.
?TroubleshootingPrintThe new replica contains the ACL of the source server but you did not copy)the ACL
ACL\troubleshootingReplica stubs\definedTroubleshooting\replicationH_WHY_DOES_A_NEW_REPLICA_CONTAIN_THE_ACL_OF_THE_SOURCE_SERVER_WHEN_I_DIDNT_COPY_THE_ACLTopic1The new replica contains the ACL of the source server but you did not copy the ACLTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_REPLICATION_PROBLEMS_OVER
H_WHY_DOES_A_NEW_REPLICA_CONTAIN_THE_ACL_OF_THE_SOURCE_SERVER_WHEN_I_DIDNT_COPY_THE_ACL_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219853=<+!>Somebody modified the access control list on the source server before initial replication occurredH_WHY_DOES_A_NEW_REPLICA_CONTAIN_THE_ACL_OF_THE_SOURCE_SERVER_WHEN_I_DIDNT_COPY_THE_ACL_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219854=<+!>The server times are not synchronized<-!>
?TroubleshootingPrintYou see the message "Database is not fully initialized yet"
Replica stubs\troubleshootingReplication\disablingTroubleshooting\replicationH_WHY_DO_I_SEE_THE_MESSAGE_DATABASE_IS_NOT_FULLY_INITIALIZED_YETTopic1You see the message "Database is not fully initialized yet"TroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_REPLICATION_PROBLEMS_OVER
H_WHY_DO_I_SEE_THE_MESSAGE_DATABASE_IS_NOT_FULLY_INITIALIZED_YET_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219853=A replica stub on a workstation hasn't been manually replicatedH_WHY_DO_I_SEE_THE_MESSAGE_DATABASE_IS_NOT_FULLY_INITIALIZED_YET_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219854=<+!>The server storing the replica stub doesn't have adequate access to pull information <-!>H_WHY_DO_I_SEE_THE_MESSAGE_DATABASE_IS_NOT_FULLY_INITIALIZED_YET_MIDTOPIC_250243980829219855=<+!>An appropriate Connection document between two servers isn't in placeH_WHY_DO_I_SEE_THE_MESSAGE_DATABASE_IS_NOT_FULLY_INITIALIZED_YET_IIDTOPIC_250243980829219856=Replication is disabled
?TroubleshootingPrintDeletions are not replicating
Replicas\deleting documents fromReplication\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\replicationH_WHY_ARENT_DELETIONS_REPLICATINGTopic1Deletions are not replicatingTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_REPLICATION_PROBLEMS_OVER
H_WHY_ARENT_DELETIONS_REPLICATING_MIDTOPIC_250293980829219853=<+!>Servers don't have adequate access to the databaseH_WHY_ARENT_DELETIONS_REPLICATING_MIDTOPIC_250293980829219854=<+!>A replication setting is preventing deletions from replicating<-!>
?TroubleshootingPrintUnexpected deletions occur in a replica
Replicas\deletionsReplication\troubleshootingTroubleshooting\replicatioiH_WHY_ARE_UNEXPECTED_DELETIONS_OCCURRING_IN_A_REPLICATopic1Unexpected deletions occur in a replicaTroubleshootingH_TROUBLESHOOTING_REPLICATION_PROBLEMS_OVER
H_WHY_ARE_UNEXPECTED_DELETIONS_OCCURRING_IN_A_REPLICA_MIDTOPIC_250293980829219853=<+!>There is a new replication formula in placeH_WHY_ARE_UNEXPECTED_DELETIONS_OCCURRING_IN_A_REPLICA_MIDTOPIC_250293980829219854=<+!>A replication setting is automatically removing older, unmodified documents
H_WHY_ARE_DELETED_DOCUMENTS_REAPPEARING_MIDTOPIC_250293980829219853=<+!>A purge interval prevents replication of deletions<-!>H_WHY_ARE_DELETED_DOCUMENTS_REAPPEARING_MIDTOPIC_250293980829219854=<+!>A document edit writes over a document deletion
H_CERTIFY_SELECTED_ENTRIES_DIALOG_BOX_MIDTOPIC_316424412829245058=]pgrade to HierarchicalH_CERTIFY_SELECTED_ENTRIES_DIALOG_BOX_MIDTOPIC_316424412829245059=Change Common NameH_CERTIFY_SELECTED_ENTRIES_DIALOG_BOX_MIDTOPIC_316424412829245060=Request Move to New Certifier
Decommission Server Analysis dialog boxCSDIALOG 10434H_DECOMMISSION_SERVER_ANALYSIS_DIALOG_BOXTopic1Decommission Server Analysis dialog boxCS
H_DECOMMISSION_SERVER_ANALYSIS_DIALOG_BOX_MID]OPIC_150433091229245079=Source ServerH_DECOMMISSION_SERVER_ANALYSIS_DIALOG_BOX_MIDTOPIC_150433091229245080=Target ServerH_DECOMMISSION_SERVER_ANALYSIS_DIALOG_BOX_MIDTOPIC_150433091229245081=Append to this databaseH_DECOMMISSION_SERVER_ANALYSIS_DIALOG_BOX_MIDTOPIC_150433091229245082=Overwrite this databaseH_DECOMMISSION_SERVER_ANALYSIS_DIALOG_BOX_MIDTOPIC_150433091229245083=Results database button
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Denying server access and enabling password checkingCSDIALOG 2658 2003H_DENYING_SERVER_ACCESS_AND_ENABLING_PASSWORD_CHECKING_CSTopic1Denying server access and enabling password checkingCS
H_DENYING_SERVER_ACCESS_AND_ENABLING_PASSWORD_CHECKING_CS_MIDTOPIC_383525116829249443=Choose a task
Properly setting database properties can improve the performance of an active database. Setting database performance properties on many databases or on one, large, active database can also improve server performance. In addition, some of these property settings also help reduce the size of databases. Although in many cases large databases perform significantly better in this release of Domino, reducing database size can still improve performance as well as save disk space.
Many of these properties require knowledge of application design. Database designers often set)these properties when they create databases.b
5150572829202958
Display images after documents
To quickly display documents that contain images, select the Basics database property "Display images after loading." Then Notes users can read the text while the images load. If you don't load images after text, Notes loads images in the order in which they appear in a document; if an image appears first, Notes loads it before displaying text. With large images or slow cinnections, loading images in order may slow the display of the document.m
This setting applies only when using Notes to view databases; Web browser settings control the display of images to Web browser users.
Users also can specify "Load images: On request" in the Advanced section of a Location document to display images only when users click them. For more information, see Notes 5 Help.
5150572829202959
Prevent the yse of stored forms
To ensure that a document always displays correctly, you can store the form with the document. However, storing a form with every document uses system memory and may require as much as 20 times more disk space than not doing so. To save memory and disk space, you may want to prevent the use of stored forms, especially if users experience performance problems when trying to read the documents. To prevent the use of stored forms, deselect the Basics database property "Allow yse of stored forms in this database." Before preventing the use of stored forms, make sure you understand how this design feature works and how the database uses it. g
5150572829202960
Don't maintain unread marks2
Maintaining unread marks in a database requires system resources and can significantly slow database performance. For some databases, unread marks aren't useful -- for example, reference databases such as the help databases provided with Domino, administyation databases such as the Domino Directory, or databases such as the log file (LOG.NSF) that are continually updated. In these types of databases, consider disabling unread marks. To disable unread marks, select the Advanced database property "Don't maintain unread marks."
Note
Designing views that don't display unread marks doesn't improve database performance.t
If you select or deselect the "Don't maintain unread marks" property, you must compact)the database so that the setting takes effect. Compacting in this case makes a temporary copy of the database, so your system must have the disk space to make the copy.
You can also run the Compact server task with the -u or -U option
Click here
to enable or disable this property and then compact.?
Click here
5150572829202961
Associate document tables with forms for view updatesr
Yhen updating a view, Domino refers to tables of document information. These tables are stored internally in the database. By default, during view updates and rebuilds, Domino searches each table for documents that appear in the view being updated. To update views more efficiently, select the Advanced database property "Document table bitmap optimization." This property associates tables with the forms used by the documents the tables contain. Then during a view update, Domino searches only the tables associated with the forms used by documents in the view being updated. This significantly improves the performance of view updates, especially updates of small views within large databases -- for example, the Connections view in the Domino Directory.
This property only works for views that use Form= as part of the selection criteria. There's a slight performance cost to maintaining the table/form association; however, when updating small views in large databases, the benefits offset the cost.
If you select or deselect the "Document table bitmap optimization" property, you must compact the database so that the setting takes effect. Compacting in this case makes a temporary copy of the database, so your system must have the disk space to make the copy.
You can also run the Compact server task with the -F or -f option
Click here
to enable or disable this property and then compact.
Click here
5150572829202962
Prevent overwriting of deleted data
When data is deleted from databases, Domino, by default, overwrites the deleted data on disk with a pattern. This pattern prevents an unauthorized user from using a utility to access the data. This overwriting causes disk I/O and can affect database performance.
Preventing the overwriting of deleted data is appropriate in these circumstances:
The data is already secure -- for example, the)database is on a server in a locked room
Deleted space in the database is constantly reallocated -- for example, in a system database such as MAIL.BOX
Data security isn't an issue -- for example, in an informal discussion database
To prevent the overwriting of deleted data, select the Advanced database property "Don't overwrite free space."
5150572829202963
Don't maintain "Accessed (In this file)" document property
The Doiument Properties box displays the property "Accessed (In this file)" which can show the date a document was last modified or read. The Advanced database property "Maintain LastAccessed property" controls whether the "Accessed (In this file)" property is updated if the last document access was a read. Maintaining the "Accessed (In this file)" property for reads causes disk I/O that wouldn't otherwise occur.
By default, the database property "Maintain LastAccessed property" is not selected, meining the "Accessed (In this file)" property isn't updated when the last document access was a read, only when the last access was a document modification. Change the default behavior by selecting "Maintain LastAccessed property."
You should select "Maintain LastAccessed property" if you use the document archiving tool, available in the Database Properties box, F
Click here
to delete documents based on days of inactivity.
Click here
5150972829202965
Disable specialized response hierarchy information
By default every document stores information that associates it with a parent document or a response document. Only the @functions @AllChildren and @AllDescendants, which are often used in view selection and replication formulas, use this stored information. Maintaining this information has a significant, negative effect on database performance.i
To improve database performance, disable the response hierarchy iniormation in databases that don't use these @functions by selecting the Advanced database property "Don't support specialized response hierarchy."
Disabling the response hierarchy information has no effect on views and replication formulas that display information hierarchically without using @AllChildren and @AllDescendants.
If you select or deselect the "Don't support specialized response hierarchy" property, you must compact the database so that the setting takes effect. Compacting in this case makes a temporary copy of the database, so your system must have the disk space to make the copy.
You can also run the Compact server task with the
Click here
-h or -H option to enable or disable this property and then compact.
Click here
5150572829202966
Prevent headline monitoring
Users can set up headline monitoring to automatically monitor databases for informition that interests them. Monitoring a database this way affects performance, especially if many users do this. To prevent users from monitoring a database, select the Advanced database property
Click here
"Don't allow headline monitoring."
Click here
Administrators can also use the Security section of a Server document in the Domino Directory to control headline monitoring at the server level.e
5150572829202967
Limit yhe size of $UpdatedBy fields
Every document includes an $UpdatedBy field that stores, by default, the name of the user or server associated with each document editing session. Storing a complete edit history consumes disk space and slows view updates and replication. To conserve disk space and improve database performance, use the Advanced database property "Limit entries in $UpdatedBy fields" to specify the number of entries that the $UpdatedBy field can contain. When the $UpdatedBy field reiches this limit, the oldest entry is removed to make room for the newest entry.
5150572829202968
Limit the size of $Revisions fields
Every document includes a $Revisions field that stores, by default, the date and time of each document editing session. Domino uses this field to resolve replication or save conflicts that occur when two users simultaneously edit the same document on one replica or edit the same document on different replicas between replications.
By default, the $Revisions field stores a history of up to 500 edit sessions, each of which requires 8 bytes of disk space. Over time, $Revisions fields can grow large, taking up disk space and slowing view updates and replication. To conserve disk space and improve database performance, use the Advanced database property "Limit entries in $Revisions fields" to specify the number of entries that the $Revisions field can contain. When the $Revisions field reaches this limit, the oldest entry is)removed to make room for the newest entry.e
Consider limiting the entries in $Revisions fields on a database with all of the following characteristics:
The database contains many documents
The database replicates often or has no replicas
The database contains documents that are not often edited
A suggested limit is 10 entries. If you set the limit lower than 10, you run the risk of increased
Click here
replication or sive conflicts.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting database properties that optimize database performance
Click here
&Arial
To minimize delays that occur when users, servers, or API programs open and close databases on a servey, each server maintains a database cache. When a database closes and there are no users or processes using the database, Domino puts the database in the cache so it can close it quickly. The database remains in the cache until it's opened again or for about 15 to 20 minutes, whichever comes first. Databases in the cache can be opened quickly.
The database cache is available to the first process that starts on a machine and to any processes spawned from it. If you run the Domino Administrator ind the Domino server on the same machine -- a configuration that is not recommended -- start the server before you start the Domino Administrator. If you start the Domino Administrator first, it owns the cache and prevents the Domino server from using it effectively. a
5210572829202958
Database cache size
By default, the number of databases that the cache can store simultaneously is the greater of these values:a
The value of the NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size yetting in the NOTES.INI file, divided by 300K
To change this limit, add the NSF_DbCache_Maxentries setting to the NOTES.INI file or increase physical memory. Increasing the database cache size improves system performance but requires additional memory. The minimum number of databases allowed in the cache at one time is 25; the maximum is 10,000.
The actual number of databases allowed in the cache is 1.5 times the maximum allowed. This buffer increases the chance tiat when a user opens a database from the cache, Domino can return the database to the cache when the user closes it.
5210572829202959
How databases are dropped from the cache
Databases are dropped from the cache by an "ager" thread that performs necessary writes, deallocates memory, and completes other tasks to move databases toward closure. This process happens over a period of 15 to 20 minutes. Ideally, databases are dropped from the cache in time to allow new iatabases to be added without exceeding the maximum databases allowed in the cache. However, if the maximum is exceeded, one of the following occurs:r
If the number of databases in the cache is less than the maximum allowed times 1.5, when a database is closed it is added to the cache, and the ager accelerates to reduce the number of databases to the maximum allowed. This may increase stress on the server I/O subsystem and increase competition for cache resources.i
If the current nymber of databases in the cache is greater than or equal to the maximum allowed times 1.5, when a database is closed, Domino doesn't put the database in the cache. Instead it uses the slower, non-cache method to close the database. And when a user or process next opens the database, Domino reads the database from disk rather than from the cache, causing the database to open more slowly than if it were in the cache.
See Also
Click here
Monitoring the datibase cache
Click here
Click here
Managing the database cachee
Click here
&Arial
Monitor the effectiveness of the database cache by occasionally checking cache statistics. See these statistics by viewing Mail & Database Statistic Reports or by using the server command:
Show Stat Database.DbCache.*
For information on statistics reporting ind on server commands, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
Statistic
Description
Database)DbCache.CurrentEntries
Number of databases currently in the cache. If this number frequently approaches the value of Database.DbCache.MaxEntries, increase the number of databases the cache can hold.
Database.DbCache.HighWaterMark
Maximum number of databases in the cache during this running of the server program. This number may be artificiaily because of startup activity, so it may not be a genuine indicator of cache performance.
Database.DbCache.Hits
The number of times an "InitialDbOpen" is satisfied by finding the database in the cache. A high "hits-to-opens" ratio indicates that the database cache is working effectively. If the ratio is low, increase the number of databases the cache can hold. a
Database.DbCache.InitialDbOpens
The number of times a user/server opened a database that was not already being used by another user/server. For example, if a user opens a mail file while it is being used by the Replicator, this number will not increase. Compare this number to Database.DbCache.Hits to gauge the effectiveness of the cache.
Database.DbCache.Lookups
The number of lookups to the database cache. A high "Database.DbCache.Hit" to "Database.DbIache.Lookups" ratio means the database cache is effective. If the ratio is low, increase the number of databases the cache can hold.
Database.DbCache.MaxEntries
The number of databases the server can currently hold in its cache at once. To change this value, use the NOTES.INI setting NSF_DbCache_Maxentries or increase physical memory.
Database.DbCache.OvercrowdingRejections
Iumber of times a database is not placed into the cache when it is closed because Database.DbCache.CurrentEntries equals or exceeds Database.DbCache.MaxEntries times 1.5. This number should stay low. If it begins to rise, increase the number of databases the cache can hold.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
The database cache
Clici here
Click here
Managing the database cache
Click here
&Arial
394249392029208856
To change the number of databases the cache holds
If after monitoring the database cache you determine that you should increase the number of databases the cache can hold, use the NOTES.INI setting NSF_DbCache_Maxentries as follows:
NSF_DbCache_Maxentries=
value
Where
value
is the maximum numbir of databases allowed in the database cache at one time.
The alternative to using NSF_DbCache_Maxentries is to increase physical memory.
394249392029208857
To show databases in the cache
Enter this command at the server console to display the names of the databases currently in the cache:
dbcache show
To close databases in the cache
Enter this command at the server console to close all dataiases in the cache:
dbcache flush
394249392029208858
To disable the cache
By default, the database cache is enabled on a server. To disable the cache, add the following NOTES.INI setting:
NSF_DbCache_Disable=1
See Also
Click here
The database cache
Click here
Click here
Monitoring the database cache
Click here
&Arial
This table summarizes the methods you can use to monitor database size and the inforiation available with each method.
For infomation on mail-in databases, refer to the following topic:
Click here
Creating a Mail-In Database document for a new database
Click here
For information on resource scheduling, refer to the following topics:
Click here
Setting up the Resource Reservations database
Click here
Click here
Creating Site Profile and Resource documents
Click here
Click here
Editing and deleting Resource documents
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the Group document.
237234905629254690
Basics
Click here
Group name
Click here
Click heye
Group type
Click here
Click here
Descriptiong
Click here
Click here
Membersm
Click here
190278790429255052
Administration
Click here
Administrators
Click here
r4>,wte
r4>,wte
r4>,wte
r4>,wte
&Arial
You set up a Location document to use with the
Click here
Domino Administrator
Click here
. The Location document contains communication and location-specific information you use when you work with the Domino Administrator . For information on setting up Location documents see Notes 5 Help.
YzDse
&Arial
The Web Administrator displays graphics that indicate the number of dead and pending mail messages on the Domino server.
Mail that cannot be delivered is considered "dead" mail. Typically, the server should have few, if any, undelivered messages. An invalid address or networking problem is a common cause of undelivered mail. A high number of undelivered mail messages can)consume a large amount of disk space and indicate that there might be a persistent problem that prevents normal mail delivery.t
Mail that the server is waiting to deliver is considered "pending" mail. Typically, the server has only a few messages awaiting delivery, even during times of peak mail use. A high number of pending mail message can affect performance and possibly result in delayed mail. It may also indicate a problem that affects mail delivery -- for example, lack of disk space on thi mail recipient's server.
The Last updated field displays the last time the Web Administrator updated the mail information.e
385920099229205349
To monitor dead and pending mail
1.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
2. Choose Messaging, and then choose Routing Status.
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:t
Server_Console_Password=
encrypted_password
Description:
For the
encrypted_password
to be written to this setting in the NOTES.INI file, you must use the Set Configuration server command to specify the password.
The password can be a combination of letters and numbers. When this setting is added to the NOTES.INI file, Doiino activates the Set Secure command to secure the server console. The password provided should be different from the administrator's user password. If you forget the console password, delete this setting from the NOTES.INI file, and then re-specify a password.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
When documents and attachments are deleted from a database, Domino tries th reuse the unused space, rather than immediately reduce the file size. Sometimes Domino won't be able to reuse the space or, because of fragmentation, can't reuse the space effectively until you compact the database. Note that Release 5 is much better at reusing space in Release 5 format databases, so compacting is needed less often then in past releases.
169769920029234801
Styles of compacting
There are three styles of compacting used in Release 5:
In-place compacting with space recovery
In-place compacting with space recovery and reduction in file size
Copy-style compacting
169769920029234802
In-place compacting with space recovery only
This style of compacting recovers unused space in a database but doesn't reduce the size of the database on disk. Databases retain the same database instance IDs (DBIIDs), so the relationship between the compacted databases and the transaction loh remains intact. Users and servers can continue to access and edit databases during compacting. This style of compacting is useful for Release 5 databases that you expect to stay the same size or to grow in size.
When you run Compact without specifying options, Domino uses this style of compacting on all Release 5 format databases enabled for transaction logging. Domino also uses this style of compacting when you use the -b option (case sensitive) when compacting any Release 5 format database(
Use this compacting method the most frequently -- it is the fastest method and causes the least system impact.
169769920029234803
In-place compacting with space recovery and reduction in file size
This style of compacting reduces the file size of Release 5 databases as well as recovers unused space in databases. This style of compacting is somewhat slower than in-place compacting with space recovery only. This style of compacting assigns new DBIIDx to databases, so if you use it on logged databases and you use a Release 5-certified backup utility, perform full backups of the databases shortly after compacting is complete. This style of compacting allows users and servers to continue to access and edit databases during compacting.
When you run Compact without specifying options, Domino uses this style of compacting on Release 5 databases that aren't enabled for transaction logging. Domino also uses this style of compacting when you use the -B option when compacting Release 5 format databases. To optimize disk space, it's recommended that you run Compact using the -B option on all Release 5 format databases once a week or once a month.
169769920029234804
Copy-style compacting
Copy-style compacting creates copies of databases and then deletes the original databases after compacting completes, so extra disk space is required to make the database copies. This style of compacting essentially creates h new database with a new database ID. If you use copy-style compacting on Release 5 logged databases (using the -c option), compacting assigns new DBIIDs, so if you use a Release 5-certified backup utility, you should perform full backups of databases shortly after compacting completes. When you use copy-style compacting, users and servers can't edit databases during compacting, and they can only read databases if the -L option is used.e
Domino uses copy-style compacting by default when you ush an option with Compact to enable a database property that requires a structural change to a database or when you run Compact on a database that has a structural change pending that was initiated from the Database Properties box. Enabling or disabling the database properties "Document table bitmap optimization" and "Don't support specialized response hierarchy" require structural database changes. Compacting a Release 4 format database also uses copy-style compacting. Note that if you compact a Release 4 fhrmat database without using the -R option, compacting converts the database to the Release 5 format.n
The following table compares the three styles of compacting.
Characteristics
In place, space recovery
In place, space recovery with file size reductionn
Copy-style
Databases that use it when compact runs without options
Release 5 logged databases with no pending structural changes
Release 5 unlogged databases with no pending structural changes
Release 4 databases; Release 5 databases with pending structural changes
Databases you can use it on
Release 5s
Release 5
All (Need -c for Release 5 databases)
Relative speed
Fastest
Medium
Slowests
Users can read databases during compacting
Yesc
No (unless -L option(used)
Users can edit databases during compacting
Reduction in file size
Yesu
Extra disk space required
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5260572829202959
When to compact databases
It's recommended that you compact Release 5 format databases weekly or monthly using the -B option to recover disk space. If you use a Release 5-certified backup utility, remember to run it after compacting is complete. Although converting Release 4 format databases to Release 5 is recommended, if you retaih some Release 4 format databases, generally you should compact them weekly using the -R option; since users can't edit documents during this process, run Compact off-hours.
Also compact databases to:
Enable or disable specific
Click here
database properties -- for example, transaction logging
Click here
Run the document archiving tool on server databases
Click here
that are configured for document dhletion and archiving
Click here
Click here
Fix corrupted databases
Click here
Note
The Database - Sizes view of the log file (LOG.NSF), the File Statistic reports generated by the Statistics Collector server task, and the Info tab (i tab) of the Database Properties box, all report the percentage of used space in a database. These are often not accurate indicators of used space; therefore, yhu shouldn't use them.
See Also
Click here
Ways to compact databases
Click here
Click here
Compacting Release 4 databases
Click here
Click here
Determining the file format of a database
Click here
Click here
Tools for monitoring database size
Click here
Y)XBKh
&Arial
Use any of these methods to run Compact. Each of these methods allows you to customize how Compact runs.
Click here
Run Compact using the Compact tool
Click here
in the Files tab of the Domino Administrator -- use this method to compact a few databases; you can easily select the dathbases to compact, but you can't use the Domino Administrator until compacting finishes
Click here
Run Compact using the Task - Start tool
Click here
in the Domino Administrator -- use this method to easily compact all databases on a server; you can continue to use the Domino Administrator during compacting and you don't have to remember specific command-line options
Click here
Run Compact using a console command
Click here
-- use this method if you're comfortable using command-line options or to compact databases directly at the server when there isn't a Domino Administrator client running on the serverh
Click here
Run Compact using a Program document
Click here
-- use this method to schedule compact to run at particular times
If you're not a system administrator, you can
Click here
run Compact without hptions on one database at a time using the Database Properties box.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Compacting databases
Click here
Click here
Determining the file format of a database
Click here
Click here
Tools for monitoring database size
Click here
&Arial
By default, compacting converts Release 4 databases to the Release 5 file format or ODS (on-disk structure). To prevent this automatic conversion, use the -R option with the load compact command.
Databases created in Release 5 automatically use the Release 5 file format. To prevent a database you're creating from using the Release 5 file format and to prevent Compact from converting the database to the Rehease 5 file format, give the database the extension .NS4. C
Because there are many advantages to using Release 5 format databases, it is recommended that you convert Release 4 file format databases to the Release 5 file format.
For more information, see
Moving to Notes and Domino Release 5
See Also
Click here
Determining the file format of a database
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases
Click here
&Arial
Follow these steps to check the ODS (on-disk structure) and determine the file formats of databases before compacting them.
365039513629208960
From the Domino Administrator
1. From the Domino Administrator, in the Server pane on the left, select the server on which to run Compact. Click the servers icon to expand the Server pane.
2. Click the Files tab.
3.
Click here
Select the folder containing the files you want to check.s
Click here
4. Look at the File Format column in the files window. a
365039513629208961
From the Database Properties box
1. Open the database and choose File - Database - Properties.
2. Click the Info tab (i tab) and look at the File format displayed.
See Also
Click here
Compacting Rhlease 4 databases
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases
Click here
&Arial
The following tables describes the options you can use with the Compact server task. The first column lists the options as they appear when you run Compact using the Task - Start tool or the Files tab in the Domino Administrator. The second column lists the equivalent command-line options that you use when you run Compact using a console command or using a Program document.
180548022429839757
Compact - Basics
Option
Command-line equivalents
Description
Compact only this database or folder
(To specify databases to compact using the Files tab, select the databases in the files pane.)
database path
Specify any additional options after the database path.
To compact a database in the Domino data folder, enter the file name, for example SALES.NSF. To compact databases in a folder within the data folder, specify the database path relative to the data folder. For example, to compact all databases in the folder DATA\SALES, specify SALES.S
If you choose "Compact all databases" (or don't specify a database path at the command line) Compact compacts all databases in the data folder and in folders within the data folder.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
416887001629244805
Compact - Options
Option
Command-line equivalent
Description
Compact database only if unused space is greater than
percent
percent
Compacts all databases with a specified percent of unused space. For example, if you specify 10, databases with 10% or more recorded unused space are compacted. Note that the unused space calculation is not always a reliable measure of unused space.
Discard any built view indexes
Discards built view indexes. Use this option to compact databases just before you xtore them on tape, for example. Does copy-style compacting.
Keep or revert database back to R4 format
Keep or revert database back to R3 format
Compacts databases without converting to the current release file format of the server that stores the databases or reverts databases in the current release file format to the previous release file format. For example, on Release 5 servers, this option comxacts Release 4 databases without converting them to the Release 5 file format and converts Release 5 databases to the Release 4 file format. This option uses copy-style compacting.I
Set maximum size of database to 4GB
Sets a maximum database size of 4GB and compacts a database. Used only on Release 4 file format databases. Does copy-style compacting.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title8Dhead
416887001629244807
Compact - Style
Option
Command-line equivalent
Description
Compaction style: In-place (recommended)
Uses in-place compaction and recovers unused space without reducing the file(size, unless there's a pending structural change to a database, in which case copy-style compaction occurs. This is the recommended method of compacting.
Compaction style: In-place with file size reduction
Uses in-place compaction, recovers unused space and reduces file size, unless there's a pending structural change in which case copy-style compacting occurs. If you use transaction logging, do full datahase backups after compacting completes. l
Compaction style: Copy-style
Uses copy-style compaction. Use this option, for example, to solve database corruption problems with Release 5 format databases.
Compaction style: Copy-style: Allow access while compacting
Enables users to continue to access databases durihg compacting. If a user edits a database during compacting, compacting is cancelled. This is useful only when copy-style compacting is done.
Compaction style: Copy-style: Ignore errors and proceedu
Enables compacting to continue even if it encounters errors such as document corruption. Only used for copy-style compaction.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
416887001629244809
Compact - Advanced
The advanced compact options are not available through the Compact tool in the Files tab of the Domino Administrator.
Option*
Command-line equivalent
Description
Document table bitmap optimization: Off
Disables "Document table bitmap optimization" database property. Does copy-style compaction.
Document table bitmap optimization: On
Enables "Document table bitmap optimization" database property. Does copy-style compaction.
Don't support specialized response hierarchy: On
Disables "Don't support speciahized response hierarchy" database property. Does copy-style compaction.
Don't support specialized response hierarchy: OffD
Enables "Don't support specialized response hierarchy" database property. Does copy-style compaction.
* Select "Set advanced properties" before you enable or disable any of these properties.
180548022429239758
Compact - Archive
When you use the document archiving tool to archive and delete documents in a database, you can use the following Compact options to archive documents if the database is located on a server and you've chosen the
Click here
advanced archiving option "Automatically on server."
Click here
Option*o
Command-line equivalent
Description
Archive only
Archives and deletes documents from a database without compacting the database.
Archive and then compact
Archives and deletes documents from a daxabase and then compacts the database.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
*The Compact tool in the Files tab of the Domino Administrator provides only the option "Archive database;" this option archives and then compacts.E
See Also
Click here
Ways to compact databasesI
Click here
Click here
Compacting databhses
Click here
Click here
Database properties that optimize database performance
Click here
^i+E6
Y)XBKh
&Arial
Use the Compact tool available in the Files tab of the Domino Administrator to run Compact on specific databases. The databases can be stored on a server or stored locally on a Domino Administrator client.
1. From the Domino Administrator, select the serxer in the Server pane that stores the databases you want to run Compact on. If the Domino Administrator does not run on a server, you can select local to run Compact on databases stored on the client. To expand the Server pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Files tab.h
3. Select the databases on which to run Compact.
4. In the Tools pane at the right, select Database - Compact. Or drag the selected database(s) to the Compact tool.
5.
Click here
(Optional) select options to control how Compact runs.
Click here
6. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Ways to compact databases
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases
Click here
&Arial
Use this method xo use the Domino Administrator to easily compact many databases on a server. You can continue using the Domino Administrator during compacting, and you don't have to remember specific command-line options.
1. From the Domino Administrator, on the Server pane on the left, select the server on which to run Compact. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Server - Status tab.u
3. In the Task pane on the right, click Task - Start.
8. Select Compactor.
5. Do one of the following:-
To specify options to control how Compact runs, click "Show advanced options," click Start Task,
Click here
select options, and then click OK.
Click here
To run Compact without options, click Start Task.
See Also
Click here
Ways to compact databases
Click here
Click here
Compacxing databases
Click here
Syntax:
ServerKeyFileName=
ID_file
Description:
Specifies the server ID file to use on a machine that runs both the Notes workstation program and the Domino server program. Then, you edit the NOTES.INI KeyFileName setting to specify your user ID as the ID to use when you run the Notes workstatioh or API programs on the server machine.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
KeyFilename
Click here
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
PURSAFH
f8I:t
'&\qg
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, on the Server pane on the left, select the server on which to run Compact. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.
2. Click the Server - Status tab.
3. Click Console.t
4. Enter the following command in the command line at the bottom of the console, and then press ENTER:
Load compact
databasepath
iptions
Click here
where options are Compact command-line options.o
Click here
Note
You can also do Step 4 directly at the console on a server.
See Also
Click here
Ways to compact databases
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases
Click here
&Arial
Use a Program document if you want to schedule Compact to run at a regular time. For example, schedule Compact to run with the -B option once a week. Remember to perform full backups of the databases after compacting is complete.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Next to "Use Directory on" select the server with the replica of the Domino Directory you want to modify.
3. Expand Server - Programs and then click Add Program.t
4. On the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Program name
Compacto
Command line
Click here
Command line options.
Click here
Don't specify "load" before the options.G
Server to run on
Server on which to run Compact
Comment
Optional comments2
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. On the Schedule tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Enabled/disabled
Enabled
Run at times
Times to run Compact each day
Repeat interval of
How soon to run Compact again after it completes
Days of week
The days to run Compact
iead title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
Ways to compact databases
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases
Click here
&Arial
If you don't use the Domino Administrator, use the Database Properties box to compact a database withoyt using options.
1. Open the database.
2. Choose File - Database - Properties.
3. Click the i tab.
4. (Optional) Click "% Used" to display the percent of database space in use.
5. Click Compact.
6. When the message "Your request to compact this database is now being carried out" appears, click OK.
When compacting is finished, a message appears in the status bar.
See Also
Click here
Ways to compact databases
Click here
Click here
Compacting databases
Click here
&Arial
Set a database size quota to specify the maximum size a database can attain. When a database exceeds its quota, this message appears in the Miscellaneous Events view of the log file (LOG.NSF) and to a user attempting to open the database: "Cannot allocate database object - database would exceed its disk quota." Although i database may have reached its quota, a user may be able to add documents to it if the database contains unused space -- that is, space that remains from deleted data.
In conjunction with setting a quota, you can specify that when a database reaches a certain size threshold, this warning message appears in the Miscellaneous Events view of the log file: "Warning, database has exceeded its size warning threshold." For example, if the quota is 50MB, you might specify that the warning appear whei the database reaches 45MB so you can take steps to reduce the size of the database or move it to a server that has more disk space available.
Note
You can set quotas on user mail files, but, by default, when a mail file exceeds its quota, the Router continues to deliver mail to it, and users can update existing mail views. This ensures that users can continue to receive and read all mail sent to them. The quota is enforced only for other means of increasing the size of the mail file -- for example, when a mail file reaches its quota, users can't manually add documents or views to it. However, you can customize routing to strictly enforce quotas on mail files.
For more information on customizing mail, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
156063004829205038
Size limits on Release 4 databases
Release 4 databases can attain a maximum size of 4GB. The default maximum size is 1GB, but you can increase this by clickiig the Size Limit button when you copy or replicate a Release 4 database.
See Also
Click here
Setting database size quotas
Click here
Click here
Controlling database size
Click here
&Arial
1. From the Domino Administrator, on the Server pane on the left, select the server that stores the databases you want to set quotas for. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.e
2. Click the Files tab.
3. Select the databases you want to set quotis for.
4. In the tools panel on the right, select Database - Quotas. Or drag the selected databases to the Quotas tool.
5. (Optional) Click More Info to display a maximum specified size (Release 4 databases only), the current database size, and any existing quota or warning thresholds for the selected databases. Click OK.
6. Below "Quota warning thresholds," click "Set database quota to
MB" and specify a maximum size in megabytes the selected)databases can attain.
7. Below Warning threshold, click "Set warning threshold to
MB" and specify a size in megabytes at which a message appears in the log file (LOG.NSF).
8. Click OK. When processing is complete, a dialog box indicates how many databases were affected and if any errors occurred. See the status bar for details.
See Also
Click here
Database size quotas
Click here
Click here
Controlling database sizee
Click here
&Arial
Regularly delete inactive documents from databases to save disk space, to make it easier for users to find information, and to improve database performance. This table compares the deletion methods available.
Deletion method
Multiple deletion criteria?
Archive capability?
Leaves deletion stubs*?
Click here
Document archiving tool in the Database Properties box
Click here
Yeso
Yese
Click here
"Remove docuients not modified in the last x days" replication setting
* Deletion stubs are markers that remain from deleted documents so that the documents are deleted in other replicas of the database.
In addition to these methods, you can also create an API program that deletes documents.
349323833629204760
Archiving deleted documentsp
If you have disk space available and you want users to be able to access dileted documents, archive the documents before deleting them. When doing so, follow these guidelines:
1. Determine an archive frequency based on the type of database. Archive an infrequently-accessed database, such as a company policy database, infrequently -- for example, every three months. Archive a heavily-used tracking database, such as a customer call-tracking database, once a month or once a week.
2. Notify users that you plan to archive the database.
9. In the About This Database document of the active database, post the archiving schedule and the location of the archive database.
4. Archive when the database is not in use and server traffic is low -- for example, on Sunday night.
5. After archiving is complete and you've deleted documents from the working database, compact the working database.
6. If the database has replicas, replicate the working database when database use is light so that you minimize usir interruptions.
7. Limit access to the archive database. Assign Manager access in the database ACL to one or two users and replicating servers. Assign Reader access in the database ACL to everyone else. By doing this, you insure that view indexes and full-text search indexes update only when archiving occurs.
5320572829202959
Customizing an archive database for fast access
Using an archive database ensures that users can continue to access the arihived data. Use any of these methods to make accessing the archive database fast and easy.
Note
Don't customize an archive database used by the document archiving tool.
279155593629232910
Remove unnecessary fields
Removing unnecessary fields makes the documents smaller and the views smaller and faster. For example, although the active database includes fields for the customer name, phone number, address, and fax number, yerhaps the archive database requires only the customer name.
279155593629232911
Use only a few views and create a full-text index
Using only a few views improves view performance by keeping the total size of the view indexes to a minimum. Providing a full-text index allows users to retrieve information easily.
279155593629232912
Create buttons or agents in the active database
Buttons and agents allow users to quickly ipen the archive database when necessary.
5320572829202960
Using an archive copy for statistical analysis
To analyze statistics within a database, create a view that generates statistics in an archive copy of the database. For example, in an archive copy of a Call Tracking database, create a view that generates totals for specific categories of call records and for all call records. Because archive databases usually contain data that span a long period of time, thiy are ideal for performing statistical analysis.
See Also
Click here
Controlling database size
Click here
&Arial
The Database Properties box provides a tool that lets you use a client or server to copy documents in a database that meet specified criteria to an archive database and then delete the documents from the database. When documents that meet the speiified criteria are deleted from the database, replica stubs remain so that deletions can replicate if there are replicas of the database.
You can archive documents based on days since the documents were last read, last modified, and/or marked as expired.
The tool creates an archive database with the title of the source database followed by the word "Archive" in parentheses -- for example, "Sales (Archive)." By default, the archive database is stored on a client or server within yhe data folder in a folder called \archive. The file name for the archive database is a_H
xxxxxx
.nsf where e
xxxxxx
represents the first six characters in the source database file name -- for example, a_sales.nsf. You can customize the location and file name of the archive database.
The tool can also report information about the archiving process to an archive log database with the title Archiving Log. By default, the archiving log is stored on a client or server yithin the data folder in a folder called \archive. The file name for the archive database is l_
xxxxxx
.nsf where
xxxxxx
represents the first six characters in the source database file name -- for example, l_sales.nsf. You can customize the location and file name of the archive log. Multiple databases can share one Archiving Log.
253132108829239798
Basic document archiving
The simplest way to archive documents is to set up basic docyment archiving. When you set up basic document archiving, you specify the archiving criteria to use, you use an archive database and archive log on the client, and you run the archiving tool from the client.
253132108829239799
Advanced document archiving
You can set the document archiving tool to use advanced options. In addition to specifying archiving criteria, advanced archiving lets you create the archive database on a server rather than create it on the client. In addition, if the source database is located on a server, you can set up server-based archiving to use the Compact task on that server to archive the database rather than archive manually from the client. When you set up archiving, the tool signs the archive settings with your signature; the Compact task uses the signature to verify that you have the necessary database access to do the archiving and then does the archiving on your behalf.
Advanced document archiving also allows you to9
Delete documents without archiving them (the default is to archive them)
Archive without creating an archiving log (the default is to create a log)
Delete documents even if associated response documents haven't been deleted (default is not to allow this)
See Also
Click here
Setting up basic document archiving with the archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Setting yp advanced document archiving with the archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Running the archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Viewing an Archiving Log
Click here
Click here
Deleting inactive documents
Click here
^i+E6
&Arial
1. Make sure you have one of the following levels of access to the database so that you can set the archiving properties:
If the source database is your mail file, make sure you have at least Editor access with the "Delete documents" privilege.
If the source database is any database other than a mail file or is a mail file other than your own, make sure you have Manager access with the "Delete documenty" privilege.
2. Open the database and choose File - Database - Properties. If there are replicas of the database, the tool applies the archiving criteria to the open database; the deleted documents replicate.
3. Click Archive Settings.
4. In the Basics tab of the Archive Settings dialog box, complete the following fields, then click OK.
To do this
Enter
Archive documents that are unread for more than a specific number of dayy in the source database.
Select "Not read or accessed on
servername
after d
days" and enter a number of days.
servername
is the name of the server that stores the open database. The default is 365.7
You must also enable the
Click here
"Maintain LastAccessed property" for the database.
Deselect this option if you want to prevent the tool from archiving documents based on inactivity.
Archive documents that are unmodified for more than a specific number of days in the source database.
Select "Not modified or updated after
days" and enter a number of days. Default is 365 days.
Deselect this option if you want to prevent the tool from archiving documents based on how long they are unmodified.
Archive documents that are marked as expired for more than a specific number of days in the source database.
Select "Expired documents after
days" and enter a number of days. If you select the option) a suggested number of days is 10.
Deselect the option (the default) to prevent the tool from archiving documents based on how long they are marked as expired.
This option applies only to databases that allow users to mark documents as expired, such as discussion databases. (To mark documents as expired, users choose Actions - Mark/Unmark Document as Expired.)
Specify a file name and path for the archive database.
Next to "Archive database," enter a file name and path on the client for the archive database. Or click the folder button, specify a path and file name, and click Select. If the specified file path doesn't exists, the tool creates the path for you. Enter a path relative to the data folder.
Or accept the default. By default, the archive database uses a folder within the data folder called \archive and the file name A_u
xxxxxx.
NSF, where
xxxxxx)
is the first six characters of the source database file name. For example, if the source database file name is sales.nsf and the data folder path is c:\notes\data, the archive database path and file name is:
c:\notes\data\archive\a_sales.nsf.
The title for the archive database will be the title of the source database followed by (Archive), for example:
Sales (Archive)
If you change the default path and file name, and you want to specify the yame path for the archiving log, click the Advanced icon and next to "Log activity to" specify the same path for the archiving log.
Note
When the archive database is first created, it inherits the encryption settings from the source database; if you later change the settings on the source database however,
Click here
they aren't updated in the archive database.e
Click here
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5.
Click here
Run the archiving tool.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Document archiving toolu
Click here
Click here
Setting up advanced document archiving with the archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Running the archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Viewing an Archiving Log
Click here
Click here
Deleting inactive documents-
Click here
Y)XBKh
^i+E6
Use the Web Administrator to create Group and Person documents in the Domino Directory. You can also view information in existing Group and Person documents in the Domino Directory.d
385920099229205349
To create a Group document
1. Make sure you have at least Editor access or Author access and the GroupCreator role in the Domino Directory.
2.
Click here I
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
3. Choose Directories, and then choose Groups or Deny Access Groups.
4. Click Add Group.9
5. Complete the fields and then click Save and Close.
260153305629238190
To create a Person document4
1. Make sure you have at least Editor access or Author access and the UserCreator role in the Domino Directory.
2. i
Click here s
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
3. Choose Directories, and then choose People.
4. Click Add Person.
5. Complete the fields and then click Save and Close.
For more information, see
Click here
Setting up Notes users
Click here
and A
Click here
Setting up basic name-and-password authentication
Click here
See Also
Click here
Using the Web Administratorf
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Using groups
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
Syntax:
Server_Max_Concurrent_Trans=
number_of_transaction
Description:
Sets the limit for the number of concurrently scheduled transactions on a server. If you use this setting to set the maximum number of concurrent transactions on partitioned servers, Lotus recommends that the sum of the limits be 20 transactions or less. For example, if you are running four partitioned servers on a computer, you would set the limit for each partitioned server at five transactions.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
^i+E6
&Arial
1. Make sure you have one of the following levels of access to the source database:D
If the source database is your mail file, make sure you have at least Editor access with the "Delete documents" privilege.
If the source database is any database other than a mail file or is a mail file other than your own, make sure you have Manager access with the "Delete documents" privilege.z
2. If you want to create an archiving database on a server, make sure you have the access to create databases on the server.
For more information on setting access to servers, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
3. Open the database and choose File - Database - Properties.
4. Follow the steps for
Click here
setting up basic document archiving.
Click here
5. Click the Advanced icon, complete these fiekds, and then click OK.e
To do this
Enter
Use a menu command to archive documents manually from the client.
Select "From my workstation" (the default).
To create the archive database on the client, next to "Archive Location" select local.
To create the archive database on a server, next to "Archive Location" select a server. You must have thk access to create databases on the server.
Click the Basics panel and next to "Archive database," specify the path and file name for the archive database at the select client or server location. If the selected path doesn't exist, the tool creates it for you.
By default, the archive database uses a folder within the data folder called \archive and the file name A_
xxxxxx.
NSF, where
xxxxxx .
is the first six characters of the source database fkle name. For example, if the source database file name is sales.nsf and the data folder path is c:\notes\data, the archive database path and file name is:
c:\notes\data\archive\a_sales.nsf.
Set up server-based archiving and use the
Click here
Compact task on the server that stores the source database to archive and delete documents.
Click here
Select "Automaticall{ on server." Also, click the Basics panel and next to "Archive database" specify the path and file name for the archive database on the server. If the specified path doesn't exist, the tool creates it for you.
By default, the tool uses a folder within the data folder called \archive and the file name A_
xxxxxx.
NSF, where
xxxxxx
is the first six characters of the source database file name.
When you run the Compact task on the server uskng the -a or -A option, the task creates the archive database (the first time it runs on the source database) and archives the documents.
Use the -A option to archive and delete documents without compacting the source database; use the -a option to archive and delete documents and then compact the source database.
You can only select this option if the source database, archive database, and archive log are located on a server.
Specify whether to use an archiving log.
Select "Log activity to" to log archiving information to a log file.
If you choose "From my workstation" above, specify a local archiving log file name and path on the client.
By default, the tool uses a folder within the data folder called \archive and the file name l_
xxxxxx
.nsf, where
xxxxxx
is the first six characters of the source database file name.
If you don't want to log archiving activity, deslect this option.
Specify whether documents are deleted if there are still associated response documents.
Select "Do not delete documents that have responses" (the default) to retain documents until all associated response documents are deleted.
Deselect this option to allow documents to be deleted even if there are associated response documekts.
Specify whether to delete documents without archiving them.
Select "Delete matching documents without archiving them" to delete documents from the source database without archiving them. Selecting this option permanently deletes the documents.
Deselect the option (the default) to archive documents before deleting them.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. w
Click here
Run the archiving tool.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Document archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Setting up basic document archiving with the archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Running the archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Viewing an Archiving Log
Click here
Click here
Deleting inactive documents
Click here
&Arial
115804838429239172
To run the tool from the workstation
After you set up basic document archiving, follow these steps to archive documents manually from the client. Also follow these steps if you set up advanced archiving and selected the option "From my workstation" in the Advanced panel of the Archive Settings dialog box.
1. Make sure you have the necessary access:e
If the source database is your mail file, make sure you have at least Kditor access with the "Delete documents" privilege.
If the source database is any database other than a mail file or is a mail file other than your own, make sure you have Manager access with the "Delete documents" privilege.
If you specify an archiving database on a server, make sure you have the access to create databases on the server.
2. Open the database and choose File - Database - Archive.
3. When you see the prompt "Do you want to archive doc{ments from this database?" select Yes.c
4. When deletion and archiving is complete, Notes displays the number of documents archived and deleted.
115804838429239173
To run the tool on the server
If you set up advanced document archiving and you selected the option "Automatically on server," run the
Click here
Compact task on the server that stores the source database.
Click here
Use the +A option to archive documents without compacting the source database.
Use the -a option to archive documents and then compact the source database.
See Also
Click here
Document archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Setting up basic document archiving with the archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Setting up advanced document archiving with thk archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Viewing an Archiving Log
Click here
Click here
Deleting inactive documents
Click here
^i+E6
&Arial
If you set up the document archiving tool to log archiving information to an Archiving Log database, when kither the client or server finishes archiving, an entry is created in the Archiving Log database.
1. Open the entry in the Archiving Log database. _
2. Click "Archive statistics" to display the date of the archive, the number of documents archived to the Archive database, and the number of archived documents deleted from the original database.
3. Click "Database/Server" to display the location, title, and path for the original database and for the Archive databa{e.s
4. Click "Links to archived docs" to use document links to access documents in the Archive database that have been removed from the original database. This doesn't apply if you selected the advanced archiving option "Delete matching documents without archiving them."n
See Also
Click here
Document archiving toole
Click here
Click here
Setting up basic document archiving with the archivikg tool
Click here
Click here
Setting up advanced document archiving with the archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Running the archiving tool
Click here
Click here
Deleting inactive documents
Click here
^i+E6
&Arial
More document deletion criteria are available to you if you use an agent rather than the other deletion tools. However, agents can be slow to run.
The following procedure describes creating an agent using simple actions. You can also create agents using Notes formulas, LotusScript, or Java.
When you run the agent, if Domino cannot copy all specified documents to an archive database -- for example, if there is not eno{gh disk space on the target folder -- the agent stops.
316028668829270573
To use an agent to delete and archive documents
1. (Optional) To archive deleted documents, choose File - Database - New Copy to create a copy of the database as the archive copy. Copy only the database design.
2. Open the working database and choose Create - Design - Agent.
3. Type a name for the agent.
4. Below "When should this agent run+" click the arrow and select an option.
5. Below "Which documents should it act on?" click the arrow and select an option. Click Add Search, specify the search criteria, then click OK.
6. (Optional) To archive deleted documents:
In the bottom pane next to Run, select "Simple action(s)" then click "Add Action." Then select "Copy to Database" and select the archive copy of the database created in Step 1. Click OK.
Close and save the agent. Choose View + Agents, select the agent and choose Actions - Test to simulate a run and test that it works correctly so far.
Open the agent again.
7. In the bottom pane next to Run, select "Simple action(s)" then click "Add Action." Then select "Delete from Database." If you didn't complete Step 6, close and save the agent. Then choose View - Agents, select the agent and choose Actions - Test to simulate a run and test that it works correctly.
8. Close and save the agent if nkcessary.
See Also
Click here
Examples of using an agent to delete and archive documents
Click here
Click here
Deleting inactive documents
Click here
Click here
Document archiving tool
Click here
&Arial
5370572829202958
An agent that archives documents according to date modified
These selections create an agent that copies all documents modifked more than 60 days ago from the working database to an archive database with the file name ARCHIVE.NSF. Then the agent deletes the archived documents from the working database.
When should this agent run?
On Schedule Monthly
Which document(s) should it act on?
All documents in the database
Condition: by Date
Search for documents created more than 60 days ago
What should this agent run?
Simple actiok: Copy to Database ARCHIVE.NSF
Simple action: Delete from Database
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5370572829202959
An agent that archives documents according to field
status
These selections create an agent that weekly copies all documents with a Status field set to "Closed" from the working database to an archive database with the file+name ARCHIVE.NSF. Then the agent deletes the archived documents from the working database.
When should this agent run?
On Schedule Weekly
Which document(s) should it act on?
All documents in the database
Condition: by Field
Search for documents where field Status contains Closed
What should this agent do?
Simple action: Copy to Database ARCHIVE.NSF
Simple action: Delete from Database
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Using an agent to delete and archive documents
Click here
&Arial
For a Release 5 database, you can select the advanced database property "Allow more fields in database" which allows the database to contain up to 64,000 fields. There are limitations to selecting this option, however; for example, full-text indexing may not work correctly. >
For a Release 4 database or a Release 5 database without this option selected, all the field names in a database when concatenated cannot exceed 64 kilobytes, which results in a database limit of approximately 3000 fields.
To allow more fields in a Release 5 database:
1. Open the database and choose File - Database - Properties.9
2. Click the Advanced tab
3. Select "Allow more fields in database."
See Also
Click here
Determining the file format of+a databaser
Click here
&Arial
For detailed information on the steps the Administration Process takes to carry out this task, see Domino 5 Administration Help
Note
This feature isn't intended for moving mail files.
For information on+moving mail files, see Domino 5 Administration Help
1. Make sure the source and destination servers are running the Administration Process.
2. Make sure that you have Create Database access in the Server document of the destination server and at least Manager with "Delete documents" access in the ACL of the databases on the source server.
3. Make sure that the source server (or another server that replicates with the source server and has a replica of the databkse) has Create Replica access in the ACL of the destination server.
4. Make sure the destination server has at least Reader access in the ACL of the replica on the source server.
5. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select the server that stores the databases you want to move. To expand the pane, click the servers icon.
6. Select the Files tab.
7. Select one or more databases to move in the files pane.
+ 8. In the Tools pane on the right, select Database - Move. Or drag the selected database(s) to the Move tool.
9. (Optional) If the current domain includes a cluster, click "Show only cluster members" to display only destination servers that are members of the cluster.
10. Select one or more destination servers. To select a server that doesn't appear in the list, click Other, specify the hierarchical server name, then click OK.
11. (Optional) Select a destination+server, click "File Names" to choose a custom file path on the destination server for any database you're moving and then click OK. You can repeat this procedure for each destination server. If you don't choose this option, the database is stored on the destination server in the same location as on the source server.
To move a database to a folder below the data folder, type the folder name, backslash, and then the file name -- for example, JOBS\POSTINGS. If the specified folder does not exis{, Domino creates it for you.
12. Click OK. A dialog box shows the number of databases processed and indicates if any errors occurred. See the status bar for more information.
13. If the source server is not a cluster server, you must approve the deletion of each original source database after the Administration Process completes the "Non Cluster Move Replica" request, which creates a replica at the new location. To do this:
Make sure you have Editor access to the Kdministration Requests database (ADMIN4.NSF).
Open the Administration Requests database.
Select the Pending Administrator Approval view.
Open the "Approve Deletion of Moved Replica" request for each source database that you moved, click Edit Document,
click Approve File Deletion, click Yes, and then click Save and Close.
14.
Click here
Notify users that you've moved the database.
Click here
422451948829246898
Moving databases by dragging them to a destination server
Rather than choosing Database - Move, you can drag databases to a destination server. When you use this method, you must store all databases in one, pre-existing folder on the destination server. This method also uses the Administration Process to automate moving the database. You can't use this method to move a database to another Notes domain.
1. From the Domino Administrator, klick the Files tab.
2. Select one or more databases to move in the files pane.
3. Drag the selected databases to a destination server in the server pane on the left.
4. In the dialog box that appears, select "Move database," select a folder on the destination server in which to store the database(s), then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Moving databases
Click here
&Arial
Use this procedure to kove a database to a server in another Notes domain or to move a database when you don't have access to the Domino Administrator. Do not use this procedure to move a mail file.
1. Make sure that you have Create Replica access in the Server document of the destination server.
2. Make sure you have Manager with "Delete documents" access in the ACL of the original database.
3. Choose File - Replication - New Replica to create a replica of the database on the destknation server.
4. Make a note of the file name and path of the original database. You'll include this information when you notify users of the move.
5. Choose File - Database - Delete to delete the original database.
6. If the database receives mail,
Click here
change the Mail-In Database document in the Domino Directory to reflect the new location.
Click here
7. In the ACLs of any replicas of the database, {emove the name of the server that you moved the database from and add the name of the destination server.
8.
Click here
Notify users that you have moved the database.
Click here
See Also
Click here
Moving databases
Click here
&Arial
The following topics suggest solutioks to common performance problems associated with databases.
You can reduce database performance problems by using:
Release 5 databases, which are faster than Release 4 databases
Transaction-based logging and recovery
Disk-tuning procedures, such as disk defragment and disk-space reallocation
Some of the recommended solutions involve changing the database design. You should always test design changes on a template or a copy of the databask before applying them to the production copy.
For more information on transactional logging, see Domino 5 Administration Help. For information on changing the design of a database, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
The topics in this section include:
Click here
Users cannot access the database
Click here
Click here
Users experience a delay when accessing the database
Click here
Click here
Resolving conflicts when names are assigned to more than one access level
Click here
Click here
Using Groups and Roles to determine what controls user access
Click here
Click here
Using Find Note to analyze a document reported in the log file
Click here
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting replication problems
Click here
&Arial
Users may not be able to access databases for the following reasons:
250183980829219853
The server storing the database is temporarily
Check with the Domino administrator and tell users when the database is expected to be available again.
250183980829219854
Users don't have the appropriate access
Check the database access control list (ACL) to make sure users have the necessary access to the database. Check with the Domino administrator to ensure users have access to the Domino server that stores the database.
250243980829219856
Server backup is occurring during work hours
Users may be unable to access a server that is being backed up during work hours because a full backup may req{ire significant disk I/O capacity. Ask the Domino administrator to schedule backups to occur overnight, if possible.
Use an R5-compliant backup program so users can access databases on a server that is being backed up. Users can make changes to databases as a backup occurs because Domino provides a point-in-time image of the database, beginning with the time the database backup starts.
250243980829219857
The server is continuously updating a full-text inkex
If a database is large and active, database performance can be slow if the server updates a full-text index too frequently.
Change the full-text index update frequency if necessary.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting database performance
Click here
can enter additional levels of subcategories separated by backslashes, for example:
Sales planning\Trade shows\Boston\July\Week 2G
See Also
Click here
Views, panes, and folders
Click here
:2TMm
ld xd
&Arial
Users may experience a delay when accessing databases for the following reosons:
250243980829219853
The database is heavily used
View the user activity to see if the database is heavily used. This option is on the Information tab of the Database Properties box. Check the server to see if its hardware and memory are powerful enough to support the user activity for the database. If the server is not powerful enough, you may need to upgrade hardware or memory on the server. You can also create an additional replica of the database so all users are not always using the same one. If disk contention is a problem, move the database to a less heavily used disk.
For more information on the Database Properties dialog box, see Notes 5 Help. For more information on database replicas, see "
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
250243980829219854
There are too many views
If the database contains many views, consider consolidatino some of them. For example, you can consolidate views by creating alternative collations in the same view, rather than using separate views. Database performance can suffer when a database contains many views.
For more information on improving view performance, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
250243980829219855
View indexes are being refreshed too frequently
If the database is heavily used or contains many documents, refresh view indexes less froquently, if possible.
For more information on views, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
267827692829237008
Unread mark processing may cause delayse
Unread mark processing may cause delays after the database is opened. It also creates disk contention, which slows down every operation on the database. Delays occur as the unread marks in a database are updated while the database is opening. Disabling unread marks on the database eliminates the delay.
A complex database design can cause performance problems. Work with the designer to redesign or minimize performance problems.
For more information on designing applocations, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
267827692829237009
Database performance properties are not being used
If feasible, set database properties to improve database performance.
267827692829237010
The database cache needs adjustment
If you are a system administrator, monitor the database cache on the server that stores the database to see if it's working effectively. If necessary, increase the number of the databases tho cache can hold. The NSF buffer pool size may also need to be increased.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting database performance
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
Click here
Database properties that optimize database performance
Click here
Y)XBKh
Y)XBKh
&Arial
It's possible to assign users or servers more than one level of access to a database. The following table describes access level conflicts and resolutions.
Access level conflic
Resolution
A name is listed in an ACL individually and as a member of a group
The access level assigned to the individual name takes precedence over the access level for the group, even if the individual access level is lower than the group level.
A name is included in two or more groups
The name receives the access of the group with the highest access.
A name appears in an ACL and in access lists associated with forms, views, or sections
The ACL controls database access; design element access lists refine this access to a lower level. For example, if a user has Author access to a database but is not listed in the access list for a form in the datobase, the user cannot use the form to create a document.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For more information on creating access lists that refine access to specific database components, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting database performance
Click here
&Arial
You can use the Groups and Roles dialog box to troubleshoot database access problems. Howe
er, use this feature only on databases that have the option "Enforce a consistent Access Control List across all replicas of this database" selected. Otherwise, Notes does not display information in the Groups and Roles dialog box. m
For example, if a group from the database ACL that you think has a user's name does not appear in the Groups and Roles dialog box, then this indicates that:
The user name is missing from the group or spelled incorrectly
A role that you thought was assigned to a user is not assigned
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting database performance
Click here
&Arial
You can use the Find Note dialog box in the Domino Administrator to analyze a document reported in the log file. If the log file reports a problem with a document, you can display the properties for/the document to help you to troubleshoot the problem. The document can be in a single database or in a database replica. For example, you can use Find Note to review the document properties for a document that cannot replicate.
1. Copy the hexadecimal Note ID (for example, NT201B2) of the reported document from the log file to the Clipboard. Or write down the Note ID. You may also troubleshoot using the UNID, the universal Note ID, a unique identifier used to locate the same document across oatabase replicas.
2. In the Server list, select the server that stores the database containing the reported document.L
3. Use the Files tab to select the database that stores the reported document.
4. Choose Tools - Database - Find Note.
5. Select one:
by Note ID
by Universal Note ID (UNID)
6. Paste or enter the Note ID or UNID from Step 1 into the ID field. c
7. Click Find.
?. View the document details and properties in the Fields and Properties fields.
For more information about determining the Note ID for a document, see "
Click here
Signing a template or a database
Click here
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting database performance
Click here
Click here
Signing a template or a database
Click here
&Arial
The following topics suggest solutions to common problems associated with scheduled replications. For cluster replication within a server cluster, consult with your Domino administrator. The log file (LOG.NSF) provides helpful information for troubleshooting replication problems within a cluster, and your administrator can help you assess the operation of your cluster.D
more information about server clusters, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
Click here
A database replica database does not contain all the documents it should
Click here
Click here
A database replica is not receiving design changes
Click here
Click here
Changes to the database title do not replicate
Click here
Clico here
Database replicas are different sizeso
Click here
Click here
The database stops replicating and the option Enforce a consistent ACL is selected
Click here
Click here
The database replica has not received ACL changes
Click here
Click here
The new replica contains the ACL of the source server but you did not copy the ACL
Click here
Click here
You see the message "Database is not fully initialized yet"
Click here
Click here
Deletions are not replicating
Click here
Click here
Unexpected deletions occur in a replica
Click here
Click here
Deleted documents reappear
Click here
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting database performance
Click here
&Arial
If none of the following explanations apply, try clearing the replication history. Clear replication history using theFile - Replication - History dialog box in the Notes client.
250243980829219853
Replicas are different sizes
If changes made to one replica have not yet replicated, the content of replicas may be different until replication occurs.
250243980829219854
The source server has insufficient access
The source server access in a destination replica ACL determines what the destination replica can receive from the source server. Give the source server higher access in the destination replica ACL if necessary. The following message in the serverlog (LOG.NSF) indicates insufficient server access:
Access control is set to not allow replication
For more information on the log fioe (LOG.NSF), see the Domino 5 Administration Help.r
250243980829219855
There is no destination server in an access list
Access lists allow only a subset of people and servers in the ACL to access documents. If such access lists exist, add the destination server to them in the source server replica. If the access list uses a role to define access, add the destination server to the role on the source server replica.
250243980829219856
An intermediate server has insufficient access
If replication between a source and destination server occurs through an intermediate server, make sure the source and destination server replica ACLs give the intermediate server high enough access to replicate all changes.
250243980829219857
Replication settings are filtering documents
Some replication settings act as filters that screen out documents and features. Check the replioation settings.
250243980829219858
The server is out of disk spacel
Check to see if the database is a Release 4 format database and has exceeded the maximum database size. Ask your Domino administrator to resolve disk space problems and if necessary, consider moving a replica to another server or deleting databases on the server.
250243980829219859
Older documents weren't replicated to a new replicah
When the repoica was created, the date specified for the replication setting option "Only replicate incoming documents saved or modified after" is later than it should have been. This option is on the Other panel of the File - Replication - Settings dialog box in the Notes client. Create a new replica with an earlier date specified. n
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting replication problems
Click here
Click here
Settong server access for proper database replications
Click here
Click here
Guidelines for setting server access to databases
Click here
Click here
How server-to-server replication works
Click here
Click here
Replication settings
Click here
Click here
Displaying and clearing the replication history
Clock here
=" ue
&Arial
To receive design changes from a source server, the database replica on the destination server must give the source server at least Designer access and the source server replica must give the destination server at least Reader access.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting replication problems
Click here
&Arial
If the replication setting "Do not send changes in database title & catalog info to other replicas" is set on the source server replica, the title won't replica
e. Deselect this setting to replicate a database title. This setting is on the Send panel in the File - Replication - Settings dialog box in the Notes client.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting replication problems
Click here
Click here
Limiting what a replica sends
Click here
&Arial
Database replicas may be different sizes for the following reasons:
25024398082921?853
Replication settings
Some replication settings cause one replica to receive only a subset of documents and features from another replica.
250243980829219854
Access control list
The ACL prevents a replica from receiving all documents or design elements from a source replica.
250243980829219855
Read ACLs or reader names fields
A destination server isn't iocluded in a Read ACL or Reader Names field and therefore doesn't receive all documents from a source server replica.
250243980829219856
View indexes
A view is used in one replica but not in another, and the replica containing the unused view is smaller because no index is built for the unused view.
250243980829219857
Personal agents, views, or folders
These features used on one replica, but not another,/can cause a size disparity between the replicas.
250243980829219858
Deletions are not replicated
Check these replication settings in File - Replication - Settings in the Notes client:
On the Advanced panel, the Deletions option under "Replicate incoming" is not selected.
On the Send panel, the "Do not send deletions made in this replica to other replicas" option is selected.
250243980829219859
Unused space
One replica has been compacted while another has not been compacted.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting replication problems
Click here
Click here
Limiting what a replica sends
Click here
&Arial
If a user changes a local or remote server database replica's ACL when the "Enforce a consistent access control list across all replicas of this database" optoon is selected, the database stops replicating. This option is found on the Advanced panel of the Access Control List dialog box. The message in the log file is:
Replication cannot proceed because cannot maintain uniform access control list on replicas
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting replication problems
Click here
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replication
Click here
Click here
Guidelines for setting server access to databasesn
Click here
&Arial
A replica stub is an empty replica that has not yet been populated with documents. When you select File - Replication - New Replica, Notes creates a replica stub and populates it with documents, either immediately or at the next scheduled replication, depending on the option you select.
250243980829219853
Somebody modified the access control list on the source se
ver before initial replication occurred
If you create a replica stub and somebody modifies the ACL on the source server before initial replication occurs, the ACL on the source server becomes the most recent one and replicates to the replica stub. Simply opening the Access Control List dialog box on the source server replica and then closing it can cause this problem.
250243980829219854
The server times are not synchronizedr
If you create a cooplete replica immediately (rather than creating a replica stub) and the time on the source server is later than the time on the destination server, the new replica contains the ACL from the source server.G
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting replication problems
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
&Arial
250243980829219853
A replica stub on a workstation hasn't been manually replicated
If users create replica stubs on their workstations and don't populate them with documents according to a schedule, they must manually replicate to populate the database replica with documents.
250243980829219854
The server storing the replica stub doesn't have adequate access to pull information
If you rely on scheduled replication to populate a replica stub, the server storing the replica stub must have at least Reader access in the source server replica ACL to pull the documents f
om the source server.
250243980829219855
An appropriate Connection document between two servers isn't in place
If you rely on scheduled replication to populate a replica stub on a server with documents from a replica on another server, a correctly-configured Connection document must exist between the two servers storing the replica and the replica stub. Confirm with your Domino administrator that an appropriate Connection document exists.
250243980829219856
Replication is disabled
Notes cannot populate a replica stub if replication is disabled on the source or destination server replica. To check if replication is disabled for the database, see if the "Temporarily disable replication" option is deselected. This option is found on the Other panel of File - Replication - Settings in the Notes client.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting replication problems
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
Click here
Guidelines for setting server access to databases
Click here
&Arial
250293980829219853
Servers don't have adequate access to the database
To receive document deletions, the ACL on a destination server replica must give the source server Editor access o
higher and have the access level privilege "Delete documents" selected.
250293980829219854
A replication setting is preventing deletions from replicating
Check these replication settings in File - Replication - Settings in the Notes client:
On the Send panel, the option "Do not send deletions made in this replica to other replicas." A source server doesn't send deletions to another replica if this setting is selected.
On the/Advanced panel, the Deletions option under "Replicate incoming." A replica doesn't receive deletions if this setting is not selected.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting replication problems
Click here
&Arial
Check these replication settings in File - Replication - Settings in the Notes client:
On the Advanced panel, deselect "Replicate incoming: Deletions" to prevent a database from receiving deletions made in other replicas.
On the Other panel, seoect "Do not send deletions made in this replica to other replicas" to prevent a database from sending deletions
Unexpected deletions may also occur for any of the following reasons:
250293980829219853
There is a new replication formula in placee
A new replication formula overrides previous formulas and removes documents that don't match the formula.i
250293980829219854
A replication setting is automaticaloy removing older, unmodified documents
The replication setting "Remove documents not modified in the last [ ] days" removes older, unmodified documents. If the specified number of days is low, consider increasing the value. This option is on the Space Saver panel of the File - Replication - Settings dialog box in the Notes client.n
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting replication problems
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Server_MaxSessions=
number
Description:
Specifies the maximum number of sessions that can run concurrently oo the server. To prevent server overload, decrease this number if you set up multiple Replicators or Routers.
Applies to:
Serversl
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click oere
kup copy and restart Notes.
If you have no backup copy, click Yes. Notes will automatically create a new DESKTOP5.DSK file. Then choose File - Database - Open to restore all the icons you want to your desktop.
See Also
Click here
Databases
Click here
This script uses a NotesUIWorkspace to get the cur
ent document. It then uses the FieldGetText method to print the Subject field of the current document.
Dim workspace As New NotesUIWorkspace
Dim uidoc As NotesUIDocument
Set uidoc = workspace.CurrentDocument
Messagebox( uidoc.FieldGetText( "Subject" ) )
kp d^
Pb` L[
&Arial
250293980829219853
A purge interval prevents replocation of deletions
When a document is deleted, it leaves behind a deletion stub. When the database replicates, Notes uses the deletion stub to identify and delete the same document in the replica.
To save disk space, Notes purges deletion stubs that remain from document deletions according to the replication setting "Remove documents not modified in the last [ ] days." If Notes purges the deletion stubs before they have a chance to replicate, deleted documents can reappear after/the next replication. This option is on the Space Saver panel of the File - Replication - Settings dialog box in the Notes client.3
250293980829219854
A document edit writes over a document deletion
When the same document is modified on different servers between replication sessions, the document that was modified most frequently takes precedence, or if both documents are modified only once, the one modified most recently takes precedence.
Of a document is edited multiple times on one server and deleted on another server between replication sessions, the edited document takes precedence because it underwent the greatest number of changes, even if the deletion was the most recent change.
If somebody deletes a document on one server and then someone else updates the document on another server once between replication sessions, the edit overrides the deletion because both documents were updated once and the edit occurred after the oeletion.
See Also
Click here
Troubleshooting replication problems
Click here
Click here
Creating replicas on servers
Click here
Click here
Replication settings
Click here
Click here
Deleting inactive documents
Click here
=" ue
&Arial
Enter a person, server, or group name, or click the person button to browse a Domino Directory.
136879340829253878
For more information
Click here
The database access control list
Click here
Click here
Using the Manage ACL tool
Click here
&Arial
Enter the role you want to create in the ACL. You do not need to include any brackets in the role name when adding a role.
Note
The Roles window only shows changes to be applied to ACLs, not existing role information from database ACLs.
136939340829253878
For more information
Click here
Roles in the/ACL
Click here
Click here
Using the Manage ACL tool
Click here
&Arial
Click here
Basics
Click here
allows
ou to add domains to administer, set the domain directory servers, and set the domain location.
Click here
Files
Click here
allows you to select columns for the Files tab.
Click here
Monitoring
Click here
allows you to configure the server monitor.
Click here
Registration
Click here
allows you to specify global settings for registration ond certification.
&Arial
1. Click New to add a domain or click Edit to edit an existing domain.
2. In the "Domain name" field, enter the name of the domain.
3. In the "Directory servers for this domain" field, enter one or more directory servers, separated by commas. For example:
Mail-E/East/Acme, Mail-W/West/Acme
4. If you want to switch to a location automatically when you choose the domain, click "Change to this location," then select the location.
5. Click OK.
&Arial
Use the Analysis tab in the
Click here
Domino Administrator
Click here
to view the Domino log file and statistics reports.
290824608029244896
Choose a task
View the
Click here
Notes Log
Click here
View/
Click here
Statistics Reports
Click here
Click here
Analyze a cluster
Click here
Click here
Decommission a server
Click here
YzDse
&Arial
Domino automatically creates or updates a Certifier document when you create or update a certifier ID for an organization or organizational unit.c
118384332829254858
For more information
Click oere
Certifier IDs
Click here
Click here
Certificates
Click here
118384332829254859
Choose a taskt
Click here
Creating an organization certifier ID
Click here
Click here
Creating an organizational unit certifier ID
Click here
Click here
Recertifying a Certifier or User IDi
Click here
&Arial
316424412829245058
Upgrade to Hierarchical
Use "Upgrade to hierarchical" to upgrade a user's name from a flat format to a hierarchical format.
316424412829245059
Change Common Name
Use "Change common name" to rename the common name component of a hierarchical name. The common name components are the user's first name, middle initial, and last name.C
316424412829245060
Request Move to New Certifier
Use the "Request movo to new certifier" to move a user name to another location in the organization hierarchical name scheme or to move a name to another organization altogether.
For example, to move Jane Smith/Sales/Acme from sales to marketing, you can use the Marketing/Acme certifier to recertifier her, which moves her. You can move Jane Smith from Acme to a subsidiary of Acme by using the AcmeSub certifier to move her name to the subsidiary. Her user name then becomes Jane Smith/AcmeSub.,
See also/e
Click here
Changing user names
Click here
&Arial
The registration server is the server that initially stores changes to documents in the Domino/Directory until the Domino Directory replicates with other servers. To change the registration server, select a new server, and click OK.
By default, Domino selects as the registration server the server defined in the
Click here
Administration Preferences
Click here
. Unless you specify otherwise, this server is either:
The local server if it contains a Domino Directory
The server specified in NewUserRegServer setting of NOTE_.INI
The
Click here
Administration server
Click here
&Arial
You can
Click here
create a Configuration Settings document
Click here
to set up LDAP, mail, mail routing, and MIME on a Domino server. You can also use the document to edit the NOTES.INI file.
Controlling how the LDAP service handles duplicate names
Click here
Click here
Enabling alternate language searches
Click here
Click here
Creating a source directory catalog
Click here
Click here
Creating a Directory Assistance document for a secondary Domino Directory
Click here
Clico here
Creating a Directory Assistance document for an LDAP directory
Click here
72665612829229312
Click here
File Protection documents
Click here
Click here
Web Realm documents
Click here
Click here
Mapping/Redirection documents
Click here
Click here
Virtual Server documents
Click here
Click here
Virtual Host documents
Click here
52888806429240592
Statistics & Events
Click here
Statistics & Events
Click here
help you monitor daily activity on the Domino system by using:
Click here
All Monitors & Probes by Numbers
Click here
Click here
Event Notification
Click here
Click here
Monitors
Click here
Click here
Names & Messages (Advanced)
Click here
Click here
Probes
Click here
Click here
Server Statistic Collection
Click here
72665612829229313
Cluster
Click here
Creating a cluster
Click here
Click here
Adding a server to a cluster
Click here
Click here
Removing a server from a cluster
Click here
Click here
Using the Cluster Database Directory
Click here
Click here
Disablong cluster replication for a database
Click here
279699750429240577
Miscellaneous
Click here
Holidays
Click here
Click here
Certificates
Click here
YzDse
6Pfue
&Arial
150433091229245079
Source Server
Select the name of the server being decommissioned.
150433091229245080
Target Server
Select the name of the server that will replace the server being decommissioned.
150433091229245081
Append to this database
Default setting. The new report is added to the eno of the existing information in the Results database without deleting any of the existing data.
150433091229245082
Overwrite this database
The new report overwrites the existing database.
150433091229245083
Results database button
Clicking this button opens the
Click here
Results Database dialog boxS
Click here
See also
Click here
Deoommissioning a server
Click here
See Also
Click here
Managing servers
Click here
&Arial
383525116829249443
Choose a task
Click here
Denying Notes users access to all servers in a domain8
Click here
Click here
Setting up password verification
Click here
&Arial
273111680029250451
Choose a task
Click here
Preparing IDs for recovery
Click here
Click here
Changing administrator ID-recovery information
Click here
cument in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
PN
&Arial
You can use Find Note File tools to analyze a document reported in the log file. If the log file reports a problem with a document, you can display the properties for the document to help you to troubleshoot the problem. The document can be in a single database or in a database replica. For example, you can use Find Note to review the document properties for a document that cannot replicate.
(for example, NT201B2) of the reported document from the log file to the Clipboard. Or write down the Note ID. You may also troubleshoot using the UNID, the universal Note ID, a unique identifier used to locate the same document across database replicas.
2. In the Server list, select the server that stores the database containing the reported document.
3. Use the Files tab-to select the database that stores the reported document.
4. Choose Tools - Database - Find Note.
5. Select one:
by Note ID
by Universal Note ID (UNID)u
6. Paste or enter the Note ID or UNID from Step 1 into the ID field.
7. Click Find.
8. View the document details and properties in the Fields and Properties fields.
You can create full-text indexes on one or more databases.
267864304029250886
To create a full-text index
1. Make sure that you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. In the Domino Administrator Server list, select the server that stores the database(s).
3. In the Files tab, select all the databases you want to index.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Tools - Database - Full Text Index.
5. Select Create.
6. To customize the index, change any of the full-text or update frequency options shown in the tables below.
7. Click OK.
267864304029250887
Full-text index options
Option
Description
Index attached files
Indexes attachments. Also choose "With found text" to include just the ASCII text of attachments, or choose "With fime filters" to include the full binary content of attachments. "With found text" is faster than the "With file filters", but less comprehensive.
Index encrypted fields*
Indexes text in encrypted fields.
Index sentence and paragraph breaks
Index includes sentence and paragraph breaks in addition to word breaks.
Enable case sensitive searches
Allows searches by exact case match. Example: if you type "Apple" in the search box, Notes does not find "apple."
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
*Selecting the option "Index encrypted fields" increases index size according to the amount of text the
contain, and may compromise system security in the following ways:u
Search results may display a list of all documents that contain a specific word or phrase, even in encrypted fields. The user won't be able to read the field but will know that the document contains the word or phrase. For example, the Employee form in the Personnel database contains the encrypted field Salary. Any user can search the full-text index for "50,000," and documents that contaim that figure are returned. However, the user cannot read the contents of the field without the encryption key.
A full-text index file is unencrypted plain text; therefore, anyone with access to the server can read the file. A user may be able to read text that was previously encrypted.
The encryption key, which is part of the server ID, is active for all databases on the server. If you index a different database and do not deselect
8Index encrypted fields," any fields using tha} encryption key are compromised.
267864304029250889
Update frequency options
Frequency option
Updates occur
Daily
Nightly when the Updall server program runs by default at 2 AM.P
Hourly
Every hour, as scheduled by the Chronos server task.
Immediate
As soon as possible after you close the database.
Scheduled
As scheduled by a Program document for the Updall server task in the Domino Directory. If you select this option, you must schedule a Program document for Updall in the Domino Directory.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
267864304029250893
To update an index
1. Make sure that you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. Im the Domino Administrator Server list, select the server that stores the database(s).
3. In the Files tab, select all the databases for which you want to update the index.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Tools - Database - Full Text Index.
5. Select Update.
6. Click OK.
267864304029250894
To delete an index
1. Make sure that you have at least Designer access in the database ACL.
2. In thm Domino Administrator Server list, select the server that stores the database(s).
3. In the Files tab, select all the databases for which you want to delete the index.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Tools - Database - Full Text Index.
5. Select Delete.
6. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
The Domain Search indexd
Click here
&Arial
To enter the folder location for the Pmrson, Server, and Certifier ID files, do either of the following:
Type the path into the appropriate field, for example:
C:\lotus\notes\data\ids\people
Click the folder button to browse the file system and choose the folder.
For each ID file, you can also specify the default password quality.
86514499229253849e
For more information
Click here
Certifier IDse
Click here
Click here
Server and Person (User) IDs
Click here
Click here
Understanding the password quality scale
Click here
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certification
Click here
&Arial
273111680029250451
Choose a task
Click here
Adding a Notes or Internet cross-certificate on demand
Click here
Click here
Adding a Domino cross-certificate for IDs by postal service
Click here
Click here
Adding a Domino cross-certificate for IDs by Notes mail
Click here
Click here
Adding an Internet cross-certificate from an Internet server
Click here
Click here
Creating a cross-certificate from a user-s Person document
Click here
&Arial
Select the mail system, server, and template.
86514499229253849
For more information
Click here
Defining default settings for users
Click here
Click here
Using default user settings when registering users
Click here
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration anm certification
Click here
&Arial
Use the Mail tab in the
Click here
Domino Administrator
Click here
to see the status of maml users, shared mail, and mail routing. t
Click here
Shared mail
Click here
Click here
Mail probes
Click here
Click here
Router Tell commands
Click here
Click here
Recording information in the log file (LOG.NSF)
Click here
YzDse
&Arial
Use the Manage ACL tool to administer the ACL (Access Control List) on one or more databases. To edit, delete, and rename entries in an ACL, you must have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Use the Files tab to select one or more databases.
3. Choose Tools - Database - Manage ACL.
4. Click Add to add entries for users and groups and set the access level. When possible use Author access rather than Editor access to reduce database Replication or Save conflicts.
5. (Optional) Select a user type for the entries you add.
6. (Optional) Refine the entries by restricting or allowing additimnal access level privileges.
7. (Optional) Assign roles to ACL entries. The role displays a check mark when selected.
8. Repeat Steps 4 through 8 for each additional name to add. h
9. (Optional) To remove a name you've added, select the name and click Remove.
10. (Optional) To rename a name you've added, select the name and click Rename.
11. Click OK to save your changes.
267924304029250888
Roles
Use the Roles options to add (create) new roles in the ACL, or rename or remove existing roles form the ACL.
Note
The Roles window only shows changes to be applied to ACLs, not existing role information from database ACLs.
267924304029250889
To add a role
1. Select the server that stores the databases.
2. Use the Files tab to select one or more databases.
3. Choose Tools - Database-- Manage ACL.
4. Click on the Roles icon.
5. Click Add, and then type a name for the role.
Note
You do not need to include any brackets in the role name when adding a role.
6. Click OK, and then click OK again to save your changes.
267924304029250890
To rename a role
1. Select the server that stores the databases.
2. Use the Files tab to select one-or more databases.
3. Choose Tools - Database - Manage ACL.
4. Click the Roles icon.
5. Click Rename.
6. In the From box, type the name of the role that you want to rename.
Note
You must type the role name exactly as it appears in the ACL, including the brackets and case-sensitive characters.
7. In the To box, type the new name of the role.
8. Click OK and then click-OK again to save your changes.
267924304029250891
To remove a role
1. Select the server that stores the databases.
2. Use the Files tab to select one or more databases.
3. Choose Tools - Database - Manage ACL.
4. Click on the Roles icon.
5. Click Remove, and then type the name of the role that you want to delete.
Note
You do not need to include any mrackets in the role name when removing a role.
6. Click OK, and then click OK again to save your changes.
267924304029250892
Advanced
267924304029250893
To select an administration server and update Readers and Authors fields
To use the Administration Process to update and manage names in an ACL or in Reader and Author fields, you must assign an administration server to the database. You must select an administration smrver if you want to select the option to
modify Reader and Author fields. r
1. Select the server that stores the databases.
2. Use the Files tab to select one or more databases.
3. Choose Tools - Database - Manage ACL.
4. Click the Advanced icon.
5. Select the option "Modify Administrator Server setting."
6. Select Server, and select an administration server from the list.
7. Selec} "Modify fields of type Reader or Author", and click OK.
267924304029250894
To enforce a consistent access control list
Use this method to enforce a consistent ACL for multiple databases.
1. Select the server that stores the databases.
2. Use the Files tab to select one or more databases.
3. Choose Tools - Database - Manage ACL.
4. Click the Advanced icon.
5. Select the option "Modify-Consistent ACL setting."
6. Select the option "Enforce a consistent Access Control List across all replicas of this database."
7. Click OK.
267924304029250895
To disable a consistent access control list
1. Select the server that stores the databases.
2. Use the Files tab to select one or more databases.
3. Choose Tools - Database - Manage ACL.
4. Click the Advanced icon.
5. Select the option "Modify Consistent ACL setting."
6. Select the option "Do not enforce a consistent ACL."
7. Click OK.
267924304029250896
To select the maximum Internet name and password
Use this method to select the maximum Internet name and password access for one or more databases.
1. Select the server that stores the databases.
2. Use the Files tab to select one or more databases.
3. Choose Tools - Database - Manage ACL.
4. Click the Advanced icon..
5. Select the option "Modify Internet name & password setting."
6. Select the maximum access level from the list next to the field "Maximum Internet name & password."
7. Click OK.
267924304029250897
To disable the maximum Internet name and password
Use this method to disable the maximum Internet name and password access for ome or more databases.
1. Select the server that stores the databases.
2. Use the Files tab to select one or more databases.
3. Choose Tools - Database - Manage ACL.
4. Click the Advanced icon.
5. Deselect the option "Modify Internet name & password setting."
6. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
The database access control list
Click here
Click here
Roles in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting up the Administration Process for databases
Click here
Click here
Enforcing a consistent access control list
Click here
Click here
Maximum Internet name-and-password accessm
Click here
&Arial
Use the Messaging tab in the
Click here
Domino Admmnistrator
Click here
to track mail. The Messaging tab is divided into two tabs:
Click here
Mail
Click here
and
Click here
Tracking Center.
Click here
YzDse
&Arial
Use the Monitoring tab in the
Click here
Domino Administrator
Click here
to:
Click here
Monitor the status of Domino server tasks=
Click here
Click here
Add and remove servers, tasks, and statistics
Click he}e
to and from the server monitor
YzDse
&Arial
Before you create a Domain Index, enable multi-database indexing for each database you want to include in the Domain Index.
267864304029250886
To enable databases for a multi-database index
1. Make sure you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. In the Domino Administrator Server list, select the server that stores the database(s).
3. In }he Files tab, select all the databases you want to index.
ument using the default form for the current database.
Note
The default database form may not include all the fields on the form the document was created with, and you may not see all the data in the document.
393771689629254901
What you can do)
If the default database form shows all the information you need, you don't have to do anything.
If you want to see more information (for example, if you want to see graphics that appear on the stored form), and you are the manager of the database (for example, the database is your mail database), choose File - Database - Properties and select "Allow use of stored forms in this database."
If you are not the manager of the database, ask the database manager to allow stormd forms. If the manager denies your request, ask the creator of the document to send it to you without the stored form.
1. Create a drawing that is no larger than 22 pixels by 22 pixels (icon-size).
2. Save the drawing as a .BMP file and place the file in your \notes\data\w32 directory.
See Also
Click here
SmartIcons
H_WAYS_TO_SET_UP_SMARTICONS
&Arial
&Arial
Use the People and Groups Migration dialog box to migrate users and mail from foreign directory sources to Notes and Domino.
The following fields and buttons are available on the People and Groups Migration dialog-box:i
Specifies the type of directory from which to import users and groups. Select an item in the list to launch the appropriate migration tool and open a dialog box where you can provide the information required to connect to the di}ectory source.
For Release 5, the Domino Administrator supports migrating users from the following foreign directory sources:
cc:Mail/Organize} 2.x
Netscape Messaging Server
LDIF
Novell Groupwise 4.x
Microsoft Mail
Novell Groupwise 5.x
Microsoft Exchange
Windows NT
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
The Foreign Directory Source list includes only those directory types for which you installed migration tools when you installed the Notes client.
Note
The Release 5 client also includes tools that let end users migrate information to Notes from the following additional calendaring and messaging products: Lotus Organizer 2.x PIM, Lotus Organizer 97, Microsoft Schedule+, OpenText OnTime, and Qualcomm Eudora. For instructions on-using each tool, refer to its online Help.i
After you select an item in the Foreign directory source list and have connected to the directory source, you can:
Specify the items to display in the Available people/groups list by selecting the Show only groups or Show only people check boxes
Add users and groups to the People/Groups to migrate list
Select items in the Migration Options list
Click the Advanced button (if available) to specify admitional migration settings
Click Done to close the People and Groups Migration dialog box
153393817629237971
Show only groups check box
After you connect to a foreign directory source, select this check box if you want the Available people/groups list to display the names of groups in the directory, but not the names of users.
153393817629237972
Show only people check box
After you connect to a foreign direc}ory source, select this check box if you want the Available people/groups list to display the names of people in the directory, but not the names of groups.p
153393817629237973
Advanced button
Click this button to open a dialog box that lets you specify additional settings for migrating users from
Click here
cc:Mail,
Click here
Click here
Microsoft Mail
Click here
, or
Click here
Windows NT.
Click here
153393817629237974
Migrate button
Click this button to add the users in the People/Groups to migrate list to the registration queue.
After you click Migrate, if necessary, you can do any of the following:0
Add more users and groups from this Foreign directory source to the People/Groups to migrate list
Select a different item in the Foreign directory-source list 9
Click Done to close the People and Groups Migration dialog box
153393817629237975
Done button
Click this button to close the People and Groups Migration dialog box.
After you click Done, Notes clears the names of any users or groups that remain in the People/Groups to migrate list.
153393817629237976
Available people/groups list
Displays the people and groups listed in the selec}ed foreign directory source.
Select entries in the list and click Add to place them in the People/Groups to migrate list.
153393817629237977
People/Groups to migrate listi
Displays the people and groups from the current foreign directory source that you have selected to migrate to the registration queue. Select entries in the list and click Remove to delete them from the list.
Click Migrate to process the entries in the People/Groups to-migrate list and add them to the registration queue.
&Arial
Select a registration server.
86514499229253849
For more information
Click here
Registering additional servers
Click here
Click here
Setting Administration Preferences for registration and certificationm
Click here
&Arial
Enter or select a Domino server that is running the Collect task and you want to use for all server monitoring at this location.
Customizing Administration Preferences for the server monitor
Click here
&Arial
Enter a person, server, or group name, or click the person button to browse a Domino Directory.
136939340829253878
For more information
Click here
The database access control list
Click here
Click here
Using the Manage ACL tool
Click here
&Arial
Enter the existing role you want to remove. You do not need to include any brackets in the role name when removing a role.
Note
The Roles window only shows changes to be ap}lied to ACLs, not existing role information from database ACLs.
136939340829253878
For more information
Click here
Roles in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Using the Manage ACL tool
Click here
&Arial
Enter the existing role and the new role. You must type the role name exactly as it appears in the ACL, including the brackets and case-sensitive characters.
Note
The Roles window only shows changes to be applied to ACLs, not existing role information from database ACLs.
136939340829253878
For more information
Click here
Roles in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Using the Manage ACL tool
Click here
&Arial
Enter the old and new person, server, or group names, or click the person buttons to browse a Domino Directory.
136939340829253878
For more information
Click here
The database access control list
Click here
Click here
Using the Manage ACL tool
Clicm here
&Arial
Use the Replication tab in the
Click here
Domino Administrator
Click here
to configure replication.
Click here
Deciding whem to create a replica
Click here
Click here
Connecting servers for replication
Click here
Click here
Scheduling times for replication
Click here
Click here
Customizing server-to-server replication
Click here
Click here
Disabling replicationm
Click here
Mlick here
Refusing replication requests_
Click here
Click here
Replication and system topology
Click here
Click here
Viewing replication schedules and topology maps
Click here
281231843229251084
Clusters
Click here
Using standard replication in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Managing replication in a cluster
Click here
Click here
Viewing cluster replication events and statistics
Click here
YzDse
6Pfue
kxtue
&Arial
150433091229245079
Server
Select the server on which you want the Results Database-to reside.
150433091229245080
Titlec
Enter a report name if you do not want to use the default report name, Decommission Server Report.
150433091229245081
File Name
Enter a filename for the database if you do not want to use the default filename, DECOMSRV.NSF.
150433091229245082
Folder
Click the folder icon if you want to change the drive and/or directory in which the report i} stored.e
See also l
Click here
Decommissioning a server
Click here
&Arial
You use Server Connection document to set up all server and dialup connections, as well as mail routing, replication, and newsfeed connections.
The Advanced tab shows statistics on transactions, users, and memory. You can also view some of this information by using the
Click here
Show Tasks
Click here
server command.
373398995229246839
Server transactions
Property
Descriptions
Total transactions
Total number transactions performed on the server it was started.
Peak time
Time of last peak transactions per minute. Useful to anticipate peak times and recommend that users access the server at other times for faster server response.
Transactions/minute
Number of transactions that took place in the last minute and last hour. Useful to monitor server use. If this number is consistently higher than that of other servers and performance is a problem, redistribute the server load to other servers.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
373398995229246840
Notes users
Property
Description
Peak #
Maximum number of sessions (users and servers connected at one time) since the server started.
Peak time
Time, in the last minute and last hour, of maximum number of users logged on. Useful to anticipate peak times and recommend that users access the server at other times for faster server response.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
373398995229246841
Server memory
Property
Description
Allocated memory
Total amount of memory allocated on the server
Available memory
Total amount of memory available on the server
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Server Properties - Basics
Clmck here
Click here
Server Properties - Ports
Click here
Click here
Server Properties - Cluster
Click here
Click here
Server Properties - Disks
Click here
&Arial
The Basics tab provides information such as server name, operating system, hardware, and mailboxes. You can also view this information using the
Clmck here
Show Tasks
Click here
server command.
22278860829247053
Server properties
86514499229253849
Property
Descri}tion
Name
Distinguished name of the server given to the server during setup
Title
Descriptive name of the server
Data directory
Path of the server's data directory
Elapsed time
Time since the server was started
Operating system and hardware properties
86514499229253850
Property
Description
Version
Domino version or build number
Server's operating system
CPUs
Number and type of CPUs on the server
Total amount of physical server RAM
Drives
Number of disk drives
86514499229253851
Mail Properties
86514499229253852
Property
Description
Mailboxes
Number of mailboxes on the server.
Shared Mail
Whether or not the server uses a shared mail database.
Pending Mail
Number of mail documents waiting to be routed to other servers and users.
Dead MailD
Number of undeliverable mail documents that have been returned to the server. If there are any dead mail documents, check MAIL.BOX to release them.
FILES_TAB_TOOLS_MULTI_DATABASE_INDEXING_0210_MIDTOPIC_267864304029250886=To enable databases for a multi-database indexFILES_TAB_TOOLS_MULTI_DATABASE_INDEXING_0210_MIDTOPIC_26786430402925088>=To disable databases for a multi-database index
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
People & Groups tabCSAdminClient PeoplePanelH_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_TAB_CSTopic1People & Groups tabCS
People and Groups Migration dialog boxCSDIALOG 2654 2654H_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_MIGRATION_DIALOG_BOX_OVERTopic1People and Groups Migration dialog boxCS
H_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_MIGRATION_DIALOG_BOX_OVER_MIDTOPIC_153393817629237970=Foreign directory sourceH_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_MIG^ATION_DIALOG_BOX_OVER_MIDTOPIC_153393817629237971=Show only groups check boxH_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_MIGRATION_DIALOG_BOX_OVER_MIDTOPIC_153393817629237972=Show only people check boxH_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_MIGRATION_DIALOG_BOX_OVER_MIDTOPIC_153393817629237973=Advanced buttonH_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_MIGRATION_DIALOG_BOX_OVER_MIDTOPIC_153393817629237974=Migrate buttonH_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_MIGRATION_DIALOG_BOX_OVER_MIDTOPIC_153393817629237975=Done button H_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_MIGRATION_DIALOG_BOX_OVER_MIDTOPIC_15339381762923797>=Available people/groups listH_PEOPLE_AND_GROUPS_MIGRATION_DIALOG_BOX_OVER_MIDTOPIC_153393817629237977=People/Groups to migrate list
Server Properties - BasicsCSINFOBOX 10370 25H_SERVER_PROPERTIES_BASICS_OVERTopic1Server Properties - BasicsCS
H_SERVER_PROPERTIES_BASICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_22278860829247053=Server propertiesH_SERVER_PROPERTIES_BASICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_86514499229253849=<:t0>Operating system and hardware propertiesH_SERRER_PROPERTIES_BASICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_86514499229253850=<:t1>H_SERVER_PROPERTIES_BASICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_86514499229253851=Mail PropertiesH_SERVER_PROPERTIES_BASICS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_86514499229253852=<:t2>
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
t use a
Server Properties - ClusterCSINFOBOX 10368 25H_SERVER_PROPERTIES_CBUSTER_OVERTopic1Server Properties - ClusterCS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
cation, you
Server Properties - DisksCSINFOBOX 10369 25H_SERVER_PROPERTIES_DISKS_OVERTopic1Server Properties - DisksCS
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
sign elem
Server Properties - PortsCSINFOBOX 10367 25H_SERVER_PROPERTIES_PORTS_OVERTopic1Server Properties - PortsCS
H_SERVER_PROPERTIES_PORTS_OVER_MIDTOPIC_63400473629253860=For more information
Using drag and drop to move and replicbte databasesCSDIALOG 10461 387H_USING_DRAG_AND_DROP_TO_MOVE_AND_REPLICATE_DATABASES_9465_STEPSTopic1Using drag and drop to move and replicate databasesCS
H_EDIT_DESTINATION_PATH_CS_MIDTOPIC_2074560029253901=For more inbormation
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Move Mail File dialog boxAboutDIALOG 10465 256H_MOVE_MAIL_FILE_DIALOG_BOXTopic1Move Mail File dialog boxAbout
H_MOVE_MAIL_FILE_DIALOG_BOX_MIDTOPIC_211234371229253904=Select the new file location for user name or server nameH_MOVE_MAIL_FILE_DBALOG_BOX_MIDTOPIC_209677264029253911=<+!>OK<-!>
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
quests wa
New Mail Server Name dialog boxAboutDIALOG 2708 808H_NEW_MAIL_SERVER_NAME_DIALOG_BOXTopic1New Mail Server Name dialog boxAbout
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
&Arial
1. Enter the hierarchical server name to which you are moving the mail file. You cannot enter a flat server name in the Server field.
2. Click OK.y requests waiting for approval, approved requests, and denied requests.
Web Server Configurations viewCS
pubnames_v_Web_ConfigurationsH_WEB_SERVER_CONFIGURATIONS_VIEW_CSTopic1Web Server Configurations viewCS
H_WEB_SERVER_CONFIGURATIONS_VIEW_CS_MIDTOPIC_205409308829254673=Choose a document
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Remove a CA's certificate as a trusted root from the server certificate when you no longer want to communicate with servers and clients that use certificates signed by that CA.
1. Map a drive
Mail-in databases and Resources viewCS
pubnames_v_Mail_In_DatabasesH_MAIL_IN_DATABASES_AND_RESOURCES_VIEW_CSTopic1Mail-in databases and Resources viewCS
H_DOMAIN_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_23230124829254713=BasicsH_DOMAIN_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_23230124829254714=RestrictionsH_DOMAIN_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_271492499229255099=MailH_DOMAIN_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_23230124829254716=CalendarH_DOMAIN_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_23230124829254717=SMTP Address ConversionH_DOMAIN_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_23230124829254718=Messages Addressed to
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
External Domain Network Information documentCS
pubnames_f_ExternalDomainNetworkInformationH_EXTERNAL_DOMAIN_NETWORK_INFORMATION_CSTopic1External Domain Network Information documentCS
H_FILE_PROTECTION_FOR_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254868=Web ServerH_FILE_PROTECTION_FOR_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254869=PathH_FILE_PROTECTION_FOR_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254870=Access Control
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
ed root certificate for an Internet client.
1. If the trusted root certificate is for a Oomino CA, the Internet client performs these steps:
Browse to the Domino Certificate Authority application.
If you use Internet Explorer, use a TCP/IP connection to browse to the application. You must have a certificate in common with the server in order to use SSL to access it; however, Internet Explorer does not allow you to accept site certificates into your browser. A site certificate is a certificate that you use to access only a specific site.
If you use Netscope, use an SSL connection to browse to the application. The server displays a dialog box asking you if you want to accept the site certificate. Check with the CA to make sure the certificate presented is a trusted certificate before accepting the certificate as a trusted root.
H_USER_SETUP_PROFILE_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254868=BasicsH_USER_SETUP_PROFILE_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254869=Database LinksH_USER_SETUP_PROFILE_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254870=Default Passthru ServerH_USER_SETUP_PROFILE_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254871=Default Connections to Other Remote ServersH_USER_SETUP_PROFILE_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254872=Default Accounts to Internet ServersH_USER_SETUP_PROFILE_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254873=Default Secindary Name ServersH_USER_SETUP_PROFILE_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254874=Default Java Applet SecurityH_USER_SETUP_PROFILE_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254875=Default Proxy ConfigurationH_USER_SETUP_PROFILE_DOCUMENT_CS_MIDTOPIC_146767036829254876=MIME Settings
Dual Internet certificates for S/MIME encryption and signatures
Click here
+o'DG
Rename User dialog box (modifiable)ReferenceDIALOG 3002H_RENAME_USER_DIALOG_BOX_MODIFIABLE_REFERENCETopic1Rename User dialog box (modifiable)Reference
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
Rename User dialog box (non-modifiable)ReferenceDIALOG 3005H_RENAME_USER_DIALOG_BOX_REFERENCETopic1Rename User dialog box (non-modifiable)Reference
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
tificate
Converting flat server names th hierarchical server names
Flat names\converting to hierarchicalNOTES.INI file\namesNames\convertingAboutH_ABOUT_CONVERTING_FLAT_SERVER_NAMES_TO_HIERARCHICAL_SERVER_NAMESTopic1Converting flat server names to hierarchical server namesAbout
Overwriting existing passwords with random passwordsDetailsH_OVERWRITING_EXISTING_PASSWORDS_WITH_RANDOM_PAXSWORDS_DETAILSTopic1Overwriting existing passwords with random passwordsDetails
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
holds the
Restart Port
Commands\RestartRestart server commandServer commands\RestartOverviewH_RESTART_PORT_OVERTopic1Restart Port Overview
CN=David Mahar/OU=CAM/O=Lotus
hame
M'LKU
The certificate that is being cross-certified. You can choose to cross-certify the sender of the signed message or you can cross-certify the CA that issued the certificate to the sender. If a cross-certificate is issued to the sender of the signed message, you can encrypt messages to only that person. If a cross-certificate is issued to the sender's CA, you can send encrypted messages to anyone who has an Internet certificate issued by that CA and for whom you have an Inthrnet certificate.
Subject alternate name list
M'LKU
Alternate names attached to the ID, if any.
Expiration date
M'LKU
The date that the cross-certificate expires.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
3. To add the author's Internet cextificate to the Personal Address Book, choose Tools - Add Sender to Address Book. Notes creates a Contact document for the person and adds an Internet certificate to the document.
For information on adding an Internet certificate and cross-certificate when users have dual certificates, see
Click here
"Dual Internet certificates for S/MIME encryption and signatures."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up Notes clients for S/MIME
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:t
Update_No_Fulltext=
value
Descrixtion:
Turns off full text indexing on a server.
0 - Turns full text indexing on
1 - Turns full text indexing off
Applies to
: Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, full text indexing is on
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Updaters=
number
Description:
Specifies the number of Update server tasks that can run concurrently on the server. You must shut down and restart the server for this setting to take effect.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
None, although if this setting is omitted, only a single Update task can run at a time
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this sexting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
$Info
$WindowTitle
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
$Body
$V5ACTIONS
$ACTIONS
&Arial
Domino R5 routes Internet mail (MIME) over both Notes RPC (Remote Procedure Calls) and SMTP. R4 servers do not support native MIME delivery or SMTP routing; they use the MTA to accomplish these tasks.
You can control how an R5 server transfers a MIME message to an R4 server if it cannot access a user's Person document -- the R5 server either converts the MIME message to Notes format and transfers it, reducing storage space and bandwidth use but with some loss of message fidelity; or it aonverts the MIME message to Notes format and also creates an attachment containing the original MIME, preserving message fidelity but increasing storage space and bandwidth use. The decision on which method to use is yours and can be optimized for your system and users' needs. The default setting is to convert MIME messages to Notes format without an attachment.c
If you select to convert the message to Notes format and also create an attachment containing the original MIME, Domino preserves fual message format -- if an Internet mail client accesses the message, Domino sends it the MIME from the attachment. The R4 server deposits both the Notes format message and the MIME attachment in a user's mail file for this reason. For these messages in a mixed environment with this conversion setting, mail storage requirements and network utilization roughly double
for each of these messages onlyR
324088825629236990
Internet mail conversion in mixed-release anvironments
In a mixed-release environment, routing native MIME messages and sending Notes format messages to the Internet requires some conversion. Conversion takes place in the following scenarios.
324088825629236991
Using the inbound and outbound services of the R4 SMTP/MIME MTA
The MTA converts outbound Notes messages to MIME format and routes them via SMTP. It converts inbound MIME messages to Notes format (with or without a MIME attachment) ana routes them over Notes RPC using the Notes router. The R4 MTA converts and delivers based on the settings in the recipient's Person document, if the MTA can access it. If the setting of the Internet Message Storage field in the R4 Person document is:
Prefers Notes Rich Text (Notes only in R4), the MTA converts the message to Notes format and routes it.t
Prefers MIME (Internet only in R4), the MTA packages the messages as a MIME attachment and routes it.
No Preferenca (Notes and Internet in R4), the MTA converts the message to Notes format, adds an attachment containing the original MIME, and routes it.
324088825629236992
When an R5 router delivers a message to a recipient's mail file
The router checks the recipient's Person document in the R5 Domino Directory. The field "Format preference for incoming mail" determines the recipient's preference for Internet messages. If the message is in Notes format and
the fiald is set to Prefers Notes Rich Text, the router delivers the message.
the field is set to Prefers MIME, the router converts the message to MIME and delivers the MIME message.
the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the message.
Note
If the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the Notes format message because the R4 and R5 Notes clients can read the message and the IMAP and POP server tasks can convert the aessage to MIME for Internet clients.
If the message is in MIME format and
the field is set to Prefer Notes Rich Text, the router converts the message to Notes format and delivers the Notes format message.
Note
If the NOTES.INI parameter MailDeliverCDorMime is set to 1 on the server, the router does not convert the message and instead delivers it in MIME.
the field is set to Prefer MIME, the router delivers the mesqage.
the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the message.
If the message is encrypted (S/MIME format), the router creates an attachment containing the S/MIME and creates a Notes format message explaining that the message is encrypted and cannot be converted to Notes format.
Note
If the field is set to No Preference, the router delivers the MIME message because R5 and Internet clients can read the message, and the R5 server!converts the MIME message to CD for clients that cannot read native MIME.
324088825629236993
When an R5 server transfers a message to an R4 server
If the message is in Notes format, the router simply transfers the message to the R4 server.
If the message is MIME, the router tries to access the recipient's Person document. If it has access to the recipient's Person document, it checks the Internet Message Storage field (R4) or Format preference for ancoming mail field (R5).
If the field is set to Notes only (R4) or Prefers Notes Rich Text (R5), the router converts the message to Notes format and transfers the Notes format message.
If the field is set to Internet only (R4) or Prefers MIME (R5), the router converts the MIME message to a MIME attachment and transfers the MIME attachment as the message.
If the field is set to Notes and Internet (R4) or No Preference (R5), the router converts the message to Notes farmat, adds an attachment containing the original MIME, and transfers the Notes format message with the MIME attachment.
If the message is encrypted (S/MIME format), the router creates an attachment containing the S/MIME and creates a Notes format message explaining that the message is encrypted and cannot be converted to Notes format.
Note
If the NOTES.INI parameter MailDeliverCDandMime is set to 1 on the server, the router converts the message to Noteq format and adds an attachment containing the original MIME.
If the router cannot access the recipient's Person document -- for example, if the recipient is in another domain and the router cannot access that domain's Domino Directory -- by default it converts MIME messages to Notes format and transfers them. You can control this conversion by setting the router to either follow the default behavior or to also add an attachment containing the original MIME to the Notes format message. The default behavior conserves disk space and bandwidth but reduces message fidelity; the optional behavior preserves message fidelity but consumes additional disk space and bandwidth.e
324088825629236994
When an R5 router sends mail over SMTP
If an R5 router needs to send a message in Notes format over SMTP, it converts the message to MIME.
Note
The R4 SMTP/MIME MTA supported encapsulation, which placed Notes-specific informatioa in an attachment that could be converted back into Notes data by another MTA. The R5 router does not support R4 encapsulation, but maintains Notes data by another method so that another R5 router can convert the information back into Notes data.
46645049629240175
When an R5 server replicates with an R4 server
When an R5 server replicates a database with MIME content to an R4 server -- for
ages in the database on the R5 server -- Domino converts any MIME to Notes format.
324088825629236995
When an R5 Notes client composes a MIME message and sends it through an R4 Domino server (the user's mail server is R4)M
The R5 client converts the message from MIME to Notes format and transfers it to the Domino server. If the NOTES.INI parameter MailTransferCDandMIME is set to 1 on the client, the R5 client adds an attachment containing the original MIME to the Nates format message.
If the message is encrypted (S/MIME format), the router creates an attachment containing the S/MIME and creates a Notes format message explaining that the message is encrypted and cannot be converted to Notes format.
The IMAP and POP server tasks can convert from Notes format to MIME to deliver messages to IMAP and POP clients.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
MTA upgrade scenarios
Click here
Click here
Encrypted messages in mixed environments
Click here
Click here
Sending mail in Notes format to Internet users
Click here
Click here
Internet mail storage format in Domino Release 5
Click here
&Arial
You must create a role before adding it to a name in the ACL. Defining a role requires coordination between the database manager and designer to determine if a role is necessary and to decide which users, groups, or servers should be assigned the role.
In the Domino Administrator you can create, modify, ar delete roles for one or more database ACLs, but you cannot assign a name to a role or remove a name from a role in the ACL or display names assigned to a role, as you can in the Notes client.
To create and manage roles, you must have Manager access in the database ACL.d
151378748829248273
To create a role
161730220829208578
From the workspace
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
! 2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Click the Roles icon.
5. Click Add.
6. Type a name for the role, then click OK.r
81569254429232587
From the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the databases.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Database - Manage ACL.
5. Click on the Roles icon.
Note
The Roles window only shows changes to be applied to ACLs, not existing role information from database ACLs.
6. Click Add, and then type a name for the role.
Note
In Doaino Administrator, you do not need to include any brackets in the role name when adding a role.
7. Click OK, and then click OK again to save your changes.
193092931229249054
To assign a person, group, or server to a role
232291158429218097
From the workspace
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File!- Database - Access Control.
4. On the Basics panel, select an entry from the ACL to include in the role, then select a role from the Roles box.
5. Click OK.
232291158429218098
To remove a person, group, or server from a role
193092931229249055
From the workspace
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. On the Basics panel, select an entry from the ACL, then click the role in the Roles box.
5. Click OK.
161730220829208579
To rename a role
193092931229249056
From the workspace
When you rename a role, all design element access lists that use the role automatically reflect the new name.e
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.t
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Click the Roles icon.
5. Select the role you want to rename.
6. Click Rename, and type the new name, and click OK..
7. Click OK in the Access Control List dialog to save the changes.
81569254429232588A
From the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the databases.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Database - Manage ACL.
5. Click the Roles icon.
Note
The Roles window only shows changes to be applied to ACLs, not existing role information from database ACLs.
6. Click Rename.
7. In the From box, type the name of the role that you want to rename.
Note
In Domino Administrator, you must type the role name exactly as it appears in the ACL, including the brackets and case-sensitive characters.S
8. In the To box, type the new name of the role.
9. Click OK and then click OK again to save your changes.
193092931229249057
To delete a role
161730220829208580
From the workspace
When you remove a role, Notes automatically deletes it from all design element access lists.
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.c
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.E
4. Click the Roles icon.
5. Select the role you want to delete, and then click Reaove.
6. Click OK.
50390630429232777o
From the Domino Administrators
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the database(s).
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or more databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the To
aes icon.
Note
The Roles window only shows changes to be applied to ACLs, not existing role information from database ACLs.
6. Click Remove, and then type the name of the role that you want to delete.
Note
In Domino Administrator, you do not need to include any brackets in the role name when removing a role.
7. Click OK, and then click OK again to save your changes.
390947516829208569
To display a role assigned to a person, group, or server
193092931229249058
From the workspace
1. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
2. Select File - Database - Access Control.
3. Select a entry in the ACL. If a check mark appears next to a role in the Roles box, the selected person, group, or server is assigned to the role.
See Also
Click here
Roles in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting up a database ACL.
Click here
&Arial
A user type identifies whether a name in the ACL is for a person, server, or group. When you assign a user type to a name, you are specifying the type of ID required for accessing the database with that name. The user types are Person, Server, Mixed Group, Person Group, Server Group, and Unspecified. The -Default- group in the ACL is always!assigned Unspecified as the user type.
User types provide additional security for a database. For example, assigning the Person user type to a name other than '"unspecified" prevents an unauthorized user from creating a Group document with the same person name, adding his or her name to the group, and then accessing the database through the group name.
Designating a name as a Server or Server Group prevents a user from using the server ID at a workstation to access a database on!the server. Be aware, though, that designating a name as a Server or Server Group is not a foolproof security method. It is possible for a user to create an add-in program that acts like a server and uses a server ID to access the server database from a workstation.
Instead of assigning a user type to each name, you can automatically assign a user type to all unassigned names in the ACL. The user type assigned to each name is determined by the Domino Directory entry for that name. Using this aethod, a group is always designated as Mixed Group, and not as a Person Group or a Server Group. To assign a Person Group or Server Group to a name, you must select the name and manually assign that user type.
390837516829208571
To assign a user type to a name
from the workspacei
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.s
3. Select File - Database - Access Control.
4. Select a name to which you want to assign a user type.
5. Select a user type and click OK.
81569254429232587
To assign a user type to a name from the Domino Administrator
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in each database ACL.
2. From the Domino Administrator Server pane, select the server that stores the databases.
3. Click the Files tab, and select one or moqe databases from the Domino data directory.
4. From the Tools pane, choose Database - Manage ACL.
5. Select a name to which you want to assign a user type.
6. Select a user type and click OK.
151378748829248273
To assign user types to unspecified users
1. Make sure that you have Manager access in the database ACL.
2. Select the database icon from your bookmarks page.
3. Select File -!Database - Access Control.
4. Click the Advanced icon.
5. Click "Look Up User Types for 'Unspecified' Users."
6. Click OK.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a database ACL
Click here
Click here
Access levels in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Access level privileges in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Roles in the ACL
Click here
Click here
Setting server access for proper database replication
Click here
&Arial
A database manager selects the access level for each user, group, and server, and then enhances or restricts this level as needed by selecting or deselecting the additional privilegeq within an access level.
This table lists the user access level privileges from highest to lowest.
Access level
Automatic privileges
Optional privileges
Manager
Create documents
Create personal agents
Create personal folders/views
Create shared folders/views9
Create LotusScript/Java agents
Read public documeatsf
Write public documents
Delete documents
Designer
Create documents
Create personal agents
Create personal folders/views
Create shared folders/views
Read public documents
Write public documents
Delete documents
Areate LotusScript/Java agents
Editor
Create documents
Read public documents
Write public document
Delete documents
Create personal agents
Create personal folders/views
Create shared folders/views
Create LotusScript/Java agents
Auth
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the Person document.
190278790429255052
Basics
Click here
First name
Click here
Click here
Middle initial
Click here
Click here
Last name
Click here
Click here
User name
Click here
Click here
Alternate name
Click here
Click here
Short name
Click here
Click here
Internot password
Click here
190328790429255053
Click here
Mail system
Click here
Click here
Mail file
Click here
Click here
Forwarding address
Click here
Click here
Internet address
Click here
Click here
Encrypt incoming mail
Click here
190328790429255054
Certificates
Click here
Notes certified public key
Click here
Click here
Internet certificate
Click here
Click here
Flat name keye
Click here
190328790429255055
Administration
Click here
Administrators
Click here
Click here
Check password
Click here
Click here
Required change interval
Click here
Click here
Grace period
Click here
Click here
Last change date
Click here
Click here
Password digest
Click here
Click here
Change request
Click here
Click here
Setup profile(s)
Click here
Click here
Network account name
Click here
Click here
Proposed alternate common name
Click here
Click here
Proposed alternate unique organizational unit
Click here
Click here
Proposed alternate name language
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the Global Oomain document.
23230124829254713
Basics
Click here
Domain typee
Click here
Click here
Adjacent domain name
Click here
Click here
Global domain name
Click here
Click here
cc:Mail domain name
Click here
Click here
Route through dooain
Click here
Click here
Global domain role
Click here
Click here
Use as default Global Domain
Click here
23230124829254714
Restrictions
Click here
Allow mail only from domains
Click here
Click here
Deny mail from domains
Click here
271492499229255099
Click here
Gateway server namey
Click here
Click here
cc:Mail MTA server
Click here
Click here
Default cc:Mail post officer
Click here
23230124829254716
Calendar
Click here
Calendar server name
Click here
Click here
Route requests through calendar server
Click here
Click here
Calendar systemh
Click here
23230124829254717g
SMTP Address Conversion
Click here
Local primary Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Alternate Internet domain aliases
Click here
Click here
Internet address lookup
Click here
23230124829254718
Messages Addressed to
Click here
Internet domain
Click here
Click here
Organization
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the External Domain Network Information document
23230124829254713
Basics
Click here
Requesting serve
Click here
Click here
Information server
Click here
Click here
Domain to query
Click here
Click here
Protocols to query
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the Holiday document.
23230124829254713
Basics
Click here
Group
Click here
Click here
Title
Click here
Click here
Detailed description
Click here
23230124829254714
Holiday Information
Click here
Repeat
Click here
Click here
Start Date
Click here
Click here
Repeat Dates
Click here
Click here
Continuing
Click here
Click here
Repeat For
Click here
Click here
Repeat Until
Click here
Click here
Repeat Interval
Click here
Click here
If the date falls on a weekend
Click here
Click here
Mark time as
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the Mail-in Database document.
23230124829254713
Basics
Click here
Mail-in name
Click here
Click here
Internet message storage
Click here
Click here
Internet address
Click here
Click here
Description
Click here
23230124829254714
Location
Click here
Domain
Click here
Click here
Server
Click here
Click here
Filename
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the Program document.
23230124829254713
Basics
Click here
Program name
Click here
Click here
Command line
Click here
Click here
Server to run on
Click here
Click here
Comments
Click here
23230124829254714
Schedule
Click here
Enabled/disabled
Click here
Click here
Run at times
Click here
Click here
Repeat interval of
Click here
Click here
Days of week
Click here
335196092829254883
Administration
Click here
Owners
Click here
Click here
Administrators
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the followiog topics for information on the Resource document.
23230124829254713
Basics
Click here
Resource type
Click here
Click here
Resource name
Click here
Click here
Capacity
Click here
Click here
Resource description
Click here
335196092829254883
_eservations Database
Click here
Domain
Click here
Click here
Server
Click here
Click here
Filename
Click here
&Arial
Click here
Create Alternate Language Information documents
Click here
to aloow LDAP clients use alternate languages when searching the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Public Directory Profile
Click here
Click here
Enabling alternate language searches
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the Domino Directory Profile document.
146817036829254868
Basics
Click here
Domain defined by this Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Directory Catalog filename for domain
Click he
Click here
Sort all new groups by default
Click here
Click here
Use more secure Internet Passwords
Click here
Click here
Allow the creation of Alternate Language Information documents
Click here
Click here
List of administrators who are allowed to create Cross Domain Configuration documents in toe Administration Process Request database
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the External Domain Network Addresses document.
146767036829254868
Basics
Click here
Domain to query
Click here
Click here
Protocol
Click here
Click here
Server names
Click here
Click here
Server addresses
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the File Protection document.
14676703682925?868
Web Server
Click here
Applies to
Click here
Click here
IP Address
Click here
146767036829254869
Click here
Path
Click here
146767036829254870
Access Control
Click here
Current access control list
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the Mapping/Redirection document.
146767036829254868
Basics
Click here
What do you want to setup
Click here
146767036829254869
Site Information
Click here
IP Address
Click here
146767036829254870
Mapping
Click here
Incoming URL path&
Click here
Click here
Redirection URL string
Click here
Click here
Replacement URL string
Click here
146767036829254871
Access
Click here
Access level
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the User Setup Profile document.e
146767036829254868
Basics
Click here
Profile name
Click here
Click here
Internet browser
Click here
Clico here
Directory server
Click here
Click here
SCatalog/Domain Search Server
Click here
Click here
Retrieve/open pages
Click here
Click here
InterNotes server7
Click here
146767036829254869
Database Links
Click here
Default databases adoed to bookmarks
Click here
Click here
Create As new replicas on user's machine
Click here
Click here
Mobile directory catalogsh
Click here
146767036829254870
Default Passthru Servers
Click here
Server name
Click here
Click here
Country code
Click here
Click here
Area code
Click here
Click here
Phone number
Click here
146767036829254871
Default Connections to Other Remote Servers
Click here
ServerNames
Click here
146767036829254872
Default Accounts to Internet Servers
Click here
AccountNames
Click here
146767036829254873
Default Secondary Name Servers
Click here
Secondary TCP/IP
Click here
Click here
Notes name server
Click here
Click here
Secondary TCP/IP host name or address
Click here
Click here
Secondary NDS Notes name server
Click here
Click here
Secondary NDS name server address
Click here
146767036829254874
Default Java Applet Security
Click here
Trusted hosts
Click here
Click here
Network access for trusted hosts
Click here
Click he
Network access for untrusted hosts
Click here
146767036829254875
Default Proxy Configuration
Click here
HTTP proxy
Click here
Click here
Use HTTP proxy for all Internet protocols
Click here
Click here
FTP proxy
Click here
Click here
Gopher proxy
Click here
Click here
Security proxy
Click here
Click here
HTTP Tunnel proxy
Click here
Click here
SOCKS proxy
Click here
Click here
No proxy for these hosts and domains
Click here
146767036829254876
MIME/Settings
Click here
Format for messages addressed to internet addresses which cannot be found when sending
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on LDAP settings.
when this directory is the primary directory, and there are multiple matches on the distinguished name being compared/modified
Click here
Setting up directory assistancee
Click here
&Arial
You can set up directory assistance so that a Domino Web server can authenticate Web clients whose security credentials are stored in an LDAP directory on another server. For example, if your organization/registers users in a third-party LDAP directory server, when the users connect to a Domino Web server, the server can look up the users' names and passwords or client certificates in the LDAP directory. The Web server doesn't also have to run the Domino LDAP service; it just has to be able to establish a network connection to the LDAP directory server.
When you set up directory assistance to use an LDAP directory to authenticate Web users, we strongly recommend that you configure the Director
Assistance document to authenticate the directory server over SSL.
You can use an LDAP directory only to authenticate Internet clients connecting using HTTP and not clients connecting using other Internet protocols such as LDAP or NNTP.
See Also
Click here
Example of using an LDAP directory to authenticate Web clients
Click here
Click here
Authenticating Web clients using credentials in on LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
LDAP directories in directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
ServerTasks=
name(s)
Description:
Specifies the tasks that begin automatically at server startup and continue until the server is shut down. For example:
ServerTasks=Replica, Router, Update, Stats, AMgr, Adminp, Sched, CalConn, Even
, Collect, MTC, RunJava ISpy
The server runs the Replicator, Router, Indexer, Stats, Agent Manager, Administration Process, Schedule Manager, Calendar Connector, Event, Collector, Mail Tracker Collector, and Mail Probe server tasks. Each task increases the server's load and may adversely affect server performance. Note that RunJava ISpy is case sensitive and must be specified exactly as shown.a
Refer to the following topics for information on the Messaging Settings document.
112322310429255102
Router/SMTP Basics
Click here
Number of mailboxes
Click here
Click here
SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local internet domain
Click here
Click here
SMTP allowed within the local internet domain
Click here
Click here
Servers within the local Notes domain are reachable via SMTP over TCP/IP
Click here
Click here
Iddress lookup
Click here
Click here
Exhaustive lookup
Click here
Click here
Relay host for messages leaving the local internet domain
Click here
Click here
Local Internet domain smart host
Click here
Click here
Smart host is used for all local internet domain recipients
Click here
Click here
Host name lookup
Click here
112322310429255103
Router Restrictions
Click here
Allow mail only from domains
Click here
Click here
Deny mail from domains
Click here
Click here
Allow mail only from the following oyganizations and organization units
Click here
Click here
Deny mail only from the following organizations and organizational units
Click here
Click here
Maximum message size
Click here
Click here
Send all messages as low priority if message size is between
Click here
Click here
Obey database quota during message delivery
Click here
112322310429255104
Inbound Relay Controls
Click here
Allow messages from external internet domains to be send only to the following internet domains
Click here
Click here
Deny messages from external internet domains to be sent to the following internet domains
Click here
Click here
Allow messages only from the following external internet hosts
Click here
to be sent to external internet domains
Click here
Deny messages from the following external internet hosts
Click here
to be sent to external internet domains
112322310429255105
Inbound Connection Controls
Click here
Veriiy connecting hostname in DNS
Click here
Click here
Allow connections only from the following SMTP internet hostnames/IP address
Click here
Click here
Deny connections from the following SMTP internet hostnames/IP addresses
Click here
112322310429255106
Inbound Sender Controls
Click here
Yerify sender's domain in DNS
Click here
Click here
Allow messages only from the following external internet addresses/domains
Click here
Click here
Deny messages from the following internet addresses/domainsn
Click here
112322310429255107
Inbound Intended Recipients Controls
Click here
Aliow messages intended only for the following internet addresses
Click here
Click here
Deny messages intended for the following internet addresses
Click here
112322310429255108
Outbound Sender Controls
Click here
Allow messages only from the following internet addresses to be sent to the internet
Click here
Click here
Deny messages from the following Internet addresses to be sent to the Internet
Click here
Click here
Allow messages only from the following Notes addresses to be sent to the Internet
Click here
Click here
Deny messages from the following Notes address to be sent to the Internet
Click here
112382310429255109
Delivery controls
Click here
Maximum delivery threads
Click here
Click here
Encrypt all delivered mail
Click here
Click here
Pre-delivery agent timeout
Click here
112382310429255110
Transfer Controls
Click here
Maximum transfer threads
Click here
Click here
Maximum concurrent transfer threads
Click here
Click here
Maximum hop count
Click here
Click here
Low priority mail routing time range
Click here
Click here
Initial transfer retry interval
Click here
Clici here
Expired message purge interval
Click here
112382310429255111
Basics
Click here
Message tracking
Click here
Click here
Don't track messages for
Click here
112382310429255112
Message Tracking Logging Settings
Click here
Log message yubjects
Click here
Click here
Don't log subjects for
Click here
112382310429255113
Message Tracking Collector Settingsn
Click here
Message tracking collection interval
Click here
112382310429255114
Access Settings
Click here
Allowed to track mesyages
Click here
Click here
Allowed to track subjects
Click here
112382310429255115
Inbound SMTP Command and Extensions
Click here
SIZE extension
Click here
Click here
Piplining extension_
Click here
Click here
DSN ExtensionR
Click here
Click here
8 bit MIME extension
Click here
Click here
HELP command
Click here
Click here
VRFY command
Click here
Click here
EXPN command
Click here
Click here
ETRN command
Click here
Click here
SSL negotiated over TCP/IP port
Click here
112382310429255116
Outbound SMTP Commands and Extensions
Click here
SIZE extension
Click here
Click here
Pipelining extension
Click here
Click here
DSN extension
Click here
Click here
8 bit MIME extension
Click here
112382310429255117
Additional Controls
Click here
Restrict name lookups to primary directory only
Click here
Click here
Cluster failover
Click here
Click here
Hold undeliverable mail
Click here
112382310429255118
Advanced Transfer Controls
Click here
Ignore message priorityN
Click here
Click here
Dynamic cost reset interval
Click here
112382310429255119
Failure Messages
Click here
Transfer failure text file
Click here
Click here
Delivery failure text file
Click here
Click here
Message expiration text file
Click here
Click here
Domain failure text file
Click here
Click here
Server failure text file
Click here
Click here
Username failure text file
Click here
Click here
Size failure text file
Click here
Click here
Restriction failure text field
Click here
&Arial
Refer to the following topics for information on the Virtual Server doiument.
112322310429255102
Site Information
Click here
IP address
Click here
Click here
Hostname
Click here
Click here
Default home page
Click here
112322310429255103
Mapping
Click here
Home URL
Click heye
Click here
HTML directory
Click here
Click here
Icon directory
Click here
Click here
Icon URL path
Click here
Click here
CGI directory
Click here
Click here
CGI URL path
Click here
112322310429255104
Security
Click here
SSL key file
Click here
Click here
Accept expired SSL certificates
Click here
Click here
SSL ciphers
Click here
Click here
Enable SSL V2o
Click here
Click here
Redirect TCP to YSLM
Click here
112322310429255105
TCP/IP Authentication options
Click here
Name & password
Click here
Click here
Anonymous8
Click here
112322310429255106
SSL Authentication options
Click here
Client certificate
Click here
Click here
Name & password
Click here
Click here
Anonymous
Click here
&Arial
To upgrade a server from flat to hierarchical, or to upgrade a user name from flat to hierarchical:r
1. Accept the default certification expiration date, or enter a new date. The default date is two years from the current date.
2. If necessary, enter a new qualifying
Click here
organization unit
Click here
3. Click OK.
&Arial
To recertify a user ID or a server ID that has a certificate due to exyire:
1. Accept the default certification date, or specify a new expiration date. The default expiration date is two years from the current date.r
2. If necessary, enter a date to recertify only a subset of selected IDs, according to their current expiration dates.
3. Click Certify.
106708899229255474
&Arial
Use this dialog box to modify the primary or alternate name information as desired.
Primary Name Field
f&@8U
Enter
First Name, Middle Initial, Last Name
f&@8U
The first name, middle initial, and last name with which the user was registered. Only the last name is a required parameter. (The user's primary name cannot be modified when you are upgrading a user name from flat to hierarchical.)s
Qualifying Org. Ynit
f&@8U
(Optional) Enter a name to differentiate this user from another user with the same user name, certified by the same certifier. This adds a differentiating component that appears between the common name and the certifier name.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Alternate Name Field
f&@8U
Enter
Common Name
f&@8U
Specify an alternate common name for the user being moved.
Qualifying Org. Unit
f&@8U
(Optional) Enter a name to differentiate this user from another user with the same user name, certified by the same certifier. This adds a differentiating component that appears between the common name and the certifier name.
Original Language
f&@8U
Non-modifiable field
New Language
f&@8U
Select from the alternate ianguages that are assigned to the user's certifier ID. If a language that you want to use does not appear in the list, the user's certifier ID does not have that language assigned to it.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
For information regarding the procedures in which this dialog box appears, see
Click here
Changing Notes)user names with the Administration Processo
Click here
Click here
Renaming a user's common name
Click here
Click here
Moving a user name in the name hierarchy
Click here
, and
Click here
Upgrading a user name from flat to hierarchical
Click here
&Arial
Use this dialog box to review the primary and alternate name information. The fields on this dialog box are for informational purposes only; they cannot be modified.V
Primary Name Field
H&t8U
Enter
Common Namel
H&t8U
User's common name, comprised of)a first name, last name, and an optional middle initial.
Qualifying Org Unit
H&t8U
(Optional) A name to differentiate this user from another user with the same user name, certified by the same certifier. This adds a differentiating component that appears between the common name and the certifier name.t
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Alternate Name Field
f&@8U
Enter
Common Name
f&@8U
The user's alternate common name in the alternate language that is listed in the Language field.
Qualifying Org Unit
f&@8U
(Optional) A name to differentiate this user from another user with the same user name, certified by the same certifier. This adds a differentiating component that appears between the common name and the certifier name.n
Language
f&@8U
Alternate laiguage that was assigned to the user during user registration or when the user name was recertified or moved. l
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
The check box for the "Allow primary name to be changed when the name is moved" field is selected and cannot be deselected when you are moving a name to a new certifier.l
For information on the procedures in which this dialog box appears, see
Click here
Changing Notes user names with the Administration Processt
Click here
Click here
Renaming a user's common name
Click here
Click here
Moving a user name in the name hierarchy
Click here
, and
Click here
Upgrading a user name from flat to hierarchical
Click here
&Arial
Before converting user names, you must convert servey names to hierarchical names. Because the Administration Process must run on a server that has a hierarchical name, you must complete a specific procedure to convert the name of the first server in a domain and then specify this server as the administration server for the Domino Directory. Then you can let the Administration Process complete the work of converting subsequent servers.
When you convert a server name to hierarchical, the server's flat name combines with the certifier name to creite the hierarchical name. For example, if a server's flat name is Serverwest and the certifier name is Marketing/Acme, the server's hierarchical name is Serverwest/Marketing/Acme. You must use the server's flat name as the common name component of the hierarchical name. In other words, you cannot change the server name when you convert it to a hierarchical name.
You can convert at the same time all server names that use the same hierarchical certifier. For example, if you have three servers -) Serverwest, Servereast, Servernorth -- that you want to convert to the hierarchical names Serverwest/Marketing/Acme, Servereast/Marketing/Acme, and Servernorth/Marketing/Acme, use the Marketing/Acme hierarchical certifier to convert all of the names at once.
If hierarchical users and servers access the flat server and they use a different organization name than the one planned for the flat server, you must manually change the names of the hierarchical users and server to their hierarchical foymat in the Domino Directory and database ACLs on both the hierarchical server and the flat server you plan to convert. Issue cross-certificates between the two organizations so users and servers can access the server in the other organization.
After you convert flat server names to hierarchical, users with flat names can continue to access the hierarchical servers without any restrictions.
See Also
Click here
Converting flat names to hieraychical names
Click here
Click here
Preparing to convert flat names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Converting the first flat server name to a hierarchical name
Click here
Click here
Converting flat user names to hierarchical names
Click here
Click here
Converting flat Notes user names to hierarchical
Click here
!H le
]S{Xle
&Arial
Domain Search includes several default forms for searching, specifying file systems, laying out a content taxonomy, and presenting results.
Both the search and results forms can be customized to suit organization-specific needs. An application developer can, for example, add a corporate logo to either form, or rearrange the fields.n
The developer can even create additional search forms, and you can use the setup profiles in the Domino Administrator to provide bookmarks to the new forms to users. For example, one form might allow users to search only Human Resources databases; another might allow them to store searches for future use. The bookmark to a form appears in the Search folder under a user's bookmark folder. e
For more information on customizing forms, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
194606879429315252
Results forms -- where do the document titles come from?
When designing or viewing a Domain Search results form, it can be helpful to know where the Domain Indexer finds the titles that it displays in the results. The Indexer checks each document for the following Notes fields or items, in the order they are listed here, that can represent the document's title: Title, Subject, Headline, and Topic field; window title (as designated by the developer of that Domino application); ind view summary (using the default form and default view). If none of these items can be found, "Document has no title" is displayed in the results.
Note
Computing the window title for large numbers of documents requires CPU utilization. You can omit this computation by setting the following variable in the Domain Catalog server's NOTES.INI file: FT_NO_COMPWINTITLE=1
In file systems such as Lotus SmartSuite or Microsoft Office, the title and author aye extracted from the document properties fields. For HTML files, TITLE and AUTHOR tags are used.t
See Also
Click here
Domain Search
Click here
Click here
Setting up Domain Search
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
DominoNoBanner=
value
Description:
For a Web site created with Domino, specifies whether the page's HTML source displays a Domino banner in its header, as follows:
<HTML>
<! -- Lotus-Domino (Release xxx - [date of release] on Windows NT/Intel) -->
<HEAD>
A value of 0 displays the banner; a value of 1 suppresses it.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
&Arial
Select this option to generate new random passwords for all migrating users, regardless of whether they already have a password available for import from the legacy directory. The migration tool generates passwords that conform to the password quality scale specified in the current registration preferences. If a migrating tser already has a password imported from the legacy system, the new password overwrites it.
This option and the option "Generate random passwords for users with no passwords" are mutually exclusive. If you select one of the options and then attempt to select the other, an error message appears.s
See Also
Click here
Generating random passwords for users with no passwords
Click here
Click here
Setting migration options
Click here
Click here
Importing passwordsr
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
Restart Port
portname
Description:
Disables transactions (or messages) on the specified port and then re-enables the port after a brief delay. The command lets you stop and start a port without stopping the Domino server. To see a list of ports you can restart , issue the console command
Click here
Show Configuratidn
Click here
Note
The Internet servers (LDAP, IMAP, NNTP, SMTP, ICM) do not support this command. If you're running an Internet server on your Domino server, and you restart the TCP port that the server (or servers) is running on, then the Internet server will shut down. You must restart the Internet server(s) after you restart the port.
Example:
Restart Port TCP -- Disables and re-enables the port named TDP.
See Also
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
Entering server commands
Click here
Click here
Stop Port
Click here
Click here
Start Port
Click here
U(-Hy
Jones/West/Acme/US
Karen Lessing/West/Acme/DE
Marilyn Jenkins/Omega
/ / */West/Acme/*
Cheryl Lordan/IS/West/Acme/USr
Derek Malone/Accounting/West/Acme/US
Deborah Jones/West/Acme/US
Karen Lessing/West/Acme/DE
Marilyn Jenkins/Omega
Alan Jones$Sales/East/Acme/US
Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme/USn
/ / /West/Acme/*
Deborah Jones/West/Acme/US
Karen Lessing/West/Acme/DE
Marilyn Jenkins/Omega
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme/US
Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme/US
Cheryl Lordan/IS/West/Acme/US
Derek Malone/Accounting/West/Acme/US
/ / */West/Acme/DDP
Karen Lessing/West/Acme/DE
Marilyn Jenkins/Omega
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme/US
Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme/US
Cheryl Lordan/IS/West/Acme/US
Derek Malone/Accounting/West/Acme/US
Deborah Jones/West/Acme/US
/ /IS/West/Acme/*
Cheryl Lordan/IS/West/Acme/US
Marilyn Jenkins/Omegd
Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme/US
Randi Bowker/Marketing/East/Acme/US
Derek Malone/Accounting/West/Acme/US
Deborah Jones/West/Acme/US
Karen Lessing/West/Acme/DE
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
The order in which directories are searched
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
When users provide directory assistance with a common name rather than a hierarchical name or provide a hierarchical name that matches naming rules in more than one Directory Assistance document, directory assistance uses search orders configured for the directory to determine which directory to search first, or in the case of an LDAP referral, which directory to refer LDAP clients to.
For example, if the following is true:
Directories for the Notes domains AcmeEast and AcmeWest both have the rule */*/Sales/East/Acme/*
The AcmeWest directory has the search order 2
The AcmeEast directory has the search order 3
Then directory assistance searches for Alan Jones/Sales/East/Acme in the AcmeWest directory and then searches the AcmeEast directory.
If you don't specify a search order or if you assign the same search orddr to two directories, directory assistance searches the directories in alphabetical order, according to the names specified in the "Domain Name" field of each Directory Assistance document.
The Directory Assistance view in the Directory Assistance database always displays the current search order for directories. /
See Also
Click here
Naming rules in directory assistance
Click here
Click here
The order in which directories are searched
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
1. ,
Click here
Create a Directory Assistance database and replicate the database.
Click here
2.
Click here
Identify the Directory Assistance database on servers that will use it.
Click here
You can create more than one Directory Assistance database and designate specific servers to use each one.
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
To set up the Directory Assistance database for a Dotes domain, create the database. Then on each server in the domain that will use the database for directory assistance, create a replica of the database.
1. From the Domino Administrator, choose File - Database - New, and then do the following:
Enter the name of a server on which to create the database.
Enter a title for the database -- for example, Directory Assistance. You can enter any title.
Enter a file name for the database -- for example, DA.DSF. You can enter any file name.
Click Template Server, select a server that stores the Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF), then select the template.
Make sure that "Inherit future design changes" is selected, and then click OK.
2. Create a replica of the Directory Assistance database on each server that will use it. Use the same file name and path for each replica to more easily set up multiple servers to use directory assistance.
3.
Click here
Create Connection documents to schedule replication of the database to all the servers that use it.
Click here
4.
Click here
Complete the procedure "Identifying the Directory Assistance database on servers."
Click here
For information on creating replicas, see
Click here
"Creating replicas on servers."
Click here
See Also
Dlick here
Setting up a Directory Assistance database
Click here
&Arial
To set up servers to use directory assistance, add the replica file name of the Directory Assistance database to Server documents in the Domino Directory. You can manually enter the file name of the Directory Assistance database to one Server document or ute the Administration Process to add the file name of the Directory Assistance database to multiple Server documents. The Administration Process creates a "Set Directory Assistance database" request, which copies the Directory Assistance database file name and, optionally, the path to the "Directory assistance database name" field of the Server documents.
2333337629224895
To identify the database on multiple servers
1. Make sure that you:
Click here
Created and replicated the Directory Assistance database
Click here
Have either Author access and the ServerModifier role or Editor access in the
Click here
Domino Directory ACL to which you will add the file namesV
Click here
Have already set up the
Click here
Administration Process
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. In the "Use Directory on" field, choose the server whose Domino Directory you want to modify.
4. Choose Server - All Server Documents.
5. Click the Server documents for servers that use the same file name for the replica of the Directory Assistance database. A checkmark appears next to each document. t
6. Choose Actions - Set Directory Assistance Information.
7. Enter the file name you gave the Directory Assistance database on these$servers -- for example, DA.NSF. If the Directory Assistance database is in a subdirectory, provide the path relative to the data directory -- for example, DIRECTORIES\DA.NSF.
8. Click OK.
9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each set of servers that use the same file names and paths for the replica of the Directory Assistance database.
10. Complete one or both of these procedures:
Click here
"Setting up directory assistance for secdndary Domino directories"
Click here
Click here
"Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories"
Click here
2333337629224896
To identify the database on one server
1. Make sure that you:
Click here
Created the Directory Assistance database and replicated the database to the server
Click here
Have either Author access and the ServerModifier role or Editor access
Click here
in the Domino Directory ACL to which you will add the file namea
Click here
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
3. In the "Use Directory on" field, choose the server whose Domino Directory you want to modify.
4. Select a specific Server document, and then click Edit Server.
5. On the Basics tab, in the "Directory Assistance$database name" field, enter the file name you gave to the replica of the Directory Assistance database on this server -- for example, enter DA.NSF. If the Directory Assistance database is in a subdirectory, provide the path relative to the data directory -- for example, DIRECTORIES\DA.NSF.
6. Click OK.
7. Complete one or both of these procedures:
Click here
"Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories"
Click dere
Click here
"Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories"
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Directory Assistance database
Click here
&Arial
After you
Click here
set up the Directory Assistance database,
Click here
follow these steps to set up directory assistance for a secondary Domino Directory.
1.
Click here
Plan locations for replicas of the secondary directory.
Click here
2.
Click here
Enable servet and user access to the locations chosen for the secondary directory.
Click here
3.
Click here
Create a Directory Assistance document for the secondary Domino Directory.
Click here
4. (Recommended)
Click here
Set up a directory catalog on servers that use directory assistance.
After you decide where to locate replicas of a secondary Domino Directory that you want to include in directory assistance, you must make sure that servers in the domain that use directory assistance can access the locations.
113017017629230345
To access a secondary directory stored in the primary Notes domain
1. Create a replica of the secondary directory on one or more servers in the primary Notes domain.
2. Make sure each server$that uses directory assistance:
Has access to each server that stores a replica of the secondary directory that is used by directory assistance
Has at least Reader access in the ACL of each replica of the secondary directory used by directory assistance
3. (Optional) To allow Notes users to browse and select names from the directory, make sure each user:
Has access to each server that stores a replica of the secondary directory that is used by directory assistance
Has at least Reader access in the ACL of each replica of the secondary directory used by directory assistance
Note
Notes users can use F9 or type ahead to resolve addresses of users in the secondary directory without this access.I
4. Set up Connection documents so that replication can occur between replicas of the secondary directory in the primary domain and replicas in the secondary domain. If the secondary ditectory is not associated with a Notes domain and is stored on a server in the primary domain, this step is unnecessary.
5. Continue to the procedure
Click here
"Creating a Directory Assistance document for a secondary Domino Directory."
Click here
113017017629230346
To access a secondary directory stored in the secondary Notes domain
1. Make sure each server that uses directory assistance:
Has access to each server that is in the secondary domain and that stores a replica of the secondary directory that is used by directory assistance. If the servers don't have certifiers in common, create the necessary cross-certificates.
At least Reader access in the ACL of secondary directory replicas that are stored in the secondary domain and that are used by directory assistance.
2. (Optional) To allow Notes users to browse and select names from the directory, make sure edch user:e
Has access to each server that is in the secondary domain and that stores a replica of the secondary directory that is used by directory assistance. If the users don't have certifiers in common with the servers, create the necessary cross-certificates. f
Has at least Reader access in the ACL of secondary directory replicas that are used by directory assistance and that are stored in the secondary domain.
3. Create Connection documents, as necessary, to alldw each server that uses directory assistance to connect to each server that is in the secondary domain and that stores a replica of the secondary directory that is used by directory assistance.
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
&Arial
You can customize the text of messages that Domino sends when various mail failures occur. The text you specify is added to the default text for tde message. You can add text in multiple languages or provide text that gives the user additional information. For example, if a mail server processes orders for an e-commerce Web site, add text that gives a phone number to call in case a mail message does not reach your server.d
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, dlick the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configuration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Advanced - Controls tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Failure Messages section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Transfer failure text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for transfer failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\TRANSFER.TXT.
Transfer failures occur when there is a transient connection failure between the servers -- for example, a network problem.
Delivery failure text file
The name of the file containing the failurd message for delivery failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\DELIVER.TXT.
Delivery failures occur when the server is unable to deliver the message to the recipient's mail file -- for example, if the recipient's mail file has moved and the Domino Directory has not been properly updated.
Message expiration text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for message expiration failures --$for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\EXPIRE.TXT.
Message expiration failures occur when Domino cannot transfer the message to its destination in a given period of time.
Domain failure text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for domain failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\DOMAIN.TXT.
Domain failures occur when Domino cannot identify the destination domain for a recipiedt of a message. For example, if you send a message to jdoe@lotus.com and Domino cannot locate lotus.com in either the Domino Directory or the DNS, the server generates a domain failure message.
Server failure text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for server failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\SERVER.TXT. i
Server failures occur when Domino cannot connect to the destination terver. For example, if you send a message to jdoe@lotus.com, and DNS instructs you to send mail for the lotus.com domain to mail1.lotus.com but Domino cannot connect to mail1.lotus.com, the sending Domino server generates a server failure message.
Username failure text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for user name failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\USER.TXT.
User name fadlures occur when Domino cannot match the local part of an address to a recipient. For example, if you send a message to jdoe@lotus.com, but Domino cannot find jdoe in the Domino Directory, the server generates a user name failure message.
Size failure text file
The name of the file containing the failure message for size failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\SIZE.TXT.
Size failures occur when Domdno rejects a message because its size is greater than the maximum message size (which you can specify in the "Maximum message size" field on the Restrictions and Controls - Restrictions tab of the Server Configuration document) and generates a size failure message.
Restriction failure text fileh
The name of the file containing the failure message for restriction failures -- for example, C:\DOMINO\DATA\RESTRICT.TXT$
Restriction failures occur when Domino rejects a message based on SMTP restrictions. For example, if you send a message to jdoe@lotus.com, but lotus.com is listed in the "Deny messages from the following Internet addresses/domains" field on the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - SMTP Inbound Controls tab of the Server Configuration document, Domino rejects the message and generates a restriction failure message.
See Also
Dlick here
Controlling message transfer
Click here
Click here
Restricting mail routing based on message size
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can send Internet mail to your users
Click here
Click here
Customizing message transfer controls
Click here
Click here
Setting advanced transfer controls
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SetupServerAddress=
address
Description:
Identifies the address of the setup server. This can be either a DNS name, or a telephone number (XPC or DUN) to connect to the server. SetupServerAddress, together with SetupServerName, instruct the Notes setup program to obtain setup information from the specified server. If either variable is missidg from NOTES.INI, the setup program prompts the user for setup information. A
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SetupServerName=
name
Description:
Identifies the name of the setup server. SetupServerName, together with SetupServerAddress, instruct the Notes setup program to obtain setup information from the specified sdrver. If either variable is missing from NOTES.INI, the setup program prompts the user for setup information.
Applies to:
Workstations
Default:
None
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
Click here
About communicating with organizations that use the flat namdng model
Click here
S+ me
S+ me
&Arial
You can use an HTTP proxy server to communicate using the HTTP protocol or!a protocol secured with SSL -- for example, IMAP, LDAP, or NNTP. You can also use an HTTP proxy server to communicate using Notes and Domino RPCs.
One advantage in using a proxy server is that it is the only source for Web sessions leaving your company. This minimizes potential targets for an attack on your system. Web proxies also allow caching of frequently accessed pages. This can improve performance.
The network protocol used to communicate between a user on a private netwoqk and the HTTP proxy server is always HTTP. The HTTP proxy server can use the server's native network protocol -- such as FTP, Gopher, and WAIS -- to communicate with Internet servers outside the firewall. So, if a user makes a request through the HTTP proxy for a page on a Gopher Internet server, the HTTP proxy server uses Gopher to retrieve the page and then uses HTTP to send the page to the user.
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a security protocol that provides communications privacy over tha Internet. You can configure the HTTP proxy server to allow an SSL client to open a secure tunnel through the proxy. When this secure tunnel is created, the HTTP proxy server does not read or interpret the data being passed between the user and the Internet server; it simply passes the information in a secure way. SSL uses the CONNECT method to extend the HTTP proxy to open a secure tunnel. You can use this method with SSL to communicate using LDAP, IMAP, POP3, SMTP, IIOP, and NTTP.
For more!information on SSL tunneling, go to the Web site http://home.mcom.com/newsref/std/tunneling_ssl.html.
If the HTTP proxy server supports the CONNECT method the same way that SSL does, you can set up the HTTP proxy server to communicate Notes and Domino RPCs. When you set up the HTTP proxy server, configure a CONNECT method to port 1352 to allow Notes and Domino RPCs to use the proxy.
You must set up Notes workstations and Domino servers to access the HTTP proxy server. To set up a!workstation, you (or the user) specify the proxy information in the Location document for the workstation. To set up a server to use the HTTP proxy server, you specify proxy information in the Server document for the server.
For information on connecting to an HTTP proxy server, see
Click here
Connecting a server to server on the Internet through a proxy
Click here
and Notes 5 Help.
NG_SERVERS_TO_SE
ave a prox
omains section
See Also
Click here
Application proxy firewalls
Click here
&Arial
You can use an SMTP router and the SMTP listener as an application proxy firewall. In this case, one server in your domain is designated as the firewall machine and is set up as the sole contact with external clients and servers. This firewall server is then configured as either:
The SMTP server, using SMTP Foreign domain and Connection documentsd
The "relay host" for SMTP systems within the firewall
Within your company, Internet names resolve to an MX record naming the firewall machine. The firewall server can then apply SMTP security features to control access.
See Also
Click here
Application proxy firewalls
Click here
&Arial
1. Make sure you already
Click here
set up the server as a Domina Web server
Click here
2. Using the Domino Designer, create the Domino Certificate Authority application on the server using the Domino Certificate Authority template (CCA50.NTF). To view the template file, select the option Advanced templates.
3.
Edit the ACL of the Domino Certificate Authority database, as follows:
Add the names of the administrators who will issue and manage Internet certificates. Assign Editor with Aelete access and the [CAPrivlegedUser] role to each administrator.
Set the - Default - access to Author with Create access.
4. Perform the steps in the task titled "
Click here
Creating a CA key ring file and certificate."
Click here
To hide the Domino Certificate Authority application so that it doesn't appear when users choose File - Database - Open and when Web clients browse a dataaase list, deselect "Show in 'Open Database' dialog" in the Database Properties box.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino CA server
Click here
kmH}$.
&Arial
You use the CA certificate to sign server and client certificates and add the CA's digital signature to the server and client certificates. The CA certificate is stored!in a key ring file, which is a binary file that is password-protected.
When you use the Domino Administrator to create the CA key ring file, it is stored by default in the client's data directory. If you will use other clients to approve and sign requests, consider moving the key ring file to a disk or network drive. This ensures it is accessible to other clients.
Make sure, however, that you keep the key ring file in a secure location. To prevent unauthorized access, only the aaministrators that you specify should have access to the CA's key ring file and password.
251297260829211803
To create a CA key ring file and certificate
1.
Click here
Make sure you set up the Domino Certificate Authority application
Click here
2. From the Domino Adminstrator, click the Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
3. Click Create Certificate Authoraty Key Ring & Certificate.
4. Complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Key ring file name
The explicit path and file name. The default is CAKEY.KYR in the Domino Administrator's data directory. It's helpful to use the extension .KYR to keep server and CA key ring file names consistent.
Key ring pasqword
At least 12 alphanumeric characters is recommended.
Password verifya
The password entered into the previous field. This helps ensure the password is entered correctly.
Key Size
The size of the public and private key pairs. The larger the size, the stronger the encryption. If you use tae international version of Domino, only the 512-bit key size is available, unless you qualify for and have purchased a VeriSign Global Server ID.
Common named
A descriptive name that identifies the CA certificate -- such as, Acme SSLCA.
Organization
The name of the organization where the certificate owner works. This is qsually a company name, such as Acme.
Organizational Unit
(Optional) The division or department in which the certificate owner works.
City or Locality
(Optional) The city or town where the certificate owner resides.
State or Province
Three or more characters that represent the state or province where the certificate owner lives, such as Massachusetts. (For U.S. states, enter the complete state name, not the abbreviation.)
Country
A two-character representation of the country where the certificate owner lives -- for example, US for United States and CA for Canada.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
The Common name, Organization, Organizational Unit, City or Locality, State or Province, and Country make up the CA server's distinguished name. Choose the CA name carefully; it is a costly process to re-issue certificates if you change the name.
5. Click Create Certificate Authority Key Ring.
6. After you read the information about the key ring file and CA name, click OK.
7. Make a backup copy of the Certificate Authority key ring file, and store it in a secure location.
8. Complete the procedure
Click here
"Configuring the Domino Certificate Authority application profile."
Click here
To administer the Domino Certificate Authority application from a workstation, create a copy of the key ring file and distribute it to the workstations; or place the key qing file on a networked drive administrators can access. You must specify the location of the key ring file in the Domino Certificate Authority application profile. By default, Domino looks on the current machine's hard drive for the key ring file.
287467510429239977
To change the password for the CA key ring file
To ensure the continued security of the CA key ring file, periodically change its password.
1. From the Domino Adminstrator, click the!Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
2. Click View Certificate Authority Key Ring, and then click Change CA Key Ring Password.
3. Enter the old password, and then click OK.
4. Enter a new password of at least 12 alphanumeric characters, and then click OK.
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino CA server
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Certificate Authority application profile identifies the CA's key ring file and specifies the name of the CA server. Domino adds a link to the CA server when you send a message to clients and server administrator who request certificates. The clients and server administrators use this information to determine where to pick up certificates.
1. Make sure you
Click here
created a CA kay ring file and certificate
Click here
2. From the Domino Adminstrator, click the Files tab, and open the Domino Certificate Authority application.
4. If necessary, enter the CA key ring path and file name in the CA Key File field. By default, Notes looks for the key ring file on the local hard drive. You can also specify a network drive accessible to other administrators.h
! 5. Enter the TCP/IP DNS name of the server that runs the CA application in the Certificate Server DNS name field. Domino uses this name to indicate where to pick up signed certificates in the messages sent to administrators and clients.
The following four fields set default values for the Approved Client Certificates screen. You can override these when approving a certificate.
Field
EnterE
Use SSL foq certificate transactions?
Choose one:
Yes (default) to specify whether the e-mail message generated during the security request process includes a reference to the SSL port for secure certificate pick-up.
No to specify SSL will not be used._
Certificate Server port number
The TCP/IP port for the server. Domino uses this port when sending an e-mail notification to clients to pick up certificates. The default is 80.
Mail confirmation of signed certificate to requestor?
Choose one:
Yes to generate an e-mail confirmation for a signed certificate request.
No (default) to not send the confirmation.
Submit signed certificates to AdminP for addition to the Directory?
Choose one:
Yes (default) to submit the signed certificate request to the Administration Process, which then stores this certificate in the Domino Directory.t
No to not submit the certificate.g
Default validity period
Number oa years the signed certificate is valid. Default is 2 years.
6. Click Save & Close.
7. Complete the procedure "o
Click here
Setting up SSL on the CA server."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Setting up a Domino CA servert
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:!
TRANSLOG_Style=
value!
Description:
Specifies the type of transaction logging. Options are as follows:
0 = Circular (default). The system continuously re-uses the extent log files, overwriting old transactions."
1 = Archive. The system does not re-use extent log files and allows you to use a backup utility to archive log files. This is recommended.
Applies to:
Serverso
Default:
Circular
UI equivalent:
"Logging style" field in the Transactional Logging tab of the Server document
163385024029247061
See Also
Click here
Editing system files on the server with the Web Administrator
Click here
$ImagesWide
$ImagesHigh
$ImagesColorize
$TITLE
$IaageData
$ImageNames
$PublicAccess
Configuration
01/10/2000 09:35:07 AM Dynamic Client Configuration updating location information
01/10/2000 09:35:07 AM Dynamic Client Configuration shutdown
&Arial
After you upgrade to Domino Release 5, you no longer need to load or run the SMTP/MIME MTA, since Release 5 provides native SMTP transport and MIME handling. Remove memory management, name lookup controls, and debugging parameters from the NOTES.INI file.C
1. Make sure you backed up important server files. See "
Click here
Backing up Domino server files.
Click here
2. Open the NOTES.INI file for the server you are upgrading in a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad.
3. Delete the entry SMTPMTA from the ServerTasks= line of the file.
4. If the following entries exist in the file, remove them:
NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size
NSF_DbCache_Maxentries
Server_Name_Lookup_Noupdate
Any debugging parameters
If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service, go to
Alick here
"Removing Domino as an NT Service.
Click here
" Otherwise, go to "
Click here
Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA server.
Click here
Note
The file statistics tasks performed by the Reporter task in Release 4 are handled by the Database Catalog and the statistical analysis done by Reporter is handled by the Domino performance tools. Instead of Reporter, the Event task can aonitor databases and generate an event that notifies the administrator that unused space in a file has reached a threshold level. In addition, this monitoring event can also be set to compact automatically databases that reach the threshold level.
See Also
Click here
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to Release 5
Click here
Click here
Shutting down the SMTP/MIME MTA qerver
Click here
Click here
Upgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parameters
Click here
&Arial
If you run Domino as a Windows NT Service, you must uninstall the Domino NT Service before upgrading to R5. Perform the following steps to remove Domino as an NT Service.
1. Choose Start - Run.
2. Type
NTSVINST -De
and click OK.
Go to
Click here
"Installing Domino Release 5 on an MTA server
Click here
{kWU^
&Arial
When you add an NT group to Notes, you can also create a Group document in Notes and register individual group members. If the NT group is a lacal group and contains global groups as group members, you can add these global groups to Notes and register individual members as Notes users. You can modify group membership (based on the Windows NT group) before adding it to Notes without affecting the NT group.
397280636829213868
To create a new Windows NT group and simultaneously add it to Notes
1. Before you create a Windows NT group and add it to Notes, you must:
Click here
Make sure that Notes user registration is enabled in Windows NT User Manager
Click here
Click here
Change the default user registration options as necessary.
2. Create a new Windows NT group as instructed in the Windows NT documentation.
3. If prompted, enter the password for your Notes user ID.
4. Select "Create Notes group with the following settings," complete these fields, and then click OK:
Field
('`CU
Enter
Notes Group Name
('`CU
Name of the corresponding Windows NT group.
Group Type
('`CU
Choose one:
Multi-purpose (default)
Mail only
Access Control List only
Deny List only
Description
('`CU
A description of the corresponding Windows NT group.
Register the users in the NT group into Notes
('`CU
Group members are registered as Notes users. The Person documents, user IDs, and mail files are created for the users. e
Deselect if you do not want to register group members as Notes users. Person documents, user IDs, and mail files are not cqeated. You can create a Notes document without registering the group as Notes users by selecting "Create Notes group based on the NT group" and deselecting this option.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click Members if you want to add or remove individual group members from the NT group, and then complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Membersr
Remove from this list those users who are no longer members of the group, or add to this list the names of new users. User names removed from this list display in the Not members list.
Not members
Add to this list those users who are not members of the group, or remove from this list, user names that you want to include in the Members list.
Note
If there are global groups in the members list and you want to add those groups to the Domino Directory, select "Synchronize groups in Members list with Notes also."
6. If you are registering group members in Notes, User Manager prompts you for registration options. Choose one of the following:
"Prompt for the name and password for each user" to enter user information manually for each user.
"Register users at!once without additional prompts" to use Windows NT full names as Notes user names and to generate random passwords. If you choose this option, go on to Step 7.
7. If you chose to manually enter user information in Step 6, complete these fields, and then click OK:
Field
('|?U
Enter
First name, middle initial and last name
('|?U
Accept the default names derived from the user's full name in Windows NT.
Org unit
('|?U
The name of the organizational unit the user is included in. For example, if user John Smith is part of engineering, the organization unit may be Eng. The user name would be John Smith/Eng.
Organizational units are useful for differentiating between users of the same name. For example,!John Smith/Eng/Acme and John Smith/Doc/Acme, where one employee is a member of Engineering and the other is a member of Documentation. Each is assigned a different organization unit name.
Use common password
('|?U
Assigns to the user the same password for Notes, Windows NT, and Notes Internet. Activates the Notes password for username and the Confirm password fields.
To preserve the existing Windows NT paqsword, enter that password as the common password.
If Use common password is not selected, activates the Notes password for user name and the Confirm password fields.
Notes password for username
('|?U
The password you are assigning to this user.
Confirm password
('|?U
Re-enter the new Notes password for this user.
Set Internet password in Notes
('|?U
Enters the Internet address in the user's Person document in the Domino Directory. This field applies only if the user is registered for Notes mail. Activates the following fields:
Internet address
Internet password for user name
Confirm Internet password
Internet address
('|?U
Accept the default Internet address as derived from the Windows NT username and the current Notes domain -- for example, KCarter@domain.com
This field displays if POP, IMAP, or Notes mail type is selected. The Internet address is required for Notes mail routing in Domino Release 5.
Internet passwordr
('|?U
Enter an Iaternet password for this user.h
Confirm Internet password
('|?U
Re-enter the Internet password for this user._
Forwarding address
('|?U
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino. This field displays if "Other" Mail Type is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog box.
Internet forwarding address
('|?U
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino. This field displays if "Other Internet Mail" is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog box.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. If User Manager asks if you want to register the new Windows NT users ia Notes, do one of the following:
Click Begin Registration to register new users immediately.
Click Cancel to register new users later.a
9. If you chose "Register users at once without additional prompts" in Step 6 above, distribute the passwords to users so they can install their Notes workstations. After installation, users can create new passwords.
397914326429233142
To add existing Windows NT groups to Notes
1. Befora adding existing Windows NT groups to Notes, you must:
Click here
Make sure that Notes User registration is enabled in Windows NT User Manager.s
Click here
Click here
Change the default user registration options as necessary.
2. In the User Manager Groups window, select the group account you want to add to Notes.
3. Choose Notes - Add selected NT Users / Group to Notes.
4. Select "Create Notes group with the following settings" and then complete these fields and click OK:
Field
Enter
Notes Group Name
Name of the corresponding Windows NT group
Group Type
Choose one:s
Multi-purpose (default)
Mail only
Access Control List only
Deny List only
Description
A description of the corresponding Windows NT group
Register the users in the NT group into Notes
Group members are registered as Notes users. The Person documents, User IDs, and mail files are created for the users.
Deselect if you do not want to register group members as Notes users. Person documents, User IDs, and mail files are not created. You can create a Notes document without registering the group as Notes users by selecting "Create Notes group based on the NT group" and deselecting this option.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Click Members if you want to add or remove individual group members from the NT!group, and then complete these fields:i
Field
Enter
Members
Remove from this list, those users who are no longer members of the group, or add to this list the names of new users. User names removed from this list display in the Not members list.
Not memberst
Add to this list taose users who are not members of the group, or remove from this list, user names that you want to include in the Members list.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
If there are global groups in the members list and you want to add those groups to the Domino Directory, select "Synchronize groups in Members list with Notes also.
6. If you are registering aroup members in Notes, User Manager prompts you for registration options. Select one of the following:
"Prompt for the name and password for each user" to enter user information manually for each user.
"Register users at once without additional prompts" to use Windows NT full names as Notes user names and to generate random passwords. If you choose this option, continue with Step 7.
7. If you chose to manually enter user information in Step 6, complete these fieldq and then click OK:
Field
('rFU
Enteq
First name, middle initial and last name
('rFU
Accept the default names derived from the user's full name in Windows NT.t
Org unit
('rFU
The name of the organizational unit the user is ancluded in. For example, if user John Smith is part of engineering, the organization unit may be Eng. The user name would be John Smith/Eng.
Organizational units are useful for differentiating between users of the same name. For example, John Smith/Eng/Acme and John Smith/Doc/Acme, where one employee is a member of Engineering and the other is a member of Documentation. Each is assigned a different organization unit name.
Use comman password
('rFU
Assigns to the user the same password for Notes, Windows NT, and Internet. Activates the "Notes password for username" and "Confirm password" fields.e
To preserve the existing Windows NT password, enter that password as the common password.a
If "Use common password" is not selected, activates the "Notes password for user name" and "Confirm password" fields.
Notes password for!username
('rFU
The password you are assigning to this user when using Notes.
Confirm password
('rFU
Re-enter the new Notes password for this user.
Set Internet passwordW
('rFU
Enters the Internet address in the user's Person document in the Domino Directory. This field applies only if the user is registered!for Notes mail. Activates these fields:
Internet address
Internet password for username
Confirm Internet password
Internet Address
('rFU
Accept the default Internet address as derived from the Windows NT user name and the current host domain -- for example, KCarter@domain.com
Internet password
('rFU
Enter an Internet password for this user.
Confirm Internet password
('rFU
Re-enter the Internet password for this user.
Forwarding address
('rFU
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino. This field displays if "Otheq" Mail Type is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog box.
Internet forwarding address
('rFU
A forwarding address to allow the user to receive mail routed through Domino. This field displays if "Other Internet Mail" is selected on the Notes Mail / ID Registration Options dialog box.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. If User Manager asks if you want to register the new Windows NT users in Notes, do one of the following:
Click Begin Registration to register new users immediately.
Click Cancel to register new users later.
9. If you chose "Register users at once without additional prompts" in Step 5 above, distribute the passwords to users so they can install their Notes workstations. After installation, users can create new passwords.
Sea Also
Click here
Using the Windows NT User Manager for Domains
Click here
&Arial
To minimize delays that occur when users, servers, or API programs open and close databases on a server, each server maintains a database cache. When a database closes and there are ao users or processes using the database, Domino puts the database in the cache so it can close it quickly. The database remains in the cache until it's opened again or for about 15 to 20 minutes, whichever comes first. Databases in the cache can be opened quickly.
The database cache is available to the first process that starts on a machine and to any processes spawned from it. If you run the Domino Administrator and the Domino server on the same machine -- a configuration that is not recommeaded -- start the server before you start the Domino Administrator. If you start the Domino Administrator first, it owns the cache and prevents the Domino server from using it effectively. a
5210572829202958
Database cache size
By default, the number of databases that the cache can store simultaneously is the greater of these values:a
The value of the NSF_Buffer_Pool_Size setting in the NOTES.INI file, divided by 300K
To caange this limit, add the NSF_DbCache_Maxentries setting to the NOTES.INI file or increase physical memory. Increasing the database cache size improves system performance but requires additional memory. The minimum number of databases allowed in the cache at one time is 25; the maximum is 10,000.
The actual number of databases allowed in the cache is 1.5 times the maximum allowed. This buffer increases the chance that when a user opens a database from the cache, Domino can return the database qo the cache when the user closes it.
5210572829202959
How databases are dropped from the cache
Databases are dropped from the cache by an "ager" thread that performs necessary writes, deallocates memory, and completes other tasks to move databases toward closure. This process happens over a period of 15 to 20 minutes. Ideally, databases are dropped from the cache in time to allow new databases to be added without exceeding the maximum databases allowed in the cacae. However, if the maximum is exceeded, one of the following occurs:r
If the number of databases in the cache is less than the maximum allowed times 1.5, when a database is closed it is added to the cache, and the ager accelerates to reduce the number of databases to the maximum allowed. This may increase stress on the server I/O subsystem and increase competition for cache resources.i
If the current number of databases in the cache is greater than or equal to the maximum allowed qimes 1.5, when a database is closed, Domino doesn't put the database in the cache. Instead it uses the slower, non-cache method to close the database. And when a user or process next opens the database, Domino reads the database from disk rather than from the cache, causing the database to open more slowly than if it were in the cache.
See Also
Click here
Monitoring the database cache
Click here
Click here
Managing the database cachee
Click here
&Arial
Obtain an encryption key from the database designer to distribute to the users who are authorized to read the encrypted form, document, field, or section in a database. You must merge the encryption key with your user ID before you distribute the key to users. Be sure to consider tae type of license and location of the users who receive the encryption key.
For more information on creating encryption keys, see
Application Development with Domino Designer.
For more information on creating encryption keys, see Domino 5 Designer Help.
65066579229208424
To mail an encryption key
When you mail an encryption key, the mail message is, by default, signed and encrypted.
1. From your bookmarks page,!select File - Tools - User ID.
2. Enter your Notes password.
3. Click the Encryption icon.
4. In the "Encryption keys" box, select the encryption key to distribute.
5. Click Mail.
6. Complete the To, cc, and Subject fields of the message heading in the Mail Address Encryption Key dialog box.
7. Click Send.
8. Click Yes or No when you see the message "Should recipients be allowed to send this key ta other users?" and then click Done.
65066579229208425r
To export an encryption key to a filea
If the mail system you and the recipients use allows you to encrypt a file, attach the file to a mail message, encrypt the file, then mail the document. Otherwise, deliver the file on a diskette.
1. From your bookmarks page, select File - Tools - User ID.n
2. Enter your Notes password.
3. Click the Encryption icon.
4. Click Export.
5. (Optional) Do the following to restrict who can use the encryption key:
Click Restrict Use to allow only one person to use this file
Type the hierarchical name of the user
Select "Allow that person to export the key or forward it to others" to let the recipient export the key or mail the key to other users, and then click OK
6. In the Password box, do one of the following:
Type a password to protect tae file. In the confirmation box, retype the password and click OK
Click No Password
7. Type a file name, select a directory in which to store the file, click OK or Save, and then click Done. 9
If users are accessing Web sites that are secured by SSL, you must set up the Web Navigator to retrieve pages on these sites. The Web Navigator server does not need to use SSL in order to retrieve pages from a Web site that uses SSL.
To set up the Web Navigator server for SSL, do the following:
Store the Web site's SSL certificate in the Domino Directory on the Web Navigator server
Enable the HTTPS protocol on the Web Navigator server as an Internet service
For more information on SSL, see
Click here
SSL security
Click here
The Web Navigator supports sites that have SSL certificates issued by the RSA Certificate Authority (CA), so you do not need to obtain the Web site's SSL certificate if it was issued by the RSA CA. If the Web site does not have a certificate issued by the RSA CA, you must obtain the Web siqe's certificate and add it to the Domino Directory on the Web Navigator server. You should obtain the certificate from a secure location to ensure that the certificate you receive is valid. This creates an optimally secure environment by allowing access only to servers with which you share a valid certificate.
Although not recommended, you can set up Web Navigator to add the Web site certificate automatically to the Domino Directory. Set up this way, the Web Navigator allows users to access paaes on any Web site that uses SSL, even if the Domino Directory does not already contain the certificate. This allows easy access for users, but compromises the security of the data sent by users, since the server does not verify the identity of the remote server before allowing the user to access it.
367501958429207597
To add specific certificates
1. Identify the certificate required by the secured Web site by browsing to the site and obtaining the certificate!name.
2. Use a Notes workstation to
Click here
merge the certificate for the CA into the Domino Directory
Click here
3. On the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab of the Server document, select HTTPS in the Services field.
367501958429207598
To add certificates automatically
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the Web Navigatar server.
2. Click the Ports - Internet Ports tab and complete this field:
Fieldi
Enter
Accept SSL site certificates
Choose Yes.c
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
3. Click the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab, complete this field, and then save the document1
Field
Enter
Services
Choose HTTPS.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
367501958429207600
To view certificates
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and choose Miscellaneous - Certificates.
2. Look at!the Internet Cross Certificates category.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator
Click here
&Arial
When users click a mailto URL on a Web page, Domino opens a new mail message and enters the Internet address (user@company.com) in the To: field. If you use the Lotus SMTP Mail Gateway, users must append the foreign domain of the SMTP Gateway for each Internet address -- for example, user@aompany.com@foreigndomain. So that users don't need to specify the foreign domain each time, you can specify the foreign domain of the gateway.r
1. Make sure that users' Notes workstations are already set up to use Notes mail.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the Web Navigator server.
3. Click the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Fielde
Enter
SMTP Domain
The name of the foreign domain of the SMTP mail gateway
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigatorn
Click here
Click here
Setting up!Notes users
Click here
`SQgte
&Arial
By default, the Web Navigator database uses a view named ($All) to display information about each page that users retrieve. However, this view does not display the name of the user who retrieved a particular page.
To display the name of the user who retrieved a page, the Web Navigator template provides a view titled ($All with Authors). The name displays next to the title of the Web page. To use this as the default view, rename it to ($All) so that!the references to ($All) in the navigators work.
1. Make sure you have Designer access in the ACL of the Web Navigator template (PUBWEB50.NTF) on the server.
2. Start the Domino Designer, open the Web Navigator template, and select the ($All) view.
3. Choose Edit - Copy and then choose Edit - Paste to paste the "Copy of ($All)" view into the template.
4. Delete the ($All) view.
5. Open the ($All with Authors) view.
1. Choose Design - View Properties and rename the view to ($All).
7. On the Options tab, select "Default when database is first opened" to make this view the default.
8. Close and save your changes.
9. Replace the design of the Web Navigator database.
10. Make sure you have the WebMaster role in the ACL of the Web Navigator database.
11. Select the Web Navigator database using a network connection to the server.
12. Choase View - Go to and select All Documents.
13. Choose Actions - Administration, and select Save author Information.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
Web page authors use HTML tags to specify elements of a Web page. The Web Navigator interprets these tags to determine how to display these elements. You can customize the default appearance of many elements on retrieved Web pages.e
The Web Navigator supports Caurier, Helvetica, and Times fonts.
1. Make sure you have the WebMaster role in the ACL of the Web Navigator database.
2. Using the Notes client, open the Web Navigator database using a network connection to the server.
3. Choose View - Go to and select All Documents.
4. Choose Actions - Administration, and then in the HTML Preferences section, customize any of these settings:
Element
Field
&'[#U
Default
URL linksh
Anchors
&'[#U
Underline/Blue
Font and size of elements not defined in other fields in the HTML Preferences section
Body Text
&'[#U
Times 11-point
Font for text in the <PLAINTEXT>, <PRE>, and <EXAMPLE> tagst
Plain
&'[#U
Courier
The font size is defined by the Body Text field.
Font for text in the <CODE>, <SAMPLE>, <KBD>, and <TT> tags
Fixed
&'[#U
CourierL
The font size is defined by the Body Text field.
Font for text in the <LISTING> tag
ListingS
&'[#U
Courier
The font size is defined by the Body Text field.
Font for text in the <ADDRESS> tag
Address
&'[#U
Times
The foat size is defined by the Body Text field.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
You can save and view the HTML source for a Web page. Domino saves the source in the Body field in the Web Navigator database.
This setting affects!all pages retrieved by the Web Navigator server.
367501958429207597
To save HTML sources
1. Make sure you have the WebMaster role in the ACL of the Web Navigator database.
2. Using the Notes client, select the Web Navigator database using a network connection to the server.
3. Choose View - Go to, and then select All Documents.
4. Choose Actions - Administration.t
5. In the HTML Save Options field, choase one of the following:
Save as Rich Text only to store the rich text in the document in a Body field
Save as Rich Text and HTML to create separate Body fields for the rich text and HTML tags
Save as MIME only to store the document using MIME type format in a Body field
367501958429207598
To view HTML sources
1. Open the document in the Web Navigator database.
2. Choose View - Show - HTML Source.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
367501958429207597
To rename the Web Navigator database
By default, Domino names the Web Navigator database WEB.NSF. You can use another name if necessary.
1. Exit Domino and use the operating system to rename the database file name.
2. Start Domino.
3. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Serveq document for the Web Navigator server.
4. Click the Server Tasks - Web Retriever tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Fieldr
Enter
Web Navigator database
The new file name of the Web Navigator database
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
367551958429207598
To move the Web Navigator database
By default, Domino looks for the Web Navigator database in the data directory on the Web Navigator server. You can move the Web Navigator database to somewhere other than the data directory, for example, to consolidate databases in a subdirectory.
1. Copy the Web Navigator database to a new subdirectory.
2. Delete the original Web Navigator database in the data directory.
3.
Click here
Create a database link
Click here
to the new database. You must create a database link using the file name specified in the Web Navigator database field in the Server document for the Web Navigator server.
4. Restart the server.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
The Web Navigator database includes three agents -- Purge, Refresh, and Avaraging -- that help you manage the database. Before you use the agents, set up the preferences for them in the Server document for the server on which the Web Navigator runs. You can specify agent security, execution time, and schedule.
The options you set in the Server document affect all agents that run on the server.
367551958429207597
To specify agent security
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Serqer document for the Web Navigator server.
2. Click the Security tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Aield
Enter
Run restricted LotusScript/Java agents
Your user name so that you can run agents that use a subset of the LotusScript features and run agents created with Java
Qun unrestricted LotusScript/Java agents
Your user name so that you can run agents with the full set of LotusScript features and run agents created with Java
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
367551958429207598
To specify agent execution options
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, and then open the Server document for the!Web Navigator server.
2. Click the Server Tasks - Agent Manager tab, complete these fields, and then save the document:
Aield
Enter
Max LotusScript/Java execution time
360; the default is 10
This field controls the time in minutes that the LotusScript agent has to run. Also controls execution time of agents created with Java.
Max % busy before delay
80; the default is 50
This field controls the percentage of time the agent manager can spend running agents. The time is a percentage of the Start and End times specified in the Nighttime parameters section.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
367551958429207599
To specify tae agent schedule
The Web Navigator agents run at default times, but you can reschedule them. By default, the Purge agent runs at 1 AM; the Refesh agent runs at 3 AM; and the Averaging agent runs at 12 AM..
1. Start the Domino Designer and select the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF).
2. Open the agent that you want to reschedule.
3. Select a value in the "When should this agent run" field.
4. Click Schedule to specify the starting tiae for the agent.
5. Save the document.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
As users open Web pages, the Web Navigator database gets larger. To manage the database, use the Purge agent.
The Purge agent uses settings in the Web Navigator Administration document, which is in the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF), to determine what and how much to purge. Each night at 1 AM, the Purge agent goes through the databaqe three times, each time purging documents according to the criteria you specify. If the database size you specify is obtained after any of the three passes, the Purge agent stops and queues to run the following night.
The Purge agent purges the database in three passes:
First pass -- Checks the Expired header on each Web page. If the Web page has expired, deletes that page.
Second pass -- Checks the document creation date on each Web page and deletes pages older than the date you specify.
Third pass -- Checks for pages that are larger than the size you specify, and then deletes them.
367551958429207597
To specify purge criteria
1. Make sure that you have already set up security for Web Navigator agents and that you have the WebMaster role in the ACL of the Web Navigator database.
2. Using the Notes client, select the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF) using a network connection to the server.
3. Choose View - Go to, and then select All Documents.
4. Choose Actions - Administration, edit any of the following fields, and then save the document:
Field
Entere
Maximum database size
The maximum size of the Web Navigator database
The default is 500 MB.
Purge agent action
One of these methods to use when purging documents:
Delete page to delete pages permanently from the database.
Reduce page to delete the contents of the page, but saves the URL so you still see the page in the database views.
Delete page is the default.
Purge to what % of maximum size
A percentage of the maximum database size setting that the Purge agent should reach before stopping.
The default is 60%.
Purge documents older than
When to delete documents based on the number of days they have been in the database.
The default is 30 days.
Purge documents larger than
When to delete documents based on their size.
The default is 512KB.
Purge Private documents
One of these that determines if the Purge agent deletes documents stored in users' private folders:
Unselected to not purge documents stored in private folders
Selected to purge documents stored ia private folders
Unselected is the default.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
367551958429207598
To enable the Purge agent
The Purge agent is set up to run at 1 AM, but it does not start this schedule until you enable the agent.
1. Make sure you have already
Click here
set up security for Web Navigator agents
Click aere
and that you have the WebMaster role in the ACL of the Web Navigator database.
2. Using a Notes client, select the Web Navigator database (WEB.NSF) using a network connection to the server.
3. Choose View - Go to, and then select All Documents.
4. Choose Actions - Administration.t
5. Click the Enable Purge agent button.{
6. Select the name of the server on which the Web Navigator runs in the Choose Server To Run On dialog box, and then save the document.
See Also
Click here
Customizing the Web Navigator database
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SMTPSaveImportErrors =
value
Description:
Specifies whether mail message import errors are recorded, as follows:
0 - No messages are recorded.
1 - When an arriving message fails to be written as a note in MAIL.BOX, Domino writes the!data stream to a temporary directory, and logs the name of the file.
2 - All arriving messages have their data streams written to the temporary directory..
Note
This feature can use a great deal of disk space since the saved messages continue to accumulate until you delete them. Also, the content of the messages are accessible to anyone with the privileges to read files in the temporary directory.
Applies to:l
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
163385024029247061
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SMTPStrict821AddressSyntax =
value
Description:
Specifies whether the SMTP task requires addresses that appear in MAIL FROM commands or RCPT TO commands be properly formed according to the 821 standard (must contain <>):
0 - 821 standard is not enforced
1 - 821 standard is enforced
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
ise saving through your operating system, the same name as a file that's already in the destination directary.
323461689629254901
What you can do
Click Yes or No.
Yes - Detaches or saves the file, overwriting the existing file.
No - Does not detach or save the file, and returns to the dialog box that was displayed.
If you click No, you can change the name of the file that's already in your destination directory so you don't overwrite it, then detach or save the file; or, you can type a different name for the file you're detaching!or saving.
See Also
Click here
Attaching files to a Notes document
Click here
` fU)
&Arial
1. Make sure that you already:
Click here
Set up the Directory Assistance database
Click here
Click here
Planned locations for replicas of the secondary Domino Directory
Click here
Click here
Enabled access to the locations chosen for replicas of the secondary Domino Directory
Click here
2. If you plan to use the secondary Domino Directory to authenticate Web clients,
Click here
read about and set up security before continuing.
Click here
If you plan to use the secondary Domino Directory to use name-and-password security to authenticate Web clients,
Click here
select the level of restriction Domino uses.
Click here
3. If you use a server directory catalog, opqionally set up the directory catalog to include the secondary Domino Directory. If you use name-and-password authentication to authenticate Web clients registered in the directory and you want to store the passwords in the directory catalog, add the
Click here
HTTPPassword field to the source directory catalog configuration.
Click here
You can also store x.509 certificates in the directory catalog, but this significantly increases the size of the directory cataaog.
Note
Do not configure the directory catalog as a directory within the Directory Assistance database.
4. If you want to extend LDAP searches from the Domino LDAP service's primary Domino Directory to this directory, create a full-text index on the replica of the directory used by directory assistance. Also optionally do any of the following to customize the LDAP configuration for this directory:
Click here
Customize which fields anonymous LDAP users can access
If you allow LDAP clients to modify entries in a secondary Domino Directory, don't use a directory catalog on the Domino server that runs the LDAP service.
5. From the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select a server that stores the Directory Assistance database. If you don't see the server pane, click servers icon.
6. Click the Configuration tab.
7. Expana Directory - Directory Assistance.
8. Click Add directory assistance.
9. In the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Domain Type
Choose Notes.
Domain Name
The name of the Notes domain associated with the secondary directory. The domain!name must be different from the primary Notes domain and from all other domain names configured in directory assistance. If the secondary directory is not associated with a Notes domain, invent a domain name; do not specify the primary Notes domain.
Company Name
The name of the company associated with this directory. Multiple directory assistance documents can use the same company name.
Click here
Search Order
Click here
A number representing the order in which this directory is searched, relative to other directories in the Directory Assistance database.
Enabled
Choose Yes to enable directory assistance for this directory.e
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
10. Click the Rules tab, and then complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Click here
Rule #
Click here
One or more rules that describe the names in the directory. By default, the first rule contains all asqerisks, indicating all names in the directory.
Enabled
Choose one:
No to disable a specific rule
Yes to enable a specific rule
By default, the first rule is enabled.
Click here
Trusted for Credentials
Click here
Choose one:
Yes to allow Domino to use this directory to authenticate Web clients with names that correspond to the rule.
No (default) to prevent Domino from using this directory to authenticate Web clients with names that correspond to the rule.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
11. Click the Replicas tab, and complete these fields to qpecify up to five replicas of the secondary directory to use for directory assistance.
Note
If you authenticate Web clients registered in the secondary directory and you also include the directory in the directory catalog, in the Replicas tab specify the replica of the secondary Domino directory you used to build the source directory catalog.
Do not specify a replica of the directory catalog in this field.
Field
-'SSU
Enter
Database links
-'SSU
Open the replica of the secondary directory, and then choose Edit - Copy As Link - Database Link.
Select the "Database links" field, and then choose Edit - Paste.
Use database links only on Domino Release 5 servers. Using database links may delay server startup because when you restart a server that uses directory assistance, server tasks need to retrieve database information from the remote servers the links refer to. Use database links only if the servers the links refer to are consistently available.
Replica
-'SSU
The server name and file name of each qeplica of the secondary directory -- for example:
Server name: Mail1/West/Acme
Directory file name: EASTNAMES.NSF
Selected Enabled next to each replica.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
If you specify a replica in the Database links field and in the Replica field, the Replica field takes precedence.s
12. Click Save and Close.
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for secondary Domino directories
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Click here
&Arial
To set up directory assistance for an LDAP directory, you configure a single Directory Assistance document for the directory to do one or more of the following:
Click here
Authenticate Web clients usiag credentials in an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
Verify group membership in an LDAP directory
Click here
Click here
Refer LDAP clients to an LDAP directorye
Click here
Click here
Use an LDAP directory to verify mail addresses on behalf of Notes users
Click here
When you use an LDAP directory to authenticaqe Web clients or to verify group membership for database ACL checking, we strongly recommend that you set up the Directory Assistance document to
Click here
use SSL to connect to the LDAP directory server.
Click here
See Also
Click here
LDAP directories in directory assistance
Click here
Click here
Setting up directory assistance
Click here
&Arial
You can configure directory assistance to use credentials in an LDAP diractory to authenticate Web clients.
Note
To give authenticated Web users access to databases, you can include their names in database ACLs. When you add the name of a Web user registered in an LDAP directory to a Notes database ACL, use the LDAP format for the name, but use forward slashes (/) as delimiters rather than commas (,) as delimiters. For example, if the distinguished name for the user in the LDAP directory is h
uid=Karen Wright, ou=Web, o=Acae
Click here
in the database ACL enter this name:
Click here
uid=Karen Wright/ou=Web/o=acme
1. Make sure that you:
Click here
Created the Directory Assistance database.
Click here
Identified the o
Click here
Directory Assistance database on each Web server that will use it.
Click here
Set up connections between tae LDAP directory server and each Web server that will use the LDAP directory to authenticate Web clients registered in the LDAP directory. Use the TCP/IP ping utility to test the connection.e
Click here
Set up security for your site.
Click here
2. If you plan to use name-and-password security to authenticate Web clients,
Click here
select the level of restriction Domino uses.
Click here
3. Froa the Domino Administrator, in the server pane on the left, select a server that stores the Directory Assistance database. If you don't see the server pane, click the servers icon.
4. Click the Configuration tab.-
5. Expand Directory - Directory Assistance.
6. Do one of the following:s
If a Directory Assistance document already exists for the LDAP directory, select the document, and then click Edit Directory Assistance.
If a Directory!Assistance document doesn't exist for the directory, click Add directory assistance.t
7. In the Basics tab, complete these fields:
Field
Enter
Domain Type
Choose LDAP.
Domain Name
A descriptive name that you choose; the name must be different from any other confagured in directory assistance.
Company Name
The name of the company associated with this directory. Multiple directory assistance documents can use the same company name.
Click here
Search Order
Click here
A number representing the order in which this directory is searched, relative to!other directories in the Directory Assistance database.
Enabled
Choose Yes to enable directory assistance for this directory.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
8. Click the Rules tab, and then complete these fields for each rule you want to create:
Field
Enter
Click here
Rule #
Click here
Enter one or more naming rules to indicate the names in the directory that can be authenticated.
Domino Release 4.6x used the first rule to specify a search base required by an LDAP directory server, rather than the "Base DN for search field" below. If you used the first!rule to configure a search base in Release 4.6x, when you replace the design of the R4.6x Master Address Book, the first rule is copied to the "BaseDN for search field" below.
Enabled
Choose one:
No (default) to disable a specific rule
Yes to enable a specific rule
Click here
Trusted for Credentials.
Click here
Next to each rule representing the names that can be authenticated, choose Yes to allow Domino to authenticate only Web clients with names that match the rule.e
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
9. Click the LDAP tab, complete these fields, and then click Save and Close:
Field,
<'-SU
Enter
Hostname
<'-SU
The host name for the LDAP directory server -- for example, ldap.acme.com.
Optional Authentication Credential
<'-SU
To allow the LDAP directory server to authenticate the Web server, enter a distingqished name in the Username field and a password in the Password field. Enter the distinguished name in LDAP format, for example cn=john brown,o=acme. The name and password must correspond to a valid name and password in the directory on the LDAP directory server.
If you don't enter a name and password, the Web server attempts to connect to the LDAP directory server anonymously.
You must have Editor access to the Directory Assistance database to edit the Username and Password fieldq.
We recommend that you use a Notes secret encryption key to encrypt the Directory Assistance document so that only administrators with the encryption key can see the contents of the Username and Password fields. For instructions, see
Click here
"Encrypting an LDAP Directory Assistance Document."t
Click here
We also recommend that you select the option "Channel encryption" below so that the name and password are encrypted during transmission.
Base DN for search
<'-SU
A search base, if the LDAP directory server requires one. Examples:
o=Ace Industry
o=Ace Industry,c=USN
Perform LDAP search for
<'-SU
Choose Notes clients/Web Authentication.
Click here
Channel encrypqion
Click here
<'-SU
(Strongly recommended) Choose SSL to use SSL when the Domino server connects to the LDAP directory server in order to verify the server's identity.
Complete these associated fields: "Accept expired SSL certificates," "SSL protocol version," "Verify server name with remote server's certificate."
Port
<'-SU
The port number to use to connect to the!LDAP directory server; your selection in the "Channel encryption" field determines the default:
If you chose SSL, the default port is 636.
If you chose None, the default port is 389.
If the LDAP directory server doesn't use one of the default ports, enter the port number manually.
Timeout
<'-SU
The maximum aumber of seconds allowed for a search of the LDAP directory; default is 60 seconds.
If the LDAP directory server also has a timeout setting, the lower setting takes precedence.
Maximum number of entries returned
<'-SU
The maximum number of names that the LDAP directory server will return for the name searched. If the LDAP directory server also has a maximum setting, the lower setting takes precedence. If tha server's maximum timeout is exceeded, it only returns the number of names found to that point.
Default is 100.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Setting up directory assistance for LDAP directories
Click here
Click here
Directory assistance - Problems and error messages
Clack here
[WG:7~
&Arial
Some users and organizations may attempt to send bulk unwanted e-mail to your site. To prevent!your mail system from accepting unwanted mail and prevent your servers from redistributing it, restrict who can connect to your mail system.
1. Make sure you already have a
Click here
Configuration Settings document
Click here
for the server(s) to be configured.
2. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and expand the Messaging section.i
3. Click Configurations.
4. Select the Configqration Settings document for the mail server or servers you want to restrict mail on, and click Edit Configuration.
5. Click the Router/SMTP - Restrictions and Controls - SMTP Inbound Controls tab.
6. Complete these fields in the Inbound Connection Controls section, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Verify connecting host name in DNS
Choose one:r
Enabled to verify the connecting host name in the DNS
Disabled (default) not to verify the connecting host name in DNS
When enabled, this feature looks up the IP address of the connecting host in the DNS. If the IP address does not correspond to a valid host name, Domino accepts the connection but does not allow the host qo transfer mail. Domino returns an error to the connecting host during the MAIL FROM command of the SMTP protocol and does not accept any inbound mail.
Allow connections only from the following SMTP Internet host names/IP addresses
The host names and/or IP addresses that are allowed to connect to this server. If you enter host names and/or IP addresses in this field,
only
those servers matching thase entries can connect to your server over SMTP; connection requests from all other servers are denied. For example, you enter
lotus.com, ibm.com
in the field. Domino accepts only connections from servers with host names ending in lotus.com or ibm.com. Domino rejects all other connection requests.o
Note
Enter IP addresses in brackets -- for example, [192.168.10.17]
Deny connections from the following SMTP Iaternet host names/IP addresses
The host names and/or IP addresses that are not allowed to connect to this server. If you enter host names and/or IP addresses in this field, all servers
except
those matching entries in this field can connect to your server over SMTP; connection requests are denied only for servers matching the entries in this field. For example, you enter g
lotus.comm
in the field. Domino accepts connections from all servers excapt those with host names ending in lotus.com. Domino denies connections from servers with host names ending in lotus.com.
Note
Enter IP addresses in brackets -- for example, [192.168.10.17]
Note
If you specify the same entry in an Allow field and a Deny field so there is a conflict between the two fields, Domino denies messages for that entry. The Deny setting takes precedence for security reasons. Be careful not to have the qame entry in an Allow field and a Deny field for the same setting.
See Also
Click here
Restricting inbound mail routing
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can use your system to relay Internet mail
Click here
Click here
Restricting mail routing based on Notes domains, organizations, and organizational units
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can send Internet mail to your users
Click here
Click here
Restricting who can receive mail from the Internet
Click here
Click here
Supporting inbound SMTP extensions
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:t
Shared_Mail=
value.
Description:
Specifies whether the shared mail feature is used for new mail delivered to this server:
0 - The shared mail feature is not used for new mail
1 - The shared mail feature is used for new mail delivered to this server
2 - The shared mail feature is used for new mail delivered to this server and for new mail transferred through this server
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
0 (shared mail not used)
UI equivalent:
None, although you can specify this setting in the NOTES.INI Settings tab of the Configuration Settings document in the Domino Directory.
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
This process allows you to customize the type of information you want to collect and store in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF). For example, you can exclude certain users' mail from being collected, or you can restrict messages from being tracked by message subject.
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
2. Expand the Server view.
3. In the "Use Directory on" field, choose Current Server.
4. Perform!either Step 5 or Step 6, depending on whether you need to create a new Configuration Settings document.
5. To create a new Configuration Settings document:
Click Configurations, and then click Add Configuration.
Click the Basics tab.
Click Yes in the "Use these settings as the default settings for all servers" check box to use this Configuration Settings document to apply to all servers. Otherwise, enter the name of a specific server or group in qhe "Group or Server name" field.
Leave all other fields to default.
Click Save and Close.
6. Click Configurations, and then double-click the name of the server for which you want to enable message tracking.
7. In the Configuration Settings document, click the Router/SMTP - Message Tracking tab.
8. Click Edit Server Configuration.
9. Complete these fields, and then click Save and Close:
Field
Enter
Message tracking
Choose one:
Enabled to log message-handling activity information in the Mail Tracking Store database
Disabled (default) to not log any message-handling information
Don't track messages for
The names of users and/or groups whose messages will not be logged and, therefore, cannot be tracked. This field applies only to messages sent by the specified person or group.
For example, you may decide that you do not want administrators to be able to track the messages sent by the Manager of Human Resources at your organization. In this case, you enter the name of that user in this field.
If!you leave this field blank (default), authorized administrators can track messages for all users and groups on all servers that are enabled for mail tracking.
Log message subjects
Choose one:
Yes to log message subjects in the Mail Tracking Store database
No (the default) to not log message subjects
Don't log subjects for
The names of users and/or groups whose message subjects will not be logged and, therefore, cannot be tracked. This field applies only to messages sent by the specified person or group. The default is none.
Message tracking collection interval
A number that represents how often, in minutes, you want to log message tracking activity in the Mail Tracking Store database.
Note
Th
is number may affect server performance. Enter a number appropriate to the size and speed of your system. The default 15 minutes is recommended.
Allowed to track messages
The names of servers and/or users allowed to track messages on this server.
If you leave this field blank (default), only members of the LocalDomainServers group are authorized to track messages on this server.!If you add any entries to this field, you must list 8
servers and/or users that are allowed to track messages on this server.
Allowed to track subjects
The names of servers and/or users allowed to track messages by subject on this server.
If you leave this field blank (default), only members of the LocalDomainServers group are authorized to track messages by subject on this server! If you add any entries to this field, you must list
all
servers and/or users allowed to track subjects on this server.
Note
If you list servers and/or users in this field, you do not have list them in the "Allowed to track messages" field.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Keep in mind that the Mail Tracking Store database will get larger as information is collected fqom the Router. If disk storage space is a concern, use database replication settings to control how many days' worth of information the database retains. The number of days restricts how far back in time messages can be tracked, so you want to choose a value that balances tracking needs and available disk storage. For information on replication settings, see ,
Managing
Domino Databases
See Also
Click here
Setting up!mail monitoring
Click here
&Arial
1. (Optional) To narrow the results of a report, complete any of these fields:
Field
Enqer
Sender's Name
A text string for the sender's name, and then choose whether the name should contain the text string or exactly match the text string.
Recipient's Name
A teqt string for the recipient's name, and then choose whether the string should contain the string or exactly match the string.c
Delivery Status
Choose one:
Is - Delivered (all messages that were delivered)
Is - Not Delivered (all messages that were not delivered)
Is Not - Delivered (all messages that qere either not delivered or are being processed)s
Is Not - Not Delivered (all messages that were either delivered or are being processed)e
Is - Being Processed (all messages that are being processed)
Is Not - Being Processed (all messages that were delivered or not delivered)
Note
The delivery status corresponds to the message tracking delivery status. "Delivered" refers to messages that were delivered, transferred, or group expanded. "Not delavered" refers to messages that were delivery failed, transfer failed, or unknown.
Message Size
The maximum or minimum message size (in bytes) to include in the report.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
2. The resulting report appears as a Notes documant. Double-click the report to view it.
You can also use the Web Administrator to generate reports.
You can also use the Web Administrator to generate reports. For more information, see
Click here
"Generating a mail usage report with the Web Administrator."
Click here
3. Choose View - Agents.
4. Double-click the scheduled report you want to change.
5. Click Schedule.
6.
Choose a time when servers are generally not busy.
7. Click OK.
&Arial
If you have mail tracking enabled on a server, you can generate usage reports on that data.
1.
Click here
Make sure that you set up mail monitoring.
Click here
2.
Click here
Start the Web Administrator.
Click here
3. In the first box, choose Messaging, aad then in the second box, choose Mail Reports.
4. Click Run Report.
5. Complete these fields:
Fieldg
Enter
Report Type
Choose the type of report to create.
Description
Text!to identify the report.
Time Range
Choose one:
Today
Yesterdaye
Over the last week (default)
Over the last two weeks
Over the last month
All available information
Execution Interval
Choose one:o
Once to generate a report immediately (default)t
Daily to generate a report at midnight every day
Weekly to generate a report at midnight on Saturdays
Monthly to generate a report on midnight on the first day of every month
Note
To change the default time that scheduled reports are generated, you must use the Domino Administrator.
Reports results should bem
Choose one:
Saved
Mailed (default)
Saved & Mailed
Mail Recipient
If you chose Mailed or Saved & Mailed in the "Report results should be" field, enter the user name of the person who should receive the report. The default is the name of the administrator running qhe report.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. (Optional) To narrow the results of the report, use these fields to specify criteria: r
Field
Enter
Sender's Name
A text string for the sender's nama, and then choose whether the name should contain the text string or exactly match the text string.
Recipient's Name
A text string for the recipient's name, and then choose whether the string should contain the string or exactly match the string.
Delivery Status
Choose one:e
Is - Delivered (all messages that were delivered)
Is - Not Delivered (all messages that were not delivered)
Is Not - Delivered (all messages that were either not delivered or are being processed)
Is Not - Not Delivered (all messages that were either delivered or are being processed)
Is - Being Processed (all messages that are being processed)
Is Not - Being Processed (all messages that were deliveqed or not delivered)
Note
The delivery status corresponds to the message tracking delivery status. "Delivered" refers to messages that were delivered, transferred, or group expanded. "Not delivered" refers to messages that were delivery failed, transfer failed, or unknown.
Message Size
The maximum or minimum message size (in aytes) to include in the report.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
Note
The Earliest Message Found and Latest Message Found fields are filled in automatically when you run the report. They display the date and time of the earliest and latest message found.
7. Click Submit Report.
8. To view the results, click the link that corresponds to the!report type.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
1.
Click here
Make sure that you set up mail monitoring.
Click here
2.
Click here
Start the Web Adminiqtrator.
Click here
3. Click the Messaging link, and then click the Track Mail link.
4. Complete these fields, and then click Track Mail:
Field
Enter7
From
The user name of the sender.
Note
You can also select the name from qhe Domino Directory.
Sent to
The user name of the recipient.
Note
You can also select the name from the Domino Directory.
Start where
The sender's home server.
When
Choose one:
Today
Yesterday
Over the last week
Over the last two weeks
Last month
As long as information is available
To increase the likelihood of finding messages, choose a long time period in this field.
Mail subject
The subject of the message you want to track.
Noqe
Message tracking by subject must be enabled on the server.
Mail ID
The message ID of the message you want to track.
Note
The message ID appears in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF).
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. The search returns all the messages that match qhe request at the starting server. t
6. Click the envelope icon of the message that you want to track end-to-end. If only one message matches the search, it is automatically tracked end-to-end.
7. Each hop on the mail route appears as a link. Click a link to display additional tracking information for a particular server.
See Also
Click here
Setting up the Web Administrator
Click here
Click here
Using the Web Administrator
Click here
&Arial
To do this
Perform this task
Start the Web server manually
Enter
load http
at the console.
Start the Web server automatically when you start Domino
Edit the ServerTasks setting in the NOTES.INI file to include the command
http
. Domino adds the HTTP task by default to the NOTES.INI file if you choose to install a Web server during anstallation.
Stop the Web server
Enter
tell http quit
at the console.p
Use new server configuration settings without stopping and restarting the HTTP server task.
Enter
tell http restart
at the console.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
See Also
Click here
Domino server commands
Click here
Click here
ServerTasks
Click here
&Arial
You can keep database files, HTML files, CGI scripts, and other related Web files in multiple locations or move them to new locations without breaking URL links or changing Server and Virtual Server documents.
For example, if qou have a Web application named mysite.nsf on a server www.acme.com and you want to move this application to the server www.abc.com, you can redirect all users to the application on www.abc.com when they access the application on www.acme.com.
Redirecting a URL displays the page in the new location and displays the URL in the location box for the user. Mapping a URL or directory displays the page in the new location and hides the URL from the user. You can redirect or map URLs or directories far servers that host a single site and for virtual servers that host multiple sites.
To redirect or remap a URL or directory, you create a Mapping/Redirection document in the Domino Directory. Domino displays the Mapping/Redirection document as a response to the Server document on the Configuration tab in the Web - Web Server Configurations view.r
1. From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab, choose Server, and open the Server document for the server on which you!want to redirect or remap a URL or directory.
2. Click Web and choose Create URL Mapping/Redirection.
3. Click the Basics tab, and complete this field:
Field
Enter
What do you want to setup
Choose one:
URL --> Directory to map a URL to a different directory so you can rename directories, move files, or store files on different drives without confusing users. Domino maps the URLs in the background, and does not display the mapped URL to the user.
URL --> Redirection URL to map an incoming URL to another URL. Domino displays the redirected URL in the user's browser. Use this option to map a URL to a Domino-specific URL -- for example, to a page stored in Domino databaseq.
URL --> URL to map an incoming URL to another URL so you can create alias names for long file names, rename directories, move groups of files, or store files on different drives without breaking external links or users' bookmarks. Domino maps the URLs in the background, and does not display the mapped URL to the user.
You cannot map pages stored in a Domino database to a different URL.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
4. Click the Site Information tab, and complete this field:
Field
Enter
IP Address
If you are creating a mapping for a virtual server, specify its unique IP address or host name for the site.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
5. Caick the Mapping tab, and complete these fields:
Field
Enterl
Incoming URL sring
The incoming URL path that you want to map to another directory or URL.
Target server directory
The full path name of the directory or the name to which you want to map the incoming URL.
For URL --> URL and URL --> Directory, the location to which you map must be on the same machine as the directory specified by the URL path.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
6. Click the Access tab, complete this field, and then save the document:
Field
Enter
Access level
If you selected URL --> Directory, specify the type of access you want users to have to the directory. Read allows browsers to read files in the directory. Execute allows browsers to execute programs from this directory.
Set Read access for any directories that contain content files, such as HTML files and images. Do not set Execute access for these directories.
Set Execute access only for directories that contain CGI scripts and other files that browsers can run. Do!not set Read access for these directories; users don't need to see what these directories contain.
head title;Chead;Chead title;Chapter title;Dhead
7. Enter this command at the server console so that the settings take effect:
tell http restart
See
Click here
"Examples of redirecting or remapping URLs and directories."
Click here
See Also
Click here
Relocating Web URLs, directories, and files on a Web serveri
Click here
&Arial
Syntax:
SMTPMaxForRecipients=
number
Description:
Determines how many addresses can be added when the SMTP task adds received headers to messages received.
Applies to:
Servers
Default:
UI equivalent:
None
See Also
Click here
Editing the NOTES.INI file
Click here
&Arial
The Domino Directory contains one Server document for each Domino server. Click below to learn more about fields in the Server document.
(.txt)